Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign
http://www.archive.org/details/guidetostudyofunOOillibr
A GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF
The United States
of America
Representative Books Reflecting the Development of
American Life and Thought
Prepared under the Direction of Roy P. Basler J.
By Donald H. Mugridge and Blanche P. McCrum ( •
■tr *
GENERAL REFERENCE AND BIBLIOGRAPHY DIVISION . REFERENCE DEPARTMENT
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS • Washington: i960
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON : i960
FOR SALE BY THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS, WASHINGTON 25, D.C. PRICE $7
O/C
Contents
Page
Introduction
IX
Acknowledgments
Key to Symbols
XIII
XV
Item Nos.
CHAPTER I
Literature (i6oy-ig^)
A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607
-1763)
1-95
B. The Revolution and the New Nation
(1764-1819)
96-185
C. Nationalism, Sectionalism,
and
Schism ( 1 820-1 870)
186-682
D. The Gilded Age and After
1914)
- E. The First World War and the
(1871-
683-1152
: Great
Depression (1915-1939)
1 153-1906
F. The Second World War and the
Atomic Age (1 940-1 955)
1907-2235
\l
c
HAPTER II
Language
A. Dictionaries 2236-2241
B. Grammars and General Studies 2242-2252
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign
Languages in America 2253-2271
D. Miscellaneous 2272-2275
CHAPTER III
Literary History and Criticism
A. Anthologies and Series
B. History and Criticism
C. Periodicals
2276-2370
2371-2550
2551-2577
Item Nos.
Biography and Autobiography 2578-2844
CHAPTER IV
CHAPTER V
Periodicals and Journalism
A. Newspapers: General
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions,
Topics
C. Individual Newspapers
D. Newspapermen
E. Foreign Language Periodicals
F. The Practice of Journalism
G. Magazines: General
H. Individual Magazines
I. The Press and Society
CHAPTER VI
Geography
A. General and Physical Geography
B. Geology and Soil
C. Climate and Weather
D. Plants and Animals
E. Historical Geography and Atlases
F. Polar Exploration
CHAPTER VII
The American Indian
A. General Works
B. Archaeology and Prehistory
C. Tribes and Tribal Groups
D. Religion, Art, and Folklore
E. The White Advance
F. The Twentieth Century
and
2845-2850
2851-2865
2866-2876
2877-2894
2895-2899
2900-2912
2913-2919
2920-2926
2927-2932
2933-294i
2942-2947
2948-2953
2954-2966
2967-2976
2977-2981
2982-2989
2990-2997
2998-3014
3015-3021
3022-3037
3038-3043
III
IV / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
hem Nos.
CHAPTER VIII
General History
A. Historiography
B. General Works
C. The New World
D. The Thirteen Colonies
E. The American Revolution
F. Federal America (1783-18 15)
G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60)
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Recon
struction (to 1877)
I. Grant to McKinley (1869-1901)
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson
(1901-21)
K. Since 1920
3044-3069
3070-3152
3153-3175
3176-3236
3237-3272
3273-33"
33I2-3358
3359-3417
34 1 8-345 1
3452-3474
3475-35oob
CHAPTER IX
Diplomatic History and
Foreign Relations
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. General Works
Aii. Period Studies
Aiii. Personal Records
Aiv. The British Empire
Av. Russia
Avi. Other European Nations
Avii. Latin America: General
Aviii. Latin America: Individual
Nations
Aix. Asia
B. Foreign Relations
Bi. Administration
Bii. Democratic Control
Biii. Policies
Biv. Economic Policy
3501-3526
3527-3542
3543-3549
355°"3559
3560-3568
3569-3573
3574-3579
3580-3587
3588-3597
3598-3608
3609-3616
3617-3635
3636-3642
CHAPTER X
Military History and the Armed Forces
A. General Works
B. The Army
3643-3652
3653-3665
Item Nos.
C. The Navy 3666-3677
D. Wars of the United States
Di. The Revolution 3678-3684
Dii. 1798-1848 3685-3689
Diii. The Civil War 3690-3706
Div. The Spanish-American War 3707-3708
Dv. World War I 37°9_37I6
Dvi. World War II 37I7~3727
CHAPTER XI
Intellectual History
A. General Works 3728-3737
B. Periods 3738-3749
C. Topics 3750-3762
D. Localities 3763-3767
E. International Influences: General 3768-3772
F. International Influences: By Country 3773-3780
CHAPTER XII
Local History: Regions, States, Cities
A. General Works, including series 3781-4025
B. New England: General 4026-4031
C. New England: Local 4032-4042
D. The Middle Atlantic States 4043-4065
E. The South: General 4066-4084
F. The South Adantic States: Local 4085-4096
G. The Old Southwest: General 4097-4098
The Old Southwest: Local 4099-4108
The Old Northwest: General 4 109-4 117
The Old Northwest: Local 41 18-4144
The Far West 4145-4150
L. The Great Plains: General 4151-4164
M. The Great Plains: Local 4165-4171
N. The Rocky Mountain Region:
General 4172-4177
O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local 4178-4185
P. The Far Southwest: General 4186-4191
Q. The Far Southwest: Local 4 192-4 199
R. California 4200-421 1
S. The Pacific Northwest: General 4212-4214
T. The Pacific Northwest: Local
U. Overseas Possessions
CHAPTER XIII
Travel and Travelers
A. General Works 4223-4230
B. Anthologies 4231-4235
C. 50 Selected Travelers, 1 743-1 894
(chronologically arranged by the
date of their travels) 4236-4389
CHAPTER XIV
Population, Immigration, and
Minorities
A. Population 4390-4403
B. Immigration: General 4404-4417
C. Immigration: Policy 4418-4425
D. Minorities 4426-4435
E. Negroes 4436-4451
F. Jews 4452-4462
G. Orientals 4463-4469
H. North Americans 4470-4476
I. Germans 4477-4481
J. Scandinavians 4482-4487
K. Other Stocks 4488-4498
CHAPTER XV
Society
A. Some General Views 4499-4513
B. Social History: Periods 4514-4522
C. Social History: Topics 4523-4534
D. Social Thought 4535—4545
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology 4546-4558
F. The Family 4559~4573
G. Communities: General 4574-4578
H. Communities: Rural 4579—4585
I. Communities: Urban 4586-4599
J. City Planning; Housing 4600-4613
K. Social Problems; Social Work 4614-4627
L. Dependency; Social Security 4628-4638
M. Delinquency and Correction 4639-4660
CONTENTS / V
hem Nos.
hem Nos.
42 1 5-42 1 7
CHAPTER XVI
4218-4222
Communications
A. The Post Office; Express Companies 4661-4671
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone 4672-4681
C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting 4682-4698
D. Radio, Television: The Audience 4699-4705
E. Government Regulation 4706-47 11
CHAPTER XVII
Science and Technology
A. General Works
B. Particular Sciences
C. Individual Scientists
D. Science and Government
E. Invention
F. Engineering
CHAPTER XVIII
Medicine and Public Health
A. Medicine in General
B. Physicians and Surgeons
C. Psychiatry
D. Other Specialties
E. Hospitals and Nursing
F. Medical Education
G. Public Health
H. Medical Economics
CHAPTER XIX
Entertainment
4712-4730
4731-4741
4742-4760
4761-4779
4780-4792
4793-4803
4804-4817
4818-4832
4833-4840
4841-4844
4845-4854
4855-4861
4862-4881
4882-4891
4892-4896
A. General Works
B. The American Stage
Bi. History 4897-4906
Bii. Criticism 4907-4912
Biii. Particular Stage Groups,
Theaters, Movements, etc. 4913-4926
Biv. Biography: Actors and
Actresses 4927-4939
Bv. Biography: Directors,
Producers, etc. 4940-4943
VI / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Item Nos.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. History 4944-4946
Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses 4947-4951
Ciii. Biography: Actors and
Actresses 4952-4956
Civ. Biography: Directors,
Producers, etc. 4957-4963
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. Radio and Television 4964-4966
Dii. The Dance in America 4967-4972
Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque 4973-4976
Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc. 4977-4982
CHAPTER xx
Sports and Recreation
A. General
B. Community and Scholastic Activities
C. Particular Sports and Recreations
Ci. Auto-Racing and Motoring
Cii. Baseball
Ciii. Boating
Civ. Boxing
Cv. Football
Cvi. Golf and Tennis
Cvii. Horse-Racing
Cviii. Miscellaneous
D. General Field Sports
4983-4996
4997-5000
5001-5007
5008-5015
5016-5022
5023-5033
5034-5045
5046-5053
5054-5057
5058-5064
5065-5097
CHAPTER XXI
Education
A. General Works
Ai. Historical and Descriptive
Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical
B. Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. General and Historical Works
Bii. Preschool and Primary Grades
Biii. Secondary Schools
C. Colleges and Universities
Ci. General and Historical Works
Cii. Individual Institutions
D. Education of Special Groups
E. Teachers and Teaching
F. Methods and Techniques
G. Contemporary Problems and
Controversies
H. Periodicals and Yearbooks
Item Nos.
5232-5239
5240-5249
CHAPTER XXII
Philosophy and Psychology
A. Philosophy: General Works
B. Representative Philosophers
C. Psychology
CHAPTER XXIII
Religion
A. General Works
B. Period Histories
C. Church and State
D. Religious Thought; Theology
E. Religious Bodies
F. Representative Leaders
G. Church and Society
H. The Negro's Church
5250-5264
5265-5387
5388-5393
5394-5404
5405-5417
5418-5422
5423-5438
5439-5473
5474-5483
5484-5497
5498-5502
CHAPTER XXIV
Folklore, Fol\ Music, Fol^ Art
A. Legends and Tales: General 55°3-55I9
B. Legends and Tales: Local 5520-5548
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General 5549-5564
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local 5565-5584
E. Games and Dances 5585—5592
F. Folk Art and Crafts 5593-5604
5098-5 1 14
51 15-5130
CHAPTER XXV
5131-5146
Music
5147-5151
5152-5159
A. General Histories and Reference
Works
5605-5614
5 1 60-5 1 90
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special
5 191-5204
Topics
5615-5625
5205-5212
C. Localities
5626-5630
5213-5223
D. Religious Music
5631-5634
5224-5231
E. Popular Music
5635-5640
CONTENTS / VII
F. Jazz
G. Orchestras and Bands
H. Opera
I. Choirs
J. Music Education
K. Individual Musicians
Item Nos.
5641-5646
5647-5654
5655-5663
5664-5667
5668-5672
5673-5687
I. Finance: General
J. Finance: Special
K. Business: General
L. Business: Special
M. Labor: General
N. Labor: Special
Item Nos.
5965-5975
5976-6002
6003-6010
601 1-6030
6031-6042
6043-6058
CHAPTER XXVI
Art and Architecture
A. The Arts 5688-5697
B. Architecture: General 5698-5703
C. Architecture: Special 5704-5725
D. Interiors 5726-5732
E. Sculpture 5733_574°
F. Painting 574r"5759
G. Painting: Individual Artists 5760-5776
H. Prints and Photographs 5777— 57^3
I. Decorative Arts 5784—5793
}. Museums 5794-5800
K. Art and History 5801-5807
CHAPTER XXIX
Constitution and Government
A. Political Thought 6059-6072
B. Constitutional History 6073-6089
C. Constitutional Law 6090-6105
D. Civil Liberties and Rights 6106-6130
E. Government: General 6131-6139
F. The Presidency 6140-6149
G. Congress 61 50-6 169
H. Administration: General 6170-6180
I. Administration: Special 6181-6194
J. State Government 6195-6206
K. Local Government 6207-6218
CHAPTER XXVII
hand and Agriculture
A. Land 5808-5818
B. Agriculture: History 5819-5838
C. Agriculture: Practice 5839-5850
D. Agriculture: Government Policies 5851-5861
E. Forests, National Parks 5862-5866
F. Animal Husbandry 5867-5874
CHAPTER XXVIII
Economic Life
A. General Works: Histories 5875-5883
B. Other General Works 5884-5900
C. Industry: General 5901-5906
D. Industry: Special 59°7_59I9
E. Transportation: General 5920-5925
F. Transportation: Special 5926—5943
G. Commerce: General 5944-595°
H. Commerce: Special 5951— 59^4
CHAPTER XXX
Law and Justice
A. History: General 6219-6236
B. History: The Supreme Court 6237-6260
C. General Views 6261-6270
D. Digests of American Law 6271-6279
E. Courts and Judges 6280-6293
F. The Judicial Process 6294-6309
G. Administrative Law 63 10-63 16
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession 6317-6332
CHAPTER XXXI
Politics, Parties, Elections
A. Politics: General 6333-6340
B. Politics: Special 6341-6346
C. Political Parties 6347-6373
D. Local Studies 6374-6383
E. Machines and Bosses 6384-6391
F. Pressures 6392-6399
VIII / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Item Nos.
G. Elections: Machinery
6400-64 1 1
H. Elections: Results
6412-6423
I. Reform
6424-6434
CHAPTER XXXII
Boo\s and Libraries
A. Printing and Publishing: General 6435-6448
B. Individual Publishers 6449-6453
C. Book Production: Technology and
Art 6454-6459
D. Book Selling and Collecting
E. Libraries
F. Librarianship and Library Use
Item Nos.
6460-6465
6466-6475
6476-6487
Appendix: Selected Readings
in American Studies
Index
Page
1081
1091
Introduction
FOR ALMOST a century and a half, since the
purchase of Thomas Jefferson's library in 1815,
materials that reflect the development of the United
States have been accumulating at an accelerating
rate in the Library of Congress. By copyright de-
posit, by acquisition of special collections, and with
the help of generous benefactors, the Library has
become the home of the largest collection of Ameri-
cana in the world. Even if it has not realized the
dream of a former Librarian of Congress by as-
sembling within its own walls "the complete prod-
uct of the American mind in every department of
science and literature," it nevertheless has reached
such proportions that it justly may be called a mir-
ror of the national culture. Generations of
scholars, research workers, students, and readers
have employed it, not only to see new facts and
relationships that have extended their knowledge,
but also to gain a clearer vision of the tradition,
meaning, and character of civilization in these
United States. To further such aims the Library
has consistently bent its efforts through the years.
It was not, however, until the beginning of the
decade just past that a marked increase was ob-
served in the number and complexity of questions
addressed to the Library about practically all phases
of life in the United States. Numerically, of
course, the largest number of requests for infor-
mation came from individuals and institutions in
this country; but the most comprehensive questions
frequently were posed by national and public in-
stitutions located in the four corners of the world.
The reply to one of the second class of inquiries in-
volved assembling a bibliography composed of 1,800
Library of Congress printed catalog cards. A com-
parable request led to the publication in 1950 of
American History and Civilization: A List of
Guides and Annotated or Selective Bibliographies.
The continuing interest in this bibliographical ap-
proach to American affairs, past and present, was
made evident by demands that exhausted the first
edition and required the publication, in 1951, of a
second and revised edition.
Many of the movements and events that inspired
this growing interest are actively at work in the
contemporary world. They include: the place as-
4.-.ILM11 c,n 2
sumed by the United States in the society of nations
after World War II; the scientific achievements that
have made communication relatively easy and
breached international barriers resulting from dis-
tance; the increasing cultural maturity of the
United States, made evident by growing self-exami-
nation and self-expression; the idea current among
American educators that general education from
childhood to maturity, in all phases of the Ameri-
can heritage, will help to increase national unity by
basing it on a solid foundation of shared knowledge
and understanding; the emergence in higher educa-
tion, on both undergraduate and graduate levels,
of programs in American studies developed through
the interrelation of different disciplines; the estab-
lishment in countries as far apart as Germany and
Japan of centers for American studies; the plan for
exchange professorships put into effect through the
Department of State in the interest of international
education and mutual understanding between
countries; and the work of the American Studies
Association, the national society for the interdis-
ciplinary study of American civilization.
With these and other influences operating in what
is virtually a new international age, it has become
more and more apparent that the Library of the
Congress of the United States must anticipate even
greater demands upon its reference and biblio-
graphical services to mobilize American materials
for increasing usefulness and use. This was the
situation in the autumn of 1952, when the Library
explored the feasibility of gathering together in
one publication a series of bibliographical studies of
civilization in the United States to which inquirers
might refer. Clearly, if such a project could be
carried through successfully it would enable the
Library to accomplish two objectives at the same
time: that of contributing to a wider diffusion of
knowledge about this country throughout the world;
and that of preventing wasteful duplication of work
resulting from repeated attempts to give individual
attention to questions that might be more satisfac-
torily answered within the compass of one carefully
prepared reference book. The Guide contained in
the following pages is the result.
The 6 years that then elapsed after the study was
IX
X / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
launched may be divided roughly into three periods:
1953-1954, the beginning stage, when members o£
the staff, while carrying on their regular assign-
ments, studied the problems, planned the scope, put
the work in train, and selected basic collections o£
books for various chapters; 1955-1956, when first
two and later three persons devoted substantial but
varying portions of their time to further selection of
materials, as well as to their description and organi-
zation; and 1957-1958, when four or five bibliog-
raphers were working, as time could be spared from
their other duties. During all these years the group
at work suffered the usual dislocations from resig-
nations, leaves of absence, new appointments, and
transfers to other assignments. Thus it may be said
that a skeleton staff produced the 32 chapters that
compose the volume, which includes about 6,500
main entries and half again as many more references
found in annotations and headnotes.
The work began and has continued under my
general direction, and has been supervised by Henry
J. Dubester, Chief of the General Reference and
Bibliography Division. Under our instructions,
Donald H. Mugridge planned the general scope of
the study, personally selected the references included
in 24 chapters, and gave editorial revision to work
done on them by other bibliographers. The anno-
tations in Chapters VI, VII, X, XI, XIII, and XV,
and in portions of several other chapters, also are his
work. Blanche P. McCrum and Allan G. Anderson
are responsible for the eight additional chapters, the
most substantial of which is Chapter I, Literature.
Other contributors and associates, and specialists in
and outside the Library, who have generously helped
us with their advice, are named in the section of
Acknowledgments which follows this introduction.
The paragraphs that follow immediately are de-
signed to clarify a few points for the convenience
of readers.
Selection of Material. References have been
selected to meet the requirements of serious readers,
students seeking orientation, and librarians engaged
in developing collections of books about the United
States. It is hoped, however, that the advanced
specialist also may find the volume a useful desk
reference book, particularly for subjects outside the
range of his expert knowledge; and that, although
no section on bibliographies as such is included,
both he and the less advanced student will be served
by the valuable bibliographies regularly noted when
these appear in books for which main entries are
provided.
The broad plan of selection has been to bring to-
gether between the covers of one volume materials
relating to subjects as divergent as Art and Public
Health, and thus to spread before readers a pano-
rama of life in the United States, past and present.
The basis of selection throughout has been the value
of each book as an expression of life in the United
States, not necessarily because it has the reputation
of being a classic, or because it is a learned mono-
graph primarily of interest to the specialist. No
book has been chosen for inclusion, however, unless
it has seemed significant in the light of our purpose.
By the very definition of that purpose many of the
selections necessarily embody the thought and learn-
ing of the best minds found in this country from its
beginning until today. Timeliness, too, has been
considered as of the essence; therefore, except in the
chapter on Literature, contemporary and revised
editions, more readily available through publishers'
lists and in libraries, have been preferred to the first
publication of a text unless that has remained the
best.
To arrive at any but a hypothetical date of publi-
cation, it was decided to set 1955 as the terminal
date for selecting material and to prepare each sec-
tion for the printer as it was completed. Parts of
the work concluded in or shortly after 1955 conform
to these rules. As the work progressed and was
expanded, however, publication was necessarily de-
layed, and it was possible to include in various
other chapters books published as late as 1958. The
timeliness of sections is therefore somewhat uneven,
something particularly to be regretted in the chap-
ters devoted to Literature, Intellectual History, So-
ciety, Education, Sports and Recreation, and
Entertainment, all of which might have been en-
riched by a number of significant recent references
if work on them could have been reopened.
A policy of extremely rigorous selection has been
maintained. The Guide is an introduction to rep-
resentative books that reflect the development of life
and thought in the United States. In no sense is it
a source of information about every conceivable facet
of that life; nor has it any completeness as a catalog
or compilation of Americana. Probably other bib-
liographers would not have made identical choices;
and specialists in the various subjects will doubtless
regret omissions quite as keenly as do the bibliog-
raphers responsible for them. The fact remains
that time and cost are hard masters that must be
obeyed. It is equally true that a study of this kind
can be elaborated to the point where it ceases to be
selective and its complexity defeats its own purpose.
We have endeavored to keep within limits properly
imposed by all these considerations.
Main Entries and Bibliographical Style. The aim
in preparing the entries has been to give references
that may be readily identified in the Library of Con-
gress catalogs and consequently in those of hundreds
of other institutions where the same cards are used
or where the Library's published catalogs are avail-
able. Call numbers have been included as addi-
INTRODUCTION / XI
tional safeguards for exact identification. A small
minority of entries record tides or editions that are
not in the collections of the Library of Congress. In
each case some other major library which does have
the book is referred to by means of the appropriate
symbol used in the National Union Catalog {see
Key to Symbols).
Concerning the prevailing bibliographical style
followed, it may be said in general diat we have at-
tempted to give an author's name in the form pre-
ferred by him, if that can be determined. When,
however, he habitually uses the initial of his first
name, we have spelled it out if possible for purposes
of identification and have supplied a middle initial
when known, even if that is regularly missing from
his name on the title pages of his books. In the
chapter concerned with Literature, on the contrary,
the fullest known form of the names of principal
authors has usually been preferred as a matter of
literary history. Long titles, particularly of books
published in the seventeenth and early eighteenth
centuries, occasionally have been shortened by the
omissions of repetitious endings and wordy sub-
titles. To conserve space, names of publishers have
been shortened to the briefest form that can be
readily identified. In these and other questions of
bibliographical form we have striven for consistency
throughout; but some differences inevitably appear
in a work from various hands, and in which in-
dividuality is reflected from time to time in
differences of concept and of style. When no con-
fusion results from these human tendencies to be
different, we have frequently preferred to spend
time on matters of substance rather than on revi-
sions to secure meticulous conformity of style.
Main entries in chapters are grouped according to
classification schemes outlined in the introduction
that precedes each chapter and explains its individ-
ual purpose and method. Subordinate arrangement
of entries within the various schemes tends to be
alphabetical by author's name, as in Literature, for
which a period division is supplied by the plan of
the classification itself. When arrangement of
entries by date, place, or subject more effectively
brings together related references, in part or all of
a chapter, these variations have been made without
hesitation.
Annotations and Headnotes. Annotations have
been written primarily to aid the reader in judging
what the book contributes to an understanding of
the United States and in determining, more specifi-
cally, what bearing it has on the aspect of that sub-
ject in which he is particularly interested. These
notes or annotations are not written as reviews, or
literary essays, or dissertations on an author's thesis;
quite simply they are meant to be aids which readers
may use to eliminate materials irrelevant to their
purpose and guideposts to lead them as quickly as
possible to the heart of what concerns them. The
length of an annotation must not be taken as evi-
dence of the importance of the book annotated. The
nature of a famous book may be nearly self-evident
from the name of the author and the tide, while a
less conspicuous book may require more detailed
description to place it properly in relation to the
subject or subjects with which it deals. Upon oc-
casions two or more books have been annotated
together, with the annotation normally following
the last entry in the group. For reasons of brevity
and readability ellipses normally have not been used
to mark the omission of initial or terminal connec-
tives in quotations that appear in the annotations
and headnotes, but of course no words and, we trust,
no thoughts have been changed. Both annotations
and headnotes have been freely used to provide
additional documentation by means of brief refer-
ences to books not described in main entries. Such
additional citations are identified sometimes only by
date of publication, if that suffices; but in general
both imprint and number of pages are given.
The usual practice of annotating individual titles
has been varied in some sections by the substitution
of one headnote under the author's name, without
additional annotations for his individual works
unless the range of these was too great to be covered
in a headnote. Interest has thus been focused on
the total contribution of the writer, and reiteration
of statements applicable to all or nearly all his books
has been eliminated. Chapters that illustrate this
method of approach are those on Literature and
Biography and Autobiography, while the largest
sections of the chapters on Travel and Travelers and
Philosophy and Psychology have been treated in the
same way. A similar device has been employed in
some cases when the use of a headnote following
the title of a long series of books has made it un-
necessary to annotate the separate publications that
make up the series, as in the cases of "Original
Narratives of Early American History" and the
readings selected by the Department of American
Studies of Amherst College, "Problems in American
Civilization."
Appendix: Selected Readings in American
Studies. At a meeting of the Council at the Ameri-
can Studies Association held at the Library of Con-
gress in June 1954, announcement was made that
work on our bibliography was in progress and sug-
gestions concerning it were solicited. A number of
the members present favored the inclusion of a
separate section containing those tides which have
a synthetic approach, bridge the various academic
and scholarly disciplines, and are therefore of special
significance to teachers or students pursuing courses
in American studies. As a result, a tentative list of
XII / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ioo such titles was submitted to various members of with reference numbers added to guide the user to
the Association, who examined it and made sug- the full description of each book in the main body
gestions for additions and deletions. The Appendix of the bibliography. It remains a sample listing of
contains a revision of this original list, enlarged references, which, if fully expanded, would consti-
somewhat by the inclusion of new titles located as tute a new bibliographical enterprise outside our
our study progressed. Entries are in brief form, scope.
Acknowledgments
MEMBERS or former members of the General Ref-
erence and Bibliography Division who have con-
tributed one or more chapters of this book are
Allan G. Anderson, Ann Duncan Brown, Helen F.
Conover, Peter Draz, and Jane Kline. The fol-
lowing, who were attached to the Division for
periods of varying length, lent valuable assistance
to the work of the editors or the contributors: Nelson
R. Burr, Edith H. Leeds, James S. Sweet, Burdette
S. Wright, Jr., and Marko Zlatich.
Colleagues in various divisions of the Library of
Congress have assisted us in a number of ways and
greatly to the benefit of our study. The staff of the
Music Division assumed responsibility for extending
and annotating Chapter XXIV, Folklore, Folk
Music, Folk Art and Chapter XXV, Music. Donald
L. Leavitt took charge of the work on the first of
these chapters and a similar labor of love for the
chapter on Music was shared by Richard S. Hill,
William J. Lichtenwanger, and Donald W. Krum-
mel, in association with Frank C. Campbell, Darius
Thieme, and Carroll Wade.
Reviews of chapters, criticisms, and suggestions
for additions and deletions were sought and ob-
tained from other members of the Library staff who
have special knowledge of the subjects dealt with,
as follows: David Baumgardt, former Consultant in
Philosophy, now of Columbia University, Chapter
XXII, Philosophy and Psychology; Edgar Breiten-
bach, Chief, Prints and Photographs Division, Chap-
ter XXVI, Art and Architecture; Arch C. Gerlach,
Chief, Map Division, Chapter VI, Geography;
William H. Gilbert, Jr., Analyst, Indian Affairs,
Legislative Reference Service (LRS), Chapter VII,
The American Indian; Halford L. Hoskins, Senior
Specialist, International Relations, LRS, Chapter IX,
Diplomatic History and Foreign Relations; Helen
A. Miller, Analyst, Education, LRS, Chapter XXI,
Education; John K. Rose, Senior Specialist, Con-
servation, LRS, Chapter XXVII, Land and Agri-
culture; Willard Webb, Chief, Stack and Reader
Division, Chapter X, Military History and the
Armed Forces; Walter H. Zeydel, Assistant Chief,
American-British Law Division, Law Library,
Chapter XXX, Law and Justice; and Raymund L.
Zwemer, former Chief, Science and Technology
Division, Chapter XVI, Communications, and Chap-
ter XVII, Science and Technology.
From outside the Library's own walls we also
received generous help from specialists in several
subjects. Irene B. Taeuber, Research Associate,
Office of Population Research, Princeton University,
twice reviewed the section on Population, made sug-
gestions, and permitted us to use her own bibliog-
raphy; Dorothy M. Schullian, History of Medicine
Division, National Library of Medicine, studied the
chapter on Medicine and Public Health in detail and
made comments and suggestions. Joy E. Morgan,
in 1955 Director of the Publications Division, Na-
tional Education Association, and Ruth C. Litde,
then Assistant Director, examined the chapter on
Education, commented upon it, and suggested cer-
tain additions. Our debt to these specialists and
those with whom we are associated in the Library
is a very real one, which we acknowledge with
pleasure and pride. It would ill requite them for
their help, however, to lay any of our own biblio-
graphical faults and failings at their doors. The
working staff, not the specialists, are responsible for
judgments implied or expressed and for the final
form and content of the volume.
Finally, acknowledgment must be made of the
contribution of two participants in the work who,
although their names are not attached to any chap-
ter, have nevertheless left their impress on most
of the pages in the book. They are: Grace Hadley
Fuller, Head of the Bibliography and Reference
Correspondence Section of the General Reference
and Bibliography Division, and Helen Dudenbostel
Jones, Assistant Head, who reviewed and edited the
whole manuscript with respect to its technical bib-
liographical details and supervised the preparation
of the voluminous index which is a distinct feature
of the work.
Roy P. Basler,
Director,
Reference Department.
XIII
Key to Symbols
CLU-C
CSmH
CtMW
CtW
CtY
DA
DCU
ICU
IU
IaU
MB
MB At
MH
MWiW-C
MdBJ
MeB
MeWC
MiU
MiU-C
MnU
NN
University of California at Los Angeles,
William Andrews Clark Memorial
Library.
Henry E. Huntington Library, San
Marino, Calif.
See CtW.
Wesleyan University, Middletown,
Conn.
Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
U.S. Department of Agriculture Li-
brary, Washington, D.C.
Catholic University of America Li-
brary, Washington, D.C.
University of Chicago, Chicago, 111.
University of Illinois, Urbana.
State University of Iowa, Iowa City.
Boston Public Library, Boston, Mass.
Boston Athenaeum, Boston.
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
Williams College, Chapin Library,
Williamstown, Mass.
Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Md.
Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Maine.
Colby College, Waterville, Maine.
University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.
— William L. Clements Library.
University of Minnesota, Minneapolis.
New York Public Library.
NNC
Columbia University, New York.
NNU
New York University Libraries, New
York.
NRU
University of Rochester, Rochester,
N.Y.
NcD
Duke University, Durham, N.C.
NjP
Princeton University, Princeton, N.J.
OCU
University of Cincinnati, Cincinnati,
Ohio.
OC1
Cleveland Public Library, Cleveland,
Ohio.
OO
Oberlin College, Oberlin, Ohio.
OOxM
Miami University, Oxford, Ohio.
PHi
Historical Society of Pennsylvania,
Philadelphia.
PPD
Drexel Institute of Technology, Phila-
delphia.
PPLas
La Salle College, Philadelphia.
PPT
Temple University, Philadelphia.
PPTU
SeeVPT.
PSt
Pennsylvania State University, Uni-
versity Park.
PU
University of Pennsylvania, Phila-
delphia.
RPB
Brown University, Providence, R.I.
RPJCB
John Carter Brown Library, Provi-
dence.
ViHal
Hampton Institute, Hampton, Va.
ViU
University of Virginia, Charlottesville.
XV
Literature (1607— 1955)
A. The Thirteen Colonies (1607-1763) 1- 95
B. The Revolution and the New Nation (1764-1819) 96- 185
C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (1820-1870) 186-682
D. The Gilded Age and After (1871-1914) 683-1152
E. The First World War and the Great Depression (191 5-1939) 1 153-1906
F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940-1955) 1907-2235
9
1IFE in America, from small beginnings in 1607 to vastness in 1955, is the medium in which
j our writers have worked creatively. In the pages of the books that have resulted we relive
the physical, intellectual, emotional, and spiritual experiences of the men and women who have
shaped and been shaped by this nation. Through the processes of imagination and esthetic ex-
pression characters having "forms more real than living man" speak to us in the contemporary
accents of each period. Personal narratives, journals, letters, and especially poems, plays, novels,
short stories, and essays reveal the mind and spirit
of America as it has developed during 350 years.
Writ large in this body of material, originally
designed possibly for edification, information,
persuasion, excitement, amusement, or even only
for the sake of self-expression, are found firsthand
impressions of our culture nowhere else preserved.
The books so written supplement, even illumine,
those substantial works of research and scholarship
that have their place in other chapters of this
bibliography. In these other chapters, notably those
devoted to General History, Biography and Auto-
biography, and Philosophy, also will be found many
references to books excellent for their literary qual-
ity, but too valuable on the score of content to be
placed outside their subject category. Not "mere
literature," however, but literature that preserves a
record of American life is the specific concern of
this chapter. A few paragraphs about the selection,
description, and arrangement of the materials with
which the chapter deals may serve to facilitate its
use by the audience to which it is addressed.
Selection of Authors. Pre-eminence in the selec-
tion of authors inevitably has been given to acknowl-
edged literary artists, because in general they not
only write more powerfully but also about more
important phases of American experience. Not
every one of these, however, has found a place
within the limits of what is, after all, an introduction
and a guide, not a catalog. Obviously, to include
every example of a genre or a movement would con-
fuse a landscape more clearly viewed if uncluttered
by too many figures. On the other hand, popular
and less distinguished writers have not been auto-
matically excluded. While no author has been
selected unless some genuine literary interest attaches
to him, the relation may not always be as immedi-
ately apparent as in the case of writers that have
deservedly received much greater critical acclaim.
In some cases these minor writers have been selected
because they have perceptibly influenced taste, or il-
lustrated manners and customs, or kept a region or
a class from literary oblivion. Their importance de-
rives from their historical and social significance —
possibly also because they are good examples of
"Americana" — and not from the unusual literary
excellence of their accomplishment. Whether the
selection that has been practiced has brought in
major or minor figures, the touchstone of choice has
been the relevance of the writer's work to the under-
standing of American civilization.
Description of Authors. In this chapter descrip-
tive annotations generally are attached only to names
of authors, rather than to titles of individual books,
as in most other chapters. Such a variation in
2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
practice has been determined by a variety of con-
siderations. Chief among these is the purpose to
focus attention at once upon the total emphasis of
the author's contribution, even if the scope of the
chapter permits the inclusion of only a token repre-
sentation of his complete work. It has seemed de-
sirable also to facilitate the use of the guide by
epitomizing the author's significance in a headnote,
rather than by leaving that significance to be derived
from the examination of numerous annotations of
tides. Other reasons for using this device are:
avoidance of boring repetitions resulting from an-
notations of numerous books by one author, all
having similar characteristics; and economy of de-
tail that makes it somewhat easier to see the literary
forest in spite of its numerous bibliographical trees.
In individual instances, however, when the headnote
defies attempts to make it sufficiently explicit with-
out becoming unduly wordy, supplementary annota-
tions are incorporated with entries for titles of books.
To avoid repetition of information already fully
supplied in standard histories and other studies of
American literature, biographical and critical com-
ments and citations usually have been omitted unless
required for clarification or documentation. Guid-
ance with respect to these aspects of a writer's work
is provided in Chapter III, Literary History and
Criticism, where entries will be found for such in-
clusive works as Literary History of the United
States (no. 2460) and The Literature of the Ameri-
can People (no. 2496). References are given in the
same chapter for numerous monographic studies of
special aspects of American literature, and for
anthologies that cover a wide range of topics dealing
with writers and the books they have written.
Obviously, significant biographical and critical
studies of authors have been published after the
closing dates for inclusion of new material in the
standard histories of literature. The bibliographical
treatment given to a selection of these, in this study,
is described in number 5 of the following para-
graph. The reader is reminded, however, that for
directions to the older, and in some cases the more
important studies, he must turn to books of history
and criticism such as those mentioned in the fore-
going paragraph.
Arrangement under Author's Name. Sections A
through D, representing American literature from
the beginning to 191 4, have identical arrangements.
Following the headnote under the name of the
author, full bibliographical entries are inserted for
titles of books selected to represent his work.
Ordinarily these entries are arranged chronologically
by date of publication, and in the following
sequence:
1. First or earliest identifiable edition of each
title, chronologically arranged by date of publica-
tion.
2. (a) New editions and (b) reprints, entered un-
der each title in the order indicated.
3. Collected works, followed first by new edi-
tions, and second by reprints.
4. Selected works, new editions, and reprints, in
the sequence designated in (2) and (3).
5. Selected biographical and critical studies of the
author, not already mentioned in the headnote, and
not represented in standard texts because they ap-
peared after the publication of such texts. In gen-
eral these entries are for books issued between 1949
and the end of 1955, with rare entries for works hav-
ing 1956 imprints. They are arranged alphabeti-
cally by the name of the author of the biography or
criticism.
Sections E and F, concerned with modern and
contemporary literature, have required two types
of arrangement on account of the extremely large
amount of material involved: (a) the plan used in
sections A-D, when the author's work is represented
by relatively few titles; and (b) a new scheme when
representation involves a large number of tides. In
the latter case, separate entries for individual titles
are not supplied, if these tides are adequately cov-
ered in collections or selections for which entries
are being given. Under this scheme, entries for
collected, selected, and individual works are inter-
filed by date of publication. However, attention
may be called to individual titles by mention either
in the headnote or in annotations of the more com-
prehensive volumes.
In these two sections it has seemed unnecessary to
cite reprints, either because the original edition is
still available and is to be preferred, or because re-
prints may be anticipated after the publication of
this bibliography. To keep abreast of such future
reprints, reliance must be placed on standard guides
to new books that appear periodically.
In the interest of clarity it may be well to amplify
the foregoing statements. For instance, if a first
edition perished in its entirety and is not at the
present time susceptible of accurate bibliographical
description, the next earliest edition usually has been
selected for description. Another variation oc-
casionally has resulted when the author himself has
indicated that a later edition has replaced the first,
or when a collected edition preserves the text of
several first editions that have been scattered and
lost.
It may also be in order to repeat the emphasis
given earlier in connection with the selection of
authors to be represented by saying that the same
degree of selectivity has been applied to the choice
of titles, editions, and reprints. The aim has been
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 3
to show the author's value by citing those of his
books that are most significant to the reader inter-
ested in American civilization. No effort has been
made to give a complete panorama of the writer's
achievements. Such a limitation of choice, necessi-
tated by the purpose of this study, has forced the
compilers to make many painful deletions, with
which specialists understandably may disagree.
Again, the reader is referred to Literary History of
the United States, volume 3, "Bibliography" (no.
2460). Repetition of work already well and fully
done would have been supererogation, even if it
had been possible.
A final word of explanation must be given con-
cerning the meaning of the words "edition" and
"reprint" as used in this chapter. "Edition" im-
plies one of the successive forms in which a text has
been issued, either by the author or by an editor.
"Reprint" has been taken to mean reproduction of
material previously printed, but not necessarily by
the use of the same type or plates. It is applied also
to republications, perhaps in inexpensive format,
and frequently with notes and comments designed
to assist the reader.
Organization of the Chapter. The work of some
340 authors, and its representation in 2,235 num-
bered items, make up the substance of this chapter.
It has, therefore, been necessary to impose some sort
of formal order on such a mass of material, not only
for the convenience of readers but also to relate it
as logically as possible to other chapters of the
bibliography.
The method of organization finally selected has
resulted in arrangement according to six periods of
time between 1607, when the first permanent col-
onists came to Jamestown, and 1955, the closing date
assigned to the gathering of material. Authors are
placed within each period alphabetically by their
names, for ease of identification. There are certain
objections to this division by periods; these are
freely admitted. One difficulty is that authors are
exceedingly unaccommodating about living and
dying within the exact limits of designated periods.
Moreover, arrangement by period, rather than by
form, or style, or trend, brings together very strange
literary bedfellows indeed. In spite of these diffi-
culties, division of American literature into periods
comparable to the large divisions of general Ameri-
can history has advantages for our purpose that out-
weigh objections. Such division has the merit of
indicating the way in which literature marches with
the political, social, religious, economic, and other
developments of American civilization from the
beginning of permanent colonization to the mid-
dle of the 20th century. The idea of this relation is
basic to a correct understanding of literature itself;
hence an arrangement that emphasizes the connec-
tion has been favored above others considered. For
the same reason the six selected periods, named at
the beginning of the chapter, have been characterized
in historical rather than literary terms, to show the
link between this chapter and other chapters of the
bibliography.
A. The Thirteen Colonies (i 607-1 763)
The mixed company of adventurers, saints, sin-
ners, and plain people who conquered the wilderness
and made possible the settlement of 13 colonies in
America were not given to thinking about writing
as art for art's sake. Only two writers in the whole
period, Anne Bradstrect and Edward Taylor, may
be said to have carried on the tradition of belles-
lettres in any accepted meaning of the term. Colo-
nial Americans, however, believed profoundly in
using the written word to put themselves and their
affairs on record. It is, therefore, to annals, diaries,
histories, sermons, theological treatises, and personal
narratives that we must loo\ for the most significant
literary beginnings in America.
Nineteen authors selected to represent the period
in this bibliography reflect a wide range of interests
and illustrate a variety of literary styles in their
writings. John Smith, flamboyant chronicler of the
settlement at Jamestown, shines through his own
history as an embodiment of many qualities of
courage and hardihood that animated English ex-
plorers in the 16th and iyth centuries. At the
opposite extreme, the plain, even prosaic William
Bradford undertook to justify the ways of God to
man on the blea\ New England coast, while faith-
fully setting down priceless details of the cold,
hunger, hardships, troubles with the Indians, and
loneliness that daily beset his Pilgrims. Cotton
Mather, much later on the literary scene, gave evi-
dence of the far-reaching interests of a Harvard
graduate and early New England Brahmin by treat-
ing of the church, science, history, biography, and
witchcraft in his voluminous writings. Jonathan
Edwards, Yale-trained and a younger contemporary
of Mather, is credited with one of the finest intellects
that has left a mar\ on American civilization.
4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Without his great theological-philosophical treatises,
ideas of sin, salvation, destiny, and freedom of the
will would not have sifted down, as they have done,
with powerful effect on literary artists wording in
later periods.
Not all writers considered in the bibliography
were, however, intellectuals, nor were all concerned
with large questions related to this world and the
next. At least two of the diaries described in the
bibliography are replete with down-to-earth details
of domestic manners and customs. A collection of
Puritan love-letters is cited, and the narrative of a
terrifying captivity among the Indians is used to
illustrate a theme that has been developed in a
variety of ways by an indefinite number of later
writers. A fortunate life of wealth and security,
lived on a fine Virginia plantation by a man of
large affairs, is also given a place in the record to
indicate the enrichment of culture that had taken
place towards the end of the colonial period.
Apart from the choicest boo\s and parts of boo\s
written in this country before the Revolution, much
of the literary heritage of the period is today of
interest chiefly to the specialist. The Puritan cast
of thought in the more substantial part of it, its
prevailing sobriety, emphasis placed on beliefs and
opinions long ago abandoned, and in some cases the
use of crabbed, outmoded styles of writing, all im-
pose barriers between certain colonial writers and
20th-century readers. Nevertheless, the student of
American civilization must turn bac\ again and
again to these authentic sources, from which have
come ideas and influences formative in the country's
destiny, and to which literature in the United States
owes a continuing debt.
i. WILLIAM BRADFORD, 1 590-1657
Governor of the colony at Plymouth for 30 years
between 1621 and 1656, Bradford became the an-
nalist of the beginning of New England. In his
history he portrayed the piety of the Pilgrim Fathers
who setded there, gave their English and European
backgrounds in the Separatist movement, and told
of their earlier wanderings for conscience's sake.
The relations they established with the Indians and
the courage they found for enduring hardships while
making a home in the wilderness are also recorded
with convincing contemporary detail. The vigor of
the author's style when at its best and the quality of
his thought have made the history highly influential
in subsequent literary treatment of New England
themes.
2. History of Plymouth Plantation. Now first
printed from the original manuscript. Boston,
Massachusetts Historical Society, 1856. xix, 476 p.
(Massachusetts Historical Society. Collections, 4th
ser., v. 3) in 9-889 F61.M41, 4th ser., v. 3
Edited by Charles Deane.
3-
Now reproduced in facsimile from the
original manuscript, with an introd. by John A.
Doyle. London, Ward & Downey; Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1896. 17 p., facsim. (535 p.)
1-16539 F68.B78 RBD
No. 168.
Edited by William T. Davis. New
York, Scribner, 1908. xv, 437 p. (Original
narratives of early American history)
8-7375 F68.B802
E187.O7B7
Recently published by Barnes & Noble, New
York.
Edited by Worthington C. Ford. Bos-
ton, Published for the Massachusetts Historical
Society by Houghton Mifflin, 1912. 2 v. illus.
12-29493 F68.B805
6. The complete text, with notes and
introd. by Samuel Eliot Morison. New ed.
New York, Knopf, 1952. xliii, 448 p.
51-13222 F68.B8073
Modern text, under title, Of Plymouth Plantation,
rearranged for easier reading, with documentation
relegated to appendices.
7. ANNE (DUDLEY) BRADSTREET, 1612?-
1672
Mrs. Bradstreet, daughter of one governor of the
Massachusetts Bay Colony and wife of another, had
enjoyed a life of privilege and some leisure in Eng-
land before she was subjected to pioneer conditions
in the New World. The scope of her reading, her
familiarity with the works of Edmund Spenser and
Sir Philip Sidney, and particularly with translations
of the poems of Guillaume du Bartas, influenced her
style, which is characterized also by the typical
metaphors and conceits of English poetry during
her period. "Contemplations," her most famous
piece, prose meditations, and various poems added
to the edition of 1678 make use of themes drawn
from admiration of the New England landscape,
love of husband and children, and experiences of
family life. These mitigate the sameness of her
prevailing tone of Puritan piety. Mrs. Bradstreet
is frequendy called the first authentic poet writing
in America.
8. The tenth muse lately sprung up in Amer-
ica .. . With divers other pleasant and serious
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 5
poems . . . London, S. Bowtell, 1650. 207 p.
6-31257 PS711.A1 1650 RRD
A second edition, revised by the author, was post-
humously published under the title, Several Poems
. . . By a Gentlewoman of New England (1678).
9. Works in prose and verse. Edited by John
Harvard Ellis. Charlestown, Mass., A. E. Cut-
ter, 1867. Ixxvi, 434 p. illus.
12-30892 PS711.A1 1867
The Poems are reprinted from the second edition.
Cf. p. [78].
10. New York, P. Smith, 1932. Ixxvi,
432 p. illus. 32-26751 PS711.A1 1932
A reprint of the edition of 1867.
11. Poems . . . together with . . . prose remains.
With an introd. by Charles Eliot Norton.
[New York] The Duodecimos, 1897. xliv, 347 p.
illus. 32-6990 PS711.A1 1897
Editor's note signed: Frank E. Hopkins.
12. WILLIAM BYRD, 1674-1744
The holder of various public offices of trust,
Byrd traveled extensively over the outlying sections
of Virginia, observing physical aspects for the bene-
fit of his fellow members of the Royal Society in
London, and looking at social conditions on an ex-
panding frontier from the point of view of a man
of large affairs. The commentaries and diaries
which preserve his reflections on conditions in the
colony when its age had passed the century-mark
were written in a style typical of a gentleman edu-
cated in the English 18th-century manner. For that
reason, as well as for their contents, they have been
useful literary sources for later writers on the place
and the period.
13. The Westover manuscripts . . . written from
1728 to 1736, and now first published. Edited
by Edmund Ruffin. Petersburg, Va., E. & C. J.
Ruffin, 1841. 143 p. Rc-2772 F229.B963
Includes The History of the Dividing Line Be-
twixt Virginia and North Carolina; A Journey to
the Land of Eden, A. D. 1J33; and A Progress to
the Mines. Reprinted as A Journey to the Land of
Eden and Other Papers, edited by Mark Van Doren
(New York, Macy-Masius, 1928. 367 p. An
American bookshelf, no. 4).
14. Writings. Edited by John Spencer Bassett.
New York, Doubleday, Page, 1901. lxxxviii,
461 p. illus. 2-1 125 F229.B96
One of an edition of 500 copies.
Includes also miscellaneous papers, e. g., letters
and a catalog of some 4,000 volumes in Byrd's
library at Westover.
15. The secret diary of William Byrd of Westover,
1709-1712. Edited by Louis B. Wright and
Marion Tinling. Richmond, Dietz Press, 1941.
xxviii, 622 p. 41-21807 F229.B9715
A transcription from the original shorthand of the
first part of Byrd's diary now in the Henry E. Hunt-
ington Library.
1 6. Another Secret diary of William Byrd of West-
over, lyi^-ij^i, with letters & literary exer-
cises, 1 696-1 726. Edited by Maude H. Woodfin,
translated and collated by Marion Tinling. Rich-
mond, Dietz Press, 1942. xlv, 490 p.
43-1881 F229.B9717
Reproduced at the Henry E. Huntington Library
from shorthand and holograph manuscripts owned
by the University of North Carolina.
Bibliographical footnotes.
Both secret diaries supply details of daily life on
a large plantation as lived by the ruling class in
colonial Virginia. Louis B. Wright's The First
Gentlemen of Virginia (San Marino, Calif., The
Huntington Library, 1940. 373 p.) throws light
upon the intellectual qualities and activities of Byrd
and his predecessors.
17. JOHN COTTON, 1584-1652
John Cotton, once dean of Emmanuel College,
Cambridge University, and a notable pulpit orator,
incurred the wrath of Archbishop Laud on the score
of his Puritanism. Fearing for his life and liberty,
he chose to join his friends and fellow Puritans in
Massachusetts Bay Colony, where he arrived in his
49th year. There his talents and his earnestness
soon made him the leading clergyman of the infant
colony. According to Puritan practice, this
spiritual office carried with it civil influence as well,
so much so that it has been said opinions uttered by
Cotton in the pulpit soon were embodied in the laws
of Massachusetts. In the remote outpost of civiliza-
tion in which he found himself, the former uni-
versity official continued his industry as a scholar
and a voluminous writer. His catechism Mil\ for
Babes (1646) became a standard text for the moral
education of New England children. Among his
other works are found books about prayer, collec-
tions of sermons, pamphlets on controversial sub-
jects, and treatises on theological subjects, particu-
larly in relation to the conduct of the Congregational
Church in New England. They were written to
warn, reprove, edify, and instruct his fellow Puri-
tans, and to combat errors he found in ideas difler-
ent from his own. Their value today to the student
6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of American civilization is found chiefly in the light
they throw on Puritanism and Calvinism as influ-
ences in the making of New England culture from
which, some 200 years after Cotton's day, American
literature flowered in the American Renaissance.
No collected edition of Cotton's works has appeared.
18. God's promise to His plantation. London, J.
Bellamy, 1630. 20 p.
49-56418 F67.C83 RBD
Example of Puritan plain style used in sermons;
preached for John Winthrop and his party immedi-
ately before their departure from England for the
Bay Colony in Massachusetts. Reprinted in 1896 in
Old South leaflets, general series, v. 3, no. 53.
19. The way of the churches of Christ in New Eng-
land. London, M. Simmons, 1645. 116 p.
RBD
Treatise on the theory of government under
which the New England church functioned; to-
gether with Cotton's The Keys of the Kingdom of
Heaven (London, H. Overton, 1644. 59 p.) it em-
bodies the author's undemocratic and authoritarian
philosophy of the relation of church and state.
20. The bloudy tenent washed and made white in
the bloud of the Lambe . . . Whereunto is
added a reply to Mr. Williams' answer to Mr. Cot-
ton's letter. London, H. Allen, 1647. 194, 144 p.
49-38592 BV741.W58C RBD
Polemic against religious toleration as advocated
by Roger Williams in his The Bloudy Tenent, of
Persecution, for Cause of Conscience (q. v.).
2i. JONATHAN EDWARDS, 1703-1758
Edwards shared with Cotton Mather the ex-
perience of trying to uphold Puritan orthodoxy
when it was declining in New England. Theo-
logian and fiery preacher though he was, Edwards
was not, however, concerned solely with the dam-
nation of sinful men. Scientific, metaphysical, and
mystical elements in existence, or "being," were
reflected in important sections of his voluminous
works. These legacies from his intellectual and
spiritual life entered into the thought of America
through his writings and bore fruit in succeeding
generations of authors, particularly in New Eng-
land. Emerson's theory of nature, in relation to
his Transcendentalism, Hawthorne's preoccupation
with the consequences of sin, and Melville's aware-
ness of the powers of darkness in conflict with
human souls — all these and many other ideas found
in American literature have been influenced by the
fact that Edwards thought and wrote as the philos-
opher he was. Substantial contributions to the
understanding of Edwards' works and to an appre-
ciation of his rightful place in American life and
letters may be gained from Perry Miller's Jonathan
Edwards (New York, Sloane, 1949. 348 p. Ameri-
can men of letters series). See also Professor
Miller's edition of Edwards' notes having the tide
Images or Shadows of Divine Things (New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1948. 151 p.), which empha-
sizes the empirical character of the writer's thought.
22. A faithful narrative of the surprising work of
God in the conversion of many hundred souls
in Northampton, and the neighbouring towns and
villages of New Hampshire in New England. Lon-
don, J. Oswald, 1737. 132 p.
BR520.E4 1737 RBD
23. 3d ed. Boston, D. Henchman, 1738.
viii, 79 p. 21-18452 BR520.E4 1738 RBD
Fullest contemporary account of the revival
launched by Edwards in 1735, a forerunner of the
Great Awakening which began in 1740; an early
work on phenomena observed in revival meetings.
24. Sinners in the hands of an angry God. Boston,
S. Kneeland, 1741. 25 p. MBAt
Sermon preached at Enfield, Massachusetts, July
8, 1741, during the Great Awakening; extreme ex-
ample of Edwards' belief in appeal to the emotions
to secure religious conversion.
25. A treatise concerning religious affections . . .
Boston, S. Kneeland & T. Green, 1746. 343 p.
1 1-2602 BX7230.E4 1746 RBD
Pioneer American contribution in the field of
religious psychology.
26. A careful and strict enquiry into the modern
prevailing notions of that freedom of will
which is supposed to be essential to moral agency,
virtue and vice, reward and punishment, praise and
blame. Boston, S. Kneeland, 1754. 294 p.
28-7122 BT810.E25 1754 RBD
Written to clarify and establish Edwards' posi-
tion concerning the Calvinistic doctrines of free will
and determinism, the work is the cornerstone of
the writer's fame as one of the foremost thinkers
and philosophical theologians produced in America.
27. Works. Edited by Edward Williams and Ed-
ward Parsons. Leeds, Eng., Baines, 1 806-11.
8 v. IaU
"Reprinted in 18 17, and again in 1847, with two
'Supplementary Volumes'." — Literary History of
the United States, v. 3, p. 482.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / J
28.
Worcester, Mass., Isaiah Thomas,
Jr., 1808-09. 8 v.
8-32280 BX7117.E3 1808
Edited by Samuel Austin.
A reprint of the edition, with additions, was
issued as an 8th edition (New York, Leavitt & Allen,
1851-52. 8 v.).
29.
With a memoir of his life. New
York, G. & C. & H. Carvill, 1830. 10 v.
illus. 25-23341 BX7117.E3 1830
Edited by Sereno E. Dwight.
30. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes by Clarence H. Faust and
Thomas H. Johnson. New York, American Book
Co., 1935. cxlii, 434 p. (American writers series)
35-30040 BX7117.E33F3 1935
Part of the introduction was issued as C. H.
Faust's thesis (Ph. D.) University of Chicago,
under the title: Jonathan Edwards's View of Human
Nature. Brief selections are given in full; longer
works are represented by excerpts. A bibliography,
chiefly of critical works about Edwards and his
writings, appears on p. cxix-cxlii.
31. Puritan sage; collected writings of Jonathan
Edwards. Edited by Virgilius Ferm. New
York, Library Publishers, 1953. xxvii, 640 p.
53-3143 BX7117.E3 1953
Anthology of partial or complete selections,
drawn chiefly from the Wor\s (1830) edited by
Sereno E. Dwight.
32. THOMAS HOOKER, 1586-1647
Hooker's background and experience before
he came to America in 1633 closely paralleled those
of his friend, John Cotton. Each was trained at
Emmanuel College, Cambridge University, a strong-
hold of Puritanism in England. Both so per-
suasively preached doctrines unacceptable to the
established Church of England that emigration was
their refuge from prosecution on the charge of non-
conformity. In Massachusetts Bay Colony, a des-
tination they reached in the same boat, each began
a career that was instrumental in promoting the
influence of the Congregational church and Puritan
ideologies in the developing life of the colony.
Their extant sermons and theological treatises pre-
served for posterity the beliefs that shaped the early
culture of New England, and that were influential
in all parts of the country where Calvinists were
found. In 1636 Hooker and his congregation left
Massachusetts to found a new colony at Hartford and
surrounding points in Connecticut. There, it is said,
Hooker's enunciation of the principle that "the
foundation of authority is laid, firstly, in the free
consent of the people" contributed to the adoption
of the Connecticut Fundamental Orders of 1639,
an early and remarkable declaration of American
democracy. Hooker's works have not been pub-
lished in a collected edition; full reprints of separate
works also are lacking.
33. The soules preparation for Christ . . . Lon-
don, R. Dowlman, 1632. 242 p. NN
Sermons widely known and discussed; influential
in forming literary taste according to the Puritan
plain style, without metaphysical complexities or
ornate quotations, but characterized by pointed al-
lusions and imagery drawn from homely situations.
34. A survey of the summe of church discipline.
London, J. Bellamy, 1648. 18, [16], 139, 185-
296, 90, 46, 59 p. 22-6482 BX7240.H7 RBD
Has been called the most important exposition of
Congregational church polity; also includes discus-
sion of philosophical theories affecting the develop-
ment of New England law and politics.
35. The covenant of grace opened . . . Being sev-
eral sermons preached at Hartford in New-
England. London, G. Dawson, 1649. 85 p.
21-9106 BX7233.H6C7 RBD
Bases salvation on a contract between God and
man, a legalistic concept also present in the Puritans'
attitudes towards political and social relations.
36. SARAH (KEMBLE) KNIGHT, 1666-1727
Madam Knight, a lively, intelligent woman
of substantial position in Boston, occupied herself
by keeping a writing school, where, according to
legend, Benjamin Franklin was a pupil. She also
acted as an official recorder of public documents, a
capacity in which she gained sufficient knowledge
of court procedures to be employed from time to
time in the settlement of estates. Having been called
to New York to undertake such a piece of work,
she made the unprecedented decision to go there
on horseback without formal escort, except such as
could be found on the way. The diary she kept
during pauses on the hazardous journey to New
York and back to Boston is marked by gusto, good
humor, earthiness, and the evidence of keen ob-
servation. It is replete with apt, sometimes witty,
comments on the manners of the people she en-
countered, the lack of suitable accommodations, and
the physical aspects of the country traversed. Since
the diary is neither pretentious nor self-conscious, it
provides an unusually valuable picture of people
and conditions along the New England shore at the
beginning of the 18th century.
8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
37. The private journal kept by Madam Knight
on a journey from Boston to New York in the
year 1704. In The journals of Madam Knight and
Rev. Mr. Buckingham from the original manuscripts
written in 1704 and 1710. New York, Wilder &
Campbell, 1825. p. 9-70. 1-13318 F7.K71 RBD
38. The journal of Madam Knight. With an in-
troductory note by George Parker Winship.
Boston, Small, Maynard, 1920. xiv, 72 p.
21-10698 F7.K723 RBD
39. New York, P. Smith, 1935. xiv, 72 p.
35-12871 F7.K724 RBD
Facsimile reprint of the 1920 edition.
40. COTTON MATHER, 1663-1728
A member of the second generation of his
family to be born and reared in America, Cotton
Mather was descended on his maternal side from
the apostolic John Cotton (q. v.). By paternal an-
cestry he belonged to the "Mather dynasty," com-
posed of leaders in the church, in education, and
in matters of state during the better part of a
hundred years. He graduated from Harvard at the
age of fifteen, then took his M. A., and became
associated with his father in the Second Church
of Boston. In 1685 he was ordained as one of its
two ministers and served the same Congregational
church for the remainder of his life. Mather was
essentially a religious conservative in a time of
transition to more liberal theology, and his lot was
not always a happy one. Some of his many scien-
tific interests also were viewed with suspicion by
his contemporaries. For example, when popular
opinion was inflamed against inoculation for small-
pox, he was a persistent advocate of the new
method. His various medical ideas and the pro-
gressiveness of his thought in this field recently
have been analyzed by Otho T. Beall and Richard
H. Shyrock in their Cotton Mather, First Significant
Figure in American Medicine (Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1954. 24r P*)* Also akin to his
interest in scientific observation was his continued
investigation of alleged witches; but these activities
may have contributed to the fanaticism that cul-
minated in the Salem trials whose later odium
Mather shared. His intellectual curiosity operated
in many fields besides science. He made good use
of a personal library, said to rival in size that of
the second William Byrd at Westover. In the
course of his busy life as a clergyman he found time
to write some 450 books and pamphlets. In writ-
ing these he consciously experimented with various
literary styles. However heavy and archaic some
of his work may now appear, all of it is not in this
vein. Moreover, it must be remembered that he
formulated one of the first theories of literary com-
position enunciated in America. Although pri-
marily a preacher and a Calvinist theologian,
Mather has a place in the literature of America, as
well as in its theology and religious history. How-
ever, no collected edition of his works has appeared.
41. The wonders of the invisible world. Boston,
S. Phillips, 1693. 16, 1, 151 (1), 8, 17-32 p.
NN
Concerning the witchcraft trials in Salem, Mass.,
in 1692.
The text was republished in volume 1 of Samuel
G. Drake's compilation entitled The Witchcraft
Delusion in Netu England (Roxbury, Mass.,
E. Woodward, 1866. Woodward's historical series,
no. 5), p. [i]-247. Selections appear in Narratives
of the Witchcraft Cases, 1648-1J06, edited by
George L. Burr (New York, Scribner, 1914. Origi-
nal narratives of early American history tcurrendy
published by Barnes & Noble, New York]), p.
203-251.
42. On witchcraft, being The wonders of
the invisible world. Mount Vernon, N. Y.,
Peter Pauper Press [ 1950? ] 172 p.
50-9778 BF1575.M54 1950
43. Magnalia Christi Americana; or, The ecclesi-
astical history of New-England. London, T.
Parkhurst, 1702. 7 pts. in 1 v.
1-24698 F7.M41 RBD
Covers the years 1620-98 and includes numerous
biographies of notable Puritans, stories of marvels,
histories of Congregational churches, etc. Written
in the author's "Massy" style, based on "fantastic"
English prose of the 17th century, and characterized
by conceits and other artificialities.
44.
With an introd. and occasional notes
by the Rev. Thomas Robbins ... To which
is added a memoir of Cotton Mather by Samuel G.
Drake. Hartford, Conn., S. Andrus, 1855, 1853.
2 v. 3-4343 BR520.M4
45. Bonifacius. Boston, S. Gerrish, 1710. 206 p.
38-12900 BV4500.M35 1710 RBD
A guide for ordinary men, simply written in the
"Plain" style congenial to Puritan taste, to be used in
organizing charitable impulses so that they con-
stitute a workable system which contributes to maxi-
mum benefits. Benjamin Franklin loved the book
and ascribed to its influence his own interest in
being useful as a citizen. Later editions were pub-
lished as Essays To Do Good.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 9
46. The Christian philosopher . . . London, E.
Matthews, 1721. 304 p.
45-45057 BL180.M4 1721 RBD
Represents the author's interest in natural phe-
nomena and science, in which he was a precursor
of Benjamin Franklin and Thomas Jefferson.
47. Manuductio ad ministerium. Boston, T. Han-
cock, 1726. 149 p. RBD
A manual for pastors, belonging to a well-devel-
oped 17th-century literary type; includes an im-
portant statement of the author's theory of literary
style.
48.
tion
Reproduced from the original edi-
. with a bibliographical note by
Thomas J. Holmes and Kenneth B. Murdock. New
York, Published for the Facsimile Text Society by
Columbia University, 1938. xix, 151 p. (Facsimile
Text Society. Publication no. 42.)
38-8438 BV4009.M35 1726a
49. Diary, 1681-1724. Boston, Massachusetts His-
torical Society, 191 1-1 2. 2 v. (Massachusetts
Historical Society. Collections, ser. 7, v. 7-8)
n-14733 F61.M41, ser. 7, v. 7-8
50. Selections from Cotton Mather. Edited with
an introd. and notes by Kenneth B. Murdock.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1926. lxiii, 377 p.
(American authors series, general editor, S. T.
Williams) 26-12606 BX7117.M25
"Selected reading list": p. lxi-lxiii.
51. THOMAS MORTON, fl. 1622-1646
Attracted to New England by a desire to make
money, the adventurer Morton traded guns and
liquor to the Indians in order to secure furs for sale.
He was twice expelled from the country by the Pil-
grims of Plymouth for these offenses and also on
account of the convivial life carried on at his trading
post, Ma-re-Mount. In retaliation, he wrote and
published a satire against the colonists which is un-
usual in the annals of early American literature for
its expressions of enjoyment derived from the primi-
tive environment, for the levity of its tone, and for
its ridicule of fanaticism in the Pilgrims' way of
life. For all these reasons the book has been used
as a source of later literary treatment of the same
themes, the best known of which is probably Haw-
thorne's sketch, "The May-Pole of Merrymount," in
Twice-Told Tales (q. v.).
52. New English Canaan or New Canaan. Am-
sterdam, }. F. Stam, 1637. 188 p.
1-12043 F67.M88
Reprint. With introductory matter and
notes by Charles Francis Adams, Jr. Boston, Prince
Society, 1883. vi, 381 p. (Prince Society, Boston.
Publications [v. 14]) 1-16032 E186.P85, v. 14
F67.M895
53. MARY (WHITE) ROWLANDSON, ca.
1635-ca. 1678
Lancaster, Mass., experienced an Indian raid in
February 1676, while King Philip's War was in
progress. As a result, Mrs. Rowlandson and her
three children were carried into captivity by the
Indians. The youngest child soon died, a victim
of the hardships and exposure to which the pris-
oners were subjected. Finally, however, the mother
and her remaining children were ransomed and
restored to their friends. Mrs. Rowlandson's ac-
count of their terrible experience, expressed in the
tone of resignation and religious piety typical of
Puritan writing at the time, was nevertheless a forth-
right and realistic portrayal of one of the grimmest
aspects of colonization and frontier life in America.
Personal narratives of Indian captivities, of which
this is an outstanding -example, created a body of
literature that attained great popularity among read-
ers. As such, it is responsible in part for the hatred
of Indians that developed in the country, and also
must be considered in connection with the romantic
revolution from that hatred on the part of James
Fenimore Cooper and other novelists who created
idealized Indian characters.
54. The soveraignty & goodness of God . . . being
a narrative of the captivity and restoration of
Mrs. Mary Rowlandson. 2d addition [!] corr. and
amended. Cambridge, Mass., S. Green, 1682. 6,
73 p. MP,
An earlier edition, supposed to have been pub-
lished in the same year, is no longer extant.
55. 2d ed. [i. e., 3d ed.?] Carefully corr.
and purged from abundance of errors which
escaped in the former impression. Boston, S.
Phillips, 1720. 80 p. 8-33637 E87.R862 RBD
Reprints having the title, The Narratire of the
Captivity and Restoration of Mrs. Mary Rowland-
son include the following: (a) a facsimile reprint
edited by Henry S. Nourse and John E. Thayer
(Lancaster, Mass. [Cambridge, Mass., ]. Wilson]
1903. vii, 158 p.); and (b) another reprint edited
by Charles H. Lincoln, in his Narratives of the
Indian Wars, i6j^-i6^() (New York, Scrihncr,
1913. Original narratives of early American his-
tory [recently published by Barnes & Noble, New
York]), p. [ 1071-1(7.
10 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
56. SAMUEL SEW ALL, 1 652-1730
Sewall's success while a student at Harvard
College led to his appointment as a resident fel-
low. Although he had considered entering the
ministry, his final decision was in favor of a career
in public life. Among prominent positions held
by Sewall was that of chief justice of the Superior
Court of Massachusetts. One of his unfortunate ap-
pointments was to membership in the special com-
mission set up to hear the Salem witchcraft cases
of 1692. His part in the trial and condemnation
of various defendants weighed so heavily upon him
that he repudiated his judgment and announced
his penitence in a public confession made in 1697.
His humanitarian sympathies were also manifest
in The Selling of Joseph (1700); reprinted in the
Diary, v. [2] p. 16-20. This pamphlet, one of the
first documents against slavery written in America,
contains the famous dictum: "It is most certain that
all men, as they are sons of Adam, are coheirs; and
have equal right to liberty, and all other outward
comforts of life." With ample means, strong com-
mon sense, and considerable wit, this layman was
qualified to portray in his diary and letters a view
of colonial life in New England quite different from
that presented in the prevailing clerical writings of
the place and period.
57. Diary. 1674-1729. Boston, Massachusetts
Historical Society, 1878-82. 3 v. (Massa-
chusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 5, v.
5-7) 10-12994 F61.M41, ser. 5, v. 5-7
F67.S45
A Puritan Pepysian chronicle that includes trivia,
financial records, intimate domestic details, shrewd
comments on important men and events, and ex-
pressions of sincere religious belief.
Abridgment. Edited by Mark Van
Doren. New York, Macy-Masius, 1927. 272 p.
(An American bookshelf [1])
27-23367 F67.S515
58. Letter-book. [1685-1729] Boston, Massachu-
setts Historical Society, 1886-88. 2 v. (Mas-
sachusetts Historical Society. Collections, ser. 6,
v. 1-2) 10-12993 F61.M41, ser. 6, v. 1-2
59. THOMAS SHEPARD, 1605-1649
In 1635 Shepard followed John Cotton and
Thomas Hooker to New England, there to constitute
with them a triumvirate of highly educated Congre-
gational clergymen who greatly influenced the cul-
tural development of the young colony. In com-
mon with his two friends he had been driven out of
England by Archbishop Laud because of his non-
conformity. Although he was a Puritan of the dis-
senting Calvinistic type, his sermons and theological
writings included emotional and mystical elements
that gave them unusually wide appeal, when de-
livered with the eloquence at his command. In
spite of the fact that he was frequently unable to
revise the rough drafts of his sermons and other
writings before they were published, his works
reached a large audience and attained the dignity
of a collected edition in 1853. According to the
biography by John Albro (Wor\s, v. 1, p. clxxxix)
Jonathan Edwards' A Treatise Concerning Religi-
ous Affections includes some 75 quotations from
Shepard's The Parable of the Ten Virgins (1660).
It has been suggested that Shepard's reputation for
godliness and scholarship was influential in the
choice of his parish at Cambridge, Massachusetts,
for the location of Harvard College.
60. The sincere convert. London, H. Blunden,
1640. [271] p. NN
61. The sound believer. London, R. Dawlman,
1645. 352 p.
52-46573 BV4914.S55 1645 RBD
62. The clear sun-shine of the gospel breaking
forth upon the Indians in New England.
London, J. Bellamy, 1648. 38 p.
6-43056 E78.M4E35
Reprint. In Massachusetts Historical
Society. Collections, ser. 3, v. 4. Cambridge, C.
Folsom, 1832. p. 25-67.
9-889 F6r.M4i, 3d ser., v. 4
63. Autobiography. With additional notices of his
[Shepard's] life and character by Nehemiah
Adams. Boston, Pierce & Parker, 1832. 129 p.
3&-16665 BX7260.S53A3
64. Autobiography. In Colonial Society of Mas-
sachusetts, Boston. Publications [including]
transactions, 1927-1930. v. 27; 1932. Boston,
p. [343]-400. 1-280 F61.C71, v. 27
Based on a fresh study of the original manu-
script first published in the edition by Nehemiah
Adams described in the foregoing reference. A
bibliography is supplied, p. 347-351.
65. Works. Boston, Doctrinal Tract and Book
Society, 1853. 3 v. 39-M93 BX7117.S5
Contains a life of Shepard, by John A. Albro, v. 1,
p. [vii]-cxcii. Volume 3 is wanting in the Library
of Congress set.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / II
66. JOHN SMITH, 1579/80-163 1
Smith's right to be called one of the fathers
of American literature may be defended on several
counts and in spite of certain reservations that are
in order. If he is thought of as a chronicler of his
firsthand observations, it must be admitted that he
was frequendy hasty, careless, repetitious, boastful,
and confused. His reputation for veracity, viewed
more leniendy by contemporary scholars than by
those of an earlier time, must still sustain the charge
that he told taller tales than the facts warranted.
Nevertheless, interest in him as a man of letters
has not suffered from the lack of exactitude in his
writings. His Pocahontas story, whether true or
apocryphal, soon became a legend. As such it in-
spired a literature of its own, which includes James
Nelson Barker's drama, The Indian Princess
(1808), and John Esten Cooke's novel, My Lady
Pocahontas (1885). What Smith stood for in his
own person has, perhaps, had the strongest literary
influence. Coming to America as Elizabethan ex-
plorers went to strange places, he shared a heroic
enterprise as a colonist, in the best tradition of an
English gentleman adventurer. He was to succeed-
ing generations of Americans the typically intrepid
pioneer, frontiersman, and strong man whom they
elevated into a national hero. His writings are,
therefore, not only source materials for understand-
ing early colonial life in Virginia, but also sources
of inspiration for various themes that in different
periods and with different emphasis have been used
by writers in America. The most recent study of
Smith's life, which favors the case for his reliability,
is Bradford Smith's Captain John Smith, His Life
& Legend (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1953. 373 p.).
67. A true relation of such occurrences ... as
hath hapned in Virginia since the first plant-
ing of that collony . . . London, J. Tappe, 1608.
22 1. NN
First account of the first permanent English
colony established in America.
68. A map of Virginia. Oxford, Eng., J. Barnes,
1612. 39, no p. fold. map.
Rc-2805 F229.S69 RBD
Includes a detailed account of the physical aspects
of Virginia and of the Indian way of life observed
there.
69. A description of New-England . . . London,
R. Clerke, 1616. 61 p.
7-15406 F7.S63 RBD
Favorable description of the natural resources of
New England, designed to attract settlers; part of
Smith's campaign to promote colonization in that
region, an enterprise in which he was interested
for some 20 years after leaving Virginia in 1609.
70. The generall historie of Virginia, New-Eng-
land, and the Summer Isles . . . London, M.
Sparkes, 1624. 248 p. illus.
Rc-2796 F229.S61 RBD
Repeats and enlarges upon various earlier writ-
ings; first appearance of the story of his rescue by
Pocahontas.
71. Travels and works. Edited by Edward Arber.
New ed., with a biographical and critical
introd. by A. G. Bradley. Edinburgh, J. Grant,
1910. 2 v. (984 p.) illus. Wn-io F229.S655
Bibliographies: v. 1, p. xxvii-xxx, [cxxx]-
cxxxvi.
Reprints of Smith's shorter narratives about Vir-
ginia, and of Book IV of his General History of
Virginia are contained in Narratives of Early Vir-
ginia, 1606-162$ (1907), p. [25J-204; [289J-407,
a collection edited by Lyon G. Tyler, for the Scrib-
ner series, Original narratives of early American
history, recently published by Barnes & Noble.
72. EDWARD TAYLOR, 1 642-1 729
Taylor was a devout Puritan clergyman who
lived and wrote in Massachusetts during the late
17th and early 18th century. Nothing considerable
was known of his poetical work until a representa-
tive selection of it was made from a manuscript
belonging to Yale University. The result was pub-
lished in 1939. His disinclination to permit his
poetry to reach a contemporary audience may have
stemmed from a fear that it revealed emotions too
strong, in imagery too worldly, to be compatible
with strict Puritan orthodoxy. Upon the appear-
ance in print of the poetical works, a new name
was therefore added to the short roster of colonial
American poets, and a new light was cast on the
deeper esthetic and emotional elements in Puritan
religious thought. In structure, Taylor's verse be-
longs to the tradition of religious poetry represented
by John Donne, George Herbert, and other English
metaphysical poets of the 17th century. In con-
tent and style it combines, however, two personal
departures from more typical Puritan poetry that
give it unusual variety and interest: its piety is
expressed by means of imagery derived from rich
colors, sweet odors, and other delights perceived
by the senses; and its reality is increased by con-
trasting imagery based on everyday experiences of
ordinary Puritans, expressed in their own colloquial
language. Taylor has been called "The greatest
poet of New England before the nineteenth cen-
12 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tury" {Literary History of the United States, v. i,
p. 65).
73. Poetical works. Edited with an introd. and
notes by Thomas H. Johnson. New York,
Rockland Editions, 1939. 231 p.
39-34182 PS850.T2 1939 RBD
Notes to the edition are supplied on p. 189-199;
Taylor's library is described and the contents listed,
p. 201-220; the manuscript of Poetical Worlds is
discussed, p. 221-228; a bibliography of Taylor's
manuscripts, printed works, and sources for the
study of his life and achievements are found on p.
229-231.
74. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1943. 231 p. A45-4662 DCU
75. NATHANIEL WARD, ca. 1578-1652
Another Cambridge University graduate driven
out of England by Archbishop Laud, Ward in 1634
brought to New England his exceptional attain-
ments in the law and in the Puritan ministry, his
second profession. Wide experience of the world,
not only in England but on the Continent, increased
his stature. Although Ward was anything but a
democrat in the modern understanding of the term,
he was well-versed in the rights of the individual
under British law. For that reason, his draft of
the first code of laws for Massachusetts, adopted
with some revisions in 1641, contained certain pro-
visions for safeguarding such rights. Thus, even
within the stronghold of authoritarian Puritanism,
the heritage of British justice was preserved and
its concepts made a part of American civilization.
Ward's other contribution to early American let-
ters (cited below) was a true 17th-century pam-
phleteering satire, directed against the sins of the
times. In it the writer employed Puritan plain
style mixed with other elements derived from Eliza-
bethan and Jacobean literature, in which he was
apparendy steeped.
76. The simple cobler of Aggawam in America
... By Theodore de la Guard [pseud.] Lon-
don, S. Bowtell, 1647. 80 p. MiU-C
NN
77. Edited by Lawrence C. Wroth. New
York, Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints, 1937.
80 p. 38-18217 PS858.W2S5 1647a RBD
78. [The body of liberties] A coppie of The
liberties of the Massachusetts Collonie in New
England. In Massachusetts Historical Society.
Collections, ser. 3, v. 8. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1843.
p. [2i6]-237. 9-889 F61.M41, ser. 3, v. 8
First printed edition of the document of 1641.
Cf. p. [191].
79. MICHAEL WIGGLESWORTH, 1631-1705
A Puritan clergyman in Maiden, Massachu-
setts, Wigglesworth apparently wrote his famous
long poem, The Day of Doom, in ballad measures
to attract unlearned readers and so to instruct them,
for the salvation of their souls, in the dogmas of
Calvinism. The poem immediately became a best
seller, by virtue of its appeal to the emotions, beliefs,
and literary taste prevailing at the time. Said to
have been distributed not only as a book, but also
in the form of broadsides, the work so far surpassed
Mrs. Bradstreet's poems in public favor that the
first edition was literally read to pieces and has
entirely disappeared. The writer's potential poetic
powers were also sacrificed to purposes of edification
in two other poetical works: God's Controversy
with New-England, written in 1662 but first printed
in Proceedings, Jan. 1871-Mar. 1873, published by
the Massachusetts Historical Society, v. 12, 1873, p.
83-93; and Meat Out of the Eater (1670).
80. The day of doom; or, A description of the
great and last judgment. London, J. Sims,
1673. 92 p. RPJCB
The Literary History of the United States, v. 3,
p. 773, and the Dictionary of American Biography,
v. 20, p. 195, refer to an edition of 1662. The fore-
going reference is to the earliest edition currently
described in the National Union Catalog at the
Library of Congress; successive references illustrate
the vitality of the work and the range of time repre-
sented in the publication of various editions.
81. Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Eng., J. White,
171 1. 72 p. PS871.D3 1711 RBD
With other poems. Also a memoir
of the author, autobiography, and sketch of his
funeral sermon by Rev. Cotton Mather . . . From
the 6th ed., 1715. New York, American News Co.,
1867. 119 p.
26-5364 PS871.D3 1867 RBD
Edited by John W. Dean and William H. Burr.
83.
With other poems. Edited with an
introd. by Kenneth B. Murdock. New York,
Spiral Press, 1929. xi, 94 p. illus.
30-11066 PS871.D3 1929
84. ROGER WILLIAMS, ca. 1 603-1 683
When Williams became a Separatist and as an
ordained clergyman emigrated to New England in
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 13
1631, he sought a country in which to live accord-
ing to Christ's teachings, as he read them in the
Bible. However, according to orthodox Puritan-
ism, his interpretations, being wrong, led him into
various heretical beliefs. These included his con-
viction that the individual had a right to freedom of
conscience without interference from civil magis-
trates, and that it was necessary to make the church
democratic. He also held that the appropriation of
land from the Indians without paying for it was a
violation of human rights and therefore a sin. By
virtue of unceasing and vociferous efforts to imple-
ment these convictions until they became the basis
of action in Massachusetts, he finally came to be
considered a disturber of the peace and was banished
from the colony into the outlying wilderness. Go-
ing south to a section still occupied by Indians,
whose lifelong friend he was, Williams became the
founder of the Rhode Island colony. The writings
in which he expressed his ideas were theological for
the most part, involved, and long-winded; for that
reason they have been difficult to read and have be-
come so rare as to have been sometimes forgotten.
But the elevation of his thought, the realism of his
language, and the spaciousness of his ideas concern-
ing freedom and authority caused his pioneer testi-
mony on behalf of liberalism to pass into the stream
of American democratic thought, from which, more
than a century after he died, emerged the principles
embodied in the Constitution of the United States.
The significance of Williams for the American
tradition is discussed by Perry Miller in his Roger
Williams (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953.
273 p.), a work that includes numerous extracts
from Williams' writings, provided in a modern text
for ease of reading, particularly with respect to spell-
ing, capitalization, punctuation, and abbreviations.
85. A key into the language of America . . .
London, G. Dexter, 1643. 197 p. RBD
Comments on various aspects of Indian life, ac-
companied by vocabularies suited to each aspect.
Reprint. In Rhode Island Historical
Society. Collections, v. 1. Providence, 1827.
p. 17-163. Rc-2948 F76.R47, v. 1
Reprint. 5th ed. Introd. by Howard M.
Chapin. Providence, Rhode Island and Providence
Plantation Tercentenary Committee, 1936. 205 p.
37-5003 E99.N16W7
PM2003.Z5W4 1936
86. The bloudy tenent, of persecution, for cause of
conscience . . . [London?] 1644. 247 p.
10-12684 BV741.W58 1644 RBD
This polemic was attacked by John Cotton in his
The Bloudy Tenent Washed and Made White in
the Bloud of the Lambe (q. v.), to which Williams
replied in The Bloody Tenent Yet More Bloody
(London, C. Calvert, 1652. 320 p.).
87. Experiments of spiritual life and health.
London, 1652. 59 p. OO
Edited with a historical introd. by
Winthrop S. Hudson. Philadelphia, West-
minster Press, 1951. 103 p.
51-7794 BV4500.W6 195 1
Devotional book which is a directory of that
spiritual life in which the Puritan "acquired a
sturdiness of character and inner serenity . . .
[and] became the creator of a culture . . . that was
destined to place its stamp upon the Western world
for three centuries to come." Introduction, p. 23-24.
89. Works. In Narrangansett Club, Providence.
Publications. (First series) v. 1-6. Provi-
dence [Providence Press Co., printers] 1866-74.
6 v. 3-20323 F76.N21
Subscribers' edition.
Chiefly reprints of the original editions of the
works of Roger Williams.
No more published.
Contents. — v. 1. Biographical Introduction, by
R. A. Guild. A key into the language of America,
edited by J. H. Trumbull. Letter of John Cotton
and Roger Williams' reply, edited by R. A. Guild.
1866. — v. 2. John Cotton's answer to Roger Wil-
liams, edited by J. L. Diman. Queries, of highest
consideration, edited by R. A. Guild. 1867. — v. 3.
The bloudy tenent of persecution, edited by S. L.
Caldwell. 1867. — v. 4. The bloody tenent yet
more bloody, edited by S. L. Caldwell. 1870. — v. 5.
George Fox digg'd out of his burrovves, edited by
J. L. Diman. 1872. — v. 6. The letters of Roger
Williams, 1632-1682. Now first collected. Edited
by J. R. Bardett. 1874.
90. JOHN WINTHROP, 1588-1649
Winthrop, many times governor of the Massa-
chusetts Bay Colony, began his journal by chroni-
cling the events of the voyage to America. Once the
destination had been reached, the journal became
a record of public and private affairs in die colony
during the remainder of his life. As such, it added
to American letters a contemporary view oi the New
England character and conscience under Puritan
domination, twin themes treated ever since by some
of the best writers produced in the United Stale v
Winthrop's other individual pieces include . / Model
of Christian Charity (In Massachusetts Historical
Society. Collections, ser. 3, v. 7; iS^S. Boston, y-
14 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
31-48), written about 1630 as a guide to the colonists
in their attempt to live together in a cooperative
society according to Biblical principles. His speech
to the General Court, made after he was vindicated
of a charge against him, contains his famous defini-
tion of liberty under authority; it may be found in
Hosmer's edition of the Journal, v. 2, p. 237-239.
An extraordinary correspondence with Margaret
Tyndal, his third wife, reflects a particularly happy
marriage of two strong Puritan personalities. These
letters have been collected in Some Old Puritan Love
Letters, edited by Joseph H. Twichell (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1893, 1894. 187 p.). Various love
letters, official documents, family correspondence,
and business communications are available in two
additional sources: Robert C. Winthrop's Life and
Letters of John Winthrop, 2d ed. (Boston, Little,
Brown, 1869. 2 v.); and the Winthrop Papers
(Boston, Massachusetts Historical Society, 1929-47.
5 v.). The last is frequently called an unsurpassed
collection of colonial papers.
91. [Journal] A history of New England from
1630 to 1649. [Edited] by James Savage.
New ed. with additions and corrections. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1853. 2 v. 1-12052 F67.W783
A first edition of part of the text appeared as A
Journal of the Transactions and Occurrences in the
Settlement of Massachusetts and the Other New
England Colonies . . . (Hartford, Conn., E. Bab-
cock, 1790. 364 p.). James K. Hosmer also edited
the text, calling it Winthrop's Journal, "History of
New England" (New York, Scribner, 1908. 2 v.
Original narratives of early American history [re-
cently distributed by Barnes & Noble, New York]).
92. JOHN WISE, 1652-1725
A Harvard graduate who served several par-
ishes in Massachusetts as pastor, Wise opposed In-
crease and Cotton Mather's plan for a central church
government with authority over individual Congre-
gational churches in New England. The earlier of
his two works described below is a biting satire
directed against the Mather proposals; the second
treatise is a more formal and systematic presentation
of his belief that in church as in state good govern-
ment must be grounded in natural law, reason, and
virtuous democratic practices. These were early
expressions of views that became more and more
prominent in American political theory until they
were finally embodied in the Declaration of Inde-
pendence. The first full-length study of Wise was
made by George A. Cook in his John Wise, Early
American Democrat (New York, King's Crown
Press, 1952. 246 p.). It includes a bibliography of
the author's writings and of primary and secondary
sources for the study of his life and thought, as well
as extensive documentation in the form of notes.
Modern reprints of Wise's works are not available
at this time.
93. The churches quarrel espoused . . . New
York, W. Bradford, 1713. 116 p. PHi
94. A vindication of the government of New Eng-
land churches. Boston, N. Boone, 1717. 105,
12 p. MH
95. Boston, J. Boyles, 1772. 271, [12] p.
23-5885 BX7136.W6 1772a RBD
Includes The Churches Quarrel Espoused (p.
[75]-i8o).
B. The Revolution and the New Nation (i 764-1820)
The many crises of the Revolutionary era in
America had a strong impact on its literature. The
conflicts of ideas and interests, which finally cul-
minated in a long war, had a disruptive effect on
society, of which literature is the voice. Neighbors
disagreed with neighbors; the economic balance
was disturbed; education suffered; and uncer-
tainty about survival itself troubled the minds of
the people. All this anxiety and confusion did not
contribute to that slate of "emotion recollected in
tranquillity" which is most favorable to creative
writing; nor was it to be expected that a large
audience under such circumstances would support
the publication of wor\s having literary rather than
political interest.
The prevailing mood of the colonists, however,
inspired much of such literary effort as was made.
Poets became ballad-makers in praise of feats of
arms. Satires and political allegories directed
against the British were well received. The author-
ship of one war song might be a surer way to con-
temporary fame than the publication of several
sustained but unexciting worlds from the same
hand. At least one literary stylist and propagandist
of genius produced political pamphlets that were
avidly read. Much of the best writing of the period,
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 15
indeed, was political in character. The remarkable
men who were first the architects of the new Na-
tion and later its statesmen and diplomats left a
whole library of official and personal papers to en-
rich American letters. In their various assignments
they wrote innumerable documents, engaged in
extensive correspondence, delivered addresses, and
drafted declarations expressed in clear, sound Eng-
lish prose that sometimes rose to heights of genuine
literary style. For descriptions of some of these
important expressions of the American spirit, even
if not in a strict sense part of its literature, the reader
is referred to Chapter VIII, General History. How-
ever, a few of the shorter pieces from these hands
are included in the references that follow, by virtue
of having attained the status of American classics.
The spirit that had helped to create a new nation
finally passed over also into its literature, there to
develop a new trend: nationalism. Writers began
to raise their voices in praise of themes drawn from
American life and experience. The advancing
frontier, destined to excite authors of belles-lettres
for generations, began to emerge as the setting for
a few novels. Americans were encouraged, at least
upon one occasion, to loo\ to their own people to
produce writers of the future that would equal in
greatness any that belonged to England's past. A
battery of American "firsts" appeared: the first
tragedy by an American acted on the professional
stage in America; the first American professional
novelist at wor\; and the first social comedy intro-
ducing a Yankee character written and staged. In
the midst of these innovations, the use in America of
the Addisonian essay, the novel of Gothic horror
or picaresque design, the play with a classical locale,
and poetry written in rhymed couplets and poetic
diction still pointed to continued reliance upon Eng-
lish and European models. But the transition from
imported to native themes, forms, and styles was
at last beginning to be made. This was a seedtime
for American literature; the abundant harvest was
to come later.
96. ABIGAIL (SMITH) ADAMS, 1744-1818
A notable letter-writer in her own or any gen-
eration, Mrs. Adams' life and fortunes placed her
in a strategic position to observe and comment upon
the social, political, and domestic scenes in America
during the Revolutionary War and the early Na-
tional period. Her residence in France and in Brit-
ain during her husband's diplomatic service in those
countries resulted in correspondence describing
manners and customs abroad, a type of writing that
became increasingly popular in later periods of
American literature. When John Adams was
elected the first Vice President, and later the second
President of the United States, Abigail was by his
side, observing and recording in intimate letters her
impressions of places, persons, and events. Her
correspondence, therefore, provides an example of
the art of letter-writing as practiced by an unusual
1 8th century New England woman; even more, it
constitutes a documentary record of the civilization
Mrs. Adams saw in the making during a fateful
half-century of American life.
97. Letters. With an introductory memoir by
her grandson, Charles Francis Adams [1807-
1886] Boston, C. C. Little & J. Brown, 1840. lxiii,
447 p. 16-3756 E322.1.A3 RBD
98. 4th ed., rev. and enl. Boston, Wil-
kins, Carter, 1848. lxi, 472 p.
16-5357 E322.1.A32
Includes letters bearing dates from 1761 to 18 16.
99. Familiar letters of John Adams and his wife,
Abigail Adams, during the Revolution. With
a memoir of Mrs. Adams by Charles Francis Adams
[1807-1886] New York, Hurd & Houghton, 1876.
xxxii, 424 p. 4-16982 E322.A518
100. New letters, 1788-1801. Edited with an in-
trod. by Stewart Mitchell. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1947. xiii, 281 p. 47-11763 E322.1.A37
Letters to Mrs. Adams' sister, Mary (Smith)
Cranch; reprinted with a revised introduction from
the Proceedings of the American Antiquarian So-
ciety, Apr. 18, 1945-Oct. 17, 1945, new ser., v. 55,
I947,P- [95]~232> [2991-444-
101. JOEL BARLOW, 1754-1812
Born in rural Connecticut and educated at
Yale, Barlow was to become a citizen of the world.
His first important connection as a writer was with
the Connecticut (or Hartford) Wits, or Yale Poets,
as the informal group has been variously called.
These men from the Hartford area were animated
not only by a love of literature but also by their post-
Revolutionary patriotism to initiate a truly national
literature that would reflect American principles
and accomplishments. It was this stimulus that led
to the composition of Barlow's American epic. His
prose works, chiefly political in character, were
written in praise of democratic institutions support-
ing the cause of human rights throughout the world.
During a residence of 17 years abroad, chiefly in
Europe, he engaged in diplomatic assignments from
the United States and also amassed a fortune from
his commercial transactions. Fortified by his
wealth, he built near Washington his estate, Kalo-
rama, where he provided a sort of salon for the dis-
l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cussion of arts, letters, and the good of mankind.
Included in the last of these categories was a cause
that he promoted earnestly but unsuccessfully: that
of an American national university, endowed by
Congress, and dedicated to the discovery as well as
the diffusion of knowledge. Important selections
from Barlow's correspondence with his wife and
others are found in Charles B. Todd's Life and
Letters of Joel Barlow (New York, Putnam, 1886.
306 p.).
102. Hasty pudding: a poem. In three cantos.
Written at Chambery, in Savoy, January
1793 . . . [New Haven, Conn., 1796] 12 p. RPB
Whimsical mock-epic, spontaneously written in
praise of a familiar American dish known as hasty
pudding, or cornmeal mush.
103. Political writings. New ed. corr. New York,
Mott& Lyon, 1796. xvi, 258 p.
9-28922 JC211.B27 RBD
Contents. — Advice to the privileged orders in
the several states of Europe [1792-1793]. — A letter
to the National Convention of France [1792]. — A
letter addressed to the people of Piedmont, on the
advantages of the French Revolution [1795].— The
conspiracy of kings; a poem addressed to the in-
habitants of Europe from another quarter of the
world [1792].
104. The Columbiad, a poem. Philadelphia, C. &
A. Conrad; Baltimore, Conrad Lucas, 1807.
454 p. 2-25640 E120.B255 RBD
Epic in Miltonic style, based on the life of Christo-
pher Columbus and portraying not only the future
glories of America but also a vision of the coming
together of nations into a league for the common
good; an amplification of the author's The Vision
of Columbus (Hartford, Conn., Hudson & Good-
win, 1787, 258 p.).
105. HUGH HENRY BRACKENRIDGE,
1748-1816
Brackenridge graduated from the C°^ege oi
New Jersey (afterwards Princeton University),
when the American Revolution was brewing and
a spirit of nationalism was beginning to develop.
Two early dramas, The Battle of Bunkers-Hill
(1776) and The Death of General Montgomery
(1777), were patriotic in their inspiration. It was
after he became a lawyer and a judge, with head-
quarters in Pittsburgh on the Western frontier, that
he wrote the novel for which he is best known.
Avoiding the models provided by sentimental, di-
dactic, and Gothic novels that were the fashion in
fiction at that time, Brackenridge took Don
Quixote for his prototype. His long, picaresque
narrative, arranged in episodes, portrays backwoods
and frontier scenes and conditions with humor and
irony. It was also used by the author to express
his own anxieties and certain disillusionment con-
cerning the trend of nationalism in the country.
His satire was directed chiefly against excesses com-
mitted in the name of democracy, office-seekers un-
qualified to hold office, political incapacity, and
social insecurity in a country so recently victorious
in war. As a stylist, Brackenridge has been com-
pared favorably with contemporary writers in
England.
106. Modern chivalry: containing the adventures
of Captain John Farrago and Teague O'Re-
gan, his servant. Philadelphia, J. M'Culloch, 1792.
2 v. in 1. NN
First edition of the first part of the novel.
107. Philadelphia, Johnson & Warner,
1815. 4 v.
6-15211 PS708.B5M6 1815 RBD
Final revised version of installments originally
issued in 1792-93, 1797, 1804, 1805, and a fourth
volume made up of new material.
Edited with introd., chronology, and
bibliography, by Claude M. Newlin. New
York, American Book Co., 1937. xliv, 808 p.
(American fiction series; general editor, Harry H.
Clark) 37-27219 PS708.M5M6 1937
109. CHARLES BROCKDEN BROWN, 1771-
1810
Brown was the first native-born author to make
a profession of novel-writing in America. Because
of his connections with the periodicals of the period,
both editorially and as a contributor, he has been
called also the father of literary criticism in the
United States. His work is particularly significant
in the history of national literary development be-
cause in it he applied his theory that American lit-
erature should profit by and develop springs of
action and interest that differed essentially from
those of Europe. Although the themes used to
carry out this idea were chosen for their qualities
of Gothic horror, they were developed realistically.
Didactic elements were added for moral instruction,
but each of the novels written in 1799-1800 was
infused with essentially romantic intensity and emo-
tional appeal. So designed, the books satisfied the
taste of the age and were read with approval in Eng-
land and on the Continent, although interest in
American writing was not widespread abroad at that
time. Selections from Brown's diaries, letters, and
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / VJ
the "rarest of his printed works" are included in his
Life, undertaken by Paul Allen and completed by
William Dunlap (Philadelphia, J. P. Parke, 1815.
2 v.). Recent biographical and critical studies are:
The Sources and Influence of the Novels of Charles
Brockden Brown, by Lulu R. Wiley (New York,
Vantage Press, 1950. [387] p.); and David L.
Clark's Charles Broc\den Brown, Pioneer Voice of
America (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press,
1952. 363 p.). For the latter book, unpublished
papers of the Brown family constitute an important
source.
1 10. Wieland; or, The transformation. New York,
H. Caritat, 1798. 298 p.
9-2504 PZ3.B814W RBD
Based in part on an actual murder committed
by a New York farmer while under the influence
of hallucinations.
in. Together with Memoirs of Car win
the Biloquist, a fragment. Edited with an
introd. by Fred Lewis Pattee. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1926. xlix, 351 p. (American au-
thors series; general editor, Stanley T. Williams)
26-3794 PZ3.B814W9
112. Ormond; or, The secret witness. New York,
H. Caritat, 1799. iv, 338 p.
A31-1124 CSmH
113. Edited with introd., chronology, and
bibliography, by Ernest Marchand. New
York, American Book Co., 1937. li, 242 p. (Ameri-
can fiction series; general editor, Harry H. Clark)
37-4089 PZ3.B814O13
114. Edgar Hundey; or, Memoirs of a sleep-
walker. Philadelphia, H. Maxwell, 1799.
3v. 5-41074 PZ3.B814E RBD
Illustrates an early use of material drawn from
frontier life, with its dangers from savage Indians
and wild animals.
115. Edited with an introd. by David Lee
Clark. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xxiii,
308 p. (Modern readers' series)
28-13915 PZ3.B814E12
1 16. Arthur Mervyn; or, Memoirs of the year 1793.
Philadelphia, H. Maxwell, 1799. 2 v.
6-18972 PZ3.B814A RBD
Volume 2 has imprint: New-York, Printed and
sold by G. F. Hopkins, 1800.
A novel describing Philadelphia during the yellow
fever epidemic in 1793.
4.! 1240— 60 3
117. Novels. Philadelphia, McKay, 1887. 6 v.
17-13039 to 17-13043 PZ3.B814
Contents. — v. 1. Memoir. Wieland. — v. 2-3.
Arthur Mervyn. — v. 4. Edgar Huntley. — v. 5. Jane
Talbot. — v. 6. Ormond. Clara Howard.
118. TIMOTHY DWIGHT, 1752-1817
Dwight's interest in literature, first as a stu-
dent and later a tutor at Yale College, led to a con-
nection that encouraged his efforts to write. This
association was with the Connecticut Wits, whose
members tried to promote belletristic writing dur-
ing the social and political upheavals of the Revolu-
tionary period. Under that inspiration he eventu-
ally produced three poetical works: a very long epic
showing the influences of Alexander Pope and John
Milton, in which Biblical events and characters were
presented with American characteristics; a laborious
satire directed against the ideas of Voltaire, David
Hume, and other skeptical thinkers of the 18th
century; and a meditative, descriptive poem praising
life in his own parish of Greenfield. Dwight's
eminence as a clergyman and his outstanding con-
tributions to education as a teacher and as president
of Yale College tend to outweigh his poetic work,
which is now chiefly of historical interest. In the
literature of his country he is best remembered,
perhaps, by two somewhat less ambitious pieces of
writing: "Columbia," a war song written while he
was a chaplain in the American army; and Travels
in New England and New Yor\ (1821-1822), de-
scribed in the section treating of Travel and
Travelers.
119. The conquest of Canaan; a poem, in eleven
books. Hartford [Conn.] E. Babcock, 1785.
304 p. 45-52941 PS739.C7 1785 RBD
Epic celebrating the Old Testament story of
Joshua's conquest of Canaan.
120. The triumph of infidelity: a poem. Printed
in the world [n. p.] 1788. 40 p.
AC901.H3, v. 56 RBD
Volume 56, no. 7, of the Hazard pamphlet
collection.
121. Greenfield Hill: a poem, in seven parts.
I. The prospect. II. The flourishing village.
III. The burning of Fairfield. IV. The destruction
of the Pequods. V. The clergyman's advice to the
villagers. VI. The farmer's advice to the villagers.
VII. The vision; or, Prospect of the future happi-
ness of America. New York, Childs & Swaine, 1794.
183 p. 18-23749 AC901.D8, v. 48 RBD
AC901.M5, v. 314, no. 1 RBD
l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
[Duane pamphlets, v. 48, no. 1; Miscellaneous
pamphlets, v. 314, no. 1.]
122. BENJAMIN FRANKLIN, 1706-1790
Printer, publisher, scientist, diplomat as popu-
lar abroad as at home, and statesman, Franklin
made his chief contributions to American letters
outside the limits of literary art as an end in itself.
For that reason his collected works are entered with
those of his peers under General History, and ref-
erence is made to his educational and scientific
writings under those topics. In this section devoted
to literature are described only his Memoirs (now
called his Autobiography), a collection of family
letters, and certain witty pieces that indicate his
place among humorists. The style of these less for-
mal works preserves the flavor of the 18th century
English essayists — Addison and Steele among
others — who were his masters in the art of writing.
Taken in conjunction with Poor Richard's Alma-
nac^, with which Franklin was associated from
1732 to 1758, they reveal the author's clarity of
thought and expression, his proverbial wisdom, and
his ability to record for posterity basic ideas influ-
ential in establishing American civilization as it was
at the beginning of the National period. Recent
studies of Franklin's relation to the American
heritage include: Verner W. Crane's Benjamin
Franklin and a Rising People (Boston, Litde,
Brown, 1954. 219 p.) and I. Bernard Cohen's Ben-
jamin Franklin: His Contribution to the American
Tradition (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 320
p.). The latter publication belongs to the Makers
of the American tradition series and consists of a
collection of pertinent selections from Franklin's
writings, accompanied by Professor Cohen's com-
mentaries and an extensive introduction.
123. [Autobiography] Memoires de la vie privee
de Benjamin Franklin, ecrits par lui-meme, et
adresses a son fils . . . Paris, Buisson, 1791. [207]
p. 7-7839 E802.6.F7F1 RBD
First edition of the Autobiography, to the year
173 1, with additional material translated from
[James Jones?] Wilmer's Memoirs of the Late Dr.
Benjamin Frankjin (London, A. Grant, 1790. 94
p.). Cf. Paul L. Ford's Franklin Bibliography
(Brooklyn, 1889. 467 p.), no. 383.
124. Memoirs of the life and writings of
Benjamin Franklin . . . written by himself
to a late period, and continued to the time of his
death, by his grandson, William Temple Franklin
. . . and a selection from his political, philosophical,
and miscellaneous works. London, H. Colburn,
1818. 3 v. 19-14887 E302.F82 1818 RBD
The Autobiography, in incomplete form but with
various additions by W. T. Franklin, appears in
volume one.
125. Edited from his manuscript, with
notes and an introd., by John Bigelow. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott, 1868. 409 p.
14-14054 E302.6.F7A2 1868 RBD
The first appearance of the work from Franklin's
own copy, the first publication in English of the
four parts, and the first publication of the "oudine"
prepared by Franklin as a guide to be used when
writing his own life. See Ford's Franklin Bibli-
ography, no. 423.
126.
Memoirs. Parallel text ed., com-
prising the texts of Franklin's original manu-
script, the French translation by Louis Guillaume le
Veillard, the French translation published by Buis-
son, and the version edited by William Temple
Franklin, his grandson. Edited with an introd. and
explanatory notes, by Max Farrand. Published in
cooperation with the Huntington Library. Berke-
ley, University of California Press, 1949. xxxix,
422 p. 49-8616 E302.6.F7A2 1949a
"Mr. Farrand's Introduction is a reprint, with a
few minor revisions, of his article, 'Benjamin
Franklin's Memoirs,' which appeared in the Hunt-
ington Library Bulletin, No. 10, October 1936."
The essay includes a detailed statement of the dif-
ficulties surrounding the effort to establish a true
text of Franklin's own composition, without changes
and emendations by other hands. Column one of
this edition is based on the manuscript in Franklin's
own handwriting, now in the Huntington Library.
Comparison with versions in the other three col-
umns, and the faithfulness of the original manu-
script to Franklin's style of writing, provide the stu-
dent with the standard version as it exists today.
Now printed for the first time from
the manuscript as Franklin wrote it, and in-
cluding his preliminary outline; with an introd. by
Carl Van Doren and drawings by William Sharp.
New York, Heritage Press, 1951. xix, 233 p.
51-4833 E302.6.F7A2 195 1
128. Satires & bagatelles. [Compiled by Paul Mc-
Pharlin.] Detroit, Fine Book Circle, 1937.
139 p. 37-16487 PS745.A3M25
129. The letters of Benjamin Franklin & Jane
Mecom, edited with an introd. by Carl Van
Doren. Princeton, Published for the American
Philosophical Society by Princeton University Press,
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 19
1950. xx, 380 p. (Memoirs of the American
Philosophical Society, v. 27.)
50-10857 E302.6.F75A185
Q11.P612, v. 27
130. Franklin's wit & folly: The bagatelles.
Richard E. Amacher [editor] New Bruns-
wick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1953. xiv,
188 p. 53-11052 PS750.B3 1953
Bibliography: p. 177-184.
A collection based on a partial list of Franklin's
imprints from his private press at Passy; includes
several serious pieces but omits a few of the humor-
ous pieces, or bagatelles, among them some of the
best known. Important for critical and textual
commentaries.
131. Representative selections, with introd. bibli-
ography, and notes, by Frank Luther Mott
and Chester E. Jorgenson. New York, American
Book Co., 1936. clxxxviii, 544 p. (American writ-
ers series) 36-10175 PS745.A3M7
Includes an exact facsimile of Poor Richard Im-
proved, 1753 (p. 225-260), a volume of a serial later
published as Poor Richard's Almanac\, a title by
which the whole set is commonly known. For
selected bibliography of works by and about Frank-
lin see p. cli-clxxxviii.
132. A Benjamin Franklin reader. Edited by
Nathan G. Goodman. New York, Crowell,
1945. xxi, 818 p. 45-10550 PS745.A3G5
Contains the Autobiography in the John Bigelow
text. Additional selections include: expressions of
Franklin's religious beliefs; papers reflecting his in-
terests as an editor and publisher; selections from
Poor Richard's Almanac^; essays and humorous
pieces; family papers; and miscellaneous letters and
documents.
133. Autobiographical writings; selected and
edited by Carl Van Doren. New York, Vi-
king Press, 1945. xvi, 810 p.
45-9128 E302.6.F7A2 1945
A selection in large part brought together from
various existing collected editions of Franklin's
works, but includes also: 50 letters and other papers
omitted by the most recent collected edition known
to Van Doren; and 50 pieces not previously printed
in full. Notes accompanying the selections indicate
the sources used in preparing the texts.
134. PHILIP MORIN FRENEAU, 1 752-1 832
Journalist, editor, sea captain, farmer, and
"poet of the American Revolution," Freneau was
completely devoted to America and its way of life,
an allegiance most significandy made manifest in
his poetical works. These he wrote in two veins:
lyrical, imaginative, and reflective poems concerned
with nature and human destiny; and patriotic or
political verses for the times, characterized by the
vigor of their satire. In the first category the poems
were early documents of the romantic movement in
American literature, which reached its height in the
next century. The second group was characterized
by poems celebrating America and her struggle for
independence and democracy, or castigating enemies
of these ideals, whether in Britain or at home.
"Literary Importations," a poem apparently written
in 1786, gives characteristic expression to his zeal for
an American culture entirely divorced from English
influence. Critics have said that Freneau had the
finest poetic talent produced in America after Ed-
ward Taylor and before William Cullen Bryant —
an endowment sacrified in part to the making of
propaganda verses. The poet's religious and philo-
sophical speculations are considered in Nelson F.
Adkins' Philip Freneau and the Cosmic Enigma
(New York, New York University Press, 1949.
84 p.).
135. Poems written chiefly during the late war.
Philadelphia, F. Bailey. 1786. 407 p.
PS755.A1 1786 RBD
136. Poems written and published during the
American Revolutionary War, and now re-
published from the original manuscripts; inter-
spersed with translations from the ancients, and
other pieces not heretofore in print. 3d ed. Phila-
delphia, L. R. Bailey, 1809. 2 v.
30-20889 PS755.A2 1809 RBD
137. A collection of poems on American affairs,
and a variety of other subjects chiefly moral
and political; written between the year 1797 and
the present time. New York, D. Longworth, 1815.
2 v. PS755.A2 1815 RBD
138. The poems of Philip Freneau, poet of the
American Revolution. Edited for the Prince-
ton Historical Association by Fred Lewis Pattee.
Princeton, N. J., The University Library, 1902-07.
3 v. 3-9603 PS755.A2 1902
"Bibliography of the poetry of Philip Freneau":
v. 3, p. 407-417.
The editor explains (v. 1, p. vi-vii) that the edi-
tion includes the most significant of Freneau's poems
arranged in order of their first printing and in some
cases, particularly those of the poetical pamphlets
dealing with the American Revolution, in their
original form, not as cut down later by Freneau.
20 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The editions of 1786, 1788, 1795, 1809, and 1815
constitute the chief sources used by the editor.
139. Poems. Edited with a critical introd. by
Harry Hayden Clark. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1929. lxiii, 425 p. (American authors series;
general editor, Stanley T. Williams)
29-21609 PS755.A5C6
"Selected reading list": p. lxi-lxiii.
140. Miscellaneous works containing his essays,
and additional poems. Philadelphia, F.
Bailey, 1788. xii, 429 p.
32-15552 PS755.A1 1788 RBD
141. Letters on various interesting and im-
portant subjects; many of which have ap-
peared in the Aurora. Corr. and much enl. by
Robert Slender, O. S. M. [pseud.] Philadelphia,
Printed for the author, from the press of D. Hogan,
1799. viii, 142 p.
19-2090 AC901.T5, v. 7 RBD
PS757.L4 1799 RBD
[Thorndike pamphlets, v. 7, no. 14.]
142. With an introd. and a bibliographi-
cal note by Harry Hayden Clark. New York,
Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints, 1943. vi p., facsim.:
142 p. 43-6720 PS757.L4 1799a
"Bibliographical note": p. vi.
143. Prose. Selected and edited by Philip M.
Marsh. New Brunswick, N. J., Scarecrow
Press, 1955. xii, 596 p.
55-14358 PS755.A5M3
144. THOMAS GODFREY, 1736-1763
Before the social and political upheavals of
the Revolutionary period had begun to change a
group of colonies into a nation, British models fre-
quently were used by the few Americans writing
in the belletristic tradition. Godfrey's literary out-
put, small as it was, showed this influence. Debts
to the Cavalier poets are apparent in his love songs,
while The Court of Fancy (1762) was, according
to his own statement, imitative of Chaucer and Pope.
All the poems, however, showed a promise that
might have been realized but for the writer's un-
timely death. His one play, a romantic drama
located in Parthia at the beginning of the Christian
era, is obviously in the Elizabethan manner, al-
though its individual merits include sound construc-
tion and effective use of blank verse. It is inter-
esting to note that his play was a genuine "first":
the first tragedy written in America by an American
that was acted on the professional stage in America.
Members of the Philadelphia group of creative artists
who were Godfrey's friends and associates in-
cluded Benjamin West, the painter, and Francis
Hopkinson, the poet and composer. Together they
took part in laying foundations for American art,
music, and literature upon which later generations
were able to build.
145. Juvenile poems on various subjects. With
The Prince of Parthia . . . To which is pre-
fixed Some account of the author and his writings.
Philadelphia, Printed by H. Miller, 1765. xxvi,
223 p. 34-35375 PS761.A1 1765 RBD
Posthumously published through the efforts of
the author's mentor and admirer, William Smith,
provost of the College of Philadelphia, and of his
friend, Nathaniel Evans. Reprints of The Prince
of Parthia include the following: one edited with
commentary by Archibald Henderson (Boston,
Litde, Brown, 19 17. 189 p.) and a second in Mont-
rose J. Moses' Representative Plays by American
Dramatists (no. 2347).
146. FRANCIS HOPKINSON, 1737-1791
Pennsylvania and New Jersey were the scenes
of Hopkinson's multiple activities as merchant, law-
yer, citizen, musician, writer, and cultivated amateur
of science and art. While he received assignments
of such importance as membership in the Conti-
nental Congress, in which he voted for the Declara-
tion of Independence and became one of its signers,
he continued to write. Songs, poems, essays, and
ballads constitute characteristic examples of the
forms in which he expressed his artistic, literary,
and political interests. Since only a partial collec-
tion of his writings has been made, George E. Has-
tings' The Life and Wor\s of Francis Hopkinson
(Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1926. [517]
p.) has value not only for its critical comments but
also for numerous excerpts from the writings, and
for the bibliography it provides. Hopkinson's ar-
dent patriotism and his use of native themes are
evidence of a growing national spirit as the country
emerged from colonial status to independent power.
147. A pretty story ... By Peter Grievous, es-
quire, A. B. C. D. E. [pseud.] Williams-
burg, [Va.], J. Pinkney, 1774. 16 p.
19-4136 E187.C72, v. 12 RBD
[Colonial pamphlets, v. 12, no. 9.]
A political satire on the administration of the
British colonies in North America, and the causes
of the Revolution.
First and 2d editions have imprint: Philadelphia,
Printed and sold by John Dunlap, 1774.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 21
Reprinted in 1857 and 1864 with tide: The Old
Farm and the New Farm: A Political Allegory.
148. Miscellaneous essays and occasional writings.
Philadelphia, T. Dobson, 1792. 3 v.
5-30697 PS775.A1 1792 RBD
See v. 2, p. 146-160, for "A Letter on Whitewash-
ing" [1785] and v. 3, p. 169-173, for "The Battle
of the Kegs" [1779]. The former is an Addisonian
essay satirizing American methods of house clean-
ing; the latter is a ballad on the American attempt to
use kegs of gunpowder as floating mines against the
British.
149. THOMAS JEFFERSON, 1743-1826
Jefferson's rank with the foremost statesmen
of the United States automatically places the main
body of his writings in the section of this bibli-
ography devoted to the general history of the Na-
tion. The one book described here consists of es-
says written in response to a series of questions that
originated in an undertaking by the French Govern-
ment to collect information about the several
American states. The questions relating to Vir-
ginia were referred to Jefferson, and his answers
constitute his Notes on the State of Virginia. The
vigor and distinction of expression that characterized
the book, its notable descriptions of the physical as-
pect of the state, the range and interest of its
scientific observations, the views expressed on philos-
ophy and morality, and the enlightenment evident
in the writer's opinions about slavery and the In-
dians are among the elements that have established
the book in its place with American literary classics.
150. Notes on the State of Virginia; written in the
year 1781, somewhat corr. and enl. in the
winter of 1782, for the use of a foreigner of distinc-
tion, in answer to certain queries proposed by him
. . . 1782. [Paris, 1785] 391 p.
1-2904 F230.J40 RBD
First edition: 200 copies printed for private
distribution.
151. Notes on the State of Virginia. Philadelphia,
Prichard & Hall, 1788. 244 p.
Rc-2820 F230.J42 RBD
First American edition.
152. In The writings of Thomas Jeffer-
son. Collected and edited by Paul Leicester
Ford. v. 3. New York, Putnam, 1892-99. p.
68-295. 2-5666 E302.J466, v. 3
153. Edited with an introd. and notes by
William Peden. Chapel Hill, Published for
the Institute of Early American History and Cul-
ture, Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North
Carolina Press, 1955 ["1954] xxv, 315 p. maps.
55-14659 F230.J5102 1955
154. THOMAS PAINE, 1737-1809
At heart a radical and a reformer, Paine had
never been successful in earning a living in his native
country, England. Having won an introduction
from Benjamin Franklin, who was impressed by
his abilities, he sought new opportunities in Amer-
ica. There he rapidly made connections that
resulted in his becoming a journalist and a pam-
phleteer whose writings exerted a "prodigious"
influence in the formation of public opinion favor-
able to the American Revolution. As an inter-
nationalist willing to participate always in the cause
of human freedom from oppression, he was later
associated with the moderate republicans in France,
taking part with them in developing the French
Revolution until it was taken over by violent ele-
ments and became the Terror. Returning to
America, Paine found his earlier contributions
frowned on by certain conservative leaders in the
new republic. Since that time his character and his
thought have been subjects of recurring, often un-
informed, controversy. His reputation as a propa-
gandist of genius is assured, however; and he takes
his place among American men of letters on the
basis of his accomplishments as a literary stylist.
Thomas Jefferson, commenting on this aspect of
Paine's work, wrote: "No writer has exceeded Paine
in ease and familiarity of style, in perspicuity of
expression, happiness of elucidation, and in simple
and unassuming language."
155. Writings collected and edited by Moncure
Conway. New York, Putnam, 1894-96.
4 v. 4-x936 JCi77-A3 1894
Partial Contents. — v. 1, p. 67-120, Common
sense [1776]; p. 168-380, The American crisis
[1776-83]. — v. 2, p. 258-389, The rights of man
[1791]; p. 390-583, The rights of man, part second
[1792]. — v. 4, p. 1-84, The age of reason [1794];
p. 85-195, The age of reason, part second [1795].
156. The complete writings of Thomas Paine, col-
lected and edited by Philip S. Foner, Ph. D.,
with a biographical essay, and notes and introduc-
tions presenting the historical background of Paine's
writings. New York, Citadel Press, 1945. 2 v.
45-2289 JC177.A3 1945
157. Selections. Edited with an introd. by Arthur
Wallace Peach. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
11 I K GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1928. liii, 378 p. (American authors series; gen-
eral editor, Stanley T. Williams)
28-22448 JC177.A5 1928
Reading list: p. li — liii.
158. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Henry Hayden Clark.
New York, American Book Co., 1944. cli, 436 p.
(American writers series)
44-3959 JC177.A5 1944
"Selected bibliography": p. cxxv-cli.
159. Selected work of Tom Paine. Edited by
Howard Fast. New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce, 1945. xiii, 338 p.
45-2364 JC177.A5 1945
160. Common sense, and other political writings.
Edited with an introd. by Nelson F. Adkins.
New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1953. liii, 184 p.
(American heritage series, no. 5)
53-11326 JC177.A5 1953
Bibliography: p. 1-liii.
161. SUSANNA (HASWELL) ROWSON,
1 762-1 824
During the Revolutionary period, writing in
America reached its greatest distinction in the works
of its statesmen, rather than in the sphere of belles-
lettres. The art of fiction, particularly, lagged in
its transit to the New World, where the battle for
survival absorbed the energies of the people and
where the Puritan tradition was against books that
were not predominantly serious and edifying. As
the 1 8th century wore on, however, an increasing
appetite for imported fiction became apparent, with
the result that sentimental and didactic novels began
to be written in America for this waiting audience,
composed chiefly of women. Among early books
of this type, Mrs. Rowson's Charlotte Temple in
its long history has achieved the status of one of
the country's all-time best sellers. Born in England
but permanently setded in America for the last 30
years of her life, the author produced a novel highly
moral in tone, straightforward in narrative interest,
and abundantly supplied with details of an exciting
seduction. According to R. W. G. Vail's Susanna
Haswell Rowson (Worcester, Mass., American Anti-
quarian Society, 1933. 116 p.), the book has gone
through more than 200 editions and has been read
possibly by half a million individuals. The vogue
of novel-reading was deplored by the Nation's in-
tellectuals, while the books were being devoured by
their wives and mothers and daughters. In the
case of Mrs. Rowson's most characteristic works,
light is cast on 18th-century standards of morality
for the two sexes, on the circumscribed lives and
interests of average American women, and on the
details of daily domestic life at the time.
162. Charlotte; a tale of truth. Philadelphia, M.
Carey, 1794. 2 v. in 1. (87, 83 p.)
6-4924 PS2736.R3C5 RBD
First American edition, from the first edition
published in London, 1790; later editions have tide:
Charlotte Temple.
163. Charlotte Temple; a tale of truth . . . With
an historical and biographical introd., bibli-
ography, etc., by Francis W. Halsey. New York,
Funk & Wagnalls, 1905. cix, 131, 150 p. illus.
5-39587 PZ3.R799C30 RBD
"The best of all editions, including a long and
valuable historical introduction, a bibliographical
checklist of editions which, however, contains many
errors and duplications, numerous footnotes, and
seventeen illustrations." — Vail, p. 81.
164. Reuben and Rachel; or, Tales of old times.
Boston, D. West, 1798. 2 v. in 1 (364 p.)
8-945 PZ3.R799Reu RBD
Historical and sentimental romance beginning
with the life of Christopher Columbus and ending
in 1 8th century America. An early example of an
American novel introducing idealized Indian
characters.
165. JOHN TRUMBULL, 1750-1831
Trumbull has been called the most gifted of
the Connecticut Wits, with whom he was associated
in efforts to improve education provided by Yale
College and to promote a taste for literature in
America. Since his own taste was for satire, his
style was greatly influenced by such English writers
as Samuel Butler and Jonathan Swift; but the con-
tent of what he wrote was American throughout.
Although he wrote two series of prose essays satiriz-
ing the errors he observed in Connecticut dignitaries
and the culture they were attempting to create, his
principal medium was poetry. At the Yale com-
mencement of 1770, he recited a poem attacking the
existing curriculum and making a plea for replac-
ing the heavy concentrations in mathematics, meta-
physics, and logic by courses in the fine arts,
particularly in "polite literature." In the section
of the poem devoted to the future of American liter-
ature he prophesied that in his native land writers,
born and nurtured there, would be the equals of
England's Addison, Swift, and Shakespeare. The
Progress of Dullness, a trilogy in verse, also satirized
existing methods of education and emphasized the
folly of contributing to the vanity and light-minded-
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 23
ness of women by depriving them of higher educa-
tion. Trumbull's principal literary achievement,
however, was the mock-epic, M'Fingal, a political
satire against the British and in praise of American
Whigs in relation to the Revolution. This work
was enormously popular, being hawked about, as
the author said, by peddlers and petty chapmen.
Not only did it delight contemporary audiences, but
it was also preserved for later generations in various
mediums such as school readers. Thus, over an
extended period of time, it was a poem not often
surpassed in favor until Longfellow's poems became
household words.
166. An essay on the use and advantages of the
fine arts. Delivered at the public commence-
ment in New Haven, Sept. 12, 1770. New Haven,
Conn., T. & S. Green [ 1770] 16 p.
AC901.W8, v. 20 RBD
Wolcott pamphlets, v. 20, no. 5.
167. Poetical works. Containing M'Fingal
[1782], a modern epic poem, rev. and corr.,
with copious explanatory notes; The progress of
dullness [ 1 772-1 773]; and a collection of poems on
various subjects, written before and during the
Revolutionary War. Hartford, Conn., S. G. Good-
rich, 1820. 2 v. 30-20909 PS852.A1 1820 RBD
A Memoir of the Author, said to be Trumbull's
own autobiography, appears in volume one.
Reprint. In The Colonnade, v. 14,
19 19-1922, pt. 2. New York, Andiron Club of
New York City, 1922. p. [287J-538.
AP2.C662, v. 14
The reprint was edited by Arthur H. Nason.
character, "Jonathan," whose combination of New
England sturdiness and provincial simplicity was
influential in establishing a "type" character por-
trayed in later popular "Yankee plays." The Con-
trast also has the merit of contributing to an under-
standing of the social history of New York towards
the end of the 18th century, by detailed treatment
of conversation, manners, dress, and atmosphere.
Tyler was a prolific and witty contributor of essays
and poems to the periodical press of the time. He
has also to his credit several plays less important
than The Contrast; a novel, The Algerine Captive
(1797), based on the captivity of a member of his
family enslaved by the Algerians; and Yankee in
London (1809), a series of fictional letters accepted
as authentic at the time.
169. The contrast, a comedy in five acts. Written
by a citizen of the United States; performed
with applause at the theatres in New-York, Phila-
delphia, and Maryland. Philadelphia, Prichard &
Hall, 1790. 79 p.
7-27486 PS855.T7C6 1790 RBD
Produced in 1787.
170. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1920.
xxxviii, 120 p. facsims.
21-824 PS855.T7C6 1920 RBD
Reprints may be located in various collections
described in the section on Anthologies, as follows:
Montrose J. Moses' Representative Plays by Ameri-
can Dramatists (no. 2347); Allan G. Halline's
American Plays (no. 2337); and Arthur H. Quinn's
Representative American Plays, 7th ed. (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1953).
168. ROY ALL TYLER, 1757-1826
A lawyer who attained the dignity of becom-
ing chief justice of the Supreme Court of Vermont,
Tyler takes his place in the annals of American lit-
erature chiefly because he was the author of the first
social comedy written and staged in the United
States, for and about Americans. While it follows
the design of Richard Brinsley Sheridan's The
School for Scandal, seen by Tyler in its New York
production, the prologue of his own play specifically
states his purpose to provide a drama that Ameri-
cans might call their own. The "contrast" from
which the piece takes its tide is between American
character and society, portrayed as fundamentally
simple and marked by "probity, virtue, and honor,"
and other characters and societies in which Euro-
pean polish is assumed to have produced a combina-
tion of sophistication, foppishness, and falseness.
Born in Boston and educated at Harvard, Tyler
was particularly well equipped to create his Yankee
171. MASON LOCKE WEEMS, 1759-1825
One of the talents attributed to the eccentric
"Parson" Weems is that of making facts perform
antics according to his will. This gift was em-
ployed to the full in developing his Actionized
biographies. While he wrote lives of William Penn
and Benjamin Franklin, Weems exercised his imagi-
nation with particular expansiveness when dealing
with the personalities and exploits of two Revolu-
tionary generals: George Washington and Francis
Marion. His "life" of Washington, issued as a
small pamphlet the year after Washington's death,
was later published in enlarged form and under
several titles. It is said that the various editions
of the work were represented by at least 84 print-
ings within 30 years. The spread of these recurring
publications throughout the United States con-
tributed to creating in the public mind an idea of
Washington the hero that became a mythical symbol
of the greatness of America. Weems was an or-
24 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
dained clergyman whose greatest passion was for
reading "good and improving books," and for 31
years his principal occupation was that of an itiner-
ant bookseller. Traveling up and down the Adantic
seaboard and westward towards Pennsylvania, he
distributed books that helped to keep reading alive
among the scattered farms and towns of a country
devoid of adequate means of communication. The
letters written during his wanderings, particularly
those addressed to Mathew Carey, the Philadelphia
publisher, are significant documents in the history
of American literary taste and of the spread of
culture in the United States.
172. A history, of the life and death, virtues, and
exploits, of General George Washington;
dedicated to Mrs. Washington . . . George-Town
[D. C] Printed for the Rev. M. L. Weems by
Green & English [1800] 80 p. NN
173. A history of the life and death, virtues, and
exploits of General George Washington.
Faithfully taken from authentic documents, and,
now, in a 2d ed. improved . . . Philadelphia, Re-
printed by John Bioren, for the author [ 1800] 82 p.
15-10673 E312.W347 RBD
174. The life of Washington the Great, enriched
with a number of very curious anecdotes . . .
5th ed. Augusta, Reprinted by Geo. F. Randolph,
1806. 80 p. NN
Text rewritten; the story of the hatchet and the
cherry tree appears here for the first time.
175. The life of George Washington; with curious
anecdotes, equally honorable to himself and
exemplary to his young countrymen. 10th ed.,
gready improved. Philadelphia, M. Carey, 18 10.
228 p. illus. 15-3829 E312.W372
176. A history of the life and death, virtues & ex-
ploits of General George Washington. [New
York] Macy-Masius, 1927. 374 p. (An American
bookshelf [2]) 27-27804 E312.W3894
"The present text is taken from one of the later
editions . . ." — Editor's note signed: M. V. D. [i. e.
Mark Van Doren].
177. Mason Locke Weems, his works and ways.
In three volumes. [1] A bibliography left
unfinished by Paul Leicester Ford. [2-3. Letters
1784-1825] Edited by Emily E. F. Skeel. New
York, 1829. 3 v. illus. 29-3631 Z8962.S62
Most of the letters are addressed to Mathew Carey.
Sources consulted: v. 1, p. 345-385.
178. JOHN WOOLMAN, 1720-1772
Nearly 20 years before the signing of the
Declaration of Independence, Woolman had al-
ready declared his belief that liberty was the natural
right of all men equally. To the realization of that
conviction he devoted his life, as a sort of itinerant
apostle of a righteous social gospel for his country
and the world. His was the strongest American
voice raised in his time against Negro slavery; after
he was dead his written words still spoke power-
fully in support of the antislavery movement. The
increase of greed leading to a materialistic philoso-
phy of life, the employment of workers in dangerous
trades, the conduct of schools — these and other prob-
lems in American society he sought to solve with
wisdom in advance of his time. Written by this
Quaker mystic who earned his bread by tailoring,
the journal and essays he contributed to American
literature give evidence of the impact of the Friends
on the civilization of the country. Critics agree,
moreover, that the journal is a classic of the inner
life, as Franklin's almost contemporary autobiog-
raphy is a classic record of a man at home in the
1 8th century world. No mention of Woolman as
a writer, however brief, would be complete with-
out the often-repeated advice from Charles Lamb
to the Reader: "Get the writings of John Woolman
by heart."
179. Journal. With an introd. by John G. Whit-
tier. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1871. viii, 315 p.
BX7795.W7A3 1 87 1 RBD
180. New century ed. London, Head-
ley, 1900. ix, 336 p.
1-25 198 BX7795.W7A3
Includes A Word of Remembrance and Caution
to the Rich, other addenda, and a bibliography
(p. 301-325).
181. New York, Dutton, 1922. xix,
250 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest
Rhys. Biography [no. 402])
36-37445 AC1.E8, no. 402
Text based on the edition by John Greenleaf
Whittier, with a few omissions; includes several
additional pieces by Woolman.
Introduction by Vida D. Scudder.
List of the works of John Woolman: p. xix.
182. Edited by Janet Whitney. Chicago,
H. Regnery, 1950. [xv] 233 p.
50-10962 BX7795.W7A3 1950
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 25
183.
Edited and with introd. by Thomas
S. Kepler. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1954.
xx, 235 p. (World devotional classics)
54-5339 BX7795.W7A3 1954
184. Works. In two
Crukshank, 1774.
36-21088
parts. Philadelphia, J.
xiv, 436 p.
BX7617.W6 1774 RBD
The Journal constitutes part one; miscellaneous
writings are contained in part two.
185. Journal and essays. Edited from the original
manuscripts with a biographical introd. by
Amelia Mott Gummere. New York, Macmillan,
1922. xxii, 643 p.
22-24117 BX7795.W7A3 1922
C. Nationalism, Sectionalism, and Schism (i 820-1 870)
Literature in America between 1820 and 1870
was the mirror of a society in which tremendous
energy was at wor\. A surge of migration west-
ward pushed the frontier past the fertile Middle
West to the grainlands of the Middle Border and
beyond. In 1848 the discovery of gold in California
caused a rush to the Pacific Coast. Immigrants
from Britain and Europe, attracted by the vision
of a land of opportunity, came to America in great
numbers, frequently to find themselves forced to
sell their labor cheaply. But the availability of west-
ern lands and the rapidly expanding economy of
the Nation as a whole enabled them to prosper and
to remain, thus adding rich new elements to the
culture of the United States. In the expanding
economy transportation became a prime necessity.
Horses and vehicles, long the only means of con-
veyance even for great distances, were replaced.
Steamboats that plied the natural waterways and
great canals built to float them then became the pre-
ferred carriers, only to be superseded in their turn by
railroads that began to reach farther and farther
across the continent. New and old sections of the
country were conscious of the importance of their
regions and of their mission to prosper even at the
expense of other sections.
Tensions grew between sections, particularly be-
tween the industrial North and the agrarian South,
with its rich plantation economy based on slave
labor. While jealousies and conflicts of interests
increased, slavery and its expansion into new states
and territories became an issue upon which the
public mind was inflamed. In 1851-52 Harriet
Beecher Stowe wrote her powerful antislavery
novel, Uncle Tom's Cabin, thereby helping to "loose
the fateful lightning" that led to the conflagration
of the Civil War. By 1865 sectional differences had
been settled by force of arms. The South was in
ruins; but slavery was gone; and Abraham Lincoln's
persuasive plea for "a new birth of freedom" was
being answered, slowly and with suffering, while
the reconstruction of the South progressed.
531240—60 4
During and after the years that saw such cata-
clysmic forces at wor\ in American civilization,
literature emerged into a phase of growing national-
ism, fames Fenimore Cooper's historical novels of
bygone days in America, and Washington Irving's
familiar essays, sketches, and fol/{ tales of old New
Yor\ State attracted delighted attention abroad as
well as at home. Another development that was
popular outside as well as within the United States
was the emergence in literature of humor native to
America. Such writings were often associated with
the frontier and with the oddly assorted characters
who gravitated there, uttering homely philosophies
of life in strange dialects. The Puritan heritage of
solemnity was thus mitigated.
Another Puritan and Calvinistic concept, that of
"sinners in the hands of an angry God," also was
changed by the Unitarian doctrines convincingly
enunciated by William Ellery Channing, in which
were set forth man's innate innocence and goodness
and the love of God for humanity. The same trend
of thought led to the optimism, self-reliance , uto-
pianism, democracy , and belief in the Over-Soul as-
sociated with Ralph Waldo Emerson and his circle
of Transcendentalists. The group under these in-
fluences included Nathaniel Hawthorne, Henry D.
Thoreau, Herman Melville, and Walt Whitman.
Their novels, short stories, essays, poems, and mis-
cellaneous prose were of such excellence as to win
for the period of their publication the term "Ameri-
can Renaissance!'
A gradually widening diffusion of education,
ever the accompaniment of a renaissance of culture,
enlarged the audience of readers to whom a native
literature appealed. Literary periodicals therefore
increased in number, bringing in their train editors,
critics, and contributors who formed groups of
"literati." While not always individually impor-
tant, these circles by their wor\ provided mediums
of publication for better writers and thus contributed
to raising the level of reading interest. In formal
education, Harvard, oldest of the Nation's universi-
26 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ties, gathered into its faculties men of learning who
were also writers of distinction. On the roster of
such names Henry Wadsworth Longfellow, James
Russell Lowell, and Oliver Wendell Holmes stand
high.
Even if time and space availed to assess more de-
velopments in American literature during these 50
years, the record would always be incomplete with-
out recognition of the romanticism, more easily felt
than defined, that pervaded much of the writing of
the period. Cooper's noble Red Man, Longfellow's
idealization of themes drawn from American his-
tory, the Transcendentalism of Emerson, Edgar Al-
lan Foe's mystery and other worldliness, Melville's
exotic South Pacific islanders, Whitman's chants of
democracy and individualism, John Greenleaf
Whittier's celebration of simple people and natural
beauty, and the doctrine of "progressive improve-
ment" which suffused the thought and attitudes of
so many minor, and not a few major, writers, all
reflect the romantic impulse simultaneously at
ivor\ in Britain, Europe, and America. Thus out
of colonialism, provincialism, and small beginnings,
American literature entered the stream of world
literature to enrich it permanently.
186. AMOS BRONSON ALCOTT, 1799-1888
The enormous mass of Alcott's journals con-
stitutes the best part of his literary lifework. Pub-
lished selections from these document the thoughts
expressed in his lectures and his ideas about edu-
cational reform, philosophy, religion, and com-
munal living at Fruitlands-. A member of the Con-
cord group and an intimate associate of Emerson
and Thoreau, he was a mystic and a Transcendental-
ist of the most idealistic type. His place in Ameri-
can life and thought is treated in his biography,
Pedlar's Progress, by Odell Shepard (Boston, Little,
Brown, 1937. 546 p.).
187. Journals. Selected and edited by Odell
Shepard. Boston, Little, Brown, 1938. 559 p.
38-27766 PS 1 013. A4 1938
188. LOUISA MAY ALCOTT, 1832-1888
Miss Alcott's books for children are the dis-
tillation of experiences shared by Amos Bronson
Alcott's four daughters, of whom Louisa May was
the second. The father's extreme Transcendental-
ism resulted in economic hardships for his family.
These are chronicled as part of life in New England
during and after the Civil War. Told with senti-
ment, humor, pathos, and realism the stories have
been dear to every generation of American children
and parents since they were written. A recent study
of this author is Madeleine B. Stern's Louisa May
Alcott (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1950. 424 p.), in which see particularly the bibliog-
raphy of sources consulted, p. 361-407.
189. Little women; or, Meg, Jo, Beth and Amy.
Boston, Roberts, 1868-69. 2 v. ViU
Frequently reprinted in modern editions, as in the
Modern Library of the world's best books series
(New York, Modern Library, 1950. 596 p.).
190. TIMOTHY SHAY ARTHUR, 1809-1885
Full of the reforming spirit and devotion to
good causes characteristic of the mid-nineteenth cen-
tury in America, Arthur became a prolific writer
of moralizing tales, particularly in support of the
temperance movement. These were widely read
and approved, as were the magazines he edited and
published. Among the latter Arthur's Home Maga-
zine and The Children's Hour were particularly
successful.
191. Ten nights in a bar-room, and what I saw
there. Philadelphia, J. W. Bradley, 1854.
240 p. MH
192. GEORGE WILLIAM BAGBY, 1 828-1 883
Bagby's lectures, sketches, and familiar essays
frequently appeared first as letters and editorials in
newspapers and periodicals with which the writer
was connected as a journalist or as an editor. His
work was done between 1854 and 1882 and much
of it appeared as ephemera that is now rare or
lost. The residue, best seen in a modern collected
edition, is of three types: idealized portrayals of
plantation life in Bagby's native state, Virginia,
before the Civil War; realistic and humorous
sketches in "country" dialect represented by the type
of misspelling considered amusing at the time; and
humorous, affectionate representations of the psy-
chology and speech of Negro slaves.
193. The Old Virginia gentleman, and other
sketches. Edited and arr. by his daughter,
Ellen M. Bagby. [5th ed.] Richmond, Dietz Press,
1948. xxvii, 318 p.
48-11917 F230.B14 1948
Bibliography: p. [3151-318.
194. JOSEPH GLOVER BALDWIN, 1815-1864
Baldwin's sketches preserve impressions of
his life as a lawyer during a practice of some 18
years in Mississippi and Alabama when both states
were on the old southwestern frontier. The back
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / T]
woods lawyers, wildcat speculators, gamblers, brag-
garts, and brave men who were typical of the time
and place are treated with satiric humor and realism
in what has been called a minor American classic.
195. The flush times of Alabama and Mississippi.
New York, Appleton, 1853. 330 p.
16-9738 F327.B18 RBD
196. 2d ed. New York, Appleton, 1854.
x, 330 p. n-32574 F327.B182
197. Americus, Ga., Americus Book Co.,
1908. vii, 330 p. 16-11135 F327.B189
198. JAMES NELSON BARKER, 1784-1858
Barker's contribution to the development of
American drama apparendy was inspired by a
belief in the art of theater as part of the cultural
life of a nation. His was one of the first voices
raised in praise of the use of national themes and
against Americans remaining "mental colonists" of
Great Britain. Applying his own theories, he wrote
a play based on the Pocahontas story, a pioneer
work in the long tradition of romanticizing that
legend in particular and the Red Man in general.
Barker's most substantial play, a tragedy in blank
verse, also derived its plot from American colonial
history, this time weaving together "superstitious"
fears of witchcraft in Massachusetts and conflicts
with Indians in the same area. The work illus-
trates an early treatment of themes derived from
Puritan ideology that reappeared repeatedly in Amer-
ican literature. Tears and Smiles (produced 1807,
published 1808) used the technique of a comedy
of manners to satirize social life and customs in
Philadelphia. The text of the original edition, not
previously reprinted, is included in James Nelson
Bar\er, 1784-18 58 (Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1929) p. 138-207, a study by
Paul H. Musser.
199. The Indian princess; or, La belle sauvage.
Philadelphia, G. E. Blake, 1808. 74 p.
1-2075 PS1065.B83I6 1808 RBD
A musical play called "an operatic melodrame."
The music by John Bray is not included in this
edition. For a reprint see Representative Plays by
American Dramatists, edited by Montrose J. Moses
(no. 2347).
200. The tragedy of Superstition. Carefully cor-
rected from the prompt books of the Phila-
delphia theatre. By M. Lopez, prompter. (Phila-
delphia] A. R. Poole [1826] 68 p. (Lopez &
Wemyss' edition. Acting American theatre | no. ; | )
27-23186 PS1065.B83T7 1826
For reprints see American Plays, selected and
edited by Allan G. Halline (no. 2337), and the sev-
enth edition of Arthur H. Quinn's Representative
American Plays.
201. ROBERT MONTGOMERY BIRD, 1806-
i854
Author of blank verse dramas on classical themes,
or inspired by Spanish colonial life in the New
World, which were produced with marked success
by Edwin Forrest, Bird is perhaps most frequendy
mentioned as a historical novelist of frontier life
about the close of the Revolution. Written in the
romantic tradition of good story telling, Nic\ of the
Woods represents a deliberate effort to provide
the correction of idealizations of "the noble savage"
by giving realistic portrayals of uncivilized and
cruel Indians and by emphasizing the contributions
made by white pioneers to the westward transit of
civilization in America. The book also records the
exploits of a lawless frontiersman, "Roaring Ralph
Stackpole."
202. Nick of the woods; or, The Jibbenainosay. A
tale of Kentucky, by the author of Calavar.
Philadelphia, Carey, Lea & Blanchard, 1837. 2 v.
6-13129 PZ3.B532N RBD
203. New ed., rev. by author. New
York, Redfield, 1853. xi, 391 p.
8-34324 PZ3.B532N4
204. Edited, with an introd., chronology,
and bibliography, by Cecil B. Williams.
New York, American Book Co., 1939. Ixxv, 408 p.
(American fiction series; general editor, H. H.
Clark) 39-15203 PZ3.B532N15
"Selected bibliography": p. lxvi-lxxv.
The text is that of the edition of 1853. Cf.
Preface, p. v.
205. Dramatic works. In Foust, Clement E.
The life and dramatic works of Robert
Montgomery Bird. New York, Knickerbocker
Press, 1919. p. 169-722. 21-733 PS1099.B5Z72
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania.
Bibliography: p. 161-167.
"Of the four plays in this volume, Pelopidas, The
Gladiator, and Oralloossa appear in print for the
first time. The Broker of Bogota was first pub-
lished in Prof. A. H. Quinn's recent volume, Repre-
sentative American Plays [1917] • • •" Preface,
p. vi.
28 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
206. GEORGE HENRY BOKER, 1 823-1 890
Boker was an American dramatist who turned
to the history and literature of England, Spain, and
Italy for inspiration. His noteworthy Francesca da
Rimini, first produced in 1855, was revived with
success as late as 1901. As a poet he is remembered
not only for his posthumous Sonnets (1929) edited
by Sculley Bradley, but also for Poems of the War
(1864) composed chiefly as patriotic verses for pub-
lication in newspapers during the Civil War. "Our
Heroic Themes," a poem read before the Phi Beta
Kappa Society of Harvard University on July 20,
1865, contains an eloquent tribute to Lincoln.
207. Plays and poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields,
1856. 2 v. CtY
Contents. — v. 1. Plays: Calaynos; Anne Boleyn;
Leonor de Guzman; Francesca da Rimini. — v. 2.
Plays: The betrothal; The widow's marriage. —
Poems.
208. 2d ed. Boston, Ticknor & Fields,
1857. 2 v. 20-17126 PS1105.A1 1857
Francesca da Rimini is included in American
Plays, edited by Allan G. Halline (no. 2337), and
in Representative American Plays, 7th ed., edited by
Arthur H. Quinn.
209. CHARLES FARRAR BROWNE ("ARTE-
MUS WARD"), 1834-1867
The lectures, newspaper columns, and books
produced by Browne under his pseudonym of
"Artemus Ward" became enormously popular and
helped to contribute to the establishment of a tra-
dition of native American humor which came to
full fruition in Mark Twain's writings. Browne,
through the pages of Punch, as well as on the lecture
platform, also won sustained applause in England.
His backwoods philosophers and Down East char-
acters, whose sayings were enriched by absurd mis-
spellings, were used by their creator to satirize sham
and hypocrisy wherever discovered. Browne's hu-
mor was particularly admired by Abraham Lincoln.
210. Artemus Ward, his book. New York, Carle-
ton, 1862. x, [17-262] p.
36-29489 PN6161.B735 1862 RBD
21 1. Artemus Ward; his travels. With comic illus.
by Mullen. New York, Carleton, 1865.
231 p. 3-25798 PN6161.B737 1865 RBD
Contents. — pt. 1. Miscellaneous. — pt. 2. Among
the Mormans.
212. Complete works of Artemus Ward [pseud.]
With a biographical sketch (by Melville D.
Landon, "Eli Perkins") [Complete ed.] New
York, Carleton, 1879. 347 p. CSmH
213.
Rev. ed. New York, G. W. Dill-
ingham, 1898. 449 p. illus.
98-564 PN6161.B73 1898
214. Artemus Ward's best stories. Edited by Clif-
ton Johnson; with an introd. by W. D.
Howells. Illustrated by Frank A. Nankivell. New
York, Flarper, 191 2. xv, 274 p.
12-22824 PN6161.B739
215. Selected works of Artemus Ward [pseud.]
Edited with an introd. by Albert Jay Nock.
New York, Boni, 1924. 295 p.
25-2376 PS 1 14 1. N6
216. WILLIAM CULLEN BRYANT, 1794-1878
During the early years of the 19th century
the poets widely read in the United States were
predominantly British. Scott, Burns, and Byron
particularly appealed to the current taste for ro-
mance, sentiment, minstrelsy, and adventure. Not
until the 1830's, after the publication of poems by
the New Englander, Bryant, did American critics
concede the arrival of a major national poet.
Bryant's work is preeminently that of a poet who
thought abstractly and reflectively about nature and
man in relation one to the other, and whose expres-
sion has a classical quality. Interwoven in his poems
are the universal themes of human freedom, suf-
fering, death, faith, and immortality. His Lectures
on Poetry, delivered in 1825, contains an eloquent
and explicit statement of his poetic principles, which
invites comparison with Poe's The Poetic Principle
(1850). Bryant's influence on public opinion in
America, literary and otherwise, was extended by
his long career as a journalist, particularly during
his editorship of the New Yor\ Evening Post, from
1829 to 1878. Throughout his life he was con-
sistently a champion of the liberal position on na-
tional problems, such as slavery, free trade, and free
speech.
217. Poems. Cambridge, Mass., Hilliard & Met-
calf, 1821. 44 p.
21-13044 PS1150.E21 RBD
Contents. — The ages. — To a waterfowl. — Trans-
lation of a fragment of Simonides. — Inscription for
the entrance into a wood. — The yellow violet. —
Song. — Green river. — Thanatopsis.
New-York, E. Bliss, 1832. 240 p.
6-7137 PS1150.E32 RBD
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 29
Includes the eight poems published in 1821, and
81 others, most of which had appeared in different
periodicals.
219. Edited by Washington Irving. Lon-
don, J. Andrews, 1832. xii, 235 p.
16-4995 PSii5o.E32a RBD
First London edition, dedicated to Samuel
Rogers, by Irving, and containing the same poems
as the New York edition of the same date.
220. Collected and arr. by the author.
New York, Appleton [1876] 501 p. illus.
21-13049 PS1150.E76
Last edition which passed through Bryant's
hands; includes final text of poems.
221. Selected and edited with a com-
mentary by Louis Untermeyer, and illustrated
with engravings by Thomas W. Nason. New York,
Limited Editions Club, 1947. xix, 298 p.
47-3186 PS1151.U5 RBD
222. Letters of a traveller; or, Notes of things seen
in Europe and America. New York, Put-
nam, 1850. 442 p.
26-21283 G470.B8 1850 RBD
223. The life and works of William Cullen Bryant.
New York, Appleton, 1883-84. 6 v.
17-16129 PS1150.E83
Edited by Parke Godwin.
Contents. — 1-2. A biography of William Cullen
Bryant, with extracts from his private correspond-
ence.— 3-4. The poetical works
writings.
;-6. Prose
224. Poetical works. Roslyn ed.; with chronologies
of Bryant's life and poems, and bibliography
of his writings by Henry C. Sturges, and a memoir
of his life by Richard Henry Stoddard. New York,
Appleton, 1903. cxxx, 418 p.
3-22094 PS1150.F03
225. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Tremaine McDowell,
New York, American Book Co., 1935. lxxxii, 426
p. (American writers series)
35-8651 PS1153.M25
"Selected bibliography": p. lxxiii-lxxxii.
226. WILLIAM ALEXANDER CARUTHERS,
1800 (ca.)-i846
Caruthers was one of several Southern writers of
the period who turned to local history for the sources
of novels. Two romances celebrate the past history
of his native state, Virginia, through the use of
such famous episodes as Bacon's Rebellion (1676)
and Governor Alexander Spotswood's exploration
in 1 716 of what was then the western wilderness,
now the Shenandoah Valley of Virginia. His first
novel, The Kentuckjan in New Yor\ (1834) is an
epistolary work of contemporary sentiment and
manners in which interests of the North and South
are mingled. A recent biographical and bibliog-
raphical study of Caruthers has been made by Curtis
C. Davis in his Chronicler of the Cavaliers (Rich-
mond, Dietz Press, 1953. 570 p.).
227. The cavaliers of Virginia; or, The recluse of
Jamestown. New York, Harper, 1834-35.
2 v. in 1. (228, 246 p.) 41-32194 PZ3.253Cav2
41-32194 PZ3.C253Cav2
228. The knights of the horseshoe. Wetumpka,
Ala., C. Yancey, 1845. 248 p. PU
229. — — — New York, A. L. Burt [1928] 431 p.
(Burt's library of the world's best books)
28-24158 PZ3.C253Kn8
230. WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING, 1780-
1842
Channing's place in American literature is
discussed at length by Robert E. Spiller in "A Case
for W. E. Channing," The New England Quarterly,
v. 3, Jan. 1930, p. 55-81. Briefly, it may be said
that Channing in his "The Importance and Means
of a National Literature," The Christian Examiner,
1830, advocated intellectual self-reliance in America
seven years before Emerson's The American Scholar
(1837) gave classic expression to the same idea.
In his discourses, sermons, and essays he expressed
his revolt from Calvinism, his interest in but quali-
fied rejection of idealism, and his firm conviction
of the loving-kindness of God and the inherent
nobility of man. Thus he was instrumental in pre-
paring the way for the Transcendentalism of the
Concord circle, with which he was affiliated. As a
writer, Channing was one of the few Americans of
his time to win enthusiastic recognition in England.
To avoid lengthy descriptions of pamphlets on a
wide variety of subjects, reference is made below to
his collected works. In these the student of religion
in America will find essential material. Robert L.
Patterson's The Philosophy of William Ellery
Channing (New York, Bookman Associates, [952.
298 p.) contributes to an understanding of his in-
tellectual quality. David P. Edgcll's William Ellery
Channing (Boston, Beacon Press, 1955. 264 p.)
has a twofold purpose: to reintroduce Channing as
a man of his times in America; and to present an
30 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
intellectual portrait of him which shows the nature
of his thought and its significance, past and present.
He has been called the aposde of Unitarianism in
America.
231. Discourses, reviews, and miscellanies. Bos-
ton, Carter & Hendee, 1830. 603 p.
32-6508 BX9815.C45 RBD
Includes: "Remarks on the Character and Writ-
ings of John Milton," published in The Christian
Examiner (1826); "Remarks on the Life and Char-
acter of Napoleon Bonaparte," pt. 1-2, The Chris-
tian Examiner (1827, 1828); and "The Moral
Argument Against Calvinism," from The Christian
Disciple (1820).
232. Slavery. Boston, J. Munroe, 1835. 167 p.
11-6662 E449.C454 RBD
233. Self-culture. An address introductory to the
Franklin lectures, delivered at Boston, Sep-
tember, 1838. Boston, Dutton & Wentworth, 1838.
81 p. 5-42801 LC31.C5 RBD
234. Lecture on war. Boston, Dutton & Went-
worth, 1839. ix, 50 p. 10-19810 RBD
Waterman pamphlets, v. 94, no. 13.
235. Lectures on the elevation of the labouring
portion of the community. Boston, Ticknor,
1840. vi, 81 p. E9-1910 HD6961.C36
236. Works. 1 st complete American ed. With
an introd. [by the author] Boston, J. Munroe,
1841-43. 6 v. 33-I567 BX9815.C4 1841
237. Boston, American Unitarian Associ-
ation, 1903. 6 v. MeWC
238. New and complete ed., rearranged,
to which is added The perfect life. Boston,
American Unitarian Association, 1903. 1060 p.
4-10382 BX9815.C4 1903
239. LYDIA MARIA (FRANCIS) CHILD,
1 802-1 880
Mrs. Child, who was born in Medford, Massa-
chusetts, became part of a Boston and Cambridge
group of Unitarians and Transcendentalists. Her
novels, written at an early age, are didactic, senti-
mental tales emphasizing American patriotism in
colonial and Revolutionary times; one of them
celebrates the "noble savage" Hobomok. She
wrote a variety of books designed for women and
to explore their special interests. To various stories
and books for children she added a periodical which
she edited, The Juvenile Miscellany (1826-1834).
For more than 30 years she was one of the most vocal
champions of the abolition of slavery. As a re-
former Mrs. Child designed her writings also as
propaganda against social injustices and various evils
she found in American society, notably capital pun-
ishment and unfair wage scales. A Biography of
Lydia Maria Child by Bernice G. Lambert (College
Park, Md., 1953) was submitted to the University
of Maryland as a doctoral dissertation. It comprises
a typescript of 182 leaves, of which leaves 173-182
are devoted to a bibliography of Mrs. Child's writ-
ings classified by type.
240. An appeal in favor of that class of Americans
called Africans. Boston, Allen & Ticknor,
1833. 232 p. 11-4047 E449.C53 RBD
241. Hobomok, a tale of early times. By an
American. Boston, Cummings, Hilliard,
1824. 188 p. 6-20980 PZ3.C437H RBD
242. Letters from New- York. New York, C. S.
Francis, 1843. ix, 276 p.
19-6724 F128.44.C53
243.
Second series. New York, C. S.
Francis, 1845. [ix]— xii, 287 p.
28-559 F128.44.C534
First edition, published 1844.
244. Letters. With a biographical introd. by John
G. Whittier and an appendix by Wendell
Phillips. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1883. xxv,
280 p. 21-21 177 PS1293.Z8 1883
Collected and arranged by Harriet Winslow
Sewall.
Bibliography: p. 272-274.
245. JOHN ESTEN COOKE, 1 830-1 886
The plantation tradition in Virginia, the
Civil War, and idealization of the South are themes
that dominate the romantic historical novels of John
Esten Cooke. He was also one of the biographers
who contributed to the growth of the Robert E. Lee
and "Stonewall" Jackson legends and was the
author of various pieces of historical writing that
glorified Virginia.
246. The Virginia comedians; or, Old day in the
Old Dominion. New York, Appleton, 1854.
2 v. 12-19565 PZ3.C775Vi RBD
247. Surry of Eagle's-Nest; or, The memoirs of a
staff-officer serving in Virginia. New York,
Bunce & Huntington, 1866. viii, 484 p.
34-4938 PS1382.S8 1866 RBD
Includes four illustrations by Winslow Homer.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 31
248. New York, M. A. Donohue [1937? ]
484 p. 38-1585 PZ3.C775S118
249. Mohun; or, The last days of Lee and his
paladins. New York, F. J. Huntington,
1869. 509 p. UCLi 8-3023 ViU
250. Charlottesville, Va., Historical Pub.
Co., 1936. 376 p. 36-25555 PZ3.C775M09
251. My Lady Pokahontas. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1885. 190 p.
6-27178 PS1382.M9 1885 RBD
252. JAMES FENIMORE COOPER, 1789-1851
Cooper was one of the first professional lit-
erary men produced in the United States. With
Irving and Channing he won enthusiastic accept-
ance in England and on the Continent, where his
books were translated into numerous European lan-
guages. From his early home in Cooperstovvn,
New York, he had observed the migration westward
towards new frontiers. This firsthand knowledge
enabled him to give historical realism to his other-
wise romantic novels of hunters, trappers, woods-
men, Indians, frontier life, and the American Revo-
lution. His service as a youth in a merchant ship
and also in the United States Navy equipped him to
write The History of the Navy of the United States
of America (1839) and to impart to his numerous
novels about life at sea an authentic feeling of ships
and men in action. After he moved to New York
and had experienced its club life and the more so-
phisticated atmosphere of the growing city, Cooper
felt an urge to know England and the Continent of
Europe also. During a residence of seven years
abroad, he wrote and spoke as an interpreter of
America. Upon his return to the United States he
published several travel books which stimulated
American interest in the Old World. Writing as
he did at a time when the United States had suffi-
ciently come of age to begin some self-examination
of its own culture, his penetrating, often critical
books on social and political questions were and
are significant in relation to the temper of his age.
While Cooper has been best remembered for his
contribution to the romantic tradition in historical
fiction, of which Sir Walter Scott was the great
English exponent at the time, critics now tend to
emphasize the importance of the American writer's
books that reflect conservative social and political
opinions in his country at midpoint of the 19th cen-
tury. The latter aspects of his work are most com-
prehensively treated in Robert E. Spiller's Venimore
Cooper, Critic of His Times (New York, Minton,
Balch, 1 93 1. 337 p.). For a more recent critique of
his writings and a general biographical study see
James Grossman's James Fenimore Cooper (New
York, Sloane, 1949. 273 p. American men of letters
series).
253. The spy; a tale of the neutral ground. New
York, Wiley & Halstead, 1821. 2 v. CtY
Relations between Loyalists and patriots during
the American Revolution provide the background
for this, the author's second novel and first literary
success.
254.
Rev., corr., and
with a new in-
trod., notes, etc., by the author. London, R.
Bentley, 1849. x'> 410 P- (Standard novels, 3)
6-32152 PZ3.C786SPH
255. With an introd. by Tremaine Mc-
Dowell . . . New York, Scribner, 1931.
xivii, 508 p. (Modern student's library)
31-32070 PZ3.C786SP55
Brief bibliography: p. [viii]
256. The pilot; a tale of the sea. New York, C.
Wiley, 1823. 2 v.
6-29865 PZ3.C786Pi RBD
*57-
With the latest revision and correc-
tions of the author. New York, Stringer &
Townsend, 1856. x, 486 p. (Choice works of
Cooper. Revised and corrected series, v. 7)
26-24687 PZ3.C786Pi9
258. The pioneers; or, The sources of the Susque-
hanna. New York, C. Wiley, 1823. 2 v.
NN
First of the "Leatherstocking Tales." In order
of composition followed by The Last of the Mo-
hicans (1826); The Prairie (1827); The Pathfinder
(1840); and The Deer slayer (1841). Frontier
novels usually thought to contain the author's most
unforgettable characters, whites and Indians. In
reading sequence The Deerslayer should come first
and be followed by The Last of the Mohicans.
259. Rev., corr. and . . . with a new
introd., notes, etc. by the author. London,
H. Colburn & R. Bentley, 1832. xi, 460 p. (Stand-
ard novels, no. 14) 6-29701 PZ3.C786Pio5
260. New York, Dutton, 1920. xv, 444 p.
(Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys.
Fiction [no. 171]) 36-37033 AC1.E8, no. 171
First published in this edition, 1907; re-
printed . . . 1929. Bibliography: p. viii-ix.
32 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
261. Notions of the Americans: picked up by a
travelling bachelor. Philadelphia, Carey,
Lea & Carey, 1828. 2 v.
1-26767 E165.C77 RBD
262. A letter to his countrymen. New York, J.
Wiley, 1834. 116 p.
10-8765 E381.C76 RBD
263. Gleanings in Europe: England, by an Ameri-
can. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea Sc Blanchard,
1837. 2 v. in 1 (270, 260 p.)
2-30337 DA625.C777 RBD
English edition issued the same year under title:
England. With Sketches of Society in the Metrop-
olis. Published, also in the same year, in Paris as
Recollections of Europe.
264. Gleanings in Europe. Edited by Robert E.
Spiller. New York, Oxford University Press,
1928-30. 2 v. 28-18308 D919.C8
Contents. — 1. France. — 2. England.
265. The American democrat; or, Hints on the
social and civic relations of the United States
of America. Cooperstown, N. Y., H. & E. Phinney,
1838. 192 p. 9-21770 JK216.C72 RBD
266. Edited with an introd. by H. L.
Mencken. New York, Knopf, 193 1. xx,
184 p. (Americana deserta)
31-25625 JK216.C72 1931
267.
With an introd. by H. L. Mencken,
and an introductory note by Robert E. Spiller.
New York, Vintage Books, 1956. xxviii, 190 p. (A
Vintage book, K26) 56-13687 JK216.C72 1956
268. Satanstoe; or, The Littlepage manuscripts.
New York, Burgess, Stringer, 1845. 2 v.
6-29679 PZ3.C786S RBD
First novel in the Littlepage manuscripts trilogy,
continued in The Chainbearer (1845) and The Red-
skins (1846), works treating of the antirent troubles
between wealthy landlords and tenants or squatters
in New York; valuable also for its treatment of New
York society and customs of the period.
269.
Edited, with introd., chronology,
and bibliography, by Robert E. Spiller and
Joseph D. Coppock . . . New York, American
Book Co., 1937. xli, 424 p. (American fiction
series; general editor, H. H. Clark)
37-4084 PZ3.C786S18
Selected bibliography: p. xxxiii-xli.
270. Correspondence. Edited by his grandson,
James Fenimore Cooper . . . New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1922. 2 v. (776 p.)
22-21436 PS1431.A3
Partial collection of the author's letters, to which
have been added numerous letters to him.
271. Cooper's novels. New York, W. A. Town-
send, 1859-61. 32 v. Volume 1 published
1861. NN
Illustrated from drawings by F. O. C. Darley.
Represents the first effort to make a definitive
edition; influenced the preparation of various later
editions and remains an important text; lacks only
Ned Myers among the full-length novels, but omits
certain other prose pieces and short stories. Cf.
Literary History of the United States (no. 2460).
272. Works. [Mohawk ed.] New York, Put-
nam, 1912. 32 v.
12-31598 PS1400.F12
273. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Robert E. Spiller.
New York, American Book Co., 1936. cii, 350 p.
(American writers series) 36-10603 PS1403.S6
"Selected bibliography": p. lxxxix-cii.
274. RICHARD HENRY DANA, 1815-1882
Dana, while a Harvard undergraduate, had
trouble with his eyes and was sent to sea on a mer-
chant ship as part of his cure. Ten years after his
return to his normal environment, he used the jour-
nal kept when he was "before the mast" to produce
an American classic in which the hardships of a
seaman's life in the 1830's were recounted with such
power that the book was influential in reforming
some of the more brutal punishments to which
sailors were subjected at the time. It may be read
for a comparison to Herman Melville's White-
Jacket (1850).
275. Two years before the mast. New York,
Harper, 1840. 483 p. (Harper's family
library, no. 106) 5-22627 G540.D2 1840 RBD
Frequently reprinted at popular prices, as in
Everyman's library edition (New York, Dutton,
1930. 338 p.). Also published in conjunction
with a biographical sketch of the author by his
grandson, H. W. L. Dana (New York, Dodd, Mead,
1948. 338 p. Great illustrated classics series).
276. An autobiographical sketch (1815-1842).
Edited by Robert F. Metzdorf, with an introd.
by Norman Holmes Pearson. Hamden, Conn.,
Shoe String Press, 1953. x, 119 p.
53-13472 E415.9.D15A15
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 33
First publication in its entirety of a sketch written
by Dana in 1842.
". . . the great mass of the material [Dana's
papers] still lies fallow in the collections of the
Massachusetts Historical Society. That the papers
of Dana will someday be printed in extenso seems
inevitable; he is the Boswell of Boston, in a sense,
and his journal, letters, and speeches provide a key
to the social, literary, and political history of Massa-
chusetts in the mid-nineteenth century." — Preface,
p. ix.
277. JOHN WILLIAM DE FOREST, 1 826-1906
The rise of realism in the American novel
after the middle of the 19th century, usually associ-
ated with the work of William Dean Howells, was
anticipated in the novels of a Connecticut officer in
the Union Army, J. W. De Forest. He wrote
vigorously and factually of life in the South, with-
out romantic overtones, and dealt honestly with the
mistakes and miseries of the Civil War. Later his
Honest John Vane (1875) and Playing the Mischief
(1875) exposed the political corruption following
the war. His personal reminiscences of life in the
army, originally issued serially in the 1860's, have
been republished by the Yale University Press as: A
Volunteer's Adventures (1946); and A Union Of-
ficer in the Reconstruction (1948).
278. Miss Ravenel's conversion from secession to
loyalty. New York, Harper, 1867. 521 p.
42-43995 PS1525.D5M5 1867 RBD
279. New York, Harper, 1939. xvi,
466 p. 39-19903 PZ3-D363Mi
See particularly the Introduction by Gordon S.
Haight (p. xvi) in which is quoted William D.
Howell's opinion that De Forest deserves to be
"lastingly recognized as one of the masters of
American fiction."
280. RALPH WALDO EMERSON, 1 803-1 882
Emerson reached maturity in the full tide of
19th-century romanticism, material prosperity, and
westward expansion in the United States. He came
from New England roots planted in America about
fourteen years after the first settlement in Massa-
chusetts. His background derived from some an-
cestors who were Puritan clergymen and from others
who were shrewd Yankees engaged in trade; his
education was obtained at the Boston Latin School,
Harvard College, and the Harvard Divinity School.
Following his graduation from the last of these
institutions he passed into the Unitarian ministry,
but resigned in less than four years because of doc-
trinal differences. Before he was 32 years of age
he setded permanently in Concord. From that quiet
village his intellectual interests ranged far. He be-
came a philosopher in his own right, a Platonist
with keen interests in the sacred books of the East,
and in the literature of German idealism. Mon-
taigne and Shakespeare were his lifelong enthusi-
asms. Poetic form and substance held his continued
interest. During his travels in Europe he formed
a lasting friendship with Carlyle and a not uncritical
admiration for England. At home he was the
center of the Transcendentalist circle in Concord.
In that capacity he influenced writers as dissimilar
as H. D. Thoreau, Jones Very, Nathaniel Haw-
thorne, and Walt Whitman. Although he avoided
the extreme views of some of his circle and took
no part in the communal settlements of Brook Farm
and Fruitlands, he contributed to and edited the
Transcendentalist organ, The Dial (1840-1844).
Throughout his career he proclaimed to America
and the world his philosophy of idealism, optimism,
individualism, self-reliance, moral intuition, and
the Over-Soul. His message was given by means
of public lectures, in essays, and in poems. On the
basis of all these he became a leading citizen and a
formative force not only in American life but also
in the creation of a national literature for the United
States.
281. Nature. Boston, J. Munroe, 1836. 95 p.
34-25488 PS1613.A1 1836 RBD
Published anonymously, this first of Emerson's
books contained the essence of the Transcendental
philosophy that he elaborated in later works.
282.
74 P-
New ed. Boston, J. Munroe, 1849.
34-25487 PS1613.A1 1849 RBD
283. [The American scholar] An oration de-
livered before the Phi Beta Kappa Society . . .
[of Harvard College] Boston, J. Munroe, 1837.
26 p. 24-24542 PS1623.O7 1837 RBD
Frequently called the declaration of independence
of American intellectual life.
284. An address delivered before the senior class
in Divinity College, Cambridge, Sunday eve-
ning, 15 July, 1838. Boston, J. Munroe, 1838. }i p.
4-36592 BX9842.E55 1838 RBD
AC901.W3, v. 4 RBD
Republished as The Divinity School Address ami
issued in its filth printing by the American Uni-
tarian Association in Boston, 1928.
285. Essays: [first series] Boston, J. Munroe,
1841. 303 p.
22-17721 PS1608.A2 1841 RBD
34 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Contents. — History. — Self-reliance. — Compensa-
tion.— Spiritual laws. — Love. — Friendship. — Pru-
dence.— Heroism. — The Over-Soul. — Circles. — In-
tellect.— Art.
286. Essays: second series. Boston, J. Munroe,
1844. 313 p.
9-27870 PS1608.A3 1844 RBD
Contents. — The poet. — Experience. — Charac-
ter.— Manners. — Gifts. — Nature. — Politics. — Nomi-
nalist and realist. — New England reformers; lec-
ture at Amory Hall.
287. Essays, first and second series; with introd.
by Irwin Edman. New York, Crowell, 1951.
438 p. 51-7280 PS1608.A1 1951
288. Poems. Boston, J. Munroe, 1847. 251 p.
1-582 PS1624.A1 1847 RBD
First American edition; first English edition
published slightly earlier in the same year (London,
Chapman, 1847. 199 p. PS1624.A1 1847a).
Household ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1892. vi, 324 p. (Household edi-
tion of the poets) 48-43255 PS1624.A1 1892
"Contains nearly all the pieces included in the
Poems and May-Day of former editions . . . Also,
some pieces never before published are here given
in an Appendix."
First published in 1883 as v. 9 of the Riverside
edition of Emerson's Complete Wor\s.
290.
Selected and edited with a commen-
tary, by Louis Untermeyer; illustrated with
water-colors by Richard & Doris Beer. New York,
Heritage Press, 1945. xvi, 238 p. (American
poets, edited by Louis Untermeyer)
45-6422 PS1624.A17 1945 RBD
291. English traits. Boston, Phillips, Sampson,
1856. 312 p.
3-2575 DA625.E54 1856 RBD
Shows the reaction to the character and quality
of the English people, by an American living at the
middle of the 19th century.
292. The conduct of life. Boston, Ticknor &
Fields, i860. 288 p.
36-15513 PS1606.A1 i860 RBD
Contents. — Fate. — Power. — Wealth. — Culture. —
Behavior. — Worship. — Considerations by the way. —
Beauty. — Illusions.
293. The conduct of life, Nature, and other essays.
New York, Dutton, 1927. xi, 308 p. (Every-
man's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Essays and
belles lettres, no. 322)
36-37199 AC1.E8, no. 322
294. Journals of Ralph Waldo Emerson, with an-
notations, edited by Edward Waldo Emerson
and Waldo Emerson Forbes. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1909-14. 10 v.
9-29980 PS 1 63 1. A3 1909
Contents. — 1. 1820-1824. — 2. 1824-1832. — 3.
1833-1835.— 4. 1836-1838.— 5. 1838-1841.— 6. 1841-
1844 — 7. 1845-1948. — 8. 1849-1855. — 9. 1856-
1863.— 10. 1864-1876.
295. The heart of Emerson's journals, edited by
Bliss Perry. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1926.
1X> 357 P- 26-15215 PS1631.A3 1916
296. Letters; edited by Ralph L. Rusk. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1939. 6 v.
39-12289 PS 1 63 1. A3 1939
297. Complete works. Centenary ed. With a
biographical introd. and notes by Edward
Waldo Emerson, and a general index. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 12 v. NcD
The set in the Library of Congress has imprint
dates ci903~2i (33-21674 PSi6oo.F03a).
298. English traits, Representative men & other
essays. New York, Dutton, 1932. ix, 374 p.
(Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys. Es-
says and belles lettres, no. 279)
36-37246 AC1.E8, no. 279
299. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Frederic I. Carpenter.
New York, American Book Co., 1934. lvii, 456 p.
(American writers series) 34-7266 PS1602.C3
"The text of Emerson's prose and verse included
in the present volume is that of the Centenary edi-
tion, which incorporates the author's final revi-
sions."— Preface.
"Selected bibliography": p. xlix-lvi.
300. Complete essays and other writings, edited,
with a biographical introd., by Brooks At-
kinson. Foreword by Tremaine McDowell. New
York, Modern Library, 1950. xxvii, 930 p. (Mod-
ern Library college editions, T14)
50-12215 PS1600.F50
Bibliography: p. xxvii.
301. Basic selections from Emerson; essays, poems
& apothegms. Edited by Eduard C. Linde-
man. New York, New American Library, 1954.
215 p. (A Mentor book, M 102)
54-6005 PS1603.L5
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 35
Another recent collection in inexpensive format
was edited by Robert E. Spiller and announced for
publication in 1957, by Appleton-Century-Crofts in
that firm's classics series.
Recent contributions to the voluminous critical
studies of Emerson's life and thought include:
302. Carpenter, Frederic I. Emerson handbook.
New York, Hendricks House, 1953. xiv,
268 p. (Handbooks of American literature)
53-2274 PS1631.C34
303. Hopkins, Vivian C. Spires of form; a study
of Emerson's aesthetic theory. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1951. x, 276 p.
51-9713 PS1642.A3H6
Bibliography: p. [252]-256.
304. Paul, Sherman. Emerson's angle of vision;
man and nature in American experience.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. viii,
268 p. 52-5039 PS1638.P3
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
P- [233]~258.
305. Rusk, Ralph L. The life of Ralph Waldo
Emerson. New York, Scribner, 1949. ix,
592 p. 49-9006 PS1631.R78
"Index and bibliography": p. 553-592.
306. Whicher, Stephen E. Freedom and fate; an
inner life of Ralph Waldo Emerson. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1953.
203 p. 53-9552 PS1631.W5
Includes bibliography.
307. TIMOTHY FLINT, 1 780-1 840
Traveler, clergyman, editor, and novelist,
Flint was born in Massachusetts and educated at
Harvard. He brought to his missionary journeys
and other expeditions, in the Mississippi Valley and
beyond, the same intellectual enthusiasm for the
wilderness and for advancing the frontier that in-
spired other men of his period to carry civilization
westward. His Recollections make available a con-
temporary source for learning the reactions of an
educated, idealistic man of the time to the rigors as
well as excitements of pioneering, thus contributing
to an understanding of an important phase in the
social and economic development of the United
States. His novels entitle him to be classed with the
founders of Western fiction in America.
308. Recollections of the last ten years. Boston,
Cummings, Hilliard, 1826. 395 p.
1-8704 F353.F63
309.
Edited, with an introd., by C. Hart-
ley Grattan. New York, Knopf, 1932. xix,
380 p. (Americana deserta)
32-26991 F353.F632
310. Biographical memoir of Daniel Boone, the
first settler of Kentucky. Interspersed with
incidents in the early annals of the country. Cin-
cinnati, N. & G. Guilford, 1833. viii, 267 p. illus.
7-1044 1 F454.B744
311. Francis Berrian; or, The Mexican patriot.
Boston, Cummings, Hilliard, 1826. 2 v.
CtY
Romance portraying a New Englander in Mexico
during the revolutionary years of the 1820's.
312. The Shoshonee Valley. Cincinnati, E. H.
Flint, 1830. 2 v.
6-39999 PZ3.F649S RBD
Novel introducing Rocky Mountain trappers and
fur traders, or "mountain men."
313. (SARAH) MARGARET FULLER (MAR-
CHESA D'OSSOLI), 18 10-1850
A New England child prodigy, who later be-
came a legend because of her melodramatic life,
Margaret Fuller was an American pioneer of her
period — a journalist, traveler in Europe and Amer-
ica, critic, lecturer, feminist, Transcendentalist, and
social reformer — in whose work the awakening
literary and social conscience of the time had a sig-
nificant manifestation. During her brief editorship
(1840-42) of The Dial (1840-44) she developed it as
a liberal literary review and secured for it contri-
butions from some of the best writers of the coun-
try. As part of her work with Horace Greeley on
the New Yorf^ Tribune she criticized the leading
authors of England and America, not always kindly,
but with ability. Her translations, particularly from
the German, reached the small audience prepared
for this material. Her "conversations," or informal
lectures on ideas and events, were influential in
developing opinions among the intelligentsia. Be-
fore her untimely death she became a citizen of the
world, at home in foreign literary circles and an
adherent of Mazzini in the Roman Revolution.
Although severely bowdlerized by her distinguished
editors, R. W. Emerson, W. H. Channing, and J. F.
Clarke, her Memoirs (Boston, Phillips, Sampson,
1852, 2 v.) still provide a useful source for the study
of intellectual America in the mid-nineteenth
century.
36 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
314. Summer on the lakes, in 1843. Boston, C. C.
Little & J. Brown, 1844. 256 p.
Rc-1714 F551.O84RBD
Account of a trip through the Middle West and
Great Lakes country and of the "unfolding, nohle
energies" anticipated by the writer in the United
States, as migrations from the East to the West and
back again were continued.
315. Woman in the nineteenth century. New
York, Greeley & McElrath, 1845. 201 p.
28-22266 HQ1154.O8 1845 RBD
"A reproduction, modified and expanded, of an
article published in The Dial, Boston, July 1843,
under the title of 'The Great Lawsuit. Man versus
Men: Woman versus Women'." — Preface.
A pioneer work, which reached an audience in
England as well as in America, and which was in-
strumental in forwarding the woman's movement.
316.
Edited by her brother, Arthur B.
Fuller. New and complete ed., with introd.
by Horace Greeley. Boston, Roberts, 1874. 420 p.
7-36542 HQ1154.O86
317. Papers on literature and art. New York,
Wiley & Putnam, 1846. 2 v. in 1. (Wiley
and Putnam's library of American books, [no.
19-20]) 24-11830 PS2504.P3
"American Literature: Its Position in the Present
Time, and Prospects for the Future," appears in pt.
2, p. [l22]-l65.
318. Writings. Selected and edited by Mason
Wade. New York, Viking Press, 1941.
608 p. 41-6756 PS2501.W3
"Bibliography of published writings of Margaret
Fuller": p. [593]-6oo.
319. JAMES HALL, 1 793-1 868
Hall, a Philadelphian who migrated west-
ward in 1820, became active as a lawyer (later a
judge), financier, editor, and writer in a region be-
tween the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers. His
sketches, legends, stories, and historical miscellanies
portray with realism colored by romance the Indi-
ans and whites, manners and customs, and daily
events of life when that section of country was part
of the American frontier. He was also coauthor
with Thomas L. McKenney of the History of the
Indian Tribes of North America (Philadelphia,
E. C. Biddle, 1836-44. 3 v.).
320. Letters from the West. London, H. Col-
burn, 1828. 385 p.
13-23470 F353.H16 RBD
Includes descriptions of scenery, manners, and
customs associated with life in the Mississippi Val-
ley, and gives various anecdotes of frontier life in
the same region.
321. Sketches of history, life, and manners in the
West. Cincinnati, Hubbard & Edmands,
1834. 263 p. 1-8652 F351.H17 RBD
Of this edition apparently only volume 1 was
published. It was reissued in a 2-volume edition
in 1835. Deals with the valleys of the Mississippi
and Ohio Rivers.
322. Legends of the West. [Author's rev. ed.]
New York, Putnam, 1853. 435 p.
35-33761 PS1779.H16L4 1853
Chiefly a collection of short tales and sketches,
of which the first edition was published in 1832.
Includes a novel, The Harpe's Head (1833), pub-
lished also under the title, Kentucky.
323. FITZ-GREENE HALLECK, 1790-1867
Halleck, a Connecticut minor poet long iden-
tified with New York literary circles, perpetuated
in America the romantic tradition of which Byron,
Campbell, and Scott were representative in Britain.
In the 1830's he was second only to Bryant in popular
favor in the United States. His "Croacker Poems,"
written in collaboration with Joseph Rodman
Drake, to satirize local writers, artists, scientists, and
politicians, made him famous overnight. His
shorter poems, some of which were written in en-
thusiasm for European affairs engendered by a trip
abroad, are his most lasting achievements. Among
these, "Burns" and "Marco Bozzaris" are typical.
"On the Death Of Joseph Rodman Drake" is re-
membered as a poet's devoted tribute to another
poet who was his friend. Halleck's poems on native
American themes include "The Field of the
Grounded Arms," celebrating the American vic-
tory at Saratoga during the Revolutionary War,
and "Red Jacket," a eulogy of an Indian chief of
the Tuscaroras.
324. Alnwick Castle, with other poems. New
York, G. & C. Carvill, 1827. 64 p.
17-11659 PS1782.A5 1827 RBD
325-
New-York, Harper, 1845. 104 p.
26-854 PS1782.A51845 RBD
326. Poetical works. Now first collected. New
York, Appleton, 1847. 280 p. illus.
26-6565 PS1780.A2 1847
327-
New York, Appleton, 1859. 238 p.
26-6570 PS1780.A2 1859
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 37
328. The poetical writings of Fitz-Greene Halleck,
with extracts from those of Joseph Rodman
Drake. Edited by James Grant Wilson. New
York, Appleton, 1869. xviii, 389 p.
15-18389 PS1780.A2 1869
329. Life and letters. By James Grant Wilson.
New York, Appleton, 1869. 607 p.
26-6572 PS1783.W5
330. GEORGE WASHINGTON HARRIS
("SUT LOVINGOOD"), 1814-1869
Harris' humorous sketches and tall tales cele-
brate the practical jokes and exploits of a hero, Sut
Lovingood, from the mountains of East Tennessee.
Written in the local dialect, they draw their inspi-
ration from the manners and customs of the region
in the middle of the 19th century.
331. Sut Lovingood. Yarns spun by a "nat'ral
born durn'd fool." New York, Dick & Fitz-
gerald, 1867. xv, 299 p.
41-19505 PN6161.H3235 RBD
332. Edited with an introd. by Brom
Weber. New York, Grove Press, 1954.
[xxxiv] 262 p. 54-10739 PS1799.H87S8
This edition comprises stories selected from the
foregoing collection of 1867 and also the text of the
author's "Sut Lovingood Travels with Old Abe Lin-
coln." The latter sketches were originally published
in the Nashville Union and American, Feb. 28,
Mar. 2 and 5, 1861.
333. NATHANIEL HAWTHORNE, 1804-1864
Hawthorne was a descendant of one of the
stern judges of witchcraft in Salem, Massachusetts,
in the 17th century. In that same town Hawthorne
was born, spent most of his youth, and developed
as a writer. Later, he was associated particularly
with Concord, where he was a cool and detached
observer of the Transcendentalist group of which
Emerson was the center. In fact he repented early
of his own "Transcendental wild oats," an experi-
ence that led to the writing of The Blithedale Ro-
mance (1852). Revolting from what he felt to be
the easy optimism and naive otherworldlincss of the
Transcendentalists, he turned for the themes of his
novels and tales to early times in New England,
when life was dominated by Puritanism and par-
ticularly by Calvinistic theology. These matters
were dealt with by Hawthorne not as a historical
novelist, but as a writer on timeless and universal
themes having to do with the presence of evil in
the world, the inevitable consequences of sin, the
cruelty of dogmatism, and the necessity of morality.
His work was accomplished under the stimulus of
a powerful imagination, and in his longer books
resulted in what he called romances, rather than
novels. However, the adventures of which he wrote,
frequently using symbolism and allegory, were pri-
marily those of the human soul and were not in
celebration of experiences necessarily particular to
any given time or place. His reactions to a residence
of more than five years in England, part of the time
as consul at Liverpool, were given in his English
notebooks. A shorter stay in Italy led to the choice
of Rome as the setting for his romance, The Marble
Faun (i860), in which the plot traces the after-
effects of a crime and the dawn of conscience in a
child of nature. The author's own mind and life
may be studied profitably in his posthumously pub-
lished notebooks. His contemporary critics included
Herman Melville, upon whom the impact of Haw-
thorne's masterpiece, The Scarlet Letter, was con-
tributory to the writing of Moby Dic\, and Edgar
Allan Poe, whose review of the second series of
Twice-Told Tales, published in Graham's Maga-
zine, v. 20, Apr.-May, 1842, p. 254, 298-300, not
only discussed the technique of Hawthorne's short
stories and sketches, but included also a formula-
tion of Poe's own theories of the short story as a
form of literary art.
334. Twice-told tales. Boston, American Station-
ers Co., 1837. 334 p.
9-2689 PS1870.A1 1837 RBD
First edition of the first series.
335. Boston, J. Munroe, 1842. 2 v. MH
Second edition of the first series; first edition
of the second series.
336. A new ed. Boston, Ticknor, Reed,
& Fields, 1 85 1. 2 v.
7-3872 PS 1 870. A 1 1 85 1 RBD
337. New- York, Dutton, 1932. xvi, 357
p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest
Rhys. Fiction [no. 531])
36-37338 AC1.E8, no. 531
338. Mosses from an old manse. New York,
Wiley & Putnam, 1846. 2 v. in 1. (207,
211 p.) (Wiley and Putnam's library of American
books, no. 17-18)
7-3870 PS 1 863. A i 1846 RBD
339. New ed., carefully rev. by the author.
Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1854. 2 v.
6-15467 PS 1 863. A 1 1854 RBD
38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
340. Salem ed. With an introd. by
George Parsons Lathrop. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1893 [ci882]277p.
54-50422 PS1863.A1 1893
A contemporary Houghton Mifflin edition is an-
nounced for publication in July 1956.
341. The scarlet letter, a romance. Boston, Tick-
nor, Reed, & Fields, 1850. 322 p.
7-3785 PS1868.A1 1850 RBD
342. Introd. by Austin Warren. New
York, Rinehart, 1947. xiii, 251 p. (Rine-
hart editions, 1 ) 48-1188 PZ3.H318SC 82
343. With an introd. by Newton Arvin.
New York, Harper, 1950. xiii, 278 p.
(Harper's modern classics)
50-6269 PZ3.H318SC 86
344. Introd. by John C. Gerber. New
York, Modern Library, 1950. xxxiv, 300 p.
(Modern Library college editions, T21)
50-12245 PZ3.H318SC 87
Bibliography: p. xxxiii-xxxiv.
345. The house of the seven gables, a romance.
Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1851. vi,
344 p. 7-3868 PS1861.A1 1851 RBD
For Hawthorne's distinction between a romance
and a novel, see p. [iii]-iv.
346.
New York, Dutton, 1930. xv, 310
p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest
Rhys [no. 176]) 36~37232 AC1.E8, no. 176
347. With illus. reproducing drawings
for early editions . . . [and] an introductory
biographical sketch of the author and anecdotal cap-
tions by Basil Davenport. New York, Dodd,
Mead, 1950. xiii, 335 p. (Great illustrated clas-
sics) 50-6979 PZ3.H318H0 68
348. The heart of Hawthorne's journals. Edited
by Newton Arvin. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1929. xiv, 345 p. 29-10491 PS1881.A25
349. The American notebooks, based upon the
original manuscripts in the Pierpont Morgan
Library, and edited by Randall Stewart. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1932. xcvi, 350 p.
32-28143 PS1865.A1 1932
"Originally prepared as a doctoral dissertation at
Yale University [1930]" — Preface, p. ix.
Includes the passages omitted in the edition
edited by Mrs. Hawthorne and published under
title: Passages from the American Note-Boo\s of
Nathaniel Hawthorne.
350. The English notebooks, based upon the
original manuscripts in the Pierpont Morgan
Library and edited by Randall Stewart. New
York, Modern Language Association of America,
1 94 1. xliv, 667 p. (The Modern Language As-
sociation of America. General series, 13)
41-21963 PS1881.A43
Includes the passages omitted in the edition edited
by Mrs. Hawthorne and published under title: Pas-
sages from the English Note-BooJ^s of Nathaniel
Hawthorne.
"Continues the work which was begun with . . .
[the editor's] edition of The American Notebooks
(Yale University Press, 1932) and which will be
completed with an edition of The Italian Note-
books, now being prepared by Mr. Norman Holmes
Pearson." — Preface.
"Published with the cooperation of Brown
University."
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [6231-654).
351. Complete works, with introductory notes by
George Parsons Lathrop and illustrated with
etchings by Blum, Church, Dielman, Gifford, Shir-
law, and Turner. [Riverside ed. Cambridge, Mass.,
Printed at the Riverside Press, 1883] 12 v. illus.
PPTu
3^2. [Riverside ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1887-88] 12 v. illus.
42-26389 PS1850.E87
353. Complete writings. [Old Manse ed. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1900] 22 v. illus. NcD
^54. Autographed ed. [Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1900] 22 v. illus.
13-21420 PS1850.F00
355. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Austin Warren. New
York, American Book Co., 1934. xci, 368 p.
(American writers series)
34-10889 PS1852W3 1934
"Selected bibliography": p. lxxv-lxxxix.
356. Complete novels and selected tales. Edited,
with an introd. by Norman Holmes Pearson.
New York, Modern Library, 1937. 1223 p.
(Modern Library of the world's best books)
37-28752 PZ3.H3i8Com
357. The portable Hawthorne. Edited with an in-
trod. and notes, by Malcolm Cowley. New
York, Viking Press, 1948. vi, 634 p. (The Viking
portable library, 38) 48-7869 PS1852.C6
"A very short bibliography": p. 633-634.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 39
358. The best of Hawthorne. Edited with introd.
and notes by Mark Van Doren. New York,
Ronald Press, 1951. v. 436 p.
51-9259 PS1852.V3
Bibliography: p. 435-436.
359. Selected tales and sketches. Introd. by
Hyatt H. Waggoner. New York, Rinehart,
1950. xxx, 410 p. (Rinehart editions, 33)
50-14223 PS1852.W25
"A bibliographical note": p. xxvii-xxviii.
During the past several years students of Haw-
thorne have made available new light on his work.
These studies include:
360. Davidson, Edward H. Hawthorne's last
phase. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1949. xiv, 174 p. (Yale studies in English, v. Ill)
49-1858 PS1882.D37
PR 13.Y3, v. Ill
Bibliography: p. [163]-! 68.
361. Fogle, Richard H. Hawthorne's fiction: the
light & the dark. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1952. ix, 219 p.
52-4268 PS1888.F6
Bibliography: p. 207-214.
362. Stein, William B. Hawthorne's Faust, a
study of the Devil archetype. Gainesville,
University of Florida Press, 1953. vii, 172 p.
53-9337 PS1892.D4S75
Bibliography: p. 167-168.
363. Van Doren, Mark. Nathaniel Hawthorne.
New York, Sloane, 1949. xiii, 285 p.
(American men of letters series)
49-8394 PS 1 88 1. V3
Bibliographical note: p. 269-273.
364. Waggoner, Hyatt H. Hawthorne, a critical
study. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1955. 268 p.
54-9778 PS 1 888. W3
365. CHARLES FENNO HOFFMAN, 1806-
18S4
Hoffman, a New York editor, novelist, and writer
of musical verses, whose personality Poe admired,
was one of the cultivated easterners who traveled
in what was then the far western part of the United
States. By the publication of his observations and
impressions of places, events, and characteristic types
among the population, he contributed to a growing
interest in the frontier. His novel Greyslaer (1840)
celebrated the famous Beauchamp murder case,
known also as the Kentucky Tragedy, and was
successfully produced as a play in the year of its
publication. Hoffman's Poems were collected and
edited by his nephew, Edward Fenno Hoffman
(Philadelphia, Porter & Coates, 1873. 238 p.).
366. A winter in the West. By a New Yorker.
New York, Harper, 1835. 2 v.
1-16856 F484.3.H68 RBD
Narrative of a journey through Pennsylvania, the
Old Northwest, Missouri, Kentucky, Tennessee, and
Virginia.
367. Wild scenes in the forest and prairie. Lon-
don, R. Bentley, 1839. 2 v.
7-6147 PZ3.H674W
368. OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES, 1 809-1 894
A Boston Brahmin who counted Mrs. Anne
Bradstreet among his ancestors, Holmes found in
his native city a satisfying hub of the universe. His
familiar essays, full of revelations of the writer's life
and personality, were a characteristic and popular
feature of The Atlantic Monthly, for which Holmes
supplied the name when the journal was founded.
As a poet he dealt with historic and patriotic themes,
as in "Old Ironsides," and with spiritual and
imaginative ideas, characteristically expressed in
"The Chambered Nautilus." He also exercised a
talent for writing light verse, of which "The
Deacon's Masterpiece" is an example. Character-
ized by humor interspersed with pathos, common
sense, moral uprightness, and love of his country and
his region, his literary work preserves the flavor of
the time and place in which he lived. As a
physician for many years on the medical faculty of
Harvard University he attacked ignorance and
prejudice in matters of health and became the author
of medical essays and monographs which show that
he made at least one important contribution to the
improvement of medical science. His few novels
dealt with psychopathological themes, which antici-
pate later theories of psychoanalysis and psychiatry.
369. Poems. Boston, Otis, Broaders, 1836. xiv,
163 p. 26-858 PS1955.A1 1836 RBD
370. Complete poetical works. Cambridge ed.
[edited by Horace E. Scudder] Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1895. xxi, 352 p.
4-13823 PS1955.A1 1895
371. The autocrat of the breakfast-table. Boston,
Phillips, Sampson, 1858. 373 p.
17-4959 PS1964.A1 1858 RBD
40 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
372. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1895.
xxiv, 321 p. (The Riverside literature series,
[no. 81]) 17-4960 PS1964.A1 1895
Has subtitle: Everyman his own Bos well; includes
a biographical sketch.
373. Edited with an introd. by Franklin
T. Baker. New York, Macmillan, 1928.
xxv, 369 p. (The modern readers' series)
28-26745 PS1964.A1 1928
374- New York, Dutton, 1931. x, 300 p.
(Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys.
Essays, [no. 66]) 36-37070 AC 1.E8, no. 66
375. Elsie Venner; a romance of destiny. Boston,
Ticknor & Fields, 1861. 2 v.
7-5180 PS1960.A1 1861 RBD
First published under title The Professor's Story
in The Atlantic Monthly, Jan. 1860-Apr. 1861, not
December 1859 as stated in [publishers'] preface;
the novel in which Holmes denned his concept of a
Brahmin caste in New England.
In order to isolate the medical and psychiatric
elements in Elsie Venner and Holmes' other novels,
The Guardian Angel and A Mortal Antipathy,
Clarence P. Oberndorf has brought together abridg-
ments and annotations of each book under the title,
The Psychiatric Novels of Oliver Wendell Holmes
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1943.
268 p.).
Houghton Mifflin (Boston) has recently an-
nounced that the firm has in preparation a republi-
cation of Elsie Venner.
376. Writings. [Riverside ed. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1891-95] 13 v.
4-16396 PS1950.E93
377. Works. [Standard library ed.] Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1892-96. 15 v. NjP
Contents of v. 1-13 correspond to contents of
Riverside edition. Life and Letters, by John T.
Morse constitute v. 14-15. The student of Holmes'
work will wish also to consult Thomas F. Currier's
A Bibliography of Oliver Wendell Holmes (New
York, New York University Press, 1953. 707 p.),
which was edited for the Bibliographical Society of
America by Eleanor M. Tilton.
378. Representative selections, with introduction,
bibliography, and notes by S. I. Hayakawa
and Howard Mumford Jones. New York, Ameri-
can Book Co., 1939. cxxix, 472 p. (American
writers series) 39-21102 PS1953.H4
"Selected bibliography": p. cxvii-cxxix.
379. JOHNSON JONES HOOPER, 1815-1862
"Simon Suggs," a Southern frontier type of
gambler and rogue, was created by Hooper for use
in the Alabama newspapers with which he was
connected as journalist and editor. The deeds and
sayings of this fictitious sharper, through which the
author expressed his own humor and irony, were
widely popular. Some of the adventures were re-
printed as far afield as New York, in the Spirit of
the Times (1831-1861). The life and times of
Hooper are discussed, and an extensive bibliography
is supplied in William S. Hoole's Alias Simon Suggs
(University, Ala., University of Alabama Press,
1952. xxii, 283 p.).
380. Some adventures of Captain Simon Suggs,
late of the Tallapoosa Volunteers; together
with "Taking the Census," and other Alabama
sketches. By a country editor. With a portrait
from life, and other illus., by Darley. Philadelphia,
Carey & Hart, 1846. 201 p.
7-5263 PZ3.H7664S0
First edition published in 1845. Cf. Hoole, p. 58.
Simon Suggs' Adventures is the title of a later edi-
tion (Philadelphia, T. B. Peterson, 1881. 217 p.).
381. WASHINGTON IRVING, 1783-1859
Irving, a cosmopolitan and man of fashion,
had his beginnings in New York when the city
was developing as a financial and cultural center.
His early work satirized New York society and his-
tory with a burlesque touch. As his style developed
it was characterized by elegance and gentle humor
which have endeared it to admirers of such English
essayists as Addison, Steele, and Lamb. However,
his taste for sentiment, legends, and landscape, all
frequently infused with melancholy, brought him
into the romantic tradition. Many years spent
abroad as a businessman, traveler, and diplomat
enlarged his circle of literary friends and admirers,
which included Scott, Coleridge, and Byron, among
others. The Europeanization of his outlook influ-
enced him to bring into the bounds of American
literature such contributions as his The Life and
Voyages of Columbus (1828) and his book of ro-
mantic Spanish legends and sketches, The Alham-
bra (1832). After one of his returns to the United
States he contributed to the literature developing
from the exploration of the western frontier A
Tour of the Prairies, included in The Crayon
Miscellany (1835). His Life of George Washing-
ton in 5 volumes (1855-59) portrays his subject as
the central figure in the beginning of the Nation.
Irving has been called the first American literary
man to win genuine recognition abroad and the
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 4 1
writer who, in such pieces as "Rip Van Winkle"
and "The Legend of Sleepy Hollow," fathered the
American short story, which Hawthorne, Poe, and
their successors developed.
382. A history of New York from the beginning
of the world to the end of the Dutch dynasty.
By Diedrich Knickerbocker [pseud.] New York,
Inskeep & Bradford, 1809. 2 v.
4-18970 F122.170 RBD
383. Diedrich Knickerbocker's A history of New
Yor\. Edited with a critical introd. by
Stanley Williams and Tremaine McDowell. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927. lxxvii, 475 p.
(American authors series; general editor, S. T.
Williams) 27-2639 F122.1.I834
384. The sketch book of Geoffrey Crayon, gent,
[pseud.] New York, C. S. Van Winkle,
1819-20. 7 pts. CtY
This is the work that includes his celebrated
story, "Rip Van Winkle."
385. 2d ed. New York, C. S. Van
Winkle, 1819-20. 7 pts. in 2 v.
7-9492 PS2066A1 1819a RBD
386. New York, Dutton, 1936. x, 368
p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest
Rhys [no. 117]) 36-37106 AC1.E8, no. 117
Bibliography: p. viii.
387-
Introd. and descriptive captions by
Harry Hansen. New York, Dodd, Mead,
1954. 391 p. illus. (Great illustrated classics)
54-3604 PS2066.A1 1954
388. Bracebridge Hall; or, The humourists. A
medley, by Geoffrey Crayon, gent, [pseud.]
New York, C. S. Van Winkle, 1822. 2 v.
4-34448 PS2057.A1 1822 RBD
389. Handy volume ed. New York, Put-
nam, 1910. 2 v. in 1. IU
390. Tales of a traveller. London, J. Murray,
1824. 2 v.
1-1258 PS2070.A1 1824 RBD
First American edition published also in 1824, by
C. S. Van Winkle.
391. Astoria; or, Anecdotes of an enterprise beyond
the Rocky Mountains. Philadelphia, Carey,
Lea & Blanchard, 1836. 2 v.
Rc-371 F880.I71 RBD
Belongs to the literature of overland journeys to
the Northwest, the fur trade in Oregon, and the
Pacific Fur Company.
Available (1954) from Binfords & Mort, 124
N. W. 9th Avenue, Portland, Oregon, publishers of
books of interest in connection with the Pacific
Northwest.
392. Letters to Henry Brevoort. Edited, with an
introd., by George S. Hellman. New York,
Putnam, 1915. 2 v. 15-22260 PS2081.A4 1915
Republished in 191 8 in one volume (462 p.).
393. The journals of Washington Irving (hitherto
unpublished) Edited by William P. Trent
and George S. Hellman. Boston, Bibliophile So-
ciety, 1919. 3 v. 20-1680 PS2081.A3 1919
Covers the years from July 1815 to July 1842.
Stanley T. Williams has edited the following vol-
umes of journals:
Journal of Washington Irving, 1823-1824.
(Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University Press, 1931.
278 p.)
Journal, 1803, by Washington Irving (London
and New York, Oxford University Press, 1934.
48 p.)
Journal of Washington Irving, 1828, and miscel-
laneous notes on Moorish legend and history. (New
York, American Book Co., 1937. 80 p.)
394. Works. New ed. rev. New York, Putnam,
1848-51. 15 v. I_I239 PS2050.E49
Vols. 1-11, 14: "New edition revised"; v. 1-10,
15: "Author's revised edition."
395. Kinderhook ed. New York, Put-
nam [ci850-i88o] 10 v.
16-16979 PS205o.E5oa
396. Hudson ed. New York, Putnam
[ci856]-89. 27 V. CtY
397. Author's rev. ed. New York, Put-
nam, 1863-66. 21 v. MH
398. Knickerbocker ed. New York, Put-
nam, 1891-97. 40 v. OCU
Dates of publication found in the foregoing en-
tries have been transcribed from cards in the Na-
tional Union Catalog and the Main Catalog of the
Library of Congress and do not necessarily repre-
sent the first publication of each edition described.
For original publication dates see Stanley T. Wil-
liams and Mary E. Edge's A Bibliography of the
Writings of Washington Irving (New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1936. p. 2-4).
42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
399. Representative selections, with introductions,
bibliography, and notes, by Henry A. Poch-
mann. New York, American Book Co., 1934. cxiv,
380 p. (American writers series)
34-29352 PS2053.P6
"Selected bibliography": p. xciii-cx.
400. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd.,
by Saxe Commins. New York, Modern
Library, 1945. xix, 669 p. (Modern Library of
the world's best books [240])
45-37863 PS2052.C6
401. Selected prose. Edited with an introd. by
Stanley T. Williams. New York, Rinehart,
1950. xxiv, 423 p. (Rinehart editions, 41)
50-10714 PS2052.W5
"Biographical and bibliographical note": p. xxi-
xxii.
402. SYLVESTER JUDD, 1813-1853
Lowell, in A Fable for Critics, called Judd's
Margaret "the first Yankee book with the soul of
Down East in it." This authentic local flavor was
derived from the author's experiences when, re-
moving from Massachusetts where he was reared,
he settled in Augusta, Maine, as clergyman of a
Unitarian church. His local interests were reflected
not only in a few historical and genealogical works,
but also particularly in his regional romances of
rural New England. These he used to record de-
scriptions of the landscapes he loved and as a
medium for expressing his religious Transcendental,
and social views. His writings also include Richard
Edney (1850), a novel, and Philo, an Evangeliad
(1850), a didactic poem.
403. Margaret; a tale of the real and ideal. Bos-
ton, Jordan & Wiley, 1845. 460 p.
7-3525 PZ3J885M RBD
404. Rev. ed. Boston, Phillips, Sampson,
1851. 2 v. 3-22366 PZ3J885M3
405. JOHN PENDLETON KENNEDY, 1795-
1870
Of combined Maryland and Virginia ances-
try, Kennedy had a cosmopolitan circle of acquaint-
ances in the North and in Europe, and took part in
public life both locally and nationally. He was a
pioneer writer about plantation life in Old Virginia,
which he presented in Swallow Barn, a series of
urbane sketches reminiscent of the writings of his
friend, Washington Irving. His historical novels
of frontier life in Maryland, Virginia, and the Caro-
linas in the colonial and Revolutionary periods are
factually true but thoroughly representative of the
tide of romanticism rising in his time. It is said
that he advised Thackeray, whom he met on his
travels, concerning local color for The Virginians.
He was also instrumental in securing recognition
for Edgar Allan Poe.
406. Swallow Barn; or, A sojourn in the Old
Dominion [by Mark Littleton, pseud.] Phil-
adelphia, Carey & Lea, 1832. 2 v.
7-3061 PZ3.K383S RBD
407. Rev. ed., with twenty illus. by
Strother. New York, Putnam, 185 1. 506 p.
3-28156 PZ3.K383S2
408. Edited with an introd. by Jay B.
Hubbell. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929.
xxxiv, 422 p. (American authors series; general
editor, S. T. Williams) 29-9094 PZ3.K383S9
"The text followed is that of the second edition,
revised by Kennedy ... in 1851." — Note on text.
Selected reading list: p. xxxiii-xxxiv.
409. Horse-Shoe Robinson; a tale of the Tory as-
cendency, by . . . [Mark Littleton, pseud.]
Philadelphia, Carey, Lea, & Blanchard, 1835. 2 v.
3-16071 PZ3.K383H RBD
410. — Rev. ed. New York, Putnam, 1852.
xiv, 598 p. 2>~i95l7 PZ3.K383H3
411. Edited, with introd., chronology,
and bibliography, by Ernest E. Leisy. New
York, American Book Co., 1937. xxxii, 550 p.
(American fiction series; general editor, H. H.
Clark) 37-4088 PZ3.K383H26
Selected bibliography: p. xxix-xxxii.
412. Rob of the Bowl; a legend of St. Inigoe's. By
the author of "Swallow barn." Philadelphia,
Lea & Blanchard, 1838. 2 v.
7-12839 PS2162.R6 1838 RBD
413. Rev. ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott,
i860. 432 p. 7-10956 PZ3.K383R2
414. At home and abroad; a series of essays: with
a journal in Europe in 1867-8. [New York]
Putnam, 1872. 415 p.
3-30553 PS2162.A7 1872
415. CAROLINE MATILDA (STANSBURY)
KIRKLAND, 1 801-1864
Edgar Allan Poe, in the section devoted to
Mrs. Kirkland in his "The Literati of New York
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 43
City" (1846) said: "Unquestionably she is one of
our best writers, has a province of her own, and in
that province has few equals." Her province was
that of portraying community types, manners and
customs, misfortunes, and virtues observed by a
cultivated New York woman during three years
spent in sharing with others the making of a frontier
settlement at Pinckney, Michigan. Writing with
candor and realism unusual at the time, with tart-
ness, but with humanity, Mrs. Kirkland recorded
a phase of American civilization which was soon to
pass. Her fictional sketches are also an early land-
mark in the use of the small town as a recurring
theme in the national literature.
416. A new home — who'll follow? or, Glimpses
of western life. By Mrs. Mary Clavers
[pseud.] New York, C. S. Francis, 1839. 3 17 p.
13-9373 PZ3.K635N3 RBD
Reissued as Our New Home in the West (New
York, Miller, 1872. 298 p.).
-; or Life in the clearings. Edited and
417. -
with an introd. by John Nerber. New York,
Putnam, 1953. 308 p. 53-12508 PZ3.K635N8
"This editing of A New Home, and those portions
of Forest Life [1842] which by substance belong to
the earlier narrative ... is designed only as an
introduction for the modern reader to a delightful
and nearly forgotten classic of another day." —
Introduction, p. 16.
418. Forest life. By the author of A new home.
New York, C. S. Francis, 1844. 2 v.
7-13208 PZ3.K635F RBD
First edition published 1842.
419. ABRAHAM LINCOLN, 1 809-1 865
Lincoln's place in the American heritage is
with the Nation's statesmen. His collected writings
are therefore entered in the section of this bibliog-
raphy devoted to references on General History,
where they stand beside the works of Washington,
Jefferson, Franklin, and their successors. In this
section on Literature it has been considered sufficient
to suggest only briefer collections, in which Lincoln,
the literary artist, may be observed at work, varying
his style from the homely and simple to the stately
and rhetorical, and throughout clearly revealing
the mind and heart of mid-nineteenth century Amer-
ica at its best.
420. Abraham Lincoln, his speeches and writings.
Edited with critical and analytical notes by
Roy P. Basler. Pref. by Carl Sandburg. New York,
World Pub. Co., 1946. xxx, 843 p.
53-28573 E457.92 1946
"Lincoln's Development as a Writer," p. 1-49,
contains the editor's analysis of Lincoln's literary
craftsmanship and accomplishments.
Sources and bibliography: p. 807-822.
Generally the most accurate text available aside
from the Collected Worlds (1953).
421. The life and writings of Abraham Lincoln.
Edited, and with a biographical essay, by
Philip Van D. Stern; with an introd., "Lincoln in
his writings," by Allan Nevins. New York, Modern
Library, 1942. xxvi, 863 p. (Modern Library of
the world's best books. [Modern Library giants])
43-16859 E457.92
A useful collection in spite of the fact that the text
follows the sometimes unreliable Nicolay and Hay
Complete Wor\s.
422. DAVID ROSS LOCKE ("PETROLEUM V.
NASBY"), 1833-1888
Locke, a humorist in the tradition of Charles
Farrar Browne, wrote under the pseudonym of
"Petroleum V. Nasby." Many of his pieces were
issued individually in Ohio newspapers with which
he was connected as a journalist or editor. Various
collections were later published in book form. For
some of his work Thomas Nast, the famous car-
toonist, supplied illustrations. Locke's satires,
marked by ridiculous spelling, gross distortions of
grammar, puns, horseplay, and jokes of all kinds
were useful war propaganda and political cam-
paign literature in the North during and after the
Civil War. They were eagerly read by a large audi-
ence, which included President Lincoln. His post-
humous novel, The Demagogue (1891), castigated
political corruption in Ohio.
423. The Nasby papers . . . [by] Petroleum V.
Nasby [pseud.] Indianapolis, C. O. Perrine,
1864. 64 p. 5-40609 E647.L75 RBD
424. "Swingin round the cirkle." By Petroleum
V. Nasby [pseud.] Illustrated by Thomas
Nast. Boston, Lea & Shepard, 1867. 299 p.
8-1248 PN6161.L638 1867 RBD
A briefer work having the same title was pub-
lished by the American News Company, New York,
1866, 38 p.
425. The struggles (social, financial and political)
of Petroleum V. Nasby [pseud.] . . . With
an introd. by Hon. Charles Sumner. Illustrated by
Thomas Nast. Boston, I. N. Richardson, i^-:.
720 p. 12-6202 PN6161.L637 RBD
Sumner's introduction emphasizes Lincoln's en-
thusiasm for Locke's work.
44 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
426. Nasby in exile. Toledo, Ohio, Locke Pub.
Co., 1882. xv, 672 p. 3-15519 D919.L81
Comments shrewdly on manners and customs ob-
served during six months of travel in the British
Isles, France, Germany, Switzerland, and Belgium.
Originally published from week to week in the
Toledo Blade.
427. HENRY WADSWORTH LONGFEL-
LOW, 1 807-1 882
New Englander of Pilgrim descent, student and
traveler in Europe, Harvard professor of modern
languages and belles-lettres, but most of all a poet,
Longfellow in his work displayed technical skill
in versification, ability to tell a story, simplicity,
sweetness, and emphasis on morality. A romantic
poet, he derived inspiration from America's his-
toric past, particularly from Indian lore and colonial
history, from European folklore, and from the quiet
tenor of everyday life. His narrative poems, some
of the longest in American literature, have a vigor-
ous sweep; his ballads are stirring; and his sonnets
are thought by some critics to be among his best
achievements. Longfellow is a national poet be-
cause he gave America the poetry it was ready and
able to appreciate, so that his poems entered into the
minds of the people and became household words
even to schoolchildren. Through his work, which
was widely translated abroad, Europe became in-
creasingly aware of American literature, while
Americans profited by the influences of older cul-
tures transmitted in his poems. A recent and
highly favorable study of Longfellow's place in
American literature is found in Edward C. Wagen-
knecht's Longfellow; a Full-Length Portrait (New
York, Longmans, Green, 1955. 370 p.).
428. Ballads and other poems. Cambridge, Mass.,
J. Owen, 1842. 132 p.
8-26999 PS2255.A1 1842 RBD
First edition issued December 1841.
429. Evangeline, a tale of Acadie. Boston, Tick-
nor, 1847. 163 p.
10-5566 PS2263.A1 1847 RBD
430. Kavanagh, a tale. Boston, Ticknor, Reed, &
Fields, 1849. 188 p.
7-14788 PS2273.K3 1849 RBD
Includes (chapter 20) an expression of Long-
fellow's sense of the debt owed by American writers
to their intellectual inheritance from Europe; also
sets forth his belief in the importance of interna-
tional and universal interests to a growing national
literature; a short novel frequently autobiographical.
431. The seaside and the fireside. Boston, Tick-
nor, Reed, & Fields, 1850. 141 p.
6-46541 PS2266.A1 1850 RBD
First edition published December 1849.
432. The song of Hiawatha. Boston, Ticknor &
Fields, 1855. 316 p.
6-46545 PS2267.A1 1855 RBD
433. The courtship of Miles Standish, and other
poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1858.
215 p. 6-46552 PS2262.A1 1858 RBD
"Birds of Passage": p. [n7]-209.
434. Tales of a wayside inn. Boston, Ticknor &
Fields, 1863. 225 p.
6-46546 PS2269.A1 1863 RBD
435. The masque of Pandora, and other poems.
Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1875. 146 p.
6-46553 PS2271.M3 1875 RBD
436. Complete works. Rev. ed. Boston, Tick-
nor & Fields, 1866. 7 v.
8-22190 PS2250.E66 RBD
437. Complete poetical and prose works. River-
side ed. [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1886-93.]
n v.
Contents:
Prose works, with bibliographical and critical
notes. [1886] 2 v.
28-14051 PS2272.A1 1886
Poetical works, with bibliographical and critical
notes. [1886] 6 v. 28-11440 PS225o.E86a
The Divine comedy of Dante Alighieri, translated
by Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. [1892-93] 3 V.
30-3804 PQ4315.L7 1892
Published originally in 1886.
438. Works, with bibliographical and critical notes
and his life, with extracts from his journals
and correspondence; edited by Samuel Longfellow.
[Standard library ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1886-91. 14 v. MdBJ
439. Complete writings. Craigie ed. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [1932?] 11 v.
33-35334 PS225o.F32a
Includes illustrations by T. S. Sargent, J. La Farge,
E. W. Longfellow, and others. First published in
1904.
440. Complete poetical works. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [1893?] 689 p. (Cambridge edition
of the poets; edited by H. E. Scudder) OO
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 45
441. Cambridge ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [ci903] xxi, 689 p. (Cambridge edi-
tion of the poets; edited by H. E. Scudder)
40-22245 PS2250.FO3a
"Biographical Sketch" signed: H. E. S. [i. e.,
Horace Elisha Scudder].
442. Representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes, by Odell Shepard. New
York, American Book Co., 1934. lxiv, 371 p.
(American writers series) 34-13240 PS2252.S37
"Selected bibliography": p. lvii-lxii.
443. The poems of Henry Wadsworth Longfellow,
selected, and edited with a commentary, by
Louis Untermeyer. New York, Heritage Press,
1943. xxiii, 444 p. illus. (The American poets;
edited by Louis Untermeyer)
43-12592 PS2252.U5
444. Favorite poems; with an introd. by Henry
Seidel Canby. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1947. xx, 395 p. illus.
47-11080 PS2252.C3
445. AUGUSTUS BALDWIN LONGSTREET,
1790-1870
Realism and humor are joined in Longstreet's
robust newspaper sketches of country and back-
woods life in Georgia while the state was still part
of the frontier. They provide an early example of
earthy humor, frequently expressed in local dialect,
which appealed to American taste and set a fashion
that culminated in the work of humorists of the
West after the Civil War, notably in that of Mark
Twain.
446. Georgia scenes, characters, incidents, &c, in
the first half century of the Republic. By a
native Georgian. Augusta, Ga. Printed at the
S. R. Sentinel Office, 1835. 235 p.
17-6124 PZ3.L866G2 RBD
447. 2d ed. With original illus. New
York, Harper, 1850. 214 p.
18-17312 PZ3.L866G10 RBD
448. New ed., from new plates, with the
original illus. New York, Harper, 1897.
297 p. 8-26638 PZ3.L866G20
449. JAMES RUSSELL LOWELL, 1819-1891
Lowell, one of the famous group of literary
men in New England which included Holmes and
Longfellow among others, was notable for his ver-
satility. As a man of the world he was a traveler, at
home in England and on the Continent, and as
a diplomat at the Spanish and British courts.
In these capacities he was noticeably successful
in interpreting American democratic ideals to
other countries and in bringing back to the
United States reflections of the cultural heritage of
older nations. He was erudite in humanistic disci-
plines, so that he was a logical choice to succeed
Longfellow in the professorship of modern
languages and belles-lettres at Harvard. When
The Atlantic Monthly was founded in 1857 he was
appointed editor, an office he held until 1861, when
the importance of that literary journal was already
established. He was also for some years joint editor
of The North American Review and was a volumi-
nous contributor to the periodical press of the coun-
try. As a writer he was a poet skilled in the
techniques of versification, a critic, a humorist, a
master of letter-writing and the familiar essay. His
ardent interest in public affairs was expressed in his
work for the abolition of slavery. Because of his
many-sided interests, he is regarded by some critics
as the representative American writer of his period.
A detailed study of Lowell's early literary career
and his literary output, "within the human context
of its origins," is found in Leon Howard's Victorian
Knight-Errant (Berkeley, University of California
Press, 1952. 388 p.).
450. Poems. Cambridge, Mass., J. Owen, 1844
[1843] 279 p. PS2305.A1 1844 RBD
451.
Cambridge, Mass., J. Owen, 1844.
7-2790 PS2305.A1 1844a RBD
279 p.
Reissue of first edition of the same date.
452. Second series. Cambridge, Mass.,
G. Nichols, 1848 [1847] viii, 184 p.
6-18395 PS2305.A1 1847 RBD
453. Complete poetical works [edited by Horace
E. Scudder] Cambridge ed. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1896. xvii, 492 p.
4-13831 PS2305.A1 1896
454. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1917.
xvii, 492 p. (Cambridge edition of the poets)
4°~37^72 PS2300.F17
455. The vision of Sir Launfal. Cambridge,
Mass., G. Nichols, 1848. 27 p.
24-17590 PS2312.A1 1848 RBD
Characterized by interpretations of nature ob-
served in the New England countryside, by moral
teachings concerning the brotherhood of man, and
by some of Lowell's most skillful versification; the
work that established his reputation as a poet.
46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
456. The Biglow papers [first series] ... by
Homer Wilbur, A. M., pastor of the First
Church in Jaalam . . . Cambridge, Mass., G.
Nichols, 1848. xxxii, 163 p.
6-7135 PS2306.A1 1848 RBD
At head of title: Meliboeus-Hipponax.
45;
Second series. Boston, Ticknor &
Fields, 1867. lxxx, 258 p.
23-16620 PS2306.A1 1867 RBD
At head of title: Meliboeus-Hipponax.
Satiric pieces, predominantly in verse written in
Yankee dialect, called forth by the writer's strong
reactions to national problems such as the War with
Mexico, the annexation of Texas, slavery, and the
preservation of the Union.
458. [A fable for critics] Reader! walk up at once
(it will soon be too late) and buy at a perfectly
ruinous rate A fable for critics . . . [New York]
Putnam [1848] 78 p.
8-26997 PS2300.A1 1848 RBD
Rhymed criticisms of contemporary American
authors, somewhat in the manner of Lord Byron's
English Bards and Scotch Reviewers (1809).
459. Ode recited at the commemoration of the liv-
ing and dead soldiers of Harvard University,
July 21, 1865. Cambridge, Mass., Priv. print., 1865.
25 p. 50-53826 PS2314.O3 RBD
"Fifty copies printed. No. 22."
Immediately after the poem was read Lowell
added to it a tribute to Abraham Lincoln as a sym-
bol of democracy and "the first American."
460. Democracy, and other addresses. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1887. 245 p.
23-16635 PS2322.D4 1887 RBD
The address on democracy, delivered in Birming-
ham, England, in 1884, is an example of the way
in which Lowell became a spokesman for American
life and institutions to other countries; also included
is his "Harvard Anniversary" address (1886) which
sets forth his views on the functions of education
in a democracy.
461. American ideas for English readers, with
introd. by Henry Stone. Boston, J. G.
Cupples, c 1 892. xv, 94 p.
33-37837 PS2322.A5 1892 RBD
Eleven addresses delivered in England from No-
vember 6, 1880, to December 23, 1888.
462. Letters. Edited by Charles Eliot Norton.
New York, Harper, 1894. 2 v.
4-1 71 67 PS2331.A3N6
Norton later edited an enlarged collection of the
Letters, which was included as volumes 14-16 in
both the Elmwood and the de luxe editions of
Lowell's Complete Writings. More recently M. A.
De Wolfe Howe edited New Letters of James Russell
Lowell (New York, Harper, 1932. 364 p.).
463. Anti-slavery papers. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1902. 2 v. 2-27437 E449.L91
More than 50 articles published in newspapers
between 1844 and 1850; edited from the manuscripts
by W. B. Parker but not included in the collected
works cited below.
464. Uncollected poems; edited by Thelma M.
Smith. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1950. xxv, 291 p.
50-10335 PS2305.S5
Bibliography: p. [281] -283.
Poems rejected by Lowell from his early volumes
are not included; but the editor has attempted to
collect other printed poems omitted from the Elm-
wood edition, of which there were a substantial
number. No claim is made that these are among
the poet's best. It is believed by the editor, how-
ever, that the student of Lowell and of American
life in the 19th century will find ideas of genuine
interest in them. Cf. Preface, p. vii, and Intro-
duction, p. ix.
465. Writings. [Large paper ed.] [Cambridge,
Riverside Press, 1890-92] 12 v.
23-16621 PS2300.E90
Originally in 10 vols., revised by author; v. [11-
12] not numbered, added later by C. E. Norton.
Contents. — v. 1-4. Literary essays. — v. 5. Politi-
cal essays. — v. 6. Literary and political addresses. —
v. 7-10. Poems. — [v. 11 ] Latest literary essays and
addresses. 1891. — [v. 12] The old English dram-
atists. 1892.
466. Complete writings [Elmwood ed.] Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1904. 16 v. OCi
Includes Horace E. Scudder's Life of James Rus-
sell Lowell, 2 v., and Lowell's Letters, edited by
C. E. Norton, 3 v.
467.
Ed. de luxe. [Cambridge, Printed
at the Riverside Press, 1904] 16 v.
4-22260 PS2300FO4
Volumes 8, 14-16, edited by C. E. Norton.
Contents. — v. 1. Fireside travels. — v. 2. My
study windows. — v. 3-5. Among my books. — v. 6.
Political essays. — v. 7. Literary and political ad-
dresses.— v. 8. Latest literary essays. The old Eng-
lish dramatists. — v. 9-13. The poetical works. — v.
14-16. Letters, ed. by C. E. Norton.
468. Representative selections, with introd., bib-
liography, and notes, by Harry Hayden Clark
and Norman Foerster. New York, American Book
Co., 1947. clxvi, 498 p. (American writers series)
47-671 PS2302.C5
Bibliography: p. cxliii-clxvi.
469. Essays, poems and letters. Selected and edited
by William Smith Clark II. New York,
Odyssey Press, 1948. liv, 424 p. (Odyssey series
in literature) 48-9571 PS2302.C53
Selected bibliography: p. 1-liv.
470. HERMAN MELVILLE, 1819-1891
When Melville was a young boy without
financial prospects he went to sea to mend his for-
tunes, being in turn cabin boy, whaler, and enlisted
man on a United States frigate. His experiences
during this period constituted his higher education
and gave him a wealth of material utilized during his
career as a writer. The kindness and simplicity of
native life in the South Pacific Islands impressed
him greatly, as did the arrogance and cruelty of
various Americans encountered in his seafaring
years. Finally he became a democrat of the most
thoroughgoing kind, a strong individualist, a pas-
sionate advocate of social justice, a hater of shams
and of the evils inherent in slavery, imperialism, and
the "divine rights" theory of property. The ferment
of these ideas and the impact of his friendship
with Hawthorne contributed to the writing of his
masterpiece, Moby-Die^. This classic of adventures
encountered in the pursuit of whales by New Eng-
land whalemen is also a metaphysical and symbolic
portrayal of the forces of evil that lie in wait for
human souls. As such it reflects the climate of
thought represented by the work of Emerson, Haw-
thorne, Thoreau, and Whitman.
471. Typee: a peep at Polynesian life. During
a four months' residence in a valley of the
Marquesas. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1846.
2 pts. in 1 v. (325 p.) (Wiley & Putnam's library
of American books [no. 13])
3-27253 PS2384.T8 1846b RBD
Sequel: Otnoo.
Romantic fictional narrative of the simple, happy
life enjoyed by the cannibal natives and of the hero's
exotic adventures among them.
472. London, New York, H. Milford,
1924. xvi, 338 p. (The World's classics,
274) 25-26583 PZ3.M498T24
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 47
474. With an introd. by Raymond M.
Weaver and illus. by Miguel Covarrubias.
New York, Limited Editions Club, 1935. xxviii,
409 p. 35-I6595 PS2384.T8 1935 RBD
475. Illustrated by Mead Schaeffer.
New York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. viii, 289 p.
51-5640 PZ3.M498T35
"Sequel containing The Story of Toby": p. 270-
283.
476. Omoo: a narrative of adventures in the South
Seas. New York, Harper, 1847. xv, [17]-
389 p. 42-33235 PS2384.O6 1847a RBD
Sequel to Typee.
477. New York, Dutton, 1925. xiv,
328 p. (Everyman's library, edited by Ernest
Rhys. Fiction [no. 297])
36-37148 AC1.E8, no. 297
Bibliography: p. vii.
478. Mardi: and a voyage thither. New York,
Harper, 1849. 2 v.
7-17954 PS2384.M3 1849 RBD
Allegorical romance located in an imaginary
world somewhere in Polynesia, in which the writer
gives expression to the social, religious, political, and
philosophical questions with which he was con-
cerned; these were later much more powerfully de-
veloped in Moby-Die^. It is the subject of Merrell
R. Davis' monograph, Melville's Mardi, a Chartless
Voyage (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952.
240 p. Yale studies in English, v. 119).
479. White-jacket; or, The world in a man-of-war.
New York, Harper, 1850. vii, [91-465 p.
42-30911 PS2384.W5 RBD
Fictional account of the writer's service on the
U. S. man-of-war, United States, and of the abuses,
particularly flogging, to which the seamen were
subjected; may be contrasted with R. H. Dana's
Two Years Before the Mast (1840).
480.
With an introd. by Carl Van Doren.
473. New York, Dutton, 1930. x, 286 p.
(Everyman's library, edited by Ernest Rhys.
Fiction, no. 180) 36-37236 AC1.E8, no. 180
London, Oxford University Press, 1929. xx,
380 p. (World's classics, 253)
33-22938 PZ3.M498W36
481. Moby-Dick; or, The whale. New York,
Harper, 1851. xxiii, 634 p.
7-17953 PS2384.M6 1851RBD
An annotated edition of the text of the American
first edition has been prepared by Willard Thorp
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1947. 532
p.); another edition has an introduction by Newton
Arvin (New York, Rinehart, 1948. 566 p.).
48 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Arvin is also the author of Melville's critical bi-
ography in the American men of letters series (New
York, Sloane, 1950. 316 p.). The Trying-Out of
Moby-Dic\, by Howard P. Vincent, joint editor of
the novel in the Complete Wor\s of Melville, was
published by Houghton Mifflin (1949. 400 p.); it
"combines a study of the whaling sources of Moby-
Dick, with an account of its composition, and
suggestions concerning its interpretation and mean-
ing." Milton O. Percival's A Reading of Moby-
Dic\ (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950.
[136] p.) provides an analysis of the text as an
allegory of the problem of good and evil.
Among convenient editions of the novel in re-
print series may be mentioned the following:
482.
Introd. by Leon Howard. New
York, Modern Library, 1950. xxxi, 565 p.
(Modern Library college editions, T20)
50-1 1914 PZ3.M498M061
Bibliographical note: p. xxvii.
483-
Introd. by Sherman Paul. New
York, Dutton, 1950. xxxv, 664 p. (Every-
man's library, 179A. Fiction)
50-58247 PZ3.M498M062
An introductory bibliography of Melville's works
appears on p. [666-667].
484. The piazza tales. New York, Dix & Ed-
wards, 1856. 431 p.
7-17952 PS2384.P4 1856 RBD
Contents. — The piazza. — Bartleby. — Benito Ce-
reno. — The lightning-rod man. — The Encantadas;
or, Enchanted islands. — The bell-tower.
For a new edition see entry under Complete
Wor\s.
485. The confidence-man: his masquerade. New
York, Dix, Edwards, 1857. vi, 394 p.
7-17956 PS2384.C6 1857 RBD
For a new edition see entry under Complete
Wor\s.
486. Battle-pieces and aspects of the war. New
York, Harper, 1866. x, 272 p.
A18-98 PS2384.B3 1866 RBD
Poems that commemorate events of the Civil War
from Manassas to the victory of the Union forces;
includes a supplement in prose dealing with the
existing political situation.
487. Billy Budd, and other prose pieces. Edited
by Raymond [M.] Weaver. London, Con-
stable, 1924. 399 p. (The works of Herman Mel-
ville. Standard edition, v. 13)
24-29693 PS2380.F22, v. 13 RBD
First publication of the novel that was written
shortly before the author's death; a story of valor
and tragedy in the life of an American sailor. The
complete text of the work, with variant readings
based on Melville manuscripts, was edited by F.
Barron Freeman ([Cambridge, Mass.] Harvard
University Press, 1948. 381 p.). An opera in
four acts by Benjamin Britten was inspired by the
novel, as was a play in three acts by Louis O. Coxe
and Robert Chapman (Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 195 1. 56 p.).
The volume includes also Melville's long, enthu-
siastic essay on Hawthorne's work, entitled "Haw-
thorne and His Mosses," in which he compared
Hawthorne to Shakespeare and made the famous
statements: "Men, not very much inferior to
Shakespeare, are this day being born on the banks
of the Ohio . . . Let America, then, prize and
cherish her writers; yea, let her glorify them. . . .
And while she has good kith and kin of her own,
to take to her bosom, let her not lavish her embraces
upon the household of an alien."
488. Poems, containing Battle-pieces and aspects of
the war, John Marr and other sailors,
Timoleon, etc., and Miscellaneous poems. London,
Constable, 1924. xii, 434 p. (The works of Her-
man Melville. Standard edition, v. 16)
25-16079 PS2380.F22, v. 16 RBD
For a new edition see entry under Complete
Wor\s.
489. Journal of a visit to Europe and the Levant,
October 11, 1856-May 6, 1857. Edited by
Howard C. Horsford. Princeton, N. J., Princeton
University Press, 1955. xiv, 299 p. (Princeton
studies in English, no. 35)
54-5005 D919.M58 1955
Bibliography: p. xiii-xiv.
An earlier and very limited edition of Melville's
journal for this period is found in Journal Up the
Straits, edited by Raymond M. Weaver (New York,
The Colophon, 1935. 182 p.). The first publication
of two original notebooks, edited by Eleanor M.
Metcalf, appeared as Journal of a Visit to London
and the Continent, 1849-1850 (Cambridge, Mass.,
Harvard University Press, 1948. 189 p.).
490. Works. Standard ed. London, Constable,
1922-24. 16 v. PS2380.F22 RBD
491. [Complete works] New York, Hendricks
House, 1947.
Note changes of publisher in contents de-
scribed below:
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 49
Collected poems. Edited by Howard P. Vincent.
Chicago, Packard, 1947. 548 p. (Complete works,
14) 47-4470 PS2382.V5
Piazza tales. Edited by Egbert S. Oliver. New
York, Hendricks House, 1948. 256 p. (Com-
plete works, 9) 48-9243 PS2384.P4 1948
Pierre; or, The ambiguities. Edited by Henry A.
Murray. New York, Hendricks House, 1949. 514
p. (Complete works, 7) 49-3233 PZ3.M498P13
Moby-Dick; or, The whale. Edited by Luther
S. Mansfield and Howard P. Vincent. New York,
Hendricks House, 1952. 851 p. (Complete works)
52-6994 PZ3.M498M064
Bibliographical references included in the "Index"
(p. 833-851).
The confidence-man: his masquerade. Edited by
Elizabeth S. Foster. New York, Hendricks House,
1954. xcv, 392 p. 55-188 PZ3.M498CP3
Includes an introduction with footnotes; explana-
tory notes (p. 287-367) based chiefly on the editor's
doctoral dissertation on the origin and meaning of
the work (Yale, 1942); textual notes (p. 367-371);
and an Appendix (p. 372-392). Volume number,
series note, and blue buckram binding, characteristic
details usually found in volumes constituting Com-
plete Wor\s, are absent in the copy described above.
It is, therefore, possibly designed to serve as a trade
edition having minor variations from the more
elaborate set of Complete Worlds.
492. Representative selections, with introd., bib-
liography, and notes, by Willard Thorp.
New York, American Book Co., 1938. clxi, 437 p.
(American writers series) 38-18635 PS2382.T5
"Selected bibliography": p. cxxxiii-clxi.
493. Complete stories. Edited with an introd. and
notes, by Jay Leyda. New York, Random
House, 1949. xxxiv, 472 p. 49-8911 PZ3.M498C0
Includes the short stories in The Piazza Tales and
all Melville's known short fiction, the product of
his writing in the mid-1850's. Cf. Introduction,
p. xxix.
494. Selected tales and poems. Edited with an
introd. by Richard Chase. New York, Rine-
hart, 1950. xxiv, 417 p. (Rinehart editions, 36)
Bibliography: p. [xxi~
51-244 PS2382.C4
495. The portable Melville. Edited, and with an
introd., by Jay Leyda. New York, Viking
Press, 1952. xxii, 746 p. (The Viking portable
library [58]) 52-6308 PS2382.L4
". . . this collection has . . . strung the work
selected along the thread of the life that produced
431240—60 5
it . . . Thus ordered, even the portion of his work
included here shows unity of purpose and con-
sistency of imagery, though these did not govern the
selection." — Introduction, p. xiv.
496. Selected writings: complete short stories,
Typee [and] Billy Budd, joretopman. New
York, Modern Library, 1952. 903 p. (Modern Li-
brary of the world's best books)
51-14537 PS2382.M6
A voluminous literature has been inspired by
Melville and his writings. Contributions made to
these studies within recent years include the fol-
lowing:
497. Chase, Richard V. Herman Melville, a criti-
cal study. New York, Macmillan, 1949.
xiii, 305 p. 49-1 134 1 PS2386.C5
Work addressed to scholars, having as its thesis
Melville's use of myth and symbol; also emphasized
his use of American folklore and background.
498. Oilman, William H. Melville's early life and
Redburn. New York, New York University
Press, 1951. ix, 378 p. 51-12126 PS2386.G46
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [289B68).
499. Hillway, Tyrus, ed. Moby-Dick centennial
essays. Edited for the Melville Society, with
an introd. by Tyrus Hillway and Luther S. Mans-
field. Dallas, Southern Methodist University Press,
1953. xiv, 182 p. 53-12917 PS2384.M62H4
500. Howard, Leon. Herman Melville, a biog-
raphy. Berkeley, University of California
Press, 1 95 1. xi, 354 p. 51-62667 PS2386.H6
501. Leyda, Jay, ed. The Melville log; a docu-
mentary life of Herman Melville, 1819-1891.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1951. 2 v. (xxxiv,
899 p.) 5I_I3799 PS2386.L4
"The sources": v. 2, p. 841-858.
502. Metcalf, Eleanor M., ed. Herman Melville,
cycle and epicycle. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1953. xvii, 311 p.
52-9393 PS2386.M46
"Letters by, to, and about Melville . . . with
. . . commentary by Melville's granddaughter." —
Dust jacket.
503. Rosenberry, Edward H. Melville and the
comic spirit. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1955. x, 211 p. 55-10976 PS238;.1\(>4
Bibliography: p. [20i]-205.
50 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
504. Stone, Geoffrey. Melville. New York, Sheed
& Ward, 1949. ix, 336 p. (Great writers
of the world [4]) 49-48538 PS2386.S8
Bibliography: p. 320-326.
Presents the Roman Catholic point of view.
505. Wright, Nathalia. Melville's use of the Bible.
Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1949.
203 p. (Duke University publications)
49-9775 PS2388.B5W7
506. DONALD GRANT MITCHELL ("IK
MARVEL"), 1822-1908
A frequent contributor to literary periodicals, a
traveler, and a consul abroad, Mitchell conveyed his
impressions of Europe and America to American
readers in articles and books. He developed a type
of fictional essay of sentiment and reflection that en-
joyed marked popularity at the mid-century point
and later. His most substantial literary work, how-
ever, resulted from his passion for nature, landscape
gardening, and farming. His experiences in these
connections resulted in several books about life at
his country home.
507. Reveries of a bachelor; or, A book of the
heart. By Ik Marvel [pseud.] New York,
Baker & Scribner, 1850. 298 p.
4-8631 PZ3.M692 RBD
508. Illus. by C. B. Falls. New York,
Holborn House, 1931. 222 p.
32-2038 PS2404.R4 1931
509. My farm of Edgewood: a country book. By
the author of Reveries of a bachelor. New
York, Scribner, 1863. x, 319 p.
22-15237 S521.M65 1863
510. Works. [Edgewood ed.] New York, Scrib-
ner, 1907. 15 v. illus.
7-31247 PS2400.A2 1907
511. JAMES KIRKE PAULDING, 1778-1860
A collaborator of William and Washington
Irving in writing Salmagundi (first series, 1807-8),
Paulding's favorite genre, like that of his contem-
porary, Cooper, was the historical novel of colonial,
Revolutionary, and frontier life. Most successful
as a novelist of the Dutch in New York, he was
also an essayist, poet, dramatist, and humorist of the
"tall-tale" school. Since his politics were those of
a liberal democrat, and because he was a strong
advocate of an agrarian civilization, he was natu-
rally sympathetic toward the South. His position
on the issue of slavery was moderate but without
approval. An ardent patriot, whose family for-
tunes had been ruined in the Revolutionary War, he
was engaged from time to time in writing sarcastic
replies to criticisms by British travelers in the United
States. He was an advocate of a "National Litera-
ture," true to nature and reality in America, not
marred by the addition of "high-seasoned dishes of
foreign cookery."
512. The United States and England. New York,
A. H. Inskeep, 1815. 115 p.
9-24530 E164.I48 RBD
AC901.B3, v. 57 RBD
One of a series of controversial, sometimes satiric,
works in which the author answers British critics of
America; includes also material on politics, govern-
ment, social life, and customs in the United States.
513. Letters from the South. New York, J. East-
burn, 1817. 2 v.
Rc-2430 F230.P32 RBD
514. The Dutchman's fireside. A tale. New
York, Harper, 1831. 2 v. (Harper's stereo-
type ed.) 7-34069 PZ3.P282DU RBD
515. New York, University Pub. Co.,
1900. 128 p. (Standard literature series
[no. 44]) 0-5518 PZ3.P282DU12
516. Westward Ho! A tale. New-York, J. & J.
Harper, 1832. 2 v.
7-33782 PZ3.P282W RBD
Novel on the theme of Virginians pioneering in
Kentucky.
517. American comedies. By J. K. Paulding and
William Irving Paulding. Philadelphia,
Carey & Hart, 1847. 295 p.
28-14875 PS2527.A5 1847 RBD
The first only is by J. K. Paulding.
Contents. — The Bucktails; or, Americans in
England. — The noble exile. — Madmen all; or, The
cure of love. — Antipathies; or, The enthusiasts by
the ears.
518. The lion of the West. Edited and with an
introd. by James N. Tidwell. Stanford,
Calif., Stanford University Press, 1954. 64 p.
54-12970 PS2527.L5 1954
First publication of a play which won the prize
offered by James H. Hackett, an actor-producer, for
"an original comedy whereof an American should
be the leading character." First revised by John A.
Stone, and later by William B. Bernard, who
changed the tide to The Kentuchjan; or, A Trip to
New Yor\, the play was acted successfully from
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 5 1
time to time for some 20 years. The manuscript
disappeared from view and only now, after nearly
a hundred years, it has been located and reproduced
from two texts identified as A and B. Said to be
the first American comedy to use an uncouth
frontiersman as its central character. Cf. Intro-
duction, p. 7-1 1.
519. Works. [New York, Harper, 1834-37]
14 v. in 7. MiU
520. EDGAR ALLAN POE, 1 809-1849
In Poe's tragic life the center of interest was
not political, social, or philosophical. His art of
literary composition and the tales and poems he
wrote brought into the mainstream of American
romanticism his own love of beauty, mysticism, in-
tensity, and preoccupation with death. In all these
absorptions he was influenced by Byron, Shelley,
and Coleridge. He is known for his major con-
tribution to the development of the short story as
a form of literary art. Modern mystery and horror
stories, and often science fiction and even detective
stories, owe much to his beginnings, though often
unworthily. His lyric poetry is known throughout
the civilized world and particularly in Europe,
where his work has been repeatedly translated and
where he has long been acclaimed a genius of
the first order. As a frequent contributor to periodi-
cals and himself the editor of several, he was instru-
mental in the rise of literary criticism in America,
particularly by his "The Philosophy of Composi-
tion" (1846), "The Rationale of Verse" (1843,
1848), "The Poetic Principle" (1850), and by mis-
cellaneous reviews, essays, and studies, a number
of which are gathered in his The Literati (1850).
Not by any definition a writer concerned with pur-
veying peculiarly "American" themes for a demo-
cratic American audience, he nevertheless attained
a high position in the national literature by values
in his work that are universal. Among the indi-
viduals and groups that bear his impress are Am-
brose Bierce, Hart Crane, Robert Louis Stevenson,
and many of the late 19th- and 20th-century French
poets, including Charles Baudelaire. Baudelaire on
Poe, critical papers translated and edited by Lois
and Francis E. Hyslop (State College, Pa., Bald
Eagle Press, 1952. 175 p.), brings together in con-
venient form the essays which, together with Bau-
delaire's translations of Poe, contributed much to
the latter's reputation abroad.
521. Tamerlane and other poems, by a Bostonian.
Boston, C. F. S. Thomas, 1827. 40 p. PU
522. Reproduced in facsimile from the ed.
of 1827, with an introd. by Thomas Ollive
Mabbott. New York, Published for The Facsimile
Text Society by Columbia University Press, 1941.
lxvi p., facsim.: 2 p. 1., [iii]-iv, [5J~40 p. (The
Facsimile Text Society. Publication no. 51)
41-5881 PS2610.T3 1827b
523. Al Aaraaf, Tamerlane, and minor poems.
Baltimore, Hatch & Dunning, 1829. 71 p.
54-50784 PS2610.A6 1829 RBD
524. Reproduced from the ed. of 1829,
with a bibliographical note by Thomas Ollive
Mabbott. New York, Published for The Facsimile
Text Society by Columbia University Press, 1933.
facsim.: 71 p. (The Facsimile Text Society, ser. 1:
Language and literature, v. 9)
33-3804 PS2610.A6 1829b RBD
525. Poems. 2d ed. New York, E. Bliss, 1831.
124 p. 55-46240 PS2605.A1 1 83 1 RBD
Poe called this a second edition because he con-
sidered it a revision of Al Aaraaf (1829). The
inclusion of new material, however, has caused
critics to consider it the first edition of a separate
work.
526.
Reproduced from the ed. of 183 1,
with a bibliographical note by Killis Camp-
bell. New York, Published for The Facsimile Text
Society by Columbia University Press, 1936. fac-
sim.: 124 p. (The Facsimile Text Society. Publi-
cation no. 35) 36-8568 PS2605.A1 1831a
Reproduced from the copy in the Harvard Col-
lege Library.
Contents. — Dedication. — Letter to Mr. .
— Introduction. — To Helen. — Israfel. — The doomed
city. — Fairyland. — Irene. — A pjean. — The valley
Nis. — Al Aaraaf. — Tamerlane.
527. Edited by Killis Campbell. Boston,
Ginn, 1917. lxvi, 332 p.
17-24169 PS2605.A1 1917a
528 Tales of the grotesque and arabesque. Phila-
delphia, Lea & Blanchard, 1840. 2 v.
7-35802 PS2612.A1 1840 RBD
529 Tales. New York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845.
228 p. 45-41682 PS2612.A1 1845
Contents. — The gold-bug. — The black cat. —
Mesmeric revelation. — Lionizing. — The fall of the
house of Usher. — A descent into the maelstrom. —
The colloquy of Monos and Una. — The conversa-
tion of Eiros and Charmion. — The murders in the
Rue Morgue. — The mystery of Marie Roget. — The
purloined letter. — The man in the crowd.
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS
aRY
52 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
530. The raven and other poems. New York,
Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 91 p. (Wiley and
Putnam library of American books [no. 8])
18-13432 PS2609.A1 1845a RBD
"The Raven" was first published in the Evening
Mirror (New York) v. 1, no. 97, Jan. 29, 1845,
p. [4]. The present collection contains nearly all
of the poetry written by Poe up to this time.
531. Eureka: a prose poem. New York, Putnam,
1848. 143 p.
18-11047 PS2620.A1 1848 RBD
Elaboration of his lecture on the "Cosmogony of
the Universe," delivered in the New York Society
Library, Feb. 3, 1848.
532. Letters. Edited by John Ward Ostrom.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1948.
2 v. (xxviii, 664 p.) 48-9083 PS2631.A374
"A continuation and an expansion of the editor's
A Chec\ List of Letters to and from Poe, published
as no. 4 in the Bibliographical series ... of the
University of Virginia."
"Bibliography and list of manuscript collections":
P- [547]-557-
533. Complete works. Edited by James A. Har-
rison. [Virginia ed.] New York, Crowell,
1902. 17 v. 2-20043 PS2601.H3 RBD
"Bibliography of the writings of Edgar A. Poe":
v. 16, p. [355H79-
Contents. — v. 1. Biography [by James A. Harri-
son]— v. 2-6. Tales. — v. 7. Poems. — v. 8-13.
Literary criticism. — v. 14. Essays and miscella-
nies.— v. 15. Literati. Autography. — v. 16. Mar-
ginalia. Eureka. — v. 17. Poe and his friends.
Letters relating to Poe.
534. Representative selections, with introductions,
bibliography, and notes; begun by Margaret
Alterton and completed by Hardin Craig. New
York, American Book Co., 1935. cxxxvi, 563 p.
(American writers series) 35-11900 PS2603.A6
"Selected bibliography": p. cxix-cxxxiii.
535. Edgar Allan Poe, selected and edited, with an
introd. and notes, by Philip Van Doren Stern.
New York, Viking Press, 1945. xxxviii, 664 p.
(The Viking portable library)
45-8508 PS2602.S75
536. Complete poems and stories, with selections
from his critical writings. With an introd.
and explanatory notes by Arthur Hobson Quinn;
texts established, with bibliographical notes, by Ed-
ward H. O'Neill. Illustrated by E. McKnight
KaufTer. New York, Knopf, 1946. 2 v. (542,
543-1092 p.) 46-7971 PS2601.Q5
"Bibliographical and textual notes": v. 2, p.
[io55]-io87. Bibliography: v. 2, p. [io89]-io92.
537. Selected prose and poetry. Edited, with an
introd. by W. H. Auden. New York, Rine-
hart, 1950. xxvi, 528 p. (Rinehart editions, 42)
51-2058 PS2602.A8
"Textual and bibliographical note": p. xxi-xxiii.
538. Selected poetry and prose. Edited with an
introd. by T. O. Mabbott. New York,
Modern Library, 1951. xix, 428 p. (Modern
Library college editions, T58)
51-5396 PS2602.M3
Bibliography: p. xv-xvi.
Text based chiefly on Harrison's Virginia edition
of Poe's works. Includes among the prose pieces
the following: Instinct vs Reason — A Blac\ Cat
[recently discovered]; The Philosophy of Com-
position [1846]; Tale-Writing — Twice-Told Tales
[etc.] by Nathaniel Hawthorne [1842]; and The
Poetic Principle, a lecture frequently delivered by
Poe but not published until 1850.
Among recent historical and critical studies that
contribute to an understanding of Poe's place in
American literature are the following:
539. Braddy, Haldeen. Glorious incense; the ful-
fillment of Edgar Allan Poe. Washington,
Scarecrow Press, 1953. 234 p.
53-7181 PS2631.B7
Includes bibliography.
Designed as a survey of critical writing about
Poe, ca. 1 850-1950, and an evaluation of the sur-
vival value of his work. For John Ostrom's criticism
see American Literature, v. 25, Jan. 1954, p. 508-509.
540. Chivers, Thomas Holley. Life of Poe; edited
with an introd. by Richard Beale Davis, from
the mss. in the Henry E. Huntington Library, San
Marino, Calif. New York, Dutton, 1952. 127 p.
52-5295 PS2631.C53
Bibliographical references included in "Explana-
tory notes" (p. 101-121).
541. Fagin, Nathan B. The histrionic Mr. Poe.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1949. xiii,
289 p. 49-9270 PS2631.F3
Bibliography: p. 241-254.
542. HENRY WHEELER SHAW ("JOSH BIL-
LINGS"), 1818-1885
Shaw's aphorisms and stories, published under the
pseudonym of "Josh Billings," were part of the
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 53
humorous literature that rose in popularity in the
mid-nineteenth century, to which Lincoln and other
notables were devoted. Born in Massachusetts,
Shaw traveled and worked as a steamboat captain
in what was then the West, and finally settled in
New York. These varied experiences gave him
wide familiarity with the sayings, jokes, and folk
speech of different regions. They formed the back-
ground from which his social satire developed, and
for the dialects and outlandish spellings that gave
delight to his readers. His popularity was such that
for 10 years he was able to maintain Josh Billings'
Farmer's Allminax (1870-80) as a repository for his
proverbial wit and wisdom. He was also much in
demand as a lecturer, thus foreshadowing Mark
Twain's later success with spoken humor.
543. Josh Billings, hiz sayings. With comic illus.
New York, Carleton, 1866. 232 p.
12-10995 PN6161.S535 RBD
Not the first publication of the sayings, but issued
after his adoption of unusual spelling had increased
the popularity of his work.
544. Complete works. With one hundred illus.
by Thomas Nast and others, and a biog-
raphical introd. Rev. ed. Chicago, M. A. Donohue,
1919. xxxii, 504 p.
36-345!5 PN6161.S5317 1919
545. Uncle Sam's Uncle Josh: or, Josh Billings on
practically everything, distilled from Josh's
rum-and-tansy New England wit by Donald Day.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 243 p.
53-5263 PS2806.D3
546. WILLIAM GILMORE SIMMS, 1 806-1 870
It has been suggested that Simms might be
called the Cooper of the South, because he achieved
recognition second only to Cooper's when writing
in the same genre. Using Georgia, Mississippi, and
Kentucky, but principally his native South Carolina,
as the settings for his romantic novels, he treated
three subjects derived from American history: the
frontier; Indian warfare; and the Revolutionary
War. Concerning the last subject his work is most
fully sustained, although his frontier criminals are
powerfully if sensationally portrayed, and his treat-
ment of Indian character is informed and dramatic.
His minor and comic characters, particularly the
well-known Lieutenant Porgy, are counted among
his best achievements. Simms' place in literature
is that of a novelist; but in the additional capacities
of editor, commentator on society and politics,
biographer, and poet he became known to contem-
porary northern "literati." His theory of American
writing emphasized the development of a literature
culturally emancipated from that of England and
devoted chiefly to themes native to the United States.
547. The partisan; a tale of the Revolution. New
York, Harper, 1835. 2 v.
8-13055 PS2848.P2 1835 RBD
First of a trilogy on the South Carolina campaigns
in the Revolutionary War; continued in Melli-
champe (New York, Harper, 1836. 2 v.), which
in turn was followed by Katharine Walton (Phila-
delphia, A. Hart, 185 1. 2 v.).
548. The Yemassee. A romance of Carolina.
New York, Harper, 1835. 2 v.
8-8999 PS2848.Y5 1835 RBD
549. Edited, with introd., chronology,
and bibliography, by Alexander Cowie.
New York, American Book Co., 1937. xliv, 406 p.
(American fiction series; general editor, H. H.
Clark) 37-4083 PZ3.S592Y34
Indian warfare in South Carolina provides the
theme. In Cowie's edition the text is that of the
1853 edition, which was slightly corrected by the
author.
550. Beauchampe; or, The Kentucky tragedy.
Philadelphia, Lea & Blanchard, 1842. 2 v.
29-25298 PZ3.S592B2 RBD
Plot is based on the same murder case that was
the inspiration of C. F. Hoffman's Greyslaer (1840) ;
later Simms wrote Charlemont (New York, Red-
field, 1856. 447 p.) for which Beauchampe serves
as a sequel. Both are frontier or border novels.
551. Views and reviews in American literature,
history and fiction. 1st [and 2d] series. New
York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 2 v. in 1. (238,
184 p.) (Wiley and Putnam's library of American
books [no. 9]) 30-17221 PS2850.V5 1845 RBD
552. The forayers; or, The raid of the dog-days.
New York, Redfield, 1855. 560 p.
8-13063 PS2848.F6 1855 RBD
This book and its sequel V.utaw (New York, Red-
field, 1856. 582 p.) are novels of the American Revo-
lution. The action takes place in South Carolina.
553- New and rev. ed. New York, J. W.
Lovell, 1885. 560 p. (Lovell's library, v. 1^,
no. 697) 10-1290 PS2848.F6 1885 RRD
554. Letters; collected and edited by Mary C.
Simms Oliphant, Altred Taylor Odcll [and]
T. C. Duncan Eaves. Introd. by Donald Davidson.
Biograpical sketch by Alexander S. Sallcy. Col um-
54 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
bia, University of South Carolina Press, 1952-55.
4v. 52-2352 PS2853.A4 1952
Bibliographical footnotes.
Contents. — v. 1. 1830-1844. — v. 2. 1845-1849. —
v. 3. 1850-1857. — v. 4. 1858-1866.
To be completed with the publication of volume 5.
555. Works. Uniform ed. Illustrated by Dar-
ley. New York, W. J. Widdleton, 1853-66.
20 v. NRU
Volumes 8-13 have half title: Border novels and
romances of the South, v. 1-6.
Incomplete collection, omitting particularly bio-
graphical, historical, critical, and miscellaneous
writings.
556. CHARLES HENRY SMITH ("BILL
ARP"), 1 826-1903
Smith, a Georgia lawyer, politician, and planter,
was a Confederate officer in the Civil War, and was
for many years a contributor to the Atlanta Consti-
tution. He wrote partly in the illiterate dialect of a
"Cracker," and partly in more literary style as a
rustic philosopher and satirist whom he called "Bill
Arp." His sketches and stories, however humorous,
give an insight into Southern problems and attitudes
during the war and Reconstruction and into the
racial and agrarian questions that troubled his re-
gion. Tolerance, narrative skill, good feeling, and
some clever delineations of character have contrib-
uted to the preservation of his reputation as a hu-
morist of a type exemplified in the 20th century by
Will Rogers (1879-1935). Autobiographical ele-
ments are present in Smith's Bill Arp: From the
Uncivil War to Date (1930). The Farm and the
Fireside (1891) contains "sketches of domestic life in
war and peace."
557. Bill Arp, so called. A side show of the south-
ern side of the war. Illustrated by M. A. Sul-
livan. New York, Metropolitan Record Office,
1866. 204 p. 12-14838 PN6161.S653 RBD
Parts of the book are written in the form of letters
addressed to Abraham Lincoln, "Artemus Ward,"
and others.
558. SEBA SMITH ("MAJOR JACK DOWN-
ING"), 1792-1868
A true Yankee from the state of Maine, Smith
used his invention, a homely country character
named Jack Downing, as the mouthpiece for his
own humorous but shrewd judgments of faults in
contemporary politics and life during the era of
Jacksonian democracy. Characterized by portrayals
of peculiarities in the speech and manners of rural
New England, Smith's work captured the attention
of a large audience and was instrumental in estab-
lishing a genre used by his immediate successors as
well as by such more recent humorists as Finley
Peter Dunne and Will Rogers.
559. The life and writings of Major Jack Down-
ing [pseud.] of Downingville, away Down
East in the State of Maine. Boston, Lilly, Wait,
Colman & Holden, 1833. xii, 260 p.
12-5647 PS2876.L68 1833 RBD
Comprises material originally published in the
Portland Daily Courier, a newspaper founded by
Smith.
560. 3d ed. Boston, Lilly, Wait, Col-
man & Holden, 1834. xvi, 2S8 p.
30-29693 PS2876.L68 1834 RBD
561. Way Down East; or, Portraitures of Yankee
life. By Seba Smith, the original Major Jack
Downing. New York, J. C. Derby, 1854. 384 p.
3-24500 PS2876.W3 1854 RBD
Tales having New England local color interest.
Smith had numerous imitators who even borrowed
the name of Major Downing as their own pseudo-
nym; hence the claim to original authorship in the
foregoing entry.
562. HARRIET (BEECHER) STOWE, 1811-
1896
To the crusade for the abolition of slavery in
America one of the most effective contributions was
Mrs. Stowe's novel, Uncle Tom's Cabin. Melo-
dramatic and sentimental, it nevertheless possessed
the power to appeal to the conscience of the world
and thus became a highly significant document of
the controversy over slavery. The book has been
many times dramatized and has had a phenomenal
record as a best seller in England, on the Continent,
and in the United States, long after the abuses it was
written to uncover had ceased to exist. Mrs. Stowe
was a tireless and voluminous writer of miscellane-
ous works. These include regional novels, sketches,
and stories, sometimes expressed in New England
dialect, and having as their local particularly Maine,
Massachusetts, and Connecticut. Numerous auto-
biographical and biographical elements in them re-
flect Calvinistic influences in the writer's back-
ground. The books are also characterized by real-
ism concerning village and seafaring life prevalent
in New England in the 18th century, a period that
the author believed to be seminal in the life of the
region and America. Charles H. Foster in The
Rungless Ladder: Harriet Beecher Stowe and New
England Puritanism (Durham, N. C, Duke Uni-
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 55
versity Press, 1954. 278 p.) concludes that Mrs.
Stowe's most important achievement was her ability
to give readers a clear sense of New England Puri-
tanism, while arousing sympathy based on under-
standing of its causes and results.
563. Uncle Tom's cabin; or, Life among the lowly.
Boston, J. P. Jewett, 1852. 2 v.
12-15048 PZ3.S8c.Un RBD
First published in the National Era at Washing-
ton from June 1851 to April 1852.
564. Thirtieth thousand. Boston, J. P.
Jewett, 1852. 2 v.
18-16942 PS2954.U5 1852c RBD
565. New ed. With an introductory ac-
count of the work by the author. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1887 [c 1879 J xlii, 500 p.
51-48701 PZ3.S89Un3o
566.
With an introd. by Raymond [M.]
Weaver. New York, Limited Editions Club,
1938. xv, 294 p.
39-14273 PS2954.U5 1938 RBD
Illustrated by Miguel Covarrubias.
567.
With introductory remarks and cap-
tions by Langston Hughes. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1952. 442 p. illus. (Great illus-
trated classics) 52-12396 PZ3.S89Un77
568. The minister's wooing. New York, Derby
& Jackson, 1859. 578 p.
8-16122 PS2954.M5 1859 RBD
569. 24th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1887. 578 p. 12-37862 PZ3.S89Mi8
570. The pearl of Orr's Island: a story of the coast
of Maine. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1862.
437 P- 8-16118 PZ3.S89P
571-
30th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
572. Oldtown folks. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1869.
viii, 608 p. 8-16119 PZ3.S890
573-
25th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1883. viii, 608 p.
42-27103 PZ3.S8903
574. Sam Lawson's Oldtown fireside stories.
Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1872. 216 p.
8-16114 PZ3.S89S
575. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899.
287 p. 0-701 PZ3.S89S4
Includes four additional pieces.
576. Poganuc people: their loves and lives. New
York, Fords, Howard, & Hulbert [1878]
375 p. 8-16115 PZ3.S89P0
577. Life of Harriet Beecher Stowe, compiled from
her letters and journals by her son, Charles
Edward Stowe. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1889.
xii, 530 p. illus. 16-7887 PS2956.A3 1889
See also Life and Letters of Harriet Beecher
Stowe, edited by Annie Fields (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1897. 406 p. 4-17386 PS2956.F5 1897).
578. Writings, with biographical introductions . . .
[Cambridge, Mass., Riverside Press, 1896]
16 v. illus. 28-5720 PS295o.E96a RBD
579. DANIEL PIERCE THOMPSON, 1795-
1868
A devoted citizen of Vermont, with strong anti-
quarian interests, Thompson wrote some half-dozen
historical novels on themes such as frontier life in
the state and on patriotism in Vermont during the
American Revolution. His work belongs to the
tradition inaugurated in America by Cooper and
illustrates the spread of interest in historical "ro-
mances" concerned with different parts of the
country.
580. The Green Mountain Boys. Montpelier, Vt.,
E. P. Walton, 1839. 2 v. CtY
Ethan Allen's capture of Fort Ticonderoga is
featured in the work, which is said to have gone
through 50 editions before i860; for many years it
was considered a classic American historical novel
for boys.
581. New York, J. W. Lovell [1882] 2 v.
in 1 (360 p.) (Lovell's library, v. 1, no. 21)
CA10-1621 PZ3-T3725Gr7
flin, 1890. 437 p. 8-16U7 PZ3.S89P30 582
New York, T. Nelson, 1927.
485 p. illus. 27-27787 PZ3.T3725Gr2o
583. Locke Amsden; or, The schoolmaster, a talc.
Boston, B. B. Mussey, 1847. 231 p.
49-32096 PZ3T3725L0
Regional novel influenced by the author's earlv
struggles to secure an education and by his boyhood
experiences of life and labor on a remote Vermont
farm under pioneer conditions.
584.
231 p.
Boston, Hall & Whiting, 1881.
MB
56 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
585. HENRY DAVID THOREAU, 1817-1862
Thoreau, a natural "solitary" and member of
Emerson's Concord circle of Transcendentalists, in
his own experience realized many of the ideals of his
associates in the group. In view of that fact, the
39 notebooks containing his journal, which came to
light after his death, constitute not only his own
spiritual autobiography but also a highly individual
record of literary thought in New England at the
time of the American Renaissance. Fruidands and
Brook Farm failed as Transcendentalist experi-
ments in communal living; but Thoreau's individual
venture at Walden Pond enabled him to push the
doctrine of simplification to its limits and to add a
classic to the literature of his region. Nature, with
which he was perhaps more intimate than with any
human being, provided him, as Emerson thought it
should, with the enjoyment of "an original relation
to the universe." From that relation he derived the
inspiration for his most sustained literary work.
The results are preserved in several volumes of
prose showing the discipline of wide reading, par-
ticularly in English literature of the 17th century.
As a political thinker and a social philosopher he
expressed his belief in freedom and individualism,
even when the search for these objectives of the
good life involved civil disobedience. Like Emer-
son, Thoreau was a poet, whose poems, according
to his own dictum, are "a piece of very private his-
tory, which unostentatiously lets us into the secret
of a man's life." For his contributions to The Dial
and other journals, and for his longer publications in
their earlier appearances, Thoreau received qualified
approval, chiefly from the Concord circle. Writing
shordy after his death Lowell mixed praise with
blame for his oddities, in almost equal proportions.
But time has reversed the earlier verdicts. On the
basis of his notable additions to an authentic Ameri-
can literary tradition his reputation has grown
steadily among the reputations of world figures in
literature.
586. [Civil disobedience] Resistance to civil gov-
ernment; a lecture delivered in 1847. In
Aesthetic papers, edited by Elizabeth P. Peabody.
New York, Putnam, 1849. p. 189-213.
5-3424 AP2.A27 RBD
For useful reprints of this essay, see the last entry
under Walden below, and volumes of selections
listed by Bode, Canby, Cargill, and Crawford.
587. A week on the Concord and Merrimack
Rivers. Boston, J. Munroe; New York, Put-
nam, 1849. 413 p. 8-14408 F72.C5T4 RBD
588. Edited with an introd. by Odell
Shepard. New York, Scribner, 1921. xxviii,
292 p. (Modern student's library [edited by W. D.
Howe]) 21-9999 F72.C5T56
589. Walden; or, Life in the woods. Boston,
Ticknor & Fields, 1854. 357 p.
*5-2573 PS3048.A1 1854 RBD
A Centennial Chec\-Ust of the Editions of Henry
David Thoreau's Walden has been prepared by
Walter R. Harding (Charlottesville, Va., University
of Virginia Press, 1954. 32 p.).
590. With an introd. by Joseph Wood
Krutch. New York, Harper, 1950. xii, 440
p. (Harper's modern classics)
50-6285 PS3048.A1 1950a
591. Walden and other writings. Edited with an
introd. by Brooks Atkinson. New York,
Modern Library, 1937. xx, 732 p. (Modern Library
of the world's best books) 37-28676 PS3042.A7
Issued 1950 as T35 in Modern Library college
editions.
592. Walden, and selected essays. Introd. by
George F. Whicher. Chicago, Packard, 1947.
xxii, 483 p. (University classics)
47-7258 PS3042.W5
593. Walden; or, Life in the woods. On the duty
of civil disobedience. Introd. by Norman
Holmes Pearson. New York, Rinehart, 1948. xii,
304 p. (Rinehart editions, 8)
48-8445 PS3048.A1 1948
594. The Maine woods. Boston, Ticknor & Fields,
1864. 328 p. 1-8882 F27.P5T43 RBD
Edited by Sophia Thoreau and William E. Chan-
ning.
The first of the papers was published in the Union
Magazine, New York, in 1848; the second in The
Atlantic Monthly in 1858; and the last is here first
printed.
Contents. — Ktaadn.— Chesuncook. — The Alle-
gash and east branch.
595. With an introd. by Annie Russell
Marble. New York, Crowell, 1906. xv, 359
p. (Handy volume classics) 6-23057 F24.T494
596. Cape Cod. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1865.
252 p. 3-21052 F72.C3T37 RBD
Edited by Sophia Thoreau and William Ellery
Channing; first four chapters published in Putnam's
Magazine in 1855; the fifth and eighth chapters
appeared in The Atlantic Monthly in October and
December 1864.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 57
597. With an introd. by Annie Russell
Marble. New York, Crowell, 1907. xiii,
263 p. (Astor prose series) 7-37720 F72.C3T42
598. Collected poems. Edited by Carl Bode.
Chicago, Packard, 1943. xxi, 385 p.
43-12271 PS3041.B6 1943a
First critical edition.
599. Writings. With bibliographical introduc-
tions and full indexes. In ten volumes.
[Riverside ed.] [Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894-
95] 11 v. 4-!3875 PS3040.E94
Volumes 5-8 edited by Harrison G. O. Blake.
First collected edition; introductory notes by
Horace E. Scudder. The Familiar Letters (1894)
edited by Franklin B. Sanborn, were added as an
1 ith volume. Cf. Francis H. Allen, A Bibliography
of Henry David Thoreau (Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1908).
600.
[Manuscript ed.] Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1906. 20 v.
6-4618 PS3040.F06
Volume [6] includes Familiar Letters edited by
Franklin B. Sanborn, enl. ed.; volumes [7-20] con-
tain Thoreau's Journal, edited by Bradford Torrey.
601. [Walden ed.] Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1906. 20 v. MH
The standard Walden edition was printed from
the plates of the Manuscript edition. Cf. Literary
History of the United States (no. 2460).
602. [New Riverside ed.] With biblio-
graphical introd. and full indexes. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [ 1932? ] 1 1 v.
33-16767 PS3040.F32
603. The heart of Thoreau's journals, edited by
Odell Shepard. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1927. xiii, 348 p. 27-23170 PS3053.A25 1927
604. Henry David Thoreau; representative selec-
tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes,
by Bartholow V. Crawford. New York, American
Book Co., ci934. lxxii, 379 p. (American writers
sc"es) 34-23823 PS3042.C7
"Selected bibliography": p. lix-lxix.
605. Works. Cambridge ed. Selected and edited
by Henry S. Canby. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1937. xviii, 848 p.
37-28734 PS3042.C3 1937
"Selected bibliography": p. [847J-848.
4:si24<> <;o 0
606. Works. With a biographical sketch by Ralph
Waldo Emerson. New York, Crowell, 1940.
31, [2], 440, 319, [2], 492, 423 p.
40-27855 PS3040.F40
Contents. — Biographical sketch, by R. W. Emer-
son.— Walden. — Cape Cod. — A week on the Con-
cord and Merrimack Rivers. — The Maine woods.
607. The portable Thoreau. Edited, and with an
introd., by Carl Bode. New York, Viking
Press, 1947. viii, 696 p. (The Viking portable
library) 47-1945 PS3042.B65
Bibliography: p. 695-696.
608. Selected writings on nature and liberty; edited
with an introd., by Oscar Cargill. New York,
Liberal Arts Press [1953, ci952] xx, 163 p. (The
American heritage series, no. 3)
53-942 PS3042.C34
"A reader's vocabulary, edited by Dr. Fritz A. H.
Leuchs" published as supplement (28 p.) and in-
serted at end.
Bibliography: p. xix-xx.
Recent studies that document contemporary criti-
cal opinion concerning Thoreau include:
609. Cook, Reginald L. Passage to Walden. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. xvi, 238 p.
49-8084 PS3057.N3C6
Essays aiming to "penetrate the essential quality
and evoke the richness of his correspondence with
nature."
610. Harding, Walter R., ed. Thoreau: a cen-
tury of criticism. Dallas, Southern Methodist
University Press, 1954. 205 p. 55-116 PS3054.H3
Twenty-four essays by such varied writers as J. R.
Lowell, R. W. Emerson, R. L. Stevenson, Henry
Miller, and Alfred Kazin.
611. Seybold, Ethel. Thoreau; the quest and the
classics. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1951. x, 148 p. (Yale studies in English, v. 116)
51-1771 PS3057.L55S4
PRi3.Y3,v. 116
Bibliographical footnotes.
Begun as a dissertation with the aim of investi-
gating Thoreau's classicism, the work is also de-
signed as an inquiry into the essential meaning of
his life and thought. See also Appendixes as iol-
lows: "Classical Books Used by Thoreau," p.
102; "Classical Quotations in Thoreau," p. [103]-
123; and "Index of Classical Quotations, References,
and Allusions," p. [i24]-i4i.
58
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
612. THOMAS BANGS THORPE, 1815-1878
Born and educated in Massachusetts,
Thorpe for reasons of health spent nearly 20 years
of his life in Louisiana. During that time he
formed a deep affection for the South and for the
whole southwestern frontier, over which he traveled
widely. An artist and portrait painter patronized
by distinguished people, an informed student of
politics, a historian of sorts, and an editor and
promoter of newspapers, Thorpe brought unusual
powers of observation and understanding to bear on
what he saw about him. The prairies, forests,
animals, country people, speech, manners, and folk-
lore of the region fascinated him. The stories and
sketches that preserve his firsthand impressions are
characterized by romance, realism, and robust
humor.
613. The hive of "the bee-hunter," a repository of
sketches, including peculiar American charac-
ter, scenery, and rural sports. New York, Apple-
ton, 1854. 312 p. illus.
15-11538 F396.T5 RBD
Includes "Tom Owen, the Bee-Hunter," p. [47]-
53; and Thorpe's most admired tale, "The Big Bear
of Arkansas," p. [72]~93, which was first written
for and published in the Spirit of the Times (New
York, 1831-61), v. 9, Mar. 27, 1841, p. 43-44.
6r4. HENRY TIMROD, 1828-1867
Timrod was a member of a literary group in
Charleston, South Carolina, where he was associ-
ated with Simms and Hayne. His "Theory of
Poetry" (1863-64), first published in The Atlantic
Monthly, v. 96, Sept. 1905, p. 313-326, sets forth ob-
jections to Poe's definitions of poetry and indicates
the serious interest in poetics felt by the southern
group before the Civil War. Timrod's one volume
of verse published in those years reveals his charac-
teristically sensitive response to nature. Later,
animated by intense love of the South, he became
the poet of the Confederacy. His odes and other
poems of the war years express the powerful emo-
tions of the Southern people, in verse forms in-
fluenced by English romantic poetry of the 19th
century.
615. Poems. Boston, Ticknor & Fields, i860.
130 p. 39-13915 PS3070.A2 i860 RBD
616. The poems of Henry Timrod. Edited, with
a sketch of the poet's life, by Paul H. Hayne.
New York, E. J. Hale, 1873. 205 p.
8-24837 PS3070.A2 1873 RBD
617. Memorial ed. With memoir and
portrait. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1899.
xxxviii, 193 p. 99-1766 PS3070.A2 1899
618. Essays. Edited with an introd. by Edd Win-
field Parks. Athens, University of Georgia
Press, 1942. vi, 184 p. 42-18682 PS3071.P3
Deals with literature in the South, and particu-
larly with theories of poetical form and composition.
619. WALT WHITMAN, 1819-1892
English, Dutch, and Quaker strains con-
verged in Whitman's heredity. The son of a New
York farmer turned carpenter, he was formally
educated only through the elementary grades. He
was in turn office boy, printer, itinerant country
school teacher, and journalist. At the age of thirty-
six he put on sale the first edition of his poems,
Leaves of Grass. In this and successive editions, it
is clear that Whitman saw nature "with every leaf
a miracle," and human beings, including the lowly
and the common, as the very stuff of which poetry
could be made "to define America, her athletic de-
mocracy." He took inspiration from the Concord
circle and from the general, liberal romanticism of
the first half of the 19th century; but by natural
bent he became a forerunner of the realism that
began to characterize American literature after 1870.
The poetic technique he developed also had old
derivations and new foreshadowings. A source of
the cadences heard in his poetry is found in the
majestic lines of the King James Bible; his loose
rhythmic form was the fountainhead of the "free
verse" of the 1920's. Language as used in America
fascinated him, and the "barbaric yawp" of which
he boasted included slang, oddly worded catalogs
of things, strained invocations, mongrel words, and
tags from foreign languages. At the other extreme,
however, his diction often approaches classic purity.
In a mixture of both modes, he chanted the glory of
democracy, the beauty of love and comradeship, the
life of the American people, and the infinite variety
of the country. The result was shocking to most
American readers of the period, who equated it with
vulgarity. His pungent vocabulary, forceful style,
bathos joined to beauty, egotism, license, and bois-
terous optimism for a long time offended the refined
and elegant members of society. Some of his poems
dealing with sex were so startlingly direct that to
Thoreau they sounded "as if the beasts spoke." On
the other hand, the middle classes, whose spokesman
Whitman desired to be, were puzzled and put off
by his mysticism and Transcendentalism. In spite
of the contradictory elements in his work, time has
accorded him a high place in American letters, as
well as among the greatest spokesmen for democ-
racy. His force was such that it has been felt around
the world.
620. Leaves of grass. Brooklyn, 1855. 95 p.
3-23679 PS3201 1855 RBD
First edition.
Includes the famous first preface, omitted in the
same form from later editions. In it Whitman
glorifies the United States as being in themselves the
greatest poem, extols the poet as a seer, and calls the
highest poetic art that which is simplest and most
natural.
From 1855 to 1881 when the poet made the final
revision of the text, Leaves of Grass grew in suc-
ceeding editions from its original slender dimensions
to a work of 438 pages. For the history and sig-
nificance of this evolution see Gay W. Allen's Walt
Whitman Handbook (Chicago, Packard, 1946),
p. 104-235, and Oscar L. Trigg's "The Growth
of 'Leaves of Grass'," found in The Complete Writ-
ings of Walt Whitman, book-lover's Camden edi-
tion, "Prose Works," v. 7, i.e. v. [10] of The
Complete Writings, p. 99-134.
621. Brooklyn, 1856. 384 p.
3-23702 PS3201 1856 RBD
Second edition.
Published by Fowler and Wells, New York, with-
out publisher's statement on the title page; sale was
later abandoned by the firm on account of criticism.
Adds 20 new poems to 12 in the first edition and
has lettered on the backstrip: "I greet you at the
beginning of a great career, R. W. Emerson." This
unauthorized quotation was taken from a letter
written by Emerson to acknowledge a complimen-
tary copy of the first edition.
622. Boston, Thayer & Eldridge, Year 85
of the States. (1860-61), 456 p.
3-23678 PS3201 i860 RBD
Third edition.
Includes 124 new poems, with revisions of those
found in the two earlier editions.
623.
338, 72, 24, 36 p.
3-23703 PS3201 1867 RBD
Fourth edition.
Includes Drum-Taps (1865; Sequel to Drum-
Taps (1865-66); and Songs Before Parting. The
Sequel to Drum-Taps contains the elegiacs on Lin-
coln, notably "When Lilacs Last in the Door- Yard
Bloom'd" and "O Captain! My Captain!".
624.
Washington [New York, J. S. Red-
field J 1 87 1. 384 p.
14-7865 PS3201 1871 RBD
Fifth edition.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 59
Includes Drum-Taps; Marches Now the War Is
Over; and Songs of Parting.
625.
382 p.
Author's ed. Camden, N. J., 1882.
43-36897 PS3201 1882b RBD
Issued from the plates of the "suppressed edition"
(Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1881-82). Edition which
received the poet's last textual revisions and in which
final titles and the order of arrangement were as-
signed to the poems.
626. Leaves of grass; including Sands at seventy,
1st annex, Good-bye my fancy, 2nd annex.
"A backward glance o'er travel'd roads" . . . Phila-
delphia, McKay, 1891-92. 438 p.
3-15387 PS3201.1891 RBD
Last edition that received the author's personal
supervision; known as the "Deathbed edition."
627. Leaves of grass. Edited by Emory Holloway,
from the text of the ed. authorized and
editorially supervised by his literary executors, Rich-
ard Maurice Bucke, Thomas B. Harned, and Horace
L. Traubel. Inclusive ed. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1954 [ci926] xx, 682 p.
54-4961 PS3201 1954a
Includes Whitman's discarded poems, chiefly
from the Putnam edition of The Complete Writings
(1902), and his significant prefaces, i. e., those of
1855, 1872, 1876, and "A Backward Glance O'er
Travel'd Roads" preface to November Boughs
(1888).
628. Leaves of grass, and selected prose. Edited
with an introd. by Sculley Bradley. New
York, Rinehart, 1949. xxx, 568 p. (Rinehart
editions, 28) 49-49650 PS3200.F49a
629. Leaves of grass. With an introd. by Oscar
Cargill. New York, Harper, 1950. xxxi,
537 p. (Harper's modern classics)
50-6167 PS3201 1950
New York [W. E. Chapin] 1867. 630.
With an introd. by Sculley Bradley,
New York, New American Library, 1954.
430 p. (A Mentor book, Ms 117)
54-10986 PS3201 1954
631. Democratic vistas. Washington, 1871. 84 p.
12-12831 E168.W61 RBD
At head of title: Memoranda.
On cover: New York, J. S. Redficld, publisher.
Copyrighted 1870, by Walt Whitman.
Prose work essential to an understanding of the
poet's theories concerning literature, democracy, and
"personalism," or individualism.
60 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
632. With an introd. by John Valente.
New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1949. xvii,
69 p. (Little library of liberal arts, no. 9)
49-3309 PS3213.A2V3
"Selected bibliography": p. xvii.
Mr. Valente is Executive Secretary of the Walt
Whitman Project of Brooklyn College.
633. Specimen days & Collect. Philadelphia, R.
Welsh, 1882-83. 374 p.
CA12-1030 PS3220.A1 1882 RBD
A revised edition published on London, 1887,
under title: Specimen Days in America. Cf. Caro-
lyn Wells, A Concise Bibliography of Walt Whit-
man (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922).
For the most part comprises four types of prose
descriptions: (1) genealogical and autobiographical
information; (2) realistic memoranda taken from
notebooks kept by Whitman during his experiences
in camps and hospitals during the Civil War (1862-
65); (3) idyllic expressions of delight in nature ob-
served on the banks of Timber Creek while recover-
ing from a paralytic stroke suffered in 1873; and
(4) recollections of people, places, and literary
figures and friends, such as Carlyle, Poe, Longfel-
low, and Emerson.
634. Specimen days in America. London, H. Mil-
ford, Oxford University Press, 1932. xiv, 317
p. (The World's Classics, no. 371)
32-28186 PS3220.A1 1932
635. Specimen days, Democratic vistas, and other
prose, edited by Louise Pound. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. liii, 370 p.
(Doubleday-Doran series in literature)
j; 35-8359 PS3202 1935
"Selected bibliography": p. xlvii-lii.
636. Complete poems & prose of Walt Whitman,
1855— 1888; authenticated & personal book
(handled by W. W.) Portraits from life, auto-
graph. [Philadelphia, Ferguson, 1888] 382, 374,
140, 2 p. 43-36870 PS3200.E88 RBD
"Edition: Six hundred. Number one hundred
forty." — Ms. note on verso of 2d preliminary leaf.
637. The complete writings of Walt Whitman.
Issued under the editorial supervision of his
literary executors, Richard Maurice Bucke, Thomas
B. Harned, and Horace L. Traubel; with additional
bibliographical and critical material prepared by
Oscar Lovell Triggs, Ph.D. New York, Putnam
[1902] 10 v. illus. 2-25501 PS3200.F02 RBD
"The book-lover's Camden edition."
Limited edition of 500 signed and numbered sets.
This set not numbered.
Bibliography of Walt Whitman, compiled by
O. L. Triggs: v. [10], p. 135-233.
Contents. — v. [1-3] Leaves of grass. — v. [4-10]
The complete prose works.
638. Complete prose works. Philadelphia, Mc-
Kay, 1892. viii, 522 p.
22-22228 PS3202 1892 RBD
Contents. — Specimen day s. — Collect. — Novem-
ber boughs. — Good-bye, my fancy. — Some lag-
gards yet. — Memoranda.
639. Complete poetry & selected prose and letters,
edited by Emory Holloway. London, None-
such Press, 1938. xxxix, 11 16 p.
38-27614 PS3200.F38
"Biographical and bibliographical chronology":
p. xxxi-xxxix. Published also in New York by
Random House (1938).
640. Walt Whitman; representative selections, with
introd. bibliography, and notes by Floyd Stov-
all. Rev. ed. New York, American Book Co., ci939-
lxvi, 480 p. (American writers series)
40-1 1 12 PS3204.S8 1939
"Selected bibliography": p. liii-lxiii.
641. Walt Whitman, selected and with notes by
Mark Van Doren. New York, Viking Press,
1945. 698 p. (The Viking portable library)
45-6887 PS3203.V3
642. The complete poetry and prose of Walt Whit-
man, as prepared by him for the Deathbed
edition. With an introd. by Malcolm Cowley. New
York, Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1948. 2 v. (The
American classics series. New York)
48-10006 PS3200.F48
Reprint. Garden City, N. Y., Garden
City Books, 1954, '1948. 482, 538 p. (World fam-
ous classics) 54-7937
643. Faint clews & indirections; manuscripts of
Walt Whitman and his family. Edited by
Clarence Gohdes and Rollo G. Silver. Durham,
Duke University Press, 1949. x, 250 p.
49-10012 PS3200.F49
"Contains the previously unpublished manu-
scripts of Walt Whitman and a selection from the
Whitman family letters now in the Trent Collection
in the Library of Duke University."
644. The best of Whitman, edited with an introd.
and notes by Harold W. Blodgett. New
York, Ronald Press Co., 1953. x, 478 p.
52-12519 PS3203.B6
Bibliography: p. 467-471.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 6 1
645. Poems; selections with critical aids. Edited
by Gay Wilson Allen and Charles T. Davis.
New York, New York University Press, 1955. x,
280 p. 55-8234 PS3203.A5
Bibliography: p. 273-276.
646. The Whitman reader. Edited, with an in-
trod., by Maxwell Geismar. New York,
Pocket Books, 1955. 507 p. (Cardinal edition,
GC-25) 55-23536 PS3203.G4
Includes bibliography.
The centenary of the publication of Leaves of
Giass in 1955, and the years immediately preceding
that date, were marked by the appearance of a large
number of critical and biographical studies of
Whitman. Among these are found the following:
647. Allen, Gay W. The solitary singer; a
critical biography of Walt Whitman. New
York, Macmillan, 1955. xii, 616 p. illus.
55-114 PS3231.A69
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- 545-594)-
648. Allen, Gay W., ed. Walt Whitman abroad;
critical essays from Germany, France, Scan-
dinavia, Russia, Italy, Spain, and Latin America,
Israel, Japan, and India. Syracuse, N. Y., Syra-
cuse University Press, 1955. xii, 290 p.
55-5511 PS3238.A75
Essays are given in English translations; British
essays are omitted, reference being made to Harold
Blodgett's Walt Whitman in England (Ithaca,
N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1934. 244 p.).
Includes bibliographical references.
649. Beaver, Joseph. Walt Whitman, poet of
science. New York, King's Crown Press,
1951. xv, 178 p. 51-288 PS3242.S3B4
Bibliography: p. J 171 ]— 174.
650. Briggs, Arthur E. Walt Whitman: thinker
and artist. New York, Philosophical Library,
1952. 489 p. 52-13025 PS3231.B7
651. Chase, Richard V. Walt Whitman reconsid-
ered. New York, Sloane, 1955. 191 p.
55-6326 PS3231.C47
652. Clark, Leadie M. Walt Whitman's concept
of the American common man. New York,
Philosophical Library, 1955. 178 p.
55-14638 PS3242.A5C62
Thesis — University of Illinois.
653. Eby, Edwin H. A concordance of Walt
Whitman's Leaves of grass and selected prose
writings. Seattle, University of Washington Press,
1949-54. 5 v. A5o-9002rev PS3245.E2
654. Faner, Robert D. Walt Whitman & opera.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1 95 1. xi, 249 p. 51-7724 PS3242.M8F3
Bibliography: p. 237-244.
655. Freedman, Florence B., ed. Walt Whitman
looks at the schools. New York, King's
Crown Press, 1950. xii, 278 p.
51-9067 PS3204.F7
The editor's thesis — Columbia University.
Includes articles on schools and the education of
youth that appeared in the Brooklyn Evening Star
and the Brooklyn Daily Eagle.
Bibliography: p. [26i]-2j2.
656. Hindus, Milton, ed. Leaves of grass one
hundred years after; new essays. Stanford,
Calif., Stanford University Press, 1955. 149 p.
54-11783 PS3231.H5
Among the contributors are: William Carlos
Williams, Richard Chase, Leslie Fiedler, Kenneth
Burke, David Daiches, and J. Middleton Murry.
657. Rubin, Joseph J., and Charles H. Brown, eds.
Walt Whitman of the New Yor\ Aurora,
editor at twenty-two. A collection of recently dis-
covered writings. State College, Pa., Bald Eagle
Press, 1950. viii, 147 p. 50-14220 PS3203.R8
658. Traubel, Horace. With Walt Whitman in
Camden. Boston, Small, Maynard, 1906-53.
4 v. illus. 8-5603 PS3232.T7
Volume 2 has imprint: New York, D. Appleton;
volume 3, New York, M. Kennerley; volume 4,
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press.
659. U. S. Library of Congress. Reference Dept.
Walt Whitman; a catalog based upon the
collections of the Library of Congress. With Notes
on Whitman collections and collectors [by Charles
E. Feinberg] Washington, 1955. xviii, 147 p.
55-60006 Z8971.5.U62
Z663.2.W3
660. U. S. Library of Congress. Reference Dept.
Walt Whitman: man, poet, philosopher;
three lectures presented under the auspices of the
Gertrude Clarke Whittall Poetry and Literature
Fund. Washington, 1955. 53 p.
55-60021 PS ^23 1. U5 2
Z663.2.W32
Contents. — The man, by G. W. Allen. — The
poet, by M. Van Doren. — The philosopher, by D.
Daiches.
62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
661. Willard, Charles B. Whitman's American
fame, the growth of his reputation in Amer-
ica after 1892. Providence, Brown University, 1950.
269 p. (Brown University studies, v. 12. Ameri-
cana series, no. 3) 50~5345rev PS3238.W55
Thesis — Brown University.
Bibliography: p. [253]-257.
662. JOHN GREENLEAF WHITTIER, 1807-
1892
Whittier, in the poems for which he is valued
today, preserved in the medium of his simple style
the natural beauties peculiar to New England land-
scapes and the idyllic elements he found to be charac-
teristic of simple lives in the same countryside. The
historic past of his native state, Massachusetts, where
his family had lived continuously since 1638, also
provided themes congenial to him. A Quaker, he
produced some of America's best religious poetry.
A few of the choicest hymns in use today are by
him. His early romantic inspiration came in part
from his admiration of Robert Burns' poems, an
influence that persisted, since The Cotter's Satur-
day Night finds a sort of American analogue in
Whittier's narrative poem, Snow-Bound (1866).
During his long life Whittier wrote in many forms.
He contributed to newspapers and periodicals, be-
came an editor, wrote miscellaneous prose, and to
the detriment of his own literary career became
for a time a propagandist in verse and prose for
the abolition of slavery. His literary work, how-
ever, which again predominated from the 1860's
forward, brought him various honors and attracted
to him numerous visitors and friends. A carefully
documented study of Whittier's life and accom-
plishments is provided by John A. Pollard's John
Greenleaf Whittier, Friend of Man (Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1949. 615 p.).
663. Justice and expediency; or, Slavery considered
with a view to its rightful and effectual
remedy, abolition. Haverhill, Mass., C. P. Thayer,
1833. 23 p. 7-22881 E449.W61 RBD
A pamphlet in prose.
664. Voices of freedom. 7th and complete ed.
Philadelphia, T. S. Cavender; Boston, Waite,
Pierce, 1846. vi, 192 p.
40-1460 PS3269.V6 1846 RBD
665. Leaves from Margaret Smith's journal.
Boston, Ticknor, Reed, & Fields, 1849. 224 p.
7-22150 PS3272.L4 1849 RBD
Early history of Massachusetts woven into a
fictitious diary of an English visitor purporting to
spend part of two years in the Colony.
666. In war time, and other poems. Boston, Tick-
nor & Fields, 1864. vi, 152 p.
7-21853 PS3259.I5 1864 RBD
First edition published in November 1863.
667. Snow-bound. A winter idyl. Boston, Tick-
nor & Fields, 1866. 51 p.
7-21855 PS3266.A1 1866 RBD
668. The tent on the beach, and other poems.
Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1867. 172 p.
7-21865 PS3268.A1 1867 RBD
669. Among the hills, and other poems. Boston,
Fields, Osgood, 1869. 100 p.
7-21844 PS3255.A4 1869 RBD
670. Writings. Riverside ed. [Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1888-89] 7 v.
7-22147 PS3250.E88
". . . the later (1894) issue is the standard library
edition . . ." Literary History of the United States
(no. 2460).
671. Complete poetical works. Cambridge ed.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894. xxii, 542 p.
(Cambridge edition of the poets)
47-39698 PS325o.E94a
Edited with biographical sketch, by Horace E.
Scudder.
672. Life and letters, by Samuel T. Pickard.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894. 2 v-
(802 p.) 4-17396 PS3281.P5 1894a
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 787-790.
Based on material assembled by Whittier for the
use of a possible biographer; includes a large col-
lection of letters, representing nearly every year of
the poet's life. Cf. Preface, p. [iii]. Other col-
lections of Whittier's letters have also been made;
among the more substantial of these are Whittier's
Correspondence from the Oa1{ Knoll Collection,
edited by John Albree (Salem, Mass., Essex Book
and Print Club, 191 1. 295 p.); and Whittier's Un-
known Romance; Letters to Elizabeth Lloyd, with
an introduction by Marie V. Denervaud (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 72 p.).
673. Poems. Selected and edited with a com-
mentary by Louis Untermeyer, and illustrated
with pencil drawings by R. J. Holden. New York,
Limited Editions Club, 1945. xx, 333 p.
46-1204 PS3252.U5
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 63
674. NATHANIEL PARKER WILLIS, 1806-
1867
Willis was a prolific writer. As journalist, edi-
tor, and professional man of letters he worked in
such varied literary forms as poetry, sketches, short
stories, familiar essays, novels, and dramas. He
was in turn romantic, sentimental, chatty, urbane,
discursive, and extravagant in his writing. His
long residence abroad as a foreign correspondent
for American journals and his cordial reception in
fashionable and literary circles in England and on
the Continent enabled him to become an unofficial
cultural representative from the New World to the
Old, and vice versa. It has been said that after the
works of Irving and Cooper his most nearly re-
sponded to the taste of American readers in the
1830's and 1840's.
675. A l'abri; or, The tent pitch'd. New York,
S. Colman, 1839. 172 p.
14-3402 F127.T6W7 RBD
Written in the form of a series of letters from
the Valley of the Susquehannah River, New York,
to embody impressions of that region where the
writer's home, Glenmary, was located. Later re-
published in a volume of prose and poetry entitled
Letters from Under a Bridge (London, G. Virtue,
1840. 333 p.).
676. Tortesa, the usurer. New York, S. Colman,
1839. 149 p. (Colman's dramatic library)
PS3324.T6 1839
Play dealing with medieval Florence; romantic
comedy in blank verse successfully produced in the
United States and in England.
677. Pencillings by the way. 1st complete ed.
New York, Morris & Willis, 1844. 216 p.
(The mirror library, no. 27)
5-6529 AP2.N651 RBD
Originally published in The New-Yorl^ Mirror,
Feb. 13, 1832-Jan. 14, 1836, as a series of reports on
residence and travel abroad, in Europe, England,
and Asia Minor.
678. London, T. W. Laurie, 1942. 522 p.
(Live books resurrected, edited by L. S. Jast)
43-16544 D919.W738 1942
679. Poems of early and after years. Illus. by E.
Leutze. Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1848. 410 p.
49-35203 ps3324-p4 l848
Revised and corrected by the author. Cf. Preface,
p. i.
680. Poems, sacred, passionate, and humorous.
Complete ed. New York, Clark & Maynard,
1869. xvi, 380 p. 12-40407 PS3324.P6 1869
Biographical sketch: p. [iii]-xii.
681. Poems. London and New York, G. Rout-
ledge, 1891. xvi, 304 p.
2-8744 PS3324.P3 1 89 1
Includes a brief memoir of the author and poems
grouped under the following headings: "Scriptual,"
"Religious," "College Poems," "City Poems," and
"Miscellaneous Poems."
682. Prose writings. Selected by Henry A. Beers.
New York, Scribner, 1885. xvi, 365 p.
12-40465 PS3322.B4
D. The Gilded Age and After (1871-1914)
The boom times that came after the Civil War,
marked by vulgarity and moral laxity, formed an
era named and satirized by Samuel Langhorne
Clemens and Charles Dudley Warner in their boo\,
The Gilded Age (1873). A "war to waste" ended
and was followed by "a peace to corrupt." In these
years and many that came after them politics reeled
of scandals resulting from graft and the spoils sys-
tem. Speculation, particularly in connection with
railroad building, was wild and ruthless. With the
extension of railroads and the increased business
made possible by the new means of transportation
cities grew greatly in size. In the large industrial
centers that resulted the mansions of the rich looked
down on slums in which were housed the poor,
whose labor made possible the wealth of their em-
ployers. A new aristocracy of money arose in the
land, having "robber barons" of industry for its
nobility. Even the passage of time and the im-
provement in public morals after the Gilded Age
did not bring about thoroughgoing reforms. Soon
after the turn of the century "muckjakers" uncov-
ered so much corruption in great corporations and
in all levels of government that they launched a
movement to better conditions by creating a litera
ture of articles and booths exposing what they had
found.
Industrial expansion and commercial develop-
ment were only two of the forces operating to
change American civilization after the Civil War.
64 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Among other powerful influences that played upon
the United States at this time must be counted the
long-continued migration westward, to which atten-
tion was called in the preceding section. In the
period currently considered this movement of the
people brought about, more and more completely ,
the settlement of the Far West and the Southwest,
until no farther frontier was left to beckon. The
courage and endurance that conquered mountains
and deserts were reflected in the character of the cul-
ture developed in the western regions. The United
States, so long oriented to Britain and Europe by
virtue of being centered on the Atlantic seaboard,
now encompassed within its own borders an area
and a variety of conditions — climatic, geographic,
economic, social — with which the Nation as a whole,
willy-nilly, found it necessary to reckon. The old
order had burst at the seams; a new order, larger,
cruder, more heterogeneous, richer, more promising,
was being put together.
Henry Adams, whose intellectual autobiography
is one of the important documents of the period,
complained bitterly of the disunity and confusion he
found in his time, attributing these faults to the
multiplicity of stresses under which American
civilization labored. He thought his centenary
might come {in 1938) before one might hope to
"find a world that sensitive and timid natures could
regard without a shudder." Justifiable as Mr.
Adams' shudders may have been, American litera-
ture in his period reached a new level of productivity.
Many more people became professional writers;
more aspects of life in the United States were repre-
sented in literature; a few new literary forms were
exploited; and several new trends were originated
which have been influential ever since.
With respect to literary forms, the short story
now came into new prominence. Developed earlier
chiefly by Irving, Hawthorne, and Poe, it was now
a favored medium used by nearly half of the writers
selected to represent the period. One of the strid-
ing innovations in these stories was the increased
emphasis on portrayal of characteristics peculiar to
a number of different places and regions. Local
color was provided through details of dress, food,
manners, customs, and dialects of various sections.
Cowboys on the trial with their herds, housewives
in hamlets on the Maine coast, mountaineers in
their backwoods isolation, Creole folk^ on the bayous
of Louisiana, and miners in western camps were
only a few of the many American groups allowed to
spea\ in their own idiom through these stories.
Likewise, poets and versema\ers turned to dialect
and vernacular writing to sing of unlettered dwellers
on the frontier, of simple country people, old-
fashioned Negroes on plantations "before the war,"
and smalltown life in general.
Humorous writing and lecturing, so much in
vogue around the time of the Civil War, were still
popular and were also identified with the school of
local color and vernacular writing. This trend was
sustained in part by journalists who were fore-
runners of today's columnists. By means of news-
paper articles and miscellanies, which were collected
later and published as boo\s, the journalists told tall
tales, made jo\es, and commented on the passing
scene after the manner of crac\erbox philosophers
who spo\e colloquially or in dialect. Some of these
pieces were designed chiefly to amuse; some, while
retaining their humorous character, were used to
convey penetrating criticisms of human nature,
society, national problems, and foreign relations.
Prominent among the best wor\s of the period are
the voluminous writings of Mar\ Twain, humorist,
novelist, and exponent of the American spirit to the
world.
In even the briefest comment on literature pro-
duced in America between i8ji and 1914, it is es-
sential to notice one trend so marked that it is men-
tioned frequently as characterizing the whole
period: the trend toward realism. As the term
is used, however, realism is a semantic house of
many mansions. Its first enthusiastic proponent,
William Dean Howells, thought that conditions of
American life at the time invited the artist (includ-
ing the writer) to the study and appreciation of what
was common rather than exclusive. The arts, he
contended, must become democratic, and the artist
must continually asf( himself, "Is it true?" when
evaluating his material. Novels (excluding Haw-
thorne's) that were primarily romantic, or those hav-
ing a strong sentimental cast, he would eliminate
from categories of importance, on the score that they
were good reading only when the reader was sicl^
or when he was silly, fiction as an art, Howells
believed, must be concerned with what is actual,
observable, and true to facts, though not necessarily,
or even properly perhaps, grim or unpleasant facts.
Grimness, however, crept into the wor\ of one of
Howells' disciples, Hamlin Garland, who called his
literary theory "veritism." Henry fames, by con-
fining his search for realism to the minds and spirits
of expatriated Americans and members of good so-
ciety in the Eastern United States, was able to han-
dle, on the level of psychological realism, a number
of themes which were beyond the pale of either the
realism of Howells or the veritism of Garland.
Various other novelists of the time looked about
them — at city life, at industry, at poverty, at a com-
petitive society — and found in these and other ele-
ments of American life much that was ugly, shock-
ing, and violent. . Such conditions they exploited
in their novels and stories, sometimes realistically ,
sometimes with Zolaesque exaggeration. From
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 65
this type of realism, fed by a growing consciousness
of social problems, it was only a step to the deter-
ministic naturalism of Theodore Dreiser and other
writers belonging to the next period.
683. ANDY ADAMS, 1 859-1935
Adams' semi-autobiographical fiction deals
chiefly with what he calls "the Old Trail days," of
the 1880's, when hundreds of herds of cattle were
driven on trails extending from Texas as far north
as Montana. The heroes of these migrations were
cowboys whom Adams knew at firsthand because
he was one of them. The still undeveloped country
through which their way often led, the speech and
manner of the special breed of men attracted to the
life of a cowboy, the attitude of these men to the
horses they rode and the cattle they drove, and the
stories they told each other when the day's work
ended are portrayed by the author less as a literary
expression than as an authentic record of personal
experience. Sympathy, affection, and humorous
realism characterize his books, which derive their
chief value from the fact that they retain the flavor
of a bygone phase of American life, changed forever
by the extension of railroads and the social and eco-
nomic development of what had long been western
frontier country.
684. The log of a cowboy. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1903. 387 p. 3-12817 PZ3.A21L
685. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1927.
324 p. (Riverside bookshelf)
27-20251 PZ3.A21L5
"In preparing this classic of frontier literature for
The Riverside Bookshelf the number of chapters
has been reduced by three." — Publisher's note, pre-
ceding table of contents.
686. The outlet. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1905.
x, 371 p. 5-8678 PZ3.A21O
A work that complements The Log of a Cowboy
by introducing the same kinds of characters and
events, with the addition of elements connected
with sharp practices of railway promoters and
builders.
687. Cattle brands; a collection of western camp-
fire stories. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1906.
316 p. 6-9625 PZ3.A21C
Includes "The Story of a Poker Steer," considered
a classic by J. Frank Dobie, writing on Adams in the
Southwest Review, v. 11, Jan. 1926, p. 92-101, 96.
688. HENRY ADAMS, 1838-1918
Henry Adams came of distinguished Massa-
chusetts ancestry, which included a grandfather and
a great-grandfather who were Presidents of the
United States, and a father, Charles Francis Adams,
whose secretary Henry was while the father served
as minister to Great Britain during the Civil War.
A traveler, scholar, editor of the North American
Review, historian of the United States, teacher at
Harvard, and associate of many notable contem-
poraries, Adams contributed to the literature of his
country by means of novels, essays, a book of travel,
familiar letters, and particularly through The Edu-
cation of Henry Adams. An appreciative evalua-
tion of Adams and his writings, accompanied by
quotations from and summaries of most of his
works, has been addressed to the general reader by
Robert A. Hume in his Runaway Star (Ithaca, N. Y.,
Cornell University Press, 1951. 270 p.). The
most recent and extensive biography is Elizabeth
Stevenson's Henry Adams; a Biography (New
York, Macmillan, 1955. 425 p.).
689. Democracy, an American novel. New York,
Holt, 1880. 374 p. (Leisure-hour series, no.
112) 7-12165 PS1004.A4D4 1880 RBD
Variously attributed by different authorities to
Henry Adams, John Hay, and Clarence King. Cf.
William R. Thayer, Life and Letters of John Hay
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1915]) v. 2, p. 58-59.
The authorship of Adams is affirmed by the pub-
lisher Henry Holt in the Unpartizan Review, no.
29, Jan.-Mar., 1921, p. 156; and Literary Review,
Dec. 24, 1920.
An anonymous satiric novel on political corrup-
tion in Washington and on the state of society
there after the Civil War.
690.
1952.
New York, Farrar, Straus & Young,
246 p. 52-3211 PZ3.A2137D12
"An attractive new edition; without editorial
apparatus." — American Literature, v. 24, Jan. 1953,
P- 575-
691. Esther, a novel, by Frances Snow Compton
I pseud.] New York, Holt, 1884. 302 p.
(American novel series, no. 3)
6-30382 PS1004.A4E8 1884 RBD
New York society, the influences of art, and of
religion in the contemporary life of the period arc
themes developed in this novel.
692.
With an introd. by Robert E. Spiller.
New York, Scholars' Facsimiles & Reprints,
1938. xxv p., facsim.: 302 p.
38-18393 PZ3.A2137E8
66 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Facsimile of the original (1884) edition.
Bibliographical note: p. xxiii-xxv.
693. Mont Saint Michel and Chartres. Washing-
ton, 1904. vi, 355 p.
5-1469 DC20.A2 RBD
First result of the author's plan to study forces
operating in history and to relate them at two
periods of time. The hundred years from 1150 to
1250 and the achievements of this century are pre-
sented as an epoch when "man held the highest
idea of himself as a unit in a unified universe" and
when faith in the Virgin Mary operated as the
greatest force felt in the Western world.
694.
With an introd. by Ralph Adams
Cram. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1936. xiv,
397 p. illus. 36-27246 DC20.A2 1936
A popular edition is described in Houghton Mif-
flin's A Complete Catalog of Publications (Cam-
bridge, Mass., 1955. p. [1]).
695. The education of Henry Adams. Washing-
ton, 1907. 453 p. E175.5.A17 RBD
Correlative study to Mont Saint Michel and
Chartres. In it Adams' philosophy of history is
developed through the device of writing an
autobiography that is a commentary on the multi-
plicity of forces operating in the late 19th century
to bring disunity and confusion, instead of unity,
in intellectual, political, social, and general cultural
aspects of American life. The work shows the in-
fluence on Adams of Darwin's theory of evolution
and reflects his pessimism in the face of increased
materialism that followed the rapid spread of in-
dustrialism in the United States.
696. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1918. x,
519 p. 18-18517 E175.5.A172
"This volume, written in 1905 . . . was privately
printed ... in 1906 . . . The Massachusetts His-
torical Society now publishes the 'Education' as it
was printed in 1907, with only such marginal cor-
rections as the author made." — Editor's preface,
signed: Henry Cabot Lodge.
697. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930.
517 p. (The Riverside library)
32-23054 E175.5.A17423
698.
Introd. by James Truslow Adams.
New York, Modern Library, 1931. x, 517 p.
(Modern Library of the world's best books)
31-30066 E175.5.A17424
699. Letters. Edited by Worthington Chauncey
Ford. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930-38.
2 v. 30-25080 E175.5.A1743
700. Selected letters. Edited with an introd. by
Newton Arvin. New York, Farrar, Straus &
Young, 1951. xxxiv, 279 p. (Great letters series)
51-7883 E175.5.A17433
701. GEORGE ADE, 1 866-1944
Reared in rural Indiana and later a columnist
on the Chicago Record, Ade brought to his career
as a writer an intimate knowledge of country life,
small towns, plain citizens, and city magnates of the
Middle West. His humorous fables, essays, and
stories "of the streets and of the town" preserve his
shrewd, realistic judgments of midwestern life at the
turn of the 19th century. The use of slang and local
vernacular in his writing imparts a special flavor to
the social scene depicted in his work. Ade's book
for the comic opera, The Sultan of Sulu, produced in
1902 and published in 1903, and a play, The College
Widow, first acted in 1904 and published in 1924,
were among his most successful contributions to the
stage.
702. Fables in slang. Chicago, H. S. Stone, 1900.
201 p. illus.
45-26353 PS1006.A6F27 1900 RBD
703. More fables. Chicago, H. S. Stone, 1900.
218 p. illus. 0-6497 PZ3.A228MRBD
704. Stories of the streets and of the town, from
the Chicago Record, 1893-1900. Edited
with an introd. by Franklin J. Meine. Chicago,
Caxton Club, 1941. xxx, 278 p. illus.
41-24958 PS1006.A6S7 1941
Bibliography: p. 277-278.
705. The permanent Ade; the living writings of
George Ade. Edited by Fred C. Kelly.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1947. 347 p.
47-30391 PS1006.A6A6 1947
Includes selections from the author's fables, stories,
and essays, together with Marse Covington (ci9i8),
a one-act play, and The Sultan of Sulu.
706. THOMAS BAILEY ALDRICH, 1836-1907
Aldrich wrote a classic account of New Eng-
land boyhood in The Story of a Bad Boy, a humor-
ous, fictional autobiography of his own youth in
Portsmouth, New Hampshire. In his maturity he
found an ideally congenial environment when he
settled in Boston, where be became a protege of the
literary group of which Longfellow was the center.
There, in 1 881, he succeeded William Dean Howells
as editor of The Atlantic Monthly. Although Aid-
rich wrote polished verse as well as several novels
and plays, his best medium was the short story.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 67
707. The story of a bad boy. Boston, Fields,
Osgood, 1870. 261 p. illus.
48-32255 PZ7.A37Su>3 RBD
708. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1923.
279 p. (Riverside bookshelf)
23-15255 PZ3.A365Stoi4
709. With an introd. by Vfictor] L. O.
Chittick. New York, Macmillan, 1930. xxii,
238 p. (Modern readers' series)
30-14665 PZ7.A37Stor.4
710. New York, Pantheon Books, 1951.
232 p. illus. 51-13435 PZ7-A37Sto40
711. Marjorie Daw, and other people. Boston,
J. R. Osgood, 1873. 272 p.
6-499 PZ3-A365Ma3
Contents. — Marjorie Daw. — A Rivermouth ro-
mance.— Quite so. — A young desperado. — Miss
Mehetabel's son. — A struggle for life. — The friend
of my youth. — Mademoiselle Olympe Zabriski. —
Pere Antoine's date-palm.
712. Marjorie Daw. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1908. 123 p. 8-29734 PZ3.A365Maio
713. From Ponkapog to Pesth. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1883. 267 p.
3-15938 D919.A36
A contribution to the literature of European
travel that responded to America's growing in-
terest in its European origins.
714. A book of songs and sonnets selected from
the poems of Thomas Bailey Aldrich. [Cam-
bridge] Riverside Press, 1906. 113 p.
6-17863 PS1022.R5 1906 RBD
The writer's final selection of what he considered
his best poems.
715. Writings. [Ponkapog ed.] Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1907. 9 v. illus.
7-41488 PS1020.F07
716. JAMES LANE ALLEN, 1849-1925
Allen's works ranged from romantic sketches,
short stories, and sentimental fiction to problem
novels dealing with religious fundamentalism, the
impact of Darwin's theory of evolution, farm life,
and the confusion in social conventions and stand-
ards after the Civil War. The author's belief in the
intimacy of man's relation with nature pervades his
writing, for which Kentucky provides the setting.
His place in American literature is fully discussed
in Grant C. Knight's James Lane Allen and the
Genteel Tradition (Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1935. 313 p.).
717. The blue-grass region of Kentucky, and other
Kentucky articles. New York, Harper, 1892.
322 p. iRc-2635 F457.B6A4 RBD
718. The reign of law; a tale of the Kentucky hemp
fields. New York, Macmillan, 1900. 385 p.
illus. °~3311 PZ3.A427R
719. The mettle of the pasture. New York, Mac-
millan, 1903. 448 p.
3-15441 PS1034.M4 1903 RBD
720. New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1912.
448 p. (Macmillan's standard library)
38-35068 PZ3.A4
721. GERTRUDE FRANKLIN (HORN)
ATHERTON, 1857-1948
The history of California, including the Spanish
influence on its culture, inspired Mrs. Atherton's
most enduring work. Her popular novels of Amer-
ican life in other localities and periods were fre-
quendy sensational but also contained elements of
the realism that began to develop as a trend in the
fiction of the early 1900's. Adventures of a Novelist
(1932) is her autobiography.
722. Senator North. New York, J. Lane, 1900.
367 p. 6-4520 PS1042.S4 1900 RBD
A novel of political life in Washington and of ten-
sions in relations between Negroes and whites.
723. The conqueror. New York, Macmillan, 1902.
xiv, 546 p. 2-8 1 17 PZ3.A869C0
Biographical novel of which Alexander Hamilton
is the hero. Currently published by J. P. Lippincott,
East Washington Square, Philadelphia, Pa.
724. The conqueror; a dramatized biography of
Alexander Hamilton. New York, Stokes
['1916] xii, 536 p. 18-13115 PZ3.869C05
"Twenty-fourth edition (from new plates with
revisions)."
725. The splendid idle forties; stories of old Cali-
fornia. New York, Macmillan, 1902. 389 p.
2-24242 PZ3.A869SP
A revised and enlarged edition of a volume issued
in 1894 under the title: Before the Gringo Came.
68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
726. EDWARD BELLAMY, 1 850-1 898
Bellamy began his career as a writer when the
United States was feeling the full impact of increas-
ing industrialization after the Civil War. The
social and economic conflicts of the period stimu-
lated the thinking reflected in his novels and finally
led him to imagine a remedy for inequalities among
the people by postulating a state of society in which
all citizens would be as free and equal in their
material and cultural lives as in the political sphere
where their rights were protected by the American
form of government. He gave literary expression
to these ideas in his Utopian romance, Looking
Backward. This novel, purporting to portray a co-
operative economic and social life enjoyed in Boston,
Massachusetts, in the year 2000, A. D., is said to have
sold nearly a million copies in the ten years follow-
ing its publication. It contributed to the temporary
spread of a socialist doctrine advocating the na-
tionalization of all industry. In support of his
ideas Bellamy became a publicist and a propa-
gandist. He was also the founder and editor of a
reforming journal, The New Nation (1891-94).
His Selected Writings on Religion and Society has
been announced as published by the Liberal Arts
Press, 153 West 72d Street, New York, N. Y., in its
American heritage series.
727. Dr. HeidenhofT's process. New York, Apple-
ton, 1880. 140 p. (Appleton's new handy-
volume series, 54) 6-1 1697 PZ3.B417D0
Early novel of the psychiatric type in which Bel-
lamy introduced a fantasy that foreshadowed
modern "shock" therapy currently used in some
psychological disorders.
728. Looking backward, 2000-1887. Boston,
Ticknor, 1888. 470 p.
6-11710 HX811 1887.B2
The sequel, Equality (1897), is considered more
of a tract than a novel.
729. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1931?]
xxi, 337 p. (Riverside library)
34-10625 HX811 1887.B32
Introduction by Heywood Broun.
730. Introd. by Frederic R. White.
Chicago, Packard, 1946. xxxviii, 233 p.
(University classics) 46-4182 H-811 1887.B327
Selected bibliography: p. xxxvii-xxxviii.
732. AMBROSE (GWINNETT) BIERCE, 1842-
1914?
After the Civil War, in which Bierce served
with distinction, he settled in California. There,
as a journalist writing for various weeklies, he
achieved a reputation as arbiter of literary fashion
on the Pacific Coast. Later, as a contributor to the
San Francisco Sunday Examiner, his witty, satirical
column justified the title, "Bitter Bierce." He was
a devotee of the bohemian life and an apostle of a
pessimism verging on nihilism. Bierce's most en-
during work is found in his realistic short stories
about war and in his tales of the supernatural and
the horrible. These show certain kinship with the
stories of Poe and Bret Harte. Paul Fatout's
Ambrose Bierce, the Devil's Lexicographer (Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 349 p.)
supplies new details for an understanding of the
author. These were derived from study of manu-
scripts and other source materials. Fatout main-
tains the thesis that Bierce's social satires and criti-
cisms constitute his most important work. These
were collected and published in book form in The
Cynic's Word Boo\ (1906) and republished in 191 1
as The Devil's Dictionary.
733. Can such things be? New York, Cassell
[ci893] 320 p.
6-13103 PZ3.B479C RBD
Short stories chiefly of the Civil War and the
California frontier.
734. Washington, Neale Pub. Co., 1903.
320 p. 3-9331 PZ3.B479C2
735. In the midst of life; tales of soldiers and
civilians. New York, Putnam, 1898. vi,
362 p. 6-13102 PZ3.B479I
First published under title: Tales of Soldiers and
Civilians (1891).
736. New York, Boni & Liveright, 19 18.
403 p. 35-33432 PZ3.B479I6
737. Introd. by George Sterling. New
731. With an introd. by Robert L. Shur-
ter. New York, Modern Library, 195 1.
xxvi, 276 p. (Modern Library college editions,
T42) 51-2252 HX811 1887.B33
Bibliography: p. xxii-xxiii.
York, Modern Library 1^1927] xvi, 403 p.
(Modern Library of the world's best books)
27-19196 PZ3.B479I10
738. Letters. Edited by Bertha Clark Pope.
With a memoir by George Sterling. San
Francisco, Book Club of California, 1922. xlvii,
204 p. 23-7856 PS1097.Z5A3 1922a
739. Collected writings. With an introd. by Clif-
ton Fadiman. New York, Citadel Press,
1946. xix, 810 p. 47-30068 PS1097.A1 1946
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 69
Contents. — Ambrose Bierce: portrait of a mis-
anthrope, by Clifton Fadiman. — In the midst of life,
tales of soldiers and civilians. — The devil's diction-
ary.— Can such things be? — Fantastic fables. — The
monk and the hangman's daughter. — Negligible
tales. — The parenticide club.
740. JOHN BURROUGHS, 1837-1921
Burroughs, a student of Emerson, Thoreau,
and Whitman, derived from these writers ideas that
influenced his own interest in the natural world.
Surrounded by the beauties of the Catskill region
in New York, where he lived for many years, he
cultivated the habit of close observation of out-of-
door life, recording his impressions in literary essays
on natural history. These had a decided vogue in
the United States for a number of years. Literary
Values (1902) is Burroughs' contribution to critical
theory respecting literature in America. It includes
his essay, "Democracy in Literature." His life and
achievements may be further explored through
works described in the section on Biography.
741. Locusts and wild honey. Boston, Houghton,
Osgood, 1879. 253 p.
5-2474 QH81.B94 1879
Contents. — The pastoral bees. — Sharp eyes. —
Strawberries. — Is it going to rain? — Speckled
trout. — Birds and birds. — A bed of boughs. — Birds'-
nesting. — The halcyon in Canada.
742. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ri907J
235 p. 7-1956 QH81.B94 1907
743. Writings. [Riverby ed.J Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [ci904]-22. 23 v. NNU
744. John Burroughs' America; selections from the
writings of the Hudson River naturalist. Ed-
ited with an introd. by Farida A. Wiley. Foreword
by Julian Burroughs. New York, Devin-Adair,
1951. 304 p. illus. 51-13897 QH81.B963 1951
745. GEORGE WASHINGTON CABLE, 1844-
1925
Cable's antiquarian knowledge of his native New
Orleans supplied the source upon which he drew
when in 1879-80 he brought into the literature of
the South a new romantic regional element in his
portrayal of Creoles in Louisiana before the Civil
War. A special flavor is imparted to his early work
by the use of Creole dialect. Among his less suc-
cessful later writings were novels such as Dr. Sevier
(1885), a story of hardships and struggles experi-
enced in New Orleans during and after the Civil
War, and Bonaventure (1888), which introduces
descendants of the Acadians. The tragic deporta-
tion of these unfortunate people from Nova Scotia
to Louisiana and elsewhere previously had been
celebrated by Longlellow in his Evangeline. A
recent work, Twins of Genius, by Guy A. Cardwell
(East Lansing, Michigan State College Press, 1953.
134 p.), compares the literary influence of Cable
and Clemens, discusses their joint lecturing tour
in the 1880's and reviews the association of the two
writers. Letters of Mark Twain, Cable, and others
are found on p. f 79 ]— 1 12.
746. Old Creole days. New York, Scribner, 1879.
229 p. 6-22271 PZ3.C11O
747. With an introd. by Lucy Leffingwell
Cable Bikle. New York, Scribner, 1937. xv,
303 p. 37-10499 PZ3.C11O18
Madame Delphine (1880), added to the collection
of stories in an edition of 1883, is found also in this
new edition which followed eight earlier editions.
Cf. Introduction, p. v.
748.
Together with The scenes of Cable's
romances, by Lafcadio Hearn; a prologue by
Edward Larocque Tinker and illus. in color by
John O'Hara Cosgrave II. New York, Limited
Editions Club, 1943. xxxi, 224 p.
43-17083 PS1244.O6 1943 RBD
Contents. — Jean-ah Poquelin. — 'Tite Poulette. —
"Posson Jone'." — Pere Raphael. — Madame Del-
phine.— Belles Demoiselles plantation. — Madame
Delicieuse. — Cafe des exiles. — 'Sieur George.
749. The Grandissimes, a story of Creole life.
New York, Scribner, 1880. 448 p.
43-17083 PS1244.O6 1943 RBD
One section of the novel is entitled "The Story
of Bras-Coupe," which is a revision of an earlier
story of that title. It has been called a stronger
indictment of slavery than can be found in Uncle
Tom's Cabin.
750.
New York, Scribner, 1916. ix, 448 p.
16-16158 PZ3.CuGno
751. George W. Cable; his life and letters, by his
daughter, Lucy Leffingwell ('able Biklc.
New York, Scribner, 1928. xvi, 306 p. illus.
28-24S45 PS1246.B5
Bibliography: p. 303-306.
752. Turner, A r! in. George W. Cable, a bi-
ography. Durham, N. C, Duke University
Press, 1956. 391 p. 46-9165 PS1246.T8
70 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
753. WILL CARLETON, 1845-1912
Carleton began writing for the periodical
press when there was a vogue for sentimental vers-
ifying about plain people, particularly those living on
farms or in rural communities. His pieces, written
in language designed to be thought colloquial, were
addressed to an audience interested in folk ballads.
"Over the Hills to the Poor House" is a typical
example of his style. Ten or more collections of
his work, issued between 1871 and 1908, won for
him the reputation of being the "people's laureate"
of his region in the Middle West. These volumes,
including Farm Legends (1875) and City Ballads
(1885), sold on a wave of popularity that lasted into
the 20th century.
754. Farm ballads. New York, Harper, 1873.
108 p. 13-15969 PS1257.F3 1873 RBD
755. New ed. from new plates. New
York, Harper, 1901. viii, 147 p.
1-30460 PS1257.F3 1 90 1
756. CHARLES WADDELL CHESNUTT,
1858-1932
A Negro writer best known for his short stor-
ies in dialect about his race in America before and
after the Civil War, Chesnutt was also the author
of several novels, among them The House Behind
the Cedars (1900) and The Marrow of Tradition
( 1901), works that sought to deal frankly and fairly
with the problems of Negroes in contemporary
society in the United States. An intimate view of
the author's struggles and achievements, interspersed
with his correspondence, has been supplied by his
daughter, Helen M. Chesnutt, in her Charles Wad-
dell Chesnutt, Pioneer of the Color Line (Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1952.
324 p.).
757. The conjure woman. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1899. 229 p.
4-15426 PZ3.C4253C
' 'The Conjurer's Revenge' is reprinted from the
Overland Monthly."
Contents. — The goophered grapevine. — Po'
Sandy. — Mars Jeems's nightmare. — The conjurer's
revenge. — Sis' Becky's pickaninny. — The gray wolf's
ha'nt. — Hot-foot Hannibal.
758. The wife of his youth, and other stories of
the color line. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1899. 323 p. illus. 0-113 PZ3.C4253W
759. KATE (O'FLAHERTY) CHOPIN, 1851-
1904
Mrs. Chopin belonged to the local color school.
Her themes were drawn from dramatic events re-
sulting from the relations of Creoles, Negroes, and
Cajuns (the last reputed to be of Acadian French
descent) in remote sections of Louisiana. From long
residence among these people, she knew the cadence
of their speech, the landscape through which they
moved, and the humor, pathos, and tragedy implicit
in their daily lives. Much of Mrs. Chopin's work
is said to remain uncollected, but the two volumes
of short stories that exist are enough to establish
her quality. A biographical, critical, and biblio-
graphical study of the author is provided by Daniel
S. Rankin in his Kate Chopin and Her Creole
Stories (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1932. 313 p.). This book was issued also
as a doctoral dissertation submitted at the University
of Pennsylvania. It includes reprints of selected
short stories and numerous excerpts from Mrs.
Chopin's miscellaneous writings.
760. Bayou folk. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1894.
313 p. 4-15082 PZ3.C456B
Twenty-three short stories, including "Desiree's
Baby"; "Madame Celestin's Divorce"; and "A Gen-
tleman of Bayou Teche."
761. A night in Acadie. Chicago, Way & Wil-
liams, 1897. 416 p.
6-20969 PS1294.C63A7 RBD
Short stories.
762. WINSTON CHURCHILL, 1871-1947
Written at a time when the rise of realism
was a dominant mood in American literature,
Churchill's romantic historical novels glorifying the
Nation's past illustrated a countercurrent to the pre-
vailing trend. In his later work, however, Church-
ill chose contemporary political, industrial, and re-
ligious themes for his novels, as in The Inside of
the Cup (1913) and The Dwelling Place of Light
(1917). These failed to win the popular success
achieved by his earlier books.
763. The crisis. New York, Macmillan, 1901. 522
p. illus. 1-31838 PS1297.C7 1901 RBD
Concerns results of the conflict of Northern and
Southern sympathies in St. Louis, Missouri, during
the Civil War, and the final outcome of the struggle
in the whole country. Abraham Lincoln, one of the
historical characters introduced, is effectively por-
trayed.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 71
764. New York, Macmillan, 1914. ix, 522
p. illus. 16-6481 PZ3.C474Cr6
765. Edited by Walter Barnes; rev. by
H[arold] Y. Moffett. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1930. xxii, 750 p. illus. (New pocket classics)
30-13104 PZ}.C474Cri5
A dramatization of the novel was published
earlier (New York, French, ci927. 96 p.).
766. The crossing. New York, Macmillan, 1904.
598 p. illus. 4-1 1 535 PZ3.C474CS
Deals with pioneer life on the frontier in Ken-
tucky and the significance of that section in relation
to the Revolutionary War.
767. New York, Macmillan, 191 2. vii,
598 p. illus. 16-6482 PZ3.C474CS6
768. SAMUEL LANGHORNE CLEMENS
("MARK TWAIN"), 1835-1910
Mark Twain, without formal education after
his 13th year, was first a frontier boy on the banks
of the Mississippi River, then a printer's apprentice,
and later a journeyman printer in the Middle West,
New York, and Philadelphia. Next he became an
expert pilot of steamboats plying the Mississippi.
Then came an unsuccessful interlude as a prospector
and speculator in Nevada, an impasse from which
he escaped by becoming a journalist, first in Nevada
and later in California. From these beginnings he
emerged as a public lecturer of immense popularity
at home and abroad, a commentator from firsthand
knowledge on life in Europe and the Orient, a
humorist on the grand scale, and one of the most
important of the country's novelists. He lived an
American saga in which provincialism and sophisti-
cation, poverty and riches, failure and success were
mingled. From the experiences gained in such a
life he drew the substance of books that have been
read scarcely less avidly in Europe and Latin
America than in the United States. He used a
literary style compounded of simple words, vigor-
ous expressions, and colloquial language having the
rhythm of speech used in what was then the Ameri-
can West; and he frequently employed many local-
color details, particularly those of life along the
Mississippi. There was also in his work an ele-
ment of sentimental romanticism, a quality which
found probably its most open expression in the
fictional biography, Personal Recollections of Joan
of Arc (1896). In his more characteristic writing
wit, irony, fun, and satire were used consciously for
purposes of entertainment, and may from time to
time have obscured his serious reflections on the
civilization of which he was a part. He hated
hypocrisy and meanness; suffering inflicted on the
bodies or minds of helpless people enraged him; and
the sorrowful and tragic aspects of life overwhelmed
him. In the end the man usually considered the
greatest exponent of the comic spirit in American
literature finished his career in a mood of pessimistic
naturalism.
769. The innocents abroad. Hartford, Conn.,
American Pub. Co., 1869. xviii, 651 p. illus.
4-28129 PS1312.A1 1869 RBD
A mock-serious autobiographical account of a
pilgrimage to Europe and the Holy Land; fre-
quently satirizes the Old World, while proclaiming
the superiority of America. A work that belongs
to the author's beginning period as a writer of
humorous books.
770. New York, Harper, c 1 91 1. 2V.ini.
(377, 446 p.) 15-22628 PS1312.A1 191 1
Biographical criticism by Brander Matthews,
p. v-xxxiii.
771. With an introd. by Albert Bigelow
Paine. New York, Macmillan, 1927. xvi,
537 p. (Modern readers' series)
27-12406 PS1312.A1 1927
772. Roughing it. Hartford, Conn., American
Pub. Co.; Chicago, F. G. Gilman, 1872.
xviii, 591 p. illus.
6-21353 PS1318.A1 1872 RBD
Saga of boom towns, silver rushes, land-grabbing,
and boisterous living on the Western frontier in the
early 1860's.
773. New York, Harper, 1913. 2 v. in 1.
([287, 330] p.) 28-1234 PS1318.A1 1913
774. Introd. by Rodman W. Paul. New
York, Rinehart, 1953. xviii, 333 p. (Rine-
hart editions, 61) 52-13058 PS1318.A1 1953
"This text is a verbatim reprint of the first sixty-
one chapters of the first edition, as originally pub-
lished at Hartford in 1872 . . . the present edition
thus breaks off at the end of Mark Twain's western
adventures . . ." Introduction, p. xvi, xvii.
775. The gilded age; a tale of to-day, by Mirk
Twain (Samuel L. Clemens) and Charles
Dudley Warner. Hartford, Conn., American Pub.
Co., 1873. 574 p. illus. NN
Satiric novel which gave the title to the period
after the Civil War when political corruption and
economic exploitation were recurring elements in
American experience.
72 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
776.
777-
Hartford, Conn., American Pub. Co., 786.
1874. 574 p. illus.
17-61 1 1 PZ3.C59G2 RBD
New York, Harper, 1915. 2 v. in 1.
([320, 337] P-) 28-1683 PZ3.C59G16
With an introd. by Dixon Wecter.
778. The adventures of Tom Sawyer. Hartford,
Conn., American Pub. Co.; San Francisco, A.
Roman, 1876. xvi, 274 p.
34-25476 PS1306.A1 1876 RBD
Classic representation of youth in the Mississippi
River country during the mid-nineteenth century;
the first work of the author's second and major
period.
779. New York, Harper, 1903. xiii,
328 p. 4-22487 PZ3.C59Ad5
780. With an introd. by Dr. Percy Boyn-
ton. New York, Harper, 1920. xxiv, 290 p.
(Harper's modern classics)
20-3262 PZ3.C59Adi6
781.
The text edited and with an introd.
by Bernard De Voto, with a prologue, "Boy's
manuscript," printed for the first time. Illustrated
with drawings by Thomas Hart Benton. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Printed for members of the Limited
Editions Club at the University Press, 1939. xxx,
340 p. 40-5879 PS1306.A1 1939 RBD
782. The adventures of Tom Sawyer and The ad-
ventures of Huckleberry Finn. New York,
Modern Library, 1940. x, 591 p. (Modern
Library of the world's best books)
41-5104 PZ3.C59Adv
783. The adventures of Tom Sawyer and Adven-
tures of Huckleberry Finn. Introd. by Wil-
liam Donahey. Chicago, Spencer Press, 1953.
191, 254 p. illus. 53—1325 PZ3.C59Ad63
Said to be an exact reprint of the first edition of
each work.
784. Life on the Mississippi. Boston, J. R. Os-
good, 1883. 624 p. illus.
3-25501 F353.C63RBD
Reminiscences and descriptions, realistic, ironic,
and romantic, of the author's experiences as a river
pilot.
785. New York, Harper, 1899. Biograph-
ical ed. xii, 465 p. 99-5381 F353.C636
New York, Harper, 1950. xvi, 526 p.
(Harper's modern classics)
50-6261 F353.C6456 1950
787. The adventures of Huckleberry Finn (Tom
Sawyer's comrade) London, Chatto &
Windus, 1884. xvi, 438 p. illus.
35-20965 PS1305.A1 1884 RBD
Sequel to The Adventures of Tom Sawyer; pic-
aresque story of boy life in the Mississippi River
region; also reflects the author's revolt from the
injustice and abuse of human rights evident in race
relations and class distinctions at the time. Fre-
quently cited as Mark Twain's most notable book.
788.
789.
790.
New York, C. L. Webster, 1885.
366 p. illus. 3I_3523° PZ3.C59A RBD
New ed. from new plates. New
York, Harper, 1896. xi, 338 p.
3-19534 PZ3.C59A4
Edited, with an introd., by Bernard
De Voto. Illustrated by Thomas Hart Ben-
ton. New York, Limited Editions Club, 1942.
lxxvi, 396 p. 42-17247 PS1305.A1 1942 RBD
791. With introductions by Brander Mat-
thews and Dixon Wecter. New York,
Harper, 1948. xxv, 404 p. (Harper's modern
classics) 48-2019 PZ3.C59A51
792. ■ Introd. by Lionel Trilling. New
York, Rinehart, 1948. xxii, 293 p. (Rine-
hart editions, n) 48-8523 PZ3.C59A52
793. Descriptive captions and introduc-
tory remarks by Stanley T. Williams. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1953. vi, 312 p. illus. (Great
illustrated classics) 53-9538 PZ3.C59A57
794. A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur's
court. New York, C. L. Webster, 1889. xv,
575 p. illus. 3-19531 PS1308.A1 1889 RBD
The feudal society of King Arthur's Britain pro-
vides the setting for the writer's portrayal of the
knightly virtues of the age contrasted with its
miseries. In spite of constant humorous overtones,
the book embodies a serious social satire designed
to show the merits of a democratic society and the
defects of one based on outmoded ideas of rank
and privilege in a country where class differences
are emphasized.
795-
New York, Harper [1925?] ix,
25-27463 PZ3.C59C08
449 P-
Carried in Harper's current list.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 73
796. —
With an introd. by Carl Van Doren. 806.
Illustrated by Honore Guilbeau. New York,
Heritage Press, 1948. vii, 269 p.
49-1558 PS1308.A1 1948
797. New York, Modern Library [ 1949,
ci9i7] vi, 450 p. (Modern Library of the
world's best books) 49-9037 PZ3.C59C017
798. The man that corrupted Hadleyburg, and
other stories and essays. New York, Harper
[1900] 398 p.
13-9365 PS1322.M25 1900 RBD
Contents. — The man that corrupted Hadley-
burg.— My debut as a literary person. — From the
"London Times" of 1904. — At the appetite-cure. —
My first lie, and how I got out of it. — Is he living or
is he dead? — The Esquimau maiden's romance. —
How to tell a story. — About play-acting. — Concern-
ing the Jews. — Stirring them in Austria. — The Aus-
trian Edison keeping school again. — Travelling with
a reformer. — Private history of the "Jumping frog"
story. — My boyhood dreams.
The story that gives the name to the collection is
a typical expression of the author's last, or natural-
istic, period.
799-
New York, Harper, 19 17. 364 p.
28-1680 PZ3.C59M9
800. Mark Twain's letters, arr. with comment, by
Albert Bigelow Paine. New York, Harper,
1917. 2 v. ([856] p.) illus.
17-30756 PS 1 33 1. A3 1 917
801. The love letters of Mark Twain. Edited and
with an introd. by Dixon Wecter. New York,
Harper, 1949. 374 p. 49-1 171 1 PS1331.A3C6
Letters to Olivia Langdon Clemens, written be-
tween 1868 and 1904.
802. Mark Twain to Mrs. Fairbanks. Edited by
Dixon Wecter. San Marino, Calif., Hunting-
ton Library, 1949. xxx, 286 p. (Huntington Library
publications) 49-9860 PS1331.A3F3
Bibliographical footnotes are supplied with the
letters.
803. Writings. Author's national ed. New York,
Harper, 1869-1909. 25 v. Aio-453 OCi
804. Autograph ed. Hartford, Conn.,
American Pub. Co. [1899-1900] 22 v.
0-2689 PS1300.E99
805. [Author's national ed.] New York,
Harper, 1899-1910. 25 v. NN
807.
[Underwood ed.] Hartford, Conn.,
American Pub. Co. [1901-07] 25 v.
8-20712 PZ3.C592
[Author's national cd. New York,
Harper, 1907-18] 25 v.*
20-19321 PZ3.C596
808. New York, G. Wells, 1922-25.
37 v. CtY
Definitive edition.
Introductions signed: Albert Bigelow Paine.
809. Mark Twain's works. New York, Harper,
1933. 29 v. in 23. MiU
810. Representative selections, with introd. and
bibliography by Fred Lewis Pattee. New
York, American Book Co., 1935. lxiii, 459 p.
(American writers series) 35-9143 PS1303.P35
Selected bibliography: p. liii-lxi.
811. The favorite works of Mark Twain. Deluxe
ed. [rev.] New York, Garden City Pub.
Co., 1939. xxiv, 1 1 78 p. 39-27117 PS1302.G3
Includes complete texts of Life on the Mississippi,
The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, The Adventures
of Huckleberry Finn, and A Connecticut Yankee
at King Arthur's Court. Various excerpts are
added from other works. The text is specially
edited from The Family Mar\ Twain, published by
Harper.
812. The portable Mark Twain. Edited by
Bernard De Voto. New York, Viking Press.
1946. vii, 786 p. (Viking portable library)
46-6686 PS1302.D4
Continuing interest in Mark Twain's contribution
to American literature has been made evident in
recent years by studies that include the following:
813. Allen, Jerry. The adventures of Mark
Twain. Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 359 p.
illus. 54^°873 PS1331.A7 [954
Designed as a biographical introduction for the
general reader; includes some fictional treatment of
factual material.
814. Andrews, Kenneth R. Nook Farm, M.irk
Twain's Hartford circle. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1950. xii, 288 p. illus.
50-9751 PS 1 334. A6
Bibliography: p. [27i]-28o.
74 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
815. Bellamy, Gladys C. Mark Twain as a lit-
erary artist. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1950. xiii, 396 p. illus.
50-4775 PS1338.B4
Bibliography: p. 377-382.
816. Branch, Edgar M. The literary apprentice-
ship of Mark Twain, with selections from his
apprentice writing. Urbana, University of Illinois
Press, 1950. xiv, 325 p. 50-7851 PS1332.B7
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 271-302).
817. Canby, Henry Seidel. Turn west, turn east:
Mark Twain and Henry James. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xii, 318 p.
51-14000 PS1331.C25
Bibliography: p. 301-303.
818. De Voto, Bernard. Mark Twain's America.
Cambridge, Houghton Mifflin, 1951 [ci932]
xvi, 351 p. illus. 51-6160 PS1331.D4 1951
Bibliography: p. [323H39.
Republication of a work that, in treating of Mark
Twain's environment before he came East, also pro-
vides a view of the frontier as a primary element in
American cultural history.
819. Scott, Arthur L., ed. Mark Twain, selected
criticism. Edited with an introd. Dallas,
Southern Methodist University Press [1955] xii,
289 p. 55-12080 PS1331.S3
"Guide to Mark Twain bibliographies": p. 286-
289. Bibliographical footnotes.
Includes thirty-four critical articles published in
English between 1867 and 1951. For articles in
foreign languages the reader is referred to Roger As-
selineau's The Literary Reputation of Mar\ Twain
from igio to 1950 (Paris, Librairie Marcel Didier,
1954. 242 p.).
820. Wecter, Dixon. Sam Clemens of Hannibal.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. ix, 335 p.
52-5258 PS1332.W4
Bibliography: p. 317-322.
Posthumous publication of the completed portion
of a biography planned to be definitive; written by
the third editor of the Mark Twain Estate. Covers
ancestry, early family life, and youth up to age
eighteen in Hannibal, Missouri; hence deals with
the places and the period from which Clemens
later drew the inspiration for his best work.
821. STEPHEN CRANE, 1871-1900
In a period when gentility and the happy
ending were particularly popular among American
readers, Crane was decidedly an innovator when he
wrote a short novel having a prostitute as the
heroine. However, not until the publication of his
Civil War novel, The Red Badge of Courage, which
portrayed the realities of the battlefield as faithfully
in words as Mathew B. Brady did in photographs,
was his reputation established as an initiator of
realism in American literature. He was a prolific
and uneven writer of short stories as well as novels
and of poems that in the absence of conventional
rhymes may be called free verse. Irony and
naturalism were present in his best work, and his
themes frequently dealt with suffering, mutilation,
terror, and death. Various writers in America
whom he is said to have influenced include Willa
Cather, Ernest Hemingway, Theodore Dreiser, and
F. Scott Fitzgerald. A recent biographical and
critical study of Crane is provided by John Berry-
man's Stephen Crane (New York, Sloane, 1950, xv,
347 p. American men of letters series).
822. Maggie, a girl of the streets, by Johnston
Smith [pseud.] [New York, Priv. print.,
1893] 163 p. CtY
823. New York, Appleton, 1896. vi,
158 p. 6-30866 PZ3.C852M RBD
Second edition revised by the author.
824. Together with George's mother
[1896] and "The blue hotel" [1899] w"h
an introd. by Henry Hazlitt. New York, Knopf,
1931. xi, 218 p. 31-28140 PZ3.C852Mag
825. The red badge of courage; an episode of the
American Civil War. New York, Appleton,
1895 [ci894] 233 p.
49-36615 PS1449.C85R3 1895 RBD
826. New ed., with port, and pref. New
York, Appleton, 1900. x, 233 p.
0-3652 PZ3.C852R2
Preface contains biographical notice.
827.
Illustrated by John Steuart Curry,
with an introd. by Carl Van Doren. New
York, Heritage Press, 1944. xiii, 170 p.
44-6216 PS1449.C85R3
828. Introd. by Robert Wooster Stallman.
New York, Modern Library, 195 1. xlv, 266 p.
(Modern Library college editions, T45)
51-2278 PZ3.C852R12
Bibliography: p. xlii-xlv.
829. Edited and introduced by John T.
Winterich. With Civil War photographs
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 75
[taken by Mathew B. Brady] London, Folio So-
ciety [1951] 159 p. 52-2542 PZ3.C852R14
"The present edition of The Red Badge of Cour-
age contains material from the original manuscript
which has never appeared in print before." — "A
Note on this Edition," p. 21.
830. The open boat, and other tales of adventure.
New York, Doubleday & McClure, 1889.
336 p. 6-30865 PZ3.C8520 RBD
831. War is kind. Drawings by W. Bradley.
New York, Stokes, 1899. 96 p.
99-1667 PS1449.C85
Poems.
832. Works. Edited by Wilson Follett. New
York, Knopf ['1925-26] 12 v.
25-25565 PS1449.C85 1925 RBD
Introductions by Amy Lowell, Willa Cather,
Henry L. Mencken, Sherwood Anderson, and
others.
833. Collected poems. Edited by Wilson Follett.
New York, Knopf, 1930. 132 p.
30-9605 PS1449.C85A17 1930
834. Twenty stories. Selected, with an introd., by
Carl Van Doren. New York, Knopf, 1940.
xvii, 507 p. 40-30097 PZ3.C852TW
Notes: p. 501-507.
835. Selected prose and poetry. Edited with an
introd. by William M. Gibson. New York,
Rinehart, 1950. xix, 230 p. (Rinehart editions, 47)
50-1071 1 PS1449.C85A6 1950
"Textual and bibliographical note": p. xvii.
Includes among other selections Maggie, "The
Bride Comes to Yellow Sky" (1898), "The Mon-
ster" (1899), and poems from The Blacf^ Riders
(1895), War Is Kind (1899), and "Three Poems"
from Collected Poems (1930).
Another Rinehart collection is announced for fu-
ture publication: The Red Badge of Courage and
Selected Prose and Poetry.
836. Stephen Crane: an omnibus. Edited, with
introd. and notes, by Robert Wooster Stall-
man. New York, Knopf, 1952. xlv, 703 p.
52-6416 PS1449.C85A6 1952
Bibliography: p. 697-703.
Brings together texts of the novels, Maggie,
George's Mother, and The Red Badge of Courage;
ten short stories; sixteen poems; and fifty-seven new
letters accompanied by reprints of various letters pre-
viously published. Crane's contribution to journal-
ism is represented by four articles. Cf. Editor's
Foreword, p. vii.
837. Stories and tales. Edited by Robert Wooster
Stallman. New York, Vintage Books, 1955.
xxxii, 350 p. (A Vintage book, K-10)
55-159 PZ3.C852St
Bibliography: p. 347-350.
Includes Maggie and George's Mother in addition
to selected short stories.
838. EMILY DICKINSON, 1830-1886
Emily Dickinson lived out her 56 years of
life in the college town of Amherst, Massachusetts,
where she grew to maturity under the domination
of a father who came from a New England family
of Calvinistic convictions. By the age of 36 Miss
Dickinson had achieved a withdrawal from the
world that culminated in a life of complete retire-
ment within the family home and grounds. In this
seclusion of her physical person her mind and
imagination were extremely active, with the result
that hundreds of brief lyrics on love, death, nature,
and God, as well as many letters, poured from her
pen. These reveal an intense inner life that con-
tinues to challenge interest and arouse speculation
on the part of numerous critics. Her poems are
highly original, often cryptic, sometimes gay, and
frequently witty. In them economy in the use of
words is carried to the point of frugality. They are
characterized by a strong metaphysical interest,
daring metaphors, imagery, conceits, and by much
irregularity in meter and rhyme. Hers was a poetic
voice as new when her poems began to be published
posthumously as Whitman's had been when Leaves
of Grass appeared in 1855.
839. Poems [first series] Edited by two of her
friends, Mabel Loomis Todd and T. W.
Higginson. Boston, Roberts, 1890. xii. 152 p.
3-18785 PS1541.P6 1890 RBD
840. Poems, second series. Edited by two of her
friends, T. W. Higginson and Mabel Loomis
Todd. Boston, Roberts, 1 891. 230 p.
3-18788 PS1541.P62 1891 RBD
841. Poems, third series. Edited by Mabel Loomis
Todd. Boston, Roberts, 1896. vii, 200 p.
3-18787 PS1541.P63 1896 RBD
842. Poems. Edited by Martha Dickinson Bianchi
and Alfred Leete Hampson; introd. by Alfred
Leete Hampson. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937. x'>
484 p. 37-2949 PS1541.A1 1937
"In the present edition all the poems of the pre-
ceding collections of poems are included in a single
volume." — Introduction, p. x.
j6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
843. Bolts of melody; new poems. Edited by
Mabel Loomis Todd and Millicent Todd
Bingham. New York, Harper, 1945. xxix, 352 p.
45-35045 PS1541.A137
844. Selected poems. With an introd. by Conrad
Aiken. New York, Modern Library, 1948.
xvi, 231 p. (Modern Library of the world's best
books [25]) 48-9350 PS1541.A6 1948a
Selected Poems, edited by Conrad Aiken, was
published in London by J. Cape, 1924, in 272 p.
845. Poems. Selected and edited with a com-
mentary by Louis Untermeyer. Illustrated by
Helen Sewell. New York, Heritage Press, 1952.
xxviii, 284 p. (American poets)
53-1806 PS1541.A6 1952a
Based on the Limited Editions Club edition of
the same year.
846. Poems; including variant readings critically
compared with all known manuscripts.
Edited by Thomas H. Johnson. Cambridge, Bel-
knap Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 3 v.
(lxviii, 1266 p.) facsims.
54-8631 PS1541.A1 1955
Inclusive scholars' edition of the poet's complete
poetical work. In an extensive introduction the
editor discusses historical and stylistic developments
found in the poems.
Editions of the poems before Bolts of Melody
failed to set accuracy of the text as a primary
consideration.
847. Letters. Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd.
Boston, Roberts, 1894. 2 v. illus.
24-22101 PS1541.Z5A3
Includes 102 additional poems or parts of poems.
848.
New and enl. ed. Edited by Mabel
Loomis Todd. New York, Harper, 1931.
xxxi, 457 p. illus. 31-32229. PS 1 54 1. Z5 A3 1 93 1
ten years by the availability of various new critical
and biographical studies, which include the
following:
851. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Ancestors' bro-
cades; the literary debut of Emily Dickinson,
New York, Harper, 1945. xiii, 464 p. illus.
45~35°42 PS1541.Z5B53
"Early Reviews of Books by Emily Dickinson,
1890-1896": p. 406-411. "Books by Emily Dickin-
son, a Partial List of Editions of Books Brought
Out by Mabel Loomis Todd and Thomas Went-
worth Higginson": p. 412-415. Includes an im-
portant analysis of difficulties to be faced in pre-
paring a definitive edition of the poems.
852. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Emily Dickin-
son, a revelation. New York, Harper, 1954.
109 p. illus. 54-12227 PS1541.Z5B54
Includes some unpublished letters, and some late
poems by Emily Dickinson. On the basis of this
material, supplemented by extensive research, the
writer identifies the last great love of Emily's life
as her father's friend, Otis Phillips Lord, a
prominent judge in Massachusetts.
853. Bingham, Millicent (Todd). Emily Dickin
son's home; letters of Edward Dickinson
[Emily's father] and his family. With documenta-
tion and comment by Millicent Todd Bingham.
New York, Harper, 1955. xvii, 600 p. illus.
55-6573 PS1541.Z5B543
Includes bibliographies.
854. Chase, Richard V. Emily Dickinson. New
York, Sloane, 1951. xii, 328 p. (The Amer-
ican men of letters series)
51-14929 PS1541.Z5C5
"Bibliographical note": p. 313-317.
855. Johnson, Thomas H. Emily Dickinson: an
interpretive biography. Cambridge, Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 276 p,
illus. 55-9439 PS1541.Z5J6
849. —
an introd. by Mark Van Doren. Cleveland
World Pub. Co., 1951. xxiv, 389 p. illus.
51-9898 PS1541.Z5A3 1951
850. Letters to Dr. and Mrs. Josiah Gilbert Hol-
land. Edited by their granddaughter, Theo-
dora Van Wagenen Ward. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1951. vii, 252 p. illus.
51-10236 PS1541.Z5A36
Understanding of Emily Dickinson's life and
art has been greatly broadened in the past
Edited by Mabel Loomis Todd, with 856. PAUL LAURENCE DUNBAR, 1872-1906
Dunbar, born in Ohio to parents who had
formerly been slaves, owes his significance in Ameri-
can literature chiefly to his poems and short stories in
Negro dialect. In the majority of these he
memorialized the humor and also the pathos of the
old-fashioned plantation Negro, giving his themes
the idealization used by various other writers, and
particularly by Thomas Nelson Page. Dunbar also
wrote traditional romantic poems in conventional
English and novels, such as The Sport of the Gods
(1902).
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 77
857. Lyrics of lowly life. With an introd. by
W. D. Howells. New York, Dodd, Mead,
1896. xx, 208 p. 4-13820 PS1556.L6 1896
858. Lyrics of the hearthside. New York, Dodd,
Mead, 1899. x, 227 p.
99-1025 PS1556.L7 1899
859. Life and works; containing his complete
poetical works, his best short stories, numer-
ous anecdotes, and a complete biography of the
famous poet. By Lida Keck Wiggins, and an
introd. by William Dean Howells. Naperville, 111.,
Memphis, Tenn., J. L. Nichols ['1907] 430 p. illus.
7-13414 PS1557.W5
860. Best stories. Selected and edited with an
introd. by Benjamin Brawley. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1938. xvii, 258 p.
38-5603 PZ3.D9iiBe
Selections are taken from the following collections
of short stories: Folt^s from Dixie (1898); The
Strength of Gideon (1900); In Old Plantation Days
( 1903) ; and The Heart of Happy Hollow ( 1904).
861. Complete poems. With the introd. to Lyrics
of lowly life by W. D. Howells. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1940. xxxii, 289 p.
40-34708 PS1556.A1 1940
Previously issued in 1913.
862. FINLEY PETER DUNNE ("MR.
DOOLEY"), 1867-1936
Dunne, a Chicago newspaper reporter and later
an editor, created a crackerbox philosopher, "Mr.
Dooley," who, speaking in the brogue of Irish im-
migrants, became the author's medium for express-
ing his own serious views on social, political, and
foreign affairs. The essays were enormously popu-
lar, first as newspaper columns and later in the form
of books. "Josh Billings," "Artemus Ward," and
Will Rogers are representative figures in the tradi-
tion of American writing to which Dunne belonged.
863. Mr. Dooley in peace and in war. Boston,
Small, Maynard, 1898. xviii, 260 p.
98-1501 PN6161.D82 1898
864. Mr. Dooley in the hearts of his countrymen.
Boston, Small, Maynard, 1899. xi, 285 p.
99-5065 PN6161.D825
865. Mr. Dooley at his best. Edited by Elmer
Ellis; with foreword by Franklin P. Adams.
New York, Scrfibner, 1938. xxvi, 291 p.
38-27991 PN6161.D818
866. Mr. Dooley: now and forever, created by Fin-
ley Peter Dunne. Selected, with commentary
and introd. by Louis Filler. Stanford, Calif., Aca-
demic Reprints, 1954. xv, 298 p. (American cul-
ture and economics series, no. 4)
54-12399 PN6161.D817
Includes material from the 1898, 1899 publications
cited above, and also from What Dooley Says
(1898); Mr. Dooley s Philosophy (1900); Mr.
Dooley' s Opinions (1901); Observations by Mr.
Dooley (1902); Dissertations by Mr. Dooley (1906);
and Mr. Dooley Says (1910).
867. EDWARD EGGLESTON, 1837-1902
Eggleston, largely a self-educated man, was
a Methodist clergyman, an editor, and a historian
as well as a novelist. He was inspired to apply to
the writing of fiction the idea that a good artist
paints subjects chosen from his own environment.
His birth and early years in the Middle West had
made him familiar with Southern Ohio, Indiana,
and Illinois, and with the "Hoosier" dialect used
there in the early part of the 19th century; conse-
quently it was to this part of the country that he
turned for his material. His novels and stories,
once popular, suffer from melodramatic plots, poor
characterization, forced humor, and sentimentality.
Historically, however, they give early evidence of
the trends in American literature after the Civil
War towards increasing interest in the speech and
social conditions of common men, in realistic rather
than romantic themes, and in the local color of
regions remote from the older centers of culture in
the East.
868. The Hoosier schoolmaster. New York,
Orange Judd [ci87i] 226 p.
3-19544 PS1582.H62 1871 RBD
Title varies: The Hoosier Schoolmaster; a Novel;
The Hoosier Schoolmaster; a Story of Backwoods
Life in Indiana.
869. New and rev. ed. New York,
Orange Judd, 1893. 218 p. illus.
3-19546 PZ3.E29H8
870. Rev. with an introd. and notes . . .
by the author. New York, Grosset & Dun-
lap ['1913] 281 p. 40-152 PZ3.E29H8
871
With an introd. by Emory Hollo-
way. New York, Macmillan, 1928. xxviii,
203 p. (Modern readers' series)
28-25351 PZ3.E29H15
J$ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
872. The circuit rider. New York, J. B. Ford,
1874. 332 p. 6-37566 PZ3.E29C
873. New York, Scribner, 1902. 332 p.
2-1 1 134 PZ3.E29C7
874. Roxy. New York, Scribner, 1878. viii,
432 p. 4-22067 PZ3.E29R
875. New York, Scribner, 1906. viii,
432 p. 6-27714 PZ3.E29R2
876. The Graysons; a story of Illinois. New York,
Century [1888] 362 p. illus.
4-15098 PS1582.G7 1888 RBD
Includes a courtroom scene in which Abraham
Lincoln, as counsel for the defense, plays a leading
part.
877. The Graysons; a story of Abraham Lincoln.
New York, Century, 19 18 ["1915] 362 p.
illus. 53-49456 PS1582.G7 1918 RBD
Published also under title: The Graysons; a Story
of Illinois.
878. EUGENE FIELD, 1850-1895
From 1883 to 1895 Field pioneered in a new
type of newspaper column, which he called "Sharps
and Flats." It appeared regularly in the Chicago
Morning News (afterwards called the Chicago Rec-
ord). Sometimes written in real or manufactured
dialect and slang, the column was a melange of
jokes, gossip about persons or events, idealistic short
stories, lullabies, parodies, familiar verses particu-
larly for or about children, political sarcasm, and
miscellaneous humorous pieces. It is said that most
of what he published in book form, as for example
A Little Boo^ of Western Verse (1889) and A Little
Boo\ of Profitable Tales (1889), had appeared first
in his column. He is remembered particularly for
his innovations in journalistic literature and for the
appeal his verses had to the taste of his period, a
time when James Whitcomb Riley also attracted a
large audience.
879. Poems. Complete ed. New York, Scribner,
1915. xii, 553 p.
16-6502 PS1665.A2 1915
880. Writings in prose and verse. New York,
Scribner, 1898-1901. 12 v. illus.
32-2826 PS1665.A2 1898
"Eugene Field; a Memory," by Roswell Martin
Field, v. 1, p. ix-xlvii.
Vols. 1-10, 1898; v. 11-12, 1901.
Introductions by Joel Chandler Harris, Edward
Everett Hale, and others.
Reissued by Scribner in 191 1.
881. MARY E. (WILKINS) FREEMAN, 1852-
1930
The name of Mrs. Freeman, a writer whose early
and most successful short stories are set in rural New
England, is frequently linked with the names of
Harriet Beecher Stowe and Sarah Orne Jewett as
belonging to the school of local color writing about
that region. However, her own objectivity, econ-
omy, and force applied to the delineation of her
characters, their environment, and the society of
which they were a part constitute her individual con-
tribution to the realistic American dialect story of
the late 19th century. Mrs. Freeman's stories, con-
cerned chiefly with frustration and repression in
provincial Massachusetts circles, forcefully convey
her own view of life as essentially tragic.
882. A humble romance, and other stories. New
York, Harper, 1887. iv, 436 p.
1-2478 PZ3.F88HU
Twenty-eight short stories.
883. A New England nun, and other stories. New
York, Harper, 1891. iv, 468 p.
4-15 108 PZ3.F88N
Twenty-four short stories.
884.
With an introd. by Professor Fred
Lewis Pattee. New York, Harper [ci92o]
xxvi, 468 p. (Harper's modern classics)
20-18608 PZ3.F88N6
885. Edgewater people. New York, Harper
[ci9i8] 314 p. 18-21528 PZ3.F88Ed
PS1712.E4
Includes twelve short stories.
886. Best stories. Selected and with an introd.
by Henry Wysham Lanier. New York, Har-
per, 1927. xi, 465 p. 27-5840 PZ3.F88Be
887. HENRY BLAKE FULLER, 1857-1929
A Chicago banker, journalist, and novelist,
Fuller wrote at a time when Chicago was going
through a period of rapid social change, marked
by expansion, material wealth, social ambition, and
municipal corruption. Fuller knew this life so in-
timately that it naturally provided the material for
his novels and short stories. These were written
in the tradition of realism associated with the work
of William Dean Howells, lacking as they did the
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 79
naturalistic view of American society later de-
veloped by Theodore Dreiser. In another and dif-
ferent mood Fuller reacted to a number of trips
abroad by writing various volumes that record his
enjoyment of Europe, among them The Chevalier
oj Pensieri-Vani (1890), a gently humorous book,
half fact, half fancy, about experiences in Italy.
888. The cliff-dwellers, a novel. New York,
Harper, 1893. 324 p. illus.
6-44578 PZ3.F957CI
889. With the procession, a novel. New York,
Harper, 1895. 33^ P-
6-44576 PZ3.F957Wi
890. HAMLIN GARLAND, i860- 1940
After a boyhood devoted to a man's labor on
family farms in Wisconsin, Iowa, and Dakota Ter-
ritory, Garland went as a young man to Boston.
There he came under the influence of William Dean
Howells and imbibed the latter's theories of literary
realism. Garland, however, soon went beyond his
preceptor's position by evolving his own literary
theory. This he called "veritism." Its principal
tenets included: a national American literature
purged of imitations of older literatures; realism
faithful not merely to facts but to the writer's im-
pressions of truth underlying the facts; themes
drawn from the author's own experiences, whether
agreeable or not; and local color dependent upon
intimate knowledge of the place or region depicted.
In the best of Garland's work he remained true to
these principles. His short stories of farm life in
the Middle West, often grim but also powerful, con-
tributed to the marked success of the short story as
a literary form at the end of the 19th century. A
series of autobiographical works, dealing with the
Middle Border in relation to his own family,
chronicles the influence of the frontier on three gen-
erations of middle-class Americans.
891. Main-traveled roads; six Mississippi Valley
stories. Boston, Arena Pub. Co., i8qi.
260 p. 17-26999 PS1732.M3 1891 RBD
892. New ed., with additional stories.
New York, Macmillan, 1899. ix, 299 p.
99-4062 PZ3.G18M4
893. Sunset ed. New York, Harper
[1909?] 299 p. ^-5047 PZ3.G18M5
Contents. — Introduction by W. D. Howells. — A
branch road. — Up the coolly. — Among the corn-
rows. — The return of a private. — Under the lion's
paw. — The creamery man. — A day's pleasure. —
Mrs. Ripley's trip.— Uncle Ethan Ripley.
894.
With illus. by Constance Garland.
New York, Harper, 1930. 406 p.
30-28187 PZ3.G18M10
Includes six additional stories.
895. Edited with an introd. by Thomas A.
Bledsoe. New York, Rinehart, 1954. 185 p.
(Rinehart editions, 66) 54-5867 PZ3.G18M13
896. Crumbling idols; twelve essays on art, deal-
ing chiefly with literature, painting and the
drama. Chicago, Stone & Kimball, 1894. ix, 192 p.
27-20780 PS1732.C7 1894
Contents. — Provincialism. — New fields. — The
question of success. — Literary prophecy. — Local
color in art. — The local novel. — The drift of the
drama. — The influence of Ibsen. — Impressionism. —
Literary centres. — Literary masters. — A recapitula-
tory afterword.
897.
With an introd. by Robert E. Spiller.
Gainesville, Fla., Scholars' Facsimiles & Re-
prints, 1952. viii, 192 p.
52-9716 PS1732.C7 1952
898. A son of the Middle Border. New York,
Macmillan, 1917. 467 p. illus.
17-22272 PS1733.A4
Second in a series, in point of chronology, the
first being The Trail-Makers oj the Middle Border
( 1926) ; the third, A Daughter oj the Middle Border
(1921, Pulitzer Prize, 1922); and the fourth Back^-
Trailers from the Middle Border (1928).
Currendy reprinted by the same publisher.
899. New York, Grosset & Dunlap, 1928,
ci9i7. v, 466 p.
48-35778 PS1733.A47 1928
900. EDWARD EVERETT HALE, 1 822-1 909
Hale was a Unitarian clergyman of distin-
guished New England ancestry and connections,
whose long life was spent in or near Boston. His
voluminous writings, which included essays, ad-
dresses, short stories, novels, sermons, books of
travel, and other literary forms, reveal his cathol it-
interest in miscellaneous fields — literature, history,
antiquities, government, the opening of the Middle
West, European culture, and practical ethics, anion';
others. His works arc now significant chiefly as
records of the mind and character of a man widely
known and appreciated in his time and place.
901. The man without a country. Boston, Tick
nor & Fields, 1865. 23 p.
15-3174 PS1772.M3 1865 RBD
80 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Published first in The Atlantic Monthly, Dec.
1863, to combat Northern or "Copperhead" sym-
pathy with the Confederacy during the Civil War
and to inspire patriotism in a united nation, the
story has been republished frequently, both sepa-
rately and in short story collections.
902. [Limited ed.] Boston, J. S. Smith
[ci8q7] xx, 59 p. 6-46184 PZ3.H13M6
Includes author's account of the background and
circumstances of the writing and publication of the
story, and of its subsequent history.
9°3-
New ed. With an introd. in the
year of the war with Spain. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1898. xxxii, 59 p. 98-238 PZ3.H13M7
904.
New ed., with an introd. in the
year of the war with Spain. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1923. xxxii, 59 p. 27-7343 PZ3.H13M30
905. With an introd. by Carl Van Doren
and illus. by Edward A. Wilson. New York,
Limited Editions Club, 1936. x, 55 p.
36-18845 PS1772.M3 1936 RBD
906. A New England boyhood. New York, Cas-
sell [1893] xxv, 267 p. illus.
4-16961 F73.44.H15
Describes a Boston boyhood before the middle
of the 19th century, giving details of a happy home
life, social and religious experiences, the reading of
the New England children at the time, and student
life at Harvard.
907. A new ed. With foreword by Edwin
D. Mead. Boston, Little, Brown, 1927.
xxxii, 208 p. illus. 27-19168 PS1773.A2 1927
908. Works. Library ed. [Boston, Litde, Brown,
1898-1901] 10 v. 99-5408 PS1770.A2 1898
909. The man without a country, and other
stories. Edited with introd. and notes by
Samuel Marion Tucker. New York, Macmillan,
1910. xxviii, 200 p. ([Macmillan's pocket Amer-
ican and English classics])
10-22723 PZ3.H13M25
910. JOEL CHANDLER HARRIS, 1848-1908
Harris' position as an author derives from his
contribution to Negro folk literature in America,
typified by the Uncle Remus stories and rhymes
first published in the Atlanta Constitution, a news-
paper with which Harris was associated from 1876
to 1900. The first collected edition was received
enthusiastically, not only in the South but also in
the North, where it gave evidence of the vitality
of Southern literature after limitations imposed on
it by the Civil War. This and successive collections
made their appeal through their modern treatment
of animal mythology as well as through their gentle
humor, plantation Negro dialect, and popular phi-
losophy. The stories Harris wrote about moun-
taineers, freed Negroes, and poor whites in his native
Georgia, while less well-known than the Uncle
Remus stories, have an authentic local color and a
democratic realism that differ sharply and with salu-
tary effect from Thomas Nelson Page and George
William Bagby's romantic glorification of Southern
plantation life before the Civil War. For useful
data on Harris' life and contributions see Stella
Brewer Brooke's Joel Chandler Harris, Volhlorist
( Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1950. 1 82 p.) .
911. Uncle Remus, his songs and his sayings. New
York, Appleton, 1881. 231 p. illus.
7-2896 PZ3.H242Un3
Described as "the folk-lore of the old plantation."
First published in 1880.
Contents. — Legends of the old plantation. —
Plantation proverbs. — His songs. — A story of the
war. — His sayings.
912. New and rev. ed., with one hundred
and twelve illust. by A. B. Frost. New York,
Appleton, 1895. xxi, 265 p.
7-2897 PZ3.H242Un3
913. New and rev. ed., with 112 illus. by
A. B. Frost. New York, Appleton-Century,
1947. xxi, 270 p. 47-5732 PZ7.H242Un40
Based on the author's revision of 1895.
914. Nights with Uncle Remus. Boston, J. R.
Osgood, 1883. xxxvi, 416 p. illus.
8-23921 PZ3.H242N
Subtitle: Myths and legends of the old plantation.
915. 22d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin
["1883] xxxvi, 416 p. illus.
42-26420 PZ3.H242N2
916. With illus. by Milo Winter. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1917. viii, 338 p.
17-25512 PZ3.H242N4
917. Mingo, and other sketches in black and white.
Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1884. 273 p.
12-32982 PZ3.H242M1
Contents. — Mingo: a sketch of life in middle
Georgia. — At Teague Poteet's: a sketch of the Hog
Mountain range. — Blue Dave. — A piece of land.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 8l
918.
919.
7th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1898. 273 p. OOxM
New York, Mckinlay, Stone & Mac-
kenzie ['1912] 273 p. (The booklovers ed.)
ViU
920. Free Joe, and other Georgia sketches. New
York, Scribner, 1887. 236 p.
7-3663 PZ3.H242F
Contents. — Free Joe. — Little Compton. — Aunt
Fountain's prisoner. — Trouble on Lost Mountain. —
Azalia.
921.
New York, Scribner, 1906.
236 p.
NN
922. Uncle Remus and his friends; old plantation
stories, songs, and ballads, with sketches of
Negro character. Illustrated by A. B. Frost. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1892. xv, 357 p.
7-2895 PZ7.H242Unh3
923. Joel Chandler Harris: editor and essayist.
Edited by Julia Collier Harris. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1931. 429 p.
31-31655 PS 1 80 1. H3
Comprises miscellaneous literary, political, and
social writings.
924. The favorite Uncle Remus. Illustrated
by A. B. Frost. Selected, arr. & edited by
George Van Santvoord and Archibald C. Coolidge.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. viii, 310 p.
48-1944 PZ7.H242Fav
Published in celebration of the centenary of the
author's birth. This is one of many reprints of
selections made available from time to time.
925. The complete tales of Uncle Remus. Com-
piled by Richard Chase. With illus. by
Arthur Burdette Frost [and others] Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1955. xxxii, 875 p.
54-12233 PZ7.H242C0
"The tales in this edition have been left as Mr.
Harris wrote them. Our concern has been with
the folktales only, and not with the songs, rhymed
versions of the tales, proverbs, and character
sketches . . ." Foreword, p. xiii.
926. (FRANCIS) BRET HARTE, 1 836-1902
Journalist, parodist, poet, literary critic, and
finally literary hack, Harte has been called the
father of the local color movement in American
literature and the originator of a new genre in short
story writing, whose influence may be traced in the
431240—60 7
work of such dissimilar writers as Mark Twain,
Ambrose Bierce, and O. Henry. Departing from
the genteel tradition so long dominant in the litera-
ture produced in New England, he took as his
province the rough life of the frontier after it had
advanced to California under the impetus provided
by the discovery of gold in that region in 1848.
His characters were for the most part miners, gam-
blers, rascals, and adventurers of all kinds. These
men and women he brought to life with a certain
romantic, sentimental glow for sophisticated audi-
ences in the East and abroad, who immediately
made his work the literary fashion of the 1870*5.
While he remained a good craftsman, his repeated
use of his original themes dulled the appetite for
the work he continued to turn out until he died.
927. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other
sketches. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1869]
256 p. (The Riverside library) NcD
928.
929.
Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870.
239 p. PS1827.A1 1870 RBD
Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1871. 256 p.
25-28034 PS1827.A1 1871 RBD
930. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other stories.
[3d ed.] Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1886.
279 p. (The Riverside Aldine series)
3-26184 PZ3.H252L13
Contents. — The luck of Roaring Camp. —
M'liss. — The outcasts of Poker Flat. — Miggles. —
Tennessee's partner. — The idyll of Red Gulch. —
How Santa Claus came to Simpson's Bar. — The
fool of Five Forks. — The romance of Madrono
Hollow. — The Princess Bob and her friends.
931. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and selected
stories and poems. Edited with an introd. by
George R. Stewart, Jr. New York, Macmillan,
1928. xx, 188 p. (The modern readers' series)
28-7034 PZ3.H252L25
932. The Luck of Roaring Camp, and other
sketches. Chicago, Fountain Press, 1949.
viii, 309 p. illus. (World's greatest literature)
50-5573 PZ3.H252L40
933. Poems. Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1871. vi,
152 p. 24-6284 PS1830 1871 RBD
Includes a group of dialect poems (p. 49-88).
Among them is "Plain Language from Truthful
James," which became the rage after its initial pub-
lication in the Overland Monthly, Sept. 1870; re-
published at times under the title, "The Heathen
Chinee," it has been called "the most spectacular
82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
poem in the Pike language." See annotation under
the name of John (Milton) Hay for comment on
this form of vernacular verse.
934-
Household ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [ 1 902 ] x, 32 1 p.
3-463 PS1830 1902
935. Works. Riverside ed. Collected and rev. by
the author. [Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1 894-1900] 6 v. PPLas
936. The writings of Bret Harte. Standard li-
brary ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ci896-
1903] 19 v. illus. A13-1720 PSi820.E96a
A Riverside edition was published by Houghton
Mifflin in 20 v., ci890-ci9i4, of which v. 20 has
the title: Stories and Prose and Other Uncollected
Writings.
937. Bret Harte's stories of the old West. Se-
lected by Wilhelmina Harper and Aimee M.
Peters; illus. by Paul Brown. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1940. 322 p. 40-34192 PZ3.H242Stc
Contents. — The Luck of Roaring Camp. — The
outcasts of Poker Flat. — Tennessee's partner. — How
Santa Claus came to Simpson's Bar. — Highwater
mark. — M'liss. — An ingenue of the Sierras. — A
ward of Colonel Starbotde's. — Miggles. — A knight-
errant of the foothills. — Dick Boyle's business
card. — Plain language from truthful James.
938. Bret Harte; representative selections, with
introd., bibliography, and notes, by Joseph B.
Harrison. New York, American Book Co., 1941.
cxxviii, 416 p. (American writers series)
41-11710 PS1822.H3
"Selected bibliography": p. cxiii-cxxviii.
939. Selected stories of Bret Harte: The huc\ of
Roaring Camp, The outcasts of Vo\er Flat,
Tennessee's partner, M'liss, and other tales. New
York, Caxton House, 1946. ix, 306 p. (Caxton li-
brary of the world's greatest literature)
46-1319 PZ3-H252Se
940. Best short stories. Edited, and with an in-
trod. by Robert N. Linscott. New York,
Modern Library, 1947. x, 517 p. (Modern Library
of the world's best books [250])
47-30278 PZ3-H252Bg
941. JOHN (MILTON) HAY, 1838-1905
Hay and Bret Harte were pioneers in writing
humorous or sentimental vernacular poetry glori-
fying people or events on the frontier. In these
verses their aim was to reproduce the speech and
sketch the characteristics of unlettered residents of
the Middle West, identified during the California
Gold Rush as "Pikes" or "Pikers" because so many
of them migrated from the counties of Pike in Illi-
nois, Missouri, Arkansas, and other states. Hay,
who was eventually Secretary of State, a cosmopoli-
tan, and a member of Henry Adams' circle in Wash-
ington, later discounted the importance of his few
ballads in Pike dialect. However, they were so
constantly read and recited that they attained the
status of folk poems. As such they contributed to
setting a pattern in verse that was used over and
over again, notably by James Whitcomb Riley. Hay
also wrote numerous conventional poems on ro-
mantic themes. His prose works included: Castilian
Days (1871), travel sketches of European experi-
ences written for Americans interested in the Old
World; The Bread-Winners (1884), a novel reflect-
ing conservative upper-class ideas concerning labor
unions and private enterprise; and Abraham Lin-
coln (1890), a monumental biographical work writ-
ten jointly with John G. Nicolay.
942. Pike County ballads and other pieces. Bos-
ton, J. R. Osgood, 1871. 167 p.
25-15310 PS1902.P5 1871 RBD
Includes "Jim Bludso" and "Little Breeches,"
both published originally in the New Yorl^ Tribune,
a newspaper with which Hay was connected for
some years in an editorial capacity.
943. 15th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1882 ["1871] 167 p.
50-47091 PS1902.P5 1882
944. Complete poetical works, including many
poems now first collected, with an introd. by
Clarence L. Hay. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916.
xiii, 271 p. 16-22653 PS1900A2 1916
Large-paper edition.
"The Pike County Ballads": p. $-[25].
945. LAFCADIO HEARN, 1 850-1904
Hearn was born on the Greek island of
Leukas and died in Japan a naturalized citizen of
that country. The middle period of his life, how-
ever, was spent as a journalist in the United States.
There he was set apart from the more conventional
writers of the period by his prevailing interest in
perfecting a polished but ornate literary style and
in developing an impressionistic method of treat-
ing themes that were often exotic. His sketches,
essays, stories, and novels of life and society in
New Orleans and the West Indies are contribu-
tions to the local color literature of these places.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 83
Numerous other volumes record his observations of
Japanese manners and customs. These were de-
signed to interpret his adopted country to the West-
ern world.
946. Chita; a memory of Last Island. New York,
Harper, 1889. 204 p.
7-5049 PZ3.H351C RBD
Short novel centering around the story of a Creole
child carried away by a tidal wave that overwhelmed
one of the coastal islands south of Louisiana.
947-
948.
New York, Harper [ci9i7] 204 p.
ViU
New York, Harper [1938] MH
949. Youma; the story of a West-Indian slave.
New York, Harper, 1890. 193 p.
7-5043 PZ3.H351Y RBD
The heroism and death of a Negro slave, for the
sake of the white Creole child in her care, provide
the plot of the novel; said to be based on an actual
occurrence in the slave insurrection of 1848 on the
island of Martinique.
950.
New York, Harper [1915] MH
951. Writings. Large-paper ed. [Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1922] 16 v. illus.
23-7259 PS1915.A2 1922 RBD
Introduction by Ferris Greenslet: v. 1, p. xiii-
[xxx].
Partial Contents. — 1. Leaves from the diary of
an impressionist, Creole sketches and Some Chinese
ghosts. — 2. Stray leaves from strange literature and
Fantastics and other fancies. — 3. Two years in the
French West Indies, v. 1. Appendix: Some Creole
melodies. — 4. Two years in the French West Indies,
v. 2. Chita and Youma. — 5-6. Glimpses of un-
familiar Japan. — 9. Exotics and retrospectives and
In ghosdy Japan. — n. Kotto and Kwaidan. — 12.
Japan, an attempt at interpretation.
952. [Koizumi ed. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1923] 16 v. illus. NN
Contents comparable to those of the large-paper
edition, with slight variations in statements of a
few tides.
953. The life and letters of Lafcadio Hearn, by
Elizabeth (Bisland) [Wetmore] Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1906. 2 v. illus.
6-44374 PS1918.W4
The work is made up chiefly of Hearn's letters,
preceded by a brief biography. His letters are
found also in v. 13-16 of his Writings. Japanese
Letters, also edited by Elizabeth Bisland Wetmore,
comprises v. 16.
954. Creole sketches. Edited by Charles Wood-
ward Hutson, with illus. by the author. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1924. xxv, 201 p.
24-10002 F380.C9H3
955. Selected writings. Edited by Henry Good-
man, with an introd. by Malcolm Cowley.
New York, Citadel Press, 1949. viii, 566 p.
49-11635 PS1916.G6
Contents. — Lafcadio Hearn, by Malcolm Cow-
ley.— Editor's introduction. — Kwaidan. — Some Chi-
nese ghosts. — Chita. — American sketches [from Cin-
cinnati, New Orleans, and the Caribbean]. — Japan:
Stories of Japanese life; Travel; Folk culture; Essays;
Weird tales. — Sources. — Bibliography [books and
articles about Hearn] p. 564-566.
956. ROBERT HERRICK, 1868-1938
Herrick, for 30 years a professor of English
at the University of Chicago, observed around him
the advent of increased industrialization, expand-
ing business, and accelerated economic competition.
Results of the operation of these forces, found in
the ethical and social character of middle class life
in the capital city of the Middle West, were the
themes he developed in a succession of realistic
novels. His novel Together (1908) reflects his re-
action to the changing relations of men and women
in such a society. Sometimes (1933), a satirical
Utopian novel, postulates a remote future in which
the characters, freed from acquisitiveness, might de-
velop creative personalities and a good life. Her-
rick was a humanist and an intellectual, rather than
a self-conscious reformer. That fact perhaps ac-
counts for the analytical, sometimes undramatic,
quality of his work and for its neglect by general
readers.
957. The memoirs of an American citizen. New
York, Macmillan, 1905. xi, 351 p.
5-23023 PZ3.H435Me
First published in The Saturday Evening Post
(1905), the novel provides a realistic portrait of a
self-made capitalist, antedating Dreiser's The Fin-
ancier by seven years.
958. Clark's field. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1914. 477 p. 14-11043 PZ3.H435CI
959. EDGAR WATSON HOWE, 1853-1937
Owner and editor of the Daily Globe of Atchi-
son, Kansas, from 1877 to 191 1, and afterwards of
84 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
E. IV. Howe's Monthly, Howe enjoyed a national
reputation on account of the brief paragraphs and
aphorisms contributed by him in his editorial ca-
pacity. He was also the author of a novel in which
the treatment of smalltown life constituted a pioneer
work of unrelieved realism. It forecast the trend
towards naturalistic writing on the same theme
culminating in Sherwood Anderson's Winesburg,
Ohio (1919) and its successors in the 1920's.
Howe's autobiography, Plain People (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1929. 317 P-)> also is a contnb,Uj1,°,n
to the realistic regional literature of the Middle
West.
960. The story of a country town. Atchison,
Kans., Howe, 1883. 226 p.
45-45006 PZ3.H8364S
Privately printed by the author after being re-
jected by several publishers.
o6r. With an appreciation by William
Dean Howells. New York, Harper [1917]
413 p. illus. MB
962. New York, A. & C. Boni, 1926.
412 p. (The American library)
26-26999 PZ3.H8364S8
Q63 New York, Dodd, Mead, 1927.
xiii, 361 p. illus. 28-2241 PZ3.H8364S9
Includes a Foreword which gives a history of the
original and subsequent publications of the book,
its reception by critics, and the author's comments
about the background of his novel.
964. WILLIAM DEAN HOWELLS, 1 837-1 920
Formal education ended for Howells when he
left elementary school to set type for his father's
smalltown newspaper in Hamilton, Ohio. Before
his death at the age of eighty-three he had refused
professorships at Johns Hopkins and Harvard, had
received honorary degrees from Columbia, Yale,
Oxford, and Princeton, and was familiarly known
as the "Dean" of American writers. A partial list
of the many experiences by which his education was
extended includes: journalism in Ohio; a United
States consulship in Venice, where he became an
unofficial reporter on European life for newspapers
and periodicals at home; a ten-year term as editor-
in-chief of The Atlantic Monthly; and a long con-
nection with Harper's Magazine, as an editorial
writer and critic. For many of these years he was
the friend of the leading writers of his period, as
well as the mentor of those who showed promise
in his chosen field. Having formulated what was
probably the first well-defined theory of literary
realism enunciated in the United States, he applied
it in a variety of literary forms. These included
autobiographical works having Ohio and New Eng-
land regional interest, critical essays, travel sketches
addressed to the contemporary American interest
in European culture, and many novels. Naturalistic
elements were excluded from the realism of his
fiction, which emphasized the commonplace and
avoided sordid incidents or a pessimistic philosophy
of life. The novels tended, rather, to be decorous
if shrewd expressions of the author's reactions to
the middle-class life he knew at first hand. Dif-
ferent themes were conspicuous in his novels at dif-
ferent stages in his development. These included
courtship and marriage, the impress of Italian civili-
zation on Americans visiting or living in that
country, the impact of different social classes on each
other in a city such as Boston, and the need of social
change in the United States along socialistic lines.
Howells' books have been called documents of the
cultural and social history of his time.
065. A modern instance. Boston, J. R. Osgood,
1882. 514 p. 4-8624 PZ3.H24M0
A study of married life, and the result of degen-
eration of the husband's character.
966.
26th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin
[189-?] 514 p. 4-!5I2l PZ3.H84M026
Fourteenth edition published 1887.
Currendy published by Houghton Mifflin in the
Riverside college classics series.
967. The rise of Silas Lapham. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin [ci884] 515 p.
47-35488 PS2025.R5 1885 RBD
Concerned with Boston society and the relation
of a group of the nouveaux riches to certain impover-
ished aristocrats; popularly considered Howells' best
social novel.
968
Centenary ed. With introd. by
Booth Tarkington. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1937. xiv, 380 p. 37~9254 PZ3.H84R129
969.
Introd. by George [Warren] Arms.
New York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 394 p.
(Rinehart editions, 19) 49~487T PZ3.H84R135
Introd. by Harry Hayden Clark.
970.
New York, Modern Library, 1951. xxii, 324
n (Modern Library college editions, T56)
V V 51-5402 PZ3.H84R137
07 1 Indian summer. Boston, Ticknor, 1886. 395
^ p. 7-5771 PZ3.H84In
An international novel portraying American char-
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 85
acters living abroad, a theme used also in many of
the novels by Henry James. James L. Woodress in
his Howells & Italy (Durham, N. C, Duke Uni-
versity Press, 1952. 223 p.) studies the influence on
Howells of his life in Italy.
972. New introd. by William M. Gibson.
New York, Dutton, 195 1. xxii, 317 p. (Ev-
eryman's library 654A. Fiction)
p< 5J-7375 PZ3.H84lni5
Bibliography: p. xxi-xxii.
973. A hazard of new fortunes. New York, Har-
per [1889] 2 v. MH
An economic novel that introduces the clash in
New York between capitalistic interests of indus-
trialists and the interests of workers on various lev-
els; illustrates the author's growing belief in social-
ism, a development influenced by his study of
Tolstoy and other Russian writers.
974. Edinburgh, D. Douglas, 1889. 2 v.
42-32100 PZ3.H84Haic
975. Introd. by Alexander Harvey. New
York, Boni & Liveright, 1917. 2 v. in 1.
(Modern Library of the world's best books)
19-9539 PZ3.H84Ha6
976.
New introd. by George Warren
New York, Dutton, 1952. 552 p.
Arms.
(Everyman's library, 646A. Fiction)
52-5309 PZ3.H84Haio
977. Criticism and fiction. New York, Harper,
1891. 188 p. 18-1642 PN81.H6
Gives Howells' defense of realism in imaginative
writing. Everett Carter's Howells and the Age of
Realism (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1954. 307 p.) is
a current estimate of realism in the author's work.
978. A traveler from Altruria. New York,
Harper, 1894. 318 p. 7-5756 PZ3.H84Tr
With its sequel, Through the Eye of the Needle
(1907), this "romance" illustrates the author's con-
cern over paradoxes in American society produced
by inequalities of wealth and opportunity. Possible
solutions are indicated by comparison with the fic-
titious Utopian republic of Altruria.
979. Literary friends and acquaintance; a personal
retrospect of American authorship. New
York, Harper, 1900. viii, 287 p.
0-6798 PS2033.A6 1900
Contents. — My first visit to New England. —
First impressions of literary New York. — Round-
about to Boston. — Literary Boston as I knew it. —
Oliver Wendell Holmes. — The white Mr. Longfel-
low.— Studies of Lowell. — Cambridge neighbors.
980. The Leatherwood god. New York, Cen-
tury, 1916. 236 p. illus.
16-22401 PZ3.H84Le
Regional novel of Ohio before the middle of the
19th century, and the impact on a pioneer com-
munity of a man who proclaims himself a god;
based on a historical incident.
981. Life in letters. Edited by Mildred Howells.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928.
2 v. illus. 28-28879 PS2033.A67 1928
A bibliography of the works of William Dean
Howells: v. 2, p. 403-409.
982. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd. by
Henry Steele Commager. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1950. xvii, 946 p.
50-9450 PS2022.C6 1950
Contents. — The rise of Silas Lapham (1885). —
A modern instance (1882). — A boy's town
( 1 890) . — My Mark Twain ( 1 9 1 0) .
983. Representative selections. Introd., bibliog-
raphy, and notes, by Clara Marburg Kirk and
Rudolf Kirk. New York, American Book Co.,
1950. ccv, 394 p. (American writers series).
50-13680 PS2022.K5
Includes a particularly detailed introduction, a
bibliography of biographical and critical writings
about Howells, and a chronological table of his life
and works.
984. HELEN MARIA (FISKE) HUNT JACK-
SON ("H. H."), 1831-1885
Mrs. Jackson, one of the numerous "literary
ladies" active in the 1870's and 1880's, wrote books
for children and contributed her "bits" as she called
them to the growing literature of travel in Europe
and the Far West that was greatly in demand dur-
ing this period. Her poetry also was admired by
her contemporaries, among whom Emerson must be
included. She is best remembered now, however,
for the writing she did under the impetus of her
moral indignation caused by injustices in the treat-
ment of Indians by the United States Government.
Some literary interest and curiosity also attach to
her connection with Emily Dickinson, and the locale
of Amherst, Massachusetts, where both of them
were reared and where Mrs. [acksoa placed the
setting of her novel, Mercy Vhilhricl(s Choice
(1876). A short story, "Esther Wynn's Love*
Letters." published in the first series of a collection
called Saxe Holm's Stories (1874-1878) includes in
86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
its plot various incidents that resemble character-
istic features of Miss Dickinson's experience.
985. Ramona; a story. Boston, Roberts, 1884.
490 p. 171275 PZ3-Ji43R
Romance that reveals the conflicts of interest be-
tween old Spanish and new American elements in
California as a result of westward migrations during
the middle decades of the 19th century; also elo-
quently champions California Indians mistreated
by Americans. The latter theme was factually de-
veloped in the author's historical study, A Century
of Dishonor (1881, 1885).
986. HENRY JAMES, 1843-1916
The senior Henry James' "progressive" ideas
of education made the son a cosmopolitan in his
boyhood, with the result that the younger Henry
settled permanendy in England while still in his
early thirties. By expatriating himself in this way
he found an environment more favorable for per-
fecting his art of writing. The theories he developed
and the techniques of writing that he evolved are
described in his critical works. These include the
early essay, The Art of Fiction (1884), and the pref-
aces he wrote in 1907-8 for the New York edition
of his novels and stories. At one stage of his career
he believed drama should be his chosen form of
expression. His plays, however, were not successful
"theatre," consequendy fiction remained his chief
medium. The "international" novels and short
stories, his most distinctive contribution to American
literature, portray Americans of James' own class
exposed to tensions resulting from alien standards
encountered when they seek for a higher level of
social and cultural life in the Old World than that
provided by their own country. The author's an-
alysis of motives and actions observed under these
conditions was that of an artist who was also pro-
foundly concerned with the ethical and moral issues
involved in human relationships. As his friend,
William Dean Howells, is called a realist of the
commonplace, so James is frequendy described as a
psychological realist. He also repeatedly treated
American characters on their native ground. The
latter novels and stories open vistas for viewing
the social, intellectual, and ethical qualities he
found in life on the eastern seaboard of the United
States, notably in New York, Boston, and Newport.
In spite of his American origins and interests, James'
roots in English life had grown deep during his
long residence in England. In 1915, less than a
year before his death, he made an act of devotion to
the Allied cause in the First World War and to his
adopted country by becoming a naturalized British
subject.
987. The American. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1877.
473 P- 7-7560 PS2116.A6 1877 RBD
International novel in which an American's
wealth does not enable him to overcome the op-
position of a conventional French family to his
marriage to a daughter of the house.
988.
Introd. by Joseph Warren Beach.
New York, Rinehart, 1949. 360 p. (Rine-
hart editions, 16) 49-10371 PZ3.j234Ame3
989. The portrait of a lady. London, Macmillan,
1881. 3 V. 23-319 PS2116.P6 1881RBD
Appeared originally in Macmillan 's Magazine,
Oct. 1880-Nov. 1881, and in The Atlantic Monthly,
Nov. 1880-Dec. 1881.
Considered the chief novel in James' earlier and
more direct manner, the book provides an intellec-
tual and moral representation of an American
woman unhappily married to an American ex-
patriate in Europe. While the action takes place
abroad, the character of the "lady," rather than the
international aspect of the setting, is central in the
plot.
990. 1 8th ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1897. 529 p. 5-i5I27 PZ3J234P05
Leon Edel is the editor of a new edition (1956)
designed for inclusion in Houghton Mifflin's River-
side classics series.
991. Introd. by Fred B. Millett. New
York, Modern Library, 195 1. 2 v. in 1.
(Modern Library college editions, T47)
51-2261 PZ3.J234P035
Bibliography: p. xxxvi-xxxvii.
992. The Bostonians. London, Macmillan, 1886.
3 v. 23-165 PS2116.B6 1886 RBD
Originally appeared in the Century Magazine
from Feb. 1885 to Feb. 1886; satirical representation
of the American passion for good causes, in this
case that of women's rights, and the hysterical in-
fatuation of a grown woman for a young girl under
her influence; a realistic novel of Boston life in the
1880's, and the author's longest narrative in which
the locale and characters are uniformly American.
993. London and New York, Macmillan,
1886. 449 p.
4-15126 PS2116.B6 1886a RBD
994. [Introd. by Philip Rahv] New York,
Dial Press, 1945. ix, 378 p.
.45-9737 PZ3.J234B010
Included also in American Novels and Stories,
edited by F. O. Matthiessen (no. 1008).
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 87
995. Introd. by Irving Howe. New York,
Modern Library, 1956. xxviii, 464 p. (Mod-
ern Library of the world's best books [16])
56-5414 PZ3.J234B015
996. The wings of the dove. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1902. 2 v.
2-20827 PS2116.W5 1902 RBD
International novel in which the designs of an
English couple are made of no effect by the nobility
of the mortally ill American heroine; frequendy
called the author's greatest book; written in his noted
final style characterized by intricate ideas, delicate
perceptions, and implied impressions conveyed
through an arrangement of words and sentences that
calls for attentive participation from the reader.
997. New York, Scribner, 1945. xxx, 329,
439 P- 45-9835 PZ3.j234Wiio
Published also as number 244 in the Modern Li-
brary of the world's best books.
998. The ambassadors. New York, Harper, 1903.
431 p. 3-28287 PS2116.A5 1903 RBD
A novel that was originally published in the North
American Review, Jan.-Dec. 1903. The "ambassa-
dors" are portrayed as emissaries of a wealthy wom-
an in Massachusetts, who prevails upon them to
undertake a mission to Europe in the hope of per-
suading a young American to break the ties he has
formed with a fascinating French woman, in order
to return to manage the family business in America.
With The Wings of the Dove and The Golden Bowl
this novel forms what has been called a spiritual
trilogy in James' last phase.
999. With an introd. by Martin W. Samp-
son. New York, Harper ['1930] xv, 431 p.
(Harper's modern classics)
30-34411 PZ3-j234Amb4
Currently published also in Harper's college edi-
tion.
1000. The golden bowl. New York, Scribner,
1904. 2 v. 4-32321 PZ3.J234G0
James' last long novel, in which an international
marriage between a fabulously rich American girl
and an impoverished Italian nobleman resulted in
grievous suffering for all the principal characters.
1001. Introd. by R. P. Blackmur. New
York, Grove Press, 1952 ['1932! xxi, 412,
377 P- 52-933 1 PZ3.J234G06
1002. The American scene. New York, Harper,
1907. vi, 442 p. 7-5704 F106.J27 RBD
Contents. — New England: an autumn impres-
sion.— New York revisited. — New York and the
Hudson: a spring impression. — New York: social
notes. — The Bowery and thereabouts. — The sense
of Newport. — Boston. — Concord and Salem. — Phil-
adelphia.— Baltimore. — Washington. — Richmond. —
Charleston. — Florida.
1003.
Edited, with an introd., by W. H.
Auden. New York, Scribner, 1946. xxx,
501 p. illus. 46-25289 F106.J273
"Saratoga," "Newport," and "Niagara," taken
from Portraits of Places, are added to the contents of
this edition.
1004. Novels and tales. New York ed. [New
York, Scribner, 1907-17] 26 V.
7-41582 PS2110.F07
Includes numerous revisions of texts and provides
a series of prefaces to volumes 1-24. These con-
tain important critical material concerning the
structural technique of fiction. The prefaces were
afterwards republished in a group, with an introduc-
tion by Richard P. Blackmur, as The Art of the
Novel (New York, Scribner, 1934. xli, 348 p.).
Volume 25, The Ivory Tower, and volume 26, The
Sense of the Past, were left unfinished when the
author died. They were edited for publication by
Percy Lubbock. Volume 26 is lacking in the
Library of Congress.
1005. Letters. Selected and edited by Percy Lub-
bock. New York, Scribner, 1920. 2 v.
illus. 20-6773 PS2123.A5 1920
1006. Selected letters. Edited with an introd. by
Leon Edel. New York, Farrar, Straus &
Cudahy [1955] xxxiv, 235 p. (Great letters series)
55-1 1 183 PS2123.A43
1007. Great short novels. Edited with an introd.
& comments by Philip Rahv. New York,
Dial Press, 1944. xiii, 799 p.
44-47807 PZ3.j234Gr
Contents. — Madame de Mauves. — Daisy Miller.
— An international episode. — The siege of Lon-
don.— Lady Barberina. — The author of Beltraffio. —
The Aspern papers. — The pupil. — The turn of the
screw. — The beast in the jungle.
1008. American novels and stories. Edited, and
with an introd., by F. O. Matthiesscn. New
York, Knopf, 1947. xxvi, 993 p.
47-1392 PZ3.J234A1]
Contents. — The story of a year. — The Euro-
peans.— Washington Square. — The point of view. —
A New England winter. — Pandora. — The B< •
tonians. — "Europe." — Julia Bride. — The jolly cor-
88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ner. — Crapy Cornelia. — A round of visits. — The
ivory tower.
1009. Notebooks. Edited by F. O. Matthiessen
and Kenneth B. Murdock. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1947. xxviii, 425 p.
47-1 1461 PS2123.A4
Contents. — Chronological list of James' chief
publications. — Notebook 1-9. — The 'B. B.' case and
'Mrs. Max.' — Preliminary sketch for The sense of
the past. — Project for The ambassadors.
1010. The art of fiction, and other essays; with an
introd. by Morris Roberts. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1948. xxiv, 240 p.
48-6136 PN3499.J25
Partial Contents. — The art of fiction. — The
new novel. — Criticism. — Emerson.
ion. Short stories. Selected and edited, with an
introd. by Clifton Fadiman. New York,
Modern Library, 1948. xx, 644 p. (Modern Li-
brary of the world's best books. Modern Library
giants) 48-9351 PZ3.j234Sh4
1012. Ghosdy tales. Edited with an introd. by
Leon Edel. New Brunswick, Rutgers Uni-
versity Press, 1948 [i. e. 1949] xxxiv, 765 p.
49-7759 PZ3.j234Gh
Contents. — The romance of certain old clothes. —
De Grey: a romance. — The last of the Valerii. — The
ghostly rental. — Sir Edmund Orme. — Nona Vin-
cent.— The private life. — Sir Dominick Ferrand. —
Owen Wingrave. — The altar of the dead. — The
friends of the friends. — The turn of the screw. —
The real right thing. — The great good place. —
Maud-Evelyn. — The third person. — The beast in the
jungle. — The jolly corner.
1013. Complete plays. Edited by Leon Edel.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1949. 846 p. illus.
49-10769 PS2111.E4
First collected edition of the complete plays, to-
gether with an unfinished scenario and various notes
and prefaces. Cf. Foreword, p. 9.
1014. Selected fiction. Edited with an introd. and
notes by Leon Edel. New York, Dutton,
1953. xxiv, 609 p. (Everyman's library, 649A.
Fiction) 53-8253 PZ3 .j234Sb
Bibliography: p. xxi-xxiv.
Includes Daisy Miller, Washington Square, The
Aspern Papers, The Pupil, The Beast in the Jungle,
The Jolly Corner, and The Art of Fiction, as well
as prefaces and additional commentary by James.
1015. Autobiography. Edited with an introd. by
Frederick W. Dupee. New York, Criterion
Books, 1956. 622 p. illus. 56-6211 PS2123.A3
Brings together James' three autobiographical
works: A Small Boy and Others (1913); Notes of
a Son and Brother (1914); and The Middle Years,
edited by Percy Lubbock ( 19 17) — a collection which
greatly enriches the student's understanding of the
author, his American beginnings, and the 19th
century civilization he portrayed in his novels and
other prose writings.
Recent critical works that continue to indicate
the important place occupied by James in American
literature include the following:
1016. Beach, Joseph Warren. The method of
Henry James. [Enl. ed., with corrections]
Philadelphia, A. Saifer, 1954. 299 p.
55-1809 PS2124.B4 1954
Consists of the original text of the first edition
(19 1 8) but adds a lengthy introduction that reviews
recent critical discussions of James' work by Ezra
Pound, Van Wyck Brooks, Edmund Wilson, Leon
Edel, and others.
1017. Canby, Henry Seidel. Turn west, turn east:
Mark Twain and Henry James. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xii, 318 p.
51-14000 PS1331.C25
Bibliography: p. 301-303.
1018. Dupee, Frederick W. Henry James. New
York, Sloane, 1951. xiii, 301 p. (The
American men of letters series)
51-2012 PS2123.D8
1019.
2d ed., rev. and enl.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1956. 265 p.
(Doubleday anchor books, A68)
56-5971 PS2123.D8 1956
1020. Edel, Leon J. Henry James, [v. 1] The
untried years, 1 843-1 870. Philadelphia, Lip-
pincott [1953] 350 p. 53-5421 PS2123.E33
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
[v.i] p. 345-351.
This is the first part of a study planned for com-
pletion in three volumes.
1 02 1. Le Clair, Robert C. Young Henry James,
1 843-1 870. New York, Bookman Asso-
ciates, 1955. 469 p. 55-3467 PS2123.L4
1022. Stevenson, Elizabeth. The crooked corridor;
a study of Henry James. New York, Mac-
millan, 1949. 172 p. 49-11903 PS2123.S8
"Bibliographical note": p. 164-166.
Deals with James' fiction.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 89
1023. SARAH ORNE JEWETT, 1849-1909
Mrs. Stowe in her local color sketches and
stories of New England sought to preserve the qual-
ities of the region that she believed constituted its
greatness and justified its influence in America and
"on the civilized world." Writing in the same genre
a generation later, Miss Jewett found her inspiration
in the coastal countryside of Maine and in the cour-
age, even nobility, of the people living there after
the great shipping trade was dead and industries
in the towns, or westward migrations, had drawn off
many of the most vigorous young people. Miss
Jewett's art included the ability to use the beauty
of the landscape as a background for the underlying
drama in apparently commonplace lives. This ef-
fect she achieved with classic economy and restraint.
Clara C. Weber and Carl J. Weber have compiled
A Bibliography of the Published Writings of Sarah
Orne Jewett (Waterville, Me., Colby College Press,
1949. xi, 105 p. Colby College monographs, no.
18).
1024. Deephaven. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1877.
255 P' 34-25494 PS2132.D4 1877 RBD
A collection of local color stories published earlier
in The Atlantic Monthly.
1025. 14th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1885. 255 p. 44-10710 PZ3.J55De2
1026. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [1905]
255 p. 5-1 1 85 PZ3.J55De7
1027. The country of the pointed firs. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1896. 213 p.
7-9931 PZ3.J55C0
I02C
— — — Boston, Houghton Mifflin fci9io]
269 p. 10-23633 PZ3.J55C05
1029. The country of the pointed firs, and other
stories. Selected and arr. with a pref. by
Willa Cather. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1954. 320 p. (Doubleday anchor books, A26)
54-3594 PZ3.J55C07
Reprinted in full by arrangement with Houghton
Mifflin from The Best Stories of Sarah Orne Jewett
(q- v.).
1030. Stories and tales. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin [1910] 7 v. An-1493 PU
1031. The best stories of Sarah Orne Jewett. Se-
lected and arr. with a pref. by Willa Cather.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1925. 2 v.
25-13439 PS2130.A2 1925
At head of title: The Mayflower edition.
4:: 1240—60 8
1032. GRACE ELIZABETH KING, 1851 or
1852-1932
The complex culture of New Orleans and its sur-
rounding plantations, in which American, French,
and Negro elements and dialects were mingled, pro-
vided the local color of Miss King's short stories,
novels, and histories. These exploited the same
material used earlier by G. W. Cable and ministered
to the appreciation of Southern regional writing
that developed after the Reconstruction period, fol-
lowing the Civil War.
1033. Tales of a time and place. New York,
Harper, 1892. 303 p.
4-15133 PZ3.K583T
Contents. — Bayou l'Ombre. — Bonne Maman. —
Madrilene; or The festival of the dead. — The
Christmas story of a little church.
1034. Balcony stories. New York, Century, 1893.
245 p. illus. 7-12167 PZ3.K583B
1035. New York, Macmillan, 1925.
296 p. illus. 25-19107 PZ3.K583B6
New edition with new stories.
Contents. — The balcony. — A drama of three. —
La grande demoiselle. — Mimi's marriage. — The
miracle chapel. — The story of a day. — Anne Marie
and Jeanne Marie. — A crippled hope. — "One of
us." — The little convent girl. — Grandmother's
grandmother. — The old lady's restoration. — A deli-
cate affair. — Pupasse. — Grandmamma. — Joe.
1036. New Orleans; the place and the people.
New York, Macmillan, 1895. xxi, 404 p.
illus. I_ 8773 F379.N5K5
1037. Memories of a southern woman of letters.
New York, Macmillan, 1932, 398 p.
32-29668 PS2178.A4 1932
1038. SIDNEY LANIER, 1842-1881
Lanier was a musician as well as a poet.
Since he believed that the laws governing the two
arts were in effect identical, he constancy experi-
mented when writing poetry in an effort to sub-
stantiate his thesis. While he is known best for
"The Marshes of Glynn," "The Song of the Chatta-
hoochee," and other regional poems celebrating the
landscape of his native state, Georgia, his writing
also reveals his strong social consciousness. Poems
having the latter interest include "Corn," in part a
tribute to the dignity of work on the land, and "The
Symphony," a protest against over-commercialism
in America, with its attendant economic ami social
evils. In collaboration with his brother lie also
QO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pioneered in the field of folk poetry written in Negro
dialect and in the "Cracker" dialect used by poor
whites in Georgia. Although Lanier was a Con-
federate veteran, who ardently loved the South and
whose untimely death may be attributed to hard-
ships suffered during the Civil War and the Recon-
struction period, his ultimate loyalty was to the
nation as a whole. He did not glorify the old planta-
tion tradition of his native region, but rather, as in
his essay "The New South" (1880), he acclaimed the
rise of the independent small farmer.
1039. Poems. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1877.
94 p. 4-31 102 PS2205.E77
Made up for the most part of poems previously
published in Lippincott 's Magazine.
1040. Edited by his wife [Mary (Day)
Lanier] with a memorial by William Hayes
Ward. New York, Scribner, 1884. 252 p. CtY
New ed. New York, Scribner,
1891. xli, 260 p. 4-13827 PS2205.E91
New ed. New York, Scribner,
1916. xli, 262 p. 17-1199 PS2205.F16
New ed. New York, Scribner,
1041.
1042.
1043.
1920. xlii, 262 p. 35-33093 PS2205.F20
Bibliography: p. [xlii].
1044. The science of English verse. New York,
Scribner, 1880. xxii, 315 p.
6-24737 PE1505.L2 1880
Exposition of Lanier's theory of prosody and an
expression of the 19th century interest in the inter-
relation of the arts.
1045. ■ New York, Scribner ["1922] xxii,
315 p. illus. (music)
40-23579 PE1505.L2 1922
1046. The centennial edition of the works of Sid-
ney Lanier. [Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1945] 10 v. illus. (inch music), facsims.
(inch music) A46-2793 PS220.F45
General editor: Charles R. Anderson.
Bibliography, compiled by Philip Graham and
Frieda C. Thies: v. 6, p. [377]-4i2.
Partial Contents. — 1. Poems and Poem outlines,
edited by C. R. Anderson. — 2. The science of Eng-
lish verse and Essays on music, edited by P. F.
Baum. — 4. The English novel and Essays on litera-
ture, edited by Clarence Gohdes and Kemp Ma-
lone. — 5. Tiger-lilies and Southern prose, edited by
Garland Greever, assisted by Cecil Abernethy. —
6. Florida and miscellaneous prose, edited by Philip
Graham. — 7-10. Letters, edited by Charles R. An-
derson and Aubrey H. Starke.
First uniform collection of Lanier's poetry and
prose; a scholar's edition that includes much pre-
viously unpublished or uncollected material.
1047. Selected poems. With a pref. by Stark
Young. New York, Scribner, 1947. xvii,
146 p. 47-11957 PS2205.F47
1048. JACK (JOHN GRIFFITH) LONDON,
1876-1916
Jack London read widely, if uncritically, in the
works of Karl Marx, Herbert Spencer, and Friedrich
Nietzsche. From his reading he derived and recon-
ciled various conflicting doctrines concerning social
revolution, biological determinism, and the super-
man. His Marxist ideas he preached as radical
remedies for the social and economic injustice of the
time, which the Progressive Movement of the same
general period was seeking to remedy by legislation.
London's varied experiences in California and else-
where— among other activities were those of an oys-
ter pirate in San Francisco Bay, a sailor, a mill
worker, a seeker for gold in the Klondike, a hobo,
and a war correspondent — gave him rich sources for
the plots and subjects of some 50 books written in
16 years. The Alaskan frontier in particular pro-
vided the locale for some of his most successful short
stories. The spectacular success of his fiction resulted
from the taste of the time, which demanded romantic
adventure stories that he was admirably equipped to
write. Naturalism, however, was also an element
in his work. It is found in the violence and brutal-
ity of his supermen, the struggles of Alaskan Indians
and white adventurers to conquer the Northern
wilderness, and the grim details which abound in a
number of his books. His socialistic tracts, among
them War of the Classes (1905) and Revolution and
Other Essays (1910) explain his conversion to so-
cialism and illustrate his contribution to it as a
cause. These polemical works, as well as his novels
and short stories, have been translated into numer-
ous foreign languages and widely read outside the
United States.
1049. The son of the wolf. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1900. 251 p.
0-2266. PZ3.L846S0
Tales of courage, hardship, and brutality in the
Far North, which won recognition for the author.
1050.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930.
31-26194 PZ3.L846S04
Currently published by Houghton Mifflin in the
Riverside library series.
251 p.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 91
105 1. The call of the wild. New York, Macmillan,
1903. 231 p. illus. 3-16822 PZ3.L846C2
Story of a dog's return to the joys of freedom and
wildness as leader of a wolf pack, recounted with
poetic intensity. It is estimated that a million and
a half copies were sold before 1945, something that
puts the book fairly high among American best-
sellers. Currently available from Macmillan, and
from Pocket Books, Rockefeller Center, New York,
as Pocket Book 593.
1052. The call of the wild and other stories. With
an introd. by Frank Luther Mott. New
York, Macmillan, 1935. xxxv p., 268 p. illus.
(Modern readers' series) 35-27143 PZ3.L846C33
Contents. — The call of the wild. — To build a
fire. — The heathen. — The strength of the strong.
1053. The people of the abyss. New York, Mac-
millan, 1903. xiii, 319 p. illus.
3-26616 HV4088.L8L8 1903a
Issued by the same publisher in 1903 without
illustrations.
A brief visit to England gave London the ma-
terial for attacking the evils of poverty suffered
by underprivileged residents of the city of London;
a book of propaganda for social betterment.
1054. The sea-wolf. New York, Macmillan, 1904.
vii, 366 p. 4~3°593 PZ3-L846Se2
The life, brutalities, and miserable end of a sea
captain who represents London's interest in primi-
tive "supermen" are mingled in this book with
adventure and romance.
Macmillan announces a contemporary edition in
the company's catalog for 1954; available also as
number 325 from Pocket Books, Rockefeller Cen-
ter, New York.
1055. The iron heel. New York, Macmillan, 1907.
xiv, 354 p.
7-3084 PS3523.J46I7 1907 RBD
Novel describing a hypothetical future organiza-
tion of capitalistic monopolies in the United States
into a fascistic government, its final overthrow by
the socialists, and the halcyon period of collectivism
that would result.
1056. Martin Eden. New York, Macmillan, 1909.
411 p. 9-22752 PZ3.L846M
Autobiographical novel revealing the torments
and struggles experienced by a writer in conflict with
conventional social and political standards, particu-
larly with reference to money as the criterion of
success. The ultimate suicide of the hero intensifies
the effect of grimness and tragedy in the book.
1057. New York, Penguin Books, 1946.
346 p. (Penguin books, 587)
46-8611 PZ3.L846Mar4
1058. Lost Face. New York, Macmillan, 1910.
vii, 240 p. 10-6488 PZ3.L846L0
Contents. — Lost Face. — Trust. — To build a
fire. — That Spot. — Flush of Gold. — The passing of
Marcus O'Brien. — The wit of Porportuk.
1059. [Novels and tales] New York, Macmillan,
1925-29. 21 v. NNC
On cover: Sonoma edition.
1060. Best short stories. Garden City, N. Y., Sun
Dial Press, 1945. 3 1 1 p.
45~393° PZ3-L846Be
1061. EDWIN MARKHAM, 1852-1940
A California shepherd and farm laborer who
acquired sufficient education to become a school
teacher, Markham awoke to find himself famous
upon the publication of his "The Man with the Hoe,"
a poem in blank verse inspired by Jean Francois
Millet's painting "L'Homme a la Houe." As a pro-
test against the exploitation of the landless laborer,
the poem became a sort of focus for humanitarian
impulses and the stirrings of social unrest felt in
the United States at the turn of the 19th century.
It was also widely distributed abroad. The tide
poem of Markham's Lincoln and Other Poems
(New York, McClure, Phillips, 1901. 125 p.) eulo-
gizes Abraham Lincoln as the common man cast in
heroic mold.
1062. The man with the hoe, and other poems.
New York, Doubleday & McClure, 1899.
134 p. 99-2566 PS2362.M3 1899
1063. Poems, selected and arr. by Charles L.
Wallis. New York, Harper, 1950. xviii,
198 p. 50-7489 PS2360.A5W3
1064. JOAQUIN MILLER (CINCINNATUS
HINER MILLER), 1839? or i84i?-i9i3
Miller, a flamboyant American with a Bail
for the spectacular, went to the Far West in his teens
and therefore knew, more intimately than most of
his contemporaries, the life of the Pacific Coast in
the heyday of its development after 1849. For
nearly 40 years he was a prolific miscellaneous
writer; but poetry was his chosen form of expression.
Songs of the Sierras (1N71) includes many of his
best poems. His significance comes less Irom the
quality of his writing than because he pioneered as a
Q2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
poet in giving literary expression to the characteris-
tic landscape of a region and to the life of the people
who had pioneered in its development. A readable
narrative that presents Miller's unusual personality
effectively is M. Marion Marberry's biography of the
writer, entitled Splendid Poseur (New York,
Crowell, 1953. 310 p.).
1065. Life amongst the Modocs: unwritten history.
London, R. Bentley, 1873. viii, 400 p.
A22-655 E99.M7M59
Also published under titles: Unwritten History:
Life Amongst the Modocs, Hartford, 1874; Paquita,
the Indian Heroine, Hartford, 1881; My Own Story,
Chicago, 1890; My Life Among the Indians,
Chicago, 1892; and Joaquin Miller's Romantic Life
Amongst the Red Indians, London, 1898.
1066. Joaquin Miller's poems. [Bear ed.] San
Francisco, Whitaker & Ray, 1909-10. 6 v.
9-9533 PS2395.A2 1909
Contents. — v. 1. An introduction, etc. — v. 2.
Songs of the Sierras. — v. 3. Songs of the sunlands. —
v. 4. Songs of Italy and others. — v. 5. Songs of the
American seas. — v. 6. Poetic plays.
1067. Poetical works. Edited with an introd. and
notes by Stuart P. Sherman. New York,
Putnam, 1923. xii, 587 p.
23-7262 PS2395.A2 1923
Selections.
1068. Overland in a covered wagon; an autobiog-
raphy. Edited by Sidney G. Firman, illus.
by Esther M. Mattson. New York, Appleton, 1930.
129 p. 30-31468 PS2398.A2 1930
Appeared originally as the introduction to the
Bear edition of his poems (q. v.). Has been called
the most accurate record he left of his life and work;
has also been called "useful but untrustworthy."
1069. WILLIAM VAUGHN MOODY, 1869-
1910
A humanist and a university teacher of English,
Moody in some of his poems reacted against social,
economic, and political faults in American life to
which his patriotism made him particularly sen-
sitive. Among these poems "An Ode in Time of
Hesitation" and "On a Soldier Fallen in the Philip-
pines" reveal his opposition to imperialism in for-
eign policy. Two prose plays, The Great Divide
(1909) and The Faith Healer (1909) are essentially
dramas of revolt against the Puritan cast of thought
surviving in America and the subservience of the
people to what he considered worn-out social laws
and customs. In the first play the West is made the
symbol of freedom and happiness, the East that of
repression. An unfinished trilogy of symbolic plays
in verse, of which The Fire-Bringer (1904) was de-
signed as the first part, and The Masque of Judg-
ment (1900) as the second, explores the relation of
the soul to God and the ultimate meaning of human
life.
1070. Poems and plays. With an introd. by John
M. Manly. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1912.
2 v. 12-26319 PS2425.A2 1912
Contents. — 1. Poems and poetic dramas. — 2.
Prose plays.
For reprints of selected poems see the entry that
follows immediately. The Great Divide is reprinted
in Thomas H. Dickinson's Chief Contemporary
Dramatists, istser. (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915,
1922), p. 283-315. The Faith Healer appears in
Arthur H. Quinn's Representative American Plays,
7th ed.
1 07 1. Selected poems. Edited by Robert Morss
Lovett. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, ci93i.
xcii, 243 p. (Riverside college classics)
31-8586 PS2426.L6
1072. JOHN MUIR, 1838-1914
Muir, who was born in Scodand, became a
naturalist, whose predominant interests centered
about the geology and botany of America. As a
child he was brought to Wisconsin, where he spent
a laborious youth on his father's farm. Poverty and
hardship, however, did not stifle his increasing joy
in nature. This joy developed into the passion that
inspired his lifework — that of studying and de-
scribing the beauties and wonders of the visible
world, particularly the glaciers, mountains, and
forests of the Far West. It has been said that, like
Robinson Jeffers at a later time, Muir looked at
California and knew he had come home. However,
he traversed other great areas of the United States
on foot, gaining firsthand experiences that he trans-
mitted through books that became popular among
substantial sections of the American people. His
writings concerning the goodly natural heritage of
the country thus became a factor in the growth of
a movement for the conservation of forests and the
development of national parks. In this movement
Muir played a formative part.
1073. The mountains of California. New York,
Century, 1894. xiii, 381 p. illus.
Rc-874 F866.M95
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 93
Illustrated by preliminary sketches 1084.
1074.
and photographs furnished by the author.
New and enl. ed. New York, Century, 191 1. xiv,
389 p. 11-12846 F866.M96
1075. Our national parks. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1901. 370 p. illus.
1-26282 E160.M95
1076. New and enl. ed. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1909. x, 382 p. illus.
9-284 1 1 E160.M954
1077. The Yosemite. New York, Century, 1912.
x, 284 p. illus. 12-11005 F868.Y6M9
1078. The story of my boyhood and youth. With
illus. from sketches by the author. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1913. 293 p.
13-5573 QH31.M9A35
Deals with the writer's experience of frontier and
pioneer life in Wisconsin.
1079. A thousand-mile walk to the Gulf. Large-
paper ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916.
xxvi, 219 p. illus. 16-23580 F215.M95
Posthumously published journal kept while mak-
ing a tour on foot from Indiana to the Gulf of
Mexico; includes details of flora, forests, physical
geography, and inhabitants of the sections through
which he passed. Edited by William F. Bade.
1080. John of the mountains; the unpublished
journals of John Muir. Edited by Linnie
Marsh Wolfe. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938.
xxii, 459 p. illus. 38-27397 QH105.C2M8
108 1. Writings. Sierra ed. [Boston, Houghton,
Mifflin, ci9i5-24] 10 v. illus. CtY
Edited by William Frederic Bade, whose Life
and Letters of John Muir comprise v. 9-10 of this
edition and also of the Manuscript edition.
1082. Manuscript ed. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1916-24. 10 v. illus. NcD
Edited by William Frederic Bade.
1083. The wilderness world of John Muir. With
an introd. and interpretive comments by
Edwin Way Teale; illustrated by Henry B. Kane.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. x\, 533 p.
54-9040 QH31.M9A37
Selections from Muir's writings.
MARY NOAILLES MURFREE.
("CHARLES EGBERT CRADDOCK"),
1850-1922
Originally published in Lippincott's Magazine
and The Atlantic Monthly, Miss Murfree's early
local color stories of life in the Cumberland
and Great Smoky Mountains of Tennessee won an
enthusiastic audience on the score of their original-
ity. These and other stories, subsequently made
available in collections, are characterized by metic-
ulous details of dress, food, and manners, by
elaborate descriptions of scenery, and by compli-
cated spelling used to reproduce the sound of local
dialect. The hardships and loneliness of the seg-
ment of the American people known as moun-
taineers are emphasized.
1085. In the Tennessee mountains, by Charles
Egbert Craddock [pseud.] Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1884. 322 p. 7-4450 PZ3.M943lt
1086.
13th ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1886. 322 p.
34-37791 PZ3.M943lti3
1087. The prophet of the Great Smoky Mountains,
by Charles Egbert Craddock [pseud.] Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1885. 308 p.
4-15 142 PZ3.M943Pr
1088. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ci9i3]
308 p. 16-25045 PZ3.M943Pr4
1089. (BENJAMIN) FRANK(LIN) NORRIS
1870-1902
One of the younger novelists encouraged by
Howells, Norris was influenced by reading Zola
and turned away from realism according to How-
ells' definitions to evolve his own theories, which
led him to pioneer in naturalistic writing. He in-
sisted, however, that only by what he called
"romantic" imagination and insight could the novel-
ist penetrate to depths below surface appearances,
with which realism, he believed, was concerned.
Since the depths included many violent, sordid, and
unlovely elements, he asserted that these also were
fit subjects for "romantic" writing — a doctrine
followed in his own principal works perhaps with
undue fidelity. The author's favorite locale was
California and his favorite period was the contem-
porary. Historically it is interesting to note that
Norris' endorsement of Drciscr*s Sister Carrie won
a publisher for that novel some 12 years before tin-
demand for gentility in fiction declined sufficient!]
to make the book acceptable.
94 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1090. McTeague. New York, Doubleday & Mc-
Clure, 1899. 442 p.
99-1053 PZ3.N792Ma RBD
Called by the author "a story of San Francisco."
The novel portrays the disintegration of character
under influence of financial greed.
1091. Introd. by Henry S. Pancoast.
New York, Boni & Liveright, 19 18. xiv, 442
p. (Modern Library of the world's best books)
23-7733 PZ3.N792Ma3
1092.
Edited with an introd. by Carvel
Collins. New York, Rinehart, 1950. xix,
324 p. (Rinehart editions, 40)
50-12507 PZ3.N792Ma8
Bibliography: p. xix.
1093. The octopus.
1901. 652 p.
[1]) . i-3
Deals with the war
California and the rai
mercy of forces in
continued in The Pit,
and Company, 1947.
New York, Doubleday, Page,
(His The epic of the wheat
1483 PS2472.03 1901 RBD
between the wheat grower in
Iroad trust; shows man at the
society beyond his control;
Latest reissue by Doubleday
1094. The pit. New York, Doubleday, Page,
1903. 421 p. (His The epic of the wheat
[2]) 3-1580 PZ3.N792P
Special presentation edition.
Has as its theme the financial ruin of a Chicago
speculator when the natural law of growth operates
to produce a surplus of wheat. The Wolf, planned
as a third volume in the trilogy but never written,
was to have centered in the export of wheat for
food in famine areas abroad.
1095. New York, Modern Library, 1934.
403 p. (Modern Library of the world's best
books) 34-28425 PZ3.N792P10
1096. The responsibilities of the novelist, and other
literary essays. New York, Doubleday, Page,
1903. 311 p. 3"234ir PN3324.N6
Includes expositions of Norris' theories of novel
writing.
1097. Complete works. New York, Doubleday,
Page, 1903. 7 v.
15-22323 PS2470.A2 1903 RBD
Golden Gate edition.
1098. The Argonaut manuscript limited ed. of
Frank Norris's works. [Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1928] 10 v. illus.
29-5199 PS2470.A2 1928 RBD
1099. THOMAS NELSON PAGE, 1 853-1922
A phenomenon in American life at the close
of the Reconstruction period following the Civil
War was the shift from an attitude of condemnation
of the South, represented in writings by abolitionists,
to sentimentality concerning Southern life and its
typical institutions. Thomas Nelson Page, Ameri-
can ambassador to Italy and biographer of Robert E.
Lee, in his novels, short stories, and essays, roman-
ticized plantation life and the contentment of Negro
slaves under the old regime in Virginia. His artis-
tic ability made his works popular in the North as
well as in the South, even though his purpose
evidendy was to leave on record a favorable por-
trayal of the economic and social order permanently
destroyed by the war and its aftermath.
1 100. In Ole Virginia. New York, Scribner,
1887. 230 p. 7_35797 PZ3.Pi54ln
Subtitle: Marse Chan and other stories.
Contents. — Marse Chan. — "Unc' Edinburgh
drowndin'." — Meh Lady. — Ole 'stracted. — "No haid
pawn." — Polly.
1101. Illustrated by W. T. Smedley, B. W.
Clinedinst, C. S. Reinhart, A. B. Frost, How-
ard Pyle, and A. Castaigne. New York, Scribner,
1896. xi, 275 p. 4-15 145 PZ3.Pi45ln3
1 102.
New York, Scribner, 19 10. 230 p.
12-31300 PZ3.Pi45ln6
1 103. The Old South; essays social and political.
New York, Scribner, 1892. ix, 344 p.
3-31223 F206.P13
Contents. — The Old South. — Authorship in the
South before the war. — Glimpse of life in colonial
Virginia. — Social life in old Virginia before the
war. — Two old colonial places. — The old Virginia
lawyer. — The want of a history of the southern
people. — The Negro question.
1 104. With a new pref., by [the author]
Chautauqua, N. Y., Chautauqua Press, 1919.
viii, 344 p. (Chautauqua home reading series)
19-13150 F206.P135
1 105. Red Rock; a chronicle of Reconstruction.
New York, Scribner, 1898. xv, 584 p.
98-1252 PZ3.Pi45Re
1 106. Novels, stories, sketches and poems. [Plan-
tation ed.] New York, Scribner, 1906-18.
18 v. illus. 6-39735 PS2510.F06
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 95
1 107. DAVID GRAHAM PHILLIPS, 1867-1911
For more than a decade Phillips had been a
successful journalist, first with the New Yor1{ Sun,
then with the New Yor\ World, when free-lance
work placed him among the "muckrakers." This
term was applied to various writers who were seek-
ing to arouse the country to economic, political, and
social abuses that had crept into American life with
the spread of industrialism and the growing power
of financial tycoons. Between 1901 and 191 1,
Phillips wrote more than 20 novels. The Deluge
(1905) dealt with the manipulation of the stock
market by Wall Street magnates; The Plum Tree
(1905) had as its theme the machinations of poli-
ticians; and Susan Lennox: Her Fall and Rise,
posthumously published in 1917, revealed the au-
thor's concern about marital problems and the
relations of the sexes in American society. Since
all of his novels were written to expose and reform
wrongs, rather than as literature, they are significant
chiefly because they are documents of the social
movements of his period.
1 108. The great god Success, a novel by J. Graham
[pseud.] New York, Stokes, 1901, 299 p.
1-24902 PZ3.P543Gre
Has as its theme the gradual corruption of an
honest and able journalist by ambition for power
and money.
1 109. The second generation. New York, Apple-
ton, 1907. 334 p. 7-4160 PZ3.P543Se
Advances the idea that a rich man's children de-
generate under the expectation of their inheritance,
but may be restored if forced to earn their own
living.
1110.
New York, Appleton, 19 19. 334 p.
20-16461 PZ3-P543Se9
mi. WILLIAM SYDNEY PORTER ("O.
HENRY"), 1862-1910
An author said to have written as many as 65
short stories in one year, O. Henry's mild irony,
sentiment, pathos, and humor were expressed in
simple vernacular language, frequently interlarded
with the slang of the day. He achieved the effects
for which he is best known by applying a few
formulas to produce unexpected, or trick, endings
of human-interest stories dealing with characters as
diverse as adventurers in Latin America, Texas
ranches, and (preferably) clerks occupying back
bedrooms in New York lodging houses. As a
raconteur might tell a story in passing, he wrote of
comic or tragic episodes in the lives of these other-
wise ordinary people. At a time when enthusiasm
for the short story was at its height in America, his
work was enormously popular. Afterwards, the
estimates of his characterizations and thought de-
clined under the rigorous methods of criticism
developed in the contemporary period. A recent
study of his life and work is E. Hudson Long's
O. Henry (Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1949. 158 p.).
1 1 12. Cabbages and kings, by O. Henry [pseud.]
New York, McClure, Phillips, 1904. 344 p.
4-32750 PZ3.P835C
First published collection of the author's stories.
These are concerned with Latin America.
1 1 13. New York, Penguin Books, 1946.
184 p. (Penguin books, 595)
47-18969 PZ3.P835C15
1 1 14. The four million. New York, McClure,
Phillips, 1906. 261 p.
6-12856 PZ3.P835F
A collection of the New York stories that in-
cludes two of the best known of all the author's
stories: "The Gift of the Magi"; and "The Fur-
nished Room."
1 1 15. With a note by Burges Johnson.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1925.
xix, 215 p. 25-21919 PZ3.P835F14
At head of tide: O. Henry biographical edition.
1 1 16. The voice of the city; further stories of the
four million. New York, McClure, 1908.
243 p. 8-17555 PZ3.P835V
Republished from the New Yorf{ World and
Ainslee's Magazine.
1 1 17. With a note by Archibald Sessions.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Paqe, 1925.
xii, 222 p. 25-21593 PZ3.P835V11
At head of tide: O. Henry biographical edition.
1 1 18. The voice of the city and other stories. A
selection, with an introd., by Clifton Fadi-
man; with illus. by George Grosz. New York,
Limited Editions Club, 1935. xi, 220 p.
35-1 1910 PS2649.P5V6 1935 RBD
1 1 19. Options. New York, Harper, 1909. 323 p.
9-27747 PZ3.P735OP
1 120. With a note by Maximilian Foster.
Garden City, N. Y., Doublcdnv, Page, i>)?s.
ix, 259 p. 25-23723 PZ3.P835OPIO
At head of title: O. Henry biographical edition.
g6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1 121. Complete writings. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Page, 1917. 14 v. illus.
17-31460 PS2649.P5 1917
Edition de luxe.
1 122. Complete works. Foreword by Harry Han-
sen. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953.
2 v. (xiii, 1692 p.) 53-6098 PS2649.P5 1953
1 123. Selected stories. Edited by C. Alphonso
Smith. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Page, 1922. xvi, 225 p. 22-11515 PZ3.P835Sel
1 124. Best short stories. Selected, and with an
introd., by Bennett A. Cerf and Van H.
Cartmell. New York, Modern Library, 1945. x,
338 p. (Modern Library of the world's best books)
45-35106 PZ3.P835Be2
1 125. The pocket book of O. Henry [pseud.] thirty
short stories, edited and with an introd. by
Harry Hansen. New York, Pocket Books [1948]
xii, 291 p. (Pocket book 510)
48-9815 PZ3.P835P0
1 126. JAMES WHITCOMB RILEY, 1 849-1 91 6
After "Pike" speech was reproduced effec-
tively by John Hay and Bret Harte in their folk
ballads, dialect verses attained a distinct vogue in the
United States. The most popular writer in this
genre was Riley, whose The Old Swimmin '-Hole
and 'Leven More Poems (1883) included pieces first
published in the Indianapolis Journal while the
writer was on the staff of that newspaper. Not all
of his poems were written in dialect, but the most
distinctive ones are expressed in an accurate repro-
duction of the Hoosier speech of his native Indiana.
They are poems of sentiment, humor, and pathos
that celebrate simple themes drawn from childhood,
nature, farm life, and neighborliness among plain
people in the Middle West. "When the Frost is on
the Punkin," "Little Orphant Annie," and "The
Old Man and Jim" are typical of individual poems
immediately beloved by a large public, for whom
they had the appeal of folk ballads. Riley's reputa-
tion was enhanced by his frequent appearance as a
reader of his own poems with the humorous lec-
turer, "Bill" Nye. During the latter part of the
19th century sophisticated as well as less critical
audiences delighted in this form of entertainment,
which Mark Twain elevated to an art.
1 127. Poems and prose sketches. [Homestead
ed.] New York, Scribner, 1897-1914. 16
v. (The works of James Whitcomb Riley)
4-13835 PS2700.E97
Among the volumes reissued in this edition those
most popular since their first publication include
the following: Ajterwhiles (1887); Rhymes of
Childhood (1890); and Poems Here at Home
(1893).
1 128. Complete works, in which the poems, includ-
ing a number heretofore unpublished, are arr.
in the order in which they were written, together
with photographs, bibliographic notes and a life
sketch of the author. Collected and edited by
Edmund Henry Eitel. Biographical ed. Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1913. 6 v.
13-26127 PS2701.E5
Bibliography: v. 6, p. [4091-466.
1 129. Complete works, including poems and prose
sketches, many of which have not hereto-
fore been published . . . [Memorial ed.] Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1916. 10 v. (2801 p.) illus.
16-25215 PS2700.F16
1 130. Complete poetical works. Pref. by Donald
Culross Peattie. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Mer-
rill, 1937. xxix, 886 p. 38-8805 PS2700.F37
Reprint of a reissue of the Biographical edition.
1 13 1. De luxe ed. New York, Garden
City Pub. Co., 1941. xxix, 886 p.
4 1-5 1 66 1 PS2700.F41
Music: p. 656-657.
A contemporary survey of Riley's place in Ameri-
can literature is provided in the reference that
follows.
1 132. Nolan, Jeannette (Covert), Horace Gregory,
and James T. Farrell. Poet of the people;
an evaluation of James Whitcomb Riley. Bloom-
ington, Indiana University Press, 195 1. 106 p.
51-3048 PS2706.N6
Contents. — Riley as a children's poet, by J. C.
Nolan. — James Whitcomb Riley, a Victorian Amer-
ican, by H. Gregory. — The frontier and James Whit-
comb Riley, by J. T. Farrell.
Essays presented originally as a symposium at
Indiana University, in 1949, during the centennial
celebration of Riley's birth. Without forgetting the
significance in the American scene of ballads and
folk poetry and Riley's place in that connection, the
essayists were asked to separate the traditions and
sentiments surrounding the man from the merits
of his work as a poet.
1 133. IRWIN RUSSELL, 1853-1879
A minor but authentic poet born in Missis-
sippi, Russell is known for his early use for literary
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 97
purposes of Negro themes and dialect, through
which he showed a sympathetic awareness of Negro
character and speech.
1 134. Poems. New-York, Century [ci888] xi,
109 p. 1 1— 18675 PS2740.A2 1888
Introduction by Joel Chandler Harris.
Lacks some nine poems included in the collection
described in the following entry.
1 135. Christmas-night in the quarters, and other
poems. With an introd. by Joel Chandler
Harris, and an historical sketch by Maurice Gar-
land Fulton. New York, Century, 1917. xxxiv,
182 p. illus. 17-29251 PS2740.A2 1917
1 136. CHARLES DUDLEY WARNER, 1829-
1900
Warner has been called a transitional figure in
American literature. When he wrote of his boy-
hood, or about his travels in Europe, the Orient, and
the United States, or described in familiar essays the
joys of nature and a garden, his style was reminiscent
of Washington Irving's mellowness and grace.
Over the years, however, as the hard-working editor
of the Hartford Courant, he developed for other
types of writing a vigorous, natural journalistic style
suited to the spirit of the late 19th century. His
literary criticism, advocating a distinctly American
approach, was collected in such volumes as The
Relation of Literature to Life (1896) and Fashions
in Literature (1902). He expressed a conservative
Northern view; nevertheless he used his connection
with Harper's Magazine to find a medium of pub-
lication for minor Southern authors, such as Grace
King. Social criticism in his work is confined
chiefly to his novels. One of these, The Gilded Age
(1873), was written in collaboration with S. L.
Clemens (q. v.). Warner made a genuine contri-
bution to the history of American literature through
his general editorship of the first series entitled
"American Men of Letters," for which he wrote the
volume on Washington Irving, and to literary appre-
ciation in general through his editorial work on the
first edition of the Library of the World's Best
Literature (New York, Peale & Hill [ci89<5-c97]
30 v.).
1 137. My summer in a garden. Boston, Fields,
Osgood, 1 87 1. xii, 183 p.
22-10088 PS3152.M6 1871
Includes an introductory letter by Henry Ward
Beecher.
1 139. Being a boy. Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1878.
vi, 244P. illus.
CA12-1071 PS3152.B4 1878
1 140.
vi, 244 p. illus.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ci905]
5-33975 PS3152.B4 1905
1141.
1 138. With illus. by F. O. C. Darley.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1898. 212 p.
98-1695 PS3152.M6 1898
Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ci9i9]
186 p. (The Riverside literature series)
38-29713 PS3152.B4 1919
This edition is without the illustrations by Clifton
Johnson.
1 142. A little journey in the world. New York,
Harper, 1889. 396 p.
8-33715 PZ3.W243L
Originally published in Harper's Monthly, as a
serial, in 1888; first of a trilogy of novels that in-
cludes also The Golden House (1895) and That
Fortune (1899), all of which deal with the temp-
tations and difficulties attendant upon the acqui-
sition, possession, and loss of wealth.
1 143. New York, Harper, 1894. 396 p.
(Harper's Franklin Square library, no. 747)
13-12913 PZ3.W243L2
1 144. Complete writings. [Backlog ed. Edited by-
Thomas R. Lounsbury] Hartford, Conn.,
American Pub. Co., 1904. 15 v. illus.
4-32205 PS3150.A2 1904
1 145. OWEN WISTER, 1860-1938
A Pennsylvania-born graduate of Harvard
University, Wister utilized several trips West in
search of health to provide him with material for
his stories of cowpunchers, combined in Lin McLean
(1898), and also used for his later successful novel,
The Virginian. Both books illustrated the repeated
return of American writers to themes drawn from
pioneer or rugged life in the West, and also capital-
ized on an interest in the strenuous life that was
abroad in the land during the presidency of Theo-
dore Roosevelt. Mr. Wister's strong, plain heroes
and their refined brides of the 1870's and 1880's,
surrounded by dangers and inevitable adventures in
the great open spaces of the Wyoming cattle coun-
try of that time, appealed to the American taste of
the period for novels of action that were at the same
time highly romantic. A survival of this int< resl
may be seen in the contemporary popularity of the
"western." Lady Baltimore (1906), a novel of so-
ciety in Charleston, South Carolina, about the turn
of the 19th century, is treated with a light touch
and sympathetic delicacy.
98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1 146. The Virginian; a horseman of the plains.
New York, Macmillan, 1902. xiii, 504 p.
2-1443 1 PZ3.W768V
1 147.
New ed. With . . . drawings from
western scenes by Frederic Remington.
New York, Macmillan, 191 1. xv, 506 p.
1 1-264 1 2 PZ3.W768V10
1 148.
With an introd. by Struthers Burt
and illus. by William Meyers. Los Angeles,
Printed for members of the Limited Editions Club
by the Plantin Press, 1951. xix, 437 p.
5I~37m PS3345-V5 .J95i RED
For a current publication of The Virginian see
the New pocket classics series, issued by Macmillan.
1 149. CONSTANCE FENIMORE WOOLSON,
1 840-1 894
Following the pattern set by her great-uncle,
James Fenimore Cooper, Miss Woolson called her
shorter pieces "sketches." They are, in fact, early
and exceptionally realistic local color stories, chiefly
about life around the Great Lakes (in Ohio and
Michigan) and in the South, where the writer be-
came familiar with characteristic localities in
Florida, the Carolinas, and Virginia. Her work
was welcomed by editors of the best periodicals at
the time that Bret Harte's stories were in vogue.
It won sufficient recognition to be republished later
in collections and has given her a secure place
among regional writers of the 1870's and 1880's.
Several novels, written after she left the United
States to live in Italy, are increasingly concerned
with psychological problems resulting from the
interplay of character and circumstance, an interest
that Miss Woolson may have developed from her
mentor, Henry James.
1 150. Castle Nowhere: lake-country sketches.
Boston, J. R. Osgood, 1875. 386 p.
8-37232 PZ3.W888C
1 151. Rodman the keeper: southern sketches.
New York, Appleton, 1880. 339 p.
8-37226 PZ3.W888R
Originally published in The Atlantic Monthly,
Appletons' Journal, and other periodicals; stories of
the South under Reconstruction. Written with
sympathy but also objectivity by a Northerner, they
are said to have influenced the development in the
North of interest in Southern literature.
1 152. Constance Fenimore Woolson; arr. and
edited by Clare Benedict. London, Ellis,
1932. xvi, 560 p. illus 32-22803 PS3360.A5B4
Bibliography begun by the author and completed
by the editor: p. 550-553.
A reprint of volume 2 of Clare Benedict's larger
work, Five Generations (London, Ellis [1930?] 3
v.). Includes part of an article dealing with Miss
Woolson, taken from Henry James' Partial Portraits
(1888), together with extracts from her correspond-
ence, articles, and miscellaneous writings. In Ap-
pendix A, p. 413-549, is found a selection of her
poems and stories.
E. The First World War and the Great Depression (1915-1939)
Between April 191J and November 1918, some
two million soldiers went to Europe to ta\e their
country's part in a world war. The aftermath of
that war was a decade of inflated prosperity lead-
ing to an orgy of speculation on the stoc\ market,
which in turn was followed by a depression so
severe as to create an army of unemployed that num-
bered, according to various estimates, between 12
and 15 million former workers. It is not surprising
that war and financial collapse, twin pea\s of dis-
aster, should mar\ the period as one in which
frustration, disillusionment, pessimism, and cyni-
cism colored American attitudes. No more sur-
prising is the fact that each crisis colored the period
in its own way, so that, except for purposes of
convenience, it might be regarded legitimately as
two periods. First, with the rapidly accelerating
tempo of life in the twenties, a decade became an
age, the "Jazz Age," filled with speed, excitement,
and self-expression. These characteristic manifes-
tations of the spirit of the time inevitably were
reflected in literature. But later when the depres-
sion struc\, American writing too\ on an increas-
ingly serious tone and many writers accepted the
theory that all literature should have a message for
a world that was in sore trouble. Seriousness and
social reform became the watchwords.
Although the messages to be found in much of
the best writing done in the 19th century in the
United States were still applicable, and were in fact
rediscovered and reiterated by the not always origi-
nal moderns, the "genteel" boo\ was vigorously
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 99
rejected on the score of prudery and hypocrisy. A
generation, in which emotions of fear and uncer-
tainty engendered by war had been fostered by eco-
nomic misfortune, found little that was congenial in
the Puritan heritage of respectability and gentility
founded on solid prosperity. Observation of crass
materialism and injustices to minority or under-
privileged groups gave rise to strong social indigna-
tion. A climate of liberal opinion arose that was
favorable to social and economic reforms instituted
within the period.
During the same span of time the country also
felt an impact from the acceleration of other forces
already operating to change its way of life. Science
and invention had replaced horses with horsepower,
and registered automobiles in the United States rose
to a number nearly equal to one for every five Amer-
icans. The populace, so far as it was able, toof^ to
the roads. These roads in turn were extended and
improved to carry the constantly increasing volume
of traffic to which the restlessness of the "Jazz Age"
contributed. When distances were too great to
mal{e motoring feasible, communication across state
and national boundaries was made possible by a
growing system of telephones. Radio programs
broadcast identical information and entertainment
over wide areas. The powerful motion picture in-
dustry, offering its wares in local theaters from one
end of the country to another, created a \md of mass
sophistication that had its own effects on manners,
morals, and customs, as did the inexpensive maga-
zines sold across the land. By the end of the period,
travel by airplane had become as common as travel
by automobile had been at its beginning. All these
facilities for mobility and easy communication of
ideas contributed greatly to a modification of the sec-
tionalism that had up to this time been present in
American culture. Provincialism also decreased
with the emergence of the United States as a great
power among the nations of the world. Reciprocity
of esthetic and philosophical ideas between Europe
and America increased, with notable effects on
American literature.
The growing complexity of American life at this
time had its counterpart in the literature produced
in the years between the coming of the First ]['orld
War and the end of the country's worst depression.
The ever-present struggle of man with his environ-
ment and his dissatisfaction with the state of being
"a stranger and afraid, in a world I never made"
found their most complete expression in fiction.
Realism, so characteristic of novels and stories writ-
ten in the preceding period, continued as a prevail-
ing trend, which, however, tended to shade into
pessimistic, behavioristic naturalism, exemplified
by the wor\ of Theodore Dreiser and fames T. Far-
rell, or the more complex, "Freudian" naturalism
of Sherwood Anderson or William Faulkner. Social
criticism as a factor in literature became a prime
force in the thirties, when almost all literature was
for a while -judged in terms of its message and social
value. All this is not to say, however, that writing
according to an older and more conventional pattern
did not win wide approval during the period.
Regionalism, with new social and spiritual over-
tones, was present in the novels of Ellen Glasgow
and Willa Cather. Historical novels portraying
America's past continued to attract enthusiastic audi-
ences and became, with the trend toward more and
more realism, frequently the product of research as
careful as that traditionally lavished only on defini-
tive history.
Among the most startling literary developments
of a period in which so many men were ill at ease
was the rebirth of interest in the art of poetry,
despite its decline in market sales. Here again, as in
the case of fiction, experimentation and to some ex-
tent realism were at the heart of the revival; but
experimentation as well as realism took many forms
and progressed through various degrees: Edwin
Arlington Robinson and Robert Frost, using conserv-
ative poetic forms for freshly realistic and occasion-
ally hardbitten portraits and utterances, which
assumed, particularly in the wor\ of Frost, symbolic
dimensions; Carl Sandburg, Vachel Lindsay, and
Edgar Lee Masters, each with a new rhythm and a
different slant on "the American Dream"; Ezra
Pound, T. S. Eliot, Wallace Stevens, E. E. Cunt-
mings, and William Carlos Williams, in each of
whom experimentalism reached a highly personal
poetic style in an effort to express the individual hu-
man condition in its universal proportions and sig-
nificance. This experimental movement, with its
numerous cross-currents of schools, fostered by a suc-
cession of "little magazines" which frequently repre-
sented also new philosophical, social, and economic
views, developed a surprising number of poets.
These joined the novelists in making themselves felt
as social critics no less than as creative artists. I! 'hat-
ever value time may place eventually on the work
of poets writing in this era, the fact remains that it
constitutes a second renaissance of poetry in the
development of American literature.
Emphasis inevitably has been placed on prose fic-
tion and poetry, in which much of the best work
of the period was done. However, Eugene O'Neill,
America's leading playwright, wrote all but a very
few of his plays during these years, and a number
of other playwrights produced workj of literary
as well as theatrical distinction. Outstanding work
in other forms also was produced, notably in h\
the general essay, and criticism, which now i
the field as literature in its own right. Criticism
has not been represented in this section, except when
100 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the author has been included for his other wor\,
but critical writings have received detailed treat-
ment in the chapter devoted to Literary History and
Criticism.
1 153. LEONIE ADAMS, 1899-
As a lyric poet Miss Adams has won im-
mediate and continuing recognition from critics for
her mastery of technical poetic forms, new and old;
for her sensitive response to nature; and for the
mystical quality in her perceptions.
1 154. Poems: a selection. New York, Funk &
Wagnalls, 1954. 128 p.
54-6356 PS3501.D285A6 1954
Part II of this volume (p. 52-124) includes poems
previously published in the poet's earlier works:
Those Not Elect (1925) and High Falcon (1929).
1 155. SAMUEL HOPKINS ADAMS, 1871-
Adams is probably best known for his fiction,
much of which depicts 19th-century life in the Erie
Canal area of New York State. Conservative and
"victorian" in approach, as in the novel Siege ( 1924),
he has often tried to infuse a degree of modernism
in his work, as in Plunder (1948), a fictional-
political commentary which is a satirical account, in
a highly conversadonal style, about a crude, star-
spangled-American demagogue who almost becomes
dictator. He has also written short stories, as in
From a Bench in Our Square (1922), which deals
with New York City, where he was for some time
a journalist. He has also published a number of
biographies, works of history, commentary, and
juvenile books. He was early associated with the
muckraking movement and wrote The Great
American Fraud (1906, 1905), an influential revela-
tion of medical quackery at the turn of the century.
His later work tends to be pervaded by a gentle
humor.
1 156. Revelry. New York, Boni & Liveright,
1926. 318 p. 26-21303 PZ3.A217R.e2
A novel about the political corruption in Wash-
ington during the Harding administration.
1 157. Canal town. New York, Random House,
1944. 465 p. 44-40112 PZ3-A2i7Can
A novel evoking Palmyra, N. Y., in 1820.
1 158. Banner by the wayside. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1947. 442 p.
47-1795 PZ3.A2i7Ban
A novel centering about a group of entertainers
touring the Erie Canal area in the mid-nineteenth
century.
1 159. Sunrise to sunset. New York, Random
House, 1950. 373 p.
50-7919 PZ3.A217SV
A novel using a setting in and around the cotton
mills of Troy, New York, in the 1830's.
1 160. Grandfather stories. New York, Random
House, 1955. 312 p.
55-6657 PZ3.A2i7Gr
A retelling of memories of the Erie Canal coun-
try as told to the author by his grandfathers; depicts
early 19th-century New York State.
1 161. CONRAD POTTER AIKEN, 1889-
Poet, novelist, short story writer, and critic.
Conrad Aiken's work has been influenced by Freud-
ian concepts, the writings of James Joyce, and the
stream-of-consciousness technique in general. His
novels in particular illustrate these influences. His
poetry is characterized by a melodic quality indic-
ative of his interest in the relation between poetry
and music. In 1930 he received the Pulitzer prize
for poetry for his Selected Poems (1929).
1 162. Blue voyage. New York, Scribner, 1927.
318 p. 27-15974 PZ3.A2912BI
Using the stream-of-consciousness technique,
Aiken has in this novel produced a study of life as
presented to the mind of a writer on a transatlantic
liner.
1 163. Great circle. New York, Scribner, 1933.
335 p. 33-I2°47 PZ3.A29i2Gr
A psychological novel centering about a man
whose wife has been having a love affair with his
friend. Meetings with a psychoanalyst are intro-
duced to trace the origin of the main character's
present situation.
1 164. Short stories. New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce, 1950. 416 p.
50-9750 PZ3.A29i2Sh
1 1 65. Ushant, an essay. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1952. 365 p.
52-9071 PS3501.I5Z53
A psychoanalytic autobiography of the poet, re-
constructed in a series of flashbacks.
1 166. Collected poems. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 895 p.
53-9180 PS4501.I5A17 1953
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 101
This collection contains those poems which Aiken
wished to preserve. They are arranged approxi-
mately in order of composition, rather than of pub-
lication. The poems selected are from previous
volumes such as Turns and Movies (1916), Punch:
The Immortal Liar (1921), John Deth, a Meta-
physical Legend ( 1930), The Coming Forth by Day
of Osiris Jones (1931), Preludes for Memnon
(1931), Landscape West of Eden (1934), Time in
the Roc\ (1936), And in the Human Heart (1940),
Brownstone Eclogues (1942), The Soldier (1944),
The Kid (1947), and The Divine Pilgrim (1949).
1 167. HERVEY ALLEN, 1 889-1949
Diarist and fiction writer of World War I,
and a leader among those who fostered a rebirth
of interest in the art of poetry in the South, Mr.
Allen was also the author of the scholarly biography,
lsrafel; the Life and Times of Edgar Allan Poe
(1926). He is better known, however, for his in-
fluence in advancing the vogue of the historical
novel in America.
1 1 68. Carolina chansons; legends of the low
country, by Du Bose Heyward and Hervey
Allen. New York, Macmillan, 1922. 131 p.
22-24847 PS3515.E98C3 1922
1 169. Anthony Adverse; decorations by Alia Mc-
Nab. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1933.
1224 p. 33—27189 PZ3-A4264An
Picaresque novel which spans the life of the hero
in Europe, Africa, and America, from 1775 to 1825;
some two million copies have been sold.
1 170. Toward the flame; a war diary. New York,
Farrar & Rinehart, 1934. 282 p.
34-4704 D570.9.A53 1934
1 171. The forest and the fort. New York, Farrar
& Rinehart, 1943. 344 p.
43—4731 PZ3.A4264F0
First of three parts of a historical novel planned
in five parts. The series, left incomplete by the
author's death, was, with a fragment of the fourth
part, edited by Julie Eidesheim and published as
The City in the Dawn (1950). Its theme is 18th-
century pioneer life on the American frontier.
1 1 72. MAXWELL ANDERSON, 1888-
This dramatist's interests vary from satiriz-
ing political corruption in the United States, as in
Both Your Houses (1933), which won the Pulitzer
prize, to recreating for American audiences epi-
sodes in their British and European heritage, as in
Elizabeth the Queen (1930), Mary of Scotland
(1933), and Joan of Lorraine (1946; rev. ed. 1947).
One of the more important influences of some
thirty-odd plays he has written in as many years
is the interest they have created in the use of poetry
as a dramatic medium on the stage.
1 173. Winterset; a play in three acts. Washington,
Anderson House, 1935. 134 p.
35-27431 PS3501.N256W5 1935a
Deals with the problem of justice and reflects a
more universal aspect of his earlier interest in the
Sacco-Vanzetti case, which inspired his Gods of the
Lightning (1928).
1 174. Eleven verse plays, 1929-1939. [New
York] Harcourt, Brace, 1940. [1321] p.
40-27679 PS3501.N256 1940
Contents. — Elizabeth the queen. — Night over
Taos. — Mary of Scotland. — Valley Forge. — Winter-
set. — The Wingless victory. — High Tor. — The
masque of kings. — The feast of ortolans. — Second
overture. — Key Largo.
1 175. Off Broadway. New York, Sloane, 1947.
91 p. 47-30369 PN2021.A54
Collection of critical essays and lectures; see par-
ticularly "Poetry in the Theater," p. 47-54, and
"The Uses of Poetry," p. 87-91, for Mr. Anderson's
theories concerning the place of poetry in the con-
temporary theater.
1 176. Barefoot in Athens. New York, Sloane,
1951. 101 p. 51-13750 PS3501.N256B27
Freedom of opinion in relation to democracy, the
theme of the play, gives timeliness to this dramatic
presentation of the life and death of Socrates at the
end of the fifth century, B. C, in Athens.
1 177. Bad seed; a play in two acts. The drama-
tization of William March's novel, The bad
seed. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1955. 96 p.
55-7822 PS3505.A53157B36
William March is the pseudonym of William Ed-
ward March Campbell (1893-1954), an Alabama
author of short stories and novels.
1 178. SHERWOOD ANDERSON, 1 876-1 941
Short stories, novels, and autobiographical
works, most successful when dealing with small-
town life in Ohio, ca. 1880-1910, were used by the
author to express his pessimism concerning the fate
of simple people, adjusted to primitive conditions
derived from the pioneer period in rural America,
who arc defeated or frustrated by forces at work in a
society rapidly becoming industrialized. Ander
102 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
son's work is characterized by frankness of expres-
sion in advance of his time, by a mystical faith in
the life force in man, and by introspection almost
psychoanalytical in quality.
1 179. Winesburg, Ohio. New York, Huebsch,
1919. 303 p. 19-17477 PZ3.A55Win
Short stories.
1180. Poor white; a novel. New York, Huebsch,
1920. 371 p. 20-27471 PZ3.A55P0
PS3501.N4P6
1181. The triumph of the egg; a book of impres-
sions from American life in tales and poems.
New York, Huebsch, 1921. 269 p.
21-21097 PZ3.A55Tr
1 1 82. A story teller's story; the tale of an Ameri-
can writer's journey through his own
imaginative world and through the world of facts,
with many of his experiences and impressions among
other writers — told in many notes — in four books —
and an epilogue. New York, Huebsch, 1924.
442 p. 24-27699 PS3501.N4Z5
1 1 83. Dark laughter. New York, Boni & Live-
right, 1925. 319 p. 25-20829 PZ3.A55Da
The tide refers to the vital laughter of the un-
repressed Negroes in the background of this novel
about sterility and frustration in the machine age.
This story of the Midwest is written with a stream-
of-consciousness technique.
1 184. Tar, a Midwest childhood. New York,
Boni & Liveright, 1926. 346 p.
26-22222 PS3501.N4Z52
1 1 85. The portable Sherwood Anderson, edited,
and with an introd., by Horace Gregory.
New York, Viking Press, 1949. 631 p. (The
Viking portable library)
49-856 PS3501.N4A6 1949
Includes among numerous selections Death in the
Woods (1933), p. 532-548, considered by the editor
of this collection the masterpiece among Anderson's
short stones.
1 1 86. Sherwood Anderson's memoirs. [New
York] Harcourt, Brace, 1942. 507 p.
42-11377 PS3501.N4Z49
1 1 87. Letters; selected and edited with an introd.
and notes by Howard Mumford Jones, in
association with Walter B. Rideout. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1953. 479 p. 52-12649 PS3501.N4Z54
1 1 88. Howe, Irving. Sherwood Anderson. New
York, Sloane, 1951. xiii, 271 p. (The
American men of letters series)
51-9927 PS3501.N4Z65
"Bibliography": p. 257-260.
1 1 89. Schevill, James Erwin. Sherwood Ander-
son, his life and work. [Denver] University
of Denver Press, 195 1, xvi, 360 p. illus.
51-10225 PS3501.N4Z8
Bibliography: p. 356-357.
1 190. SHALOM ASCH, 1880-
Asch is a Polish-born commentator on Jewish
life and problems. His cycle of novels on Biblical
themes — The Nazarene (1939), The Apostle
(1943), Mary (1949), and The Prophet (1955)—
has enjoyed wide circulation in the United States,
where the author, although long a naturalized
citizen, continues to write in Yiddish and to have
his books translated for the American audience.
One of his recurring themes, illustrated by the titles
below, is the adjustment of Jewish immigrants to
the new environment encountered in the United
States, usually in an urban setting such as New
York City. The author has also dealt with prob-
lems of Jewish life abroad, as in Three Cities (1933)*
a trilogy dealing with Jews in Russia.
1 191. The mother; authorized translations by Elsa
Krauch. New York, Putnam, 1937. 295 p.
37-28739 PZ3.A798M06
An earlier version was published in 1930 in a
translation by Nathan Ausiibel.
1 192. Three novels: Uncle Moses, Chaitn Led-
erer's return, Judge not — ; translation by
Elsa Krauch. New York, Putnam, 1938. 176, 116,
127 p. 38-29527 PZ3.A798Thr
Written originally between 1916 and 1923.
1 193. East River, a novel. Translation by A. H.
Gross. New York, Putnam, 1946. 438 p.
46-7365 PZ3-A798Eas
1 194. A passage in the night. New York, Put-
nam, 1953. 367 p. 53-8146 PZ3.A798Pas
1 195. Lieberman, Herman. The Christianity of
Sholem Asch, an appraisal from the Jewish
viewpoint. [From the Yiddish, by Abraham Bur-
stein] New York, Philosophical Library, 1953.
276 p. 53-H659 PJ5129.A8Z783
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO3
1 196. MARY (HUNTER) AUSTIN, 1 868-1934
A writer with a strong local interest in the
Indian culture of the Southwest, particularly in
California and New Mexico, Mrs. Austin left an
autobiographical record of her varied literary career
in Earth Horizon (1932). The American Rhythm
(1923, enl. ed., 1930) expounds her idea that the
American environment and way of life determine
the verse forms suited to poems written in the
United States. It includes also an anthology of her
"re-expressions" of native Indian verse.
1 197. The land of little rain. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1903. 280 p. 3-26358 F786.A93
Short stories.
1 198. One-smoke stories. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1934. 294 p.
34-27071 PZ3A93730n
1 199. PHILIP BARRY, 1896-1949
While Barry's recognized genre was that of
the social comedy, in which he had numerous suc-
cesses on the stage, his plays also provide penetrating
studies of marriage as an institution, the relation of
parents to children, and other important aspects of
American family life. Hotel Universe (1930), a
symbolic play on the mystic power of goodness in a
man considered by the world to be insane, is one of
his most serious dramatic works.
1200. Holiday, a comedy in three acts. New York,
S. French, 1929. 205 p.
29-7881 PS3503.A648H6 1929
1201. The animal kingdom, a comedy. New
York, S. French, 1932. 198 p.
32-17483 PS3503.A648A8 1932
1202. The Philadelphia story; a comedy in three
acts. New York, Coward-McCann, 1939.
206 p. 40-1 1 146 PS3503.A648P5 1939a
1203. Second threshold; with revisions and a pref.
by Robert E. Sherwood. New York, Harper,
1951. 132 p. 51-10938 PS3503.A648S4 1951
A play.
1204. SAMUEL NATHANIEL BEHRMAN,
1893-
Behrman began by writing "pure" comedy.
Faced by the turmoil of the thirties, he began in his
plays to explore the possibility of comedy in our
time and produced comedies reflecting the more
serious issues of the period. In recent years he has
adapted a number of foreign plays, written rem-
iniscences of his childhood in Worcester, Massa-
chusetts, and he has also published a humorous,
perceptive biography of an art dealer: Duveen
(1952).
1205. Biography, a comedy. New York, Farrar
& Rinehart, 1933. 241 p.
33-4065 PS3503.E37B5 1933
1206. Three plays: Seiena Blandish, Meteor, The
second man. New York, Farrar & Rinehart,
1934- 355 P- 34-6070 PS3503-E37T5 *934
1207. Rain from heaven, a play in three acts. New
York, Random House, 1935. 250 p.
35-2998 PS3503.E37R3 1935
1208. End of summer. New York, Random
House, 1936. 256 p.
36-7652 PS3503.E37E6 1936
1209. No time for comedy. New York, Random
House, 1939. 216 p.
39-14726 PS3503.E37N6 1939
1210. The Talley method, a play in three acts.
New York, Random House, 1941. 197 p.
41-8550 PS3503.E37T3 1 94 1
121 1. The pirate. New York, Random House,
1943. xii, 209 p. plate.
43-5 1 1 14 PS3503.E37P5
A play.
1212. Jane. New York, Random House, 1952.
195 p. 52-8279 PS3503.E37J3
1213. The Worcester account. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1954. 239 p.
53-5014 PS3503.E37Z53
Reminiscences.
1214. ROBERT CHARLES BENCHLEY, 1889-
1945
A successful journalist and drama critic, Bench-
ley achieved his greatest prominence as a comedian
working through short films and radio nppi. fi-
ances, as well as through his numerous humorous
articles, which were originally written m.iinl
periodicals, anil Liter collected in volumes such
as Of All Things (1921), Love Conquers All
(1922), Finely and Luc\ (1925), The Early
Worm (1927), The Treasurer's Report, and '
Aspects of Community Singing (i<)}<>), and From
Bed to Worse; or, Comforting Thoughts about the
104 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bison (1934). The titles themselves reflect the
literate, verbal nonsense which was his specialty.
His gentle satire (of which he himself was the main
target) encompassed a broad range of topics, chiefly
concerned with everyday affairs such as pigeon
persecution, music interpretation, and the menace
of buttered toast. Selections from earlier volumes
appeared in Inside Benchley (1942), Benchley — Or
Else! (1947), and The Benchley Roundup (1954).
An additional element of humor was given the
Benchley books by the many illustrations supplied
by Gluyas Williams.
1215. 20,000 leagues under the sea; or, David
Copperfield. New York, Holt, 1928. 233 p.
illus. 28-31 1 16 PS3503.E49T8 1928
1216. No poems; or, Around the world backwards
and sideways. New York, Harper, 1932.
330 p. illus. 32-34924 PS3503.E49N6 1932
1217. My ten years in a quandary, and how they
grew. New York, Harper, 1936. 361 p.
illus. 36-9634 PS3503.E49M9 1936
1 218. After 1903 — what? New York, Harper,
1938. 271 p. illus.
38-2530 PS3503.E49A7 1938
1219. Benchley beside himself. New York,
Harper, 1943. 304 p. illus.
43-8712 PS3503.E49B4
1220. Chips off the old Benchley. New York,
Harper, 1949. 273 p. illus.
49-10872 PS3503.E49C5
1221. Benchley, Nathaniel. Robert Benchley, a
biography. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955.
258 p. illus. 55-10402 PS3503.E49Z6
1222. STEPHEN VINCENT BENET, 1898-1943
As a poet, novelist, and short story writer,
Benet made use of themes drawn from American
history and folklore. In his poetry he often adapted
forms from folk ballads, a device he used also in
the varying metrics of his Civil War epic, John
Brown's Body ( 1928), which was awarded a Pulitzer
prize and which has been called the most popular
long poem of the century. His posthumous West-
ern Star (1943), celebrating the English settlements
at Jamestown and Plymouth, constitutes book one
of an incomplete narrative poem about the
western migration of peoples. As a short-story
writer Benet is probably best known for The
Devil and Daniel Webster (1937), which has
practically become a part of New Hampshire
folklore, and which was made into a successful
movie and also used to produce a libretto for an
opera by Douglas Moore (b. 1893). Benet's first
two novels, The Beginning of Wisdom (1921) and
Young People's Pride (1922), were stories of de-
veloping young authors, and they showed the in-
fluence of F. Scott Fitzgerald. The third novel of
his youthful period was ]ean Huguenot (1923),
which dealt with the problem of a woman's values in
life. Spanish Bayonet (1926), which is probably
his best-known novel, is a story of the development
of Florida, with the Revolutionary War period for
temporal background. In America (1944) Benet
produced a short, popular history of this country
from its founding to Pearl Harbor. Also published
posthumously was The Last Circle (1946), in which
his wife, Rosemary Carr Benet (b. 1900), collected
stories and poems not appearing in previous volumes
and for the most part written in the last few years of
the author's life.
1223. James Shore's daughter. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1934. 277 p.
34-15494 PZ3.B4292jam
A novel in which the main attempt is to recreate
the spirit of the times of the late 19th and the open-
ing decades of the 20th centuries in America.
1224. Selected works. New York, Farrar & Rine-
hart, 1942. 2 v.
42-15523 PS3503.E5325A6 1942
The first volume is devoted to Benet's poetry. In
addition to the epic poem John Brown's Body
(1928), it includes material from the author's earlier
volumes, Young Adventure (1918), Heavens and
Earth (1920), Tiger Joy (1925), Ballads and Poems,
1915-1930 (1931), and Burning City (1936). The
second volume is devoted to his prose; in addition
to the complete novel, Spanish Bayonet (1926), it
includes short stories under the three headings of
"Stories of American History," "Tales of Our
Time," and "Fantasies and Prophecies." Benet's
earlier collections of short stories were Thirteen
0'Cloc\ (1937) and Tales Before Midnight (1939).
1225. JOHN PEALE BISHOP, 1 892-1944
Bishop's poetry, criticism, general essays, re-
views of poetry, and miscellaneous articles, pub-
lished posthumously in collected editions, contribute
to an understanding of forces that impinged upon
American society between two world wars and that
were reflected in the literature of the period. He
wrote in a style formed by his taste for classic re-
straint, substantial values, decorum, and elegance.
William Butler Yeats and T. S. Eliot were forma-
tive influences in the development of his poetical
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO5
work. Bishop also produced some distinguished
fiction: notably, Many Thousands Gone (New
York, Scribner, 1931. 282 p.), a volume of short
stories dealing with the South during the Civil War
period, and Act of Darkness (New York, Scribner,
1935. 368 p.), a novel which reflects life in a West
Virginia town early in the 20th century.
1226. Collected essays. Edited with an introd. by
Edmund Wilson. New York, Scribner,
1948. 508 p. 48-8528 PS3503.I79A16 1948
This volume is divided into ten sections: "Es-
says," "Painters," "Moving Pictures," "Novelists of
the Twenties," "Novelists of the South," "Poetry
Reviews," "Miscellaneous Articles," "Aphorisms and
Notes," "Portraits of Places," and "Stories." The
last section does not constitute a collection of his
short stories, for none of those in Many Thousands
Gone (vide supra) are included.
1227. Collected poems. Edited with a pref. and
a personal memoir by Allen Tate. New
York, Scribner, 1948. 277 p.
48-4117 PS3503.I79A17 1948
This volume contains many poems previously
unpublished or published only outside the earlier
volumes of the author's poetry, as well as reprint-
ing the contents of Green Fruit (1917), Now with
His Love ( 1933), Minute Particulars ( 1935), and the
new material in Selected Poems (1941).
1228. RICHARD PALMER BLACKMUR, 1904-
By his own experience as a poet Blackmur
is exceptionally well-qualified to analyze, interpret,
and criticize the language and accomplishments of
poets such as Emily Dickinson, Ezra Pound, T. S.
Eliot, Wallace Stevens, Marianne Moore, and E. E.
Cummings. An insight into his critical methods
and purposes may be gained from "A Critic's Job of
Work," an essay found in The Double Agent and
also in Language as Gesture.
1229. The double agent; essays in craft and elucida-
tion. New York, Arrow Editions, 1935.
302 p. 35-31958 PS324.B6
1230. From Jordan's delight [poems] New York,
Arrow Editions, 1937. I05 P-
37-4180 PS3503.L266F7 1937
1231. The expense of greatness. New York, Ar-
row Editions, 1940. 305 p.
40-34148 PR473.B56
Partial Contents. — The craft of Herman Mel-
ville: a putative statement. — A note of Yvor Win-
ters.— The composition in nine poets: 1937. — Nine
poets: 1939. — The letters of Marian Adams. —
The expense of greatness: three emphases on Henry
Adams.
1232. The second world [poems] Cummington,
Mass., Cummington Press, 1942. 29 p.
42-17666 PS3505.L266S4
1233. Language as gesture; essays in poetry. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 440 p.
• 52-6451 PN1055.B55
1234. The lion and the honeycomb; essays in solici-
tude and critique. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1955. 309 p. 55—5638 PS121.B59
1235. Anni mirabiles, 1921-1925: reason in the
madness of letters; four lectures presented
under the auspices of the Gertrude Clarke Whittall
Poetry and Literature Fund. Washington, Ref-
erence Dept., Library of Congress, 1956. 55 p.
56-60048 PN771.B56
A discussion of European and American litera-
ture of the twenties.
1236. LOUISE BOG AN, 1897-
Throughout Louise Bogan's career critics
have ascribed to her poetry excellence of form,
traditional lyric quality, originality, and sustained
power. Her scholarship in literary criticism, par-
ticularly with reference to poetry, is evidenced in
frequent contributions to journals and in her
Achievement in American Poetry, 1900-1950
0951)-
1237. Collected poems, 1923-1953. New York,
Noonday Press, 1954. 126 p.
54-9946 PS3503.O195A17 1954
The material in this volume is mostly derived
from the author's earlier books of poetry: Body of
This Death (1923), Dar\ Summer (1929), The
Sleeping Fury (1937), and Poems and New Poems
(1941).
1238. Selected criticism: prose, poetry. New York,
Noonday Press, 1955. 404 p.
55-8230 PN511.B54
A selection of critical articles and reviews (mostly
of new poetry) which Louise Bogan prepared for
various periodicals over a period of thirty years.
1239. JAMES BOYD, 1888-1944
James Boyd first gained prominence by
novels with a Southern setting dealing with the
Revolutionary and Civil Wars. These were followed
I06 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
by Long Hunt (1930), which dealt with the opening
of the frontier from North Carolina to the Missis-
sippi, and Bitter Cree\ (1939), which reflected life
in the high plains country of the Rocky Mountains
during die second half of the 19th century. Roll
River (1935) was a story of four generations of a
Pennsylvania family. A posthumous volume, Old
Pines, and Other Stories (1952) was a selection of
stories set in his home state of North Carolina.
1240. Drums. New York, Scribner, 1925. 490 p.
25-8792 PZ3.69375Dr
A Revolutionary War novel that has become a
"high school classic."
1 24 1. Marching on. New York, Scribner, 1927.
426 p. 27-1 1031 PS3503.O885M3 1927
PZ3.B69375Ma
This book, whose story centers about a Confed-
erate soldier during the Civil War, presents char-
acters who are descendants of those in Drums.
1242. KAY BOYLE, 1903-
Kay Boyle has passed much of her life as an
expatriate, a fact which is reflected in her fiction
dealing with one or two Americans in Europe, often
in France. As a result her theme often becomes one
of contrasting individuals or cultures. Occasionally
she has drifted from portraying "normal" conflicts
to portraying sexual perversions and writing moral
"horror" stories, such as Gentlemen, I Address You
Privately (1933) and Monday Night (1938). An
experimentalist who has been praised for her style
and for her evocation of places and things more
than for her character presentation, her objectivity
or noninvolvement in her stories lends an appearance
of realism, despite linguistically mannered prose.
Her work is usually more sustained in her short
stories and novelettes than in her longer works, and
many have regarded her as one of the best of modern
short-story writers.
1243. Plagued by the nightingale. New York,
Cape & Smith, 1931. 334 p.
31-6593 PZ3.B69796PI
An American girl and her French husband face
the problem of the need to have a child in order to
obtain money from his relatives, and the conflicting
desire to avoid passing on a hereditary ailment.
1244. Year before last. New York, H. Smith,
x932- 373 P- 32-I75I4 PZ3-B69796Ye
A young man on the Riviera struggles between
love of a woman and love of a magazine (financed,
conditionally, by his aunt).
1245. Death of a man. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1936. 321 p.
36-22179 PZ3.B69796De
A Nazi sympathizer, an American woman, and
her English husband meet in the Austrian moun-
tains. The book ends with Dollfuss' assassination.
1246. The crazy hunter; three short novels. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 295 p.
40-6737 PZ3.B69796Cr
Contents. — The crazy hunter. — The bride-
groom's body. — Big Fiddle.
1247. Primer for combat. [New York] Simon &
Schuster, 1942. 320 p.
42-36354 PZ3.B69796Pr
Centering about an American woman, her hus-
band, and their three children, this diary-form novel
reflects life in a German-controlled French village
during the summer of 1940.
1248. Thirty stories. New York, Simon & Schus-
ter, 1946. 362 p.
46-11845 PZ3.B69796Th
A selection from stories published in the preced-
ing twenty years.
1249. His human majesty. New York, Whitde-
sey House, 1949. 295 p.
49-8270 PZ3.B69796Hi
A novel about ski troops training in the Colorado
mountains in the winter of 1944. They are made
up of emigres representing all countries overrun by
the Nazis.
1250. The smoking mountain; stories of post war
Germany. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951.
273 p. 51-10197 PZ3.B69796S1T1
1251. The seagull on the step. New York, Knopf,
1955. 247 p. 55-5604 PZ3.B69796Se
A concern over Franco-American relations is re-
vealed in this novel about an American girl who
comes to understand a French village.
1252. PEARL (SYDENSTRICKER) BUCK,
1892-
As the daughter of American missionaries in
China, Pearl Buck acquired the deep appreciation of
the Chinese people which motivates her best-known
works of fiction. Her portrayal of American mis-
sionaries in China and the blending of Chinese
and Western humanism in her own philosophy of
life are of particular significance to the student of
American civilization. She has furthered her role
of interpreter of the East to the West through her
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / IO7
translations and nonfictional writings. In 1932 she
was awarded a Pulitzer prize and in 1938 a Nobel
prize. In 1958 Mrs. Buck revealed that she had
published novels with an American setting under
the pen name of "John Sedges."
1253. The good earth. New York, John Day,
1931. 375 p. 31-26625 PZ3.B8555G0
1254. Sons. New York, John Day, 1932. 467 p.
32-27061 PZ3.B8555S0
1255. The mother. New York, John Day, 1934.
302 p. PZ3.B8555M0
34-807 PS3503.P198M6
1256. A house divided. New York, Reynal &
Hitchcock, 1935. 353 p.
35-1591 PZ3.B8555H0
1257. The exile. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock,
1936. 315 p. 36-3511 BV3427.S852B8
1258. Fighting angel; portrait of a soul. New
York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1936. 302 p.
37-27009 BV3427.S85B8 1936
Fighting Angel, the biography of the author's
father, is a companion volume to The Exile, which
is a biography of her mother. Together they form
a work to be entitled The Spirit and the Flesh.
Cf. 1 st preliminary leaf.
1259. Dragon seed. New York, John Day, 1942.
378 P- 41-27318 PZ3.B8555Dr
1260. My several worlds, a personal record. New
York, John Day, 1954. 407 p.
54-10460 PS3503.U198Z5
1261. JAMES BRANCH CABELL, 1897-
Cabell expressed his ironic-satirical com-
ments on mankind in general and Virginians in
particular in a highly mannered but distinguished
prose. Books such as The Cream of the Jest (1917)
and Something About Eve ( 1927) were among those
that stood out in his disconnected series of novels
which had his mythical, somewhat medieval king-
dom of Poictesme for setting. His most famous
book, Jurgen (1919), aroused considerable publicity
and controversy upon being banned at the time of
its publication. Cabell writes symbolically in a
style and context that tends to restrict his audience
to those with a taste for preciosity. Always con-
cerned with the esthetics of literature, he has con-
tinued over the years to produce his own rather
special type of book, and has over fifty volumes to
his credit.
1262. Works. [Storisende ed.] New York, Mc-
Bride, 1927-30. 18 v.
PS3505.A153A1 1927
Contents. — 1. Beyond life. — 2. Figures of earth. —
3. The silver stallion. — 4. Domnei. The music
from behind the moon. — 5. Chivalry. — 6. Jurgen. —
7. The line of love. — 8. The high place. — 9. Gal-
lantry.— 10. Something about Eve. — 11. The certain
hour. — 12. The cords of vanity. — 13. From the
hidden way. The jewel merchants. — 14. The rivet
in grandfather's neck. — 15. The eagle's shadow. —
16. The cream of the jest. The lineage of Lich-
field.— 17. Straws and prayer-books. — 18. Town-
send of Lichfield.
1263. Ladies and gendemen: a parcel of reconsid-
erations. New York, McBride, 1934. 304 p.
34-34569 PS3505.A153L3 1934
Twenty letters addressed to famous personalities,
real and fictitious, reassessing their reputations and
characters.
1264. Smirt; an urbane nightmare. New York,
McBride, 1934. xxi, 309 p. [The night-
mare has triplets, v. 1] 34-6047 PZ3.Ci07Sm
1265. Smith; a sylvan interlude. New York, Mc-
Bride, 1935. ix, 313 p. [The nightmare
has triplets, v. 2] 35-22390 PZ3.Cio7Smi
1266. Smire; an acceptance in the third person.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran,
1937. 311 p. [The nightmare has triplets, v. 3]
37-6125 PZ3.C107SI
1267. Let me lie, being in the main an ethnological
account of the remarkable Commonwealth
of Virginia and the making of its history. New
York, Farrar, Straus, 1947. 286 p.
47-30215 F227.C213
Contents. — Quiet along the Potomac. — The
first Virginian. — Myths of die Old Dominion. —
Colonel Esmond of Virginia. — Concerns heirs and
assigns. — Mr. Ritchie's Richmond. — Almost touch-
ing the Confederacy. — General Lee of Virginia. —
Is of Southern ladies. — "Published in Richmond,
Virginia." — Miss Glasgow of Virginia. — As to our
life and letters.
1268. Quiet, please. Gainesville, University of
Florida Press, 1952. 105 p.
52-7061 PS3505.A153Q5
Autobiographical notes and commentary.
1269. As I remember it; some epilogues in recol-
lection. New York, McBride, 1955. 243 p.
55-11765 PS3505.A153Z52
108 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1270. ERSKINE CALDWELL, 1903-
Caldwell's regional novels and short stories
deal chiefly with Georgian poor whites. Although
relieved by humor and concern, depravity and de-
generacy are characteristic aspects of the people and
situations with which his books are concerned. He
has been variously regarded as an extreme realist
and as an extreme romanticist of the horrible.
1271. Tobacco road. New York, Scribner, 1932.
241 p. 32-5023 PZ3.C12734T0
Dramatized by Jack Kirkland in 1933, the play
had a phenomenal continuous Broadway run of over
3,000 performances.
1272. God's little acre. New York, Viking Press,
IQ33- 3°3P- 33~32QI PZ3.C12734G0
1273. Trouble in July. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1940. 241 p.
40-27204 PZ3-Ci2734Tr
1274. Tragic ground. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1944. 237 p.
45-1137 PZ3.Ci2734Tq
1275. Complete stories. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1953. 664 p.
53-10243 PZ3.Ci2734Cn
1276. WILLA SIBERT CATHER, 1873-1947
Willa Cather studied in her novels the strug-
gle between the spirit and the world. Her strong
point was probably the stylistic purity of her de-
piction of her native Nebraska and the Southwest.
The sympathy she was able to feel for these re-
gions dominates O Pioneers! (1913), The Song of
the Lar\ (1915), My Antonia (1918, rev. 1926),
A Lost Lady (1923), and Death Comes for the
Archbishop (1927). Her novels, to a large extent
either directly or symbolically autobiographical,
tend more to chronicle form than to plot structure.
1277. The novels and stories. Library ed. [Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin] 1937-41. 13 v.
illus. A43-1040 DCU
Each volume has special t. p.
Contents. — 1. O Pioneers! — 2. The song of the
lark. — 3. Alexander's bridge & April twilights. —
4. My Antonia. — 5. One of ours. — 6. Youth and the
bright Medusa. — 7. A lost lady. — 8. The professor's
house. — 9. Death comes for the archbishop. — 10.
Shadows on the rock. — n. Lucy Gayheart & My
mortal enemy. — 12. Obscure destinies & Literary
encounters. — 13. Sapphira and the slave girl.
1278. On writing; critical studies on writing as an
art, with a foreword by Stephen Tennant.
New York, Knopf, 1949. 126 p.
49-10534 PS3505.A87048 1949
Contents. — Four letters: On Death comes for the
Archbishop. On Shadows on the rock. Escapism.
On The professor's house. — The novel demeuble. —
Four prefaces: The best stories of Sarah Orne Jew-
ett. Gertrude Hall's The Wagnerian romances.
Stephen Crane's Wounds in the rain and other im-
pressions of war. Defoe's The fortunate mistress. —
My first novels (there were two). — On the art of
fiction. — Katherine Mansfield. — Light on adobe
walls (an unpublished fragment).
1279. Bennett, Mildred R. The world of Willa
Cather. New York, Dodd, Mead, 195 1.
xviii, 226 p. illus. 51—9633 PS3505.A87Z58
1280. Brown, Edward Killoran. Willa Cather, a <
critical biography fby] E. K. Brown; com-
pleted by Leon Edel. New York, Knopf, 1953. 1
351 p. 52-12204 PS3505.A87Z584 ;
"Bibliographical note": p. [346]— 351.
1281. Daiches, David. Willa Cather, a critical in-
troduction. Ithaca, Cornell University Press,
1951. 193 p. 51-9710 PS3505.A87Z62 •
1282. Lewis, Edith. Willa Cather living; a per- j
sonal record. New York, Knopf, 1953. ,
197 p. 52-12190 PS3505.A87Z72
1283. Sergeant, Elizabeth Shepley. Willa Cather,
a memoir. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1953.
288 p. illus. 52-13732 PS3505.A87Z83
1284. MARY ELLEN CHASE, 1887-
Mary Ellen Chase writes primarily of Maine
coast characters and the sea in her novels and
novelettes. She has also written a number of auto-
biographical works: A Goodly Heritage (1932)
and A Goodly Fellowship (1939) reflect her Maine
background and her life as an English teacher,
chiefly at Smith College. The White Gate; Adven-
tures in the Imagination of a Child (1954) portrays
three years of her Maine childhood.
1285. Mary Peters. New York, Macmillan, 1934.
377 p. 34-27262 PZ3.C90iMar
The heroine passes her youth on her father's ship,
but later returns to setde in the Maine coastal vil-
lage of her ancestors.
1286. Silas Crockett. New York, Macmillan, 1935. i
404 p. 35-25387 PZ3-c390lSi
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / IO9
A novel which depicts maritime life along the
coast for one hundred years through the story of
four generations of a New England family.
1287. Dawn in Lyonesse. New York, Macmillan,
1938. 115 p. 38-27053 PZ3.C39oiDaw
The Tristan and Isolde story reworked in a
modern tale cf Cornwall.
1288. Windswept. New York, Macmillan, 1941.
440 p. 41-21397 PZ3.C39oiWi
Story of a Maine coastal family and their friends,
from the 1880's to 1939.
1289. The plum tree. New York, Macmillan,
1949. 98 p. 49-11252 PZ3.C3901PI
A novelette of a day in a home for aged women.
1290. ROBERT PETER TRISTRAM COFFIN,
1892-1955
Coffin is a Maine poet best known for his realistic,
pastoral lyrics, verses which express a degree of
sentimentality and a rural "wholesomeness" in a
retrained, conventional manner; he was awarded
the Pulitzer prize for poetry for Strange Holiness
(1935). A prolific author, he has written in a num-
ber of forms besides poetry, though usually and
best about his native Maine. He has written novels,
such as Red S^y In the Morning (1935) and John
Dawn (1936); biography, represented by Captain
Abby and Captain John (1939), the story of two
Maine sea captains; and history as in Kennebec,
Cradle of Americans (1937), the first volume in the
Rivers of America series (q. v.). The recurring
theme of Maine life, manners, and history may be
found in these and most of his other works, includ-
ing books such as Yankee Coast (1947) and Maine
Doings (1950). In these works he pictures a part
of rural America, past and present, at times using
characterizations that verge on folklore in their
presentation of basic aspects of American character,
personality, and dreams.
1291. Portrait of an American. New York, Mac-
millan, 193 1. 182 p. illus.
31-31494 PS3505.O234P6 1 93 1
Biography of the author's father.
1292. Lost paradise; a boyhood on a Maine coast
farm. New York, Macmillan, 1934. 284 p.
34-35147 PS3505.O234Z5 1934
Autobiography.
1293. Thomas-Thomas- Ancil-T h o m a s. New
York, Macmillan, 1941. 342 p.
41-6046 PZ3.C654iTh
A novel in poetic prose on the theme of the con-
tinuity of life from father to son through the genera-
tions; the contemporary heir is a Maine farmer.
1294. Book of uncles. New York, Macmillan,
1942. 151 p. 42-22252 PS3505.O234B6
Fifteen sketches, each about a different uncle.
1295. Collected poems. New and enl. ed. New
York, Macmillan, 1948. 446 p.
48-2263 PS3505.O234A17 1948
Much of Coffin's poetry had previously appeared
in such volumes as his Christchurch (1924), Dew
and Bronze (1927), Golden Falcon (1929), The
Yo\e of Thunder (1932), Ballads of Square-Toed
Americans (1933), Saltwater Farm (1937), Maine
Ballads (1938), There Will Be Bread and Love
(1942), Primer jor America (1943), Poems for a
Son with Wings (1945), and People Behave li\e
Ballads (1946).
1296. Apples by ocean. [ Poems] New York, Mac-
millan, 1950. 128 p.
50-10425 PS3505.O234A7
1297. Selected poems. New York, Macmillan,
1955. 112 p.
55-14775 PS3505.O234A6 1955
1298. JAMES GOULD COZZENS, 1903-
Cozzens is a realistic novelist who writes
about a variety of topics. Employing a carefully
practiced style within traditional limits, he presents
objective, rounded pictures of individuals and situa-
tions.
1299. The last Adam. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1933. 301 p.
33-1357 PZ3.C83983Las
London edition (Longmans, Green & Co.) has
title: A Cure of Flesh.
A smalltown doctor's story which presents life
in a Connecticut community.
1300. Men and brethren. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1936. 282 p.
36-755 PZ3.C83983Me
A study of a clergyman in contemporary New
York City.
1301. The just and the unjust. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1942. 434 p.
42-17992 PZ3.C83983JU
Presents liic in a small Connecticut village dur-
ing a murder trial.
110 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1302. Guard of honor. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1948. 631 p.
48-8544 PZ3.C83983G11
Story of three days at an air training base in
Florida in 1943; it reflects the problems of civilians
adjusting to military life.
1303. HART CRANE, 1899-1932
Hart Crane experienced many literary in-
fluences, such as the Elizabethans, some late 19th-
century French poets, and Dante; he also highly
admired and drew inspiration from Whitman, but
his work was closer in spirit and technique to Poe.
Although Crane published only two books during
his life, he is generally considered one of the fore-
most poets of his era. Through his belief in the
"logic of metaphor," applying to it his emotional
and intellectual force, and employing tonal adroit-
ness, he created a poetry of eloquence and sonorous,
compelling rhetoric. When on occasion his work
fails to be the integrated entity he desired, it suc-
ceeds as fragments, verbally intense and sensitive.
His most ambitious work was The Bridge, an at-
tempt to create a meaningful, affirmative integration
of modern American life.
1304. The collected poems; edited with an introd.
by Waldo Frank. New York, Liveright,
1933- 179 P- front, (port.)
33-271 1 1 PS3505.R272 1933
This collection includes the poems from White
Buildings (1926) and The Bridge (1930). It also
contains a section entitled Key West: An Island
Sheaf, a group of publications which Crane had
prepared for separate volume publication. In addi-
tion there is a group of "Uncollected Poems" and an
essay on "Modern Poetry."
1305. Letters, 1916-1932; edited by Brom Weber.
New York, Hermitage House, 1952. 426 p.
52-12760 PS3505.R272Z54
1306. Weber, Brom. Hart Crane, a biographical
and critical study. New York, Bodley Press,
1948. 452 p. ports., facsims.
48-6081 PS3505.R272Z8
Includes an appendix of Hart Crane's uncollected
poetry and prose and the worksheets of Atlantis.
"Selected bibliography": p. 441-443.
1307. COUNTEE CULLEN, 1903- 1946
Cullen was a Negro poet who wrote conserva-
tive, formal lyrics. Although he expressed little
of the racial consciousness or Negro rhythms found
in the verse of men such as Langston Flughes and
James Weldon Johnson, his greater verbal and
metrical fluency gained him more popularity.
1308. On these I stand; an anthology of the best
poems of Countee Cullen. Selected by him-
self and including six new poems never before
published. New York, Harper, 1947. 197 p.
47-30109 PS3505.U287A6 1947
1309. EDWARD ESTLIN CUMMINGS, 1894-
Since his first book of poetry, Tulips and
Chimneys, the poetry of E. E. Cummings has been
romantic and typographically unusual. Although
he occasionally employs other moods, his most char-
acteristic poems are romantic lyrics with a surrealis-
tic touch, marked by considerable verbal experi-
mentation. Far less known for his prose, he has
nevertheless produced several distinguished volumes
in that medium.
13 10. The enormous room. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 1922. 271 p.
22-9403 D570.9.C82
An account of his imprisonment by mistake in a
French military prison during the First World War.
13 1 1. Eimi. New York, Covici, Friede, 1933.
432 p. 33-8819 PS3505.U334E5 1933a
The record of a trip through Soviet Russia, with
an account of the author's protests against conditions
there.
13 12. I; six nonlectures. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1953. 118 p. (The Charles
Eliot Norton lectures, 1952-1953)
53-10472 PS3505.U334Z5
Contains a statement of his position as a writer;
some autobiographical material is included.
1313. Poems, 1923-1954. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1954. 468 p.
54-9724 PS3505.U334 1954
Contents. — Tulips and chimneys (1923). — &
(1925). — XLI poems (1925). — Is 5 (1926). — W
(1931). — No thanks (1935). — New poems [from
Collected poems] (1938). — 50 poems (1940). — 1 x 1
(i944).-XAIPE (1950).
1314. HAROLD LENOIR DAVIS, 1896-
H. L. Davis is an Oregon author who regu-
larly writes about his home area. Best known for
his fiction, which includes Beulah Land (1949), a
story of the frontier, and Winds of Morning (1952),
a novel of the Columbia River Valley country that
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / III
has been called an "intellectual western," Davis has
also produced a volume of regional poetry, Proud
Riders (1942).
1315. Honey in the horn. New York, Harper,
1935. 380 p. 35-16787 PZ3.D29355H0
A novel about homesteading in Oregon early in
the 20th century; the book was awarded a Pulitzer
prize in 1936.
1316. Team bells woke me, and other stories. New
York, Morrow, 1953. 300 p.
53-5338 PZ3.D29355Te
13 1 7. CLARENCE DAY, 1874- 1935
Day was a humorous essayist who was best
known for his autobiographical works portraying
family life, the most popular of which was Life
with Father (1935), which in play form (by
Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse, 1940) was a
great Broadway success. Some critics consider Day's
somewhat cynical, satirical This Simian World
( 1920) his best work.
1318. The best of Clarence Day, including God
and my father, Life with father, Life with
mother, This simian world, and selections from
Thoughts without words. New York, Knopf, 1948.
451 p. illus. 48-6580 PS3507.A585B4
i3IQ-
HILDA DOOLITTLE, 1886-
H. D., as she preferred to sign herself, was
in a sense the main poet of the Imagist group, for
she was the one who abided most consistently by
its doctrines. Her work, which has often been called
"classic," does not attempt either to interpret or to
present the problems of modern life; rather, it is a
frugal, evocative presentation of something seen in
nature.
1320. Collected poems of H. D. New York, Boni
& Liveright, 1925. 306 p.
25-9543 PS35oi-L373Al7 *925
This volume was reissued in 1940. Earlier books
of poetry by Hilda Doolitde include Sea Garden
(1916), Hymen (1921), and Heliodora, and Other
Poems (1924).
1321. Red roses for bronze, by H. D. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 193 1. 147 p.
32-26042 PS3501.L373R4 1931
1322. The walls do not fall, by H. D. London,
New York, Oxford University Press, 1944.
48 p. 44-7016 PS3501.L373W3
1323. Tribute to the angels, by H. D. London,
New York, Oxford University Press, 1945.
42 p. 45-10399 PS3501.L373T7
1324. The flowering of the rod, by H. D. London,
New York, Cumberlege, Oxford University
Press, 1946. 50 p. 47-591 PS3501.L373F5
1325. JOHN RODERIGO DOS PASSOS, 1896-
John Dos Passos started as a leftist novelist.
He is probably best known for his triology entitled
U. S. A., originally published as 42nd Parallel
(1930), 1919 (1932), and The Big Money (1936), a
work of realistic fiction with many stylistic innova-
tions; a heavy emphasis on fact and a detailing of the
background give the work value as a commentary on
a period in this country's history. As Dos Passos
later turned from his leftist views, he turned in-
creasingly to nonfiction: observational books of fic-
tion, biographical works, etc. Part of his work
now appears dated because of its journalistic nature;
much survives, however, as fiction or reportage of
more than momentary interest.
1326. Three soldiers. New York, G. H. Doran,
1921. 433 p. 21-26886 PZ3.D74Th
Depicts the effects of World War I on three "typi-
cal" American privates.
1327. Manhattan transfer. New York, Harper,
1925. 404 p. 25-23116 PZ3.D74Ma
The lives of more than a dozen individuals are
presented in numerous fictional episodes meant to
mirror the complex pattern of life in modern New
York City.
1328. U. S. A. 1. The 42nd parallel. 2. Nineteen
nineteen. 3. The big money. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1937. [ 1471 ] p.
38-27019 PZ3.D74US
Various pagings.
1329. The ground we stand on; some examples
from the history of a political creed. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 420 p.
41-16286 E183.D7
The development of the American creed of liberty
is traced through biographical studies of individuals
who influenced the conception.
1330. State of the Nation. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1944. 333 p. plates.
44-6169 E169.D68
An account of a trip through the United States
during the Second World War.
112 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
133 1. Chosen country. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
195 1. 485 p. 51-7856 PZ3.D74Ch
1848-1930 in America reflected through numerous
episodic sections, after the manner of the author's
U. S. A.
1332. District of Columbia. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1952. 342, 248, 446 p.
52-7617 PZ3.D74Di
Also published as three separate volumes: Adven-
tures of a Young Man; Number One; and The
Grand Design.
Reflects American life in the twenties, thirties,
and early forties.
1333. THEODORE DREISER, 1871-1945
Dreiser's works played a major role in the
breakdown of the "genteel" tradition in American
literature and in the development of fiction as a
medium for serious treatment of social and eco-
nomic abuses. His novels are, in general, deter-
ministic, portraying as they do human beings acted
upon by their biological drives and by external
forces in society and their environment. However
unworthy Dreiser's characters may be, he presents
them with sympathy, pity, and without condemna-
tion. Important sources for a study of Dreiser's
increasing disillusionment and pessimism, induced
by life in Chicago, New York, and Philadelphia, are
found in his numerous autobiographical works.
1334. Sister Carrie. New York, Doubleday, Page,
1900. 557 p. 1-29034 PZ3.D814S
This edition was said to have been withheld from
circulation because of the book's supposed "immo-
rality." A new edition was given general release
in 1912. The story, set mainly in Chicago and New
York, is about a smalltown girl who rises from
mistress to successful actress, while her erstwhile
beloved sinks from successful businessman to beg-
gardom and suicide.
1335. Jennie Gerhardt, a novel. New York,
Harper, 191 1. 432 p.
11-26603 PZ3.D814J
Set largely in Cleveland and New York, this is
the story of a woman who gives up a man, whose
mistress she has become, in order that he may in-
herit a legacy and assume a less controversial position
in society.
1336. The financier. New York, Harper, 1912.
779 p. (A trilogy of desire, v. 1)
12-24487 PZ3.D8i4Fi
A character study of a rising big businessman in
Philadelphia during the 1860's and early 1870's.
A revised version appeared in 1927.
1337. The Titan. New York, John Lane, 1914.
551 p. (A trilogy of desire, v. 2)
14-9767 PZ3.D814T
The great capitalist of The Financier has estab-
lished himself in Chicago and prospers even more.
Commercial and public utilities financial deals are
shown against a background of the period's social
standards and cultural views.
In The Stoic (1947) the hero's further career was
traced to London, where he undertook the building
of that city's subway system.
1338. An American tragedy. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 1925. 2 v.
26-141 PZ3.D8i4Am
Based on an actual New York State murder case,
this book presents the author's naturalistic and essen-
tially tragic view of life in America. Contrasting
standards and manners of various social strata are
portrayed.
1339. The "genius." New York, John Lane,
^S- 736 p-
15-20143 PZ3.D814G3 RBD
The story of a small-town Illinois artist's adjust-
ment to society as his life develops in Chicago and
New York and he finds his true vocation as a
realistic painter.
1340. A Hoosier holiday. New York, John Lane,
1916. 513 p. illus. 16-23068 E169.D77
E168.D77
An automobile trip from New York City to
Indiana.
1 34 1. Free, and other stories. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 191 8. 369 p.
18-26757 PZ3.D8i4Fr
1342. Twelve men. New York, Boni & Liveright,
1919. 360 p.
19-6139 PS3507.R55T9 1919
Short stories.
1343. The bulwark. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1946. 337 p.
46-25076 PZ3.D814BU
A book of religious probing, it presents the life of
a Quaker in a Quaker community near Philadelphia.
1344. A book about myself. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 1922. 502 p.
22-25344 PS3507.R55Z5 1922
Republished in 1931 in two volumes bearing the
titles: Dawn and Newspaper Days.
1345- The best short stories of Theodore Dreiser,
edited with an introd. by Howard Fast.
Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1947. 349 p.
47-3829 PZ3.D8i4Be
1346. Dreiser, Helen (Patges) My life with
Dreiser. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1951.
328 p. illus. 5I~I0332 PS3507.R55Z58
1347. Elias, Robert H. Theodore Dreiser, apostle
of nature. New York, Knopf, 1949. xii,
354, xxi p. illus. 49-7227 PS3507.R55Z63
1348. Kazin, Alfred, and Charles Shapiro, eds.
The stature of Theodore Dreiser; a critical
survey of the man and his work. With an introd.
by Alfred Kazin. Bloomington, Indiana University
Press, 1955. 303 p. 55-8446 PS3507.R55Z64
1349. Matthiessen, Francis Otto. Theodore
Dreiser. New York, Sloane, 195 1. 267 p.
(The American men of letters series)
51-1734 PS3507.R55Z7
1350. RICHARD EBERHART, 1904-
Although he apparently writes in large part
by inspiration, Eberhart's poetry is known for its
intellectual and philosophical aspects. His search
is for the nature of man, and the position of man
in time (and the meaning of time) and the universe.
135 1. Selected poems. London, Chatto & Windus,
1951. 86 p.
, 5i-3i53 PS3509.B456A6 1951
tberhart s earlier volumes of poetry are A Bravery
of Earth (1930), Reading the Spirit (1936), Song
and Idea (1940), Poems, New and Selected (1944),
and Burr Oa\s (1947).
1352. Undercliff: poems, 1946-1953. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1953. 127 p.
53-13069 PS3509.B456U6
1353- WALTER DUMAUX EDMONDS, 1903-
Edmonds is a popular historical novelist
who concerns himself mainly with the New York
State area, his best-known works being set in the
Mohawk Valley and along the Erie Canal.
1354. Rome haul. Boston, Little, Brown, 1929.
_ 347 P- 29-5703 PZ3.E242R0
Portrays Erie Canal life in the 1850's.
1355- Drums along the Mohawk. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1936. 592 p.
36-16924 PZ3.E242Dr
431240—60 9
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 13
A story of the Revolutionary War and its influ-
ence on the farmers of the Mohawk Valley.
1356. Erie water. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1933.
506 p. 33-3217 PZ3.E242Er
A story of the building of the Erie Canal and life
along the route from 1817 to 1825.
1357. THOMAS STEARNS ELIOT, 1888-
T. S. Eliot, an American who became a
British subject, wrote early poetry of frustration,
disillusion, and despair expressive of the spiritual
aridity and insecurity of a generation. His The
Waste Land (1922) came to epitomize the feelings
of the West's, and to some extent of the world's,
cultured youth after the First World War. A sub-
sequent turning to a highly religious poetry, as in
Ash Wednesday (1930), reflected his acceptance of
Anglican Catholic dogma and conservatism in po-
litical and social views. Hence his essays have come
to show an authoritarian assessment of literature and
society. In recent years he has concentrated on verse
drama, continuing experiments in verse forms, and
leaning towards social satire and comedy. All his
work has evidenced an extensive assimilation of
modern psychological theories. Eliot has been one
of the most influential of modern poets, his poetry
having transcended national and linguistic bound-
aries, and having provoked a formidable mass of
critical and exegetical studies, not to mention in-
numerable imitations. His receipt in 1948 of the
Nobel prize for literature is partial indication of
the entrenchment of his work in modern literature.
1358. Selected essays. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 460 p.
50-10103 PN511.E443 1950
1359. Complete poems and plays. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 392 p.
— . . 52-"345 PS3509.L43 1952
Ihis volume contains the poetry published in
earlier volumes, such as Prufroc\ (1917), Poems
(1920), The Waste Land (1922), The Hollow Men
O925), and Ash Wednesday (1930), as well as the
"Ariel Poems," the "Minor Poems," and other
verse as originally brought together in the author's
Collected Poems, 1909-1935 (1936). It also con-
tains the subsequent poems from Four Quartets
(IQ43)> Old Possum's Boo{ of Practical Cats~( 1939),
and the plays Murder in the Cathedral (1935), The
Family Reunion (1939), and The Cocktail Party
(1950).
1360. The confidential clerk, a play. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1954. '59 P-
54-5253 PS3509.L43C69
114 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
136 1. Drew, Elizabeth A. T. S. Eliot, the design
of his poetry. New York, Scribner, 1949.
216 p. 49-1640 PS3509.L43Z67
1362. Gallup, Donald Clifford. T. S. Eliot; a bib-
liography, including contributions to peri-
odicals and foreign translations. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 177 p.
53-5644 Z8260.5.G16 1953
A revision and extension of the author's A Bib-
liographical Checklist of the Writings of T. S.
Eliot, published in 1947.
1363. Gardner, Helen Louise. The art of T. S.
Eliot. New York, Dutton, 1950. 185 p.
50-9034 PS3509.L43Z675 1950
1364. March, Richard, and M. J. Tambimuttu, eds.
T. S. Eliot; a symposium from Conrad Aiken
[and others] Compiled by Richard March and
Tambimuttu. Chicago, Regnery, 1949. 259 p.
illus. 49-48864 PS3509.L43Z73 1949
"A tribute to T. S. Eliot, on his sixtieth birthday,
from his friends."
1365. Maxwell, Desmond Ernest Stewart. The
poetry of T. S. Eliot. London, Routledge
& Paul [1952] 223 p.
52-4500 PS3509.L43Z78 1952
1366. On the Four quartets of T. S. Eliot. Anon.
With a foreword by Roy Campbell. Lon-
don, Stuart, 1953. 64 p.
54-3457 PS3509.L43F668
1367. Rajan, Balachandra, ed. T. S. Eliot; a study
of his writings by several hands. New York,
Funk & Wagnalls, 1948. 153 p.
49-7235 PS3509.L43Z82 1948
Contents. — The waste land: an analysis, by
Cleanth Brooks. — Ash Wednesday, by E. E. Duncan
Jones. — Four quartets: a commentary, by H. L.
Gardner. — The unity of the quartets, by B. Rajan. —
Eliot's philosophical themes, by Philip Wheel-
wright.— A question of speech, by Anne Ridler. —
Eliot's critical method, by M. C. Bradbrook. —
Notes on 'Gerontion,' by Wolf Mankowitz. — A
check of T. S. Eliot's published writings (p. 139-
153)-
1368. Robbins, Rossell Hope. The T. S. Eliot
myth. New York, Schuman, 1951. 226 p.
51-14190 PS3509.L43Z825
1369. Smidt, Kristian. Poetry and belief in the
work of T. S. Eliot. Oslo, Dybwad, 1949.
228 p. (Skrifter utg. av det Norske videnskaps-
akademi i Oslo. II. Hist.-filos. klasse, 1949, no. 1)
52-17717 PS3509.L43Z866
1370. Unger, Leonard, ed. T. S. Eliot: a selected
critique. New York, Rinehart, 1948. xix,
478 p. 48-7063 PS3509.L43Z383
1371. Williamson, George. A reader's guide to
T. S. Eliot; a poem-by-poem analysis. New
York, Noonday Press, 1953. 248 p.
53~7584 PS3509.L43Z898
1372. JAMES THOMAS FARRELL, 1904-
James Farrell is best known for his novels,
although he has also written short stories and non-
fiction, the latter largely literary commentary. The
locale for much of his fiction is that part of Chicago
in which he grew up, a declining middle- and lower-
class area whose inhabitants were for the most part
Irish Catholics. Farrell, a liberal, wrote in the
tradition of naturalistic realism, with as many
sociological as philosophic or poetic overtones, so
that his work is an indictment of a section of society
and its frequendy despiritualizing effects. The
dual moral standards of this group result in the ruin
of Studs Lonigan (the hero of the early trilogy which
is usually considered Farrell's most forceful work),
while Danny O'Neill (the hero of a second, con-
trasting series) survives and rises to a mature view
of life. A somewhat comparable series tells the story
of Bernard Clare (renamed Bernard Carr after the
first volume); Clare (Carr) is presented as a
Chicago-born writer whose career centers in New
York, where much of his attention focuses on the
problem of the leftist political position in the thirties.
1373. Studs Lonigan. New York, Vanguard
Press, 1935. 201, 412, 465 p.
36-214 PZ3.F2465St
PS3511.A738S7 1935
Contents. — Young Lonigan. — The young man-
hood of Studs Lonigan. — Judgment day.
1374. A world I never made. New York, Van-
guard Press, 1936. 508 p.
36-24944 PZ3.F2465W0
The story of Danny O'Neill is continued in No
Star Is Lost (1938. 38-17566 PZ3.F2465N0);
Father and Son (1940. 40-32291 PZ3-F2465Fat) ;
My Days of Anger (1943. 43-16086 PZ3.F2465
My); and The Face of Time (1953. 53-10805
PZ3.F2465Fac).
1375- The league of frightened Philistines, and
other papers. New York, Vanguard Press,
1945. xiv, 210 p.
45-35125 PS3511.A738A16 1945
"Selected from ... [the author's] critical and
non-fictional writing of the past fifteen years." —
Preface.
1376. Bernard Clare. New York, Vanguard Press,
1946. 367 p. 46-3585 PZ3.F2465Be
Continued in: The Road Between (1949. 49-
8444 PZ3.F2465R0) and Yet Other Waters (1952.
52-11116 PZ3.F2465Yg).
1377. Literature and morality. [New York] Van-
guard Press, 1947. xv, 304 p.
47-4577 PN49.F3
1378. Reflections at fifty, and other essays. New
York, Vanguard Press, 1954. 223 p.
54-11517 PS3511.A738R4
1379. WILLIAM FAULKNER, 1897-
Faulkner, who was awarded the Nobel prize
for literature in 1950, has been considered by some
critics, in this country as well as abroad, to be the
greatest of living novelists. Much of his writing
has been experimental, utilizing techniques of
stream-of-consciousness, interior monologues, and
multiple personal narratives to portray events with
psychological realism. Patterns of symbolic myth
woven on the universal theme of human fate have
been discovered by critics in many of his stories.
The paradox of passion and compassion, violence
and beatitude, pathos and comedy, realism and
idealism, mammonism and mysticism are seldom
separated very far in any of his work. Seeking
moral purpose, he presents the past alive in the
present — a historic deep South pervading a modern
South. His stories usually take place in a fictional
Mississippi county, a counterpart to his own home
area, where morality and immorality take a large
battlefield in a rural locale. While each volume is
an individual unit, no character can take curtain
bows with full assurance he will not be called upon
to play a part in some subsequent drama. In this
way Faulkner has presented a "human comedy"
of a Southern community. Although he most char-
acteristically presents a vision of life, rather than
a concept of it, he allows philosophy to dominate
in his latest novel A Fable, which was awarded the
Pulitzer prize in 1955. Faulkner has also been one
of the most influential of modern short-story writers,
with volumes such as These 13 (1931) and Co
Down, Moses (1942), which form an integral part
of his work. He has also published some poetry:
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 115
The Marble Faun (1924) and A Green Bough
(1933). He has on occasion spelled his name as
"Falkner."
1380. Soldiers' pay. New York, Boni & Live-
right, 1926. 319 p. 26-6911 PZ3.F272S0
Story of an American in the British air force dur-
ing World War I who is seriously wounded and
returns to his home in Georgia to die.
1381. Mosquitoes. New York, Boni & Liveright,
1927. 349 p. 27-10732 PZ3.F272M0
A satire with a New Orleans locale.
1382. Sartoris. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929.
38oP- 2973496 PZ3.F272Sar
Faulkner's first novel, portraying life in the South,
traces the degeneracy of a prominent family in the
course of three generations, from the Civil War to
World War I.
1383. The sound and the fury. New York, Cape
& Smith, 1929. 401 p.
29-20977 PZ3.F272S0U
An experimental novel about a degenerate South-
ern family, written, for most of the book, from the
narrative point of view of the family's idiot boy.
1384. As I lay dying. New York, Cape & Smith,
1930. 254 p. 30-27682 PZ3.F272AS
A somewhat acridly humorous portrait of the
irrational behavior of human beings as seen by vari-
ous individual characters in the story.
1385. Sanctuary. New York, Cape & Smith, 193 1.
, 38° P- 3I~4I82 PZ3.F272San
This, "the most horrific tale" of sex, cruelty, and
violence which the author could imagine was suc-
cessfully aimed at the popular market which his
more serious works had failed to attain.
1386. Light in August. [New York] Smith &
Haas, 1932. 480 p.
32-25588 PZ3.F272Li
The story of a pregnant girl's search for her lover.
1387. Pylon. New York, Smith & Haas, 1935.
3*5 P- , 35-4415 PZ3.F272PV
A story of airplane racing contestants during a
carnival in a Southern city, this book, reflecting;
Faulkner's dislike of cities, is outside the main cur-
rent of his studies of a Southern community.
1388. Absalom, Absalom! New York, Random
House, 1936. 384 p.
36-24678 PZ3.F27-\b;
A tour de force of technical dexterity which traces
Il6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the story of a Southern planter's family in the 19th
century, as it has become known to a young college
student in the 20th century. The several threads of
narrative, each limited to that version of events
which filters through the mind and personality of
the character who narrates it, evoke a sense of the
relativity of human history and an awareness of the
symbolic significance of human character and hu-
man motives in the past, as they are known in the
present.
1389. The unvanquished. New York, Random
House, 1938. 293 p.
38-7091 PS3511.A86U5 1938
Seven short stories forming a continuous novel
which traces the life of the Sartoris family during
the Civil War and the Reconstruction period.
1390. The wild palms. New York, Random
House, 1939. 339 p.
39-1750 PZ3.F272W1
Two interwoven novelettes which develop con-
trapuntal treatments of the theme of escape. One
is the story of a New Orleans doctor who seeks with
his beloved to escape from society but winds up in
prison after the woman's death from an abortion.
The other is the story {Old Man) of a convict who
escapes from a chain gang during a flood on the
Mississippi, and in the unavoidable performance of
an act of heroism in saving the lives of a woman and
her newborn baby becomes so trammeled in respon-
sibility that he welcomes his return to prison.
1391. The hamlet. New York, Random House,
1940. 421 p.
40-7215 PS3511.A86H3 1940
A large family of lower-class whites batten upon
a Southern community through cunning exploita-
tion of Southern honor and integrity.
1392. Intruder in the dust. New York, Random
House, 1948. 247 p.
48-8519 PZ3-F272ln
Two boys, one Negro and one white, and an
aristocratic old maid accumulate the evidence to
prove the innocence and prevent the lynching of a
Negro accused of murder.
1393. Knight's gambit. New York, Random
House, 1949. 246 p.
49-11472 PZ3-F272Kn
Six stories centering about a county attorney.
1394. Collected stories. New York, Random
House, 1950. 900 p.
50-9187 PZ3.F272C0
1395. Requiem for a nun. New York, Random
House, 1951. 286 p.
51-12731 PS3511.A86R4 1951
The story of the "heroine" of Sanctuary eight years
later.
1396. A fable. [New York] Random House,
1954. 437 p. 54-6651 PZ3.F272Fab
Set against the batdegrounds of Europe in World
War I, this is the story of Christ in modern guise.
1397. Campbell, Harry M., and Ruel E. Foster.
William Faulkner, a critical appraisal. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 183 p.
51-12064 PS3511.A86Z75
1398. Coughlan, Robert. The private world of
William Faulkner. New York, Harper,
1954. 151 p. illus. 54-8943 PS3511.A86Z76
1399. Hoffman, Frederick J., and Olga W. Vick-
ery, eds. William Faulkner: two decades of
criticism. [East Lansing] Michigan State College
Press, 1951. vii, 280 p. 51-13066 PS3511.A86Z8 I
1400. Howe, Irving. William Faulkner, a critical
study. New York, Random House, 1952.
xiii, 203 p. 52-5147 PS3511.A86Z84
1401. Miner, Ward L. The world of William
Faulkner. Durham, N. C, Duke Univer-
sity Press, 1952. 170 p. 52-14931 PS3511.A86Z9
1402. O'Connor, William Van. The tangled fire
of William Faulkner. Minneapolis, Univer-
sity of Minnesota Press, 1954. 182 p.
54-5657 PS3511.A86Z93
1403. EDNA FERBER, 1887-
Edna Ferber has been successively a news-
paper reporter, a writer of short stories, a novelist,
and a playwright collaborating chiefly with George
S. Kaufman. Her sympathies, reflected in her
choice of themes, are as wide as the variations in the
American scene she portrays. She has written now
of the trials and triumphs of a middle-class business-
woman or a farm wife, now of pioneering in Okla-
homa, or again of life on a floating 19th-century
theater set up in a showboat on the Mississippi River.
Humor, rapid-paced narrative, love of life, and devo-
tion to the United States infuse her books with quali-
ties that have given them an extensive popular
appeal. Her autobiography, A Peculiar Treasure
(1939), is a document of the American experiment
that touches the life of the Nation at many points.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 117
1404. So-Big. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Page, 1924. 360 p. 24-26188 PZ3.F380S0
Story of a farm wife's work for her son.
Awarded the Pulitzer prize in 1925.
1405. Show boat. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Page, 1926. 398 p.
26-15187 PZ3.F38oSh
1406. Cimarron. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1930. 388 p.
30-8609 PZ3.F38oCi
Depicts the 1889 land rush in Oklahoma and the
later development of the area.
1407. Saratoga trunk. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 194 1. 352 p.
41-24504 PS3511.E46S3 1941
A Creole adventuress and a cowboy gambler at a
19th-century New York spa became involved in a
struggle for control of a train trunk line.
1408. One basket; thirty-one short stories. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1947. 581 p.
47-30149 PZ3.F380n
A collection that throws light on the develop-
ment of the author's style.
1409. THOMAS HORNSBY FERRIL, 1896-
Ferril, who lives in Denver, is a regional
poet. However, in terms of his own region he is
concerned with all time and all places. He watches
mountains wearing away, cities coming and going,
the passing of nations and the generations of man.
In / Hate Thursday (1946), a collection of articles
most of which were written for a weekly news-
paper, the Roc\y Mountain Herald, he comments,
with a less regional emphasis than in his poetry, on
a great variety of specific topics.
14 10. New and selected poems. New York,
Harper, 1952. 169 p.
52-8470 PS3511.E7245N4
Ferril's earlier volumes of poetry were High
Passage (1926), Westering (1934), and Trial by
Time (1944).
141 1. DOROTHEA FRANCES (CANFIELD)
FISHER, 1879-
Dorothy Canfield Fisher, whose New England
regional novels and stories of American domestic
life reveal the author's insight into the drama of
lives that on the surface seem uneventful, published
many of her early works under the name Dorothy
Canfield. Her great love for France and French
life is woven into her books as a theme second only
to that of the devotion she feels for her permanent
locale in rural Vermont. She writes in what has
come to be called the conventional manner: that
is, she designs a plot, develops her characters, tells
a story, and tends to resolve conflicts idealistically.
1412. The bent twig. New York, Holt, 1915.
480 p. 15-26659 PZ3.F53B
The development and maturing of a Middle West
university professor's daughter.
14 13. Home fires in France. New York, Holt,
1918. 306 p. 18-26756 PZ3.F53H0
Short stories based on the author's experiences in
France during World War I.
1414. The brimming cup. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1921. 409 p. 21-4168 PZ3.F53Br
Problems of modern life studied in terms of Ver-
mont characters.
14 15. Rough-hewn. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1922. 504 p. 22-19057 PZ3.F53R0
May be regarded as a "preface" to The Brimming
Cup. It presents the childhood and youth of two
of the main characters, taking them to the point
where the earlier published book begins.
1416. The deepening stream. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1930. 393 p.
30-28175 PZ3.F33De
Childhood through early married life of a woman
born in the Middle West and spending some time
in France.
1417. Seasoned timber. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1939. 485 p. 39-27079 PZ3.F53Se
A Vermont study which centers about a poor,
rural academy and a problem of democratic
principles.
14 1 8. Four-square. [Short stories] New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1949. 236 p.
49-11288 PZ3.F53F0
14 19. Vermont tradition; the biography of an
outlook on life. Boston, Little, Brown,
1953. 488 p. ^ 53-10226 F49.F57
A "spiritual" history of the author's adopted State.
1420. VARDIS ALVERO FISHER, 1895-
Vardis Fisher is a prolific novelist whose
early novels, in part autobiographical, realistically
emphasize the hardships of life and the primitive
conditions encountered on farms and in frontier
Il8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
locations in Idaho, Utah, and adjacent regions in the
Far West. In various historical novels Mr. Fisher
has developed additional themes drawn from the lit-
erature of westward migrations in America. Among
these are the discovery and final decline of the
fabulous Comstock Lode, at Virginia City, Nevada,
and the tragic suffering of the Donner Party during
their trek from Illinois to California in 1846-47. In
1952 The Island of the Innocent appeared, being
the seventh novel in a twelve-volume series entitled
The Testament of Man, designed to trace the his-
tory of mankind from prehistoric to modern times.
This constitutes the author's most ambitious effort to
portray man's struggle and attainments under dif-
ferent civilizations.
1421. Toilers of the hills. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1928. 361 p. 28-23667 PZ3.F539T0
Deals with life on a dry farm in Idaho.
1422. Dark Bridwell. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1931. 376 p. _ 3I~I44I9 Pz3-T539Dar
Elemental passions in the lives of a family on a
remote mountain farm in Idaho comprise the ma-
terials of the plot which this novel develops.
1423. In tragic life. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton
Printers, 1932. 464 p.
32-35789 PZ3.F539In
Tetralogy concerned with the long search of the
Western hero, Vridar Hunter, for the meaning of
life. Succeeding volumes in their order of publi-
cation are: Passions Spin the Plot (1934); We Are
Betrayed (1935); and No Villain Need Be (1936).
1424. Children of God. New York, Harper,
1939. 769 p. 39-27649 PZ3-F539Ch
A historical novel that treats as an American epic
the beginnings of Mormonism, the persecution of
the Mormons, and their long migration from the
Middle West to Utah.
1425. FRANCIS SCOTT KEY FITZGERALD,
1 896-1940
F. Scott Fitzgerald was one of the leading
recorders of the "jazz-age" or "frivolous twenties."
His most successful novel, The Great Gatsby, like
most of his work, dealt with millionaires, parvenus,
and the general stridency of the period, this time
mainly with a Long Island, New York, setting.
Fitzgerald's later career as a Hollywood writer is the
basis for Budd Schulberg's novel, The Disenchanted
(New York, Random House, 1950. 338 p.).
1426. This side of paradise. New York, Scribner,
1920. 305 p. 20-6430 PZ3.F5754TI1
1427. The beautiful and damned. New York,
Scribner, 1922. 449 p.
22-4437 PZ3.C5754Be
1428. The great Gatsby. New York, Scribner,
1925. 218 p. 25-10468 PZ3.F5754Gr
1429. The portable F. Scott Fitzgerald, selected by
Dorothy Parker. Introd. by John O'Hara.
New York, Viking Press, 1945. 835 p. (The Vik-
ing portable library) 45-8464 PZ3.F5754P0
Contents. — Novels: The great Gatsby. Tender
is the night. — Stories: Absolution. The baby party.
The rich boy. May day. The cut-glass bowl. The
offshore pirate. The freshest boy. Crazy Sunday.
Babylon revisited.
1430. Kazin, Alfred, ed. F. Scott Fitzgerald:
the man and his work. Cleveland, World
Pub. Co., 1 95 1. 219 p. 51-10640 PS3511.I9Z67
1431. Mizener, Arthur. The far side of paradise;
a biography of F. Scott Fitzgerald. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. xx, 362 p. ports.
51-9185 PS3511.I9Z7
"Fitzgerald's published work": p. 350-356.
1432. JOHN GOULD FLETCHER, 1886-1950
Living as an expatriated American in Eng-
land, Fletcher early wrote poetry associated with
the Imagist movement of 1907-17. In company
with Amy Lowell he also experimented with the use
of polyphonic prose. When he returned to live in
his native State, Arkansas, he wrote of that region
and on other themes native to the United States in
a vein of mysticism colored by romance. His auto-
biography, Life Is My Song (1937), indicates his
intimate association with the course of American
poetry throughout a period of significant develop
ment.
1433. Selected poems. New York, Farrar & Rine-
hart, 1938. 237 p.
38-14768 PS3511.L457A6 1938
On the basis of this volume Fletcher was awarded
the Pulitzer prize for poetry in 1939. The selec-
tions are from his earlier volumes: Irradiations, Sand
and Spray (1915), Goblins and Pagodas (1916),
The Tree of Life (1918), Breakers and Granite
(1921), The Blac\ Roc\ (1928), and XXIV Elegies
(1935). Preludes and Symphonies (1922) was a
reissue of Irradiations, Sand and Spray, and Gob-
lins and Pagodas.
1434. South star. New York, Macmillan, 194 1.
117 p. 41-6401 PS3511.L457S6 1941
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / II9
Includes a long poem in four parts, "The Story
of Arkansas," accompanied by lyrics on various
Southern themes.
1435. The burning mountain [poems] New York,
Dutton, 1946. 96 p.
46-4558 PS3511.L457B8
1436. Simon, Charlie May (Hogue) Johnswood.
New York, Dutton, 1953. 249 p.
53-6090 PS3537.I64Z5
Mrs. Fletcher's reminiscences of the home in
Arkansas and the life she shared with her husband.
1437. ESTHER FORBES, 1894?-
Esther Forbes is known for the accuracy of
her evocative historical novels depicting New Eng-
land. She conveys not only local color, but also
character. She has also written some nonfktion,
such as Paul Revere & the World He Lived In
(1942), which was awarded a Pulitzer prize for his-
tory, and The Boston Boo\ (1947), a book of photo-
graphs by Arthur Griffin for which she wrote the
text.
1438. O genteel lady! Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1926. 296 p. 26-9023 PZ3.F7418O
The Massachusetts-bred heroine confronts the
conventions and the intellectual life of the Vic-
torian period.
1439. A mirror for witches in which is reflected
the life, machinations, and death of famous
Doll Bilby, who, with a more than feminine per-
versity, preferred a demon to a mortal lover. Here
is also told how and why a righteous and most
awful judgment befell her, destroying both cor-
poreal body and immortal soul. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1928. 213 p. illus.
28-12074 PZ3.F74i8Mi
The story of a witch in 17th-century Salem,
Massachusetts.
1440. Miss Marvel. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1935. 304 p. 35-14885 PZ3.F4i8Mis
A New England mill manager's daughter achieves
spinsterhood in the hope of romantic love.
1441. Paradise. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
IQ37- 556 P- 37-27'°4 PZ3.F74i8Par
A story of colonial pioneering in early 17th-cen-
tury New England, through the beginning of King
Phillip's War.
1442. The general's lady. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1938. 394 p.
38-27638 PZ3.F74i8Ge
Love and life, with the last years of the American
Revolution for setting.
1443. The running of the tide. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1948. 632 p.
48-4573 PZ3.F7418RU
Life in later 18th- and early 19th-century Salem,
then at its height as a shipping city.
1444. Rainbow on the road. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1954. 343 p.
53-9248 PZ3.F74i8Rai
A picaresque novel about an itinerant portrait
painter in New England in the 1830's.
1445. WALDO DAVID FRANK, 1889-
Waldo Frank is the author of numerous
works, both fiction and nonaction. His greatest
reputation has been in Latin America, where,
through his lectures and writings, he has helped
gain an audience for other American authors. This
interest has been a reciprocal affair, reflected in
books such as his biography of Bolivar, Birth of a
World (195 1 ), and South American Journey (1943).
He has also written on Spanish culture in Virgin
Spain, rev. ed. (1942). In The Jew in Our Day
(1944) he discussed some of the problems of his fel-
low Jews. He has also written books on more gen-
eral aspects of American society and development,
such as Our America (1919), The Re-discovery of
America ( 1929), and In the American Jungle \ 1925-
1936] (1937), a collection of essays on industrial
America. His better-known novels, often dealing
with life in America, tend to portray social groups or
areas. They have been criticized for lack of "char-
acter" development, which is probably in part a
result of his belief that the individual is a product of
environment. In his early work Frank was a leftist,
but he turned against the Communists in the thirties.
There remains in his writings something of a mysti-
cal, prophetic quality which either permeates or
dominates his realistic work.
1446. Rahab. New York, Boni & Liveright, 1922.
250 p. 22-4977 PZ3.F8498Ra
Set in New York, this is the story of a girl who,
in purity of spirit, discovers God, while socially
lapsing into prostitution.
1447. The death and birth of David Markand, an
American story. New York, Scrihncr, 111^4.
542 p. 34-33666 PZ3.F8498De
A New York businessman leaves home and fam-
ily in search of life, and finds a new (radical) faith
after four years of wandering about America.
120 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1448. The bridegroom cometh. New York,
Doubleday, Doran, 1939. 628 p.
39-13360 PZ3.F8498Br2
A novel that reflects American life between 1914
and 1924. The story is that of an inhibited girl,
raised puritanically, who finds herself in social work
and communism.
1449. Island in the Atlantic, a novel. New York,
Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 503 p.
46-6710 PZ3.F8498IS
A novel that reflects social changes in America,
as three generations on Manhattan Island are traced
from the Civil War to 1912.
1450. Not heaven; a novel in the form of prelude,
variations, and theme. New York, Hermit-
age House, 1953. 287 p. 53-8718 PZ3.F8498N0
This is an attempt to extend the limits of the
novel; separate incidents are united by theme rather
than traditional unities of time, place, or action.
The theme might be said to be the situation of the
modern human being.
1451. ROBERT FROST, 1874-
A pastoral poet, Frost has been called a mod-
ern Theocritus. His poems are descriptive of rural
New England, mainly Vermont and New Hamp-
shire, but they take incident and environment at a
crucial, symbolic moment, which projects his idylls
into the realm of the metaphysical lyric. His poetry
has increasingly passed from an earlier relative em-
phasis on environment and setting to a more recent
elaboration of philosophical speculation. His verse
has been cast primarily in the form of lyrics or
dramatic monologues, or dialogues — with all forms
having a prominent dramatic element. This is
even further reflected in his language, which is an
adaptation of conversational style to poetic form.
Although in the main stream of modern thought,
Frost has held aloof from the urban currents and
eddies of "modern" literary convention, and re-
mains authentically representative of the indigenous
culture which absorbs but does not succumb to the
machine age.
1452. Complete poems of Robert Frost, 1949.
New York, Holt, 1949. 642 p.
49-9497 PS3511.R94 1949
This is the most recent, generally available edition
of Frost's collected writings, although there have
been many editions of his collected and selected
poetry. His earlier volumes include A Boy's Will
(1913), North of Boston (1914), Mountain Interval
(1916), New Hampshire (1923), West-Running
Broo\ (1928), A Further Range (1936), A Witness
Tree (1942), A Masque of Reason (1945), A
Masque of Mercy (1947), and Steeple Bush (1947).
Frost's many other volumes are mainly single
poems published in individual booklets.
1453. ZONA GALE, 1874-1938
Zona Gale wrote mainly novels and short
stories which, whatever the name used, had her
home town, Portage, Wisconsin, for setting. Her
early books were sentimental, regional works, such
as the popular Friendship Village (1909); however,
she soon turned from sentimental tales to realistic
works, and then, increasingly, a strain of mysticism
and a concern for social conditions infused her work.
1454. Birth. New York, Macmillan, 1918. 402 p.
18-20940 PZ3.G1319B
1455. Miss Lulu Bett. New York, Appleton, 1920.
264 p. 20-4218 PZ3.Gi3i9Mi
1456. Faint perfume. New York, Appleton, 1923.
217 p. 23-6139 PZ3.Gi3i9Fa
1457. Preface to life. New York, Appleton, 1926.
345 p. 26-18625 PZ3.Gi3i9Pr
1458. Yellow gentians and blue. New York,
Appleton, 1927. 188 p.
27-20431 PZ3-Gi3i9Ye
1459. Papa La Fleur. New York, Appleton, 1933.
154 p. 33-5483 PZ3.Gi3i9Pap
1460. ELLEN ANDERSON GHOLSON GLAS-
GOW, 1 874- 1 945
Ellen Glasgow was a Virginian who depicted
her State in realistic novels that may to some extent
be regarded as social histories. Her idealism, her
belief in the triumph of morality over futility,
always restrains and directs her literary craftsman-
ship. The worldly cause may at times be lost or
obscure, but there is always a spiritual victory. She
attempts to deal truthfully with a post-Civil War
South, presenting settings and situations that are
often grim, but relieved by her humor and affection.
Although many of her numerous books have been
acclaimed, Barren Ground (1925), Vein of Iron
(1935), and The Romantic Comedians (1926)
seem generally to be the most highly regarded.
1461. [Works] Virginia ed. New York, Scribner,
1938. 12 v. fronts.
38-24704 PS3513.L34 1938
Contents. — 1. Barren ground. — 2. The miller of
Old Church. — 3. Vein of iron. — 4. The sheltered
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 121
life. — 5. The romantic comedians. — 6. They stooped
to folly. — 7. The battle ground. — 8. The deliver-
ance.— 9. Virginia. — 10. The voice of the people. —
11. Romance of a plain man. — 12. Life and
Gabriella.
1462. In this our life. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1941. 467 p.
41-51629 PZ3.G464in
1463. The woman within. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1954. 307 p. illus.
54-11329 PS3513.L34Z5
Autobiography.
"The works of Ellen Glasgow": p. 302.
1464. CAROLINE GORDON, 1895-
Caroline Gordon, wife of Allen Tate, writes
novels and short stories dealing with the South,
especially the Kentucky-Tennessee region, and re-
flecting the philosophy of the agrarians.
1465. Penhally. New York, Scribner, 1931.
282 p. 31-25046 PZ3.C6525Pe
A story of a Kentucky family and their estate,
Penhally, from 1826 into the 20th century.
1466. Aleck Maury, sportsman. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1934. 287 p.
34-37083 PZ3.G6525A1
A character novel that takes the form of an auto-
biography of a Virginia hunting and fishing
enthusiast.
1467. The garden of Adonis. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1937. 299 p.
37-339°3 PZ3.G6525Gar
Conflicts of various social groups are presented in
this novel set against a background of present-day
plantation life in the South.
1468. None shall look back. New York, Scribner,
J937- 378 p. 37-27189 PZ3.G6525N0
Civil War story centering on the exploits of Con-
federate Major General Nathan Forrest and the part
played in the war by a Kentucky-Tennessee border
family.
1469. Green centuries. New York, Scribner, 194 1.
469 p. 41-22068 PZ3-G6525Gr
A novel of the westward movement from Virginia
into Kentucky in the years before the Revolution.
1470. The women on the porch. New York,
Scribner, 1944. 316 p.
44-4503 PZ3.G6525W0
431240—60 10
A psychological novel in which a woman leaves
her New York husband and returns to her family
home in Tennessee, where most of the story takes
place.
1 47 1. The forest of the South. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1945. 245 p. 45-9169 PZ3.G6525F0
Short stories.
1472. The strange children. New York, Scribner,
I951- 3°3P- 5!-I2447 PZ3.G6525&
A novel about a group of restless, roodess intel-
lectuals in Tennessee.
1 473. PAUL ELIOT GREEN, 1 894-
Paul Green is known primarily for his plays.
He has been called a folk dramatist, and most of his
work, including his novels and short stories, depicts
life in the South, especially in North Carolina. In
1927 his In Abraham's Bosom was awarded the
Pulitzer prize for drama.
1474. This body the earth. New York, Harper,
1935. 422 p. 35-19876 PZ3.G8248Th
A story which reflects the folkways and social
conditions of the poor tenant-farmer class of North
Carolina.
1475. Out of the South, the life of a people in
dramatic form. New York, Harper, 1939.
577 P- 39-273!7 PS35i3-R452°8 *939
Contents. — The house of Connelly. — The no
'count boy. — Saturday night. — The field god. —
Quare medicine. — The hot iron. — In Abraham's
bosom. — Unto such glory. — Supper for the dead. —
Potter's field. — The man who died at twelve
o'clock. — White dresses. — Johnny Johnson. — Hymn
to the rising sun. — The lost colony.
1476. Salvation on a string, and other tales of the
South. New York, 1946. 278 p.
46-6956 PZ3.G8248Sal
Short stories about the people of a small North
Carolina farm town.
1477. The common glory, a symphonic drama of
American history, with music, commentary,
English folksong and dance. Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press, 1948. 273 p.
48-11307 PS3513.R452C6
A spectacle drama about Virginia's contribution
to the establishment of a democratic government
in America; with Thomas Jefferson as the main
character.
122 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
I478.
1949.
1479.
Dog on the sun, a volume of stories. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
178 p. 49-11774 PZ3.G8248D0
PS3513.R452D6
Adams, Agatha B. Paul Green of Chapel
Hill; edited by Richard Walser. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Library, 1951.
vii, 116 p. (The University of North Carolina.
Library extension publication, v. 16, no. 2)
51-62187 PS3513.R452Z58
1480. SAMUEL BERNARD GREENBERG,
1893-1917
Samuel Greenberg was a Viennese Jewish im-
migrant who lived in poverty in New York. He
left school at seventh grade to work. He early
became ill with tuberculosis, and it was while in
hospitals that he found time to do almost all of his
writing. Untrained formally, and in isolation, he
wrote a highly modernistic, mystic verse which has
since come to be recognized as an extraordinary pre-
cursor of the modern school. Drawing much of
his inspiration from Emerson and Thoreau, Green-
berg himself was to have a profound influence on
Hart Crane, who read his work in manuscript.
148 1. Poems. A selection from the manuscripts,
edited with an introd. by Harold Holden and
Jack McManis; pref. by Allen Tate. New York,
Holt, 1947. 117 p. 47-4715 PS3513.R4582P6
Includes autobiographical sketch.
1482. HORACE VICTOR GREGORY, 1898-
Horace Gregory writes urbane poetry in a
dramatic tone. In addition to his poetry and some
critical work, he is known for his translation of
poems by Catullus (1931) and a History of Ameri-
can Poetry, 1900-1940 (1946), which he wrote with
his wife, Marya Zaturenska (q. v.).
1483. Selected poems. New York, Viking Press,
1951. 143 p.
51-11788 PS3513.R558A6 1951
Earlier volumes of poetry by Gregory include
Chelsea Rooming House (1930), No Retreat (1933),
Chorus for Survival (1935), and Poems, 10.30-10,40
(1941).
1484. ZANE GREY, 1872-1939
Zane Grey was an Eastern dentist who be-
came a highly successful author of westerns. How-
ever, critics considered his writing stilted, his char-
acters wooden, his situations unrealistic, and his
plots melodramatic. Despite this, he has probably
been the prime factor in crystallizing the European,
and to some extent even the American, "conception"
of early Western life. After becoming rich on the
income from his novels, Grey passed much of his
time in outdoor activities, especially fishing. This
resulted in a number of autobiographical books (dis-
cussed in the Sports and Recreation section of this
bibliography), which were more favorably received
by many critics, although less well received by the
general public. His books are still popular in cheap
editions.
1485. Riders of the purple sage. New York,
Harper, 1912. 334 p.
12-1131 PZ3.G87R1
This has probably been the most popular of the
more than fifty novels by Zane Grey. Because his
plots were almost all constructed on one basic
formula, this book may be used to exemplify that
aspect of his work which has had such a wide non-
literary influence.
i486. The Zane Grey omnibus, edited by Ruth G.
Gentles. New York, Harper, 1943. xvii,
409 p. 43-43 M PZ3.G87Zan
Contents. — Zane Grey: a biographical sketch. —
Zane Grey: an interpretation. — "The ringer." —
Wild Horse mesa, a novel. — Don, the story of a lion
dog. — Tales of fishes. — Down an unknown jungle
river. — Exercises.
1487. Karr, Jean. Zane Grey, man of the West.
New York, Greenberg, 1949. 229 p.
49-"953))Ps35I3-R6545z7 *949
"The books of Zane Grey": p. 215-229.
1488. ALFRED BERTRAM GUTHRIE, 1901-
Guthrie's novels of American migrations in
the middle of the 19th century recreate for the reader
the opening of the wilderness on the now vanished
western frontier. He writes in a poetic prose of the
pioneers' love of the new land and the open sky.
1489. The big sky [by] A. B. Guthrie, Jr. New
York, Sloane, 1947. 386 p.
47-3316 PZ3.G95876B1
1490. The way west. New York, Sloane, 1949.
340 p. 49-1 1 198 PZ3.G95876Way
1 49 1. MOSS HART, 1904-
Moss Hart, a New York dramatist, did much
of his earlier work in collaboration with George S.
Kaufman (q. v.), including such comedies as You
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 123
Can't Ta\e it With You (1937) and The Man Who
Came To Dinner ( 1939). In addition to collaborat-
ing on such plays, he acted in the capacity of libret-
tist for some musical comedies. Subsequently he
has, in addition to adaptations, undertaken some
more ambitious work in dramas which reflect on
contemporary life, such as Winged Victory (1943),
a World War II play about the air force.
1492. Light up the sky, a play. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1949. 120 p.
49-8200 PS3515.A7943L5
1493. The climate of Eden, a play; based on Edgar
Mittelholzer's novel, Shadows move among
them. New York, Random House, 1953. 177 p.
53-5528 PS3515.A7943C6
1494. ERNEST HEMINGWAY, 1898-
Hemingway as a novelist and short-story
writer evolved the journalistic style to its artistic
ultimate; from this has developed one of the most
prolific schools of modern fiction. A novelist of
pain and suffering, whose characters lose much and
gain little (though some would claim an occasional
spiritual victory, it is usually won in a lost cause),
he emphasizes conversational realism and objective
presentation, but frequently achieves the effect of
symbolic fable. His stories are usually of Ameri-
cans, but seldom of America, since they often have a
foreign setting. He was awarded the Nobel prize
for literature in 1954.
1495. The sun also rises. New York, Scribner,
1926. 259 p. 26-19106 PZ3.H3736SU
Members of the British and American element in
European society wander about the continent
(largely France and Spain) indulging in drinking,
loving, and general aimless merriment — all realis-
tically indicative of the ineffectuality of their lives.
1496. A farewell to arms. New York, Scribner,
1929. 355 p. 29-20658 PZ3.H3736Fa
A story of an American in the Italian ambulance
service and his love affair with an English nurse
in Italy during World War I.
1497. For whom the bell tolls. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1940. 471 p.
40-27732 PZ3.H3736F0
PS3515.E37F6 1940
A novel about an American in the Loyalist army
during the Spanish Civil War.
1498. The short stories: the first forty-nine stories
and the play The fifth column. New York,
Modern Library, 1942. 597 p. (The Modern Li-
brary of the world's best books)
42-36273 PS3515.E37A15 1942
1499. Across the river and into the trees. New
York, Scribner, 1950. 308 p.
50-9370 PZ3.H3736AC
A novel about an American Army officer's return
visit to Italy, after having been there during World
Wars I and II.
1500. The old man and the sea. New York,
Scribner, 1952. 140 p.
52-11935 PZ3.H3736OI
A philosophic and symbolic novelette with the
moral that man is not meant for defeat (though he
may be destroyed), this is the story of an old man
from a Cuban fishing village and his protracted
struggle with a giant fish.
1501. Atkins, John A. The art of Ernest Hem-
ingway; his work and personality. London,
Nevill, 1952. 245 p. 53-26230 PS3515.E37Z57
1502. Baker, Carlos H. Hemingway; the writer as
artist. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1952. xix, 322 p.
52-8759 PS3515.E37Z58
Bibliographical footnotes. "A working check-list
of Hemingway's prose, poetry, and journalism": p.
[299H10.
1503. Fenton, Charles A. The apprenticeship of
Ernest Hemingway: the early years. New
York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1954. xi, 302 p.
54-7968 PS3515.E37Z59
1504. McCaffery, John K. M., ed. Ernest Hem-
ingway, the man and his work. Cleveland,
World Pub. Co., 1950. 351 p.
50-10036 PS3515.E37Z7
1505. Young, Philip. Ernest Hemingway. New
York, Rinehart, 1952. 244 p. (Rinehart
critical studies) 52-5603 PS3515.E37Z96
1506. JOSEPH HERGESHEIMER, 1880-1954
Hergesheimer's earlier, more widely ac-
claimed work was mainly in the form of novels with
realistic historical backgrounds. Based on much
research, these depicted aspects of the American
past, analyzed character, and presented the "atmos-
phere" of his settings. Into such evocations of
places in the past he projected his imaginative
stories.
124 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1507. The three black Pennys. New York, Knopf,
1917. 408 p. 17-25287 PZ3.H422Th
Against a background of the Pennsylvania iron
fields, this novel depicts the rise and decline of a
family through the story of three alternate genera-
tions, starting from the late colonial period.
1508. Java Head. New York, Knopf, 1919.
255 p. 19-579 PZ3-H422ja
The story of a New England merchant vessel cap-
tain who married a Chinese wife and brought her
home to Salem, Massachusetts, when that port was
experiencing its most flourishing period.
1509. Linda Condon. New York, Knopf, 191 9.
304 p. 19-27595 PZ3.H42zLi
A character study of a woman who in social terms
is emotionally unresponsive. She lives for beauty,
in the form of personal adornment, until she per-
ceives a beauty that transcends mortality in the work
of a sculptor who has been inspired by her.
1510. Quiet cities. New York, Knopf, 1928.
354 p. 28-13911 PZ3.H422QU
Nine short stories depicting different American
cities at various points in the past, from colonial
times to the pre-Civil War period.
15 1 1. The limestone tree. New York, Knopf,
1931. 386 p. 31-2676 PZ3.H422Le
A novel with 18th- and 19th-century Kentucky for
background.
15 12. DU BOSE HEYWARD, 1 885-1 940
Heyward first gained attention as a poet,
notably with Carolina Chansons (1922), which he
wrote with Hervey Allen (q. v.). However, his
most prominent book was Porgy, a novel depicting
Negroes in Charleston, S. C, a work which was
the source of George Gershwin's opera Porgy and
Bess. Another novel on the Southern Negro was
Mamba's Daughters (1929).
15 13. Porgy. New York, Doran, 1925. 196 p.
25-17940 PZ3.H15S6P0
15 14. Durham, Frank. Du Bose Heyward, the
man who wrote Porgy. Columbia, Univer-
sity of South Carolina Press, 1954. 152 p. illus.
54-10111 PS3515.E98Z6
"An informal version of a dissertation . . . for
the Ph. D. degree at Columbia University."
15 15. ROBERT SILLIMAN HILLYER, 1895-
Robert Hillyer writes polished, conventional
poetry in the 19th-century tradition, but with a
modern temper. In his lyrics his themes tend to be
general and unlocalized; he has also written poems
for specific occasions, such as the Phi Beta Kappa
poems, two of which are included in A Letter to
Robert Frost and Others (1937), and another, "In
Time of Mistrust," is included in Pattern of a Day
(1940). Hillyer has also published two novels:
Riverhead (1932) and My Heart for Hostage
(1942).
15 16. Poems for music, 1917-1947. New York,
Knopf, 1947. 83 p.
47-5283 PS3515.I69P6
The author's selection of his seventy best lyrics.
An earlier selection of the author's poetry is his Col-
lected Verse (1933), which brings together material
from Sonnets and Other Lyrics (1917), The Five
Booths of Youth (1920), The Hills Give Promise
(1922), The Halt in the Garden (1925), The
Seventh Hill (1928) and The Gates of the Compass
(1930). Hillyer was awarded a Pulitzer prize for
poetry for this earlier collection.
1 5 17. The suburb by the sea, new poems. New
York, Knopf, 1952. 71 p.
52-5738 PS3515.I69S9
1518. SIDNEY COE HOWARD, 1891-1939
Sidney Howard was a dramatist whose plays
bear, or were borne by, a "message," so that much
of his work has been dated by the passing of time
and the specific cause which motivates them, al-
though a few survive as examples of the "newer"
realism. He was awarded the Pulitzer prize for
drama for They Knew What They Wanted, a mari-
tal comedy set in California.
15 1 9. The silver cord; a comedy in three acts.
New York, Scribner, 1927. 204 p. (The
Theatre guild library)
27-5629 PS3515.O847S5 1927
A drama of a widowed mother's pathological love
for her two sons.
1520. Yellow jack, a history by Sidney Howard, in
collaboration with Paul De Kruif. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 152 p. plates.
34-18182 PS3515.O847Y4 1934
"Based on the dramatic 'Walter Reed' chapter of
Paul de Kruif's 'Microbe hunters' . . . this play
deals with man's struggle against and final victory
over the dread yellow fever." — Publisher's announce-
ment.
1 32 1. LANGSTON HUGHES, 1902-
Hughes is a Negro writer who first gained
attention for his verse in such books as The Weary
Blues (1926) and Fine Clothing to the few (1927);
these were in part derived in form and mood from
Negro blues and jazz. More recently his prose has
received greater attention, in part because of its
presentation of Harlem Negroes. A leftist and
somewhat anti-white in the thirties, he has in recent
years written with less bias and a sense of humor.
1522. The big sea, an autobiography. New York,
Knopf, 1940. 335 p.
40-30931 PS3515.U274Z5 1940
1523. Simple speaks his mind. [New York]
Simon & Schuster, 1950. 231 p.
50-7299 PS3515.U274S53
Short stories centering about Simple, a Negro who
expresses opinions on a variety of subjects.
1524. Laughing to keep from crying. New York,
Holt, 1952. 206 p.
52-7952 PZ3.H873i3Lau
Twenty-four short stories about Negroes.
1525. Simple takes a wife. [New York] Simon &
Schuster, 1953. 240 p.
_ . , , 53-1553 PS35*5-U274S57
.Further humorous short stories centering about
Simple; occasionally there are still bitter undertones.
1526. ZORA NEALE HURSTON, 1903-
Zora Neale Hurston is a Negro who usually
writes of Negro people in Florida. She has been
commended for her recording of the folklore and
dialect of the area.
1527. Jonah's gourd vine. Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott, 1934. 316 p. 34-7611 PZ3.H9457J0
1528. Their eyes were watching God; a novel.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1937. 2^6 p.
37-18658 PZ3.H9457Th
1 1529. Seraph on the Suwanee, a novel. New
York, Scribner, 1948. 311 p.
48-8745 PZ3.H9457Se
: 1530- FEDERICO SCHARMEL IRIS, 1889-
Scharmel Iris was born in Italy; as a youth
he came to America and settled in Chicago, where
J he began to write poetry in English. His short,
' taut lyrics are little known, despite the fact that they
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 125
have been brilliantly praised by a number of
prominent authors, including William Butler Yeats,
who wrote: "Of poets writing today there is no
greater!" Iris' first volume, Lyrics of a Lad, ap-
peared in 1914; there followed a period of disap-
pearing manuscripts, so that it was not until 1953
that a second volume appeared, reprinting some of
the work in the earlier book. Much of his work
has been published in periodicals under various
pseudonyms.
1 53 1. Bread out of stone. [Poems] Chicago,
Regnery, 1953. 62 p.
53-8795 PS3517.R5B7
1532. ROBINSON JEFFERS, 1887-
Isolated in his "inevitable place" on the spec-
tacular California coast near Carmel, Jeffers has
looked at America and the world, where he has seen
evil, decadence, and tragedy as inevitable accom-
paniments of human, particularly of family, rela-
tions. So extreme is his vision of sin that it attains
some of the characteristics of romanticism, although
of an inverted kind. His long narrative poems deal
with murder, incest, and horrors equal to them; his
short poems also express what he calls a philosophic
mood of "Inhumanness." These startling, if un-
convincing, revelations of total depravity are set
forth powerfully in poems marked by technical pro-
ficiency and imaginative use of themes drawn in
part from classical and Biblical sources, and from
the folklore of California. In recent years Jeffers
has increasingly devoted his talents to making free
adaptations of classical Greek tragedy. His most
recent work of this kind is The Cretan Woman,
first performed in 1954.
1533. The women at Point Sur. New York, Boni
&Liveright ['1927] 175 p.
44-35263 PS3519.E27W6 1927a
1534. Selected poetry. New York, Random
House, 1938. 622 p.
38-28958 PS3519.E27A6 1938
Presents some new poems and about one half of
the poet's previously published work; includes selec-
tions from Tamar and Other Poems (1924), Roan
Stallion (1925), Cawdor (1928), Dear fudas (1929),
Thurso's Landing (1932), Give Your Heart to the
llaw\s (1933), Solstice (1935), and Such Counsels
You Gave to Me ( 1937).
1535. Medea, freely adapted from the Medea of
Euripides by Robinson JefTcrs. New York,
Random House, 1946. 107 p.
46-25159 PA3975.M4J4
126 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1536. Hungerfield, and other poems. New York,
Random House, 1954. 115 p.
53-9714 PS3519.E27H9
Includes The Cretan Woman.
1537. JAMES WELDON JOHNSON, 1 871-1938
Johnson was a Negro author of diversified
interests who was probably best known for some of
his poetry. His versified Negro sermons are imag-
inative interpretations, in the idiom of primitive
religion, of the character and quality of his race.
Although he strove for objectivity on the matter,
race consciousness is a strong element in his work.
1538. God's trombones; seven Negro sermons in
verse. New York, Viking Press, 1927. 56 p.
27-12269 PS3519.O2625G6 1927
1539. Along this way; the autobiography of James
Weldon Johnson. New York, Viking Press,
1933. 418 p. 33-29 189 E185.97.J69
1540. Saint Peter relates an incident, selected
poems. New York, Viking Press, 1935.
105 p. 35-22368 PS3519.O2625A6 1935
1 54 1. MACKINLAY KANTOR, 1904-
Kantor is a Midwestern author whose many
works cover a wide range. In The Voice of Bugle
Ann (1935) and its sequel The Daughter of Bugle
Ann (1952) he presented two widely read foxhound
stories which represent the rural-life animal-story
genre in popular American fiction. Typical of the
patriotic and sentimental strains in much of his
work is God and My Country (1954), a novelette in
praise of the Roy Scouts. Author's Choice (1944)
is a selection of forty of his short stories. While he
has written in such forms as adventure and mystery
stories, and poetry, much of his more serious work
has gone into historical fiction dealing with the
Civil War.
1542. Long remember. New York, Coward-Mc-
Cann, 1934. 411 p.
34-27082 PZ3.K142L0
A novel dealing with the Battle of Gettysburg.
1543. But look, the morn. New York, Coward-
McCann, 1947. 308 p.
47-30121 PS3521.A47Z5
The story of the author's childhood in a small
Iowa town.
1544. Andersonville. Cleveland, World Pub. Co.,
1955. 767 p. 55-8257 PZ3.Ki42An
A novel, presenting by implication the entire Civil
War, but dealing specifically with a notorious
prisoner-of-war camp in Georgia.
1545. GEORGE SIMON KAUFMAN, 1889-
George S. Kaufman is a New Yorker who
has been a journalist and director as well as a play-
wright. He has worked on many popular, humor-
ous plays. For most of these he acted as a
collaborator, commonly with authors such as Moss
Hart, Marc Connelly, Edna Ferber, Morris Ryskind,
and Ring Lardner. His work, much of which takes
the form of satire on aspects of American life, is
noted for its "wise-crack" element.
1546. Merton of the movies, in four acts, a
dramatization of Harry Leon Wilson's story
of the same name, by George S. Kaufman and Marc
Connelly. New York, French, 1925. 112 p.
illus. (French's standard library edition)
25-9428 PS3521.A727M4 1925
1547. Stage door, a play in three acts, by Edna
Ferber and George S. Kaufman. New
York, Dramatists Play Service, 1938. 165 p. illus.
38-25234 PS3511.E46S8 1938
1548. Six plays by Kaufman and Hart, with an
introd. by Brooks Atkinson. New York,
Modern Library [ci942] xxxii, 586 p. (The Modern
Library of the world's best books)
44-8784 PS3521.A727S5 1942a
Contents. — Men at work, by Moss Hart. —
Forked lightning, by G. S. Kaufman. — Once in a
lifetime. — Merrily we roll along. — You can't take it
with you. — The American way. — The man who
came to dinner. — George Washington slept here.
1549. The late George Apley, a play by John P.
Marquand and George S. Kaufman, based
on Mr. Marquand's novel. [New York] Drama-
tists Play Service, 1946. 72 p.
46-20312 PS3525.A6695L3 1946
1550. The solid gold Cadillac; a comedy, by
Howard Teichmann and George S. Kauf-
man. New York, Random House, 1954. 151 p.
illus. 54-8795 PS3539.E24S6
155 1. OLIVER LA FARGE, 1901-
La Farge is an anthropologist, ethnologist,
and archaeologist whose writings deal in large part
with American Indians; his main interest is in the
Navajos. His first novel, Laughing Boy, was
awarded the Pulitzer prize for fiction and remains,
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 127
in the opinion of many, his most successful work.
He dealt with the Navajos again in The Enemy
Gods (1937), a thesis novel which depicts the Indi-
an's inability to adapt to the white man's way of
life. Less directly concerned with Indians were
books such as the autobiography Raw Material
(1945), and Eagle In the Egg (1949), the official
history of the Air Transport Command.
1552. Laughing Boy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1929. 302 p. 29-23247 PZ3.Li29Lau
1553. All the young men; stories. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1935. 272 p.
35-13561 PZ3.L129AI
Contents. — Hard winter. — All the young men. —
Haunted ground. — A family matter. — North is
black. — Higher education. — The goddess was mor-
tal.— Dangerous man. — Love charm. — Women at
Yellow wells. — Camping on my trail. — No more
Bohemia.
1554. RING WILMER LARDNER, 1 885-1933
In a slangy, conversational style Ring Lard-
ner wrote mordant, humorous stories, most popu-
larly and prominently about baseball figures. His
own most acclaimed collections were How To Write
Short Stories (1924) and The Love Nest, and Other
Stories (1926).
1555. The portable Ring Lardner. Edited, and
with an introd. by Gilbert Seldes. New
York, Viking Press, 1946. 756 p. (The Viking
portable library) 46-7398 PS3523.A7A6 1946
1556. WILLIAM ELLERY CHANNING
LEONARD, 1 876-1 944
Leonard, for many years a professor in the Eng-
lish Department at the University of Wisconsin,
wrote imaginatively on psychological aspects of his
personal experience; his scholarly work was done
largely in the field of translations of epical works
in different languages. The personal works range
through the autobiographical poetry of Two Lives
(1923) and his psychoanalytic autobiography to his
posthumously published volume of sonnets, A Man
Against Time, an Heroic Dream (1945). His in-
tense poetic feeling, expressed in academic and
traditional form, is thought by some critics to have
found more enduring expression in his metrical
translations of Beowulf, Gilgamesh, the De Rerum
Natura of Lucretius, and the fragments of Empe-
docles. He also made a notable contribution to
regional drama with Red Bird (1923), a play based
on a story of Wisconsin pioneer days.
1557. The locomotive-god. New York, Century,
1927. 434 p. 27-20232 PS3523.E62Z5
The author's autobiography in which, by psycho-
analysis, he traces the origin of certain mental
maladies.
1558. A son of earth, collected poems. New York,
Viking Press, 1928. x, 235 p.
28-23943 PS3523.E62S5 1928
1559. SINCLAIR LEWIS, 1885-195 1
Lewis rose to prominence through his ro-
mantically realistic novels of middle class life in the
Midwest. Most of his work is satiric; his charac-
ters are usually types (businessman, preacher, social
worker, etc.) rather than individuals; and his novels
verge on being (and sometimes openly are) social
tracts. As the first American to be awarded the
Nobel prize for literature (1930), his reputation
and influence have been extensive. The novels with
which he first gained fame are usually considered
his best.
1560. Main Street, the story of Carol Kennicott.
New York, Harcourt, Brace & Howe, 1920.
451 p. 20-18934 PZ3.L5884Ma
The story of a well-educated but limited young
woman who tries to introduce culture and taste into
a small, unimaginative, Minnesota town.
1561. Babbitt. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1922.
401 p. 22-14419 PZ3.L5884Ba
Babbitt is the stereotyped businessman hero in this
satirical novel of a Midwestern urban society with
generally restricted views and values.
1562. Arrowsmith. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1925. 448 p. 25-6078 PZ3-L5884Ar
The story of a doctor's career, this novel was
awarded a Pulitzer prize for literature in 1926, but
Lewis declined it.
1563. Elmer Gantry. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1927. 432 p. 27-4761 PZ3.L5884E1
A novel satirizing religious hypocrisy.
1564. Dodsworth, a novel. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1929. 337 p.
29-26270 PZ3.L5884D0
The story of an American businessman from a
Midwestern city who, after retirement, travels to
Europe in search of culture. Dodsworth is Bab-
bitt's alterego.
128 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1565. Ann Vickers. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, Doran, 1933. 562 p.
33-27006 PZ3.L,5884An
PS3523.E94A67
A study of a woman social worker and the ques-
tion of a woman's place in American society.
1566. It can't happen here; a novel. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. 458 p.
35-19689 PZ3.L5884lt
An imaginary story of the establishment of a dic-
tatorial, fascistic government in America.
1567. Gideon Planish, a novel. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1943. 438 p.
43-51122 PZ3.L5884Gi
A satire exposing the racket of organized philan-
thropy.
1568. Cass Timberlane, a novel of husbands and
wives. New York, Random House, 1945.
390 p. 45-4918 PZ3.L5884Cas
A novel about a respected, middle-aged judge in
a Minnesota town who takes a young, second wife;
the book presents many standard American senti-
mental and cynical observations on marriage.
1569. Kingsblood royal. New York, Random
House, 1947. 348 p.
47-2064 PZ3.L5884Ki
A social document novel on the Negro problem.
1570. From Main Street to Stockholm; letters of
Sinclair Lewis, 1919-1930. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1952. 307 p.
52-6449 PS3523.E94Z53
157 1. LUDWIG LEWISOHN, 1882-
Lewisohn is probably best known for his novels,
which are largely propagandist^ works giving his
views on recurrent subjects such as sex, marriage,
divorce, and the positions of Jews in society. Rival-
ing the best of these in popularity, and by some the
most esteemed of his productions, have been his
autobiographical works. He has also gained prom-
inence through other forms, such as his book on
the American spirit revealed in literature, Expres-
sion in America (1932; a postscript was added to
the 1939 edition, which bore the later title: The
Story of American Literature); his dramatic articles
from The Nation, reprinted in The Drama and the
Stage (1922); his lay philosophical work, such as
The Permanent Horizon; A New Search for Old
Truths (1934); and, among his nonfiction books
dealing specifically with Jews, The American few,
Character and Destiny (1950). It has been claimed
that Lewisohn's work is usually too largely polem-
ical or pamphleteering to be literature; but most
critics have admired his lucid, expressive style, his
penetration; his realistic post-Freudian presenta-
tions, and the spirit with which he works in behalf
of his beliefs, have also won praise.
1572. Up stream; an American chronicle. New
York, Boni & Liveright, 1922. 248 p.
22-5315 PS3523.E96Z5 1922
Autobiography.
Continued in Mid-Channel.
1573. The case of Mr. Crump. Paris, E. W. Titus,
1926. 435 p. NN
Story of a young musician from South Carolina
who goes to New York, where he is seduced by an
older woman. The bulk of the book is a bitter
expose of 12 years of miserable marriage, acridly
presenting one of the most unpleasant women in
world literature.
The book was for some time banned from the
mails.
A paperback edition appeared in 1947 under the
title The Tyranny of Sex.
1574. The island within. New York, Harper,
1928. 350 p. 28-6770 PZ3.L591IS
The story of a Jewish Polish family that immi-
grates to America, but maintains its essential
Jewishness.
'575-
Mid-channel; an American chronicle. New
York, Harper, 1929. 310 p.
29-9655 PS3523.E96Z55
Autobiography: a continuation of the author's Up
Stream.
1576. Stephen Escott. New York, Harper, 1930.
315 p. 30-7110 PZ3.L59iSt
A sociological novel discussing the problem of sex
and marriage.
1577. The golden vase. New York, Harper,
1931. 141 p. 31-28151 PZ3.L591G0
A philosophical novelette on the theme of love
renounced because of age and lack of courage.
1578. Renegade. New York, Dial Press, 1942.
333 p. 42-6285 PZ3-L59iRe
A historical novel set in France at the time of
Louis XIV, this is the story of a wealthy Jew who
leaves his religion for love, but after a period of
adversity discovers how deep is his religious
connection.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 129
1579. Anniversary. [New York] Farrar, Straus,
1948, ci946. 304 p. 48-5114 PZ3.L,59iAn
A stream-of-consciousness novel set in a small
New England city, and with sex, love, marriage,
divorce, and middle-class morality for themes.
1580. NICHOLAS VACHEL LINDSAY, 1879-
193 1
Vachel Lindsay, a regional poet intimately asso-
ciated with the Middle West, was one of the "new"
poets who came into prominence during the First
World War. His chief claims to being an innovator
lie in the derivation of his verse forms from ballads
and folk songs, and in his use of American themes,
frequently unconventional, originating in his own
experiences of camp meetings and revivals, in his
friendship with hobos and laborers, and from tales
of folk heroes, real and imaginary. He conceived
of poetry as an oral art, comparable to a "higher
vaudeville" in which the arts of music and poetry
were to be blended in a result that was to be chanted
rather than read. Devotion to his own idealized and
romanticized dream of democracy in America was a
dominant influence in his work.
1581. Collected poems. Rev. and illustrated ed.
New York, Macmillan, 1925. 464 p.
25-10046 PS3523.I58A17 1925
Lindsay's early poetry was first printed in pam-
phlets meant to be traded for food and shelter dur-
ing his wanderings about the country; perhaps the
most famous of these early works is Rhymes to Be
Traded for Bread (1912?). As he emerged from
his formative period, he produced a series of books
on which his fame mainly rests: General William
Booth Enters into Heaven, and Other Poems (19 13),
The Congo, and Other Poems (1914), and The
Chinese Nightingale, and Other Poems (1917).
Thereafter Lindsay continued to be prolific, but
the quality of his work declined. The later volumes
include The Daniel Jazz, and Other Poems (1920),
Going-to-the-Sttn (1923), Going-to-the-Stars (1926),
The Candle in the Cabin (1926), and Every Soul
Is a Circus (1929). A volume of Selected Poems
was published in 1931.
1582. Harris, Mark. City of discontent; an in-
terpretative biography of Vachel Lindsay,
being also the story of Springfield, Illinois, USA,
and of the love of the poet for that city, that State
and that Nation. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952.
403 p. 52-5806 PS3523.I58Z6
1583. AMY LOWELL, 1874-1925
Amy Lowell was a New Englander of great
strength and will who resolved to be a poet. With
her second book, Sword Blades and Poppy Seed, she
started the experimentation which in large measure
was to make her name. Using a technique of free
verse in "polyphonic prose," she practiced her theory
of imagism, — meanwhile largely taking over the
Imagist movement and shaping it to her own ends.
Mainly a poet of the visual, she at times projected
moods and emotional overtones into her imagery,
thus reflecting her personality. In her later work
the influence of Chinese poetry, particularly its
imagery, reinforced the already established emphasis
on the visual in her work. Vitality and experi-
mentation applied to the Imagist theory were the
factors by which this determined woman achieved
for herself a position as a poet. These qualities
were well represented in Men, Women, and Ghosts,
which some have considered her best book, in
Legends, and in What's OCloc\, a posthumous
volume which was awarded the Pulitzer prize.
1584. Complete poetical works. With an introd.
by Louis Untermeyer. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1955. xxix, 607 p.
55-6949 PS3523.O88 1955
In addition to some "new" poems, this volume
contains the work previously published in A Dome
of Many-Coloured Glass (1912), Sword Blades and
Poppy Seed (1914), Men, Women, and Ghosts
(1916), Can Grande's Castle (1918), Pictures of the
Floating World (1919), Legends (1921), Fir -Flower
Tablets (1922), A Critical Fable (1922), What's
0'Cloc\ (1925), East Wind (1926), and Ballads
for Sale (1927).
1585. ARCHIBALD MacLEISH, 1892-
Although influenced by many poets, Mao-
Leish has evolved his own individual poetic style
and statement. His great skill in handling poetic
forms has been employed in a large body of work.
Increasingly over the years he had tended to con-
ceive of the poet as social force, a role in which he
has expounded views on national and international
questions of much moment, using prose as well as
poetry as a medium for this purpose, e. g., in his
selected addresses, A Time to Act (1943). At his
best in the short lyric, MacLeish nevertheless
achieved a tour de force, which some have regarded
as his masterpiece, in Conquistador (1932), a story
of the conquest of Mexico, written in terza rima.
He has also gone far in developing some outstand-
ing radio scripts in dramatic-narrative verse.
1586. Collected poems, 1917-1952. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 407 p.
52-6083 PS3525.A27A17 [952
In addition to a group of new poems, this volume
130 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
contains material from earlier books and booklets
such as The Happy Marriage (1924), The Pot of
Earth (1925), Streets in the Moon (1926), The
Hamlet of A. MacLeish (1928), Einstein (1929),
New Found Land (1930), Conquistador, Frescoes
for Mr. Rockefeller's City (1933), Poems, 1924-
I933 (I933)> Public Speech (1936), America Was
Promises (1939), and Actfive, and Other Poems
(1948).
1587. This music crept by me upon the waters.
[A play] Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1953. 38 p. (The Poets' theatre series, 1)
54-5428 PS3525.A27T47
1588. Songs for Eve. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1954. 58 p. 54-9118 PS3525.A27S72
1589. JOHN PHILLIPS MARQUAND, 1893-
John P. Marquand writes popularly success-
ful novels which usually depict society in New Eng-
land, frequently in Massachusetts. Often his char-
acters are from the upper classes and are trying
to live in accord with values which are no longer
valid or are at least debatable. A strain of humor,
frequently satire, runs through a large part of his
work.
1590. The late George Apley; a novel in the form
of a memoir. Boston, Little, Brown, 1937.
354 p. 37-646 PZ3.M34466Lat2
1591. Wickford Point. Boston, Little, Brown,
I939- 458 p- 39-27145 PZ3.M34466Wi
1592. H. M. Pulham, Esquire. Boston, Little,
Brown, 194 1. 431 p.
41-51574 PZ3.M34466H2
A serial version of this story appeared in McCall's
under the title of "Gone Tomorrow."
1593. So little time. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943.
594 P- 43~I2I44 PZ3-M34466
1594. Repent in haste. Boston, Little, Brown,
1945. 152 p. 45-9462 PZ3.M34466Re
1595. Melville Goodwin, USA. Boston, Litde,
Brown, 195 1. 596 p.
51-12737 PZ3.M34466Me
1596. Point of no return. Boston, Little, Brown,
J949- 559 P- 49-7556 PZ3.M34466P0
1597. Sincerely, Willis Wayde. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1955. 511 p.
55-5534 PZ3.M34466Si
1598. Hamburger, Philip P. J. P. Marquand, Es-
quire, a portrait in the form of a novel. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 114 p.
52-9587 PS3525.A6695Z7
A biographical study written in a style imitating
Marquand's novels.
1599. EDGAR LEE MASTERS, 1868-1950
Masters' one great popular success was the
Spoon River Anthology, a collection of free verse
poems inspired by the Gree\ Anthology and meant
to represent truthful epitaphs spoken in death by
residents of the Spoon River cemetery. In this way
a small Midwestern community is "brought to life."
Most of Masters' other work was imitation of better
known 19th-century poets. Across Spoon River
( 1936) is his autobiography.
1600. Spoon River anthology. New York, Mac-
millan, 1915. 248 p.
15-8027 PS3525.A83S5 1915
1601. Selected poems. New York, Macmillan,
1925. 411 p.
25-18498 PS3525.A83A6 1925
This volume contains selections from Spoon
River Anthology (1915), Songs and Satires (1916),
The Great Valley (1917), Toward the Gulf (1918),
Starved Roc\ (1919), Domesday Boo^ (1920), The
Open Sea (1921), and The New Spoon River
(1924). Because the selection was made to repre-
sent all his work, less than a tenth of his major
volume has been included.
1602. HENRY LOUIS MENCKEN, 1880-1956
In his period of greatest activity and fame
H. L. Mencken was primarily a journalist with a
flair for attacking "established nonsense" (some
liked to call him an iconoclast); his views found
expression through periodicals such as The Smart
Set, The American Mercury, and the Baltimore Sun.
Since most of his work dealt with matters of current
interest, it now seems in large part to be dated. His
studies of the American language and the auto-
biographical "Days," which reflected life in Balti-
more, are of more significance to the student of
American civilization.
1603. The American language; an inquiry into the
development of English in the United States.
[4th ed., corr., enl., and rewritten] New York,
Knopf, 1936. 769 p.
36-27236 PE2808.M4 1936
Includes bibliographies.
Supplements I and II appeared in 1945 and 1948.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I3I
1604. The days of H. L. Mencken: Happy days,
Newspaper days, Heathen days. New York,
Knopf, 1947. L958J p.
47-1 1 23 1 PS3525.E43D34
Each part has special t. p. and is paged separately.
1605. A Mencken chrestomathy, edited and an-
notated by the author. New York, Knopf,
1949. 627 p. 49~3894 PS3525.E34A6 1949
1606. Kemler, Edgar. The irreverent Mr. Menc-
ken. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. x, 317 p.
illus. 5°-Till PS3525-E43Z59 i95°
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [295J-303). "Chronology of . . . [H. L.
Mencken's] books": p. [3041-306.
1607. Manchester, William R. Disturber of the
peace; the life of H. L. Mencken. New
York, Harper, 195 1. xiv, 336 p. ports.
51-9028 PS3525.E43Z67
"Bibliographical note": p. 317-322.
1608. EDNA ST. VINCENT MILLAY, 1892-
1950
Miss Millay was a very popular poet who was
most renowned for her highly romantic lyrics, es-
pecially some of her sonnets expressing passionate
love of life and beauty. Although her main achieve-
ment was in shorter works, her one-act play Aria
da Capo (1921) successfully satirized war and war-
makers. This play was included with Two Slatterns
and a King (1921) and The Lamp and the Bell
(1921) in the volume Three Plays (1926). Perhaps
her best-known play is The King's Henchman
(1927), which with slight modifications was used
as the libretto for an opera by Deems Taylor (b.
1885). In the thirties Miss Millay cultivated, with-
out great poetic success, the "social consciousness"
required by the period; this culminated in The
Murder of Lidice (1942), a narrative poem about
one of the atrocities of the early years of World
War II. Her posthumous Letters (1952) reflect
aspects of her life and personality not always clear in
her poetry itself.
1609. Collected poems. New York, Harper, 1956.
738 p. 56-8756 PS3525.I495A17 1956
Other volumes of poetry by Millay include Renas-
cence (1917), A Few Figs from Thistles (1921),
Second April (1921), TheBuc\in the Snow (1928),
Fatal Interview (1931), Wine from These Crapes
(1934), Conversation at Midnight (1937), Hunts-
man, What Quarry? (1939), and Ma\e Bright the
Arrows (1940). Mine the Harvest (1954) was a
posthumous collection of her poems which had not
previously appeared in volume form. Collected
Sonnets (1941) and Collected Lyrics (1943) present
most of her poetry arranged by type; this same di-
vision is to some extent retained in the Collected
Poems.
1610. Sheean, Vincent. The indigo bunting; a
memoir of Edna St. Vincent Millay. New
York, Harper, 1951. 131 p.
51-13495 PS3525.I495Z8
1 6 1 1 . HENRY MILLER, 1 89 1-
Miller has striven to express imaginatively in
his fiction and books of travel his concepts of reality.
He has on occasion treated the theme of the Ameri-
can expatriate in Europe between 1928 and 1939.
The frankness with which details of physical experi-
ence are presented in some of his novels aroused of-
ficial disapproval in America and made it impossible
to publish in this country books such as his Tropic of
Cancer (1935), which is an autobiographical story
of an American expatriate in Paris, and Blacl{
Spring (1936), which pictures bums, cafe habitues,
etc., in Paris. The esthetic merits and/or social
justification or desirability cf Miller's works, which
are largely autobiographical and inclined to be radi-
cal, have brought forth sharply conflicting views
from the critics, some of whom consider him a major
author to be praised for his extraordinary vigor and
realism, while others deliver an equally strong
denunciation.
1 6 12. Tropic of Capricorn. Paris, Obelisk Press
[1939] 367 p.
39-13888 PS3525.I5454T8 1939 RBD
A vivid, if revolting, account of the life of an
absolute dissident who despises, or pretends to des-
pise, megalopolitan humanity as represented by life
in New York City during the first quarter ol the
20th century, but who relishes every detail of his
personal existence, particularly the physiological
ones.
1613. The air-conditioned nightmare. New York,
New Directions, 1945-47. 2 v-
45-11390 E169.M0
Based on his travels about the United States, this
book reflects the author's critical reaction to. and
emotional rejection of the country. His antipathy
is intense, and he finds himself most comfortable
with people in Indian reservations or tin distinc
tively foreign (especially it poorer) sections of the
cities. The second volume bore the title Remember
to Remember.
132 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1614. MARY BRITTON MILLER ("ISABEL
BOLTON"), 1883-
Mary Miller's career as an author started with
poetry, but she first gained general acclaim with
the publication in 1943 of her first novel, In the Days
of Youth, a story set in New England in the late 19th
century. In the forties she began to write under
the pseudonym "Isabel Bolton." The short novels
with New York City settings which she published
under this name have been highly regarded for
their style and a lyric quality in precise phrasing and
in situation.
1615. Do I wake or sleep, by Isabel Bolton
[pseud.] New York, Scribner, 1946.
202 p. 47-1265 PZ3.M61573D0
1616. The Christmas tree, by Isabel Bolton
[pseud.] New York, Scribner, 1949.
212 p. 49-7858 PZ3.M6i573Ch
1617. Many mansions [by] Isabel Bolton [pseud.]
New York, Scribner, 1952. 215 p.
52-12830 PZ3.M6i573Man
1618. MARGARET MITCHELL, 1900-1949
Margaret Mitchell's one book was a historical
novel of Georgia during the Civil War and the Re-
construction. In publication terms it is said to have
been the most successful publication of the century,
having sold unprecedented numbers of copies on an
international scale; it is still selling well. It was
also the source of a highly popular motion picture.
1619. Gone with the wind. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1936. 1037 p.
36-27334 PZ3.M69484G0
1620. MARIANNE MOORE, 1887-
Marianne Moore's poetry, based on mathe-
matical syllabic patterns, is precise in word usage,
at times exotic in either its subject matter or its
attitudes, and often of abstract philosophical back-
ground. She is an objectivist who devotes much
attention to fauna such as the jerboa. She believes
poems should be ". . . imaginary gardens with
real toads in them."
162 1. Collected poems. New York, Macmillan,
1951. 180 p.
51-14374 PS3525.O5616A6 1951a
This collection includes poems from the author's
earlier volumes Selected Poems (1935), What Are
Years (1941), and Nevertheless (1944), as well as
a group of poems which had not previously been
brought together in book form.
1622. Predilections. New York, Viking Press,
1955. 171 p. 55-7376 PS3525.O5616P7
A volume of literary criticism made up of articles,
essays, and reviews.
1623. MERRILL MOORE, 1903-
It has been estimated that Dr. Moore has
already written some 100,000 sonnets. While he
writes in a nominally traditional form, he is modern-
istic in his free treatment of it, and often also in
his subject matter. Many of his sonnets are auto-
biographical, often reflecting his Southern back-
ground or his experiences as a psychiatrist.
1624. M; one thousand autobiographical sonnets.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 1000 p.
39-537 PS3525.O563M2 1938
1625. Clinical sonnets. New York, Twayne,
1949. 72 p. [The Twayne library of
modern poetry, 6] 49-50118 PS3525.O563C6
1626. Illegitimate sonnets. New York, Twayne,
1950. 125 p. 5!-225 pS3525-0563U
1627. More clinical sonnets. New York, Twayne,
1953. 72 p. 53-"72 PS3525.O563M6
1628. Wells, Henry W. Poet and psychiatrist:
Merrill Moore, M. D.; a critical portrait with
an appraisal of two hundred of his poems. New
York, Twayne, 1955. 325 p.
55-3466 PS3525.O563Z94
1629. OGDEN NASH, 1902-
Nash, who is noted for the tortured rhymes
and irregular rhythms of his light verse, in which
he expresses gently ironic commentaries on life, is
commonly considered America's best modern
humorous poet.
1630. I'm a stranger here myself. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1938. 283 p.
3&-27468 PS3527.A637I5 1938
1 63 1. Good intentions. Boston, Little, Brown,
1942. 180 p. 42-25547 PS3527.A637G6
1632. Many long years ago. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1945. xvii, 333 p.
45-8449 PS3527.A637M3
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 133
1633. Versus. Boston, Little, Brown, 1949.
169 p. 49-7579 Ps3527-A637v4
1634. The private dining room, and other new
verses. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 169 p.
52-12647 PS3527.A637P73
1635. ROBERT GRUNTAL NATHAN, 1 894-
Robert Nathan's first critical acclaim came
for his book Autumn (1921), a Vermont pastoral
characteristic of most of his work. His books are
usually very short imaginative novelettes of fantasy
written in a style that has often been called poetic and
delicate, and which are pervaded by a tenderness
that eliminates almost any astringent effects from
the irony and satire of his humor. His books range
from The Puppet Master (1923), wherein dolls con-
verse, through Journey of Tapiola (1938), the ad-
ventures of a terrier in New York, to Road of Ages
(1935), the story of a caravan of Jews wending their
way to a new home, and But Gently Day (1943), a
tale of a young airman, killed in the war, who in
the moment before dying joins his ancestors of the
Civil War period and has a love affair with his
grandmother. Children, animals, toys, and dreams
recur in Nathan's stories, but he considers them to
be as real as famine, floods, share-croppers, produc-
tion lines, and slums, and so defends himself from
charges of irreality and irrelevance. Nathan has
also written several volumes of formal, conservative
verse; The Green Leaf (1950) was a volume of col-
lected poems.
1636. One more spring. New York, Knopf, 1933.
212 p. 33-3086 PZ3.Ni950n
A novelette in which some characters take refuge,
during a depression winter, in a shed in New York's
Central Park.
1637. The Barly fields, a collection of five novels.
New York, Knopf, 1938. xiv, 523 p.
38-27469 PZ3.Ni95Bar
Contents.— The fidler in Barly.— The wood-
cutter's house. — The bishop's wife. — The orchid. —
There is another heaven.
1638. Winter in April. New York, Knopf, 1938.
228 p. 38-27028 PZ3.Ni95Wi
A novel, without much of the usual fantasy, in
which youth and age fall in love.
1639. Portrait of Jennie. New York, Knopf, 1940.
212 p. 40-27011 PZ3.N195P0
A fantasy in time which seems to imply a mystical
belief in the immortality of the soul.
1640. Journal for Josephine. New York, Knopf,
1943. 142 p. 43-2244 PS3527.A74J6
A picture of Cape Cod during the summer of
1942; to some extent it may be generalized to a
picture of the home front during World War II.
1641. The married look. New York, Knopf,
1950. 195 p. 50-13123 PZ3-Ni95Mar
Another romantic fantasy in time.
1642. The innocent Eve. New York, Knopf, 195 1.
184 p. 51-10299 PZ3.Ni95ln
Lucifer visits New York with his secretary.
1643. Sir Henry. New York, Knopf, 1955, '1954.
187 p. 54-12039 PZ7.Ni95Si
A satirical fantasy.
1644. JOHN GNEISENAU NEIHARDT, 1881-
Neihardt's major undertaking was a series of
epics depicting the trans-Missouri country in the
19th century, particularly the 1880's. In iambic
pentameter rhymed couplets he wrote of the pioneers
and the Indians. His prose, dealing with much the
same theme and setting, is linguistically less
artificial.
1645. A cycle of the West: The song of three
friends [1919], The song of Hugh Glass
[1915], The song of fed Smith [1941], The song of
the Indian Wars [1925], The song of the Messiah
[1935]. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 254, 113,
179, no p. 49-8578 PS3527.E35C8
1646. When the tree flowered; an authentic tale of
the old Sioux world. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1 95 1. 248 p. 51-6974 PZ3.N3i6Wh
1647. EUGENE GLADSTONE O'NEILL, 188S-
*953
Eugene O'Neill emerged, through the experi-
mentalist little theater movement in general and
the Provincetown Playhouse in particular, as Amer-
ica's first major dramatist; in doing this he set aside
a dramatic tradition of theater as craft alone, and
established one of theater as art. O'Neill's plays are
a search for the nature of tragedy in modern times.
Life must be meaningfully expressed in a relation-
ship between the individual (frequently
through Freudian theories) and forces, internal or
external, which are beyond his control, rather than
one between man and God. This concept may be
clearly seen in Mourning Becomes Klcctra, a Trilogy,
wherein the ancient Greek tragedy, or tragedies, of
Agamemnon, Orestes, Electra, el al., is transformed
and transferred to New England of the period fol
134 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lowing the Civil War. Also regularly recurrent is
the character's struggle to find his place in the world
and with regard to himself: either finding it, as in
Lazarus Laughed; or losing himself successfully in
a world of fantasy, as in the philosophical The Ice-
man Cometh; or losing himself unsuccessfully in
despair, as in The Hairy Ape. While normally a
romantic realist, seeking a rational ideal, he turned
occasionally to a more visionary type of drama,
which reached its peak in the affirmative vision of
Lazarus Laughed, which some consider his greatest
play. Others prefer the psychological-sociological
probing in plays such as the mammoth Strange In-
terlude. A few prefer his early, less ambitious sea
plays, e. g., The Moon of the Caribbees, and Six
Other Plays of the Sea. Meanwhile the lyrical,
nostalgic comedy Ah, Wilderness! remains one of his
most popular full-length works, particularly with
small theater groups. In 1936 O'Neill was awarded
the Nobel prize for literature.
1648. Plays. New York, Random House, 1951.
3 v. (The Random House lifetime library)
51-9684 PS3529.N5 1951
Contents. — 1. Strange interlude (1928). Desire
under the elms (1925). Lazarus laughed (1927).
The fountain (1926). The moon of the Caribbees
(1919). Bound east for Cardiff (1916). The long
voyage home (1919). In the zone (1919). He
(1919). Where the cross is made (1919). The
rope (1919). The dreamy kid (1922). Before
breakfast (1916). — 2. Mourning becomes Electra
(1931). Ah, wilderness! (1933). All God's chillun
got wings (1924). Marco millions (1927). Welded
(1924). Diff'rent (1921). The first man (1922).
Gold (1920). — 3. "Anna Christie" (1922). Beyond
the horizon (1920). The Emperor Jones (1921).
The hairy ape (1922). The great god Brown
(1922). The straw (1921). Dynamo (1929).
Days without end (1934). The iceman cometh
(1946).
1649. A moon for the misbegotten. New York,
Random House, 1952. 177 p.
52-6668 PS3529.N5M68 1952
1650. Engel, Edwin A. The haunted heroes of
Eugene O'Neill. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 310 p.
53-5068 PS3529.N5Z63
1651. DOROTHY (ROTHSCHILD) PARKER,
1893-
Dorothy Parker is a New York wit who gained
fame for her light (and often barbed) verse and her
satirical short stories. Her collected poems ap-
peared in Not So Deep as a Well (1936), and her
collected stories in Here Lies (1939). She has also
written for stage and film.
1652. Dorothy Parker, with an introd. by W. Som-
erset Maugham. New York, Viking Press,
1944. 544 p. (The Viking portable library)
44-4169 PS3531.A5855A6 1944
A collection of poems and stories.
1653. JULIA MOOD PETERKIN, 1880-
Julia Peterkin described in her fiction the
life of isolated plantation Negroes in South Caro-
lina. Her local color stories were characterized
not only by an evocation of the setting, but also by
an attempt to reproduce the dialect. The novels
have been considered among the best about Negroes.
In Roll, Jordan, Roll (1933) she undertook a non-
fictional presentation of the Negroes in her tales; the
book was extensively illustrated with photographs
by Doris Ulmann.
1654. Black April. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1927. 315 p. 27-5080 PZ3.P436BI
1655. Scarlet sister Mary. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1928. 345 p.
28-24477 PZ3.P436SC
Awarded the Pulitzer prize for literature in 1929.
1656. ERNEST POOLE, 1880-1950.
Ernest Poole was a novelist concerned with
social problems. He commonly wrote with the
point of view of a socialist of the early part of the
century. His first novel, The Voice of the Street
(1906), which depicts poverty in New York's East
Side, in a way set the pace for his works, which often
deal with American problems, frequently with a
New York particularization. However, there are
exceptions, such as With Western Eyes (1926), in
which a Russian scientist views America; The
Nancy Flyer, a Stagecoach Epic (1949), a recon-
struction of stagecoach history in Poole's adopted
state of New Hampshire; and Blind: A Story Of
These Times (1920), which in part portrays tene-
ment life in New York, but also deals with Europe
and the Russian Revolution. The Bridge, an auto-
biography, was published in 1940.
1657. The harbor. New York, Macmillan, 1915.
387 p. _ 15-2844 PZ3.P785H
Usually considered Poole's best book, this has been
called the outstanding American proletarian novel.
1658. His family. New York, Macmillan, 1917.
320 p. 17-13623 PZ3-P785Hi
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I35
A New York family as typifying changes in
modern life; the book was awarded a Pulitzer prize
in 1918.
1659. KATHERINE ANNE PORTER, 1S94-
Katherine Anne Porter, who writes short
stories on a wide range of topics, has been generally
acclaimed for her perfection on a small scale, the pre-
cision of her English, her restraint, and the poetic
element in her style. Born and reared in Texas and
Louisiana, her experience has also included several
years in Mexico and Europe; from each of these
areas she has drawn settings for her stories. Al-
though her work is small in bulk, and in some re-
spects in scope, almost all of it has been highly
praised. Outside the short-story form her work in-
cludes the writing of Mae Franking's anonymously
published My Chinese Marriage (1921), which Miss
Porter disclaims on the grounds that she was merely
setting down another person's story, and The Days
Before (1952), a collection of essays and articles,
most of which were written to meet specific editorial
demand at various times throughout her career.
1660. Flowering Judas. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1930. 145 p.
30-25819 PS3531.O752F55 1930
PZ3.P8315FI
Contents. — Maria Concepcion. — Magic. —
Rope. — Ke. — The jilting of Granny Weatherall. —
Flowering Judas. Theft, That Tree, The cracked
looking-glass, and Hacienda were added in the
1935 edition.
1661. Pale horse, pale rider; three short novels.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 264 p.
39-27273 PZ3.P83i5Pal
PS353i.0752Pe
Contents. — Old morality. — Noon wine. — Pale
horse, pale rider.
1662. The leaning tower, and other stories. New
York, Flarcourt, Brace, 1944. 246 p.
44-7946 PZ3.P83i5Le
1663. Schwartz, Edward. Katherine Anne Por-
ter; a critical bibliography. New York,
New York Public Library, 1953. 42 p.
53-2504 Z87057.S35
Reprinted from the Bulletin of the New Yor\
Public Library of May 1953.
1664. EZRA LOOMIS POUND, 1885-
In his early literary essays, poetry, and trans-
lations, as well as personally, Pound exerted a con-
siderable effect on American literature, influencing
and "discovering" poets such as Hart Crane, Wil-
liam Carlos Williams, Robert Frost, T. S. Eliot,
Archibald MacLeish, Carl Sandburg, Amy Lowell,
and others. The supreme greatness or hopelessly ob-
fuscated cacophony of his later work is still being
debated: partly in nonliterary terms, for Pound rests
in political disrepute, largely based on the economic
and political views which led him to side with
Mussolini during World War II. Always concerned
with literary theory and technique (when not ob-
sessed by economic matters), even his Letters, 1907-
1941 (1950) as edited by D. D. Paige are presenta-
tions of literary views, rather than reflections of a
personal life. Pound's translations and adaptations
of poems from Chinese and Provencal, among oth-
ers, have not only done much to make such literature
known to Americans, but the creativeness applied
to some of them has given the work the seminal
effect of forceful original poetry. Considered by
some an outstanding achievement in modern verse
drama is his translation of Sophocles' Women of
Trachis, which appeared in 1954 in the winter issue
of The Hudson Review.
1665. The cantos. [New York] New Directions,
1948. 149, 56, 46, 167, 118 p.
48-4633 PS3531.O82C28
Contents. — A draft of XXX cantos. — Eleven new
cantos, XXXI-XLI. — The fifth decade of cantos. —
Cantos LII-LXXI. — The Pisan cantos.
1666. Personae; the collected poems. [New York]
New Directions [1950? c 1926] 273 p.
50-13308 PS3531.O82P4 1950
Personae was first used by Pound as a tide for a
1909 volume of poetry; the title was used again
for a collection of poetry published in 1926.
This collection also included material from Exulta-
tions (1909), Ripostes (1912), Lustra (19 16), Hugh
Selwyn Mauberley (1920), and Homage to Sextus
Proper tins, which was first published independently
in 1934, although it dates from 1917. The present
edition of the Personae is meant to include all
Pound's poems other than the Cantos. Pound's
other independent volumes of poetry have included
Canzoni (iqii), Cathay (1915), Quia Pauper
Amavi (1919), Umbra (1920), Poems, 1918-21
(1921), Indiscretions (1923), and Alfred Venison's
Poems (1935).
1667. The translations of Ezra Pound. [New
York] New Directions [1953?] 408 p.
53-11965 PN6020.P6
1668. Literary ess.ivs. F.dited with an introd. by
T. S. Eliot. ] Norfolk, Conn.] New Direc-
tions, 1954. xv, 464 p. 54_79°5 PN511.P625
136 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1669. Edwards, John H. A preliminary checklist
of the writings of Ezra Pound, especially his
contributions to periodicals. New Haven, Kirgo-
Books, 1953. viii, 73 p. 52-12855 Z8709.3.E3
1670. Espey, John J. Ezra Pound's Mauberley; a
study in composition. Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1955. 139 p.
54-6474 PS3531.O82H842 1955
1671. Kenner, Hugh. The poetry of Ezra Pound.
Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 195 1.
342 p. 51-12356 PS3531.O82Z7
1672. Leary, Lewis G., ed. Motive and method in
The cantos of Ezra Pound. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1954. viii, 135 p. (Eng-
lish Institute. Essays, 1953)
54-11609 PE1010.E5 1953
1673. Russell, Peter, ed. An examination of Ezra
Pound; a collection of essays. [Norfolk,
Conn.] New Directions, 1950. 268 p.
50-10415 PS3531.O82Z8 1950a
London ed. (P. Nevili) has tide: Ezra Pound.
1674. Watts, Harold H. Ezra Pound and The
cantos. Chicago, Regnery, 1952. 132 p.
53-1720 PS3531.O82C29 1952a
1675. JOHN CROWE RANSOM, 1888-
Ransom's poetry is distinguished by verbal
elegance and precision, and permeated by gentle,
intellectual irony. His first book, Poems About
God (1919), bore the promise that has been ful-
filled in the small quantity of verse he has since pub-
lished. Not only an accomplished poet, Ransom is
also prominent as a literary critic and as editor of
the literary quarterly. The Kenyon Review (v. 1 +
winter 1939+ Gambier, Ohio, Kenyon College).
1676. Chills and fever, poems. New York, Knopf,
1924. 95 p.
24-21606 PS3535.A635C5 1924
1677. Two gentlemen in bonds. New York,
Knopf, 1927. 87 p.
27-2199 PS3535.A635T8 1927
Verse.
1678. The world's body. New York, Scribner,
1938. 350 p. 38-27471 PN1136.R3
Contents. — A poem nearly anonymous. — Forms
and citizens. — Poets without laurels. — The poet as
woman. — Poetry: a note in ontology. — A psychol-
ogist looks at poetry. — A cathedralist looks at mur-
der.— The cathartic principle. — The mimetic prin-
ciple.— Sentimental exercise. — The tense of poetry. —
Contemporaneous not contemporary. — Shakespeare
at sonnets. — Art and Mr. Santayana. — Criticism,
inc.
1679. Poems and essays. New York, Vintage
Books, 1955. 185 p. (A Vintage book,
K-24) 55-38i3 PS3535-A635A6 1955
The poems in this volume are, with two additions,
the same as those which appeared in Ransom's
Selected Poems (1945). The essays are from pe-
riodicals, and had not previously had publication
in volume form.
1680. MARJORIE (KINNAN) RAWLINGS,
1896-1954
Mrs. Rawlings' books have dealt with the iso-
lated and somewhat primitive hammock district
of Florida, with the exception of The Sojourner
(1952), which was set in New York State. Best
known for her novels, she has also published a
volume of short stories and an autobiographical
book describing her Florida neighbors as much as
her own life. Her work, which has much local
color detail and description, is realistic in manner,
at times inclined to be sentimental, and with a frank
love of the country and its people. An impression
of their dialect is conveyed more in wording than
spelling.
1 68 1. South moon under. New York, Scribner,
1933- 334 P- 33-5485 PZ3.R1969S0
A novel depicting the life of a hunter in the
Florida backwoods.
1682. Golden apples. New York, Scribner, 1935.
352 p. 35-18688 PZ3.R1969G0
A story, with some culture conflict, of farming
in the Florida back country.
1683. The yearling. New York, Scribner, 1938.
428 p. 38-27280 PZ3.Ri969Ye
The author was awarded a Pulitzer prize for this
novel about an adolescent in the Florida back
country and his love for a pet fawn.
1684. When the whippoorwill — New York,
Scribner, 1940. 275 p.
40-27409 PZ3.R1969WI1
Contents. — A crop of beans. — Benny and the
bird dogs. — Jacob's ladder. — The pardon. — Var-
mints.— The enemy. — Gal young 'un. — Alliga-
tors.— A plumb dare conscience. — A mother in
Mannville. — Cocks must crow.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 1 37
1685. Cross Creek. New York, Scribner, 1942.
368 p. 42-36118 PS3535.A845C7
Autobiographical work descriptive of the author's
home area in Florida.
1686. EUGENE MANLOVE RHODES, 1869-
1934
A cowboy and a writer in New Mexico, Rhodes
wrote regional novels and short stories which are
considered among the most literary of westerns.
He truthfully depicted the background and social
attitudes (which he shared) of the cowboy society
of the late 19th century on the cattle ranges. One
of his most esteemed novels, Paso por Aqui (1927)
was widely distributed as the movie Four Faces
West. May Davison Rhodes, his wife, shordy after
his death wrote a biography of him: The Hired
Man on Horseback (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1938. 263 p.).
1687. Best novels and stories. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1949. xxii, 551 p.
49-11703 PZ3.R3443Bd
Novels and novelettes included: Paso por aqui. —
Good men and true. — Bransford of Rainbow
Range. — The trusty knaves. — The desire of the
moth. — Hit the line hard.
1688. ELMER L. RICE, 1892-
Elmer Rice, born Elmer Reizenstein, is a
New York dramatist who first attracted attention
with realistic plays which commonly carried some
leftist moral. A withdrawal from his leftist posi-
tion was effected in his later work. Probably his
most famous play is Street Scene, which reflects life
in a New York slum tenement block. He tried to
give the same treatment to New York as a whole in
his novel, Imperial City (1937). His earlier novel,
A Voyage to Purilia (1930) was a satire on the
movie industry; his later novel, The Show Must
Go On (1949) was a more serious study of theater
life.
1689. Seven plays. New York, Viking Press,
1950. x, 524 p.
50-10796 PS3535.I224S45
Contents. — On trial (1914). — The adding ma-
chine (1923). — Street scene (1929). — Counsellor-at-
! law (1931). — Judgment day (1934). — Two on an
island (1940). — Dream girl (1946).
1690. The winner, a play in four scenes. New
York, Dramatists Play Service, 1954. 127 p.
54-11654 PS3535.I224W5
1691. CONRAD MICHAEL RICHTER, 1890-
Conrad Richter writes historical novels and
short stories which give his impressions of life in
America. His setting is often the American South-
west, to which he himself moved, or the region
about Ohio and Pennsylvania, where he was born.
His lucid style, depiction of local color, and record-
ing of historical details are characteristics of his
work. He has also written nonfiction, such as The
Mountain on the Desert (1955), which expresses his
philosophic and mystic view of life.
1692. Early Americana and other stories. New
York, Knopf, 1936. 322 p.
36-2101 1 PZ3-R4i7Ear
Contents. — Early Americana. — Smoke over the
prairie. — New home. — Long drouth. — Frontier
woman. — As it was in the beginning. — Buckskin
vacation. — The square piano. — Early marriage.
1693. The sea of grass. New York, Knopf, 1937.
149 p. 37-27107 PZ3.R4i7Se2
A refined heroine leaves her husband and children
and their large cattle ranch to return to the city,
after 20 years she returns and is accepted back by
her husband.
1694. The trees. New York, Knopf, 1940. 302 p.
40-27179 PZ3.R4i7Tr
The first volume of a trilogy, this is the story
of a Pennsylvania pioneer family's immigration to
Ohio near the end of the 18th century. It was
followed in 1946 by The Fields (PZ3.R417F1 46-
2155), which is the story of the next generation
opening up the frontier community. In 1950 ap-
peared The Town (PZ3.R417T0 50-6331), in
which the family moves from a cabin to a mansion,
and the community becomes a town, while the
frontier has moved further West.
1695. The free man. New York, Knopf, 1943.
147 p. 43-JI545 PZ3.R417F1
The story of a German who arrives in America
as an indentured servant; fights in the Revolutionary
War against the British; and lives with the Penn-
sylvania Dutch as a free man.
1696. The light in the forest. New York, Knopf,
1953. 179 p. 52-12207 PZ3.R417L1
A story of the conflict of white and Indian views
of life. It centers about the rescue of a boy after
11 years with the Delaware Indians who had cap-
tured him, of the boy's attempt to rejoin the Indians,
and the results.
I38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1697. ELIZABETH MADOX ROBERTS, 1886-
194 1
Elizabeth Madox Roberts wrote novels and short
stories of life in rural Kentucky at various social
levels and at different periods, among which the 20th
century predominates. Artistry of style and lyric-
ism are characteristics of her best work. In the
field of poetry the author wrote first for children
and later for adults, introducing certain aspects of
the folk song into this portion of her work. Her
last volume of poems was Song in the Meadow
(1940). In almost all of her writing she made
some use of the English spoken in the Kentucky
hills. The dialect added freshness and vitality to
her work, except when the form was extreme or
when its presence constituted an impediment for
readers unfamiliar with the speech of the locality.
1698. The time of man. New York, Viking Press,
1926. 382 p. 26-15401 PZ3.R54145T1
The author's first novel and the one most fre-
quently read and reprinted. It is a story of poor
whites in rural Kentucky.
1699. My heart and my flesh ... a novel. New
York, Viking Press, 1927. 300 p.
27-22999 PZ3.R54i45My
Against a Kentucky setting this book unfolds
a psychological story of a young woman, of aristo-
cratic family, who survives near-insanity and pro-
tracted illness to find happiness.
1700. Jingling in the wind. New York, Viking
Press, 1928. 256 p.
28-22353 PZ3.R54i45Ji
A humorous fantasy about a rural rainmaker and
his trip to the metropolis to attend a convention of
rainmakers.
1 70 1. The great meadow. New York, Viking
Press, 1930. 338 p.
30-7676 PZ3.R54i45Gr
A story of pioneer life in Kentucky and conflict
with the Indians.
1702. A buried treasure. New York, Viking
Press, 193 1. 296 p.
31-28312 PZ3.R54i4Bur
A humorous narrative about a farmer and his wife
who discover a buried treasure, and the celebration
party they hold.
1703. The haunted mirror. New York, Viking
Press, 1932. 288 p.
32-32267 PZ3.R54i45Hau
A volume of short stories.
1704. He sent forth a raven. New York, Viking
Press, 1935. 255 p.
35-27098 PZ3.R54i45He
A poetic and somewhat mystic story about a
farmer who, after his wife's death, vowed not to
set foot on earth again, and then spent the rest of
his life directing the farm work from his porch.
1705. Black is my truelove's hair. New York,
Viking Press, 1938. 281 p.
38-27966 PZ3.R54145BI
A lyrical novel of a Kentucky village girl who
eventually finds true love; the story is written in a
simple prose reflecting the native speech of the
region.
1706. Not by strange gods; stories. New York,
Viking Press, 1941. 244 p.
41-5 1 14 PZ3.R54145N0
Contents. — The haunted palace. — I love my
bonny bride. — Swing low, sweet chariot. — Holy
morning. — The betrothed. — Love by the highway.
1707. KENNETH LEWIS ROBERTS, 1885-
Kenneth Roberts is a historical novelist who
usually sets his stories in early America (from the
pre-Revolutionary period through the War of 18 12).
Maine, the state in which he lives, or characters from
Maine, are often prominent in his books.
1708. Arundel, being the recollections of Steven
Nason of Arundel, in the province of Maine,
attached to the secret expedition led by Colonel Bene-
dict Arnold against Quebec and later a captain in
the Continental Army serving at Valcour Island,
Bemis Heights, and Yorktown. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1930. 618 p.
30-3872 PZ3.R54263Ar
Sequels: Rabble in Arms and Captain Caution.
1709. Rabble in arms; a chronicle of Arundel and
the Burgoyne invasion. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1933. 870 p.
33-33263 PZ3.R54263Rab
Sequel: Captain Caution (1934).
Preceded by: Arundel.
1 710. Northwest passage. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1937. 2 v.
37-27401 PS3535.O176N6 1937
The first part recounts the campaigns of Robert
Rogers and Rogers' Rangers against the Indians; the
second part is largely the story of Rogers' search
for a northwest passage.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 39
171 1. Oliver Wiswell. New York, Doubleday,
Doran, 1940. 2 v.
40-36023 PS3535.O176O5 1940
A novel of the American Revolution as seen by a
colonial loyalist.
1712. Boon Island. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1956, c 1955. 275 p.
56-5443 PZ3.R54263B0
The story of a shipwreck, which occurred in the
winter of 1710 on a rocky island oil the New Hamp-
shire coast, and of the endurance of the survivors
who underwent extreme hardships.
1713. EDWIN ARLINGTON ROBINSON,
1869-1935
Robinson's poetry is basically a searching for
ultimate moral values. This quest is often pre-
sented through dramatic sketches of individuals,
many of whom are associated with Tilbury, the
fictitious name he assigned to Gardiner, Maine, the
town in which he was reared. Although his con-
tent was novel, he employed conservative verse
forms. He started writing near the beginning — and
was himself part — of the revolt against the effete
sunsets-and-nightingales poetry that quantitatively
dominated late 19th-century poetic production. At
his best in his dramatic sketches and lyrics, Robin-
son also wrote a number of long narrative poems
which attracted considerable attention when they
were first published. Initially he struggled in iso-
lation for recognition, so that he became a somewhat
embittered author; but his subsequendy acknowl-
edged position as an important poet and his tran-
sitional modernity have led various schools to claim
him as a member, or at least as a precursor. The
struggle for achievement, recognition, and even sur-
vival is reflected more direcdy in his letters than
in his poetry.
1714.
New York, Macmillan,
1Q37
Pub-
Collected poems.
1937. xii, 1498 p.
37-27280 PS3535.O25A17
"Complete edition with additional poems,
lished April 1937."
Contenis. — The man against the sky (1916). —
The children of the night (1 890-1 897). —Captain
Craig, etc. (1902). — Merlin (1917). — The town
down the river (1910). — Lancelot (1920). — The
three taverns (1920). — Avon's harvest, etc. (1921) —
Tristram (1927). — Roman Bartholow (1923). —
Dionysus in doubt (1925). — The man who died
twice (1924). — Cavcnder's house (1929). — The
glory of the nightingales (1930). — Matthias at the
door (1931). — Nicodemus (1932). — Talifer
(!933)- — Amaranth (1934). — King Jasper (1935).
1715. Selected letters. New York, Macmillan,
1940. x, 191 p. 40-27180 PS3535.O25Z5J
1 71 6. Untriangulated stars; letters of Edwin Ar-
lington Robinson to Harry de Forest Smith,
1 890-1 905. Edited by Denham Sutcliffe. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1947. xxvii,
348 p. 47-1 1410 PS3535.O25Z54
1717. Barnard, Ellsworth. Edwin Arlington Rob-
inson, a critical study. New York, Mac-
millan, 1952. xii, 318 p.
52-7104 PS3535.O25Z555
1718. Fussell, Edwin S. Edwin Arlington Robin-
son; the literary background of a traditional
poet. Berkeley, University of California Press, 1954.
211 p. 54-8017 PS3535.O25Z60
1719. Neff, Emery E. Edwin Arlington Robin-
son. [New York] Sloane, 1948. xviii, 286 p.
(The American men of letters series)
48-8640 PS3535.O25Z74
1720. OLE EDVART R0LVAAG, 1 876-1 931
R0lvaag came to America from Norway in
1896. He attended St. Olaf College in Minnesota,
where from 1907 to 1931 he was professor of Nor-
wegian; in that language all his books were originally
written. The first novel of the trilogy which was
his major work is usually regarded as his best; in
it he realistically depicts the life of Norwegian emi-
grants in South Dakota when it was part of the
Northwestern frontier. The two subsequent novels
follow the family history after the initial pioneer
period had passed.
1721. Giants in the earth; a saga of the prairie.
New York, Harper, 1927. 465 p.
27-12513 PZ3-R6275Gi
Translated by the author from / De Dage, pub-
lished by Aschehoug, 1924-25.
1722. Peder Victorious, a novel. Translated from
the Norwegian, English text by Nora O.
Solum . . . and the author. New York, Harper,
1929. 350 p. 29-1081 PZ3.R6285Pe
Translation of Pcder Seicr.
1723. Their fathers' God, a novel. Translated
from the Norwegian by Trygve M. Ager.
New York, Harper, 1931. 338 p.
31-29967 PZ3.R6.75Th
Translation of Den Signcde Dag.
140 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1724. ARCHIBALD HAMILTON RUTLEDGE,
1883-
Archibald Rutledge comes from a low country
area, formerly a rice plantation, in South Carolina;
this he usually uses as a setting for his writings.
Some of his best work is that of a nature-lover and
hunter describing his hunting experiences and the
woods and swamplands, with much attention given
to the animals inhabiting them; such books include
Children of Swamp and Wood (1927), An Ameri-
can Hunter (1937), and Hunter's Choice (1946).
Further aspects of life on his plantation are treated
in the short stories of Old Plantation Days (1921)
and the somewhat sentimental Peace in the Heart
(1930). In addition to the short stories and the
nature and hunting sketches, Rutledge has also
written much conservative poetry, a recent volume
of selections being Brimming Tide and Other
Poems (1954).
1725. Wild life of the South. New York, Stokes,
1935. 253 p. illus.
35-17191 QH81.R9783
1726. Home by the river. Indianapolis, New
York, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941. 167 p. plates,
ports. 41-4127 F279.H25R8
A book of Rudedge's experiences and observations
at, as well as some historical background of, the
family plantation at Hampton, S. C.
1727. CARL SANDBURG, 1878-
Sandburg first gained prominence as a real-
istic poet of America in general and of Chicago
and the Midwest in particular. He has adapted
Whitman's form and idiom with much success to
evoke urban industrial America, the small town,
and rural America. Although a 1950 volume of
his collected poetry was awarded a Pulitzer prize
for poetry, his free verse has tended in recent years
to be overshadowed by his prose: his biographical
work on Lincoln, his autobiography, and the long
historical novel, Remembrance Roc\.
1728. Abraham Lincoln, the prairie years. With
105 illus. from photographs, and many car-
toons, sketches, maps, and letters. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1926. 2 v. 26-38885-E457.3.S22
1729. Abraham Lincoln, the war years. With 414
half-tones of photographs and 249 cuts of
cartoons, letters, documents. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1939. 4 v. 39-27998 E457.4.S36
1730. Remembrance Rock. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1948. 1067 p.
48-8509 PZ3.S2i3Re
A patriotic novel attempting to convey the
"American Dream." The book attempts this
through picturing the people and times at three
critical stages: the Puritan period, the time of the
Revolutionary War, and the pre-Civil War and
Civil War period.
1731. Complete poems. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 676 p.
50-11502 PS3537.A618 1950
Among earlier volumes of Sandburg's poetry are
In Reckless Ecstasy (1904), Chicago Poems (1916),
Cornhuskers (1918), Smo1{e and Steel (1920), Slabs
of the Sunburnt West (1922), Good Morning,
America (1928), and The People, Yes (1936).
1732. Always the young strangers. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 527 1.
53-9843 PS3537.A618Z5 1952
Autobiographical.
1733. GEORGE SANTAYANA, 1 863-1952
Santayana was born in Spain of a Spanish
father and a New England mother; he came to
America as a child, but after some forty years re-
turned to Europe, where he passed the rest of his
life. He has been praised for his poetry, despite
its limited bulk; his one novel achieved considerable
renown; and he wrote an outstanding autobiog-
raphy. However, it is as a philosopher of literary
merit that he is best known, and his philosophical
works are treated under the Philosophy section of
this bibliography. In all his work Santayana has
been a stylist of conservative tendencies and with a
consciousness of word connotations.
1734. Poems. New York, Scribner, 1923. 140 p.
23-5779 PS2770.A4 1923
1735. The genteel tradition at bay. New York,
Scribner, 1931. 74 p. 31-26894 B821.S17
Three essays on the old and the new humanism.
1736. The last Puritan; a memoir in the form of a
novel. London, Constable, 1935. 721 p.
35-31979 PZ3.S2284Las
A study of the New England character, bleakly
bowed beneath the weight of moral duty.
1737. Persons and places. New York, Scribner,
1944-53- 3 v- 43-5 1363 B945-S24A3
Autobiography.
Contents. — [v. 1] The background of my life. —
v. 2. The middle span. — v. 3. My host the world.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / I4I
1738. Dialogues in limbo, with 3 new dialogues.
New York , Scribner, 1948. 248 p.
48-10294 B945.S23D5 1948
First issued in 1925.
1739. Dominations and powers; reflections on lib-
erty, society, and government. New York,
Scribner, 1951. 481 p. 51-10642 JC251.S33
1740. The poet's testament: poems and two plays.
New York, Scribner, 1953. 216 p.
53-11773 PS2772.P6
The two plays are The Marriage of Venus and
Philosophers at Court.
1741. Letters. Edited, with an introd. and com-
mentary, by Daniel Cory. New York,
Scribner, 1955. xxxi, 451 p.
55-9677 B945.S24A4
1742. Duron, Jacques. La pensee de George San-
tayana; Santayana en Amerique. Paris,
Nizet [1950] viii, 556 p. 51-22923 B945.S24D8
1743. EVELYN SCOTT, 1893-
Evelyn Scott is a novelist who has been con-
cerned with establishing basic motivations and at-
titudes behind human actions. Her exposure of
hypocrisies and shams, expressed with seriousness
of purpose and resultant common lack of humor,
have resulted in subjects and views to which con-
servatives have objected. Her usually long, fic-
tional accounts of life in America are written in a
realistic, neo-naturalistic style and with a wealth of
accurately observed detail expressive of her impres-
sionistic rather than interpretational approach.
Some of her books are episodic in character, rather
than adhering to rigid plot structure. This may be
seen in works such as Breathe Upon These Slain
(1934), a novel which recreates the lives of former
inhabitants of a rented English farmhouse, evolving
the story from the evidence of what they have left
behind. At the same time she shared with Waldo
Frank a milder (i. e., less communistic) liberalism
and a tendency to see characters as part of a group
or setting, rather than as individuals; early influ-
enced by the writings of Karl Marx, in the thirties
she turned from what she considered a perversion
of his principles, and started to evolve her own
course of liberalism. In addition to her fiction, she
has written some poetry and two volumes of auto-
biography: Escapade (1923) and Background In
Tennessee (1937), which is as much a study of her
background as of any part of her life.
1744. The narrow house. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 1921. 221 p.
21-5273 PZ3-S245Na
A novel of drab lives pressed together in a narrow
house.
1745. The wave. New York, Cape & Smith, 1929.
624 p. 29-14106 PZ3.S4245Wav
A loosely structured novel of narratives of the
Civil War.
1746. A calendar of sin, American melodramas.
New York, Cape & Smith, 1931. 2 v.
31-28134 PZ3.S4245Cal
A novel evolving from the stories of five genera-
tions of a family.
1747. Eva Gay, a romantic novel. New York,
Smith & Haas, 1933. 799 p.
33-27102 PZ3.S4245EV
A story with the world for stage; on the plot
level it is concerned with a woman and her two
loves.
1748. The shadow of the hawk. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1941. 494 p. 41-7659 PZ3.S4245Sh
The story of a boy who grows up with the knowl-
edge that his father, convicted of murder, was
innocent.
1749. ROBERT EMMET SHERWOOD, 1896-
IQ55
Robert Sherwood distinguished himself in several
fields, but is probably best known for his dramatic
work. His early plays, such as The Road to Rome
(1927) and Reunion in Vienna (1932), tended to be
comedies displaying Shavian influence. With The
Petrified Forest he began to show a more personal
style in serious drama. After this his work was pre-
dominantly serious. Related to his work in drama
is his writing for films. Sherwood was also the
author of Roosevelt and Hopkins, an Intimate His-
tory (1948, rev. 1950), for which he was awarded
the Pulitzer prize for biography. He also three
times received the Pulitzer award for drama.
1750. The petrified forest. New York, Scribner,
1935. 176 p.
35-5154 PS3537.H825P4 1935
1 75 1. Idiot's delight. [A play] New York,
Scribner, 1936. 100 p.
36-8866 PS3537.H825I4 1936
1752. Abe Lincoln in Illinois, a play in twelve
scenes. New York, Scribner, 1939. 250 p.
39-27098 PS3537.H825A63 1939
I42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1753. There shall be no night. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1940. 178 p.
40-27741 PS3537.H825T45 i94«a
1 754. UPTON BEALL SINCLAIR, 1878-
Upton Sinclair is an extremely prolific author
with a sift for presenting action in a journalistic
manner. His usually realistic work has been largely
propagandist* and, in his early years, almost en-
tirely ^'proletarian" in emphasis. The Jungle, his
first successful publication, was an expose of con-
ditions in the meat industry in Chicago; it was in-
fluential in starting a crusade for pure food in the
Theodore Roosevelt era, and has been called the
most powerful novel of the muckraking movement.
Later he turned to writing pamphlets, trom 1 he
Profits of Religion (1918) through Mammonart
(1925) and Money Writes (1927); in this series he
produced one of the most thorough, if unbalanced,
Marxian interpretations of American culture. Alter
a few years he again turned from proletarian novels
in order to write in aid of his campaign for the
governorship of California, to which he was nearly
elected in 1934. In i94<> he started publication of
a series of novels centering about Lanny Budd, a
hero whose mobility enabled the author to comment
about numerous contemporary affairs. The series
depicts the situation, national and international,
from the beginning of World War I through the
period following World War II. In 1943 the third
volume, Dragon's Teeth, was awarded a Pulitzer
prize The series was announced as complete with
the publication in 1949 of volume ten- however it
was resumed in 1953- Although Sinclair has also
produced a few dramatic works, it is his novels
which are well known. It has been claimed that
in some foreign countries he is the most widely read
of American authors and that he has been trans-
lated more often into more foreign languages than
any other modern author. In 1925 he was officially
declared a Soviet classic, an act which evidenced
his great popularity in Russia.
i<7« The iuncle. New York, Doubleday, Page,
7D5' X906.1 4*3 P. ^6264 PZ3-S6l6>
1756. Oil! A novel.
New York, Boni, 1927.
27-7669 PZ3.S6i60i
A story derived from scandals during President
Harding's administration, especially the Teapot
Dome scandal.
1757. American outpost; a book of reminiscences.
New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1932. 280 p.
32-26373 PS3537.I85Z5 1932
1758. Lanny Budd series. New York, Viking
Press, 1940-53. 11 v.
Contents.— v. 1. World's end (PZ3.S616W0
40-7472). — v. 2. Between two worlds (PZ3-S6i6Be
41-4373).— v. 3. Dragon's teeth (PZ3-S6i6Dr 42-
i06)._v. 4. Wide is the gate (PZ3-S6i6Wi 43-
I62).— v. 5. Presidential agent (PZ3.S616PI 44-
4916).— v. 6. Dragon harvest (PZ3.S616DP 45-
35107). — v. 7. A world to win (PZ3-S6i6Wn
46-3965). — v. 8. Presidential mission (PZ3.S6i6?o
47-30286).— v. 9. One clear call (PZ3.S6i60m
48-8056).— v. 10. O shepherd, speak! (PZ3.S616O
49-9981).— v. 11. The return of Lanny Budd
(PZ3.S6i6Re 53-5202).
1759. LILLIAN EUGENIA SMITH, 1897-
Born and reared in the South and coeditor
from 1936 to 1945 of South Today, Miss Smith's
novel, Strange Fruit, was the expression of a South-
erner's soul searching on account of evils resulting
from racial discrimination in her native ^ section.
The purpose of the novel to expose the ultimate of
these evils necessitates tragedy and violence in the
action of the book; but these are expressed with
literary artistry as well as power. The author's
position with regard to a love affair between mem-
bers of different races, and her fidelity to language
natural to uneducated characters but not in ordinary
use, made the book a controversial one. Partly for
that reason it reached a large audience. It has also
been translated into French, Italian, Spanish, and
other languages.
1760. Strange fruit, a novel. New York, Reynal
& Hitchcock, 1944. 371 p.
44-40028 PZ3.S6536St
1761. The journey. Cleveland, World Pub. Co.,
1954. 256 p. 53-°643 PZ3-S6536Jo
Spiritual autobiography of the author's journey
thus far through life.
1762. WILBUR DANIEL STEELE, 1886-
Although he has written several novels,
Steele is best known for his short stories; these are
frequently set in places such as New England, South
Carolina, and Arizona. Ingenuity of plot presenta-
tion and sustained action have led some reviewers to
regard him as the best of conventional short-story
writers. He has also done some dramatic work,
such as Terrible Woman, and Other One Act Plays
(1925); these were written for the Provincetown
Players. In some cases he has collaborated with
other authors in the writing of plays.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 43
1763. That girl from Memphis. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 470 p.
45-5456 PZ3.S8i4oTh
A novel of the early West, in which a young man
falls in love with a prostitute.
1764. The best stories of Wilbur Daniel Steele.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 469 p.
46-5578 PZ3.S8i49Be
1765. Full cargo; more stories. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 369 p.
51-14516 PZ3.S8149 Fu
1766. GERTRUDE STEIN, 1874-1946
Gertrude Stein lived most of her life in
France, where she created her experimental writ-
ings on essentially American subjects, based on her
memories of her native land or on encounters with
Americans abroad. Much of her work was con-
structed on a principle of verbal repetition with
slight modification, so as to arrive at and establish
with precision some nuance of meaning. Thus in
her attempts for clarity she evolved in her prose
not only a tendency to occasionally complex syn-
tax, but also to a frequent heavy abstraction, char-
acterized in part by an emphasis on verbs and a
deemphasis on nouns (a procedure reversed in much
of her poetry), — with the result that most readers
find her more experimental books "difficult." Nev-
ertheless, her works have been highly admired by a
few and influential on a number of prominent writ-
ers, such as Hemingway, Sherwood Anderson, and
Louis Bromfield. Her reputation for difficulty has
to some extent kept from her a wide audience such
as might seem consonant with her wide influence;
consequently a number of authors, who have derived
stylistic elements from her works, have themselves
been far more popular. In her more conservative
books the speech rhythms on which she based the
bulk of her work become obvious, and a few might
be viewed as largely lucid conversational report-
age— a factor which draws her considerably closer
to some of the authors who have found her writings
seminal.
1767. Three lives; stories of the good Anna, Mel-
anctha, and the gentle Lena. New York,
Grafton Press, 1909. 279 p.
9-20912 PS3537.T323T5 1909
1768. The making of Americans, being a history of
a family's progress, written . . . 1906-1908.
[Paris, Contact Editions] 1925. 925 p.
44-10190 PS3537.T323M3 1925
1769. Wars I have seen. New York, Random
House, 1945. 259 p.
45-2075 PS3537.T323W3
1770. Brewsie and Willie. New York, Random
House, 1946. 114 p.
46-5457 PS3537.T323B7
A conversational-styled book reflecting the per-
sonal problems of American soldiers in France dur-
ing World War II.
1771. Selected writings. Edited, with an introd.
and notes, by Carl Van Vechten. New
York, Random House, 1946. 622 p.
46-11965 PS3537.T323A6 1946
In addition to selections from the books listed
above, this volume contains material from Geogra-
phy and Plays (1922), and some miscellaneous
pieces, as well as the complete texts of Tender
Buttons (1914), Miss Stein's autobiographical The
Autobiography of Alice B. Tobias (1933), and Four
Saints in Three Acts (1934), which was used by
Virgil Thomson as the libretto for his opera of the
same name. Miss Stein's fiction is represented by
short stories, rather than by selections from her
novels Lucy Church Amiably (1930) and Ida
(1941).
1772. The Yale edition of the unpublished writ-
ings of Gertrude Stein. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 195 1. 51-6628 PS3537.T323A6
1773. Rogers, William Garland. When this you
see remember me; Gertrude Stein in person.
New York, Rinehart, 1948. 247 p.
48-7376 PS3537.T323Z8
1774. Sutherland, Donald. Gertrude Stein, a biog-
raphy of her work. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1 95 1. 218 p.
51-12323 PS3537.T323Z83
1775. JOHN STEINBECK, 1902-
Steinbeck is a realistic and naturalistic
novelist from California who commonly uses his
home area as a setting for his fiction. His sympathy
is with the inarticulate masses who are unable to
speak for themselves. He pictures with understand-
ing the lowest classes, the brute, the animalistic, the
moronic, and the less intelligent social outcasts.
Grapes of Wrath, a social document of the problems
and life of the migratory farmers of the Southwest
during the dustbowl period of the depression years,
has probably been his most influential and widely
read novel of social criticism.
144 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1776. The long valley. New York, Viking Press,
1938. 303 p. 38-27754 PZ3.S8195L02
Short stories.
1777. The grapes of wrath. New York, Viking
Press, 1940. 619 p.
40-6133 PZ3.S8i95Grn
"First published in April 1939 . . . eleventh print-
ing February 1940."
1778. The wayward bus. New York, Viking
Press, 1947. 312 p.
47-30085 PZ3.S8i95Way
PS3537.T3234W3
1779. East of Eden. New York, Viking Press,
1952. 602 p. 52-4118 PZ3.S8i95Eas
1780. Short novels: Tortilla Flat [1935]; The red
pony [1937]; Of mice and men [1937]; The
moon is down [1942]; Cannery Row [1945]; The
pearl [1947]. With an introd. by Joseph Henry
Jackson. New York, Viking Press, 1953. xiii,
407 p. 53-9196 PZ3.S8i95Sh
PS3537.T3234A6 1953
1781. Sweet Thursday. New York, Viking Press,
1954- 273 P- 54-7983 PZ3.S8195SW
1782. WALLACE STEVENS, 1879-1955
The name of Stevens has been ranked with
that of T. S. Eliot as first in impressiveness among
poets belonging to the modern movement of poetry
in English. However, he worked in relative solitude
and constituted his own school for studying the
mind and its perceptions. His first published book,
Harmonium (1923), appeared when he was 44
years of age and at once revealed the eloquence and
elegance for which this Connecticut poet was to
become known. On the other hand a heavy rich-
ness, which might be called "gaudiness," also char-
acterized the part of his work that has verbal and
metrical flamboyance. Using a style and selecting
subjects frequendy exotic, his universal theme is
the role of the human imagination. The philo-
sophical bent informing his technical virtuosity re-
sulted in an impressive body of constantly maturing
poetry.
1783. The necessary angel; essays on reality and
the imagination. New York, Knopf, 1951.
176 p. 51-12072 PN1055.S68
A collection of essays, lectures, etc., which ex-
presses the author's theory of poetry.
1784. Collected poems. New York, Knopf, 1954.
. 534 P-. 54-i 1750 PS3537.T4753 1954
This collection, which was awarded a Pulitzer
prize, includes the poems of earlier volumes such
as Harmonium (1923), Ideas of Order (1935), The
Man with the Blue Guitar (1937), Parts of a World
(1942), Transport to Summer (1947), and The
Auroras of Autumn (1950).
1785. O'Connor, William Van. The shaping
spirit, a study of Wallace Stevens. Chicago,
Regnery, 1950. ix, 146 p.
50-7455 PS3537.T4753Z7
1786. JAMES HOWELL STREET, 1903-1954
James Street's career included professional
specialization as a Baptist clergyman, a journalist, a
novelist, and a writer of short stories. Born in Mis-
sissippi, he imparted to the majority of his books
a strong regional interest in the South, although the
time and place represented may vary from 18th-
century wars with the Indians on the frontier of the
Old Southwest to essentially contemporary condi-
tions on a cotton farm in Mississippi. However, he
was at home also in the Middle West, the locale of
his sequel novels about a clergyman's life in a small
town. His sympathetic and perceptive short stories
about children and adolescents, their animals, games,
and adventures appeared in The Saturday Evening
Post and other popular periodicals before a repre-
sentative collection appeared in 1945. Whether in
stirring historical romances or in novels written
about the lives and in the colloquial speech of plain
people, Mr. Street expressed his consciousness of
the epic story of America's development, and his
faith in its future.
1787. Oh, promised land. New York, Dial Press,
1940. 816 p. 40-27414 PZ3.S91557OI1
1788. In my father's house. New York, Dial
Press, 1941. 348 p.
41-5679 PZ3.S9i557ln
1789. The gaundet. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, Doran, 1945. 311 p.
45-9403 PZ3.S9i557Gau
Sequel: High Calling (1951).
1790. Short stories. New York, Dial Press, 1945.
314 p. ^ 45-5601 PZ3.S9i557Sh
Contents. — The golden key. — In full glory re-
flected.— The old Gordon place. — Weep no more,
my lady. — Please come home, my lady. — Buck and
fo' bits. — The crusaders. — Pud'n and Tayme. — They
know how. — The road to Gettysburg. — All out with
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I45
Sherman. — Set the wild echoes flying. — The bis-
cuit eater. — The house.
1791. James Street's South. Edited by James
Street, Jr. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1955. 282 p. 55-7652 F210.S76
"Essays on the South and its cities."
1792. THOMAS SIGISMUND STRIBLING,
1881-
T. S. Stribling's better-known novels usually re-
flect the Tennessee and Alabama districts with
which he was familiar. Although not distinguished
by stylistic merits, his works display a gift for nar-
rative and a recording of colloquial conversation.
This aptitude was probably developed in the popular
and pulp fiction which he wrote in his early years.
While the characteristic embedding of realistic de-
tails in his presentation of Southern life appeared in
early work such as Birthright (1922), his narrative
abilities came to the fore with such novels as Fom-
bombo (1923) and Red Sand (1924), which depict
American "businessmen" in Venezuela, and derive
from Stribling's stay in that country. These ele-
ments were brought together in his later work, for
which he returned to the rural South as a setting.
In 1933 he was awarded a Pulitzer prize for the
second volume of a trilogy which has been con-
sidered by some to be his main work. Another
transition was made with The Sound Wagon
(I935)> m which his satirical tendencies became
dominant. With These Bars of Flesh (1938), he
continued in this vein, satirizing contemporary poli-
tics and education; the setting in this work was
"Megapolis" in the North.
1793. The forge. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1931. 525 p.
31-6082 PZ3.S9i66For
Volume one of a trilogy.
1794. The store. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1932. 571 p.
32-26671 PZ3.S9i66Sr2
Volume two of the same trilogy.
1795. Unfinished cathedral. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1934. 383 p.
34-27137 PZ3.S9i66Un
Volume three of the trilogy.
1796. RUTH SUCKOW, 1892-
Ruth Suckow's first novel, Country People
(1924), dealt with three generations of a German-
American family from the time of their arrival in
431240—60 11
Iowa in the middle of the 19th century. Since then
she has quite consistently used Iowa as the locale for
her fiction. Probably best known for her novels,
she has also been praised for her short stories, of
which a number of collections have been published,
such as Children and Older People (1931). In
both forms her merit has consisted of a "homey"
but psychologically and physically accurate depic-
tion of common people in everyday circumstances.
It has been commented that this results in her work
being basically character sketches rather than stories.
1797. Iowa interiors. New York, Knopf, 1926.
283 p. 26-27442 PZ3.S942I0
Contents. — A start in life. — A home-coming. —
The daughter. — The top of the ladder. — Mame. —
Uprooted. — Renters. — Retired. — A pilgrim and a
stranger. — A rural community. — Just him and her. —
The resurrection. — Wanderers. — An investment for
the future. — Four generations. — Golden wedding.
1798. The Bonney family. New York, Knopf,
1928. 296 p. 28-3333 PZ3.S942B0
1799. The folks. New York, Farrar & Rinehart,
1934- 727 P- 34-322M PZ3.S942F0
1800. New Hope. New York, Farrar & Rinehart,
1942. 342 p. 42-3175 PZ3.S942Ne
1801. Some others and myself; seven stories and a
memoir. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 281 p.
51-14899 PZ3.S942S0
1802. NEWTON BOOTH TARKINGTON,
1 869-1 946.
Booth Tarkington was a highly prolific Mid-
western novelist who achieved prominence in two
fields of fiction. He is probably best known for his
humorous stories of childhood and adolescence, such
as Penrod and Sam (1916). He also wrote a num-
ber of serious novels, usually studies of Middle
Western life; these include The Gentleman from
Indiana (1899), The Conquest of Canaan (1905),
and The Heritage of Hatcher Ide (1941). He was
twice awarded a Pulitzer prize: for The Magnificent
Ambersons (1918), the first volume of a trilogy, and
in 1922 for Alice Adams, which has often been
adjudged his best book. He attained a mastery of
novel technique and an easy style, through which
he expressed his often humorous and at times senti-
mental, "realist-romantic" tales. While he main-
tained a wide popular following, many of his works
hue been criticized for lack of psychological pene-
tration and perception of sociological situations.
Much of his work, particularly that of the first
quarter of the centurv, remains generally popular.
I46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1803. Penrod. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Page, 1914. 345 p. 14-5820 PZ3.Ti75Pe
1804. Seventeen; a tale of youth and summer time
and the Baxter family, especially William.
New York, Harper, 1916. 328 p.
16-6604 PZ3.Ti75Se
1805. Alice Adams. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, Page, 1921. 434 p.
21-26561 PZ3.T175AI
1806. Growth. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Page, 1927. 887 p.
27-27696 PZ3-Ti75Gr
Contents. — The magnificent Ambersons. — The
turmoil. — National avenue.
1807. Russo, Dorothy Ritter, and Thelma L. Sul-
livan. A bibliography of Booth Tarkington,
1 869-1 946. Indianapolis, Indiana Historical So-
ciety, 1949. xix, 303 p. illus.
49-50289 Z8858.9.R8
1808. Woodress, James L. Booth Tarkington,
gentleman from Indiana. Philadelphia, Lip-
pincott, 1955. 350 p. 55-6307 PS2973.W6
1809. ALLEN TATE, 1899-
Tate was an early and leading member of
the Nashville, Tennessee, group of authors known
as Fugitives, because of their periodical The Fugi-
tive (1922-25); this group developed, with changes
in membership, into the Agrarians and the general
movement known as Regionalism, which remained
basically a Southern movement opposing the indus-
trialization of the South. The Fugitives also in-
cluded Robert Penn Warren, John Crowe Ransom,
and Merrill Moore (qq. v.); the Agrarian-Region-
alists added such names as Cleanth Brooks and John
Gould Fletcher (qq. v.), with such authors as Wil-
liam Faulkner, Eudora Welty, and the more north-
erly Ruth Suckow (qq. v.) loosely associated with
the Regionalist movement. The Regionalists voiced
themselves through such prominent periodicals as
the Southern Review (1935-42), The Kenyon Re-
view (i939+),and The Sewanee Review (1892 + ),
of which Tate assumed the editorship from 1944
to 1946. However, Tate's work, and that of many
fellow Regionalists, is beyond narrow Regionalism.
Tate is known for his intellectuality, concern with
form, and restraint of emotion, both as a critic and
as a poet. He has also written biographies of Stone-
wall Jackson (1928) and Jefferson Davis (1929).
1810. On the limits of poetry, selected essays: 1928-
1948. New York, Swallow Press, 1948.
379 p. 48-8822 PN1031.T3
Selected from the author's previously published
works: Reactionary Essays on Poetry and Ideas
(1936), Reason in Madness (1941), and The Hover-
ing Fly (1949).
181 1. Poems, 1 922- 1 947. New York, Scribner,
1948. 208 p. 48-5674 PS3539.A74P58
Earlier books of poetry by Allen Tate include
Mr. Pope, and Other Poems ( 1928), Ode to the Con-
federate Dead . . . (1930), Poems, 1928-1931
(1932), Selected Poems (1937), and The Winter
Sea (1945).
1812. Arnold, Willard B. The social ideas of
Allen Tate. Boston, Bruce Humphries,
1955. 64 p. 54-9591 PS3539.A74Z6
1813. SARA TEASDALE, 1884-1933
Sara Teasdale's better poems, mainly lyrics
of love and muted emotions, are handled with deli-
cate control, and infused with quiet sincerity and
simplicity. In subject and style her work is remi-
niscent of the later 19th century, although a few
elements reveal the influence of the free verse and
Imagist movements.
1 8 14. The collected poems. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1937. 311 p.
37-28625 PS3539.E15 1937
Contents. — Sonnets to Duse and other poems
(1907). — Helen of Troy and other poems (1911).'
Rivers to the sea (1915). — Love songs (1917).
Flame and shadow (1920). — Dark of the moon
(1926). — Stars to-night (1930). — Strange victory
(i933)-
1 8 15. JAMES GROVER THURBER, 1894-
James Thurber is a humorist in love with
life and fantasy. His whimsical realism sometimes
conceals a mordant satire, but his tone is usually
gentle, for he finds more folly than depravity in
the world. The illustrations he produces for his
own work complement his prose, and are thought
by some to be masterpieces of line drawing. Though
a realistic appearance usually dominates, his work
is occasionally somewhat eerie, and nightmares run
loose in midday streets or Victorian drawing-rooms.
18 1 6. Is sex necessary? or, Why you feel the way
you do, by James Thurber and E. B. White.
New York, Harper, 1929. 197 p.
29-27938 PN6161.T56
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I47
1817. Cream of Thurber, skimmed from the fol-
lowing writings and drawings of James
Thurber: My life and hard times, The owl in the
attic, The middle-aged man on the flying trapeze,
Let your mind alone! London, Hamilton [1939]
250 p. illus. 40-6648 PS3539.H94A6 1939
18 18. The Thurber carnival. New York, Harper,
1945. 369 p. illus.
45-1366 PS3539.H94T5
1 8 19. The Thurber album; a new collection of
pieces about people. New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1952. 346 p. illus.
52-10216 PS3539.H94T46
1820. Thurber country; a new collection of pieces
about males and females, mainly of our own
species. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1953. 276 p.
illus. 53-97°° PS3539-H94T53
1 82 1. FREDERIC RIDGELY TORRENCE,
1875-1950
Ridgely Torrence produced a restrained, con-
servative type of poetry. Although the volume of
his work is very slim, he wrote what has been
called flawless verse. His lyricism reached matur-
ity in Hesperides (1925). He also experimented
with Negro drama, preparing the way for others.
As a poetry editor of The New Republic during the
twenties, he gave encouragement to a number of
younger poets.
1822. Poems. New ed., with new poems. New
York, Macmillan, 1952. 127 p.
52-3721 PS3539.O63P6 1952
1823. MARK ALBERT VAN DOREN, 1894-
Poet, editor, critic, lecturer, and professor of
English at Columbia University, Van Doren for a
number of years has been instrumental in the de-
velopment of literary interest and taste in the United
States. He is an exceedingly prolific poet, whose
work expresses, sometimes symbolically, his sensi-
tive response to life in America and to nature seen
and enjoyed in rural areas. In 1940 his Collected
Poems, 1922-1938 (1939) won the Pulitzer prize.
He has written prose that is also poetical, as in a
novel, Windless Cabins ( 1940), and much distinctive
criticism.
1824. Jonathan Gentry. New York, Boni, 1931.
205 p. illus.
31-7761 PS3543.A557J6 193 1
An epic poem of America, in three parts: "Ohio
River (1800)"; "Civil War"; and "Foreclosure."
1825. The Mayfield deer. New York, Holt, 1941.
271 p. illus.
41-12993 PS3543.A557M3 1941
Narrative poem based on an incident re-recorded
in an Illinois county history, but told also as an
episode of the Wisconsin frontier.
1826. Mortal summer. Iowa City, Prairie Press,
1953. 63 p. 54-18137 PS3543.A557M6
Poem.
1827. Selected poems. New York, Holt, 1954. ix,
. 238 p._ 54-9660 PS3543.A557A17 1954
This selection includes poems from the author's
Spring Thunder, and Other Poems (1924), 7 P. A/.,
and Other Poems (1926), Now the S\y, and Other
Poems (1928), A Winter Diary, and Other Poems
(1935), The Last Loo\, and Other Poems (1937),
Collected Poems (1939), The Seven Sleepers, and
Other Poems (1944), New Poems (1948), and
Spring Birth, and Other Poems (1953). It does not
include the long works: Jonathan Gentry, The May-
field Deer, and Mortal Summer, which are entered
above.
1828. CARL VAN VECHTEN, 1880-
Van Vechten has been noted as an interpre-
ter of jazz society life in New York City during the
1920's. His first prominence came as a music critic,
from which he branched off to essays in other fields.
Essays from his early volumes were selected for
Red: Papers on Musical Subjects (1925) and Exca-
vations: A Boo\ of Advocacies (1926). The "ear-
lier" Tiger in the House (1920) was a book on cats
in history, folklore, and the arts. With Peter Whif-
fle (1922) Van Vechten turned to fiction, the form
in which he became most famous; this was a humor-
ous, "sparkling," "civilized" book about Bohemian
life in New York before World War I. His last
novel, Parties (1930) brought the record of frivolous
life in New York City up to the depression. In
1932 he published a series of autobiographical essays
in Sacred and Profane Memories. As the mode of
life with which he is associated became a thing of
the past, Van Vechten ceased to write extended
works. Since then he has appeared primarily as an
editor or as the author of introductions; much of
his time has been devoted to photography.
1829. The blind bow-boy. New York, Knopf,
1923. 261 p. 23-11805 PZ3.V368BI
A novel about fashionable life in New York in the
1920's.
148 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1830. The tattooed countess; a romantic novel with
a happy ending. New York, Knopf, 1924.
286 p. 24-21077 PZ3.V368Ta
A commentary on the culture of a small Iowa
town, to which the heroine returns on a visit to her
sister. The time is the late 19th century.
1831. Firecrackers; a realistic novel. New York,
Knopf, 1925. 246 p.
25-16657 PZ3.V368Fi
A story of New York in the mid 1920's.
1832. Nigger heaven. New York, Knopf, 1926.
286 p. 26-15403 PZ3.V368Ni
A novel depicting Negro life and customs in
Harlem.
1833. Spider boy; a scenario for a moving picture.
New York, Knopf, 1928. 297 p.
28-19963 PZ3.V368SP
A humorous novel on Hollywood.
1834. Jonas, Klaus W. Carl Van Vechten, a
bibliography. New York, Knopf, 1955. xii,
82 p. 55-79" Z8926.J6
1835. Lueders, Edward G. Carl Van Vechten and
the twenties. [Albuquerque] University of
New Mexico Press, 1955. 150 p.
55-5451 PS3543.A653Z8
1836. HOWELL HUBERT VINES, 1899-
The local-color novels of Howell Vines reflect
the Warrior rivers country of northern Alabama.
Although they do not have a strong plot line, and
are not outstanding as works of characterization
(with the region itself contending for the position
of main character), they do have a position among
works of regional literature. The author's style
shows a sensitivity to the English spoken in the
area, though more in its cadences and vocabulary
than in the use of phonetic spellings of pronuncia-
tional variations, and his total effect is nearer to the
experience of those who know the South at first
hand than that of better-known writers.
1837. A river goes with heaven. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1930. 290 p.
30-29555 PZ3.V749Ri
1838. This green thicket world. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1934. 375 p.
34-9619 PZ3.V749Th
1839. GLENWAY WESCOTT, 1901-
With the publication of his first novel, The
Apple of the Eye (1924), Wescott began to use
regional themes drawn from aspects of life observed
in his native state, Wisconsin. These include: the
influence on a boy's developing instincts of life in
a rural district of the state; a young man's nostalgic
rediscovery of his ancestors, all the way back to
pioneer days, from stories suggested by pictures in
an old family album; and short stories descriptive of
landscapes and localities, with overtones of social
criticism. Before writing his later books the au-
thor was almost continually abroad for 9 years, on
the Riveria and in Paris. From these expatriate
years came influences that doubdess contributed to
the writing of his short novel, The Pilgrim Haw\
(1940), which introduces international elements,
and to that of his war novel, Apartment in Athens
(1945), concerned with the effects of the German
occupation of Greece during World War II on a
native family.
1840. The grandmothers; a family portrait. New
York, Harper, 1927. 338 p.
27-26866 PZ3.W5i2Gr
The story of a pioneer family in the Middle West.
1 84 1. Good-bye Wisconsin. New York, Harper,
1938. 362 p. 28-21484 PZ3.W512G0
Short stories.
1842. NATHANAEL WEST, 1902-1940
West wrote bitter satiric-comedy novels in a ,
somewhat surrealistic manner. His stories range,
from that of a man who is editor of a New York
newspaper advice-to-the-lovelorn column to a report
on Hollywood as he saw it while he was a film
writer there.
1843. Miss Lonelyhearts. New York, Liveright,
1933. 213 p. 33-i4x39 PZ3-W5i952Mi
1844. The day of the locust. New York, Random
House, 1939. 238 p.
39-12578 PZ3.W5i952Day
1845. EDITH NEWBOLD (JONES)
WHARTON, 1 862-1937
Edith Wharton in her novels chronicled New
York's decaying aristocracy of the late 19th century.
Her writings involve a degree of satire and irony
directed at the faults of this small group, of which
she herself was a part. A careful craftsman who
had little direct influence on serious literature, she
probably contributed much to raising the standards
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I49
of popular fiction. Artistically she survives as a
careful author of manners and as a regionalist. She
depicted one segment of society without implying
or perceiving aspects of the nature and direction of
American society as a whole. One of her more
deliberate attempts to depict the group she knew
so well was her series entitled Old New Yorf^, which
appeared in 1924 in four volumes which may be read
as separate works; the individual titles under which
they appeared were False Dawn {The 'Forties),
The Old Maid (The 'Fifties), The Spar\ {The
'Sixties), and New Year's Day (The 'Seventies).
In a few instances Edith Wharton departed from
portraying New York society by employing a New
England or Middle West background, or by han-
dling the theme of Americans in Europe.
1846. The valley of decision. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1902. 2 v. 2-6076 PZ3.W555V
1847. The house of mirth. London, New York,
Macmillan, 1905. 516 p.
44-44937 PZ3.W555H02
1848. Ethan Frome. New York, Scribner, 191 1.
195 p. 11-25015 PZ3.W555Et
1849. The reef. New York, Appleton, 1912.
366 p. 12-25996 PZ3.W555Re
1850. The custom of the country. New York,
Scribner, 19 13. 594 p.
13-22207 PZ3.W555CU
PS3545.H16C8
1 85 1. Xingu, and other stories. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1916. 436 p. 16-21972 PZ3.W555X
Contents. — Xingu. — C o m i n g home. — Autre
temps . . . — Kerfol. — The long run. — The triumph
of night. — The choice. — Bunner sisters.
1852. The age of innocence. New York, Appleton,
1920. 364 p. 20-18615 PZ3.W555Ag
1853. The mother's recompense. New York, Ap-
pleton, 1925. 341 p.
25-8793 PZ3.W555M0
1854. Hudson River bracketed. New York, Ap-
pleton, 1929. 559 p.
29-24077 PZ3.W555HU
Sequel: The Gods Arrive (New York, Appleton,
*932- 431 P-)-
1855. An Edith Wharton treasury; edited and with
an introd. by Arthur Hobson Quinn. New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1950. xxxi, 581 p.
50-2775 PZ3.W555Ed
Contents. — The age of innocence. — The old
maid. — After Holbein. — A bottle of Perrier. — The
lady's maid's bell. — Roman fever. — The other two. —
Madame De Treymes. — The moving finger. —
Xingu. — Autre temps. — Bunner sisters.
1856. Nevius, Blake. Edith Wharton, a study of
her fiction. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1953. xi, 271 p.
53-10439 PS3545.H16Z75
"The writings of Edith Wharton": p. 260-263.
Bibliography: p. 264-265.
1857. JOHN HALL WHEELOCK, 1886-
Wheelock is a poet who began with rather
exuberant poems, but before long turned to philo-
sophic lyrics of moderated tone. Writing always
in a traditional manner (in large part derived from
Henley, Whitman, and the Romantics), his early
verse at times reflected, as a background to his
themes, life in New York; his later verse has usually
been generalized insofar as any "setting" is con-
cerned, but deals with love, loneliness, longing, and
an awareness that "That too has passed away."
1858. Poems old and new. New York, Scribner,
1956. 203 p.
56-9881 PS3545.H33A6 1956
Wheelock's earlier volumes of poetry include The
Human Fantasy (1911), The Beloved Adventure
(1912), Love and Liberation (1913), Dust and Light
(1919), The Blac\ Panther (1922), The Bright
Doom (1927), and Poems, 1911-1936 (1936).
1859. ELWYN BROOKS WHITE, 1899-
Long associated editorially with The New
Yorker, E. B. White writes familiar essays with
touches of sophisticated humor which have been
called the best now being written in English. Com-
monly commenting on and reflecting life in urban
(and suburban) America, usually in articles first
written for The New Yorker, he also has a taste
for rural life, as evinced in the essays he wrote for
Harper's during the years in which he lived on a
Maine farm. The serious undercurrent in his work
has come to the fore in productions such as The
Wild Flag (1946), which argued the cause for fed-
eral world government, and the booklet essay, Here
Is New Yor/( (1949), which some have adjudged
the best such literary description of the city that has
been written. In addition to his prose, he has writ-
ten light verse, as in The Lady Is Cold (1929) and
The Fox of Peapac\, and Other Poems (1938).
150 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
i860. Everyday is Saturday. New York, Harper,
1934. 242 p.
34-33063 PS3545.H5187E8 1934
"The paragraphs that make this book appeared
first in the New Yorker."
1 86 1. Quo vadimus? or, The case for the bicycle.
New York, Harper, 1939. 219 p.
39-4681 PS3545.H5187Q6 1939
1862. One man's meat. New York, Harper, 1942.
346 p. 42-16753 PS3545.H5187O5
All but three of the essays are from the monthly
department "One man's meat" in Harper's
Magazine.
1863. The second tree from the corner. New
York, Harper, 1954. 253 p.
53-11864 PS3545.H5187S4
Prose and poetry.
1864. THORNTON NIVEN WILDER, 1897-
As an author Thornton Wilder cannot
readily be regarded as being in the main currents
of modern fiction. He tends to write in a concise,
expressive, and almost classical manner. In this he
reveals his scholarly background, as also at times
in his subject matter. Thus, The Woman of
Andros (1930) is a novel based on Terence's Andria.
Wilder started as a novelist with The Cabala ( 1926) ;
however, in 1928 appeared his third book, a collec-
tion of short plays entitled The Angel that Troubled
the Waters, and Other Plays, and since then he has
gained considerable stature as a dramatist. In both
fields his work has been experimental and lyrical;
these aspects, combined with his frequent subdety,
his sparseness of detail, and a humor tending to
gentle satire or irony, have at times perhaps obscured
the omnipresent philosophical attitude: the concern
with the nature of man and the problems of ideal-
ism, which are illumined by the mystical impulse
which impregnates his writing.
1865. Our town, a play in three acts. New York,
McCann, 1938. 128 p.
38-27331 PS3545.I345O9 1938a
This play, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize
for drama, is meant to depict life in the early 20th
century in a New Hampshire town, intended to
typify American communities of the period.
1866. Heaven's my destination. New York,
Longmans, Green, 1934. 244 p.
35-4227 PZ3.W6468He
An overtly realistic novel about a salesman who
has undergone a religious conversion; though with
tragic implications, the book is a comedy in which
some Midwestern and Southern beliefs are examined.
1867. The bridge of San Luis Rey. New York,
Boni, 1927. 235 p.
27-23452 PS3545.I345B7 1927
This novel, which received a Pulitzer prize, is
about a group of people who were killed as the
result of the collapse of a bridge in Peru. The
stories are presented as derived from a book written
by a Franciscan who had set out to establish that
the deaths were the result of divine providence.
1868. The skin of our teeth, play in three acts.
New York, Harper, 1942. 142 p.
42-36421 PS3545.I345S5
This unconventional comedy, which was awarded
a Pulitzer prize for drama, attempts to present the
history of civilized man through the story of a
family living in Excelsior, New Jersey.
1869. The ides of March. New York, Harper,
1948. 246 p. 48-647 PZ3.W6468Id
An epistolary novel, or "fantasia," centering
about the life of Julius Caesar.
1870. OSCAR WILLIAMS, 1900-
Williams had an early start as a poet, but
soon turned to the lucrative world of advertising.
Then, after a fairly long period, he returned to
poetry, and soon established a reputation as a poet
of the city, expressed in an obviously "modern"
verse that is heavily studded with figures of speech.
An even greater reputation was established by
Williams as anthologist of poetry. His anthologies,
which have been widely praised for their receptivity
to new and little-known poets, include A Little
Treasury of Modern Poetry, English and American
(1946; rev. ed., 1950), A Little Treasury of Great
Poetry, English and American (1947), A Little
Treasury of American Poetry (1948), and The
New Pocket Anthology of American Verse (1955).
1871. Selected poems. New York, Scribner, 1947.
.H3P- 47-3°76° pS3545-l5337A6 IQ47
Earlier volumes of poetry by Williams are The
Golden Darkness (1921), Adam & Eve & the City
(1936), The Man Coming Toward You (1940), and
That's All That Matters (1945).
1872. WILLIAM CARLOS WILLIAMS, 1883-
Williams was early a member of, but soon
broke with, the Imagist school; however, he has
always been a visual poet concerned with form and
sound patterns as organic reinforcement of what
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I5I
he has to say. His poems reveal a humanitarian
poet of social mores, ethics, and environment, who
strives to establish a unique personal form and
idiom. The cadences of speech pervade both his
poetry and his prose. In both prose and poetry
Williams is concerned with the question of what
is "American," especially the localistic aspects as seen
in terms of his home area in New Jersey. This may
be seen in the short stories of volumes such as The
Knife of the Times, and Other Stories (1932) and
Life Along the Passaic River (1938). A Voyage
to Pagany (1928) is a novel about a smalltown doc-
tor who goes to Europe with some ambition to write.
1873. In the American grain. New York, P.oni,
1925. 235 p. 25-23403 E169.1.W52
Contents. — Red Eric. — The discovery of the In-
dies; Christopher Columbus. — The destruction of
Tenochtitlan; Cortez and Montezuma. — The foun-
tain of eternal youth; Juan Ponce de Leon. — De Soto
and the New world. — Sir Walter Raleigh. — Voyage
of the "Mayflower." — The founding of Quebec;
Samuel de Champlain. — The Maypole at Merry-
mount; Thomas Morton. — Cotton Mather's Won-
ders of the invisible world: 1. Enchantments en-
countered. 2. The trial of Bridget Bishop at Salem.
The trial of Susanna Martin. 3. Curiosities. — Pere
Sebastian Rasles. — The discovery of Kentucky; Dan-
iel Boone. — George Washington. — Poor Richard;
Benjamin Franklin. — Battle between the Bon
Homme Richard and the Serapis; John Paul
Jones. — Jacataqua. — The virtue of history; Aaron
Burr. — Advent of the slaves. — Edgar Allan Poe. —
Abraham Lincoln.
1874. White mule. Norfolk, Conn., New Di-
rections, 1937. 293 p.
37-11249 PZ3.W67667WI1
PS3545.I544W5
This novel was designed as the first part of a
trilogy reflecting American manners; however, all
three volumes can stand as individual works. The
subsequent volumes were entitled In the Money and
The Build-Up (vide infra).
1875. In the money. Norfolk, Conn., New Di-
rections, 1940. 382 p.
40-35170 PZ3.W67667ln
The second volume of a trilogy which began with
White Mule (q. v.).
1876. Paterson. New York, New Directions,
1946-51. 4 v. 46-5910 PS3545.I544P3
A fifth and concluding volume of this verse work
was scheduled for publication in 1958.
1877. A dream of love; a play in three acts and
eight scenes. [New York, New Directions]
1948. 107 p. (Direction, 6)
48-8451 AP2.D583, no. 6
1878. Collected later poems. [New York, New
Directions] 1950. 240 p.
50-11028 PS3545.I544A17 1950
This is a collection of the poems Williams wrote
during the 1940's, with the exception of the long
poem on the author's New Jersey home town,
Paterson (vide supra). Individual volumes of
poetry which appeared in the period covered in-
clude The Broken Span (1941), The Wedge (1944),
The Clouds, Aigeltinger, Russia, &c. (1948), and
The Pinl{ Church (1949). During this period there
also appeared in the New classics series of New
Directions a volume of the Selected Poems (1949)
of Williams.
1879. Make light of it; collected stories. New
York, Random House, 1950. 342 p.
50-10847 PZ3.W6;667Mak
PS3545.I544A6 1950
1880. Autobiography. New York, Random
House, 195 1. 402 p.
51-12522 PS3545.I544Z5
1881. Collected earlier poems. [New York, New
Directions] 1951. 482 p.
51-8849 PS3545.I544A17 1951
Earlier volumes of poetry by Williams include
Poems (1909), The Tempers (I9I3)» d Boo\ of
Poems, Al Que Quierel (1917), Kora in Hell
(1920), Sour Grapes (1921), Spring and All (1923),
and An Early Martyr, and Other Poems (1935).
An inclusive collection covering most of this period
is The Complete Collected Poems . . . 1906-1938
(1938).
1882. The build-up, a novel. New York, Random
Llouse, 1952. 335 p.
52-5166 PZ3.W67667BU
The final volume of a trilogy which began with
White Mule and In the Money (qq. v.).
1883. The desert music, and other poems. New
York, Random House, 1954. 90 p.
54-5667 PS3545.I544D4
1884. Selected essays. New York, Random House,
1954. 342 p.
54-7815 PS3545.I544A16 1954
1885. Journey to love. New York, Random
House, 1955. 87 p.
Poems. 55"8l73 PS3545-I544J6
152 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1886. Koch, Vivienne. William Carlos Williams.
Norfolk, Conn., New Directions, 1950. x,
278 p. (The Makers of modern literature)
50-697 PS3545.I544Z6
Bibliography: p. 267-273.
1887. THOMAS WOLFE, 1900-1938
Thomas Wolfe, the son of a stonecutter and
his wife who kept a boarding-house, was born in
Asheville, North Carolina, a hill city in a state
proud of its mountains and the people who live
among them. Educated at the University of North
Carolina and at Harvard, he became a teacher in
New York. Later, he was able to extend his ex-
perience by travel and observation of European
civilization at first hand. The impact of these
changing environments, and the combination of rags
and riches about him before and during the great
depression that began in 1929, influenced the de-
velopment of ideas he poured forth in a spate,
through the medium of his four massive novels.
Sometimes mystically rhapsodic, at other times as
naturalistic as those of Theodore Dreiser, these books
are intensely autobiographical, as well as full of
details of his family's experiences. Using an adapta-
tion of the stream-of-consciousness technique, prob-
ably derived from his study of James Joyce, they
reveal the author's unsuccessful search for perma-
nent solutions for intellectual, philosophical, social,
and economic problems observed in a world in flux.
Because of their form as well as their meaning these
novels are examples of a new direction still to be
observed in American fiction.
1888. Look homeward, angel, a story of the buried
life. New York, Scribner, 1929. 626 p.
29-22336 PZ3.W8314L0
A biographical novel of Wolfe's youth, it traces
the hero's youth through his attendance at the State
University.
1889. Of time and the river; a legend of man's
hunger in his youth. New York, Scribner,
1935. 912 p. 35"27°95 PZ3.W83i40f
A sequel to hoo\ Homeward, Angel, this volume
traces the hero's career through graduate work in
playwriting at Harvard, teaching in New York
City, and a European tour.
1890. The web and the rock. New York, Llarper,
1939. 695 p. 39-27574 PZ3.W83i4We2
In some ways a sequel to Of Time and the River;
however, the hero's name has been changed, and
there is a recapitulation of his youth. The story
then continues with his writing novels in New York,
and having a love affair with a rich stage-designer.
The book concludes with a trip to Germany.
1 89 1. You can't go home again. New York, Har-
per, 1940. 743 p.
40-27633 PZ3.W8314Y0
A sequel to The Web and the Roc\. The hero
discovers that the home town he knew is lost in
the past, and that the Germany he loved has been
destroyed by Naziism. Much of the book reflects
the pre-depression optimism and financial specula-
tion in the twenties.
1892. The hills beyond. New York, Harper, 194 1.
386 p. 41-21548 PZ3.W83i4Hi
Contents. — The lost boy. — No cure for it. — Gen-
tlemen of the press. — A kinsman of his blood. —
Chickamauga. — The return of the prodigal. — On
leprechauns. — Portrait of a literary critic. — The lion
at morning. — God's lonely man. — The hills be-
yond.— A note on Thomas Wolfe, by E. C. Aswell.
1893. Thomas Wolfe's letters to his mother, Julia
Elizabeth Wolfe. Edited with an introd. by
John Skally Terry. New York, Scribner, 1943.
xxxv, 368 p. 43-6520 PS3545.O337Z55
1894. Letters. Collected and edited, with an in-
trod. and explanatory text, by Elizabeth
Nowell. New York, Scribner, 1956. xviii, 797 p.
56-9880 PS3545.O337Z54
1895. Adams, Agatha B. Thomas Wolfe, Carolina
student; a brief biography. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Library, 1950. 91 p.
(The University of North Carolina. Library ex-
tension publication, v. 15, no. 2)
50-63183 PS3545.O337Z6
1896. Johnson, Pamela H. Hungry Gulliver; an
English critical appraisal of Thomas Wolfe.
New York, Scribner, 1948. 170 p.
48-5174 PS3545.O337Z75 1948
London edition published under title: Thomas
Wolfe.
1897. Muller, Herbert J. Thomas Wolfe. Nor-
folk, Conn., New Directions Books, 1947.
196 p. (The Makers of modern literature)
47-11790 PS3545.O337Z8
1898. Pollock, Thomas C, and Oscar Cargill, eds.
Thomas Wolfe at Washington Square. New
York, New York University Press, 1954. xiii, 163 p.
illus. 54-5275 PS3545.O337Z83
Contents. — Thomas Wolfe at Washington
Square, by O. Cargill. — Memorabilia. His students
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 153
remember: Drunk with words, by A. G. Doyle.
Overloaded black briefcase, by B. W. Kofsky.
Thomas Wolfe, a reminiscence, by J. Mandel. His
colleagues remember: and gladly teche ... by R.
Dow. Tom Wolfe: penance no more, by H. T.
Volkening. My experiences with Thomas Wolfe,
by V. Fisher. Replacing Tom Wolfe, by R.
Krauss. — Bibliography (p. 153-163).
1899. Rubin, Louis D. Thomas Wolfe; the
weather of his youth. Baton Rouge, Loui-
siana State University Press, 1955. 183 p. illus.
55-7364 PS3545.O337Z85
1900. Walser, Richard G., ed. The enigma of
Thomas Wolfe; biographical and critical se-
lections. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
IQ53- xi, 313P. 52-13698 PS3545.O337Z9
1901. Watkins, Floyd C. Thomas Wolfe's char-
acters, portraits from life. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press, 1957. 194 p.
57-7335 PS3545.O337Z94
1902. ELINOR (HOYT) WYLIE, 1887-1928
Although she wrote several novels, Elinor
Wylie is better known for her poetry, which has been
praised for clarity, brilliancy, delicateness, britde-
ness, and a mastery of technique. Influenced by
Donne and the metaphysicals, she was not of them.
Her verse is limited in range, but displays great
artistic integrity.
1903. Collected poems. [Edited by William Rose
Benet] New York, Knopf, 1932. 311 p.
32-26577 PS3545.Y45 1932
"The contents of this book embody the contents
of Elinor Wylie's four books of poems, Nets to
Catch the Wind (1921), Blac\ Armour (1923),
Trivial Breath (1928), and Angels and Earthly
Creatures (1929), in the exact sequence and order
in which they were originally published. Added
to these is a section of poems hitherto uncollected
in book form, some of which have been previously
published in periodicals." — Foreword.
1904. Collected prose. New York, Knopf, 1933.
879 P- 33-27444 PS3545.Y45A16 1933
Contexts. — Jennifer Lorn, with a preface by
C. Van Vechten. — The Venetian glass nephew, with
a preface by C. Van Doren. — The orphan angel,
with a preface by S. V. Benet. — Mr. Hodge and Mr.
Hazard, with a preface by Isabel Paterson. — Fugi-
tive prose, with a preface by W. R. Benet.
1905. MARYA ZATURENSKA, 1902-
Although Marya Zaturenska was born in
Russia, whence she came to America as a child, she
has written distinguished poetry in English, and has
found for herself a place in modern American poetry.
Her subde, lyrical verse won for her a Pulitzer prize
for poetry, for her volume Cold Morning Sfy. In
addition to poetry she has, with her husband Horace
Gregory (q. v.), produced a history of modern
American poetry; by herself she has written a biog-
raphy of Christina Rossetti (1949), whom she in
some ways resembles.
1906. Selected poems. [New York] Grove Press,
1954. 130 p.
54-81 1 1 PS3549.A77A6 1954
In addition to new poems, this volume contains
selections from the earlier books Threshold and
Hearth (1934), Cold Morning S/^y (1937), The
Listening Landscape (1941), and The Golden
Mirror ( 1944).
F. The Second World War and the Atomic Age (1940- 195 5)
// should be candidly admitted that this final
section of "Literature" was split off from the pre-
ceding one largely as a matter of convenience.
Hence, the logic of listing a dozen or more writers
in this, rather than in the preceding, section is
tenuous at best and cannot be completely sustained
by argument. The more important writers belong
to both periods and have contributed to most of the
trends observable in both. That a new period is
in the making, however, seems clear.
The years KJ40-1955 were among the most mo-
1U240 — 60 12
mentous in recorded history. In them the atomic
bomb was brought into production and used as a
means for winning the most destructive war the
world has seen. Within the decade after the first
bomb was dropped in K)4$ tensions accompanying
the progress of the atomic age spread over countries
and continents until the whole world was, and is,
affected. During these years American authors and
their readers began living in a new international
age. This era of international preoccupations teas
brought into being, not by a comnwn Lsnguage of
154 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
scholarship and a common form of religion, as in
the; Middle Ages, but by an uneasy peace and a
shared uncertainty concerning the future of human
beings in a world brought together, for good or ill,
by scientific discoveries which have annihilated dis-
tances that formerly contributed to a sense of safety
within national boundaries.
The final effects of these forces with which mod-
ern man is at grips are hidden in the future. So
far as their impact on American literature is con-
cerned only a much longer historical perspective
than that now available can contribute to a reliable
verdict. It is, however, already a matter of literary
history that William Faulkner, Eugene O'Neill, T. S.
Eliot, and other contemporary writers whose worlds
have been described in the preceding section have
contributed to a second American renaissance, oc-
curring roughly between 1920 and 1940. They
have established their reputations, their places at the
bar of contemporary criticism, and given to the
"one world" of the atomic age an expression of
American culture at its present state of maturity.
For the purposes of this final section devoted to
literature, attention is therefore focused on younger
authors writing at mid-century, from whose wor\
must be derived such evidence as exists of the new
literary directions currently being ta\en.
One obvious point of departure for assessing
trends in current literature is provided by writers'
use of war as a theme. It will be remembered that
the First World War was reflected in literature pro-
duced by a "lost generation" of disillusioned authors.
Their pessimism after the failure of America's cru-
sade to "ma\e the world safe for democracy" con-
tributed to the philosophy of deterministic natural-
ism that pervaded much of their writing. The
writers who participated in or observed the Second
World War never hoped that their struggle would
end war or bring peace all over the earth. They
had fewer illusions to lose than had their seniors;
hence, the trend of their writing about the last war
is away from the deterministic "closed system" va-
riety of naturalism and toward an "open ended"
relativistic naturalism, with symbolic overtones, but
occasionally owing much to the reportorial style
developed by numerous correspondents whose wor\,
it has been said, made this the most fully reported
war in history.
Another characteristic of contemporary creative
writing, including poetry, is its frequent use of lan-
guage formerly considered, in general, too crude
or unpleasant to be used in "polite society" and
hence seldom or never embodied in literary expres-
sion. This uncommon "language of common men"
is sometimes employed with such fidelity as to
shoc\ the segment of the reading public that has
been educated in classic American literature char-
acterized by decorous, even elegant, language, as so
much of the best igth-century writing was. Some
critics feel that this shoc\ treatment, used deliber-
ately, not only achieves realism for characters to
whom the language used would be natural, but also
awa\ens complacent readers to awareness of con-
ditions about which they may prefer to remain
ignorant. It is doubtless true, also, that contempo-
rary writing reflects one of the recurring changes in
taste and manners that literature has mirrored down
the ages.
Not merely the language used but also the sub-
jects popularly treated by contemporary writers have
undergone further change. Uncovering hidden
abnormalities and compulsions in the lives of deviate
individuals, or even in lives that on the surface
appear commonplace, if not normal, has also had a
part in this further brea\ with the genteel tradition
after its disruption by Theodore Dreiser and others
in preceding periods. Not all the novels, short stor-
ies, and plays that feature this interest are grim.
Irony, humor, fantasy, symbolism, Gothic horror,
and the use of native American themes drawn from
the historical past all lend variety and interest to
much of this type of wor\. Even the bitterness,
satire, and cynicism with which the dar\er aspects of
contemporary life are frequently portrayed by young
writers are, according to some critics, an indirect
revelation of the moral indignation of the authors
against private and public indifference to such con-
ditions, as well as society's backwardness in coping
with them. These authors are not reformers on
a national scale, however, as were many earlier
American writers who concerned themselves with
large social and economic problems in the United
States. It appears that literary artists today thinly
of the spiritual and social problems of man in the
contemporary world primarily in clinical and sec-
ondarily in sociological or anthropological frames of
reference, rather than in the religious, political, socio-
economic frames of the past.
Literary criticism continues to flourish. It has
been justly said that the creative-writer-critic and par-
ticularly the poet-critic constitute one of the most
striding phenomena present in American literature
today. It is also interesting to note that at a time
when the United States is called the strongest de-
fender of Western civilization such a volume of
critical exposition is available for the understanding
of America's own civilization, so far as it is reflected
in literature. Long before literary historians could
possibly complete their wor\ of review and synthesis
current studies by highly competent critics have been
carried to interested national and international audi-
ences by means of journals of literary opinion pub-
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I55
lished both by university and commercial presses.
Whether or not contemporary writing and the criti-
cism of that writing reveal the American mind and
spirit "in the round," the revelation that has been
made is \nown jar beyond the bounds of the United
States. Writers, therefore, assume an increasing re-
sponsibility as representatives of their country in
the world.
With respect to developments in American poetry,
the critics emphasize: a departure from the use of
experimental forms developed by the poets' fore-
runners; a return to lyricism; and a trend toward
neo-classicism. Some commentators have under-
taken to defend poets from charges of wilful com-
plexity and obscurity leveled against them, some-
times by their peers. The champions of the "dif-
ficult" poets point out that the times reflected in
poetry also are complex, hence not susceptible to
treatment in simple, obvious terms; and that, more-
over, good poetry has never been easy poetry. The
reader's intelligence has its own part to play in
reaching the poet's true meaning.
Finally, two striding and related aspects of litera-
ture during this fifteen-year fragment of a period are
its extent and its accessibility. Men of letters, who
constituted such a small fraction of American pro-
fessional society in the early years of the country's
history, now play a role enhanced in importance by
their growing numbers and by their productivity.
New avenues also tend to open out more widely
to accommodate the distribution of their wor\. One
of these is provided by the great increase in num-
bers of students receiving education at the college
level. While stringent critics of education have
been heard to deny that college education implies
more than a minimum literacy for the student, the
fact remains that the general effects of a national
literary tradition are much more widespread than
ever before. Even without formal higher educa-
tion the citizen of today is constantly besieged by
claims on his attention of ideas gleaned from his
radio, his television, the motion picture theater he
attends, and the reprints of boo\s purchased
cheaply at his local drugstore. The heterogeneous
audience created by this interplay of education, en-
tertainment, and information is not universally dis-
criminating; consequently much of the writing
designed to attract it is commercially inspired to
win popular approval and to increase profits. How-
ever, one of the hopeful signs of the literary times
is the dissemination of serious literary wor\ by
modern mass media of communication. At home
and abroad the opportunities — and responsibilities —
of American writers are greater than in any earlier
period.
1907. JAMES AGEE, 1909-1955
Agee's serious and fastidious writing is
marked by moral indignation at the faults of con-
temporary society and by his power to express his
judgments with poetic intensity, in a highly in-
dividualistic vocabulary. His prose works include
Let Us Now Praise Famous Men ( 1941), a documen-
tary text to photographs by Walker Evans, a book
which is a biting arraignment of the system of farm
tenantry in Alabama cotton production; and The
Morning Watch (1951), a long short story of a
twelve-year-old boy's inner conflicts and adjustments.
1908. Permit me voyage [poems] With a fore-
ward by Archibald MacLeish. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1934. 59 p. (The Yale
series of younger poets, edited by S. V. Benet)
34-38156 PS3501.G35P4 1934
1909. LOUIS AUCHINCLOSS, 1917-
Auchincloss is a novelist of manners dealing
with well-to-do elements of New York City society,
somewhat in the tradition of Edith Wharton and
Henry James (qq. v.). His first book, The In-
different Children (1947) was published under the
pseudonym of Andrew Lee.
1910. The injustice collectors. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1950. 248 p.
50-14014 PZ3.A898IP
Short stories.
191 1. Sybil. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952 [i. e.
195 1 ] 284 p. 51-8774 PZ3.A898Sy
1912. A law for the lion. [Cambridge, Mass.]
Houghton Mifflin, 1953. 279 p.
53-5728 PZ3.A898Law
1913. The romantic egoists. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1954. 210 p.
54-5984 PZ3.A898R0
Short stories.
1914. JAMES BALDWIN, 1924-
Baldwin in his first novel tells the story of a
young Harlem Negro's spiritual problems and
orthodox "salvation." The flashback technique is
used to present the family background and to give
the work wider scope for its oblique comment on
morality and mores.
1915. Co tell it on the mountain. New York,
Knopf, 1953. 303 p.
52-12199 PZ4.B18G0
156 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1916. SHIRLEY FRANCES BARKER, 1911-
Shirley Barker first appeared before the pub-
lic as a poetess. Her The Darf( Hills Under (1933)
was published in The Yale series of younger poets.
This volume presaged her interest in New England
in general and her native New Hampshire in par-
ticular. To this setting she has regularly returned,
most notably as a historical novelist dealing with the
colonial period. However, in Fire and the Ham-
mer (1953) she deals with Pennsylvania and New
Jersey at the time of the Revolutionary War.
1 91 7. Peace, my daughters. New York, Crown,
1949. 248 p. 49-1164 PZ3.B2457Pe
A novel about the Salem witchcraft trials.
1918. Rivers parting. New York, Crown, 1950.
311 p. 50-14406 PZ3.B2457Ri
A novel set in 17th century England and New
Hampshire.
1919. A land and a people; a book of poems. New
York, Crown, 1952. 78p.
52-5683 PS3503.A5684L3
1920. Tomorrow the new moon. Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 354 p.
55-6820 PZ3.B2457T0
A novel reflecting life in New England during
the period of Cotton Mather.
1921. SAUL BELLOW, 1915-
With his third novel, The Adventures of
Augie March, Bellow received wide, though not
unanimous literary acclaim. A picaresque styled
narrative about a Chicago Jew, it is a somewhat
humorous, but not highly introspective fictional
statement of the view that life is worth living.
1922. The adventures of Augie March. New
York, Viking Press, 1953. 536 p.
53-7953 PZ3.B4i937Ad
1923. JOHN BERRYMAN, 19 14-
Berryman practices a highly crafted verse
somewhat in the tradition of Wallace Stevens. His
quiet, philosophic poems have been appearing in
leading literary periodicals since the early thirties.
Prominent mainly as an example of the modern
trend in poetry, Berryman has also written an im-
portant study of Stephen Crane, and has done much
critical work.
1924. The dispossessed. [Poems] New York,
Sloane, 1948. 103 p.
48-6929 PS3503.E744D5
1925. ELIZABETH BISHOP, 191 1-
Elizabeth Bishop's New England birth and
rearing set against her visits to Key West have in
part resulted in a poetry fusing a northern conserv-
atism and a tropical luxuriance. Her work has
been commended for metrical skill, ironic humor,
incisive imagery, and keen powers of observation.
Like most modern American poets, her work tends
to appear first in periodicals. The first volume of
this not very prolific poetess was North & South
(1946).
1926. Poems: North & south. A cold spring.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 95 p.
55-7003 PS3503.I785P6
1927. PAUL FREDERIC BOWLES, 19 10-
Bowles has been regarded by some critics as
one of the most forceful of the younger writers of
fiction. His work is usually a picture of the modern
sterility of spirit followed by a disintegration of
personality; the stories are commonly evolved in
terms of the civilized in contact with the primitive,
frequendy with an African setting. Thus Bowles
projects and personifies some of the more strident
overtones of modern life; this results in what might
be called horror stories, but the horror is derived
more from the psychological implications than from
the gruesome physical facts. These qualities have
placed him to the fore among authors of the modern
Gothic tale. It could be said that Bowles presents
a pessimistic waste land in prose fiction. He has
also acquired a considerable reputation as a
composer.
1928. The sheltering sky. [New York] New Di-
rections, 1949. 318 p.
49-11888 PZ3.B682Sh
1929. The delicate prey, and other stories. [New
York] Random House, 1950. 307 p.
50-10899 PZ3.B6826De
Contents. — At Paso Rojo. — Pastor Dowe at
Tacate. — Call at Corazon. — Under the sky. — Sefior
Ong and Sefior Ha. — The circular valley. — The
echo. — The scorpion. — The fourth day out from
Santa Cruz. — Pages from Cold Point. — You are not
I. — How many midnights? — A thousand days to
Mokhtar. — Tea on the mountain. — By the water. —
The delicate prey. — A distance episode.
1930. Let it come down. New York, Random
House, 1952. 311 p.
52-5141 PZ3.B6826LC
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 157
193 1. The spider's house. New York, Random
House, 1955. 406 p.
55-8169 PZ3.B6826SP
1932. RAY BRADBURY, 1920-
Bradbury, one of the more popular science-
fiction authors, represents a rapidly growing field
of American writing. Although the field has
usually been dismissed as pulp fiction, the quality
of Bradbury's work has attracted the attention of
many literary critics. His tales, often touched with
humor, are usually works of fantasy or horror. Al-
though commonly set in the future, they often in-
directly comment on present-day society; so much so
that his novel, Fahrenheit 451 (1953), becomes in
part a social tract in its portrayal of a regimented
society in which books are banned.
1933. Dark carnival. Sauk City, Wis., Arkham
House, 1947. 313 p.
47-24598 PZ3.B72453Dar
Short stories.
1934. The Martian chronicles. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1950. 222 p.
50-7660 PZ3-B72453Mar
1935. The illustrated man. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1951. 251 p.
51-1140 PZ3.B72453I1
Short stories.
1936. The golden apples of the sun. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 250 p. illus.
52-13569 PZ3.B72453G0
Short stories.
1937. GWENDOLYN BROOKS, 1917-
Gwendolyn Brooks is a Negro author who
was born in Kansas and later moved to Chicago,
which is reflected in much of her writing. Her first
volume of poetry, A Street in Bronzeville (1945),
was generally well received as expressing Negro
urban life; in 1950 for her second book she was
awarded a Pulitzer prize for poetry.
. 1938. Annie Allen. New York, Harper, 1949.
60 p. 49-10072 PS3503.R7244A7
1939. Maud Martha. New York, Harper, 1953.
180 p. 53-7726 PZ4.B872.Mau
A novelette, with a Chicago setting, about a
' young Negro woman and her love.
1940. JOHN HORNE BURNS, 1916-
The first book by Burns was a war novel,
The Gallery, which depicted the great sympathy,
and with what some have thought sentimentality,
the Italians during the American occupation. His
second book, Lucifer With a BooI{, was an attack
on aspects of the private school system in America.
A Cry of Children is the story of an unsatisfactory
love affair which crosses social lines, but includes
vignettes of the modern American city and presents
on several levels the conflicts of a changing morality.
Burns' books are written in a realistic, "non-literary"
manner, and they have been said to evidence an
"inverted puritanism."
194 1. The gallery. New York, Harper, 1947.
342 p. 47-4090 PZ3.B93702Gal
1942. Lucifer with a book, a novel. New York,
Harper, 1949. 340 p.
49-8269 PZ3.B93702LU
1943. A cry of children. New York, Harper,
1952. 276 p. 52-9547 PZ3-B93702Cr
1944. TRUMAN CAPOTE, 1924-
Mr. Capote's style has been characterized
as rich, eloquent, and simple, with a remarkable
suggestive power. Others say that he is precocious
and exotic, or even decadent. Some say his stories
with Southern settings have a folktale quality which
bespeaks the humor and tenderness with which he
approaches his characters and presents life as essen-
tially sad, but redeemed by humor and tenderness.
Others find his subject matter reprehensible. He is
sympathetic toward and understanding of children
and deviate individuals.
1945. Other voices, other rooms. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1948. 231 p.
48-5135 PZ3.Ci724Ot
A novel in which a lonely youth confronts abnor-
mality and eccentricity in a relatively isolated and
rundown Louisiana mansion.
1946. A tree of night, and other stories. New
York, Random House, 1949. 209 p.
49-7722 PZ3.Ci724Tr
Modern Gothic stories with psychological or su-
pernatural settings wherein abnormal individuals
abound.
1947. The grass harp. [New York] Random
House, 1951. 181 p.
51—13101 PZ3-Ci724Gr
A symbolistic book of fantasy and the grotesque,
in which the unimaginative life of conformity i>-
I58 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
attacked. Three leading characters take up resi-
dence in a tree to provide the central episode about
which the story revolves. The work also appeared
as a stage play.
1948. JOHN CIARDI, 1916-
Ciardi is a poet who has often used World
War II as theme, or as a source of imagery for his
nonwar poems. Besides the war, his themes are
commonly America, love, and death. He has writ-
ten both descriptive and symbolic poetry, usually
with a highly concrete form of presentation. In
addition to writing poetry, he has produced an an-
thology of the work of young American poets: Mid-
Century American Poets (1950).
1949. Homeward to America. New York, Holt,
1940. 62 p. 40-3997 PS3505.I27H6 1940
1950. Other skies. [Poems] Boston, Little,
Brown, 1947. 83 p.
47-31468 PS3505.I27O8
195 1. Live another day; poems. New York,
Twayne, 1949. 88 p.
49-10624 PS3505.I27L5
1952. From time to time. [Poems] New York,
Twayne, 1 95 1. 84 p. (The Twayne library
of modern poetry) 51-8821 PS3505.I27F7
1953. As if; poems new and selected. New
Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press,
IQ55- M3P- 55-9956 PS35°5-I27A75
1954. WALTER VAN TILBURG CLARK,
1909-
Clark is a novelist who depicts the West and,
more particularly, Nevada. His first book revolved
about an erroneous lynching; his second portrayed
a Reno youth who wished to be a composer; and
his third was the story of a hunt for a mountain
lion. His works demonstrate a psychological aware-
ness and a tendency to infuse symbolic overtones
into his realistic presentations.
1955. The Ox-Bow incident. New York, Random
House, 1940. 309 p.
40-33213 PZ3.C5483OX
1956. The city of trembling leaves. New York,
Random House, 1945. 690 p.
45-35081 PZ3.C5483Ci
1957. The track of the cat, a novel. New York,
Random House, 1949. 404 p.
49-9031 PZ3.C5483Tr
1958. The watchful gods, and other stories. New
York, Random House, 1950. 306 p.
50-9687 PS3505.L376W3
Contents. — Hook. — The wind and the snow of
winter. — The rapids. — The anonymous. — The buck
in the hills. — Why don't you look where you're
going? — The Indian well. — The fish who could
close his eyes. — The portable phonograph. — The
watchful gods.
1959. AUGUST WILLIAM DERLETH, 1909-
August Derleth is a prolific author of books
on Wisconsin. His most prominent works, his
historical novels, are sometimes criticized for their
slow pacing. Selected Poems (1944) contained a
representative group of his largely regional poems.
Wisconsin Earth, A Sac Prairie Sampler (1948) re-
published in one volume Shadow of Night, Place of
Haw\s, and Village Year: A Sac Prairie Journal.
In addition he has written a number of mystery
stories and edited anthologies in that field. He has
also edited a number of science-fiction anthologies,
such as Strange Ports of Call (1948), Beachheads in
Space (1952), Time to Come (1954), and Portals of
Tomorrow (1954).
i960. Wind over Wisconsin. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1938. 391 p.
38-27410 PZ3.D445Wi
This second volume of the Sac Prairie Saga takes
place in the 1830's, the last years of the Indian wars.
1 96 1. Restless is the river. New York, Scribner,
1939. 514 p. 39"27856 PZ3-D445Re
Pioneer life from 1839 to 1850 in the Sac Prairie
country.
1962. Bright journey. New York, Scribner, 1940.
424 p. ^ 4°-33102 PZ3-D445Br
Frontier Wisconsin from 1812 to 1840 is reflected
in this novel about fur trade in the Northwest
Territory.
1963. Country growth. New York, Scribner,
1940. 322 p. 40-11748 PZ3.D4447C0
Short stories.
1964. Evening in spring. Sauk City, Wis., Stan-
ton & Lee, 1945. 308 p.
46-781 PZ3.D445EV2
A novel of adolescence in a Wisconsin village.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / I59
1965.
illus.
1966.
Village daybook: a Sac Prairie journal.
Chicago, Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1947. 306 p.
47-3074 PS3507.E69V4
RALPH ELLISON, 1914-
The first novel of this Negro novelist traces
the life of a Negro from his adolescence in the South
to maturity in New York. The prose is at times
surrealistic.
1967. Invisible man. New York, Random House,
1952. 439 p. 52-5r59 PZ4-E47In
1968. PAUL HAMILTON ENGLE, 1908-
Paul Engle is an Iowa poet and teacher who
has incorporated much of his knowledge of the land
and his love of America in his verses. These in
their usual affirmativeness have been accredited to
the Whitman tradition, although echoes of Mac-
Leish and other modern authors may be heard in
Engle's writings. Also, his poetic craftsmanship
has in recent years become both more formal and
more accomplished. His first book of poems was
Worn Earth (1932), which was included in The
Yale series of younger poets. This was followed by
American Song (1934) and Brea\ the Heart's Anger
(1936), which contain poems reflecting his life
abroad as a Rhodes scholar, and also his increasing
awareness of the social issues and attitudes of the
period. Corn (1939) is something of a transition
book, for it reflects his return to America and his
taking as theme the Iowan farmer and the domi-
nating virtues of America. His work since then
has reflected his position as an Iowan, a professor,
a father, and a native citizen of America. His
position as a scholar is indicated by Reading Modern
Poetry (1955), an anthology with commentary
which he produced with Warren Carrier.
1969. Always the land. New York, Random
House, 194 1. 326 p.
41-3535 PZ3.E576AI
A poetic novel of Iowan farm life.
1970. West of midnight. New York, Random
House, 1 94 1. 96 p.
42-269 PS3509.N44W4 194 1
Poems.
1971. The word of love. [Poems] New York,
Random House, 195 1. 39 p.
51-10256 PS3509.N44W55
1972. American child; sonnets for my daughters,
with thirty-six new poems. New York, Dial
Press, 1956. 102 p.
56-9509 PS3509.N44A68 1956
The first part of this was first collected in book
form under the title American Child, a Sonnet
Sequence (1945).
1973. HOWARD MELVIN FAST, 1914-
Mr. Fast is a leftist novelist of much tech-
nical skill. Most of his work is in the form of the
historical novel. In the main, these read extremely
well. However, he slants his material obviously
to influence readers rather than to render a com-
prehensive, objective view of his subject. Fast's
most recent book, Silas Timberman (1954), the
story of a quiet, conservative professor who ends
up in jail because of his opposition to views of edu-
cationalists and members of Congress, who regard
him as a Communist, is obvious propaganda.
1974. Conceived in liberty; a novel of Valley Forge.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1939. 389 p.
39-27589 PZ3.F265C0
A novel based on the experiences of the American
Army during the winter months at Valley Forge
during the American Revolutionary War.
1975. The last frontier. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1941. 307 p.
41-13229 PZ3.F265Las
A story of Cheyenne Indians leaving an Oklahoma
reservation in 1878 in a last striving for dignified
survival.
1976. The unvanquished. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce, 1942. 316 p.
42-16612 PZ3.F265Un
A novel based on the life of George Washington
during the Revolution.
1977. Citizen Tom Paine. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce, 1943. 341 p.
43-51139 PZ^F^Ci
A fictionalized account of Tom Paine's life in
both Europe and America, with some emphasis on
the Revolutionary period.
1978. The American, a Middle Western legend.
New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946.
337 p. 46-25220 PZ3.F265Am
A novel based on the life of John Peter Altgeld,
a liberal Illinois politician and Governor of that
State in the late 19th century.
l60 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1979. My glorious brothers. Boston, Little, Brown,
1948. 280 p. 48-8762 PZ3.F265My
The story of the freeing of Israel from Syrian-
Greek rulers 100 years before Christ.
1980. The passion of Sacco and Vanzetti, a New
England legend. New York, Blue Heron
Press, 1953. 254 p. 53-3420 PZ3.F265Pas
A view of the events behind the execution of
Nicola Sacco and Bartolomeo Vanzetti in 1927.
1981. JEAN GARRIGUE, 1912-
Jean Garrigue is a subjective poetess of minor
scope who presents her emotions in a word-conscious
verse that is reminiscent of Wallace Stevens.
1982. The ego and the centaur. [Poems. New
York, New Directions] 1947. 126 p.
47-30700 PS3513.A7217E4
1983. The monument rose, poems. New York,
Noonday Press, 1953. 58 p.
53-10701 PS3513.A7217M6
1984. WILLIAM GOYEN, 1915-
Goyen is a young Texas author who writes
a highly "literary," poetic prose which he has so
far used more for a lyric evocation of a time and
place than as a means of telling a story.
1985. The house of breath. New York, Random
House, 1950. 181 p.
50-9448 PZ3.G7484H0
An emotional mood picture of Charity, Texas,
apparently based largely on childhood recollections.
1986. Ghost and flesh; stories and tales. New
York, Random House, 1952. 183 p.
52-5143 PZ3.G7484GI1
1987. In a farther country; a romance. New York,
Random House, 1955. 182 p.
55-8143 PZ3.G7484I11
A surrealistic novel about a Texas girl inhabiting
a New York City "casde in Spain," where she is
queen.
1988. LILLIAN FLORENCE HELLMAN, 1905-
Lillian Hellman, possibly the most success-
ful of modern American women dramatists, writes
plays with a "message" — often related to current
events.
1989. Four plays: The children's hour; Days to
come; The little foxes; Watch on the Rhine.
New York, Random House, 1942. 330 p.
42-7559 PS3515.E343F6
1990. Another part of the forest, a play in three
acts. New York, Viking Press, 1947. 134 p.
47-30238 PS3515.E343A8
1991. The autumn garden; a play in three acts.
Boston, Little, Brown, 195 1. 139 p.
51-10951 PS3515.E343A85
1992. JOHN RICHARD HERSEY, 1914-
John Hersey is known mainly for his rep-
ortorial work on World War II. His first book,
Men on Bataan (1942), told the story of General
MacArthur and the fall of the Philippines. In 1946
an entire issue of The New Yorker was devoted to
Hiroshima, Hersey's account of the effects of the
atomic bomb on that city; it was issued the same
year as a book. His second novel, The Wall (1950),
told of the Polish Jews under the Nazi occupation.
His most recent novel, The Marmot Drive (1953),
is a symbolic story which ostensibly reports a
small New England town's attempts to overcome
an invasion of woodchucks. Except for the last
novel, he has regularly presented his material in a
simple, realistic manner, as a reporter.
1993. Into the valley; a skirmish of the marines.
New York, Knopf, 1943. 138 p. illus.
43-1318 D767.98.H4
1994. A bell for Adano. New York, Knopf, 1944.
269 p. 44-164 PZ3.H4385Be
A novel about the American occupation of a
Sicilian village during World War II.
1995. WILLIAM MOTTER INGE, 1913-
William Inge, who was born in Kansas, is
representative of some of the newer dramatists. His
work, which is in the realist tradition, has met with
considerable popular and critical acclaim both on
the stage and in film.
1996. Come back, little Sheba. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1950. 119 p.
50-8371 PS3517.N265C6 1950
An alcoholic, middle-aged chiropractor and his
wife experience an unromantic family life.
1997. Picnic, a summer romance in three acts.
New York, Random House, 1953. 168 p.
(A Random House play)
53-8342 PS3517.N265P5
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / l6l
Set in a small Kansas town, this is a play about
the effect of a good-looking vagrant on the women
of the community.
1998. Bus stop. New York, Random House, 1955.
154 p. (A Random House play)
55-9043 PS3517.N265B8
A group of characters are brought together in a
roadside restaurant when the bus is snowbound.
1999. RANDALL JARRELL, 19 14-
Jarrell has developed a reputation as an oc-
casionally coruscating critic of profound insight,
as well as a sympathetic poet of musical and tech-
nical virtuosity. Many of his poems have been
products of the war; these have appeared in volumes
such as Little Friend, Little Friend (1945), Losses
(1948), and The Seven-League Crutches (1951).
2000. Poetry and the age. New York, Knopf,
1953. 271 p. 52-12173 PN1271J3
2001. Pictures from an institution, a comedy.
New York, Knopf, 1954. 277 p.
54-5973 PZ4-J37pi
A satirical novel about life at a small college.
2002. Selected poems. New York, Knopf, 1955.
205 P- 55—5613 PS3519.A86A6 1955
2003. JAMES JONES, 1921-
Jones' first novel was a realistic story of Army
life in Hawaii, starting a few months before the
Pearl Harbor attack and concluding shortly after it.
A highly popular book, it was the source of an
equally popular screen adaptation.
2004. From here to eternity. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1951. 861 p. 51-9228 PZ4.J77Fr
2005. ROSS FRANKLIN LOCKRIDGE, 1914-
1948
Lockridge wrote only one book, a somewhat
prolix novel which dealt with the day of July 4,
1892, in a small Indiana town, but which used the
flashback technique to cover half a century of
American life. The book rapidly became a best-
seller and was widely acclaimed by critics, although
a few clergymen objected to some passages. The
author committed suicide about three months after
publication of his book.
2006. Raintree County . . . which had no bound-
aries in time and space, where lurked musical
and strange names and mythical and lost peoples,
and which was itself only a name musical and
strange. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948. 1066 p.
maps. 48-245 PZ3.L8ii46Rai
2007. ROBERT LOWELL, 1917-
Robert Lowell has been one of the most
widely acclaimed of the younger poets. He has
considerable linguistic and technical skill at his
command as he sets out to explain the moral polarity
of the world. His poetry, which often uses New
England as a setting, is subde, sincere, intense, and
at times involved; it is also representative of the re-
turn to "classical" forms, or formalism, though with
a very modern astringency. In 1947 he was
awarded a Pulitzer prize for Lord Weary s Castle.
2008. Land of unlikeness; introd. by Allen Tate.
Cummington [Mass.] Cummington Press,
IQ44- [43] P- 45-237 PS3523.O89L3
2009. Lord Weary 's casde. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1946. 69 p.
46-7958 PS3523.O89L6
2010. The mills of the Kavanaughs. [Poems]
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1951. 55 p.
51-10214 PS3523.O89M5
201 1. ROBERT JAMES COLLAS LOWRY,
1919-
Robert Lowry is the author of realistic novels and
short stories, most of which derive in subject mat-
ter from World War II. These antimilitaristic and
sometimes bitter works have been deplored by some
for their "manner" and lack of restraint; the author
has also been accused of sentimentality. However,
his careful writing and the impression of truthful-
ness in his writings have won him many adherents.
His most recent novel, The Violent Wedding
(1953), is about a love affair between a white girl
and a Negro prizefighter.
2012. Casualty. ,Ncw York, New Directions,
1946. 153 p. 46-727 » PZ3.L9564Cas
2013. Find me in fire. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. 280 p.
48-7932 PZ3.L9564F1
2014. The big cage. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1949. 342 p. 4911454 PZ3.L9564Bi
2015. The wolf that fed us. Garden City, N. Y..
Doubleday, 1949. 220 p.
49-796.: PZ3.L9564W0
l6l I A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Contents. — The toy balloon. — The church. —
Layover in El Paso. — The war poet. — The wolf that
fed us. — Visitors to the castle. — The terror in the
streets. — The gold button.
2016. Happy New Year, kameradesl n stories.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 256 p.
54-6783 PZ3.L9564Hap
2017. MARY THERESE McCARTHY, 1912-
Mary McCarthy started her literary career
as a book reviewer and as a columnist dealing with
New York stage productions; this latter aspect of
her work may be seen in the essays selected for
Sights and Spectacles, ig^y-ig^6 (1956), which,
pardy because of the freedom allowed her by The
Partisan Review, for which she wrote, is far from
a full picture of the stage productions of the period.
In recent years she has become famous as a novelist
of biting satires. Her technique, however, is more
one of close dissection of a neurotic character viewed
narrowly than it is a caricaturing on a broad scale.
Her characters are usually drawn from the literary
and academic world in which she moves.
2018. The company she keeps. [New York]
Simon & Schuster, 1942. 304 p.
42-13269 PZ3.M1272C0
A portrait of a neurotic, pseudo-intellectual, liberal
girl as a product of the thirties.
2019. The oasis. New York, Random House,
1949. 181 p. 49-10152 PZ3.Mi2720as
The story of a group of intellectuals who attempt
to establish a Utopia on a New England mountain.
2020. Cast a cold eye. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 212 p.
50-9761 PZ3.Mi272Cas
A group of short stories distinguished by the
author's famous stylistic abilities.
2021. The groves of Academe. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1952. 302 p.
52-7255 PZ3.Mi272Gr
A novel, with a small Pennsylvania college setting,
against which a neurotic-intellectual professor of
literature is closely pictured with all his unpleas-
antnesses.
2022. A charmed life. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1955. 313 p.
55-10153 PZ3.M1272CI1
A novel picturing life in a colony set up to en-
courage the creativity of writers and artists.
2023. CARSON (SMITH) McCULLERS, 191 7-
Carson McCullers is a Southern novelist who
usually writes subtle and original works set in her
home area. She commonly presents understanding,
sympathetic accounts of her characters' inner com-
pulsions; this aspect is heightened by her emphasis
on the factors of personality motivation and the
differences in even the "well-adjusted" characters.
She is a realist and tends to be symbolistic, with re-
sults that have been called metaphysical. Her Re-
flections in a Golden Eye (1941) is a bizarre but
brilliant story of a group of abnormal individuals
whose fates intertwine at a prewar Southern Army
post. The Member of the Wedding (1946) is an
evocative novel which depicts the yearning of a
young girl to escape her environment; it appeared
also in both stage and screen adaptations.
2024. The ballad of the sad cafe; the novels and
stories of Carson McCullers. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 791 p.
51-10969 PZ3.Mi3884Bal
Contents. — The ballad of the sad cafe. — Wunder-
kind. — The jockey. — Madame Zilensky and the
King of Finland. — The sojourner. — A domestic
dilemma. — A tree, a rock, a cloud. — The heart is a
lonely hunter. — Reflections in a golden eye. — The
member of the wedding.
2025. NORMAN MAILER, 1923-
Mailer's first novel was a best seller that dealt
with the war in the Pacific; it was noted for its
realism and its accurate recording of the speech of
the soldiers, as well as for passages of poetic intensity.
His second book, a thesis novel which dealt with
political ideologies and was set in postwar New
York, and also his third, which portrays the denizens
of the motion picture and entertainment world in
California, were not so highly regarded by many
reviewers.
2026. The naked and the dead. New York, Rine-
hart, 1948. 721 p.
48-6633 PZ3.M28i5Nak
2027. Barbary shore. New York, Rinehart, 1951.
312 p. 51-10764 PZ3.M28i5Bar
2028. The deer park. New York, Putnam, 1955.
375 p. 55-I0093 PZ3.M28i5De
2029. WILLIAM KEEPERS MAXWELL, 1908-
William Maxwell was born in Illinois, and
his life there is a source for much of the background
in his writings. He was for a time an editor of
The New Yorker.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 163
2030. Bright center of heaven. New York,
Harper, 1934. 315 p.
34-28619 PZ3.M45i8Br
Events of a day on a Wisconsin farm.
2031. They came like swallows. New York,
Harper, 1937. 267 p.
37-6382 PZ3.M45i8Th
A story of commonplace events in the lives of
members of an American family in 19 18.
2032. The folded leaf. New York, Harper, 1945.
310 p. 45-3288 PZ3.M4518F0
A story of the friendship of two boys, one an
introvert and the other an extrovert.
2033. Time will darken it. New York, Harper,
1948. 302 p. 48-8331 PZ3.M4518T1
Set in a small Illinois town in 1912, this story
mirrors life in America at that period.
2034. THOMAS MERTON, 19 15-
Thomas Merton is a Catholic convert who
became a Trappist monk. This story he tells in his
popular autobiographical book, The Seven Storey
Mountain. He initially received most attention as a
Catholic poet writing in a surrealistic style. Of late
he has been writing religious prose; meditations,
biographical works, etc.
2035. A man in the divided sea. [Norfolk, Conn.,
New Directions] 1946. 155 p.
46-7485 PS3525.E7174M3
A collection of poems including those which ap-
peared in Thirty Poems (1944).
2036. The seven storey mountain. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 429 p.
48-8645 BX4705.M542A3
Autobiography.
2037. Figures for an apocalypse. [Poems] Nor-
folk, Conn., New Directions [1948] "1947.
in p. 48-2906 PS3525.E7174F5
2038. Seeds of contemplation. [Norfolk, Conn.]
New Directions, 1949. 201 p.
49-1562 BX2350.M54
A mystic work of meditation on the spiritual life.
2039. The tears of the blind lions, f Poems. New
York] New Directions, 1949. 32 p.
49-49074 PS3525.E7174T4
2040. The waters of Siloe. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1949. 377 p. illus.
49-10495 BX4102.M4
This volume is something of a philosophy of mon-
asticism and a history of the Cistercians, with an
emphasis on Cistercian activities in the United
States.
2041. The sign of Jonas. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1953. 362 p.
52-9857 BX4705.M542A32
"A collection of personal notes and meditations
set down during about five years ... in the mon-
astery of Gethsemani."
2042. No man is an island. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1955. 264 p.
55-7420 BX2350.M535
This volume of reflections on the inner life serves
as a sequel to Seeds of Contemplation (q. v.).
2043. ARTHUR MILLER, 1915-
With his third book, the play All My Sons,
Miller rose to prominence as an author, and started
the work that was to establish him as one of the
leading dramatists of his generation. His style is
one of flat realism, so that it is from what he says
and the way he organizes his material, rather than
from any purely literary expression, that he achieves
his effect.
2044. Situation normal. New York, Reynal &
Hitchcock, 1944. 179 p.
44-47726 U766.M48
An account, in the form of notes to a film pro-
ducer, of civilians training to be soldiers as the author
had observed them during a special tour.
2045. Focus. New York, Reynal 8c Hitchcock,
1945. 217 p. 45-9586 PZ3.M61224F0
A novel on the theme of anti-Semitism.
2046. All my sons, a play in three acts. New York,
Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 83 p.
47-30156 PS3525.I5156A7
A tragedy dealing with the social effects of an
industrial war crime.
2047. Death of a salesman; certain private conver-
sations in two acts and a requiem. New
York, Viking Press, 1949. 139 p.
49-8817 PS3525.I5156D4
A tragedy reflecting the life of a salesman, and
presenting the problem of values in modern society.
This book was awarded a Pulitzer prize for drama,
and it was the first play to be distributed by the
Book-of-the-Month Club.
164 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2048. The crucible, a play in four acts. New York,
Viking Press, 1953. 145 p.
53-6724 PS3525.I5156C7 _ 1953
A play dealing with the Salem witchcraft trials.
2049. A view from the bridge; two one-act plays.
New York, Viking Press, 1955. 160 p.
55-10474 PS3525.I5156V5
A View from the Bridge is the story of two Ital-
ians who illegally entered the United States, and
who are seeking jobs as longshoremen. The second
play, A Memory of Two Mondays, presents a view
of life in a New York warehouse as reflecting the
outside world.
2050. BUCKLINMOON, 1911-
Moon is a Southern Negro author who in his
works has attempted to present his view of race
prejudice and relationships between whites and
Negroes, especially as they exist in the South.
2051. Without magnolias. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1949. 274 p.
49-8390 PZ3.M777i7"Wi
A tract novel depicting a Negro community in
Florida.
2053. Man and boy. New York, Knopf, 1951.
212 p. 51-2263 PZ3.M8346Mam
A satire on a selfish mother about to christen a
boat in honor of her hero-son who was killed al
Guadalcanal.
2054. The works of love. New York, Knopf,
1952, ci95i. 269 p.
51-11978 PZ3.M8346W11
A study of the personality of a Midwesterner from
his isolated boyhood in a rural community, through
his successful career in the poultry business, to his
isolated old age in Chicago, where he suddenly dies
while employed as a store Santa Claus.
2055. The deep sleep. New York, Scribner, 1953.
312 p. 53-11783 PZ3.M8346De
A novel told through the minds of five people
brought together in a Philadelphia suburb by the
death of a judge who had deeply influenced each
of them.
2056. The huge season. New York, Viking Press,
1954. 306 p. 54-10858 PZ3.M8346HU
The main character visualizes the present-day
(1952) situation in terms of the influences on him
and his friends during their youth in the Jazz Age.
2052. WRIGHT MORRIS, 1910-
Morris' novels, which often use a Midwest
setting, are written in the plain prose characteristic
of much modern fiction. A professional photog-
rapher, Morris reflects an aptitude for recording
visual details of commonplace things and acts as in-
direct indexes of character and personal relation-
ships. This is further emphasized in some of his
work by the joint use of photographs and text, as in
The Home Place (1948), the story of a New York
family on a visit to a Nebraska farm, which he con-
tinued, without pictures, in The World in the Attic
(1949). His first book, My Uncle Dudley (1942),
captured much of this photographic sense in a pic-
aresque novel about the trip of some "bums" from
Los Angeles to Chicago, basically humorous but
with serious overtones. In The Man Who Was
There (1945), a novel about the effects on others of
a man missing in war action, Morris started to ex-
plore the geography of personality, the mystery of
private human feelings, the interinfluence of char-
acters, and the sorrow of individual loneliness and
non-communication which have become dominant
ingredients in his latest books. Throughout his
work there is an attempt to find out and understand
what an "American" is.
2057. EDWARD NEWHOUSE, 191 1-
Newhouse, because of the frequent appear-
ance of his short stories in that periodical, is some-
times known as a New Yorker author. His work
deals mainly with the New York scene, including
the suburbs; however, most of the stories in
The Iron Chain (1946) are concerned with World
War II.
2058. Many are called; forty-two short stories.
New York, Sloane, 1951. 384 p.
51-12159 PZ3.N458Man
2059. The temptation of Roger Heriott. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 241 p.
54-10198 PZ3.N458Te
A novel about the demands of integrity in a
moderately well-to-do suburbanite who works in
New York for a private foundation that awards
fellowships to young musicians.
2060. JOHN FREDERICK NIMS, 1913-
Nims writes a polished poetry which usually
employs urban themes, often those of the small
city. While his work thus reflects aspects of modern
American life, it also reflects his own life as a
scholar.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 165
2061. The iron pastoral. New York, Sloane, 1947.
86 p. 47-4500 PS3527.I863I7
Poems.
2062. A fountain in Kentucky, and other poems.
New York, Sloane, 1950. 72 p.
50-6019 PS3527.I863F6 1950
2063. CLIFFORD ODETS, 1906-
Odets rose to prominence as a playwright
concerned with conveying a meaningful view of
life, especially the life of urban middle-class society.
Raised in New York in a middle-class family, he
portrays this background in many of his plays.
Realism and forceful dialogue have been character-
istic of much of his work. An experimentalist in
subject matter and attitude, he rapidly became one
of the leaders of the "new" drama of the thirties.
2064. Six plays. With a pref. by the author. New
York, Modern Library, 1939. 433 p. (The
Modern Library of the word's best books)
39-27816 PS3529.D46S5 1939
Contents. — Waiting for Lefty. — Awake and
sing! — Till the day I die. — Paradise lost. — Golden
boy. — Rocket to the moon.
2065. Night music; a comedy in twelve scenes.
New York, Random House, 1940. 237 p.
40-7217 PS3529.D46N5 1940
2066. Clash by night. New York, Random
House, 1942. 242 p.
42-7560 PS3529.D46C5
2067. The big knife. New York, Random House,
1949. 147 p.
49-5900 PS3529.D46B5 1949
2068 The country girl, a play in three acts. New
York, Viking Press, 1951. 124 p.
51-1860 PS3529.D46C6
2069. JOHN HENRY O'HARA, 1905-
John O'Hara, whose first novel is still con-
sidered by some to be his best work, writes often
of common (in the pejorative sense) people. He is
realistic in style and, to many, shockingly frank.
His settings vary widely, though Hollywood, New
York, and rural Pennsylvania do recur; a large per-
centage of his characters are modern urbanites.
2070. Appointment in Samarra, a novel. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 301 p.
34-25527 PZ3.O3677AP
Three days of sex, alcohol, and gangsters in a
Pennsylvania town in 1930 climax in the hero's
suicide.
2071. The doctor's son and other stories. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1935. 294 p.
35-3041 PZ3.O3677D0
2072. Files on parade. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1939. 277 p.
39-23749 PZ3.03677Fi
Short stories.
2073. Pipe night. New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce, 1945. 205 p.
45-3002 PZ3.03677Pi
Short stories.
2074. Here's O'Hara; three novels and twenty
short stories. New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce, 1946. 440 p. 46-4951 PZ3.03677He
The novels are Butterfield 8 (1935), which is
based on a New York murder case, and which in-
volves mainly the fringe elements of nightclub life;
Hope of Heaven (1938), which presents the un-
happy love affair of a Hollywood scenario writer
and a bookstore clerk; and Pal Joey (1940), which
takes the form of letters of a nightclub entertainer.
2075. Hellbox. New York, Random House, 1947.
210 p. 47-30414 PZ3.O3677HC
Short stories.
2076. A rage to live. New York, Random House,
1949. 590 p. 49-I0363 PZ3.03677Rag
A somewhat panoramic novel of social and sexual
life in a Pennsylvania community, starting a few
years before World War I.
2077. The Farmers Hotel, a novel. New York,
Random House, 195 1. 153 p.
51-14121 PZ3.03677Far
The story of people snowbound in a Pennsylvania
hotel.
2078. Ten North Frederick. New York, Random
House, 1955. 408 p.
55-8167 PZ3.0367;Te
A novel of manners set in O'Hara's home area in
Pennsylvania.
2079. KENNETH PATCHEN, 1911-
Patchen's poetry is often sentimental in con-
tent, but normally modernistic in form. His themes
have been: protest against social and economic in-
justices and follies, love of humanity and the uni-
l66 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
verse, hatred of mankind and the world, sex, and
religion. His poetry has been extremely uneven,
and the range of its critical laudation and denuncia-
tion has been equally great. He has also written
several volumes of prose, which were largely sur-
realistic and with many of the qualities and much
of the subject matter of his poetry. His most recent
venture, Glory Never Guesses (1955), is a limited
edition, silk-screen process volume worked origi-
nally by hand, in an attempt to produce a book as
an integral work of art, somewhat in the tradition
of some of Blake's work.
2080. First will & testament. Norfolk, Conn.,
New Directions, 1939. 181 p.
40-1 1 14 PS3531.A764F5 1939
Poems.
2081. The journal of Albion Moonlight. [Mount
Vernon, N. Y., Walpole Printing Office]
1941. 313 p. 41-19128 PS3531.A764J6 1941
A novel in surrealistic and often poetic prose;
the work, written in the form of a journal, relies
strongly on symbolism to convey its author's com-
mentaries about life, society, and the individual.
2082. The memoirs of a shy pornographer. [New
York, New Directions] 1945. 242 p.
45-8438 PZ3.P27i4Me
An experimental, satirical novel about a naive
young man whose novel becomes a pornographic
best-seller as a result of the publisher's large-scale
substitution of asterisks for otherwise innocuous
words.
2083. The selected poems. [Norfolk, Conn.]
New Directions, 1946. 86 p. (The New
classics series) A48-7811 PS3531.A764A6 1946
2084. Sleepers awake. [New York, Padell] 1946.
389 p. 46-21856 PS3531.A764S5
A surrealistic novel attacking many of the follies
of contemporary man; man's inhumanity to man is
the basic theme for excoriation. The book incor-
porates an unusual amount of typographical experi-
mentation.
2085. See you in the morning. New York,
Padell, 1948, ei947. 256 p.
48-17796 PZ3.P27i4Se
In a sense Patchen's first novel, this is a short, con-
ventional, poetic story about a young couple who
accept life and love in the face of imminent death.
2086. Red wine & yellow hair. [Poems] New
York, New Directions, 1949. 64 p.
49-7607 PS3531.A764R4
2087. FREDERIC PROKOSCH, 1908-
Prokosch has spent much of his life abroad,
a fact which is revealed in his poetry and novels.
His settings and most of his characters are usually
foreign, although some, if not all, of the central
characters tend to be American. He is a careful,
lyric writer who presents, often in a poetic prose of
philosophic detachment, meditative reveries on the
problems of the modern world. However, in A
Tale for Midnight (1955) he goes back several cen-
turies for the story of the Cenci. Prokosch has also
translated poetry from several languages.
2088. The Asiatics. New York, Harper, 1935.
423 p. 35-J9872 PZ3.P9424AS
Travels of an American through Asia.
2089. The seven who fled. New York, Harper,
J937- 479 P; 37-18251 PZ3.P9424Se
Seven Russian exiles have terrifying experiences
wandering through Central Asia.
2090. Night of the poor. New York, Harper,
r939- 359 P- 39-24223 PZ3.P9424N1
A novel that reflects aspects of America, especi-
ally the poor whites of the South, as seen by a boy
hitchhiking from Wisconsin to Texas.
2091. The skies of Europe. New York, Harper,
1941. 500 p. 41-14057 PZ3.P9424Sk
A novel about Europe in the two years prior to
World War II, as seen through the eyes of an
American reporter who travels about the continent.
2092. The conspirators. New York, Harper,
I943- 338 P- 43-"42 PZ3.P9424C0
Refugees and espionage agents against a Lisbon
setting during World War II.
2093. Age of thunder. New York, Harper, 1945.
311 p. 45-2642 PZ3-P9424Ag
A philosophically inclined narrative of a search
along the French-Swiss border for traitors.
2094. The idols of the cave. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1946. 373 p.
46-7545 PZ3.P9424H
A novel that presents, in an almost disinterested
manner, unusual, sideline characters in New York
during the war.
2095. Chosen poems. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1947. 81 p.
47-2987 PS3531.R78C45 1947
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 167
2096. Storm and echo. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. 274 p.
48-8302 PZ3.P9424St
PS3531.R78S7
A novel which presents the fearfulness and im-
penetrability of man's inner life as discovered by a
journey into the African jungle.
2097. Nine days to Mukalla. New York, Viking
Press, 1953. 249 p.
52-14033 PZ3P9424NIC
A group of westerners, including some Americans,
experience a plane crash on an isolated Arabic
island in the Indian Ocean, and thereafter undergo
unpleasant and exhausting adventures in their at-
tempt to return to civilization.
2098. KENNETH REXROTH, 1905-
Rexroth is a California poet who has by
some critics been adjudged best in his nature and
descriptive poetry, but who himself seems to place
greater value on the philosophic parts of his
work. His direct philosophic impulse led him to
abandon the syntactical experimentation found in
his early poems, In What Hour (1940), for a neo-
classic syllabic verse form which would allow him
more readily to communicate his message. The
earlier experimentalism reappeared in another vol-
ume, The Art of Worldly Wisdom (1953), a col-
lection of early work which had not previously
been published in book form. While in many as-
pects his work is derived from modern French,
American, and English poetry, Rexroth's work also
shows classical influences, both East and West. De-
tectable in his lyrics, they become decisive in the
lyric plays published in Beyond the Mountains.
2099. The phoenix and the tortoise. Norfolk,
Conn., New Directions, 1944. 100 p.
44-9924 PS3535.E923P5
Poems.
2100. The signature of all things; poems, songs,
elegies, translations, and epigrams. New
York, New Directions, 1950. 89 p.
50-5683 PS3535.E923S5
2101. Beyond the mountains. [Plays. New York,
New Directions] 1951. 190 p. (Direc-
tion, 20) 51-9631 PS3535.E923B4
Contents. — Phaedra. — Iphigenia. — Hermaios. —
Berenike.
2102. The dragon and the unicorn. Norfolk,
Conn., New Directions, 1952. 171 p.
52-14902 PS3535.E923D7
"Large parts of . . . [this poem] were previously
published ... in the New Directions annuals for
1950 and 195 1."
2103. THEODORE ROETHKE, 1908-
Roethke is a poet of quiet tone and a modest
though well-controlled range. A large percentage
of his themes stems from his childhood experiences
in a greenhouse. He is one of the younger poets to
have achieved recognition. In 1954 he received the
Pulitzer prize for The Waging, a selection which
adequately represents his production to date.
2104. The waking; poems, 1933-1953. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 120 p.
53-9125 PS3535.O39W3
2105. MURIEL RUKEYSER, 19 13-
Born and bred in New York City, Rukeyser
became an urban poet in the neo-metaphysical
mould. Her leftist tendencies have repeatedly led
in her work to a probing of social problems and
injustices. Miss Rukeyser has occasionally ventured
into other fields of writing, as in The Life of Poetry
(1949), a study of the role of poetry in life, and in
Willard Gibbs (1942), a scientist discussed at length
under no. 4751.
2106. Selected poems. [New York, New Direc-
tions] 1951. in p. (The New classics
series) 51-12264 PS3535.U4A6 1951
Earlier volumes of poetry by Rukeyser include
Theory of Flight (1935), U. S. 1 (1938), A Turning
Wind (1939), Wa\e Island (1942), The Beast in
View (1944), The Green Wave (1948), and Elegies
(1949).
2107. JEROME DAVID SALINGER, 1919-
Salinger rose to prominence in 1951 with
a novel about a neurotic adolescent who is expelled
from preparatory school and wanders about New
York for a few days before going home. The
story is told in the form of an interior monologue
written in nonliterary conversational prose.
2108. The catcher in the rye. Boston, Litde,
Brown, 1951. 277 p.
51-4713 PZ4.Si65Cat
2109. Nine stories. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953.
302 p. 52-12626 PZ4-Si65Ni
l68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
21 io. WILLIAM SAROYAN, 1908-
Saroyan is a highly prolific Armenian-Amer-
ican Californian who usually writes in somewhat
amorphous form about California, although occa-
sionally dealing with New York or some other place.
His work is often highly imaginative reporting of
the world as he sees it. Personality, fantasy, and
humor inform his world of sweetness and light
wherein wander all (and almost only) the beauti-
ful people. However, a few of his later books have
accepted the possibility of unpleasantness in life.
Saroyan's first book was The Daring Young Man
on the Flying Trapeze, and Other Stories (1934),
which almost immediately established his popu-
larity. While his numerous short stories and
sketches continue to maintain for him a reputation
as a short-story writer, he has also received con-
siderable attention as a dramatist. My Heart's in
the Highlands (1939) is usually considered his best
play, but it was The Time of Your Life (1939),
which was awarded the 1940 Pulitzer prize for
drama, which the author refused. He has also
written a number of novels and autobiographical
works. The latter is in some respects a formal dis-
tinction, for it has been claimed that he writes some
fictional autobiography, and that the rest of his work
is highly autobiographical fiction.
21 11. My name is Aram. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1940. 220 p.
40-34075 PZ3-S246My
21 12. Three plays: My heart's in the Highlands,
The time of your life, Love's old sweet song.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 121, 200, 146 p.
40-30799 PS3537.A826T47 1940
21 13. Three plays by William Saroyan: The beau-
tiful people, Sweeney in the trees, and Across
the board on Tomorrow Morning. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 275 p.
41-22847 PS3537.A826T43 1941
21 14. Razzle dazzle. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1942. 505 p.
42-12443 PS3537.A826R35
"Frontispiece" (added t. p. on two leaves, illus-
trated in color): Razzle-dazzle; or, The human bal-
let, opera and circus; or, There's something I got to
tell you: being many kinds of short plays as well as
the story of the writing of them.
21 15. The human comedy. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1943. 291 p.
43-51036 PZ3.S246HU
21 16. The Saroyan special, selected short stories.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 368 p.
48-9565 PZ3.S246Sar
21 17. Don't go away mad, and two other plays:
Sam Ego's house [and] A decent birth, a
happy funeral. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1949.
238 p. 49-1 1921 PS3537.A826D6
21 18. The Assyrian, and other stories. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 276 p.
50-5197 PZ3.S246AS
21 19.
The twin adventures: The adventures of
William Saroyan, a diary. The adventures
of Wesley ]ac\son, a novel. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 225, 285 p. 50-6550 PZ3.S246TW
"An hour-to-hour chronicle of a writer at work
on the writing of a novel, and the novel itself."
The novel was published separately in 1946.
2120. Tracy's tiger. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 195 1. 143 p. 5l-l3>9^5 PZ3.S246TP
2121. The bicycle rider in Beverly Hills. New
York, Scribner, 1952. 178 p.
52-12748 PS3537.A826Z52
Autobiographical.
2122. The laughing matter, a novel. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 254 p.
52-13557 PZ3-S246Lau
2123. MAY SARTON, 1912-
May Sarton was born in Belgium, but came
to America within a few years, after her family fled
the country because of the German invasion. In
her early years she had expected to make the theater
her career; one of the products of this interest is the
play, The Underground River (1947). She soon
turned, however, from the theater to a career as a
poet and novelist. As a poet she established a con-
siderable reputation as a formal lyricist through
works published in periodicals and in her small early
collections, Encounter in April (1937) and Inner
Landscape (1939)- Her novels have reflected her
European background and interests, for they have
usually had European characters and settings. Thus
works such as The Single Hound (1938), The
Bridge of Years (1946), and Shadow of a Man
(1950) have served to present Americans with pic-
tures of life in Europe.
2124. The lion and the rose, poems. New York,
Rinehart, 1948. 104 p.
48-5806 PS3537.A832L5
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 1 69
2125. A shower of summer days. New York,
Rinehart, 1952. 244 p.
52-9599 PZ3.S249Shc
A novel in which an American girl matures in the
course of a summer visit to the estate of relatives in
Ireland.
2126. The land of silence, and other poems. New
York, Rinehart, 1953. 99 p.
53-7721 PS3537.A832L3
2127. Faithful are the wounds. New York, Rine-
hart, 1955. 281 p. 55-5304 PZ3.S249Fai
This is May Sarton's first novel with an American
setting. Its story is that of a Harvard professor who
commits suicide. It has been claimed that the story
is based on the life and death of F. O. Matthiessen
(q. v.).
2128. MARK SCHORER, 1908-
Mark Schorer has written a number of real-
istic novels and short stories which have been praised
for their psychological insight as well as for their
style and structure. In 1946 he published William
Bla\e; the Politics of Vision, which is more an at-
tempt to explain the poet's system of thought than
it is a critical or historical work.
2129. A house too old, a novel. New York, Rey-
nal & Hitchcock, 1935. 305 p.
35-15150 PZ3.S375H0
A novel about settlers in a Wisconsin town, with
the story of the growth of the community over the
subsequent century.
2130. The hermit place, a novel. New York,
Random House, 1941. 313 p.
41-7658 PZ3.S375He
A psychological novel about two sisters who were
in love with a man who died a year before the time
of the story.
213 1. The state of mind, thirty-two stories. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 34^ P*
47-2350 PZ3.S375St
2132. The wars of love, a novel. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1954. 174 p.
53-7878 PZ3.S375\Var
A story of some children together at an upstate
New York resort, and how that summer works out
when they come together as adults in New York
City.
2133. DELMORE SCHWARTZ, 1913-
Delmore Schwartz is a New York poet
whose work commonly reflects his native city and
is usually philosophical in tenor. He has also pub-
lished some short stories and dramatic work, as well
as a number of distinguished critical reviews. His
critical work has appeared in periodicals such as
Partisan Review, of which he was editor, from 1943
to 1946, and subsequently associate editor.
2134. In dreams begin responsibilities. Norfolk,
Conn., New Directions, 1938. 171 p.
39-8052 PS3537.C79I5 1938
Contents. — "In dreams begin responsibilities," a
story. — Coriolanus and his mother: the dream of one
performance, a narrative poem. — Poems of experi-
ment and imitation. — Dr. Bergen's belief, a play in
prose and verse.
2135. Shenandoah. Norfolk, Conn., New Direc-
tions, 194 1. 28 p. (The Poet of the month
[8]) 41-28270 PS3537.C79S5 1 94 1
Poetic drama.
2136. Genesis . . . [New York, New Directions]
1943+ 43-8710 PS3537.C79G4
A story, in prose and poetry, of the making of an
American.
2137. The world is a wedding. [Short stories.
Norfolk, Conn.] New Directions, 1948
196 p. 48-7957 PZ3.S405W0
Contents. — The world is a wedding. — New
Year's Eve. — A bitter farce. — America! — The stat-
ues.— The child is the meaning of this life. — In
dreams begin responsibilities.
2138. Vaudeville for a princess, and other poems.
[New York] New Directions, 1950. 106 p.
50-9969 PS3537.C79V3
2139. KARL JAY SHAPIRO, 1913-
Although Karl Shapiro was a soldier when
his first volumes appeared during the Second World
War, he has developed into more than a war poet.
His poetry usually deals with the implications of the
poet's position, or evolves out ot his immediate
environment. His relatively formal verse thus re-
flects his life in America and in the Pacific. He
edited Poetry: A Magazine of Verse from 1950 to
1955-
2140. Person, place and thing. [New York] Rcy-
nal & Hitchcock, 1942. 88 p.
42-51003 PS3537.H27P4
170 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2141. V-letter, and other poems. New York,
Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 63 p.
44-6977 PS3537.H27V18
2142. Essay on rime. New York, Reynal & Hitch-
cock, 1945. 72 p. 45-9654 PS3537.H27E8
Verse.
2143. Trial of a poet, and other poems. New
York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 81 p.
47-11585 PS3537.H27T7
2144. Poems, 1940-1953. New York, Random
House, 1953. 161 p.
53-6928 PS3537.H27A17 1953
A short selection from the author's earlier
volumes, with a few new poems added.
2145. IRWIN SHAW, 1913-
Shaw, who has written for films and radio,
first attracted general public attention as a dramatist;
among his plays are Bury the Dead (1936) and
Sons and Soldiers (1944). Shortly after being ac-
claimed as a dramatist, he emerged as a prominent
short-story writer. Here, as in all his writings, a
clarity of expression and a driving moral purpose
were evident. Writing usually of Americans in
general, and often of New Yorkers in particular,
Shaw has almost always directly or indirectly pre-
sented some social issue.
2146. The young lions. New York, Random
House, 1948. 689 p.
48-8508 PZ3.S5357Y0
Starting in a Bavarian forest in 1938, this novel
traces the story of three men and their part in
World War II through 1945.
2147. Mixed company; collected short stories.
[New York, Random House] 1950. 480 p.
50-10065 PZ3.S5357Mi
2148. The troubled air. New York, Random
House, 1951. 418 p.
51-11045 PZ3.S5357Tr
The story of an attempt to clear some people in
the radio industry after they are subjected to unsub-
stantiated charges of communism. This is a political
novel dealing with the problem of communism in
America in the late forties; the emphasis is on the
then prevalent attitude. Since it is a book with a
message, few have reacted to it on any purely es-
thetic level, with the result that it has received
mixed reviews.
2149. HARRY ALLEN SMITH, 1907-
In loosely autobiographical narratives and
novels H. Allen Smith offers his humorous com-
mentary on American life and customs. Coming
from the Midwest to New York City, Smith began
his writing career as a journalist; much of his early
work reflects interview assignments with unusual
people. In time he settled in Mt. Kisco, a New
York suburb which he uses as a point of departure
for a number of his writings.
2150. 3 Smiths in the wind: Low man on a totem
pole. Life in a putty \ni]e factory. Lost in
the horse latitudes. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1946. 205, 218, 223 p. 46-7219 PN4874.S56A35
215 1. Lo, the former Egyptian! Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 212 p.
47-11538 PN6161.S6574
Autobiographical reminiscences pertaining to his
youth in that part of Illinois known as Egypt.
2152. Larks in the popcorn. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. 256 p.
48-9385 PN6161.S65734
An account of life in the New York suburbs.
2153. We went thataway. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1949. 256 p.
49-1 1513 PZ3.S648o3We
An account of a trip through the West to report
to Mt. Kisco on the "western menace."
2154. Mister Zip. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1952. 252 p. 52-5112 PZ3.S648o3Mk
A satire, in novel form, on Hollywood westerns.
2155. The world, the flesh, and H. Allen Smith.
Garden City, N. Y., Hanover House, 1954.
301 p. 54-8923 PN4874.S56A38
Selections made largely from Smith's London
Journal (1952) and Low Man on a Totem Pole
(1941).
2156. JEAN STAFFORD, 1915-
Jean Stafford is a New England novelist who
has been much praised for her stylistic virtuosity
as well as for psychological penetration. Her am-
bitious stories are more than well-written plots, for
they attempt to comment on life and life values and
on the position of good and evil in the world. Much
of her work derives in mood and setting from her
native New England.
LITERATURE (1607-I955) / 171
2157. Boston adventure. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1944. 496 p.
44-40176 PZ3.S7783B0
2158. The mountain lion. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1947. 231 p.
47-1963 PZ3.S7783M0
2159. The Catherine wheel, a novel. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1952. 281 p.
52-6161 PZ3.S7783Cat
2160. Children are bored on Sunday. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 252 p.
52-13766 PZ3.S7783Ch
Short stories.
2161. WALLACE EARLE STEGNER, 1909-
Wallace Stegner regularly uses a setting in
the Northwest and northern Midwest. In addition
to his fiction, which began with short stories and
his novelette Remembering Laughter (1937) ahout
life on an Iowa farm, Stegner has written Mormon
Country (1942), which is a history of the Mormons
and, to a large extent, of Utah; One Nation (1945;
with the editors of Loof(), a report on foreign
population elements in the United States; and Be-
yond the Hundredth Meridian: John Wesley Powell
and the Second Opening of the West (1954), a dis-
tinguished biographical-historical study.
2162. The Big Rock Candy mountain. New
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1943. 515 p.
43-51281 PZ3.S8i8Bi
Life of a wandering family in the far West,
Alaska, and Canada.
2163. Second growth. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1947. 240 P- 47-4398 PZ3.S8i8Se
A story with a small New Hampshire town
setting, reflecting the conflict of views between the
regular inhabitants and the summer residents, who
were largely educators.
2164. The preacher and the slave. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 403 p.
50-8708 PZ3.S8i8Pr
A biographical novel about the last decade of the
life of Joseph Hillstrom (1882-1914), a leader of
thel.W.W.
2165. The women on the wall. [Short stories]
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 277 p.
40-50344 PZ3.S818W0
2166. JESSE STUART, 1907-
Stuart first achieved recognition with his
poems in Man With a Bull-Tongue Plow (1934),
which depicted life in his native Kentucky hills.
This folk-tale, local-color aspect dominates his rustic,
regional works, which are written in a language
reflecting the local dialect. His direct relationship
to this area is unsophisticatedly present in his auto-
biographical works: Beyond Dar\ Hills (1938) and
The Thread That Runs So True (1949), the latter
covering his life through the time he left teaching
to become a farmer so that he could afford to get
married. It is not his nature to labor his work
artistically, with the result that his plots are at times
unconvincing, passing only as excuses for regional-
istic prose emphasizing setting and character.
While Stuart has been criticized for his excessive
"cult of the primitive" and limited range, many
enjoy his direct, down-to-earth stories.
2167. Head o' W-Hollow. New York, Dutton,
1936. 342 p. 36-8773 PZ3.S93o6He
Short stories.
2168. Men of the mountains. New York, Dutton,
194 1. 349 p. 41-4022 PZ3.S93o6Men
Short stories.
2169. Taps for Private Tussie. New York, Books,
Inc., Distributed by E. P. Dutton, 1943.
303 p. illus. 43-17838 PZ3.S93o6Tap2
2170. Tales from the Plum Grove hills. New
York, Dutton, 1946. 256 p.
46-7101 PZ3.S93o6Tal
2 1 71. Clearing in the sky, & other stories. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 262 p.
50-10491 PZ3.S9306CI
2172. Kentucky is my land. [Poems] New York,
Dutton, 1952. 95 p.
52-1 1461 PS3537.T92516K4
2173. The good spirit of Laurel Ridge. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 263 p.
53-10630 PZ3.S9306G0
2174. WILLIAM STYRON, 1925-
Styron is a young author who has assimi-
lated the influences of stream-of-consciousncss novel-
ists such as Faulkner and Joyce. His first novel
dealt with the degeneracy of a Southern family.
2175. Lie down in darkness, a novel. Indianap-
olis, Bobbs-Mcrrill, 195 1. 400 p.
51-12286 PZ4.S938L1
172 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2176. PETER HILLSMAN TAYLOR, 1917-
Taylor is a Tennessee-born author whose
stories reflect life in the upper South. He has been
praised for his prose style, in which he quietly
and simply presents complex psychological situa-
tions and character relationships and evokes the
Southern setting. The continuing influence of the
past in the present is a recurring factor in his work.
2177. A long Fourth, and other stories. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 166 p.
48-1781 PZ3.T21767L0
2178. A woman of means. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 160 p.
50—7597 PZ3.T21767W0
2179. The widows of Thornton. [Short stories]
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 310 p.
53-7839 PZ3.T2i767Wi
2180. GORE VIDAL, 1925-
Vidal is a skilled story-teller who in recent
books has shown a tendency toward satire and
irony. In one book, The City and the Pillar, he
became almost a social tractarian, writing in a some-
what journalistic style on the problem of homo-
sexuality.
2181. Williwaw. New York, Dutton, 1946. 222 p.
46-4254 PZ3.V6668Wi
An "obscure corner of the war" novel which
shows the experiences of three days on a freighter
in the Aleutian waters while a williwaw is in
progress.
2182. In a yellow wood. New York, Dutton, 1947.
216 p. 47-1967 PZ3.V6668In
A young veteran in a brokerage office roams
through routine urban life confronted with the prob-
lem of possible alternative ways of life, but decides
against a change.
2183. The city and the pillar. New York, Dutton,
1948. 314 p. 47-12503 PZ3.V6668Ci
2184. The season of comfort. New York, Dutton,
1949. 253 p. 49-7028 PZ3.V6668Se
A young artist reaches spiritual and social ma-
turity against a (Washington and national) back-
ground of a political family in the period between
two world wars; the theme of the domineering
mother is prominent.
2185. Dark green, bright red. New York, Dutton,
1950. 307 p. 50-9879 PZ3.V6668Dar
A story of a Central American revolution, with
an American for leading character.
2186. A search for the King, a 12th-century legend.
New York, Dutton, 1950. 255 p.
49-50412 PZ3.V67Se
Based on the story of Blondel de Nesle's search
for Richard Coeur de Lion.
2187. The judgment of Paris. New York, Dut-
ton, 1952. 375 p.
52-5296 PZ3.V6668JU
A young American goes to Europe to find himself,
and finds self-discovery in love for his solution. The
characters belong mainly to the international set
or, at least, the international wanderers.
2188. Messiah. New York, Dutton, 1954. 254 p.
54-5053 PZ3.V6668Me
Somewhat in the tendency of science fiction, this
is a story of the establishment, through modern ad-
vertising techniques and media, of a new messiah.
2189. PETER ROBERT EDWIN VIERECK,
1916-
Peter Viereck is a satiric lyric poet who strives, in
poetry that tends to be formal, for clarity and a con-
formity with what he considers the basic ethical
implications of our civilization. He has also written
several historico-philosophical works, such as Con-
servatism Revisited: The Revolt Against Revolt,
181 5-1949 (1949) and Shame and Glory of the In-
tellectuals (1953), which more directly express the
views and values with which he concerns himself.
2190. Terror and decorum; poems, 1940-1948.
New York, Scribner, 1948. nop.
48-8754 PS3543.I325T4
2 19 1. Strike through the mask! New lyrical
poems. New York, Scribner, 1950. 70 p.
50-6348 PS3543.I325S8
"The essay in the appendix, 'The poet in the
machine age,' appeared in the Journal of the his-
tory of ideas, N. Y., 1949."
2192. The first morning, new poems. New York,
Scribner, 1952. 120 p.
52-12815 PS3543.I325F5
2193. ROBERT PENN WARREN, 1905-
Warren is distinguished both as a poet and
as a novelist, with an increasing mastery of form
and technique. His early poetry was marked by its
intellectualism and the influence of the metaphys-
ical poets; his later work shows an assimilation of
influences and a tendency to greater simplicity, along
with the use of narrative and regional themes.
While his work is not regional in the narrow sense
of the word, he does use Southern material, with an
emphasis on his native State, Kentucky.
2194. Night rider. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1939. 460 p. 39-5848 PZ3.W2549Ni
A novel of the tobacco war between growers and
manufacturers in Kentucky in the early 1900's.
2195. At heaven's gate. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1943. 391 P-
43-13163 PZ3.W2549At
A modern "horror" novel in which sympathy
aroused by a Southern girl's suicide saves her un-
scrupulous financier father.
2196. Selected poems, 1923-1943. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1944. 102 P-
44-3743 PS3545.A748S4
2197. All the king's men. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1946. 464 p.
46-6144 PZ3.W2549AI
Reflecting to some extent the career of Huey Long
in Louisiana, this is a story of a Southern dema-
gogue who attains political control of his State.
2198. The circus in the attic, and other stories.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1947. 27^ p.
48-5123 PZ3.W2549Ci
2199. World enough and time, a romantic novel.
New York, Random House, 1950. 512 p.
50-7242 PZ3.W2549W0
PS3545.A748W6 1950
Presenting a reconstruction of a 19th-century
Kentucky murder case, the book mirrors the place
and period of the story, as well as presenting some
aspects of the author's search for the meaning of
life and an assessment of man's values.
2200. Brother to dragons, a tale in verse and voices.
[New York] Random House, 1953. 230 p.
53-5009 PS3545.A748B7
The story of an 181 1 Kentucky frontier murder of
a slave by the two sons of a sister of Thomas
Jefferson.
2201. Band of angels. New York, Random
House, 1955. 375 p.
55-5814 PZ3.W2549Ban
A somewhat melodramatic novel of the Civil War
era, slavery, and miscegenation.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 173
2202. EUDORA WELTY, 1909-
Eudora Welty has been acclaimed as one of
the best modern American short-story writers, with
frequent mention made of her sensitivity, subtlety,
and technical skill. She is a Southern writer who
• ■cpicts much the same locale as does Faulkner.
Her range of tone is considerable: nostalgic, fanci-
ful, grotesque, humorous, etc. However, each
book tends to be dominated by one tone. Her style
and descriptions are the important elements, for she
offers relatively little plot.
2203. A curtain of green. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1941. 285 p.
41-52028 PZ3.W4696CU
2204. The robber bridgegroom. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1942. 185 p.
42-23596 PZ3.W4696R0
2205. The wide net, and other stories. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1943. 214 p.
44-1666 PZ3.W4696Wi
2206. Delta wedding, a novel. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1946. 247 p.
46-3217 PZ3.W4696De
2207. The golden apples. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1949. 244 p.
49-10054 PZ3.W4696G0
2208. The Ponder heart. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1954. 156 p. illus.
54-5248 PZ3.W4696P0
A novelette.
2209. The bride of the Innisfallen, and other
stories. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955.
207 P- 55-5248 PZ3.W4696Br
2210. JESSAMYNWEST
Jessamyn West is a novelist and short-story
writer whose work ranges from realistic pictures of
Indiana farm life through stories in the modern
Gothic manner. She received notice also for her
opera libretto A Mirror for the Sl(y (1948), which
presents the life of John Audubon (q. v.).
221 1. The friendly persuasion. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1945. 214 p.
.,:.'! l'Z.-.V."siu<,;lr
Sketches of the life of Quakers in Indiana during
the second half of the 19th century.
174 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2212. The witch diggers. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1951. 441 p.
51-9108 PZj.W^ic^Wi
A symbolic and somewhat Gothic novel depicting
life on a poor farm in Southern Indiana in 1899.
2213. Cress Delahanty. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1953. 311 p.
53—5654 PZ3.W5i903Cr
An adult's somewhat humorous view of the life
of an adolescent girl on a California ranch.
2214. Love, death, and the ladies' drill team. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 248 p.
55-10809 PZ3.W51903L0
Short stories.
2215.
RICHARD PURDY WILBUR, 1921-
Richard Wilbur's poetry is a leading example
of the modern neo-classic formal verse that has be-
come prominent in the work of the younger poets.
Lyrical and precise in observation, with life imagi-
natively perceived, some of his work is humorous,
but normally far from the category of "light verse."
2216. The beautiful changes, and other poems.
New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 55 p.
47-11597 PS3545.I32165B4
2217. Ceremony, and other poems. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1950. 55 p.
50-10749 PS3545.I32165C4
2218. TENNESSEE WILLIAMS, 1914-
The plays of Tennessee Williams (whose
original name was Thomas Lanier Williams) fre-
quendy draw on the Mississippi Delta region for
setting and characters. With sympathy and under-
standing he presents, in a poetic and sometimes
symbolistic style, characters so weighed down by the
past that their incorrect adaptation to current life
leads them to frustration and breakup.
2219. The glass menagerie. New York, Random
House, 1945. 124 p.
45-7913 PS3545.I5365G5
This work, which was successful as a play and in
its motion-picture adaptation, is the story of the
remnants of a Southern family with pretensions to
gentility; the plot centers about the crippled
daughter who lives in her dream world with a
symbolic collection of fragile glass pieces, which
stands in contrast with the family's St. Louis slum
apartment.
2220. 27 wagons full of cotton, and other one-act
plays. Norfolk, Conn., New Directions,
1946. 207 p. 46-2373 PS3545.I5365T9
The motion picture Baby Doll (1956) is based on
a film script which Williams produced by rework-
ing the story of the title play in this collection. A
small part of the film's plot was also drawn from
the one-act play, The Long Slay Cut Short (1946).
The two source plays are included in the version
of the screen play published by New Directions.
2221. A streetcar named Desire. New York, New
Directions, 1947. 171 p.
48-5556 PS3545.I5365S8
This play, which was awarded a Pulitzer prize
for drama, and which was widely acclaimed both
as a play and then as a movie, presents against a
New Orleans background the story of a neurotic,
sexually frustrated woman, a descendant of a once
prominent family, who is in conflict with the "vul-
gar" society of the slums, and unable to resolve for
herself the problems of modern life.
2222. One arm, and other stories. [New York]
New Directions, 1948. 210 p.
49-1337 PS3545.I5365O5 1
Contents. — One arm. — The malediction. — The
poet. — Chronicle of a demise. — Desire and the black
masseur. — Portrait of a girl in glass. — The impor-
tant thing. — The angel in the alcove. — The field of
blue children. — The night of the iguana. — The yel-
low bird.
2223. Summer and smoke. New York, New Di-
rections, 1948. 130 p.
48-11697 PS3545.I5365S85 •
Set in a small Mississippi town, this play presents
the story of a young woman who is unable to re-
solve satisfactorily the problems of her emotional {
life.
2224. The Roman spring of Mrs. Stone. [New
York] New Directions, 1950. 148 p.
50-9067 PZ3.W67655R0
This tautly wrought novelette is the story of a
widowed actress who has retired to Rome, where
she is confronted with the problem of trying to
achieve a satisfactory love life.
2225. The rose tattoo. New York [New Direc-
tions] 1951. 144 p.
51-11004 PS3545.I5365R6 1951
This play, which also had a successful screen adap-
tation, is unusual among Williams' usually sombre
works in that with a touch of humor it relates the
story of a widow finding love in a Gulf-coast com-
munity.
LITERATURE (1607-1955) / 175
2226. Camino Real. [Norfolk, Conn.] New Direc-
tions, 1953. 161 p.
53-12831 PS3545.I5365C3
This text is a version, revised for publication, of
a symbolistic and surrealistic play which in its tech-
nique was a new departure for Williams.
2227. Hard candy, a book of stories. [New York]
New Directions, 1954. 220 p.
54-4797 PZ3.W67655Har
2228. Cat on a hot tin roof. [Play. New York]
New Directions, 1955. 197 p.
55-3093 PS3545.I5365C37
This play, which received a Pulitzer prize for
drama, is set on a Mississippi Delta plantation; its
story is in large part that of a wife trying to re-
establish sexual relations with her husband, who
is suspected of being a homosexual.
2229. HERMAN WOUK, 19 15-
The setting of Wouk's writings has been
New York City, in which he was raised, and the
Navy, in which he served during World War II.
His first book, Aurora Dawn (1947), is a satirical
novel about the New York business world. His
next work, The City Boy (1948), was a best-selling
novel about an urban childhood. After that he
turned briefly to drama with The Traitor (1949), a
play about an American Communist. His work
since then has grown in complexity and bulk, so
that it appears at infrequent intervals. Through
all his writings he has remained in the realist
tradition, presenting life as it may be seen. With
the best-selling status and impressiveness of his
recent work, and the reissuance of his earlier novels,
some now regard him as one of the more promising
of the younger novelists.
2230. The Caine mutiny, a novel of World War
II. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951.
494 P- 5I-9977 PZ3.W923Cai
A novel about a Navy mutiny during World War
II. It is a fictional incident in a historical setting,
and it reflects Navy life of the period. The work
was used as the source for a successful stage play and
for a much praised movie.
2231. Marjorie Morningstar. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1955. 565 p.
5S-6485 PZ3.W923Mar
A novel reflecting life in a Jewish family in New
York City.
2232. RICHARD NATHANIEL WRIGHT,
1908-
Richard Wright has been considered Amer-
ica's foremost Negro novelist, although his most re-
cent novel, The Outsider, was generally reviewed
unfavorably. He was raised among lower-class
Southern Negroes and later moved to Chicago; it is
this background that is reflected in his stories, espe-
cially in the autobiographical Blac\ Boy ( 1945). Al-
though his work inclines to the melodramatic, it is
stylistically in the tradition of realism. In the thir-
ties Wright became interested in communism and
some of his work exhibits an awareness of leftist
doctrines and attitudes.
2233. Native son. New York, Harper, 1940.
359 P- 40-4862 PZ3.W9352Nat
A somewhat melodramatic tale of the life and
criminal acts of a Negro youth in the Chicago
slums.
2234. Uncle Tom's children, five long stories.
New York, Harper, [1940] xxx, 384 p.
40-29877 PZ3.W9352Un2
First published 1938 without the autobiographical
introduction and without the fifth story.
Contents. — The ethics of living Jim Crow; an
autobiographical sketch. — 1. Big boy leaves home. —
2. Down by the riverside. — 3. Long black son. — 4.
Fire and cloud. — 5. Bright and morning star.
2235. The outsider. New York, Harper, 1953.
405 p. 53-5383 PZ3.W9352OU
A melodramatic thesis novel with first a Chicago
and then a New York setting. The story is that
of a Negro whose mentality leads him to ruin
through problems of alcohol, women, money, and
communism. The book is meant to be a commen-
tary on the emotional strains of life in our times.
II
Language
ti?
A. Dictionaries 2236-2241
B. Grammars and General Studies 2242-2252
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America 2253-2271
D. Miscellaneous 2272-2275
IT HAS frequently been said that there is no American language, but that each individual
speaks his own language. To some extent this is true of any language, but that is more a
problem for semantics (discussed under Philosophy, q. v.) than it is for linguistics. For there is
obviously a basic language and a central core of usage. It is this central core of usage in the
United States that is our main concern here, with some attention paid to aspects that are
peripheral to it.
At the same time there is no intention at this
point to enter into the question of a separate Ameri-
can language. It is simply noted that American
English diverges from British English at a number
of points, and to these differences attention is di-
rected. As a result of this approach, some major
works such as Otto Jespersen's A Modern English
Grammar on Historical Principles; Completed . . .
by Niels Haislund (Copenhagen, Munksgaard,
1949. 7 v.) have been omitted; for while they are
highly useful for determining the language's his-
torical background, they are mainly oriented to-
wards British English. We have, however, con-
sidered for inclusion general works which were
oriented towards American English, or which spe-
cifically studied the divergences that have developed
between the two forms of the language.
Since dialects have played a role in the develop-
ment of the language, and since they are a part of
the general language picture in this country, a few
books on dialect have been selected for their com-
prehensive coverage, or because they deal with major
dialect groups. No attempt was made to cover all
dialects and their variations; the compromise being
the usual one of presenting representative tides.
The same is largely true for the few books on
foreign languages in America, which were selected
to represent some of the historically more important
language groups of the many that have played so
large a part in the life and in the developing English
of an amalgamating people.
Since a certain amount of slang enters the more
formal language with the passage of time, and since
so much American literature has used slang in
dialogue passages, a few guides to slang terms have
been included.
New information on the changing language, as
well as much on aspects of its past development,
may be obtained from periodicals such as Language,
the Linguistic Society of America's journal, and
in American Speech; a Quarterly of Linguistic
Usage.
■
A. Dictionaries
2236. Craigie, Sir William A., and James H. Hul-
bert, eds. A dictionary of American English
on historical principles, compiled at the University
176
of Chicago. Chicago, University of Chicago Press
[1938-44] 4 v. _ 39-8203 PE2835.C72
Paged continuously; bibliography: p. 2529-2552.
This book attempts to present words that are
either clearly or seemingly of American origin, as
well as those more used in or associated with Amer-
ica. The terminal date for admission was 1900,
although some illustrations have been chosen from
later writing; also, slang words were included only
if of early origin or of special prominence. With
these limitations, the dictionary is not one for the
language written or spoken in America, but rather
one for those elements which have originated or
developed in America, adding to or modifying the
English-language stock. A broader, though less de-
tailed, coverage of the language may be found in
works such as Webster's New International Dic-
tionary of the English Language, 2d ed., unabridged
(Springfield, Mass., Merriam, 1945. cxii, 3210 p.),
which has developed out of the original efforts of
Noah Webster, whose biography is included in the
Education section of this bibliography. Another
long-established American dictionary which covers
the language on a very broad basis is Fun{ & Wag-
nails New "Standard" Dictionary of the English
Language . . . (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1952.
xx, 2815 p.).
2237. Horwill, Herbert W. A dictionary of
modern American usage. 2d ed. Oxford,
Clarendon Press, 1944. xxxi, 360 p.
A46-686 PE2835.H6 1946
First published in 1935, this work presents in a
hctionary arrangement a discussion of American
vord usage as it differs from traditional British
isage. The work does not cover slang, and it is
lot designed to serve as a complete dictionary of
Americanisms."
238. Kenyon, John Samuel, and Thomas Albert
Knott, eds. A pronouncing dictionary of
American English. Springfield, Mass., Merriam
953- 484 P- 53-i4i6 PEii37.K37
A record of the colloquial speech forms of edu-
ated Americans throughout the country; there is
o attempt to provide for dialectal variations. The
'ork covers the words in common usage in Amer-
a, with special attention given to proper names.
Tie work differs from, and so supplements, other
ictionaries such as Webster's New International
dictionary, 2d ed., in that the latter records the pro-
Jnciation of formal platform speech. The Kenyon
id Knott book contains no definitions. Dr. Knott
as general editor of the New International Dic-
431240— CO 13
LANGUAGE / 177
tionary, and Dr. Kenyon served as consulting editor
in pronunciation.
2239. Mathews, Mitford M., ed. A dictionary of
Americanisms on historical principles. Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 195 1. 2 v (xvi
I9i6P;) . 5I-I957 PE2835.D5
bibliography: p. 1913-1946.
This work is devoted exclusively to words which
either originated in America or took on a new mean-
ing here. In this respect it is more limited than
Craigies Dictionary of American English, above.
However, within its limitations it is more complete,
pardy in inclusiveness, but mainly because it is more
up-to-date. A discussion of the history and relative
merits of leading types of dictionaries of the lan-
guage may be found in James Root Hulbert's Dic-
tionaries, British and American (London, A.
Deutsch, 1955. 107 p.).
2240. Thornton, Richard H. An American glos-
sary, being an attempt to illustrate certain
Americanisms upon historical principles. Philadel-
phia, Lippincott, 1912. 2 v.
30-25356 PE2835.T6 1912a
. ™ Volume III, edited by Louise Han-
ley. Madison, Wis., American Dialect Society
1939- xiv, 452 p. {In Dialect notes . . . New
Haven, Conn., 1931-39. v. 6, pt. 3-18)
„. , 30-25356 PE28oi.D5) v. 6
A biographical sketch of Richard Hopwood
Thornton, LL. D., by the Reverend E. H. Clark":
p. v-viii.
The first two volumes of the glossary constitute
an historically important contribution to the subject,
although they have in large part been superseded by
Craigie's and Mathews' volumes cited above. How-
ever the third volume, which was published in parts
in the periodical Dialect Notes, has not been super-
seded, and it remains one of the most important
reference works on the vocabulary of American
dialects.
2241. Wentworth, Harold. American dialect dic-
tionary. New York, Crowell, 1944. 747 p.
. .. . 44-6209 PE2835.W4
inis is a dictionary which presents American
local and regional terms, and those which verge
on being colloquial. It supplies examples of early
usage.
178 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Grammars and General Studies
2242. Curme, George O. Parts of speech and acci-
dence. Boston, Heath, 1935. 370 p. (A
Grammar of the English language ... v. 2)
35-17513 PE1105.G7, v. 2
2243. Curme, George O. Syntax. Boston, Heath,
1931. 616 p. (A Grammar of the English
language ... v. 3) 31-19900 PE1105.G7, v. 3
The two volumes of A Grammar of the English
Language which have so far appeared approach the
problem as that of one language; however, where-
ever necessary the differences between American and
British English are discussed in detail. The first
volume, History of the English Language, Sounds
and Spellings, Word-Formation, by Hans Kurath,
has not yet appeared, although it is still listed in the
publisher's 1956 catalog.
2244. Fries, Charles C. American English gram-
mar; the grammatical structure of present-
day American English with especial reference to
social differences or class dialects. The report of an
investigation financed by the National Council of
Teachers of English and supported by the Modern
Language Association and the Linguistic Society of
America. New York, Appleton-Century, 1940.
313 p. (National Council of Teachers of English.
English monographs, no. 10) 41-347 PE2811.F7
A report on the grammar of "standard" American
English. The author recognizes that there may be
a number of acceptable forms, rather than one "cor-
rect" form. Most of the distinctions made in the
book are between "standard" and "vulgar" Ameri-
can English, with an attempt to record their
frequency, extent, and divergencies.
2245. Galinsky, Hans. Die Sprache des Ameri-
kaners; eine Einfuhrung in die Hauptunter-
schiede zwischen amerikanischem und britischem
Englisch der Gegenwart. Heidelberg, F. H. Kerle,
1951-52. 2 v. 52737439 PE2813.G3
A detailed study and analysis of the American
language as contrasted with British English. The
emphasis is on the present-day situation, and not on
the historical development, nor is it on dialectical
variations. The first volume is divided into two
sections on "Das Klangbild" and "Die Schreibung";
the second volume covers "Wortschatz und Wort-
bildung" and "Syntax und Flexion." Both volumes
contain an extensive selective bibliography.
2246. Krapp, George P. The English language in
America. New York, Century, for the
Modern Language Association of America, 1925.
2 v. 25-I9533 PE2808.K7
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 273-284.
Krapp (1872-1934) was a professor of English at
Columbia University, and a leading student of the
language of America. The first volume of his
major work in this field has seven essays on "The
Mother Tongue," "Vocabulary," "Proper Names,"
"Literary Dialects," "Style," "American Spelling,"
and "American Dictionaries." The second volume
is devoted to pronunciation. Another work by him
on the latter aspect is The Pronunciation of Stand-
ard English in America (New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, American Branch, 1919. 235 p.).
2247. Mathews, Mitford M., ed. The beginnings
of American English; essays and comments.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1931. 181 p.
31-28142 PE2805.M3
A useful collection of material made up mainly
of quotations from 18th- and early 19th-century
writers on the English language in America. A
word index is supplied.
2248. Mencken, Henry L. The American lan-
guage; an inquiry into the development of
English in the United States. 4th ed., cor., enl.,
and rewritten. New York, Knopf, 1936. 769 p.
36-27236 PE2808.M4 1936
"Proper names in America": p. 474-554.
Supplement I — II . . . New York,
Knopf, 1945-48. 2 v. PE2808.M4 1936 Suppl.
Includes bibliographies.
Mencken, who is included in the Literature sec-
tion (q. v.), was a journalist rather than a linguist;
nevertheless, he compiled one of the outstanding
works on the history and nature of the American
language. In addition to the Americana of "good"
American English and place-names, he studied ex-
tensively American slang and dialects. The work
does not attempt to rival the dictionaries in the
field (compiled well after the first edition of his
work in 1919), but is largely in the form of dis-
cursive text and essays. However, an extensive
index in the main volume and its supplements does
enable it to serve also as a lexicon of much linguis-
tic esoterica. The supplements are aligned chapter
by chapter with the main work.
LANGUAGE / 1 79
2249. Myers, Louis M. Guide to American Eng-
lish. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1955. 433 p.
55-8367 PEi 1 1 1 .M954
A grammar aimed at students, this work pre-
sents American English without emphasizing Brit-
ish differences or using traditional approaches and
terminology which the author regards as obsolete.
The interest is in written English, rather than in
the spoken language. Parts of the book have been
drawn from the author's earlier American English;
a Twentieth-Century Guide (New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1952. 237 p.).
2250. Pyles, Thomas. Words and ways of Amer-
ican English. New York, Random House,
1952. 310 p. 52-5156 PE2808.P9
"The present book ... is an attempt to provide
for the lay reader a brief yet adequate treatment of
the English language as it has been and is spoken
and written by Americans." — Preface.
A general introductory book to the topic is
Richard D. Mallery's Our American Language
(Garden City, N. Y., Halcyon House, 1947. 276 p.).
2251. Robertson, Stuart. The development of
modern English. 2d ed., rev. by Frederic
G. Cassidy. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 469 p.
53-1301 1 PE1075.R57 1954
A study of the history and nature of English,
with the emphasis placed on picturing modern
American English in its context within the English
language as an entity. Individual chapters are fol-
lowed by references for further reading. The origi-
nal version of the work first appeared in 1934.
2252. Scheie de Vere, Maximilian. Americanisms;
the English of the New World. New York,
Scribner, 1872. 685 p. 10-26369 PE2835.S4
A work which in individual chapters studies
special sources of Americanisms. There are chap-
ters on the American Indian, immigrants, the West,
politics, etc. The work is not meant to be ex-
haustive, but rather to track down the unusual
Americanisms that at the period were to be found
in good American English.
C. Dialects, Regionalisms, and Foreign Languages in America
2253. Adams, Ramon F. Western words; a dic-
tionary of the range, cow camp and trail.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1944.
82 p. 44-40294 PE3727.C6A4
The concern in this dictionary is with the
erminology of the range country of the West, not
vith pronunciation or local dialect variations.
Bruce Grant's The Cowboy Encyclopedia (Chicago,
^and McNally, 1951. 160 p.) has a smaller, if
•ccasionally different, selection of words; but it also
>rovides fairly extensive sketch illustrations.
254. American Dialect Society. Publication.
v. 1+ 1944+ Gainesville, Fla.
I The Publications were preceded by a similar series,
dialect notes, published by the Society from 1890
1939. Issues of the present series now appear
ice a year; some representative titles from this
ries follow:
!255- Nixon, Phyllis J. A glossary of Virginia
words. The secretary's report. 1946. 46
. (no. 5) 46-8431 PE3101.V8N5
256. Woodard, Clement M. A word-list from
Virginia and North Carolina. 1946. 46 p.
io. 6) 47-23449 PE3101.V8W6
"Words from A glossary of Virginia words [ by
Phyllis J. Nixon] current in Maine, by B. J. Whit-
ing": p. 44-46.
2257. Figh, Margaret Gillis. A word-list from
"Bill Arp" [pseud.] and "Rufus Sanders"
f pseud.] Comments on word-lists in PADS, by
James Nathan Tidwell. A word-list from southern
Kentucky, by A. P. Dal ton. The secretary's report.
1950. 27 p. (no. 13) 51-8421 PE2926.F5
2258. Bradley, Francis W. A word-list from
South Carolina. Expressions from rural
Florida, by Lucille Ayers and others. Minorca!)
dialect words in St. Augustine, Florida, by Lillian
Friedman. 1950. 81 p. (no. 14)
51-8422 PE2927.S6B7
2259. Maurer, David W. The argot of the race-
track. 1951. 70 p. (no. 16)
52-8820 SF333.M34
2260. Reed, David W. Eastern dialed weirds in
California. Supplementary list of South
Carolina words and phrases, by F. W. Bradley.
The secretary's report. 1954. 49 p. (no. 21)
54-3363 PE3101.C3R4
1 82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
by an amateur linguist is Criminal Slang; the Ver- Michigan Press, 1945. 200 p. (University of Michi-
nacular of the Underworld Lingo (Boston, Chris- gan publications. Linguistics, v. 1)
topher Pub. House, 1949. 292 p.), by Vincent }. A45-4529 P25.M47, v. 1
Monteleone, who compiled it through his experi- Bibliography: p. 191-200.
ences as a law enforcement officer. "This present study is ... a statement of the
structure of the English intonation system as such,
2275. Pike, Kenneth L. The intonation of Ameri- in relation to the structural systems of stress, pause
can English. Ann Arbor, University of and rhythm . . ." — Preface.
Ill
Literary History and Criticism
A. Anthologies and Series 2276-2370
B. History and Criticism 2371-2550
C. Periodicals 2551-2577
THIS section seeks to provide material for an approach to, and a clarification of, many views
of American literature: as a general field, and as a field for more specialized study in terms
of genre, period, area, sociological implications, historical background, etc. It also provides
for the study of criticism as a field in itself, and it opens up some paths of literature not
explored within the Literature section (such as the detective story), and it presents, through
prominent placing in critical works and in series, authors not included elsewhere. Thus this
section not only seeks to serve for the analysis and
clarification of literary materials presented elsewhere,
but to lead to materials not otherwise presented.
An alphabetic arrangement has been adopted in
each subsection in preference to a subject arrange-
ment for several reasons. One is that the subject
matter of many of the works listed is so various as to
justify inclusion of each particular work under any
one of several topics. Another is that a number of
the literary critics and historians are of interest in
their own right, so that it was deemed unadvisable to
scatter their works on a subject basis. Not only
would the placing of a book in one of several pos-
sible subject subdivisions be disputable, but on any-
level the tides so assembled would be incomplete,
for much of the material on the same subject is else-
where in the bibliography: e. g., all works of literary
history and criticism, by writers having author en-
tries under Literature, have been discussed along
with the other works by those authors. This means
that much important historical and critical work
(by Blackmur, Eliot, Poe, Pound, Tate, etc.) is not
to be found here, but under Literature. Also, much
material on drama is to be found under Entertain-
ment. Accordingly, the index must be rather ex-
tensively used to locate all relevant items.
Because of the large mass of material suitable for
consideration for inclusion in this section, many
works have had to be excluded by arbitrary limita-
tions. Except in the case of works in a series,
which as a whole might be regarded as general
studies or anthologies, no work has been included
here which deals with a single author. Highly
specialized studies along other lines have also been
excluded. For the rest, works were excluded if they
were seriously out of date or if they too closely over-
lapped the material of other volumes; a few excep-
tions were made for works important in the history
of criticism or as examples of literature in their own
right. Most cases of special pleading, such as Cal-
verton's Marxist approach to literature, have also
been eliminated. Much of the excluded material
may readily be identified through the bibliography
volume of the Spiller, Thorp, Johnson, and Canby
Literary History of the United States, which is
listed below.
This listing of anthologies and series has been
highly selective, except for the rather liberal repre-
sentation given to textbook anthologies designed
for use on the college level. If justification is
sought for this exception, it may be found in the
fact that these general anthologies of American
literature present on the whole a uniformly high
quality of editorial apparatus together with selec-
tions carefully chosen for the purpose at hand. It
may be noted further that they present all too fre-
quently the most available text, in part or in whole,
of works listed individually in the literature section.
An obvious additional factor is that they arc excel-
lent introductions to a large field. The main limit.t-
183
184 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tions imposed on selection of such anthologies is
that no out-of-print works, however excellent, have
been included.
Since the entire field of literary history and criti-
cism, along with literature itself, is constantly and
rapidly expanding, and since so much in both cate-
gories is often long available only in periodicals,
there has been included a group of periodicals which
are important for their role in the propagation of
serious literature, literary history, and criticism.
A. Anthologies and Series
2276. American literature: a period anthology.
Oscar-Cargill, general editor. [Rev. ed.]
New York, Macmillan, 1949. 4 v.
49-48760 PS504.A62
Contents. — [v. 1.] The roots of national culture,
American literature to 1830, edited by Robert E.
Spiller and Harold W. Blodgett (49-9906). — [v. 2]
The romantic triumph; American literature from
1830 to i860, edited by Tremaine McDowell (49-
11990). — [v. 3] The rise of realism; American
literature from i860 to 1900, edited by Louis Wann
(49-4119). — [v. 4] Contemporary trends; Amer-
ican literature since 1900, edited by John H. Nelson
and Oscar Cargill (49-11262).
Edited by scholars in American literature, these
generous selections illuminate the life and thought
of the country as expressed in its literature. Critical
comments concerning authors and bibliographical
notes also are supplied.
2277. American men of letters. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1881-1909. 22 v.
This series, issued under the general editorship
of Charles Dudley Warner (q. v.), comprises bio-
graphical and critical studies of a selected group
of American writers, written by leading critics.
Authors represented in this series who are discussed
at length elsewhere in this bibliography are Bryant,
Whittier, Holmes, J. R. Lowell, Aldrich, Longfel-
low, Emerson, Cooper, Franklin, Lanier, Prescott,
Whitman, Thoreau, N. Webster, N. P. Willis,
Simms, Irving, and Poe (qq. v.). Other books in
the series are:
2278. Cary, Edward. George William Curtis.
1894. 343 p. 1-205 PS1493.C3
Curtis (1824-1892) was in his own day one of the
most influential and esteemed of American authors.
As a young man he spent some time at Brook Farm,
and was closely associated with members of the
Concord group. He first attained public notice
with several Near East travel books. These were
followed by Lotus Eating; a Summer P>oo\ (New
York, Harper, 1852. 206 p.), a collection of articles
on various resorts, mostly American. Then came
his famous fictional works: Potiphar Papers (New
York, Putnam, 1853. 25I P-) an(^ ^rue an^ I (New
York, Dix, Edwards, 1856. 214 p.); these are
largely periodical essays with a vague story thread.
Trumps (New York, Harper, 1861. 502 p.) is a
novel of Washington politics and New York social
life. With these the first main phase of his literary
career came to an end. In 1854 he began to write
the essays for the Easy Chair editor's section of
Harper's Magazine; these increasingly occupied his
time until his death in 1892. In his editorial work
he became more concerned with political and social
affairs, and his editorial essays give a valuable picture
of American life at that period; a large selection of
them was published in From the Easy Chair (New
York, Harper, 1892-94. 3 v.). A recent study of
Curtis is Gordon Milne's George William Curtis &
the Genteel Tradition (Bloomington, Indiana Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 294 p.).
2279. Frothingham, Octavius Brooks. George
Ripley. 1882. 321 p. 7-8 PS2713.F6
Ripley (1802-1880), a practicing Unitarian min-
ister from 1826 to 1 84 1, was a prominent religious
writer and editor of periodicals and a number of
influential foreign books, in which capacities he had
an important influence on the Transcendentalist
movement, of which he was a leader. He helped
found The Dial (q. v.) and to organize Brook Farm
(q. v.). His biographer, Frothingham (1822-
1895), was also a Unitarian minister and a Tran-
scendentalist. Among his other books are Theo-
dore Parser (Boston, Osgood, 1874. 588 p.), a
leading abolitionist, Unitarian clergyman, and
Transcendentalist; a history of Transcendentalism
in New England (q. v.); a life of the philanthropist,
statesman, abolitionist, reformer, Gerrit Smith
(New York, Putnam, 1878. 381 p.); a Memoir of
William Henry Channing (New York, Houghton
Mifflin, 1886. 491 p.), a Unitarian clergyman,
Transcendentalist, and editor, and the nephew of
W. E. Channing (q. v.); and the autobiographical
Recollections and Impressions, 1822-1890 (New
York, Putnam, 1891. 305 p.).
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 185
2280. Higginson, Thomas Wentworth. Margaret
Fuller Ossoli. 1884. 323 p.
4-17996 PS2506.H5
Margaret Fuller was a leader in the Trans-
cendentalist movement; the literature section of this
bibliography contains a discussion of her work.
Higginson, her biographer, was one of the most
esteemed men of letters of his day. Autobiographi-
cal works such as Old Cambridge (New York,
Macmillan, 1899. 203 p.) and Part of a Man's Life
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1905. 311 p.) con-
stitute a valuable source for studying prominent
contemporaries, especially those of the literary world
and the Transcendentalist movement. Valuable
both as literature and as a historical record is Army
Life in a Blac\ Regiment (Boston, Fields, Osgood,
1870. 296 p.), which recounts his experiences dur-
ing the Civil War as the leader of the first Negro
unit in the Army. Higginson also wrote biog-
raphies of Longfellow and Whittier, and a series of
biographical sketches in Contemporaries (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1899. 379 p.), which discusses
people such as Emerson, A. B. Alcott, T. Parker,
Whittier, Whitman, Lanier, L. M. Child, John
Holmes, Thaddeus W. Harris, W. L. Garrison,
Wendell Phillips, C. Sumner, and U. S. Grant.
2281. Sedgwick, Henry Dwight. Francis Park-
man. 1904. 345 p. 4-13318 E175.5P24
Parkman (1823-1893) is one of America's lead-
ing 19th-century historians who also attained a posi-
tion in literature; his works are discussed in the Gen-
eral History section of this bibliography. A recent
volume of selections for the general reader is The
Parkman Reader (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 533
p.). His biographer, Sedgwick (b. 1861), dis-
tinguished himself in this literary form, but mosdy
on non-American subjects such as in his Dante
(1918), Marcus Aurelius (1921), Ignatius Loyola
(1923), Henry of Navarre (1930), Marie Recamier
(1940), Horace (1947), and others; his autobiog-
raphy, Memoirs of an Epicurean, appeared in 1942.
2282. Smyth, Albert H. Bayard Taylor. 1896.
320 p. 4-17191 PS2993.S5 1896
Taylor ( 1825-1878) was one of the foremost au-
thors in his generation. He achieved a large part
of his initial fame through his travel books, of
which the most famous is probably Eldorado (q. v.).
Most of his travel writings were about foreign lands
' (Asia, Africa, and Europe). Almost all his work
' was exotic, and at the same time endowed with
the "polish" that was so essential an ingredient for
the successful, refined literary production of the
1 period. This was also true of his poetry, which
; advanced his purely literary reputation, although he
is now usually classed as merely a good minor poet
4.:i-jni en it
with the ambiguously kind title of "laureate of the
gilded age." His posthumous Poetical Worlds ( Bos-
ton, Houghton, Osgood, 1880. 341 p.) remained
in print well into the 20th century. He was also
a minor dramatist of some contemporary note; his
Dramatic Worlds (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1880.
345 p.) includes "The Prophet," "The Masque of the
Gods," and "Prince Deukalion." Taylor also wrote
a number of fictional works. His first novel was
Hannah Thurston: A Story of American Life (New
York, Putnam, 1863. 464 p.), which utilized a
conventional love story plot as a framework for pic-
turing American life and opinions in upstate New
York. John Godfrey's Fortunes (New York, Put-
nam, 1864. 511 p.) pictured literary activities in
New York. Both The Story of Kennett (New York,
Putnam; Hurd and Houghton, 1866. 418 p.) and
Joseph and His Friend (New York, Putnam, 1870.
361 p.) portrayed rural life in Pennsylvania. How-
ever, it was at the end of his life that Taylor under-
took the work that brought him a degree of lasting
fame; this was his translation of Goethe's Faust
(Boston, Fields, Osgood, 1870-71. 2 v.), which
has since gone through innumerable editions, and is
still in print in several standard collections. Apart
from this, his interest and importance nowadays are
largely historical.
2283. The American men of letters series. New
York, Sloane, 1948 +
Second series issued under this title; in general
designed to carry on in the contemporary period bio-
graphical and critical studies of authors not covered
by Houghton Mifflin's earlier series (v. supra) of
the same name. Since all the authors so far in-
cluded in this new series are presented in the Litera-
ture section of the bibliography, reference to the
most recent volumes is made there under the names
of the individual authors treated. Earlier volumes
include:
2284. Arvin, Newton. Herman Melville. 1950.
316 p. 50-7584 PS2386.A7 1950
2285. Beiryman, John. Stephen Crane. 1950.
347 p. 50-1 iH/q PS1499.C85Z56
2286. Grossman, James. James Fenimore Cooper.
1949. 286 p.
49-50106 PS1431.G77 1949
2287. Krutch, Joseph Wood. Henry David Tho-
rcau. 194S. 298 p. 4S-S4K} PS3053.K7
2288. Miller, Perry. Jonathan Edwards.
}.)S p. 49-50164 BX7260.I JM5 1949
1 86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2289. Neff, Emery Edward. Edwin Arlington
Robinson. 1948. 286 p.
48-8640 PS3535.O25Z74
2290. American writers series. New York, Amer-
ican Book Co., 1934 +
The American writers series provides in each vol-
ume a representative selection from the writings of
some author or group; in addition there is regularly
an extensive and scholarly introduction, a chrono-
logical table, and an annotated bibliography. The
series, most of whose parts have been kept in print,
has appeared under the general editorship of Harry
H. Clark. Authors represented in the series include
Emerson, Hawthorne, Irving, Longfellow, Thoreau,
Whitman, Bryant, Jonathan Edwards, Mark Twain,
Poe, Cooper, Franklin, Melville, Holmes, Parkman,
Harte, Henry James, Paine, J. R. Lowell, and
Howells (qq. v.). Many of the volumes in this
series have been cited elsewhere in this bibliography
under the individual authors. Other volumes are:
2291. Alexander Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson;
representative selections, with introd., bibli-
ography, and notes by Frederick G. Prescott. 1934.
lxxxi, 422 p. 34-21830 E302.H257
Both Hamilton and Jefferson were prominent
leaders in the early years of the Republic, and they
both possessed a writing ability and cogency of
thought which place their documents among the
more important literary works of the period. Both
these men are treated extensively under the General
History section of this bibliography; Jefferson is also
included in the section on the literature of the Revo-
lutionary and Federal periods. This selection from
the writings of the two men assumes that the reader
has ready access to one of the many editions of The
Federalist (q. v.).
2292. Southern poets; representative selections,
with introd., bibliography, and notes by Edd
Winfield Parks. 1936. cxlviii, 419 p.
36-7131 PS551.P27
A companion volume to the Southern Prose
Writers below, this work has a wider range in that
it also includes work readily available elsewhere.
The object of the work is "to present the best poems
by Southerners . . . regardless of subject."
2293. John Lothrop Motley; representative se-
lections, with introd., bibliography, and
notes by Chester Penn Higby and B. T. Schantz.
1939. clxi, 482 p.
40-1040 PS2435.A4H5 1939
Motley (1814-1877) is one of those historians
whose work has achieved a position in belles-lettres.
His three major works are The Rise of the Dutch
Republic (1856); History of the United Nether-
lands, from the Death of William the Silent, to the
Twelve Years' Truce, 1609 (1860-67); an^ The Life
and Death of John Barneveld (1874). He also
wrote two novels: the autobiographical Morton's
Hope; or, The Memoirs of a Provincial (1839), and
Merry-Mount: A Romance of the Massachusetts
Colony (1849).
2294. William Hickling Prescott; representative
selections, with introd., bibliography, and
notes by William Charvat and Michael Kraus.
1943. cxlii, 466 p. 43-1590 PS2656.A4 1943
. Prescott (1796-1859) is another of America's
"literary" historians. His masterpiece is History of
the Conquest of Mexico (1843). That and the
History of the Conquest of Peru ( 1847) are his most
frequently reprinted works. His other main his-
tories are History of Ferdinand and Isabella (1838)
and History of the Reign of Philip the Second
( 1855—58), of which the latter work was left in-
complete at the time of his death. A 22-volume
edition of his works (including the standard biog-
raphy by Ticknor) was published in Philadelphia
by Lippincott in 1904. In addition to his historical
work, Prescott also had a considerable interest in
literature, as may be seen in his Biographical and
Critical Miscellanies (1845) which, except for the
opening biographical study of Charles Brockton
Brown (q. v.), was a collection of articles which
first appeared in the North American Review.
Some of these articles, as well as others which Pres-
cott published only in periodicals, are included in
the present selection, giving the volume the added
merit of showing him as a literary critic as well as
a historian. It is true that Prescott's subject matter
is largely foreign, but, as stated on p. cxxviii of the
introduction to this work, "... a true evaluation
of American culture of the past must embrace writ-
ers like Prescott who, in getting out of their age,
carried American ideals and traditions with them.
His work adds to the mounting evidence that the
main line of American thought has been anything
but narrowly nationalistic . . ."
2295. Minor Knickerbockers; representative selec-
tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes,
by Kendall B. Taft. 1947. cxlviii, 410 p.
47-2234 PS549.N5T2
"Selected bibliography": p. cxi-cxlviii.
"Knickerbockers" is a term loosely applied to a
group of early 19th-century New York City writers.
The name came from Washington Irving's Diedrich
Knickerbocker's History of New Yoi\ (q. v.), and
Irving himself is usually regarded as the leader of
this cosmopolitan group. The Knickerbockers
gained temporary dominance of the nation's litera-
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 187
ture, and in doing so became increasingly nationalis-
tic. Authors represented in the present selection
include James Kirke Paulding, Samuel Woodworth,
Fitz-Greene Halleck, John Howard Payne, Joseph
Rodman Drake, Robert Charles Sands, William
Leggett, George Pope Morris, William Cox,
Nathaniel Willis, Charles Fenno Hoffman,
Theodore Sedgwick Fay, Lewis Gaylord Clark,
Park Benjamin, and Cornelius Matthews; a number
of these are discussed elsewhere in the bibliography,
especially in the Literature section for this period.
2296. Southern prose writers; representative selec-
tions, with introd., bibliography, and notes
by Gregory Paine. 1947. cxiv, 392 p.
47-679 PS551.P23
"The purpose . . . has been to make available to
students of American literature southern literary
materials not readily available in convenient form
elsewhere and to present these materials in units suf-
ficiendy large to be genuinely representative of the
authors chosen." — Preface. The authors included
are: William Byrd, Jefferson, W. Wirt, John Taylor,
Calhoun, H. S. Legare, J. P. Kennedy, J. G. Bald-
win, Longstreet, Crockett, Simms, J. E. Cooke,
G. W. Cable, G. E. King, M. N. Murfree, J. C.
Harris, S. Bonner, Lanier, T. N. Page, W. H. Page,
J. L. Allen, W. S. Porter, and Woodrow Wilson.
Most of these authors are represented more fully
elsewhere in this bibliography.
2297. America's lost plays. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1940-42. 20 v.
PS623.A1A6
A series presenting generally forgotten and un-
available plays which were once popular, and which
remain an integral part of the historical picture of
the development of the American drama. Almost
all of them date from the 19th century. A few of
the authors represented have been included in the
Literature section of the bibliography.
2298. Vol. 1. Forbidden fruit & other plays, by
Dion Boucicault. 1940. viii, 313 p.
40-31677 PR4161.B2A13
Contents. — Forbidden fruit. — Louis XI. — Dot. —
Flying scud. — Mercy Dodd. — Robert Emmet.
2299. Vol. 2. False shame and Thirty years, two
plays by William Dunlap. 1940. xiv, 106 p.
40-31678 PS1560.F2 1940
Translation and adaptation of Falsche Scham by
August von Kotzebue and Trente ans, ou La vie
d'un joueur, by Victor Ducange and Prosper
Goubaux.
2300. Vol. 3. Glaucus, & other plays, by George
Henry Boker. xiv, 228 p. 1940.
40-32028 PS1105.G6
Contents. — The world a mask. — The bank-
rupt.— Glaucus.
2301. Vol. 4. Davy Crockett, & other plays, by
Leonard Grover, Frank Murdock [!] Lester
Wallack, G. H. Jessop, J. J. McCloskey. 1940. xxv,
231 p. 40-35497 PS625.G6
Contents. — Rosedale; or, The rifle ball, by Lester
Wallack. — Across the continent; or, Scenes from
New York life and the Pacific railroad, by J. J. Mc-
Closkey.— Davy Crockett; or, Be sure you're right,
then go ahead, by Frank Murdock [!] — Sam'l of
Posen; or, The commercial drummer, by G. H.
Jessop. — Our boarding house, by Leonard Grover.
2302. Vol. 5. Trial without jury, & other plays,
by John Howard Payne. 1940. xvii, 264 p.
40-32715 PS2530.A5H5
Contents. — Trial without jury; or, The magpie
and the maid. — Mount Savage. — The boarding
schools; or, Life among the little folks. — The two
sons-in-law. — Mazeppa; or, The wild horse of Tar-
tary. — The Spanish husband; or, First and last love.
2303. Vol. 6. The last duel in Spain, & other plays
by John Howard Payne. 1940. 265 p.
4°-35574 PS2530.A5H46
Contents. — The last duel in Spain. — Woman's
revenge. — The Italian bride. — Romulus, the shep-
herd king. — The black man; or, The spleen.
2304. Vol. 7. The early plays of James A. Heme,
with act IV of Griffith Davenport. 1940.
x, 160 p. 41-3201 PS1919.H75A1 5
Contents. — Introduction. — Within an inch of his
life. — "The minute men" of 1774-1775. — Drifting
apart. — The Reverend Griffith Davenport. — Bib-
liography (p. [161]).
2305. Vol. 8. The great diamond robbery, & other
recent melodramas, by Edward M. Alfriend
& A. C. Wheeler, Clarence Bennett [and others]
. . . 1940. xv, 255 p. 41-3202 PS625.L4
Contents. — A royal slave, by Clarence Bennett. —
The great diamond robbery, by Edward M. Altriend
and A. C. Wheeler. — From rags to riches, by
Charles A. Taylor. — No mother to guide her, by
Lillian Mortimer. — Billy the kid, by Walter Woods.
2306. Vol. 9. Five plays by Charles H. Hoyt.
194 r. xv, 240 p.
41-^203 PS2039.H47
Contents. — A bunch of keys. — A midnight
bell. — A trip to Chinatown. — A temperance town. —
A milk white flag.
l88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2307. Vol. 10. The banker's daughter, & other
plays, by Bronson Howard. 1941. xiv,
306 p. 41-6275 PS2014.H12B3 1941
Contents. — Bronson Crocker Howard. — Survey
of Howard's plays. — Hurricanes. — Old love let-
ters.— The banker's daughter. — Baron Rudolph. —
Knave and queen. — One of our girls. — Bibliography
(p. 299-306).
2308. Vol. n. An arrant knave, & other plays, by
Steele MacKaye. 1941. xvii, 234 p.
41-10637 PS2359.M42A8 1941
Contents. — Rose Michel. — Won at last. — In spite
of all. — An arrant knave.
2309. Vol. 12. The cowled lover, & other plays, by
Robert Montgomery Bird. 1941. x, 221 p.
41-10638 PS1099.B5C6 1941
Contents. — The cowled lover. — Caridorf ; or, The
avenger. — News of the night; or A trip to Niag-
ara.— 'Twas all for the best; or, 'Tis all a notion.
2310. Vol. 13. The sentinels, & other plays, by
Richard Penn Smith. 1941. x, 171 p.
41-10639 PS2869.S7S4 1941
Contents. — -Checklist of the plays of Richard
Penn Smith (p. [ix]-x). — The sentinels; or, The
two sergeants. — The bombardment of Algiers. —
William Penn. — Shakespeare in love. — A wife at
a venture. — The last man; or, the cock of the
village.
2311. Vol. 14. Metamora, & other plays, by John
Augustus Stone [and others] 1941. vi,
399 p. 41-18466 PS632.P3
Contents. — Metamora; or, The last of the Wam-
panoags, by }. A. Stone. — Tancred, king of Sicily;
or, The archives of Palermo, by J. A. Stone. — The
spy, a tale of the neutral ground, by C. B. Clinch. —
The batde of Stillwater; or, The maniac, by H. J.
Conway (?) — The usurper; or, Americans in Trip-
oli, by J. S. Jones. — The crock of gold; or, The
toiler's trials, by S. S. Steele. — Job and his children,
by J. M. Field. — Signor Marc, by J. H. Wilkins. —
The duke's motto; or, I am here! By John
Brougham.
2312. Vol. 15. Four plays by Royall Tyler. 1941.
viii, 120 p. 41-28105 PS855.T7A13
Contents. — The island of Barrataria. — The
origin of the feast of Purim; or, The destinies of
Haman & Mordecai. — Joseph and his brethren. —
The judgment of Solomon.
2313. Vol. 16. Monte Cristo, by Charles Fechter,
as played by James O'Neill, & other plays by
Julia Ward Howe, George C. Hazelton, Langdon
Mitchell [and] William C.DeMille. 1941. 360 p.
41-24720 PS625.R8
Contents. — Monte Cristo, by Charles Fechter. —
Hippolytus, by J. W. Howe — Mistress Nell, by G. C.
Hazelton. — Becky Sharp, by Langdon Mitchell. —
The Warrens of Virginia, by W. C. De Mille.
2314. Vol. 17. The plays of Henry C. De Mille,
written in collaboration with David Belasco.
1941+ xxv, 342 p. 41-24493 PS1534.D2A12
Contents. — Introductory essay. — A complete list
of the plays by H. C. De Mille (1 p. following
p. xxv). — The main line, by H. C. De Mille and
Charles Barnard. — The wife, by David Belasco and
H. C. De Mille.— Lord Chumley, by H. C. De Mille
and David Belasco. — The charity ball, by David
Belasco and H. C. De Mille. — Men and women, by
H. C. De Mille and David Belasco.
2315. Vol. 18. The heart of Maryland, & other
plays, by David Belasco. 194 1. xii, 319 p.
41-28106 PS1085.B23H4 1941
Contents. — La Belle Russe. — The stranglers of
Paris. — The girl I left behind me, by David Belasco
and Franklin Fyles. — The heart of Maryland. —
Naughty Anthony.
2316. Vol. 19. The white slave, & other plays, by
Bartley Campbell. 1941. lxxxi, 248 p.
42-4434 PS1252.C25A19 1941
Contents. — Biographical sketch. — Alphabetical
list of the plays of Bardey Campbell (p. [xv]-
lxxxi). — The Virginian. — My partner. — The galley
slave. — Fairfax. — The white slave.
2317. Vol. 20. Man and wife, & other plays, by
Augustin Daly. 1942. xxi, 407 p.
42-15353 PS1499.D85M35 1942
Contents. — List of Daly's plays (p. [xi]-xxi). —
Man and wife. — Divorce. — The big bonanza. —
Pique. — Needles and pins.
2318. Anthology of best original short-shorts.
1953+ Ocean City, N. J., Oberfirst Publi-
cations, 1954+ annual. Oberfirst's short-short
fiction library) 54-33676 PZ1.A63
Editor: 1954+ R. Oberfirst.
The "short-short" is a refinement of the short
story, and portrays a single action in one to five
pages. Usually it poses a surprise or twist ending,
in the tradition of O. Henry (q. v.). The 1953
volume above is not the first collection by Oberfirst,
but it is apparently the first of a series, of which
three have so far appeared.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 189
2319. Badger, Kingsbury M. American literature
for colleges. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole Co.
[1952-54] 2 v. 52-2996 PS507.B32
A college textbook anthology of American litera-
ture which is meant to trace the development of the
American heritage. The result is a chronological
development in terms of subject matter (pre-colo-
nials, colonials, early nationalists, etc.), but not of
material presented. In each section, the selections
include not only work by people taking part in the
period, movement, and activities discussed, but also
subsequent people who wrote about it. The result
also includes a far different representation of authors
than is usual: the Amerindians receive considerable
attention, and so do non-English colonists; also,
many nonfiction authors infrequendy regarded as
part of "Literature" have been included, and, as an
aspect of this, the usual authors included in literary
anthologies have tended to have more than a usual
proportion of space given over to their non-fictional
writings. The second volume carries the work
through the late 19th century and "Romanticism,
Realism, and the Frontier."
2320. Beatty, Richmond Croom, Floyd C. Wat-
kins, and Thomas Daniel Young, eds. The
literature of the South. Randall Stewart, general
editor. Chicago, Scott, Foresman, 1952. 1106 p.
52-2548 PS261.B43
An anthology reflecting the Southern experience
in its many aspects through its more literary writers.
The contemporary flourishing of belles-lettres in
the South is reflected in some 40 percent of the book
being devoted to the 20th century.
2321. Benet, William Rose, and Norman Holmes
Pearson, eds. The Oxford anthology of
American literature. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1938. xxx, 1705 p. 38-34361 PS507.O9
Unlike most anthologies of American literature,
this work is not aimed primarily at the textbook
market; also, it approaches the selecting problem as
a purely literary one. While the editors claim no
attempt to be all-inclusive, some 150 writers are
represented by selections. Because of the emphasis
on literary merit, major writers regularly receive far
more space than do minor authors. The relative
importance of modern literature is recognized by
devoting about half the volume to this period.
Commentary is not provided with the selections, but
biographical sketches of the authors are found on
p. 1 577-1683, with short author bibliographies. A
"background" bibliography is presented on p. 1685-
! 1688.
2322. The Best American short stories . . . and
the Yearbook of the American short
story . . . 1915+ Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 16 +
16-11387 PZ1.B446235
Title varies: 19 15-41, The Best Short Stories.
1942+ The Best American Short Stories.
Editor: 1915-41, E. }. O'Brien. — 1942+ Martha
Foley.
Imprint varies: 1915-25, Boston, Small, Maynard
& Company. — 1926-32, New York, Dodd, Mead
and Company. — 1933+ Boston, Houghton Mifflin
Company.
An annual survey of and selection from the short
stories published in America during the preceding
year. The present editor, Martha Foley, has also
produced a number of more selective anthologies,
including The Best of the Best American Short
Stories, 191 5-10.50 (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952.
369 p.) and, with Abraham Rothberg, U. S. Stories;
Regional Stories from the Forty-Eight States (New
York, Hendricks House-Farrar Straus, 1949. xix,
683 p.).
2323. Blair, Walter, Theodore Hornberger, and
Randall Stewart, eds. The literature of the
United States, an anthology and a history. Rev. ed.
Chicago, Scott, Foresman, 1953. 2 v.
53-2382 PS507.B527
Although the emphasis is on the more important
authors, this anthology presents a fair range of selec-
tions from lesser authors. Arranged along histori-
cal lines, the literary selections also reflect the de-
velopment of ideas. Each section has an extensive
introduction on the period, and individual authors
and selections are commented upon. As with most
such college texts, guides to further reading are
supplied.
2324. Bradley, E. Sculley, and others, eds. The
American tradition in literature. Edited by
Sculley Bradley, Richmond Croom Beatty [and]
E. Hudson Long. New York, Norton, 1956. 2 v.
56-1312 PS507.B74
A college textbook anthology which has an
emphasis on major writers, whom it attempts to
present in their full variety and stature. The final
criterion for all selections has been literary, but the
critical apparatus has been designed to relate them
to America's history and intellectual development.
2325. Burrell, John Angus, and Bennett A. Ccrf,
eds. An anthology of famous American
stories. Edited by Angus Burrell and Bennett Cerf.
New York, Modern Library, 1053. M4° P- (The
Modern Library of the world's best books. [A
Modern Library giant, (177 ] )
53-9916 PZ1.B04 An
I90 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A chronologically arranged collection of 73 short
stories which the editors consider outstanding. This
book is a revision of a work originally published in
1936 under the tide The Bedside BooJ^ of Famous
American Stories. As in the original work, the
primary intent is still to provide stories for pleasur-
able reading, and only secondarily to provide a
survey, so that nothing is included purely for his-
torical purposes.
2326. Cady, Edwin Harrison, Frederick J. Hoff-
man, and Roy Harvey Pearce, eds. The
growth of American literature; a critical and his-
torical survey. New York, American Book Co.,
1956. 2 v. (American literature series)
56-1720 PS507.C19
A college textbook for the study of American
literature as it reflects the country's cultural develop-
ment. Major writers are given a liberal representa-
tion among approximately one hundred authors pre-
sented. Introductions, chronologies, and highly
selective bibliographies are supplied to guide the
student.
2327. Cerf, Bennett A., and Van H. Cartmell, eds.
Sixteen famous American plays. New York,
Garden City Pub. Co., 1941. 1049 p.
41-51686 PS634.C42
Contents. — They knew what they wanted, by
Sidney Howard. — The front page, by Ben Hecht
and Charles MacArthur. — The green pastures, by
Marc Connelly. — Biography, by S. N. Behrman. —
Ah, wilderness! by Eugene O'Neill. — The petrified
forest, by Robert Sherwood. — Waiting for Lefty, by
Clifford Odets. — Dead end, by Sidney Kingsley. —
Boy meets girl, by Bella and Samuel Spewack. —
The women, by Claire Boothe. — "Having wonderful
time," by Arthur Kober. — Our town, by Thornton
Wilder. — The little foxes, by Lillian Hellman. — The
man who came to dinner, by Moss Hart and George
S. Kaufman. — The time of your life, by William
Saroyan. — Life with father, by Howard Lindsay
and Russel Crouse.
This work, which has also been published by
Random House in a Modern Library reprint, offers
a selection of plays produced between 1924 and 1939.
Because of its terminal date, the work might be
supplemented by Jack Gaver's Critics' Choice . . .
(no. 2336), which covers the 1935-55 period.
2328. Cooke, George Willis, ed. The poets of
Transcendentalism, an anthology. With in-
troductory essay and biographical notes. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1903. xvi, 341 p.
3-6145 PS607.C7
An anthology of poetry influenced by the Trans-
cendental movement in New England. Since the
aim is "to give specimens of the poetical output of
that movement," much of the book is devoted to
work by minor and usually neglected poets.
2329. Davis, Joe Lee, John T. Frederick, and Frank
Luther Mott, eds. American literature, an
anthology and critical survey. New York, Scribner,
1948-49. 2 v. 48-9141 PS507.D3
A college textbook anthology that aims to pro-
vide a comprehensive collection of basic writings;
essays on the periods and on the major authors are
included, while the lesser authors are covered by
headnotes. The work has been arranged chrono-
logically, with the intention of presenting the Amer-
ican experience. The same work has been reissued
under the title A Treasury of American Literature
(Chicago, Spencer Press, 1955 [i. e., 1956]).
2330. Ellis, Harold Milton, and others, eds... A
college book of American literature. Edited
by Milton Ellis, Louise Pound [and] George Weida
Spohn. New York, American Book Co., 1939-40.
2 v. (American literature series; H. H. Clark,
general editor) 39-22474 PS507.E65
"General bibliography": v. 1, p. 1003-1012; v. 2,
p. 1077-1082.
A voluminous anthology, arranged chronologi-
cally. While most attention is given to major
authors, many lesser ones are included, with nearly
two hundred represented. The editorial intention
is to present the significant statements of each pe-
riod's spokesmen; the quantitative emphasis is on
post-colonial writings. There are biographical
sketches and bibliographies for each author. With ,
the additional editorial assistance of Frederick J
Hoffman, there has appeared a one-volume abridged
version of the work, intended for one-semester
courses: A College Boo\ of American Literature;
Briefer Course, 2d ed. (New York, American Book
Co., 1954. 1 107 p.).
2331. Foerster, Norman, ed. American poetry
and prose. 3d ed. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1947. 1610 p. 47-4469 PS507.F6 1947
"Under the general editorship of Robert Morss
Lovett."
"American civilization: a reading list": p. 1595—
1604.
A college textbook anthology of American writing
from 1 61 2 to the present. The emphasis is on
major writers, with some minor authors represented.
The purpose of the work is to register the progress
of the United States in literature, and to present the
growth of literature as a principal feature of Amer-
ican civilization. Brief biographical, bibliographi-
cal, and critical comments accompany the selections.
For shorter courses William Charvat has prepared
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / IQI
an abridged version (Boston, Houghton, Mifflin,
1952. 924 p.) of this work.
2332. Gassner, John, ed. Twenty-five best plays
of the modern American theatre. Early
series. New York, Crown, 1949. xxviii, 756 p.
49-9571 PS634.G32
Contents. — "The hairy ape," by Eugene
O'Neill. — Desire under the elms, by Eugene
O'Neill. — What price glory? By Laurence Stall-
ings and Maxwell Anderson. — They knew what
they wanted, by Sidney Howard. — Beggar on horse-
back, by George S. Kaufman and Marc Connelly. —
Craig's wife, by George Kelly. — Broadway, by
Philip Dunning and George Abbott. — Paris bound,
by Philip Barry. — The road to Rome, by Robert E.
Sherwood. — The second man, by S. N. Behrman. —
Saturday's children, by Maxwell Anderson. — Porgy,
by Dorothy and Du Bose Heyward. — The front
page, by Ben Hecht and Charles MacArthur. —
Machinal, by Sophie Treadwell. — Gods of the
lightning, by Maxwell Anderson and Harold Hick-
erson. — Street scene, by Elmer Rice. — Strictly dis-
honorable, by Preston Sturges. — Berkeley Square,
by J. L. Balderston. — The clod, by Lewis Beach. —
Trifles, by Susan Glaspell. — He, by Eugene
O'Neill. — Aria da capo, by Edna St. Vincent
Millay. — Poor Aubrey, by George Kelly. — White
dresses, by Paul Green. — Minnie Field, by E. P.
Conkle. — Supplementary list of plays (p. 754—
755)— Bibliography (p. 756).
A ". . . record of the period between 19 19 and
1929, when our theatre arrived at maturity, and of
the stirrings in the direction of modernity a few
years earlier, as expressed by the Little Theatre
movement . . ." This work is a "belated effort"
to cover the integral first period for the series that
follows. Gassner has done much writing and
anthologizing in the field of the drama, both for-
eign and domestic. His The Theatre in Our Times;
a Survey of the Men, Materials, and Movements in
the Modern Theatre (New York, Crown Publish-
ers, 1954. 609 p.) discusses world drama, but from
the vantage point of the New York theatergoer, so
that the work may be used as a commentary on
modern drama in America. With Dudley Nichols
he edited Twenty Best Film Plays (New York,
Crown, 1943. xl, n 12 p.).
2333. Gassner, John, ed. Twenty best plays of the
modern American theatre. New York,
Crown, 1939. xxii, 874 p. 39-32159 PS634.G3
Contents. — Winterset, by Maxwell Anderson. —
High Tor, by Maxwell Anderson. — Idiot's deliuht,
by Robert E. Sherwood. — Johnny Johnson, by Paul
Green. — Green pastures, by Marc Connelly. — You
can't take it with you, by George S. Kaufman and
Moss Hart. — End of summer, by S. N. Behrman. —
The animal kingdom, by Philip Barry. — Boy meets
girl, by Bella and Samuel Spewack. — The women,
by Clare Boothe. — Yes, my darling daughter, by
Mark Reed. — Three men on a horse, by George
Abbott and John Cecil Holm. — The children's hour,
by Lillian Hellman. — Tobacco road, by Jack Kirk-
land and Erskine Caldwell. — Of mice and men, by
John Steinbeck. — Dead end, by Sidney Kingsley. —
Bury the dead, by Irwin Shaw. — The fall of the city,
by Archibald MacLeish. — Golden boy, by Clifford
Odets. — Stage door, by Edna Ferber and George S.
Kaufman. — Plays by authors represented (p. 869-
871). — Plays by other authors, 1930-1940 (p. 871-
872). — Bibliography (p. 873-874).
This is the first of an indefinite series of collec-
tions of modern American plays; volumes are issued
to represent newly elapsed periods. Each volume,
in addition to the texts of leading plays, contains
a concise introduction on the theater situation during
the years covered.
2334. Gassner, John, ed. Best plays of the modern
American theatre, second series. New York,
Crown, 1947. xxx, 776 p. 47-30270 PS634.G28
Contents. — The glass menagerie, by Tennessee
Williams. — The time of your life, by William Saro-
yan. — I remember mama, by John Van Druten. —
Life with father, by Howard Lindsay and Russel
Crouse. — Born yesterday, by Garson Kanin. — The
voice of the turtle, by John Van Druten. — The
male animal, by James Thurber and Elliott Nu-
gent.— The man who came to dinner, by George S.
Kaufman and Moss Hart. — Dream girl, by Elmer
Rice. — The Philadelphia story, by Philip Barry. —
Arsenic and old lace, by Joseph Kesselring. — The
hasty heart, by John Patrick. — Home of the brave,
by Arthur Laurents. — Tomorrow the world, by
James Gow and Arnaud d'Usseau. — Watch on the
Rhine, by Lillian Hellman. — The patriots, by Sidney
Kingsley. — Abe Lincoln in Illinois, by Robert E.
Sherwood. — Bibliography (p. 775-776).
2335. Gassner, John, ed. Best American plays;
third series, 1945-1951. New York, Crown,
1952. xxviii, 707 p. ^-5690 PS634.G277
Contents. — Introduction: The mid-century the-
atre, a reprise with variations, by John Gassner. —
Death of a salesman, by Arthur Miller. — A streetcar
named desire, by Tennessee Williams. — The iceman
cometh, by Eugene O'Neill. — The member of the
wedding, by Carson McCullers. — The autumn gar-
den, by Lillian Hellman. — Come back, little Sheba,
by William Inge. — All my sons, by Arthur Miller. —
Detective story, by Sidney Kingsley. — Billy Budd, by
Louis O. Coxe and Robert Chapman. Medea, bj
Robinson JclTers. -Mister Roberts, by Thomas He!
192 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
fen and Joshua Logan. — State of the Union, by
Howard Lindsay and Russel Crouse. — Darkness at
noon, by Sidney Kingsley. — Anne of the thousand
days, by Maxwell Anderson. — Bell, book, and can-
dle, by John Van Druten. — The moon is blue, by F.
Hugh Herbert. — Summer and smoke, by Tennessee
Williams. — Supplementary list of American non-
musical plays (p. 703-705). — American musical
plays of the period (p. 705). — Bibliography (p. 706-
7°7)-
2336. Gaver, Jack, ed. Critics' choice; New York
Drama Critics' Circle prize plays, 1935-55.
New York, Hawthorn Books, 1955. 661 p.
55-101 13 PS634.G35
A collection of the plays which since the 1935-36
season have received the New York Drama Critics'
Circle awards for best play of the season. With
Cerf and Cartmell's Sixteen Famous American Plays
(q. v.) this work anthologizes the modern theater
movement in America. The award plays are:
Maxwell Anderson's "Winterset" and "High Tor";
John Steinbeck's "Of Mice and Men"; William
Saroyan's "The Time of Your Life"; Lillian Hell-
man's "Watch on the Rhine"; Sidney Kingsley 's
"The Patriots" and "Darkness at Noon"; Tennessee
Williams' "The Glass Menagerie," "A Streetcar
Named Desire," and "Cat on a Hot Tin Roof";
Arthur Miller's "All My Sons" and "Death of a
Salesman"; Carson McCullers' "The Member of the
Wedding"; John Van Druten's "I Am a Camera";
William Inge's "Picnic"; and John Patrick's "The
Teahouse of the August Moon."
2337. Halline, Allan Gates, ed. American plays,
selected and edited, with critical introduc-
tions and bibliographies. New York, American
Book Co., 1935. 787 p. (American literature series;
H. H. Clark, general editor) 35-5220 PS623.H3
"Bibliographies": p. 751-776.
Contents. — The contrast, by Royall Tyler. —
Andre, by William Dunlap. — The bucktails; or.
Americans in England, by James Kirke Paulding. —
Superstition, by James Nelson Barker. — The gladi-
ator, by Robert Montgomery Bird. — Bianca Vis-
conti, by Nathaniel Parker Willis. — Fashion, by
Anna Cora Mowatt. — Francesca da Rimini, by
George Henry Boker. — Horizon, by Augustin
Daly. — The Danites in the Sierras, by Joaquin Mil-
ler.— The Henrietta, by Bronson Howard. — The
New York idea, by Langdon Mitchell. — Madame
Sand, by Philip Moeller. — You and I, by Philip
Barry. — Icebound, by Owen Davis. — The great god
Brown, by Eugene O'Neill. — The field god, by Paul
Green.
This book aims to present a picture of the chron-
ological development of the American drama. Each
play is introduced by a discussion of the play itself
and its philosophical and literary relationships, as
well as the dramatist's other work. A longer work
with the same purpose, but with the emphasis on
the pre-modern period, is Arthur H. Quinn's Rep-
resentative American Plays, from ij6j to the Present
Day, 7th ed., rev. and enl. (New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts, 1953. 1248 p.), which includes the
following: Thomas Godfrey's "The Prince of
Parthia" (1767); Royall Tyler's "The Contrast"
(1787); William Dunlap's "Andre" (1798); James
Nelson Barker's "Superstition" (1824); John
Howard Payne and Washington Irving's "Charles
the Second" (1824); George Washington Parke
Custis' "Pocahontas, or The Settlers of Virginia"
(1830); Robert Montgomery Bird's "The Broker of
Bogota" (1834); Nathaniel Parker Willis' "Tortesa
the Usurer" (1839); Anna Cora Mowatt Ritchie's
"Fashion" (1845); George Henry Boker 's "Fran-
cesca da Rimini" (1855); Dion Boucicault's "The
Octoroon, or Life in Louisiana" (1859); Joseph Jef-
ferson's "Rip Van Winkle" (1865); Steele Mac-
Kaye's "Hazel Kirke" (1880); Bronson Howard's
"Shenandoah" (1889); James A. Heme's "Margaret
Fleming" (1890); William Gillette's "Secret Serv-
ice" (1896); David Belasco and John Luther Long's
"Madame Butterfly" (1900); Clyde Fitch's "The
Girl With the Green Eyes" (1902); Langdon Mitch-
ell's "The New York Idea" (1906); Augustus
Thomas' "The Witching Hour" (1907); William
Vaughn Moody's "The Faith Healer" (1909); Percy
MacKaye's "The Scarecrow" (1910); Edward Shel-
don's "The Boss" (1911); Rachel Crothers' "He
and She" (1911); Eugene O'Neill's "Beyond the
Horizon" (1920); Lula Vollmer's "Sun-Up" (1923);
Sidney Howard's "The Silver Cord" (1926); Philip
Barry's "Paris Bound" (1927); Maxwell Anderson's
"Winterset" (1935); William Wister Haines' "Com-
mand Decision" (1947); and Richard Rodgers,
Oscar Hammerstein II, and Joshua Logan's "South
Pacific" (1949).
2338. Hart, James D., and Clarence Gohdes, eds.
America's literature. New York, Dryden
Press, 1955. 958 p. 55_I4399 PS507.H24
An anthology designed for a first-year college
course in American literature. Some 250 selections
from the writings of 46 authors have been included.
Long introductions relating literature to general
culture have been provided for the four major edi-
torial sections of the volume; also, each author has
his own introduction.
2339. Howard, Leon, Louis B. Wright, and Carl
Bode, eds. American heritage; an anthology
and interpretive survey of our literature. Boston,
Heath, 1955, 2 v. 54-9510 PS507.H6
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 193
A college textbook which seeks to present the
"American heritage of ideas, emotions, and points
of view which are revealed in literature and which
reveal the nature of America today." There are
brief introductions to the nearly 200 authors from
whose writings selections have been made.
2340. Hubbell, Jay B., ed. American life in lit-
erature. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1949.
2v. 49"2372 PS507.H8 1949
Bibliography: v. 1, p. 955-967; repeated in v. 2,
p. 931-943.
A college textbook anthology in which the em-
phasis is on American literature as an expression of
American life and thought. Major writers are well
represented, and selections included from a fairly
large number of lesser figures; a total of about 140
authors being represented. In addition, about two
dozen British writers are included for passages re-
flecting their view of America. Extensive historical
interchapters and individual author biographies,
with special detail for major authors, are designed
to relate the work to American history and life in
more than its literary aspects. An abridged edition
prepared for a one-semester course appeared in one
volume under the same title; the most recent revision
was in 1951.
2341. Jones, Howard Mumford, Ernest E. Leisy,
and Richard M. Ludwig, eds. Major
American writers. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1952. 1930 p. 52-406 PS507.J6 1952
An anthology textbook designed for college in-
troductory courses in American literature. Major
authors of the 18th and 19th centuries are presented,
along with representative authors of the 17th and
20th centuries. Scholarly apparatus has been pro-
vided for the selections, but there are no period or
movement survey essays. On the theory that too
much is covered in most such anthologies and the
courses for which they are designed, the editors have
limited their selections, and only 42 authors are
represented.
2342. Kreymborg, Alfred, ed. An anthology of
American poetry; lyric America, 1630-1941.
I, New York, Tudor Pub. Co., 1941. xl, 675 p.
41-10 1 30 PS586.K7 [941
Originally published under title: Lyric America,
an Anthology of American Poetry (1630-1930).
The main interest in this work is its rcprcscnta-
, tion of nearly three hundred major and minor poets.
The anthology was designed as a companion volume,
.which could be used independently, tor the author's
I historical critical work: Our Singing Strength, an
[Outline of American Poetry (/620-/9J0) (New
York, Coward-McCann, 1929. 643 p.). Kreym-
borg (b. 1883) is a playwright, novelist, and an-
thologist; but his favorite medium is poetry, of
which he has been a prolific writer. His publica-
tions since Selected Poems, 19 12- 1944 (New York,
Dutton, 1945. 319 p.) include Man and Shadow,
an Allegory (New York, Dutton, 1946. 256 p.), a
long poem on modern man as seen through his
representatives on a visit to Central Park in New
York City, and No More War, and Other Poems
(New York, Bookman Associates, 1950. 127 p.).
Throughout his career Kreymborg has been active
in the cause of advancing "modern" American
poetry, serving the cause both as editor and as
anthologist.
2343. McDowell, Tremaine, ed. America in
literature. New York, Crofts, 1944. 540 p.
44-5256 PS509.U5M2
A college textbook anthology, "collected both for
individual readers and for students of composition,
of American literature, and of our national life," this
volume is not a survey of the development of Ameri-
can literature, but rather of the regions of America
and the ideas which have influenced American life,
as they have been presented by writers of varying
literary stature. It is particularly adaptable for use
as background reading for general courses in
American civilization.
2344. Matthiessen, Francis O., ed. The Oxford
book of American verse. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1950. lvi, 1132 p.
50-9826 PS583.O82
Bibliography: p. 1107-1115.
A purely literary anthology on historical princi-
ples, this work emphasizes the work of the more
important poets. Nothing is included for purely
historical reasons; also, many of the quite minor
poets are not represented, as they are in many an-
thologies (e. g., cf. Kreymborg supra). Other
readily available anthologies of American poetry
include A Comprehensive Anthology of American
Poetry (New York, Modern Library, 1944. 490 p.),
edited by Conrad Aiken (q. v.), and The New
Pocket Anthology of American Verse (Cleveland,
World Pub. Co., 1955. 670 p.), edited by Osc.ir
Williams (q. v.). The latter work is arranged
alphabetically and places an unusually heavy em-
phasis on modern poetry, so that it might almost be
regarded as a 20th-century poetry anthology. Wil
liams has done a number of other popular poetry
anthologies, such as A Little Treasury of American
Poetry (New York, Seribncr, 1948. xxxvi, 876 p.).
J94 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2345. Miller, Perry, and Thomas H. Johnson, eds.
The Puritans. New York, American Book
Co., 1938. 846 p. (American literature series;
H. H. Clark, general editor) 38-34986 PS530.M5
Bibliographies: p. 785-834.
An extensive anthology of colonial Puritan writ-
ings; the lengthy general introduction includes sec-
tions on "The Puritan Way of Life" and "The Puri-
tans as Literary Artists." A recent but shorter an-
thology of the period which Miller has edited is
The American Puritans, Their Prose and Poetry,
which appeared in an Anchor books paperback edi-
tion in 1956. Another good and current paperback
anthology in this field is Colonial American Writing
(New York, Rinehart, 1950. 581 p.), edited by
Roy H. Pearce. An older work in the field is Colo-
nial Prose and Poetry (New York, Crowell, 1901),
edited by William P. Trent and Benjamin W. Wells,
and published in three very small, compact volumes.
Another book of interest here is America Begins
(New York, Pantheon, 1950. 438 p.), edited by
Richard M. Dorson, who presents selections from
17th century writings depicting the Atlantic coastal
communities.
2346. Miller, Perry, ed. The Transcendentalists,
an anthology. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1950. xvii, 521 p.
50-7360 B905.M5
Bibliography: p. [503]-5io.
"This book exists primarily on the level of what
the Transcendentalists called the understand-
ing ... It aims to make available articles and
books that by now can be found only in a few special
libraries. I have endeavored to arrange the selec-
tions so that they tell the story of themselves . . .
this volume . . . [omits Emerson and Thoreau, since
their works] are readily accessible, at least in an-
thologies. . . . Considering both the spatial limits
and modern impatience, I have assumed the right
to throw out irrelevancies and arid passages. I
have tried to preserve only the hard core and the
basic themes. ... in order that this anthology
might represent the group as they actually figured
in history, I have limited the selection to what
appeared at the time as public record . . ." —
Introduction.
2347. Moses, Montrose J., ed. Representative
plays by American dramatists; edited, with
an introd. to each play, by Montrose J. Moses. New
York, Dutton, i9i8-[25] 3 v. illus.
18-5466 PS623.M7
Bibliographies: v. 1, p. [n]-i8; v. 2, p. 3-8;
v- 3> P- UH4-
Contents. — I. 1765-1819. The Prince of Par-
thia, by Thomas Godfrey, Jr. 1765. — Ponteach; or,
The savages of America, by Robert Rogers. 1766. —
The group; a farce, by Mrs. Mercy Warren. 1775. —
The Batde of Bunkers-Hill, by Hugh Henry
Brackenridge. 1776. — The fall of British tyranny;
or, American liberty, by John Leacock. 1776. — The
politician out-witted, by Samuel Low. 1789. — The
contrast, by Royall Tyler. 1790. — Andre, by Wil-
liam Dunlap. 1798. — The Indian princess; or, La
belle sauvage, by James Nelson Barker. 1808. — She
would be a soldier; or, The Plains of Chippewa, by
Mordecai Manuel Noah. 1819. — II. 1815-1858.
Fashionable follies, by Joseph Hutton. 1815. —
Brutus; or, The fall of Tarquin, by John Howard
Payne. 18 18. — Sertorius; or, The Roman patriot,
by David Paul Brown. 1830. — Tortesa, the usurer,
by Nathaniel Parker Willis. 1839. — The people's
lawyer, by Joseph Stevens Jones. 1839. — Jack Cade,
by Robert T. Conrad. 1841. — Fashion, by Mrs.
Anna Cora Mowatt. 1850. — Uncle Tom's cabin,
dramatized by George L. Aiken. 1852. — Self, by
Mrs. Sidney F. Bateman, 1856. — Horseshoe Rob- ,
inson, by Clifton W. Tayleure. 1858. — III. 1856-
191 1. Rip Van Winkle: a legend of the Catskills;
a comparative arrangement with the Kerr version,
by Charles Burke. 1850. — Francesca da Rimini, by
George Henry Boker. 1855. — Love in '76; an in- ,
cident of the revolution, by Oliver Bell Bunce. 1
1857. — Paul Kauvar; or, Anarchy, by Steele Mac- ;
kaye. 1887. — Shenandoah, by Bronson Howard.
1888. — In Mizzoura, by Augustus Thomas. 1893. —
The moth and the flame, by Clyde Fitch. 1898. — j
The New York idea, by Langdon Mitchell. 1906. —
The easiest way, by Eugene Walter. 1909. — The
return of Peter Grimm, by David Belasco. 191 1.
2348. Moses, Montrose J., ed. Representative
American dramas, national and local; edited,
with introductions, by Montrose J. Moses, rev. and
brought up to date by Joseph Wood Krutch. Stu-
dent's ed. Boston, Little, Brown, 194 1. xvi, 1041 p.
41-26062 PS634.M6 1941
Contents. — 1894. A Texas steer, by Charles H.
Hoyte. — 1905. The girl of the golden West, by
David Belasco. — 1907. The witching hour, by
Augustus Thomas. — 1910. The city, by Clyde
Fitch. — 1910. The scarecrow, by Percy Mac-
Kaye. — 19 10. The piper, by Josephine Preston Pea-
body. — 191 1. Mrs. Bumpstead-Leigh, by Harry
James Smith. — 1914. It pays to advertise, by Roi
Cooper Megrue and Walter Hackett. — 1919. The
famous Mrs. Fair, by James Forbes. — 1920. The
Emperor Jones, by Eugene O'Neill. — 1921. Nice
people, by Rachel Crothers. — 1921. The detour, by
Owen Davis. — 1921. Dulcy, by George S. Kauf-
man and Marc Connelly. — 1923. The adding ma-
chine, by Elmer L. Rice. — 1925. The show-off, by
George Kelly. — 1925. Lucky Sam McCarver, by
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / I95
Sidney Howard. — 1927. The second man, by S. N.
Behrman. — 1928. Holiday, by Philip Barry. —
1930. The green pastures, by Marc Connelly. —
1935. Awake and sing, by Clifford Odets. — 1936.
The petrified forest, by Robert Emmet Sherwood. —
1937. The masque of kings, by Maxwell Ander-
son.— Bibliographies, General references (p. 1013-
1014).
2349. Pochmann, Henry A., and Gay Wilson Allen,
eds. Masters of American literature. New
York, Macmillan, 1949. 2 v. 49-6433 PS507.P6
A college textbook anthology which aims at pre-
senting major authors and their outstanding works,
as an introduction to American literature. The
work accordingly presents copious selections from
about 30 authors. Introductory essays, bibliog-
raphies, and footnotes are included to assist the
student.
2350. Poets of today. New York, Scribner, 1954 +
54-10439 PS614.P64
Contents. — f 1 ] Poems and translations, by Harry
Duncan. Samurai and serpent poems, by Murray
Noss. Another animal, poems by May Swenson. —
2. The hatch, poems, by Norma Farber. The irony
of joy, poems by Robert Pack. Good news of death
and other poems by Louis Simpson. — 3. The floating
world and other poems, by Lee Anderson. My
father's business and other poems, by Spenser
Brown. The green town: poems, by John Langland.
A series which, for purposes of publishing econ-
omies, incorporates in each volume the poems for a
first volume by each of several young poets. The
series is edited by John Hall Wheelock, who has
written discriminating introductory essays for the
volumes.
2351. Prize stories. The O. Henry awards.
1919+ Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday.
21-9372 PZ1.O11
Title varies: 1919-46, O. Henry Memorial Award
Prize Stories.
Stories for 1919-27 were "chosen by the Society
of Arts and Sciences."
Editors: 1919-32, B. C. Williams. — 1933-40,
Harry Hansen. — 1941— Herschel Brickell (with
Muriel Fuller, 19 -46).
An annual selection of leading American short
stories of the preceding year. The 1956 volume was
the 36th in the series. The series was interrupted
in 1952 and 1953 as a result of the editor's death.
Although this series and The Best American Short
Stories . . . annuals (q. v.) both attempt to pick
the best short stories published in American peri-
odicals, there is little duplication in the stories in-
cluded. Also, this series tends toward shorter
volumes, partly because it does not offer an annual
survey and bibliography of short stories. Both col-
lections, however, maintain high standards of merit.
2352. Richardson, Lyon, N., George H. Orians,
and Herbert R. Brown, eds. The heritage
of American literature. Boston, Ginn, 195 1. z v.
51-3922 PS507.R5
A college textbook which emphasizes major au-
thors but gives some attention to minor figures;
about one hundred and forty authors are repre-
sented. Sections, authors, and selections receive
introductions designed to prepare students for class-
room lectures; each author has a relatively extensive
bibliography supplied.
2353. Short, Raymond W., and Wilbur S. Scott,
eds. The main lines of American literature.
New York, Holt, 1954. 648 p.
54-6620 PS507.S49
This college textbook anthology provides section
and author introductions with some bibliographical
information. The selections are designed to supple-
ment full volume assignments of nine major authors
who are not represented in this work. Available re-
prints of works by these omitted authors are listed
in a pamphlet available to teachers from the pub-
lisher; the pamphlet also includes course syllabi.
2354. Tate, Allen, and John Peale Bishop, eds.
American harvest; twenty years of creative
writing in the United States. Garden City, N. Y.,
Garden City Pub. Co., 1943. 544 p.
45-216} PS536.T3 1943
An anthology of literary works (mainly short
stories and poems) produced in the United States
during the twenties and thirties.
2355. Thorp, Willard, Merle Curti, and Carlos
Baker, eds. American issues. Rev. and
enl. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1954-55 [v. 1, 1955]
2 v. 55-5334 PS507.T53
Contents. — v. 1. The social record. — v. 2. The
literary record.
A college textbook anthology (in reality two an-
thologies), this is obviously more than a literary
guide. The second volume, meant to be purely
literary in the material presented, includes work
from about seventy-five authors. The work of
major authors is emphasized, while that of minor
authors is included fur n presentation of a type of
writing. The first volume, on the other hand, is
designed to present the records of the issues at work
in American society during its history; nearly 200
authors (many of whom arc included in volume two
for other work) have selections presented in a man-
ner designed to augment the purely belletri tic ap-
I96 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
proach to American literature. The usual scholarly
apparatus is provided.
2356. Twentieth-century literature in America.
Chicago, Regnery, 1951-52. 6 v.
2357. Bogan, Louise. Achievement in American
poetry, 1900-1950. 1951. 157 p-
51-8384 PS221.B56
2358. Brodbeck, May, James Gray, and Walter
Metzger. American non-fiction, 1 900-1 950.
1952. 198 p. 52-12468 PS379.B7
2359. Downer, Alan S. Fifty years of American
drama, 1900-1950. 1951. 158 p.
51-13185 PS351.D6
2360. Hoffman, Frederick John. The modern
novel in America, 1900-1950. 1951. 216 p.
51-13723 PS379.H6
2361. O'Connor, William Van. An age of criti-
cism: 1900-1950. 1952. 182 p.
52-12476 PN99.U52O3
2362. West, Ray Benedict. The short story in
America, 1 900-1 950. 1952. 147 p.
52-3551 PS374.S5M4
2363. Untermeyer, Louis, ed. Modern American
poetry. Mid-century [i. e. 7th] ed. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. xxii, 709 p.
50-5229 PS611.U6 1950
A distinguished anthology of modern American
poetry; the first edition appeared in 1919. Since
then poets have been dropped and new ones added
with each succeeding edition. The work attempts
to represent the leading modern poets through a.
moderately large selection of their work; each poet's
work is introduced by a concise half-page to eight
pages of biographical information and critical dis-
cussion. Whitman and Dickinson (qq. v.) are in-
cluded as precursors, and the cited 1950 edition
includes recent work such as the poetry of Randall
Jarrell, Peter Viereck, and Robert Lowell (qq. v.).
The work has frequendy been published with Un-
termeyer's comparable anthology of modern British
poetry. The 1955 edition, Modern American &
Modern British Poetry (New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1955- 697 P-)» which was edited with the assistance
of Karl Shapiro and Richard Wilbur (qq. v.), is a
much shorter work, and stripped of the biographical
and critical introductions; however, it is still a good,
if more restricted, work, and of value for its repre-
sentation of very recent poets. With the many edi-
tions of this work, and with many other anthologies,
such as An Anthology oj the New England Poets
from Colonial Times to the Present Day (New York,
Random House, 1948. xx, 636 p.), Untermeyer
(b. 1885) has come to be one of the best-known of
American anthologists. His Early American Poets
(New York, Library Publishers, 1952. 334 p.)
covers American poetry to the point where his
Modern American Poetry begins, but lacks similar
individual introductions. Untermeyer also has a
literary reputation in other fields, most notably in
poetry. His Selected Poems and Parodies was pub-
lished in 1935.
2364. Uppsala. Universitet. Amerikanska Semi-
naries Essays and studies on American
language and literature. Upsala, Lundequistska
Bokhandeln; Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1945 +
"The present series of Essays and Studies will be
devoted to American philology in the wider sense.
Occasionally, other subjects connected with Ameri-
can Humanities will be included. The series is
intended to treat specialized as well as more com-
prehensive problems." — Publisher's statement on
cover of number five.
Most of the volumes in the series to date have been
published in both Sweden and the United States.
In addition to the titles cited in full below, other
works which have appeared in the series, or are said
to be in preparation, include: R. C. Barton's The
Change in Race Consciousness in American Negro
Literature after 1930; F. Book's Romantic Elements
in Henry Thoreau; E. Ekwall's American and Brit-
ish Pronunciation; H. Elovson's The U. S. A. As
a Symbol of Liberty in Swedish Literature in the
Middle of the 19th Century; R. Englander's Edward
McDowell and Scandinavian Musical Tradition; G.
Friden's James Fenimore Cooper and Ossian; N. M.
Holmer's The Character of the lroquoian Languages
and Indian Place Names in North America;
S. Liljeblad's The Northern Shoshoni Indians; S. B.
Liljegren's The Quality and Function of Anti-
Intellectualism in American Romanticism and The
Subject-Matter of American Literary Realism; and
K. E. Lindblad's Noah Webster's Pronunciation and
Modern New England Speech, a Comparison.
2365. Ahnebrink, Lars. The beginnings of nat-
uralism in American fiction; a study of the
works of Hamlin Garland, Stephen Crane, and
Frank Norris, with special reference to some Euro-
pean influences, 1891-1903. 1950. 505 p. ([no.] 9)
50-8924 PS371.A2
Includes bibliographies.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 197
2366. Ekstrom, Kjell. George Washington Cable,
a study of his early life and work. 1950.
197 p. ([no.] 10) 51-6309 US1246.E4
Bibliography: p. [185]— 193.
2367. Liljegren, Sten B. The revolt against ro-
manticism in American literature as evi-
denced in the works of S. L. Clemens. 1945. 60 p.
([no.] 1) 47-24197 PS1342.R6L5
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 53-60).
2368. Lundblad, Jane. Nathaniel Hawthorne and
European literary tradition. 1947. 196 p.
([no.] 6) 48-3460 PS1886.L8
"Hawthorne and the Tradition of Gothic Ro-
mance" (p. [8i]-i49) issued also separately, with
slight variations, under title: Nathaniel Hawthorne
and the Tradition of Gothic Romance (no. 4 in this
series).
Bibliography: p. [i9i]-i96.
2369. Warfel, Harry R., and George Harrison
Orians, eds. American local-color stories.
New York, American Book Co., 1941. xxiv, 846 p.
41-17552 PZi.W23Am
A survey through short-story selections of the local
color literary movement that flourished in the United
States in the 19th century. This school placed pri-
mary emphasis on a local area, rather than on tell-
ing a story (although there usually was one),
analyzing a person or situation, or presenting a
thesis. The school relied heavily on dialect, land-
scape description, character types, etc. Most of the
stories in this anthology were written after 1870,
and the most recent in 1907. An attempt has been
made to represent the various sections of the coun-
try in the 63 stories by 38 authors.
2370. White, Elvvyn B., and Katharine S. White,
eds. A subtreasury of American humor.
New York, Coward-McCann, 1941. xxxii, 814 p.
41-52004 PN6161.W5223
This is a personal rather than a historical an-
thology of American humor. Within that limita-
tion, its large quantity offers much variety, although
mainly from modern authors. The work is avail-
able in a Modern Library reprint. Another such
selection, but which shows a greater tendency to
excise passages from longer works, is An Encyclo-
pedia of Modern American Humor (Garden City,
N. Y., Hanover House, Doubleday, 1954. 688 p.),
edited by Bennett Cerf. A highly personal an-
thology with a tendency to rather long selections is
H. Allen Smith's Desert Island Decameron (Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 406 p.).
A humor anthology intended to serve historical pur-
poses as well as general reading pleasures is Edwin
Seaver's Pageant of American Humor (Cleveland,
World Pub. Co., 1948. 607 p.), which was com-
piled by means of responses to a questionnaire sent
to several hundred writers. A collection that is
more one of "jokes" than of the more general, and
usually more literate, "humor" is Leewin B. Wil-
liams' Encyclopedia of Wit, Humor, and Wisdom
(Nashville, Tenn., Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1949.
576 p.), which is an extensive, double-columned
work arranged on a subject basis.
B. History and Criticism
2371. Aldridge, John W. After the lost genera-
tion; a critical study of the writers of two
wars. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. xv, 263 p.
51-10588 PS379.A5
The author attempts to trace the change that has
! occurred between the novelists produced in the at-
mosphere of the First World War and those who
developed in the shadow of World War II. In the
first third of the book he discusses those authors
I (Hemingway, Fitzgerald, and Dos Passos) whom
1 he considers to be "most illustrative of the artistic
preoccupations of their age and whose work has
had the most lasting influence on the young writers
of today." The rest of the book is devoted to a
study ot the novelists who appeared in the forties:
Vance Bourjaily, Norman Mailer, John Home
Burns, Irwin Shaw, Merle Miller, Gore Vidal, Paul
Bowles, Truman Capote, Frederick Bucchner, and
others.
2372. Aldridge, John W., ed. Critiques and essays
on modern fiction, 1920-1951, representing
the achievement of modern American anil Punish
critics. New York, Ronald Press, 1952. \x, 610 p.
52-6180 PN3355A8
"This book has been designed for use as a pri-
mary text in courses in the criticism of modern fie
tion, and as a collateral text in courses in the survey
of modern fiction. . . . the governing intention of
the book is that it should meet the needs ... of
serious students who arc interested in fiction 11- an
art rather than as a model, and who may be expected
I98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
to be concerned with the element which most clearly
distinguishes it as an art, its technique or form." —
Introduction.
A considerable portion of the book is either criti-
cism by Americans, or criticism about Americans.
Authors discussed at some length include Faulkner,
R. P. Warren, K. A. Porter, S. Crane, F. S. Fitz-
gerald, S. Anderson, T. Wolfe, T. Dreiser, J. T.
Farrell, E. Hemingway, and E. Welty. There is
added on p. 553-610 a sizable selective bibliography
of criticism of modern fiction.
2373. Aldridge, John W. In search of heresy;
American literature in an age of conformity.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 208 p.
56-8166 PS221.A64
A discussion of American literature (fiction) after
World War II. A heavy emphasis is laid on what
the author regards as the pernicious influence of the
universities — leading to conformity, camaraderie,
and a limited, bland production.
2374. Arms, George W. The fields were green:
a new view of Bryant, Whittier, Holmes,
Lowell, and Longfellow; with a selection of their
poems. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1953.
246 p. 53-6445 PS541.A8
Bibliography: p. 238-241.
Each poet is discussed in terms of his value for the
present-day reader. The selections included are
usually not the standard anthology poems.
2375. Babbitt, Irving. Rousseau and romanticism.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1919. xxiii,
426 p. 19-26569 PN603.B3
Bibliography: p. [399]~4i9-
Babbitt ( 1 865-1933) was one of the leaders of the
neo-humanist movement. While his work was
largely in comparative literature, his theories had
influence in general American literary criticism. In
this respect Rousseau and Romanticism was prob-
ably at once his most influential and his most im-
portant book. His other work includes Literature
and the American College; Essays in Defense of the
Humanities (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 262
p.); The New hao\oon; an Essay on the Confusion
of the Arts (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 258
p.); Democracy and Leadership (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1924. 349 p.); and On Being Creative, and
Other Essays (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932.
265 p.). Irving Babbitt, Man and Teacher (New
York, Putnam, 1941. 337 p.), edited by Frederick
Manchester and Odell Shepard, is a collection of
reminiscences about Babbitt by some 30 people who
knew him. Louis J. A. Mercier's The Challenge
of Humanism (New York, Oxford University Press,
1933. 288 p.) has much on the neo-humanist move-
ment in general, and on both Babbitt and Paul Elmer
More (q. v.) in particular. Of similar scope is
Folke Leander's Humanism and Naturalism; a
Comparative Study of Ernest Seilliere, Irving Babbitt
and Paul Elmer More (Goteborg, Elanders Bok-
tryckeri Aktiebolag, 1937. 227 p.). The Critique
of Humanism, a Symposium (New York, Brewer
& Warren, 1930. 359 p.), edited by C. Hardey Grat-
tan, is a collection of articles which demonstrate the
position of humanism and the influence on Ameri-
can critics of both Babbitt and More. A general
study is G. R. Elliott's Humanism and Imagination
(Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1938. 253 p.), the first section of which focuses on
Babbitt and More, and the second on Emerson, with
the two types of humanism shown in contrast.
2376. Beach, Joseph Warren. American fiction,
1920-1940. New York, Macmillan, 1941.
371 p. 41-6464 PS379.B38
Critical essays on John Dos Passos, Ernest Hem-
ingway, William Faulkner, Thomas Wolfe, Erskine
Caldwell, James T. Farrell, John P. Marquand, and
John Steinbeck.
Beach (b. 1880) is best known as a critic; in addi-
tion to material in periodicals and the work cited
above, he has published a study of Henry James
(q. v.) and The Twentieth Century Novel; Studies
in Technique (New York, Century, 1932. 569 p.),
which devotes much space to American fiction. He
is also known for his poetry; in this field his most
recent volume is Involuntary Witness (New York,
Macmillan, 1950. 97 p.). In 1930 he published
a novel, Glass Mountain (Philadelphia, Macrae
Smith Co. 330 p.) about American expatriates in
France. Forms of Modern Fiction (Minneapolis,
University of Minnesota Press, 1948. 305 p.),
edited by William Van O'Connor, is a collection of
essays in honor of Beach.
2377. Bretnor, Reginald, ed. Modern science
fiction, its meaning and its future [by] John
W. Campbell, Jr. [and others] New York, Coward-
McCann, 1953. 294 p. 52-1 1714 PN3383.S4B7
A group of essays on the causes, meanings, and
position of science fiction in the field of literature.
A history of this form, which has in recent years
undergone a phenomenal growth, may be found in
James O. Bailey's Pilgrims through Space and Time;
Trends and Patterns in Scientific and Utopian
Fiction (New York, Argus Books, 1947. 341 p.).
A book dealing with the audience for and the pro-
duction of science fiction is Sam Moskowitz' The
Immortal Storm; a History of Science Fiction Fan-
dom (Adanta, Atlanta Science Fiction Organization
Press, 1954. 269 p.).
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 199
2378. Brooks, Cleanth. Modern poetry and the
tradition. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1939. 253 p.
39-22007 PN 1 1 36.B75
Contents. — Metaphor and the tradition. — Wit
and high seriousness. — Metaphysical poetry and
propaganda art. — Symbolist poetry and the ivory
tower. — The modern poet and the tradition. — Frost,
MacLeish, and Auden. — The waste land: critique
of the myth. — Yeats: the poet as myth-maker. — A
note on the death of Elizabethan tragedy. — Notes
for a revised history of English poetry.
Brooks (b. 1906) has been one of the leaders in
the "New Criticism" movement. His work, pri-
marily in the field of poetry, is characterized by
careful textual explication and structural analysis.
In addition to his importance as a critic, he has had
considerable influence on the teaching of literature
through his college texts, such as Understanding
Poetry (1938), Understanding Fiction (1943), and
Modern Rhetoric (1949), works which he wrote in
collaboration with Robert Pcnn Warren, and Under-
standing Drama ( 1945, 1948), which he co-authored
with Robert B. Heilman.
2379. Brooks, Cleanth. The well wrought urn;
studies in the structure of poetry. New
York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1947. 270 p.
47-3M3 PR502.B7
Reissued in 1956 in the Harvest books paperback
series by Harcourt, Brace and Co.
2380. Brooks, Van Wyck. America's coming-of-
age. New York, B. W. Huebsch, 1915.
183 p. 15-27963 E168.B8835
Contents. — "Highbrow" and "lowbrow." — "Our
poets." — The precipitant. — Apotheosis of the "low-
brow."— The Sargasso sea.
Brooks (b. 1886) has been one of the most widely
read literary critics of the first half of the 20th
century, outside the formal schools. He has done
much work as a translator (from French) and as an
editor, but is best known for the many books he
has written, which include: Emerson a>id Others
(New York, Dutton, 1927. 250 p.), the first half
of which is on Emerson, the rest a series of essays
on R. Bourne, A. Bierce, H. Melville, U. Sinclair,
etc.; The Life of Emerson (New York, Dutton,
1932. 215 p.); Sketches in Criticism (New York,
Dutton, 1932. 306 p.); The Ordeal of Mar\ Twain
, (New and rev. cd. New York, Dutton, 1933.
325 p.); Three Essays on America (New York, Dut-
ton, 19^4. 216 p.), the essays being "America's
Coming ot Age," "Letters and Leadership," and
"The Literary Life in America"; Opinions of Oliver
Allston (New York, Dutton, 194 1. 309 p.), which
indirectly expresses Brook's views on criticism; .7
Chilmarl^ Miscellany (New York, Dutton, 1948.
315 p.), a selection from the author's other books;
Scenes and Portraits; Memories of Childhood and
Youth (New York, Dutton, 1954. 243 p.); and
John Sloan, a Painter's Life (New York, Dutton,
1955. 246 p.).
2381. Brooks, Van Wyck. Makers and finders;
a history of the writer in America, 1800-
1915. New York, Dutton, 1936-52 [v. 1, 1944]
5 v-
Contents. — v. 1. The world of Washington
Irving [1800-1840] (PS208.B7 44-7345). — v. 2.
The flowering of New England, 1 815-1865
(PS243.B7 1936 36-27376). — v. 3. The times of
Melville and Whitman [ca. 1847-1885] (PS201.B7
47-11390). — v. 4. New England: Indian summer,
1865-1915 (PS243.B72 1940 40-30493). — v. 5.
The confident years: 1885-1915 (PS214.B7 51-
I4833)-
The volumes in this series have been republished
in Everyman's library.
2382. Brooks, Van Wyck. The writer in America.
New York, Dutton, 1953. 203 p.
52-12957 PS31.B83
2383. Brown, Clarence A., comp. The achieve-
ment of American criticism; representative
selections from three hundred years of American
criticism. New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 724 p.
54-6962 PN99.U5B7
The selections, many in full, are assembled in
categories such as the origins of American critical
theory; neoclassicism, transition to romanticism;
and realism and arstheticism. An anthology which
attempts to present a cross section of the critical
ideas and methods of various prominent and repre-
sentative critics in the 20th century is Charles I.
Glicksberg's American Literary Criticism, 1900-
1950 (New York, Hendricks House, 1952. 574 p.).
Another book king "to make accessible the
contemporary achievement in criticism." both Amer-
ican and British, is Robert Wooster Stallman's an-
thology: Critiques and Essays in Criticism, 1920-
1948 (New York, Ronald Press, 1949. xxii. ^~\ p.).
2384. Brown, Herbert R. The sentimental novel
in America, 1789-1860. Durham. \. ("..
Duke University Press, 1940. 417 p. (Duke Uni-
versity publications) 4'-'sS PS377.B7
Issued aKo as thesis ( 'Ph. D.) Columbia Univer-
sity.
Bibliography: p. ,71-380.
A study of the popular novel in America up to
the Civil War. showing the role it played in A
ican life.
200 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2385. Brownell, William Crary. American prose
masters: Cooper — Hawthorne — Emerson —
Poe — Lowell — Henry James. New York, Scribner,
1909. 400 p. 9-28257 PS362.B7
W. C. Brownell (1851-1928) was, with Wood-
berry and Stedman (qq. v.), considered one of the
leading literary critics within the Genteel Tradition.
However, he has also been viewed as a precursor of
the New Humanism.
2386. Brownell, William Crary. William Crary
Brownell, an anthology of his writings to-
gether with biographical notes and impressions of
the later years, by Gertrude Hall Brownell. New
York, Scribner, 1933. 383 p.
33-30961 PS1145.B6A6 1933
2387. Burke, Kenneth. Counter-statement. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 268 p.
31-29768 PN511.B79
A group of statements of principles of literary
aesthetics which counter prevailing views.
Works such as The White Oxen, and Other Stor-
ies (New York, Boni, 1924. 298 p.), Towards a
Better Life (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1932.
219 p.), an experimental "novel," and Boo\ of
Moments; Poems, 1915-1954 (Los Altos, Calif.,
Hermes Publications, 1955. 96 p.) have given Ken-
neth Duva Burke (b. 1897) something of a reputa-
tion as an author of fiction and poetry. However, he
is probably best known for his work as a literary
critic. This has been heavily influenced by his inter-
est in the modern semantics movement, as have been
his probably less well known philosophical works
such as Permanence and Change, an Anatomy of
Purpose (New York, New Republic, 1935. 351 p.)
and Attitudes Toward History (New York, New
Republic, 1937. 2 v.).
2388. Burke, Kenneth. The philosophy of literary
form; studies in symbolic action. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1941.
455 P- 41-11084 PN511.B795
A collection of articles, all of which have been
previously published, except the first: "The Philoso-
phy of Literary Form" (p. 1-137). Cf. Foreword.
The problem of semantics is given considerable
attention in this volume.
2389. Burke, Kenneth. A grammar of motives.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1945. xxiii,
53° P- 45-10249 B945.B773G7
This book is important for literary criticism, but
its philosophical overtones and linguistic analyses
render it important in other fields as well. It is the
first volume of a trilogy on "motives" (vide infra).
2390. Burke, Kenneth. A rhetoric of motives.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xv, 340 p.
50-5208 B840.B8
This, the second volume of an as yet uncom-
pleted trilogy, analyzes literature and the human
situation in terms of general semantics. Volume
three is to have the title A Symbolic of Motives.
2391. Burke, William J., and Will D. Howe.
American authors and books, 1640-1940.
New York, Gramercy Pub. Co., 1943. 858 p.
43-1255 Z1224.B87 1943
"Facts about the writing, illustrating, editing,
publishing, reviewing, collecting, selling, and pres-
ervation of American books . . . The material has
been arranged in dictionary form, with cross-refer-
ence to related subjects. Bibliographical references
for further study are given throughout the hand-
book."— Preface.
2392. Cady, Edwin H. The gendeman in Amer-
ica; a literary study in American culture.
Syracuse, N. Y., Syracuse University Press, 1949.
232 p. 49-10671 BJ1601.C2
"What is attempted here is a study of the fate in
America of the cluster of concepts, values, attitudes,
and cultural forms implied by the word 'gentleman'
as it is reflected in American literature. With that
goes the effort to show how accurate criticism of
certain interesting American authors depends upon
a full reading of books which cannot be understood
without a clear grasp of the gentlemanly configu-
ration. Finally, it is hoped that something is here
contributed toward a better understanding of the
working relations among ideas, culture, and litera-
ture in America." — Introduction.
2393. The Cambridge history of American litera-
ture, edited by William Peterfield Trent,
John Erskine, Stuart P. Sherman [and] Carl Van
Doren. New York, Macmillan, 1931. 4 v.
38-36456 PS88.C3 1 93 1
A pioneer comprehensive history of the subject.
Special features are: The inclusive scale, expanded to
cover subjects frequendy neglected; monographic
chapters contributed by scholars specializing in the
topic being presented; the extensive bibliographies
supplied (arranged by chapters, at the end of vol-
umes 1, 2, and 4); and the emphasis on a relation
between the life of the American people and their
literature.
2394. Canby, Henry Seidel. Definitions; essays in
contemporary criticism. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1922. 303 p.
22-16901 PS78.C3, 1st ser.
In his long career as English professor and editor,
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 201
Canby (b. 1878) has produced much literary criti-
cism with a wide popularity. Like Van Wyck
Brooks (q. v.), he flourished before the New
Criticism became dominant, and has remained out-
side that movement. His many works include
biographies of Whitman and Thoreau; a history of
the Brandywine in the Rivers of America series
(q. v.); and his autobiographical American Memoir
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 433 p.) the first
two parts of which, previously published inde-
pendently as "The Age of Confidence," deal with his
childhood in Wilmington, Delaware, while the third
part, "Alma Mater," is a commentary on college life.
2395. Canby, Henry Seidel. Definitions; essays
in contemporary criticism. (Second series)
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1924. 308 p.
24-22299 PS78.C3, 2d ser.
2396. Canby, Henry Seidel. American estimates.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 287 p.
29-7862 PN511.C34
An informal continuation of the "definitions"
series above.
2397. Canby, Henry Seidel. Classic Americans; a
study of eminent American writers from
Irving to Whitman, with an introductory survey
of the colonial background of our national literature.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 371 p.
31-25290 PS88.C35
"A selective bibliography": p. 353-360.
Contents. — The colonial background. — Wash-
ington Irving. — James Fenimore Cooper. — Ralph
Waldo Emerson. — Henry David Thoreau. — Haw-
thorne and Melville. — Edgar Allan Poe. — Walt
Whitman.
2398. Canby, Henry Seidel. Seven years' harvest;
notes on contemporary literature. New
York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1936. 310 p.
36-28731 PN771.C3
All but one of these essays were published origi-
nally in the Saturday Review of Literature, a weekly
periodical which Canby edited from 1924 to 1936.
2399. Cargill, Oscar. Intellectual America; ideas
on the march. New York, Macmillan, 1941.
xxi, 777 p. 41-21084 PS88.C37
Critical survey that undertakes to trace the effect
of various European ideas on writers in America;
■ concentrates chiefly on the period in American litera-
ture between 1 890-1 940.
2400. Carpenter, Frederic Ives. American litera-
ture and the dream. New York, Philosophi-
cal Library, 1955. 220 p. 56-193 PS88.C38
"This book began as a series of essays in interpre-
tation of the major American authors. But in the
process of writing, an idea crystallized: American
literature has differed from English because of the
constant and omnipresent influence of the American
dream upon it. But this influence has usually been
indirect and unconscious, because the dream has re-
mained vague and undefined. . . . But the vague
idea has influenced the plotting of our fiction and
the imagining of our poetry. Almost by inad-
vertence our literature has accomplished a symbolic
and experimental projection of it." — Introduction.
2401. Clark, Harry Hayden, ed. Transitions in
American literary history; edited ... for
the American Literature Group of the Modern
Language Association. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni-
versity Press, 1953 [i. e. 1954] 479 p.
53-8269 PS88.C6
Contents. — Introduction, by Harry Hayden
Clark. — The decline of Puritanism, by Clarence H.
Faust. — The late eighteenth century: an age of con-
tradictions, by Leon Howard. — The decline of neo-
classicism, 1801-1848, by M. F. Heiser. — The rise of
romanticism, 1805-1855, by G. H. Orians. — The
rise of Transcendentalism, 1815-1860, by Alex-
ander Kern. — The decline of romantic idealism,
1855—1871, by Floyd Stovall. — The rise of realism.
1871-1891, by Robert Falk.
2402. Coan, Otis W., and Richard G. Lilian!.
America in fiction, an annotated list of novels
that interpret aspects of life in the United States.
4th ed. Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1956.
200 p. 56-7269 Z1361.C6C6 1956
Includes best sellers as well as standard works.
It is useful for its subject approach to aspects of
American life as treated in novels. The emphasis
is largely on realism rather than on literary merit.
2403. Coffman, Stanley K. Imagism, a chapter for
the history of modern poetry. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press, 195 r . xi, 2^ \\
51-9592 PS310.I5C6
Following a chronology of the fmagist movement
in England and the United States, the book sketches
the contributions of various important figures in the
movement and also provides material on the sources
of modern poetic forms.
2404. Conner. Frederick W. Cosmic optimism;
a study of the interpretation ot evolution by
American poets Erom Emerson to Robinson.
Gainesville, University ol Florida Press, i .; . xiv,
45S p. 49-9861 PS310J
Bibliography: p. 4 53 442.
202 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2405. Cowie, Alexander. The rise of the Ameri-
can novel. New York, American Book Co.,
1951. xii, 877 p. (American literature series)
51-2714 PS371.C73 1951
Bibliography: p. 861-862.
Critical history of the novel from the beginning
through the work of Henry James, with a final chap-
ter on "new directions," 1 890-1940.
2406. Cowley, Malcolm, ed. After the genteel tra-
dition; American writers since 1910. New
York, Norton, 1937. 270 p.
37-27387 PS221.C645
Contents. — Foreword: The revolt against gen-
tility.— Theodore Dreiser, by John Chamberlain. —
Upton Sinclair, by Robert Cantwell. — Willa Gather,
by Lionel Trilling. — Van Wyck Brooks, by Bernard
Smith. — Carl Sandburg, by Newton Arvin. — Sher-
wood Anderson, by R. M. Lovett. — H. L. Mencken,
by Louis Kronenberger. — Sinclair Lewis, by Robert
Cantwell. — Eugene O'Neill, by Lionel Trilling. —
The James Branch Cabell period, by P. M. Jack. —
Two poets: Jeffers and Millay, by Hildegarde Flan-
ner. — Dos Passos: poet against the world, by Mal-
colm Cowley. — Homage to Hemingway, by J. P.
Bishop. — Thomas Wolfe, by Hamilton Basso. —
Postscript: Twenty years of American literature. —
A literary calendar: 1911-1930. — Biographies in
brief. — Index of names.
Cowley (b. 1898) is in his own right a creative
writer, but he is best known as a critic closely asso-
ciated with the expatriate writers of the "lost genera-
tion." He has also done considerable work as an
editor, including the volumes of writings by Faulk-
ner, Hawthorne, and Hemingway in the Viking
portable library series and The Complete Poetry and
Prose of Walt Whitman for the American classics
2407. Cowley, Malcolm, ed. Books that changed
our minds; edited by Malcolm Cowley &
Bernard Smith. New York, Doubleday, Doran,
1939. 285 p. 39-29439 Z1003.C87
Contents. — A foreword on the books that
changed our minds. — Freud and "The interpreta-
tion of dreams," by George Soule. — "The education
of Henry Adams," by Louis Kronenberger. — Tur-
ner's "The frontier in American history," by C. A.
Beard. — Sumner's "Folkways," by John Chamber-
lain.— Veblen and "Business enterprise," by R. G.
Tugwell. — Dewey and his "Studies in logical the-
ory," by C. E. Ayres. — Boas and "The mind of primi-
tive man," by Paul Radin. — Beard's "Economic
interpretation of the Constitution," by Max
Lerner. — Richard's "The principles of literary criti-
cism," by David Daiches. — Parrington's "Main cur-
rents in American thought," by Bernard Smith. —
Lenin's "The state and revolution," by Max
Lerner. — Spengler's "The decline of the West," by
Lewis Mumford. — An afterword on the modern
mind.
2408. Cowley, Malcolm. Exile's return; a literary
odyssey of the 1920's. New York, Viking
Press, 1 95 1. 322 p. 51-4022 PS221.C65 1951
A revised and enlarged version of a book that
first appeared in 1934. The book deals with mem-
bers of the "lost generation," particularly the ex-
patriate authors.
2409. Cowley, Malcolm. The literary situation.
New York, Viking Press, 1954. 259 p.
54-7984 PS221.C67
A discussion of the present-day situation of au-
thors in America, and of the "new" fiction.
2410. Crane, Ronald S., ed. Critics and criticism,
ancient and modern, by R. S. Crane [and
others] Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952.
647 p. 52-7330 PN81.C8
A collection of essays on critics which expresses
the neo-Aristotelian views of the "Chicago school"
of criticism.
2411. Criticism in America, its functions and
status; essays by Irving Babbitt, Van Wyck
Brooks, W. C. Brownell, Ernest Boyd, T. S. Eliot,
H. L. Mencken, Stuart P. Sherman, J. E. Spingarn,
and George E. Woodberry. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1924. 330 p. 24-3993 PS78.C7
"The first essay dates from 1910, the last from
1923, and virtually every critical point of view is
given a hearing." — Prefatory note.
2412. Denny, Margaret, and William H. Gilman,
eds. The American writer and the European
tradition. Minneapolis, Published for the University
of Rochester by the University of Minnesota Press,
1950. 192 p. 50-13091 PS157.D4
Contents. — The Renaissance tradition in Amer-
ica, by Louis B. Wright. — The Enlightenment and
the American dream, by Theodore Hornberger. —
Benjamin Franklin, promoter of useful knowledge,
by Robert E. Spiller. — Cosmopolitanism in Ameri-
can literature before 1880, by Stanley T. Williams. —
Origins of a native American literary tradition, by
Henry Nash Smith. — Americanization of the Euro-
pean heritage, by Leon Howard. — American writers
as critics of nineteenth-century society, by Willard
Thorp. — The reception of some nineteenth-century
American authors in Europe, by Clarence Gohdes. —
American naturalism; reflections from another era,
by Alfred Kazin. — Contemporary American litera-
ture in its relation to ideas, by Lionel Trilling. —
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM
/ 203
The American poet in relation to science, by Nor-
man Holmes Pearson. — Some European views of
contemporary American literature, by Harry Levin.
2413. Deutsch, Babette. This modern poetry.
New York, Norton, 1935. 284 p.
35-18099 PR601.D4
Babette Deutsch (b. 1895) has done much critical
work on modern poetry, with articles appearing in
a number of periodicals, and is the author of Walt
Whitman, Builder for America (New York, Mess-
ner, 1941. 278 p.). In addition she has distin-
guished herself as a poet with volumes such as
Banners (New York, Doran, 191 9. 104 p.), Honey
Out of the Rock^ (New York, Appleton, 1925.
129 p.), Fire for the Night (New York, Cape &
Smith, 1930. 77 p.), Epistle to Prometheus (New
York, Cape & Smith, 1931. 95 p.), One Part Love
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1939. 86 p.),
Ta\c Them, Stranger (New York, Holt, 1944. 72
p.), and Animal, Vegetable, Mineral (New York,
Dutton, 1954. 59 p.). Another aspect of her work
in poetry is the large number of translations she has
made from foreign poetry, principally from German
and Russian and usually in collaboration with her
husband, Avrahm Yarmolinsky. She has also pub-
lished four novels: A Brittle Heaven (New York,
Greenberg, 1926. 326 p.), which pictures a young
woman's life in America, and in the character of
Mark Gideon presents a view of Randolph Bourne
(q. v.); In Such a Night (New York, Day, 1927.
260 p.), which depicts the guests at a housewarm-
ing party; Mas\ of Silenus, a Novel about Socrates
(New York, Simon & Schuster, 1933. 249 p.); and
Rogue's Legacy, a Novel about Francois Villon
(New York, Coward-McCann, 1942. 392 p.).
2414. Deutsch, Babette. Poetry in our time. New
York, Holt, 1952. 411 p.
52-6624 PR601.D43
A discussion of modern American and British
poetry.
2415. De Voto, Bernard A. Forays and rebuttals.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1936. 403 p.
36-28727 PS3507.E867F6 1936
A collection of magazine articles, some of which
are literary criticism, but many of which reveal Dc
Voto's more general journalistic activities. Similar
in nature are Minority Report (Boston, Little,
Brown, 1940. 346 p.) and The F.asy Chair (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1955. 356 p.).
De Voto (1897-1956) is probably best known
for his historical works (discussed elsewhere in this
bibliography), but his widest audience was for his
articles in periodicals, principally Harper's Maga-
zine and, earlier. The Saturday Review of Litera-
ture. His first prominent literary role was that of
a novelist, starring with The Crooked Mile (New
York, Minton, Balch, 1924. 432 p.), which pic-
tures life in a small western city. His next novel
was The Chariot of Fire, an American Novel (New
York, Macmillan, 1926. 356 p.), which presents
a view of frenzied religion in a pioneering frontier
community. His other novels include The House
of Sun-Goes-Down (New York, Macmillan, 1928.
408 p.), which has for setting the opening of the
West, but without the usual melodramatics and
staging of "westerns"; We Accept With Pleasure
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1934. 471 p.), which is
about a group of Bostonian intellectuals in the post
World War I period; and Mountain Time (Boston,
Little, Brown, 1947. 357 p.), a psychological novel
about a New York surgeon and an author's wife
who find happiness and escape from neuroses in a
city in the mountain west. In addition De Voto
wrote mystery and espionage novels under the pseu-
donym of John August. The Hour (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 84 p.) discusses, with a
touch of humor, alcoholic beverages and the Ameri-
can tradition.
2416. De Voto, Bernard A. Mark Twain's Amer-
ica. Boston, Little, Brown, 1932. 353 p.
32-26989 PS1331.D4
Bibliography: p. [3231-334; "Newspaper humor
of the Southwestern frontier": p. [335]— 339.
A study of the contribution of frontier America
to Mark Twain's writings. The work is by impli-
cation a discussion of a major series of factors in
American literature. More specifically concerned
with Mark Twain as creative artist is Mm { Twain
at Wor\ (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1942. 144 p.).
2417. De Voto, Bernard A. The literary fallacy.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1944. 175 p.
44-3169 PS221.D4
A discussion of an aspect of the literature of the
"lost generation" and the twenties; in particular, it
is an attack on some of the criticism of Van Wyck
Brooks (q. v.) and its influence on some of the lead-
ing writers of the period.
2418. De Voto, Bernard A. The world of fiction.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950. 299 p.
50-6694 PN3331.n1
A book on the production of fiction and the rela-
tionship between works of fiction and the reader.
2419. Duffey, Bernard I. The Chicago renais-
sance in American letters; a critical history.
[East Lansing] Michigan State College Press, 1954.
285 p. 54-11828 PS285.C47D8
204 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Deals principally with such authors as Henry
Fuller, Hamlin Garland, Joseph Kirkland, Robert
Herrick, Edgar Lee Masters, Sherwood Anderson,
Carl Sandburg, and Vachel Lindsay. "By an in-
evitable if inexact usage, the continuous wave of lit-
erary activity in Chicago, beginning in the last
decade of the nineteenth century and continuing
through the first two decades of the twentieth, has
come to be known as the Chicago renaissance. It
was, of course, not a re-birth but the working out
within the city of creative forces common to the
nation at that time." — p. 6.
2420. Feidelson, Charles N. Symbolism and
American literature. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1953. 355 p. 53-6890 PS201.F4
Bibliography: p. 220-227.
Discusses the theory and use of symbolism in
American literature from the 17th centurv to the
end of the 19th; emphasizes the works of Haw-
thorne, Whitman, Melville, and Poe, whom the
author assesses as leading American symbolists.
2421. Fishman, Solomon. The disinherited of
art; writer and background. Berkeley, Uni-
versity of California Press, 1953. xii, 178 p. (Per-
spectives in criticism, 2) 53—5797 PN85.F5
Written in the form of a series of related essays,
the work is concerned with the ideas of American
critics about the influence on American literature of
the culture that produced it; considers major critical
movements and conflicts in the United States since
the time of the First World War; topics dealt with
include literary nationalism, Marxism, agrarianism,
and the "New Criticism." Wayne Shumaker's
Elements of Critical Theory (Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1952. 131 p.), the first volume
in the Perspectives in criticism series, is a more
general book dealing with the theory of criticism.
2422. Foerster, Norman. Nature in American lit-
erature; studies in the modern view of na-
ture. New York, Macmillan, 1923. 324 p.
23-5206 PS163.F6
A study of the observations of nature reflected in
the work of writers during the 19th and early 20th
centuries. It includes material on Bryant, Whittier,
Emerson, Thoreau, Lowell, Whitman, Lanier, Muir,
and Burroughs.
Foerster (b. 1887) is one of the leading neo-
humanists. He has done much original and edi-
torial work in the fields of literature and education
in the humanities.
2423. Foerster, Norman. American criticism; a
study in literary theory from Poe to the
present. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. xvi,
273 p. 28-13812 PS62.F6
Contents. — Poe. — Emerson. — Lowell. — Whit-
man.— The twentieth century: conclusion.
2424. Foerster, Norman, ed. The reinterpreta-
tion of American literature; some contribu-
tions toward the understanding of its historical
development, edited . . . for the American Litera-
ture Group of the Modern Language Association.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1928. 271 p.
28-25395 PS88.F6
Contents. — A call for a literary historian, by Fred
Lewis Pattee. — Factors in American literary his-
tory, by Norman Foerster. — The frontier, by Jay
B. Hubbell. — The European background, by
Howard Mumford Jones. — The Puritan tradition,
by Kenneth B. Murdock. — The romantic move-
ment, by Paul Kaufman. — The development of
realism, by Vernon Louis Parrington. — American
history and American literary history, by A. M.
Schlesinger. — American literary history and Amer-
ican literature, by Harry Hayden Clark. — Appendix
A. Select bibliography, by Gregory Paine (p. 217-
236). — Appendix B. List of dissertations and articles,
and of Americana in libraries, by Ernest E. Leisy
(p. 237-271).
2425. Foerster, Norman, ed. Humanism and
America; essays on the outlook of modern
civilisation. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1930.
xvii, 294 p. 30-6560 B821.F6
"A list of books": p. 291-294.
Contents. — Preface, by Norman Foerster. — The
pretensions of science, by Louis Trenchard More. —
Humanism: an essay at definition, by Irving Bab-
bitt.— The humility of common sense, by Paul Elmer
More. — The pride of modernity, by G. R. Elliott. —
Religion without humanism, by T. S. Eliot. — The
plight of our arts, by Frank Jewett Mather, Jr. —
The dilemma of modern tragedy, by Alan Reynolds
Thompson. — An American tragedy, by Robert Sha-
fer. — Pandora's box in American fiction, by Harry
Hayden Clark. — Dionysus in dismay, by Stanley P.
Chase. — Our critical spokesmen, by Gorham B.
Munson. — Behaviour and continuity, by Bernard
Bandler II. — The well of discipline, by Sherlock B.
Gass. — Courage and education, by Richard Lindley
Brown.
2426. Frankenberg, Lloyd. Pleasure dome: on
reading modern poetry. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1949. 372 p. 49-50103 PS324.F7
The author's purpose is "to give clues to the rela-
tionships between sound and meaning in the poems
of living poets," with major attention to T. S. Eliot,
Marianne Moore, E. E. Cummings, and Wallace
LITERARY HISTORY ANTD CRITICISM / 205
Stevens to illustrate the variety of modern poetry,
and with short statements on Ezra Pound, W. C.
Williams, Ogden Nash, W. H. Auden, Robert Low-
ell, and Elizabeth Bishop.
2427. Frohock, Wilbur M. The novel of violence
in America, 1920-1950. Dallas, Southern
Methodist University, 1950. 216 p.
50-8028 PS379.F7
The thesis is that during the period under discus-
sion the stream of American fiction bifurcated into
two major streams, one carrying the theme of the
passing of time, and the other that of violence.
From this point of view the author discusses Dos
Passos, T. Wolfe, Farrell, Cain, Faulkner, Caldwell,
Steinbeck, and Hemingway.
2428. Geismar, Maxwell D. Writers in crisis; the
American novel between two wars. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1942. 299 p. [His The novel in
America] 42-15988 PS379.G4
Contents. — Ring Lardner. — Ernest Heming-
way.— John Dos Passos. — William Faulkner. —
Thomas Wolfe. — John Steinbeck.
This is the first volume of a series entitled The
novel in America.
2429. Geismar, Maxwell D. The last of the pro-
vincials; the American novel, 1915-1925.
H. L. Mencken, Sinclair Lewis, Willa Cather, Sher-
wood Anderson, F. Scott Fitzgerald. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 404 p. [His The novel
in America] 47-11777 PS379.G36
2430. Geismar, Maxwell D. Rebels and ancestors;
the American novel, 1890-1915: Frank Mor-
ris, Stephen Crane, Jack London, Ellen Glasgow
[and] Theodore Dreiser. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1953. 435 p. [His The novel in America]
53-5 73« PS379.G38
2431. Gelfant, Blanche H. The American city
novel. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1954. 289 p. 54-5936 PS374.C5G4
A study of the metropolis in 20th-century Ameri-
can fiction.
2432. Gohdes, Clarence L. F. American literature
in nineteenth-century England. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1944. 191 p.
A44-1777 PS201.G6
Using illustrations from the post-1832 period, the
author has written with the purpose of demonstrat-
ing that the English people displayed a wide interest
in American literature during the 19th century. The
author has also written The Periodicals of /Inierican
Transcendentalism (Durham, N. C, Duke Univer-
sity Press, 1931. 264 p.).
2433. Hart, James D. The Oxford companion to
American literature. 3d ed. [rev. and enl.]
New York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 890 p.
56-6557 PS21.H3 1956
A reference work in dictionary form. It con-
tains entries on all types of matters pertaining to the
written word in America. Entries may be found
for authors, titles, movements, magazines, awards,
groups, and individuals mentioned in literature,
etc.
2434. Hart, James D. The popular book; a his-
tory of America's literary taste. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1950. 351 p.
50-9417 Z1003.H328
"This study . . . examines the tastes that have
guided Americans in selecting their popular read-
ing over the past three centuries. Dealing with
taste in relation to social compulsions, this inquiry
is concerned with the connection between popular
books read for pleasure by adult Americans and the
times in which those books were read." — Postscript.
2435. Haycraft, Howard, ed. The art of the
mystery story; a collection of critical essays,
edited, and with a commentary, by Howard Hay-
craft. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1946. 545 p.
47-30017 PN3448.D4H28
"Putting crime on the shelf; for bibliophiles, bib-
liographers, and — readers": p. [45i]~507.
2436. Haycraft, Howard. Murder for pleasure;
the life and times of the detective story.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1941. 409 p.
41-16907 PN3448.D4H3
"Who's who in detection': p. 340-386.
"Some reading about the detective story": p. 279-
297. "A detective story bookshelf": p. 298-511.
A history of the detective story, starting with
Edgar Allan Poe. This form of popular fiction
originated and flourished in America, whence it
spread to many other parts of the world. A his-
tory in the form of a bibliography with commentary
is Queen's (Jtiorum; a History of the Detective-
Crime Short Story as Revealed by the 106 Most Im-
portant Booths Published in This Field since 1845
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. 132 p.) by "Ellexy
Queen," the pseudonym ol a pair of mystery writers
who have published much ol the highly popular
work in this field. An analysis of the form and
content basic to this type <>i fiction may be found
in Marie 1'. Rodell's Mystery Fiction: T/ic<>>:
Technique < New York, Hermitage House, 1952.
230 p.), which was written as a handbook for w riters
in this held.
206 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2437. Hazard, Lucy Lockvvood. The frontier in
American literature. New York, Crowell,
1927. xx, 308 p. 27-2200 PS169.F7H3
"General bibliography": p. 301-304; bibliography
at end of each chapter.
Based on F. J. Turner's thesis in The Significance
of the Frontier in American History (q. v.), this
work undertakes to trace the influence on American
literature as conceived in a very broad sense. The
first chapter is "The Puritan Frontier," and the last
is "The Coming Age of Spiritual Pioneering."
2438. Herron, Ima Honaker. The small town in
American literature. Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1939. 477 p.
39-11443 PS169.S5H4 1935
"Check-list for the town in early literature": p.
[433]— 434- "Selected bibliography": p. [439] -468.
2439. Hicks, Granville. The great tradition; an
interpretation of American literature since
the Civil War. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan,
1935. xv, 341 p. 36-27042 PS214.H5 1935
Bibliography: p. 331-336.
Marxian standards applied to 19th- and 20th-cen-
tury literature in America. The first edition (1933)
was later enlarged by a chapter on new proletarian
writers. Since then the author has modified his
extreme views. The work retains historical im-
portance, however, both because of its influence and
because it reflects the views of a once sizable trend
in literary study.
2440. Hoffman, Frederick J. The twenties; Amer-
ican writing in the postwar decade. New
York, Viking Press, 1955. 466 p.
55-7379 PS221.H58
Bibliography: p. 431-434.
Preoccupations, modes of thought, and attitudes
in the United States, viewed from the perspective
provided by American literature, roughly from
1918 to 1932, for the purpose of realizing the major
issues of the times. Hoffman is also the author of
Freudianism and the Literary Mind (Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1945. 346 p.),
which does not limit its scope to American authors,
but which does discuss a movement of major im-
portance for contemporary American literature.
2441. Horton, Rod W., and Herbert W. Edwards.
Backgrounds of American literary thought.
New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1952. 425 p.
(Appleton-Century handbooks of literature)
52-12730 PS88.H6
A book which discusses American literature in
terms of the milieu in which it was produced. The
authors attempt to show that "Idealism and Oppor-
tunity have constantly been the principal dynamics
of American civilization." Because of its condensed
nature, few authors are discussed in detail; the or-
ganization is in terms of movements, such as Puri-
tanism, Expansionism, Freudianism, Marxism, etc.
2442. Hubbell, Jay Broadus. The South in Amer-
ican literature, 1607-1900. Durham, N. C,
Duke University Press, 1954. xix, 987 p.
54-9434 PS261.M78
In scope and detail by far the most comprehensive
work on the subject, being based on nearly 20 years
of research. In his Foreword the author emphasizes
the following objectives of the work: It aims to
integrate the literature of the Southern states with
that of the rest of the Nation; discusses Southern
life as it is represented by writers from other sec-
tions; suggests the pattern of literary culture in
the South and the books read by Southerners; de-
votes proportionately more space to narrative and
exposition, particularly in connection with bio-
graphical information, than to criticism. A special i
feature is the critical bibliographical essay (p. 88 1-
974), which also includes bibliographical references
to facilitate the study of individual authors. A sym-
posium of 29 essays dealing with modern Southern
literature is Southern Renaissance: The Literature
of the Modern South (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1953. 450 p.), edited by Louis D. Rubin
and Robert D. Jacobs; most of the essays appeared
originally in The hlophins Review.
2443. Hyman, Stanley Edgar. The armed vision;
a study in the methods of modern literary
criticism. New York, Knopf, 1948. 417 p.
48-6970 PN94.H9
A study of modern critical methods as exemplified
by a selected group of literary critics. The sources
of the techniques are also studied, and possibilities
for an integrative system of the best aspects ex-
amined. Critics studied include Edmund Wilson,
Yvor Winters, T. S. Eliot, Van Wyck Brooks, Con-
stance Rourke, R. P. Blackmur, and Kenneth Burke.
2444. Johannsen, Albert. The House of Beadle
and Adams and its dime and nickel novels;
the story of a vanished literature. With a foreword
by John T. Mclntyre. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1950. 2 v. illus.
50-8158 Z1231.F4J68
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 328-338.
Contents. — v. 1. A history of the firm. Numeri-
cal lists of the various series of Beadle novels. —
v. 2. The authors and their novels. Appendix.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 207
2445. Jones, Howard Mumford. Ideas in Amer-
ica. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard University
Press, 1944. 304 p. A44-1981 PS121.J6
A study of the historical role of ideas in America,
particularly in the field of literature. Prof. Jones
(b. 1892) is a leading scholar in the field of Ameri-
can intellectual history and literature. He has writ-
ten and edited a number of books in these fields,
notably his America and French Culture, 1750-1848
(q. v.).
2446. Jones, Howard Mumford. The theory of
American literature. Ithaca, Cornell Uni-
versity Press, 1948. 208 p. (Cornell University.
Messenger lectures on the evolution of civilization,
1947) 48-11948 PS31.J6
A survey of historical and critical attitudes toward
American literature in the 19th and 20th centuries.
2447. Jones, Howard Mumford. Guide to Amer-
ican literature and its backgrounds since
1890. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953.
151 p. 53-9039 Z1225.J65
Part I comprises a list of monographic studies and
of critical journals, designed to enable the student
better to understand the social and economic back-
grounds of literature. Part II includes a classified
guide to works in American literature that are
thought to have contributed to shaping the Ameri-
can mind.
2448. Kazin, Alfred. On native grounds, an in-
terpretation of modern American prose liter-
ature. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942.
541 p. 42-24811 PS379.K3
Believing that "Our modern literature in America
is at bottom only the expression of our modern life
in America," the author seeks to establish that rela-
tionship historically in three periods: 1890-1917.
1918-1929, and 1930-1940. In 1956 a somewhat
abridged version with an appendix covering post-
1940 writing was published in the Doubleday
Anchor books series.
2449. Kazin, Alfred. The inmost leaf; a selection
of essays. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955.
273 p. 55-10810 PN511.K25
A group of 28 essays on literary figures and sub-
jects. While there is a wide range of European and
American topics, the emphasis is on the 19th century.
2450. Knight, Grant C. The critical period in
American literature. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1951. xi, 208 p.
51-13564 PS214.K6
Bibliography: p. 177-194.
2451. Knight, Grant C. The strenuous age in
American literature. Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press, 1954. xi, 270 p.
54-13124 PS221.K6
Bibliography: p. [23i]-253.
The first of the books described in the two fore-
going references covers 1890 to 1900; the second,
its sequel, continues the examination through the
years 1900-1910. The same approach is used in
each, by giving literature a position in the social
panorama and attempting to integrate literature with
the social history of the time, in order that glimpses
may be caught of other art forms, of politics, of
philosophy, and of science. Cf. Foreword of The
Strenuous Age, p. viii.
2452. Krieger, Murray. The new apologists for
poetry. Minneapolis, University of Minne-
sota Press, 1956. 225 p. 56-7811 PN1031.K7
A discussion of some of the new critics as they
throw light on some of the problems of poetry. The
three main sections of the book are "The Creative
Process," "The Aesthetic Object," and "The Func-
tion of Poetry."
2453. Krutch, Joseph Wood. Experience and art;
some aspects of the aesthetics of literature.
New York, Smith & Haas, 1932. 222 p.
32-32159 PN45.K7
Krutch (b. 1893) has become prominent as a
writer in a number of fields. His books on Ameri-
can literature include Edgar Allan Poe, a Study in
Genius (New York, Knopf, 1926. 244 p.) and
Henry David Thoreau (New York, Sioane, 1948.
298 p.). In a more philosophical vein arc The
Modern Temper; a Study and a Confession ( New
York, Flarcourt, Brace, 1929. 249 p.) and The
Measure of Man: On Freedom, Human Values, Sur-
vival, and the Modern Temper (Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill, 1954. 261 p.). Krutch has also dis-
tinguished himself in the field of nature writing:
The Best of Two Worlds (New York, Sioane, 1953.
171 p.) is an autobiographical work on his life as an
urbanite who can spend most of his time in the
country; The Desert Year (New York, Sioane,
270 p.) and The Voice of the Desert, a Naturalist's
Interpretation (New York, Sioane. i</5^. 223 p.)
both record his observations of life in the Sonoran
desert. In the same general field he has edited an
anthology, Great American Nature Writing |
York, Sioane, 1950. 444 p.).
2454. Kunitz, Stanley J., and Howard Haycraft,
eds. American authors, 1600-1900; a bio
graphical dictionary of Amcrie.iu literature . . ,
1300 biographies and 400 portraits. New York.
Wilson, 1938. 846 p. 38-07938 PS21.K8
208 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Each biographical sketch, which emphasizes the
individual's literary life, is followed by a brief bibli-
ography. The work is especially useful for informa-
tion about minor authors, although major authors
are also discussed.
2455. Kunitz, Stanley J., and Howard Haycraft,
eds. Twentieth century authors, a biograph-
ical dictionary of modern literature. With 1850
biographies and 1700 ports. New York, Wilson,
1942. 1577 p. (The Authors series)
43-51003 PN771.K86
"Supersedes . . . Living Authors ( 1931 ) and
Authors Today and Yesterday ( 1933)."
First supplement. Assistant ed.:
Vineta Colby. New York, Wilson, 1955. 1123 p.
ports. (The Authors series) PN771.K86S
These volumes are organized on the same princi-
ples as the above American Authors, i6oo-i<)oo.
However, in these the scope is international. Never-
theless, the emphasis is very heavily on American
authors, for the writers have been selected for in-
clusion on the basis of the influence or popularity
of their books in America.
2456. Lawrence, David Herbert. Studies in clas-
sic American literature. New York, Seltzer,
1923. 264 p. 23-12810 PS121.L3
Contents. — Foreword. — The spirit of place. —
Benjamin Franklin. — Hector St. John de Creve-
coeur. — Fenimore Cooper's white novels. — Fenimore
Cooper's Leatherstocking novels. — Edgar Allan
Poe. — Nathaniel Hawthorne and "The scarlet let-
ter."— Hawthorne's "Blithedale romance." — Dana's
"Two years before the mast." — Herman Melville's
"Typee" and "Omoo." — Flerman Melville's "Moby
Dick." — Whitman.
D. H. Lawrence (1885-1930) is best-known as
a British novelist. His temporary residence in
America led him to examine its "classical" litera-
ture in an attempt to reveal the American spirit.
His resultant book presented ideas which are highly
controversial and have been rejected in large part
by most critics of American culture. Nevertheless,
the book has been widely read and discussed, so
that it has taken a historically important position
in the criticism of this country's literature.
2457. Leary, Lewis G. Articles on American
literature, 1900-1950. Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1954. 437 p.
54-5025 Z1225.L49
A selective rather than an exhaustive bibliography,
this is composed primarily of references to articles
listed in "Articles on American Literature Appear-
ing in Current Periodicals" in American Literature
and "American Bibliography" in PMLA (qq. v.).
Also, separate bibliographies of authors have been
consulted when available. The main body of the 1
work is arranged alphabetically by names of authors,
followed by references to critical articles and re-
views; there is also a subject bibliography of writ-
ings on American literature under topics such as
"Diaries and Letters," "Literary History," and
"Regionalism." The book is an extension and revi-
sion of a similarly titled book which was published
in 1947 and covered the period 1920-1945.
2458. Leisy, Ernest E. The American historical
novel. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1950. 280 p. 50-5331 PS374.H5L4
An examination of historical fiction by and about
Americans. The arrangement is basically by sub-
ject. On p. 219-259 there is an appendix listing
additional historical novels not discussed in the text
of the book.
2459. Lewis, Richard W. B. The American
Adam; innocence, tragedy, and tradition in
the nineteenth century. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1955. 204 p. 55-5133 PS201.L4 j
"This book has to do with the beginnings and 1
the first tentative outlines of a native American
mythology. The period I cover runs from about
1820 to i860; the scene, for the most part, is New
England and the Atlantic seaboard. ... I am
interested ... in the history of ideas and, especially,
in the representative imagery and anecdote that
crystallized whole clusters of ideas; my interest is ,
therefore limited to articulate thinkers and con- .'•
scious artists. A century ago, the image contrived
to embody the most fruitful contemporary ideas
was that of the authentic American as a figure of
heroic innocence and vast potential — it is, poised
at the start of a new history. This image is the
title of the book." — Prologue.
2460. Literary history of the United States. Edi-
tors: Robert E. Spiller, Willard Thorp,
Thomas H. Johnson [and] Henry Seidel Canby;
associates: Howard Mumford Jones, Dixon Wecter
[and] Stanley Williams. New York, Macmillan,
1948. 3 V. 48-11370 PS88.L5
A comprehensive, standard history of American
literature from the colonial period to 1948. The
third volume is a collection of bibliographies, with
sections on "Literature and Culture," "Movements
and Influences," and "Individual Authors." The
role this work has played in limiting entries in the
Literature section of the bibliography is explained
in the introduction to that section (q. v.).
2461. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan,
1953. xxii, 1456 p.
53-13350 PS88.L5 1953
1 he text is much the same as in the earlier edition,
except that a "Postscript at Mid-Century" has been
added. On the other hand, in this edition the bib-
liography is gready abridged for the lay reader
rather than for the scholar.
2462. Long, Orie William. Literary pioneers;
early American explorers of European cul-
ture. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1935.
267 P: 35-18097 PS201.L6
This book studies specifically George Ticknor
(1791-1871), Edward Everett (1794-1865), Joseph
Green Cogswell (1 786-1 871), George Bancroft
(1800-1891), Henry Wadsworth Longfellow (1807-
1882), and John Lothrop Modey (1814-1877).
"The purpose of this volume is to record the many
interesting relationships which these internationally
minded men experienced in Europe, especially in
Germany, and to show the part which they played
afterwards in the advancement of American life.
The revelation is found principally in their jour-
nals and correspondence, which furnish many paral-
lels of impressions."
2463. Loshe, Lillie Deming. The early American
novel. New York, 1907. 131 p.
8-34695 PS375.L6 1907
Thesis (Ph. D.)— Columbia University, 1907.
Published also as Columbia University studies in
English, ser. 2, v. 2, no. 2.
The bibliography (p. 106-124) presents chrono-
logically American novels that appeared through
1830.
2464. Lynn, Kenneth S. The dream of success; a
study of the modern American imagination.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1955. 269 p.
a , A c u ■ r , 55_7459 PS379-L9
A study or the impact of the success myth on five
American novelists: Theodore Dreiser, Jack London,
David Graham Phillips, Frank Norris, and Robert
Herrick.
2465. Marble, Annie (Russell) Heralds of Ameri-
can literature; a group of patriot writers of
the revolutionary and national periods. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1907. 383 p.
7-39037 PS186.M3
Contents.— 1. Introductory: Signs of the dawn.
The impulse of Franklin.— 2. Francis Hopkinson.—
3. Philip Freneau: America's first poet.— 4. John
Trumbull: satirist and scholar.— 5. A group of Hart-
ford wits.— 6. Joseph Dennic: "the lay preacher."—
431240—60 15
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 200
7. William Dunlap: the beginnings of drama.— 8.
Charles Brockden Brown.— Bibliography (p. [319]-
353).— Index.
2466. Matthews, Brander. Aspects of fiction and
other ventures in criticism. 3d ed., enl.
New York, Scribner, 1902. 297 p.
2-21574 PN3335.M3 1902
Partial Contents.— American literature.— Two
studies of the South.— The penalty of humor.— On
pleasing the taste of the public— On certain parallel-
isms between the ancient drama and the modern.—
The importance of the folk-theatre.— Aspects of
fiction: The prose tales of M. Francois Coppee; . . .
Mr. Charles Dudley Warner as a writer of fiction.
In the late 19th and early 20th centuries James
Brander Matthews (1852-1929) was not only a pro-
fessor of drama at Columbia University, but one
of the foremost students and critics of the subject,
His outstanding study, Moliere (1910), exemplifies
his international interests. His interest in linguistics
is revealed in works such as Americanisms and
Briticisms (New York, Harper, 1892. 190 p.),
Parts of Speech; Essays on English (New York,
Scribner, 1901. 350 p.), and Essays on English
New York, Scribner, 1921. 284 p.). In his own
lifetime he had a measure of fame as a short-story
writer and as a novelist, but now receives attention
as an author of fiction only for his depiction of New
York life in sketches such as Vistas of New Yor\
(New York, Harper, 19 12. 242 p.) and Vignettes
of Manhattan: Outlines in Local Color (New York,
Scribner, 192 1. 376 p.). He is remembered mainly
for his work in the field of the drama.
2467. Matthews, Brander. Recreations of an an-
thologist. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1904.
228 P- 4-22261 PS2372.R4 1904
Contents.— By way of introduction.— A theme,
with variations.— Unwritten books.— Seed-corn for
stories. — American satires in verse. — American epi-
grams.—A note on the quatrain.— Carols of cook-
ery.—Recipes in rhyme.— The uncollected poems of
H. C. Bunner.— The strangest feat of modern magic.
2468. Matthews, Brander. Inquiries and opinions.
New York, Scribner, 1907. 305 p.
7-29534 PS2372.I5 1907
Partial Contents. — Literature in the new cen-
tury.— The supreme leaders. — An apology for tccb-
n>c- — Old friends with new faces. — Invention and
imagination.— Poe and the detective-story.— Mark
I wain. The modern novel and the modern play. —
The literary merit of our latter daj dr.im.i. — The art
of the stage-manager.
210 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2469. Matthews, Brander. The American of the
future, and other essays. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1909. 355 p. 9-26987 PS2372.A4 1909
Contents. — The American of the future. — Amer-
ican character. — The Americans and the British. —
"Blood is thicker than water." — The scream of the
spread-eagle. — American manners. — American hu-
mor.— The speech of the people. — English as a
world-language. — Simplified spelling and "fonetic
reform." — The question of the theater. — Persuasion
and controversy. — Reform and reformers. — "Those
literary fellows." — Standards of success.
2470. Matthews, Brander. A study of the drama.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 320 p.
illus. 10-7803 PN1661.M3
2471. Matthews, Brander. Gateways to literature,
and other essays. New York, Scribner, 1912.
296 p. 12-21990 PR99.M33
Contents. — Gateways to literature. — The eco-
nomic interpretation of literary history. — In behalf
of the general reader. — The duty of imitation. — The
Devil's advocate. — Literary criticism and book-
reviewing. — Familiar verse. — French poets and Eng-
lish readers. — A note on Anatole France. — Poe's cos-
mopolitan fame. — Fenimore Cooper. — Bronson
Howard.
2472. Matthews, Brander. A book about the
theater. New York, Scribner, 1916. 334 p.
illus. 16-21742 PN2037.M35
Contents. — The show business. — The limitations
of the stage. — A moral from a toy theater. — Why
five acts? — Dramatic collaboration. — The dramatiza-
tion of novels and the novelization of plays. —
Woman dramatists. — The evolution of scene-paint-
ing.— The book of the opera. — The poetry of the
dance. — The principles of pantomime. — The ideal
of the acrobat. — The decline and fall of the Negro-
minstrelsy. — The utility of the variety-show. — The
method of modern magic. — The lamentable tragedy
of Punch and Judy. — The puppet-play, past and
present. — Shadow-pantomime, with all the modern
improvements. — The problem of dramatic criticism.
2473. Matthews, Brander. These many years,
recollections of a New Yorker. New York,
Scribner, 1917. 463 p.
17-25853 PS2373.A45 1917
An autobiographical work that reveals much of
the literary world of the period, particularly drama.
It is also useful for its picture of the life of a cul-
tured, urban American.
2474. Matthews, Brander. The tocsin of revolt,
and other essays. New York, Scribner,
1922. 295 p. 22-18663 PS2372.T6 1922
Contents. — The tocsin of revolt. — The duty of
the intellectuals. — The dwelling of a day-dream. —
What is American literature? — The centenary of a
question. — American aphorisms. — A plea for the
platitude. — On the length of Cleopatra's nose. —
Concerning conversation. — The gende art of re-
partee.— Cosmopolitan cookery. — On working too
much and working too fast. — The modernity of
Moliere. — Theodore Roosevelt as a man of letters. —
Memories of Mark Twain.
2475. Matthews, Brander. Rip Van Winkle goes
to the play, and other essays on plays and
players. New York, Scribner, 1926. 256 p.
26-16526 PN1655.M25
Contents. — Rip Van Winkle goes to the play. —
Uncle Sam, exporter of plays. — What is a "well-
made" play? — The question of the soliloquy. — On
the right of an author to repeat himself. — Second-
hand situations. — Claptrap. — The scene is laid. —
The development of scenic devices. — Memories of
actresses. — The art of acting.
2476. Matthiessen, Francis O. American renais-
sance; art and expression in the age of Emer-
son and Whitman. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1941. xxiv, 678 p. 41-9633 PS201.M3
A philosophical interpretation of intellectual and
literary elements in the American tradition as exem-
plified by Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne, Melville,
Whitman, and their associates.
F. O. Matthiessen (1902-1950) early established
himself as one of the leading commentators on
American literature with such works as Sarah
Orne Jewett (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1929.
159 p.), The Achievement of T. S. Eliot; an Essay
on the Nature of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1935. 159 p.), Henry James, the Major Phase
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. 190
p.), The fames Family, Including Selections from
the Writings of Henry James, Senior, William,
Henry & Alice James (New York, Knopf, 1947.
706 p.), and Theodore Dreiser (New York, Sloane,
1951. 267 p.).
2477. Matthiessen, Francis O. The responsibilities
of the critic; essays and reviews. Selected
by John Rackliffe. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1952. xvi, 282 p. 52-12569 PS121.M3
A posthumous selection of fifty of his articles,
originally published in various periodicals. The
arrangement is more by subject (in broad categories
such as modern poetry and literary critics and his-
torians), rather than chronological.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 211
2478. Miller, Perry. The raven and the whale;
the war of words and wits in the era of Poe
and Melville. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1956.
370 p. 56-6659 PS74.M5
A presentation of the conflict between die na-
tionalists and the cosmopolitanites that centered in
New York's literary circles during the middle of
the 19th century.
2479. More, Paul Elmer. Shelburne essays. 1st
series. New York, Putnam, 1904. 253 p.
4-22974 PR99.M7, v. 1
"All but one of these essays were written for
magazines or for the daily press."
Partial Contents. — A hermit's notes on Tho-
reau. — The solitude of Nathaniel Hawthorne. — The
origins of Hawthorne and Poe. — The influence of
Emerson. — The science of English verse. — The re-
ligious ground of humanitarianism.
Paul Elmer More (1864-1937) was with Irving
Babbitt (q. v.) one of the leaders of the new hu-
manists. Between 1904 and 1921 he published
eleven series ot "Shelburne essays." These revealed
his international interests and his university studies
in the classics. Among the discussions of More is
Robert Shafer's Paul Elmer More and American
Criticism (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1935.
325P-)-
2480. More, Paul Elmer. A New England group
and others; Shelburne essays, nth series.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1921. 295 p.
21-5556 PR99.M7, v. 11
Contents. — The spirit and poetry of early New
England. — Jonathan Edwards. — Emerson. — Charles
Eliot Norton. — Henry Adams. — Evolution and the
other world. Samuel Buder of Erewhon. — Viscount
Morley. — Economic ideals. — Oxford, women, and
God. — Index to Shelburne essays.
2481. More. Paul Elmer. Selected Shelburne es-
says. New York, Oxford University Press, 1935.
xiii, 297 p. (The World's classics, 434)
35-20684 PR99.M75
"The material here reprinted is selected from the
eleven volumes of 'Shelburne essays' published be-
tween 1904-1921 . . . With the exception of the
study of Criticism the essays follow the chronologi-
cal order of publication, and, save for a few minor
corrections, the original text is reproduced ex-
actly."— Preface.
Contents. — Criticism. — Lafcadio Hearn. — Chris-
tina Rossetti. — The Greek anthology. — George Gis-
sing. — Thoreau's journal. — Chesterfield. — Sir
Thomas Browne. — Shelley. — Thomas Henry Hux-
ley.— Jonathan Edwards. — Viscount Morley. — Ox-
ford, women, and God.
2482. Mott, Frank Luther. Golden multitudes;
the story of best sellers in the United States.
New York, Macmillan, 1947. 357 p.
47-11742 Zio33.1>^N!6
Other works on best sellers include James David
Hart's The Popular Bool^; a History of America's
Literary Taste (New York, Oxford University Press,
^S0* 351 P-) and Alice Payne Hackett's Fifty
Years of Best Sellers, 1895- 1945 (New York, Bow-
ker, 1945. 140 p.), a bibliographical work which
was followed by a supplement: Seven Years of Best
Sellers, 1945-1951 (New York, Bowker, 1952, 23 p.).
A new edition of the Hackett work, with the title
Sixty Years of Best Sellers, is scheduled for publi-
cation in the second half of 1956.
2483. Murdock, Kenneth B. Literature & the-
ology in colonial New England. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1949. 235 p.
49-10048 PS195.R4M8
Murdock is a prominent scholar of American lit-
erature who has done most of his work in the field
of colonial New England studies. This is exempli-
fied by his biography Increase Mather, the Foremost
American Puritan (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1925. 472 p.). He has also done consider-
able editorial work, notably in compilations such as
Handkerchiefs from Paul, Being Pious and Con-
solatory Verses of Puritan Massachusetts . . . (Cain-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1927. lxxiii,
134 P-)-
2484. O'Connor, William Van. Sense and sensi-
bility in modern poetry. Chicago, Univer-
sity of Chicago Press, 1948. 278 p.
48-9231 PS324.O3 1948a
The chapters of the book are "The Dissociation
of Sensibility," "The Employment of Myths," "The
Break with Verism," "The Compromise with
Prose," "The Influence of the Metaphysicals," "The
Influence of the Pre-Modcrn Americans," "The
Imagistic Symbol," "The Quality of Irony," "Ten-
sion and the Structure of Poetry," "The Isolation of
the Poet," "Forms of Epigonism," "Tradition and
Regionalism," "Forms of Dchumanization," "Forms
of Obscurity," and "The Political Emphasis."
2485. Parrington, Vernon Louis. Main currents
in American thought; an interpretation of
American literature from the beginnings to
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927-30. 3 v.
27-8440 PS88.P3
Each volume has special t. p.
Bibliography at end of each volume.
Contents. — 1. The colonial mind, 1620-1800. —
2. The romantic revolution in America, r >
212 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
i860. — 3. The beginnings of critical realism in
America, 1860-1920; completed to 1900 only.
"I have undertaken to give some account of the
genesis and development in American letters of
certain germinal ideas that have come to be reckoned
traditionally American — how they came into being
here, how they were opposed, and what influence
they have exerted in determining the form and scope
of our characteristic ideals and institutions. In pur-
suing such a task, I have chosen to follow the broad
path of our political, economic, and social develop-
ment, rather than the narrower belletristic; and the
main divisions of the study have been fixed by
forces that are anterior to literary schools and move-
ments, creating the body of ideas from which literary
culture eventually springs." — Introduction, v. 1.
Parrington (1871-1929), in investigating the so-
cial, economic, and political backgrounds of Ameri-
can literature from the position of a Jeffersonian
liberal, produced a leading and seminal work in
American literary history. These volumes in-
fluenced a large scale re-evaluation by many literary
critics, and characterized an entire critical move-
ment. The first two volumes were awarded the
Pulitzer prize; the third volume was left incom-
plete at the author's death.
2486. Pattee, Fred Lewis. Sidelights on American
literature. New York, Century, 1922. 342 p.
22-17738 PS121.P3
Contents. — The age of O. Henry. — A critic in
C major [H. L. Mencken]. — The prophet of the last
frontier [Jack London]. — The epic of New Eng-
land.— On the terminal moraine of New England
Puritanism [Mary E. Wilkins Freeman]. — The
shadow of Longfellow. — The modernness of Philip
Freneau. — The centenary of Bryant's poetry. — Poe's
"Ulalume."
2487. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The development of
the American short story; an historical sur-
vey. New York, Harper, 1923. 388 p.
23-4306 PS374.S5P3 1923
A discussion of the history of the short story in
America. It is presented largely in terms of indi-
vidual authors. The development of the technique
of the short story is not discussed at any length.
2488. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The first century of
American literature, 1770- 1870. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1935. 613 p.
35-8357 PS88.P35
2489. Pattee, Fred Lewis. The feminine fifties.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. 339 p.
40-8776 PS211.P3
A combination literary and social study of the
decade of the 1850's.
2490. Pattee, Fred Lewis. Penn State Yankee . . .
autobiography. State College, Pennsylvania
State College, 1953. 384 p. illus.
53-63206 PS3531.A8Z5
Pattee (1863-1950) was a New Hampshire farm
boy who grew up to be the first regularly appointed
professor of American literature, in which capacity
he passed much of his life at Pennsylvania State
College. He was a literary historian, anthologist,
editor, and minor creative writer (of poetry and
fiction) in his own right. His extensive, if conserva-
tive, interest in "new" literature can be seen in books
such as A History of American Literature since i8yo
(New York, Century, 1915. 449 p.) and The New
American Literature, 1890-1930 (New York, Cen-
tury, 1930. 507 p.).
2491. Perry, Bliss. The American spirit in litera-
ture; a chronicle of great interpreters. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1918. 281 p. (The
chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, editor,
v. 34) 18-16732 PS88.P4
Perry (1 860-1 954) was a noted editor and educa-
tor. His autobiography, And Gladly Teach (in-
cluded in the Education section of this bibliography)
tells the story of his work in the field of American
literature. He has also written general studies such
as A Study of Prose Fiction (Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1920. 406 p.), which first appeared in 1902,
and A Study of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1920. 396 p.). He had written biographical
studies of figures such as Dana, Whitman, and
Whittier. He also published volumes of essays on
predominantly literary subjects, as in The Amateur
Spirit (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1904. 164 d.)
and Par\-Street Papers (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1908. 276 p.). His The American Mind (1912) is
included in the Intellectual History section.
2492. Perry, Bliss. The praise of folly, and other
papers. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1923.
230 p. 23-15166 PS2545.P4A16 1923
Contents. — The praise of folly. — The written
word. — Poetry and progress. — Dana's magical
chance. — John Burroughs. — The Colonel's qual-
ity.— Emerson's most famous speech. — Emerson's
savings bank. — James Russell Lowell. — Woodrow
Wilson as a man of letters. — Literary criticism in
American periodicals.
2493. Piercy, Josephine K. Studies in literary
types in seventeenth century America (1607-
1710) In two parts. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1939. 360 p. (Yale studies in English,
v. 91) 40-32466 PS186.P5
Contents. — pt. i. Literary types: "The times
opinionists." "The latest newes." The almanac.
The scientific essay. Personal essay. Personal
records. Dedications, prefaces, introductions. Sat-
ire and invective. Meditations. The sermon and
religious discourse. The beginnings of biography.
Cotton Mather. — pt. 2. Influences: Literary forms.
Seventeenth century prose style. The classical in-
heritance. "The times opinionists" answered. —
Appendix A: Almanacs (in chronological order).
Appendix B: S. Danforth, An astronomical descrip-
tion of the late comet (1665). Appendix C: Cotton
Mather, Of poetry and of style. Samuel Sewall, On
slavery. Thomas Thacher, A brief rule against
small pocks.
2494. Pritchard, John Paul. Criticism in Amer-
ica; an account of the development of criti-
cal techniques from the early period of the Republic
to the middle years of the twentieth century. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1956. 325 p.
56-5992 PN99.U5P69
I hrough a presentation of significant and repre-
sentative figures, this book gives an account of the
development of literary principles in the United
States. Pritchard's Return to the Fountains (Dur-
ham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1942. 271 p.)
discusses classical sources of influential American
criticism prior to the contemporary period.
2495. Quinn, Arthur H. American fiction; an
historical and critical survey. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1936. xxiii, 805 p.
36-30036 PS371.Q5
bibliography: p. 725-772.
A historical and critical study of both the novel
and the short story in America. Authors who
began to publish after 1920 are not included. Also
omitted are "juvenile fiction and . . . such interest-
ing social developments as the dime novel or the
detective story."
2496. Quinn, Arthur H., ed. The literature of
the American people, an historical and criti-
cal survey. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts,
195 1. 1172 p. 51-10789 PS88.Q5
Bibliography: p. [985]-! 107.
Contents. — The colonial and revolutionary
period, by Kenneth B. Murdock.— The establish-
ment of national literature, by Arthur H. Quinn. —
The late nineteenth century, by Clarence Gohdes —
The twentieth century, by George F. Whichcr.
A history of American literature composed of
monographic studies by scholars who are specialists
in the literature of various periods. The bibliog-
raphy has been made stricdy selective to provide
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 213
guidance of a positive character to standard works
without including references to fugitive and deriva-
tive writings.
2497. Quinn, Bernetta. The metamorphic tradi-
tion in modern poetry; essays on the work of
Ezra Pound, Wallace Stevens, William Carlos Wil-
liams, T. S. Eliot, Hart Crane, Randall Jarrell, and
William Butler Yeats. New Brunswick, N. J.,
Rutgers University Press, 1955. 263 p.
.. . , 55-9957 PS324-Q5
Aims to give a sense of direction in the study of
contemporary poetry by isolating the special theme
of metamorphosis, and also to facilitate understand-
ing the work of those believed to have made the
present century distinctive in poetry.
2498. Rahv, Philip. Image and idea; fourteen es-
says on literary themes. New York, New
Directions, 1949. 164 p. 49-8967 PN511.R27
Partial Contents. — Paleface and redskin.— The
cult of experience in American writing. — The dark
lady of Salem. — The heiress of all the ages. — Atti-
tudes toward Henry James. — Notes on the decline of
naturalism. — Sketches in criticism. Henry Miller.
Dr. Williams in his short stories. DeVoto and
Kulturbolschewismus.
Rahv (b. 1908) is probably best known as an
editor of Partisan Review, which post he assumed in
1934. He has also edited works of a number of
authors and has compiled the anthology Discovery
of Europe: the Story of American Experiences in
the Old World (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947.
743 p.), which in the form of extracts from diaries,
journals, novels, etc., presents, with commentary, an
account of the reactions of Americans visiting
Europe.
2499. Raiziss, Sona. The metaphysical passion;
seven modern American poets and the seven-
teenth-century tradition. Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press, 1952. 327 p.
52-9025 PS324.R3
An examination of modern American poetry in
terms of the criticism of the last few decades. The
seven poets analyzed are T. S. Eliot, J. C. Ransom,
A. Tate, R. P. Warren, A. MacLeish, E. Wylie, and
H. Crane (qq. v.). "In the present work a study
is proposed of the character of metaphysical expres-
sion and the nature of the conditions that stimulated
it, both in the seventeenth and the twentieth cen-
turies."— Introduction.
2500. Rosenbach, Ahr.1h.1m S. Early American
children's hooks, by A. S. W. Rosenbach,
with bibliographical descriptions of the books m his
214 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
private collection. Portland, Me., Southworth Press,
1933. lix, 354 p. illus.
33-33064 Z1037.A1R8 1933a
Arranged chronologically, 1 682-1 836, with author
and title and printers and publishers indexes.
This work is largely a collector's guide to an
unusually extensive collection of children's litera-
ture. However, the annotations and the lengthy
introduction make the book something of a history
of the subject. The volume will serve as an intro-
duction or a guide for those who wish to familiarize
themselves with this relatively obscure bypath of
American literature.
2501. Rourke, Constance M. American humor; a
study of the national character. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 193 1. 324 p.
31-7953 PS430.R6
A study treating of traditional types on which
American humor has focused, such as the Yankee,
the frontiersman, and the Negro. The work was
reissued in 1953 as part of the Doubleday Anchor
books series.
2502. Rusk, Ralph Leslie. The literature of the
middle western frontier. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1925. 2 v. (Columbia
University studies in English and comparative litera-
ture) 25-11215 PS273.R8
Published also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni-
versity, 1925.
Bibliographies: v. 2, p. 39-364.
A detailed study which stops arbitrarily at 1840.
Prof. Rusk later became a leading authority on, and
editor of Emerson.
2503. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Americans. New
York, Scribner, 1922. 336 p.
23-224 PS121.S5
Contents. — Mr. Mencken, the jeune fille and the
new spirit in letters. — Tradition. — Franklin and the
age of enlightenment. — The Emersonian libera-
tion.— Hawthorne: a Puritan critic of Puritanism. —
Walt Whitman. — Joaquin Miller: poetical conquis-
tador of the West. — A note on Carl Sandburg. —
Andrew Carnegie. — Roosevelt and the national psy-
chology.— Evolution in the Adams family. — An
imaginary conversation with Mr. P. E. More.
Sherman (1881-1926) was for some time (1907-
24) a professor of English at the University of
Illinois; in his last years he became editor of the
literary supplement of the New Yor^ Herald Trib-
une. He early came under the influence of Babbitt
and More (qq. v.) and the New Humanism, thus
reinforcing his conservative tendencies. This led
to his opposition to such commentators for the new
generation as Mencken (q. v.). However, towards
the end of his career, Sherman's writings took on a
somewhat more "liberal" tone. As a spokesman for
the highly conservative, he produced volumes such
as The Genius of America; Studies in Behalf of the
Younger Generation (New York, Scribner, 1923.
269 p.); The Main Stream (New York, Scribner,
1927. 239 p.), an attempt "to understand the entire
'conspiracy' of forces involved in the taste of his
day"; The Emotional Discovery of America, and
Other Essays (New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1932.
276 p.), a posthumous collection of previously pub-
lished articles; and On Contemporary Literature
(New York, P. Smith, 1931. 312 p.), which was
first published in 1917 from articles originally ap-
pearing in The Nation. Jacob Zeitlin and Homer
Woodbridge produced a two-volume study: Life
and Letters of Stuart P. Sherman (New York, Farrar
& Rinehart, 1929).
2504. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Points of view.
New York, Scribner, 1924. 363 p.
24-27630 PS121.S54
Contents. — Towards an American type. — Forty
and upwards. — Unprintable. — For the higher study
of American literature. — W. C. Brownell. — On fall-
ing in hate. — On falling in love. — American style. —
An apology for essayists of the press. — The signifi-
cance of Sinclair Lewis. — Where there are no
Rotarians. — Mr. Tarkington on the midland per-
sonality.— Oscar S. Straus. — Brander Matthews and
the Mohawks. — A note on Gertrude Stein. — Samuel
Butler: Diogenes of the Victorians. — The Disraelian
irony. — George Sand and Gustave Flaubert.
2505. Sherman, Stuart Pratt. Critical woodcuts.
New York, Scribner, 1926. 348 p.
26-8769 PN761.S5
"The essays in this volume were all printed in
'Books,' the literary supplement of the Herald
Tribune, in 1924 and 1925."
2506. Sievers, Wieder David. Freud on Broad-
way. New York, Hermitage House, 1955.
479 P. 55-7873 PS351.S5
Bibliography: p. 455-461.
The work is a historical review of various Ameri-
can dramas from the end of the 19th century to the
present; it was undertaken to discover the impact
of Freudian concepts on the work of playwrights
of the 20th century.
2507. Smith, Bernard. Forces in American criti-
cism; a study in the history of American
literary thought. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1939. 401 p. 39-27825 PS88.S55
An interesting book, "Marxist" in tendency. Its
thesis is that science is advancing while romanticism
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 215
and the old genteel forces are in retreat. Most of
the book presents social influences, but this becomes
intrusive only towards the end.
2508. Smith, Thelma M., and Ward L. Miner.
Transadantic migration; the contemporary
American novel in France. [Durham, N. C]
Duke University Press, 1955. 264 p.
55-6530 PS161.F7S6
Bibliography: p. 193-245.
Through focusing on the American novelists
Faulkner, Hemingway, Steinbeck, Dos Passos, and
Caldwell, the authors present a picture of the recep-
tion of American fiction in France. The extensive
bibliography lists books, articles, and reviews pro-
duced in France about American novels.
2509. Snell, George D. The shapers of American
fiction, 1798-1947. New York, Dutton,
1947. 316 p. 47-3071 PS371.S5
A study of leading American fiction writers from
J. F. Cooper and C. B. Brown to Hemingway, Far-
rell, Dos Passos, Dreiser, and their contemporaries.
2510. Spiller, Robert E. The cycle of American
literature; an essay in historical criticism.
New York, Macmillan, 1955. 318 p.
55-3833 PS88.S6
A brief, concise view of American literary cul-
ture, presented according to a theory of a cycle in
literature. "When applied to the story of Ameri-
can literature as a whole, the cyclic theory discloses
not only a single organic movement, but at least two
secondary cycles as well: the literary movement
which developed from the Eastern seaboard as a
center, and culminated with the great romantic writ-
ers of the mid-nineteenth century; and that which
grew out of the conquest of the continent and is
now rounding its full cycle in the twentieth cen-
tury."— Preface.
2511. Spingarn, Joel Elias. Creative criticism and
other essays. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
193 1. 221 p. 31-24167 PN81.S6
Contents. — pt. 1. Creative criticism: The new
criticism. Prose and verse. Dramatic criticism
and the theatre. Creative connoisseurship. — pt. 2.
Other essays: The younger generation: a new mani-
festo. The American critic. The American
scholar. The growth of a literary myth. — Appen-
dix: Non credo. Notes on the new humanism
(1913-14). A note on French scholarship. The
seven arts and the seven confusions.
This is a revision of a book first published in
1917. Spingarn (1875-1939) was one of the more
controversial critics of his generation. I lis other
literary writings include some poetry and .7 History
of Literary Criticism in the Renaissance (New York,
Published for the Columbia University Press by
Macmillan, 1899. 330 p.).
2512. Stauffer, Donald A., ed. The intent of the
critic, by Edmund Wilson, Norman Foerster,
John Crowe Ransom [and J W. H. Auden. Prince-
ton, Princeton University Press, 1941. 147 p.
[Princeton books in the humanities]
41-20238 PN81.S7
Contents. — Introduction: The intent of the critic,
by D. A. Stauffer. — The historical interpretation of
literature, by Edmund Wilson. — The esthetic judg-
ment and the ethical judgment, by Norman Foers-
ter.— Criticism as pure speculation, by J. C.
Ransom. — Criticism in a mass society, by W. H.
Auden.
2513. Stedman, Edmund Clarence. Poets of
America. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1885.
516 p. 18-13421 PS303.S7 1885
Co.vtlnts. — Early and recent conditions. —
Growth of the American school. — William Cullen
Bryant. — John Greenleaf Whittier. — Ralph Waldo
Emerson. — Henry Wadsworth Longfellow. — Edgar
Allan Poe. — Oliver Wendell Holmes. — James Rus-
sell Lowell. — Walt Whitman. — Bayard Taylor. —
The outlook. — Index.
Stedman (1833-190S) was one of the leading
representatives of the genteel tradition in literature.
His An American Anthology, iySy-iqoo (Cam-
bridge, Mass., Riverside Press, 1900. 2 v.) repre-
sents this taste in poetry; he gave much insight into
the theory of the genteel tradition in The Nature and
Elements of Poetry (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1892. 3^8 p.); while it is exemplified in his own
Poems (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 475 p.),
which went through many editions and stages dur-
ing his own lifetime and after. His Life and Let-
ters (New York, Moffat, Yard, 1910. 2 v.) was
produced by Laura Stedman and George M. Gould.
Other critics associated with Stedman were W. C.
Browncll and George Woodberry (qq. v.).
2514. Stovall, Floyd. American idealism. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1943.
235 p. 43-4567 PS169.I3S8
The author believes that the philosophy of democ-
racy and of America is basically idealistic, and in
this hook he traces the progress of idealism in this
country as it is revealed in its literature.
2515. Stovall, Floyd, ed. The development of
American literary criticism, by 1 l.irrv 1 1.
Clark [and others | Chapel I Iil!, ( Fniversit] 1 : \i rih
Carolina Press, 1955. 262 p.
55-1459 PN99.U5S75
2l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
bibliography: p. 247-253.
A series of articles which are arranged so as to
form something of a connected history and criticism
of American criticism, particularly its flowering in
the 20th century.
2516. Straumann, Heinrich. American literature
in the twentieth century. London, New
York, Hutchinson's University Library, 1951. 189
p. (Hutchinson's University Library: English
literature) 52-664 PS221.S8
"The aim of this book is to give an outline of
Twentieth-Century American Thought and Letters.
It is not meant to be a history of modern literature
in the usual sense of the word, and does not aim
at anything like completeness. . . . The book is
intended to be a study in attitudes. It attempts to
describe the basic conceptions of life underlying the
works of some of the outstanding writers of the cen-
tury, and the values they believe in. Above all, it
tries to establish the links between what novelists,
dramatists, and poets, have expressed, and the views
of some essayists and especially of the leading philos-
ophers who, in fact, provide the natural framework
of the whole." — Introduction.
2517. Taylor, Walter Fuller. The economic novel
in America. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1942. 378 p.
42-36211 PS374.S7T35
Contents. — The environment. — The lesser novel-
ists.— Mark Twain. — Hamlin Garland. — Edward
Bellamy. — William Dean Howells. — Frank Nor-
ris. — Summary and conclusions. — Bibliography (p.
34I~365)-
Taylor has also written a history of American
literature, The Story of American Letters, Rev. ed.
(Chicago, Regnery, 1956. 504 p.); the approach
used is very largely one of essay studies of individual
authors, with occasional survey chapters.
2518. Thompson, Ralph. American literary an-
nuals & gift books, 1 825-1 865. New York,
Wilson, 1936. 183 p. 37-14847 AY10.T5 1936
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1936.
"A catalog": p. [i02]-i63; "Foreign gift books":
p. [i65]-i66.
"Between 1825 and 1865 more than a thousand
such miscellanies appeared in the United States; the
number in other countries was probably even greater.
My aim has been to explain the origin and char-
acter of the American examples and to make avail-
able an annotated catalog." — Preface.
2519. Trilling, Lionel. The liberal imagination;
essays on literature and society. New York,
Viking Press, 1950. 303 p.
50-6914 PS3539.R56L5 1950
Trilling (b. 1905) is best known as a perceptive
liberal critic who publishes frequendy in periodicals.
He is also a creative writer of some note, who has
received praise for his novel, The Middle of the
Journey (New York, Viking Press, 1947. 310 p.),
which attempts to deal with the problems of modern
Americans and modern man.
2520. Trilling, Lionel. The opposing self; nine
essays in criticism. New York, Viking
Press, 1955. 232 p. 55-5871 PN511.T76
Books largely from the 19th century are used as
perspectives on the 20th century. Although inter-
national in its literary perspectives, the book includes
"William Dean Howells and the Roots of Modern
Taste" and "The Bostonians."
2521. Tyler, Moses Coit. A history of American
literature, 1607-1765. Ithaca, Cornell Uni-
versity Press, 1949. 551 p .
49-11766 PS185.T8 1949
"In this reissue . . . the preface and the text of
the first edition of 1878 have been strictly followed
except in the numbering of the footnotes
Changes made in the printings and editions of 1879,
1 88 1, and 1897 are added in bracketed notes in the
present edition, as are likewise most of the marginal
notes that Tyler put in his correction set of the two
volumes of the first edition." — p. ix.
The Life of Moses Coit Tyler (Ann Arbor, Uni-
versity of Michigan Press, 1933. 354 p.), by How-
ard Mumford Jones, relates the story of this famous
scholar of early American literature.
2522. Tyler, Moses Coit. The literary history of,
the American revolution, 1763- 1783. New
York, Published for Facsimile Library, by Barnes &
Noble, 1 94 1. 2 v. 41-6271 PS185.T82 1941
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 429-483.
Contents. — v. 1. 1763-1776. — v. 2. 1776-1783.
2523. Van Doren, Carl C. The American novel,
1789-1939. Rev. and enl. ed. New York,
Macmillan, 1940. 406 p.
40-4354 PS371.V3 1940
Bibliography: p. 367-382.
Van Doren (1885-1950) distinguished himself as
a scholar of the American scene in works such as his
essays in Many Minds (New York, Knopf, 1924.
242 p.); his anthology Modern American Prose
(New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 939 p.); his
general study What is American Literature? (New
York, Morrow, 1935. 128 p.); his distinguished
biography, Benjamin Franklin (New York, Viking
Press, 1938. 845 p.); and many other historical and
literary works, some of which are included else-
where in this bibliography. His career is presented
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 217
in his autobiography, Three Worlds (New York,
Harper, 1936. 317 p.), which also reflects many as-
pects of life in America.
2524. Van Doren, Carl C. Carl Van Doren,
selected by himself. New York, Viking
Press, 1945- 628 p. (The Viking portable
library) 45-35066 PS3543.A555A6 1945
A selection from his own numerous writings.
2525. Vestal, Stanley. The book lover's South-
west; a guide to good reading, by Walter S.
Campbell (Stanley Vestal). Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1955. xii, 287 p.
55-6367 Z1251.S8V4
A guide to literature about the Southwest and by
authors from that region. The work covers all as-
pects of the region's "literature," from dictionaries
to novels.
2526. Wagenknecht, Edward Charles. Cavalcade
of the American novel, from the birth of the
Nation to the middle of the twentieth century.
New York, Holt, 1952. 575 p.
52-7022 PS371.W3
A standard work on the American novel. Major
authors are discussed at length in full essays; lesser
authors are covered by brief notes.
2527. Waggoner, Hyatt H. The heel of Elohim,
science and values in modern American
poetry. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1950. xx, 235 p. 50-9322 PS324.W3
Contents. — Poets, test tubes, and the heel of
Elohim. — E. A. Robinson: the cosmic chill. — Robert
Frost: the strategic retreat. — T. S. Eliot: at the
still point. — Robinson Jeffers: here is reality. —
Archibald MacLeish: the undigested mystery. —
Hart Crane: beyond all sesames of science. Science
and poetry: conclusions.
2528. Warfel, Harry R. American novelists of
today. New York, American P>ook Co.,
1951. 478 p. ports. 51-10144 PS379.W}
Made up of sketches of the life and writings of
575 contemporary American novelists, with em-
phasis on the decade of the 1940's. The work is
inclusive rather than selective.
2529. Wcllck, Rene, and Austin Warren. Theory
of literature. New York, Harcourt. Brace,
1949. 403 p. 49-1007 PN45.W36
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. 299-346). Bibliography: p. 347
A scholarly discussion of literary theory, evalua-
I tion, research, and historiography. The literary
work is viewed in its own right, not as a facet of
181240 CO 16
some social or political movement, nor as an ex-
emplar of the laws of economic determinism. In
this respect the book shows a spreading method of
approach to literature in the graduate schools. Wel-
lek is at work on a four-volume History of Modern
Criticism: jj 50-1950, of which the Yale University
Press has so far published two volumes. Warren is
the author of The Elder Henry fames (New York,
Macmillan, 1934. 269 p.) and Rage for Order;
Essays in Criticism (Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1948. 164 p.).
2530. Wells, Henry W. The American way of
poetry. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1943. 246 p. (Columbia studies in American
culture, no. 13) 43-12056 PS303.W4
A study of American literary nationalism and the
relation of American letters to English, European,
and international traditions; special reference is
made to the works of 16 major American poets who
flourished from the time of the American Revolu-
tion to 1940.
2531. West, Ray B., e d. Essays in modern literary
criticism. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 611
p. 52-5602 PXS5.W4
A volume of essays in which leading literary crit-
ics discourse on aspects of modern literary criticism.
2532. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The American
spirit in letters. New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1926. 329 p. (The Pageant of America
[v. 11]) 26-12988 E178.5.P2, v. 11
The author has in this volume produced an exten-
sively illustrated history of American literature
which is founded on his theory that a nation's life
is reflected in its literature. Williams (b. 1888), a
professor of American literature at Yale University,
has also written a Life of Washington Irving ( New-
York, Oxford University Press, 1935. 2 v.) and
other works.
2533. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The beginnings
of American poetry, 1 620-1 855. Uppsala,
1951. 148 p. (The Gottesman lectures, 1)
54-4634 PS303.W4:;
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(p. [1241-148).
2534. Williams, Stanley Thomas. The Spanish
background of American literature. New
Haven, Yal University Press, 1 ■ »s s- - v.
PSi59i
A contribution toward placing European influ-
ences on American literature in ritical per-
spective. The second volume is de> Oted in larg
to individual studies of Washington Ir\ing. William
2l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Cullen Bryant, Henry Wadsworth Longfellow,
James Russell Lowell, George Ticknor, Bret Harte,
William Dean Howells, and William Prescott.
2535. Wilson, Edmund. Axel's casde; a study in
the imaginative literature of 1870-1930.
New York, Scribner, 1931. 319 p.
31-26550 PN771.W55
Partial Contents. — Symbolism. — T. S. Eliot. —
Gertrude Stein.
The work of Edmund Wilson (b. 1895) as a
forceful expository writer has gained him a large
audience and following in a number of fields, most
notably in literary criticism. As a creative writer
he has produced Discordant Encounters; Plays and
Dialogues (New York, Boni, 1926. 297 p.); the
novel, / Thought of Daisy (New York, Scribner,
1929. 311 p.); a controversial volume of short
stories, Memoirs of Hecate County (Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 338 p.); and Five Plays
(New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1954. 541 p.),
dramas of ideas, within the experimental theater
movement, which reflect life among New York in-
tellectuals. He has also been accorded considerable
attention for such volumes as Travels in Two De-
mocracies (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1936.
325 p.), a report on Russia and the United States;
To the Finland Station; a Study in the Writing and
Acting of History (New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1940. 509 p.), which traces modern revolutionary
thought in Europe; Europe without Baedeker;
Sketches among the Ruins of Italy, Greece & Eng-
land (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947.
427 p.); The Scrolls from the Dead Sea (New York,
Oxford University Press, 1955. 121 p.), a best-
selling report on a major discovery in the field of
religion; and Red, Blacky, Blond, and Olive; Studies
in Four Civilizations: Zuni, Haiti, Soviet Russia,
Israel (New York, Oxford University Press, 1956.
500 p.).
2536. Wilson, Edmund. The boys in the back
room; notes on California novelists. San
Francisco, Colt Press, 1941. 72 p.
41-5 1 881 PS379.W5
Contents. — The playwright in paradise. — James
M. Cain. — John O'Hara. — William Saroyan. — Hans
Otto Storm. — John Steinbeck. — Facing the Pacific. —
Postscript.
2537. Wilson, Edmund. The wound and the bow;
seven studies in literature. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 194 1. 295 p. 41-14343 PN511.W633
Partial Contents. — Justice to Edith Wharton. —
Hemingway: gauge of morale. — Philoctetes: The
wound and the bow.
2538. Wilson, Edmund, ed. The shock of recog-
nition; the development of literature in the
United States recorded by the men who made it.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1943.
1290 p. 43-9895 PS55.W5
Reissued in 1955 by Farrar, Straus & Cudahy,
New York.
A collection of articles about important American
authors written by their contemporaries during
nearly a century, starting with 1845. The anthology
is not only a collection of critical writings, it is also
a contribution to the study of the development of
American literature. A critical introduction has
been provided for each selection.
2539. Wilson, Edmund. The triple thinkers;
twelve essays on literary subjects. [Rev. and
enl. ed.] New York, Oxford University Press, 1948.
270 p. 48-9262 PN511.W63 1948
First published in 1938 by Harcourt, Brace with
the subtitle: "Ten Essays on Literature." The re-
vised edition includes the essays "Mr. More and the
Mithraic Bull," "Is Verse a Dying Technique?",
"The Ambiguity of Henry James," "John Jay Chap-
man," "Marxism and Literature," and "The Histor-
ical Interpretation of Literature."
2540. Wilson, Edmund. Classics and commer-
cials; a literary chronicle of the forties. New
York, Farrar, Straus, 1950. 534 p.
50-10620 PS221.W55
"A selection of . . . literary articles written dur-
ing the nineteen forties."
2541. Wilson, Edmund. The shores of light; a
literary chronicle of the twenties and thirties.
New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1952. 814 p.
52-13935 PS221.W56
2542. Wilson, Edmund. Eight essays. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 238 p.
(Doubleday Anchor books. A37)
54-7733 PS3545.I6245E5
Partial Contents. — Hemingway: gauge of mo-
rale.— Abraham Lincoln: the Union as religious
mysticism. — The pre -presidential T. R. — The
Holmes-Laski correspondence.
2543. Wilson, Edmund. A piece of my mind; re-
flections at sixty. New York, Farrar, Straus
& Cudahy, 1956. 239 p.
57-5302 PS3545.I6245Z53
A volume of autobiographical reflections and
critical summation.
2544. Winters, Yvor. In defense of reason. Prim-
itivism and decadence: a study of American
experimental poetry. Maule's curse: seven studies
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 210.
in the history of American obscurantism. The
anatomy of nonsense. The significance of The
bridge by Hart Crane, or What are we to think of
Professor X? New York, Swallow Press & W.
Morrow, 1947. 611 p. 47-2236 PS121.W53
Primitivism and Decadence was first published
independendy in 1937; Maule's Curse, which in-
cludes essays on Cooper, Melville, Jones Very,
Emerson, and Dickinson, first appeared in 1938;
The Anatomy of Nonsense, which has essays on
H. Adams, W. Stevens, T. S. Eliot, and J. C. Ran-
som, was published in 1943. The volumes have
not all been completely reproduced in this collection,
although all the indicated essays have been included
and represent nearly the whole of the earlier work.
The subjects and theorizing of Winters (b. 1900)
are derived primarily from American literature.
He is also well known for his poetry, which may be
associated with the neo-classical school. Collected
Poems (Denver, Swallow, 1952. 143 p.) is actually
a selection of those poems which he most wishes to
preserve. He is also the author of a prominent
study of Edwin Arlington Robinson (Norfolk,
Conn., New Directions Books, 1946. 162 p.).
2545. Woodberry, George Edward. Makers of
literature; being essays on Shelley, Landor,
Browning, Byron, Arnold, Coleridge, Lowell,
Whittier, and others. New York, Macmillan, 1900.
440 p. 0-2177 PR403.W7
Woodberry (1855-1930) was a critic and poet
associated with Stedman (q. v.) and others in the
"Genteel Tradition." As a professor of compara-
tive literature at Columbia University, and as one
of the more widely read and admired critics of his
day, he had a great influence on literary studies at
the end of the 19th and the beginning of the 20th
centuries. Besides his literary studies, his poetry,
and some travel writing, he produced a number of
important biographies of literary figures: Poe (1885,
revised 1909), Hawthorne (1902), and Emerson
(1907).
2546. Woodberry, George Edward. Heart of
man, and other papers. New York, Har-
court, Brace 6c Howe, 1920. 323 p.
20-20978 PS3351.H5 1920
Contents. — Heart of man. — The praise of Eng-
lish books. — Two phases of criticism. — Wendell
Phillips; the faith of an American.
2547. Woodberry, George Edward. Studies of a
literature. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1921. 328 p. 21-7433 PR99.W75 1921
"The author has collected in this volume besides
articles that were contained in his earlier books some
papers of later years." — Note.
2548. Woodberry, George Edward. Appreciation
of literature, and America in literature.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 192 1. 306 p.
21-7434 PN45.W62 1921
2549. Wright, Thomas Goddard. Literary cul-
ture in early New England, 1620-1730, by
Thomas Goddard Wright . . . ed. by his wife.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1920. 322 p.
21-571 F7.W05
Bibliography: p. 295-304.
"The pages which follow will not attempt to
weigh colonial literature, either to condemn or de-
fend it . . . but rather will attempt to determine
that which lies back of any literature, the culture of
the people themselves, and to study the relation be-
tween their culture and the literature which they
produced. In the attempt to determine the culture
of the people of New England the writer has made
a study of their education, their libraries, their ability
to obtain books, their use and appreciation of books,
their relations with political and literary life in
England, and their literature." — Introduction.
2550. Zabel, Morton D., ed. Literary opinion in
America; essays illustrating the status,
methods, and problems of criticism in the United
States in the twentieth century. Rev. ed. New
York, Harper, 1951. xxv, 890 p.
51-2935 PN771.Z2 1951
Appendixes (p. [791 5-890) : 1. Recent works of
American criticism. — 2. Collections of contemporary
American criticism. — 3. American magazines pub-
lishing criticism. — 4. Notes on contributors. — 5. A
supplementary list of essays in criticism: 1900-
1950. — 6. A note on contemporary English criticism.
C. Periodicals
2551. Accent; a quarterly of new literature, v.
1+ autumn 1940+ Urbana, 111.
46-37972 AP2.A243
Since its inception Accent has included not only
literary criticism and reviews, but llso much fiction
and poetry. It has held out against "commercial-
220 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ism," and it has been very receptive to younger, un-
known writers, although it does include work by
established authors. Its principal editors, Kerker
Quinn and Charles Shattuck, included in Accent
Anthology; Selections from Accent, a Quarterly of
New Literature, 10.40-1945 (New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1946. 687 p.) about 40 percent of the mate-
rial that appeared in the first 5 volumes of the
periodical.
2552. American literature; a journal of literary his-
tory, criticism, and bibliography, v. 1 +
Mar. 1929+ Durham, N. C, Duke University Press.
30-20216 PS1.A6
Published quarterly by the Duke University Press
with the cooperation of the American Literature
Group of the Modern Language Association of
America. Beginning with volume 1, number 3,
there has regularly appeared a list of "Articles on
American Literature Appearing in Current Periodi-
cals"; this has been one of the principal sources of
Lewis G. Leary's Articles on American Literature,
1900-1950 (q. v.). The magazine has had a com-
bined index of subjects, articles, and authors com-
piled by Thomas F. Marshall as An Analytical Index
to American Literature, v. 1-20, Mar. 1929-Jan.
1949 (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1954.
154 p.).
2553. American quarterly, v. 1 + spring 1949 +
Philadelphia. 50-4992 AP2. A3985
Published by the University of Pennsylvania and
the American Studies Association.
Though the periodical is interested in all aspects
of studies relating to American culture, considerable
attention is devoted to literature. In the summer of
1955 appeared the first of a scheduled annual series
of bibliographies listing "Articles in American
Studies." More than 200 periodicals were searched
for material, and roughly half the citations resulting
from this could be considered of direct literary
interest, although frequently correlated with other
fields.
2554. The Antioch review, v. 1 + spring 1941 +
Yellow Springs, Ohio. 44-660 AP2.A562
A quarterly published at Antioch College, this is
one of the many such periodicals published at col-
leges and universities throughout the country.
While it contains fiction, poetry, and book reviews,
as well as essays of literary criticism, it also devotes
a fair amount of space to articles on non-literary mat-
ters. An anthology based on it, and edited by Paul
Bixler, is The Antioch Review Anthology; Essays,
Fiction, Poetry, and Reviews from the Antioch
Review (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1953. 470 p.).
2555. The Atlantic monthly, a magazine of litera-
ture, science, art, and politics, v. 1 + Nov.
1857+ Boston. 4-12666 AP2.A8
From Nov. 1857 to Sept. 1865 title reads: The
Atlantic Monthly, a Magazine of Literature, Art and
Politics.
As a purveyor of creative literature, The Atlantic
Monthly was more important in its early decades
than it has been in recent years. However, it still
reflects (largely through essays and reviews) the lit-
erary tastes of a large section of the better educated
part of the public, as well as their interests in other
fields.
2556. Chicago review, v. 1+ winter 1946 +
[Chicago, University of Chicago Press]
55-35686 AP2.C5152
A literary quarterly published at the University.
2557. Harper's magazine, v. 1+ June 1850 +
New York. 4-12670 AP2.H3
Title varies: June 1850-Nov. 1900, Harper's New
Monthly Magazine. — Dec. 1900-May 1939, Harper's
Monthly Magazine (cover title: Harper's magazine).
A monthly magazine which includes some poetry,
short stories, and literary essays, often by "name"
authors, as well as articles on matters of general in-
terest. An anthology based on it is Harper Essays
(New York, Harper, 1927. 314 p.), edited by H. S.
Canby. A recent paperback selection more fully
representing the magazine's scope is Harper's Maga-
zine Reader: A Selection of Articles, Stories and
Poems . . . (New York, Bantam Books, 1953.
372 P-)-
2558. The Hudson review, v. 1+ spring 1948 +
[New York] 50-2532 AP2.H886
A distinguished literary quarterly that includes
poetry and fiction, as well as a considerable amount
of literary criticism.
2559. The Kenyon review, v. 1 + winter 1939 +
[Gambier, Ohio] Kenyon College.
42-51147 AP2.K426
A leading literary quarterly which has published
a significant amount of important poetry and fiction,
but which is most important for its literary criticism.
Under the editorship of John Crowe Ransom (q. v.),
it became a leading organ of the new critics, and
especially of their leading representatives in the
Southern agrarian movement. This aspect of the
periodical is reflected in the anthology The Kenyon
Critics; Studies in Modern Literature from the Ken-
yon Review (Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1951.
342 p.), edited by Ransom.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 221
2560. New directions in prose & poetry, no. 1 +
1936+ New York, New Directions.
37-1751 PS536.N37
Title varies.
Intended as an annual, the publication of this
work has been somewhat irregular. It is edited by
James Laughlin, who heads the New Directions
press. The volumes contain experimental modern
writing of many types and from many sources. The
emphasis is American though the scope is inter-
national. Much of the material is published in these
volumes for the first time, although some of it is
republished from other, not readily available sources.
2561. The New England quarterly; an historical
review of New England life and letters . . .
v. 1 4- Jan. 1928+ [Orono, Me., The University
Press] 29-23850 F1.N62
Imprint varies.
2562. The New Mexico quarterly review, v. 1 +
Feb. 1931+ [Albuquerque, University of
New Mexico] 35-9607 AP2.N6168
Title varies: 1931-40, The New Mexico Quarterly.
A literary quarterly which includes some general
articles and which emphasizes the Southwest.
2563. New world writing. ist+ Apr. 1952 +
[New York] New American Library.
(N. A. L. Mentor books) 52-1806 PN6014.N457
Issued irregularly and in paperback format at
popular prices, the publication is designed to make
available to a large audience essays, short stories,
and poetry relatively esoteric and experimental in
their literary quality, in many ways corresponding
to the contents of "little magazines" having limited
circulation.
2564. The New York times book review, v. 1 +
1896+ New York. AP2.N657
The weekly book review section, which now ap-
pears as a supplement to the Sunday edition, of
The New Yorl{ Times is probably by itself the most
widely disseminated book review periodical in
America. Its extensive coverage and its wide dis-
tribution render it one of the most important of
such publications.
2565. The New Yorker, v. 1 + Feb. 21, 1925 +
New York. 28-5329 AP2.N6763
The New Yorker is a sophisticated, humorous
weekly without the "serious" approach to high
literature that may be detected in most literary
periodicals. However, it has managed to main-
tain a hi^h level of writing, and many of the coun-
trv's prominent authors have come to be regarded as
part of the "New Yorker school." The short stories
which they have published are represented in books
such as Short Stories jrom the New Yorker (New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1945. 440 p.), which se-
lects 68 stories from the periodical's beginning
through September 1940, and in 55 Short Stories
from the New Yorker (New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1949. 480 p.), which covers the preced-
ing 10 years. Their poetry is represented in The New
Yorker Boo\ of Verse; Anthology of Poems First
Published in the New Yorker, 1925-1935 (New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1935. 311 p.). The mag-
azine has also become famous for a new approach
to short biography, a style represented in the an-
thology Profiles from the New Yorker (New York,
Knopf, 1938. 400 p.). Among the most widely
known and admired aspects of the magazine are its
cartoons. These have appeared in a number of
"New Yorker albums"; six of these were published
by Doubleday Doran from 1928 to 1939. A broad
survey of the form may be seen in The New Yor\er
Twenty-Fifth Anniversary Album, 1925-1950 (New
York, Harper, 1951. unpaged), which has been
supplemented by The New Yorker 1950-1955
Album (New York, Harper, 1955 unpaged).
These are considered by some to be among leading
examples of modern American humor in the car-
toon form. A book by an outsider about The New
Yorker and its editor is Dale Kramer's Ross and
the New Yorker (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1951. 306 p.).
2566. Partisan review, v. 1+ Feb./Mar. 1934 +
New York. 42-20197 HX1.P3
Bimonthly, Feb. 1934-Nov. 1935; irregular, Feb.
1936-Dec. 1937; monthly, Jan.-Sept. 1938; quarterly,
fall 1938-fall 1939; bimonthly, Jan. 1940 +
Volume numbers irregular; v. 1-2 called no. 1-9.
Publication suspended from Nov. 1936 to Nov.
1937, inclusive.
Tide varies: Feb./Mar. i934-Oct./Nov. 1935,
Partisan Review. Feb.-June 1936, Partisan Review
&■ Anvil.
Editors: Feb./Mar. 1934+ Philip Rahv and
others.
The Partisan Review has since its inception be-
come one of the most distinguished ol literary re-
views. It publishes material from both well estab-
lished and new authors in the fields ol poetry, fic-
tion, and critical essays. It also contains articles
on current cultural problems, an 1 it has a distin-
guished book review section. Some of its best
material has been anthologized in
Reader; Ten Years of Partisan Review, 1
(New York, Dial Press, 1946. 688 p.) and The
New Partisan Reader, 1945-1953 I New York. I Iar-
court, Brace, 1953. 621 p.), both edited by William
Phillips and Philip Rahv. Short stories from the
222 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
magazine have been anthologized in the paperback
volumes Stories in the Modern Manner (New York,
Avon Publications, 1953. 282 p.) and More Stories
in the Modern Manner (New York, Avon Publica-
tions, 1954. 252 p.).
2567. Poetry. A magazine of verse, v. 1 + Oct.
1912+ Chicago. 14-13059 PS301.P6
Under the editorship of Harriet Monroe (q. v.)
Poetry became one of the leading mediums in Amer-
ica for the publication of modern poetry, and many
of the leading poets of the first half of the 20th cen-
tury first achieved wide notice through appearing in
this periodical. Subsequent editors have shown a
similar receptivity to new poetry, and they have
maintained the reputation of the periodical as the
best one in America devoted to poetry. Appearing
monthly, the magazine also includes reviews of
books in the field.
2568. Quarterly review of literature, v. 1 +
autumn 1943+ Annandale-on-Hudson,
N. Y. 45-10088 AP2.Q29
The Quarterly Review of Literature has several
times shifted its place of publication; for some years
now it has been published at Bard College. It
presents primarily creative literature (poetry, short
stories, novelettes, drama) rather than criticism. It
does not, however, exclude critical essays. About
once a year an entire issue is devoted to one im-
portant modern author.
2569. Saturday review, v. 1+ Aug. 2, 1924 +
[New York] 27-5407 Z1219.S25
Title varies: 1924-51, Saturday Review of Litera-
ture.
Aside from works such as The New Yorf{ Times
Boo\ Review, this weekly is probably the most
widely distributed literary periodical in America.
Its emphasis is on book reviews and general essays
on the literary scene, although it also carries some
poetry, a fair number of articles and editorials on the
overall cultural scene, and a sizable number of re-
views of long playing records. An early anthology,
compiled while the magazine was almost exclusively
literary in nature, is Designed for Reading; an An-
thology Drawn from the Saturday Review of Lit-
erature, i<)24-t<)34 (New York, Macmillan, 1934.
614 p.). Also based on the periodical is a recent
paperback series of anthologies entitled Saturday
Review Reader (New York, Bantam Books,
195 1 + ), of which three issues have so far appeared.
2570. The Sewanee review, quarterly, v. 1 +
Nov. 1892+ Sewanee, Tenn., The Uni-
versity Press. 9~33I3I AP2.S5
Published at the University of the Soudi, this is
one of the leading literary periodicals in America,
as well as the oldest in continuous publication.
2571. The South Atlantic quarterly, v. 1+ Jan.
1902+ Durham, N.C. 8-84 AP2.S75
The South Atlantic Quarterly is one of the oldest
of the still functioning general and literary periodi-
cals. In both aspects it has been a leading medium
for the expression of Southern culture. An an-
thology from the magazine is Fifty Years of the
South Atlantic Quarterly (Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1952. 397 p.), edited by William
Baskerville Hamilton.
2572. Southwest review, v. 1+ June 1915 +
Dallas, Tex. 17-4968 AP2.S883
Tide varies: v. 1-9 (June 1915-July 1924) The
Texas Review.
Published at the University of Texas, Austin,
June 1915-July 1924; published at Southern Meth-
odist University, Dallas, Oct. 1924 +
While this quarterly is general in nature, it in-
cludes some material of literary interest, and it pub-
lishes an annual literary number.
2573. The University of Kansas City review, v.
1+ winter 1934+ [Kansas City]
48-27919 AP2.U735
Vol. 1, no. 1-4 called v. 4, no. 1-4 in continuation
of the numbering of the university's University
Bulletin.
A general literary quarterly.
2574. The Virginia quarterly review, a national
journal of literature & discussion, v. 1 + Apr.
1925+ [Charlottesville, University of Virginia]
30-14637 AP2.V76
A quarterly which devotes considerable space to
poetry and short stories, but which also includes
articles on matters of general interest.
2575. The Western humanities review, v. 1 +
Jan. 1947+ [Salt Lake City, Utah Humani-
ties Research Foundation] 48-27220 AP2.W426
Title varies: 1947-48, Utah Humanities Review.
A quarterly of general discussion which includes
literary articles and creative writing.
2576. The Western review, v. [1]+ 1937 +
Iowa City, State University of Iowa.
51-1705 1 AP2.W524
Titles varies: Rocl(y Mountain Review.
Editors: R. B. West and others.
The Western Review is a literary quarterly which
provides a space emphasis on young writers.
LITERARY HISTORY AND CRITICISM / 223
2577. Yale review, v. 1-19, May 1392-Feb. 1911; Preceded by the New Englander and Yale Re-
new ser., v. 1+ Oct. 1911+ New Haven, view (1843-92).
1893+ 8-8158 AP2.Y2 The Yale Review is a general quarterly reflecting
Tide varies: May 1892-Feb. 1911, The Yale Re- many aspects of American intellectual life and in-
view; a Quarterly Journal for the Scientific Discus- terests. It includes some literary material and a
sion of Economic, Political and Social Questions. section of intellectual book reviews.
(Subtitle varies slightly.)
IV
Biography and Autobiography
«fiv Nos. 2578-2844
X
Jp
2579. Laughing in the jungle; the autobiography
of an immigrant in America. New York,
Harpers, 1932. 335 p. 32-8633 E169.5.A18
THIS section is primarily a supplement to the other sections; its purpose is to include bio-
graphical works, useful for the study of American history and culture, which would other-
wise have been omitted. As in the other sections, we have striven towards some degree of
balance, so that in a crowded field (e. g., Civil War diaries and journals) a good work may be
left out in favor of another depicting a less well-represented aspect of American life. The ma-
terial in this section is not meant to represent fully, in any respect, the field of American
biography and autobiography. Any biography or
autobiography pertaining directly to the subject
field of another section of the bibliography has been
left for possible inclusion in that section (e. g., a
biography of an actress would appear, if at all, in
the Entertainment section). The exceptions to this
occur when a work does not easily or fully fall into
one of our categories, or when it has particular sig-
nificance in the development of American biography
and autobiography, in which case, if it has not been
selected for another section, it is included here. In
shon, while this section covers American biography
and autobiography on the basis of its value as
Americana, as literature, and as history, it does
not cover any of these aspects thoroughly, but merely
supplements the rest of the bibliography, which
must be used through the index for any fuller view
of the subject.
2578. LOUIS ADAMIC, 1899-1951
Adamic came to America from Yugoslavia
in 19x3 at the age of 14. Most of his writings con-
cern the Americanization of immigrants; this in-
cludes such works as his novel, Grandsons (1935);
My America, 1928-1938 (1938), a journalistic series
of impressions; and From Many Lands (1940), a
somewhat fictionalized series of biographical studies
of some immigrants. The Native's Return (1934)
is a report of a visit to the land of his birth. His
writings form a link in the social literature of the
period, especially with regard to the foreign born
and laboring classes in which he was so interested.
224
2580. CHARLES FRANCIS ADAMS, 1835-1915
Adams was a historian and a railroad execu-
tive, and both fields led to some of his writings: such
as Three Episodes of Massachusetts History (1892),
Studies Military and Diplomatic, IJJ5-1865 (1911), I
Lee at Appomattox, and Other Papers (1902), and
Railroads: Their Origin and Problems (1878). His
interest in literature was evidenced by his distin- ,
guished biography, Richard Henry Dana (1890.
2 v.). Civil War letters exchanged between C. F.
Adams, his father, and Henry Adams may be found
in Worthington Chauncey Ford's two volume A
Cycle of Adams Letters, 1861-1865 (Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1920).
2581. Charles Francis Adams, by his son, Charles
Francis Adams. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1900. 426 p. illus. (American statesmen,
v. 29) 0-1689 E467.1.A2A2
E176.A54, v. 29
A life of a son of John Quincy Adams. C. F.
Adams, Sr., was a statesman and a diplomat, though
possibly best remembered as the father of Henry
and Brooks Adams.
2582. Charles Francis Adams, 1835-1915; an
autobiography; with a Memorial address de-
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 225
livered November 17, 1915, by Henry Cabot Lodge.
Boston, Houghton Mirllin, 1916. lx, 224 p.
16-6471 E664.A19A2
2583. MARY ANDERSON, 1872-
Mary Anderson was a Swedish emigrant who
began in this country as a maid in Michigan, was
later a factory worker, and then rose to be the
second director of the Women's Bureau of the
United States Department of Labor. Her auto-
biography reflects the position of employed women,
particularly in industry, over a period of nearly a
half century, hence depicting many of the advances
made in this period in woman's situation in society.
2584. Woman at work, the autobiography of Mary
Anderson as told to Mary N. Winslow.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press. 1951.
266 p. 51-14305 HD6095.A668
MARY ANTIN, 1 881-1949
2585. The promised land. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 19 12. 373 p. illus.
12-10316 E169.5.A66 1912
An immigrant's autobiographical account of the
situation of Jews in Europe as contrasted with that
of those in America.
2586. HERBERT ASBURY, 1891-
Hcrbert Asbury was a descendant of Francis
Asbury (1745-1816), who brought organized
Methodism to America; this story Herbert Asbury
tells in A Methodist Saint, the Life of Bishop Asbury
(1927), a somewhat iconoclastic biography. Having
broken with the fundamentalist views by which he
was raised, Asbury turned to writing relatively lib-
eral "informal" histories. One group dealt with the
underworld of various cities: The Gangs of New
Yo:^ (1928), The Barbary Coast (1933) for San
Francisco, The French Quarter (1936) for New
Orleans, and The Gem of the Prairie (1940) for
Chicago. Other works include Sucker's Progress,
an Informal History of Gambling in America ( 1938)
and The Golden Flood, an Informal History of
America's First Oil Field (1942).
2587. Up from Methodism. New York, Knopf,
1926. 174 p. 26-17134 BX8334.A65
Autobiography.
2588. Carry Nation. New York, Knopf, 1929.
xxii, 307 p. illus.
29-21266 HV5232.\'}.\7
Carry Nation (1846-1911) was a well-known
champion of women's rights, prohibitionism, and
general moral uplifting of all mankind, for which
she worked assiduously and dramatically, leaving
in the popular mind the image of a middle-aged
woman chopping up the bars of the nation.
2589. GERALD AVERILL, 1896-194-
Averill was a Maine woodsman who died
shortly after completing his reminiscences of the
forests and those who live there.
2590. Ridge runner; the story of a Maine woods-
man. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1948. 217 p.
48-5365 F25.A8
2591. RAY STANNARD BAKER, 1870-1946
Baker is probably best known for his biog-
raphy of Woodrow Wilson (q. v.); however, he also
achieved considerable renown for the autobiogra-
phical books he wrote under the pseudonym of
David Grayson. These largely took the form of
familiar essays in praise of rural life.
2592. Adventures in understanding, by David
Grayson [pseud.] Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Page, 1925. 273 p.
25-20632 PS3503.A7:'-
2593. Adventures of David Grayson [pseud.]
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1925.
249, 232, 342, 208 p. 26-457 PS3505.A75 1925
Contents. — Adventures in contentment. — Ad-
ventures in friendship. — The friendly road. —
Great possessions.
2594. Adventures in solitude, by David Grayson
[pseud.] Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1931. 180 p.
31-28301 PS3503.A5448A7 1931
2595. Native American; the book of my youth.
New York, Scribner, 1941. 330 p.
41-51934 CT275.B313A3
2596. American chronicle. New York. Scribner,
1945- 531 P- 45-244 » PNT4874-B25A3
Autobiography.
2597. ALBEN WILLIAM BARKLEY, 1877-1956
Albcn Barkley was a prominent elder statesman
politician irom Kentucky who achieved fame not
only tor his nation. ll services, but also for his humor.
1 lis autobiography gives a good sample of American
political humor.
226 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2598. That reminds me. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1954. 288 p.
54-10775 E748.B318A3
2599. WILLIAM BENTLEY, 1759-18 19
Rev. Bendey, a Unitarian minister, was known to
his contemporaries as a prominent intellectual
clergyman. His subsequently published diary for
1784— 1819 is now his main claim to be remembered.
A mine of detail for historians, the work pictures
not only the author, but more so life in a New
England seaport at that period.
2600. The diary of William Bentley, D. D., pastor
of the East Church, Salem, Massachusetts.
Salem, Mass., Essex Institute, 1905-14. 4 v. illus.
6-10941 F74.S1B46
ARTHUR F. BERING AUSE, 1919-
2601. Brooks Adams; a biography. New York,
Knopf, 1955. 404 p.
55-8357 D15.A3B4
Bibliography: p. [392]-404.
Brooks Adams (1 848-1 927), brother of Henry
Adams (q. v.), was a distinguished thinker and
historian. Most of his influence was behind the
scenes or indirect, as that upon Theodore Roosevelt.
In The Law of Civilization and Decay (1895) he
presented an interpretation of history which was not
only the first such theoretical work by an American,
but also in its own rights a contribution to American
and Western intellectual history.
2602. LAUNCELOT MINOR BLACKFORD,
1894-
Blackford, an Atlanta, Georgia, doctor, is a de-
scendant of Mary Blackford. His life of her, while
depicting a woman of character who was far from
the clinging vine of historical romances, shows some
cf the way of life in Virginia and a sample of the
anti-slavery sentiment that existed in the South
during the Civil War and pre-Civil War period.
2603. Mine eyes have seen the glory; the story of a
Virginia lady, Mary Berkeley Minor Black-
ford, 1 802- 1 896, who taught her sons to hate slavery
and to love the Union. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1954. 293 p.
54-5018 F230.B65B6
2605. The Americanization of Edward Bok; the
autobiography of a Dutch boy fifty years
after. New York, Scribner, 1920. 461 p. illus.
20-17333 PN4874.B62A4
2606. CATHERINE (DRINKER) BOWEN,
1897-
Mrs. Bowen is one of the most popular of the
practitioners of fictionalized biography. Basing her
books on much research, she imaginatively extrap-
olates unwitnessed events, and then proceeds to pre-
sent such scenes as biographical facts.
2607. Yankee from Olympus; Justice Holmes and
his family. Boston, Little, Brown, 1944.
xvii, 475 p. illus. 44-3384 E664.H773B6
"Material and sources": p. [433]— 451.
Oliver Wendell Holmes, Jr., was noted not only
as a distinguished jurist, but also as one carrying
on a notable American tradition; consequently, both
his grandfather, a clergyman, and his father, the
distinguished author-doctor (q. v.), are treated at
some length in this book. Another view of the man
may be gathered from the Holmes-Pollock Letters,
the Correspondence of Mr. Justice Holmes and Sir
Frederic^ Polloc{, iSy 4-1932 (Cambridge, Mass.,
Harvard LTniversity Press, 194 1. 2 v.), edited by
Mark De Wolfe Howe.
2608. John Adams and the American Revolution.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1950. xvii, 699 p.
illus. 50-8182 E322.B68
Bibliography: p. 646-676.
A fictional biography of the younger years of a
leading revolutionist who was to become the second
President of the United States.
2609. HENRY MARIE BRACKENRIDGE,
1786—1871
Brackenridge, a Pennsylvania-Scotch lawyer, had
a long career in law, politics, and diplomacy.
His travels were the basis of several books of his-
torical importance.
2610. Recollections of persons and places in the
West. Philadelphia, Kay [1834] 244 p.
3-20912 F518.B78
One of the first descriptions of the pioneer West,
meaning, at this time, in large part the Ohio Valley.
2604. EDWARD WILLIAM BOK, 1863-1930
Bok was an American editor who as a child came
to America from the Netherlands. His autobiog-
raphy was awarded the Pulitzer price in 1921.
2611. GAMALIEL BRADFORD, 1863-1932
Bradford was a Massachusetts recluse of ill health
who devoted most of his life to writing. He orig-
inated the "psychograph," a method of short biog-
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 227
raphy by means of which he attempted to extract
the essentially vital aspects of a person's life, and
through them to give a "soul picture." Although
influenced by psychology, he aimed at an artistic
product. His studies were highly popular, and they
initiated a whole new school of American biography.
2612. Lee the American. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1912. 324 p. illus.
12-7039 E467.1.L4B77
A study of Robert E. Lee (see also entries in
index), the Confederate general.
2613. Confederate portraits. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1914. xviii, 291 p. 8 port.
14-7092 E467.B78
Contents. — Joseph E. Johnston. — J. E. B.
Sruart. — James Longstreet— P. G. T. Beauregard. —
Judah P. Benjamin. — Alexander H. Stephens. —
Robert Toombs. — Raphael Semmes. — The batde of
Gettysburg. — Notes.
2614. Union portraits. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
19 1 6. 330 p. 4 port.
16-11059 E467.B782
Contents. — George Brinton McClellan. — Joseph
Hooker. — George Gordon Meade. — George Henry
Thomas. — William Tecumseh Sherman. — Edwin
McMasters Stanton. — William Henry Seward. —
Charles Sumner. — Samuel Bowles. — Titles of books
most frequendy cited (p. [2971-298). — Notes.
2615. Portraits of American women. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1919. 276 p. ports.
19-18303 E176.B82
Contents. — Abigail Adams. — Sarah Alden Rip-
ley.— Mary Lyon. — Harriet Beecher Stowe. — Mar-
garet Fuller Ossoli. — Louisa May Alcott. — Frances
Elizabeth Willard. — Emily Dickinson.
2616. American portraits, 1 875-1900. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 248 p. ports.
22-4659 CT219.B7
Contents. — Mark Twain. — Henry Adams. — Sid-
ney Lanier. — James McNeill Whistler. — James Gil-
lespie Blaine. — Grover Cleveland. — Henry James. —
Joseph Jefferson.
2617. Damaged souls. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1923. 284 p. ports.
23-9082 E176.B8
Contents. — Damaged souls. — Benedict Arnold. —
Thomas Paine. — Aaron Burr. — John Randolph of
Roanoke. — John Brown. — Phineas Taylor Bar-
num. — Benjamin Franklin Butler.
2618. The journal of Gamaliel Bradford, 1883-
1932, edited by Van Wyck Brooks. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1933. 560 p.
33-27386 PS3503.R2Z5 1933
2619. The letters of Gamaliel Bradford, 1918-
1931, edited by Van Wyck Brooks. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1934. 377 p.
34-33655 PS3503.R2Z53 1934
2620. WILLIAM CABELL BRUCE, 1860-1946
Bruce was a lawyer and a United States
Senator who achieved considerable fame as a bi-
ographer. He was awarded a Pulitzer prize for his
biography Benjamin Franklin, Self-Revealed ( 1917),
which relied mainly en presenting the subject
through extracts from his own writings, with transi-
tional passages supplied by Bruce.
2621. John Randolph of Roanoke, 1773— 1833; a
biography based largely on new material.
2d ed., rev. New York, Putnam, 1939. xv, 661,
803 p. illus. 39_2559° E302.6.R2B9 1939
First published in 1922 in 2 volumes.
John Randolph was a Virginia statesman of great
force who, however, almost made a habit of opposi-
tion. An earlier (1882) biography by Henry
Adams (q. v.) is well written, but considered by
some critics to be prejudiced. Russel Kirk's
Randolph of Roanoke, a Study in Conservative
Thought (1951) outlines Randolph's ideas and their
influence; the book was meant to be something of a
supplement to Bruce's study.
2622. EDWARD McNALL BURNS, 1897-
Burns is a historian whose earlier works in-
clude a study (1938) of Madison's political and con-
stitutional thought.
2623. David Starr Jordan: prophet of freedom.
Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press,
1953* 243 P- 53-5525 LD3025 1891.B87
Jordan was a famous ichthyologist and the first
president of Stanford University; howe\er, this
biography is less concerned with his Ichthyological
and educational career than with his thought and
crusades, so that the work becomes a chapter in the
history of American thought.
2624. JOHN BURROUGHS. 1837-1921
Burroughs through his writings as a natural-
ist achieved a position in American literature ( q. v.)
He also wrote a number of autobiographical and
biographical works, such as John /.. •
228 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
(1902) and Walt Whitman, a Study (1896). His
biographer, Clara Barrus, produced a two-volume
Life and Letters of John Burroughs (1925).
2625. Camping & tramping with Roosevelt. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. no p.
7-3 1 1 86 E757.B97
Describes a trip in Yellowstone Park with
Theodore Roosevelt in 1903, with an added section
on a visit to Roosevelt at his home at Oyster Bay.
2626. The heart of Burroughs's journals. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1928. xvii, 361 p.
28-23950 PS1226.A52
2627. John Burroughs talks, his reminiscences and
comments as reported by Clifton Johnson.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. xvi, 358 p.
illus. 22-18205 PS1226.A54
2628. My boyhood, by John Burroughs, with a con-
clusion by his son, Julian Burroughs. Gar-
den City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1922. 247 p.
illus. 22-7305 PS 1 226. A5
2629. NICHOLAS MURRAY BUTLER, 1862-
1947
Buder, who was a national and international
statesman, is probably best remembered for his work
during his long incumbency in the presidency of
Columbia University.
2630. Across the busy years: recollections and re-
flections. New York, Scribner, 1939-40.
2 v. illus. 39_27^5o LD1245 1902.A3
2631. HODDING CARTER
Carter, who does not usually use his first
name, William, is a liberal, smalltown newspaper-
man from the Mississippi delta area. His writings
present Southern problems from a Southern per-
spective. In addition to his non-fiction, he has
written some novels, notably The Winds of Fear
(1944), a polemical study of relations between
Negroes and whites.
2632. Where Main Street meets the river. New
York, Rinehart, 1953. 339 p.
53-6133 PN4874.C27A3 1953
An account, with opinions on many issues, which
traces the author's career since he started a small
newspaper in 1932.
2633. PETER CARTWRIGHT, 1785-1872
Cartwright was a clergyman who was long a
Kentucky circuit rider, and then brought religion
to frontier Illinois. Mrs. Helen Hardie Grant's
Peter Cartwright, Pioneer (New York, Abingdon
Press, 1 951) presents a 20th century view of this
once influential Methodist.
2634. Autobiography of Peter Cartwright, the
backwoods preacher. Edited by W. P.
Strickland. New-York, Carlton & Porter, 1857.
525 p. _ 12-3515 F545.C31
Supplemented by his later Fifty Years as a Presid-
ing Elder (1872). A "centennial edition" of the
autobiography was published in 1956 by the
Abingdon Press in Nashville, Tenn.
CHARLES EDWARD CAUTHEN, ed.
2635. Family letters of the three Wade Hamptons,
1782-190 1. Columbia, University of South
Carolina Press, 1953. xix, 181 p. illus. (South
Caroliniana; sesquicentennial series, no. 4)
54-7181 CS71.H23 1953
Letters of three Wade Hamptons (1754-1835,
1791-1858, 1818-1902), which illuminate major
events in the South during a period of more than a
century.
2636. MARY BOYKIN (MILLER) CHESNUT,
1823-1886
Mary Chesnut was a South Carolinian belle, wife
of a U. S. Senator who later became a brigadier-
general in the Confederate Army. She was ac-
quainted with a large percentage of the great and
near-great of the Confederate States.
2637. A diary from Dixie. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1949. 572 p.
49-11694 E487.C52 1949
This diary of the Civil War period was first pub-
lished in 1905. The 1949 edition has more mate-
rial; it was edited by the historical novelist Ben
Ames Williams ( 1 889-1 953), who used it as a source
model for Linda Dewain in House Divided (1947).
2638. SAMUEL CHOTZINOFF, 1889-
Chotzinoff is a musician and critic who was
born in Russia of Jewish parents. His autobiography
traces the family's coming to America and the years
from his life in the slums of New York to his adult
success. His biography of Arturo Toscanini, the
orchestral conductor, Toscanini: An Intimate Por-
trait, was published in 1956 (New York, Knopf.
148 p.).
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 229
2639. A lost paradise; early reminiscences. New
York, Knopf, 1955. 373 p.
54-7202 ML423.C564A3
2640. LOUISE AMELIA KNAPP (SMITH)
CLAPPE, 1819-1906
Louise Smith Clappe was a doctor's wife who
in her letters gave a detailed description of life in
a California gold-mining community.
2641. The Shirley letters from the California
mines, 1 851-1852; with an introd. and notes
by Carl I. Wheat. New York, Knopf, 1949. xxix,
216 p. illus. 49-11095 F865.C58 1949
Twenty-three letters written by the author to her
sister, Mary Jane, in Massachusetts. They were
originally published serially, under the pseudonym
of Dame Shirley, in The Pioneer; or, California
Monthly Magazine, Jan. 1854-Dec. 1855.
2642. IRVIN SHREWSBURY COBB, 1876-1944
Irvin S. Cobb was born in Kentucky. He
later became a New York journalist, a World War
I war correspondent, and a humorous columnist.
While he wrote some serious fiction, he is better
known for his works of humor in general and his
autobiography in particular, which exemplifies much
of the American attitude towards life in its comical
aspects.
2643. Exit laughing. Garden City, N. Y., Garden
City Pub. Co., 1942. 572 p.
42-36270,PS3505.Oi4Z5 1942
Autobiography.
2644. CYRENUS COLE, 1863-1939
Cole was born in Iowa and had a career as
a newspaperman before he became a Congressman.
In addition to an autobiography, he wrote a num-
ber of books which in large part deal with Iowa.
2645. I am a man; the Indian Black Hawk, a
book . . . marking the one hundredth anni-
versary of the passing of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-kia-kiak.
Iowa City, State Historical Society of Iowa, 1938.
3'2 P- 38-28006 E83.83.B638
Black Hawk (1767-1838) was a famous Sauk
Indian chid who composed his own autobiography,
Life of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-hja-kia\ . . . (Cincinnati,
I^33), by means of dictation and translation, in order
to explain his side of the Indian wars in which he
had a prominent part; a new edition appeared in
' '955-
2646. MONCURE DANIEL CONWAY, 1832-
1907
Conway, one of the most prominent figures of his
day, was a leading clergyman, author, and liberal.
Because of his stand against slavery, he was forced
to leave his native Virginia. His many writings
include a life of Thomas Paine which is generally
considered one of the outstanding biographies of
19th-century America. A biography, Moncure
Conway (New Brunswick, Rutgers University
Press, 1952) was written by Mary Elizabeth Burtis.
2647. The life of Thomas Paine: with a history of
his literary, political and religious career in
America, France, and England. To which is added
a sketch of Paine by William Cobbett (hitherto un-
published) New York, Putnam, 1892. 2 v. illus.
4-16014 JC178.Y2C7
2648. Autobiography. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1904. 2 v. illus.
4-29207 BX9869.C8A3 1904
2649. DAVID CROCKETT, 1 786-1 836
Davy Crockett, frontiersman and politician,
was a fable in his own lifetime. The tall tales told
about him became a part of American folklore. A
recent revival of the myth, with retouchings, has
further removed him from even that degree of truth,
robustness, and reality which is to be found in his
autobiography (the authorship of which has been
disputed). An attempt to identify "the Crockett
God made" is James Atkins Shackford's David
Crockett, the Man and the Legend no. 3353.
2650. Davy Crockett's own story as written by him-
self; the autobiography of America's great
folk hero. New York, Citadel Press, 1955. 377 p.
illus. 51-10010 F436.C9
"Consists of . . . A narrative of the life of David
Crockett . . . written by himself, published in 1834;
An account of Col. Crockett's tour to the North and
down East, published in 1 8 34, and Col. Crockett's
exploits and adventures in Texas, published post-
humously in 1836."
"Col. Crockett's exploits and adventures in Tt
is a pseudo-autobiography generally ascribed to
Richard Penn Smith.
2651. WILBUR LUCIUS CROSS, i8(.
Wilbur Cross had a distinguished career as
an English professor and Dean of the School of
Graduate Studies at Vale University. In the course
of his academic career he wrote Life and Times of
23O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Laurence Sterne (1909, rev. ed. 1925) and History
of Henry Fielding (1918), both definitive works,
and considered by some to be among the best biog-
raphies in the English language. After retiring
from his scholarly career, he was four times elected
Governor of his native State of Connecticut. His
autobiography reflects not only New England life,
but also American academic and political life.
2652. Connecticut Yankee; an autobiography.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1943.
428 p. illus. A43-2896 F100.C7A3
2653. HOMER CROY, 1883-
Croy started life as a Missouri farm boy.
After working in journalism, he became a novelist.
He is probably best-known, however, for his auto-
biographical and biographical works.
2654. Country cured. New York, Harper, 1943.
282 p. 43-14871 PS3505.R9554C6
Autobiography.
2655. Wonderful neighbor. New York, Harper,
1945. 204 p. 45^878 PS3505.R9554Z53
A book of autobiographical sketches depicting life
in a Midwestern farm community during the au-
thor's youth.
2656. He hanged them high; an authentic account
of the fanatical judge who hanged eighty-
eight men. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1952. 278 p. illus. 52-6782Law
A biography of Isaac Charles Parker (1838-96),
who for three decades was sole U. S. judge over a
large frontier area.
2657. Our Will Rogers. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1953. 377 p.
53-10229 PN2287.R74C7
A life of the cowboy-comedian-philosopher who
achieved much of his fame as a journalist and as a
motion-picture actor. His Autobiography (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1949) is actually a selection by
Donald Day from the various newspaper columns,
letters, etc., which Rogers wrote.
2658. JULIAN DANA, 1907-
Dana is a California biographer whose name
originally was Morgan Mercer. Lost Springtime,
the Chronicle of a Journey Far Away and Long
Ago (1938) is an account of a camping trip in the
Sierras, during which the author manages to re-
count much early Californian history.
2659. Sutter of California. New York, Press of
the Pioneers, 1934. 423 p. illus.
35-27048 F865.S948
Bibliography: p. 397-401.
One of several biographies of John Sutter (1803-
1880), on whose land gold was first discovered in
California, this book was reissued by Macmillan in
1936. Another distinguished biography of Sutter
is James Zollinger's Sutter, the Man and His Em~
pire (New York, Oxford University Press, 1939).
2660. The man who built San Francisco; a study of
Ralston's journey with banners. New York,
Macmillan, 1936. 397 p. illus.
36-29826 F869.S3R155
William Chapman Ralston (1826-1875) was a
capitalist whose career was much entwined with the
early history of San Francisco, which receives con-
siderable attention in this biography.
EUGENE DAVENPORT, 1 856-1 941
2661. Timberland times. Urbana, University of
Illinois Press, 1950. 274 p.
50-6384 F572.G46D3
An autobiographical account of his youth, this
book is also a record of how pioneer people lived
and thought in the period when the Michigan
timberlands were being cleared and turned into
farms.
2662. PIERRE JEAN DE SMET, 1 801-1873
Father de Smet was an early Jesuit missionary
in the American Northwest. His published books
include several on his journeys and his work. He
also wrote knowingly on the Indians of the area.
2663. Life, letters and travels of Father Pierre-
Jean de Smet, S. J., 1801-1873; missionary
labors and adventures among the wild tribes of the
North American Indians . . . edited from the origi-
nal unpublished manuscript journals and letter
books and from his printed works, with historical,
geographical, ethnological and other notes; also a
life of Father de Smet ... by Hiram Martin Chit-
tenden and Alfred Talbot Richardson. New York,
Harper, 1905 [ci904] 4 v. illus.
4-33581 F591.S63
2664. WILLIAM ORVILLE DOUGLAS, 1898-
While mainly known for his work in the
legal profession, Supreme Court Justice Douglas in
his autobiography depicted little of his court activi-
ties, presenting instead a regional book about
mountain-climbing and fishing in the Northwest.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 23 1
2665. Of men and mountains. New York, Harper,
1950. xiv, 338 p. 50-7078 F851.7.D68
2666. DANIEL DRAKE, 1785-1852
Drake was a leading pioneer doctor who
established his fame in frontier Kentucky and Ohio.
2667. Pioneer life in Kentucky, 1785-1800. Edited
from the original manuscript, with introduc-
tory comments and a biographical sketch, by Emmet
Field Horine. New York, Schuman, 1948. xxix,
257 p. illus. 48-7439 F451.D76 1948
A restoration of the original text of a work which
first appeared in 1870.
2668. MARGARET L. (O'NEALE) TIMBER-
LAKE EATON, i799?-i879
Mrs. Eaton's autobiography, written in 1873, is
a crude but vivid defense of her reputation and an
account of her activities in Washington social and
political life during the administration of Andrew
Jackson. Queena Pollack's biography Peggy Eaton,
Democracy's Mistress (New York, Minton, Balch,
193 1 ) offers further material for the sociologist and
political historian. An impressive account is Samuel
Hopkins Adams' fictional biography, The Gorgeous
Hussy (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934).
2669.
2670.
The autobiography of Peggy Eaton. New
York, Scribner, 1932. 216 p.
32-7318 E381E15
CHARLES WILLIAM ELIOT, 1834-1926
Charles W. Eliot was long a president of
Harvard University. His writings are mainly
scholarly, educational, or public-spirited in nature.
However, he also wrote a distinguished short mem-
oir of a guide who had been his friend to the time
of his death.
2671.
1904.
2672.
John Gilley, Maine farmer and fisherman.
Boston, American Unitarian Association,
72 p. 4-27134 F29.S85E4
PHILIP VICKERS FITHIAN, 174 7-1 776
Fithian was a schoolmaster, clergyman, and
finally army chaplain. In his journal and letters he
clearly recorded the reactions of the sections of the
country he knew on the eve of the Revolution.
2673. Philip Vickers Fithian, journal and letters.
Princeton, University Library, 1900-34. 2 v.
illus. 1-30673 E163.F54
Volume 1, covering the years 1767-74, has the
subtitle: "Student at Princeton College, 1770-72,
Tutor at Nomini Hall in Virginia, 1773-74." Vol-
ume 2 covers the period 1775-76 and has the tide
continued as "Written on the Virginia-Pennsylvania
Frontier and in the Army."
A revised edition covering the section for 1773-74
was published in 1943 at Williamsburg, Va., by
Colonial Williamsburg, Inc.
2674. CLAUDE MOORE FUESS, 1885-
While rising to a position as headmaster of
a private New England school, Fuess wrote a num-
ber of scholarly, biographical, and historical works,
many of them reflecting his academic connections,
such as: An Old New England School (1917), Men
of Andover (1928), Amherst (1935), and Stanley
King of Amherst (1955). His 1930 biography
Daniel Webster (q. v.) is considered by many to be
his masterpiece.
2675. Life of Caleb Cushing. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1923. 2 v.
23-12975 E415.9.C98F9
Cushing (1800-79) had an important judicial
and diplomatic career, as well as serving some time
as a Member of Congress.
2676. Rufus Choate, the wizard of the law. New
York, Minton, Balch, 1928. 278 p. illus.
28-8613 E340.C4F9
Choate (1799-1859) was a leading 19th-century
lawyer and orator.
2677. Carl Schurz, reformer (1 829-1 906) New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1932. xv, 421 p. illus.
(American political leaders)
32-26442 E664.S39F92
"Selected bibliography": p. 395-401.
Schurz was a German-American liberal who led
an active diplomatic, political, and military career;
his life is to some extent a history of political ideas
of the period.
2678. Joseph B. Eastman, servant of the people.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1952.
363 p. illus. 52-8268 HE2754.E3F8
Eastman (1882-1944) was a government career
man whose career centered mainly about transpor-
tation; accordingly, this book is in some measure a
review of the activities of the Interstate Commerce
Commission during most of his lifetime.
2679. FERRIS GREENSLET, 1875-
Grc< nslct was successively an editor for The
Atlantic Monthly, a literary adviser for 1 [ougfaton
232 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mifflin, and then the occupant of several adminis-
trative positions in that publishing firm. His early
work includes much literary criticism (largely book
reviews), and several biographies of literary per-
sonages.
2680. Under the bridge, an autobiography. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1943. 237 p.
43-16298 PS3513.R4876Z5
2681. The Lowells and their seven worlds. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1946. xi, 442 p.
illus. 46-25260 CS71.L915 1946
A multiple biography of ten generations (includ-
ing James Russell and Amy Lowell) of a well-to-do
Massachusetts family, this book reflects much of
New England's history.
2682. HERMANN HAGEDORN, 1882-
Hagedorn, a longtime admirer and student
of Theodore Roosevelt (q. v.), has used this lifelong
interest as a topic source for many of his books,
which frequendy employ the biographical medium.
These range from studies of aspects or portions of
his life, through the editing of the Memorial Edition
of Roosevelt's works, to The Rough Rider (1927),
a novel dealing with the Spanish-American War
activities of the president-to-be. However, Hage-
dorn has on occasion turned to other subjects, as in
Edwin Arlington Robinson (1938), a life of the
poet (q. v.); Prophet in the Wilderness (1947, rev.
1954), a life of Albert Schweitzer; and The Mag-
nate William Boyce Thompson and His Time
[1869-1930] (1935), an authorized biography. He
ventured into collective biography in Americans
(1946), a book of 17 biographical sketches designed
originally to introduce foreigners to prominent
Americans. In addition Hagedorn has written some
conventional poetry and drama; his greatest popular
success in poetry may have been The Bomb that
Fell on America (1946, rev. 1950), a statement on
the moral implications of the atomic bomb, stated
in a loose Whitman-Sandburg free verse.
2683. Roosevelt in the Bad Lands. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1921. xxvi, 491 p. illus.
(Publications of the Roosevelt Memorial Associa-
tion, 1) 21-19415 E757.H142
A story of Roosevelt in Dakota that is also a story
of frontier life.
2684. Leonard Wood, a biography. New York,
Harper, 193 1. 2 v. illus.
31-24003 E181.W83
Gen. Wood (1860-1927) was a friend of
Theodore Roosevelt, a member of the "Rough Rid-
ers," a prominent candidate for a presidential
nomination, and an administrator in Cuba and the
Philippines.
"Authorities": v. 1, p. 430-436; v. 2, p. 496-503.
2685. Brookings; a biography. New York, Mac-
millan, 1936. 334 p. illus.
36-32578 CT275.B7554H3
Robert S. Brookings (1850-1932) was a merchant
who, having made a fortune, became a philan-
thropist.
"Authorities": p. 317-324; "Publications of
Robert S. Brookings": p. 325-326.
2686. The Roosevelt family of Sagamore Hill.
New York, Macmillan, 1954. 435 p. illus.
54-11834 E757.3.H3
A view of the Roosevelt family in their home at
Oyster Bay, New York. The book follows
Theodore Roosevelt to Washington during his years
in the presidency.
2687. FRANCIS JOHN HALFORD, 1902-1953
Halford was a medical doctor who practiced
in the Hawaiian Islands.
2688. 9 doctors & God. Honolulu, University of
Hawaii, 1954. 322 p. illus.
54-10046 R722.H23
The story of the first 9 missionary doctors sent
from the United States to the Hawaiian Islands in
the 19th century.
RALPH VOLNEY HARLOW, 1884-
2689. Gerrit Smith, philanthropist and reformer.
New York, Holt, 1939. 501 p.
39-4639 HV28.S63H3
Gerrit Smith (1797-1874) was a wealthy re-
former, philanthropist, and statesman. He was
long active in the anti-slavery movement, among
others. His life story almost constitutes a history
of American philanthropic activities in that period.
2690. RACKHAM HOLT, 1899-
George Washington Carver, an American
biography. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran,
1943. 342 p. illus. 43-51106 S417.C3H6
Carver was a Negro scientist who became famous
for his work in the development of byproducts of
the peanut. His biography in a way reflects the
progress of the Negro in America.
2691. PHILIP HONE, 1780-1851
Hone, at one time mayor of New York, was
a member of the city's social and literary circles.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 233
His diary indicates the attitudes of the Whig "aris-
tocracy," and it gives a comprehensive picture cf
life in New York City at that time. It was first
published in 1889 as edited by Bayard Tuckermann.
The text cited below was edited by Allan Nevins,
an American historian and biographer whose works
are listed under various subjects in this bibliography.
2692. The diary of Philip Hone, 1828-1851. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1927. 2 v. illus.
28-26080 F128.44.H78
2693. MARK ANTONY DE WOLFE HOWE,
1864-
M. A. De Wolfe Howe was born in Rhode Island,
but has become entrenched as the dean of Boston
writers. His writings are based on much research,
and are usually biographical in form, at times
through the arranging and connecting of the sub-
ject's own writings. Howe has commonly written
about Boston and New England figures in general,
and people he himself has known in particular.
While many of his books have been about less spec-
tacular personages of history, he did in Holmes of
the Breakfast Table (1939) produce a distinguished
short biography of the prominent New England
doctor-author (q. v.).
2694. Barrett Wendell and his letters. Boston,
Adantic Monthly Press, 1924. 350 p. illus.
24-24596 PS3158.W7Z53
Wendell (1855-1921) was for 40 years a teacher
of English literature at Harvard University, as well
as the author of considerable literary criticism and
history. This biography, composed largely of ex-
tracts from his letters, was awarded a Pulitzer prize
for biography in 1925.
2695. James Ford Rhodes, American historian.
New York, Appleton, 1929. 375 p. illus.
29-9826 E175.5.R44
2696. Portrait of an independent, Moorfield Storey,
1845-1929. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932.
383 p. illus. 32-1 1810 E664.S883II7
Includes numerous letters written by Moorefield
Storey. A book written to illustrate the position of
the independent in American life.
2697. John Jay Chapman and his letters. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1937. 498 p. illus.
37-28704 PS1292.C3ZS?
A life of Chapman (1862-193}) composed largely
of selected and arranged letters, with connecting
statements, which combine to reveal the personality
of this New York critic, essayist, translator, and
commentator on religious and educational matters.
Chapman himself produced some lightly autobi-
ographical work in Memories and Milestones ( 1915),
which is more a commentary on those he has known.
2698. A venture in remembrance. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1941. 3 19 p.
41-16365 PS3515.O858Z5 1941
Autobiography.
2699. WILL JAMES, 1892-1942
James, whose full name is William Roderick
James, became an author and artist after a career as
a cowboy. His various stories were quite widely
read, but it is probably his autobiography, written
in the "cowboy vernacular," which has continued
to be most widely read, possibly because of its able
picturing of the cowboy's life.
2700. Lone cowboy; my life story. New York,
Scribner, 1930. 431 p. illus.
30-20657 F596.J287
2701. ALVIN SAUNDERS JOHNSON, 1874-
Alvin Johnson was born on a Nebraska farm,
but went on to become an educator prominent in
the fields of economics and social science. He
founded the New School for Social Research and
was the associate editor of the Encyclopedia of the
Social Sciences (1930-35).
2702. Pioneer's progress, an autobiography. New
York, Viking Press, 1952. 413 p.
52-12704 H59.J6A3
2703. ALFRED KAZIN, 191 5-
Kazin is probably most generally known for
his literary criticism (q. v.), but he has also pub-
lished an autobiographical volume that is a lyrical
evocation of his childhood in Brooklyn, N. V., and
which gives a view of city tenement life.
2704. A walker in the city. New Yoik, I l.ircourt,
Brace, 1951. 176 p. illus.
51-13797 PN75.K3A3
2705. HELEN ADAMS KELLER, 1880-
I [elen Keller was a blind and deaf, and hence
mute, person who was educated to speak, read
(Braille), and take .1 useful place in society. She
has become a leading example oi how successfully
a handicapped child may overcome its difficulties.
Miss Keller, in Teacher: Anne Sullivan A/... y
234 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
(1955), has written a biography of the dedicated
woman who led her out of the deaf and blind
child's world of isolation.
2706. The story of my life, by Helen Keller with
her letters (1887-1901) and a supplementary
account of her education, including passages from
the reports and letters of her teacher, Anne Mans-
field Sullivan, by John Albert Macy. New York,
Doubleday, Page, 1903. 441 p. illus.
3-7188 HV1624.K4A15
2707. The world I live in. New York, Century,
1908. 195 p. 8-30582 HV1624.K4A2
"These essays and the poem in this book appeared
originally in the Century magazine." — Preface.
2708. Midstream; my later life. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1929. xxiii, 362 p.
illus. 29-23705 HV1624.K4A17 1929
2709. Helen Keller's journal, 1936-1937. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1938. 313 p.
38-27235 HV1624.K4A26
2710. ERASMUS DARWIN KEYES, 1810-1895
Keyes graduated from West Point in 1832.
His memoirs trace his career after this, from his
position on the staff of Gen. Winfield Scott (who
is discussed in detail), through his activity in Indian
warfare, to his initial participation as a general in
the Civil War.
271 1. Fifty years' observations of men and events,
civil and military. New York, Schribner,
1884. 515 p. 11-23243 E181.K44
2712.
RICHARD WILLIAM LEOPOLD
Leopold is a professor of American history
at Northwestern University. His most recent bio-
graphical work is Elihu Root and the Conservative
Tradition (1954).
2713. Robert Dale Owen. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1940. 470 p. illus. (Har-
vard historical studies . . . v. 45)
40-34930 HX696.O9L56
This biography of Owen (1801-1877) illustrates
the important influence of one minor figure on
the development of his period. Owen was active
in many lines: socialism, politics, etc.
"A list of the writings of Robert Dale Owen":
p. [4i9]~428. Bibliography: p. [429P440.
2714. CHARLES AUGUSTUS LINDBERGH,
1902-
In 1927 Lindbergh became a popular hero when
he flew across the Atlantic from New York to Paris.
This pioneering effort still stands out in a lifetime
devoted to aviation. His autobiography, which
centers about this episode, is a closeup view of
American aviation during the first third of the
century.
2715. The Spirit of St. Louis. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1953. 562 p. illus.
53-11546 TL540.L5A85
Autobiography.
2716. ROBERT MITCHELL LINDNER, 1914-
1956
Lindner, a psychoanalyst of literary skill who
practiced in Baltimore, had been a criminal psycho-
analyst, and had a strong interest in criminals and
their causes (as distinct from the traditional ap-
proach of their symptoms). This is revealed in
books such as Stone Walls and Men (1946) and
Prescription jor Rebellion (1952).
2717. Rebel without a cause; the hypnoanalysis of
a criminal psychopath. New York, Grune
& Stratton, 1944. 296 p.
SG44-211 RC602.L513
A case history of an actual, but atypical, Polish-
American youth. The book, which depicts a slum
childhood and the forming of a criminal, has been
regarded as a fascinating, though tragic, major
sociological document. At the same time, the novel
means employed for obtaining the information, and
the resultant unwilled and unmodified veracity,
give this an unusual and almost unique position in
the field of biography and autobiography.
2718. The fifty-minute hour: a collection of true
psychoanalytic tales. New York, Rinehart,
i955» ci954- 293 P- 54~9863 . RC501.L5
True "short stories" about abnormal individuals;
each comprises something of a case history, and
hence is also something of a picture of abnormal
types and the societal processes behind them. The
stories have been praised for informative as well as
literary qualities.
2719. CARL J. LOMEN
Lomen went to Alaska at the age of 19 to
look for gold; he stayed to go into a successful deer-
raising industry. Besides the reindeer industry, his
book pictures the Alaskan Eskimo and the Klondike
gold rush.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 235
2720. Fifty years in Alaska. New York, McKay,
1954. 302 p. 54~I3313 Fa°9-L86
KATHARINE DU PRE LUMPKIN, 1897-
2721. The making of a Southerner. New York,
Knopf, 1947. 247 p. 47-312 F215.L85
The autobiography of a sociologist who does
much to explain Southern social conditions. She
has achieved some of her objectivity towards the is-
sue by her education and residence in the North.
2722. ALICE LEE MARRIOTT, 1910-
Alice Marriott is an ethnologist who has
written a number of books depicting the customs
of Indian groups in the Southwest. Even in her
autobiographical works, the main interest is in the
Indians she observes.
2723. Maria, the potter of San Ildefonso. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1948.
294 p. illus. (The Civilization of the American
Indian [series]) 48-2101 E98.P8M28
A biography of Maria Montoya Martinez, a New
Mexican Indian who became famous for her
pottery.
2724. The valley below. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1949. 243 p. illus.
49-7779 F797-M35
An ethnologist's story of life in a predominantly
Spanish American and Indian community in New
>' Mexico.
2725. Greener fields; experiences among the Amer-
ican Indians. New York, Crowell, 1953.
274 p. 53-8436 E98.C9M3
2726. KATHRYN HARROD MASON
Mason was a descendant of James Harrod
(1746-1793?), founder of the first settlement in
Kentucky; she wrote his biography in an attempt to
rescue him from what she felt to be an unjust ob-
scurity. In the course of the book she produces an
excellent picture of frontier life.
2727. James Harrod of Kentucky. Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1951. xxii,
266 p. illus. (Southern biography series)
51-10080 F454.H3M3
Bibliography: p. [245J-254.
2728. JOHN JOSEPH MATHEWS
Mathews is an Osage Indian who has been
very well educated in the white man's tradition.
2729. Wah'kon-tah; the Osage and the white man's
road. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1932. 359 p. illus. ([The Civilization of the
American Indian series]) 32-28153 E99.O8M3
A story of the Osage Indians and their country;
based on the journal of Major Laban J. Miles ( 1844—
1 931), who in 1878 became an Osage agent and
lived with them thereafter.
2730. Talking to the moon. Chicago, University
of Chicago Press. 1945. 243 p. illus.
A45-3207 CT275.M4644A3
A detailed observational story of a nature-lover
living alone for 10 years on a Kansas prairie.
2731. Life and death of an oilman; the career of
E. W. Marland. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 195 1. 259 p. illus.
51-13242 HD9570.M3M3
A study of an age and place through the study of
the rise and decline of one of the last of the big-
business tycoons, Ernest Whitworth Marland ( 1874—
1941), an Oklahoma oilman.
2732. ROBERT MAUDSLAY, 1855-1939
Maudslay was an Englishman who settled in
Texas in 1882 and engaged in sheep raising.
2733. Texas sheepman; the reminiscences of Rob-
ert Maudslay. Austin, University of Texas
Press, 1 95 1. 138 p. 51-13259 F391.M46
Letters to a niece which informally describe fron-
tier life and the rapidly growing sheep industry.
2734. WILLIAM HENRY MAULDIN, 192 1-
Bill Mauldin achieved fame as a war car-
toonist, then as an author. Most of his books
combine the two media.
2735. Up front. New York, Holt, 1945. 228 p.
illus. 45-3484 I>745-2-M34
A story of the regular soldier, based largely on
the author's experiences in the European theater
of World War II. In large part the text was written
around his cartoons.
2736. Back home. New York, Sloane, 1947.
315 p. illus. 47-11625 E169.M426
Copiously illustrated with the author's cartoons,
this book reflects his experience as a returning vet-
eran after World War II. The book genci
enough to be a statement on the position of most
veterans.
236 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2737. A sort of a saga. New York, Sloane, 1949.
301 p. illus.
49-11455 NC1429.M428 1949
The story of the author's childhood in New
Mexico and Arizona.
2738. Bill Mauldin in Korea. New York, Norton,
1952. 171 p. illus.
52-12878 DS918.M34
2739. DAVID JOHN MAYS, 1896-
Mays is a lawyer with an extensive knowl-
edge of American history. He has written a
number of legal works.
2740. Edmund Pendleton, 1721-1803; a biography.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952.
2 v. illus. 52-5036 F230.P425
A scholarly, thorough, and detailed study of a con-
servative-revolutionary jurist. The book also deals
with Virginia and Revolutionary War politics.
2741. ELLIOTT TUCKER MERRICK, 1905-
Elliott Merrick is the author of several books,
fictional and non-fictional, dealing with Labrador
and Vermont.
2742. Green Mountain farm. New York, Mac-
millan, 1948. 209 p.
48-10795 _ PS3525.E6394G7
A story of how, in order to simplify life during
the depression, he purchased a farm in Vermont,
and his subsequent experiences and observations
there.
2743. GEORGE MIDDLETON, 1880-
In his autobiography Middleton, a play-
wright, presents a view of the theatrical world dur-
ing the 45 years in which he was active in it.
Middleton, married to a daughter of Robert M.
LaFollette, also knew many people prominent in
the world of politics.
2744. These things are mine; the autobiography
of a journeyman playwright. New York,
Macmillan, 1947. 448 p. illus.
47-30341 PS3525.I27Z5
LEE GRAHAM MILLER, 1902-
2745. The story of Ernie Pyle. New York, Viking
Press, 1950. 439 p.
50-8918 PN4874.P86M53 1950
Ernie Pyle (1900-1945) became famous during
World War II for his work as a war correspondent.
A large mass market was reached with his books
Here Is Your War (1943), Brave Men (1944), and
the posthumous, postwar Last Chapter (1946).
Pyle was killed in the Pacific theater of the war
shortly before its close. His Home Country (1947)
was a selection of articles published from 1935 to
1940, and it reflected the author's travels about
America.
2746. MAX CARLTON MILLER, 1901-
Max Miller writes autobiographical-repor-
torial books in a clear, modern journalistic style that
reveals his quiet humor, unpretentiousness, mod-
erate philosophizing, frustration in a complex world,
his defeat, and his identity with the common man
and underdog. His books are mainly anecdotes and
sketches of various persons, places, and events with
which he has been connected; sometimes they
approximate essays, and sometimes they approxi-
mate the short-story form. A number of these have
reflected his service with the Navy, such as Day-
break for Our Carrier (1944), describing life on an
airplane carrier; The Far Shore (1945), the Nor-
mandy and Southern France invasions as seen by
naval officer Miller; I'm Sure We've Met Before
(1951), which presents what he saw of the Korean
War; and Always the Mediterranean ( 1952), a story
of his experiences with the American Sixth Fleet.
Other books include The Man on the Barge (1935),
a view of humanity and the meek as seen by a
bargeman; A Stranger Came to Port ( 1938), a novel
about a businessman who escapes to a houseboat,
a story which enables the author to give a good
picture of the tuna industry and other harbor mari-
time activities; Harbor of the Sun (1940), a history
of San Diego, California; Reno (1941), a pictur-
esque-anecdotal story of Reno, Nevada; The Town
with the Funny Name (1948), the author's non-
guidebook view of La Jolla, California; The Cruise
of the Cow (195 1 ), a story of a cruise in the Gulf
of California; and Speal^ to the Earth (1955), which
deals with the petroleum industry.
2747. I cover the waterfront. New York, Dutton,
1932. 204 p.
32-26658 PS3525.I554I2 1932
A San Diego newspaperman's humorous account
in sketch form of life along the waterfront; the work
has become a reportorial classic.
2748. The beginning of a mortal. New York,
Dutton, 1933. 253 p. illus.
33-33492 PS3525-T554Z5 *933
Chiidhood and youth in a Washington State lum-
ber town, on a Montana homestead, and in the small
California town where he began as a cub reporter.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 237
2749. He went away for a while. New York, Dut-
ton, 1933. 248 p.
33-6648 PS3525.I554H4 1933c
A story of the author's withdrawal to a coastal
shack for purposes of meditation, interspersed with
the thoughts resulting therefrom.
2750. The second house from the corner. New
York, Dutton, 1934. 254 p.
34-25695 PS3525.I554S4 1934
Autobiographical story of a householder in the
San Diego suburbs, told mainly in terms of the
people he meets and observes.
2751. Fog and men on Bering Sea. New York,
Dutton, 1936. 271 p. illus.
36-4911 F951.M56
A personal picture of the Alaskan coast and the
Bering Sea.
2752. For the sake of shadows. New York, Dut-
ton, 1936. 200 p.
36-21 171 PS3525.I554F6 1936a
An account of the author's experiences as a script-
writer in Hollywood.
2753. Land where time stands still. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1943. 236 p. illus.
43-4562 F1246.M7
The record of a trip from San Diego, through the
desert country, to Cape San Lucas at the tip of Lower
California, with a view of the passive life of the
Indian natives.
2754. No matter what happens. New York, Dut-
ton, 1949. 249 p. illus.
49-5277 PS3525.I554Z52
I An informal, rambling autobiography.
755. JOSEPH MITCHELL, 1908-
Mitchell's career has been largely as a New
fork City reporter and as a New Yorker author.
-Jis humorous, descriptive works offer a vivid im-
>ression of his observations of New York City.
rhis appears not only in his reportorial writing, but
lso in his semi-fiction, such as McSorley's Wonder-
ul Saloon (1943) and Old Mr. Flood (1948).
756. My ears are bent. New York, Sheridan
House, 1938. 284 p.
38-4768 PS3525.I9714M9 1938
L757. JAMES MONAGHAN, 1891-
James Monaghan, who often signs himself
ly Monaghan, is a historian long concerned with
linois history. His scholarly, well-written works
iclude Diplomat in Carpet Slippers: Abraham
Lincoln Deals With Foreign Affairs (1945) and
Civil War on the Western Border (1955). He has
also produced a two volume Lincoln Bibliography,
1839-1939 ( 1943-45) and a pictorial work, This is
Illinois (1949).
2758. Last of the bad men, by Jay Monaghan.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1946. 293 p.
illus. 46-4731 F595.H8M6
At head of tide: The legend of Tom Horn.
"List of sources": p. 275-284.
The life of Tom Horn (1860-1903), a Wyoming
professional assassin who worked for a fee.
2759. The Great Rascal; the life and adventures
of Ned Buntline. Boston, Little, Brown,
1952, ci95i. 353 p. illus.
52-5003 PS2156.J2Z75
A biography of Edward Zane Carroll Judson
(1823-1886), a low quality, dime-novel literary
hack and general rogue of great popularity during
the 19th century.
Bibliography: p. 312-333.
2760. HARRIET MONROE, 1860-1936
Harriet Monroe was a minor Chicago poet
who established a reputation for herself by founding
in 1912 and editing Poetry: A Magazine of Verse.
Through this she "discovered" many of the more
important American poets of the period and helped
to find an audience for them. Her autobiography
thus becomes a reflection of the literary life of the
period.
2761. A poet's life; seventy years in a changing
world. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 488
p. illus. 38-27186 PS2423.A4 1938
2762. ANNA MARY (ROBERTSON) MOSES,
1860-
Familiarly known as "Grandma Moses," Anna
Moses is an upstate New York country woman who
took up painting at 80, and thus as an artist began
one of America's phenomenal success stories.
2763. Grandma Moses: my life's history. Edited
by Otto Kaliir. New York, Harper, 1952.
140 p. illus. 51-11940 ND237.M;S \ 3
JOSEPH NELSON
2764. Backwoods teacher. Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott, 1949. 288 p.
49-10524 PZ^.N^^sH.u-
The experiences ot .1 t; a< her during his : rsi yeai
in an Ozark hillbilly community in Missouri.
238 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2765. GEORGE HERBERT PALMER, 1842-
1933
For more than 40 years Palmer taught philosophy
at Harvard, working with men such as Roycc,
James, and Santayana. While he wrote a number
of philosophical, literary, and educational works, he
is remembered most for his two "personal" books.
2766. The life of Alice Freeman Palmer. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 354 p. illus.
8-12560 LD7212.7 1882.P2
A life of the author's wife, who died in 1902.
The book devotes much attention to her years as
president of Wellesley College and her work to build
it up. It is also a record of the personal relationship
between two individuals with separate careers.
2767. The autobiography of a philosopher. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 137 p.
30-23585 B945.P24A3 1930
A somewhat poetic work which not only shows
how the author came to his beliefs, but which also
depicts a method of education and the principles by
which a major university department of philosophy
was built up.
2768. WILLIAM BELMONT PARKER, 1871-
1934
Most extensively engaged in his lifetime in
Hispanic activities (including the editing of a com-
prehensive series of Latin American biographies),
Parker also produced some American biography.
This included The Life and Public Services of Jus-
tin Smith Morrill (1944); Morrill (1810-1898) was
a New Englander iong known as the "father of the
Senate" and familiar with many of the famous of his
day.
2769. Edward Rowland Sill; his life and work.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915. 307 p.
illus. 15-4670 PS2838.P3
Sill (1841-1887) was a very unprolific poet from
Windsor, Conn., who wrote in an Emersonian-
Tennysonian tradition, producing some good minor
poetry and light essays. Much of his life was passed
in Ohio and California. This biography is made up
largely of his letters, with Parker supplying con-
necting passages. Parker also edited The Poetical
Worths (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1917) of Sill.
2770. JAMES PARTON, 1822-1891
Parton was the first professional biographer
in America, and he has been called the father of
American biography. With The Life of Horace
Greeley (1855), he established himself as a literary
force and one of the best paid (and more prolific)
authors of his period in America. His lively, real-
istic, well-written, and well-organized volumes still
hold a position in literature, but some also remain
major sources. His first work in particular, and
his life work in general form a historical landmark
in this country's literature. While he ventured into
other fields, his work was mainly biographical, oc-
casionally collective. He usually wrote about Amer-
icans, although his life of Voltaire (1881, 2 v.) was
a major work.
2771. Life and times of Aaron Burr . . . New
York, Mason, 1858. 696 p.
7-14130 E302.6.B9P27
2772. Life of Andrew Jackson. New York,
Mason, i860. 3 v. 11-16615 E382.P27
2773. Life and times of Benjamin Franklin. New
York, Mason, 1864. 2 v.
10-5354 E302.6.F8P27
2774. Famous Americans of recent times. Boston, '
Ticknor & Fields, 1867. 473 p.
6-1407 E339.P27
2775. Life of Thomas Jefferson, third President oL
the United States. Boston, Osgood, 1874.
764 p. 11-22428 E332.P27,
2776. Flower, Milton Embick. James Parton, the
father of modern biography. Durham, Duke
University Press, 1951. 253 p. illus. (Duke Uni-
versity publications) 51-14735 E175.5.P3F6'
Bibliography: p. [203J-2H.
ANGELO M. PELLEGRINI
2777. Immigrant's return. New York, Macmillan,
1951. 269 p. 51-7138 E184.I8P4
Autobiography of a college professor who emi-
grated from Italy, as a member of a peasant family,
to Washington State at the age of nine in 1913.
The book includes an account of the author's return
to Italy on a Guggenheim fellowship, and of his
search for a definition of "Americanism."
2778. WILLIAM ALEXANDER PERCY, 1885-
1942
Percy came from a prominent upper-class family
and was well aware of his social responsibilities
During his life he was best known for his poetry
which was conservative in tenor; a volume of
Collected Poems appeared in 1943.
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 239
2779. Lanterns on the levee; recollections of a
planter's son. New York, Knopf, 1941.
347 P- 4I"457° .PS353!-E65Z5 x94*
An autobiography that depicts life in the Missis-
sippi delta, and reflects the Southern "aristocrat's"
view of life.
2780. LIZETTE WOODWORTH REESE, 1856-
1935
As a minor poetess of considerable quality Lizette
Woodworth Reese was well known through much
of her long and relatively placid career for her short
neo-Victorian lyrics. A volume of Selected Poems
appeared in 1926, to be followed by poetry in vol-
umes such as White April (1930), Pastures (1933),
and The Old House in the Country (1936).
2781. A Victorian village. New York, Farrar &
Rinehart, 1929. 285 p.
29-20040 PS2693.V5 1929
Reminiscences of the author's childhood in Mary-
land, her teaching career in Waverly (near Balti-
more), and her career as a writer. The town of
Waverly again figures prominently in her somewhat
autobiographical The Yor\ Road (1931), a volume
of essays, sketches, and poems on the village.
2782. JOHN ANDREW RICE, 1888-
Rice was raised in a South Carolina environ-
ment that still lived in the past. As an adult he be-
came a liberal educator, finally cooperating in the
founding of an experimental college. While much
of his autobiography deals with the academic world
of the twentieth century as he knew it, a very large
part of it is devoted to his "eighteenth century" back-
ground.
2783. I came out of the eighteenth century. New
York, Harper, 1942. 341 p.
42-36390 LA23i7.R4:A}
Autobiography.
2784. JACOB AUGUST RIIS, 1849-1914
Riis was a Danish-American journalist with
a strong interest in social reform, particularly as it
pertained to the worse aspects of urban life. In be-
half of his interests he wrote a number of books de-
scribing such things as city slums.
2785. The making of an American. Now York,
Macmillan, 1901. xiii, 44 ^ p. illus.
1-26930 CT275.R6A3 1901
Autobiography.
2786. MARY (ROBERTS) RINEHART, 1876-
Mary Roberts Rinehart is a very popular and
prolific, and hence very well paid, novelist who has
written to entertain, rather than to create literature.
2787. My story; a new edition and seventeen new
years. New York, Rinehart, 1948. 570 p.
illus. 48-93J3 PS3535-I73Z5 x948
First edition: 1931.
2788. ANDREW DENNY RODGERS, 1900-
Andrew Denny Rodgers III, has, as an
author, specialized in biographies of people con-
cerned with the botanical sciences. His scholarly
works regularly include much related material on
the special field of the biographee. He has also
written some poetry, such as Rocf^s Before the Man-
sion (1940), a long poem which reflects the history
of Ohio.
2789. John Merle Coulter, missionary in science.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944.
321 p. A44-2293 QK.31.C87R6
Coulter (1851-1928) was a botanist who was
president of Indiana University and of Lake Forest
College before he became a professor at the Uni-
versity of Chicago in 1885, where he remained to the
time of his death.
2790. Liberty Hyde Bailey; a story of American
plant sciences. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1949. 506 p. 49-1927 SB63.B3R6
Bailey (1858-1955) was a Michigan botanist and
horticulturist. In 1888 he became professor of
horticulture at Cornell University, becoming dean
and director of the College of Agriculture of Cor-
nell in 1903, from which he retired in 1913. He
continued his scientific writings and remained gen-
erally active in his field long after his retirement
The book reflects much of agricultural research,
conservation, and the development of agricultural
colleges.
2791. Bernhard Eduard Fernow, a story of North
American forestry. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 195 1. 623 p.
Agr5i~5i7 SD129.F4R6
Fernow (1851-1923) was the wrs' professional
forester in North Ann rica.
2792. I'.rwin Frink Smith; a story of North Ameri-
can plant pathology. Philadelphia, Ameri-
can Philosophical Society, 1952. 675 p. (Memoirs
of the American Philosophical Society, v. }i)
52-11937 QK31.S58R63
Ql I.Pol .\ V. }!
240 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Smith (1854-1927) was a New York plant
pathologist who for much of his career was em-
ployed by the National Government.
2793. THEODORE ROOSEVELT, 1858-1919
Theodore Roosevelt, President of the United
States from 1901 to 1909, was born in New York
City, but is mainly associated with the open country.
A great sportsman and exponent of the outdoor life,
he expressed his philosophy through the essays in
American Ideals (1897) and The Strenuous Life
(1900), as well as his numerous autobiographical
writings. His more intellectual side may be seen
in his biographies, such as The Life of Thomas Hart
Benton (1887); his literary and general essays, as in
A Boo\-Lover's Holidays in the Open (1916); and
other writings. A "Memorial Edition" of his works
appeared in 1923-26 in 24 volumes, and a "National
Edition" in 20 volumes appeared in 1926.
2794. Hunting trips of a ranchman; sketches of
sport on the northern cattle plains. New
York, Putnam, 1885. 318 p. illus.
31-32858 SK45.R6 1885
An early volume recording some of his big-game
hunting in the Midwest. Subsequent volumes of his
hunting adventures include The Wilderness Hunter
(1893), Ranch Life and the Hunting Trail (1902),
African Game Trails (1910), and Through the Bra-
zilian Wilderness (1914). Donald Day has edited
a selection of these writings in The Hunting and
Exploring Adventures of Theodore Roosevelt (New
York, Dial Press, 1955. 431 p.). Most of these
works reveal not only his activities as a sportsman,
but also his interests as a naturalist.
2795. Theodore Roosevelt; an autobiography.
New York, Macmillan, 1913. 647 p. illus.
13-24840 E757.R79
2796. CONSTANCE MAYFIELD ROURKE,
1885-1941
Constance M. Rourke wrote a number of bio-
graphical and historical works interpreting the
American scene. While most of these are pre-
dominantly biographical, American Humor (1931)
is a historical study of the national character as
revealed through its humor. Some of her work,
such as Davy Crockett (1934), was aimed mainly
at a youthful audience, although a scholarly note
at the end discusses sources and the validity of
various parts of the myth.
2797. Trumpets of jubilee: Henry Ward Beecher,
Harriet Beecher Stowe, Lyman Beecher,
Horace Greeley, P. T. Barnum. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1927. 445 p. 27-9542 E176.R85
Many aspects of American life in the early and
middle 19th century are shown in this study of
some of its leaders.
2798. Troupers of the Gold Coast; or, The rise
of Lotta Crabtree. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1928. 262 p. illus.
28-22487 PN2287.L65R6
The history of the early California theater is given
through this biographical study of a leading enter-
tainer.
2799. MARI SUSETTE SANDOZ, 1907-
Mari Sandoz was the daughter of a Nebraska
immigrant farmer who had been a Swiss medical
student. Most of her writings vividly portray the
frontier life she early knew. These include novels
such as Slogum House (1937) and Miss Morissa,
Doctor of the Gold Trail (1955), which have a bio-
graphical basis in history; and her more historical
writings such as Cheyenne Autumn (1953), the
tragic, slightly fictionalized history of the flight back
to their native grounds of some Cheyenne Indians
whom the American Army had sent to Indian Ter-
ritory, and The Buffalo Hunters (1954), a story of
the disappearing bison and the concomitant disap-
pearance of the Plains Indians.
2800. Old Jules. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935.
424 p. illus. 35-27361 F666.S34
A biography of the author's father, Jules Ami
Sandoz (i857?-i928).
2801. Crazy Horse, the strange man of the Oglalas.
New York, Knopf, 1942. 428 p.
42-5340 E90.C94S3
Bibliography: p. 417-422.
A biography of Crazy Horse (ca. 1 842-1 877), a
famous Oglala Sioux Indian chief.
2802. HENRY ROWE SCHOOLCRAFT, 1793-
1864
Henry R. Schoolcraft took part in a number of
exploratory trips through the Mississippi Valley area
while it was still largely a frontier wilderness. His
reports on these and his extensive books on Ameri-
can Indians constituted a major contribution to the
knowledge of the frontier and of the Indians.
Longfellow and many other authors were influenced
by and made use of these writings. In 1851 School-
craft published a volume of Personal Memoirs of a
Residence of Thirty Years with the Indian Tribes,
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY
/ 24I
which took a rough diary form and thus supplied
a near-autobiography of this scholar-frontiersman.
2803. Narrative journal of travels through the
northwestern regions of the United States,
extending from Detroit through the great chain of
American lakes to the sources of the Mississippi
River, in the year 1820. East Lansing, Michigan
State College Press, 1953. 520 p.
53-1985 F484.3.S37 1953
Included in the appendixes are letters, journals,
newspaper accounts, official reports, and other
materials relating to the expedition.
First edition: 1821.
2804. CHARLES COLEMAN SELLERS, 1903-
Sellers has written on such diverse biograph-
ical subjects as Charles Willson Peale ( 1947) and
Benedict Arnold (1930).
2805. Lorenzo Dow, the bearer of the Word.
New York, Minton, Balch, 1928. 275 p.
illus. 28-24263 BX8495.D57S4
Lorenzo Dow (1777-1834) was a Methodist min-
ister who toured America and labored long and
rigidly in behalf of his God. His once-popular
writings have a confused history in alterations of
text and titles, but of most interest is History of
Cosmopolite, or The Dealings of God, Man, and the
Devil, probably the two best-known titles under
which his autobiographical work may be identified.
Supplementing these is Vicissitudes Exemplified:
Or the Journey of Life (1814), by his "Rib," Peggy
Dow.
2808. CORNELIA OTIS SKINNER, 1901-
Cornelia Otis Skinner is a stage actress who
has produced a number of humorous autobiographi-
cal books. These are light nonfiction, often in the
form of sketches in series, designed to entertain,
rather than seriously to reflect any aspect of society,
or to be instructional in any other way. However,
they nevertheless do to some extent reflect upper-
income society and the entertainment world.
2809. Our hearts were young and gay, by Cornelia
Otis Skinner and Emily Kimbrough. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1942. 247 p.
42-36388 PS3537.K533O8
2810. Family circle. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1948. 310 p. 48-8306 PN2287.S4A3
281 1. MONICA (ITOI) SONE, 1919-
Mrs. Sone was raised in Seattle, Washing-
ton; her parents, who were Japanese, ran a small
hotel in a poor district. Mrs. Sone's autobiography
reveals much of the West Coast conflict of cultures
and races that occurred between whites and Orien-
tals, climaxing in the family's incarceration in a
temporary camp in Idaho during World War II.
The book is also a record of the Americanization
of a group highly divergent culturally from the
basically European group that dominates, with its
variations, in this country.
2812. Nisei daughter.
1953- 238 p.
Autobiography.
Boston, Litde, Brown,
52-12618 E184.J3S6
2806. VINCENT SHEEAN, 1899-
Vincent Sheean established the journalistic
type of book wherein the author's life is the nexus
for observations of world events by a news reporter.
Considered as one of the best such writers, Sheean
has also written straight biography and much fic-
tion, such as the novels Bird of the Wilderness
(1941), Rage of the Soul (1952), and Lily (1954).
2807. Personal history. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doublcday, Doran, 1935. 403 p.
35-27062 PN4874.S46A3
London edition (H. Hamilton) has tide: In
Search of History.
Other volumes employing this personal-narrative
technique include Between the Thunder and the Sun
(1943) and This House Against This House (1946),
both of which deal with problems of World War II.
431240—00 17
2813. BERT STILES, 1920 or 21-1944
Stiles was an American bomber pilot in
Europe during the Second World War, in the course
of which he was killed at the age of 23. His book
is not only an account of war in the air, but is
also the record of a youth's hopes and fears for the
world, revealing a personality combination of
idealism, unusual sensitivity, and occasional
asperity.
2814. Serenade to the big bird. New York, Nor-
ton [1952, ci947J 216 p.
52-239 D790.S9 1952
First published in London in 1947.
2815. IRVING STONE, 1903-
Stone gave up a teaching career in economics
to become a writer, primarily of plavs and short
stories. For a while he wrote pulp fiction in order
242 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
to finance his career. With Lust for Life (1934),
a fictionalized life of Van Gogh, he emerged as a
biographer. This was followed by Sailor on Horse-
back (1938), a biography of novelist Jack London
(q. v.). His goal was now to write biography that
was interesting and vital as a novel. This led to
an increasing fictional element in his otherwise
carefully researched works, but also to greater ac-
claim and fame. While his biographies rapidly put
him to the fore among fictional biographers, and
were praised as novels, his straight novels in gen-
eral received less attention.
2816. Clarence Darrow for the defense, a biog-
raphy. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1941. xi, 570 p. 4i-20757Law
Darrow ( 1857-1938) was a liberal agnostic lawyer
who took part in some of the more famous trials of
his period. His autobiography, The Story of My
Life, appeared in 1932.
2817. They also ran ; the story of the men who were
defeated for the presidency. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 389 p. ports.
43-8018 E176.S87
2818. Immortal wife, the biographical novel of
Jessie Benton Fremont. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1944. 456 p.
44-8140 PZ3.S87872I1T1
Jessie Fremont (1 824-1902) was the wife of the
American explorer and geographer, John Fremont.
2819. Adversary in the house. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1947. 432 p.
47-31015 PZ3.S87872Ad
A fictional biography of Eugene Victor Debs
(1855-1926), a leading Socialist who was five times
a candidate for the presidency.
2820. The President's lady; a novel about Rachel
and Andrew Jackson. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1951. 338 p. 51-6885 PZ3.S87872Pr
2821. Love is eternal; a novel about Mary Todd
Lincoln and Abraham Lincoln. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954. 468 p.
54-9678 PZ3.S87872L0
2822. GEORGE TEMPLETON STRONG, 1820-
1875
Strong started a diary while at Columbia College
and continued it through most of the rest of his life.
One of the classic American diaries, it reflects life
in New York City at that period, especially as seen
by a member of the upper classes. Except for a
brief overlapping period, it follows and supple-
ments Philip Hone's Diary (q. v.).
2823. Diary; edited by Allan Nevins and Milton
Halsey Thomas. New York, Macmillan,
1952. 4 v. illus. 52-11147 E415.9.S86A3
Contents. — 1. Young man in New York, 1835—
1849. — 2. The turbulent fifties, 1850-1859. — 3. The
Civil War, 1860-1865. — 4. Post-war years, 1865-
1875.
2824. IDA MINERVA TARBELL, 1 857-1 944
Ida M. Tarbell began her auctorial career in
association with the muckrakers, producing, in addi-
tion to her journalistic work, a two-volume History
of the Standard Oil Company (1904); this reflected
what was to remain a basic concern with industry.
Because of her interests, her autobiography showed
much of the social issues of the day. Her late bi-
ographies were inclined to present in a favorable
light and with praise the subjects, who supplied her
with information. In addition to industry and social
problems, she retained a lifelong interest in Lincoln,
revealed in formerly popular books such as The Life
of Abraham Lincoln (1900. 2 v.) and In the Foot-
steps of the Lin coins ( 1924).
2825. The life of Elbert H. Gary; the story of steel.
New York, Appleton, 1925. xii, 361 p.
illus. 25-22357 HD9520.G3T3
2826. Owen D. Young, a new type of industrial
leader. New York, Macmillan, 1932.
xiv, 353 p. 32-26673 E748.Y74T3
2827. All in the day's work; an autobiography.
New York, Macmillan, 1939. 412 p. illus.
39-27284 PS3539.A58Z5 1939
2828. RICHARD TAYLOR, 1826-1879
Taylor's memoirs of the Civil War and the
Reconstruction period form one of the classics of the
South's numerous Civil War books. Prejudiced and
bitter in his account of the Reconstruction era,
Taylor is noted for his account of the Valley cam-
paign of 1862.
2829. Destruction and reconstuction: personal ex-
periences of the late war. New York, Ap-
pleton, 1879. 274 p. 2-22621 E470.T24
2830.
Edited by Richard B. Harwell.
New York, Longmans, Green, 1955. xxxii,
380 p. 55-5755 E47°-T24 J955
BIOGRAPHY AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY / 243
2831. STANLEY VESTAL, 1887-
Vestal is the pseudonym of Walter Stanley
Campbell. An educator in Oklahoma, he has used
his real name for a number of textbooks and
scholarly works. His pseudonym is used for books
about the West, particularly the old Southwest.
These include many biographical works about the
pioneers, explorers, trappers, Indian chiefs, etc., in-
cluding books such as Kit Carson, the Happy War-
rior of the Old West (1928), Warpath; the True
Story of the Fighting Sioux Told in a Biography of
Chief White Bull (1934), King of the Fur Traders,
the Deeds and Deviltry of Pierre Esprit Radisson
(1940), Bigfoot Wallace (1942), and Jim Bridger,
Mountain Man (1946).
2332. Sitting Bull, champion of the Sioux, a biog-
raphy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1932.
xvi, 350 p. illus. 32-25143 E99.D1S627
2833. Joe Meek; the merry mountain man, a biog-
raphy. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers,
1952. 336 p. illus. 52-5211 F880.M513
depicts his childhood in New Jersey, life in the North
Woods, his home in Boston, people he has known,
and in general the life of a conservative-liberal
American.
2838. The open heart. Boston, Little, Brown,
1955. 236 p. 55-10760 PN4874.W369Z5
2839. WALTER FRANCIS WHITE, 1893-
White has achieved fame as general secre-
tary of the National Association for the Advance-
ment of Colored People and as a Negro white enough
to pass as a white, who has nevertheless chosen to
be a Negro and to work actively in behalf of other
Negroes. His autobiography is accordingly a pres-
entation of his view of race relations in America
since the early part of the century. He has written
a number of other books on the general subject,
including How Far the Promised Land? (1955).
2840. A man called White, the autobiography of
Walter White. New York, Viking Press,
1948. 382 p. 48-8621 E185.97.W6A3
2834. ANTHONY F. C. WALLACE, 1923-
Wallace as a biographer uses psychological
and anthropological knowledge in an attempt to
understand his characters and their situations.
2835. King of the Delawares: Teedyuscung, 1700-
1763. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1949. 305 p. maps.
49-49266 E99.D2T4
Teedyuscung was a Delaware chief who tried to
harmonize the differences between the whites and
the Indians.
CHARLES WASHBURN
2836. Come into my parlor; a biography of the aris-
tocratic Everleigh sisters of Chicago. New
York, National Library Press, 1936. 255 p.
37-76 HQ146.C4W3
A study of a case of prostitution in Chicago.
2837. EDWARD AUGUSTUS WEEKS, 1898-
Edward Weeks has long been known as
1 editor of The Atlantic Monthly. His autobiography
at times takes the form of familiar essays; in it he
REBECCA (YANCEY) WILLIAMS, 1899-
2841. The vanishing Virginian. New York, Dut-
ton, 1940. 277 p. 40-32286 F231.Y35
Sketches of the author's father, reflecting life
in Virginia early in the 20th century.
2842. Carry me back. New York, Dutton, 1942.
320 p. 42-21571 PS3545 .J5343Z5
Autobiographical book about the author's child-
hood in Lynchburg, Virginia.
2843. HANS ZINSSER, 1 878-1940
Zinsser was a doctor, later a bacteriologist,
who did much work abroad as well as in America.
His first book, Rats, Lice, and History (1935), is
an unusually well-written and witty "biography" of
typhus which uses Sterne's Tristram Shandy for a
model.
2844. As I remember him. Boston, Little, Brown,
1940. 443 p. 4°"27536 Ri54-7oM
An autobiographical pseudo-biography of "R.
S.," this book reflects an American scientific hu-
manist's outlook on life, and it also gives much on
the progress of medicine.
V
Periodicals and Journalism
««
&
A. Newspapers: General 2845-2850
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics 2851-2865
C. Individual Newspapers 2866-2876
D. Newspapermen 2877-2894
E. Foreign Language Periodicals 2895-2899
F. The Practice of Journalism 2900-2912
G. Magazines: General 2913-2919
H. Individual Magazines 2920-2926
I. The Press and Society 2927-2932
4»
IN A COUNTRY which aims at a government of the people, by the people, and for the
people, an intelligent and informed public opinion is necessary, if the system is to function
properly. From our colonial beginnings the task of informing the people has in large measure
been carried on by periodicals, and, insofar as current events and public issues are concerned,
principally by newspapers. This has placed on journalism a heavy responsibility, which has
been met with varying degrees of success. The books listed in this chapter cover aspects of
the development of journalism in this country; be-
cause of the prominent role individual editors and
other journalists have played in this field, a pro-
portionately large number of biographies and auto-
biographies have been included. There are also a
number of works dealing with or reflecting problems
of press responsibility.
Other phases of the history of the press which
figure in this chapter are the provision of entertain-
ment and the diffusion of culture. Both of these
have often been closely connected, especially in the
belletristic writing which has historically constituted
a large proportion of American periodical publica-
tion. Because this field has been covered less ex-
tensively in books than have newspapers and news-
paper journalism, the history, nature, and influence
of non-newspaper journalism and its practitioners
are represented by fewer entries here than we could
have wished. However, since much of this material
overlaps with literature, journalistic editors and
authors and periodicals appear at many other points
in the bibliography, notably throughout Chapter I
on Literature and in the list of periodicals at the
end of Chapter III, Literary History and Criticism.
To a less extent this is also true of newspapermen —
and the autobiographical work of journalists such as
H. L. Mencken (especially his Newspaper Days, no.
1604) and Theodore Dreiser should be considered
as being as important to this chapter as to that section
in which they appear. Much of this additional
material may be located through the index.
A. Newspapers: General
2845. Emery, Edwin, and Henry Ladd Smith.
The press and America. New York, Pren-
tice-Hall, 1954. 794 p. alius. (Prentice-Hall jour-
nalism series) 54-10508 PN4855.E6
244
A history of American journalism for the college
student. The first 14 chapters, primarily the work
of Professor Smith, consider "The Heritage of the
American Press" and cover the years 1 704-1 865.
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 245
They are concerned less with details than with the
principles upon which the profession was founded
in this country. The remaining 15 chapters, chiefly
the work of Professor Emery, "examine modern
journalism — including newspapers, radio, television,
magazines, and news-gathering organizations — and
its role in an increasingly complex society." This
function is seen mainly as "the continuing efforts by
men and women to break down the barriers erected
to prevent the flow of information and ideas upon
which public opinion is so largely dependent."
Throughout the book, the evolution of our mass
media and the development of a tradition in Ameri-
can journalism are correlated to political, social, and
economic trends. A valuable feature of the book is
that at the end of each chapter there is provided a
fairly extensive annotated bibliography of books,
periodical articles, and monographs for further
readings.
2846. Jones, Robert W. Journalism in the United
States. New York, Dutton, 1947. xv'»
728 p. illus. 47-4147 PN4801.J6
Bibliography: p. [705] -7 16.
This history of American newspapers, their pub-
lishers and editors, emphasizes the evolution of poli-
cies and practices. The author discusses the 17th-
and early 18th-century origins of the doctrine of
freedom of the press and the growth of such tradi-
tions as the interpretation of news and the advocacy
of causes, as well as the post-Revolution assertion of
political leadership in passing upon the merits of
1 candidates, criticizing local and national administra-
• tions, and generally speaking with authority. He
points out that the editor, in colonial days "merely a
printer who issued a publication to which others
contributed the ideas," became after the Revolution
a civic as well as a political leader; and his paper,
previously a sideline made up in the main of
extracts from English newspapers together with a
column or so of advertisements of the "classified
want ad" type, thereafter supported him financially
through "pressure of advertising" and, in taking
sides on all public questions, not infrequendy abused
its privilege of freedom. Throughout the history of
American journalism, however, many editors have
striven for the ideals of accuracy and the public
good.
2847. Mott, Frank Luther. American journalism;
a history of newspapers in the United States
through 260 years: 1690 to 1950. Rev. ed. New
York, Macmillan, 1950. xiv, 835 p. illus.
50-7326 PN4855.M63 1950
"Bibliographical notes" at end of chapters.
Designed especially for use as a teaching aid, this
book combines certain attributes of a reference tool
with a comprehensive and authoritative history of
American journalism, principally newspapers. Ar-
rangement is chronological by chapter within 10
sections, each marked off by events which ushered
in a new period. Besides providing brief histories
of individual newspapers and their makers, the
author deals with: format and materials; concepts,
coverage, and content of news; commentary on
public affairs; provision of entertainment; advertis-
ing; and the relations between the press and the
government, and the press and the public. Dean
Mott also describes such trends of development as:
the change in the status of editor from combined
printer and entrepreneur to full-time professional;
the rise in journalistic prestige during the Revolu-
tion; the emergence of the daily paper and the edi-
torial in the early Republic; the advent of the penny
press, sensational journalism, and the reporting of
sports and society events in the 1830's; and, in the
1860's and 70's, the final triumph of news over edi-
torials as the primary function of American news-
papers. An almost equally massive textbook,
Alfred McClung Lee's The Daily Newspaper in
America (New York, Macmillan, 1937. xiv, 797
p.), which has unfortunately not been brought up
to date in a revised edition, approaches the subject
from the sociological point of view. "Significant
developments in the manufacture of newspapers,
in their advertising and publishing departments,
and in society at large are here related to trends in
editorial policy."
2848. Stewart, Kenneth, and John Tebbel. Makers
of modern journalism. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1952. 514 p. (Prentice-Hall journalism
series) 52-8617 PN4871.S7
The authors state in their foreword: "This book
is a history of American journalism told in terms of
men and motives. It is a biographical history, in-
tended to encompass the story of newspapers in
America (and a few of the significant magazine,
radio, and television leaders) by means of the inter-
connected lives and times of the men who have
made, and are making, the free press of this coun-
try." After a brief survey of the colonial press and
the early years of the Republic, the book devotes six
chapters to late 19th- and early 20th-century figures
such as the Bennetts, Greeley, Dana, Pulitzer,
Hearst, and Raymond. There follow chapters on
the development of journalism outside the North-
east. The more recently established chains and
prominent editors throughout the Nation arc next
considered. In the closing chapters some editors of
246 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
magazines, columnists, and radio-television journal-
ists are discussed.
2849. Villard, Oswald Garrison. The disap-
pearing daily; chapters in American news-
paper evolution. New York, Knopf, 1944. 285 p.
44-4038 PN4855.V47
This anecdotal report on the American press
brings up to 1944 Mr. Villard's earlier work, Some
Newspapers and Newspaper-Men, new and rev. ed.
(New York, Knopf, 1926. 335 p.), and illuminates
trends in "what was once a profession but is now a
business." The noted editor and journalist finds
these mainly negative: an "alarming mortality"
among the dailies, with an accompanying tendency
toward monopoly; the "appalling" loss of journal-
istic influence and prestige caused by the "reac-
tionary and selfish character of much of the press";
and "marked deterioration" in the character and ac-
curacy of reporting and editorials. The author ex-
presses candid opinions of the press associations
and of various newspapers, their publishers, editors,
reporters, columnists, and correspondents. The
recent lack of great editors he ascribes to the "com-
mercialization of the press and its domination by
the owners for whom the editors are but hired men."
2850. Wolseley, Roland E. The journalist's book-
shelf; an annotated and selected bibliography
of United States journalism. 6th ed. Chicago,
Quill & Scroll Foundation, 1955. 212 p.
55-10927 Z6940.W86 1955
First published in 1939.
A comprehensive list of the principal books per-
taining to American journalism, intended as "a
general guide for lay readers in journalism, work-
ing journalists, and scholars wishing to know of
the major books published up to, but not including
1955." The books, each provided with a brief
descriptive or evaluative note, are entered within
26 sections. Twenty-three correspond to the usual
divisions of the field, such as business journalism
or editorial writing; one lists biographies and auto-
biographies of journalists; one includes fiction and
other creative writing about journalism both for
adults and children; and the last is a miscellany.
Cross references are provided, but the entries are
not numbered. An introductory essay deplores the
poverty of the literature, both as to quantity (only
about 2500 titles in all) and quality, and suggests
that journalism offers a challenge as a subject to
American novelists, historians, biographers, and
technical writers.
B. Newspapers: Periods, Regions, and Topics
2851. Andrews, J. Cutler. The North reports the
Civil War. [Pittsburgh] University of Pitts-
burgh Press, 1955. 813 p. illus.
55-6873 E609.A6
Bibliography: p. 761-780.
Based upon manuscript as well as published
sources, this is a massive yet lively and anecdotal
chronicle of the Northern "special correspondents"
of the Civil War and their reporting. The author
notes the journalistic revolution caused by abnormal
wartime conditions: an immense increase in news-
paper circulation and consequent improvement in
printing and makeup, a widespread introduction of
Sunday and afternoon editions, and a realization
that the prime requisite of a newspaper is prompt
and adequately reported news. The newspapers'
eagerness to outdo each other in news enterprise
induced considerable rivalry among the Washington
correspondents, whom Professor Andrews char-
acterizes as preponderandy honest reporters circum-
scribed by "capricious censorship" and surrounded
by a "fog of misinformation." The more than 300
roving field reporters who accompanied the North-
ern forces he calls "a heterogeneous lot," who, in
many instances, endeavored to ingratiate themselves
with the officers; their shortcomings are ascribed to
the irresponsibility of their editors. The volume
reprints numerous extracts illustrating how the
major campaigns of the war appeared to the re-
porters accompanying the Union armies. Bernard
A. Weisberger's Reporters for the Union (Boston,
Litde, Brown, 1953. 316 p.), a briefer and less
systematic treatment, emphasizes rather the news-
papers' point of view, contrasting the appearance of
the war in the pages of Horace Greeley's New Yor\
Tribune and other Republican papers, with its ap-
pearance in James Gordon Bennett's New Yor\
Herald and other Democratic papers. A contem-
porary biography of one of the leading Civil War
correspondents is William Elliot Griffis' Charles
Carleton Coffin, War Correspondent, Traveller,
Author, and Statesman (Boston, Estes & Lauriat,
1898. 357 p.). As a result of his wartime experi-
ence, Coffin (1823-1896) became one of the most
popular American historians of the period.
2852. Brigham, Clarence S. Journals and journey-
men; a contribution to the history of early
American newspapers. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1950. xiv, 114 p.
50-10321 PN4858.B7
The A. S. W. Rosenbach Fellowship in
Bibliography.
Concerned with certain aspects of early American
newspaper history, this collection of 15 informal
lectures is an outgrowth of the author's History and
Bibliography of American Newspapers, 1690-1820
(Worcester, Mass., American Antiquarian Society,
1947. 2 v.). He discusses late 18th- and early
19th-century efforts to record newspaper history and
goes on to such matters as the similarity between
early and modern newspaper tides, financial diffi-
culties of the early publishers, time lag in the news,
scurrility and political partisanship, and the careers
of the 32 women who served as newspaper pub-
lishers in the years 1739-1820. Mr. Brigham re-
marks upon the historical value of the infinitely
varied advertisements, the biographical and genea-
logical importance of the marriage and death
records, and the political and social insights afforded
by the Carriers' Addresses or New Year's Verses;
and he indicates both scholarly accomplishments
and lacunae in the field.
2853. Clark, Thomas D. The southern country
editor. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1948.
365 p. facsims. 48-8524 PN4893.C5
Bibliography: p. 339-346.
The rural press has been an important factor
throughout the country, but through much of the
South it was long the dominant and almost the only
journalistic expression to be found, for the region
was until recendy overwhelmingly rural and
agrarian. This makes a study of country editors
more important for this area than for others, where
metropolitan papers served a larger immediate
group, and competed in many cases with rural pa-
pers through distant distribution. The South also
has social problems, such as race relations and a one-
party system, which differentiate it from the rest of
the country. The handling of these problems in the
Southern rural press is discussed in some detail in
this book, which gives its general history from the
post-Civil War period to the near-present. It offers
little in the way of statistics, which are unavailable
in complete form, but is more concerned to study
particular cases and representative situations. Al-
though the author is sympathetic toward his editors,
he has not hesitated to criticize the failings of South-
ern rural journalism. Professor Clark has also pub-
lished three lectures on the part their rural news-
papers play in the lives of the Southern people, in
The Rural Press and the New South (Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1948. m p.).
12854. Cook, Elizabeth Christine. Literary in-
fluences in colonial newspapers 1 704-1750.
New York [Columbia University Press] 1912. 279
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 247
p. (Columbia University studies in English and
comparative literature) 13-2143 PN4861.C72
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1912.
Bibliography: p. 266-272.
"An attempt to describe the most typical literary
efforts, and to analyze the most typical literary in-
fluences" in nine 18th-century American weekly
newspapers: The New England Courant, The New
England Weekly Journal, The American Mercury
(Philadelphia), The Pennsylvania Gazette, The
New Yor\ Gazette, The New Yor^ Weekly Journal,
The Maryland Gazette, The Virginia Gazette, and
The South Carolina Gazette. The author demon-
strates that the colonial paper, cut off from news by
irregular communications and from politics by of-
ficial attitudes, became "a definite type of literary
weekly." The editor relied upon reprints from The
Spectator and other English works, as well as upon
imitations of the Addisonian essay, and gave space
to such traditional subjects as philosophical specula-
tion, anecdote, reminiscence, and connected narra-
tive. Miss Cook discovers in colonial diction "the
very tricks and manners of Addison and Steele,"
Pope's manner of polite formal compliment, the vein
of Butler's Hudibras, grim Swiftian humor, and the
forthright democratic spirit of The British Cato of
Gordon and Trenchard.
2855. Emery, Edwin. History of the American
Newspaper Publishers Association. Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1950.
263 P- 50-6013 Z479.E6
Bibliography: p. 251-254.
A scholarly and detailed history of the contro-
versial American Newspaper Publishers Association
which leaves the reader to draw most of his own
inferences. Chapters I-IV and IX trace the growth
of this national trade association of daily newspapers
from 1887, when it was organized "primarily to
further the business interests of its members," to
1949. The author, himself a professor of journal-
ism, finds as continuing trends of activity the promo-
tion of "group actions in the fields of advertising,
mechanical development, labor relations, newsprint
supply, circulation, and copyright and libel law."
The 10 remaining chapters ileal with matters that
have at times become special issues, such as postal
rates and regulations, radio competition for news and
advertising, development of effective and economi-
cal methods of production and transportation, and
government actions affecting the publishing busi-
ness.
2856. Griffith, Louis Turner, and John Frwin Tal-
madgc. Georgia journalism, 1763-1950.
Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1951. 413 p.
iilus. 51-8385 PN4897.G6G7
248 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
While the large papers and chains dominate the
journalistic scene by their mere bulk, the greater
part of American journalism has been carried on
in relatively small and obscure papers, which have
had the problem not only of bringing national and
foreign news to their readers, but, more important
in some respects, of presenting local news and views.
Perhaps no one state may be said to have had a
"typical" journalistic development; however, that of
Georgia is in many ways representative of develop-
ments on a state level. This study of Georgia jour-
nalism, sponsored by the Georgia Press Association,
opens with a survey, by Mr. Talmadge, of the de-
velopment of Georgia newspapers from 1763 to
1950. An expansion of Mr. Griffith's master's thesis,
Part II is a history, based upon the official minutes,
of the Georgia Press Association which was founded
in 1887 to advance the business interests of the pro-
fession. Part III, an annotated directory of Georgia
newspapers current in 1950, is a master's thesis by
Mildred Lois Miscally, revised and enlarged by Mr.
Griffith. James Johnston, editor of the first news-
paper, The Georgia Gazette, in 1763, is character-
ized as "the one important figure in early Georgia
journalism," who "more than anyone else 'established
and sustained' the newspaper as an institution on
Georgia soil." Henry W. Grady, editor of The
Atlanta Constitution during the 1870's and 8o's,
apostle of the "New South" and of the "New jour-
nalism" of Joseph Pulitzer, is considered the single
most important publicist.
2857. Hooper, Osman Casde. History of Ohio
journalism, 1793-1933. Columbus, Ohio,
Spahr & Glenn, 1933. 190 p. illus.
34-667 PN4897.O33H6
A pioneering history of Ohio journalism from its
beginnings. The author distinguishes four periods:
Jeffersonian-Federalist (1793-1815), during which
the dominant idea of the territorial newcomers was
freedom, statehood was won, and the Federalist
papers fought a losing political battle; Jacksonian-
Whig (1816-1856), when newspapers were estab-
lished to promote the cause of John Quincy Adams,
Clay, and Harrison against Jackson; Transition
(1857-1900), which saw the formation of the Re-
publican Party and the rise of the Republican reform
press, the development of newspaper service to the
community, and the appearance of evening papers;
and the Present (1901-1933), in which the party
organ per se has virtually disappeared, and com-
munity or city service is increasingly emphasized.
Very briefly, Professor Hooper outlines the achieve-
ments of such notable figures as Charles Hammond
of the Cincinnati Gazette, Edward W. Scripps of the
Cleveland Penny Press, J. W. Gray and Charles F.
Browne (Artemus Ward) of the Cleveland Plain
Dealer, and D. R. Locke (Petroleum V. Nasby) of
the Toledo Blade.
2858. Nevins, Allan. American press opinion,
Washington to Coolidge; a documentary rec-
ord of editorial leadership and criticism, 1785-1927.
Boston, Heath, 1928. xxv, 598 p. illus.
28-24815 E173.N52
A collection of editorials from American news-
papers selected according to Professor Nevins'
theory "that specimens of the best work of Greeley,
Dana, and Godkin are of immediate present-day
interest to journalists, students, and many general
readers; that some outstanding American editorials
possess qualities entitling them to permanent preser-
vation in easily accessible form; above all, that a
wide variety of typical editorials from representative
journals, chronologically arranged, will furnish a
valuable record of the history of public opinion."
Each of the four parts is introduced by a historical
essay devoted to major trends and accomplishments
of the press during its period. In the editor's
opinion, no other American newspaper has equalled
the long record of distinction maintained by The
New Yor\ Evening Post under William Coleman,
William Cullen Bryant, Carl Schurz, Edwin L.
Godkin, Rollo Ogden, and Simeon Strunsky. Pro-
fessor Nevins considers Horace Greeley preeminent
among editors for the vigor, terseness, and persua-
siveness of his writing in The New Yor\ Tribune
and for his development of the modern American
editorial page.
2859. Nevins, Allan, and Frank Weitenkampf. A
century of political cartoons; caricature in
the United States from 1800 to 1900. With 100
reproductions of cartoons. New York, Scribner,
1944. 190 p. 44-3029 E178.4.N47
In this volume a professor of American history at
Columbia University, and the former curator of
prints at the New York Public Library, have com-
bined to produce a work illustrating the develop-
ment of the 19th-century political cartoon in the
United States. Each page of text faces a page re-
producing the cartoon (in a few cases two) on which
the text is based. Many of the cartoons are an-
notated in terms of their relation to the development
of the art, as well as to the political situation with
which they deal. While the cartoons at first ap-
peared as separately published prints, with improved
graphic methods they found a home in the illus-
trated journals of the day, and eventually in the
daily newspapers. This attractive volume affords a
piquant record of the political currents of the cen-
tury, and of course exhibits the evolution of styles
in cartooning, but Professor Nevins, well-informed
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 249
as he is, does not always succeed in explaining the
more baffling aspects of these cartoons.
2860. Rosewater, Victor. History of cooperative
news-gathering in the United States. New
York, Appleton, 1930. xiv, 430 p.
30-10687 PN4855.R6
Bibliography: p. 411-416.
The book begins with a discussion of early
"systematic news-gathering." There follow chap-
ters on the early means of disseminating news, such
as horse express, railway express, transadantic
steamer, or telegraph. Subsequent chapters take up
the problem of the forming of a news association
in the 19th century, with attention concentrated on
the Associated Press. The book concludes with a
series of chapters on the major cooperative news-
gathering agencies: the Associated Press, the United
Press, and the International News Service. The
author is mainly interested in presenting the story
of the development of these agencies, and pays little
attention to cooperative work within newspaper
chains. The scope of the work does not permit any
serious analysis of the social consequences of so
great an increase in the freshness and quantity of the
news, nor of the new problems of choice and bal-
anced presentation confronting the editors of indi-
vidual papers. Deadline Every Minute; the Story
of The United Press, by Joe Alex Morris (New
York, Doubleday, 1957. 356 p.), published to mark
the completion of the Association's first half-century,
is based in large part on interviews and information
from past and present staff members, and, along
with multitudinous anecdotes of spectacular coups,
reveals much concerning the development of news
techniques.
2861. Rosten, Leo C. The Washington corre-
spondents. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1937. xx, 436 p. 37-37583 PN4899.W3C68
Bibliography: p. 393-421.
This book was written on a predoctoral fellow-
ship, and was designed as an analysis of Washington
press correspondents and their work. Because
Washington as the Nation's capital is the source of a
great pordon of the Nation's news, an unusually
large number of correspondents cover it for the Na-
tion's newspapers, news syndicates, and other media.
The first part of the book covers the historical de-
velopment and methods of Washington reporting;
it opens with a review of presidential press relations,
and proceeds to other news sources (government
agencies, sub rosa gossip, story plants, etc.). The
second part of the book is based largely on two ques-
tionnaires, and studies the backgrounds, views, and
working situations of the correspondents. The
third part attempts to discover to what degree the
(".1240—60 18
backgrounds and prejudices of the correspondents,
and such news sources as government releases and
formal conferences, affect the news which is pub-
lished. A series of appendixes tabulate the results
of the questionnaires. The author is better known
for his humorous writings published under the name
of Leonard Q. Ross.
2862. Tebbel, John W. An American dynasty.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 363
p. illus. 47-30087 PN4899.C4T83
This highly informative book opens with a de-
tailed study of Joseph Medill and the Chicago
Tribune, in which he acquired a partnership in
1855. In 1874 he assumed full control and directed
it undl his death in 1899. Medill was one of the
founders of the Republican Party, and a basic Re-
publicanism has continued in the paper and the
family to this day. Medill built his paper into a
major influence in the Midwest, and the Tribune
continues to have the largest and widest circulation
in the area, although the extent of its influence has
been disputed, since a majority of its readers seem
often to vote Democratic. After Medill's death in
1899, the Tribune was controlled until 1914 not by a
monarch, but by an editorial board consisting of
Robert W. Patterson, Medill McCormick, and James
Keeley. In 1914 control was assumed by Robert
Rutherford McCormick, who followed his grand-
father's personalized journalism, to which he added
an isolationism which at times seemed to regard the
Eastern United States as an extension of Europe. A
third part of the book is devoted to Joseph Patterson,
another grandson of Joseph Medill; Patterson ob-
tained control of the New Yor\ Daily News in 1919
and under his operation it became the most conspicu-
ous tabloid in the country. Upon his death in 1946
control of the paper passed to a board headed by his
sister, Eleanor ("Cissy") Patterson. Miss Patterson
came into journalistic prominence when she became
editor, working for the Hearst chain, of the Wash-
ington Herald in 1930; in 1937 she leased the Wash-
ington Times, so as to have an organ in which to
express herself when she disagreed with Hearst.
She purchased both these papers in 1939, combining
them as the Washington Times-Herald, which paper
she alined in the family tradition of slanted news,
comics, personalities, and mass circulation. Some
time after her death in 1948 the paper was sold to
the liberal, independent Washington Post. The
other papers, despite the death of the leading charac-
ters in An American Dynasty, continue to be edited
as before. Their importance in American jour-
nalistic history resides in the fact that their combined
circulation was surpassed only by that of the Hearst
chain, though both groups on many leading issues
ran counter to prevailing American beliefs.
25O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
2863. Turnbull, George S. History of Oregon
newspapers. Portland, Or., Binfords & Mort,
1939. 560 p. illus. 40-1256 PN4897.O73T8
A record of the progress of Oregon journalism,
1846-1939, from the founding of the pioneer Oregon
Spectator at Oregon City, the first newspaper issued
west of the Missouri River, to the operations of the
modern metropolitan press. Parts I — II are devoted
to the metropolitan newspapers, most of them dailies.
The more important journals are accorded separate
chapters, the lesser, paragraphs or even a sentence
or two. Parts III— IX are devoted to special aspects
of the subject: journalism by counties, arranged in
chronological order of the founding of their first
papers; reporting; society writing; Sunday features;
sports writing; trade and class publications; and the
growth of the newspaper business. Professor Turn-
bull emphasizes the political bent and personal jour-
nalism of the early papers, as well as the emergence
in the i88o's and 90's of the doctrine that news
gathering and writing are the primary functions of
the newspaper. He considers Harvey Whitefield
Scott, editor of the Republican Oregonian, 1865-
1872, 1877-1910, and C. S. Jackson, editor of the
Democratic Oregon Journal, 1902-1919, as perhaps
the most distinguished Oregon publicists.
2864. Watson, Elmo Scott. A history of news-
paper syndicates in the United States, 1865—
1935. Chicago, 1936. 98 p. illus.
36-18471 PN4888.S9W3 1936
Bibliography: p. 86-89.
"A directory of newspaper syndicates in the
United States": p. 90-94.
A history of American newspaper syndicates, orig-
inating in a thesis for the degree of master of sci-
ence in journalism at Northwestern University.
Chapters I — 1 1 describe the experiments of the 1840's
and 50's; the development in 1861 of an auxiliary
service of Civil War news, miscellaneous matter,
and advertising for five Wisconsin weeklies by The
Wisconsin State Journal; and the establishment in
1865, exclusively for country papers, of the first
independent newspaper syndicate by Ansel Nash
Kellogg ( 1 832-1 886). Chapters III-VIII and X
trace the expansion of syndicate operations among
city dailies as well as country weeklies in every
part of the country, the rise in numbers to some
130 businesses by 1935, and the elaboration of ma-
terial offered into more than 1,600 separate features
providing entertainment or enlightenment. Sunday
magazines and the weekday use of syndicated fic-
tion, special articles, and departmental matter have
been important factors, the author believes, in re-
ducing newspaper production costs and in stimulat-
ing circulation. The progress in mechanical means
of reproducing syndicated features is incidentally
described. Chapter IX is devoted to the cooperative
press associations and the news agencies.
2865. Waugh, Coulton. The comics. New York,
Macmillan, 1947. 360 p. illus.
47-12339 NC1426.W3
An informal and enthusiastic but detailed history
of American comic strips, "largely put together from
study of the actual comics as they have appeared in
newspapers — both old and new." The author, him-
self a practitioner, surveys the field from its rather
crude, sensational, and sadistic beginnings during
the 1890's in the hands of James Swinnerton, Rich-
ard Felton Outcault, and Rudolph Dirks, to the lit-
erally illustrated, war-preoccupied strips of the early
1940's, and the reemergence of the earlier funny type
in 1946. The comic, a sequence of pictures with a
continuing character, aims to build newspaper cir-
culation and to provide informal entertainment for
the masses. "The comic sells the paper; the paper
gives the comic-strip character his chance to invade
millions of homes and impress his personality on
millions of hearts." A nationwide phenomenon
since the development of feature syndication in 1915,
the strip normally appeals to basic human instincts
and interests, and avoids racial, political, and other
controversial matter.
C. Individual Newspapers
2866. Acheson, Sam Hanna. 35,000 days in
Texas; a history of The Dallas News and its
forbears. New York, Macmillan, 1938. 337 p.
illus. 38-27540 PN4899.D34N4
A history of The Dallas Morning News, founded
in 1885, and of its parent journal, the Galveston
News, founded in the Republic of Texas in 1842 as
"a struggling hope housed in a flimsy shack," but
which had become by 1938 "the oldest business in-
stitution in Texas." Beside the presentation of news,
both papers have been outspokenly concerned with
state and national politics, particularly Democratic,
and other public issues as well as local matters.
Since the author quotes liberally from their pages,
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 25 1
his book does not merely chronicle a pioneer pub-
lishing venture but reflects much of the political and
social history of Texas. The first third of the volume
traces the fortunes of the Galveston News to 1885,
by which time it had been for 30 years "the most
widely circulated, the wealthiest and the most in-
fluential paper in Texas"; the remainder is devoted
mainly to The Dallas Morning News, originally
almost a facsimile of its elder, and the first example
of American chain journalism.
2867. Ashton, Wendell J. Voice in the West;
biography of a pioneer newspaper. New
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1950. xv, 424 p.
illus. 50-7381 PN4899.S385D4
A history of the Salt Lake City Deseret News,
which still bears the name of "the land of the honey-
bee" applied by the pioneer Mormons to Utah and
the adjacent territories where they settled. Founded
by them in 1850, the News is now one of the oldest
in continuous circulation in the West, and remains
a major organ of the Mormon Church, for which
it does much job printing, including books, other
periodicals, and forms. Mr. Ashton's narrative is
concise, sticks to facts, relates the paper's history
to the general development of the intermountain
West, and avoids the controversial issues involved in
religious strife and the Mormons' relations with
the outside world. He does, however, depict the
early tribulations of the paper, and reports its fail-
ings along with its struggle to maintain the freedom
of the press. There is a good bibliography
(p. [400^404) and an extensive index.
2868. Baehr, Harry W. The New Yor^ Tribune
since the Civil War. New York, Dodd,
Mead, 1936. 420 p. illus.
36-34595 PN4899.N42T73
"Note on sources": p. 397-401.
Although the New Yoi\ Tribune was first issued
in 1841, this detailed history, a Ph. D. thesis, begins
with 1865, the year of "its real beginnings as a
modern newspaper," and continues the chronicle
to 1936. Chapters I-VI deal with the editorship of
Horace Greeley, the founder; Chapters VII-XIX
with those of Whitelaw Reid (from 1872), and his
son and successor, Ogdcn Mills Reid (from 1912).
The author attributes the position of the paper in
1865 as the "greatest organ of public opinion in the
United States" to Greeley's opposition to slavery,
the force and unrivaled eloquence of his editorials,
his zeal for news gathering and political reporting,
and his promotion of such fields as book reviews
and scientific reports. Yet even then, Mr. Baehr
considers, Greeley was a "man who had outlived
his time." Whitelaw Reid "strove with great suc-
cess to achieve the ideal of a paper of brains."
Believing firmly in rugged individualism, the au-
thority of law, and the widest freedom of individual
initiative, he "voiced the underlying philosophy of
the Tribune from the death of Greeley [1872] down
to the present [1936]." In 1924 the New Yor^
Tribune purchased the New Yot\ Herald , and as-
sumed the name New Yor\ Herald-Tribune. It
is regarded by many as the leading Republican news-
paper in the country.
2869. Berger, Meyer. The story of The New Yorf(
Times, 1851-1951. New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1951. xiv, 589 p. illus.
51-6775 PN4899.N42T53
This centennial history of the Times is in a way
an official biography, and it maintains much of the
objectivity which has been so prominent a part of
the paper's policy. The Times was founded in
1 85 1 by Henry Jarvis Raymond (1 820-1 869), whose
goal was a conservative, objective news coverage.
Raymond's career as a leading journalist and as a
prominent Republican politician is studied in
Ernest Francis Brown's Raymond of the Times
(New York, Norton, 1951. 345 p.). Shortly after
Raymond's death George Jones (1811-1891) took
over as head and for a time continued the paper's
conservative policy. He did almost no writing him-
self, but is important as the "first great businessman
publisher." Under him the Times did some out-
standing crusading, as in uncovering the Tweed
Ring-Tammany Hall corruption. Under Jones
there also occurred a notable policy shift; the Times,
Republican since its inception, in 1872 opposed
Blaine and supported Cleveland. Cleveland won
the election, but the Times lost Republican adver-
tising and went into a slump. After Jones' death,
the paper was taken over by a group of employees.
It was heavily in debt and its end seemed near when
Adolf S. Ochs (1858-1935) took control in 1896.
The bulk of this book is devoted to the story of the
Times under Ochs, whose career is even more fully
studied in Gerald W. Johnson's An Honorable Titan
(New York, Harper, 1946. 313 p.). Ochs set out
to restore the Times as a conservative, independent
newspaper, with a policy of acting as "a forum for
the consideration of all questions of public im-
portance." He undertook to provide coverage of
the "neglected non-sensational" news fields, such as
financial and other commercial news, government
affairs, books, education, and the like. The paper
acquired a reputation as a bible for businessmen,
rapidly built up advertising, and prospered in its
nonscnsational way. Many view it as America's
foremost paper, and as usually having the most com-
plete and accurate reports of worldwide general
news, with major speeches and reports printed in
full, elaborate studies of sociological problems, up-to-
252 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
date reports for the layman on scientific advances, a
wide coverage of commercial news, a leading book
review section (see no. 2564), extensive reports on
and criticism of the fine and popular arts, etc. After
the death of Ochs in 1935, his policies were con-
tinued by his son-in-law, Arthur Hays Sulzberger
(b. 1891). It has continued to grow in size, circu-
lation, and other aspects. Berger's book concludes
with a list of the many Pulitzer prizes won by the
paper and members of its staff, to which many more
could now be added.
2870. Chamberlin, Joseph Edgar. The Boston
Transcript, a history of its first hundred
vears. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 241 p.
illus. 30-14830 PN4899.B6E8
A review of the first century of The Boston Tran-
script (1830-1930), based upon its files, and told
chiefly in terms of the personalities and achieve-
ments of its successive editors, who usually "rep-
resented conservative prosperity" in a conservatively
prosperous New England city. The author, a staff
member of the Transcript at the time of writing,
devotes only 6 of his 21 chapters to the 20th century.
At its beginning, he notes, "the Transcript was in-
deed very welcome to the conservative classes as a
reaction from the 'black journalism' of the time";
it soon espoused the arts, and eschewed sensational-
ism and the personal attack. Mr. Chamberlin clearly
takes pride in the "respectable and intelligent char-
acter," the "recognized quality" of this Republican
paper's readers, and does not question a policy that
"has doubled the volume of the paper's advertising
and trebled the rate in recent years, with no cor-
responding increase in the paper's circulation." The
Transcript ceased publication in 1941.
2871. Dabney, Thomas Ewing. One hundred
great years; the story of The Times-Picayune
from its founding to 1940. Baton Rouge, Louisiana
State University Press, 1944. 552 p.
44-5253 PN4899.N32T63
A composite history of The Times-Picayune,
founded in 1837 and issued until April 6, 1914, as
The Daily Picayune, and of 100 years in the life
of New Orleans, its sponsoring city. The author, a
former staff member, attributes its initial success to
its relative cheapness, to its "broader interpreta-
tion of news values, to the brevity of its stories, to
its humorous slant, and to the freedom of the pub-
lishers from political entanglements, as well as their
fearlessness and the good nature of their criticisms."
During the War with Mexico (1846-48), George
Wilkins Kendall, a founder of the Picayune, "cre-
ated the tradition of the war correspondent who
followed the troops into battle to get the news." By
1904, Mr. Dabney notes, the growing population of
the city and the expanding operations of the paper
forced "the retreat of the editor's personality," and
the Picayune became "impersonal and objective, a
factual medium, a means of marshaling data from
which the public could draw conclusions, without
the guidance of those it knew and trusted."
2872. Laney, Al. Paris Herald, the incredible
newspaper. New York, Appleton-Century,
1947. 334 p. 47-1 100 1 PN4899.N42H44
In 1887 the younger James Gordon Bennett (q. v.)
decided to start a paper in France; in its first few
decades the paper, named the Paris Herald after
Bennett's New Yor}{ Herald, reflected the owner's
views of what it should be. In time it was trans-
formed from not much more than a social column
to a genuine newspaper catering primarily to Amer-
icans in Europe. It became a leading news source,
and it continued to appear until the Germans occu-
pied Paris in 1940. It resumed publication as the
European edition of the New Yor\ Herald-Tribune ,
almost immediately after the American liberation of
Paris. Mr. Laney's account is primarily his per-
sonal view of the paper as an editor there during the
1920's and 30's, with a brief glance at its earlier and
later history. The book reflects a relatively unusual
activity of American journalism and also gives a
picture of the work of foreign correspondents, many
of whom began at, worked through, or cooperated
with the Paris Herald. It also reflects the extensive
activities of the surprisingly large number of Ameri-
cans in Paris during Mr. Laney's sojourn.
2873. Nevins, Allan. The Evening Post; a cen-
tury of journalism. New York, Boni &
Liveright, 1922. 590 p. illus.
22-22717 PN4899.N42P7
A history to the year 1922 of the New Yoi\
Evening Post, established as a Federalist journal in
1801 by Alexander Hamilton and a group of his fol-
lowers. Aiming to avoid a "mere office-history" at
the one extreme and the whole panorama of 19th-
century America at the other, the author has selected
"the most important, interesting, and illuminating
aspects and episodes of the newspaper's history."
More than half of the book is devoted to the 50-year
editorship (1829-78) of William Cullen Bryant,
who by 1850 was firmly established as New York's
foremost citizen. His editorial greatness is here at-
tributed to the rhetoric of his grand style, his sound-
ness of judgment and unwavering courage in main-
taining it, and his consistent adherence to the prin-
ciples of freedom and democracy. Other editors of
the Post, among them Bryant's son-in-law, Parke
Godwin, Carl Schurz, E. L. Godkin, and Rollo
Ogden, are more summarily dealt with.
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 253
2874. O'Brien, Frank M. The story of The Sun,
New York: 1833- 1928. New ed. New
York, Appleton, 1928. xviii, 305 p. illus.
28-2925 PN4899.N442S8 1928
A history of the New York Sun, founded in 1833
as a popular penny newspaper by Benjamin H. Day,
who overcame the lack of facilities for the transmis-
sion of news "by the simple method of using what
news was nearest at hand — the incidental happen-
ings of New York life," and who brought the paper
to the people by instituting the first newsboy carrier
system. A reason for The Sun's popularity in the
1850's and 6o's, when it lacked real news guidance,
spirited editorials, or political prestige, was the light
fiction introduced by Moses S. Beach, proprietor of
the paper from 1852 to 1868. Charles A. Dana, in
his "reign" from 1868-97, "revived American jour-
nalism from that trance in which it had forgotten
that everybody is human and that the English
language is alive and fluid." Chiefly to him and to
his great editorial writer, Edward Page Mitchell,
who retired in 1920, the author attributes the qual-
ity and renown of The Sun's editorial page. At the
time of writing Mr. O'Brien was himself editor of
The Sun.
2875. Smith, James Eugene. One hundred years
of Hartford's Courant, from colonial times
through the Civil War. New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1949. 342 p.
49-11937 PN4899.H35C6
Bibliography: p. [328]~329.
A report on the first century, 1764-1865, of the
Hartford Courant. "Embellished news reprints,
rumors, lamentations, predictions," and other tid-
ings from England, the West Indies, and port towns
along the Atlantic filled this provincial journal until
well into the Revolution, "all suggesting the deep-
running disapproval of an imperial meddling with
the prosperity of trading." Strongly Federalist, the
paper and its editors were "complacent and con-
tented," Mr. Smith believes, during the first years of
the Washington administration, but by 1800 were
viewing Jefferson's presidency as "catastrophic,"
and saw Jackson's behavior in 1830 as a demonstra-
tion of an "unquenchable thirst for power." Van
Buren was regarded as a mere henchman of Jackson
and a plunderer of the public domain. In the
1850's, the Courant "drifted into the Republican
party, supporting Lincoln's administration during
the Civil War."
2876. The Sunpapers of Baltimore, by Gerald W.
Johnson, Frank R. Kent, H. L. Mencken
[and] Hamilton Owens. New York, Knopf, 1937.
xii, 430, xvi p. illus. 37-91 11 PN4899.B3S76
A centennial history of The Sun and The Evening
Sun of Baltimore, which together are affectionately
known as the "Sunpapers." In Chapters I-VI, Mr.
Johnson deals with the era of personal journalism
and brings the narrative to the death of A. S. Abell,
"the Founder," who, impressed by the financial
success of Benjamin H. Day's The Sun, New York,
invaded the realm of the penny press for the people
in 1837, and who established the policy "that the
first business of a newspaper is to furnish its readers
with the news in which they are interested, whether
or not it conforms to the editor's prejudices." Mr.
Kent, in Chapters VII-X, describes the papers' bat-
tles against the Democratic state machine in the
1880's and 9o's. Mr. Mencken, in Chapters XI-
XVIII, considers the partnership of the founder's
sons and the subsequent formation of a corporation.
Author of the three concluding chapters, Mr. Owens
describes efforts of the directors to build up the
news and editorial departments of their journals.
All four writers have been closely connected with
the "Sunpapers."
D. Newspapermen
2877. [Bennett] Carlson, Oliver. The man who
made news, James Cordon Bennett. New
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1942. 440 p.
42-24810 PN4874.B4C3
Bibliography: p. 423-428.
James Gordon Bennett (1795-1872) was a Scot-
tish immigrant whose early employment in this
country was in jobs mainly connected with news-
papers; in this connection he is said to have been
"the first real Washington correspondent." In 1835
he founded the New Yorf( Herald and rapidly built
it up to the newspaper of largest circulation in New
York; in time it became the best known American
paper in the world. This was due to Bennett's
many innovations as a journalist. When he started
the Herald, newspapers were organs of particular
groups, usually political, Bennett conceived of the
newspaper as an organ for the dissemination of news
without partisan coloration. This radical view led
to a far greater variety of material being included
254 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
than had previously been considered suitable. This
led to charges of sensationalism, and the bruising of
many tender sensibilities. Denunciations of Ben-
nett and the sales of his paper increased in a direct
ratio. In adding topics to the categories of what
might be considered news, and in consciously seek-
ing information for full presentation, Bennett revolu-
tionized journalism, so that most papers at the end
of his career were far different from what they had
been at its outset. Shortly after the Civil War Ben-
nett turned the editorship of his paper over to his
son of the same name (1841-1918) who also played
an important role in the history of journalism. Both
are studied in Don C. Seitz's The James Gordon
Bennetts, Father and Son, Proprietors of the New
Yor\ Herald (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1928.
405 p.).
2878. [Bonfils and Tammen] Fowler, Gene.
Timber line; a story of Bonfils and Tammen.
Garden City, N. Y., Garden City Books, 1951, ci933«
480 p. 52-2466 PN4874.B623F6 195 1
A study of Frederick Gilmer Bonfils ( 1 860-1 933)
and Harry Heye Tammen (1 856-1924) and of 38
years of their newspaper; they became partners in
1895 and took over The Denver Post. The paper
was a phenomenally successful example of yellow
journalism, having set out to out-Hearst Hearst. In
tracing its history, the author recounts so many di-
gressive anecdotes that his work is as much a lively
history of early Denver as it is a biography or study
of the paper. Although an entertaining work that
provides a good idea of the nature of the paper and
the background against which it was produced, it
undertakes no journalistic analysis. The author
began his writing career as a reporter for the Post.
The book itself is written in a lively journalistic
style. Mr. Fowler's own autobiography, A Solo in
Tom-toms (New York, Viking Press, 1946.
390 p.), which has some warm admirers, is largely
taken up by his boyhood, and only the last hundred-
odd pages describe his beginnings in journalism.
2879. [Bowles] Merriam, George S. The life
and times of Samuel Bowles. New York,
Century Co., 1885. 2 v. 7-12040 E66r.B78
PN4874.B63M4
Bowles ( 1 826-1 878) in his teens went to work for
his father's paper, the Springfield Republican. In
the mid-1840's the son was instrumental in changing
the paper to a daily, and he assumed a rapidly in-
creasing share of the writing and policy burden.
Springfield, Massachusetts, was then a provincial
town, but Bowles made his paper into one of the
most important in the Nation. He thus became
one of the first small-town editors to secure a na-
tional audience. Merriam's biography details much
of his journalistic activity, which became increasingly
tied in with the national events of the period, and
prints copious extracts from his letters. From 1855
Bowles was one of the leaders of the new Republi-
can Party, and his biography is an important source
for its history during the next two decades.
2880. [Bradford] De Armond, Anna Janney.
Andrew Bradford, colonial journalist. New-
ark, University of Delaware Press, 1949. 272 p.
facsims. 50-3419 PN4874.B66D4 1949a
Bibliography: p. 247-251.
Andrew Bradford (1686-1742) was one of the
pioneers of printing in the middle colonies. The
American Weekly Mercury, which he founded in
Philadelphia in 1719, was the first newspaper in
Pennsylvania and the third in the Thirteen Colonies.
Since little is known about Bradford's apparently
uneventful life, this University of Pennsylvania dis-
sertation is mainly a study of the newspaper. Under
Bradford it maintained itself as one of the best and
most widely read newspapers in the Colonies. It is
important not only as one of the better examples of
colonial journalism, but also for the principles of
the freedom of the press which Bradford expressed
in it, thus providing Andrew Hamilton with many
of the arguments used in the trial of John Peter
Zenger (no. 2931), the point usually taken to mark
establishment of the freedom of the press in this
country. After her husband's death in 1742, Cor-
nelia Bradford continued to publish the paper into
1746.
2881. [Dana] Stone, Candace. Dana and the Sun.
New York, Dodd, Mead, 1938. 431 p.
39-1 1931 PN4874.D3S8 1938
The early career of Charles Anderson Dana
(1819-1897) included residence at Brook Farm and
partial adherence to the Transcendentalist move-
ment, editorial work under Greeley on the Tribune,
and service as "foreign correspondent" in Europe
observing the revolutions of 1848-1849. His letters
from Europe appeared in five papers and have been
called the first "syndicated" column in American
journalism. During the Civil War Dana disagreed
with Greeley on editorial policy and resigned. Soon
after he took an active part in the war as adviser
and observer working with Lincoln, Stanton, and
Grant. After the war, in 1868, he was able to pur-
chase the New York Sun, which he continued to
edit until his death in 1897. In these three decades
he made the paper one of the foremost in American
journalism. He made it a vehicle for news as such,
but he also made it a personal organ noted for its
style, vigor, and independence, so that it was read
by many who disagreed with its somewhat erratic
policies. Stone's biography, a Columbia University
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 255
dissertation, emphasizes Dana's career with the
Sun and is in large part an analysis of the editorial
policies revealed in the paper. A more general
biography is James Harrison Wilson's The Life of
Charles A. Dana (New York, Harper, 1907. 544
p.). A history of the paper itself is by Frank O'Brien
(no. 2874).
2882. Godkin, Edwin Lawrence. Life and letters;
edited by Rollo Ogden. New York, Mac-
millan, 1907. 2 v. 7-12877 PN4874.G5O3
Godkin (1831-1902) was born in Ireland, edu-
cated for the law, and became a practicing journalist.
In 1856 he came to America where, after touring
the South as a correspondent, he founded the Nation
(also treated in no. 2921). To this he applied his
wide learning and considerable writing ability, mak-
ing of it a periodical with whose views thinking
contemporaries had to reckon, even when they dis-
agreed. Its circulation was never large, but its in-
fluence on other journals was from the beginning
extensive. In 1881 the Nation and the New York
Evening Post effected a merger of sorts, whereby
the weekly printed the editorial matter appearing
during the week in the daily paper. Carl Schurz
(q. v.) was editor-in-chief of both periodicals, with
Godkin under him. In 1883 Schurz left, and God-
kin became editor-in-chief, continuing in this posi-
tion until his retirement, because of declining health,
in 1900. In both the daily and the weekly paper
he maintained his liberal position, never giving in
to personal favoritism, waging batde for many
worthy causes, and establishing an impressive record
as an independent editor. The present work is
made up largely of excerpts from the numerous
writings of Godkin, especially from his letters.
Volume 2 provides an incomplete bibliography
(p. 260-268) of Godkin's books and articles.
2883. [Greeley] Van Deusen, Glyndon G.
Horace Greeley, nineteenth-century crusader.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1953.
445 P- iHus. 53-9554 E415.9.G8V3
Bibliography: p. [4311-437.
Greeley (1811-1872) began newspaper work as
an apprentice printer at the age of fifteen. He
undertook a succession of printing ventures fol-
lowed by publishing and editing ones, including
literary and political periodicals. In 1841 he estab-
lished the New Yorl^ Tribune, and as its editor
became one of America's leading journalists. Gree-
ley was important as an idealistic crusader who
fought for many reforms, some of them quite
radical in his own day. He was of further sig-
nificance in making his paper an organ for the
vigorous expression of varying views on crucial
issues; many of the leading writers and thinkers
of his day were represented in the columns and
on the staff of the Tribune. His career ended in
anticlimax with his defeat in the 1872 presidential
election, when he ran as the Democratic candidate
against Grant. Greeley's vigorous and complex per-
sonality has inspired many biographies, from James
Parton's early The Life of Horace Greeley (New
York, Mason Bros., 1855. 442 p.) to William Har-
lan Hale's Horace Greeley, Voice of the People
(New York, Harper, 1950. 377 p.). His autobi-
ography remains a valuable book for understanding
Greeley: Recollections of a Busy Life (New York,
Ford, 1868. 624 p.).
2884. [Hearst] Tebbel, John W. The life and
good times of William Randolph Hearst.
New York, Dutton, 1952. 386 p.
52-8258 PN4874.H4T4
It is generally agreed that Hearst ( 1863-195 1)
was one of the greatest forces in American journal-
ism; there is radical disagreement as to what he was
a force for. Part of Hearst's vision was derived
from the popularization techniques of Pulitzer (no.
2889). A man of extremes, boundless energy, and
great inherited wealth (his father was a multimil-
lionaire), Hearst set out to surpass Pulitzer. In the
course of pursuing this ambition he created a news-
paper empire across the country, attracted a phe-
nomenal mass readership for his periodicals, entered
on a grand scale into allied fields such as magazine
publishing and radio broadcasting, and brought yel-
low journalism to its peak. However, it was not
merely his sensationalism which aroused his op-
ponents, but also the "causes" for which he fought
in front page editorials, slanted news coverage, etc.
With his tendency to extreme stands he managed, it
has been said, to achieve the almost unique position
of having at some time or other offended every per-
son or group exposed to his papers. He also had
large political ambitions, first as a candidate and
then as a picker of candidates, and as a swayer of
public opinion at the polls. Because of his certitude
of Tightness on so many occasions, and because of
the mass communications power with which he
backed up his convictions, Hearst usually aroused
strong emotions in those exposed to him. For that
reason the problem of writing a definitive biography
is often regarded as insurmountable, at least for
some time to come. Tebbcl's account is an attempt
to be objective, but for that very reason the many
with extreme views of Hearst find it pallid and in-
adequate. An earlier and somewhat more colorful
biography, which approximated a middle view, is
Hearst, Lord of San Simeon (New York, Viking
Press, 1936. 33a p.), by Oliver Carlson and Prncst
Sutherland Bates. A more critical work which ap-
peared in the same year is Ferdinand Lundbcrg's
256 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Imperial Hearst, a Social Biography (New York,
Equinox Cooperative Press, 1936. 406 p.), which
was issued in 1937 in a Modern Library edition.
Also published in the same year, and contrasting
with these, was Mrs. Fremont Older's William Ran-
dolph Hearst, American (New York, Appleton-
Century, 1936. 581 p.), a semiofficial and extremely
favorable presentation of the "most misunderstood
man in America." A recent favorable study, but
one of greater moderation, is John K. Winkler's
William Randolph Hearst, a New Appraisal (New
York, Hastings House, 1955. 325 p.), a revision of
the author's W. R. Hearst, an American Phenom-
enon (New York, Simon & Schuster, 1928. 354 p.).
Of special interest is William Randolph Hearst, a
Portrait in His Own Words (New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1952. 309 p.), which, with the approval
of Hearst, was compiled from his letters and other
writings by Edmond D. Coblentz, who started
working for Hearst in 1900.
2885. Howe, Edgar W. Plain people. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1929. 317 p.
29-7426 PS2014.H5Z5 1929
E. W. Howe ( 1 854-1937) spent most of his life
as a small-town newspaper man. As editor of the
Atchison, Kansas, Globe he achieved a modest na-
tional prominence for his philosophical paragraphs,
and it has been said that for a while his paper was
one of the most frequendy quoted in the country.
This autobiography therefore provides a good back-
ground for successful small-town journalism. Howe
was also a literary figure of some note, and his work
is discussed in the Literature chapter of this bibli-
ography (nos. 959-963).
2886. McRae, Milton A. Forty years in newspaper-
dom; the autobiography of a newspaper man.
New York, Brentano's, 1924. xviii, 496 p. illus.
24-25208 PN4874.M47A3
McRae (1858-1930) established or bought con-
trol of many newspapers throughout the United
States. Much of his work was done with E. W.
Scripps (no. 2890), and their joint chain was known
as the Scripps-McRae League, since transformed into
the Scripps-Howard newspapers. McRae's loosely
written autobiography reveals his acquaintanceship
with many of the nation's leading newspapermen,
and gives insight into much of the journalistic his-
tory of forty years. The remainder of the book is
devoted to his wide travels and to general observa-
tions.
2887. [Nelson] Johnson, IcieF. William Rockhill
Nelson and the Kansas City Star; their rela-
tion to the development of the beauty and culture of
Kansas City and the Middle West. Introd. by Wil-
liam Allen White. Kansas City, Mo., Burton Pub.
Co., 1935. 208 p. 36-19204 PN4874.N3J6
Nelson (1841-1915) and a partner founded the
Star in 1880. Shortly afterwards Nelson took over
full control, maintaining the paper as a highly per-
sonal journal until his death. The paper was always
"independent politically, . . . [but] by no means
. . . neutral." It was conceived as a low-priced
family journal, with emphasis on local affairs and
general reading matter. With this policy it rapidly
built up an extremely large circulation, and became
quite influential throughout a large part of the Mid-
west. However, its greatest importance was as a
crusading city paper. The Star was instrumental,
through its campaigns, in advancing many programs
for civil improvements: better roads, parks, public
transportation, etc. While Nelson himself did not
write for the paper, he maintained close personal
control even when it became a large metropolitan
publication. This biography is written in a spirit
of admiration, but has no footnotes, no index, and
no bibliography. The source even of direct quota-
tions is often left in doubt. An earlier book is Wil-
liam Rockhill Nelson; the Story of a Man, a News-
paper, and a City (Cambridge, Riverside Press,
1915. 274 p.), a memorial volume written "by
members of the staff of the Kansas City Star."
2888. Older, Fremont. My own story. New
York, Macmillan, 1926. xx, 340 p.
26-19123 F869.S3O43
Older (1856-1935) begins his book at the time
when he became editor of the San Francisco Bulletin
in 1895; he subsequendy published a narrative of
his earlier life: Growing Up (San Francisco, San'
Francisco Call-Bulletin, 1931. 168 p.). The first
part of his story is largely that of the newspaper's
involvements in politics and his fight against cor-
ruption in the local government during the Schmitz-
Ruef regime (1901-08). In the latter part of the
book he presents his attempts to understand the
criminal personality and his code of social respon-
sibility in the sphere of crime. The author's frank-
ness and questioning of motives make the book a
good and characteristic report on journalistic activity
during a corrupt administration. The same frank-
ness made it injudicious for him to publish his "con-
fession" while he was still editor of the paper; he
resigned, rather than drop the Mooney case, in 1917.
My Own Story was first published, in a briefer form,
at San Francisco in 1919 and again at Oakland,
California, in 1925.
2889. [Pulitzer] Barrett, James Wyman. Joseph
Pulitzer and his World. New York, Van-
guard Press, 1 94 1 . xvi, 449 p.
41-21082 PN4874.P8B3
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 257
Joseph Pulitzer (1847-1911) was a Hungarian
immigrant who began his journalistic career under
Carl Schurz (q. v.) on the Westliche Post. After
he learned English, he transferred to the St. Louis
Post-Dispatch and rose rapidly in the journalistic
world. In 1883 he went to New York, where he
acquired ownership of the World, and soon built it
into one of the most popular and influential of news-
papers— partly from a talent for judging what was
of popular interest, pardy from a flair for uncover-
ing and even creating sensational news. While
Pulitzer introduced "yellow journalism," he also
held a firm belief in the responsibility of the press.
It was this motive that made him a major figure;
this, with his batdes for the liberty of the press, and
his demand that newspapers present the facts of each
case, helped raise the press to its latter-day level.
He also founded the country's first school of journal-
ism, at Columbia University. At the end of his
career he established funds for annual awards in
fields such as journalism, literature, and history.
These were to go to books, articles, or cartoons
presenting the atmosphere of American life, exem-
plifying good manners, promoting the public good,
etc. The annual awarding of the Pulitzer prizes
remains a major event, despite occasional contro-
versy, and the prizes have distinguished some of the
more important American work in the fields con-
cerned. Barrett (who was city editor for the New
York World when it came to an end 20 years after
Pulitzer's death) regards Pulitzer as a great Ameri-
can and the greatest of journalists, and the paper
itself as having been a major public institution.
However, Barrett employs a sentimental, loosely
anecdotal approach expressed in a staccato journalese
that is inadequate to its theme. He is able to give
a first hand account of much of the later history
of the paper, and he does outline its earlier history,
but leaves room for a more scholarly treatment.
2890. Scripps, Edward W. Damned old crank, a
self-portrait of E. W. Scripps drawn from
his unpublished writings; edited by Charles R. Mc-
Cabe. New York, Harper, 1951. xvii, 259 p.
51-10365 PN4874.S37A3
Scripps (1854-1926) was a midwestern journalist
who achieved the distinction of establishing the first
newspaper chain in this country; in the end he
controlled newspapers in 15 states. He also estab-
lished a news service, the United Press, which even-
tually supplied hundreds of newspapers. Much of
his work was done with his brothers, James and
George, and with Milton A. McRae (no. 2886).
The Newspaper Enterprise Association was founded
in 1001 for the purpose of supplying syndicated mn-
teri.il. Scripps insisted that all his newspapers be
independent, while they strongly championed the
working man. The book is a striking self-portrait
of this man who worked vigorously for a full and
honest presentation of the news, and who spoke for
the workers of the country while most newspapers
were speaking for the corporations; it is largely de-
rived from the manuscripts produced by Scripps in
his two attempts at autobiography. A study in some
respects more detailed is Negley D. Cochran's E. W.
Scripps (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1933. 315 p.).
A slightly earlier life is Gilson Gardner's Lusty
Scripps (New York, Vanguard Press, 1932. 274 p.).
2891. Sullivan, Mark. The education of an Amer-
ican. New York, Doubleday, Doran, 1938.
320 p. illus. 38-28922 PN4874.S78A3
While Sullivan (1874-1952) was one of the lead-
ing political columnists of his day, and was busy
to the day of his death in recording and comment-
ing upon the contemporary scene, his autobiography
has little to say of direct bearing on his journalistic
career. Its primary value lies in its picture of the
shaping of an American journalist, with its glimpse
of his life on the family's Pennsylvania farm, and
his approach to journalism. The picture of farm
life is by itself an important piece of Americana.
Through it the author brings out those elements
which shaped his personality and his career. The
volume closes with the Wilson administration, when
Sullivan had been closely connected with Collier's
for about a decade, but before he had become
famous as a political commentator.
2892. [Watterson] Wall, Joseph Frazier. Henry
Watterson, reconstructed rebel. With an
introd. by Alben W. Barkley. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1956. 362 p.
56-5672 PN4874.W3W3 1956
Watterson (1 840-1921) was a Kentucky journal-
ist who has been called the "last great personal
editor"; his career spanned the years in which the
old personal and largely political journalism gave
way to the large mechanized, news-service news-
paper. He began his career in 1858 as a reporter
for The New Yort{ Times; there followed a variety
of activities, largely connected with journalism, even
while in the Confederate Army. In 1868 he became
editor of the Louisville Daily Journal, which was
soon merged with the Courier to become the Journal-
Courier, and retained it until he sold control in
He is credited with having been a major
factor for the reunification of North and South
during the years of strain after the Civil W.ir. 1 le
was a major influence in his region, where his edi-
torials were considered news, and as such were
repeated by newspapers throughout the country.
His style gave special force to his views, and for
a period he may well have been "the most widely
258 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
quoted" man in America. An earlier study of this
leading editor is Isaac F. Marcosson's "Marse Henry"
(New York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. 269 p.). An im-
portant primary source which, however, runs to
anecdote and general comment, is his own "Marse
Henry"; an Autobiography (New York, Doran,
1919. 2 v.).
2893. White, William Allen. The autobiography
of William Allen White. New York, Mac-
millan, 1946. 669 p. illus.
46-1656 PN4874.W52A3
White (1868-1944) was editor of the Emporia,
Kansas, Gazette from 1895 until his death. As edi-
tor of a small-town newspaper, he built up a position
of national influence. He was not only an oracle in
state and national politics, but, more important, he
came to be regarded throughout the Nation as a
spokesman for midwestern middle-class society.
His editorials were reprinted or quoted in numerous
papers, so that he was followed by millions, though
he sold only a few thousand copies of his own paper.
His autobiography, which at the time of his death
had only reached 1923, was published posthumously,
and in 1947 it was awarded a Pulitzer prize. It re-
flects not only the work of a leading journalist, but
also the situation of a large part of American society
for a period of nearly half a century. The story of
White's entire life is told in Walter Johnson's Wil-
liam Allen White's America (New York, Holt, 1947.
621 p.). Mr. Johnson also edited Selected Letters of
William Allen White, 1899-1943 (New York, Holt,
1947. 460 p.).
2894. [Winchell] McKelway, St. Clair. Gossip;
the life and times of Walter Winchell. New
York, Viking Press, 1940. 150 p.
40-32480 PN4874.W67M25
Walter Winchell (b. 1897) started his career as a
gossip columnist in the twenties. Scandalmonger-
ing and ordinary gossiping were new and natural
additions to yellow journalism, and Winchell rose
rapidly to national prominence. While his work
appeared in the New York Mirror and other papers
of the Hearst chain, a number of imitators arose to
spread the latest rumors of divorce, adultery,
romance, incompetence, larceny, etc., among the
prominent. Winchell, however, was the one who
rode the crest of the wave, and he achieved a vast
following for his syndicated column, while millions
tuned in on his radio (and later television) broad-
casts. In the thirties Winchell became a great enemy
of fascism, and the broad field of rumored subversion
was added to his repertoire. While he had begun
by making public the private life of entertainers and
then added the social elite, he now broadened his
activities, and is credited with the early demise of
many a political and business career. His eminence
was such that on occasion both the F. B. I. and
prominent gangsters provided him with bodyguard
protection. Because Winchell has scrupulously
published the most embarrassing secrets of both his
friends and his enemies, the latter group has tended
to increase with the passing of the years. One result
is that most studies of the man do not find his serv-
ices to have been an unmixed blessing. McKelway's
study was the first on Winchell to be published in
book form; it was originally published in part in the
New Yorker, and remains one of the more readable
and objective studies; it deserves to be brought up to
date. Lyle Stuart's The Secret Life of Walter Win-
chell ([n. p.] Boar's Head Books, 1953. 253 p.) is
a hostile expose. A friendly study which also fol-
lows Winchell's career past its peak of prestige is
Edward Weiner's Let's Go to Press (New York, Put-
nam, 1955. 270 p.).
E. Foreign Language Periodicals
2895. Backlund, Jonas Oscar. A century of the
Swedish American press. Chicago, Swedish
American Newspaper Co., 1952. 132 p. illus.
53-17283 PN4885.S8B3
A brief review of the 100-year history (1851-
1951) of the Swedish language press in the United
States, which omits the more ephemeral or insignifi-
cant papers. Although the first publication, S\andi-
naven (New York, 1851-53), was a news sheet, most
papers of the first decade were denominational
organs, and none survived infancy. Of the Swedish-
American newspapers of general circulation estab-
lished in the 1870's, the author finds most notable
the still surviving Svens\a Ameri\anaren Tribunen
of Chicago and Nordstjernan of New York; less suc-
cessful has been the Swedish-American journalism
of the West. Only one percent of the 1500 Swedish
papers that have commenced publication still appear.
Mr. Backlund concludes with brief mention of the
personalities of the profession and of the organs of
special interests: religious, political, fraternal, and
literary.
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 259
2896. Kolehmainen, John I. Sow the golden seed.
Fitchburg, Mass., Raivaaja Pub. Co., 1955.
150 p. illus. 55-32553 PN4885.F5R35
A history of the first 50 years of Raivaaja, a Fin-
nish-language newspaper founded in 1905 in Fitch-
burg, Mass., to meet the needs of Finnish immi-
grants, as well as to propagandize for socialism.
Although it remained socialist, it early turned against
communism. The paper has achieved a national
circulation, and even reaches the Finnish areas in
Canada. It is of value not only as a study of an
individual foreign-language newspaper, but also as
an example of the "radical" press of the late 19th
and early 20th centuries in America. The book
opens with a discussion of the circumstances which
led to the founding of the paper. Since the paper
also ran a publishing company, this too is discussed,
and a bibliography of the paper's publications is
supplied at the end of the book. It might be noted
that while the Raivaaja Publishing Company is the
publisher, the book is not "official," but was com-
piled through private initiative. However, it is a
favorable study which seeks to present the func-
tioning of a foreign-language paper and its services
to its community.
2897. Park, Robert E. The immigrant press and
its control. New York, Harper, 1922. xix,
487 p. tables, diagrs. (Americanization studies)
22-2469 PN4884.P3
A history and analysis of the immigrant press in
America, which opens with a study of the factors
leading to the establishment of foreign language
presses. It continues with an analysis of the typical
contents of foreign language newspapers, followed
by a brief history of the immigrant press, and con-
cludes with a section on the various means such as
advertising and censorship, which have been used or
suggested for the purpose of controlling these. Be-
cause of their topicality at the time of publication,
much attention is given to World War I and its
postwar issues as they were handled in such papers.
Unfortunately, no more recent or inclusive history
of the immigrant press as a whole has appeared.
However, some of the language and nationality
groups involved have received individual treatment
in other books, a few of which are listed in this
section. A brief study of the current situation of the
immigrant press may be found in Brown and
Roucek's One America (no. 4426).
2898. Sokes, Mordecai. The Yiddish press, an
Americanizing agency. New York, Teach-
ers College, Columbia University, 1950. xvi, 242 p.
illus. 50-13966 PN4885.Y5S6 1950
Bibliography: p. [223] -230.
This work, written as a dissertation at Columbia
University, was first published in 1924. The new
"Foreword" offers something of a survey of more
recent events, but the original text is unchanged.
While the work is really a study of the Yiddish press
in New York City, it reflects the Yiddish press
throughout the United States, since the New York
papers were national in influence and tended to pro-
vide a model for such papers elsewhere. The open-
ing section of the book discusses the origin, develop-
ment, and nature of the Yiddish press in New York.
There follows a study of the readers of the news-
papers. The author then turns to his main subject,
the scope, frequency, and nature of the editorial
materials presented. He concludes with some gen-
eralizations about the Yiddish press and its Ameri-
canizing efforts. While no up-to-date book in Eng-
lish has appeared on the subject, there is a more
recent study in Yiddish, covering the Yiddish press
in America from its founding in 1870 to the anni-
versary year of 1945, Joseph Chaikin's Yidishe Bleter
in Ameri\e (New York, 1946. 424 p.).
2899. Wittke, Carl F. The German-language
press in America. [Lexington] University
of Kentucky Press, 1957. 311 p.
57-5832 PN4885.G3W5
A history of the American German-language press
from its beginning in 1732 through 1956. Since this
group was once the largest of the foreign language
presses, and there have been hundreds of German-
language newspapers, the author has not under-
taken a tabulation of all of them, although he has
studied a few in some detail. His study is pri-
marily an attempt to discover the importance these
publications have had in the Americanization of
the immigrants, and the difficulties attending such
publication ventures. Dean Wittke's "emphasis
has been primarily upon the role which the Ger-
man press and its readers played in American social,
political, and economic history." The development
of the press is traced for the most part in chrono-
logical order. Because the German press has been
much reduced since World War I, the great bulk
of the book is devoted to the press prior to the
1920's, although some attention is given it in its
present diminished state.
260 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
F. The Practice of Journalism
2900. Allen, John Edward. Newspaper design-
ing. New York, Harper, 1947. 478 p.
illus. 47-31234 PN4775.A64
The first part of Mr. Allen's book is in large part
a presentation of the historical background of news-
paper designing in America; however, since the
author's main interest is in current good practice,
much of his material is an explanation of various
practices and how they evolved, rather than a gen-
eral chronological study of newspaper designing as
a whole. The second part of the book is a study of
the present-day application of these practices. Litde
attention is given to the technical problems behind
the design, and the book concentrates on such topics
as the esthetics and the readability of various types,
layouts, etc.
2901. Brown, Charles H. News editing and dis-
play. New York, Harper, 1952. 457 p.
illus. 52-10826 PN4784.C75B7
This textbook for journalism students has been
designed as a codification of the rules and prac-
tices of newspaper production in so far as they
enter into the "desk man's job." It is emphasized
that these are not final and unalterable procedures,
but rather those generally accepted among news-
paper staffs. In the preface the author thus outlines
his book: "The first chapters explain the routine
procedures of preparing copy for the printers. These
are followed by chapters on headline writing and
make-up. Then come chapters on fundamental
policies and problems. . . . Descriptions of the
jobs of departmental editors comprise the final chap-
ters." While the author has sought to distinguish
between large and small newspapers, he notes his
own bias in favor of the small ones, since they are
the type for which the majority of journalism stu-
dents will go to work.
2902. Elfenbein, Julien. Business journalism, its
function and future. Rev. ed. New York,
Harper, 1947. xxii, 359 p. illus., forms, diagrs.
47-4246 PN4784.C7E4 1947
This book was designed primarily as a textbook
for students of business journalism. It can also be
used as something of a guide to the history and pres-
ent state of the thousands of American business
newspapers. House organs and noncommercial
journals, sometimes included in this classification,
are passed by. Using his more restricted definition,
the author in his first part discusses the service
these papers perform for the business world and
for the community; this is followed by a brief his-
tory of the business press in America. Of special
interest to the prospective business journalist is the
second part of the book, a guide to the functions
and methods of various staff members (publisher,
editor, advertising sales manager, etc.) of a busi-
ness paper. The appendixes include a chronological
list of American business papers before 1900 (p.
293-304), and a brief dictionary of trade termi-
nology.
2903. Herzberg, Joseph G. Late city edition, by
Joseph G. Herzberg and members of the
New Yor\ Herald Tribune staff. New York, Holt,
1947. 282 p. 47-31261 PN4775.H37
In 29 essays as many members of the Herald
Tribune staff here discuss the activities involved
in the preparation of a daily paper. While the
point of departure is their own paper, the symposium
is meant to present the general problems of any
American large metropolitan daily. The emphasis
of the book is on reportorial work in its many
categories, but background rewriting, editing, ar-
ranging, etc., are not neglected. Each contributor
speaks of his own specialty; thus Geoffrey Parsons,
chief editorial writer, does the chapter on "The
Editorial Page."
2904. Liebling, Abbott J. The wayward press-
man. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947.
284 p. 47-11624 PN4867.L5
Mr. Liebling (b. 1904) in the first part of this
book presents a narrative of his career as a news-
paperman in Providence and New York. In a
humorous and anecdotal style the author presents
a good picture of the development of a journalist,
including his departure from newspaper reporting.
The burden of his tale is the arbitrariness of news-
paper owners, the precariousness of newspaper em-
ployment, and the dubious professional status of
journalism. In his case the transfer was to The
New Yorker, in which a large part of the book's
material first appeared. In that magazine Liebling
published a series of articles under the general tide
"The Wayward Press." These were perceptive
analyses of sins of commission and omission by the
press, particularly in New York City. This critical
commentary, in addition to covering aspects of the
journalistic world not usually dwelt upon by jour-
nalists in their how-to-do it books, also reveals in-
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 261
directly much of the inner workings of newspapers.
Liebling's Min\ and Red Herring, the Wayward
Pressman's Casebook (Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1949. 251 p.) is made up entirely of articles
from The New Yorker, and in it he continues to
underline the errors, carelessness, stagnancy, debat-
able publishing ethics, etc., found in a number of
city newspapers.
2905. MacDougall, Curtis D. Newsroom prob-
lems and policies. New York, Macmillan,
1 94 1. 592 p. 4I~?34I PN4731.M27
This book is designed as an integrative textbook
for the journalism student, and is meant to be "of
value to the young person about to begin a news-
paper career," especially "in forming a philosophy
about the job." It focuses upon the problems of
the newsroom employee, and the business and
mechanical aspects of newspaper work enter only
as they affect decisions on matters such as what
should be printed and in what manner it should be
presented. "How," for instance, "should news-
papers handle news related to sex?" "What is libel
and how can the newspapers avoid committing it?"
The large number of "case studies" showing the
actual handling of such problems in various papers
enables the book to reflect much of the policy prac-
tices prevailing in the American press. The author's
own views take account (as of 194 1) of what exists,
what is ideally desirable, and what steps in that
direction are presendy practicable. A book which
discusses the techniques and policies of reporting is
Victor J. Danilov's Public Affairs Reporting (New
York, Macmillan, 1955. 487 p.), which "attempts
to acquaint the embryo reporter with the various
types of public affairs news, to point out where to
look for it, and to show how to cover it." Of
especial value is its detailed study of the structure
and functioning of American governmental units,
from the local to the national level.
2906. MacNeil, Neil. Without fear or favor.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1940. 414 p.
40-27336 PN4855.M3
When Mr. MacNeil wrote this book he had been
assistant managing editor of The New Yorf^ Times
for about a decade. In it he describes the process
of producing a newspaper, from gathering the news
to committing it to the presses. The bulk of the
book is made up of chapters on reporting and edit-
ing various types of news: politics, finance, sports,
features, local news, etc. There are also a number
of "policy" chapters such as "Without Fear or
Favor," "Libel, Ethics, Principles," "Freedom of the
Press," and "The Devil's Advocate," which last is
a review of propaganda and slanted news releases.
It is the American press, he believes, which "has
made the United States the most successful de-
mocracy in history."
2907. Mott, Frank Luther. The news in America.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952.
236 p. (The Library of Congress series in Amer-
ican civilization) 52-8218 PN4855.M65
"In this essay I have attempted to define and
describe news in the United States, and the way it
is assembled, edited, and disseminated." While
his primary aim is thus expository, he carries it out
in a critical manner throughout, and in the light
of a major distinction: "the editor works under a
double standard: he has to decide what news he
will print, on the one hand, because his readers
demand it for the easy reading which brings im-
mediate responses, and what he will select, on the
other hand, because he thinks it may, in the long
run, affect the lives and fortunes of his readers."
However, publishers, news-gatherers, and especially
the readers themselves must divide with the editors
the responsibility for the present state of things.
"The chief fault and failure of American journalism
today — and this applies to all media of informa-
tion— is the disproportionate space and emphasis
given to the obviously interesting news of immediate
reward ('soft news') at the expense of the signifi-
cantly important news of situations and events which
have not yet reached the stage of being exciting
for the casual reader ('hard news')." A second
major distinction is developed in Chapter 8, "Ob-
jective News vs. Qualified Report." Among the
complexities of 20th-century life, reporting no more
than the overt event which catches the eyes is seldom
enough; it is essential rather, in the words of Kent
Cooper of the Associated Press, to have "reporting
that digs below the surface and tells the true story"
in its deeper significances. But such qualification
of the apparent manifestly can lead to editorial tam-
pering with the truth. Dean Mott, while he criti-
cally assesses such forms as the weekly news-maga-
zine style of report and the weekly summaries of
news which appear in Sunday or Saturday issues
of newspapers, judges in conclusion that, "day in
and day out, American reporters and editors gen-
erally do an honest and tremendously painstaking
job."
2908. Rothstein, Arthur. Photojournalism: pic-
tures for magazines and newspaper] s.]
New York, American Photographic Book Pub. Co.,
1956. 197 p. 56-11558 PN4784JP5R6
This study of photojournalism begins with a brief
history of the subject, but .is a whole is more con-
cerned with the current esthetics of journalistic
photography and tbe technical problems <>t proces-
sing and layout. The numerous photographs re-
264 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
follow individual chapters on the leading maga-
zines. The periodicals individually treated are not
necessarily all the leading ones begun in the period;
for, when a periodical reaches its greatest importance
in a later period, its history is given in full in the
volume on the later period. Further, all these chap-
ters on individual periodicals trace their history
beyond the formal time limit of the volume to
the date either of the periodical's end or of the
writing of the volume in which it is discussed.
While Dean Mott's work is remarkably detailed,
it is not meant to serve as an exhaustive checklist,
that function being left to Winifred Gregory's
Union List of Serials (New York, Wilson, 1943.
3065 p.). For the first 70 years a more detailed list
including information on personnel is now available:
A Register of Editors, Printers, and Publishers of
American Magazines, 1741-1810, by Benjamin M.
Lewis (New York, New York Public Library, 1957.
40 p.). The first 50 years have received mono-
graphic treatment, in greater detail than Dean
Mott's and with a different presentation and em-
phasis, in Lyon N. Richardson's A History of Early
American Magazines, 1741-1789 (New York, T.
Nelson, 1931. 414 p.).
2916. Noel, Mary. Villains galore; the heyday of
the popular story weekly. New York, Mac-
millan, 1954. 320 p. illus. 54-9474 PN4877.N6
In the 19th century periodicals first began to reach
a true mass market, and it was soon discovered that
literacy did not necessarily prove either a desire or an
ability to cope with large intellectual and esthetic
matters. To the dismay of many, and the delight of
millions, a "popular literature" was rapidly de-
veloped for this new "literate" market. In addition
to cheap novels and newspapers, fiction magazines
became purveyors of literary fare for the masses.
Many of these periodicals were weeklies with most
of their stories stolen from one another or written
by members of the staff. They provided much of
the popular entertainment of the time, serving the
same function as movies, radio, and television in the
20th century. Mary Noel's study of this phe-
nomenon opens with an account of about 40 of the
more popular story weeklies. There follows a group
of chapters with more general comments on and
analyses of the contents of such magazines, tracing
from their earliest beginnings to the present era the
various transformations of the theme of sweetness
and violence which formed the substance of most
such tales.
2917. Paine, Albert Bigelow. Th. Nast, his period
and his pictures. New York, Harper, 1904.
xxi, 583, xx p. illus.
26-22753 NC1429.N3P3 1904a
Thomas Nast (1840- 1902) is remembered as one
of the Nation's first and greatest cartoonists. Most
of his work appeared in Harper's Weekly, where he
advocated one political reform after another; his
main achievements included uncovering the corrup-
tion of the Tweed Ring and helping to elect Grover
Cleveland to the presidency. While it was a pic-
torial form in which he expressed himself, he may be
regarded as one of the more important journalistic
figures of the period. Paine's biography is not so
much a study of Nast's personality as a record of
Nast's work and influence. The book is therefore
a valuable commentary on many aspects of the his-
tory of the period.
2918. Peterson, Theodore B. Magazines in the
twentieth century. Urbana, University of
Illinois Press, 1956. 457 p. 56-5683 PN4877.P4
Bibliography: p. [397J-4H.
This book reviews the "modern magazine" from
its inception in the late 19th century to the present.
It is regarded as having arisen out of the transforma-
tion from an agrarian to an industrial society, and
the need for advertising goods that must be sold.
Crucial dates in its evolution were the establishment
of favorable postage rates (1879), the introduction of
low-priced magazines (1893), and the conscious
catering to popular taste, entered upon by The Satur-
day Evening Post under Lorimer from 1899. For
this study the author has limited his attention mainly
"to commercial magazines edited for the lay public."
In attempting to cover so wide a field, Dr. Peterson
first presents chapters on topics such as advertising
in the modern popular magazine and the financial
structure of its production. The magazines them-
selves are studied in groups, under categories such
as journals now defunct and those still popular.
Some attention is devoted to magazines intended for
minorities. However, such periodicals as house
organs, and scholarly and professional journals, are
omitted from consideration.
Magazines in the
New York, Ronald
2919. Wood, James Playsted.
United States. 2d ed.
Press Co., 1956. 390 p. illus.
56-10175 PN4877.W6 1956
The author states his purpose in the preface: "This
book attempts to show, from general magazines
that were important in their time and from im-
portant nationally circulated magazines of today,
what magazines are and in what directions they
exert their social and economic influence. It traces
and gauges the force of periodicals from Benjamin
Franklin's General Magazine to the weeklies and
monthlies of the present. It shows how magazines
have both reflected and helped to mould American
tastes, habits, manners, interests, and beliefs; how
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 265
they have shaped opinion on public questions;
how they have crusaded effectively for social and
political reforms; and how magazine advertising,
as well as magazine editorial content, has affected
the American home and standard of living." The
book, originally published in 1949, is thus more of
a social study than a detailed history. Most of the
chapters analyze intermagazine trends or develop-
ments, such as the handling of the slavery question
and of political corruption, magazines during World
War II, changes in and expansion of coverage, etc.
Some chapters are studies of groups or types of
magazines, such as the farm and grocery-store maga-
zines. A few are primarily devoted to particular
magazines, such as The Saturday Evening Post, The
Reader's Digest, and The New Yorker. A selected
bibliography appears on p. 379-383. A book writ-
ten less for the magazine reader and more for the
worker inside the magazine field is Roland E.
Wolseley's The Magazine World; an Introduction
to Magazine Journalism (New York, Prentice-Hall,
1951. 427 p.), which aims to present a picture of
the work that goes into the production and distribu-
tion of American magazines.
H. Individual Magazines
2920. Bainbridge, John. Little wonder; or, The
Reader's Digest and how it grew. New
York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1946. 177 p.
46-4584 PN4900.R3B3
The Reader's Digest was founded in 1922 by De-
Witt Wallace (b. 1889). It started out as an at-
tempt to present in short form the best articles
currently appearing in other periodicals. In time
it developed to a point where most of its articles
originated in its own editorial offices, but were ordi-
narily "planted" in other periodicals which received
inducements of various kinds. With a strong under-
tone of conservatism and religious orthodoxy the
Digest presents folksy stories and informative ar-
ticles on current issues, with all complexities of
language, problems, and thought removed for the
benefit of the common reader. This has brought
it the largest circulation of any magazine in the
world; it also sets records in a number of foreign
language editions, and appears in Braille and on
phono-discs. Its multimillion circulation has made
of it a major social force. Bainbrid<re's study, a
large part of which appeared originally in the New
Yorker, investigates the background of the maga-
zine's production more than of its influence. The
book is deftly and amusingly written, at times satiri-
cal, at all points based on much research (though
retailing some gossip), and on the whole critical of
its subject. In defense of the Reader's Digest it
has been pointed out that its standards arc no lower
than those of many newspapers and magazines
aimed at mass audiences, and that it obviously meets
a mass desire, on which level it does much good.
2921. Grimes, Alan Pendleton. The political
liberalism of the New York Nation, 1865-
1932. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press, 1953. 133 p. (The James Sprunt studies in
history and political science, v. 34)
53-62070 F251.J28, v. 34
PN4900.N3G75
Bibliography: p. [1231-129.
The Nation was founded in 1865 by Edwin Law-
rence Godkin (no. 2882) as a weekly journal that
would express the views of "liberalism" in America.
Today it still calls itself "America's leading liberal
weekly since 1865." While its subject matter has
largely consisted of current issues in domestic poli-
tics, it has also commented on world affairs in
general, and its literary department has often
achieved distinction. Its appeal has been to well
educated readers rather than to the masses, and
its circulation has always remained relatively small.
However, its select readership has established it as
a highly influential periodical, and among its con-
tributors have been many of the leading thinkers
and writers of the country. An earlier book on
the Nation was Gustav Pollak's Fifty Years of Amer-
ican Idealism; The New Yor\ Nation, 1865-1915
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1915. 468 p.). After
an introduction on editors and contributors, it
traces the chronological development of the paper
by outlining its treatment of leading issues from
year to year and concludes with a selection (p. 237-
454) of "Representative Essays."
2922. Howe, Mark Antony Dc Wolfe. The At-
lantic Monthly and its makers. Boston, At-
lantic Monthly Press, 1919. 106 p.
19-4003 PN4900.A7IIS
The Atlantic Monthly was founded in 1857 as a
literary and current events magazine cultivating the
American field. Prom the beginning it received
contributions from leading authors, and it became
an immediate success. Willi the passing ol the
266 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
decades the Atlantic became somewhat less literary
and displayed a greater tendency to survey those
factors going into the making of America. At
present the general essay and review dominate the
magazine, but it still publishes some poetry and
short stories. Mr. Howe approaches the story of
The Atlantic Monthly largely in terms of its suc-
cessive editors: James Russell Lowell, James Thomas
Fields, William Dean Howells, Thomas Bailey Aid-
rich, Horace Elisha Scudder, Walter Hines Page,
and Bliss Perry, with a brief mention of Ellery
Sedgwick, who became editor in 1909. His succes-
sor, Edward Weeks, took charge in 1938. On the
occasion of the Atlantic's centenary Mr. Weeks com-
bined with the managing editor, Emily Flint, to
produce an anthology of selections from the maga-
zine: Jubilee; One Hundred Years of the Atlantic
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1957. 746 p.). It empha-
sizes the current period, but also reflects much of
the history and past importance of the Atlantic; this
is further developed by the editorial introductions to
the several parts of the volume.
2923. Johnson, Robert Underwood. Remembered
yesterdays. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1923.
xxi, 624 p. illus. 23—17557 PN4874.J6A3
Johnson ( 1853— 1937) began work for the Century
magazine in 1873; in 1909 he became editor, al-
though he had long been doing much editorial
work. His autobiography contains much informa-
tion on his work for the magazine through 19 13, as
well as the background of many projects undertaken
by this magazine. The work also includes numer-
ous short sketches of individuals connected with the
periodical, most of them as contributors. Since the
Century was a leader in the field of the general
magazine, its contributors included a surprisingly
large percentage of the prominent people of the
period. Johnson's autobiography also deals with
some nonjournalistic matters such as his service as
Ambassador to Italy (1920-1921).
2924. Luxon, Norval Neil. Niles' Weehly Reg-
ister, news magazine of the nineteenth cen-
tury. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University
Press, 1947. 337 p. 47-3°723 JK.1.L8
"Critical essays on authorities": p. 308-320.
In 181 1 Hezekiah Niles (1777-1839) of Balti-
more founded the Weekly Register, which soon be-
came Niles' Weekly Register, and for the last 12
years of its existence (1 836-1 849) was known as
Niles' National Register. At a time of partisan
periodicals the register was outstanding for its near
impartiality. It was designed as a periodical or
record, meant to be of service to the future; in this
it succeeded, and it remains a major source for the
historian of the period. While foreshadowing a
newspaper of record such as the New Yor/^ Times,
the Register was far larger than contemporary news-
papers; indeed, it was often regarded as a magazine,
and in this respect it may be regarded a forerunner
of modern news magazines such as Time. How-
ever, like the Times rather than Time, the Register
commonly printed important speeches, official re-
ports, etc., in full or in large part. Less spectacular
than many of its contemporaries, it nonetheless had
a more substantial backing than most, and for most
of its career had a national and international cir-
culation surpassing that of any other American
paper of the period. Dr. Luxon's book has a long
chapter on the first editor, Hezekiah Niles, and in-
dividual chapters on the Register s presentation of
slavery, the West, Anglo-American relations, and
other political and commercial topics.
2925. Stewart, Paul R. The Prairie Schooner
story; a little magazine's first 25 years.
Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press, 1955. 203 p.
55—8931 PN4900.P7S7 1955
Bibliography: p. 199-203.
The Prairie Schooner began publication at the
University of Nebraska in 1927. From the begin-
ning it has placed an emphasis on creative writing,
fiction and poetry, with some general expository
articles and reviews. It has been particularly noted
for the quality of its short stories. Originally it was
regional in intent and in its contributors, but it
rapidly became as general as the majority of litde
magazines. Unlike many of them, it has shown a
conservative editorial bent, but has nevertheless
maintained its quality. Dr. Stewart's study, a Uni-
versity of Illinois dissertation, approaches the
periodical from several points of view, including its
editorial policy and its financial history. It pro-
vides a useful supplement to The Little Magazine,
by Hoffman, Allen, and Ulrich (no. 2914), by study-
ing the development of one such publication in
concrete detail.
2926. Tebbel, John W. George Horace Lorimer
and The Saturday Evening Post. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 335 p.
48-6490 PN4874.L63T4
Lorimer (1868-1937) joined the staff of The
Saturday Evening Post as literary editor in 1898, at
a time when it seemed to be a small and failing
magazine. Next year he was appointed editor-in-
chief, and with new policies he rapidly made it one
of the most successful magazines in the country. Its
great popularity has been attributed to his "infal-
lible" sense for the literary taste of the large middle-
class audience. A large part of Mr. Tebbel's study
is devoted to the fiction that appeared in the maga-
PERIODICALS AND JOURNALISM / 267
zine, and to Lorimer's relations with the authors.
In addition to a pro-Republican editorial page
(which was progressive until continuing attitudes
became conservative with the passage of time), the
magazine featured numerous articles. The articles
were informative, and were not written as a result
of editorial dictation, but their acceptance usually
depended upon the editor's agreement with the
views expressed. The magazine also included es-
says, autobiographical sketches, humor, and verse;
and it flourished on its advertising. To the time of
Lorimer's retirement in 1936 the policy in all de-
partments was one of realism, but a realism tempered
by the many taboos resulting from an applied uirn-
of-the-century middle-class morality. Mr. Tebbel's
admiring and sympathetic account is in large part
based on interviews with those who knew the editor
personally, or had business dealings with him.
I. The Press and Society
2927. Bird, George L., and Frederic E. Merwin,
eds. The press and society; a book of read-
ings. [Rev. ed.] New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951.
xv, 655 p. (Prentice-Hall journalism series)
51-11016 PN4735.B5 1951
First published in 1942 under tide: The News-
paper and Society.
This volume, largely an anthology of writings on
the press with introductory commentaries by the
editors, is a textbook designed primarily for jour-
nalism students. It attempts to present historical
perspective as well as the pros and cons of the various
issues discussed. The first part, introductory in
nature, discusses the nature of "public opinion" and
the ways and means of press influence; here, as else-
where, "press" means mainly newspapers, but in-
cludes other forms of mass communications, such
as radio. The second part, "The Press at Work in
Society," shows how the press functions, especially
in terms of the selection or suppression of news,
attitudes conveyed, methods employed, and press
reliability. The concluding sections cover those
forces which have molded the press as it is: chain
ownership, pressure groups, press agents, govern-
ment, etc. Each chapter of the book concludes
with a list of further readings.
2928. Brucker, Herbert. Freedom of information.
New York, Macmillan, 1949. 307 p.
49-7938 PN4735.B7
This book by the editor of the Hartford Courant
(born in 1898) analyzes the American press in terms
of its principles, functions, and methods. While
much attention is given to its faults in reporting
news, the main concern is to report what has been
and is being done to improve American journalism.
Mr. Brucker deals with such problems as the free-
dom of the press, governmental and economic con-
trols and influences, and the nature and standards
of objective reporting.
2929. Duniway, Clyde Augustus. The develop-
ment of freedom of the press in Massachu-
setts. New York, Longmans, Green, 1906. xv.
202. p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 12)
6-15096 Z657.D93
"Bibliographical notes": p. 175-186.
This book attempts to "explain the significant
features of the rise of a free press in Massachusetts."
It opens with a discussion of press control in Eng-
land to 1603. There follow chronological chapters
on the changing censorship laws and controls in
Massachusetts, which led to limited freedom of the
press in the middle of the 17th century, and to fairly
full freedom during the Revolutionary War and
after the adoption of constitutional guarantees.
The book concludes with a chapter on the "reac-
tionary tendencies" of 1789-1812, and their subse-
quent modification. Since Massachusetts in many
respects was typical of such problems throughout
the Colonies, this book is significant for the early
development of a free press in America.
2930. Pollard, James E. The presidents and the
press. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 866 p.
47-1213 PN4888.P7P6
An investigation of the relationships between the
press and the presidents, from George Washington
to Harry S. Truman. The story proceeds chrono-
logically president by president, with each studied
in considerable detail. Mr. Pollard's work is thus
an important contribution to both political history
and journalistic history. The later chapters add
much to an understanding of present-day Washing'
ton news reporting and commentating.
2931. Rutherford, Livingston, fohn Peter Zei
his press, his tri.il and a bibliography of Zen-
ger imprints; also a reprint of the first edition of die
trial. New York, Dodd, Mead, [904. 27s p.
illus. 4 SSSS Y;^:/^R9
268 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography of the issues of the Zenger press,
1725-1751: p. [1331-169.
Bibliography of the trial of John Peter Zenger:
P- [247H55-
Zenger (i697?-i746) was by origin a Palatinate
German who came to this country as a youth. In
1733 he established the New-Yorl^ Weekly Journal,
in which he printed criticisms of the administration
of the royal governor of New York, William Cosby.
This led to his arrest in 1735 on a charge of criminal
libel. The judge was hostile, but, after listening
to the brilliant pleadings of Andrew Hamilton of
Philadelphia, the jury entered a verdict of not guilty.
The case itself is regarded as crucial in the establish-
ment of the freedom of the press in this country
and is hence a starting point for the study of the
principles of American journalism. Rutherfurd's
study opens with a chapter on the political condi-
tions and the general situation of the press in the
period preceding the trial. The second chapter nar-
rates the events leading to Zenger 's arrest and the
preparations for the trial. The third chapter is an
account of the trial itself, with a summary of
Zenger's subsequent career and of the effects of the
trial on subsequent libel law. Also included is a
reprint of Zenger's own (1736) verbatim account of
the trial. While Mr. Rutherfurd's volume was
originally published in a small edition, it has since
been reprinted by photographic process (New York,
Peter Smith, 194 1. 275 p.).
2932. Siebert, Fredrick Seaton. The rights and
privileges of the press. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1934. xvii, 429 p. 34-784 Law
This book does not attempt to present the histori-
cal evolution of the rights and responsibilities of the
press. It does attempt to describe the situation in
America, as of its date, with regard to the limits of
press privileges and rights, and it is designed to help
the practicing journalist on points of law likely to
arise. After an introductory chapter on the general
subject of the freedom of the press, the first main
section is "The Right To Gather News," with chap-
ters on matters such as the rights of access to various
governmental records and proceedings. The second
section, "The Right to Publish News," covers the
limitations upon it and seeks to indicate when stories
become obscene and immoral, false and defamatory,
professionally injurious, etc. The final section is
"The Right to Comment on the News," which is
discussed with regard to individuals, institutions,
and governmental personages and agencies. In
keeping with the author's primarily legal viewpoint,
the appendix contains a table of the many cases men-
tioned in the book (p. 401-418).
Siebert is also the author, with Theodore Peter-
son and Wilbur Schramm, of Four Theories of the
Press: the Authoritarian, Libertarian, Social Re-
sponsibility, and Soviet Communist Concepts of
What the Press Should Be and Do (Urbana, Uni-
versity of Illinois Press, 1956. 153 p.), which at-
tempts to assess the main theories of press function-
ing, and their consequences for the form the press
has taken in the United States and other nations.
VI
Geography
A. General and Physical Geography 2933-2941
B. Geology and Soil 2942-2947
C. Climate and Weather 2948-2953
D. Plants and Animals 2954-2966
E. Historical Geography and Atlases 2967-2976
F. Polar Exploration 2977-2981
THIS chapter offers a selection from the writings that describe the natural setting within
which the civilization of the United States was brought into being, and upon which it must
depend, as well as others that interpret the interrelations of continent and culture. The subject
has long received the searching attention of scientific geographers and geologists, who have
produced a vast literature merely to list which would require a number of volumes the size of
this one. The great bulk of it, however, consists of scientific monographs and articles in
professional journals, more or less completely tech-
nical in character, and inappropriate if not unin-
telligible to most of those whose primary interest
lies in American civilization. From this whole lit-
erature we have therefore selected comparatively a
mere handful of titles, which seem likely to be
particularly helpful and interesting to students of
that civilization. They are naturally, as a rule, the
more general works, but some quite detailed and
technical volumes (such as nos. 2961 and 2969)
have been included when they seemed to give valu-
able insights not readily obtainable elsewhere.
It will be noted that most of the manuals included
in Sections A and B treat North America as a unit,
since the northern and southwestern boundaries of
the United States have little significance for the
physiographer or the geologist. Two of the books
in Section A (nos. 2938 and 2942) are concerned
with the discipline itself, the pursuit of scientific
geography in the United States, with the entire
globe for its subject matter. The books on soil
science in Section B deal with a subject that has
been exhaustively pursued by the U. S. Department
of Agriculture during the last 60 years, but that
seems to be little adapted to summary treatment.
There is of course no sharp division between these
and related titles that will be found in Chapter
XXVII, Land and Agriculture. The selection in
Section D on Plants and Animals is perhaps unfair
to our native fish, reptiles, amphibians, and insects,
as well as to several types of vegetation less conspic-
uous than the trees, all which groups have been
effectively described in books intended for the gen-
eral reader.
Section E on Historical Geography is less selective
than its predecessors, for there is less to select from;
the subject has hardly received the cultivation it
deserves. Academic historians were in some degree
alienated from a geographical approach by the
rather exaggerated dctCJ mination of an earlier school
of which Miss Semple (no. 2975) was a representa-
tive. Messrs. Gilbert and Broun (nos. 21)71, 2968,
and 2969) have since exemplified a more fruitful
approach to historical geography, but their followers
remain few. (There is, however, much matter of
geographical interest in the sections OD Dis<
and Exploration in Chapter YI1I, General I listory.)
It is furthermore true that more and more special-
269
27O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ized atlases of American history are a desideratum;
here the high cost of printing has been one of the
effective deterrents.
The final section on Polar Exploration calls at-
tention to a sphere in which the specifically Ameri-
can contribution to a fundamentally international
enterprise has been outstanding. We should not
wish to omit mention of the achievements of Kane,
Greely, Peary, and Byrd, and this seemed the most
appropriate place to notice them. Works on the
exploration of the North American continent will
be found in Chapters VIII and XII below.
A. General and Physical Geography
2933. Atwood, Wallace W. The physiographic
provinces of North America. Boston, Ginn,
1940. xvi, 535 p. 40-33578 GB115.A8
"Selected references for additional reading" at
end of each chapter.
The regional idea is essential to the progress of
geography, and the fundamental basis of regional
subdivision is neither climate, agriculture, politics,
vegetation, industry, nor soil, but "contrasts in topog-
raphy, or relief," which "are not made by human
occupation or affected by it." The regions of this
volume are the Atlantic and Gulf coastal plain, the
Appalachian highlands (in northeastern and south-
western divisions), the Laurentian upland, the cen-
tral lowlands, the interior highlands, the Great
Plains, the Rocky Mountains, the Cordilleran pla-
teaus, and the Pacific borderlands. For each one the
author opens with a general description, proceeds
to characteristic features, and concludes with "an
approach to the human drama." The treatment
here is bolder and in larger strokes than in either
Bowman or Fenneman below. A selected list of
topographic maps, usually those of the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey, follows the references for each re-
gional chapter. The 281 illustrations are excep-
tionally well chosen and reproduced.
2934. Bowman, Isaiah. Forest physiography;
physiography of the United States and prin-
ciples of soils in relation to forestry. New York,
Wiley, 1911. xxii, 759 p. n-29383 GB121.B7
When Dr. Bowman undertook this work, a
knowledge of the physiography of the United States
"depended upon one or two short and general
chapters on the subject, or upon a study of hundreds
of original papers and monographs." In writing
"a book on physiography for students of forestry,"
he produced an authoritative synthesis which has in-
fluenced all subsequent writing in the field. The
first hundred pages expound the origin and features
of soils, while the remainder survey 32 physio-
graphic regions of the United States. Such regions
are characterized by "uniformity of topographic ex-
pression," are often of great size, are widely varied
in character, and in some instances exhibit features
unique on the earth's surface. Five plate maps and
292 figures illustrate the text.
2935. Fenneman, Nevin M. Physiography of
western United States. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1931. 534 p. 31-4608 GB124.W4F4
2936. Fenneman, Nevin M. Physiography of
eastern United States. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1938. 714 p. 38-9303 GB124.E4F4
In these volumes physiography is equivalent to
geomorphology and is limited to the genetic study
of land forms; it "may be said to represent the over-
lap of the two major sciences," geology and geog-
raphy. The materials for the two treatises are
largely geological monographs, but the information
derived from them has been organized rather than
merely assembled, and the large proportion of
purely descriptive material is included for "its evi-
dential value in the interpretation of physiographic
history." The author, a professor of geology at the
University of Cincinnati, divides the western United
States into 10 and the eastern into 13 "provinces."
These are determined by a scheme of division
"which makes possible the largest number of gen-
eral statements about each." Both volumes have
folding maps as well as plans and photographs in
the text.
2937. The Geographical review. Readings in the
geography of North America, a selection of
articles from The Geographical review. New
York, American Geographical Society, 1952. 466 p.
(American Geographical Society [of New York]
Reprint series, no. 5) 52-2969 E41.G4
Bibliography: p. 221-226.
The Geographical Review assumed its present
form in 1916 and began issuing volumes of reprints
of its articles concerned with a particular area dur-
ing World War II; the present volume coincided
with the centennial of the American Geographical
Society and with the 17th Congress of the Interna-
tional Geographical Union meeting in Washington
and New York. It reprints by photographic process
22 of the more than 500 articles on North America
published by the Review since 1916, selected to "pre-
sent as wide a range as possible of the many areas of
geographical research," and arranged in the order
of their appearance in the Review, 191 6-1950. Most
of the articles have maps, charts, or photographs,
and there is one large folding map in color to ac-
company Charles Warren Thornthwaite's "An Ap-
proach toward a Rational Classification of Climate"
(1948), which revises the influential "The Climates
of North America according to a New Classifica-
tion" that Thornthwaite contributed to the Review
in 1 93 1. The other articles include James W. Gold-
thwait's "A Town that has Gone Downhill" [Lyme,
N. H.] (1927); Wolfgang L. G. Joerg's "The Geog-
raphy of North America: A History of Its Regional
Exposition" (1936); Richard Hartshorne's "Racial
Maps of the United States" (1938); and Edward L.
Ullman's "The Railroad Pattern of the United
States" (1940).
2938. James, Preston E., and Clarence F. Jones,
eds. American geography: inventory &
prospect. John K. Wright, consulting editor.
Maps by John C. Sherman. Syracuse, N. Y., Pub-
lished for the Association of American Geographers
by Syracuse University Press, 1954. 590 p.
54-9225 G73.3.U5J3
This cooperative work "deals with the fruits of
American learning in the last two generations," and
"is written not only for the trained geographer, but
also for the educated layman, for the apprentice
geographer, and for workers in another discipline
who may want to know what American geogra-
phers are thinking and doing and what they hope to
accomplish." Its scope extends to American studies
in world geography, and not merely in the United
States or North America. Each chapter is followed
by a series of references in which the relevant books
and articles are enumerated. Chapters are devoted to
such varieties as historical, settlement, urban, politi-
cal, agricultural, transportation, plant, animal, medi-
cal, and military geography. The volume concludes
with discussions of field techniques, the interpreta-
tion of air photographs, and geographical cartog-
raphy.
2939. Jones, Llewellyn Rodwell, and Patrick W.
Bryan. North America, an historical, eco-
nomic, and regional geography, fmth ed., rev.]
London, Methuen; New York, Dutton, 1054. xvi,
582 p. 56-61 E38.J75 1954
A standard tot by two English university geog-
raphers, originally published in 1924. The last
major revision was that of 1938. Prof. Jones died in
1947, but Dean Bryan has continued to make correc-
GEOGRAPHY / 271
tions and additions in the two editions published
since. The organization of the book is indicated
by the subtitle: Part I, "Historical Geography" (from
the discovery to the Civil War), was originally
written by Jones; Part II, "Economic Geography,"
has ten chapters by Bryan and five by Jones; Part
III, "Regional Geography," was by Jones. This
work of great clarity and concision is illustrated by
122 maps and plans. A shorter text, by an Eng-
lish geographer who has migrated to Indiana Uni-
versity, is Norman J. G. Pounds' North America
(London, Murray, 1955. 230 p.). It devotes a
chapter to New York City, and separate treatment
to Canada.
2940. White, Charles Langdon, and Edwin J. Fos-
cue. Regional geography of Anglo-Amer-
ica. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. xxii,
518 p. illus. 54-6526 E169.W54 1954
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
A revised and reorganized edition of a textbook
originally published in 1943. Anglo-America is
one of the two major divisions of the Western Hem-
isphere, divided from Latin America by the northern
border of Mexico. Geographical "regions are
formed by man as he adjusts himself to the natural
environment"; they are determined by "the atti-
tudes, objectives, and technical abilities of the set-
tlers" as much as by the physical quality of the land,
and they have ever-changing boundaries, readily
altered by technological or economic innovation.
The authors divide Anglo-America into 14 mutually
exclusive regions, such as the Cotton Belt, the Ag-
ricultural Interior, the Subtropical Pacific Coast, and
the Tundra, and a 15th, the American Manufactur-
ing Belt, which extends discontinuously from Boston
to St. Louis, and overlaps four of the other regions.
Appendix A enables the reader to distinguish the
authors' geographical regions from physiographic,
climate, and soil regions as established by standard
authorities. Subregions are distinguished within
most of the 14. Under each region or subregion
the authors describe the physical setting, sometimes
the "sequent occupance," the major forms of eco-
nomic exploitation, and, finally, "the outlook," which
in some instances, especially the Atlantic Coastal
Plain and the Piedmont, is difficult to forecast. An
earlier, more detailed, and even more critical] v diag-
nostic regional survey, which unfortunately has
not been brought up to date, is Xorth America, Its
People and the Resources, Development, and Pros-
pects of the Continent As the Home of Man [rev.
ed.] (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1942. 1016 p.),
by Joseph Russell Smith and Merlon Ogden Phil-
lips. An up to date textbook concentratin
utilization ol the national resources, but considering
them only under four large conventional regions,
272 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is Geography of North America, 3d ed. (New York,
Wiley, 1955. 664 p.), by George J. Miller, Almon
E. Parkins, and Bert Hudgins. Alfred J. Wright's
United States and Canada; a Regional Geography,
2d ed. (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1956.
590 p.), emphasizes the effect of constant change in
the national economy upon the data of economic
geography.
2941. Wright, John K. Geography in the making;
the American Geographical Society, 1851-
195 1. New York, The Society, 1952. xxi, 437 p.
52-11527 G3.A56W7
A centennial history of the leading American
organization for the scientific study of geography,
by an outstanding geographer who has been a staff
member since 1920, and Director during 1938-49.
Dr. Wright is concerned with the gradual transfor-
mation of the Society's function, from the advance-
ment of exploration and the investigation of remote
regions, toward the development of geography as a
profession and an educational discipline. As land-
marks he points out the presidency of Archer M.
Hundngton (1907-11) and the service of Isaiah
Bowman as director (1915-35). He gives special
emphasis to the compilation of the "millionth map"
of South America, which was undertaken in 1920,
took 25 years to complete, and cost $570,000.
B. Geology and Soil
2942. Eardley, Armand J. Structural geology of
North America. New York, Harper, 1951.
624 p. 22 x 29 cm. (Harper's geoscience series)
51-10958 QE41.E2
Bibliography: p. 601-620.
An imposing textbook for advanced students
which aims "to describe the structural evolution of
the North American continent in post-Proterozoic
time." The editor of the series calls it "the first
book in any language which described in some
detail the structural evolution of an area as large
as a continent." The unusual shape provides for
the numerous large maps and cross sections. No
list is provided of the 343 numbered figures in the
text. The author states that the backbone of the
study resides in the two kinds of maps: the paleo-
geographic maps which show the surface distribu-
tion of the various rocks at different times in the
past, and the more numerous paleotectonic maps
which show the basins, arches, domes, and other
structural features that formed during a certain time.
The chapters "chronicle the crustal unrest of the
continent" and treat of "the procession of deforma-
tional and sedimentary events," but emphasis has
been placed on geographic position rather than on
time. The structural terminology employed in the
book is explained in Chapter 2.
2943. Hulbert, Archer Butler. Soil; its influence
on the history of the United States, with spe-
cial reference to migration and the scientific study of
local history. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1930. 227 p. 30-30109 E156.H91
"The material . . . has been elaborated from an
outline delivered on the Goldwin Smith lectureship
foundation at Cornell University, New York, in
1925." — Preface.
Its title notwithstanding, this is no narrow mono-
graph, but a general work on the historical geog-
raphy of American settlement. Its seeks only to add
the "edaphic" factor to such recognized ones as
climate and waterways, and expressly disclaims
"the devil of one idea" as a method of interpretation.
The author discusses the five main classes of soils
and reviews the sections of the Preliminary Soil Map
of the United States, published by the U. S. Bureau
of Soils in 191 1. He notes that the settlers' ideas
or prejudices concerning the virtues of soils, and
vegetation as an index of soil quality, were positive
influences. The final 14 chapters discuss soils and
agriculture in successive phases of pioneer setde-
ment from New England to the Pacific. An appen-
dix calls for a new emphasis upon primary topog-
raphy and original surveys in town, township, and
county history.
2944. Kellogg, Charles E. The soils that support
us; an introduction to the study of soils and
their use by men. New York, Macmillan, 1941.
370 p. _ _ 41-16797 S591.K425
Modern soil science is a highly developed specialty
whose technicalities tend to leave the ordinary reader
far behind. Dr. Kellogg, successor to C. F. Marbut
in charge of the U. S. Soil Survey, succeeds in mak-
ing the subject both intelligible and significant to the
layman in this attractively presented and produced
primer. While the theme is the worldwide one of
man in relation to the soil, the great majority of
the examples are taken from American regions, and
the "soils of the grasslands," "of the desert," "of
temperate forested lands," and even "of warm and
tropical lands" are all presented through appro-
priate examples within the continental United States.
Appendix I provides an introduction to soil classifi-
cation and soil maps.
GEOGRAPHY / 273
2945. Miller, William J. An introduction to his-
torical geology, with special reference to
North America. 6th ed. New York, Van Nost-
rand, 1952. 555 p. 52-6381 QE651.M5 1952
The author of this very successful textbook, first
published in 19 16, is Emeritus Professor of Geology,
University of California at Los Angeles; the 6th
edition is a thorough revision incorporating new
topics and illustrations. The use of technical terms,
especially the names of fossils, has been kept to a
reasonable minimum. After eight introductory
chapters on the elements of earth history, the book
proceeds by treating successive eras and periods,
from the Archeozoic to the Cenozoic, according to a
uniform plan. Surviving formations and fossils
from each age within the United States are empha-
sized.
2946. Mohr, Charles E., and Howard N. Sloane,
eds. Celebrated American caves. New
Brunswick, Rutgers University Press, 1955. 339 p.
55-12228 GB604.M6
One of the features of American geology is the
great number of large underground caverns which it
includes — some 2000 in Kentucky, 1500 in Tennes-
see, 1200 in Virginia, and 1000 in Missouri, to name
only the leading states. Mammoth Cave in Ken-
tucky has been in continuous operation as a natural
shovvplace since 1816. The National Speleological
Society, founded in 1941, aims "to foster interest
in the knowledge to be gained from cave explora-
tion, and to protect from thoughtless vandalism the
national features of the underground world."
Fifteen of its members have contributed to the
present volume sketches of individual caves, caves
of various regions, or of particular cave phenomena,
such as vampire bats and prehistoric burials.
2947. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Soils and men.
[Washington] U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1938.
1232 p. (Its Yearbook of agriculture, 1938)
Agr55-!3 S21.A35 1938
The United States Soil Survey was initiated in
1899, and from 1910 to 1934 was under the direction
of Curtis Fletcher Marbut ( 1863— 1935). In co-
operation with state research institutions it has pro-
duced several thousand maps and reports on
particular localities and is responsible for nearly all
the detailed knowledge of American soil varieties
and their distribution. It has naturally developed
a progressive refinement of technique and classifica-
tion, which has rendered its earlier surveys more or
less obsolete. The first large summary of its results
was the U. S. Bureau of Soils' Bulletin no. 96, Soils
of the United States, by Marbut, Hugh H. Bennett,
Jesse E. Lapham, and Macy H. Lapham (Washing-
ton, Govt. Print. Off., 1913. 791 p.), which in-
cluded a detailed soil map of the United States.
Marbut's own lifework was summed up in "Soils of
the United States," Part 3 of the Atlas of American
Agriculture (q. v.) which appeared in the year of
his death. The methods and objectives of the Sur-
vey have since 1903 been set forth in a succession of
fieldbooks, the latest being the Soil Survey Manual,
issued in August 1951, by the U. S. Bureau of Plant
Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering
(Washington [U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 503 p.); it
includes a "Special Bibliography" of recent (1937-
50) surveys in contrasting soil regions (p. 447-454).
The 1938 Yearbook, like its companion volumes, is
a huge miscellany by various hands treating all as-
pects of the subject. It is included here because of
Part V, "Soils of the United States" (p. [1017]-
1161), in which members of the Soil Survey Divi-
sion "bring together and summarize, on a compara-
tively small scale, the data accumulated during the
past half century on the enormous variety of soils in
this country." The descriptions are offered in con-
junction with a map of the "soil associations" of the
United States at the end of the volume. The Year-
boo\ also contains "A Glossary of Special Terms"
used in it (p. 1162-1180) and an alphabetical list of
"Literature Cited" comprising 476 entries (p. 1181-
1207).
C. Climate and Weather
2948. Flora, Snowden D. Tornadoes of the
United States. [Rev. cd.] Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press, 1954. xvi, 221 p.
54-8922 QC955.F6 1954
Tornadoes are more numerous and violent in the
United States east of the Rockies than anywhere
else in the world. The Director of the Weather
Bureau for Kansas explains them, so far as they are
4 ;i 1240— 60 19
understood, calculates their destructiveness, pives
practical advice, and inventories the worst examples
on record.
2949. Hoyt, William G., and Walter B. Langbein.
Floods. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1955. 469 p. 54~6°75 GB1215.H68
Bibliography: p. 433-443.
274 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Estimates of the damage caused by floods in the
U. S. in an average year range from $200,000,000
to $500,000,000. The authors discuss the causes
of floods, and the kinds of antidotes which human
ingenuity can devise. They go on to expound the
national flood-control policy, survey problems, proj-
ects, and plans in the several basins, and conclude
with a detailed history of American floods since
1900.
2950. Kimble, George H. T. Our American
weather. Maps and charts by Jean Paul
Tremblay. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955. 322 p.
54-9711 QC983.K5
"There is nothing quite like American weather
anywhere else in the world." Its highly individual
"style" results from two main factors: the invasion
of air masses from six different quarters, and a
strongly articulated terrain which facilitates the flow
of heat and cold while it restrains the flow of mois-
ture. This individuality is elaborated in a month-
by-month survey, in which the prevalent "spectacles
of the weather parade," and their regional modifi-
cations, are described. This popular presentation
puts much solid meteorological information into an
ingenious and palatable form.
2951. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Climate and
man. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.,
1941. xii, 1248 p. (Its Yearbook of agriculture,
1941) Agr 55-10 S21.A35 1941
A massive symposium undertaken before the
transfer of the Weather Bureau from the Depart-
ment of Agriculture to the Department of Com-
merce in 1940. It is in large part inspired by the
progress in weather science achieved by Scandi-
navian scientists during World War I, when the
importance of movements in the upper atmosphere
was demonstrated, and since by American scientists,
whose actual observations and measurements in this
area have led to large research projects which pre-
pare the way for long-range forecasting. Nearly
half the book (p. 634-1228) presents climatic data
in map or tabular form, for the United States as a
whole, and particularly for each of the 48 States in
alphabetical order, with respect to temperature, pre-
cipitation, and killing frosts. Several papers describe
the methods of recent meteorology, including "How
the Daily Forecast is Made" and the problems of
forecasting floods. Two considerable sections deal
with the influence of climate on agricultural settle-
ment in various regions of the United States and in
its territories, and with the relations of climate to
particular crops such as cotton, tobacco, orchard
crops, and livestock.
2952. Visher, Stephen S. Climatic atlas of the
United States. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1954. 403 p.
Map 53-383 G1201.C8V5 1954
Bibliography: p. 393-395.
The typical or average phenomena of American
weather are presented in a series of 103 1 figures,
mostly maps of the continental United States, and
the rest graphs. The first 371 are concerned with
temperature; the remainder are divided among
winds and storms, sunshine, humidity and evap-
oration, precipitation, consequences of climate in
agriculture and topography, and climatic regions
and changes. Over 400 of the maps are original
compilations by Prof. Visher, and the remainder
have been adapted to a uniform style. This refer-
ence book summarizes the result of decades of
observation by the United States Weather Bureau
and its cooperators. The American Automobile
Association's Climatic Guide (Washington, 1950.
131 p.) presents average monthly figures on tem-
peratures, precipitation, humidity, wind, and cloudi-
ness for 250 American cities — a convenient compila-
tion not merely for motorists. An older but still
valuable compilation of climatic data will be found
in Part 2, "Climate," of the Atlas of American
Agriculture (q. v.).
2953. Ward, Robert De Courcy. The climates of
the United States. Boston, Ginn, 1925.
518 p. 25-21094 QC983.W3
The author was a professor of climatology at Har-
vard University, and his book, the product of 25
years of study and teaching, has retained its authority
through three decades. It defines climate as average
weather, but insists that mere averages are mislead-
ing, since "it is the irregular weather changes from
day to day which give climates their real character."
The author enumerates the seven major climatic
controls, arrives at a working scheme of eight cli-
matic provinces for the United States, and summa-
rizes their outstanding features in Chapter 20. Its
predecessors are largely topical, analyzing the phe-
nomena of temperature, frost, prevailing winds,
rainfall, snowfall, humidity and "sensible tempera-
tures" (i. e., as affecting human comfort or dis-
comfort), sunshine and cloudiness, thunderstorms,
cold waves and blizzards, hot waves and the Indian
Summer, and winds and breezes of various types.
Concluding chapters consider the American climate
in relation to health and to crops, and the climates
of Alaska.
The Climates of North America, by Ward
Charles F. Brooks, and A. J. Connor, comprise;
Band II, Teil J (Berlin, Borntraeger, 1938. 424 p.)
of a large Handbuch der Klimatologie, edited b)
W. Koppen and R. Geiger. The second and larges
GEOGRAPHY / 275
section, "The United States" (p. 80-903), was orig-
inally condensed by Ward from his 1925 volume,
but was revised by Prof. Brooks of the Blue Hill
Meteorological Laboratory, Harvard University, in
the light of new contributions published through
1935. New maps were prepared, and 92 pages of
tables compiled from published and unpublished
materials of the U. S. Weather Bureau (p. 197-
288). The volume includes separate treatments of
Mexico, Alaska, and Canada.
D. Plants and Animals
2954. Cahalane, Victor H. Mammals of North
America. With drawings by Francis L.
Jaques. New York, Macmillan, 1947. 682 p.
47-4195 QL715.C3
"List of references": p. 647-676.
2955. Hamilton, William J. American mammals;
their lives, habits, and economic relations.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1939. 434 p.
40-27054 QL715.H16
These two works complement each other ad-
mirably. Mr. Cahalane, who aims at "a popular
book which will summarize existing information on
the principal kinds of mammals of North America,"
has reduced the 1500 existing species and subspecies
under 94 headings. For each he gives a generalized
and quite lively life history, in which he consciously
runs the risks of "humanizing" animal behavior,
enumerates the principal varieties, gives a concise
general description, identifies the distinguishing
characteristics for the benefit of field observers, and
delimits the geographical range. Mr. Hamilton has
aimed to produce a "reference text" for layman,
teacher, and professional zoologist alike, but, save
for a technical chapter on classification, it is little
behind the popular work in readability. Here the
treatment is topical, such large subjects as adapta-
tions, food, reproduction, hibernation, migration,
and behavior receiving illustration from a variety of
species. Chapters 14 and 15 discriminate between
"Useful" and "Injurious Mammals"; but it is ex-
plained that "any mammal may be of considerable
value in one locality and highly destructive in an-
other." Mr. Jaques' drawings have a distinction
lacking in the illustrations of American Mammals;
the latter's photographs are poorly reproduced. A
complete systematic account is provided by Gcrrit S.
Miller and Remington Kellogg's List of North
American Recent Mammals (Washington, Smith-
sonian Institution, 1955. 954 p.).
2956. Ecological Society of America. Naturalist's
guide to the Americas, prepared by the Com-
mittee on the Preservation of Natural Conditions of
the Ecological Society of America, with assistance
from numerous organizations and individuals, as-
sembled and edited by the chairman, Victor E.
Shelford. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 1926.
xv, 761 p. 26-8906 QH102.E25
This unusual book was the result of seven years'
effort by members of the Ecological Society to list
"all preserved and preservable areas in North
America in which natural conditions persist." Ma-
terials on Central America, and on South America
north of the Amazon, are confined to p. 514-709.
Section III attempts to arrive at the "original Biota
of the Americas" (necessarily limited to general
vegetation, mammals, and birds) and distinguishes
19 characteristic areas north of central Mexico. The
bulk of the book (p. 87 ff.) consists of detailed
descriptions of particular areas by various hands.
The Society's larger objective was "the preservation
of natural areas with original flora and fauna (or as
nearly so as may obtain) and the maintenance of the
natural biotic balance in existing preserves."
2957. Harshbcrger, John W. Phytogeographic
survey of North America; a consideration of
the phytogeography of the North American con-
tinent, including Mexico, Central America and the
West Indies, together with the evolution of North
American plant distribution. Leipzig, Engelmann;
New York, Stechert, 191 1. lxiii, 790 p. (Die
Vegetation der Erde, hrsg. von A. Engler und O.
Drude, v. 13) DA
"Kurzgefasste deutsche Inhaltsiibersicht," by O.
Drude: p. fxiii]-lxiii.
Dr. Harshberger believed that it was essential for
the botanists of his day to leave "a record of the
original appearance of the country before the march
of civilization has destroyed primeval conditions,"
since "all future botanic and forestry work must be
based on considerations of what was the native
growth." He begins with a review of earlier botanic
investigations and literature (p. 1-45) and continues
with a bibliography in geographical arrangement
(p. 45-92). Part 3 outlines the history ol North
American flora through geological time since the
Cretaceous Period, discusses its relationship to other
continental floras, and glances briefly at earlier at-
276 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tempts at its phytogeographic classification. Part 4,
comprising about half the book, is a systematic re-
view of the several zones, regions, formations and
associations into which the author has divided the
continent. In each area the author aims "to give
a succinct account of the vegetation . . . not ex-
clusively from the floristic standpoint, but also from
the ecologic."
2958. Herrick, Francis Hobart. The American
eagle; a study in natural and civil history.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1934. xx, 266 p.
34-36763 QL696.A2H46
"In the course of from fifty to sixty centuries the
eagle has symbolized not only power, courage, and
conquest, but freedom, independence, magnanimity,
truth, the soul or its bearer, the Holy Spirit, and im-
mortality." It was therefore not surprising that
William Barton placed a heraldic eagle on the
original design for the Seal of the United States; but
it was an inspiration on the part of Charles Thom-
son, permanent Secretary of the Continental Con-
gress, to alter this conventional fowl to Haliaeetus
leucocephalus, the American or bald eagle. Mr.
Herrick traces our eagle's heraldic appearances on
successive seals and coins, and also describes its
natural life in the eyries about Vermilion, Ohio.
These he has approached by means of a 96-foot
steel observatory tower, enabling him to take a
unique series of photographs of the American eagle
at home.
2959. Livingston, Burton E., and Forrest Shreve.
The distribution of vegetation in the United
States, as related to climatic conditions. Washing-
ton, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1921. xvi,
590 p. (Carnegie Institution of Washington. Pub-
lication no. 284) 21-15878 QK115.L8
"Literature cited": p. 587-590.
A first attempt "to discover quantitative relations
between vegetation characters on the one hand and
environmental conditions on the other" for the geo-
graphic area of the United States. The authors re-
gard plant physiology as the key to causal relations
within the field. Their problems have led them to
work out the general vegetation zones of the United
States, and to map the distribution of particular
species or groups of species. The bulk of the book
is taken up by detailed tables of climatic phenomena
and of vegetation-climate correlations. The most
important correlation discovered is that between
vegetation zones and "the moisture ratio for the
average frostless season."
2960. Martin, Alexander C, Herbert S. Zim, and
Arnold L. Nelson. American wildlife &
plants, a guide to wildlife food habits; the use of
trees, shrubs, weeds, and herbs by birds and mam-
mals of the United States. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1951. 500 p. 51-11545 QL756.M27
"Prepared under the direction of the United
States Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of the
Interior, at the Patuxent Research Refuge, Laurel,
Maryland."
This manual provides detailed information con-
cerning the foods upon which the several species of
American wild birds and mammals depend. The
object is to further wildlife preservation, but the
attractive method of presentation — species by species
with neat drawings and thumbnail maps showing
distribution for each — affords a compact survey of
present-day wildlife in the United States. Part II
deals successively with water birds, land birds, birds
of prey, fur and game mammals, small mammals,
and "hoofed browsers." Part III reviews the plants,
indicating the several animal species to which each
is useful, and concludes with 10 pages of tables:
"Wildlife Plants Ranked According to Their Value."
2961. Morgan, Lewis H. The American beaver
and his works. Philadelphia, Lippincott,
1868. 330 p. 6-26710 QL737.R6M84
Castor Americanus, physically a rather unimpres-
sive rodent, is the only mammal beside man who has
developed complex engineering skills. It was his
misfortune to bear a pelt which was long regarded
as the finest material for the hats of Western man;
after two centuries of trapping he was threatened
with extinction, but was saved, early in the 19th cen-
tury, by the substitution of silk hats for fur ones.
This classic monograph by the great pioneer of
American anthropology pays especial attention to
the beaver's dams, lodges, burrows, canals, and trails,
which have so conspicuously modified the primeval
American landscape, and to the callously cruel
methods by which he has been trapped.
2962. National Geographic Society, Washington,
D. C. The book of birds; the first work
presenting in full color all the major species of the
United States and Canada. Edited by Gilbert Gros-
venor and Alexander Wetmore. With 950 color
portraits by Major Allan Brooks. t2d ed.] Washing-
ton, National Geographic Society, 1939. 2 v.
39-23274 QL676.N285 1939
Contents. — v. 1. Diving birds, ocean birds, swim-
mers, wading birds, wild fowl, birds of prey, game
birds, shore birds, marsh dwellers, birds of the north-
ern seas. — v. 2. Owls, goatsuckers, swifts, woodpeck-
ers, flycatchers, crows, jays, blackbirds, orioles,
chickadees, creepers, thrushes, swallows, tanagers,
wrens, warblers, hummingbirds, finches, and spar-
GEOGRAPHY / 277
A popular presentation in the familiar manner of
the National Geographic Magazine, the systematic
sections being eked out by little articles on "En-
couraging Birds around the Home," and the like.
The systematic sections are written chiefly by Dr.
Wetmore and T. Gilbert Pearson, with lesser con-
tributions from Arthur A. Allen, Robert Cushman
Murphy, and the illustrator, Major Brooks. Each
such section opens with a general discussion of the
group and concludes with descriptions of individual
species which are by no means uniform in treatment.
Major Brooks' "950 color portraits" appear on 204
plates reproduced from paintings. There are nearly
as many halftones from photographs, a majority
of them action shots of wild birds. A number of
other popular treatments of the subject have ap-
peared since, but nothing on the same generous scale.
Arthur A. Allen's Stalling Birds with Color Cam-
era, published by the National Geographic Society
in 1951 (328 p.), contains a large number of mag-
nificent color photographs of American birds in their
natural environment, but is neither comprehensive
nor systematic.
2963. Peattie, Donald Culross. A natural history
of trees of eastern and central North Amer-
ica; illustrated by Paul Landacre. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1950. xv, 606 p. 50-10354 QK481.P4
2964. Peattie, Donald Culross. A natural history
of western trees; illustrated by Paul Land-
acre. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1953. xiv, 751 p.
52-5263 QK481.P42
Mr. Peattie is a living representative of an old
American tradition which combines sound natural
knowledge with mastery of expression. These two
books, which are to be supplemented by others on
the trees of the South, and on "cultivated trees of
exotic origin," review the native species in a uniform
manner. The popular and Latin names are fol-
lowed by alternative names, the range of the species,
a description "couched in language using the mini-
mum of technical terms," and finally a little essay
in which landscape, historical circumstances, and
economic factors are gracefully combined. There
are frequent quotations from early naturalists, and
the author often seizes upon a single example to
make the species memorable: for the Swamp White
Oak, for instance, he mentions the Big Tree of
Geneseo, N. Y., "towering 100 feet high with .1 cir-
cumference of 27 feet," beneath which in 1797
Robert Morris purchased much of western New
York State from the Seneca Indians. Paul Land-
1 acre's stylized drawings contribute to the distinction
of these volumes.
2965. Roe, Frank G. The North American buf-
falo; a critical study of the species in its wild
state. Toronto, University of Toronto Press, 1951.
957 p. 52-1647 QL737.U5R73
Bibliography: p. 897-914.
The Bison Americanus, or historic American buf-
falo, "is the only known creature which has ever
thronged in such prodigious hosts a geographical
range which climatic and ecological characteristics
or potentialities made a natural home for a really
large white population." In consequence, it has
affected North American civilization "perhaps more
vitally than has ever been the case with any other
species in its indigenous environment in any portion
of the globe." Nevertheless, Mr. Roe, who dis-
claims biological expertness and has labored only
"to ascertain and classify the historical evidence,"
has written a huge book polemic in purpose and
sharply controversial in tone. He masses his evi-
dence to prove that the buffalo had no uniformity
or regularity in their migrations, and so could not
have determined the course of the earliest human
trails; and that the Indians were not habitually
wasteful in their hunting of the buffalo herds,
whose sudden disappearance must therefore have
been the work of the white men.
2966. Weaver, John E., and Frederick W. Albert-
son. Grasslands of the Great Plains: their
nature and use. With special chapters by B. W.
Allred and Arnold Heerwagen. Lincoln, Neb.,
Johnsen Pub. Co., 1956. 395 p.
56-9095 QK938.P7W37
Bibliography: p. 379-387.
An exhaustive study of the natural vegetation of
the "Mixed Prairie," the most extensive grazing
area in North America, and especially as affected by
a climate of extremes which is commonly called
semiarid but is humid in some years and deserdike
in others. Intensive local studies have made pos-
sible a profound understanding of the processes at
work during the great drought of 1933-40, the good
decade of 1941-52, and the renewed and even more
severe drought of 1953-55. "Extended periods of
drought are a part of the plains climate. The
lands have survived throughout the ages. Slowly
but surely the depleted vegetation was always re-
stored ... It is only when man aids in the de-
struction by overgrazing and trampling and by
plowing that conditions are worsened .\\\A the vege-
tation is destroyed." A companion volume by
Prof. Weaver, North American Prairie (Lincoln,
Neb., Johnsen Tub. Co., n<S-4- 348 p.), is equally
meticulous, but without such striking applications.
278 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
E. Historical Geography and Atlases
2967. Adams, James Truslow, ed. Atlas of Amer-
ican history. James Truslow Adams, editor
in chief; Rfoy] V. Coleman, managing editor. New
York, Scribner, 1943. 360 p.
Map 43-126 E179.A3
A supplement to the Scribner Dictionary of Amer-
ican History (no. 3070), this atlas consists of 147
plates (usually one but sometimes two to a map)
in black-and-white line, prepared by LeRoy H.
Appleton under the direction of 64 historians (whose
names appear at the foot of their contributions).
The editors aimed to produce "a concise, easy to use,
carefully thought out, authoritative adas," which
"would interpret our history through the location
of places as they actually existed and exactly where
they existed at a given time." The maps are small
(24 cm.) and simplified in their topography; but
the selection of significant subjects, the compara-
tively brief time-span of each, and the restriction of
detail to sites of contemporary importance, have
attained the latter object more adequately than in
any other general work of the kind. The result is
a very useful companion to studies in many aspects
of American history.
2968. Brown, Ralph H. Mirror for Americans;
likeness of the eastern seaboard, 1810. New
York, American Geographical Society, 1943. xxxii,
312 p. (American Geographical Society. Special
publication no. 27, edited by Elizabeth T. Piatt)
43-9759 F106.B9
Bibliography: p. [248J-259.
2969. Brown, Ralph H. Historical geography of
the United States. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1948. 596 p. 48-1500 E179.5.B9
Bibliography: p. [539H71.
The first title conceals a scientific purpose beneath
a pleasant veneer of archaism: the real author in-
vents a fictitious one, a Philadelphia collector of
American geographical literature in the year 1810,
who digests the contents of his shelves into a descrip-
tive treatise of which "the style and the organiza-
tion are both designed as composites of the
geographical exposition of the time." There is a
preliminary discussion of the literature itself, and
many well-reproduced illustrations from contem-
porary sources, some of the maps being skillfully re-
drawn. The future is ingeniously kept open: "Will
the Potomac become the great highway to the west?
He would be foolhardy indeed who answered one
way or the other."
The later work is a more straightforward appli-
cation of the same basic method to the settlement
and economic exploitation of successive areas of the
United States and Canada. In each phase the phys-
iography and vegetation of the land to be conquered
are set against the institutional and technological
equipment of the settlers, and the primary economy
of the region is shown to emerge as a consequence of
both factors, which have themselves become modi-
fied in the process. This treatment is applied to the
occupation of the Atlantic Coast in the colonial
period, of the Old Northwest to 1830, of Michigan,
Wisconsin, and Minnesota to 1870, and of the Great
Plains and the Pacific Coast to the same year.
2970. Douglas, Edward M. Boundaries, areas,
geographic centers and altitudes of the
United States and their several states, with a brief
record of important changes in their territory and
government. 2d ed. Washington, U. S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1932. 265 p. (U. S. Geological Survey.
Bulletin 817) GS34-40 E179.S.D73 1932
QE75.B9, no. 817a
The original form of this useful document, a com-
pilation of precise information very difficult to find
elsewhere, was issued by the Geological Survey in
1885, under the authorship of Henry Gannett, and
the present edition is in fact the sixth revision. It
defines the boundaries of the several accessions to the
territory of the continental United States, the outly-
ing possessions, and the 48 states, with emphasis
upon peculiarities arising out of historical circum-
stances. A separate section outlines the history of
the Public Domain. Ten tables of "General Statis-
tics Relating to the United States" conclude the text.
2971. Gilbert, Edmund W. The exploration of
western America, 1800-1850; an historical
geography. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press,
r933- 233P- . 337*8707 E179.5.G56
In 1800 the trans-Mississippi West was largely
terra incognita; by 1850 "the main geographical
features of this vast area had been revealed." The
author, who has since become professor of geog-
raphy at Oxford, seeks "to reconstruct the geographi-
cal setting in which the explorers accomplished
their work," and so to estimate the importance of
geographical factors in the process. Six chapters
are devoted to a geographical analysis of western
America as of 1800 — such systematic reconstruction
being "the true function of historical geography."
Concise narratives follow of the discovery of the
GEOGRAPHY / 279
northern, central, and southern trans-continental
routes, and of the Great Basin and the routes over
the Sierra Nevada. Noteworthy for its selection
and arrangement of facts, the volume remains one of
the most important English contributions to Ameri-
can studies.
2972. Lord, Clifford L., and Elizabeth H. Lord.
Historical atlas of the United States. Rev.
ed. New York, Holt, 1953. xv, 238 p.
53-10208 G1201.S1L6 1953
"The stardingly rapid growth and development
of the United States make its history particularly
susceptible to visual portrayal ... By mapping de-
velopments in particular fields every few years, so
that one can almost see them grow or shift, this
atlas tries to combine the usefulness of the animated
[-cartoon] map with the advantages of being able
to sit down . . . for study at such length as need
be." Thus there are maps of population density
for every census year from 1790 to 1950. The atlas
also attempts to juxtapose basic social and economic
maps against those for our political history. Map
styles are frequently modelled on those of Paullin's
atlas (no. 2974). Authors and publisher have pro-
duced an inexpensive volume, but, with 312 maps
on 196 medium-sized pages, the detail often becomes
so minute as to bewilder. The authors warn that
their work is meant, not as a reference adas, but
as a help for students.
2973. Muelder, Hermann R., and David M. Delo.
Years of this land, a geographical history of
the United States. New York, Appleton-Century,
1943. 243 p. 43"7I07 E179.5.M96
For the general reader, an oudine of American
history which emphasizes the geological and geo-
graphical factors in such large movements as dis-
covery, colonization, the westward movement, na-
tional expansion, industrialization, conservation, and
inter-American relations. The authors would not
claim to be systematic or profound, but they are
quite successful in placing familiar facts in un-
familiar perspectives, and in pointing out seldom-
realized relationships between physical and histori-
cal phenomena.
2974. Paullin, Charles O. Adas of the historical
geography of the United States. Edited by
John K. Wright. Washington, Published jointly
by Carnegie Institution of Washington and the
American Geographical Society of New York, 1932.
162 p. 688 maps (part col.) on 166 plates (part
double) ([Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Publication no. 401])
Map 32-54 G1201.S1P3 193a
"This is the first major historical atlas of the
United States and probably the most comprehensive
work of its kind that has yet been published for any
country." After nearly 25 years it remains un-
rivaled. It was just 20 years in the making, work
having been begun in 1912 on a plan drawn up nine
years earlier by J. Franklin Jameson, who closely
supervised the enterprise through its first 15 years.
Many scholars, scientists, libraries, archives, and
Government agencies cooperated in its making.
The text comments upon each individual map and
indicates the sources upon which it was based. The
major subdivisions are concerned with geography,
cartography (1492-1867), lands, population, bound-
aries, politics, reforms, and economics. In spite of
the efforts lavished, all parts of the adas are not of
equal quality. The boundary maps, and those con-
cerned with presidential elections and crucial votes
in Congress, are outstanding; but the reproductions
of old maps, which comprise the cartographic section
and parts of several others, are too small for full
legibility, and the military history section is quite
unsatisfactory.
2975. Semple, Ellen Churchill. American history
and its geographic conditions. Rev. in col-
laboration with the author by Clarence Fielden
Jones. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933. 541 p.
33-8691 E179.5.S47 1933
"Supplementary readings": p. [4431—468; "Lit-
erary reading lists": p. [4691-505.
The author, a follower of Friedrich Ratzel, was
professor of anthropogeography at Clark University,
and her book, originally published in 1903, was long
the standard work on geographical factors in Amer-
ican history. The present edition, which appeared
the year after her death, included some additions
and alterations from her pen, but the detailed task
of bringing it up to date was carried out by Mr.
Jones. The majority of the chapters emphasize the
geographic basis of striking events such as the
Louisiana Purchase, the War of 18 12, and the Civil
War; but there arc also more analytical treatments
such as "Geography of the Adantic Coast in Relation
to the Development of American Sea Power," "The
Geography of the Inland Waterways," and "The
Geographical Distribution of Railroads."
2976. Stewart, George R. Names on the land, a
historical account of place-naming in the
United States. New York, Random House, 1945.
418 p. 45-^640 E155.S8
The study of place-names usually issues in an in-
ventory, but Mr. Stewart lias succeeded in interpret
ing the giving of such nanus within the continental
United States as a significant historical process, ami
makes clear how "the names had grown out of the
life, and the lite blood, ot all those who had gone
280 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
before." Particular names have been included i)
as of large units, states or cities, interesting to all
Americans; 2) as illustrating habits or fashions of
place-naming; 3) as connected with the work of
some individual; and 4) as of unusually interesting
origin. The work achieves an original synthesis of
geographical, linguistic, and historical factors. The
considerable local literature is arranged by states in
the Bibliography of Place Name Literature: United
States, Canada, Alaska, and Newfoundland, by
Richard B. Sealock and Pauline A. Seely (Chicago,
American Library Association, 1948. 331 p.).
F. Polar Exploration
2977. Byrd, Richard Evelyn. Little America,
aerial exploration in the Antarctic, the flight
to the South Pole. New York, Putnam, 1930. xvi,
422 p. 31-26036 G850 1928.A3 1930
"The geological sledge trip, by Dr. Laurence M.
Gould": p. 393-412.
2978. Byrd, Richard Evelyn. Discovery; the story
of the second Byrd Antarctic expedition.
New York, Putnam, 1935. xxi, 405 p.
36-27041 G850 1933.A3
Admiral Byrd (b. 1888), if a comparatively late
comer to Antarctic exploration (Amundsen reached
the South Pole in 191 1), has nevertheless a secure
place through his systematic application of im-
proved scientific equipment to permit continuous
occupation, and prolonged observation and experi-
ment. His narratives cover his first two expeditions,
but he has not yet continued them to include several
later and larger ones under Government auspices.
2979. Hobbs, William Herbert. Peary. New
York, Macmillan, 1936. xv, 502 p.
36-32070 G635.P4H6
"Publications of Robert Edwin Peary": p. 456-
465.
Robert Edwin Peary (1856-1920) engaged in 19
years of almost continuous Arctic exploration, be-
ginning in 1 89 1, and concerned himself with a
steady improvement of technique which would per-
mit a final dash to the Pole itself by a few men and
dog-sledges. His second attempt in 1905 was de-
feated by exceptionally severe weather, but his third
brough him success on April 6, 1909. It was not
until 1937 that Soviet scientists reached the Pole
under conditions that permitted of extensive scien-
tific observations. Unfortunately for Peary, an
impostor of considerable literary skill, Dr. Frederick
A. Cook, after wintering on the northern coast of
Greenland, got in a claim to have reached the Pole
the year before. Mr. Hobbs necessarily devotes
much of his volume to a refutation of this claim
and a description of the heated controversies which
it engendered. In order to raise funds for his cosdy
expeditions, Peary publicized his successive explora-
tions at some length: Northward over the "Great
Ice"; a Narrative of Life and Wor\ along the Shores
and upon the Interior Ice-Cap of Northern Green-
land in the Years 1886 and 1891-1897 (New York,
Stokes, 1898. 2 v.); Nearest the Pole: a Narrative
of the Polar Expedition of the Peary Arctic Club
in the S. S. Roosevelt, 10.0 5- 1906 (New York, Dou-
bleday, Page, 1907. 411 p.); and The North Pole,
Its Discovery in 1909 under the Auspices of the
Peary Arctic Club (New York, Stokes, 1910.
373 P-)-
2980. Mirsky, Jeannette. Elisha Kent Kane and
the seafaring frontier. Boston, Litde,
Brown, 1954. 201 p. (The Library of American
biography) 54-6886 G635.K2M5
Polar exploration is a cosmopolitan achievement
to which many nations have contributed, and which
can best be followed in a general narrative such as
Miss Mirsky 's To the Arctic! The Story of Northern
Exploration from Earliest Times to the Present
([Rev. ed.] New York, Knopf, 1948. 334 p.). The
American share, however, can be summarized in the
lifework of four men: Kane, Greely, and Peary in
the Arctic, and Byrd in the Antarctic. Kane (1820-
57) was a young physician with a heart weakened
by rheumatic fever, who headed two successive ex-
peditions financed by the New York merchant
Henry Grinnell, in search of the missing British ex-
plorer Sir John Franklin. His health gave way
shortly after he completed the narrative of the
second expedition. He was far in advance of his
time in understanding the Eskimo adaptation to the
Arctic climate. Kane's own narratives tell the story
at considerably greater length: The U. S. Grinnell
Expedition in Search of Sir John Franklin; a Per-
sonal Narrative (New York, Harper, 1853. 552 p.)
and Arctic Explorations; The Second Grinnell Ex-
pedition in Search of Sir John Franklin, 1853, '54,
'55 (Philadelphia, Childs & Peterson, 1856. 2 v.)
2981. Mitchell, William. General Greely; the
story of a great American. New York, Put-
nam, 1936. xiv, 242 p. 36-27206 G635.G7M5
Adolphus W. Greely ( 1844—1935) was placed in
charge of the American station at Lady Franklin
Bay on Ellesmere Island, northernmost of the eleven
international circumpolar stations which, as a re-
sult of the International Polar Conference at Ham-
burg in 1879, were to make observations during
1882-83. Greely and his 25 subordinates were taken
to their station in the summer of 1881, but the relief
ships of 1882 and 1883 were incompetendy
commanded, and only Greely and six others were
alive when Winfield S. Schley got through on June
GEOGRAPHY / 28 1
22, 1884. General Mitchell devotes the greater part
of his concise and appreciative biography to the Arc-
tic episode, but also calls attention to Greely 's im-
portant work in the Signal Corps, the Weather
Bureau, and in the early development of military
aviation. Greely's own narrative was first published
in 1886: Three Years of Arctic Service; an Account
of the Lady Franklin Bay Expedition of 1881-
84 and the Attainment of the Farthest North (New
York, Scribner. 2 v.).
1812 S40 —60 20
VII
The American Indian
TS1
A.
General Wor\s
2982-2989
B.
Archaeology and Prehistory
2990-2997
C.
Tribes and Tribal Groups
2998-3014
4»
D.
Religion, Art, and Folklore
30 1 5-302 1
1
E.
The White Advance
3022-3037
F.
The Twentieth Century
3038-3043 ^
THE literature of the American Indian began with the Columbus Letter of 1493, has
flourished through more than four and a half centuries, and continues to range from the
romantic to the technically ethnological in the publications of the current year. The red man
has ever exercised a compelling fascination upon the imagination of the European of all
nationalities, and upon his American descendants, young or old, nor is this fascination dimin-
ished by increase of knowledge. The Indian makes an equally powerful appeal to scientific
curiosity: the origins of his race, the sources of his
culture, and the innumerable facets of his interrela-
tions with the white man and his civilization have
been and remain problems of the first importance for
the systematic study of the human race. The Indian,
however, is an abstraction: he exists only as a member
of one among hundreds of individual tribes, speak-
ing one among dozens of languages, and pursuing
one among many contrasting ways of life. All of
these subdivisions invite, and practically all have
received, monographic treatment, resulting in
an extraordinary accumulation of facts and an
equally extraordinary proliferation of books. Few
would maintain that this outpouring of monographs
has been accompanied by a corresponding work of
digestion and synthesis, for recent and good general
works on the Indian, or on the larger aspects of
Indian life and history, are rarer than they should
be. We have, therefore, had the task of selecting
a relatively small group of monographic studies, on
particular tribes or on some aspect of Indian culture
among one or a few tribes, as representative of the
whole. Obviously many alternative choices could
have been made with approximately equal justifica-
tion. The monographic material is listed at length,
under 253 tribal groups, in George Peter Murdock's
Ethnographic Bibliography of North America, 2d
282
ed. (New Haven, Human Relations Area Files,
IQ53- 239 p.). . .... J
We have gone beyond the geographical limits of
our proper subject, the United States, by including in
Section B one title on the Maya and one on the Aztec
civilization (nos. 2994 and 2997). This is on
purely historical grounds: these cultures, along with
that of the Incas in South America, were in all re-
spects the highest developed in the New World by
the Indian race, which is inadequately presented
without them; the cultures of many other North
American tribes were in some measure a diffusion
and a dilution of these (cf. no. 3012); and the im-
pingement of the Spaniards upon them was a deci-
sive fact for the entire subsequent course of the
European occupation of the New World. The user
of this chapter will doubtless note that among the
tribal studies the Indians of the Plains and of the
Southwest predominate. This is largely because
these alone survived in sufficient numbers, and with
their original cultures reasonably intact, when an-
thropology had become a systematic discipline. Yet
in smaller degree it is because to the American and
the European imagination the Plains Indian is the
American Indian par excellence, and his ways the
THE AMERICAN INDIAN
/ 283
proper ways of Indian kind — as is testified by the
universal adoption of his war-bonnet.
In considering any Indian group, three varieties
of fact may be distinguished: its culture prior to
regular contact with white settlement; the processes
of contact; and the consequences for the group.
Some of our titles consider only one of these aspects
or moments, but we have looked for books which
take two or all three of them into consideration.
The third aspect introduces the vexed questions of
Federal Indian policy, which most of our authors
criticize more or less severely. They do not, per-
haps, always realize the advantage conferred by the
wisdom of hindsight, as well as by an accumulated
body of knowledge, affording an insight into the
lives and minds of primitive peoples, which was
not available a century ago. Two deficiencies which
recent scholarship has hitherto failed to supply may
be noted: any considerable study of individual
Indians who have been absorbed into the white
community, and documented studies of develop-
ments during the last quarter-century.
A. General Works
2982. Hodge, Frederick Webb, ed. Handbook of
American Indians, north of Mexico. Wash-
ington, Govt. Print. Off., 1907-10. 2 v. (Smith-
sonian Institution. Bureau of American Ethnology.
Bulletin 30) 7~35I98 E77.H682
Bibliography: pt. 2, p. 1179-1221.
This immense compilation (2193 p.) had its in-
ception as early as 1873, and Mr. Hodge was en-
gaged upon it from 1889. It was originally con-
ceived as a "tribal synonymy," attempting to order
the multiple and conflicting nomenclature of Indian
groups, but steadily expanded into an alphabetical
arrangement of Indian knowledge of every kind.
The original purpose appears in the 158-page "Syn-
onymy" in vol. 2 (p. 1021-1178). The majority of
the articles are devoted to linguistic families, tribes,
subtribes, towns, and villages. Another large group
presents individual Indians of note. Fewer but
longer articles deal with elements of material cul-
ture (copper, hammers), social organization (chiefs,
confederation), custom (cremation, dance), relations
to white societies (German influence, legal status),
and aspects of civilized progress (education, Hamp-
ton Institute). While up-to-the-minute anthro-
pologists regard "Hodge" as hopelessly out of date,
both as to information and to "the concepts by which
the material is organized," it must remain the first
resort of every inquirer until it has been replaced
by a work on the new lines equally systematic and
meticulous.
2983. Kroebcr, Alfred L. Cultural and natural
areas of native North America. Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1939. 242 p. maps
(8 fold, in pocket) tables (1 fold, in pocket) (Uni-
versity of California publications in American
archaeology and ethnology, v. 38)
A40-56 E51.C15, v. 38
E98.C9K73
This work, which receives the almost uniform
admiration of the recent generation of American
ethnologists, was completed in 1931, but remained
unprinted because of the depression, and was only
partially brought up to date in 1936 and 1939. "It
aims, first, to review the environmental relations of
the native cultures of North America," and, second,
"to examine the historic relations of the culture
areas, or geographical units of cultures." It ar-
rives, by refined methods of classification, at 84 areas
dividing the whole continent, within each of which
culture is relatively uniform. It discovers a num-
ber of close correspondences of physiographic prov-
inces with cultural and ethnic areas, but explains
why "any one set of natural factors, geologic, vege-
tational, climatic, or hydrographic," is unlikely to
affect culture with uniform potency. In fact, "the
interactions of culture and environment become
exceedingly complex when followed out." This
complexity, which tends to make generalization
unprofitable, is increased when cultural intensity —
special content and special system — is considered.
2984. Roe, Frank G. The Indian and the horse.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1955. xvi, 434 p. (The Civilization of the Ameri-
can Indian [series]) 55-6359 E98.H55R6
Bibliography: p. 400-417.
Assembles the "scattered comparative data" pro-
vided by qualified observers in the past — from whom
he excludes the plainsmen as habitual ezaggeraton
of anti-Indian bias — and by recent anthropologists,
in order "to summarize in conveniently coordinated
form the existent evidence . . . concerning the im-
pact of the historic horse upon the principal horse-
raising tribes of the North American continent in the
predominating aspects of chronology, geography,
and tribal reactions." As in his book on the buf-
falo (no. 2965), Mr. Roc engages in strenuous
284 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
refutation of the views of other writers with which
he disagrees. He concludes that the horse "widened
the Indian's spiritual horizon," and especially that
of the squaw, but otherwise it "merely widened the
stage on which the Indian had always moved, and
enabled him to do more easily the things he had
always done." The dog travois preceded the horse,
which did not create nomadic habits, but enabled
native products to be transported in increased bulk.
2985. Swanton, John R. The Indian tribes of
North America. Washington, U. S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1952. 726 p. (81st Cong., 2d sess.
House. Document no. 383)
52-61970 E51.U6, no. 145
E77.S94
Smithsonian Institution, Bureau of American
Ethnology. Bulletin 145.
Bibliography: p. 643-682.
This substantial volume, the result of years of
work, presents a map of North America showing the
location of the Indian tribes about 1650; when the
earliest data is of a later year, the date is placed on
the map along the tribal name. Dr. Swanton
recognizes that "tribe" is a term of imprecise signifi-
cance, and that only "a town and band map" would
embody present-day anthropological concepts, but
since the data for the latter are uncompiled, he pro-
ceeds with "a relatively conventional classification,
having in view popular convenience." He organ-
izes his data by States, in geographical order from
Maine to California, followed by the remaining parts
of the continent from Alaska to Central America.
Under the "main entry" for each tribe are given long
lists of subdivisions and villages, concise statements
on connections, location, population at various peri-
ods, and "Connections in which they have become
noted," and a longer history. The map is inserted
in four large folding sections, and the text provides a
work of basic reference.
2986. Underhill, Ruth Murray. Red Man's Amer-
ica; a history of Indians in the United States.
Illus. by Marianne Stroller. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1953. 400 p. 53-10535 E77.U456
Bibliography: p. 357-369.
The author has aimed at a single-volume account
of the history and culture of the Indians of the
United States, based on the latest anthropological re-
search but designed for "the average citizen." Two
introductory chapters speculate on the original mi-
grations to the Americas and describe "the high
cultures of Nuclear America" — the Andean area,
Central America, Yucatan, and the Valley of Mexico.
Thenceforward the tribes of the United States are
presented under ten major groups, with the text for
each group considering origins, culture, and history
after the first contact with Europeans. At the end
of each chapter are tables of present reservations and
numbers of surviving groups, if any, and a tabloid
presentation of culture: food, hunting methods,
clothing, house types, equipment, war, and games.
A concluding chapter presents a favorable view of
United States Indian policy, at least since 1921.
2987. Wissler, Clark, The American Indian, an
introduction to the anthropology of the New
World. 3d. ed. New York, P. Smith, 1950. xvii,
466 p. A5 1-3696 E58.W832
"Linguistic tables and bibliography": p. [389]-
439-
2988. Wissler, Clark. Indians of the United
States; four centuries of their history and
culture. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946.
xvi, 319 p. (The American Museum of Natural
History. Science series)
47-7240 E77.W799 1946
2989. Wissler, Clark. Indian cavalcade; or, Life
on the old-time Indian reservations. New
York, Sheridan House, 1938. 351 p.
38-39407 E98.S7W57
Clark Wissler (1 870-1 947) of the American Mu-
seum of Natural History and Yale University was a
preeminent interpreter of the American Indian, to
whose study he devoted his life. His experience
extended from visits to the Indian reservations in
preallotment days, which gave him a warm and
personal appreciation of Indian character, to the
refined ethnological techniques of our own day,
which he did as much as anyone to develop. The
American Indian, first published in 1917 and last
revised in 1938, has not been replaced as a lucid
exposition of the anthropological approach. As an
"outgrowth of museum experience," it assumes a
point of view "mainly taxonomic, or classificatory
and descriptive." After identifying the food areas
of the New World, it proceeds through methods of
transportation, the textile arts, the ceramic arts,
decorative designs, stone and metal work, social
grouping, social regulation, ritual, and mythology,
to a chronology of cultures and four major schemes
of classification: culture areas, archaeological areas,
linguistic and somatic types. Indians of the United
States, originally published in 1940, is more historical
in approach and popular in appeal. Its theme is the
Indians of the American frontier, their struggles to
resist its advance, "their mode of life and its modifi-
cations due to residing among white people," and
their outstanding personalities. The review of the
tribes in Part II proceeds by language families. A
chapter on "The Mystery of the Indian Mind" grap-
ples with the genuine and long-standing problem of
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 285
why the Indian and the white man, however well
disposed, have had such difficulty in understanding
one another. Indian Cavalcade is a unique book of
reminiscence and reflection based on the young an-
thropologist's visits to several reservations during
the first five years of the present century.
B. Archaeology and Prehistory
2990. Griffin, James B., ed. Archeology of eastern
United States. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press, 1952. 392 p. 52-14698 E53.G7
Bibliography: p. 371-392.
This volume in large format with double-column
pages is formally a Festschrift in honor of Fay-
Cooper Cole, Emeritus Professor and Chairman of
the Department of Anthropology at the University
of Chicago, but it was so planned as to offer nearly
complete coverage of the field indicated in its title.
Of the 28 contributions, all but one by pupils of
Prof. Cole, the great majority (22) are regional in
scope, and usually general in their treatment of the
region. Of the remaining six, three are general —
such as "Twenty-five Years of Archeology in the
Eastern United States," by Carl E. Guthe, and "The
Ethnological Cultures and Their Archeological
Backgrounds," by Fred R. Eggan — and the other
three topical. The papers in general, and the re-
gional ones in particular, are severely technical in
nature, with great emphasis on such matters as
stratigraphy, foci, and taxonomy, but the general
reader has no alternative for thorough coverage and
up-to-date information. Figures 3-205, consisting
of drawings, photographs, and maps, and usually
complex, are placed at the end of the book.
2991. Holmes, William H. Handbook of aborigi-
nal American antiquities. Part I. Introduc-
tory; the lithic industries. Washington, Govt.
Print. Off., 1919. xvii, 380 p. (Smithsonian In-
stitution. Bureau of American Ethnology. Bulle-
tin 60) 19-27642 E51.U6, no. 60
E59.A63H7
Bibliography: p. 368-372.
This impressive fragment is unfortunately the
only completed portion of a monumental work
projected by the first curator of the archaeological
collections at the National Museum. It was to have
extended to all the arts and industries practised by
the native peoples, but is in fact limited to "the
acquirement of the substances used in the arts" and
"the manipulation of stone," on both of which it is
more systematic and thorough than any other au-
thority. After an exposition of archaeological first
principles, chapters 11-27 are concerned with
aboriginal quarrying and mining, and describe in
much detail surviving quarries, such as the unique
red pipestone (cadinite) quarry at Pipestone, Minn.
Chapters 28-36 reconstruct the stone-shaping arts,
and discriminate the several processes of percussion
fracture, pressure fracture, fire fracture, crumbling,
abrading, incising, and piercing. The second vol-
ume was to have dealt with the results: the imple-
ments, utensils, and other minor artifacts of stone.
2992. McGregor, John C. Southwestern archae-
ology. New York, Wiley, 1941. 403 p.
41-26543 E78.S7M15
"General bibliography": p. 380-392.
Ostensibly concerned with the archaeology of
Arizona and New Mexico, this book is in fact largely
confined to Arizona, which its covers very thor-
oughly. Precision has been arrived at in this field
through the development of dendrochronology,
based on the study of tree rings as uniform indi-
cators of annual growth. Through the work of
A. E. Douglass, a University of Arizona astronomer,
which was begun in 1904 and achieved maturity in
1929, a continuous ring series reaching back to A. D.
700 was established. As a result it has been possible
to date the several sites and stages of the Mogollon
Culture of the central mountain belt, which goes
back to the time of Christ, the Hohokam Culture of
the southern desert, and the Basket Maker Culture
of the northern plateau. The great drouth of 1300
A. D. caused a great withdrawal southward, and
the desertion of many northern sites.
2993. Martin, Paul S., George I. Quimby, and Don-
ald Collier. Indians before Columbus;
twenty thousand years of North American history
revealed by archeology. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1947. xxiii, 582 p.
47-1434 E61.M36
"A contribution of the Chicago Natural History
Museum."
Bibliography: p. [52i]~543.
"This book has been written for the interested
layman and for students taking introductory courses
in anthropology. It is not intended as a general
reference book for professional anthropologists" —
who can, however, hardly fail to find it a useful out-
line of nearly the entire field. The presentation is
286 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
concise and lucid, and a three-page glossary precedes
the text. The authors note the omission of Canada
from the St. Lawrence to the Yukon, much of
Alaska, and the Middle Adantic Seaboard, from
poverty of data or lack of space. Part I discusses
archaeological method and the origin of the Indians.
Part II describes arts and industries, including primi-
tive trade and commerce. Part III presents the
earliest cultures, and the "embarrassingly real"
hiatus between them and the later ones, which go
back only to about i A. D. The next four parts
comprise the regional survey, with "The Plains
Area" included under "Eastern North America."
Part VIII, "Chronology and Correlation of Se-
quences of Cultures," consists of a chronological
chart spanning four pages, with four more of com-
mentary. The halftone illustrations are indifferendy
reproduced.
2994. Morley, Sylvanus Griswold. The ancient
Maya. [2d ed.] Stanford University, Calif.,
Stanford University Press, 1947. xxxii, 520 p.
47-4830 F1435.M75 1947
"Classified bibliography": p. 467-502.
The recovery of the Maya civilization, the author
thinks, began with John L. Stephens' Incidents of
Travel in Central America . . . (New York, Harper,
1841. 2 v.), and was continued by the English
archaeologist, Alfred P. Maudslay, between 1881
and 1894, by the Peabody Museum of Archaeology
and Ethnology of Harvard University between 1885
and 1915, and, since the latter date, by the Carnegie
Institution of Washington, which sent 25 annual
expeditions to the Maya area. The present lavishly
illustrated (95 plates and 57 figures) volume, by
one of the Carnegie Institution's principal archae-
ologists, is a thoroughly assimilated synthesis of
these results — "a complete picture of Maya civiliza-
tion, harmoniously balanced, animated, and under-
standable," as a Mexican scholar has termed it. It
falls into four parts: two chapters on the people and
their country; five chapters of history from A. D.
317-1697, subdivided into the Old Empire (to 987),
the New Empire, and the Spanish Conquest; nine
chapters on ancient and modern manners and cus-
toms; and a final chapter of comparison and ap-
praisal. Morleyana: A Collection of Writings in
Memoriam Sylvanus Griswold Morley — 1883-1948
(Santa Fe, School of American Research and the
Museum of New Mexico, 1950. 268 p.) is a tribute
of admiration and love from 59 colleagues, perhaps
the warmest ever paid to an archaeologist. John
Eric S. Thompson's The Rise and Fall of Maya
Civilization (Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1954. 287 p.) is a briefer outline which
emphasizes the Maya intellectual achievement, with
its curious disregard of the practical, and Maya
religion; it has some excellent drawings from the
ancient sculptures by Avis Tulloch.
2995. Sellards, Elias H. Early man in America;
a study in prehistory. Illus. by Hal Story.
Austin, University of Texas Press, 1952. xvi, 211 p.
52-14173 E58.S44
"A publication of the Texas Memorial Museum."
Bibliography: p. 155-205.
Archaeological method has acquired a new chron-
ological precision through the properties of radio-
active Carbon14, the disintegration of which permits
the age of organic matter to be determined within
quite narrow limits. The present work reviews the
several finds of the earliest artifacts in North Amer-
ica in the light of C14 datings of associated animal
remains. Specimens from Gypsum Cave, Nevada,
are some 10,500 years old; from Lubbock, Texas,
some 9,900 years; from southern Nebraska, some
9,500 years. A picture emerges of "hunters of the
plains" pursuing the elephant, the mastodon, the
bison, the camel, and the sloth with weapons of some
refinement as early as 8,000 B. C. Folsom points,
once regarded as the oldest evidence of man in
America, are now considered more recent than the
Sandia points found in New Mexico. The book is
handsomely produced with excellent drawings, but
the text is rather severely technical.
2996. Shetrone, Henry Clyde. The mound-
builders; a reconstruction of the life of a pre-
historic American race, through exploration and in-
terpretation of their earth mounds, their burials, and
their cultural remains. New York, Appleton, 1930.
508 p. 30-22078 E73.S55
Bibliography: p. 491-496.
The mounds in question are found throughout the
lands drained by the Mississippi and its tributaries,
as far west as, roughly, the 95th meridian, and in
all the Southeastern States as well. As conspicuous
features of the trans-Appalachian landscape, they
naturally became the first great problem in Ameri-
can archaeology; Thomas Jefferson was the first to
excavate one (one of the simpler Virginia mounds),
and William Henry Harrison, in his Discourse on
the Aborigines of the Valley of the Ohio (Cincinnati
[Printed at the Cincinnati Express] 1838. 51 p.),
attributed them to a superior and vanished race, akin
to the Aztecs, as did most of his contemporaries.
Modern archaeology has reduced their importance by
demonstrating their complete continuity with the
Indian cultures that preceded and followed, although
it has found no conclusive explanation of the fact
that the custom of moundbuilding became extinct
shortly before the arrival of the whites. The author,
who was the Director of the Ohio State Archaeo-
logical and Historical Society, has provided a defini-
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 287
tive summary of their varieties, contents, and
relationships, and a clear definition of "the Mound-
builder burial complex."
2997. Vaillant, George C. Aztecs of Mexico;
origin, rise and fall of the Aztec nation.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1941. xxii,
340 p. (The American Museum of Natural His-
tory. Science series) 41-12191 F1219.V13
Bibliography: p. 299-325.
The Aztecs were comparative latecomers to the
Valley of Mexico, about the middle of the 13th cen-
tury, and they did not begin to establish their em-
pire, first over neighboring and then over outlying
tribes, until the second quarter of the 15th. Theirs
was a blood-stained imperialism, for their conquests
yielded victims for sacrifice to Huitzilopochdi, the
War God — 20,000 in one ceremony of 1487, accord-
ing to one Aztec source. The author, who was
Professor of Anthropology and Director of the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Museum when he died at
the age of 44, has based a popular interpretation
of Aztec history and culture upon his own thorough
knowledge of Mexican archaeology. The succes-
sion of preAztec cultures in the Valley of Mexico
is clearly oudined, and Aztec origins are traced to
Cholula in the State of Puebla. There is a chapter
on the Aztec economy, domestic and tribal, and
another offering a fascinating "Glimpse of Tenoch-
titlan," the Aztec capital which became Mexico
City. The 64 plates and 28 text figures include many
native drawings from the Codex Florentine of Ber-
nardino de Sahagun's history. John Eric S. Thomp-
son's Mexico before Cortez (New York, Scribner,
1933. 298 p.) is slighter and without much archae-
ological information, but is detailed and useful for
Aztec religion, including ritual, the sacred feasts,
the priesthood, and the temples and tombs.
C. Tribes and Tribal Groups
2998. Drucker, Philip. Indians of the Northwest
coast. New York, Published for the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History [by] McGraw-
Hill, 1955. 208 p. ( [American Museum of Natural
History, New York] Anthropological handbook
no. 10) 55-9543 E78.N78D7
Bibliography: p. 197-199.
The fourteen tribes, with such unfamiliar names
as Tlingit, Kwakiud, and Nootka, who parceled out
the Northwest Coast from Yakutat Bay in southeast
Alaska to Trinidad Bay in northern California, de-
parted more widely from the popular conception
of the American Indian than any other group.
These tribes had practically no agriculture, but lived
by fishing supplemented by hunting and berry-
gathering. They had, nevertheless, a complex cul-
ture, such as seldom accompanies so primitive an
economy, and a highly original and striking reper-
tory of art forms. This Handbook naturally em-
phasizes the material culture illustrated by the Mu-
seum's collections but also sketches in "the cultural
background of the specimens by relating briefly not
only how the various material objects were made and
used, but recounting something of the general way
of life of the makers and users." Like the other
volumes of this series, it is a model of economical
and efficient book-production.
2999. Grinnell, George Bird. The Cheyenne In-
dians, their history and ways of life. Photo-
graphs by Elizabeth C. Grinnell and Mrs. J. E.
Tuell. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1923.
23-17688 E99.C53G77
2 v
3000. Grinnell, George Bird. The fighting Chey-
ennes. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1956. xvii, 453 p. (The Civilization of the
American Indian series)
56-10392 E99.C53G8 1956
First published in 19 15.
Dr. Grinnell (1849-1938), explorer, hunter, nat-
uralist, osteologist, and long-time editor and pub-
lisher of Forest and Stream, was also an old Indian
hand whose experience went back to the year of his
graduation from Yale (1870), and whose inter-
course with the Cheyennes was continuous from
1890. He was never able to regard the Indian as a
mere museum specimen: "a half-century spent in
rubbing shoulders with them . . . forbids me to
think of them except as acquaintances, comrades,
and friends." Much of his intimate knowledge was
obtained through his interpreters, a man who had
married into the tribe in 1850, and George Bent, the
halfbreed son of Col. William Bent of Bent's Old
Fort. The volumes of The Cheyenne Indians
present, in the abundance of detail necessary to
make the Indian viewpoint clear, their whole social
life. Among other subjects, volume 1 deals with
village life and camp customs, social organization,
childhood, women, industries, subsistence, games,
and tribal government; volume 2 with warfare,
religious beliefs, disease and healing, and death
288 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
customs. The latter also contains very detailed
descriptions of the Medicine Lodge, or midsummer
ceremony, and of the four-day Massaum ceremony,
sometimes called the Crazy Dance. The Fighting
Cheyennes is a detailed history of the tribe's wars
from about 1819. "A fighting and a fearless people,
the tribe was almost constandy at war with its neigh-
bors, but until 1856 was friendly to the whites."
The first 100 pages are concerned with the inter-
tribal conflicts before that date, as recalled by Chey-
enne tradition, and the subsequent narrative seeks
to supplement white sources with Indian ones when-
ever the latter are available. The author's By
Cheyenne Camp fires (New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1926. 305 p.) is a collection of 66 tales,
arranged in the major classes of "War Stories,"
"Stories of Mystery," "Hero Myths," and stories
about Wihio, the Cheyenne trickster. Dr. Grinnell
had published similar collections for the Pawnees
in 1889, and for the Blackfeet in 1892 and 19 13.
3001. Haines, Francis. The Nez Perces: tribes-
men of the Columbia Plateau. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xvii, 329 p.
(The Civilization of the American Indian series)
55-9626 E99.N5H28
Based on thesis, University of California.
Bibliography: p. 311-318.
The Nez Perces were a small but impressive tribe
of intermediary culture, fishing for salmon in the
Columbia and its tributaries, and also ranging
widely to fight other tribes for a share of the Mon-
tana buffalo-hunting grounds. The author is
chiefly concerned with their 90 years of contact
with white civilization, from the arrival of Lewis
and Clark in 1806 to the distribution of the tribal
lands in 1895. Turning points were the arrival of
the Protestant missionaries, at the Nez Perces' own
request, in the 1830's, and the Nez Perce War of
1877, provoked by a series of white encroachments
that followed the discovery of gold on their lands,
and resulting in eight years of miserable exile at
Fort Leavenworth.
3002. Heizer, Robert F., and Mary Anne Whipple,
eds. The California Indians; a source book.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1951.
487 p. 51-61951 E78.C15H4
The editors emphasize that this collection of es-
says is intended for a lay rather than a professional
public, that it constitutes a survey rather than an
encyclopedia for reference work, and is not meant
as a substitute for Alfred L. Kroeber's authoritative
but encyclopedic and highly technical Handbook
of the Indians of California, published as Bulletin
no. 78 of the U. S. Bureau of American Ethnology
(Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1925. 995 p.). The
California Indians consists of twelve contributions
by Kroeber himself, as well as by Roland B. Dixon,
E. W. Gifford, Sherburne F. Cook, and others.
The essays are grouped under the headings "Gen-
eral Surveys," "Archaeology," "Historical Accounts
(1775-1851)," "Material Culture," and "Social Cul-
ture." The California Indians, relatively unwarlike
and divided into numerous groups with little politi-
cal organization, offered minimal resistance to white
penetration.
3003. Hyde, George E. Red Cloud's folk; a his-
tory of the Oglala Sioux Indians. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1937. 331 p. (The
Civilization of the American Indian [series])
37-16051 E99.O3H9
"Brief bibliography": p. 321-324.
A careful history of the Oglala tribe, the first
Sioux to pass west of the Missouri, from about 1650
to 1879, when it was confined to a reservation and
"broken to pieces by the policy then favored by
the United States government." As such, it is
largely the story of the Oglalas in relation to other
Indian tribes and to the advancing whites. Mr.
Hyde makes the valuable point that the living
memory of the Plains Indians is reasonably valid
for events 90 years in the past, but no earlier; his
narrative becomes detailed only from 1834. It was
the migration from Minnesota to the Black Hills
that transformed the Teton Sioux "from little
camps of poor people afoot in the vast buffalo plains
into seven powerful tribes of mounted Indians."
In the final troubles of 1870-79 he stresses the
friendly role of the agency Sioux, the major group,
who were nevertheless penalized equally with the
hostiles in the final setdement.
3004. Lockwood, Francis C. The Apache Indians.
New York, Macmillan, 1938. xvi, 348 p.
38-6746 E99.A6L6
Bibliography at end of each chapter.
An Arizona historian tells the history of the
Apaches, naturally emphasizing their nuisance value
in the history of the Southwest. "From the first,
the Apaches have been the most hardy, warlike,
mobile tribe known to history . . . Pity was a feel-
ing unknown to the Apache; cruelty an ingrained
quality." Ethnological matters are disposed of in
one 25-page chapter, and the years of peace since
1886 in another. The harassing of the relatively
civilized Pueblo Indians, of the Spaniards, and of
the Mexicans by these marauders from the desert is
described at greater length, and the Apache troubles
after Cochise went on the warpath in 1861 comprise
the bulk of the book (p. 100-319). Uncle Sam
never had so tough an Indian nut to crack: it took
14 years to dispose of Cochise (1861-74), and an-
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 289
other ten for Geronimo (1876-86). The author
makes the most of the dramatic story and does not
attempt to condone the treacheries to which the
Federal authorities, in their desperation, sometimes
resorted.
3005. Lowie, Robert H. The Crow Indians.
New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1935. xxii,
350 p. 35-94°9 E99.C92L913
"Sources": p. 335-339.
Mr. Lowie, Emeritus Professor of Anthropology
at the University of California and one of the fore-
most American anthropologists, began his profes-
sional career with a visit to the Crow Reservation in
1907, and on several returns, the latest in 1931,
learned to speak Crow so well as to be conscious of
its complexities and refinements, and of the limita-
tions of his own knowledge. He ventured, indeed,
to participate in the jeering and jesting which makes
up so large a part of male Indian conversation, and
notes that he usually got the worst of it. His book
has thus the rare distinction of being based on Crow
words for Crow ideas, and of exhibiting processes of
thought radically different from our own. He gives
a number of tales which he took down from the dic-
tation of the septuagenarian Yellow-Brow. There
are exceptionally intimate glimpses of club life, and
of ceremonies such as the Sun Dance and the com-
plex associated with the Tobacco Society. A final
chapter adumbrates the Crow "World-View," in a
book which displays Crow society and thought from
the inside about as far as is possible for a white man
to do.
3006. Lowie, Robert H. Indians of the Plains.
New York, Published for the American
Museum of Natural History [by] McGraw-Hill,
1954. xiii, 222 p. ([American Museum of
Natural History, New York] Anthropological
handbook no. 1) 54-8815 E78.W5L6
Bibliography: p. 205-207.
The Plains Indians include six different linguistic
families and a number of tribes who lived outside
the short-grass regions, but are defined by a set of
cultural traits prevalent among them and not
similarly combined elsewhere: dependence on the
buffalo, residence in skin-covered tepees, use of the
horse for hunt and for transport, a peculiar style of
decorative and of pictographic art, the sign language,
the ideology of warfare, and the Sun Dance and
other less conspicuous features of supernaturalism.
This handbook, copiously illustrated with photo-
graphs, drawings, and diagrams, describes their
culture from the time of their discovery until their
virtually complete assimilation of white ways.
There are large sections on material culture and
social organization, and lesser ones on recreation, art.
and supernaturalism. The conclusion calls atten-
tion to the appearance of particular Plains Indian
features among tribes of other culture areas.
3007. Marriott, Alice Lee. The ten grandmothers.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1945. xiv, 306 p. (The Civilization of the Ameri-
can Indian [Series]) 45-1584 E99.K5M36
The Ten Grandmothers are the ten medicine
bundles of the Kiowas, which have not been opened
since the 1890's. On the chronological thread pro-
vided by the Kiowa year count, a painted mnemonic
record beginning in 1832-33, Miss Marriott has
strung 33 "sketches," eyewitness accounts derived
from the aged Kiowas Hunting Horse, Spear
Woman, and Eagle Plume. They are retold simply,
but with such great skill and delicacy as to convey
the significance of the event to the participant. She
had been able to assign them to specific years be-
tween 1847 and 1944, and each "represents Kiowa
behavior under given circumstances at a given time
. . . Where the feelings of a person are described,
it is only because he himself said that he felt that
way." Such sketches as those of Hunting Horse's
first war party, or of Spear Woman accepting her
granddaughter as interpreter at the general store,
demonstrate that imagination and literary art have
their place in ethnology.
3008. Morgan, Lewis H. League of the Ho-de-no
sau-nee, or Iroquois. New Haven, Reprinted
by Human Relations Area Files, 1954. 2 v- (Be-
havior science reprints) 55-3694 E99.I7M84
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 307-312.
3009. Hunt, George T. The wars of the Iroquois;
a study in intertribal trade relations. Madi-
son, University of Wisconsin Press, 1940. 209 p.
40-3755 E99.I7H8
Bibliography: p. 185-200.
Lewis Henry Morgan (1818-1881) was a prac-
ticing lawyer in Rochester, N. Y., in 1851, when his
epoch-making work on the Iroquois was published.
The imprint listed is photographically reproduced
from Herbert M. Lloyd's edition published by Dodd,
Mead in 1904. In his earlier home of Aurora, N. Y.,
Morgan had become a friend of Ely S. Parker, the
Seneca sachem who later served as General Grant's
military secretary and Commissioner of Indian
Affairs. Morgan had been adopted into the Hawk
Clan of the Seneca tribe in 1847, and had organized
a secret society modelled alter the Iroquois Confed
eracv; League of the Iroquois originated in lectures
to the society. I lis work has been called "the first
scientific account of an Indian tribe given to the
world," but it is safer to call it the first which sought
to describe an Indian society sympathetically, from
29O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the inside, and as a whole. Morgan himself, who
went on to become "the Father of American An-
thropology" in a whole series of more technical and
rigorous studies, soon came to realize its shortcom-
ings, and especially its failure at several points to
interpret Indian life in terms of itself. It remains,
however, the classic description of the once-mighty
Iroquois, and while many corrections of detail
have appeared, no overall picture has been forth-
coming to take its place. The work will always be
a unique authority for the structure of the Iroquois
League in Morgan's own day, and its careful de-
scriptions of material culture have proved quite de-
pendable. Frank G. Speck's The Iroquois, a Study
in Cultural Evolution, 2d ed. ([Bloomfield Hills,
Mich.] 1955- 94 p- Cranbrook Institute of Sci-
ence. Bulletin no. 23), prepared as background
material for interpreting exhibits and illustrated
from objects in the Institute's museum, is a
balanced survey in brief compass. Bernhard J.
Stern's Lewis Henry Morgan, Social Evolutionist
(University of Chicago Press, 1931. 221 p.) traces
the development of Morgan's ideas and assesses his
significance for his discipline. Mr. Hunt's volume,
which dwells on the deficiencies of Morgan's his-
torical information, puts forward an incisive eco-
nomic interpretation of Iroquois history in the 17th
century, with the European demand for furs as the
primary factor. "The European trade was the major
circumstance of all intertribal relations in the Great
Lakes area, and the Iroquois and all their works
were phenomena of that contact."
3010. Opler, Morris Edward. An Apache life-
way; the economic, social, and religious in-
stitutions of the Chiricahua Indians. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1941. xvii, 500 p.
(University of Chicago publications in anthropology.
Ethnological series) 41-24474 E99.A6O73
The life experiences of over 30 Chiricahua
Apaches, three of whom have served as interpreters
for the rest, are drawn upon for a presentation
which, by introducing events "in the order in which
they are experienced in the course of the normal
Chiricahua Apache life-cycle," endeavors "to show
how a person becomes a Chiricahua as well as to
indicate what he does because he is a Chiricahua."
The author aims to make the average Chiricahua
intelligible and sympathetic, "in the sense that the
reader understands what he has become in terms
of what he has experienced." The subdivisions are
therefore "Childhood," "Maturation," "Social Re-
lations of Adults," "Medical Practice and Shaman-
ism," "Maintenance of the Household," "Marital
and Sexual Life," and "The Round of Life." There
is naturally much of interest — such as the Apache's
equation of aberrant sex behavior with witchcraft —
but on the whole the author's treatment of his inter-
view material is external and formal.
301 1. Speck, Frank G. Penobscot man; the life
history of a forest tribe in Maine. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940.
xx, 325 p. ^ 40-9335 E99-P5S7
"List of publications quoted": p. 313-317.
Professor Speck (1881-1950), who taught an-
thropology at the University of Pennsylvania for
nearly 40 years, was an assiduous field worker whose
investigations ranged widely over the tribes of the
United States and Canada. However, in his annual
visits to the Penobscot Indians of Maine between
1907 and 1918, he had the field largely to himself
and produced the only full-scale study of a surviving
group of the Indians of the northeastern United
States. The Penobscot, who lived and hunted in
the valley of the River to which they have given
their name, took over elements of culture from both
French and English, but remained largely isolated
until about 1870. The present work surveys their
material culture with its many uses of birch bark,
their arts, and social life (with special attention to
"Relationship Restrictions"), but does not incor-
porate the work on religious beliefs and other topics
which Dr. Speck had previously published in serials.
On a return to Indian Island opposite Oldtown in
1936, he found that the tribe was increasing in
numbers, and that the old culture was dying more
slowly than he had anticipated, but also that 20th-
century urban ways were steadily prevailing.
3012. Swanton, John R. The Indians of the south-
eastern United States. Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. Off., 1946. 943 p. 107 (i. e. 109)
plates on 55 1., maps (part fold.) tables (1 fold.)
([U. S.] Bureau of American Ethnology. Bulletin
137) 46-26581 E51.U6, no. 137
E78.S55S9
Bibliography: p. 832-856.
Apart from the Five Civilized Tribes, the Indians
of the Southeast have been comparatively little
studied, and this massive volume, "in the main a
collection of source materials," supplies a needed
body of organized information. The aboriginal
population during the first half of the 17th century
has been estimated at 172,000, of which some 30,500
lived on the coast as against 141,500 belonging to
the horticultural tribes of the interior. The largest
linguistic stock was the Muskoghean, with 66,600
members; the other stocks unique to the area, the
Timucua and the Tunican, with 13,000 and 6,000
respectively, were inferior to the Iroquoian (30,200:
these were the Cherokees), the Siouan, and Algon-
quian colonies. After an exhaustive report on the
173 identifiable tribes (p. 81-216), the author turns
THE AMERICAN INDIAN
/ 291
to an equally exhaustive analysis of the aboriginal
cultures, with abundant extracts from Spanish,
French, and English observers of the 16th, 17th,
and 1 8th centuries. "The cultures of all of the
tribes of this area were basically the same," and their
fundamental factors derived from the civilizations
of Mexico, Central America, and Peru.
3013. Underhill, Ruth Murray. The Navajos.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1956. xvi, 299 p. (The Civilization of the Ameri-
can Indian series) 56-5996 E99.N3U32
Bibliography: p. 275-288.
The Navajos, shepherds and horsemen of the
rocky canyons and desert plateaus of New Mexico
and Arizona, number 70,000 and are the largest
Indian tribe in the United States. They speak a
language allied to the Athapascan of British Co-
lumbia, and were relatively late comers to the South-
west; the author of this careful and balanced history
of the tribe thinks that they arrived soon after 1100
A. D. In their long relationship with Spaniards
and Anglo-Americans, she notes three fresh begin-
nings: the acquisition of horses and sheep from the
Spaniards, and the art of weaving from Pueblo
refugees, toward the end of the 17th century; their
exchange of banditry for a settled life on their
reservation in 1868; and the long-range rehabilita-
tion program enacted in 1950, under which the
tribe's capital has risen to $15,000,000. The Navajo
Indians, by Dane and Mary Roberts Coolidge (Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1930. 316 p.), is a sympa-
thetic description of their life a quarter of a century
ago by a couple who had made regular tours of
the reservation for 17 years; it emphasizes arts and
crafts, and mythology and ceremonies.
3014. Wallace, Ernest, and Edward Adamson
Hoebel. The Comanches: lords of the south
plains. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1952. xvii, 381 p. ([Thej Civilization of the
American Indian [Seriesj)
52-11087 E99.C85W3
Bibliography: p. 355-364.
Throughout the Southwest the Comanche name
"has become a synonym for wildness, fierceness,
and savagery." For a century and a half the Co-
manches "successfully defended the High Plains and
prairie country south of the Arkansas River against
all intruders, red and white." The present book
undertakes to "present the salient facts of Comanche
history and culture in a way that will satisfy the
interests and curiosity of the general reader and also
the anthropologist and the historian." Few works
on individual tribes have so successfully combined a
presentation of historical circumstances with the
analysis of culture. The cultural chapters make ef-
fective use of the distinctions and techniques of
recent ethnology without descending into jargon or
losing sight of the human beings who are being
studied, and are quite free from either senti-
mentalism or patronizing.
D. Religion, Art, and Folklore
3015. Alexander, Hardey Burr. The world's rim;
great mysteries of the North American
Indians. With a foreword by Clyde Kluckhon.
Lincoln, University of Nebraska Press, 1953. 259 p.
53-77.03 E98.R3A4
A work first published 18 years after its comple-
tion and 14 years after the death of its author, a dis-
tinguished philosopher whose second subject was the
thought-world of the American Indian. It selects
eight types of Indian ritual "with the intention of
showing his heritage and achievement at its best,"
and seeks to develop their implications concerning
"the red men's conception of the natural world and
of the human action which takes place within it."
Among the ceremonies thus interpreted are the pipe
or calumet rite, the rite of purification by the sweat-
bath, and the corn dance or corn ritual. Many
analogies with early European or Asiatic ritual or
philosophy are traced, not as evidences or diffusion,
but as examples of the human mind drawing like
instruction from natural experience. To the Indian
mind, the author thought, the physical world is a
sense-born phantasm; man is placed upon this earth
to show his metde; and the fulfillment of this
world's life lies beyond it.
3016. Covarrubias, Miguel. The eagle, the jaguar,
and the serpent; Indian art of the Americas,
fv. 1] North America: Alaska, Canada, the United
States. New York, Knopf, 1954. xviii, 314 p.
52-6415 E98.A7C63
The well-known Mexican artist presents Indian
art "as an important and little-known part of our
continental heritage," hitherto insufficiently studied
"from the combined points of view of its aesthetic
values and its historical implications in an effort to
understand the mental processes of its creators and
the social factors that helped its formation." The
292 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
new and broadly synthetic viewpoint, together with
the creative ability of the author, give this work ex-
ceptional interest, and the splendid color plates, line
drawings, and well-reproduced photographs have
few rivals elsewhere.
3017. Douglas, Frederic H., and Rene d'Harnon-
court. Indian art of the United States.
(2d ed.j New York, Museum of Modern Art, 1949,
ci94i. 204 p. 49-35040 E98.A7D6 1949
Bibliography: p. 195-203.
Based on an exhibition at the Museum of Modern
Art prepared by Mr. Douglas, Curator of Indian Art
of the Denver Art Museum, Mr. d'Harnoncourt,
General Manager of the U. S. Indian Arts and
Crafts Board, and Mr. Henry Klumb, architect, this
exceptionally well-made volume is by no means an
ephemeral production, but a concise and authori-
tative survey of a very large field. Nearly every
page has one or two illustrations in very satisfactory
halftone, and the 16 plates "indicating the traditional
range of color in Indian art" are truly brilliant (in
the original edition of 1941; the reissue of 1949 has
only eight, mostly in duller hues). The two prin-
cipal sections review "Prehistoric Art" in five main
regions, and "Living Traditions" in eight culture
areas. A concluding section on "Indian Art for
Modern Living" distinguishes "good Indian work,
done without the interference of whites," from the
worthless knickknacks turned out for the tourist
trade, which usually reflect the customer's rather
than the maker's idea of Indian art. The partici-
pation of the Museum is thus justified: "This subtle
control of its elements and the close relationship
between function and form are what bring Indian
work so near to the aims of most contemporary
artists and make it blend with surroundings that
are truly of the twentieth century."
3018. Ewers, John Canfield. Plains Indian paint-
ing; a description of an aboriginal American
art. Stanford University, Calif., Stanford University
Press, 1939. xiv, 84 p. 39—2775 E98.A7E93
Bibliography: p. 71-79.
Buffalo hides, or robes with the hair left intact,
were used as topcoats by the Plains Indians, being
wrapped about the body with the head of the ani-
mal to the wearer's left. The painting of such hides
with geometric designs, by women, and with life
forms, by men, was generally practiced until the dis-
appearance of the buffalo, but is now a lost art.
Of the surviving specimens some are crudely done,
but many "possess a decorative quality which is
both unique and undeniably pleasing." This
thorough monograph describes the technique of
painting, classifies the patterns and forms, reviews
the mentions by early explorers and travelers, notes
other surfaces which the Indians painted, such as
drums and tepee covers, and presents evidence for
hide painting among other Indian groups, even in
South America. An appendix lists the museum
specimens examined by the author. The numerous
illustrations are large and well reproduced.
3019. Park, Willard Z. Shamanism in western
North America; a study in cultural relation-
ships. Evanston, Northwestern University, 1938.
166 p. (Northwestern University. Studies in the
social sciences, no. 2) 38—14755 E98.R3P23
"The present study has developed from a disser-
tation presented for the degree of doctor of philoso-
phy at Yale University [1936]."
Bibliography: p. 159-163.
Shamanism, in the author's labored definition, is
"all the practices by which supernatural power may
be acquired by mortals, the exercise of that power
either for good or evil," and all associated concepts
and beliefs. He spent three summers with the
Paviotso or Northern Paiute of western Nevada,
and devotes one of his two main chapters to an ac-
count of "Paviotso Shamanism" (p. 11-71). This
he finds to be a comparatively simple affair; its domi-
nant idea is that of curing diseases, and all other
aspects are secondary. The second main chapter
is a comparative study of "The Shamanistic Com-
plex in Western North America," in which he par-
ticularly seeks to show the distribution of the
elements of Paviotso shamanism "among the neigh-
boring tribes of the Great Basin, the Plateau, Cali-
fornia, and several of the so-called Western
Rancheria tribes of the non-pueblo Southwest." He
is surprised to find that these affiliations "cut across
the conventional boundaries of culture areas." He
allows his methodological perplexities to intrude
upon his exposition, but his is the only recent in-
vestigation, and the largest comparative study, of
a crucial topic in Indian thought and culture.
3020. Petrullo, Vincenzo. The diabolic root; a
study of peyotism, the new Indian religion,
among the Delawares. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, the University Museum, 1934.
185 p. 34-32555 E98.R3P38
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) University of
Pennsylvania.
Bibliography: p. 183-185.
Peyote is a species of small and spineless
cactus, Lophophora Williamsii, limited to northern
Mexico and southern Texas. Eaten, it produces
first physical nausea, and then a state of psychic
tranquility, exhilaration, power, and superiority,
as well as an intensification of perception which
tends toward the visionary. Once a minor cult of
a few Mexican tribes, peyotism has become an all-
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 293
sufficient religion in the Indian reservations east
of the Rockies, through which worries are erased,
cures performed, and revelations received. The
two Delaware communities in Oklahoma acquired
it, probably from the Comanches, about 1880. Two
main cults have developed, the Big Moon cult of
John Wilson, in which Christian elements have
mingled, and the Little Moon cult of Elk Hair,
which adheres more closely to the traditional Dela-
ware religion. The author visited the reservations
in 1929-30 and obtained personal statements of
religious experience from several Delawares, includ-
ing the venerable Elk Hair himself. He carefully
describes the considerable variety of ritual and creed
that has developed within the two cults. Notwith-
standing the violence with which peyotism has been
attacked, it is difficult to discover anything either
orgiastic or degraded in the objective account here
given of it.
3021. Thompson, Stith, ed. Tales of the North
American Indians. Selected and annotated
by Stith Thompson. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard
University Press, 1929. xxii, 386 p.
29-18693 E98.F6T32
Bibliography: p. [371 ]— 386.
A century of field work among the Indians has
gathered "by far the most extensive body of tales
representative of any primitive people," but most of
them are scattered in sets of government reports,
folklore journals, and publications of learned so-
cieties. Professor Thompson has therefore selected
96 "typical examples of such of these tales as have
gained any general currency," whether in one cul-
ture area, or in the whole East or the whole West,
or even over practically the whole continent. They
are arranged in a classified order: mythological
stories, mythical incidents, trickster tales, hero tales,
journey to the other world, animal wives and hus-
bands, miscellaneous, tales borrowed from Euro-
peans, and Bible stories. In the latter part of his
introduction, the compiler characterizes the tales of
the several culture areas: the Eskimos and the Cali-
fornia Indians have the smallest range of interest,
while the Plains Indians have practically every class
of tale current anywhere else. Elaborate "Com-
parative Notes" (p. [271 ]~36o), by listing all known
parallels, "show the extent of the distribution of
each tale and each motif." There are also a classi-
fied "List of Motifs Discussed in the Notes" (p.
[361 1-367) and, preliminary to the bibliography, a
list of "Sources Arranged by Culture Areas and
Tribes" (p. [368]~37o).
E. The White Advance
3022. Cook, Sherburne F. The conflict between
the California Indian and white civilization.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1943. 4 v.
(Ibero-Americana 21-24)
A43-411 F1401.I22, no. 21-24
E78.C15C69
Includes bibliographies.
Contents. — 1. The Indian versus the Spanish
mission. — 2. The physical and demographic reaction
of the nonmission Indians in colonial and provincial
California. — 3. The American invasion, 1848- 1870.
— 4. Trends in marriage and divorce since 1850.
"The present work consists of an examination of
the reaction of a primitive human population to a
new and disturbing environment. As such it con-
stitutes a study in human ecology ... In particular,
those factors are considered which lend themselves
to at least semiquantitative treatment . . . The
effect of racial impact and competition was here
unusually complete. It resulted in the substantial
disappearance of the primitive population and the
utter extinction of its civilization." The basic fact
is a decline of the native population from 133,500
in 1770 to 20,500 in 1880. An interesting con-
clusion is that Indians who remained outside the
missions maintained themselves better than did the
mission Indians, in spite of warfare, disease, and
forced removal. "The racial fiber of the native
decayed morally and culturally in the misions, . . .
confinement, labor, punishment, inadequate diet,
homesickness, sex anomalies, and other social or
cultural forces, sapped his collective strength and
his will to resistance and survival."
3023. Dale, Edward Everett. The Indians of the
Southwest; a century of development under
the United States. Norman, Published in cooper-
ation with the Huntington Library, San Marino,
Calif., by the University of Oklahoma Press, 1949.
xvi, 283 p. (The Civilization of the American
Indian [series]) 49-10762 E78.S7D28
Bibliography: p. 261-271.
In 1848 the Treaty oi Guadalupe Hidalgo gave
the United States a vast territory whose scanty popu-
lation consisted of a few thousand whites and a
variety of Indian tribes whose numbers arc variously
294 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
estimated at from 125,000 to 200,000. Such white
influence as they had undergone came from Spanish
colonial culture and the Catholic Church. They
were of two great classes: peaceful, sedentary, and
agricultural tribes such as the pueblo dwellers of
New Mexico and the Mission Indians of California,
and "the wilder and more warlike tribes of the
deserts and mountains." The author aims at "a
broad general survey of the more important aspects
of Indian administration in the Southwest, with
special emphasis on those activities which have
proved of permanent value." Developments dur-
ing the 19th century are treated in chronological
chapters for the three areas of California, Arizona
and New Mexico, and Utah and Nevada, and con-
ditions since 1900 in topical chapters with special
attention to education and public health. In both
centuries the crucial role of the Indian agent is
emphasized.
3024. Debo, Angie. The rise and fall of the Choc-
taw Republic. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1934. xvi, 314 p. (The Civilization
of the American Indian [series ] )
34-18340 E99.C8D4
Bibliography: p. 219-299.
3025. Debo, Angie. And still the waters run.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1940.
417 P-. 41-3348 E78.I5D4
Bibliography: p. [396J-402.
Miss Angie Debo (b. 1890) is a homegrown Okla-
homa historian who has been the most productive
disciple of Grant Foreman; the present volumes sup-
plement and continue his own listed below. The
Rise and Fall is a history of the Choctaws as a
"domestic dependent nation," which emphasizes the
period after removal to the Indian Territory, and
especially the years from the close of the Civil War
to the dissolution of tribal interests after "the sur-
render to the United States" in the Atoka Agree-
ment of 1898. Topical chapters treat economic
development, public finance, political institutions,
crime and justice, and society. The Road to Dis-
appearance (Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1941. 399 p.) performs the same task for the
more conservative Creek nation. The Creeks were
disheartened and impoverished by the Civil War;
their subsequent "attempt to replace their group
loyalties with the white man's individualism brought
a spiritual collapse from which they never fully re-
covered." And Still the Waters Run is a grim
narrative of developments after the Five Civilized
Tribes had surrendered their tribal organization at
the beginning of this century. "The orgy of ex-
ploitation that resulted is almost beyond belief.
Within a generation these Indians, who had owned
and governed a region greater in area and potential
wealth than many an American state, were almost
stripped of their holdings, and were rescued from
starvation only through public charity." The Five
Civilized Tribes of Oklahoma; Report on Social and
Economic Conditions ([Philadelphia] Indian Rights
Association, 1951. 35 p.) is a somber report on a
survey conducted in the summer of 1949. "Appall-
ing poverty" was still the prevailing condition among
all but the oil-enriched Seminoles.
3026. Foreman, Grant. Indian removal; the
emigration of the Five Civilized Tribes of
Indians. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1953. 415 p. (The Civilization of the American
Indian [series]) 53—743 1 E78.I5F8 1953
First published in 1932.
Bibliography: p. [387H94.
3027. Foreman, Grant. The Five Civilized Tribes.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1934. 455 p. (The Civilization of the American
Indian [series]) 34-38511 E78.O45F6
Bibliography: p. 427-431.
Grant Foreman (1869-1953) was an Oklahoma
lawyer who, after serving with the Commission to
the Five Civilized Tribes in 1899-1903, became an
indefatigable student of the history of Oklahoma
and of the Indian tribes within it, and was a pioneer
in the intensive utilization of Federal archives and
other little-known sources for these purposes. His
histories are not remarkable for their arrangement
and are by no means easy reading, but each is a
thorough piece of research, with the primary sources
quoted at length. Indian Removal covers the trans-
fer of Choctaws, Creeks, Chickasaws, Cherokees,
and Seminoles from their original homes to the
Indian Territory, during 1830-1843. Over 60,000
Indians were thus forcibly uprooted. "Inadequate
preparation by the government and the appoint-
ment of a horde of political incompetents to posts
of authority, resulted in woeful mismanagement
and cruel and unnecessary suffering by the emi-
grants." The Five Civilized Tribes covers their
first three decades (1832-1860) in their new homes,
and describes "the rehabilitation and reconstruc-
tion of these immigrants after the demoralization
and impoverishment caused by their forcible re-
moval"— a period of remarkable development and
progress. Other works by Mr. Foreman dealing
with Indian history are Indians and Pioneers; The
Story of the American Southwest before 1830, rev.
ed. (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1936);
Advancing the Frontier, 1830-1860 (University of
Oklahoma Press, 1933); Sequoyah (University of
Oklahoma Press, 1938); and The Last Tre\ of the
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 295
Indians (Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1946).
3028. Harmon, George Dewey. Sixty years of
Indian affairs, political, economic, and dip-
lomatic, 1789-1850. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1941. 428 p.
A42-2412 E93.H274 1941a
Bibliography: p. [383]— 414.
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania,
A review of the political, diplomatic, economic,
and especially the financial aspects of Federal Indian
policy during the first six decades under the Con-
stitution. Throughout the period the primary ob-
jective of the Government was the acquisition of
legal tide to their lands and the transfer of the In-
dians themselves to reservations in the remote West.
This aim, the employment of more direct coercion
after 1825, and the unsuitable method of proceeding
by treaties appropriate only to negotiations between
two genuine sovereigns, all gave Federal policy an
inconsistent and arbitrary appearance. It had, nev-
ertheless, a more humane side evidenced in the dona-
tion of agricultural equipment, the establishment of
schools, the setting up of trust funds, and the pay-
ment of annuities. The intentions of the Govern-
ment were regularly good, and the higher officials
concerned were honest. A History of the United
States Indian Factory System, 1J95-1822, by Ora
B. Peake (Denver, Sage Books, 1954. 340 p.),
describes this "first attempt of the United States
Government to enter business in competition with
private industry" in great detail from the original
records in the National Archives, and emphasizes
its economic failure.
3029. Kinney, Jay P. A continent lost — a civiliza-
tion won; Indian land tenure in America.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1937. xv, 366 p.
37-2999 E93.K56
Bibliography: p. 345-349.
A very detailed history of the Federal policy con-
cerning Indian land tenure, written by a staff mem-
ber with 25 years' service in the Bureau of Indian
Affairs, chiefly from Government documents and to
a lesser degree from unpublished files of the Bureau.
His central theme is the allotment policy, of which
he traces the early indications following the War
of 1 8 12, and the experimental applications follow-
ing the large-scale Indian removals of Jackson's
second administration. The policy itself, as adopted
in 1887, was defeated in its main purpose by sub-
sequent enactments. That of 1891 permitted the
lease of allotment lands and produced "a tendency to
stop farming and eke out an existence from rentals.''
That of 1902 permitted heirs of a deceased Indian
to sell an inherited allotment notwithstanding prior
restrictions upon its alienation. The hundred mil-
lion acres held by Indians in 1900 had shrunk to
fifty million, of which only about thirty million had
productive value, by 1933. The book's title and
optimistic conclusion seem to have small relation
to the facts presented.
3030. Macleod, William Christie. The American
Indian frontier. London, Paul, Trench,
Trubner; New York, Knopf, 1928. xxiii, 598 p.
(The History of civilization [Historical ethnology])
28-24819 E58.M17
Bibliography: p. 565-595.
"The first attempt at an analysis of American
frontier history made particularly from the view-
point of the Indian side of the frontier development."
It considers the Indians of Latin America as well
as those to the north, but since the situation was
there stabilized at a relatively early period, winds
up this portion of the narrative with Part II. Part
IV offers six chapters contrasting the fate of the
Indians in the two spheres in such respects as
slavery and forced labor, the success of Indian mis-
sions in the South and their failure in the North,
and the Anglo-American frontiersman's attitude
of hate and policy of extermination, to which noth-
ing in Latin America corresponds. The later nar-
rative summarizes the major conflicts of Indian
and white, with emphasis on the multitribal reac-
tions led by Pontiac and, half a century later, by
Tecumseh, and on the Indians' "cry for a saviour"
and the several Messiahs who responded in the later
19th century. Attempting a colossal task, the vol-
ume is an imperfect synthesis which does achieve
some large views of value, if it seldom troubles
to be fair to any Anglo-American setder or official.
It has hitherto had no competitor.
3031. Pearce, Roy Harvey. The savages of Amer-
ica, a study of the Indian and the idea of
civilization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953.
xv, 252 p. 53-6486 E93.P4
A study of the Indians' way of life as reflected
in American thought and literature from 1609, the
year of Robert Johnson's Nova Britannia (London,
S. Macham. 28 p.), to 1851, the year of L. H.
Morgan's League of the Iroquois (no. 3008). Its
central concern is what the author calls the idea of
savagism, the rise of which he dates from
the year of William Robertson's History of America
(London, W. Strahan. 2 v.). Its acme he finds
in the work of Henry Rowc Schoolcraft, and its
death is implicit m Morgan's great work, which
absorbs it "into a universal theory of progress."
296 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
From the 1770's Americans abandoned their attempt
to see the Indian as a European manque; he was now
recognized as one radically different from their
proper selves; bound inextricably in a primitive
past, he could only be destroyed by the advance of
civilization. The author relates his study to pre-
vious explorations of the ideas of primitivism, prog-
ress, and manifest destiny conducted at Johns
Hopkins. If at times he indulges in artificial
schematizations, he supplies the reader with a cor-
rective in his extensive quotations from the sources.
3032. Peckham, Howard H. Captured by Indians;
true tales of pioneer survivors. New Bruns-
wick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1954. 238 p.
54-1 193 1 E85.P4
Captivities among the Indian tribes adjacent to
the advancing frontier were a recurrent feature of
pioneer life, and the narratives in which such ex-
periences were described for a fascinated public were
a form of American literature once as popular as it is
now extinct. Mr. Peckham has made concise sum-
maries of 14 such narratives, from Mary Rowland-
son who was taken captive by King Philip's Narra-
gansetts in 1676, to Fanny Kelly who was taken by
the Oglala Sioux in 1864. While his condensations
eliminate much extraneous matter, they are some-
what lacking in tension and color.
3033. Peckham, Howard H. Pontiac and the
Indian uprising. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1947. xviii, 346 p.
47-1 104 1 E83.76.P4
Bibliography: p. 326-332.
Formally, a life of the Ottawa Chief (ca. 1720-
1769), "a warrior of heroic proportions who set in
motion the most formidable Indian resistance the
English-speaking people had yet faced, or ever would
face, on this continent." The author disclaims any
attempt to rewrite Parkman's "monumental history"
(included in Chapter VIII), but although he prints
all of Pontiac's surviving speeches and dictated
letters, the personal materials are so scanty as to
leave the major interest in the dilemma of the In-
dians after the Peace of 1763, and in the details of
the uprising, for which Dr. Peckham has found
much fresh material in the manuscripts of his own
Clements Library. "Pontiac fought to restore the
relative independence enjoyed by the western Indians
and to force the British to change their fundamental
policy toward peoples of inferior culture. His aims
appear to us today just and ethical, even though his
savage manner of warfare is revolting and his hope
to maintain a primeval wilderness on the edge of
civilization was impractical."
3034. Priest, Loring Benson. Uncle Sam's step-
children; the reformation of United States
Indian policy, 1865-1887. New Brunswick, N. }.,
Rutgers University Press, 1942. 310 p.
42-8373 E93.P95
A documented study of two decades of Federal
Indian policy which utilizes Indian Office archives
supplemented by the Papers of Secretary Carl Schurz
and Senator Henry L. Dawes. The close of the
Civil War and the accelerated occupation of the
West made clear the need for a permanent solution
of Indian problems. Down to 1880 the four policies
of concentration, transfer, church nomination of
Indian officials, and civilian advice through the
Board of Indian Commissioners, were tried out and
abandoned as failures. Intensive efforts at reform
during the next seven years were summed up in the
Dawes Severalty Act of 1887, by which "individual
ownership, citizenship, and sale of surplus land were
finally accepted as the only possible means of im-
proving American Indian affairs." The change
was supported by nearly all the friends of the Indian,
but was unacceptable to the great majority of the
Indians themselves. It was the decision to dispense
with gradualism, and use force in imposing it upon
the tribes, rather than any flaw in the ideal of turn-
ing the Indian into an independent and self-reliant
landowner, that produced the consequences so often
deplored.
3035. Seymour, Flora Warren (Smith). Indian
agents of the old frontier. New York, Ap-
pleton-Century, 1941. 402 p. 41-12500 E93.S45
Indian policy was formulated in Washington, but
its application to tribes and individuals usually de-
pended upon "the Major," as even the most unmili-
tary Indian agent was regularly called. Mrs.
Seymour sketches the early stages of the agent's
evolution from "a commercial agent or consul" in
an alien sovereignty, to an administrator with nearly
complete discretion. Her narrative of the careers
of particular agents begins with the changes of 1869-
71, when President Grant embarked upon a com-
prehensive peace policy, and Congress abolished the
traditional procedure of making treaties with the
tribes. A few of these agents have left memoirs, but
the bulk of her materials are drawn from the annual
reports of the Commissioners of Indian Affairs. In
addition to such agencies as Laurie Tatum among
the Kiowa, Thomas J. Jeffords among the Apaches,
Father James H. Wilbur among the Yakimas, and
William F. N. Amy among the Pueblos, Mrs. Sey-
mour presents the achievements of such army of-
ficers as Richard H. Pratt, who founded Carlisle
Indian School, and Hugh L. Scott, whose rare
knowledge and influence acquired in many frontier
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 297
missions made him the War Department's foremost
Indian specialist.
3036. Stewart, Edgar I. Custer's luck. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xvi,
522 p. 55-6368 E83.866.S85
Bibliography: p. 496-506.
A minute reconstruction of the most famous, and
probably the most controversial, episode in two and
a half centuries of Indian warfare. On June 25,
1876, at the Little Big Horn, a famous Civil War
general (George Armstrong Custer, b. 1839) and
five troops of regular cavalry were killed to the last
man by some 2500 Sioux and Cheyennes under the
famous chiefs Sitting Bull and Crazy Horse. This
outcome is traced to its remoter sources in the Indian
policy and the internal politics of the Grant adminis-
tration. After an exhaustive analysis of Custer's
campaign, the author concludes that he, and espe-
cially his two subordinates, Reno and Benteen, al-
lowed the Indians to score a startling success, "not
by an overmastering strategy of their own but simply
by taking advantage of the mistakes of the soldiers."
Some four months later the capacity of the Plains
Indians to offer further armed resistance was
brought to an end.
3037. Tucker, Glenn. Tecumseh; vision of glory.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1956. 399 p.
56-8618 E99.S35T35
"Bibliographical note": p. 366-367. "Bibliog-
raphy": p. 368-381.
By September 1812 Tecumseh (1768-1813)
dominated a "prairie empire of almost half a million
square miles, an area greater than that of the seven-
teen states of the Federal Union, extending from
northern Ohio to the far Dakotas." "The ardent
personality and militant patriotism of this Shawnee
chief" had brought 32 tribes beneath his battle
standard, and seemed about to check or reverse the
American occupation of the Northwest. Thirteen
months later he died in battle, his cause shattered.
There is more evidence for Tecumseh's career than
for any other Indian of comparable historical im-
portance; Mr. Tucker has diligently assembled and
sifted it, and has exploited its dramatic qualities to
the full in an outstanding Indian biography. Te-
cumseh he assesses as exceeding all other Indian
leaders, before or since his time, in knowledge and
breadth of vision, in sincerity and humanity, in
perseverance, racial patriotism, political sagacity, and
military ability, and in sheer personal impressiveness.
F. The Twentieth Century
3038. Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C.
Institute for Government Research. The
problem of Indian administration; report of a sur-
vey made at the request of Honorable Hubert Work,
Secretary of the Interior, and submitted to him,
February 21, 1928. Lewis Meriam, technical di-
rector [of the survey] Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1928. xxii, 872 p. (Its Studies in admin-
istration [no. 17]) 28-13503 E93.B873
This epoch-making survey was undertaken by the
Institute for Government Research at the instance
of the Secretary of the Interior in June 1926, and
financed by the Institute entirely out of funds re-
ceived from private sources. It was carried out by
the Technical Director and a staff of nine specialists
in such fields as law, economics, health, etc. After
seven months of field work, during which 95 juris-
dictions were visited, another eight months were
spent in preparing this report. The "Detailed Re-
port," consisting of seven topical chapters, follows
p. 189; the volume begins with a "General Sum-
mary of Findings and Recommendations," and
offers "A General Policy for Indian Affairs," as well
as suggestions for the "Organization ol the Federal
Indian Work," and "Personnel Administration."
The basic fact of the Indian situation is that "an
overwhelming majority of the Indians are poor, even
extremely poor, and they are not adjusted to the
economic and social system of the dominant white
civilization." The ineffectiveness of the Bureau of
Indian Affairs in educating and advancing the In-
dian has resulted from inadequate appropriations
and, as a consequence, unqualified personnel. Re-
forms in Federal Indian policy since 1928 have-
nearly all stemmed from this searching diagnosis.
3039. La Farge, Oliver. As long as the grass shall
grow. Photographs by Helen M. Post. New-
York, Alliance Book Corp., 1940, 140 p. (The Face
of America; Edwin Rosskam, editor)
40 27492 E93I17
A popular presentation of the Indian problem in
the recent past, by an anthropologist and friend of
the Indian who is also a successful novelist; the nu-
merous photographs are excellent and finely repro-
duced. "I take the year i<)23 as the nadir ol the
hull. ins"; they were expropriated, impoverished, dis-
eased, despondent, and dwindling in numbers— all
long-range consequences of the land allotment act of
1887. The Liter [920's saw a steady improvement
298 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
in Indian administration; in 1933 John Collier be-
came Commissioner of Indian Affairs, and in 1934
Congress passed the Indian Reorganization Act.
The volume concludes with an enthusiastic presen-
tation of the subsequent revitalization of tribal life,
with an upswing in morale, prosperity, and vital
statistics. There is no adequate summary of re-
cent developments, which must be gathered from
such formidable Congressional documents as the
House Committee on Interior and Insular Affairs'
Report with Respect to the House Resolution Au-
thorizing . . . an Investigation of the Bureau of
Indian Affairs (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.,
1953-54. 1594, 576 p. 82d Cong., 2d sess. House
report 2503; 83d Cong., 2d sess. House report 2680).
3040. Lindquist, Gustavus E. E. The red man in
the United States; an intimate study of the
social, economic and religious life of the American
Indian. New York, Doran, 1923. 461 p. illus.
23-10398 E77.L74
The American Indian Survey was initiated in
1919 by the Interchurch World Movement, "at the
request of Indian missionaries and workers gathered
in conference at Wichita, Kansas"; it was taken
over in 192 1 by the Committee on Social and Re-
ligious Surveys and completed the following year.
The Director, Mr. Lindquist, came from the Inter-
national Committee of the Young Men's Christian
Associations, and the text was prepared in part and
edited throughout by Stanley Went. The Survey,
"which is of a more comprehensive nature than has
ever before been undertaken, has attempted to col-
lect all the data available concerning social, eco-
nomic, religious and educational conditions among
the 340,000 Indians scattered through the United
States," and especially such as "will assist the Prot-
estant churches to extend their constructive work in
the Indian field." Of the 1921 total, 80,000 Indians
were adherents of Protestant, and 65,000 of Roman
Catholic Christianity. The book strongly advocates
the assimilation policy, with tribal relations liqui-
dated and "the Indian put on an individual basis";
it gives special attention to "the use of alcohol and
peyote, the indulgence in degrading dances and the
extent of sexual immorality, or non-morality." Its
substance lies in Chapters 7-14 (p. 91-389) con-
taining the geographical survey, with eight areas
further subdivided by States, tribes, and reserva-
tions; reservations not individually described here
appear in Appendix I (p. 401-420). The state of
schools and missions in each local unit is carefully
described. The book has enduring value as a pano-
rama of the reservations 35 years ago.
3041. Linton, Ralph, ed. Acculturation in seven
American Indian tribes. New York, Ap-
pleton-Century, 1940. xiii, 526 p.
40-3756 E98.C9L6
Bibliography at end of most of the chapters.
Contents. — Introduction, by Ralph Linton. —
The Puyallup of Washington, by Marian W.
Smith. — The White Knife Shoshoni of Nevada, by
J. S. Harris. — The southern Ute of Colorado, by
M. K. Opler. — The northern Arapaho of Wyoming,
by Henry Elkin. — The Fox of Iowa, by Natalie F.
Joffe. — The Alkatcho Carrier of British Columbia,
by Irving Goldman. — The San Ildefonso of New
Mexico, by William Whitman. — Acculturation and
the processes of culture change, by Ralph Linton. —
The processes of culture transfer, by Ralph Lin-
ton.— The distinctive aspects of acculturation, by
Ralph Linton.
A volume of composite origin: the field work
was financed by Columbia University and carried
out between 1930 and 1937, while the theoretical
framework was supplied by a subcommittee on
acculturation, of which Prof. Linton was one of the
members, appointed in 1935 by the Social Science
Research Council. The subcommittee eventually
worked out an impressive "Outline for Report on
Acculturation in any Given Tribe," but only after
the field work was completed. The seven reports
here printed have all been organized, so far as pos-
sible, in conformity to this oudine, but the material
was not collected on its basis in the first instance.
The reports are straightforward enough, and nat-
urally concerned with white influence on Indian
society rather than the converse. Prof. Linton's
three concluding theoretical chapters do not confine
themselves to the data presented in the preceding
reports; they are primarily of interest to sociological
theorists, but put one point effectively: "One of
the most tragic features of our own dealings with
the American Indians has been the constant changes
in policy which, together with tribal removals, have
rendered the adaptations which they successively
developed successively unworkable."
3042. Mead, Margaret. The changing culture of
an Indian tribe. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1932. 313 p. (Columbia University
contributions to anthropology, edited by Franz Boas,
v. 15) 32-28812 E51.C7, v. 15
E98.S7M33
Miss Mead spent five months on the "Ander"
(said to be the Omaha) Reservation in 1930 in order
to investigate the little-known question of women's
place in recent Indian society. She carried out her
mission effectively, but her findings were most
striking in their revelation of the degradation of
Indian life as a whole in the latter days of the
THE AMERICAN INDIAN / 299
allotment policy. Women, for instance, had re-
tained their lands more successfully than men, but
a husband with a landed wife usually did his best to
cash in his wife's heritage and squander the money.
Women now had a larger economic role — because
they still kept house and gardened, while their men-
folk loafed or got drunk. They were still subject
to a fixed theory of sexual morals with a puritanical
double standard — but the Ander male regarded
every unaccompanied woman as fair prey, and a
great increase in the number of loose women and
promiscuous young girls had been the consequence.
3043. U. S. National Resources Board. Land
Planning Committee. Report on land plan-
ning. Part 10. Indian land tenure, economic
status, and population trends, prepared by the Office
of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1935. 73 p.
36-26092 HD183.N3A5 1938, pt. 10
One of the eleven parts of a supplementary report
of the Land Planning Committee, containing "a
large volume of basic data and information" which
could not be included in the National Resources
Board's report to the President, Nov. 28, 1934. This
part, prepared by the Office of Indian Affairs, pre-
sents the problems of most concern to its then direc-
tor, John Collier. The first and largest section
describes the "Complexities of Indian Land Tenure
Arising from the Allotment System." The absurdi-
ties to which the heirship system had led are graphi-
cally illustrated by the estate of the Chippewa Lizette
Denomie, whose original allotment of 80 acres had
been distributed among 39 heirs, four of whom had
an interest of .22 acre each, and two an interest
of .11 acre each. A "Social and Economic Survey
of Selected Indian Reservations" "reveals the average
Indian as a petty capitalist and an intermittent wage
earner, rather than a commercial or even a subsis-
tence farmer." "The Trend of Indian Population"
criticizes earlier statistics and emphasizes the recent
rapid growth, effected through mixed marriages;
"the ratio of full bloods to mixed bloods has been
declining very rapidly."
VIII
General History
A. Historiography
B. General Worlds
C. The New World
D. The Thirteen Colonies
E. The American Revolution
F. Federal America (1783-1815)
G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60)
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Reconstruction (to i8yy)
I. Grant to McKinley (1860.-1901)
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson (1901-21)
K. Since 1920
3044-3069
3070-3152
3 J 53-3 1 75
3176-3236
3237-3272
3273~33"
3312-3358
3359-34*7
3418-345 1
3452~3474
3475"35oob
¥
THE ATTEMPT to cover the history of the portion of the earth's surface which is now
the United States in some 450 titles would be a manifest absurdity if it were not for an
important consideration which affects, not merely the selections for this chapter, but the work
of library catalogers and classifiers, the writing of general American histories, and all thinking
about the nature of history, whether by historians, social theorists, or philosophers. This same
consideration has entered into the selections for nearly every other chapter, and has given
a persistent perplexity to our whole enterprise which
a number of quite arbitrary resolutions have by no
means dispersed. Let us characterize it as briefly
as possible.
The question "What is history?" gives rise to
chains of thought sufficiently complex, and may
receive answers ranging from the naive to the
highly sophisticated. But this chapter is not entitled
"History"; our whole Guide is concerned with
history and the transitory present to which it leads,
and we understand well enough what we mean by
history even if we do not attempt to arrive at a
watertight definition. Our question is rather:
"What is General History?" What is history when
it is not qualified as literary history, diplomatic
history, religious history, economic history, consti-
tutional history, or political history, or by any other
adjective from the other 31 chapters of this Guide,
or from wider or narrower spheres? What, specifi-
cally, is American history, or the history of the
United States, or of the American Nation, or of the
American people, or of American civilization?
300
Seventy-five years ago this question would hardly
have been asked, and, if it were, would have been
immediately and dogmatically answered. "History
is past politics, and politics is present history," Ed-
ward A. Freeman is supposed to have said, and the
report has been seized upon because it condenses
in an epigram the convictions of two generations of
historians, preacademic and academic alike. His-
tory tout court was political history, conceived
broadly enough to include constitutional, diplo-
matic, and military affairs as well as the fortunes
of rulers, ministers, and parties. Other matters
might be adduced when required to make these
intelligible, and in practice, of course, other mat-
ters have always been adduced at length. In sum,
proper history was the history of the State or of
the relations of States. Twentieth-century histo-
riography has been in large part a reaction against
this Victorian orthodoxy. Dogmatic exclusiveness
usually succeeds in provoking a contrary exclusive-
ness, and it was not long before there appeared
GENERAL HISTORY / 3OI
vigorously worded manifestoes implying or assert-
ing that the history of war and of politics was not
worth studying at all. Neither, it came to be al-
leged, was more than a secondary and superficial
manifestation, without real causal potency; the
great changes took place in the depths of economic
production, social organization, and human think-
ing and feeling. A single factor or sphere might
be alleged as exclusively causal, reducing all the
others to derivative and partially illusory phenom-
ena: there is Marxian history, for instance, as well
as Freudian history, and other radical simplifica-
tions with smaller followings. The multiplicity
of spheres receiving newly intensive historical in-
vestigation became a perplexity and a burden to
all who were looking for larger views, and "Syn-
thesis" became a slogan which, as usual, was more
easily pronounced than embodied.
We have no desire to promulgate a theory of
history, but operation itself demands some theoreti-
cal assumptions. We can only hope that ours will
seem to others as innocent and as simple as they do
to us. We have supposed that, as long as there are
records or remains, every sphere of human life, in
the past as in the present, is worthy of serious and
disciplined investigation. There is still no master
key to man's mind or man's life, and until there is
one there can be no definitive way of writing gen-
eral history, whether of the race or of one of its units.
But the human mind cannot cope all at once with
the phenomena of life, in their natural entanglement
and sporadicity. There must be a subordination
which the mind imposes upon phenomena as much
as it draws it from them. The mind's native ap-
proach to a temporal succession of events, which
comprises a development or an evolution, is that of
narrative, not different in kind from primitive folk-
tale or heroic epic. General history, therefore, re-
quires a focus, and must provide for movement.
It should avoid negative dogmas of exclusion, but
must have its own principles of selectivity. Espe-
cially in our own day does it require a skill in selec-
tion, in organization, and in combining description
and analysis with narration, so subtle and varied as
to be little distinguishable from the processes of the
artist. If the history is that of a people with its own
political organization, it neither should nor can
dispense with the idea of the nation as a unifying
concept.
Borrowing from various sources, but especially
from Professor Richard B. Morris' Encyclopedia of
American History (no. 3072), we have therefore
conceived of this chapter as a selection of books
which most effectively present the mainstream of
American history, regarded as a movement which
received its general form in 1492, and its special
character in 1607, effected its national determination
in 1776-87, and survived its greatest internal crises
in 1861-65 an<^ IQ29-33> a°d its greatest external
ones in 1917-19 and 1941-45. Beginning with
Section C, there are few titles which could not
plausibly have been placed in one or another of our
topical chapters, just as there are many tides in
those chapters which could just as plausibly appear
here. In some cases, we are well aware, our dis-
positions have been quite arbitrary, and in a few
they are recognized errors of judgment which the
circumstances of publication do not permit us to
rectify.
Section A on Historiography represents a new
self-consciousness of the historical profession which
is even now being gradually and somewhat pain-
fully achieved. It is not an easy subject to study,
for it is considerably more difficult to extract the
ideas and attitudes of an historian from his work
than it is those of a philosopher. There remain
much detailed work to be done, and definitive sur-
veys to produce. We have included here some titles
on the collection and organization of historical ma-
terials in archives, historical societies, and museums,
some manuals of historical research and editing
which illustrate American practice, and some works
on the teaching of American history.
Section B contains a great variety of general works
on the whole course of American history, although
some take their departure from 1776 or 1789 rather
than from an earlier date. There are a number of
reference books, but of a kind in which one may
profitably or even pleasantly browse, if no one is
likely to read them through. A number of collec-
tions of historical "documents" and other primary
source materials are included; most of them are
intended for use in college courses, and the more
recent ones seek to present "problems" which will
induce the student to reason as well as to remember.
Other books produced for classroom use are the
general surveys, in one volume or in two, with one
author or more, and here the problem was the usual
one of selecting a few titles from many whose re-
semblances are more remarkable than their differ-
ences. There are a number of guides to American
biography and autobiography, of which the Diction-
ary of American Biography (no. 3080) is fticile
princcps; writings of individual biographers, supple-
mentary to the biographies which appear in the
topical chapters of this Guide, will be found in
Chapter IV. The numerous biographies in the
succeeding sections of this chapter arc intended to
be limited to figures who took .1 significant or .it
least a highly representative p.irt in the main current
of national development. And, finally, there are in
Section B a number oi titles which treat the west
ward movement of the American people as a major
and continuing theme oi American history, from
302 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the first settlements until the close of the 19th
century. Books which consider the subject rather
from the viewpoint of the successive Wests to be
occupied will be found in Chapter XII on Local
History, but we do not expect everyone to agree in
detail with our distribution.
Section C is chiefly concerned with the overture to
American history: the revelation of the Western
Hemisphere to European man from the great ven-
ture of Christopher Columbus until that point, some
three centuries later, when the major outlines of the
New World were clearly understood. Here have
also been placed a limited number of tides on the
two European empires in America which preceded
or accompanied the British colonization, which con-
ditioned its development, and which have given a
distinctive character to large parts of the Americas.
Too often neglected are the West Indies (no. 3168),
which since the 17th century have been the most
cosmopolitan part of the New World, and which,
during the first three centuries after their discovery,
played a far more important role than they have
since.
The remaining sections constitute in the main a
straightforward chronological progression, but with
two important qualifications: works concerned with
the assertion of colonial rights against the imperial
government, which went on for nearly 12 years
before the actual outbreak of hostilities, are placed
in Section E rather than D. Similarly, works on
slavery as a system and an interest, and the dispute
which it engendered for three decades before seces-
sion, have been collected in Section H, and the story
prolonged to the withdrawal of the Federal troops
from the South in 1877. In the case of either war,
and of the other national wars, books concerned with
the more technically military aspects, the conduct of
campaigns, the administration of the armed forces,
and the lives of the principal commanders — if they
did not become Presidents — will be found in Chapter
X on Military History. Concerning Section F it
may be said that the best books on the most im-
portant event within it, the making of the Federal
Constitution, will be found in Chapter XXX on
Constitution and Government. As for Section G,
it was dubbed the "Middle Period" when the post-
Civil War perspective was far shorter than it is today,
but since no better term has appeared to indicate the
years of strenuous nationalism and democracy be-
tween the Peace of Ghent and the election of i860,
we have retained it with the addition of quotation
marks. Many of the most significant develop-
ments for Section I, covering the age in which
American industry so spectacularly mushroomed
and achieved its dominant position, are best de-
scribed in Chapter XXIX on Economic Life. The
breaks at 1901 and 1921 are chiefly for convenience,
and represent no endorsement of the "Presidential
synthesis" — but who can deny that the three periods
thereby set off have each a tone and temper of its
own?
A. Historiography
3044. Adams, Herbert B. Historical scholarship
in the United States, 1876-1901: as revealed
in the correspondence of Herbert B. Adams. Edited
by W. Stull Holt. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press,
1938. 314 p. (The Johns Hopkins University
studies in historical and political science, ser. 56,
no. 4) 39-1218 H31.J6, ser. 56, no. 4
E175.5.A1797
3045. Jameson, John Franklin. An historian's
world; selections from the correspondence
of John Franklin Jameson. Edited by Elizabeth
Donnan and Leo F. Stock. Philadelphia, American
Philosophical Society, 1956. 382 p. (Memoirs of
the American Philosophical Society, v. 42)
56-6729 Q11.P612, v. 42
D15.J27A4
Adams (1 850-1 901) built up the first successful
American department of graduate study in history,
at Johns Hopkins University (from 1876), initiated
the publication of the Johns Hopkins studies (1882),
led in the organization of the American Historical
Association (1884), and served as its first secretary.
Jameson (1 859-1937) received the first Ph. D. in
history from Johns Hopkins (1882), edited the
American Historical Review (1895-1901, 1905-28),
headed the Bureau of Historical Research at the
Carnegie Institution of Washington (1905-28) and
the Manuscript Division of the Library of Congress
(1928-37), and was the prime mover in bringing
about the establishment of the National Archives
(1934). Each man exerted a wide and salutary
influence among the new and growing "guild" of
academic historians, although his own published
work remained relatively limited in quantity.
These two collections of their correspondence,
principally with other American historians, give
much the best picture available of the first six
decades of the new professional history in the United
States.
GENERAL HISTORY / 303
3046. Beale, Howard K., ed. Charles A Beard:
an appraisal. [Lexington] University of
Kentucky Press, 1954. 312 p.
53-55 x7 E175.5.B37
"Bibliography of Beard's writings [by] Jack
Frooman [and] Edmund David Cronon":
p. [265]-286.
Charles A. Beard (1874-1948) was a unique
figure among American historians, whose writings
ranged over a wide variety of subjects, whose belief
in democracy and the freedom of thought was basic
and practical, and who followed his ideas wherever
they led him, into economic determinism, into his-
torical relativism, or into a narrow isolationist
corner. His violent attacks on the foreign policy
of President F. D. Roosevelt lost him much of the
esteem in which he had been held and delayed the
appearance of the present symposium, from which
several of the original contributors withdrew, until
after his death. Twelve friends and admirers con-
tribute 13 essays on Beard as a historian, a historical
critic, a political theorist, an interpreter of the Con-
stitution, a teacher, and a public man, as well as in
other lights and relationships. Professor Robert
E. Brown of Michigan State University devotes a
small volume, Charles Beard and the Constitution
(Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1956. 219
p.), to a critical analysis of Beard's best-known and
most controversial book, An Economic Interpreta-
tion of the Constitution of the United States (New
York, Macmillan, 1913. 330 p.). He is led to
deny "that the Constitution was put over undemo-
cratically in an undemocratic society" by a per-
sonalty-interests group, and to affirm that it was,
so far as conditions permitted, created by the whole
people in their own best interests. Volumes by
single hands on other historians who span the two
centuries are Eric F. Goldman's John Bach McMas-
ter, American Historian (Philadelphia, University
of Pennsylvania Press, 1943. 194 p.), on the author
of the famous History of the People of the United
States (1883-1927. 9 v.), which is more original
in plan than in execution; and Abraham S. Eisen-
stadt's Charles McLean Andrews, A Study in
American Historical Writing (New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1956. 273 p.), on the "his-
torical science" of the Yale professor who did most
to place the Thirteen Colonies in their contemporary
setting as part of a great empire with its center at
Whitehall.
3047. Carter, Clarence E. Historical editing.
[Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1952.
51 p. (National Archives publication no. 53-4. Bul-
letins of the National Archives, no. 7)
A52-9688 D13.2.C3
Dr. Carter, since 193 1 editor of the Territorial
Papers of the United States, has drawn upon his
long experience and the best recent practice in this
general discussion of the problems that regularly
arise in historical editing, especially for the benefit
of staff members of the National Archives and of
participants in the program of the National Histori-
cal Publications Commission. In its analysis of
selection, transcription, and annotation, and in its
emphasis upon responsibility "to furnish the ma-
terial in its full and unaltered shape," it exemplifies
the editorial standards of the historical profession in
the United States.
3048. Caughey, John W. Hubert Howe Bancroft,
historian of the West. Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1946. 422 p.
A47-18 E175.5.B199
A leading Pacific Coast historian writes a well-
proportioned biography of his most conspicuous
predecessor, H. H. Bancroft (1832-1918), based on
the latter's voluminous writings supplemented by
his papers in the Bancroft Library and by contempo-
rary newspapers. The house of H. H. Bancroft &
Co., Booksellers and Stationers, set up in San Fran-
cisco in 1856, prospered beyond anticipation, ena-
bling its proprietor to assemble an extraordinary col-
lection of imprints, manuscripts, and transcripts
concerning the history of the United States west of
the Rockies, and to employ a group of assistants to
digest these sources for a large-scale history of the
region, with Bancroft providing plans, editorial
supervision, and a substantial share of the actual
writing. Believing that Bancroft's early critics had
seized upon some of his defects, so that "it came to
be the fashion to disparage him not only for these
shortcomings but in all that he had done," Professor
Caughey emphasizes the great achievements in-
volved in the 39 large volumes of the Native Races
and the History of the Pacific States, and in the
Bancroft Library of the University of California.
3049. Coleman, Laurence Vail. The museum in
America; a critical study. Washington,
American Association of Museums, 1939. 3 v.
(73° P-) 39-277J9 AM11.C6
Museums, even of natural history, constitute a
concentration of nonlitcrary materials for history and
may be regarded as a primary stage of the historio-
graphical process. The first museum in the United
States — the Charleston Museum, which originated
in 1773 as a natural history collection of the Library
Society of Charles-Town — antedated the Revolution,
and by the end of 1938 the number of Americao
museums had reached 2,489, nearly four-fifths of
which had been established during the previous
3°4 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
quarter-century. The author, who has been director
of the American Association of Museums since 1927,
calls his work "a commentary on the condition, the
strengths and weaknesses, and the limitations and
opportunities of museums." Volume 1 reviews the
whole development as a social movement and points
to the rise of historic house and trailside museums
as consequences of the automobile. It classifies
existing institutions into museums of science, his-
tory, art, and industry; discusses their relations to
locality, State, and Nation; surveys sources of mu-
seum income, which is never quite adequate; and
describes the museum building of yesterday and
today. Volume 2 is an analysis of museum work,
the central function of which is display, necessitat-
ing a dual arrangement of materials into an exhibi-
tion and a reserve, or study, collection. Museum
work, he concludes, "is capable of being a profes-
sion," and its personnel has achieved varying de-
grees of professionalism. Volume 3 classifies and
lists museums by field ("General Museums," p. 487—
492), by control, and by location, and concludes
with ten statistical tables (p. 663-678) and two
chronological lists, of museums established before
1850, including those which have ceased to exist,
and of all buildings constructed for use as museums
since 1814, when Peale's Museum was built in Balti-
more. Dr. Coleman has since published, under the
same imprint, works on College and University Mu-
seums (1942. 73 p.) and Company Museums (no.
4716), and the first volume of a treatise on Museum
Buildings (1950).
3050. Committee on American History in Schools
and Colleges. American history in schools
and colleges; the report of the Committee on Ameri-
can History in Schools and Colleges of the American
Historical Association, the Mississippi Valley His-
torical Association, the National Council for the
Social Studies. Edgar B. Wesley, director of the
committee. New York, Macmillan, 1944. xiv,
148 p. 44-611 E175.8.C6
A reexamination of the purpose, extent, and qual-
ity of instruction in American history provoked by
World War II, sponsored by three learned societies,
financed by the Rockefeller Foundation, and con-
ducted from June through September 1943. The
committee concluded that while the number of
courses offered in American history was sufficient,
there was too much overlapping in subject matter
between them, too few college students took them,
and improvement in the quality of curriculum and
teaching was the major concern. Colleges were
cautioned not to stress research at the expense of
good teaching, and teachers urged to aim at signifi-
cance in a limited number of topics rather than the
meaningless enumeration of details. The Report
offers a model organization for American history
courses through the grades and an "Item Analysis of
the Test of Understanding of United States History"
(p. [i25]-i44) which revealed so much ignorance
of the subject among diverse groups of testees.
3051. Craven, Wesley Frank. The legend of the
Founding Fathers. New York, New York
University Press, 1956. 191 p. (New York Uni-
versity. Stokes Foundation. Anson G. Phelps
lectureship on early American history)
56-8593 E175.C7
"For better or for worse, the American community
has consistently looked to its origins for an explana-
tion of its distinctive qualities and thus for an ex-
planation of what its future should hold." There
was, however, a founding of the body social in 1607
and 1620, and a founding of the body politic in 1776
and 1787. Professor Craven devotes these explora-
tory lectures to the relative emphasis given to each
founding, both in the historiography of various eras
and in the ceremonial observances of successive
anniversaries, and seeks as well the sources of the
"debunking" impulse which has provided a counter-
current during the present century.
3052. Dunlap, Leslie W. American historical
societies, 1 790-1860. Madison, Wis., Priv.
Print. [Cantwell Print. Co.] 1944. 238 p.
44-7046 E172.D8
Societies organized primarily to collect, preserve,
and make available materials for history arose in
Europe from the first decade of the 18th century, and
spread to the United States by its last. In Part 2
(p. 137-219) of this study, Dr. Dunlap sketches
briefly the careers of the 65 local societies which arose
in the United States between 1791, when the efforts
of Rev. Jeremy Belknap brought about the organi-
zation of the Massachusetts Historical Society, and
1859, when the Historical Society of New Mexico
was founded at Santa Fe. Part 1 discusses the move-
ment as a whole, such general features as member-
ship, finances, collections, and publications, and the
value of these societies to our early writers, especially
of state and local history.
3053. Hesseltine, William B. Pioneer's mission;
the story of Lyman Copeland Draper. Madi-
son, State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1954.
384 p. _ 54-7271 El 75-5-D763
"Materials for a biography": p. 357-359.
Draper (1815-1891) spent much of his time from
his 24th year in journeys, largely made on foot,
through the older Middle West, collecting or tran-
scribing manuscripts, and taking down the oral
testimony of the oldest inhabitants, especially con-
cerning the warfare which harassed the earliest
GENERAL HISTORY / 305
settlements. As the founder and long-time secretary
of the State Historical Society of Wisconsin ( 1854—
1886), he was a pioneer in the collection and publi-
cation of historical source material, and in the or-
ganization of historical activities, in this part of the
United States. The author unfortunately takes a
rather dim view of Draper's character and of his
failure to write the large-scale history he had
planned, but he bases a very concrete and absorbing
biography upon a thorough assimilation of the
abundant personal materials in the Draper Collec-
tion at Madison.
3054. Hockett, Homer C. The critical method in
historical research and writing. New York,
Macmillan, 1955. 330 p. 55-13664 E175.7.H6446
"A rewritten and expanded edition of the author's
Introduction to Research in American History
[1931]/'
Bibliography: p. 265-295.
An introduction to method for graduate students
in American history, which illustrates the time-
honored canons of historical criticism from exclu-
sively American examples, gives concrete biblio-
graphical and procedural instructions for preparing
a master's thesis, and proceeds to more general con-
siderations on the past and present state of historical
bibliography, research, and writing. A very typical
product of American graduate schools of history,
which throws much light upon the profession's
understanding of its own tasks.
3055. Jordy, William H. Henry Adams: scientific
historian. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1952. xv, 327 p. (Yale historical publica-
tions. Studies, 16) 52-5362 E175.5.A1755
Bibliography: p. 291-317.
Adams as a man of letters is considered under
Literature (no. 688-700). Dr. Jordy's concern is
with Adams' conception of "scientific history" as
practiced in his History of the United States (nos.
3274-3275) and later formulated in his Letter to
American Teachers of History (1910). Its pursuit,
however, involves a widespread exploration of
Adams' studies, thought, and character. The
"master key" to the History is found in the positive
philosophy of Auguste Comte. In the Letter's
theory of inevitable degradation, Dr. Jordy thinks,
the "erstwhile Comtist . . . ended his writing career
by turning Comte upside down." In The Mind and
Art of Henry Adams (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1957. 430 p.) Jacob C. Levenson is concerned with
Adams as man of letters, artist, and thinker, but
urges that the only sound approach to these aspects
is through a detailed study of "the first modern
historical scholar in America." Adams' work after
1891 was all stamped by his earlier practice of "the
4.H240— 60 21
craft of history, as the one technical discipline to
which Adams ever fully submitted." The continu-
ity of Adams' second literary career with his first,
and of Mont-Saint-Michel and Chartres and The
Education of Henry Adams with the History of the
United States is not easy to demonstrate, but the
author does his sophisticated best.
3056. Kraus, Michael. A history of American
history. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1937.
607 p. 37-20447 EI75-K-73
3057. Kraus, Michael. The writing of American
history. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1953. 387 p. 53-8S15 E175.K75
These two tides are actually successive editions of
the same book. The later, according to its preface,
"has been rewritten and expanded to carry the study
to date," but the rewriting is relatively minor and
the expansion in the nature of patchwork. On the
other hand, there has been a general reduction of the
original text, and much information concerning the
earlier historians has simply been dropped. The
1937 volume is therefore still useful as the most
comprehensive survey of American historiography
hitherto made. The author's method, ideas, and
style are sufficiendy pedestrian, and there is rather
more quotation from the histories themselves than
is necessary for the purpose, but there is more basic
information concerning the authors and their books
than in any other single work. Old as it is, John
Franklin Jameson's The History of Historical Writ-
ing in America (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1891.
160 p.) contains still pertinent observations, and
affords an introduction as pleasant as it is brief to
the earlier historians. John Spencer Bassett's The
Middle Group of American Historians (New York,
Macmillan, 1917. 324 p.) contains, along with brief
treatments of lesser writers, objective if somewhat
condescending descriptions of the life and work of
Jeremy Belknap, George Bancroft, Jared Sparks,
and Peter Force, regarded as the major figures of
"the old school [that] came to its end with the advent
of the critical spirit." Wendell Holmes Stephen-
son's The South Lives in History (Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1955. 163 p.)
includes a general review of historical scholarship
concerned with the region, detailed studies of
William E. Dodd, Ulrich B. Phillips, and Walter
Lynwood Fleming, and an exceptionally thorough
and valuable "Essay on Authorities."
3058. The Marcus W. Jerncgan essays in American
historiography, by his former students at the
University of Chicago. Edited by William T.
Hutchinson. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
'937- 4'7 P- 38"27 Ei7vvM;:
306 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Contents. — George Bancroft, by Watt Stewart. —
Richard Hildreth, by A. H. Kelly. — Francis Park-
man, by J. P. Smith. — Hermann Eduard von Hoist,
by C. R. Wilson. — James Schouler, by L. E. Ellis. —
Woodrow Wilson, by L. M. Sears. — John Bach Mc-
Master, by W. T. Hutchinson. — John Fiske, by
J. B. Sanders. — James Ford Rhodes, by R. C.
Miller. — Henry Adams, by H. S. Commager. —
Alfred Thayer Mahan, by J. W. Pratt. — Theodore
Roosevelt, by H. J. Thornton. — Frederick Jackson
Turner, by Avery Craven. — Herbert Levi Osgood,
by E. C. O. Beatty. — Edward Channing, by R. R.
Fahrney. — George Louis Beer, by A. P. Scott. —
Clarence Walworth Alvord, by Marion Dargan,
jr. — Claude Halstead Van Tyne, by P. G. David-
son.— Ulrich Bonnell Phillips, by Wood Gray. —
Albert J. Beveridge, by T. E. Strevey. — Vernon
Louis Parrington, by W. T. Utter.
Professor Jernegan was one of the first to offer a
graduate seminar in American historiography. His
pupils have shown their appreciation in these in-
formative and documented essays, from 10 to 27
pages in length, concerning 21 American historians
whose work is finished, and who were mainly con-
cerned with United States history prior to 1865.
Another four studies, including Charles Hirschfeld's
"Edward Eggleston, Pioneer in Social History," ap-
pear in Historiography and Urbanization; Essays in
American History in Honor of W. Stull Holt, edited
by Eric F. Goldman (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1941. 220 p.).
3059. National Council for the Social Studies. The
study and teaching of American history.
Richard E. Thursfield, editor. Washington, 1947.
xviii, 442 p. (Its Yearbook, 17th, 1946)
31-6192 H62.A1N3, no. 17
The National Council, the department of social
studies of the National Education Association, offers
this symposium primarily to secondary-school but
also to elementary-school and college teachers, in
order to improve the teaching and study of Ameri-
can history "as the essential core of any program for
intelligent American citizenship in this interde-
pendent world." Section 2 has chapters by six
historians on the "Newer Interpretations and Em-
phases in American History," while Section 3 dis-
cusses the relations of American history to the other
social studies and other school subjects. The four
concluding sections are more directly concerned with
pedagogical techniques: the articulation of American
history with the several school grades, teaching
methods and materials, "evaluation" and tests, and
teacher training.
3060. Nye, Russel B. George Bancroft, Brahmin
rebel. New York, Knopf, 1944. x, 340, xii p.
44-6406 E175.5.B196
Bibliography: p. [j24]-340.
George Bancroft (1800-1891) published the 12
volumes of his History of the United States, from the
discovery of America to the establishment of govern-
ment under the Constitution, through 5 eventful
decades of the Republic (1834-82). Written in an
exuberant style, and pervaded by a robust faith in
the Providential mission of the United States as the
embodiment of liberty, democracy, and civilized
progress, it brought its author immediate fame at
home and abroad. Prof. Nye's life of the historian,
which won a Pulitzer prize in biography, is based
on the two main collections of Bancroft's manu-
scripts as well as his published writings, and empha-
sizes as much as his history his political and diplo-
matic career, and his influence as the thinker who,
perhaps, "caught the spirit of his age best."
3061. Parker, Donald Dean. Local history; how
to gather it, write it, and publish it. Rev.
and edited by Bertha E. Josephson for the Commit-
tee on Guide for Study of Local History of the Social
Science Research Council, [n. p.] 1944. xiv, 186 p.
A45-1091 E175.7.P3
Bibliography: p. 179-186.
The tide page's authorship statement does duty
for a rather more complex origin: the Committee
discovered that Dr. Parker of the South Dakota
College of Agriculture had already prepared an
appropriate manuscript, which they proceeded to
adapt and expand into harmony with their own
purposes, with Rodney Loeher and Richard H.
Shryock as well as Miss Josephson supplying some
writing or rewriting. The objective of the Council
is to stimulate the writing of sound local history, as
supplying essential materials for social science, and,
since professionally trained historians are likely to be
absorbed by larger themes, to supply laymen with a
body of practical rules and suggestions for recording
the significant past of their own communities. The
three parts are concerned with gathering materials,
from books in libraries to inscriptions on grave-
stones, with the processes of taking and organizing
notes and of writing and documenting a text, and
with various means of publishing and of obtaining
community cooperation. Chapter 8, largely the
work of Dr. Shryock, is "A Model [i. e., exhaustive]
Outline for a Local History."
3062. Saveth, Edward N., ed. Understanding the
American past; American history and its
interpretation. Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 613 p.
53-7320 E178.6.S3 1954
GENERAL HISTORY / 307
A carefully organized essay on the periods and
types of American historiography precedes 30 selec-
tions from recent writers which the editor regards as
outstanding interpretations of some topic or figure.
To each of these he contributes an introduction indi-
cating its place in the professional discussion of the
subject. The result is an anthology affording an
unusually clear perspective of its field. The Maying
of American History, edited by Donald H. Sheehan,
2d ed. enl. (New York, Dryden Press, 1954. 2 v.
(912 p.)) presents rather longer extracts from 34
historians from Parton and Parkman to Henry K.
David and C. Vann Woodward, but has less of a
positive contribution on the part of the compiler.
3063. Schellenberg, Theodore R. Modern
archives: principles and techniques.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1956. 247 p.
56-58525 CD950.S3
In the United States the archival profession has
achieved self-consciousness and influence only since
the establishment of the National Archives in 1934,
followed by the organization of the Society of Ameri-
can Archivists in 1937 and the inauguration of its
quarterly organ, The American Archivist, in the
next year. During 1954 Dr. Schellenberg, Director
of Archival Management at the National Archives,
served as Fulbright lecturer in Australia, and there
became concerned with the differences between
American and foreign archival practices. His book
is an outgrowth of his lectures, which he expanded
to fill in a "well-rounded and well-considered state-
ment on the basic principles and techniques of
managing" modern public records — the first sys-
tematic American book on the subject. An intro-
ductory part considers the nature and relationships
of archives and archival institutions. Part 2 is con-
cerned with record management — the production,
organization, and control of public records in the
agency where they originate, as well as the policies
that govern the disposal of noncurrent records.
Part 3 expounds archival management, first in its
essential conditions, and then in the principles
governing its several functions: appraisal of poten-
tial accessions, physical preservation, arrangement
of record groups and of the items within groups,
finding aids and other descriptions, publications, and
reference services to Government and public.
3064. Scott, Franklin D., and Elaine Teigler, eds.
Guide to the American Historical Review,
1895-1945; a subject-classified explanatory bibliog-
raphy of the articles, notes and suggestions, and
documents. With a foreword by Guy Stanton Ford.
In American Historical Association. Annual report.
1944; v. 1. Washington, 1945. p. 65-292.
46-25831 E172.A60 1944, v. 1
The American Historical Review was established
in 1895 by an ad hoc meeting held in New York City,
and was at first controlled by a coopting Board of
Editors and financed by an Association of Guaran-
tors. Two years later it entered into a contractual
relationship with the American Historical Associa-
tion, which did not acquire ownership until 1916.
It has, nevertheless, since its foundation been the
major periodical of the historical profession in the
United States, and it has from the first issue aimed
at the widest possible representation of all ages,
areas, and aspects of human history. In the present
Guide, American history occupies 82 pages, Euro-
pean and Near Eastern history 76 pages, and all
other areas and varieties 50 pages. Nearly every
American historical scholar of any eminence has
contributed at least one article to its pages, and it
supplies a reliable indication of changes in the pre-
vailing subjects, ideas, and techniques among aca-
demic historians. The present Guide to the first
half-century of the Review, prepared over a period
of years by Professor Scott of Northwestern Uni-
versity and his assistant, is arranged in subject sec-
tions, and in an order "roughly chronological by
content" within each, so that the Review's contribu-
tion to any period or topic is easily discerned. The
entries for articles are provided with abstracts "in-
tended to guide readers to the articles they wish to
consult, not to compress the entire content," and
there is a 7-page index of authors. The early history
of the journal is charmingly narrated by its first and
greatest editor, John Franklin Jameson, in an article
contributed to the Review for its 25th anniversary:
"The American Historical Review, 1895-1920," v.
26, Oct. 1920, p. 1— 17.
3065. Social Science Research Council. Committee
on Historiography. Theory and practice in
historical study: a report of the Committee on
Historiography. New York, Social Science Research
Council, 1946. 177 p. ([Social Science Research
Council] Bulletin 54, 1946) 46-3597 D13.S6
Contents. — Foreword, by Merle Curti. — Grounds
for a reconsideration of historiography, by C. A.
Beard. — Controlling assumptions in the practice of
American historians, by J. H. Randall, Jr., and
George Haines, IV. — What historians have said
about the causes of the Civil War, by H. K. Beale.
Bibliography (p. 93-102). — Problems of termin-
ology in historical writing: Note on the need for
greater precision in the use of historical terms, by
C. A. Beard. Illustrations, by Sidney Hook. —
Propositions. — Selective reading list on historiog-
raphy and the philosophy of history, by Ronald
Thompson.
308 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
This report is the result of conferences and corre-
spondence by a representative group of American
historians seeking to arrive at agreement on the
nature of their discipline as revealed by its relations
with other fields in the social science area. The 21
"Propositions" (p. 133-140) were originally drafted
by Charles A. Beard, but have been modified to
meet the criticism of other historians; with the sup-
porting essays they provide a recent example of co-
operative and systematic thought on the part of the
historical profession in the United States seeking to
clarify its basic ideas and assumptions.
3066. U. S. National Archives. Guide to the rec-
ords in the National Archives. Washington,
U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1948. xvi, 684 p. {Its
Publication no. 49-13)
A49-10088 CD3023.A46 1948
3067. U. S. National Archives. Your Govern-
ment's records in the National Archives.
[Rev. by Bess Glenn under the direction of Philip
M. Hamer and G. Philip Bauer. Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. Off.] 1950. viii, 102 p. [Its Publica-
tion no. 51-4] A51-9171 CD3023.A46 1950
The Federal Government has been accumulating
records since 1774, but during its first 160 years these
were scattered, inadequately described, and under
varying conditions of access or nonaccess. The crea-
tion of a unified National Archives, administering
a coherent policy concerning the preservation and
management of Federal records, was primarily the
achievement of the American Historical Association
and, more than any other individual, of John Frank-
lin Jameson (no. 3045), but it required over a
quarter-century of promotion before the first records
were transferred to the new Archives building at the
end of 1935. The present is the third general Guide
to the records administered by the National
Archives, its predecessors having been issued in 1937
(as part of the Archivist's Third Annual Report)
and in 1940, but it is now seriously out of date. It
describes over 813,000 cubic feet of records arranged
by "Record Groups" in their numerical order; since
this is, in general, the order of their acquisition by
the Archives, it does not make for convenient use.
Your Government's Records, of which a first and
smaller edition appeared in 1946, seeks to "put the
National Archives and its vast store of records in a
nutshell," and is particularly useful in that it ar-
ranges the record groups by branch and department.
Records transferred to the Archives since June 30,
1947, are described in National Archives Accessions,
a periodical supplement to the Guide which at first
was a quarterly, but now appears at irregular inter-
vals.
3068. U. S. National Historical Publications Com-
mission. A national program for the publi-
cation of historical documents; a report to the Presi-
dent. Washington, 1954. 106 p.
54-60038 E175.4.A417
"A selective list of documentary historical publi-
cations of the United States Government": p. 98-106.
The publication of volume 1 of The Papers of
Thomas Jefferson (no. 3292) on May 17, 1950, was
marked by President Truman's announcement that
he had instructed the National Historical Publica-
tions Commission to report on the possibility of
further enterprises of like thoroughness and scholar-
ship. This document, prepared by the Executive
Director of the Commission, Dr. Philip M. Hamer,
presents the results of nearly four years of consulta-
tion and planning, and reflects the tremendous
stimulus given to documentary publications by Dr.
Julian P. Boyd's example and President Truman's
initiative. As a result of the Commission's recom-
mendations, major editions of the complete papers
of Franklin, J. and J. Q. Adams, Madison, and
Hamilton have been handsomely endowed. The
Commission's plans for its own documentary histo-
ries of the ratification of the Constitution and the
Bill of Rights, and of the First Congress of the
United States (1789-91), are here set forth.
3069. Wade, Mason. Francis Parkman, heroic
historian. New York, Viking Press, 1942.
466 p. 42-25856 E175.5.P28
"Bibliographical note": p. 453-456.
Parkman's prose epic of the French Empire in
North America is no. 3171 below; this biography
emphasizes "the heroic virtues: courage, self-reliance,
perseverance, austerity, modesty," which went into
its making, as its author struggled against the
physical breakdown brought on by overdriving him-
self in his youth. Before his nervous and visual
collapse in 1847, Parkman ( 1823-1893) had roughed
it in the woods of New England and New York,
toured Western Europe, and made two journeys
into the American West, the second of which in-
cluded his famous sojourn in a Sioux village (no.
3348). Mr. Wade quotes extensively from Park-
man's own travel records here, and has presented
them at length in his edition of The Journals of
Francis Par\man (New York, Harper, 1947. 2 v.
(xxv, 718 p.)). The remainder of the book tells
how Parkman lost and regained the power to work,
and then turned his handicaps into assets: having to
digest his materials in his mind, he achieved a tighter
organization of his narrative; and, employing his
sleepless nights in mental composition, he arrived at
a style at once economical, fluent, and muscular.
GENERAL HISTORY / 309
B. General Works
3070. Aaron, Daniel, ed. America in crisis; four-
teen crucial episodes in American history.
New York, Knopf, 1952. 363 p.
51-13214 E178.6.A17
Probably 14 other episodes equally "crucial" could
be selected, but these were the examples chosen at
Bennington College in 1949-50 "for an experimental
course designed to bring out the role and operation
of values in American history." Each is a concise
but serious attempt at interpretation of a striking
event, from the Great Awakening of the 1740's to
the Nazi-Soviet Pact of 1939, by an authority in the
field.
3071. Adams, James Truslow, ed. Dictionary of
American history; James Truslow Adams,
editor in chief; R. V. Coleman, managing editor.
2d ed. rev. New York, Scribner, 1942. 5 v.
44-1876 E174.A43 1942
Index. New York, Scribner, 1942.
258 p. E174.A43 1942 Index
3072. Morris, Richard B., ed. Encyclopedia of
American history. New York, Harper, 1953.
xv, 776 p. maps, diagrs. 53-5384 E174.5.M847
The Scribner Dictionary was begun in 1936 and
first published in 1940; it bears the name of J. T.
Adams, a historical popularizer of the interwar
decades, but was largely the work of Roy V. Cole-
man and his staff, as well as "more than a thousand
historians" to whom the 6,000 articles were farmed
out. After 17 years it remains an indispensable
work of reference, and the easiest first approach to
many or most topics in the history of the United
States from the discoveries down to the eve of World
War II. It has the advantage of ready reference
conferred by the alphabetical arrangement of its
articles, and the inconveniences of such an arrange-
ment applied to a subject matter which orders itself
according to geography and chronology. The arti-
cles vary in length from four or five lines ("Assini-
boine, Fort") to three or four pages ("Civil War"),
and nearly all have from one to six references at the
end. A number of serious errors remain uncorrected
even in the second edition. The valuable Atlas
supplementary to this Dictionary has been separately
listed in Chapter VI (no. 2967). Professor Morris'
Encyclopedia is not greatly less comprehensive, and
is an object-lesson in the quantity of information
that may be crammed within a single pair of covers
by intelligent organization, condensation, and book
design. Here the material is arranged into a basic
chronological section — the mainstream of national
history — and six topical chronologies covering Ex-
pansion, Population and Immigration, the Constitu-
tion, the Economy, Science and Invention, and
Thought and Culture. Three hundred brief biog-
raphies are alphabetically arranged, and there is a
40-page index with three columns to the page.
3073. Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The
rise of American civilization. New York,
Macmillan, 1927. 2 v. 27-9541 E169.1.B32
These thick volumes by one of the best-known
Americans and his accomplished wife, Mary Ritter
Beard (b. 1876), are a conscious attempt to return to
the history of civilization, albeit within a single
nation, as it was understood by Voltaire in the 18th
century and by Henry Thomas Buckle in the 19th.
Ever since its publication The Rise of American
Civilization has won the highest encomiums from
professional historians and laymen alike; critics of
the highest qualifications have used such phrases as
"the high-water mark of modern historic presenta-
tion in America," and "the most brilliant historical
survey of the American scene." Certainly few read-
able works have ever been so successful in incorpo-
rating so much economic, social, and intellectual
detail into a coherent general narrative. It remains
true that the presentation is uncommonly fluid and
formless, rendering the book relatively unserviceable
for systematic students or classroom use. Written
at a time when Dr. Beard had abandoned the ex-
tremer tenets of his economic interpretation, it takes
a moderate view of the movement eventuating in
the Constitution, but it gives a strong economic color-
ing to its account of the Civil War. Volume I is
"The Agricultural Era" and Volume II "The In-
dustrial Era," and the transition between them is
effected by "The Second American Revolution" of
1861-65. This is viewed as the irrepressible conflict
between two phases of society which overthrew the
custodians of the old order, as the Southern planter
aristocracy had constituted themselves, and effected
a permanent shift of the center of political gravity
in American society. The discussion of military
matters is always jejune, :in<l some readers will leel
that the views and actions of leading American
statesmen are regularly looked it through the wrong
end of the telescope. Mrs. Beard saw to it that the
circumstances of American women were given a
larger place than is common in general histories.
310 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The same publishers issued a two-volumes-in-one
reprint in 1930. The narrative, which comes down
to 1926, was continued on an even larger scale in
America in Mid-Passage (no. 3479).
3074. Billington, Ray Allen. Westward expan-
sion, a history of the American frontier,
by Ray Allen Billington with the collaboration of
James Blaine Hedges. New York, Macmillan, 1949.
873 p. 49-3°99 E179.5.B63
"Bibliographical note": p. 757-834.
Professor Hedges, a pupil of F. J. Turner, was to
have collaborated in a joint enterprise, but was pre-
vented by circumstances from contributing more
than three chapters and a critical reading of the
manuscript. The book was planned "to follow
the pattern that Frederick Jackson Turner might
have used had he ever compressed his voluminous
researches on the American frontier within one
volume," and Professor Billington explains that it
is not a work of primary research, but "a synthesis
of thousands of pages of writings — in texts, mono-
graphs, and learned journals — inspired by Profes-
sor Turner's original essays." "The Frontier Hy-
pothesis" itself, and the criticisms it has encountered
since 1925, are considered in Chapter 1 and the cor-
responding part of the bibliography, with the con-
clusion that these "modified, but did not refute,
[Turner's] basic doctrine." Both the text, which
covers the whole period 1 492-1 896, and the thor-
oughly annotated bibliography are well-nigh en-
cyclopedic in their inclusiveness, and the text is
studded with numerous small maps.
3075. Bolton, Herbert E. Wider horizons of
American history. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1939. xv, 191 p. (Appleton-Century
historical essays) 39-13861 E18.B75
Contents. — The epic of greater America. — De-
fensive Spanish expansion and the significance of
the borderlands. — The Mission as a frontier institu-
tion in the Spanish-American colonies. — The Black
Robes [Jesuits] of New Spain.
Essays advancing and illustrating the author's
characteristic view that the broad phases of United
States history are "common to most portions of the
entire Western Hemisphere," and that "much of
what has been written of each national history is
but a thread out of a larger strand." The first essay
"sketches in broad outline some of these larger
aspects of New World history"; the others are "gen-
eralized treatments of special aspects of Western
Hemisphere genesis" introduced in the first essay.
3076. Carruth, Gorton. The encyclopedia of
American facts and dates, edited by Gorton
Carruth and associates. New York, Crowell, 1956.
708 p. (A Crowell reference book)
56-7789 E174.5.C3
3077. Kull, Irving S., and Nell M. Kull. A short
chronology of American history, 1492-1950.
New Brunswick, Rutgers University Press, 1952.
388 p. 52-9371 E174.5.K8
Mr. Carruth's compilation is also a chronology,
from 986 A. D. to 1955, and both volumes are ex-
tremely useful in diverse ways. The Kulls list
some 10,000 events, largely in political, social, and
economic history, in a single series, tersely and with
little elucidation of the individual event; a supple-
mentary volume to have been devoted to "the large
field of cultural and intellectual history" has not
appeared. The Encyclopedia lists its events in four
parallel columns, devoted to politics, the arts, eco-
nomic, scientific, and educational developments,
and to sport and entertainment. Events are fre-
quently elucidated at some length, with glances
before and after, and from 1932 on each annual
column opens with a kind of profile of the year in
its spheres. The 116-page index of the Encyclopedia
and the 90-page index of the Chronology add greatly
to the reference value of each volume.
3078. Clark, Dan Elbert. The West in American
history. New York, Crowell, 1937. 682 p.
37-4445 E178.C57
"Bibliographical notes": p. [627]-654.
Professor Clark wrote his survey of "the impor-
tant features of the history of the West as a whole,"
from the expedition of Panfilo de Narvaez (1527)
to the "passing of the frontier" about 1890, both
for college use and for the general reader. It did
not catch on as a college text, but remains a quite
readable volume in which parts 2 and 3, from 1783
to the end, are organized topically, "with chapters
arranged as nearly as possible in the order in which
the subjects and problems with which they deal
arose in the process of western settlement." The
absence of footnote references is compensated for
by a substantial bibliography arranged according
to the 37 chapters of the book.
3079. Commager, Henry Steele, ed. Documents
of American history. 5th ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1949. xxiii, 450, 759 p.
(Crofts American history series)
49-49474 E173.C66 1949
This collection of original source materials for
American history, reprinted in full or in extract,
has enjoyed a wider use in college courses than any
similar compilation since its original publication
in 1934. The fifth edition contains 589 separate
documents, each provided with a title, a reference to
GENERAL HISTORY / 3II
the source from which it was derived, a brief in-
troduction in smaller type, and, in most cases, a
few references for further study. Professor Com-
mager states that he has tried to limit his "selection
to documents of an official and quasi-official charac-
ter," but that he has not been completely consistent.
Many important documents, he explains, have been
omitted because they could not be included in ex-
tenso, and he was "not able to achieve a satisfactory
condensation." In the fifth edition he was able
to add 19 documents only by omitting 16 of those
in the fourth, which is presumably why his text-
book has remained unchanged since 1949. The
practice of reprinting comparatively brief documents
or other sources for students of American history
began with the publication of the Old South Leaflets
from 1883; the first collection in book, form was
Albert Bushnell Hart's four-volume American His-
tory Told by Contemporaries (New York, Mac-
millan, 1897-1901; a supplementary fifth volume
was added in 1929). The carefully delimited com-
pilations of William MacDonald, Select Charters
and Other Documents Illustrative of American His-
tory, 1 606-1 7 7 5; Select Documents Illustrative of
the History of the United States, ijj6-i86i; and
Select Statutes and Other Documents Illustrative
of the History of the United States, 1861-1898 (New
York, Macmillan, 1899 (401 p.), 1898 (465 p.),
1903 (442 p.)) have a continuing value because of
that quality. Since Professor Commager's last re-
vision, Avery O. Craven, Walter Johnson, and
Frederick Roger Dunn have compiled A Docu-
mentary History of the American People (Boston,
Ginn, 1951. xxiii, 872 p.), the 250 readings of which
include interpretive essays by historians and others
as well as primary sources, and Oscar Handlin has
edited Readings in American History (New York,
Knopf, 1957. xxvi, 715, v p.), with 465 relatively
brief and largely nondocumentary pieces arranged
in 50 topical sections. Richard D. Heffner's A
Documentary History of the United States, ex-
panded ed. ([New York] New American Library,
1956. 303 p. A Mentor book, MD78) calls for
mention as presenting a large amount of basic ma-
terial at a very small price. A very informative dis-
cussion by Wallace Evan Davies, "From Sources
to Problems: A Guide to Outside Readings," ap-
peared in the American Quarterly, v. 7, summer
1956, p. 127-146; and a review article by Robert
J. Taylor, "Inexpensive Source Materials in Early
American History," calling attention to a surpris-
ingly large group of recent paperback publications,
appeared in The William and Mary Quarterly, 3d
ser., v. 15, Jan. 1958, p. 95-1 10.
3080. Dictionary of American biography, published
under the auspices of the American Council
of Learned Societies. New York, Scribner, 1943.
21 v. 44-41895 E176.D562
Index: volumes 1-20. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1943. 613 p. E176.D562 Index
Appleton's Cyclopaedia of American Biography,
edited by James Grant Wilson and John Fiskc, was
originally published in 6 volumes in 1886-89. A
useful reference work in its day, it still has value
in carrying individuals whose reputation has since
suffered an eclipse, and in giving short notices of
the sons or other close relatives of important per-
sons, whose limited but respectable achievements are
often hard to trace. Appleton's was, however, never
a completely dependable work — one ingenious
forger contributed a whole series of quite fictitious
lives — and it had no citations to sources of informa-
tion, primary or secondary. It was shordy quite
overshadowed by the British Dictionary of National
Biography, originally published in 63 volumes be-
tween 1885 and 1 90 1, which was undertaken by a
commercial publishing house but carried out in
accordance with the best scholarly standards of the
day. After its completion two decades elapsed be-
fore it proved possible to set on foot an American
enterprise on the same level. The American Coun-
cil of Learned Societies was organized in 1919, and
in 1922 appointed a committee of six scholars,
headed by Dr. J. Franklin Jameson, to plan such a
work. The committee eventually found a sponsor
in Adolph S. Ochs of the New Yor\ Times, who
made available $50,000 a year for ten years, and
enabled editorial work to begin in 1926. The first
editor, Allen Johnson of Yale University, fell a
victim to Washington traffic in 1931, but had com-
pleted six volumes and established the production
of the work on firm principles. His assistant editor,
Dumas Malone of the University of Virginia,
brought the Dictionary to a triumphant conclusion
with the publication of volume XX in 1936. The
following year the publishers added an index vol-
ume, with sections on the 13,633 subjects of biog-
raphies; the 2,243 contributors; the subjects ar-
ranged by state or country of birth, by school or
college attended, and by occupation; and distinctive
topics discussed in the biographies. Supplement I,
which appeared under the editorship of Harris E.
Starr in 1944, contains 652 additional biographies,
largely of persons whose deaths occurred between
the original selections and the end of 1935, but also
of some whose memoirs "failed to be included in
the earlier volumes, although their inclusion would
have been appropriate." Nineteen pages of errata
may be found at the beginning of volume I of this
reprint edition of 1943, rarer in libraries than the
original issue. A second supplement, including
persons whose deaths occurred before the end of
1940, has been announced for publication in 1958.
312 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The Dictionary has received some criticism, but
most of it springs from the appetite for more and
more dependable brief biographies which the Dic-
tionary itself has created. The "D. A. B." will long
remain a standard work of first resort for the
student and scholar in the American field. Marion
Dargan's Guide to American Biography [1607-
1933] (Albuquerque, University of New Mexico
Press, 1949-52. 2 v. in 1) is a convenient bio-
bibliography of the eminent, which annotates some
tides, and gives special attention to brief biographies
and volumes of biographical sketches.
3081. Faulkner, Harold U. A visual history of
the United States. Illustrated by Graphics
Institute. New York, H. Schuman, 1953. 199 p.
53-10368 E178.5.F3
The only book which consistently applies the
new technique of "graphics" — the expression of all
ideas primarily in pictographs with language used
to supplement or expand — to the whole field of
American history. It grew out of an Army educa-
tion program during World War II, which called
for a number of wall charts based on one of Profes-
sor Faulkner's textbooks; after the war Graphics
Institute decided to proceed with "a comprehensive
visual history," which was eight years in prepara-
tion, and for which Faulkner became the historical
adviser and writer. The book's primary content is
76 "graphic idea layouts" planned by the Director
of the Institute, Herbert Rosenthal, and largely
drawn by Mel Bernstein; red and black ink are
used, permitting five contrasting shades including
white, gray, and pink. The "graphics" are of three
main types: maps, charts for quantitative summaries,
and simplified multiple cartoons for idea situations
such as "Factors for and against a Successful War
of Independence," or "The March of Fascism, 1922-
1939." Anachronisms and inaccuracies can be
found in the graphics, but are few and minor. The
subject matter is arranged in nine units, partly
chronological, such as "Division and Reunion," and
partly topical, such as "Intellectual and Cultural
Life." The volume affords a good introduction to
American history for the visually minded, and has
matter of interest even for the well-informed.
3082. Gabriel, Ralph Henry. The lure of the
frontier; a story of race conflict. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1929. 327 p. (The Pageant
of America [v. 2]) 29-22308 E178.5.P2, v. 2
E179.5.G13
The expansion of the American people from 1670,
when Dr. John Lederer climbed the Blue Ridge
and gazed at the lands beyond, to the Klondike Gold
Rush of 1896-97, organized around a sequence of
illustrations, usually two to a page. They are regu-
larly as well chosen as they are dismally reproduced,
and are thoroughly explained by the accompany-
ing text. A number of maps drawn or redrawn
for this volume by Gregor Noetzel and others do
provide very clear illustrations of individual situa-
tions in the movement of expansion. The circum-
stance that this volume was sold only with complete
sets of The Pageant of America has kept it from
enjoying a far wider usefulness than it has actually
achieved.
3083. Handlin, Oscar, and others. Harvard guide
to American history. Cambridge, Mass.,
Belknap Press, 1954. xxiv, 689 p.
53-5066 Z1236.H27
In 1896 two Harvard professors of history, Ed-
ward Channing and Albert Bushnell Hart, issued a
Guide to the Study of American History (Boston,
Ginn. xvi, 471 p.) in order to "introduce readers to
the evolving methods and growing literature of the
historical discipline." That literature grew and
grew, and 16 years later Frederick Jackson Turner,
who came from the University of Wisconsin to
Harvard in 1910, joined them in a revised and
augmented edition, Guide to the Study and Read-
ing of American History (Boston, Ginn, 1912. xvi,
650 p.), which remained the standard work of the
kind for over four decades, although during the
later ones its increasing inadequacy was universally
recognized and deplored. It required a team of six
Harvard historians — the Arthur Meier Schlesingers
Senior and Junior, Samuel Eliot Morison, Frederick
Merk, and Paul Herman Buck in addition to Pro-
fessor Handlin (whose name is deservedly first,
since he and Mrs. Mary F. Handlin undertook the
labor of getting the volume through the press) —
to bring out the third and present version, which
was announced for publication more than once be-
fore its actual appearance. With a few exceptions,
imprints later than 1950 are not listed. Of the
three parts of the Harvard Guide, the first is a
series of 66 essays and special lists on the more
general aspects of American historical study, such
as "Principles of Historical Criticism," "The Me-
chanics of Citation," "Guides to Manuscript Ma-
terials," "Bibliographies of American History," and
"Scholarly Uses of Historical Fiction" (a very skill-
ful classification by the elder Schlesinger). The
second part is a sequence of 211 bibliographical sec-
tions, primarily chronological and secondarily top-
ical, covering American history from prehistoric
times to 1953. Each section is divided into "Sum-
mary" (a brief outline of the subject), "General
Works," "Special Works" (including many pe-
riodical articles), "Sources," and "Bibliography"
(other lists of reference). The third part is a large
index filling 143 double-column pages, which re-
GENERAL HISTORY / 313
fers only to the principal entry for a work and
ignores the repetitions in more abbreviated form.
The student who can afford only one reference
book in general American history would find this
his natural choice.
3084. Hicks, John D., and George E. Mowry. A
short history of American democracy. 2d ed.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1956. 854, Ixxv p.
56-2751 E178.1.H56 1956
Bibliographies at end of chapters.
Most college textbooks in American history now
come in two volumes under multiple authorship;
Professor Hicks' one-volume survey, originally pub-
lished in 1943, has acquired a joint author in its
third revision. As in nearly all such works, recent
history is expanded at the expense of the remoter
past: the period 1928-55 receives approximately
the same number of pages as 1607-1815. The art
staff of Houghton Mifflin has supplied abundant
illustrations from contemporary sources and numer-
ous small maps of great clarity, and the chapter
bibliographies are uncommonly full and effectively
organized.
3085. A History of American life, edited by Arthur
Meier Schlesinger and Dixon Ryan Fox.
New York, Macmillan, 1927-48. 13 v. E169.1.H67
The Library has classified other sets, in which
most of the volumes have later imprints without
change of text, as E169.1.H672 and E169.1.H673.
"Critical essay on authorities" in each volume.
3086. Vol. 1. The coming of the white man,
1492-1848, by Herbert Ingram Priestley.
1929. xx, 411 p. 29-17105 E178.P94
3087. Vol. 2. The first Americans, 1 607-1 690, by
Thomas Jefferson Wertenbaker. 1927. xx,
358 p. 27-24317 E191.W5
3088. Vol. 3. Provincial society, 1 690-1 763, by
James Truslow Adams. 1927. xvii, 374 p.
27-24316 E195.A22
3089. Vol. 4. The revolutionary generation, 1763-
1790, by Evarts Boutell Greene. 1943. xvii,
487 p. 43-16080 E320.1.G82
3090. Vol. 5. The completion of independence,
1790-1830, by John Allen Krout and Dixon
Ryan Fox. 1944. xxiii, 487 p.
44-51219 E301.K7
3091. Vol.6. The rise of the common man, 1830-
1850, by Carl Russell Fish. 1927. xix, 391 p.
27-24315 E338.F53
•1.! 1240—60 22
3092. Vol. 7. The irrepressible conflict, 1850-
1865, by Arthur Charles Cole. 1934. xv,
468 p. 34-5502 E415.7.C69
3093. Vol. 8. The emergence of modern America,
1 865-1 878, by Allan Nevins. 1927. xix,
446 p. 27-24314 E661.X5
3094. Vol. 9. The nationalizing of business, 1878-
1898, by Ida M. Tarbell. 1936. xvi, 313 p.
36-28986 HC105.T3
3095. Vol. 10. The rise of the city, 1 878-1 898,
by Arthur Meier Schlesinger. 1933. xvi,
494 P- 33-2887 HT123.S3
3096. Vol. 11. The quest for social justice, 1898—
1914, by Harold Underwood Faulkner.
1931. xvii, 390 p. 3I~5574 E741.F26
3097. Vol. 12. The great crusade and after, 1914-
1928, by Preston William Slosson. 1930.
xviii, 486 p. 30-22386 E741.S63
3098. Vol. 13. The age of the great depression,
1929-1941, by Dixon Wecter. 1948. xiv,
434 p. 48-10172 E806.W43 1948a
This series was the first large-scale attempt to
present the development of the United States through
the canons of "the New History" or social history,
for which an energetic propaganda had been made
in the two decades before 1927. In it the four
standard themes of traditional historiography-
political, constitutional, diplomatic, and military
narrative — were by design either eliminated or sub-
ordinated to economic, social, and intellectual fac-
tors. Inasmuch as the latter are less amenable to
storytelling, description or analysis becomes at least
as prominent as narrative. The editors of the ven-
ture were the elder Arthur Meier Schlesinger (b.
1888), professor of history at Harvard from 1924
to 1954, whose New Viewpoints (no. 3139) was one
of the best-known presentations of the new oudook,
and Dixon Ryan Fox (1887-1945), a teacher of
history at Columbia from 1913 to 1934, in which
year he became president of Union College at
Schenectady, N. Y., leaving his volume of the series
to be completed by another hand. The series was
originally planned to comprise 12 volumes, of which
4 were published together in November 1927, and
6 more appeared in the course of the following
decade. The two stragglers were issued during
World War II, and a 1 }th volume, continuing the
scries to the outbreak of that War, added in 1948.
The volumes of the series were usually hailed with
enthusiasm on their first appearance, and most of
the authors carried out their pioneer tasks with in-
314 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
dustry, intelligence, and zeal. Several decades of use
have led many to conclude that the volumes are
lacking in cohesiveness, frequently fall into mere
cataloging, and in quality vary rather widely from
chapter to chapter. One critic pointed out that the
division into periods defined by political dates was
a basic inconsistency. But if they did not arrive
at a definitive form for social history, they certainly
constituted a great advance in its practice. The
illustrations from contemporary sources are critically
handled if inadequately reproduced, and the bibliog-
raphies are uncommonly full and well organized
and annotated.
3099. Hofstadter, Richard. The American politi-
cal tradition and the men who made it. New
York, Knopf, 1948. xi, 378, xviii p.
48-8258 E178.H727 1948
These 12 "studies in the ideology of American
statesmanship," as the author terms them, form an
unusual and striking synthesis of the history of po-
litical and economic ideas with that of practical
politics. One takes its title from a patrician "agi-
tator," Wendell Phillips, and two others from groups
of politicians, the Founding Fathers, and the "Spoils-
men" of the Gilded Age. The remainder are con-
cerned with the ideas and careers of nine prominent
statesmen from Jefferson to F. D. Roosevelt, all but
two of whom (Calhoun and Bryan, who tried hard
enough) reached the Presidency. They all, Pro-
fessor Hofstadter insists, shared a common politico-
economic creed, the tenets of which included the
sanctity of private property, the value of opportunity,
the necessity of competition to a beneficial social
order, and the obligation of politics to preserve the
competitive scheme. Since the time of Bryan, "pro-
gressive" thought has looked backwards, trying to
undo the mischief of the recent past "and re-create
the old nation of limited and decentralized power,
genuine competition, democratic opportunity, and
enterprise." The implied criticism is not developed
into a positive doctrine. The author is a master
of pertinent quotation from primary sources, and
his admirable "Bibliographical Essay" (p. 349-378)
reveals the vast reading out of which his shapely
essays have come.
3100. Leopold, Richard W., and Arthur S. Link,
eds. Problems in American history. 2d ed.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1957. xxi,
706 p. 57-6544 E178.L5 1957
Along with Potter and Manning (no. 3106) and
the Amherst multivolume Problems series (no.
3107), this represents the newer tendency in source-
books for college courses in history, wherein the
extracts, mostly from contemporary writings, are
organized so as to "provide conflicting and contrast-
ing points of view on major events and contro-
versies," as the present editors put it, and so to make
their materials more meaningful for the pupil.
Here the editors have recruited 20 specialists able
to draw on firsthand research, each of whom pre-
sents one of "20 closely integrated problems," "a
complex of debates that evolve, the one out of the
other, into the vast panorama of American history."
They range from "The Sources of [Political] Au-
thority," presented by Edmund S. Morgan, to
"Global War and Postwar Crisis," by L. Ethan Ellis,
but as usual in recent textbooks, the earlier develop-
ment is slighted, 1829 and "Jacksonian Democracy"
being reached in Problem 6. For reasons not ex-
plained, the contributors have been led to avoid
"formal documents, such as statutes, treaties, court
decisions, and diplomatic notes" — which certainly
underlines one of the hazards of this approach. The
original edition appeared in 1952; in the second the
"focus" of many of the problems has been sharp-
ened by revision or recasting; each has been short-
ened by about one-fourth, resulting in a volume of
706 instead of 929 pages; and three substitutions of
new authors and problems have been made.
3101. Lillard, Richard G. American life in auto-
biography, a descriptive guide. Stanford,
Calif., Stanford University Press, 1956. 140 p.
56-8689 Z5301.L66
An annotated bibliography of over 400 selected
American autobiographies arranged in 22 occupa-
tional categories, and provided with an index of
names and with special lists of the authors who are
immigrants, Indians, Jews, or Negroes. The com-
piler aims his notes on matters emphasized, style,
and reader-appeal at "present-day readers of all
sorts." In order to include only books "that library
patrons can get hold of," he has limited his entries
to books published or republished since 1900, and
thereby narrowed the retrospective value of his
guide. His thoughtful introduction analyzes the
weaknesses, strengths, and significance of autobio-
graphical writing: "the better American autobiog-
raphies are structured around a perception of change
on two levels, the social on one and the personal and
intellectual on the other."
3102. Matthews, William. American diaries; an
annotated bibliography of American diaries
written prior to the year 1861, compiled by William
Matthews with the assistance of Roy Harvey Pearce.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1945. xiv,
383 p. (University of California publications in
English, v. 16) A45-1983 PE11.C3, v. 16
Z5305.U5M3
The diary, here defined as "a day-by-day record
of what interested the diarist, each day's record be-
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 315
ing self-contained and written shortly after the
events occurred," is a relatively undistorted record
of human experience whose value has always been
recognized by historians of every aspect of civiliza-
tion. This annotated list of all published American
diaries which were begun between 1629 (the Rev.
Francis Higginson's journal of his voyage to New
England) and the outbreak of the Civil War is a
valuable auxiliary to nearly all branches of Ameri-
can studies. Its usefulness is evidenced by the great
variety of historical and other periodicals, memoirs,
and family histories in which the diaries are printed.
Each diary is listed under the year of its first entry
(alphabetically within the year). The diarist and
his localities are identified, and his major interests
noted, with travel and war naturally predominating,
but by no means to the exclusion of other concerns
in great variety. An index of localities is unfortu-
nately lacking. Professor Matthews of the Uni-
versity of California at Los Angeles has gone on to
elaborate the Canadian materials in this volume in
his Canadian Diaries and Autobiographies (Berke-
ley, University of California Press, 1950. 130 p.),
and to produce kindred lists of British diaries and
autobiographies, but has unfortunately not dealt
with American autobiographies, nor American
diaries beginning later than i860.
3103. Morison, Samuel Eliot, and Henry Steele
Commager. The growth of the American
Republic. [4th ed., rev., and enl.] New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1950. 2 v. maps (part fold.,
part col.) 50-8134 E178.M85 1950
Contents. — v. 1. 1000-1865. Bibliography (p.
[741 ]~ 7^9) — v- 2- 1865-1950. Bibliography (p.
[8291-895).
Morison (b. 1887), a Harvard-trained teacher of
history at Harvard, was the first holder of the first
chair of American history in any British University,
the Harold Vyvyan Harmsworth Professorship at
Oxford. Endowed by Lord Rothermere in memory
of a son fallen in World War I, it was to be filled
only by American citizens. The most enduring
result of Professor Morison's tenure (1922-25) was
his two volumes, The Oxford History of the United
States, 1783-1917 (Oxford and New York, Oxford
University Press, 1927), a narrative the scope and
direction of which, the author wrote, were largely
determined by "the questions asked by my Eng-
lish friends and pupils." This origin was evident
in its strong emphasis upon Anglo-American re-
lations and the campaigns of the Civil War; and
the author's field of concentration could be inferred
from the relatively thin treatment of the half century
after 1865. It nevertheless met with warmer ap-
preciation at home than in Britain, anil three years
later Henry Steele Commager (b. 1902), trained at
Wisconsin and domiciled at New York University,
collaborated with Morison in converting it into a
one-volume college text, incorporating much 19th-
century social history, while the original author
added a preliminary section going back to 1763.
In 1937, following the characteristic evolution of
American historical textbooks, it grew into a two-
volume work, with the second volume brought
down to the election of 1936. The third edition of
1942 "extended the story backward to the origin
of man in America," as well as forward, and the
fourth, entered above, reaches Truman's reelection
in 1948. Despite the numerous patchings, it re-
tains much of the stylistic vitality of the parent work,
and notwithstanding the heaviest competition has
maintained its place as a text for college courses.
Other noteworthy college texts covering the whole
of American history in two volumes are the fol-
lowing: Leland D. Baldwin, The Stream of Ameri-
can History (New York, R. R. Smith, 1952); Harry
J. Carman and Harold C. Syrett, A History of the
American People (New York, Knopf, 1952); Merle
E. Curti, Richard H. Shryock, Thomas C. Cochran,
and Fred Harvey Harrington, An American History
(New York, Harper, 1950); and Robert E. Riegel
and David F. Long, The American Story (New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1955).
3104. Parkes, Henry Bamford. The United States
of America, a history. New York, Knopf,
1953. xvii, 773, xxiv p. illus.
52-12413 E178.P25
Includes bibliographies.
A one-volume college textbook covering the whole
of United States history from "The Expansion of
Europe" to "Society at Mid-Century [1950]."
While political and economic matters are by no
means skimped, numerous chapters are devoted to
social, intellectual, and artistic developments, and
these usually receive clear and concise expositions
instead of the unenlightening catalogs of names and
titles so frequently found in textbooks. Maps and
illustrations are well drafted or chosen, and the
end matter is exceptionally useful.
3105. Paxson, Frederic L. History of the Ameri-
can frontier, 1 763-1 893. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1924. xvii, 598 p. 24-23381 E179.5.P34
"East of the frontier of 1763 the American groups
are best to be examined as European frontiers in
America; west of the line is an American frontier
to be studied in contrast with the East." Professor
Paxson was the first to make a detailed and unified
narrative out of F. J. Turner's famous generaliza-
tion, and pursued his theme through the admission
of the six "omnibus States" in 1889-90. The
Civil War period, however, received relatively
316 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
briefer treatment (p. 494 ff.). Eight years later
Paxson stated his conviction that, "after a genera-
tion of general currency, the Turner hypothesis
stands today as acceptable as when it was launched"
("A Generation of the Frontier Hypothesis, 1893-
1932," reprinted in The Great Demobilization and
Other Essays. Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 194 1. 206 p.).
3106. Potter, David M., and Thomas G. Manning,
eds. Select problems in historical interpre-
tation. New York, Holt [1949-50] 2 v.
49-9401 E178.P78
Volume 2 by Thomas G. Manning and David M.
Potter, with the collaboration of Wallace E. Davies.
Contents. — [v. 1] Nationalism and sectionalism
in America, 1775-1877. — [v. 2] Government and the
American economy, 1870-present.
These companion volumes constitute the most
complex and refined development of the problem
sourcebook yet to appear, and make a considerable
demand upon both teacher and student — so much
so that, the collaborator in the later volume thinks,
they are best deferred to "the senior seminar or con-
ference group level." Each volume singles out a
major theme in American development, presents
various of its aspects in terms of a series of related
problems, and aims to make the student analyze
the factors involved, "explore the complexity of the
issues, and sense the multiplicity of the possible
solutions." There are twelve 35 to 40-page problems
in each volume; the material presented under each
problem is "a balance of fact, opinion, and com-
mentary," with the editors largely providing "the
knowledge which is the necessary condition to an
investigation of the topics," and relating "each topic
to the central subject of the Problem." The theme
of the first volume culminates in "Interpretations
of the Civil War," with a sequel on "The Political
Status of the Negro after Appomattox"; that of the
second in the NRA, NRLB, and other agencies of
the New Deal, with a sequel on the OPA in World
War II.
3107. Problems in American civilization; readings
selected by the Department of American
Studies, Amherst College. Boston, Heath, 1949-57.
29 v.
A series of slender, paperbound volumes initiated
in 1949 under the joint editorship of Earl Latham,
George Rogers Taylor, and George F. Whicher;
in the latest volumes Professor Taylor appears as the
sole editor. The first eight to be published were
issued as a numbered series; the subsequent ones
have been without numbers, and it has seemed best
here to list them all alphabetically by author. They
are of course designed to provide "collateral read-
ing" for college courses in American history, and
they reflect the trend of the last 15 years to arrange
source and documentary materials for such use in
relation to controversial issues of the past and pres-
ent. Each volume of the series has the same ar-
rangement: the editor's Introduction oudines the
"Problem" in a few pages; "The Clash of Issues"
is a page of striking formulations from either side;
there follow a dozen or so selections from con-
temporary sources and recent historians, and a brief
final essay making "Suggestions for Additional
Reading." The success of the series as a teaching
medium appears from the fact that the first two
Problems to be issued have now appeared in re-
vised editions. It seems equally well calculated to
provide the general reader with a striking intro-
duction to the topics with which it deals.
3108. Cope, Alfred Haines, and Fred Krinsky, eds.
Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Supreme
Court. 1952. 109 p. 52-1656 Law
3109. Fenno, Richard F., ed. The Yalta Confer-
ence. 1955. 112 p.
55-1646 D734.C7 i945i
31 10. Greene, Theodore P., ed. American im-
perialism in 1898. 1955. 105 p.
55-1630 E713.G7
31 1 1. Greene, Theodore P., ed. Wilson at Ver-
sailles. 1957. 114 p. 57-1944 D644.G7
31 12. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Democracy and the
gospel of wealth. 1949. 116 p.
49-5916 E169.1.P897, no. 6
3 1 13. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Education for democ-
racy; the debate over the report of the Presi-
dent's Commission on Higher Education. 1952.
117 p. 52-10171 LA226A485K4
31 14. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Evolution and religion;
the conflict between science and theology in
modern America. 1957. 114 p.
57-1698 BL245.K4
31 15. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Pragmatism and Ameri-
can culture. 1950. 114 p.
51-7648 B832.K4
3 1 16. Latham, Earl, ed. The Declaration of In-
dependence and the Constitution. Rev. ed.
1956. 126 p. 56-14513 JK146.L35 1956
First published in 1949.
GENERAL HISTORY / 317
31 17. Latham, Earl, ed. John D. Rockefeller, rob-
ber baron or industrial statesman? 1949.
115 p. 49-5916 E169.1.P897, no. 7
31 18. Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed. The Compromise
of 1850. 1957. 99 p. 57-3018 E423.R8
31 19. Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed. The New Deal:
revolution or evolution? 1949. 113 p.
49-5916 E169.1.P897, no. 8
3120. Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed. Reconstruction in
the South. 1952. 109 p.
52-1818 E668.R83
3121. Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed. Roosevelt, Wilson
and the trusts. 1950. 115 p.
51-7688 HD2785.R6
3122. Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed. Slavery as a cause
of the Civil War. 1949. 104 p.
49-5916 E169.1.P897, no. 5
3123. Sanford, Charles L., ed. Benjamin Franklin
and the American character. 1955. 102 p.
55-2272 E302.6.F8S32
3124. Taylor, George Rogers, ed. The great tariff
debate, 1820-1830. 1953. 95 p.
53-1170 HF3027.3.T38
3125. Taylor, George Rogers, ed. Hamilton and
the national debt. 1950. 108 p.
51-7557 FIJ8106.T3
3126. Taylor, George Rogers, ed. Jackson versus
Biddle; the struggle over the Second Bank
of the United States. 1949. 119 p.
49-59 16 E 1 69. 1 .P897, no. 3
3127. Taylor, George Rogers, ed. The Turner
thesis concerning the role of the frontier in
American history. Rev. ed. 1956. 109 p.
56-14601 E179.5.T96T3 1956
First published in 1949.
3128. Wahlke, John C, ed. The causes of the
American Revolution. 1950. 108 p.
51-7685 E210.W3
3129. Wahlke, John C, ed. Loyalty in a demo-
cratic state. 1952. hi p.
52-1192 JK1759.W33
3130. Waller, George M., ed. Pearl Harbor:
Roosevelt and the coming of the war. 1953.
1 12 p. 53-1 ^42 E806A
3131. Waller, George M., ed. Puritanism in early
America. 1950. 115 p. 51—4731 F7.W3
3132. Warne, Colston Estey, ed. Industry-wide
collective bargaining: promise or menace?
1950. 113 p. 51-4732 E169.1.P897, v. 9
3133. Warne, Colston Estey, ed. The Pullman
boycott of 1894; the problem of Federal inter-
vention. 1955. 112 p.
55-3476 HD5325.R12 1894.C6
3134. Whicher, George F., ed. The transcendent-
alist revolt against materialism. 1949.
107 p. 49-5916 E169.1.P897, no. 4
3135. Whicher, George F., ed. William Jennings
Bryan and the campaign of 1896. 1953.
109 p. 53-1341 E664.B87W6
3136. Ziegler, Benjamin Munn, ed. Immigration,
an American dilemma. 1953. 118 p.
53-8474 JV6455.Z5
3137. Riegel, Robert E. America moves west. 3d
ed. New York, Holt, 1956. 659 p. illus.
56-6073 F591.R53 1956
Professor Riegel of Dartmouth College published
the first edition of this textbook, as readable as it is
informative, in 1930. His third revision adds a
new chapter (38) on the Pacific Coast as well as
"pertinent research of the past decade," and offers
"completely redone" lists of readings (with very
brief entries) at the end of each chapter. Chrono-
logically the book extends from the outbreak of the
American Revolution to the collapse of "Western
Panaceas" with the defeat of Bryan in the Presiden-
tial election of 1896. There are concretely descrip-
tive chapters on the successive phases of daily living
in the West and on the social consequences of di-
verse means of transportation. Concluding chapters
are "The West is Fictionalized," which affirms that
"the most distinctive of American experiences" still
offers an unexhausted supply of raw material for the
creative writer, and "The Historian Discovers the
West," which is largely concerned with the "fron-
tier hypothesis" of Frederick Jackson Turner and
its critics (cf. no. 3147).
3138. Rippy, James Fred. America and the strife
of Europe. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1938. 263 p. 38-25892 E175.9.R57
"Critical bibliography": f 233J-250.
A small volume which takes a large view of the
place of the United States in the world, as it con-
siders the place which "the strife of Europe" has
occupied in the several American ideologies of iso-
318 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lationism, democratic enthusiasm, pacificism, and
expansionism. It furthermore illustrates how inter-
European conflicts have facilitated the two major
movements of American expansion and the asser-
tion of the Monroe Doctrine. The author found
little to approve in the efforts of 20th-century Amer-
ican statesmen to take a hand in the maintenance of
European peace.
3139. Schlesinger, Arthur Meier. New viewpoints
in American history. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1922. 299 p. 22-7401 E175.9.S34
"Bibliographical note" at the end of each chapter.
Contents. — The influence of immigration on
American history. — Geographic factors in American
development. — Economic influences in American
history. — The decline of aristocracy in America. —
Radicalism and conservatism in American history. —
The role of women in American history. — The
American Revolution. — Economic aspects of the
movement for the Constitution. — The significance
of Jacksonian democracy. — The state rights fetish. —
The foundations of the modern era. — The riddle of
the parties.
3140. Schlesinger, Arthur Meier. Paths to the
present. New York, Macmillan, 1949.
317 p. 49-7676 E178.S33
"For further reading": p. 278-302.
In New Viewpoints the author's object was "to
bring together and summarize, in nontechnical lan-
guage, some of the results of the researches of the
present age of historical study and to show their
importance to a proper understanding of American
history." While the author sought to identify his
"new history" with the emergence of academic his-
toriography, he was actually concerned with the
movement whereby "a record of arid political and
constitutional development began to be enriched by
the new conceptions and fresh points of view
afforded by the scientific study of economics, sociol-
ogy, and politics." Much of what seemed new in
1922 is now agreed commonplace, while some posi-
tions which then seemed self-evident now appear
doubtful or worse, but Professor Schlesinger's vol-
ume remains a landmark in the expanding content
of his discipline. Paths to the Present contains 13
essays grouped under 4 headings: "National Traits,"
"Government of the People," "War and Peace," and
"Ampersand." Each is in some degree the pursuit
of a single topic through the whole sweep of Ameri-
can history, and each evidences its author's extraor-
dinary knowledge combined with the absence or
successful concealment of any personal convictions.
"Biography of a Nation of Joiners," "Food in the
Making of America," and "Casting the National
Horoscope" all contain material hardly to be found
elsewhere, and the rest take larger points of view
than most treatments of their subjects.
3141. Schouler, James. History of the United
States of America, under the Constitution.
New York, Dodd, Mead, 1894-1913. 7 v.
2-4002 E301.S372
Volumes 1-5 rev. ed., 1894.
Contents. — v. 1. 1783-1801. Rule of Federal-
ism.— v. 2. 1801-1817. Jefferson Republicans. —
v. 3. 18 17-183 1. Era of good feeling. — v. 4. 1831-
1847. Democrats and Whigs. — v. 5. 1847-1861.
Free soil controversy. — v. 6. 1861-1865. The Civil
War. — v. 7. 1 865-1 877. The Reconstruction
period.
Schouler (1839-1920) was compelled by the fail-
ure of his hearing in 1871 to relinquish a very suc-
cessful career as a lawyer specializing in Civil War
veterans' claims. He turned to the compilation of
a number of legal textbooks, much used in their
day, and utilized his leisure to embark upon a project
long meditated: a continuation of George Bancroft's
history of the United States from the adoption of
the Constitution to the outbreak of the Civil War.
After some delays he brought out the first volume,
through W. H. Morrison of Washington, D. C, in
1880. The history won the favor of the general
public, and achieved its original terminus with vol-
ume V in 1 891; this was the first to be published by
Dodd, Mead and Co. of New York, who thereafter
handled the whole set. In 1899 and 1913 the author
added volumes on periods to which his personal
acquaintance extended and on which his opinions
were firmly held: the Civil War and Reconstruction
to the election of President Hayes. These volumes
naturally drew the fire of the new race of academic
historians as being too narrowly political and too
unsympathetic with Southern secessionism. Today,
after various failures to achieve total history, it is
easier to appreciate the work for what it is: a de-
tailed political, constitutional, diplomatic, and mili-
tary history of the first century of the American
Nation, chronologically precise, judiciously propor-
tioned, and economically narrated. As by-products
of his magnum opus, Schouler produced two vol-
umes of shorter studies, containing a number of
pieces noteworthy for their information or inter-
pretations: Historical Briefs and Constitutional
Studies, State and Federal (New York, Dodd, Mead,
1896 (310 p.) and 1897 (332 p.) respectively). In
1906 he published a sterling contribution to social
history: Americans of ijj6 (New York, Dodd,
Mead. 317 p.), which reviews the state of society
in the Thirteen Colonies on the eve of the Revolu-
tion.
GENERAL HISTORY / 319
3142. Smith, Bernard, ed. The democratic spirit,
a collection of American writings from the
earliest times to the present day. 2d ed., rev. New
York, Knopf, 1943. xxxv, 923 p.
43-51285 PS507.S59 1943
3143. Angle, Paul M., ed. By these words; great
documents of American liberty, selected and
placed in their contemporary settings. Illustrated
by Edward A. Wilson. New York, Rand, McNally,
1954. 560 p. 54-10616 E173.A79
The Democratic Spirit is a collection of fairly ex-
tended extracts from 100 American authors, "the
truly democratic and characteristic works of the
democratic writers of this country." The kinds of
writing included range from political discourse to
fiction and poetry embodying democratic aspirations
or assailing some concrete wrong such as slavery.
The literary extracts of the 1920's and 30's exemplify
the ami fascism and somewhat diffuse social protest
of the day, when the American people "began to
think of economic democracy as indispensable to
liberty," now conceived "as a matter of decent living
and collective effort as well as freedom from re-
straint." A note on each author precedes his work.
By These Words is a smaller collection of 46 docu-
ments, from the Mayflower Compact of 1620 to
President Eisenhower's inaugural address of 1953,
presented in a more attractive format than is usual
in such compilations, with uncrowded pages and
interspersed sketches. Mr. Angle's well-propor-
tioned introductions to each document supply in-
formative backgrounds for the general reader.
3144. Smith, Theodore Clarke. The United States
as a factor in world history. New York,
Holt, 1941. 142 p. (The Berkshire studies in
European history) 41-10192 E183.7.S6
"Bibliographical note": p. 133-138.
A tour-de-force of condensation which considers
American history from 1763 to 1940 from the
standpoint of world history. The author identifies
two main factors of persistent influence: the repub-
licanism of American society deriving from the cir-
cumstance that no feudal aristocracy grew up in the
Thirteen Colonies, and the economic importance of
transatlantic commerce. He traces their presence
through three periods: that of separation from Eu-
rope, to 1823; that of isolated democracy, to 1897;
and that of the United States as a world power.
3145. Stone, Irving, and Richard Kennedy, eds.
We speak for ourselves; a self-portrait of
America. Garden City, N. Y., Doublcday, 1950.
xvii, 462 p. 50-9974 E176.S875
Extracts rarely exceeding 8 pages in length from
64 American autobiographies, mostly of the 20th or
later 19th century, and arranged in 7 rather esoteric
categories which Mr. Stone explains in his intro-
duction. For the most part the compilers have
selected some striking or representative episode, but
in a few instances they "undertook the task of weav-
ing together in a cohesive whole" passages scattered
through a book, "exercising extreme care not to alter
either the meaning or the effect of a story." They
hoped to create an interest which will send readers
back to the original volumes, for which, unfortun-
ately, they provide nothing more than short titles.
3146. Thistlethwaite, Frank. The great experi-
ment; an introduction to the history of the
American people. Cambridge [Eng.] University
Press, 1955. 335 p. 55-4496 E178.T35
The author is Fellow of St. John's College, Cam-
bridge, and his book, the "result of several years'
teaching American history to Cambridge under-
graduates," aims "to provide the British student
with a point of departure." He hopes, however, to
interest American readers by identifying "the special
characteristics that distinguish Americans from Eu-
ropeans"; they will be quite as much attracted by
his multitude of striking insights and perspicuous
generalizations. He takes as basic "the grand proc-
ess of migration from Europe," which has brought
into being "a new variant of western society" — "the
mobile society," which contrasts with the static and
conformist societies of Europe. He further em-
phasizes that "American culture grew to maturity
within an Adantic world with nerve-centers" in
Britain as well as America. He gives far more at-
tention to economic factors than to political person-
alities, and in fact industrialists cut a greater figure
in his pages than do statesmen. "In the mid-
twentieth century the American people still pursue
their Revolutionary ideal," the most ambitious ever
to command the allegiance of a great nation, and
therefore, naturally if regrettably, one that "has
never achieved full acceptance in practice." The
Great Experiment is one of the most distinguished
interpretations of American history to come from a
European pen. Harold Plaskitt's The United States
of America; the People, Their History, Institutions,
and Way of Life j 2d ed.] (London, University
Tutorial Press, 1953. 200 p.) is a revision after ten
years of a wartime manual which attempted "to pro-
vide background information for the improvement
of Anglo-American co-operation." It consists of 15
topical chapters, such as "The Constitution," "Cul-
ture and Entertainment," "Capital and Labour," and
"Relations with tbe Outside World." It is selective,
straightforward, and often considerably simpler than
the subject matter it seeks to present.
320 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3147. Turner, Frederick Jackson. The frontier in
American history. New York, Holt, 1950,
ci947- 375 P- , 53-4^ E179.5.T956 1950
Contents. — The significance of the frontier in
American history. — The first official frontier of the
Massachusetts Bay. — The Old West. — The Middle
West. — The Ohio Valley in American history. —
The significance of the Mississippi Valley in Amer-
ican history. — The problem of the West. — Domi-
nant forces in Western life. — Contributions of the
West to American democracy. — Pioneer ideals and
the state university. — The West and American
ideals. — Social forces in American history. — Middle
Western pioneer democracy.
The American Historical Association, meeting at
Chicago during the World's Fair year (1893), were
told by a young assistant professor of history at the
University of Wisconsin that, up to then, American
history had been in essence the history of the coloni-
zation of the great West, that the frontier, "the
hinter edge of free land," was the line of most rapid
and effective Americanization and the salient factor
in national unification, that frontier individualism
had promoted democracy and transmitted it to the
East and even to Europe, and that the American in-
tellect owed its distinguishing characteristics to the
lingering effects of frontier life. Seldom has a
group of scholars proved so ripe for conversion; the
"frontier hypothesis" speedily became a kind of
orthodoxy among American historians and went for
over 30 years without serious criticism. The present
volume, one of the two that Turner (1861-1932)
published during his lifetime, opens with the paper
of 1893 and contains 12 more essays and addresses
that he produced down to 1918; the original edition
appeared in 1920. The Early Writings of Frederic^
Jackson Turner (Madison, University of Wiscon-
sin Press, 1938. 316 p.) includes a 40-page bibliog-
raphy of writings by and about Turner, compiled by
Everett E. Edwards, and an introduction on "Tur-
ner's Formative Years" by Fulmer Mood. Mr. Ed-
wards has also compiled a volume of References on
the Significance of the Frontier in American His-
tory (Washington, 1939. 99 p. U. S. Dept. of
Agriculture Library, Bibliographical contributions,
no. 25. 2d ed.); some later contributions to the
debate are listed in the bibliography of Billington
above (no. 3074). Three other books by Turner,
two of them posthumous, are nos. 3356, 3357, and
3784.
3148. Weyl, Nathaniel. Treason; the story of dis-
loyalty and betrayal in American history.
Washington, Public Affairs Press, 1950. 491 p.
50-6616 E179.W5
3149. Weyl, Nathaniel. The battle against dis-
loyalty. New York, Crowell, 195 1. 378 p.
51-3355 E743.5.W4
"Throughout the hundred and seventy-five years
during which the United States has existed as a
nation, mercenaries and psychopaths, zealots and
misguided idealists, enemy agents and servants of
antidemocratic faiths have betrayed their allegiance
and struck at the foundations of the Republic."
Treason passes briskly from Charles Lee, Benedict
Arnold, John Fries, Aaron Burr, Thomas W. Dorr,
John Brown, and Clement Vallandigham, to the
pro-Nazis and the subversive Communists of our
own day. No documentation is offered for these
condensed narratives, but they are reasonably accu-
rate if somewhat journalistic in manner. The Battle
against Disloyalty is provided with "reference
notes" at the end of the volume. It has some ma-
terial on the secret service during the Civil War and
World War I, but is largely concerned with the
Communist and Nazi menaces since 1919, and the
counterintelligence work, congressional investiga-
tions, legal prosecutions, and loyalty programs by
which they have been combated.
3150. Wish, Harvey. Society and thought in
America. New York, Longmans, Green,
1950-52. 2 v. 50-9981 E169.1.W65
Contents. — v. 1. Society and thought in early
America; a social and intellectual history of the
American people through 1865. — v. 2. Society and
thought in modern America; a social and intellectual
history of the American people from 1865.
A general survey of American history with politics
and economics subordinated to social and intellectual
factors. If it is short on causality and may not cut
very deep, it is exceptionally felicitous in its choice
of material and in its organization. It is further-
more presented in a leisurely kind of exposition
which avoids the cluttered patterns so common in
general works of its type, and makes the student's
task relatively pleasant. It naturally becomes less
adequate as it approaches the complexities of the
present day. Each volume has very pertinent illus-
trations from contemporary sources and a judiciously
selected bibliography which the author has deliber-
ately held down to a limited number of significant
titles.
3 15 1. Woestemeyer, Ina Faye, ed. The westward
movement; a book of readings on our chang-
ing frontiers. With the editorial collaboration of
J[ohn] Montgomery Gambrill. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1939. xx, 500 p. illus.
39-14444 F591.W85
GENERAL HISTORY / 32I
"Notes on the literature of the westward move-
ment": p. 477-484; "Bibliography of sources
quoted": p. 485-490.
This anthology originated as a "Professional
Project" of the editor in her work for the Ed. D.
degree at Teachers College, Columbia University,
where Dr. Gambrill was a professor of history. In
it the "Westward Movement" is broadly conceived,
both chronologically and as a social process. Most
of the extracts are from documents or the writings
of participants or direct observers, but some are from
such historians of the frontier as Parkman and
Everett Dick. The arrangement is topical, with
special attention to the several factors, chiefly eco-
nomic, which entered into "The Lure of the West,"
and to the transmission of culture to the frontier,
including a chapter on "Folk-lore, Ballads, and Lit-
erature." The editor has made rather too many
excisions (indicated by 3 or 4 dots) from her selec-
tions, and the large body of contemporary
illustrations is provided with quite inadequate
identification.
3152. Woods, Henry F. American sayings; fa-
mous phrases, slogans and aphorisms. Rev.
and enl. ed. New York, Perma Giants, 1950, ci949.
312 p. 5°~3259 PN6084.A5W6 1950
Striking formulations of significant ideas make
as well as reflect history, in the United States as
elsewhere. Under the 4 categories of "Political and
Civil," "War," "Sociological — Economic — Commer-
cial," and "Popular," the compiler has arranged over
300 brief items, such as "The solid South" or "Tell
it to Sweeney"; and has traced each to its origin,
certain or presumed, with an individual or at least
within a milieu. The items are in an approximate
chronological order within each category, but are
indexed by first words and, when possible, by in-
dividuals. The American Treasury, 1455-1955,
compiled by Clifton Fadiman assisted by Charles
Van Doren (New York, Harper, 1955. xxxii, 1108
p.) has an "Index of Familiar Words and Phrases,"
but is looser in idea and on a vaster scale. It con-
tains a huge and various collection of pointed state-
ments by Americans, sometimes on American themes
and sometimes on things in general, and sometimes
running to a page or more, but more often confined
to a sentence or two. Dictionary of American
Maxims, edited by David Kin [pseud, of David
George Plotkin] (New York, Philosophical Library,
1955. 597 p.), is made up of briefer statements —
two sentences at most — on things in general; it
makes no references and has no author index.
C. The New World
3153. Anghiera, Pietro Martire d'. De orbe novo,
the eight Decades of Peter Martyr dAng-
hera; translated from the Latin with notes and
introd., by Francis Augustus MacNutt. New York,
Putnam, 1912. 2 v. ports.
12-24777 E141.A604
Bibliography: v. 1, p. 49-54.
Peter Martyr (1455-1526) was an Italian human-
ist scholar. In 1487 he went to Spain, where he
became associated with the royal court and received
clerical preferment. For most of the remainder of
his life he occupied various positions connected with
the court, such as tutor to the royal children and
nobles, diplomatic envoy, historiographer, etc. In
these positions he personally met the early Spanish-
employed explorers, from Columbus on, and ob-
tained access to most of the documents concerned
with the New World. He wrote a succession of
Latin letters on the exploration and development of
the New World. A part of these writings were
brought together in 1516 as De Rebus Oceanis et
Orbe Novo Decades Tres. These three, with a
fourth decade published in 152 1 and four others
published posthumously, have come to be known as
the Decades (groups of ten letters; the term has no
chronological significance), and together constitute
the first formal history of the Americas. While
this is mainly a chronicling of Spanish America
during the first 30 years of discovery, it is of im-
portance for American civilization as a whole, in
that it shows the first generally circulated view of
the New World, and traces the advances that led to
the occupation of both continents.
3154. Augur, Helen. Passage to glory; John Led-
yard's America. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1946. 310 p. 46-375 G226.L5A8
Bibliography: p. 295-300.
John Ledyard (1751-1789) was born and r.iKc <!
in colonial Connecticut, and went on to become one
of the last of the great world explorers. I lis caret r
opened as a corporal of marines under Capt. fames
Cook, whom he accompanied on the last of his
famous voyages of Pacific exploration. There he
developed the conception of the colonies extending
as a nation to tin- Pacific Ocean, am! prospering with
322 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the opening of the fur trade in the Pacific Northwest.
While this was brought about by men of the next
generation, Ledyard worked toward it, and com-
municated his idea to Thomas Jefferson. Ledyard's
own life ended in Egypt, as he was preparing to
explore Central Africa, with the intention of there-
after exploring America from Kentucky westwards.
Miss Augur's life of Ledyard is based on much
research, but is primarily an interpretive study
meant to show the importance of his vision of a
continental America; it presents him as symboli-
cally and physically completing mankind's circuit
westward, from the Old World to the Old World,
with the creation and unification of the New World
between.
3155. Bakeless, John E. The eyes of discovery;
the pageant of North America as seen by the
first explorers. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1950.
439 p. illus. 50-10588 E162.B3
As the author states in the preface: "The Eyes of
Discovery is an effort to describe North America as
the first white men in the area saw it: landscapes,
forests, plains, animals, plants, streams, and Indians,
as they existed before the inevitable change that
began almost from the instant of the first white
settlement. It is neither a story of adventure nor a
book about Indians nor a history of exploration and
colonization. Where the life of an explorer is
touched upon at all, it is merely to explain who the
man was and how he came to make his discoveries
when he did. Because of this approach, many a
great name of the ever-moving frontier does not
appear at all." Furthermore, since many of the
early explorers did not leave adequate descriptions
of what they saw, the author has employed later
writings where "it is possible to find good descrip-
tions of primitive conditions in the books of visitors
to America long after setdement had begun, for
such things as waterfalls, prairie fires, buffalo,
moose, lakes, rivers, and Indian ways changed very
slowly." The book is not an anthology of early
writings on American flora, fauna, and geography,
but is rather a description cf such matters with
numerous pertinent quotations included in the
author's text.
3156. Bishop, Morris. Champlain, the life of for-
titude. New York, Knopf, 1948. 364 p.
48-8873 F1030.1.B6
A professor of Romance languages at Cornell
University has written the latest and most distin-
guished biography of Samuel, Sieur de Champlain
(ca. 1 567-1 635), the Father of New France. Cham-
plain was a veteran officer of Henry IV's army in
1599, when he seized a chance opportunity to visit
the Spanish Empire, where he saw such callous ex-
ploitation of the Indians that he formed a very
different ideal of colonization: honest trade and
honest cooperation with the natives. The book is
organized around Champlain's 12 voyages to the
New World, and communicates to the reader the
author's own admiration for this idealist, who de-
voted his "toughness, tenacity, foresight, courage"
to "the foundation in America of a great kingdom,
to be ruled with justice and mercy, by France, but
for God." Champlain himself published four books
on Canada, beginning with the Des sauvages of
1604; The Worlds of Samuel de Champlain, under
the general editorship of Henry P. Biggar (Toronto,
Champlain Society, 1922-36. 6 v.), gives both the
French text and an English translation, while there
is a convenient one-volume translation of the 1613
and 1619 volumes, edited by William L. Grant, in
the Original narratives of early American history
series (no. 3207).
3157. Bolton, Herbert E., and Thomas M. Mar-
shall. The colonization of North America,
1492-1783. New York, Macmillan, 1936. xvi,
609 p. maps. 38-34415 E188.B69 1936
A concise, nearly an outline account of European
discovery, exploration, and colonization in North
America, which covers not only what has since be-
come the United States, but also the West Indies,
Mexico and Central America, and Canada. The
first main section, on "The Founding of the Col-
onies," traces the story from the discovery by Co-
lumbus to the latter part of the 17th century. The
second part, "Expansion and International Conflict,"
carries the story to 1783, when Spain was active in
the California area, Russia was penetrating the
northwestern part of the continent, and the conti-
nental English colonies had achieved considerable
maturity and established their independence. The
final section of the book is a short group of six chap-
ters on the Revolutionary War and the postwar
governmental situation. Since this book, first pub-
lished in 1920, was designed as a textbook, addi-
tional readings for students are included at the end
of each chapter. However, these are now somewhat
dated, as, unfortunately, is some of the textual ma-
terial itself. However, no other survey of com-
parable scope has appeared to replace it.
3158. Bolton, Herbert E. The Spanish border-
lands; a chronicle of old Florida and the
Southwest. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1921. xiv, 329 p. plates, fold. map. (The Chron-
icles of America series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 23)
21-14807 Ei73.C55,v.23
E123.B7
"Bibliographical note": p. 297-303.
In a number of states north of the Rio Grande,
GENERAL HISTORY / 323
and stretching from California to Florida, there
exists an evident influence of Spanish culture, de-
riving from the times when these areas were occu-
pied by the Spaniards as outposts for their New-
World empire. The Spanish exploration, setde-
ment, government, and general colonial practices in
this area are sympathetically described in this vol-
ume. The work opens with a series of chapters on
the early explorers: Ponce de Leon, Cabeza de Vaca,
Hernando de Soto, Coronado, and others. The
author then discusses individually the areas of
Florida, New Mexico, Texas, Louisiana, and Cali-
fornia, and concludes with a chapter on the Jesuits
on the Pacific coast. One of Professor Bolton's many
detailed contributions to the history of these areas,
Rim of Christendom; a Biography of Eusebio Fran-
cisco Kino, Pacific Coast Pioneer (New York, Mac-
millan, 1936. 644 p.), is a full-scale reconstruction,
from long research in scattered primary sources, of
the life of an indefatigable Italian-born Jesuit mis-
sionary to Lower California and Pimeria Alta (the
present Mexican Province of Sonora), who was
"explorer, astronomer, cartographer, mission
builder, ranchman, catde king, and defender of the
frontier."
3159. Brebner, John B. The explorers of North
America, 1492-1806. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1933. xv, 502 p. 4 fold. maps. (The Pioneer
histories) 33~3I647 E101.B83
"Narratives" at end of each chapter.
A volume which seeks "to draw together as a
related whole the explorations which first revealed
the general character of the North American con-
tinent," and which are usually treated regionally or
nationally. All quotations are from the explorers
themselves, or from other contemporary narratives.
The author closes with the return of Lewis and
Clark from the Pacific Ocean, but is careful to ex-
plain that only the major features and routes of the
continent were established in 1806, and that large
areas, isolated or desolate, remained for the 19th
century to reveal. A recent paperback reprint of this
work (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955.
431 p. Doubleday anchor books, A44) is not an
equivalent of the original edition, since it lacks the
indispensable folding maps.
3160. Crouse, Nellis M. In quest of the western
ocean. New York, Morrow, 1928. 480 p.
maps. 28-6172 E121.C95
Bibliography: p. 453-456.
When Columbus discovered America, he was
looking for Asia. As it dawned upon Europeans
that Asia had not been reached, an intense effort
was made to find some water passage through or
around the intervening land, for the fabled treas-
ures of Asia still remained the prime goal, except for
the Spanish, who had found gold and silver. Dr.
Crouse's book is the story of the many attempts to
locate the passage. After the joint oudine of South
and North America became known for the eastern
shore of the continents, the attempts concentrated
on a search for a Northwest passage; a belief in this
was long encouraged by rumors and misconceptions.
The author's story begins with the events impelling
the Europeans to seek a passage westward to Asia,
and closes in the latter part of the 18th century,
when the project was finally abandoned as being
relatively useless, should a passage exist, and when
most possibilities for a passage had been eliminated.
Meanwhile three centuries of explorations seeking
a way to Asia had opened up America.
3161. De Voto, Bernard A. The course of empire;
with maps by Erwin Raisz. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1952. xvii, 647 p. 52-5261 E179.5.D4
This book is a study of the factors involved in the
discovery and exploration of North America, in so
far as they affected the westward movement which
resulted in the establishment of a continental Amer-
ican empire and nation. The story is traced through
the crossing of the continent by the Lewis and Clark
expedition in 1804-6. The author's purpose is to
achieve a meaningful whole, viewing all "themes"
in combination, rather than a study of the indi-
vidual parts. The author in his preface presents the
principal themes as "the geography of North Amer-
ica in so far as it was important in the actions dealt
with; the ideas which the men involved in these
actions had about this geography, their misconcep-
tions and errors, and the growth of knowledge; the
exploration of the United States and Canada, so
much of it as was relevant to the discovery of a
route to the Pacific Ocean; the contention of four
empires for the area that is now the United States;
the relationship to all these things of various Indian
tribes that affected them." This is usually regarded
as an outstanding work essential to an understand-
ing of the West. While it may be De Voto's major
book, his writing as a whole is discussed more fully
under Literary History and Criticism (q. v.).
3162. Folmer, Henry. Franco Spanish rivalry in
North America, [524-1763. Glendale,
Calif., A. H. Clark Co., 1953. 346 p. fold. map.
(Spain in the West, 7) 54-2218 E131.F6
Bibliography: p. [311 ]-333.
This is a consecuthc narrative of the rivalry be-
tween France and Spain for an area now largely
included in the gulf coast of the United St.itcs, from
Florida to Texas. This rivalry persisted through
most of the colonial period and was terminated only
by the liquidation of the French mainland empire
3^4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
by the Peace of Paris (1763). While Spain claimed
all of North America in consequence of the earliest
discoveries, France did not recognize Spanish own-
ership of any area not actually settled by Spaniards.
The resultant controversy in its various manifes-
tations, including several outbreaks of overt war-
fare, is here chronologically traced to the point
where France turned the Louisiana Territory over
to Spain, and Spain left Britain in possession of
Florida in compensation for Britain's restoration of
Cuba to Spain. France thus being removed from
the scene, her long rivalry with Spain in the gulf
area was inherited by Britain, and eventually by
the United States.
3163. Jane, Lionel Cecil, ed. Select documents
illustrating the four voyages of Columbus,
including those contained in R. H. Major's Select
letters of Christopher Columbus; translated and
edited with additional material, an introd. and notes,
by Cecil Jane. London, Printed for the Hakluyt
Society, 1930-33. 2 v. (Works issued by the
Hakluyt Society. Second series, no. 65, 70)
30-33946 G161.H2, no. 65, 70
3164. Morison, Samuel Eliot. Admiral of the
ocean sea; a life of Christopher Columbus.
Maps by Erwin Raisz. Drawings by Bertram
Greene. Boston, Little, Brown, 1942. 2 v. illus.,
maps. 42-5606 E111.M86 1942
Columbus (1451-1506) was born and raised in
Genoa, Italy, where the original form of his name
was Cristoforo Colombo. As a young man he be-
came interested in the possibility of sailing west to
discover an easy route to the East. He tried for
years to interest people in a voyage of discovery, and
finally did obtain some backing from Ferdinand and
Isabella of Spain (in which country his name as-
sumed the form of Cristobal Colon). He sailed on
August 3, 1492, and landed on an island in the
Bahamas on October 12, 1492; this date is now cited
as that of the discovery of America. Columbus ex-
plored the area and discovered Haiti and Cuba be-
fore returning to Europe. Back at court he received,
among other titles, that of Admiral of the Ocean
Sea. While he had not found the Cathay and Ci-
pango reported by Marco Polo, he was convinced
that he had reached Asia, and that these lands were
somewhere in the area. Additional voyages of
discovery were made by him in 1493, 1498, and
1502. While his discoveries led to the opening up
of the New World, he himself did not know it, or
refused to admit it. He died in the apparent belief
that Cuba was part of Asia, and that the Malay
Archipelago was just a little farther west than he
had sailed. While most early biographies of Co-
lumbus concentrated on his life on land, Admiral
Morison's study concentrates on Columbus' voyages,
since these comprise the most important part of his
life's work. There is much on the problems and
methods of navigation. The book, which was
awarded a Pulitzer prize for biography, was also
published the same year in a one-volume edition
which retained most of the text, but eliminated most
of the scholarly apparatus. The Select Documents,
edited by Cecil Jane, are largely writings by Colum-
bus about his voyages; they have the merit of im-
mediacy, but the disadvantage of the author's
ignorance of much that was involved. The works
are presented in English translation with the Spanish
text on the facing page. Both volumes contain an
extensive introduction covering the period treated,
and the first volume contains a list of works cited
(p. cli-clv).
3165. Kirkpatrick, Frederick A. The Spanish
conquistadores. 2d ed. London, A. & C.
Black, 1946. 366 p. maps. (The Pioneer histories)
47-26292 F1411.K57 1946
This book, which first appeared in 1934, relates
the story of Spanish conquests in the Americas. As
such it traces in a roughly chronological manner the
opening of new lands, centering the account about
particular places and individuals. The book opens
with several chapters on Columbus and the Carib-
bean islands, and carries the story to the second
foundation of Buenos Aires in 1580, at which point
"the vast semicircle of Spanish dominion in South
America was complete." The author's intention
was to present a single coherent narrative of the
many conquests, which had hitherto usually been
treated as so many individual matters.
3166. McCann, Franklin T. English discovery of
America to 1585. New York, King's Crown
Press, 1952, ci95i. xiv, 246 p.
52-10564 E127.M15
Bibliography: p. [22j]-2^2.
This Columbia University dissertation is not a
study of English explorations in the New World,
as one might conclude from the title; it is rather a
study of how information was obtained and spread,
so that the English came to know, or discover, Amer-
ica as a new continental land mass rather than a
fragment of the Indies. Since this involved a revo-
lution in traditional thinking about the world, the
author starts by oudining the information and mis-
information which was available in England up to
the time of Columbus. He discusses the medieval
beliefs about the world and nature, such as "the
belief that gold, its growth controlled by the rays of
the sun, was restricted to the torrid zone," and their
GENERAL HISTORY / 325
influence on English acts and attitudes. He then
takes up the European discoveries and the gradual
assimilation of the new information, leading to
changed concepts of the world and of England's
potential role in it. He considers English voyages
to America as a source of information, as well as the
reports of foreign ones, insofar as they enlightened
the English. The work concludes by indicating
some of the influence of the "discovery" of America
on the creative imagination of English writers in
this early period.
3167. Mirsky, Jeannette. The westward crossings;
Balboa, Mackenzie, Lewis and Clark. New
York, Knopf, 1946. xv, 365, xiii p. illus.
46-7299 E27.M5
This book attempts to exhibit the continuity be-
hind the three great continental explorations of
Balboa, Alexander Mackenzie, and Lewis and Clark.
In 1513, after crossing the continent at its narrowest
section, Balboa discovered the Pacific; he sought
gold for the King of Spain, and obtained gold and
pearls. His discovery renewed the hope that a
water passage to the Pacific and to the East might be
found. In the 1770's Mackenzie was still seeking
such a passage in the Canadian Northwest; he found
a fortune in furs. While Lewis and Clark still
hoped for a through waterway, their primary object
was to open up the way for the new nation's ex-
pansion to the Pacific that Jefferson envisioned and
that the Louisiana Purchase made possible; the
fortune they found for their government was the
commerce of the West. Their difficulties all but put
an end to the old dream of a natural and easy cross-
continental water route. The bibliography (p. 361-
365) is a guide to further reading, listing important
primary sources and the main secondary studies for
each of the three expeditions.
3168. Newton, Arthur P. The European nations
in the West Indies, 1493-1688. London, A.
& C. Black, 1933. xviii, 356 p. maps. (The Pio-
neer histories) 33-18908 F1621.N46
Noting that the history of the West Indies has
usually been told either in terms of individual
islands, or in groups of islands possessed by a single
European power, Professor Newton of the Univer-
sity of London here undertakes "to consider the
history of the West Indies as a whole with attention
to the history of individual islands only where it
played a part in the general drama." He notes that,
notwithstanding the tendency to consider the West
Indies in terms of their parts, "to whatever Power
the islands have belonged, they have been affected
by the same broad movements, whether political,
social or economic. Their growth in importance,
their decline and their subsequent recovery have
followed parallel lines and been affected by the same
causes." These parallels he traces from the discov-
ery of the islands by Columbus to the year 1688,
which was turning point in the history of the area.
Up to that time much activity was on an individual
or small group basis, with buccaneering playing a
large role. After 1688 the rulers of Europe by treaty
recognized the expediency of maintaining a civi-
lized policy in the area. Thenceforward action in
the West Indies was largely a matter of large,
national naval movements.
3169. Newton, Arthur P., ed. The great age of
discovery. London, University of London
Press, 1932. 230 p. 32-3356o E101.N48
Contents. — Introduction — the transition from
the medieval to the modern age, by A. P. Newton. —
Spanish civilisation in the great age of discovery, by
A. Pastor. — Vasco da Gama and the way to the
Indies, by E. Prestage. — Christopher Columbus and
his first voyage, by A. P. Newton. — Asia or mundus
novus? By A. P. Newton. — The first explorers of
the North American coast, by H. P. Biggar. — The
search for a western passage, by H. J. Wood. — The
first circumnavigation, by J. A. Williamson. — The
northern passages, by E. G. R. Taylor.
A volume originating in public lectures delivered
at King's College in 1931, with the modest aim of
"tracing out some undisputed facts concerning a
few of the greatest of the explorers, and by setting
them against the background of their times to re-
cover something of the spirit in which all uncon-
sciously they broke the prison bonds of the medieval
world in which they had been reared and led the
mass of mankind into a new era." Works which
treat as a whole the great European movement of
discovery and expansion are few; one, which de-
serves to be but has not been translated, is Georg
Friederici's Der Character der Entdecf(ung und
Eroberung Amerikas durch die Europaer (Stutt-
gart-Gotha, F. A. Perthes, 1925-36. 3 v.).
3170. Nute, Grace L. The voyageur. Illus. by
Carl W. Bertsch. Reprint ed. St. Paul,
Minnesota Historical Society, 1955. 288 p.
55-12180 F1027.N96 1055
The voyageurs were the short, muscular, and
tireless French boatmen from the villages of the
lower St. Lawrence who operated the canoes and
bateaux of the Montreal fur traders, and were the
first white men to acquire a detailed knowledge of
the western Great I. .ikes, the Upper Mississippi, and
the region beyond as tar as the Rockies. This book,
which was first published in 1931, concentrates upon
the period 1763-1840, when the French Govern-
326 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ment had been eliminated, and they were in the
employ of the Hudson Bay Company, the North-
west Company, and, after 1808, of J. J. Astor's Amer-
ican Fur Company. Even "the great explorers, like
Alexander Henry, Jonathan Carver, and Alexander
Mackenzie, relied on their canoemen for knowledge
of navigable streams, portages, wintering grounds,
and other topographical features." The author has
treated two of the French pioneers in the western
Great Lakes area in a detailed and less popular
manner: Caesars of the Wilderness: Medard Chou-
art, Sieur des Groseilliers, and Pierre Esprit Radis-
son, 1618-1710 (New York, Appleton-Century,
1943. xvi, 386 p.). A trans-Mississippi pioneer of
the 1 8th century is the subject of Nellis M. Crouse's
La Verendrye, Fur Trader and Explorer (Ithaca,
N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1956. 247 p.).
3171. Parkman, Francis. Works. New library
ed. [Boston] Litde, Brown, 1902-3. 12 v.
illus. 4-19149 F1030.P24 1902
Parkman (1823-1893), one of the leading Amer-
ican literary historians, and regarded by some as the
greatest historian of the 19th century, is also dis-
cussed in Section A on Historiography (no. 3069).
Shortly after graduating from Harvard College in
1846 he journeyed over the Western plains along
the Oregon trail, and for a time lived among the
Sioux Indians. The stimulation which his imagi-
nation received from them and from the wilderness
determined both the choice of subject for his his-
torical work, and the manner in which it was exe-
cuted. The hardships of the journey, however, had
further impaired his already shaky health, and the
execution of so large a scheme despite recurrent
breakdowns and failures of vision was a moral tri-
umph of the first order. His chosen theme was the
struggle of France and England for the control of
North America against a savage background, but
he had first to describe the establishment of New
France (Canada), a subject little known to readers
of English. The successive volumes, appearing over
a period of 27 years, have collectively been known
by the name of France and England in North
America. In the edition cited above this is used as
a subtitle for the first 9 volumes, although it has
been applied to the first 11 volumes, which may in
a sense be regarded as a single work. The first
volume is Pioneers of France in the New World
(originally published in 1865), a work which opens
with the story of French and Spanish conflict in
Florida, and continues with Champlain's activities
in the Great Lakes region. The second volume,
The Jesuits in North America in the Seventeenth
Century (1867), tells the story of the Catholic mis-
sionaries of New France, and of their heroic martyr-
doms and extraordinary influence on savage and
settler alike. Volume three, La Salle and the Dis-
covery of the Great West (1869), deals with the
earliest attempts to settle in the Mississippi Valley.
Volume four, The Old Regime in Canada (1874),
is the story of the paternalistic and religiously abso-
lute society which Louis XIV sought to impose upon
the colonists. Volume five, Count Frontenac and
New France under Louis XIV (1877), presents this
governor as heroically attempting to maintain a
deteriorating and impractical colonial situation.
The next two volumes, entitled A Half Century of
Conflict (1892), cover the first half of the 18th
century and include two major wars. The history
of the Seven Years' War in America and the British
conquest of Canada is covered in the eighth and
ninth volumes, entitled Montcalm and Wolfe
(1884). The 10th and nth volumes are devoted to
The Conspiracy of Pontiac and the Indian War
after the Conquest of Canada; this work, first pub-
lished in 1851, was Parkman's initial historical work,
although it follows the other works chronologically
in terms of subject matter. The 12th volume in
this edition is The Oregon Trail (no. 3348). For
those who are daunted by multi-volumed history,
there are recent condensations of Parkman's work
within a single pair of covers: notably, The Battle
for North America, edited by John Tebbel (Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 746 p.) and The
Parkman Reader, edited by Samuel Eliot Morison
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 533 p.). Mr. Tebbel
has nothing to match Morison's introduction, bib-
liography, and references to more recent literature,
but he does have considerably more extensive ex-
tracts from the later volumes covering the Anglo-
French wars of 1 690-1 763.
3172. Pohl, Frederick J. Amerigo Vespucci, pilot
major. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1944. 249 p. illus. A44-5612 E125.V5P6
Bibliography: p. [235J-240.
The Florentine, Amerigo Vespucci (1451-1512),
for whom the Americas were named, has for cen-
turies been the subject of much scholarly debate.
Much of this has arisen from the conflicting evi-
dence presented in his own writings, but conflicts also
arise from the other scanty evidence. Pohl has re-
solved much of this by regarding as forgeries most
of the material published under the name of Ves-
pucci. With these presuppositions Vespucci ap-
pears as a distinguished explorer and brilliant
cosmographer, whose name may properly be applied
to the hemisphere, since he was the first to recognize
that it was a New World and not Asia that had been
reached. The same scholarly reasoning, however,
leaves to John Cabot the credit of being the first
European of the Age of Discovery to arrive at the
continental land mass itself. German Arciniegas in
GENERAL HISTORY / 327
Amerigo and the New World (New York, Knopf,
1955. 322 p.) accepts the writings allegedly by Ves-
pucci as being genuine; since his book is meant
to be a popular biography, the conflicts in evidence
are not fully resolved, and Vespucci emerges as an
even greater figure than Mr. Pohl presents him as
being.
3173. Williamson, James A. The age of Drake.
3d ed. London, A. & C. Black, 1952. 399
p. maps. (The Pioneer histories)
.53-34531 DA355.W484 1952
First published in 1938.
The use of the name of Sir Francis Drake (1540?-
1596) in this book's title distinguishes it as a history
of English maritime affairs in the age of Elizabeth.
Drake himself plays a limited part in the book, for
while he was one of the leading navigators, explor-
ers, and "pirateers" of the period, his career typified,
rather than constituted, his times. In this volume
Dr. Williamson studies the factors, political, eco-
nomic, demographic, religious, etc., which led to
England's becoming a major sea power and in time
a worldwide maritime empire. Only a small part
of the book specifically deals with what is now the
United States of America, but its whole theme is
that movement which brought about the British
occupation of the area.
3174. Williamson, James A. The voyages of the
Cabots and the English discovery of North
America under Henry VII and Henry VIII. Illus-
trated with thirteen maps. London, Argonaut
Press, 1929. 290 p. 30-8622 E127.W72
In the 1480's John Cabot (who may have been
born Giovanni Caboto in Genoa, before moving to
Venice) tried to induce the King of England to sub-
sidize a voyage of exploration westward to Asia.
However, Henry VII did not supply the requested
backing until after Columbus had made his voyage
for Spain. In 1497 and 1498 John Cabot, with his
son Sebastian, made voyages to North America
along a northerly route. The voyage of Cabot was
the basis of the English claims to America, although
Amerigo Vespucci (no. 3172) claimed he had
reached the continental land mass far to the south
eight days earlier. Sebastian Cabot's geographical
and exploratory activity was largely in the service
of Spain; a detailed study of his career is Jose Toribio
Medina's FA veneciano Sebastian Caboto (Santiago
de Chile, Impr. y Encuadernacion Universitaria,
1908. 2 v.). Dr. Williamson's book concentrates on
John Cabot's career and the work of Sebastian for
England. The first part contains the documents on
which the historian's knowledge of John Cabot and
his expeditions is based. The second part analyzes
that evidence, trying to resolve conflicting data and
establish the sequence of events. The work is thus
designed not only as a historical study of a phase in
the opening of the New World, but also as an ex-
ample in historical method. Williamson had pre-
viously dealt with the Cabots in less detail in
Maritime Enterprise, 1485-1558 (Oxford, Clarendon
Press, 1913. 416 p.), which tells the story of Eng-
lish maritime work in discovery and commerce
under the first four Tudors; while basically English
history, it does contain much background informa-
tion on the opening of America.
3175. Wrong, George M. The rise and fall of
New France. New York, Macmillan, 1928.
2 v. (925 p.) maps. 28-28986 F1030.W95
Professor Wrong's work covers nearly the same
ground as the successive volumes of Francis Park-
man (no. 3 171). However, Wrong has achieved a
more compact form, and has had the advantage of
recent scholarship, and so has added to or modified
some aspects of Parkman's very thorough work.
Professor Wrong's work is based on library research
and thus lacks the sense of immediacy his prede-
cessor was able to convey from personal experience,
and it makes no attempt to compete as literature.
At the same time, it does pay more attention to the
European background and is written by a Canadian
with somewhat different preconceptions from his
Boston predecessor. The organization also differs,
since Professor Wrong follows a more strictly chron-
ological pattern.
D. The Thirteen Colonies
3176. Andrews, Charles M. The colonial back-
ground of the American Revolution; four
essays in American colonial history. Rev. cd. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 193 1. 220 p.
31-24004 E210.A55 1931
Contents. — The British colonics in America. —
The mother country and its colonial policy. — Con-
ditions leading to the revolt of the Colonies — Gen-
eral reflections.
3177. Andrews, Charles M. The colonial period
of American history. New 1 [avert, Yale
University Press, 1934-38. 4 v.
34-18339 E188.A572
328 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Charles McLean Andrews (1863-1943) of Yale
University became one of the foremost scholars of
the American colonial period. His books on the
subject include Colonial Self-Governmcnt, 1652-
1689 (New York, Harper, 1904. 369 p.), which
appeared as the fifth volume of The American na-
tion: a history, edited by Albert Bushnell Hart;
Colonial Folkways: a Chronicle of American Life
in the Reign of the Georges (New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1921. 255 p.), which is volume
nine of The Chronicles of America series; and Our
Earliest Colonial Settlements, Their Diversities of
Origin and Later Characteristics (New York, New
York University Press, 1933. 179 p.), which deals
with Roanoke, Virginia, Massachusetts, Rhode
Island, Connecticut, and Maryland. The Colonial
Period of American History is Andrews' major
work, and the summation of his lifetime's scholar-
ship; it is also one of the outstanding studies of the
Thirteen Colonies in the 17th century. In it he
attempts regularly to present the Colonies from the
English point of view, and thus to offset the tend-
ency of earlier American historians to consider them
in isolation. He furthermore takes into account all
of England's Atlantic colonies, and not merely the
mainland group that subsequently formed the
United States. The first three volumes deal with
the settling and development of the several groups
of colonies, in a roughly, chronological progression;
the fourth volume is a partially independent study
of "England's Commercial and Colonial Policy,"
with the emphasis upon the formative period in the
17th century, but with frequent looks ahead at de-
velopments down to the Revolution. The Colonial
Background of the American Revolution, by many
regarded as the most satisfactory explanation of
that crucial event, tries less to present a balanced
and complete picture of colonial America than to
trace the developing forces and circumstances that
led to the separation. The basic reason is found in
the fact that English statesmen failed to realize that
"the colonies in America were far more advanced,
politically, socially, and morally, than the mother
country and could no longer be held in leading
strings."
3178. Boas, Ralph P., and Louise S. Boas. Cotton
Mather, keeper of the Puritan conscience.
New York, Harper, 1928. 271 p.
28-27598 F67.M422
Cotton Mather (1663-1728) in the Puritan com-
munity of Boston led a life of service as one of the
colony's foremost theologians, and hence one of its
foremost philosophers and politicians, in a society
where church and state had been largely one. His
life therefore presents a good view of Puritan society
in a transitional stage when secular interests were
asserting their autonomy. He was also one of the
leading writers of the time, and his work is dis-
cussed under Literature (nos. 40-50), and Medicine
and Public Health (no. 4826). His best-known
work is the Magnolia Christi Americana (nos. 43-
44), which is a history of God's wondrous workings
in His new land. This history remains a prime
source for any who would understand the period,
through sectarian views and a highly artificial style
must be allowed for.
3179. The Cambridge history of the British Em-
pire; general editors, J. Holland Rose, A. P.
Newton, E. A. Benians. v. 1. The Old Empire
from the beginnings to 1783. New York, Macmil-
lan; Cambridge, Eng., University Press, 1929. xxi,
931 p. 29-14661 DA30.C3, v. 1
This large and scholarly volume, to which many
English historians and one American contributed,
presents a balanced picture of the early development
of the British Empire, and consequently sets the
story of America in a larger framework. The his-
tory is carried through the Revolutionary War and
the establishment of the United States of America.
Considerable attention is paid to the oudook of the
British home islands upon the Colonies, and the
purposes, causes, and effects of various attitudes
and laws are examined in some detail. There are
chapters on the imperial bearings of international
rivalries, sea power, international law, mercantilism,
and constitutional theory. A. P. Newton's chapter
on "The Great Migration, 161 8-1640," Lilian M.
Penson's on "The West Indies and the Spanish-
American Trade, 1713-1748," and Eveline C. Mar-
tin's on "The English Slave Trade and the African
Settlements" cover topics hard to find treated in
compendious form elsewhere. An extremely thor-
ough, now somewhat dated, bibliography is pre-
sented on p. 823-888.
3180. Crane, Verner W. The Southern frontier,
1670-1732. Durham, N. C, Duke Univer-
sity Press, 1928. 391 p. (Duke University publi-
cations) 29-7214 F272.C89
Bibliography: p. 335-356.
South Carolina, founded in 1670, remained a
more or less isolated outpost of the British Empire
for the next 60 years. As such, it enjoyed a practical
monopoly of English trade with the Southern In-
dians, and developed an increasingly conscious oppo-
sition to the outpost of Spanish empire in Florida,
and especially to the one which France established
on the lower Mississippi at the close of the 17th
century. The frontier which resulted, and is so
named in many 18th-century documents, "was no
line, but rather a zone, indeed a series of zones,
merging into the wilderness. On its hither side it
GENERAL HISTORY / 329
was an area of frontier settlements, at its outer edge
a sphere of influence over Indian tribes, in contact
and conflict with similar Spanish and French
spheres." The Charles Town traders developed
two main arteries into the Indian country, the Upper
and the Lower Paths, bringing about the largest
area of commercial and political hegemony and, as
Governor Nairne put it in 1705, "the greatest
quantity of Indians subject to this Government of
any in all America, and almost as many as all other
English Governments put together." This interest
developed "an Anglo-American sentiment of ex-
pansion" which spread from a few colonists and
officials to the whole province, and only in the last
decade of Professor Crane's period was communi-
cated to the imperial administrators at Whitehall.
3181. Dow, George Francis. Every day life in the
Massachusetts Bay Colony. Boston, Society
for the Preservation of New England Antiquities,
1935. 293 p. 36-1841 F67.D68
The subjects covered in this volume range from
details of the journey to America, through the nature
of the buildings, home furnishings, clothing, medic-
aments, manufactures, and shipping to matters such
as games, coinage, tombstone designs, and penology.
The volume does not limit itself stricdy to the Bay
Colony, and is in part representative of all the
Northern English colonies. The text is made up
largely of contemporary facts and quotations, in-
cluding personal narratives and statistical accounts.
However, these and the numerous illustrations are
presented with a minimum of interpretation by
the author, who recognizes that much of the detail
of the period has been lost, and who embarks on
little of a speculative nature.
3182. Ellis, George E. The Puritan age and rule
in the Colony of the Massachusetts Bay,
1629-1685. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1888. 576
p. 1-12030 F67.E47
The author states in his preface that his aim in
this remarkably extensive work is to set forth "the
motives of estrangement and grievance which
prompted the exile of the Puritans to this Bay, and
the grounds on which they proceeded to exercise
their severe and arbitrary rule here. The points to
be chiefly emphasized in this historic exposition are
these: the relations of the Puritans, as Nonconform-
ists, to the Church of England at the period of its
reformation and reconstruction in the transition
from the Papacy to Protestantism; the peculiar esti-
mate of and way of using the Bible, characteristic
of the Puritans under the critical circumstances of
the time which had substituted the Book for the
authority of the Papal and the Prelatical Church;
their finding in that book the pattern and basis for
a wholly novel form of government in civil and
religious affairs, with an equally novel condition of
citizenship; their attempt at legislation and adminis-
tration on theocratic principles; and the discom-
fiture of their scheme as involving injustice, oppres-
sion, and intolerance." The story is carried to the
loss of the colony charter, when Puritan rule ceased
to be absolute and a royal governor was appointed.
While the author displays a sympathetic under-
standing of many of the problems of the Puritans,
he regularly maintains a scholarly objectivity to-
wards his subject. The book is based on an exten-
sive knowledge of the primary and secondary
printed and manuscript materials available at that
time. Subsequent scholarship has modified some
points, and raised some new issues, but Ellis' study
remains basically sound, as well as the most inclusive
study, and nearly the only one which puts its main
emphasis on the matters which the Puritans them-
selves regarded as primary.
3183. Franklin, Benjamin. Writings. Collected
and edited, with a life and introd., by Albert
Henry Smyth. New York, Macmillan, 1907. 10 v.
illus. 33-12844 E302.F82 1907
Volume 1 contains bibliographical introduction
(p. 1-217) and the "Autobiography" (p. [219]-
439)! writings and correspondence arranged chron-
ologically, volumes 2-10 (p. 137); the "Life" by the
editor, volume 10 (p. 139-510), and list of corre-
spondents and full indexes (p. 511-633).
3184. Franklin, Benjamin. Letters to the press,
1 758-1 775, collected and edited by Verner
W. Crane. Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute
of Early American History and Culture at Williams-
burg, Va., by the University of North Carolina
Press, 1950. lxv, 308 p. 50-8151 E302.6.F75A12
3185. Van Doren, Carl. Benjamin Franklin.
New York, Viking Press, 1938. 845 p. ports.
38-31193 E302.6.F8V32
"General bibliography": p. [785] -788.
3186. Crane, Verner W. Benjamin Franklin and
a rising people. Boston, Little, Brown, 1954.
219 p. (The Library of American biography)
54-5136 E302.6.F8C77 1954
3187. Stourzh, Gerald. Benjamin Franklin and
American foreign policy. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago 1'; . ;. 3^5 p.
54-9 J55 1 -
Benjamin Franklin (1706-1790) had so vei
a genius it is impossible lo offer an adequate, and
330 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
at the same time short, summary of his career.
Some aspects of it are treated in other sections of
the bibliography, such as Literature, Science and
Technology, Philosophy, and Education (consult
the Index). He is included here as a leading
statesman and diplomat of his period, although
the other aspects of his life have equal importance
in a broader conception of history. Franklin's
career of public service began with minor offices
in Pennsylvania. His first major office, held from
1753 to 1774, was Deputy Postmaster General. In
1754 he represented Pennsylvania at the Albany
Congress, where he presented a plan for the union
of the Colonies. From 1757 to 1775 he spent most
of his time abroad, as the agent for Pennsylvania
at London, appointed to represent that colony's
cause to the British Government; in time he was
also appointed by Georgia, Massachusetts, and
New Jersey as their agent. When conciliation
failed he returned to America, where he served in
the Continental Congress, and was chosen Post-
master General. During the war he represented
the United States in France and obtained French
support for the American cause. He was a mem-
ber of the commission signatory to the Treaty of
Paris (1783). In 1785 he returned to America,
where for 3 years he served as president of Penn-
sylvania. He then represented that State at the
Constitutional Convention, where he was prom-
inent as an elder statesman. Shordy afterwards
he died, the first American to have achieved inter-
national acclaim and renown, and by some re-
garded as the greatest figure of his era.
Franklin's collected Writings reveal not only his
political role in history, but also the many other
aspects of his personality. Almost everything he
wrote is infused with the wit and style which has
established him as one of the leading literary fig-
ures of the period. His extensive scientific and
philosophical writings (separated here, although
he wrote when science was still largely a part of
philosophy) reveal his extensive contributions in
these fields. His semiofficial and even some of
his satirical works reveal his extensive governmen-
tal concerns and accomplishments. Finally, while
his famous Autobiography (see nos. 123-127)
covers his earlier years, his extensive correspond-
ence reflects his many interests and roles, as well
as his close connection with leading figures of the
age. Regrettably, Smyth's edition of Franklin's
writings is incomplete, largely because of the many
Franklin items which have since been uncovered.
However, a new edition of Franklin's writings is
in preparation, and the first volume is scheduled
for publication by the Yale University Press in the
spring of 1959.
Outstanding among the volumes needed to
supplement Smyth's edition is Professor Crane's
Benjamin Franklin's Letters to the Press, 1758-
1775, which covers the material written by Frank-
lin for publication while he was a colonial agent
in England. Since much of this was originally
published anonymously or pseudonymously, and
since many of Franklin's manuscripts for the pe-
riod have been lost, extensive research was needed
to uncover them. Crane's work reprints only such
press letters as are not included in Smyth's edition;
however, all pertinent material is traced, and ref-
erence made to Smyth when the letter is to be
found there. Since Franklin's work in England
has been relatively neglected, this volume is essen-
tial for an understanding of that phase of his
career, and of the American position on political
issues at that time. Of the many biographies of
Franklin, Van Doren's 1938 publication surpasses
earlier ones by its extensive use of intensive 20th-
century Franklin scholarship; and surpasses sub-
sequent biographies by its wide scope, as well as
in being in itself an outstanding example of the
art of biography. An interesting earlier biography
is William Cabell Bruce's Benjamin Franklin,
Self -Revealed, a book consisting largely of extracts
from Franklin's writings in a topical arrangement,
with informed connecting passages by Bruce. A
recent short and yet scholarly biography is Crane's
Benjamin Franklin and a Rising People, which at-
tempts to show the life of this "first American" as
best reflecting those forces which led to the estab-
lishment of a new nation. Stourzh's scholarly Ben-
jamin Franklin and American Foreign Policy, like
a number of other studies, focuses on but one side of
this many-sided genius. Stourzh attempts not
only to depict Franklin's direct role in foreign
affairs in behalf of America, but also to analyze
Franklin's political thought. A work that ap-
proaches his foreign influence from quite another
point of view is Alfred Owen Aldridge's Franklin
and His French Contemporaries (New York, New
York University Press, 1957. 2^° P-)> which dis-
cusses not only Franklin's activities in France, but
more especially the French reaction to this sage
from the American wilderness; for this purpose a
large part of the book is devoted to presenting and
discussing references to Franklin in contemporary
French writings.
3188. Gipson, Lawrence Henry. The British Em-
pire before the American Revolution: pro-
vincial characteristics and sectional tendencies in the
era preceding the American crisis. Caldwell, Idaho,
Caxton Printers, 1936-56. 9 v. maps.
36-20870 DA500.G5
GENERAL HISTORY / 33 1
Volumes 4-9, issued without subtitle, have im-
print: New York, A. A. Knopf.
Contents. — 1. Great Britain and Ireland. — 2.
The Southern plantations. — 3. The Northern plan-
tations.— 4. Zones of international friction; North
America, south of the Great Lakes region, 1748-
1754. — 5. Zones of international friction; the Great
Lakes frontier, Canada, the West Indies, India,
1748-1754. — 6. The great war for the Empire: The
years of defeat, 1754-1757. — 7. The great war for
the Empire: The victorious years, 1758-1760. — 8.
The great war for the Empire: The culmination,
1760-1763. — 9. The triumphant Empire: new re-
sponsibilities within the enlarged Empire, 1763—
1766.
Dr. Gipson (b. 1880) was a graduate of the Uni-
versity of Idaho when a Rhodes scholarship took
him to Oxford for 3 years; from 1924 to 1952 he
was professor of history at Lehigh University
(Bethlehem, Pa.). Soon after his establishment
there he embarked upon his investigations on this
subject, which have been continuously subsidized
by that university and several foundations, and
which have grown into the largest and most impos-
ing American historical work written in our day by
a single hand. The author's purpose has been to
produce a large-scale study of the British Empire
between the Peace of Aix la-Chapelle (1748) and
the outbreak of the American Revolution, so as to
provide a more adequate basis for the interpretation
of the latter event than has hitherto been available.
The first three volumes provide "a view of the old
Empire in a state of tranquillity and equilibrium
for the last time in its history." The next two con-
centrate upon "the problems involved in the ex-
panding frontiers of the Empire," which were
brought about by neither the central nor the colonial
governments, but "primarily as the result of the
restless activity of individuals or groups, with or
without legal warrant." Volumes 6-8 narrate the
conclusive struggle with France, as well as the Euro-
pean war into which it merged; this war is viewed
as brought on by French aggression, taken up by
the home government for the protection of vital
colonial interests, and won by the energy and re-
sources of Britain. The latest volume to appear
offers "a detailed analysis of developments within
the new acquisitions" of the Empire in the years
immediately following the peace which brought
them, and extends to the trans-Appalachian region,
Nova Scotia, Canada, East and West Florida, four
new West Indian islands, and Bengal. The work
employs a thorough analysis of successive situations,
proceeds at an unhurried pace, and is written in
clear and straightforward prose.
3189. Graham, Gerald S. Empire of the North
Atlantic; the maritime struggle for North
America. Toronto, University of Toronto Press,
1950. xvii, 338 p. maps. 50-14296 E45.G7
A narrative of the rise and supremacy of British
sea power, with particular reference to its role in
making Britain the principal colonial power in
North America. Introductory chapters oudine the
long period of Spanish supremacy and the bases of
French sea power, and sketch the rise of British sea
power in the second half of the 17th century. The
long duel between Britain and France, from the
outbreak of the War of the League of Augsburg
(1689) to the conquest of Canada (1760), is then
narrated at some length, with a unity of treatment
deriving from the author's emphasis upon the mari-
time factors involved. There follow outlines of
the War of the American Revolution and of the
War of 1812, as well as of the troubled period be-
tween them, useful as concise presentations from a
British point of view. The author pursues the
theme of British supremacy in the Atlantic into the
age of iron and steam, when it was extended to all
the oceans of the world, and then to its remarkably
sudden disappearance as a consequence of the con-
struction of the German High Seas Fleet in the
first decade of the 20th century. The author, a
Canadian who has become Rhodes Professor of Im-
perial History at the University of London, has also
published two more detailed studies of portions of
his story: British Policy and Canada, IJJ4-1791; a
Study in 18th Century Trade Policy (London, New
York, Longmans, Green, 1930. 161 p. Imperial
studies, no. 4), and Sea Power and British North
America, 1783-1820; a study in British Colonial
Policy (Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1941.
302 p. Harvard historical studies, v. 46).
3190. Greene, Evarts Boutell. The foundation of
American nationality. Rev. ed. New York,
American Book Co., 1935. xii, 614, xiii-xl p. illus.
35-19098 E178.G752
Published in 1922 as volume 1 of A Short History
of the American People.
In this book Greene purposes to give the layman
and the college student a view "of our early devel-
opment as it appears in the light of . . . recent re-
search and discussion." This is because, as he notes,
the recent work of men such as Andrews, Osgood,
and Turner has "made necessary the modification
or abandonment of time-honored traditions.'' The
study recognizes American colonial history as part
of a much larger picture, but the emphasis is on the
development of the Thirteen Colonies; the story is
carried to the adoption of the Federal Constitution
in 1789. The bibliographies at the end ol each chap-
ter are designed to assist the general reaJer to lur-
332 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ther material, and are not intended to indicate
scholarly sources.
3191. Greene, Evarts Boutell. Provincial America,
1690-1740. New York, Harper, 1905. 356
p. 7 maps. (The American Nation; a history, v. 6)
5-19070 E178.A54
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 325-340.
The period covered by this book was one in
which the English colonies were rapidly expanding,
and for that reason first giving evidences of unity,
as the gaps between them were lessened or elim-
inated. At the same time it was a period in which
the British colonial system was evolving, and in the
process uncovering conflicts between the home gov-
ernment and the colonies. This evolution of colo-
nial administration, along with the impact of the
wars with the French and their Indian allies, fills a
large part of this book. The narrative, which limits
itself to the Colonies later to become part of the
United States, and devotes little attention to the
European background events, also covers other
aspects of colonial history, including the commerce
and culture of the period.
3192. Greene, Evarts Boutell. The provincial
governor in the English colonies of North
America. New York, Longmans, Green, 1898.
292 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 7)
98-1530 JK66.G8
Appendix C. "List of authorities cited": p. 271-
Before 1688 British colonial administration was
confused by a diversity of origins and franchises, by
an unformed and shifting policy, and by a rudimen-
tary development of organization. After 1763 the
heightened tone of policy, and the contrary reaction
which it provoked in the Colonies, produced a quite
altered set of administrative circumstances. The
long and relatively stable intervening period there-
fore provides the best opportunity of "presenting
a simple view of the normal working of the provin-
cial constitution," and Professor Greene further
provides for the homogeneity of his subject matter
by excluding from consideration Connecticut and
Rhode Island, where the survival of older charters
preserved an elective governorship. Within these
limits, this is a clear and well-rounded study of the
more formal aspects of the office which was consid-
erably the most important in royal and proprietary
provinces alike: the governor commissioned and
instructed by the British Crown. After two intro-
ductory chapters which trace the complex anteced-
ents of the stabilized system after the Glorious Revo-
lution, the book proceeds analytically, considering
in turn the governor's appointment, tenure, and
emoluments, his council, his executive powers, and
his relations with the provincial judiciary. Last and
most important are his relations with his chief rival,
the popularly elected assembly, to which complex
situation three chapters are devoted. In the latter
half of the period, it is concluded, the assemblies
everywhere encroached upon his executive func-
tions, and "in some of the provinces the governor's
power had been reduced within very narrow limits."
A final chapter deals with the governor's legal and
political accountability both to the home govern-
ment and to the people of his province.
3193. Harper, Lawrence A. The English naviga-
tion laws; a seventeenth-century experiment
in social engineering. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1939. xiv, 503 p.
40-244 HE587.G7H3
"Table of statutes cited": p. [449]~46o.
Bibliography: p. [417P447. _
In this study of what Americans usually call the
Acts of Trade, the author states that his chief pur-
pose "is to analyze the process of social engineering,
as exemplified by the Navigation Acts." His study
concentrates on the second half of the 17th century.
The first part of the book deals with the origin of
the laws, the second with their enforcement in Eng-
land, and the third with their enforcement in the
Colonies. The fourth part is a study of the results
of the acts; for this purpose the time covered has
been pushed both forward and backward so as to
extend from the days of the Spanish Armada to the
Victorian period. Since the acts were English in
origin, designed to build up the English merchant
marine and further mercantilist ideas of national
prosperity, the subject has been approached from
an English point of view. The author has treated
the specifically American consequences of these acts
in an essay, "The Effect of the Navigation Acts on
the Thirteen Colonies," contributed to The Era of
the American Revolution: Studies Inscribed to
Evarts Boutell Greene, edited by Richard B. Morris
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1939), p.
3-39-
3194. Keys, Alice Mapelsden. Cadwallader Col-
den; a representative eighteenth century of-
ficial. New York, Columbia University Press, 1906.
xiv, 375 p. 6-40257 F122.C69
Colden (1688-1776) was of Scotch ancestry and
came to America as a physician in 1710. In 1720 he
embarked on his long career of public service when
appointed surveyor-general of New York. The fol-
lowing year he was appointed to the governor's
council, and he still held that position when in 1761
he became lieutenant governor, an office he held
until his death, although its powers had largely dis-
appeared with the outbreak of the Revolution. His
GENERAL HISTORY / 333
long support of the royal authority, and his exten-
sive activities in other fields, have enabled his biog-
rapher to write not merely his life, but also a political
and social history of the province of New York in
his time. His activities as a progressive scientist,
especially in physics, botany, and medicine, as a
philosopher, and as a historian of the Iroquois In-
dians, are reflected here, as they are on a larger scale
in Colden's Letters and Papers, iju-fiyj^] (New
York, Printed for the New York Historical Society,
1918-37. 9 v.).
3195. Labaree, Leonard Woods. Royal govern-
ment in America; a study of the British
colonial system before 1783. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1930. 491 p. (Yale historical
publications. Studies, 6) 30-25475 JK54.L3
"Bibliographical notes": p. [449]~468.
This book undertakes to depict the system of
royal government as a whole in the American Col-
onies prior to the end of the Revolution. On the
ground that before 1675 the details of the political
system "were so varied and the attitude of the Eng-
lish officials toward them so unsettled that the early
years contribute little to the later story," the author
begins his study with the situation in the last quarter
of the 17th century. In his preface he says that he
has "tried to explain what the instruments were by
which royal authority was exercised in America,
what the machinery of royal government was and
how it operated, what the governmental policies of
the British officials were and what influences caused
them to be adopted, and how the colonists reacted
to these policies when the royal governors tried to
apply them. Above all, I have concerned myself
with that great contest between the assemblies and
the crown over the royal prerogative, which is the
central theme of the constitutional history of the
colonies." Professor Labaree has collected the most
important class of source materials for his study in
his edition of Royal Instructions to British Colonial
Governors, 1670-1776 (New York, Appleton-Cen-
tury, 1935. 2 v.). He is also the author of Con-
servatism in Early American History (New York,
New York University Press, 1948. 182 p.), a scries
of lectures in which he traces the bases and influence
of conservatism in the later colonial period.
3196. Miller, Perry. Roger Williams: his contri-
bution to the American tradition. Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Mcrrill, 1953. 273 p. (Makers of
the American tradition series)
53-8874 F82.W788
3197. Winslow, Ola Elizabeth. Master Roger
Williams, a biography. New York, Mac-
millan, 1957. 328 p. 57-10016 F82.W692
Includes bibliography.
Williams (ca. 1603-1683), the vigorous opponent
of the Massachusetts theocracy and the founder of
Rhode Island, is discussed as a writer in Chapter I
on Literature (nos. 84-89). Professor Miller's vol-
ume is in part a selection from the writings there
listed, with useful editorial notes (p. 261-266), and
in part a discriminating attempt to relate his thought
both to the theological controversies of the 17th
century and to the subsequent tradition of American
liberalism, which has hailed him as a forerunner, at
times with more enthusiasm than understanding.
Miss Winslow's study of Williams is the most re-
cent full-length scholarly biography of him; in it
the author attempts to balance out the early "harsh"
judgments and more modern tendencies to make of
the man a glorious myth. She remarks that our
relative ignorance of Williams combined with the
complexities of his personality guarantee that future
biographies will vary in the interpretation. Another
recent biography of note is Samuel Hugh Brocku-
nier's The Irrepressible Democrat, Roger Williams
(New York, Ronald Press, 1940. 305 p.), in which
Williams is viewed as a great man, although some
earlier assumptions are called into question; Miller
views this work as a "sad example of the misrepre-
sentation that comes when Williams is presented
too easily in the language of twentieth-century
thought." A somewhat less critical and more favor-
able study, which has the same "twentieth-century
thought" aspect as Brockunier, is James E. Ernst's
Roger Williams, New England Firebrand (New
York, Macmillan, 1932. 538 p.); while highly par-
tial to his subject, the author does take some account
of the traditional controversy.
3198. Morison, Samuel Eliot. Builders of the Bay
Colony. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1930.
xiv, 365 p. A30-1055 NN
Bibliography: p. [347]~355-
The copies in the Library of Congress arc of a
limited edition on finer paper, bearing the tide
Massachusettensis de conditoribus (F67.M86).
A series of biographical sketches of individuals
representing the various aspects of life in the col-
ony— "adventurous and artistic, political and eco-
nomic, literary and scientific, legal, educational,
and evangelical." The first four individuals dis-
cussed— Richard Haklmt, Captain John Smith.
Thomas Morton, and John White — prepared the
way for the settlers of 1650. The others include
John Winthrop, Thomas Shepard, John I lull, 1 Icnrv
Dunster, Nathaniel Ward, Robert Child, John Win
throp, Jr., John Eliot, and Anne Bradstreet This
book is distinguished not only .is an outstanding ex
ample of literary historical writing, but also .is one
of the few books conveying the nature, significance,
334 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and purpose of the Puritans with understanding and
respect, thus enabling the modern reader better to
appreciate and understand this group from which
most Americans feel alienated, and towards which
many feel hostile. The well-chosen illustrations on
45 plates add considerably to the merit of the book.
3199. Murdock, Kenneth Ballard. Increase
Mather, the foremost American Puritan.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1925. xv,
442 p. illus. 25-21276 F67.M477
"Appendix C. List of books referred to": p.
[407]~4i5. "Appendix D. Checklist of Mather's
writings": p. [4i6]~422.
Increase Mather (1 639-1 723) was born in
Dorchester, Mass., where his father was a leading
and strict Puritan minister. In time the son him-
self became the foremost New England Puritan of
his generation. In 1664 he became teacher at the
Boston Second Church. Sometime later he became
president of Harvard College, a position he held for
nearly two decades. In 1688 he represented Massa-
chusetts in England; his relative success, however,
came when William III displaced James II toward
the end of 1688. Mather obtained a new charter
for Massachusetts, and at the same time the unusual
political privilege of being allowed to nominate the
new officers for its government. He returned to
Massachusetts, where he defended his diplomatic
and political activities, but as before gave his main
attention to the church. In the course of his career
he also established himself not only as the most
prolific author of his generation (political tracts,
histories, sermons, etc.), but also one of the best in
more strictly literary terms. Professor Murdock 's
biography of Mather shows him to have been an
intelligent and unusually liberal person for his age.
The book also attempts to depict that age to some
extent; for Mather was not only involved in most
of the public affairs of his day, but was also in many
ways representative of his society; the book is thus
as much general history as it is biography. An
earlier life of Increase Mather was that by his famous
son, Cotton Mather (q. v.): Parentator (Boston, B.
Green for N. Belknap, 1724. 239 p.), an outstand-
ing example of colonial biography. Increase Math-
er's own autobiography has not yet appeared in book
form.
3200. Nissenson, Samuel G. The patroon's do-
main. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1937. 416 p. (New York State Historical
Association series; D. R. Fox, editor; no. 5)
37-20744 F122.1.N58
Bibliography: p. [3891-397.
According to the preface, "This attempt to de-
scribe the origin, the economic background and the
political development and disintegration of the
'patroon system' as embodied in Rensselaerswyck,
its one exemplar in New York, while complete
within itself, serves also as an introduction to the
history of the town and county institutions which
for a time paralleled and ultimately supplanted the
patroon's administrative organization." The book
opens with a brief account of the founding and de-
velopment of the Dutch West Indies Company, and
its early commercial attitude towards New Nether-
land, later New York. There follows a history of
the development during the 17th century of
Rensselaerswyck, the large manorial grant on both
sides of the Hudson River just south of Albany,
and the patroonship's relationship to the home
country and the company, as well as, in the later
stages, to the new English system of laws, as the
English took over. In large part the work is thus
a special study of the 17th-century development in
New York of laws affecting land tenure.
3201. Original narratives of early American his-
tory, reproduced under the auspices of the
American Historical Association; general editor:
Jfohn] Franklin Jameson. New York, Scribner,
1906-17. 19 v. 7-6642 E187.O7 (A-Z)
Dr. Jameson, the editor of this series, states in a
"General Preface to the Original Narratives of Early
American History," which appears only in The
Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985-1503 (no.
3215), that the plan of the series was approved by
the American Historical Association at its annual
meeting of December 1902, and that its purpose was
to provide "a comprehensive and well-rounded col-
lection of those classical narratives on which the
early history of the United States is founded, or of
those narratives which, if not precisely classical, hold
the most important place as sources of American
history anterior to 1700." Many of these, he noted,
had become so scarce and expensive that no ordinary
library could hope to possess a complete set. The
series was to publish not extracts, but whole works
or distinct parts of works. Works in English were
to be reprinted from the earliest or best editions, and
works in foreign languages from the best trans-
lations available, or in new translations if no satis-
factory ones were obtainable. A few works were
to be published from manuscript for the first time.
The special editors were to supply introductions
concerning the author and the value of his work as
a source, as well as brief notes enabling the reader
"to understand and estimate rightly the statements
of the text." Each volume is supplied with fac-
similes of title pages and of maps contemporary with
the narratives and serving to illustrate them. "No
subsequent sources," said Dr. Jameson, "can have
quite the intellectual interest, none quite the senti-
GENERAL HISTORY / 335
mental value, which attaches to these early narra-
tions, springing direct from the brains and hearts
of the nation's founders." The series has proved
quite as useful as its distinguished planner hoped,
and most of its volumes are currently available in
reprint editions from Barnes and Noble, New York.
3202. Andrews, Charles McLean. Narratives of
the insurrections, 1675-1690. 1915. 414 p.
15-4852 E187.A563
E187.O7A6
3203. Bolton, Herbert E., ed. Spanish exploration
in the Southwest, 1542-1706. 1916. 487 p.
16-6066 F799.B69
3204. Bradford, William. History of Plymouth
Plantation, 1606-1646; edited by William T.
Davis. 1908. xv, 437 p. 8-7375 F68.B802
E187.O7B7
See entry nos. 1-6.
3205. Burr, George Lincoln, ed. Narratives of the
witchcraft cases, 1648-1706. 1914. xviii,
467 p. M-9773 BF1573.A2B8
See entry no. 41.
3206. Burrage, Henry S., ed. Early English and
French voyages, chiefly from Hakluyt, 1534—
1608. 1906. xxii, 451 p. 6-44365 E127.B96
3207. Champlain, Samuel de. Voyages, 1604-
1618; edited by W[illiam] L. Grant. 1907.
377 p. 7-22899 F1030.1.C494
See entry no. 3156.
3208. Danckaerts, Jasper. Journal, 1679-1680;
edited by Bardett Burleigh James and J[ohn]
Frank Jameson. 1913. xxxi, 3 13 p.
13-13556 E162.D18
E187.O7D3
"The present translation is substantially that of
Mr. Henry C. Murphy, as presented in his edition
of 1867," under title: Journal of a Voyage to New
Yorl{ and a Tour in Several of the American Col-
onies in i6yor-8o, by Jasper Dankers and Peter Sluy-
tcr.
3209. Hall, Clayton Colman, ed. Narratives of
early Maryland, 1633— 1684. 1910. 460 p.
10-23763 F184.H19
3210. Jameson, John Franklin, ed. Narratives of
New Ncderland, 1609-1664. 1909. 478 p.
9-24463 F122.1.J31
E187.O7J3
321 1. Johnson, Edward. Wonder-working provi-
dence, 1628-1651; edited by J[ohn] Frank-
lin Jameson. 1910. 285 p. 10-9809 F67J675
3212. Kellogg, Louise Phelps, ed. Early narratives
of the Northwest, 1634-1699. 1917. xiv,
382 p. 17-6235 F482.K29
3213. Lincoln, Charles H., ed. Narratives of the
Indian wars, 1675-1699. 1913. 316 p.
13-24819 E82.L73
E187.O7L5
3214. Myers, Albert Cook, ed. Narratives of early
Pennsylvania, West New Jersey and Dela-
ware, 1630- 1707. 1912. xiv, 476 p.
12-461 1 F106.M98
3215. The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985—
1503: The voyages of the Northmen, ed-
ited by Julius E. Olson. The voyages of Columbus
and of John Cabot, edited by Edward Gaylord
Bourne. 1906. xv, 443 p. 6-36882 E101.N87
3216. Salley, Alexander S., ed. Narratives of early
Carolina, 1650-1708. 191 1. 388 p.
11-9548 F272.S16
E187.O7S3
3217. Spanish explorers in the Southern United
States, 1528-1543: The narrative of Alvar
Nunez Cabega de Vaca, edited by Frederick W.
Hodge. The narrative of the expedition of Her-
nando de Soto by the gentleman of Elvas, edited by
Theodore H. Lewis. The narrative of the expedi-
tion of Coronado, by Pedro de Castaneda, edited by
Frederick W. Hodge. 1907. xx, 411 p.
7-10607 E123.S75
E187.O7S7
3218. Tyler, Lyon Gardiner, ed. Narratives of
early Virginia, 1606-1625. 1907. xv, 478 p.
7-33220 F229.T994
3219. Winthrop, John. Journal, "History of New
England," 1630-1649; edited by James Ken-
dall Hosmcr. 1908. 2 v. 8-17771 F67.W785
See entry nos. 90-91.
3220. Osgood, Herbert L. The American Col-
onies in the seventeenth century. New
York, Columbia University press, 1930. 3 v.
30-26656 E191.O83
3221. Osgood, Herbert L. The American Col-
onics in the eighteenth century. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1924. 4 v.
24-3889 E195O82
33^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The American Colonies in the Seventeenth Cen-
tury, which first appeared during 1904, is a study of
the political and administrative aspects of the devel-
opment of the English continental colonies in the
17th century; it is thus also in part a study of the
development of political institutions in this area.
Social and economic aspects of colonial life are not
discussed, except in so far as they play a role in the
more political aspects of colonial history. The first
two volumes of the work discuss the situation in
the chartered and proprietary Colonies; the third
volume studies the situation in the royal Colonies,
in which category the British Government soon tried
to place all the Colonies, in order more efficiently to
administer them for what was considered the gen-
eral welfare of the homeland. Because of the ex-
tent and thoroughness of Osgood's pioneering study,
his work remains an authoritative exposition of the
early development of American political institutions.
The American Colonies in the Eighteenth Century
is a continuation left by Professor Osgood ( 1855—
1918) of Columbia University in a state somewhat
short of completion at his death. It was readied for
and seen through the press by his pupil, Dixon Ryan
Fox, who also produced a short biography: Herbert
Levi Osgood, an American Scholar (New York,
Columbia University Press, 1924. 167 p.). Taking
up where the earlier work left off, in 1690, these
four volumes continue the political and institu-
tional aspects of colonial history through the British
conquest of Canada. Much attention is given to
the four "Intercolonial Wars," as Osgood preferred
to call them in lieu of their traditional names, and
the longer administrations of individual governors
in the larger provinces are given individual treat-
ment. The creation of British agencies of colonial
administration, and the origin and development of
specific British policies are separately described.
The position of the Church of England in the Col-
onies, and the effects of immigration and the tend-
ency to westward expansion are considered. The
political narrative conveys the impression that what-
ever the type of colonial government, colonial griev-
ances and disaffection continued to increase in the
face of British policy and administration.
3222. Peare, Catherine O. William Penn; a biog-
raphy. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1957.
448 p. 56-10810 F152.2.P34
Bibliography: p. 427-444.
The most important event in the life of William
Penn (1644-1718), without which he would prob-
ably have had small historical importance, took
place at Cork, Ireland, on a summer's day in 1666,
when he was reduced to tears, and converted to the
doctrine of God as the Inner Light, by the testimony
of the Quaker Thomas Loe. Miss Peare's biography
is uncommonly penetrating in that it gives Penn's
Quakerism its proper place at the center of his life,
his character, and his influence upon the life of his
day, and so upon all succeeding times. It is based
upon prolonged research in the manuscript collec-
tions of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania and,
secondarily, of Friends House, London, and al-
though footnotes are dispensed with, documenta-
tion is provided by a series of page references at the
end (p. 415-426). The founding of Pennsylvania
is placed against its contemporary English back-
ground of the Tory and High Anglican reaction
that took hold in 1681, and led Penn to see no real
solution for the Friends save an American refuge.
"As Proprietor of Pennsylvania Penn had received
almost absolute power from his monarch"; his
greatness was evidenced by his immediate renuncia-
tion of this power for himself and his successors,
"that the will of one man may not hinder the good
of an whole country." On the other hand, William
I. Hull's William Penn, a Topical Biography (Lon-
don, New York, Oxford University Press, 1937.
362 p.) emphasizes the peripheral many-sidedness
of Penn's career, concerning which it assembles
much out-of-the-way information. William Wistar
Comfort's William Penn, 1644-1718, a Tercenten-
ary Estimate (Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1944. 185 p.) is a widely esteemed
interpretative sketch which views Penn's career as
an attempt to implement Quaker ideals.
3223. Quinn, David B. Raleigh and the British
Empire. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 284
p. (Teach yourself history library)
49-10375 DA86.22.R2Q5 1949
A clear outline of English dealings with the New
World in the later years of Elizabeth I and the first
decade of James I, organized around the colorful if
not wholly admirable personality of Sir Walter
Raleigh (ca. 1552-1618), whom the author is care-
ful not to overrate. However, Raleigh "advanced
from the concept of a military settlement of hired
men to the view that only a real community of men,
women and children, having personal incentives
to setde and prosper, could hope to succeed." This
success, denied to Raleigh under Elizabeth, was
made possible under James by "the slow quantitative
development of English capitalism," permitting
effort on a larger scale. Professor Quinn has also
edited two extremely valuable documentary col-
lections, one concerning Raleigh's half-brother and
predecessor: The Voyages and Colonising Enter-
prises of Sir Humphrey Gilbert (London, Hakluyt
Society, 1940. 2 v.) and the other concerning
Raleigh's setdements in North Carolina:. The
Roanokje Voyages, 1584-1590; Documents to Illus-
trate the English Voyages to North America under
GENERAL HISTORY / 337
the Patent Granted to Walter Raleigh in 1584 (Lon-
don, Hakluyt Society, 1955. 2 v.).
3224. Raesly, Ellis Lawrence. Portrait of New
Netherland. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1945. 370 p. (Columbia University
studies in English and comparative literature, no.
161) A 45-1615 F122.1.R15
Bibliography: p. J345H54.
This Columbia dissertation is an attempt to pre-
sent the "pattern and philosophy of life" of the
Dutch colonists of New Netherland. The author
studies such matters as the church in the New
World, the political and social views of the colonists,
the cultural interchanges between the Dutch and
the Indians, and the early literary efforts of the
Dutch in New Netherland. In the course of this
he presents considerable information on the general
history of the colony, and especially governmental
affairs in so far as they affected the colony's cultural
life.
3225. Root, Winfred Trexler. The relations of
Pennsylvania with the British Government,
1696-1765. [Philadelphia] University of Pennsyl-
vania, 1912. 422 p. ( [Publications of the University
of Pennsylvania. History]) 12-5677 F152.R78
"Bibliographical notes": p. 397-407.
In origin a University of Pennsylvania disserta-
tion, this work studies in some detail the relations
between the chartered and proprietary province of
Pennsylvania and the British agencies of colonial
administration, from the reorganization of the latter
in 1696 to the second reorganization which followed
the French and Indian War. While the author
aims to throw light upon colonial administration in
general, he is aware that the special circumstances of
Pennsylvania differentiated it from other provinces:
its establishment under Quaker auspices led in the
earlier years of the period to much friction with
Anglicans in the province and at home over the
judicial oath and other issues, and in the later years
to a succession of crises over provincial and imperial
defense, to which the pacifist Quakers contributed
litde and that with reluctance. Furthermore, the
Penns and their governors had none of the dignities
of a king, and so fared worse in their struggle with
the provincial assembly than did the royal governors
elsewhere, so that by 1765 "within its sphere the
legislature was scarcely less powerful than the British
Parliament." But in its chapters on the administra-
tion of the acts of trade, the court of vice-admiralty,
and the royal disallowance, this study exhibits in
concrete example the same sort of situation that
obtained in the colonies generally. While British
control of the colonies in this age was not harsh or
18 1240— 60 23
oppressive, Dr. Root concludes, the central fact of
the imperial relation was the conflict of interest be-
tween a theory of empire primarily economic, and
colonial views of religious and political separatism,
individualism, and liberty.
3226. Rutledge, Joseph L. Century of conflict;
the struggle between the French and British
in colonial America. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1956. 530 p. maps. (Canadian history series,
v. 2) 56-9541 F1030.R93
Mr. Rutledge, a Canadian magazine writer and
editor, here presents the story of the French and
English conflict for North America. The story,
which tends to focus on personalities, opens with
Governor Frontenac's arrival in Quebec in 1672,
and closes with the English victories at Quebec and
Montreal some 90 years later, establishing English
dominance on the continent. While events through-
out North America are considered, the author's
main interest is in the activities in and about Can-
ada. The history itself, which covers much the same
ground as Parkman (q. v.), but with details from
more recent studies, is "an attempt to make charac-
ters and events move out of the stiff formalities of
history, to find flesh and blood and a sense of imme-
diacy in the crowding events."
3227. Sachse, William L. The colonial American
in Britain. Madison, University of Wiscon-
sin Press, 1956. 290 p. 56-5887 DA125.A6S3
Dealing with persons who had setded in or been
born in the thirteen mainland Colonies, and who
later went to England prior to 1776, Sachse here
attempts to study their motives for going to England
and their activities and attitudes once there. Many
went on business, a large proportion went to study,
some retired to England after a successful career, a
fair number returned because on economic or legal
missions, official or semiofficial, and some held
"diplomatic" positions in England. Almost none
traveled to England purely for pleasure, since the
trip was so strenuous and expensive. Nevertheless,
there was a strong drive to visit the homeland, and
business reasons were often found. Most of the
Americans visiting England came from the more
populous and prosperous Colonies, such as Virginia,
Massachusetts, South Carolina, and Maryland. Mr.
Sachse pays some attention to English influences on
the visitors, and their influences on England, but
that difficult topic is not his main concern. The
material for the study is in large part gleaned from
diaries, journals, and letters, many still in manu-
script. The work reflects much of colonial life and
standards, while focusing on an important aspect of
them.
338 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3228. Starkey, Marion L. The Devil in Massa-
chusetts, a modern inquiry into the Salem
witch trials. New York, Knopf, 1949. xviii, 310,
vii p. 49-10395 BF1576.S8 1949
"Selected bibliography": p. 301-310.
The Salem witch trials have already been men-
tioned under Burr's Narratives of the Witchcraft
Cases (no. 3205), and they are also dealt with in
several works appearing in the Literature section of
this bibliography. Miss Starkey 's account of the
mass hysteria of 1692 in Salem is deliberately de-
signed to have overtones for a later age. However,
it is basically a straightforward and lively narrative
of the trials and the events surrounding them, as
well as some of the events that followed from them
in later years. The work may also be considered a
psychological study, for the author attempts to
understand the mental functionings of those in-
volved, and through psychology does make some of
their strange behavior more comprehensible to a
latter-day audience.
3229. Tolles, Frederick B. James Logan and the
culture of provincial America. Boston,
Litde, Brown, 1957. 228 p. (The Library of
American biography) 57—6439 F152.L85
Logan (1674-1751) was of Scottish descent,
though born in Ireland. His father had been con-
verted to Quakerism in 1671, and the family under-
went numerous difficulties because of their religion.
In 1699 James Logan became secretary to William
Penn, and the same year sailed with him to Penn-
sylvania. There he rose rapidly in political service,
and for the rest of his life was a major factor in
provincial affairs. He came as a scholar, and main-
tained wide interests throughout his life; he was
also one of the leading American scientists of the
period. However, he was best known as a leading
spokesman for the conservative proprietary interest.
In addition, he was for many years the leading
peacemaker between the Whites and the Indians in
the middle Colonies. Tolles' study traces this career
in its many aspects of scholar, trader, diplomat,
statesman, etc., and at the same time relates it to
colonial life and government.
3230. Wallace, Paul A. W. Conrad Weiser, 1696-
1760, friend of colonist and Mohawk. Phil-
adelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1945.
xiv, 648 p. illus. ' 45-8858 F152.W4286
At the age of 13 Conrad Weiser was brought by
his father from Wurttemberg in Germany to the
New York frontier, and four years later he spent
the winter with a Mohawk chief, acquiring the
foundation of his unrivaled knowledge of Indian
languages and customs. After 10 years spent on his
own farm in an Indian village, he transferred in
1729 to the Pennsylvania frontier, where his Iro-
quois connections gave him an exceptional influ-
ence in the Indian affairs of the province and made
him, for two decades, the principal mediator be-
tween red man and white in the region. He is
usually credited with the largest part in keeping the
Iroquois Confederacy faithful to the English alli-
ance. He shortly became a leading figure among
the Pennsylvania Germans, furthering their efforts
to retain their own culture by means of a German-
language press. He also took a prominent part in
German religious developments, deserting the Lu-
theran Church in which he was born for various
Pietist departures, but ultimately returning to the
Lutheran fold. During his last two decades he held
a succession of appointments as magistrate and
military officer under the provincial government,
being almost the only German to do so. Mr. Wal-
lace narrates his unique career in great detail, basing
himself upon such primary sources as Weiser's own
journals, in which many of his expeditions into the
wilderness are recorded. Arthur D. Graeff's Con-
rad Weiser, Pennsylvania Peacemaker, published
in 1945 as volume 8 of the publications of the
Pennsylvania German Folklore Society, is on a
somewhat smaller scale (406 p.), but equally based
on original research.
3231. Wallace, Paul A. W. The Muhlenbergs of
Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1950. 358 p. illus.
50-5892 CS71.M95 1950
This book is a study of Henry Melchior Muhlen-
berg (1711-1787) and his three sons. The father
came to America in 1742 as a Lutheran teacher and
minister. The Lutheran religion continued to play
a prominent role in the family history, as Muhlen-
berg, by regularizing lax procedures and developing
a synodal organization, established an American
center for the church. The father quickly estab-
lished himself in America, and before long was
head of one of the leading colonial families. In this
respect, the book reflects not only life in Pennsyl-
vania at that time, but the process of rapid Amer-
icanization, and even much of what lay behind the
Revolutionary War. In that war one of the sons,
Peter, left the pulpit to become a major general.
Another son, Frederick Augustus, had a distin-
guished political career, and was the first speaker
of the U. S. House of Representatives. The third
brother, Henry, devoted himself to religion, but was
also famous as president of Franklin (later Franklin
and Marshall) College and as one of the leading
botanists of the day. Thus the Muhlenbergs played
a major part in the transition of America from colo-
nialism to independence.
GENERAL HISTORY / 339
3232. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The
founding of American civilization; the mid-
dle Colonies. New York, Scribner, 1938. 367 p.
illus. 38-27360 E169.1.W37
This history of the middle Colonies (New York,
New Jersey, and Pennsylvania) preceded the
author's volumes on the South and on Massachu-
setts, and had a considerably less worked-over sub-
ject matter. Here he describes the early settlements
and their development. Much attention is devoted
to architecture, while political matters are relatively
slighted. Religious concerns, such as the affairs of
Puritans in New Jersey and Quakers in Pennsyl-
vania, are considered in so far as they influenced the
establishment and development of communities. In
this area diversity of language also played a prom-
inent role and is well studied. The net effect is a
close picturing of the everyday life in the middle
Colonies, without much of the "grand stage" acting
usually found in histories more concerned with
political and military matters.
3233. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The Old
South; the founding of American civiliza-
tion. New York, Scribner, 1942. xiv, 364 p. illus.
42-12383 F212.W5
This volume is a "study of Maryland, Virginia,
North Carolina and South Carolina, for the most
part during the colonial and early national periods,"
with the major emphasis on Virginia and Mary-
land. Topics such as "political history, church his-
tory, the plantation system, [and] slavery" have
been neglected because of previous extensive studies
of them. The book concentrates on the evolution
of Southern society and the factors which went into
its formation. To a large extent this is studied
through the architecture of the period, "because it
serves so admirably to illustrate the forces which
created our civilization." Attention is also given to
agricultural developments and to the tools and prod-
ucts of various classes of artisans.
3234. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The plant-
ers of colonial Virginia. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1922. 260 p.
.23-3542 F229.W493
This history of colonial Virginia studies its eco-
nomic foundations in such matters as the spread
of population in relation to the cultivation of to-
bacco and transportation problems. Considerable
attention is devoted to land grants, indentured
servants, and the effects of slavery on types of to-
bacco grown, farming methods used, and the Eng-
lish home market. Extensive statistics are cited,
and quit-rent rolls for the counties of Virginia in
1704-5 (p. 183-247) are printed in full. Thus the
author impressively interprets Virginia as a to-
bacco colony, whose development was first geared
to the production of tobacco by white farmers; how-
ever, with the relatively late establishment of slavery
in the colony, production shifted to low-grade to-
bacco mass-produced, the small farmer could no
longer compete, and even the indentured servant
became unprofitable to his master. In this way
came about the splitting of Virginia society into an
aristocracy and its slaves, the intermediate groups
having fled the colony. Two earlier works of Dr.
Wertenbaker, Patrician and Plebeian in Virginia,
originally published in 1910, and Virginia under the
Stuarts, 1607-1688, originally published in 1914, have
recently been reprinted, along with this one, under
the general title, The Shaping of Colonial Virginia
(New York, Russell & Russell, 1958. 239, 260,
271 p.).
3235. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The Puri-
tan oligarchy; the founding of American
civilization. New York, Scribner, 1947. 359 p.
illus. 47-30879 F67.W4
This is a study of Massachusetts under Puritan
government. Professor Wertenbaker refers to this
regime as an oligarchy "since from its inception it
was the government of the many by the few, a
government by the comparatively small body of
Church members." After reviewing the forces and
events leading to the migration of the Puritans to
Massachusetts, the author goes on to consider de-
tails of the establishment of the new governing
communities. Matters such as the English manor
prototypes for New England town designs are dis-
cussed, followed by a consideration of the new fac-
tors which inevitably transformed these prototypes
in their practical application. While considerable
attention is given to the activities of the clergy, the
author also devotes space to such matters as archi-
tecture and literature. He closes with a discussion
of the decline of Puritan power, which he sees as
starting after the witchcraft trials, when the
clergy had so disastrously lost their battle against
rationalism.
3236. Wright, Louis B. The cultural life of the
American Colonies, 1607-1763. New York,
Harper, 1957. xiv, 292 p. illus. (The New
American Nation series) 56-11090 E162.W89
Bibliography: p. 253-274.
In carrying out his aim "to provide a brief in-
sight into the cultural developments of the thirteen
British colonies which later became the United
States," the author derives these developments from
two main areas of colonial society: the agrarian
aristocracies of Virginia, Maryland, South Caro-
lina, and New York; and the aristocracy of trade
which emerged in New England, New York City,
340 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and Philadelphia, and which owed its position to a
widespread acceptance of "the gospel of work."
The several elements of culture are topically and
separately handled, from religion and education to
science and the press, a treatment which has the
disadvantage of blurring the considerable distinc-
tions between the conditions of the 17th century
and those of the 18th. The volume makes skillful
use of the now huge body of monographic literature,
much of it confined to the development of a single
element in a single colony, and itemizes this in the
considerable bibliography.
E. The American Revolution
3237. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. Western lands
and the American Revolution. New York,
Appleton-Century for the Institute for Research in
the Social Sciences, University of Virginia, 1937.
xv, 413 p. maps. ([The University of Virginia
Institute for Research in the Social Sciences. In-
stitute monograph no. 25]) 37-20445 E210.A15
Bibliography: p. 370-392.
A narrative account of the development of the
trans-Appalachian West from the mid- 1 8th century
to the end of the Confederation period. The causal
relationship of the Western land question to the
American Revolution is held by the author to be
not specific. The colonists' renunciation of British
rule was the occasion of a rush to the West; while
there is some discussion of the various land com-
panies involved in the trans-Appalachian "land
grab," this narrative is primarily concerned with the
political consequences of the westward movement
and with the policies of the Colonies, the Continental
Congress, the several states, and the British Govern-
ment which affected the acquisition of land in the
West. Much of the discussion is devoted to the con-
flict of interests between the Virginians, with whom
the author's sympathies appear to lie, and the North-
ern promoters, chiefly Franklin, Joseph Galloway,
and other Pennsylvanians.
3238. Alden, John R. The American Revolution,
1 775- 1 783. New York, Harper, 1954.
294 p. (The New American Nation series)
53-11826 E208.A35
Includes bibliography.
Though not entirely neglected, the description
of the colonial home front is somewhat compressed,
while the narrative of maneuver and battle, taking
up more than half of the book, is set forth concisely
and clearly. In addition to the military aspects of
the Revolution, the British and European situations
are more fully discussed than is customary in books
on this scale. It is contended that British blunder-
ing in the years following 1763 brought on the revolt
of the American Colonies, a revolt the colonials
could probably have sustained alone, but which was
hastened to a successful conclusion by European
money and munitions, and finally by the avowed
entrance of France and of Spain into the struggle.
It is suggested that Trenton marked a turning point
more significant than the British capitulation at
Saratoga, or Howe's failure to crush the rebellion
in Pennsylvania. The American Revolution, the
author concludes, "inspired and continues to in-
spire colonials of all colors to seek freedom from
European domination."
3239. Bakeless, John E. Background to glory;
the life of George Rogers Clark. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott, 1957. 386 p.
56-11684 E207.C5B15
George Rogers Clark (1752-1818) was an heroic
but tragic figure, who won the Old Northwest for
the United States during the Revolution but died
an embittered alcoholic, physically and mentally
broken. In 1772 he made his first journey down the
Ohio to the land which he later conquered with a
few picked frontiersmen. His campaign, made in
difficult terrain against heavy odds in favor of the
British and their Indian allies, relied upon tactics
of surprise. Clark held this territory for the United
States for the duration of the War, but neither he nor
his men received pay or supplies from the Con-
tinental Congress or from Virginia; his personal
fortune and those of several other devoted patriots
were expended in the effort, and Clark was saddled
with a mass of debts which Virginia refused to
assume. More or less desperate, after the Revolu-
tion he accepted a French commission to attack the
Spanish territories west of the Mississippi, but
nothing came of this plan. His subsequent attempts
to obtain compensation or even relief were all futile,
and Clark's personality deteriorated rapidly after
1805. James Alton James' edition of the George
Rogers Clar\ Papers, IJJI-IJ84 in the Virginia
State Library (Springfield, Illinois State Historical
Library, 1912-26. 2 v. Collections of the Illinois
State Historical Library, v. 8, 19. Virginia series,
v. 3-4) provides the basic documentation for Mr.
Bakeless' biography as well as for his own Life of
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 341
George Rogers Clar\ (Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press, 1928. 534 p.), a somewhat impersonal
narrative which emphasizes the background of in-
ternational relations and intrigue.
3240. Bakeless, John E. Daniel Boone. New
York, Morrow, 1939. 480 p.
39-27625 F454.B724
At head of title: Master of the wilderness.
"Bibliography and notes": p. [423]~465.
Daniel Boone (1734-1820) before his death had
become to many the prototype of the American
frontiersman. At the age of 12 or 13 years Boone
was presented with a rifle by his father; thus began
a career during which Boone was to be a hunter,
Indian fighter, surveyor, militia officer, sheriff,
magistrate, and legislator. Boone's life began on
his father's farm in Pennsylvania and ended in
Missouri, but it is Kentucky which hails him as its
hero. Mr. Bakeless has made Boone the subject
of a documented biography based on scattered
original sources. Details of purely local interest
have been largely disregarded. The Boone legend
is subjected to a critical examination, but the Boone
who emerges still bears the qualities which made
him famous: courage, fortitude, endurance, and the
ability to "think Indian."
3241. Brown, Robert Eldon. Middle-class democ-
racy and the Revolution in Massachusetts,
1691-1780. Ithaca, Published for the American
Historical Association [by] Cornell University Press,
1955. 458 p. 56-13503 F67.B86
Bibliography: p. 409-438.
The author believes that in Massachusetts the
American Revolution was not what it has latterly
been called: a dual struggle for independence from
Britain and for a dissemination of democratic rights
at home. It was a revolt against British control,
but it was also a revolution intended to preserve a
social order rather than to change it. Economics,
politics, the educational system, religious organiza-
tion, and the organization and political influence of
the militia are all marshaled as evidence of the exist-
ence of an effective middle-class democracy in
colonial Massachusetts. To a people thus ac-
customed to political, economic, and social democ-
racy the danger in British imperial policies during
the pre-Revolutionary period was soon apparent.
The collision of this Massachusetts middle-class de-
mocracy and those policies, Mr. Brown asserts,
explains the events of the years following 1760 in
Massachusetts. It is suggested that the situation in
Massachusetts was not fundamentally different from
that in the other Colonies during the s.nne period.
A divergent view appears in Elisha P. Douglass'
Rebels and Democrats; the Struggle for Equal Po-
litical Rights and Majority Rule during the Ameri-
can Revolution (Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina [Press] 1955. 368 p.) which has rather a
misleading tide, since it is actually concerned with
"the first democratic movement in America from its
beginnings in the sporadic protests against the aristo-
cratic domination of provincial governments up to
its emergence as a political force during the forma-
tion of the first state constitutions" (1776), and
closes with a brief explanation of why democracy
made so little progress in the Nation as a whole
during the Revolution.
3242. Burnett, Edmund Cody. The Continental
Congress. New York, Macmillan, 1941.
xvii, 757 p. 41-20697 E303.B93
Bibliographical references included in Preface.
First assembled in September 1774 as a consul-
tative body of delegates from the Thirteen Colonies,
the Continental Congress soon became the central
government of the Revolutionary movement, and
eventually of the union of free states it had called
into being. Its provisional character lasted until
1781; the Articles of Confederation ratified in that
year gave it a permanent basis but quite failed to
endow it with adequate powers. This book is a
study of the principal activities of the Continental
Congress from its inception to its supersession by the
government under the Constitution in 1789. The
Continental Congress is depicted as being at the
very center of the Revolutionary scene, and the
chronological arrangement of the narrative im-
presses on the mind the day-to-day problems with
which the Congress was faced in that position. In
apparent clumsiness and ineffectuality these prob-
lems were solved, merely debated, or ignored; how-
ever, the Continental Congress did bequeath to its
successor a body of constructive legislation, princi-
ples, and practices built up during its precarious 15
years' existence. The basic source for the narrative
was Letters of Members of the Continental Con-
gress, edited by Dr. Burnett (Washington, Car-
negie Institution of Washington, 1921-36. 8 v.),
and it consists, in large part, of the extensive pref-
aces to those volumes reprinted or expanded.
3243. Dickcrson, Oliver Morton. The navigation
acts and the American Revolution. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1951.
xv, 544 p. 51-13206 E215.1.D53
Bibliography: p. ^02-335.
A discussion of representative American and
British attitudes toward the Acts of Trade and
Navigation, the provisions of those acts and their
operation, and the role of the antitrade policy
adopted by the British ministry after 1764 in the
destruction of imperial unity. The author con-
342 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
eludes that although in the span of a century a great
and loyal colonial empire had been developed
through the wise administration of the trade and
navigation laws, that empire was destroyed within
a decade when regulation for the sake of revenue
rather than regulation for the sake of development
became the object of British colonial trade policy.
The resentment and disaffection caused by this shift
to taxation and exploitation in the interest of an
English political faction varied in different areas.
Those in which the operation of the old practices
was little disturbed by the new revenue program
tended to remain loyal to their British allegiance;
but in those trading centers in which the heavy
taxation, excessive fees, and frequent seizures dic-
tated by the new policy were concentrated, the move-
ment for resistance and eventually for revolution
took shape.
3244. Dorson, Richard M., ed. America rebels;
narratives of the patriots. [New York]
Pantheon, 1953. 347 p. 53-6131 E275.A2D6
Fourteen selections, high spots "from the avail-
able abundance of Revolutionary narratives, mem-
oirs, and journals." These Revolutionary chron-
icles, the compiler thinks, "form a true people's
literature, rude and sturdy, marking the departure
of American from English prose." The extracts
include captivities with the British and the Indians,
the misadventures of Loyalists, and social life in
wartime Philadelphia, as well as glimpses of Lex-
ington, Saratoga, Vincennes, and Yorktown. The
bibliography lists 37 narratives as particularly worth
the reader's attention. Rebels and Redcoats, by
George F. Scheer and Hugh F. Rankin (Cleveland,
World Pub. Co., 1957. 572 p.), draws upon a
much larger body of personal sources from either
side, but presents it, as a rule, in mere snippets
embedded in a none-too-critical narrative provided
by the authors.
3245. Frothingham, Richard. The rise of the Re-
public of the United States. 10th ed. Bos-
ton, Little, Brown, 1910. xxii, 640 p.
11-9466 E210.F96
A work first published in 1872, and frequently
reprinted without change during the next four
decades, which retains value, notwithstanding the
immense amount of subsequent research, because
of its clearly defined purpose and logical construc-
tion. The author had the single "object of tracing
the development of the national life; a theme sep-
arate from the ordinary course of civil and military
transactions, and requiring events to be selected
from their relation to principles, and to be traced to
their causes." The ideas of local self-government
and of national union are followed from the forma-
tion of the New England Confederation in 1643 to
the inauguration of President Washington in 1789.
The work is solidly documented by quotations
from and references to the printed sources available
in 1872. The author (1812-1880) was a worthy
citizen of Charlestown, Mass., and was led to his-
tory by compiling its annals; he also wrote an ex-
tremely solid History of the Siege of Boston, 4th ed.
(Boston, Litde, Brown, 1873. 422 p.) and a Life
and Times of Joseph Warren (Boston, Litde,
Brown, 1865. xix, 558 p.) which has not been
replaced.
3246. Gipson, Lawrence H. The coming of the
Revolution, 1763-1775. New York, Harper,
1954. xiv, 287 p. illus. (The New American Na-
tion series) 54-8952 E209.G5
Bibliography: p. 235-278.
Concerning himself with British-colonial relation-
ships during the period of political maneuver which
followed the "Great War for the Empire" (1754-
63), the author's thesis is that the American Revolu-
tion stemmed from the efforts of the British Gov-
ernment to administer more efficiently the much
enlarged Empire, and from coincidental effort on
the part of the American colonists, with the threat
of hostile forces removed from their borders, to
obtain a greater autonomy. The colonists found
their field of political action restricted by a home
government intent upon carrying out stricter poli-
cies. This, in turn, brought on a transformation of
the colonial attitude from one of acquiescence in the
traditional order of things to a demand for change.
The conviction grew in the minds of the colonists
that there were more disadvantages than advantages
in their continuing to accept a subordinate position
within the Empire. The growth of federalism and
nationalism inevitably ended the period of political
maneuver and brought on that of armed conflict.
3247. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette comes to
America. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1935. 184 p. 35-15130 DC146.L2G6
Bibliography at end of each chapter.
3248. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette joins the
American Army. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1937. xv, 364 p.
37-3884 E207.L2G7
"Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter.
3249. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette and the close
of the American Revolution. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1942. 458 p. maps.
42-12337 E207.L2G68
"Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter.
GENERAL HISTORY / 343
3250. Gottschalk, Louis R. Lafayette between the
American and the French Revolution ( 1783—
1789) Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950.
461 p. 50-5286 DC146.L2G59
"Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter.
Born in 1757, Marie Joseph Paul Yves Roch Gil-
bert du Motier, Marquis de Lafayette, grew up in
a family which fortune and wise marriages had
begun to favor. In 1774, through his marriage to
Marie Adrienne Franchise de Noailles, Lafayette be-
came a protege of the influential Noailles family.
In 1777 he came to Philadelphia and was prompdy
commissioned major general by the Continental
Congress. Thus began a career which made
Lafayette during his lifetime and since a symbol
of Franco-American cooperation and of liberalism.
The first of Professor Gottschalk's volumes covers
the pre-American years of Lafayette's life; the second
is an account of the year and a half following his
first landing in America and concludes with his
return to France in 1779; the remainder of Lafay-
ette's American career is dealt with in the third
volume; and the period 1783-89, when Lafayette
held a unique intermediary position between France
and America, is the subject of the fourth and latest
volume of this biography to be published. Etienne
Charavay's Le General La Fayette, ij 57-1834 (Paris,
Societe de l'Histoire de la Revolution Franchise,
1898. 653 p.) contains an account of Lafayette's sub-
sequent career, not altogether a prosperous or happy
one, in which he took an active part in two French
revolutions, and also made a second triumphant
tour of the United States in 1824. The Lafayette
myth has been scrutinized by Mr. Gottschalk, and
his results indicate that Lafayette came to America
in 1777 motivated less by liberal idealism than by a
sense of frustration and dissatisfaction with affairs
at home, by a desire for glory, and by the traditional
French hatred of the English adversary. The sym-
bol of Lafayette, the French noble enamored of
American ideals of liberty, was the product of others
who sought advantage in having Lafayette accepted
as such, but once Lafayette became the symbol, he
lived the role to such an extent that the symbol be-
came the reality, and in later years, Lafayette de-
served his reputation of being the outstanding lib-
eral of his day. It is with this character development
that Mr. Gottschalk's work is chiefly concerned.
Other personal and idealistic links between the
American and French Revolutions are discussed in
this author's The Place of the American Revolution
in the Causal Pattern of the French Revolution
(Easton, Pa., American Friends of Lafayette, 1948.
22 p.). Another European who came to America
to join with the colonists in their Revolution and
later participated in a revolution in his native land,
Poland, is studied in two volumes by Miecislaus Hai-
man: Kosciuszkp in the American Revolution (New
York, Polish Institute of Arts and Sciences in
America, 1943. 198 p.) and Kosciuszkfi, Leader and
Exile (New York, Polish Institute of Arts and
Sciences in America, 1946. 183 p.).
3251. Hendrick, Burton J. The Lees of Virginia;
biography of a family. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1935. 455 p. illus.
35-18228 E467.1.L4H35
In 1640 Richard Lee emigrated from England to
Virginia. In the colony he achieved in rapid suc-
cession the offices of clerk of the court, attorney
general, sheriff of York County, secretary of state,
and councillor. From Richard and his wife, Ann,
descended a line whose members, not unlike the
other families who comprised Virginia's oligarchy,
looked upon public service as a birthright and a
family responsibility. The author feels that the
Lees illustrate that Virginia system at its most benef-
icent. The emphasis of the narrative is upon the
activities of the members of the Lee family during
the latter half of the 18th century, their epic stage.
With the fall of the Southern Confederacy the in-
fluence of the family ebbed, and the narrative ends
here, with the observation that the work of the Lees
survives in the State and Nation they did so much
to build.
3252. Jameson, John Franklin. The American
Revolution considered as a social movement.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1926.
157 p. 26-10868 E209.J33
"Lectures delivered in November 1925 on the
Louis Clark Vanuxem Foundation."
The Revolutionary era is considered as a period
of political and social reorganization tending in the
direction of democracy. The author does not go
into a recital of detail, but rather sketches in broad
outline the changes which the American Revolution
brought about in the social system of America with
an emphasis on causes and effects. A wide variety
of subjects are touched upon in these lectures: the
status of persons, the land, industry and commerce,
religion, and philosophy. Dr. Jameson believed
that one cannot obtain a satisfactory view of any
particular activity of men in the same country dur-
ing the same period without examining their coex-
istent activities, for all such activities bear an inti-
mate relationship one to another.
3253. Jensen, Merrill. The Articles of Confcdrr.i
tion; an interpretation of the social-consti-
tutional history of the American Revolution, 1774-
1781. [Madison] University of Wisconsin Press,
1948, ci94o. xv, 284 p. 48-1595 Jki^i.l) 1948
344 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
An account of the writing and ratification of the
first Constitution of the United States, the Articles
of Confederation, which regards the Articles as a
constitutional expression of the philosophy of the
Declaration of Independence, and a natural prod-
uct of the Revolutionary movement within the
American Colonies. The author emphasizes the
conflicts arising out of the concrete issues which
faced Americans during the Revolutionary period,
and centered on group interests, social cleavages,
and the relationships among the several states. The
basic conflict, however, was that between radical
and conservative elements, a struggle which unified
the Revolutionary movements throughout the Col-
onies. Professor Jensen concludes that the fact that
the Articles of Confederation were supplanted by
another constitution is not proof of their failure;
and that the failure of the Confederation govern-
ment was brought about not by its inadequacy, but
rather by the failure of the radicals to maintain the
organization they had created to bring about the
Revolution and the Confederation. The goal of
self-government attained, the radicals "disinte-
grated with success," and the balance of political
power shifted through the action of an aggressive
conservatism which had learned not a little from its
radical antagonists. A sequel is no. 3302.
3254. Miller, Helen Day (Hill). George Mason,
constitutionalist, by Helen Hill. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1938. xxii, 300 p. illus.
38-4827 E302.6.M45M5
"Sources": p. [259J-262.
A member of Virginia's tidewater planter aris-
tocracy, George Mason (1725-1792), like others of
his class, administered his plantation and served his
parish and county and the neighboring town, in
various official capacities, for most of his life. He
served briefly in the Virginia House of Burgesses in
1759, and in the Virginia Assembly in 1786. He
was a member of the Virginia Conventions of 1775
and 1776, and of the Federal Constitutional Con-
vention in 1787. He strongly opposed the ratifica-
tion of the Constitution in the Virginia Convention
of 1788, among his objections being the absence of
a declaration of rights, and the incorporation of the
compromise between New England and the South-
ern States on the tariff and the slave trade. Mason's
opposition to slavery was one of the constants of his
long career. Though he appeared in the political
arena, by nature he was retiring, and his great con-
tribution as a constitutionalist was made in the role
of an adviser, a political theoretician, and draftsman
of important state papers, especially the Fairfax Re-
solves of 1774 and the Virginia Declaration of
Rights of 1776. The author portrays George Mason
as epitomizing "the American Enlightenment as
expressed through the democratic movement in
Virginia."
3255. Miller, John C. Triumph of freedom, 1775—
1783. With maps by Van H. English.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1948. xviii, 718 p.
48-6755 E208.M5 1948
Bibliography: p. [689J-705.
A comprehensive history of the Revolution which
points out the continuity of American military ex-
perience. The author has placed an emphasis on
military history, but he has not neglected the diplo-
matic, economic, political, and idealistic facets of
the story; even propaganda is the subject of a chapter.
Professor Miller's history is not entirely a tale of
heroism and self-sacrifice, for there was much in-
difference and lethargy, as well as a morale which
had been all but pulverized under the hammer of
wartime inflation. Despite all of this, steadfast
spirits, many of whom were in the Army, brought
the Revolution to a successful conclusion. Aside
from the victory attained, the value of the struggle of
the "virtuous few" was, in the eyes of the author,
the endowment of Americans with the principles
and ideals which, however imperfecdy realized, re-
main the goal of their collective endeavors. This
volume is a sequel to the author's Origins of the
American Revolution (Boston, Little, Brown, 1943.
519 p.), which puts heavy emphasis on the opposed
oudooks of the conservative and radical wings of
the Whig Party, and interprets the Declaration of
Independence as a victory for the latter.
3256. Morgan, Edmund S. The birth of the Re-
public, 1763-89. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press, 1956. 176 p. (The Chicago history
of American civilization) 56-11003 E208.M85
"Bibliographical note": p. 158-166.
A remarkably concise presentation of the political
and constitutional essentials of the crucial quarter-
century from the Peace of Paris to the ratification of
the Constitution, which confines the war and diplo-
macy of the Revolution to one 10-page chapter be-
cause a separate volume on these aspects is in prepa-
ration for this very promising series. The ante-
cedents of the Revolution are interpreted as the
colonists' search for principles of government which
would ensure the continuance of their real and
present freedom. The "Critical Period," if less
dark than once painted, was yet an exposure of the
inadequacy of the Confederation to conduct foreign
affairs, to regulate its finances, or even to maintain
order. The constitutional movement was no con-
spiratorial reaction of the rich and well-born, but the
work of a group of sincere libertarians, who com-
promised their disagreements over means in order
to raise "a bulwark to protect what they had gained,"
as well as a base for further exploration of the
principles of free government.
3257. Morgan, Edmund S., and Helen M. Morgan.
The Stamp Act crisis; prologue to revolution.
Chapel Hill, Published for the Institute of Early
American History and Culture at Williamsburg,
Va., by the University of North Carolina Press, 1953.
310 p. 53-10190 E215.2.M58
In an effort to insure contributions toward co-
lonial defense from the American Colonies, the
Grenville ministry in 1765 carried through Parlia-
ment the Stamp Act. Within a year the Act was
repealed after a storm of protest had risen to meet
attempts to enforce its provisions. The brief Declar-
atory Act which replaced the Stamp Act was no
more acceptable to the Americans once they realized
its meaning. This work aims to set forth the
general issues which engendered and resulted from
the passage of the Stamp Act. The method em-
ployed is that of viewing the situation through the
eyes of Francis Bernard, the royal governor of Massa-
chusetts, John Robinson, the royal customs collector
in Narragansett Bay, Daniel Dulany, Maryland
pamphleteer, Thomas Hutchinson, Massachusetts'
lieutenant governor, and Jared Ingersoll and John
Hughes, distributors of stamps for Connecticut and
Pennsylvania, respectively. The significance of the
Stamp Act crisis is held to be "the emergence, not of
leaders and methods and organizations, but of well-
defined constitutional principles. The resolutions
of the colonial and intercolonial assemblies in 1765
laid down the line on which the Americans stood
until they cut the connection with England. Con-
sistendy from 1765 to 1776 they denied the authority
of Parliament to tax them externally or internally;
consistently they affirmed their willingness to sub-
mit to whatever legislation Parliament should enact
for the supervision of the empire as a whole."
3258. Mullett, Charles F. Fundamental law and
the American Revolution, 1760-1776. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1933. 21& P-
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
385) 33-367" H31.C7.no. 385
E210.M954
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia L Di-
versity.
Bibliography: p. 198-21 1.
During the decade and a half which preceded the
American Revolution the colonists invoked the con-
cept of "fundamental law" in their resistance to
parliamentary authority in the realm of taxation and
personal rights, and of internal legislation, and,
finally, in any realm. The ideas advanced by the
colonists to justify their position were not original;
181240 80 -24
GENERAL HISTORY / 345
intellectual ammunition furnished by authorities
from Sophocles to Blackstone was used by the col-
onists in their struggle to withstand British efforts
to reduce their practical autonomy. This study
aims to analyze the idea of fundamental law as it
was employed by the American revolutionists. The
first two chapters sketch the concepts held by those
authors whom the leaders of colonial opinion quoted
or referred to in their writings. The remainder of
the work contains an examination of the ideas of
fundamental law current in the Colonies. Dr.
Mullett had previously reprinted, with an intro-
duction, five pamphlets by one of the earliest men
to give the Patriot cause a theoretical basis, in Some
Political Writings of James Otis (Columbia, Univer-
sity of Missouri, 1929. 2 v.).
3259. Nevins, Allan. The American States dur-
ing and after the Revolution, 1775-1789.
New York, Macmillan, 1924. xviii, 728 p.
24-23941 E303.N52
Bibliography: p. 679-691.
A conspectus of State history from the beginning
of the Revolution until 1789 which covers a wide
range of topics: the Thirteen Colonies and their
governments, the origin and early growth of the
independent State governments, the development
and revision of State constitutions, State politics,
financial and social developments, the relation of
the States to one another and to the central govern-
ment, and the early setdement of the West. Pro-
fessor Nevins finds that the States served a purpose
even more important than that of providing a basis
for the United States' system of dual government:
they exercised a conservative function. They were
the repositories of the political and institutional
experience of the colonists. At the same time, new
theories applied to old practices at the State level
often resulted in fruitful experimentation. The
success of the American people in forming and con-
trolling their State governments gave them an in-
creasing measure of self-confidence in their ability
to control their political destiny. A full index in-
creases the usefulness of this volume.
3260. Niles, Hezekiah. Principles and acts of the
Revolution in America: or, An attempt to
collect and preserve some of the speeches, orations,
& proceedings, with sketches and remarks on men
and things, and other fugitive or neglected pieces,
belonging to the Revolutionary period in the United
Suites. Baltimore, Printed and published lor the
editor, by W. O. Niles, 1822. 495 p.
2-19341 E203.N69
The compiler, Hezekiah Niles ( 1777 |SV'). was
the editor and publisher of Nile/ Weekly Rt
in which such a collection w.is hrst suggested in
346 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
November 18 16, and contributions solicited. It was
proposed to present "an acceptable gift to the Amer-
ican people, by rescuing from oblivion a great
variety of fleeting, scattered articles," belonging to
the history of the Revolution, "whilst its feelings
were fresh upon the heart and understanding of our
heroes and sages." The result is a miscellany of
quite various materials, which gives a vivid view
of the Patriot cause as it appeared to its supporters
and to their immediate descendants. Here are the
ideas by which the Revolution was justified, and
the rhetoric in which they were habitually clad.
Since Niles set his materials up in print as they
came in, his book is a frightful jumble which a
preliminary Index is quite inadequate to control.
Anticipating the centennial of the Revolution,
Hezekiah's grandson, Samuel V. Niles, obtained
recommendations from a surprising number of the
"prominent statesmen and jurists" of the Gilded
Age, and brought out a new edition: Centennial
Offering. Republication of the Principles and Acts
of the American Revolution (New York, A. S.
Barnes, 1876. 522 p.). Since the contents have
been rearranged, in chronological order under each
colony or other heading, and the print and paper
are much superior, it is considerably more con-
venient to use than the original edition.
3261. Robson, Eric. The American Revolution in
its political and military aspects, 1763-1783.
London, Batchworth Press, 1955. 254 p.
55-14712 E208.R6
An inquiry into the causes of the American Revo-
lution and of the British failure to subdue the colo-
nial rebellion, by an English scholar whose death
in 1954 at the age of 36 caused widespread regret.
Heightened by the failure of the British Government
to understand or adjust to the American position, a
conflict of political ideas, not "tea and taxes," is held
to be the basic cause of the Revolution. By 1775
Great Britain and the Colonies had become so di-
vergent in their notions of their proper relationship
to each other that only separation or conquest re-
mained as possible solutions of the colonial problem.
A lengthy discussion of the British military per-
formance in the Revolutionary War points out that
a failure to adjust to strategical circumstances, a
lack of determination, and low morale all tipped the
scales against the mother country. A further
handicap was the cumbersome operation of the gov-
ernment of 18th-century Britain. Nevertheless the
dominating factor in Britain's defeat was her po-
litical isolation resulting from the peace settlement
of 1763.
3262. Schlesinger, Arthur Meier. The colonial
merchants and the American Revolution,
1 763-1776. New York, Facsimile Library, 1939.
647 p. 39-I2039 HF3025.S3 1939.
Bibliography: p. 614-629.
Seeking a relaxation of commercial restrictions
imposed by the parliamentary legislation of 1764-65,
the merchants of the North American commercial
provinces, Professor Schlesinger maintains in this
very influential book, originally published in 1918,
were the instigators of the first discontents in the
Colonies. The events of the years 1767-70 brought
the mercantile interests to an even sharper realiza-
tion than before of the growing power of the radical
elements of colonial society; however, their with-
drawal to conservatism was delayed while they al-
lied themselves with the radicals to defeat the pur-
poses of the East India Company. The outcome
convinced the merchants, as a class, that their future
welfare depended upon the maintenance of British
authority. Some of them, hoping to control the
situation from within, remained within the radical
movement. With the meeting of the First Con-
tinental Congress, others threw aside the cloak of
radicalism, and some of these became active Loyal-
ists. With the outbreak of hostilities, economic in-
terest caused many merchants to follow the line of
least resistance and profess adherence to the colonial
cause; others, anticipating a British victory, openly
cast their lot with Great Britain. Following the
Revolution, however, the mercantile interests once
more closed their ranks and became a potent factor
in the conservative counter-revolution which led to
the adoption of the Constitution.
3263. Tyler, Moses Coit. Patrick Henry. Bos-
ton, Houghton, Mifflin, 1887. 398 p.
(American statesmen, edited by J. T. Morse, Jr.
[v. 3]) 10-11969 E176.A53, v.3
"List of printed documents": p. 424-429.
After an unpromising start in life Henry (1736-
1799) turned to the law and won immediate success
practicing in upcountry courts; his fame spread to
the whole province of Virginia when his legal elo-
quence won the "Parson's Cause" from the estab-
lished church in 1763. Two years later he entered
the House of Burgesses from Hanover County and
at once won equal fame as political orator by a
famous speech opposing the Stamp Act. His con-
temporaries regarded his rhetorical powers with awe,
admiring or grudging, and his fame as the foremost
orator of the American Revolution is secure. As a
spokesman for upcountry interests and as a leader
who took an uncompromising line against British
claims, Henry won an unrivaled popularity with
the electorate, and was chosen first Governor of the
State of Virginia. Neither his stubborn opposition
to the adoption of the Federal Constitution, which
GENERAL HISTORY / 347
he painted as a new engine of despotism, nor his
adhesion to the Federalist Party in the course of the
next decade, succeeded in diminishing his prestige
with the people of his State. Tyler's life, one of the
few volumes in the American statesmen series which
has not been overshadowed by the productions of
latter-day scholarship, is a sterling piece of research,
organization, and writing, perhaps too favorable to
some of Henry's later tergiversations. Robert
Douthat Meade's Patric\ Henry: Patriot in the
Maying (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1957. 431 p.)
is based on an enormous amount of research in
scattered primary sources, especially in Virginia
courthouses, and it is not his fault if they make
no great additions to the story. It carries the nar-
rative to 1775, and is to be followed by a second and
concluding volume.
3264. Van Doren, Carl C. Secret history of the
American Revolution. New York, Viking
Press, 194 1. xiv, 534 p.
41-24478 E77.V23 1 94 1
"General bibliography": p. [4961-499.
A detailed narrative, based largely on the Clinton
papers in the Clements Library, of British attempts
to subvert loyalty to the Revolutionary cause and to
draw adherents of all ranks into service as secret
agents of the Crown. British exploitation of the
doubts, hardships of service, defeatism, and per-
sonal ambition, which plagued many Americans
during this time, did succeed in many instances, but
failed in quite as many. The chief instance of
success was the Arnold-Andre plot, and the maneu-
vers and negotiations necessary to tempt Arnold to
treason are reconstructed in great detail. Other
cases of treason are treated proportionately to the
gravity of their effect upon the Revolution.
Counterespionage by the revolutionists and the un-
swerving loyalty of many men served to defeat the
British "fifth column." The postwar fates of some
of the traitors are traced. Quotations from letters,
memoirs, and courtroom testimony are employed by
the author to convey the type of thinking and per-
sonality which led Americans either to oppose or
support the Revolution. Another work by Mr.
Van Doren which throws light on a significant inci-
dent of the Revolution is Mutiny in January (New
York, Viking Press, 1943. 288 p.). The unsuc-
cessful mutinies of the Pennsylvania and New Jersey
Line in January 178 1 are narrated in this well-
documented study of administrative neglect and
British intrigue aimed at inducing the mutineers to
desert.
3265. Van Tyne, Claude H. The causes of the
War of Independence, being the first volume
of a history of the founding of the American Re-
public. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 499 p.
22-16374 E210.V27
Ei78.V28,v. 1
3266. Van Tyne, Claude H. The War of Inde-
pendence; American phase, being the second
volume of a history of the founding of the American
Republic. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1929. 518 p.
29-23482 E178.V28, v. 2
E208.V28
The first title is a consideration of the growth
of the spirit of independence which made Americans
discontented with their subordinate position in the
British Empire. Factors in this growth, political,
economic, social, and religious, are discussed. What
political liberty the American colonists enjoyed was
inherited, to a great extent, from the mother country.
Furthermore, conditions of life on this frontier of
the British Empire tended to encourage democratic
views and to resist any backward political step of
the more conservative homeland. Further, just as
British political progress outstripped that of other
European nations, so had the American Colonies
advanced politically beyond England. The nar-
rative ends with the outbreak of hostilities at Lex-
ington and is continued in The War of Independ-
ence; American Phase. Until Burgoyne's surrender
at Saratoga, and the subsequent conclusion of the
alliance with France, the Revolution had been, out-
wardly at least, a family affair for the most part
localized along the Atlantic seaboard of North
America. With the entry of France the complexion
of the struggle was transformed. The earlier limited
struggle is all the author was able to describe before
his death in 1930. He had previously contributed
a one-volume narrative to the American Nation
series: The American Revolution, 1776-1783 (New
York, Harper, 1 905. xix, 369 p) .
3267. Van Tyne, Claude H. The Loyalists in the
American Revolution. New York, P. Smith,
1929. 360 p. 30-4956 E277.V242
First published in 1902.
The case for the Loyalists, or Tories, is sympa-
thetically advanced in this documented account of
those Americans whose rooted conservatism im-
pelled them to resist the movement for American
independence. To the author, loyalty to King and
homeland was the "normal condition-' in the Colo-
nies, and the Tories, largely made up of landed
gentry, merchants, Church ot England clergy, local
officials, and professional men, had no recourse but
to preserve the status quo which had given them,
rather than the WhigS, prosperity and royal favor.
Contemporary journals and memoirs are used to
create a clear picture of the "just and natural" Stand
of the Tories, as they initially protested against the
348 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Revolution on their home grounds, and then became
underground agents, or served in the armies of the
Crown, or fled to New York City or to England
under the pressure of mobs or of laws designed to
deprive them of civil rights. The life of the exiles
in New York is treated at length, and may be com-
pared with the lot of those who took refuge in
England as described in Lewis Einstein's Divided
Loyalties: Americans in England during the War
of Independence (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933.
xvi,46op.).
3268. Washington, George. Basic writings of
George Washington, edited with an introd.
and notes, by Saxe Commins. New York, Random
House, 1948. xvii, 697 p. 48-7853 E312.72 1948
3269. Freeman, Douglas Southall. George Wash-
ington, a biography. New York, Scribner,
1948-57. 7 v. illus. 48-8880 E312.F82
Contents. — v. 1-2. Young Washington. — v. 3.
Planter and patriot. — v. 4. Leader of the Revolu-
tion.— v. 5. Victory with the help of France. —
v. 6. Patriot and President. — v. 7. First in peace.
3270. Litde, Shelby (Melton). George Washing-
ton. New York, Minton, Balch, 1929.
481 p. 29-18687 E312.L78
Bibliography: p. 465-473.
3271. Stephenson, Nathaniel Wright, and Waldo
Hilary Dunn. George Washington. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1940. 2 v. illus.
40-27358 E312.S82
After the death of Dr. Stephenson in 1935 the
incomplete work was revised, and the last seven
chapters written by W. H. Dunn.
Contents. — v. 1. 1732-1777. — v. 2. 1778-1799.
Dr. Freeman's biography of Washington (1732-
1799), the seventh volume of which was produced
after his death by his assistants, John Alexander
Carroll and Mary Wells Ashworth, is a large-scale
treatment of the commander-in-chief of the Con-
tinental Army and the first President of the United
States. More than a detailed account of the life of
a Virginia planter, a full record of a public man,
and a military biography, these seven volumes in-
clude a thorough examination and discerning ap-
praisal of the Washington legend. The result is a
biography which takes into account every phase
and feature of Washington including his back-
ground, his behavior, and his development in pri-
vate and public life. Above all, this is a study of
the growth of a personality, not an account of the
static existence of a paragon born. For those not
wishing to cope with the mass of detail which
Freeman includes in his work, shorter narratives
are those of Shelby Little in one volume and of
Nathaniel Wright Stephenson in two. Basic Writ-
ings of George Washington, edited by Saxe Com-
mins, is an effort to convey the main events of the
period from 1753 to 1796 as perceived at the time
by Washington. The 242 items contained in this
collection were derived from The Writings of
George Washington from the Original Manuscript
Sources, 1745-1799 (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1931-44. 39 v.). Prepared under the direc-
tion of the George Washington Bicentennial Com-
mission and edited by John C. Fitzpatrick, this col-
lection of approximately 17,000 items includes every
Washington writing known up to the time that the
last volume went to press, with one important ex-
ception: The Diaries of George Washington, 1748-
1799 (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1925. 4 v.), also
edited by Dr. Fitzpatrick. This concise and un-
introspective record was not kept during the Revolu-
tion, and, unfortunately, is quite irregular during
the Presidency. Two examples of studies of specific
aspects of Washington's life are Samuel Eliot Mori-
son's The Young Man Washington (Cambridge,
Mass., Harvard University Press, 1932. 43 p.), and
Charles Henry Ambler's George Washington and
the West (Chapel Hill, University of North Caro-
lina Press, 1936. 270 p.); the latter work is a
discussion in some detail of the more important
aspects, political, economic, and military, of Wash-
ington's interests and activities in the trans-Ap-
palachian West, which he was almost the only
statesman of his day to visit. The evolution of
Mount Vernon, the home of Washington, from
family seat to national shrine, including many de-
tails of the day-to-day activities of the United States'
first first family, is described in Paul Wilstach's
Mount Vernon, Washington's Home and the Na-
tion's Shrine (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page,
1916. xvi, 301 p.).
3272. Wrong, George M. Canada and the Ameri-
can Revolution; the disruption of the first
British Empire. New York, Macmillan, 1935.
497 p. 35-1792 E263.C2W6
"Authorities": p. 479-489.
The period under consideration extends from 1763
to the close of the American Revolution. Discussed
are French Canada and its people, the military op-
erations of the Revolution, the demands of the Amer-
ican peace commissioners as they affected Canada,
and the problems of the American Loyalists. In
addition, political, economic, and social conditions
in Britain and the Colonies are subjected to a critical
analysis. This Canadian scholar attributes much
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 349
of the responsibility for the Revolution to British
"stupidity and arrogance." Emphasis is placed
upon the French culture of the Canadians, and, aside
from provincial tacdessness on the part of the Ameri-
cans who invaded Canada in 1775, the reason as-
signed for the failure of the Americans to woo
successfully their northern neighbors is the Cana-
dians' ingrained respect for authority, "derived less
from loyalty to George III than from monarchical
France and Catholic Rome."
F. Federal America (1783-18 15)
3273. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. The Burr
conspiracy. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1954. 301 p. 54-6907 E334.A6
Bibliography: p. 276-284.
Set against the background of the period of un-
rest following the formation of the Union is this
detailed account of a conspiracy hatched by the pre-
tentious ambition of Aaron Burr (1756-1836), Rev-
olutionary soldier, lawyer, United States Senator, and
third Vice President of the United States. Burr
envisioned himself as being at the head of an em-
pire vaster than that which he had lost by a single
vote in 1801. From 1804 Burr's major objective was
the separation of the Western States from the Union,
with New Orleans as the capital and the Alleghenies
as the eastern boundary of the new political unit.
Also involved were filibustering expeditions into the
Floridas and Mexico, and the settlement of the
Bastrop lands. Ever an opportunist, Burr presented
to anyone who would listen to his scheme only such
portions of it as would appeal to him as a prospective
conspirator. The success of the conspiracy, which,
Professor Abernethy asserts, next to the Confederate
War "posed the greatest threat of dismemberment
which the American Union has ever faced," de-
pended upon disaffection in the West, the intrigues
of certain Eastern Federalists, the adherence of vari-
ous land speculators, soldiers of fortune, and office
seekers, a war between the United States and Spain,
and help from Great Britain. The basic patriotism
and common sense of the frontiersmen, along with
the defection of Burr's fellow conspirator, James
Wilkinson, doomed Burr's plot, which ended in the
farcical treason trial of 1807 at Richmond.
3274. Adams, Henry. History of the United
States of America during the administration
of Thomas Jefferson. With introd. by Henry
Steele Commager. New York, A. & C. Boni, 1930.
2 v. maps. ([His History of the United States of
America, v. 1-2]) 30-10226 E302.1.A24, v. 1-2
Contents. — 1. 1 801-1805. — 2- 1 805-1 809.
3275. Adams, Henry. History of the United
States of America during the administration
of James Madison. New York, A. & C. Boni, 1930.
2 v. ( [His History of the United States of Amer-
ica, v. 3-4]) 30-10227 E302.1.A24, v. 3-4
Contents. — 3. 1809-1813. — 4. 1813-1817.
Adams (1838-1918), who is also discussed under
Literature (nos. 688-700) and in the preceding sec-
tion on Historiography (no. 3055), was in 1870
more or less drafted by Harvard College to teach
medieval history, of which he knew nothing. Dur-
ing the academic year of 1874-75 Professor Adams
added a course in American history, and found the
periods in which his own grandfather and great-
grandfather were major figures so absorbing that
after two more terms he abandoned pedagogy for
historical research and writing. The first fruit of
his new interest was his edition of Documents Re-
lating to New-England Federalism, 1800-1815
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1877. 437 p.). He had
already begun searching and procuring transcrip-
tions from national archives, and his History of the
United States was evidendy conceived by this time.
It was, however, delayed, first by Adams' concen-
trated work on the Gallatin papers begun in 1877
(see no. 331 1) and by the shattering effect upon
him of his wife's breakdown and suicide in 1885.
Pulling himself together after a long trip to Japan,
he worked intensively at the History, which was
published, in three installments amounting to nine
volumes, during 1889-91. A completely individual
work in oudook, style, and organization, it has
fascinated three generations of students. The
famous first six chapters, which survey the state of
American society in 1800, were doubdess inspired
by the equally famous third chapter of Macaulay's
History of England; the concluding four chapters,
which view the social changes of the intervening 16
years in a balancing assessment and an agnostic
temper, had no such model. The detailed narrative
which intervenes is largely concerned with political,
diplomatic, and military events; but those who com-
plain of its deficiency in economic matters overlook
the author's special competence in the realm of
finance. The chapters on foreign relations arc writ-
ten on a genuinely international level, for Adams
had thoroughly familiarized himself with N.ipo
350 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
leonic Europe. His sympathies, it has been pointed
out, lie with the Northern Democrats; the Southern
wing is ironically treated, while the Federalists are
castigated. The essence of the History may be said
to lie in its contrasting of the requirements of Amer-
ican nationhood with Jefferson's ideal of weak gov-
ernment, and in underlining the confusion to which
the latter inevitably worked out in practice. "Al-
ready in 1817 the difference between Europe and
America was decided." "American character was
formed, if not fixed," but circumstances and not
national policy had brought about this result.
3276. Adams, John. Works. With a life of the
author, notes, and illus., by his grandson,
Charles Francis Adams. Boston, Little, Brown,
1850-56 [v. 1, 1856] 10 v. 8-19755 E302.A26
3277. Adams, John. Familiar letters of John
Adams and his wife Abigail Adams, during
the Revolution. With a memoir of Mrs. Adams.
By Charles Francis Adams. New York, Hurd &
Houghton, 1876. xxxii, 424 p.
4-16982 E322.A518
3278. Chinard, Gilbert. Honest John Adams.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1933. 359 p. illus.
33-32200 E322.C47
3279. Haraszti, Zoltan. John Adams & the
prophets of progress. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1952. 362 p. facsims.
52-5030 E322.H3
Born on a Braintree, Massachusetts, farm, John
Adams (1735-1826), after attending Harvard and
casting aside aspirations to a career in the Christian
ministry, served for a short while as a Worcester
schoolmaster, and then turned to the practice of the
law. Despite his social conservatism and his avoid-
ance of any step which would tend to compromise
his position as a legal practitioner, Adams became a
leader of the Patriots and was sent to Philadelphia
as a member of Massachusetts' delegation to the
First Continental Congress. In the Second he soon
became a wheelhorse of the Revolution, which took
him out of his provincial surroundings and made
him a national figure. Before retiring from public
life in 1801, Adams served as a diplomatic repre-
sentative of the United States in Paris, The Hague,
and London, and then as first Vice-President and
second President of the new Nation. In Honest
John Adams, Dr. Chinard focuses his attention not
on Adams' politics, but on the personality and be-
liefs of the self-made New England aristocrat, John
Adams. Adams' defense of Captain Preston fol-
lowing the Boston Massacre was inspired by his fear
of ochlocracy, but he was no less critical of rule by
the few. He eventually incurred the enmity of
both the radicals and their antagonists, and was
eliminated from active politics. The author regards
Adams as "the most realistic statesman of his age."
A recent penetrating study is Stephen Kurtz' The
Presidency of John Adams; the Collapse of Federal-
ism, 1J95-1800 (Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1957. 448 p.). The author does not
view the Adams administration as the kind of nega-
tive hiatus which it is usually made to appear. He
concludes that Jefferson's elevation to the Presidency
"promised that political liberty might be assured of
a healthy environment within which to grow, but it
did not end the threat to liberty in America of that
era. John Adams must be credited with having
destroyed the instrument of repression and the in-
fluence of its champions [the Provisional Army and
the Hamiltonian Federalists] months before the
election took place. His struggle for independence
in 1799 and 1800 was no less significant or remark-
able than that in which he had taken a leading part
during 1775 and 1776. In a very real sense, Adams'
bold conduct allowed Jefferson to say with plausi-
bility, 'We are all republicans — we are all federal-
ists.' " John Adams' library, originally presented
to the town of Quincy, has been deposited in the
Boston Public Library since 1893. More than a
hundred of its volumes contain Adams' marginal
notes, and these marginalia are the main substance
of Mr. Haraszti's John Adams & the Prophets of
Progress. Excerpts from the texts upon which
Adams commented are so arranged as to render the
whole a running dialogue between him and the
individual authors. The product is a rebuttal of the
philosophes and a review of the age of the French
Revolution and Napoleon. Mr. Haraszti has added
accounts of the works upon which Adams com-
mented, and upon their authors, ranging from
Bolingbroke to Condorcet. In addition, there are
chapters on Adams as a book collector and as a po-
litical theorist. In conclusion the author calls for
a more general acceptance of Adams as a great po-
litical thinker. A new edition of the Adams papers
is in prospect, but the standard one remains The
Worlds of John Adams in ten volumes, edited by his
grandson, Charles Francis Adams, over a century
ago. Included in it are Adams' diary, sections of
his autobiography, his longer essays, official papers,
and personal letters. An indispensable supplement
is the same editor's Familiar Letters of John Adams
and His Wife Abigail Adams, during the Revolu-
tion, a rich commentary on family and Revolution-
ary affairs. There are some recent abridgments:
George A. Peek's convenient edition, The Political
Writings of John Adams: Representative Selections
(New York, Liberal Arts Press, 1954. 223 p.),
GENERAL HISTORY / 35 1
reprints the more cogent portions of Adams' rather
diffuse theoretical writings on politics, with an intro-
ductory essay emphasizing his basic conservatism.
The Selected Writings of John and John Quincy
Adams, edited by Adrienne Koch and William
Peden (New York, Knopf, 1946. xxix, 413, xxix
p.), are taken from diaries, autobiographies, public
papers, and letters; many of the selections are pref-
aced by notes explaining their contents and the
circumstances which produced them, and there is
an introductory biographical essay.
3280. Baldwin, Leland D. Whiskey rebels; the
story of a frontier uprising. Decorations
by Ward Hunter. [Pittsburgh] University of
Pittsburgh Press, 1939. 326 p.
39-11763 E315.B52
"This book is one of a series relating western
Pennsylvania history, written under the direction
of the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey
sponsored jointly by the Buhl Foundation, the
Historical Society of Western Pennsylvania and the
University of Pittsburgh."
Bibliography: p. [303]~3i6.
Taxes on alcoholic beverages have been a regular
resort of American public finance, but the excise
act which Hamilton induced the Congress to pass
in 1791 bore with uncommon hardship upon the
small farmers of western Pennsylvania. They had
no marketable commodity save the product of their
own small stills, and their differences with the local
collectors of excise could be settled only by judicial
process in the Federal court at distant Philadelphia.
Three years of strenuous agitation succeeded in
producing a relaxation of the latter rule, but last-
minute prosecutions under the old rule touched off
a crisis and some violence at midsummer of 1794.
Hugh H. Brackenridge and Albert Gallatin suc-
ceeded in persuading the potential rebels to disperse
and adopt peaceful means. While there was no
rebellion, there was also little submission, and the
President mobilized a little army of 13,000 militia
from four states, which marched to Pittsburgh and
occupied the western counties for a few weeks
while conspicuous offenders were rounded up — to
be later acquitted by the courts. Professor Bald-
win's spirited narrative of this revealing episode
is wholly in sympathy with the westerners, and he
goes so far as to suggest that the whole affair was
engineered by Hamilton in order to strengthen and
perpetuate the Federalist regime.
3281. Bowers, Claude G. Jefferson and Hamilton;
the struggle for democracy in America.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1933. xvii, 531 p. illus.
35-23547 E311.B6592
Bibliography: p. [513]— 518.
A vivid description of what the author, a devoted
Jeffersonian, defines as the struggle between the
forces of democracy and aristocracy, which marked
the first 12 years of the existence of the United
States. Hamilton and Jefferson were the titans of
the struggle, but behind them were others not
neglected by Mr. Bowers. American society, with
its drawing rooms, coffeeshops, and taverns, to-
gether with the more patently political arenas of
the halls of the Congress, mass meetings, and public
dinners, was the wellspring of this battle of funda-
mentals. To explain and give meaning to the
controversy over the shaping of the Republic it is
described complete with its prejudices and passions.
To be sure, Federalist blackness is usually Stygian,
and Democratic whiteness dazzling, and all the
dramatic elements of the situation are much ex-
aggerated. The work, originally published in 1925,
is based upon printed sources, but gains color from
its numerous quotations from contemporary news-
papers.
3282. Brant, Irving. James Madison. Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941-57. 5 v.
41-19279 E342.B7
Contents. — [v. 1] The Virginia revolutionist. —
[v. 2] The nationalist, 1780-1787. — [v. 3] Father
of the Constitution, 1787-1800. — [v. 4] Secretary of
State, 1800-1809. — [v. 5] The President, 1809-1812.
3283. Hunt, Gaillard. The life of James Madison.
New York, Doubleday, Page, 1902. 402 p.
3-421 1 E342.H943
On his retirement from the Senate of the United
States, William Cabell Rives (1793-1868), who had
been a protege of Jefferson, embarked upon a large-
scale life of James Madison (1 751-1836). Rives'
work on his History of the Life and Times of James
Madison was interrupted by his second mission to
France and by the secession crisis, but before his
death he completed three large volumes (Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown, 1859-68) which reached 1797. Madi-
son's papers were purchased from Dolley Madison
by the Government in several installments, leading
to two official publications from them, in 3 volumes
in 1840 and 4 in 1865; a more recent edition which
does not, however, include everything in the older
ones, is that of Gaillard Hunt: The Writings of
James Madison (New York, Putnam, 1900-10.
9 v.). Hunt published The Life of fames Madison
while this edition was in progress; it is a lucid and
balanced treatment of its subject down to 1801, but
has less than a hundred page* on Madison in Wash-
ington. Edward McXall Burns' Janus Madison,
Philosopher of the Constitution (New Brunswick,
N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1938. 212 p.) is
a concise formulation of Madison's political views,
352 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
setting his contributions to the Constitution against
his theories of the State and of democracy, and in-
dicating his relationship to other 18th-century theo-
rists. Rives' project of a large-scale life has been
revived in our day by Mr. Irving Brant, a Middle-
Western newspaperman who was led to constitu-
tional questions and thence to Madison by President
Franklin Roosevelt's plan to change the Supreme
Court. Five volumes published over a 16-year pe-
riod have reached the Declaration of War in 1812.
Their reception has been mixed: some critics are
obviously delighted with the author's trenchant
espousal of the Democratic-Republican position;
others find the work wearying in its incessant accu-
mulation of detail, and the two latest volumes, which
justify Madison's diplomacy on all occasions, have
met with some incredulity. All regard the work as
based on vast research in primary sources, and as
providing the only detailed analysis of Madison's
career after 1787.
3284. Cresson, William P. James Monroe.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press, 1946. xiv, 577 p. illus. 47-652 E372.C7
"List of references": p. 549-559.
James Monroe (1758-1831) was the last and least
endowed of the "Virginia dynasty," but by no
means the least successful. Following his service
as an officer in the Revolution, Monroe, impelled by
financial necessity and fortunate in his gifts of hon-
esty, ambition, influential sponsorship, and the
ability to work hard and make friends, entered upon
a career of public service which led him into a wide
variety of offices, state and national, legislative and
executive, at home and abroad. Though he was
not particularly fortunate in his diplomatic missions,
circumstance was not consistendy favorable to suc-
cess. When the Presidency was bestowed upon him
in 1817, his industry and judgment, the advice of
such friends as Jefferson and Madison, and a strong
Cabinet all combined to launch a most successful
administration. Though his career in public office
was lengthy and varied, the fifth President of the
United States is perhaps best remembered for the
"doctrine" of foreign policy which bears his name.
This biography, which was published 14 years after
Dr. Cresson's death, and received its final revision
from other hands, grants to Monroe the genius of
apprehending the opportune moment for the formal
enunciation of a principle which previously had
been simply a matter of American public opinion
and aspiration.
3285. Dauer, Manning J. The Adams Federalists.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953.
xxiii, 381 p. maps. 53-11171 E321.D23
Bibliography: p. 35 1-373.
This study of the supporters of John Adams
within the Federalist Party is a detailed account of
political circumstances and events. Professor
Dauer's extensive geographical analysis of votes on
major issues in the House of Representatives from
March 1796 to May 1802 supports his main thesis:
the Federalist majorities which put through the
Constitution and established the Federal Govern-
ment depended upon an alliance between commer-
cial districts and agricultural ones — especially those
which produced cash crops for the international
market. Through the manipulation of Hamilton
and the "High-Federalists," Federal policy became
increasingly the servant of commercial interests.
During the French crisis of 1798-99, expensive
armaments were put on foot which could have been
justified by war, but without it could only cost the
Federalist Party the support of overtaxed agrarians.
The war which the Hamiltonians desired was avoid-
able, and Adams, who had wanted neither the reg-
iments nor the taxes, made peace with France.
Between Adams' lack of political finesse and Ham-
ilton's apparent lack of common honesty, the Fed-
eralist Party went to the wall, and Jefferson led a
united agrarian majority.
3286. Dodd, William E. The life of Nathaniel
Macon. Raleigh, N. C, Edwards & Brough-
ton, 1903. xvi, 443 p. 4-4560 E302.6.M17D6
"Sources of information": p. xvi.
Macon ( 1758—1837), after serving an apprentice-
ship in North Carolina politics as an adherent of the
upcountry democracy led by Willie Jones, and
fighting the adoption of the Constitution, sat con-
tinuously for nearly 38 years in the Congress of the
United States — in the House from 1791 to 1815, and
in the Senate until his voluntary retirement from
public life at the close of 1828. From the time that
party divisions became discernible, he was among
the most influential of the Democratic-Republicans,
and he was considerably more representative of the
Southern rank and file, and of the opinions which
came to prevail in the party as a whole, than was
its leader, Thomas Jefferson. To Macon strict con-
struction of the Constitution became a kind of fetish.
The interests of agriculture he regarded as para-
mount, and those of commerce as so antipathetic to
them that no navy need be maintained to protect
American merchantmen. Macon was one of the
earliest to seize upon slavery as an essential interest
of Southern agriculture, and to assert its constitu-
tional immunity from national control; he was a
forerunner of John Randolph and of Calhoun. The
author hardly makes the most of Macon's completely
negative conception of the role of the Federal Gov-
ernment, and his passion to restrict its appropria-
tions. Macon was himself completely disinterested
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 353
and devoid of personal malice, and retained his
great popularity in his State and section through
changing times.
3287. Driver, Carl S. John Sevier, pioneer of the
Old Southwest. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1932. 240 p.
32-30370 E302.6.S45D8
Bibliography: p. [2ia]-225.
Sevier (1745-1815), frontiersman, Indian fighter,
land speculator, state senator, Congressman, only
Governor of the State of Franklin, and the first
Governor of Tennessee, moved into the West with
the frontier and participated in the various activities
of the border. His whole life was connected with
the development of the West, and he died in its
service. The author, in Sevier's behalf, points out
that Andrew Jackson, Sevier's antagonist, who be-
came the representative of the West in the eyes of
the Nation, reflected the ideals and aspirations of
the West after its civilization had been firmly estab-
lished. Sevier, a more provincial figure, overshad-
owed by Jackson, the national figure, was the true
representative of the old West, the ideal of the
man who struggled and fought for the acquisition
of the soil.
3288. Hamilton, Alexander. Alexander Hamil-
ton and the founding of the Nation. Edited
by Richard B. Morris. New York, Dial Press, 1957.
xxi, 617 p. 56-12132 E302.H2573
3289. Hamilton, Alexander. Papers on public
credit, commerce and finance. Edited by
Samuel McKee, Jr. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1934. xxiv, 303 p.
34-18967 HC105.H18
3290. Schachner, Nathan. Alexander Hamilton.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1946. 488 p.
46-3861 E302.6.H2S25
Bibliography: p. 473-481.
3291. Mitchell, Broadus. Alexander Hamilton.
v. 1. Youth to maturity, 1755-1788. New
York, Macmillan, 1957. 675 p.
57-5506 E302.6.H2M6
Bibliography: p. 647-666.
Hamilton (1755-1804) was the Founding Father
who was different. Born on the West Indian island
of Nevis, he was ineligible for the Presidency of the
United States. Technically illegitimate and self-
supporting from the age of 12, he was even more
completely a self-made man than Franklin. He
was the only member of the Constitutional Con-
vention to disapprove of republican government and
to propose an elective monarchy; but this did not
prevent him from joining with Madison to present
the most effective apology for a new frame of gov-
ernment that has ever been penned {The Federalist,
q. v.). Whether his military abilities were so
transcendent as he and his warmer admirers sup-
posed must remain unknown, since he never held
an independent command; but his past mastery of
finance and of the techniques of public administra-
tion was placed beyond question during his service
as first Secretary of the Treasury of the United
States (1789-95). Total estimates of Hamilton will
probably differ as much in the future as they have
in the past, according to the estimator's value of
his concrete services as against what Henry Adams
apdy termed "the adventurer in him." Both of the
older editions of Hamilton's writings took strange
liberties with their texts; the new one undertaken at
Columbia University has not reached the stage of
publication. Professor Morris' volume of selections
is arranged in chapters, the progression of which is
partly chronological and pardy topical; there is a
general introduction and much interspersed ex-
planatory matter by the editor. The Secretary of
the Treasury's epoch-making reports to Congress on
the public credit (1790 and 1795), on a national
bank (1790), and on manufactures (1791), together
with his letter to President Washington which, in
justifying the constitutionality of the bank, develops
his doctrine of implied powers, are separately pub-
lished by Dr. McKee in a volume of attractive for-
mat. Mr. Schachner 's biography is well propor-
tioned and solidly researched, using manuscripts to
supplement printed sources. It takes a middle-of-
the-road position, and certainly does not gloss over
its protagonist's errors of judgment or temper. Pro-
fessor Mitchell is more enthusiastic in his admira-
tion of Hamilton's genius; his first volume, which
reaches the ratification of the Constitution, is based
on an exhaustive searching of the sources, but once
more it is true that the fresh material turned up
makes no great alteration in the old picture. For
the period after 1788, The Intimate Life of Alexander
Hamilton by his grandson, Allan McLane Hamilton
(New York, Scribner, 1910. 483 p.), contains
valuable material not to be found elsewhere.
3292. Jefferson, Thomas. Papers. Julian P. Boyd,
editor. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1950-56. 13 v. 50-7486 E302.J4O}
Associate editors: v. 1-5, Lyman H. Butterfield
and Mina R. Bryan; v. 6-8, Mina R. Bryan and
Elizabeth L. Hutter; v. 9, Mina R. Bryan; v. 10-12,
Mina R. Bryan and Fredrick Aandahl; v. 13, Mina
R. Bryan.
Contents. — v. 1. 1760-1776. — v. 2. January
1777 to June 1779. — v. 3. June 1779 to September
1780. — v. 4. 1 October 1780 to 24 February 1781. —
354 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
v. 5. 25 February 1781 to 20 May 1781. — v. 6. 21
May 178 1 to 1 March 1784. — v. 7. 2 March 1784
to 25 February 1785. — v. 8. 25 February to 31
October 1785. — v. 9. 1 November 1785 to 22 June
1786. — v. 10. 22 June to 31 December 1786. — v. n.
1 January to 6 August 1787. — v. 12. 7 August 1787
to 31 March 1788. — v. 13. March to 7 October
1788.
Index, volumes 1-6. Compiled
by Elizabeth J. Sherwood and Ida T. Hopper.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1954. 229 p.
E302.J463 Index
3293. Jefferson, Thomas. Writings. Collected
and edited by Paul Leicester Ford. New
York, Putnam, 1892-99. 10 v.
2-5666 E302.J466
Contents. — v. 1. 1760-1775. — v. 2. 1776-
1781. — v. 3. 1781-1784. — v. 4. 1784-1787. — v. 5.
1788-1792. — v. 6. 1792-1794. — v. 7. 1795-1801. —
v. 8. 1801-1806. — v. 9. 1807-1815. — v. 10. 1816-
1826.
3294. Jefferson, Thomas. Jefferson himself, the
personal narrative of a many-sided Ameri-
can. Edited by Bernard Mayo. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1942. xv, 384 p. illus.
42-50339 E332.J464
3295. Malone, Dumas. Jefferson and his time.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1948-51. 2 v. illus.
48-5972 E332.M25
"Select critical bibliography": v. 1, p. [457]~47o;
v- 2, p. [4941-504.
Contents. — v. 1. Jefferson the Virginian. — v. 2.
Jefferson and the rights of man.
3296. Randall, Henry S. The life of Thomas Jef-
ferson. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1888. 3 v.
9-28978 E332.R19
First published in 1857.
3297. Nock, Albert Jay. Jefferson. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, "1^26. 340 p.
26-13 10 1 E332.N75
Jefferson (1 743-1 826) was the author of the Dec-
laration of Independence, the second Governor of
the State of Virginia, the second Minister from the
United States to France, the first Secretary of State
of the United States, the second Vice President and
third President of the United States, and the founder
of the University of Virginia. Among the Found-
ing Fathers, only Franklin was his peer in uni-
versality of mind, and his writings of every descrip-
tion, but particularly the voluminous correspondence
which he maintained until a few weeks before his
death, constitute an incomparable mirror of the
general and especially the intellectual history of his
age. The complete edition of The Papers of Thomas
Jefferson planned and initiated by Dr. Boyd of
Princeton University, with its careful inventorying
of all surviving manuscripts and its abundance of
elucidation in introductions and notes, naturally
supersedes all previous editions as far as it has gone.
But volume 13, the latest to appear, only reaches
October 7, 1788, and the announced rate of publica-
tion has evidently slackened. It is still necessary,
therefore, to resort to one of the older editions for
the remainder of Jefferson's career; that of P. L.
Ford is listed above as being the easiest to use.
Professor Mayo's Jefferson Himself is a collection
of extracts from Jefferson's brief autobiography, his
letters, and his other writings, arranged in a chrono-
logical sequence so as to make a reasonably continu-
ous narrative of his career in his own words. Dr.
Malone is engaged upon a full-scale biography of
Jefferson, incorporating recent scholarship and
working out many problems hitherto unsolved or
unapproached. He can perhaps at times be re-
proached with putting Jefferson's lack of straight-
forwardness in too favorable a light. Unfortunately
his second volume, the latest to appear, only reaches
the close of 1792. For a detailed narrative from that
point one may turn to the older work of Randall,
which has the endorsement of Dr. Malone; it has
not, he jusdy says, enjoyed the reputation it de-
served because its author, a convinced Democrat,
had the misfortune of publishing on the eve of an
age of Republican domination, especially of the
journals of literary opinion. Among a variety of
briefer biographies, that of the late A. J. Nock
has had warm admirers through three decades for
its selection of material, charm of style, intuitive
insight, and delicate characterization. Special
studies are legion, and may readily be located
through the bibliographies in Malone and else-
where.
3298. Lewis, Meriwether, and William Clark.
The journals of Lewis and Clark. Edited
by Bernard De Voto. Maps by Ervvin Raisz. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1953. Hi, 504 p.
53-9244 F592-4 ^953
3299. Bakeless, John E. Lewis & Clark, partners
in discovery. New York, Morrow, 1947.
498 p. illus. 47-12243 F592.7.B3
The Lewis and Clark expedition of 1804-6, from
St. Louis to the mouth of the Columbia River and
back, is one of the high points in the exploration
of the North American Continent and in the ex-
pansion of the United States; it is also one of the
most fascinating of adventure stories. Planned by
President Jefferson in order to make known the
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 355
northern part of the Louisiana Territory purchased
the year before, it was entrusted to a young man
who enjoyed his personal confidence and was serv-
ing as his private secretary. Meriwether Lewis
(1774-1809) chose as his colleague William Clark
(1770-1838), under whom he had served in the
regular army. Under their harmonious leadership,
the expedition enjoyed an exceptional blend of good
management and good fortune, and was successful
in all its objectives. The reader has here a choice
between a selection from the original journals of the
expedition, chiefly those kept by the two leaders,
and a joint biography which includes a narrative of
the expedition emphasizing its day-to-day incidents.
Mr. De Voto's narrative, written from a rather
broader geographical viewpoint, forms the conclud-
ing portion of his The Course of Empire (no. 3161 ).
His selection from the journals comes from the
7-volume set edited by Reuben Gold Thwaites in
1904-5: Original Journals of the Lewis and Clar\
Expedition (New York, Dodd, Mead), and includes
about half of the text available there, with a gen-
eral introduction, some interspersed expository mat-
ter in italics, and brief footnotes. Dr. Bakeless
devotes nearly three-fifths of his volume to his anec-
dotal narrative of the expedition, including a chapter
on "Aboriginal Amours," and the rest to the earlier
careers of his protagonists, to the brief later life and
tragic end of Meriwether Lewis, and to the long pub-
lic service and honorable old age of Governor Clark.
For both the early and the late phases he has turned
up much new information from scattered documents
in archives and manuscript collections.
3300. Link, Eugene Perry. Democratic-Republi-
can societies, 1790-1800. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1942. 256 p. (Columbia
studies in American culture, no. 9)
42-5915 E310.L6 1942a
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Univer-
sity.
Bibliography: p. [2i3]-242.
A detailed study of the popular societies which
were a prominent feature of the last decade of the
18th century, which President Washington sought
to stigmatize as "self-created," and which indeed
spread into most States of the Union in an apparently
spontaneous manner. Dr. Link has identified 42
such societies organized between 1793 and 1798, of
which 9 were in Pennsylvania and 5 each in Ver-
mont, Virginia, and South Carolina. He has ana-
lyzed their membership in the few cases in which
this is possible, and finds that it came from a rather
wide range of society, with merchants, manu-
facturers, lawyers, doctors, and public officials the
fellows of craftsmen and artisans of all descriptions.
He finds that their membership was perceptibly
continuous with the Sons of Liberty and other
groups which advanced the American Revolution,
and that they were conscious of their kinship with
comparable organizations in England and on the
Continent. After reviewing their activities he con-
cludes that, although they were not without ele-
ments seeking political or economic self-aggrandize-
ment, on the whole these societies aimed at the free
and enlightened discussion of public issues, and
were active in the promotion of schools and libraries
as agencies of democratic education.
3301. McLaughlin, Andrew Cunningham. The
Confederation and the Constitution, 1783—
1789. New York, Harper, 1905. xix, 348 p. maps.
(The American Nation: a history, edited by A. B.
Hart, v. 10) 5-30250 E178.A54, v. 10
"Critical essays on authorities": p. 318-336.
3302. Jensen, Merrill. The New Nation; a his-
tory of the United States during the Con-
federation, 1781-1789. New York, Knopf, 1950.
xvii, 433, xi p. 5°-9344 E3°3-J45 x95°
"Essay on the sources": p. 429-432.
The late Professor McLaughlin's volume remains,
after half a century, a concise and lucid narrative of
the events of greatest national concern from the
peace negotiations which terminated the Revolution
through the ratification of the new Constitution.
He thus states his central theme: "The political
task that confronted the people when independence
from Great Britain was declared was in its essence
the same that had confronted the British ministry
ten years before — the task of imperial organization."
He regards the Articles of Confederation as "an
advance on previous instruments of like kind in the
world's history"; they were chiefly defective in
withholding from the central authority the powers
of raising money and of regulating commerce. At-
tempts to make the best of the Articles were quite
played out by the end of 1786, when a deep gloom
had settled upon conservative men, which gave
energy to their efforts toward a radical change in
the following year. None of this gloom is to be
found in the pages of Professor Jensen's volume,
which is a sequel to his Articles of Confederation
(no. 3253). A spirit of optimism reigned in the
new Nation, and is evident in the beginnings of a
national literature. Society was in a state of
vigorous health, and the grievances left over from
the old order were under sharp attack from an
active humanitarian movement. The economic
prostration which follows protracted \v;ir \v.i\ being
alleviated by a remarkable outburst of commercial
expansion and business enterprise. liven on the
part of the central government there was sub-
stantial achievement: the domestic debt created by
35^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the Revolution was reduced, a national domain
created, and a responsible staff of civil servants built
up. The change initiated in 1787 was carried
through by men who feared democracy and who
wanted a national instead of a federal government.
The book provides a more detailed account of many
aspects of this period than is available in any other
general work, but it resolutely turns a blind eye on
the impotence, impecuniosity, and defenselessness
of the Confederation.
3303. Malone, Dumas. The public life of Thomas
Cooper, 1 783-1 839. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1926. xv, 432 p. (Yale historical
publications. Miscellany, 16)
26-15381 E302.6.C7M2
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Yale University, 1923.
"Bibliographical note": p. [402]~4i6.
Cooper (1759-1839) was an Englishman, a scien-
tific amateur, a religious and political radical, and
a friend of Joseph Priestley, whom he accompanied
to America in 1794. His American career was re-
markable for its versatility, its vicissitudes, and its
progress from a radical to an extremely conserva-
tive position in politics. As a Jeffersonian pam-
phleteer he was sentenced to fine and six months'
imprisonment for seditious libel against President
Adams. He was appointed to office by the victor-
ious Pennsylvania Republicans, but his independent
course as a district judge cost him the favor of the
more radical democrats, and in 181 1 he was re-
moved from the bench in consequence of an address
by both houses of the legislature. Cooper then
served as professor of chemistry in two Pennsyl-
vania colleges, and soon after transferring to South
Carolina College, in 1820, was chosen its president.
Here he became the oracle of the state rights phi-
losophy, repudiating the protective tariff, and de-
fending slavery and nullification. Cooper's own
papers were destroyed in their entirety, and Dr.
Malone's volume is a fine work of reconstruction,
illuminating the career of a man who, if not an
original thinker, was a powerful agitator and con-
troversialist, uncommonly influential in the political
and intellectual developments of his time.
3304. Monaghan, Frank. John Jay, defender of
liberty against kings & peoples, author of
the Constitution & Governor of New York, Presi-
dent of the Continental Congress, co-author of the
Federalist, negotiator of the Peace of 1783 & the Jay
Treaty of 1794, first Chief Justice of the United
States. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1935. 497 p.
illus. 35-18227 E302.6.J4M6
"The sources": p. [465]— 474.
A sympathetic narrative rich in the detail of the
life and character of an aristocratic New Yorker
who prided himself on the rectitude of his motives
and his devotion to public duty. The author seeks
to restore Jay (1745-1829) to public esteem, a task
not facilitated by the fact that Jay, ever conscious
of his dignity, wrote with the feeling that posterity
was peering over his shoulder. In addition to the
portrait of a moderate who felt that the British
colonies were prompted and impelled to independ-
ence by necessity and not by choice, many details of
the society of Jay's era, such as an entertaining
section describing the rigors of life on the judicial
circuit, are provided.
3305. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The life and letters
of Harrison Gray Otis, Federalist, 1765—
1848. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1913. 2 v. illus.
13-23631 E340.O8M8
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [3ii]~3i7.
Orator, and attorney of the first rank, Harrison
Gray Otis entered politics during Washington's
second administration. He was a leader in the
movement of resistance to "Mr. Madison's War"
which culminated in the Hartford Convention in
1814, a movement in which this native Bostonian
exerted his greatest influence. Having succeeded
in keeping the convention's action within the
bounds of moderation and well short of even a
hint of secession, Otis continued to justify the con-
vention and its work during the remainder of his
life, often to the detriment of his political career.
In spite of the dying out of the Federalist Party, he
continued to be elected to office by Massachusetts
or Boston into the Jacksonian era. If no great
statesman, Otis was an attractive figure who repre-
sented the best of the political and social organiza-
tion which was the Federalist Party. The author
has endeavored, in addition to setting forth the
events of Otis' life, to describe critically Otis' ideas,
feelings, and prejudices, and to discover the motives
which guided his actions in the political crises of
his day, whether they centered upon nationalism,
sectionalism, or abolitionism. These volumes con-
tain a wealth of information about the later and
somewhat depressing years of the Federalist Party.
3306. Pratt, Julius W. Expansionists of 1812.
New York, P. Smith, 1949, ci925- 309 p.
49-9879 E357.P9 1949
Bibliography: p. 275-289.
A scholarly study, solidly based on contemporary
manuscripts and newspapers, of aspects of public
opinion, diplomacy, and strategy before and dur-
ing the War of 1 812. It shows that a general senti-
ment in the Northwest in favor of the acquisition of
Canada, which had existed since the Revolution,
became strongly activated when Tecumseh was
supplied with British arms; that the South was
GENERAL HISTORY / 357
eager to annex the Floridas, and East Florida was
in part occupied before the declaration of war; that
Northern sentiment compelled the Madison admin-
istration to withdraw from Florida, while the ad-
ministration and Southern congressmen lacked
enthusiasm for the Canada campaign; and that the
idea of Manifest Destiny made its first general ap-
pearance at this time. At the time of its appearance
Professor Pratt's book was hailed with enthusiasm,
and has been often taken to show that the "real
cause" of the War of 181 2 was not maritime griev-
ances but Western land hunger. This conclusion
the author had been very careful to disclaim: with-
out those grievances, he declared, "it is safe to say,
there would have been no war." To bring about
the War of 18 12, both sets of causes were probably
essential.
3307. Roosevelt, Theodore. The winning of the
West. New York, Putnam, 1889-96. 4 v.
fold. maps. 1-8663 F35J-R79
Contexts. — 1. From the Alleghanies to the Mis-
sissippi, 1769-1776. — 2. From the Alleghanies to
the Mississippi, 1777-1783. — 3. The founding of the
trans- Alleghany commonwealths, 1 784-1 790. —
4. Louisiana and the Northwest, 1791-1807.
Theodore Roosevelt was of the belief that the
development of the Western country was such as
to make the West peculiarly the exponent of all that
is most vigorously American in the life of the United
States. This vigorous study of the acquisition and
setdement of the trans-Allegheny region from 1769
to 1807 concerns itself with the dramatic and pic-
turesque. Of institutional or economic develop-
ment one finds little information, but Indian war-
fare, intrigues involving the Westerners, French and
Spaniards, and relations between the United States,
Britain, and Spain concerning the Western country
find places of prominence in a work which is clearly
stamped with the emphatic personality of its author.
3308. Smith, James Morton. Freedom's fetters;
the Alien and Sedition laws and American
civil liberties. Ithaca, Cornell University Press,
1956. 464 p. (Cornell studies in civil liberty)
56-2434 E327.S59
Passed in 1798, the Alien and Sedition laws were
ostensibly designed to protect the United States
during time of war, but in that era, when there was
a strong link between foreign influence and domestic
faction, these laws could also be used by their spon-
sors, the Federalists, as an instrument for the repres-
sion of political opposition. In this first of two
projected volumes the author, pursuing an investi-
gation of the relationship between liberty and author-
ity in a popular form of government, "concentrates
as exclusively as possible on the enactment and
enforcement of the Federalist measures of 1798 and
attempts to assess their influence in shaping the
development of the political process of republican-
ism, with its goals of majority rule and individual
rights."
3309. Starkey, Marion Lena. A little rebellion.
New York, Knopf, 1955. 258 p.
55-9292 F69.S85
The "little rebellion" named after Captain Daniel
Shays, of Pelham, Massachusetts, had few killings
and no hangings, but great consequences in that
it supplied power to the movement for a more per-
fect union. Miss Starkey retells this rather ex-
ternally known episode of 1786-87 in the terms of
human experience and achieves a dramatic presen-
tation without ascribing wickedness to either side.
3310. Walters, Raymond. Albert Gallatin: Jef-
fersonian financier and diplomat. New
York, Macmillan, 1957. 461 p.
57-8267 E302.6.G16W3
Bibliography: p. 435-446.
331 1. Adams, Henry. The life of Albert Galla-
tin. New York, P. Smith, 1943. 697 p.
A 44-322 NNC
"Reprinted under the auspices of the Out-of-
Print Books Committee of the American Library
Association."
Gallatin (1761-1849), a native of the Republic
of Geneva, came to the United States at the age of
19, and, largely because of a Rousseauist enthusiasm
for wild nature, settled in the far southwestern cor-
ner of Pennsylvania. The locale proved a disap-
pointment, but Gallatin's uncommon abilities im-
proved by an excellent education led almost at once
to a political career among his frontiersman neigh-
bors, and both in the Pennsylvania legislature and
in the Congress of the United States his mastery of
fiscal policy made him indispensable to the agrarian
Republicans with whom he had allied himself. The
same reason, together with a general capacity for
policy, administration, and hard work of any kind,
made him a prime reliance of Presidents Jefferson
and Madison, but after nearly 12 years' service as
Secretary of the Treasury he was forced out by the
factious opposition of Southern party leaders in
Congress. The remainder of his public career was
employed in a succession of foreign missions, and
his eighth and ninth decades were actively spent in
private finance, enlightened publicism, and ethno-
logical studies. Dr. Walters complains of his "rel-
ative obscurity today," but this is surely a conse-
quence of the circumstances that I lenry Adams did
so solid a piece of work in his Life, originally pub-
358 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lished in 1879, and that the Gallatin family kept
the papers closed to investigators for the next 60
years. Dr. Walters' volume, which is guided by the
wider interests of present-day historians and takes
a deeper interest in Gallatin's personality, supple-
ments rather than replaces the earlier work.
G. The "Middle Period" (1815-60)
3312. Adams, John Quincy. Memoirs comprising
portions of his diary from 1795 to 1848.
Edited by Charles Francis Adams. Philadelphia,
Lippincott, 1874-77. I2 v* 4-20138 E377.A19
3313. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. John Quincy Adams
and the Union. New York, Knopf, 1956.
xix, 546 p. illus. 55-9271 E377.B46
When John Quincy Adams (1767-1848) became
President in 1825, he had already had a long career
in American foreign affairs, which is covered in
Professor Bemis' John Quincy Adams and the
Foundations of American Foreign Policy (no.
3529). John Quincy Adams and the Union opens
with the campaign of 1824 and the election of
Adams by the House of Representatives after a
four-way race, in which Andrew Jackson received
the largest popular and electoral vote. As a minor-
ity President Adams struggled, without much suc-
cess, for his program of national expansion and
Federal development of the Nation's resources. In
the 1828 election he was defeated by Jackson, and
for a time retired to private life. However, in 1831
he was elected to the House of Representatives by
his home district, and was repeatedly reelected by
large majorities until his death. As a Congressman
he continued his independent career, acting in be-
half of the Nation, rather than of his constituency
or party, and fought for the cause of liberty. He
alienated the Southerners, since he spoke and acted
vigorously against slavery, and the Northern aboli-
tionists, since as a constitutionalist he would not
fully support their views. He frequently fought
the Southern-dominated Congress to a standstill,
often by himself, for most Northerners in Congress
regarded Southern support as necessary for their
political ambitions. While a source of constant
irritation to the House of Representatives, he
achieved the respect and admiration of most as the
leading parliamentarian of his day, and as an amaz-
ingly well-informed elder statesman. In this period
he came to be known as the Old Man Eloquent. As
an independent, a representative of the old elite,
and a champion of unpopular views, he never had
a large popular following, but he nonetheless man-
aged to play a major, shaping role in the Nation's
destiny. Much of this is revealed in his Memoirs,
which are usually regarded as factually accurate,
however colored by his own views and prejudices;
they remain a major source for information on the
public affairs of the period. This very large work
has been abridged for the layman and general stu-
dent by Allan Nevins: The Diary of John Quincy
Adams, 1794-1845; American Diplomacy and Po-
litical, Social, and Intellectual Life from Washing-
ton to Pol\ (New York, Scribner, 1951. xxxv,
586 p.). The Writings of John Quincy Adams
(New York, Macmillan, 1913-17. 7 v.) were edited
by Worthington Chauncy Ford, but the unfinished
set stops with 1823. A selective edition of Adams
papers, to be published by Harvard University
through the Belknap Press, is in preparation under
the editorship of Lyman H. Butterfield; meanwhile
a microfilm edition of the papers has been made
available by the Massachusetts Historical Society.
3314. Barker, Eugene C. The life of Stephen F.
Austin, founder of Texas, 1793-1836; a
chapter in the westward movement of the Anglo-
American people. Nashville, Cokesbury Press,
1925. xv, 551 p. illus. 26-9002 F389.A936
Bibliography: p. 525-534.
Stephen Fuller Austin was born in Virginia at
the site of the lead mines of his father, Moses Austin
(1761-1821). The father soon moved westward,
controlling lead mines in Missouri, but had his son
educated in the East. After Stephen's return he
served in the Missouri legislature from 1814 to 1820,
and afterward went to New Orleans to study law.
In 1820 his father obtained a permit from the Mexi-
can Government for settling families in Texas, then
a part of Mexico. Moses Austin died before acting
on this, but his son took it up. In January 1822
Stephen Austin settled the first American colony in
Texas. In the next dozen years he displayed an
extraordinary ability in maintaining smooth rela-
tions with the Mexican political factions, obtaining
many concessions from the government, and keep-
ing the state open to American colonization. He is
deservedly called "the father of Texas," for he was
the dominant factor in all activities and decisions to
the time of the Texan revolt and declaration of in-
dependence in 1835. While until near the very end
Austin had been loyal to Mexico, and though the
GENERAL HISTORY / 359
future of Texas seemed to him more promising in
association with that country than with the United
States, his activities had brought about the Ameri-
canization of Texas, and led directly to American
expansion across the Southwest to the Pacific. Dr.
Barker also edited The Austin Papers (v. 1-2.
Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1924-28. 2 v. in
3; v. 3. Austin, University of Texas, 1927. xxxv,
494 p.), which include the official and private writ-
ings of both Moses and Stephen Austin.
3315. Bassett, John Spencer. The life of Andrew
Jackson. New ed. New York, Macmillan,
1931. 2 v. in 1. illus. 31-23245 E382.B35
Paged continuously.
First published in 19 11.
3316. James, Marquis. Andrew Jackson, the
border captain. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1933. 461 p. illus. 33-7933 E382.J26
This volume ends with the presidential campaign
of 1824.
Bibliography: p. [4i7]~424.
3317. James, Marquis. Andrew Jackson, portrait
of a President. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1937. 627 p. illus. 37-28638 E382.J27
From 1824 to the end of Jackson's life.
Bibliography: p. [569]— 578.
3318. Syrett, Harold C. Andrew Jackson: his con-
tribution to the American tradition. Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953. 298 p. (Makers of
the American tradition series) 53-8875 E382.S97
Jackson (1767-1845) was born in a backwoods
settlement in the Carolinas, where he early expe-
rienced many of the shocks and difficulties of frontier
life. At the age of 13 he fought in the Revolu-
tionary War, but was soon taken prisoner. After
the war he went to Tennessee, where he practiced
law, and helped draft the State constitution. After
serving briefly in each House of the U. S. Congress,
he sat upon the supreme bench of Tennessee for
6 years (1798-1804), but resigned and lived as
a gentleman planter at The Hermitage near Nash-
ville for nearly a decade. He had, however, retained
his commission as commander of the Tennessee
militia, and when the Creek Indians rose in 1813,
Jackson took the field against them. He overcame
logistic difficulties, campaigned vigorously, and won
hard-fought and complete victories. Rewarded
with a major-generalship in the United States Army,
he foiled a British descent on Mobile and concluded
the war with a one-sided slaughter of the army at-
tacking New Orleans (Jan. 8, 1815). He was at
once established as the great popular hero of the
war and a presidential possibility, and his further
service on the Florida frontier and in the Senate
was very much in the public eye. In 1824 he ran
for President; while he received a plurality (in a
field of four) of the electoral vote, the election by
the House of Representatives went to J. Q. Adams.
In 1828 and 1832 he was elected by large margins,
and thus crystallized a political revolution which
has been discussed in other books in this section
(particularly Blau, no. 3319; Bowers, no. 3320; and
Schlesinger, no. 3352). The introduction into na-
tional politics of government by the "common man"
is also a major theme of Dr. Syrett's volume; like
other books in its series, it is made up of extensive
quotations from Jackson's writings (in fact mostly
state papers penned by his lieutenants), supple-
mented by connective and explanatory expositions.
After Jackson left the Presidency, he lived in semi-
retirement at The Hermitage, but remained a fac-
tor in national government. His career was long
and intensively studied by Bassett, whose scholarly
life remains a highly reliable guide. The two-
volume biography by Marquis James is also based
on much research, including materials unknown
to Bassett. However, James is not a historian's
historian in his presentation of the development of
the problems Jackson faced; but his work has con-
siderable literary merit, and allows a convincing,
living image of Jackson to emerge from its pages.
A selective edition of Jackson's Correspondence
(Washington, Carnegie Institution of Washington,
1926-35. 7 v. Publication no. 371. Papers of the
Department of Historical Research) was edited by
John Spencer Bassett; for the ordinary reader it is
heavy going, since Jackson's extraordinary personal
magnetism never penetrated his writing.
3319. Blau, Joseph L., ed. Social theories of Jack-
sonian democracy; representative writings
of the period 1825-1850. New York, Liberal Arts
Press, 1954. 383 p. (American heritage series,
no. 1) 55~l69 E338.B55 1954
Includes bibliography.
In this volume Mr. Blau has brought together a
group of writings expressive of the views held by
the supporters of Andrew Jackson. After an in-
troduction by the editor on the Jacksonian move-
ment, his selections are classified in three parts:
"The Ideal of Self Government," "Economic
Themes," and "Social Criticism." The movement
arose with a popular hero alter the choice of the
President had been won by the people; it won
national following while creating a feeling ol na-
tional unity at a time when the former leading
groups were splitting up into pro- and anti-slavery
factions; but, as the editor points out, the basic
source of unity for the national movement was a
widespread lower-middle-class opposition to eco-
360 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
nomic control from Boston, New York, and Phila-
delphia. The movement itself was an alliance of
diverse groups who presented a variety of positive
programs, often in conflict with one another. The
various facets of this movement, rather than the
program which Jackson and his advisers forged,
provide the material for this book. Another book
which aims to present the varying and at times con-
flicting elements that made up Jacksonianism is
The ]ac\sonian Persuasion; Politics and Belief
(Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1957. 231 p.),
by Marvin Meyers; in addition to a number of gen-
eral chapters on causes, and a detailed analysis of
particular groups of problems, the book devotes
much space to the individual versions of Jacksonian-
ism held by a number of contemporaries.
3320. Bowers, Claude G. The party battles of the
Jackson period. Anniversary ed. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [pref. 1928] ci922. xix, 506 p.
front., ports. 38-20418 E381.B792
"Books, papers, and manuscripts cited and con-
sulted": p. [481 ]— 487.
In 1828 the Nation held its first Presidential elec-
tion wherein the choice was in most States decided
by the electorate rather than by the State politicians.
The result was the election of the popular Jackson
over the entrenched administration party. It also
meant that for the first time political parties began
to function on the vote-getting level that has since
been familiar. This study of the 8 years of the
Jackson administration opens with a survey of the
physical and social scene in Washington at the
time, and then turns to the narrative proper. While
Jackson is something of a focal point, more attention
is given to other leaders, such as the opposition Sen-
ators Henry Clay, John C. Calhoun, and Daniel
Webster, and pro-Jackson politicians such as Martin
Van Buren, Edward Livingston, Amos Kendall,
Roger Taney, and John Forsyth. The story itself
tends to be centered about individuals as much as
about issues, and the examination of motives leads
the author to a rather extensive revaluation of the
traditional reputations of some of the leading figures.
Most of the leaders emerge as something less than
the pure heroes of legend, while a few, such as John
Tyler, are elevated above their common reputation.
3321. Chambers, William Nisbet. Old Bullion
Benton, Senator from the new West: Thomas
Hart Benton, 1782-1858. Boston, Little, Brown,
1956. 517 p. 56-9067 E340.B4C5
3322. Smith, Elbert B. Magnificent Missourian;
the life of Thomas Hart Benton. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott, 1958, "1957. 351 p-
57-12384 E340.B4S56
Benton was elected Senator from Missouri in 1820,
and he continued in that office for three decades.
In this period he became a leading spokesman, not
only of men of the western frontier, but also of the
common man. As such he became the leading
"Jacksonian" Senator, and by his contemporaries
was thought to be as important as Clay, Calhoun, or
Webster. An early achievement was his leadership
in the fight against the Bank of the United States.
He also contributed to the country's financial history
by his work on the currency; he was instrumental in
establishing the revised bimetallism standards which
lasted for many years. His advocacy of hard cur-
rency and his opposition to paper money earned for
him the nickname of "Old Bullion." Benton also
did much to secure Federal backing of the movement
for westward expansion. In this matter one of his
noteworthy stands was that opposing the extension
of slavery to new states; this caused him some po-
litical difficulty, since he represented a slave-holding
state. The politics of the period and his role in
them are depicted in his voluminous Thirty Years'
View (New York, Appleton, 1854-56. 2 v.), which
has often been regarded as autobiography, although
it is rather a slightly personalized political history.
As such it is an outstanding example of its form,
and a major item for understanding the political
background of the period.
3323. Chitwood, Oliver Perry. John Tyler,
champion of the Old South. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1939. xv, 496 p.
39-22996 E397.C48
"This volume is published from a fund contrib-
uted to the American Historical Association by the
Carnegie Corporation of New York."
3324. Morgan, Robert J. A Whig embattled; the
Presidency under John Tyler. Lincoln, Uni-
versity of Nebraska Press, 1954. 199 p.
54-8442 E396.M6
Bibliography: p. 191-195.
Tyler (1790-1862) was born and educated in
Virginia, where he served in the State Legislature
as a young man. Subsequently he served in the
U. S. House of Representatives (1817-21). From
1825 to 1827 he was Governor of Virginia; this
post he left to become U. S. Senator (1827-36).
He resigned from the Senate when, on a matter of
constitutional interpretation, he found he could
not in conscience follow the instructions of the
State Legislature. In the 1840 election "Tyler too"
was Harrison's vice-presidential running-mate. He
became President when Harrison died one month
after taking office. Tyler's presidential term was
marked by much discord, as he broke from his party
because of his insistence on a strict interpretation of
GENERAL HISTORY / 36 1
the Constitution. Despite the opposition from both
parties, Tyler did accomplish a few important meas-
ures during his administration. He retired from
political life at the end of his term, and did not
reappear on the national scene until 1861, when he
headed the Washington Peace Conference, an un-
successful attempt to reconcile North and South.
Shordy afterwards he died in full support of the
Confederacy. Because Tyler managed to antagon-
ize both political parties of his period, he received
considerable denunciation from all sides. This in
turn influenced most historians, and he has usually
been regarded as one of the minor Presidents. Chit-
wood's book is an attempt to rectify this situation
and establish Tyler as a man of many qualities and
more than minor importance. The book traces
his entire career, but is more a political than a gen-
eral biography. Mr. Morgan's book is also an at-
tempt to improve Tyler's historical reputation, in-
dicating Tyler's work in elevating the status of the
Presidency, as well as the extent of his influence
upon the political developments of the time.
3325. Cleaves, Freeman. Old Tippecanoe; Wil-
liam Henry Harrison and his time. New
York, Scribner, 1939. 422 p. illus.
39-32515 E392.C64
Bibliography: p. 392-401.
3326. Green, James A. William Henry Harrison,
his life and times. Richmond, Garrett &
Massie, 194 1. 536 p. illus. 41-25076 E392.G8
Bibliography: p. 493-529.
Appendix I, The Harrison Literature: p. 447-483.
Harrison (1 773-1 841) was sprung from the first
families of Virginia, and was the son of a signer of
the Declaration of Independence. He entered the
Regular Army in 1791, and for the next 23 years
served with great credit in both military and civil
posts in the Northwest Territory. He was Gov-
ernor of Indiana Territory from 1800 to 18 13, carried
out the administration's self-contradictory Indian
policy as well as could be expected, and won striking
victories at Tippecanoe (1811) and the River
Thames ( 1813). But after resigning from his com-
mand in 18 14 Harrison's career was for long anti-
climactic: his personal finances went from bad to
worse; he served in the national House of Repre-
sentatives (18 16-19) an^ Senate (1825-28) without
making much of an impression; and during his brief
tenure as Minister to Colombia succeeded in making
himself distinctly unacceptable to the government
of President Bolivar. During the 1830's he lived
quietly and struggled with his debts, but he con-
tinued to be regarded by the Whigs as a presidential
possibility. In 1840 the Whig managers settled upon
him in preference to Clay and Webster, and entered
upon a campaign of ballyhoo in which he was oddly
identified with a log cabin and hard cider, and his
victories of 25 years back were thrust in front of
the actual issues of the day. Harrison won by a
landslide, but contracted pneumonia in Washington
and died in his 69th year after a month in office.
The antics of the campaign are described in Robert
Gray Gunderson's The Log-Cabin Campaign
([Lexington] University of Kentucky Press, 1957.
292 p.). Dorothy Burne Goebel's William Henry
Harrison, a Political Biography (Indianapolis, His-
torical Bureau of the Indiana Library and Historical
Department, 1926. 456 p.) is at various points of
political interest fuller than the two lives entered
above. Of these Mr. Green's is somewhat adula-
tory, but is based on the author's collection of 1,600
items of Harrisoniana, and is worth consulting for
the illustrations alone.
3327. Coit, Margaret L. John C. Calhoun, Ameri-
can portrait. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1950. 593 p. illus. 50-5234 E340.C15C63
Bibliography: p. [573]— 581.
3328. Wiltse, Charles M. John C. Calhoun. In-
dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1944-51. 3 v.
illus. 44-8938 E340.C15W5
Bibliography at end of each volume.
Contents. — [v. 1] Nationalist, 1782-1828. —
[v. 2] Nullifier, 1 829-1 839. — [v. 3] Sectionalist,
1840-1850.
John Caldwell Calhoun (1782-1850) was in 1808
elected to the legislature of South Carolina, his
native State. In 1810 he was chosen for the U. S.
House of Representatives, where he played a leading
role before and during the War of 18 12. His inter-
est in military affairs and his nationalist outlook led
Monroe to appoint him Secretary of War (1817-25).
Subsequently he was twice elected Vice-President,
under both John Quincy Adams and Andrew Jack-
son. As the sectional discord between North and
South increased, Calhoun increasingly favored the
South, and was soon formulating his doctrine of
nullification. In 1832 he resigned from the vice-
presidency to take a seat in the Senate, where he
could speak more forcefully for South Carolina in
particular and the South in general, while at the
same time he eliminated his chance for the Presi-
dency, as he shifted from national to sectional lead-
ership. In the years that followed he became not
only the spokesman and political philosopher of the
South, but also a dominating figure in the Senate.
As he fought against measures such as t.irilTs ;
fiting Northern manufacturers, and attempts to
keep slavery out of the territories, he became more
and more concerned with the declining minority
position of the South. Ills cure lor the situation
362 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
through a government of "concurrent majorities"
he presented in two treatises, A Disquisition on
Government and A Discourse on the Constitution
and Government of the United States, which first
appeared posthumously in his collected Worlds
(New York, Appleton, 1851-55. 6 v.). The set
also includes his speeches and public papers and
reports. To the end of his life he strove in the
Senate to maintain the Union, if that could be done
in terms acceptable to the South, but recognized
that separation would probably occur. His argu-
ments for nullification and the right of a state to
withdraw from the Union bore fruit a decade after
his death. Miss Coit's biography is a respectful
attempt to understand and make vivid Calhoun and
the events amid which he functioned. Professor
Wiltse's three-volume work is a scholarly presen-
tation of the details of Calhoun's life, but the very
thoroughness of the study tends to obscure Cal-
houn's function in and meaning for his own period.
3329. Dangerfield, George. The era of good feel-
ings. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1952.
525 p. 51-14815 E371.D3
Bibliography: p. [4931-512.
An account of the personalities and circumstances
behind the Treaty of Ghent (Dec. 24, 1814) intro-
duces the subsequent events that led into "the Era
of Good Feeling." This term is usually applied to
the period of Monroe's presidency (1817-25), but
the author extends it through 1829, so as to cover
the administration of John Quincy Adams, which
he regards as concluding a period of transition in
American history. In 18 17 America had recently
emerged "victorious" from the War of 18 12, and a
feeling of nationalism and general well-being pre-
vailed from 1817 through most of 1821, while the
JefTersonian Republicans enjoyed almost universal
support as a result of the self-discrediting actions of
the Federalists during the war. In late 1821 the
"good feeling," if not the "era," came to an end
with an economic depression. In the years that
followed there came to the fore questions such as
national finances, slavery, and Western expansion,
and with these arose a new party — the Democrats.
The disputed election of J. Q. Adams presaged the
transition from the concept of a non-interfering,
limited central government to a centralized govern-
ment that might on occasion interfere in behalf of
oppressed minorities. The story ends with the ele-
vation to the Presidency in 1829 of Andrew Jack-
son, "the voice of the people," and the first post-
Washington President not groomed for the position
by "the administradon."
3330. De Voto, Bernard A. Across the wide Mis-
souri. Illustrated with paintings by Alfred
Jacob Miller, Charles Bodmer, and George Cadin.
With an account of the discovery of the Miller col-
lection by Mae Reed Porter. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1947. xxvii, 483 p.
48-3175 F592.D36 1947a
Bibliography: p. 457-468.
The author states in his preface that in this book
he has, for the period 1832-38, "tried to describe
the [Rocky] mountain fur trade as a business and
as a way of life; what its characterisdc experiences
were, what conditions governed them, how it helped
to shape our heritage, what its relation was to the
westward expansion of the United States, most of
all how the mountain men lived." The book is lib-
erally illustrated with contemporary pictures, espe-
cially those of Alfred Jacob Miller (1810-1874),
who in 1833-38 accompanied William Drummond
Stewart throughout the area. Since the volume was
originally conceived as text for Miller's pictures, the
story is still centered around the Stewart expedition,
although it includes a full attempt to depict the fur
trade of the Rockies during these years, when it
was already moving into its decline. The book re-
ceived the Pulitzer prize in history for 1948. While
the author is probably best known for historical
work such as this, he also produced much literary
and critical work (nos. 2415-18).
3331. De Voto, Bernard A. The year of decision,
1846. Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. xv,
538 p. illus. 43-4191 F592.D38
"Statement on bibliography": p. [523J-527-
The preface states that the purpose of this book
"is a literary purpose: to realize the pre-Civil War,
Far Western frontier as personal experience." The
year 1846 was chosen because it "best dramatizes
personal experience as national experience." The
work is thus at once both a literary and a historical,
and even to some extent a social, document. It
focuses on the national events which arose from,
were furthered by, or brought about the events on
the Western frontier in 1846, with some tracing of
the carry-over into 1847. The most obvious event
of 1846 for standard history was doubtless the out-
break of the Mexican War. This, with Fremont's
exploring activities which brought California into
the Union, extended the United States to the Pa-
cific. This was the year when America and Great
Britain setded the boundaries of the Pacific North-
west. It was also the year in which migration along
the Oregon Trail reached a high point, and Francis
Parkman rode over much of the trail. In 1846 the
Mormons began their two-year mass exodus to Utah.
In addition to following these actions and their in-
teracting aspects, De Voto frequently devotes at-
tention to lesser individuals within the mainstream,
such as the traders, trappers, and guides, and even
GENERAL HISTORY / 363
presents the gruesome story of the Donner party, a
group of California-bound emigrants who were
stranded in the Sierras. Their story is more fully
told in George R. Stewart's Ordeal by Hunger (New
York, Holt, 1936. 328 p.).
3332. Dyer, Brainerd. Zachary Taylor. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press,
1946. 455 p. illus. (Southern biography series)
47-142 E422.D995
"Critical essay on authorities": p. [42o]~433.
3333. Hamilton, Holman. Zachary Taylor. In-
dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 194 1-5 1. 2 v.
illus. 41-2781 E422.H3
Includes bibliographies.
Contents. — f 1 ] Soldier of the Republic. —
[2] Soldier in the White House.
Zachary Taylor (1784-1850) was born in Virginia
and raised in Kentucky. Before becoming Presi-
dent, he served for 40 years in the Regular Army,
and it is doubtless as a soldier that he made his great-
est contribution to the Nation. In his early career
he was active in those operations which made the
Midwest from Indiana through Missouri safe for
settlement. In the Mexican War he demonstrated
a considerable generalship, and the ability to inspire
confidence among his followers, thus leading to the
defeat of enemy forces several times the size of his
own. His victories brought him great popularity,
which induced influential Whigs to back him for
the Presidency. He was elected in 1848, assumed
office in 1849, and died in 1850. During his brief
term he accomplished little, but the little did in-
clude the preliminary organization of the recent
annexations, and, in international affairs, the Clay-
ton-Bulwer Treaty. In his acts he soon showed him-
self a nationalist rather than a sectionalist, which
rapidly lost him the support of the Southern Whigs,
who thought they had elected one of their own.
Dyer's work is a scholarly study of Taylor's life and
importance. Hamilton's two-volume biography is
much more detailed in its attempt to present a full
picture of Taylor's historical role, and his importance
as a leader in the opening of the West.
3334. Fremont, John Charles. Narratives of ex-
ploration and adventure; edited by Allan
Nevins. New York, Longmans, Green, 1956.
532 p. maps. 56-7867 F592.F8647
3335. Nevins, Allan. Fremont, pathmarker of the
West. [New ed.] New York, Longmans,
Green, 1955. 689 p. illus.
55-1552 E415.9.F8N46 1955
"Bibliographical note": p. 671-673.
While Fremont (1813-1890) had a long, varied,
and adventurous life as army general, Senator from
California, mining magnate, railroad president,
Republican presidential candidate in 1856, territor-
ial governor of Arizona, etc., the most important
part of his career for its contribution to the devel-
opment of America occurred in 1842-46. In these
years he led several expeditions exploring the West.
His accurate and extensive scientific reports and his
maps established him as one of the world's leading
scientist-explorers. In 1842 Fremont explored the
Oregon Trail into the Rocky Mountains; his 1843
expedition took him to Oregon, Nevada, and into
California. Upon his return East he wrote another
vivid report of his expedition; it was published with
the first as Report of the Exploring Expedition to
the Roc/^y Mountains in the Year 1842, and to
Oregon and North California in the Years 1843-44
(Washington, Blair & Rives, 1845. 583 p. [U. S.
28th Cong., 2d sess. House. Executive] Doc-
ument no. 166). In the years that followed, this
volume was widely reprinted, and stirred up much
enthusiasm for the West and national expansion.
In 1845 Fremont set out on another expedition,
again working his way into California, where he
was instrumental in bringing about its separation
from Mexico. While acting as civil Governor of
California, Fremont came into conflict with Gen-
eral S. W. Kearny, and was convicted of mutiny by
a court martial. Although he emerged from the
affair as a popular hero, Fremont's exploring career
for the Government was over. His subsequent
career was one of greater prominence than signifi-
cance, since he was cut off from the field of work in
which his main talents lay. Toward the end of his
life Fremont began to write his autobiography, but
died before completing it. A first volume, all that
was ever published, appeared as Memoirs of My Life
(Chicago, Bedford, Clarke, 1887. 655 p.); this
skips over his early years to concentrate on his
Western expeditions; unfortunately, it adds little
of value to his reports, and the biography by Pro-
fessor Nevins gives a fuller picture of the man.
The volume of Narratives of Exploration and Ad-
venture contains selections from Fremont's Memoirs
and his many reports; it is chronologically arranged,
and contains material on pre-1842 expeditions in
which Fremont took part, though not as leader.
3336. Fuess, Claude Moore. Daniel Webster.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1930. 2 v. illus.
30-29651 E340.W4F95
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [419J-430.
Contents. — 1. 1782-1830. — 2. 1830-1852.
Webster (1782-1852) was an outstanding states-
man-politician, anil one of the most inllucnti.il
Northerners of his period. In the House of Rcpre-
364 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
sentatives (1813-17, 1823-27) and in the Senate
(1827-41, 1845-50) he expressed the views of New
England conservatism, as well as the related views
of the businessmen of the increasingly industrial
North. However, Webster was also a strong con-
stitutionalist with the outlook of a unionist, so that
on occasion he moderated his position out of con-
sideration for other sectional (usually Southern) in-
terests and the national welfare — most notably in
his support of the Compromise of 1850 put forth by
Henry Clay (nos. 3342-3344). This led many
Northerners to view him as a "fallen God," and
published denunciations were numerous. Webster
was also an important Secretary of State under three
Presidents (Harrison and Tyler, 1841-43, and Fill-
more, 1850-52). He argued a number of leading
constitutional questions before the Supreme Court,
and many regarded him as the outstanding con-
stitutional lawyer of the period. His many speeches
in Congress, on public occasions and in court, earned
for him, in an age of oratory, a reputation as one
of the Nation's foremost orators. Most of these
have been brought together in his Writings and
Speeches, national ed. (Boston, Little, Brown, 1903.
18 v.), which unfortunately is incomplete for Web-
ster's scattered correspondence. While Fuess' biog-
raphy of Webster remains the most thorough study,
and is usually regarded as a leading example of
political biography, Richard N. Current's Daniel
Webster and the Rise of National Conservatism
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 215 p.) in the Library
of American biography series does bring out more
clearly Webster's part in shaping a conservative
political tradition in America.
3337. Garrison, George Pierce. Westward exten-
sion, 1841-1850. New York, Harper, 1906.
366 p. (The American Nation: a history, edited
by A. B. Hart, v. 17.) 6-46358 E178.A54, v. 17
An older work which still provides a clear out-
line of a crowded decade. The author states in his
preface that it has been his "principal aim to de-
scribe the expansion of the United States westward
from the Louisiana Purchase to the Pacific Ocean,
in such a way as to indicate the real forces which
gave it impulse, and how they actually worked;
and especially to show how it was affected by, and
how it reacted upon, the contemporaneous section-
alizing movement which finally ended in the Civil
War." Thus, while a heavy emphasis has been
placed on expansion, the book is in large measure
a history of the United States for the period covered.
It gives a continuous narrative of relations with
Mexico in chapters 13-15. The expansion problem
is centered upon Texas, Oregon, and California,
with some attention to Maine, the initial planning
of a Panama Canal, and related problems. The
political consequences of expansion are developed
in chapters on the Wilmot Proviso and the Com-
promise of 1850. Despite the predominance of ex-
pansion, the author finds space for the party strug-
gle and for the domestic problems of the Tyler
and Polk administrations. The author used Polk's
diary in manuscript before it became widely known,
and was one of the first to emphasize "the stern
integrity and strength of his character."
3338. Ghent, William J. The road to Oregon, a
chronicle of the great emigrant trail. New
York, Longmans, Green, 1929. xvi, 274 p. illus.
29-9318 F592.G45
This book opens with a discussion of the early
explorers who established the Oregon Trail, largely
following in the footsteps of animals and Indians.
Next came the early missionaries and caravans, who
followed the trail from its beginning in Independ-
ence, Missouri, to various points along its way or its
branches, or to its end in Oregon. The author con-
tinues with the story of the heavy migration over
the trail in the 1840's. Chapter seven is an attempt
to establish the route of the trail. Ghent follows
this with an account of the development of traffic
over the trail in the 1850's, and concludes by de-
scribing the decline in the use of the trail, as a result
of the construction in the 1860's of a railroad line
to the Pacific. While this book is useful for its
historical accuracy, and for its extended view of the
implications of the use of the trail, a more vivid
view of the trail itself may be gathered from Francis
Parkman's The Oregon Trail (no. 3348).
3339. Going, Charles Buxton. David Wilmot,
free-soiler; a biography of the great advocate
of the Wilmot Proviso. New York, Appleton,
1924. xvii, 787 p. 24-21082 E340W65G6
David Wilmot (1814-1868) was born and raised
in Pennsylvania, and from 1834 to the end of his
life was active in state and national politics. In 1845
he was elected to Congress as a Democrat, and for a
while he showed himself to be a regular party man.
However, he came to have increasing doubts about
the entrenched power position of the South; these
doubts found expression when in 1846 President
Polk asked for an appropriation of $2,000,000 for
acquiring territory in consequence of the Mexican
War. Wilmot proposed an amendment barring
slavery from any territory to be acquired with the
money. This became famous as the Wilmot Pro-
viso; and, while it was not adopted, it was import-
ant as a precipitating factor in the North-South
cleavage. On this principle Wilmot took an active
part in the "Free Soil" campaign of 1848. As a re-
sult of his stand, he left the Democratic Party, and
was later instrumental in the founding and develop-
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 365
ing of the Republican Party. While this one cause
dominated Wilmot's life, so that Going's large
biography is in large part the detailed story of the
issue, Wilmot's extensive connections give his life
story an importance for the endre period.
3340. Graebner, Norman A. Empire on the Pa-
cific; a study in American continental ex-
pansion. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1955.
278 p. 55-10664 E179.5.G7
"Bibliographical essay": p. 258-265.
This account of the extension of America to the
Pacific in the 1840's covers both the expansion from
Texas through California as a result of the Mexican
War, and the more northerly expansion through
establishment of the southern half of the Oregon
Territory as American, as a result of negotiations
with Great Britain. The author contends that the
interest in acquiring these large tracts of land was
relatively minor, and that even the emotional force
of the doctrine of Manifest Desdny was far from
being the major causadve force it has usually been
considered to be. He presents a strong argument to
prove that acquisition of these territories resulted
rather from the growing American desire for the
major Pacific ports of San Francisco and San Diego
in California, and for control of Juan de Fuca
Strait, giving access to Puget Sound in the North-
west. Behind this he perceives the driving force of
the Eastern States, whose merchants desired Pacific
oudets in order to control the developing trade with
Asia.
3341. James, Marquis. The Raven; a biography
of Sam Houston. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1929. 489 p. 39-2503 F390.H8483
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. [4655-470.
Sam Houston (1793-1863) was born in Virginia,
but raised in Tennessee. In 1823, after a varied
military and legal career, Houston was elected to
Congress, and in 1827 he was chosen Governor of
Tennessee. In 1829 Houston's bride suddenly left
him, without stating the cause. Rumors multiplied,
and Houston resigned from the governorship, but
never offered an explanation of what had taken
place. Houston then went beyond the Mississippi
and soon held a position of leadership among the
Cherokees, who knew him as the Raven. In 1835
he entered into the Texan struggle for independence
from Mexico, and thus began the career for which
he is remembered, and because of which he has
been awarded a high seat in the pantheon of Amer-
ican folklore. In 1836 Houston was appointed com-
mander-in-chief of the little Texan army, and on
April 21 surprised Santa Anna and destroyed the
van of his army at San Jacinto. Houston was
promptly elected the first president of the new and
victorious republic. For most of the remainder of
his life Houston served his commonwealth as pres-
ident of the Republic of Texas, as Senator from the
new State of Texas, and as Governor of the State.
He was Governor when the South seceded; Houston
tried to keep Texas from seceding, and then tried
to keep it from joining the Confederacy. He failed
in both, and his governmental career was at an end.
He lived long enough to see his prophecies of doom
beginning to be fulfilled. James' biography, which
is both scholarly and literary, was awarded a Pulitzer
prize in 1930.
3342. Mayo, Bernard. Henry Clay, spokesman of
the New West. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1937. 570 p. illus. 37-28554 E340.C6M2
Bibliography: p. [5271-548.
3343. Van Deusen, Glyndon G. The life of Henry
Clay. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1937. 448 p.
illus. 37-24249 E340.C6V3
Bibliography: p. [4271-437.
3344. Poage, George Rawlings. Henry Clay and
the Whig Party. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1936. 295 p.
36-18979 E340.C6P6
Bibliography: p. [2795-283.
Clay (1777-1852) was born in Virginia, but after
he had been admitted to the bar moved in 1797 to
Kentucky. Here he practiced law, but was soon
diverting most of his energy to politics. Elected to
the State Legislature in 1803, he was twice chosen
by it to complete unexpired terms in the United
States Senate. Sent to the national House of Repre-
sentatives in 181 1, he was at once chosen Speaker,
and first gave to that position much of the impor-
tance it still holds. A candidate for the Presidency
or for nomination to it in each election from 1824
to 1848, he always had an enthusiastic following, and
may be said to have had extremely bad luck in miss-
ing the grand ambition of his life. After throwing
his support to J. Q. Adams in 1824, he served as his
Secretary of State, and was afterwards elected to the
Senate, where in that body's greatest days he shared
its leadership with Calhoun, Webster, and Benton.
First conspicuous as a spokesman of the New West,
he was later best known as the protagonist of "the
American system" of Federal support for internal
improvements and domestic manufactures, but his
posthumous fame has been principally that of the
Great Compromiser, who led in the passage of the
Missouri Compromise in 1^:0, introduced the com-
promise tariff of 1833, aru' originated the Compro-
mise of 1850. Professor Mayo'a biography was
announced as a trilogy, but nothing has appeared
save the first volume, which remains the most
366 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
thorough study of Clay's early years down to the
War of 1 812. Dr. Van Deusen's biography is the
most complete modern account; a briefer one is pro-
vided by Clement Eaton: Henry Clay and the Art
of American Politics (Boston, Little, Brown, 1957.
209 p.), a volume of the Library of American bi-
ography series. Mr. Poage studies Clay as the most
conspicuous leader of the Whig Party from the
election of 1840 through the Compromise of 1850.
For Clay's own writings, the world is still depend-
ent upon the work of the Reverend Calvin Colton,
who edited The Private Correspondence of Henry
Clay (New York, A. S. Barnes, 1855. 642 p.) and
The Speeches of Henry Clay (New York, A. S.
Barnes, 1857. 2 v.). The Wor^s of Henry Clay,
published in 6 volumes by A. S. Barnes and Burr in
1857, and several times reprinted, consists of these
together with a 3-volume life of Clay by Colton,
which is ponderous and prosaic. A complete edi-
tion of Clay's papers is in preparation at the Univer-
sity of Kentucky, under the editorship of James F.
Hopkins.
3345. Monaghan, James. The Overland Trail.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1947. 431 p.
illus. (The American trails series)
47-11789 F591.M78
"Bibliographical note": p. 415-423.
The term "Overland Trail" is used here to desig-
nate the north central route used by emigrants
heading westwards in the 19th century before the
construction of the cross-continental railroad. The
route was by most of its users known as the Oregon
Trail, but the author has not used that name because
"parts of it were traveled by many more Mormons
and Argonauts than by Oregon-bound pioneers."
Mr. Monaghan's history is in large part told in terms
of the adventures of various individuals and groups.
Roughly the first third of the book is devoted to the
period of early discovery and exploration, and tells
the stories of Lewis and Clark, John Jacob Astor,
Nathaniel Wyeth, and others. The book continues
with the popularizing of one particular trail by John
C. Fremont, and the subsequent mass migration of
the 1840's. Episodes such as the Donner party,
and the journey of Francis Parkman which led to
his writing The Oregon Trail (no. 3348), are also
narrated. These are followed by accounts of the
migration of the Forty-niners, the brief flourishing
of the Pony Express, and the advent of the railroad.
Among other stories included is Mark Twain's
journey over the trail by stagecoach.
3346. Moore, Glover. The Missouri controversy,
1819-1821. [Lexington] University of
Kentucky Press, 1953. 383 p.
53-5518 E373.M77
Bibliography: p. [3531-375.
This study opens with a discussion of the historical
background for the North-South sectionalism that by
1 8 19 had become a serious divisive factor in the
Union, and then takes up the controversy that arose
when statehood was proposed for Missouri. This
first focused national attention on the new sectional-
ism, and the problems inherent in it. The eventual
Missouri Compromise provided that Missouri be ad-
mitted as a slave state, and Maine be admitted as a
free state, while it was also agreed that in the future
states admitted from north of 36°3o' should be free,
and those from south of the line should be slave.
This compromise set for several decades the pattern
used to preserve a balance in the North-South con-
flict. Moore also studies public opinion in the
various states, the economic factors behind sectional-
ism, and the political implications. An earlier
work presenting less of the national bearings of the
controversy, but offering more of a picture of Mis-
souri itself, is Floyd Calvin Shoemaker's Missouri's
Struggle for Statehood, 1804-1821 (Jefferson City,
Mo., Hugh Stephens Printing Co., 19 16. 383 p.).
3347. Nichols, Roy Franklin. Franklin Pierce,
Young Hickory of the Granite hills. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1931.
xvii, 615 p. 32-3i5 E432.N63
Bibliography: p. 571-584.
Franklin Pierce (1804-1869) was born in New
Hampshire, and early (1829-33) served in the
State Legislature. In 1833 he was elected to the
national House of Representatives, where he re-
mained until he went to the Senate (1837-42). In
both Houses he showed himself a loyal follower of
the Jacksonians. After 1842 he practiced law in
New Hampshire, while continuing to manage local
Democratic campaigns, and served without distinc-
tion as a brigadier-general in the Mexican War.
In 1852 he received the Democratic presidential
nomination as a dark horse compromise candidate.
He made no campaign speeches, but won the elec-
tion in an electoral landslide which overwhelmed
Whigs and Free Soil Democrats alike. As Presi-
dent he tried to satisfy all elements in his party,
and so satisfied practically none. He was a nation-
alist who tried to reconcile the North-South conflict,
but with little success. In foreign affairs he worked
for "manifest destiny" on a number of fronts, but
failed in practically all. Having failed to obtain
renomination from the Democrats, he retired to
private life in New Flampshire. With the advent
of the Civil War, Pierce became hated for his op-
position to abolitionism, his advocacy of a compro-
mise with the South, and his opposition to the war.
Professor Nichols' book is an attempt not only to
write the President's biography, but also to under-
GENERAL HISTORY / 367
stand Pierce and others like him who worked un-
remittingly for compromise, but achieved only
obloquy from a nation torn by intense emotions.
3348. Parkman, Francis. The Oregon Trail;
sketches of prairie and Rocky-Mountain life.
With an introd. by Henry Steele Commager. New
York, Modern Library, 1949. xix, 366 p.
49-49101 F592.P284
Parkman has already been discussed a number of
times in this bibliography (nos. 2281, 3069, and
3171). The Oregon Trail resulted from a journey
he took along part of the trail in 1846, while the
first mass migrations westward were in progress.
The book first appeared serially in Knickerbocker
shortly after he had returned from his travels. It
is still considered one of the leading books provid-
ing insight into Indian character and ways of life.
It shows vividly what the West was like as white
men first appeared on the scene in numbers. It is
currendy fashionable to lament the fact that Park-
man did not appreciate the significance of the mi-
gration then taking place, and thus did not produce
a book on the lines of Ghent's (no. 3338). Had he
done so, we might now have a quite good book on
the migrations; as it is, we have a superb work fo-
cusing on the Indian and wildlife background, and
serving as an introduction to Parkman's later his-
torical work. The Oregon Trail is available in
many editions and can be read merely as an ad-
venture story.
3349. Polk, James Knox. The diary of James K.
Polk during his Presidency, 1845 to 1849,
now first printed from the original manuscript in
the collections of the Chicago Historical Society.
Edited and annotated by Milo Milton Quaife with
an introd. by Andrew Cunningham McLaughlin.
Chicago, McClurg, 19 10. 4 V.
10-15650 F548.1.C4, v. 6-9 E416.P76
"This work forms volumes VI-IX of the Chicago
Historical Society's collection, a special issue of 500
copies being printed for the purposes of that
society."
3350. McCormac, Eugene Irving. James K. Polk,
a political biography. Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1922. 746 p.
A22-821 E417.M12
Bibliography: p. [726]~73i.
3351. Sellers, Charles Grier. James K. Polk,
Jacksonian, 1795-1843. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1957. 526 p.
57-5457 E417.S4
"Sources": p. 493-509.
Shortly after Polk ( 1795-1849) was born in North
Carolina, his family moved to Tennessee, where he
was raised. He studied for the law, early entered
State politics, and went on to the U. S. House of
Representatives, where he served from 1825 to 1839.
In this period he established himself as a leader of
the Jacksonian forces in Congress, and a popular
politician of integrity with an unusual talent for
stump speaking. In 1839 he followed his party's
call and ran for Governor of Tennessee to save the
State for the Democrats; he won this election, but
lost in two subsequent tries. In 1844 Polk was
being considered for the Democratic vice-presiden-
tial nomination, when the deadlock of the Van
Buren and Calhoun forces led to his becoming the
compromise candidate for the Presidency. Shortly
after his inauguration in 1845, he declared that the
four main measures of his administration would be:
"one, a reduction of the tariff; another, the inde-
pendent treasury; a third, the settlement of the
Oregon boundary question; and lastly, the acquisi-
tion of California." With single-minded purpose
and untiring activity, Polk achieved all these meas-
ures in his one term in office, and refused a renomi-
nation. In his unremitting attention to his duties,
Polk had worn himself out, and died a few months
after leaving office. The biography by McCormac
concentrates heavily on the presidential years, with a
long section on the Mexican War. Mr. Sellers'
study is meant to show Polk not merely in his po-
litical role, but as a human figure in his era; it stops
short of the presidential years. A close view of
Polk's White House activities may be found in his
remarkable Diary; a selection from it was made by
Allan Nevins and published as Pol\: The Diary of
a President, 1845-1849 (New York, Longmans,
Green, 1952. 412 p.).
3352. Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The age of
Jackson. Boston, Little, Brown, 1945.
577 p. 45-8340 E381.S38
Bibliography: p. [529]— 559.
This volume, which really deserves the over-
worked adjective "stimulating," does not attempt
to offer a detailed narrative of Andrew Jackson's
two administrations (1829-37), but 's rather an in-
terpretation of three decades of American history
in the light of the renewal of the democratic im-
pulse effected by Jackson and his lieutenants. The
author seeks to show how the Jacksonian movement
grew out of Jeffersonian democracy, as a changing
social order required a peaceable revolution to pre-
serve the reality of democracy in a changed context.
The younger Schlesinger studies the intellectual, po-
litical, and economic forces at work, and reaches the
conclusion that the Jacksonian revolution was not
the triumph of Western radicalism over Eastern
368 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
capitalism, as is usually thought; but, rather, that
it was the triumph of the non-capitalists (farmers,
factory workers, etc.) in all sections over the en-
trenched capitalistic groups. The author also
shows most of the leading intellectuals of the day
supporting the movement, and giving it a solid core
of ideas. The ramifications of the movement are
traced in the law, industrialism, religion, Utopian
socialism, and literature. The dilution and disin-
tegration of the impulse, under leaders less deter-
mined and less able than Jackson, are followed to the
Civil War and even into the administration of An-
drew Johnson. The "whole moral of the Jack-
sonian experience," the author suggests, was that
"only a strong people's government could break up
the power of concentrated wealth." The wide
range of the book, and the forceful style with which
the author has brought together the strands of his
extensive scholarship, give it a vital quality in pic-
turing the era and the forces that molded it.
3353. Shackford, James Atkins. David Crockett,
the man and the legend. Edited by John
B. Shackford. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1956. 338 p.
56-13913 F436.C9594
Bibliography: p. 317-324.
Davy Crockett is well known to most Americans
as a folklore figure whose incredible adventures
have been presented through almanacs, comic books,
movies, television programs, children's tee-shirts,
etc. The original of these stories was David
Crockett (1786-1836), a politician who throughout
his life welcomed the retelling of tall tales about
himself. He was born in Tennessee to the poverty
usual among frontier families. However, he rose
through military and judicial positions to represent
his frontiersman neighbors in Congress. He served
well the interests of these poor setders, but lost
office after breaking with the Jacksonians, largely
because of their land policy. He returned to the
advancing frontier, then in Texas, and was killed
at the Alamo in the Texan war for independence.
It is this historical person whose life is traced in
Shackford's book, which is based on extensive re-
search among previously neglected primary sources.
The author also tries to rehabilitate as a piece of
frontier literature, humor, and some truth the 1834
autobiography (nos. 2649-50). Here Crockett
emerges as an archetypal frontiersman of great
strength, courage, and determination, if on a some-
what diminished scale from the glories of folklore.
3354. Smith, Justin H. The annexation of Texas.
Corrected ed. New York, Barnes & Noble,
1941. 496 p. A42-899 F390.S647 1941
"Account of the sources": p. 471-476.
When the United States purchased the Louisiana
Territory it acquired some claims to Texas, but
waived them in 1821, in exchange for Florida.
However, neither Spain nor Mexico, after acquir-
ing independence, succeeded in settling Texas. Set-
tlement was largely by Americans, led first by
Stephen Austin (no. 3314). Since the Mexican
Government was highly unstable, Texas never de-
veloped any attachment to it. In 1835, after the
Mexican Government had become a military dicta-
torship, Texas declared its independence, and man-
aged to maintain it under the leadership of Sam
Houston (no. 3341), but sought to become a state
of the American Union. Throughout the following
decade the pros and cons for annexing Texas were
loudly disputed in the United States. The main
stumbling block was the issue of slavery. West-
erners wanted Texas at any price, southerners
wanted an extension of slave areas, and northerners
opposed the idea of more slave-voting states. After
much argument Texas was finally admitted to the
Union, and conflicting views over its western
boundary soon led to the Mexican War (no. 3689).
It is the background to this phase of American
expansion and North-South sectionalism that is ex-
amined in this book, originally published in 191 1.
It was the first thorough study of this historical
problem, and research for it was done in archives
throughout the world, so that it is based almost
exclusively on primary sources. In his thorough-
ness the author has also considered the attitudes and
actions of foreign governments insofar as they con-
cerned the transition of Texas from Mexican Prov-
ince to independent republic and to American State.
3355. Stephenson, Nathaniel W. Texas and the
Mexican War; a chronicle of the winning of
the Southwest. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1921. 273 p. illus. (The Chronicles of America
series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 24)
21-14809 E173.C55, v. 24
F389.S92
This is a concise account of Texas, from its begin-
nings through the stabilization of its boundaries at
the end of the Mexican War. The book opens with
a brief account of early American claims to Texas,
the settlement of that area by Americans, and the
relationship of those Americans to the central Mex-
ican Government. It continues with an account of
the growing friction between the government and
the American settlers, the attempts of the United
States to acquire the area by negotiation, and the
final revolt of the colonists against Mexico, leading
to the establishment of the Texan Republic. The
author then reviews the actions which led to the
annexation of Texas by the United States, and the
conflicting boundary claims and territorial desires
GENERAL HISTORY / 369
which resulted in the Mexican War. The course of
the war is then traced, and the book concludes with
the ratification of the treaty which resulted in Amer-
ica's acquisition of the Southwest (1848). The
"Bibliographical Note" (p. 259-261) at the end is
now considerably out of date. The book itself,
however, remains essentially valid, for subsequent
research has added much detail, but has little altered
the main oudine of the story which is the substance
of this volume.
3356. Turner, Frederick Jackson. Rise of the
New West, 1819-1829. New York, Harper,
1906. xviii, 366 p. 9 maps. (The American Na-
tion: a history, edited by A. B. Hart, v. 14)
6-13695 E178.A54, v. 14
"Critical essay on authorities": p. [333]~352.
This volume, the only substantial narrative his-
tory completed by the celebrated formulator of the
"frontier hypothesis" (no. 3147), is a general view
of the United States from the panic of 18 19 to the
election of Andrew Jackson. The author finds the
significance of the decade in the weakening of the
nationalism which had flared out toward the end of
the War of 18 12 and had dominated the first years
of the peace, and in the resurgence of sectional in-
terests. However, national feeling, and the sense
of alienation from Europe, remained powerful
enough to allow the enunciation and general accept-
ance of the Monroe Doctrine in 1823. The author
surveys the situation in each of the three older
sections, and then describes developments in the
new one, the trans-Appalachian West, at some
length, since it was the progress of civilization here
which brought a completely new factor into the na-
tional composite. The domestic politics of the pe-
riod, involving such issues as the Missouri Compro-
mise, internal improvements, and the tariff, are in-
terpreted in terms of the interests, the balance, and
the alliances of sections. In progress at the same
time but, the author confesses, not easy to depict,
was "the formation of the self-conscious American
democracy, strongest in the west and middle region,
but running across all sections and tending to divide
the people on the lines of social classes."
3357. Turner, Frederick Jackson. The United
States, 1 830- 1 850; the Nation and its sec-
tions. With an introd. by Avery Craven. New
York, Holt, 1935. xiv, 602 p. maps.
35-5282 E338.T92
The author's incomplete manuscript was edited
by M. H. Crissey, Max Farrand, and Avery Craven.
"Chapter XIII [Taylor administration and the com-
promise of 1850] . . . was never written."
J :: 1 Li-40 CO 25
In this history of the period from 1830 to 1850,
which is in some degree a continuation of his Rise
of the New West (supra), Turner pursues his
theories of sectionalism and its influence on the de-
velopment of the country. The bulk of the book
consists in studies of the various sections (New Eng-
land, Middle Adantic States, South Atlantic States,
South Central States, North Central States, and
Texas and the Far West) throughout this period.
There follow a series of chapters on the presidential
administrations from Jackson through Polk. Chap-
ters at the beginning and end bring this material
together to some extent. Unfortunately, while Pro-
fessor Turner spent 15 years in writing the book,
he died without completing it, which fact is doubt-
less responsible for a lack of unity in the volume.
Furthermore, only a limited amount of editorial
work has been done upon it. Nonetheless, the
work remains important for the questions it raises,
its influence on subsequent historians, and its pro-
Western, pro-frontier view of national development.
3358. Woodford, Frank B. Lewis Cass, the last
Jeffersonian. New Brunswick, Rutgers
University Press, 1950. 380 p.
50-9741 E340.C3W66
Bibliography: p. 357-369.
Lewis Cass (1782-1866) was born in New Hamp-
shire. As a young man he moved to Ohio, where
he entered into law practice in 1802. He had served
in the Ohio State Legislature, and he had taken part
in the War of 18 12 on the frontier, when at the end
of 1 8 13 he was appointed Governor of Michigan
Territory, a position he held for 18 years. He was
then appointed Secretary of War in Jackson's
Cabinet, where he remained until 1836. Subse-
quently he served as American Minister to France;
in this position his anti-British maneuverings
brought him great popularity at home. In 1844 he
came near obtaining the Democratic nomination
for the Presidency, but was passed over for Polk.
Cass then entered the Senate, where he continued
his work as a conservative nationalist until 1848,
when he received the presidential nomination.
However, he lost to Taylor in a close election, pardy
because of a split in his own party, and partly be-
cause he was too conservative in a period of intense
partisanship over such matters as slavery, territorial
expansion, and internal improvements. He was
then reelected to the Senate, where he remained until
he became Buchanan's Secretary of State. He re-
signed from this position when Buchanan refused to
strengthen Fort Sumter, with the Civil War but a
few months away. Mr. Woodford's scholarly
biography relates Cass' varied and influential career
to the progress of the Nation's development.
370 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
H. Slavery, the Civil War, and Reconstruction (to 1877)
3359. Bancroft, Frederic. The life of William H.
Seward. New York, Harper, 1900. 2 v.
0-1693 E415.9.S4B3
A critical but sympathetic biography of Seward
(1801-1872) whose aim in life, not entirely achieved,
"was to be supremely great both in his generation
and in history." Seward began his active political
career in 1830 as an Antimason, joined the Whig
Party in 1834, and served in the United States
Senate from 1848 until his appointment as Lincoln's
Secretary of State. His opposition to slavery in the
Senate was partially motivated by the increasing
power of the antislavery movement in the North,
which led him to enter the Republican Party in
1854. Although an acknowledged party leader, he
failed of nomination to the Presidency in both 1856
and i860. As Secretary of State from 1861 to 1869,
Seward became, in the author's opinion, a diplomat-
ist and statesman of the first rank. He was the
first Secretary to publish diplomatic dispatches, a
part of his campaign to mold public opinion in favor
of the policies of the Government. His great tri-
umph was his skillful checking of the interventionist
aims of Great Britain and France in the Civil War,
and the reduction of their unofficial interference by
manipulating the sympathies of the European op-
ponents of slavery. In the postwar years Seward
supported Andrew Johnson's policy of moderation
toward the South, forced France to withdraw from
Mexico, and purchased Alaska from Russia in 1867.
Personally amiable and without malice, Seward is
here characterized as "pre-eminently a man of theo-
ries and expedients, but he also had settled con-
victions and sound judgment."
3360. Barnes, Gilbert Hobbs. The antislavery im-
pulse, 1 830-1844. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1933. 298 p. 33-38695 E449.B264
"This volume is published from a fund contrib-
uted to the American Historical Association by the
Carnegie Corporation of New York."
"Works consulted": p. 199-202.
This influential work traces the main current of
antislavery agitation and organization in the United
States to the great evangelical revival which reached
its peak in 1830, and in particular to the preaching
of Charles Grandison Finney (1792-1875), a success-
ful lawyer transformed into an itinerant Presbyte-
rian revivalist of extraordinary fervor and persua-
sion. At Utica, N. Y., Finney not merely converted
but gathered into his Holy Band a student at Hamil-
ton College, Theodore Dwight Weld, and his older
friend and mentor, Charles Stuart, a retired captain
of the British Army. Finney's mission in New
York City brought into line the wealthy and phil-
anthropic merchants, Arthur and Lewis Tappan.
In 1833, on learning of the British measure for
abolishing West Indian slavery, the New York
group proceeded to organize the American Anti-
Slavery Society, which in the following year began
its nationwide agitation for immediate abolition.
In 1837 pamphleteering was subordinated to
evangelism, as The Seventy were recruited and sent
out to work in the rural counties. In the same
year their efforts produced the flood of antislavery
petitions to Congress, where they were "stowed
away in the antechambers by waggon loads." Anti-
slavery at once became a live political issue, and
the first supporter of the petitions, J. Q. Adams,
was soon joined by allies on the floors of Congress.
"From first to last, throughout the antislavery
host the cause continued to be a moral issue and not
an economic one." The book is very largely based
on original and previously unexploited sources
such as the Weld, Lewis Tappan, J. R. Giddings,
and J. G. Birney papers, and nearly one-third
(p. 203-291) consists of notes containing extensive
extracts from them.
3361. Beale, Howard K. The critical year; a study
of Andrew Johnson and Reconstruction.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1930. 454 p.
30-14060 E668.B354
Bibliography: p. 407-435.
The election year of 1866 is here critically ex-
amined through contemporary newspapers, private
correspondence, local campaign speeches, and po-
litical sermons, in order to determine the true mo-
tives behind the campaigns of Andrew Johnson and
the Radical Republicans. In the author's analysis,
the election issue was not merely one of deciding
the policy to be followed in dealing with the con-
quered South, but was also the decisive test of power
between the rising industries and businesses of the
Northeast, represented by the Radical Republicans,
and the agrarian South and West, championed by
Johnson. The victory of the Radical Republicans
and the economic interests allied with them was
achieved by adroit propaganda, appealing to the
sectionalism and war-bred hatred of the electorate,
rather than presenting any actual issues upon which
they could express their preference.
GENERAL HISTORY / 37 1
3362. Bowers, Claude G. The tragic era; the revo-
lution after Lincoln. New York, Blue Rib-
bon Books [193-] xxii, 567 p.
37-10370 E668.B7793
Reprinted from the original edition (copyrighted
1929).
"Manuscripts, books, and newspapers consulted
and cited": p. [541 ]- 547»
The late Ambassador Bowers (1879— 1957) quoted
with approval Hilaire Belloc's dictum that "readable
history is melodrama," and of his three principal
dramatizations of American history (cf. nos. 3281
& 3320) The Tragic Era is the most melodramatic.
Anyone who wants to approach Reconstruction and
the Gilded Age in Washington through a crowded
and stirring narrative in which the whites are daz-
zling and the blacks Stygian will find this to his
taste. For such history there must be dramatis
personae, and Andrew Johnson and Thaddeus
Stevens, cast respectively as Gabriel and Satan, have
each a portrait-chapter to himself. There must be a
backdrop, provided by a brilliant chapter on "Wash-
ington: the Social Background." Comic relief is
provided by "The Great American Farce," as the
impeachment trial of President Johnson is denom-
inated. Peripeteia in the action are indicated by
such chapter headings as "Military Satraps and Rev-
olution," "The Falling of Rotten Fruit," and "The
Red Shirts Ride." For all this, the volume is based
upon a thorough knowledge of memoirs and biog-
raphies, supplemented from a few manuscript
collections and a wide use of contemporary news-
paper files. Mr. Bowers was neither an unlearned
nor a careless historian, and his vigorous partisan-
ship is harmless because it is so honestly avowed.
3363. Buck, Paul H. The road to reunion, 1865—
1900. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1937. 320 p.
37-4978 E661.B84
The morrow of Appomattox saw a North arro-
gant in victory, and a South "spent and exhausted,
yet ready to offer stolid resistance" to aggression.
During the 12 Reconstruction years, while the
North was building its policy upon force, sectional
division was perhaps intensified. But before as
well as after 1877, "the sturdy barriers of sectional
antipathy and distrust crumbled one by one." With-
in a generation of Appomattox "an American
nationalism existed which derived its elements in-
discriminately from both the erstwhile foes." As
the author states, virtually every activity of the
American people during the period had some bear-
ing upon sectional reconciliation, and he traces
its progress in a variety of spheres: economic de-
velopment and integration, the rise of a new genera-
tion in the South, the appearance of a new Southern
literature hospitably received in the North, and the
fraternizing of veterans' organizations. Perhaps
the decisive element which permitted the "new
patriotism" of 1898 was the acquiescence of leaders
of Northern opinion in the disfranchisement of the
Southern Negro.
3364. Cate, Wirt Armistead. Lucius Q. C. La-
mar, secession and reunion. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1935. 594 p.
illus. 35-9410 E664.L2C37
Bibliography: p. 555-563.
Lamar (1825-1893), the nephew of Mirabeau
Buonaparte Lamar and the son-in-law of Augustus
B. Longstreet, was a Georgian by birth. He repre-
sented Mississippi in the two Congresses before the
Civil War, drafted the Mississippi ordinance of
secession, held a commission in the Confederate
Army, and went to Europe as a Confederate com-
missioner. His real eminence, however, began in
1872, when he succeeded in winning election to the
U. S. House of Representatives, and soon thereafter
led in the elimination of carpetbag rule from Mis-
sissippi. His distinguished and conciliatory service
in the U.S. Senate culminated in his appointment
by President Cleveland, first as Secretary of the
Interior in 1885, and then to the Supreme Court
in 1888, in both of which positions the ex-Confed-
erate became a living symbol of restored national
harmony. Mr. Cate's biography is extremely lauda-
tory, but has much reason for being so.
3365. Coulter, Ellis M. Travels in the Confederate
States, a bibliography. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press, 1948. xiv, 289 p. (American
exploration and travel [n])
48-7183 Z1251.S7C68
Travel, in the ordinary sense, is a rarity if not an
impossibility in wartime, and this annotated bibli-
ography, which derives its title from the series of
which it forms a part, is somewhat misleadingly
named. Most of the 492 titles which arc here de-
scribed in considerable detail are the personal nar-
ratives, letters, or diaries of soldiers. S0mewh.1t
unexpectedly, Southern soldier-writers are in a de-
cided minority; many who did write wrote late and
from memory, and Dr. Coulter has excluded most
of their publications as "almost worthless" for his
purpose. Many of the Northerners, however, are
here reproached with being prejudiced witnesses. A
considerable proportion of the titles arc Northern
regimental histories, selected whenever the author
was a member of the unit and included descripthe
detail. The entries list the illustrations in each work,
and the annotations give "some estimate of the na-
ture of its content, its reliability, and the itinerary
of the author." In addition to the book's ez]
372 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
purpose of showing what the South was like in war-
time, it is a valuable guide to personal materials on
the campaigns in Southern territory.
3366. Craven, Avery O. The coming of the Civil
War. [2d ed. Chicago] University of Chi-
cago Press, 1957. 491 p.
57-8572 E338.C92 1957
The second edition of this work differs little from
the first of 1942, but adds a preface in which the
author tells that it arose out of an attempt to write a
history of American democracy. He soon realized
that the democratic process in the United States had
"completely failed in the critical period that culmi-
nated in the Civil War," and this book was the result
of his effort to find out why. He finds it necessary
to go as far back as 1800 to provide an adequate
background, and he approaches the situation from
the angle of the South, "since that section's ways
and institutions were under fire." Southern argu-
ments in favor of slavery are represented as a re-
action to an aggressive attack upon the institution
within as well as outside the South. Rising emo-
tionalism in the Nordi engendered by decades of
abolitionist propaganda is given the major blame for
placing the two sections in irreconcilable frames of
mind which left no alternative save secession and
war. Despite the divisions which rendered the Dem-
ocratic Party ineffectual in its efforts for compromise,
the author believes that if the Republican movement
had been less intransigent, slavery would ultimately
have eliminated itself without any breach of the
Union. Professor Craven nevertheless asserts that
his conclusions "point out the tragedy of being
human rather than of being either Southern or
Northern."
3367. Craven, Avery O. Edmund RufEn, South-
erner; a study in secession. New York,
Appleton, 1932. 283 p. 32-8631 F230.R94
"Notes," containing bibliography: p. 261- [271].
A native of Prince George's County, Virginia,
Edmund Ruffin (1794-1865) was one of the South's
most noted agriculturalists and became one of its
earliest and most emphatic and fanatical secession-
ists. His writings on slavery and Southern rights
vied in quantity with his writings on agriculture.
As the founder of the League of United Southern-
ers, Ruffin was allowed to fire the first shot from
Morris Island against Fort Sumter. He never held
a civil or military commission from the Confeder-
acy, but nevertheless committed suicide when it
collapsed. Mr. Craven has written a penetrating
study of this man who, however interesting, is
less important as an individual than as a repre-
sentative of the tone and temper of his section and
class.
3368. Current, Richard Nelson. Old Thad
Stevens, a story of ambition. Madison,
University of Wisconsin Press, 1942. 344 p.
43-52549 E415.9.S84C8
Bibliography: p. 323-328.
Stevens (1792-1868) was a Vermonter by birth
but became a lawyer and an iron manufacturer in
central Pennsylvania. From 1831 he was a leading
politician in the Andmasonic, Whig, Free-Soil, and
Republican Parties, and always showed himself a
zealous advocate of democratic measures and an in-
transigent foe of any form of aristocratic privilege.
In the Pennsylvania Legislature in the 1830's he
did much to extend the system of free schools to
the entire state. In the U. S. House of Representa-
tives, from 1849 to 1853 and again from 1859
until his death, he was a vociferous opponent of
slavery and the Southern slaveowners. During the
Civil War he continued to assail Lincoln's adminis-
tration for its allegedly slack conduct of the war, and
on its close he became the most influential House
member of the Joint Committee on Reconstruc-
tion. He led in the measures which wrecked
Lincoln's plan of Reconstrucdon, hobbled the
Johnson administration, and culminated in the im-
peachment and trial of President Johnson. He died
soon after the latter's acquittal. This harsh and
enigmatic figure has attracted a succession of
biographers, none of whom can be said to have read
the riddle and produced a definitive life, for which
sufficient material probably does not exist. Mr.
Current's life is based on solid research, but goes
rather far in reducing Stevens' avowed passion for
equality to a politician's love of power and a de-
sire to make his party "a vehicle for industrialists
like himself." The older work by James A. Wood-
burn, The Life of Thaddeus Stevens (Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill, 1913. 620 p.), is still worth con-
sultadon, though it is not a biography in the
modern manner.
3369. Dodd, William E. Jefferson Davis. Phila-
delphia, G. W. Jacobs, 1907. 396 p. (Amer-
ican crisis biographies) 8-820 E467.1.D26D8
Bibliography: p. [3841-385.
A sympathetic and relatively brief narrative of
the tragic life of Jefferson Davis (1808-1889), sol-
dier, planter, United States Senator, and President
of the Confederate States of America. Davis is
shown to have derived a love of order and discipline
from his West Point training; he was also a man
of deep affection for his family. His most salient
characteristic, clearly manifested in public office, was
his loyalty to his friends, whom he loaded with fa-
vors and defended at all dmes. Attention is given
to his leadership of the Southern rights forces in
GENERAL HISTORY / 373
the Senate. As Chief Executive of the Confederacy
he was not as effective as his wishes and abilities
permitted, because of the jealousy of the seceded
states for their sovereignty. Much attention is also
given to his decisions affecting the operations of
the Southern armies. Having spent two years in
a Federal prison after the collapse of the Confed-
eracy, Davis retired to private life, promoting the
rebuilding of the Southern economy, but only oc-
casionally appearing to make a speech. A more
detailed but as yet incomplete biography is Hudson
Strode's Jefferson Davis, [v. 1] American Patriot,
1808-1861 (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955.
xx, 460 p.)
3370. Dumond, Dwight Lowell. Antislavery
origins of the Civil War in the United States.
Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press, 1939.
143 p. 39-21 131 E449.D87
"List of additional readings": p. 131-134. "Se-
lected bibliography of proslavery and antislavery
publications": p. 135—139.
Lectures delivered on the Commonwealth Foun-
dation at University College, London, which analyze
"the abolition indictment of slavery and trace the
steps by which the defense of the institution forced
men to proceed from a general discussion of the
subject to a war against it." The antislavery move-
ment is divided into three periods: The first (1787-
1833) centered about the activities of the racist
American Colonization Society for promoting the
deportation of free Negroes to Liberia. The second
(1833-39) was marked by the rise of the American
Anti-Slavery Society and a clarification of the prin-
ciples of antislavery doctrine. Slavery's loss of na-
tional approval, the rallying of the South to its
defense, and the flight of abolitionists from slave to
free states all made slavery a sectional issue. In the
third (1839-61) manumission became a political
question with the formation of the Liberty Party
by the antislavery forces, and the major parties be-
came sectional parties vying for control of the Fed-
eral Government. The South 's refusal to permit
outside influence to set in motion economic and
social forces in favor of constitutional abolition is
regarded as the decisive factor in bringing about
secession and war.
3371. Dumond, Dwight Lowell. The secession
movement, 1860-1861. New York, Mac-
millan, 1931. 294 p. 31-30548 E440.5.D88
Bibliography: p. 273-286.
This is one of those historical studies which de-
rive their value from carefully delimiting the field
of investigation, and confining their attention to
what lies within it. In this University of Michi-
gan dissertation Professor Dumond aimed "to state
the premises upon which the several groups of
Southerners justified resistance to the Federal
Government, and to trace the process of secession."
He is aware that slavery was the bone of conten-
tion, and that vast economic and social interests
were involved, but he is concerned with the ex-
pression of these in a Federal system of govern-
ment under a written constitution. "The Republi-
cans affirmed the right and duty of Congress to
exclude slavery from the territories. The Southern-
rights men denied it to Congress, to the territorial
legislatures, and to the people of a territory until
they framed an organic law preparatory to admis-
sion as a state." This was the issue which split the
Democratic convention, brought about the election
of a Republican President, kept the Southern leaders
from acquiescence in this result, and frustrated the
various attempts to work out a compromise. The
author extracts the constitutional interpretations
implicit in the course of events from April i860
to April 1 86 1 with great penetration.
3372. Dunning, William Archibald. Reconstruc-
tion, political and economic, 1 865-1 877.
New York, Harper, 1907. xvi, 378 p. (The Amer-
ican Nation: a history, v. 22)
7-24164 E178.A54, v. 22
"Critical essays on authorities": p. [324J-357.
The Reconstruction era is here seen not merely
as a time when the victorious North imposed its
will upon the defeated South, but as a time marked
by a realignment of national powers and a re-
adjustment of political forces which accompanied
recovery from the wounds of civil war. It is this
national, rather than Southern, transformation
which occupies Professor Dunning here. The rival
policies of the President and Congress in regard
to Reconstruction and national administration are
discussed in the light of their effect upon the South-
ern state governments and their colored and white
populations. While social, economic, and political
conditions in the country as a whole left much to
be desired, public attention came to be focused upon
the irresponsible exploitation of Negro suffrage in
the South, and on the spread of corruption in the
Federal Government which political adversaries
called "Grantism." The final chapters deal with
the resurgence of the South, the nullification of
Negro suffrage, the exposure of scandals through-
out the administration, and the questionable elec-
tion of 1876 and its aftermath. Professor Dun-
ning's seven Essays on the Civil War and Recon-
struction and Related Topics (New York, P. Smith,
1931. 397 p.) deal principally with the constitu-
tional and governmental aspects of Reconstruction.
374 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3373. Eaton, Clement. A history of the Southern
Confederacy. New York, Macmillan, 1954.
35i p. > 54-8772 E487.E15
Mr. Eaton's purpose is to "delineate the changes
which occurred in the society of the Old South under
the impact of war." The secession movement was
a conservative revolt, "in that the South would not
accept the 19th century," and all segments of society
were of necessity deeply affected by the progress
and fortunes of the war. Attention is focused upon
the morale of the army and of the civilian popula-
tion, and the eventual decline of the will to resist.
The role of women, the attrition of cultural institu-
tions, the attitude of Negroes, and the personalities
of civil and military leaders are described, and there
are summaries of Confederate strategy and logistics.
Mr. Eaton has drawn upon letters, diaries, and other
personal narratives in his effort to illustrate the
"human drama" of the Confederacy. Similar in
scope, treatment, and thesis, and even more detailed,
is E. Merton Coulter's The Confederate States of
America (no. 4076).
3374. Fite, Emerson David. Social and industrial
conditions in the North during the Civil
War. New York, P. Smith, 1930. 318 p.
30-26614 HC105.6.F6 1930
First published in 19 10.
The considerable literature on civil society in the
Confederacy is matched by a surprising dearth of
titles for the situation north of the battle lines. The
present volume, originally published over 45 years
ago, is largely concerned with the wartime economic
boom, in which agriculture, transportation, manu-
facturing, and commerce all participated, and in
which capital and labor both shared. It also con-
tains chapters on the progress, notwithstanding
heavy Federal taxation, in municipal improvements,
on the continuing foundation and endowment of
colleges in spite of reduced attendance in them and
in the high schools, on the prevalence of luxurious
consumption and entertainment as usual which so
outraged many an editorialist, and on the huge
effort of organized charities to relieve the miseries,
hardships, and dislocations caused by the war.
3375. Fladeland, Betty L. James Gillespie Birney:
slaveholder to abolitionist. Ithaca, Cornell
University Press, 1955. 323 p.
55-13997 E340.B6F55
Bibliography: p. 295-315.
Birney (1792-1857) was the son of a wealthy
slaveowner of Danville, Kentucky, and in 1818
moved to Huntsville, Alabama, where he established
a successful law practice, acquired a nearby planta-
tion, and entered state politics. In the course of the
next decade he was converted to Presbyterianism
and acquired a strong conviction of the evil of slavery
and the duty of acting to end it. In 1830 he joined
the American Colonization Society, and two years
later became one of its agents. By 1834 he was
ready to emancipate his own slaves and ally himself
with the American Anti-Slavery Society. His at-
tempts to publish an antislavery journal in Ken-
tucky led to the usual menaces, and his withdrawal
to Ohio. He served as corresponding secretary of
the Anti-Slavery Society and was the candidate of
the Liberty Party for President, passively in 1840
and actively in 1844, when he received 62,300 popu-
lar votes. An accident followed by a stroke elim-
inated him from public life in the following year.
What an Alabama newspaper called his "retrograde
progression" from slaveholder to colonizationist to
abolitionist makes him one of the most interesting
of the antislavery leaders. Miss Fladeland empha-
sizes the religious motives of his later career, and
the sacrifices which he willingly incurred in their
behalf.
3376. Fleming, Walter L., ed. Documentary his-
tory of Reconstruction, political, military,
social, religious, educational & industrial, 1865 to
the present time. Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1906-7.
2 v. 6-39739 E668.F58
Walter Lynwood Fleming (1874-1932), an Ala-
baman by birth, was probably the best known of
William A. Dunning's pupils at Columbia Univer-
sity, where he took his Ph. D. in 1904. He taught
history at West Virginia University, Louisiana State
University, where he is commemorated by an annual
lectureship in Southern history, and from 1917 at
Vanderbilt University in Nashville. The present
compilation, with nearly 950 pages of text, has been
regarded as a first-rate authority since its initial
publication; a micro-offset reproduction was issued
by Peter Smith in 1950. Volume I is chiefly con-
cerned with the evolution of the Reconstruction
policies of the Federal Government, and volume II
with their concrete working out in the South, "with
special reference to race relations, political morality,
and economic, educational and religious matters."
The phrase "to the present time" in the title means
that materials on later conditions traced to Recon-
struction policies, or on later reversals of such poli-
cies, are included in some chapters. The documents,
most of which are extracts and relatively brief, in-
clude state constitutions, Federal and state laws,
Congressional documents, a wide range of contem-
porary publications including Southern newspapers,
personal statements from a variety of sources, and
previously unpublished pieces from the papers of
President Johnson and the records of the War De-
partment. The chapters are largely topical, and
GENERAL HISTORY / 375
each opens with a brief introduction by the editor.
Impressive as the compilation is, it is only reasonable
to suppose that Dr. Fleming's conviction that Re-
construction was an abomination vindictively im-
posed upon the white people of the South had some
influence in his selection of materials.
3377. Fleming, Walter L. The sequel of Appo-
mattox; a chronicle of the reunion of the
States. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1921.
332 p. (The Chronicles of America series, v. 32)
22-12154 E173.C56, v. 32 E668.F62
"Bibliographical note": p. 305-307.
An economical and closely knit narrative of the
Radical Republicans' triumph and the decade during
which their system of white disfranchisement was
imposed upon the South by military rule. The moral
and intellectual results were more permanent than
the material ones of debt and impoverishment:
"the pleasantest side of Southern life came to an
end," and "there was a marked change in Southern
temperament toward the severe." The restoration
of home rule brought in a long period of political
stagnation, the result of fear "lest a developing
democracy make trouble with the settlement of
1877."
3378. Freeman, Douglas Southall. The South to
posterity; an introduction to the writings
of Confederate history. New York, Scribner, 1939.
235 p. 39-28978 Z1242.5.F85
Bibliographical references in "Notes" (p. 205-
216); "A Confederate book shelf": p. 217-221.
Dr. Freeman's attempts to satisfy readers of Gone
with the Wind (no. 1619) and other Civil War
novels of the 1930's who desired to go on to more
serious fare, led to the present "brief history of
Confederate history." Letters and diaries written
during the war, the memoirs of participants both
military and civil, noteworthy controversies in
which the war was refought by the surviving
leaders, the "matchless splendor" of the Official
Records of the Rebellion (no. 3697) together with
a few supplemental documentary publications, and
the interpretations of European historians are re-
viewed. Its depth of knowledge and finish of style,
which must make this one of the most readable
and rewarding works of bibliography ever written,
have made many a convert to the glamor of the
Lost Cause.
3379. [Garrison, Wendell Phillips, and Francis
Jackson Garrison] William Lloyd Garri-
son, 1805-1879; the story of his life told by his chil-
dren. New York, Century Co., 1885-89. 4 v.
1 1— 14856 E449.G2546
3380. Nye, Russel B. William Lloyd Garrison and
the humanitarian reformers. Boston, Little,
Brown [1955] 215 p. (The Library of American
biography) 55-747° E449.G2558
The comprehensive study of Garrison by his
sons, providing a month-by-month account of his
life through reprints of the majority of his letters,
articles, and speeches, has been the primary source
for all subsequent Garrison biographies, such as
Lindsay Swift's William Lloyd Garrison (Phila-
delphia, G. W. Jacobs, 191 1. 412 p.). The sons'
sympathetic biography describes Garrison's im-
poverished youth in Newburyport, Massachusetts,
where he was apprenticed to a local newspaper edi-
tor and himself entered the craft as the editor of
the local Free Press in 1826. In 1828 he took up,
among other crusades, the cause of the immediate
and complete manumission of the South's slaves.
After a period which included lecture tours and a
stay in jail, Garrison in 1830 founded the Liberator,
the foremost emancipation journal. His advocacy
of pacifism and nonresistance did not prevent his
being mobbed during several speaking engage-
ments. By 1 86 1 he was generally regarded as the
leader of the abolitionists, and he hailed secession,
which he thought would teach the South a lesson,
but not the war. On the ratification of the 13th
amendment Garrison refused a 23d term as presi-
dent of the American Anti-Slavery Society and
ceased publishing the Liberator. During his re-
maining years he turned his reformist energies to
writing and preaching on behalf of free trade,
women's rights, and other causes. Dr. Nye's brief
volume makes Garrison's religious faith the cent-
ral fact in his career, and likens his role to a guilty
conscience of the North.
3381. Hart, Albert Bushnell. Slavery and aboli-
tion, 1831-1841. New York, Harper, 1906.
xv, 360 p. (The American Nation: a history, v. 16)
6-24128 E178.A54
"Critical essay on authorities": p. [3241-343.
This contribution to the American Nation series
by its editor has of late several times been described
as obsolete or outmoded. It is listed here because,
while more recent studies have done much to
broaden our knowledge of the genesis and bases of
abolitionism, and the details of plantation slavery,
none has the same broad scope and balanced treat-
ment. Here, in one modest-sized volume, is a
description of slavery as an economic system and a
way of life; the late attempt of the slave interest to
find a theoretical justification for it; the ideas and
activities of the abolitionists; and the impingement
of abolitionism upon national politics and interna-
tional relations through 1840. Hart lias been said
to overemphasize the importance of W. L Garrison,
376 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
but in chapter XXI he offers evidence "which most
conclusively shows how little Garrison is entitled
to be taken as the typical or the chief abolitionist."
He observes that down to 1840 the abolitionists had
achieved practically nothing of a tangible kind, but
that they had nevertheless "laid hold of a principle
without which the republic could not exist — the
principle, namely, that free discussion is the breath
of liberty; and that any institution which could not
bear the light of inquiry, argument, and denuncia-
tion was a weak and a dangerous institution."
3382. Hendrick, Burton J. Lincoln's war Cabinet.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1946. 482 p. illus.
46-7733 E456.H4
A popular but substantial account of the activities
and personalities of Lincoln's principal Civil War
aides. The author credits Lincoln with genius in
his appointing to Cabinet rank all his chief rivals
for the Republican nomination. Each Cabinet mem-
ber is described as to personality, political sympa-
thies, contribution to the work of the Cabinet and
the progress of the war, attitude toward Lincoln,
role in party and national politics, and relations
with fellow Cabinet members. Emphasis falls upon
the efforts of Secretary of State Seward to control
the Cabinet, the struggle for power between mod-
erate and radical Republicans manifest in the debates
over emancipation and McClellan's restoration to
command, the relations of the Senate with the Cab-
inet, and the personal antagonism between Salmon
Portland Chase and Montgomery Blair, which even-
tually weakened the cohesiveness of the original
Cabinet, and led to the replacement of several of
its members.
3383. Hendrick, Burton J. Statesmen of the lost
cause; Jefferson Davis and his Cabinet. Bos-
ton, Little, Brown, 1939. xvii, 452 p. illus.
39-28981 E487.H47
Bibliography: p. [433 H39.
3384. Patrick, Rembert W. Jefferson Davis and
his Cabinet. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State
University Press, 1944. 401 p. 44-9637 E487.P3
Bibliography: p. [3691-387.
Mr. Hendrick studies the statesmanship and diplo-
macy of the ruling circle of the Confederacy through
an analysis of the lives and personalities of its
civilian leaders. While most of the South's gen-
erals were members of the aristocracy, the Cabinet
posts and important diplomatic missions were
largely filled by men of humbler origin. In show-
ing how each Cabinet member failed to achieve his
official goal, with the exception of the Postmaster
General, Mr. Hendrick asserts that the statesman-
ship of the South was inadequate for the situation
at hand. Dr. Patrick, in his volume which orig-
inated as a dissertation at the University of North
Carolina, provides biographies of even the least
distinguished members of the Cabinet and seeks
to assess their contributions and their deficiencies
in relation to the Confederate war effort.
3385. Henry, Robert Selph. The story of Re-
construction. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1938. 633 p. 38-6264 E668.H516
Bibliography included in "Acknowledgments":
P- 5957597-
During Reconstruction there was something
going on every minute, and Mr. Henry succeeds
in getting an extraordinary proportion of it into
his crowded pages. Like its predecessor, The
Story of the Confederacy (no. 3698), "it is not so
much an attempt to enlarge the knowledge of the
period treated as to organize and present it in direct
narrative form." The author's sympathies are
clearly with the ex-Confederates, but his exemplary
objectivity of tone allows the course of events to
speak for itself. The 5 1 chapters are organized into
3 books: "Restoration," down to the passage of
the Act of March 2, 1867, which, Congressman Gar-
field said, put "the bayonet at the breast of every
rebel in the South"; "Reconstruction," down to the
admission of reconstructed Georgia in mid-July,
1870; and "Redemption," concerning which Mr.
Henry says: "The story of the last six years of the
period of Reconstruction is one of counter-revolu-
tion— a counter-revolution effected under the forms
of law where that was possible; effected by secrecy
and by guile, where that would serve; effected
openly, regardless of the forms of law, with violence
or the threat of violence, where that had to be. But
the counter-revolution was effected, at a cost to the
South and its future incalculably great, justified
only by the still greater cost of not effecting it."
3386. Horn, Stanley F. Invisible empire; the story
of the Ku Klux Klan, 1 866-1 871. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 434 p.
39-8103 E668.H78
"References": p. [4211-422.
Extensive documentary evidence employed by the
author shows that the Klan had innocuous begin-
nings as a social club in Pulaski, Tennessee, in De-
cember 1865, but rapidly grew into a powerful
political league with the avowed purpose of protect-
ing the South's white population at a time when
they seemed to be without governmental support and
in danger of subjection by their former slaves. Mr.
Horn sets forth many details of the organization
and methods of the Klan as it steadily increased in
scope and in the violence of its attempts to restore
the prewar position of the Southern whites. Mr.
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 377
Horn believes in the essential honesty of the Klan's
members, who realized the inherent dangers of such
an extralegal agency, and "ceased its use as soon as
it had served their purpose, their original objectives
fairly well attained." Most of the book is devoted
to a state-by-state examination of the Klan's activities
and their effects upon Southern Negroes and whites,
the Federal Government, and the local civil and
military administration.
3387. Hyman, Harold Melvin. Era of the oath;
Northern loyalty tests during the Civil War
and Reconstruction. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1954. 229 p.
54-7108 E458.8.H9
Bibliography: p. [2o8]-222.
3388. Dorris, Jonathan Truman. Pardon and am-
nesty under Lincoln and Johnson; the restor-
ation of the Confederates to their rights and priv-
ileges, 1 861-1898. Introd. by J. G. Randall. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1953. xxi,
459 P- 53-13363 E668.D713
Bibliography: p. [4231-437.
Dr. Hyman's "era of the oath" extends from
April 1 86 1, when, on the motion of Attorney General
Bates, all employees of the Departments were re-
quired to take the oath of allegiance anew, to May
1884, when Representative S. S. Cox of New York
finally succeeded in his campaign to bring about the
repeal of the surviving test oaths from the Civil War.
During this time they had been imposed for a di-
versity of purposes, but, the author thinks, had in-
creasingly become a mere means for the Radical
Republicans in Congress to identify and reward their
own partisans. The book is written with the loyalty
oaths applied to academic personnel after World
War II in mind, and heaps up evidence to show that
the oaths of 1861-84 failed as a means of deter-
mining loyalty, and that they operated to keep the
honorable and conscientious out of office or fran-
chise, and let the unscrupulous in. With this ani-
mus, it is hardly fair to the oath of future loyalty
as used by President Lincoln, and, after his initial
period of vindictiveness, by President Johnson in
restoring the states of the Confederacy to the Union
with their old ruling class still in charge. Four
blood-stained years of civil war were to be forgotten
in exchange for a simple pledge of future good be-
havior— conciliation could hardly go much further.
This salient fact is also obscured in Dr. Dorris'
Pardon and Amnesty, because of his somewhat naive
conviction that "the authorities at Washington" had
no warrant for giving the seceders "the odious ap-
pellations of 'rebels' and 'traitors.' " The real pro-
scription came when the congressional majority
succeeded in writing their "ironclad test oath" into
the 14th Amendment, and, by substituting a retro-
spective for a prospective oath, excluded the former
Confederates from franchise and office. Dr. Dorris'
volume puts in order for the first time the complex
facts concerning the status of the active Confederates,
in the eyes of the Federal Government, from the
initial secessions to the final repeal of disability under
the 14th Amendment on June 8, 1898. There are
special treatments of the cases of Robert E. Lee and
Jefferson Davis, and the general course of events in
North Carolina.
3389. Jenkins, William Sumner. Proslavery
thought in the Old South. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1935. 381 p. ( [The
University of North Carolina. Social study se-
ries]) 35-i5259 E441.J46
Bibliography: p. 309-358.
Soon after the Missouri crisis of 1820 the Old
South began to produce a voluminous body of theo-
retical and polemical writing in defense of slavery,
which by 1835 had acquired the status of orthodoxy
within the section, and which continued to accumu-
late even after the outbreak of war in 1861, and down
to the collapse of the Confederacy. In the present
volume Professor Jenkins aims "to indicate the vari-
ous thought trends, to evaluate their significance, and
to estimate their weight in the enure body of pro-
slavery thought." He considers in turn theories
of the nature, origin, and legal basis of slavery;
of slavery's relation to the State, the Constitution,
and republican government; of the moral and re-
ligious justification of slavery; of the racial basis
of slavery (including the "plural origin" doctrine,
which made the Negro a separate and not neces-
sarily human species); and of slavery as an order-
ing of social classes and economic production. He
finds that the defense of slavery was so elaborated
in the thought of antiquity and the Middle Ages
that the theorists of the Old South could draw
upon these sources at length, and actually contrib-
uted little that was original. "The misfortune to
the South was that its mental power was taken
out of other fields of endeavor at a time when it
could have been most fruitful in the development
of a higher civilization."
3390. Lincoln, Abraham. Collected works. The
Abraham Lincoln Association, Springfield,
Illinois. Roy P. Basler, editor; Marion Dolores
Pratt and Lloyd A. Dunlap, assistant editors. New
Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1953—
55. 9 v. illus. 53-6293 E457-9I 1953
Contents. — 1. 1 S24-1S48. — 2. 1848-1858. — 3.
1858-1860.— 4. 1860-1861.— 5. 1861-1862. — 6.
1862-1863.— 7. 1863-1864.— 8. 1864-1865. —
Index.
181240— 60-
28
378 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3391. Angle, Paul M., ed. The Lincoln reader.
New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University
Press, 1947. 564 p. illus. 47-30067 E457.A58
Bibliography: p. [544H47.
3392. Thomas, Benjamin P. Abraham Lincoln,
a biography. New York, Knopf, 1952.
xiv, 548, xii p. illus. 52-6425 E457.T427 1952.
Bibliography: p. [523 ]— 548.
3393. Sandburg, Carl. Abraham Lincoln; the
war years. With 414 halftones of photo-
graphs and 249 cuts of cartoons, letters, documents
. . . New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 4 v.
39-27998 E457.4.S36
3394. Randall, James G. Lincoln, the President.
New York, Dodd, Mead, 1945-55. 4 v.
illus. (American political leaders)
45-10041 E457.R2
Includes bibliographies.
Contents. — v. 1-2. Springfield to Gettysburg. —
v. 3. Midstream. — v. 4. Last full measure.
3395. Basler, Roy P. The Lincoln legend; a
study in changing conceptions. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 335 p. illus.
35-13765 E457.B35 Z8505.B31
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Duke University, 1931.
"A classified bibliography of poetry, fiction, and
drama dealing with Lincoln": p. 309-I327].
In 1857 Lincoln (1809-1865) was a fairly success-
ful attorney of Springfield, Illinois, whose most
profitable client was the Illinois Central Railroad.
He had only recently returned to politics as a Re-
publican after a retirement of some years; his earlier
Whig career had included four terms in the Illinois
Legislature and one in the U. S. House of Repre-
sentatives (1847-49). In 1858 he contested S. A.
Douglas' seat in the U. S. Senate, and won national
celebrity if not the election from the set debates in
which they engaged throughout the State. He was
still a minor candidate when the Republican Con-
vention met at Chicago in i860, but the more famous
leaders eliminated each other, and Lincoln as the
Republican candidate carried the electoral college
against a Democratic Party now split into fragments.
Eleven of the fifteen slave states made his election
the occasion for secession, and the retiring admin-
istration allowed them to organize their military re-
sources without the least molestation. Resorting to
arms to maintain the Union under such handicaps,
Lincoln had to conduct a four years' war, of which
the first two were largely frustration; and when vic-
tory was at last secure, he was assassinated by a mad
actor. Lincoln's failure to domineer or engage in
histrionics led most of his contemporaries to realize
his greatness only in retrospect, but the popular in-
stinct which has picked him out as one of the two
greatest Americans, and has made him the lay saint
of the democratic faith, is as sound as it is persistent.
The foundation work, both in collecting Lincoln's
writings and in writing his life and times, was per-
formed in the last century by his secretaries, John
G. Nicolay and John Hay. The first task has been
recendy completed in a quite definitive manner, in
the Collected Wor\s edited by Dr. Basler under the
auspices of the Abraham Lincoln Association. Sup-
plementary in some degree is David C. Mearns' The
Lincoln Papers: the Story of the Collection, with
Selections to July 4, 1861 (Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. 2 v. (xvii, 681 p.)), but unfor-
tunately Lincoln had accumulated very little down
to i860. Paul M. Angle's A Shelf of Lincoln Boo\s:
A Critical, Selective Bibliography of Lincolniana
(New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press,
1946. xvii, 142 p.) is a uniquely helpful guide to
Lincoln literature down to its date, but of course
cannot serve for the enormous output of the last
dozen years. Dr. Angle's Lincoln Reader is an
anthology of biographical materials concerning Lin-
coln, including both contemporaries and later writ-
ers, skillfully pieced together with some connective
matter by the compiler. The late Benjamin P.
Thomas, in Portrait for Posterity: Lincoln and His
Biographers (New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press, 1947. xvii, 329 p.), offers penetrating
estimates of attitudes and outlooks, especially of
Lincoln's earlier biographers. Mr. Thomas went
on to write his own biography, entered above; since
its appearance it has been generally acclaimed as
the best-balanced and most thoroughly informed
one-volume life; but it is sometimes not very appar-
ent that the subject was a great man. Mr. Sand-
burg's War Years is a vivid and tremendous
panorama of Lincoln's Washington, but both it and
his earlier Abraham Lincoln, The Prairie Years
(New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1926. 2 v.) are for
readers with leisure and patience. There is now a
one-volume condensation of both: Abraham Lincoln,
the Prairie Years and the War Years (New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1954. xiv, 762 p.). The late
Professor Randall's Lincoln, the President is a work
of immense scholarship, and probably treats its sub-
ject as objectively as anyone could whose sympathies
were wholly with the aristocracy of the Old South.
Professor Richard N. Current, who completed Dr.
Randall's fourth volume, has also made a one-volume
condensation, chiefly from those parts "which deal
primarily with Lincoln the man and with his per-
sonal relationships": Mr. Lincoln (New York, Dodd,
Mead, 1957. 392 p.). Dr. Basler's The Lincoln
Legend aims "to show how poets, writers of fiction,
dramatists, and occasionally biographers have, with
GENERAL HISTORY
/ 379
the help of the folk-mind, created about Lincoln a
national legend or myth which in conception is
much like the hero-myths of other nations." Other
biographies, documentary publications, special
studies, and monographs are so numerous that space
equal to the whole of this section could readily be
filled with them.
3396. Meade, Robert Douthat. Judah P. Benja-
min, Confederate statesman. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1943. 432 p.
43-1 1218 E467.1.B4M4
"Select bibliography": p. 415-417.
Born in the British West Indies of Jewish parents,
Benjamin (1811-1884) had three distinguished
careers in one lifetime. After growing up in South
Carolina, he setded in New Orleans and com-
menced his career as a leader of the American bar
and as a legislator. His natural conservatism led
him to join the Whigs, who in 1852 sent him to
the U. S. Senate, where he worked for national
expansion to increase the South's strength. After
1856 he became a Democrat and joined in the de-
fense of Southern rights, and was among the first
to advocate secession. His friendship with Jeffer-
son Davis brought about his appointment as At-
torney General of the Confederacy, and then as
Secretary of War in September 1861. His career
as Confederate statesman was his least fortunate,
since he never had the confidence of the masses
and was made a scapegoat for Confederate military
failures. In 1862 he transferred to the Department
of State, directing the Confederacy's desperate but
vain efforts to obtain diplomatic recognition from
the European powers. His third career began in
1866, following the Confederacy's collapse, when
he fled to England and rapidly became a brilliant
and successful barrister, limiting himself to cases
before the House of Lords and the Judicial Com-
mittee of the Privy Council.
3397. Milton, George Fort. The eve of conflict;
Stephen A. Douglas and the needless war.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. 608 p. illus.
34-36084 E415.9.D73M5
Bibliography: p. [57i]~58o.
A sympathetic study which in two chapters
passes over the youth and early career of Douglas
(1813-1861) so as to concentrate upon his service
as Democratic Senator from Illinois in years of al-
most unintermitted sectional crisis (1847-61).
Douglas, his private utterances show, regarded
slavery as "a curse beyond computation," but as
one shielded by the Constitution from political in-
terference. The Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854,
which unleashed the later stages of the crisis and
for which Douglas accepted full responsibility, was
introduced primarily because Chicago and the
Northwest needed a railroad to the Pacific, and
could not get one before the political organization
of the vast Platte country, which by the 1850's was
long overdue. Southern Congressmen insisted
upon equal rights for slaveowners in Kansas and
Nebraska up to their admission as states, and
Douglas, needing Southern votes and regarding the
establishment of slavery in them as an economic
impossibility, acquiesced. Thereafter he defended
the measure as a genuinely democratic settlement,
and strove to preserve the Union in spite of the
extremists of either side, his unremitting efforts
leading to his premature breakdown and death.
At the close of 1857 Douglas, by denouncing the
proslavery Lecompton Constitution for Kansas,
broke with the Buchanan administration, thereby
becoming increasingly estranged from the Southern
rights leaders. Milton agreed with Alexander H.
Stephens (no. 3415) that "if the extremists of the
South had not prevented, Douglas would have pre-
vailed; the Civil War would not have occurred."
3398. Nevins, Allan. Ordeal of the Union. New
York, Scribner, 1947. 2 v. illus.
47-11072 E415.7.N4
Contents. — v. 1. Fruits of manifest destiny, 1847—
1852. A note on sources (p. 561-562). — v. 2. A
house dividing, 1 852-1 857.
3399. Nevins, Allan. The emergence of Lincoln.
New York, Scribner, 1950. 2 v. illus.
50-9920 E415.7.N38
Contents. — v. 1. Douglas, Buchanan, and party
chaos, 1857-1859. — v. 2. Prologue to civil war,
1859-1861. Bibliography (p. 491-506).
The first two installments of what is designed to
be a large-scale history of the Civil War era. Pro-
fessor Nevins believes that the Civil War could have
been avoided had the people and their leaders acted
together in solving the problems of slavery, sectional
irritation, and the correct relations between the races.
The conflict between the North and the South is
viewed as essentially one between the rising force
of national homogeneity and the declining influence
of regionalism, and is shown to have gotten out of
hand as it progressively preoccupied the passions
rather than the reason of all Americans. Cultural
and economic as well as political developments are
traced to convey a complete picture of the America
of the times when sectionalism took such a firm
grip on men's tempers that civil war had to deter-
mine the future position of the Negro race in
America. As the author shows, the Presidency,
under Taylor, Fillmore, Pierce, and Buchanan, was
never more devoid of initiative and leadership — at
a time when such qualities were indispensable. On
380 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
one point the author is emphatic: "of all the mon-
istic explanations for the drift to war, that posited
upon supposed economic causes is the flimsiest."
Professor Nevins has used contemporary sources
throughout in the form of speeches, diaries, letters,
and periodicals.
3400. Nichols, Roy F. The disruption of Ameri-
can Democracy. New York, Macmillan,
1948. xviii, 612 p. illus. 48-4344 E436.N56
Bibliography: p. 565-589.
Describes the progressive debilitation of the Dem-
ocratic Party, called the "American Democracy" in
the 19th century, during the years 1856-61. The
author treats at length the party conventions of 1856
and i860, the personal quarrels of leading politicians,
the influence of sectional sentiments upon their ac-
tions, the splinter parties breaking off from the
Democracy, and the relationship of the Democracy
to Congress and to the opposition parties. The
party itself is examined in the relations of its voters,
machines, and leaders both on national and state
levels. The Democracy is credited with working
to establish cooperative government; however,
"deeply affected by the shocks of the collisions oc-
curring within the society in which it operated and
of which it was a part, the party failed to overcome
the divisive attitudes and was shattered." War came
as a result of this failure. The book continues into
a more critical period the study of the party which
served as the author's doctoral dissertation at Co-
lumbia University: The Democratic Machine, 1850-
1854 (New York, Columbia University, 1923.
248 p.).
3401. Nye, Russel B. Fettered freedom; civil
liberties and the slavery controversy, 1830-
1860. East Lansing, Michigan State College Press,
1949. 273 p. illus. 549-3656 JC599.U5N9
"Bibliography of sources": p. 253-269.
Analyzes the controversy between the North and
South arising from divergent interpretations of the
degree to which men may enjoy their natural and
constitutional rights by tracing the history of the
attempts to suppress the abolitionist movement.
During their agitation to arouse the Nation against
slavery, the abolitionists were subjected to mob
violence, censorship, unconstitutional interpreta-
tions of the laws, discrimination in regard to em-
ployment, and other curtailments of civil rights —
"the freedoms belonging to the citizen as an indi-
vidual and as a member of society." From evidence
in the form of contemporary newspaper accounts,
court and police records, and diaries, the author
shows that the deprivation of the abolitionists' civil
rights won for them a large body of supporters
"who thought less of the wrongs of the slave than
of the rights of the white man." The abolitionists
were able to point out that the true issue of the
sectional struggle was the extent to which civil
rights may be curtailed in the interests of the
majority.
3402. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. American Negro
slavery; a survey of the supply, employment
and control of Negro labor as determined by the
plantation regime. New York, Appleton, 191 8.
529 p. 18-11187 E441.P549
3403. Stampp, Kenneth M. The peculiar insti-
tution: slavery in the ante bellum South.
New York, Knopf, 1956. 435, xiii p.
56-5800 E441.S8
"Manuscripts consulted, and their locations": p.
43r~[436].
Professor Phillips' book is concerned with the
rise, nature, and influence of slavery in the planta-
tion system, which it supported and to which it
owed its existence. The Negro is pictured by Dr.
Phillips as a child-like being culturally and intel-
lectually inferior to the white man. This work
was usually considered as a definitive treatment
until the publication of Professor Stampp's new
synthesis from the same or similar sources to those
employed by Dr. Phillips. Dr. Stampp assumes
that "innately Negroes are only white men with
black skins," and produces a history of slavery be-
tween 1830 and i860 which incorporates the point
of view of the slaves themselves, and shows in de-
tail how the good intentions of humane masters
were normally frustrated by the essential inhu-
manity of the system. Both refer to contemporary
periodicals, letters, plantation journals, and items
pertaining to the foreign and domestic slave trade;
however, Dr. Phillips finds that slavery was essen-
tial to the rise of the cotton industry and beneficial,
as a whole, compared with Negro life in Africa,
while Dr. Stampp can find no philosophical justi-
fication for the "peculiar institution" except that
it paid the master class. And it paid in the older
slave states only because they raised a surplus of
Negroes for sale and transportation to the newer
states, from Alabama to Texas.
3404. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. The course of the
South to secession; an interpretation. Edited
by E. Merton Coulter. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1939. 176 p. 40-2173 F213.P65
"Prepared and published under the direction of
the American Historical Association from the in-
come of the Albert J. Beveridge memorial fund."
Lectures delivered at Northwestern University in
1932 and originally published in the Georgia His-
torical Quarterly are here reprinted with the author's
GENERAL HISTORY / 38 1
article, "The Central Theme of Southern History,"
prepared for the 1928 meeting of the American His-
torical Association. The lectures provide a historical
rationale for the establishment of the Confederacy,
while the theme of the article is that the South has
always been and always will be the land of white
supremacy. With this premise in mind, Professor
Phillips' lectures assert that the United States from
its colonization had no sectional interests or senti-
ments which could drive them apart. It was not
until the 1820's that slavery became an issue, and
then it took the form of legislation and other activ-
ities to prevent slave revolts. Professor Phillips lays
the main blame for secession at the door of the aboli-
tionists, whose efforts to force the Federal Govern-
ment and the Congress to intervene in Southern
affairs eventually caused violent measures on the
part of Southern "fire-eaters." This danger to
slavery, Professor Phillips concludes, set in motion
the Southern independence movement — "a program
so much in keeping with American precedent and
the gospel of self-government, so legitimated by state
sovereignty, so long considered, and now supported
by such a multitude of conservative citizens."
3405. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. The life of Robert
Toombs. New York, Macmillan, 1913.
281 p. 13-17129 E415.9.T6P5
Toombs (1810-1885) was a planter, lawyer, and
political leader of ante bellum Georgia, in the State
Legislature from 1837 and in the U. S. Congress
after 1844. A conservative Whig, he was ordinarily
a moderate advocate of Southern rights, but at the
peak of the crisis of 1850 he came out strongly in
favor of the equal claim of the slave states to the
territories in a series of speeches which established
his fame. When the compromise was effected, he
organized a Constitutional Union Party to defend
it, and entered the Democratic fold only when the
movement failed to spread beyond Georgia. Again
he exerted a moderating influence until the crisis of
i860, when he took his stand on the Crittenden com-
promise measures and, on their rejection by the Re-
publicans, came out for immediate secession.
Failing to obtain election to the Presidency of the
Confederate States, he was too unruly an individu-
alist to succeed either as Secretary of State or as a
brigadier-general, and was out of public life after
1862. He did not return until Reconstruction was
over, but in 1877 and for a few years thereafter,
until the failure of his health, was prominent in the
reorganization of Georgia.
3406. Pierce, Edward L. Memoir and letters of
Charles Sumner. Boston, Roberts Bros.,
1877-93. 4 v- 'uus- 13-19830 E415.9.S9P6
Contents. — 1. 1811-1838. — 2. 1838-1845. — 3.
1 845-1 860. — 4. 1 860-1 874.
Born in Boston and prepared for the bar at
Harvard, Sumner (1811-1874) entered politics at
the top when elected to the Senate in 1851 by a
coalition of Democrats and Free-Soilers. Previously
he had practiced law, traveled extensively in
Europe, and delivered striking public addresses
advocating world peace and equal rights for all
races. He helped found the Republican Party and,
after a vituperative speech on "The Crime against
Kansas," was brutally assaulted on the floor of the
Senate in 1856 by a South Carolina Representative
whose uncle was a Senator from the same State.
Sumner was absent from the Senate for the three and
a half years required for his recovery. He was
made chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations
Committee in 1861 and advised the Cabinet
throughout the war in matters relating to interna-
tional law. Although he had been a staunch sup-
porter of Lincoln, Sumner broke with Andrew
Johnson over Reconstruction policy and led the
Senate in the impeachment proceedings of 1867.
During the Grant administration he defeated the
President's plan to annex Santo Domingo, and was
removed from his committee chairmanship for fear
that he might harm the Alabama Claims negotia-
tions then being conducted with Great Britain.
He was still an erratic but powerful moral force
when his heart gave out after a session of the Senate
in March 1874. This biography by a devoted
friend and admirer is old-fashioned and at times
over-detailed, but is yet to be replaced.
3407. Pressly, Thomas J. Americans interpret
their Civil War. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1954. xvi, 347 p.
52-13166 E468.5.P7
Viewing the Civil War as "the classic example of
a major event in the history of the United States
which has been explained and interpreted in a wide
variety of quite different ways," the author treats
it "as a specific case history which illuminates to
some extent the problems of [historical] relativism
and causation." Since the war "has seemed to in-
volve vital issues of lasting significance, it has en-
listed not only the interest of successive generations
but also their loyalties and their emotions," and
even recent utterances have been, in the phrase of
the younger O. W. Holmes, "touched with fire."
The survey is carried from the reactions of Motley,
Bancroft, and Prescott to the attack on Fort Sum-
ter, down to the present "confusion of voices."
3408. Randall, James G. The Civil War and Re-
construction; with supplementary bibliog
382 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
raphy. [2<Jed.] Boston, Heath, 1953. xvii, 971 p.
illus., maps. 53-1027 E468.R26 1953
"Bibliographical note": p. 881-883. Bibliography:
p. 885-935. .
First published in 1937 to supply the lack of "one
volume of recent date which brings the whole period
of conflict and readjustment [1850-77] into a schol-
arly synthesis and distills the findings of historical
scholarship for the general reader." The only
change in the 1953 edition is the addition of a 10-
page "Supplemental Bibliography" listing the prin-
cipal books and articles which had appeared during
the interval. There is no reason to suppose that this
fresh material would have led the author to change
his essential positions, those of a moderate "revision-
ist," convinced that the conflict between North and
South was not "irrepressible," and that war might
have been avoided if "something more of statesman-
ship, moderation, and understanding, and something
less of professional patrioteering, slogan making,
face-saving, political clamoring, and propaganda had
existed on both sides." The work continues to be
a widely used textbook and guide to perplexed schol-
ars, since here alone, in brief compass, can they
find not only the major political and military de-
velopments, but also "border problems, non-military
development during the war, intellectual tendencies,
anti-war efforts, religious and educational move-
ments, propaganda methods, and the cacophony of
voices that influenced public opinion," in a careful,
lucid, and balanced treatment.
3409. Simms, Henry H. A decade of sectional con-
troversy, 1851-1861. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press, 1942. 284 p.
42-51250 E415.7.S6
Bibliography: p. 249-265.
The development of the Southern viewpoint dur-
ing the decade preceding the Civil War is stressed.
Extensive quotations from editorial comments by
Northern as well as Southern newspapers illustrate
the changes in popular opinion as political develop-
ments in the sectional controversy unfolded. The
slavery issue was the prime manifestation of the
conflict, and attention is focused on Southern senti-
ments and economic and political motives for its
retention. This evidence shows, the author thinks,
that the South was on the defensive since, in his
judgment, it had no intention of extending slavery
to free states, and there was no chance that slavery
would take hold in the territories. Furthermore, the
controversy over fugitive slaves was out of propor-
tion to the number that actually escaped. Party
rivalry is blamed as the principal cause of sectional
antagonism, which was unduly magnified by vitu-
peration and vilification on the part of Northern
and Southern leaders at a time when conciliatory
statesmanship might have resolved the most serious
differences.
3410. Smith, William Ernest. The Francis Pres-
ton Blair family in politics. New York,
Macmillan, 1933. 2 v. illus.
33-13071 E415.9.B63S6
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 497-510.
After the Adams family, Professor Smith be-
lieves, the Blairs were the second most influential
family in 19th-century American politics, partici-
pating in nearly every important event between
1828 and 1878. Francis Preston Blair (1791-
1876), the Virginia-born founder of the dynasty,
was a lifelong political journalist imported from
Kentucky to sit in Andrew Jackson's celebrated
Kitchen Cabinet. His two sons, Montgomery
(1813-1883) and Frank P. Blair (1821-1875), be-
gan their political careers in Missouri as Free-Soil
Democrats. Like their father, the sons adhered
to whatever party at a given time best reflected
their political views. All three became Republi-
cans by i860 and remained so until their views on
Reconstruction clashed with the Radicals, which
led them to return to the Democrats by 1868.
Frank became a Congressman from Missouri, and
on the outbreak of the Civil War led the struggle
to keep Missouri in the Union, and afterward had
a stormy career as a major general. As a Democrat,
Frank was the party's nominee for the Vice Presi-
dency in 1868 and served as a Senator until 1873.
Montgomery Blair's career was primarily that of
a judge and outstanding attorney until 1861, when
he was taken into Lincoln's Cabinet as Postmaster
General. In 1864 he was ousted in consequence
of an ultimatum from the Radicals in Congress.
After a brief period as a Liberal Republican, Mont-
gomery threw his weight behind the Democrats,
going so far as to found a newspaper which chal-
lenged the validity of Rutherford B. Hayes' election.
341 1. Stryker, Lloyd Paul. Andrew Johnson, a
study in courage. New York, Macmillan,
1930. xvi, 881 p. illus. 33-1228 E667.S924
"Authorities and abbreviations used": p. 838-844.
3412. Winston, Robert W. Andrew Johnson,
plebeian and patriot. New York, Holt,
1928. xvi, 549 p. illus. 28-7534 E667.W78
Bibliography: p. 529-540.
Mr. Stryker's favorable appraisal of the life of
President Johnson (1808-1875) is designed to elim-
inate misunderstandings about the man and his
actions and policies which had persisted in history
books and the popular mind since the days of John-
son's impeachment (March-May 1868). Here
Johnson is described as a lifelong Unionist, born
GENERAL HISTORY / 383
in Raleigh, North Carolina, who rose from the
humblest beginnings to service as Democratic
Governor and Senator from Tennessee before the
Civil War. His extreme loyalty to the Union drew
the notice of President Lincoln, who appointed him
military governor of free Tennessee in 1861, where
he administered the first of Lincoln's Reconstruc-
tion schemes until his election as Vice President in
1864. Having succeeded to the Presidency, John-
son, after considering the alternative, felt compelled
to carry out Lincoln's moderate and wise plans
for the rehabilitation of the South — much to the
wrath of the Radical Republicans, who resolved to
crush him. Johnson's repeated vetoes of extremist
Reconstruction legislation so enraged his opponents
that impeachment proceedings were instituted in
an atmosphere of virtual congressional revolt.
Johnson was acquitted and, although his adminis-
tration was hobbled, did what he could to moderate
the vindictive treatment of the South. Such was
the bitterness of the Radicals that they spared no
effort to defame Johnson during the remainder of
his term and of his life. Mr. Winston's biography
is a briefer treatment on the same lines and no less
sympathetic. David Miller Dewitt's The Impeach-
ment and Trial of Andrew Johnson (New York,
Macmillan, 1903. 646 p.) is an objective and
thorough account of this constitutionally unique
episode.
3413. Thomas, Benjamin P. Theodore Weld, cru-
sader for freedom. New Brunswick, N. J.,
Rutgers University Press, 1950. 307 p.
50-9667 E449.W46
Bibliography: p. [2891-300.
This first biography of "the greatest of the aboli-
tionists" rescues Weld (1803-1895) from compara-
tive obscurity. Born in Connecticut of a long line
of Congregational ministers, Weld matured early,
and undertook a lecture tour at the age of 17. Con-
verted by C. G. Finney in 1823, he joined his Holy
Band as an active evangelist, but for the first decade
his special causes were temperance and manual labor.
Not until 1833 did he concentrate upon abolition.
In the following year, when he and his friends had
been forced out of Lane Seminary, he became a full-
time agent of the American Anti-Slavery Society.
His active antislavery career lasted only a decade, but
in the quality of his converts, who included Henry
Ward Beecher, Harriet Beecher Stowe, and James G.
Birney, and in the extent and effect of the evangeliz-
ing which he conducted or organized in the rural
counties of the West, he was of unique importance.
In 184 1 he transferred to Washington and for two
years advised and heartened the small but increasing
antislavery group in Congress. In 1843 he withdrew
to his farm, and returned to the public platform only
once, during the Civil War, in order to rally sup-
port for the war effort. Weld avoided personal
publicity of any kind, withholding his name from
his antislavery writings and, so far as possible, from
his other activities, and the crucial nature of his
influence has been a rediscovery of recent historians.
3414. Villard, Oswald Garrison. John Brown,
1 800-1 859, a biography fifty years after.
[Rev. ed.] New York, Knopf, 1943. 738 p. illus.
43-1061 1 E451.V71 1943
Bibliography: p. 599-709, [709a]~709d.
John Brown behind his whiskers looked and
talked like an Old Testament prophet, and his
strange and sanguinary role in the crisis years from
1856 to 1859 led to as wide a range of conflicting
opinions as have ever accumulated about any historic
figure. Before May 26, 1856, Brown was a migra-
tory, debt-ridden nobody; after the killings on the
Pottawatomie he was a national figure, sinister to
some and to others a daundess champion of right-
eousness. For the six weeks after October 16, 1859,
when his attempt upon Harper's Ferry failed, the
eyes and ears of the whole Nation were focused upon
him. Mr. Villard was the first to assemble the com-
plete facts about Brown and to put them into an
intelligible order; when he came to revise his work
after 33 years there proved to be remarkably little
to add. He continued to regard Brown as a great
figure. Abraham Lincoln spoke thus in February
i860: "An enthusiast broods over the oppression of
a people till he fancies himself commissioned by
Heaven to liberate them. He ventures the attempt,
which ends in little else than his own execution."
This would be the last word save for one thing:
everything Brown did about slavery was perverse,
criminal, and perhaps insane; but everything he said
about it had the power and the truth of an Old
Testament prophet. Such a contradiction eludes
formulae.
3415. Von Abele, Rudolph R. Alexander H.
Stephens, a biography. New York, Knopf,
1946. xiii, 337, x p. 46-6961 E467.T.S85V6
This biography, which originated in a Columbia
University dissertation, penetrates the psychological
characteristics of one of the South's leading politi-
cians. Born on a small farm in Georgia, Stephens
(1812-1883) was always physically frail, but did
become a successful lawyer and amass a personal
fortune. He entered politics in 1836 by election to
the Georgia Legislature as a Whig. In 1 84 3 he was
sent to the U. S. House of Representatives on his
reputation as a champion of state sovereignty, and
later defended slavery as a "stern necessity," going
so far as to advocate the renewal of the African slave
trade in order to extend slave territorv. When he
3»4 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
retired from the House in 1859 he was convinced
that his new party, the Democracy, had triumphed
over abolitionism. When secession was being de-
bated in Georgia, Stephens argued against it, but
accepted his election as Vice President of the Con-
federacy on February 9, 1861, and served in that
capacity throughout the war. His duties, beside
presiding over the ineffectual Confederate Senate,
included acting as chief negotiator with Washington
for the exchange of prisoners, and for terms of
peace. After the war he continued active in Georgia
and national politics, returning to the House in
1872, and devoted much time to writing history and
to philanthropy. "Liberty under law was his theme
and his religion"; however, liberty could be enjoyed
only according to one's position in the order of
society.
3416. Welles, Gideon. Diary of Gideon Welles,
Secretary of the Navy under Lincoln and
Johnson, with an introd. by John T. Morse, Jr. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 191 1. 3 v.
38-34416 E468.W443
Preface signed: Edgar T. Welles.
Contents. — 1. i86i-March3o, 1864. — 2. April 1,
1864-December 31, 1866. — 3. January 1, 1867-June
6, 1869.
This daily chronicle of people and events is re-
garded by most historians as one of the most useful
and reliable sources for Civil War and early Recon-
struction era leaders and politics, although the author
did some revising after his retirement. Welles
(1802-1878), a Connecticut man who had been a
Democrat until 1854, was chosen by Lincoln to rep-
resent New England in his Cabinet. The diary
contains much information on his acts as Secretary
of the Navy: he built a navy on an entirely new
scale, raised the discipline and standards of the offi-
cers and men, and worked for the development of
new weapons and tactics. Attached to the cause and
personality of Lincoln, and later of Johnson, Welles
may be considered the spokesman of the relatively
impartial liberal Republicans. In 1874 he published
an interesting little volume, Lincoln and Seward
(New York, Sheldon. 215 p.), to dispel the illusion
that the Secretary of State had been the brains of the
administration. Much can be learned of the personal
traits and motivations of Union leaders and the de-
velopment of policies during the war and peace from
Welles' vivid characterizations of the important men
with whom he came in contact. Gideon Welles,
Lincoln's Navy Department, by Richard S. West, Jr.
(Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1943. 379 p.), is a
sound biography which emphasizes his administra-
tive achievement.
3417. Woodward, Comer Vann. Reunion and
reaction; the compromise of 1877 and the
end of Reconstruction. [2d ed.] Rev. and with
a new introd. and concluding chapter. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1956. 297 p. (A Double-
day anchor book, A83)
56-7531 E681.W83 1956
This work by Professor Woodward of Johns
Hopkins University was originally published in
1 951; the additional matter in the paperback edi-
tion is largely concerned with relating the main
narrative to the earlier and later course of South-
ern politics. In it he completely rewrites the ac-
cepted version of the events whereby the disputed
election of 1876 was resolved and a renewal of
domestic strife averted. The principal evidence is
to be found in the papers of President Rutherford
B. Hayes, for it was Hayes' lieutenants who devised
the plan of securing all the disputed electoral votes
for their candidate by driving a wedge between
those "Southern redeemers" who in ante bellum
days had been conservative Whigs, and those who
had been Democrats. The principal agents in this
maneuver were Colonel Andrew J. Kellar of the
Memphis Avalanche and General Henry Van Ness
Boynton, Washington representative of the Cincin-
nati Gazette, and the chief bait was the promise
of a Federal subsidy for the Texas and Pacific Rail-
way Company. The Southern Congressmen in the
deal abstained from the Democratic filibuster
against the decision of the Electoral Commission,
and Hayes became President. The North's more
idealistic war aims were thus jettisoned in order to
protect "the peculiar interests and privileges of a
sectional economy" built up since 1861; Reconstruc-
tion came to an abrupt end; compromise was once
more the rule of American politics as it had been
before i860; and a persistent partnership between
Southern Bourbons and Northeastern industrialists
was inaugurated.
I. Grant to McKinley (1869-1901)
3418. Barnard, Harry. Rutherford B. Hayes and
his America. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1954. 606 p. illus. 54-11942 E682.B3
"Selected bibliography": p. 571-588.
3419. Eckenrode, Hamilton J. Rutherford B.
Hayes, statesman of reunion. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1930. 363 p. illus. (American political
leaders) 30-12586 E682.E19
GENERAL HISTORY / 385
Bibliography: p. 345-349.
Both of these biographies of Rutherford Birch-
ard Hayes (1822-1893), 19th President of the
United States, provide sympathetic and intimate
portrayals of his human qualities as well as the
salient facts of his life. Indeed, Mr. Barnard, whose
work is distinguished by its elaborate detail and
documentation, aims to present "not so much a
biography of a president as a biography of a man
who happened to become President." While serv-
ing as a fighting Union brigadier general in 1864,
Hayes was elected from Ohio to the United States
House of Representatives, where, after cessation of
hostilities, he served until elected Governor on the
Republican ticket in 1867. His performance as
Governor earned him the rank of favorite son in
Ohio, and he was a dark horse candidate for the
Presidency in 1876. Mr. Barnard substantially
advances knowledge of the so-called tied election
which hung upon one electoral vote; he be-
lieves that neither Hayes nor his opponent, Samuel
J. Tilden, won a clear title, although the Presi-
dency was awarded to Hayes. Both authors show
Hayes' development from a partisan Stalwart sup-
porter of Reconstruction to a liberal, a conciliator
of the South, and a reformer, whose sound and
well-managed but unspectacular administration of
the Presidency in the years 1877-81 brought re-
spectability back to a party embarrassed by the
corruption of the Grant era, and, more important,
initiated the reunification of the Nation.
3420. Buck, Solon J. The Granger movement; a
study of agricultural organization and its
political, economic, and social manifestations, 1870-
1880. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1913.
384 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 19)
13-19662 HD201.B8
Bibliography: p. [313]— 351.
3421. Buck, Solon }. The agrarian crusade; a
chronicle of the farmer in politics. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1920. 215 p. illus.
(The Chronicles of America series, v. 45)
20-4901 E173.C55, v. 45
HD201.B75
"Bibliographical note": p. 203-206.
The term Granger here refers to the general
agrarian movement which centered in the secret
and professedly nonpartisan order of the Patrons of
Husbandry founded in 1867. During the 1870's,
the Grange constituted a farmers' protest against
the power and oppressiveness of big business. Dr.
Buck cites as measures undertaken by the Grangers
their efforts to subject the large railroads to public
control, the formation of third parties in order to
oust the industrial interest from its dominance of
politics, and the encouragement of cooperatives in
order to maintain their own economic independence
of big-business-controlled industrial establishments
and their agents, the middlemen. The Granger
movement the author places as the initial organized
effort in American history to bring about political,
social, and economic reform. The second title is
a more general treatment of the radical agitations
undertaken by American farmers to improve their
economic condition through legislation when in-
dustrialization of the West followed the Civil War.
Dr. Buck sketches the course and evokes the spirit
of the agrarian crusade from its inception with the
Grangers, through the Greenback and Populist
phases, which lingered until 1904, to its climax in
the battle for free silver, from 1875 to 1896. In
general, the agrarians have desired greater govern-
mental control of the Nation's economy and limita-
tion of business competition. Dr. Buck's analysis
shows that these desires have been fulfilled in part
just as has the agrarian legislative program which,
in the following examples, has been enacted into
law: national and state regulation of railroad rates,
popular election of Senators, graduated income
taxes, postal savings banks, parcel post, and rural
free delivery. The farmers had forced awareness
of their interests upon the major parties, the author
concluded (1920), and henceforth both Democrats
and Republicans would adopt agrarian planks in
their national platforms rather than hazard a repe-
tition of the loss of the rural vote.
3422. Cleveland, Grover, Pres. U. S. Letters of
Grover Cleveland, 1 850-1908; selected and
edited by Allan Nevins. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1933. xix, 640 p. 33—35003 E697.C63
A selection from the correspondence of Grover
Cleveland (1837-1908), 22d and 24th President of
the United States, containing "nearly all of Cleve-
land's letters that are important to the student of his
life or times." Trivial notes, letters referring to
petty official matters, and occasional pieces have,
for the most part, been omitted. Because Cleveland
wrote more about public business than his private
affairs or emotions, the editor has deemed it neces-
sary to arrange the letters in 16 chapters, each pref-
aced by a brief introduction tracing the events of
his life through the appropriate months or years.
Cleveland "was Bunyan's Valiant-for-Truth," Pro-
fessor Nevins believes, "transferred to a scene which
sorely needed all his valor." His letters, both the
formal, ponderous official messages and the simple,
direct missives to friends, "arc the work of a man
who had the courage to say what he thought and
say it plainly." "This forthrightness was based upon
a stubborn independence of mind and soul." He
rel used to truckle to politicians for votes or to
386 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
appoint mere friends to office, and he resisted the
spoilsmen. He fought for civil service reform and
for tariff revision downward. "He was willing
to go to any length rather than abate his self-respect
by a single concession."
3423. [Cleveland] Nevins, Allan. Grover Cleve-
land; a study in courage. New York, Dodd,
Mead, 1934. 832 p. illus (American political lead-
ers) 38-4611 E697.N468
Bibliography: p. 767-772.
First published in 1932.
In this large, definitive biography which won a
Pulitzer prize in 1933, Professor Nevins traces both
the extraordinary personal growth and the equally
amazing political career of Grover Cleveland. He
was a hard-working Buffalo lawyer in 1881, the
author notes, a good Democrat, a man of integrity,
determined, strong, and blunt, but also, slow, un-
imaginative, and limited. In November 1881, how-
ever, the simple, sturdy attorney was swept into of-
fice as mayor by a wave of public discontent with
municipal misgovernment. Thereafter, his trans-
formation into a successful party leader proceeded
so rapidly that by 1883 he was taking the oath as
Governor of New York, and by 1885 as President
of the United States. In Professor Nevins' opinion,
the times were propitious for a "moral knight":
Cleveland, as a reform mayor, made himself con-
spicuous "at the happiest possible time"; as Gov-
ernor, he broke with Tammany in a demonstration
of political fearlessness which "caught the public
imagination as nothing else could." His first Presi-
dential candidacy was "based upon a demand for
administrative honesty joined with tariff reform,"
and his third "represented a combination of both
with the principle of unyielding conservatism in all
that affected finance and business."
3424. Croly, Herbert D. Marcus Alonzo Hanna,
his life and work. New York, Macmillan,
1912. 495 p. illus. 12-9163 E664.H24C9
A sympathetic presentation of Mark Hanna
( 1 837-1 904) as the embodiment of free enterprise
in economics, politics, and personal behavior. Born
in Ohio of pioneer stock, Hanna became wealthy in
the rising metropolis of Cleveland. In 1880, with
the prosperity of his diverse financial interests as-
sured, Hanna began dabbling in Republican poli-
tics, initially on the city and state levels, and led
his State delegation to the national convention of
1888. He thenceforward devoted his full energies
to making William McKinley President. Accord-
ing to the author, Hanna considered this activity
his patriotic duty, and so successful was he that
McKinley was elected Governor of Ohio in 1891
and Republican Presidential nominee on the first
ballot in 1896. So effective, indeed, was Hanna's
organization of the whole national party machinery
that he was made Republican National Chairman.
In 1897 he entered the Senate where he soon became
the spokesman of big business and the protector of
party patronage. The voting record cited here
shows his overwhelming support for McKinley and
later for Roosevelt policies, as well as statesmanship
of considerable stature. However, in Mr. Croly's
opinion, Hanna was at his best as a leader and or-
ganizer of the Republican Party, in which capacity
he applied practical business management to poli-
tics and secured his party's financial stability.
3425. David, Henry. The history of the Hay-
market affair; a study in the American social-
revolutionary and labor movements. New York,
Farrar & Rinehart, 1936. 597 p.
36-36485 HX846.C4D3 1936
"Selected bibliography": p. 545-561.
This Columbia University dissertation is a careful
investigation of how the "Haymarket Bomb" came
to be thrown in Chicago, May 4, 1886, of its conse-
quences, and of related aspects of the American and
European scenes. The author considers the Hay-
market affair an episode "of major significance in
the annals of American labor and jurisprudence."
"Labor's grievances," he observes, "sprang from the
privileges and corruption of the American political
system, the growth of a small, immensely wealthy
class, the results of corporate industrial organization,
and the economic and social condition of the wage-
earners at large and certain groups of them in par-
ticular." The setting of the Haymarket affair was
composed of these factors, Professor David believes,
together with "a body of confused revolutionary
thought and an uncompromising revolutionary
movement," which advocated "propaganda by deed"
and drew its support from Chicago's unusually
heavy foreign population. In his opinion, the eight
radicals convicted of murder "must be considered
innocent," in the light of the reliable evidence. He
concludes that "capitalist interests through a will-
ing press" pushed the whole affair in order to dis-
credit labor, but that "in precipitating the note-
worthy political movement on the part of labor in
1 886-1 887, the Haymarket bomb had its most posi-
tive effect."
3426. Dennett, Tyler. John Hay: from poetry to
politics. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1933.
476 p. illus. 33-3°8°3 E664.H41D3
"Appendix I. John Hay: a short list of his writ-
ings, by William Easton Louttit, Jr.": p. 451-456.
A biography which underscores Hay's intellectual
and emotional characteristics as well as the achieve-
ments of this poet, novelist, historian, and statesman
GENERAL HISTORY / 387
(1838-1905). Hay lingered longer in youth than
is usual, but in his capacity as a secretary to the
President, 1861-65, he "won the confidence of Abra-
ham Lincoln to a marked degree." Almost a
radical for his era, Hay achieved fame in 1871 with
his Pi/{e County Ballads and violated literary con-
vention, yet could not endure criticism. "John
Hay's successes were obvious; his failures were more
subtle." The author ascribes the latter to Hay's
complex personality and an inability to integrate
the conflicting qualities of heart and mind. He
terms Abraham Lincoln: A History (New York,
Century Co., 1890. 10 v.), written in collaboration
with John G. Nicolay, "a good deal of a Republican
document," and believes that through it Hay be-
came "the apostle of the Republican party." In Pro-
fessor Dennett's opinion, "Hay owed his position
in life to his association with Abraham Lincoln; his
position in American history he owed to his friend-
ship with William McKinley," who appointed him
Ambassador to Great Britain in 1897, and Secretary
of State in 1898. He continued to serve under
Roosevelt, with less independence than under his
predecessor, and conducted important negotiations,
affecting our policy toward the Far East and toward
Britain, until his physical breakdown in 1905.
3427. Destler, Chester McArthur. American
radicalism, 1 865-1 901, essays and documents.
New London, Connecticut College, 1946. 276 p.
illus. (Connecticut College monograph no. 3)
46-6081 E661.D45
A collection of 11 articles, 9 of them reprinted
from journals, based on a revisionist interpretation
of "western radicalism in terms of ideological inter-
change and conflict between western agrarians and
urban radicals." Several papers, notably the se-
quences on the Pendleton fiscal program of 1867
and on the labor-Populist alliance in Illinois of 1894,
and the essay on "The Toledo Natural Gas Pipe-
Line Controversy," are case studies in midwestern
politics. The other papers offer a rather more
generalized "consideration of whether, out of the
ideological intercourse of country and city there
had not developed in the late nineteenth century
West a new radical synthesis. If its existence could
be demonstrated such a novel but indigenous creed
would give new meaning to the bitter conflicts that
characterized the short-lived labor-Populist alliance
of 1 894-1 896." Together, the essays constitute the
accumulation of the author's findings as of 1946, and
suggest possible lines of further investigation.
3428. Dulles, Foster Rhea. America in the Pa-
cific; a century of expansion. 2d cd. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. xiv, 299 p.
38-27337 F970.D94 1938
First published in 1932.
A survey of our expansion in the Pacific area
during the 19th century. The ambition to obtain
mastery of the Pacific and to control its opulent
trade was a powerful motivating force, Professor
Dulles believes, behind every American acquisition
of territory on the Western Ocean from Oregon,
California, and Alaska, to Samoa, Hawaii, and the
Philippines. First awakened by the old China
traders operating out of Adantic seaports in the early
Federal period, this ambition led shordy to the
assertion of claims to territory on the Pacific coast
for the development of naval bases and ports, and
was a factor in the annexations of islands which
reached a climax with the acquisition of the Phil-
ippine Islands in 1898. The author is interested in
Oregon and California not as natural extensions of
the nation's boundaries secured in 1846-48, but "as
the basis and point of departure for Pacific empire."
The theory of the expansionists of the day, he points
out, was "that once established on the Pacific Coast,
we would command the commerce of the East, and
just so in 1898 did their imperialistic heirs contend
that, given Hawaii and the Philippines, we would
dominate this same trade." Only in the acquisition
of the Philippines, Professor Dulles observes, did
the policy of trade and empire ignore the American
principles of democracy, and these have since been
reasserted.
3429. Farrar, Victor J. The annexation of Russian
America to the United States. Washing-
ton, W. F. Roberts, 1937. 142 p.
37-33668 E669.F37
"Bibliographical note": p. 131-138.
A completely documented history of the purchase
of Alaska by the United States in 1867. Mr. Far-
rar, relying upon Russian and American documents
in the Department of State archives, sets forth
Russia's reasons for selling Alaska and describes
the diplomatic negotiations which culminated in the
treaty. Besides discussing the arguments employed
by Secretary of State Seward to secure congressional
approval and appropriations for the purchase, the
author clears up certain misconceptions regarding
the reasons for the visit of the Russian fleet to
America in 1863 and the mode of payment to the
Russian government.
3430. Flick, Alexander Clarence. Samuel Jones
Tilden; a study in political sagacity, by Alex-
ander Clarence Flick, assisted by Gustav S. Lobrano.
New York, Dodd, Mead, 1939. 5117 p. illus.
(American political leaders)
39-31244 E415.9.T5F5
Bibliography: p. 535-553.
388 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
This biography traces the career of Tilden (1814-
1886) as he moved from corporation counsel to
reformer of New York politics, and candidate for
the Presidency. Born and educated in the state,
Tilden was a lifelong Democrat although it was not
until 1874 that he held an elective public office. Ad-
mitted to the bar of New York City in 1841, Tilden
built up a lucrative practice as a lawyer for the major
Eastern railroads, and amassed one of the country's
largest personal fortunes. The ousting of the
"Tweed ring" in 1872 while Tilden was Democratic
State Committee Chairman was, as Mr. Flick points
out, the personal triumph which made him a na-
tional figure. Elected Governor of New York in
1874 on a reform ticket, Tilden gained further
prominence through his efforts to expose graft and
corruption in the upstate "canal ring." He was
the obvious Democratic reform candidate in 1876,
and although nominated and evidently preferred, if
not elected, by the people, lost to Rutherford B.
Hayes in the contested election, which is here
analyzed in great detail.
3431. Fuess, Claude Moore. Carl Schurz, reformer
(1829-1906). New York, Dodd, Mead,
1932. xv, 421 p. illus. (American political leaders)
32-26442 E664.S39F92
"Selected bibliography": p. 395-401.
A biography of Carl Schurz, in 1848 a German
revolutionary, in 1852 an immigrant to the United
States, by 1859 an orator and lecturer on such sub-
jects as "True Americanism" and "American Civili-
zation," and for nearly 50 years thereafter "the
self-constituted, but exceedingly useful, incarnation
of our national conscience." Schurz struggled be-
tween two ambitions, Dr. Fuess believes, politics and
scholarship, but when he had to choose, he turned
to practical affairs. His career was marked by con-
tributions to four great victories: the abolition of
slavery, preservation of the Union, maintenance of
sound money, and establishment of the merit system
in the civil service. Lincoln's Minister to Spain,
1861, Brigadier and then Major General of Volun-
teers, 1862-1865, Republican Senator from Missouri,
1869-75, and Secretary of the Interior under Hayes,
1877-81, Schurz "accomplished enough to entitle
him to a position among the great practical re-
formers," the author concludes, and perhaps to a
place among our greater statesmen. Dr. Fuess
bases the latter opinion upon Schurz' nonpartisan-
ship and independence in politics which set country
ahead of party, his advocacy of ideals and his un-
tarnished record in an age of corruption, his pro-
motion of honest government, and his inspiring
example of a foreigner's adaptation to American
customs and institutions.
3432. Haworth, Paul Leland. The Hayes-Tilden
disputed presidential election of 1876.
Cleveland, Burrows Bros., 1906. 365 p.
6-22324 JK.526 1876.H4
An analysis of "the most remarkable electoral
controversy in the history of popular government,"
based largely upon congressional documents. Al-
though the material is voluminous, Professor
Haworth notes, "much of the evidence contained in
it is untrustworthy." Initial chapters discuss the
issues of the 1876 election — the panic of 1873, the
sorry condition of the South, the exposure of cor-
ruption high in the Grant administration — which
encouraged the Democrats and their candidate,
Samuel J. Tilden, to charge the administration with
misgovernment. This in turn forced the Republi-
cans and their nominee, Rutherford B. Hayes, to
attempt to create distrust of the Democrats by re-
viving the sectional issue. Succeeding chapters are
devoted to the conduct of the election; the count of
votes whereby Tilden appeared to have won a popu-
lar majority of 200,000 or more but to have lacked
the one electoral vote necessary to election; the
forwarding to Washington of double sets of returns
from the disputed states of Florida, Louisiana, South
Carolina, and Oregon; and the compromise that
peacefully concluded the perilous situation (cf. no.
3417). Both sides were guilty of fraud, and the
Democrats of violence also, the author believes,
but he views the outcome of the great contest as
"in the main a just one."
3433. Haynes, Frederick Emory. James Baird
Weaver. Iowa City, State Flistorical Society
of Iowa, 1919. xv, 494 p. illus. (Iowa biographical
series) 19-27188 E664.W36H4
A biography of General Weaver (1833-1912),
Union officer in the Civil War, prominent Iowa
Republican in the years 1867-77, Democratic-
Greenbacker member of the United States House of
Representatives, 1879-81 and 1885-89, Greenbacker
candidate for the Presidency, 1880, Populist candi-
date for the Presidency, 1892, and a Democrat after
the campaign of 1896. The author believes that
Weaver was a pioneer, the first progressive, and a
prophet, the precursor of Bryan, Theodore Roose-
velt, and Wilson. As presidential candidate in 1880,
Weaver advocated a graduated income tax, postal
savings banks, the initiative and referendum, direct
election of United States Senators, protective labor
laws, free silver, and expansion cf the powers of
government. He was fortunate, Mr. Haynes be-
lieves, in living to see many of his own measures
enacted into law by the two great parties.
GENERAL HISTORY / 389
3434. Hendrick, Burton }. The life of Andrew
Carnegie. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1932. 2 v. illus. 32-29884 CT275.C3H27
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 389-400.
An appreciative biography of Andrew Carnegie
(1835-1919), multimillionaire and philanthropist,
which is concerned chiefly with his nonbusiness ac-
tivities. Although Mr. Hendrick records Carnegie's
progress successively from telegrapher to railroad
executive, organizer of Civil War railroad and tele-
graph services, oil man, securities dealer, bridge
builder, and, finally, in 1873, to manufacturer of
steel by the Bessemer process, he does not attempt
to analyze Carnegie's work as a business adminis-
trator and investing capitalist. The author notes
that Carnegie, himself a fairly prolific writer, as
early as 1886 published Triumphant Democracy
(New York, Scribner. 519 p.), a criticism of the
aristocratic principle, and, in an article of 1889, set
forth a Calvinist belief in the stewardship of wealth.
He spent his last 20 years implementing this social
gospel, his benefactions, principally in support of
education, public libraries, and research, having
amounted to $350,000,000. An interesting supple-
ment, in which Mr. Hendrick's work was completed
by Daniel M. Henderson, is Louise Whitfield Car-
negie: the Life of Mrs. Andrew Carnegie (New
York, Hastings House, 1950. 306 p.); Mrs. Car-
negie, over 20 years younger than her husband, lived
until 1946.
3435. Hesseltine, William B. Ulysses S. Grant,
politician. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1935.
480 p. illus. (American political leaders)
35-17052 E672.H46
Bibliography: p. 453-460.
A depreciatory revaluation of the political career
of Ulysses S. Grant (1822-1885), 18th President of
the United States. Professor Hesseltine character-
izes him as a man not so much stupid and corrupt
as peculiarly ignorant of the Constitution, militantly
obstinate and imperious, unable to judge and inept
at handling people. "Although he grew as a Presi-
dent," says the author, "his growth was that of a
party politician, and he changed from the man who
would be the President of all the people in 1869 into
the man who could support the Republican party in
the theft of the election of 1876. As he acquired
the ideology of the politician he lost the vision of the
statesman, and became the 'safe' representative of
the more reactionary economic interests of his day."
Unimaginative and taciturn, yet sensitive, Grant's
was a personality suppressed largely by unfortunate
parental influences, the negative elements of which
strongly conditioned his career. Psychologically the
President was overshadowed by the general, and at
Grant's death the partisan bitterness and mistakes of
his eight years in the White House (1869-1877)
"were forgotten in the glories of the soldier and the
heroism of the man."
3436. Hicks, John D. The American Nation. 3d
ed. [Boston] Houghton Mifflin, 1955.
776, ci p. illus. 54-13492 E661.H55 1955
"List of books cited": p. xxvi-lv.
This well-illustrated college text deals with Ameri-
can history of the years 1865-1954; two-thirds of it
is devoted to the events of the 20th century. The
author summarizes all significant movements,
whether political, economic, or cultural, and dis-
cusses their effects upon the development of the
country. Professor Hicks remarks such American
achievements as the attainment of unsurpassed po-
litical democracy, the breaking down to a remark-
able degree of class and caste barriers, the acquire-
ment of a higher standard of living than the world
has before known, and a relatively low spread be-
tween the rich and the poor; he is concerned that the
tremendous advances made by American science
have not been matched by equal accomplishments in
literature. He has faith, however, in the ability
of the United States to survive the stresses and strains
of the cold war with its ideals and principles intact.
3437. Howe, George Frederick. Chester A.
Arthur; a quarter-century of machine poli-
tics. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1934. 307 p. illus.
(American political leaders) 34-38337 E692.H67
"Select bibliography": p. 292-295.
A friendly but not uncritical biography of Ches-
ter A. Arthur (1830-1886), who was prominent in
New York politics for more than two decades, and
became 21st President of the United States in 1881
upon the assassination of Garfield. He is depicted
as a genial and cultivated man, viewed with respect
by a few of his contemporaries because of his ca-
pable service as state quartermaster general during
the Civil War, but distrusted by many because of
his long association with Boss Roscoe Conkling, be-
cause of his advocacy of the spoils system while he
served as collector of the Port of New York, 1871-
78, and because his nomination to the Vice Presi-
dency in 1880 was considered a sop to the follow-
ers of General Grant. Professor Howe character-
izes Arthur in the Presidency as reassuring to the
alarmists and disappointing to the machine poli-
ticians, conscientious, honorable, and dignified, a
conservative and conciliator. Adequate rather than
great, he rehabilitated the Navy, forwarded civil
service reform, favored a Nicaraguan canal, and
vetoed the Chinese exclusion bill.
390 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3438. Josephson, Matthew. The politicos, 1865-
1896. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1938.
760 p. 38-27301 E661.J85
Bibliography: p. 709-719.
The thesis of this chronicle of the politics and
key professional politicians of the age of big busi-
ness which followed the Civil War is that "Gover-
nors, Senators, Presidents come and go; but the
Party Organization goes on long after them, and
its Inner Circle, its bosses, rule not for four or six
years, but for a generation or for life tenure." The
business-minded Northern politicians of the Re-
construction era "were literally Jekylls and Hydes,"
asserts the author: as Dr. Jekyll, they secured sup-
port by advancing a humane and libertarian ideol-
ogy; as Mr. Hyde, they enacted measures of high
capitalist policy, designed to hold out against future
assault — charters and grants to railroads and land
companies, special tariff duties, public contracts, and
pensions, while they deliberately delayed the recov-
ery of the conquered South and imposed upon it
military rule "subject to the Republican Party Organ-
ization at Washington." Down to Garfield's death
in 1 88 1, Mr. Josephson asserts, the ruling group of
Senator-bosses operated the Republican Party as a
patronage organization, deriving profit from the sale
of office and assessments upon wages, as well as
from the subsidies of bankers and industrialists.
From 1 88 1 to 1896, the Republican grip on public
office relaxed; it began the shift to politics of
"interest" and "class," and the Democratic opposi-
tion not merely sloughed off the stigma of disloyalty
but began to compete forcefully for capitalist
backing.
3439. Lindsey, Almont. The Pullman strike, the
story of a unique experiment and of a great
labor upheaval. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1942. 385 p. illus.
42-50022 HD5325.R12 1894.C54
Bibliography: p. 364-370.
A history of the brief but intense struggle be-
tween labor and capital precipitated in 1894 when
the American Railway Union's sympathetic boycott
against Pullman cars, prompted by a strike of ill-
paid workers at the company town of Pullman,
Illinois, met vigorous and massive resistance from
the General Managers' Association. The author
asserts that the aim of the managers was annihila-
tion of the union and that they were prepared neither
to negotiate nor to make the smallest concession. A
vital part of their strategy, Professor Lindsey be-
lieves, "was to draw the United States government
into the struggle and then to make it appear that
the battle was no longer between the workers and
the railroads but between the workers and the gov-
ernment." He describes John Egan, strike mana-
ger of the association, as portraying the "situation
in a manner as ominous and disturbing as possible
in order to arouse the apprehension of the powerful
'interests' and hasten federal participation," and the
United States Government as using injunctions,
soldiery, and even arrests in a manner calculated to
bring victory to the railroads and to nullify com-
pletely the aims and activities of labor. The Ameri-
can Railway Union, was, however, widely con-
sidered a force for anarchy in this restless era, the
author concedes, a rallying point for an attack upon
property, corporate control, and the economic
machinery of the country.
3440. McMurry, Donald L. Coxey's army; a study
of the industrial army movement of 1894.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1929. 331 p. illus.
29-23512 HD8072.M23
Bibliography: p. [3111-323.
An interpretation of Jacob S. Coxey's "Common-
weal of Christ," which relates it to the economic
maladjustments of the 1890's, other organized
armies of unemployed marchers, the Populist "up-
rising of the people," and demand for free silver,
as well as the grievances of the 2 million or more
wage earners left idle after the panic of 1893. The
author believes that the idea of a march of the un-
employed to the National Capital for succor orig-
inated farther west, but that "Jacob S. Coxey, of
Massillon, Ohio, was the man who made it famous."
Marching out of town on March 25, 1894, with
flags and symbolic banners flying, Coxey's pic-
turesque army, together with his enthusiasm, ability
to formulate a program, means to finance his ven-
tures, and instinct for advertising, caused the as-
sociation of his name with the whole movement, al-
though other armies marched far greater distances
to Washington led by such "Generals" as Lewis C.
Fry of Los Angeles and Charles T. Kelly of San
Francisco. Coxeyism was, in Professor McMurry's
opinion, a symptom of the economic revolution in
this country; it "showed certain reactions of the
American frontier spirit to the growing industrialism
which was replacing the old order."
3441. Mitchell, Stewart. Horatio Seymour of New
York. Cambridge, Harvard University Press
1938. xx, 623 p. illus. 38-9985 E415.9.S5M6
Bibliography: p. [585 ]-594.
A political biography of Horatio Seymour (1810-
1886), a moderate Jeffersonian Democrat who began
his career as an assemblyman from Utica, New York,
in 1842 and climaxed it as Democratic candidate for
the Presidency in the election of 1868. Seymour was
elected Governor of New York in 1852; in 1862,
his gubernatorial victory as a Democrat in the midst
of the Civil War, Dr. Mitchell believes, "pushed
GENERAL HISTORY
/
391
him into the position of the leader of the opposition
to the forces that were swiftly and surely getting
control of both the Congress and the Cabinet." As
early as 1856, Seymour had argued against abolition,
prohibition, anti-Catholicism, and secession. He
campaigned in 1862 with the slogan, "The Union as
it was, and the Constitution as it is." He was ac-
cused of treason and a desire to obstruct the war,
but the author regards him as "the hard-working
object of unjust suspicion and long-lived slander,"
who honestly believed that emancipation, conscrip-
tion, and the suspension of habeas corpus were un-
sound policies. The draft riots of July 1863 in the
city of New York were magnified into a political
myth, convenient ammunition for use during the
campaign of 1868, in which Seymour polled a sub-
stantial vote against Grant and "was not improbably
the choice of the white men of the country."
3442. Muzzey, David Saville. James G. Blaine, a
political idol of other days. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1934. 514 p. illus. (American polit-
ical leaders) 34-32559 E664.B6M8
Bibliography: p. 501-504.
A biography of James G. Blaine (1830-1893),
acknowledged leader of the Republican Party for a
quarter of a century, a contestant for the Presiden-
tial nomination in five successive elections, 1876-92,
and in 1884 the candidate. Idolized by many Amer-
icans as the "Plumed Knight," he was loathed by
others as a corrupt politician. Avoiding adulation
or denigration, Professor Muzzey explores the events
of Blaine's life, assessing his achievements and the
paradox of his character, and presenting him in the
political setting of his time. The author finds that
Blaine's chief public service was performed as Secre-
tary of State under Garfield, 1881, and under Ben-
jamin Harrison, 1889-92, when he encouraged closer
political and commercial ties between the United
States and the Latin American republics, and ad-
vocated the policy of peaceful arbitration among
them. Professor Muzzey regards Blaine's conduct
of the speakership of the United States House of
Representatives (1869-75) as "brilliant," but con-
siders his performance as Senator (1876-81) rather
less impressive. In the author's opinion, Blaine not
only roused "men's emotions of patriotism, partisan-
ship and prejudice, of personal devotion and resent-
ment," but also spent perhaps too much of his
"wonderful" talent in a constant effort to make his
party seem better than it was.
3443. Ncvins, Allan. Abram S. Hewitt: with
some account of Peter Cooper. New York,
Harper, 1935. 623 p. illus.
35-30046 E664.H523N4
"A note upon sources": p. 603.
The great age of American capitalism is seen at
its best in this family history of the lives and achieve-
ments of Abram S. Hewitt (1822-1903), and of his
father-in-law, Peter Cooper (1 791-1883), both seii-
made industrialists. Of the two, Hewitt receives
greater attention, since the author regards him as
the more intellectual and versatile. He was one ot
the first great American ironmasters, supplying guns
and armor to Union forces during the Civil War,
and a pioneer steel manufacturer; he was a leader
of the Democratic Party, serving five terms in Con-
gress from 1875 to 1886, and reform mayor of New-
York City from 1887 to 1888. Peter Cooper, in-
ventor and idealist, Professor Nevins calls a
"picturesque genius"; he was Hewitt's "partner in
business, education, and philanthropy for forty
years." He built the first American locomotive, ac-
cumulated a fortune from the manufacture of glue
and gelatine, helped to finance the laying of the At-
lantic cable, and founded Cooper Union. The au-
thor believes that Hewitt might have become a com-
manding figure had he concentrated upon a single
objective, but "his life would have been less inter-
esting, less a reflection of the important forces of
American society, and less useful." Cooper, Pro-
fessor Nevins declares, was a rare spirit but "as
distinctively an American type as Benjamin Frank-
lin, and one as quickly taken to the American heart."
3444. Nevins, Allan. Hamilton Fish; the inner
history of the Grant administration. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1936. xxi, 932 p. illus.
37-9994 E664.F52N42
This is both a biography of Hamilton Fish (1808-
1893), Secretary of State under Grant, and a history
of the Grant administration, based upon the ex-
ceedingly rich and voluminous Fish papers. The
major portion of the book falls into two divisions:
the first devoted to Fish's activities in the field of
foreign affairs, 1869-73, when the controversy with
Great Britain over the Alabama claims was settled
and war with Spain was averted; the second to the
"deeply disturbing" politics of the administration.
Professor Nevins considers Fish a man of cautious
good sense, moral elevation, and pacific temper,
"the strongest figure in one of our most troubled
Administrations." Grant the author regards as a
contradictory person, intermittent in mental energy,
at once weak and strong, naive and inscrutable, reck-
less and plodding. Ignorant of law, civil alTairs,
economics, and history, awkwardly constrained be-
fore men of superior intellect, he was incapable of
communicating with most of the best minds he
might have used. "Grant's casual way of per-
forming his duties; his easy acceptance of vicious
personal influences; his negligence and favoritism in
appointments; his careless inconscqucntiality in
392 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
handling Cabinet affairs; his detestation of reform
because reformers were critics," all produced an
aroma of corruption by the summer of 1872 and
caused "the virtual collapse of the Grant Adminis-
tration during 1876" in all but foreign affairs. The
book was reissued in 2 volumes in 1957 (New York,
Ungar).
3445. Nixon, Raymond B. Henry W. Grady,
spokesman of the new South. New York,
Knopf, 1943. x, 360, xiv p. illus.
43-15899 E664.G73N5
Bibliography: p. [35i]~36o.
A sympathetic and sprighdy biography of Henry
Woodfin Grady (1851-1889), editor of The Atlanta
Constitution and advocate of the utilization of the
natural resources of the South, diversification of its
agriculture, development of manufacturing to sup-
plement the once almost exclusively agrarian econ-
omy, adjustment of the Negro problem, and, es-
pecially, fraternity between North and South. As
early as 1874, the author notes, Grady was out-
lining his program for the economic regeneration
of the South. By the 1880's the Constitution had
become the most important organ of the movement
toward a new South, as Atlanta was its booming
industrial and commercial center, and Henry W.
Grady the acknowledged spokesman for the South-
ern spirit of progress and good will. When he made
his famous conciliatory speech, "The New South,"
at the annual dinner of the New England Society
in New York, December 22, 1886, "Grady was the
right man speaking the right word at the right
time." "He was the only Southern speaker of the
late eighties who had succeeded in gaining the at-
tention and the confidence of the North to any
marked degree; he was one of the few Southern
editors whose writings had national circulation."
His premature death was widely regretted as a
national loss.
3446. Nye, Russel B. Midwestern progressive
politics; a historical study of its origins and
development, 1870-1950. [East Lansing] Michigan
State College Press, 195 1. 422 p. illus.
51-11144 F354.N8
Bibliography: p. 387-410.
A comprehensive history of midwestern progres-
sivism, the political movement among farmers, and,
later, among labor and reform elements, against the
alliance of industrialism and government, the big
businessmen and the big bosses. Professor Nye
describes the revolt in the 1870's which gave rise to
such organizations as the Grangers, Populists, Non-
partisan Leaguers, Socialists, "progressives," and
"insurgents." Their leaders strove for popular gov-
ernment, the destruction of monopoly privileges,
elimination of corporations from political life, and
protection of natural resources. Dealt with in some
detail are the activities of men like John P. Altgeld of
Illinois, William Jennings Bryan, Robert M. La
Follette of Wisconsin, and George W. Norris of
Nebraska. The midwestern progressives held the
balance of power in Congress by 1910 and in 1912
were ready to form a party of their own, but when
Theodore Roosevelt seized the leadership of the
third-party movement many progressives declined
to follow him. The strange result was that "a
Virginia Democrat from Princeton" pushed through
most of the measures for which the progressives
had been batding for three decades. Thencefor-
ward progressivism was in decline: "The first
World War split it, the New Deal robbed it, the
second World War brought it to the edge of its
grave, and the disintegration of political lines in the
forties killed it." Regional in spirit, it could not
survive the triumph of nationalism and
internationalism.
3447. Oberholtzer, Ellis Paxson. A history of the
United States since the Civil War. New
York, Macmillan, 1917-37. 5 v.
17-28462 E661.O12
A detailed political and socioeconomic history of
the years 1865-1901, from the assassination of Lin-
coln to the emergence of the United States as a
world power at the conclusion of the war with
Spain. Volume I, dealing with the years 1865-68,
reports the honest efforts of President Andrew
Johnson to implement Lincoln's conciliatory Recon-
struction policies, the revulsion of the North against
the South's "Black Codes," and the rise of the Rad-
ical Republican congressional opposition with its
"conquered provinces" theory. Devoted to the years
1868-72, volume II describes Johnson's attempt to
prevent the Radical Congress from overriding the
Constitution, his impeachment and trial, and, in
the Grant era of "moral blindness," the rule of
carpetbaggers and the appearance of protective as-
sociations like the Ku Klux Klan in the South, and
the sovereignty in the North of political bosses and
such robber barons as Cornelius Vanderbilt, James
Fisk, Jr., and Jay Gould. Volume III covers the
period 1872-78, and deals, among other matters,
with Grant's second administration, a "coarse and
venal regime," the panic of 1873, the Hayes admin-
istration which removed Federal troops from the
South and ended Reconstruction, and the Indian
uprisings in the Far West. Volume IV, 1878-88,
discusses the "infirm character" of the Garfield ad-
ministration, the surprisingly "discreet, conservative
and just" Arthur administration, and the honesty,
independence, and "responsible understanding of
public duty" demonstrated by the first Cleveland
GENERAL HISTORY / 393
administration. Covering the years 1888-1901,
volume V characterizes Benjamin Harrison's ad-
ministration as honest, efficient, protectionist, and
paternalistic, and Cleveland's second administration
as sound on money, tariff, and civil service reforms
but tactless and ignorant in foreign affairs. The
author considers William Jennings Bryan "a rare
bigot" rather than a "mountebank," and McKinley
a mere recorder of the flow of popular thought. Mr.
Oberholtzer (1868-1936) was a disciple of J. B.
McMaster (no. 3046 note) and followed the method
and style of the latter's History of the People of the
United States. Since Mr. Oberholtzer's History was
over 20 years in the writing, its manner and outlook
had become rather old-fashioned by the time of its
completion, and it has had more criticism than
praise. It nevertheless remains the only large-scale
general treatment of its period, and a thoroughly
solid, informative, and honest performance.
3448. Olcott, Charles S. The life of William
McKinley. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1912.
2 v. illus. 16-10505 E711.6.O43
An authorized and admiring biography of Wil-
liam McKinley (1843-1901), 25th President of the
United States, based not only upon his rather meager
papers but also upon the recollections of his friends
and associates, notably, George B. Cortelyou, Wil-
liam R. Day, Charles G. Dawes, and Myron T.
Herrick. McKinley is characterized here as "a
true, earnest, and consistent Christian," who aspired
to a congressional career as early as 1869. Begin-
ning in 1877, he served 6 terms in the U. S. House
of Representatives, and 2 as Governor of Ohio
(1892-96). He made a special study of the tariff
and, "from the time of his first speech in Congress
until the end of his life, McKinley sought to elab-
orate, clarify, and systematize the true 'American'
policy of Protection." Mark Hanna's promotion of
McKinley 's successful candidacy in the presidential
elections of 1896 and 1900 is attributed to Hanna's
disinterested admiration of McKinley as a man, and
to his belief that prosperity and the best business
interests of the country "depended upon the re-
establishment and permanent maintenance of the
principle of Protection, and that this could be ac-
complished only by the election of its foremost
exponent to the Presidency." In Mr. Olcott 's opin-
ion, however, McKinley will be remembered not
as the advocate of protection and sound money but
as the President who successfully conducted the war
with Spain and inaugurated a new era of expansion
and international responsibility.
3449. Pratt, Julius W. Expansionists of 1898; the
acquisition of Hawaii and the Spanish is-
lands. New York, P. Smith, 1951, ci936. 393 p.
(The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history,
1936.) 52-7706 E713.P895 1936a
Bibliography: p. 361-376.
A history of the rise and development in the
United States of the movement for overseas ex-
pansion, from its uncertain beginnings under
Benjamin Harrison in 1889 to its triumphant cul-
mination in the treaty of 1899 with Spain. Pro-
fessor Pratt analyzes the ideological background of
the movement and surveys briefly Harrison's
abortive efforts to secure strategic bases in the
Caribbean area. He devotes major attention, how-
ever, to the question of the annexation of Hawaii
which grew out of the revolution there in 1893, both
because there had been no previous treatment of the
subject and because the proposal to annex the Islands
focused public and congressional opinion upon the
expansionist policy. When President Cleveland re-
jected the acquisition of Hawaii, the expansionists
turned their attention to Spain's Caribbean colonies,
and in 1898 saw the triumph of their policies in both
spheres. The debates between proponents and op-
ponents of the policy are explored, as are the atti-
tudes of business and religious groups.
3450. Smith, Theodore Clarke. The life and let-
ters of James Abram Garfield. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1925. 2 v.
25-19753 E687.S66
A sympathetic biography of James A. Garfield
(1831-1881), 20th President of the United States,
"set forth so far as possible in his own words
through extracts from letters, journals, reminis-
cences and speeches," which give his "own com-
mentary upon himself and his doings, his im-
pressions of events and of contemporaries." The
author finds the chief value of these judgments in
their "abundance, good humor and candor," and
observes: "It is Garfield himself who contributes
the personal and psychological analysis." The
selections, together with Professor Smith's connec-
tive text, illumine Civil War politics and the western
campaigns, since Garfield served as colonel and
brigadier general, 1861-1862, and as major gcncr.il
of volunteers and chief of staff to Rosecrans in 1863.
The work also sheds light upon 17 years of con-
gressional history (1863-1880) when Garfield
served as a Republican Representative from Ohio,
became known as a moderate and compromiser, and
attained the chairmanship of the Committee on Ap-
propriations. The author exonerates Garfield from
complicity in the Credit Mobilicr scandal, and
defends his stand on the Salary Grab and other
such issues. During the 4 months before his- assas-
sination in 1881, President Garfield demonstrated
394 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"that he fully comprehended the nature of presi-
dential authority and was prepared to exercise it
firmly and quietly from the start."
3451. Woodward, Comer Vann. Tom Watson,
agrarian rebel. New York, Macmillan,
1938. 518 p. illus. 38-8354 E664.W337W6
Thomas E. Watson of Georgia (1856-1922), a
controversial political figure, is viewed by Professor
Woodward as a product of the "forces of intoler-
ance, superstition, prejudice, religious jingoism, and
mobbism." He struggled bravely against them dur-
ing the 1890's, first as an Alliance Democrat, then
as the foremost Southern Populist, but was thwarted
by them at every turn, and led into the futility and
degeneration of his later career. Watson stood orig-
inally for the Southern farmer and his way of life,
war upon Eastern industrialism, alliance with the
agrarian West, conflict with other classes both within
and outside the South, and the enlistment of the
Negro in the farmers' struggle. As the author
shows, Watson's career was studded with crushing
disappointments. The district from which he was
easily elected to Congress in 1890 was gerryman-
dered by the Democrats in 1892, and he was out
of public office until 1920 when he was elected to
the United States Senate. When he was Populist
candidate for Vice President in 1896, fusionist ele-
ments in his own party betrayed him. In his "for-
lorn crusade" of 1904 as Populist candidate for
President, Watson became a defender of white su-
premacy and began his sorry but understandable
swing toward reaction, sectionalism, and sensation-
alism. Articles in his weekly, the Jeffersonian, on
the plutocracy and corporate privilege were replaced
by vituperative attacks upon individuals and the
"menaces" — the Catholic hierarchy, the Negro, the
Jew. "A frustrated man and a frustrated class
found that their desires and needs were comple-
mentary."
J. Theodore Roosevelt to Wilson (1 901 -21)
3452. Barck, Oscar Theodore, and Nelson Manfred
Blake. Since 1900, a history of the United
States in our times. Rev. ed. New York, Mac-
millan, 1952. 903 p. illus.
52-2595 E741.B34 1952
First published in 1947.
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 861-885.
A textbook emphasizing the historical develop-
ment of problems currendy important to this coun-
try. Although ample treatment is accorded to social
and cultural trends in America, more space is de-
voted to the two most impressive lines of develop-
ment: "the steady expansion of the functions of
government to deal with the complex problems of a
new age and the increasing involvement of the
United States in global politics." The authors
see three significant tendencies of the last 50 years:
a nation largely indifferent to international affairs
has been pushed by events into a position of domi-
nant power in world affairs; it has been compelled
not merely to defend democracy as a way of govern-
ment and life but to reexamine its own institutions
in the light of the democratic ideal; and its capi-
talist system has been put to the acid test of having
to provide security and economic well-being for
the whole people. There is still no cause for com-
placency: if wealth, productivity, and the general
standard of living have soared, if education, good
literature, music, and art have never been so ac-
cessible, national and international problems have
grown even faster, and in greater complexity and
difficulty than ever before.
3453. Bowers, Claude G. Beveridge and the pro-
gressive era [Boston] Houghton Mifflin,
1932. xxiv, 610 p. illus. 32-22530 E748.B48B6
Bibliography: p. [591 H93.
The well-documented political biography of a
man who began his career as a Hamiltonian Re-
publican but whose practical experience as a legis-
lator carried him into the Progressive ranks.
Beveridge (1862-1927) was at first a conservative
nationalist, hostile to demagogy, and a believer in
the obligations and the self-restraint of power. His
dominant passion, Mr. Bowers believes, was for an
imperialist national policy, expanding trade through
colonialism; his consuming ambition, a leap from
private life in Indiana to the United States Senate,
which feat he accomplished in 1898. By 1905, how-
ever, Beveridge "had discovered that bigness and
power do not necessarily make for the good of
humanity." When he triumphed over the packers
in 1906 with the passage of his meat inspection bill,
he took "a long strike forward as a progressive and
compromised some of his old relationships."
Thereafter, he was engaged more and more in
progressive battles for domestic reforms and "was
moving into conflict with the major forces of his
party"; he consistently supported Roosevelt, and was
one of the insurgents under Taft. A Progressive in
GENERAL HISTORY / 395
1912, "he was passionately in earnest about creating
a great party, liberal according to his lights," says
the author, "and he saw no hope in the party he
had left." Unable to regain office, he devoted his
later years to his monumental Life of John Marshall
(q. v.) and an unfinished study of Lincoln.
3454. Clark, John Maurice. The costs of the World
War to the American people. New Haven,
Yale University Press, for the Carnegie Endowment
for International Peace, 1931. 316 p. ([Carnegie
Endowment for International Peace. Division of
Economics and History. Economic and social his-
tory of the World War. American series])
31-28596 HC56.C33, no. 3 D635.C553
An analysis of the costs of World War I to the
United States wherein the fiscal allocations "are
regarded as of little significance in themselves, their
chief importance being as evidence of the outpour-
ing of goods, the diversions of productive power
from peace to war uses, and the sacrifices of the
people, all of which constitute the more important
realities behind the various sums of money which
serve to call them forth." Professor Clark considers
such matters as the nature of fiscal oudays for the
war, how they were financed by the Federal, State,
and local governments, or private organizations,
and the effects of the war on manpower, agriculture,
and industry. He estimates "the real social outlavs
for prosecuting the war" at 32 billion dollars, broken
down by years thus: 1917, 6 billions; 1918, 16 bil-
lions; 1919, 9 billions; and 1920, 1 billion. At the
time of writing (1931), he had concluded that the
postwar prosperity, highest in the Nation's history,
was higher than it would have been had there been
no war, that the Great Depression cut deeper, and
that the effect of the war in so deepening the de-
pression outweighed its effect in heightening the
boom.
3455. Goldman, Eric F. Rendezvous with destiny;
a history of modern American reform. New
York, Knopf, 1952. xiii, 503, xxxvii p.
52-6418 E661.G58
A lively history of the reform movements that
culminated in the Wilson administration and, after
the reaction of the 1920's, the New Deal, emphasiz-
ing the ideas of the reformers and the influence
which these ideas exerted in subsequent develop-
ments. Since these movements are interpreted as
reactions to a rapidly industrializing and urbanizing
America, the narrative begins with the late 1860's,
when these factors were becoming dominant, and
the first reformers in Mr. Goldman's procession are
therefore the patrician liberals of the Tilden school,
who wanted a government "which the best people
of this country will be proud of." After the episodes
of the Georgists, the Farmers' Alliance, and the
Populists, all currents run together in the Progres-
sive movement of the early 20th century. Thus early
emerged the recurrent dilemma of the progressives,
which bewilders individuals as well as parties:
should freedom of enterprise be restored by creating
conditions of fair and equal opportunity, or should
big business be accepted as inevitable and controlled
by big or bigger government? These and other
issues are conducted down to an open present, in a
narrative in which social circumstances, liberal
thought, and political action are nicely balanced, and
which is sometimes quite individual in interpreta-
tion, but always thoroughly documented.
3456. Hechler, Kenneth W. Insurgency; person-
alities and politics of the Taft era. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1940. 252 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
470) 40-33640 H31.C7, no. 470
E761.H462
Issued also as thesis (Ph.D.) Columbia University.
Bibliography: p. 227-248.
A history of the predominandy agrarian group of
Republicans in Congress, who in 1909, inspired by
the crusading spirit of Theodore Roosevelt, arose
in rebellion against the reactionary "regulars." In
the House of Representatives, the author notes,
some 25 insurgents regularly fought the personal
dictatorship of Speaker Cannon, and, at the high
tide of insurgency, March 19, 1910, "rallied forty-
two Republicans to join the Democrats in passing a
resolution that stripped the Speaker of most of his
personal power." Dr. Hechler names among the
leaders George W. Norris of Nebraska, Edmond
H. Madison and Victor Murdock of Kansas, John
M. Nelson of Wisconsin, Miles Poindexter of Wash-
ington, Charles A. Lindbergh, Sr., of Minnesota,
and Charles N. Fowler of New Jersey. The in-
surgents of the Senate strayed from the Republi-
can position on a number of issues: revision of the
tariff, which first split party solidarity in the special
session of 1909; taxes; conservation; postal savings
banks; railroad rate regulation; and reciprocity. In
breadth of ideas and courage, the author believes,
Robert M. La Follette of Wisconsin had no equal;
also of importance, however, were Senators Moses
E. Clapp of Minnesota, Albert B. Cummins and
Jonathan P. Dolliver of Iowa, Joseph L. Bristow of
Kansas, and Albert J. Bcvcridgc of Indiana.
3457. Ilibben, Paxton. The peerless leader, Wil-
liam Jennings Bryan. New York, Farrar
& Rinchart, 1929. xvi, 446 p. illus.
29-24634 E664.r.S:lh.
39^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"The first twenty-one chapters . . . were com-
pleted by Paxton Hibben before his untimely death.
The book as it stands was completed by C. Hardey
Grattan." — p. [v].
Bibliography: p. 409-419.
A not uncritical interpretative biography of Bryan
(1860-1925), which relates its subject to the in-
tellectual, social, political, and economic milieu of
his day. He is seen as "the perfect product" of the
American Middle West, "where sentimentality took
the place of knowledge and evangelism was the
motive force of action." In the heyday of brass
bands and torchlight political parades, "an era when
oratory was all a man required to attain to any ex-
alted position," Bryan possessed the equipment of
the perfect orator. Yet victory was not in Bryan nor
of him, Mr. Hibben maintains; even the Cross of
Gold speech that won him the Democratic Presi-
dential nomination in 1896 was defensive. "William
Jennings Bryan was of those meek who may inherit
but will never conquer the earth." More than a
politician seeking votes, he "was the evangelist of
a new hope for the helpless and disinherited," a
hope which lay not in patient resignation but in
self-help through political action. The Great
Commoner, thrice defeated nominee for the Presi-
dency, and Secretary of State under Wilson, 1913-
15, became a symbol of "emotional Democracy."
3458. Hofstadter, Richard. The age of reform;
from Bryan to F. D. R. New York, Knopf,
*955-. 328 p. 54-7206 E743.H63
This analysis postulates that reform has set the
tone of American politics for the better part of the
20th century. "The reform movements of the past
sixty-five years fall readily into three main episodes,
the first two of which are almost continuous with
each other: the agrarian uprising that found its
most intense expression in the Populism of the 1890's
and the Bryan campaign of 1896; the Progressive
movement, which extended from about 1900 to
1914; and the New Deal, whose dynamic phase was
concentrated in a few years of the 1930's." Profes-
sor Hofstadter 's attention centers upon the ideas of
the participants in these movements: their concepts
of what was wrong, the changes they sought, and
the techniques they found desirable. He is con-
cerned with their most characteristic thinking as
found in "middlebrow writers," the popular maga-
zines, muckraking reports, campaign speeches, and
articles by representative journalists and influential
publicists. The author stresses and criticizes the
Yankee-Protestant ethos of responsibility in Populist-
Progressive thinking, the "notion that it is both pos-
sible and desirable to moralize private life through
public action." He regards the New Deal as a
drastic new departure in American reformism, prin-
cipally in its experimental and managerial approach
to problems of economic recovery and social welfare.
3459. Jessup, Philip C. Elihu Root. New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1938. 2 v. illus.
38-31598 E664.R7J5
"Sources and bibliography": v. 2, p. 507-520;
"Chronological list of the principal public speeches
and papers of Elihu Root": v. 2, p. 521-552.
Based upon interviews with Root, as well as
family papers and other sources, this is a massive
biography of the Republican lawyer and statesman
(1845-1937). His practice in the years 1865-99,
and after his retirement from the Senate in 19 15,
consisted mainly of cases connected with large cor-
porations and the municipal government of New
York. He is here characterized as a man of scien-
tific and detached mind, a master of detail, and an
able trial lawyer. Identified with Republican re-
form elements, Root believed in party regularity as
a practical means to political ends, but was always
ready to fight the machine on matters of principle.
Professor Jessup describes Root's batdes against po-
litical influence, inertia, personal jealousies, and
self-interest, as well as his creation of the General
Staff and the Army War College, during his service
as Secretary of War under McKinley and Theodore
Roosevelt (1 899-1904). As Roosevelt's Secretary of
State (1905-9), Root, in the author's opinion,
proved "the possibility of practical altruism" toward
Latin America. Ever devoted to the principle of
peaceful arbitration, Root adopted a policy of
patience, caution, and friendliness toward all. Pro-
fessor Jessup considers his greatest diplomatic tri-
umph the settlement of the longstanding New-
foundland fisheries dispute.
3460. Josephson, Matthew. The President makers;
the culture of politics and leadership in an
age of enlightenment, 1896-1919. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1940. 584 p. 40-33441 E712.J68
"Sources": p. 567-571.
The years 1896-1919 produced in this country not
only a cultivated and socially-minded political era,
but also a whole gallery of remarkable and diverse
leaders who controlled the national party organiza-
tions and were, in effect, "President Makers." Mr.
Josephson views this period as "the flowering of
America's imperial age," and Mark Hanna,
"Maker" of President McKinley, as the most im-
portant link between large business interests and
professional politics. Among younger men and the
literati, on the other hand, the author finds a sense
of special duty as well as special privilege. Theodore
Roosevelt and Woodrow Wilson "demanded on the
part of the rich capitalists who so often supported
GENERAL HISTORY / 397
their campaigns both self-denial and self-control."
Progressives like the elder La Follette and Louis D.
Brandeis "required of the citizens an alert public
conscience, a growing knowledge of public allairs,
and readiness to intervene intelligently at almost
every point of the governing process." Mr. Joseph-
son sees Theodore Roosevelt's Square Deal and
Wilson's New Freedom as the true precursors of
Franklin D. Roosevelt's New Deal, calls the Taft
administration "an attempted 'Restoration,' " and
dismisses the decade of Harding, Coolidge, and
Hoover as "a miscarried 'Restoration.' "
3461. La Follette, Belle (Case) and Fola La Fol-
lette. Robert M. La Follette, June 14, 1S55-
June 18, 1925. Chapters I-XXVI by Belle Case La
Follette and chapters XXVII-LXXII by Fola La
Follette. New York, Macmillan, 1953. 2 v. (xx,
1305 p.) illus. 53-13106 E664.L16L13
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 1233-1253.
A warmly written, extensively documented family
biography of Senator Robert M. La Follette of Wis-
consin, begun by his widow and completed by his
daughter. Born in a log cabin and associated in
his youth with sturdy, courageous pioneer folk, La
Follette, in his daughter's estimation, early acquired
the enduring faith in the plain people that "was the
compelling force throughout his many years of
public service." He is depicted here as a man who
took the issues directly to the voters, who won a
place in the front ranks of the Republican Party, and
who, in 1897, began his long educational campaign
in Wisconsin for direct primaries, railroad regula-
tion, tax reform, conservation, and other measures
which were enacted during his tenure as Governor,
1900-1905. In his long service as a United States
Senator, his daughter points out, La Follette was
nominally a Republican but steadily pursued an in-
dependent course. He stanchly supported many of
Wilson's domestic and some of his foreign policies
but, as an isolationist, he voted against the entry of
the United States into World War I. Miss La
Follette makes it clear that her father ran as an
independent rather than a Progressive Party candi-
date for the Presidency in 1924.
3462. Mock, James R., and Cedric Larson. Words
that won the war; the story of the Committee
on Public Information, 1917-1919. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1939. xvi, 372 p. illus.
39-27871 D632.M64
Bibliography included in "Notes" (p. [347J-356).
Based on personal interviews with former mem-
bers as well as intensive study of the files of the so-
called Creel Committee of World War I, this history
of its activities offers an illustration of war propa-
ganda at work. The Committee on Public Infor-
mation, a "propaganda ministry" set up by executive
order on April 13, 1917, displayed "vigor, effective-
ness, and creative imagination, in encouraging and
then consolidating the revolution of opinion which
changed the United States from anti-militaristic
democracy to an organized war machine." Com-
posed of journalists, scholars, press agents, editors,
artists, and other manipulators of the symbols of
public opinion, working in all media of communi-
cation, this "gargantuan advertising agency" sought
to mobilize public thinking and emotion on behalf
of the Wilson program and "to make it seem like
something worth dying for." George Creel, com-
mittee chairman, deserves censure for impetuosity
and "horseback decisions," in the authors' opinion,
but should be credited for maintaining what free-
dom of the press there was. The senior author's
Censorship, igiy (Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1 94 1. 250 p.) shows how very little freedom
of any sort remained. In times of crisis from the
American Revolution onward, liberties have always
been curtailed to some degree, especially freedom of
speech and of the press, but only with the advent of
World War I were all guaranteed rights abrogated
save those to property. He describes in some detail
these contraventions of liberty: censorship of the
press, dispatches, wireless, cable, telegraph, and mail
under supervision of the Censorship Board; and of
newspapers, magazines, books, motion pictures, and
public speech under the Department of Justice.
3463. Paxson, Frederic L. American democracy
and the World War. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1936-48. 3 v. illus. 36-21132 D619.P42
Volume 3 has imprint: Berkeley, University of
California Press.
Contents. — 1. Pre-war years 1913-1917. — 2.
America at war, 1917-1918. — 3. Postwar years:
normalcy, 1918-1923.
A history of the United States, 1913-23, which in-
cludes socioeconomic aspects within a firm political
framework. It was, on the whole, a younger gener-
ation rather than the Democratic Party, the author
maintains, that took control of the Nation's affairs
in 1913. "The real problem of democratic society
was to determine how far it could go to keep the
peace among conflicting interests. And for De-
mocracy, as a political entity, it was a challenge
whether it could step from minority to majority,
from inexperience to responsibility, and deliver
satisfaction where the Republican Party of Mc-
Kinley, Roosevelt, and Taft had failed." The author
regards as impressive the program of domestic legis-
lation enacted in 1913 and 19 1 4: the Underwood-
Simmons Tariff, Federal Reserve Act, Federal Trade
Commission Act, and Clayton Anti -Trust Act
398 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Wilson wanted no war and in fact desired a peace
consistent with national safety and self-respect, but
by 1916 was "desperate in his belief that unless the
world could be brought to peace the United States
would be driven to war." The American partici-
pation in World War I (1917-18) is regarded by
Professor Paxson as an important chapter in the
history of democracy in action, when a great nation
with its mind finally made up acted with speed,
directness, and reasonable efficiency in marshaling its
resources, went wholeheartedly into combat 3000
miles away, forestalled a German victory, and
marched home "carrying no plunder and asking
none." He finds the retreat to "normalcy," begun
in 1 918 with the election of a Republican Congress
and completed in 1920 by the election of a Repub-
lican President, as much a part of democracy as the
wartime single-mindedness, although he deplores
the lack of program, authority, and pattern at a time
when preparation for peace was as imperative as
winning the war had been.
3464. Pringle, Henry F. The life and times of
William Howard Taft; a biography. New
York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1939. 2 v. (1106 p.) illus.
39-27878 E762.P75
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 1083-1086.
"Authorized but not official," this is a moderately
critical biography of William Howard Taft (1857-
1930), based chiefly upon his private and official
papers. Taft, a Republican, is pictured here as a
man of peace, conservative, kindly, of judicial rather
than political temper. He spent the greater part of
his career in public life, rising through judicial of-
fices, the Governor-Generalship of the Philippines
and the Secretaryship of War, to serve from 1909 to
1913 as President of the United States, and from 1921
to 1930 as Chief Justice of the Supreme Court.
Taft's worship of the law and strict construction of
the executive power are emphasized, as are his "life-
long ineptitude in the complicated art of politics,"
and his inability to win public support for his meas-
ures or to popularize his accomplishments. The
author credits Taft as President with the creation of
a postal savings system and the inidation of a cor-
porate income tax, and the advocacy of reciprocal
trade agreements and civil service reforms; he dep-
recates Taft's discrimination against the congres-
sional insurgents, his small knowledge of the prob-
lems of labor, industry or finance, and his "dollar
diplomacy." That Taft, as Chief Justice, "was con-
servative, if not reactionary, in his political and social
views is," in Mr. Pringle's view, "not open to
question."
3465. Roosevelt, Theodore. Letters. Selected and
edited by Elting E. Morison; John M. Blum,
associate editor. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1951-54. 8 v. illus. 51-10037 E757.R7958
Contents. — v. 1-2. The years of preparation,
1 868-1900. — v. 3-4. The Square Deal, 1901-
1905. — v. 5-6. The Big Stick, 1905-1909. — v. 7-8,
The days of Armageddon, 1909-1919.
A selection of not quite 10,000 from the estimated
100,000 available letters of Theodore Roosevelt
(1858-1919), most of them in the Library of Con-
gress, intended to make readily accessible to histor-
ians those which seem necessary to reveal his thought
and action "in all the major and many of the minor
undertakings of his public and private life." Ar-
ranged chronologically, the letters selected are
printed in their entirety. Purely routine and re-
petitive correspondence has been eliminated. Cor-
respondence connected with the secondary and ter-
tiary pursuits of this public figure who was also
naturalist, historian, rancher, man of letters, and
explorer, have been chosen to indicate only the con-
tinuity and depth of his concerns. Far more inclu-
sive is the material concerning politics, especially
letters about significant events such as the Anthra-
cite Strike of 1902 and the battle over the Hepburn
Act in 1906, or suggestive minor episodes, such as the
disposition in 1902 of the Church lands in the Philip-
pines. Letters about continuing issues — the tariff,
state political organizations, the Indians, the fencing
of Western lands — are included if they show develop-
ments or shifts in policy. Also included are letters
dealing with applications of policy to specific cases, if
they are representative, as in the administration of
the Five Civilized Tribes and of the Panama Canal,
or if they possess unusual intrinsic interest, as in the
case of the Warren Livestock Company. The editors
have provided many brief notes, mostly identifica-
tions of addressees or persons mentioned in the
letters. Of particular value are the "Chronologies"
which appear as appendixes at the end of the even-
numbered volumes.
3466. [Roosevelt, Theodore] Blum, John Morton.
The Republican Roosevelt. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1954. 170 p.
. 54-5182 E757.B65
A brief but by no means slight interpretation of
the purposes and methods of Theodore Roosevelt's
public career, based mainly upon his published
works. In the author's opinion, Roosevelt was "a
professional Republican politician from New York"
who "made a career of politics, studied and mastered
politics," because he "loved power." Proficient in
the processes of politics, administration, and legis-
lation, he dominated and, for a time, strengthened
GENERAL HISTORY / 399
his party; he exerted pressure upon and persuaded
the public; he negotiated with and disciplined Con-
gress, learning continuously to compromise and ad-
just. His purpose, both in domestic and foreign
policy, remained governed by "those related con-
stants: his quest for order, his faith in power" as a
means of maintaining or imposing national and
international stability and justice. Mr. Blum sees
tragedy in the fact that "not all the techniques
mastered, not all the expert and moral men sum-
moned to advise, not all the intuition and compas-
sion, not all the adroitness in negotiation or the
measured sense of pace of change, not all the nice
perceptions about social organization subdued his
lust to rule."
3467. [Roosevelt, Theodore] Pringle, Henry F.
Theodore Roosevelt, a biography. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1931. 627 p. illus.
31-31893 E757.P96
Bibliography: p. 607-612.
A well-documented political biography of Theo-
dore Roosevelt, nearly half of which is devoted to his
years in the Presidency, 1901-9. He is characterized
here as a "violently adolescent" person, with a
genius for the picturesque, restlessly and aggressively
energetic, a jingo, an imperialist, and a conservative
who was led "into strange bypaths of political
thought" by his fury at the courts for their frequent
nullification of Rooseveltian concepts. The core of
his political philosophy is seen as "righteousness,"
coupled with "a due regard for opportunism" and
compromise. He sought the "moral regeneration of
the business world" through control of corporations,
regulation of railroads, conservation, and protection
of the rights of labor. He promoted, among other
matters, subjugation of the Philippines, limited in-
dependence for Cuba, and the construction of the
Panama Canal, besides serving as mediator in the
Russo-Japanese War. Roosevelt broke with Taft
and the Old Guard, turning to radicalism and "the
program of William Jennings Bryan and the Demo-
cratic party," in Mr. Pringle's opinion, because of
his desire to substitute control and perpetuation of
the existing order for the Stalwarts' complacency
and drift. The relationship of Roosevelt to radical-
ism and progressivism is more fully developed in
Professor George E. Mowry's Theodore Roosevelt
and the Progressive Movement (Madison, University
of Wisconsin Press, 1946. 405 p.). Roosevelt, the
author believes, served as the "advance agent of
progressivism" by his continual preaching, leaving
the work of legislation to later comers. Roosevelt
himself underwent a slow development of his ideas
and only "scaled the heights of radicalism," by plac-
ing human welfare before profits and property, in a
speech delivered at Osawatomie, Kansas, in 19 10.
Combining Hamiltonian means with Jeffersonian
ends, his New Nadonalism offered the "concept of
a master regulatory state." Mr. Carleton Putnam,
who closed a career as an airline executive in order
to undertake a full-length portrait of Roosevelt,
"done both judicially and sympathetically," has pub-
lished the first of four projected volumes: Theodore
Roosevelt, v. 1, The Formative Years, 1858-1886
(New York, Scribner, 1958. 626 p.). An impres-
sive accumulation of detail, it takes for its epigraph
a pronouncement of Roosevelt's in 1885 warning
against the tyranny of the majority in a democracy.
3468. Sullivan, Mark. Our times, 1900-1925.
New York, Scribner, 1936, ci927~35. 6 v.
51-4248 E741.S944
Contents. — 1. The turn of the century. — 2.
America finding herself. — 3. Pre-war America. — 4.
The war begins, 1909-1914. — 5. Over here, 1914-
191 8. — 6. The twenties.
A report, in the best journalistic sense, on Amer-
ican life during the years 1 900-1925, the purpose of
which "is to follow an average American through
this quarter-century of his country's history, to re-
create the flow of the days as he saw them, to picture
events in terms of their influence on him, his daily
life and ultimate destiny." Actors and events are
appraised according to their effects upon this average
man, his emotions about them, and his influence
upon them. The author has consulted not only
formal documents, newspaper files, and other
printed records, but also his own correspondence
with participants and eyewitnesses, his on-the-spot
notes, and newspaper dispatches. Politics is pre-
sented principally through the personalities of the
Presidents and other conspicuous leaders, but each is
regarded as achieving his eminence through his
fitness to represent powerful social trends. The
history of the people from 1900 to 1925, Mr. Sullivan
believes, was "determined less by politicians than by
leaders in other walks of life." American achieve-
ments were "markedly more important in the fields
of science, the invention and perfection of mechan-
ical processes, and the extension of knowledge, than
in the field of politics." Besides discussions of these,
the author offers lively descriptions of a variety of
matters such as prices, fashions, amusements, litera-
ture, music, and the theater. A noteworthy feature
of these volumes is the abundant and well-chosen
illustrations from contemporary sources.
3469. Wilson, Woodrow. Public papers. Author-
ized ed. Edited by Ray Stannard Baker and
William E. Dockl. New York, Harper, 1925-27.
6 v. in 3. 27-151 13 E660.W -22
400 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography edited by H. S. Leach: [v. 2] p.
475-506; [v- 4] P- 437-483; [v. 6] p. 543-°36-
Contents. — [v. 1-2] College and state; educa-
tional, literary and political papers (1875-1913). —
[v. 3-4] The new democracy; presidential messages,
addresses, and other papers (1913-1917). —
[v. 5-6] War and peace; presidential messages, ad-
dresses, and public papers (1917-1924).
A collection of the addresses, messages, and other
public papers of Woodrow Wilson (1856-1924),
28th President of the United States. The editors
have selected documents which best display his in-
tellectual growth and express his principles and
policies in the three fields of his greatest interest —
politics, education, and religion; they see in all a
tendency "toward social and political change, even
revolution." In Wilson's earliest writings, he is a
historian and professor of jurisprudence, the leader
of a reform movement at Princeton University, and
an advocate of education as a means to a better social
and political order. The presidential papers reveal
a resolute leader, with a sense of responsibility to
the unknown masses of men and above all to his-
tory, whose passion for peace was modified by a love
of justice. Dealing with transcendent issues, the
important public utterances of the great years of
Wilson's second administration, 1918-19, are his
finest, both in substance, and in "superb and moving
simplicity." In the editors' opinion, "general read-
ers will nowhere find a more succinct and felic-
itous presentation of the dominating American prin-
ciples and ideals of the period, or a more powerful
appeal for the realization of one of the exalted
visions of mankind."
actions. In Mr. Baker's opinion, Wilson spent 54
years "in preparation, ten in living, three in dying."
In 1885 he began a brilliant career as educator,
writer, and lecturer on history and politics, but his
labors as college professor and as president of Prince-
ton University formed a "secondary course." His
primary ambition was "to take an active, if possible
a leading, part in public life." It was natural rather
than astonishing, the author believes, that Wilson
came confidently as Democratic nominee to the
New Jersey gubernatorial race of 1910 and to the
presidential campaign of 191 2. After long years
of studying political organization, the development
of representative government, and the then current
public issues, he easily "out-generaled the most
experienced bosses, dominated his party, came early
to control Congress, and finally to stand forth pre-
eminent as a world leader." Mr. Baker thinks that,
as in his reforms at Princeton, his progressive legis-
lation at Trenton, his magnificent early record in
the Presidency, and his diplomacy in World War I,
"Wilson seemed to succeed best in his first irresist-
ible attacks — when he had his following securely
behind him." In Woodrow Wilson and the People
(Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1945. 392
p.), Professor Herbert C. F. Bell describes Wilson's
sustained effort to achieve "communion in thought
and sentiment with the rank and file of his fellow
countrymen." A somewhat highhanded crusader
who believed in his "mission," he claimed position
and responsibility as "political spokesman and ad-
viser of the people," in the faith that they would
follow the path of righteousness should the true
issues be made clear to them.
3470. [Wilson] Baker, Ray Stannard. Woodrow
Wilson; life and letters. Potomac ed. New
York, Scribner, 1946. 7 v. illus.
46-2000 E767.B16 1946
Contents. — [v. 1] Youth — Princeton, 1856—
1910. — [v. 2] Governor, 1910-1913. — [v. 3] Presi-
dent, 1913-1914. — [v. 4] Neutrality, 1914-1915. —
[v. 5] Facing war, 1915-1917. — [v. 6] War Leader,
1917-1918. — [v. 7] Armistice, Mar. i-Nov. n, 1918.
A sympathetic, massive, and painstakingly docu-
mented biography of Wilson, consisting in large
part of excerpts from the enormous collection of his
public and private papers now in the Library of
Congress. Mr. Baker had the advantage of personal
acquaintance with Wilson and of conversation and
correspondence with members of his Cabinet, mem-
bers of Congress, and others closely associated with
him at various stages of his life. The author at-
tempts "to present the man as he was" through his
own letters and memoranda, and provides only
enough of the historical setting to explain Wilson's
3471. [Wilson] Baker, Ray Stannard. Woodrow
Wilson and world settlement, written from
his unpublished and personal material. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1922. 3 v. illus.
22-23112 D644.B27
Based upon official minutes, reports, resolutions,
memorandums, and less formal sources, this is a
record of American policies and the struggle of
Woodrow Wilson and his advisers to apply them
at the Peace Conference of Paris, 1919, to the prob-
lems of the war-torn world. Baker attempts to
illumine the issues and the actions as well as to
assess defects and strengths of leadership. Volumes
I — II contain the narrative, volume III the texts of the
documents referred to or quoted in it. The author
wrote from firsthand knowledge, having studied
economic and political conditions in the allied coun-
tries during 1918, and served as a member of the
American Commission at the Conference. In an
effort to substitute a new order of mutual under-
standings for the old sanction of force, the Ameri-
GENERAL HISTORY / 4OI
cans started with principles of justice — the self-
determination of peoples, and a world association for
mutual aid and protection — and attempted to have
them applied by dispassionate scientists to a terri-
torial settlement. The Americans were handi-
capped, however, in Baker's view, by a lack of
knowledge of Europe's affairs, secret diplomacy,
traditions, and needs, and, more especially, by the
fading, both in Europe and the United States, of the
high moral enthusiasm which marked the last year
of World War I. Wilson, at the time of the armis-
tice, had been the majority leader of world opinion;
at the Peace Conference, "he was the leader of the
opposition, a powerful opposition, but undoubtedly
a minority." Although written first, this came to
form the last part of Baker's Woodrow Wilson: Life
and Letters. In Wilson and the Peacemakers (New
York, Macmillan, 1947. 2 v. in 1), a critical ^in-
terpretation of our participation in the making of
the world setdement of 19 19 and of American fail-
ure to honor Wilson's pledges, Thomas A. Bailey
distinguishes between the cause of our entry into
World War I — to defend the American principle of
freedom of the seas — and the objectives of the
peace — to save the world from Prussian autocracy, to
make the world safe for democracy, and to end all
wars. Wilson's aims were pitched too high, he be-
lieves, and did not command the support of the
American people. Although Professor Bailey is in
complete sympathy with Wilson's broad program
and with his vision for the future, he finds that the
President was tactless, stubborn, and unrealistic.
In the author's opinion, American reservations about
the Treaty of Versailles should have been resolved
by compromise. "The United States had a world to
gain and virtually nothing to lose by joining the
League of Nations."
3472. [Wilson] Link, Arthur S. Wilson. Prince-
ton, Princeton University Press, 1947-56. 2
v. ill us. 47-3554 E767.L65
Contents. — [1] The road to the White House. —
[2] The new freedom.
Bibliography: v. [1], p. [529H43; v. [2], p.
[4731-488.
The first volumes in a large-scale and elaborately
documented series devoted to a study of the life and
times of Woodrow Wilson. In his analysis of
Wilson's presidency of Princeton University (1902-
10) Professor Link discovers a pattern of early
success in reorganizing the university, increasing
pressure for reform, resultant disharmony and frus-
tration, and, in 1910, defeat; he calls this pattern
"the microcosm of a later macrocosm." Wilson's
entry into politics in 1910 as gubernatorial candidate
of the conservative New Jersey Democratic machine,
431240—00 27
his disregard of the party leaders, and his victorious
emergence from the campaign as one of the foremost
progressive Democrats, the author considers "one
of the miracles of modern politics." The second
volume covers only the first two years of the Wilson
administration, the New Freedom phase (1913-14)
when tariff, tax, and currency reforms and antitrust
legislation were enacted in answer to the demands
of public opinion. Wilson's greatest contribution,
his expansion and perfection of the powers of the
Presidency, he achieved by asserting his position as
spokesman of the people, by using public opinion as
a spur to Congress, by affirming and establishing
leadership of Congress, and by seizing party leader-
ship.
3473- [Wilson] Link, Arthur S. Woodrow Wil-
son and the progressive era, 1910-1917.
New York, Harper, 1954. xvii, 331 p. illus. (The
New American Nation series) 53-1 1849 E766.L5
"Essays on sources": p. 283-313.
A compact treatment of the political and diplo-
matic history of the United States from the begin-
ning of the split in the Republican Party in 1910 to
the Nation's entry into World War I in 1917, based
on Professor Link's research for his monumental
biography of Wilson (q. v.). After surveying briefly
the political situation of 1910, the various shades of
progressivism, and the issues involved in the elec-
tion of 1912, the author offers a closely reasoned
analysis of Wilson's initial legislative program
whereby he secured lowered tariff rates, the enact-
ment of an income tax system, creation of the Federal
Trade Commission, and, "crowning achievement of
the first Wilson administration," the Federal Reserve
System. Wilson's foreign policy, especially toward
Latin America, Professor Link explains in terms of
inherited commitments and problems, a sub-
conscious "missionary impulse," naivete, and impe-
rialism, as well as a conscious ambition to be just,
and to advance the causes of peace, democracy, and
Christianity. In the author's opinion, Wilson
found neither Great Britain nor Germany fighting
the Great War for worthy objectives. It was "the
German decision to gamble on all-out victory or
complete ruin" which finally compelled Wilson to
take the drastic action leading to war.
3474. Wish, Harvey. Contemporary America, the
national scene since 1900. Rev. ed. New
York, Harper, 1955. 714 p. illus.
54-11008 E741.W78 1955
Bibliography: p. 683-699.
First published in 1948.
Based upon the urban approach to culture, this
history of 20th-century America examines the trends
among arts and sciences as well as politics and ceo-
402 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
nomics for clues to national motivation and the di-
rection in which our civilization is moving.
"Among the useful concepts of cultural integration,"
the author observes, "have been, first of all, the im-
pact of the metropolis and technology upon our be-
havior, the rise, decline, and revival of the business-
man's leadership in politics and popular culture,
the diffusion of foreign as well as indigenous ideas
here, and the basic patterns of diplomatic policies."
He notes a general faith in progress and the promise
of American life, an acquiescence in urban domi-
nance, an unfortunate encouragement of a standard-
ized culture through "socially unregulated tech-
nology," a tendency toward concentration in
businesses, and a steady growth of mass production.
"Since the beginning of the century," Professor
Wish believes, "a richer, more powerful, and more
equitable society had emerged."
K. Since
1920
3475. Adams, Samuel Hopkins. Incredible era;
the life and times of Warren Gamaliel Hard-
ing. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 456 p. illus.
39-3°355 E786.A34
Bibliography: p.4434445].
A newspaperman's biography of Warren Gamaliel
Harding (1865-1923) based less upon authoritative
documents, most of which had been destroyed by
the time of writing, than upon "word-of-mouth testi-
mony" from informants, many of whom have pre-
ferred to remain anonymous. It also relies heavily
upon an unpublished University of Syracuse dis-
sertation by Dr. Harold F. Alderfer, "The Person-
ality and Politics of Warren G. Harding." Mr.
Adams regards the controversial, Ohio-born Presi-
dent as an attractive, warm, even endearing
individual, if indifferently educated and imprecise
of mind. To him Americanism and Republicanism
were inseparable. His career in state politics was
insignificant; his term in the United States Senate,
1915-21, was easygoing and negative. Unhampered
by principles, he was a "pliant lay-figure for his
party, raised to unexpected authority." In 1920 he
became President through the efforts of Harry M.
Daugherty, whose political protege he was, and of
the Senate oligarchy, whose creature he was expected
to become. Harding's "conception of public service
was to give a friend a job," and thereafter to de-
pend upon his loyalty. Unfortunately for the Na-
tion, the President made "dreadful errors in the
choice of friends and lieutenants."
3476. Allen, Frederick Lewis. The lords of crea-
tion. New York, Harper, 1935. 483 p.
35-20649 HG181.A57
"Sources and obligations": p. 465-473.
"This book is an attempt to tell the story of the
immense financial and corporate expansion which
took place in the United States between the depres-
sion of the eighteen-nineties and the crisis of the
nineteen-thirties; to show how profoundly it altered
the circumstances and quality of American life, why
and how it ended in collapse, and what the collapse
means to all of us." The why is of course stated in
economic terms — "the era of high finance had so
swollen the mass of claims upon the future that only
roaring prosperity could sustain it; and the effort
to sustain it even at the cost of purchasing power un-
dermined the foundations of that prosperity" — but
the whole development is related with so pervasive
a sense of its interconnections with the rest of the
national life that it is best regarded as a contribution
to general history, and an unusually successful ven-
ture in placing contemporary history in perspective.
3477. Allen, Frederick Lewis. Only yesterday; an
informal history of the nineteen-twenties.
New York, Harper, 193 1. xiv, 370 p. illus.
31-28421 E741.A64
"Sources and obligations": p. 358-361.
3478. Allen, Frederick Lewis. Since yesterday;
the nineteen-thirties in America, September
3, 1929-September 3, 1939. New York, Harper,
1940. xiv, 362 p. illus. 40-27130 E741.A66
"Sources and obligations": p. 347-352.
Only Yesterday is a lively social panorama of the
years November 11, 1918-November 23, 1929, form-
ing an era between the close of World War I and
the disastrous termination of "The Big Bull Market"
on the New York Stock Exchange. Chapters I — III
describe the American temper in the aftermath of
war, 1918-20: the ebbing of wartime idealism, the
slow death of the Wilson dream of a new world
order, the Red scare and its attendant strikes, riots,
and bombings, and the resulting Palmer raids, hys-
teria, and superpatriotism. Chapters IV-XI charac-
terize the peacetime frame of mind: disillusionment;
a sense of life's futility; and a desire both for enter-
tainment and for excitement, through fads, dramatic
events, scandals and crimes, sports, and such tech-
nological novelties as tabloids, radio, airplanes, and
GENERAL HISTORY / 403
automobiles; together with a new freedom of man-
ners, morals, thinking, and dress, induced by "the
war neurosis," Freud, prohibition, lurid magazines,
motion pictures, and the like. The three final chap-
ters deal with the boom and subsequent crash of
the New York stock market. Rather more con-
ventionally organized, the sequel, Since Yesterday,
continues the chronicle to the outbreak of World
War II, September 3, 1939. Because he wishes "to
give some idea of the high place from which the
country fell during the economic collapse of 1929-
32," Mr. Allen begins his narrative "with a study of
things as they were on September 3, 1929." He
stresses particularly as the heart of his story "the
enormous economic and political transformation
which took place," and tells it in terms of New Deal
experiments, reforms in regulation and compulsion,
subsidies, the rise of secular "religions of social
salvation," pump-priming, and "economic royalism."
3479. Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard.
America in midpassage. New York, Mac-
millan, 1939. 977 p. {His The Rise of American
civilization, v. 3) 39-11429 £169.1.6274
About two-thirds of this massive survey of Amer-
ican life and thought in the 1920's and 30's is de-
voted to political and economic history, the remain-
der to social and cultural affairs. Coolidge is viewed
as an apostle of thrift, prudence, and simplicity, to
whom both the domestic and foreign oudook ap-
peared "fair with prosperity and assurance," and
Hoover as a firm believer in capitalism, foreign trade,
and foreign investment. The administrations of
both are shown to have favored the powerful busi-
ness elements by special policies and by letting them
alone in most of their operations. Yet, "under the
most beneficient auspices," business was over-
whelmed by panic and depression in 1929-32, and
its leaders turned for succor to the Roosevelt admin-
istration during 1933 "in a spirit of cheerful com-
pliance," which, however, rapidly dwindled. Presi-
dent Roosevelt nevertheless continued to act on his
"conviction that it was the function of statesman-
ship to bring the real into closer conformity to the
ideal — the conception of humanistic democracy."
The discussion of contemporary entertainment cen-
ters in its sociology and its relation to economics and
politics, that of the arts in their social concerns and
their embodiment of the hurried and harried spirit
of the age, and that of science in the advance and
application of invention and discovery.
3480. [Coolidge] Fuess, Claude M. Calvin Cool-
idge, the man from Vermont. Boston, Lit-
tle, Brown, 1940. 522 p. illus.
40-27145 E792.F85
Bibliography: p. [50i]-504.
A very sympathetic biography of that apostle of
common sense and hard work, Calvin Coolidge
( 1 872-1933), 30th President of the United States,
tracing in great detail the Yankee heritage and en-
vironment that produced his laconic speech, frugal-
ity, industry, "conservative distrust of foreigners
and innovations," caution, and "limited" oudook.
His education at Amherst College, the author be-
lieves, was responsible for "many of Coolidge's ideas,
perhaps his entire political philosophy." By 1905
Coolidge was known in Northampton, Massachu-
setts, "as a shrewd politician, a good vote-getter, a
chap who might possibly become Mayor or even go
to Congress"; and in 1915, Frank W. Stearns, at-
tracted by Coolidge's public record, not only pushed
his campaign for Lieutenant Governor, but also
wrote prophetically, "later, of course, he must be
Governor and still later President." The author
considers Coolidge an astute judge of men, a keen
but ethical politician, and a "first-class" executive,
whose accomplishments were chiefly negative: he
checked the Boston police strike; he prevented waste
and extravagance; and he blocked unwise legislation
in Congress. Dr. Fuess' article, "Calvin Coolidge —
Twenty Years After," in the Proceedings of the
American Antiquarian Society, v. 63, Oct. 21, 1953
(Worcester, Mass., 1954), p. 351-369, summarizes
the reasons why he continues to believe that Calvin
Coolidge ranks with John Quincy Adams, Hayes,
and Cleveland, men "whose integrity and general
record have made them stand out more for what
they were than for what they did," and that Cool-
idge deserves our respect and admiration.
3481. [Coolidge] White, William Allen. A Puri-
tan in Babylon, the story of Calvin Coolidge.
New York, Macmillan, 1938. xvi, 460 p.
38-34760 E792.W577
A study of the years of the great speculative boom,
1923-29, as well as a life of Calvin Coolidge, "an
old-fashioned, God-fearing primitive Puritan demo-
crat." "The reaction of this obviously limited but
honest, shrewd, sentimental American primitive to
those gorgeous and sophisticated times — his White
House years — furnished material for a study of
American life as reflected in American business and
American politics." This Yankee mystic, partisan
Republican, and self-consecrated public servant
"learned to love his party as a source of power, power
for him, power for what he regarded as good gov-
ernment, the rule of the well-to-do; brains in short."
Lacking in perspective and detachment, and quite
unprepared to manage the speculative orgy entered
into by a runaway finance capitalism, he played
down the Teapot Dome scandals, announced that
"the business of America is business," and pursued
404 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
a cheap money policy which reduced the national
debt but facilitated the "Coolidge bull market." In
1928, "while the market was careening around like
an untamed skyrocket, the President with his ha-
bitual avoidance of unnecessary responsibility went
right on letting things go." If Andrew Mellon was
his "bad angel," the United States Chamber of Com-
merce was his "alter ego." In all this, as the author
declares, he was but reflecting the lust for prosperity
which filled the American heart, and "following the
democratic vision of the America of his age." The
Autobiography of Calvin Coolidge (New York, Cos-
mopolitan Book Corp., 1929. 246 p.) is a character-
istically brief, restrained, and prudent recital of the
author's credo and the main events of his life.
3482. Donovan, Robert J. Eisenhower: the inside
story. New York, Harper, 1956. xviii,
423 p. illus. 56-9653 E835.D6
A detailed, apparendy uncensored, and candid,
yet objective report of the actions taken by the Eisen-
hower administration during the initial three years
(1953-55) of the President's first term, by a Wash-
ington correspondent who has had access to White
House memorandums, minutes of Cabinet meet-
ings, and the like, and has obtained interviews with
key officials. The quoted conversations and discus-
sions bear the mark of authenticity. Mr. Eisen-
hower (b. 1890) is portrayed as a "man of good
will," if limited in his contacts with civilian life,
who has attempted to fulfill campaign commitments
and "to go down the middle" of the road. He
strengthened the organization of the executive
branch and moved "to eliminate corruption from the
government." At the President's request, Mr. Don-
ovan notes, Congress broadened social security,
adopted a new farm program, approved the St.
Lawrence Seaway, and liberalized the Atomic En-
ergy Act. Besides the successes, the author records
the difficulties — conflicts of interest, congressional
investigations, book burnings, the failure to enact
Hawaiian statehood — and Mr. Eisenhower's reac-
tions to both. Less intimate and immediate, but
written in diary form with entries running from
May 1950 to December 1955, is The Eisenhower
Years, by Richard H. Rovere (New York, Farrar,
Straus & Cudahy, 1956. 390 p.) It consists of the
author's interpretative journalism contributed to
The New Yorker, The Reporter, and Harper's dur-
ing the period, and emphasizes foreign policy and
the activities of Senator McCarthy, admittedly at the
expense of economic issues. Kenneth S. Davis'
Soldier of Democracy [new ed.] (Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 577 p.) is a sympathetic
yet judicious biography which interprets General
Eisenhower's life and career as symbols of American
democracy and the American success story. The lat-
ter half of the book deals with his World War II
command.
3483. Feis, Herbert. The road to Pearl Harbor;
the coming of the war between the United
States and Japan. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1950. 356 p. 50-9585 D753.F4
A history of the diplomatic relations, chiefly be-
tween the United States and Japan, leading to
American entry into World War II, from "the
dreary years of the mid-thirties" to December 7,
1 94 1, with a narrative in great detail from April
1940. It is based upon archives of the Department
of State, the records of the International Military
Tribunal for the Far East, the papers of President
Roosevelt, Secretaries Henry L. Stimson and Henry
Morgenthau, Jr., and Ambassador Joseph C. Grew,
as well as other documents, and conversations with
several American officials concerned. Professor Feis
holds that, although by 1937 Japan had conquered
large areas of Asia's mainland, the country still
lacked means to achieve its needs and ambitions, and
what means it had were jeopardized by the depres-
sion. Rather than see Japan lose status, the army
and "excitedly patriotic youth" preferred to extend
its empire. The advance was to be managed, the
author believes, through strategy — deceit and per-
suasion— because of Japanese vulnerability, but the
design failed. War came because, rather than yield
to those whom she had tried to outwit, Japan threw
herself against them. America's principal object was
to keep out of trouble, and for a time, the "policy of
existing as a great power, without acting like one,
seemed to work well."
3484. Goldman, Eric F. The crucial decade:
America, 1945-1955. New York, Knopf,
1956. 298 p. 55-9285 E813.G6
A Princeton professor of history seeks to give
meaning to the 10 years following V-J day by plac-
ing "events in the larger perspective." He has sub-
mitted portions of his narrative to some 80 prom-
inent participants in the events, thereby catching
"many genuine errors." The seven Truman years
are treated in greater detail than the three Eisen-
hower years. The author's cinematic technique
vividly recreates the march of crowded events which
most of his readers will remember, and evokes the
state of the public mind upon which they im-
pinged. He disclaims partisanship, but his view-
point is definitely left of center: this was, in essence,
"an era in the national life when, for all minority
groups, for all lower-status Americans, the social
and economic walls were coming tumbling down."
After 1952 the Eisenhower administration buffered
GENERAL HISTORY / 405
"the exultant thrust of the right-wing Republicans,"
and contributed to the emergence of a national con-
sensus on long-term welfare policies. Despite fre-
quent bewilderment and some petulance, the author
thinks, the American people are "proving mature
enough to perform that most difficult of tasks — ad-
justing rapidly to the irritatingly and the frighten-
ingly new."
3485. Hoover, Herbert C. Memoirs. New York,
Macmillan, 1951-52. 3 v. illus.
51-13301 E802.H7
Contents. — v. 1. Years of adventure, 1874—
1920. — [v. 2] The Cabinet and the Presidency,
1920-1933. — [v. 3] The Great Depression, 1929-
1941.
The autobiography of the 31st President of the
United States, Herbert Clark Hoover (born 1874).
The portions dealing with the years since 1919 were
written fairly soon after the occurrence of the events
described. Arranged topically within a rough
chronological order, these chapters express the au-
thor's semicontemporary impressions, which he has
evidently seen no reason to alter. The first third
of volume I deals with Mr. Hoover's boyhood in
Iowa and Oregon, his education at Stanford Uni-
versity, and his highly successful pre-World War I
career as a mining engineer and engineering con-
sultant; the remainder tells the impressive story of
Belgian relief, the United States Food Adminis-
tration, and other activities connected with postwar
European relief and reconstruction. Volume II
relates the public career of Mr. Hoover from his
return to the United States in 1919, through his
administration of the Department of Commerce,
1921-28, and through the development, reforms,
and foreign policy of his term in the Presidency,
1929-32. Volume III is devoted to the Great De-
pression, the election of 1932, and "the continuation
of the Depression from Mr. Roosevelt's inaugura-
tion in 1933 until 1941." Much of it is polemical
in purpose. David Hinshaw's informal, anecdotal,
and interpretative biography, Herbert Hoover:
American Quaker (New York, Farrar, Straus,
1950. xx, 469 p.), stresses the spiritual, moral, and
intellectual qualities of his friend and fellow Quaker,
who believes passionately "in the essential goodness
of people, in liberty and freedom; in democracy
and in God's unfolding purpose for man." The
author extols Mr. Hoover's "matchless integrity,"
great ability, and selfless public service; he seeks
to explode "the myth of the Hoover-caused de-
pression"; deplores "the Democratic party's smear-
Hoover campaign" of 1932; and states that the
President's recovery program had checked the de-
pression by midsummer 1932.
3486. [Hoover] Myers, William Starr, and Wal-
ter H. Newton. The Hoover administra-
tion; a documented narrative. New York, Scribner,
1936. 553 p. 36-27108 E801.M94
Based upon Herbert Hoover's diaries and other
data, "this is American history, as seen from the
vantage point of the White House." Opinions and
policies cited as his are from his own public or
private declarations; comment of the authors has
been kept to a bare "explanation of those forces
which formed the background for the actions
taken." The material is presented in the form of
an almost daily log. Part I, "The Battle on a
Hundred Fronts," comprising about two-thirds of
the book, deals with crisis and depression measures.
Here, it is stated: "The forces of depression were
definitely checked and the road to full recovery was
freed from obstacles during the Hoover Admin-
istration." Part II is devoted to "The Normal Tasks
of Administration." The authors believe that Mr.
Hoover's "claim to statesmanship is secure." Mr.
Myers' companion volume, The Foreign Policies
of Herbert Hoover, 1929-19 3 3 (New York, Scribner,
1940. 259 p.), repairs the omission of foreign
affairs from the earlier work; it surveys Mr.
Hoover's "far-reaching plans for the advancement
of the interests of the United States, and for the
furtherance of the cause of peace and human
happiness throughout the world." It presents a
somewhat rosy view of a period during which, under
the impact of worldwide depression, international
relations continued to deteriorate.
3487. [Hoover] Wilbur, Ray Lyman, and Ar-
thur Mastick Hyde. The Hoover policies.
New York, Scribner, 1937. 667 p.
37-32i53 E801.W55
A massive exposition of President Hoover's prin-
ciples and policies both in philosophy of govern-
ment and in action. The authors, who were
both members of his Cabinet, vigorously advocate
the "traditional American principles, courageously
and ably led by Herbert Hoover." He had as his
goal advancement of the public welfare "within the
framework of strong local as well as Federal Gov-
ernment and the development of understanding and
voluntary cooperative action among free men."
His doctrines and the actions taken are indicated
mainly through quotations from his state papers
and published reports, arranged in a rough his-
torical sequence, together with explanatory and
connective text supplied by the authors. The topics
treated include measures of social, economic, com-
munications, conservation and reclamation, regula-
tory, fiscal, relief, and foreign policy.
406 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3488. Leighton, Isabel, ed. The aspirin age, 191 9-
194 1. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1949.
491 p. 49-9336 E169.1.L526
The era between World Wars I and II is here
presented in terms of significant, typical, or fantastic
events, and the personalities who most strongly chal-
lenged the American imagination. The 22 chapters
have been contributed by well-known authors, some
of whom participated in the affairs described, while
others were reporters on the scene or specially quali-
fied observers. Hodding Carter, for example, a
fighter in the struggle against the Louisiana poli-
tician, writes the chapter, "Huey Long: American
Dictator," and Gene Tunney describes "My Fights
with Jack Dempsey." Each chapter of 20 or 30
pages, preceded by a vignette of the author, charac-
terizes a notable occurrence or person of a given
year, from 19 19 ("The Forgotten Men of Ver-
sailles," by Harry Hansen) to 1941 ("Pearl Harbor
Sunday: The End of an Era," by Jonathan Daniels).
The title derives from the editor's observation:
"During these throbbing years we searched in vain
for a cure-all, coming no closer to it than the aspirin
bottle."
3489. Link, Arthur S. American epoch; a history
of the United States since the 1890's. New
York, Knopf, 1955. xxii, 724, xxxvii p. illus.
54-13244 E741.L55
Bibliography: p. [7051-724.
Recent techniques make possible the printing in
one volume of what a few decades ago would
have been a 2- or 3-volume work; this is history on
a generous scale, and illustrated with abundant
photographs, maps, and graphs. It is also many-
sided history, with balanced attention to demo-
graphic, business-cycle, foreign-policy, social, and
cultural factors. It has a strongly defined point of
view, interpreting the whole period primarily in
terms of "the progressive movement," and presenting
Theodore Roosevelt, Wilson, Franklin Roosevelt,
and Truman as the leaders of its successive phases.
A striving after clarity and finality of judgment
gives an occasional impression of dogmatic cock-
sureness, but there is an impressive amount of
thoroughly organized information. Intended for
the general reader, it is also usable as an advanced
college text.
3490. Lyons, Eugene. The red decade, the Stalin-
ist penetration of America. Indianapolis,
Bobbs-Merrill, 1941. 423 p.
41-51867 HX86.L97
This book, ready for press just as Nazi Germany
invaded Russia (1941) in World War II, offered the
timely message that Communist Party propaganda,
"always and unswervingly, is determined by the
Kremlin's needs and the Kremlin's instructions,"
and has not the remotest relation to American in-
terests. "Stalin's Fifth Column in America, as in
all other nations, has only one set of 'principles':
blind obedience to the will of Moscow. It has
only one 'ideal': allegiance to a foreign dictator."
Deliberately polemic in spirit, this work is intended
as "an informal account of Bolshevism in our coun-
try" during the years 1930-40. At its height in
1938, "the incredible revolution of the Red Decade
had mobilized the conscious or the starry-eyed, in-
nocent collaboration of thousands of influential
American educators, social workers, clergymen,
New Deal officials, youth leaders, Negro and other
racial spokesmen, Social Registerites, novelists, Hol-
lywood stars, script writers and directors, trade-
union chiefs, men and women of abnormal wealth."
It could not safely be ignored, since "our labor
movement, politics, art, culture, and vocabulary
still [1941] carry its imprint." Mr. Lyons, a natu-
ralized Russian, believed the Great Depression to
have been far more potent in shaping this phe-
nomenon than "any of the masterminds on New
York's Union Square."
3491. Perkins, Dexter. The new age of Franklin
Roosevelt, 1932-45. [Chicago] University
of Chicago Press, 1957. 193 p. (The Chicago
history of American civilization)
56-11263 E806.P465
"Suggested reading": p. 176-181.
A survey of the great changes instituted during
the Roosevelt era which "emphasized, as never
before, the dynamic role of the federal government,"
and introduced a wholly new and positive concept
of its responsibility: to relieve want and unem-
ployment through Federal agencies, to provide for
the farmer a larger share of the national product,
to develop national resources on a grand scale, to
maintain industrial peace, and to operate the Na-
tion's credit system. Professor Perkins cites as
examples of the substantial alterations produced in
the socioeconomic order by the New Deal the ad-
vance of industrial unionism, the new political power
of the farmer, and the increased self-awareness and
influence of the dispossessed and underprivileged.
Such alterations Roosevelt viewed with sympathy
and hope. Absolving the President of both radical-
ism and autocracy, the author terms him a "tran-
scendent success" on the domestic front and con-
cludes that his broad view of Federal authority "has
been sustained by time." However, the consolida-
tion of the Good Neighbor policy toward Latin
America was his only great achievement in foreigr
affairs. In Mr. Perkins' opinion, Roosevelt quickly
and fully grasped the implications of the Nazi
GENERAL HISTORY / 407
advance, but in action he was vacillating, and too
often heeded "the siren voice of political oppor-
tunism."
3492. Rauch, Basil. The history of the New Deal,
1933-1938. New York, Creative Age Press,
1944. 368 p. 44-8426 E806.R3
A study of the political philosophy and the eco-
nomic policies of the Roosevelt administration
during its first five years, based principally upon
published official documents. The author believes
that "experimental evolution is the key to under-
standing the history of the New Deal," and that
a fundamental change occurred in 1934, the im-
portance of which "justifies the designations First
New Deal and Second New Deal." Grounded on
a philosophy of economic nationalism and scarcity,
the conservative "First" New Deal had recovery
through higher prices as its primary aim and bene-
fited mainly big business and the large farmers.
The "Second" New Deal, initiated in 1934 as a
deliberate reorientation, and manifesting a liberal
philosophy of economic cooperation and economic
abundance, had betterment through increased pur-
chasing power and social security for all as its
goal, and favored labor and smaller farmers. It
"fundamentally altered and in some cases reversed"
"First" New Deal policies and legislation in the
fields of agriculture, industry, labor, tariff, money,
and unemployment relief.
3493. Roosevelt, Franklin D. F. D. R.: his per-
sonal letters. Foreword by Eleanor Roose-
velt; edited by Elliott Roosevelt. New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce, 1947-50. 4 v. illus.
47-11935 E807.R649
A chronologically arranged, carefully annotated
collection of the personal correspondence of Frank-
lin D. Roosevelt (1882-1945), together with ex-
planatory connective text, published by the family
as a service to historians, educators, and those who
felt he "was in truth their friend." Volume I
contains all of the early surviving letters, from the
first childish communication dated 1887 to a note
informing Endicott Peabody, headmaster of Groton
School, of his engagement to Eleanor Roosevelt in
1904. These letters, addressed chiefly to "My
Dearest Mama and Papa," are valuable in reflecting
formative influences upon the youth, in the Hudson
Valley and at Groton and Harvard. Since his
letters written in the years 1905-28 were ill pre-
served, volume II contains far less but very im-
portant material. Here are exhibited not only his
growth in political experience as State senator and
as Assistant Secretary of the Navy, but also the
strengthening of his character during his long and
courageous struggle against poliomyelitis. Volumes
III-IV cover the years 1928-45, when Roosevelt
served first as Governor of New York (1929-32)
and then as President of the United States (1933-
45), and had less time for family affairs; they differ
in character from the earlier volumes, containing
"whatever family letters are available," but largely
made up of correspondence, memorandums, and
other messages to other persons concerning public
matters. Of necessity selective, since much of the
latter material is restricted for various reasons, these
volumes are intended to illustrate White House
routines, various facets of the President's personality,
and his relationships to his close associates.
3494. Roosevelt, Franklin D. The Roosevelt
reader; selected speeches, messages, press
conferences, and letters of Franklin D. Roosevelt.
Edited and with an introd. by Basil Rauch. New
York, Rinehart, 1957. 391 p.
57-3088 E742.5.R65
Selected bibliography: p. xiii-xiv.
A selection from Roosevelt's writings, "designed
to reduce the hazard of quantity to proportions
reasonable enough to appeal to general readers as
well as to more specialized students of American
history." The material is intended "to reveal the
qualities of Roosevelt's mind, character, and per-
sonality, as clues to the leadership which made them
important." Because, in Professor Rauch's opinion,
they constitute "his supreme acts of leadership" and
were in very large part the instrumentalities of his
renovation of this country's domestic and foreign
policies, Roosevelt's great political speeches are
accorded the most space. From transcripts of 986
press conferences "a generous lot of culled passages
is offered," as giving "the most intimate perceptions
of his leadership," as well as of "his tremendous
talent for statesmanship by improvisation." His
letters, considered disappointing by this editor, are
only sparsely represented. The Roosevelt Treasury,
edited by James N. Rosenau (Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1951. 461 p.), is an anthology of de-
scriptions and recollections by persons who knew
him or had dealings with him, such as Josephus
Daniels, Raymond Moley, Grace Tully, Winston
Churchill, and Edward J. Flynn, together with some
autobiographical passages by F. D. himself. Part
I indicates the highlights of Roosevelt's preparation;
part II suggests the personal qualities that either
aided or hampered his effectiveness; and part III
shows him in action in the various capacities re-
quired of presidential leadership. Roosevelt is "the
hero rather than the subject" of an anthology edited
by Milton Crane, The Roosevelt Era (New York,
Boni & Gaer, 1947. xiv, 626 p.), since its contents
are the "thoughts, writings, and actions which his
personality helped to shape." In an effort "to
408 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
assemble a coherent and connected group of
materials for a social history of the age," Mr. Crane
has gathered the work, serious, humorous, or senti-
mental, of journalists, poets, dramatists, politicians,
and novelists. Represented are writers as diverse as
Carl Sandburg, H. L. Mencken, Thurman Arnold,
John Steinbeck, E. B. White, Erskine Caldwell, and
A. J. Liebling.
3495. [Roosevelt, Franklin D.] Freidel, Frank
B. Franklin D. Roosevelt. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1952-56. 3 v. illus. 52-5521 E807.F74
Includes bibliographical references.
Contents. — 1. The apprenticeship. — 2. The
ordeal. — 3. The triumph.
3496. Burns, James MacGregor. Roosevelt: the
lion and the fox. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1956. 553 p. illus. 56-7920 E807.B835
In the first half of a projected six-volume biog-
raphy, Professor Freidel sets forth in great detail
the life of Franklin D. Roosevelt, from his school
days at Groton to his victory in the presidential
election of 1932. This monumental work relies
heavily upon the Roosevelt papers and other docu-
ments, as well as the published memoirs of his col-
leagues and the recorded reminiscences of his asso-
ciates, and quotes very generously from them. The
author traces the development of Roosevelt's
character and traits, his concepts and ideals evalu-
ating them and showing how they affected his ac-
tions, and offers a lucid and penetrating analysis
of the political record. This began in 191 1 when
Roosevelt attempted to rally progressive Democrats
against Tammany domination in the New York
State Senate, and emerged "a new political lumi-
nary." Behind his complex political programs were
"the firm humanitarian tradition, Christian faith,
and sense of noblesse oblige that he had inherited
from his parents and learned from Endicott Peabody
of Groton and Theodore Roosevelt. His were the
background and attitudes, and the aspirations, to
point him toward greatness." Nearly three-quarters
of Professor Burns' political biography of Roosevelt
is a study of his leadership in the Presidency to 1940,
his aims and methods, his successes and failures.
The author views Roosevelt's personality as emi-
nently practical and flexible, if infinitely complex,
and even contradictory. "He had no over-all plans
to remake America but a host of projects to improve
this or that situation. He was a creative thinker in
a 'gadget' sense: immediate steps to solve specific
day-to-day problems." In Professor Burns' opinion,
Roosevelt could dramatize the significance of the big
decisive event — the depression, naked aggression
abroad — but when the crisis was less striking, if no
less serious, he was unsuccessful, as in the Supreme
Court packing, the congressional purge, and his
efforts to convince public opinion of the need for
collective security. Less a great creative executive
than a skilled manipulator and brilliant interpreter,
"he was always a superb tactician, and sometimes
a courageous leader, but he failed to achieve that
combination of tactical skill and strategic planning
that represents the acme of political leadership."
3497. [Roosevelt, Franklin D.j Fusfeld, Daniel
R. The economic thought of Franklin D.
Roosevelt and the origins of the New Deal. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1956, °i954-
337 p. (Columbia studies in the social sciences, no.
586) 55-9065 H31.C7, no. 586
Bibliography: p. [305J-320.
This Columbia University dissertation is "a study
of Roosevelt's economic philosophy: its sources in
F. D. R.'s family background and education and in
the Progressivism of Theodore Roosevelt and
Woodrow Wilson; its development under the impact
of contemporary economic problems and their pro-
posed solutions; and its culmination in the political
programs advocated by Roosevelt." The author
observes that two important points emerge from
his study: "In the first place, Roosevelt's thought
was derived primarily from the climate of opinion of
his time, out of which F. D. R. selected some ideas
and rejected others," rather than from systematic
study of the writings of philosophers, economists,
or political theorists. "Secondly, F. D. R. was a
man with a tremendously complex personality and
a highly intricate system of beliefs." Dr. Fusfeld
quotes Roosevelt's statements, places them "in the
context of the ideas, political controversies, and
problems of his time," and allows "the varied threads
of his economic thought to emerge in all their
complexity, complete or incomplete, consistent or
inconsistent." Roosevelt, the author believes, was
essentially a reformer, who accepted the concept
of free enterprise but wanted to improve its per-
formance, especially by means of planning and of
Government responsibility for the functioning of
the economy.
3498. [Roosevelt, Franklin D.] Ickes, Harold L.
The secret diary of Harold L. Ickes. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1953-54. 3 v*
53—9701 E806.I2
Contents. — [v. 1] The first thousand days, 1933-
1936. — v. 2. The inside struggle, 1936-1939. — v. 3.
The lowering clouds, 1939-1941.
This is both the personal report of Harold L. Ickes
and an intimate history of the Roosevelt adminis-
tration for the years 1933-41. Having had his
official acts, interviews, and meetings carefully noted
as they occurred, Mr. Ickes made weekly dictations
GENERAL HISTORY / 4O9
of the full text of his diary and then destroyed the
preliminary materials. Since it was thus written in
the heat of the moment, and no amplifications or
corrections were later made, the diary retains its
immediacy and also its controversial attitude. The
author presents his versions of battles and skirmishes
within the administration over public works policies
and projects, conservation, reclamation, slum clear-
ance, politics, foreign affairs, the Supreme Court,
and Government reorganization. Beginning with
1936, the journal reflects a shift in emphasis from
domestic to foreign concerns as the dangers of the
depression were superseded by those of war.
Throughout, Mr. Ickes comments vigorously and
candidly upon the President, fellow Cabinet mem-
bers, and other public figures. Frances Perkins,
who served as Industrial Commissioner when Roose-
velt was Governor of New York and as Secretary of
Labor during his whole Presidency, contributes
sympathetic, honest, and perceptive reminiscences
of him in The Roosevelt I Knew (New York, Viking
Press, 1946. 408 p.). "The core of Roosevelt's
character was viability — a capacity for living and
growing." This quality, she thinks, "accounts for
his rise from a rather unpromising young man to
a great man." In a large-scale biography which
incorporates much personal knowledge, The Demo-
cratic Roosevelt (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1957. 712 p.), Rexford Guy Tugwell, who served
as a member of the "Brain Trust" during Roose-
velt's first term, provides new information con-
cerning it as well as a highly personal interpreta-
tion of the President's thoughts and motives. Mr.
Tugwell discovers as the most persistent elements
in Roosevelt's character and career his belief "in
an external guidance" and his sense of "a command-
ing destiny" toward which he progressed with a
"ferocious drive."
3499. f Roosevelt, Franklin D.] Sherwood, Robert
E. Roosevelt and Hopkins, an intimate his-
tory. Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1950. xix,
1002 p. illus. 50-6867 E807.S45 1950
First published in 1948.
Based largely upon Harry Hopkins' personal and
public papers, this is a history of American partici-
pation in World War II told in terms of Hopkins'
relationship to Franklin D. Roosevelt, and his war-
time activities as presidential aide. The author, also
a White House familiar, contributes generously of
his own reminiscences. The bulk of this important
book deals in great detail with the political, diplo-
matic, and military affairs of the prewar and war
years: the fight for lend-lease; aid to Great Britain,
Russia, and China; the Atlantic Charter; and, for
the 44 months after the attack of December 7, 1941,
on Pearl Harbor, the massive military effort exerted
in 240 — co 28
against the Axis Powers by the Allied Nations.
Roosevelt and Churchill demonstrated "politico-
military leadership on a global scale." Wanting
nothing except to serve, Harry Hopkins acted as
Roosevelt's personal negotiator with Churchill,
Beaverbrook, Stalin, De Gaulle, and others, and,
at the major wartime conferences, as an extra-
official resolver of disputes. In Worthing with
Roosevelt (New York, Harper, 1952. xiv, 560 p.),
another former White House staff member, Judge
Samuel I. Rosenman, presents his recollections of
a 17-year association with Roosevelt and of the
evolution of Roosevelt's social objectives and political
philosophy. The author describes in detail how he,
Harry Hopkins, Robert E. Sherwood, and others
helped draft and polish the President's major
speeches and messages, which, nevertheless, as finally
delivered, "were his — and his alone — no matter who
the collaborators were." Based upon the testimony
of persons who knew him as well as upon printed
sources, John Gunther's Roosevelt in Retrospect
(New York, Harper, 1950. 410 p.) is an anecdotal
but documented analysis, interpretation, and ap-
praisal of Roosevelt's character, personality, and
career. Roosevelt had "to a supreme degree," Mr.
Gunther believes, important qualifications for
statesmanship: courage, patience, a subtle sense
of timing, capacity to relate the particular to the
whole, idealism, fixed goals, and the ability to im-
part resolution to others. The author candidly
admits that he also had a number of less attractive
qualities.
3500. Schlesinger, Arthur M. The age of Roose-
velt, [v. 1] The crisis of the old order,
1919-1933. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1957.
557 p. 56-10293 E806.S34
The first in a projected four-volume work, this
is a vivid, anecdotal chronicle of events and currents
of thought, especially in politics and economics,
during the 14 years prior to Franklin D. Roosevelt's
inauguration. Based not only upon documents but
also upon memoirs, newspaper reports, journal
articles, and personal interviews, this crisply written
book conveys a strong sense of immediacy. Pro-
fessor Schlesinger traces the antecedents of the New
Deal, from the agrarian Populist challenge to busi-
ness rule in the 1890's to Woodrow Wilson's New
Freedom policies of 191 3— 16. He describes the
Nation's post-World War I acceptance of business
leadership, and equation of economic success with
spiritual merit, as well as the social -welfare liberal-
ism of those concerned to protect the individual I rom
the hazards of industrial society. I Ie shows the
alienation of intellectuals and artists from business
culture; assigns blame for the stock market collapse
of 1929 and the subsequent depression; and sharply
410 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
criticizes the structure of the economy, the failure
of business leadership, and the lack of business
morality. Besides a number of challenging con-
clusions, Professor Schlesinger offers incisive por-
traits of many public figures, and narrates Franklin
Roosevelt's earlier career at some length.
3500a. Schriftgiesser, Karl. This was normalcy,
an account of party politics during twelve
Republican years: 1920-1932. Boston, Litde,
Brown, 1948. 325 p. 48-5968 E743.S38 1948
Bibliography: p. 299-306.
The author, who regards the rejection of the
League of Nations as the "greatest political tragedy
in the history of the United States," has sought to
write an "account of Republicanism triumphant
and the effect of this triumph upon the American
people from Warren Gamaliel Harding's nomina-
tion in 1920 through Herbert Clark Hoover's ruin-
ation in 1932." The author regards the choice of
Harding as "a fraud upon the people," but, he ob-
serves, "Senator Harding was exacdy fitted to play
the role expected of him by the Senate oligarchy, the
corruptionists, and Big Business." Mr. Schrift-
giesser deplores "the abdication of the democratic
spirit that was the fundamental crime perpetrated
upon the people" in these "twelve disastrous years."
This was not confined to the Republican incumbents,
for the Democratic Party "forgot its historic heritage
as the people's party and wanted to be the Party
of Prosperity, too. It listened to the siren call of
normalcy and turned its back on reform." Presi-
dential leadership, he believes, "was unknown in
Washington. Harding lacked the capacity to give
it; Coolidge lacked the courage or the will; and
Hoover lacked the opportunity." The author writes
with much acerbity concerning the pattern of isola-
tionism, "normalcy," and less government in busi-
ness, that the Nation followed for nearly 12 years.
3500b. Truman, Harry S. Memoirs. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1955-56. 2 v.
55-10519 E814.T75
Contents. — v. 1. Year of decisions. — v. 2.
Years of trial and hope.
A very detailed personal report of Harry S. Tru-
man's years in the Presidency of the United States
(1945-53), based upon his private papers, official
documents, some hitherto unpublished, and the
recollections of a number of persons who were
present when certain decisions were made. During
his tenure, the author was animated by one over-
riding purpose, "to prevent a third world war."
Volume I expresses the humility of the man who
felt as if the moon, the stars, and all the planets had
fallen on him when the death of Franklin D. Roose-
velt thrust him suddenly into the Nation's highest
office. Dealing mainly with the conclusion of World
War II, this volume exhibits Mr. Truman's coura-
geous approach to the momentous issues confronting
him in 1945, such as the termination of the war in
Europe, Russian obstructionism, the use of the atom
bomb, and the cessation of hostilities in the Pacific
area, as well as his forthright judgments concerning
persons and events. Volume II consists principally
of a defense of the Truman administration and its
program for transition from war to peace under
heavy economic burdens and the financial drain of
emergency relief to Europe and the Far East. Mr.
Truman evidendy believes that his efforts on behalf
of atomic energy control and development have been
his single most important achievement.
IX
Diplomatic History and Foreign Relations
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. General Wor\s 3501-3526
Aii. Period Studies 3527~3542
Aiii. Personal Records 3543—3549
Aiv. The British Empire 355°-3559
Av. Russia 3560-3568
Avi. Other European Nations 3569-3573
Avii. Latin America: General 3574—3579
Aviii. Latin America: Individual Nations 3580-3587
Aix. Asia 3588-3597
B. Foreign Relations
Bi. Administration 3598-3608
Bii. Democratic Control 3609-3616
Biii. Policies 3617-3635
Biv. Economic Policy 3636-3642
THE dual title and organization of this chapter are a consequence of the dual purpose of
this Guide: to deal not only with past developments but with present situations. To be
sure, no book that has to be written, printed, proofread, bound, and released for publication
can ever deal with the reader's present, but only with his recent past. Our books classified as
Diplomatic History are primarily retrospective, concerned with the political dealings of the
United States with the other nations of the world from the beginning of the American Revolu-
tion through World War II. The period since V-J
day merges with the present without any breach of
continuity as yet perceptible to us, and books con-
cerned solely or principally with the postwar period
are therefore placed under Foreign Relations. An
exception or two will be found in Section Aiii, the
Personal Records of seven men important in formu-
lating our policies in the recent past, and there are
some other instances where the assignment of a
title to one or the other class will perhaps appear
arbitrary.
An extraordinary proportion of professional effort
has gone into the writing of diplomatic history, prob-
ably because the records of diplomatic transactions
are as a rule exceptionally full, carefully preserved,
tidily arranged, and ordinarily kept secret, save for
discreetly selected excerpts printed under official
auspices, for a period of years after their creation.
There are numerous histories of the missions of in-
dividual ambassadors, of public opinion concerning
a single crisis, or of periods of a few years in our
relations with a single country — for none of which
do we have room here. In Section Aii, Period
Studies, we have aimed to select books on epochs
important for the subsequent development of the
United States, and in Sections Aiv — Aix, we have
preferred titles covering, if not the whole span of our
relationships with a particular area or nation, at least
long and significant periods. International relations
are not, of course, exclusively political or diplomatic,
and some of the titles which appear here maj have
411
412 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
an equal claim to be placed in Section F of Chapter
XI, on International Influences in our Intellectual
History.
The four sections on Foreign Relations we have
at least attempted to keep current, but it is a field in
which events move rapidly and new titles are pub-
lished in perturbing quantity. Section Biii on Poli-
cies contains, along with a number of primarily
factual expositions, a sampling of the numerous
books in which amateurs as well as professionals
offer a diagnosis or a remedy for what seems to
them to be ailing in the international relations of
the United States. Our selection has not aimed to
emphasize any school of thought or course of policy,
and our annotations reflect no opinions except those
of the authors in question.
A. Diplomatic History
Ai. GENERAL WORKS
3501. The American foreign policy library. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1947-56.
15 v. .
This series began to appear in 1947 under the
editorship of Sumner Welles, Undersecretary of
State from 1937 to 1943; he was eventually replaced
by Professor Donald C. McKay of Harvard Uni-
versity. Authors of the individual volumes are
recognized academic authorities on the history or
the foreign relations of the areas or countries treated;
many either teach at Harvard or received their
graduate training there. The volumes range be-
tween 250 and 350 pages, save for the latest to ap-
pear, Mr. Wolff on the Balkans, which is consider-
ably larger. After summarizing whatever geo-
graphic, economic, and historical information the
author considers useful, each volume reviews the
history of American relations with the nation or
region, with principal attention given to recent
events and to the major problems of the present
day. The approach is scholarly, but the series is
intended to provide a lay audience with the back-
ground material essential to an understanding of
current events. Footnote references are dispensed
with, but each volume concludes with a biblio-
graphical essay arranged to correspond with the
chapter headings.
3502. Brinton, Clarence Crane. The United
States and Britain. [Rev. ed.] 1948. xiv,
312 p. 48-9542 E183.8.G7B75 1948
"Suggested reading": p. [294J-302.
3503. Brown, William Norman. The United
States and India and Pakistan. 1953. 308 p.
52-12253 DS480.84.B73
"Suggested reading": p. [29i]-297.
3504. Cline, Howard F. The United States and
Mexico. 1953. xvi, 452 p.
52-12258 F1226.C6
"Suggested reading": p. [43o]~439.
3505. Dean, Vera (Micheles) The United States
and Russia. [3d print., rev.] 1948. xvi,
336 p. 48-4500 E183.8.R9D4 1948
"Suggested reading": p. [307]~3i9.
3506. Fairbank, John King. The United States
and China. 1948. xiv, 384 p.
48-7351 DS735.F3
"Suggested reading": p. [35o]~367.
3507. Hughes, Henry Stuart. The United States
and Italy. 1953. 256 p.
53-9038 DG577.H8
"Suggested reading": p. 240-247.
3508. McKay, Donald C. The United States and
France. 1951. xvii, 334 p.
51-11375 E183.8.F8M3
"Suggested reading": p. [3io]-3i9.
3509. Perkins, Dexter. The United States and
the Caribbean. 1947. 253 p.
47-11619 F2171.P4
"Suggested reading": p. [235]-240.
3510. Reischauer, Edwin O. The United States
and Japan. 1950. xviii, 357 p.
5°-3943 E183.8.J3R4
"Suggested reading": p. [343H47.
351 1. Scott, Franklin D. The United States and
Scandinavia. 1950. xviii, 359 p.
50-7563 DL59.S35 1950
"Suggested reading": p. [333H44.
3512. Speiser, Ephraim A. The United States and
the Near East. Rev. ed. 1950. xviii, 283 p.
48-6492 DS63.S6 1950
"Suggested reading": p. [255J-263.
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 413
3513. Thomas, Lewis V., and Richard N. Frye.
The United States and Turkey and Iran.
1951. 291 p. 51-12394 E183.8.T8T5
"Suggested reading": p. [i67]-i7o, [279J-284.
Contents. — The United States and Turkey, by
L. V. Thomas. — The United States and Iran, by
R. N. Frye.
3514. Whitaker, Arthur P. The United States
and Argentina. 1954. xv, 272 p.
55-5541 F2831.W5
"Suggested reading": p. [254J-262.
3515. Whitaker, Arthur P. The United States
and South America, the northern republics.
1948. xix, 280 p. 48-6353 F2216.W45
"Suggested reading": p. [255]-3(>7.
3516. Wolff, Robert L. The Balkans in our time.
1956. xxi, 618 p. maps, tables. (Russian
Research Center studies [23])
56-6529 DR48.5.W6
"Useful works in Western languages": p. [ 588]—
596.
Says the editor of the series, Donald C. McKay,
in his Introduction: "The present volume on The
Balkans in Our Time is a joint publication of The
American Foreign Policy Library and the Russian
Research Center Studies. The plan and focus of
the volume follow very closely those of others in the
Foreign Policy Library, but the much greater length
and more detailed treatment reflect the interests of
the Russian Research Center. The compromise be-
tween these two purposes is evident in the 'out-
sized' format in which the volume has been issued."
It might be added that there is less material on
American relations and interests than in most of the
other volumes.
3517. Bailey, Thomas A. A diplomatic history of
the American people. 5th ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1955. xxviii, 969, xxxix p.
(Crofts American history series)
55-7869 JX1407.B24 1955
A college textbook covering its subject from 1775
to the present day, which was originally published
in 1940 and has grown steadily thicker as the narra-
tive of recent events has been added to successive
editions. The principal emphasis is placed upon the
role of public opinion, and the cartoons of successive
periods are drawn upon for illustrations. There
are 52 chapters in the latest edition, and the half-
way point falls at the Venezuela crisis of 1893.
Lewis Ethan Ellis' A Short History of American
Diplomacy (New York, Harper, 195 1. 604 p.) is
an alternative textbook for those who would prefer a
briefer treatment.
3518. Bardett, Ruhl J., ed. The record of Ameri-
can diplomacy; documents and readings in
the history of American foreign relations. 3d ed.,
rev. and enl. New York, Knopf, 1954. xxi, 790,
xvi p. 54-2821 E183.7.B35 1954
Bibliography: p. 789-790.
This work is designed to make available to college
classes in American diplomatic history a collection of
documents which will enable students "to compare
policies adopted at different times regarding the
same area or subject, trace the evolution of major
policies, and examine the reasoning used to defend
or advance American foreign interests." Intended
to supplement general accounts of diplomatic his-
tory, the documents, both public and private and for
the most part drawn from printed sources, are
grouped in topical chapters which follow a general
chronological progression but sometimes overlap.
They begin with the colonial era and end with the
Korean War. Short passages by the editor intro-
duce each chapter. An alternative documentary
textbook in American diplomatic history is edited
by William Appleman Williams: The Shaping of
American Diplomacy; Readings and Documents in
American Foreign Relations, iy 50-1955 (Chicago,
Rand McNally, 1956. 1 130 p.). It includes a selec-
tion of writings on each period of our diplomatic
history by present-day historians, along with a selec-
tion of contemporary documents which, in some
instances, duplicate those in Mr. Bartlett's collection.
3519. Bemis, Samuel Flagg, ed. The American
secretaries of state and their diplomacy. J.
Franklin Jameson, H. Barrett Learned, James
Brown Scott, advisory board. New York, Knopf
[1927-29] 10 v. 27-8473 E183.7.B46
Volume 1 is devoted to a historical introduction
by J. B. Scott on the diplomacy of the Revolution,
and studies of the Confederation's two secretaries for
foreign affairs, Robert R. Livingston and John Jay.
In the subsequent volumes each secretary of state
from Thomas Jefferson (1789-94) to Charles Evans
Hughes (1921-25) is the subject of a study by an
expert on the period or the subject. The essays vary
in length, according to the length of the individual's
term and the importance of his historical contribu-
tions. A bibliographical note for each secretary is
appended. The set provides a valuable means of
approach to the particular transactions of American
diplomacy in detail. The Department of State has
recently published an attractive short volume en-
tided The Secretaries of State, Portraits and Bio-
graphic Sketches (Washington, 1956. 124 p.) which
includes all the secretaries to John Foster Dulles
(from 1953).
414 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3520. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. A diplomatic history
of the United States. 4th ed. New York,
Holt, 1955. 1018 p. 55-5982 E183.7.B4682 1955
This has been a standard textbook in the field
since it was originally published in 1936. The suc-
cessive editions have made minor alterations in the
original text, but have brought the book current
with the momentous developments in recent interna-
tional affairs. After a preliminary discussion of the
role of America in European conflicts between 1492
and 1775, the author sketches the foundations of
American foreign policy as established between 1775
and 1823; the diplomacy of continental expansion,
1823-99; and since 1899, the United States as a
world power. This last phase now fills over half
of the volume. The author deals with the rise and
significance of such historic doctrines as the free-
dom of the seas, the Monroe Doctrine, avoidance
of entanglement in European conflicts, Manifest
Destiny, the self-determination of peoples, and inter-
national arbitration.
3521. Bemis, Samuel Flagg, and Grace Gardner
Griffin. Guide to the diplomatic history of
the United States, 1775-1921. Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. Off., 1935. New York, P. Smith, 1951.
reprint: xvii, 979 p. 52-6052 Z6465.U5B4 195 1
The first and larger part of this monumental
Guide is an annotated bibliography arranged under
the headings of a minutely chronological review of
American diplomacy, and under each heading the
materials are classified as bibliographic aids, special
works, printed sources, manuscripts, and maps.
Chapter 23, long enough to stand as a separate part
(p. 685-789), lists "General Works, Historical Pub-
lications and Aids." Part II consists of a 150-page
essay on the sources for American diplomatic his-
tory, including printed state papers both American
and foreign, and archival collections in the United
States and abroad. The continuing demand for this
indispensable guide led to its reproduction, through
photographic process, by a commercial publisher 16
years after its appearance as a government document.
3522. Hill, Charles E. Leading American treaties.
New York, Macmillan, 1931. 399 p.
33-i3294 JX1407.H5 1931
This work, first published in 1922, is not a com-
pilation of documents, but an approach to the his-
tory of American foreign relations through "the
historical setting and the chief provisions of the
leading American treaties," or arrangements in-
volving groups of treaties. The setdements in-
cluded are: the French alliance of 1778; the treaty
of independence, 1783; Jay's treaty, 1794; the con-
vention with France, 1800; the Louisiana purchase,
1803; the peace treaty of Ghent, 1814; the conven-
tion with Great Britain, 1818; the Florida purchase,
1 819; the Webster- Ashburton treaty, 1842; the peace
treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo, 1848; the treaties with
Japan, 1854 and 1858; the Alaska purchase, 1867;
the treaty of Washington, 1871 ; the peace treaty with
Spain, 1898; and the Panama Canal treaties from
1850 to 1902. A brief bibliography follows each
chapter.
3523. Perkins, Dexter. The American approach
to foreign policy. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1952. 203 p. (The Gottesman lec-
tures, Uppsala University)
53-3288 E183.7.P46 1952
Bibliography: p. [i93]-i95-
A series of lectures delivered in 1949, explaining
the factors influencing the formulation and imple-
mentation of American foreign policy. After a
brief general summary of our foreign relations to
1945, Mr. Perkins deals with each factor separately.
The drive to achieve and maintain hemispheric
solidarity must not be confused with imperialism,
nor should our economic system be held exclusively
responsible for policy decisions. An overdeveloped
sense of morality has led to the sacrifice of our na-
tional interests while militarism and pacificism al-
ternately affect our emotions. A final chapter views '
the antagonism of the Soviet Union and the United
States as "the largest and most significant fact in the
contemporary world of politics," and assesses the
relative advantages of each side, with only the sober
conclusion that "the capacity of a great self-govern-
ing people to deal with a continuing world crisis ,
will be tested in the years ahead as it has never been .
tested before."
3524. Savage, Carlton. Policy of the United States
toward maritime commerce in war. Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1934-36. 2 v. (U. S.
Dept. of State. Publication no. 331, 835)
34-28033 JX5207.S3 1934
Contents. — v. 1. 1776-1914. — v. 2. 1914-1918.
A narrative and documentary history of the
United States' contributions to the law of naval war-
fare. Consistendy enunciated in numerous treaties,
civil and admiralty court decisions, naval codes and
governmental declarations, and carried out as normal
procedures by American maritime officials, Amer-
ican doctrines concerning the immunities of neutral
goods on enemy ships, and of enemy goods on neu-
tral ships, continuous voyage, the validity of block-
ade, immunity of private property at sea, and
contraband of war were adopted by most major
maritime powers between 1783 and the beginning of
World War I. Unrestricted submarine warfare, in
violation of these rules of law, was a major cause
of American participation in that war. Six hundred
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 415
documents are appended, 431 of which concern
World War I.
3525. Tate, Merze. The United States and arma-
ments. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1948. 312 p. 48-5607 JX1974.T32
"Much of the material of Part I ... is in [the
author's] The Disarmament Illusion."
"Selective bibliography": p. 278-286.
A documented history of American participation
in disarmament conferences and negotiations from
1794 to 1947. It discusses the agreements effecting
disarmament on the Great Lakes, the Hague Con-
ferences of 1899 and 1907, our role in the Con-
ference for the Reduction and Limitation of
Armaments sponsored by the League of Nations in
1934, our interwar policy regarding naval disarma-
ment, the program for disarming Germany and
Japan following World War II, and our advocacy
of the international control of atomic energy. Miss
Tate concludes that as long as a nation must defend
its own security, and international disunity and
mistrust persist, there can be little hope for the
achievement of true disarmament.
3526. Wilson, Robert Renbert. The international
law standard in treaties of the United States.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 321 p.
53-5063 JX1406.W5
Bibliography: p. [2913-3 10.
Of special value to advanced students of inter-
national law and foreign affairs, this book shows that
America's foreign relations, as expressed by U. S.
treaty practice, have been influenced by our tradi-
tional respect for the rule of law in domestic affairs.
This survey of perfected international agreements
which the United States has ratified from 1778 to
1950 records the number and variety of specific
treaty references to international law or the law of
nations. Much of the work is devoted to the
analysis of treaties dealing with the pacific settlement
of disputes, commerce and navigation, the inde-
pendence and jurisdiction of states, and war and
neutrality. A basis for comparison is provided in
an appendix containing summaries of the treaty
practices of Great Britain, France, Russia, Germany,
Italy, and Japan.
Aii. PERIOD STUDIES
3527. Beale, Howard K. Theodore Roosevelt and
the rise of America to world power. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. 600 p. (The
Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history, 1953)
56-10255 E757.B4
A study of the effect of one man upon America's
role in world politics, this book is a personalized
review of the revolution in American foreign policy
which began in 1889 and ended in 1909, and which
placed America in the position of a great power.
Beginning with his entrance into public life, Theo-
dore Roosevelt worked ceaselessly for America's
overseas expansion. He was convinced that this was
the only way to achieve the necessary power to sup-
port our messianic role, shared with Great Britain,
of civilizing the world. As President, T. R. carried
on U. S. foreign relations by means of personal and
secret contacts with the heads of state of the great
powers, and maintained American ability to take
action whenever these negotiations were of no
avail. Extracts from private and public correspond-
ence, as well as speeches, articles, and interviews
have been used to illustrate aspects of Roosevelt's
character, such as his peculiar brand of racism, and
their relation to his insights and conclusions on
foreign policy, arrived at both as a private citizen
and as a public servant.
3528. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. The diplomacy of
the American Revolution. New York, Ap-
pleton-Century, 1935. 293 p. 5 fold. maps.
35-8172 E183.7.B48, v. 1
E249.B44
"This volume is published from a fund contrib-
uted to the American Historical Association by the
Carnegie Corporation of New York."
"Bibliographical note": p. 265-273.
As director of the European Mission of the Library
of Congress from 1927-29, Dr. Bemis initiated the
mass photocopying of materials for American history
in European archives and libraries. These sources
he combined with American ones and printed
materials in order to present, he believed for the
first time, "a balanced and somewhat condensed nar-
rative of the diplomacy of American independence,"
in which "details have been subordinated to the sig-
nificant factors and the broad movements." Four
chapters are devoted to relations with France, three
to Spain, three to the Netherlands, one to the Armed
Neutrality, and five to the peace negotiations. To
the author the essence of the story resides in the
progressive entanglement of the United States in
European diplomacy through the French alliance,
and the bold stroke of Franklin, Jay, and Adams in
17S2. when they "broke their instructions and cut
loose from French advice and control." The work's
continuing value is confirmed by a 1957 reprinting
in the series of Midland books issued by the Indiana
University Press.
416 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3529. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. John Quincy Adams
and the foundations of American foreign
policy. New York, Knopf, 1949. xix, 588, xv p.
49-10664 E377.B45 1949
John Quincy Adams (1767-1848) served as
United States Minister to the Netherlands, Prussia,
Russia, and Britain, was concerned with important
questions of foreign policy in the Senate of the
United States, and assisted in concluding the Treaty
of Ghent, before embarking upon his memorable
term as Monroe's Secretary of State (1817-25). Ac-
cepting the claim that Adams was America's greatest
diplomatist, the author states, "more than any other
man of his time he was privileged to gather together,
formulate, and practice the fundamentals of Ameri-
can foreign policy — self-determination, independ-
ence, noncolonization, nonintervention, nonen-
tanglement in European politics, Freedom of the
Seas, freedom of commerce — and to set them deep in
the soil of the Western Hemisphere." Adams is
treated as a highly skilled statesman who took ad-
vantage of European wars and revolutions to ad-
vance the position of the United States as the
predominant continental American power. The
last 23 years of Adams' long life, as President of the
United States and in the House of Representatives,
are the subject of the author's John Quincy Adams
and the Union (no. 3300), which has much of in-
terest for diplomatic history although less exclusively
concerned with it.
3530. Benton, Elbert J. International law and
diplomacy of the Spanish-American War.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1908. 300 p.
(The Albert Shaw lectures on diplomatic history,
1907) 8-9495 E723.B47
After 17 years of quiet, in 1895 an insurrection,
largely organized by exiled leaders in New York
City, broke out in Cuba in protest against arbitrary
Spanish rule and heavy taxation, very little of which
was spent for Cuba's benefit. Spain reacted with
drastic measures of repression, and for two and a
half years the United States Government wrestled
with the problem of maintaining an official neu-
trality while the sympathies of a majority of its
citizens were warmly and sometimes actively on the
side of the insurgents. Of the 71 expeditions in aid
of the Cubans fitted out during this period, 33 were
halted by Federal authorities. Both Spain and the
United States were sufficiendy exasperated when
the destruction of the Maine in Havana harbor led
to immediate intervention and war in an area where
many neutrals had important interests. The au-
thor is scrupulously fair to the Spanish authorities,
and is largely concerned with a critical review of
American neutrality, warmaking, and treatment of
neutrals in the light of the international law of the
day. The two final chapters are concerned with the
conclusion and implementation of the treaty of
peace.
3531. Darling, Arthur Burr. Our rising empire,
1763-1803. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1940. 595 p. 40-9340 E301.D23
Bibliography: p. [5551-565.
In spite of the dates on the title page, this book
really begins with independence in 1776, and con-
stitutes a history of the most critical quarter-century
in American foreign relations. Based on primary
sources throughout, it is a work of the highest con-
centration and condensation, and incorporates few
facts which it does not seek to interpret. The major,
although not the exclusive theme, is the destiny of
the Mississippi Valley, for the possession of which
the new nation had as many as three rivals: Spain,
France, and Great Britain. The detailed narrative
is largely confined to our relations with those three
powers. The culmination of the period, and con-
clusion of the book, is the "Achievement of Empire"
with the Louisiana Purchase of 1803. In it "the
long quest of America's statesmen from Franklin to
Jefferson, of Jay, Washington, Hamilton, Livings-
ton, even John Adams, had come to achievement."
3532. Dulles, Foster Rhea. America's rise to world
power, 1898—1954. New York, Harper,
1955. 314 p. (The New American nation series)
55-6575 E744.D8
Bibliography: p. 283-301.
"How, notwithstanding history, tradition, and
emotion, Americans found themselves involved first
with the fragments of the Spanish Empire in Amer-
ica, then in Pacific and Asiatic adventures, and
finally in Europe, and how, through advance and
retreat and advance they responded, is the central
theme" of this book. In providing the historical
background for the policies and decisions of the last
half-century, the author, a professor at Ohio State
University, is concerned only with those develop-
ments in foreign policy which marked the gradual
and halting emergence of the United States as the
leading world power.
3533. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The imperial years.
New York, Crowell, 1956. 340 p.
56-7790 E183.7.D78
"Bibliographical notes": p. 314-325.
Of interest to the general reader rather than to the
advanced student of American foreign relations, this
book recreates the spirit, through quotations from
contemporary speeches, newspapers, letters, memoirs,
and documents, of the years between 1885 and 1910.
This age, characterized by the author as that of
America's adolescence, began during the tradition-
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 417
ally isolationist administration of Grover Cleveland,
rose to its climax during the Spanish- American War,
and declined with the end of Theodore Roosevelt's
second administration. This decline was the result
of the failure of Theodore Roosevelt and his con-
temporaries to realize that America's new position as
a world power meant the abandonment of the tradi-
tional foreign policy of noninvolvement, and the
formulation of a "coherent global policy."
3534. Fleming, Denna Frank. The United States
and world organization, 1 920-1933. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1938. xiv, 569 p.
38-30813 JX1975.5.U5F6
Professor Fleming of Vanderbilt University de-
votes this large volume, well documented, organized,
and illustrated, to the years during which the United
States, having decisively rejected the League of
Nations and defeated the party which had sponsored
it, maintained an official isolation from the Old
World. He has small difficulty in demonstrating
that this isolation was nominal rather than real,
for after World War I the world had in fact be-
come an economic and political unit. The conse-
quence of its great withdrawal, therefore, was that
the United States became involved in a succession of
ad hoc negotiations, conferences, and cooperations,
and brought forward a number of substitute means
for guaranteeing the continuance of peace, instead
of strengthening the central organs of international
action to the point of real effectiveness. Well before
1933 world-wide economic depression and the re-
appearance of unchecked aggression in Manchuria
pointed to the failure of these half-way measures.
This work continues the author's earlier study, The
United States and the League of Nations 1918-10.20
(New York, Putnam, 1932. 559 p.), and has for
a companion volume his The United States and the
World Court (Garden City, N. Y. Doubleday,
Doran, 1945. 206 p.). A briefer account of the
same period from much the same viewpoint is
Allan Nevins' The United States in a Chaotic
World; A Chronicle of International Affairs, 1918-
*933 (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950.
252 p. The Chronicles of America series, v. 55).
3535. Hyneman, Charles S. The first American
neutrality, a study of the American under-
standing of neutral obligations during the years 1792
to 1815. [Urbana] University of Illinois, 1934.
178 p. ([Illinois. University] Illinois studies in
the social sciences, v. xx, no. 1-2)
35-27650 H31.I4, v. 20, no. 1-2
[X1412.H9
On cover: University of Illinois bulletin, vol.
xxxii, no. 13.
Bibliography: p. 1 67-171.
A study of the legal relation of the United States
toward belligerents during the wars of the French
Revolution and Napoleon. This period of American
neutrality marked "the transition from the era of
benevolent or limited neutrality to the modern era of
impartial conduct," and as such, the author believes,
deserves study as a guide to the neutral obligations
of the United States in any future war. The topics
treated include aid to belligerent vessels, hostilities
and seizures in American waters, the recruitment
of American citizens, contraband trade, and the
machinery for the enforcement of neutrality. The
author's source material consists of diplomatic cor-
respondence, court decisions, contemporary periodi-
cals, and international law texts.
3536. Jordan, Donaldson, and Edwin J. Pratt.
Europe and the American Civil War. With
an introduction by Samuel Eliot Morison. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1 93 1 . 299 p.
31-5313 E469.8.J75
Bibliography: p. [269-290]
Part I, "England," is rewritten from a doctoral
dissertation which Mr. Jordan submitted to Harvard
University, and Part II, "The Continent," from a
dissertation which Mr. Pratt submitted to Oxford;
Prof. Morison read both and suggested their com-
bination into a single work for the general reader.
They jointly assess the part which public opinion
played in determining the action of the English,
French, and Spanish governments toward the
American struggle. During the first two years
opinion was sharply divided, and intervention was a
real danger. But most pro-southerners did not want
actual war, and therefore "Secretary Seward's policy
of carrying a chip on his shoulder was entirely suc-
cessful." Not long after the Emancipation Procla-
mation, liberal opinion in England, France, and
Spain came out sharply on the side of the Union,
and carried the indifferent majorities with it. The
reintegration of the United States gave a "vast im-
petus" to European liberalism: it was the Parliament
elected in 1865 which passed the Reform Bill of
1867 so crucial for British democracy.
3537. Langer, William L., and Sarell Everett
Gleason. The challenge to isolation, 1937-
1940. New York, Published for the Council on
Foreign Relations by Harper, 1952. xv, 794 p.
(Their The world crisis and American foreign
policy) 5I-H932 E744-L3
3538. Langer, William L., and S.irell Everett
(ileason. The undeclared war, 1040 1941.
New York, Published for the Council on Foreign
418 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Relations by Harper, 1953. xvi, 963 p. {Their
The world crisis and American foreign policy)
53-7738 D748.L3
Well documented and abundant in detail, these
companion volumes furnish a standard narrative
of the international and diplomatic developments
which preceded and precipitated United States entry
into World War II. Beginning with President
Roosevelt's "quarantine" speech of 1937, The Chal-
lenge to Isolation is a study of official American
reactions and policies in the face of heightened Axis
aggression and the stiffening resistance of Great
Britain and France. The questions of Soviet align-
ment, Hemispheric defense, the character of
American neutrality, and efforts toward a peaceful
setdement occupy this volume, which closes with a
consideration of the destroyers-for-bases deal with
the British. The Undeclared War, 1940-1941 nar-
rates the Axis conquest of Europe and onslaught on
Russia. The United States' moves in favor of the
Allies such as lend-lease are considered along with
our negotiations with Japan to achieve agreement in
the Pacific. In both volumes, the personal efforts
of President Roosevelt to draw the United States
closer to the Allies, and particularly to Great Britain,
receive close attention, and he is represented as
overimpressed by Congressional opposition to his
foreign policy, and as lagging behind general
American sentiment in his support of Great Britain
and France during the first year of the war. The
authors achieve a balanced presentation of Ameri-
can relations with all areas of the world, as well as
of the political and military events which drew us
into World War II.
3539. Owsley, Frank Lawrence. King Cotton
diplomacy; foreign relations of the Con-
federate States of America. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 193 1. 617 p. 31-16342 E488.O85
Bibliography: p. 579-591.
The Confederacy hoped that the European need
for raw cotton might be used as a means for in-
ducing diplomatic recognition and aid during the
Civil War. European intervention was regarded as
a guarantee of Confederate success. England and
France, being the principal maritime countries and
dependent on cotton, were the chief fields of Con-
federate activity. The Federal blockade produced
a cotton famine in Europe as early as 1862. How-
ever, Dr. Owsley maintains, the British cotton
processors did not desire more cotton imports be-
cause the shortage made it possible to sell their
existing stocks at a large profit. The wool, linen,
munitions, steel, and shipping enjoyed a war boom.
The unemployed cotton workers found work else-
where. Britain refused to intervene, and Napoleon
III was afraid to act alone.
3540. Reeves, Jesse S. American diplomacy under
Tyler and Polk. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1907. 335 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on
diplomatic history, 1906) 7-39215 E396.R33
Dr. Reeves was a specialist in international law
who taught for 20 years at the University of Michi-
gan. Here he treats the years 1841-49 as a distinct
diplomatic epoch in which was accomplished the
final settlement of the three major boundary ques-
tions which had been outstanding since 18 15 or even
since 1783. The northeastern boundary, a puzzle
for over half a century because of the imperfect
geographical knowledge incorporated in the peace
treaty of 1783, was settled by compromise in the
Webster-Ashburton Treaty of 1842. The north-
western boundary question, postponed rather than
settled by the joint occupation of 1818, was concluded
in the Oregon Treaty of 1846, again by a compromise
line. The southwestern boundary, on the other
hand, was settled by conquest, the results of which
were embodied in the Treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo,
the last great step in the expansion of the United
States. This book was one of the first to place a
proper emphasis on the magnitude of President
Polk's achievement.
3541. Seymour, Charles. American diplomacy
during the World War. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1934. 417 p. (The Albert Shaw
lectures on diplomatic history, 1933. The Walter
Hines Page School of International Relations)
34-1 164 1 D619.S43
"Bibliographical note": p. 401-408.
Restricted to a study of American policy toward
the European belligerents, this work centers around
President Wilson who determined that policy in
all its main aspects. The author, now president
emeritus of Yale, asserts that Wilson held the United
States apart from embatded Europe as long as prac-
ticable, but was "forced by the intolerable conditions
of neutrality to bring America into the war and to
promote a plan of international organization for
peace." The ideals and the personal appeal of
Wilson are viewed as determinative of the peace
settlement of Versailles and of the League of Na-
tions. His personal contacts with diplomats and
other leaders on both sides make up the core of the
work. Comments of men such as Colonel House,
Count BernstorfT, and others who negotiated for or
with Wilson, are used to substantiate the well
documented text.
3542. Updyke, Frank A. The diplomacy of the
War of 1812. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1915. 494 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures
on diplomatic history, 1914) 15-10499 E358.U66
Very formal diplomatic history, of which less than
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS
/ 419
a quarter is devoted to the antecedents of the war,
and more than three quarters to the efforts at peace-
making. The causes of the war are located in the
British practice of impressing seamen from Ameri-
can vessels, and the British interference with Amer-
ican vessels trading to the Continent of Europe; on
the second score French policy was equally high-
handed, but America's "suffering at the hands of
Great Britain was so much greater that she was
warranted in declaring war upon that country
alone." The negotiations at Ghent, which went on
for the better part of four months, are narrated in
great detail. Final chapters are on the complica-
tions which arose in executing some of the treaty's
provisions, and on the Convention of 1818 and other
acts in setdement of questions left open by the treaty;
the question of the Newfoundland fisheries, indeed,
is pursued as late as 1912.
Aiii. PERSONAL RECORDS
3543. Acheson, Dean G. The pattern of responsi-
bility; edited by McGeorge Bundy from the
record of Secretary of State Dean Acheson. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. xxi, 309 p.
51-8864 E744.A217
A collection of speeches and statements (1949-51)
selected by Professor (now Dean) McGeorge Bundy
of Harvard University. The purpose was to pro-
vide an objective basis upon which to judge Mr.
Acheson's performance as Secretary of State. "I am
bound to say that I think it very hard indeed
to square the record of man and policy with most
of the charges that have been made," Dean Bundy
states.
3544. Byrnes, James Francis. Speaking frankly.
New York, Harper, 1947. 324 p.
47-1175 D815.B9
A discussion of the Yalta and Potsdam Confer-
ences, at which he was present, and of various con-
ferences of foreign ministers during his term as
President Truman's first Secretary of State, 1945-47.
The author believes that the details of postwar nego-
tiations should be public property. He reproduces
various high-level conversations at Yalta from his
shorthand notes. Mr. Byrnes believes that Russian
expansionist aims have been virtually the same since
the Nazi-Soviet pact of 1939.
3545. Grew, Joseph Clark. Turbulent era; a dip-
lomatic record of forty years, 1904- 1945.
Edited by Walter Johnson, assisted by Nancy Harvi-
son Hooker. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. 2 v.
(xxvi, 1560 p.) 52-5262 E748.G835A3
The earlier parts of this work are principally com-
posed of excerpts from the author's manuscript diary.
The first volume chronicles Mr. Grew's diplomatic
career from 1904 to the completion of his first term
as Under Secretary of State in 1927. The second
volume is concerned with his service as Ambassador
to Turkey (1927-32) and Japan (1932-41); and as
Under Secretary of State again (1944-45). Since
the diary notes were used as the basis of his Ten
Years in Japan, a more formal narrative of his mis-
sion, written by him in 1941, has been used here.
The final sections are based on documents and
reminiscences.
3546. Hull, Cordell. The memoirs of Cordell
Hull. New York, Macmillan, 1948. 2 v.
(1804 p.) 48-6761 E748.H93A3
The author was President Roosevelt's Secretary of
State from 1933 to 1944. The book was written
with the assistance of Andrew H. Berding, cur-
rently Assistant Director of the U. S. Information
Agency, from the author's dictated remarks. After
a brief relation of his early life in Tennessee and 23
years in Congress, the author concentrates on his
term as Secretary of State. Topics treated include
the recognition of the U. S. S. R., the reciprocal
trade agreements policy, South American relations,
American attitudes toward international organiza-
tion, and Japanese and German aggression. Most
of the second volume is devoted to World War II.
3547. Stimson, Henry L., and McGeorge Bundy.
On active service in peace and war. New
York, Harper, 1948. xxii, 698 p.
48-6427 E748.S883A3
McGeorge Bundy, while still a Junior Fellow of
Harvard University, prepared this book, which is
in the third person, from Mr. Stimson's diary and
other papers, and in constant contact with Mr. Stim-
son. Stimson (1867-1950) was Secretary of War
from 191 1 to 1913 and again from 1940 to 1945,
Governor General of the Philippines from 1928 to
1929, and Secretary of State from 1929 to 1933. Of
greatest interest to the student of international affairs
are his service as Secretary of State, when his deter-
mined opposition to Japanese claim on Manchuria
marked him as one of the earliest advocates of collec-
tive action against aggression, and his second term as
Secretary of War. During the latter, Mr. Stimson
assisted in the making of many military decisions,
including the opening up of the second front and
the use of the atomic bomb, which profoundlv af-
fected wartime and postwar relations with our allies,
and observed, at first hand, the conduct of our
foreign affairs by virtue of his high and r
office.
3548. Vandenberg, Arthur H. The private papers
of Senator Vandenberg, edited by Arthur I \.
420 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Vandenberg, Jr., with the collaboration of Joe Alex
Morris. Boston, Houghton MifBin, 1952. xxii,
599 p. 52-5248 E813.V3
A biographical narrative based upon liberal quo-
tation from the Senator's diary, letters, and speeches
covering the years from 1939 to 1951, with major
emphasis on the period following 1941. The main
theme is the Senator's conversion from isolationism
to Congressional leadership of the movement to in-
crease United States participation in international
organizations and politics. A long-time Republican
member of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee,
Senator Vandenberg (1 884-1 951) played a major
role in effecting the passage of such foreign policy
legislation as the ratification of the Charter of the
United Nations, the Marshall Plan, and American
participation in NATO. An advocate of bipartisan
support of administration foreign policy, he was
a delegate to the San Francisco Conference of 1945,
the first and second sessions of the United Nations
General Assembly, and the 1946 Paris Conference
of Foreign Ministers.
3549. Welles, Sumner. Seven decisions that
shaped history. New York, Harper, 1951.
xviii, 236 p. 51-10044 D748.W4
Sumner Welles, a specialist in Latin-American
affairs who served as Assistant Secretary of State
from 1933 to 1937 and as Undersecretary from 1937
to 1943, bere defends the foreign policy of Franklin
D. Roosevelt, as well as his knowledge and skill
in international affairs and the sincerity of his demo-
cratic purposes, against their numerous postwar
critics. He incidentally justifies his own role on
several occasions, particularly at the Rio Conference
of 1942, when, in order to avert a breach with Ar-
gentina and Chile, he appealed to the President
over the head of Secretary Hull, who cuts a poor
figure in this volume. Two major errors of Roose-
velt's administration, the failure to declare against
Hitler and to "quarantine" Japan, were forced upon
Roosevelt against his best judgment. However, the
failure to force Stalin to agree to a postwar setde-
ment while Russia was heavily depending upon
American assistance was Roosevelt's own, and is
here attributed to his distrust of career Foreign
Service men. There is also criticism of various
foreign policies of the Truman administration, espe-
cially the abandonment of Chiang Kai-Shek.
Aiv. THE BRITISH EMPIRE
3550. Adams, Ephraim Douglass. Great Britain
and the American Civil War. London, New
York, Longmans, Green, 1925. 2 v.
25-11786 E469.A25
"Primarily a study in British history in the belief
that the American drama had a world significance,
and peculiarly a British one." The unresolved strug-
gle in England for democratic institutions is seen
as influencing the attitude of the British territorial
aristocracy toward the egalitarian tendencies of the
North. The British ruling classes doubted whether
the American Government could long endure, but
the British people sympathized with its aims. For
the latter, America was "fighting the battle of
democracy."
3551. Allen, Harry C. Great Britain and the
United States; a history of Anglo-American
relations (1783-1952) New York, St. Martin's Press,
1955. 1024 p. maps. 55-7753 E183.8.G7A47
Bibliography: p. 984-998.
After a two-hundred page discussion of the eco-
nomic, social, political, cultural, emotional, and
diplomatic relations of the British and American
peoples, the history of the relationship is analyzed
in detail in three periods: 1775-1821, 1821-98, and
1898-1952. The final period is regarded as that
in which the United States, emerging as a world
power, became aware of a common interest with
Britain. The whole period of American national
history, however, is seen as one of persistent prog-
ress from mistrust to cordiality, and also of increas-
ing American preponderance. The author, a Fellow
of Lincoln College, Oxford, disclaims having writ-
ten a work of original research, but as a believer
in "the necessity for cordial Anglo-American rela-
tions," has thoroughly digested the large literature
of printed sources and secondary works.
3552. Brebner, John Bardet. North Adantic tri-
angle; the interplay of Canada, the United
States and Great Britain. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press for the Carnegie Endowment for In-
ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His-
tory, 1945. xxii, 385 p. maps. ([The relations of
Canada and the United States; a series of studies
prepared under the direction of the Carnegie En-
dowment for International Peace, Division of Eco-
nomics and History.]) A45-1973 E183.8.C2B74
"Appendix: bibliographical notes": p. [329]~34i.
The 25th and final volume in this very important
series, which was published from 1936 to 1945, and
covers relations in the realms of population, set-
tlement, the several spheres of economics, interna-
tional law, and public opinion as well as in di-
plomacy. Prof. Brcbner's book, although the most
general in scope, "is not a summary of the volumes
in the Series in which it appears. During the past
ten years its main outlines have been used as a par-
tial framework, or blueprint, for that Series." Like
the series, it traces the relationship from the days
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 42 1
of Samuel de Champlain on the levels of physiog-
raphy, population movements, economic develop-
ment, and politics and diplomacy. Its central theme
is Canadian nationhood, which the Dominion has
successfully asserted against the Empire of which
it remains a part, and against the Republic which is
its overshadowing neighbor. But, as the author
shows, these and all related developments can be
understood only within the larger picture of Anglo-
American relations, in which Canadian interests
have only too frequently been relegated to a poor
third place.
3553. Burt, Alfred L. The United States, Great
Britain and British North America from the
Revolution to the establishment of peace after the
War of 1 812. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1940. 448 p. maps. (The relations of Canada and
the United States [a series of studies prepared under
the direction of the Carnegie Endowment for In-
ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His-
tory]) 40-29766 E183.8.G7B9
This trenchandy written volume covers the period
of conflict on the northern frontier of the United
States against the background of general Anglo-
American relations, in abundant but not excessive
detail. The points at issue in each of the major
disputes that arose, and especially in boundary dis-
putes, are isolated with a rare clarity. John Jay is
given a double credit for the treaty of 1794 which
destroyed his popularity: not only did it put off
further conflict for two decades, but it "inaugurated
the modern use of the judicial process in interna-
tional affairs." Professor Burt deliberately chal-
lenges the theory that the land-hunger of the New
West was the major cause of the War of 18 12; he
finds it rather in the cumulative exasperation of the
American Government at the British refusal to come
to any accommodation, even of a face-saving kind,
on American maritime rights; save for the utter
military unpreparedness, war would probably have
come a year earlier. The Treaty of Ghent was only
the initial step in a series of negotiations in which
"the strong will to peace that prevailed in Washing-
ton and London made itself felt," and transformed
"what was little more than a truce into a lasting
peace."
3554. Dunning, William Archibald. The British
Empire and the United States; a review of
their relations during the century of peace following
the Treaty of Ghent. With an introd. by the Right
Honourable Viscount Bryce, O. M., and a pref. by
Nicholas Murray Butler. New York, Scribncr,
1914. xl, 381 p. 14-18567 E183.8.G7D9
A thoroughly digested review of relations between
the United States, Great Britain, and Canada.
Specific topics treated include Canadian boundary
disputes, Newfoundland fisheries, the right of search
and African anti-slave patrol, British commentators
on the United States, British policy concerning
Texas, the Mexican War, the Civil War, and the
Spanish-American War, British and American
Latin-American policy, Alaska, Canadian internal
affairs, the Venezuela dispute of 1895, and Irish
home rule.
3555. Keenleyside, Hugh Llewellyn, and Gerald S.
Brown. Canada and the United States;
some aspects of their historical relations. Rev. and
enl. ed. New York, Knopf, 1952. xxvi, 406, xii p.
51-13225 E183.8.C2K3 1952
The original edition of 1929 "was the first pub-
lished attempt at a comprehensive review of the
history of the contacts between these two North
American neighbors," and was much esteemed as
a lucid narrative of essentials for the general reader.
The new edition not only adds the events of the
1930's and 40's, but incorporates the new informa-
tion on earlier periods made available by the series
on the relations of Canada and the United States
(nos. 3552, 3553) as well as in the writings of in-
dividual scholars. The turbulent period of the
Revolution and the War of 18 12 has been followed
by over 140 years of peace on an unfortified frontier,
but the authors' chapters following the Peace of
Ghent are entitled "Moments of Crisis," "Major
Boundary Disputes," "Minor Boundary Disputes,"
and "The Fisheries Controversy." They are con-
cerned to make the point, in view of these and the
persistence of annexationist sentiment in the United
States, that the maintenance of peace since 18 15 has
not been an easy or automatic matter, but a true
achievement of good sense in the conduct of inter-
national affairs by the two peoples.
3556. Levi, Werner. American-Australian rela-
tions. Minneapolis, University of Minne-
sota Press, 1947. 184 p. 47-1789 E183.8.A8L4
Bibliography: p. 174-180.
Early commerce, American whaling and sealing
in the South Pacific, the California and Australian
gold rushes, 19th-century imperialism, and the two
world wars are treated. The rise of the United
States as a predominant power in the Pacific was
paralleled by the rise of Australia as another Pacific
power, with major and sometimes conflicting
interests.
3557. Roberts, Henry L., and Paul A. Wilson.
Britain and the United States: problems in
cooperation, a joint report prepared by Henry L.
Roberts, rapporteur, a study group. Council on
Foreign Relations, New York, and Paul A. Wilson,
422 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
rapporteur, study group, Royal Institute of Inter-
national Affairs, London. New York, Published
for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper,
1953. xvii, 253 p. 53-9066 E183.8.G7R68
A consideration of problems of most concern to
the two nations during the period January 195 1
to June 1952, as discussed by a joint study group
of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Royal
Institute of International Affairs. Topics considered
are: relations with the Soviet bloc, the United Na-
tions and collective security, economic policy, re-
armament, global military problems, the political,
economic, and military organization of Western
Europe, and strategic problems in the Mediterra-
nean, Middle East, and Far East.
3558. Soulsby, Hugh G. The right of search and
the slave trade in Anglo-American relations,
1814-1862. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1933.
185 p. (The Johns Hopkins University studies in
historical and political science, ser. LI, no. 2)
33-29624 H31.J6, ser. 51, no. 2
JX5268.S6 1933
Bibliography: p. 177-181.
The African slave trade, which had been declared
illegal by both the United States and Great Britain,
was prolonged far into the 19th century because of
diplomatic disagreement over the freedom of the
seas, and because southerners regarded agreement
on an antislave patrol as a preliminary to assault on
slavery in the United States. By declaring the trade
in slaves to be piracy, the two governments overcame
the issue of freedom of the seas, but it was not until
the Civil War that an effective patrol could be set
up.
3559. Williams, Mary Wilhelmine. Anglo-Amer-
ican Isthmian diplomacy, 1815-1915. [Bal-
timore, The Lord Baltimore Press, 1916] 356 p.
(Prize essays of the American Historical Associa-
tion, 1914) 16-14677 JX1398W5 1916a
Thesis (Ph.D. — Leland Stanford Junior Univer-
sity, 1914)
Bibliography: p. 33J-345-
Unravels the protracted Anglo-American disputes
over the British occupation of parts of British Hon-
duras, the Bay Islands, and the Mosquito Coast of
Honduras and Nicaragua, and over a projected
Isthmian canal connecting the Caribbean with the
Pacific. The various settlements made in the Clay-
ton-Bulwer Treaty of 1850 and the Hay-Pauncefote
Treaty of 1901 are discussed. As cordiality between
the two countries increased, the British ceased their
efforts to counter American influence in Central
America.
Av. RUSSIA
3560. Bailey, Thomas A. America faces Russia;
Russian-American relations from early times
to our day. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1950.
375 p. 50-10009 E183.8.R9B3
Bibliography: p. 357-368.
The author offers "a broad survey of Russian-
American relations from earliest contacts to recent
times," emphasizing American public opinion and
diplomatic attitudes. Common distrust of England,
he thinks, lay behind the 19th-century "friendship"
of Russia and the United States. About half the
book is devoted to the present century. Attitudes
toward Russian claims on the Pacific Northwest, the
visit of the Russian fleet to America during the
Polish crisis of 1863, the anti-Jewish pogroms of the
late 19th and early 20th centuries, the Russo-Japanese
War, the Russian revolutions of 1905 and 1917, and
the Soviet regime are discussed.
3561. Barghoorn, Frederick Charles. The Soviet
image of the United States; a study in dis-
tortion. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950. xviii,
297 p. 50-10897 DK69.B3
Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale
University.
The author served as press attache in the Ameri-
can Embassy in Moscow, 1942-47. He regards
Soviet propaganda against the United States as a
major instrument of Russia's "aggressive foreign
policy." His work studies the doctrine, opinions,
and attitudes of the Soviet leadership as manifested
in propaganda reaching the Russian people in the
form of speeches, journalism, and literature, in
which postwar American foreign and atomic policy,
attitudes on war and peace, and the American
domestic scene are interpreted. During his residence
in the Soviet Union, the United States was first pic-
tured as an ally, for whom there was only limited
sympathy, and then as a rival not to be feared. In
the Soviet propaganda image since the war, Amer-
icans become the slaves of capitalist exploitation, and
American foreign policy essentially deceitful and
aggressive. One chapter discusses the author's per-
sonal contacts with Soviet citizens and concludes
that there is still a reservoir of good feeling toward
the United States.
3562. Dennett, Raymond, and Joseph E. Johnson,
eds. Negotiating with the Russians. [Bos-
ton] World Peace Foundation, 1951. 310 p.
51-8287 DK69.D4
Contents. — Negotiating on military assistance,
1943-1945, by J. R. Deane. — Negotiating under
lend-lease, 1942-1945, by J. N. Hazard. — Negotiat-
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 423
ing the Nuremberg trial agreements, 1945, by S. S.
Alderman. — Negotiating at Bretton Woods, 1944,
by R. F. Mikesell. — Negotiating to establish the Far
Eastern Commission, 1945, by G. H. Blakeslee. —
Negotiating on refugees and displaced persons, 1946,
by E. F. Penrose. — Negotiating on the Balkans,
1945-1947, by M. Ethridge and C. E. Black. — Nego-
tiating on atomic energy, 1946-1947, by F. Osborn. —
Negotiating on cultural exchange, 1947, by E. J.
Simmons. — Some Soviet techniques of negotiation,
by P. E. Mosely.
Ten experts discuss their experiences in negotia-
tions with Russia during the war years and after.
Although each presents his own point of view, the
common experience was that the Soviet negotiators
were uniformly suspicious, even during periods of
supposed cooperation, and without authority to de-
part from previously chosen positions. However,
this did not preclude sudden changes in Russian
policy, which were defended with equal tenacity
although sometimes contradicting previous positions.
3563. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The road to Teheran;
the story of Russia and America, 1781-1943.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1944. 279 p.
A44-531 E183.8.R9D8
"Bibliographical notes": p. 263-268.
The author is a professor of history at Ohio State
University. Despite periods of marked friction,
Russian-American relations were generally friendly
throughout the whole period 1 781-1943. Common
rivalry with Great Britain in the 19th century, the
challenge of Germany and Japan in the 20th, and a
love of peace are seen as factors drawing the two
peoples together, and ideological antagonism as a
contrary influence. The isolationism of the United
States and Russia is represented as a precipitating
cause of World War II. The Axis attack drew them
together once more.
3564. Laserson, Max M. The American impact
on Russia, diplomatic and ideological, 1784—
1917. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 441 p.
50-12185 E183.8.R9L35
About half the book is devoted to the period up
to the American Civil War. American influence is
discovered in the writings of Radishchev, the rela-
tions of Alexander I with Jefferson and J. Q. Adams,
the Decembrist revolt of 1825, and Turgenev's anti-
slavery attitude. The unfriendly attitude of Pal-
merston and Napoleon III toward the two countries
tended to draw them together during the Civil War
period. The writings of Herzen and Cherny-
shevski are examined for American allusions, and
the influence of the writings of Henry George and
George Kennan is discussed.
3565. Smith, Walter Bedell. My three years in
Moscow. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1950.
346 p. 49-50332 E183.8.R9S6
The author, our Ambassador to Russia during
1946-49, offers a personal narrative, stressing his im-
pressions and experiences with Russians on both a
high and low level. After discussing Molotov,
Stalin, and their entourage, General Smith com-
ments on Soviet diplomats, police state methods, eco-
nomics, and propaganda; Titoism; the 1947 Mos-
cow Conference; the Berlin blockade of 1948; and
Russian religion and culture. He found the Soviet
Union a land overshadowed by tyranny and poverty,
the Soviet Government bent on world domination,
and the American legation a conscientious group
carrying on under serious difficulties.
3566. Sorokin, Pitirim A. Russia and the United
States. 2d ed. London, Stevens, 1950.
213 p. (The Library of world affairs, no. 15)
52-1631 E183.8.R9S7 1950
"Published under the auspices of the London In-
stitute of World Affairs."
The author is professor of sociology at Harvard
University. After an academic, journalistic, and
political career in Russia, he was condemned to
death by the Soviet Government, but was allowed
to emigrate to the United States in 1923. Like other
commentators, he remarks on the unique period of
unbroken peace between the United States and Rus-
sia. The vital interests of the two countries, he
holds, have never conflicted. The continental posi-
tion of both nations, their frontier experiences, and
their ethnic diversity are seen as similar factors in
development. The author believes that an "essen-
tial sociocultural similarity or congeniality" exists,
and "presages still closer co-operation in the future."
3567. Stettinius, Edward R. Roosevelt and the
Russians; the Yalta Conference; edited by
Walter Johnson. Garden City, N. Y., Doublcday,
1949. xvi, 367 p. 49-10915 D734.C7S8
A defense of the Roosevelt policy at the Yalta
Conference of February 1945. The author was Sec-
retary of State during Roosevelt's last months, 1944-
45. Mr. Stettinius, who died just as this book was
being published, denied that vital interests of the
United States and the free world were sacrificed at
Yalta. "It is not Yalta that is the trouble with the
world today, but subsequent failures to adhere to
the policies Yalta stood for and to carry out agree-
ments that were reached there." Yalta, he main-
tained, represented not appeasement but an attempt
to set the world on the road to lasting peace.
3568. Tompkins, Pauline. American-Russian re-
lations in the Far East. New York, Mac
424 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
millan, 1949. xiv, 426 p. 49-48919 DS518.T62
"Undertaken initially in fulfillment of a require-
ment for the degree of doctor of philosophy [Fletcher
School of Law and Diplomacy, 1948]."
Bibliography: p. 398-413.
The emphasis here is upon relations since 1917.
American participation in the allied intervention
in Siberia, 1918-20, is regarded as an act of political
expediency, directed primarily at Japan. Other
topics treated are the Washington Conference of
1921-22, the Japanese attack on China, and Ameri-
can policy toward Japan and Korea during World
War II, as it affected Soviet relations. The author
states that the 19th-century "friendship"' of America
and Russia was a byproduct of practical politics.
With American intervention in the Pacific and
growing cooperation with Great Britain, antagonism
has increased. Dr. Tompkins regards the balance
of power theory of world politics as certain to bring
disaster at a time when the alternative is to unite
or perish.
Avi. OTHER EUROPEAN NATIONS
3569. Chadwick, French Ensor. The relations of
the United States and Spain, diplomacy.
New York, Scribner, 1909. 610 p.
9-31968 E183.8.S7C4
The author sees the Spanish-American War as
the culmination of a long racial and cultural con-
flict. The deterioration of Spanish rule in Cuba is
ascribed to Spain's failure to establish democratic
institutions in the homeland. About half of the
book is devoted to the diplomacy of the American
Revolution, boundary problems, and the American
attitude toward the independence movement in
Latin America; the second half to the Cuban ques-
tion in American politics and diplomacy.
3570. Clay, Lucius D. Decision in Germany.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. xiv,
522 p. 5°"58l3 DD257.C55
General Clay served as Deputy Military Governor,
1945-47, ar,d as Military Governor, 1947-49; his
book is rather impersonal and official in manner.
The period was characterized by disagreement with
Russia over German policy, culminating in the at-
tempt of the Russians to drive the allies out of
Berlin and the decision to establish a West German
federal government. The author regards the unity
of Germany as essential to European peace, for "no
lasting stability may be expected as long as 65,000,000
persons in the heart of Europe are divided against
their will."
3571. Fogdall, Soren J. M. P. Danish-American
diplomacy, 1 776-1 920. Iowa City, The Uni-
versity, 1922. 171 p. (University of Iowa studies
in the social sciences, v. 8, no. 2)
22-27280 H3 1 .18, v. 8, no. 2
JX1428.S3F6
Bibliography: p. 159-165.
Principal emphasis is placed on maritime rights,
such as the rights of American men of war in the
Revolution, and the right to be free of dues for transit
of the Sound into the Baltic, which Denmark con-
tinued to collect until 1857. The failure to buy the
Danish West Indies in 1867, and their subsequent
purchase in 1916 are discussed.
3572. Hayes, Carlton J. H. The United States and
Spain: an interpretation. New York, Sheed
& Ward, 1951. 198 p. 51—13793 E183.8.S7H3
"Select bibliography": p. 193-198.
The author, professor emeritus of history at Co-
lumbia University, served as Ambassador to Spain
during 1942-45, and related his experiences in War-
time Mission in Spain, 1 942-1 945 (New York,
Macmillan, 1945. 313 p.). This book is based on
a series of lectures delivered at the College of the
Holy Cross, Worcester, Mass. Old misunderstand-
ings and prejudices are represented as having dis-
rupted after the early 1890's the good feeling which
generally prevailed through the 19th century. The
author discusses misconceptions about Spain, con-
trasting political traditions, the Spanish Republic of
1 93 1, the Civil War of 1936-39, and relations with
Spain since 1939. General Franco, he is convinced,
was never taken in by Hider and was never a
catspaw for the Axis. He maintains that Spain and
Hispanic America are essential to the Atlantic
community.
3573. Reitzel, William. The Mediterranean: its
role in America's foreign policy. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 195 p. 48-7273 D843.R4
Issued by Yale Institute of International Studies.
"References": p. [187]— 189.
American official interest in the Mediterranean is
here interpreted as principally a byproduct of World
War II. In the author's judgment, "the key aim of
an American policy for the Mediterranean will be to
maintain its internal stability in order to be free to
use it as a strategic unit." British interest in the
area, it is pointed out, is more closely related to
imperial interests, causing a basic divergence in
point of view.
Avii. LATIN AMERICA: GENERAL
3574. Bemis, Samuel Flagg. The Latin American
policy of the United States, an historical in-
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 425
terpretation. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1943.
xiv, 470 p. 43-51167 F1418.B4
Half-title: Institute of International Studies, Yale
University.
Aims to provide in one volume a historical in-
terpretation of Latin American policy since the be-
ginning of the Republic. American policy, it is
asserted, has been based upon the Nation's inde-
pendence under a republican government, its con-
tinental expansion, and the security requirements
of the resultant continental republic. "These funda-
mentals naturally favored independence for the
whole New World, republican self-government for
the new states, opposition to European intervention
in their affairs . . . and political solidarity of the
nations of the New World." The last part of the
book is devoted to the "good neighbor" policy of
Franklin D. Roosevelt, which the author regards as
an attempt to base United States policy on the con-
cept of hemisphere security rather than the security
of the United States alone. The narrative is brought
down to the Rio de Janeiro Conference of January
1942.
3575. Gantenbein, James W., ed. The evolution of
our Latin-American policy, a documentary
record. New York, Columbia University Press,
1950. xxvii, 979 p. 49-50406 F1418.G2
A collection of documents, largely drawn from
U. S. Government publications, which go back as
far as 1796 but mostly belong to the 20th century.
They are arranged under six principal headings:
"General Principles," "The Monroe Doctrine,"
"Independence of Cuba," "The Panama Canal Con-
cession," "Certain Controversies with Mexico," and
"Interventions in Nicaragua, Haiti, and the Domini-
can Republic." Appendixes are concerned with
selected documents of successive Pan American con-
ferences and with other international agreements,
in all but one of which the United States partici-
pated.
3576. Guerrant, Edward O. Roosevelt's good
neighbor policy. Albuquerque, University
of New Mexico Press, 1950. 235 p. (Publication
of the School of Inter-American Affairs, the Univer-
sity of New Mexico. Inter-American studies, 5)
50-5678 F1418.G93
Bibliography: p. 215-225.
In the estimation of Professor Guerrant, "the
United States has never had a foreign policy toward
any area that was more successful than the Good
Neighbor Policy was from 1933 to 1945." That
policy is here analyzed in five topical chapters:
"Abandonment of Intervention," "Recognition of
New Government," "Quest for Law," "Expanding
Commerce," and "Cultural and Scientific Rela-
tions." Two concluding chapters narrate relevant
events during the crisis years of 1939-41, and during
World War II. Non-intervention, the author sug-
gests, has been "criticized by liberal elements in those
nations which were oppressed by tyrannical govern-
ments." After the death of President Roosevelt the
efforts of the American Government to cultivate the
good will of Latin America rather suddenly
slackened.
3577. Perkins, Dexter. A history of the Monroe
doctrine. [Rev. ed.] Boston, Little, Brown,
1955. xiv, 462 p. 55-10752 JX1425.P384 1955
Bibliography: p. [42o]~435.
This work was originally published in 1941 under
the title Hands Off, and continued as well as sum-
marized the author's detailed studies contained in
three works of distinguished scholarship: The Mon-
roe Doctrine, 182 3-1 826 (Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1932. 280 p.); The Monroe Doctrine,
1826-186'] (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1933.
580 p.); and The Monroe Doctrine, i86j-ig.oj (Bal-
timore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1937. 480 p.). "In
the field of politics," the author believed, "there are
few more unqualified faiths than the faith of the
American people in the Monroe Doctrine . . .
There are few subjects, too, with regard to which it
has been necessary to clear away so many misap-
prehensions." To this end he produced, for the
general reader, his one-volume history of the Doc-
trine. While the background of this "prohibition
on the part of the United States against the extension
of European influence and power to the New
World" included the conception of the two spheres,
the separation of the New World from the Old, it
never was intended to bar the way "to American
diplomatic or physical action in other parts of the
globe." British and French diplomacy in Texas,
French intervention in Mexico, the Spanish reoc-
cupation of Santo Domingo, the Venezuela-British
Guiana boundary dispute, Isthmian Canal diplo-
macy, and American intervention in the Caribbean
are among the episodes described. The new edition
covers developments from 194 1 to 1954, aru'> against
those who regard the Doctrine as outmoded, con-
tends that "the physical integrity of the cisatlantic
area, and its protection against subversion, will con-
tinue to be a matter of concern."
3578. Stuart, Graham II. Latin America and the
United St. ucs. ^th ed. New York, Apple-
ton-Century-Crofts, 1955. 493 p.
55-5020 F1418.S933 1955
"Supplementary readings" at end of chapters.
This textbook, whose lust edition goes back to
. aims "to give a brief and accurate sur\
the diplomatic and commercial relations between
426 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the United States and those Latin-American coun-
tries with which our interests have been most closely
related." After four preliminary chapters on Pan
Americanism, the development of cooperation by
conference, and the Monroe Doctrine, the course of
United States interests and negotiations is traced in
successive areas: Panama, Mexico, Cuba, the Carib-
bean, Central America, Argentina, Chile, and Brazil.
This 5th edition seeks to indicate the changes
brought about by the Good Neighbor policy, which
inaugurated a new era in the Latin American rela-
tions of the United States. "The Western Hemi-
sphere has set up the Golden Rule as its goal for
the relations between states. Justice and fair deal-
ing no longer end at the national frontiers."
3579. Whitaker, Arthur Preston. The United
States and the independence of Latin Amer-
ica, 1 800-1 830. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press,
1941. xx, 632 p. (The Albert Shaw lectures on
diplomatic history, 1938. The Walter Hines Page
School of International Relations)
41-18981 F1418.W6
"Bibliographical note": p. 603-612.
These lectures analyze in considerable detail
United States policy as affected by Napoleon's vic-
tory in Spain in 1808, the attitude of the despotic
powers in Europe after 18 15, and the British policy
toward Latin America. The "Black Legend" of
Spanish cruelty, despotism, and duplicity had cre-
ated a widespread prejudice which included the
Latin Americans. Nevertheless, for both commer-
cial and ideological reasons, the United States favored
the establishment of independent republican regimes.
In issuing the Monroe Doctrine, President Monroe
"counted upon his very threat of war to forestall
actual war," and to bluff the French "government
into abandoning any plan it might have for inter-
vening in America." Its novelty and its continuing
importance both lay in the fact that it gave official
sanction to "a special policy towards Latin America
which was based on different principles from the
policy of the United States toward the rest of the
world."
Aviii. LATIN AMERICA: INDIVIDUAL
NATIONS
3580. Evans, Henry Clay. Chile and its relations
with the United States. Durham, N. C,
Duke University Press, 1927. 243 p.
27-9852 E183.8.C4E93
Bibliography: p. [22i]-2^.
A Columbia University dissertation which re-
views the relations of the United States with Chile
from 1 8 12 through the close of 1926. Conspicuous
episodes are the Spanish seizure of the Chincha
Islands in 1864; the 10-year War of the Pacific, in
which the United States prevented any European
mediation but failed in its own; the attack on the
Baltimore's crewmen in Valparaiso in 1891, pro-
ducing "the nearest approach to a war that the
United States has ever had with a South American
nation"; Chile's refusal to break with Germany
during World War I; and the failure of American
arbitration during the earlier stages of the Tacna-
Arica dispute. "Possibly no better field could be
chosen to illustrate the difficulties that beset the path
of American diplomats when they attempt to assert
a leadership for their own country in its relations
with the sensitive and proud people of smaller
nations."
3581. Fitzgibbon, Russell H. Cuba and the United
States, 1900-1935. Menasha, Wis., Banta
Pub. Co., 1935. 311 p. 35-9034 F1787.F56
Bibliography: p. [278].
The appointment of General Leonard Wood as
Governor in 1900 is taken as the starting point.
The establishment of the Cuban Republic, the inter-
vention of 1906-9, the Gomez, Menocal, Zayas, and
Machado regimes, Cuban sugar and American tariff
policy, American subscriptions to Cuban loans, and
the abrogation of the Piatt Amendment are among
the subjects discussed. The author aims neither to
defend nor attack American interventionism, but
merely to present a "unified, objective, and scientific
study."
3582. Hill, Lawrence F. Diplomatic relations be-
tween the United States and Brazil. Dur-
ham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1932. 322 p.
32-18335 E183.8.B7H56
Bibliography: p. 306-316.
A historical narrative covering the period 1807-
1930, with emphasis upon the 19th century. At-
tention is focused on the degree of neutrality prac-
ticed by each nation in the course of the interna-
tional and civil wars and insurrections in which
each was involved from the War of 1812 to World
War I. Mr. Hill also examines commercial re-
lations, the consequences of the abolition of the
slave trade, the emigration of Confederate exiles
following the Civil War, and Brazil's change from
empire to republic in 1889.
3583. McCain, William D. The United States and
the Republic of Panama. Durham, N. C,
Duke University Press, 1937. xv, 278 p.
37-2897 F1566.M24
Bibliography: p. 255-267.
A study of the intervention of the United States
in Panama and its subsequent effect upon diplo-
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 427
matic relations with the Panamanian Republic. The
author narrates in detail various disputes with the
United States over the government of the Canal
Zone and the internal affairs of Panama, involving
such problems as the threat of revolution, the rela-
tions of American soldiers with local residents, ex-
propriation of Panama territory for Canal purposes,
interference in Panama road and railroad construc-
tion, and the renegotiation of treaty arrangements in
the administrations of Coolidge and Franklin
Roosevelt.
3584. Montague, Ludwell Lee. Haiti and the
United States, 1714-1938. Durham, N. C,
Duke University Press, 1940. xiv, 308 p.
40-11470 E183.8.H2M6
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Duke University, 1935.
"Bibliography of works cited": p. 293-302.
It is maintained that since 1800 the United States
has recognized that it has a vital strategic interest
in the Caribbean and has not hesitated to defend it,
on occasion even by military intervention in Haiti
and the Dominican Republic. The book surveys
the course of relations since the establishment of
Haitian independence, discussing the American fear
of a slave revolt, projects to colonize freed American
slaves in Haiti, the recognition of Haiti by Lincoln,
annexationist sentiment, American desire for a naval
base, commercial penetration, the interventionist
"corollary" of Theodore Roosevelt to the Monroe
Doctrine, dollar diplomacy, Marine occupation, and
the Good Neighbor policy.
3585. Parks, E. Taylor. Colombia and the United
States, 1765-1934. Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1935. xx, 554 p.
35-25823 E183.8.C7P37
Bibliography: p. 492-529.
This substantial volume opens by narrating the
early history of Colombia, which originally included
Ecuador, Venezuela, and Panama. The United
States recognized Colombian independence in 1822,
but relations were not put on a solid footing until
the treaty of 1846, negotiated at Bogota by Benjamin
A. Bidlack. It guaranteed Colombian sovereignty
in the Isthmus of Panama and remained an im-
portant factor in the Canal question down to the
Panama Revolution of 1903. Dr. Parks subjects
some of the arguments whereby President Theodore
Roosevelt justified his support of that revolution to
severe criticism. The Wilson administration's at-
tempt to indemnify Colombia with 25 million dol-
lars went unratified by the Senate until 1921, when
the desire of American business interests to develop
Colombian oil and other natural resources power-
fully reinforced the desire for a rapprochement
with the disgruntled Republic.
3586. Rippy, James Fred. The United States and
Mexico. Rev. ed. New York, Crofts, 1931.
423 p. 31-18162 E183.8.M6R7 1931
Bibliography: p. 387-396.
Two-thirds of the book is devoted to the period
before 1900, with especial attention to the diplomacy
of the Mexican War period and after. The expan-
sionist program of President Buchanan in 1857 and
French intervention in Mexico during the Civil War
are discussed. The Pershing expedition against
Villa and the diplomacy of Dwight W. Morrow are
covered. American policy is represented as moti-
vated by varying sentiments, sometimes aggressive,
sometimes idealistic.
3587. Tansill, Charles Callan. The United States
and Santo Domingo, 1798-1873; a chapter in
Caribbean diplomacy. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1938. 487 p. 38-32982 E183.8.D6T3
At head of title: The Walter Hines Page School
of International Relations, the Johns Hopkins
University.
The subject is relations with both Haiti and the
Republic of Santo Domingo in the period covered,
with principal emphasis on the latter. The southern
fear of a slave revolt in imitation of the events of
1791, war between Haiti and the Dominican Repub-
lic, and the expansionist policy of President Grant
are considered, as well as various efforts to obtain
naval bases on the island or to forestall their estab-
lishment by other nations. The author is professor
of diplomatic history at Georgetown University,
Washington, D. C.
Aix. ASIA
3588. Agwani, Mohammed Shafi. The United
States and the Arab world, 1945-1952.
Aligarh, Institute of Islamic Studies, Muslim Uni-
versity, 1955. 184, ix p.
57-15226 DS63.2.U5A65 1955
This thesis submitted to the University of Ut-
recht offers a detailed critique of America's conduct
toward the Arab States since the war. The author
believes that American prestige, laboriously built
up over the years by the efforts of American mis-
sionaries and educators, and confirmed by Wil
sonian idealism, has recently been shattered by the
United States' support of Zionism and of Israel, of
reactionary nati mucins, and of the interests
of British and French imperialism.
3589. Ballantine, Joseph W. Formosa, a problem
for United States foreign policy. Washing-
ton, Brookings Institution, 1952. Zl8 p.
53-5824 DS89;
428 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
After a brief discussion of Formosa under Chinese
and Japanese rule, post-World War II developments
and the problems posed for American foreign policy
in Formosa are examined. Topics covered are: the
neutralization of Formosa by the United States fleet,
American economic and military aid, Formosa as a
stake in the international struggle for power, and the
Japanese peace treaty of 1952. Formosa having
been kept in friendly hands, the problems now are
how far the claims of the Nationalist government to
rule the mainland should be countenanced, whether
the Communist government should be recognized,
and to what extent the United States may count on
its allies for support in its Formosan policy. The
stated purpose of the book is not so much to find
answers as to assemble and arrange the facts neces-
sary for decision. The author was Director of the
Office of Far Eastern Affairs of the Department of
State, 1944-45.
3590. Battistini, Lawrence H. Japan and America,
from earliest times to the present. With 5
maps. New York, J. Day, 1954. 198 p. (An Asia
book) 54-5881 E183.8.J3B3 1954
A rapid survey of diplomatic relations which re-
serves the greater part of its space for the war of 194 1
and its causes, and the occupation and rehabilitation
of Japan. The reaction in American occupation
policy as the Communist menace became apparent
and the necessity of restoring Japan to full economic
self-sufficiency are stressed. A more analytical
treatment of current problems will be found in a
symposium sponsored by the Institute of Pacific Re-
lations of Hawaii, ] apart and America Today (Stan-
ford, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1953.
166 p.).
3591. Battistini, Lawrence H. The United States
and Asia. New York, Praeger, 1955. 370
p. maps. (Books that matter)
55-11534 DS518.8.B35 1955a
Bibliography: p. 345—351.
Introduces the lay reader and the student to the
development of our relations with the Pacific area
as well as with Asia. From 1784 to the Spanish-
American War (1898) our interest in Asia and the
Pacific was essentially commercial, and accordingly
United States policy in the area supported equality
of trading rights and the maintenance of the sover-
eignty of Japan and China. The establishment of
America as a Pacific power in 1898 forced the
United States into active military and political par-
ticipation in the Far East at a time when we main-
tained our isolation from the affairs of Europe. Re-
lations with China were always friendly, but it was
not until World War II that this interest manifested
itself in the form of aid and advice to stop first the
Japanese, and then the Chinese Communists. The
author shows how the United States originally en-
couraged the rise of Japan, but after 1907 worked to
contain that Japanese expansion, which at last chal-
lenged our Pacific position in the 1940's, to its own
undoing. After summarizing our relations with
Asian nationalism and the new Southeast Asian na-
tions, the author concludes that we should assume
the permanence of their nationhood, and afford them
an example of the highest political morality in order
to encourage them to resist Communist encroach-
ment.
3592. Dulles, Foster Rhea. China and America;
the story of their relations since 1784.
Princeton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1946.
277 p. A46-14 E183.8.C5D8
Bibliography: p. 263-267.
A survey for the general reader, half of which is
concerned with Chinese-American relations before
1900. Mr. Dulles stresses the American dream of
China as a vast market for American exports. He
demonstrates that while the United States has always
talked of friendship with China, in times of crisis,
such as the Manchurian affair of 1931, it has merely
sent diplomatic protests in order to protect our
commercial interests, and then stood aside while
events have taken their course. The Taiping re-
bellion, our Chinese exclusion laws, the Boxer
rebellion, World War I, the Washington Confer-
ence of 1921, Chinese nationalism, the spread of
Japanese aggression, and World War II are con-
sidered in their effect on our relations with China.
The apathy and ignorance of the American public,
and their failure to support government leaders who
are better informed, are blamed by Mr. Dulles for
our failure to act constructively in behalf of China
throughout the history of our mutual relations.
3593. Feis, Herbert. The China tangle; the
American effort in China from Pearl Harbor
to the Marshall mission. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 445 p. maps.
53-10142 E183.8.C5F4
An uncontroversial attempt to clarify the policy
of the United States toward China during the period
of hostilities with Japan and immediately after.
The author regards our China policy as a "tale of
crumpled hopes and plans that went awry," the
reason being that the war in the Pacific ended
abruptly before our effort in behalf of China reached
its planned fullness. The military demobilization
at the end of 1945 revealed a desire to renounce the
burdens thrust upon us. The narrative is built
about the rivalry of the Chinese Communists and
Nationalists in the face of Japanese aggression, the
Chinese-Russian agreement of 1945, the Hurley
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 429
mission, and the Russian and Chinese Communist
occupation of Manchuria.
3594. Griswold, Alfred Whitney. The Far East-
ern policy of the United States. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 530 p.
38-29014 DS518.8.G75
At head of half-tide: Institute of International
Studies, Yale University.
Bibliography: p. 503-517.
Various events in the period 1898- 1938 are dis-
cussed as they reflected American policy: the annex-
ation of the Philippines, the "Open Door" notes of
John Hay, the failure of "dollar diplomacy," recog-
nition of a special Japanese interest in China in the
ambiguous Lansing-Ishii agreement of 1917, the
question of the German Pacific Islands after World
War I, the consolidation of the status quo in the
Washington treaties, Oriental exclusion as a diplo-
matic and political issue, the efforts of Secretary
of State Stimson to apply sanctions against Japan,
and the Roosevelt policy toward Japanese aggression
in China.
3595. Grunder, Garel A., and William E. Livezey.
The Philippines and the United States. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1951. 315 p.
51-6997 DS685.G75
Bibliography: p. 286-305.
A study in the origin and evolution of United
States policy toward the Philippines during the past
half century. Special attention is given to economic
relationships, the evolution of political institutions,
and the independence question. The defeat of the
Spanish fleet in Manila Bay, 1898, annexation and
pacification, tariff problems, the problem of ecclesi-
astical lands, the Moros, the Jones Act of 1916,
Governor-Generals Leonard Wood and Henry L.
Stimson, the Commonwealth period, Japanese oc-
cupation, and reconstruction and independence are
discussed. The importance of the islands as collab-
orators in the Far Eastern policy of the United States
is stressed.
3596. Latourette, Kenneth S. The American rec-
ord in the Far East, 1945-195 1. New York,
Macmillan, 1952. 208 p. 52-12394 DS518.8.L26
"Issued under the auspices of the American Insti-
tute of Pacific Relations."
The author's theme is the "ever deepening en-
tanglement" of the United States in the affairs of the
region, which he explains as the result of the his-
toric westward movement of the American people.
Despite the confusion of American aims in Asia,
he maintains that an American policy exists, namely:
sympathy for the attempt of the peoples of Asia to
achieve their goals and ambitions; containment of
Communism, by force if necessary, but also by finan-
cial, technical, and educational aid; support of the
United Nations; maintenance of military bases; and
subordination of Asiatic to European affairs in over-
all foreign policy. The American policy in China,
where the Communists gained the principal benefit
of the American defeat of Japan, was a failure; its
success in other areas is only tentative. The author,
who has a missionary background, regards the true
struggle as ideological. Although he does not be-
lieve that democracy in the American sense is now
possible in China, he condemns Chinese Commu-
nism as a perversion of the Western Christian tra-
dition and a totalitarian creed.
3597. Oliver, Robert T. Why war came in Korea.
New York, Fordham University Press; D. X.
McMullen Co., distributors, 1950. xxvi, 260 p.
50-9923 DS917.O4
The strategic importance of Korea, the military
buildup of North Korea, the military weakness of
South Korea, the withdrawal of American troops,
the inference that the United States would not de-
fend Korea, and the danger to Soviet propaganda of
a successful democratic regime in South Korea art-
adduced as reasons why war came. The author has
been an adviser of Syngman Rhee.
B. Foreign Relations
Bi. ADMINISTRATION
3598. Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C.
International Studies Group. The admin-
istration of foreign affairs and overseas operation;
a report prepared for the Bureau of the Budget,
Executive Office of the President. Washington,
1951. xxv, 380 p. 51-61182 JX1705.B7
The study is intended to supplement the re-
searches of the Commission on Organization of the
Executive Branch (Hoover Commission). New
problems in the postwar world are considered: the
administration of foreign economic aid, military
considerations affecting foreign affairs, the need
for program coordination in the conduct of foreign
affairs, and problems of personnel management. Is
430 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
sues are objectively stated, the arguments on both
sides presented, and possible solutions suggested.
3599. Childs, James Rives. American foreign
service; with a foreword by Joseph C. Grew.
New York, Holt, 1948. 261 p.
48-5092 JX1705.C45
3600. U. S. Dept. of State. Secretary of State's
Public Committee on Personnel. Toward a
stronger Foreign Service; report. [Washington,
U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1954. 70 p. ([U. S.]
Dept. of State Publication 5458. Department and
Foreign Service series, 36) SD54-7 JK851.A435
The first title is an introduction by a career diplo-
mat to the organization and work of the Foreign
Service as governed by the sweeping Foreign Serv-
ice Act of 1946, which is printed as Appendix A
(p. 157-21 1 ). Initial chapters trace the evolution
of the Service since 1789, and describe its career
aspects, including the qualifications it demands.
Its relations to other parts of the Department of
State, and to other agencies of the U. S. Govern-
ment, are considered. The Paris Embassy, the
"showcase of the Diplomatic Service" with its 600
staff members (30 times the number in 1912), is then
chosen for a case study and exhibited in operation
at various levels: the ambassador, the administrative
units, and the four main sections: political, consular,
economic, and information and cultural relations.
Appendix B offers comparative data on the British
and French foreign services. Toward a Stronger
Foreign Service is the work of a committee of
prominent educators and business men which
recommended integrating the Foreign Service with
Department personnel and liberalizing and expand-
ing recruitment policies, so that American repre-
sentation abroad would be more adequate to our
leading role in world affairs. Tables and charts sup-
plement the background information of this study
of the Foreign Service and its personnel. The Com-
mittee chairman, Henry M. Wriston, in his Di-
plomacy in a Democracy (New York, Harper, 1956.
115 p.), stresses the importance of a Foreign Service
composed of experts, whose pivotal role is preserv-
ing peace by maintaining the American alliance
system and containing the aggressions of potential
enemies.
3601. Hunt, Gaillard. The Department of State
of the United States; its history and func-
tions. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1914.
459 p. 14-14205 JK853.H8
"Bibliographical note": p. [438]~439.
3602. Stuart, Graham H. The Department of
State; a history of its organization, procedure,
and personnel. New York, Macmillan, 1949.
517 p. 49-11378 JK853.S84
These two works are both administrative histories
of the Department of State; they supplement each
other admirably, and the older of the two is by no
means obsolete. Gaillard Hunt (1 862-1924) served
for many years in responsible posts in the Depart-
ment and produced the first version of his work for
use at the Chicago World's Fair of 1893. It is par-
ticularly useful for the antecedents of the Depart-
ment, the Continental Congress' Committee for
Foreign Affairs, and the Confederation's Depart-
ment of Foreign Affairs, and for the multiple func-
tions, in addition to the conduct of foreign relations,
which were imposed upon the Department of State
after its organization in 1789. At various times the
State Department had competence in a variety of
domestic concerns, such as patents, copyrights, census
returns, the territories of the United States, the cus-
tody of historic documents, etc., which are now
handled by specialized agencies; this book is the
most convenient source of information for such ac-
tivities. Professor Stuart, on the other hand, is
almost exclusively concerned with the foreign affairs
function, as the Department itself has been in the
more recent period. He traces the organization, pro-
cedures, and personnel concerned in this function in
a chronological treatment of the terms of successive
secretaries of state from Thomas Jefferson (1790-93)
to George C. Marshall (1947-40); his midway point
falls in the administration of William Jennings
Bryan (1913-15). "Policy problems are discussed
only where they are vitally connected with, or illus-
trative of, the methods employed by the Depart- 1
ment officials in the performance of their duties."
3603. Kent, Sherman. Strategic intelligence for .
American world policy. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1949. 226 p.
49-8503 JF1525.T6K4
The author, formerly professor of history at Yale
University, has been associated with the Office of
Strategic Services, the State Department, the Na-
tional War College, and the Central Intelligence
Agency. He defines intelligence as "the knowledge
which our highly placed civilian and militarv men
must have to safeguard the national welfare." He
analyzes it into knowledge of three main kinds:
basic descriptive, current reportorial, and specula-
tive-evaluative. It takes an organization to produce
such knowledge, and Part II deals with the organ-
izational and administrative problems of central and
departmental intelligence. Part III considers the
activities required to produce intelligence, such as
surveillance and research. The author is convinced
that the integrity and objectivity of intelligence can
be preserved only if the producers are kept adminis-
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 43 1
tratively separate from the consumers. Roger Hils-
man's Strategic Intelligence and National Decisions
(Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 187 p.) is an at-
tempt to ascertain the doctrines concerning their
functions and responsibilities that prevail inside and
out of the national intelligence agencies, and to com-
pare and criticize them in the interest of a greater
interpenetration of knowledge and action. The re-
search agencies, he believes, should "be thinking in
terms of real problems and of the alternatives to
meet these problems."
3604. McCamy, James L. The administration of
American foreign affairs. New York,
Knopf, 1950. xiii, 364, x p.
50-8595 JK853.M28 1950
The United States is here seen as lagging in the
efficient organization of its foreign affairs agencies.
The Department of State is criticized for its diffusion
of activities, with "consequent confusion of total
policy" and inadequate staff. The foreign affairs
responsibilities of the President are not effectively
coordinated, outside the work of the Bureau of the
Budget, the National Security Council, and various
other advisory bodies. The organization and use
of information are criticized. Congress is seen as
unable to fulfill its responsibility of devoting the
necessary time and thought to the formulation of
policy, and as failing to appropriate sufficient funds
for the conduct of foreign relations.
3605. Snyder, Richard C, and Edgar S. Furniss.
American foreign policy: formulation,
principles, and programs. New York, Rinehart,
1954. 864 p. 54-9560 JX1416.S55
"Selected bibliography" at end of chapters.
A systematic introduction to the problems en-
countered by American foreign policy in our day,
which are of so altered a character since 1939 that
the authors speak of "the revolution in American
foreign policy." The historical introduction takes
its departure from 1898. The bulk of the text is
in two parts, one on structure and processes of policy
making, and the other on postwar politics in various
spheres and areas. Attention is called to the multi-
plicity of agencies and voices in the American
"decision-making process." Economic and ideolo-
gical foreign policy receive separate treatment. In
both Europe and the Far East, the "falsity of
American wartime estimates" of capacities and in-
tentions receives much of the blame for subsequent
difficulties.
3606. Stuart, Graham H. American diplomatic
and consular practice. 2d ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1952. 477 p.
52-13689 JX1705.S75 1952
Bibliography: p. 453-460.
A historical and functional study of the admin-
istrative practices of the Department of State and
the United States Foreign Service. The organization
of the Department, the Foreign Service, diplomatic
duties, rights, and immunities, consular organization
and pracdces, and a history of a representative em-
bassy and consulate abroad (Paris) are among the
subjects included. Lists of former secretaries of
state and diplomatic representatives at various im-
portant posts are appended.
3607. Thomson, Charles A. H. Overseas infor-
mation service of the United States Govern-
ment. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1948.
397 P- . 48-28231 E744.T5
An administrative history of various official serv-
ices of the United States Government, 1941-48. The
wartime operations of the Office of War Information
are covered in detail. Since the Smith-Mundt Act,
under which most of the Government's later infor-
mation activities have been carried on, was not passed
until 1948, the book is of slight value for the period
since its publication. The final fourth of the book
is devoted to a discussion of Government informa-
tion policies.
3608. Woodrow Wilson Foundation. Study
Group, 1950-51. United States foreign
policy: its organization and control; report. Wil-
liam Yandell Elliott, chairman. Pref. by Harry D.
Gideonse. New York, Columbia University Press,
1952. xviii, 288 p.
52-14095 JX1416.W63 1950/51
The report of a study group whose object was
to stimulate academic interest in the theory and
practice of United States foreign policy, and to select
general problems of theoretical and practical signifi-
cance for future study. The American system of
politics by pressure and adjustment, it is main-
tained, has come under a new influence: its effect
on foreign relations. Naivete about human nature,
the problem of national survival, the overemphasis
on economic factors, and the necessity of combining
morality with power are among the subjects dis-
cussed. The effect of the constitutional separation
of powers on foreign policy is analyzed, and some
changes making for greater efficiency are proposed.
Bii. DEMOCRATIC CONTROL
3609. Almond, Gabriel A. The American people
and foreign policy. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1950. 269 p. 5o-<>.,s .1 E744A47
Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale
University.
432 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
An attempt to place American foreign policy in
its psychological and sociological context. The au-
thor considers complex questions of foreign policy as
being frequently beyond the comprehension of non-
specialists, and states that the function of the public
under a democratic regime is to set up certain policy
criteria in the form of widely held values and ex-
pectations and judge the results of foreign policy
thereby. What is needed, he concludes, is to inform
and moderate the views of the leadership of the
various interest groups which influence public opin-
ion. Mr. Almond thinks that our professional ideal-
ism is particularly out of touch with moral and his-
torical realities, and that it is unduly influential
upon the attitudes of women and young people.
3610. Cheever, Daniel S., and Henry Field Havi-
land. American foreign policy and the
separation of powers. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1952. 244 p. 52-5390 JK570.C45
The authors regard the relationship between the
executive and legislative branches of government as
the weakest and most critical link in the process of
making our foreign policy. The present period is
one of unprecedented difficulty, requiring extra-
ordinary presidential powers, a consistency difficult
to attain when our institutions encourage conflict be-
tween the President and Congress over foreign
policy, and rapid decision. The book consists prin-
cipally of a historical survey of relations between
Congress and the President in the realm of foreign
affairs, with special attention to the larger prob-
lems that have arisen since World War II. Various
means of establishing cooperation through improved
administrative techniques are suggested. Organiza-
tional adjustments must be accompanied by "a far
stronger spirit of mutual trust between the two
branches." Failure to achieve this, it is maintained,
will be at the expense of American interests and
prestige.
361 1. Dahl, Robert A. Congress and foreign
policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950.
305 p. 50-8588 JK1081.D32
Half title: Institute of International Studies, Yale
University.
According to Mr. Dahl, the traditional role of
Congress in the process of foreign policy formula-
tion, that of mediator between the preferences of the
citizenry and the realities of international affairs as
interpreted by executive proposals, is now made ob-
solete by the need for quick decisions. He discusses
alternate solutions to the problem, which a
democracy must solve in order to survive. An in-
creased competence of the electorate in international
affairs is desirable, but neither readily obtainable
nor able to assert itself without adequate policy-
making processes. The President's responsibility
could go on expanding until it excluded Congress
from any concern with foreign policy. The level
of Congressional competence should be raised
through more and better use of experts on committee
staffs, and by establishing some agency to advise
and assist Congress on policy alternatives. Col-
laboration between the executive and Congressional
foreign policy specialists requires Congressional con-
fidence in executive policy decisions, as is the case in
Great Britain. Volume 289 of The Annals of the
American Academy of Political and Social Science
is entitled Congress and Foreign Relations (Phila-
delphia, 1953. 245 p.) and provides, in a group of
informed articles, basic information on the processes
of Congressional foreign policy functions and legis-
lative-executive relations.
3612. Dangerfield, Roy den J. In defense of the
Senate; a study in treaty making. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1933. xvii, 365 p.
diagrs. (1 fold.) 33~3594 JK1170.D3
Bibliography: p. [353H57.
The effect of the constitutional requirement that
treaties obtain a two-thirds majority in the U. S.
Senate is discussed on the basis of 832 treaties signed
before 1928. The treaties which have led to violent
controversy have been relatively few but of great
importance. The history of the treaty-making
power, the development of the Senate Committee on
Foreign Relations, and cases of the amendment or
obstruction of treaties are considered. The treaties
studied are tabulated and classified in the appendix.
3613. Graebner, Norman A. The new isolation-
ism; a study in politics and foreign policy
since 1950. New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 289 p.
56-11573 E835.G7
The "new isolationists," in the author's view, con-
tinue an unrealistic attitude toward foreign policy
which grew up in the 19th century when America's
swift successes were made possible by the British
Navy and the European balance of power. The con-
tinuing illusion of American invincibility has led, in
recent foreign relations, to an attitude rather than a
policy of "unilateral action aimed at Utopian moral
goals." Soon after the election of 1948 the isolation-
ists asserted themselves in and out of Congress and
blamed the frustrations of our foreign policy upon
"incompetence and even betrayal by successive ad-
ministrations." The Truman and Eisenhower ad-
ministrations have both come to terms with their
critics by relying less upon negotiation, and more
upon an inflexible attitude based upon military force,
almost to the exclusion of diplomacy. The rest of
the Free World has no stomach for a policy of liber-
ation which must keep all on the brink of war, and
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 433
would like to meet the altered Russian attitude since
the death of Stalin with genuine negotiation, especi-
ally in the economic sphere. The author calls for "a
flexible and imaginative [American] policy geared
to a world that can find no alternative to coexist-
ence.
3614. Kirk, Grayson L. The study of interna-
tional relations in American colleges and
universities. New York, Council on Foreign Re-
lations, 1947. 113 p. 47-5856 JX1293.U6K5
The author, at the time of publication professor
of international relations, is now president of
Columbia University. The book represents his re-
actions to a series of six regional conferences on
teaching and research in international relations
sponsored by the Council on Foreign Relations in
1946. The question of whether international rela-
tions should remain a subdivision of political science
or become a separate discipline is taken up. Prob-
lems in undergraduate, graduate, and postdoctoral
training and research are surveyed, and constructive
suggestions made. Chapter 3 on graduate training
reviews the types of professional career to which it
may lead, and urges the rigorous selection of candi-
dates by the universities which provide it.
3615. Markel, Lester. Public opinion and foreign
policy, by Lester Markel and [others.]
New York, Published for the Council on Foreign
Relations by Harper, 1949. 227 p.
49-1714 E744.M355
Contents. — Introduction: Opinion, a neglected
instrument, by Lester Markel. — Foreign policy and
opinion at home: Dark areas of ignorance, by
Martin Kriesberg. The number one voice, by
James Reston. The mirror called Congress, by
Cabell Phillips. When the big guns speak, by H. W.
Baldwin. More than diplomacy, by W. P. Davi-
son.— Foreign policy and opinions abroad: Chart
of the cold war, by Shepard Stone. Voices of
America, by W. P. Davison. Assignment for the
press, by C. D. Jackson. Two vital case histories,
by Arnaldo Cortesi and "Observer." — Conclusion:
Opportunity or disaster? By Lester Markel.
A cooperative project of the Council on Foreign
Relations which had for chairman the Sunday editor
of The New Yor^ Times. It is held that Americans
have failed to give public opinion "the emphasis
and direction it must have if it is to be the vital
instrument we need." As a result, it is alleged,
American foreign policy is understood neither at
home nor abroad. Prejudice and lack of interest are
presented as among the reasons why many Ameri-
cans view foreign affairs with indifference. In their
effort to present American policies and motives in
a fair light, our agencies of information have to
431240—60 29
contend, not only with an unscrupulous Communist
counter-propaganda, but with European stereotypes
of American luxury and cultural vacuity.
3616. Westerfield, Bradford. Foreign policy and
party politics: Pearl Harbor to Korea, by
Holt Bradford Westerfield. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1955. 448 p. 55-5990 E806.W455
Bibliography: p. 429-435.
Congressional reaction to administration foreign
policy is examined statistically through its voting
record, descriptively by party organization for for-
eign policy control and historically as manifested by
the role of the parties in American foreign relations
from World War II to the outbreak of the Korean
War. The author contends that the problem of
adequate democratic control of foreign policy may
be resolved through partisanship, bipartisanship, or
extrapartisanship. In the latter, a term coined by
the author, the administration seeks to remove im-
portant foreign policy decisions from the presi-
dential election by securing support outside party
lines from influential opposition leaders, and by
relying upon party discipline within its own party.
Biii. POLICIES
3617. American Foundation for Political Educa-
tion. Readings in American foreign policy,
edited by Robert A. Goldwin. 4th ed. Chicago,
1955. 3 v. maps. 55-4447 E183.7.A55 1955
Contents. — v. 1. Foreign Affairs in the American
democracy. Growth and expansion. The United
States and Europe. The United States and Latin
America. — v. 2. The United States and the Far East.
Some war aims in World War II. From "contain-
ment" to "retaliation." — v. 3. Present problems of
American foreign policy. Some alternatives to pres-
ent foreign policy. What principles guide American
policy?
These volumes are intended to accompany a dis-
cussion program in American foreign policy spon-
sored by this Foundation for promoting "a more
rational approach to politics." The selections, from
contemporary books, articles, speeches, and public
documents, are chosen to present alternative view-
points on problems of foreign policy, and to provide
the reader with a framework of facts sufficient to
enable him to form his own judgment on past and
present policies.
3618. Baldwin, Hanson W. The price of power.
New York, Published for the Council on
Foreign Relations by Harper, 1948. 361 p.
48-6182 E744.B2
Bibliography: p. 329-333.
434 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
An attempt to discover the effect of the technical
and political revolution growing out of World War
II on the strategic position of the United States. The
possible effect upon American democracy of the
necessity to protect the American continent from
attack is regarded as a key problem. The author
considers a prodemocratic attitude more important
to American defense than mere fear of Russia.
Foreign policy must rest on aroused public opinion,
not on predominance of the military in American
counsels. Military, economic, strategic, intelligence,
research, and human problems are discussed.
3619. Barber, Hollis W. Foreign policies of the
United States. New York, Dryden Press,
1953. 614 p. 53-8259 _ E183.7.B34
The outstanding problems of American foreign
policy in 1953 are outlined historically in this college
textbook. After a definition of American foreign
policy as determined by Congress and the admin-
istration, and as executed by the Department of
State and the Foreign Service, the Cold War is
treated in a discussion of American political and
economic relations with the USSR and Western
Europe. Secondly, attention is focused upon hemi-
spheric relations within the Inter-American system
and upon our relations with each nation in that
system. There follows a summary of American re-
lations with China and Japan. Finally there is a
lengthy oudine of America's role in the United
Nations.
3620. Burnham, James. Containment or libera-
tion? An inquiry into the aims of United
States foreign policy. New York, J. Day, 1953.
256 p. 52-12682 E744.B858
The author criticizes the policy enunciated by
George Kennan in 1947, which he identifies as a
policy of containment of Soviet Russia, as (1) ignor-
ing Marxist ideology predicting an inevitable con-
flict between socialism and capitalism; (2) placing
the United States at a disadvantage by adopting a
purely defensive policy; (3) ignoring the fact that
communism cannot be sealed off behind a definable
border; (4) leaving vanquished peoples at the mercy
of Communists; (5) lacking in moral appeal. He
maintains that by consolidating the victories they
have already obtained, the Communists will have
won world domination. The author does not con-
sider ideological considerations important, but never-
theless advocates an ideological campaign against
communism. An extreme statement, which neglects
ways and means, and is often unfair to the propo-
nents of other views.
3621. Davis, Elmer Holmes. Two minutes till
midnight. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill,
1955. 207 p. 55-6823 E835.D38
The author, wartime Director of the Office of War
Information, is a news analyst of long standing.
In this work he considers the threat of mass destruc-
tion in the form of the hydrogen bomb and its fall-
out to the world as a whole and to the United States
in particular. Time, he is convinced, is rapidly run-
ning out for the United States as the leading power
in weapons of mass destruction. Although, at the
time of the author's writing, the United States was
gaining the upper hand in Europe, the Soviet Union
was winning out in Asia, and this, the author
thought, was the beginning of a course of victories
which would ultimately compel the United States to
wage war upon the Soviet Union and its growing
body of satellites.
3622. Dulles, John Foster. War or peace. New
York, Macmillan, 1950. 274 p.
50-7251 E744.D85
The author was an originator of the bipartisan
foreign policy, and has been since 1953 Secretary of
State. Here he regards an eventual war as prob-
able, unless by "positive and well-directed efforts"
it is fended off. The author frequently quotes from
Stalin's Problems of Leninism, which he considers
an authoritative guide to Soviet intentions. He puts
his faith in the moral and religious sense of human-
ity, world organization, and constant vigilance. He
declines to rely on materialism or militarism.
3623. Finletter, Thomas K. Power and policy;
U. S. foreign policy and military power in
the hydrogen age. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1954. 408 p. 54-11328 E835.F5
A powerfully argued view of the consequences of
the twin menaces, atomic fission and Russian ag-
gression, for American foreign policy. Since the
possibility of a devastating sneak attack will always
be present, the primary aim of military policy must
be decisive air-atomic superiority, and that of for-
eign policy a state of enforced universal peace and
disarmament, as the only tolerable way out of pres-
ent dangers. Recent American policies in both
spheres are criticized as inconsistent half-measures.
3624. Fischer, John. Master plan U. S. A., an in-
formal report on America's foreign policy
and the men who make it. New York, Harper,
1951. 253 p. 5I7I3525 E744-F55
An exposition of the foreign policy of the Truman
administration, which is treated as consistently
formulated and comparatively stable. As developed
by the National Security Council, it is regarded as
an attempt to "contain" Russia, through building up
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 435
situations of strength in Europe and other potential
danger points, and as aimed at the preservation of
peace by making the consequences of aggression un-
attractive. China is not regarded as permanendy
hostile as long as the chance of "Titoism" exists.
Technical assistance is regarded as a means of bring-
ing about revolutionary changes favorable to the
West.
3625. Kennan, George F. American diplomacy,
1900-1950. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1 95 1. 146 p. (Charles R. Walgreen Founda-
tion lectures) 51-12883 E744.K3
The author was the first director of the Policy
Planning Staff of the State Department, 1947, a
member of the Institute for Advanced Study, Prince-
ton University, 1950-1952, and Ambassador to Rus-
sia, 1952-1953. These Walgreen lectures, dealing
with the relation of American diplomacy to two
world wars, are followed by two articles on Soviet-
American relations originally printed in Foreign
Affairs. The fifty years under consideration saw the
United States move from a detached neutrality to
leadership in international affairs. Mr. Kennan
shows that during that period American foreign
policy has normally been guided by a "legalistic-
moralistic" approach to international relations.
However, involvement in two global wars and in a
cold war with the Soviet Union indicates that the
conduct of other nations cannot usefully be judged as
good or bad, nor as subject to the Anglo-Saxon con-
cept of individual law. Our recent experiences with
the Soviet Union have shown that American policy
must be flexible enough to engage in war or political
attrition, while continuing to build up the world's
confidence in our spiritual and moral integrity.
3626. Morgenthau, Hans J. In defense of the na-
tional interest; a critical examination of
American foreign policy. New York, Knopf, 1951.
xii, 283, viii p. 51-11217 E744.M68
An enlarged version of the author's Walgreen
Foundation lectures delivered at the University of
Chicago in the spring of 1950. American foreign
policy, he maintains, can have only one aim: the
preservation of the national security at all costs.
However, we have been guilty of confusing the na-
tional interest with moral principles too often un-
related to political realities, even though the prin-
ciples themselves are above reproach. Foreign rela-
tions must be conducted according to Hobbes' dictum
that there is no law or morality outside of the state,
and the national interest must be considered solely
in terms of advantages to be gained and risks to be
avoided. The morality of foreign policy decisions
must not be debated, but only their efficacy in pre-
serving our security. At the time of publication,
the author believed that the vital objective of Ameri-
can foreign policy in Europe and Asia was the
restoration, by means short of war, of the immediate
post-World War II balance of power, i. e., the dis-
lodgement of the Soviet Union from the areas it had
brought under control since 1945.
3627. Mowrer, Edgar A. The nightmare of Amer-
ican foreign policy. New York, Knopf,
1948. viii, 283, xxii p. 48-9096 E744.M75
The author, a journalist of wide experience, be-
lieves that President Roosevelt's policy of repre-
senting Soviet Russia as a democracy and failing to
publicize Soviet diplomatic demands was an error.
He does not believe that the USSR can be contained
by the present system of sovereign states or by the
United Nations as presently organized. He favors
a grand alliance supplemented by regional Atlantic,
Middle Eastern, Far Eastern, and European
alliances.
3628. Osgood, Robert Endicott. Ideals and self-
interest in America's foreign relations; the
great transformation of the twentieth century. [ Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press, 1953. 491 p.
53-10532 E744.O77
A revision of the author's thesis, Harvard
University.
The author argues that from the time of the
Spanish-American War to World War II the United
States failed to make a mature adjustment to its
international environment, because it let ideals pre-
dominate and "failed, as a whole, to understand or
act upon a realistic view of international relations."
Alfred T. Mahan and Theodore Roosevelt are treated
as realists whose imperialistic opinions discredited
realism and encouraged isolationism following the
American commitment in world affairs. A realistic
balance between ideals and national self interest is
advocated as essential. The disillusionment of the
1920's and the insecurity of the 30's and 40's are
regarded as having been favorable to a realistic
approach, although they were not realism itself.
3629. Reinhardt, George C. American strategy in
the atomic age. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1955. 236 p.
55-6363 UA23.R44
This book is a sequel to Atomic Weapons in Land
Combat (Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub. Co.,
io~}. 182 p.) written by Col. Reinhardt with Lt.
Col. William R. Kintner. Col. Reinhardt, a fol-
lower of Sir Halford Mackinder's doctrine of geo-
politics, finds the policy of containment an inade-
quate safeguard of American security. The openly
conducted aggression of the Soviet Union must be
opposed by a new policy which will exert direct
436 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pressure upon the aggressor. The United States
must mass an overwhelmingly strong military force
overseas which will directly threaten the Soviet
Heartland. Once this is established, the United
States must mobilize the non-Communist world in
a coalition guided by the specific ideology of "co-
operation— activity shared for mutual benefit" —
whose purpose is to defeat Soviet communism rather
than merely to counter it.
3630. Reitzel, William, Morton A. Kaplan, and
Constance G. Coblenz. United States for-
eign policy, 1945— 1955. Washington, Brookings
Institution, 1956. 535 p. maps, diagrs.
56-11440 E813.R4
Bibliography: p. 485-511.
This survey, by members of the staff of the
Brookings Institution, examines the position of the
United States in the light of recent foreign policy
decisions. In analyzing the effect of taking one
course of action rather than another, the authors
have divided the work into four parts. Part I re-
views foreign policy goals determined during
1946-47. Part II assesses key decisions made as
United States policy toward Russia developed from
1947 to 1950. Part III discusses the decision to
meet aggression with collective force, which has
shaped United States policy since 1950. Part IV
discusses the effect of this decision on the position
of the United States in the international system of
1956, suggests methods for review of current foreign
policy, and outlines action which may be taken in
the future. The annotated bibliography is of value
to students of international affairs.
3631. Summers, Robert E., ed. The United States
and international organizations. New York,
Wilson, 1952. 194 p. (The Reference shelf, v. 24,
no. 5) 52-10267 JX1417.S8
Like the other volumes in this series, this small
reference work is designed to provide a factual and
analytical, though not exhaustive, background for
the high school debater. Approximately 50 articles,
speeches, and extracts from documents have been
assembled on the general question of what type of
international organization the United States should
support. The articles are grouped under such topics
as the United Nations and its strengths and weak-
nesses, NATO, the problem of regional security,
the United States and European integration, world
federation, American foreign policy in 1952, and
the role of the United States in international affairs.
Each section is preceded by an introduction written
by the editor. A bibliography is included, mainly
of works not utilized in the text.
3632. Tannenbaum, Frank. The American tradi-
tion in foreign policy. Norman, University
of Oklahoma Press, 1955. 178 p.
55-6364 E183.7.T35
An uncompromising reassertion of the democratic
and moral bases of American foreign policy, in the
light of "the doctrine of the co-ordinate state."
Just as Rhode Island is of equal importance with
Texas in the Union, so all states are of equal dignity
in international relations, which must therefore be
guided into an institutional and federal pattern.
The importance of the ideal of the co-ordinate state
is traced in our relationships with Latin America,
the Far East, and the League of Nations. The
author rejects the doctrine of Real-politi\ urged by
Morgenthau and Kennan, and abhors the idea of
dividing the world into Russian and American
spheres of interest.
3633. U. S. President. U. S. participation in the
U N; report by the President to the Congress
for the year 1955. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off.] 1956. 277 p. ([U.S.] Dept. of State. Pub-
lication 6318. International organization and con-
ference series, III, 115)
47-32785 JX1977.2.U5A32 1955
The United Nations Participation Act of 1945
calls upon the President to transmit to Congress an
annual report on United States participation in
United Nations activities. These reports have regu-
larly been prepared and published by the Depart-
ment of State; variant titles were used before the
present one was settled upon. The present report
is the tenth, and begins with a brief account of the
meeting of the United Nations held in San Fran-
cisco in June 1955 to commemorate the tenth an-
niversary of the signing of the Charter there. Presi-
dent Eisenhower's letter of transmittal affirms that
the United Nations in its second decade "is increas-
ingly vital and effective." The work of the Special-
ized Agencies such as the Food and Agricultural
Organization and the International Monetary Fund
is also included in this report. The report is organ-
ized under the following headings: "Maintenance
of Peace and Security," "Economic and Social Co-
operation and Human Rights," "Dependent Terri-
tories," "Legal and Constitutional Developments,"
and "Budgetary, Financial, and Administrative Mat-
ters." Appendixes outline the United Nations Sys-
tem and other organizational and statistical infor-
mation; a list of all United States representatives
within the System during 1955 occupies p. 271-274.
3634. The United States in world affairs, 1954.
By Richard P. Stebbins and the research staff
of the Council on Foreign Relations. New York,
Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY AND FOREIGN RELATIONS / 437
Harper, 1956. 498 p. 32-26065 E744.U66 1954
This annual review of the foreign relations of the
United States has covered years since 1931, with the
exception of the war years 1941-44, for which no
volumes were issued. Double volumes were issued
for 1934-35 ^d for 1945-47. The original compil-
ers were Walter Lippmann and William O. Scroggs;
Whitney H. Shepardson replaced Mr. Lippmann
with the 1934-35 volume; John C. Campbell pre-
pared the first three volumes after the war; and Mr.
Stebbins has been in charge since the 1949 volume.
The present volume for 1954 is the first to omit a
formal bibliography, which is replaced "by a more
copious use of bibliographical footnotes at appro-
priate points in the text," but the classified "Chro-
nology of World Events" (p. 465-487) is retained.
After introductory chapters on the salient develop-
ments of the year, and on the political, military,
and economic aspects of American foreign policy,
the course of events is traced in four major areas,
and a concluding chapter deals with "Disarmament
and the United Nations." A companion series
under the same imprint, Documents on American
Foreign Relations, began with a volume for 1952,
has reached that for 1955, and has frequendy
changed editors. A comparable series produced and
published by the Brookings Institution of Wash-
ington, D. C, Major Problems of United States
Foreign Policy, reached a sixth volume for 1952-53,
published in 1952, but unfortunately none have ap-
peared since. These annual volumes were more ab-
stract in their approach, and were intended "to
illustrate a technique for the study of the foreign
relations of the United States closely approximating
that used by Government officials in the formulation
of foreign policies."
3635. Wilcox, Francis O., and Thorsten V. Kali-
jarvi, eds. Recent American foreign policy;
basic documents 1941-1951. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts, 1952. xviii, 927 p. maps.
52-1546 JX1416.W5
Originally issued in 1950 as A Decade of Ameri-
can Foreign Policy ( 1st sess. 81st Cong., Senate docu-
ment no. 123), this collection of the "more important
documents and official statements bearing upon the
foreign policy of the United States in the period fol-
lowing our entrance into World War II" was revised
to include additional materials for the period 1950-
51. Topics covered arc: wartime pronouncements
regarding the postwar settlement; postwar confer-
ences; the United Nations; the inter-American
regional system; defeated and occupied areas; other
areas of special interest; and current international
'■ issues. A brief commentary accompanies each item,
a feature lacking in the original publication. The
editors are members of the research staff of the
Senate Committee on Foreign Relations.
Biv. ECONOMIC POLICY
3636. Brown, William Adams, and Redvers Opie.
American foreign assistance. Washington,
Brookings Institution, 1953. 615 p.
53-1 1921 HC60.B7
Bibliography: p. [587]-598.
A detailed description of all forms of American
assistance to foreign nations from the inauguration
of Lend-Lease in March 1941 through the Mutual
Security Program implemented in October 195 1.
The authors emphasize that assistance for economic
reconstruction, if less popular and more difficult to
grasp, is no less important to ultimate security than
military assistance.
3637. Ellis, Howard S. The economics of free-
dom; the progress and future of aid to
Europe. By Howard S. Ellis assisted by the research
staff of the Council on Foreign Relations. With
an introd. by Dvvight D. Eisenhower. New York,
Published for the Council on Foreign Relations by
Harper, 1950. xviii, 549 p. 50-9247 HC240.E43
A progress report on the Marshall Plan and its
consequences by the staff of ten experts headed by
Dr. Ellis, who was on leave from the University of
California for the purpose. During two years the
United States furnished between four and five bil-
lion dollars worth of aid, and European production
rose by about 30 billion dollars in each year. "In
comparison with the progress achieved after World
War I toward reconstruction, rehabilitation and in-
ternal economic stability, Europe has scored a
phenomenal success." Descriptive chapters are de-
voted to the objectives and methods of the program,
to its financial complications, and to its implementa-
tion in the United Kingdom, Western Germany,
France, and Italy.
3638. Harris, Seymour E., ed. Foreign economic
policy for the United States. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1948. 490 p.
48-4988 HF1455.H3
The work of 24 experts, most of them practicing
economists. After individual discussions of our
economic relations with Great Britain, Germany,
Japan, Canada, Latin America, the U. S. S. R., and
China, attention is focused on international economic
agencies and tariff agreements, the European Re-
covery Program, and problems of international ceo-
438 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
nomic equilibrium. The editor states that the Inter-
national Trade Organization, the International
Monetary Fund, and the International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development represent "a bit
of sovereignty sloughed off the sovereign states and
grafted on to the international agencies operating
in behalf of all countries."
3639. Mikesell, Raymond F. United States eco-
nomic policy and international relations.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 341 p. (Eco-
nomics handbook series) 51-12630 HF1455.M53
A comprehensive survey of American foreign
economic policy. The first fourth of the book is
devoted to the years 1919-39; the balance to the
period since 1939, with major emphasis on the
period since World War II. Monetary, investment,
and defense policy are the leading topics discussed,
with separate chapters on the Truman Doctrine, the
Marshall Plan, and American objectives in Western
Europe. The Truman Doctrine is regarded as mark-
ing the acceptance of international responsibility,
the New Deal economic program having accustomed
the American people to governmental action in eco-
nomic affairs.
3640. Price, Harry Bayard. The Marshall plan
and its meaning. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell
University Press, 1955. xvi, 424 p.
55-14635 HC60.P7
"Published under the auspices of the Govern-
mental Affairs Institute, Washington, D. C."
Born of the effects of World War II upon the
economies of Europe, Asia, and Africa, the Mar-
shall Plan was intended to ensure long-term recovery
rather than to provide temporary relief. Analysis
of 300 interviews with participating ERP officials,
and of industrial, agricultural, and monetary sta-
tistics forms the basis of this evaluation, which shows
that the Marshall Plan did place Europe in a posi-
tion of economic stability. This survey covers all
countries which received aid under the European
Recovery Program as well as Asiatic countries which
were granted aid by the other agencies of the Eco-
nomic Cooperation Administration.
3641. U. S. Dept. of State. Point four, coopera-
tive program for aid in the development of
economically underdeveloped areas [prepared with
assistance of an Interdepartmental Advisory Com-
mittee on Technical Assistance and of the staff of
the National Advisory Council. Rev. Jan. 1950.
Washington, 1950] 167 p. map, diagrs. (Its Pub-
lication 3719. Economic cooperation series, 24)
50-60118 HC59.A3U52 1950
Issued also without series title.
The official program of American technical assist-
ance to underdeveloped areas, e. g., Asia, Africa, and
Latin America, first proposed by President Truman
in his 1949 inaugural address, is oudined. The en-
couragement of capital investment, both domestic
and foreign, is proposed as a second means of stimu-
lating the economic improvement and democrati-
zation of these regions. After a consideration of
the problem, its financial aspects are explored.
3642. Woodrow Wilson Foundation. The politi-
cal economy of American foreign policy; its
concepts, strategy, and limits; report of a study
group sponsored by the Woodrow Wilson Founda-
tion and the National Planning Association.
[William Y. Elliott, chairman] New York, Holt,
1955. xv, 414 p. 55-6125 HF1455.W6
An inquiry by a study group of nine prominent
experts, who find the central objective of American
foreign economic policy to be "the construction of a
better integrated and more effectively functioning
international economic system." Under present-day
conditions, international economic re-integration can
be brought about only through "a deliberate co-
ordination of national economic policies either by
cooperation among national governments or — more
effectively and reliably — by supranational author-
ities." Means for increasing the effectiveness of
such existing grouping as the European Payments
Union are considered, as well as for opening up the
domestic market of the United States to a greater
flow of imports from Europe. The role of the
United States in increasing and regularizing the
flow of capital and technology to the underdeveloped
countries is oudined.
X
Military History and the Armed Forces
A
A.
General Worlds
3643-3652
B.
The Army
3653-3665
C.
The Navy
3666-3677
D.
Wars of the United States
Di. The Revolution
3678-3684
&
Dii. 1798-1848
3685-3689
1
Diii. The Civil War
3690-3706
Div. The Spanish-American War
3707-3708
Dv. World War 1
3709-3716
Dvi. World War 11
3717-3727
THE United States has been, until very recent times, a quite unmilitary nation with a very
small standing army. Here the English tradition of distrust of armed forces, and control
of military by civilian authorities, has continued or been strengthened, inasmuch as there has
been no general agreement on the necessity of a large navy. Nevertheless, the nation was born
in war, and has fought six considerable wars since, not to mention lesser conflicts such as the
innumerable ones with Indian tribes on its western frontier. Each large war has demanded
a sudden and severe effort of rearmament, and a
corresponding one of organization which has usually
proved the more difficult. Three of these wars have
absorbed during their time nearly the whole of the
national energies. Such being the case, the litera-
ture which is sampled in this chapter is an indis-
pensable part of the national record, but it must not
be taken to imply any predominance of the military
element in American life, thought, or character.
There have been Generals in the White House, but
only three of them professional soldiers, and only one
of these had spent his adult life in uninterrupted
military service.
This relative unconcern for the military side of
life is reflected in the literature. The United States
has never undertaken any large-scale publication of
the military records of the Revolution, the War of
1812, the Mexican War, or of World War I. Mili-
tary history was for the most part a neglected sub-
ject in the graduate schools of American universities
from their establishment, and especially from 1919-
1939. The selections that follow contain only three
works of academic origin earlier than World War
II: those of Hatch (no. 3681), Smith (3689), and
Shannon (3702), and the second of these is a general
history which might well have been placed in Chap-
ter VIII. Nor, if we except the Civil War, was there
any considerable output of such literature on the
part of professional soldiers and sailors. Admiral
Mahan (no. 3688) is the great exception, but the
unfinished magnum opus of General Emory Upton
(no. 3651) had to wait over 20 years for publica-
tion. Some valuable work has been contributed by
leisured amateurs such as Gardner W. Allen and
Hoffman Nickerson. In consequence of all this,
there is no adequate general history of the U. S.
Army, or general history of the Revolutionary War,
or operational history of World War I. Since the
last war, of course, the picture is entirely changed:
the armed forces have their own large staffs of pro-
fessional historians, and the universities are in-
creasingly giving the subject its due emphasis.
The arrangement by sections that follows is self-
explanatory, save that Section A, General Works,
439
440 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is necessarily a melange, including books on the
civil-military relation, on national military policy,
on veterans' problems and organizations, and on
conscientious objectors, and a biography of a prophet
of air power. There is no separate section on the
Air Force simply because its independent status
is too recent, whence the state of the literature does
not warrant it.
A. General Works
3643. Bernardo, C. Joseph, and Eugene H. Bacon.
American military policy, its development
since 1775. Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service Pub.
Co., 1955. 512 p. 5577529 UA23.B43
A routine textbook which provides the only gen-
eral survey of American military policy from the
Revolution through the Korean War. Naval policy
is included, but in subordinate and inadequate em-
phasis. The size of the Army receives chief atten-
tion, and questions of organization, training, staff,
mobilization, and economic resources follow in im-
portance. Public opinion is rather mechanically
presented through brief extracts from newspapers
and magazines. The authors regularly discount
"the specter of militarism."
3643a. Brophy, Arnold. The Air Force; a pano-
rama of the Nation's youngest service.
Foreword by Robert L. Scott, Jr. [New York] Gil-
bert Press; distributed by Messner, 1956. 362 p.
56-6784 UG633.B76
This is the only comprehensive history of the
United States Air Force in a single volume. The
function, organizational structure, and type and
number of equipment and personnel of Air Force
staff, combat, operational, technical, transport, sup-
ply, and training commands are summarized as each
comes into operation to repel a hypothetical attack
on North America. Such branches as the Strategic
Air Command, the Air University, the Military Air
Transport Service, and the Air Materiel Command
are described along with a short history of Ameri-
can military aviation from its formation as a unit
in the Army Signal Corps in 1907 until the present
(1955). Industry's contribution is acknowledged
by the inclusion of short histories of the principal
industries now under contract with the Air Force.
Tables of casualty, personnel, aircraft, and fiscal sta-
tistics help the average reader to realize the scope
of the Nation's youngest service.
3644. Davies, Wallace Evan. Patriotism on pa-
rade; the story of veterans' and hereditary
organizations in America, 1783-1900. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1955. xiv, 388 p. (Har-
vard historical studies, v. 66)
55-1 195 1 E172.7.D3
"Bibliographical essay": p. [3591-367.
Although the Society of the Cincinnati was
founded in 1783, it remained "a poorly organized
and ineffective affair," of negligible influence upon
American life. The pattern for patriotic societies
was really set by the survivors of the Civil War in
the Grand Army of the Republic, and its extraordi-
nary success led to a mushrooming of other groups
of veterans and of veterans' relatives. This led,
in the 1890's, to a rash of societies open only to
persons of requisite pedigree, of which the Daugh-
ters of the American Revolution is the most con-
spicuous. This study traces their influence and in-
terest in such varied subjects as veterans' pref-
erence, pensions, the teaching of history, immigra-
tion policy, labor disturbances, etc.
3644a. Dupuy, Richard Ernest, and Trevor N.
Dupuy. Military heritage of America.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956. 794 p. (McGraw-
Hill series in history) 55-11169 E181.D8
Bibliography: p. 729-752.
Written by a father-and-son team, both of whom
hold the rank of colonel in the U. S. Army, this
work, in a preliminary form, has been used by the
Harvard Department of Military Science and Tac-
tics since 1954 and is the only up-to-date survey of
American "military history presented from the
American point of view." In order to acquaint the
general reading public with the art of war as prac-
ticed by Americans, all prominent batdes and cam-
paigns of the eight major wars participated in by
the United States from the Revolution (1775-83) to
the Korean War (1950-53) are outlined along with
short accounts of Indian wars and police actions
involving American forces. The nonmilitary reader
is aided in following the operational accounts by
numerous batde plans and maps in the text, clear
definitions of the principles and terms of military
strategy and tactics, and a brief account of world
military history since the Battle of Marathon (490
B. C). It is the authors' belief that the general
rules of strategy and tactics have not changed and
must be followed by United States forces in the
future as they have been followed in the past.
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 44 1
3645. Jones, Richard Seelye. A history of the
American Legion. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1946. 393 p. 46-7962 D570.A1J6
Not an official history of the largest and most
influential organization of World War I veterans,
but written with full access to the Legion's quite
complete official records. The author gives atten-
tion to organization and finances, and provides an
objective treatment of such controversial issues as the
bonus, education, and un-Americanism.
3646. Kerwin, Jerome G., ed. Civil-military re-
lationships in American life. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1948. 181 p. (Chicago
University. Charles R. Walgreen Foundation
lectures) 48-7342 UA23.K415
A series of eight lectures by Hanson W. Baldwin,
Charles E. Merriam, T. V. Smith, Adlai Stevenson,
and others. Their purpose "is to identify the
change in conditions which has caused a much
greater pervasiveness of the military in American
life and at the same time to raise the question of
how our cherished freedoms can be preserved by the
safeguarding of the predominancy of civilian
power."
3647. Levine, Isaac Don. Mitchell, pioneer of air
power. New York, Duell, Sloan, & Pearce,
1943. 420 p. 43-5I05I UG633.M45L4
"Mitchell's own writings": p. 401-405.
A biography based on Mitchell's own papers and
sharing the strenuous partisanship of its subject.
After his court-martial in 1925, William Mitchell
resigned from the Army and devoted himself to
propaganda on behalf of the major development of
air power. He died in 1936 at the age of 56, worn
out by his struggle to convert a reluctant military
hierarchy. In 1945 he was posthumously awarded
the Medal of Honor and the rank of major general.
3648. Palmer, John McAuley. America in arms;
the experience of the United States with
military organization. New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1941. 207 p. 41-9795 UA25.P27
Far slighter than Upton's massive work (no.
3651), it pursues throughout our military history
the single theme of a "well-organized militia" on the
Swiss model, as recommended by General Wash-
ington in his "Sentiments on a Peace Establishment"
of 1783. Our military ills are traced to its absence,
and to the "ill-organized militia" and the "expansible
standing army" which came to be substituted.
3649. Sibley, Mulford Q\> and Philip E. Jacob.
Conscription of conscience; the American
state and the conscientious objector, 1940-1947.
431240—60 30
Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1952. 580 p. (Cor-
nell studies in civil liberty)
52-12673 UB342.U5S52
"Selected and annotated bibliography": p. 549-
566.
Because of inadequate records the treatment of
the conscientious objector by draft boards and the
armed services is sketchily presented, but the 12,000
inmates of Civilian Public Service Camps are
thoroughly studied. The authors conclude that,
largely because of the violent hostility of special
groups channeled through veterans' organizations,
only a very limited degree of tolerance was achieved.
3650. Smith, Louis. American democracy and
military power; a study of civil control of
the military power in the United States. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1951. xv, 370 p.
(Studies in public administration)
51-13393 JK558.S5
A comprehensive analysis of a problem which has
been present from the foundation of the Republic,
but has become increasingly urgent with total war
and continuing crisis. The book combines theo-
retical and historical considerations with administra-
tive practice, in describing the control of national
armed forces by the President, executive depart-
ments, Congress and its committees, and the
judiciary.
3651. Upton, Emory. The military policy of the
United States. 4th impression. Washing-
ton, Govt. Print. Off., 1917. xxiii, 495 p.
War 18-9 UA23.U75 1917
War Department document no. 290.
Edited by Joseph P. Sanger, assisted by William
D. Beach and Charles D. Rhodes, of the Military
Information Division of the General Staff.
The classic indictment of the early failures of
American democracy in maintaining an army of
trained officers and men, and in providing for its
effective organization and command. General
Upton had covered the campaigns of 1862 when his
death in 1881 left the manuscript unfinished; it was
rediscovered and published by Secretary Elihu Root
in 1904.
3652. Wecter, Dixon. When Johnny comes
marching home. [Boston] Houghton Mif-
flin, 1944. 588 p. (A Life-in-America prize book)
44-7507 E181.W43
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(P- [559]-577>-
A review of demobilization and veterans' prob-
lems after our first three major wars: the Resolution,
Civil War, and World War I, with some appraisal
of prospects from the viewpoint of 1944. Ncces-
442 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
sarily incomplete, it is based to a remarkable degree
on veterans' own narratives and other primary
sources. It emphasizes the common soldier's own
attitudes, his adjustment during his first five years
of civilian life, and the reaction that follows the high
endeavor of war. Over the period covered, the na-
tion's sense of responsibility toward the soldier sub-
stantially widened.
B. The Army
3653. Carter, William G. Harding. Creation of
the American General Staff. Personal nar-
rative of the General Staff system of the American
Army. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1924. 65 p.
([U.S.] 68th Cong., 1st sess. Senate. Document
119) 24-26546 UB223.C3
The Army entered the 20th century without any
effective agency of planning or higher command.
During the next few years Elihu Root, Secretary of
War, and W. H. Carter, Assistant Adjutant General,
collaborated first to draft and secure the passage of
the Act of Feb. 14, 1903, establishing a General Staff
Corps, and then to organize the staff so authorized.
General Carter's personal narrative must be sought
in a Congressional document printed 20 years later.
3654. Carter, William G. Harding. The life of
Lieutenant General Chaffee. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 191 7. 296 p.
18-32 E181.C43
AdnaRomanza Chaffee (1842-1914) was an Ohio
farm boy who enlisted in the Regular Army the day
after Bull Run, and retired in 1906 as lieutenant
general and chief of staff. His army career included
a maximum of active service, as a cavalry officer un-
der Sheridan, as an Indian fighter under Crook, in
the Santiago campaign of 1898, in command of the
relief expedition to Pekin, and in pacifying the
Philippines. General Carter tells a very plain tale,
but the indomitable spirit of this hard-bitten old
campaigner shows through.
3655. Elliott, Charles Winslow. Winfield Scott,
the soldier and the man. New York, Mac-
millan, 1937. xviii, 817 p. 37-18570 E403.1.S4E6
Bibliography: p. 769-781.
Scott ( 1 786-1 866) entered the Regular Army in
1808, made his reputation and achieved general rank
in the hardest fighting on the Niagara frontier
(1813-14), succeeded as commander-in-chief in
1841, conducted one of the most brilliant campaigns
in history against Mexico City in 1847, ran for Presi-
dent in 1852, and did all he could to hold the Union
cause together at the outset of the Civil War. Major
Elliott aimed to write a definitive biography, and
quotes at length from a great variety of original
sources to produce a work of great detail, but no
more so than the subject deserves. Scott's own
Memoirs (New York, Sheldon, 1864, 653 p.) are
rather naive and full of special pleading. There
are reminiscences of value in the memoirs of his
sometime aide, Erasmus D. Keyes (no. 2711).
3656. Forman, Sidney. West Point; a history of
the United States Military Academy. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1950. 255 p.
50-8255 U410.L1F6
Thesis — Columbia University.
Bibliography: p. \in^\~iip..
The national Military Academy was founded in
1802, enlarged in 1812, and given its characteristic
impress during the superintendency of Sylvanus
Thayer in 1817-33. Formed on French models, it
has always emphasized a scientific curriculum, phys-
ical training, and rigid discipline, and has been the
recurrent target of civilian criticism. This concise
historical sketch emphasizes its success in training
leaders.
3657. Ganoe, William Addleman. The history of
the United States Army. Rev. ed. New
York, Appleton-Century, 1942. 640 p.
42-20792 E181.G17 1942
"Selected bibliography": p. 557—593.
Those wishing to read a general narrative may be
referred to Spaulding below (no. 3664), but the
strictly chronological treatment and the marginal
dating of every incident render this volume very
useful for reference consultation. It provides in-
deed well-nigh the only peacetime annals of the
Army in any printed work. There are no maps,
but some serviceable appendices.
3658. Gillie, Mildred H. Forging the thunder-
bolt, a history of the development of the
Armored Force. Harrisburg, Pa., Military Service
Pub. Co., 1947. 330 p. 47-6050 UA30.G5
In Algeria early in 1943, American tanks proved
that they could stand up to Rommel's armored
veterans. The development which made this result
possible is here described, beginning with the estab-
lishment of a permanent mechanized force in 1930.
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 443
The central figure is the younger Adna R. Chaffee
(1884-1941), who wore himself out while hasten-
ing the organization and training of the Armored
Force.
3659. Herr, John K., and Edward S. Wallace. The
story of the U. S. Cavalry, 1775-1942. Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown, 1953. 275 p.
53-7319 UE23.H4
An appreciative sketch of the achievements of the
mounted forces in the wars of the United States,
copiously illustrated with prints and photographs
well reproduced. General Herr was the last Chief
of Cavalry of the United States Army. Nostalgic in
tone, the book concludes with a plea for a limited
retention of mounted troops in the establishment.
3660. Jacobs, James Ripley. The beginning of the
U. S. Army, 1783-1812. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1947. 419 p.
47-5140 E181.J2
Bibliography: p. [387]— 397.
This narrative treatment of the three post-Revolu-
tionary decades emphasizes the Indian fighting
which secured the settlements of the Old North-
west, the extraordinary intrigues of James Wilkin-
son, commander-in-chief after 1796, and the occupa-
tion, exploration, and policing of the Louisiana
Purchase. The author condemns the "cheese-
paring" of the Democratic administrations after
1 80 1, and pronounces Secretaries Dearborn and
Eustis unequal to their tasks of organization.
3661. Kreidberg, Marvin A., and Merton G.
Henry. History of military mobilization in
the United States Army, 1775-1945. [Washing-
ton] Dept. of the Army, 1955. 721 p. illus.
([U. S.] Dept. of the Army. Pamphlet no. 20-
212) 56-60717 U15.U64, no. 20-212
A preliminary draft of parts 1-2 was issued in
1953- ,
Bibliography: p. 698-705.
A study intended to provide staff officers, students
at Army schools, and others with detailed infor-
mation on past mobilizations — "the assembling and
organizing of troops, materiel, and equipment for
active military service in time of war or other
emergency" — and their lessons. Brief accounts of
the mobilizations of 1775, 1812, 1846, 1861, and
1898 precede comprehensive descriptions of the
planning and preparations for United States par-
ticipation in two world wars. The new and un-
exampled scale of operations in 1917—18, and the
need for economic mobilization caused nearly as
much confusion and improvisation as in earlier
wars, despite a degree of preplanning. The lessons
learned from this experience were only pardy uti-
lized in the interwar period, since planning was
based upon mobilization following rather than pre-
ceding the outbreak of war, and partial mobilization
was already in progress by December 7, 1941.
Integrated military, industrial, and agricultural
mobilization plans must be made prior to any future
wars, and must be flexible enough to meet limited
as well as total war.
3662. Matthews, William, and Dixon Wecter.
Our soldiers speak, 1775-1918. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1943. 365 p. 43-4305 E181.M34
"Bibliography and acknowledgments": p. 360-
"The purpose of this book is to let the common
soldier, private or noncom, tell the story of his share
in America's wars." An anthology of extracts from
soldiers' diaries and letters, rather hastily put to-
gether during World War II, it concentrates on ma-
terial bearing on important operations.
3663. Prucha, Francis Paul. Broadax and bayonet;
the role of the United States Army in the
development of the Northwest, 1815-1860. [Madi-
son] State Historical Society of Wisconsin, 1953.
263 p. _ 53-65" F597-p7
A work of original research which stands almost
alone in relating the Army's work to the peaceful
processes of territorial expansion and social develop-
ment. Studying the 13 army posts established in
Wisconsin, Iowa, Minnesota, and northern Illinois,
the author demonstrates their importance for Indian
and land policy administration, as cash markets for
the early settlers, and as centers of exploration, road-
building, and cultural development.
3664. Spaulding, Oliver Lyman. The United
States Army in war and peace. New York,
Putnam, 1937. 541 p. 37-4575 E181.S78
Bibliography: p. 501-513.
The author aims "to trace the development of the
Army, its physical and spiritual growth," rather
than to concentrate upon military operations, but
his book is nevertheless largely a concise narrative
of campaigns from the Colonial Period through
World War I. There are, in addition, occasional
summaries concerning weapons and several chap-
ters on the peacetime activities of the Army.
3665. U. S. Dept. of the Army. Office of Military
History. The personnel replacement system
in the United States Army, by Leonard L. Lerwill,
lieutenant colonel, Infantry, United States Army.
[Washington] 1952-53. 2 v.
53-60151 UB323.A54
444 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 457-468.
Contents. — v. 1. Colonial period-World War
I.— v. 2. World War II.
Replacement being the current official name for
the process historically known as recruitment, this
constitutes a history of the raising of the armies of
the United States during its successive wars. De-
signed for use in the Army school system, it is
severely factual, but the first unitary treatment of
a subject of special importance in a democracy.
C. The Navy
3666. Chapelle, Howard I. The history of the
American sailing Navy; the ships and their
development. New York, Norton, 1949. xxiii,
558 p. 49-48709 VA56.C5
Naval history from the standpoint of marine
architecture, extending from colonial shipbuilding
to the close of the era of sail about 1855. Based
on surviving ship-plans in the National Archives,
the text is illustrated by 32 folding plans and 155
figures. The technical material is skillfully inte-
grated with national affairs, naval policy, and naval
administration.
3667. Knox, Dudley W. A history of the United
States Navy. Rev. ed. New York, Putnam,
1948. xxiii, 704 p. 48-2547 E182.K77 1948
A concise, balanced, and accurate historical sketch
of the Navy in action through World War II, with
adequate emphasis on the strategic situations basic
to the achievements of fleets or single vessels. There
are numerous maps and diagrams, largely drawn
from earlier publications. It contains little on the
development of ships, weapons, administration, edu-
cation, or bluejacket life.
3668. Metcalf, Clyde H. A history of the United
States Marine Corps. New York, Putnam,
1939. 584 p. 39-6652 VE23.M45
Marines were authorized by the Continental Con-
gress in November 1775, and the present Marine
Corps has been in existence since July 1798. Orig-
inally adjuncts to the old type of ship-to-ship fight-
ing, since the Mexican War marines have had their
major employment in establishing overseas beach-
heads. During the first three decades of the 20th
century they were a primary instrument of the
United States' policy in the Caribbean. Col. Metcalf
describes their active operations down to 1938 in
great detail, with incidental passages on their or-
ganization and administration. Jeter A. Isely and
Philip A. Crowl's The U. S. Marines and Amphibi-
ous War; Its Theory and Its Practice in the Pacific
(Princeton, Princeton University Press, 195 1. 636
p.) provides a comparable chronicle for World
War II.
3669. Mitchell, Donald W. History of the mod-
ern American Navy, from 1883 through
Pearl Harbor. New York, Knopf, 1946. xiv, 477,
xxv p. 46-4382 E182.M65
Bibliography: p. 455-477.
"An interpretative and comprehensive general his-
tory" since the revival of 1883, based entirely on
printed materials and intended for the lay reader.
Its balance of policy, materiel, organization, admin-
istration, and operations is superior to that of any
previous history, and it incorporates such "previ-
ously underemphasized subjects" as naval aid in
diplomacy and polar exploration, and naval aspects
of the munitions problem. The author is critical
both of the Navy's performance and of its personnel
policies, particularly its failure to promote according
to ability.
3670. Peck, Taylor. Round-shot to rockets; a his-
tory of the Washington Navy Yard and U. S.
Naval Gun Factory. Annapolis, United States
Naval Institute, 1949. xx, 267 p.
49-1 1615 VA70.W3P4
The only full-length study of a Government navy
yard, and one which effectively combines local cir-
cumstances, the current of national history, tech-
nological developments, and administrative changes.
The Washington Yard, established with the city in
1800, began specializing in ordnance in 1847, and
during the two World Wars became exclusively oc-
cupied with this function.
3671. Potter, Elmer B., ed. The United States
and world sea power. Englewood Cliffs
[N. J.] Prentice-Hall, 1955. 963 p.
55-9323 E182.P8
Bibliography: p. 923-938.
A monster textbook which presents the naval his-
tory of Western Civilization since the Graeco-Persian
Wars, but gives special attention to the place of the
United States in that development. Since the
emphasis is on major fleets and strategy, the Ameri-
can story down to 1861 is treated as the small-scale
affair that it was, but the Civil and subsequent wars
receive the detailed treatment accorded to major
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 445
conflicts. Despite the multiple authorship, a co-
herent point of view, and a balanced emphasis on
both technological progress and fighting doctrine,
contribute to a unitary impression.
3672. Puleston, William D. Mahan; the life and
work of Captain Alfred Thayer Mahan.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1939. 380 p.
39-10963 E182.M256
List of Mahan's writings: p. [3591-364.
Mahan (1840-1914) saw service in the blockading
squadrons of the Civil War and sat on the three-
man War Board which directed the naval oper-
ations of the Spanish-American War. In the inter-
val, and largely as a result of his appointment to the
presidency of the Naval War College in 1886, he
had become a world-famous historian and the great
theorist of the place of seapower in international
relations. Captain Puleston uses Mahan's corre-
spondence to elucidate the development of his
.characteristic outlook and doctrines, and to illustrate
his remarkable influence abroad. Mahan's own
From Sail to Steam; Recollections of Naval Life
(New York, Harper, 1907. 325 p.) is more
rewarding for its picture of the post-Civil War Navy
than for any revelation of the man.
3673. Sprout, Harold H., and Margaret Sprout.
The rise of American naval power, 1776-
19 1 8. Rev. ed. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1942. 404 p. NNC
3674. Sprout, Harold H., and Margaret Sprout.
Toward a new order of sea power; American
naval policy and the world scene, 1918-1922. 2d
ed. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1943.
336 p. A43-2765 E182.S79 1943
The first tide is an indispensable work which
breaks new ground in reviewing the outlook of na-
tional authorities upon seapower from the outbreak
of the Revolution, and the consequences in warships,
trained personnel, and organization for combat. It
formulates the lessons of America's successive naval
wars and indicates the extent to which they have
been heeded in subsequent policy. The sequel
describes, on a much larger scale, the post- Versailles
situation in world seapower, the revolt against
"navalism" in America, and the partial limitation of
naval armaments by the Washington Conference of
1922.
3675. Taylor, Albert H. The first twenty-five
years of the Naval Research Laboratory.
Washington, Navy Dept., 1948. 75 p.
48-46752 V394.B4T3
"Navexos P-549."
A concise account, by one of its original staff
members, of the scientific organ of the Navy De-
partment, which was first planned in 1916 but not
brought into being until 1923. In spite of a lean
budget, the Laboratory succeeded in developing
radar and a host of other devices which profoundly
affected marine warfare during 1942-45.
3676. Turnbull, Archibald D., and Clifford L.
Lord. History of United States naval avia-
tion. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1949.
345 p. 49-1 1 81 8 VG93.T8
"Sources": p. [3241-331.
Not an official history, but prepared by two Navy
historians with complete access to official records.
It carries the story from 1910, when the Navy De-
partment first assigned an officer to watch aviation
developments, through World War I bombing, the
first transatlantic flights, the first carriers, and the
experimental bombings and controversies of the
1920's, to the outbreak of World War II.
3677. U. S. Office of the Comptroller of the Navy.
The naval establishment, its growth and
necessity for expansion, 1930-1950. [Washington]
195 1. 178 p. 52-63190 YA53.A74
"NavEvox-P-1038."
A document which seeks to explain and justify
the increasing expense of the naval establishment
over two decades. Apart from the element of in-
flation, the essential facts are that in 1950 there were
456,000 officers and men as against 116,000 in 1930,
645 vessels as against 317, and 14,030 aircraft as
against 989. Many organizational charts and data
are included.
D. Wars of the United States
Di. WARS: THE REVOLUTION
3678. Allen, Gardner W. A naval history of the
American Revolution. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1913. 2 v. (752 p.)
1 3-9743 E271.A42
"Sources of information": v. 2, p. [671 ]-686.
Utilizes British and American archival and other
manuscript sources, as well as all primary records in
print, to produce a very full narrative of all opera-
tions of warships under Continental commission, in
which many extracts from first-hand authorities arc
446 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
incorporated. Within its sphere it is very nearly
definitive, but it has only incidental treatment of the
State navies, the privateers which so grievously
harried British commerce, and of marine admin-
istration, which last receives thorough analysis in
Charles O. Paullin's The Navy of the American
Revolution (Chicago [Burrows] 1906. 549 p.).
Nor does it enter into the fateful large-scale opera-
tions of the French, Spanish, and British navies from
1779, which may be followed in Sir William M.
James' The British Navy in Adversity (London,
Longmans, Green, 1926. 459 p.).
3679. Bolton, Charles Knowles. The private
soldier under Washington. New York,
Scribner, 1902. 258 p. 2-23616 E255.B69
Old as it is, this remains the only rounded treat-
ment of the soldiers who made up the armies that
won American independence. It is based upon a
wide exploration of original materials, many of
which are reproduced as illustrations. Among the
subjects handled are firearms, the officer-private re-
lationship, camp organization, diversions, hospitals,
and transport.
3680. Frothingham, Thomas G. Washington,
Commander in Chief. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1930. 404 p. 30-24708 HE312.25.F94
Covers Washington's education, prior military ex-
perience, and appointment, but is primarily a mili-
tary history of the Revolutionary War, including
both the operations conducted by Washington, and
the others as seen from headquarters of the com-
mander-in-chief of the Continental Army. It is
based on the older editions of Washington's writ-
ings, but remains a clear and reliable outline.
3681. Hatch, Louis Clinton. The administration
of the American Revolutionary Army. New
York, Longmans, Green, 1904. 229 p. (Harvard
historical studies, v. 10) 4_I599 E255.H36
"List of authorities cited": p. 210-215.
The American colonists, if sturdy material, "knew
litde of military training or military subordination."
The Continental Congress and their commander-in-
chief had therefore the task of creating an effective
military organization nearly from scratch, and this
volume tells how they performed it and what major
problems arose in its course. A major aim was the
creation of a corps of officers, and questions of rank
had to be settled, native officers given proper rights
against a flood of foreign claimants, and reasonable
incentives provided. The several outbreaks of in-
subordination toward the war's end are analyzed.
A solid dissertation, which half a century of scholar-
ship has failed to replace.
3682. Nickerson, Hoffman. The turning point of
the Revolution; or, Burgoyne in America.
Boston, Houghton Mitflin, 1928. 500 p.
28-10475 E233.N63
Bibliography: p. [481 ]— 486.
A leisurely narrative of the campaign of Saratoga
(1778) by a philosophical student of the art of war,
with exceptional knowledge of the armies and cam-
paigns of 18th-century Europe. Howe and Ger-
maine spoiled the decisive blow which would have
cut the Union in two, the General by planning the
diversionary attack on Philadelphia, and the Min-
ister by failing to veto it. Burgoyne himself ruined
his remaining prospects by relaxing after his easy
capture of Ticonderoga. His surrender brought
France in, and "Yorktovvn was the child of Sara-
toga."
3683. Ward, Christopher. The War of the Revo-
lution; edited by John Richard Alden. New
York, Macmillan, 1952. 2 v. (989 p.)
52-M233 E230.W34
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 943-954.
Mr. Ward published his detailed battle history of
The Delaware Continentals, IJJ6-IJ83 in 1941
(Wilmington, Del., The Historical Society of Dela-
ware, 620 p.) and before his death two years later
had expanded it into a nearly complete narrative of
the military operations on land. Prof. Alden had
only to add a chapter on G. R. Clark's campaign
in the West, correct some slips, and add a few cita-
tions. The result has a minimum of background
materials, as well as of strategic summaries and con-
clusions, but excels in the presentation of detailed
and accurate battle reports. The narrative first dis-
poses of "The War in the North," and then, a third
of the way through volume 2, returns to 1775 and
begins "The War in the South," concluding with
Yorktown. Willard M. Wallace's Appeal to Arms
(New York, Harper, 1951. 308 p.) gets a well-
documented military narrative into briefer compass,
with considerably less tactical detail but more stra-
tegic commentary.
3684. Wildes, Harry Emerson. Anthony Wayne,
trouble shooter of the American Revolution.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1 94 1 . 5 1 4 p.
41-18202 E207.W35W5
Bibliography: p. 489-501.
Wayne, a prosperous farmer-tanner of Chester
County, Pa., without military training or experience,
was a rather flamboyant and convivial individual,
who was yet a born leader of men, a close student
of the military classics, and a commander who com-
bined careful planning with great vigor of execution.
This biography, which makes full use of Wayne's
own papers as well as much supplementary research,
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 447
is spirited enough, and indeed the first "to put the
warrior-statesman in his proper social, economic,
political, and military setting," but is considerably
less successful in elucidating military operations.
Dii. WARS: 1 798-1 848
3685. Allen, Gardner W. Our naval war with
France. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [192-]
323 p. 30-18792 E323.A422
"Sources of information": p. [283J-290.
First published in 1909.
3686. Allen, Gardner W. Our navy and the
Barbary corsairs. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1905. 354 p. 26-9008 E335.A422
"Sources of information": p. [305]~3ii.
Although the U. S. Office of Naval Records and
Library has since published extensive collections of
Naval Documents on the quasi-war with France
(7 v-> 1935—38) and the Barbary wars (6 v., 1939-
44), Mr. Allen's careful, documented, and un-
exciting volumes remain the most useful mono-
graphs for the earliest exploits of the restored Navy.
For the diplomatic side of the second tide, Ray W.
Irwin's The Diplomatic Relations of the United
States with the Barbary Powers (Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1931. 225 p.) is
somewhat, if not greatly, to be preferred.
3687. Beirne, Francis F. The War of 18 12. New
York, Dutton, 1949. 410 p.
48-9712 E354.B44
Bibliography: p. 393-395.
For a detailed and documentary general history
of the War of 1812, the student must still resort to
Henry Adams' famous History of the United States,
1801-1817 (q. v.). Mr. Beirne, a Baltimore journal-
ist, readily admits his primary indebtedness to
Adams and to the topographical Pictorial Field-Boo\
of Benson J. Lossing (New York, Harper, 1868.
1084 p.), but he has digested these and other largely
secondary authorities to good effect. His book is a
dear, well-balanced, and critical outline, and a gen-
erally serviceable introduction to this exasperating
conflict.
3688. Mahan, Alfred T. Sea power in its relations
to the War of 181 2. Boston, Little, Brown,
1905. 2 v. 5-33220 E354.M21
"The present work concludes the series of 'The
influence of sea power upon history.' " — Pref.
A classic of naval history which begins by explor-
ing the maritime antecedents of the war in Britain's
conduct of her commercial policies and naval power
after 1783. By regularly defining the strategic situ-
ation and the strategic aspect of operations, Admiral
Mahan vividly reveals the naval War of 1812, not as
a spectacular series of single-ship actions, but as a
progressive strangulation of American economic life.
3689. Smith, Justin H. The War with Mexico.
New York, Macmillan, 19 19. 2 v.
19-19605 E404.S66
"Appendix — The sources": v. 2, p. 517-562.
A monumental narrative of the remoter and more
immediate causes, the campaigns, the peace setde-
ment, and the consequences of the comparatively
brief war of 1 846-1848. The author estimated that
he had examined over 100,000 manuscripts, 1200
books and pamphlets, and the files of 200 periodicals,
and that nine-tenths of his material was new. He
has eased the reader's task by removing scholarship,
controversy, and references to a massive series of
notes at the end of each volume, and presenting his
results in a vigorous and colorful narrative. Criti-
cism of the work has been aimed largely at its rather
whole-hearted justification of the case of the United
States concerning responsibility for the war. One
chapter (30 in vol. 2) is devoted to the relatively un-
important naval operations. Readers preferring a
briefer treatment will find a competent and balanced
one in Robert Selph Henry's The Story of the Mexi-
can War (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1950.
424 p.).
Diii. WARS: THE CIVIL WAR
3690. Catton, Bruce. Mr. Lincoln's army.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 195 1.
372 p. 51-9468 E470.2.C37
Bibliography: p. 341-347.
3691. Catton, Bruce. Glory Road; the bloody
route from Fredericksburg to Gettysburg.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1952. 416 p.
52-5538 E470.2.C36
Bibliography: p. 363-370.
3692. Catton, Bruce. A stillness at Appomattox.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1053.
438 p. 53-9982 . E470.2.C39
Mr. Catton's trilogy constitutes a history of the
Army of the Potomac for the general reader which
does not attempt a detailed narrative of operations,
but concentrates on the personalities of the lenders,
the criticism of generalship, and especially the
combat experience of the common soldier. For the
latter purpose he has drawn more upon regimental
histories than other recent writers, and emphasizes
the effects of heavy losses in individu.il units. He
is at all times concerned with the clfcctivcncss of
448 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
supply and the state of morale. Few military his-
tories have so vividly realized the feeling of war
from the viewpoint of the individual participant.
3693. De Forest, John William. A volunteer's ad-
ventures; a Union captain's record of the
Civil War. Edited, with notes, by James H. Crou-
shore. With an introd. by Stanley T. Williams.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1946. xviii,
237 p. A4 6-3486 E601.D3
Personal narratives of the Civil War are legion;
that of De Forest (1 826-1906) may be chosen to
represent the others because of its author's skill as
a novelist and man of letters. His manuscript, given
its final revision about 1890, was put together from
wartime letters to his wife, and from articles pub-
lished in Harper's New Monthly Magazine and The
Galaxy during or shortly after the war. The first
part, which describes the author's experience as a line
officer of a Connecticut regiment serving on the
lower Mississippi, has a first-hand intensity which
does not recur in his narrative of Sheridan's valley
campaign from the viewpoint of a staff officer at
army corps headquarters.
3694. Freeman, Douglas Southall. R. E. Lee, a
biography. New York, Scribner, 1934-35.
4 v. 34-3366o E467.1.L4F83
Bibliography: v 2, p. 591-595; v. 4, p. 543-569.
3695. Freeman, Douglas Southall. Lee's lieu-
tenants, a study in command. New York,
Scribner, 1946. 4 v. 46-3415 E470.2.F7 1946
"Select critical bibliography": v. 4, p. 799-825.
Contents. — v. 1. Manassas to Malvern Hill. —
v. 2. Cedar Mountain to Chancellorsville. — v. 3-4.
Gettysburg to Appomattox.
Dr. Freeman was engaged for 19 years upon the
biography, which at once took its place as a classic.
As a study of Lee's generalship, its originality lies
in its systematically taking account of the "fog of
war," and of the primary function of military intel-
ligence in every commander's strategy. Save in one
or two instances, "the reader remains at Confederate
G. H. Q. throughout the war and receives the intelli-
gence reports only as they arrive." The massive
accumulation of detail regularly strengthens the
evidence for Lee's military and personal greatness.
Lee's Lieutenants, six years in the making, was
undertaken as a supplement to the earlier work, in
order to do justice to the other leaders there over-
shadowed by Lee. It assumed the form of "a review
of the command of the Army of Northern Vir-
ginia," during the 14 months before Lee was placed
at its head, and on the subordinate levels thencefor-
ward. "Where familiar batdes again were de-
scribed, the viewpoint would not be that of Lee
but that of the men executing his orders or making
decisions for themselves."
3696. Grant, Ulysses S. Personal memoirs.
Edited with notes and an introd. by E. B.
Long. Cleveland, World Pub. Co., 1952. xxv,
608 p. 52-5191 E672.F7617
First published in 1885-86.
The famous book was undertaken by the ex-Presi-
dent in order to provide an estate for his family,
otherwise unprovided for, and completed, after
eleven months of work, a week before he died of
cancer of the throat. The first sixth is largely con-
cerned with Grant's experiences in the Mexican
War, the remainder with his campaigns during
1861-63, and with the campaigns of 1864-65 in
general. Seldom has a narrative of great events by
the leading participant been so utterly free of pre-
tension and fanfare. Grant speaks plainly of his
superiors' mistakes in the early years, and as plainly
admits his own: "I have always regretted that the
last assault at Cold Harbor was ever made." Mr.
Long's unobtrusive editing consists largely in sup-
plying full names in brackets, and adding a num-
ber of corrective footnotes. Lloyd Lewis lived to
complete only the first installment of what was to
have been a large-scale modern biography: Captain
Sam Grant (Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. 512 p.).
It is to be continued from June 1861 by Bruce Cat-
ton, who has already contributed a graceful inter-
pretative sketch: U. S. Grant and the American
Military Tradition (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954.
201 p.).
3697. Henderson, George F. Stonewall Jackson
and the American Civil War. With an in-
trod. by Field-Marshal the late Right Hon. Viscount
Wolseley. Authorized American ed. London, New
York, Longmans, Green, 1937. xxiv, 737 p.
38-30209 E467.1.J15H55 1937
First published in two volumes, 1898.
Thanks to the unprecedented documentary pub-
lication of the U. S. War Department, The War of
the Rebellion: A Compilation of the Official Records
of the Union and Confederate Armies (Washing-
ton, 1880-1901. 130 v.), usually referred to as the
Official Records of the Rebellion, it has been nearly
as easy to study the Civil War in detail in Europe
as in America. One of the earliest and most influ-
ential results of such study was the work of Col.
Henderson, Professor of Military Art and History
at the British Staff College. It is a brilliant presen-
tation of Jackson (1824-1863) as a selfless Christian
knight and a supreme master of the art of war com-
parable to Napoleon and to Wellington at their best.
His death at Chancellorsville from the fire of his
own men was a fatal loss to the Confederacy; Lee
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 449
was left with no one "to whom he could entrust the
execution of those daring and delicate manoeuvres
his inferior numbers rendered necessary."
3698. Henry, Robert Selph. The story of the Con-
federacy. New and rev. ed. New York,
New Home Library, 1943. 514 p.
43-18537 E487.H544 1943
First published in 1931.
An oudine of the war from the viewpoint of the
Confederate armies, based on the principle that "the
preponderance of power on the part of the North
was so great that nothing short of perfect perform-
ance by Southern statecraft and Southern command
could have reversed the result." In consequence,
missed opportunities by Southern commanders are
heavily emphasized. Mr. Henry, an experienced
railroad executive, makes of it a very dramatic story,
much admired by the late Douglas S. Freeman who,
in 1936, called it "at present the book with which to
begin one's study of the period it covers and the
book to which to return when everything else on
the subject has been read."
3699. Lewis, Lloyd. Sherman, fighting prophet.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1932. 690 p.
32-33980 E467.1.S55L48
Bibliography: p. 655-669.
William Tecumseh Sherman (1 820-1 891) was an
Ohio West Pointer with extensive Southern con-
nections, who remained inflexibly loyal to the Union
and the Constitution, but foresaw from the outset
the magnitude of the effort that would be required
to defeat the Confederacy. Of nervous tempera-
ment, habitually outspoken, and a trenchant pen-
man, he had frequent clashes with politicians and
the press, which delayed his recognition as an out-
standing commander. Lewis' volume, studded with
extracts from Sherman's own letters, builds up a
portrait of this complex character in convincing de-
tail. Basil H. Liddell Hart's Sherman; Soldier,
Realist, American (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1930.
456 p.) is somewhat better for operations, but Lewis'
is a rounded presentation of an exceptional
American.
3700. The Navy in the Civil War. New York,
Scribner, 1883. 3 v. 5—19351 E591.N32
Contents. — v. 1. Soley, James Russell. The
blockade and the cruisers. — v. 2. Ammen, Daniel.
The Adantic Coast. — v. 3. Mahan, Alfred T. The
Gulf and inland waters.
Identical in format with the same publisher's scries
of volumes on the Campaigns of the Civil War. But
whereas the latter, although still worth occasional
consultation, have been replaced in detail and as a
whole, The Navy in the Civil War remains the only
large-scale survey of its subject, and this in spite of
the 30-volume publication of the U. S. Navy De-
partment, Official Records of the Union and Con-
federate Navies (Washington, 1894- 1922). Writ-
ten by two naval officers and a professor at the Naval
Academy, they are sound and sober narratives, but
that of Commander Mahan, as he then was, lacks
the philosophical depth of his later and greater
writings.
3701. O'Connor, Richard. Sheridan, the inevit-
able. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953.
400 p. ^ 53-5847 E467.1.S54O3
"Notes on sources": p. 361-391.
Philip H. Sheridan (1831-1888), the son of an
Irish Catholic immigrant who settled in Somerset,
Ohio, made his way against social and personal dif-
ficulties to graduate from West Point in 1853. In
the course of hard-fighting service as brigade and
division commander in the West, he impressed him-
self on Grant, who brought him East to command
the cavalry of the Army of the Potomac early in
1864. Here he crushed Stuart at Yellow Tavern,
and Early in the Shenandoah Valley, and increas-
ingly became Grant's reliance as his agent for of-
fensive operations. He struck the hammer-blows
of March-April 1865 which forced Lee to surrender.
Mr. O'Connor's vigorous narrative goes on to de-
scribe his later service, in charge of the final years of
Indian warfare, and as commander-in-chief, but
naturally emphasizes the great year in Virginia
when Sheridan established himself as one of the
great captains.
3702. Shannon, Fred Albert. The organization
and administration of the Union Army,
1861-1865. Cleveland, Clark, 1928. 2 v.
28-15871 E491.S52
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [285]-294.
Since the Civil War soon called for unprecedented
numbers of men under arms, the problem of raising
and organizing this host naturally overstrained exist-
ing facilities, and involved much improvisation and
sheer confusion. Prof. Shannon dwells so ex-
clusively upon the mistakes as nearly to lose sight of
the achievement, and he puts excessive blame upon
what he terms "the state-rights fetish." His
volumes nevertheless contain by far the most in-
formation assembled concerning the respective
shares of Federal and State authorities in raising
troops; the methods employed in procuring food,
clothing, and munitions; the adoption and enforce-
ment of the draft; the policies of paid substitutes for
those who could afford them, and of bounties for
volunteers, and their consequences; and the treat-
ment of slackers and conscientious objectors. An-
other view of the administrative crisis after Sumter
450 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is contained in Alexander Howard Meneely's The
War Department, 1861 (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1928. 400 p.).
3703. Thomason, John W. Jeb Stuart. New
York, Scribner, 1930. 512 p.
30-28932 E467.1.S9T46
"Jeb Stuart was a symbol, gonfalon that went be-
fore the swift, lean columns of the Confederacy."
Captain Thomason of the Marine Corps tells us
that he attempted, "not a history of a war, but a
portrait of a splendid human soul, expressed through
the profession of arms." The result, embellished
with his own skillful drawings, glows with his
enthusiasm, affection, and pride in the great Con-
federate cavalryman (1 833-1 864), and tells a great
deal about the cavalry operations of the Eastern
campaigns as well.
3704. Wiley, Bell Irvin. The life of Johnny Reb,
the common soldier of the Confederacy.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1943. 444 p.
43-3253 E607.W5
Bibliography: p. [4i9]~426.
3705. Wiley, Bell Irvin. The life of Billy Yank,
the common soldier of the Union. Indian-
apolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952. 454 p.
52-5809 E491.W69
"Bibliographical notes": p. 438-446.
The citizen armies of the Civil War wrote home
innumerable letters and kept an extraordinary num-
ber of diaries. Prof. Wiley has spent years in
tracking down and digesting these materials, which
he has combined with the Official Records of the
Rebellion and other printed sources to reconstruct
with complete fidelity the daily life of the soldier in
either camp. There are chapters on drunkenness
and other vices, heroism and cowardice, rations and
ersatz rations, clothing, religion in camp, discipline
and punishments, morale, etc. On completing the
second work the author wrote: "The two were so
much alike that the task of giving this book a flavor
and character distinct from The Life of Johnny Reb
has at times been a difficult one."
3706. Williams, Kenneth P. Lincoln finds a gen-
eral; a military study of the Civil War.
With maps by Clark Ray. New York, Macmillan,
1949-52. 3v._ 49-IX530 E470.W765
Includes bibliographies.
The author is a professor of mathematics at
Indiana University, but there is nothing amateurish
about his close analyses of Civil War generalship
from the evidence supplied in the Official Records
of the Rebellion. He believes that when President
Lincoln said, a few weeks after appointing him to
the supreme command, "Grant is the first General
I have had," he spoke the plain truth. Grant he
describes as "the embodiment of the offensive spirit
that leaves the enemy no rest," and "the most profit-
able and the most inspiring of all generals to study."
The first two volumes describe the failures of gen-
eralship in the successive commanders of the Army
of the Potomac, and the third follows Grant's West-
ern campaign through June 1862. Two or more
additional volumes will be required to complete the
work.
Div. WARS:
THE SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR
3707. Chadwick, French Ensor. The relations of
the United States and Spain: the Spanish-
American War. New York, Scribner, 191 1. 2 v.
11-23013 E715.C43
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 475-478.
Chadwick was Admiral Sampson's flag-captain
during the blockade and battle of Santiago de Cuba.
His narrative of the war, by far the most thorough
and detailed that has been written, is "intended in
the main as a documentary history," printing in
whole or part all important orders, telegrams, and
reports, including those on the Spanish side in
translation. These have been pieced together with
such skill as to provide a narrative of true conti-
nuity, clarity, and suspense. Admiral Chadwick
makes no attempt to conceal the disparity of force,
and he resolutely keeps the Sampson-Schley contro-
versy out of his book. The land campaigns, in Cuba,
Porto Rico, and the Philippines, fall entirely within
volume 2.
3708. Wilson, Herbert W. The downfall of Spain;
naval history of the Spanish-American War.
London, Low, Marston, 1900. 451 p.
1-27847 E727.W74
"Authorities": p. 442-444.
H. W. Wilson of London was the author of the
standard Ironclads in Action (London, S. Low,
Marston, 1896. 2 v.) which, 30 years later, he
would revise and expand into Battleships in Action
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1926. 2 v.). Admiral
Chadwick in 191 1 called this "the best naval history
of the war," and drew upon it for authoritative com-
ments at several points. Although published so soon
after the war's end, it remains a remarkable ex-
ample of what can be done when a Government
publishes its documents fully and promptly, as did
the United States, and a genuine expert analyzes
them thoroughly. On one point Wilson revised his
opinion by 1926: a number of instances of spon-
taneous combustion in warship magazines between
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 45 1
1898 and 19 14 led him to doubt that an external
mine had destroyed the Maine.
Dv. WARS: WORLD WAR I
3709. Dickinson, John. The building of an army;
a detailed account of legislation, adminis-
tration and opinion in the United States, 1915-1920.
New York, Century, 1922. 398 p.
22-12553 UA25.D5
On April 1, 19 17, the United States, a completely
unmilitary nation, had 127,000 men under arms.
Nineteen months later the American Army con-
sisted of 3,665,000 men, of whom nearly two million
were in Europe. This book supplies a thoughtful
narrative of how the Selective Service Acts of 1917
were utilized to achieve this result.
3710. Harbord, James G. The American Army
in France, 1917-1919. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1936. xviii, 632 p. 36-6451 D570.H275
General Harbord 's experience was one of the most
varied in World War I. During the first year of the
A. E. F. he was Pershing's chief of staff; he com-
manded the Marine Brigade at Belleau Wood (May
1918) and the 2nd Division in the Soissons offensive
(July); at its conclusion he took over the Services
of Supply for the duration of the war. For each of
these phases General Harbord provides a clear, di-
rect, and critical narrative worthy of the intelligent
and incisive administrator that he was. A more
perfunctory oudine covers the aspects of the A. E. F.
with which he was not personally concerned.
371 1. Holley, Irving B. Ideas and weapons; ex-
ploitation of the aerial weapon by the United
States during World War I; a study in the relation-
ship of technological advance, military doctrine, and
the development of weapons. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1953. 222 p. (Yale historical pub-
lications. Miscellany, 57) 52-13971 UG633.H6
"Bibliographical note": p. fi79]-209.
One of the Air Force historians of World War II
here applies his experience to explaining the aerial
failure of 1917-18. He tracks it down in the spheres
of doctrine, equipment, and organization. The men
in charge failed to develop any clear ideas concerning
the purposes and composition of an American air
force. They failed to recognize the fluidity of the
technological factor, necessitating constant improve-
ments in airplane design. They failed to create effi-
cient agencies for decision, information, and re-
search. As a result of their emphasis on quantity
rather than quality of production, American-made
planes proved obsolete by the time they began to
reach the front in quantity, and the American air
force had to be equipped with aircraft of allied
manufacture.
3712. March, Peyton C. The nation at war.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1932.
407 p. 3>2-^l51 D570.M35 1932a
General March (1864—1955) was the original selec-
tion for commander of the A. E. F.'s artillery and
held that post, occupied in organizing and training,
until Jan. 1918, when Secretary Baker recalled him
to head the General Staff. His volume, from that
early point, is in large part polemic, to justify the
Staff against the criticisms, real or supposed, in Gen-
eral Pershing's reminiscences (no. 3715). March
put the staff on 24-hour duty, reorganized it accord-
ing to function, reduced paper work, and drove it
hard. "Raising the men; putting them in camps;
clothing them; equipping them; training them; ship-
ping them to France; sending ammunition, rifles,
and supplies to France to make the A. E. F. a going
concern: all that was done by the vast military hier-
archy at home, working under me as Chief of Staff
of the Army."
3713. Palmer, Frederick. Newton D. Baker;
America at war. New York, Dodd, Mead,
1931. 2 v. 31-28311 D570.P32
Baker (1 871-1937) was an Ohio Progressive with
pacifist convictions whose selection for the War De-
partment provoked some derision, but who proved
an exceptionally able mediator between the military
organization and civilian groups and interests.
Palmer, an experienced war correspondent, used
Baker's own papers as well as official war agency
records to relate in detail Baker's distinguished serv-
ices in coordinating the American war effort and
facilitating the task of the soldiers at home and in
France. Baker was made a special target by assail-
ants of the Wilson administration, but the military
leaders are well-nigh unanimous in testifying that
his genuine concern for civil liberties did not in the
least get in the way of his effective mastery of the
gigantic administrative problems of his office.
3714. Palmer, Frederick. John J. Pershing, Gen-
eral of the Armies, a biography. Harrisburg,
Pa., Military Service Pub. Co., 1948. 380 p.
48-8289 E181.P512
Palmer, a friend and admirer of "J. J. P.," com-
pleted this biographical sketch in 1940, and added
the two final chapters after Pershing's death in 1948.
It is without references and contains little on IV r-
shing's career before 1917, and less on his life after
1919. However, it adds color to Pershing's own
narrative (no. 3715) of his war experiences, and
it emphasizes, as Pershing does not, the magnitude
of his achievement in maintaining the integrity of
452 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the A. E. F. against the insistent pressure of the
allied commands that American men and materiel
be employed to fill the gaps in their own
organizations.
3715. Pershing, John J. My experiences in the
World War. New York, Stokes, 193 1. 2 v.
31-10662 D570.P44 1931
Pershing (1860-1948) was in his 57th year, the
junior major general of the U. S. Army, and in
charge of the Southern Department when, in May
1 917, he was chosen to head the American Expedi-
tionary Force. He took over a decade in the careful
preparation of these memoirs. They are strung
upon entries in his official diary and mirror very
faithfully the oudook from American G. H. Q.
They are for the greater part concerned, as was
Pershing, with problems of planning, organization,
training, supply, and inter-allied relations in every
sphere. Operations are encountered only in volume
2, and are somewhat formally described.
3716. Sims, William Sowden. The victory at sea.
In collaboration with Burton J. Hendrick.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1920. 410 p.
20-18578 D589.U6S6
American warships played a vital part in winning
World War I, for if our dreadnoughts never saw
action, our cruisers and destroyers were numerous
enough to permit the adoption of the convoy system,
which finally shook off the German submarines'
stranglehold upon British commerce. With the
help of a veteran journalist, the commander of the
American fleet in European waters tells the fasci-
nating story in untechnical language.
Dvi. WARS: WORLD WAR II
3717. Arnold, Henry H. Global mission. New
York, Harper, 1949. 626 p.
49-10894 D790.A9
The memoirs of a West Pointer of the class of
1907 who was assigned to military aviation in 191 1
and succeeded to the command of the Air Corps
the day before Munich (1938). The narrative of
subsequent events, if somewhat cluttered and gos-
sipy, is a unique depiction of the coming of age of
the Air Force as a third arm of national defense.
3718. Bradley, Omar N. A soldier's story. New
York, Holt, 1 95 1. xix, 618 p.
51-11294 D756.B7
A personal narrative of the Algerian, Sicilian,
and Normandy campaigns which, although more
chatty and anecdotal, closely parallels Eisenhower's
(no. 3719) but affords instructive comparisons by
giving the viewpoint of our most successful army-
group commander rather than that of SHAEF. A
list of principal persons and a glossary are helpful in
following the narrative.
3719. Eisenhower, Dwight D., Pres. U. S. Cru-
sade in Europe. Garden City, N. Y., Garden
City Books, 1952. 573 p.
52-2207 D743.E35 1952
First published in 1948.
The personal narrative of the Supreme Com-
mander, Allied Expeditionary Forces, from his de-
parture from the Philippines at the end of 1940 to the
postwar occupation of Germany. It illuminates the
processes of planning and coordinating, at the high-
est level, such gigantic combined operations as the
African, Italian, and Normandy invasions.
3720. Merriam, Robert E. Dark December; the
full account of the Battle of the Bulge.
Chicago, Ziff-Davis Pub. Co., 1947. 234 p.
47-4797 . D756.5.A7M4
One of the Army's field historians, who was
present during the fighting of Dec. 16, 1944-Jan. 16,
1945, interviewed many of the participants, and
helped prepare the still unreleased official narrative,
presents his own dramatic and critical interpretation.
The primary blame for von Rundstedt's Ardennes
breakthrough is placed upon the excessive optimism
of American intelligence officers. The effort, how-
ever, quite exhausted Nazi offensive power.
3721. Morison, Samuel Eliot. History of United
States naval operations in World War II.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1947+ 47-1571 D773.M6
Large-scale naval history on an unusual plan: the
author has enjoyed all the facilities for writing official
history, including participation in a number of the
campaigns, but has taken personal responsibility for
all statements of fact and opinion. The result has
been generally acclaimed as contemporary history of
rare authority, unity, and power, as interesting to the
layman as the professional sailor. With the 10th
volume the huge work is approaching its conclusion.
3722. Pratt, Fletcher. War for the world; a
chronicle of our fighting forces in World
War II. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950.
364 p. (The Chronicles of America series, v. 30)
, 52"4358 E173.C58, v. 30
"Bibliographical note": p. [351 ]— 353.
A concise narrative of the two great wars which
America conducted in 1 941-1945, with neither the
Pacific nor the European theater slighted. It pre-
sents the logistic basis of our expanding operations,
and stresses the technological developments which,
after one grim year of containment, gave superiority
MILITARY HISTORY AND THE ARMED FORCES / 453
by land, sea, and air, and made offensive warfare
and victory possible. The textbook edition of this
noteworthy feat of condensation can be obtained
separately from the series.
3723. Stilwell, Joseph W. The Stilwell papers,
arr. and edited by Theodore H. White.
New York, Sloane, 1948. xvi, 357 p.
48-6966 D811.S83
Excerpts from General Stilwell's command jour-
nal, memoranda to self, and letters to his wife are
interspersed with background passages by the editor
to form the most completely personal record of any
pivotal figure in World War II. While "Vinegar
Joe" was hardly the ideal personality for liaison with
an oriental power, his version of his struggle with
what he regarded as Kuomintang laxity, deceit, and
corruption has few counterparts.
3724. Studies in social psychology in World War
II. Prepared and edited under the auspices
of a special committee of the Social Science Research
Council. [Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1949-50] 4 v. 49-2480 U22.S8
Contents. — v. 1. The American soldier: adjust-
ment during Army life, by S. A. Stouffer and
others. — v. 2. The American soldier: combat and its
aftermath, by S. A. Stouffer and others. — v. 3. Ex-
periments on mass communication, by C. I. Hov-
land, A. A. Lumsdaine and F. D. Sheffield. — v. 4.
Measurement and prediction, by S. A. Stouffer and
others.
These massive volumes constitute the end product
of the war-time activity of the Research Branch of
the War Department's Information and Education
Division. A study of soldiers' attitudes, it is based
on 243 separate surveys by questionnaire, some in-
volving as many as 25,000 men. The first two
volumes are deeply revealing reflections of the states
of mind prevalent in a vast citizen army; the last
two are chiefly of interest to professional psycholo-
gists. The series is discussed from the latter point
of view in Studies in the Scope and Method of "The
American Soldier," edited by Robert K. Merton and
Paul F. Lazarsfeld (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1950.
255 p. Continuities in Social Research).
3725. U. S. Bureau of the Budget. The United
States at war; development and administra-
tion of the war program by the Federal Govern-
ment. Prepared under the auspices of the Com-
mittee of Records of War Administration by the
War Records Section, Bureau of the Budget. Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1946. xv, 555 p.
([United States. Historical reports on war admin-
istration, Bureau of the Budget, no. 1 ])
47-32819 D769.A55 1946
More than any previous war of the United States,
World War II produced an enormous increase in
governmental controls, and in the number and size
of the agencies which exerted them. This is an
administrative history of the Government's war
effort, organized by essential functions rather than
by the several agencies, merely to list which requires
a 15-page appendix (p. 521-535).
3726. U. S. Dept. of the Army. Office of Military
History. United States Army in World War
II. Washington, 1947+ 47-46404 D769.A533
This monumental enterprise, to which only the
Official Records of the Rebellion can be compared,
was authorized by the Chief of Staff in 1946. Be-
hind it, says General Albert C. Smith, "lies the
greatest mass of records and recollections ever pro-
duced— 17,200 tons of records created by the U. S.
Army alone." More than 85 volumes are planned,
of which 27 have appeared as this chapter is com-
pleted. The work is arranged in a number of sub-
series: The War Department, of which 3 vols, have
appeared; The Army Ground Forces, 2 vols.; The
Army Service Forces and the Technical Services, 5
vols.; The War in Europe, 4 vols.; The War in the
Pacific, 6 vols.; China-Burma-India, 1 vol.; Middle
East, 1 vol.; Special Studies, 2 vols.; and Pictorial
Records, 3 vols. The Chief Historian of the office,
Kent Roberts Greenfield, is the general editor of the
series, and also one of the authors in The Army
Ground Forces subseries. He has also prepared a
Master Index; Reader's Guide (1955. 81 p.) to the
volumes thus far issued, in which the content of each
volume is summarized, and its importance for the
study of modern warfare analyzed. Dr. Greenfield
has also discussed the general problems of writing
contemporary military history in The Historian and
the Army (New Brunswick, Rutgers University
Press, 1954. 93 p.). The series is on a grander
scale than many users of this Guide will require, but
since it will be years before it is completed and its
results digested in works of lesser scope, it must be
listed as the most authoritative source within its
field.
3727. U. S. Office of Air Force History. The
Army Air Forces in World War II. Pre-
pared under the editorship of Wesley Frank Craven
[and] James Lea Cate. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1948-55. 6 v. 48-3657 D790.A47
A cooperative official history, with sections or
chapters by various hands under the general editor-
ship of two professional historians. Volume i opens
with a review of military aeronautics from 1917-
1939. Volumes 2 and 3 cover the war in Europe, 4
and 5 the war in the Pacific. Volume 6 'Meals with
the Zone of the Interior — with the development of
454 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
an effective air organization, with the forging and an abundance of detail, at times more than could be
distribution of weapons, with the recruiting and useful to anyone but the professional student of mili-
training of airmen." The series as a whole presents tary aeronautics.
XI
Intellectual History
M
A. General Worlds 3728-3737
B. Periods 373^-3749
C. Topics 375°-3762
D. Localities 3763-3767
E. International Influences: General 3768-3772
F. International Influences: By Country 3773~378o
ALTHOUGH intellectual history is the latest of the historical specialties to attain some
- measure of separatenass and autonomy, the present selection may seem scanty in com-
parison with the huge bibliography appended to Curd (no. 3729). Closer examination will
show that the great majority of those titles fall within a single one of the humanities, arts, or
sciences, and, insofar as they have proved suitable for inclusion here, appear in the appropriate
section elsewhere. The titles which follow are those, as yet comparatively few, which take a
general view of American intellectual life, or deal
with "culture" or "civilization" conceived primarily
as an activity of mind, or attempt to arrive at the
"national character," or include a certain span of the
humanities, arts, and sciences, or deal with the two-
way international commerce in ideas, or handle some
specific topic in so large and generalized a way as
to display it in a wide context of thought and so to lift
it out of the more specialized discipline to which it
might at first seem to be confined. Thus Davies
(no. 3752) deals with phrenology as a current in
American reformist ideology and popular culture
rather than as a dead end in the development of
scientific psychology, and Egbert and Persons (nos.
3753 and 3758) expound socialism and evolution as
large trends in general American thought rather
than as special doctrines of economics or biology.
There can be no clear-cut dividing line in such
groupings; there is much here that social, political,
or literary historians should not miss, while anyone
interested in the intellectual history of the United
States will find many other titles to his purpose
elsewhere in this Guide, and particularly in Sections
VIII A and B (Historiography and General His-
tories), XV B, C, and D (Social History and
Thought), XVII (Science), XXII (Philosophy and
Psychology), XXIII C (Religious Thought and
Theology), XXVIII A and B (Economic Thought),
XXIX A (Political Thought), etc.
A. General Works
3728. Cohen, Morris R. American thought; a
critical sketch. Edited and with a foreword
by Felix S. Cohen. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1954.
360 p. 54-10667 B851.C6
Cohen had for years aspired to write a major and
systematic work on American thought — "not on
technical philosophy but rather on the general ideas
which are taken for granted in various fields" —
and made a beginning in a course of lectures de-
livered at Chicago the year after his retirement,
1939. The notes for these lectures were in part
expanded into written expositions down to 1946, the
455
45^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
year before his death. His son and literary executor,
Felix S. Cohen, put the completed or nearly com-
pleted portions into form for publication, but died
before he could read the proofs. The sections on
psychology, sociology, ethics, education, and litera-
ture, and a final summing-up had to be omitted.
The volume as published contains substantial treat-
ments of legal thought and general philosophy,
lesser ones of economic and religious thought, and
sketches of historical, scientific, economic, political,
and aesthetic thought. An introductory chapter on
the American tradition deals with such matters as
the nature of intellectual leadership, the demo-
cratic dilution of education, and the prevalence of
standardization and intolerance. Fragmentary as
it is, the book is the only attempt of the kind by
an original mind, and is crowded with illuminating
perceptions and penetrating criticisms.
3729. Curd, Merle E. The growth of American
thought. 2d ed. New York, Harper, 1951.
xviii, 910 p. 51-1238 E169.1.C87 1951
Bibliography: p. 801-876.
The most complete survey of American intellec-
tual history, which includes organized knowledge,
speculation organized or traditional, as well as
values, and pays special attention to related institu-
tions such as schools and the press. All of these
are so related to the whole social milieu as to con-
stitute a social history of American thought. Gen-
eral tendencies rather than individual thinkers are
emphasized here. The work is organized in chrono-
logical periods characterized by their leading ideas;
the first third of the 19th century, for instance, is
taken to have been marked by patrician leadership
in thought.
3730. Fox, Dixon Ryan. Ideas in motion. New
York, Appleton-Century, 1935. 126 p.
35—34879 E169.1.F76
Contents. — Civilization in transit. — Culture in
knapsacks. — A synthetic principle in American
social history. — Refuse ideas and their disposal.
Four essays principally concerned with the dif-
fusion of ideas throughout the United States.
"Civilization in transit" distinguishes four stages in
the development of professional life in a new coun-
try, from total dependence on foreign practitioners
to final autonomy.
3731. Mumford, Lewis. The golden day; a study
in American literature and culture. New
York, Norton [1934?] 283 p.
34-27096 E169.1.M943
Published in 1926 under tide: The Golden Day;
a Study in American Experience and Culture.
An interpretive historical sketch of American cul-
ture, which becomes almost a diagnosis by a healer
anxious to prescribe, and which ha had a combining
influence on later interpreters. The tide derives
from the author's characterization of the years
1830-60, when "the old culture of the seaboard settle-
ment had its Golden Day in the mind." "This
period nourished men, as no other has done in
America before or since. Up to that time, the
American communities were provincial; when it was
over, they had lost their base."
3732. Perry, Bliss. The American mind. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1912. 248 p.
12-24430 PS31.P4
Contents. — Race, nation, and book. — The Amer-
ican mind. — American idealism. — Romance and re-
action.— Humor and satire. — Individualism and
fellowship.
A common-sense examination of American litera-
ture as a mirror of American national character.
Both are dominated by American idealism, which
in literature most commonly manifests itself as
sentimentalism. Romance and the reaction against
it, and American humor and satire, are illustrated
from both literature and life. The conclusion calls
for "fellowship based upon individualism, and in-
dividualism ever leading to fellowship."
3733. Perry, Ralph Barton. Puritanism and de-
mocracy. New York, Vanguard Press,
1944. 688 p. 44-41893 E169.1.P47
Identifies the two main formative elements in the
American national tradition as the Puritanism em-
bodied in the New England theocracy, and the
democracy of the Enlightenment given classic ex-
pression in the Declaration of Independence. Each
is analyzed as a system of ideals, and the link be-
tween them found in the individualism which gave
allegiance to ideas rather than to persons and insti-
tutions. Each is appraised, and found to have a
large measure of validity for our day — they "rein-
force one another's truths and aggregate one an-
other's errors," but "also serve to correct and com-
plement one another's limitations." The whole
book is an unusual synthesis of historical and
philosophical interpretation. In a lesser work,
Characteristically American (New York, Knopf,
1949. 162 p.), Prof. Perry uses similar ideas in
attempting the "teasing and baffling task" of de-
fining national characteristics and devotes one lecture
to William James as the classic exponent of
American individualism.
3734. Potter, David M. People of plenty; eco-
nomic abundance and the American charac-
ter. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1954.
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 457
xxvii, 219 p. (Charles R. Walgreen Foundation
lectures) 54-12797 E169.1.P6
In publishing his lectures at the University of
Chicago (1950), the writer widens his original theme
to include a discussion of national character and the
respective contributions of historians and "behavioral
scientists" to the concept. Economic abundance is
then advanced as a kind of case study for American
national character, and pursued through a sequence
of relationships. It has, for instance, "given to the
concept of 'democracy' a distinctive meaning in
America which sets it apart from democracy in other
parts of the world."
3735. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. The soul of Amer-
ica, yesterday and today. Philadelphia, Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press, 1932. 261 p.
32-12287 E175.9.Q56
Combines a brief interpretive sketch of the main
stream of American history with a presentation of
"the American soul" as manifested in its seven
characteristic qualities of democracy, efficiency,
liberality, provincialism, individuality, humor, and
vision. Reflects the outlook of a sensible and well-
informed, if somewhat discursive, conservative.
3736. Rourke, Constance M. The roots of Ameri-
can culture and other essays. Edited, with
a preface, by Van Wyck Brooks. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1942. 305 p. 42-19827 E169.1.R78
Eight studies collected the year after the author's
death, including "The Rise of Theatricals," "Early
American Music," and "The Shakers." "Her
work," says Mr. Brooks, "was mainly exploratory,"
but her delicate and sensitive approach to her sub-
jects, and a type of statement at once cautious and
precise, give it far more than a tentative value.
Few writers on the arts have been so perceptively
aware of the social milieu in which they exist, or
have been able to deal so effectively with either side
of the relationship.
3737. Wright, Louis B. Culture on the moving
frontier. Bloomington, Indiana University
Press, 1955. 273 p. 54-6207 E169.1.W82
"Lectures delivered on the Patten Foundation at
Indiana University in the spring of 1953."
Six lectures which deal with the transmission and
diffusion of the Anglo-Saxon tradition — "the tradi-
tion of English law, the English language, English
literature, and British religion and customs" — in
the United States. After a general treatment of the
colonial period, the author concentrates upon this
process in the Kentucky borderland, in the North-
west Territory, and in California during the Gold
Rush age. Two concluding lectures describe the
"instruments of civilization," both spiritual and
secular. The latter includes English belles-lettres,
historical and legal books, textbooks, academies and
colleges, women's clubs, lectures and lyceums, and
country newspapers.
B. Periods
3738. Commager, Henry Steele. The American
mind; an interpretation of American thought
and character since the 1880's. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1950. 476 p.
50-6338 E169.1.C673
Bibliography: p. [445H67.
The author searches the writing of the last 70
years for "ideas that illuminate the American mind
and ways of using ideas that illustrate the American
character," drawing at will upon philosophy, re-
ligion, literature, politics, and the social sciences,
but not seeking to present formal histories of any
of them. His major theme is the transition from
the traditional and self-confident America of the
19th century, by way of the "watershed of the'90's,"
to the fast-changing and troubled America of the
20th. The mass of material surveyed is not too
successfully assimilated.
3739. Curti, Merle E., ed. American scholarship
in the twentieth century. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1953. 252 p. (The Library
of Congress series in American civilization)
53-5699 AZ505.CS
The editor offers an essay on "The Setting and
the Problems," seeking to relate the development
of the social sciences and the humanities to national
and world history and viewing the present situation
as a schism between absolutists and instrumental-
ists. Louis Wirth interprets the social sciences as
a conquest of more and more ground for quantita-
tive methods, although many areas of social life
remain subject to the artist and the humanistic
scholar. Historical, literary, classical, and philo-
sophical scholarship are presented by W. Stull Holt,
Rene Wellck, Walter R. Agard, and Arthur F.
Murphy, in essays which terminate on a note of
qualified optimism.
458 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3740. Eggleston, Edward. The transit of civiliza-
tion from England to America in the seven-
teenth century. New York, Peter Smith, 1933.
344 P- , A34-396 E162.E283
First published in 190 1.
Contents. — Mental outfit of the early colonists. —
Digression concerning medical notions at the period
of setdement. — Mother English, folk-speech, folk-
lore, and literature. — Weights and measures of con-
duct.— The tradition of education. — Land and labor
in the early colonies.
Although this pioneer work has often been spoken
of with condescension by latter-day scholars, it re-
mains a remarkably concrete and intimate treatment
of the popular mind in England and during the
first two generations of settlement in America. It
was an extraordinary achievement for the turn of the
century, both in breadth of outlook and in the
exploitation of a wide range of sources for a spe-
cialized purpose.
3741. Gabriel, Ralph Henry. The course of
American democratic thought. 2d ed.
New York, Ronald Press, 1956. xiv, 508 p.
56-6263 E169.1.G23 1956
An eternal moral order, the free individual, and
the national mission of America were the three es-
sential doctrines of American democratic faith, uni-
versally assumed after 1815. Mr. Gabriel analyzes
them and sets them against the social and intellectual
background of the "Middle Period," conducts them
safely through the fires of sectional controversy, sees
them modified and developed so as to harmonize
with the evolutionary naturalism and industrial revo-
lution which followed 1865, and leaves them facing
rival systems of social belief in the post-Versailles
age of disillusionment and insecurity. A diversity
of thinkers have given their testimony by the way in
what has been called an exceptionally perceptive
attempt "to identify the central intellectual tradi-
tion of the United States."
3742. Miller, Perry. The New England mind;
the seventeenth century. New York, Mac-
millan, 1939. 528 p. 39-22760 F7.M56
3743. Miller, Perry. The New England mind:
from colony to province. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1953. 513 p.
53-5072 F7.M54
In the first of these volumes, the labors of a single
scholar have restored the intellectual framework of
a vanished, in this aspect forgotten, and much mis-
understood age. To an exceptional degree, Massa-
chusetts in 1630 was founded on the basis of a
coherent system of thought, and this volume fur-
nished the hitherto missing key to the comprehen-
sion of a whole society and its orthodoxy. The
essential character of the New England mind derives
from the circumstances that the founders were simul-
taneously Ramists in logic, Congregationalists in
church policy, and "federalists" in theology — that is,
they adhered to the doctrine of the Covenant of
Grace worked out by William Perkins, William
Ames, and John Preston, which was the only orig-
inal contribution of Puritanism to its own system
of ideas. From Colony to Province follows the for-
tunes of this orthodoxy in Church and State during
the seven decades which followed the restoration of
the Stuarts (1660-1730), and eraces the effect of the
progress of events upon that "dictatorship of the
visible elect" which was the practical consequence
of the Covenant theology. It is seen as a process of
accelerating disruption, but one in which a very
specialized, archaic, and rigid system died amaz-
ingly hard.
3744. Miller, Perry, ed. American thought: Civil
War to World War I. New York, Rinehart,
1954. 345 p. (Rinehart editions, 70)
54-7243 PS682.M5
A compact and exceptionally unified anthology,
presenting extracts from thirteen thinkers of the era
which opened "when the mind of America was
aroused and challenged by the twin invasions of
Hegel and Darwin." The editor, who contributes
a substantial introduction, has aimed to provide at
least one explicit statement of "each of the control-
ling conceptions," and believes that his selections
"do expound the crucial points of view by which
Americans between 1865 and 1917 were ruled."
3745. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The intellectual life
of colonial New England. [2d ed.] New
York, New York University Press, 1956. 288 p.
56-8487 F7.M82 1956
First published in 1936 under title: The Puritan
Pronaos.
"Primitive New England is a puritan pronaos to
the American mind of the 19th Century, and of
today" — not because of the books or new ideas pro-
duced there, but because the settlers of the 1630's
took steps to avoid the intellectual degeneracy which
leads to spiritual decay, and made great sacrifices to
import the apparatus of civilized life and learning.
These lectures describe from contemporary sources
Harvard College, elementary and public grammar
schools, printing and bookselling, private and public
libraries, pulpit literature, histories and political
pamphlets, verse, and the beginnings of science.
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 459
3746. Morris, Lloyd R. Postscript to yesterday;
America: the last fifty years. New York,
Random House, 1947. xxvi, 475 p.
47-11260 E741.M65
Bibliography: p. 451-465.
Aims to present the attitudes of the American
people to the principal social changes that took place
between 1896 and 1946, and so "to tell the story of
the American mind and heart during the past 50
years." This is done, however, by a succession of
highly-wrought sketches of individual figures —
literary men, journalists, philosophers, jurists, and
social thinkers. The main theme is the widening
breach, approaching "absolute polarity," "between
two sets of standards; those by which American cul-
ture judged American society, and those which gov-
erned American life as it was actually being lived."
3747. Savelle, Max. Seeds of liberty; the genesis
of the American mind. New York, Knopf,
1948. xix, 587, xxxi p. illus.
48-6861 E169.1.S27 1948
"Chapter nine . . . entitled 'Of music, and of
America singing,' was written by Mr. Cyclone
Covey."
The author has "attempted to find every im-
portant figure who flourished in the period between
1740 and 1760 and to find out what he was thinking,
and where possible, why he thought as he did." He
thus surveys the whole intellectual and cultural out-
put of the colonies during these two decades, dealing
in succession with religion, Newtonian science,
philosophy, economic, social, and political thought,
literary expression, painting, architecture, and music.
At times he strains the facts in order to find liberty
and a conscious nationalism burgeoning in every
sphere.
3748. Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson. The
golden age of colonial culture. [2d ed.]
New York, New York University Press, 1949.
171 p. (New York University. Stokes Founda-
tion. Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early Ameri-
can history) 49-4583 E162.W48 1949
Regarding the decades just preceding the Ameri-
can Revolution as the full development of colonial
culture, characterized by elegance, good taste, and
charm in its chief centers, the author emphasizes the
diverse origins and patterns to be found in these.
This view is developed in brief but well-balanced
sketches of the cultural life of Boston, New York,
Philadelphia, Annapolis, Williamsburg, and Charles-
ton. Each sketch presents the civic background,
and the local achievements in literature, architecture,
music, the artistic crafts, the theater, and natural
science.
3749. Wright, Louis B. The first gendemen of
Virginia; intellectual qualities of the early
colonial ruling class. San Marino, Calif., Hunting-
ton Library, 1940. 373 p. 40-8029 F229.W965
While Provincial Virginia produced very little in
the way of a literature, its large landowners are here
presented as "an aristocracy not only of wealth and
position but of intelligence and learning." Al-
though their concern for education produced only
a somewhat haphazard system of private tutoring,
they owned considerable libraries, which can often
be reconstructed on the basis of surviving inven-
tories. Supplementing these with other evidence,
the author has worked out detailed case-studies of
the literary culture of such figures of the first two
generations as William Fitzhugh, Ralph Wormeley
II, Richard Lee II, Robert Beverley II, the Carters,
and the Byrds.
C. Topics
3750. Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The
American spirit, a study of the idea of civili-
zation in the United States. New York, Macmillan,
1942. 696 p. 42-50003 E169.1.B285
Bibliography: p. 675-683.
Formally a 4th volume of The Rise of American
Civilization, this differs so radically from its prede-
cessors as to warrant separate listing. Selected
authors from Jefferson, Paine, and Adams to Irwin
Edman and W. T. Stace are analyzed in order to
elicit a composite formulation of the American idea
of civilization. This embraces a conception of his-
tory as a struggle of human beings for individual
and social perfection, a social principle which views
all the agencies in the process of civilization as social
products, and a respect for life, for "the utmost
liberty compatible with the social principle," and
"for the rule of universal participation in the work
and benefits of society."
3751. Boas, George, ed. Romanticism in America;
papers contributed to a symposium held at
the Baltimore Museum of Art, May 13, 14, 15, 1940.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1940. 202 p.
40-32317 PS201.B6
Contents. — Democratic bifocal ism, by E. F.
Goldman. — New patterns of greatness, by Eleanor
460 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
P. Spencer. — Thomas Cole and the romantic land-
scape, by W. L. Nathan. — The romantic lady, by
R. P. Boas. — Books for the lady reader, by Ola E.
Winslow. — The romantic interior, by Roger Gil-
man. — Early American Gothic, by Agnes Addi-
son.— The Beethovens of America, by Lubov
Keefer. — Romantic philosophy in America, by
George Boas.
Five of the articles in this symposium deal with
the arts — painting, architecture, and music — but
there are also contributions on literature, philosophy,
and general ideas. To Romanticism, the editor be-
lieves, we owe our sense of toleration for individual-
ism, our interest in primitive man, and our love
of rural nature. It was therefore, he concludes, a
philosophy much more useful to America, with
its medley of races and religions, than the traditional
classicism.
3752. Davies, John D. Phrenology: fad and sci-
ence; a 19th-century American crusade.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1955. 203 p.
(Yale historical publications. Miscellany 62)
55-9438 BF868.D3
By treating phrenology from the inside and sym-
pathetically, instead of from the outside and con-
temptuously, Dr. Davies is able to reveal the logic
of its development and its interrelations with other
aspects of American culture. To its originator,
Franz Joseph Gall, his studies sought the physio-
logical basis of physiological phenomena, but his
disciples, Johann Gaspar Spurzheim and George
Combe, turned it into an optimistic secular phi-
losophy of social progress. In this form, it won
a vogue in the course of the 1820's among upper-
class discussion groups in the eastern cities; it was
"phrenology made practical" by Orson and Lorenzo
Fowler, in the form of craniometrical character
readings and aptitude diagnoses, that swept Ameri-
can society like wildfire, and survived into the pres-
ent century. This lucidly organized monograph
deals with both levels of phrenology, and their ef-
fects in American education, psychiatry, penology,
hygiene, literature, medicine, and religion.
3753. Egbert, Donald Drew, and Stow Persons,
eds. Socialism and American life. Prince-
ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1952. 2 v.
(Princeton studies in American civilization, no. 4)
51-5828 HX83.E45
Volume 2 has special title: Bibliography, Descrip-
tive and Critical. Bibliographer: T. D. Seymour
Bassett.
In one of the most elaborate contributions to
American intellectual history thus far made, various
hands present the European background, Christian
communitarianism, secular Utopianism, the de-
velopment of American Marxism, and the relations
of American socialism to philosophy, economics,
political theory, sociology, psychology, literature,
and art. The bibliography, which runs to 510 pages,
is interlarded with so elaborate a commentary as
to constitute an independent work in its own right.
3754. Ekirch, Arthur A. The idea of progress in
America, 1815-1860. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1944. 305 p. (Columbia Univer-
sity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in his-
tory, economics and public law, no. 511)
H31.C7, no. 511
A44-5611 E338.E35 1944a
Contemporary magazines and academic addresses
have been ransacked in order to portray the general
American faith in progress during this important
period, and to analyze the idea in terms of the inter-
ests and groups which it served or promised to serve,
such as the early labor movement, or "the rising class
of industrial capitalists." Attention is also given to
the defenders of social stability, who argued that an
inevitable steady progress should not be jeopardized
by rash attempts to speed its course. The South
constituted a special problem to believers in progress,
whether sympathetic or hostile to slavery. Pro-
grams for social renovation, and systematic exposi-
tions of the idea of progress receive separate chapters.
3755. Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in
American thought, 1 860-1 915. Philadel-
phia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1944. 191 p.
44-8078 HM22.U5H6
"Prepared and published under the direction of
the American Historical Association from the in-
come of the Albert J. Beveridge memorial fund."
Bibliography: p. 177-186.
An incisive exposition, from a harshly critical
viewpoint, of the reception of the doctrine of natural
selection in America, its application to social
phenomena, and its use during three decades to jus-
tify "a vision of competition as a thing good in it-
self." It was not until the mid-90's that "the Ameri-
can middle class shrank from the principle it had
glorified," and listened to the critics who were
destroying the "flimsy logical structure" of Herbert
Spencer's sociology. But Social Darwinism had its
second flowering in a nationalist or racist form, and
down to World War I was used to support overseas
expansion.
3756. Jones, Howard Mumford. The pursuit of
happiness. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1953. 168 p. (The William W. Cook
Foundation lectures, 7) 52-12265 BJ1481.J65
A most unusual book which might be called a
case-study in American semantics. The well-known
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 461
phrase of the Declaration of Independence is traced
to its origin in the mind of George Mason and the
Virginia Bill of Rights, and then pursued to a mul-
titude of inferences and consequences in American
life and thought since 1776. It is "the pursuing and
securing of happiness and safety as a fundamental
constitutional element in our society" which is in
question, and the appearance of the idea in a se-
quence of judicial decisions is noted. The book
closes with the 20th-century preoccupation with the
"techniques of happiness"; in the shift of meanings
"happiness becomes a problem in expertise."
$J5J. Parry, Albert. Garrets and pretenders; a
history of bohemianism in America. New
York, Covici, Friede, 1933. 383 p.
33-27114 PS138.P3
Bibliography: p. 359-369.
Henri Murger's vision of the aesthetic life in Paris
has received the compliment of imitation in nearly
every civilized nation, although "the French light-
headedness became somewhat rough and uncivilized
in some of its American imitations." Mr. Parry
follows the American phenomena from Pfaff 's saloon
on Broadway in 1854, to the Bohemian Club of San
Francisco, and back to Greenwich Village. There
is no way, he warns, of isolating the poseurs from
the sincere "gypsies of art."
3758. Persons, Stow, cd. Evolutionary thought in
America. [Edited for the special program
in American civilization at Princeton University]
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 462 p.
50-10345 B818.P4
Contents. — The theory of evolution: The rise and
impact of evolutionary ideas, by R. Scoon. Evo-
lution in its relation to the philosophy of nature and
the philosophy of culture, by F. S. C. Northrop.
The genetic nature of differences among men, by
T. Dobzhansky. Evolutionary thought in Amer-
ica: Evolution and American sociology, by R. E. L.
Faris. The impact of the idea of evolution on the
American political and constitutional tradition, by
E. S. Corwin. Evolutionism inAmerican economics,
1800-1946, by J. J. Spengler. The influence of evo-
lutionary theory upon American psychological
thought, by E. G. Boring. Naturalism in American
literature, by M. Cowley. The idea of organic ex-
pression and American architecture, by D. D. Eg-
bert. Evolution and moral theory in America, by
W. F. Quillian, Jr. Evolution and theology in
America, by S. Persons.
The second published symposium to originate
from the Princeton Program of Study in American
Civilization, and organized as a continuation of the
first (no. 3768) in that it presents an intellectual
stimulus from Western Europe, the context in which
the new ideas asserted themselves, and the com-
promises and adjustments which resulted. The
first three chapters are intended to provide the
general background for the specifically American
material which follows.
3759. Smith, Henry Nash. Virgin land; the
American West as symbol and myth. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. 305 p.
50-6230 F591.S65 1950
The idea of the pull of a vacant continent beyond
the frontier, drawing population westward and
thereby giving American civilization its character-
istic stamp, is to be found in Benjamin Franklin,
and assumed a multitude of forms in literature and
social thought before it received its classic statement
from Frederick J. Turner in 1893. The author
pursues the theme even into the dime novels which
flourished after i860, but concludes by criticizing
it as the persistence of an agrarian tradition which
took no account of the industrial revolution, and
which, in the light of World War I, even Turner
found inadequate.
3760. Weinberg, Albert K. Manifest destiny; a
study of nationalist expansionism in Ameri-
can history. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1935.
559 P- . 35-9403 Ei?9-5-w45
"American expansionism is viewed here as an
'ism' or ideology, exemplified but by no means ex-
hausted by the ideas of manifest destiny. The ideol-
ogy of American expansion is its motley body of jus-
tificatory doctrines . . . Taking the liberties necessary
to an analytic history of ideas, this work considers
separately the leading expansionist doctrines in the
order in which successive annexationist movements
brought each into focus, and with special reference
to the issue or period in which it figured as chief,
even if by no means sole, ideological determinant."
The content extends from Thomas Paine's "natural
right" to Woodrow Wilson's "world leadership."
3761. White, Edward A. Science and religion in
American thought; the impact of naturalism.
Stanford, Stanford University Press, 1952. 117 p.
(Stanford University publications. University ser.
History, economics, and political science, v. 8)
52-5982 BL245.W63
AS36.L54, v. 8
The relationship of science and religion as viewed
by representative thinkers "during the two genera-
tions in which naturalistic presuppositions were
dominant in American thought." The author's
viewpoint is that of Christian philosophy, but is im-
plicit rather than explicit in his critic. il passages.
The thinkers considered arc John W. Draper, An-
462 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
drew S. White, John Fiske, William James, David
Starr Jordan, and John Dewey, and there is a con-
cluding section on the fundamentalist controversy
of the 1920's.
3762. Wyllie, Irvin G. The self-made man in
America; the myth of rags to riches. New
Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1954.
210 p. 54-10602 E169.1.W93
"A note on sources": p. 197-205.
Concerned "not with business history but intel-
lectual history, and specifically with the realm of
ideas about self-help under American conditions of
opportunity," this book supplies a long-needed analy-
sis of the American gospel of success conceived as
money-making. Although anticipations may be
found from early colonial times, the gospel attained
its fullest development and influence in the period
after 1865, and although much battered in the years
before 1917, enjoyed a noteworthy rejuvenation dur-
ing the prosperous 1920's. The author has no dif-
ficulty in showing that it has always been a matter
of simple faith, since the great majority of men at the
top have always started a long way from the bottom.
D. Localities
3763. Bowes, Frederick P. The culture of early
Charleston. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1942. 156 p.
A43-857 F279.C4B6
Revision of thesis (Ph.D.) — Princeton University,
1941.
Bibliography: p. [i37]-i45.
A Princeton dissertation which covers the first
century of Charleston, from its foundation in 1670
to the Revolution. Religious life, education, books,
libraries and publications, science, and literature and
the arts are successively examined. This was the
brightest period of the city's culture, for after the
Revolution, "without the fertilizing contact of Eng-
lish culture, the intellectual life of Charleston became
increasingly insular," absorbed in politics and the
law.
3764. Bridenbaugh, Carl, and Jessica Bridenbaugh.
Rebels and gentlemen; Philadelphia in the
age of Franklin. New York, Reynal & Hitchcock,
1942. 393 p. 42-22812 F158.4.B6
"Bibliographical note": p. 373-379.
Presents 18th-century Philadelphia as the Ameri-
can port of entry for the Enlightenment — secular,
humanistic, and bearing democratic and individualis-
tic implications. Philadelphia, while becoming the
second city of the British empire, became also the
first example in the Western World of a culture
resting on a broadly popular base. Much social his-
tory is presented, but the emphasis is on education,
printing and authorship, the fine arts and the art
of living, the professions, and the rise of a scientific
outlook.
3765. Davenport, Francis Garvin. Cultural life in
Nashville on the eve of the Civil War.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1941. 232 p. 41-11227 F444.N2D33
Bibliography: p. 211-224.
During the quarter-century preceding 1850, "the
influence of the frontier mind as a negative force"
lay heavy upon Nashville, but the missionary work
of Philip Lindsley, president of the university, and
his professor of sciences, the South-born Gerard
Troost, was preparing for a far-reaching change. Its
manifestation in the pre-Civil War decade, in edu-
cation, medicine, religion, music and the theater,
libraries and publishing, and in architecture, forms
the subject of this book. By i860, the author thinks,
Nashville had earned its tide, "the Athens of the
South."
3766. Eaton, Clement. Freedom of thought in the
old South. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni-
versity Press, 1940. 343 p. 40-5232 F209.E15
"This study of the cultural history of the South
between 1790 and i860, in which freedom of thought
and speech is the central theme, is offered as a case
history in the record of human liberty and intoler-
ance." The liberal culture of the older Southern
aristocracy disintegrated soon after the death of Jef-
ferson in 1826. A thorough-going conservative
reaction took its place, and set up taboos which
put slavery and religious orthodoxy beyond the
reach of criticism. There resulted an intellectual
cordon sanitaire which sealed the South from North-
ern "isms."
3767. Miller, James M. The genesis of western
culture, the upper Ohio Valley, 1 800-1 825.
Columbus, Ohio State Archaeological and Histori-
cal Society, 1938. 194 p. ([Ohio State Archaeo-
logical and Historical Society] Ohio historical
collections, v. 9) 39-715 F518.M55
F486.O526, v. 9
Bibliography: p. 165-176.
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY
/ 463
Covers the period of stable settlement, "during
which the permanent centers of population were
established and a permanent culture began to assert
itself," and concentrates upon the principal towns:
Pittsburgh, Marietta, Cincinnati, and Lexington.
The activity of the several professions — ministers,
lawyers, physicians, teachers, and journalists — is em-
phasized. "Backwoods ignorance contests with the
forces of education far superior to the demands of
frontier life, and the utter rout of the muscular
powers of darkness can be explained only by the
tremendous vitality of the frail forces of light."
E. International Influences: General
3768. Bowers, David F., cd. Foreign influences in
American life; essays and critical bibliograph-
ies. Edited for the Princeton Program of Study in
American Civilization. Princeton, N. J., Princeton
University Press, 1944. 254 p. [Princeton studies
in American civilization] A44-4627 E169.1.B782
"Critical bibliographies": p. [1731-254.
A considerably more heterogeneous and uneven
collection than the subsequent products of the
Princeton Program of Study in American Civiliza-
tion, but containing some material not easily found
elsewhere. The editor, whose early death was a
loss to American studies, contributed a theoretical
discussion of "social and cultural impact," and a
study of the effect of Hegel and Darwin upon the
American tradition. Donald D. Egbert and R. P.
Blackmur take large views, respectively, of foreign
influences in American fine art, and of the American
literary expatriates. The critical bibliographies are
extensive, partially so because some individual titles
are frequently repeated.
3769. Koht, Halvdan. The American spirit in
Europe, a survey of transatlantic influences.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1949. 289 p. (Publications of the American In-
stitute, University of Oslo, in cooperation with the
Dept. of American Civilization, Graduate School of
Arts and Sciences, University of Pennsylvania)
49-8752 E183.7.K.64
"Selected bibliography": p. 279-280.
Offered as an avowedly incomplete picture, in the
hope that a preliminary survey of the whole field
will prove useful and provoke further studies. To-
gether with the European repercussions of the Amer-
ican Revolution and the Civil War, and the emer-
gence of America as a world power, Dr. Koht treats
a variety of nonpolitical influences: the reform move-
ments of the earlier 19th century (peace, temper-
ance, penology, etc.), invention, economic organiza-
tion, technology, scientific cooperation, etc. The
European vision of America also receives attention:
the land of opportunity, and of the strange contrast
between American idealism and the commercial
spirit.
3770. Kraus, Michael. The Adantic civilization:
eighteenth-century origins. Ithaca, Cornell
University Press, 1949. 334 p.
49-50435. CB411.K7
"Published for the American Historical Associa-
tion."
Bibliography: p. 315-325.
In this formidable array of cultural data, based
on a mass of monographic material as well as origi-
nal sources both published and in manuscript, the
author is concerned to stress the mutuality of the
process: if America was the recipient in medicine
and kindred fields, she was also giving greater sub-
stance to such concepts as political and religious
freedom, economic opportunity, and humanitarian
ideals, and hurrying the Western World to the
realization of them. If Europe is still the biggest
fact in North America, "North America has long
been the biggest fact in Europe."
3771. Spoerri, William T. The old world and
the new; a synopsis of current European
views on American civilization. Zurich und Leip-
zig, M. Niehan, 1937. 236 p. (Schweizer anglis-
tische Arbeiten; Swiss studies in English, 3. bd.)
39-11768 E169.1.S75
Issued also as an inaugural dissertation, Zurich.
Bibliography: p. 233-236.
This Swiss writer had spent five years in the
United States working his way throvigh college and
teaching, but, as he says, had been back in Europe
long enough to de-Americanize himself without
relapsing into the anti-American attitude common
among intellectuals. He reviews the English,
French, and German literature on America, 1918-
36, in an effort to explain the reactions, usually
both adverse and violent, of some eminent observers.
His own contribution consists largely of a clarifi-
cation— scientific investigators, reports, prophets of
464 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
doom, literary critics, contrast critics, social re-
formers, and satirists — and of summaries with ex-
tracts of individual writers; but in a brief conclusion
he asserts that a horror of reality and hunger for
romance constitute the key to the American
character.
3772. Visson, Andre. As others see us. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 252 p.
48-9390 E169.1.V53
A French intellectual who has become an Amer-
ican citizen is able to present, because he formerly
entertained them, the attitudes toward the United
States of the intellectuals of western Europe. They
arise, he is convinced, out of profound misunder-
standings, most of them the result of ignorance,
prejudice, envy, or fear. At the bottom of these he
finds the "Athenian complex," insisting upon a
cultural and intellectual superiority when political
and economic leadership have been lost, and upon
a privileged social position for the intellectuals
themselves.
F. International Influences: By Country
France
3773. Fay, Bernard. The revolutionary spirit in
France and America; a study of moral and
intellectual relations between France and the United
States at the end of the eighteenth century. Trans-
lated by Ramon Guthrie. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1927. 613 p. 27-23830 DC138.F32
Bibliography: p. 575-600.
Originally a dissertation based on a very thorough
study of all French publications concerning America
during the last three decades of the 18th century,
this work is considerably more successful as a
presentation of authors and books than as an inter-
pretation of national states of mind. The author
believes that "from 1775 to 1800 there reigned an
impassioned intellectual union between" France
and America, symbolized by the reception of James
Monroe by the National Convention in 1794, and
that it was brought to an end only by the military
dictatorship of Bonaparte. The critical bibliog-
raphy is available only in the original French edi-
tion: Bibliographic critique des ouvrages francais
relatifs aux Etats-Unis, ijyo-1800 (Paris, Champion,
1925. 108 p.).
3774. Jones, Howard Mumford. America and
French culture, 1 750-1 848. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1927. 615 p.
28-2551 E183.8.F8J7
Bibliography: p. 573-602.
An ambitious pioneer study which tries to arrive
at "the general American attitude toward things
French" during an important century, as a pro-
legomenon to a survey of the American reception
of French literature. The author first offers an
analysis of American culture, which he sums up in
the cosmopolitan spirit, the spirit of the frontier,
and the middle class spirit — together with the urban
spirit which was just emerging in 1848. He deals
successively with French migration, the French lan-
guage, French art, religion, and philosophical and
educational influences. "On the whole," he con- \
eludes, "it is in the departments of manners and f
fashions that the French have exerted their most
notable influences in shaping American culture. In
intellectual matters they have had vogue rather than
influence."
3775. White, Elizabeth Brett. American opinion
of France from Lafayette to Poincare.
New York, Knopf, 1927. 346 p.
27-12393 E183.8.F8W5
In spite of the subtide, the text begins with the
War of 1 8 12, and reaches the discussion of the
French debt question in 1926. The emphasis is
upon public affairs, the successive regimes which
have governed France, and phases of French policy.
American opinion is derived from diplomatic cor-
respondence, congressional debates, the utterances of
prominent Americans, magazine articles, and espe-
cially newspaper editorials. Chapter 8, "Signs and
Portents," is concerned with educational, literary,
and other intellectual interrelations.
Germany
3776. Long, Orie William. Literary pioneers;
early American explorers of European cul-
ture. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1935.
267 p. 35-18097 PS201.L6
Essays on six New Englanders — George Ticknor,
Edward Everett, Joseph G. Cogswell, George Ban-
croft, H. W. Longfellow, and J. L. Motley — who
studied in Germany between 1815 and 1835. Most
of them matriculated at the University of Gottingen,
and the earlier arrivals sought out the venerable
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY / 465
Goethe. The author's commentary is somewhat
naive, but the abundant extracts from his subjects'
own letters and other writings make this a useful
source for German-American intellectual relations.
Great Britain
3777. Heindel, Richard Heathcote. The Ameri-
can impact on Great Britain, 1898-1914; a
study of the United States in world history. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940.
439 p. 40-31371 E183.8.G7H5
By "impact" the author means British knowledge
of or interest in the United States, opinions and at-
titudes about it, and the imitation or modification
of the American example. The year 1898, when
the United States suddenly became an imperial
power, was the annus mirabilis in which it was dem-
onstrated that America had become an important
factor in British life. Anglo-American intellectual
relationships are examined in the fields of diplo-
macy, business, education, literature, entertainment,
and social phenomena.
3778. Lillibridge, George D. Beacon of freedom;
the impact of American democracy upon
Great Britain, 1830-1870. [Philadelphia] Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Press, 1954, "1955. 159 p.
54-1 1541 E183.8.G7L54
"Bibliographical note": p. 151-157.
This dissertation by a pupil of Merle E. Curti ex-
amines the part played by the idea of American
democracy in the strenuous class struggle in which
the whole of British society was involved during the
central four decades of the 19th century. Radical
opinion is gleaned from newspapers, and middle-
class liberal and conservative opinion from books,
and from reviews such as the Westminster and the
Quarterly. In the latter part of the period, radicals
accepted the liberal leadership of John Bright and
Richard Cobden, frequently called by their oppo-
nents "the two members for the United States."
The author draws the moral that a nation's
democratic idea is more readily exportable than its
"Democratic movement," conceived as "attitudes,
behaviors, institutions, and techniques."
Italy
3779. Torrielli, Andrew J. Italian opinion on
America as revealed by Italian travelers,
1 850-1 900. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1941. 330 p. (Harvard studies in Romance lan-
guages, v. 15) A4 1-3270 E169.1.T66 1 94 1
Based on thesis (Ph. D.) — Harvard University,
I94°-
Exploits a considerable, and otherwise practically
unused, body of publications, in order to present
"not merely another work on American social his-
tory, but rather an examination of average Italian
sentiment on problems of continuous moment."
These problems, as illustrated by the American ex-
ample, are the Negro question, democracy, educa-
tion, the press, and the status of women, and of the
arts. The author does very little summarizing, but
gives his opinion that the Italian travelers in Amer-
ica had fewer axes to grind than many others.
Japan
3780. Schwantes, Robert S. Japanese and Ameri-
cans; a century of cultural relations. New
York, Published for the Council on Foreign Rela-
tions by Harper, 1955. 380 p.
55-7220 E183.8.J3S35
"Bibliographical essay": p. 333-372.
By culture, Mr. Schwantes means "the whole pat-
tern of life," and by cultural relations "all the ways
in which peoples learn about each other." Those
here described have been "unbalanced": "Americans
have played a much greater part in the changes that
have occurred in Japan over the past century than
Japanese have in the equally great changes here.
Japanese have been, on the whole, more interested
in America than Americans have been in them."
This largely one-way influence is traced in Japanese
economic development, in political institutions and
thought, and in education. Channels of communi-
cation are identified in the exchange of teachers, stu-
dents, and cultural materials, and in the influence of
American missionaries. Since the author is seeking
lessons of value for present-day American foreign
policy, broadly conceived, he naturally emphasizes
the most recent period.
431240—60
XII
Local History: Regions, States, and Cities
A. General Wor^s, including series
B. New England: General
C. New England: Local
D. The Middle Atlantic States
E. The South: General
F. The South Atlantic States: Local
G. The Old Southwest: General
H. The Old Southwest: Local
I. The Old Northwest: General
J. The Old Northwest: Local
K. The Far West
L. The Great Plains: General
M. The Great Plains: Local
N. The Roct{y Mountain Region: General
O. The Rocfy Mountain Region: Local
P. The Far Southwest: General
Q. The Far Southwest: Local
R. California
S. The Pacific Northwest: General
T. The Pacific Northwest: Local
U. Overseas Possessions
3781-4025
4026-4031
4032-4042
4043-4065
4066-4084
4085-4096
4097-4098
4099-4108
4109-4117
41 18-4144
4145-4150
4151-4164
4165-4171
4172-4177
4178-4185
4186-4191
4 1 92-4 1 99
4200-42 1 1
4212-4214
42 15-42 1 7
4218-4222
J^
THE concern of the present Guide is American civilization of today and the three and a
half centuries of history which have led to it. From such a work local history and de-
scription, the literature concerned with the lesser units into which the nation is divided, and
most of which preserve a degree of autonomy and spontaneity within it, could hardly be ex-
cluded. But obviously the problem of selecting, from a local literature which has been multi-
plying along with its subject matter, some 440 titles as best representative of the whole for the
generalized purpose of the Guide, presents special
difficulties. The result is a compromise which may
please few, but, we trust, will not offend many.
The subtitle of the chapter indicates the three
principal types of book which compose it, and points
to two large classes deliberately excluded. County
histories are legion and were an article of systematic
manufacture in the last decades of the 19th century.
But the county is in origin an artificial unit, and
while it bulked large in the older, rural America,
466
it has receded in importance to the average Ameri-
can of today. There are, furthermore, no fewer
than 3,049 counties in the United States, and the
choice of a handful could easily seem invidious.
Town histories are equally missing, save for one
of a New England community both unique and rep-
resentative, Concord (no. 4037), and for the same
reasons of multiplicity and diminishing significance.
On the other hand, we have included individual
local history: regions, states, and cities / 467
treatments of some national parks and monuments
which nearly everybody wants to visit, and very
many do.
The subdivision of the chapter in the above table
takes account of historical as well as geographical
factors, and is merely for convenience in the ar-
rangement of titles. States are placed following
the region to which they are assigned, in a geographi-
cal order, and cities or other units are placed fol-
lowing their states, in an alphabetical order. Some
states are variously allied, and we have assigned
them to regions quite arbitrarily and without preju-
dice— Oklahoma to the Great Plains rather than to
the Far Southwest, Idaho to the Pacific Northwest
rather than to the Mountain States, and so forth.
Here is one anomaly: the regional books in Section
E, The South, usually span Sections F, G, H, and
part of P and Q, where we have put Texas.
We have meant to slight no region, state, or city.
However, very few writers have dealt with the Mid-
dle Adantic States as a past or present unity, and
the one small volume below that does so, appears
principally for the reason that it does. Nor do we
have 48 state histories to match the 48 states, or a
volume for each of the Nation's largest cities. This
is because we have been looking for books which
will have significance, not merely for the local patriot
or antiquary, or for the historian looking for raw
material, but for people who want to fit the area
into their general picture of the United States, and
are interested both in what gives it its distinctive
character, and in what it has contributed to the
character of the Nation as a whole.
The older state and local histories were usually
guided by an antiquarian interest which led to large
enumerations of persons, sites, and discrete events.
They tended to concentrate upon origins and crucial
episodes, and passed up the problem of representing
latter-day complexities of development. With some
distinguished exceptions, our selections are works
of comparatively recent date.
Many of them are works of original research by
professional historians, who have learned that sound
local history requires just as great an intellectual
effort as do other varieties, and aim to make their
work significant by disclosing the larger historical
currents as they assume a concrete shape in a par-
ticular community. Some states emphasize their
own history in their schools and universities, which
may result in compact and well-ordered textbooks
whose usefulness is not limited to the classroom.
Many of our titles, however, are of non-academic
origin and consist of attempts to arrive at the genius
loci by general writers or journalists. Some are
products of the wave of "regional writing" which
began rolling in the 1930's. They may lack the pre-
cision of scholarly history and geography, and some
of their materials may require to be taken with a
grain of salt, but when honestly done they make a
distinct contribution which the others usually do not
attempt, and they are regularly written to be read,
while the academic product sometimes seems to be
meant to discourage readers. Areas differ conspicu-
ously in their productivity of modern works of either
type. Why, for example, should Oklahoma be a
veritable cornucopia of books of State and regional
interest, while Missouri, immediately to the north-
west, turns out practically nothing?
The greatest tide in recent America, which has
run for over a century but seems only to grow in
strength, is the tide of urbanization. It can hardly
be said that historians and geographers, as distinct
from the sociologists who view it as material for ab-
stractions, have kept abreast of it. In America there
are many great urban universities whose graduate
schools produce learned monographs on ancient
Greek pottery or the foreign policy of Bismarck, but
never dream of searching for order and significance
in the prodigious developments which have been go-
ing on under their noses. And there are many great
cities unrepresented here by any history or even any
title, because there is no up-to-date and comprehen-
sive history to be had.
General works on the Westward movement and
the frontier are contained in Chapter VIII, General
History, and the more local ones on our successive
Wests in this one, but the separation cannot be en-
tirely clear-cut. The same kind of separation has
been attempted between works on the slavery sys-
tem and the crisis of 1854-1876, assigned to Chapter
VIII, and works on the South as a region, assigned
here, but again it cannot be effected with completely
satisfactory results.
A. General Works, Including Series
3781. Davidson, Donald. The attack on leviathan;
regionalism and nationalism in the United
States. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press, 1938. 368 p. 38-9614 E169.1.D34
A collection of essays and studies, many of which
appeared in periodicals from 1932 to i<)^, reviewing
468 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the development of regionalism or sectionalism in
the United States as interpreted by various authors.
The greatest hindrance to regionalism, the author
thinks, is increasingly powerful national govern-
ment, the leviathan that attempts to impose a uni-
form pattern on the regions. The main thesis is dis-
cussed from the standpoints of history, geography,
politics, culture, economics, and social conditions.
Although Mr. Davidson defends the South as a re-
gion, upholding its interests and tradition, he recog-
nizes that the hope of a democratic America lies in
the fusion of regionalism with nationalism. "The
recognition of sectional diversity," he says, "is the
true safeguard of national unity. The danger to
national unity comes when diversity is ignorantly or
willfully put aside as a thing of no importance, or
when it is assumed that no diversity exists."
3782. Look. Look at the U. S. A., by the editors
of Loo\. With regional introductions by
Mary Ellen Chase tand others] Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1955. 522 p. 55-8101 E169.L842
An abridged and reworked version of a pictorial
guide to the regions of the United States originally
published in 9 volumes in 1946-48. The photo-
graphs, most of which occupy an entire page, are
original, significant, and handsomely reproduced.
The regional introductions are by well-known
writers: Mary Ellen Chase on New England, Paul
Horgan on the Southwest, Frederick L. Allen on
New York City, Gerald W. Johnson on the Central
Northeast, Louis Bromfield on the Midwest, David
L. Cohn on the South, Wallace Stegner on the
Central Northwest, and Joseph Henry Jackson.
Many more fine photographs and vasdy more de-
tailed local information will be found in the original
9-volume edition, the sectional arrangement of
which is the same as here.
3783. Odum, Howard W., and Harry Estill Moore.
American regionalism; a cultural historical
approach to national integration. New York, Holt,
1938. 693 p. illus. 38-15648 E179.5.O43
In contrast to sectionalism (see Turner below),
"regionalism assumes ... a great national unity
and integrated culture in which each region
exists . . . solely as a component unit in the whole."
In Part I, the authors consider our natural regions,
our cultural regions, and our service regions (gov-
ernmental and non-governmental); in Part II, the
historical and theoretical aspects of regionalism as
they have been explored by social scientists, and in
Part III the development of the six major regions—
the Middle States, the Northeast, the Southeast, the
Far West, the Northwest and the Southwest— into
a great nation, "in whose continuity and unity of
development, through a fine balance of historical,
cultural, and geographic factors, must be found the
hope of American democracy and, according to
many observers, Western civilization." The au-
thors support their thesis with quotations from
numerous sources.
3784. Turner, Frederick Jackson. The signifi-
cance of sections in American history; with
an introd. by Max Farrand. New York, Holt, 1932.
347 p. 33-1864 E178.T96
Avery O. Craven and Max Farrand collected and
edited these twelve scattered essays by the late Pro-
fessor Turner relating to the sections of the United
States: New England, the Middle States, the South-
east, the Southwest, the Middle West, the Great
Plains, the Mountain States, and the Pacific Coast.
He ascribes the individual characteristics of the
sections to variations in physiography, the pressure
of population, political attitudes towards industrial
interests, and the economic, social, and religious
aspirations of the people. He points out the neces-
sity of shaping national action to "the fact of a vast
and varied Union of unlike sections." "We have
furnished to Europe," Professor Turner says, "the
example of a continental federation of sections oyer
an area equal to Europe itself, and by substituting
discussion and concession and compromised legis-
lation for force, we have shown the possibility of
international political parties, international legis-
lative bodies, and international peace."
3785. Wisconsin. University. Regionalism in
America. Edited by Merrill Jensen; with a
foreword by Felix Frankfurter. Madison, Univer-
sity of Wisconsin Press, 195 1. xvi,425p.
51-6901 E179.5.W56
Includes bibliographies.
The papers in this volume were delivered at a
symposium on American regionalism sponsored by
the Committee on the Study of American Civiliza-
tion of the University of Wisconsin and held in
April 1949. Men from various academic fields and
from public life, all interested in regionalism as a
field of research or of administration, give their
concepts of regions and regionalism. Merrill Jen-
sen, Rupert B. Vance, William B. Hesseltine, John
F. Kienitz, John M. Gaus, Merle Curti, and other
distinguished scholars and administrators have con-
tributed papers to discussions of the development of
regionalism since the 18th century, three historic
regions of the United States, the place of regional-
ism in American culture, and regionalism as a
practical concept in the development and admin-
istration of Federal Government programs. How-
ard W. Odum says in the final paper: "It was in
the regional quantity and quality of this continent
local history: regions, states, and cities / 469
that the first plantings and the later fruits of
American democracy set the incidence of the
American way of life as distinctive from that which
had gone before."
AMERICAN GUIDE SERIES
3786. American guide series. [Compiled and
written by the Federal Writers' Project and
the Writers' Program] 1936-43. 153 v.
New editions and reprints, 1939-56.
The American Guide Series has been described
as "our first real series of handbooks for the nation."
It was begun soon after the organization of the
Federal Writers' Project in the Works Progress
Administration (later changed to Works Projects
Administration) in the summer of 1935, to provide
work-relief for several thousand writers throughout
the 48 states. In the summer of 1939 the Federal
Writers' Project was superseded by the Writers'
Program with the initiative placed in the hands of
public sponsoring bodies in each of the states. The
following entries represent the latest available edi-
tions of each of the state, territorial, and town
guides, with the date of the earliest edition and the
latest printing given in a note whenever they differ
from the imprint date of the latest issue for which
a printed card is available. Each of the state guides
is arranged according to the major highways, and
contains descriptions of towns, waterways, recrea-
tional areas, and points of historical interest. All are
illustrated with photographs and maps. The new
editions, in most instances, bring up to date the maps
and tours, population figures, college enrollment,
and other developments in the states' economic and
cultural progress. The Assistant Commissioner of
the WPA in 194 1 said that "the publication of the
Writers Program constitutes a unique example of
cooperation between the community and the Nation
with the aim of preserving the story of our American
heritage in such form that it may become part of
the consciousness of the widest possible number of
Americans." The guides to several travel routes
that cut across regional boundaries have been listed
first. The series is here arranged by geographical
regions, with the state guide first, and the city, town,
or other area guides of that state following alpha-
betically, by locality.
TRAVEL ROUTES
3787- The Intracoastal Waterway, Norfolk to Key
West. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.,
x937- 143 P. 37-26563 TC623.4.F4
3788. The Ocean Highway; New Brunswick, New
Jersey to Jacksonville, Florida. New York,
Modern Age Books, 1938. xxix, 244 p.
38-12399 F106.F44
3789. The Oregon Trail; the Missouri River to the
Pacific Ocean. New York, Hastings House,
1939. 244 p. 39-27221 F880.F28
Bibliography: p. 228-230.
3790. U. S. One, Maine to Florida. New York,
Modern Age Books, 1938. xxvii, 344 p.
38-27179 F106.F45
GV1024.F32
NEW ENGLAND
3791. Here's New England! A guide to vacation-
land. Sponsored by the New England Coun-
cil, Boston. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 122 p.
39-15700 F9.F44
3792. Maine, a guide 'down east.' Sponsored by
the Maine Development Commission. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxvi, 476 p. illus.
38~30 F25.F44
Selected reading list": p. [454]~458.
3793. Augusta-Hallowell on the Kennebec. Spon-
sored by the Augusta-Hallowell Chamber of
Commerce. [Augusta] Kennebec Journal Print
Sn°P'194o. 123 p. 4J-52359 F29.A9W8
Bibliography: p. [108]
3794. Maine's capitol. Sponsored by the Depart-
ment of Education of the State of Maine.
Augusta, Kennebec Journal Print Shop, 1939. 60 p.
43-5471 F29A9F4
3795. Portland city guide. Sponsored by the city
of Pordand. [Pordand] Forest City Print.
Co., 1940. xiv, 337 p. 40-30610 F29.P9W8
"Selected reading list": p. [3i7]-3i8.
3796- New Hampshire, a guide to the Granite
State. Francis P. Murphy, Governor of New
Hampshire, co-operating sponsor. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1938. xxix, 559 p. illus.
36-6192 F39.F43
Selected reading list": p. 539-540.
3797. Vermont; a guide to the Green Mountain
State. Sponsored by the Vermont State Plan-
ning Board. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxi,
392 P- 37-28648 F54.F45
Bibliography: p. [372]-379.
470 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3798. Massachusetts; a guide to its places and
people. Frederick W. Cook, secretary of the
Commonwealth, cooperating sponsor. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxxvi, 675 p.
37-28502 F70.F295
"Fifty books about Massachusetts": p. [637]— 638.
3799. The Berkshire hills. Sponsored by the Berk-
shire Hills Conference. New York, Funk &
Wagnalls, 1939. xiv, 368 p.
39-27644 F72.B5F37
"Berkshire sports, winter and summer": p. [277]-
360.
3800. Boston looks seaward, the story of the port,
1630-1940. Sponsored by Boston Port Au-
thority. Boston, B. Humphries, 1941. 316 p.
42-9007 F73.63.W8
3801. Cape Cod pilot, by Jeremiah Digges [pseud,
of Josef Berger] Sponsored by Poor Richard
Associates. Provincetown, Mass., Modern Pilgrim
Press, 1937. 403 p. 37-I255° F72.C3B39
Bibliography: p. 390-391.
3802. Springfield, Massachusetts. Springfield
[Mass.] 1941. 84 p.
41-8764 F74.S8W975
3803. State forests and parks of Massachusetts, a
recreation guide. Boston, Dept. of Con-
servation, 1941. 58 p. 42-36810 SD428.A2M47
3804. Rhode Island, a guide to the smallest State.
Sponsored by Louis W. Cappelli, secretary
of state. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. xxvi,
500 p. 37-28463 F79.F38
Bibliography: p. [4751-479.
3805. Connecticut; a guide to its roads, lore, and
people. Sponsored by Wilbur L. Cross.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. xxxiii, 593 p.
38-27339 F100.F45
"Selected reading list": p. [562J-565-
MIDDLE ATLANTIC STATES
3806. New York; a guide to the Empire State.
Sponsored by New York State Historical
Association. New York, Oxford University Press,
1946. xxxi, 782 (i. e. 798) p.
46^5765 F124.W89 1946
First published in 1940. Second printing, with
corrections, 1946. Fourth printing, 1949.
Bibliography: p. 729-739.
3807. Albany — past
1938?] 27 p.
and present. [Albany?
38-26487 F129.A3F43
3808. New York City guide. [Rev. ed.] New
York, Random House, ci939- xx, 680 p.
56-51521 F128.5.F376 1939b
First published in 1939.
Companion volume to New Yor\ Panorama.
"Books about New York": p. 627-635.
3809. New York panorama; a comprehensive view
of the metropolis, presented in a series of
articles. New York, Random House, 1938. 526 p.
38-27618 F128.5.F38
"The present volume, although complete in itself
. . . constitutes in effect the general introduction to
the New Yor\ City Guide."
3810. Rochester and Monroe County. Rochester,
N. Y., Scrantom's, 1937. 460 p.
38-1950 F129.R7F43
Half-tide: A history and guide.
Bibliography: p. 443-447.
381 1. New Jersey, a guide to its present and past.
Sponsored by the Public Library of Newark
and the New Jersey Guild Associates. New York,
Viking Press, 1939. xxxii, 735 p.
39-20654 F139.F45
Bibliography: p. 697-704.
3812. The story of Dunellen. [Dunellen, N. J.,
Art Color Print. Co.] 1937. 11 1 p.
38-26489 F144.D9F4
Bibliography: p. 108.
3813. Livingston; the story of a community.
[Caldwell, N. J., Printed by the Progress
Pub. Co.] 1939. 166 p. 41-2862 F144.L5W7
3814. Entertaining a nation; the career of Long
Branch. [Bayonne, N. J., Jersey Print. Co.]
1940. xiv, 21 1 p. 40-27599 F144.L847
Bibliography: p. 198-200.
3815. Monroe Township, Middlesex County, New
Jersey, 1838-1938. [New Brunswick, N. J.]
1938. 140 p. 39-16121 F144.M68F4
Bibliography: p. 134-135.
3816. Pennsylvania: a guide to the Keystone State.
Co-sponsored by the Pennsylvania Historical
Commission and the University of Pennsylvania.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1940. xxxii,
660 p. 40-28760 F154.W94
Fourth printing, 1950.
"A guide to further reading": p. 623-629.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 471
3817. Story of old Allegheny city, sponsored by
Hon. Cornelius D. Scully. Pittsburgh, Pa.,
Allegheny Centennial Committee, 1941. xviii,
236 p. 41-16289 F159.A4W7
Bibliography: p. 227.
Has no map.
3818. Erie; a guide to the city and county. Spon-
sored by Charlie R. Barber, mayor of Erie.
[Philadelphia] William Penn Association of Phila-
delphia, 1938. 133 p. 39-1898 F157.E6F4
Bibliography: p. 128.
3819. The Harmony Society in Pennsylvania.
[Philadelphia] William Penn Association
of Philadelphia, 1937. 38 p.
38-4970 HX656.N5F4
This is the "most complete and authentic" history
to date of a practical experiment in communal living
for a small group of people who setded in Butler
County, Pennsylvania, 25 miles northwest of Pitts-
burgh, in 1804.
3820. The Horse-Shoe Trail, sponsored by Henry
N. Woolman, president, Horse-Shoe Trail
Club, Philadelphia, Pa. 2d ed. [Philadelphia]
William Penn Association of Philadelphia, 1939.
32 p. 4°"36l7 F!54-F45 J939
First published in 1938.
3821. Philadelphia, a guide to the Nation's birth-
place. Sponsored by the Pennsylvania His-
torical Commission. [Philadelphia] William Penn
Association of Philadelphia, 1937. xxxii, 704 p.
38-23204 F158.5.F35
Bibliography: p. 690-691.
3822. Delaware, a guide to the first State. New
and rev. ed. by Jeannette Eckman; edited by
Henry G. Alsberg. New York, Hastings House,
1955. xxvi, 562 p. 55-H794 F164.F45 1955
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. [530]~538.
3823. New Casde on the Delaware. 2d ed. Spon-
sored and published by the New Castle His-
torical Society. [Wilmington, Del., Press of W. N.
Cannj 1937. 142 p. 39-5465 F174.N5F42
First published in 1936.
Bibliography: p. 139-142.
3824. Maryland, a guide to the old line State.
Sponsored by Herbert R. O'Conor, Governor
of Maryland. New York, Oxford University Press,
1940. xxviii, 561 p. 40-13919 F181.W75
Fifth printing, 1948.
Bibliography: p. 535-543.
3825. A guide to the United States Naval Academy.
Sponsored by the United States Naval
Academy. New York, Devin-Adair Co., 1941.
158 p. 41-14204 V415.L1W7
"Superintendents of the Academy": p. 53-74;
"Outstanding graduates of the Academy": p. 75-92.
3826. Washington, D. C, a guide to the Nation's
capital. Sponsored by the George Washing-
ton University. New York, Hastings House, 1942.
xl, 528 p. 42-19931 F199.F38 1942
A revision and condensation of Washington: City
and Capital, compiled by the Federal Writers' Proj-
ect, 1937.
"Selected reading list": p. 505-512.
42-19931 F199.F38 1942
THE SOUTH ATLANTIC STATES
3827. Virginia; a guide to the Old Dominion.
Sponsored by James H. Price, Governor of
Virginia. New York, Oxford University Press,
1946. xxix, 710 p. 46-5684 F231.W88 1946
First published in 1940. Third printing with
corrections, 1946. 1952 reprint listed in The Cumu-
lative Boo\ Index.
Bibliography: p. 647-667.
3828. Jefferson's Albemarle, a guide to Albemarle
County and the city of Charlottesville,
Virginia. Sponsored by the Charlottesville and Al-
bemarle County Chamber of Commerce. [Char-
lottesville, Jarman's] 1941. 157 p.
42-1913 F232.A3W87
3829. Alexandria. Sponsored by the Young
Women's Club of Alexandria. [Alexandria,
Va., Williams Print. Co.] 1939. 27 p.
40-3986 F234.A3W8
3830. West Virginia, a guide to the Mountain State.
Sponsored by the Conservation Commission
of West Virginia. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1948. 559 p. 53_234°5 F241.W85 1948
First published in 1941.
Bibliography: p. 533-541.
3831. The North Carolina guide; edited by Black-
well P. Robinson. Sponsored by the North
Carolina Department of Conservation and Develop-
ment. [New ed.] Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1955. xxi, 649 p.
55-2216 F259.F44 1955
First published in 1939.
472 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3832. Charlotte, a guide to the Queen City of North
Carolina. Sponsored by Hornet's Nest Post,
no. 9, American Legion. [Charlotte] News Print.
House, 1939. 74 p. 40-13106 F264.C4W7
Bibliography: p. 68-69.
3833. Raleigh, capital of North Carolina. Spon-
sored by the Raleigh Sesquicentennial Com-
mission. [New Bern, N. C, Printed by Owen G.
Dunn Co., 1942] 170 p. 42-36985 F264.R1W7
"Books about Raleigh and North Carolina":
p. [157 H58.
3834. South Carolina; a guide to the Palmetto State.
Sponsored by Burnet R. Maybank, Governor
of South Carolina. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1941. xxvii, 514 p. 41-52304 F269.W7
Fourth printing, 1949.
Bibliography: p. 479-486.
3835. Beaufort and the Sea Islands. Sponsored
and published by the Clover Club. Savan-
nah, Ga., Review Print. Co., 1938. 47 p.
39-30829 F279.B3F44
3836. South Carolina State parks. Sponsored by
the South Carolina State Commission of
Forestry. [Columbia, South Carolina State Forest
Service] 1940. 43 p.
41-52550 SB482.S6W7 1940
3837. Georgia, a guide to its towns and country-
side. Rev. and extended by George G.
Leckie. Atlanta, Tupper & Love, 1954. xxii, 457 p.
54-10344 F291.W94 1954
First published in 1940.
Bibliography: p. 439-440.
3838. Atlanta, capital of the South, edited by Paul
W. Miller. New York, O. Durrell, 1949.
xiv, 318 p. 49-10579 F294.A8W8 1949
First published in 1942 under title: Atlanta, a
City of the Modern South.
Bibliography: p. 298-301.
3839. Augusta. Sponsored by City Council of
Augusta. Augusta, Ga., Tidwell Print.
Supply Co., 1938. 218 p. 38-15849 F294.A9F4
Bibliography: p. 205-208.
3840. The Macon guide and Ocmulgee National
Monument. Sponsored by Macon Junior
Chamber of Commerce. Macon, Ga., J. W. Burke,
1939. 127 p. 40-26510 F294.M2W75
Bibliography: p. 1 19-120.
3841. Savannah. Sponsored by Chamber of Com-
merce, Savannah. Savannah, Review Print.
Co., 1937. xiv, 208 p. 37-36384 F294.S2F4
Bibliography: p. 196-199.
3842. The story of Washington-Wilkes. Sponsored
by the Washington City Council. Athens,
University of Georgia Press, 1941. xiv, 136 p.
41-7353 F294.W27W7
Bibliography: p. 127-129.
Has no map.
3843. Florida; a guide to the southernmost State.
Sponsored by State of Florida Department
of Public Instruction. New York, Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1944. xxiv, 600 p.
45-2317 F316.F44 1944
First published in 1939. Third printing, 1944.
Fifth printing, 1947.
Bibliography: p. 553-565.
3844. Seeing Fernandina; a guide to the city and
its industries. Co-sponsored by the City
Commission, Fernandina. [Fernandina] Fernan-
dina News Pub. Co., 1940. 84 p.
41-52476 F319.F4W7
"Citations": p. 77-80.
3845. A guide to Key West. Sponsored by the
Florida State Planning Board. Rev., 2d ed.
New York, Hastings House, 1949. 122 p.
50-1226 F319.K4W7 1949
First published in 1941.
Bibliography: p. 113-116.
3846. Planning your vacation in Florida: Miami
and Dade County, including Miami Beach
and Coral Gables. Sponsored by the Florida State
Planning Board. Northport, N. Y., Bacon, Percy &
Daggett, 1 94 1. xx, 202 p.
42-36652 F319.M6W7
Bibliography: p. 184-188.
3847. Seeing St. Augustine. Sponsored by City
Commission of St. Augustine. [St. Augus-
tine] The Record Co., 1937. 73 p.
38-12409 F319.S2F4
"Selected bibliography": p. 70-73.
OLD SOUTHWEST
3848. Alabama; a guide to the Deep South. Spon-
sored by the Alabama State Planning Com-
mission. New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxii,
442 p. 52-37" F326.W7 1949
First published in 1941.
Bibliography: p. 413-423.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 473
3849. Mississippi; a guide to the Magnolia State.
Sponsored by the Mississippi Agricultural
and Industrial Board. New York, Hastings House,
1949. xxiv, 545 p. 49-5823 F341.F45 1949
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. [523]~530.
3850. Mississippi gulf coast, yesterday and today,
1 699-1939. Sponsored by Woman's Club of
Gulfport. Gulfport, Miss., Gulfport Print. Co.,
1939. 162 p. 39-I7552 F347-G9F5
3851. Louisiana; a guide to the State. Sponsored
by the Louisiana Library Commission at
Baton Rouge. New York, Hastings House, 1941.
xxx, 746 p. 41-52389 F375.W8
Fifth printing, 1949.
Bibliography: p. 704-716.
3852. New Orleans city guide. Rev. by Robert
Tallant. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1952. be,
416 p. 52-14722 F379.N5F34 1952
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. [397]~40i.
3853. Arkansas; a guide to the State. Sponsored
by C. G. Hall, secretary of state, Arkansas.
New York, Hastings House, 1941. xxvii, 447 p.
41-52931 F411.W8
Second printing, 1948.
Bibliography: p. 397-407.
3854. Guide to North Little Rock, industrial cen-
ter of Arkansas. [North Little Rock, Ark.,
Times Print. & Pub. Co.] 1936. 20 p.
40-26499 F419.N67F45
3855. Tennessee; a guide to the State. Sponsored
by Department of Conservation, Division of
Information. New York, Hastings House, 1949.
xxiv, 558 p. 49-5822 F436.F45 1949
First published in 1939.
"Selected bibliography": p. 529-535.
3856. Kentucky; a guide to the Bluegrass State.
Sponsored by the University of Kentucky.
[Rev. ed.] New York, Hastings House, 1954.
xxix, 492 p. 54-1591 F456.F44 1954
First published in 1939.
Bibliography: p. 462-470.
3857. Old capitol and Frankfort guide. Spon-
sored by the Kentucky State Historical So-
ciety, Frankfort, Kentucky. [Frankfort, Ky.]
H. McChesney, 1939. 98 p.
39-26382 F459.F8F45
431240— GO 32
3858. Henderson; a guide to Audubon's home
town in Kentucky. Sponsored by Susan
Starling Towles, librarian, Public Library, Hender-
son, Kentucky. Northport, Bacon, Percy & Daggett,
1941. 120 p. 42-12802 F459.H49W7
3859. Lexington and the Bluegrass country.
Sponsored by the city of Lexington. Lex-
ington [Ky.] E. M. Glass, 1938. 149 p.
39-8854 F459.L6F4
3860. Louisville; a guide to the Falls city. Spon-
sored by the University of Kentucky; co-
operating sponsor, the Louisville Automobile Club.
New York, M. Barrows, 1940. xv, 1 12 p.
40-9812 F459.L8W8
3861. Missouri, a guide to the "Show me" State.
[Rev. ed.] Sponsored by the Missouri State
Highway Dept. New York, Hastings House, 1954.
654 p. 55-3657 F466.W85 1954
First published in 1941.
Bibliography: p. 596-611.
OLD NORTHWEST
3862. The Ohio guide. Sponsored by the Ohio
State Archaeological and Historical Society.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1946. xxxi,
634 (i. e. 650) p. 46-5681 F496.W96 1946
First published in 1940. Third printing, with
corrections, 1946. Sixth printing, 1952.
"Selected bibliography": p. 611-613.
3863. Bryan and Williams County. Sponsored by
the city of Bryan. [Gallipolis, Ohio, Down-
tain Print. Co., 1941] 117 p.
43-2703 F497.W7W7
Bibliography: p. 116-117.
3864. Chillicothe and Ross County. Sponsored by
the Ross County Territory Committee, 1938.
[Columbus, Ohio, Heer Print. Co., 1938] 91 p.
39-19297 F499.C4F5
Bibliography: p. 88.
3865. Cincinnati; a guide to the queen city and
its neighbors. Sponsored by the city of Cin-
cinnati, Ohio. Cincinnati, Wicsen-Hart Press, 1943.
xxiii, 570 p. ^ 43-17162 F499.C5W93
"Selected bibliography": p. 547-549.
3866. Findlay and Hancock County. Reproduced
in cooperation with Findlay College. | Find-
lay, Ohio, 1937? J 52 p. A40-1949 F499JF4F4
Bibliography: p. 51.
474 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3867. Fremont and Sandusky County. Sponsored
by the Ohio State Archaeological & Historical
Society, Columbus. Co-sponsored by C. A. Hoc-
henedel, safety-service director, city of Fremont.
[Fremont? Ohio, 1940] 115 p.
40-10659 F499.F9W75
"For reference" : p. 115.
3868. Lake Erie, vacationland in Ohio; a guide to
the Sandusky Bay region. Sponsored by the
city of Sandusky in cooperation with Ohio's Lake
Erie Vacationland, Inc. . . . Sandusky, Ohio,
Stephens Print. Co., 1941. 129 p.
41-18975 F497.E6W7
"References": p. 129.
3869. A guide to Lima and Allen County, Ohio.
Sponsored by Lima Better Business Bureau,
Inc. [Lima? Ohio, 1938] 64 p.
39-8859 F499.L73F4
Bibliography: p. 61.
3870. Springfield and Clark County, Ohio. Spon-
sored by the Springfield Chamber of Com-
merce. [Springfield] Printed by the Springfield
Tribune Print. Co., 1941. 136 p.
41-26044 F499.S7W7
"References": p. 130-131.
3871. Urbana and Champaign County. Spon-
sored by the Urbana Lions Club. Urbana,
Ohio, Gaumer Pub. Co., 1942. 147 p.
42-16468 F499.U7W7
"Selected bibliography": p. 144.
3872. Warren and Trumbull County. Sesqui-
centennial ed. Sponsored by Western Re-
serve Historical Celebration Committee. [Warren?
Ohio] 1938. 60 p. 40-10660 F499.W2F45
Bibliography: p. 60.
3873. Zanesville and Muskingum County. Re-
produced in cooperation with Zanesville
Chamber of Commerce. [Zanesville? Ohio, 1937]
38 p. 40-10661 F499.Z2F45
Bibliography: p. 36.
3874. Indiana, a guide to the Hoosier State. Spon-
sored by the Department of Public Relations
of Indiana State Teachers College. New York,
Oxford University Press, 1945. xxvi, 548 (i. e.
564) p. 46-5683 F526.W93 1945
First published in 194 1. Second printing, with
corrections, 1945. Third printing, 1947.
Bibliography: p. 509-523.
3875. Illinois; a descriptive and historical guide.
Rev., with addition, in 1946. Chicago, A. C.
McClurg, 1947. xxii, 707 p.
47-30173 F546.F45 1947
First published in 1939.
"Fifty books about Illinois": p. 653-656.
3876. Cairo guide. Sponsored by Cairo Public
Library. [Nappanee, Ind., E. V. Pub.
House] 1938. 62 p. 39—33966 F549.C2F4
Bibliography: p. 61-62.
3877. Galena guide. Sponsored by the city of
Galena. [Chicago?] 1937. 79 p.
39-8109 F549.G14F5
"Galena bibliography": p. 78-79.
3878. Hillsboro guide. [Hillsboro] Printed by
the Montgomery News, 1940. 92 p.
43-4563 F549.H67W7
Bibliography: p. 92.
3879. Nauvoo guide. Sponsored by the Unity
Club of Nauvoo. Chicago, A. C. McClurg,
1939. 49 p. 39-27124 F549.N37F5
3880. Princeton guide. Sponsored by the city of
Princeton. [Princeton, 111., Republican
Print. Co.] 1939. 48 p. 40-32949 F549.P93F5
3881. Rockford. Sponsored by the city of Rock-
ford, Illinois. Rockford, 111., Graphic Arts
Corp., 1941. 144 p. 42-18201 F549.R7W7
Has no map.
3882. Michigan, a guide to the Wolverine State.
Sponsored by the Michigan State Adminis-
trative Board. New York, Oxford University Press,
1946. xxxvi, 696 (i. e. 712) p.
46-5682 F566.W9 1946
First published in 1941. Third printing, with
corrections, 1946. Fifth printing, 1949.
Bibliography: p. 645-653.
3883. Wisconsin; a guide to the Badger State.
Sponsored by the Wisconsin Library Asso-
ciation. New York, Hastings House, 1954. 651 p.
55-3162 F586.W97 1954
First published in 194 1.
Bibliography: p. 578-590.
3884. Portage. Sponsored by Portage Chamber of
Commerce. [Portage? Wis.] 1938. 85 p.
40-4748 F589.P76F45
Bibliography: p. 83-85.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 475
3885. Shorewood [a residential suburb of Milwau-
kee] Sponsored by Village Board of Shore-
wood. [Shorewood, Wis., 1939] 109 p.
40-7055 F589.S58F5
Has no map.
3886. Minnesota, a State guide. Sponsored by the
Executive Council, State of Minnesota.
[Rev. ed.] New York, Hastings House, 1954. xxx,
545 P- , , 54-589 F606.F44 1954
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. [498J-511.
3887. The Minnesota arrowhead country. Spon-
sored by the Minnesota Arrowhead Associa-
tion. Chicago, 111., A. Whitman, 1941. xxi, 231 p.
41-52030 F606.W93
Bibliography: p. 21 1-2 16.
3888. St. Cloud guide. St. Cloud, Minn., Greater
St. Cloud Committee of the Chamber of
Commerce, 1936. 63 p. 39-29347 F614.S25F45
3889. Iowa, a guide to the Hawkeye State. Spon-
sored by the State Historical Society of Iowa.
New York, Hastings House, 1949. xxviii, 583 p.
49-5480 F621.F45 1949
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. [5571-564.
3890. A guide to Burlington, Iowa. 2d ed. (rev.)
Sponsored by Burlington City Council. Bur-
lington, Iowa, Acres-Blackmar Co., 1939. 80 p.
43-8144 F629.B9F45 1939
First published in 1938.
3891. Guide to Cedar Rapids and northeast Iowa,
sponsored by the Cedar Rapids Chamber of
Commerce. Cedar Rapids, Iowa, Laurance Press,
»937- . 79 P- 38-26504 F629.C3F5
Bibliography: p. 79.
3892. A guide to Dubuque. Sponsored by the
city of Dubuque and the Dubuque Chamber
of Commerce. Dubuque, Iowa, Hoermann Press,
1937. 32 p. 38-26488 F629.D8F4
3893. A guide to Estherville, Iowa, Emmet
County, and Iowa great lakes region.
Sponsored by the Chamber of Commerce, Estherville
[Estherville, Iowa.] Estherville Enterprise Print,
1939. 36 p. 40-10663 F629.E7F45
3894. A guide to McGregor. Sponsored by the
McGregor Service Club. McGregor, Iowa,
J. F. Widman, 1940. 16 p.
40-10732 F629.M14W7
First published in 1938.
GREAT PLAINS
3895. North Dakota, a guide to the northern prairie
State. Sponsored by the State Historical
Society of North Dakota. [2d ed.] New York,
Oxford University Press, 1950. xix, 352 p.
50-9076 F636.F45 1950
First published in 1938.
Bibliography: p. 327-340.
3896. South Dakota, a guide to the State. Spon-
sored by the State of South Dakota. 2d ed.
completely rev. by M. Lisle Reese. New York,
Hastings House, 1952. xxvii, 421 p.
52-7601 F656.F45 1952
First published in 1938 under title: South Dakota
Guide.
Bibliography: p. 383-393.
3897. Aberdeen, a middle border city. University
of South Dakota, official sponsor; Friends
of Aberdeen Committee, co-operating sponsor.
[Aberdeen? S.D., Prairie League Workshop, 1940]
94 p. 40-28669 F659.A14W7
Bibliography: p. [9i]~94.
Has no map of Aberdeen.
3898. A vacation guide to Custer State Park in the
Black Hills of South Dakota. Sponsored
by the Custer State Park Board. [Pierre, S. D.,
State Pub. Co.] 1938. 32 p.
39-29346 F657.C92F4
3899. Mitchell, South Dakota; an industrial and
recreational guide. Sponsored by the
Mitchell Chamber of Commerce. [Mitchell? S. D.]
1938. 32 p. 4°-5435 F659.M68F5
3900. Guide to Pierre, the capital city and its
vicinity. Sponsored by the Pierre Chamber
of Commerce and the city of Pierre. [Pierre, S. D.,
State Pub. Co., 1937] 20 p. 40-5436 F659.P6F45
3901. Nebraska, a guide to the Cornhusker State.
Sponsored by the Nebraska State Historical
Society. New York, Hastings House, 1947. xiii,
424 p. 48-1227 F666.F46 1947
First published in 1939.
Bibliography: p. 407-412.
3902. Old Bellevue. Sponsored by the Sarpy
County Historical Society. Papillion, Neb.,
Papillion Times, 1937. 32 P-
39-8853 F674.B4F^
"Selected references": p. 30.
478 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3936. Tours in eastern Idaho. [Boise? 1939?]
36 p. 39-26296 F745.F47
3937. Oregon, end of the trail. Sponsored by the
Oregon State Board of Control. Rev. ed.
with added material, by Howard McKinley Corn-
ing. Portland, Oreg., Binfords & Mort, 1951. xxxu,
549 p. 52-"474 F881.W76 1951
First published in 1940.
Bibliography: p. 529~535-
3938. Mount Hood; a guide. Sponsored by the
Oregon State Board of Control; cooperating
sponsor, the Mount Hood Development Association.
[New Yorkl Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1940. xxvii,
I32p. 40-27505 F882.H85W7
Bibliography: p. 125.
3939. The new Washington; a guide to the Ever-
green State. Sponsored by the Washington
State Historical Society. Rev. ed. with added ma-
terial, by Howard McKinley Corning. Portland,
Or., Binfords & Mort, 1950. xxx, 687 p.
51-3893 F891.W9 1950
First published in 194 1 under tide: Washington,
a Guide to the Evergreen State.
Bibliography: p. [6441-653.
OVERSEAS POSSESSIONS
3940. A guide to Alaska, last American frontier, by
Merle Colby. New York, Macmillan, 1939.
lxv, 427 p. 39-27616 F909.F45
"Books about Alaska": p. 405-410.
3941.
U. S. Puerto Rico Reconstruction Adminis-
tration. Puerto Rico; a guide to the island
of Boriquen, compiled and written by the Puerto
Rico Reconstruction Administration in cooperation
with the Writers' Program of the Work Projects
Administration. Sponsored by the Puerto Rico De-
partment of Education. New York, University
Society, 1940. xli, 409 p. 40-35620 F1958.U55
"Books about Puerto Rico": p. 392-402.
AMERICAN FOLKWAYS SERIES
3942. American folkways, edited by Erskine Cald-
well. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1941-55. 26 v. _ , • , J
The American Guide Series created in the minds
of many Americans a new consciousness of our his-
tory, historic sites, recreational spots, and folklore,
and the literature of regionalism had been aborning
since Frederick J. Turner discovered the place of
sections in American history. In the summer of
1 94 1, Duell, Sloan and Pearce, New York, began
publication of the American Folkways Series,
"designed to reflect the living features, the
atmosphere and background of the various Ameri-
can regions — those qualities which have inspired the
great American novels and are not to be found in
histories or in textbooks." The series is under the
general editorship of Erskine Caldwell, whose
intimate knowledge of the region and people he por-
trays in his novels fits him to guide such a project.
The authors, from Edwin Corle whose Desert
Country (1941) launched the series, to Oscar Lewis
whose High Sierra Country (1955) is the most re-
cent, are by birth, adoption, or, at least, admiration
for the manners and customs of the people, "natives"
of the regions about which they write with instinc-
tive feeling and knowledge. The tides of some of
the volumes need geographical clarification, and we
have borrowed freely from the authors' own
descriptions.
3943-
1945.
Atherton, Gertrude Franklin (Horn)
Golden Gate country, by Gertrude Atherton.
256 p. 45-2766 F861.A87
3944. Bracke, William B. Wheat country. 1950.
309 p. 50-6934 F591.B78
"If one were to describe a large circle with a radius
of roughly two hundred miles from the center of
Kansas ... he would have put a perimeter around
the Wheat Country." The area extends to the east
and west boundaries of Kansas, to the south central
section of the State, and in an arc into southern
Nebraska.
3945. Callahan, North. Smoky Mountain coun-
try. 1952. 257 p. 52-6783 F443.G7C3
The "Smoky Mountain country" extends from
the Kentucky and Virginia State lines southward
through East Tennessee and western North Caro-
lina to Georgia.
3946. Carter, Hodding, and Anthony Ragusin.
Gulf Coast country. 1951. 247 p.
51-10125 F296.C3
The "Gulf Coast" extends about one hundred
fifty miles from east to west along the Gulf of
Mexico and penetrates no more than five miles in-
land from the sea. "The Coast is still a nation in
itself, bearing no resemblance to the interior of
Mississippi or Alabama along whose southern
borders it skirts."
2Q47. Corle, Edwin. Desert country. 1 941. 357 p.
3™ 41-51799 F786.C8 1941
This is a book about the arid regions of the
local history: regions, states, and cities / 479
American Southwest — the area between the Pacific
Coast Range and the Rocky Mountains which in-
cludes such deserts as the Mojave, the Colorado, the
Amargosa, and Arizona's western slope.
3948. Croy, Homer. Corn country. 1947. 325 p.
47-3772 F595.C963
The "Corn country," in the center of the United
States, stretches from western Ohio to the eastern
part of Kansas, and from the southern part of
Minnesota to central Missouri, and includes at
least parts of Indiana, Illinois, Iowa, Nebraska, Wis-
consin, and South Dakota.
3949. Day, Donald. Big country: Texas. 1947.
326 p. 47-4831 F386.D3
3950. Graham, Lloyd. Niagara country. 1949.
321 p. 49-9928 F127.N6G7
To Canadians, Bostonians, New Yorkers, and
Americans in general, the "Niagara Country" means
different things. "If you pinpoint Niagara Falls
and draw a circle with a radius of fifty miles and
the Falls as the center, you will probably have the
most common concept of Niagara Country."
3951. [Henry, Ralph Chester] High border coun-
try, by Eric Thane [pseud.] 1942. 335 p.
42-36241 F597.H4
Montana, Wyoming, the Dakotas, and the north-
ern tongue of Idaho form the "High Border Coun-
try," which takes its name from the high plains and
the high mountains, and forms the northern bound-
ary of the United States, as opposed to the "low
border" fronting Mexico.
3952. Kane, Harnett T. Deep Delta country.
1944. xx, 283 p. 44-40211 F377.D4K3
"Selected bibliography": p. 273-280.
The hundred and fifteen miles or so from New
Orleans to the Gulf of Mexico forms the Deep Delta
of the Mississippi River, "a region in some ways like
no other in the world."
3953. Kennedy, Stetson. Palmetto country. 1942.
340 p. 42-36426 F316.K38
The Palmetto country lies in the deepest South —
Florida and the southern portions of Georgia and
Alabama. The word palmetto is derived from the
Spanish palmito, a diminutive palm tree.
3954. Le Sueur, Meridel. North Star country.
1945. 327 p. 45-37888 F606.L56
"The North Star Country, with Minnesota as its
center, occupies almost the exact geographical center
of North America and has three great drainage
systems flowing in divergent directions through
wide valleys of glacial loess." Here the Mississippi
Valley "extends north to south through the elbow
of the Minnesota River, a rich basin left by glacial
invasion and occupied before the white man's
coming by the great Sioux nation. The surface then
tilts down northward, to the beaches of the dead
Lake Agassiz whose dry basin makes the Red
River Valley, the winter wheat area of North
Dakota."
3955. Lewis, Oscar. High Sierra country. 1955.
291 p. 55-9834 F868.S5L64
The Sierra Nevada range in east central Cali-
fornia, with some attention to the Nevada towns
just beyond it.
3956. Long, Haniel. Pinon country. 1941. 327 p.
41-51810 F786.L8
The land of the dwarf pinon trees which produce
the pinon nut, an important food of the natives,
embraces New Mexico, northern Arizona, southern
Utah and Colorado, west Texas, and northern
Mexico.
3957. McWilliams, Carey. Southern California
country, an island on the land. 1946. 387 p.
46-25084 F867.M25
Southern California is a coastal strip of land
where the mountain ranges, the ocean, and the semi-
desert terrain meet. It includes part of Santa Bar-
bara County, all of Ventura, Los Angeles, and
Orange Counties, and those portions of San Ber-
nadino, Riverside, and San Diego Counties "west
of the mountains." The offshore Channel Islands
are a part of the region although traditionally de-
tached from its social life.
3958. Nixon, Herman C. Lower Piedmont coun-
try. 1946. xxiii, 244 p.
46-83330 F210.N5
Book notes: p. 234-238.
"This country is borderland between mountains
and lowland plains, between mountaineers and cot-
ton planters. It is land where the Appalachians,
in their southwestward extension, fade away into
small ridges and rolling hills. As the mountains
disappear, the Piedmont Plateau on the east joins
the Great Appalachian Valley, or series of valleys,
on the west around the end of the Blue Ridge."
3959. Powers, Alfred. Redwood country; the lava
region and the redwoods. 1949. x\ iii, 202 p.
49-5224 F861.P69
"Altogether, the volume's immense locale extends
south and north along the [Pacific] coast — from
Russian River [in California] to the Siuslaw River
[in Oregon]." It is continued in the interior \al-
480 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
leys, and east of the Sierras and Cascades it includes
large areas of Nevada, Oregon, and Idaho.
3960. Rayburn, Otto Ernest. Ozark country.
1941. 351 p. 4I-52073 F417.O9R3
"The Ozark Country is an egg-shaped uplift
sprawling in the mammoth bed of the Mississippi
Valley." Unlike some geographers, the author re-
stricts the region to the southern half of Missouri,
the northwestern part of Arkansas, and a few coun-
ties in eastern Oklahoma.
3961.
Mormon country.
42-22811 F826.S75
Stegner, Wallace
1942. 362 p.
The Mormon country includes all of Utah, most
of southern Idaho, the southwestern corner of Wyo-
ming, a strip of western Colorado, the northwestern
corner of New Mexico, much of northern and cen-
tral Arizona, and the eastern third of Nevada;
however, Utah is the center of its religious and
cultural life.
3962. Swetnam, George. Pittsylvania country.
1951. 315 p. 51-9280 F159.P6S85
The "Pittsylvania Country" is an irregular area
centering about Pittsburgh, extending up the Alle-
gheny and Monongahela Rivers and down the Ohio
for some seventy-five miles or more. "It is bounded
on the east by the middle ridges of the Allegheny
Mountains and the Pennsylvania Dutch Country,
on the north by the Erie Country, on the west by
the flat Buckeye Country beyond the Steubenville
Hills, and on the south by the Hill Country of West
Virginia."
3963. Thomas, Jeannette (Bell) Blue Ridge
country, by Jean Thomas. 1942. 338 p.
42-36174 F217.B6T5
The Blue Ridge country here described comprises
the southern portion of the Appalachian Moun-
tain range that runs from West Virginia through
portions of Virginia, Kentucky, Tennessee, North
and South Carolina to Georgia and Alabama.
3964. Vestal, Stanley. Short grass country. 1941.
304 p. 41-52003 F591.V48
"From the Saskatchewan River in Canada south-
ward for 1,500 miles, a strip of country averaging
some 500 miles in width extends almost to Old
Mexico — country once covered with an unbroken
mat of buffalo grass, grama, mesquite ... all short
grasses — rarely even six inches high." By the "Short
Grass Country" the author means only the southern
section of this region, the High Plains. It includes
the western half of Oklahoma and Kansas, North-
west Texas, and the plains of eastern New Mexico
and Colorado.
3965. Webster, Clarence M. Town meeting coun-
try. 1945. 246 p. 45-2984 F4.W4
Mr. Webster's "Town Meeting Country" is an
area of some 3,000 square miles in southern New
England, comprising most of Connecticut east of the
Connecticut River, a slice of south central Massa-
chusetts, and most of Rhode Island west of Narra-
gansett Bay. Here the small mill cities are still
dominated by the annual or semi-annual Town
Meeting.
3966. White, William Chapman. Adirondack
country. 1954. 315 p.
52-12652 F127.A2W5 1954
Northeastern New York State, and particularly
Adirondack State Park established in 1892 — the
largest of our state parks, with over two million
acres in public ownership.
3967. Williams, Albert N. Rocky Mountain coun-
try. 1950. xxv, 289 p.
50-6038 F721.W68
Neither the residents nor topographers agree
about the area described as the Rocky Mountain
country. The author advises the reader to ignore
the adas, and believe this: Rocky Mountain country
is mostly the mountains in Colorado, plus the fringe
along the southern border of Wyoming and the few
fingers that jut down into New Mexico.
3968. Williamson, Thames R. Far north country.
1944. 236 p. 44-4015 F904W68
THE RIVERS OF AMERICA SERIES
3969. The Rivers of America, as planned and
started by Constance Lindsay Skinner [vari-
ous editors] New York, Rinehart, 1937-56. 50 v.
The idea of telling the American saga through the
story of its rivers originated with Canadian-born
Constance Lindsay Skinner ( 1882-1939) who began
her career as a teen-age newspaper correspondent
and rose to distinction as a novelist, poet, and his-
torian of America. About 1935 Miss Skinner se-
lected the rivers and oudined the special folk stories
for the original 24 volumes to be written by "nov-
elists and poets," and published by Farrar and Rine-
hart (now Rinehart and Company, Inc.) New
York. At the time of her death four years later
six of the seven volumes which Miss Skinner edited
had already appeared. In successive years the series
has been gready expanded, and edited, except for a
brief period, by Carl Carmer, the well-known re-
gional writer and collector of American folk songs,
legends, and ballads, in collaboration, until their
deaths, with the distinguished authors Stephen Vin-
local history: regions, states, and cities / 481
cent Benet and Hervey Allen. The stories of the
lives of the people who held "civil rights, God, and
the primer ... in honor on the banks of the rivers,"
their industries and architectural fads, and the "char-
acteristic expression of the Folk mind" in religion,
arts, crafts, and folklore, make up these volumes.
The most recent, Henry Savage's River of the Caro-
linas: The Santee (1956), appropriately reminds us
that our rivers will continue to witness future
changes in our civilization, which will be as varied
as the scenes they remember from time long past.
3970. SKINNER, CONSTANCE LINDSAY, ed.
All of the volumes originally edited by Miss
Skinner, except Coffin's, contain her essay "Rivers
and American Folk," in 13 pages at the end. It has
been omitted from the revised editions of Havig-
hurst and Niles, and from the reprint of Matschat's.
3971. Burt, Maxwell Struthers. Powder River;
let'er buck; illustrated by Ross Santee.
1938. 389 p. 38-28939 F767.P6B8
Bibliography: p. 377-380.
3972. Carmer, Carl L. The Hudson; illustrated
by Stow Wengenroth. 1939. 434 p.
39-27579 F127.H8C3
Bibliography: p. 408-421.
3973. Coffin, Robert P. Tristram. Kennebec,
cradle of Americans; illustrated by Maitland
de Gogorza. 1937. 292 p.
37-27396 F27.K32C6
3974. Dana, Julian. The Sacramento, river of
gold; illustrated by J. O'H. Cosgrave II.
1939. 294 p. 39-27898 F868.S13D27
3975. Havighurst, Walter. Upper Mississippi: a
wilderness saga; illustrated by David and
Lolitha Granahan. 1937. 258 p.
37-37568 F597.H35
"Source streams": p. 245-250.
A revised edition, including only an account of the
river itself, and omitting materials on the Scandi-
navian settlement and lumber industry of the upper
Mississippi Valley, was edited by Stephen Vincent
Benet and Carl Carmer, and published in 1944
(F597.H352).
3976. Matschat, Cecile (Hulse). Suwannee River;
strange green land; illustrated by Alexander
Key. 1938. 296 p. 38-19573 F317.S8M3
Bibliography: p. 283-288.
Reprinted: London, W. Hodge, 1951. 256 p.
F317.S8M3
3977. Niles, Blair. The James; illustrated by Ed-
ward Shenton. 1939. 359>[i3]P>
39-27044 F232.J2N5
"Sources": p. 343-349.
A revised and enlarged edition was edited by
Hervey Allen, and published in 1945 under the tide:
"The fames from Iron Gate to the Sea (335 p.
F232.J2N5 1945).
3978. BENET, STEPHEN VINCENT, and
CARL L. CARMER, eds.
3979. Beston, Henry. The St. Lawrence; illus-
trated by A. Y. Jackson. 1942. 274 p.
42-24091 F1050.B47
3980. Cabell, James Branch, and Alfred J. Hanna.
The St. Johns, a parade of diversities; illus-
trated by Doris Lee. 1943. 324 p.
43-1 15 1 1 F317.S2C3
Bibliography: p. 309-318.
3981. Canby, Henry Seidel. The Brandy wine;
illustrated by Andrew Wyeth. 1941. 285 p.
41-5328 F157.C4C23
"A selected bibliography": p. 269-271.
3982. Carter, Hodding. Lower Mississippi; illus-
trated by John McCrady. 1942. 467 p.
42-23785 F396.C3
"Selected bibliography": p. 443-451.
3983. Clark, Thomas D. The Kentucky; illus-
trated by John A. Spelman, III. 1942.
431 p. 42-36o52 F457.K3C6
Bibliography: p. 411-420.
3984. Davis, Clyde Brion. The Arkansas; illus-
trated by Donald McKay. 1940. 340 p.
40-27483 F417.A7D37
"Acknowledgements": p. 328-330.
3985. Derleth, August W. The Wisconsin, river
of a thousand isles; illustrated by John
Steuart Curry. 1942. 366 p.
42-23237 F587.W8D4
Bibliography: p. 339-345.
3986. Gray, James. The Illinois; illustrated by
Aaron Bohrod. 1940. 355 p.
40-34654 F547.I2G7
Bibliography: p. 337-344.
3987. Hansen, Harry. The Chicago; illustrated
by Harry Timmins. 1942. 362 p.
42-25855 F547.C45H3
"Sources": p. 349-354.
482 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
3988. Masters, Edgar Lee. The Sangamon; illus-
trated by Lynd Ward. 1942. 258 p.
42-15541 F547.S3M3
3989. Morgan, Dale L. The Humboldt, highroad
of the West; illustrated by Arnold Blanch.
1943- 374 P- 43-7564 F847.H85M6
Bibliography: p. 355-365.
3990. Streeter, Floyd Benjamin. The Kaw, the
heart of a nation; illustrated by Isabel Bate
and Harold Black. 1941. 371 p.
41-3357 F681.S8
Bibliography: p. 353-359.
3991. Tourtellot, Arthur Bernon. The Charles;
illustrated by Ernest J. Donnelly. 1941.
356 p. 41-52052 F72.C46T7
Bibliography: p. 343-348.
3992. Way, Frederick. The Allegheny; illustrated
by Henry Pkz. 1942. 280 p.
42-15895 _ F157.A5W3
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgements": p. 219-222.
3993. Wildes, Harry Emerson. The Delaware;
illustrated by Irwin D. Hoffman. 1940.
398 p. 40-14246 F106.W65
"Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 369-
381.
3994. Wildes, Harry Emerson. Twin rivers, the
Raritan and the Passaic; illustrated by Angelo
di Benedetto. 1943. 390 p. 43-2434 F142.R2W5
Bibliography: p. 371-383.
3995. Wilson, William E. The Wabash; illus-
trated by John De Martelly. 1940. 339 p.
40-27193 F532.W2W6
Bibliography: p. 325-332.
3996. ALLEN, HERVEY, ed.
3997. Davis, Julia. The Shenandoah; illustrated
by Frederic Taubes. 1945. 374 p.
45-8434 F232.S5D3
Bibliography: p. 363-369.
3998. Fisher, Anne (Benson) The Salinas, upside-
down river; illustrated by Walter K. Fisher.
1945. xviii, 316 p. 45-1095 F868.S133F5
Bibliography: p. 305-308.
3999. Footner, Hulbert. Rivers of the Eastern
Shore, seventeen Maryland rivers; illustrated
by Aaron Sopher. 1944. 375 p.
44-8257 F187.F2F6
"Sources": p. 362-368.
4000. Smith, Chard Powers. The Housatonic,
Puritan river; illustrated by Armin Landeck.
1946. 532 p. 46-4413 F102.H7S5
Bibliography: p. 515-522.
4001. Vestal, Stanley. The Missouri; illustrated
by Getlar Smith, maps by George Annand.
1945. 368 p. 44-5 1595 F598.V47
Bibliography: p. 349-354.
4002. ALLEN, HERVEY, and CARL L.
CARMER, eds.
4003. Banta, Richard E. The Ohio; illustrated by
Edward Shenton. 1949. 592 p.
49-1 1 1 15 F516.B18
Bibliography: p. 561-577.
4004. Campbell, Marjorie E. The Saskatchewan;
illustrated by Illingworth H. Kerr. 1950.
400 p. 50-6401 F1076.C18
Bibliography: p. 375-380.
4005. Corle, Edwin. The Gila, river of the South-
west; illustrated by Ross Santee. 1951.
402 p. 51-6152 F817.G52C6
Bibliography: p. 377-386.
4006. Davidson, Donald. The Tennessee; illus-
trated by Theresa Sherrer Davidson. 1946-
48. 2 v. 46-1 190 1 F217.T3D3
"A selected bibliography": v. 1, p. 327-333; v. 2,
p. 364-370.
Contents. — v. 1. The old river, frontier to seces-
sion.— v. 2. The new river, Civil War to TV A.
4007. Douglas, Marjory (Stoneman). The Ever-
glades, river of grass; illustrated by Robert
Fink. 1947. 406 p. 47-11064 F317.E9D6
Bibliography: p. 391-398.
4008. Gutheim, Frederick A. The Potomac; illus-
trated by Mitchell Jamieson. 1949. 436 p.
49-11856 F187.P8G8
"Bibliographical notes": p. 399-413.
4009. Hard, Walter R. The Connecticut; illus-
trated by Douglas W. Gorsline. 1947.
310 p. 47-3553 F12.C7H3
Bibliography: p. 299-301.
4010. Hill, Ralph Nading. The Winooski, heart-
way of Vermont; illustrated by George Daly.
1949. 304 p. 49~8844 F57.W63H55
Bibliography: p. 283-293.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 483
401 1. Hislop, Codman. The Mohawk; illustrated
by Letterio Calapai. 1948. xv, 367 p.
48-9184 F127.M55H57
Bibliography: p. 339-350.
4012. Howe, Henry F. Salt rivers of the Massa-
chusetts shore; illustrated by John O'Hara
Cosgrace II. xiv, 370 p. 51-14004 F64.H70
Bibliography: p. 351-358.
4013. Hutchison, Bruce. The Fraser; illustrated
by Richard Bennett. 1950. 368 p.
50-10549 F1089.F7H8
Bibliography: p. 351-355.
4014. Minter, John Easter. The Chagres, river of
westward passage; illustrated by William
Wellons. 1948. xiv, 418 p.
48-7786 F1569.C4M5
Bibliography: p. 393-403.
4015. Roberts, Leslie. The Mackenzie; illustrated
by Thoreau MacDonald. 1949. 276 p.
49-8302 F1060.9.M26R6
Bibliography: p. 255-256.
4016. Stokes, Thomas L. The Savannah; illus-
trated by Lamar Dodd. 1951. 401 p.
51-9387 F277.S3S8
Bibliography: p. 382-388.
4017. Waters, Frank. The Colorado; illustrated
by Nicolai Fechin, maps by George Annand.
1946. 400 p. 46-6192 F788.W3
Bibliography: p. 389-393.
4018. CARMER, CARL L., ed.
4019. Bissell, Richard P. The Monongahela; illus-
trated by John O'Hara Cosgrave II. 1952.
239 p. 52-5562 F157.M58B5
Bibliography: p. 231-233.
4020. Carmer, Carl L. The Susquehanna; illus-
trated by Stow Wengenroth. 1955. 493 p.
53-8227 F157.S8C3
Bibliography: p. 457-465.
4021. Dykeman, Wilma. The French Broad; il-
lustrated by Douglas Gorsline. 1955. 371 p.
54-9349 F443F8D9
Bibliography: p. 349-356.
4022. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Columbia; il-
lustrated by Ernest Richardson. 1956.
393 P- 55-!°527 F853.H6
4023. Savage, Henry. River of the Carolinas, the
Santee; illustrated by Lamar Dodd. 1956.
435 p. 56-6469 F277.S28S3
Bibliography: p. 411-415.
4024. Smith, Frank E. The Yazoo River; illus-
trated by Janet E. Turner. 1954. 362 p.
53-9242 F347.Y3S6 1954
"Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 347—
350-
4025. Songs of the rivers of America; music ar-
ranged by Dr. Albert Sirmay. 1942. xi,
196 p. 43-2356 M1629.S225S6
To accompany the series The Rivers of America.
B. New England: General
4026. Brewer, Daniel Chauncey. The conquest of
New England by the immigrant. New
York, Putnam, 1926. 369 p. 26-12327 F9.B83
With all the fervor of his Puritan ancestry, the
author laments the expansion of industrialism that
brought increasing numbers of non-English speak-
ing immigrants to New England after 1880. His
book, however, supplies a view, hardly to be found
elsewhere, of the replacement of the old New
Englanders by a foreign-born population. The
author, however, did not "despair of the Yankee as
a potent force in the community," although he
wrote too soon to record how completely the new-
comers have absorbed the old New England ideals
of education, industriousness, and sobriety.
4027. Fox, Dixon Ryan. Yankees and Yorkers.
New York, University Press, 1940. 237 p.
(Anson G. Phelps lectureship on early American
history, New York University)
40-13441 F122.F78
The occupation of New York lands by the people
of New England during the colonial period and
the "Great Migration" following the Revolution is
the theme of these lectures, in which the similarities
and differences of the Yankees and the "Yorkers"
are brought out. Special attention is given to the
clash of the two elements in the border area of un-
certain ownership which became Vermont, and
there is a very original chapter characterizing
"Yankee Culture in New York." The author con-
484 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
eludes: "There are characteristic differences which
are creditable to each section, and each has found
a benefit in the neighborly presence of the other."
4028. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Yankee exodus,
an account of migration from New England.
New York, Macmillan, 1950. xii, 398 p.
50-7972 E179.5.H65
Bibliography: p. 364-371.
This book pursues in an episodic and anecdotal
manner the thesis explored by Mrs. Rosenberry
(q. v.). The author follows his emigrants west of
the Mississippi, and, in diminishing degree, the
fortunes of their communities as far as the close
of the 19th century.
4029. Mussey, June Barrows, ed. Yankee life by
those who lived it, by Barrows Mussey.
[1st Borzoi ed., rev.] New York, Knopf, 1947.
543 P- . 47-"79i F3.M87 1947
First published in 1937 under title: We Were
New England.
In order to check as well as supplement the image
of New England gathered from histories and novels,
the author has "taken from the autobiographies of
New Englanders those passages which show what
it felt like to live in the cradle of the nation." Ex-
tracts from 48 writers, ranging from the famous to
the humble and obscure, and arranged under 19
topical headings, cover the three centuries before
the Civil War. An alphabetical list of the persons
who have been selected and their pertinent writings,
with brief biographical comment, is brought to-
gether in "Yankee Lives:" p. 535-543.
4030. Rosenberry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews. The
expansion of New England; the spread of
New England setdement and institutions to the
Mississippi River, 1620-1865, by Lois Kimball
Mathews. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1909. xiv,
303 p. 9-29148 F4.R81
"Bibliographical notes" at end of each chapter ex-
cept 1 and 10.
Mrs. Rosenberry 's enlargement of her Radcliffe
College dissertation first traces the history of the
New England frontier from the settlement to the
Revolution, describes the institutions by which its
advance was effected, and estimates the effect upon
it of warfare with the Indians, later joined and
supported by the French in Canada. The second
half of the book is concerned with the "Great
Migrations from New England toward the West"
which began immediately after Yorktown and con-
tinued more or less steadily until the Civil War,
creating a belt centering along the 43rd parallel and
extending west to the Mississippi. From 1787 "a
second New England" was built up in Ohio, around
Marietta and in the Western Reserve, and through-
out the belt these "State builders" took with them
their moral and intellectual ideals and institutions.
"The history of New England," according to Mrs.
Rosenberry, "is not confined to six states; it is con-
tained in a greater and broader New England
wherever the children of the Puritans are found."
4031. Wilson, Harold Fisher. The hill country of
northern New England; its social and eco-
nomic history, 1790-1930. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1936. xiv, 455 p. (Columbia
University studies in the history of American agri-
culture, 3) 37-755 HD1773.A2W5
Bibliography: p. [403H37.
The region which the writer has singled out for
study comprises most of Maine, New Hampshire,
and Vermont, an area of scant population dependent
upon farming. The author describes the impact of
economic changes in the United States as a whole on
northern New England: they terminated its self-
sufficiency as early as 1830, and precipitated a com-
plete readjustment of its economic and social life.
The author describes the transition from a "meat-
wool-grain region" to "a dairy-fruit-potato-poultry-
and-garden-truck crop territory," with closer con-
tacts with the outside world, and a developing
summer recreation trade. "This wide-spread ad-
justment in the agriculture of the hill country, with
its accompanying abandonment of sub-marginal
farms, was called 'a triumph of selection, increased
efficiency, and specialization,' in a report issued by
the Department of Commerce in 1930." By that
date the "deserted farm, instead of being thought
wantonly abandoned, was regarded as the inevitable
result of a readjustment to modern conditions."
C. New England: Local
NEW HAMPSHIRE
4032. Bowles, Ella (Shannon) Let me show you
New Hampshire. New York, Knopf, 1938.
368 p. illus. 38-27408 F34.B69
A native of New Hampshire, the author has long
been identified with its cultural life. This book is
a series of Mrs. Bowles' "impressions, supplemented
by personal research in historical background, by
information furnished by certain state departments,"
local history: regions, states, and cities / 485
and other sources. The result is an unsystematic
volume of pleasant and unpretentious topical
sketches, all informed by a quiet but sincere love of
the State.
VERMONT
4033. Newton, Earle W. The Vermont story; a
history of the people of the Green Mountain
State, 1749-1949. With a foreword by Allan Nevins
and an introduction by Dorothy Canfield Fisher.
Montpelier, Vermont Historical Society, 1949. x,
281 p. (The American States) 49-9803 F49.N49
Bibliography: p. 272-274.
The director of the Vermont Historical Society
has written, according to Dorothy Canfield Fisher,
a "well-balanced, accurate and detailed account" of
Vermont since its beginning. An initial chapter
describes the land and the natural resources which
have determined the development of the Green
Mountain State. Part II chronicles events from the
Bennington charter in 1749 to 1849, when frustra-
tions from a lag in industrial growth, poor trans-
portation, and a discouraging outiook for agriculture
made migration to the West attractive. Part III
deals with economic progress, cultural growth, and
local government during the century 1849 to 1949.
The book fills an immediate need for a readable one-
volume history of the State and is lavishly provided
with illustrations, many of them in color.
MASSACHUSETTS
4034. Hart, Albert Bushnell, ed. Commonwealth
history of Massachusetts, Colony, Province
and State; edited by Albert Bushnell Hart, with the
cooperation of an advisory board of forty-two learned
bodies. New York, States History Co., 1927-30.
5 v. 27-18867 F64.H32
Bibliography at end of each chapter.
Contents. — v. 1. Colony of Massachusetts Bay,
1 605-1 689. — v. 2. Province of Massachusetts, 1689—
1775. — v. 3. Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 1775-
1820. — v. 4. Nineteenth century Massachusetts, 1820-
1889. — v. 5. Twentieth century Massachusetts,
1889-1930.
Veteran American historian, Albert Bushnell
Hart ( 1 854-1943) performed a labor of love in
bringing together the group of scholars who pro-
duced, in many instances from unpublished sources,
this cooperative history of Massachusetts, and who
maintained, under his experienced direction, a cer-
tain uniformity of style and treatment. All phases
of public and private life — social, economic, cultural,
religious, and political — have been treated in the
successive epochs of the State's history from 1605 to
the time of publication. In each volume the biog-
raphy of a representative man of his community is
presented to illustrate the character and ambitions of
his fellow citizens: the elder John Winthrop, Cotton
Mather, John Adams, Daniel Webster, and Charles
William Eliot are the men thus singled out. The
Commonwealth History has set the pattern for some,
but unfortunately only a few, cooperative and schol-
arly histories of other states.
4035. Amory, Cleveland. The proper Bostonians.
New York, Dutton, 1947. 381 p. ([Society
in America series]) 47-1 1061 F73.37.A5
"Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. 361-
367-
"Manufactured from interviews with Bostonians,"
this is a collective profile of the family-conscious,
provincial, cultured, charitable, and yet frugal men
and women who make up "the First Family Society
of the Proper Bostonian." Far smaller than the
Boston Social Register's 8,000 listees, it has yet "set
its stamp on the country's fifth largest city [1940]
so indelibly that when an outsider thinks of a Bos-
tonian he thinks only of the Proper Bostonian."
It is narrated in an informal, anecdotal style, with a
sympathetic understanding of these sheltered bene-
ficiaries of the great family trusts, and at the same
time with a prying humor that penetrates rock-
bound custom for a glimpse of modernity.
4036. Winsor, Justin, ed. The memorial history of
Boston, including Suffolk County, Massachu-
setts. 1630-1880. Issued under the business super-
intendence of the projector, Clarence F. Jewett. Bos-
ton, J. R. Osgood, 1880-81. 4 v.
1-12246 F73.3.W76
Contents. — v. 1. The early and colonial periods. —
v. 2. The provincial period. — v. 3. The revolutionary
period. The last hundred years, pt. i. — v. 4. The
last hundred years, pt. 2. Special topics.
The plan of this history originated with Clarence
F. Jewett, "projector" of a number of large -scale
cooperative histories during the 1870's and 8o's, who
in December 1879 turned over its development to
the distinguished Harvard historian and librarian,
Justin Winsor. The subjects of the chapters were
assigned to more than sixty writers competent in
their special fields, and the editor added notes only
as needed "to give coherency to the plan." The
contributors included such notables as Charles
Francis Adams, Jr., Henry M. Dexter, Francis S.
Drake, George C. Ellis, Asa Gray, Edward Everett
Hale, Thomas Wentworth Higginson, Henry Cabot
Lodge, John Davis Long, Horace E. Scudder,
Nathaniel S. Shaler, John Greenleaf Whittier (an
8-page poem), and Robert C. Winthrop. It has
remained a classic among American city histories,
486 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and fifty years later "the fifth volume to this en-
during quartet" was published by the Boston
Tercentenary Committee: Fifty Years of Boston, a
Memorial Volume Issued in Commemoration of the
Tercentenary of 1930, Elisabeth M. Herlihy, chair-
man and editor (Boston, 1932. 799 p.). John T.
Morse, Jr., a nonagenarian and the only surviving
contributor to the Memorial History, contributed a
review of it as a "Greeting" in this "fifth" volume.
4037. Scudder, Townsend. Concord: American
town. Boston, Little, Brown, 1947. 421 p.
47-2755 F74.C8S35
"Bibliographical notes and acknowledgments":
P- 39x-395-
The site of the Massachusetts Provincial Congress
in 1774-75, a battleground during the American
Revolution, a community ruled by all its citizens in
town meeting through three centuries, and the home
of Emerson, Hawthorne, Alcott, and Thoreau, Con-
cord has been chosen by the author as a typical
American town in whose life the larger story of
America is reflected. From its first settlement in
1635 through World War II the narrative unfolds
in the lives, actions, and words of its people, resur-
rected by the author from minutes of town meetings,
which sometimes report debates, church records,
journals, and newspapers (since 1817), and placed
in their regional and national setting through
standard works of history and reference.
4038. Blanchard, Dorothy C. A. Nantucket land-
fall. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1956.
241 p. 56-6648 F72.N2B55
Nantucket is situated about 25 miles south of the
Cape Cod peninsula across Nantucket Sound, and
its island history has been shaped since the early 17th
century by the wind and the sea. Its isolation offered
refuge to liberty-loving settlers, its waters made it a
famous whaling port, and its winds now fill the sails
of a popular summer resort. The bibliography (p.
236-241) indicates the numerous sources drawn
upon by the author to tell the story of the island's
transformation from a sheep-raising colony, its
unique part in the American Revolution and the
War of 1812, the partial destruction of the town by
fire in 1846, the California Gold Rush which drained
its young men, the discovery of "coal-oil" which
brought an end to whaling, and the summer-resort
"boom" which brought the railroad and ultimately
the automobile and airplane. The Indians, the
Quakers, the men of action — Mayhews, Folgers,
Macys, Coffins — and the tales of mutiny and ship-
wreck, are all part of the history of Nantucket,
where a few handsome mansions, an old candle fac-
tory that houses whaling relics, and a Quaker meet-
ing house turned museum, are reminders of its
unique and colorful past.
RHODE ISLAND
4039. Richman, Irving Berdine. Rhode Island, a
study in separatism. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1905. 395 p. (American common-
wealths) 5—34187 F79.R53
Bibliography: P.J353H85.
The author's principal object is "to point out the
influence of Separatism in determining the course of
events in Rhode Island during the 18th and 19th
centuries." Part I, covering 1636-1689, sum-
marizes the author's earlier and fuller work Rhode
Island, Its Maying and Its Meaning (New York,
Putnam, 1902. 2 v.). The greater part of the
volume is concerned with the century from 1690 to
Rhode Island's ratification of the Constitution in
1790 (p. [65]-257). There is a substantial chapter
on "The Son Rebellion" of 1842 (p. [285I-307)
which finally brought Jacksonian Democracy to
Rhode Island.
4040. Elliott, Maud (Howe) This was my New-
port. Cambridge, Mass., Mythology Co.,
A. M. Jones, 1944. xxiv, 279 p.
44-9074 F89.N5E4
This daughter of Julia Ward Howe won a Pulitzer
prize, with Laura E. Richards, for the biography of
her mother published in 1917. Here she reminisces
about the Newport which has been the home of
her people from the beginning, and which "has
been called, not without reason, the nation's social
capital." The mecca of Southerners after the Amer-
ican Revolution, it became the gathering place of
Boston intellectuals and New York socialites follow-
ing the Civil War. Mrs. Elliott quotes freely from
family letters to illustrate the growth of literary and
artistic traditions, and the social life and sports
of the personalities that made up Newport society.
In the concluding "Part Five — Naval and Military,"
the author gathers together "both personal memories,
and recollections which have been handed down
from preceding generations, of distinguished officers
who . . . have been connected with this little town
where so much of our naval history has been made."
CONNECTICUT
4041. Shepard, Odell. Connecticut, past and pres-
ent. New York, Knopf, 1939. xix, 316, xi p.
39-27511 F94.S48
local history: regions, states, and cities / 487
With the enthusiasm of a "native son," and the
impartiality of one "foreign-born" (Illinois in this
instance), a professor of English at Trinity College,
Hartford (1917-46), who is an author of note and
a Pulitzer prize winner, sets down his interpretation
of Connecticut. He describes the land and the land-
scape, significant historical episodes, old graveyards,
farm and town life, and the trend of recent changes,
and he discriminates the individuality of communi-
ties that, to a casual observer, look just alike. Dr.
Shepard's observations are based on 20 years of trav-
eling the highways and byways, and talking with
the men, women, and children — Yankee born or im-
migrant— who make up the State. Those who still
crave a heavier ration of historical and topographical
fact he refers to Florence S. M. Crofut's Guide to
the History and the Historic Sites of Connecticut
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1937. 2 v.).
4042. Osterweis, Rollin G. Three centuries of
New Haven, 1638-1938. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1953. xv, 541 p.
52-12064 F104.N6O83
Provided with funds left by the New Haven Ter-
centenary Committee of 1938, the New Haven Col-
ony Historical Society commissioned the author "to
prepare a history of New Haven, which will be of
interest to the general reader and of value to the
historical scholar." This official Tercentenary His-
tory of the town from the landing at Quinnipiack on
April 24, 1638, to 1938 is the result. It exemplifies
the best canons of present-day social history by trac-
ing in all aspects of community life the evolution of
a semi-rural college town into a diversified modern
city with a large immigrant population. The exten-
sive bibliography (p. 437-479), chronology, and
glossary at the end are of special interest to the
scholar.
D. The Middle Atlantic States
4043. Thompson, Daniel G. Brinton. Gateway to
a nation; the Middle Adantic States and
their influence on the development of the Nation.
Rindge, N. H., R. R. Smith, 1956. 274 p.
55-1 1 153 F106.T42
Bibliography: p. 252-260.
Unlike New England, the South, and the South-
west, the Middle Adantic area "has seldom been re-
garded as a unit," so that this book is "in a sense an
adventure in sectional history." Recognizing the
similarities in spite of the different customs and cul-
tures among the inhabitants of New York, Pennsyl-
vania, New Jersey, and Delaware, the author has
explored the influence of the region on the political,
industrial, and cultural growth of the Nation, especi-
ally during the colonial and early republican periods.
The prevailing thought of the section has been "cos-
mopolitan and sophisticated," and no other has
"maintained over the years such strong financial,
commercial, and personal ties with all sections."
The result is only a sketch, but the author hopes to
stimulate others to study more intensely these states,
that "have always been the nation's Adantic gateway
and have always been aware of our close ties to
Western Europe."
NEW YORK
4044.
New York State Historical Association.
History of the State of New York. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1933-37. I0 v-
33-11644 F119.N65
"Select bibliography" at end of most of the
chapters.
Contents. — v. 1. Wigwam and bouwerie. — v. 2.
Under duke and king. — v. 3. Whig and Tory. — v. 4.
The new State. — v. 5. Conquering the wilderness. —
v. 6. The age of reform. — v. 7. Modern party
batdes. — v. 8. Wealth and commonwealth. — v. 9.
Mind and spirit. — v. 10. The Empire State.
The New York State Historical Association under-
took the preparation and publication of this history
at the suggestion of the State Executive Committee
on the One Hundred and Fiftieth Anniversary of the
American Revolution in 1925, which had been en-
dorsed by the Regents of the University of the State
of New York. The cooperative product of the
"best qualified specialists" under the direction of a
single editor, Alexander C. Flick, State Historian,
it is similar in concept to the Commonwealth His-
tory of Massachusetts (q. v.). This is the first his-
tory of New York to cover the whole stretch of time
from its geological beginnings, and at the same time
"the whole range of human interests."
4045. Kouwenhoven, John Adee. The Columbia
historical portrait of New York; an essay in
graphic history in honor of the tricentennial of New
York City and the bicentennial of Columbia Uni-
versity. With a foreword by Grayson L. Kirk.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 550 p.
53-8181 F128.3.K6
Partial Contents. — Plans and prospects, 1614-
1800. — The people get in the picture, 1800-1845. —
488 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mid-century panorama, 1 845-1 855. — Documents of
change, 1 855-1 870. — The city in motion, 1870-
1890. — Transit to the Greater City, 1 890-1 910. —
"The Shapes Arise," 1910-1953.
Dating from 1626 to 1953, the 900 reproductions
of maps, drawings, prints, vvatercolors, paintings,
and photographs that have been selected for this
book are arranged in seven groups "representing
successive phases in the evolution of the city and of
man's consciousness of it." Brief essays and sepa-
rate captions describe the pictures, and make of
them an intelligible sequence unfolding the greatest
urban development of the New World.
4046. Weld, Ralph Foster. Brooklyn is America.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1950.
266 p. illus. 50-8082 F129.B7W42 1950
Bibliography: p. [249J-254.
Brooklyn has been a familiar subject to the author
since his doctoral dissertation (Brooklyn Village,
1816-1834) appeared in 1938. This is a revision
and expansion of a series of feature articles which
he contributed to the Brooklyn Eagle in 1948. It
deals sympathetically with all the ethnic groups that
have entered into the city's population from the
Dutch pioneers of the 17th century to the Puerto
Ricans of the 20th century. The Dutch, English,
Irish, Germans, Negroes, Jews, Italians, Scandi-
navians, and lesser groups have all contributed
characteristics to the American society which is
Brooklyn. The city not only illustrates the neces-
sity for practical cooperation and tolerance but
practices them sufficiently to make them work —
which is a hint, perhaps, that "Brooklyn can pass
on to the apprehensive peoples of the world."
4047. Nevins, Allan, and John A. Krout, eds. The
greater city: New York, 1898-1948. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1948. 260 p.
48-8678 F128.5.N4
Contents. — Past, present and future, by Allan
Nevins. — Framing the Charter, by J. A. Krout. —
From Van Wyck to O'Dwyer, by Carl Carmer. —
The city's business, by Thomas C. Cochran. — The
social and cultural scene, by Margaret Clapp.
The distinguished editors join with three other
contributors to portray the progress of Greater New
York since the consolidation of the five boroughs of
Manhattan, Brooklyn, the Bronx, Queens, and
Richmond in 1898. During that eventful half-
century the metropolis has achieved a real unity,
originally lacking but now felt by its citizens amid
all their diversity; it has controlled its growth and
that of its region by zoning and other plans; it has
created, or gready strengthened, a group of out-
standing institutions of higher culture; it has given
women an unprecedented place in civic affairs; and
it has adopted an entirely new social oudook giving
rise to practical institutions and measures of social
justice and social welfare.
4048. Still, Bayrd. Mirror for Gotham: New
York as seen by contemporaries from Dutch
days to the present. New York, University Press,
1956. 417 p. illus. 56-11979 F128.3.S85
From books, articles, letters, and diaries the author
has brought together contemporary commentaries
on the New York scene, from the Florentine Gio-
vanni da Verrazano's observations concerning his
visit to New York Harbor in 1524, to Beverly
Nichols impressions of the "international flavor of
the metropolis" in the late 1940's. These com-
mentaries by Americans, British, French, Italians,
Germans, and Austrians describe the physical ap-
pearance of the city, its commercial activities, "the
standard of living, attitudes, and day-to-day be-
havior of its varied population; and the ways in
which the city exerted its ever widening influence in
the national life." The extensive "Notes" (p. 341-
372) and "Bibliography" (p. 373-399) indicate the
research that underlies the selection of the excerpts
as well as the introductory passages to each selection,
and the more general descriptions with which the
author opens each of his ten chronological chapters.
A social history of New York from 1850 to 1950,
Lloyd Morris' Incredible New Yor\, High Life and
Low Life of the Last Hundred Years (New York,
Random House, 1951. 370 p.), emphasizes the
city's habitually spectacular modes of enjoying it-
self, by day and by night, indoors and out.
4049. Wilson, James Grant, ed. The memorial
history of the City of New York, from its
first settlement to the year 1892. [New York]
New- York History Co., 1892-93. 4 v. illus., maps
(part fold.), facsims. (part fold.)
1-14318 F128.3.W74
The editor of this history is widely known for his
more extensive work: Appleton's Cyclopedia of
American Biography, publication of which was com-
pleted in 1889. In 1888 the venerable George Ban-
croft suggested to the editor that he prepare "an
equally trustworthy history of the city of New- York
of the same character as the one that has recendy
appeared concerning Boston" (no. 4036). Four
years later the first volume of this comprehensive
four volume history appeared. It is composed of
contributions by well-known writers including, in
addition to the editor, Marcus L. Benjamin, Moncure
D. Conway, Berthold Fernow, Charles R. Hilde-
burn, Henry Phelps Johnston, John Austin Stevens,
and William L. Stone. The chronological sequence
begins with the "Exploration of the North American
Coast Previous to the Voyage of Henry Hudson,"
local history: regions, states, and cities / 489
and ends in the third volume with a review of the
"Constitutional and Legal History of New- York in
the Nineteenth Century." The fourth volume con-
sists of chapters on special topics such as suburban
areas, authors, libraries, newspapers and magazines,
music, churches, statues and monuments, medicine,
science, etc.
4050. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester, the water-
power city, 1812-1854. Cambridge, Mass.,
Harvard University Press, 1945. xvi, 383 p.
A45-4785 F129.R7M24
4051. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester, the flower city,
1855-1890. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1949. xvii, 407 p. 49-10783 F129.R7M23
4052. McKelvey, Blake. Rochester: the quest for
quality, 1890-1925. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1956. xiv, 432 p.
56-11284 F129.R7M238
Bibliography: p. [395L-404.
Written by the city historian, and supported by
the municipal Kate Gleason Fund in the Rochester
Public Library, these volumes represent a striking
civic achievement. Each volume deals with a dis-
tinct period in Rochester's history. Its initial
growth was the result of its location on the Genesee
River, which early supplied the water power for
the milling industry and served as an important
local trade route. Its proximity to Lake Ontario
encouraged commerce with Canada, and the open-
ing of the Erie Canal in 1825 so increased economic
activity that Rochester became within a few years
"the boom town in America." With the poten-
tialities of water power exploited by the mid-fifties,
the citizens of the "Flower City" manifested an
awakening civic and cultural pride. The emergence
of individual and institutional leadership led to a
period of growing civic achievement in the 70's
and 8o's, and culminated in "The Quest for Qual-
ity" from 1890 to 1925. The history of Rochester
in those 35 years is typical of many other communi-
ties, and the author says that this volume "may be
read as a case history of urban advance in the period
of American history which saw the most intense
campaigns for civic reform, the most conscientious
application of Christianity to social problems, the
most rapid consolidation of corporate enterprise,
and the weaving of old-American and immigrant
social and cultural traditions into the fabric which
still underlies contemporary American civilization."
4053.
NEW JERSEY
Cunningham, John T. This is New Jersey,
from High Point to Cape May. Maps by
William M. Canfield. New Brunswick, N. J., Rut-
gers University Press, 1953. 229 p.
53-11051 F134.C87
Most of the material in these pages appeared
originally in The Newar\ News, which has been
cited by the State of New Jersey and the Ameri-
can Association for State and Local History for
successive series of articles which have aroused
renewed interest, both in New Jersey's history and
in its contemporary scene. The 166 miles from
High Point to Cape May include mountains, cities,
farms, and beaches, and the author has appropriately
grouped the 21 county sketches that comprise this
book into sections on "The Hill Country," "The
City Belt," "The Garden Spot," and "The Jersey
Shore." There are brief lists of references at the
end of each of the sketches. There is a pictorial
map of the State and of each county by a News staff
artist, and the numerous fine photographs are well
reproduced.
PENNSYLVANIA
4054. Buck, Solon J., and Elizabeth Hawthorn
Buck. The planting of civilization in west-
ern Pennsylvania. Illustrated from the drawings of
Clarence McWilliams & from photographs, contem-
porary pictures, & maps. [Pittsburgh] University
of Pittsburgh Press, 1939. xiv, 565 p.
39-25307 F149.B83
This book is one of a series relating western Penn-
sylvania history, written under the direction of the
Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey sponsored
by the Buhl Foundation, the Historical Society of
Western Pennsylvania and the University of
Pittsburgh.
The authors, an outstanding archivist and his
wife, survey the history of western Pennsylvania in
all aspects from the coming of the setders to the
War of 1 8 12 — the economy, agriculture, and indus-
try, social and intellectual life, and religion and
politics. They analyze the natural environment,
Indian culture, the French and British colonial
systems, and the European background of the
setders in order to assess their impact on the civili-
zation that developed on this new frontier, and
laid the foundations for a vast industrial develop-
ment. The book is written for the general reader,
but "The Bibliographical Essay" (p. 496-537), in-
dicating the large body of material which the authors
have consulted, will particularly interest the scholar.
4055. Dunaway, Wayland F. A history of Penn-
sylvania. 2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1948. xviii, 724 p. (Prentice-Hall history series)
48-5945 F149.D85 1948
Dr. Dunaway, professor emeritus of American
49° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
history in the Pennsylvania State College, originally
published this college textbook in 1935, and in the
second edition added a chapter on events through
World War II and revised the chapters on the eco-
nomic and social history of the later period to
incorporate recent developments. The volume is in
two parts breaking at 1790; in each the earlier
chapters form a chronological sequence largely con-
cerned with political events, and the later ones deal
first with economic topics and then with social ones
such as religion and education. A chapter in Part I
on "Social Life and Customs" has no counterpart in
Part II, and a chapter in Part II on "Mineral In-
dustries" has no predecessor in Part I. The author's
method consists largely in the piling up of details,
which makes some of the economic chapters in
particular somewhat forbidding, but the volume
covers its subject in a conscientious if rather un-
imaginative fashion, and the selected bibliographies
at the end of each chapter afford a guide to the very
extensive literature of Pennsylvania history.
4056. Martin, Asa Earl, and Hiram Herr Shenk,
eds. Pennsylvania history told by contem-
poraries. New York, Macmillan, 1925. xxi,
621 p. 25-4695 F149.M37
241 extracts from carefully selected sources in
Pennsylvania history have been brought together
and arranged under 15 topical headings, "to illus-
trate Pennsylvania's relation to all the important na-
tional events. Thus the book is designed as a
supplementary text, to be used in connection with
any standard history of the United States in order
to coordinate the history of Pennsylvania with that
of the country as a whole."
4057. Stevens, Sylvester K., Ralph W. Cordier, and
Florence O. Benjamin. Exploring Pennsyl-
vania: its geography, history, and government.
Maps by Harold Faye. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1957. 624 p. 57~I473 F149.S76 1957
The Pennsylvania state historian collaborates with
two educators in this textbook for secondary schools,
which is so comprehensive and so attractively pro-
duced as to be considerably more suitable for the
general reader than most publications of its kind.
In addition to a geographical first chapter, a con-
siderable historical survey which covers all aspects of
life in Province and State, and descriptions of local,
State, and national government at work, there are
substantial treatments of conservation, community
development, and of "How Pennsylvanians Make a
Living." Besides other "teaching aids" which the
general reader will probably ignore, there are lists
of books and pamphlets, emphasizing State docu-
ments, and of audio-visual aids when available, at
the end of each chapter.
4058. Rice, Charles S., and Rollin C. Steinmetz.
The Amish year. New Brunswick, N. J.,
Rutgers University Press, 1956. 224 p. illus.
56-10989 BX8117.P4R45
This book contains an unusual body of photo-
graphs, for the Amish disapprove of "today's hasty
civilization" which includes cameras, radios, and
television sets along with vehicles run by gasoline
and motors run by electricity. It aims to tell how
the Amish of Lancaster County, Pennsylvania, really
live. The chapters are arranged by months, illus-
trating their characteristic activities from farm sales
in January to the "simple and unadorned" Christ-
mas celebration in December. The simplicity of
Amish clothes, the tradition of barn-raising, the cul-
tivation and curing of tobacco, the making of car-
riages, the "rare dignity" of their funerals and
weddings, and the occasional unchaperoned barn
dance and rodeo of the young are described in de-
tail, so to "bring them back in focus as people in-
stead of dolls on a gift-shop shelf or stylized figures
on wall-paper." The Amish are typical of various
groups in the United States who maintain a tradi-
tional way of life in the midst of 20th-century
change.
4059. American Philosophical Society, Philadel-
phia. Historic Philadelphia, from the
founding until the early nineteenth century; papers
dealing with its people and buildings. Philadelphia,
1953. 331 p. (Its Transactions, new ser., v. 43,
pt. 1) 53-754° Q11.P6, n. s., v. 43, pt. 1
"Part of old Philadelphia, a map showing his-
toric buildings & sites from the founding until
the early nineteenth century, compiled by Grant
Miles Simon," fold., in pocket.
In this volume the oldest learned and scientific
society in America displays the interest of its mem-
bers and that of other civic and patriotic organiza-
tions in the buildings of Philadelphia that have be-
come a part of our national heritage. Luther P.
Eisenhart, the editor of the Transactions of the
American Philosophical Society, with the assistance
of William E. Lingelbach, librarian of the Society,
and two members of the National Park Service
staff, chose the subjects and the authors of the
papers. Philadelphia was the most community-
minded of our colonial cities, embodying civic in-
stitutions in architectural forms, and it became the
early capital of the United States, culturally as well
as politically. This volume, copiously illustrated
with plans and halftones, describes the surviving
buildings and reconstructs the destroyed ones, either
prominent in themselves, like Independence Hall
or the First Bank of the United States or representa-
tive of the days when the Quaker City was the
natural center of national life.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 491
4060. Pennell, Elizabeth (Robins) Our Philadel-
phia; illustrated with one hundred & five
lithographs by Joseph Pennell. Philadelphia, Lip-
pincott, 1914. xiv, 552 p. 14-20572 F158.5.P372
Returning to their native Philadelphia after an
absence of a quarter of a century, Mr. and Mrs.
Pennell produced this superb volume made up of
Elizabeth's memories of her youth and the social
scene in which it was passed, and of Joseph's mas-
terly drawings with the lithographic crayon — "his
record of the old Philadelphia that has passed and
the new Philadelphia that is passing." Mrs. Pen-
nell found the new city altered in appearance, pop-
ulation, and culture, chaotic and distasteful, and
utterly "unlike my old Philadelphia, the beautiful,
peaceful town where roses bloomed in the sunny
back-yards and people lived in dignity behind the
plain red brick fronts of the long narrow streets."
4061. Baldwin, Leland D. Pittsburgh; the story
of a city. Illustrations by Ward Hunter.
Pittsburgh, University of Pittsburgh Press, 1937.
xiii, 387 p. 37-21620 F159.P6B2
This book is another in a series relating western
Pennsylvania history written under the direction
of the Western Pennsylvania Historical Survey
sponsored joindy by the Buhl Foundation, the His-
torical Society of Western Pennsylvania, and the
University of Pittsburgh.
"An impressionistic picture of the city's develop-
ment" which covers the whole span of Pittsburgh's
history but deals preponderantly with the more
colorful period prior to the Civil War. The indus-
trial and cultural development of the city since that
time is confined to three chapters at the end. By
i860 "The Gateway to the West" had become an
important manufacturing center and, with its 16
foundries and 25 rolling mills, was already spe-
cializing in iron and steel, but "the great age of the
monopolies was still in the future." The cultural,
social, and political accompaniments of this basic
development, resulting in a "city of quaint and
amusing contrasts," are concisely sketched.
MARYLAND
4062.
Beirne, Francis F. The amiable Balti-
moreans. New York, Dutton, 1951. 400 p.
(Society in America series)
51-7387 F189.B1B543
Bibliography: p. 380-382.
Distinguished for its port, monuments, medical
center, row houses, and its "Belles and Beauties,"
Baltimore is portrayed in its social life, personalties,
and institutions against a background of history
since it was chartered in 1729. The author's de-
scription of religious customs, the sports, the
Cotillion, the Assembly, and the Supper Club con-
tribute to build up a picture of Baltimore high
society, which is "informal" and "at the same time
both subtle and complex." Other chapters deal
with Baltimore's Germans, Jews, and Negroes, and
one of "Gastronomical Reflections" describes the
flourishing and the latter-day decline of the famous
Maryland cuisine.
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
4063. Brown, George Rothwell. Washington, a
not too serious history. Baltimore, Norman
Pub. Co., 1930. 481 p. 31-3698 F194.B87
Bibliography: p. [4461-450.
A well-known newspaper columnist, and writer
on political, labor, economic, and governmental
questions, has written an entertaining history of
Washington, which reveals more of its social life
than can be derived from any other single volume.
He gives much attention to the rise and fall of news-
papers, to racetracks, lotteries, and the slave trade,
to the rending effects of the Peggy Eaton affair,
and to the sociable gathering places which have since
vanished from Pennsylvania Avenue. The leisured
way of life which prevailed in central Washington
before 19 17, and which is here described with
nostalgic charm, has vanished beyond recall.
4064. Bryan, Wilhelmus Bogart. A history of the
National Capital from its foundation through
the period of the adoption of the organic act. New
York, Macmillan, 1914-16. 2 v.
14-7093 F194.B9
Contents. — 1. 1790-1814. — 2. 1815-1878.
Based mainly on original sources, this is a detailed
history of Washington from the selection of the site,
in 1790-91, to the adoption, in 1878, of the commis-
sion form of government which has been in opera-
tion ever since. Although old-fashioned in
approach, and often desultory in exposition, it is
honest, careful, and thorough, and still remains the
principal authority for Washington history during
the period which it embraces.
4065. Kiplinger, Willard M. Washington is like
that. [6th ed.] New York, Harper, 1942.
522 p. 51-4631 F196.K5 1942a
Bibliography: p. 493-499.
A staff of newsgatherers, magazine writers, and
authors of books helped the author, who as a
journalist had been cognizant of the Washington
scene since 1916, to write a handbook on the "basic
phases of Washington in the transition from war to
peace and in the first stages of war." Since that
492 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
time the men and details have changed, but the
"machine as a whole runs on." It describes the
workings of the Federal Government, and the func-
tioning of the city which is host to the Nation and at
the same time has "the earmarks of the average
municipality of its size." It spells out the advan-
tages and disadvantages of government service and
living in Washington. Chapters on minority groups,
the press, politics and lobbying, women's influence,
and the "society swirl" with a yardstick for the social
climbers, round out a comprehensive guide to the
Nation's capital. While much of its information is
now obsolete, no more comprehensive and realistic
view has appeared since.
E. The South: General
4066. Cash, Wilbur J. The mind of the South.
New York, Knopf, 1941. vii-xi, 429, xv p.
41-1848 F209.C3
The facts of history are analyzed to show that
they fail to support the popular conception of
civilization in the Old South as being divided be-
tween a ruling class of aristocracy and a "vague race"
of poor whites. The author points to the emergence
from frontier conditions of a "simple rustic figure,"
of intense individualism, romanticism, and puritan-
ism, as the basic Southerner or "man at the center."
The development of Southern society from the ante-
bellum period to the late 1930's, and the psychologi-
cal adjustments of Southerners to the economic,
political, and social changes during those years, are
traced to demonstrate that there is in the region as a
whole "a complex of established relationships and
habits of thought, sentiment, prejudices, standards
and values, and association of ideas, which, if it is
not common strictly to every group of white people
in the South, is still common ... to all but rela-
tively negligible ones." A paperback reprint ap-
peared in 1955 (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday.
444 p. Doubleday anchor book, A27) .
4067. Cotterill, Robert S. The Old South; the
geographic, economic, social, political, and
cultural expansion, institutions, and nationalism of
the ante-bellum South. 2d ed., rev. Glendale,
Calif., Arthur H. Clark, 1939. 354 p.
39-12977 F213.C72 1939
Bibliography: p. [333H44-
An attempt to summarize the work of the genera-
tion of writers who followed Ulrich B. Phillips
(q. v.) and produce a pioneer synthesis of Southern
history, with the development of Southern national-
ism providing as much of a central theme as the
story affords. Before 1820 the South expanded rap-
idly, especially during the Great Migration of
1815-19, into the cotton lands of Alabama and
Mississippi, but it remained a heterogeneous mass,
divided by a multitude of conflicting interests.
Southern nationalism, based on sentiment rather
than interest, was suddenly crystallized by the Mis-
souri controversy of 1820, after which Southerners
felt themselves to be a separate people, and all other
Americans to be aliens. The basic cause of secession
"was a love for the South so intense that it may be
called patriotism"; the Civil War was lost through
State rights, which kept the Confederate armies
undermanned and undersupplied, but the Southern
people were further unified and their spirit of
nationalism intensified. The bibliography (p.
[333J-344) is limited to the titles which the author
has found most useful in teaching the subject.
4068. Couch, William T., ed. Culture in the
South. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1934. xiv, 711 p.
34-1154 F215.C84
The director of the University of North Carolina
Press (1932-45) brought together in this sympo-
sium the varying viewpoints of 31 contributors,
who, as observers or participants, had long been
familiar with the history of Southern culture
broadly conceived, the political patterns, agrarian
and industrial problems, and social conditions.
This is no nostalgic retrospect of plantation aris-
tocracy, slavery, and the Confederacy, but a "pic-
ture of the more important aspects of life in the
present South and their historic background,"
which takes soundings as "the broad stream of
southern life, muddy and turbulent and torrential
at times and places, goes on its way." The contrib-
utors include, in addition to the editor, Benjamin
A. Botkin, Donald Davidson, Jay B. Hubbell,
George Fort Milton, Broadus Mitchell, Herman
Clarence Nixon, Edd Winfield Parks, Josephine
Pinckney, Charles W. Ramsdell, Rupert B. Vance,
and John Donald Wade.
4069. Dodd, William E. The Old South; strug-
gles for democracy. New York, Macmillan,
1937. 312 p. 37-31240 F212.D6
Only one of the projected four-volume history of
the Old South by the distinguished historian and
local history: regions, states, and cities / 493
educator, William E. Dodd (1869-1940), was com-
pleted. The leading subjects of this volume are the
"free homesteads, freedom of religion, self govern-
ment and free trade" that attracted Europeans to
Virginia, Maryland, and the Carolinas in the 17th
century, and the struggles to maintain those free-
doms, particularly against the agents of "Stuart
economic nationalism," that laid the foundations of
democratic government in the Old South.
4070. Eaton, Clement. A history of the Old South.
New York, Macmillan, 1949. 636 p.
49-50281 F213.E2
Bibliography: p. 595-619.
A general history of the section down to i860,
which selects its details so as to focus attention on
the way of life of the people, and emphasizes "those
characteristics which are peculiarly 'Southern' and
the historic processes which produce them." Its
integrating theme is "the emergence of a regional
culture, created by all classes of Southern society
rather than by an elite, aristocratic group." The
author's realistic outlook, in which sympathy and
criticism are nicely balanced, is particularly in evi-
dence in the three chapters (XIX-XXI) which sur-
vey Southern society during the ante-bellum decade:
"The Social Pyramid, in 1850-60," "Molding the
Southern Mind," and "The Chrysalis Stage of
Southern Culture." The "citations" at the end of
each chapter include articles in periodicals, which do
not appear in the bibliography.
4071. Hesseltine, William B. The South in Amer-
ican history. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1943. xiv, 691 p. (Prentice-Hall history series,
edited by Carl Wittke) 43-4910 F209.H48 1943
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
This revision of the author's A History of the
South (1936) is a college textbook which extends
chronologically from the founding of Jamestown
to the domestic and foreign problems of the late
1930's. It presents the main current of political
developments, and other aspects of history in strict
subordination to this, in a detached, impartial, and
unemotional if also somewhat colorless, manner.
Its thesis, according to the author, "is that the South
is American: its problems have been the nation's,"
and its "history is a vital part of the American story."
Therefore, the book's "viewpoint is national rather
than Southern, and it makes no attempt to meet
the oft-uttered plea for 'the truth of history from the
Southern standpoint.' "
4072. A History of the South. Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1947-53.
6v.
Major George Washington Littlefield, C. S. A.
(1842-1920), an "empire-building cattleman" and
banker of Austin, Texas, who had a deep interest
in the welfare of the South, and was convinced that
no available histories adequately portrayed the
Confederacy, established the Littlefield Fund for
Southern History at the University of Texas in 1914.
Preparations for writing a ten-volume history of the
South took shape in 1937. Meanwhile a similar
project had been conceived at Louisiana State Uni-
versity, and the planning groups united to sponsor
joindy A History of the South in ten volumes, to
be edited by Wendell Holmes Stephenson and
E. Merton Coulter. Four volumes are still unpub-
lished, but as presendy projected they are: Vol. 2,
The Southern Colonies in the Eighteenth Century,
1689-1J63, by Clarence Ver Steeg; Vol. 3, The
Revolution in the South, 1763-1789, by John Rich-
ard Alden; Vol. 4, The South in the New Nation,
1789-1819, by Thomas P. Abernethy; and Vol. 10,
The Present South, 1913-1946, by George Tindall.
4073. (Vol. 1) Craven, Wesley Frank. The
Southern colonies in the seventeenth century,
1607-1689. 1949. xv, 451 p. 49-3595 F212.C7
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 417-433.
The influence of England on the economic and
political development of Virginia, Maryland, and
Carolina is emphasized as the author traces the be-
ginnings of the "peculiar qualities" which charac-
terize Southern society.
4074. (Vol. 5) Sydnor, Charles S. The develop-
ment of Southern sectionalism, 181 9-1848.
1948. 400 p. 48-7627 F213.S92
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 346-381.
The course of events that changed the South "from
a position of great power in national affairs to the
position of a conscious minority" is traced here.
4075. (Vol. 6) Craven, Avery O. The growth
of Southern nationalism, 1848-1861. 1953.
433 P-. . . . 53-"470 F213.C75
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 402-419.
The story of the breach that developed between
the North and the South "as seen through the evolu-
tion of Southern attitudes towards national events."
It is "an effort to explain how the American states
drifted into civil war through the breakdown of the
democratic process in government."
4076. (Vol. 7) Coulter, Ellis Merton. The Con-
federate States of America, 1861-1865.
1950. 644 p. 50-6319 E487.C83
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 569-612.
Unlike most histories of this period, this volume
does not center attention on the campaigns of the
Civil War, but on secession and the problems faced
494 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
by the Confederacy in maintaining a government
and supplying an army, on the reactions of Southern
society to the increasing stress of war, and on the
internal dissensions of the Confederacy and its at-
tempts to arrive at a negotiated peace.
4077. (Vol.8) Coulter, Ellis Merton. The South
during reconstruction, 1865-1877. 1947.
xii, 426 p. 48-5161 F216.C6
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 392-407.
This, the first volume of the series to be published,
pictures the South as it was at the end of the Civil
War with its economy disrupted and its government
carried on by an army of occupation. The author
describes "the ordinary activities of the people, as
they sowed and reaped, went to church, visited their
neighbors, sang their songs, and sought in a
thousand ways to amuse themselves. The point of
view ... is the South during Reconstruction — not
Reconstruction in the South." Many direct quota-
tions have been used to describe Southern reactions
and desires during the period. The withdrawal of
Federal troops in 1877 left the South, "within
reasonable limits," to reconstruct itself.
4078. (Vol. 9) Woodward, Comer Vann. Ori-
gins of the new South, 1877-19 13. 1951.
542 p. 51-14582 F215.W85
"Critical essay on authorities": p. 482-515.
Against a background of the social conditions
that prevailed in the South after reconstruction, the
author describes the South's progress on the road
back to the political prestige which it had enjoyed
during the ante bellum days.
4079. Odum, Howard W. Southern regions of the
United States. Chapel Hill, University of
North Carolina Press, 1936. 664 p. illus. (maps)
tables, diagrs. 36-10075 F215.O28
Bibliography and source materials: p. 605-620.
As part of a general regional survey under the
sponsorship of the Southern Regional Committee
of the Social Research Council, Dr. Odum's study
is limited "primarily to the eleven Southeastern
States corresponding more nearly to the 'Old South,'
beginning with Virginia and comprising the five
pairs of states: North and South Carolina, Ken-
tucky and Tennessee, Georgia and Florida, Ala-
bama and Mississippi, Louisiana and Arkansas."
It analyzes the natural resources, the technological
development, the agricultural and industrial econ-
omy, and the institutions and folkways of these
regions in terms of accomplishments and potentiali-
ties, and, graphically illustrating comparisons with
other regions, indicates the adjustments necessary
for "more effective reintegration of the southern
regions into the national picture and thereby toward
a larger regional contribution to national culture
and unity." Eleven years later, in his The Way of
the South; Toward the Regional Balance of America
(New York, Macmillan, 1947. 350 p.), Dr. Odum
has "tried to continue the spirit, methods, and pur-
poses of the Southern Regional Study." The South,
he is convinced, "affords the best testing ground for
regional planning in the United States," since "re-
gional imbalance is more marked" there than else-
where. "The South lacks balance between agricul-
ture and industry, as well as in agriculture . . .
Particularly, the South is out of balance in its ratio
of Negro to white and in its power to give equal
opportunity to both."
4080. Osterweis, Rollin G. Romanticism and
nationalism in the Old South. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1949. 275 p. (Yale histori-
cal publications. Miscellany, 49)
49-7620 F213.O8
"Bibliographical note": p. [2405-260.
The "cult of chivalry" was a major element in the
romanticism which characterized the Southern
States and contributed to differentiate them from
the other regions of the United States. The author
traces the origin, nature, accompaniments and sig-
nificance of that cult as it was manifested in such
centers as Richmond, Charleston, New Orleans, and
the Southwest between the War of 1812 and 1861.
"It provided the very essence" of Southern national-
ism, which brought on the Civil War, and surviving
slavery and the plantation system is today "the sur-
viving atavism of antebellum civilization."
4081. Owsley, Frank Lawrence. Plain folk of the
Old South. [Baton Rouge] Louisiana
State University Press, 1949. xxi, 235 p. (The
Walter Lynwood Fleming lectures in Southern his-
tory, Louisiana State University)
49-11743 F213.O94
Church and county records, unpublished census
reports and population schedules, the older town
and county histories, and the biographies, autobi-
ographies, and recollections of locally prominent
citizens have been analyzed to recreate this picture
of the plain country folk of the South who were
neither rich planters nor poor whites. The group
includes the small slave-holding farmers, the non-
slaveholders who owned land which they cultivated,
the herdsmen on the frontier, pine barrens, and
mountains, and the tenant families whose agricul-
tural production indicated thrift, energy, and self-
respect. In addition to maps of six precincts in the
Alabama black belt, the book contains 91 tables
which illustrate the author's "sampling method" in
arriving at his conclusion that these "Southern folk"
were a closely knit people whose balanced economy
local history: regions, states, and cities / 495
helped to sustain the South during the Civil War
and reconstruction, and who contributed leadership
in local politics, and a large number of individuals
to the professions. They were a "vital element of
the social and economic structure of the Old South."
4082. Simkins, Francis Buder. A history of the
South. [2d ed., rev., enl.] New York,
Knopf, 1953. xiii, 655, xxiii p.
52-8516 F209.S5 1953
Bibliography: p. 617-655.
The first edition of this book was published in
1947 under the title: The South Old and New; a
History, 1820-1947; the new edition is consider-
ably expanded, but remains, like the first, a frank
presentation of the Southern conservative's outlook
on the past. It contains five new chapters (II-VI)
covering the colonial period and the Revolution,
which depart from the view put forward in the
original edition that the region did not acquire its
true sectional character until about 1820, when the
Negro question first appeared as a political issue.
More than half of the book deals with the period
relatively neglected in general treatments — the New
South from the Civil War to 1952. Although the
South has made remarkable strides since World
War II, the author points out that it has still not
caught up with industrial and economic advances in
the Nation as a whole, and retains many characteris-
tics from the past which make it a region apart.
4083. Thorp, Willard, ed. A Southern reader.
New York, Knopf, 1955. 760 p. illus.
53-9473. F209.T48
An upstate New Yorker, who since childhood has
found the South to be "the most exotic and exciting
region in America," has brought together selections
from the writings of more than a hundred Southern-
ers or visitors to the South and arranged them in
sections concerned with the land, the rivers, the
people, agriculture, education, sports and pastimes,
military achievements, the Negro, violence, politics,
religion, cities and towns, business and industry, and
the arts. There is an essay at the beginning of each
section and a commentary upon the author or his
work at the head of each extract. The Preface con-
cludes with a table of cross-references between sec-
tions (p. ix-x). An index of the authors drawn
upon, with the publications from which their selec-
tions have been taken, appears at the end.
4084. Vance, Rupert B. Human geography of
the South; a study in regional resources and
human adequacy. 2d ed. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press, 1935. xviii, 596 p. (The
University of North Carolina social study series)
Agr36-577 HC107.A13V3 1935
Bibliography: p. 512-579.
"This volume attempts to give a synthetic treat-
ment of the interaction of men and nature in the
American South." It deals with the physical and
cultural backgrounds of the region; with soils,
forests, livestock, cotton and other staple crops, and
industry; with the highland, delta, and piedmont
sections as special cases; and with the influence of
climate and diet on health, energy, and human
adequacy. The analysis of statistical indexes of
wealth, education, cultural achievement, health, law,
and order gives the Southern states the lowest rank-
ings in die Nation. The author pointed to regional
planning as the means of reconstructing the South
and bringing it up to the national level. In 1949
Dr. Vance and others connected with the Division
of Research Interpretation of the Institute for Re-
search in Social Science of the University of North
Carolina prepared, for the Committee on Southern
Regional Studies and Education of the American
Council on Education, a volume for the use of
secondary schools: Exploring the South (Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1949.
404 p.) which reviews the natural and industrial
resources of the South, in a much simpler manner,
and recommends the development of resources
through planning and cooperation on the part of
communities large and small.
F. The South Atlantic States: Local
VIRGINIA
4085. Gottmann, Jean. Virginia at mid-century.
New York, Holt, 1955. 584 p.
55-8141 F231.2.G6
Bibliographical footnotes. "Bibliographical sug-
gestions and acknowledgments": p. 562-570.
A French geographer, attached to the Institute
for Advanced Study at Princeton, began 18 months
of fieldwork in July 1953, and visited every county
and city in the State. The result is this volume,
copiously illustrated with photographs, maps, and
graphs, "which attempts to describe the Common-
wealth of Virginia as it is today and to examine
496 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
objectively its resources, its problems, and its po-
tentialities." The first part deals with demography,
historical development, and regional divisions.
The second analyzes the use of forests, farmland,
and "the underground," manufacturing, and the
phenomena of location. The third part presents
the problems of metropolitan growth and its effects
in migrations, highways, and schools in a tone of
qualified optimism. There is a final assessment of
"the personality of Virginia." The whole consti-
tutes the most systematic, thorough-going, and up-to-
date survey of any state of the Union.
4086. Kocher, Alfred Lawrence, and Howard
Dearstyne. Shadows in silver; a record of
Virginia, 1850-1900, in contemporary photographs
taken by George and Huestis Cook, with additions
from the Cook collection. New York, Scribner,
1954. xxiv, 264 p. 54-59J7 F231.K75
The major part of the photographs used here were
made in Virginia between 1865 and 1900 by George
S. Cook, "the dean of Virginia cameramen," and
his younger son Huestis, but some are by other
Virginia photographers whose plates were pur-
chased by the Cooks. The compilers have grouped
the photographs to illustrate the towns, taverns, and
the country store; the plantation and countryside;
and the social life of the people of Virginia during
the last half of the 19th century. Each group of
photographs is provided with an introductory essay,
and each photograph is accompanied by an identi-
fying caption. The whole provides a remarkable
graphic record of Virginia in an age of transition
and readjustment.
4087. Rothery, Agnes Edwards. Virginia, the
new dominion, illustrated by E. H. Suydam.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. xiii, 368 p.
40-27455 F231.R85
A personal and impressionistic presentation,
which combines a geographical with a topical ap-
proach and passes lightly from past to present, find-
ing much to approve in each. This smoothly writ-
ten volume maintains a quiet dignity of tone and
imparts a quantity of various information in pain-
less manner. "The lordly quality of independence"
developed by the old Virginia planter has been in-
herited by the modern community — "there is no
place in the United States where the people are more
free from timorousness and arbitrary restrictions."
The attractiveness of the volume is enhanced by Mr.
Suydam's graceful drawings, although some should
have been reproduced on a larger scale than they
are here.
4088. Wertenbaker, Thomas J. Norfolk; historic
southern port. Durham, N. C, Duke Uni-
versity Press, 1931. 378 p. (Duke University pub-
lications) 31-31634 F234.N8W4
The well-known Princeton professor of history
wrote this volume under contract with the city gov-
ernment of Norfolk. Emphasis is placed on the
first two centuries of Norfolk's history, with the
period from 1880 to 1930 treated in oudine, "more
as a sequel to the main body of the story, than as
an integral part of the history itself." Norfolk's
failure to develop into a port of the first importance
is ascribed to "the short-sighted policy of the Vir-
ginia legislature" after 1835, which denied her ade-
quate railway connections.
WEST VIRGINIA
4089. Ambler, Charles Henry. West Virginia, the
mountain state. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1940. xviii, 660 p. (Prentice-Hall books on his-
tory, edited by C.Wittke) 40-5238 F241.A523
A History of West Virginia, published in 1933, is
here rewritten to include supplementary data and
new chapters on the Revolutionary and Civil War
periods. Of its two parts, Part I deals with topog-
raphy, early settlements, institutional beginnings,
warfare, social conditions, education, and politics in
western Virginia down to i860. The inhabitants of
this area disapproved of Virginia's secession from
the Union, and it was admitted as a separate State in
1862. West Virginia's political beginnings and in-
dustrial, cultural, and economic development to 1940
are described in Part II. A "Roster of West
Virginia State Elective Officers and her Senators and
Representatives in Congress," and a list of "West
Virginia Counties" appear in the appendixes. The
author was a professor of history at West Virginia
University from 191710 1947.
NORTH CAROLINA
4090. Lefler, Hugh Talmage, and Albert Ray New-
some. North Carolina; the history of a
southern State. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1954. xii, 676 p.
54-7904 F254.L39
Bibliography: p. [6ri]-639.
"This volume was designed to meet the require-
ments of the general reader who desires a compre-
hensive view of the state's history within reasonable
compass," and "to serve as a text for college courses
in North Carolina history." To fulfill that objec-
tive the authors have presented a narrative that deals
with developments and leaders in the fields of agri-
culture, industry, transportation, trade, education,
religion, literature, and social life, as well as with
local history: regions, states, and cities / 497
military and political history. The last six chapters
deal with progress during the 20th century, and the
impact of outside forces such as two world wars, the
depression of 1929, and the policies of the New Deal
on the State's development. Lists of the "Chief
Executives of North Carolina," "North Carolina
Counties," and "Significant Dates," appear in the
appendixes. Professor Newsome died in 1951 leav-
ing approximately half of the manuscript completed.
The task was finished by Dr. Lefler, who, in 1956,
published the third edition of his North Carolina
History Told by Contemporaries (Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press. 502 p.), a col-
lection of contemporary accounts illustrating the
political, social, and economic development of North
Carolina from its colonial beginnings, to be used as
a supplementary text for either high school or college
courses.
SOUTH CAROLINA
4091. Taylor, Rosser H. Ante-bellum South Car-
olina: a social and cultural history. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1942.
201 p. (The James Sprunt studies in history and
political science, v. 25, no. 2)
42-373 1 1 F25 1.J28, v. 25, no. 2
Bibliography: p. [i87]-i98.
In this study subsidized by the Southern Regional
Committee of the Social Science Research Council,
the author has used manuscript diaries, letters, and
other records of South Carolinians in both private
and public libraries, as well as printed sources, to
reconstruct a picture of society as it appeared in the
decades preceding the Civil War. There are sub-
stantial chapters on the life of women, medical
practice, education, and religious life; but the au-
thor's main emphasis is upon the determination of
the majority to resist social change, and to maintain
special safeguards for a social system based upon
Negro slavery.
4092. Wallace, David Duncan. South Carolina, a
short history, 1520-1948. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1951. 753 p.
51-13847 F269.W26
Bibliography: p. [715] -721.
The author, of Wofford College at Spartansburg,
S. C, died after completing this reduction of his
three-volume History of South Carolina, published
by the American Historical Company in 1934, and
the work of seeing it through the press was com-
pleted by his son. Readers are referred to the
larger work for citations of sources. Political de-
velopments receive the greatest space, but from time
to time separate chapters are allotted to economic,
431240—60 33
social, intellectual, legal, and ecclesiastical affairs.
The writer strove with much success to be "an im-
partial friend of the truth": "From 1832 to i860
South Carolina was in effect not so much a part
of the country as a dissatisfied ally, for the last
thirteen years of the period only awaiting a favor-
able opportunity to dissolve the alliance." Less than
a quarter of the book (p. 556-700) is devoted to the
period since 1865. Among the appendixes are a
list of the governors since 1669, population tables,
by counties since 1790, and a list of existing counties
with the dates of their creation.
4093. Molloy, Robert. Charleston, a gracious
heritage; illus. by E. H. Suydam. New
York, Appleton-Century, 1947. xiii, 311 p. plates.
(Century city series) 47-11944 F279.C4M6
Bibliography: p. 293-297.
With "its reputation for aristocratic appearances,
punctilious manners, and an atmosphere of unfor-
gettable individuality," and a history that goes back
to the 1670's, the charm of Charleston as the center
of culture and social life in South Carolina is evoked
in this description of its old streets and homes,
churches and historic sites, and the world-famous
gardens of its environs. The author describes the
leisurely life, the affability, and the characteristic
speech of a people who have withstood wars, fires,
and hurricanes to maintain, in the face of modernity,
the distinction and personality that are Charleston.
The effectiveness of the text is enhanced by the
"rich and perceptive drawings" of the late Edward
H. Suydam, who died seven years before the book
appeared; the Century city series includes this and
13 other volumes which he illustrated.
GEORGIA
4094. Coulter, Ellis Merton. Georgia, a short
history. Rev. and enl. ed. of A Short His-
tory of Georgia. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1947. 510 p.
47-2917 F286.C78 1947
"Select bibliography": p. [4561-474.
A southerner by birth, the author has been a
member of the history faculty of the University of
Georgia since 1919 and has written many contribu-
tions to Southern history. The first edition of this
book appeared in 1933 to supply the need for a short
history of the State. To the revised edition have
been added "a great many short bits of informa-
tion, and here and there longer passages, in addition
to remaking the last chapter entirely, to bring the
narrative up to the present." The volume covers
49§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the whole span of Georgia's history from its founda-
tion as an "experiment in philanthropy" to the revi-
sion of the State constitution in 1945, but only a
quarter of it is devoted to the years since 1865.
4095. Meadows, John C. Modern Georgia. Rev.
Athens, University of Georgia Press, 1954.
352 p. _ 55-15747 F291.M4 1954
"Supplementary readings": p. 347.
First published in 1946 following a request from
the chancellor of the University of Georgia that "a
volume be prepared describing the physical and
human resources of the state," this book was also
revised in 1948 and 1951. It includes much infor-
mation about the composition of the population,
the public schools and other educational facilities,
the health and public welfare services, and the in-
dustries and government of the State. Some com-
parable data for the Southeast and for the United
States have been given to illustrate Georgia's place
in the region and in the Nation as a whole. The
author, a professor of sociology at the University
of Georgia, has written especially for college stu-
dents, but believes that the book will interest the
general reader who wants to know more about the
problems of the State.
FLORIDA
4096. Hanna, Kathryn T. (Abbey) Florida, land
of change. [2d ed., rev. and enl.] Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1948.
455 p. 48"9796 F311.H3 1948
Bibliography: p. 410-435.
A colony first of Spain, of Britain from 1763 to
1784, and then of Spain again, Florida played an
important part in the early "international maneuver-
ings" of the United States. The author emphasizes
the influences of foreign domination that have per-
sisted in the history of Florida. The last quarter of
the book deals with the period since 1865 and in-
cludes a chapter on the Northern "developers" who
gave Florida its modern character: Hamilton Dis-
ston of Philadelphia, Henry B. Plant, and Henry M.
Flagler of Cleveland. The first edition appeared in
194 1 ; this revision contains additional information
on the development of the State in the 20th century.
G. The Old Southwest: General
4097. Clark, Thomas D. The rampaging frontier;
manners and humors of pioneer days in the
South and the Middle West. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1939. 350 p. 39-101 15 E161.C57
Bibliography: p. [341 H50.
The author, a native of Mississippi, has been head
of the history department of the University of Ken-
tucky since 1945. He has departed from conven-
tional methodology and selected humorous stories to
present a "well-rounded picture of the life of the
common man," phrased, in part, in the vernacular
of the backwoods frontier. The principal source
for his stories is the general sporting magazine, the
Spirit of the Times, edited by William T. Porter
from 1835 until his death in 1858. The book covers
the period from 1775 to 1850 and is confined gen-
erally to the region "west of the Allegheny Moun-
tains, and within the boundaries of Tennessee and
south of the Yankee line in Ohio, Indiana, and
Illinois ... as far west as the ends of Missouri and
Arkansas." It is "highly flavored by the Kentucky
influence, but so was frontier society."
4098. Dick, Everett N. The Dixie frontier, a so-
cial history of the Southern frontier from the
first transmontane beginnings to the Civil War.
New York, Knopf, 1948. xix, 374, xxv p.
48-5379 F396.D5
Bibliography: p. 341-374.
Not merely the Old Southwest and its trans-
Mississippi extensions in Arkansas and Missouri,
but also the southern two-fifths of Ohio, Indiana,
and Illinois were setded by a great migration of
the Southern people which began flowing into Ken-
tucky about 1775, and did not end until the Civil
War. In this whole vast area they created an essen-
tially unitary, distinctively Southern frontier culture,
which in many places persisted until and even after
the Civil War. This culture Professor Dick of
Union College, Lincoln, Neb., describes in a color-
ful series of topical chapters, without attempting to
discriminate regional variations or temporal suc-
cessions. They include, among the more usual
subjects, "The Slave as Pioneer," "Going to Mar-
ket," "Good Times," "Sports," "The Frontier
Town," "Professional Amusement," "The Great
Revival," "Frontier Justice," "Frontier Manufac-
tures," "The Frontier Woman," "Border Food,"
"Pioneer Dress," and "Frontier Speech." Two final
chapters on "Frontier Characteristics" attempt to
local history: regions, states, and cities /
strike no balance between the prevailing qualities
of self-reliance, versatility, native intelligence, and
hospitality, on the one hand, and the evidences of
499
ferocity, shiftlessness, chicanery, and contempt for
education which were inextricably mingled with
them.
H. The Old Southwest: Local
ALABAMA
4099. Moore, Albert Burton. History of Alabama.
University, Ala., University Supply Store,
J934- . 834 p. 36-5627 F326.M823
Bibliographies at end of most of the chapters.
A topical history of Alabama, by a professor of
history at the University of Alabama since 1923, this
volume is a revision of the author's three-volume
History of Alabama and Its People published in
1927. After a brief review of the local Indians and
of the colonial regimes, the detailed narrative begins
with "The Coming of American Pioneers" in the
first decade of the 19th century, and continues to the
election of 1934. The point of view is honesdy and
vigorously "Dixiecrat." A final chapter sum-
marizes 20th-century trends in political reform, local
government, child welfare, education, prison reform,
public health, and the conservation of natural
resources.
LOUISIANA
4100.
Louisiana. Legislative Council. Louisiana;
its history, people, government and economy.
Baton Rouge, 1955. 285 p. {Its Research study
no;, 7) . 56-62531 JK4771.A32, no. 7
"This book presents information concerning the
history, the people, the government, and the
economy of Louisiana in brief, narrative form sup-
plemented by valuable statistical data, thus making
available in one place the highlights of the develop-
ment of Louisiana." Originating in an idea of
Senator Robert A. Ainsworth, chairman of the Leg-
islative Council, and compiled by the Council staff
under the direction of Emmett Asseff, it incor-
porates information provided by twelve departments
of the Louisiana Government. Among the subjects
treated by the 23 chapters are "Elections," "Louisi-
ana Local Government," "Fairs and Festivals,"
"Highways," and "State Revenues and Expendi-
tures." The introduction notes seven specific State
trends by comparing figures of 1939 with those of
IQ53-
4101. Tinker, Edward Larocque. Creole city: its
past and its people. New York, Longmans,
Green, 1953. 359 p. iUus.
53-5615 F379.N5T53
Born in New York City, the author, after his
marriage to Frances McKee of New Orleans in 1916,
became interested in his wife's hometown, took up
writing as a career, and has become an outstanding
collector and authority on the French period and
the French language in Louisiana and old New Or-
leans. Mr. Tinker has twice received the French
Academy's Gold Medal for his writings in this field.
In this book materials that have appeared in various
periodicals are brought together to illustrate the
amalgamation of the native population and the
American influx which took place after 1803 and
"the way in which each has modified the thoughts
and habits of the other" so as to develop a new
manner of life and to settle down into "a perfect
union." With infectious enthusiasm for his sub-
ject, the author describes the picturesque charac-
ters of the port city— the French, the Cajuns, the
free men and women of color — the succulence of
Creole dishes, and the gaiety of the Mardi Gras
in an informal history of "the City that care forgot."
ARKANSAS
4102. Fletcher, John Gould. Arkansas. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1947. 421 p. 47-30331 F411.F5
"Acknowledgement": p. 403-405.
In 1936 the author, a Pulitzer prize winning poet,
was commissioned by the leading newspaper of
Litde Rock to write The Epic of Arkansas in honor
of the centenary of his native State. With a pas-
sionate interest in the cultural development of his
people, he wrote this book about Arkansas ten years
later. In it he combines an anecdotal history with
a description of the two distinct types of popula-
tion, one found in the Ozark Mountain region of
the northwestern half of the State, and the other
in the lowlands of the southeastern half. He de-
scribes the economic worlds of those types, moun-
taineers and sharecroppers, and analyzes the
combination of Southern and frontier characteristics
which has produced the "Arkansawyer." He looks
askance at the development of industry in the State
by outside interests, and at the influence of Northern
attitudes on racial relationships, and insists that any
human progress in Arkansas must come from
within.
500 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
TENNESSEE
4103. Abernethy, Thomas Perkins. From frontier
to plantation in Tennessee; a study in fron-
tier democracy. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1932. 392 p. 32-12393 F436.A17
Bibliography: p. [365 H76.
Believing that the study of a single state with
emphasis on its development as a community should
throw new light on the growth of American de-
mocracy, the author selected Tennessee which is
unique as the first state to undergo the territorial
status, and as the site of the earliest "organized
transmontane setdements." He traces the State's
growth from the Wautauga setdement in 1768 to
the Civil War and throws new light on the con-
flict between the interests of land speculators and
the welfare of the people. "The first offspring of
the West was not democracy but arrant opportun-
ism." However, the popular interest finally tri-
umphed under the leadership of such men as
William Carroll, Governor from 1821-35, and
Andrew Johnson, Governor from 1853-57, wno
"never erred from his purpose of improving the
condition of the masses, politically, economically,
and intellectually," and was, in fact, "the only true
and outstanding democrat produced by the Old
South."
4104. Govan, Gilbert E., and James W. Livingood.
The Chattanooga country, 1 540-1 951: from
tomahawks to TV A. New York, Dutton, 1952.
509 p. 52_53°7 F444.C4G6
Bibliography: p. [469J-488.
From its domination by the Cherokee Indians,
which lasted until 1838, to the development of its
natural resources by the Tennessee Valley Authority,
the economic and social life of the Chattanooga
region is analyzed "in the light of local, state and
national events ... to see how they were influenced
by or contributed to the greater stream of history."
The "Chattanooga country" is taken to include
much of northern Georgia and Alabama and of
western North Carolina as well as of southeastern
Tennessee, and this work therefore escapes the
cramping effects which artificial boundaries often
exert upon local histories. Economic and social
developments are given considerably more attention
than political ones.
4105. Capers, Gerald M., Jr. The biography of a
river town; Memphis: its heroic age. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1939.
292 p. 39-27481 F444.M5C3
"Bibliographical statement": p. [2695-279.
This "comprehensive outline of the history of
Memphis before 1900" was submitted to Yale Uni-
versity in 1936 as a doctoral dissertadon. The
author chose his subject because of his conviction
that cities have been neglected as approaches to the
study of regions, and "are often more representadve
of fundamental economic interests than artificial
political divisions like the state." Connected with
the upper valley by the Mississippi River trade, and
with the South by the local agriculture, Memphis
was "born in 18 19 of the westward movement and
of cotton" and had its boom years in the 1840's and
50's. "Figuratively and literally, the South met the
West in Memphis." Memphis neglected public
sanitation and so lost its relative position among
American cities through the terrible yellow fever
epidemics of the 1870's.
KENTUCKY
4106. Clark, Thomas D. A history of Kentucky.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1937. xv, 702 p.
(Prentice-Hall history series, C. Wittke, editor)
37-16054 F451.C63
Bibliography: p. 625-666.
"Kentucky has been viewed as an important
factor in the settlement of both the South and the
trans-Mississippi West." Its history, from the con-
flict between English and French for the control of
the western lands which later became Kentucky to
the middle 1930's, is traced in this college textbook,
which attempts to set forth "the salient points of
Kentucky's social, economic, and political growth."
The Appendix includes a list of "The Governors of
Kentucky."
4107. Davenport, Francis Garvin. Ante-bellum
Kentucky, a social history, 1 800-1 860. Ox-
ford, Ohio, Mississippi Valley Press, 1943. xviii,
238 p. (Annals of America, v. 5)
43-1754^ F455.D36
"Bibliography of manuscript sources": p. [227]-
228.
The first sixty years of the 19th century witnessed
a rapid development of education, medicine, science,
religion, the arts, and literature in Kentucky — an
important outpost of civilization. The author adds
a caution that this cultural progress was not evenly
distributed in an area which contained both rich
and poor, the ignorant and the learned, the conserva-
tive and the liberal, and the religious and the irre-
ligious. He examines the elements of culture
among the country folk, the townspeople, and in
the colleges. In education he notes Kentucky's em-
phasis on the fields of medicine, surgery, botany,
geology, and chemistry, and the activity of distin-
guished physicians, teachers, and naturalists. Social
reform found expression in new legislation and
local history: regions, states, and cities / 501
state-controlled institutions for the less fortunate
members of society. Cultural progress became
articulate in a small group of artists and a much
larger number of essayists, poets, journalists, and
historians. All gave distinction to this period in
Kentucky history, which "resembled the life of
the growing nation and was part of it."
MISSOURI
4108. Gist, Noel P., and others, eds. Missouri, its
resources, people, and institutions. Colum-
bia, Curators of the University of Missouri, 1950.
605 p. 50-62749 F466.G4
Includes bibliographies.
This book, prepared by the University of Mis-
souri, "and presented to the people of Missouri as a
public service," is the joint work of a number of
specialists, writing in their respective fields of com-
petence, to "describe and interpret Missouri's natu-
ral and human resources, to indicate significant
changes that are occurring in various fields, and to
appraise realistically the trends and situations which
should be of concern to the people of the State." Its
28 chapters deal with such topics as water resources,
mines and minerals, population, cities and towns,
agriculture, manufacturing, public utilities, courts
and administrative tribunals, social services, librar-
ies, and the arts.
I. The Old Northwest: General
4109. Atherton, Lewis Eldon. Main Street on the
Middle Border. Bloomington, Indiana Uni-
versity Press, 1954. xix, 423 p. 54-7970 F354.A8
Recalling the social activities of the rural and vil-
lage life to which he was born, and the stories, his-
torical and otherwise, exchanged around the coun-
try store stove, the author writes with affection a
cultural and economic history of midwestern coun-
try towns, limited for the most part to less than 5,000
population, during the years from 1865 to 1950.
The Middle Border is defined as the region embrac-
ing the states of Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri,
Michigan, Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Iowa and the
eastern farming fringe of Kansas, Nebraska, and the
Dakotas. A professor of history at the University of
Missouri since 1946, the author has drawn upon
country newspapers, reminiscences, autobiographies,
and some manuscript sources, as well as representa-
tive fiction, to produce a solidly based regional syn-
thesis. The prevalent sentiment of decline and
decay, the author holds, is a consequence of false
values and a materialistic doctrine of progress viewed
as growth in numbers and real -estate prices; the
amenities and possibilities of life in small, semi-rural
communities have been allowed to lapse through dis-
illusionment and lethargy.
41 10. Baldwin, Leland D. The keelboat age on
western waters. With chapter decorations
by Harvey B. Cushman. Pittsburgh, University of
Pittsburgh Press, 1941. xiv, 268 p.
41-10342 F351.B18
Bibliography: p. [z^]-!^.
One of a series from the Western Pennsylvania
Historical Survey sponsored jointly by the Buhl
Foundation, the Historical Society of Western
Pennsylvania and the University of Pittsburgh, this
book, in its original form, was a dissertation sub-
mitted to the University of Michigan in 1932. It
deals, for the most part, with the three decades be-
fore the coming of the steamboat (1783-1815) when
keelboats, barges, and other varieties of watercraft
were used on the Mississippi, the Ohio, and their
tributaries to transport goods from the Great Valley
to eastern markets via New Orleans, and immigrants
in their search for new homes. Chapters are de-
voted to the "Art of Navigation" in shallow, wind-
ing, and snag-infested waters, the "River Pirates"
who were largely eliminated by 18 12, and "Ship-
building" for oceanic commerce. The boatmen, a
robust and colorful tribe, "brought from New
Orleans and Pittsburgh to the crude villages of the
West some of the comforts and fashions of life, as
well as the necessities," and the old "Mrs. Sippi"
with her thousand tentacles "bound the nation into
an indissoluble union."
41 1 1. Bond, Beverley W. The civilization of the
Old Northwest; a study of political, social,
and economic development, 1788-1812. New
York, Macmillan, 1934. 543 p.
34-1805 F479.B69
Following the American Revolution the neces-
sity of attracting settlers to the area between the
Ohio, the Mississippi, and the Great Lakes to pro-
tect it from Indian and foreign depredation became
apparent. Once the lands were ceded to the Nation
by Virginia, Connecticut, New York, and Massa-
chusetts, Congress recognized the opportunity to
work out a policy of land distribution on a demo-
502 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cratic basis with like terms to all applicants, and
an ultimate "position of equality with the original
states." The Land Ordinance of 1785 and the Gov-
ernment Ordinance of 1787 implemented that policy,
and the blending of setders from New England, the
Middle States, and the South with other racial ele-
ments created a "hard-headed, democratic, and
aggressive population" in the Territory of the United
States northwest of the Ohio. The central theme
of this book is "the development, institutional, social,
and economic, of the civilization of the Old North-
west" in the period between 1788 and 1812, during
which the Northwest Territory was divided into
the state of Ohio, and the territories of Indiana,
Michigan, and Illinois.
4112. Buley, Roscoe Carlyle. The Old Northwest;
pioneer period, 1 815-1840. Bloomington,
Indiana University Press, 1951 [ci95o] 2 v.
52-6466 F484.3.B94 1 95 1
"Bibliographical essay": v. 2, p. [627] -646.
Published by the Indiana Historical Society as a
contribution to the Sesquicentennial of Indiana Ter-
ritory in 1950, this history brought honor to the
author, and to the society as "the first historical
society ever to publish a Pulitzer Prize winner." A
native of Indiana, steeped in its tradition and lore,
the author has written a detailed and documented
account of the quarter-century that witnessed the
flow of settlers into the Old Northwest following
the War of 1812, the admission of Indiana, Illinois,
and Michigan to statehood, and the organization of
the new Territory of Wisconsin. The progress of
setdement, economic development, and politics is
recorded in chronological chapters, while large topi-
cal ones deal with pioneer life, medicine, transpor-
tation, education, religion, and literature and
science. The author has freely used the words of
contemporaries and has employed colloquialisms
and expressions of the period in his own text, in
order "to capture something of the attitudes and
beliefs, struggles and way of life of the time and
place," in this "balanced summary of the record."
41 13. Garland, John H., ed. The North American
Midwest, a regional geography. New York,
Wiley, 1955. 252 p. 55-9845 F354-G3
"Selected bibliography": 243-245.
Fifteen topical and regional specialists have con-
tributed to this enthusiastic book. The Midwest
is described as an inner zone including the West-
Central Lowland, the East-Central Lowland, the
Eastern Lower Great Lakes, and the Upper Missis-
sippi Valley, encircled by a periphery comprising
the Upper and Lower Great Lakes, the Ohio Valley,
the Ozark Upland, and the Lower and Upper Mis-
souri Valley. The region is uniquely distinguished
among continental interiors by its distance from
the ocean, its diversity of transportation routes, its
large metropolitan centers, its materials and mar-
kets for manufacturing, the productive capacity of
its soils, its abundance of coal, iron, and other min-
erals, its unequaled water resources in the Great
Lakes and the Mississippi, uniformly favorable
climate for the production of high-yielding crops,
and "the most optimistic people in the world."
41 14. Hatcher, Harlan H. The Great Lakes.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1944.
384 p. 44-94 1 9 F551.H36
Bibliography: p. 371-374.
A native Ohioan, the author rose from instructor
to vice-president of the University of Ohio (1922-
51), and has written several books focused on the
region of the Great Lakes. Forming the boundary
between the United States and Canada, the Great
Lakes are spanned by eight international bridges
and a tunnel, which link the countries "in amity
at the key points on the Lakes." The subject of
this book is "the story of this mighty region — its
formation, its discovery, the struggle for its posses-
sion, its exploitation, the rise of its cities, the history
and romance of its ships." Part I is concerned with
the discoverers from Cartier to La Salle; Part II
with international conflict from de la Mothe-
Cadillac's foundation of Detroit to the Peace of
Ghent; Part III with setdement and the spread of
navigation; and Part IV with the rise of the mineral
industries which have given the Lakes their modern
economic character.
41 15. Hubbart, Henry Clyde. The older Middle
West, 1 840-1 880, its social, economic and
political life and sectional tendencies before, dur-
ing and after the Civil War. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1936. 305 p. 36-11022 F484.3.H885
Bibliography: p. 278-292.
By the older Middle West the author means the
southern portions of Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois,
"the region of the river valleys," the setdement of
which, primarily by upland southerners and second-
arily by Pennsylvanians, was complete by 1840.
Despite the book's comprehensive tide, there are
only four chapters on the social, cultural, and eco-
nomic characteristics of the area, and the main theme
is the reaction of the "Progressive Western De-
mocracy" of the region to the sectional struggle
inaugurated by the Mexican cessions of 1848.
"Here was the zone of doubtful states for whose
control" the Southern masters of the Democratic
Party contended with the new Republicanism which
arose in the Lake Region; here arose "copper-
headism," not a pro-Southern movement but one
local history: regions, states, and cities / 503
in which "thwarted westerners showed their sec-
tional discontent;" and here protests against tri-
umphant Republicanism went on continuously
throughout the Gilded Age. The volume was pub-
lished from a fund contributed to the American
Historical Association by the Carnegie Corporation
of New York.
4 1 16. Hutton, David Graham. Midwest at noon.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1946.
xv, 350 p. A46-1352 F354.H8
Mr. Hutton, who was on an official mission in
the United States during World War II, has pro-
duced one of the few books by an Englishman on
an American region. Fascinated by the Midwest
and its people, and finding few books "that told all
about the region, its history, and its way of life,"
he has set down his "own impressions of the Mid-
west as it was, as it is, and as it yet may be." He
leaves the reader to decide how much of what he
records is peculiar to the region and how much is
"just plain American." His exposition combines
historical perspectives, economic analyses, personal
observations, psychological characterizations, and
social interpretations in about equal measure to
make a rich and sympathetic volume which resists
summary. So, the author finds, does the maturing
Midwest itself: "its distinctive characteristics are
those of its richly varied peoples, their neighbor-
liness, their tolerance and conformity to one broad
way of life, whatever they do for a living."
4 1 17. Power, Richard Lyle. Planning Corn Belt
culture; the impress of the upland south-
erner and Yankee in the Old Northwest. Indian-
apolis, Indiana Historical Society, 1953. xvi, 196 p.
(Indiana Historical Society, Publications, v. 17)
54-618 F484.3.P6
F521.I41, v. 17
An original interpretative study which regards
the settlement of the Old Northwest as a kind of
culture conflict between upland southerners and
Yankees from New England and New York. "The
Southerners got there first" — indeed, had a forty
years start, but after 1830 came the "Yankee in-
vasion" with its cultural imperialism mingling re-
ligious, economic, and political motives. The
author has drawn upon the papers of the American
Home Missionary Society in the Chicago Theologi-
cal Seminary, "a sort of Puritan equivalent of the
Jesuit Relations," for interesting expressions of the
viewpoint of the self-conscious New Englanders.
Chapter IV assembles some of the consequences of
"Living Side by Side," in farmways, shelter, cook-
ery, language, and preaching. The author con-
cludes that while by 1865 the Yankee felt that he
had swept everything before him, and had indeed
gained a tempered victory, in fact "neither strain
won out by subordination of the other, but both
were conquered as it were by the region itself, were
taken in hand by a process of blending, in which
the final outcome was neither Yankee nor Southern,
but 'Western.' "
J. The Old Northwest: Local
OHIO
41 18. Hatcher, Harlan H. The Western Reserve;
the story of New Connecticut in Ohio. In-
dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1949. 365 p.
49-9476 F497.W5H27
"Acknowledgments and bibliographical note":
P- 345-347-
The author's subject is the part of northeastern
Ohio on Lake Erie which was "reserved" by Con-
necticut in 1786 when she ceded her other claims to
western land, and retained until 1800 when, by
agreement with the United States Government, ju-
risdiction was transferred to the Nation. It com-
prised some 5000 square miles. The author traces
the history of the Western Reserve from its first
settlement by a group from Connecticut under the
leadership of Moses Cleaveland in 1796 to the mid-
20th century. He points out that the New England
influence is still found in the architecture and in the
names of the older towns and villages, although it
has been tempered by the assimilation of a foreign
population attracted by the growth of the great in-
dustries which have given the region a strategic
position at the heart of America. The publication
of this volume coincided with the centennial of the
Western Reserve Historical Society, which owns
much of the source material used in its compilation.
41 19. Ohio. Development and Publicity Commis-
sion. Ohio, an empire within an empire.
2d ed. Columbus, 1950. 214 p.
51-62008 F496.O35 1950
"References and additional sources of informa-
tion:" p. 213-214.
"The Ohio Development and Publicity Commis-
sion was created to develop and to disseminate in-
formation concerning the agricultural, historical, in-
504 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
dustrial and recreational advantages and attractions
of the State of Ohio." This book, the first edition of
which appeared in 1944, was sponsored by the Com-
mission for those purposes. A group of specialists in
their fields have contributed to the volume with Guy-
Harold Smith, chairman of the Department of
Geography at Ohio State University, as editor-in-
chief. The full-page maps are used to illustrate dis-
tribution among the counties of population, agricul-
tural products, manufactures, natural resources,
transportation, cultural institutions, and various
public services. A final chapter summarizes the
characteristics of Ohio that are representative of the
Nation as a whole, and concludes that "every phase
of the State's life displays a legacy or benefaction
from other parts of the country and of the world."
The end matter includes a list of "Museums and
Historical Points" (p. 187-90) and an "Organiza-
tion Chart, State Government."
4120. Roseboom, Eugene H., and Francis P. Weis-
enburger. A history of Ohio. Edited and
illustrated by James H. Rodabaugh. [New ed.]
Columbus, Ohio State Archaeological and Histori-
cal Society, 1953. 412 p. 54-265 F491.R76 1953
Bibliography: p. 385-402.
The first edition of this history was published in
1934 in the Prentice-Hall history series, edited by
Carl F. Wittke. Published for the Sesquicentennial
of Ohio, this revision gives greater emphasis to social
and cultural history, covers the period since 1934,
and adds "to the knowledge of the State's intrinsic
importance and of its significant role as one of the
states of the American Union." The bibliographies
have been expanded and the work provided with a
remarkable body of illustrations — so many, in fact,
that the new edition has been printed on slick paper
and in larger format.
4 12 1. Wittke, Carl F., ed. The history of the state
of Ohio. Published under the auspices of
the Ohio State Archaeological and Historical So-
ciety. Columbus, Ohio, 1941-44. 6 v.
41-7471 F491.W78
Contents. — 1. The foundations of Ohio, by
Beverley W. Bond, Jr. 1941. — 2. The frontier state,
1 803-1 825, by William T. Utter. 1942. — 3. The
passing of the frontier, 1825-1850, by Francis P.
Weisenburger. 1941. — 4. The Civil War era, 1850-
1873, by Eugene H. Roseboom. 1944. — 5. Ohio
comes of age, 1873-1900, by Philip D. Jordan.
1943. — 6. Ohio in the twentieth century, 1900-1938,
planned and compiled by Harlow Lindley. 1942.
This definitive history was published with the
financial assistance of the General Assembly of
Ohio, "in connection with Ohio's observance of the
150th anniversary of the organization of the North-
west Territory and the establishment of civil gov-
ernment within its limits under the Ordinance of
1787." It is the result of the cooperative efforts
of a group of outstanding scholars under the editor-
ship of the well-known head of the Department of
History at Ohio State University (1925-37), later
professor of history at Oberlin College (1937-48).
"Attention has been given in each volume to the
more or less familiar aspects of Ohio's political his-
tory, but in addidon, a real effort has been made to
stress the economic, social, cultural and intellectual
progress of the State. Art, architecture, religion,
journalism, amusements, the theater and other
phases of cultural and intellectual activities have
received their fair share of emphasis." In volume
V, in fact, only four of the 13 chapters are concerned
with politics, and of these two, on "Politics and Big
Business" and "Bosses and Boodle," are concerned
with its social-history connections. Volume VI
comprises 17 chapters by 15 specialists, the last,
appropriately enough, being one by Dr. Lindley on
"The Sesquicentennial Celebration." Each volume
is separately indexed, and, while there are footnote
references, there are no bibliographies.
4122. Harlow, Alvin F. The serene Cincin-
natians. New York, Dutton, 1950. 442 p.
(Society in America series)
50-10456 F499.C5H35
Bibliography: p. 422-428.
A city of firsts in many of its cultural achieve-
ments and of superlatives in some of its public
services and industrial performance, Cincinnati was
known as the "Queen City of the West" by 1834.
The author thinks that the serenity found in Cin-
cinnati is born of "the experience and philosophical
composure of age, informed by historical conscious-
ness, and with a strong blend of German imper-
turbability." Jolted occasionally by the discovery of
graft and dishonesty in government and the slack-
ening of public morals, Cincinnatians still face and
solve their problems in a spirit of tranquility which,
the author suggests, may become a casualty of the
near future, since "poise is increasingly difficult to
maintain in a global scientific arena." Much of the
material for this book has been "garnered from
Cincinnati newspapers of the past."
INDIANA
4123. Esarey, Logan. A history of Indiana. In-
dianapolis, B. F. Bowen, 1918. 2 v. (1148
p.) 19-1811 F526.E742
Contents. — 1. From its exploration to 1850. — 2.
From 1850 to the present.
A native of Indiana, Logan Esarey (1873-1942)
local history: regions, states, and cities / 505
grew up in its southern hills at a period when many
of the people who had contributed to the State's
early history were still alive. As a teacher he was
noted for his classes in Indiana and Middle West
history, and for the outstanding collection of public
documents, newspapers, diaries, letters, and other
materials which he collected for the Indiana Uni-
versity Library. This scholarly history (1st edition
1914) is based, for the most part, on primary
sources, but the author complained that documen-
tary material for Indiana had not been published by
the State. No substantial changes were made in
the second edition. From Chapter XI on, chapters
of political narrative are interspersed with others
on economic or social matters, and the organization
of the book becomes rather desultory after 1865 is
reached. Esarey's love for his native State found
expression in a group of penetrating essays about
pioneer life, five of which were published after his
death, and have been much appreciated. Some ten
years later another and very handsome edition of
The Indiana Home ( Bloomington, Indiana Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 121 p.) was designed and
illustrated by Bruce Rogers.
4124. Martin, John Bardow. Indiana, an inter-
pretation. New York, Knopf, 1947. xn»
300, xvii p. 47-1 1581 F526.M25
Bibliography: p. 291-300.
A well-known crime reporter, whose first book
was on the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, has set
down here his interpretation of "the Hoosier char-
acter, the Hoosier thought, the Hoosier way of
living." His data are in part gleaned from inter-
views with newspapermen, laborers, manufacturers,
undertakers, retired madames, and a great variety
of run-of-the-mill citizens, and his book, he says is
journalism — but if so, it is assuredly journalism of a
superior stamp. He opens with an original device:
"Indiana, as a whole, viewed within the framework
of a Hoosier institution, the State Fair." Three his-
torical sections culminate in "The Golden Age"
when, with James Whitcomb Riley, Booth Tarking-
ton, and others, Indiana had a literature of its own.
Recent tendencies are presented through the diverse
personalities of four representative "Gendemen
from Indiana." Indiana is found to be "a place
where the American kind of capitalistic democracy
grew up in its native form," while "America is a
larger Indiana."
4125. Thornbrough, Gayle, and Dorothy Riker,
comps. Readings in Indiana history. In-
dianapolis, Indiana Historical Bureau, 1956. 625 p.
(Indiana historical collections, v. 36)
57-62616 F521.T4
F521.I38, v. 36
431240—60 34
This anthology is based upon an earlier Readings
in Indiana History compiled by a committee of the
Historical Section of the Indiana State Teachers'
Association and published by Indiana University in
1914. The selections are relatively short and in-
clude extracts not only from original sources but
also, in lesser part, from recent scholarly writings
including magazine articles. The extracts are
grouped in 32 chronological or topical chapters, and
many of them are preceded by brief introductions.
The compilers regret the lack of "a good one-
volume history of Indiana which can be read in
conjunction with the Readings." They also find a
dearth of suitable material for the later history of
the State, and have in fact only 40 very miscellaneous
pages on the years since 1865.
ILLINOIS
4126. Illinois. Centennial Commission. The cen-
tennial history of Illinois, Clarence Wal-
worth Alvord, editor-in-chief. Springfield, 111.,
1917-20. 6 v. {Its Publications, Introductory vol.
and vol. 1-5) F541.I25
Contents:
4127. (Introductory vol.) Illinois in 1818, by Solon
Justus Buck. 1917. 362 p.
17-17320 F545.B92
412;
4129.
4130.
4131.
(Vol. 1) The Illinois country, 1673-1818,
by Clarence Walworth Alvord. 1920. 524 p.
20-27288 F541.A47
(Vol. 2) The frontier State, 18 18-1848, by
Theodore Calvin Pease. 1918. 475 p.
19-27083 F545.P34
(Vol. 3) The era of the Civil War, 1848-
1870, by Arthur Charles Cole. 1919. 499 p.
I9-7332 F545.C68
(Vol. 4) The industrial State, 1870-1893,
by Ernest Ludlow Bogart and Charles Man-
fred Thompson. 1920. 553 p.
20-27316 HC107.I3B6
4132. (Vol. 5) The modern Commonwealth,
1 893-1 9 1 8, by Ernest Ludlow Bogart and
John Mabry Mathews. 1920. 544 p.
20-27159 F546.B67
These volumes on the history of Illinois from the
coming of the first Europeans to the close of World
War I were published in observance of the one
hundredth anniversary of the admission of Illinois
into the Union. The authors, a distinguished group,
506 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
were all members of the faculty of the University
of Illinois at the time the project was initiated. Dr.
Buck's introductory volume presents a survey of the
social, economic, and political life of Illinois at the
close of the territorial period, followed by a detailed
history of the process of admission. In the last two
volumes the chapters of economic history and de-
scription are written by Prof. Bogart, and the politi-
cal ones by his collaborators. Each volume has a
substantial bibliography, and the latter ones have
appendixes with tables of economic statistics. This
was the first of the cooperative and scholarly multi-
volume state histories; the example of Illinois has
since been followed by Massachusetts, New York,
and Ohio, and, in a project as yet only very partially
completed, by New Jersey.
4133. Pease, Theodore Calvin. The story of Il-
linois. [Rev. ed.] Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1949. xviii, 284 p.
49-1 1 105 F541.P36 1949
"This volume is an attempt to present a short,
readable history of the state of Illinois, embodying
the results of the latest research." The first edition
which appeared in 1925 was based "to a considerable
extent on the five-volume Centennial History of
Illinois." This new edition was published as a con-
tribution to the golden anniversary of the founding
of the Illinois State Historical Society of which the
author, who died in 1948, was a director for many
years and president from 1946-47. Additions in the
fields of British and French relations with the
Illinois country have been made in this revision and
the final chapter, completed by Mrs. Pease, covers
another quarter century in Illinois' development.
4134. Dedmon, Emmett. Fabulous Chicago.
New York, Random House, 1953. 359 p.
53-6921 F548.5.D4
Based on source materials found in the Chicago
Historical Society, and in the files of certain Chicago
newspapers, this narrative of social life in Chicago
from 1835 to 1930, with an "Epilogue" that sum-
marizes to the date of publication, also contains in
its acknowledgments the names of some of the
city's first families. Here are lively descriptions of
such matters as the social dictatorship of Mrs. Potter
Palmer, invitations to whose New Year's Day recep-
tions determined the makeup of high society; of the
social accompaniments of the unforgettable World's
Fair of 1893, when the Infanta Eulalia of Spain and
28 million others invaded the White City; and the
low life along the Levee, where were to be found the
Everleigh Club and, until they were transferred to
the Coliseum, the First Ward Balls of Aldermen
Coughlin and Kenna. Educated in Chicago, the
author has been associated with Chicago newspapers
since 1940 as columnist, critic, and editor, and he
writes with an obvious zest for his subject. The
many interesting illustrations are obtained from the
Chicago Historical Society and the Newberry
Library.
4135. Lewis, Lloyd, and Henry Justin Smith.
Chicago, the history of its reputation. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. xii, 508 p.
29-17674 F548.3.L67
"Sources": p. 495-497.
The lethal gangster wars of the 1920's gave Chi-
cago a worldwide notoriety which troubled many of
its more sensitive citizens, and which was evidendy
responsible for the sub-title of this briskly anecdotal
sketch of municipal history by two prominent local
journalists. To them the city's vitality and joy in
life, its absorption in the future, its incessant rebuild-
ing of itself, and its herculean business enterprise are
the essential Chicago, while political corruption and
unpunished crime are only superficial and transient
phenomena. "Four and a half million people,
counting themselves part of metropolitan Chicago,
were going somewhere and intended to get there."
Mr. Lewis takes the story to the World's Fair of
1893, and Mr. Smith carries it on to the municipal
election of 1928.
4136. Pierce, Bessie Louise. A history of Chicago.
New York, Knopf, 1937-57. 3 v-
37-8801 F548.3.P54
Bibliography: v. 1, p. [4291-455; v. 2, p. 515-547;
v- 3- P- [547J-575-
This history is related to a wide range of studies
in the sociology, economics, and politics of the
Chicago metropolitan area conducted by the Social
Science Research Committee of the University of
Chicago, but only three of its projected four volumes
have appeared. The author has served as a pro-
fessor of American history at the University of
Chicago since 1929. The first volume is the story
of a frontier community from 1673 to 1848, and
"typifies the life of the Middle West before 1850."
The second begins with the construction of
Chicago's first railroads and ends just before the
Great Fire of 1871. The third proceeds from the
fire, which resulted in a material loss estimated at
$196,000,000, and the amazing rebuilding which
followed it, to the World's Fair of 1893, which
marked "a new epoch in the aesthetic growth not
only of Chicago but of the nation." Each volume
has valuable tabular appendixes. Focusing trends
on national affairs as they affected Chicago, these
volumes are also a well-documented contribution to
the history of the United States. At the time of
the Century of Progress Fair in Chicago, Professor
Pierce edited a volume containing impressions of
local history: regions, states, and cities / 507
Chicago by 47 travelers, foreign and domestic, from
Pere Marquette to Morris Markey: As Others See
Chicago, Impressions of Visitors, 1673-1933 (Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. 540 p.).
A brief sketch of the author precedes each selection.
MICHIGAN
4137. Bald, Frederick Clever. Michigan in four
centuries. New York, Harper, 1954. xiii,
498 p. 54-8934 F566.B2
"A selected list of books on Michigan history:"
p. 477-481.
Long the site of a fur trade between the Indians
and the French or British, the territory that became
the State of Michigan in 1837 was populated by
settlers from New York, New England, and Europe.
This book resulted from the interest of the son of a
Swedish immigrant in the history of his State.
Rising from poverty to the presidency of the State
Normal College, and deploring the neglect of state
history in the schools, Dr. John M. Munson left his
estate for the publication of a history of Michigan,
and a history of education there. Published under
the direction of the Michigan Historical Commis-
sion, this book incorporates 21 years of research by
the author, a member of the Department of History
at the University of Michigan. "An essential for
good citizenship" in a state with so large a popu-
lation born elsewhere, this history "is directed to the
adult as well as to the youthful resident of the state."
Six years prior to the publication of this book Dr.
Milo Milton Quaife, described by Dr. Bald as the
"dean of historians of Michigan and the Old North-
west," cooperated with Dr. Sidney Glazer in writing
"a comprehensive history of Michigan suited to the
needs of class room students and of mature readers
generally": Michigan: from Primitive Wilderness
to Industrial Commonwealth (New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1948. 374 p. Prentice-Hall history series).
4138. Pound, Arthur. Detroit, dynamic city; il-
lustrated by E. H. Suydam. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1940. 397 p.
40-27234 F574.D4P7
Bibliography: p. 373— [378J
A native of Michigan, an experienced journalist,
and the author of several studies of industrial Amer-
ica, Mr. Pound was well-equipped to write this
narrative sketch of the rise of Detroit from a fur-
trading outpost in the early 18th century to the posi-
tion of automobile capital of the world in the mid-
20th. The city has been fortunate in its location
at a strategic point by Antoine de la Mothe Cadillac
in 170 1, and in the leadership of men such as Judge
Augustus B. Woodward, the "driving spirit" in
rebuilding the city after the devastating fire of
1805; in the foresight of Governor Lewis Cass who
"gave courage to the territory and tone to society;"
and in Henry Ford's determination to supply "cheap
highway transportation for the common man."
The citizens, throughout the history of Detroit,
have faced consuming disasters, economic depres-
sions, and labor disturbances with the energy
and effectiveness characteristic of a vigorous people.
WISCONSIN
4139. Raney, William Francis. Wisconsin; a
story of progress. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1940. xvii, 554 p. (Prentice-Hall books on his-
tory, edited by Carl Wittke) 40-7607 F581.R32
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
Long associated with education in Wisconsin, the
author has been chairman of the Department of
History and Government at Lawrence College,
Appleton, since 1946. This history is designed "to
provide a readable and up-to-date summary of the
growth of Wisconsin from the arrival of the first
European visitor in 1634 down to the present."
After the organization of the Northwest Territory,
nearly fifty years passed before settlers from the
northern states, with a scattering from the South,
reached the frontier that became the State of Wis-
consin in 1848. The next fifty years witnessed the
flow of immigrants into the State from Germany,
Norway, Sweden, Ireland, and other countries, the
building of a network of railroads, and the exploi-
tation of the lumber resources. While wheat pro-
duction declined after 1870, Wisconsin took the
leadership of the Nation in dairying. Enlarging the
functions of government in the interest of all its
citizens, Wisconsin has become synonymous with
progressive social experiments in government. The
appendixes include a list of "Governors of Wiscon-
sin," "Wisconsin Votes in Presidential Elections,"
and statistics of the "Population of Wisconsin" from
1830 to 1930.
4140. Still, Bayrd. Milwaukee, the history of a
city. Madison, State Historical Society of
Wisconsin, 1948. xvi, 638 p.
49-7868 F589.M6S8
"Bibliographical note": p. 601-610.
The founder of Milwaukee was Solomon Juneau,
a young French-Canadian fur-trader who began his
residence there in 18 18, and turned town-promoter
in 1833. Milwaukee was incorporated as a village in
1838, had grown into a town within a decade, and
was a city by 1870. Situated some 80 miles north
of Chicago on the shore of Lake Michigan, and
famous for its breweries even before the Civil War,
508 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
it is now one of the chief ports on the Great Lakes
and one of the world's leading centers for the manu-
facture of heavy machinery. In 1837 the first issue
of the Milwaukee Sentinel asserted that "rigid en-
forcement of and prompt obedience to the popular
will" was "the most vital principle of Representative
Government." This philosophy has persisted and
has made of Milwaukee, with its large foreign popu-
lation, a laboratory for liberal social and political
movements. Dr. Still, a professor of history at Wis-
consin State College from 1932 to 1938, published
in the State's centennial year this full-scale history
covering all aspects of the city's development. Since
monographic material was lacking, it represents a
noteworthy work of compressing voluminous pri-
mary sources. Milwaukee's century of city building,
he concludes, "bore witness to the contribution of
the sovereign citizen in underwriting urban growth."
Population tables and a series of sketch maps illus-
trating that growth appear in the Appendix.
MINNESOTA
4141. Blegen, Theodore C. Building Minnesota.
Boston, Heath, 1938. xii, 450, xvi p. illus.
38-29043 F606.B66
"Materials for further reading and study": p. i-iv
at end.
4142. Blegen, Theodore C. The land lies open.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1949. 246 p. 49-48266 F606.B674
Dr. Blegen, the historian of Norwegian immigra-
tion (q. v.), has long been a professor of history at
the University of Minnesota and was superintendent
of the Minnesota Historical Society from 1931-39.
Nearly 20 years ago he prepared Building Minnesota
for use in the secondary schools of the State. Apart
from its being written in rather simple sentences,
from its chapters being grouped in "units" which
are hardly different from other authors' "parts" or
"books," and from the questions, problems, and
projects added at the ends of chapters by Prof. Edgar
B. Wesley, it differs little from a work for older
students or readers. Half the volume is allotted to
the period since the Civil War, and there are chap-
ters on wheat raising, lumbering, flour milling, and
iron mining. The Land Lies Open is a small vol-
ume presenting episodes of Minnesota history so as
to give significant place "to the changing and de-
veloping life of the people at the grass roots of
their existence." Six of the chapters have been
rewritten from articles published in Minnesota His-
tory and other periodicals. Part I, "Channels to the
Land," is concerned with explorers from De Soto
to Henry R. Schoolcraft; Part II, "People on the
Land," with aspects of setdement and culture. All
writers on Minnesota history acknowledge their
indebtedness to William Watts Folwell (1833—
1929), first president of the University of Minnesota,
who began to write his magnum opus after his re-
tirement at the age of 74, and completed it before
his death at 96! A History of Minnesota (St. Paul,
Minnesota Historical Society, 1921-30. 4 v. [The
Society issued v. 1 of a new edition in 1956]) is
eminently thorough and fair-minded, but it treats
episodes in the early history of the State at such
length as to make it unsuitable for a main entry
here.
4143. Blegen, Theodore C, and Philip D. Jordan,
eds. With various voices, recordings of
North Star life. Saint Paul, Itasca Press, 1949.
xxiv, 380 p. 49-11623 F606.B675
A source book of Minnesota history from the days
of the French explorers, Radisson and Hennepin, to
the close of the 19th century. Its editors have aimed
"to relate the history of the North Star State in the
words of those who actually took part in the making
of that history," to be both accurate and colorful, and
to include the words "of explorers, schoolteachers,
missionaries, and just plain common folks — the basic
builders of the state," as well as public documents.
The 54 extracts are arranged in eleven topical sec-
tions and close with Governor John Lind's message
to the legislature in 1899, "in reality an inventory of
Minnesota life and problems at the turn of the
century."
IOWA
4144. Cole, Cyrenus. A history of the people of
Iowa. Cedar Rapids, Iowa, Torch Press,
1921. xiv, 572 p. maps. 21-2103 F621.C68
Cyrenus Cole (1863-1939) was born on an Iowa
farm and became a leading newspaperman of Cedar
Rapids; in the year this book was published he began
12 years of service as a Republican in the U. S. House
of Representatives. His book is of a description sur-
prisingly rare: a one-volume state history, inspired
by John Richard Green and written in a dignified
Victorian prose, which is yet comprehensive, well-
informed, and thoroughly digested. The writer was
well acquainted with the leading Iowa political
figures of his maturity, and perhaps gives more space
to elections and officeholders than would a present-
day historian of the people of Iowa; but he is never
unmindful of developments in other spheres. His
basic Republicanism does not lead him into any un-
fairness to Populists or Democrats; he limits himself
local history: regions, states, and cities / 509
to the opinion that, in the post-Civil War doldrums
of Iowa, "Political doctors were not needed so much
as industrial ones. But it took the people a long
time to find this out."
K. The Far West
4145. Baumhoff, Richard G. The dammed Mis-
souri Valley, one sixth of our Nation. New
York, Knopf, 1951. 291 p. illus.
51-11082 F598.B3
"The Missouri basin is a continental funnel drain-
ing into the Mississippi River, a terrain that meas-
ures 529,350 square miles. It is roughly 1,300 miles
long, and has extreme width of about 700 miles."
Its major problems have been irregular water sup-
ply, floods, and erosion, and in 1945 the Missouri
Basin Interagency Committee was set up to plan
and administer a "federal program, with state co-
operation, for protection, control, and development
of the water and land resources." In the same
year the St. Louis Post Dispatch which has con-
sistently supported an eventual Missouri Valley
Authority, assigned Mr. Baumhoff to cover the pro-
gram and related topics. His book is, as he says,
a journalistic report, but it presents the basic facts
of geography and economics in an objective manner,
and predicts that the outcome will be a Federal au-
thority for the basin which will disappoint extrem-
ists, and "will not be gready different in essence from
an MVA shorn of some dubious elements," or a
"Missouri Valley Anti-Authority Authority."
4146. Billington, Ray Allen. The Far Western
frontier, 1 830-1 860. New York, Harper,
1956. 324 p. illus. (The New American nation
series) 56-9665 F591.B55
Bibliography: p. 293-311.
A well-informed, significantly selective, and
skillfully organized general treatment of the three
critical decades which saw the American occupation
of the Far West prepared for, carried out, and con-
solidated. The author limits himself to describing
those aspects of diplomacy and war "which immedi-
ately affected the settlement process." Professor
Billington's volume is noteworthy for its objective
presentation of the aspects of ruthlessness and de-
civilization which marked this great wave of expan-
sion, and for its emphasis on the variety of Wests,
each with its distinguishable frontier characteristics,
which was the initial result. Since the settlement
pattern was shaped by the accidental location of
mineral wealth, the frontier of farms and villages in
the Mississippi Valley was separated by nearly 1,000
miles of prairie from the islands of settlement in the
Inland Empire of the Pacific Northwest, the Great
Salt Lake Country, Arizona, New Mexico, the
Washoe region, California, and Oregon. The great
work of the 1850's was that of the overland freight-
ers and stage coachers, who linked this "galaxy of
empires" with each other and with the East, and
made possible the resumption of normal civilizing
processes.
4147. Briggs, Harold E. Frontiers of the North-
west; a history of the upper Missouri Valley.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1940. xiv, 629 p.
40-12572 F598.B84
Bibliography: p. 595-612.
The Upper Missouri Valley of this volume com-
prises the Dakotas, Montana, and Wyoming, "over-
lapping into Idaho and northern Colorado." Its
history is here reconstructed, mostly within the three
decades 1860-90, with an abundance of detail and
documentation, and an academic dryness of manner
which seldom ventures into commentary. The ar-
rangement is largely topical, under six principal
heads. "The Frontier of the Miner" is concerned
with the strikes and rushes that went on at irregular
intervals from 1859 to about 1877, and incidentally
disposes of "The Myth of Calamity Jane" (Martha
Jane Canary, 1852-1903), whose "only claim to fame
was her absolute lack of respectability." "The
Frontier of the Buffalo" is concerned with the fate
of the northern herd, which survived the southern
herd but not the coming of the Northern Pacific, and
disappeared after the winter of 1883-84. "The
Frontier of Settlement" describes the attempts of the
territorial governments to encourage immigration,
and the projects of group colonization organized in
the East and in Europe. The frontiers of the catde
rancher, of the sheepherder, and of agriculture are
treated in comparable detail. Much the same area,
but with Wyoming omitted, is handled in a radically
different style in Bruce O. Nelson's Land of the Da-
cotahs (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1946. 354 p.). Resulting from a University of Min-
nesota Fellowship in Regional Writing, it presents
its material in a series of episodes whose dramatic as-
pects are emphasized. Folklore is drawn upon, and
two of the episodes are cast in semifictional form.
The author continues to a more recent period, telling
the story of Arthur Townley and the Nonpartisan
510 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
League, of Governor William Langer's moratorium
upon farm foreclosures and evictions in 1933, and of
the plans for flood control which led to the proposal
of a Missouri Valley Authority.
4148. Chittenden, Hiram Martin. The American
fur trade of the Far West; a history of the
pioneer trading posts and early fur companies of the
Missouri Valley and the Rocky Mountains and of
the overland commerce with Santa Fe. Standard,
Calif., Academic Reprints, 1954. 2 v. (xl, 1029 p.)
(American culture and economics series, no. 1)
54-7095 HD9944.U45C5 1954
General Chittenden (1858-1917) was an Army
engineer with a variety of practical achievements to
his credit, such as laying out the roads of Yellow-
stone National Park and planning the Lake Wash-
ington Canal. He nevertheless found time to pub-
lish four books on Western history between 1895 and
1905, all of which have stood the test of time to a
remarkable degree, subsequent research having filled
in detail rather than rendered their conceptions and
structure obsolete. The present work was originally
published in three volumes in 1902 and has remained
the basic work covering its subject during the period
1807-43; ^ required only to be supplemented by a
detailed account of the trade in the Southwest,
eventually supplied by Robert G. Cleland (no. 4186).
Mr. Stallo Vinton's contribution to his edition,
originally published in 1935, chiefly consists of addi-
tional notes which are added to most chapters after
those of the author. General Chittenden divided
his text into five parts, of which Part II, "Historical,"
is the longest and most essential. Its principal sub-
jects are the Missouri Fur Company, Astoria, the
Rocky Mountain Fur Company, the American Fur
Company, and the Santa Fe Trade. Part I de-
scribes the operations and characteristics of the fur
trade; Parts III-V are concerned with contem-
porary events in their relation to the trade, colorful
incidents during its course, and a general geo-
graphical description of the West, including the
native tribes. Eight appendixes of original docu-
ments run to nearly one hundred pages. General
Chittenden was ahead of his time in making a
thorough use of all business records of the fur
companies that he was able to discover.
4149. Coman, Katharine. Economic beginnings of
the Far West, how we won the land beyond
the Mississippi. New York, Macmillan, 1925.
2 v. in 1. 27-3060 HC107.A17C7 1925
Bibliography at end of each volume.
Contents. — 1. The Spanish occupation. Explo-
ration and the fur trade. — 2. The advance of the
settlers. The transcontinental migration. Free
land and free labor.
The general pattern of historiography has changed
so greatly since 1912, when this work was originally
issued (Miss Coman died in 1915, and the one-
volume edition is an otherwise unaltered reprint)
that what the author then described as an economic
history would now be regarded as a general survey
of Western history down to the Civil War, with
perhaps less than average space allotted to diplo-
matic and military factors. It was largely a pioneer
undertaking, and while of course it takes no account
of the mass of detailed studies which have appeared
since, it remains a clear oudine of the essential
developments in discovery, settlement, and trade
from a clearly defined point of view. Miss Coman
thought that the European colonial regimes stifled
the normal development of the region, and were of
necessity eliminated by the superior industrial effi-
ciency of the advancing tide of American settlers.
"The self-employed and self-supporting farmer
took possession of the land in a sense not to be dis-
puted." The outcome of the Civil War was only
the concluding victory of "the ideal American type —
the homestead farmer" in the long struggle between
forced and free labor.
4150. Quiett, Glenn Chesney. They built the
West; an epic of rails and cities. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1934. xx, 569 p.
34-35461 F591.Q85
Bibliography: p. 543-549.
The West lost its frontier isolation and began
to acquire its mature characteristics with the com-
ing of the transcontinental railroads, usually dated
from May 10, 1869, when the Union Pacific and the
Central Pacific joined their tracks at Promontory
Point, Utah. The large government subsidies re-
ceived by the western lines gave their backers a
great advantage in schemes of western development
demanding capital. "One important source of reve-
nue that was open to the backers of the early West-
ern railroads was the building of cities." In this
imposing volume Mr. Quiett reexamines the stand-
ard sources of railroad and municipal history for evi-
dences of their interaction, and has no difficulty in
demonstrating the importance of the railroads and
their builders in the rise of Denver, San Francisco,
Los Angeles, San Diego, Portland, Seattle, and
Spokane. JTakoma, Washington, is labeled "a rail-
road creation": the decision of the Northern Pacific
in 1873 to locate its western terminus there in an
instant "converted a raw sawmill village on the
frontier of civilization into a potential city of im-
portance." The author's favorite city-builder is evi-
dently General William J. Palmer (1 836-1 909) of
the unsubsidized Denver and Rio Grande. "No
local history: regions, states, and cities / 511
one had a keener eye for the scenic and commercial
possibilities of a site," and he built cities that were
permanent, such as Colorado Springs, which he
added to the map in 1871.
L. The Great Plains: General
4 15 1. Brown, Mark H., and William R. Felton.
The frontier years; L. A. Huffman, photog-
rapher of the plains. New York, Holt, 1955. 272 p.
55-9876 F595.H87B7
Bibliography: p. 259-261.
4152. Brown, Mark H., and William R. Felton.
Before barbed wire. L. A. Huffman, pho-
tographer on horseback. New York, Holt, 1956.
256 p. 56-10507 F596.B87
Bibliography: p. 237-243.
4153. Smith, Erwin E. Life on the Texas range.
Photographs by Erwin E. Smith; text by J.
Evetts Haley. Austin, University of Texas Press,
1952. 112 p. 52-13181 SF85.S57
The two finest photographic records of the West
of the Open Range seem to have been made at its
northern and southern extremes. Laton A. Huff-
man (1854-1931) learned photography in his
father's shop in Iowa, and in 1878 came to Fort
Keogh on the Yellowstone River in southeastern
Montana to fill the unofficial position of post photog-
rapher, the remuneration being what he could make
out of it. Save for a six-year exodus caused by hard
times, Huffman spent the rest of his life as a pro-
fessional photographer in Montana, and after 1905
lived by the sale of prints from his early negatives.
Mr. Felton, Huffman's son-in-law, has drawn upon
the family collection of glass plates, letters, and
memoranda, and in both volumes the documenta-
tion of the photographs is careful and thorough.
The Frontier Years illustrates the finale of buffalo
hunting, the last Indian wars, Miles City and other
frontier towns, and the transition from wagon train
to railroad. Before Barbed Wire illustrates sheep
as well as catde herding and has fine pictures of
early cow camps and ranch houses. The authors
very properly underline Huffman's achievement in
his early pictures taken on horseback with a 50-
pound, slow-shutter, wet-plate camera. Erwin E.
Smith (1886-1947) was a later comer than Huff-
man, and never established himself as a professional
photographer. But he was a cowboy who knew
the work and its problems thoroughly, and while
the Open Range was gone by the time he began
taking his pictures on Texas ranches in the early
years of the present century, "he spent much of his
time on the larger outfits because their work with
cattle closely approximated that of the open range."
The 80 photographs reproduced here were all chosen
for permanent display in the Texas Memorial Mu-
seum, are nearly all outstanding for composition
and contrast, and have the further advantage of
better reproduction than Huffman's. Mr. Haley
contributes a 15-page introduction on Smith's sad-
deningly unsuccessful life. The American West;
the Pictorial Epic of a Continent, by Lucius M.
Beebe and Charles Clegg (New York, Dutton, 1955.
511 p.), is a vast collectanea of pictures from private
and public collections, which depict "as many as-
pects of the West in the nineteenth century as its
authors could come by." Many of them are wood
engravings which appeared in the illustrated week-
lies, and the presentation is sensational rather than
systematic.
4154. Dale, Edward Everett. Cow country. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1942.
265 p. 42-15483 F596.D25
Professor Dale was himself a cowboy and rancher
in his youth at the turn of the century, partner in
"our old ranching firm of Dale Brothers" with his
brother George, to whom he dedicates this volume.
In addition to his well-known study of The Range
Cattle Industry (q. v.) he has contributed a number
of related articles to periodicals, including the
American Hereford Journal and the Cattleman as
well as historical journals. These he has assembled
here and eliminated repetitive matter so as to form
"a fairly consecutive story of ranching in the Great
Plains." There are chapters on the antipathy be-
tween Texas trail-drivers and "Kansas Tayhawkers,"
on the contributions of Scots and Scottish capital to
the range catde industry, on cowboy humor, on
ranching in Indian reservations, and on "The
Passing of the Cow Country" as a distinct entity
and way of life.
4155. Dick, Everett N. Vanguards of the frontier,
a social history of the northern plains and
Rocky Mountains from the earliest white contacts
to the coming of the homemaker. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1941. xvi, 574 p.
41-6157 F591.D545
Bibliography: p. 519-545.
512 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4156. Dick, Everett N. The sod-house frontier,
1 854-1890; a social history of the northern
plains from the creation of Kansas & Nebraska to
the admission of the Dakotas. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1937. xviii, 550 p.
37-!9335 F591.D54
Bibliography: p. 519-528.
Of these companion volumes the sequel appeared
first by some four years. Vanguards of the Frontier
covers much the same ground as a number of other
works on the general history of the West, from the
fur companies and the mountain men to the cattle
ranchers of the Open Range and the migratory sheep
herders of the northern Rockies. It obtains its
special character from telling the story, so far as
possible, from the viewpoint of the ordinary par-
ticipant in these historic processes: the author is
less concerned, for instance, with the organization
and economics of the stage-coach companies, than
with typical scenes and incidents encountered by
stage-coach drivers and passengers. The Sod-House
Frontier, on the other hand, was throughout a quite
original synthesis, bringing for the first time within
one pair of covers a view of the entire process of
settlement which was more or less uniform through-
out Kansas, Nebraska, and the Dakotas. Prof. Dick
interviewed seven survivors from the days of settle-
ment, and utilized reminiscences preserved in man-
uscript by historical societies or printed in local
newspapers. The author gives a symbolic quality
to the sod house, the expedient devised by pioneer
settlers to provide shelter in a largely treeless land.
The prairie sod was cut with a spade into bricks
about three feet long, which could be built into
houses as large as 20 by 16 feet, which usually
leaked and might collapse, but could not burn or
blow down, and had an average life of six or seven
years. The life of these homesteaders is sympa-
thetically and realistically described in all its char-
acteristic aspects, from the use of buffalo chips as
fuel to the "play parties" held in communities where
dancing was taboo, and there are chapters on the
"Beginning of Machine Farming," "The Grange,"
and the coming of the railroad, regarded in each
community as a cause for celebration and some-
times "ardent wide-spread and all prevailing
inebriety."
4157. Gard, Wayne, The Chisholm Trail. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1954.
296 p. 54-6204 F596.G3
Bibliography: p. 265-280.
4158. Wellman, Paul I. The trampling herd.
New York, Carrick & Evans, 1939. 433 p.
39-24712 F591.W42
At head of title: The story of the catde range in
America.
"Some books to read" : p. 4 1 7-4 1 9.
The most conspicuous events of Open Range days
were the great cattle drives, in which herds of
thousands of steers were conducted north from
Texas by the trail bosses and their cowhands, run-
ning the hazards of Indians, rustlers, river crossings,
and stampedes. The earliest recorded drive goes
back to 1846, but after the Civil War the practice
was resumed on a larger scale and received its charac-
teristic organization in 1867, when Joseph G. McCoy,
an Illinois cattle dealer, set up a stockyard at Abilene,
Kansas, on the Union Pacific Railroad. The most
important route followed by the drivers for a dozen
years after 1867 got its name from an old Indian
trader, Jesse Chisholm (1806-68), who had a post on
the Arkansas River and made regular journeys south
to the North Canadian — a rather small portion of the
whole trail named after him. Mr. Wellman and
Mr. Gard tell much the same story but in antithetical
manners: the former speaks in general terms and
offers a multitude of anecdotes; the latter is con-
cerned to date and document every circumstance.
But Mr. Wellman is not inaccurate, and Mr. Gard is
anything but dull. Both describe the gunplay which
went on in Abilene and the other northern centers
of the trade, and which has acquired a whole litera-
ture of its own. Dee Brown and Martin F. Schmitt's
Trail Driving Days (New York, Scribner, 1952.
xxii, 264 p.) is a picture book containing a good
selection of contemporary photographs supple-
mented by prints of various kinds; the reproductions
are often much too dark, and the text is decidedly
thin.
4159. Kraenzel, Carl Frederick. The Great Plains
in transition. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1955. xiv, 428 p. maps, diagrs.,
tables. 55-9628 F591.K7
Bibliography: p. 391-418.
By the Great Plains Mr. Kraenzel means the
semiarid belt from the 98th meridian to the Rockies,
often referred to as the High Plains. His own
emphasis is largely sociological, but since most people
have at their disposal only fragmentary information
about the region, he has attempted to fill in "all other
operative factors affecting the Plains — geographical,
psychological, economic, historical, technological,
and social," in a book "written in the Plains, about
them, by one who is a part of them." The region
has long been an exploited hinterland, and its people,
whether rural or urban, belong to one or another
minority group, whose objectives cannot be realized
and who exist in a state of chronic frustration and
irritation. They must all "adapt or get out": the
adaptation to conditions, which has gone some way
local history: regions, states, and cities / 513
in agriculture, must be extended to all phases, of life.
The only solution lies in a regionalism whereby
"the area can become a unity once again," and its
keys for survival are the development of three basic
traits: "the creation of necessary reserves, the intro-
duction of flexibility into certain social operations,
and the acquisition of mobility in still other aspects
of the social order." The author goes on to give
more concrete meaning to these somewhat abstract
conceptions in various realms of living.
4160. Rister, Carl Coke. Southern plainsmen.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1938. xviii, 289 p. 38-32983 F596.R58
Bibliography: p. 263-279.
As here defined, the Southern Plains are divided
from the Northern by the South Platte River, which
runs through northern Colorado and southern Ne-
braska. They have a character of their own de-
rived from their higher average temperature, longer
growing season, and faster rate of evaporation.
Prof. Rister here describes the life lived upon them
from the early 19th century, when only a few white
hunters ventured into this preserve of the Arapahoes,
Cheyennes, Kiowas, and Comanches, down to the
opening of the Oklahoma lands to settlement on
April 22, 1889. He divides the subject into topical
chapters and at times fails to make chronological
progressions as clear as could be wished. His con-
cern is with agricultural settlement rather than with
grazing use, and he allots only one 15-page chapter
to the "Life of the Range Rider," whom he finds
neither romantic nor admirable. There are de-
scriptions of the nocturnal raids of the Indians
which went on until the mid-70's, of the great grass-
hopper plagues of 1868-69 anc^ x 874-75 as well as
of less spectacular hindrances to agriculture, and
of the "breakdowns" or square dances in which the
setders relaxed from their harsh toil. Many settlers
became discouraged and inscribed "Back to God's
Country" on their wagon covers, but the majority
held on by patience, cheerfulness, and reserving a
surplus in good years to tide them over the lean
ones.
4161. Rollins, Philip Ashton. The cowboy; an
unconventional history of civilization on the
old-time cattle range. Rev. and enl. ed. New York,
Scribner, 1936. 402 p.
36-27318 F596.R75 1936
4162. Frantz, Joe B., and Julian Ernest Choate.
The American cowboy: the myth & the real-
ity. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955.
232 p. 55-9629 F596F75
Bibliography: p. 203-222.
4163. Sonnichsen, Charles L. Cowboys and cat-
tle kings; life on the range today. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. xviii, 316 p.
50-14081 F596.S72
Mr. Rollins spent some years on the Open Range,
in the late 8o's and early 90's, and became a zealous
collector of western Americana, eventually turning
his collection over to Princeton University. His
aim has been "to recount accurately the every-day
life of the old-time Range," confining himself, with
certain specified exceptions, to what he actually saw
and heard. His book has been accused of taking
too idealistic a view of cowboy character, but in
matters of dress, equipment, and characteristic
operations it receives the compliment of being fre-
quently drawn upon by other writers on the subject.
Messrs. Frantz and Choate are especially concerned
with the vast proportions and wide range of the cow-
boy myth in American popular literature, entertain-
ment, folklore, and life in general, and are moved
thereby to many a quip. This heroic figure they
set against the average cowboy of 1867-85 — "merely
a unique occupational type who was concerned with
'cow work' on the range, raising, rounding up,
branding, trailing, haying, and mending." They
are, however, compelled to concede that there is
abundant historical basis for most of the standard
ingredients of horse opera — with the exception of
the marathon fist fights, for cowboys, untrained to
use their fists, did their fighting with knife or
revolvef. The concluding four chapters review
cowboy literature, both fiction and nonfiction. Mr.
Sonnichsen's volume was commissioned by the
Rockefeller Committee at the University of Okla-
homa in consequence of the debate which broke
out in 1947 over the catdemen of today in relation
to the conservation of natural resources. During
the first half of 1949 the author "traveled from end
to end of what was once the Cattle Kingdom and
is still the heart of the cattle country, learning every-
thing" he could. The result is a miscellaneous
reportorial volume that mirrors the variety of enter-
prise, personnel, and occupation which now charac-
terizes the industry. He finds that "the all-round
cowpunchers of the past are becoming victims of
specialization," and that, "as the farm has merged
with the ranch, the cowboy has merged with the
hired man" — but a hired man who still wears the
uniform of a horseman of the Plains and thinks of
himself as one.
4164. Webb, Walter Prescott. The Great Plains.
[Boston] Ginn, 1931. xv, 525 p. illus.
31-20202 F591.W35
Bibliography at end of each chapter except the
first.
An epoch-making work of synthesis and inter-
514 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pretation which has been fundamental to practically
all subsequent treatments of the region with which
it deals. The Great Plains, and especially the High
Plains from the 98th meridian to the Rockies, are a
level and treeless region where the rainfall is in-
sufficient for normal agriculture. These character-
istics have affected all historic processes involving
the human beings who have ventured into the area.
The Plains Indians obtained horses from the Span-
iards and, as soon as they had done so, became so
formidable as raiders that no further expansion of
Spanish colonization was possible. The Texans
were more successful because they seized upon Sam-
uel Colt's invention of the six-shooting revolver,
which the rest of the country had rejected, and so
became able to defeat the Indians from horseback.
Once the Indian and the buffalo had been elim-
inated, the High Plains became a cattle kingdom
because the industrial revolution had not yet devised
the means whereby the agricultural frontier could
expand into them. In the mid-i87o's a satisfactory
barbed-wire fence was invented in Illinois and
speedily produced a revolution on the Plains, effect-
ing the transition from the open range to enclosed
ranches, and permitting the advent of the home-
steaders. The survival of both ranch and farm was
made possible by the introduction of the windmill,
which gave access to ground water and alleviated if
it did not cure the dearth of water. This chronic
dearth has led, in the eight dryest states, to a de-
parture from the common law of water rights in
favor of the arid-region doctrine of appropriation,
or the Colorado system. In 1940 the Social Science
Research Council devoted its Bulletin 46 to an
assault upon Prof. Webb's conclusions by Fred A.
Shannon, which has had small influence.
M. The Great Plains: Local
NORTH DAKOTA
4165. Kazeck, Melvin E. North Dakota; a human
and economic geography. Fargo, North
Dakota Institute for Regional Studies, North Da-
kota Agricultural College, 1956. 264 p.
56-13250 F636.K3
Includes bibliography.
"Can such of our problems as an obvious lack of
industry, a decreasing or stationary population, a
need for water conservation, a need for state plan-
ning, a need for better land use, and a lack of re-
sources use be neglected and ignored any longer?"
But North Dakota remains "one of the most ex-
clusively agricultural States in the nation," and the
three main chapters of this well-made geography
deal with "The General Farming Area," a fringe
along the eastern boundary, "The Cattle-Wheat Re-
gion," the large southwestern corner, and "The
Wheat Region," the remainder including 32 out of
the 53 counties. Industries are limited to flour mill-
ing, meat packing, potato processing, and some
mineral use, especially since 1951, when oil was
found in the west of the State, resulting in 601 pro-
ducing wells by 1955. The industrial development
so much wished for must depend upon conservation
of resources and planning for their future use.
NEBRASKA
4166.
Olson, James C. History of Nebraska.
Line drawings by Franz Altschuler. Lin-
coln, University of Nebraska Press, 1955. 372 p.
54-8444 F666.O48
"Suggested reading" at end of each chapter.
The author has sought to supply the long-standing
"need for a one-volume general survey of the his-
tory of Nebraska which might serve as an introduc-
tion to the history of the state for the college student
and the general reader." He apologizes for the
result, particularly since "much of the basic research
upon which sound synthesis must be based still re-
mains to be done." In fact no State has any com-
parable volume which is its superior in compre-
hensiveness, selection of material, organization,
modernity of outlook, and lucidity of writing. The
author has at his disposal a gentle irony to which
he treats Prof. Samuel Aughey and other learned
proponents of the doctrine that "rainfalls follow the
plough," which was used to attract homesteaders
to central Nebraska in the early 1880's. Some sug-
gestive chapter headings are "The Eighties — Whose
Prosperity?" "The Fading Frontier," and "Adapt-
ing Government to the Machine Age." There are
excellent sketch maps for particular purposes, and
occasional statistical tables highly pertinent to the
argument. Mr. Altschuler's decorations are dis-
tinguished, as is the volume's entire format.
4167.
4168.
KANSAS
Nichols, Alice. Bleeding Kansas. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1954. 307 p.
54-5295 F685.N6
Howes, Charles C. This place called Kan-
sas. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1952. 236 p. 52-3380 F691.H68
local history: regions, states, and cities / 515
The history of Kansas is unique among the 48
states in that its first six or seven years were a period
of continuous turmoil and of frequent violence and
bloodshed, whereas the succeeding century has been
one of prevailing tranquillity and peaceful develop-
ment, in which significant trends and events are
usually a part of large national or regional move-
ments. Miss Nichols tells the story of the turbulent
years between the Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854
and the admission of Kansas to statehood in January
1861, in a highly dramatic narrative with a strong
pro-Southern bias. Since she cheerfully admits this,
and makes abolitionists instead of border ruffians
the villains of her story, the reader may do his own
discounting, or consult a work in the pro-Northern
tradition such as Leverett Wilson Spring's volume
in the American Commonwealths series, Kansas;
the Prelude to the War for the Union, rev. ed. (Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. 340 p.). Mr. Howes'
volume is "developed" from newspaper and maga-
zine articles and notes left by his father, Cecil Howes,
who for over 40 years was the Kansas City Star's
statehouse correspondent in Topeka. The first two
parts consist of brief chapters on standard historical
topics; the last two, "The Stuff It's Made Of" and
"Yesterday and Today," have chapters on folkways
and episodes of social history, such as "From Saloons
to Bootleggers to Bottle Stores," "The Water-Witch-
ing Vogue," and "Traveling under Wind Power."
OKLAHOMA
4169. McReynolds, Edwin C. Oklahoma; a his-
tory of the Sooner State. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press, 1954. 461 p. illus., maps.
54-10052 F694.M16
Bibliography: p. 434-445.
4170. Debo, Angie. Oklahoma, foot-loose and
fancy-free. Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1949. 258 p. 49—48798 F700.D4
4171. Debo, Angie. Prairie City, the story of an
American community. New York, Knopf,
1944. xiv, 245, viii p. illus. 44-4798 F694.D4
Mr. McReynolds has been a resident of Oklahoma
since 1892, and his book is a sober and systematic
presentation of the early history of the area, and
of the more formal elements in its economic and
political development since the Civil War. It may
be described as derivative, but only in the sense that
it draws upon the detailed studies of such Oklahoma
scholars as Foreman, Dale, Debo, and Gittinger in
order to construct a unified narrative, from Coro-
nado's expedition of 1540 to the gubernatorial elec-
tion of 1950. Six chapters of some 165 pages cover
the Indian regime from the removal of the Five
Civilized Tribes to about 1875. The years since
the acquisition of statehood in 1907 are covered as
successive gubernatorial administrations, with some
economic summaries in the penultimate chapter,
and a final one on "The Culture of Oklahoma."
Miss Debo's Oklahoma, on the other hand, is con-
cerned with Oklahoma life and character, and in-
corporates only enough informal geography and
history to serve as background for her social and
psychological interpretations. The violence of Okla-
homa politics is attributed to this basic cause: "a
people agrarian in outlook and Jacksonian in politics
had to cope with industrial problems developing
with a speed never before attained in American his-
tory." Oklahomans are individualists without
strong group loyalties of any kind, which makes on
the one hand for originality and initiative, and on
the other for bad politics, economic instability, "and
other collective failures." In Prairie City Miss Debo
displays true Oklahoman originality, for who before
ever chose "to write of a typical, rather than an
actual, community, a composite of numerous Okla-
homa settlements, of which some are still in exist-
ence, and others have long been ghost towns"?
The device was adopted for greater freedom of
expression, but while the people are fictive, the
chronology, statistics, and events are actual, and
based upon the author's own home town of Marshall
and its region; "even the conversations are recorded
or remembered conversations." Readers may also
compare the developments in Prairie City with those
in Miss Debo's slender volume on Tulsa: From
Cree\ Town to Oil Capital (Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1943. 123 p.). Three hundred
years of American history — "Indian occupation,
ranching, pioneering, industrial development, and
finally disillusionment and the recasting of ob-
jectives— have been telescoped within the single
life-time of some of the older Tulsans."
N. The Rocky Mountain Region: General
4172. Atwood, Wallace W. The Rocky Moun-
tains. New York, Vanguard Press, 1945.
324 p. (American mountain series, edited by
Roderick Peattie, v. 3) 45-11388 F721.A8
Bibliography: p. 311-315.
Wallace W. Atwood (1872-1949), president of
Clark University from 1920-46, was a field geologist
as well as a professor of the subject in major universi-
516 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ties, and was attached to the U. S. Geological Survey
from 1 90 1. In 1909 he was assigned to make a
model physiographic study of mountain erosion and
sculpture, which took him into the high ranges from
New Mexico to Alaska — "he has ridden with pack
train the length of the sky-line trail," says Mr. Peat-
tie in his introduction to his teacher's book. In
this exceptional volume Dr. Atwood combined an
oudine, in untechnical language, of the geological
evolution and structure of the Rockies with a vivid
evocation and appreciation of mountain scenery and
the life of pack train and mountain camp. Three
final sections summarize the gold-mining strikes in
various areas, the life of "Indians, Ranchmen, Farm-
ers, and Tourists," and the 14 national parks of the
Rockies, seven of which are Canadian. A general
map and eight cross-sections are supplied by Erwin
Raisz.
4173. Garnsey, Morris E. America's new frontier,
the Mountain West. New York, Knopf,
1950. xviii, 314, ix p. maps, diagrs.
50-7765 F721.G3 1950
Bibliography: p. 310-314.
The eight states of the Mountain West are a new
frontier, in the author's conception, only potentially,
for their recent economic trends have exhibited small
progress, and the present crucial stage must deter-
mine whether they will instead become a back-
water— "an underdeveloped and neglected region
whose resources have been irreparably exploited and
destroyed." At present, with only 4.8 persons per
square mile, they are underpopulated, and their labor
remains relatively unproductive and unremunerated
because they are confined to raw materials which are
manufactured elsewhere. The region's balance of
payments has been kept in equilibrium only by sub-
stantial Federal subsidies, which means that it is in
effect a charge upon the other sections. The author
offers the outline of a regional program based on the
optimum utilization of Western resources of water
and hydroelectric power, which could double the ir-
rigated areas and increase power capacity so as to
provide the basis for Western industrialization and
minerals development. Such a program "will re-
sult in population growth, greater stability in the
regional economy, a rise in per capita income, and an
increase in the region's contribution to the wealth
and security of the American people."
4174. Lavender, David. The Big Divide. Gar-
den City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 321 p.
48-11660 F591.L39
Bibliography: p. [2991-307.
Mr. Lavender, a resident of Colorado and an
enthusiastic connoisseur of his mountainous region,
here essays a presentation of life in "those sections
of the Rockies which lie inside Colorado, Wyoming,
eastern Utah, and northern New Mexico," from the
days of the mountain men to the present. This he
achieves in 17 episodic or topical chapters, each more
or less complete in itself, but so disposed as to form
a reasonably chronological sequence. The first
gold rush, just before the Civil War, resulted in
"poor man's diggings, placer beds that could be
stripped to bedrock with no other resources than
hard work, ordinary tools, and limited capital."
Subsequent chapters deal with the Mountain Utes,
the silver stampedes of the later 19th century, early
transportation principally by mulepower, the narrow-
gauge mountain railroads, labor violence in the
Cripple Creek district, the development of stock
ranching, the conservation and reclamation move-
ments, the rise of the tourist trade, and the modern
sports of climbing and skiing. Mr. Lavender's
story of his own experiences in mining and cattle
ranching appeared in 1943: One Man's West (Gar-
den City, N. Y., Doubleday. 298 p.).
4175. Vestal, Stanley. Mountain men. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin. 1937. 296 p.
_ 37-8786 F591.V47
"Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. [293]-
296.
In the spring of 1822 the Missouri partners, Wil-
liam H. Ashley and Andrew Henry, adopted a new
method of conducting the fur trade: they advertised
for 100 enterprising young men to ascend the Mis-
souri to its source and be employed there. These
white trappers would meet at an annual rendez-
vous in some mountain valley previously agreed
upon, turn over their year's take of furs, and receive
their wages and a new outfit. Such was the origin
of the mountain men, so called because they lived
the year round in the Rockies. Mr. Vestal tells
their story through the Mexican War in a succession
of dramatic episodes, involving such figures as Jim
Bridger, Jedediah Smith, Thomas Fitzpatrick, Wil-
liam Sublette, and Old Bill Williams. Some of
his information is oral in origin, derived from his
stepfather and from Indians of western Oklahoma.
4176. West, Ray B., ed. Rocky Mountain cities;
with an introduction by Carey McWilliams.
New York, Norton, 1949. 320 p.
49-1907 F591.W463
Contents. — Reno, the state city, by W. V. T.
Clark. — The Coeur d'Alene, vulnerable valley, by
J. K. Howard. — El Paso, big mountain town, by
Duncan Aikman. — Cheyenne, cowman's capital,
by Dee Linford. — Albuquerque, a place to live in, by
Erna Fergusson. — Salt Lake City, city of the Saints,
by D. L. Morgan. — Tucson, the folk industry, by
June Caldwell. — Butte, the copper camp, by John
local history: regions, states, and cities / 517
Stahlberg. — Santa Fe, city of many molds, by Haniel
Long. — Denver, reluctant capital, by C. A. Graham
and Robert Perkin. — Notes on the contributors.
Sketches of life, the economic structure, and poli-
tics in nine cities of the intermountain West, together
with Burke, Kellogg, and Wallace, the three towns
of the Coeur d'Alene valley in northern Idaho. Mr.
McWilliams presents them as case studies which
demonstrate that the West "suffers from the effects
of a too rapid, one-sided, and improvident
industrialization."
4177. Wolle, Muriel V. (Sibell) The bonanza
trail; ghost towns and mining camps of the
West. Illustrated by the author. Bloomington, In-
diana University Press, 1953. xvi, 510 p. maps.
53-10019 F591.W853
"A Glossary of the Mining and Mineral Industry,
by Albert H. Fay": p. 477-842.
"Selected bibliography": p. 483-489.
During 195 1 and 1952 Mrs. Wolle, professor of
fine arts in the University of Colorado, traveled over
70,000 miles by motor car, largely on mountainous
back roads, seeking out and sketching the ghost
towns of the West. She covered the eleven western-
most States of the Union, as well as the Black Hills
of South Dakota, concentrating on the places where
the earliest discoveries of precious metals were made,
and those where the richest strikes were found.
She includes not only the true ghost towns — "com-
pletely deserted, although buildings still line their
streets" — but the partials, where a portion of the
town remains inhabited, or where mining has been
supplanted by other pursuits. Mrs. Wolle's draw-
ings have the same qualities of emphasis and clarity
as her writing, and when possible she has enlivened
her accounts of the old mining communities by ex-
tracts from contemporary newspaper files. The
ghost towns, to which her book forms so attractive
a guide, she does not find depressing: "Behind the
present ruins I see the once bustling cities whose
teeming life made possible the West of today."
O. The Rocky Mountain Region: Local
MONTANA
4178. Howard, Joseph Kinsey. Montana; high,
wide, and handsome. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1943. 347 p.
_ A43-3702 F731.H86
"Acknowledgments and bibliography": p. [330]-
339-
Howard (1906-1951) was a Montana journalist,
editor of the Great Falls Leader, and his book, in
spite of the unpropitious time at which it appeared,
made a considerable stir and inaugurated a critical
trend in the regional literature of the Mountain
West. It is a vigorously written indictment of the
elements of exploitation in successive phases of Mon-
tana's economy, which made it "an object lesson in
American domestic imperialism." "Montana's is
a cashcrop agriculture, hitherto exploited to the
limit while the soil remained"; minerals have been
extracted in the same spirit; and the development
of hydroelectric power has been artificially retarded.
The root of the State's economic disasters in the
1920's and 1930's, the author suggests, was the cam-
paign of James J. Hill and the Northern Pacific to
attract homesteaders, which increased the State's
wheat acreage twelvefold in the decade after 1909,
only to lead to dust storms and foreclosures in periods
of drouth. Mr. Howard also edited Montana Mar-
gins, a State Anthology (New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1946. xviii, 527 p.), which has no
such special emphasis, but aims only to picture life
in the State "as it was and is." There are many
magazine articles and newspaper extracts, poems,
short stories, and episodes from novels in the 11
topical sections of this very representative selection.
WYOMING
4179. Hafen, Le Roy R., and Francis Marion
Young. Fort Laramie and the pageant of
the West, 1834-1890. Glendale, Calif., A. H.
Clark, 1938. 429 p. 38-7543 F761.H24
The Oregon Trail, a route well known to trappers
from 1823, follows the North Platte River and
crosses its tributary, the Laramie (so named as early
as 1821, from an otherwise unknown trapper), in
border country between the high plains and the
mountains. At this natural point for trade between
Indian and white, in 1834 William Sublette and
Robert Campbell constructed a fort which, after its
rebuilding in 1840 or 1841, was usually called Fort
Laramie. From 1841 on it was a landmark for
the emigrants in their trains of covered wagons, and
in 1849 it was bought by the United States from
the American Fur Company and received a garrison
of three companies, the majority mounted riflemen.
From its purchase until as late as 1876 it was of
518 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
importance in all the Indian affairs of the region.
Near it, in the summer of 1854, Lieutenant Grattan
and his company were massacred by the Brule Sioux
who, in their turn, were massacred a year later by
General Harney's command. By 1890 the Fort's
usefulness was past, and it was abandoned by order
of the War Department. The authors' unadorned
narrative, made up in large part of extracts from
the sources, indeed makes a striking pageant of
the Old West as seen from a single strategic view-
point.
COLORADO
4180. Fritz, Percy Stanley. Colorado, the Cen-
tennial State. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1941. 518 p. (Prentice-Hall books on history,
edited by Carl Wittke) 41-1853 F776.F83
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
A textbook of standard type by the then assistant
professor of history at the University of Colorado.
After an introducton on general Western history,
some 90 pages are allotted to the pioneer period, 50
to the territorial (1861-76: "the Centennial State"
refers to the fact that Colorado was admitted to the
Union during the hundredth anniversary of the
Declaration of Independence), and 250 to the period
of statehood. In addition to the usual topics, the
last part has chapters on "The Setdement of the
Western Slope" since 1880, on "The Motor Age"
since 1910, and on "Aesthetic and Cultural Attain-
ments."
4181. Sprague, Marshall. Money mountain; the
story of Cripple Creek gold. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1953. xx, 342 p. illus.
52-12637 F784.C8S6
Bibliography: p. [321 1-327.
Cripple Creek, in the mountains 18 miles west
of Colorado Springs, became the world's greatest
gold camp in 1891, boomed until 1902, maintained
high production until 1917, and down to 1952
yielded 625 tons of gold valued at $432,000,000.
The district's population rose from 15 to 50,111 at
the turn of the century, and has since sunk to 1,980.
This boom started not in a remote wilderness but
in a ranching area, and was easily accessible, from
1895 by railroad. Mr. Sprague has used Cripple
Creek and Colorado Springs newspapers, and has
interviewed many survivors or descendants. He
has been able to reconstruct the story through its
leading personalities, and follows Bob Womack,
the part-time cowboy who made the original strike
on Oct. 20, 1890, to his death, as a penniless para-
lytic, 19 years later. Of Cripple Creek's 28 mil-
lionaires, the most attention goes to the richest,
Winfield Scott Stratton, "a weary, defeated carpenter
who had spent most of his forty-four years working
for three dollars a day," who cared nothing for his
money nor for Colorado Springs society, and who,
after giving or throwing away millions, left an
estate of $6,000,000 to establish a home for poor chil-
dren and old people. There are detailed narratives
of the miners' strikes of 1893-94 and I9°3_4> and
of the double fire which demolished the town in
1896.
4182. Chittenden, Hiram Martin. Yellowstone
National Park, historical & descriptive. Rev.
by Eleanor Chittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story
[5th ed.] Stanford, Calif., Stanford University Press,
1949. 286 p. plates, fold. map.
49-9516 F722.C54 1949
Yellowstone National Park in northwestern Wyo-
ming, a natural wonderland containing the yellow
walls of the Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone
River, the upper and the lower Falls, fossil forests,
and more geysers than are to be found in the rest
of the globe, was not thoroughly explored until
1870, and has been a Federal reserve since 1872.
General Chittenden (no. 4148), in the course of
two official assignments there in the 1890's, gathered
the materials for this comprehensive manual of the
Park, which he revised a second time just before his
death in 1917. It has since been kept up to date
by the Stanford University Press, and provides full
information on the discovery and early history of
the region, its administration as a park by the Fed-
eral Government, and its physical characteristics
and wildlife.
UTAH
4183. Hunter, Milton R. Utah, the story of her
people, 1540-1947; a centennial history of
Utah. Salt Lake City, Deseret News Press, 1946.
xvi, 431 p. illus. 46-8266 F826.H85 1946
This revised edition of the author's Utah in Her
Western Setting, 2d ed. (1943) was published in ob-
servance of the centennial of the arrival in 1847 of
the Mormon pioneers in the valley of the Great Salt
Lake. Having searched across four-fifths of the
continent for a place to establish their new faith,
they contributed to opening up the vast resources of
the West by planting settlements in a presumed
desert and developing irrigation projects. Early
chapters deal with the Spanish exploration cf the
territory that became the State of Utah in 1896, the
fur traders and trappers, and Government explora-
tions prior to the arrival of the Mormons. Their
migration under the leadership of Joseph Smith,
the founder, from New York to Ohio, Missouri, and
Illinois, where Smith was killed, and the trek to
Utah under Brigham Young are described in sue-
local history: regions, states, and cities / 519
ceeding chapters. The Mormon doctrine of plural
marriage, and economic and political solidarity, led
to conflicts between Mormons and non-Mormons,
and in 1887 Congress passed more rigid laws against
polygamy, which was discontinued in 1890 by a
Manifesto issued by Wilford Woodruff, President of
the Church. In the final chapter the author
describes the impact of World War II on the de-
velopment of Utah, and the economic and climatic
advantages of Utah as a place to live.
NEVADA
4184. Lillard, Richard G. Desert challenge, an in-
terpretation of Nevada. New York, Knopf,
1942. viii, 388, ix p. plates, maps (1 fold.)
42-20630 F841.L5
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments" (p. 385-388).
Geology and climatology, history and sociology
are combined with guidebook data in this interpre-
tation of the influences that have created this region
of contrasts — the sixth state in area but the last in
population, although it became a state in 1864.
Those influences, the author points out, came mostly
from the outside. Nevada's fabulous mines early
attracted attention, and the State suffered the con-
sequences of the exploitation of its leading resource
by a transient population. Chapters are devoted to
the mining camps, and towns such as Virginia City
and Goldfield, which have "lived on in contracted
form," and the true ghost towns, which are re-
minders of more affluent years but are also "a genu-
ine American antiquity as meaningful and signifi-
cant as the trench mounds of Valley Forge and the
white church at Lexington." A final chapter
describes the prosperity of Reno and Las Vegas as
"cosmopolitan divorce capitals." The author, a na-
tive of California, pursued advanced study at the
universities of Montana, Harvard, and Iowa, and
this book is part of his doctoral dissertation at the
last.
4185. Lyman, George D. The saga of the Corn-
stock Lode; boom days in Virginia City.
New York, Scribner, 1947 [°i934] 407 p.
54-26534 F849.V8L92 1947
The Comstock Lode — named after Henry T. P.
Comstock, a ne'er-do-well sheep-herder — was the
West's richest strike (1859) and Virginia City —
christened by a drunken prospector known only as
"Old Virginny" — was its most feverish boom town.
Dr. Lyman, a San Francisco physician who was
born in Virginia City after its heyday was over, has
sought out the facts of its origin and first boom
in a variety of original sources, and has presented
them in so gasping and breathless a style that few
readers would suspect the book's solid foundations.
This story of grinding labor, sudden wealth, perpet-
ual litigation, recurrent bloodshed, and riotous relax-
ations could well have endured a more sober and
coherent narration, and so fact-filled a book deserved
an index. It ends with the slump of 1865, which
came about when the surface ore had been skimmed
off — but only $45 million out of an eventual $900
million had been extracted, and the Comstock's
greatest days still lay ahead.
P. The Far Southwest: General
4186. Cleland, Robert Glass. This reckless breed
of men; the trappers and fur traders of the
Southwest. New York, Knopf, 1950. xv, 361,
xx p. 50-6356 F592.C62 1950
Bibliography: p. 347-361.
In this volume Dr. Cleland, one of the permanent
research staff of the Huntington Library since 1943,
has utilized widely scattered manuscript sources to
supply both a neglected chapter in the history of the
American fur trade and a connected account of the
real pioneers of the American Southwest. These
were the intrepid and indefatigable "mountain
men," who pursued the vanishing beaver along the
desert or semidesert rivers of the Southwest, endur-
ing terrible hardships and carrying on a merciless
feud with the Indians of the region. Their ex-
peditions, in which 50 to 100 men might participate
either as bands of independent trappers, or under
the auspices of partnerships or companies, continued
for some 20 years after 1820. The trade, however,
was in decline after 1835, the fashion in men's hats
having turned from beaver to silk, and by 1845 the
mountain men were "a fast-disappearing race."
Meanwhile such skillful and daring explorers as
Jedediah Strong Smith, James Ohio Pattie, Ewing
Young, and Joseph Reddeford Walker had blazed
the trails of the Southwest for the benefit of traders,
soldiers, Government officials, and settlers.
4187. Fergusson, Erna. Our Southwest; photo-
graphs by Ruth Frank and others. New
York, Knopf, 1940. 376 p. 40-7056 F786.F49
520 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A granddaughter of Southwestern pioneers, the
author was horn in Alhuquerque. As a teacher in
the public schools, a dude wrangler, and lecturer,
she early gained an insight into the history and
traditions that produced the people of the Southwest
and their characteristic manners and customs. Here
she interprets the region in terms of the significance
of such cities as Fort Worth, San Antonio, El Paso,
Tucson, Phoenix, Prescott, Gallup, Albuquerque,
Santa Fe, and Taos, and the people whose Indian
and Spanish descent has colored the civilization of
the region. "Fred Harvey, Civilizer," "the man
who made the desert blossom with a beefsteak," and
went on to become a propagandist of the regional
arts and crafts, gets a chapter to himself. A final
chapter on "The Interpreters," a running com-
mentary on Southwestern books and authors, does
service for a bibliography.
4188. Gregg, Josiah. Commerce of the prairies;
edited by Max L. Moorhead. Norman, Uni-
versity of Oklahoma Press, 1954. xxxviii, 469 p.
(American exploration and travel [17])
54-10055 F800.G83 1954
"Gregg's bibliography [reconstructed by the
editor]": p. 445-447. "Editor's sources": p. 448-
454-
Prompted by ill health to seek the curative air
of the prairies, Josiah Gregg (1 806-1 850) set out
with a merchant caravan from Independence, Mo.,
for Santa Fe in 1831, and by 1840 had crossed
the Great Plains eight times. As a trader of Amer-
ican goods for Mexican silver and mules, he had
developed a "passion for Prairie life" which he did
not expect to survive. An avid reader with a natural
scientific bent, Gregg made notes on the animals,
the plants, and the Indians of the prairies, on the
mineral resources of New Mexico, and the manners
and customs of its people, and on his journeys to
Mexico and Texas. During those journeys he
blazed new trails, some of which became favorites
with later comers, and gathered material for what
became in 1845 "the most complete and reliable map
of the prairies then in existence." His observa-
tions were published in 1844 as Commerce of the
Prairies (New York, H. G. Langley. 2 v.), which
"has been recognized for more than a hundred years
as the classic description of the early southern plains
and as the epic of the Santa Fe Trail." It has gone
through "fourteen printings (seven during Gregg's
own short lifetime) and came from the presses in
England and Germany as well as the United States."
Mr. Moorhead calls his volume the "first edition
of Gregg's complete text, notes, and maps which
also contains a biographical introduction, critical
notes, and a list of the author's sources."
4189. Richardson, Rupert Norval, and Carl Coke
Rister. The greater Southwest; the eco-
nomic, social, and cultural development of Kansas,
Oklahoma, Texas, Utah, Colorado, Nevada, New
Mexico, Arizona, and California from the Spanish
conquest to the twentieth century. Glendale, Calif.,
A. H. Clark, 1934. 506 p. 34-28934 F786.R524
"References for additional reading" at end of each
chapter.
"As used in this book the Southwest or the Greater
Southwest includes the country of the United States
west of the eastern border of the Great Plains . . .
and south of the northern boundaries of the tier of
states extending from Kansas to California." This
well-proportioned textbook deals mainly with the
foundations of civilization as they were planted in
that region from the coming of the first white men
to the close of the 19th century. The spirit of the
settlers was molded by the climate, Indian and
Spanish influences, and the rapidity with which
the area developed after it was acquired from Mexico
in 1848. A citizenry of "irrepressible optimism,
social democracy, and resourcefulness" emerged.
The discovery of gold in California, the develop-
ment of the cattle and sheep industries, the building
of railroads to the Pacific, and the establishment of
thousands of farms and agricultural communities
with their irrigation and reclamation projects, by
the end of the century gave the Southwest a posi-
tion of significance in the economic structure of
the United States.
4190. Vestal, Stanley. The book lover's South-
west; a guide to good reading, by Walter S.
Campbell (Stanley Vestal) Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1955. xii, 287 p.
55-6367 Z1251.S8V4
Bibliography: p. 269-272.
Professor Campbell of the University of Okla-
homa English Department, after writing or editing
21 books on the Southwest under the pen name of
Stanley Vestal, surveys its literature under his own.
Arizona and the eastern halves of Oklahoma and
Texas are excluded from consideration. The books
considered are arranged by categories, with biog-
raphy (16 subsections), description and interpreta-
tion, and history receiving the greatest amount of
attention, but with substantial sections for folklore,
humor, juveniles, poetry, and fiction. No assess-
ment is attempted, as being beyond the powers of
a contemporary, but the writer frequently gives vent
to his enthusiasm. He certainly makes his point
that, considering the newness of the region as an
area of Anglo-American setdement, the quantity,
variety, and quality of the literary achievement is
impressive. A companion to the course taught by
local history: regions, states, and cities / 521
James Frank Dobie at the University of Texas, en-
titled Guide to Life and Literature of the Southwest,
rev. and enl. (Dallas, Southern Methodist University
Press, 1952. 222 p.), is especially strong on Texas,
cowboys, cattle, and folklore.
4 19 1. [Wertenbaker, Green Peyton] America's
heartland, the Southwest, by Green Peyton
[pseud.] Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1948. xvii, 285 p. 48-10982 F396.W4
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments": p. 274-277.
This is the introductory volume to a series of
books about the culture of the Southwest projected
by the University of Oklahoma with funds from the
Rockefeller Foundation. As an experienced jour-
nalist, the author describes the impressions which
he has gathered from interviews and ten thousand
miles of travel in the states of Arkansas, Louisiana,
Texas, Oklahoma, and New Mexico. It is not of-
fered as a scholarly study, but as a general survey
and an impression to "explain why the Southwest is
important to the life of our time, and how its people
come to be the way they are."
Q. The Far Southwest : Local
TEXAS
4192. Goodwyn, Frank. Lone-Star Land; twen-
tieth-century Texas in perspective. New
York, Knopf, 1955. 352 p. 55-7850 F391.2.G6
"This book embraces the geology, geography, an-
thropology, history, economics and culture of Texas.
Selectivity is necessarily high, and all details are
eschewed except those which delineate the essential
peculiarities of the chosen area." The result is a
genuine synthesis, presented in a clear and straight-
forward exposition, and illustrated by excellendy
chosen and reproduced photographs. The author
is evidently fascinated by the personality of W. Lee
O'Daniel, whose political career he treats at some
length.
4193. Hogan, William Ransom. The Texas re-
public; a social and economic history. Nor-
man, University of Oklahoma Press, 1946. 338 p.
46-8214 F390.H6
Bibliography: p. 299-326.
For ten years before being admitted to the Union
in 1846, Texas was an independent republic. This
volume describes everyday existence in that frontier
democracy during those years. It is a record of
"devout circuit riders, pioneer physicians and school
teachers, unruly young lawyers, gun-bearing rowdies
and duelists, town builders and land pirates, planters
and farmers" who, at work and play, developed
those characteristics which distinguish Texans from
the citizens of other states. The author attributes
much of Texas nationalism to its public-land system:
here free land was obtained, not from a distant
government in Washington, but from a national
government that was close at hand, and that did
what it could to discourage large-scale land specu-
lation, especially by nonresidents.
4194. Richardson, Rupert Norval. Texas, the
Lone Star State. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1943. xix, 590 p. [Prentice-Hall history series;
Carl Wittke, editor] 43-2288 F386.R52
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
A book intended both for college classes and the
reading public, whose purpose "is to provide, as far
as the limitations of a single volume will permit, a
complete survey of the history of Texas." It gives
equal attention to the romantic and colorful period
of Texas history, and to more prosaic events such as
the development of education and the fluctuations of
economic conditions. Approximately half the book
is devoted to "the extension of farming into the
Great Plains, the growth of industries, the revolution
in transportation, efforts to regulate business, the
program of social security, the regulations of agri-
culture, and the varied political history" of the years
since 1876 — a period hitherto neglected by his-
torians. Lists of "Governors of Texas" and "United
States Senators from Texas" form an Appendix.
4195. McCarty, John L. Maverick town, the story
of old Tascosa. With chapter decorations
by Harold D. Bugbee. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1946. 277 p.
46-6343 F394.T17M3
Bibliography: p. 261-266.
Tascosa, high up in the Texas Panhandle, is
typical of those communities in the West that once
flourished, and then declined into ghost towns.
For nearly a decade beginning in the late 1870's,
Tascosa as an open-range trading center and the
"legal capital of ten counties in a cattle empire,"
was the center of all affairs, public and private, law-
ful and unlawful, as well as the home "of a group
of great 'little' men both Mexican and Anglo-Ameri-
can." But the railroad never came, and the great
522 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
flood of the Canadian River in 1893 merely hastened
the death of an already moribund town. The
author has based his narrative, made possible by a
grant through the Texas State Historical Society
from the Rockefeller Foundation, in large part on
interviews with and letters from oldtimers, and on
the unique file of The Tascosa Pioneer (1886-91).
4196. Haley, James Evetts. The XIT Ranch of
Texas, and the early days of the Llano
Estacado. [New ed.] Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1953. xiv, 258 p.
53-8818 F391.H16 1953
Bibliography: p. 247-252.
The files of the XIT Ranch and its Chicago office,
now in the archives of the Panhandle-Plains His-
torical Society at Canyon, Texas, together with let-
ters, personal interviews, newspapers, books,
pamphlets, and periodical articles have been used
as sources for this chronicle of "the most extensive
Western range ever placed under one barbedwire
fence." Established in the middle 8o's, the XIT
Ranch included 3,050,000 acres of land in the Pan-
handle of Texas, patented by the State to a Chicago
firm in payment for constructing the Capitol at
Austin. The first edition of this book, published in
1929, was printed by the Farwell family of Chicago
"as a privately issued memorial to their people, their
associates, and their cowboys." A log of an 1892
catde drive and the "General Rules of the XIT
Ranch, January, 1888" are published as appendixes.
4197. Horgan, Paul. Great river: the Rio Grande
in North American history. New York,
Rinehart, 1954. 2 v. (1020 p.)
54-9867 F392.R5H65 1954
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 957-977.
Mr. Horgan, a writer of novels and other fiction
who has lived in New Mexico since 1915, spent 13
years in the preparation of this book. He wished
"to produce a sense of historical experience, rather
than a bare record" of this river, nearly 2,000 miles
long, whose "historical course takes us through
something over ten centuries of time and through
the chronicles of three cultures." The result is a
stately pageant of the Indian and the Spanish Rio
Grande in volume I, and of the Mexican and "The
United States Rio Grande" in volume II. The
author's ability to penetrate the inwardness of van-
ished cultures is evidenced in such chapters as "The
Stuff of Life" in the Indian section, and "Collec-
tive Memory" and "Hacienda and Village" in the
Spanish. Save for a chapter on the border troubles
leading to General Pershing's Punitive Expedition
of 19 16-17, the detailed narrative ceases with the
1870's. "Finally all indigenous aspects of the river's
three societies would be dissolved in the techno-
logical uniformity of the national life in the twen-
tieth century." The author's achievement was
recognized with two annual prizes: the Bancroft
prize and the Pulitzer prize in history.
NEW MEXICO
4198. Fergusson, Erna. New Mexico; a pageant of
three peoples. New York, Knopf, 1951.
408 p. 51-11094 F796.F35
"Books recommended for further reading":
P- 395-4°4-
Mrs. Fergusson describes the development of her
native State under the influence of Indian, Spanish,
and American civilizations, which are blended in
this "land of enchantment." The backwardness of
Spanish-speaking villagers is attributed to "the
powerful in politics, government, and even educa-
tion," who have failed to impart the mastery of
English that could be had "within one school genera-
tion, twelve years." Twentieth-century elements in
New Mexico are described in chapters on "The Fed-
eral Man" — atomic scientist or conservationist,
"Water" — the new dams, and the "Artist Dis-
coverers" who have centered in Taos. A final
chapter points out to tourists the natural wonders
and other places of interest. The selected bibli-
ography at the end is aimed at the general reader,
and is arranged according to the chapters of the
book. There is also a glossary of Indian and Span-
ish words and phrases characteristic of the region.
ARIZONA
4199. Lockwood, Francis Cummins. Pioneer days
in Arizona, from the Spanish occupation to
statehood, by Frank C. Lockwood. New York,
Macmillan, 1932. xiv, 387 p. 32-29213 F811.L75
Arizona, in which the Grand Canyon, the Painted
Desert, and the Petrified Forest are located, was
the last state to enter the Union. It is noted for
its mild winter climate and sunshine which have
made southern Arizona a winter vacation and health
resort; for the development of the Colorado River
for irrigation and power; for its Indian tribes with
their handicraft trade; and for its mineral resources.
The author, associated in various capacities with the
University of Arizona from 1916 to 1930, wrote this
book to fill the need, which he discovered when he
moved to Arizona, for a book that traces the political,
industrial, social, and cultural beginnings of the
State. He has brought together from interviews
with pioneers, early newspapers, letters, diaries,
reminiscences, government documents, and other
sources, the material which he uses "to narrate in
local history: regions, states, and cities / 523
an orderly and graphic way the chief incidents that
took place in Arizona from the coming of the Span-
iards in 1539 to the achievement of Statehood in
1912." The literature of the State is described in
a chapter on "Newspapers, Books, and Libraries"
(p. 345-367)-
R. California
4200. Caughey, John Walton. California. 2d ed.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1953. 666 p. il-
lus. (Prentice-Hall history series)
53-9858 F861.C34 1953
"A commentary on Californiana": p. 595-634.
Professor Caughey of the University of California
at Los Angeles published the original edition of this
very successful textbook for college classes in 1940.
He allots a little over a third of the volume to the
periods before American acquisition. California,
first visited by the Spaniards in 1542, was not settled
by them until 1769. The Mexican period, beginning
in 1822, was brief and "self-consciously transitional."
Catde raising was the prevailing economy until the
Gold Rush transformed the north, and southern
California remained predominantly pastoral until
the boom of the 1880's. The growth of the State in
population and wealth has been accelerated by sub-
sequent booms, but has gone steadily on between
them. California is its own region, and develop-
ments there have proceeded in relative independence
of the rest of the United States. The annotated
bibliography furnishes guidance to a literature that
has become enormous. In the second edition some
of the earlier chapters are expanded, and the story is
continued down to "The Scene at Midcentury."
4201. Caughey, John Walton. Gold is the corner-
stone. Berkeley, University of California
Press, 1948. xvi, 321 p. 48-10984 F865.C33
Bibliography: p. 301-314.
4202. Ellison, William Henry. A self-governing
dominion: California, 1 849-1 860. Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1950. 335 p.
Bibliography: p. 315-322. 50-62714 F865.E5
The Chronicles of California, inaugurated by the
University of California Press under the editorship
of Professors Herbert E. Bolton and J. W. Caughey
as a part of the State's centennial celebration, are a
series of volumes on periods or topics of State his-
tory. Of the pair here listed, the first is a balanced
narrative of the Gold Rush, and an estimate of its
importance in California history. On Jan. 24, 1848,
James Wilson Marshall, a carpenter constructing a
mill at Coloma on land belonging to John W. Sutter,
found fragments of gold in the millrace. Before
winter most of the able-bodied males in California
had turned gold miners, and in the course of 1849
the influx of outsiders brought the number of pros-
pectors and miners to some 45,000. The result was
the stimulation of developments in California, the
West at large, and the whole Pacific basin that
would otherwise have taken a generation, or might
not have occurred at all. One obvious consequence
was that by Sept. 7, 1850, less than 32 months after
the discovery of gold, California had become the
31st State of the Union. But for over a decade, be-
cause of her isolation, and the assumption of her
citizens that they were a people apart, California's
ultimate destiny remained undetermined. Not until
i860, Prof. Ellison believes, was a political contest
first waged around national issues, and decided "by
the rather general recognition that California could
not stand as a self-governing dominion but only as
an integral and dependent part of the United States."
Other volumes published in the Chronicles of Cali-
fornia have been Charles L. Camp's Earth Song:
A Prologue to History (1952. 127 p.), Jeanne Skin-
ner Van Nostrand and Edith M. Coulter's California
Pictorial; a History in Contemporary Pictures, ij86
to 1859 (1948. 159 p.), William W. Robinson's
Land in California (1948. 291 p.), George E.
Mowry's The California Progressives (1951. 349
p.), and Franklin D. Walker's A Literary History of
Southern California (1950. 282 p.).
4203. Cleland, Robert Glass. From wilderness to
empire; a history of California, 1542-1900.
New York, Knopf, 1944. xii, 388, xiv p. illus.
44-2422 F861.C6
4204. Cleland, Robert Glass. California in our
time (1900-1940) New York, Knopf, 1947.
viii, 320, xx p. 47-30606 F866.C62
Dr. Cleland came to California at the age of four
in 1889, has visited all parts of the State, and has
spent most of his life in studying its history. After
30 years in the service of Occidental College, he
transferred to the research staff of the Huntington
Library in 1943, and has since published a series of
important works on California history, beginning
with the present pair, and including a study of the
fur trade in the Southwest (no. 4186). The above
524 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
titles were originally planned as a one-volume his-
tory of the State, but were divided when the author
became convinced that it would be impossible to do
justice to the complex economic, political, and cul-
tural developments of the 20th century in a few
chapters. From Wilderness to Empire is largely
narrative incorporating many extracts from original
sources, and does not slight the colorful and
romantic aspects of the subject, but also contains
descriptive chapters such as "Missions and Ranchos"
and "California of the Ranges." The sequel traces
"the over-rapid transformation of an agrarian region
into a highly industrialized society," and the over-
taking of northern California by southern, with
much awe and some criticism. The concluding
chapters are concerned with the false hopes aroused
by the Townsend movement, the difficulties of the
Japanese, Mexican, and "Okie" minorities, Holly-
wood as Bunyan's Vanity Fair magnified to huge
proportions, and a review of California literature
from its beginnings to John Steinbeck.
4205. Putnam, George Palmer. Death Valley and
its country. New York, Duell, Sloan &
Pearce, 1946. 231 p. 46-8329 F868.D2P8
Bibliography: p. 219-220.
California's Death Valley, "the lowest, driest, and
hottest place in America," is at the bottom of a
volcanic trough on the eastern slope of the Sierra
Nevada. Some 550 square miles of it are below sea
level, and Badwater, 279.6 feet below, is the lowest
land in North America — less than 80 miles from
Mount Whitney, the highest peak in the United
States. The Valley, which the author likens to an
inferno in suspended animation, has been con-
spicuous in the American imagination ever since a
train of '49-ers came to grief there, and has been a
National monument since 1933. Mr. Putnam
describes its kangaroo rats, chuckwallas, vinega-
roons, and other strange fauna, its exploitation for
Twenty Mule Team Borax in the 1880's, and the
legends of its eccentric prospectors, of whom Death
Valley Scotty was much the best known. Some
bibliographic sources include this volume in the
American Folkways series (no. 3942), but the
Library of Congress copies have no such indication.
4206. Mayo, Morrow. Los Angeles. New York,
Knopf, 1933. x,337,xvip.
33-6581 F869.L8M2
"Bibliographical note": p. 331—337.
4207. Carr, Harry. Los Angeles, city of dreams.
Illus. by E. H. Suydam. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1935. 35—18559 F869.L8C3
A modern and scholarly treatment of the spectacu-
lar rise of Los Angeles to a high rank among the
world's great cities is badly needed; these volumes,
over 20 years old and journalistic in manner, are
inadequate substitutes. Mr. Mayo relates the more
dramatic episodes in the annals of Los Angeles from
1781 to the 1920's, such as Collis P. Huntington's
campaign to locate the artificial harbor at Santa
Monica instead of San Pedro, and the Los Angeles
Times dynamiting of 1910. This he does in a
muscular style and with small sympathy, for he
regards his subject as "an artificial city which has
been pumped up under forced draught, inflated
like a balloon, stuffed with rural humanity like a
goose with corn." Harry Carr, who died the year
after this book appeared, had been associated with
the Los Angeles Times for nearly 40 years, and with
the Hollywood studios in the days of their early
celebrity. His topical chapters are more sympa-
thetic in tone — to him, "Los Angeles is the ingredi-
ents of a cocktail, not yet shaken" — and studded
with the reminiscences of an oldtimer who has
watched the great transformation happen.
4208. Camp, William Martin. San Francisco:
port of gold. Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, 1947. xv, 518 p. 47-11836 F869.S3C25
4209. O'Brien, Robert. This is San Francisco;
illus. by Antonio Sotomayor. New York,
Whittlesey House, 1948. xv, 351 p.
48-10991 F869.S3O15
Mr. O'Brien came to San Francisco in 1939, and
conducted a column, "Riptides," in the San Fran-
cisco Chronicle from 1946. His columns, and other
materials gathered in the course of preparing them,
are here organized into a "portrait of an American
city" which stresses its less-known aspects and per-
sonalities. He divides the city into five main
areas — "The Waterfront," "Old Town," "The
Hills," "Main Stem," and "South of the Slot," and
in each presents his material under particular streets
and avenues. For each street the retrospective
material is followed by an impression of the recent
state of things. This organization certainly called
for a better map than the very sketchy one which
appears on the end papers. Mr. Camp explains that
he has written "not a book about the City, but rather
one about the Port, the water front of San Fran-
cisco." He recounts a number of episodes from
earlier periods, such as Asbury Harpending's plot
to capture San Francisco and hand it over to the
Confederacy, but gives major space and emphasis
to the creation of the facilities and the organization
of the modern port, to the failure of the laws to
protect sailors against crimps, shanghaiers, and
brutal captains, to the movement to organize mari-
time workers which began in 1885, and to the fre-
quent waterfront disturbances which have ensued.
local history: regions, states, and cities / 525
4210. King, Clarence. Mountaineering in the
Sierra Nevada. Edited and with a pref. by
Francis P. Farquhar. New York, Norton, 1935.
320 p. 35-35677 F868.S5K53
"Bibliographical notes": p. 317-320.
Clarence King (1842-1901) learned geology in
the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University,
and soon after graduation joined the staff of the
California State Geological Survey under Josiah
Dwight Whitney and William H. Brewer. Much
of the succeeding decade he spent in the geological
exploration of the High Sierra, at first for the State
Survey, and subsequendy for the Federal Survey
of the 40th Parallel, which he had suggested and
of which he was placed in charge. These famous
sketches were first published as articles in The At-
lantic Monthly in 1871, and appeared in book form
the following year. They give vivid glimpses of
the Yosemite and its region, and of Mounts Tyndall,
Shasta, and Whitney (King's party named the
highest peak in the United States after their chief)
as they appeared to a pioneer of American moun-
taineering— for King "was almost alone among
Americans of his day in having the desire to climb
remote and difficult peaks."
421 1. Russell, Carl Parcher. One hundred years
in Yosemite; the story of a great park and
its friends; with a foreword by Newton B. Drury.
Berkeley, University of California Press, 1947.
xviii, 226 p. illus., fold. map.
47-30335 F868.Y6R8 1947
The Yosemite Valley, named after the local Indian
tribe but formed by the north fork of the Merced
River, was first visited in 1833, explored in 1851,
turned over to California as a public trust in 1864,
and restored to Federal ownership as part of a much
larger Yosemite National Park in 1905. On the
western slope of the Sierra Nevada about 150 miles
due east of San Francisco, and containing some 1176
square miles, it is a natural wonderland of moun-
tain valleys, sheer cliffs, towering peaks, waterfalls,
giant sequoias, and abundant wildlife. Dr. Russell,
who was Park Naturalist in 1923-29, brought out
the first edition of this work in 193 1, and in the
second has expanded the original text from manu-
scripts contributed to the Yosemite Museum, and
added the information called for by 16 years of de-
velopment during which the Yosemite had eight
million visitors. His volume is essentially a history,
with chapters on the area's discoverers, pioneers,
early tourists, mountain explorers, hotels, scientific
interpreters, and administrators before and since
the creation of the National Park Service in 1916.
There is no systematic description of its natural
features, but there is a substantial "Chronology, with
Sources" (p. [i77]-i93) and a "Bibliography"
(p. [1951-213) of titles of historical interest.
S. The Pacific Northwest: General
4212. Freeman, Otis W. and Howard H. Martin,
eds. The Pacific Northwest, an overall
appreciation. 2d ed. New York, Wiley, 1954.
xvi, 540 p. 54-9235 HC107.A19F7 1954
The Pacific Northwest includes Oregon, Wash-
ington, Idaho, and the mountain counties of western
Montana — a region that has an "identity differ-
entiated from other areas of the United States,"
mainly by its topography. The first edition of this
book (1942) was also the "first comprehensive study
of the resources of the region which concerns itself
with the geographic bases involved." Here it has
been revised to take account of the many changes
that have taken place in the region since that date.
Thirty professors and technicians have contributed
to the five parts on "Changing Human Adjust-
ment," "Physical Environment," "Exploitation and
Conservation of Various Resources," "Agriculture,"
and "Industry, Commerce, and Urban Develop-
ment." The numerous sketch maps illustrate
single factors. Most of the chapters conclude with
a set of references.
4213. Fuller, George W. A history of the Pacific
Northwest. New York, Knopf, 1931. xvi,
383, [16] p. 31-26862 F851.F96
Librarian of the Spokane Public Library (1911-
36) and secretary of the Eastern Washington State
Historical Society (1916-35), the author received
historical recognition for The Inland Empire of the
Pacific Northwest, a History (Spokane, H. G.
Linderman, 1928. 4 v.) and for this book, a
notable one-volume contribution to the early history
of the region. Its principal subjects are the Indian
tribes, whose manners and customs were first ob-
served by Lewis and Clark, and their uprisings; the
explorers who converged on the Pacific Northwest
from the sea and land; the great fur companies; and
the missionary pioneers who planted the first
American settlement in the region — the Methodists
in the Willamette valley (1834). Less than half
of the narrative is concerned with the beginnings
of government, pioneer social life, and political and
economic growth through the first quarter of the
526 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
20th century. A list of "Governors of the Terri-
tories and States" appears at the end.
4214. Winther, Oscar Osburn. The Great North-
west; a history. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New
York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 491, xxx p. (Western
Americana) 50-12482 F852.W65 1950
Bibliography: p. 463-491.
This historical survey of the Pacific Northwest
from the period of exploration, through the fur trade
era and the coming of the first missionaries and
immigrants, to the present day was first published
in 1947. In the revised edition the author has ex-
panded Part II, "The Post-frontier Period, 1883—
1950," which begins with the completion of the
Northern Pacific Railroad. He emphasizes the in-
fluence of transportation, and especially of the rail-
roads, on the development of the territory. There
are chapters on the range cattle business, irrigation,
husbandry, industry and commerce including the
tourist business, hydroelectric power projects, politi-
cal ferment, and social and cultural achievements.
In the same year the author also published The Old
Oregon Country; a History of Frontier Trade,
Transportation and Travel (Stanford, Calif., Stan-
ford University Press, 1950. 348 p.). It includes
much of the data that appeared in the 1947 edition
of The Great Northwest, but the author hopes that
"the more extended and detailed treatment here,
with accompanying documentation, will be of added
value to the readers." In his Farthest Frontier, the
Pacific Northwest (New York, Macmillan, 1949.
375 P')> which was supported by the Library of
Congress Grants in Aid for Studies in the History
of American Civilization, Sidney Warren acknowl-
edges his appreciation to Professor Winther for his
"helpful suggestions and comments." Mr. War-
ren's book is a chronicle of the society created by the
pioneers down to the year 1910, when "the region
was well on the way to maturity." It describes their
homes, schools, medical facilities, newspapers, recrea-
tion, and cultural growth.
T. The Pacific Northwest : Local
WASHINGTON
4215. Meany, Edmond S. History of the State of
Washington. New York, Macmillan, 1924.
412 p. illus. 24-9257 F891.M46 1924
Best known as an educator during his years of
association with the University of Washington
(1897-1935), the author had numerous business
interests, served in the State House of Representa-
tives (1891-93), and achieved recognition as the
historian of his adopted State. Intended primarily
for the general reader, but also usable as a textbook
in high schools or colleges, this book was first pub-
lished in 1909. It is a "compact record" of the
history of Washington State from the discovery and
exploration of the Pacific Northwest by the Span-
ish, Russians, English, and, finally, the Americans
under the leadership of such men as Robert Gray,
Lewis and Clark, Charles Wilkes, and John Charles
Fremont, to the year 1923. Separated from the
Territory of Oregon in 1853, Washington Territory
became a State in 1889, a late addition to the Union.
The organization of the State, and its economic,
political, and social development, occupy less than
a fourth of the text. The last chapter is devoted
to "Evidences of Recent Advance." Lists of coun-
ties, Territorial and State officers, and of State insti-
tutions form the appendixes.
4216. Morgan, Murray C. Skid Road; an informal
portrait of Seattle. New York, Viking Press,
1951. 280 p. 51-14111 F899.S4M72
Seatde is located on the eastern shore of Puget
Sound on Elliott Bay. The book's title was derived
from the pioneer method of skidding logs by ox-
teams along the route to Yesler's sawmill — the busi-
ness which first made Seattle look like a real town.
Saloon keepers, show people, and others followed
the loggers on the route later known as Yesler Way,
"the northern limit of what Seattleites called 'our
great restricted district.' " It is the story "of some
who tried and failed and of some who achieved suc-
cess without becoming respectable, of the life that
centered on the mills and on the wharves. That is
Seattle from the bottom up." It is told in the activi-
ties of such folk as Doc Maynard, "Seattle's first
booster," who dreamed of making the city grow,
and died before it reached maturity, the Mercer girls,
imported for matrimony, and Mary Kenworthy,
who challenged the Sinophobes. From more recent
years, Mayor Ole Hanson and the general strike of
19 19, Dave Beck and the labor movement, Lt. Gov-
ernor Vic Meyers, the local wit, and others are given
their part in the growth of Seattle. It has become
one of the largest cities of the Pacific Northwest,
and was made possible "by every sort of American
and almost every sort of people."
local history: regions, states, and cities / 527
4217. Fargo, Lucile F. Spokane story. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1950.
276 p. 50-10471 F899.S7F3 1950
Bibliography: p. [26i]-270.
A leader in the development of school libraries,
the author began her career in Oregon and Wash-
ington. She spent 17 years as a librarian in
Spokane, and had already written several books of
fiction based on life in Dakota Territory and the
Pacific Northwest, when she was invited by the
Columbia University Press to write a book "pictur-
ing the life and culture of Spokane during succes-
sive phases of its development from fur trade days
to the attainment of municipal adulthood in the
early years of the twentieth century." She has ap-
proached her subject through the lives of those
"whose activities have become a part of local lore,"
such as Ross Cox, the Walker family, Spokane
Garry, the Ashlocks, Jim Glover, the "Father of
Spokane," May Hutton, and others. She has pro-
duced an entertaining narrative for those who are
"interested in the development of the so-called In-
land Empire and its capital city." Tides which
have been found useful as background material, be-
cause of "their human interest, lively style, and
portrayal of social life and customs," have been
included in the bibliography.
U. Overseas Possessions
4218. Pratt, Julius W. America's colonial experi-
ment; how the United States gained, gov-
erned, and in part gave away a colonial empire.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. 460 p.
50-11728 F970.P7
The author has brought together in one volume
a narrative of the United States' acquisition and gov-
ernment of Alaska and Hawaii; its administration
of the Canal Zone and Panama Canal, the Virgin
Islands, American Samoa, Wake and Midway Is-
lands; its joint control, with Great Britain, of Canton
and Enderbury Islands; and its interest in the Trust
Territory of the Pacific Islands — the Marshalls,
Carolines, and Marianas. The rise of our "Carib-
bean sphere of influence" is traced through the first
two decades of the century, and our "retreat from
empire" dated from the beginning of President
Harding's administration (1921). Economic condi-
tions and causes of discontent, with "the remedies
adopted or proposed, ranging from independence
for the Philippines to proposed statehood for Alaska
and Hawaii," are outlined. A summary of "United
States-Philippines Relations after World War II"
and of the "Government of the Trust Territory of
the Pacific Islands" appears in the appendixes. The
book describes the development in the overseas poli-
cies of the United States during the decade since
William H. Haas published his largely geographical
description, The American Empire, a Study of the
Outlying Territories of the United States (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1940. 408 p.).
ALASKA
4219. Gruening, Ernest Henry. The State of
Alaska. New York, Random House, 1954.
606 p. 54-7799 F904.G7
As Governor of Alaska (1939-53) and Director
of the Division of Territories and Island Possessions
in the Department of the Interior (1934-39), tne
author gained an insight into Alaska's problems
which enables him to analyze here, in a manner not
previously attempted, the relations between the
United States Government and the Territory, and
the economic forces which have influenced the des-
tiny of Alaska, especially in the period since 1912.
Following a brief summary of the discovery of
Alaska by Vitus Bering, its botanical exploration by
Georg W. Steller (1709- 1746), who also gave the
world the first account of the seal and other fur-
bearing marine animals, and the purchase of Alaska
from Russia in 1867, the author describes the neglect
and indifference of the United States towards its
new possession, and the struggle of the people of
Alaska for more voice in the development of its
resources and government. Almost half of the book
is concerned with the period of the author's adminis-
tration, during which World War II brought rec-
ognition to Alaska as a strategic military outpost,
increased American interest in its development, and
gave impetus to Alaska's determination "to fight
on to validate the most basic of American prin-
ciples— government by consent of the governed."
HAWAII
4220. Kuykendall, Ralph S., and Arthur Grove
Day. Hawaii: a history, from Polynesian
kingdom to American commonwealth. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1948. 331 p.
48-9650 DU625.K778
Bibliography: p. 301-308.
Located in the eastern half of the North Pacific,
closer to America than any other important body
528 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
o£ land, the Hawaiian Islands by reason of their
strategic position have become, since their discovery
by Captain James Cook in 1778, "the Crossroads of
the Pacific." The native inhabitants are a part of
the Polynesian family, and the Islands were first
firmly united by Kamehameha I, who ruled from
1782 to 1 8 19 and established the foundations of the
Hawaiian kingdom. It endured until 1893, giving
place to a Republic which sought annexation to the
United States, and obtained it in 1898. As pro-
fessors at the University of Hawaii, the authors were
well-equipped to write the "main narrative of Ha-
waii's history, from the days of the ancient feather-
cloaked warriors to the present time, when Hawaii's
fight for statehood has made it an issue of national
importance." A third of the book is devoted to
the period since the annexation of the Hawaiian
Islands to the United States. The book should in-
terest residents of Hawaii, students of Pacific his-
tory, and the visitors who have added an extensive
tourist trade to the Islands' basic sugar, pineapple,
livestock, and fishing industries.
PANAMA CANAL
4221. Mack, Gersde. The land divided, a history
of the Panama Canal and other isthmian
canal projects. New York, Knopf, 1944. xv, 650,
xxxiv p. 44-33235> TC773.M25
"Notes on map and diagram sources": p. 592-597.
Bibliography: p. 598-650.
This is a comprehensive and scholarly, yet read-
able, history of the movement for a transportation
route between the Adantic and the Pacific from the
discovery of the New World to 1943. The pro-
longed controversies that preceded the selection of
a route have led the author to describe in detail "all
interoceanic canal projects throughout the length
of the American continent from the Arctic Ocean to
Cape Horn," with emphasis on a canal through
Nicaragua, the most formidable rival of Panama.
In addition to the location of the canal, the mode of
construction, costs, tools, labor policies, treaties, con-
cessions, and ownership became the subjects of end-
less controversies. Here the author attempts to
combine "the political, economic, strategic, hygienic,
and engineering aspects of the canal problem into a
general history of the entire field." He deals with
the early interest of the Spanish who first proposed
to construct a canal as early as 1534; the French
project directed by Ferdinand de Lesseps in the
1880's; and finally the eradication of yellow fever
from the Isthmus by William Crawford Gorgas
(no. 4823), and the construction of the Panama
Canal by George W. Goethals (no. 4796). It was
completed in 19 14 on the eve of World War I, and
improvements were in progress at the beginning of
World War II. The land, says the author, had been
divided, but the world was far from united.
PUERTO RICO
4222. Hanson, Earl Parker. Transformation: the
story of modern Puerto Rico. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1955. 416 p.
54-9797 F1958.H3
Puerto Rico is unique in its status as a free com-
monwealth associated with the United States and
at the same time fully self-governed at home. Its
emergence from a backward, undeveloped society
since 1940, and especially since 1948 when Luis
Munoz Marin became the first Governor elected
by the people, "stands as a symbol of progress" for
other undeveloped lands in the world. A remark-
able program of industrialization has been launched;
strides have been made in the amount and distribu-
tion of income; public health services, education,
and employment have been expanded; and the com-
monwealth has become a "social laboratory of world
importance." At one time executive secretary of the
Planning Division of the Puerto Rico Reconstruc-
tion Administration, the author, in 1952, took a
class of students from the University of Delaware
to Puerto Rico to study its achievements. Here he
tells the story of Puerto Rico's "anguish, explosion,
and current effort . . . which should be better
known than it is, if only because it reflects great
credit and honor on the United States," and on the
ingenuity and determination of a people. Rafael
Pico, chairman of the Puerto Rico Planning Board
since 1942, discusses the economic, physical, and
human characteristics of the various regions of
Puerto Rico in The Geographic Regions of Puerto
Rico (Rio Piedras, P. R., University of Puerto Rico
Press, 1950. 256 p.), an expansion of his doctoral
dissertation submitted to Clark University, Wor-
cester, Mass., in 1938. Published as a Social Science
Research Center study of the College of Social
Sciences, University of Puerto Rico, and edited by
Julian H. Steward and others, The People of Puerto
Rico; a Study in Social Anthropology (Urbana, Uni-
versity of Illinois Press, 1956. 540 p.) was under-
taken "to analyze the contemporary culture and
to explain it in terms of the historical changes which
have occurred on the island, especially those which
followed the transition from Spanish sovereignty to
United States sovereignty a half century ago."
XIII
Travel and Travelers
A. General Wor\s 4223-4230
B. Anthologies 4231-4235
C. 50 Selected Travelers, IJ43-1894
(chronologically arranged by the date of their travels) 4236-4389
THE literature of travel in America, which begins with the Journals of Columbus, or, if
one prefers, with the Vinland Sagas, and continues unabated through the publications of
the current year, is enormous. Arbitrarily enough, the present selection omits the literature
of exploration, examples of which will be found in chapters VIII and XII, and is largely
confined to travels in areas of the present continental United States after or during the process
of settlement. This literature of travel has evoked and forms the subject matter of a secondary
literature in which it is inventoried, described, or
interpreted, in whole or in part. Section A is de-
voted to this secondary literature and includes a
bibliography (no. 4229), works on the modes and
mechanics of travel (nos. 4226, 4227), native reac-
tions to the accounts of foreign visitors (nos. 4225,
4230), and dissertations dissecting a certain body of
travel literature as to both information and interpre-
tation (nos. 4223, 4224, 4228).
The primary literature is here presented in two
forms: a group of anthologies which present ex-
tracts from it (or, in one case, a group of brief
originals published for the first time: no. 4233) ap-
propriately arranged, introduced, and commented
upon, and a roster of 50 selected travelers, well
assorted as to nationality, outlook, interests, and
itinerary. While many substitutions could be
readily made in this selection, we doubt whether
much increase in all-round intrinsic quality would
thereby be achieved. For each traveler we provide
an identification, a concise statement of his route,
and some indication of his separate personality. We
have concentrated our travelers in the century and a
quarter, 1740-1865, and have included only two
men who fall after that period. While the litera-
ture after 1865 is quite as voluminous and readable
as before, it does not, as a rule, have the same plain
informativeness; it is rivaled by alternative sources
relatively more copious and often more precise, and
431240—60-
-35
it has not proved of equal value as materials for
social and cultural historians. For each of our
travelers we have listed his original publication or
publications (sometimes in the best rather than the
first edition), and, whenever available, an English
translation for works in foreign languages, an
American edition for works first published in
Britain, and recent reprints or scholarly editions.
In no case have we tried to list all versions or edi-
tions, although this has sometimes happened.
Both before and after 1865 travelers' narratives
may tend to assume the form of essays on American
society. There is no absolute line between some
works we have listed here, and some which
appear in our Section XV A, Some General Views of
American Society. Crevecoeur, Tocqueville, Bryce,
and Siegfried were all travelers before they under-
took their famous interpretations, and the works of
Prince Murat, Mrs. Trollope, Miss Martineau, and
Paul Bourget listed below may seem, in purpose and
in form at least, to differ little from theirs. There is
also a close relation between this chapter and Sec-
tions XI E and F, International Influences in our
Intellectual History. Such influences are in part
borne by travelers, and such works as Spoerri (no.
3771) and Torielli (no. 3779) would not be out of
place here.
529
530 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A. General Works
4223. Athearn, Robert G. Westward the Briton.
New York, Scribner, 1953. 208 p.
53-11215 F594.A85
A digest of the comments of British travelers in
the Far West from 1865 to 1900, significant because
"by and large, these people were literate, intelligent,
well-traveled," and furnished with a basis of com-
parison. They found, not the "Wild West" most
of them had been led to expect, but "a frontier
civilization trying desperately to look like the culture
from which it sprang, and on the whole, ashamed
of the few rowdies who had given it a bad name
in its first hours." There is an annotated list of
travelers alphabetically arranged (p. 187-202).
4224. Berger, Max. The British traveller in
America, 1 836-1 860. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1943. 239 p. (Columbia Univer-
sity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in his-
tory, economics, and public law, no. 502)
43-16988 H31.G7, no. 502
E165.B48 1943a
"Critical bibliography": p. 189-229.
This and Mesick below (no. 4228) are Columbia
dissertations which, although two decades apart and
published in different University series, are in effect
continuous. Each notices briefly the travelers as a
group, their motives and typical journeys, and then
proceeds to a synthetic treatment of the major sub-
jects contained in their books: customs, slavery, re-
ligion, education, etc. Mr. Berger has a chapter on
democratic government to which there is no counter-
part in the earlier volume. He attempts larger gen-
eralizations, and has furnished his bibliography with
substantial annotations.
4225. Brooks, John Graham. As others see us; a
study of progress in the United States. New
York, Macmillan, 1908. 365 p.
8-3 1 147 E168.B883
Brooks (1846-1938), a Unitarian clergyman
turned labor economist and Progressive reformer,
became fascinated with the literature of American
travel, and determined to use it as a gauge for
American social progress. His initial chapters offer
a lively critique of our early critics, with much
assessment of reliability by common sense methods.
Bryce, Miinsterberg, and H. G. Wells receive ex-
tended reviews. The whole literature, he concludes,
testifies to a "slow rise in social sensitiveness, and
in social purpose to free ourselves from industrial
and political tyrannies."
4226. Dunbar, Seymour. A history of travel in
America, being an outline of the develop-
ment in modes of travel from archaic vehicles of
colonial times to the completion of the first trans-
continental railroad. New York, Tudor, 1937.
1530 p. 38-7081 HE203.D77 1937
First published, 1915.
Bibliography: p. [i445]-[i48i].
A history of transportation and of internal mi-
gration as well as a history of travel, with much
miscellaneous social history thrown in for good
measure, but quite haphazard in arrangement. It
contains, however, a mass of detailed information
on the means and conditions of travel, and actual
incidents of traveling endured by our hardy fore-
fathers. It is abundantly illustrated from contem-
porary prints.
4227. Earle, Alice (Morse) Stage-coach and tav-
ern days. New York, Macmillan, 1935.
449 p. 38-34442 E162.E2 1935
First published, 1900.
Mrs. Earle wrote her "social and domestic his-
tories of colonial times" at a time when academic
historians regarded such matters as beneath their
notice. Her easy-going and gossipy volume on the
oldtime taverns and the stagecoaches that ran be-
tween them has not been replaced. She tells of
tavern landlords and tavern fare, of kill-devil (rum)
and small drink, of signboards and ghost stories.
There are chapters on "the pains of stage-coach
travel," and on stage drivers and highwaymen. As
is usual in her books, the greater part of the material
is drawn from New England.
4228. Mesick, Jane Louise. The English traveller
in America, 1785-1835. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1922. 370 p. (Columbia
University studies in English and comparative lit-
erature) 22-16243 E165.M58
See Berger above (no. 4224).
4229. Monaghan, Frank. French travellers in the
United States, 1765-1932; a bibliography.
New York, New York Public Library, 1933. xxii,
114 p. 33-22177 Z1236.M73
"1806 tide entries," including the various editions
of an item and the translations, arranged alpha-
betically by authors, with a "Selected chronological
list of French travellers" (p. 107-108) and an index
of places, persons, and important subjects.
"An attempt has been made to locate copies in
two American libraries" (preferably the New York
Public Library and the Library of Congress); 267
titles not yet located in America.
"Reprinted with additions and revisions from the
Bulletin of The New Yor{ Public Library of March-
April & June-October 1932."
This bibliography includes not merely books of
travel, but works of description, analysis, or criti-
cism by French authors based upon an actual visit
to the United States, and forms the most complete
record of its kind. There are frequent annotations,
some fairly long, on books or writers, as well as an
introduction in which some fabricated "travels" are
discussed. A few unnumbered entries represent
prominent visitors who failed to leave any record of
their impressions.
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 531
4230. Tuckerman, Henry T. America and her
commentators. With a critical sketch of
travel in the United States. New York, Scribner,
1864. 460 p. 3-8368 E157.T89
Contents. — Introduction. — Early discoverers and
explorers.— French missionary exploration.— French
travellers and writers.— British travellers and writ-
ers.—English abuse of America. — Northern Euro-
pean writers.— Italian travellers.— American travel-
lers and writers.
A pioneer synthesis of American travel literature,
by a literary gendeman of old New York City
(1813-71). Tuckerman aimed at a guide to the
sources, a general view of American "traits and
transitions" as therein reflected, and, incidentally,
a "discussion of the comparative value and interest
of the principal critics of our civilization." One of
his conclusions is that foreign visitors are deficient
observers of regional and personal variations in
American life and character.
B. Anthologies
4231. Commager, Henry Steele, ed. America in
perspective; the United States through for-
eign eyes. New York, Random House, 1947. xxiv>
389 P- 47-6240 E169.1.C67
Bibliography: p. [387J-389.
4232. Handlin, Oscar, ed. This was America; true
accounts of people and places, manners and
customs, as recorded by European travelers to the
western shore in the eighteenth, nineteenth, and
twentieth centuries. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1949. ix, 602 p. 49-7940 E161.H3
Two anthologies of foreign travelers in America
which hardly overlap. Mr. Commager's 35 ex-
tracts, from Crevecoeur in 1782 to Victor Vinde in
1945, comprise brief and, in the main, generalizing
and interpretive passages: "God made America for
the poor" (Edward Dicey, 1863); "Americans are
boys" (de Madariaga, 1928). Mr. Handlin's 40
extracts, from Pehr Kalm in 1744 to Andre Maurois
in 1939, are in the main penetrating descriptions,
with some reflective or critical commentaries. Mr.
Commager has one Asiatic (No Yong-Park), but
Mr. Handlin has a greater variety of continental
Europeans, and many of his selections are here trans-
lated into English for the first time.
4233. Mereness, Newton D., ed. Travels in the
American colonies, edited under the auspices
of the National Society of the Colonial Dames of
America. New York, Macmillan, 1916. 693 p.
16-9410 E162.M57
Eighteen journals written between 1690 and 1783
and published for the first time, some from the
Moravian Church Archives in North Carolina and
some from the Draper Collection in Wisconsin, but
most from transcripts made for the Library of Con-
gress in British and French archives. Most of them
record official errands of one kind or another; there
are several missions to the Creeks, Cherokees, and
Choctaws, and one French captivity among the
Cherokees. A miscellany by ordinary observers, in
which the realities of wilderness travel stand out
the more starkly for the absence of any literary
intention.
4234. Nevins, Allan, ed. America through British
eyes. fNew ed. rev. and enl.j New York,
Oxford University Press, 1948. 530 p.
48-7848 E169.1.N52 1948
First edition published 1923 under tide: American
Social History as Recorded by British Travellers.
"An annotated bibliography": p. 503-519.
Substantial extracts from 30 British travelers, from
Henry Wansey in 1794 to Graham Hutton who in-
terpreted die Midwest in 1946. The compiler
groups his travelers in periods, and provides each
section with an introduction characterizing indi-
vidual attitudes and insights as well as the general
outlook. These periods receive the labels "Utili-
tarian Inquiry" (to 1825), "Tory Condescension"
(1840), "Unbiased Portraiture" (1870), "Analysis"
(1922), and "Boom, Depression and War."
532 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4235. Tryon, Warren S., ed. A mirror for Ameri-
cans; life and manners in the United States,
1790-1870, as recorded by American travelers. Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 1952. 3 v. (xx,
793, v p.) 52-i3949 E161.T78
Bibliography: v. 3, p. 783-791.
Contents. — 1. Life in the East. — 2. The Cotton
Kingdom. — 3. The frontier moves west.
An anthology containing 43 extensive extracts
from Americans who traveled in and observed their
own country. The editor furnishes an introduction
to each writer, as well as more general ones. The
final volume is in two parts, "The Valley of Democ-
racy," on the trans-Appalachian West, and "West-
ward the Course of Empire," on the trans-Missis-
sippi West. Passages have been deleted from, and
words added to, the original texts without editorial
indication.
C. 50 Selected Travelers, 1 743-1 894
{chronologically arranged by the date of their travels)
4236. 1743. JOHN BARTRAM (1699-1777)
The elder Bartram was the self-taught
founder of American botany and the creator of the
famous Botanic Garden a few miles from Philadel-
phia. In July and August 1743, in company with
Conrad Weiser and Lewis Evans, he went north
through the wilderness to Oswego, where a prepara-
tory conference with the Indians was held. Bar-
tram's journal did not reach London until 1750, and
was published without the author's knowledge "at
the instance of several gentlemen" who thought that
a better knowledge of the back country was desirable
in view of increasing rivalry with France. The
editor is rather apologetic for the lack of literary art
in "this plain yet sensible piece," and for the jour-
nalist's concentration on "the several plants, and the
various qualities of the soil and climate." Bartram
took a keen interest in Indian ways, especially food
preparation, hospitality, ceremonies, and techniques,
and appends some concluding reflections on the
origin of the red race, and the declining state of the
Six Nations.
4237. Observations on the inhabitants, climate, soil,
rivers, productions, animals, and other mat-
ters worthy of notice. Made by Mr. John Bartram,
in his travels from Pensilvania to Onondago,
Oswego, and the Lake Ontario, in Canada. Lon-
don, J. Whiston & B. White, 175 1. 94 p.
1-16152 F122.B129
4238.
4239.
[Geneva, N. Y., W. F. Humphrey]
1895. 94 p. 16-9745 F122.B133
1744. ALEXANDER HAMILTON (1712-
1756)
Dr. Hamilton was a graduate of the University
of Edinburgh Medical School practicing at Annap-
olis, Md. Suffering from incipient tuberculosis,
he set out on a leisurely journey for the benefit of
his health, and covered 1624 miles in a little less than
four months, venturing as far north as Albany,
N. Y., and York, Me. He was a sharp and satirical
observer, with a keen eye for oafish behavior, and
his journal is unique for its glimpses of polite and
convivial society in the colonial cities. The in-
habitants, he concluded, were more civilized in the
great towns, "especially at Boston." His editor ap-
pends over 50 pages of notes which completely
elucidate the text and practically constitute a guide-
book to the Eastern Seaboard in 1744.
4240. Gendeman's progress; the Itinerarium of Dr.
Alexander Hamilton, 1744; edited with an
introduction by Carl Bridenbaugh. Chapel Hill,
Published for the Institute of Early American His-
tory and Culture at Williamsburg, Va., by the Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1948. xxxii, 267 p.
48-28157 E162.H21 1948
The Itinerarium was privately printed in 1907.
4241. 1748-1751. PEHR KALM (1716-1779)
Pehr or Peter Kalm was a Swedish natural-
ist, a pupil of the great Linnaeus, a member of the
Swedish Royal Academy of Sciences, and professor
at the University of Abo in Finland. He was in the
American colonies for nearly two and a half years,
making his headquarters at Raccoon, N. J. (the
present Swedesboro) and thence striking out into
the back country of Pennsylvania and New York,
with a three months' journey into French Canada.
While his primary concern was with the flora and
fauna, and their economic uses and potentialities,
he was an indefatigable observer of every kind of
natural and social fact, and was at pains to record
them with a rare lucidity and precision. A fourth
volume of his Resa remained unpublished and the
manuscript was burnt, but many of the rougher
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 533
notes upon which it was based were discovered and
published by Elfving in 1929, and a translation of
these is included in Benson's English version.
Kalm thought that Pennsylvania "enjoys such
liberties that a citizen here may, in a manner, be
said to live in his house like a king."
4242. En resa til Norra America, pa Kongl.
Swenska Wetenskaps Academiens befall-
ning, och publici kostnad, forrattad af Pehr Kalm.
Stockholm, Tryckt pa L. Salvii kostnad, 1753-61.
3 v. 2-5526 E162.K14
Volume 1 and part of volume 2 treat of the au-
thor's travels in Norway and England.
4243. Pehr Kalms Resa till Norra Amerika, a nyo
utgifven at Fredr. Elfving och Georg Schau-
man. Helsingfors, Tidnings- & Tryckeri-aktiebo-
lagets Tryckeri, 1904-15. 3 v. (Skrifter utg. af
Svenska litteratursallskapet i Finland, v. 66, 93,
120) 40-34888 E162.K144
4244. Pehr Kalms Resa till Norra Amerika, utgiven
av Fredr. Elfving och Georg Schauman.
Tillaggsband sammanstallt av Fredr. Elfving.
Helsingfors [Mercators Tryckeri Aktiebolag] 1929.
235 p. (Skrifter utg. av Svenska litteratursallskapet
i Finland, v. 210) 40-34888 E162.K145
4245. Travels into North America; containing its
natural history, and a circumstantial account
of its plantations and agriculture in general, with
the civil, ecclesiastical and commercial state of the
country, the manners of the inhabitants, and several
curious and important remarks on various subjects.
Translated into English by John Reinhold Forster.
London, The Editor, 1770-71. 3 v.
2-13568 E162.K16
Volume 1 published at Warrington, printed by
W. Eyres.
This translation omits a great number of details,
and everything relating to England.
4246. The America of 1750; Peter Kalm's travels in
North America; the English version of 1770,
revised from the original Swedish and edited by
Adolph B. Benson, with a translation of new mate-
rial from Kalm's diary notes. New York, Wilson-
Erickson, 1937. 2 v. (797 p.)
37-22242 E162.K165
"The part on Norway and England has been
omitted . . . The hitherto untranslated portion . . .
has been done into English by Miss Edith M. L.
Carlborg . . . and the present editor. The re-
mainder ... is based on Forster's translation." —
p. xv.
"A bibliography of Peter Kalm's writings on
America": v. 2, p. 770-776.
4247. 1773-1778. WILLIAM BARTRAM (1739-
1823)
William Bartram was a younger son of John
Bartram by his second wife, but the one who fol-
lowed most completely in his worthy father's foot-
steps. Dr. John Fothergill, the English Quaker
botanist, provided funds for him "to search the
Floridas, and the western parts of Carolina and
Georgia, for the discovery of rare and useful pro-
ductions of nature, chiefly in the vegetable king-
dom." He left Philadelphia for Charleston in
April 1773 and did not get back until Jan. 1778,
when his father was dead and the city occupied
by a British army. From Charleston he made two
major tours: the first in 1773-75, up the rivers of
Georgia and East Florida, and the second in
1776-77, into the Cherokee towns of the Southern
Appalachians, and thence via the Creek towns to
Mobile and the Mississippi. His concern with
plants did not hinder Bartram from making major
observations of snakes and frogs, and the longest
list of American birds hitherto compiled. To
Bartram the Indian was a noble savage indeed,
closely and appreciatively viewed. Writers of the
new romantic generation in England and France
found an important source of poetic ideas and
images in his book. It closes with a brief but
systematic account of the Creeks, Cherokees, and
Choctaws. If available, the contemporary editions
with the copper plates are much to be preferred
to the 20th-century reprints.
4248. Travels through North & South Carolina,
Georgia, East & West Florida, the Cherokee
country, the extensive territories of the Muscogulges,
or Creek confederacy, and the country of the Choc-
taws; containing an account of the soil and natural
productions of those regions, together with obser-
vations on the manners of the Indians. Embellished
with copper-plates. Philadelphia, James & Johnson,
1791. xxxiv, 522 p. Rc-2676 F213.B28
4249. The travels of William Bartram, edited by
Mark Van Doren. New York, Macy-Masius,
1928. 414 p. (An American bookshelf)
28-3822 F213.B288
4250. With an introd. by John Livings-
ton Lowes. New York, Facsimile Library,
exclusive distributors: Barnes & Noble, 1940. 414 p.
40-11235 F213.B289
534 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4251. 1780-1782. FRANQOIS JEAN, MAR-
QUIS DE CHASTELLUX (1734-1788)
Chastellux accompanied Rochambeau's army to
America with the rank of major general and was
a highly cultured nobleman, of literary bent, and
tinged by the Enlightenment. He made three
journeys as his military service permitted; on the
first (Nov. 1780-Jan. 1781) he went by way of
West Point and Washington's headquarters to Phila-
delphia and Chester, and returned by way of Albany
and Saratoga. In the spring of 1782, starting from
Williamsburg he made an excursion through Vir-
ginia to see the Natural Bridge. At the close of the
same year he went from Hartford to Portsmouth,
N. H., thence south to Boston, and eventually, by
way of Washington's headquarters at Newburgh
and Bethlehem, to Philadelphia. Chastellux was
especially concerned to visit the earlier battlefields
of the war then drawing to its close, and to narrate
such of its incidents as came to his ears. He took
a sympathetic interest in each home which he
visited, and in its inhabitants, noting each "perfect
beauty" that he encountered, and he turned a sharp
eye on inns, innkeepers, and their accommodations.
He describes the brilliant society of wartime Phila-
delphia and the crude lodgings of the Virginia back-
woods alike with imperturbable good humor. The
English versions of his book are provided with ob-
trusive annotations by the anonymous translator.
4252. Voyages de m. le marquis de Chastellux
dans l'Amerique Septentrionale dans les
annees 1780, 1781, & 1782. Paris, Prault, 1786. 2 v.
2-6014 E163.C50
4253. Travels in North-America in the years 1780,
1781, and 1782. Translated from the French
by an English gentleman [George Grieve], who
resided in America at that period. With notes by
the translator. London, G. G. J. & J. Robinson,
1787. 2 v. 2-6666 E163.C54
4254.
Also, a biographical sketch of the
author; letters from Gen. Washington to the
Marquis de Chastellux; and notes and corrections,
by the American editor. New- York, White, Gal-
laher, & White, 1827. 416 p.
18-18238 E163.C57
4255. 1783-1784. JOHANN DAVID SCHOPF
(1752-1800)
Dr. Schopf was a native of Bayreuth educated in
science and medicine at the University of Erlangen,
and had made scientific travels in central Europe
before taking his degree. The next year he came
to America as chief surgeon of the Ansbach mer-
cenaries in the pay of Great Britain, and on the con-
clusion of hostilities took the opportunity of travel-
ing before returning to Europe. He went from
New York to Philadelphia, thence across Penn-
sylvania to Pittsburgh, back to Baltimore, and south
to Charleston, where he took ship for East Florida.
He is objective, equable, and indefatigable; min-
erals and mining are his first interest, but he records
social matters and recent history with the same par-
ticularity. Morrison's translation has notes of iden-
tification and some of comparison at the end of each
volume.
4256. Reise durch einige der mitdern und siid-
lichen Vereinigten Nordamerikanischen
Staaten nach Ost-Florida und den Bahama-Inseln
unternommen in den Jahren 1783 und 1784. Erlan-
gen, J. J. Palm, 1788. 2 v. 5-13744 E164.S37
4257. Travels in the Confederation, 1783-1784.
Translated and edited by Alfred J. Morrison.
Philadelphia, W. J. Campbell, 191 1. 2 v.
11-12073 E164.S38
4258. 1788. JACQUES PIERRE BRISSOT DE
WARVILLE (1754-1793)
Brissot was an active propagandist for the French
Revolution who came to America "to examine the
effects of liberty on the character of man, of society,
and of government." No more enthusiastic book on
the United States has been written; he was elated in
Boston and rapturous in Philadelphia. Physically, j
he did not cover much ground; from Boston he
went south as far as Mount Vernon, and north to
Portsmouth just before he went home; but most of
his stay was spent at Philadelphia, which he describes
at some length. He admired the Quakers for the
austerity of their worship, the serenity of their per-
sonal characters, and the simplicity, economy, in-
dustry, and perseverance of their way of life, to
which he ascribed the prosperity of Pennsylvania.
He gives special attention to the condition and
character of the Negroes, free and slave, and
to efforts toward their improvement, for the
abolition of slavery and the slave trade, and for
the recolonization of American Negroes in Africa.
He spends much time abusing Chastellux, whom he
regards as a courdy traducer of freemen!
4259. Nouveau voyage dans les Etats-Unis de
l'Amerique Septentrionale, fait en 1788.
Paris, Buisson, 1791. 3 v. 1-25369 E164.B89
Half-tide of v. 3: De la France et des Etats-Unis,
ou De l'importance de la revolution de l'Amerique
pour le bonheur de la France; des rapports de ce
royaume et des Etats-Unis, des avantages recipro-
ques qu'ils peuvent retirer de leurs liaisons de com-
merce, par Etienne Claviere, et }. P. Brissot (War-
ville). Nouvelle edition.
4260. New travels in the United States of America.
Performed in 1788. Translated from the
French. New York, Printed by T. & J. Swords for
Berry & Rodgers, 1792. 264 p.
42-29553 E164.B8917 1792a
Contains a translation of the first two volumes
only, of the three in the original French edition.
4261. 1793. JOHN DRAYTON (1766-1822)
Drayton, a member of one of the leading
families of South Carolina, had completed his edu-
cation in England, and was starting out in law and
politics at Charleston when he undertook this tour
of four and a half months in New York and New
England in the latter part of 1793. The book has
three plates engraved from Drayton's own rather
simple sketches. He took small interest in the
New England countryside but was quite absorbed
by the municipal life of New York, Providence,
Boston, Portsmouth, and New Haven. At Boston
he accompanied the selectmen on their annual visita-
tion of the public schools. For these and for the
other educational institutions of New England
Drayton felt the greatest admiration, which he
turned into effective action during his first term as
governor, when he took the lead in establishing the
University of South Carolina. On the return jour-
ney, the Connecticut Sabbath overtook him on the
way to New Haven at Durham, where he had a
triste sejour, and indignandy declined the landlord's
invitation to attend meeting. Drayton was a senti-
mental and at times a tearful traveler, but his work
is full of a desire to learn, and is completely free of
all sectional rancor.
4262. Letters written during a tour through the
northern and eastern states of America.
Charleston, S. C, Harrison & Bowen, 1794. 138 p.
A17-1387 E164.D76
4263. 1 794-1 798. MEDERIC LOUIS ELIE
MOREAU DE SAINT-MERY (1750-
1819)
Moreau de St.-Mery was a Creole jurist who had
collected the laws of the French West Indies. Resi-
dent in Paris, he was a leader in the early stages
of the French Revolution, but was eventually pro-
scribed and narrowly escaped the guillotine. After
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 535
traveling from Norfolk to New York, he settled at
Philadelphia, where he set up a bookstore and pub-
lishing house that became a center for French
emigres in America. His Voyage remained among
his manuscripts in the Archives Coloniales until it
was noted and put into print by Professor Mims.
Mr. and Mrs. Roberts' translation of the Mims text
is often loose and sometimes quite misleading. The
Voyage is a composite manuscript: the basis is
Moreau's journal, quite sketchy for his four years
in Philadelphia, in which have been inserted a
number of letters received, and descriptions of Amer-
ican cities: Norfolk and Portsmouth, Baltimore,
New York and Brooklyn, and, at considerable
length, Philadelphia. It is in the last that occur
his unique observations on intimate manners and
low life, that require to be taken with more cau-
tion than Mr. Roberts supposes. The Voyage is
of course a principal source for emigre life in
America during those years.
4264. Voyage aux Etats-Unis de 1'Amerique, 1793-
1798. Edited with an introd. and notes, by
Stewart L. Mims. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 19 13. xxxvi, 440 p. (Yale historical pub-
lications; manuscripts and edited texts, 2)
14-1432 E164.M83
4265. Moreau de St. Mery's American journey,
1793-1798, translated and edited by Kenneth
Roberts tand] Anna M. Roberts. Introd. by Stewart
L. Mims. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947.
xxi, 394 p. 47-3941 E164.M832
4266. 1795-1797. FRANQOIS ALEXANDRE
FREDERIC, DUC DE LA ROCHE-
FOUCAULD LIANCOURT (1747-
1827)
La Rochefoucauld-Liancourt was one of the most
liberal of the French noblesse and active in many
good works, but was nevertheless proscribed in the
course of the Revolution, and became an exile in
the United States. He traveled widely in order to
dispel the ennui and melancholy that beset him, and
he wrote voluminously concerning what he saw
and what he was able to learn by interrogation.
He did not cross the Alleghanies, and his intention
of visiting the backcountry of Georgia and Carolina
was frustrated by a fever which he contracted at
Savannah, but he missed little else, and visited a
number of towns more than once. His largest single
journey, through the backcountry of Pennsylvania
and New York into Canada, and back through New
England to Philadelphia, occupied seven months of
1797. He modeled himself upon the tours of
53^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Arthur Young in France, and reports at length
upon the processes of agriculture and the economic
situation of particular farms. He includes essays
on the government and laws of most of the States
which he visited and concludes with general obser-
vations on the Constitution, public finance, com-
merce, and land system of the United States as a
whole.
4267. Voyage dans les Etats-Unis d'Amerique, fait
en 1795, 1796, et 1797. Paris, Du Pont, l'an
VII de la Republique [ 1799] 8 v.
8-1030 E164.L3
4268. Travels through the United States of North
America, the country of the Iroquois, and
Upper Canada, in the years 1795, 1796, and 1797;
with an authentic account of Lower Canada. Lon-
don, R. Phillips, 1799. 2 v. 1-24772 E164.L33
Translated by H. Neuman.
4269. 1795-1797. ISAAC WELD (1774-1856)
Isaac Weld, Jr., was barely of age when he
came from Ireland to America to inquire whether
it could furnish an eligible and agreeable place of
refuge from the convulsions of Europe. He spent
a year and two or three months here, but a good
half of his book is devoted to an extended tour of
Canada. It is provided with some very competent
illustrations from his own pencil. While he did not
enter New England, or go further South than the
Great Dismal Swamp, he has faithful descriptions of
travel in the back country of Virginia, Pennsylvania,
and New York. He is not contemptuous or mali-
cious, but he found the conditions of life harsh and
manners crude, and he left this continent "without
a sigh, and without entertaining the slightest wish
to revisit it." His book went through four editions
by 1800, was reprinted as late as 1807, and was trans-
lated into French, Italian, Dutch, and German.
4270. Travels through the states of North America,
and the provinces of Upper and Lower
Canada, during the years 1795, 1796, and 1797.
London, }. Stockdale, 1799. xxiv, 464 p.
5-20874 E164.W44
4271. 1796^1815. TIMOTHY DWIGHT (1752-
1817)
Dwight, New England clergyman, theologian,
and poet, was chosen president of Yale College in
1795. For the preservation of his health, he devoted
the autumn vacations to a regular course of travel-
ing, and began taking notes which he wrote up at
considerable length on his return to New Haven, in
order that those who lived eighty or a hundred years
later might know what had been the appearance of
their country. New York he included in his ob-
servations as a majority of its inhabitants were de-
rived from New England, and the rest intimately
connected there by business, and other attachments.
President Dwight was a most objective traveler, and
a mighty purveyor of information; along with his
topography, economic data, and descriptions of
scenery, he gives many passages of local history and
biographical sketches of local worthies. There are,
he is careful to explain, no adventures, which "must
be very rare in a country perfectly quiet, and orderly
in its State of Society" — "I have not met with one."
He continued his autumn tours through 18 15, after
which they were suspended by the collapse of his
health. His manuscripts were put through the press
by his sons Timothy and William T. Dwight; to the
travels proper, in volume 4, they have added a num-
ber of dissertations, on the errors of European travel-
ers, and on the language, learning, religion,
manufactures, etc., of New England.
4272. Travels in New England and New York.
New Haven, T. Dwight, 1821-22. 4 v.
1-7597 F8.D99
4273. 1799-1802. JOHN DAVIS (1774-1854)
Davis had been a wanderer since the age of
11 when he came to America at 24, and led the life
of an itinerant schoolmaster and tutor up and down
the Eastern seaboard from New York to Charleston.
Since he did much of his journeying on foot, and
conversed with every sort and condition of person
from Aaron Burr to the Negro slave Dick, and since
impecuniousness never affected his good nature, his
book is full of bright glimpses of everyday life from
angles which other travelers rarely attained. He had
the experience of being refused a job by Secretary
Gallatin, and he presents the first romantic version
of the Pocahontas legend.
4274. Travels of four years and a half in the United
States of America; during 1798, 1799, 1800,
1801, and 1802. London, T. Ostell, 1803. 454 p.
1-24800 E164.D26
4275. With an introd. and notes by A. J.
Morrison. New York, Holt, 1909. 429 p.
9-35909 E164.D28
4276. 1802. FRANgOIS ANDRE MICHAUX
(1770-1855)
Michaux was, like his father, a distinguished
French botanist and came to the United States under
the auspices of the Minister of the Interior, although
apparently on a very limited budget. He was in this
country for over 16 months, 1801-03, but the western
journey which is the main theme of his book occu-
pied less than four months in the summer of 1802.
From Philadelphia he went by stage to Shippens-
burg, Pa., and from there to Pittsburgh he shared
a horse with an army officer. He went down the
Ohio in a dug-out canoe, and overland to Lexington,
Ky., on foot. For the rest of his journey, to Nash-
ville, and back through the Carolinas to Charleston,
he had his own horse. His primary concerns were
useful plants and the state of agriculture, but he
also noted stockbreeding, manufactures, wages, the
economy in general, and any cultivation of scien-
tific interests. He had not intended to write up his
travels and lamented his failure to record innumer-
able details which would have added to the interest
of his narrative, which, however, is businesslike and
informative.
4277. Voyage a l'ouest des Monts Alleghanys, dans
les etats de l'Ohio, du Kentucky, et du Ten-
nessee, et retour a Charleston par les Hautes-Caro-
lines, entrepris pendent l'an X-1802, sous les auspices
de son excellence, M. Chaptal, Ministre de l'interieur.
Paris, Levrault, Schoell, 1804. 312 p.
1-24797 E164.M62
4278. Travels to the westward of the Allegany
Mountains, in the states of the Ohio, Ken-
tucky, and Tennessee, and return to Charlestown,
through the upper Carolinas. Undertaken in the
year x, 1802, under the auspices of His Excellency
M. Chaptal, minister of the interior. Faithfully
translated from the original French, by B. Lambert.
London, J. Mawman, 1805. xvi, 350 p.
1-24798 E164.M63
4279. 1805-1812. SIR AUGUSTUS JOHN
FOSTER, BART. (1780-1848)
Foster, an English career diplomat with extensive
connections in the aristocracy, spent three years in
Washington as Secretary of Legation in 1805-08,
and returned as Minister for a year's stay preceding
the outbreak of the War of 1812. During the sum-
mers he traveled into the valley of Virginia, and
northward along the Atlantic seaboard. When Eng-
lish books of American travel became abundant and
controversial, Foster began to work up his old note-
books into a book on the United States, but only
a few excerpts were published during his lifetime.
Foster's position gave him exceptional opportuni-
ties for knowing and describing the society of the
capital and of the larger planters in its neighbor-
hood. While he found Pennsylvania democracy
431240—60-
-36
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 537
quite uncongenial, he was highly appreciative of
the settled communities of Long Island and New
England. Much of his effort is wasted in an attempt
to demonstrate that the respectable part of the Amer-
ican people is of English stock.
4280. Jeffersonian America: notes on the United
States of America, collected in the years
1805-6-7 and n-12. Edited with an introd. by
Richard Beale Davis. San Marino, Calif., Hunt-
ington Library, 1954. xx, 356 p.
54-8926 E164.F76 1954
4281. 1807-1808. CHRISTIAN SCHULTZ
Christian Schultz, Jr., was a young New
Yorker who wished to visit Niagara and the great
rivers of the West, and who, provoked at finding
no information on record useful to would-be trav-
elers, undertook to provide it himself. He there-
fore became the most systematic of travelers, reck-
oning the miles between towns and other landmarks,
taking latitude and longitude at intervals, and com-
piling this into a preliminary 6-page Table of
Distances. He furnishes precise information on
the mode of traveling, the price of freights and other
expenses, the time required, and the risks and dan-
gers of the road. He claimed for himself only the
merits of minuteness and fidelity, but in fact he is a
straightforward reporter whose method and scope
improve as he proceeds and his work, far from
being a mere guidebook, is a neglected classic of
American travel. He presents a complete picture
of the keelboat age in the West as it affected the
uncommercial traveler. At Pittsburgh he pur-
chased a completely equipped Kentucky boat for
$130, and when this was destroyed by driftwood at
the mouth of the Ohio, he had to pay $150 for a New
Orleans boat, which would have cost only half as
much at Pittsburgh— and it had a leaky roof. He
advanced part of their wages to two of his boat-
men, only to have each decamp at the first good
opportunity. He gives one of the few glimpses of
the society of the French settlements in Missouri,
where he was compelled to winter by ice in the
Mississippi, and where, he thought, eternal dancing
and gambling absorbed the inhabitants. His pic-
tures of boating life on the Mississippi and of the
waterfront life of Natchez recall the later work of
Mark Twain.
4282. Travels on an inland voyage through the
States of New- York, Pennsylvania, Virginia,
Ohio, Kentucky and Tennessee, and through the
territories of Indiana, Louisiana, Mississippi, and
53§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
New-Orleans; performed in the years 1807 and
1808; including a tour of nearly six thousand miles.
New- York, Isaac Riley, 1810. 2 v. in 1.
1-24789 E164.S39
4283. 1814-1819. HENRY COGSWELL
KNIGHT (1788-1835)
Knight was a New England minor poet, M. A. of
Brown University, who spent some five years in the
remoter regions of his own country, presumably
being engaged as tutor by well-to-do planters. He
summed up his experiences in six polished epistles
to his brother, full of literary allusions and quaint
turns of phrase, written from Philadelphia, Wash-
ington, Virginia, Kentucky, New Orleans, and the
packet ship making the return voyage through the
Gulf of Mexico. Knight, if a conventional poet,
was highly sensitive to sectional differences in land-
scape, manners, speech, and artifacts, and his letters
give vivid impressions of these contrasting locales.
His New England viewpoint asserts itself from time
to time, but not to any excessive or ill-natured de-
gree; he occasionally deplores, but never denounces.
4284. Letters from the South and West; by Arthur
Singleton, esq. [pseud.] Boston, Published
by Richardson & Lord, J. H. A. Frost, printer, 1824.
159 p. 1-21522 E213.K69
4285. 1816-1817. FRANCIS HALL (d. 1833)
Francis Hall was a lieutenant of the 14th
Light Dragoons, who rose to the rank of colonel a
few years later. From New York City he went
north and made a tour of Canada before swinging
back through backwoods New York and Pennsyl-
vania to Philadelphia, and thence southward to
Charleston, the whole journey filling almost one
year. These objective and fact-filled pages are free
of the least trace of bitterness from the war which
had terminated barely a year earlier. Lieutenant
Hall took a cheerful view of the minds, manners,
morals, and prospects of ordinary Americans, and
found the high point of his journey in his visit to
the philosopher of Monticello.
4286. Travels in Canada and the United States, in
1816 and 1 817. London, Longman, Hurst,
Rees, Orme, & Brown, 1818. 543 p.
1-26822 E165.H19
4288. 1816-1817. BARON DE MONTLEZUN
This anonymous work is attributed to a
Baron de Mondezun. The author represents him-
self as a veteran of the American War of Inde-
pendence, who saw Washington at the siege of
Yorktown. There was a Barthelemi-Sernin du
Moulin de Montlezun de la Barthelle (b. 1762) in
the Regiment of Touraine which fought there. The
author went from Norfolk to New York, with a
visit to Montpelier and Monticello, sailed to New
Orleans, where he remained over a month, and on
his return from Cuba spent three weeks at Charles-
ton. A French Royalist, he is utterly scornful of
the United States and its government, its cities and
their people. Oddly enough, this contemptuous
attitude does not interfere with much sharp observa-
tion and accurate description, or with an apprecia-
tion of the American "gentlemen" whom he met
along his way — although he insisted that they were
a very small minority.
4289. Voyage fait dans les annees 1816 et 1817, de
New Yorck a la Nouvelle-Orleans, et de
l'Orenoque au Mississippi; par les Petites et les
Grandes-Antilles, contenant des details absolument
nouveaux sur ces contrees; des portraits de person-
nages influant dans les Etats-Unis, et des anecdotes
sur les refugies qui y sont etablis; par l'auteur des
Souvenirs des Antilles. Paris, Gide fils, 181 8. 2 v.
2-368-M2 E165.M78
4290. 1818-1820. FRANCES (WRIGHT)
DARUSMONT (1795-1852)
The celebrated Fanny Wright on her first visit
to America; she returned in 1824 and from 1829
lived in New York, and for two decades was a lec-
turer on behalf of feminism and other reforms. Her
route on this occasion was largely a circle to Niagara,
through Canada and Vermont, and southward to
Washington; she pens a general social commentary
in her letters from New York City. In her early
outlook, America is a land of liberty and repub-
lican simplicity, a glowing contrast to the Old
World.
4291. Views of society and manners in America;
in a series of letters from that country to a
friend in England, during the years 1818, 1819, and
1820. By an Englishwoman. London, Longman,
Hurst, Rees, Orme, & Brown, 1821. 523 p.
2-9930 E165.D22
4287. Boston, Republished from the Lon-
don ed. by Wells & Lilly, 1818. 332 p.
1-26824 E165.H191
4292.
From the 1st London ed. with ad-
ditions and corrections by the author. New
York, E. Bliss & E. White, 1821. 387 p.
2-9929 E165.D23
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 539
4293. 1 823-1 830. PRINCE ACHILLE MURAT
(1801-1847)
This nephew o£ Napoleon Bonaparte and some-
time Prince Royal of the Two Sicilies lived in
America from 1823-30, when he returned to Europe
in the hope that the Bonapartist cause might profit
from the revolutions of that year. Meanwhile he
had married an American wife and acquired a plan-
tation near Tallahassee. The first four of the let-
ters to Count Thibeaudau [sic; the usual form of
the name is Thibaudeau] which compose this vol-
ume were written from Florida; they were pub-
lished in 1830 as Lettres sur les Etats-Unis. The
remaining six were written during his sojourn in
Europe. Murat, a professed republican, presented
American ways and institutions as models for Euro-
pean imitation, defending slavery as a tolerable and
inevitable condition. His third letter, "Description
des nouveaux etablissemens," is a remarkable pano-
rama of the successive stages of civilization in fron-
tier areas. The story of Murat's life in America is
reconstructed in Alfred J. Hanna's A Prince in Their
Midst (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1946. 275 p).
4294. Esquisse morale et politique des Etats-Unis
de i'Amerique du Nord. Paris, Crochard,
1832. xxvii, 389 p. 2-37° E165.M94
4295. A moral and political sketch cf the United
States of North America. With a Note on
Negro slavery, by Junius Redivivus [pseud, of W. B.
Adams] London, E. Wilson, 1833. xxxix, 402 p.
3-18833 E165.M95
4296. America and the Americans. Translated
from the French and edited by H. J. S. Brad-
field. New York, W. H. Graham, 1849. 260 p.
2-371 E165.M952
4297. 1825-1826. BERNHARD KARL, DUKE
OF SAXE-WEIMAR-EISENACH (1792-
1862)
The Duke of Saxe-Weimar was in command of
the Dutch army and obtained leave of absence from
the King of the Netherlands in order to fulfill a
desire of his youth when he came to America in
the summer of 1825. He spent nearly eleven months
in traversing the East from Boston to Charleston,
and in making the great Southern circuit by New
Orleans, St. Charles, Mo., and back by way of Pitts-
burgh. He had traveled over 7,135 miles when he
wrote: "To my great and sincere regret, the hour
at length arrived when I was constrained to leave
this happy and prosperous land, in which I had
seen and learned so much, and in which much more
still remained to be seen and learned: sed fata
trahunt homineml" The Duke, of course, met the
best people in all parts of the country, especially
resident foreigners of distinction.
4298. Reise Sr. Hoheit des Herzogs Bernhard zu
Sachsen-Weimar-Eisenach durch Nord-
Amerika in den Jahren 1825 und 1826. Hrsg. von
Heinrich Luden. Weimar, W. Hoffmann, 1828.
2 v. in 1. 1-28054 E165.B52
4299. Travels through North America, during the
years 1825 and 1826. Philadelphia, Carey,
Lea, & Carey, 1828. 2 v. in 1. 2-356 E165.B53
4300. 1 827-1 828. BASIL HALL (1788-1844)
Captain Hall of Edinburgh was a retired
naval officer, a veteran of the Napoleonic wars who
had traveled widely after their conclusion. During
more than 13 months in America, he made a con-
siderable tour of Upper Canada, and went from
Boston to Savannah, and thence overland to New
Orleans. He wrote little concerning his return by
way of the Mississippi and Ohio Rivers. Capt. Flail
was the first Briton to arouse the ire of the Amer-
icans as a betrayer of their hospitality, and sub-
stantial replies to his book were penned by Richard
Biddle and Calvin Colton. He is indeed consistently
critical, but his criticism all springs from his con-
viction that democracy is an inferior form of gov-
ernment and society; he argues his case at some
length and is quite free from the irritability and
captiousness which mark many of his successors.
The letters of his wife, Margaret Hunter Hall ( 1799-
1876), have been edited by Una Pope-Hennessy:
The Aristocratic Journey; Being the Outspoken Let-
ters of Mrs. Basil Hall Written during a Fourteen
Months' Sojourn in America (New York, Putnam,
193 1. 308 p.) Forty drawings which Capt. Hall
made with the "camera lucida" were etched and
published separately.
4301. Travels in North America in the years 1827
and 1828. Edinburgh, Cadell; London,
Simpkin & Marshall, 1829. 3 v.
1-26817 E165.H17
4302. Philadelphia, Carey, Lea, & Carey,
1829. 2 v. 1-26818 E165.H171
4303. 1827-1831. FRANCES (MILTON)
TROLLOPE ( 1 780-1 863)
Mrs. Trollope came from England via New
Orleans in order to set up a store for imported
540 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
merchandise at Cincinnati and so recoup the family
fortunes. She spent nearly four years in America,
1827-31, of which a little more than two were in
Cincinnati. Cincinnati she would have liked much
better if the people had not dealt so very largely in
hogs, and the trouble with America was the want of
refinement. Her strictures on their deportment suc-
ceeded in making Americans angrier than any for-
eign observer before or since, but Mark Twain
thought that she was merely telling the truth. Mr.
Smalley's introduction to his edition gives a complete
and scholarly narrative of her American venture.
4304. Domestic manners of the Americans. Lon-
don, Whittaker, Treacher, 1832. 2 v.
2-396 E165.T84
4305. London, Whittaker, Treacher;
New York, Reprinted for the booksellers,
1832. 325 p. 16-25372 E165.T842
4306.
Edited, with a history of Mrs. Trol-
lope's adventures in America, by Donald A.
Smalley. New York, Knopf, 1949. lxxxiii, 454,
xix p. 49-11380 E165.T84 1949
Bibliography: p. [444J-454.
4310. 1833-1834. EDWARD STRUTT ABDY
(1791-1846)
This fellow of Jesus College, Cambridge, was an
intensive rather than an extensive traveler, but he
went southwestward into the valley of Virginia,
and thence into Kentucky and to Cincinnati. He
accompanied a British commissioner charged with
investigating American prisons, and his earlier chap-
ters have a strong "social science" interest: he re-
ports very objectively on prisons, hospitals, orphan-
ages and homes for juvenile offenders, schools,
poorhouses, asylums for the insane and the deaf
and dumb, and on wages, labor disputes, and strikes.
However, his narrative soon develops an obsession
with the Negro problem, and he heatedly assails, not
merely slavery, but the "aristocracy of the skin" in
general, so that he is equally condemnatory of the
treatment of the free Negro in the North, and he
tilts regularly against the American Colonization
Society.
431 1. Journal of a residence and tour in the United
States of North America, from April 1833 to
October 1834. London, J. Murray, 1835. 3 v.
1-26738 E165.A13
4307. 1832-1834. MAXIMILIAN ALEXAN-
DER PHILIPP, PRINZ VON WIED-
NEUWIED ( 1 782-1 867)
This German princeling had already traveled in
South America when he essayed the North Ameri-
can wilderness at the age of 50. He crossed the con-
tinent from Boston to St. Louis and ascended the
Missouri River to Fort Mackenzie, making consid-
erable stays at Fort Union, and wintering at Fort
Clarke. His interests are those of a naturalist and
especially an anthropologist; he tells all he could
learn of the way of life of the northwestern Indians
and recreates the life of these outposts of the fur
trade. He was accompanied by the artist Carl Bod-
mer, whose 81 "elaborately colored plates" form
one of the great attractions of the original
publication.
4308. Reise in das innere Nord-America in den
Jahren 1832 bis 1834. Coblenz, J. Hoel-
scher, 1839-41. 2 v. and atlas. 2-5381 E165.W64
4309. Travels in the interior of North America.
Translated from the German, by Hannibal
Evans Lloyd. London, Ackermann, 1843. 520 p.
2-5382 E165.W65
The appendix on Indian languages and some
matters of detail are omitted in the translation.
4312. 1833-1835. MICHEL CHEVALIER
(1806-1879)
Chevalier was one of the early French socialists
and a publicist of great reputation in his own day.
Sent by the French Ministry of the Interior to study
American internal improvements, he spent nearly
two years here. While most of his chapters are
general discussions of aspects of society and public ■
affairs, he devotes separate descriptions to Lowell,
Mass., and its factory girls, Pittsburgh, Cincinnati
and its hog-slaughtering, and the watering-place of
Bedford Springs, Pa. He is acute, philosophical,
and critical without being hostile, and makes fre-
quent comparisons of American with European
society. A long chapter on intercommunications,
surveying the canal and railroad systems built or in
progress, reflects his original purpose.
4313. Lettres sur l'Amerique du Nord. 3. ed. rev.,
corr., augm. de plusiers chapitres et d'une
table raisonnee des matieres. Paris, C. Gosselin,
1838. 2 v. n-22310 E165.C535
4314. Society, manners and politics in the United
States; being a series of letters on North
America. Translated from the 3d Paris ed. by
Thomas Gamaliel Bradford. Boston, Weeks, Jor-
dan, 1839. 467 p. 1-26758 E165.C54
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 54 1
43!5-
1 834-1 836. HARRIET MARTINEAU
(1802-1876)
Miss Martineau was a frail English gentlewoman
who had just emerged from impecunious obscurity
and become a literary lioness, by means of her 9-
volume Illustrations of Political Economy, an odd
mixture of fiction and classical economic theory.
She undertook to recuperate from her literary labors
by travels in the United States, which lasted nearly
two years, and included two western tours, one by
way of New Orleans and one by way of the lake
cities, with a winter in Boston between them. The
first product of her visit, Society in America, is an
extended moral assessment, topic by topic: politics
and economics, the "idea of honour," women, chil-
dren, sufferers, "utterance," and religion, with inci-
dents from her travels introduced as illustrations
under the appropriate heading. She concluded that
"the civilization and the morals of the Americans
fall below their own principles," as would any other
subjected to so intense a spinsterly scrutiny. At the
request of her publishers, she made further drafts
upon her journals for her Retrospect of Western
Travel, which aimed "to communicate more of my
personal narrative, and of the lighter characteristics
of men, and incidents of travel" than the first. It
won a greater popular success, and should best be
read before Society in America.
4316. Society in America. London, Saunders &
Odey, 1837. 3 v. 1-27890 E165.M39
4317. New York, Saunders & Odey, 1837.
2 v. NNC
4318. Retrospect of western travel. London, Saun-
ders & Odey, 1838. 3 v.
37-15429 E165.M379
43I9-
London, Saunders & Otley; New
York, Sold by Harper, 1838. 2 v.
1-27893 E165.M38
4320.
1835, 1859.
1865)
RICHARD COBDEN (1804-
Cobden made two visits to the United States, the
first in 1835, before winning fame as the leader of
the English radicals, and the second in 1859. On
the first he went from New York to Pittsburgh and
back to Boston; on the second he represented British
investors in the Illinois Central Railroad and trav-
eled extensively over its routes in private cars. Dur-
ing the first journey he was impressed by American
technological and industrial enterprise; on the sec-
ond he described the life of settlers on the western
prairie and, with enthusiasm, the new free public
schools.
4321. American diaries; edited, with an introd.
and notes, by Elizabeth Hoon Cawley.
Princeton, Princeton University Press. 1952. xii,
233 p. 52-5850 E166.C6
The manuscripts of the two diaries are in the
British Museum (Add. mss. 43807 and 43808).
Bibliography: p. 221-224.
4322. 1836. EDMUND FLAGG (1815-1890)
In the summer of 1836 this young Bowdoin
graduate undertook a ramble over the prairies, "in
the hope of renovating the energies of a shattered
constitution." He sent in a series of travel sketches
to the Louisville Journal and during the next year
substantially reworked them for publication in book
form. His "Far West" is not very far; he went by
steamboat from Louisville to St. Louis, and thence
up the Illinois River to Peoria. He transferred to
horseback and rode in leisurely manner over the
prairies of central Illinois as far as Decatur. He
was of a literary and sentimental bent, and his style
is often artificial and turgid. However, he rode with
a mind open to the natural beauties and historical
associations of the region, and so produced a very
different kind of travel book from the majority
of his contemporaries.
4323. The Far West: or, A tour beyond the moun-
tains. Embracing oudines of western life
and scenery; sketches of the prairies, rivers, ancient
mounds, early setdements of the French, etc. New
York, Harper, 1838. 2 v. 1-8701 F353.F57
4324. 1 837-1 838. FREDERICK MARRYAT
(1792-1848)
Captain Marryat, a British naval officer who had
won sudden fame by his novels of seafaring life,
came to America in May 1837 and traveled exten-
sively in the Northeast and Northwest for about a
year. He crossed Wisconsin from Green Bay, went
up the Mississippi to Fort Snelling, and returned
by the Ohio to the hot springs of Virginia. His
object, he tells us, was "to ascertain what were the
effects of a democratic form of government and
climate upon a people which, with all its foreign
admixture, may still be considered as English."
These effects, it becomes evident after a few pages,
were exclusively degenerative in nature: "The scum
is uppermost . . . The prudent, the enlightened,
the wise, and the good, have all retired into the
shade, preferring to pass a life of quiet retirement,
rather than submit to the insolence and dictation
542 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of a mob." Marryat is the archetype of the irascible
High Tory at large, resenting every intrusion upon
his privacy, and ascribing every contretemps along
his way to some sinister operation of the democratic
principle. The diary comes to an end two-thirds
of the way through the second volume of the first
series, and the remaining volumes are filled with a
series of topical essays on a variety of subjects.
4325. A diary in America, with remarks on its in-
stitutions. London, Longman, Orme,
Brown, Green, & Longmans, 1839. 3 v.
2-359 E165.M35
First series.
4326.
2 v.
Philadelphia, Carey & Hart, 1839.
1-283 13 E165.M364
4327. A diary in America, with remarks on its in-
stitutions. Part second. London, Long-
man, Orme, Brown, Green, & Longmans, 1839.
3 v. 1-28044 E165.M37
4328. Second series of a diary in America, with re-
marks on its institutions. Philadelphia,
T. K. & P. G. Collins, 1 840. 300 p.
1-28045 E165.M375
An appendix, "Discourse on the Evidences of the
American Indians Being the Descendants of the
Lost Tribes of Israel," is omitted from the Ameri-
can reprint.
4329. 1837-1840. JAMES SILK BUCKING-
HAM (1786-1855)
Buckingham was an English ex-seaman, journal-
ist, M. P., temperance and miscellaneous reformer
and lecturer, and professional traveler. His second
and third tours in America were guaranteed by a
considerable subscription list. The original publi-
cation, America, covers the larger cities of the mid-
dle eastern seaboard, with a trip to Niagara via
Albany. On his southern journey he went overland
from Charleston to New Orleans and returned by a
more northerly route which took him to the Virginia
hot springs. In the final tour he visited New Eng-
land and then went to St. Louis by way of Cincin-
nati, returning by the then novel route of the lake
cities, Chicago, Milwaukee, Detroit, and Cleveland.
Buckingham is the most indefatigable and encyclo-
pedic of the English travelers, who aimed at produc-
ing a strictly impartial account, and deliberately
gave more history, topography, "productions," and
statistics in order to balance the usual concentration
on manners. Viscount Morpeth praised his first
two series as "most useful and satisfactory Guides
and Text-Books," and Buckingham prefixed his let-
ter to the third series.
4330. America, historical, statistic, and descriptive.
London, Fisher, 184 1. 3 v.
1-26750 E165.B92
4331. New York, Harper, 1 84 1. 2 v.
1-2675 1 E165.B93
4332. The eastern and western states of America.
London, Fisher, 1842. 3 v.
1-26752 E165.B94
4333. The slave states of America. London,
Fisher, 1842. 2 v. i-Rc-2421 F210.B92
4334. 1 839-1 846. THOMAS COLLEY
GRATTAN (1 792-1 864)
Grattan was an Irishman who resided on the
Continent for over 20 years, during which he ac-
quired some literary reputation and the favor of the
King of the Belgians. The latter was at least in
part responsible for his appointment as British Con-
sul at Boston, where he resided from 1839-46.
"Civilized America," it appears from the map in the
first volume, consisted of the states of the eastern
seaboard; the more westerly ones are divided into
two degrees of rawness. The United States under
its Constitution, Grattan thought, was "better
adapted than any country on earth for securing the
greatest amount of good to the greatest number of
mankind," but far less so for the cultivation of the
higher degrees of human excellence. In spite of his
own considerable success as a public speaker, Grat-
tan found life at Boston increasingly distasteful, and
his topical chapters speedily turn into homilies on
the deficiencies of American character and achieve-
ment. They reflect, however, an acquaintance both
wide and intimate with the public life and public
men of the 1840's.
4335. Civilized America. London, Bradbury &
Evans, 1859. 2 v. 2-2416 E166.G81
4336. 1 841-1846. SIR CHARLES LYELL
( 1 797-1 875)
Lyell was the leading geologist of his day and a
principal founder of the modern science. He
traveled in the United States for over 10 months
in 1841-42, and for over eight months in 1845-46.
On both tours he traversed the Atlantic seaboard;
on the first he went to Cincinnati and Cleveland;
on the second he made the grand circuit through
the lower South and up the Mississippi and the
Ohio. Geology is, of course, his primary interest,
and his books have much technical data and many
diagrams. But his professional interests have wide
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 543
relationships: he analyzes such standard American
showpieces as Niagara, the Great Dismal Swamp,
and the Big Bone Lick; he meets American geol-
ogists in various parts of the country; he delivers a
series of Lowell lectures in Boston and later attends
the third annual meeting of the Association of Amer-
ican Geologists there; he describes coalfields and the
manner of their exploitation, etc. He is, in general,
a cool, intelligent, and scientifically detached ob-
server. He observes that the English travelers, in
general, compare the manners of a lower social class
abroad with those of a higher one at home; and he
perceives that slavery is a very complex problem,
admitting of no simple, easy, or rapid solution.
4337. Travels in North America; with geological
observations on the United States, Canada,
and Nova Scotia. London, J. Murray, 1845. 2 v.
1-26862 E165.L97
4338. Travels in North America, in the years
1 84 1-2; with geological observations on the
United States, Canada, and Nova Scotia. New
York, Wiley & Putnam, 1845. 2 v. in 1.
1-26864 E165.L974
4339. A second visit to the United States of North
America. London, J. Murray, 1849. 2 v.
1-26865 E165.L98
4340. New York, Harper; London, J.
Murray, 1849. 2 v. 1-26866 E165.L982
4341. 1842. CHARLES DICKENS (1812-1870)
Dickens celebrated his 30th birthday during
the four and a half months he spent in America dur-
ing the first half of 1842; he was already a novelist
of the first fame, and his progress was a series of
ovations. He traveled from Boston to Richmond,
where he decided he had seen enough of slavery,
and then went by canal boat to Pittsburgh and by
steamboat to St. Louis, returning to New York via
Niagara and Quebec. Dickens' emotional nature
sees only black or white, and after glowing pictures
of the philanthropic institutions of New England
and the factory misses of Lowell, the scene prompdy
becomes and remains black. His concluding re-
marks lecture the Americans upon their attitude of
suspicion, their tolerance of sharp practice, and that
"monster of depravity," their press. Dickens' dis-
taste for American life received further expression
in the satire of Martin Chuzzlewh (1843). Many
of his letters written during the tour are printed in
the first volume of John Forster's biography (Lon-
don, Chapman & Hall, 1872).
4342. American notes for general circulation.
London, Chapman & Hall, 1842. 2 v.
22-22851 E165.D53
4343. American notes and Pictures from Italy.
London, Dent; New York, Dutton, 1926.
xxii, 430 p. (Everyman's library, ed. by Ernest
Rhys [no. 29O]) 36-37248 AC1.E8, no. 290
"First issue of this edition, 1908; reprinted . . .
1926."
Introduction by G. K. Chesterton.
4344. 1 846-1 847. ALEXANDER MACK AY
(1806-1852)
Alexander Mackay, a Scot who had lived in
Canada, came to the United States in 1846 to report
the Oregon crisis for the London Morning Chroni-
cle, and supplemented his long residence at Wash-
ington by a grand circuit tour via the Mississippi
and Ohio Rivers. Of his three volumes, the first
covers the East, the second the South, and the third
the West, but each includes chapters on general
topics suggested by the local circumstances. The
whole is the most comprehensive report on the
United States made by an Englishman before James
Bryce. The tone, while critical on occasion, is
eminently fair and discriminating; thus the author
points out that the best of the South lies in its
domestic, indoor life, quite unknown to those
travelers who "were but depicting life as they saw
it in the railway carriage, on the steamer, and in
the bar-room." The book is dedicated to Richard
Cobden, and America, Mackay says, "is the coun-
try for the industrious and hard-working man."
4345. The western world; or, Travels in the United
States in 1846-47: exhibiting them in their
latest development, social, political, and industrial;
including a chapter on California. 2d ed. London,
R. Bentley, 1849. 3 v. 5-36861 E166.M15
4346-
From the 2d London ed. Philadel-
2 v.
phia, Lea & Blanchard, 1849.
8-2679 E166.M152
4347. 1847-1848. OLE MUNCH RvEDER
(1815-1895)
Ole M. Raider was a Norwegian lawyer and civil
servant sent abroad to study foreign methods of
legal procedure, who produced a massive report on
the jury system in Britain and America. He was in
the United States for over a year and spent much
of it in the frontier settlements of Norwegian im-
migrants in Wisconsin. His letters home are here
collected from their original newspaper publica-
544 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion, or from unpublished manuscripts. His report
on the frontier Norwegians, their situation as com-
pared with what it had been at home, and their
relations with their American neighbors, supply the
central interest of a special type of traveler's
narrative.
4348. America in the forties; the letters of Ole
Munch Raeder, translated and edited by Gun-
nar J. Malmin. Minneapolis, University of Minne-
sota Press, 1929. xxi, 244 p. (Norwegian-American
Historical Association. [Publications] Travel and
description series, v. 3)
29-28792 E184.S2N83, v. 3
E166.R13
The Norwegian letters were originally published
in Den Norske Rigstidende, a Christiania news-
paper, in 25 installments from November 6, 1847,
to July 3, 1848.
4349. 1848. JOHN LEWIS PEYTON (1824-
1896)
Peyton was a young lawyer of Staunton, Va.,
who, after a severe illness, was advised by his
physician to "take a few months' run across the Al-
leghanies and among the northern lakes." This he
did, from June 26-December 17, 1848, and went
across Ohio to Sandusky, where he took a lake
steamboat as far as Fond du Lac at the western end
of Lake Superior. His narrative illuminates the
hazards of western transportation at this period, for
after a race his river steamboat blows up, and he gets
to land by the help of a floating chair; his stagecoach
breaks down in mid-Ohio, and he carries his trunk
on his shoulder for 25 miles. A well-connected
young Virginian, he is able to meet such notables of
the region as Henry Clay, John C. Crittenden, Lewis
Cass, and Edward Bates. From Fond du Lac he
crosses the wilderness to St. Paul, and sees Indian
life at first hand. Peyton prepared his journals for
publication in Britain, where he had represented the
State of North Carolina during the Civil War, and
where he remained for eleven years after its close.
4350. Over the Alleghanies and across the prairies.
Personal recollections of the Far West, one
and twenty years ago. London, Simpkin, Marshall,
1869. xvi, 377 p. 1-8714 E166.P48
4351. 1849. BAYARD TAYLOR (1825-1878)
Taylor, one of the most prominent literary
figures of his generation, was still a journalist in the
employ of the Netv Yorl^ Tribune when Horace
Greeley sent him to report the California Gold
Rush in June 1849. He went via the Isthmus of
Panama to San Francisco, roamed at length among
the diggings, attended the State Constitutional Con-
vention at Monterey, and on his return made an ex-
tremely hazardous crossing of Mexico from Mazat-
lan to Vera Cruz. As Taylor says, "The condition
of California during the latter half of the year 1849
was as transitory as it was marvellous; the records
which were then made can never be made again."
The fortunate chance which brought a writer of real
descriptive power on the scene resulted in a book of
immediate popularity, which has remained a minor
classic.
4352. Eldorado, or, Adventures in the path of em-
pire; comprising a voyage to California, via
Panama, life in San Francisco and Monterey, pic-
tures of the gold region, and experiences of Mexican
travel. 2d ed. New York, Putnam, 1850. 2 v.
in 1. i-Rc-822 F865.T23
4353. Introd. by Robert Glass Cleland.
New York, Knopf, 1949. xxvii, 375 p.
(Western Americana, planned in connection with
California's centenary celebrations, 1946-50)
49-1 1 1 10 F865.T24 1949
4354. 1849-1851. FREDRIKA BREMER (1801-
1865)
Fredricka Bremer was Sweden's first woman of
letters and first prominent novelist, whose tales of
domestic life, at once realistic and sentimental, won
her an international reputation during the 1830's.
She spent nearly two years in America, and went
in the East from Boston to Savannah, and in the
West from St. Paul to New Orleans, with long
residences in several parts of the Union. Her title
is justified: she saw many American homes from
the inside, and her leisurely, kindly, and often long-
winded book affords an exceptionally intimate and
domestic view. Hawthorne thought her "worthy
of being the maiden aunt of the whole human race."
Benson supplies an informative introduction, but
his selections by no means exhaust the interest of
the complete book.
4355. Hemmen i den Nya Verlden. En dagbok i
bref, skrifna under tvenne ars resor i Norra
Amerika och pa Cuba. Stockholm, P. A. Norstedt,
1853-54. 3V- 2-2878 E166.B83
4356. The homes of the New World; impressions
of America. Translated by Mary Howitt.
New York, Harper, 1853. 2 v. 2-2879 E166.B84
4357. America of the fifties: letters of Fredrika
Bremer, selected and edited by Adolph B.
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 545
Benson. New York, The American-Scandinavian
Foundation, 1924. xx, 344 p. (Scandinavian
classics, v. 23) 25-26021 E166.B837
Selections from the preceding.
4358. 1 851-1852. JEAN JACQUES ANTOINE
AMPERE ( 1 800-1 864)
Professor Ampere of the College de France and
the French Academy was the son of the famous
scientist whose name is preserved in electrical ter-
minology, and himself a distinguished classical and
medieval scholar. He spent not quite five months
in the United States and, in addition to covering the
Atiantic seaboard, made a tour of the Northwest by
steamboat and railway, marveling at such new, raw,
and mushrooming communities as Buffalo and
Chicago. In order to leave the country from New
Orleans, he went by railroad from Charleston to
Montgomery, and by steamboat down the Alabama
to Mobile. He paused from time to time to pen
little essays on American literature, the temperance
movement, the Protestant denominations, etc. He
came to America, he said, in order to see something
entirely new, and his gracefully written Promenade
is the work of an exceedingly intelligent, cultured,
judicious, and even-tempered traveler.
4359
Promenade en Amerique; Etats-Unis —
Cuba — Mexique. Nouv. ed., entierement
rev. Paris, Michel Levy, 1856. 2 v.
20-3056 E166.A525
First edition, 1855.
4360. 1851-1852. FERENCZ AURELIUS PUL-
SZKY (1814-1897); TEREZIA (WAL-
DER) PULSZKY
Pulszky and his wife shared the exile of Louis
Kossuth, the leader of an unsuccessful attempt to
win Hungarian independence, and accompanied
him on the American tour to which he was invited
by a joint resolution of Congress. They arrived in
December 1851 and continued their triumphal prog-
ress for six months, visiting all the larger cities of
the Union, including Cleveland, St. Louis, and New
Orleans. Madame Pulszky kept a diary of the tour,
the extracts from which are considerably more in-
teresting than her husband's interpolations. She
took particular note of the Hungarians and Ger-
mans whom they met on the way, and breaks out
against "the race -mongers" — the Celts and Gauls,
the Latin, Slavonic and Tartar races and nations,
"which in Europe are decried as unripe for liberty,
become across the Atlantic good republicans, thriv-
ing under the freest institutions of the world." In
Cincinnati, where Kossuth addressed a gathering of
30,000, the Pulszkys attended a spiritualist seance
of the Fox sisters.
4361. White, red, black. Sketches of society in the
United States during the visit of their guest
[Louis Kossuth] By Francis and Theresa Pulszky.
London, Triibner, 1853. 3 v. 2-22433 E166.P98
4362. White, red, black. Sketches of American
society in the United States during the visit
of their guests. By Francis and Theresa Pulszky.
New York, Redfield, 1853. 2 v. MB
4363. 1852-1854. FREDERICK LAW
OLMSTED ( 1 822-1903)
Olmsted was at this time a practical and improv-
ing farmer on Staten Island. Having a recurrent
debate with one of his closest friends on the subject
of slavery, he resolved to tour the South examining
the institution as closely as possible, and arranged
to report his experiences in letters to The New
Yor\ Times. His first journey took three months
(Dec. 1852-Mar. 1853); his second, from which the
second and third publications on Texas and the
back country derived, considerably longer (Nov.
1853-Aug. 1854). Olmsted then engaged in much
historical, agricultural, and statistical research, and
took his time in converting his journals and news-
paper articles into the three solid travel books of
1856-60. The Cotton Kingdom was a condensation
of the three, with a small proportion of additional
material, commissioned by a British publishing
house after the outbreak of the Civil War, and
largely carried out by a journalist, Daniel R. Good-
loe. Dr. Schlesinger's edition of this work includes
a scholarly 50-page introduction which puts Olm-
sted's works in perspective. Olmsted passed from
plantation to plantation, obtaining lodgings, engag-
ing in conversation, and making discreet inquiries.
His cool, judicious tone and his fairness to indi-
viduals strengthen the cumulative effect of this
massive indictment of the slave system as a perpetua-
tion of frontier backwardness.
4364. A journey in the seaboard slave states, with
remarks on their economy. New York, Dix
& Edwards, 1856. 723 p. 7~35°36 F213.O49
4365. A journey through Texas; or, A saddle-trip
on the southwestern frontier; with a statisti-
cal appendix. New York, Dix, Edwards, 1857.
xxxiv, 516 p. Rc-2560 F391.O51
546 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4366. A journey in the back country. New York,
Mason Bros., i860, xvi, 492 p.
1-8724 F353.O51
4367. The cotton kingdom: a traveler's observa-
tions on cotton and slavery in the American
slave states. Based upon three former volumes of
journeys and investigations. New York, Mason
Bros., 1 86 1. 2 v. Rc-2428 F213.O53
4368. • Edited, with an introd., by Arthur
M. Schlesinger. New York, Knopf, 1953.
lxiii, 626, xvi p. 52-12193 F213.O53 1953
Bibliography: p. 623-626.
4369.
1857-1858.
1889)
CHARLES MACKAY (1814-
Charles Mackay was an English journalist and
verse-writer who had won fame by the popularity
of the songs for which he had provided lyrics. He
came to the United States for a lecture tour that oc-
cupied some six months and took him over the grand
circuit in reverse: first to St. Louis, thence to New
Orleans, and back through the lower South. An
unusual feature of this travel book is the inclusion
of several verses, such as "Down the Mississippi" in-
spired by local circumstances and composed in order
to relieve the tedium of long journeys. The author
is interested in Americanisms and street nomen-
clature, and includes a succession of sketches or set
pieces on such topics as night life on Broadway, New
York fires and fire-fighters, American hotel life,
Nicholas Longworth's vineyards near Cincinnati,
etc. The second half of volume 2 is devoted to
Canada.
4370. Life and liberty in America; or, Sketches of
a tour in the United States and Canada in
1857-8. London, Smith, Elder, 1859. 2 v.
2-22443 E166.M17
437i-
New- York, Harper, 1859. 143 p.
9-15726 E166.M165
4372. 1859. HORACE GREELEY (1811-1872)
The famous and influential editor of the
New Yor}^ Tribune did not take his own advice and
go west until he was 48. His route, after leaving
the railroad, took him through Kansas, across the
plains to Denver, and thence north to Salt Lake City.
Crossing the mountains into California, he covered
the mining and agricultural regions and went to
San Francisco only when he was ready to return,
nearly four months after leaving home. Greeley
regarded his work as quite ephemeral, but it brought
the outlook of a thorough-going democrat and
egalitarian to this vast area, and was concerned to
assess the spread of true civilization. The wildness
of the West was distasteful but sure to be ephemeral;
the pursuit of gold was little different from gam-
bling. Mormonism was orderly and productive but
oriental in its suppression of women; the Chinese
in the West acquiesced in discrimination and op-
pression; and California had a greater future in
fruit than in gold. The first of the West's concerns
was the completion of a transcontinental railroad.
4373. An overland journey, from New York to
San Francisco, in the summer of 1859. New
York, Saxton, Barker, i860. 386 p.
Rc-1223 F593.G79
4374. 1861-1862. ANTHONY TROLLOPE
(1815-1882)
This major Victorian novelist was the son of Mrs.
Frances Trollope [no. 4303] and quite conscious
that he was following in her footsteps. His stay in
the country (Sept. 1861-Mar. 1862) coincided with
a comparatively quiet interval in the Civil War.
He made two journeys into the West, as far as St.
Paul the first time, and as Rolla, Mo., the second,
visited several military encampments, and spent
much time in Boston, New York, and Washington.
While much of what he saw, especially in the West,
got badly on Trollope's nerves, he made a conscien-
tious effort to be fair, and to think of American
society in its own terms. Messrs. Smalley and Booth
have a scholarly introduction, notes, and appendices
in their edition.
4375. North America. London, Chapman & Hall,
1862. 2 v. 2-4107 E167.T84
4376. New York, Harper, 1863. 623 p.
8-2680 E167.T842
4377. Edited, with an introd., notes, and
new materials, by Donald Smalley and Brad-
ford Allen Booth. New York, Knopf, 1951.
xxxvii, 555 p. 51-11097 E167.T843
Bibliography: p. 548-554.
4378. 1861-1862; 1881. SIR WILLIAM HOW-
ARD RUSSELL (1820-1907)
This correspondent of the London Times had
established his fame by reporting the Crimean War
in dispatches from the front. He came to Washing-
ton in March 1861 and, after several weeks of view-
ing and interviewing, pushed on to Charleston,
TRAVEL AND TRAVELERS / 547
Montgomery, and New Orleans, and returned by
way of Chicago in time for the Battle of Bull Run.
His report of the Federal rout, unvarnished truth as
it was, aroused unwarranted indignation in the
North, and led to the termination of his mission
as the campaigns of 1862 were about to open. His
sketches of and conversations with the leaders on
both sides, his evocation of the universal tension and
excitement, and his glimpses of the hectic prepara-
tions for the great struggle have no counterpart, and
have been heavily drawn upon by historians ever
since their publication. By comparison, his travel
notes of twenty years later, when he visited Ari-
zona, California, and Colorado, are tame and tour-
istic. Fletcher Pratt's edition is a drastic reduction
which omits much of interest in the original.
4379. My diary North and South. London, Brad-
bury & Evans, 1863. 2 v.
1-22502 E167.R96
4380. — Boston, T. O. H. P. Burnham, 1863.
xxii, 602 p. 32-3321 E167.R963
4381.
Edited and introduced by Fletcher
Pratt. New York, Harper, 1954. xiii,
268 p. 54-6027 E167.R9635
4382. Hesperothen; notes from the West; a record
of a ramble in the United States and Canada
in the spring and summer of 1881. London, S.
Low, Marston, Searle, & Rivington, 1882. 2 v.
2-4130 E168.R96
4383. 1865. SAMUEL BOWLES (1826-1878)
Bowles was proprietor and editor of the
Springfield Republican, and one of the most influen-
tial journalists of the Republican Party. On the
conclusion of the Civil War, he and two other
newspapermen accompanied the Speaker of the
House, Schuyler Colfax, on a transcontinental tour.
From Atchison, Kan., they went by overland stage-
coach to Denver, Salt Lake City, and Virginia City,
Nev., and from San Francisco north to Victoria,
B. C. In Utah Colfax debated polygamy with
Brigham Young, and in San Francisco they dined
with the Chinese tongs. Bowles describes western
scenery with the facility of a veteran journalist, but
his major interest lies in mining, irrigation, and
all the other sources of potential wealth in the
West, which required only the completion of the
transcontinental railroad to inaugurate a fabulous
national prosperity.
4384. Across the continent: a summer's journey to
the Rocky Mountains, the Mormons, and
the Pacific States, with Speaker Colfax. Springfield,
Mass., S. Bowles, 1865. xx, 452 p.
i-Rc-1502 F594.B76
4385. 1866-1867. JAMES FOWLER RUSLING
(1834-1918)
General Rusling was sent by the Quartermaster
General of the United States Army on a tour of in-
spection of its western posts, which occupied him
for nearly eleven months before he took the home-
ward steamer from San Francisco in June 1867. He
departed from the route of Greeley and Bowles
in that he made a large southward loop in the
Rockies from Denver to Fort Garland, where he
saw General Sherman conclude a treaty with the
Utes, and from Salt Lake City he went northwest-
ward through the mushroom town of Boise, not
three years old, and via the Columbia River to Port-
land. He also made a southern tour from Los
Angeles to Tucson and Prescott, Arizona Territory,
and found little there to please him. The military
matters that took him west have no prominence
in his narrative, which has a graphic power and a
sparkle that would hardly have been anticipated
from the circumstances of its origin.
4386. Across America: or, The great West and
the Pacific coast. New York, Sheldon, 1874.
503 P- Rc-1535 F594.R94
4387. 1893-1894. PAUL CHARLES JOSEPH
BOURGET(i852-i935)
Bourget, well-known as a French novelist and
high-class journalist who specialized in psychologie
contempovaire, sojourned in America during the
year of the World's Fair. The itinerary form has
completely disappeared, although there are chapters
on life in Newport, the West, and the South; instead
there are sections on women, business men, the
lower orders, education, and American pleasures,
including sport. The book drew a rather ill-natured
rejoinder from Mark Twain, but after 60 years it
seems a sympathetic and penetrating performance,
in far closer touch with its subject than most of its
many successors from French pens. M. Bourget
found an invaluable lesson for France in the indi-
vidualism upon which American democracy was
founded, and which consisted "in multiplying in-
definitely the centres of local activity, and conse-
quently in continuously breaking up, by means of
54^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
localized action, the forces which, massed in groups, 4389. Outre-mer: impressions of America. New
would be too powerful." York, Scribner, 1895. 425 p.
2-1497 E168.B77
4388. Outre mer (notes sur l'Amerique) Paris, This translation first appeared in the New Yor\
New York, A. Lemerre, 1895. 2 v. Herald.
25-12819 E166.B76
XIV
Population, Immigration, and Minorities
41
A. Population 4390-4403
B. Immigration: General 4404-4417
C. Immigration: Policy 4418-4425
D. Minorities 4426-4435
E. Negroes 4436-4451
F. Jews 4452-4462
G. Orientals 4463-4469
H. North Americans 4470-4476
I. Germans 4477-4481
J. Scandinavians 4482-4487
K. Other Stocks 4488-4498
fff
THE present chapter has proved exceptionally difficult to compile and to annotate, but the
difficulty has been of different kinds in its several parts. With respect to "Population,"
it has not been easy to find enough suitable titles to make up a section adequate to its subject.
The scientific study of population statistics, although no new idea, has only gradually revealed
its possibilities, and these possibilities can only be realized when the statistics have been taken
in such form and with such thoroughness as to make refined operations possible. Certain
kinds of results, therefore, can be obtained only for
10, 20, or 30 years in the past; beyond that there is
only conjecture. Another difficulty proceeds from
the fact that no work on population can get too far
away from its statistical tables, and such tables are
not the favorite reading of anyone but a professional
stadstician. The titles offered here as a rule have a
text in which ideas are developed in close association
with a quantitative framework, and should daunt
no reader who aims at deeper understanding.
With respect to "Immigration," we have a situa-
tion where public policy has followed a fairly con-
sistent line for over three decades, but for the same
period most of the literature has criticized that policy
to a greater or lesser extent, and with varying de-
grees of harshness. It may well be that the policy is
justifiable enough, but if its adherents do not write
books to justify it, the defect cannot be supplied here.
General works on ethnic or other minorities in the
United States pose a special difficulty, for to a rare
degree they all say the same thing, and in the main
are as like as two peas. Yet the unanimity of the
textbooks does not correspond to any like unanimity
in the public mind, as can be learned from a glance
at the daily newspaper. Here we have tried to
select works with some degree of individuality.
The works on individual stocks, six of which
have literatures large enough to warrant sections of
their own, while the others are grouped in an omni-
bus section at the end, present another type of diffi-
culty. Whether historical or contemporary, such a
book must be written by one who is either a member
of the group or an outsider. If an outsider, he may
lack sympathy and special knowledge. If a mem-
ber, he may find every virtue in his group and every
fault outside it. We have tried to include the most
fair-minded authors of each kind. Works on reli-
gious Judaism, the major ingredient of Jewish na-
tionality, will be found in Chapter XXIII, Religion,
Section G; and works on the Negro's church, which
segregation has made into a separate and special
entity, are entered in Section K of the same chapter.
549
55° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
In conclusion, while much first-class work has
been done in recent years on the ethnic history of
the American people, both in general and in the way
of particular groups, it is obvious that much re-
mains to be done and that many aspects and peoples
are inadequately covered. In the present vigorous
state of national feelings and of American studies,
it is unlikely that they will long remain so.
A. Population
4390. American Council of Learned Societies De-
voted to Humanistic Studies. Committee on
Linguistic and National Stocks in the Population of
the United States. Report. Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. Off., 1932. p. 103-441. inch tables.
37-30356 E184.A1A6
Reprinted from the Annual Report of the Ameri-
can Historical Association for 193 1.
Bibliography: p. 325-359.
Chapters X and XI of A Century of Population
Growth (no. 4400) deal with "Surnames of the
White Population in 1790" and "Nationality as In-
dicated by Names of Heads of Families Reported at
the First Census." They acquired an unanticipated
importance in 1927 when the Quota Board made use
of them in determining quotas of immigrants to be
admitted under the "national origins" plan enacted
three years earlier, and in 1927 the American Coun-
cil of Learned Societies appointed a committee un-
der the chairmanship of Walter F. Willcox to re-
examine the problem. The present publication in-
cludes, in addition to the concise report of the com-
mittee, a long study by a genealogist, Howard F.
Barker, on "National Stocks in the Population of
the United States as Indicated by Surnames in the
Census of 1790" (p. 126-359) an<^ two briefer ones
by Marcus L. Hansen, "The Minor Stocks in the
American Population of 1790," and "The Popula-
tion of the American Outlying Regions in 1790."
The committee's revised classification table differed
in the following respects from A Century of Popu-
lation Growth: English stock, 60.1 percent instead
of 82.1; Scotch, 8.1 instead of 7.0; Irish (including
Ulster), 9.5 instead of 1.9; German, 8.6 instead of
5.6; Dutch, 3.1 instead of 2.5; and French, 2.3 in-
stead of 0.6.
4391. Davis, Joseph S. The population upsurge in
the United States. Stanford, Calif., Food
Research Institute, Stanford University, 1949. 92 p.
diagrs. (War-peace pamphlets, no. 12)
50-7898 HB3505.D38
A somewhat polemical pamphlet which was one
of the earliest publications to emphasize the com-
pletely altered demographic outlook since World
War II. Earlier marriage, higher fertility rates, the
reduction of maternity risk and infant mortality,
longer life expectancy, and the persistence of immi-
gration have all contributed to the accelerated pop-
ulation increase of the 1940's. The author rejects
the notion of a "definable upper limit to our popu-
lation" and believes that, "barring calamity and
egregious policy blunders," it may increase in-
definitely at changing rates and the American
economy may continue to expand with it.
4392. Durand, John D. The labor force in the
United States, 1 890-1960. New York, So-
cial Science Research Council, 1948. xviii, 284 p.
48-7397 HD5724.D8
Prepared under the auspices of the Committee on
Labor Market Research of the Social Science Re-
search Council.
"References": p. 266-279.
The 1940 census was the first to make a complete
count of the labor force of the United States, defined
as all persons who work or seek work for economic
gain, and excluding homemakers, students, rentiers,
the incapacitated, and the superannuated. Since
1940 the Bureau of the Census has issued monthly
data on the labor force. The author has used the
labor statistics contained in the censuses from 1890
to estimate its earlier size, and has projected post-
war trends into estimates for as late as i960. Sepa-
rate chapters consider demographic factors affecting
the labor force, economic factors, changing customs
relating to the employment of women, and the
wartime expansion of the labor force (from 54 to 66
million) and its subsequent contraction. The major
changes in its composition are the reduced number
of boys in their teens and of older men, and the
increased and increasing number of women, espe-
cially married women. The final chapter asserts
that a Federal labor force policy is indispensable.
However, since an expanding labor force promotes
national prosperity, the Government ought not, as a
means cf combating unemployment, to place undue
restrictions upon the employment of youths and
women, and it should encourage the employment of
older men.
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 55 1
4393. Hawley, Amos H. The changing shape of
metropolitan America: deconcentration since
1920. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 177 p.
55-11000 HB2175.H3
This volume of modest size enjoys a triple spon-
sorship, shared by the Scripps Foundation, the
Rockefeller Foundation, and the U. S. Housing and
Home Finance Agency. It refines upon the con-
clusions of Donald J. Bogue's Population Growth
in Standard Metropolitan Areas, 1900-1950, with
an Explanatory Analysis of Urbanized Areas (Wash-
ington, Housing and Flome Finance Agency, 1953.
76 p.). The author analyzes the 168 metropolitan
areas which in 1950 contained 56% of the popula-
tion of the United States, dividing each into central
cities and satellite areas. Whereas in 19 10 the satel-
lite areas contained only 23.3% of the total metro-
politan-area population, by 1950 they had risen to
41.6%, and during the same period approximately
25 to 30 miles were added to the average radius
of metropolitan influence. A reversal of tendency
took place about 1920: previously there had been a
rapid growth of centers at the expense of satellite
areas, while since there has been a centrifugal move-
ment to satellite areas to the detriment of growth
in central cities. This general tendency is meas-
ured against such qualifying factors as the size of
the central city, its average annual growth rate,
the distance between such cities, the proportion of
population employed in manufacturing, and re-
gional location.
4394. Holbrook, Stewart H. The Yankee exodus,
an account of migration from New England.
New York, Macmillan, 1950. 398 p. maps.
50-7972 E179.5.H65
Bibliography: p. 364-371.
The author, a native of Vermont, considers the
dispersion of the New Englanders throughout the
rest of the Union to be "the most influential migra-
tion in all our history," but strangely ignored among
the great movements that civilized the United
States. Among the qualities which rendered the
Yankee leaven exceptionally influential he singles
out their fanatical respect for education, their
shrewdness and great industry in business, and their
powerful urge to impose their moral notions upon
their new homes. The body of the book is largely
a treatment of individual Yankees in particular com-
munities from New York State to the Pacific coast.
Mr. Holbrook cheerfully concedes that his book is
"little more than a footnote to what is needed to
tell the Yankee story in full." In spite of its be-
wildering detail and low level of generalization, it
is the only book which attempts to show how,
through the migratory process, the standards and
ideas of one section permeated all the others.
4395. Hutchinson, Edward P. Immigrants and
their children, 1850-1950, by E. P. Hutchin-
son for the Social Science Research Council in co-
operation with the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau
of the Census. New York, Wiley, 1956. xiv, 391 p.
maps, tables. (Census monograph series)
56-5602 HB2595.H8
This volume continues and expands Niles Car-
penter's 1920 Census monograph, Immigrants and
Their Children, 1920 (Washington, Govt. Print.
Off., 1927. xvi, 431 p.), by "describing changes in
the size, composition, and geographical distribution
of the foreign stock from 1920 to 1950," and by
presenting occupational data for the foreign stock
from 1870 to 1950. According to Mr. Hutchinson's
interpretation of the figures, the drop in immigra-
tion since 1920 has brought about as wide an occu-
pational distribution among the foreign stock as
among the native stock. For "each of the many
different immigrant peoples contributed its own
complement of native endowment and acquired
skills to its adopted country; and, as the data show,
each found its own place in the territory and labor
force cf the United States." The 1950 Census mono-
graph series is produced in cooperation with the
Social Science Research Council and published by
Wiley. Other volumes which have so far appeared,
treating a variety of subjects on the basis of data
gathered by the Bureau of the Census, are the fol-
lowing: Social Characteristics of Urban and Rural
Communities, K)$o, by Otis Dudley Duncan and
Albert J. Reiss, Jr. (1956. xviii, 421 p.); Income
of the American People, by Herman P. Miller ( 1955.
xvi, 206 p.) ; and American Housing and Its Use; the
Demand for Shelter Space, by Louis Winnick, with
the assistance of Ned Shilling (1957. xiv, 143 p.).
4396. Kiser, Clyde V. Group differences in urban
fertility, a study derived from the National
Health Survey. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins Co.,
1942. xii, 284 p. tables, diagrs.
42-22364 HB891.K5
Bibliography: p. 274-277.
The National Health Survey was an investigation
conducted in 83 American cities by the U. S. Public
Health Service during 1935-36. On the basis of its
data, the author attempts to relate marital fertility
rates to the occupational, educational, and income
status of the parents. Fertility rates of rural groups
are presented for comparison, and the incidence of
pregnancy wastage is studied. Economically re-
tarded groups, it is concluded, produce more than
their numerical share of births, but, whether or not
because of the spread of contraceptive practices,
there is evidence that "group differences in fertility
are tending to diminish rather than increase."
552 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4397. Lively, Charles E., and Conrad Taeuber.
Rural migration in the United States.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939. xxi,
192 p. maps, tables, diagrs. ([U. S.] Works
Progress Administration. Research monograph 19)
39-29056 HV85.A36, no. 19
HB2385.L5
Issued also by the U. S. Farm Security Adminis-
tration as its Social Research report no. 17 under the
title: Migration and Mobility of Rural Population
in the United States.
"Selected bibliography": p. 177-183.
Because the data for detailed study of rural popu-
lation movements before 1930 are quite inadequate,
the authors have devoted only their first 25 pages
to that era. Even though limited to the decade
1930-39, it remains the most substantial study of the
internal migration of the United States. Concerned
with the nature and characteristics of rural migra-
tion, it gives particular attention to the relationship
of migration, or failure to migrate, to destitution
and economic opportunity. Migration is studied
in selected areas, in its relation to rural reproduction,
and in its effects upon rural and urban life.
4398. Sutherland, Stella H. Population distribu-
tion in colonial America. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1936. xxxii, 353 p.
tables, fold. maps. 37-1006 HB1965.S84
Bibliography: p. [xvii] -xxxii.
This somewhat misleadingly entitled book is in
fact an attempt to reconstruct the population statis-
tics of the Thirteen Colonies in 1775, on the verge
of the Revolution, and to prepare a dot map, which
here appears in three folded parts, with each dot
representing 50 persons. The New England colo-
nies all took censuses in 1774, 1775* or 1776, but
elsewhere it has been necessary to estimate on the
basis of earlier and later censuses, or to use tax lists
as a substitute or, in the case of Georgia, the "head
grants," a list of land and lot grantees from 1754 to
1775. In the cases of Maryland and Virginia, the
author has been content with figures of 1782 and
1782-85 respectively. The estimated total is
2,507,180, ranging from Virginia with 504,264 to
Georgia with 33,054. A considerable text discusses
the growth of population in each colony in its rela-
tion to immigration, settlement, and economic de-
velopment, but does not attempt to arrive at detailed
figures for successive epochs. An appendix repro-
duces the official British detailed list of the colonies'
imports and exports for 1771. Concerning her
map the author remarks: "Away from the cities,
with their tributary suburbs, there is little to relieve
the monotonous level of rural density."
4399. Thompson, Warren S., and Pascal K.
Whelpton. Population trends in the United
States. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1933. 415 p.
(Recent social trends monographs)
33-27203 HB3505.T5
One of the 13 monographs prepared under the
direction of the President's Research Committee on
Social Trends, named by Herbert Hoover in 1929
with Wesley S. Mitchell as chairman and William F.
Ogburn as director of research. Investigation was
carried on during 1930-32 through funds granted by
the Rockefeller Foundation. For the present
volume advance figures from the 1930 census were
made available, and assistance was lent by the staff
of the Scripps Foundation for Research in Popula-
tion Problems at Miami University. The authors
were limited to the analysis of objective data and
sought to "give a more complete picture of popula-
tion in the United States than has been available
hitherto and to project past trends into the future."
Chapters are concerned with population growth by
race, region, and locality, the distribution of various
stocks, the national origins of the white population,
age and sex composition, marital condition, death
and birth rates, and the effect of immigration upon
population growth. Two final chapters discuss
probable trends and "Population Policy." They are
naturally colored by the Great Depression, in which
a reduced rate of population growth is taken to be
"a contributory factor," and they favor planning and
strict control, including sterilization of the unfit as
a means of improving the quality of population. In
addition to the 88 tables and 36 graphs in the text,
there is an appendix of 27 large tables (p. 339-408).
4400. U. S. Bureau of the Census. A century of
population growth from the first census of
the United States to the twelfth, 1 790-1 900. Wash-
ington, Govt. Print. Off., 1909. 303 p. maps (part
fold.) diagrs. 9-35728 HA195.A5
The first complete national census was that of
Sweden in 1749, and the first United States census
of 1790 has some claim to have been the second.
The Bureau of the Census, however, did not become
a permanent organization until 1902, soon after
which it received custody of the surviving records
of the first census, which had been published only
in very summary form, and from which four States
and two Territories had disappeared. This volume,
compiled by the chief clerk of the Bureau, William
S. Rossiter, resulted from the Bureau's decision to
publish the returns in detail, and to present com-
parisons with the corresponding figures from later
censuses. Chapter III deals with the first census
act and the methods by which the census of 1790
was carried out. Bases for comparisons are estab-
lished in Chapter IV, which includes a series of
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 553
maps showing the counties of 1790 in comparison
with the modern counties. Other subjects are the
White vs. the Negro population, sex and age of the
White population, the family and the proportion of
White children, interstate migration, the foreign-
born, slave statistics, and occupations and wealth.
Pages 149-298 are occupied by 40 general tables, the
first 28 of which contain census material from the
Thirteen Colonies. The remainder present the data
of 1790, Table 104 (p. 188-200) being "Population
as Reported at the First Census, by Counties and
Minor Civil Divisions."
4401. Vance, Rupert B. All these people; the
nation's human resources in the South, by
Rupert B. Vance in collaboration with Nadia
Danilevsky. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1945. xxxiii, 503 p. maps, tables,
diagrs. 46"3393 HB3511.V3
"Bibliographic notes": p. 489-492.
This study of population pressure in the Southern
States, related to national manpower needs and local
economic development, is the only large work on
the population of an American region. The fact
that "Southerners are doing more to replace them-
selves in the next generation" than the inhabitants
of any other area, and doing it on fewer resources, is
presented as a continuing problem. The effects of
population growth on Southern agriculture and in-
dustry and the educational needs of the area are
described. There are 146 tables and 281 figures.
4402. Whelpton, Pascal K. Cohort fertility; native
white women in the United States. Prince-
ton, Princeton University Press, 1954. xxv, 492 p.
diagrs., tables. 52-5836 HB915.W47
A severely technical volume whose lithoprinted
pages effect a new refinement in analyzing popula-
tion developments in the United States during the
years since 1920. The available statistics are inade-
quate to a like treatment of any earlier period.
Colored women have been excluded from the tables
in part because the data for them are significantly
less accurate, and foreign-born women because of
their rapidly decreasing proportion to the whole.
A "cohort" here means all native white women
born in a single year, those born from July 1, 1899,
to June 30, 1900, being the cohort of 1900. The
cohorts considered extend from that of 1875, with
births as late as 1922, to that of 1933, whose births
began in 1949. The essential information is con-
tained in Tables A-L (p. [283H386]). Annual
fertility rates "had a U-shaped trend from 1920 to
1949," but the old high level and the recent rise
are qualitatively different: more women now have
one, two, or three children than formerly, but
fewer have five or more children. The operative
cause of fluctuations in fertility, the author is sure,
is the practice of birth control measures.
4403. Willcox, Walter F. Studies in American
demography. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell Uni-
versity Press, 1940. xxx, 556 p. tables, diagrs.
41-2109 HB3505.W5
"Bibliography of the more important writings of
the author": p. 541-547.
Dr. Willcox (b. 1861) is a pioneer and elder
statesman of American demography, whose career
has included 40 years as professor and dean at Cor-
nell University and over 30 years' association with
the U. S. Bureau of the Census, beginning with his
service as chief statistician of the 12th census (1900).
This volume collects the pieces which he had hoped
would grow into an Introduction to American
Demography but, because of the deficiencies of
American vital statistics, did not. All are informed
by the broad and humane oudook of 19th-cen-
tury social studies, so often lacking from the work
of latter-day specialists. The first part, "Studies
in American Census Statistics," contains, along with
papers on the urban and rural, sex, age, race, literacy,
and marital characteristics of the American popula-
tion, one on the "Development of the American
Census and Its Methods." The second part, "Studies
in American Registration Statistics," discusses the
birth, death, and cancer rates and other aspects of
these state-compiled figures, which did not become
nationwide until 1933. A final miscellaneous part
includes a paper on "Statistical Societies and their
Cooperation with Statistical Bureaus," and bio-
graphical sketches of Lemuel Shattuck and John
Shaw Billings.
B. Immigration: General
4404. Abbott, Edith. Immigration; select docu-
ments and case records. Chicago, University
of Chicago Press, 1924. xxii, 809 p.
24-8650 JV6455A7
4405. Abbott, Edith. Historical aspects of the im-
migration problem; select documents. Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 1926. xx, 881 p.
26-27485 JV6455.A68
554 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
These complementary volumes form a part of
the University of Chicago social service series, and
their compiler was for 18 years dean of that uni-
versity's Graduate School of Social Service Admin-
istration. The earlier volume opens with two his-
torical sections, on "The Journey of the Immigrant"
since 1751, and the "Admission of Immigrants
under State Laws, 1788-1882." The remainder of
the material dealing with the admission, exclusion,
and expulsion of aliens consists largely of federal
court decisions, 1892-1921, and of social case records
drawn from the files of the Immigrants' Protective
League of Chicago, 1912-23. The same files are
drawn upon for the cases which illustrate "Domestic
Immigration Problems" in Part III. The materials
in Historical Aspects nearly all antedate 1882, the
year in which the control of immigration was as-
sumed by the Federal Government. They are ar-
ranged within the following sections: "Causes of
Immigration," "Economic Aspects of the Immi-
gration Problem," "Early Problems of Assimila-
tion," "Pauperism and Crime," and "Public Opinion
and the Immigrant." No subsequently published
volumes give as good an idea of the variety and char-
acter of the sources for the study of immigration.
4406. Brunner, Edmund de S. Immigrant farm-
ers and their children, with four studies of
immigrant communities. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1929. xvii, 277 p.
29-11033 JV6606.A4B7
A study of the foreign-born farming population,
undertaken by the Institute of Social and Religious
Research (New York City) in 1926-27, and neces-
sarily based on the census of 1920, which put the
total at nearly one and a half million. Mr. Brunner
concluded that the newcomers, judged by economic
and technical standards, were making good on the
soil; that their children were no more and no less
intelligent than native children, whether judged by
special tests or by their school records; that marriage
outside the immigrant group increased substantially
after World War I; that over two-thirds of the com-
munities studied "were progressing more or less
surely along a well-charted course leading toward
complete assimilation into the life of rural America";
and that the younger generation were not deserting
the church into which they were born, but were
insisting "that their church shall be an American in-
stitution." The concluding portion of the book
consists of four case studies of immigrant villages by
different hands: Castle Hayne, N. C. (various
stocks); Askov, Minn. (Danes); Petersburg, Va.
(Czechs); and Sunderland, Minn. (Poles).
4407. Committee for the Study of Recent Immigra-
tion from Europe. Refugees in America,
report of the Committee, by Maurice R. Davie with
collaboration of Sarah W. Cohn, Betty Drury, Sam-
uel Koenig [and others] New York, Harper, 1947.
xxi, 453 p. 47-2565 D809.U5C6
A study of the immigration since 1933, taking
refuge from Hitler and his allies, which is estimated
at an approximate 275,000 persons, of whom nearly
fourth-fifths are Jews by religion or race. Over
half come from Germany and Austria, and most of
the rest from Poland, Italy, Czechoslovakia, Russia,
France, and Hungary. Unlike the earlier migra-
tions, it is composed primarily of middle and upper-
class persons, spearheaded by 12 Nobel prize win-
ners in science and literature, and including many
names since listed in Who's Who or American Men
of Science or both. It is here studied in a sample
of 11,233 repbes to a questionnaire, from 638 com-
munities in 43 states. The text, which makes skill-
full use of excerpts from the individual replies, deals
with the economic, occupational, social, and cultural
adjustment of the refugees; the occupational ex-
periences of businessmen and manufacturers, physi-
cians, lawyers, teachers and scientists, artists and
writers; and their opinion of America and Ameri-
cans' opinion of them. "In general, the attitude of
the American community toward the refugee has
been preponderantly sympathetic and helpful," and
the hopes of the vast majority, especially for their
children, are now centered here.
4408. Erickson, Charlotte. American industry
and the European immigrant, 1860-1885.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 269 p.
(Studies in economic history)
57-5485 HD8081.A5E7
A study of the efforts of organized labor to obtain
legislation preventing contract labor from entering
the United States. "The thesis of this book is that
contract labor was rare in America during the years
after the Civil War, and never reached the pro-
portions claimed by the advocates of a law against
its importation." The exclusionist movement, Miss
Erickson demonstrates, originated with the craft
unions. They feared the importation of skilled
workers from Europe as strike breakers, and ma-
nipulated the Knights of Labor and the American
Federation of Labor until the passage of the Foran
Act of 1885, which excluded contract labor of all
types. The author describes the haphazard labor
recruiting methods of American industries to show
that they had little to do with this legislation, which,
she contends, was actually racist in motivation.
Methods of distributing unskilled labor are also
treated and the fact emphasized that the industries
depended upon a ready reservoir of cheap foreign
labor and had no interest in excluding it.
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 555
4409. Ernst, Robert. Immigrant life in New York
City, 1825-1863. New York, King's Crown
Press, 1949. xvi, 331 p.
49-9759 F128.9.A1E7 1949
Bibliography: p. [297] -3 19.
Between the opening of the Erie Canal and the
draft riots of 1863 the foreign-born of Manhattan
Island increased from less than 20,000, or about
11%, to 384,000, or 48% of the whole. Of the
latter, over 200,000 came from Ireland, 120,000 from
Germany, and 27,000 from England. The author
details the miseries of tenement life in congested
lower Manhattan, but points out that the younger
immigrants and their children were able, through
their earnings, to improve their status and move to
cleaner, safer neighborhoods, making way for new-
comers from abroad. One reason for this was the
vigorous labor movement, which carried on four
decades of struggle for better wages and working
conditions, and in which, for the most part, natives
and immigrants worked toward the same ends, al-
though the Germans usually had labor organiza-
tions of their own. The newcomers maintained a
variety of military and social organizations,
churches, and periodicals of their own, which con-
tributed to New York's cosmopolitan appearance
but did not prevent the assimilation of their chil-
dren to American speech and habits. Once man-
hood suffrage was adopted in 1827, Tammany Hall
forestalled all opponents in the systematic cultiva-
tion of the foreign vote and thereby kept the Demo-
cratic Party in control during most of the period.
4410. Handlin, Oscar. Boston's immigrants, 1790-
1865; a study in acculturation. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1 94 1. xviii, 287 p. tables,
diagrs. (Harvard historical studies, v. 50)
A4 1-4664 F73.9.A1H3
Note on sources: p. [2515-268.
An outstanding study, based upon a Harvard dis-
sertation of 1940, of "the transformation of a neat,
well managed city into a slum and disease ridden
metropolis." Many immigrants entered the great
commercial port of Boston, but few remained until
the penniless Irish, fleeing from eviction and starva-
tion at home, began arriving in quantity about 1835.
By 1865 there were 72,000 of them in a total popula-
tion of 331,000, more than double the number of
all the other foreign-born. Without capital or train-
ing, they were confined to the least desirable occupa-
tions. They were crowded into the old mansions
and disused warehouses of Fort Hill and the North
End, without cleanliness, privacy, or proper ventila-
tion, and epidemic diseases and tuberculosis rose to
new levels. They remained the one element which
took no part in Boston's thriving cultural life, and
made fewer marriages out of their group than did
Boston's Negroes. The i85o's were marked by
jarring group conflicts and Know-Nothing racism,
but the strong loyalty and excellent military record
of the Boston Irish in the Civil War led to a re-
markable relaxation of antagonisms and discrimina-
tions, although it by no means ended their physical
and cultural isolation.
441 1. Handlin, Oscar. The uprooted; the epic
story of the great migrations that made the
American people. Boston, Little, Brown, 1951.
310 p. 51-13013 E184.A1H27
Bibliography included in "Acknowledgments"
(p. 308-310).
An original book which attempts a generalized
psychological history of the 35 million immigrants
who came to America in the century after 1820, in
terms of "alienation and its consequences." It was
the collapse of the old village economy in central and
eastern Europe which uprooted the peasant and
started him on his way to the very different life of
the New World. The native conservatism of these
folk was increased by the harshness of their new cir-
cumstances and led them to cling firmly to the
churches of their old communions, which they re-
constructed here in minute detail, and to reject
political radicalism, leaving a fair field for the local
party boss and his system of special favors. The
book concludes with an affecting evocation of trans-
planted peasants who had bogged down in the
slums of the seaboard cities and become sweated,
unskilled laborers; turned old folk, they still labored
under "a consciousness that they would never be-
long." As an overall picture, it gives small place to
the migration from farm to farm, and underesti-
mates the degree of prosperity and rapid accultura-
tion, especially among those elements closest to the
older American stocks.
4412. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The Atlantic migra-
tion, 1 607-1 860; a history of the continuing
settlement of the United States. Edited with a fore-
word by Arthur M. Schlesinger. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1940. xvii, 391 p.
40-6920 JV6451.H3
4413. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The immigrant in
American history. Edited with a foreword
by Arthur M. Schlesinger. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1940. 230 p.
40-35768 JV6451.H33
Professor Hansen (1892-1938) was the son of a
Norwegian immigrant to Wisconsin. A graduate
of the University of Iowa, his work for his Ph. D. at
Harvard was interrupted by service in World War I.
He was the first to master the 19th-century immi-
gration to America as an immense but unitary his-
55^ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
torical process, and to exhibit it at once in its roots,
trunk, and branches. His death at 45 was a mis-
fortune to American scholarship, but his published
writings, and especially the two posthumous vol-
umes listed here, were at once a solid achievement
and a guide for all subsequent workers in the field.
The Atlantic Migration was to have been the first
volume of a three-volume work, with the others
carrying the story from i860 to the 1920's. The re-
currence of economic distress among the laboring
classes of western Europe, rural and urban, in the
years after 18 15, is emphasized, along with the
common man's discovery of America, which, not-
withstanding its hardships, "he did not hesitate to
call a Utopia." Conditions on either side of the
ocean responsible for the statistical fluctuations of
the migration are clearly isolated. Five out of the
nine essays of The Immigrant in American History
are adapted from the course of eight public lectures
which Hansen delivered at the University of London
in 1935 on "The Influence of Nineteenth Century
Immigration on American History," and discuss
immigration in its relation to expansion, democracy,
Puritanism, and American culture. All evidence
the author's genius for solid generalization. "The
Second Colonization of New England" puts into
perspective the coming of the Irish after 1825 and
the French Canadians after 1900. The serious stu-
dent will find no more suggestive aid than "Immi-
gration as a Field for Flistorical Research."
4414. Kent, Donald Peterson. The refugee intel-
lectual; the Americanization of the immi-
grants of 1933-1941. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1953. xx, 317 p.
53-7600 E184.A1K4 1953
Bibliography: p. [303 5-307.
A study which continues, on a more minute scale,
Refugees in America (no. 4407); it was undertaken
in 1947 by the Oberlaender Trust in cooperation
with the Carl Schurz Memorial Foundation. It is
based upon 721 replies to questionnaires or inter-
views with German and Austrian professional per-
sons, estimated to represent nearly 10% of the
total immigration of such persons during 1933-41.
It was found that 520 of the 721 were able to follow
their former pursuits in the United States. The
author concludes that if the immigrant is under 40
and has children, he has a decided advantage to-
ward integration, and identifies other facilitating or
retarding factors. However, "fine personal quali-
ties" permit adjustment even under unfavorable
conditions. In sum, "probably no other large group
of immigrants has ever surpassed them in the speed
with which they have adjusted to American
culture."
4415. Smith, William Carlson. Americans in the
making; the natural history of the assimila-
tion of immigrants. New York, Appleton-Cen-
tury, 1939. xvii, 454 p. (The Century social
science series) 39-22860 JV6465.S55
Bibliography: p. 432-439.
"An endeavor to set forth the natural history of
the assimilation of immigrants to America; it aims
to present the more general aspects of the assimila-
tive process which are common to all groups."
Data have been largely selected from personal let-
ters, as well as published and unpublished diaries,
autobiographies, and life histories, to afford an
understanding of immigrants and their children as
persons, and of their problems in American society.
To this end, the author presents the immigrants'
point of view regarding the causes of immigra-
tion; their reception and settlement; the processes,
stages, factors, and agencies of assimilation; and the
effects of their heritage upon their way of life in a
new environment. The second generation is seen
as belonging neither to the immigrant society nor to
the society of those longer established, and is studied
from the point of view of its reception by the Ameri-
can social melange. The immigrants' contribution
to America in all fields is treated separately.
4416. Stephenson, George M. A history of Ameri-
can immigration, 1 820-1924. Boston, Ginn,
1926. 316 p. 26-4956 JV6455.S94
"Select bibliography": p. 283-302.
A brief treatment of the great century of immi-
gration to the United States, emphasizing "the part
that immigration and the immigrants have played
in the political history of the United States." Part I
is introductory, reviewing the European background
and characteristic settlement of seven major racial
groups. Part II analyzes the American political
reaction to the immigrants from the Know-Nothing
movement through World War I, including the
various schemes of restriction which came increas-
ingly to the fore, the attitudes of immigrant groups
to European conflicts, especially the war of 19 14, and
the evolution of naturalization policy. A final part
gives separate and very brief treatment to the con-
dition and political vicissitudes of Oriental immi-
gration.
4417. Wittke, Carl F. We who built America;
the saga of the immigrant. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1939. xviii, 547 p.
40-137 JV6455.W55
A general survey of the history of immigration
to the United States by ethnic groups, which is neces-
sarily based on secondary works, but has some aug-
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 557
mentation from contemporary newspapers and pub-
lic documents. The author, who is of German
descent and has made distinguished contributions
to the history of German immigration, was dean of
Oberlin College when the book appeared, and has
been dean of the Graduate School of Western Re-
serve University since 1948. It is divided into three
parts: "The Colonial Period," "The Old Immigra-
tion," and "The New Immigration and Nativism."
Some racial groups, such as the Welsh, Swedes, and
Jews, are considered in each of the first two parts.
There are also a few topical chapters: "The Immi-
grant Traffic" in its general conditions, in each of the
first two parts; "Immigrant Utopias" such as the
Harmony Society and Amana, Iowa; "Culture in
Immigrant Chests," largely a roll call of individual
immigrants of outstanding achievement; and "Clos-
ing the Gate," which reviews restricdonist action and
sentiment from 1729 to the national -origins law of
1929.
C. Immigration: Policy
4418. Bernard, William S., ed. American immi-
gradon policy, a reappraisal. Edited by
William S. Bernard; Carolyn Zeleny [and] Henry
Miller, assistant editors. New York, Harper, 1950.
xx, 341 p. diagrs. 50-120 JV6507.B4
Bibliography: p. 315-330.
This "broad survey" of American policy, past,
present, and future, is published under the spon-
sorship of the National Committee on Immigration
Policy, and consistendy maintains an internationalist
point of view. The immigration policy of the
United States which has prevailed since 1924 is
criticized as anachronistic and reactionary in charac-
ter, with discriminatory features which "have been
increasingly conspicuous as contradictions of our
democradc ideals and traditions." Chapter 2 dem-
onstrates statisdcally that the preferred nadons do
not use their quotas, and that the North American
nations, Canada and Mexico, have become major
sources of immigration since 1924. Pairs of chap-
ters are devoted to pardy stadsdcal arguments that
immigration stimulates the American economy and
maintains a moderate rate of population growth,
and that immigrant adjustment, as reflected by a
variety of indexes, has always progressed steadily
and in recent times has been speeded up. There
are concluding recommendations that the present
annual limit of 150,000 persons be increased, "pos-
sibly doubled"; that the present system be operated
with greater flexibility, especially in the case of
quotas left unused; that small quotas be granted to
Asiatic peoples; that the United States cooperate
with the international organs concerned with im-
migration; and that a Congressional commission
work out an equitable alternative to the national
origins system.
4419. Divine, Robert A. American immigration
policy, 1 924- 1 95 2. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 220 p. (Yale historical pub-
lications. Miscellany 66) 57-6336 JV6455.D5
"Bibliographical essay": p. 195-209.
An objective and well-proportioned narrative
which puts the recent history of opinion and legisla-
tion concerning immigration into very clear per-
spective. The restrictive policy established in 1924
has been repeatedly challenged but with small suc-
cess, for on crucial occasions it has commanded a
majority of both houses of Congress, and relaxa-
tions have been partial and temporary. The appli-
cation of the national origins system in 1927 led
to two years of debate which did not alter the law
but did increase minority group consciousness and
stir up antagonisms among the various foreign ele-
ments. Mexican immigration, heavily increased
since 1921, was reduced after 1929 through admin-
istrative action by the State Department without
further legislation. The same device was used to
cut off immigration during the depression, the total
falling to 23,068 in 1933, the lowest figure in over
a century. Congress refused to take action in favor
of European refugees after 1933, but administrative
action reduced the stringencies of the quota system
and enabled an estimated 250,000 to enter. The
Displaced Persons Act of 1948 was greatly watered
down by the restricdonist bloc in Congress; it took
a major effort to put through the 1950 measure
which finally solved the problem. The old racialist
views, the author finds, were common to the South-
ern and Western members of Congress who passed
the McCarran-Walter Act of 1952 over the veto
of President Truman.
4420. Garis, Roy L. Immigration restriction; a
study of the opposition to and regulation of
immigration into the United States. New York,
Macmillan, 1928. 376 p.
32-1946 JV6507.G3 1928
Bibliography: p. 355-371.
Professor Garis of Vanderbilt University, writing
in the turmoil of the immigration debate of the
1920's, was concerned to point out that it was no
55§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
new thing, for the opposition to immigration could
be traced back to early colonial days. As early as
1639 Plymouth Colony required the removal of
foreign paupers. While the background of opinion
has been more thoroughly presented in Higham
(no. 4422) and other books, this remains the most
convenient description of actual legislation, colonial,
state, and federal, through the Immigration Act of
1924. The debacle of the Alien and Sedition Acts
at the close of the 18th century had led to doubt
concerning the competence of the Federal Govern-
ment in this sphere, and it was not until the 1870's
and early 1880's that the Supreme Court definitely
reestablished its right to supersede state enactments.
Up to 1921, the author points out, restrictive laws
were all qualitative, defining and excluding par-
ticular types of undesirables. The act of 1921 was
the first to apply a quantitative limitation in the
form of an annual maximum figure. The utiliza-
tion of the census figures of 1890 in the act of 1924
is expounded in detail. Oriental immigration is
separately treated in two concluding chapters. The
author was himself a believer in the case for re-
striction, but was careful to keep it separate from
his factual expositions.
4421. Hartmann, Edward George. The move-
ment to Americanize the immigrant. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1948. 333 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political
Science. Studies in history, economics and public
law, no. 545) 48-9245 H31.C7, no. 545
JK1758.H35 1948a
Bibliography: p. 281-325.
A Columbia dissertation which traces the course
of an educative movement aiming at a rapid as-
similation of the millions of immigrants who had
come to America in the decades preceding World
War I. It began with the organization of the
North American Civic League for Immigrants in
1907, gained momentum as German-American rela-
tions deteriorated, thrived during the war and its
immediate aftermath, and died as the nation re-
turned to "normalcy." Unlike other American social
crusades, the Americanization drive was led by the
intelligentsia, educators, and social workers and sup-
ported by industrialists and business and civic
groups. Neither restrictive nor repressive, the move-
ment sought to solve the problem of the immigrant's
social isolation through night classes and personal
guidance intended to mold him "into a patriotic,
loyal, and intelligent supporter of the great body of
principles and practices which the leaders of the
movement chose to consider America's priceless
heritage.' " The author evaluates the results of the
program as both negative and positive: negative in
that it caused some immigrants to band more closely
together and led to a revival of nativism, and posi-
tive in that it brought native and foreign-born into
closer contact and gave impetus to the budding
adult education movement.
4422. Higham, John. Strangers in the land; pat-
terns of American nativism, 1860-1925.
New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press,
1955. xiv, 431 p. illus. 55-8601 E184.A1H5
"Bibliographical note": p. 399-411.
A general history of the antiforeign spirit defined
by the author as nativism and manifested in "the
hostilities of American nationalists toward European
immigrants." Its development is traced as it was
affected by the successive impulses of American his-
tory, and as it affected, in turn, every level of society
and section of the country — politically, economically,
socially, and intellectually. Nativism, which had
waned during the Civil War, experienced a complete
renaissance as South and East European immigra-
tion increased in the 1880's and 90's. It ebbed and
then flowed again following the turn of the century,
reached its zenith with America's entry into World
War I and the "100 per cent Americanism" move-
ment, and died in the indifference of the Flapper
Era, but not before it had achieved "the Nordic vic-
tory" of 1924. According to the author, "nativism
as a habit of mind has mirrored our national anx-
ieties and marked out the bounds of our tolerance";
he therefore considers his book as a study of public
opinion.
4423. Solomon, Barbara Miller. Ancestors and
immigrants, a changing New England tradi-
tion. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1956.
276 p. 56-10163 F4.S67
"A note on sources": p. [2ii]-22i.
In this outgrowth of a Flarvard doctoral disserta-
tion, prosperous and educated descendants of old
New England families are denominated "Brah-
mins," and the writings of such persons from about
1850 are examined for "the association of ideas
which produced a rationale for immigration restric-
tion." The crystallization was not effected until
the 1880's; the Massachusetts Society for Promoting
Good Citizenship was founded in 1889 and the
Immigration Restriction League in 1894. A num-
ber of "Teutonist academicians," such as Henry
Adams, Barrett Wendell, and Herbert Baxter
Adams, historians, and Francis A. Walker, Rich-
mond Mayo Smith, and William Z. Ripley, social
scientists, are castigated for their contributions to
the creation of "the Anglo-Saxon complex." A few
distinguished New England thinkers are individu-
ally exonerated from participation in this "betrayal
of the continuing faith in the potentialities of
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 559
America's democratic people," which still lingers in
the immigration laws of the land.
4424. U. S. Congress. Senate. Committee on the
Judiciary. The immigration and naturali-
zation systems of the United States. Report pur-
suant to S. Res. 137, 80th Cong., 1st sess., as
amended, a resolution to make an investigation of
the immigration system. Washington, U. S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1950. xviii, 925, xxvi p. (81st Cong.,
2d sess. Senate. Report no. 1515)
50-60699 JV6416.A39 i95od
This, the first general Congressional investigation
of its subject since that of 1 907-n, was carried on
for nearly three years with the late Senator Patrick
McCarran as chairman. Part 1, on "The Immi-
gration System," has introductory chapters on the
history of immigration and immigration policy, and
the characteristics of the population of the United
States. It then deals with "Enforcement Agencies,"
including the Immigration and Naturalization
Service, the Board of Immigration Appeals, the Visa
Division of the State Department, and the U. S.
Public Health Service, and with "Excludable and
Deportable Classes," "Admissible Aliens," including
quota immigrants, nonquota immigrants, and non-
immigrants, "Adjustment of Status," "Procedures,"
and "Territories and Possessions." Part 2, on "The
Naturalization System," has historical and statistical
chapters, and discusses citizens, noncitizen nationals,
ineligibles for citizenship, becoming a citizen, and
how citizenship may be lost and regained. A brief
third part deals with "Subversives." Appendix II
(p. 805-810) is a synopsis of the recommendations
of the committee, which appear in greater detail at
the conclusion of most of the chapters; a number
of them were embodied in the McCarran-Walter
Act of 1952. The remaining appendixes (p. 811-
925) are statistical tables.
4425. U. S. President's Commission on Immigra-
tion and Naturalization. Whom we shall
welcome; report [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1953] xv, 319 p.
53-60119 JV6415.A4 1953
The passage of the McCarran- Walter Act over
President Truman's veto in June 1952 was followed
by much criticism and, in September, by the estab-
lishment of the President's Commission on Immi-
gration and Naturalization with Philip B. Perlman
as chairman and Harry N. Rosenfield as executive
director. Instructed to report by January 1, during
October it received testimony in n cities; these
Hearings have been printed for the use of the House
Committee on the Judiciary (Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. OfT., 1952. 2089 p.). This Report
condemns the existing law as embodying xenophobia
and racial discrimination, and calls for the annual
admission of one-sixth of 1 percent of the popula-
tion at the last census (or 251,162 as against 154,657,
under the census of 1940). All relevant functions
should be consolidated in a new agency under a
commission on immigration and naturalization,
which would distribute the annual figure on the
basis of the right of asylum, the reunion of families,
needs in the United States, special needs in the Free
World, and "general immigration." Conditions of
admission and grounds for deportation of aliens
should "bear a reasonable relationship to the national
welfare and security."
D. Minorities
4426. Brown, Francis J., and Joseph S. Roucek,
eds. One America; the history, contribu-
tions and present problems of our racial and national
minorities. 3d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952.
xvi, 764 p. (Prentice-Hall education series)
52-1682 E184.A1B87 1952
The most comprehensive and informative single
volume on the American minorities; its usefulness
since the first publication in 1937 is attested by the
second revised edition of 1945 as well as the present
revision. There are 51 contributors including the
two editors, and Part 2, the largest section of the
book, contains concise presentations of the signifi-
cant aspects and problems of 45 minority groups,
down to Ukranian Americans, Estonian Americans,
Hindu Americans, and Icelandic Americans. The
majority of these are written by leaders in their own
groups, and reflect the "very sense of group supe-
riority that lies at the root of the problem." Part 3
describes certain activities of minority groups that
influence cultural adjustment, such as the foreign-
language press and radio. Part 4 analyzes various
aspects of racial and cultural conflict. Part 5 ap-
praises the role of government, the community,
and especially of educational institutions in the de-
velopment of intergroup understanding; its keynote
can be gathered from the title of Maurice R. Davie's
contribution: "Our Vanishing Minorities." The
large bibliography (p. [703]~75o) was specially
revised for this edition; it follows the organization
of the book, and contains many brief annotations.
560 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4427. Fairchild, Henry Pratt. Race and national-
ity as factors in American life. New York,
Ronald Press Co., 1947. 216 p. (Humanizing
science series) 48-33 E184.A1F3
Dr. Fairchild (1880-1956), long a professor of
sociology at New York University, continued in his
later years to assert a viewpoint which had become
academically unfashionable or worse. Racial think-
ing and feeling, he maintained, were obstinate social
realities which could not be exorcised by denying
their existence or by alleging their unscientific char-
acter, especially since most of the opposing dogmas
were equally unproved. He did not believe that all
faults were on the side of the much-abused majority,
and pointed to the Catholic Church's progressive
invasion of a number of social fields, and to Jewry's
own sentiments of superiority, exclusion, and dis-
crimination. Doctrinaire liberal tenets of equality,
and attempts to eliminate racial antipathies by legis-
lation, merely promoted social turbulence. The
achievement of intergroup harmony and the elim-
ination of friction must proceed, like all genuine
progress, from the heart of the individual, and must
rest on an essentially religious base, the abandon-
ment of the sense of self-centered superiority.
4428. Gittler, Joseph B., ed. Understanding
minority groups. New York, Wiley, 1956.
139 p. 56-11777 E184.A1G5
Contents. — The philosophical and ethical aspects
of group relations, by Wayne A. R. Leys. — The
American Catholic, by John LaFarge. — The United
States Indian, by John Collier and Theodore H.
Haas. — The American Jew, by Oscar Handlin. —
The American Negro, by Ira De A. Reid. — The
Japanese American, by Dorothy Swaine Thomas. —
The Puerto Rican in the United States, by Clarence
Senior. — Understanding minority groups, by Joseph
B. Gitder.
Eight papers originally presented at the Institute
on Minority Groups in the United States sponsored
by the University of Rochester in 1955 and edited
by the chairman of its Department of Sociology. In
his introduction President Cornelis W. de Kiewiet
suggests that these lectures were themselves "part
of the slow tide that is evening out the discrimina-
tions of American life," since scholarship is the great
emancipator preparing the way for the legislator
and the jurist. The editor, in his summing up, says
that the basic problem is not group diversity but
the acceptance of such diversity, and the avoidance
of those reactions of prejudice and discrimination
which impose minority status.
4429. Handlin, Oscar. The American people in
the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1954. 244 p. (The Library of
Congress series in American civilization)
54-8626 E169.1.H265
Of narrower scope than its title suggests; the
people in whom the author is principally interested
are the immigrant hordes recendy arrived at the
beginning of the century, and who kept coming for
another decade, and the depressed Negro popula-
tion still largely confined to the South in 1900. He
traces the fortunes of these groups against the eco-
nomic tides of the half-century, and especially under
the impact of two world wars. World War I pro-
duced a narrow restrictive nationalism and bitter
conflicts; but World War II produced a nationalism
which had lost its exclusive character, and left men
to find new values in their ethnic affiliations and
traditions.
4430. Handlin, Oscar. Race and nationality in
American life. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1957.
300 p. 57-5827 E184.A1H25
"Notes and acknowledgments": p. [281 5-287.
A number of Professor Handlin's articles and
papers of the 1950's are here revised and amplified
with additional essays in order to form an orderly
analysis of "the horror" — racism and its conse-
quences in totalitarianism and genocide. The book's
point of departure is the origins of Negro chattel
slavery in the 17th century, and the exclusion of
Orientals, Negroes, and Indians from the ideal of
national homogeneity in the 19th. Racism, how-
ever rooted in emotion, expressed itself in a series
of ideas which came to permeate much of 19th
century science. The dubious science in the 19 10
report of the Immigration Commission and the 1923
Laughlin report is emphasized, and in particular
the invalidity of the contrasts between the "new im-
migration" and the "old." In the concluding por-
tions of the book the author presents evidence that,
particularly since World War II, inflexible isola-
tionism, racial thinking, and racial antagonisms are
all on the decline in this country. A nationalism
free of restrictive and exclusive elements need not
conflict with the traditional democratic mission of
America.
4431. McDonagh, Edward C, and Eugene S.
Richards. Ethnic relations in the United
States. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts [ 1953]
xiv, 408 p. (Appleton-Century-Crofts sociology
series) 52-13692 Er84.AiMi37
"Selected readings" at end of each chapter.
4432. Marden, Charles F. Minorities in American
society. New York, American Book Co.,
1952. 493 p. (American sociology series)
52-972 E184.A1M3
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 561
"Suggested reading" at end of each chapter.
Both tides are textbooks for college courses in
sociology, and their general similarity in approach,
materials, and point of view is more noticeable than
their differences of detail. Professor Marden of
Rutgers University calls attention to the originality
of his book in taking "as its central unit, not minor-
ities as such, but rather the relations, or the dynamic
interaction, between the minority and its reciprocal,"
which he calls the dominant. The varieties into
which he classifies these relations are four: "native"-
foreigner, white-colored, ward-wardship, and reli-
gious (Catholic-Protestant and Jewish-gentile).
While, as the author believes, the ultimate prospect
for all minorities is complete assimilation, "it is not
certain whether or when white Americans are going
to be able to eliminate their 'race-color' conscious-
ness." This should not hinder believers in "the
American creed" from oppportunistic activity to
reduce discrimination, with the least arousal of
antagonism, on various fronts. The first tide is un-
usual in its "biracial authorship," for Professor
Richards of Texas Southern University is a Negro.
Its three major parts are concerned with under-
standing, analyzing, and with improving ethnic
relations. The authors point to the originality of
the analytical part, which provides a common frame
of reference in "the status system of the United
States," and examines the social or interpersonal,
the educational, the legal, and the economic status
of seven major ethnic groups. Most of the chapters
contain one or more extracts from articles in socio-
logical periodicals. The authors conclude that the
United States has probably made the greatest prog-
ress of any modern nation "in testing the tradi-
tional assumptions that ethnic differences and social
inequality are inherendy linked."
4433. Rose, Arnold M., and Caroline Rose.
America divided, minority group relations
in the United States. New York, Knopf, 1948.
xi, 342, ix p. 48-9862 E184.A1R68 1948
Bibliography: p. 329-342.
4434. Rose, Arnold M., ed. Race prejudice and
discrimination: readings in intergroup rela-
tions in the United States. New York, Knopf,
1951. xi, 605, vi p. 51-11305 E184.A1R7
The authors of America Divided, producing the
first general survey of their subject in 16 years, hoped
to pull together all recent scientific study and
scholarly writing in their field, but were compelled
by its voluminousness to confine themselves to the
most important topics and salient facts. Minority
problems are defined as distortions in the mind of
the majority, and 12 minority groups comprising
431240—60 37
43 out of our 131 millions are identified. The
positions of minorities are then discussed with re-
spect to American economic life, law and justice,
and political and social life. Descriptive chapters
on group self-identification and the minority com-
munity are followed by analytical ones which mini-
mize race differences and note that present-day
theories of race prejudice are inadequately
grounded in empirical research. A concluding
chapter on recent and future trends suggests that
relations among nationality and racial groups are
improving, but among religious groups are de-
teriorating. The second title is an anthology made
up principally of articles from scholarly periodicals,
with a few extracts from books; the editor contri-
butes introductions to each of the five parts and the
58 selections. The arrangement follows that of
America Divided, save that Part V, "Proposed
Techniques for Eliminating Minority Problems,"
with seven selections, has no counterpart there.
The book brings within one pair of covers a quan-
tity of scattered and quite valuable material.
4435. Warner, William Lloyd, and Leo Srole.
The social systems of American ethnic
groups. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1945.
318 p. tables, diagrs. (Yankee City series, v. 3)
A45-3302 E184.A1W25
The third in this series of volumes on the social
structure of an old New England community as it
appears to a group of social anthropologists apply-
ing the techniques developed in studying more
primitive societies. The research was performed
during 1930-35 by a staff of 25 field workers, ana-
lysts, and writers, as a part of the larger investiga-
tion. A part of the text written by Dr. Srole formed
his doctoral dissertation submitted to the University
of Chicago in 1940. The method varies, as in other
volumes of the series, between mathematical tabu-
lations of social distance, expressing intangibles in
decimal points, and imaginatively fictive "case his-
tories." The ethnic groups studied are the Irish,
French Canadians, Jews, Italians, Armenians,
Greeks, Poles, and Russians, with the Yankees at
one pole as a positive absolute, and the Negroes at
the other as a negative one. "Each group enters the
city at the bottom of the social heap (lower-lower
class) and through the several generations makes its
desperate climb upward. The early arrivals, having
had more time, have climbed farther up the ladder
than the ethnic groups that followed them." The
unassimilated portion of each ethnic group usually
has a status structure of its own. Later chapters
consider the ethnic groups in their bearing upon the
family, the church, the school, and private associa-
tions.
502 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
E. Negroes
4436. Crum, Mason. Gullah; Negro life in the
Carolina Sea Islands. Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1940. xv, 351 p.
40-34941 E185.93.S7C85
Bibliography: p. [3451-351.
Most of the titles in the present section are con-
cerned with the interaction of Negro and white
communities amid the increasing complexities of
industrial civilization. This one differs in present-
ing the life of an isolated Negro community
where, at the time of writing, relatively few changes
had "taken place in their mode of living and their
outlook upon life since Emancipation." These Sea
Islands of South Carolina, from Georgetown to Port
Royal Sound, are cut off from the coastal plain by
a belt of wide swamps infested by the ccttonmouth
moccasin, and were little frequented from the fall
of the slave regime at the end of 1861 until the
construction of modern hard-surfaced roads. In
IQ40 the sea island Negroes were largely tenant
farmers, raising cotton and corn on exhausted land,
living in poverty and chronic debt, and on a diet
of cornbread, molasses, and fatback. Their speech
is the Gullah dialect, incomprehensible to the out-
sider, "perhaps the most peculiar of all American
forms of speech." It is, nevertheless, almost wholly
English, derived from the speech of indentured
servants, with only a score of African words. The
author has traced the Biblical lineage of the Gullah
spirituals, in parallel passages which "show how
deeply the slaves of the Carolina coast draw upon
the dramatic episodes of the Old and New Testa-
ments, and particularly the apocalyptic passages."
The remainder of the book is a historical treatment
of plantation days and the aftermath of Emancipa-
tion, with frequent quotations from source mate-
rials.
4437. Davie, Maurice R. Negroes in American
society. New York, Whittlesey House, 1949.
542 p. 49-11574 E185.6.D3
"References" at end of chapters.
A textbook by a Yale professor of sociology which
aims to give a factual, scientific analysis and is ex-
plicitly "eclectic in character" — i. e., is based on other
sociological literature rather than on any personal
experience or investigations of its author. This
gives the book the relative advantage of being less
exacerbated and hortatory in tone than many recent
writings on the subject. Four historical chapters
are followed by substantial analyses of the situation
of the Negro in economic life, education, religion,
family life, housing, crime, and suffrage. Interest-
ing chapters on subjects not always so well covered
in general works include "Negro Health and Vital-
ity," "The Negro Question in Wartime," "Lynch-
ing and Race Riots," and "Race Mixture and Inter-
marriage." The controversies of the present and
the recent past are reviewed in chapters on "Segre-
gation and Discrimination," "The Doctrine of Racial
Inferiority," "The Negro's Reaction to His Status,"
and "The Future of the Negro." The author be-
lieves that the indirect approach to a change of
attitudes on race relations is more effective than the
direct one, and points out that "American Negroes
now rate in education, health, economic status, and
other measures of achievement far above the total
population of all but a few very favored nations."
4438. Davis, Allison, Burleigh B. Gardner, and
Mary R. Gardner. Deep South; a social
anthropological study of caste and class. Directed
by Wfilliam] Lloyd Warner. Chicago, University
of Chicago Press, 1941. xv, 558 p. tables.
41-23645 HN79.A2D3
An exploration of a Southern community's or-
ganized system of sentiments and attitudes as ex-
pressed in the social practices of whites and Negroes
and in the beliefs they hold about themselves and
about each other. A white man and his wife and
a Negro and his wife, all trained in social anthro-
pology at Harvard, were sent to live for two years in
an unnamed city of the deep South. Over half of
its 10,000 inhabitants were Negroes, and the adja-
cent rural areas were over 80 percent Negro. They
attempted to discover group attitudes less by formal
interviews than by stimulating free discussions with
members of both the white and Negro communities,
as soon as these had come to accept the investi-
gators as belonging to their own social groups.
Southern society, they conclude, is rigorously di-
vided into two racial castes; there are classes within
each caste and cliques within each class. However,
there is a relatively slight differentiation of class
within the Negro caste, and both castes attempt to
conceal their class feelings in deference to demo-
cratic and Christian dogmas. On occasion force
and intimidation may be used to maintain caste
divisions. Caste and class have changed and are
changing through time, but remain recognized and
observable systems. Over half the book is devoted
to the relation of caste and class to the cotton econ-
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 563
omy of the area, and a long final chapter to their
relation to the white monopoly of local government.
4439. Drake, St. Clair, and Horace R. Cayton.
Black metropolis; a study of Negro life in a
northern city. With an introd. by Richard Wright.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1945. xxxiv, 809 p.
maps, diagrs. 45-9257 F548.9.N3D68
"A list of selected books dealing with the Ameri-
can Negro" : p. 793-796.
This thick volume originated in a series of projects
financed by the Works Projects Administration and
directed by Professors Cayton and William Lloyd
Warner of the University of Chicago. They grad-
ually broadened from a study of juvenile delinquency
in Chicago's South Side to that of "the description
and analysis of the structure and organization of the
Negro community, both internally, and in relation
to the metropolis of which it is a part." The Negro
ghetto was the Black Belt, a narrow tongue of land,
seven miles in length and one and a half in width,
in which, together with five smaller South-Side
areas, 90 percent of Chicago's 337,000 Negroes were
solidly packed. This work sketches the historical
development of the Belt, analyzes the nature of the
"color-line" in this Northern city and the move-
ments across it, and describes the "job ceiling"
which kept Negroes from competing as individuals
for any type of job for which they were qualified,
and concentrated them in semiskilled and unskilled
occupations. Part III describes the ways of life of
"Bronzeville" in a variety of spheres and on three
class levels. In conclusion the authors stress the
contradiction between the principle of fixed status
and that of free competition, which prevails else-
where in American urban society, and describe the
problem as essentially a moral one.
4440. Franklin, John Hope. From slavery to free-
dom; a history of American Negroes. 2d
ed., rev. & enl. New York, Knopf, 1956. xv, 639,
xlii p. 56-13200 E185.F825 1956
"Bibliographical notes": p. 605-639.
Professor Franklin's volume, originally published
in 1947, was at once recognized as the most success-
ful of all attempts to tell the story of the American
Negro in a single volume. In order to put his story
in its proper perspective, the author has maintained
"a continuous recognition of the main stream of
American history and the relationship of the Negro
to it," as well as "a discreet balance between recog-
nizing the deeds of outstanding persons and depict-
ing the fortunes of the great mass of Negroes." The
close of the Civil War forms a halfway point in the
volume. Negro beginnings are traced in chapters
on "Early Negro States of Africa" and "The African
Way of Life," and the introduction to America in
chapters on "The Slave Trade" and the origins of
the slave system in the Caribbean Islands. A chap-
ter on "That Peculiar Institution" of the Old South
is followed by one on the "Quasi-Free Negroes,"
North and South, of the years before i860. "Los-
ing the Peace" is the author's description of the
gradual overthrow of the Reconstruction setdement
and the triumph of White Supremacy. Interesting
chapters describe "A Harlem Renaissance" follow-
ing World War I and the immense benefits which
Negroes received from the New Deal. Separate
chapters are devoted to the progress of the Negro
in Latin America and in Canada. Rayford W.
Logan's The Negro in the United States, A Brief
History (Princeton, Van Nostrand, 1957. 191 p.
An Anvil original, no. 19) is an inexpensive paper-
back with only 14 pages on the years before 1865.
However, it gives a concise oudine of the Negro's
upward struggles since that year, together with 28
selected documents (p. 106-182) and a select bibliog-
raphy (p. 183-185). Langston Hughes and Milton
Meltzer, in A Pictorial History of the Negro in
America (New York, Crown, 1956. 316 p.), pre-
sent a very interesting and various body of illus-
trations, most of them contemporary with their
subject matter, and provided with an adequate text-
ual commentary.
4441. Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro
family in the United States. Rev. and
abridged ed. New York, Dryden Press, 1948. xviii,
374 p. (The Dryden Press sociology publications)
48-7000 E185.86.F74 1948
Professor Frazier describes this edition as a popu-
lar condensation, carried out by Mrs. Bonita Valien,
of the first, published by the University of Chicago
Press in 1939 (xxxii, 686 p.). Ernest W. Burgess,
editor of the University of Chicago sociological series
in which it appeared, described it as the most valu-
able contribution to the literature of the family since
the publication, 20 years earlier, of Thomas and
Znaniecki's Polish Peasant in Europe and America
(no. 4495). As he remarks, the transplantation of
the Negro from Africa to America, the transition
from slavery to freedom, and the migration from
the plantation to the metropolis produced uniquely
great and sudden dislocations in the family life of a
people, and so exhibit "a social institution sub-
jected to the severest stresses and strains of social
change." The special value of the study lay in its
combination of such precise statistics as could be ob-
tained with a multitude of personal narratives col-
lected by the author from Chicago and Harlem
Negroes. Since the tables have disappeared and
the documentary material has been considerably
reduced in the abridgement, many students will
prefer the original edition. The four successive
564 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
phases of the Negro family in America are defined
by the author as primarily matriarchal, patriarchal,
unstable, and equalitarian, but these abstractions
give only a faint idea of the richness of his materials.
4442. Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro in
the United States. Rev. ed. New York,
Macmillan, 1957. xxxiii, 769 p. maps, diagrs.,
tables. 57-5224 E185.F833 1957
Bibliography: p. 707-752.
A comprehensive sociological treatment of the
Negro race in the United States, originally published
in 1949. It approaches the subject historically and
emphasizes "the emergence of the Negro as a minor-
ity group and his gradual integration into American
life." The Negro is regarded, not as an atomized
individual, but "as a part of an organized (or dis-
organized) social life which forms a more or less
segregated segment of American society." Of the
historical sections, Part 1 on the slave regime em-
phasizes the Negro's role in the social organization
of the plantation, in which role he was able to take
over the culture of the whites. Part 2 dwells upon
the racial conflict which developed during and fol-
lowing Reconstruction, eventuating in the establish-
ment of a quasi-caste system. Part 3 analyzes "The
Negro Community and Its Institutions" with respect
to population, rural and urban communities, social
and economic stratification, the family, the church,
fraternal organizations, and business enterprise.
Part 4, on "Intellectual Life and Leadership,"
describes educational institutions, the press and
literature, social movements, and the Negro intelli-
gentsia. Part 5 deals with "Problems of Adjust-
ment," including crime, delinquency, and race rela-
tions. In conclusion, Dr. Frazier examines the
"Prospects for Integration of the Negro into Ameri-
can Society" and finds that they have been improved
by all recent social changes. The permanence of
these changes is guaranteed by the international
situation, for upon America's treatment of the Negro
at home depends her "bid for the support of the
colored majority in the world."
4443. Johnson, Charles S. Into the main stream,
a survey of best practices in race relations in
the South, by Charles S. Johnson and associates,
Elizabeth L. Allen, Horace M. Bond, Margaret Mc-
Culloch [and] Alma Forrest Polk. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1947. xiv,
355 p. 47"30299 E185.61.J624
Dr. Johnson has been associated with Fisk Univer-
sity at Nashville since 1928 and its president since
1946. In this volume, however, he writes as Direc-
tor of the Race Relations Division of the American
Missionary Association, which conducted the survey
upon which it is based. Seven hundred "respon-
sible and informed" individuals in the South co-
operated with the project, and Dr. Johnson credits
"the main structure" of the volume to Miss McCul-
loch, who analyzed their contributions. The book
is more general in scope than a strict interpretation
of its subtitle would imply; the subject matter
actually extends to the improving condition of the
Southern Negro in most of the spheres of life:
citizenship (including the use of the ballot and ap-
pointment to government service), employment,
education (including college courses on the Negro
or on race relations), the "moulding of attitudes" by
a variety of media, public health, the churches, and
the Y. M. and Y. W. C. A. In a number of sections
the items of information follow no clear pattern of
arrangement. In his Introduction Dr. Johnson
points out the factors at present favorable to inter-
racial harmony and concludes: "The totality of these
incidents and programs undoubtedly suggests
progress and a will to change, both of which have
been accelerated by the war."
4444. Johnson, Charles S. Patterns of Negro seg-
regation. New York, Harper, 1943. xxii,
332 p. 43-1802 E185.61.J625
Bibliographical footnotes.
"A study of social behavior in interracial contact
situations in selected areas of the United States,"
for which a field staff of five conducted interviews
in three counties of the rural South and five South-
ern cities, as well as in border and Northern cities.
Part I is concerned with patterns of segregation and
discrimination for, in the author's opinion, "there
can be no group segregation without discrim-
ination," and "in equity any segregation that is
not mutual or voluntary is discrimination." The
patterns are described for residential areas, educa-
tional institutions, recreational facilities, law en-
forcement, relief and welfare, public buildings, trans-
portation, hospitals, hotels and restaurants, stores,
places of amusement, professional services, and, at
greater length, for occupations and industries. An
important chapter describes "The Racial Etiquette in
Public Contacts and Personal Relations," while an-'
other on "The Ideology of the Color Line" is based
upon statements by white persons most of whom
justified segregation. Southern state legislation en-
forcing segregation is analyzed, as well as the civil
rights laws of several Northern states aimed against
discrimination. Part II is concerned with the "Be-
havioral Response" of Negroes to these patterns, the
interview material being classified into "Accept-
ance," "Avoidance," and "Hostility and Aggres-
sion." Dr. Johnson thinks that urbanization and
industrialization have been the principal agents in
eroding the old customs, and that they will continue
to operate in the same direction. Comer Vann
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 565
Woodward's The Strange Career of Jim Crow (new
and rev. ed. New York, Oxford University Press,
1957. 183 p. A Galaxy book, GB6) originated in
James W. Richard lectures delivered at the Uni-
versity of Virginia in 1954. It convincingly demon-
states that most of the patterns described by Dr.
Johnson did not, as is generally supposed, originate
at the time the South regained its autonomy in the
1870's, but nearly two decades later, as a weapon
employed by the Bourbons to defeat the Populist
movement of the i89o's, and that they were initiated
in the western states of the South, and only gradually
spread to the Atlantic seaboard.
4445. Logan, Rayford W. The Negro in Ameri-
can life and thought: the nadir, 1877-1901.
New York, Dial Press, 1954. 380 p.
54-6000 E185.61.L64
Professor Logan of Howard University assesses
the status of the Negro and the opinion of the North-
ern press concerning the Negro between the Com-
promise of 1877, which withdrew Federal troops
from the South, and the assassination of President
McKinley. President Hayes had not meant to
abandon the poor colored people of the South, but
the "honorable and influential Southern whites"
dishonored their side of the bargain and nullified
the Reconstruction amendments. The nadir was
reached with President McKinley 's "callous disre-
gard for the protection of the constitutional rights
of Negroes." By 1900 "what is now called second-
class citizenship was accepted by presidents, the
Supreme Court, Congress, organized labor, the Gen-
eral Federation of Women's Clubs — indeed by the
vast majority of Americans, North and South, and
by the 'leader' of the Negro race [Booker T. Wash-
ington]." Yet from 1865 to 1900, as the author him-
self tells us, the Negro population doubled in
numbers, increased in literacy from 18.6 percent
to 55.5 percent, and began organizing its own banks
(in 1888). The ideals of the Abolitionists and the
Radical Republicans were obscured for the time
being, but the record indicates slow and painful
progress rather than any real nadir.
4446. Myrdal, Gunnar. An American dilemma;
the Negro problem and modern democracy,
by Gunnar Myrdal with the assistance of Richard
Sterner and Arnold Rose. [9th ed.] New York,
Harper, 1944. lix, 1483 p.
48-10226 E185.6.M95 1944
Bibliography: p. 1144-1180.
The Carnegie Corporation of New York was con-
vinced by the late Newton D. Baker that it needed
more and better organized knowledge of the Ameri-
| can Negro of today before it could intelligendy dis-
\ burse its funds on his behalf. In 1938, therefore, it
brought over an impartial Swedish social economist,
Dr. Myrdal of the University of Stockholm and the
Swedish Senate, as director of "a comprehensive
study of the Negro in the United States, to be under-
taken in a wholly objective and dispassionate way
as a social phenomenon." Dr. Myrdal took much
advice, and in 1939 engaged a staff of six, including
Ralph J. Bunche and Dorothy S. Thomas, while
some 70 other persons worked on special projects
or as assistants to the principal investigators. In
addition to the works by Johnson and Sterner listed
in this section (nos. 4444 and 4448), two other of
the resulting special studies were published by
Harper: The Myth of the Negro Past, by Melville
J. Herskovits (1941. xiv, 374 p.), and Character-
istics of the American Negro, edited by Otto Kline-
berg (1944. 409 p.). The unpublished manu-
scripts of some 35 other studies were deposited in the
Schomburgk Collection of the New York Public
Library. The completion and publication of Dr.
Myrdal's overall report were considerably delayed by
the war, but since its appearance it has been gen-
erally accepted as the principal authority in its field.
Summary is impracticable, but the titles of the eleven
parts into which the 1,024 Pages of the main text are
divided give an idea of its comprehensiveness and
organization: "The Approach," "Race," "Popula-
tion and Migration," "Economics," "Politics,"
"Justice," "Social Inequality," "Social Stratification,"
"Leadership and Concerted Action," "The Negro
Community," and "An American Dilemma." Dr.
Myrdal's conclusion is that the progress of "social
engineering" now permits the redemption of Amer-
ica's greatest failure and the realization of America's
own innermost desire, the final integration of the
Negro into modern democracy. The final quarter
of the work consists of ten appendixes and over 250
pages of footnotes. Readers daunted by the mas-
siveness of An American Dilemma may prefer the
condensation prepared by one of Dr. Myrdal's
assistants, Arnold M. Rose: The Negro in America
(New York, Harper, 1948. xvii, 325 p.).
4447. Reid, Ira De A. The Negro immigrant, his
background, characteristics and social adjust-
ment, 1899-1937. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1939. 261 p. (Studies in history, eco-
nomics and public law, edited by the Faculty of
Political Science of Columbia University, no. 449)
39-19999 H31.C7, no. 449
JV6895.NH4R4 1939a
Bibliography: p. 253-258.
A model study of the acculturation problems of a
group of erstwhile members of a majority who must
become members of a minority and find a place
within the Negro class structure. At the time of
writing, the Negro immigrants in the United States,
566 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
nearly all of Caribbean origin, numbered some
100,000 persons, 60 percent of whom lived in New
York City. Dr. Reid based his report on personal
histories, government documents, and his own ob-
servations as a participant in the group life of these
immigrants in New York City. His evidence shows
that the members of the group tend to resent relega-
tion to a minority status and adopt radical views
with respect to increasing Negro rights in the United
States. Native Negroes usually regard them with
hostility as foreign competitors for jobs, and dub
them "monkey-chasers." There are careful exposi-
tions of the number, sources, and background of
the Negro immigration, its population characteris-
tics, and the degree, form, patterns, and trends of its
interracial and intraracial adjustment. A separate
chapter contains excerpts from life histories.
4448. Sterner, Richard M. E. The Negro's share;
a study of income, consumption, housing
and public assistance [by] Richard Sterner in col-
laboration with Lenore A. Epstein, Ellen Winston,
and others. New York, Harper, 1943. 433 p.
inch tables. 43-8019 E185.8.S8
One of the supplementary volumes in the study
of the American Negro sponsored by the Carnegie
Corporation of New York and planned by Dr.
Myrdal (no. 4446). Dr. Sterner, a specialist on
social questions in the service of the Swedish Gov-
ernment, came to the United States with Dr. Myrdal.
The conditions reflected in this book are almost
exclusively those of the 1930's, before the full em-
ployment which was created by wartime conditions
and has outlasted them. Part I, concerned with
"Living Conditions," deals with the Negro's flight
from agriculture, his employment and unemploy-
ment, family incomes and expenditure, food con-
sumption, and rural and urban housing. Part II, on
"Social Welfare," endeavors to ascertain the Negro's
share in various forms of public assistance. Dr.
Sterner does not facilitate the reader's task by chap-
ter summaries or general conclusions, and ordinarily
one must go to his tables to discover the relative posi-
tion of the Negro. Thus a sample group of South-
ern Negro nonrelief families had median income
ranging from $445 to $870; white nonrelief fam-
ilies from the same areas ranged bewteen $1,133 and
$2,356. None of the Negro groups approached the
"so-called maintenance level" of $1,261. An up-to-
date survey, which would document the general
improvement of the last 15 years, is much to be
desired.
4449. Washington, Booker T. Up from slavery,
an autobiography. With an introd. by
Jonathan Daniels. London, Oxford University
Press, 1945, ci9oi. 244 p. (The World's classics,
499) 49~"39°47 E185.97.W3162
4450. Mathews, Basil }. Booker T. Washington,
educator and interracial interpreter. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1948. xvii, 350 p.
48-8652 Ei 85.97. W249
Washington (1856-1915), the son of a slave
woman and a white father, was, from 1881 to his
death, the first "Principal" of Tuskegee Institute,
Tuskegee, Alabama, which he made into a leading
Negro educational center. After early years as a
laborer and handyman, his formal education began
at Hampton Normal and Agricultural Institute in
1872. Washington's appointment to head the in-
fant Tuskegee Institute was the pivot of his life
since it enabled him to work for what he considered
the most important goal of the newly freed Negroes:
economic independence. Under Washington,
Tuskegee became a training school where Negroes
could learn practical agricultural and mechanical
skills in a novel curriculum planned by him, with
the students' work contributing to the upkeep of
the school as well as to their own development.
Outside the Institute he founded a number of asso-
ciations for Negro professional men and women
and raised large amounts of money for the Institute
and other organizations benefiting the Negro.
With his Atlanta speech of 1895 he won world-wide
recognition as the spokesman and leader of the
American Negro. His advocacy of the evolutionary
betterment of Negro status won for him both praise
and criticism from Negroes and whites alike. Much
of his last 15 years was spent in travel, delivering
lectures and organizing interracial conferences, both
here and abroad. Up from Slavery is a classic auto-
biography, but in concentrating upon certain aspects
of its author's career and message hardly tells the
whole story, even down to its date of publication
(1901). A fuller narrative is provided by Mr.
Mathews' admiring biography, and even by Samuel
R. Spencer's concise life in The Library of American
Biography series: Booker T. Washington and the
Negro's Place in American Life (Boston, Little,
Brown, 1955. 212 p.).
4451. Weaver, Robert C. The Negro ghetto.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. xviii,
404 p. maps. 48-7373 E185.89.H6W4
Bibliography: p. 371-375.
The author confines his inquiries to the residential
or spatial separation of the races in the North, which
is the peculiar manifestation of Negro segregation
in that part of the country. The concentration of
migrated Negroes into segregated areas is of com-
paratively recent origin, a result of the general
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 567
housing shortage during the depression of the 1930's.
Mr. Weaver seeks to determine the economic and
social patterns making for the solidification of Black
Belt areas in Northern cities. Active opposition to
the dispersal of Negroes in these cities, he shows, is
led by building, real estate, and home-finance
groups, and carried out by restrictive covenants and
by inhospitable treatment and social ostracism on
the part of white residents who fear an influx of
Negroes into their neighborhoods. Mr. Weaver
analyzes these fears, in which race prejudice and
concern for property values are mingled, and ap-
peals for the establishment of educational programs
in interracial living and increases in the housing
available to minorities. Much of the information is
drawn from housing problems in Chicago.
F. Jews
4452. Commentary. Commentary on the Ameri-
can scene; portraits of Jewish life in America,
edited by Elliot E. Cohen. Introd. by David Ries-
man. New York, Knopf, 1953. 336 p.
52-6413 E184.J5C65
4453. Ribalow, Harold U., ed. Mid-century; an
anthology of Jewish life and culture in our
times. New York, Beechhurst Press, 1955. 598 p.
54-10691 E184.J5R5
Commentary has been published under the aus-
pices of the American Jewish Committee since the
close of 1945 and is generally regarded as the lead-
ing American periodical for Jewish culture. In the
first title its editor has drawn upon its department
called "From the American Scene" for 20 pieces by
17 writers. Journalism in the best current Ameri-
can manner, they give vivid glimpses of Jewish life
in a variety of aspects, such as "The Jewish Delica-
tessen" and "The Jewish College Student: New
Model." The majority derive from the New York
City area, but others describe San Francisco, Tulsa,
a Chicago suburb, and an unnamed New England
community. The editor of Mid-century has been
editor of Congress Weekly and The American Zion-
ist; his father, Menachem Ribalow, one of whose
pieces is included, was until his death in 1953 "per-
haps the most prominent Hebrew writer in the
United States." It assembles 45 articles from 16
periodicals, including 7 from Commentary , 6 from
Congress Weekly, and also 8 from non-Jewish peri-
odicals, "by the most notable names in American-
Jewish scholarship, theology, philosophy, culture,
and journalism." They are grouped in four sec-
tions: "First Person Singular," "Belonging and Sur-
vival," "Culture," and "Zion." Some of the articles
are concerned with Jewish problems in general, but
the majority are in whole or part concerned with
American Jewry. The volume closes with 9 pages
of "Biographical Notes" on the 53 contributors.
4454. Edidin, Ben M. Jewish community life in
America. New York, Hebrew Pub. Co.,
1947. 282 p. 47-23471 E184.J5E27
"Selected bibliography": p. 273-277.
A comprehensive description of Jewish group life
in the United States, in its structure, agencies, func-
tions, problems, and aspirations, which takes its de-
parture from the average local Jewish community
rather than from American Jewry as a whole, and
treats each topic in its historical development.
Simply written, it is intended for students, teachers,
parents, and group leaders, and is suitable for junior
and senior high school classes or adult study groups.
Chapters on the development of American Jewish
communities are followed by analytical ones on the
school, the synagogue, and the community center,
which, although relatively a newcomer, now ranks
with the other two "as one of American Jewry's
three chief communal institutions." There follow
descriptions of cultural activity, such as that of the
Histadruth Ivrith, of social service, occupations, the
struggle against anti-Semitic discrimination, and aid
for Zionism. Miscellaneous community organiza-
tions, such as the B'nai B'rith, receive a long chapter,
and the "year-round job" of raising funds another.
American Jews still regard the community idea as
essential to individual happiness, but "in every
American Jewish community new ideas and methods
are beim* tried."
4455. Flandlin, Oscar. Adventure in freedom:
three hundred years of Jewish life in Amer-
ica. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 282 p.
54-10634 E184.J5H29
Written for the tercentenary of the first Jewish
immigration to America, this is neither a complete
history nor an assessment of "contributions," but
an effort at interpretation of the main lines of de-
velopment, particularly in their bearing upon the
problems of the present. The flight of the Jews
from Eastern Europe after 1870 rapidly altered the
character of American Jewry and led to its bifurca-
568 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion into two separate communities, only gradually
reintegrated after World War I. Among the factors
which promoted the reintegration of the Jewish com-
munity were "the free and fluid society of the
United States," in which the rigid lines of social
division tended to disappear, and the increasing
virulence of anti-Semitism both in Europe and in
America, where discrimination and exclusion in
social life, education, and the professions were on
the increase until World War II. The old anti-
Semitism died in that war, and American Jews have
become increasingly assimilated to the standards
and tastes of American middle-class culture.
4456. Gordon, Albert I. Jews in transition. Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1949. xviii, 331 p. 49-10489 F614.M5G67
The author served as a rabbi of Adath Jeshurun
Synagogue during 1930-46 and used this oppor-
tunity to apply the "participant-observer technique"
of social anthropology to the Jewish community of
Minneapolis. His main theme is "the changes that
have occurred in the beliefs, practices, and institu-
tions of the European Jews" who setded there, and
made adaptations in their original cultural patterns.
For ten years he recorded the conversations and
comments that he heard, not stenographically but
in recollection, and has combined these oral materials
with written ones such as synagogue records and the
files of the American Jewish World, a Minneapolis
weekly. He obtained substantial personal histories
from four of the oldest members of the community,
born in the 1860's; these comprise Part III of the
book. "There is," he finds, "a decreasing emphasis
upon ritual and form in the religious life" of the
community, and "the dietary laws are gradually
disappearing," even from the home, but some cere-
monies and holidays have been revived or elaborated.
The Jews of Minneapolis, although completely loyal
to the United States, go on living in two cultures,
and seem likely to continue doing so. They com-
prise only 4 percent of the city's total population,
about the same proportion as the Jewish population
of the whole United States.
4457. Janowsky, Oscar I., ed. The American Jew,
a composite portrait. New York, Harper,
1942. xiv, 322 p. 42-23786 E184.J5J3
Partial Contents. — Historical background, by
O. I. Janowsky. — Judaism and the synagogue, by D.
de S. Pool. — Jewish education, achievements and
needs, by I. B. Berkson. — The cultural scene: lit-
erary expression, by Marie Syrkin. — Hebrew in Jew-
ish culture, by A. S. Halkin. — Structure of the
Jewish community, by A. G. Duker. — Economic
trends, by Nathan Reich. — Anti-Semitism, by J. J.
Weinstein. — Current philosophies of Jewish life,
by Milton Steinberg. — Zionism in American Jewish
life, by Sulamith Schwartz. — Evaluation of the por-
trait of American Jewish living: The Jewish com-
munity and the outside world, by G. N. Shuster.
The national being and the Jewish community, by
H. M. Kallen. — Selected bibliography (p. [287]-
298).
4458. Friedman, Theodore, and Robert Gordis,
eds. Jewish life in America. New York,
Horizon Press, 1955. 352 p.
55-11462 E184.J5F78
Partial Contents. — American Jewry: fourth cen-
tury, by Robert Gordis. — Religion: American
orthodoxy, retrospect and prospect, by Emanuel
Rackman. — Jewish tradition in 20th century Amer-
ica: the conservative approach, by Theodore Fried-
man.— The temper of reconstruction, by H. M.
Schulweis. — Reform Judaism in America, by S. S.
Cohon. — Secularism and religion in the Jewish labor
movement, by C. B. Sherman. — Culture: The East
Side, matrix of the Jewish labor movement, by Abra-
ham Menes. — American Jewish scholarship, by S. B.
Freehof. — Hebrew culture and creativity in Amer-
ica, by Jacob Kabakoff. — Jewish literature in Eng-
lish, by Charles Angoff. — Yiddish literature in
America, by N. B. MinkorT. — Jewish education in
the United States, by W. B. Furie. — Jewish music in
America, by H. D. Weisgall. — Visual arts in Ameri-
can Jewish life, by S. S. Kayser. — The community:
Interfaith relations in the United States, by M. N.
Kertzer. — Impact of Zionism on American Jewish
life, by A. G. Duker. — The American rabbi: his
changing role, by B. J. Bamberger. — Notes on the
authors.
Of these two cooperative surveys of Jewish life
in America, the earlier was begun as an educational
project of Hadassah, the Women's Zionist Organiza-
tion of America. The authors believed that a Jew-
ish homeland in Palestine, where Jewish culture
would not be ancillary to a majority culture, was
indispensable under any circumstances; they were,
nevertheless, according to Dr. Janowsky, "com-
pletely identified with American culture and the
American way of life." The second survey, pub-
lished 13 years later, originated in a tercentenary is-
sue of the magazine Judaism and was sponsored by
the American Jewish Congress. It assumes "the
permanent framework of all forms of Jewish activi-
ties on the American locale," and the author who
deals with Zionism believes that "it will have to fight
for its place in the American Jewish community."
The earlier survey is the more comprehensive; the
later one is more detailed in its treatment of religion
and culture, and offers, its editors think, "the kind
of tempered appraisal of the mainstreams of Ameri-
can Jewish creativity rarely to be found in contem-
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 5^9
porary writing." The voting record of Jews during
the 1952 presidential election is analyzed in
Lawrence H. Fuchs' The Political Behavior of
American Jews (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1956. 220
p.) as part of an historical and sociopolitical study
undertaken to determine why most American Jews
are political liberals.
4459. The Jewish people, past and present, v. 4.
300 years of Jewish life in the United States.
New York, Jewish Encyclopedic Handbooks, Cen-
tral Yiddish Culture Organization (CYCO) 1955.
455 P: 46-7394 DS102.4.J4, v. 4
This large and handsomely produced volume re-
sults from the collaboration of eleven contributors,
eight editors, and five translators. The section on
general history is conventional enough, and the
sections on religious movements and communal life
present material readily available elsewhere. Jacob
Lestschinsky's section on economic and social de-
velopment presents much demographic information,
with special attention to occupations and social
structure. Philip Friedman on political and social
movements traces the development of American
Zionism. Mark Wischnitzer, in charting the im-
pact of American Jewry on Jewish life abroad,
describes rebuilding after World War I, and during
the Nazi persecutions, and the United Jewish appeal.
Abraham Menes, in describing the Jewish labor
movement, places its golden age between 1901 and
1918, culminating in the "great revolt" of 1909 —
the strike of 60,000 cloakmakers. Samuel Niger
deals with Yiddish culture, including the Yiddish
theater of the 1880's, and Joshua Trachtenberg de-
scribes American Jewish scholarship, which includes
not only Talmudics and Rabbinics, but also his-
torical, sociological, and cultural studies. There are
frequent halftone cuts of persons and buildings.
4460. Joseph, Samuel. Jewish immigration to the
United States from 1881 to 1910. New
York, Columbia University, 1914. 209 p. (Co-
lumbia University, Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 59,
n. 4; whole no. 145) 14-15042 H31.C7, v. 59
JV6895.J6J6
Bibliography: p. 207-209.
In 1880 more than half of the Jews in the world
were located within the Eastern European Pale, the
majority, in Poland and Western Russia, subjects of
the Czar, and large minorities in Galicia, a province
of Austria-Hungary, and Moldavia, a province of
Rumania. Their condition, which had in many
respects improved during the reign of the liberal
Czar Alexander II, took a drastic turn for the worse
after his assassination in 1881. New and harsh
laws were decreed, and "that combination of murder,
outrage, and pillage — the pogrom" was unleashed
against them. During the three decades 1881-1910,
1,562,800 Jewish immigrants came to America, con-
stituting 8.8 percent of the total immigration. 71
percent of these Jews came from Russia, and most
of the remainder from Austria-Hungary. This
workmanlike dissertation compares the immigra-
tion from the three nations and describes the whole
stream as essentially a family movement of per-
manent settlers largely concentrating in the North
Atlantic States. The text is supplemented by 69
statistical tables (p. 158-196).
4461 Levinger, Lee J. A history of the Jews in
the United States. [4th rev. ed.] Cincin-
nati, Union of American Hebrew Congregations,
1949. xxiii,6i6p. illus. (Commission on Jewish
Education of the Union of American Hebrew Con-
gregations and the Central Conference of American
Rabbis. Union graded series)
49-49296 E184.J5L664 1949
Bibliographical references at end of chapters or
sections.
A textbook for classes of the high school level
in Jewish schools, the first edition of which appeared
in 1930. It is considerably more comprehensive and
better balanced than a number of books on the sub-
ject written for adult Jews, and its very simplicity
and methodical procedure make it a useful guide
for the gentile reader. Rabbi Levinger organizes his
text around the three main waves of Jewish immigra-
tion, the Sephardic Jews of Spain before 1840, the
German Jews during most of the 19th century, and
the Russian Jews after 1880. Emphasis is placed
upon the development of Jewish religious, charitable,
and educational institutions in the United States, and
upon outstanding individuals from Judah Touro
of Newport (1775-1854) to Governor Herbert H.
Lehman. Bertram Wallace Korn's Eventful Years
and Experiences (Cincinnati, American Jewish
Archives, 1954. 249 p.) is an interesting collec-
tion of eight studies in American Jewish history
mostly during the central decades of the 19th cen-
tury. One is on the Jewish refugees of 1848, another
is a panorama of "American Jewish Life in 1849,"
and a third tells the story of Maimonides College of
Philadelphia, the first Jewish theological seminary
in America (1867-73). A summary of local Jewish
history and a guide to and description of places of
Jewish interest in each state, the District of Colum-
bia, and New York City and its environs is contained
in A Jewish Tourist's Guide to the U. S., by Bernard
Postal and Lionel Koppman (Philadelphia, Jewish
Publication Society of America, 1954. xxx, 705 p.).
431240 — 60-
-38
570 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4462. McWilliams, Carey. A mask for privilege:
anti-Semitism in America. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1948. 299 p. 48-6011 E184.J5M16
In the summer of 1877 Joseph Seligman, a New
York banker, was refused accommodation at a Sara-
toga Springs hotel — "one of the first major overt
manifestations of anti-Semitism in the United
States," which the author regards as proceeding
from the triumph of a new generation of industrial
tycoons and "the corrosion which the industrial
revolution had brought about in the American
scheme of values." Anti-Semitism in America dif-
fers from its European counterpart in that limitations
have been imposed, not by the state, but "by our
'private governments' — industry and trade, banks
and insurance companies, real estate boards and
neighborhood associations, clubs and societies, col-
leges and universities." The book exhibits many
personal views, elliptical arguments, and contro-
versial acerbities, but it brings together a wide range
of information on anti-Semitic utterances, "The
System of Exclusion," the activities of "crackpot"
agitators and associations, and recent anti-Semitic
incidents. In Chapter 10, "No Ordinary Task," the
author outlines a program of education, legislation,
and other social action to eradicate this "most
treacherous, deceptive, and tenacious of social preju-
dices," the appearance of which is invariably "a
symptom of social sickness, a manifestation of social
disorganization."
G. Orientals
4463. Cheng, Te-ch'ao. Acculturation of the
Chinese in the United States; a Philadelphia
study, by David Te-chao Cheng. Philadelphia,
1948. 280 p. tables. A50-1331 E184.C5C47
"Printed in China."
Bibliography: p. [26i]-274.
A University of Pennsylvania dissertation which
studies the Race Street Chinatown of Philadelphia.
The author is a Cantonese-speaking Chinese who
worked there as a Christian missionary during
1940-44, and in 1942 undertook a study of its eco-
nomic occupations, which was subsequently ex-
panded to include its institutions as a whole, with
emphasis upon culture contact and change. Nearly
all its residents come from an area of 100 square
miles along the southern coast of the province of
Kwantung, and Part I describes the people of this
part of China, their community life, and their
philsophical oudook. Part II sketches the history
of the Race Street Community, which dates from
about 1870, and analyzes the occupations, the social
organizations and customs, the education, and the
family, religious, and recreational life of its mem-
bers. In Part III the author draws up "A Balance
Sheet of Acculturation" which indicates that,
despite the ghetto-like segregation that has been the
rule since 1894, the culture traits which the Phila-
delphia Chinese "have adopted from the American
culture are definitely more than the culture traits
which they have transplanted from the Old World
and retained." Dr. Cheng's research terminated in
X944 and his preface is dated June 1946; his book
reflects the wartime opening of "the door of racial
and occupational discrimination," which he expected
to be permanent.
4464. Coolidge, Mary (Roberts) Smith. Chinese
immigration, by Mary Roberts Coolidge.
New York, Holt, 1909. 531 p. tables. (Ameri-
can public problems, edited by Ralph Curtis Ring-
wait) 9-23245 JV6874.C7
"Selected bibliography": p. 505-517.
This is an old book, but the Chinese immigration
with which it deals had come to an end 27 years be-
fore its publication, and it remains the only com-
prehensive treatment of the subject. From the Gold
Rush of 1849 until the opening of the transconti-
nental railways 20 years later manual labor was in
heavy demand in California, and from 1852 Chinese
coolies were imported in numbers, averaging 16,000
a year for three decades. With the opening of the
railroads, however, a flow of white workers came
from the East to glut the labor market and to begin
an exclusionist agitation which extended to oc-
casional riot and massacre. Mrs. Coolidge described
this movement in some detail and emphasized that
the exclusionist enactments of 1882-92 were clear
violations of the Treaty of 1880 with China.
China's resentment of American discrimination was
shown by her failure to renew the Treaty of 1894 and
by a boycott of American goods. The book reviews
the Chinese background of the immigrants, and
their ways of life in America, and contends that they
were more industrious, better behaved, and no less
assimilable than many groups of European
immigrants.
4465. Ichihashi, Yamato. Japanese in the United
States; a critical study of the problems of the
Japanese immigrants and their children. Stanford
University, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1932.
426 p. 32-22696 E184.J314
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 57 1
"Select bibliography": p. 409-417.
The author was professor of Japanese history and
government at Stanford, and his book remains, after
25 years, the most comprehensive account of Jap-
anese immigration to the United Staffs. It is
prefaced by an analysis of Japanese immigration
in general, which was a drop in the bucket in com-
parison with Japan's rapid population increase, and
of Japanese immigration to Hawaii, where nearly
as many went as to the continental United States.
Japanese immigration to the United States was neg-
ligible before 1890 and after 1908 was greatly re-
duced by the Gendemen's Agreement. In the peak
year, 1907, 9,948 Japanese entered, and the total
Japanese population rose to 138,800 by 1930. The
author describes the character, causes, and geo-
graphical distribution of the immigration; the em-
ployment of the Japanese in domestic service, city
trades, and especially in agriculture; the movement
toward and measures of exclusion; and the char-
acteristics and problems of the American-born Jap-
anese. They are taller, longer of limb, and heavier
than Japanese children born and bred in Japan, and
they are as intelligent and "as emotional as the av-
erage American." Their difficulties under discrim-
ination, especially in the realm of employment, are
objectively and effectively discussed.
4466. La Violette, Forrest E. Americans of Japa-
nese ancestry; a study of assimilation in the
American community. Toronto, Canadian Insti-
tute of International Affairs, 1946. 185 p.
A46-5078 E184.J3L3 1946
"Unpublished material" [theses and disserta-
tions]: p. 181-182.
A University of Chicago dissertation based upon
research in the Seattle, Portland, San Francisco, and
Los Angeles areas begun in 1934, and continued
at intervals until the evacuation of 1942. It empha-
sizes "the social context of the term nisei [the
American-born second generation, exclusive of the
hjbei, sent back at an early age for education in
Japan] as it has developed between the cessation of
immigration in 1924 and Pearl Harbor in 1941, with
the chief emphasis placed upon Japanese family and
community life." It is through the family that the
Nisei receive three sets of attitudes which link
them most strongly to the ancestral culture: "sub-
mission and recognition of authority and prestige
of the parents, acceptance of family responsibilities
and maintenance of inviolate integrity of family
status within the community," but the level of con-
formance is lower than is expected in Japan. The
vocational problems of the Nisei, to whom only a
limited variety of occupations and restricted oppor-
| tunities within them have been available, and their
1 marriage problems, such as too costly wedding re-
ceptions, are described. The author stresses die
applicability of his studies to Canadian conditions,
pointing out that Canada and the United States are
the only two nations in the world concerned with
assimilating so divergent a group, and that it is
surprising "that the first generation of American-
born children of Japanese parents have already pro-
gressed so far in this movement requiring a number
of generations."
4467. Leong, Gor Yun. Chinatown inside out, by
Leong Gor Yun. New York, B. Mussey,
1936. 256 p. 36-22486 E184.C5L56
An inside view, journalistic in style but based
on wide personal knowledge, of New York's China-
town, taken as typical of these segregated communi-
ties in a number of the larger American cities.
Since the exclusion of Chinese immigration in the
1880's, these picturesque districts have remained
static or dwindled, but their position as "the most
exclusive of all the alien colonies in America" has
altered little. The conditions described by Mr.
Leong, however, are those of two decades ago, when
he found that the ordinary residents of Chinatown,
and especially the foreign-born, were exploited by
the local "charitable and benevolent" association, a
government within a government, and by the Tongs,
some of which had turned into rackets. On the
other hand, the average Chinese American received
some assistance from his family associadon and from
organizations for self-help, such as the Chinese Hand
Laundry Association. Chinatown was a man's
world, with a ratio of ten males to one female, and
the most popular diversions, in order of favor, were
gambling, resort to prostitutes, opium-smoking, and
drinking. The author predicted the extinction of
the old Chinatowns within a generation or two,
but the process is as yet by no means complete. The
volume is illustrated by excellent photographs,
mostly taken for the purpose.
4468. Mears, Eliot Grinnell. Resident Orientals
on the American Pacific coast; their legal
and economic status. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press, 1928. xvi, 545 p. tables, diagrs.
30-2364 E184.O6M33
"Select documents": p. [43i]~526.
For practically as long as it has been occupied by
the United States, "the Far West has sternly fought
the coming of Oriental peoples to the American
mainland." The present volume is concerned with
the result as seen in the contrasting status of citizens,
aliens eligible to citizenship, and aliens ineligible
to citizenship in California, Oregon, and Washing-
ton. The author calls his study "one of laws, regula-
tions, and judicial decisions and their actual opera-
572 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion," but in fact there is quite as much about the
state of mind which produced the laws, and the
actual economic and social condition of the Pacific
coast Chinese and Japanese, as about the purely legal
aspects. There is a discussion of the degree to which
their nationals here have been protected by our
treaties with Japan and China, and by the guaranties
of the United States Constitution and its amend-
ments. No specific Act of Congress denied citizen-
ship to Orientals, but the Federal courts have more
or less consistently interpreted the naturalization
laws, originating in 1790, to that effect. The Pacific
States have passed laws forbidding intermarriage,
alien ownership of land, the public employment of
Orientals, and even hunting and fishing by them.
The author believed that in 1928 the West Coast
was displaying a more friendly attitude toward both
races than it had in the recent past.
4469. Thomas, Dorothy Swaine, and Richard S.
Nishimoto. Japanese American evacuation
and resettlement. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1946-52. 2 v. A47-1448 D753.8.T4
Contents. — v. 1. The spoilage, by D. S. Thomas
and R. S. Nishimoto. — v. 2. The salvage, by D. S.
Thomas with the assistance of C. Kikuchi and
J. Sakoda.
The most spectacular displacement of population
in the whole of American history was the removal
of nearly 110,000 persons of Japanese birth or
ancestry from the Pacific coast early in 1942, and
the internment of nearly all of them in ten "reloca-
tion centers," two of which were as far east as
Arkansas. A group of social scientists at the Uni-
versity of California at once perceived the possi-
bilities of such an upheaval for an intensive study
of social processes, and with the financial backing
of the University and three foundations were able
to keep on foot, if not on so elaborate a scale as they
had originally planned, an Evacuation and Resettle-
ment Study from February 1942 through December
1945, "by which time the program of resettlement
was about completed." The majority of the staff
observers were recruited from among the evacuees,
and their major task was "to record and analyze
the changes in behavior and attitudes and the pat-
terns of social adjustments and interaction" among
the interned. The three major "laboratories" of the
Study were the Poston center in Arizona, the
Minodoka center in Idaho, and especially the Tule
Lake center in northern California, but spot obser-
vations were made in five of the other seven centers,
and from April 1943 the "associational life of the
resetding evacuees" was studied from a Chicago
office. Tule Lake forms the principal subject of
The Spoilage; it soon came to be used for the segre-
gation of persons classified as disloyal, in some cases
on somewhat technical grounds, and it was here
that the bulk of the complaints, strikes, threats, and
murder and other violence took place, culminating
in the renunciation of American citizenship by 70
percent of the citizens there interned. The Salvage
consists of two parts, the first and briefer of which
is "Patterns of Social and Demographic Change,"
wherein the consequences of the great upheaval are
surveyed in the perspective of the whole history of
the Japanese immigration to the United States.
The net effect was "the dispersal beyond the bounds
of segregated ethnocentered communities into areas
of wider opportunity of the most highly assimi-
lated segments of the Japanese American minority."
Part II presents the life histories of fifteen persons
who were resetded in the East or Middle West,
selected for their representative character; Mrs.
Thomas expresses her gratitude "for their willing-
ness to relive, 'for the record,' the traumatic period
following Pearl Harbor." Two other studies of the
great evacuation have been published by the Uni-
versity of California: Removal and Return; the
Socio-economic Effects of the War on Japanese
Americans, by Leonard Bloom and Ruth Riemer
(1949. 259 p.), and The Managed Casualty; the
Japanese- American Family in World War II, by
Leonard Broom and John I. Kitsuse ( 1956. 226 p.),
The origins of the evacuation policy are tracked
down by Morton Grodzins in Americans Betrayed;
Politics and the Japanese Evacuation (Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1949. xvii, 444 p.).
H. North Americans
4470. Burma, John H. Spanish-speaking groups
in the United States. [Durham, N. C]
Duke University Press, 1954. 214 p. (Duke Uni-
versity Press sociological series [no. 9])
53-8273 E184.M5B8
Bibliography: p. [i99]-209.
The Spanish-speaking is the one foreign-language
group in the United States that has continued to in-
crease since the Quota Act of 1921 and has now be-
come the fourth largest in the country. Based upon
a large monographic literature rather than personal
investigation, this is the only work to treat the group
as a whole and to consider its common cultural and
religious core as well as the racial, historical, and
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 573
social diversity of its component groups. The His-
panos, descendants of the Spanish colonists of New
Mexico annexed in 1848, persist as inbred communi-
ties whose customs and social structures look back to
the 16th century. The largest group are the Mexi-
can-Americans, more Indian than Spanish in race,
who can be found throughout the United States, but
in the Southwest constitute a minority subject to
varying degrees of discrimination. The Filipinos
are Malays in race; as the smallest and most dis-
persed group, their minority problems resemble
those of the Chinese. The Puerto Ricans as Ameri-
can citizens are not subject to the quotas and other
restrictions hindering the entry of Filipinos and
Mexicans; their problems arise from the facts that
about a third are negroid, and nearly all have con-
centrated in the slums of New York City. They are
the subject of a monograph by Charles Wright Mills,
Clarence Senior, and Rose Kohn Goldsen: The
Puerto Rican Journey; New York's Newest Immi-
grants (New York, Harper, 1950. 238 p.). The
Filipino element was studied at a time when it was
numerically more important than it is today, under
the auspices of the Institute of Pacific Relations, in
Bruno Lasker's Filipino Immigration to Continental
United States and to Hawaii (Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1931. xxii, 445 p.).
4471. Gamio, Manuel. Mexican immigration to
the United States; a study of human migra-
tion and adjustment. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press, 1930. xviii, 262 p.
30-15640 JV6798.M6G3
Bibliography: p. 249-256.
4472. Gamio, Manuel, comp. The Mexican immi-
grant, his life-story; autobiographic docu-
ments collected by Manuel Gamio. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1931. 288 p.
31-28581 JV6798.M6G28
Both volumes are the result of an investigation
sponsored by the Social Science Research Council,
with some assistance from the Mexican Government,
during 1926-27. The author and his assistants vis-
ited the states of Guanajuato, Jalisco, and Michoa-
can in west central Mexico, from which the major-
ity of the immigrants come, and the principal Mexi-
can groups in the United States, in New York and
the Middle West, especially Illinois and Indiana,
as well as in California and the Southwest. The
author found the official American statistics to be
much inflated, since they failed to incorporate any
adequate record of the large number of Mexicans
who returned home. He viewed the whole trans-
action as an economic phenomenon motivated by the
continuing misery of the Mexican lower classes,
which made American wages and the relatively low
cost of manufactured articles in the United States
outweigh the hazards of illegal entry and any
amount of discrimination — economic and social.
The majority of immigrants did not desire citizen-
ship, and those who did secure it remained attached
"to the local Mexican-American culture such as pre-
vails in many communities in the Southwest."
However, the author believed that the Mexican revo-
lutionary movement had been stimulated by immi-
grant contact with the standard of living in the
United States. An unusual and revealing chapter
presenting "The Songs of the Immigrant" affords
a transition to Dr. Gamio's second volume, made
up almost exclusively of 76 "guided interviews"
and other personal statements by immigrants both
male and female. They were translated into Eng-
lish by Robert C. Jones, and have evidendy been
classified into chapters each provided with a brief
introduction by Robert Redfield of the University of
Chicago. The headings include: "The Economic
Adjustment," "Conflict and Race-consciousness,"
"The Leader and the Intellectual," "Assimilation,"
and "The Mexican-American."
4473. Hansen, Marcus Lee. The mingling of the
Canadian and American peoples, v. 1. His-
torical. Completed and prepared for publication
by John Bardet Brebner. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press; for the Carnegie Endowment for In-
ternational Peace, Division of Economics and His-
tory, 1940. xviii, 274 p. maps (1 fold.) (The
Relations of Canada and the United States [a series
of studies prepared under the direction of the Car-
negie Endowment for International Peace, Division
of Economics and History])
40-27389 E183.8.C2H27
4474. Truesdell, Leon E. The Canadian born in
the United States; an analysis of the statis-
tics of the Canadian element in the population of
the United States, 1850 to 1930. New Haven, Yale
University Press; for the Carnegie Endowment for
International Peace, Division of Economics and
History, 1943. xvi, 263 p. maps, tables, diagrs.
(The Relations of Canada and the United States
[a series of studies prepared under the direction of
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace,
Division of Economics and History])
A43-1238 HB3015.C3T7
Because of Professor Hansen's untimely death in
1938, his work had to be completed by Professor
Brebner of Columbia University. It is a narrative
history of the exchange of populations between the
regions which are now the United States and Can-
ada, from its colonial beginnings down to 1939.
This exchange is interpreted as part of an integrated
North American Westward Movement, motivated
574 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
by the individual pioneer's land-hunger, and made
possible by unrestricted mobility across the unforti-
fied boundary. Significant shifts of population
were brought about by the Revolutionary War, when
Tories fled to Canada, the Canadian Insurrection
of 1837, when Canadians sought political asylum in
the United States, constant variations in economic
conditions and land distribution, the availability
of rich farm land at different times in the prairie
states and provinces, the attraction of bounty money
for enlistment in the Union Army during the Civil
War, and the lure of high pay in the expanding
industries of the United States. The companion
volume, by a chief statistician of the U. S. Bureau
of the Census, is built around 121 tables and 36
graphs. During the 80 years for which figures were
available, the Canadian-born in the United States
increased from 147,711, or 0.64 percent of the popu-
lation, to 1,286,389, or 1.05 percent of the population.
In 1930 they were concentrated in New England
and New York City, about the Great Lakes, and
in the cities of the Pacific coast. Some 77.3 per-
cent, in fact, were living in urban areas. Nearly
30 percent were of French mother tongue, this being
practically the same proportion as obtained in Can-
ada itself. The increase since 1900 has been slower,
"and the characteristics of the group as a whole
have become those of a relatively static popula-
tion." Another volume in the same series, The
American-Born in Canada, by Robert H. Coats and
Murdoch C. McLean (Toronto, Ryerson Press, 1943.
xviii, 176 p.), offers a similar statistical analysis of
a group which increased from 63,000, or 2.6 per-
cent of the population, in 1851 to 344,574, or 3.3
percent of the population, in 193 1, and was much
more evenly distributed over the whole settled area.
4475. McWilliams, Carey. North from Mexico,
the Spanish-speaking people of the United
States. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1949. 324 p.
(The Peoples of America series)
49-7084 F786.M215
This volume, which effectively synthesizes a mass
of historical and sociological material, is primarily a
presentation of racial and cultural conflict in the
Southwest, inspired by the author's indignation on
behalf of the underdog. He attacks what he
describes as "The Fantasy Heritage," a sentimental
emphasis upon the purely Spanish elements in the
beginnings of the borderlands, at the expense of the
living Mexican-Indian tradition, which is quite as
important to the mixed cultural heritage of the
Southwest. This attitude he regards as a part of the
long-existing "determination to subordinate the
Spanish-speaking minority in the Southwest," one
of the means being "to drive a wedge between the
native-born and the foreign-born and to cultivate the
former at the expense of the latter." The only
"Mexican Problem" which Mr. McWilliams recog-
nizes is the stubbornness of the dominant Anglo-
Saxons "in not recognizing the real character of the
culture which prevails in the borderlands."
4476. Taylor, Paul Schuster. An American-Mexi-
can frontier, Nueces County, Texas. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, IQ34.
337 p. illus. 34-39877 F392.N8T3
The author climaxed a series of ten monographs
on Mexican Labor in the United States (Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1928-34. 3 v.) with
this remarkably vivid and penetrating analysis of
economic and social conditions in the Texas county
which includes the city of Corpus Christi, upon
which an army of cotton pickers converges each mid-
summer, and which led the counties of the entire
United States in cotton production in 1930. He
saw it as "the locus of long historical contacts and
conflicts of four peoples — Indians, European (or
American) whites, Negroes, and Mexicans." Here
Spanish settlement began soon after the middle of
the 1 8th century, and the first Americans established
themselves in 1839. By 1859 all the original
grantees had sold out to Americans; but by 1929
there were 29 Mexican laborers who had risen
through tenancy to the proprietorship of very small
farms, and 879 Mexicans owned town lots, some
having achieved middle-class status. The original
cattle industry had been completely replaced by short
staple cotton culture, with Mexicans providing
nearly all the year-round laborers and the majority
of the transients. Mexicans and Negroes were once
on easy terms, but now the Mexicans, in order to
raise their standing, had been impelled "toward ef-
forts to present themselves in the eyes of the whites,
as a group dissociated from, and superior to, the
Negroes." The author has the art of exhibiting
large issues in a small setting.
I. Germans
4477. Faust, Albert Bernhardt. The German ele-
ment in the United States with special refer-
ence to its political, moral, social and educational
influence. New York, Steuben Society of America,
1927. 2 v. in 1. illus.
27-25840 E184.G3F3 1927
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 575
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [4771-562.
This work on an encyclopedic scale by Professor
Faust of Cornell University won a prize awarded
by the Germanic Department of the University of
Chicago in 1907 for the best book on the subject,
was first published by Houghton Mifflin in 1909,
was awarded the Loubat prize by the Prussian
Academy of Sciences in 191 1, and was published in
a German translation at Leipzig in 1912. The 1927
edition undertaken on the initiative of the Steuben
Society is described as a complete revision, although
most of the new material is incorporated in an
Appendix (v. 2, p. [6o7]-73o). Old-fashioned as
the work is in its approach, it remains the most
comprehensive treatment and indispensable to any
serious student of the subject. Volume 1 contains
descriptions of all German setdements in the Thir-
teen Colonies, beginning with the founding of
Germantown, Pa., in 1683, and goes on to par-
ticularize the part taken by Germans in the Revolu-
tion, and in the Westward Movement through the
setdement of California. Volume 2, after estimat-
ing the number of persons of German blood in the
United States at 27 1/2 percent of the total population,
goes on to survey the achievement of individuals of
German birth or descent in American agriculture,
manufactures, politics, education, music, the fine
arts, the theater, literature, and journalism. A con-
cluding chapter on social and moral influence offers
"the joy of living" and "care of the body" as Ger-
manic benefactions, and identifies as Germanic traits
law-abiding character, honesty, love of labor, sense
of duty, etc.
4478. Hawgood, John A. The tragedy of Ger-
man-America; the Germans in the United
States of America during the nineteenth century —
and after. New York, Putnam, 1940. xviii, 334 p.
40-35196 E184.G3H27
The author, who taught modern history at the
University of Birmingham from 193 1, studied in
both Germany and the United States, and carried
out his research for the present volume on grants
from the Rockefeller Foundation in 1928 and 1934.
It is primarily a study of the significance of the
hyphen in the term "German-American," with its
implication of resistance to Americanizing tend-
encies, which became so vexed an issue during
World War I. After 1815 any concentration of
German immigrants tended to retain a pride in their
own culture and language, and to oppose "the strong
Sabbatarianism and the growing temperance move-
ment of the Yankee stock in the Middle-Western
States," becoming distinctive "islands in a sea of
Americanism." In addition there were concerted
efforts by settlement societies or other agencies to
plant communities wherein German civilization
could remain independent of outside influences, and
develop unhampered by the restrictions then ob-
taining at home; Part II describes such ventures in
Missouri, Illinois, Texas, and Wisconsin. A crystal-
lization resulted from the Know-Nothing onslaught
of the 1850's, drawing the whole German-speaking
body together in self-defense. "Germans in America
between 1855 and 19 15 lived not in the United
States, but in German America, and lived and wrote
for German America." It took World War I, "with
its hatreds and its persecutions, its propaganda and
its coercion," to bring this era and this mentality to
an end.
4479. Wood, Ralph, ed. The Pennsylvania Ger-
mans. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1942. 299 p. 42-36243 F160.G3W66
Contents. — Pennsylvania, the colonial melting
pot, by A. D. Graeff. — The Pennsylvania German
farmer, by W. M. Kollmorgen. — The sects, aposdes
of peace, by G. P. Musselman. — Lutheran and Re-
formed, Pennsylvania German style, by Ralph
Wood. — The Pennsylvania Germans and the school,
by C. S. Stine. — Journalism among the Pennsylvania
Germans, by Ralph Wood. — Pennsylvania German
literature, by H. H. Reichard. — The Pennsylvania
Germans as soldiers, by A. D. Graeff. — The Penn-
sylvania Germans as seen by the historian, by R. H.
Shryock. — Appendix: The Pennsylvania German
dialect, by A. G. Buffington.
4480. Klees, Frederic. The Pennsylvania Dutch.
New York, Macmillan, 1950. 451 p.
50-11837 F160.G3K5
Bibliography: p. 445-451.
Mr. Wood's collection of ten papers by eight
authors, some of whom are and some are not of
Pennsylvania German descent, "tries to interpret
the Pennsylvania Germans to their fellow Ameri-
cans and to themselves." The editor remarks that
"he was surprised to find that a common denom-
inator developed spontaneously throughout all the
chapters, namely, that the Pennsylvania German
character was moulded by the fact that the Pennsyl-
vania Germans were farmers practically and spirit-
ually." Mr. Klees' volume is more detailed and more
miscellaneous, but it is written with an evident af-
fection for its subject which draws the reader on
into the bypaths of Pennsylvania Dutch folkways
and art. Mr. Klees, incidentally, regards "Dutch"
as the traditionally correct term and enters a protest
against the neologism, "Pennsylvania German."
"Their strong concentration in a relatively small
area enabled this people to stay Dutch," and "in
preserving their own culture they succeeded in doing
what no other non-English group in colonial Amer-
ica was able to do." The basis of their culture,
576 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
however, he finds not in farming but in religion,
with the three principal religious groups, "plain
people" (Mennonites, Amish, Dunkards), "church
people" (Lutherans, Reformed, United Brethren),
and Moravians each forming a radically different
cultural pattern of its own. Each chapter is headed
by a neat pen-and-ink drawing by the author. The
Maryland Germans, a History, by Dieter Cunz
(Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1948. 476
p.) tells the story of a related group who remained
less isolated, but put a strong stamp upon the com-
munity in which they settled.
4481. Zucker, Adolf E., ed. The Forty-eighters,
political refugees of the German Revolution
of 1848. New York, Columbia University Press,
1950. xviii, 379 p. illus.
50-7743 E184.G3Z8 1950
Contents. — The European background, by C. }.
Friedrich. — The American scene, by O. Handlin. —
Adjustment to the United States, by H. B. John-
son.— The Turner, by A. }. Prahl. — The Forty-
eighters in politics, by L. S. Thompson and F. X.
Braun. — The radicals, by E. W. Dobert. — The Forty-
eighters in the Civil War, by E. Lonn. — Carl
Schurz, by B. Q. Morgan. — Biographical dictionary
of the Forty-eighters, by A. E. Zucker.
A volume planned in commemoration of the cen-
tenary of the Revolution, by "a number of us who
had been working in this field," at the Philadelphia
headquarters of the Carl Schurz Memorial Founda-
tion in February 1948. A "Forty -eighter" is de-
fined as "one who came to the United States from
German-speaking territory as a result of his par-
ticipation in the Revolution of 1848"; his actual ar-
rival in the United States, of course, might be
delayed until the latter 1850's. Their number can-
not be precisely determined, since the great majority
of German immigrants were coming for economic
reasons, but was small — Dr. Zucker regards 4,000
as a conservative estimate. However, their influence
was vastly greater than their numbers, and few im-
migrant groups have had so large a proportion of
persons of distinction. Dr. Zucker's "Biographical
Dictionary" of over 300 names is a compilation of
permanent value. The average reader will find
these interpretive essays more serviceable than the
detailed volume on the same subject from a single
pen: Carl F. Wittke's Refugees of Revolution
(Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1952. 384 p.). It is, however, a work of great
learning, and has chapters with little or no counter-
part in the symposium, such as "Non-German Forty-
eighters," "The Politics of the Post-War Years,"
"The German Social Pattern," and "Learning and
Letters." Dean Wittke has also written substantial
biographies of two of the most remarkable per-
sonalities among the Forty-eighters: Against the
Current; the Life of Karl Heinzen (1809-80) (Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 1945. 342 p.)
and The Utopian Communist; a Biography of Wil-
helm Weitling, Nineteenth-Century Reformer
(Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Press,
1950. 327 p.).
}. Scandinavians
4482. Babcock, Kendric Charles. The Scandi-
navian element in the United States. Ur-
bana, University of Illinois, 1914- 223 p.
(University of Illinois studies in the social sciences,
v. 3, no. 3) 15-8448 H31.I4, v. 3, no. 3
E184.S2B12
University of Illinois Bulletin, v. 12, no. 7.
"Critical essay on materials and authorities":
p. 183-204.
A work, obviously outmoded in some respects,
which retains value as one of the very few treatments
of immigration from the three Scandinavian nations
as a whole. In 1910-12, after a century of steady
growth, the population of Sweden was only
5,600,000, of Norway 2,390,000, and of Denmark
2,775,000. The passage, therefore, of 2,200,000
Scandinavians to the United States between 1820
and 1912 was an extraordinary mass exodus. In
none of the three were there the oppressive political,
military, or social conditions to be found on the
continent; the migration therefore was essentially an
exchange of scanty economic resources and oppor-
tunities for the richer ones offered by the fertile
prairies of the Mississippi Valley. Some informa-
tion is offered concerning the Danish immigration,
which totaled 278,277 between 1820 and 1913, or
only about two-fifths of the Norwegian figure dur-
ing the same period. "The Danish element in
America has always lacked unity and solidity," a fact
which the author attributes to the weak influence of
the schism-ridden Danish Lutheran Church. Dur-
ing the same years 696,401 Norwegians entered the
United States, as against 1,071,835 from more popu-
lous Sweden.
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES
/ 577
4483. Benson, Adolph B., and Naboth Hedin.
Americans from Sweden. Foreword by
Carl Sandburg. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1950.
448 p. (The Peoples of America series)
50-5150 E184.S23B328
Bibliography: p. [427J-434.
This work is in large part based on, or continues,
the symposium which the authors edited, as well as
contributed to, on the occasion of the New Sweden
Tercentenary: Swedes in America, 1638-1938 (New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. xvi, 614 p.).
Part I, "Historical Background," is a somewhat con-
ventional chronological sketch of Swedish groups,
individuals, and movements in the United States.
Part II, "Religious Life," considers the Swedish par-
ticipation in five other churches as well as the Luth-
eran, including the Methodists and the Mission
Friends, the pietistic wing of the Swedish state
church. Part III, "Denominational Education"
briefly reviews the history of seven institutions of
Swedish origin, the largest of which is Augustana
College, established at Rock Island, Illinois, in 1875
after a somewhat migratory existence since 1858.
Part IV, "American Activities," calls the roll of a
multitude of Swedish Americans of distinction in a
variety of fields, such as architects and builders,
health specialists, musicians and actors, aviators and
airplane builders, and businessmen. Small pride
seems to be taken in their major activity in America:
agriculture.
4484. Blegen, Theodore C. Norwegian migration
to America. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian-
American Historical Association, 1931-40. 2 v.
illus. (facsims.) maps, diagrs.
31-20308 E184.S2B6
4485. Blegen, Theodore C, ed. Land of their
choice; the immigrants write home. [Min-
neapolis] University of Minnesota Press, 1955.
463 p. 55—9368 E184.S2B55
The two-volume work originated in the author's
doctoral dissertation at the University of Minnesota,
but was greatly amplified through a large collection
of documentary material which he made as a Gug-
genheim Fellow in Norway during 1928-29. The
whole is a vividly concrete social history of Nor-
wegian immigration during the central decades of
the 19th century. The first volume bears the limit-
ing dates 1825-60; it "traces the genesis and early
expansion of Norwegian immigration, explores the
European backgrounds, and interprets the move-
ment in a setting of international history." It
describes two types of literature which had not
previously received due emphasis: the "America
books" and the "America letters." The first were
handbooks of information for Norwegians on con-
ditions in America; one of the earliest and most in-
fluential examples, which broadened the geographi-
cal scope of the movement in Norway, was Ole
Rynning's True Account of America for the In-
formation and Help of Peasant and Commoner,
published at Christiana in 1838. "America letters"
were written by immigrants to their relatives and
friends at home, in increasing numbers from the
mid-1830's, and were often published in the local
press; "one gets the impression of a vast advertising
movement." Land of Their Choice is an anthology
of such letters in translations made by either Dean
Blegen or his research assistant, Borge Madsen;
many first appeared in the publications of the Nor-
wegian-American Historical Association. Here
they are arranged in groups of two kinds: letters
from various individuals illustrating a particular
topic, or series of letters from a single individual.
The second volume of the larger work bears the
subtitle The American Transition; it aims to present
the dynamic process whereby the immigrant was
merged into the life of the New World. The topical
chapters into which it is organized pursue their
subjects to various points in the later 19th century,
but the bulk of the evidence presented falls before
i860. After years of study the author continued to
think that Ole E. R0lvaag (no. 1720-1723), in his
masterpiece Giants in the Earth and his other novels,
recorded and interpreted the American transition
"with deeper insight and greater effectiveness than
any other writer."
4486. Nelson, Helge. The Swedes and the Swed-
ish settlements in North America. Lund,
C. W. K. Gleerup; New York, A. Bonnier; 1943.
2 v. (Skrifter utg. av Kungl. humanistiska vetens-
kapssamfundet i Lund, 37)
45-7045 E184.S23N35
Translated by Professor Nils Hammarstrand.
Bibliography: v. 1, p. [4io]-4i8.
Contents. — 1. Text. — 2. Adas (73 maps).
The author of this unique work "took part in the
great emigration investigation in Sweden during the
first decade of the present century," and after be-
coming professor of geography at the University
of Lund undertook a large-scale study of Swedish
colonization in Canada and the United States from
the geographical point of view. Receiving subsidies
from the Swedish Government, the Swedish-Amer-
ican Foundation, and various Swedish learned
bodies, he traveled widely in Canada and the United
States in 1921, 1925, 1926, and 1933. The principal
subject of his book is the changing geographical dis-
tribution of the Swedish stock in the United States,
and from 1890, the first Census which broke down
the numbers of the foreign-born by counties, he has
been able to present a series of statistical maps for
578 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the states with the greatest Swedish concentration,
and especially for Minnesota (19 maps). Other
major concerns are the causes and conditions of
settlement in particular areas and the economic oc-
cupations of the setders. Of the 24 chapters, 13
are devoted to a geographical survey, region by re-
gion, of the actual settlements, with numerous maps
and photographs, many of them taken by the author
on his tours. He does not neglect the large urban
concentrations of Swedes in Worcester, Mass., New
York City, Chicago, Minneapolis, and St. Paul,
which are demographically treated. However, the
Swedes have been less attracted by the cities than
many other racial groups, and "the Swedish stock
of the first and second generations alone no doubt
owns more improved land in the United States than
all the cultivated area of the Swedes at home."
4487. Qualey, Carlton C. Norwegian settlement
in the United States. Northfield, Minn.,
Norwegian-American Historical Association, 1938.
285 p. illus., tables, diagr. (Publications of the
Norwegian-American Historical Association)
38-6266 E184.S2Q8
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia
University.
Bibliography: p. [253J-272.
A solidly documented narrative history of the
dispersion and settlement of Norwegian immigrants
in the Middle West from 1834 to about 1885, with
some mention of settlement elsewhere and of earlier
and later date. Separate chapters are devoted to
Illinois, where the Fox River Settlement of 1835
constituted the first Norwegian community beyond
the Appalachians; to Wisconsin, where Jefferson
Prairie just across the Illinois line was setded in
1839; to Iowa, reached by Norwegians in the same
year; to "the glorious new Scandinavia" which
sprang up in Minnesota in the mid-^o's; to the
Dakotas; and to Michigan. The three peaks of
Norwegian immigration occurred in 1866-73, 1880-
93 — with 1882, when over 28,000 entered, as the
peak year of all — and in 1900-19 11. Chapter IX
considers "Islands" of Norwegian settlement in
other parts of the United States. Dot maps show
the concentration of Norwegians in the United
States in 1930, and in individual states at earlier
dates from 1870 to 1900.
K. Other Stocks
4488. Berthoff, Rowland Tappan. British immi-
grants in industrial America, 1790-1950.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 296 p.
maps, diagrs. 53-6028 E184.B7B4
Bibliography: p. [2I3J-275.
Down to the 1850's immigration from Great
Britain (as distinct from Ireland) to the United
States was comparatively small, but from that decade
through the 1920's a fluctuating but usually consid-
erable stream crossed the Atlantic, reaching a peak
of over 800,000 during the 1880's. Until the work
of Mr. Berthoff, who is himself a Welshman, less
was available to the ordinary reader on this than on
any other major current of immigration, and his
book illuminates a very important sector of our eth-
nic history. Making use of trade journals, labor
union publications, state documents, and other
primary sources, he has been able to display this in-
flux as in great part one of skilled laborers, bringing
with them experience and techniques which secured
them prompt employment at high wages in the great
American industrial expansion which began before
the Civil War but was much accelerated after its
close. These English, Scotch, and Welsh craftsmen
played an important part in the development of the
American textile, mining, and iron and steel indus-
tries, and one only quantitatively less important in
our pottery, papermaking, quarrying, building, and
maritime trades. In fact, "nearly the whole English
silk industry migrated to America after the Civil
War." These craftsmen also took their share in the
organization of labor, and their relatively conserva-
tive outlook was reflected in the American Federa-
tion of Labor, a league of craft unions of skilled
artisans. The immigrants themselves valued their
national heritages and developed their own organiza-
tions, periodicals, sports, and amusements, but the
second generation, with no linguistic or other serious
obstacle to assimilation, speedily became indistin-
guishable from other Americans, and "the British-
American community dwindled after the first World
War." Wilbur S. Shepperson's British Emigration
to North America: Projects and Opinions in the
Early Victorian Period (Oxford, Blackwell, 1957.
xvi, 302 p.) is based upon solid research in both
British and American sources, but is limited to the
period 1837-60, and is primarily concerned with
organized efforts to promote emigration, and the
discussions which they provoked at home.
4489. Ford, Henry Jones. The Scotch-Irish in
America. New York, P. Smith, 1941.
607 p. 42-36197 E184.S4F9 1941
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES
/ 579
4490. Dunaway, Wayland F. The Scotch-Irish of
colonial Pennsylvania. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1944. 273 p.
44-9454 F160.S4D8
Bibliography: p. 233-257.
Professor Ford's volume, originally published in
191 5 by the Princeton University Press, was uncom-
monly successful in putting into perspective the ex-
traordinary story of the Scotch-Irish, and in under-
lining their importance as a formative element in
the development of the Thirteen Colonies. His
starting-point is the Ulster Plantation of 1609, un-
dertaken as a means of keeping Catholic Ireland in
subjection, but largely filled up by an unanticipated
migration, not of Englishmen, but of lowland Scots.
In the 1 8th century Presbyterian Ireland shared the
economic disabilities imposed by the London Par-
liament upon Catholic Ireland, and in bad times
Ulstermen sailed for America in large numbers.
The first wave of 1717-18 came to New England,
where Presbyterians and Congregationalists often
failed to see eye to eye; subsequent waves, from
1727 to 1773, went rather to Pennsylvania. Profes-
sor Dunaway is concerned with them there, but his
book too has more than a merely provincial sig-
nificance, for he considers the dispersion which
took place from about 1735, when the Scotch-Irish
advance reached the mountain barrier, and was de-
flected southwestward into the valleys of Maryland
and Virginia, and the piedmont region of the Caro-
linas. Ford stresses the importance of the Scotch-
Irish for American Presbyterianism and for Ameri-
can educational institutions, both preparatory
to the ministry and providing popular education.
Dunaway adds substantial accounts of their eco-
nomic activities and their social life and customs,
and has a chapter on their position in the politics,
law, and government of provincial Pennsylvania.
Ford has a fuller treatment of the very important
contribution of this stock, alienated from the Crown
by British policy toward Ireland, to the revolution-
ary movement.
4491. Graham, Ian Charles Cargill. Colonists
from Scotland: emigration to North Amer-
ica, 1707-1783. Ithaca, N. Y., Published for the
American Historical Association [by] Cornell Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 213 p. 56-58450 E184.S3G7
Bibliography: p. 191-206.
The importance of the migration of Ulster Scots
to the Thirteen Colonies has long been understood;
this volume provides for the first time a documented
study of the migration from Scotland itself. This
movement was only made possible by the union of
the Scottish and English Parliaments in 1707, and
remained small and sporadic until 1768, when there
suddenly began a much larger stream which went
steadily on until halted by the Revolutionary War.
In 12 years, the author estimates, about 25,000 per-
sons left Scotland, "a far greater loss of people than
the country had ever known before." The greater
number came from the Highlands, where to the
chronic poverty of the peasantry was now added the
outright evictions made by improving landlords,
but economic depression and unemployment
brought a substantial group from the Lowlands.
The greatest concentration, about 5,000, settled in
North Carolina. Unlike the Ulstermen, the Scots
of Scotland remained loyal to the Crown with a
unanimity and stubbornness exasperating to the
Patriots, and not a few of the immigrants of 1768-75
in the next decade removed to Canada, thencefor-
ward the focus of Scots emigration. Chapter VI
considers the Scottish-born merchants who resided
in the coastal cities of the Colonies throughout the
1 8th century, and were of particular importance in
the tobacco trade of the Chesapeake region.
4492. Halich, Wasyl. Ukrainians in the United
States. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1937. 174 p. 37-28719 E184.U5H3
Bibliography: p. 163-168.
The Ukraine, the black-soil steppes north of the
Black Sea drained by the Dniester and the Dnieper,
is inhabited by millions of people who speak a
separate Slavic language, and have in recent times
aspired to a separate national status, although they
have never enjoyed actual independence save for a
brief period during 1919-20. American immi-
gration statistics did not distinguish them from other
Russian nationals until 1899, but from that year
through 1914, when their numbers entering had
reached a peak, about 250,000 came to the United
States. By far the largest number went to Penn-
sylvania, where the majority became coal miners,
and other large groups settled in New Jersey, Ohio,
and Illinois. The present volume is strongly colored
by Ukrainian nationalism (there is, it seems, a
"pro-Russian faction"), but gives a clear account of
the Ukrainian participation in American industry,
agriculture, business, and the professions, and de-
scribes Ukrainian ethnic organizations, the Ukrain-
ian Catholic (Uniate) Church, the Ukrainian press,
and a variety of social activities in various parts of
the United States. "Their social and economic im-
provement, although a slow, hard climb, has been a
steady one."
4493. Lucas, Henry S. Netherlander in America;
Dutch immigration to the United States and
Canada, 1789-1950. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press, 1955. xix, 744 p. (University of
Michigan publications. History and political sci-
ence, v. 21) 55-8647 E184.D9L8
580 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Between 1820 and 1949 265,539 Netherlander
came to the United States and 70,000 to Canada.
Mr. Lucas' purpose is to tell their story from their
own point of view, since his lifelong interest in
Dutch immigration has led him to accumulate pri-
mary source material in the form of interviews with
surviving pioneers, as well as other personal
memorabilia relating to the Dutch setdements and
their internal life and structure. The emphasis of
the study is upon Dutch setdements in the Middle
West and particularly in Michigan, where the author
grew up. It was, in fact, the centenary in 1947 °^
the founding of Holland, Michigan, by the Seceders
from the established Reformed Church of the Neth-
erlands which embarked Professor Lucas, a grand-
son of one of the setders of 1847, upon this volume.
"Religion determined the pattern of Dutch settle-
ment in America," and the Dutch communities re-
mained self-contained cultural and ethnic islands
until the 20th century, when Dutch immigration
fell off sharply and the expansion of American
cultural and economic activity began to impinge
upon all isolated groups, with World War I, as usual,
constituting a turning point. This definitive vol-
ume provides information on every Dutch settle-
ment in the country and, when possible, the reasons
for its success or failure. Topical chapters deal
with religion, education, and the press and politics
of the Dutch communities.
4494. Pellegrini, Angelo M. Americans by choice.
New York, Macmillan, 1956. 240 p.
56-1241 E184.I8P39
Dr. Pellegrini, whose Immigrant's Return (New
York, Macmillan, 1951. 269 p.) presented his own
life story as well as his impressions of an Italian jour-
ney, here sketches the lives of six representative West
Coast Italian-Americans of an older generation. La
Bimbina, a peasant mother, who found life in Amer-
ica no less toilsome, but rewarding instead of merely
futile, and died at 70 "at the end of the day's labor,"
is the author's own mother, recalled in respect, grati-
tude, and affection. The sketch of a "dean of
winegrowers" in the Napa Valley conveys a variety
of information on the conditions of viniculture on
California soil. Other sketches concern the rise and
fall of a big-town bootlegger; the mother of a family
of winegrowers who had kept a first-class boarding
house in her younger days and excelled in her Italian
cuisine; an itinerant swindler from the petty bour-
geoisie who had "done a little of everything — except
work"; and a contracting ditchdigger — "at sixty-
nine years of age he was still in the ditch eight hours
a day," but he had established his sons when he
dropped dead digging to clear his own vineyard.
The mingled candor, strength, and tenderness which
the author has put into this gallery of sketches pro-
mote his purpose of mutual understanding.
4495. Thomas, William I., and Florian Znaniecki.
The Polish peasant in Europe and America.
[2d ed.] New York, Knopf, 1927. 2 v. (2250 p.)
27-25039 DK411.T5 1927
This famous work was first published during
1918-20 in five smaller volumes; this second edition
has the same text, with a few errors corrected, but
is rearranged and provided with a brief index. It
owes its unique reputation and influence to its in-
clusion, on an unprecedented scale, of social docu-
mentary materials, usually translated from Polish
into English. In volume 1 are no fewer than 50
series of peasant letters, each series provided with
an introduction in which the circumstances of the
correspondents are described and the persons men-
tioned are identified. The series have been placed
in three main groups, identified as between mem-
bers of family-groups, between husbands and wives,
or as exhibiting personal relations outside of mar-
riage and the family. Volume 2 concludes with the
largest single document in the work, the autobiog-
raphy of Wladek Wiszniewski (p. 1915-2226), who
progressed from Lubotyn in the Province of Kalisz
to the Chicago stockyards, but did not much like
them. Many chapters in the rest of the work con-
sist in whole or part of translated documentary
material. Serious readers have always received a
powerful impression from this exceptional mirror
into the minds of an immigrant group. The authors
begin with a sketch of Polish social organization;
in volume 2 they analyze social "Disorganization
and Reorganization in Poland," and pass on to
"Organization and Disorganization in America"
(p. 1467-1827). This contains their epoch-making
description of the Polish-American community and
its "super-territorial" organization. It also contains
a large section on the "Disorganization of the Immi-
grant," in which the "decay of the personal life-
organization of an individal member of a social
group" is regarded as eventuating in the break of
the conjugal relation, murder, the vagabondage and
delinquency of boys, or the sexual immorality of
girls, with abundant documentary evidence on each
head. It must be remarked that at times the gap
between the flesh and blood of the documents and
the abstract theorizing of the professors is glaringly
wide.
4496. Williams, Phyllis H. South Italian folkways
in Europe and America; a handbook for
social workers, visiting nurses, school teachers, and
physicians. New Haven, Published for the Insti-
tute of Human Relations by Yale University Press,
1938. xviii, 216 p. 38-16630 E184.I8W6
POPULATION, IMMIGRATION, AND MINORITIES / 58 1
4497. Federal Writers' Project. New Yor\ (City).
The Italians of New York; a survey prepared
by workers of the Federal Writers' Project, Works
Progress Administration in the City of New York.
Sponsored by the Guilds' Committee for Federal
Writers' Publications. New York, Random House,
1938. xx, 241 p. (The American guide series)
38-27087 F128.9.I8F4
Bibliography: p. 227-230.
In the absence of any solid and large-scale treat-
ment of the great Italian immigration to the United
States — some 4,650,000 persons in the century after
1820 — these two titles will do duty as concrete views
of limited but representative aspects of the field.
Miss Williams' book is based on her "contact for
eleven years with over five hundred Italian and
Italian-American families" resident in the metro-
politan area of New Haven, Conn. Most of them
came from Sicily or the five southernmost provinces
of the Italian peninsula, and were peasants and fish-
ing folk at home. She goes into most of the spheres
of everyday life, such as housing, diet and household
economy, recreation and hospitality, religion and
superstition, and death and mortuary practices, and
in each describes first the folkways that obtained
in Italy, and next the modified ones that she has
found in America. Her oudook is consistently that
of a social worker, but of a well-informed and
shrewd one, and she warns that superstitions and
other "deep-seated customs, if swept aside at all, are
dissipated gradually." The Italians of New Yor\
[City] is a slighter compilation, but it is well illus-
trated with photographs taken for the Writers' Proj-
ect group who produced it, and it passes in review
the public aspects of one of the largest Italian-
American communities. "Their Share in Building
and Developing New York" describes the varieties
of economic occupations which maintain them, and
there are chapters on religious life, civic and social
life, intellectual and cultural life, the professions,
creative work in art and literature, and specifically
Italian amusements and entertainments.
4498. Wittke, Carl F. The Irish in America.
Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University
Press, 1956. 319 p. 56-6199 E189.I6W5
Bibliography: p. 295-306.
This work on the southern or Catholic Irish as
distinct from the Ulstermen or Protestant Scotch-
Irish is not offered as a definitive study, but aims
to fill a gap in the literature of immigration history
by applying proper standards of historical objectivity
to "the major aspects of Irish immigration to the
United States and with the repercussions from
America upon Ireland in the long struggle for Irish
independence from England." Some attention is
given to the political exiles of 1798, but in the main
the book takes its departure from the increased
migration of the 1820's. Chapters are devoted to
the Irish as canal-building and railroad-building
laborers, as firemen and policemen, and as farmers.
Their special relationship to the Catholic Church
and to urban and national politics is described.
"The Fenian Fiasco," Anglophobia, and Irish Na-
tionalism culminating in the State of Eire are among
the international aspects of the subject. "There are
American Irish who have never escaped from the
slums. . . . The majority, however, have attained
middle-class respectability."
XV
Society
«€
t
A. Some General Views 4499-4513
B. Social History: Periods 4514-4522
C. Social History: Topics 4523-4534
D. Social Thought 4535—4545
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology 4546-4558
F. The Family 4559—4573
G. Communities: General 4574-4578
H. Communities: Rural 4579-4585
I. Communities: Urban 4586-4599
J. City Planning; Housing 4600-4613
K. Social Problems; Social Wor\ 4614-4627
L. Dependency; Social Security 4628-4638
M. Delinquency and Correction 4639-4660
THIS chapter lists works which deal with American society, and necessarily exhibits all
the difficulties which go with that concept: it is in part an abstraction and in part a
residue — what is left when political and economic phenomena have been removed. The titles
below include much that is professional or academic sociology, and much that is not. The
"General Views" of Section A are in part some famous perspectives of the past, and in part
some more recent volumes which seemed not out of place standing beside them. The two
social history sections may seem quite inadequate to
represent a subject which has received so much recent
emphasis, but here, as in Chapter XI, many of the
titles which a social historian would unhesitatingly
claim as his own are, for our purpose, subject to a
more precise classification and appear elsewhere.
There is of course nothing absolute about the divi-
sion into "Periods" and "Topics"; it is merely a con-
venient way of indicating that in the tides of the first
group there is a wider coverage of social phenomena
over a relatively limited period, and in those of the
second a more limited coverage over a relatively
longer period. Again our social histories cannot be
sharply divided from a number of works in general
history (Chapter VIII) and intellectual history
(Chapter XI). Some users would perhaps prefer a
single chronological arrangement for all of them,
and for political and economic history as well; but in
this alternative, periods would be found to overlap
582
as much as do categories, and the works on con-
temporary situations in each realm would lack spe-
cific background.
The majority of works in Section D deal with
academic sociology, and the remainder of the chap-
ter, for the most part, consists of the writings of pro-
fessional sociologists or social workers. In the main
our arrangement follows the Library of Congress
classification (HM-HV), but our Section J com-
pletes the treatment of urban phenomena with works
on city planning which the Library classifies under
Fine Arts (NA) and on housing which it classifies
under Economics (HD), as it does the works on
social security in Section L.
Concerning the technical literature written almost
exclusively by the faculties of the departments of
sociology in American universities, several points
should be made in elucidation of our selections. The
SOCIETY / 583
most frequent objective of this literature, it is fair to
say, is to arrive at universal rules of social behavior.
The bulk of this literature is great, but the greater
part of it is concerned with man as man and not with
man in the United States of America. Some books
ostensibly universal in subject matter turn out on
examination to be in fact wholly concerned with
American examples, and such have been unhesitat-
ingly selected if they meet our requirements in other
respects.
A large proportion of sociological literature con-
sists of textbooks written for college courses which,
like all such textbooks, are more remarkable for
their similarities than for their differences. We can,
of couse, give only an example or two of each type,
and our selection never implies that any text has an
absolute superiority over its numerous competitors.
A recent tendency in academic sociology has been
the identification of scientific method with measure-
ment, the devising of means for measuring such
things as attitudes, and the production of mono-
graphs consisting very largely of figures. While
far from disputing the interest of such studies for
other professionals, or their importance in develop-
ing knowledge about society, we have in most cases
found that their limited scope and frequently tenta-
tive conclusions have stood in the way of their selec-
tion for a general guide of this kind.
American sociology has from its beginnings been
of rationalistic, diagnostic, and reformist if not re-
constructionist temper or oudook. The core of the
curriculum has normally been a course in American
social problems wherein attention is concentrated
upon areas of disorganization, maladjustment, and
failure. This tendency is naturally reflected in the
works available for selection in this chapter, and so
inevitably in the works selected. In consequence,
to some this chapter may seem to emphasize the
negative aspects rather than the positive achieve-
ments of American civilization, but this has not
been because of any bias in this direction on the
part of its compilers.
A. Some General Views
4499. Bryce, James Bryce, viscount. The Ameri-
can commonwealth. London and New
York, Macmillan, 1888. 2 v.
9-13055 JK246.B9 1888
This classic surpassed in elaboration and pene-
tration any studies which Americans had produced
on their own government and politics, and at once
became a standard text for courses in these subjects.
Its author went on to a distinguished career in
British politics, but succeeded in bringing out new
editions in 1893 and (with the help of Charles A.
Beard) in 1910. However, we list the original
edition as the best worth reading. It inaugurated
the serious study of American political parties. It
is, nevertheless, a more comprehensive work, as
appears from its Parts IV, V, and VI. Part IV is
an elaborate treatment of public opinion, in both its
failures and its successes. Part V is a miscellany
including discussions of the supposed and true
faults, and the strength of American democracy, as
well as its availability for European imitation. Part
VI deals with social institutions, and has chapters
on the bar, railroads, Wall Street, the position of
women, and the pleasantness of American life.
Bryce 's American Commonwealth: Fiftieth Anni-
versary, edited by Robert C. Brooks (New York,
Macmillan, 1939. 245 p.), a symposium sponsored
by the American Political Science Association, is
naturally political in emphasis.
4500. [Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de,
called Saint John de Crevecoeur] Letters
from an American farmer; describing certain pro-
vincial situations, manners and customs . . . and
conveying some idea of the late and present interior
circumstances of the British colonies in North
America. Written for the information of a friend
in England, by J. Hector St. John. London,
T. Davies, 1782. 318 p. 2-6756 E163.C82
4501. Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de,
called Saint John de Crevecoeur. Letters
from an American farmer. Reprinted from the
original ed. with a prefatory note by W. P. Trent and
an introd. by Ludwig Lewisohn. New York, Boni,
1925. xxxvii, 355 p. 26-24569 E163.C827
After a wandering existence Crevecoeur settled
on his farm, Pine Hill, in Orange County, N. Y., in
1769, and in the years before the Revolution is
thought to have produced his vivid sketches of the
husbandman's life. He is one of the first to view
America "as the asylum of freedom, as the cradle
of future nations, and the refuge of distressed Euro-
peans," and an even greater pioneer in pointing
out that altered conditions of life were producing a
new man, the American. Some materials not used
in the edition of 1782 were rediscovered and pub-
584 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lished as Sketches of Eighteenth Century America
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1925. 342 p.).
4502. Croly, Herbert D. The promise of Ameri-
can life. New York, Macmillan, 1909.
468 p. 9-28528 HN64.C89
The American nation "is committed to the realiza-
tion of the democratic ideal; and if its promise is to
be fulfilled, it must be prepared to follow whither-
soever that ideal may lead." The essence of the
American achievement is that its "economic, politi-
cal, and social organization has given to its citizens
the benefits of material prosperity, political liberty,
and a wholesome natural equality." On these
premises the author conducted a searching inquiry
into the quality of American civilization, and
worked out principles of reconstruction in the spirit
of individual emancipation and constructive in-
dividualism. Much of it is of present pertinence as
well as of historical interest.
4503. Fortune. U. S. A., the permanent revolu-
tion, by the editors of Fortune in collabora-
tion with Russell W. Davenport. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1951. xvii, 267 p.
51-10804 E169.1.F75
"Originally published as the February, 1951, issue
of Fortune magazine."
A closely argued and somewhat overemphatic
volume which seeks to demonstrate that the Ameri-
can way of life is founded upon and generated by
principles of universal application. The present-
day working of this "American system" of liberty,
equality, and constitutionalism is illustrated in the
spheres of business, politics, labor, and local com-
munity affairs. These conclusions can be generally
applied to the problems of present day civilization,
and used to dissolve the caricature of American life
which prevails abroad, and to promote a positive
American foreign policy.
4504. Nef, John U. The United States and
civilization. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1942. xviii, 421 p. ([Chicago. University]
Charles R. Walgreen Foundation lectures)
42-1619 B57.N4
A diagnostic interpretation of American society
in the light of the development of Western Civiliza-
tion since the Middle Ages and its present material,
moral, and intellectual crisis. The overemphasis of
means, in the enormous expansion of science, tech-
nology, industrialism, and economic life since about
1450, has led to the neglect and decay of the ends of
civilization: humanism, religion, moral philosophy,
and art. Among the expedients suggested are a re-
turn to the humanities in education, the endowment
of noneconomic institutions, and the strengthening
of government within constitutional and democratic
limits.
4505. Siegfried, Andre. Les Etats-Unis d'aujour-
d'hui. Paris, Colin, 1927. 326 p. (Biblio-
theque du musee social) 27-26676 E169.1.S56
4506. Siegfried, Andre. America comes of age, a
French analysis. Translated from the
French by Henry H. Hemming and Doris Hem-
ming. New York, Harcourt, Brace. 1927. 358 p.
27-9637 E169.1.S57
4507. Siegfried, Andre. Tableau des Etats-Unis.
Paris, Colin, 1954. 347 p.
54-34192 E169.1.S56813
4508. Siegfried, Andre. America at mid-century.
Translated by Margaret Ledesert. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 357 p.
55-7422 E169.1.S568
M. Siegfried's concise survey of American social,
economic, and political life in the age of Coolidge
was instantly acclaimed, by Europeans and Ameri-
cans alike, for its interpretative virtuosity, its clear
delineation of what "oft was thought but ne'er so
well expressed." The translators' title, however,
was singularly misleading, for maturity was quite
lacking in the America Siegfried envisaged: a welter
of races in the melting-pot, with the older strains
rather desperately striving to keep America Prot-
estant and "Anglo-Saxon." The second volume,
issued 27 years later, is not a revision, "but a com-
pletely new book." It lacks the clarity and concen-
tration of the old, and while it contains many fine
apercus, it has received no such general admiration.
The underlying oudook of the two volumes re-
mains the same: in 1927 the chief contrast between
Europe and America was that "between industrial
mass production which absorbs the individual for
its material conquests, as against the individual con-
sidered not merely as a means of production but
as an independent ego." By 1954 there is no longer
anything French intellectuals can do about it: "The
classical tradition will survive, but the American
will be a highly developed Homo faber rather than
the Homo sapiens as conceived by Socrates."
4509. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De la
democratic en Amerique. Paris, Gosselin,
1835. 2 v. MB
4510. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De-
mocracy in America. Translated by Henry
Reeve. London, Saunders & Odey, 1835-40. 4 v.
9-21576 JK216.T7 1835
SOCIETY / 585
451 1. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De-
mocracy in America. Translated by Henry
Reeve. Edited with notes, the translations rev. and
in great part rewritten, and the additions made to
the recent Paris editions now first translated by
Francis Bowen. Cambridge, Mass., Sever & Francis,
1862. 2 v. 9-21574 JK216.T7 1862
4512. Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. De-
mocracy in America. The Henry Reeve text
as rev. by Francis Bowen, now further corr.
and edited with introd., editorial notes, and bibli-
ographies by Phillips Bradley; foreword by Harold
J. Laski. New York, Knopf, 1945. 2 v.
45-3119 JK216.T7 1945
"Editions of Democracy in America": v. 2, p.
385—391. "A bibliography of items relating to De-
mocracy in America and its author": v. 2, p. 392-
401.
De Tocqueville traveled in the United States in
1831-32, studying American penitentiaries on behalf
of Louis-Phillippe's Ministry of Justice. He used the
opportunity to observe American democracy, not
only as a system of government, but as the basic
characteristic of an entire society, and so to forecast
for Europeans the shape of things to come. Even
the first part, which appeared in 1835, goes far be-
yond a mere study of government; it discusses the
advantages which American society derives from a
democratic government, the consequences of the
unlimited power of the majority, the causes which
mitigate it, and the factors which tend to perpetuate
democracy. The second part, which followed in
1840, is primarily a sociological inquiry into the
implications of democracy, in the spheres of intel-
lect, feeling, and manners. Here he raises, for the
first time, such enduring topics as the addiction of
Americans to practical rather than to theoretical
science, the taste for physical well-being in America,
and the creation of an industrial aristocracy. Much
is abstract, and much obsolete, but few books of
social observation have remained so obstinately con-
temporary. Tocqueville's American visit is thor-
oughly documented in George W. Pierson, Tocque-
ville and Beaumont in America (New York, Oxford
University Press, 1938. 852 p.).
4513. Years of the modern; an American appraisal.
John W. Chase, ed. New York, Longmans,
Green, 1949. 354 p. 49-11770 E169.1.Y4
Contents. — Portrait of the American, by H. S.
Commager. — American freedom: a method, by A.
Barth. — The genius of the radical, by W. Hamil-
ton.— The faith of a skeptic, by A. Johnson. — The
saving remnant: a study of character, by D. Ries-
man. — The American economy: substance and
myth, by J. K. Galbraith. — Education under cross-
fire, by P. Miller. — Of science and man, by H.
Brown. — Americans and the war of ideas, by E. D.
Canham. — Our armed forces; threat or guarantee,
by C. T. Lanham. — Peace: our greatest challenge, by
S. Welles. — An adventure in ideals, by N. Cousins.
A symposium of twelve interpretative essays, on
selected but essential aspects of American life, each
by an authority in his field chosen for his ability to
relate it to the rest of life, and to phrase his convic-
tions with clarity and force. "It might be called
a creative inventory of our times."
B. Social History: Periods
4514. Allen, Frederick Lewis. The big change:
America transforms itself, 1900-1950. New
York, Harper, 1952. 308 p.
52-8455 E169.1.A4717
An optimistic interpretation of American social
evolution during the first half of the 20th century.
At the turn of the century the gulf between wealth
and poverty was immense. Fifty years later the
gap had been effectively narrowed, and there had
also been a narrowing of the gap in ways of living,
and the emergence of an "all-American standard"
for the whole population. Business had found a
new frontier in the purchasing power of the poor,
and new-style corporations were concerned with the
social benefits of their policies. In short, the United
States was evolving, not toward socialism but past
socialism.
4515. Billington, Ray A. The Protestant Crusade,
1 800- 1 860; a study of the origins of Ameri-
can nativism. New York, Rinehart, 1952, ci938.
514 p. 52-14020 BX1406.B5 1952
Bibliography: p. 445-504.
Charts a popular upheaval through the 30 years
of its violence, and traces its roots back to the Eng-
lish Reformation and the defensive nationalism of
the Elizabethan Age. Its manifestations are pur-
sued in religious controversy and propaganda for
mass consumption, and in overt violence; in political
organization leading to the establishment of a
separate party, the Know-Nothings; and in the
transfer of hostility from the Catholic Church to the
immigrants in general. Well-documented, it
achieves a notable synthesis.
586 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4516. Branch, Edward Douglas. The sentimental
years, 1836-1860. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1934. 432 p. 34-36082 E166.B82
A view of the various facets of a people's life dur-
ing the quarter-century between Jackson and Lin-
coln, which becomes, the author thinks, "a social
discussion of the first generation of the American
middle class." Sentimentalism, his key to the pe-
riod, he regards as "the immature phase of the
Romantic Movement" in which reality is neither
recognized nor judged. A lively panorama of such
developments as feminism, the temperance move-
ment, phrenology, spiritualism, and Perfectionism
is presented, with the author intent on making the
worst of everything.
4517. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Myths and realities;
societies of the colonial South. Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1952. 208 p.
(The Walter Lynwood Fleming lectures in southern
history, Louisiana State University)
52-13024 F212.B75
"Bibliographical note": p. [i97]-200.
In 1776 there was no South or Southerners, but
three or even four distinct social patterns, if the
North Carolina one which the author mentions but
does not describe be included. He analyzes the
Chesapeake Society of Virginia and Maryland,
where the planters had consistently lived beyond
their means but furnished a distinguished leader-
ship in political and religious liberalism; the Caro-
lina Society where a genuinely prosperous "planting
plutocracy arose on the basis of fortunes amassed
in rice and indigo or in trade and sought to trans-
form itself into an aristocracy after the Old World
pattern"; and the Back Settlements, a land of "amaz-
ing antitheses" where conventions were thinner and
a rough sort of equality was maintained, and which
largely disappeared after the Revolution.
4518. Kraus, Michael. Intercolonial aspects of
American culture on the eve of the revolu-
tion, with special reference to the northern towns.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1928. 251 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
302) H31.C7, no. 302
28-23641 E163.K9
"List of authorities": p. 227-244.
A careful investigation of a field largely neglected
or even denied existence in earlier histories: "the
many influences, subtle or obvious, which were cre-
ating for the colonists a common fund of experi-
ence," and so preparing the intercolonial cooperation
which took place after 1765. These factors, as ap-
parent in Boston, New York, and Philadelphia, are
traced in the spheres of business, social relationships,
religion, printing, education, art, medicine, and sci-
ence. The special interest does not prevent a faith-
ful mirroring of colonial society in general.
4519. Morris, Lloyd R. Not so long ago. New
York, Random House, 1949. xviii, 504 p.
49-11404 E169.1.M83
Three agencies, the motion pictures, the automo-
bile, and the radio, in their essential development
and their social effects since 1896. "Probably never
before in human history have three instruments of
such incalculable social power been developed in so
short a time. All three were perfected in the United
States, within the memory of a generation still active
today. Yet, together, they have completely trans-
formed our society, civilization and culture." The
author is particularly concerned to trace the effects
of these inventions on manners and morals.
4520. Riegel, Robert E. Young America, 1830-
1840. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1949. 435 p. 49-50089 E338.R5
Aims to present a cross-view of civilization in a
transitional decade, excluding only the well-known
political events of the age of Jackson. The great
majority of the references are to strictly contempo-
rary sources. "The effort has been to present a com-
prehensive view of how people earned their livings,
how they amused themselves, and what were their
thoughts and their ideals." There are chapters on
business, the wage earner, woman, reformers, doc-
tors, scientists, and sports. The United States, he
concludes, was well embarked on the "revolution-
ary project of developing an entire people rather
than only a few selected groups."
4521. Stewart, George R. American ways of life.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1954.
310 p. 54-7323 E169.1.S84
Realistic surveys of various aspects of American
social life from 1607 to the present day, including
such comparatively neglected topics as food, drink,
clothing, sex, play, and holidays. "Personal names"
is based on extensive research by the author in
original records, and is a field which he has prac-
tically to himself. Originally prepared for an
Athenian audience, much of the matter will be quite
as enlightening to the author's own countrymen.
4522. Tyler, Alice (Felt) Freedom's ferment;
phases of American social history to i860.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1944.
608 p. A44-463 BR516.T9
Bibliography and notes: p. 551-589.
The religious and reform movements of the early
Republic are here presented as twin manifestations
SOCIETY / 587
of the desire to perfect human institutions. "The
American reformer was the product of evangelical
religion, which presented to every person the neces-
sity for positive action to save his own soul, and
dynamic frontier democracy, which was rooted deep
in a belief in the worth of the individual. The re-
sult was a period of social ferment, sometimes a little
mad, a little confused about directions, but always
full of optimism, of growth, and of positive affirma-
tion." Within this framework are straightforward
accounts of Transcendentalism and Mormonism,
religious and secular Utopias, reform movements in
education, penology, and welfare, and the tem-
perance, peace, feminist, and anti-slavery crusades.
C. Social History: Topics
4523. Asbury, Herbert. The great illusion; an in-
formal history of prohibition. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1950. 344 p.
50-10358 HV5089.A74
Develops the antecedents of Prohibition at reason-
able length, and finds the crucial decision in the elec-
tions of 191 6, well before wartime conditions pre-
vailed or "our boys" were off in Europe. "At most
the war may have hastened ratification by a few
years . . . The American people wanted prohibi-
tion and were bound to try it; for more than a hun-
dred years they had been indoctrinated with the idea
that the destruction of the liquor traffic was the will
of God and would provide the answers to most, if not
all, of mankind's problems." Prohibition's fairest
flower was an appalling moral collapse, the almost
complete breakdown of law enforcement through-
out the United States, and the taking over of the
importation, manufacture, and distribution of illegal
liquor by the underworld. An opinionated but
well-documented record.
4524. Benson, Mary Sumner. Women in eight-
eenth-century America; a study of opinion
and social usage. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1935. 343 p. (Columbia University. Faculty
of Political Science. Studies in history, economics
and public law, no. 405) H31.1. C7, no. 405
35-6356 HQ1416.B4 1935a
"Bibliographical essay": p. 317-333.
A study of the status of women during a crucial
century, primarily as set forth by theorists both in
Europe and America, but also "as reflected in legis-
lation, in the activities of women themselves, and
in the comments of prominent Americans and trav-
ellers." Franklin and Rush were American inno-
vators who wrote effectively in favor of wider
opportunities and responsibilities for women, but
the bulk of American writing reflected European
ideas. In society itself, American conditions had
modified the European tradition: upper class women
had a greater part in economic activity; lower class
women received better treatment. Definite advances
were made during the century, but at its close the
fear of radicalism was restricting further develop-
ments.
4525. Bestor, Arthur E. Backwoods Utopias; the
sectarian and Owenite phases of communi-
tarian socialism in America, 1 663-1 829. Philadel-
phia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950. 288 p.
50-6447 HX654.B4
At head of title: American Historical Association.
"Bibliographical essay": p. 245-268.
This work defines with a new precision the Com-
munitarian point of view: it aimed to produce a
small, voluntary, experimental community, which
would accomplish an immediate root-and-branch re-
form, and provoke general imitation in the great
world outside. The "holy commonwealths" are
inventoried, beginning with Plockhoy's established
on the Delaware in 1663; there were 34 of them
prior to 1825, and 130 before the Civil War. Robert
Owen's communitarian proposals made a wider
appeal than any predecessors, because free of all nar-
row sectarian restrictions. But after Owen's com-
plicated and expensive failure, the sectarian
communities went prosperously on until the Civil
War turned them into economic backwaters.
4526. Curti, Merle E. The roots of American
loyalty. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1946. 267 p. A46-2131 E169.1.C89
"Bibliographical note": p. [2495-256.
An examination of the sources and nature of
American patroitism, particularly during the forma-
tive century which followed 1776. The subject is
inseparable from the development of American
nationalism, and the author emphasizes the manner
in which particular groups, such as Negroes or
immigrants from continental Europe, have devel-
oped a sense of participation in the national life.
A great variety of printed sources have been ran-
sacked for evidence — including the usually ignored
Fourth of July oration, which, "for all its bombast
588 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and platitudes, epitomized the whole pattern of
American patriotic thought and feeling."
4527. Habenstein, Robert W., and William M.
Lamers. The history of American funeral
directing. Milwaukee, Bulfin Printers, 1955. 636 p.
55-12014 GT3150.H3
This work, sponsored and copyrighted by the
National Funeral Directors Association of the
United States, devotes its first 200 pages to a de-
scription of the pre-Christian, medieval, and early
English background, and then embarks upon an
analysis of American developments as objective as
it is massive. No grim detail is slighted: the evolu-
tion of the coffin (which became the casket in the
course of the 1860's), of the hearse, and of the em-
balmer's art are concretely charted. The authors
pause at intervals to reconstruct the typical funeral
of the period. The later chapters emphasize the
rise of the professional spirit, the differentiation of
the embalmer from the funeral director, and the
development of national associations in the field.
There are numerous illustrations from contem-
porary sources, happily more often comic than grue-
some. The volume is thoroughly documented. A
related subject is presented in Charles L. Wallis'
Stories on Stone; a Boo\ of American Epitaphs
(New York, Oxford University Press, 1954.
272 p.), a classified anthology of inscribed tomb-
stones of originality, character, and humor, con-
scious or unconscious.
4528. Krout, John Allen. The origins of pro-
hibition. New York, Knopf, 1925. 339 p.
25-16666 HV5089.K75
Bibliography: p. 305-328.
A social history of the "temperance movement,"
largely impelled by the power of evangelical Prot-
estantism, down to 185 1. The temperance societies
which sprang up locally, and were federated in the
American Society for the Promotion of Temperance
in 1826, became racked by dissension over the con-
sumption of wine and malt liquors. In the 1840's
came the Washingtonian or total abstinence move-
ment, but also a growing conviction that persuasion
would never be adequate and must be replaced by
legal coercion. The first result was the Maine Law
of 1 85 1. Chapter 10 surveys the huge literary output
of the temperance reformers.
4529. Langdon, William Chauncy. Everyday
things in American life. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1937-41. 2 v. 37-34608 E161.L32
Bibliography: v. [1], p. 335-340; v. [2], p. 383-
384.
Contents. — v. 1. 1 607-1 776. — v. 2. 1776-1876.
A simple and straightforward presentation of the
development of material culture in America, with
copious illustrations. The first volume, because of
simpler subject matter, is a more unified production
than the second. Transportation and manufacture,
as well as domestic equipment, are included.
4530. Mann, Arthur. Yankee reformers in the
urban age. Cambridge, Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1954. 314 p.
54-5020 HN80.B7M3
"Bibliographical note": p. [245]-248.
Boston is utilized as a case study in urban social-
reform thinking during the two seminal decades,
1880-1900. While the author emphasizes that the
reformers were only an articulate minority, and the
mass of the citizens remained indifferent or hostile
to liberalism, the book leaves rather an impression
of a multiplicity of workers engaged in intense activ-
ity. Irish Catholic liberals, radical rabbis, Protestant
social gospelers, academic dissidents, radical free-
lance intellectuals, trade-union "collective individ-
ualists," and feminists contributed their strands of
criticism and vision. John Boyle O'Reilly, Frank
K. Foster, Frank Parsons, and Vida D. Scudder are
among the leaders who "rejuvenated the languishing
spirit of reform to meet the problems of the modern,
urban-industrial culture."
4531. Rawson, Marion (Nicholl) Of the earth
earthy; how our fathers dwelt upon and
wooed the earth. New York, Dutton, 1937. 414 p.
37-23647 E161.R285
Suggestive and nostalgic essays on vanished forms
of our material culture, with pen-and-ink illustra-
tions by the author. Here one finds the forms and
functions of those mysterious entities so frequendy
encountered in our early literature: the lime-kiln,
the hop-yard, the malt-house, saltpetre beds, the
shot-tower, the salt-yard, the seine loft and field, sail
and rigging lofts, the ropewalk, the charcoal pits,
the peat bog, and many others. The author has
written a number of other books in similar vein,
such as Forever the Farm (New York, Dutton, 1939.
380 p.), but none so original as this.
4532. Schlesinger, Arthur M. Learning how to
behave, a historical study of American
etiquette books. New York, Macmillan, 1946.
95 p. 46-8112 E161.S25
A. concise survey of a copious branch of American
writing. Domestic manuals replaced imported ones
with the advent of Jacksonian democracy, and pro-
vided a means for social groups rising out of peasan-
try or poverty to assimilate an old heritage of social
refinement. After the Civil War, an etiquette of
heightened formal convention provided a special
form of display for the new rich and their imitators.
SOCIETY / 589
This artificiality disappeared quite suddenly after
World War I, leaving a vacuum which has been
very imperfecdy filled.
4533. Wecter, Dixon. The hero in America, a
chronicle of hero-worship. New York,
Scribner, 1941. 530 p. 41-5177 E176.W4
Bibliography: p. 493-513.
Aims "to look at a few of those great personalities
in public life — Washington, Franklin, Jefferson,
Jackson, Lincoln, Lee, Theodore Roosevelt — from
whom we have hewn our symbols of government,
our ideas of what is most prizeworthy as 'Ameri-
can'." Equally significant as signposts of folk ap-
proval are minor heroes and hero types — Johnny
Appleseed, the Unknown Soldier, Lindbergh. The
author notes the absence of women, artists, scholars,
and saints, as well as physicians and lawyers, from
the heroic register.
4534. Wecter, Dixon. The saga of American
society; a record of social aspiration, 1607-
1937. New York, Scribner, 1937. 504 p.
37-J5575 E161.W43
"A note on bibliography": p. 485-493.
A lively panorama of Society with a capital S,
defined as "the overt manifestation of caste," active,
conspicuous, articulate, specialized. A chapter is
devoted to the assimilation of plutocracy to aristoc-
racy, a vital problem of society since the rise of the
great industrial fortunes. The Blue Books, and
other means of limiting and recognizing the socially
elect, are analyzed. Other topics are the gentle-
man's club, the predominance of women, the society
page as a power and not merely a picture, and mar-
riage with titled Europeans. The author is critical
and often ironical, but never contemptuous or
denunciatory.
D. Social Thought
4535. Barker, Charles A. Henry George. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1955. 696 p.
55-6251 HB119.G4B3
To Prof. Barker, George's Progress and Poverty
(1879) is "a moral Mount Whitney in American
protest." While the book is primarily "a devastat-
ing attack on land monopoly," it is just as effective
"against monopolism in any form, unless that
monopolism be truly necessary in economics and
truly public in administration." "No other book
of the industrial age, dedicated to social recon-
struction and conceived within the western traditions
of Christianity and democracy, commanded so much
attention." These convictions animate the author's
immense researches in primary materials, and
justify the extremely detailed narratives of the
evolution of George's ideas, his participation in
California and New York politics, and his cam-
paigns of propagandism in the British Isles and at
home. A final chapter deals with the "triple legacy
of Georgism," in the single tax doctrine, in munici-
pal reformism, .and in "moral and intellectual
Georgism." Readers desiring a more concise pres-
entation of George's life and thought will find it in
Albert J. Nock's Henry George, an Essay (New
York, Morrow, 1939. 224 p.), and a treatment
largely limited to ideas in George R. Geiger's The
Philosophy of Henry George (New York, Mac-
millan, 1933. 581 p.).
4536. Bernard, Luther L., and Jessie Bernard.
Origins of American sociology; the social
science movement in the United States. New York,
Crowell, 1943. 866 p. 43-10237 HM22.U5B4
The chief predecessor of the modern academic
discipline, sociology, was the social science move-
ment, originally transplanted to the United States
as an ardent practical democratic idealism, but in the
course of time losing most of its futile utopianism,
acquiring greater logical and scientific discipline,
and falling into line with respectable scientific
method. The period covered is approximately
1840-90, and the major topics are the associationist
phase, the influence of Comte, the systematizing
phase (G. F. Holmes, James O'Donnell, R. S.
Hamilton, and R. J. Wright), the nationalist or
Carey School, the neo-classical school, and the
American Social Science Association (1865-1909).
"Social Science" itself is regarded as a transitional
stage embodying residual theological and meta-
physical elements. A cumbersome volume, but full
of information for intellectual history.
4537. Chugerman, Samuel. Lester F. Ward, the
American Aristotle; a summary and inter-
pretation of his sociology. Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1939. 591 p.
39-22560 HM22.U6W22
Bibliography: p. 559-560.
59° / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Ward (1841-1913) worked out his doctrines of
sociology during the 40 years he was a govern-
ment official in Washington, laboring for 14 years
on the production of his first book, Dynamic Soci-
ology (1883). Only during the last seven years of
his life did he profess the subject at Brown Uni-
versity. Mr. Chugerman disposes of Ward's biog-
raphy in one chapter, and devotes the rest of his
book to a systematic presentation of Ward's ideas
and his claims to greatness as a thinker. Ward
was the Yankee Aristotle because, like the Greek
thinker and also like Comte and Spencer in his own
day, he worked out a massive synthesis of the sciences
and the naturalistic philosophy of his age. To Ward
evolution was the key to the cosmos, and sociology
the crown of the sciences and the only sure instru-
ment of progress through social reconstruction.
American sociology has ever since retained the
naturalistic and reformist stamp which Ward gave
to it.
4538. Dorfman, Joseph. Thorstein Veblen and his
America. New York, Viking Press, 1934.
556 p. 34-39873 HB119.V4D6
"Bibliography of Thorstein Veblen": p. 519-524.
Veblen (1 857-1929), the son of Norwegian im-
migrants, was an economist whose very original
views soon led him to transcend the orthodox
boundaries of his subject and make striking and
controversial contributions to social theory. This
detailed biography utilizes the lecture-notes taken
by his students and includes summaries of his prin-
cipal writings, among which The Theory of the
Leisure Class (New York, Macmillan, 1899. 400 p.)
and The Theory of Business Enterprise (New York,
Scribner, 1904. 400 p.) are the best known.
4539. Jandy, Edward C. Charles Horton Cooley,
his life and his social theory. New York,
Dryden Press, 1942. 319 p.
42-22102 HM22.U6C65
Bibliography: p. 270-281.
Cooley (1864-1929) was professor of sociology at
the University of Michigan and one of the founders
of American academic sociology, and in particular of
social psychology. The author of this Michigan
dissertation devotes his first two chapters to Cooky's
life, and the remaining four to an exposition of his
social theory. In summarizing, the author declares
that while Cooley 's abstract and philosophical ap-
proach, his tendency to generalize on the basis of
scant data, and his "ethico-religionism" are things
of the past, his view of "the interdependent nature
of the individual and society," his emphasis on pub-
lic opinion, and his analyses of social institutions
pervade more recent literature, and assure him an
enduring place in the history of sociology.
4540. Odum, Howard W., ed. American masters
of social science; an approach to the study
of the social sciences through a neglected field of
biography. New York, Holt, 1927. 411 p.
27-8909 HM22U6O4
Contents. — Pioneers and masters of social sci-
ence, by H. W. Odum. — John William Burgess, by
W. R. Shepherd.— Lester Frank Ward, by J. Q.
Dealey. — Herbert B. Adams, by J. M. Vincent. —
William Archibald Dunning, by C. E. Merriam. —
Albion Woodbury Small, by E. C. Hayes. — Frank-
lin Henry Giddings, by J. L. Gillin. — Thorstein
Veblen, by P. T. Homan. — Frederick Jackson Tur-
ner, by C. Becker. — James Harvey Robinson, by
H. E. Barnes.
Sketches of nine "masters," who include political
scientists, historians, and economists as well as soci-
ologists, are presented primarily as "an approach to
teaching and research in the social sciences." The
sketches present the subject's outlook and ideas as
well as the facts of his life. While the careers of
these men coincided with the periods during which
their disciplines achieved autonomy in American
higher education, the editor emphasizes their ver-
satility, enabling them to range "over a broad field
of social interest" and social statecraft.
4541. Odum, Howard W. American sociology;
the story of sociology in the United States
through 1950. New York, Longmans, Green, 1951.
501 p. 51-12390 HM22.U5O4 1951
A presentation of the professional and organiza-
tional aspects of its subject. The largest section is
concerned with the careers and work of the suc-
cessive presidents of the American Sociological So-
ciety, from Lester F. Ward in 1906-07, to Leonard
Cottrell, the 40th, in 1950. The next largest lists,
with some commentary of a general kind, college
texts in sociology since 1883, both general and spe-
cial. Chapter 23 describes American sociological
journals and their editors. The concluding chapters,
"Toward inventory," discuss a few trends but at-
tempt no large synthesis or judgment. Rather a
compendium of serviceable information than a
definitive history of its subject.
4542. Page, Charles Hunt. Class and American
sociology; from Ward to Ross. New York,
Dial Press, 1940. 319 p.
40-8685 HM22.U5P3 1940a
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni-
versity.
Contents. — The fathers and their times. — Lester
Frank Ward. — William Graham Sumner. — Albion
Woodbury Small. — Franklin Henry Giddings. —
Charles Horton Cooley. — Edward Alsworth Ross. —
SOCIETY / 59I
Conclusion.— Notes and bibliography (p. [255]-
312).
A study of the concept of class in the work of six
of the "fathers" of American sociology. All were
concerned with the role of class forces in American
life; after their day American sociology turned to
detailed empirical research in problem areas of nar-
rower scope. The present concern with class, not
merely as a socio-economic aggregate, but as a socio-
psychological phenomenon rooted in personal atti-
tudes, is a return to their viewpoint. But "they
were all, in one way or another, impressed by the
anti-class elements of American democracy," and
by the emphasis of our middle class "upon the com-
mon elements of a society and its negation of all
separating barriers."
4543. Ross, Edward Alsworth. Seventy years of
it; an autobiography. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1936. 341 p.
36-27416 HM22.U6R6
Ross ( 1 866-1 951) after being expelled for his
opinions from Stanford University in 1900, settled
down to a long teaching career at the University of
Wisconsin. He was one of the founders of our
academic sociology, but little of his formal doctrine
appears here; rather does it exhibit him in the role
of stormy petrel. An uncompromising democrat,
he fearlessly spoke out against all tendencies which
might undermine the roots of American society in
liberty and equality. His reminiscences are miscel-
laneous, and often naively bumptious, but they re-
flect his wide acquaintance with other societies, his
indifference to fashionable currents of opinion, and
his ability to penetrate to the essence of social
tendencies.
4544. Starr, Harris E. William Graham Sumner.
New York, Holt, 1925. 557 p.
25-11703 H59.S8S7
Sumner (1840-19 10), the most stalwardy inde-
pendent of all American social scientists, had a re-
markably varied career, in the course of which his
views altered from orthodox Congregationalism
through classical economic doctrine to ethnological
relativism. At all stages his complete honesty, clear
expression, and uncompromising assertion made
him a formidable factor in current discussion at vari-
ous levels. This admiring but objective biography
quotes at length from his correspondence and digests
his doctrines in their several subjects and stages.
4545. White, Morton G. Social thought in Amer-
ica, the revolt against formalism. New
York, Viking Press, 1949. 260 p.
49-48242 H53.U5W5
The subtitle defines the book's subject: the style of
thinking which dominated America for almost
half a century, an intellectual pattern compounded
of pragmatism, institutionalism, behaviorism, legal
realism, and economic determinism. Its major
representatives were Justice O. W. Holmes, Thor-
stein Ve'olen, John Dewey, James Harvey Robinson,
and Charles A. Beard. Their common ground was
the rejection of abstractionism in favor of historicism
and cultural organicism, although their following
came rather from their apparent contribution to the
advent of a more rational society. The treatment is
critical as well as expository, but the balance is favor-
able: in spite of all their fuzziness and lack of logic,
"their example should serve to encourage those social
scientists who are more interested in achieving a
good society than in measuring attitudes toward
toothpaste."
E. General Sociology; Social Psychology
4546. Barnett, James H. The American Christ-
mas; a study in national culture. New York,
Macmillan, 1954. 173 p. 54-12566 GT4985.B3
According to the author, this "is a pioneer effort
in the sociological study of American holidays,"
which seeks "to show how the past and the present,
the religious and the secular, are fused in the pat-
tern of the national festival so that it draws vitality
from many and varied sources." Historically, this
one is a recent development, its legal recognition by
all the states and territories taking place between
1836 and 1890. Its intensive commercial exploita-
tion falls after 1920. The social role of Santa Claus
and the social content of Christmas art are developed.
Christmas "has become a diffuse, popular cult,"
"nourished by the tie of family life, by affection for
children, by a willingness to aid the needy, and even
by the profit-seeking activities of modern busi-
ness." In it even the secular-minded can readily
participate.
4547. Caplow, Theodore. The sociology of work.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1954. 330 p. 54-8208 HM211.C3
The author defines his subject as "the study of
those social roles which arise from the classification
592 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of men by the work they do," and proceeds upon
the assumption that a complex society like the United
States "is maintained by the mutual dependence of
highly specialized and differentiated occupational
groups." While he aims at generalized conclusions,
his exposition depends upon American subject mat-
ter, with only an occasional introduction of foreign
situations for contrast. His book, he says, is pri-
marily an essay on the division of labor, and he has
much to say concerning the measurement of occu-
pational status, vertical and other kinds of mobility,
occupational institutions, and occupational status.
In the United States today, he observes, "poverty has
come to mean the absence of status symbols rather
than hunger and physical misery." This and many
comparable insights add up to a penetrating exposi-
tion of the nature of jobs and of job-holding in
present-day America, viewed as social rather than
merely economic facts.
4548. Chapin, Francis Stuart. Contemporary
American institutions; a sociological analysis.
New York, Harper, 1935. 423 p.
35-1 1 7 12 HN57.C5
Prof. Chapin 's analysis proceeds from the prin-
ciple that "social institutions are essentially psycho-
logical phenomena that consist of a configuration of
segments of the behaviors of individuals." On
this basis he describes the political and business insti-
tutions of the local community, the family, the
school, the Protestant church in an urban environ-
ment, social welfare agencies, and even the New
Deal. He gives many tables and diagrams illustra-
tive of social situations. He concludes with various
theories and projects of social measurement, typical
of the direction sociological investigation was about
to take, and indicating why his would be the last
general survey of the kind.
4549. Cuber, John F., and William F. Kenkel.
Social stratification in the United States.
New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1954. 359 p.
54-10606 HT609.C8
The authors attempt to supply a practical text-
book for a field hitherto without one, although
research output within it has been immense. "Part
I is a semantic, theoretical, and methodological
orientation to stratification literature." Part II con-
sists of critical analyses of eight important field
studies of social stratification in America, with spe-
cial attention to the validity of the methods employed
in each. Part III contains both theoretical and spe-
cific conclusions; there are, for instance, varying
stratification systems in various American commu-
nities, rather than a single all-embracing system, and
individuals have multiple statuses rather than a
single well-defined one. In a final evaluation of the
American stratification system, the authors discuss
four often-heard negative judgments, and present
four favorable factors, such as high vertical mobility,
and rectification of some of the inequities in life-
chances, but most of their conclusions remain quite
tentative.
4550. Davis, Kingsley, ed. Modern American
society; readings in the problems of order
and change [by] Kingsley Davis, Harry C. Brede-
meier [and] Marion J. Levy, Jr. New York, Rine-
hart, 1949. 734 p. 49-5542 HN57.D3
"All the materials in the book are designed to help
the student understand what gives order and dis-
order, unity and disunity, to our society as a whole."
The most convenient approach to this problem the
editors find "in the relation between our system of
values as it is expressed in the American ethos and
as it is reflected in the actual functioning of our
society." The selections from books and periodicals
pursue those themes under the following headings:
"The New Urban Environment", "The Economic
Framework", "Our Class System", "Race Versus
Democracy", "Education and Public Opinion",
"The Separation of Church and Society", "Recrea-
tion: Leisure and Escape", "Modern Marriage and
the Family".
4551. Ebersole, Luke E. American society, an
introductory analysis. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1955. 510 p. 55-7274 HN57.E2
Designed for courses in introductory sociology
and general social science, this is a much simpler
treatment than Williams' (no. 4558), with far less
employment of technical jargon. "It is hoped that
it will be useful also in courses in the field of
American studies." The main divisions are
"People," "Communities," "Classes," and "Institu-
tions." The first deals with population, immigra-
tion, and minorities. "Classes" discusses social
stratification, identifying six social classes in the
United States, and social mobility. Family, eco-
nomic, governmental, educational, and religious
institutions are described. A final chapter identi-
fies ten processes which have been changing our
society: invention, industrialization, urbanization,
centralization, specialization, bureaucratization,
stratification, mobility, secularization, and assimi-
lation.
4552. Miller, Delbert C, and William H. Form.
Industrial sociology; an introduction to the
sociology of work relations. New York, Harper,
1951. 896 p. 51-9367 HD6961.M55
A large scale textbook which "seeks to introduce
new research, integrate available materials, and pro-
vide a frame of reference for the study of work rela-
society / 593
tions." In the authors' view, industrial sociology
is a relatively new discipline based upon the recent
"rediscovery that working cannot be divorced from
living. It is now known that production, profit, and
industrial peace depend in large measure on the rec-
ognition that industry is a complex of interacting
groups and individuals." The largest sections of
the book are devoted to the social organization of
the work plant or factory, and the social adjustment
of the worker through successive periods of his
life, from the family to retirement. A final section
is devoted to more general considerations on the
interdependence of industry and community, and
of industry and society.
4553. Mills, Charles Wright. White collar; the
American middle classes. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1951. xx, 378 p.
51-5298 HT690.U6M5
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments and sources" (p. 355-363).
The "new middle class," made up of managers,
salaried professionals, salespeople, and office work-
ers, has grown up beside the older middle class of
farmers, businessmen, and free professionals, and
now outnumbers it by a substantial margin. This
untechnical and often rather arbitrary book has the
field to itself in seeking to characterize the outlook
and the dilemmas of its several worlds. The business
managers have become cogs in a business machinery
that has routinized greed. Bureaucracy and com-
mercialization are spreading through the profes-
sional world. In the great salesroom,"it is the sales-
men who have put their personalities up for sale."
In "the enormous file," the work has been "stand-
ardized for interchangeable, quickly replaceable
clerks."
4554. Odegard, Peter H. The American public
mind. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1930. 308 p. 30-27934 E169.1.O23
Bibliography: p. 280-291.
"Why do we behave like Americans? Whence
come our ideas and ideals?" A straightforward ac-
count of American public opinion as of its date, as
influenced by family, church and school, the press,
political and special interest propaganda, and the
popular arts. The author hardly answers his own
questions, but presents a lively view of surface
phenomena.
4555. Riesman, David. The lonely crowd; a study
of the changing American character. In
collaboration with Reuel Denney and Nathan
Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950.
xvii, 386 p. (Studies in national policy, 3)
50-9967 BF755.A5R5
4556. Riesman, David. Faces in the crowd; indi-
vidual studies in character and politics. In
collaboration with Nathan Glazer. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1952. 751 p. (Studies in
national policy, 4) 52—5357 BF818.R5
Highly original studies in American social psy-
chology, which attempt to isolate and illustrate some
recent changes of high significance. As the United
States has passed from a growing population to a
more stationary one with lower birth and death
rates, the older patterns of individual character, tra-
dition-directed or inner-directed, have increasingly
yielded to the other-directed pattern. This type,
whose conformity rests on "sensitive attention to the
expectations of contemporaries," pursues a fluctuat-
ing series of short-run goals and tends to live in
a world largely made up of interpersonal relations.
The habits of thought and action of the creators and
brokers of prestige receive wide imitation. Varying
attitudes in politics, work, and play are elaborated.
The sequel presents 20 individual portraits, based on
interviews some of which are presented in full.
They seek to answer: "what sort of person is this,
in terms of his character; how is his conformity
secured, what is his political style — that is, how does
he handle the political world as part of his total life-
orientation?"
4557. Warner, William Lloyd. Democracy in
Jonesville; a study in quality and inequality.
New York, Harper, 1949. xviii, 313 p.
49-10212 HN57.W3
A study of social classes and social mobility in a
small Illinois town [actually Morris, Grundy
County] used as a laboratory for studying the social
structure governing American capitalism. The em-
phasis is on the factors determining the rise and fall
of families in the social scale. These elements are
studied against the varying backgrounds of child-
hood, the mill, local associations and social clubs,
the churches, the Norwegians as a distinct group,
the high school, and party politics. The conclusion
is that the American Dream is one thing, and the
complexities of status another, but that without the
Dream social mobility would stiffen into rigidity.
4558. Williams, Robin M. American society; a
sociological interpretation. New York,
Knopf, 195 1. xiii, 545 p.
51-11055 HN57.W=;5
A pioneer attempt to obtain a systematic view of
the total American social structure, which applies
the basic concepts and approaches of sociology to
kinship and the family, to social stratification, and
to economic, political, educational and religious in-
stitutions. The results are cautiously and tentatively
431240—60-
-39
594 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
rather than dogmatically stated. Among the gen-
eral characteristics of social organization in the
United States are these: a relatively slight develop-
ment of stable groups of Gemeinschajt character, an
enormous proliferation of formally organized
special-interest associations, and an increasingly
strategic position of large-scale centralized organiza-
tions in the total structure. "Major value-orienta-
tions in America" are spelled out at length, from
" 'achievement' and 'success' " through "material
comfort" to "racism and related group-superiority
themes."
F. The Family
4559. Bossard, James H. S. The sociology of child
development. Rev. ed. New York, Harper,
1954. 788 p. _ 53-9411 HQ781.B67 1954
The chief emphasis of this book, is upon "the
social situations in which children live and grow
from infancy to maturity." While the primary in-
terest is in child behavior, the social context to which
it is related is regularly American. There are chap-
ters on interaction among the siblings, the bilingual
child, the role of the guest, the child and the class
structure, growing out of the family, and children
who reject their parents. The final section presents
the changing status of childhood: in America chil-
dren "are viewed in terms of equality with other
members of the family and recognized as coequal
personalities in the emerging democracy of the
family."
4560. Calhoun, Arthur W. A social history of the
American family from colonial times to the
present. New York, Barnes & Noble, 1945. 3 v.
in 1. 45~3936 HQ535.C23
"Copyright, I9i7[— 19] • • • Reprinted 1945."
Bibliography at end of each volume.
Contents. — 1. Colonial period. — 2. From inde-
pendence through the Civil War. — 3. Since the Civil
War.
Remains, after four decades, considerably the most
detailed historical presentation of sex and family
life in the United States. In substance it consists
of extracts from contemporary sources strung to-
gether on a loose framework by a conventional and
not too penetrating commentary. Since these sub-
jects were discussed by our fathers in tones usually
alarmist, and lapses from the writers' standards were
noted rather than the contrary, the book is often a
better guide to past opinion than to past fact.
4561. Cavan, Ruth (Shonle) The American fam-
ily. New York, Crowell, 1953. 658 p.
53-5389 HQ535.C33
"Supersedes the author's . . . The Family
[1942J."
A college text written from the socio-psychologi-
cal point of view, and including charts and other
quantitative matter. Part I presents the general
issues and considers the family in relation to rural
life, migration, and urbanism. Part II studies the
family in relation to social classes and social mobility.
Part III contains a detailed psychological treatment
from adolescence to old age, with special attention to
dating, sex expression, adjustment in marriage, and
divorce. The author concludes that the process of
family disintegration has passed its climax, and that
a new reintegration of the family with other institu-
tions has begun to take place.
4562. Furnas, Joseph C. How America lives.
New York, Holt, 1941. 372 p.
41—51597 HN57.F87
First published in the Ladies Home Journal.
The patterns of life and the budgets of 16 Ameri-
can families, ranging from wealthy industrialists to
persons on relief or colored sharecroppers in Missis-
sippi. The treatment is marked by journalistic
slickness and some optimism, but is nevertheless a
very concrete sampling of actual family life in its
economic context just before World War II. There
are review chapters on American housekeeping, diet,
fashion, "beauty culture," housing, and home
decoration.
4563. Groves, Ernest R. The American woman;
the feminine side of a masculine civilization.
Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Emerson Books, 1944.
465 p. 44-2372 HQ1410.G73 1944
Regarding woman, from the scant attention she
gets in American historical writing, as the forgotten
sex, the author traces woman's advance in status in a
setting of masculine dominance. He aims to fol-
low the general movement that brought the average
woman closer to the privileges and resources of men,
rather than to catalogue the noted women of the
past. This has come about in two related currents:
an increasing encroachment upon masculine special
privileges, led by aggressive and gifted women lead-
society / 595
ers, and the momentum of a material and intellectual
progress that is making the equality of men and
women more natural.
4564. Hollingshead, August de B. Elmtown's
youth, the impact of social classes on adoles-
cents. New York, Wiley, 1949. 480 p.
49-3279 HQ796.H65
"This study is one of a series made under the aus-
pices of the Committee on Human Development of
the University of Chicago."
A study of 735 adolescent boys and girls in a
Middle Western Corn Belt community, in order to
analyze the way its social system organizes and con-
trols the social behavior of young people reared in
it. The social structure is graded into five classes,
and the different attitudes and behavior which each
class displays are traced in high school life, in
cliques and dates, religion, jobs, and recreation.
The "withdrawees" who have left school before
completing its work, are separately studied. The
conclusion indicates that our class system, which
revolves about the gospel of success and escapes
legal regulation because it is extra-legal, "is far more
vital as a social force in our society than the
American creed."
4665. Kinsey, Alfred C. Sexual behavior in the
human male [by] Alfred C. Kinsey, Wardell
B. Pomeroy [and] Clyde E. Martin. Philadelphia,
Saunders, 1948. xv, 804 p.
48-5195 HQ18.U5K5
"Based on surveys made by members of the staff
of Indiana University, and supported by the Na-
tional Research Council's Committee for Research
on Problems of Sex by means of funds contributed
by the Medical Division of the Rockefeller
Foundation."
Bibliography: p. 766-787.
4566. Kinsey, Alfred C, and others. Sexual be-
havior in the human female, by the staff of
the Institute for Sex Research, Indiana University.
Philadelphia, Saunders, 1953. xxx, 842 p.
53-11127 HQ18.U516
Bibliography: p. 763-810.
Formally, Dr. Kinsey and his associates' statistical
inquiry into the overt sexual activity of a sample
of the whole American population is a study in
human biology and so ineligible for this bibliog-
raphy. Actually it furnishes much the largest body
of concrete evidence concerning actual patterns of
sex behavior at various social levels, in various en-
vironments, and at different ages, and is therefore
a contribution to the description of American
society.
4567. Kyrk, Hazel. The family in the American
economy. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1953. xvii, 407 p. 53-12266 HQ535.K9
Bibliography: p. 395-398.
The family is also an economic unit, and this book
analyzes the economic position of American families
in terms of incomes, prices, and standards of living.
Families are regarded, not as fixed units, but as
groups of individuals living through life-spans dur-
ing which they will have differing economic char-
acteristics. Among the subjects discussed are the
components of family income, contributors and
claimants to such income, amount and adequacy of
family incomes, provision for the future through
saving and insurance, the economic position of
homekeeping women, the cost of living, and the
standard of living.
4568. Landis, Paul H. Adolescence and youth;
the process of maturing. 2d ed. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1952. 461 p.
52-6542 HQ796.L27 1952
A study of the gap between childhood and adult-
hood which emphasizes "the infringement of the
social processes on the developing organism" and
treats adolescence "as a dynamic process which leads
the growing organism through a molding series
of social experiences," all in an American context.
After more general considerations concerning the
personality-forming process, the author analyzes
what he takes to be the three critical phases of adjust-
ment: attaining moral maturity, the transition to
marital adulthood, and the struggle for economic
adulthood. The concluding part studies the school
as the major agency of social adjustment. The
volume is liberally supplied with tables, graphs, and
diagrams. The same author's Understanding Teen-
Agers (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1955.
246 p.) presents much the same material in abbre-
viated and more readable form.
4569. Lumpkin, Katharine Du Pre, and Dorothy
(Wolff) Douglas. Child workers in Amer-
ica. New York, McBride, 1937. 321 p.
37-27309 HD6250.U3L85
Bibliography: p. 307-313.
The Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938 effected
a major improvement in the field of child labor, and
by the 1950's its worst abuses had largely disap-
peared. The present work retains historical value
as a summary of a problem of long standing just
before the turn of the tide, when much effort ex-
pended on reform seemed strangely futile. The
nature of the constant pressures toward child exploi-
tation, as well as the attitudes which made it pos-
sible, are here rather bitterly described together
596 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
with efforts at amelioration through an entire
century.
4570. Mudd, Emily (Hartshorne) The practice of
marriage counseling. New York, Associa-
tion Press, 1951. xix, 336 p.
A5 1-7952 HQ728.M83
Bibliography: p. 231-249.
Marriage counseling is a development of the last
quarter-century which has enlisted a variety of pro-
fessional skill channeled through a growing number
of national and local organizations. The author,
who has been director of the Marriage Council of
Philadelphia since its establishment in 1932, dis-
cusses the objectives of these services, and gives
sample cases, including both those in which counsel-
ing has helped and those in which it has failed.
Appendix B is a series of reports from functioning
services on their operations.
4571. Sirjamaki, John. The American family in
the twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1953. 227 p. (The Library of
Congress series in American civilization)
53-6035 HQ535.S5
A condensed, integrated, and lucid essay which
interprets the findings of social scientists for general
readers. The present American family "is a small
nuclear family centered largely upon its immediate
members, settled in independent residence, disso-
ciated from all but closely connected relatives, and
lasting only through the adult years of its spouses
and often not even so long." Its isolation from its
larger kin group makes it more easily broken, but
spouses work harder at their marriages because they
know they have to. The concern for individualiza-
tion of family members is large; wives have been
brought near to legal parity, and children endowed
with privileges. It is the family that best serves
Americans' needs, and probably the one they want.
4572. Truxal, Andrew G., and Francis E. Merrill.
Marriage and the family in American cul-
ture. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1953. 587 p.
53-10245 HQ536.T68
A standard college text in which the presentation
of the family from the biological, psychological, and
social aspects is regularly related to American con-
ditions of today. The present edition has been ex-
tensively revised to include new materials derived
from the scientific study of courtship and of per-
sonality. The sixth and final part, "The Dynamics
of the Family," is largely concerned with the disin-
tegrative tendencies of recent years, against which
positive measures to stabilize and reorganize the
family, such as marriage counseling and family life
agencies, have been relatively ineffective.
4573. Wattenberg, William W. The adolescent
years. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1955.
510 p. 55-2109 HQ796.W32
A textbook which surveys the physical and psy-
chological phenomena of adolescence in their social
setting — ostensibly in that of Western Culture but
practically in that of the United States. The author
aims to help the reader "deal more understandingly
with young people and with the adolescent in him-
self and in every adult he knows." "Problem areas"
isolated in the third section include sex, social rela-
tionships, ideals, concepts of self, power and mastery,
vocational choices, and personality troubles. It re-
lies less on quantitative and more on case history
materials than Landis (no. 4568).
G. Communities: General
4574. Ferguson, Charles W. Fifty million broth-
ers; a panorama of American lodges and
clubs. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1937. 3^9 P-
37-1762 HS61.F4
"Selected list of sources": p. 361-380.
Popular and very sketchy, but the only book
which brings into one view such diverse associational
phenomena as the Masons, college fraternities, the
Knights of Pythias, women's clubs, the "Fascist
shirts" of the 1930's, chambers of commerce, Negro
lodges, the D. A. R., the Elks, the Eastern Star, and
many others. The author believes that these clubs
and secret orders "have grown and multiplied simply
because they provided the only natural basis for
normal group life in a country historically deprived
of it."
4575. Hillman, Arthur. Community organiza-
tion and planning. New York, Macmillan,
1950. xviii, 378 p. 50-5240 HV40.H62
"The methods by which communities deliberately
change their structure and way of life is the theme
of this book." The planning of communities should
develop as a rational process and a conscious art.
society / 597
The major goal of planning is to substitute orderly
processes of problem-solving for the remnants of
anarchy in modern societies. Organized action in
community life may proceed through community
centers and community councils. Functional areas
in which community planning takes place include
services to children and youth, social work, recrea-
tion programs, and race-relations programs. The
relationship between policymaking and administra-
tion, and between national and local planning, are
considered.
4576. Kinneman, John A. The community in
American society. New York, Crofts, 1947.
450 p. 47-5625 HM131.K5
Aims to arrive at the common elements in both
rural and urban communities, and to show their in-
terrelations and interdependence. Special attention
is given to the relatively unexplored field of small but
independent metropolitan centers, of from 25,000
to 100,000 population. Community is regarded as
essentially a socio-psychic phenomenon, an expres-
sion of consciousness of kind or attachments to cer-
tain basic interests, and provides the web of
consciousness by which institutions function. As
criteria of community relationships, newspaper cir-
culation and hospitalization are given special consid-
eration. Later chapters discuss leadership, change,
conflict, and crises in the community.
4577. Lundberg, George A., Mirra Komarovsky,
and Mary Alice Mclnerny. Leisure: a sub-
urban study. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1934. 396 p. 34-27255 HN79.N4L9
"Selected bibliography": p. [387]— 389.
A study of the employment of leisure time in
Westchester County, N. Y, a suburban area which
enjoys "a higher plane of living than has hitherto
[1934] been approached in any time or place."
2,460 individuals supplied diaries covering some
4,460 days, from which it appeared that the average
leisure hours per diem for the entire group was 7.4.
The exact time spent by various classes in various
activities is worked out: the average was 108 minutes
for eating, 90 for visiting, 57 for reading, etc. The
authors do not find that suburbia makes a very con-
structive use of recreation, and wish local govern-
ment to provide facilities, opportunities, and leader-
ship for more rewarding activities.
4578. Marden, Charles F. Rotary and its brothers;
an analysis and interpretation of the men's
service club. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1935. 178 p. 35-22591 HF5001.A2M3 1935a
This Columbia dissertation studies the luncheon
clubs of business executives and professional men
which call themselves service clubs and are joined
in loose national or international federations —
Rotary, Kiwanis, Lions' Clubs, etc. Their welfare
activities are found to be of limited scope, and per-
sonal and sporadic in nature, while little concrete
evidence has appeared for their claim to be active
in elevating the ethical level of business enterprise.
The clubs are interpreted as new bases of associa-
tion, sought after the decline of traditional ones,
among the professional and business class, and espe-
cially as a means of dignifying the dominant posi-
tion of the business class.
H. Communities: Rural
4579. Baker, Oliver E., Ralph Borsodi, and Mil-
burn L. Wilson. Agriculture in modern life.
New York, Harper, 1939. 303 p.
39-27962 HD1761.B25
Preface signed: Baker Brownell, supervising
editor.
This cooperative work grew out of a conference
on distributive society and the possibilities of decen-
tralization held at Northwestern University in 1938.
Mr. Baker, whose section on "Our Rural People" is
much the largest, is concerned with rural poverty,
the drift of farm youth and wealth to the cities, and
the difference between rural and urban birth rates.
Mr. Borsodi offers "A Plan for Rural Life," and Mr.
Wilson discusses "Science and Folklore in Rural
Life." All are concerned with the salvage of the
independent farm as a natural and self-sufficient
way of life stable enough "to balance against the
pressures of insecurity and dependency and statism
and confusion that make this age so troubled."
4580. Burchfield, Laverne. Our rural communi-
ties, a guidebook to published materials on
rural problems. Chicago, Public Administration
Service, 1947. 201 p. 47-3889 HT421.B78
"General publications on rural affairs": p. 199-
201.
Aims to furnish those "interested in the problems
of rural America with brief factual statements about
major areas of rural life and annotated bibliographies
598 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
where they may gather additional information.
Specialists will find somewhat elementary the state-
ments in sections concerned with their own special-
ties." Each chapter consists, after the initial
"statement," of a summary of the literature under
subtopics, followed by a list of precise references in
alphabetical order. The main topics include schools,
the Agricultural Extension Service, library service,
the church, medical care and health services, welfare
services, housing, recreation, and community
organization.
4581. Kolb, John H., and Edmund de S. Brunner.
A study of rural society. 4th ed. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin [1952] 532 p.
52-10515 HT421.K62 1952
A textbook on contemporary American rural
society woven about the theme of the growing inter-
dependence in modern society — country and town,
agriculture and industry, American and other
societies. It is organized into four main parts, on
population, the agrarian basis of rural society, group
relations, and social institutions — established and
recognized ways of getting things done. There
are numerous tables, graphs, charts, and diagrams.
Chapters are devoted to rural communities, rural
interest groups and classes, and rural-urban relation-
ships. Foreign instances are introduced for com-
parison.
4582. Nelson, Lowry. American farm life. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1954.
192 p. (The Library of Congress series in Ameri-
can civilization) 54~9332 HN57.N46
A characterization of farm life in the United
States for foreigners and city-dwellers, which em-
phasizes the increasing approximation of rural to
urban living, and the consequent interdependence
of these unequal segments of society. "The tech-
nological frontier" is the principal element of
change: the permeation of farm life by machinery,
agricultural research, and improved farm manage-
ment, has profoundly affected rural life in its politi-
cal, economic, and social aspects, and turned the
"new farmer" into a kind of suburbanite.
4583. Rural life in the United States, by Carl C.
Taylor [and others] New York, Knopf,
1949. xviii, 549, xii p. 49-7411 HT421.R8
Bibliography: p. 535-549.
Eight members of the U. S. Bureau of Agricul-
tural Economics have combined to write a textbook
in general rural sociology which deals with all im-
portant structural and functional aspects of rural
society, all major geographic areas of the country,
and all major problems of rural life. Part 2, on
rural organization, has separate treatments of the
home and family, education, religion, local govern-
ment, health, welfare, and recreation and art. Part
3, on rural people, deals with population, occupa-
tional patterns, standards of living, and the special
problems of landowners, tenants, and laborers.
"Part 4 is unique in a book on rural sociology be-
cause it discusses seven different type-farming areas
of the United States as if each were a cultural
region," and "could well be considered a start toward
the development of the cultural anthropology of
American rural life."
4584. Smith, Thomas Lynn. The sociology of
rural life. 3d ed. New York, Harper, 1953.
680 p. 53-5573 HT421.S55 1953
Attempts to assemble in a single volume, suitable
for college sophomores, the essential facts and basic
principles derived from the application of scientific
method in the study of rural social relationships,
with nearly all the subject matter drawn from the
United States. The main topics are the rural popu-
lation, rural social organization, and social processes
in rural society. The processes analyzed and il-
lustrated are competition and conflict, cooperation,
accommodation, assimilation, acculturation, and
social mobility. The most significant new factor is
the improvement of communications by the tele-
phone, telegraph, radio, television, automobile, and
good roads, so that rural people are now in constant
contact with one another and with townsfolk and
city people, and the isolation and lagging change of
rural communities are largely overcome. Abun-
dandy illustrated with maps, photographs, charts,
and tables.
4585. [Withers, Carl] Plainville, U. S. A. [by]
James West [pseud.] New York, Columbia
University Press, 1945. xv, 238 p.
A45-1863 HN57.W58
A cultural-anthropology approach to the life of
a small and very rural Missouri town, which pre-
serves a real sense of the human beings dealt with,
and avoids both condescension and partisanship.
The prevailing background is the persistent poverty
which haunts such communities. The author's
major interest is in discriminating the social classes
and working out their attitudes toward each other.
A chapter, "From Cradle to Grave," works out the
typical life pattern of average Plainville people.
There is much attention to the changes brought
about by urban industrialism, and its draining off
of Plainville's young people.
society / 599
I. Communities: Urban
4586. Carr, Lowell Juilliard, and James Edson
Stermer. Willow Run; a study of indus-
trialization and cultural inadequacy. New York,
Harper, 1952. xxii, 406 p.
51-11892 HN80.W5C3
Bibliography: p. 395-399.
In a mushrooming wartime community between
Detroit and Ann Arbor the new Ford bomber plant
produced 8,685 planes and an acute housing crisis.
The authors seek to place responsibility for the latter,
after thoroughly documenting the social conse-
quences of deficient housing, and reject the devil
theory, which blames the Ford Company, and the
individual incompetence theory. Their solution
blames gaps or blind spots in our industrial culture
itself, such as the lack of any accepted method for
defining a social community crisis, and of any ac-
cepted procedures for "structuring overall coopera-
tion" in such a crisis. In short, "we have not yet
learned how to live with social change."
4587. Hallenbeck, Wilbur C. American urban
communities. New York, Harper, 195 1.
617 p. 51-11920 HT123.H3
A rounded text on American urban sociology
which has many quantitative illustrations but keeps
them subordinate to the general exposition of the
subject. It seeks to demonstrate that cities are the
focal points in the dynamics of American society,
and that rapid change demands a high degree of
adaptability, which cities have failed to attain.
Their hope lies in a more comprehensive planning,
scientific and democratic in basis and purpose.
"The Form and Structure of Cities," "Organized
Life in Cities," and "Patterns of Urban Structure"
form the major divisions of the text.
4588. Harrison, Shelby Millard. Social conditions
in an American city; a summary of the find-
ings of the Springfield survey. New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1920. 439 p.
20-21201 HN80.S7S7
A condensation of one of the best-known ex-
amples of the older type of social survey, that of the
capital of Illinois conducted in 1914 under the direc-
tion of the Department of Surveys and Exhibits,
Russell Sage Foundation. Separate reports in nine
fields — public schools, care of mental defectives, in-
sane and alcoholics, recreation, housing, charities,
industrial conditions, public health, the correctional
system, and city and county administration — were
published from 1914; these were eventually collected
in two volumes, and with the present one as a third,
published as The Springfield Survey (New York,
Russell Sage Foundation, 1918-20. 3 v.). The age
of the materials constitute them a suggestive guide
to the spheres in which extraordinary improvement
has taken place in the last four decades, and to those
other spheres in which comparatively little progress
can be assumed.
4589. Havighurst, Robert J., and Hugh Gerthon
Morgan. The social history of a war-boom
community. New York, Longmans, Green, 195 1.
xix, 356 p. 51-11494 HN80.S545H3
The authors tell what happened to the people and
institutions of Seneca, 111., a small town on the Illi-
nois River, when it acquired a shipyard for LST
vessels and saw its residents increase from 1,235 to
6,600 between 1942 and 1944. They hope thereby
to study the adaptation of social institutions to rapid
social change, the adaptation of people to new con-
ditions of living, and the influence of a crisis on the
long-time history of a community, and to record one
significant bit of American life during wartime.
Relations between old and new residents were kept
to a minimum, temporary prosperity brought no
change in the local business structure, and Seneca
emerged from the war boom relatively unchanged,
with the familiar basic characteristics of a mid-
western rural town.
4590. Hayner, Norman S. Hotel life. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1936. 195 p. ) 36-754° TX911.H37
"Selected bibliography": p. [ 183]— 185.
Concerned with hotel life in general, but the great
majority of the examples are American. Problems
of urban culture are found in an accentuated form
in the hotel. Its population is an aggregation of
displaced individual units. Contacts are usually
anonymous and casual. "The detachment, free-
dom, loneliness, and release from restraints that
mark the hotel population are only to a lesser
degree characteristic of modern life as a whole."
4591. Klein, Philip. A social study of Pittsburgh;
community problems and services of Alle-
gheny County, by Philip Klein and collaborators.
New York, Published for the Social Study of Pitts-
burgh and Allegheny County by Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1938. xxvi, 958 p.
38-3294 HN80.P6K5
600 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A study made in 1934-36, under the auspices of
the Citizens' Committee and financed by the Buhl
Foundation of Pittsburgh, in order to render social
services and agencies more effective. As the sub-
title indicates, it is in two parts: the first (to page
347) describes social and economic conditions in city
and county, building on the famous prior survey of
1907-8; while the second and larger investigates the
state of social and health services. Their cost and
support, planning and coordination, and personnel
and facilities for training are studied. The services
are then reviewed by type. The study made prac-
tical recommendations in each sphere, some of which
had been made effective by the time of publication.
4592. Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd.
Middletown, a study in contemporary
American culture. Foreword by Clark Wissler.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 550 p.
29-26177 HN57.L8
Issued also as thesis (Ph.D.) Columbia University.
"The Institute of Social and Religious Research
. . . financed the investigation." — Preface.
4593. Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd.
Middletown in transition; a study in cultural
conflicts. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937.
xviii, 604 p. 37-27243 HN57.L84
The pioneer and classic "attempt to deal with a
sample American community after the manner of
social anthropology." A small middle western city
of 35,000 population was chosen (it is now common
knowledge that Middletown is Muncie, Indiana); in
ten years it had increased to 50,000. The investiga-
tion for the first volume was carried out in 1924-25,
and that for the sequel in 1935-36. The Lynds ar-
rived at a six-fold analysis of social data, the first,
dominant and largely determinant of the others be-
ing "Getting a Living." This was also found to be
the field most subject to rapid change. The other
heads are: "Making a Home," "Training the
Young," "Using Leisure," "Engaging in Religious
Practices," and "Engaging in Community Activi-
ties." The second most obvious area of rapid
change was leisure, where traditional recreations
were much reduced by the automobile, cinema, and
radio. Middletown in Transition reports on the
effects of a decade of boom followed by depression.
For the most part, these had but continued the trends
clearly perceptible in 1925. The volume concludes
with a reconstruction of "the Middletown Spirit"
dominated by the business mentality, and a medita-
tion on its ineffectiveness in grappling with the real
problems of the community.
4594. Peterson, Elmer T., ed. Cities are abnormal.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1946. xvi, 263 p. 46-4670 HT123.P45
Contents. — Cities are abnormal, by E. T. Peter-
son.— The ecology of city and country, by P. B.
Sears. — It was not always so, by W. S. Thompson. —
What we are and what we may become, by P. L.
Vogt. — Biological truths and public health, by Jona-
than Forman. — An architect protests, by H. H.
Kamphoefner. — Social man and his community,
by J. J. Rhyne. — Economic verities by S. C.
McConahey. — Government of the people, by H. C.
Nixon. — To clear the dross, by Louis Bromfield. —
A farm reporter looks ahead, by Ladd Haystead. —
The atomic threat, by W. S. Thompson. — Moral and
cultural aspects of decentralization, by R. L.
Smith. — No blueprint for Utopia, by E. T. Peterson.
From various angles and by various hands, the
case for "an orderly decentralization under a diverse
pattern" for America is presented. There is no vir-
tue in bigness, or in efficiency when it damages the
human mechanism, or in relying upon government
for all positive action, or in increasing interde-
pendence, which is simply "dependence multiplied
by ten or ten thousand." The clinching argument
is that an urban manpower surplus becomes para-
sitical, while no such surplus develops on self-
sufficient farms.
4595. Thorndike, Edward L. Your city. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. 204 p.
39-27415 HT123.T5
"Data and sources": p. 172-187.
This unique book records the results of a three-
year statistical study of 310 American cities. Many
of the statistics used come from the census of 1930,
a year of severe depression. Over a million separate
items were handled in constructing a calculus for
rating the general goodness of life in different cities.
While the results heavily favor suburban cities such
as Pasadena, Evanston, and Montclair, and equally
disfavor Southern cities with their depressed Negro
populations, there are yet significant differences
when these classes are both excluded. "At least four-
fifths of the difference of cities in goodness is caused
by the personal qualities of the citizens and the
amount of their incomes."
4596. Voss, Joseph Ellis. Summer resort: an eco-
logical analysis of a satellite community.
Philadelphia, 1941. 152 p.
A4 1-4069 HN80.O3V6
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania,
1941.
Bibliography: p. 140-144.
Ocean City, N. J., was founded to serve as a Sum-
mer Methodist Camp Meeting in 1880, went through
SOCIETY / 60 1
a frenzied boom and crash during the 1920's and is
now "a relatively conservative and efficient seaside re-
sort community." "During the winter months,
there are more than two dwellings for every indi-
vidual in the community, while in the summer there
are more than two persons for every room on the
island." Mr. Voss studies the business of recrea-
tion, "the family resort family," and the nature of
government, education, and cultural relations in this
hybrid urban-rural community dependent for its
existence upon seasonal migrations from other
communities.
4597. Waterman, Willoughby Cyrus. Prostitu-
tion and its repression in New York City,
1900-1931. New York, Columbia University Press,
1932. 164 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of
Political Science. Studies in history, economics and
public law, no. 352)
32-18865 HQ146.N7W35 1932a
H31.C7, no. 352
"Bibliography of sources quoted": p. 160-162.
One of the very few objective and documented
studies in this obscure field. It reviews the several
measures strengthening the confusing and over-
lapping laws applicable to prostitution. In survey-
ing action by the police and the courts, attention is
drawn to the creation of a headquarters Vice Squad
in 1924, and improvements in the technique of in-
vestigation. Privately organized groups, such as the
Committee of Fifteen and of Fourteen, operated on
public opinion throughout the period. The results
are seen as a probable reduction in the overall quan-
tity, the elimination of soliciting and "parlor
houses," and a great shift in methods and loci.
4598. Whyte, William F. Street corner society;
the social structure of an Italian slum. Enl.
[2d] ed. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1955. xxii, 366 p.
. 55-5 J52 HV6439.U5W5 1955
"Cornerville" in "Eastern City" has been an
Italian neighborhood since 1915, and the younger
generation of its "little guys" divide into corner
boys, who center their social activities upon par-
ticular street corners, with their adjoining barber-
shops, lunchrooms, poolrooms, or clubrooms, and
college boys, a small group of young men who have
risen above corner-boy level through higher edu-
cation. The author lived with Doc and his gang
of Nortons, and with Chick and his Italian Com-
munity Club, long and intimately enough to
understand both groups from the inside, and he has
traced the relationships of both groups to the
gambling, racketeering, and the politics of the area.
His appendix gives a lively picture of the investi-
gator's experiences and dilemmas.
4599. Zorbaugh, Harvey Warren. Gold coast and
slum; a sociological study of Chicago's Near
North Side. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1929. xv, 287 p. 29-12607 F548.5.Z89
A sociological analysis of Chicago's "Lower
North Side" which presents urban contrasts, urban
disintegration, and the pathology of urban life in
singularly concentrated and dramatic form. In this
area the physical distances and the social distances
do not coincide: people who live side by side cannot
become neighbors. The life of the apartment-dwell-
ers of the Gold Coast is set against "the world of
furnished rooms" which lies next to it.
J. City Planning; Housing
4600. Abrams, Charles. The future of housing.
New York, Harper, 1946. xix, 428 p.
46-8659 HD7293.A62
Bibliography: p. 415-419.
A searching individual study of the housing prob-
lem which finds the abuses of the home-building
industry responsible for shoddy city planning, poor
construction, inadequate repairs, recurrent housing
shortages, and the slum problem. Neither wage
increases nor shelter cost reduction will resolve the
dilemma of the low-income family, which calls for
public action. A detailed criticism is offered of
Federal housing measures and administration, and
ten aims set up for a national housing program,
including a revitalized industry, urban redevelop-
431240—60 40
ment, adequate rental housing, a sound mortgage
system, and stabilization of the real estate pattern.
4601. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in the wilder-
ness; the first century of urban life in Amer-
ica, 1625-1742. [2d ed.] New York, Knopf,
1955. 500 p. 55-8593 E191.B75 1955
Bibliography: p. 483-486.
4602. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in revolt; urban
life in America, 1743-1776. New York,
Knopf, 1955. xiii, 433, xxi p. 55-7399 E162.B85
"Bibliographical note": p. 427-^34 ].
Five representative towns — Boston, Newport,
New York, Philadelphia, and Charleston — are se-
602 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lected, and 1742 made the terminus "because in
many respects it seems definitely to mark the end
of an era in colonial town life." Colony records, and
municipal records when available, are ransacked in
order to present a detailed picture of development
along four lines: physical aspects, economic life,
urban problems, and social life. The author be-
lieves that colonial cities, although never holding
more than 10 percent of the total population, "exer-
cised a far more important influence on the life of
early America than historians have previously
recognized."
The sequel traces, through an eventful 33-year
period, the "astonishing expansion" of the five
cities in population and municipal services. In the
same years, their inhabitants "discarded forever their
17th-century traditions and fatefully and irrevocably
accepted the symbols and ways of modernity." He
is not concerned to tell the story of the movement
for independence, but rather to illustrate the enlight-
enment of the public mind, through which "decades
before independence the cities became the birthplace
of American nationality."
4603. Burton, Hal. The city fights back; a nation-
wide survey of what cities are doing to keep
pace with traffic, zoning, shifting population, smoke,
smog, and other problems. Narrated and edited by
Hal Burton from material developed by the Central
Business District Council of the Urban Land Insti-
tute. New York, Citadel Press, 1954. 318 p.
54-9343 NA9030.B95
Bibliography: p. 313-318.
The Central Business District Council of the
Urban Land Institute has been organized to offer
information and guidance to any community which
seeks to rehabilitate its own central business district.
This is one area where money and cooperation have
been readily forthcoming to implement planning,
and this book is able to present many successful pro-
grams to eliminate congestion and decay. The prize
example is Pittsburgh, where the 400 acres of the
Golden Triangle "have been taken apart and put
together again in the years just past."
4604. Churchill, Henry S. The city is the people.
New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1945.
186 p. 45-6336 NA9090.C5
A condensed presentation of city development, the
accumulation of urban disorder, and the case for city
planning on the widest scale. America has been
able to plan new towns, but has had no success in
the re-planning of existing cities, for "slum clear-
ance" programs disregard all collateral planning
problems. Physical and economic planning have
meaning only in reference to social objectives — "the
end is a livable city, suited to modern technologies of
living."
4605. Colean, Miles L. Renewing our cities.
New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1953.
181 p. 53-9616 NA9108.C6
A closely knit little book which organizes the
problems of American city structure and planning
under the concept of renewal. The essential prob-
lem, of assuring a continuity of renewal, "can be
solved only by devising means for preventing the ac-
cumulation of worn-out-parts and avoiding stagna-
tion within an otherwise dynamic urban structure."
Renewal is a distinct problem, considerably larger
than slum clearance, desirable as the latter may be.
Current strivings toward renewal in various cities are
described, and the essentials of an effective program
outlined.
4606. Gallion, Arthur B. The urban pattern; city
planning and design. In collaboration with
Simon Eisner. New York, Van Nostrand, 1950.
446 p. 50-13672 NA9030.G26 1950
Bibliography: p. 419-433.
"This book attempts a critical examination of the
processes by which cities are planned and built, ap-
praises some of the results, describes some of the de-
fects, and poses a few suggestions . . ." The first
part presents the evolution of the city pattern in
western civilization, and some European innova-
tions are described in the last part, but the central
bulk of the book is concerned with the problems of
city pattern and city planning in the United States.
Hope lies in the formulation of a Master Plan, to
provide a pattern for future development of each
metropolitan area in the United States. A wealth
of illustrations, diagrams as well as photographs,
assist in understanding the factors involved.
4607. Lewis, Harold MacLean. Planning the
modern city. New York, Wiley, 1949. 2 v.
49-7402 NA9030.L393
Based on The Planning of the Modern City,
by Nelson P. Lewis, first published in 19 16 (New
York, Wiley. 423 p.).
The most comprehensive manual of planning for
American cities, in which foreign instances are in-
troduced when found useful. The six principal ele-
ments of a city plan are identified as: (1) the trans-
portation system in and out of the city; (2) the
intra-urban transit system; (3) the street system; (4)
park and recreation facilities; (5) the location of pub-
lic buildings; (6) the pattern of land uses, effectuated
primarily through comprehensive zoning. Part 5 in
volume 2 considers such special problems as airports,
parking, and planning for the urban region, and the
SOCIETY / 603
final part is devoted to the legal, economic, and ad-
ministrative aspects of physical planning.
4608. Straus, Nathan. Two-thirds of a nation;
a housing program. New York, Knopf,
1952. xiii, 291, xvii p. 51-11991 HD7293.S77
Two-thirds of all the families in the United States
have incomes of less than $80 a week. The hard
core of the housing problem is the fact that "there
is practically no new housing produced by private
enterprise at a figure the average American family
can afford." "In America, millions of well-paid,
well-dressed families live in slums." This up-to-date
discussion analyzes the elements of housing costs,
criticizes FHA policies, and offers many construc-
tive suggestions on the individual and the civic levels
toward the reasonable goal of a comfortable home
for every American family.
4609. Tunnard, Christopher, and Henry Hope
Reed. American skyline; the growth and
form of our cities and towns. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1955. 302 p. 55-6553 HT123.T85
The "American townscape" has at all times re-
flected our people and history, and its patterns have
been molded by economic, social, and political forces.
The authors review this causal relationship through-
out American history and distinguish seven eras of
the American city pattern: colonial, to 1776; the
Young Republic, to 1825; romantic, to 1850; the
age of steam and iron, to 1880; the expanding city,
to 1910; the city of towers, to 1933; and the re-
gional city since 1933. There are numerous plans,
sketches, and photographs.
4610. Twentieth Century Fund. Housing Com-
mittee. American housing, problems and
prospects. The factual findings by Miles L. Colean.
The program by the Housing Committee. New
York, The Twentieth Century Fund, 1944. xxii,
466 p. 44-4203 HD9715.U52T9
Bibliography: p. 441-455.
Results of an over-all survey of the housing prob-
lem in the United States, the first of its kind and
still unreplaced. The survey found that while tra-
ditional subdividing practices had created much
waste and disorder, and while traditional forms of
the house could receive simplified layout, composi-
tion and structure, the crux of the problem lay
elsewhere. "The disorganized and warring group
of organisms known euphemistically as the building
industry," and the intricate and disorganized nature
of the market result in a situation where the benefits
of mass production do not become available to the
consumer. Government intervention has avoided
basic solutions. "No halfhearted attack can clear
away the traditional obstacles in the housing in-
dustry." A detailed program of improvement on
all fronts is suggested.
461 1. U. S. President's Advisory Committee on
Government Housing Policies and Pro-
grams. Recommendations on Government housing
policies and programs, a report. Washington, 1953.
377 P: 53~63272 HD7293.A587
This Committee was established by Executive
Order on Sept. 12, 1953, divided its work among
five subcommittees, and reported three months later.
Its primary objective was to ensure "that every action
taken by Government in respect to housing should
be for the purpose of facilitating the operation of"
a strong, free, competitive economy. The numerous
specific recommendations have as their more general
objectives: (1) to provide special aids to local com-
munities and property owners in conserving and
renewing decaying neighborhoods; (2) to maintain
and improve the existing housing supply by loans
for modernization or repair; (3) to encourage pri-
vate building activity; (4) to facilitate the free
operation of the mortgage market by creating a
National Mortgage Marketing Corporation; (5) to
provide housing for low-income families, especially
those displaced by redevelopment programs; and
(6) to improve the organization of Federal housing
activities.
4612. Walker, Mabel L. Urban blight and slums;
economic and legal factors in their origin,
reclamation, and prevention. With special chapters
by Henry Wright, Ira S. Robbins [and others]
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1938. xvi,
442 p. (Harvard city planning studies, no. 12)
38-9281 HD7293.W3
"References": p. [429] -44 2.
The first major study of urban blight, the state
of deterioration which attacks residential areas and
leads to slums. Blighted areas are marked by high
but falling land values, congested but decreasing
population, obsolete and unfit housing on which
improvements and repairs are no longer being made,
a large proportion of abandoned buildings and
rental vacancies, etc. Typical blight situations in
American cities of various sizes are concretely
analyzed. The writer thinks that project planning,
zoning, and building regulation and taxing policies
on the part of the local government can do much
to help, but that the core of the problem is the
creation and rationalization of a large-scale home-
building industry which can produce houses which
the lower-income third of the urban population can
afford.
6c>4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4613. Woodbury, Coleman, ed. The future of
cities and urban redevelopment. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1953. xix, 764 p.
53—7679 NA9030.W64
This cooperative volume is one of the results of
the Urban Redevelopment Study carried out in
1948-51 under the auspices of Public Administra-
tion Clearing House and other organizations, and
directed by Coleman Woodbury. Urban redevelop-
ment is defined as "those policies, measures, and
activities that would do away with the major forms
of physical blight in cities and bring about changes
in urban structure and institutions contributing to
a favorable environment for a healthy civic, eco-
nomic, and social life for all urban dwellers." In
addition to more general materials, this volume con-
tains substantial sections on the relation of urban
redevelopment to industrial location, to the urbanite
(including results of the Attitude Survey), and to
local government organization in metropolitan areas.
Mr. Woodbury warns that progress in the field calls
for many more able leaders and a higher degree of
community subgroup morale than are present today.
A companion volume, Urban Redevelopment: Prob-
lems and Practices (Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1953. 525 p.) is of a more technical nature,
something of a manual for redevelopers.
K. Social Problems ; Social Work
4614. Addams, Jane. Forty years at Hull-House;
being "Twenty years at Hull-House" and
"The second twenty years at Hull-House." With
an afterword by Lillian D. Wald. New York, Mac-
millan, 1935. 462, 459 p.
35-27460 HV4196.C4H73
A classic which combines autobiography, an ac-
count of the establishment, operations, and growth
of the largest and most famous settlement house in
the United States, and the writer's concern with
various reform movements, particularly feminism
and pacifiism. In The Second Twenty Years, in-
deed, the latter aspects have come to displace the
settlement as the center of interest: Hull-House is
but the seat of a woman of international fame who
seeks to exert a national and an international in-
fluence on behalf of her favorite causes.
4615. Andrews, Frank Emerson. Philanthropic
giving. New York, Russell Sage Founda-
tion, 1950. 318 p. 50-10963 HV91.A7
The large extension of government services to the
less fortunate has not been paralleled by a corre-
sponding decline in private giving. Philanthropic
contributions fell to a low of $715,000 in 1933, but
have since climbed steadily, reaching a record figure
of over 4 billions in 1948. The present volume is
the result of an extensive fact-finding inquiry and
presents tabular and other information concerning
the sources and the destination of these vast sums.
Special attention is given to fund-raising enterprises,
religious agencies, education and the arts, the
financing of research, and the effect of tax laws.
Practical advice is given in chapters on avoiding
charity rackets, and on the interrelations of recipient
and donor.
4616. Andrews, Frank Emerson. Corporation
giving. New York, Russell Sage Founda-
tion, 1952. 361 p. 52-11787 HV95.A76
Corporation giving is a new factor in American
philanthropy, having risen to its recent level of more
than 200 million dollars only in 1944. The motives
are various, but that of tax savings is only one among
many, while the corporation's sense of duty to its
community is most frequently avowed. While only
5 percent of total philanthropic giving, corporation
giving is "actually a very significant factor, and
sometimes the chief reliance, in the areas in which
corporations are accustomed to give." On a survey
of 326 foundations, it was found that 44.3 percent
of their gifts were to welfare agencies, 26.6 percent
to health agencies, and 21.2 percent to education.
A new development is the corporation foundation,
nine of which were found in the survey sample.
4617. Barnes, Harry Elmer. Society in transition.
2d ed. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952.
878 p. 52-7578 HN15.B23 1952
A textbook which surveys American social prob-
lems within the frame of reference of "cultural lag,"
i. e., it regularly assumes that institutional develop-
ment has fallen behind technological, and that whole-
sale remodeling of social forms and habits is both
possible and desirable. The author states that he
has provided "the most complete survey of important
social problems to be found in any book in the field,"
as well as "illuminating historical perspectives on
each" of them. In a single volume he has assembled
a very large body of facts and representative
opinions in such problem areas as population, immi-
gration, race contacts, health, marriage, housing,
poverty, mental disease, and crime.
SOCIETY / 605
4618. Bruno, Frank J. Trends in social work as
reflected in the Proceedings of the National
Conference of Social Work, 1 874-1 946. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1948. xvi, 387 p.
48-2295 HV91.B75
In 1874 a handful of public charity officials from
four states met in New York and organized the Na-
tional Conference of Social Work; it has since grown
to a body of 7,000 members. The original concerns
were dependency, mental disease, delinquency, and
problems of health; these have been widened to in-
clude the whole field of the public and private social
services. The emergence of new issues and the
shifting of points of view are seen clearly in the sub-
jects before the Conference, as it turns to the protec-
tion of children, the organization of charity, or the
problem of transiency, and the whole serves as a
mirror of practical social thinking in the United
States over a 75-year period.
4619. Cuber, John F., Robert A. Harper, and Wil-
liam F. Kenkel. Problems of American so-
ciety: values in conflict. 3d ed. New York, Holt,
1956. 510 p. 56-6080 HN57.C8 1956
Among the many college textbooks on American
social problems, this one is unique in that it adopts
a clear-cut frame of reference, and employs it with
much consistency throughout. The authors adopt
the principle which they attribute to the late Richard
C. Fuller, "that social problems arise in a society
because ends, objectives, or values fostered by various
persons and groups run at cross-purposes." The
sociologist thereby adopts the role of interpreter of
values rather than that of value advocate. The op-
posing values leading to opposing attitudes are iden-
tified in 17 major fields, including mental health,
crime, adolescence, social class, race, populations, etc.
The authors question the value of the concept of
social disorganization as currendy used by sociolo-
gists, it being a value-judgment applied to social
change. Inasmuch as the authors regularly approve
"rational" as against traditional ("extra-logical")
values, their attitudes are seldom as neutral as they
imply.
4620. Dulles, Foster Rhea. The American Red
Cross, a history. New York, Harper, 1950.
554 P- 50-8717 HV577.D8
"Bibliographical notes": p. 540-543.
The new emphasis of the armed forces on cur-
rent history led to the establishment of a Historical
Division by the American Red Cross, and the pro-
duction of a series of monographs available at its
national headquarters. This work digests these
monographs into a unitary history for the general
reader, with special emphasis on the period since
1939. In origin an international organization for
war relief, the American Red Cross has always been
distinctive for the equal emphasis on relief of do-
mestic disasters on a large scale. Notwithstanding
its humanitarian purpose, the American Red Cross
has had a somewhat stormy and controversial
career, which aspect is not slighted here.
4621. Fink, Arthur E., Everett E. Wilson, and
Merrill B. Conover. The field of social work.
New York, Holt, 1955. 630 p.
55-6052 HV40.F5 1955
A comprehensive introduction to the subject.
The first two chapters dispose of public welfare and
social security, and the third presents a history of
the private and voluntary agencies which engage in
social work. The bulk of the book considers the
major categories of social work: family social work,
welfare services for children, school, psychiatric and
medical social work, the correctional services, and
social group work. Most of these chapters have spe-
cially contributed case histories appended. Con-
cluding chapters deal with methods of organizing
communities for all-round service, and with social
work as a profession with its own standards, organi-
zations, training, and literature.
4622. Fosdick, Raymond B. The story of the
Rockefeller Foundation. New York, Har-
per, 1952. 336 p. 51-11913 HV97.R6F6
The president of the Foundation from 1936 to
1948 summarizes its principles and achievements in
a history intended for laymen. Emphasis is placed
on the role of Frederick T. Gates, the former Bap-
tist Minister who served as the elder Rockefeller's
adviser in philanthropy from 1892. A national char-
ter was sought for the Foundation in 191 o, but a
storm of obloquy broke out, and a New York
incorporation was substituted in 1913. The four
associated trusts spent nearly $822,000,000 through
1950. During the first 15 years public health and
medical education were chiefly cultivated, but since
1928 a multitude of projects in the natural sciences,
agriculture, social science, and the humanities have
been subsidized. The personal philanthropies of
the younger Rockefeller, which reflect an extraor-
dinary range of cultivated interests in the spheres of
art, archaeology, city development, education, and
libraries, are modesdy but effectively described in
Mr. Fosdick 's John D. Rockefeller, Jr., A Portrait
(New York, Harper, 1956. 477 p.).
4623. Glenn, John M., Lilian Brandt, and F.
Emerson Andrews. Russell Sage Founda-
tion, 1907-1946. New York, Russell Sage Founda-
tion. 1947. 2 v. 47-12385 HV97.R8G55
606 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Early in 1907 Mrs. Margaret Olivia Sage estab-
lished the Russell Sage Foundation with a capital
of $10,000,000, the income to be applied "to the im-
provement of social and living conditions in the
United States." Its first Director, John M. Glenn
(1907-31), took a part largely advisory and super-
visory in the preparation of these volumes. Dur-
ing its first 41 years covered here, the Foundation
spent $21,000,000, $9,000,000 in grants and $12,-
000,000 in research and other direct work of its own.
The narrative covers the administrative development
of the Foundation, and its activities at various pe-
riods in such realms as recreation, child hygiene,
charity organization, remedial loans, industrial
studies, etc. Appendixes list all grants and all but
minor publications. The result is a detailed picture
of one of the most intelligently conducted and suc-
cessful foundations for social purposes.
4624. Kennedy, Albert J., and others. Social set-
tlements in New York City, their activities,
policies, and administration, by Albert J. Kennedy,
Kathryn Farra and associates. New York, Pub-
lished for the Welfare Council of New York City
by Columbia University Press, 1935. xix, 599 p.
(Studies of the Research Bureau of the Welfare
Council, no. 2) 35-3613 HV4196.N6K4
A survey begun in the winter of 1927-28 by the
Research Bureau of the Welfare Council of New
York City at the request of United Neighborhood
Houses. It covers the 80 settlements which existed
at the outset, although the number had been reduced
to 73 by the time of publication. Of these 2 were
in the Bronx, 15 in Brooklyn, and 63 in Manhattan,
especially on the Lower East Side. Chapters by sev-
eral hands cover types such as boys' or women's
clubs, functions such as music or the teaching of
English and citizenship, publications, membership,
and administration. Considerably the most de-
tailed body of information on this special form of
social work.
4625. Merrill, Francis E. Social problems on the
home front, a study of war-time influences.
New York, Harper, 1948. 258 p.
48-1366 HN57.M37
"Sponsored by the Committee on War Studies of
the Social Science Research Council."
A study, based on stadstics whenever available,
"of the role of World War II in initiating, intensi-
fying, or modifying certain social problems in the
United States." It is not found to be true that war
merely intensifies the maladjustments of peacetime
society; in bringing about virtually full employment
and a high collective morale, the War had many
unanticipated positive consequences, such as the rise
in the marriage and birth rates, the decline in the
number of suicides, and the decrease in prostitution.
Social problems might be transformed: "Never be-
fore were so many American families broken for so
long," leading to modifications in family roles not
easily assessed. "World War II had a differential
effect upon social problems, intensifying some, al-
leviating others, and creating still others in a
society made more dynamic by the pressures of total
war."
4626. Watson, Frank Dekker. The charity or-
ganization movement in the United States,
a study in American philanthropy. New York,
Macmillan, 1922. 560 p. 22-25386 HV91.W38
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania,
1911.
"Selected bibliography": p. 543-553.
Charitable societies were formed in the cities dur-
ing the second half of the 18th century, and one of
modern type, the New York Society for the Preven-
tion of Pauperism, appeared in 18 17. The panic of
1873 and the prolonged depression that followed
revealed unemployment as a national problem, and
demonstrated that the simple old ways of helping
the needy were almost incredibly wasteful and in-
efficient. Organizational experiments were made in
Germantown and Boston, but the Buffalo Charity
Organization Society launched at the end of 1877
was the first to achieve city-wide integration, and
was widely copied. In 1905 came the Field De-
partment of the Charity Organization Society of
New York City, followed four years later by the
Charity Organization Department of the Russell
Sage Foundation, which offered technical guidance
and training to all local societies.
4627. Weaver, William Wallace. Social problems.
New York, Sloane, 1951. 791 p.
51-12929 HN15.W4
A textbook for college courses which gives less
emphasis "to theoretical or systematic treatment of
problem situations in general," but concentrates on
the problems themselves in their American settings.
These are grouped under the headings of personal
crises (mental disorders, alcoholism, prostitution,
etc.), family discord (including illegitimacy),
group tensions, and insecurity (unemployment, old
age, war, etc.). The conclusion on public policy
is grave in oudook; in addition to the old obstacles
to progress, the parsimony of nature, the limitations
of human endowment, and cultural inertia, there
are now world ferment and the insatible demands
of modern war.
SOCIETY / 607
L. Dependency; Social Security
4628. Best, Harry. Blindness and the blind in the
United States. New York, Macmillan, 1934.
xxii, 714 p. _ 34-1429 HV1795.B4 1934
"The present work is a revision and expansion of
The Blind: Their Condition and the Wor\ Being
Done for Them in the United States [1919]." —
Foreword.
A complete treatise on this class of the handi-
capped, with abundant statistical tables. It covers
the causes of blindness and the possibilities of pre-
venting it; the general condition of the blind as to
numbers (about 100,000 in 1930), education, eco-
nomic condition, and legal treatment; the provision
of education for blind children; intellectual and
material provision for the adult blind; and interested
organizations. For all his objective data, the author
believes that "there is no such thing as a 'problem
of the blind;' there are as many problems as there
are blind persons to be dealt with."
4629. Best, Harry. Deafness and the deaf in the
United States, considered primarily in rela-
tion to those sometimes more or less erroneously
known as "deaf-mutes." New York, Macmillan,
1943. xix, 675 p. 43~I7?57 HV2545.B42 1943
"A revision and expansion of The Deaf: Their
Position in Society and the Provision for Their Edu-
cation in the United States, published in 1914." —
Foreword.
The distinction in the subtide is made because a
large proportion of the deaf can be taught more or
less perfect articulation. The book is a treatise as
comprehensive as its author's work on the blind.
It deals with the nature and causes of deafness, the
possibilities of its prevention, and the separate prob-
lem of the hard of hearing. The numbers of the
deaf (57,000 in 1930) and their economic condi-
tion and legal treatment are described. Organiza-
tions for and of the deaf are inventoried. The
education of deaf children is studied at length, with
chapters on the history and methods of such
training.
4630. Brown, Josephine Chapin. Public relief,
1 929-1 939. New York, Holt, 1940. xvii,
524 p. 40-34168 HV9I.B7
Bibliography: p. 477-511.
As a result of the depression of 1929, "a system of
local poor relief which had remained practically un-
changed for a century and a half was superseded not
only by new methods but by a new philosophy of
governmental responsibility for people in need."
This work, based largely on Government docu-
ments, reviews the old methods prevailing in 1929,
their makeshift extension followed by complete
breakdown in the years 1929-33, and their replace-
ment by the vast administrative machinery of the
Federal Emergency Relief Administration and, after
1935, the Works Progress Administration.
4631. Burns, Eveline M. The American social
security system. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1949. xviii, 460 p. 49-5180 HD7125.B86
The Social security act amend-
ments of 1950, an appendix. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 447-481 p.
HD7125.B86 Appx.
A treatise concerned primarily with income
security programs, which aim to assure a certain
minimum of income to some or all, especially
through cash payments. The Social Security Act of
1935, as amended in 1939, 1946, and 1950 (these last
changes are described in the separately published
Appendix) leaves much to local regulation, and ex-
cludes three programs created by separate federal
laws: Railroad Retirement, Railroad Unemploy-
ment Insurance, and Veterans' Security. The treat-
ment throughout is analytical, by type of insurance
or beneficiary. The conclusion is concerned with
suggestions toward a rational system; one has by no
means been achieved as yet.
4632. Creech, Margaret. Three centuries of poor
law administration; a study of legislation in
Rhode Island. Introductory note by Edith Abbott.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. xxii,
331 p. (Social service monographs, no. 24)
36-1 15 1 1 HV75.R43C7 1936
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) University of
Chicago.
Appendixes: 1. List of laws of Rhode Island relat-
ing to the poor. — 2. List of judicial decisions under
the poor law. — 3. Select documents relating to the
history of poor relief in the colonial period and the
late eighteenth century. — 4. Thirteen case histories,
1 644-1 724. — 5. Select documents relating to the his-
tory of poor relief in the modern period.
Chronologically the most extensive review of State
action in alleviation of poverty and dependency.
Rhode Island early took over the Elizabethan poor
law and provided for the appointment of overseers
of the poor. A major factor from the beginning was
608 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the efforts of towns to prevent the settlement of per-
sons who might become dependents, continued in
later times by the enforcement of rigid residential
requirements. As late as 1936 there remained "a
poor law with general principles unchanged, ad-
ministered by governmental units a few miles in
area, with limited taxing power and without pro-
visions for skilled service or for uniformity of
standards."
4633. Gagliardo, Domenico. American social in-
surance. Rev. ed. New York, Harper,
1955. 672 p. 55-6775 HD7125.G34 1955
Aims to give a reasonably full-length picture of
the American social insurance movement, complex
and undergoing change as it is. Describes what we
have, how we got it, and what the results have been,
in four major fields: old age, unemployment, occu-
pational disability, and health. Imperfections in the
system as it has evolved are pointed out. The au-
thor, a professor of economics at the University of
Kansas, includes 72 statistical tables.
4634. Gillin, John Lewis. Poverty and depend-
ency; their relief and prevention. 3d ed.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1937. 755 p.
37-2328 HV31.G4 1937
Bibliography: p. 679-735.
Remains the most systematic general treatment of
these related problems, which signify "lack of ad-
justment between the people composing a popula-
tion and the economic and social circumstances in
which they live." The enormous extent and expense
of the problems are estimated. The conditions,
physical and socio-economic, are analyzed and pro-
nounced removable. A historical section traces the
institutions and methods of dealing with dependents,
including Old World antecedents of American
practices. The classes of dependents, from the
aged to the unemployed, are separately considered.
Finally, preventive agencies and methods are de-
scribed, and a generally melioristic viewpoint and
program outlined.
4635. Industrial Relations Research Association.
The aged and society. Ed.: Milton Derber.
Champaign, 111., 1950. 237 p. (Its Publication
no. 5) 51-1473 HQ1060.I455
"The United States is experiencing the impact of
greater life expectancies more than any other na-
tion, for the typical life span of its population is the
longest ... If greater length of life, so avidly de-
sired by the individual, is not to become a curse to
society, effective accommodations must be made
to it." The fifteen papers in this "research sympo-
sium" are concerned with the statistical bases of the
problem, the older worker in industry, security in
old age, and a variety of problems of psychology and
adjustment, such as "The Politics of Age."
4636. Irwin, Robert B. As I saw it. New York,
American Foundation for the Blind, 1955.
205 p. 55-2408 HV1792.I7A3
Dr. Irwin (1 883-1 951) lost his sight at the age of
five, but went on to complete his education at Wash-
ington and Harvard Universities, and devoted his
life to bettering the condition of all handicapped
like himself. After his retirement as director of the
American Foundation for the Blind in 1949, he
planned a history of work for the blind to be called
Fifty Years of Progress. The portions completed at
the time of his death are published in this hand-
some memorial volume, and include concise ac-
counts of such developments as libraries for the
blind, the talking book, braille periodicals, and the
American Foundation for the Blind. Of special
interest, from the pen of this indomitably inde-
pendent man, are "Earning a Living without Bene-
fit of Sight" and "The Importance of Power to Move
about at Will," an appreciation of the "seeing eye"
dogs.
4637. Kessler, Henry H. Rehabilitation of the
physically handicapped. Rev. ti. e. 2d] ed.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1953. 275 p.
53-10047 HV3011.K42 1953
Rehabilitation, originally identified with the needs
of the war disabled, has been extended to the larger
requirements of the civilian, and has evolved from
the idea of isolated and fragmentary assistance to
"the modern concept of integrated and continuous
service." The author, who has served in rehabilita-
tion work since 19 19, reviews the types of disability,
defines the principles of rehabilitation, including
vocational guidance and training and selective
placement, summarizes recent legislation, and out-
lines a national program. The bibliography which
appeared on p. [253J-26i of the first edition (1947)
has been replaced in the second with a directory of
"Major Centers and Agencies for the Handicapped"
(p. [253]-258). A somewhat more journalistic ap-
proach to the subject will be found in the work of
two medical men attached to The New Yort^ Times:
Howard A. Rusk and Eugene J. Taylor, New Hope
for the Handicapped (New York, Harper, 1949.
231 p.).
4638. Riis, Jacob A. How the other half lives;
studies among the tenements of New York.
With illustrations chiefly from photographs taken
by the author. New York, Scribner, 1890. xv,
304 p. 4-11775 HV4046.N6R55
A classic of social reporting, which so effectively
thrust under genteel American noses the state of the
SOCIETY / 609
tenements and the slum-dwellers of lower Manhat-
tan that the issue could no longer be ignored. The
human squalor and degradation which were the
consequences of over half a century of unregulated
industrialism, hitherto noted in statistical reports
and official documents, were now set forth in vivid
human terms. Several sequels from Riis' pen fol-
lowed this: The Children of the Poor (1892), The
Battle with the Slum (1902), and Children of the
Tenements (1903).
M. Delinquency and Correction
4639. Barnes, Harry Elmer, and Negley K. Tee-
ters. New horizons in criminology. 2d ed.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 887 p.
51-14541 HV6025.B3 1951
A comprehensive and detailed textbook in crimi-
nology and penology which the authors describe as
"an exercise in informed crusading for a more ra-
tional, humane, and effective handling of the whole
problem of crime." A section on factors favorable
to criminality opens with a disclaimer of dogma-
tism: the most unfavorable conditions will not in-
evitably drive a given person to crime, or the most
favorable ones absolutely insure him against it.
Capital punishment is pronounced a barbarous sur-
vival, and the cruelty and futility of the modern
prison developed at length. The new edition em-
phasizes the "revolution in crime" during the war
decade: the development and political infiltrations
of syndicated gambling and criminality, and the
growth of rural and juvenile crime. Against this
may be set progress in rehabilitative treatment inside
and out of institutions.
4640. Bates, Sanford. Prisons and beyond. New
York, Macmillan, 1936. 334 p.
36-32878 HV8665.B33
The author, after heading the Massachusetts De-
partment of Correction for nine years, became the
first chief of the new Federal Bureau of Prisons.
He takes the average American county jail to be
the antithesis of everything desirable in a reforma-
tory institution. He argues that we can improve
our prisons, with new and more adequate buildings,
decent living conditions, improved diet, better
qualified guards, and educational facilities, and
yet deter the potential criminal. An adequate sys-
tem must be "built around the concept that all its
prisoners must be returned to society, and that
society is not protected unless they are returned
more efficient, more honest, and less criminal than
when they went in."
4641. Clemmer, Donald. The prison community.
Boston, Christopher Pub. House, 1940.
341 p. 40-14007 HV9466.C55
The result of a study of the inner life of a prison
containing 2300 inmates carried out in 1931-34 by
a sociologist of the Illinois Department of Public
Welfare. He presents it as "the 'Middletown' of
American prisons," with observations on social re-
lations, social groups, leadership, leisure time, the
sexual pattern, prison labor, etc.
4642. Deutsch, Albert. The trouble with cops.
New York, Crown Publishers, 1955. 243 p.
55-7239 HV8138.D4
Mr. Deutsch is an experienced social scientist
who from time to time undertakes journalistic in-
quiries into specific problems, which he handles
forcefully but not sensationally. The present vol-
ume was expanded from a series of articles in
Collier's and deals with the "police crisis" of 1952-54
evidenced in a nation-wide series of front-page
scandals brought to light in one metropolitan force
after another. There is much here concerning par-
ticipation in rackets, brutality and other illegal
treatment of suspects, blackmail and "entrapment"
by vice squad members, and other prevalent abuses.
The basic cause is found in the fact that "the gen-
erality of America's 200,000 local police officers
remain undertrained, underpaid, unappreciated,
with meager chances for advancement." The de-
velopment of training, standards, and incentives that
will turn the "flatfoot" into a professional require a
wiser attitude toward police problems on the part
of our urban democracies.
4643. Dressier, David. Probation and parole.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1951.
237 p. 51-10476 HV9278.D73
A director of the New York State Division of
Parole seeks to articulate a rationale of probation
and parole, and to provide in one volume a full-
length statement on the philosophy, administration,
and processes of each. He defines them as services
designed to benefit society and the maladjusted
individual in society, which must be recognized as
casework functions with a law-enforcement orienta-
tion and responsibility. The first and crucial factor
is selection, which, if poorly done, can render all
6lO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
subsequent supervision and treatment ineffectual.
Mr. Dressier has provided anecdotes and lessons
from his own professional career in his Parole Chief
(New York, Viking Press, 195 1. 310 p.).
4644. Ellingston, John R. Protecting our children
from criminal careers. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1948. 374 p. 48-3450 HV9069.E56
During 1938-40 the American Law Institute car-
ried out the task of redesigning the pattern for the
administration of criminal justice for youth, arriving
at a model Youth Correction Authority Act. In
1 94 1 California set up its Youth Authority on this
basis, and after six years was imitated by Minnesota,
Wisconsin, and Massachusetts. Mr. Ellingston's
book is a vigorous denunciation of traditional
methods; jails, state schools, reformatories, and
prisons are so many schools for crime and depravity.
The schools and camps of the California Authority
are praised as breaking the stagnant pattern of
children's institutions. The State Authority is seen
as a lever for effecting the reform of delinquency
control at the community level.
4645. Glueck, Sheldon. Crime and justice. Cam-
bridge, Mass., Harvard University Press,
1945- 349 P- . A45-4442 HV8665.G55 1945
"Based on eight lectures delivered to a lay audi-
ence at the Lowell Institute, Boston, in the spring
of 1935." — Pref.
A comprehensive diagnosis of the entire American
system of criminal justice, whose ills primary result
from the fact that "society is attempting to enforce
the laws and to control crime with instruments
largely outworn." One major improvement could
be effected by drafting "a more realistic criminal
code to replace the existing tangle of legislative and
judge-made law." There is also needed a unified,
centrally directed system of justice, administered by
a Department of Justice within each state. No re-
form can become effective unless there is a greatly
improved personnel of well-trained officials devoted
to the public weal. Furthermore, "far-reaching and
deep-probing attacks are necessary along the entire
front of social pathology," but especially in the realm
of family disintegration.
4646. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck.
500 criminal careers. New York, Knopf,
1930. xxvii, 365, xvi p. 30-2673 HV6793.M4G5
4647. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck.
Later criminal careers. New York, The
Commonwealth Fund, 1937. 403 p.
37-11838 HV6793.M4G52
4648. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck.
Criminal careers in retrospect. New York,
The Commonwealth Fund, 1943. 380 p. (Har-
vard Law School studies in criminology)
43-17001 HV6783.G5
These three volumes study the life histories of the
510 prisoners released from the Massachusetts Re-
formatory whose sentences expired in 1921 and 1922,
and follow them up at 5, 10, and 15 years after the
original release. The first volume provides back-
ground material on the reformatory movement and
the Massachusetts reformatory and parole system.
The second studies recidivism among the 454 sur-
vivors and suggests that maturation is the underly-
ing influence in reform. The third considers the
response of offenders to peno-correctional treatment
and explores the possibilities of predicting individual
behavior.
4649. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor T. Glueck.
Five hundred delinquent women. With an
introd. by Roscoe Pound. New York, Knopf, 1934.
xxiv, 539 p. 34-34029 HV6046.G6
An investigation of 500 cases whose paroles from
the Massachusetts Reformatory for Women at Fram-
ingham expired between 1921 and 1924. It was
undertaken at the instance of Mrs. Jessie S. Hodder,
superintendent of the Reformatory for some two
decades, who introduced many reforms and desired
some evaluation of her years of effort. The authors
offer eleven case-histories in detail and proceed to
an analysis of pre-commitment data concerning
family background, childhood and adolescence,
sexual and marital life, and legal entanglements.
The regime of the Reformatory and the circum-
stances of parole and of behavior after release are
examined. The methodology of the study is fully
set forth in Appendix A. The whole remains con-
siderably the largest body of concrete information
concerning women offenders in the United States.
4650. Glueck, Sheldon, and Eleanor Glueck. Un-
raveling juvenile delinquency. New York,
Commonwealth Fund, 1950. xv, 399 p. (Harvard
Law School studies in criminology)
50-10259 HV9069.G55
4651. Glueck, Sheldon and Eleanor Glueck. De-
linquents in the making; paths to prevention.
New York, Harper, 1952. 214 p.
51-11917 HV9069.G552
Of this pair of publications the first is a full sta-
tistical and methodological account, and the second
a summary of results for the general public, of a
major ten-year study. A group of 500 delinquent
boys were elaborately compared with a group of 500
non-delinquent boys, so chosen that matching in
pairs could be carried out. As a group, the delin-
quents proved to be "mesomorphic" in physique,
SOCIETY / 6ll
energetic and aggressive in temperament, hostile and
suspicious in attitude, concrete and unmethodical in
intellect, and reared in homes of little affection or
stability. The authors have worked out a series of
prognostic tables offered as usable at the point of
school entrance.
4652. Hamilton, Charles, e d. Men of the under-
world; the professional criminals' own story.
New York, Macmillan, 1952. 336 p.
52-4275 HV6785.H3
There is a surprisingly large literature of personal
narratives by American criminals of one kind or
another, produced with varying degrees of assist-
ance from another party or parties. This anthology
gives a fair sampling, with sections on the "under-
world," racketeering, prison life, and the road back
from prison. Unfortunately the editor's commen-
tary is journalistic in tone and his extracts are un-
accompanied by proper dates and citations. How-
ever, his sources are listed in his bibliography (p.
327-330).
4653. Lewis, Orlando F. The development of
American prisons and prison customs, 1776-
1845, with special reference to early institutions in
the State of New York. [Albany?] Prison Asso-
ciation of New York [1922] 350 p.
23-5484 HV9466.L4
Bibliography: p. 347-350.
4654. McKelvey, Blake. American prisons; a
study in American social history prior to
1915. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936.
xiv, 242 p. (University of Chicago. School of
Social Service Administration. Social service series)
37-1625 HV9466.M3
"Bibliographical note" at end of each chapter.
Mr. Lewis went minutely through contemporary
sources, especially state documents, in order to pre-
sent a detailed picture of prisons and imprisonment
during the first seven decades of the Republic. It is,
of course, largely a record of horrors. Dr. McKel-
vey, building on Lewis' presentation of "the insti-
tutional side," is chiefly concerned with new theories
of penology and movements of reform based upon
them. He pauses, however, to review "the state
of prisons in the nineties." The two works, taken
together, provide a fairly rounded history of Ameri-
can penological development down to World War I.
4655. Smith, Bruce. Police systems in the United
States. Rev. and enl. New York, Harper,
1949- 35i P- 49-48594 HV8138.S58 1949
There are about 40,000 separate and distinct public
police agencies in the United States, and the coordi-
nation of these into a united and effective front
against crime is a complex business. This treatise,
noteworthy for taking into account the varying view-
points of the professional police officer, the civilian
administrator, and the general public, places these
systems against the two major problems of crime
and traffic, and then discusses the systems by cate-
gory: federal agencies, state forces, city police, etc.
Separate chapters are given to State-Federal relation-
ships, police control and leadership, principles and
types of organization, and the central services de-
veloped since 1893 by the International Association
of Chiefs of Police.
4656. Tannenbaum, Frank. Crime and the com-
munity. Boston, Ginn, 1938. 487 p.
38-13156 HV6025.T3
Bibliography at end of each chapter except chapter
20.
A thoroughly social interpretation of crime in the
United States which rejects all single-factor theories.
"American criminal activity has persisted because it
was called into being and perpetuated by those com-
plex and overlapping social strains which have char-
acterized the growth and development of American
life. Not until the American community changes
profoundly will the character and the amount of
crime in it also change." Among the chapters in
which criminal behavior is very realistically fitted
into its social setting are "Education for Crime,"
"Organized Crime," "Politics and Crime," "Politics
and Police," and "The Philosophy of the Professional
Criminal." The two concluding parts of the book
present well-documented and strongly critical ac-
counts of the administration of criminal justice, and
of "Punitive Processes."
4657. Teeters, Negley K., and John Otto Reine-
mann. The challenge of delinquency; causa-
tion, treatment, and prevention of juvenile
delinquency. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950.
819 p. 50-12402 HV9069.T375
Bibliography: p. [739H83.
A professor of sociology and the probation of-
ficer of a Philadelphia court unite to produce a
college text which presents the history of its subject,
an appraisal of theories of causation, and a descrip-
tion and evaluation of the existing social machinery.
No single theory of causation is found to be satis-
factory; a "multiple causation" theory is considerably
more cautious, although no given set of unfavorable
conditions will necessarily produce delinquency, or
their opposites necessarily prevent it. Under "Con-
trol and Treatment," juvenile courts, probation, and
various types of commitment are described. The
final section discusses community programs of pre-
vention, and an appendix presents 15 case histories.
6l2 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4658. Thrasher, Frederic M. The gang; a study
of 1,313 gangs in Chicago. 2d rev. ed.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1936. xxi,
605 p. 36-35233 HV6439.U7C4 1936
"Selected bibliography": p. 554-580.
The gang has grown considerably more lethal in
the past two decades, but Dr. Thrasher's study of
Chicago gangs carried out in the early 1920's re-
mains the most thorough study of a regular urban
phenomenon. The gang, a symptom of disorgani-
zation in the larger social framework, offers a sub-
stitute for what society fails to give, and provides
relief from suppression and distasteful behavior.
Various aspects of gang life such as its playgrounds,
"junking," gang warfare, and sex, are illustrated.
Gang structure, action, and leadership are analyzed,
and the gang is considered in its relation to organ-
ized crime and to politics.
4659. Vollmer, August. The police and modern
society. Berkeley, University of California
Press, 1936. 253 p. (Publications of the Bureau
of Public Administration, University of California)
36-27477 HV8138.V65
Bibliography: p. 238-241.
A review of police problems "as the policeman
on patrol daily encounters them," by the long-time
Chief of Police of Berkeley, Calif., also a distin-
guished criminologist. These problems are con-
sidered in four main groups: major crimes, vice,
traffic, and general service. There is much room for
improvement in the realm of personnel; by improved
standards of selection and training, "police work
can attain the full dignity of a profession." The
author believes that our services have traveled as
far toward crime control as they have been per-
mitted to; but "the police are undermined, de-
moralized, and unsupported by the very public that
they are paid to protect."
4660. Wilson, Orlando W. Police administration.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 540 p.
50-12455 HV7935.W48
A substantial textbook by the dean of the School
of Criminology at the University of California, writ-
ten for the critical student of police problems. It
analyzes the organization structure, administrative
practices, and operating procedures of police forces
in this country. In view of widely divergent police
patterns, it describes what the author regards as
superior practices in all branches and at all levels
of police service — "we do not progress so long as
we sit on the fence." There are sections on patrol,
traffic, records, buildings and equipment, person-
nel, discipline, and public relations. An "admin-
istrative check list" of 300 questions provides a
ready-made inquiry into the efficiency of any police
department (p. 513-528).
XVI
Communications
ii
A. The Post Office; Express Companies 4661-4671
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone 4672-4681
C. Radio, Television: Broadcasting 4682-4698
D. Radio, Television: The Audience 4699-4705
E. Government Regulation 4706-471 1
¥
IN THIS chapter books have been selected which tell the story of telecommunication in the
United States as various media have successively emerged to influence the economic, social,
and intellectual development of the Nation. The expansion of the postal system from an inter-
colonial service on the eastern seaboard into a medium for transcontinental communication
followed the westward migration of settlers, and with the help of the short-lived Pony Express
dispelled the notion of the Rocky Mountains and the deserts as impassable barriers between the
two sections of the country. By the middle of the
19th century the postal service was rivaled by the
growing network of telegraph wires, which in the
two decades before 1852 reached 23,283 miles, and
the merchant, banker, journalist, and men of other
callings had discovered the value of the telegraph in
their business ventures. Invented by Alexander
Graham Bell, the telephone emerged as a big indus-
try during the last quarter of the 19th century, as a
potent modifier of everyday habits, and as an instru-
ment of industrial and social expansion.
In spite of the influence of these media of com-
munication, there is a scarcity of literature, suitable
for this bibliography, on the Post Office, the Express
Companies, and the Telegraph, Cable, and Tele-
phone (Sections A and B). This is by no means the
case with the more recent arrivals, Radio and Tele-
vision (Sections C and D). In the first two sections
the items listed represent most of the historical litera-
ture available in book form on those subjects, while
the items in Sections C and D are merely typical of a
much larger body of literature that reflects the de-
velopment of broadcasting. Books have been
selected for their illustration of the profound effect
that both of these agencies of mass communication
are exerting on the social, educational, and moral
qualities of their audiences. Because of the rapid
development of radio and television into time-
consuming, ubiquitous influences in American life,
as well as into big industries with associated careers,
a few production handbooks that will probably be of
interest to others as well as those who may consider
such careers, have been included. The omission of
any title is not to be considered as criticism, but may
mean only that the selection had to be limited in
order to maintain proportion and balance.
A. The Post Office ; Express Companies
4661. Chapman, Arthur. The Pony Express; the
record of a romantic adventure in business;
illustrated with contemporary prints and photo-
graphs. New York, Putnam, 1932. 319 p.
32-9124 HE6375.C4
Bibliography: p. 311-314.
The Pony Express was a by-product of the con-
troversy between the proponents of the southern and
central routes for the overland mail to California.
It was inaugurated on April 3, i860, by William H.
Russell of the freighting firm of Russell, Majors and
Waddell, to demonstrate the practicability of the
central route for year-round travel. Only one trip
was missed in its 18 months of weekly and semi-
613
614 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
weekly service. The excessive cost of operation,
the failure to obtain an enlarged mail contract, and
the joining of the telegraph lines from the East and
West in October 1861 brought the Pony Express to
an end. The writer, a newspaper reporter, maga-
zine editor, and author of other books on the West,
concludes that the Pony Express contributed to the
development of the West by speeding up the news
service to and from the Pacific, disproving the theory
that the Rocky Mountains formed an impassable
barrier in winter, and minimizing the terror of the
desert.
4662. Chu, Pao Hsun. The Post Office of the
United States. 2d ed. New York, 1932.
148 p. 33-2965 HE6371.C55 1929
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1929.
Bibliography: p. 139-148.
The footnote references and bibliography indicate
the scholarly nature of this history of the Post Office.
The author, a Chinese student who came to the
United States on a government scholarship, regards
the Post Office as an agency for the collection and
dissemination of human thought and thereby one of
the active contributors to the speed and solidarity
that mark the growth of civilization. He traces
the development of the English postal system as the
forerunner of the American, the emergence of the
modern Post Office in the 17th century, the origin
of the Federal postal monopoly, and the reforms
which have fundamentally changed the theory and
practice of postal finance.
4663. Cushing, Marshall H. The story of our Post
Office; the greatest Government department
in all its phases. Boston, A. M. Thayer, 1893.
1034 p. 9-16667 HE6371.C98
The author utilized his experience as a journalist,
congressional secretary, and private secretary to Post-
master General John Wanamaker to give a detailed
account of the complicated machinery that underlay
the business of the Post Office Department. A de-
scription of the buildings occupied by the Depart-
ment, the duties of the Postmaster General, the
various functions of his assistants, the publications of
the Department, the establishment of routes and of-
fices, the equipment, pay and work of clerks, money
orders and supplies, free delivery, the Dead Letter
Office, inspectors and smuggling, brief biographies
of postmasters and other personalities as well as
statistics and anecdotes have their places in this vivid
picture of the Post Office as it was in the last decade
of the 19th century.
4664. Fowler, Dorothy (Ganfield) The Cabinet
politician; the Postmasters General, 1829-
1909. New York, Columbia University Press, 1943.
344 p. 43-10238 HE6499.F6
Manuscripts: p. [309]-3ii. Bibliography: p.
[3I3J-323-
The Postmaster General became a Cabinet officer
in 1829. During the next 80 years the tradition was
established whereby "this Cabinet position has been
given to the foremost politican of the Party. He has
usually been the manager of the new President's
campaign for the nomination and election and has
frequently been the chairman of the national com-
mittee, for the Presidential nominee has, since 1896,
selected that officer." Mrs. Fowler describes the
Post Office as an agency of political patronage and
reviews the political activities of its heads from Wil-
liam T. Barry to George von Lengerke Meyer.
4665. Geddes, Virgil. Country postmaster. New
York, Austin-Phelps, 1952. 230 p.
52-12228 HE6385.G4A3
This book by a litde-theater playwright presents
the human interest side of the postal system. It re-
lates in anecdotal style the experiences of the author
as postmaster for ten years in a New England village.
It pictures the life of the people as viewed from a
post office window, the small town politics, the en-
forcement of postal regulations, the illegal use of the
mails, and the maintenance of rural routes. "Where
else," asks the author, "could one, who constantly en-
joys the study of humanity, have such a laboratory
as the post office in a small town?" He concludes
that, "what holds the great postal system together is
not the postal laws and regulations, however im-
portant they may be, but the spirit of democracy in
both those who work within it and those who patron-
ize it."
4666. Hafen, LeRoy R. The overland mail 1849-
1869; promoter of settlement, precursor of
railroads. Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1926. 361 p.
26-17618 HE6375.H3
"Bibliography of references cited": p. 333-341.
The trek of the Mormons to Utah in 1847 and the
discovery of gold in California in 1849 accelerated
the demand for extension of the mail service over-
land to the Pacific. The author tells the story of
the transportation of the mails by stage coach and
Pony Express on all available routes to the West
during the 20 years that preceded the driving of the
Golden Spike at Promontory Point on May 10, 1869.
He relies on Government documents, contemporary
newspapers, and the personal narratives of travelers
and other participants in the events which have been
described.
4667. Harlow, Alvin F. Old waybills; the ro-
mance of the express companies. New
York, Appleton-Century, 1934. 503 p
34-7001 HE5896.H3
COMMUNICATIONS / 615
Bibliography: p. 489-[497J.
This is the author's third book in his series on
American communication and transportation. The
history of the Adams, American, Southern, and
Wells, Fargo Express Companies, which reached
their zenith in the early iScjo's and combined in
1918 to become the American Railway Express Com-
pany, is interwoven with stories of the colonial
expressmen, the rise and fall of smaller companies,
the stage coach and Pony Express, and the impact
of these modes of communication on society.
4668. Kelly, Melville Clyde. United States postal
policy, by Clyde Kelley. New York, Apple-
ton, 1931. 320 p. 31-22448 HE6371.K4
In this review of the development of the policies
underlying the U. S. postal service, a member of
the House of Representatives for 20 years, who had
served on its Post Office Committee, describes the
postal establishment as the "keystone in the arch of
American unity." Through service it "helps to
obliterate sectional lines and to neutralize class
prejudice."
4669. Rich, Wesley E. The history of the United
States Post Office to the year 1829. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1924. 190 p.
(Harvard economic studies ... v. 27)
24-22903 HE6371.R5
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Harvard University, 1917.
Bibliography: p. 175-181.
This dissertation is a scholarly history of the be-
ginnings of the postal service in the colonies under
British rule, its unification under Benjamin Frank-
lin as the first national Postmaster General (1775),
and its extension from 1789 to 1829, the year in
which the Postmaster General became a Cabinet
officer. Chapters describe the Post Office as a pub-
lic service and its internal organization, financial
operations, and postal policies. A chapter traces the
growing political importance of post office patronage.
The appendixes contain biographical notes on the
Postmasters General, and tables showing the growth,
appropriations, receipts and expenditures of the
Department from its inception until 1829.
4670. Roper, Daniel C. The United States Post
Office, its past record, present condition, and
potential relation to the new world era. New York,
Funk & Wagnalls, 19 17. xvii, 382 p.
17-24056 HE6371.R6
Bibliography: p. 374-375.
The author, who served as First Assistant Post-
master General from 191 3 to 191 6, has written a
general history of the U. S. Post Office, whose mis-
sion he describes in its rural, urban, and interna-
tional aspects as "social, commercial and intellec-
tual." He tells the story of the postal service from its
colonial beginnings to 1917 when, he says, World
War I marked the "end of an old and the beginning
of a new era." The American story is prefaced
by a chapter on "Postal Service and Civilization."
The Appendix contains a glossary, a list of officials
of the Post Office Department, 1775-19 17, and a
chronology of postal events.
4671. U. S. Commission on Organization of the
Executive Branch of the Government (1947-
1949) The Post Office; a report to the Congress,
February 1949. [Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off.] 1949. 21 p.
49-45781 HE6331 1949.A523
JK643G47A55, no. 4
Issued also as House document no. 76, 81st Cong.,
1 st sess.
Established by a law approved July 7, 1947, the
Commission, through its Chairman, the Honorable
Herbert Hoover, transmitted the report of its find-
ings concerning the Post Office Department to the
Congress less than two years later. As Appendix I
to this Report, Robert Heller and Associates, Cleve-
land, published the results of their study for the
Commission under the title Management Organiza-
tion and Administration of the Post Office Depart-
ment ([Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.] 1949.
74 p.). The basic diagnosis of the Commission:
"Although the Post Office is a business-type estab-
lishment, it lacks the freedom and flexibility essen-
tial to good business operation." The Heller task
force recommends legislation "to establish the Post
Office Department as a revolving fund agency of the
Executive Branch . . . accountable to the Congress
but with methods more in accord with modern
business practice." Greater flexibility in expendi-
tures and reasonable freedom from restrictive laws
and regulations are indicated changes.
B. Telegraph, Cable, Telephone
4672. Barbash, Jack. Unions and telephones; the
story of the Communications Workers of
America. New York, Harper, 1952. 246 p.
52-8460 HD6515.T33B3
The Communications Workers of America were
established as recently as 1939, and did not arrive at
any great numbers or influence until World War II
was over. Mr. Barbash, a Washington economist,
6l6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tells its story in order "to give CWA members a
sense of pride in CWA traditions and history," as
well as "to tell the general reader interested in the
labor movement something about a union which
reflects most of the main currents of union develop-
ment in this generaiton." His book is included
here for the incidental light which it frequently
throws upon the organization and operations of
the telephone industry, and for its Chapter 9, "Tele-
phones and Corporations," which concisely presents
the economics of the industry from the union point
of view.
4673. Danielian, Noobar R. A. T. & T.; the story
of industrial conquest. New York, Van-
guard Press, 1939. 460 p.
39-29705 HE8846.A55D3
The results which may be achieved by the various
systems of industrial control are emphasized by the
author, sometime financial and utility expert for the
Federal Communications Commission. The Bell
Telephone System has been selected as typical of the
industries which have experienced periods of uncon-
trolled monopoly, competition without regulation,
the protection of state regulation, Federal "owner-
ship" during World War I, and regulated monopoly.
The book is based, to a great extent, on the record
of the Telephone Investigation authorized by Con-
gress in 1935 and conducted by the Federal Com-
munications Commission (no. 4710).
4674. Dilts, Marion May. The telephone in a
changing world. New York, Longmans,
Green, 1941. xiv, 219 p.
41-51774 HE8731.D5 1941
Bibliographical references in "Notes": p. 197—
210.
Since the telephone was first successfully demon-
strated in 1876, it has become a universal medium
for the exchange of ideas between individuals.
Communication between persons in neighboring
cities had developed into transcontinental service by
1915, and transoceanic telephone service between
New York and London was established in 1927.
This nontechnical history, written by a former
member of the technical staff of the Bell Labora-
tories, traces the economic and social impact of that
development on this and other countries. The book
includes chapters on "Telephone Operators" and
"Telephone Directories."
4675. Harlow, Alvin F. Old wires and new
waves; the history of the telegraph, tele-
phone, and wireless. New York, Appleton-Century,
1936. xiv, 548 p. 36-27399 TK5115.H3
Bibliography: p. 527-538.
Although this is a history of the three great means
of communication, more than two-thirds of the
book is devoted to the development of the telegraph.
It contains chapters on Samuel F. B. Morse, the in-
ventor, Henry O'Reilly, who extended "the wires
over a vaster field than any which promoters had yet
dared to contemplate," and the first Atlantic cable.
The evolution of the telephone and Alexander Gra-
ham Bell's struggle over patents, and the story of
wireless communication are traced up to the organi-
zation of the big radio broadcasting chains. The
author relates deeds of heroism accomplished by
means of wire and wave during peace and war,
which add human interest to the story.
4676. Mabee, Carleton. The American Leonardo,
a life of Samuel F. B. Morse; with an introd.
by Allan Nevins. New York, Knopf, 1943. xix,
420, xv p. 43-1967 TK5243.M7M3
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1942.
References: p. 381-420.
A young scholar, who had access to a collection of
Morse letters, diaries, photographs, and paintings,
portrays his subject not only as the inventor of the
telegraph, but also as an artist whose career in paint-
ing began in his youth and continued with varying
success until 1837 when he gave it up to devote his
energies to the development of the telegraph. Allan
Nevins, in the Introduction, says that "Morse was
something better than a great inventor; he was one
of the great representative Americans of his time, a
leader in many activities, and a man who enriched
the national culture in various ways." The theme
of Morse as an artist has been further explored by
Oliver W. Larkin in Samuel F. B. Morse and Ameri-
can Democratic Art (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954.
215 p.).
4677. McDonald, Philip B. A saga of the seas;
the story of Cyrus W. Field and the laying of
the first Adantic cable; illustrated from contem-
porary prints and portraits. New York, Wilson-
Erickson, 1937. 288 p. 37-21616 TK5611.M3
Bibliography: p. 281-282.
The story of life in the United States during the
latter half of the 19th century has been interwoven
with the biography of an enthusiastic, energetic
promoter whose foresight and courage inspired
capitalists and scientists on both sides of the Atlantic
to use their money and talents to produce a material
link between the Old World and New. The author
describes the influence of the Atlantic cable on inter-
national commerce, diplomacy, and news service;
and the interest of Cyrus Field, in later years, in the
transit system of New York, the laying of a Pacific
cable, and other projects of public benefit. In the
Preface, the author mentions the letters and auto-
biographical notes printed in Cyrus W. Field, edited
by his daughter, Isabella Field Judson (New York,
Harper, 1896. 332 p.) as being "the best source of
original documents."
4678. Mackenzie, Catherine D. Alexander Gra-
ham Bell, the man who contracted space.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1928. 382 p.
28-28948 TK6143.B4M3
A narrative of the career of the versatile inventor
of the telephone, who was also the oustanding genius
of his generation in the education of the deaf, the
financier of the Volta Bureau, the founder of the
Aerial Experiment Association, and the guiding
spirit in the establishment of the magazine Science.
The author was for ten years Mr. Bell's secretary
and the custodian of his papers. Out of that ex-
perience and the many conversations of those years
she tells with enthusiasm and directness the story
of his life "in terms of the work he did and the way
he did it."
4679. Rhodes, Frederick Leland. Beginnings of
telephony. New York, Harper, 1929. xvii,
261 p. 29-22388 TK6015.R5
"Sources of information consulted": p. 239-244.
Associated with the American Bell Telephone
and the American Telephone and Telegraph Com-
pany as an electrical engineer, the author is well
known for important work in connection with stand-
ardization of materials, apparatus, and practice in
overhead and underground wire systems. In this
book he makes available to students and workers
interested in the early history of the telephone and
in the field of electrical communications, the infor-
mation which he has gathered from experience and
original sources. The emphasis is on the origin and
early development of such technical devices as the
microphone transmitter, the telephone cable, and
the switchboard. The Appendixes include a "List
of the Most Important Law Suits Arising cut of the
Infringement of Alexander Graham Bell's Tele-
phone Patents, with a Brief Description of the Cir-
cumstances of Each Suit;" "Early Uses of the Word
Telephone;" and a "Numerical List of United States
Patents Cited."
COMMUNICATIONS / 617
4680. Thompson, Robert L. Wiring a continent,
the history of the telegraph industry in the
United States, 1 832-1 866. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1947. xviii, 544 p.
47-12502 HE7775.T5
Thesis — Columbia University.
Bibliography: p. [5i8]~526.
The idea of an electromagnetic telegraph crystal-
lized in the mind of Samuel F. B. Morse in 1832,
and the Western Union Telegraph Company
emerged in 1866 from a consolidation of all the
individual companies that had sprung up during
the years between. The author tells the story of
men and events connected with those companies
as he has found them in such sources as the John
Dean Caton Papers, which he describes as "in-
valuable for an insight into the telegraph wars of
the 1850's and 1860's"; the Samuel F. B. Morse
Papers, which deal with the inception of the tele-
graph and patent controversies; and the Henry
O'Reilly Papers, "the most important manuscript
collection on the telegraph in existence."
4681. Ulriksson, Vidkunn. The telegraphers, their
craft and their unions. Washington, Public
Affairs Press, 1953. 218 p.
52-12861 HD6515.T325U5
Bibliography: p. 210-21 1.
The author, now on the faculty of the University
of Wisconsin, has been a member of the Order of
Railroad Telegraphers since 1918, and writes out
of the conviction that the labor movement "has been
and will continue to be one of the main bulwarks of
our democratic way of life." Following a brief
chapter on "Early Telegraph History," the evolution
of unionism in the industry is sympathetically traced
from the organization of the National Telegraph
Union in 1863 down to 195 1. A final chapter on
"The Telegraph Fraternity" describes some of the
interests and attitudes of a group who "have for
the most part always regarded themselves as belong-
ing in the professional category.
C. Radio, Television : Broadcasting
4682. Abbot, Waldo, and Richard L. Rider. Hand-
book of broadcasting; the fundamentals of
radio and television. 4th ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1957. 531 p. illus.
56-9620 PN1991.5.A2 1957
"Glossary": p. 461-470.
Bibliography: p. 516-520.
Designed to give students "basic knowledge of
every activity in a broadcasting station from an-
nouncing to producing, from writing to the technical
6l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
operation," this Handbook has been used for twenty
years as a textbook for elementary classes in the field
of broadcasting. In this new edition Richard L.
Rider, supervisor of television and motion pictures
at the University of Illinois, has collaborated with
the original author to expand the data on television.
Those chapters and sections that deal with the funda-
mentals basically the same for both media have been
retained, with supplementary information concern-
ing TV, so as "to create a combined text which
would be valuable for . . . students of radio and
television." In 1951 Edgar E. Willis undertook
"to provide a foundation on which advanced courses
in specific phases of radio and television can be
based; and to serve as a general introduction to
broadcasting for those students who will take no
other courses in the field," in Foundations in
Broadcasting: Radio and Television (New York,
Oxford University Press, 195 1. 439 p.).
4683. Archer, Gleason L. Big business and radio.
New York, American Historical Co., 1939.
503 p. 39-29972 TK6548.U6A82
An organizational history of the rise of the great
broadcasting companies from 1922 to 1929, with the
following decade much more sketchily treated. The
author has been allowed access to the files of the
Radio Corporation of America and the General Elec-
tric Company, and so documents the struggle be-
tween the "Radio Group" and the "Telephone
Group" for the control of radio more thoroughly
than is common for recent business history. The
achievements of William S. Paley, "the magician
who has built the great Columbia network," and of
David Sarnoff, who completed the unification of
R. C. A., are acclaimed. Subsequent chapters deal
with the Government's antitrust suit against R. C. A.
and the consent decree of Nov. 21, 1932, the effects
of the depression on the industry, and the beginnings
of television.
4684. Barnouw, Erik. Handbook of radio produc-
tion; an oudine of studio techniques and pro-
cedures in the United States. Illustrated by Victor
Barnouw. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1949. 324 p.
49-612 TK6570.B7B29
The author, who is now (1956) Editor, Center for
Mass Communication, Columbia University Press,
points out that since the air is the property of the
people to be used only with the consent of the Fed-
eral Communications Commission and for public
service, American radio is distinguished from other
mass media by the wide participation of national and
local groups in the production of programs. More
than 60 percent of his handbook is devoted to the
coordinated work of the production team. He
describes the talents and techniques used by the
actor, the sound man, the musician, the announcer
and speaker, and the engineer and director. Ex-
cerpts from various programs and a script, with pro-
duction notes, are given to illustrate the problems of
the team, with a "Production Directory" at the end.
It is a companion volume to the author's Handbook
of Radio Writing, rev. ed. (Boston, Litde, Brown,
IQ47- 336 P-)-
4685. Callahan, Jennie (Waugh) Television in
school, college, and community. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1953. 339 p. illus.
53-8992 LB1044.7.C33
Bibliography: p. 295-322.
During 1952-53 educators and other leading
citizens filed petitions with the Federal Communica-
tions Commission to reserve some 209 frequencies
for noncommercial television stations with educa-
tional purposes. This book has been written for
those who have the responsibility for establishing
educational TV stations, and writing and producing
the programs. The list of sources includes mate-
rials available from TV producing groups, listed by
states, as well as from the Joint Committee on Edu-
cational Television, the National Association of Edu-
cational Broadcasters, and the U. S. Office of Educa-
tion. For other books and serials on educational
television, by Charles A. Siepmann and others, see
Chapter XXI, Section F, on Methods and Tech-
niques of Education.
4686. Chester, Giraud, and Garnet R. Garrison.
Television and radio, an introduction. 2d
ed. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1956.
652 p. illus. 56-7206 TK6550.C43 1956
"Glossary of studio terms": p. 619-625.
Bibliography: p. 627-636.
The authors, who have had experience in radio
and television teaching and research as well as in
broadcasting, have made important changes in this
enlarged edition "to reflect the new facts and new
interests" which have developed since the first edi-
tion appeared in 1950 under the title Radio and Tele-
vision. However, the basic intention of the authors
is the same: "to provide a comprehensive, up-to-date
textbook for introductory courses in broadcasting"
which are offered in several hundred colleges and
universities. Part I deals with the social aspects of
radio and television, including "Educational Radio
and Television" and "Standards of Criticism." Part
II is devoted to studio practices and technique —
station organization, talking on the air, types of
programs, acting, directing, and "Broadcasting as a
Career." Script excerpts are provided for practice
so that the text may be used as a "working hand-
book."
COMMUNICATIONS / 619
4687. Commission on Freedom of the Press. The
American radio, a report on the broadcast-
ing industry in the United States, by Llewellyn
White. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1947. xxi, 259 p. 47-19380 HE8698.C67
"Note on sources": p. 252-255.
One of a series of studies prepared by the Com-
mission, which "was created to consider the free-
dom, functions, and responsibilities of major agencies
of mass communication in our time." The author,
who served as the assistant director of the Commis-
sion, points out the defections of the radio industry
in fulfilling its obligations to the public, redefines the
responsibilities of the industry within the frame-
work of Federal regulation, and makes recommenda-
tions to the broadcasters, the FCC, and the public.
"Freedom and accountability," the Commission con-
cludes, "must represent the joint achievement of the
industry, of community groups, and of government,
acting in proper relation to one another."
4688. Cumming, William K. This is educational
television. [Ann Arbor? Mich.] 1954.
264 p. illus. 54-62768 LB1044.7.C85
Dr. Cumming of the Department of Journalism
at Michigan State College, and more recendy Tele-
vision Producer-Coordinator of its station WKAR-
TV, believes that "television has the potential for
becoming a highly significant tool in the total educa-
tional process." As a guide to educators and public
service leaders still in doubt as to their course, he
has made this survey of the actual achievements
of the leading colleges and universities in the educa-
tional TV field, including, of course, his own, and
has sought to describe and appraise their presenta-
tions. "Material for the book was gathered, in
large degree, from personal interviews conducted
across the country and from observation and par-
ticipation in television operations." Statistics show-
ing the "Enrollments for Educational Television
Programs that Teach" appear in the Appendix.
Directories of "Colleges Offering Courses in Tele-
vision," and "Technical Schools for Television," ap-
pear in Edwin B. Broderick's Your Place in TV;
Handy Guide for Young People (New York, Mc-
Kay, 1954) p. 1 13-124.
4689. De Forest, Lee. Father of radio; the auto-
biography of Lee De Forest. Chicago,
Wilcox & Follett, 1950. 502 p.
50-9446 TK5739.D4A3
Radios in some 50 million homes in 1955 are the
contribution which the inventive genius of Lee De
Forest has made to civilization. He completed his
new "grid Audion" in 1906; 41 years later Charles
F. Kettering said, "The spectacular growth of
electronics to an enormous industry employing over
a million workers and benefiting untold millions of
people in all parts of the world may be said to have
begun with that event." Believing that he knows
better than anyone else many circumstances of die
early history of radio and television, Mr. De Forest
describes for the first time many episodes in their
development. He tells of his youth in Iowa and
Alabama, his literary, musical, and scientific edu-
cation, his early inventions, and his experiments
with wireless preceding the Audion. His narrative
covers the beginnings of radio broadcasting, of sound
films, and of television. There is also much detail
concerning the organization of his companies, and
the litigation which followed.
4690. DeSoto, Clinton B. Two hundred meters
and down; the story of amateur radio. West
Hartford, Conn., American Radio Relay League,
1936. _ 184 p. 37-376 TK6547.D4
"This work is publication no. 13 of the Radio
Amateur's Library, published by the League." —
Verso of t.-p.
By the year 1908 considerable numbers of ama-
teurs were taking up wireless telegraphy as a hobby,
and their interference with regular channels of
communication led to the Radio Act of 1912, which
confined them to wavelengths of 200 meters or less.
Within this limit the "ham" flourished, and made
the transition to radio, so that there were in 1936
"approximately 46,000 licensed amateur transmit-
ting stations." The amateurs' organization into the
American Radio Relay League and the International
Amateur Radio Union, their contributions to the
improvement of apparatus and communications,
and their volunteer work in emergencies, are among
the topics presented in this unusual volume, which
certainly ought to be brought up to date.
4691. Ewbank, Henry L., and Sherman P. Lawton.
Broadcasting: radio and television. New
York, Harper, 1952. 528 p.
52-5432 PN1991.5.E9
Selected bibliography: p. 504-515.
The principal aim of the authors is "to describe
our radio and television systems, consider the pub-
lic service responsibilities of these important mass
media, and suggest standards for evaluating broad-
cast programs." Government and nongovernmental
control of broadcasting; the preparation and direc-
tion of various types of programs, including those
for special audiences; methods of audience meas-
urement; and the economic and social effects of lis-
tening are presented in nontechnical language,
especially for college students and for program staff
members of radio and television stations.
620 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4692. Hutchinson, Thomas H. Here is television,
your window to the world. With ninety-
four illus. [Completely rev. ed.] New York, Has-
tings House, 1950. xvi, 368 p.
51-61 TK6630.H87 1950
Glossary: p. 365-368.
The author taught what was perhaps the first
college class in television programming in 1940
at the Washington Square Writing Center of New
York University, and has had much practical ex-
perience in producing and directing TV programs.
In this textbook, originally published in 1946, he
describes in detail "The Tools of Television" — the
studio, the camera, sound, the control room, the
projection booth, the transmitter, and the receiver —
representative types of "Television Programs," and
"The Commercial Aspect" — advertising programs
and "spots," large and small-station operation, net-
works, theater television, and jobs. The final chap-
ter summarizes the progress of TV in England,
Holland, Germany, France, and America.
4693. Maclaurin, William Rupert. Invention &
innovation in the radio industry, by W. Rup-
ert Maclaurin with the technical assistance of R.
Joyce Harman. With a foreword by Karl T. Comp-
ton. New York, Macmillan, 1949. xxi, 304 p.
illus. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Studies of innovation) 49-8314 TK6547.M28
Bibliography: p. 292-298.
The author has chosen the radio industry as the
subject of the first in a projected series of books on
the consequences of technological changes in a num-
ber of industries. He traces the story of radio
through the lives of the Europeans who did the fun-
damental research, to the advance engineering tech-
niques developed in the industrial laboratories of
the United States and applied to the industry. Chap-
ters are devoted to patent litigation, and to the rise
of industrial research in the fields of television and
frequency modulation. Dr. Maclaurin concludes
that technological innovation has positive effects on
our economy, and that the rational handling of in-
dustrial research prepares the Nation not only to
fight a war but to fight a depression.
4694. O'Meara, Carroll. Television program pro-
duction. New York, Ronald Press, 1955.
361 p. illus. 55-6091 PN1992.5.O6
The author, a former producer-director for NBC-
TV in Hollywood and New York, bases this book
on notes gathered while he was being trained in
television production by NBC. It is a practical
manual for the TV producer, often technical but
regularly concrete and clear, which deals both with
his means — camera, tide devices, film and slides,
lighting, etc. — and with standard types of programs
in the studio and "remote telecasts" outside it, such
as sports events. Concluding chapters introduce
color TV and censorship problems.
4695. Phillips, David C, John M. Grogan, and
Earl H. Ryan. Introduction to radio and
television. New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 432 p.
illus. 54-7650 PN1991.5.P5
A book for those who want a general under-
standing of radio and television, as well as for those
who plan careers in the two media and will pursue
further specialized courses. It contains chapters on
"Regulation of Radio and Television," "Films for
Television," "Educational Television," and "Audi-
ence Measurement." Appended are a "Glossary of
Radio and Television Terms" and specimen "Radio
and Television Scripts."
4696. Seehafer, Eugene F., and Jack W. Laemmar.
Successful radio and television advertising.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 195 1. 574 p.
51-2828 HF6146.R3S4
American business has practiced selling through
the medium of the radio for over 30 years, and
through TV since its large-scale introduction. In
the course of this experience certain well-established
principles have emerged, upon which "creative
thinking" in broadcast advertising can proceed.
This text, originally issued in mimeographed form
in 1947, aims to formulate these principles, and to
illustrate their operation throughout both media.
The techniques of the retail advertising campaign,
the problems of the national advertiser, and the art
of selling time, are essentially the same, whether
radio or TV is employed. The appendixes include
a "Timing Table for Radio Commercials" and a
glossary.
4697. Stasheff, Edward, and Rudy Bretz. The
television program; its writing, direction,
and production. [2d ed.j New York, Hill and
Wang, 1956. 356 p. illus.
56-13991 PN1992.5.S8 1956
Although television is often regarded as being a
new form of art, one of its principal functions has
been the broadcasting of dramatic entertainments
originally devised for media of longer standing.
The essential differences between television and its
forerunners — theater, films, and radio — are pointed
out in order to emphasize how directors, writers,
actors, and production personnel must adjust their
techniques to the new medium. Technicalities are
illustrated from original scripts, including a photo-
graphic reproduction of one complete director's
script for a [Dave] "Garroway at Large" program.
The chapter on "Marketing the Script," as well as
a book by Max Wylie, Radio and Television Writ-
COMMUNICATIONS / 621
ing, rev. and enl. (New York, Rinehart, 1950.
635 p.), will interest those who would like to write
for television.
4698. Waller, Judith C. Radio, the fifth estate.
2d ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1950.
482 p. illus. (Houghton Mifflin radio broadcast-
ing series) 50-9766 HE8698.W3 1950
Bibliography: p. 455-468.
The author is Director of Public Affairs and Edu-
cation of the National Broadcasting Company's
Central Division. Her book naturally stresses reli-
gious, agricultural, children's, and other types of
public service programs, as well as educational
broadcasting. It is, however, a rounded treatment
of the subject as a whole, and for the general reader
is probably the most serviceable introduction to radio
as it was at its peak. The original publication was
in 1946, and this revision includes only a six-page
section on television.
D. Radio, Television: The Audience
4699. Bogart, Leo. The age of television; a study
of viewing habits and the impact of television
on American life. New York, Ungar Pub. Co.,
1956. 348 p. 56-12046 HE8698.B6
Written for viewers who are interested in the ef-
fect of television on people rather than with its tech-
nical aspects, this book is based mosdy on studies
"which have used the interview method of asking
people what television has meant in their lives."
Following chapters on the growth of TV and the
nature of its audience appeal, the author explores the
content of TV programming, and analyzes its effect
on reading, the movies, spectator sports, advertising,
politics, and juvenile audiences. "The Status of TV
Research" is summarized in an appendix, which ob-
serves that "remarkably little is known about the
broadcasters themselves."
4700. Chappell, Matthew N., and Claude E.
Hooper. Radio audience measurement.
New York, Daye, 1944. xvi, 246 p. illus.
44-5827 HE9713.C5
The development of the radio as an advertising
medium early impressed on the industry the need
for measuring listening habits to determine the effec-
tiveness of various types of programs on the buying
habits of audiences. The data obtained from
sampling measurements, made by major audience
service organizations in 1929, 1934 and 1943, have
been supplemented through surveys conducted by
the major networks, by advertising agencies carry-
ing radio accounts, and by other research groups.
In this book the writers examine separately each
method used in collecting such information, and
the effectiveness of the method for the segment of
the population chosen for study.
4701. Columbia University. Bureau of Applied
Social Research. Radio listening in Amer-
ica; the people look at radio — again. Report on a
survey conducted by the National Opinion Research
Center of the University of Chicago, Clyde Hart,
director; analyzed and interpreted by Paul F.
Lazarsfeld and Patricia L. Kendall. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1948. 178 p.
49-450 HE8698.C654
A second survey of listening habits sponsored by
the National Association of Broadcasters to de-
termine the public's attitude toward radio. The first
study, conducted under the direction of Harry H.
Field and Paul F. Lazarsfeld, was published by the
University of North Carolina Press in 1946: The
People Loo\ at Radio (158 p.). Seventy percent of
the audience gave radio in general a rating of ex-
cellent or good; serious criticism was confined to a
relatively small minority.
4702. Parker, Everett C, David W. Barry, and
Dallas W. Smythe. The television-radio
audience and religion. New York, Harper, 1955.
xxx, 464 p. diagrs., tables. (Studies in the mass
media of communication) 55-8526 BV656.3.P3
"This volume has grown out of the first serious
effort to understand the effects of religious programs
broadcast over radio and television. But it is also
far more than that: because it undertakes to trace
effects within the setting of a concrete community
and in the lives of particular individuals, this study
reveals a great deal about the total impact of newer
methods of communication on an American city and
its inhabitants." Conducted by the Communications
Research Project supervised by the Yale University
Divinity School under the chairmanship of Liston
Pope, it analyzes the "church relatedness" of fam-
ilies in New Haven, Connecticut, and the attitudes
of ministers towards broadcasting. It surveys tele-
vision and radio set ownership and contrasts the
personality traits of the audiences that listen with
622 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
those that do not listen to religious programs. The
authors believe that its central and most important
finding is "that in programming for religious use
of the mass media, the ingenuity and flexibility of
the planners must match the complexity of needs and
circumstances of the potential audience." It will
serve as a pilot study for those who desire to apply
the techniques of the survey to a similar study of
other communities.
4703. Siepmann, Charles A. Radio, television and
society. New York. Oxford University
Press, 1950. 410 p. 50-8505 HE8698.S529
Chapter bibliographies included in "Appendix
VII": p. [389]-398.
"The first purpose of this book is to bring the gen-
eral reader the history of a cultural revolution and
to show what has been discovered by research con-
cerning the effects of radio and television upon our
tastes, opinions, and values. The second purpose is
to deal with broadcasting as a reflection of our time
and to throw light upon the problems of free speech,
propaganda, public education, our relations with the
rest of the world, and upon the concept of democ-
racy itself." The author emphasizes ascertained
facts, and is cautious in generalization and criticism,
but suggests that "the greatest threat to our culture
results from the general underestimation, in mass
communication, of the public's potentialities."
Materials for further study of the effect of TV on
family life, public life, and children; its role in ad-
vertising and education; and the standards of Amer-
ican broadcasting will be found in the collection of
readings: Television and Radio in American Life,
edited by Herbert L. Marx, Jr. (New York, Wil-
son, 1953) and published as volume 25, no. 2, of The
Reference Shelf series. It includes an extensive
bibliography.
4704. Stewart, Raymond F. The social impact of
television on Atlanta households. [Emory
University, Ga.] 1952. 137 p.
52-41391 HE8698.S78
Bibliography: p. 135-137.
This is representative of several studies based on
interviews that have been made in widely separated
areas of the United States on the influence of tele-
vision on children and on family life in general.
This study includes a survey of television owner-
ship in Atlanta, the owners' "interaction with so-
ciety," and the patterns of behavior within the
television family. The owners reported that they
went out less in the evening, went to bed later, and
engaged in less family conversation.
4705. Wylie, Max. Clear channels; television and
the American people, a report to set owners.
New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1955. 408 p.
54-9743 HE8694.W87
A book concerned with the place of television in
American society, by an author who has been a
radio and television producer, a college teacher, and
an advertising agency executive. He criticizes the
critics of television and defends its effects on educa-
tion, adult reading habits, and the morals of children.
He raises the controversial issues of televising sports
and governmental functions; challenges educators to
learn the techniques of TV broadcasting and to take
advantage of the channels reserved by the FCC for
cultural programs; and points to television as a
medium for the improvement of public health in the
United States.
E. Government Regulation
4706. Edelman, Jacob M. The licensing of radio
services in the United States, 1927 to 1947; a
study in administrative formulation of policy. Ur-
bana, University of Illinois Press, 1950. 229 p.
(Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 31, no. 4)
50-63485 HE8693.U6E4
H31.I4, v. 31, no. 4
Bibliography: p. 224-226.
The development of the body of rules and deci-
sions that has governed radio broadcasting since
the organization of the Federal Radio Commission
in 1927 is traced through its first two decades, with
the leading policy developments of 1947-50 de-
scribed in footnotes. The author thinks that, on the
whole, regulation by independent commission has
proved "an adequate device for maintaining a con-
tinuing surveillance" over an area of rapid change
and many controversial issues. Certain "striking
departures from declared policy" by the Commis-
sion, usually in the direction of greater profitability
of broadcast operation, have resulted from the fact
that at its hearings the industry is strongly repre-
sented, while "groups that represent listeners are
rare, and those that do arise become impotent with
impressive regularity." Laurence F. Schmeckebier
in The Federal Radio Commisison; Its History,
Activities and Organization (Washington, Brook-
ings Institution, 1932. 162 p. Institute for Gov-
COMMUNICATIONS / 623
ernment Research. Service monographs of the
United States Government, no. 65) describes in de-
tail the regulatory functions of that body, which
was superseded in 1934 by the Federal Communica-
tions Commission.
4707. Herring, James M., and Gerald C. Gross.
Telecommunications; economics and regu-
lation. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1936. 544 p.
illus. 36-23240 HE206.H4
The economic and public service aspects of the
telegraph, including submarine telegraphy, tele-
phone, and radio industries, are traced in this book
from the beginnings of those industries to the pas-
sage of the Communications Act of 1934. To this
end chapters deal with revenue and expenditures,
criteria for rate adjustments, concentration of own-
ership, and State, National, and international regu-
lation. The authors believe that the Act of 1934
laid the groundwork for the accomplishment of its
central purpose: so to regulate communication by
wire or radio as to make available to the people of
the United States a rapid, efficient, nation-wide,
and world-wide service with adequate facilities at
reasonable charges. The book is now considerably
out-of-date, but remains quite unreplaced.
4708. Rhyne, Charles S. Municipal regulations,
taxation and use of radio and television.
Washington, National Institute of Municipal Law
Officers, 1955. 84 p. ([National Institute of Mu-
nicipal Law Officers, Washington, D. C] Report
no. 143) 55-24929 JS351.N3, no. 143
Most cities are themselves users of radio frequen-
cies, regularly in their police and fire departments,
and sometimes in municipal programs and stations.
They are called upon to take regulatory action about
such problems as interference with radio and tele-
vision reception, the erection of transmitters and
antennas, community television systems, the exam-
ination and licensing of TV and radio repairmen,
and even program content. They have also to secure
some contribution from commercial radio and TV
stations to the cost of municipal government. This
handbook attempts to bring together information on
the present state of municipal action in these fields
and prints some typical ordinances and regulations
in an appendix.
4709. Robinson, Thomas Porter. Radio networks
and the Federal Government. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1943. 278 p.
A 43-2030 HE9711.U5R6 1943
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1943.
Bibliography: p. [265 1-267.
Between 1937 and 1941 Congress and the Federal
Communications Commission investigated the three
great radio networks — the National Broadcasting
Company and the Columbia and Mutual Broad-
casting Systems — as a form of monopolistic control
of individual stations. This dissertation draws upon
the hearings of the Senate Interstate Commerce
Committee and of the Commission to illustrate the
operation of network control in such matters as
artist contracts, station rates, and the rejection of
programs, and emphasizes the relationship between
the Commission and NBC. Convinced that net-
work organization is economically inevitable, the
author takes exception to a number of the new regu-
lations which the Commission promulgated subse-
quent to the investigations.
4710. U. S. Federal Communications Commission.
Investigation of the telephone industry in the
United States. Letter from the Chairman, Federal
Communications Commission, transmitting a report
of the Federal Communications Commission on the
investigation of the telephone industry in the United
States, as unanimously adopted by the Commis-
sion . . . Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939.
xxv, 661 p. illus., tables, diagrs. (76th Cong., 1st
sess. House. Document 340)
39-26969 HE8803.A5 1939
Referred to the Committee on Interstate and
Foreign Commerce and ordered printed with illus-
trations June 14, 1939.
This report resulted from a joint resolution of the
Congress, approved by the President on March 15,
1935. The investigation took four years and
naturally focused upon the American Telephone
and Telegraph Company, whose officials exert
"effective nation-wide control" over the Bell Tele-
phone System, and of which the Western Electric
Company is the manufacturing department. It
covers such aspects of the industry as corporate and
financial history; capital structure; intercompany
relationships; service contracts; accounting methods;
apportionment of investment, revenues, and expenses
between state and interstate operations; methods of
competition; the effect of monopolistic control upon
telephone rates and charges; and the reasons for
failure to reduce rates and charges during years of
declining prices. The Commission concluded that
this investigation had provided it "with basic data
to serve as the foundation for the inauguration and
development of continuous and efficient administra-
tive processes in the highly technical field of tele-
phone regulation." "During the course of the
investigation, and as a result of the direct efforts of
the investigatory staff, telephone-rate reductions now
aggregating in excess of $30,000,000 were effected in
the interest ... of the American telephone-using
public."
624 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
471 1. U. S. President's Communications Policy
Board. Telecommunications, a program for
progress; a report. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off., 195 1. 238 p.
51-60572 HE7763.A44 195 1
A summary of the information concerning the
radio, telephone, and telegraph services gathered
during a year's study by the President's Communi-
cations Policy Board. The five problems examined
are: policies and plans for reconciling the conflict-
ing interests and needs of Government and private
users of the spectrum space; management of the
total telecommunications resources to meet the
changing demands of national security; a national
policy for international telecommunications agree-
ments; maintaining a sound telecommunications in-
dustry; and strengthening the Government's own
organization to cope with those issues. Concern-
ing the last problem, the principal recommendation
of the Board was the establishment "in the Executive
Office of the President a three-man Telecommunica-
tions Advisory Board to advise and assist the Presi-
dent in the execution of his responsibilities in the
telecommunications field."
XVII
Science and Technology
«f
a
61
A.
General Worlds
4712-4730
B.
Particular Sciences
473 1-474 1
C.
Individual Scientists
4742-4760 [
D.
Science and Government
4761-4779
E.
Invention
4780-4792
F.
Engineering
4793-4803 J
THE recognition of science as a determining factor in American economic and social
progress has been furthered by its decisive influence on the political future of the United
States as shaped by two world wars. A comparison of this chapter with others in this bibli-
ography makes it clear that the history of the physical sciences and their application has been
somewhat neglected by the historical profession. Several reasons have been advanced for
this — the difficulty of sorting the purely American contributions from the larger framework
of world science, neglect in preserving the letters
and papers of scientists, the hesitation among his-
torians to invade specialized fields, and the apparent
indifference of scientists to interpreting the achieve-
ments of science in relation to other aspects of Ameri-
can life. The books in Section A by Hindle (no.
4718), Jaffe (nos. 4721, 4722), Johnson (no. 4723),
and Struik (no. 4730) show that a start has been
made toward the coverage of certain periods and
geographical areas, although much remains to be
done in the basic sciences to fill up the outline pro-
vided by Oliver in his History of American Tech-
nology (no. 4727). Section B indicates that certain
sciences have received more attention than others,
and that the complete history of mathematics,
physics, and other branches remains to be writ-
ten. To round out the picture, histories of
representative scientific societies, and collective
biographies of scientists in general, or of scien-
tists working in a particular branch, have been
added to the first two sections. Section C contains
a selection of biographies of individual scientists,
many of whom are great names reflecting major
advances in their fields, while others are probably
more representative than great. The publications
in Section D describe the interrelations that have
developed between science and government, espe-
cially the Federal Government, in the service and
defense of human welfare. It includes histories of
major organizations such as the Smithsonian Insti-
tution (no. 4775) and the National Science Founda-
tion (no. 4778, annotation), and surveys of Federal
aid to scientific research and resources in terms of
manpower and materials, as well as treatments of
certain Government agencies whose functions are
primarily scientific. In Sections E and F histories of
invention and engineering science, and biographies
of inventors and engineers have been assembled to
illustrate the application of science in technological
achievements which fulfill human needs. How-
ever, the technological aspects of medicine, agricul-
ture, and the graphic arts will be covered in other
chapters.
A. General Works
1712. American men of science; a biographical
directory. 9th ed. Edited by Jaques Cattell.
Lancaster, Pa., Science Press., 1955-56. 3 v.
6-7326 Q141.A47
431240—60 41
American Men of Science originated as a manu-
script reference list for the Carnegie Institution of
Washington. The latest edition has been divided
into three volumes to accommodate "a phenomenal
625
626 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
recent expansion in almost every field of science."
The first volume, "Physical Sciences," includes
biographical sketches of living scientists in the fields
of the physical, mathematical, chemical, and geo-
logical sciences. Volume II, "Biological Sciences,"
includes those in the fields of zoology, botany, medi-
cal research, and affiliated areas. Volume III, "The
Social & Behavioral Sciences," contains names and
fields not previously found in American Men of
Science. To the biographies of those in the fields
of psychology, geography, and anthropology, which
appeared in the earlier editions, have been added
many names in other branches of the social sciences
such as economics, sociology, and government. The
three volumes form an outstanding reference tool
in all fields of science. In 195 1 the U. S. Depart-
ment of Labor published as its Bulletin no. 1027:
Employment, Education, and Earnings of American
Men of Science, by Theresa R. Shapiro and Helen
Wood (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. 48 p.),
which is a statistical analysis based upon a ques-
tionnaire sent out to gather information for a "roster
of key scientists for use by the National Research
Council, the Department of Defense, and other
agencies concerned with our supply of scientific per-
sonnel, and to provide data for the 1949 edition of
The Biographical Directory of American Men of
Science."
tfi-i,. Bates, Ralph S. Scientific societies in the
United States. New York, Wiley, 1945.
246 p. 45-5801 Q11.A1B3
"A publication of the Technology Press, Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology."
Bibliography: p. 193-220.
As the first extensive history of the work of
American scientific societies, this book fills "a gap
in the literature dealing with the intellectual his-
tory of our country." It traces their growth and
influence from the organization of Benjamin Frank-
lin's Junto in 1727, which laid the foundation of
the American Philosophical Society, the oldest sci-
entific society now in existence in America, to the
year 1944. Recognized as "outstanding agencies
for increasing and diffusing the world's store of
knowledge," national, state, and local scientific
bodies proliferated during the period of "National
Growth, 1 800-1 865," which witnessed the founding
cf the National Academy of Sciences to furnish tech-
nical advice to the government in the prosecution
of the Civil War. Specialization was the dominat-
ing idea of the years 1866 to 1918, which saw the
foundation of national societies in the various
branches of science and technology. During the
period 1919 to 1944 American scientists found their
places in international scientific organizations; the
National Research Council and other councils co-
ordinated, directed, and initiated scientific projects;
and American science reached a maturity that cre-
ated interest in its own history.
4714. Bell, Whitfield J. Early American science,
needs and opportunities for study. Wil-
liamsburg, Va., Institute of Early American History
and Culture, 1955. 85 p. 56-211 Q127.U6B35
Sponsored by the Institute of Early American His-
tory and Culture, this is the first in a series of studies
in several specialized fields that have been inade-
quately investigated. Of its two parts, the first
surveys, and documents with bibliographical foot-
notes, the categories in which further study is needed.
The second part is a bibliography, classified in sec-
tions on "The General History of Science"; "History
of Science in America (to about 1820)"; "Periodicals,
Devoted to, or Often Publishing Contributions to,
the History of Science"; and "Fifty Early American
Scientists (to about 1820)." Titles cited in the first
part are as a rule not repeated in the second. The
author hopes that the study will suggest to students
new subjects and materials that should be explored
in every aspect of the history of early American
science. To assist them, "the staff of the Institute
will gladly provide, when it can, further specific sug-
gestions for research on any of the topics mentioned
here or on others like them."
4715. A Century of science in America, with special
references to the American journal of science,
1818-1918. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1918. 458 p. (Yale University. Mrs. Hepsa Ely
Silliman memorial lectures) 19-218 Q127.U6C3
Contains bibliographies.
Fourteen scientists contribute chapters in the areas
of their competence to this volume commemorating
the centennial of the founding of the American
Journal of Science, "the only scientific periodical in
this country to maintain an uninterrupted existence
since that early date." The chapters throw light on
the scope of the papers published in the Journal, and
the development of the particular branches of science
as they emerged from 1818 to 1918. Four chapters
on various phases of geology by Charles Schuchert,
Herbert E. Gregory, Joseph Barrell, and George Otis
Smith, reflect the prominent place which geological
notes and papers have occupied in the Journal since
its inception. Other chapters are devoted to
Paleontology, by Richard Swann Lull; Petrology, by
Louis V. Pirsson; Mineralogy, by William E. Ford;
the Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington, by R. B. Sosman; Chemis-
try, by Horace L. Wells and Harry W. Foote;
Physics, by Leigh Page; Zoology, by Wesley R. Coe;
and Botany, by George L. Goodale. The increase in
the amount of periodical scientific literature during
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 627
the century under discussion indicates the growing
place of scientific investigation in the intellectual life
of the period.
4716. Coleman, Laurence V. Company museums.
Washington, American Association of Mu-
seums, 1943. 173 p. 43-51215 T179.C6
The director of the American Association of
Museums points out that 80 business companies in
the United States — manufacturing corporations,
commercial houses, railroads, public utilities, news-
papers, banks, and insurance companies — are known
to have museums of their own. He gives a brief
history of the museum movement in business, which
had its beginning in the 19th century, and describes
the usefulness of museums as builders of company
morale, as reference tools, and as vehicles for good
public relations. He discusses all phases of museum
work — management, quarters, collecting, exhibition,
and interpretation of the collection to visitors. The
field work for this study was carried out in 1942 by
Carl C. Curtiss, who also compiled the descriptive
directory of "Company Museums in the United
States" which appears in the Appendix. Organizers
and managers of such museums will find this book a
useful guide, and for the student of American tech-
nological development it contains a wealth of sug-
gestions and sources.
4717. Fairchild, Herman Le Roy. A history of
the New York Academy of Sciences, for-
merly the Lyceum of Natural History. New
York, The Author, 1887. 190 p. 1-617 Q11.N67
Founded in 18 17 for the study of natural history,
"particularly as it relates to the illustration of the
physical character of the country we inhabit," the
New York Academy of Sciences is the fourth oldest
scientific society in the United States. In 1836 it
opened its own Lyceum Building at 561-65 Broad-
way, only to lose it 8 years later as a consequence
of the financial panic of 1837. In 1876 it adopted
its present name in order to accommodate "those
working in all departments of science." Ten years
later the Academy's recording secretary put to-
gether this modest account of its first seven decades
from its minutes and other records, and included
chapters on its foundation, original members, offi-
cers, collections, library, and publications, as well as
biographical notices of its leading members. The
Academy's second 70 years, even more productive
than the first, remain unchronicled.
4718. Hindle, Brooke. The pursuit of science in
Revolutionary America, 1735-1789. Chapel
Hill, Published for the Institute of Early American
History and Culture, Williamsburg, Va., by Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1956. 410 p.
56-4168 Q127.U6H5
"Bibliographical note": p. 387-392.
The author's interest in this subject began with
his doctoral dissertation, The Rise of the American
Philosophical Society, ij66-ij8j (Philadelphia,
1949. 66 1.). Of the book's three parts, the first
depicts the group in America, England, and on the
Continent who studied the natural history of the
colonies, and through correspondence and exchange
of specimens created intercolonial and interna-
tional bonds. The second period (1763-75) is
characterized by the rise of scientific societies and
the publication of astronomical observations which
impressed Europeans with a new maturity in Amer-
ican scientific thought. In the third period, the
men, the institutions, and the interrelations that had
sustained science were disrupted by the Revolution.
However, such statesmen as Washington, Franklin,
Jefferson, and Adams were determined that science
should flourish in America, and that the spark which
had been kindled should not die. The "unprece-
dented richness of modern America is a monument
to the faith of the Revolutionary generation in the
power and beneficence of science, just as its form of
government is a monument to their faith in man's
capacity to govern himself."
4719. Hornberger, Theodore. Scientific thought
in the American colleges, 1638-1800. Aus-
tin, University of Texas Press, 1945. 108 p.
A46-1632 Q181.H77
Published as Project no. 67 of the University
Research Institute.
Of the 27 colleges which existed in the United
States prior to 1800, the author gives some informa-
tion about 16, although only Harvard, Yale, William
and Mary, Princeton, Columbia, Pennsylvania,
Brown, and Dartmouth had enough of a history
by that date to make it proper to speak of their
cultural influence. From 1640 to 1690 geometry,
physics, and astronomy held a very minor place in
the curriculum. During the next 50 years "natural
philosophy," botany, zoology, and chemistry
emerged as regular subjects, and experimental dem-
onstrations with "philosophical apparatus" in the
classroom became the rule. An analysis of the at-
titudes of representative alumni toward science leads
the author to conclude that those of the first period
shared an enthusiasm for the "new science" which,
in the years 1690 to 1740, gave way to a growing
sense of conflict between science and religion. How-
ever, "by the end of the 18th century . . . 'science'
had become a word to conjure with." A beautifully
illustrated book by I. Bernard Cohen, Some Early
628 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Tools of American Science (Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1950. 201 p.), describes in detail
the "philosophical apparatus" at Harvard University
from 1764 to 1825 and, in certain aspects, is also
a history of science as taught at Harvard during
that period.
4720. Industrial research laboratories of the United
States. 10th ed. Comp. by James F. Mauk.
Washington, National Academy of Sciences, Na-
tional Research Council, 1956. 560 p. (National
Research Council Publication 379)
21-26022 T176.I65, no. 379
A directory of 4,834 nongovernmental research
laboratories including those maintained by com-
mercial firms and trade associations, independent
commercial laboratories, and independent nonprofit
laboratories. Testing and university laboratories
are not included. The addresses, names of presi-
dents, and, in some cases, of other executive officers
are given, and the size, makeup, and activities of the
research staff are described. The great increase in
the number of laboratories listed since the first
edition appeared in 1920 is an indication of the
growing dependence of business and industry on
research.
4721. Jaffe, Bernard. Men of science in America;
the role of science in the growth of our coun-
try. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1944. xl, 600 p.
44—5618 Q127.U6J27
"Sources and reference material": p. 555-571.
Contents. — 1. Thomas Harriot (naturalist and
mathematician), bringing the seeds of science to
America. — 2. Benjamin Franklin (natural philoso-
pher), the first fruit of American science. — 3. Benja-
min Thompson (physicist), science faces the tumult
of the American Revolution. — 4. Thomas Cooper
(chemist), science advances slowly in the newborn
Republic. — 5. Constantine Samuel Rafinesque
(botanist), American science ventures out across
new frontiers. — 6. Thomas Say (entomologist),
science caught in the first uprush of an industrial
revolution. — 7. William T. G. Morton (anesthetist),
American makes medical history. — 8. Joseph Henry
(physicist), the United States government estab-
lishes a new incubator for science. — 9. Matthew
Fontaine Maury (hydrographer), America con-
tributes to the science of the sea. — 10. Louis J. R.
Agassiz (biologist), the repercussions of Darwinism
in the United States. — 11. James Dwight Dana
(geologist), Federal and state surveys aid the ad-
vances of science. — 12. Othniel Charles Marsh
(paleontologist), dinosaurs and other fossils of our
gilded age. — 13. J. Willard Gibbs (mathematical
physicist), America in the new world of chemistry. —
14. Samuel Pierpont Langley (aeronautical engi-
neer), American science gives men wings. — 15.
Albert Abraham Michelson (physicist), America
participates in the revolution of modern physics. —
16. Thomas Hunt Morgan (geneticist), American
science come of age. — 17. Herbert McLean Evans
(anatomist), American science pioneers in two new
related fields. — 18. Edwin Powell Hubble (as-
tronomer), giant instruments and huge foundations
for American science. — 19. Ernest Orlando Lawrence
(nuclear physicist), the turn of the tide in world
science. — 20. Future of science in America.
"With a view to finding possible relationships be-
tween the kind of science which developed in Amer-
ica and the type of civilization which has flourished
here," the author bases his selection of 20 scientists
on the significance of their contributions as pioneer
research, with emphasis on the pure sciences and the
workers' awareness of the social scene in which they
worked. He thereby illustrates the interdependence
between scientific progress and political and social
history in the United States.
4722. Jaffe, Bernard. Outposts of science; a
journey to the workshops of our leading men
of research. New York, Simon & Schuster, 1935.
xxvi, 547 p. 35-3I946 Q127.U6J3
"Sources and reference material": p. 517-529.
Selecting 13 Americans eminent for scientific re-
search in as many different fields, the author inter-
viewed them, visited their laboratories, and studied
their scientific papers. Seeking to "give the average
reader some idea of the tremendous activity going
on behind the doors of the laboratories of science,"
he outlines the development of their specialties and
against this background presents the significance of
their specific achievements. Separate chapters de-
scribe and evaluate the work of Thomas Hunt Mor-
gan in genetics, Ales Hrdlicka in anthropology.
William H. Welch in bacteriology and immunology,
Maud Slye in cancer research, John Jacob Abel in
endocrinology, Adolf Meyer in psychiatry, Elmer
V. McCollum in nutrition, Leland O. Howard in
entomology, Robert A. Millikan in atomic physics,
Arthur H. Compton in radiation, George Ellery
Hale in astrophysics, Charles G. Abbot in meteor-
ology, and Richard C. Tolman in astronomical
cosmology. All of these scientists save Morgan, who
died soon after his interview, reviewed and approved
Jaffe's account of their work. The volume gives a
vivid panorama of American scientific investigation
two decades ago.
4723. Johnson, Thomas Cary. Scientific interests
in the Old South. New York, Appleton-
Century, for the Institute for Research in the Social
Sciences, University of Virginia, 1936. 217 p.
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 629
(University of Virginia. Institute for Research in
the Social Sciences. Institute monograph no. 23)
36-28317 Q127.U6J6
This is "a study of the attitude of the planters,
politicians, and professional men of the Cotton King-
dom and of their wives and daughters toward the
natural sciences." The author analyzes the faculties,
curriculum, and apparatus found in the colleges and
"female academies" in order to illustrate the interests
of teachers and students in scientific writing, socie-
ties, and study. The appearance of articles on chem-
istry, physics, astronomy, and botany in the news-
papers and periodicals; the popularity of lectures on
the natural sciences; attempts to establish museums;
and the formation of circles bent on scientific inves-
tigation witness to the South's awareness of the
achievements of science. The author includes chap-
ters on scientific developments in cities as wide
apart, traditionally and culturally, as Charleston and
New Orleans, and concludes that "the common as-
sumption that the Old South was a gloomy region
cut off from the scientific light of the Occidental
world seems to be unsustained by the evidence."
4724. Jordan, David Starr, ed. Leading American
men of science. New York, Holt, 19 10. 471
p. 17 port. (Biographies of leading Americans,
edited by W. P. Trent) 10-26275 Q141.J7
Contents. — Benjamin Thompson, Count Rum-
ford, physicist, by Edwin E. Slosson. — Alexander
Wilson [and] John James Audubon, ornithologists,
by Witmer Stone. — Benjamin Silliman, chemist, by
Daniel Coit Gilman. — Joseph Henry, physicist, by
Simon Newcomb. — Louis Agassiz, zoologist, by
Charles Frederick Holder. — Jeffries Wyman, anat-
omist, by Burt G. Wilder. — Asa Gray, botanist, by
John M. Coulter. — James Dwight Dana, geologist,
by William North Rice. — Spencer Fullerton Baird,
zoologist, by C. F. Holder. — Othniel Charles Marsh,
paleontologist, by George Bird Grinnell. — Edward
Drinker Cope, paleontologist, by Marcus Benja-
min.— Josiah Willard Gibbs, physicist, by Edwin E.
Slosson. — Simon Newcomb, astronomer, by Marcus
Benjamin. — George Brown Goode, zoologist, by
D. S. Jordan. — Henry Augustus Rowland, physicist,
by Ira Remsen. — William Keith Brooks, zoologist,
by E. A. Andrews.
"Short and sympathetic biographies of [17] lead-
ers in American science, each one written by a man
in some degree known as a disciple." Dr. Jordan
chose the subjects and the authors, but was com-
pelled to turn the remainder of the editorial work
over to Dr. Slosson. Simon Newcomb, author of
the sketch of Joseph Henry, died while the work was
still in progress, and was promptly added to the list
of subjects. American scientific progress for more
than a century is largely summed up in the work of
these men, whose lives span the years 1753 to 1909.
4725. Knapp, Robert H., and Hubert B. Goodrich.
Origins of American scientists; a study made
under the direction of a committee of the faculty of
Wesleyan University. Chicago, University of Chi-
cago Press for Wesleyan University, Middletown,
Conn., 1952. xiv, 450 p. 52-1461 1 Q127.U6K55
This book may be considered, in part, an attempt
to answer some of the questions raised by the Presi-
dent's Scientific Research Board in its report (no.
4779) which indicated a shortage of scientific per-
sonnel in relation to the probable requirements of the
American nation. This study is the result of a
statistical analysis of several hundred institutions in
an attempt to establish their effectiveness in the edu-
cation of scientists, and intensive case studies of 22
smaller colleges (Appendix, p. 299-431). It sets up
criteria for the selection of students by colleges and
recommends colleges of "broad intellectual em-
phasis" to students. The information regarding
types of institutions which have been most successful
in training scientists should be helpful to all who
plan a scientific education. The authors also evalu-
ate comparable studies of scientific personnel, point-
ing out the limitations of some. Special weight is
given to Stephen S. Visher's Scientists Starred, 1903-
1943, in "American Men of Science" (Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1947. 556 p.), which studies
the education, birthplace, distribution, background,
and developmental factors of those regarded by their
colleagues as outstanding scientists.
4726. A Memorial of George Brown Goode, to-
gether with a selection of his papers on
museums and on the history of science in America.
Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1901. 515 p. no
port. (Annual report of the Board of Regents of the
Smithsonian Institution . . . 1897. Report of the
U. S. National Museum, pt. 2)
14-19898 Q11.U5 1897, pt. 2
The memorial meeting was held February 13,
1897, in the lecture room of the United States Na-
tional Museum, under the auspices of the Joint Com-
mission of the Scientific Societies, and in cooperation
with the patriotic and historical societies of
Washington.
Report of the meeting held in commemoration of
the life and services of George Brown Goode, with a
memoir by Samuel P. Langley: p. 1-61.
Papers by George Brown Goode (p. 63-477):
Museum-history and museums of history. — The
genesis of the United States National Museum. —
The principles of museum administration. — The
museums of the future. — The origin of the national
scientific and educational institutions of the United
63O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
States. — The beginnings of natural history in
America. — The beginnings of American science. —
The first national scientific congress (Washington,
April, 1844) and its connection with the organiza-
tion of the American Association.
The published writings of George Brown Goode,
1869-1896. By R. I. Geare: p. 479-500.
Dr. Goode, although cut off by pneumonia in his
46th year, accomplished more than most men during
his life (1851-96). He was an authority on fishes,
and co-author of the monumental Oceanic Ichthy-
ology (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1895. 2 v.).
Since 1887 he had been Assistant Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution, in charge of the National
Museum, and was the outstanding museum admin-
istrator of his day. Many of the papers collected
here are still, after six decades or more, among the
most valuable writings on their subjects.
4727. Oliver, John W. History of American tech-
nology. New York, Ronald Press, 1956.
676 p. 56-6269 T21.O45
"The distinction of this volume is that it repre-
sents the first comprehensive historical account of
American technology and invention as a basic con-
tribution to the nation's culture," says Guy Stanton
Ford in a brief foreword. Largely a compilation
from secondary authorities, it derives its value from
its systematic inclusiveness, and from its regular
emphasis on the technological foundations of eco-
nomic developments which are in other respects well
known. Even in the 17th century the American
colonists designed new tools, and devised new meth-
ods of cultivating the soil, tanning leather, and
processing wool and flax: already "American tech-
nology was born." "The 'homespun' age was on its
way out during the second decade of the 19th cen-
tury." In America's industrial revolution, unlike
England's, the workers, farmer-mechanics trained
in the workshops of New England, welcomed the
machine. As early as 1798 Eli Whitney evolved
"the system of interchangeable parts and thus paved
the way for America's unique contribution to world
technology — mass production." By 1850 America
had become "a nation alert to science" as the prin-
cipal agency of social progress. The author pursues
his subject with unflagging enthusiasm through the
age of steel and the electrical age, and concludes
with an optimistic glance at the potential effects
of automation. The footnote references at the end
of each chapter are supplemented when necessary
by a bibliographical note.
4728. Scientific and technical societies of the United
States and Canada. 6th ed. Washington,
National Academy of Sciences, National Research
Council, 1955. 447 p. 27-21604 AS15.H3
This handbook appeared first in 1908, and further
editions were published between 1927 and 1948. In
this edition entries are limited to "membership group
organizations," and other categories, such as trade
associations with research activities, have been elimi-
nated. The data on Canadian associations have been
supplied by the National Research Council of Can-
ada. In addition to the address, names of officers,
and date of organization, the purpose, number of
members, frequency of meetings, size of library,
research funds, medals awarded, and publications
of the societies are given.
4729. Special Libraries Association. Science-Tech-
nology Division. Handbook of scientific
and technical awards in the United States and
Canada, 1900-1952. Edited by Margaret A. Firth.
New York, Special Libraries Association, 1956.
xxiv, 491 p. 56-7004 Q141.S63
A "selected listing of the most important awards
presented by certain of the scientific and technical
societies in the United States and Canada to indi-
viduals in recognition of their meritorious achieve-
ment in scientific fields." Awards granted by
foundations, universities, publishers, and companies
are not included. The separate listings for the
United States and Canada are arranged alphabeti-
cally under the names of the societies. The recip-
ients are listed chronologically under the names of
the societies. Personal name, award title, and sub-
ject indexes permit of ready reference. Through
1928 only the names of recipients are supplied.
Reference to published sources of information about
their lives and the circumstances of the awards are
cited from 1929.
4730. Struik, Dirk Jan. Yankee science in the
making. Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. xiii,
430 p. 48-8195 Q127.U6S8 1948
Bibliography: p. [387]— 416.
A professor of mathematics at the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology investigates science and
technology in the stable community of New Eng-
land between 1780 and i860, on the premise that
the history of science "must include its sociology."
The colonial and revolutionary periods are briefly
treated in two preliminary chapters. In 1780 New
England had only a few scientists, with interests
limited to astronomy, medicine, or agronomy, and
this situation was not greatly altered during the
Federalist period. Only with the Jacksonian period,
opening about 1830, did there arise "a mass interest
in science and technical questions." Major scien-
tific institutions were founded, civil engineering be-
came an influential profession, and technological
advances permitted modern industries to assume
their shapes. By 1863, when President Lincoln or-
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 63I
ganized the National Academy of Sciences, "New
England science had grown into American science."
Sketches of many significant figures in pure science
and technology are incorporated in the narrative.
B. Particular Sciences
4731. Browne, Charles Albert, and Mary Elvira
Weeks. A history of the American Chemi-
ical Society, seventy-five eventful years. Washing-
ton, American Chemical Society, 1952. 526 p.
53-238 QD1.A58
Includes bibliographies.
Partial contents. — Precursors. — Beginnings. —
The secession period. — The new order. — The
twenty-fifth anniversary, before and after. — Special-
ization and dangers of disunion. — Strivings for con-
solidation.— International relations, 1876-1914. —
The American Chemical Society and the First
World War. — The Society completes its first half
century. — The start of the Society's second half
century. — The American Chemical Society during
the Second World War. — The postwar reorganiza-
tion.— Growth and readjustment. — Increasing pro-
fessional consciousness. — International relations,
1918-1951. — Contributions of the Divisions. — Pub-
lications.— Awards, memorial lectures, and research
foundations. — The diamond jubilee.
Dr. Browne, historian of the American Chemical
Society from 1945 until his death in 1947, com-
pleted only nine chapters of this history. Dr. Weeks
of the staff of the Kresge-Hooker Scientific Library
at Wayne University completed the unfinished chap-
ters and supplied the supplemental material. The
Preface is, for the most part, a memorial to Dr.
Browne.
4732. Chittenden, Russell H. The development
of physiological chemistry in the United
States. New York, Chemical Catalog Co., 1930.
427 p. (American Chemical Society. Monograph
series, no. 54) 30-32722 QP514.C5
The American Chemical Society, by arrangement
with the Interallied Conference of Pure and Applied
Science (1919), undertook the production of a series
of scientific and technological monographs of which
this study is one. The author's association with the
first laboratory of physiological chemistry in Amer-
ica at the Sheffield Scientific School, Yale University,
where he was professor of the subject from 1882 to
1922, has given him exceptional competence to write
this history. He traces the development of physio-
logical chemistry in the United States from 1870
to the late 1920's in the scientific laboratories and
investigations, the personalities and writings, and
the universities and experimental stations which have
contributed to the "knowledge of the chemico-
physiological processes of the animal body."
4733. Fairchild, Herman Le Roy. The Geological
Society of America, 1888-1930. A chapter
in earth science history. New York, The Society,
1932. xvii, 232 p. 32-24464 QE1.G218F3
At the request of the Council of the Geological
Society of America, the secretary of the Society from
1891 to 1906, who also served as president in 1912,
has written a history of the Society from its formal
organization by himself and twelve Fellows, since
deceased, on December 27, 1888, to 1930. The story
of the Society and its offshoots — the Paleontological
Society, the Mineralogical Society of America, and
the Society of Economic Geologists — is preceded by
an historical sketch of geological science from its
Greco-Latin beginnings during the five centuries
before Christ, to its development in Western Europe
and America through the year 1888. While this
history was in the press the Society was bequeathed
some four and a quarter million dollars, which
placed it among the wealthiest scientific societies in
the United States.
4734-
Geiser, Samuel W. Naturalists of the
frontier. [2d. ed., rev. and enl.] Dallas,
University Press, Southern Methodist University,
1948. 296 p. 48-7357 QH26.G42 1948
"Principal sources": p. 264-269.
Contents. — The naturalist on the frontier. —
Jacob Boll. — In defense of Jean Louis Berlandier. —
Thomas Drummond. — Audubon in Texas. — Louis
Cachand Ervenberg. — Ferdinand Jakob Lind-
heimer. — Ferdinand Roemer, and his travels in
Texas. — Charles Wright. — Gideon Lincecum. —
Julien Reverchon. — Gustaf Wilhelm Belfrage. —
Notes on scientists of the first frontier.
The beginnings of science in the Southwest, espe-
cially Texas, and the struggle for economic survival
on the frontier are presented in the biographies of
these early naturalists. The second edition con-
tains one biography and a chapter on scientific study
in the Old South prior to 1850 which did not appear
in the first (1937). The author says that the men
whose lives have been sketched here are but a hand-
ful compared with the scores of workers "who dur-
632 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ing the frontier period contributed to our cultural
and scientific advance," and appends a "Partial List
of Naturalists and Collectors in Texas" (p. 270-
284), which gives some biographical information and
references to sources. Joseph A. Ewan suggests that
his Roc\y Mountain Naturalists (Denver, University
of Denver Press, 1950. 358 p.) may be used as a
companion piece to Geiser's book. It contains
biographical sketches of Edwin James, John C. Fre-
mont, Charles C. Parry, Edward L. Greene, Thomas
C. Porter, Harry N. Patterson, Marcus E. Jones,
Eugene Penard, and Theodore D. A. Cockerell; a
200-page roster of Rocky Mountain naturalists
(1682-1932); and bibliographical notes.
4735. Haynes, Williams. Chemical pioneers; the
founders of the American chemical industry.
New York, Van Nostrand, 1939. 288 p.
39-17461 TP139.H38
Originally published serially in Chemical Indus-
tries, and projected as a two-volume work, the
second volume of which apparently has not been pub-
lished. After describing the pioneer efforts of John
Winthrop, Jr., in 17th-century Massachusetts, the
volume outlines the lives of 15 men born between
1 80 1 and 1865 whose activities extended from pure
research to the development of practical processes
and the organization of complex manufacturing en-
terprises. The progress of a new technology and a
new industry is illustrated in these sketches of
George D. Rosengarten, Martin Kalbfleish, Alex-
ander Cochrane, James Jay Mapes, Eugene R. Gras-
selli, George T. Lewis, Lucien C. Warner, Edward
Mallinckrodt, August Klipstein, Ernest C. Klipstein,
Martin Dennis, Jacob Hasslacher, John F. Queeny,
and Frank S. Washburn.
4736. Meisel, Max. A bibliography of American
natural history; the pioneer century, 1769-
1865; the role played by the scientific societies; scien-
tific journals; natural history museums and botanic
gardens; state geological and natural history surveys;
federal exploring expeditions in the rise and progress
of American botany, geology, mineralogy, paleon-
tology and zoology. Brooklyn, N. Y., Premier Pub.
Co., 1924-29. 3 v. 24-30970 Z7408.U5M5
Contents. — v. 1. An annotated bibliography of
the publications relating to the history, biography
and bibliography of American natural history and
to institutions, during colonial times and the pio-
neer century, which have been published up to 1924;
with a classified subject and geographic index; and
a bibliography of biographies. — v. 2. The institutions
which have contributed to the rise and progress of
American natural history, which were founded
or organized between 1769 and 1844. — v. 3. The in-
stitutions founded or organized between 1845 and
1865. Bibliography of books. Chronological tables.
Index to authors and institutions. Addenda to v. 1.
This work presents in a convenient form so much
information concerning the sciences, persons, and
institutions with which it is concerned that it is far
more than a bibliography. It traces "bibliographi-
cally the rise and progress of natural history in the
United States, from the formation of an active
American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia in
1769, to the close of the Civil War in 1865," and is
an invaluable guide for all those who are interested
in the several branches of natural history which,
otherwise, have very limited representation in this
chapter. In volumes 2 and 3, the institutional bibli-
ographies, arranged according to date of foundation,
are each preceded by a brief history of the organiza-
tion in question.
4737. Merrill, George P. The first one hundred
years of American geology. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1924. xxi, 773 p.
24-21175 QE13.U6M6
The author was Head Curator of Geology, U. S.
National Museum, from 1897 until his death in
1929. This was his third and most comprehensive \
book on the history of North American geology up
to the end of the 19th century. Progress during that
century, according to Merrill, was "due almost
wholly to the accumulation of observed facts and
the conclusions drawn therefrom," large deductive
hypotheses and synthetic research being impossible
until toward its close. Chapter I deals with a period
dominated by the Scottish-born William Maclure
who made the first geological map of the United \
States (1809, rev. 1817), described as "the first map ',
of its scope in the history of geology." Chapter II .
describes the influence of Amos Eaton, "the most
prominent worker as well as the most profuse writer
of the decade." Chapters III to VIII outline the
work of State surveys during the five decades from
1830 to 1880, and the national surveys which cul-
minated in the establishment of the U. S. Geological
Survey in 1879. The former are documented in
even greater detail in Merrill's Contributions to a
History of American State Geological and Natural
History Surveys (Washington, Govt. Print. Off.,
1920. 549 p.). The book concludes with a dis-
cussion of the age of the earth as variously estimated
by a number of geologists and other scientists.
4738. Smallwood, William Martin. Natural his-
tory and the American mind. In collabora-
tion with Mabel Sarah Coon Smallwood. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1941. xiii, 445 p.
illus. (Columbia studies in American culture,
no. 8) 41-16864 QH21.U5S5
Bibliography: p. [3551-424.
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 633
"Broadly speaking, natural history included all
the concrete sciences," but usually in the form of
composite observations without the application of
rigorous deductive method. The authors trace this
habit of mind in the writings of explorers and
travelers in the new continent, and its occasional
penetration into the curricula of the colonial colleges.
In the course of the 18th century natural history be-
came a serious avocation in Charleston, Philadelphia,
New York, and Boston, where it stimulated the
establishment of museums, societies, and scientific
journals. One chapter deals with the part played
by the microscope, and the last records the passing
of the exploring naturalist, whose place was taken
first by the classifying naturalist, and then by the
scientific specialist. The authors have selected for
inclusion in this book those individuals who seem
typical of the "naturalist's period" (1725 to 1840
or 50). The extensive bibliography indicates the
wide-spread research that has gone into this study
which, like natural history itself, is miscellaneous
and scattering, but contains many interesting
glimpses of early American culture.
4739. Smith, David Eugene, and Jekuthiel Gins-
burg. A history of mathematics in America
before 1900. Chicago, Published by the Mathemati-
cal Association of America with the cooperation of
the Open Court Pub. Co., 1934. 209 p. (The
Carus mathematical monographs, no. 5)
34-9605 QA27.U5S6
The monographs in this series are intended for
teachers and students specializing in mathematics,
for scientific workers in other fields, and for laymen
who wish to increase their knowledge without pro-
longed study. Here the authors are primarily in-
terested in original research in higher mathematics.
They consider the racial inheritance of the colonists,
and their limited needs even for applied mathe-
matics. The development of college work, the
formation of scientific societies, and the publication
of a few mathematical articles in journals still left
"modern mathematics . . . substantially unknown
in America in the 18th century." The third chapter
surveys the work of the 19th century down to 1875,
largely "a time of preparation for action." The
final chapter, nearly half the book, covers the last
quarter of the century, which "saw laid the founda-
tions upon which the scholars of today have so suc-
cessfully built." It points out the original work
then accomplished in algebra, theory of functions,
quantics or forms, transformations, calculus, differ-
ential equations, theory of numbers, probability,
geometry, and other branches.
431240—60— — 42
4740. Smith, Edgar F. Chemistry in America;
chapters from the history of the science in
the United States. New York, Appleton, 1914.
xiii, 356 p. 14-5967 QD18.U6S6
By the end of the 18th century chemistry was
already a part of the curriculum of the University
of Pennsylvania and the American Philosophical
Society (1743), although devoted to other subjects,
did not exclude chemistry from its interests. "The
earliest chemical contribution from this country,
bearing the date September 10, 1768, appears on the
pages of the Transactions of this Society" [in vol.
1, 1789]. From that beginning, the author has
brought together a miscellany of original materials
such as lectures, monographs, and letters, with brief
biographies of Benjamin Silliman, Robert Hare,
J. Lawrence Smith, M. Carey Lea, Oliver Walcott
Gibbs, and others, illustrating the development of
chemistry in America for more than a hundred
years. Several quite long pieces, such as Thomas
P. Smith's Sketch of the Revolutions in Chemistry
(Philadelphia, 1798), are reprinted in full. The
result is an unsystematic source book rather than
"chapters of history."
4741. Welker, Robert Henry. Birds and men;
American birds in science, art, literature,
and conservation, 1 800-1 900. Cambridge, Belknap
Press of Harvard University Press, 1955. 230 p.
55-11608 QL681.W4
Selected bibliography: p. [2I3J-220.
The birds of North America have been described
in the writings of explorers, naturalists, and literary
men since Columbus, but modern ornithology in
the United States began at the opening of the 19th
century, when the pioneer specialist, Alexander Wil-
son (1766-1813), made his tour of the eastern cities,
the Ohio and Mississippi Valley frontier, and the
Deep South in search of material for his American
Ornithology (Philadelphia, 1808-14. 9 v.). Mr.
Welker's book is a guide to our 19th-century ornitho-
logical literature, and to its interrelations with Amer-
ican belles-lettres, painting, and popular attitudes.
In addition to chapters on Wilson and Audubon,
the bird artist who was unknown until discovered by
Wilson, there are discussions of the place of birds
in the writings of Thoreau, Emerson, Whitman,
Burroughs, and others. By the end of the century
groups for the study and protection of birds had
organized the fights against bird-destroying "boys,
pot-hunters, women," in a movement for state and
federal protection laws which became wide-spread
early in the 20th century. A well selected series
of plates illustrates the steady progress in drawing
birds, and some instances in which Audubon helped
himself to Wilson's sketches.
634 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
C. Individual Scientists
4742. [AgassizJ Marcou, Jules. Life, letters, and
works of Louis Agassiz. New York, Mac-
millan, 1895. 2 v. illus. 4-17043/2 QH31.A2M3
His reputation already established by his work on
the classification of fishes, the geological distribution
of fossil fish, and the glacial theory of the earth,
Louis Agassiz (1807-1873) came to the United
States in 1846 to deliver a series of Lowell Institute
lectures, and remained to become a leader among
American naturalists. The author was "the last
survivor of the small band of European naturalists
who came to America with him," and strove to
temper admiration with justice. The quotations are
limited to "letters of Agassiz, addressed to practical
naturalists, his contemporaries, working on kindred
subjects," but include none used by Mrs. Elizabeth
Cary Agassiz in her life of her husband (1885).
The first volume covers Agassiz' life from his birth
in a village in French Switzerland to his arrival in
Boston 39 years later. The second narrates his life
in the United States — his professorship at Harvard,
his association with scientific organizations and ex-
peditions, and his relations to the intellectual society
of the period. "By far the most important contri-
bution of Agassiz to natural history during his life
in America," Marcou thought, was the Essay on
Classification published in 1857 as tne introduction
to a massive work on the natural history of the
United States which was left incomplete after four
volumes had appeared. An annotated list of pub-
lications concerning Agassiz and a catalog of his
scientific writings appear in the Appendixes.
Louis Agassiz, Scientist and Teacher, by James D.
Teller (Columbus, Ohio State University Press,
1947. 145 p.) discusses "the effect that his per-
sonality and vigorous method of attacking the un-
known had on the development of teaching and
research in America."
4743* [Audubon] Herrick, Francis H. Audubon
the naturalist, a history of his life and time.
2d ed. New York, Appleton-Century, 1938. 2 v.
in 1. illus. 38-27162 QL31.A9H4 1938
"Original documents": v. 2, p. [313]— 379-
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 401-461.
The son of a French planter in Santo Domingo,
John James Audubon (1785-1851) left France in
1803 for his father's American estate, Mill Grove,
located along Perkiomen Creek in Pennsylvania.
It was there that he became interested in American
bird life and carried out the first "banding" experi-
ment, repeated a hundred years later by the Bird
Banding Society, "in order to gather exact data upon
the movements of individuals of all migratory
species in every part of the continent." From about
1805 he was more or less constantly engaged in
drawing or painting birds, which he continued
after his removal to Kentucky in 1807, and even
after financial disaster overtook him in 1819. He
eventually found a London engraver and publisher
for The Birds of America, which appeared in 87
numbers of 5 plates each during the years 1827-38.
The 435 hand-colored copper-plate engravings were
finally bound into four elephant folio volumes, at
$1,000 the set. The venture was supported by 82
American and 79 European subscribers. Audubon's
text explanatory of the engravings was separately
published at Edinburgh as Ornithological Biography
(1831-39. 5 v.). The present life, the first edition
of which appeared in 1917, is crowded with bio-
graphical detail, in part derived from a "unique
and extraordinary collection of Audubonian records"
which the author discovered in a small French town.
Audubon has become the patron saint of American
nature students and wildlife conservationists: the
numerous State and local Audubon societies bear
his name; Mill Grove has been made into a memorial
and sanctuary; and 1951 was designated as the
Audubon Centennial Year.
4744. [Baird] Dall, William Healey. Spencer
Fullerton Baird; a biography, including
selections from his correspondence with Audubon,
Agassiz, Dana, and others. Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott, 1915. xvi, 462 p. 15-11472 QL31.B25D2
Baird (1823-1887) was the second Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution (1878), who also became the
first U. S. Commissioner of Fish and Fisheries, and
organized the work of the Commission, the predeces-
sor agency of the present Fish and Wildlife Service.
This biography is based on data collected and ar-
ranged by his daughter, Lucy Hunter Baird, Baird's
original journal extending from 1838 to 1887, and
a quantity of miscellaneous material collected by
Herbert A. Gill, an associate in the Fish Commis-
sion. The greater part of its text consists of letters
written to or by other scientists, which afford an
intimate and lively view of the scientific life in mid-
century. As an officer of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion from 1850, Baird developed and maintained the
National Museum, and as Commissioner of Fisheries
he won international recognition through his scien-
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 635
tific research into the maintenance of food-fish
populations.
4745. [Bartram] Earnest, Ernest P. John and
William Bartram, botanists and explorers,
1699-1777, 1739-1823. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1940. 187 p. (Pennsylvania
lives) 41-86 QK31.B3E3
Bibliographical note: p. 1 81-182.
John Bartram, described by Linnaeus as the
"greatest natural botanist in the world," established
a botanical garden on his farm on the Schuylkill
River as early as 1729 or 1730. He won a reputation
before Franklin, whom he willingly joined in creat-
ing a scientific and cultural center in Philadelphia.
He became one of the nine founders of the Ameri-
can Philosophical Society. By correspondence and
exchange of plants, by traveling throughout the
colonies and publishing their observations, John
Bartram and his son William made the natural his-
tory of America known to Europeans. Here the
author attempts to clear up some problems that still
remain concerning William, but deals more fully
with John, "because of his pioneer work, his great
originality, and the lack of any complete study of his
life and work." See also nos. 4236-4238, 4247-4250.
4746. [Bowditch] Berry, Robert Elton. Yankee
stargazer; the life of Nathaniel Bowditch.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1941. 234 p.
41-28345 QB36.B7B4
"Among the sources": p. 225-227.
The author has used Nathaniel Bowditch's sea
journals and notebooks, the memoirs of his sons and
friends, and the diaries of contemporaries to pro-
duce this biography of the New England astronomer
and mathematician. Bowditch (1773-1838) had
little formal schooling, but read scientific books dur-
ing his years in a cooper shop and a ship chandlery.
Life on the Salem water front aroused his interest
in navigation, and his ability to make calculations
impressed Captain John Gibaut, who offered him
a chance to go to sea. Six of the twelve chapters
describe Bowditch's experiences on the five voyages
which he made between 1795 and 1803, and the
observations which led to his publications on celes-
tial navigation. The New American Practical Navi-
gator (1802), known as "the seaman's bible," or
more simply as "Bowditch," became the textbook
in private schools of navigation, and standard equip-
ment in most sea chests. Regularly reprinted, it
has been published since 1868 by the U. S. Govern-
ment. In later years Bowditch published his trans-
lation of the Mecanique celeste, and "made an epoch
in American science by bringing the great work of
Laplace down to the reach of the best American
students of his time." Bowditch modesdy dis-
claimed comparison with seminal minds like La-
place and Newton, but his works have been "the
greatest single influence on United States naviga-
tion and seamanship."
4747. [Compton] Compton, Arthur Holly.
Atomic quest, a personal narrative. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1956. 370 p.
56-1 1 1 14 QC773.A1C65
This book is at once a history of atomic energy
and the personal narrative of one of the outstanding
scientists responsible for initiating and carrying
through the wartime atomic project in the United
States. The author (b. 1892) describes the research
that led to the release of atomic energy in useful
amounts, the proposal of an atomic weapon to the
government, the preparation of the atomic explo-
sives, and the decisions which preceded their use
in World War II. In view of the unprecedented
destructiveness of atomic weapons, the author con-
cludes that "we can see the powers that shape our
destiny working with us toward the elimination of
war." Dr. Compton's early life is briefly narrated
in Chapter 3. From 1945 to 1953 he was chancellor
of Washington University in St. Louis, where he
sought to go beyond the traditional education pro-
gram, and to create a "new vision of world affairs"
and "an enduring civilization where men and
women can rise to the best that is in them." George
O. Robinson's And What of Tomorrow (New York,
Comet Press Books, 1956. 178 p.) combines a nar-
rative of "the atomic adventure" of the Manhattan
Project with many human interest stories illustrat-
ing the devotion of the scientists and other workers
to their task. The names of universities and other
organizations participating in long-term research
programs for the adaptation of atomic energy to
peacetime uses suggest the possibilities opening
before us.
4748. [Cope] Osborn, Henry Fairfield. Cope:
master naturalist; the life and letters of Ed-
ward Drinker Cope, with a bibliography of his writ-
ings classified by subject; a study of the pioneer and
foundadon periods of vertebrate paleontology in
America. With the co-operation of Helen Ann
Warren. Illustrated with drawings, and restora-
tions by Charles R. Knight under the direction of
Professor Cope. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1 93 1. xvi, 740 p. 31-11875 QH31.C8O72
Edward Drinker Cope (1 840-1 897) was the rival
of Othniel C. Marsh in the field of vertebrate pale-
ontology, and the controversy between the two con-
tinued for 25 years. The appearance of this biog-
raphy of Cope hastened the publication of Schu-
chert's life of Marsh (no. 4754). The author has had
access to the lifelong correspondence of Cope with
636 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
his family, which throws "new light on his per-
sonality" and "forms a priceless picture of the United
States in the Civil and post-Civil War period."
The years of exploration and discovery (to 1880),
the period of research, publication, and interpreta-
tion (to 1889), and Cope's professorship in the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania are described in detail.
Chapter 7 tells how Cope applied "his wonderful
powers of generalization and induction" to shine
"forth as a creative thinker alike in Herpetology,
Ichthyology, Geology, Mammalogy," as well as in
vertebrate paleontology, and so deserves the tide
of "Master Naturalist." The classified bibliography
of Cope's principal papers fills 150 pages (591-740).
4749. [Dana] Gilman, Daniel C. The life of
James Dwight Dana, scientific explorer,
mineralogist, geologist, zoologist, professor in Yale
University. New York, Harper, 1899. 409 p.
99-5509 QE22.D26G4
Bibliography of Dana's writings: p. 385-394.
Dr. Gilman, famous as the first president of Johns
Hopkins University, had been a colleague of Dana
at Yale, where he taught geography until 1872.
He calls his life of Dana (1813-1895) "personal
rather than scientific." However, Dana's "Scien-
tific Correspondence" forms Part II of the book
(p. 219 ff.) and more than a hundred pages are
devoted to the U. S. Exploring Expedition under
Captain Charles Wilkes (1838-42). It was his
reports as the mineralogist and geologist of that
expedition, published between 1846 and 1854, which
established Dana's position in those fields at home
and abroad. As editor of the American Journal of
Science, as author of A System of Mineralogy (1837)
and a Manual of Geology (1862) which went
through numerous editions, and as the first Silliman
Professor of Natural History (later changed to Ge-
ology and Mineralogy) at Yale, he remained at the
head of his profession, and received many academic
honors and scientific medals.
4750. [Franklin] Franklin, Benjamin. Benjamin
Franklin's Experiments; a new edition of
Franklin's Experiments and observations on elec-
tricity. Edited, with a critical and historical introd.,
by I. Bernard Cohen. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1941. xxviii, 453 p.
A41-4483 QC516.F85 1941
"Bibliographical table": p. 158-161.
Benjamin Franklin (1706-1790) was able to de-
vote only six or seven years to concentrated scientific
inquiry, but they brought him enduring fame as the
world's foremost "electrician." During the years
1747-49 "he laid the foundations of modern electrical
science," and in his book he introduced much of its
enduring terminology. In characteristic 18th-
century style, Franklin put his scientific writings
into the form of letters; those collected in his Experi-
ments and Observations on Electricity were ad-
dressed to Peter Collinson, Ebenezer Kinnersley,
and others of scientific bent, and are supplemented
by a number of letters to Franklin commenting upon
his theories. Mr. Cohen's text is in part based upon
Franklin's manuscript letters, which are fuller than
the printed versions. His long and scholarly intro-
duction deals with Franklin's scientific interests in
general, electrical knowledge before Franklin, the
nature and significance of Franklin's electrical dis-
coveries, and the editions and translations of Experi-
ments and Observations which appeared between
175 1 and 1774.
4751. [Gibbs] Wheeler, Lynde Phelps. Josiah
Willard Gibbs; the history of a great mind.
Rev. ed. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1952.
270 p. 52-14822 QA29.G5W5 1952
Bibliography: p. [25i]-256.
The scion of an old Connecticut family, Willard
Gibbs ( 1 839-1903) received the fifth doctorate con-
ferred by Yale, the first American university to recog-
nize graduate study, and was professor of mathe-
matical physics there from 1871 until his death. The
author, a former student of Gibbs, evaluates the work
of his teacher as an exponent of thermodynamics,
statistical mechanics, and optics, and describes him
as a quiet, unassuming scholar completely devoid of
the eccentricities usually ascribed to genius. But a
genius he was, with "a mind which proceeded from
ascertained facts to their utmost implications by such
rigorous logic that not one of his conclusions has ever
been found in error." Gibbs' influence was exerted
almost entirely through his writings, which received
early recognition and interpretation abroad. The
publication (1876-78) of his paper "On the Equilib-
rium of Heterogeneous Substances," which was
something of an act of faith on the part of the Con-
necticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, proved a
landmark in the development of modern physics and
in the spread of Gibbs' fame. The enduring im-
portance of his work dealing with the relations of
heat to other forms of energy was emphasized by
Yale University on the 100th anniversary of his birth
in a brochure prepared by the President's Committee
on University Development: A Professor's Theory
and Its Practical Uses: The Wor\ of /. Willard Gibbs
and Some Applications to Industry. Its calls Gibbs
"one of the great scientists of modern times, and one
of the architects of the industry which is so important
a part of our civilization."
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 637
4752. [Henry] Coulson, Thomas. Joseph Henry,
his life and work. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1950. 352 p.
50-7249 QC16.H37C6
Bibliography: p. 344-346.
The director of museum research, Franklin Insti-
tute of the State of Pennsylvania, has written the
first full-length biography of this 19th-century
physicist in order to establish his rightful place
among America's great men of science. Henry
(1797-1878) lost his own papers by fire in 1865, so
the author has relied heavily on the letters found
among the manuscript records of the Smithsonian
Institution for glimpses into his life and work. The
first half of the book is devoted, for the most part,
to Henry's experiments during his tenure as pro-
fessor at Albany Academy, and at Princeton. About
1830 he discovered the principles of electromagnetic
induction which, with his ten other basic discoveries
in the electrical realm, have been essential to practi-
cally every commercial application of electricity,
including the telegraph, telephone, and radio. The
last half of the book describes Henry as the first
director of the Smithsonian Institution (from 1846),
and as a protagonist in the "telegraph controversy"
with Samuel F. B. Morse, as to their respective
shares in its invention. It summarizes his place in
science as a discoverer, an organizer, and an ex-
ponent of the value of collective research.
4753. [Jefferson] Martin, Edwin T. Thomas
Jefferson: scientist. New York, Schuman,
1952. 289 p. 52-7559 E332-M33
References: p. 261-283.
Thomas Jefferson (1743-1826) "enjoyed a high
contemporary repute both as a statesman of broad
culture and as a scientist, who applied 'philosophy'
for the good of his native country and the general
human welfare." His correspondence reveals his
dual devotion to science and to public service. This
is the most extensive analysis to date of Jefferson's
broad and insatiable interest in science. It is not
only a study of the man — his scientific character-
istics, attitudes, practices, and principles — but also a
history of American scientific development during
his age — inventions, the study of fossils, geology,
meteorology, etc. Jefferson's eagerness to refute the
misrepresentations of America made by Buffon,
DePauw, Raynal, and other Europeans, led to the
publication of his Notes on the State of Virginia
(1781-82) (nos. 150-153). Chapter 9 on "Politics,
Religion, and Science" quotes from contemporary
sources to illustrate how Jefferson was assailed by his
political opponents because of his concern for science.
Dr. Charles A. Browne's study of the sources of
some of Jefferson's scientific opinions: Thomas Jef-
ferson and the Scientific Trends of His Time ( t Wal-
tham, Mass., Chronica Botanica Co.] 1944. [3633—
423 p.), reprinted from volume 8, number 3 of the
Chronica Botanica, is conveniendy brief.
4754. [Marsh] Schuchert, Charles, and Clara
Mae LeVene. O. C. Marsh, pioneer in
paleontology. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1940. xxi, 541 p. 40-14583 QE707.M4S32
Dr. Schuchert made the acquaintance of Marsh
in 1892, and in 1904 succeeded to his chair of pale-
ontology at Yale; Miss LeVene, as a staff member
of Yale's Peabody Museum of Natural History, proc-
essed the Marsh Papers. Othniel C. Marsh (1831-
1899) was a nephew of the eminent philanthropist
George Peabody, who presented Yale with the Mu-
seum in 1866. In the same year the Yale Corpora-
tion established the first American chair of
paleontology for the nephew, but attached no salary
to it until 1896. Professor Marsh therefore felt free
to put his major efforts into exploring the Far West
for fossil remains, with results summed up in his
two great monographs published by the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey in 1896: The Dinosaurs of North
America and Vertebrate Fossils [of the Denver
Basin]. In 1882 he became the vertebrate paleon-
tologist of the U. S. Geological Survey, which did
compensate his services, and obtained much of his
later collections. Marsh was the originator of the
"authentic skeletal restorations" of the dinosaurs,
which caught the public eye and brought him con-
temporary fame. The volume concludes with a
"List of Marsh Genera" (p. 495-501) and a chrono-
logical list of some 300 titles written by Marsh (p.
503-526).
4755. [Millikan] Millikan, Robert A. Autobiog-
raphy. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xiv,
311 p. 50-7302 QC16.M58A3
To the names of the world-renowned physicists
who have been awarded the Nobel prize, that of
Robert A. Millikan (1868-1953) was added in 1923,
"for his work on the uniform electric charge and
the photo-electric effect." His fame was first estab-
lished by his experimental measurements of the
electric quantum of elements, which he succeeded in
determining within one-thousandth of a degree of
exactitude. Appointed professor of physics at the
University of Chicago in 1902, Millikan served as
director of the Norman Bridge Laboratory of Phys-
ics and executive head of the California Institute of
Technology from 192 1 until 1945. Written in a
style "not beyond the comprehension of a twelfth-
grade student who has had an elementary course in
physics," Millikan's autobiography reflects the im-
pact of the physical sciences on modern life. It nar-
rates such episodes in his life as the experimental
proof of the existence of the photon, the organiza-
638 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion of the National Research Council, the mobiliz-
ing of science for both World War I and II, and the
building of Caltech into a great research center for
science and engineering. The reader is conscious
throughout of Dr. Millikan's views on the relation-
ship between science and religion, and on the re-
sponsibility of the United States for the maintenance
of world peace.
4756. [Newcomb] Newcomb, Simon. The remi-
niscences of an astronomer. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1903. 424 p. 3-24278 QB36.N5
Simon Newcomb's (1835-1909) important in-
vestigations in planetary and lunar motion brought
him honorary membership in more than forty scien-
tific organizations in some eighteen nations, and
honorary degrees from at least seventeen universi-
ties in ten nations. The results of his investigations
have been adopted, more or less completely, by all
nations for use in their nautical almanacs. A cen-
tury after his birth he became the first astronomer
to be elected to the American Hall of Fame. New-
comb tells in a simple, direct fashion the story of
his coming from Nova Scotia to the United States
as a teacher, his chance meeting with Joseph Henry,
his work as an astronomer and mathematician at
the Naval Observatory, and his superintendence of
the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac.
He describes his interests in such diverse subjects as
psychical research, education, and political economy.
More than an autobiography, his Reminiscences
portray the status of science and the work of scien-
tists at home and abroad during the last half of the
19th century.
4757. [Powell] Darrah, William C. Powell of
the Colorado. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 195 1. 426 p.
51-11671 Q143.P8D25
Bibliography: p. [40i]~4i2.
The author, a paleobotanist and engineer in-
terested in the history of American science, spent
ten years gathering the materials for this biography
of a man who was both a distinguished geologist
and a great public servant. It emphasizes his strug-
gle to conserve the natural wealth of the West, to
record the history of the American Indian, and to
promote scientific research by the Government.
After engaging in privately financed explorations
in 1867-69, John Wesley Powell (1834-1902) made
a thorough survey of the Colorado region on behalf
of the Department of the Interior. In the report,
Exploration of the Colorado River of the West and
Its Tributaries, compiled by Powell for the Smith-
sonian Institution, he pointed out that the formation
of canyons is due to corrosive action of rivers on
rocks, and coined phrases which have become part
of every geologist's vocabulary. With his position
as a geologist established, Powell took a leading part
in the movement which in 1879 consolidated the
overlapping government ventures into the U. S.
Geological Survey. The Bureau of American Eth-
nology was established at the same time; Powell was
put at its head, and in the following year took over
the Survey, administering both agencies until 1894,
when ill health compelled him to relinquish the
Survey. Other recent publications reflect a lively
interest in "the Major": in 1954 appeared another
full-length biography, by Wallace Earle Stegner
(q. v.). Paul Meadows' John Wesley Powell:
Frontiersman of Science is number 10 in the new
series of University of Nebraska studies, July 1952
(106 p.).
4758. [Rittenhouse] Ford, Edward. David Rit-
tenhouse, astronomer-patriot, 1 732-1 796.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1946.
226 p. (Pennsylvania lives)
46-5428 QB36.R4F6
This is the first full-length biography of Ritten-
house (1732-1796) since the Memoirs, by his
nephew, William Barton, appeared in 18 13. Born
near Germantown, Pa., of Mennonite stock, Ritten-
house at 11 received an uncle's legacy of tools and
books which aroused his interest in mathematics and
mechanics. As a farmer, maker of clocks and
mathematical instruments, he spent the first 35 years
of his life at Norriton. During 1767-71 he built two
brass orreries, working models of the solar system,
which went to the Colleges of New Jersey and of
Philadelphia, and were among the wonders of their
day, greatly enhancing the reputation of their maker.
He interrupted this labor in order to prepare for and
make observations of the transit of Venus on June 3,
1769, with the aid of specially designed instruments,
which earned him a place among the world's as-
tronomers. After moving to Philadelphia in 1770,
Rittenhouse began a daily record of weather data
which he kept up until his death. He was fre-
quently engaged on boundary and canal surveys
during the colonial period. He served on the Com-
mittee of Safety during the American Revolution,
became a member of the General Assembly, state
treasurer, and first Director of the U. S. Mint.
4759. [Silliman] Fulton, John F., and Elizabeth
H. Thomson. Benjamin Silliman, 1779-
1864, pathfinder in American science. New York,
Schuman, 1947. 294 p. (Life of science library)
47-11526 Q143.S56F8
Historical Library, Yale University School of
Medicine, Publication no. 16.
"Bibliography and sources": p. 279-284.
Born in Fairfield, Connecticut, during the Ameri-
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 639
can Revolution, Benjamin Silliman reached maturity
at a period when a widespread interest in chemistry
was emerging. When only 23 he was elected to the
newly created chair of chemistry and natural history
at Yale, where he taught for more than half a cen-
tury. Silliman made few original contributions to
science, but won distinction as an "ambassador of
science" through effective teaching, and by founding
a medical school, a department for postgraduate
study, and in 1847, the original chairs of the Sheffield
Scientific School. His influence was extended out-
side the University by his founding of the American
Journal of Science (1818), which was "intended to
embrace the circle of the physical sciences with their
applications to the arts and to every other useful
service," and, after 1833, by public lectures in cities
as far away as Pittsburgh and New Orleans. This,
the first comprehensive biography of Silliman since
1866, is based on family letters as well as on manu-
script materials in Yale University and other
repositories.
4760. [Torrey] Rodgers, Andrew Denny. John
Torrey; a story of North American botany.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1942. 352 p.
42-19817 QK31.T7R6
Bibliography: p. |ji6]-333.
The history of American botany of the 19th cen-
tury has been written by the author, a grandson of
Sullivant, in this and two other books: "Noble
Fellow," William Starling Sullivant (New York,
Putnam, 1940. 361 p.), and American Botany,
i8j3-i8gi: Decades of Transition (Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1944. 340 p.), which
deals particularly with Asa Gray and his associates.
The taxonomic work of John Torrey (1796-1873),
botanist and chemist, influenced all those who fol-
lowed him, although his reputation was eventually
eclipsed by Asa Gray (1810-1888). Much of the
information in this book derives from Torrey 's own
correspondence, never before collected. Torrey
spent most of his life in New York City, and some
of his best known works are on the flora of his
native state. He collaborated with Asa Gray in
compiling the Flora of North America (New York,
1838-43), which describes all indigenous and
naturalized plants growing north of Mexico, ar-
ranged according to "the natural system." He pre-
pared botanical catalogs for the United States Ex-
ploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes, the Fre-
mont Exploring Expedition to the Rocky Mountains,
and others.
D. Science and Government
4761. Baxter, James Phinney. Scientists against
time. Boston, Little, Brown, 1946. 473 p.
46-7204 Q127.U6B3
The Office of Scientific Research and Develop-
ment was created in 194 1 "for the purpose of assur-
ing adequate provisions for research on scientific
and medical problems relating to the national de-
fense." In this official history of the OSRD, the
president of Williams College tells the story of the
transition in methods of warfare up to the use of
the atomic bomb. He describes the race for supe-
riority in new weapons in World War II, the new
devices that were developed, the contributions of
chemical research to the prosecution of the war, the
discovery and use of new medicines for the treat-
ment of military personnel, and the selection and
training of scientists. A series of volumes, Science
in World War II, covers in much greater detail the
operations of OSRD. In that series Irvin Stewart's
Organizing Scientific Research for War (Boston,
Little, Brown, 1948. 358 p.), an administrative
history of the Office, is of special interest for the
relationship between government and science during
a period of emergency. The OSRD was terminated
by Executive Order in December 1947, and its liqui-
dation entrusted to the National Military Establish-
ment (now the Department of Defense).
4762. Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C.
Institute for Government Research. Service
monographs of the United States Government. Bal-
timore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1919-28. 10 v.
JK421.A1B6
The Institute for Government Research was estab-
lished in 1916 as an "independent institution to con-
sider the problems of public administration, and
particularly those of the National Government, for
the purposes of making known the most scientific
practical principles and procedures that should ob-
tain in the conduct of public affairs." Financed
from the outset by the late Robert S. Brookings, in
1927 it was combined with two other such enter-
prises to form the Brookings Institution. As the
basis for a comprehensive study of the organization
and operation of the National Government, the Insti-
tute published this series of monographs describing
the history, activities, and organization of some 55
United States Government agencies. Each mono-
64O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
graph contains a bibliography which lists relevant
Government documents and other sources. The
following have been selected as being particularly
pertinent to the interrelations of science and Gov-
ernment. Numbers 1 and 9 were published by D.
Appleton and Company, New York.
4763. 1. The U. S. Geological Survey . . . 1919.
163 p. 19-9267 QE76.B7
4764. 9. The Weather Bureau ... by Gustavus
A. Weber. 1922. 87 p.
22-19464 Q875.U7W4
4765. 10. The Public Health Service ... by
Laurence F. Schmeckebier. 1923. 298 p.
23-8224 RA11.B19S3
4766. 16. The Coast and Geodetic Survey . . .
by Gustavus A. Weber. 1923. 107 p.
23-8296 QB296.U85 1923
4767. 31. The Patent Office ... by Gustavus A.
Weber. 1924. 127 p.
24-4936 T223.P2W4
4768. 32. The Office of Experiment Stations . . .
by Milton Conover. 1924. 178 p.
24-8456 S21.E9C6
4769. 35. The Bureau of Standards ... by Gus-
tavus A. Weber. 1925. 299 p.
25-23707 QC100.U58 1925
4770. 39. The Naval Observatory ... by Gustavus
A. Weber. 1926. 101 p.
26-9845 QB82.U85
4771. 42. The Hydrographic Office ... by Gus-
tavus A. Weber. 1926. 112 p.
26-15570 VK597.U5W4
4772. 52. The Bureau of Chemistry and Soils . . .
by Gustavus A. Weber. 1928. 218 p.
29-2042 S585.W4
4773. Gellhorn, Walter. Security, loyalty, and
science. Ithaca, Cornell University Press,
1950. 300 p. (Cornell studies in civil liberty)
50-14649 UB270.G42
The contributions of science toward winning a
war, and the expanding reliance of national defense
on scientific developments have restricted, in some
areas, the exchange of ideas between scientists whose
individual freedoms have been curtailed in the na-
tional interest. Made possible by a grant from the
Rockefeller Foundation, this is one of Cornell's series
of studies of "the impact upon our civil liberties of
current governmental programs designed to ensure
internal security and to expose and control disloyal
or subversive conduct." It deals with the adminis-
tration of security policies in "sensitive" areas of
scientific research. Chapter 8 emphasizes the need
for fair procedures, and the author's "Concluding
Thoughts" warn that "the focus upon opinion as a
measure of loyalty tends to discourage the holding
of any opinion at all."
4774. National Academy of Sciences, Washington,
D. C. A history of the first half-century of
the National Academy of Sciences, 1863-1913.
Edited by Frederick W. True. Washington, 1913.
399 P- .. 13-35434 Q11.N286
"To afford recognition to those men of science who
had done original work of real importance and
thereby to stimulate them and others to further en-
deavors; and to aid the Government in the solution
of technical scientific problems having a practical
bearing on the conduct of public business," Con-
gress chartered the National Academy of Sciences in
1863. The story of the Academy's accomplishments
during its first 50 years includes a chapter on "The
Academy as the Scientific Adviser of the Govern-
ment." In that role its studies have shaped the cre-
ation of various Government agencies such as the
U. S. Forest Service and the Geological Survey. In
addition to its many publications in the several
sciences, the National Academy, since 1877, has pub-
lished a series of Biographical memoirs which often
contain information concerning American scientists
not otherwise available. The National Research
Council originated in 19 16, when the National
Academy addressed President Wilson, offering to
coordinate the non-governmental scientific and tech-
nical resources of the country with the military and
naval agencies of the Government in the interest of
national security. The Council was reorganized on
a permanent basis in 1919. A History of the Na-
tional Research Council, /9/9-/95J (Washington,
The Council, 1933. 61 p.) has been published as
no. 106 of the Council's Reprint and circular series.
4775. Oehser, Paul H. Sons of science; the story
of the Smithsonian Institution and its lead-
ers. New York, Schuman, 1949. xvii, 220 p.
(Life of science library) 49-526 Q11.S8O4
Selected bibliography: p. 205-208.
A concise history by the chief of the Smithsonian's
Editorial and Publications Division. Built and or-
ganized with funds provided by the will of James
Smithson (1765-1829), English scientist, "for the
increase and diffusion of knowledge among men,"
the Smithsonian Institution was incorporated in
1846. It may well be thought of as the first Ameri-
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 64I
can foundation of national scope, for "it enjoys the
advantages of a privately endowed institution and
at the same time is an establishment of the United
States government." The history of the Institution
is here organized around the careers of its secretaries,
all of whom have been scientists: Joseph Henry,
physicist (to 1878); Spencer Fullerton Baird, biolo-
gist (to 1887); Samuel Pierpont Langley, physicist
and astronomer (to 1907); Charles Doolittle Wal-
cott, geologist (to 1928); Charles Greely Abbot, as-
trophysicist (to 1945); and Alexander Wetmore,
biologist (to 1952). The growth of the Institution
is also traced in an increasing diversity of function
and complexity of organization. The ten subordi-
nate bureaus added from time to time include the
National Museum, the Bureau of American Eth-
nology, the International Exchange Service (for sci-
entific publications), the Astrophysical Observatory,
the National Zoological Park, the National Gallery
of Art, and the National Air Museum. The author
supplies a "Chronology of Principal Events," 1826-
1948 (p. 187-203) and 39 well-chosen illustrations in
gravure.
4776. Price, Don K. Government and science,
their dynamic relation in American democ-
racy. New York, New York University Press, 1954.
203 p. (James Stokes lectureship on politics)
54-8164 Q127.U6P7
The author, after serving with several research
organizations and government agencies, including
the Research and Development Board of the Depart-
ment of Defense, of which he was deputy chairman,
became vice president of the Ford Foundation in
1954. He draws upon this varied experience for
the present "series of essays," based upon lectures
delivered at New York University in 1953. In them
he suggests "that the activities of scientists, which
had always been unusually influential in the public
policies of the United States, were becoming respon-
sible for significant changes in the nature of the
American governmental system," and that "a whole
series of most profound and most neglected prob-
lems" were thereby created. He concludes that there
is a necessity for "creating the kind of responsible
political and administrative systems within which
free science will have its fullest opportunity for
public service." The only hope for such a system,
according to Mr. Price, "is to build in part on the
generalist with a background in general manage-
ment and general public affairs, and in part on the
man who has become a generalist after a thorough
grounding in one of the specialized sciences or in
its engineering or managerial application." Chapter
II, "Freedom or Responsibility," deals with the or-
ganization of the National Science Foundation, "the
only general-purpose science agency in the govern-
ment."
4777. U. S. National Resources Committee. Sci-
ence Committee. Research — a national re-
source. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.,
1938-41. 3 v. 39-26187 Q180.U5U45
Volumes 2-3 prepared for the Science Committee
of the National Resources Planning Board.
Volume 1 issued also as House document 122,
76th Congress, 1st session.
Contents. — 1. Relation of the Federal Govern-
ment to research. Report of the Science Committee
of the National Resources Committee. — 2. Indus-
trial research. Report of the National Research
Council. — 3. Business research. Report of an ad-
visory committee of the Social Science Research
Council.
Proceeding on President Franklin Roosevelt's
postulate that "research is one of the nation's very
greatest resources," the Science Committee, com-
posed of members designated by the National
Academy of Sciences, the Social Science Research
Council, and the American Council on Education,
conducted this study of Federal aid to research, and
of the place of research, including natural and social
science, in the Federal Government. Each volume
contains a summary of findings and recommenda-
tions for improvements in the area covered by the
volume. A number of these called for greater
cooperation between Government and private
research agencies.
4778. U. S. Office of Scientific Research and De-
velopment. Science, the endless frontier. A
report to the President by Vannevar Bush. July
1945. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1945.
184 p. 45~364I3 Q127.U6A53 1945
In 1944 President Roosevelt requested Dr. Van-
nevar Bush, Director of the Office of Scientific Re-
search and Development (1941-46), to recommend
means of applying its wartime experience in times
of peace, "for the improvement of the national
health, the creation of new enterprises bringing new
jobs, and the betterment of the national standard of
living." Among Dr. Bush's recommendations was
the creation of a national research foundation to
develop a national policy for scientific research and
scientific education. After five years of congres-
sional debate, an act embodying compromises to
satisfy divergent views was passed in 1950, creating
the National Science Foundation. On March 17,
1954, President Eisenhower issued Executive Order
10521 concerning Government scientific research
and the responsibilities of the National Science
Foundation and other Federal agencies. The text
of the order is given in Appendix V of the
642 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
National Science Foundation's Annual Report for
1954 (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.), which
also outlines the "Current Aspects of American
Science," and the "Program Activities of the Na-
tional Science Foundation."
4779. U. S. President's Scientific Research Board.
Science and public policy. A report to the
President by John R. Steelman. Washington, U. S.
Govt. Print. Off., 1947. 5 v.
47-46212 Q180.U5A47
"The administration of research; a selective
bibliography": v. 3, p. 253-324.
In an Executive order issued October 17, 1946,
the Chairman of the President's Scientific Research
Board, with the assistance of the Board, was in-
structed "to investigate and report upon the entire
scientific program of the Federal Government."
Social science research was omitted from this study,
as well as the content of the research programs of the
War and Navy Departments. Volume I, "A Pro-
gram for the Nation," sketches the country's posi-
tion in scientific research, and makes recommenda-
tions by which the Government can assure maximum
benefits to the Nation. Volume II, "The Federal
Research Program," reviews the details of the Gov-
ernment's scientific work, agency by agency, and
discusses typical projects. Volume III, "Adminis-
tration for Research," analyzes the Government's
administration of its own research programs, points
out problems and policy issues, and makes recom-
mendations for modernizing procedures. Volume
IV, "Manpower for Research," deals with the short-
age of scientists and teachers, and its threat to
progress. Volume V, "The Nation's Medical Re-
search," discusses progress in medical and allied
sciences, outlines the Federal program, and makes
recommendations for its administration.
E. Invention
4780. Amdur, Leon H. Patent fundamentals.
New York, Boardman, 1948. 305 p. illus.
T223.T2A55 1948
First published in 1941.
A main objective of this book "is to enable the lay-
man and the student to attain a rapid, yet sound, un-
derstanding of the U. S. Patent System." The
author explains in simple language the nature of in-
ventions that, according to law, can be patented, the
legal protection afforded the patentee, and the prepa-
ration and prosecution of an application for a patent.
Concrete examples illustrate the procedures. The
book includes the first "full and clear exposition" of
the grant of patents on new and distinct varieties of
plants, which became part of the patent law in 1930.
A final chapter considers patents as transferable
property, and briefly compares the patent system of
the United States with those of foreign nations.
George V. Woodling's Inventions and Their Protec-
tion, 2d ed. (New York, Boardman, 1954. 496 p.)
brings developments in the patent system up to date
(i953)-
4781. Berle, Alf K., and Lyon Sprague De Camp.
Inventions and their management. 3d ed.
Scranton, International Textbook Co., 195 1. xxv,
742 p. 51-14958 T212.B43 1951
Bibliography: p. 671-673.
Presents in one volume the principles and prac-
tices that control the technical, legal, and business
procedures of invention. The authors' purpose has
been to keep their book, originally published in
1937, up to date by providing information of service
to inventors and business men who are undertaking
creative work in the field of inventions and their
management. In addition to explaining the whole
process of patents and patent law, the book contains
chapters on trade-marks and copyrights, and legal
cases illustrating more than half of the topics. Chap-
ter 4 is a concise description of the organization and
functions of the U. S. Patent Office. There is a
substantial "Glossary" (p. 679-701) of legal terms
and words used in a special sense in patenting.
Floyd L. Vaughan explores the developments which
have circumvented the original objectives of the
patent law, and suggests remedies in his United
States Patent System (Norman, University of Okla-
homa Press, 1956. 355 p.).
4782. Bryan, George S. Edison, the man and his
works. New York, Knopf, 1926. 350 p.
26-19839 TK140.E3B7
Bibliography: p. 331-337.
"The Wizard of Menlo Park" became, for the
American popular mind, the embodiment of Ameri-
can inventive genius, and almost a figure of Amer-
ican folklore, other men's inventions being readily
attributed to him. Nevertheless, Edison's fame is
not undeserved, for he has hardly a parallel in the
duration, continuity, and multiplicity of his inventive
activity. His first patent was applied for in 1868,
in his 22d year, and he continued to invent, adapt,
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 643
and improve until the failure of his health a year
or two before his death in 1931. His methods were
peculiarly adapted to the expanding American
economy of the post-1865 period, for he sought de-
vices that could be converted to wide public use and
manufactured in quantity. To Edison the act of
invention was but the prelude to an industrial or-
ganization for exploiting the result, and he was able
to exploit other men's inventions as well as his own.
Bryan's biography is a clear oudine by a whole-
hearted admirer; one by Frank L. Dyer and Thomas
C. Martin, Edison, His Life and Inventions (New
York, Harper, 1929. 2 v.) was originally published
in 1910, and was only partially revised when it was
brought up to date 19 years later; but it is a great
repository of information, much of it deriving from
Edison himself.
4783. Burlingame, Roger. March of the iron men,
a social history of union through invention.
New York, Scribner, 1938. xvi, 500 p. illus.
38-27712 T21.B8
The author, a biographer, historian, and editor,
traces the influence of invention on American so-
ciety from the 17th century to the close of the Civil
War. The early settlers were immersed in the neces-
sities of building, agriculture, and communication,
and the first American inventor was Benjamin
Franklin. Inventions during the period of the
American Revolution improved the materials of
war — gunpowder, small arms, etc. Later inventions
were geared to the growing industrial economy and
produced the steamboat, cotton gin, power loom,
electro-magnetic telegraph, reaper, vulcanized rub-
ber, and many other products. It is the author's
belief "that the instruments invented in this phase
were the instruments of our eventual union and
that . . . they made that union a fact before, po-
litically, it was recognized." Engines of Democ-
racy, Inventions and Society in Mature America
(New York, Scribner, 1940. 606 p.) deals with the
period after 1865, but not in chronological arrange-
ment: "events did not follow one another in orderly
sequence." In these books Mr. Burlingame has
sought to present technical developments in com-
mon terms intelligible to the layman. Each book
contains a list of "Events and Inventions," and a
bibliography.
4784. Flexner, James T. Steamboats come true;
American inventors in action. New York,
Viking Press, 1944. 406 p. 44-7758 VM615.F63
"Bibliography of principal sources": p. 379-381.
This account of American inventors of the steam-
boat is scholarly, yet written in a style appropriate
for the layman. It deals primarily with John Fitch,
the pioneer, his contemporary, James Rumsey, and
Robert Fulton, the promoter, in their individual
contributions to the application of the steam engine
to water transportation, described as "the first Amer-
ican invention of world-shaking importance." A
brief survey of their forerunners is crowded into
the first chapter. In the last it is pointed out that
Robert Fulton's importance was not his originality
but his ability to build a steamboat on principles
evolved from the experiments of many who had tried
unsuccessfully to produce finished and working
products. In 19 12, when the centenary of the intro-
duction of navigation by steam was being celebrated
in Europe, Henry W. Dickinson, Assistant Keeper
of the Science Museum, South Kensington, pro-
duced from the archives of England and France
and from original sources in the United States, a
life of Robert Fulton, Engineer and Artist (London,
New York, John Lane, 1913. 333 p.), one of the
few examples of a biography of an American by an
English writer.
4785. Holland, Maurice, and Henry F. Pringle.
Industrial explorers. New York, Harper,
x938- 347 P- 28-29154 T39.H6 1928
Maurice Holland, Director of Engineering and
Industrial Research, National Research Council
(1923 to 1942), and Henry F. Pringle, writer, co-
operate to sketch the careers of 19 of the nation's
leaders of industrial research. They outline Willis
R. Whitney's research in the field of electrical engi-
neering, William H. Miller's improvement of design
theory and methods in aeronautical engineering,
Samuel C. Prescott's experiments in the chemistry
of the roasted coffee bean, John A. Mathew's de-
velopment of high-speed and noncorrosive steels,
E. C. Sullivan's tests in the glass laboratories that
produced Pyrex, and George D. McLaughlin's im-
proved methods of tanning. The biographies of
these and 13 other scientists describe the research
which has led to many products now commonplace
in daily life.
4786. lies, George. Leading American inventors.
New York, Holt, 1912. xv, 447 p. illus.
(Biographies of leading Americans, edited by W. P.
Trent) 12-27835 T39.I5
Contents. — John and Robert Livingston Ste-
vens.— Robert Fulton. — Eli Whitney. — Thomas
Blanchard. — Samuel Finley Breese Morse. — Charles
Goodyear. — John Ericsson. — Cyrus Hall McCor-
mick. — Christopher Latham Sholes. — Elias Howe. —
Benjamin Chew Tilghman. — Ottmar Mergenthaler.
Brief and eulogistic biographical sketches of 13
American inventors, who, within little more than
a century, conceived and perfected inventions which
have profoundly altered our ways of living.
644 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4787. Kaempffert, Waldemar B., ed. A popular
history of American invention . . . with over
five hundred illus. New York, Scribner, 1924.
24-25794 T21.K5
2 v
A group of editors of scientific journals, teachers,
and scientists have contributed chapters to this his-
tory of American invention through the first quarter
of the 20th century. Volume I deals with the de-
velopment of "Transportation" by railroad, inland
waterway, electric car, automobile, and airplane;
"Communication" through the printed word, tele-
graph, telephone, radio, camera, motion picture,
and phonography; and "Power" through steam and
electricity. Volume II deals with devices and tech-
niques for "Exploiting Material Resources," such as
iron, steel, copper, oil, coal, and lumber, and with
"Automatic Labor-Saving Devices." Written in a
style that appeals to the layman as well as to the
scientist, the work provides a standard account up to
the date of its preparation, and needs only to be
brought up to date by incorporating the develop-
ments of the last three decades.
4788. Kelly, Fred C. The Wright brothers; a
biography authorized by Orville Wright.
New York, Farrar, Straus, & Young, 1951. 340 p.
51-11660 TL540.W7K4 1951
The author's aim in this life, first published in
1943, has been "to satisfy the curiosity of the average,
non-technical reader regarding the work of the
Wright brothers, and to do so as simply as possible."
Wilbur (1867-1912) and Orville Wright (1871-
1948) interested themselves in aeronautics in 1896
and progressed steadily to the first successful pow-
ered flight at Kitty Hawk, N. C, on December 17,
1903. The last two chapters include "Patent Suits,"
and an explanation of "Why the Wright Plane was
Exiled." In 1951 the author edited a selection of
letters from the Wright manuscripts deposited in the
Library of Congress and not generally available until
i960: Miracle at Kitty Haw\: The Letters of Wilbur
and Orville Wright (New York, Farrar, Straus, &
Young. 482 p.). Appealing again to the general
reader, the book contains those letters which reveal
the achievements and personalities of the Wright
brothers, and omits those dealing with highly
technical problems. More recently Oberlin Col-
lege on the Wilbur-Orville Wright Memorial Fund
sponsored the publication of The Papers of
Wilbur and Orville Wright, Including the Chanute-
Wright Letters and Other Papers of Octave
Chanute, edited by Marvin W. McFarland
(New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 2 v.), which
was prepared for the press with notes, appen-
dixes, and bibliography by the Aeronautics Divi-
sion of the Library of Congress. These papers, ar-
ranged chronologically, include the technical cor-
respondence of the Wright brothers from 1899 to
1948.
4789. Mirsky, Jeannette, and Allan Nevins. The
world of Eli Whitney. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1952. xvi, 346 p. 52-4520 TS1570.W4M5
Bibliography: p. 317-337.
This "first modern study of an American genius"
is based primarily on the collection of Whitney's
(1765-1825) papers in the Yale University Library,
which fully document his business career but yield
only fragmentary bits of information concerning his
personal life. It describes the influence of the cotton
gin on the agriculture of the South, where it re-
vitalized the plantation system and slavery, and em-
phasizes, more fully than has been done before, the
impact of his manufacture of firearms on the eco-
nomic and industrial life of the whole country. The
authors quote from Whitney's letters to illustrate his
concept of the processes of the machine tool industry
which made him the "father of mass production"
and "changed the social and economic growth of the
North and gave it its industrial might." He wanted,
he wrote, tools "similar to an engraving on copper
plate from which may be taken a great number of
impressions perceptibly alike." Constance Mc-
Laughlin Green in her recently published Eli
Whitney and the Birth of American Technology
(Boston, Little, Brown, 1956. 215 p.), which pre-
sents much the same story in concise form, and
acknowledges its indebtedness to Miss Mirsky,
describes Whitney as "the forerunner of the specialist
of the business age," with "a completely single-
track mind" and a "passion for efficiency" uncharac-
teristic of his own day.
4790. Prout, Henry G. A life of George Westing-
house. New York, Scribner, 1922. 375 p.
23-26510 T40.W4P7 1922
George Westinghouse (1 846-1914) left no private
letters, journals or note-books. The material for this
book has been gathered from business records, and
from the memories and impressions of contempo-
raries who were close to him, "some of them almost
from the beginning of his active life." The author
has had the aid of a committee of the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers in digesting and
coordinating this data. The diversity of Westing-
house's inventions and business enterprises has de-
termined the division of the book into chapters each
dealing fully with one topic, with preliminary and
concluding chapters describing Westinghouse's per-
sonality and his influence on the development of
America. The Appendix contains a list of more
than 375 patents. Outstanding among them in social
effect are the invention of the air brake and its
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
/ 645
application to railroading, and the use of alternating
current for electric power transmission.
4791. Pupin, Michael I. From immigrant to in-
ventor. New York, Scribner, 1923. 396 p.
23-i3553 TP40.P8A3
Pupin (1858-1935), a peasant's son born in a
Bosnian village, came to America at the age of 16,
and became professor of electromechanics at Co-
lumbia University and the inventor of many im-
provements in telegraphy, telephony, and the x-ray.
His autobiography, the kind of success story that
can only happen here, was a best-seller in its day and
received a Pulitzer prize.
4792. Thompson, Holland. The age of invention;
a chronicle of mechanical conquest. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1921. 267 p. (The
Chronicles of America series, Allen Johnson, edi-
tor .. . v. 37) 21-15265 E173.C55, v. 37
T19.T5
Abraham Lincoln edition.
Bibliographical note: p. 247-254.
Sometime editor-in-chief of the Boo\ of Knowl-
edge, and contributor to many encyclopedias and
journals, Holland Thompson outlines the personali-
ties of some of the outstanding American inventors
from Benjamin Franklin to the Wright brothers, and
points out the significance of their achievements in
the development of the United States. However,
he avoids giving undue importance to the work of
individuals by grouping together the "Pioneers of
the Machine Shop," "The Fathers of Electricity,"
and others whose progress was mutually interde-
pendent.
F. Engineering
4793. American Institute of Chemical Engineers.
Twenty-five years of chemical engineering
progress; silver anniversary volume, . . . edited by
Sidney D. Kirkpatrick. New York, Published by
the Institute and for sale by D. Van Nostrand Co.,
r933- 373 P- 33'l67H TP20.A5
Contents. — Chemical engineering research. —
Acids and heavy chemicals in retrospect. — Organic
chemical industries. — Solvents. — Petroleum refin-
ing.— Electrochemical industries. — Electrometallur-
gical industries. — Pulp and paper manufacture. —
Coal processing. — Sugar industries. — High pressure
synthesis — basis of new chemical engineering indus-
tries.— Soap and glycerine industries. — Chemical
and engineering advances in the rubber industry. —
Paints, varnishes and lacquers. — Modern plastics. —
Vegetable oil production. — Lime industry. — Glass
manufacture. — Fractional distillation. — Evaporation
in the United States in theory and practice. — Bibliog-
raphy of articles on evaporation (p. 277-279). —
Continuous mechanical separations. — Purification of
water for sanitary and industrial uses. — Stream pol-
lution and waste disposal. — A statistical survey of
the chemical engineering industries, 1 908-1 933. —
Chemical engineering education.
Advances in chemical engineering, between the
founding of the American Institute of Chemical
Engineers in 1908, and 1933, are described by "lead-
ing authorities in the fields which they represent."
World War I furnished the impetus which chemical
engineering needed to make it a recognized pro-
fession, and the statistical survey of the industries
involved in Chapter 24 measures the progress made
during the quarter-century.
4794. Anderson, Oscar E. Refrigeration in Amer-
ica; a history of a new technology and its
impact. [Princeton] Published for the University
of Cincinnati by Princeton University Press, 1953.
344 P- , 52~I3I48 TP494.U5A7
"Bibliographical note": p. 321-325.
The author describes his book as an introductory
survey of the relation of refrigeration to our national
development and points out the need for further
detailed research. He records the main trends in
technological progress, describes the uses of refrig-
eration, explains resistance to its application, and
gives some indication of its social and economic
effects. The application of refrigeration to food
supply and the manufacture of ice falls into three
periods: the years prior to 1890, 1890 to 1917, and
1917 to 1950. Chapters are devoted to improve-
ments in refrigerated transportation, the introduc-
tion of frozen foods, and the wider use of locker
plants and home freezers. In the last chapter the
Tennessee Valley Authority is selected as an illus-
tration of the potentialities of refrigeration in re-
lieving the problems of large distressed rural areas.
4795. Bathe, Greville, and Dorothy Bathe. Oliver
Evans; a chronicle of early American engi-
neering. Philadelphia, The Historical Society of
Pennsylvania, 1935. xviii, 362 p. illus., maps,
facsims. 36-585 T40.E9B3
646 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"Books and principal pamphlets, written and pub-
lished by Oliver Evans between the years 1792 and
18 19": p. 344-345.
The scattered and little-known facts concerning
Oliver Evans (1755-1819) are here brought together
and many of his letters and papers printed in full.
Unbroken by chapters, this first full-length biog-
raphy of a pioneer in the construction of high-pres-
sure engines throws much light upon the function-
ing of the early patent laws, and the primitive
engineering equipment of the period. Born in Dela-
ware, by 1793 Oliver Evans moved to Philadelphia,
where in succeeding years he was a constructor of
mills, a burr-millstone manufacturer, and a dealer
in bolting cloth and plaster of Paris. For nearly
30 years he went on improving the mechanism of
his engines and boilers. His correspondence with
Tobias Lear, Robert Livingston, and Thomas Jef-
ferson concerning his improvements in their mills
indicates that he was better known in his own day
than he has been since. As the authors point out,
his life span fell just a few years too early for his
talents to achieve their potential social effect.
4796. Bishop, Joseph Bucklin, and Farnham
Bishop. Goethals, genius of the Panama
Canal; a biography. New York, Harper, 1930.
xiv, 493 p. 30-22571 TA140.G58B5
The elder Bishop, Secretary of the Isthmian Canal
Commission from 1905 to 1914, died before finish-
ing the fifth chapter of this authorized biography
of his close friend, and his son completed the task.
Graduating from the Military Academy in 1880,
George Washington Goethals (1858-1928) served
in the Engineer Corps in all grades from second
lieutenant to colonel. In 1907 President Roosevelt
appointed Goethals to construct the Panama Canal,
and to assume all responsibilities for the government
of the Canal Zone. Having opened the Panama
Canal to world shipping in 1914, Goethals was
made a major general and remained as governor of
the Canal Zone until he retired late in 1916. Re-
called to active duty in December 19 17, Goethals
became director of purchase, storage, and traffic, in
charge of the transport of supplies and the move-
ment of all troops within the United States and over-
seas. Returning to the retired list in 1919, Goethals
served as consulting engineer on many important
waterway projects. The tributes after his death
praised his inflexible justice as strongly as his pro
fessional and administrative abilities.
4797. Blake, Nelson M. Water for the cities; a
history of the urban water supply problem
in the United States. Syracuse, N. Y., Syracuse Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 341 p. (Maxwell School series,
3) 5(>-l1576 TD223.B5
This original study started out as an investigation
of how New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore, and
Boston came to recognize the vital importance of
water supply to the health and functioning of those
communities and took steps to provide it during the
years 1790 to i860. It has been expanded to in-
clude brief accounts of such developments in other
cities, and, in the last two chapters, the accomplish-
ments of water supply engineering from i860 to the
present day. Progress in private and public control
of urban water supply are traced from the time when
American cities drew their water almost exclusively
from springs, wells, and cisterns, to the building of
great reservoirs such as those created by the Hoover
and Parker dams across the Colorado River. In the
background is the story of municipal growth and
the political struggle that usually accompanies ex-
pansion in public works. The references (p. 288-
331) indicate an extensive use of state and munici-
pal documents supplemented by newspapers.
4798. Copley, Frank Barkley. Frederick W. Tay-
lor, father of scientific management. New
York, Harper, 1923. 2 v. 23-17530 T58.T42C6
An admiring and thoroughly documented life of
Frederick W. Taylor (1856-1915), the first to apply
scientific method to the manufacture of a given prod-
uct from a certain amount of raw material with
minimum waste and friction. In 1878 he entered
the Midvale Steel Company as an apprentice, and
rose from gang boss to foreman of the machine shop,
to master mechanic, chief draftsman, and finally
chief engineer within a period of six years. At Mid-
vale he laid the foundation of his system of scientific
management, and from 1898 gave it more concrete
form at the Bethlehem Steel Company, which em-
ployed him to analyze its operations. Taylor de-
voted the latter years of his life to promoting scien-
tific management or "Taylorism," as it became
popularly known. His principal book, The Prin-
ciples of Scientific Management (New York,
Harper, 191 1. 144 p.), within two years was trans-
lated into French, German, Dutch, Swedish, Rus-
sian, Lettish, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese. He
was also the inventor of a number of industrial
machines and processes, such as the heat treatment of
high-speed tool steel.
4799. Fraser, Chelsea C. The story of engineering
in America. New York, Crowell, 1928.
471 p. 28-24165 TA23.F8
Bringing together in one volume historical land-
marks and typical processes in the construction of
roads, railroads, bridges, tunnels and subways, dams
and reservoirs, canals, harbor improvements, light-
houses, mines, and buildings, this book is aimed at
the nontechnical reader interested in the accomplish-
SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY / 647
ments of American engineering from colonial days
through the first quarter of the 20th century. Writ-
ten in a simple style, it contains many drawings of
typical constructions.
4800. Hoover, Theodore Jesse, and John Charles
Lounsbury Fish. The engineering profes-
sion. 2d ed. Stanford, Stanford University Press,
1950. xv, 486 p. 50-12642 TA157.H56 1950
Includes bibliographies.
Two outstanding educators and consultants in the
fields of civil and mining engineering have prepared
a vocational guide for those considering one of the
branches of engineering as a profession, and a
"progress report" to the experienced engineer on the
characteristics of engineering. It describes the quali-
fications and duties of civil, mining, mechanical,
electrical, chemical, and other engineers. Changes
in practice since the first edition appeared in 1941
have necessitated extensive revision, especially in the
sections on municipal engineering and electronics.
There are chapters on the education of an engineer
and the new opportunities for participating in com-
munity welfare, as well as tables showing salaries,
and the functional, industrial, and geographic dis-
tribution of engineers. The chapters on engineer-
ing education and salaries in Esther L. Brown's
The Professional Engineer (New York, Russell Sage
Foundation, 1936. 86 p.) afford comparisons evi-
dencing progress in training and in opportunities.
The recent edition of Lowell O. Stewart's Careers in
Engineering: Requirements, Opportunities, 3d ed.
(Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1956. 105 p.),
furnishes much practical information in brief
compass.
4801. Steinman, David B. The builders of the
bridge; the story of John Roebling and his
son. 2d ed. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1950.
457 p. 50-8862 TA140.R7S8 1950
Bibliography: p. 421-445.
The author is himself an experienced bridge engi-
neer who, three years after the first edition of this
book (1945), was put in charge of the reconstruc-
tion of the Brooklyn Bridge. Its original builders
were John August Roebling (1806-1869) and his
son, Washington Augustus Roebling (1 837-1926).
The father, educated as a civil engineer at Berlin,
Prussia, came to America in 1831. In 1841 he intro-
duced the first wire cable, and in 1845-46 at Pitts-
burgh he constructed first a canal aqueduct and next
a bridge, both on the suspension principle. The
whole of Part 3 is devoted to the construction of the
Brooklyn Bridge between 1867 and 1883. An un-
lucky accident caused John Roebling's death while
the survey was still under way in July 1869. His
son carried it to completion, but in 1872 was para-
lyzed by the caisson disease which had already
killed three workmen, and thenceforward had to
direct the work from his sickroom. The opening
of the bridge on May 24, 1883, a landmark in civic
and engineering history, was marked by a triumphal
celebration. The book, as the author tells us, "has
been a labor of love, in the truest sense, with no
counting the cost."
4802. Turnbull, Archibald Douglas. John Ste-
vens, an American record. New York, Cen-
tury, 1928. xvii, 545 p. 28-12356 VM140.S7T8
Stevens (1749-1838) of Hoboken, N. J., an amaz-
ingly versatile engineer and inventor best remem-
bered for his improvements in steam transportation
by sea and land, also designed tunnels, bridges, and
projectiles. He was likewise a competent entre-
preneur and the founder of a great fortune. This
detailed biography is based on Stevens' own papers
and incorporates many extended excerpts from them.
4803. Yost, Edna. Modern American Engineers.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1952. 182 p.
52-5172 TA139.Y65
Contents. — Robert Ernest Doherty, engineering
educator. — Ralph Edwards Flanders, mechanical
engineer. — Arthur Ernest Morgan, civil engineer. —
Vannevar Bush, electrical engineer. — Scott Turner,
mining engineer. — J. Brownlee Davidson, agricul-
tural engineer. — Harold Bright Maynard, indus-
trial engineering consultant. — Ole Singstad, civil
engineer — John Robert Suman, petroleum engi-
neer.— Carl George Arthur Rosen, research engi-
neer.— Stanwood Willston Sparrow, automotive
engineer. — Harold Alden Wheeler, radio and tele-
vision engineer.
Each of the 12 men whose biographies make up
this book was selected by the author, with help from
the staffs of various national engineering societies
and other authorities in the profession, "as an engi-
neer recognized by his peers as a man of high
achievement." Some of the engineering fields
omitted in this book are covered in the author's
Modern Americans in Science and Invention (Phila-
delphia, Stokes, 1941. 270 p.).
XVIII
Medicine and Public Health
«#
yj
t
A.
Medicine in General
4804-4817
B.
Physicians and Surgeons
4818-4832
C.
Psychiatry
4833-4840
D.
Other Specialties
4841-4844
E.
Hospitals and Nursing
4845-4854
F.
Medical Education
4855-4861
G.
Public Health
4862-4881
H.
Medical Economics
4882-4891
u
p
SH
THE literature of American medicine is of course enormous, but we are here concerned only
with that fairly limited portion of it which is intelligible to the layman, and displays the
subject in its historical development and its relationships to the larger social fabric. Section
A includes a few general histories, and the later ones a number of more specialized historical
treatments; but, in the main, it is fair to say that the historical exploration of the development
of American medicine is only very imperfectly accomplished. Until the 19th century, that
development is primarily of interest to the Ameri-
can social historian, but in the course of that cen-
tury the United States becomes one of the major
sources of medical discovery, and begins to take
the lead in medical organization. Behind all prog-
ress, however, stands the individual physician, and
medical biography and autobiography is a branch
of the literature which has proliferated amazingly
in the last two or three decades. The sampling
presented in Section B could be indefinitely ex-
panded, for every year sees a new crop of personal
narratives, each with its own angle of vision, and
seldom devoid of interest or instruction.
The prominence given to psychiatry, which occu-
pies Section C, follows almost inevitably from the
prevalence of the subject in contemporary thought
and writing. The entries could have been readily
increased to three or four times their present num-
ber, which is by no means the case with Section D,
in which the other medical specialties are gathered.
There remains to be done much research and writ-
ing concerning the origin and development of these
offshoots from the main trunk of American medi-
648
The two following sections reflect the remarkable
development of two institutions, the hospital and
the medical school, from their modest 18th-cen-
tury beginnings. The increasing number, size, and
complexity of both have brought their special prob-
lems, discussions of which take their place beside
more purely historical works in each section.
Section G on public health includes some tides
on the early American epidemics, the most potent
stimulus to activity in the field, and on the problem
of disease in general. Other works discuss the be-
ginnings of the movement, its professional aspects,
and the extent of the public health resources
presently available to the American people.
The increasing efficiency of medical care has con-
currently increased its expense, so that the cost of
treatment and hospitalization bears heavily or even
crushingly upon the average family budget. This
has led to various proposals for distributing the
burden throughout the community, and these again
to much controversy, reflected in a large and grow-
ing body of publication, of which we can present
only a sampling.
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 649
A. Medicine in General
4804. Burrage, Walter L. A history of the Massa-
chusetts Medical Society, with brief biog-
raphies of the founders and chief officers, 1781-1922.
[Norwood, Mass.] Priv. Print., 1923. 505 p.
23-18826 R15.M5B8
Chartered by the Commonwealth of Massachu-
setts in 178 1 "to promote medical and surgical
knowledge ... as well as to make a just discrimi-
nation between such as are duly educated . . . and
those who may ignorantly and wickedly administer
medicine," the Massachusetts Medical Society is the
oldest medical society in the United States with a
continuous record of its meetings from its founding
to the present. The Secretary of the Society utilizes
its manuscript records to tell the story from 1765,
when efforts were first made to form a state medical
society, to 1922. Notwithstanding the leadership
exercised by Pennsylvania men of medicine, the
Medical Society of the State of Pennsylvania was
not organized until more than 75 years later. The
story of that Society has been edited by Dr. Howard
K. Petry: A Century of Medicine, 1848-1948; the
History of the Medical Society of the State of Penn-
sylvania ( [ Harrisburg ? ] 1952. 404 p.).
4805. Cannon, Ida M. On the social frontier of
medicine; pioneering in medical social serv-
ice. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952.
273 p. 52-8215 HV687.5.U52M33
Notes and references: p. 261-266.
Dr. Richard Clarke Cabot was one of the first to
recognize the relationship between the social and
economic background of patients and their medical
problems. He made a great contribution to medical
progress when he secured the appointment of a
social worker in the Out-Patient Department of the
Massachusetts General Hospital in 1905, and thereby
laid the foundation for the growth of medical social
service in the United States. The author, who for
31 years was the Chief of the Social Service Depart-
ment of the Massachusetts General Hospital, traces
the evolution of that service through the years of
resistance on the part of the medical staff to its final,
full acceptance and establishment as an official de-
partment of the Hospital. She goes on to describe
the spread of social service to other hospitals and
public health services, and the advances in medical
science during the first half of the 20th century
which have changed the hospital care of patients.
4806. Fishbein, Morris. Fads and quackery in
healing; an analysis of the foibles of the heal-
ing cults, with essays on various other peculiar no-
tions in the health field. New York, Covici, Friede,
1932. 384 p. 32-28086 R710.F55
The American Medical Association has long prose-
cuted its war against certain methods of healing
and has attacked them from time to time in the pages
of its Journal. The long-time editor of that Journal
(1924-1949) traces the evolution of medical fads
from the earliest time in this series of essays, many
of which had already appeared in his Medical Follies
(1925. 223 p.) and New Medical Follies (1927.
235 p.), published by Boni & Liveright. Chapters
are devoted to such subjects as homeopathy, eclec-
ticism, mind healing, osteopathy, chiropractic,
naturopathy, and food and drinking fads of the
Americans.
4807. Fishbein, Morris. A history of the American
Medical Association, 1847 to 1947; with the
biographies of the presidents of the association, by
Walter L. Bierring, M. D.; and with histories of
the publications, councils, bureaus and other official
bodies [by various authors] Philadelphia, Saunders,
1947. 1226 p. Med 47-46 R15.A55F5
The increase in the number of medical colleges
during the first half of the 19th century gave rise
to a demand for standardization of the curriculum.
Through the efforts of Dr. Nathan Smith Davis of
Binghamton, New York, delegates and members of
the medical profession from different parts of the
United States met in the Academy of Natural
Sciences in Philadelphia in May 1847, and organized
the national association "for cultivating and advanc-
ing medical knowledge; for elevating the standard
of medical education; for promoting the usefulness,
honor, and interests of the medical profession; for
enlightening and directing public opinion in regard
to the duties, responsibilities, and requirements of
medical men; for exciting and encouraging emula-
tion and concert of action in the profession, and for
facilitating and fostering friendly intercourse be-
tween those engaged in it." Dr. Fishbein writes and
edits a centennial history of the Association and its
influence on medical progress in the United States
during its first hundred years.
4808. New York Academy of Medicine. Com-
mittee on Medicine and the Changing Order.
65O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Medicine in the changing order. New York, Com-
monwealth Fund, 1947. 240 p. (Its Studies)
Med 47-1014 R723.5.N4
This Committee was appointed by the Council
of the New York Academy of Medicine in Decem-
ber 1942 to explore the effect of changes which are
taking place in our economic and social life on medi-
cine in its various aspects. In this report the Com-
mittee makes recommendations concerning the
improvement of medical care in both urban and
rural areas through the extension of hospital serv-
ices, and a wider distribution of public health and
nursing services. The pros and cons of voluntary
prepayment plans and compulsory insurance in a
free society are canvassed.
4809. Packard, Francis R. History of medicine
in the United States. New ed. New York,
P. B. Hoeber, 1931. 2 v. 32-13 R151.P12 1931
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [I24i]-i266.
The editor of the Annals of Medical History
(1917-1942) tells the story of medicine in the United
States to the closing years of the 19th century, ventur-
ing into the 20th century in only a few cases. The
incidence of epidemics in the colonies, the rise of
medical legislation, the founding of hospitals, medi-
cal schools and periodicals, and the development of
medical practice are interwoven with the lives of the
physicians, surgeons, and medical specialists who
participated in and influenced those events. The
chapters on "The Medical Department of the Army
from the Close of the Revolution to the Close of the
Spanish-American War," by Col. Percy M. Ashburn;
and "The History of the Medical Department of the
U. S. Navy," by Lt. Cmdr. Robert P. Parsons, are of
special interest. In 1929 Col. Ashburn published a
comprehensive History of the Medical Department
of the United States Army (Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin. 448 p.).
4810. Pickard, Madge E., and Roscoe Carlyle
Buley. The Midwest pioneer, his ills, cures,
& doctors. Crawfordsville, Ind., R. E. Banta, 1945.
339 P- . SG 45-165 R151.P5
"Bibliographical note": p. [3073-324.
This is "a nontechnical account of pioneer medi-
cine" in the Middle West prior to 1850. It describes
the "afflictions" that had followed the settlers West,
the home remedies, the bleeding, purging and
blistering of the doctors, the growth of irregular
medical sects, and the rise of the drug trade.
Against this background of the pioneers' struggle to
find relief from pain, the authors trace the develop-
ment of medical schools, societies, literature, and
legislation under the leadership of Daniel Drake,
the Samuel Grosses and others. The bibliographi-
cal note at the end is supplementary to the more
important medical books which have been men-
tioned in the text and the notes, and is "intended
in part to round out a brief guide to the study of
early mid-western medicine."
481 1. Reed, Louis S. The healing cults; a study of
sectarian medical practice: its extent, causes,
and control. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1932. 134 p. (Publications of the Committee on the
Costs of Medical Care, no. 16)
32-26695 R152.C65, no. 16
RM700.R38
"References" at end of each chapter.
The Committee on the Costs of Medical Care was
"organized to study the economic aspects of the
prevention and care of sickness, including the ade-
quacy, availability, and compensation of the persons
and agencies concerned." This publication of the
committee describes the evolution of osteopathy,
chiropractic, naturopathy, Christian Science, and
certain types of faith healing, as well as the number,
geographical distribution, economic and legal status
of the practitioners, in order to complete the picture
of medical services available in the United States.
4812. Shafer, Henry Burnell. The American
medical profession, 1783 to 1850. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1936. 271 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
417) 36-20187 H31.C7, no. 417
R151.S45 1936a
Bibliography: p. 250-257.
A study of medical progress during more than
half a century following the American Revolution,
a period in which the foundation was being laid
for the scientific growth of the medical profession
which followed the discovery of anesthesia in the
1840's. The author, a historian rather than a mem-
ber of the medical profession, describes in detail
the status of American medicine at the close of the
1 8th century, the founding of medical colleges and
societies, the increase in the publication of medical
literature, the growing awareness of the varying
value of the remedies and methods employed, and
the development of a code of medical ethics during
those years of "transition from medieval customs to
modern methods."
4813. Shryock, Richard H. American medical re-
search, past and present. New York, Com-
monwealth Fund, 1947. 35° P- (New York Acad-
emy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the
Changing Order. Studies)
Med 47-2507 R737.S48
Notes and References at end of chapters.
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 65I
Although medical practice, medical education,
and hospitals had become a part of the American
scene by the close of the 18th century, they depended
on the medical sciences developed by the British,
the French, and the Germans. The impetus given
to medical research by William Henry Welch in
his pathological laboratory in 1878 and later at the
Johns Hopkins Medical School, was bearing fruit by
1895 when American medicine began to "emerge
on a level of cultural independence." Dr. Shryock,
a historian who has increasingly specialized in medi-
cal history, traces the advances in medical research
through the era of private support, the period of
great philanthropies, and the gradual development
of public-supported research programs. The last
chapter summarizes the impact of World War II
on medical research and some early post-war pro-
grams. The integration of research, teaching, and
practice is examined in Medical Research: A Mid-
century Survey, published for the American Foun-
dation (Boston, Little, Brown, 1955. 2 v.).
4814. Sigerist, Henry E. American medicine;
translated by Hildegard Nagel. New York,
Norton, 1934. 316 p. 34-40281 R151.S52
Bibliography: p. 289-304.
The author, professor of medicine at the Univer-
sity of Leipzig, and more recently the William H.
Welch Professor of the History of Medicine at Johns
Hopkins University, presents a historical sketch of
American medicine from the colonial period to the
early 1930's. It is based on four years of intensive
study, and a tour through the United States during
which he visited medical schools, laboratories, and
hospitals, and observed the conditions of medical
practice and public health service. Dr. Sigerist,
with some misgivings concerning his American
audience, portrays for Europeans the America which
he foresees as the center of gravity of the medical
sciences. His book has not been replaced as the
most convenient brief introduction to its subject.
4815. Stern, Bernhard J. American medical prac-
tice in the perspectives of a century. New
York, Commonwealth Fund, 1945. 156 p. ( [New
York Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medi-
cine and the Changing Order. Studies] )
SG45-126 R723.5.S8
Bibliographical footnotes.
The first in a series of studies made under the
auspices of the Committee established by the Council
of the New York Academy of Medicine. The au-
thor, a teacher of sociology rather than a medical
man, looks at medicine not as an isolated science,
but as a segment of life which is affected by and
contributes to the economic, social, and technological
changes of the period. Chapters on the specialist
and the general practitioner, the income of physi-
cians, and the distribution of doctors and medical
services, are illustrated by statistics and cases so as to
show the effect on the profession and the general
welfare. The study concludes with the thought that
the "problems of medical practice that are agitating
the public today are primarily concerned with the
provision of a high quality of curative and pre-
ventive medical service to all people," regardless of
income, race or geographical location.
4816. Thatcher, Virginia S. History of anesthesia,
with emphasis on the nurse specialist. Phil-
adelphia, Lippincott, 1953. 289 p.
53-9092 RD79.T49
Research in the use of gases as anesthetics was
begun in England before 1800, but successful experi-
ments in the administration of ether were finally
made in the United States in the 1840's. This was
America's first great contribution to the medical
profession — the means of painless surgery. The
author, editor of American Association of Nurse
Anesthetist Publications, says that her purpose is
"to extend the knowledge of anesthetists about
themselves beyond the framework of personal ref-
erence and of already published histories." The
place of the nurse as an anesthetist and the organiza-
tion, history, and sphere of influence of the National
Association of Nurse Anesthetists are described in
detail.
4817. Truman, Stanley R. The doctor, his career,
his business, his human relations. Balti-
more, Williams & Wilkins, 1951. 151 p.
51-2566 R727.T7
The transition from medical student to practicing
physician is a neglected phase of medical training,
according to the author. He has written this book
to interpret, within the framework of the "Principles
of Medical Ethics of the American Medical Asso-
ciation" (Appendix A), the professional problems
as well as the patient-physician relations, public
relations, and interprofessional situations which
confront the young doctor. Selection of a com-
munity in which to practice medicine, planning a
functionally efficient office, selection of assistants,
maintenance of records, and insurance and savings
are discussed, and also summarized at the end in a
"Check List of Things To Do When You Start in
Practice." One part of the author's theme receives
more detailed treatment in James E. Bryan's Public
Relations in Medical Practice (Baltimore, Williams
& Wilkins, 1954. 301 p.).
652 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Physicians and Surgeons
4818. [Beaumont] Myer, Jesse S., com p. A new
print of Life and letters of Dr. William Beau-
mont. With an introd. by Sir William Osier. St.
Louis, C. V. Mosby, 1939. xxxi, 327 p.
39-16649 R154.B35M8 1939
"Literature references and abstracts of cases of
gastric fistulae prior to that of St. Martin": p. 308-
312; "Summary of literature consulted": p. 313-315.
Born in Vermont in 1785, William Beaumont
served his medical apprenticeship there until 18 12,
when he left for Plattsburg, New York, and joined
the army as surgeon's mate. Ten years later, Beau-
mont was stationed at Fort Mackinac when he was
called to treat a young French Canadian, Alexis
St. Martin, who had been accidentally shot, leaving
a cavity in his abdomen which would not heal. This
afforded Beaumont the opportunity to observe the
functioning of the digestive system, to conduct ex-
periments with the gastric juices, and to gain pre-
eminence in the advancement of physiology through
the publication of his keen and methodical observa-
tions. Dr. Myer's biography was first published in
1912 on the one hundredth anniversary of Beau-
mont's entry into the pracice of medicine, and
is based on a collection of manuscript memoranda,
diaries, letters, etc., in possession of Beaumont's
daughter, Mrs. Sarah Keim of St. Louis. This re-
print contains several hitherto unpublished letters
written by Alexis St. Martin, and a "Present-day
Appreciation of Beaumont's Experiments on Alexis
St. Martin," by Dr. Andrew C. Ivy, which does not
appear in the earlier printing. At at meeting of the
International Congress of Physiologists in 1929,
William Beaumont was "figuratively canonized as
the patron saint of American Physiology," and in
1953, one hundred years after his death, the Michi-
gan State Medical Society issued the Beaumont
Memorial Number of its Journal (February 1953)
in which the projected Beaumont Memorial on
Mackinac Island, where he carried out some of his
first experiments, is described.
4819. [Billings] Garrison, Fielding H. John
Shaw Billings; a memoir. New York, Put-
nam, 19 15. 432 p. _i5-9723 Ri54-B59G3
"Bibliography of the writings of Dr. John S.
Billings, by Miss Adelaide R. Hasse": p. 411-422.
Billings (1838-1913) stands out in the world of
medicine as the organizer of the tools of medical
research. As a student at the Medical College of
Ohio he became conscious of the need for a great
medical library in the United States. His oppor-
tunity came at the close of the Civil War when
unused hospital funds were diverted to the Surgeon
General's Library and he was placed in charge. The
first volume of Dr. Billings' monumental work, the
Index Catalogue, appeared in 1880. The first issues
of its companion publication, Index Medicus,
planned as a monthly guide to current medical lit-
erature, had appeared in 1879. He represented
American medicine at the meeting of the Interna-
tional Medical Congress at London in 1881, where
his address, Our Medical Literature, was received
with enthusiasm. Dr. Billings' experiences as a
medical officer during the Civil War, his part in
the construction and organization of the Johns Hop-
kins Hospital and Medical School and the New
York Public Library, as well as his activities in
the fields of hygiene and sanitary engineering, and
vital and medical statistics, are also treated in this
Memoir by the assistant librarian of the Surgeon
General's Library (1 889-1922), a pioneer Ameri-
can historian of medicine.
4820. [Blackwell] Ross, Ishbel. Child of destiny,
the life story of the first woman doctor. New
York, Harper, 1949. 309 p.
49-10905 R154.B623R6
Bibliography: p. 295-298.
The education of women as physicians in the
United States had its beginning in October 1847
when the Geneva Medical School of western New
York accepted the application of the ambitious and
tenacious but modest Elizabeth Blackwell (1821-
1910), who, in 1832, had emigrated from Britain
to the United States with her parents. After grad-
uating and pursuing her studies abroad, Elizabeth
Blackwell returned to New York where she opened
the New York Infirmary, for "providing and fur-
nishing medicines and medical and surgical aid to
such persons as may be in need thereof, and unable
by reason of poverty to procure the same; also the
training of an efficient body of nurses for the service
of the community; and also the employment of medi-
cal practitioners of either sex, it being the design of
this Institution to secure the services of well qualified
female practitioners of medicine for its patients."
The New York Infirmary, rising ten stories high
on Stuyvesant Square, is now a superb general hos-
pital, which celebrated its 100 years of service in
1954. So influential was the example of Elizabeth
Blackwell that by the turn of the century 7,387
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 653
women were practicing medicine in the United
States.
4821. [Cushing] Fulton, John F. Harvey Clash-
ing, a biography. Springfield, 111., Thomas,
1946. 754 p. (Yale University. School of Medi-
cine. Yale Medical Library. Historical Library.
Publication no. 13) Med 46-151 R154.C96F8
Dr. John F. Fulton, Sterling Professor of the His-
tory of Medicine at Yale University, and Harvey
Cushing's literary executor, has interwoven the story
of Cushing's life with selections from family papers,
diaries, and case histories, with their caricatures and
meticulous drawings, to produce a biography of
the eminent brain surgeon which appeals to laymen
as well as to medical students. As Resident in Sur-
gery at Johns Hopkins Medical School in the late
1890's, Cushing (1869-1939) was surrounded by
such men as William Henry Welch, William Osier,
and William S. Halsted, Surgeon-in-Chief, who
profoundly influenced his career as a surgeon. A
paper on trigeminal neuralgia, which Cushing read
before a joint meeting of the Philadelphia Neurologi-
cal Society and the College of Physicians in April
1900, stands as an important landmark in the history
of neurosurgery because of the unusual detail and
illustrations. In this, and later writings, Cushing's
illustrations set a standard which has left a mark on
American surgery, and his methods established
neurological surgery as a recognized specialty of
prime importance to the medical profession through-
out the world. In 1950, a less monumental but com-
petent biography entitled Harvey Cushing: Surgeon,
Author, Artist, by Elizabeth H. Thomson (New
York, Schuman. 347 p.) was published as one of
the books in The life of science library.
4822. Flexner, James Thomas. Doctors on horse-
back; pioneers of American medicine. New
York, Garden City Pub. Co., 1930. 370 p.
39-25572 R153.F5 1939
Contents. — Seer and Continental soldier: John
Morgan, 1 735-1 789. — Saint or scourge: Benjamin
Rush, 1745-1813. — A backwoods Galahad: Ephraim
McDowell, 1771-1830. — Genius on the Ohio: Daniel
Drake, 1 785-1 852. — Two men and destiny: William
Beaumont, 1785-1853 [and Alexis St. Martin]. —
The death of pain: Crawford W. Long, 1 815-1878;
William T. G. Morton, 1819-1868.— Selected
bibliographies (p. 355-359).
The author, who collaborated with his distin-
guished father in writing the biography of William
Henry Welch (no. 4831), writes these six sketches
for the general reader to show how "in the settle-
ments of a new nation there appeared doctors of
genius, explorers who, without laboratories or instru-
ments of precision or even any formal training, made
great discoveries that helped usher in the age of
modern medical science."
4823. [Gorgas] Gibson, John M. Physician to the
world; the life of General William C. Gorgas.
Durham, N. C, Duke University Press, 1950. 315 p.
(Duke University publications)
50-10881 RA424.5.G6G5
Bibliography: p. [295J-307.
As a sanitarian Gorgas (1854-1920) applied the
principles established by the Reed Commission to
free Havana and the Panama Canal Zone of mos-
quitoes and yellow fever, and as Surgeon General of
the U. S. Army during World War I he safeguarded
the health of the largest body of men ever to wear
the American uniform up to that time. "His vision
and his initiative translated the known scientific facts
concerning yellow fever into practical accomplish-
ment, thereby making possible the control of this
scourge of the tropics and the building of the
Panama Canal." Presenting an honorary degree
from Johns Hopkins University, Dr. William Welch
described Gorgas as a "physician and sanitarian of
the highest eminence, who, by his conquests over
pestilential diseases, has rendered signal service to
his profession, to his country, and to the world."
The author of this admiring biography is a journalist,
a State health department official, and, like his sub-
ject, an Alabamian.
4824. Gross, Samuel D. Autobiography of Samuel
D. Gross, M. D. . . . emeritus professor of
surgery in the Jefferson Medical College of Phila-
delphia. With sketches of his contemporaries.
Edited by his sons. Philadelphia, G. Barrie, 1887.
2 v. 15-9084 R154.G77A3
As a surgeon, teacher, and author, Samuel D.
Gross (1805-1884) was one of the most influential
physicians in 19th-century America, and one of the
earliest to create American medical literature of im-
portance. He writes the story of his life with the
hope of stimulating the ambitious to work for the
advancement of science and the amelioration of
human suffering. Born in Pennsylvania, Gross
graduated from Jefferson Medical College in Phila-
delphia, to which he returned to occupy the chair
of surgery between 1865 and 1882. Among his con-
tributions were his surgical handbook entitled A
System of Surgery; Pathological, Diagnostic, Thera-
peutique, and Operative (Philadelphia, Blanchard &
Lea, 1859. 2 v.) which went through many edi-
tions, and the Lives of Eminent American Physicians
and Surgeons (Philadelphia, Lindsay & Blakiston,
1 861. 836 p.) which he edited and published "to
popularize the profession, and to place its services
and claims more conspicuously, than has yet been
654 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
done, before the American people." The founding
of the American Surgical Association by Dr. Gross
in 1880, "to foster surgical art, science, education
and literature," is typical of his continuing interest
in the development of surgery in America.
4825. Hertzler, Arthur E. The horse and buggy
doctor. New York, Harper, 1938. 322 p.
38-27572 R154.H39A3
Arthur Emanuel Hertzler (1870-1946), surgeon,
teacher, founder of a hospital, and author, has taken
time out from his scientific monographs on surgical
pathology and other medical subjects, to record for
posterity one phase in American life, which through
the development of better communications, hos-
pitals, and specialization, is fast becoming a tradition.
Set in Kansas, and interspersed with human inci-
dents, Dr. Hertzler's own story is typical of that
which might be told by any doctor-surgeon who
practiced his profession in a small community and
its surrounding countryside during the latter part
of the 19th century and the first quarter or more of
the 20th. Dr. Hertzler pictures the difference be-
tween the medical education available to him and to
the students of the 1930's; the changes in modes of
transportation from horse and buggy to automobile;
the contrasts between the bedside doctor and the
office physician, the kitchen operation and hospital
surgery, and between the days of epidemics and
those of immunity, and he summarizes the effects
of such changes on medical care in the United States.
4826. [Mather] Beall, Otho T., and Richard H.
Shryock. Cotton Mather, first significant
figure in American medicine. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1954. 241 p. (Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity. Institute of the History of Medicine.
Publications. 1st ser.: Monographs, v. 5)
54-8009 F67.M4218
Reprinted from volume 63 of the Proceedings of
the American Antiquarian Society.
The cultural significance of medical thought in
the English colonies at the beginning of the 18th
century is illustrated in the life of Cotton Mather
(1663-1728), whose role in medical history is fully
told for the first time. He recognized in medicine
"an immediate opportunity to apply science to the
welfare of mankind," and his activity during the
smallpox epidemic of 1721 is his major contribution
to medical practice. His use of inoculation "was the
first positive achievement in preventive medicine."
See also item no. 40.
4827. [Mayo] Clapesatde, Helen B. The Doc-
tors Mayo. Minneapolis, University of Min-
nesota Press, 1 94 1. xiv, 822 p.
41-52031 R154.M33C3
Bibliographical notes: p. 717-799.
The Mayo Clinic is a living, world-renowned
memorial to Dr. William W. Mayo (1819-1911)
and his two sons, who molded it as deftly as their
skills have shaped the techniques, the teaching, and
the practice of surgery since the end of the 19th
century. The author, editor of the University of
Minnesota Press, has had access to correspondence
and other manuscripts, newspaper clippings, and
transcripts of interviews for the basis of her life of
the Mayos, which is also the story of the Midwest
as it emerged from pioneer days, and of medicine
as it developed from the horse-and-buggy period to
the age of clinicians. Her book was translated into
several foreign languages, and reprinted in 1943
by the Garden City Publishing Company (Garden
City, N. Y., 822 p.); a second edition, condensed
for quick reading, was published in 1954. The
Mayos' contribution to medicine began in surgery,
but, in the words of the author, "their reputation
rests upon the integrated, cooperative form of medi-
cal practice and education they developed," which
"is part of the heritage of all medicine and of every
American."
4828. [Mitchell] Earnest, Ernest P. S. Weir
Mitchell, novelist and physician. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1950.
279 p. 50-8063 R154.M66E3
The list of institutions and individuals who per-
mitted Dr. Earnest to use their collections of Mitchell
papers, and the "Notes" (p. 245-274) indicate the
extensive research that has gone into this biography
of Silas Weir Mitchell (1829-1914) of Philadelphia,
who gained prominence in his own day for his work
on injuries of the nerves, his "rest cure" for nervous
diseases, his discovery of the nature of ratdesnake
venom, and his writings, both scientific and fictional.
Treating nerve wounds during the Civil War,
Mitchell gave impetus to the infant science of '
neurology, and his critical address before the 50th
annual meeting of the Medico-Psychological Asso-
ciation, in 1894, stimulated the movement for im-
proved institutions for the care of the mentally ill.
Like Oliver Wendell Holmes, and more recendy
Somerset Maugham and A. J. Cronin, Mitchell
drew on his medical experiences in touch with the
intimate lives of his patients to produce novels. In
1952 David M. Rein published a study of those
novels: S. Weir Mitchell as a Psychiatric Novelist
(New York, International Universities Press.
207 p.). Both Earnest and Rein agree that Mitch-
ell's "accomplishments deserve to be recalled more
widely and wrought into the tradition of American
culture."
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 655
4829. [Osier] Cushing, Harvey W. The life of
Sir William Osier. London, New York,
Oxford University Press, 1940. xviii, 14 17 p.
40-27751 R489.O7C8 1940
"Originally published in 1925 in a two-volume
edition." — Foreword.
William Osier (1848-1919) was born in Canada
and spent the last 15 years of his life in England,
but the fruitful interlude of 21 years in the United
States entitles him to a place among those who laid
the foundations of modern American medicine.
Becoming professor of clinical medicine at the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania in 1884, his bedside instruc-
tion was an innovation in the Philadelphia school.
Through the influence of William H. Welch, Osier
was appointed Physician-in-Chief of the new Johns
Hopkins Hospital in 1886, and was primarily re-
sponsible for the organization of the clinic. During
16 years of assocation with the Johns Hopkins Hos-
pital and Medical School, Osier published his mag-
num opus, The Principles and Practice of Medicine,
(which reached its 16th edition in 1947) and investi-
gated the etiology of typhoid fever, malaria, pneu-
monia, and other major diseases, so that his "greatest
professional service was that of propagandist of pub-
lic health measures." In 1926 Cushing received the
Pulitzer prize for this Life, which is regarded as one
of the great medical biographies.
4830. [Rush] Goodman, Nathan G. Benjamin
Rush, physician and citizen, 1746-18 13.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1934.
421 p. 34-333 l8 Ri54-R9G65
Bibliography: p. [377]~4o6.
This is the first full-length biography of one of
the most versatile figures in 18th-century America.
Becoming a professor in the first medical school in
the colonies in 1769, Rush through his lectures and
writings exerted an influence on the medical profes-
sion that was still apparent at the close of the cen-
tury. As a physician he started the practice of medi-
cine among the underprivileged of Philadelphia, in
whose welfare he always maintained a keen interest;
introduced new theories concerning the cause and
cure of diseases which antagonized some of his col-
leagues; led the fight against epidemics, and cham-
pioned the humane treatment of the mentally ill.
Benjamin Rush threw his energies behind the cause
of independence and became a member of the Con-
tinental Congress, a signer of the Declaration of
Independence, and an influence in the medical de-
partment of the Continental Army during the
Revolution. His published writings, which Mr.
Goodman has listed in his bibliography, and the
more recently published collection of the Letters of
Benjamin Rush, edited by Lyman H. Butterfield,
and published for the American Philosophical So-
ciety as volume 30, parts 1-2, of its Memoirs (Prince-
ton, N. J., Princeton University Press, 1951. 2 v.)
show that he was a prolific writer, and fearless in
expressing his opinions on any topic in which he
was interested.
4831. [Welch] Flexner, Simon, and James Thomas
Flexner. William Henry Welch and the
heroic age of American medicine. New York, Vi-
king Press, 1941. 539 p. 41-20339 R154.W32F6
"Source references" included in Appendix C;
Notes to the text, p. 466-524.
This biography is also the story of developments
in medical sciences from the 1870's to the 1930's as
shaped by William Henry Welch (1850-1934), who
is often called the "Dean of American Medicine."
He was born in Connecticut, the son and grandson
of physicians; and educated at Yale, at the College
of Physicians and Surgeons of Columbia University,
and abroad. Impressed by the advances in histology,
chemistry, physiology, and pathology which he
observed in Germany, Dr. Welch founded Ameri-
ca's first pathological laboratory at Bellvue Hos-
pital Medical College in 1878, and pioneered in
the growth of American medical research. As pro-
fessor of pathology in Johns Hopkins University,
he helped to organize the Hospital in 1889 and the
Medical School in 1893 as great medical centers for
teaching, research, and clinical medicine. Known
at home and abroad for his experiments in pathology
and bacteriology, his interest in public health and
sanitation, and his association with the Rockefeller
Institute of Medical Research and the Journal of
Experimental Medicine, Dr. Welch was the recipi-
ent of many honors and awards on both sides of the
Atlantic. At the time of his 80th birthday, Dr.
Welch took pride in his thought that "America is
now paying the debt which she owed so long to the
Old World by her own active and fruitful partici-
pation in scientific discovery and the advancement
of the science and art of medicine and sanitation."
Donald H. Fleming in his recent brief biography,
William H. Welch and the Rise of Modern Medi-
cine (Boston, Little, Brown, 1954. 216 p.), places
the work of the Flexners first on his list of "Ac-
knowledgments."
4832. Young, Hugh H. Hugh Young, a surgeon's
autobiography. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1940. 554 p. 4p-33"7 Rl54-Y63A3
Dr. Young's story of his life (1870-1945) opens
with his early years in Texas, and his education in
Virginia and Maryland, and closes with a description
of his civic activities, his travels, and his hobbies.
The central portion reviews the development of
urology as one of the early medical specialties in the
United States, and the author's service at home as
656 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
director of the Brady Urological Institute of Balti-
more, and overseas as director of the A. E. F.'s Di-
vision of Urology. Dr. Young's researches in the
field of his preeminence continued as long as he
lived; he submitted an article for publication in the
November 1945 issue of the Journal of Urology, just
one month before his death. The book has numer-
ous stories of cases, simply presented, and a series
of remarkable technical drawings; it should appeal
to both the layman and the physician.
C. Psychiatry
4833. American Psychiatric Association. One hun-
dred years of American psychiatry. New
York, Published for the American Psychiatric As-
sociation by Columbia University Press, 1944. xxiv,
649 p. A44-1921 RC435.A6
The publication of this volume commemorates the
100th birthday of the American Psychiatric Asso-
ciation, which was founded in Philadelphia on
October 16, 1844, by thirteen physicians, all of them
superintendents of hospitals for the mentally ill.
Thirteen authorities in the field have contributed
chapters on the history of psychiatry, and of the
Association; the story of mental hospitals, and of
psychiatric research, literature, and therapies; the
development of mental hygiene; military psychiatry;
psychology in relation to American psychiatry; the
growth of psychiatry as a specialty; its legal aspects;
and its influence on anthropology in America. Psy-
chiatry, according to Dr. Gregory Zilboorg, who
writes the Foreword, "touches on every aspect of
the psychological and sociological problems which
make up our civilized living, healthy and diseased.
This volume is therefore intended to represent a
survey of psychiatry as a growing cultural force."
It contains bibliographical footnotes, a list of "Some
important books in American psychiatry published
in the last twenty-five years": p. 1266^-269, and a
list of American psychiatric periodicals": p. 269-271.
4834. Beers, Clifford Whittingham. A mind that
found itself; an autobiography. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1935. 434 p.
35-6068 RC439.B4 1935
This is the "twenty-fifth anniversary edition" of
Clifford Beers' autobiography, first published in
1908. Certain pages which have served their pur-
pose have been deleted from this edition, but in-
teresting letters and an account of important work
that has grown out of the publication of the book
have been appended. As a young business man
Beers suffered a severe mental upset, and in his
story he describes the condition and treatment of the
mentally ill as he experienced them in several insti-
tutions in which he was a patient. Its publication
heralded the beginning of a new era in the manage-
ment of the mentally ill, second only to that which
Dorothea Dix had instigated in the middle of the
19th century. In 1909 Beers helped to found the
National Committee for Mental Hygiene, which
broadened its scope to include activities outside of
hospitals, and guided mental-hygiene activities for
forty years. The establishment of the Phipps Clinic
for psychiatry at Johns Hopkins, through the in-
fluence of Dr. William Welch and the philanthropist,
Henry Phipps, illustrates the interest which the
autobiography stimulated. The American Founda-
tion for Mental Hygiene, founded by Beers in 1928
to raise funds for the National Committee, and for
state and other agencies in the field, is a memorial to
Beers' achievements.
4835. Bryan, William A. Administrative psy-
chiatry. New York, Norton, 1936. 349 p.
37-27130 RC439.B885
Bibliography: p. 339-341.
Dr. Bryan was for years superintendent of the
State Hospital at Worcester, Mass., which was estab-
lished in 1832, and has often led in new methods.
In this book he describes the organization and prob-
lems of a psychiatric hospital for those who wish
to prepare for the specialty of administration. Chap-
ters are devoted to building the staff, the nursing
programs, the standards of care; medical, surgical,
and psychiatric services; the social worker, the teach-
ing program, and research; the clinic with its mental
hygiene program as a factor in preventive medicine,
and the relation of the administrator and staff to
community groups. Under improved and skilled
administration, the author foresees "the mental hos-
pital of the future as a powerful and leading factor
in the public health of the community."
4836. Deutsch, Albert. The mentally ill in Amer-
ica; a history of their care and treatment from
colonial times. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1949. xx, 555 p.
49-7527 RC443.D4 1949
Bibliography: p. [52o]-537.
The first edition, published in 1937, was made
possible by the American Foundation for Mental
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 657
Hygiene. In the second edition the author adds a
review of recent trends toward prevention and bet-
ter treatment of mental illness in the United States
including the National Mental Health Act of 1946
authorizing the Federal Government to give substan-
tial support to research, to training psychiatric per-
sonnel, and to expansion of services for those who
do not require hospitalization. The subject is ap-
proached from the standpoint of the social historian,
who illustrates how improvements in personnel, tech-
niques, and institutions follow changes in social at-
titudes. This is the story of another episode in
American life illustrating the combined efforts of
doctors, social workers, philanthropists, and gov-
ernmental units to improve the well-being of a less
fortunate segment of the population.
4837. Deutsch, Albert. The shame of the States.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1948. 188 p.
48-9247 RC443.D415
Believing that civilization in the United States
will be judged, to a great extent, by the public's atti-
tude toward the care and treatment of the mentally
ill, Deutsch attempts to revitalize the crusade started
by Dorothea Dix by publishing the results of his
survey of existing conditions in certain psychiatric
hospitals in selected areas. The author considers
the action taken by the American Psychiatric Asso-
ciation in 1946, in urging every state mental hospital
superintendent to take the lead in exposing to public
view any bad conditions within his knowledge, as
a milestone toward attaining a higher level of insti-
tutional care. The last chapter is devoted to
Deutsch's idea of an "ideal state mental hospital,"
which he believes will become a reality through the
efforts of an enlightened and aroused public.
4838. Greenblatt, Milton, and others. From cus-
todial to therapeutic patient care in mental
hospitals; explorations in social treatment. New
York, Russell Sage Foundation, 1955. 497 p.
55-11724 RC439.G82
Bibliography, compiled by Frederic L. Wells:
p. 431-484.
This book is the result of a project sponsored by
the Russell Sage Foundation to study patient care in
mental hospitals, and to explore the utilization of
the whole environment — the physical resources as
well as the social interaction between doctors, nurses,
aides, and patients — in the cure or improvement of
the patient. Considered by the Foundation as
among the "best of those teaching and research in-
stitutions that are concerned with the advancement
of psychiatric treatment," the Boston Psychopathic
Hospital was selected to estabish cooperative rela-
tions with the Bedford V. A. Hospital and the Metro-
politan State Hospital in Waltham, "in order to test
431240—60 43
the applicability of principles and practices such as
those used by it." Part I traces the evolution of
practices developed at the Boston Psychopathic Hos-
pital, and Parts II and III comprise the report on
improvements achieved at the other two hospitals.
William L. Russell in The New Yor\ Hospital; a
History of the Psychiatric Service, ijji-1936 (New
York, Columbia University Press, 1945. 556 p.)
describes the progress of that institution's Blooming-
dale Asylum and Payne Whitney Clinic. The
theory of social structure is the basic thesis of Alfred
H. Stanton and Morris S. Schwartz in The Mental
Hospital, a Study of Institutional Participation in
Psychiatric Illness and Treatment (New York, Basic
Books, 1954. 492 p.). The indication is that a
transition is rapidly being made from custodial re-
straint of the insane in asylums to the curative treat-
ment of the mentally ill, through improvement of
the social environment, in hospitals.
4839. Marshall, Helen E. Dorothea Dix, for-
gotten Samaritan. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press, 1937. 298 p.
37-9815 HV28.D6M3
Bibliography: p. [2713-287.
This scholarly dissertation on the life of Dorothea
Dix, published 50 years after her death, tells the
story of one of America's great pioneer social work-
ers, which is also a chapter in the development of
institutional treatment of the mentally ill in the
United States. Following a survey of the county
jails, almshouses, state penitentiaries, and other in-
stitutions, Dorothea Dix presented memorials to the
state legislatures, and to Congress in 1848, in which
she represented the mentally ill as "wards of the
nation" — a broadened concept of governmental re-
sponsibility. Dorothea Dix erected her own monu-
ment in service to her fellow man through the 32
hospitals which were established by her efforts in the
United States, as well as several abroad. Her child-
hood, and her work as Superintendent of Nurses
during the Civil War, are other episodes of great
interest.
4840. White, William Alanson. William Alanson
White; the autobiography of a purpose.
With an introd. by Ray Lyman Wilbur. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1938. xix, 293 p.
38-13677 RC439.W5
Bibliography: p. [275J-293.
William Alanson White (1870-1937) was one of
the founders of modern psychiatry. An exponent
of what has been labeled the genetic concept in psy-
chiatry, he emphasized the importance of environ-
ment and adequate research into the problems of
each individual patient as essential to treatment. He
658 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
turned to occupational therapy, hydrotherapy, and
psychotherapy as methods of dispensing with re-
straint. Advocating cooperation between the legal
profession and psychiatry in dealing with criminals,
his interest in forensic problems led in 1934 to the
organization of a Section on Forensic Psychiatry
of the American Psychiatric Association. Much of
the Autobiography deals with his years in Wash-
ington as administrator of Saint Elizabeths Hospital,
which he helped to make one of the leading mental
hospitals in the country. He broadened the area of
his influence through courses in nervous and mental
diseases and psychiatry at Georgetown and George
Washington Universities. His book, Outlines of
Psychiatry, first published in 1907, reached its four-
teenth edition in 1935, and has been called a "classic,
particularly from the pedagogic standpoint." The
William Alanson White Psychiatric Foundation was
created by a group of friends and associates in 1933
to perpetuate Dr. White's work.
D. Other Specialties
4841. American Academy of Pediatrics. Commit-
tee for the Study of Child Health Services.
Child health services and pediatric education; report
of the Committee for the Study of Child Health
Services, the American Academy of Pediatrics, with
the cooperation of the United States Public Health
Service and the United States Children's Bureau.
New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1949. xxv,
270 p. 49-2785 RJ42.U5A62
References: p. 257-258.
Supplement: Methology and tabu-
lations on services. New York, Common-
wealth Fund, 1949. 1. v. (various pagings)
RJ42.U5A62 Suppl.
By the end of the 19th century the American
Pediatric Society had been founded; the organ of the
profession, Pediatrics, established; and a considerable
literature on the diseases of childhood published in
the United States. Pediatrics had taken its place
among the early specialties of the medical world.
The organization of the American Association for
the Study and Prevention of Infant Mortality in
1909, the creation of the U. S. Children's Bureau in
1912, the White House Conferences of 1919, 1930,
and 1940, the passage of the Social Security Act in
1935, and the inauguration of a nationwide study of
child health services by the American Academy of
Pediatrics in 1944, of which this volume is the report,
are all milestones in the development of the child
health movement. Part I of this study surveys the
pediatric aspects of private practice, hospitals, and
community health agencies, while Part II is an evalu-
ation of facilities for training physicians who are re-
sponsible for child health care. The study aims to
promote the Academy's objective: "preventive, diag-
nostic, and curative medical services of high quality,
which, when used in cooperation with other services
for children, will make this country an ideal place
for children to grow into responsible citizens."
4842. Carr, Malcolm Wallace. Dentistry, an
agency of health service. New York, Com-
monwealth Fund, 1946. xxiv, 219 p. (New York
Academy of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and
the Changing Order. Studies)
SG46-319 RK34.U6C3
"References" at end of most of the chapters.
The development of dentistry as an autonomous
profession is traced during more than a century of
growth. The first 75 years were devoted to im-
proving techniques through research and discovery,
and to establishing an educational system, and a
code of practice. More recendy, and especially
since the passage of the Social Security Act in 1935
made funds available for dental divisions in state
health departments, the American Dental Associa-
tion has been directing the profession toward a
place in the public health program and stimulating
communities to concern themselves actively with
their local dental problems. This proceeds from
the profession's growing consciousness of its re-
sponsibility in a changing society, and of its re-
sponsibility for cooperation with community groups
in improving the nation's health. The problem has
also been explored by Alfred J. Asgis in Professional
Dentistry in American Society; a Historical and
Social Approach to Dental Progress (New York,
Clinical Press, 1943. 260 p.).
4843. Horner, Harlan H. Dental education to-
day. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1947. 420 p. Med 47-610 RK91.H6
The author is secretary of the Council on Dental
Education of the American Dental Association, and
his study is based on a survey of dental schools in
the United States conducted by the Council prin-
cipally in 1942-43, with a view toward standardiza-
tion and accreditation. The chapters deal with
organization and plans, financial management and
support, faculties, students, curriculum, teaching,
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 659
and auxiliary agencies. Pointing out defects and
limitations as well as accomplishments, the author
concludes that American dental schools have clearly
won world leadership. In his words, "the great
challenge of the future to all agencies of dentistry
in common — schools, examining boards and prac-
titioners— lies in the inescapable responsibility of
carrying to humankind the fruits of the science and
of the art the profession already possesses."
4844. Hubbell, Alvin A. The development of
ophthalmology in America, 1800 to 1870; a
contribution to ophthalmologic history and biogra-
phy; an address delivered in abstract before the Sec-
tion of Ophthalmology of the American Medical
Association, June 4, 1907. Rev. and enl. Chicago,
American Medical Association Press, 1908. 197 p.
8-8140 RE30.U6H9
George Rosen in his doctoral dissertation, The
Specialization of Medicine with Particular Reference
to Ophthalmology (New York, Froben Press, 1944.
94 p.), says that "ophthalmology and otology were
among the very first specialties to appear ... As
a result these fields of practice have an older tradi-
tion as specialties and enjoy the prestige of estab-
lished achievement." Dr. Hubbell, professor of
clinical opthalmology in the University of Buffalo,
describes the American contribution to that tradi-
tion in brief sketches of institutions and the indi-
viduals who, through research and clinical observa-
tion, have developed ocular surgery and other tech-
niques, and have disseminated their findings in pub-
lications on the anatomy, physiology, and pathology
of the eye. A chapter is devoted to the transition
period during which the treatment of diseases of
the eye passed from the general physician and
surgeon to the ophthalmological specialist, whose
position was well established by 1870.
E. Hospitals and Nursing
4845. Chesney, Alan M. The Johns Hopkins Hos-
pital and the Johns Hopkins University
School of Medicine, a chronicle. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1943. 318 p. SG44-2 R747.J62C5
With approximately 30 years of service at the
Johns Hopkins Hospital and School of Medicine,
where he progressed from student, instructor, and as-
sociate professor to dean, Dr. Chesney has combined
his years of experience with the official records of
both institutions to write their history from the in-
corporation of the University and the Hospital in
1867 to the opening of the School of Medicine in
1893. This first volume was published on the 50th
anniversary of the opening of the School of Medicine,
but the second volume, interrupted by the war years,
has not appeared. Dr. Chesney tells the story of
the unusual trust created by Johns Hopkins, and
the careers of great figures of American medicine —
John Shaw Billings, William H. Welch, William
Osier, William S. Halsted, Franklin B. Mall, and
others — as they assisted in the organization and
development of a University unique in the medical
annals of the United States. Richard H. Shryock
in his brochure, The Unique Influence of the Johns
Hopkins University on American Medicine (Copen-
hagen, Munksgaard, 1953. 77 p.), tells how well
the foundation had been laid for future growth in
these words: "To Hopkins . . . the country was
indebted after 1890 for a veritable revolution in the
nature and status of medical sciences — with all that
this implied for human welfare. This was a de-
velopment of major importance in the social and
cultural life of the nation, and the meaning of the
Hopkins epic is missed if these wider relationships
and consequences are ignored. Here is a tradition
which should and will be maintained, no doubt in
changing forms adapted to changing circumstances."
The history of The Johns Hopkins School of Nurs-
ing, 1889-1949, by Ethel Johns and Blanche Pfeffer-
korn (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1954. 416
p.), rounds out the story of this medical center.
4846. Columbia University. New Yor\ State Hos-
pital Study. A pattern for hospital care;
final report ... by Eli Ginzberg. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1949. xxiv, 368 p.
49-50231 RA981.N7C6 1949
This study is a report by Columbia University to
the Joint Survey and Planning Commission on the
present and potential financial position of the vol-
untary general hospital in New York State. Re-
quests from leaders of voluntary hospital groups
for State aid, and the responsibility of the Commis-
sion "for developing a long-range construction pro-
gram to provide facilities which would insure ade-
quate hospital, clinic, and related services for all the
people of the State," gave impetus to the study. It
seeks to provide a basis for the allocation of Federal
funds to construct, expand, or rebuild hospitals in
designated areas. In addition to questions concern-
ing the financial position of voluntary general hos-
pitals, the study explores the major challenges which
660 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
confront those hospitals within the next few years,
the role of municipal hospitals, and the problems of
providing care for patients suffering from chronic
diseases, tuberculosis, or mental diseases. It sug-
gests action that can be taken on an individual,
communal, and State level to improve the present
system and to insure its sound development. In the
last chapter the responsibilities of the various organi-
zations in New York State for hospital care are out-
lined and suggestions offered for an integrated
program.
4847. Commission on Hospital Care. Hospital
care in the United States; a study of the
function of the general hospital, its role in the care
of all types of illness, and the conduct of activities
related to patient service, with recommendations
for its extension and integration for more adequate
care of the American public. New York, Common-
wealth Fund, 1947. xxiv, 631 p.
Med 47-56 RA981.A2C57
Includes bibliographies.
In October 1944 the American Hospital Associa-
tion organized its Commission on Hospital Care in
order to make a comprehensive survey of hospitals
and determine their part in the postwar life of
America. Its report discusses the trends in admin-
istration and organization that underlie the future
development of hospital service, and describes the
factors which affect the size and use of hospital facili-
ties and the need for them. It analyzes the physical,
service, and financial aspects of existing hospitals.
From the pilot project set up in Michigan to serve
as a pattern for study in other states, it derives sug-
gestions for the integration of specialized services
in the general hospital, and an estimate of additional
facilities necessary to provide adequate service to
the public. A final section presents methods of
financing hospital care, the legal status of hospitals,
and their interrelations with governmental and
voluntary health agencies. The U. S. Public Health
Service cooperated with the Commission in col-
lecting the data for this survey: "The arrangement
was unique in that it established a means whereby
a voluntary and a governmental agency collaborated
in the study and analysis of a public problem." As
a sequel to this work the Commission on Financing
of Hospital Care was established in November 1951,
"to study the costs of providing adequate hospital
services and to determine the best systems of pay-
ment for such services." The results of that study
were published as Financing Hospital Care in the
United States (New York, Blakiston, 1954-55. 3 v')-
Volume 1 deals with "Factors Affecting the Costs
of Hospital Care;" volume 2, "Prepayment and the
Community;" volume 3, "Financing Hospital Care
for Nonwage and Low-Income Groups."
4848. Corwin, Edward H. L. The American hos-
pital. New York, Commonwealth Fund,
1946. 226 p. (New York Academy of Medicine.
Committee on Medicine and the Changing Order.
Studies.) SG 46-293 RA981.A2C6
"References" at the end of each chapter.
The adaptation of anesthesia to operative pro-
cedures in the 1840's, the development of new tech-
niques and clinical laboratories, the concentration
of population in cities and the popular acceptance
of hospitalization insurance plans, and the accumu-
lation and distribution of wealth have all stimulated
the growth of general and specialized hospitals.
From 178 in 1873, the year in which the first list
of hospitals in the United States was published,
the number had increased to 6,655 m I043> tne vear
in which the Committee on Medicine and the
Changing Order began its study. The author, who
was executive secretary of the Committee on Public
Health Relations of the New York Academy of
Medicine, examines all phases of the American
hospital — ownership, finance, geographical distri-
bution, training of nurses and interns, organization
of medical services including outpatient departments,
and hospital architecture. The American hospital,
he concludes, "has not adjusted itself adequately to
the income levels of all groups of people or to the
needs of all geographic areas. It has not uniformly
reached the level of excellence it is potentially capable
of achieving." In his final chapter he offers a whole
series of practical suggestions calculated to promote
these ends.
4849. McGibony, John R. Principles of hospital
administration. New York, Putnam, 1952.
540 p. 52-11467 RA971.M247
The chief of the Division of Medical and Hospital
Resources, U. S. Public Health Service (1949-53)
describes, among other functions of hospital admin-
istration, methods of measuring community needs
for hospital services, and raising funds for construc-
tion. The principles of functional hospital design
and organization will be of special help to those
interested in efficient operation. The book fills a
need in hospital literature for trustees, administra-
tors, doctors, nurses, and students.
4850. Morton, Thomas G. The history of the
Pennsylvania Hospital, 1751-1895. Publi-
cation authorized by the contributors at their annual
meeting, May 1893, and directed by the Board of
Managers. Philadelphia, Times Print. House, 1895.
575 p. 9-^1^1 RA982.P5P47
The Pennsylvania Hospital in Philadelphia,
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 66 1
founded in 175 1, is the oldest institution intended
solely for the care of the sick and injured in the
United States. The idea of establishing a hospital
was conceived by Dr. Thomas Bond, who, with the
assistance of Benjamin Franklin and others, raised
funds among their fellow citizens for the support
of the hospital. Compiled from original documents,
the History contains a chapter on the treatment of
the mentally ill whose cause was championed by
Benjamin Rush. The maintenance of a community
hospital by public subscription provided a pattern
for the future development of hospitals in the United
States.
4851. New York Academy of Medicine. Commit-
tee on Public Health Relations. Infant and
maternal care in New York City; a study of hospital
facilities. Edward H. L. Corwin, general director
of study. New York, Columbia University Press,
1952. xv, 188 p. 52-11549 RG962.N4N4 1952
This study illustrates the concern of a metropolitan
community for the health and welfare of its children.
A team consisting of an obstetrician, a pediatrically
trained nurse, and a pediatrician visited 104 hospital
maternity services in New York City. This report
presents the facts which they obtained concerning
every aspect of the lying-in and nursing services in
the hospitals of the city. Specific shortcomings
are summarized in the last chapter as a basis for the
improvements to be desired.
4852. Roberts, Mary M. American nursing; his-
tory and interpretation. New York, Mac-
millan, 1954. 688 p. 54-12563 RT4.R6
Bibliographies at end of chapters.
The author, editor emeritus of the American Jour-
nal of Nursing, selects 1900, the year of the Journal's
founding, and 1952, when the unification of several
nursing associations was completed, as the termini of
her history of American nursing. The first two
chapters picture the American scene at and before
the turn of the century and describe the influence of
Florence Nightingale, and certain military and
religious groups, on the profession in the United
States. The transition from private duty to public
health nurse, the growing recognition of the prac-
tical nurse as part of the nursing profession, the
genesis and growth of nursing schools and profes-
sional organizations, and wartime duties and peace-
time services are interpreted against changes in eco-
nomic and social concepts, and scientific improve-
ments. The part nurses play in the World Health
Organization and international health programs is
the subject of the last chapter. The author points
out that the development of international nursing
activities is a challenge to those nurses who believe
that "anything that contributes to the exchange of
creative ideas across boundary lines contributes to
the welfare of mankind."
4853. Washburn, Frederic A. The Massachusetts
General Hospital; its development, 1900-
1935. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. 643 p.
39-17718 RA982.B7M53
Officers of the Massachusetts General Hospital:
p. 576-633.
The director emeritus of the Massachusetts Gen-
eral Hospital tells its story during the period of its
greatest growth, relating events that occurred prior
to 1900 only when they have not appeared in earlier
histories, or have been found pertinent to develop-
ments that followed the turn of the century. The
General Hospital, which cared only for the poor in
1900, expanded its plant by the addition of the
unique Baker Memorial for the benefit of people of
moderate means, and the Phillips House for those
well able to pay more than the cost of their care.
By 1935, with its Out-Patient Department and its
services for the mentally ill at McLean, the Hospital
was caring for all groups in the community.
Changes in administration which provided a more
functional organization are described, with the con-
sequent growth of research, the formation of spe-
cial clinics, and the improvement of facilities for
patients, for the investigation of disease, and for the
teaching of medicine. Dr. Washburn has written
not only an interesting account of the Hospital, but
also a "vital chapter in the history of the progress
of medical science and administration."
4854. Yost, Edna. American women of nursing.
Rev. ed. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1955.
xxiii, 197 p. _ 55-32 16 RT34.Y7 1955
Contents. — M. Adelaide Nutting. — Lillian Wald.
Annie M. Goodrich. — Isabel M. Stewart. — Sister M.
Olivia Gowan. — Estelle Massey Osborne. — Florence
G. Blake. — Anne Prochazka. — Theodora A. Floyd.
— Lucile Petry Leone.
Modern nursing in the United States was inspired
by the services of Florence Nightingale in the
Crimean War. Supported by the democratic action
of a group of women in New York City who banded
together and made a public appeal for funds, the
first nurses' training school "to be based definitely on
Miss Nightingale's uncompromising doctrine which
insisted on the need for full authority for the matron
or superintendent of the school who must be a nurse,
not a physician or layman," was opened at Bellvue
Hospital on May 1, 1873. The author has chosen
for inclusion in this book the lives of interesting
women whose stories tell something of the problems
and struggles which have confronted the nursing
profession. "They have done a good job, they are
women of whom democracy may well be proud."
662 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
F. Medical Education
4855. Allen, Raymond B. Medical education and
the changing order. New York, Common-
wealth Fund, 1946. 142 p. (New York, Academy
of Medicine. Committee on Medicine and the
Changing Order. Studies) SG46-252 R735.A46
Bibliographical footnotes.
The medical profession is increasingly focusing
attention on man in his economic and social environ-
ment which is constantly changed by technological
advances. Medical education aims to produce phy-
sicians who recognize the influence of emotional
and mental reactions on the physical manifestations
of disease. Dr. Allen, dean of the College of
Dentistry, Medicine, and Pharmacy, University of
Illinois, describes the development of the techniques
of medical education, points out some of the de-
ficiencies, and suggests some improvements. "Med-
icine of the future," he says, "if it is to progress as
a social as well as a biological science must broaden
its oudook and adjust its educational program ac-
cordingly. Medicine is coming of age as a social
science in the service of society." The problems of
medical education and recent progress in their solu-
tion are also described by a group of medical edu-
cators in a series of papers which appeared in the
Journal of Medical Education and have been re-
printed as Medical Education Today, Its Aims,
Problems, and Trends (Chicago, Association of
American Medical Colleges, 1953. 123 p.). Ex-
periments in methods of teaching and in integrating
certain related science courses, which are in progress
at Harvard, Western Reserve, the University of
Colorado, and other medical schools, are given as
illustrations of the "attempt to restructure the teach-
ing program to accommodate comprehensive
medicine."
4856. Carson, Joseph. A history of the Medical
Department of the University of Pennsyl-
vania, from its foundation in 1765. With sketches
of the lives of deceased professors. Philadelphia,
Lindsay & Blakiston, 1869.
8-7557 R747.P42 1869
Through the influence of Dr. John Morgan and
Dr. William Shippen, formal medical education in
the American colonies began with the organization
of the Medical Department of the College of Phila-
delphia in 1765. This history is the expansion of
a lecture delivered by the author on the occasion of
its centenary. The growth of the school up to the
American Revolution, its union with the University
of Pennsylvania, and its progress through one
hundred years, are told in the lives of the founders
and professors, whose courses in the medical sci-
ences, combined with clinical instruction in the
Philadelphia Almshouse, did much to shape the pat-
tern of medical education in the United States.
4857. Commission on Graduate Medical Educa-
tion. Graduate medical education; report.
Chicago [ University of Chicago Press ] 1940. 303 p.
40-33806 R737.C6
This report may be considered as a supplement
to the Final Report of the Commission on Medical
Education (no. 4858) which dealt only briefly with
problems in the graduate field. It does not attempt
to survey present practices, but to bring together the
best medical and educational thought concerning
the internship, the residency, postgraduate educa-
tion, and specialty boards, with the hope of stimu-
lating improvements in these areas which will lead
to better-trained physicians and better medical care
of the patient. To place internships and residencies
in their proper perspective in the educational pro-
gram, and to arouse a feeling of mutual responsi-
bility between hospitals and interns for providing
training in return for service, a study of the situa-
tion in 77 hospitals in New York City was prepared
by the New York Committee on the Study of Hos-
pital Internships and Residencies: Internships and
Residencies in New Yor\ City, 1934-1937, Their
Place in Medical Education (New York, Common-
wealth Fund, 1938. 492 p.).
4858. Commission on Medical Education. Final
report. New York, Office of the Director
of Study, 1932. 560 p. 33-1109 R745.C86
Regulations and specifications formulated by the
American Medical Association, the Association of
American Medical Colleges, and various state licen-
sing boards, by 191 8, had transformed medical edu-
cation from apprentice and commercial school train-
ing to a university enterprise with precise standards
applying to students, teaching staff, hospital facili-
ties, premedical requirements, and curriculum. The
elevated standards reduced the number of schools
and of students, and increased the cost so that medi-
cal education reached a static plateau. New discov-
eries and points of view, and changing university
aims and methods as well as social conditions,
created the need of broadening the scope of medical
education. The Commission on Medical Education
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 663
was organized as an independent body by the Asso-
ciation of American Medical Colleges in 1925 to
study existing conditions. Attention is focused on
the training of the medical student to meet the health
needs and to understand the social and economic
conditions of the community in which he becomes
a practicing physician, and as such, a leader in health
and other community programs. To accomplish
this objective the Commission divides the study into
chapters on the relationship between the medical
profession and the general public, the need of post-
graduate education, specialization, internship and
licensure, and the medical courses that form the
basis of the training. "Emphasis," says the Com-
mission, "must be kept constantly upon the fact
that only through a sufficient number of properly
trained physicians can a community expect to meet
its responsibility for the care and prevention of ill-
ness and the protection of health."
4859. Ebaugh, Franklin G., and Charles A. Rymer.
Psychiatry in medical education. New York,
Commonwealth Fund, 1942. xxiv, 619 p.
42-5906 RC607.E24
Bibliography at end of each chapter.
Concerned with psychiatric education as a phase
of medical training both for general practice and
for specialization, this study is largely based on data
collected during a survey of 66 psychiatric schools
in the United States during 1932, and from follow-
up questionnaires in 1934, 1938, and 1940. Train-
ing of the staff, curriculum from preclinical through
postgraduate years, and hospital and other clinical
facilities are explored. The authors use the 4-year
course in psychiatry at their own University of
Colorado as an illustration of the essential features
in psychiatric training. The section on postgraduate
education considers the need of advanced training
and opportunities in the field. In summing up,
the authors recognized that psychiatry in the early
1940's had not completely succeeded in breaking
through its isolation, and that to succeed, it "must
permeate the curriculum . . . [and] graduates of
medical schools must learn to treat the whole
patient — a total person with a mind as well as a
body."
4860. Norwood, William Frederick. Medical ed-
ucation in the United States before the Civil
War. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1944. xvi, 487 p. SG44-196 R745.N6
Bibliography: p. 435-462.
Prior to 1800 medical education passed through
periods of apprenticeship to the few English or con-
tinental-trained doctors found in the American
colonies, study abroad, and training at the infant
medical schools such as those founded at the College
of Philadelphia (1765), King's College (1768), Har-
vard (1783), or Darthmouth (1797). During the
first half of the new century an increasing popula-
tion and a continuous westward migration created
a growing demand for doctors and so for medical
schools. These sprang up without regulation, and
often only for the financial gain of the promoters.
Largely in order to improve the standards of the
medical schools the American Medical Association
was organized by leaders of the profession in 1847.
The author surveys the development of the Ameri-
can system up to i860 in this study of the medical
schools of Pennsylvania, New York, New England,
the Old South, and the country west of the Appa-
lachian Mountains. In Part VIII he explores the
financial support of medical schools, the cost of
medical training, the curriculum, textbooks, teach-
ing problems, and degrees and licensure. The pe-
riod also witnessed the entrance of women into the
medical profession, and the rise of sectarian groups
such as the homeopaths and Thomsonians. "Medi-
cal education in the United States ... in the cen-
tury before the Civil War, constitutes a significant
and unique chapter in the social history of the
country."
4861. Survey of Medical Education. Medical
schools in the United States at mid-century.
[By] John E. Deitrick and Robert C. Berson. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. xxii, 380 p.
53-6041 R745.S85
A report on the Survey Committee's visits to 41
representative medical schools from September 1949
to May 1951, prepared by the director and asso-
ciate director of study. The basic premises are stated
in the Introduction in which the functions of medi-
cal schools — education, research, service, finances,
operation, curriculum and teaching methods, and ad-
vanced education and training — are discussed. A
Subcommittee on Preprofessional Education, under
the chairmanship of Aura E. Severinghaus, also pre-
pared a survey: Preparation for Medical Education
in the Literal Arts College (New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1953. 400 p.), which rounds out the picture
of medical education at mid-century. In summing
up the authors say: "The greatest need of medical
schools today is clear, critical thought, by men who
are sincerely interested in the education of students
and who have an understanding of educational prin-
ciples, a knowledge of science, and familiarity with
social and economic trends. Such men must have
courage and faith in the idea that the quality of
medical education in the last analysis will deter-
mine the future of medicine in the United States."
664 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
G. Public Health
4862. Bachman, George W. Health resources in
the United States; personnel, facilities, and
services. Washington, Brookings Institution, 1952.
xvi, 344 p. 52-12128 RA407.3.B3
This is primarily a statistical review of the state
of the Nation's health in 1950 as it has been affected
by the advances in medical science, and the increase
in medical facilities and the control of communicable
diseases since 1900. Data collected by the Com-
mittee on Costs of Medical Care (1928-31), the Pub-
lic Health Service in the National Health Survey
(1935-36), the Blue Cross Commission and other
groups are analyzed. The examination of the prob-
lem of personnel includes an inventory of physicians,
dentists, professional nurses and auxiliary person-
nel, and a special study of medical group practice
of which the Mayo Clinic was one of the first ex-
amples in the United States. An inventory of the
hospital system as a whole with emphasis on the
general hospital, and of facilities for special health
problems and for certain classes such as the Armed
Forces and the industrial workers, forms the third
part of the survey. A study of the Nation's health
was also prepared by the President's Commission
on the Health Needs of the Nation: Building Amer-
ica's Health ([Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off.]
1952-53. 5 v.). This, as well as the Brookings
Institution's study, assumes the joint responsibility
of both private and public agencies for public health
in a democracy.
4863. Cavins, Harold M. National health
agencies, a survey with especial reference to
voluntary associations, including a detailed directory
of major health organizations. [Washington] Pub-
lic Affairs Press, 1945. 251 p.
SG45-276 RA421.A1C3
"This study is concerned primarily with the rise
of the national voluntary health agency as a social
phenomenon of the early twentieth century, as a
significant phase of public health history, as an im-
portant agent of health education, and as a move-
ment characteristically American." Against the
background of economic, social, and scientific de-
velopments, the author traces the origin and history
of such major professional organizations as the
American Psychiatric Association, and representa-
tive agencies of the promotional or educational type
like the National Tuberculosis Association. Bring-
ing this information together in a single volume for
the first time provides a useful source of informa-
tion for the student of the public health movement.
In the same year a book which, the authors say,
"complements the present Study," was published
under the auspices of the National Health Council:
Voluntary Health Agencies by Selskar M. Gunn
and Philip S. Piatt (New York, Ronald Press, 1945.
364 p.).
4864. Chicago-Cook County Health Survey. The
Chicago-Cook County Health Survey con-
ducted by the United States Public Health Service.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xlviii,
1317 p. 49-11489 RA448.C4C4
Aroused during World War II by the Selective
Service reports on the health of the nation's young
men, the citizens of the Chicago-Cook County area
organized this survey in 1946. It "represents a land-
mark in the evolution of co-operative community
enterprises designed to bring the benefits of pre-
ventive medical, sanitary engineering, and nursing
services to every individual in the community."
The findings and recommendations represent the
corporate opinions of the U. S. Public Health Service
and a group of recognized local experts, whose first
purpose was "to make a fact-finding inventory of
all the health forces in this field and to appraise the
strength and weakness of their functional capacity,"
in order "to determine whether or not community
public health resources are being used in such a way
as to obtain a maximum of service for the money
expended." The results are described in three parts.
Part I deals with all phases of "Environmental Sani-
tation" from water supplies and mosquito control
to swimming pool sanitation and housing. Part II,
"Preventive Medicine," details the activities of offi-
cial and voluntary health agencies, from collecting
public health statistics and control of communicable
diseases to nutrition services and health education.
Part III describes facilities and services for medical
care available in the area. Dr. Thomas Parran, Sur-
geon General of the United States from 1936 to
1948, thought that this undoubtedly would "establish
a pattern for many similar surveys in other areas of
the country."
4865. Cohn, Alfred E., and Claire Lingg. The
burden of diseases in the United States. New
York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 129 p.
51-1304 RA407.3.C57
References: p. 127-129.
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 665
Tables basic to figures in The
burden of diseases. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1950. 69 1. RA407.3.C57 Tables
Dealing for the most part with the period 1900
to 1940, two authorities in the field of medical sta-
tistics have examined the mortality figures gathered
by the U. S. Bureau of the Census, and the mor-
bidity statistics collected during certain surveys by
the U. S. Public Health Service, and other groups,
to present a picture, through graphs, charts and
interpretation, of the incidence of diseases upon
various age groups, and the changes in the per-
centage of deaths at specific ages. Such a study
is important in any public health program because
it demonstrates "how the results may effect shifts
of emphasis in the study of disease, and in the pro-
vision society must make for those who are ill, or
for those who, having escaped fatal illness through
the advances of modern medicine, become charges
upon the community in other ways." Comparable
events in other countries have been included for
"the light that is shed on the state of the various
medical cultures."
4866. Hiscock, Ira V. Community health organi-
zation. 4th ed. New York, Commonwealth
Fund, 1950. 278 p. 50-6043 RA425.H5 1950
This fourth edition of a manual designed for the
use of health officers, public health nurses, and teach-
ers, brings up to date the developments in com-
munity health affairs which have affected their
organization and administration during the past
ten years. The author, who is chairman of the
Department of Public Health, Yale University, de-
fines the functions of the National Government, the
State and the municipality in the public health pro-
gram of the Nation, and details a plan for com-
munity health organization that "contains the ele-
ments of the best current practice in the country,
considered in relation to a theoretical community
of 100,000 population."
4867. Howard, William Travis. Public health ad-
ministration and the natural history of dis-
ease in Baltimore, Maryland, 1797-1920. Washing-
ton, Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1924.
565 p. (Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Publication no. 351) 24-24629 RA448.B3H6
Bibliography: p. 563-565.
Two health ordinances, enacted soon after the
organization of the new city government of Balti-
more in 1797, and revised many times in the next
123 years, formed the basis of practically all subse-
quent local public health legislation. The Baltimore
Department of Health, in continuous operation since
the Committee of Health was set up in 1793, is the
oldest permanent municipal body devoted primarily
431240—60 44
to the public health. The evolution of the Health
Department and the administration of the public
health laws of Baltimore are traced by Dr. Howard,
who laid the foundation for this study during
four years of service as assistant commissioner of
health in 1915-1919. The author presents such
physical data as local topography, population, com-
mercial expansion, and wealth, and such sociological
factors as the prominence of medicine, medical men,
and education in the development of the city, to
illustrate their influence on the etiology and the con-
trol of disease. Chapters are devoted to diseases
common to the area, mortality statistics, and the part
which various diseases have played in determining
policies of public health administration in Baltimore.
4868. Jacobs, Philip P. The control of tuber-
culosis in the United States. Rev. ed. New
York, National Tuberculosis Association, 1940.
387 p. 4°-346l5 RA644.T7J25 1940
"Selected references" at end of most of the
chapters.
Published posthumously, this revised edition is
dedicated by the National Tuberculosis Association
as a memorial to the author (1 879-1 940), who was
director of personnel and publications of the Asso-
ciation. Some historical aspects of the anti-tuber-
culosis movement beginning with Drs. Hermann M.
Biggs, Livingston Trudeau, and others who applied
the scientific principles of Robert Koch, discoverer
of the tubercle bacillus in 1881, are discussed in
Part I. In Part II the methods that have contributed
to the success of the movement are discussed, as well
as the relationships between physicians and laymen,
public and private officials, tuberculosis and other
health agencies, and local, state, and national or-
ganizations. Programs for the control of tuber-
culosis, led by that of the National Tuberculosis
Association, have been grouped together in Part III.
The decline in the death rate from tuberculosis in
the United States during the years 1900-1955 from
194.4 to 9-4 Per 100,000 population is the best evi-
dence of the progress which has been made through
the cooperation of individuals, private organizations,
and public agencies.
4869. Mott, Frederick D., and Milton I. Roemer.
Rural health and medical care. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1948. xvii, 608 p. (McGraw-Hill ser.
in health science) 48-3784 RA427.M73
The authors, who are officials in state health
organizations, have prepared a study of the health
conditions and medical facilities available to one
segment of the population which is increasingly a
concern of the Nation. Former Surgeon General
Thomas Parran in a foreword describes the book as
"the essence of current knowledge on virtually
666 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
every aspect of rural health status and medical care
. . . With broad social perspective it describes the
economic and historical developments out of which
arise present difficulties in rural medical services.
It presents an integrated story of health conditions,
medical resources and services, and organized ef-
forts for health improvement in rural areas. In
conclusion, it offers recommendations for future
action which merit careful study."
4870. National Health Assembly, Washington,
D. C, 1948. America's health; a report to
the Nation. Official report. New York, Harper,
x949- 395 P- 49-4679 RA445.N28 1948
Organized by the Federal Security Administrator,
the National Health Assembly met in Washington,
D. C, in May 1948, to discuss all factors involved
in preparing a 10-year plan for "expanding the
health resources of this nation and raising the health
standards of the entire population." The Assembly
was divided into fourteen sections which conducted
panel discussions, exploring and making recom-
mendations concerning such problems as the Na-
tion's need for more doctors and other medical
personnel, more hospitals, and more health depart-
ment units; the problems of chronic disease, ma-
ternal and child health, and rural health; and medi-
cal research and the cost of medical care. The suc-
cess of a nation-wide health program depends not
only on the determination of the citizens who spon-
sor community and state participation, but also on
the health of other nations. Encountering prob-
lems of international character, the Assembly de-
voted one evening to them. It was pointed out that
the United States has accepted its responsibilities to
other nations by joining the World Health Organi-
zation.
4871. Pelton, Walter J., and Jacob M. Wisan, eds.
Dentistry in public health. 2d ed., com-
pletely rev. and rewritten. Philadelphia, Saunders,
1955. 282 p. 55"5207 RK52.P4 1955
Includes bibliographies at end of chapters.
Dental public health is service provided for com-
munities and administered by departments of health
at all levels — Federal, State, and local. The authors
point out that surveys of health conditions in given
areas are prerequisite to dental health programs and
discuss the methodology of collecting and classifying
data according to the dental needs of the American
people, and the resources available for their treat-
ment. Chapters describe the control of dental caries
by fluoridation of water, the need of educating the
public and plans available for payment of dental
services. The second edition has been completely
reorganized to include advances that have been
made in dentistry since the first appeared in 1949.
4872. Powell, John H. Bring out your dead; the
great plague of yellow fever in Philadelphia
in 1793. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1949. 304 p. 49-50068 RC211.P5P6 1949
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 287-294.
Recurring epidemics of smallpox and yellow
fever were the worst health crises faced by the small
but growing towns of the Colonial and Federal
Periods. The most disastrous decade opened with
the Philadelphia epidemic of 1793, which the author
calls "one of the great tragic episodes in the human
history of this land." It was the problem of the
whole people, and the banding together of a group
of citizens to function as an emergency committee,
the setting up of an isolation hospital on Bush Hill,
and the issuing of certain sanitary rules, temporary
expedients though they were, bore the seeds of a
community public health program. Much of the
story centers around Dr. Benjamin Rush, "Phila-
delphia's amazing citizen," who, like other phy-
sicians of the day, described the disease accurately,
and noted the presence of mosquitoes, but left it
to Walter Reed and his associates to establish the
causal relationship between the two in the early
1900's. Howard A. Kelly tells the story of the
disease, and the investigations which led to its con-
trol, in his Walter Reed and Yellow Fever, 3d ed.
rev. (Baltimore, Norman, Remington, 1923. 355 p.).
4873. Sappington, Clarence O. Essentials of in-
dustrial health. Philadelphia, Lippincott,
1943. 626 p. illus. 43-8345 RC963.S3
References: p. 604-610.
Following the outbreak of war in 1941, the
mobilization of all manpower, the expansion of in-
dustries, the shifting of population with its related
problems of transportation and nutrition, housing
and sanitation, and the diminishing number of phy-
sicians, focused attention on the increasing impor-
tance of the health of industrial workers to the
national economy. Medical schools quickly re-
sponded to the need by emphasizing in their courses
the fundamentals of industrial health. According
to the author, a consulting industrial hygienist and
editor of Industrial Medicine until his death in 1949,
this book outlines a recently instituted course for
undergraduates and represents the application of
preventive medicine and public health to industry.
It oudines the administration of a health program
in industrial plants, the protection of workers from
environmental hazards, the coordination of indus-
trial and community health services, and the con-
tribution of industrial medicine and traumatic
surgery to the maintenance of the health of workers.
More recently, twenty Authors have contributed to
a book on Modern Occupational Medicine, edited by
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH
/ 667
Allan J. Fleming and Constance A. D'Alonzo (Phila-
delphia, Lea & Febiger, 1954. 414 p.), which "rep-
resents the combined experience of a group that
has spent many years specializing in industrial
medical practice."
4874. Smillie, Wilson G. Public health admin-
istration in the United States. 3d ed. New
York, Macmillan, 1947. 637 p.
Med 48-888 RA445.S55 1947
Increased knowledge concerning epidemiology
and environmental sanitation, the discovery of new
antibiotics and techniques for the detection of car-
riers of infection, interest in the economics of nutri-
tion, and the health programs of communities, have
contributed to the "idea that provision of compre-
hensive medical care for all the people was a com-
munity function, and that a communitywide
plan . . . must encompass preventive service as well
as curative and rehabilitation facilities." Against
this background the author, who is professor of
public health and preventive medicine, Cornell Uni-
versity Medical College, describes the methods of
controlling communicable diseases, the basic activi-
ties of health agencies, and the organization of
municipal, rural, and state public health programs.
The evolution of a national health program is traced
in the last chapter, and the Appendix contains the
minimum qualifications that have been set up by the
Committee on Professional Education of the Ameri-
can Public Health Association for health officers,
public health nurses and engineers, health educators,
and school physicians. This third edition has been
rewritten to reflect developments in the field, and
changes in social attitudes brought about by eco-
nomic depression and war, since the first appeared
in 1935.
4875. Smillie, Wilson G. Public health: its prom-
ise for the future; a chronicle of the develop-
ment of public health in the United States, 1607-
1914. New York, Macmillan, 1955. 501 p.
55-4356 RA424.S58
The author's interest in the historical development
of public health grew out of a request to select the
outstanding men in the field, and the names selected
appear in the Appendix. He divides his narrative
into "The Colonial Period — 1600-1790"; "The
Pioneer Period — 1790-1861"; and "The Period of
Development — The Civil War to World War I."
The terminus 19 14 has been selected as the end of a
period in American life, as well as the beginning of
Dr. Smillie's association with the public health field.
From his study he concludes "that the advances in
public health in America have been an accurate
index of our advancing civilization in all its aspects
and connotations. Thus, it becomes an axiom that
the degree of the development of public health
service, as a well-established and effective com-
munity function, is a true measure of the stage of
civilization of a nation."
4876. Tobey, James A. Public health law. 3d ed.
New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1947.
xxi, 419 p. Med 47-2428 RA445.T63 1947
Selected bibliography: p. [381J-383.
New court decisions on various aspects of public
health law, changes in governmental organization
and administration, and important legislative trends
have been added to this edition. Part I deals with
"Public Health Law and Administration"; Part II
with "Powers and Duties of Health Departments";
Part III with "Liability"; and Part IV with "Legis-
lation and Law Enforcement." The book will be
useful in interpreting for the layman, the social
worker, the health officer, and the lawyer, the health
functions of the Federal Government, the State, and
the community, as they have developed within the
framework of the Federal Constitution and acts of
Congress, state constitutions and legislation, and
municipal charters and regulations.
4877. Top, Franklin H., ed. The history of Amer-
ican epidemiology, by C. E. A. Winslow
[and others] St. Louis, Mosby, 1952. 190 p.
52-10820 RA650.5.T6
Includes bibliographies.
Contents. — The colonial era and the first years
of the Republic (1607-1799) the pestilence that
walketh in darkness, by C. E. A. Winslow. — The
period of great epidemics in the United States
(1800-1875), by Wilson G. Smillie. — The bacterio-
logical era (1876-1920), by James A. Doull. — The
twentieth century — yesterday, today, and tomorrow
(1920 ), by John E. Gordon.
This symposium was originally presented at the
20th anniversary session of the Epidemiology Section
of the American Public Health Association in 1949.
Since public health services, both municipal and
national, had their origin in measures to protect the
people from contagious diseases, this study of Amer-
ica's contribution to the control of epidemics, and
of the shift in emphasis during the last fifty years
to the mass problems provided by other diseases,
is also the story of the primary function of the public
health movement. The impact of contagious dis-
eases on colonial society has been described at greater
length by John Duffy, in his Epidemics in Colonial
America (Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University
Press, 1953. 275 p.).
4878. U. S. Public Health Service. Environment
and health; problems of environmental
health in the United States and the Public Health
668 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Service programs which aid States and communities
in their efforts to solve such problems. [Washing-
ton] 195 1. 152 p. (Its Publication no. 84)
51-61655 RA11.B18 1951a
The Public Health Service "has the responsibility
of carrying on, stimulating, and fostering research;
of supporting the work of the State and local health
agencies, which bear most of the burden of admin-
istration." The share of the Service in the field of
environmental sanitation, including radiological
health, is described in this book. "The contribu-
tion to date is a matter of public pride: its measure
is the margin between prosperity and destitution,
between civilization and barbarism."
4879. Whipple, George Chandler. State sanita-
tion; a review of the work of the Massa-
chusetts State Board of Health. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1917. 2 v.
17-13246 RA84.D1W5
Said Lemuel Shattuck, who conducted a sanitary
survey of Massachusetts as early as 1849: "It is the
duty of the State to extend its guardian care, that
those who cannot or will not protect themselves, may
nevertheless be protected; and that those who can
and desire to do it, may have the means of doing it
more easily." In this spirit Massachusetts organized
the first state health department in the United States
in 1869, and thereby set up the pattern for similar
departments throughout the Union. "The primary
object of this book," according to the author, "is to
set forth the past work of the Massachusetts State
Board of Health so that it may be known by people
of the present generation." The abstracts from the
reports and scientific articles published by the State
Board between 1870 and 1914 show "the evolution of
thought in the realm of sanitation during nearly
fifty years." A third volume of this work was
planned, to include a guide to the annual reports
and a series of biographical sketches, but it was evi-
dently never published.
4880. Williams, Ralph C. The United States
Public Health Service, 1798-1950. Wash-
ington, Commissioned Officers Association of the
United States Public Health Service, 1951. 890 p.
52-82 RA11.B19W5
Bibliography: p. 841-847.
The origin of the U. S. Public Health Service is
to be found in the Marine Hospital Service which
came into being with the Act for the Relief of Sick
and Disabled Seamen in 1798. The former Assistant
Surgeon General of the Service tells the story of the
various functions of the agency through 152 years
of growth and concludes with a summary of its ex-
tensive programs in 1950. They include grants to
states for general public health and for hospital
construction, operation of certain types of hospitals
and outpatient clinics, and extensive research
through the National Institute of Health, as well
as staffing and directing teams of experts to carry
out health projects under the Point Four Program
and the Economic Cooperation Administration. In
1950 the United States continued to play an active
part in the World Health Organization, which "is
working all over the world toward its goal of win-
ning for all people the highest possible level of
health."
4881. Winslow, Charles E. A. The life of Her-
mann M. Biggs, physician and statesman
of the public health. Philadelphia, Lea & Febiger,
1929. 432 p. 29-11697 RA424.5.B5W5
Bibliography: p. [4132-420.
"Broadly speaking, the fundamental significance
of Biggs' work lay in the modernization of public
health administration in conformity with the new
knowledge concerning the origin, nature and spread
of infectious diseases." At Bellevue Hospital Medi-
cal College, Hermann Biggs progressed from lec-
turer on pathology in 1886 to professor of the
practice of medicine in 1912. He organized the
department of pathology and bacteriology of the
New York City Health Department in 1892 and
became director of the first municipal bacteriological
laboratory in the world. Outstanding among his
contributions were the introduciton of diphtheria
antitoxin into this country in 1894, and his life-long
and vigorous fight against tuberculosis. His achieve-
ments are of enduring value in the world of medi-
cine, and to the general public, "which has begun
to realize, however inadequately, the relation of per-
sonal and public health to the other interests and the
welfare of modern society and civilization."
H. Medical Economics
4882. Bauer, Louis Hopewell. Private enter-
prise or government in medicine. Spring-
field, 111., C. C. Thomas, 1948. 201 p.
Med 48-1133 RA411.B3 1948
Bibliography: p. 199-201.
Dr. Bauer's experience as a member of national
and state medical associations, an officer in the
Medical Corps, U. S. Army, specializing in aviation
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 669
medicine, and a member of the New York State
Public Health Council, has brought him in contact
with many divergent views concerning health care
and its insurance. In this book he describes the
deficiencies in the medical system of the United
States, pointing out, however, that health conditions
in the United States are superior or equal to those
in foreign countries in which health insurance is
compulsory. He traces the growth of government
in medicine by analyzing Federal legislation enacted
especially since the recommendations of the Com-
mittee on the Costs of Medical Care were published
in 1932. He outlines the history of the voluntary
insurance system in the United States, and the pro-
grams of the American Medical Association which,
he says, "has done more to improve the standards of
medical care . . . than all other organizations put
together." In his summary of ideals, Dr. Bauer
suggests solutions to existing problems, emphasizing
the need for voluntary health insurance, subsidized
when necessary by funds provided by a government
agency. "Finally," he says, "with a system of medi-
cal care which is the best in the world, let us keep
it in principle, revising it and improving it where
necessary, but not discarding it for a system . . .
which has never given as satisfactory results as our
own."
4883. Committee on the Costs of Medical Care.
The costs of medical care; a summary of
investigations on the economic aspects of the pre-
vention and care of illness, by Isidore S. Falk,
C. Rufus Rorem [and] Martha D. Ring. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1933. xviii, 623 p. (Its
Publications, no. 27) 33-27129 R152.C65, no. 27
RA413.F3
In 1927, during a conference in Washington of
representative physicians, health officers, social
scientists, and others interested in the costs and dis-
tribution of medical services, the nucleus of the
Committee on the Costs of Medical Care was created.
Composed of fifty members and financed through
the generosity of eight private research foundations,
the Committee published 28 books and pamphlets
covering every aspect of medical care. This publi-
cation is a summary of its five years of investigation.
4884. Committee on the Costs of Medical Care.
Medical care for the American people; the
final report. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1932. 213 p. (Its Publications, no. 28)
32-28169 R152.C65, no. 28
RA413.C6
This publication summarizes the Committee's
conclusions and recommendations, and in the words
of the chairman, Ray Lyman Wilbur, "affords for
the first time a scientific basis on which the people
of every locality can attack the perplexing problem
of providing adequate medical care for all persons
at costs within their means. It is hoped that the
report may thus aid materially in bringing greater
health, efficiency, and happiness to all the people."
4885. Davis, Michael M. Medical care for tomor-
row. New York, Harper, 1955. 497 p.
54-6444 RA410.D3
References: p. 447-487.
Writing from the viewpoint of persons who re-
ceive medical care, the author analyzes the economic,
social, and intraprofessional forces which have
changed medical practice and will change it further
in the future. Of the four parts, Part I deals with
"Basic Elements in Medical Services": need and
demand for care, cost, organization, and personnel;
Part II, "Evolution in Organizations," traces the
development of the A. M. A., hospitals, clinics and
group practice, and describes the distribution of pub-
lic health services and Federal, State, and local funds
for medical care; Part III, "Evolution in Economics,"
reviews the growth of health insurance from the con-
sumer's point of view, and the increasing interest
of government in medical care between 191 1 and
1952; and Part IV, "Programs and Outlook," dis-
cusses the costs of medical care in relation to the
national economy and personal finances, the choice
of doctors and the various methods of paying them,
and the controversy over proposals for national
health insurance. The author says: "According to
the scale of values developed in this book, we would
do well to depend primarily on insurance in order
to achieve organized and comprehensive medical
services, unified professionally around the patient as
a person, administered democratically, and available
financially to all."
4886. Goldmann, Franz. Voluntary medical care
insurance in the United States. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1948. 228 p.
48-7044 RA413.G62
Dr. Goldmann, a professor in the Harvard Uni-
versity School of Public Health and author of several
books on financing medical care, describes the prin-
ciples underlying medical care insurance, trends in
development in the United States, and the attitudes
of such voluntary organizations as the American
Medical Association, the American Hospital Asso-
ciation, the National Grange, and labor unions,
toward voluntary hospitalization plans and group
practice. He analyzes cash indemnity plans, non-
profit hospital and physician service plans like the
Blue Cross and Blue Shield, and individual and
group practice plans, pointing out their limitations
and potentialities, and raising the question of direct
subsidy by taxes. The author says that the "chance
67O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
for voluntary medical care insurance to make real
progress within its natural limitations, to help tens
of millions of self-supporting people develop the
capacity and opportunity to lead personally satisfying
and socially useful lives . . . lies in the combination
of group prepayment and group practice . . . and
in the inclusion of comprehensive professional serv-
ices and hospitalization in one program." Emphasis
on voluntary health insurance plans, such as the
Blue Cross hospital plans and those sponsored by
the medical societies, is the principal theme of Na-
than Sinai, Odin W. Anderson, and Melvin L.
Dollar in Health Insurance in the United States
(New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1946. 115 p.)
which appeared as one of the Studies of the New
York Academy of Medicine Committee on Medicine
and the Changing Order.
4887. Klem, Margaret C, and Margaret F. Mc-
Kiever. Management and union health and
medical programs. Washington, U. S. Dept. of
Health, Education, and Welfare, Public Health
Service, Division of Occupational Health, 1953.
276 p. ([U. S.] Public Health Service. Publication
no. 329) 54-61546 HD7102.U4K55
Bibliography: p. 263-276.
This is the third in a series of studies on health
and medical facilities in industry prepared by these
authors for the U. S. Public Health Service. It em-
phasizes provisions for medical care outside the
plant for workers, and sometimes their families,
sponsored by employees' organizations, or man-
agement, or both. Industrial Health and Medical
Programs, in which Walter J. Lear collaborated
(Washington, 1950. 397 p. Public Health Service
publication no. 15), covers the broad field, and
Small Plant Health and Medical Programs (Wash-
ington, 1952. 213 p. Public Health Service publi-
cation no. 215), deals with problems peculiar to
small plants. The present volume traces the de-
velopment of management and union programs,
and discusses program characteristics, administra-
tion, and financing under collective bargaining.
Selected programs are classified by services, and the
health services and welfare benefits of two industry-
wide programs are described.
4888. Means, James H. Doctors, people, and gov-
ernment. Boston, Little, Brown, 1953.
206 p. 53-10240 RA395.A3M4
Dr. Means, who has had years of association with
the unique plant organizations, clinics, research pro-
grams, and teaching staff of the Massachusetts Gen-
eral Hospital, says in his Preface: "The American
people are entided to the best medical service which
science and art permit, and which they can afford
to buy. They are entitled to get it at the lowest
price consistent with high quality, or have it given
them if they cannot pay." He points out that medi-
cine will follow the economic, social, and political
pattern of the country it serves; that doctors, in order
to give adequate medical care, must have education,
the benefits of research, medical facilities, and a
fair remuneration in their practice; that the people,
dissatisfied with the uneven distribution of medical
care and its high cost, have aroused the interest of
government in providing relief through legislation.
He gives both sides of the controversy between con-
servative organized medicine and the proponents
of government control. Prepayment insurance
plans, and certain comprehensive health plans, as
well as group practice plans, that are being tested in
certain communities and industries today, are out-
lined. A plea is made for gradualism and experi-
ment; for co-ordination of government, private, and
nongovernmental community effort to achieve an
integrated national health plan that will be a joint
undertaking of public and private medicine. Sug-
gestions for achieving that co-ordination in a coun-
try of free enterprise are indicated in the last chap-
ter and summed up by Dr. Means: "In brief then,
if a teaching hospital like the Massachusetts Gen-
eral were united with a medical care plan like HIP
[Health Insurance Plan] in New York, together
with an adequate Blue Cross, and if it found ways
and means to pay the premiums of those who could
not afford to do so themselves, placed all its doctors
on salary and made all its patients available for
teaching, it would be reaching the ideal which I have
in mind."
4889. Rothenberg, Robert E., and Karl Pickard.
Group medicine & health insurance in action.
New York, Crown Publishers, 1949. xxviii, 278 p.
49-10662 RA413.R73
References: p. 46.
The Health Insurance Plan of Greater New York,
the first large-scale, community-wide prepayment
plan sponsored and directed by community repre-
sentatives, was incorporated in 1944 and began
operation in 1947. Its objective was to assemble,
through experience, reliable actuarial data on which
to base the operation of a prepayment plan which
would provide complete medical service for a fixed
annual premium, and to collect dependable statistics
as to the number of services, the amount of phy-
sician's time, and total cost of the medical care
required by a family, or a certain quota of popula-
tion. The Central Medical Group of Brooklyn is
one of the 26 groups organized to serve the persons
insured by the Health Insurance Plan. Prepared by
the chairman, the secretary, and the administrative
counsel of the Group, this volume is the report of its
experiences during the first two years. It outlines
MEDICINE AND PUBLIC HEALTH / 671
the basic staff organization, space and facilities re-
quired, and other information necessary to any
medical group that organizes under the prepayment
insurance plan. "The physicians of the Health In-
surance Plan reaffirm their faith in voluntary, pre-
paid, comprehensive health insurance for the low-
income group as a means of bringing much needed
medical care to a large segment of the population.
They wish also to restate their belief that medical
group practice offers a mechanism whereby that goal
can be reached most advantageously."
4890. Serbein, Oscar N. Paying for medical care
in the United States. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1953. xxiv, 543 p.
53-12029 RA412.5.U6S4
Bibliography: p. [4973-524.
Large-scale development of voluntary medical
care insurance in this country started in the 1930's.
At the end of 195 1 about 48,000,000 persons were
eligible for hospital benefits, about 43,000,000 for
surgical benefits, and about 12,000,000 for medical
benefits. In February 195 1, Columbia University,
under a grant from the Health Information Foun-
dation, established the Medical Payments Project to
study the methods used by people of the United
States in paying for medical care. In Parts I and II
the author discusses the sources and research meth-
ods used in preparing this book, and the problems
which people face in meeting the cost of illness. In
other chapters he analyzes and evaluates the various
prepayment plans such as commercial medical care
insurance, Blue Cross, Blue Shield, and other indus-
trial and governmental plans in a manner which
should interest anyone who participates in prepaid
medical insurance, or contemplates doing so.
4891. Tannenbaum, Samuel A., and Paul Maerker
Branden. The patient's dilemma; a public
trial of the medical profession. [New York]
Coward-McCann, 1935. xiv, 278 p.
35-24870 R707.T3
A physician and a layman advance in this book
what they describe as "the hideous truth about the
commercial side of the practice of medicine." The
findings of the Committee on the Costs of Medical
Care are used to illustrate the uneven distribution
of medical care, the exorbitant fees paid by certain
segments of the population, and the imbalance of the
earnings of average doctors. The authors urge
physicians to take the methods of competitive busi-
ness out of the profession, and advocate the estab-
lishment of a tax-supported public health system to
provide adequate service for the patient and ade-
quate compensation for the physician.
XIX
Entertainment
A. General Worlds
B. The American Stage
Bi. History
Bii. Criticism
Biii. Particular Stage Groups, Theaters, Movements, etc.
Biv. Biography: Actors and Actresses
Bv. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. History
Cii. Special Aspects and Analyses
Ciii. Biography: Actors and Actresses
Civ. Biography: Directors, Producers, etc.
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. Radio and Television
Dii. The Dance in America
Diii. Vaudeville and Burlesque
Div. Showboats, Circuses, etc.
4892-4896
4897-4906
4907-4912
4913-4926
4927-4939
4940-4943
4944-4946
4947-495 1
4952-4956
4957-4963
4964-4966
4967-4972
4973-4976
4977-4982
THE distinction in this bibliography between "Entertainment" and "Sports and Recreation"
is explained in the prefatory note to the latter. Within this section, drama (through the
media of the stage, motion pictures, radio, and television) bulks as most important. That is
so much the case that die section might almost be defined as various means and aspects of
presenting drama. The concern here is with its performance and its implications. The more
literary aspects are to be found in the Literature section of the bibliography.
It is to be regretted that so many of the books in
these allied fields have been written in a popular
fashion for a mass audience, while relatively few
scholarly and reliable studies have appeared. Be-
cause the entertainment field has been dominated
by individual personalities, there has been a parallel
emphasis in the publication of a large number of
biographies and autobiographies and relatively few
survey or integrating studies. This relationship is
also reflected in the selection, which is more bio-
graphical than for most other sections of this work.
It might be noted that subsections here interlock
more extensively than may be immediately apparent.
Not only do the people concerned, especially the per-
formers, move more readily and frequently from
672
one medium to another, but even much of the sub-
ject matter is carried over. In this way books be-
come plays, then motion pictures, radioscripts, and
finally television plays in a common sequence of evo-
lution. However, the process may crisscross in
almost any manner. Despite this, each has its own
individuality and significance. The books involv-
ing overlapping subject matter have been arranged
according to their dominant aspect, for most enter-
tainers work predominantly (though not exclu-
sively) through some one medium.
Although it is closely related to this section, musi-
cal entertainment has been left to the Music section,
ENTERTAINMENT / 673
of which it is a more integral unit. By the same
token, most books on radio and television appear
under Communications. The few books on these
subjects in this section are intended to represent the
sizable entertainment, as distinct from the com-
munication, aspects of these media. The emphasis
throughout is on audience-directed activities, not
activities with extensive audience participation.
A. General Works
4892. Green, Abel, and Joe Laurie, Jr. Show biz,
from vaude to video. New York, Holt, 1951.
613 p. 51-13791 PN1962.G7
This comprises a history of half a century of
American entertainment business, although the book
was not written for scholarly purposes. The style
and language are that of the entertainment world
dialect exhibited by trade organs such as Variety.
There is also, as part of the style, a heavy cramming
of information without much exposition or analysis.
The result is more a reference book than a reading
text.
4893. Hurlbut, Jesse Lyman. The story of Chau-
tauqua. New York, Putnam, 1921. 429 p.
illus. 21-14568 LC6301.C5H8
Chatauqua brought culture and education (and,
not always incidentally, entertainment) through
many media (opera, drama, lectures, etc.) to mil-
lions. Hurlbut has here recorded Chatauqua his-
tory, from its beginnings to its heights. We Called
It Culture; the Story of Chautauqua (Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 272 p.), by Victoria and
Robert Ormond Case, tells the story with more per-
spective, but also more superficiality. Marian Scott's
Chautauqua Caravan (New York, Appleton-Cen-
tury, 1939. 310 p.) gives a closeup through the story
of one participant's view.
4894. Revett, Marion S. A minstrel town. New
York, Pageant Press, 1955. 335 p. illus.
55-12267 ML3556.R4
A history of entertainment in Toledo, Ohio, from
the 1840's to the end of the 19th century. The book
takes its title from the dominance in entertainment
of the traveling minstrels. The sections of the book
are "Minstrels," "Theater," "Circus," and "Local
Music." Because of the systematic booking of trav-
eling entertainers, and because of the small amount
of local-origin entertainment, this book is meant to
depict the development of entertainment in general
throughout the area "west of the Alleghanies and
east of the Rockies."
4895. Seldes, Gilbert V. The great audience.
New York, Viking Press, 1950. 299 p.
50-10499 PN1991.6.S4
Movies, radio, and television are analyzed with
the actual and the potential audience in view, and
with the pecuniary, esthetic, and moral implications
scanned.
4896. Theatre arts. Theatre arts anthology, a rec-
ord and a prophecy; edited by Rosamond
Gilder [and others] New York, Theatre Arts
Books, 1950. 687 p. 50-11079 PN2020.T55
One hundred and thirty-two carefully selected
articles which comprehensively survey theatrical arts
from 1916 to 1948. Criticism and commentary at
a high level.
B. The American Stage
Bi. HISTORY
4897. The Best plays. 1894/99+ New York,
Dodd, Mead, illus.
20-21432 PN6112.B45
Title has frequently varied through forms such
as The Burns Mantle Best Plays and the Year Boo\
of the Drama in America and The Best Plays and the
Year Boo\ of the Drama in America.
Now edited by Louis Kronenberger (b. 1904).
The work has been edited in the past by Garrison P.
Sherwood, John A. Chapman (b. 1900), and Robert
Burns Mantle (1873-1948).
Indexes: 1899/1909-1949/50. 1 v.
This work emphasizes the drama in New York
giving a detailed record of performances there and
regularly choosing the "best" plays from the New
York productions of the previous theatrical season.
674 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The plays are normally presented in an abridged
form, so that these volumes may not be relied on
for full texts. As drama in other American cities
has been becoming increasingly important, the sec-
tion on non-New York productions has in recent
years been increased in size and scope.
4898. The Best short plays. 1937+ New York,
Dodd, Mead. 38-8006 PN6120.A4B44
Title varies: 1937-195 1/52, The Best One-Act
Plays.
Editor: 1937+ M. Mayorga.
An annual.
4899. Coad, Oral Sumner, and Edwin Mims, Jr.
The American stage. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1929. 362 p. illus. (The Pageant
of America [v. 14]) 29-22306 E178.5.P2, v. 14
An extensive and informative guide to the Ameri-
can stage; the text is accompanied by a multitude of
well-ordered illustrations. In contrast to this, and
produced for the "popular" audience, is Daniel C.
Blum's A Pictorial History of the American Theatre,
rev. 3d ed. (New York, Greenberg, 1956. 319 p.),
which is a book of illustrations with very little text.
4900. Gagey, Edmond M. Revolution in Ameri-
can drama. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1947. 315 p. 47-11297 PS351.G3
A history and assessment of the revolution in
manners, morals, and artistry that, beginning in
1917, transformed the professional theater of Broad-
way. Joseph Wood Krutch's The American
Drama Since 1918, an Informal History (New York,
Random House, 1939. 325 p.) presents not so
much a history of the period as incisive, evaluative
essays on it. Ward Morehouse's Matinee Tomor-
row, Fifty Years of Our Theater (New York,
Whittlesey House, 1949. 340 p.) also covers the
20th-century drama, but more as a history of chang-
ing tastes; it is not intended for the scholar, but it is
an interesting account for the layman or the general
student of American culture.
4901. Houghton, Norris. Advance from Broad-
way, 19,000 miles of American theatre.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, ei94i. 416 p.
41-22179 PN2266.H6
Little theaters, summer theaters, academic thea-
ters, and almost all other any-distance-off-Broadway
American theaters are examined in this concise and
clear book, which resulted from a 19,000 mile trip
made to examine the situation. Kenneth Mac-
gowan's earlier Footlights Across America (New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 398 p.) somewhat
similarly traces the nature and implications of the
noncommercial theater; Albert McCleery and Carl
Glick's Curtains Going Up (New York, Pitman,
1939. 412 p.) surveys the little theater movement
across the country with an examination of 184
community theaters.
4902. Hoyt, Harlowe R. Town Hall tonight.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1955.
292 p. illus. 55-9886 PN2256.H6
"This is the story of the country theater in the
eighties and nineties, and though it treats somewhat
specifically with the visitors and people of a little
Wisconsin town, it is the story of each of the Town
Halls that spotted the nation during those twenty
years. And in the main that story is identical . . .
Each of them . . . played the same plays, met with
the same misadventures, and made their amateur
productions from scripts purchased from the same
play agencies. Except for the amateurs, this was
equally true of the show boats that played the Missis-
sippi River towns. . . . The only difference was the
producing company and the playing cast. . . .
There was a strange uniformity in all of these shows,
including make up, costuming and stage business." —
Prologue.
4903. Morris, Lloyd R. Curtain time; the story
of the American theater. New York, Ran-
dom House, 1953. 380 p. illus.
53-6914 PN2221.M68
This warmly nostalgic narrative of the American
theater since 1815 aims to revive for the general
reader all the splendors of its romantic past. For
the early theater the emphasis is on the performers,
rather than the plays or theaters, recognizing that
the individuals presenting early dramatic entertain-
ment in America themselves constituted the out-
standing ingredient.
4904. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. A history of the
American drama, from the beginning to the
Civil War. 2d ed. New York, Crofts, 1943. 530 p.
43-11974 PS332.Q5 1943
"First printing, November, 1923."
"A list of American plays": p. [4231-497.
Bibliography: p. [393]~42i.
4905. Quinn, Arthur Hobson. A history of the
American drama from the Civil War to the
present day. New York, Crofts, 1936. 296, 432 p.
illus. 36-27316 PS332.Q55 1936
The text of the two volume edition of 1927, with
an added chapter (The new decade, 1927-1936).
The bibliography and play list have been completely
revised and reset. Cf. Foreword to the revised
edition.
"General bibliography and list of American plays,
1860-1936": p. [303J-402.
ENTERTAINMENT / 675
The two volumes together comprise an impressive,
scholarly history of American drama; by virtue of
style, it is approachable mainly as a reference book.
A readable, concise, one-volume history is Glenn
Hughes' A History of the American Theatre, iyoo-
1950 (New York, French, 1951. 562 p.).
Valuable for its illustrations is the one-volume
edition of The American Theatre, by John Ander-
son, and The Motion Picture in America, by
Rene Fiilop-Miller (New York, Dial Press, 1938.
430 p.) ; Anderson gives a good account of his sub-
ject, but Fiilop-Miller's account suffers from age
(it had appeared seven years earlier in German) and
possibly from translation. The student of Amer-
ican drama will also be interested in George O. Seil-
hamer's History of the American Theatre (Phila-
delphia, Globe Printing House, 1888-91. 3 v.),
which meticulously traces American drama from
1749 to 1797. Of antiquarian interest is William
Dunlap's A History of the American Theatre (New
York, Harper, 1832. 420 p.), by the "father of
American drama."
4906. The Theatre book of the year ... a record
and an interpretation. 1942/43+ New
York, Knopf, annual. 43-51298 PN2266.A2T4
1942/43+ by G. }. Nathan.
Mosdy Mr. Nathan's personalized criticism, with
small doses of data and no illustration. May with
interest be compared to and supplemented by The-
atre World, edited by Daniel C. Blum, 1944/45 +
(New York, Theatre World), which offers no criti-
cisms, a little data, and profuse illustration. George
Jean Nathan has written numerous books of criti-
cism expressive of his personality. Among these are
Passing Judgments (New York, Knopf, 1935. 271
p.); The Morning After the First Night (New
York, Knopf, 1938. 281 p.); Encyclopaedia of the
Theatre (New York, Knopf, 1940. 449 p.); The
Entertainment of a Nation (New York, Knopf,
1942. 290 p.); and The Theatre in the Fifties (New
York, Knopf, 1953. 298 p.).
Bii. CRITICISM
4907. Atkinson, Justin Brooks. Broadway scrap-
book. New York, Theatre Arts, 1947.
312 p. illus. 47-12086 PN2277.N5A8
The influential drama critic of The New Yor\
Times collects 70 of his reviews from its Sunday
drama section, beginning with The Petrified Forest
(1935) and reaching Born Yesterday (1947).
4908. Bentley, Eric R. The dramatic event, an
American chronicle. New York, Horizon
Press, 1954. 278 p. 54-12279 PN2266.B45
A collection of dramatic essays from The New
Republic, largely critical of plays produced in New
York in the period 1952-54. There are included a
chapter on "The American Drama (1944-1954)"
and a section of the critic's "Afterthoughts."
4909. Brown, John Mason. Seeing things. New
York, McGraw-Hill 1946. 341 p.
46-6335 PS3503.R81945S4
The critic presents selections from his wide-rang-
ing "Seeing Things," a column which appears each
week in the Saturday Review. Subsequent install-
ments have been Seeing More Things (New York,
Whittlesey House, 1948. 347 p.); Still Seeing
Things (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 335 p.);
and As They Appear (New York, McGraw-Hill,
1952. 258 p.). Other critical works by him in-
clude: Upstage, The American Theatre in Perform-
ance (New York, Norton, 1930. 275 p.); Two on
the Aisle; Ten Years of the American Theatre in
Performance (New York, Norton, 1938. 321 p.);
and Broadway in Review (New York, Norton, 1940.
295 p.).
4910. Isaacs, Edith (Rich) ed. Theatre, essays on
the arts of the theatre. Edited by Edith
J. R. Isaacs. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1927. 341 p.
illus. 27-23981 PN2020.I8
The editor of Theatre Arts Monthly presents here
a collection of 30 essays by various hands, on theater
as art rather than as commercial venture. The
editor contributes a general introduction and briefer
ones to each of the eight sections.
491 1. Woollcott, Alexander. The portable Wooll-
cott, selected by Joseph Hennessey. New
York, Viking Press, 1946. 735 p. (The Viking
portable library) 46-25135 PS3545.O77 1946
Woollcott ( 1 887-1 943) was a full-time drama
critic only for the six years beginning in 1922, and
this convenient anthology contains much of his
ornate and highly mannered writing in other
spheres; but it gives a good idea of his personality,
which many found fascinating and others in-
furiating. His critical writings include Shouts and
Murmurs (New York, Century, 1922. 264 p.);
Enchanted Aisles (New York, Putnam, 1924. 260
p.); and Going to Pieces (New York, Putnam,
1928. 256 p.).
4912. Young, Stark. Immortal shadows, a book
of dramatic criticism. New York, Scribner,
1948. 290 p. 48-11512 PN2277.N5Y6
After about two decades as a theatrical critic, the
author, upon retirement from the field, selected these
critical articles from those published in various
periodicals. The Pavilion: Of People and Times
676 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Remembered, of Stories and Places (New York,
Scribner, 1951. 194 p.) is an autobiographical work
which in part reflects Young's connection with the
theater. The author also gained attention with
novels, his most prominent one being the Civil
War novel, So Red the Rose (New York, Scribner,
1934- 431 P-)-
Biii. PARTICULAR STAGE GROUPS,
THEATERS, MOVEMENTS, ETC.
4913. Carson, William G. The theatre on the
frontier; the early years of the St. Louis stage.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1932. 361 p.
illus. 32-11827 PN2277.S2C3
Bibliography: p. 331-335.
A scholarly, detailed history of the first quarter
century (1815-1840) of the St. Louis stage. There
is much social and literary interest, as well as
dramatic.
4914. Clurman, Harold. The fervent years; the
story of the Group Theatre and the thirties.
New York, Knopf, 1945. 298 p. illus.
45-5287 PN2297.G7C5
The Group Theatre (1931-41), which attempted
to bring art to the commercial stage, here has its
story told from the personal point of view of one
who attended at its birth and now delivers the
funeral oration.
4915. Davis, Hallie (Ferguson) F. Arena, by
Hallie Flanagan. New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce [1940] 475 p. illus.
41-231 PN2266.D37
Bibliography: p. 439-447-
In 1935, when there were some 25,000 unem-
ployed theater people, Harry Hopkins put Mrs.
Flanagan in charge of Federal Theater, a project of
the Works Progress Administration. She gives an
impressionistic view of its four years' work (a
detailed production record and financial statement
are appended) and discusses the Congressional dis-
satisfaction which brought it to a sudden end on
June 30, 1939.
4916. Deutsch, Helen, and Stella Hanau. The
Provincetown; a story of the theatre. New
York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1931. 313 p. illus.
31-30075 PN2297.P7D4
A somewhat naive narrative of the Provincetown
Theater, which originated on Cape Cod but de-
veloped an extension in Greenwich Village, New
York City, from 1916 to 1929, with an analysis of
its productions play by play. The Provincetown
enjoyed the greatest prestige of any theater in
America in its day, and introduced the early plays
of Eugene O'Neill (q. v.).
4917. Dunn, Esther C. Shakespeare in America.
New York, Macmillan, 1939. 210 p.
39-30566 PR3105.D8
Shakespeare in American culture from the Col-
onial era through the 19th century: productions, in-
cluding those on the Ohio and Mississippi frontier
and in Gold-Rush California; Shakespeare in the
schools and colleges and in the thought of some
eminent 19th-century figures; and American Shake-
speare scholarship — including the Baconian theory,
which had its inception here.
4918. Gagey, Edmond McAdoo. The San Fran-
cisco stage, a history. Based on annals com-
piled by the Research Dept. of the San Francisco
Federal Theatre. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1950. 264 p. illus.
50-8015 PN2277.S4G3 1950
Bibliography: p. [2295-233.
A detailed history, emphasizing the 19th century.
The annals on which it was based were made
available in mimeographed form as San Francisco
T heatre Research (San Francisco, i938-42[?j) under
the editorship of Lawrence Estavan.
4919. Gillmore, Margalo, and Patricia Collinge.
The B. O. W. S. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1945. 173 p. illus.
45-35239 PN2297.U5G5
An account of the American Theatre Wing's over-
seas production for servicemen of The Barretts of
Wimpole Street. Reflects an aspect of U. S. O. war-
time activities.
4920. Houghton, Norris. But not forgotten; the
adventure of the University Players. New
York, Sloane, 1952, ci95i. 346 p. illus.
52-258 PN2297.U55H6
An informal history of the 1928-32 career of the
University Players at Cape Cod and Baltimore. The
story of an experimental, "progressive," theatrical
group.
4921. Isaacs, Edith (Rich) The Negro in the
American theatre. New York, Theatre Arts,
1947. 143 p. illus. 47-11394 PN2286.I8
While her subject goes back to 1821, when James
Hewlett was playing Shakespeare with the African
Company in New York City, Mrs. Isaacs dates her
"foreground" from 1917 and Ridgeley Torrence's
Three Plays for a Negro Theatre, and describes the
individual stars and noteworthy all- or part-Negro
productions of the following three decades.
ENTERTAINMENT / 677
4922. Kendall, John S. The golden age of the
New Orleans theater. Baton Rouge, Louisi-
ana State University Press, 1952. 624 p. illus.
51-14615 PN2277.N4K4
Bibliography: p. [6o6]-6o8.
The history of English-language drama in New
Orleans during the first three-quarters of the 19th
century.
4923. MacMinn, George R. The theater of the
golden era in California. Caldwell, Idaho,
Caxton Printers, 194 1. 529 p. plates, ports.,
facsims. 41-10018 PN2275.C3M3
Bibliography: p. [509]~5i5.
A social history of the California theater dur-
ing the gold rush decade. Many of the most popu-
lar entertainers of the day came West to take their
share of the new wealth; among them, the author
singles out Lola Montez for special attention.
4924. Odell, George C. D. Annals of the New
York stage. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1927-49. 15 v.
27-5965 PN2277.N5O4
By the time of his death in 1949 Odell had brought
this highly detailed history of the New York stage
to 1894. He noted each season's productions at all
of the principal Manhattan theaters, from time to
time giving complete casts, and devoted briefer
chapters to dramatic events in Brooklyn, Williams-
burgh, Greenpoint, Queens, Staten Island, etc.
Each volume is lavishly illustrated. New York's
centrality for the American stage lends this work an
importance for drama throughout the Nation.
The work is supplemented by The Best Plays of
1894-1899 (1955) and other volumes in The Best
Plays series (q.v.).
4925. Schoberlin, Melvin, From candles to foot-
lights; a biography of the Pike's Peak theatre,
1 859-1 876. Denver, F. A. Rosenstock, The Old
West Pub. Co., 194 1. 322 p. illus.
41-12800 PN2275.C6S35
"List of Colorado theatres, 1859-1876": p. 265-
271.
Bibliography: p. 293-300.
A history of the theater in Colorado during its
territorial period. The Pike's Peak gold rush began
in May 1859 and the theater followed in September,
when Apollo Hall was opened in Denver City.
4926. Sper, Felix. From native roots; a panorama
of our regional drama. Caldwell, Idaho,
Caxton Printers, 1948 341 p. illus.
49-1009 PS338.N3S6
Bibliography: p. [2791-334.
Since he rejects "the sentimentality of the local-
color school," Mr. Sper emphasizes the late emer-
gence of genuine regional drama in the United
States, but notes some early treatments of the Indian,
the Negro, and the Yankee. He then surveys the
existing drama area by area, from "Yankee Lust"(!)
to "Pacific Panorama," noting Broadway plays con-
cerned with regional themes as well as local
productions of all type. Robert E. Gard's Grass-
roots Theater; a Search for Regional Arts in Amer-
ica (Madison, University of Wisconsin Press, 1955.
263 p.) is largely an autobiographical account of the
author's searching out of regional material for pur-
poses of turning it into regional, rural drama.
Biv. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS AND
ACTRESSES
4927. Barnes, Eric W. The lady of fashion; the
life and the theatre of Anna Cora Mowatt.
New York, Scribner, 1954. 402 p. illus.
54-10366 PN2287.R54B3 1954
London edition (Seeker & Warburg) has tide:
Anna Cora.
Includes bibliography.
Anna Cora (Ogden) Mowatt Ritchie (1819-1870)
was a distinguished actress of the 1840's and 50's.
Having come from the respectable element of New
York society, she aided in raising the prestige of
the then non-respectable profession of acting. The
book is of value not merely as a record of theatrical
operations in this period, but also for its depiction
of the social scene. The work is in large part based
on Mowatt 's Autobiography of an Actress (1854).
4928. Bankhead, Tallulah. Tallulah: my auto-
biography. New York, Harper, 1952. 335 p.
illus. 52-7278 PN2287.B17A3
This daughter of a famous Alabama family, a
first-magnitude star since she took London by storm
in 1923, gets into her story much of her famed flam-
boyance and caustic wit.
4929. Barrymore, Ethel. Memories, an autobiog-
raphy. New York, Harper, 1955. 310 p.
illus. 55-6565 PN2287.B3A3
The Barrymore-Drew family has long held a dom-
inant position in American acting. In this volume
Ethel Barrymore (b. 1879), the "first lady of the
American theater," presents the story of her life;
because of her long and distinguished career and her
family associations, it also has some general stage
history.
678 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
4930. Binns, Archie. Mrs. Fiske and the Ameri-
can theatre, by Archie Binns, in collabora-
tion with Olive Kooken. New York, Crown Pub-
lishers, 1955. 436 p. illus.
55-10173 PN2287.F5B5
"It is rudimentary to say that Mrs. Fiske [ 1865—
1932] was an American actress. She was the most
purposefully American of them all; she discovered
her own native playwrights; she took her produc-
tions, the best of their time, to the farthest reaches of
the continent and to Americans who never saw
Broadway; and she battled for ideals far beyond the
confines of the theatre. . . . [She was] one of the
best minds of her time: the acknowledged leader of
the American stage for a generation, a skilled and
successful playwright, an actress who was rated with
Duse and Bernhardt, a producer who was prob-
ably the best outside Europe, the triumphal cham-
pion of Ibsen in America, the discoverer of some
of the best American playwrights of the early twen-
tieth century." — Preface.
4931. Blum, Daniel C. Great stars of the Ameri-
can stage, a pictorial record. New York,
Greenberg, 1952. 1 v. 52-10871 PN2285.B6
Many portrait and on-stage photographs of limited
quality in the reproductions; enthusiastic biograph-
ical sketches accompany the pictures. Older stage
stars are presented in somewhat dated, but more
thorough treatment in William Winter's The Wallet
of Time (New York, Moffat, Yard, 1913. 2 v.).
Biographical profiles of more recent theatrical per-
sonalities are presented in Margaret Case Harri-
man's Ta\e Them Up Tenderly (New York, Knopf,
1944. 266 p.). A series of somewhat longer
sketches on some prominent figures may be found
in Maurice Zolotow's No People Li\e Show People
(New York, Random House, 1951. 305 p.).
4932. Courtney, Marguerite (Taylor) Laurette.
New York, Rinehart, 1955. 433 p. illus.
54-10448 PN2287.T25C6
A biography, by her daughter, of Laurette Taylor,
who contributed 50 years of her life to the theater.
This book is not merely a record of her stage tri-
umphs, but also an analysis of her complex per-
sonality. Since her whole life was given to the
theater, while life "bored" her, this presents not
only the "makings" of an actress, but also a con-
siderable segment of stage history.
4933. Fowler, Gene. Good night, sweet prince.
New York, Viking Press, 1944. 477 p.
illus. 43-18571 PN2287.B35F6
The life of John Barrymore (1882-1942). John
Barrymore himself wrote a much earlier autobio-
graphical book, Confessions of an Actor (Indianapo-
lis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1926. 138 p.). His brother,
Lionel Barrymore, discusses the family, with em-
phasis on Lionel, in his We Barrymores (New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1951. 311 p.). See also
(supra) Ethel Barrymore's autobiography.
4934. Jefferson, Joseph. "Rip Van Winkle": The
autobiography of Joseph Jefferson. New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1950. 375 p. illus.
50-7350 PN2287.J4A3 1950
Originally published in 1890.
Joseph Jefferson (1 829-1905) was the son of an
actor and began his stage career at the age of four;
it continued for 71 years! He was a flexible actor,
but it was his fortune to become identified with his
most popular role, as this retided reprint attests.
With wider scope, but somewhat dated and usually
considered "less appealing," is William Winter's
Life and Art of Joseph Jefferson, Together with
Some Account of His Ancestry and of the Jef-
ferson Family of Actors (New York, Macmillan,
1894. 319 p.), a revision of The Jeffersons, first pub-
lished in 1 88 1.
4935. Kahn, Ely J. The merry partners; the age
and stage of Harrigan and Hart. New York,
Random House, 1955. 302 p. illus.
55-8149 ML429.H3K3
PN2287.H247K3
Edward Harrigan and Tony Hart were partners
and leading comedian entertainers in musical
comedy productions in New York during the 1870's
and 1880's. Harrigan wrote the scripts which they
performed. This joint biographical study gives an
insight into musical comedy as an aspect of the stage-
craft of the period and also the popular music of the
time.
4936. Le Gallienne, Eva. With a quiet heart, an
autobiography. New York, Viking Press,
1953. 311 p. illus. 53-5201 PN2287.L3A35
The autobiography of a prominent actress. The
book covers the two decades subsequent to the period
covered by her earlier autobiography, At jj (New
York, Longmans, Green, 1934. 262 p.).
4937. Moses, Montrose J. The fabulous Forrest;
the record of an American actor. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1929. xxi, 369 p. illus.
29-27822 PN2287.F6M6
Bibliography: p. 345~355-
Edwin Forrest (1806-1872) was America's first
tragedian, and he has been called the most popular
actor America has produced. This book attempts
to present not only the actor, but the actor as a
ENTERTAINMENT / 679
product of his times. The work is therefore of value
as an analysis of the mid-nineteenth-century society.
4938. Ruggles, Eleanor. Prince of players: Edwin
Booth. New York, Norton, 1953. 401 p.
illus. 53-5986 PN2287.B5R9
"Notes on sources": p. 377-386.
This life of the famous 19th-century actor largely
supersedes William Winter's Life and Art of Edwin
Booth (New York, Macmillan, 1893. 308 p.).
Stanley P. Kimmel's The Mad Booths of Maryland
(Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1940. 400 p.) is more
a psychological study of three famous actors than a
story of dramatic achievement.
4939-
Winter, William. Life and art of Richard
Mansfield, with selections from his letters.
New York, Moffat, Yard, 1910. 2 v. illus.
10-3307 PN2287.M4W6
Winter (1836-1917) was a leading New York
drama critic and a prolific biographer of contem-
porary actors. He here presents (in large part
through personal letters) the life of Mansfield
(1857-1907), a famous actor and close friend of
the author. Not just a chronicle, this book seeks to
reveal the man's character.
Bv. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS,
PRODUCERS, ETC.
4940. Kinne, Wisner Payne. George Pierce Baker
and the American theatre. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1954. 348 p. illus.
54-8632 PN2287.B15K5
A biography of the first college professor, to teach
practical playwriting and playproducing. Because
of his work at Harvard from 1905 to 1924, and then
at Yale until his retirement in 1933, he has been
called "the father of modern American playwrights."
4941. Langner, Lawrence. The magic curtain;
the story of a life in two fields, theatre and
invention, by the founder of the Theatre Guild.
New York, Dutton, 195 1. 498 p. illus.
51-13798 PN2295.T5L3
A leading patent attorney writes of the theatrical
world in which he has figured so prominendy.
Born in South Wales in 1890, Mr. Langner came to
the United States in 1910, and 9 years later organized
the Theater Guild, of which he has remained a
principal director for 40 years. Its productions
through 1950 are listed in Appendix VIII.
4942. Sobel, Bernard. Broadway heartbeat; mem-
oirs of a press agent. New York, Hermitage
House, 1953. 352 p. 53-12014 PN2287.S62A3
Mr. Sobel, now in charge of public relations for
the Celanese Corporation of America, reviews his
life between the two World Wars, when he was
press agent for Earl Carroll, Florenz Ziegfeld, Jr.,
Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, and a diversity of other
clients.
4943. Timberlake, Craig. The Bishop of Broad-
way: the life & work of David Belasco.
New York, Library Publishers, 1954. 491 p.
illus. 54-11646 PN2287.B4T5
Belasco (1 853-1 931) was a would-be playwright
who attained fame and fortune as a stage manager
and play producer. This book presents a picture
of the Western frontier theater (Belasco started in
San Francisco) and later New York City. Belasco,
who made many stars, brought about lavish and
popular productions. He was not notably original,
but he did have an ability to perfect tendencies and
gage the taste of his audience. A two-volume, some-
what eulogistic Life of David Belasco (New York,
Moffat, Yard, 1918) was undertaken by William
Winter (1836-1917), and completed after his death
by his son, Jefferson Winter.
C. Motion Pictures
Ci. HISTORY
4944. Jacobs, Lewis. The rise of the American
film; a critical history. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1939. 585 p. illus.
39-32345 PN1993.5.U6J2
Bibliography: p. 541-564.
Remains, after 20 years, the most detailed and
best-documented history of its subject, with special
emphasis upon the evolution of form and content,
the work of the leading directors, and the organiza-
tion of the industry. A famous early work is
Terry Ramsaye's A Million and One Nights (New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1926. 2 v.). A French
view of the American film may be obtained
from Robert Florey's Hollywood d'hier et d'au-
jourd'hui (Paris, Editions Prisma, 1948. 381 p.).
Another French view of it, as seen in the context
of world production, may be found in llistoire du
cinema, nouv. ed. definitive ([Givors] Martel, 1953-
680 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
54. 2 v.), by Maurice Bardeche and Robert Brasil-
lach. Paul Rotha in The Film Till Now, rev. and
enl. ed. (New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1949.
755 p.) also presents it in world perspective.
4945. Seldes, Gilbert V. The movies come from
America. New York, Scribner, 1937. 120 p.
illus. 37-28.786 PN1993.5.U6S4
This work was published in London by Batsford
under the title Movies for the Millions, and can be
regarded as a clear and reasonably brief conspectus
of the American cinema for British readers, with
some instructive comparisons. The earlier chapters
are historical, the later analytical; but all are con-
structively critical, for Mr. Seldes believed that the
movies were a big and good thing, but could easily
be made better than they were. This quality allows
a book, written when color film and TV were still
looming on the horizon, to retain much of its
original interest.
4946. Taylor, Deems, Marcelene Peterson, and
Bryant Hale. A pictorial history of the mov-
ies. Rev. and enl. New York, Simon & Schuster,
1950. 376 p. illus.
50-8567 PN1993.5.U6T3 1950
A chronologically arranged book consisting
largely of pictures of stars and stills from motion
pictures. A pictorial selection from the silent film
alone is Daniel C. Blum's A Pictorial History of the
Silent Screen (New York, Putnam, 1953. 334 p.).
Blum also edits an annual, Daniel Blum's Screen
World (v. 1+ 1949+ New York, Greenberg),
each volume of which handles, through reproduced
stills and some screen credits, American films pro-
duced in the preceding year and some foreign films
released here; there are an obituary section and an
index at the end.
Cii. SPECIAL ASPECTS AND ANALYSES
4947-
Commission on Freedom of the Press. Free-
dom of the movies; a report on self-regulation
from the Commission . . . Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1947. 240 p.
47-30119 PN1994.A2C6
At head of title: By Ruth A. Inglis.
"A note on sources": p. 220-224.
The history and state of film censorship are con-
sidered and the implications for film quality are
discussed.
4948. Powdermaker, Hortense. Hollywood, the
dream factory; an anthropologist looks at
the movie-makers. Boston, Little, Brown, 1950.
342 p. 50-10280 PN1993.5.U65P6
This book is the result of a one-year sociological
study of a famous Pacific coast community. An-
other analysis of the community is found in Leo C.
Rosten's Hollywood; the Movie Colony, the Movie
Maimers (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1941. 436 p.).
4949. Ross, Lillian. Picture. New York, Rine-
hart, 1952. 258 p. 52-9607 PN1997.R38
In an attempt to obtain and present an insight into
the American motion picture industry the author
has reported on the production of the film The Red
Badge of Courage from the stage of initial con-
ferences through final release and publicity. The
material originally appeared as a series of articles in
The New Yorker. A similar work, Case History
of a Movie (New York, Random House, 1950.
242 p.), by a person within the industry was done
by Dore Schary for the film The Next Voice You
Hear, which was produced with the assistance of
Charles Palmer.
4950. Thorp, Margaret (Farrand). America at the
movies. New Haven, Yale University Press,
IQ39- 3X3 P- illus- 39-3I325 PN1993.5.U6T5
Mrs. Thorp analyzes who goes to the movies and
why, and discusses the influences of films. Leo A.
Handel in Hollywood Loo\s at Its Audience; a
Report of Film Audience Research (Urbana, Uni-
versity of Illinois Press, 1950. 240 p.) shows how
the film industry evaluates audience reaction.
4951. Wolfenstein, Martha, and Nathan Leites.
Movies; a psychological study. Glencoe, 111.,
Free Press, 1950. 316 p. illus.
50-7374 PN1995.W63
A psychological-sociological study of the Ameri-
can films (contrasted with those of England and
France); the book probes the basic themes and
patterns in films, which it regards as ready-made
versions of the widespread and (nearly) universal
daydreams of our culture. In this way it presents
new insights into present-day America and
Americans.
Ciii. BIOGRAPHY: ACTORS AND
ACTRESSES
4952. Bainbridge, John. Garbo. Garden City,
N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 256 p. illus.
55-5589 PN2778.G3B3
A biography of Swedish-born Greta Garbo (b.
1905), who has been called the screen's greatest act-
ress. She came to America early in her career. Her
last film was released in 194 1; since then she has
been living in retirement.
4953. Huff, Theodore. Charlie Chaplin. New
York, Schuman, 1951. 354 p-
51-10 1 04 PN2287.C5H8
Charlie was born Charles Spencer Chaplin at
London in 1889; his parents were both in vaude-
ville. Mr. Huff offers a minimal biography, but very
full descriptions and appreciations of his films from
the Keystone comedies of 1914 to Monsieur Verdoux
(1947) and a wealth of illustrations. A complete
chronological list of the films and "Biographical
Sketches of the People Professionally Associated
with Chaplin" are appended. Among other recent
biographies of Chaplin are Pierre S. R. Payne's The
Great God Pan (New York, Hermitage House, 1952.
301 p.), which is primarily a study of Chaplin's film
work, and Peter Cotes and Theima Niklaus' The
Little Fellow [rev. ed.] (London, Bodley Head,
1952. 160 p.), which is more recent, but shorter.
4954. Menjou, Adolphe, and Morris M. Mussel-
man. It took nine tailors. New York,
Whittlesey House, 1948. 238 p. illus.
48-5637 PN2287.M58A3
The life of Adolphe Menjou (b. 1890) is almost a
history of the movies as he has lived it. It traces his
career of 34 years in pictures, during which he had
parts in 146 films.
4955. Pickford, Mary. Sunshine and shadow.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1955. 382 p.
illus. 55-558o PN2287.P5A3
Mary Pickford (b. 1893) was one of the most
popular film stars. She started as a child actress,
and even as an adult she played child roles, and
met with little success when portraying mature in-
dividuals. Her extreme popularity, which brought
her the nickname of "America's Sweetheart," makes
this autobiography a useful document for interpret-
ing mass culture, especially insofar as the silent
films are concerned. The first part of the book has
a place in the history of the film; the second part is
largely personal.
4956. Taylor, Robert Lewis. W. C. Fields, his
follies and fortunes. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1949. 340 p. ports.
49-1 1 132 PN2287.F45T3
A life of the vaudeville star turned film comedian
( 1 879-1946), which reflects much of the entertain-
ment world of his period. A succession of very
amusing anecdotes develop the view that Fields'
whole life was pervaded by his highly original and
sardonic comic spirit.
ENTERTAINMENT / 68 1
Civ. BIOGRAPHY: DIRECTORS,
PRODUCERS, ETC.
4957. Feild, Robert D. The art of Walt Disney.
New York, Macmillan, 1942. 290 p.
42-36248 NC1765.F4
Walt Disney's work is presented as a technical
and commercial problem; an attempt is made to
establish criteria for judging it as art. It serves, to
some extent, as a history of Disney's work; Disney
was a pioneer in the field of the animated cartoon,
in which he rapidly acquired a commanding lead.
4958. Griffith, Richard. The world of Robert
Flaherty. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1953. 165 p. illus. 51-10886 PN1998.A3F5
Flaherty (1884-1951) is called "the father of the
documentary film," but it is less the fact of paternity
than the beauty, dignity, and narrative power of his
work that gives him enduring significance. Mr.
Griffith documents the making of Tabu, Man of
Aran, Louisiana Story, and the others with extracts
from Flaherty's diaries and letters, and provides
over 70 illustrations, mostly from the films.
4959. Mayer, Arthur. Merely colossal, the story of
the movies from the long chase to the chaise
longue. [New York] Simon & Schuster, 1953.
264 p. 53-573? PN1993.5.U6M3
The humorous as well as informative autobi-
ography of a man who has spent much of his life
in the business of films: distributing, showing, adver-
tising, importing, etc.
4960. Noble, Peter. Hollywood scapegoat; the
biography of Erich von Stroheim. London,
Fortune Press, 1950. 246 p. illus.
52-21529 PN1998.A3V65
Bibliography: p. 171-184.
This English life of von Stroheim (b. 1885), the
Vienna-born actor-director, takes the line that "he
was the one chosen to be sent out into the wilderness
to perish, to atone in some measure for the sins and
extravagances of Hollywood during the fantastic
1920's. He had directed at least six masterpieces,
yet Hollywood banished him because he was feared
by the money-men." He did not perish, but has
been successful as a leading character actor.
4961. Smith, Albert E. Two reels and a crank,
by Albert E. Smith in collaboration with
Phil A. Koury. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday,
1952. 285 p. illus., ports.
52-1 1617 TR849.S5A3
Albert E. Smith, in partnership with Jim Black-
ton, conducted the Vitagraph Company from 1896
to 1925, when it was sold to the Warners for "a
sizable fortune." Mr. Smith here reminisces of
682 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the shoestring days of the industry, when a comedy
could be produced for $3.50 plus the cost of the film
at eight cents a foot.
4962
The
cinema
learned
went to
51 film
though
as The
Vidor, King W. A tree is a tree. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. 315 p. illus.
53-9221 PN1998.A3V5
autobiography, judiciously limited to his
career, of King Vidor (b. 1895), who
to direct movies in Galveston, Texas, and
Hollywood in 1915. The Appendix lists the
s he directed between 1918 and 1952. Al-
they include such classics of the silent films
Big Parade, The Crowd, and Hallelujah,
Mr. Vidor seems most deeply impressed by his
Duel in the Sun (1946), "one of the ten biggest
box-office grossers of all time."
4963. Zukor, Adolph. The public is never wrong.
New York, Putnam, 1953. 309 p. illus.
53-8164 PN1998.A3Z8
A businessman of the films tells his life story,
largely in terms of film history as he has seen it and
the people he has known. The book was written
with the collaboration of Dale Kramer. An earlier
biography of Zukor is William H. Irwin's The
House that Shadows Built (Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1928. 293 p.).
D. Other Forms of Entertainment
Di. RADIO AND TELEVISION
4964. Allen, Fred. Treadmill to oblivion. Bos-
ton, Little, Brown, 1954. 240 p. illus.
54-1 1 132 PN1991.4.A6A3
Fred Allen (1 894-1956; real name, John Flor-
ence Sullivan) was a humorist of dry wit who for
many years expressed in humor many aspects of
American life. His career included stage, film,
and some television, but the emphasis in this auto-
biographical work is on his radio program. The
book not only presents the problems of such enter-
tainment (sponsors, script-writing, etc.), but it
also presents material from the programs. The book
closes with his last regular program in 1949.
4965. Gross, Ben. I looked and I listened; in-
formal recollections of radio and TV. New
York, Random House, 1954. 344 p.
54-7806 PN1991.5.G7
In 1925 Gross became radio editor of a New
York daily newspaper. After having spent nearly
three decades growing up with the radio, and sub-
sequently the television industry, he presents in this
autobiographical book its informal history — espe-
cially in its entertainment aspects.
4966. Mackey, David R. Drama on the air. New
York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 468 p. illus.
51-6240 PN1991.7.M3
With an emphasis on radio acting and produc-
tion, ". . . the purpose of this book is to describe
the concepts and activities basic to the presentation
of drama on the air, in the areas of script, acting,
and production." There is a good bibliography on
radio drama in particular and some radio history
in general.
Dii. THE DANCE IN AMERICA
4967. Amberg, George. Ballet in America, the
emergence of an American art. New York,
Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1949. 244 p. illus.
49-1689 GV1787.A43
Also published by the New American Library
with title: Ballet.
A critical and historical study. The emphasis is
heavily modern, in view of the author's statement:
"While there has been some form of the ballet in
America for more than a century and a half, the
native American ballet is barely fifteen years old." —
Preface.
4968. Armitage, Merle, ed. Martha Graham. Los
Angeles, M. Armitage, 1937. 132 p. illus.
39-2400 GV1785.G7A7
Articles by John Martin, Lincoln Kirstein, Evange-
line Stokowski, Stark Young, Wallingford Riegger,
Edith J. R. Isaacs, Roy Hargrave, James Johnson
Sweeney, George Antheil, Margaret Lloyd, Louis
Danz, and Martha Graham. This book is a group
of articles discussing or simply lauding Martha
Graham, one of the leading exponents of the modern
dance. Barbara B. Morgan's Martha Graham, Six-
teen Dances in Photographs (New York, Duell,
Sloan & Pearce, 1941. 160 p.) presents a photo-
graphic study of the dancer.
4969. Chujoy, Anatole. The New York City
Ballet. New York, Knopf, 1953. 382 p.
illus. 52-6412 GV1786.N4C45
Although the New York City Ballet was not
organized until 1948, Mr. Chujoy tells the story of
its predecessor enterprises from "October 1933,
when Lincoln Kirstein and his friend and Harvard
ENTERTAINMENT / 683
classmate Edward M. M. Warburg brought George
Balanchine and Vladimir Dimitriew from Europe
to establish the School of American Ballet." The
book acclaims the work of Messrs. Kirstein and
Balanchine in creating, from Russian models, "an
American institution to be proud of."
4970. De Mille, Agnes. Dance to the piper. Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown, 1952. 342 p. illus.
52-119 GV1785.D36A3 1952
The autobiography of a rich girl who climbed the
ladder to success as a dancer and choreographer.
She was one of the revolutionaries in the establishing
of an "American" dance.
4971. Magriel, Paul D., ed. Chronicles of the
American dance. New York, Holt, 1948.
268 p. illus. 48-9068 GV1623.M33
"Notes and bibliographical data": p. 263-268.
Written largely as a series of chronologically ar-
ranged monographs by various authors on individ-
uals and groups of dancers. Because of this manner
of treatment, and because of its emphasis on theatri-
cal dancing, the work is not a full history of dancing
in America, although its range is wide. A work of
wider scope, but for a shorter period, edited by Doris
Hering for Dance Magazine, is 25 Years of Ameri-
can Dance (1951), rev. and enl. ed. (New York,
Orthwine, 1954. 236 p.), a heavily illustrated work
which covers the entire field of the dance in modern
America, from recreational and social dancing
through dancing in plays, motion pictures, and on
television. Theatrical dancing in America since
1900 is studied in Winthrop B. Palmer's Theatrical
Dancing in America (New York, Ackerman, 1945.
159 p.), which has much material on ballet. A
dancer's view of the problems and aesthetics of the
modern theatrical dance is given in Elizabeth S.
Selden's The Dancer's Quest (Berkeley, University
of California Press, 1935. 215 p.).
4972. Magriel, Paul D., ed. Isadora Duncan.
New York, Holt, 1947. 85 p. illus.
47-3097 GV1785.D8M3
"The material in this book is made up largely
from issues of the periodical, Dance Index."
Appendices: Chronology. Bibliography of Isa-
dora Duncan (p. 73-78). Albums and books of
drawings of Isadora Duncan (p. 79).
A short book of essays (by John Martin, Carl Van
Vechten, A. R. Macdougall, and Gordon Craig) on
Isadora Duncan (1 878-1927), a pioneer of the
modern dance. An illustrated memorial volume of
essays by the dancer, with forewords by various
people, is Duncan's The Art of the Dance, edited
by Sheldon Cheney (New York, Theatre Arts,
1928. 147 p.).
Diii. VAUDEVILLE AND BURLESQUE
4973. Dillon, William A. Life doubles in brass.
Ithaca, N. Y., House of Nollid, 1944. 234 p.
illus. 44-8823 PN1967.D47
Will Dillon, born in 1877 in upstate New York
to an Irish family with theatrical inclinations, prog-
ressed though traveling medicine shows, blackface
minstrel shows, and repertory stock companies to
Broadway vaudeville, as an "eccentric singing
comedian." He was also an indefatigable writer of
popular songs, and appends some sentimental
specimens.
4974. Laurie, Joseph. Vaudeville: from the honky-
tonks to the Palace. New York, Holt, 1953.
561 p. _ 53-959° PN1967.L3
The honky-tonks, gambling houses and saloons
providing entertainment during the 1870's and 8o's,
were the future vaudeville's cradle of talent. Mr.
Laurie, however, is mainly concerned with the
vaudeville of the 20th century down to the great
collapse of 1932, when its disappearance from the
Palace Theater on Broadway symbolized its final
dispossession by the movies. He gives vivid, slang-
filled sketches of the conditions of work, represent-
ative acts, and leading managers. An earlier, less
memoiristic and less animated history of vaudeville
is Douglas Gilbert's American Vaudeville, Its Life
and Times (New York, Whittlesey House, 1940.
428 p.).
4975. Marston, William Moulton, and John Henry
Feller. F. F. Proctor, vaudeville pioneer.
New York, R. R. Smith, 1943. 191 p. illus.
44-155 PN1967.M3
The life of Frederick Freeman Proctor (1851-
1929), a producer of vaudeville shows in New York
City.
4976. Sobel, Bernard. Burleycue; an underground
history of burlesque days. New York, Far-
rar &Rinehart, 1931. 284 p. illus.
31-33512 PN1967.S6
Burlesque began as travesty of classical tragedy,
but since about 1869 its essence and its prosperity
have resided in its revelation of the female form, by
tights or otherwise. Mr. Sobel skims over its prin-
cipal aspects and persons from Lydia Thompson
and the British Blondes — an obese lot by present-
day standards — to Ann Corio, a more streamlined
type.
684 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Div. SHOWBOATS, CIRCUSES, ETC.
4977. Barnum, Phineas T. Struggles and tri-
umphs: or, The life of P. T. Barnum, writ-
ten by himself. Edited, with an introd., by George
S. Bryan. New York, Knopf, 1927. 2 v. illus.
27-13922 GV1811.B3A3 1927c
"Based upon 'The life of P. T. Barnum written
by himself (New York, 1855); the 1869 (Hartford)
issue of 'Struggles and triumphs; or, Forty years'
recollections of P. T. Barnum'; and the 1889 (Buf-
falo) issue of the condensed version of 'Struggles
and triumphs.' "
Barnum kept adding and subtracting from his
autobiography as it passed through its many edi-
tions. Accordingly, there is no one complete, defini-
tive text. Bryan has here edited a composite text.
Morris R. Werner's Barnum (New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1923. 381 p.) is a biography based on the
autobiography and outside materials.
4978. Graham, Philip. Showboats; the history of
an American institution. Austin, University
of Texas Press, 195 1. 224 p. illus.
51-14160 PN2293.S4G7
Bibliography: p. 203-210.
Showboats, which first appeared on the Missis-
sippi and its tributaries in 1831 and lasted for over
a century, were long a major medium of entertain-
ment from Pittsburgh to New Orleans. An
autobiographical book recording this aspect of the
dramatic art is Billy Bryant's Children of Old Man
River; the Life and Times of a Showboat Trouper
(New York, Furman, 1936. 303 p.).
4979. Havighurst, Walter. Annie Oakley of the
Wild West. New York, Macmillan, 1954.
246 p. illus. 54-12424 GV1157.O3H3
Annie Oakley (1860-1926) was from childhood
an incredibly accurate marksman with a shotgun
or rifle. So uniform was her success with the most
unlikely targets that for years she was able to travel
widely and profitably as a popular entertainer. The
peak of her career was perhaps her 17 successive
years as a star of Buffalo Bill's Wild West show.
4980. Mannix, Daniel P. Step right up! New
York, Harper, 1951. 270 p.
51-2123 GV1835.M3
Says Mr. Mannix, formerly The Great Zadma, of
his venture into fire-eating and sword-swallowing:
"I worked under canvas for the best part of three
years and either performed or saw performed all
the stunts I tell about in this book. . . . Except
for combining the events of chronologically sepa-
rated occasions into one summer, I've told the story
of a travelling American carnival as I experienced
it — only changing the names of the people with
whom I worked."
4981. McPharlin, Paul. The puppet theatre in
America, a history; with a list of puppeteers,
1 524-1 948. New York, Harper, 1949. 506 p.
illus., facsims. 49-^939 PN1978.U6M22
A history of puppets in America, from the begin-
ning to 1948, just before the television revival.
The large amount of material and its ordering makes
the book usable as a reference work.
4982. Robeson, Dave. Al G. Barnes, master show-
man, by Dave Robeson, as told by Al G.
Barnes. Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1935.
460 p. illus. 35-12032 GV1811.B27R6
The life story of a circus manager who specialized
in wild, trained, and performing animals, and to
whom Maud the mule and Nero the first riding lion
were real individuals.
XX
Sports and Recreation
A.
General
4983-4996
B.
Communi
ty and Scholastic Activities
4997-5000
C.
Particular
Sports and Recreations
Ci.
Auto-Racing and Motoring
5001-5007
Cii.
Baseball
5008-5015
1
Ciii.
Boating
5016-5022
4
T
f
Civ.
Boxing
5023-5033
Cv.
Football
5034-5045
Cvi.
Golf and Tennis
5046-5053
Cvii.
Horse-Racing
5054-5057
Cviii.
Miscellaneous
5058-5064
D.
General Field Sports
5065-5097 ^
AS THE leisure time of the average American has rapidly increased, the ways in which
2jL this time is passed have become increasingly important factors in the life of the Nation.
This is further accentuated by the fact that increased specialization and routinization of jobs
has decreased the percentage of those who live for their work, and enormously increased the
number of people who live by it, but for something else. Leisure activities have taken on
many aspects. One of the main categories is sp ort and recreation. While many of the sports
are so commercialized and non-participatory in na-
ture that they might well be included under Enter-
tainment (q. v.), not to mention commerce itself,
and while much entertainment is attended primarily
for purposes of recreation, we have chosen to use
Entertainment in its more traditional sense (cover-
ing spectacles such as drama, motion pictures,
vaudeville, the circus, etc.), and to regard activities
such as athletics as in a distinct category. To word
it another way, the distinction is made in consid-
eration of whether or not the activity is widely re-
garded among its followers as a participation activity
(Sports and Recreation) or as a generally and
basically non-participation activity (Entertainment).
Accordingly, this section covers such sports as
football, baseball, tennis, sailing, horse-racing, and
auto-racing, as well as the allied field sports, hunt-
ing and fishing. Some activities of the kind are,
however, not included because of a lack of suitable
books: basketball, swimming, billiards, hockey, bi-
cycling, etc.; while other important sports and
recreations are merely touched on: hiking, camping,
skiing, etc. For all these there is ample literature in
the form of manuals and guides, but little in the
way of books treating them as significant experience
or placing them individually in the picture of life
in America. For these the student will find some
information in the general histories of sport and
recreation. Just as the manuals have been excluded,
so too the various handbooks, encyclopedias, and
annuals of individual sports (notably baseball and
football) have been left out. Usually these are
mainly compendia of records (often statistical) and
do little to indicate any significance in the game for
American experience. As such they are of value
primarily to the game's fans, and secondarily to the
specialist, while their value to the general student
of American history and culture is limited.
685
686 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
It has been found impossible to represent the
sports strictly in proportion to their importance.
In some fields such as baseball, there is a vast litera-
ture, but mainly for young readers. In most fields
the books are written for aficionados of the sport, and
in a style with little appeal to the literate lay reader,
and often with a wealth of statistical detail of in-
terest chiefly to the fans. Also, many of the books
are uncritically written with little concern for the
distinction between truth and fable, and with much
attention to the fame and glory of the moment. On
the other hand, a few sports have had capable writers
among their followers: notably hunting and fishing
(which are probably the most widespread adult
participation sports); yachting (which is certainly
a minority sport); and also boxing (which in com-
parison to other sports has been surprisingly well,
though not extensively, written up).
It should also be noted that these subjects are
occasionally touched upon (directly or tangentially)
in other sections of the bibliography. Books such as
Lloyd Morris' Not So Long Ago under Society and
the baseball literature of Ring Lardner in the Litera-
ture section may well be of interest to the student.
For such material the appropriate sections and the
index should be used.
A. General
4983. Cozens, Frederick W., and Florence Scovil
Stumpf. Sports in American life. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1953. 366 p.
53-12897 GV583.C68
Two University of California sociologists study
the 20th-century penetration of American society on
every level by the practice and the enthusiastic fan-
ship of organized sports and physical recreations.
They describe the latter-day importance of sports in
labor and industry, the school, the church, journal-
ism, broadcasting, and even in war. They find
sport a vast and beneficent force for unification in
American life, narrowing the gaps between social
classes and ethnic groups. Unlike most commen-
tators, they wholeheartedly approve of spectator
sports, "the cement of democracy." "The bleachers
are equally cordial to coal-miners, politicians, and
bank presidents."
4984. Danzig, Allison, and Peter Brandwein, eds.
The greatest sport stories from The New
Yor\ Times; sport classics of a century. New York,
Barnes, 195 1. 680 p. illus. 51-14836 GV191.N4
"From the files of The New Yor\ Times have
been selected eyewitness accounts of the most
celebrated events in the field of sports dating from
the first year of publication of The Times, now
celebrating its centennial anniversary." — Intro-
duction.
A similar volume, Wa\e Up the Echoes, edited by
Bob Cooke and selected from the sports pages of the
New Yorf( Herald Tribune was published in 1956
(Garden City, N. Y., Hanover House. 251 p.).
4985. Dulles, Foster Rhea. America learns to
play; a history of popular recreation, 1607-
1940. New York, P. Smith, 1952, ci940. xvii,
441 p. illus. 52-9893 E161.D852 1952
Bibliography: p. 375-390.
An attempt to present the main aspects of popu-
lar recreation. "Recreation is considered in its popu-
lar sense — the leisure-time activities that the Ameri-
can people have pursued over three centuries for
their own pleasure. At all periods of history men
and women have probably spent the greater part of
their leisure in informal talk, in visiting and enter-
taining their friends, in casual walks and strolls,
and sometimes in reading for their own amusement.
But these more simple activities are hidden in the
obscurity that shrouds private lives. Organized,
public recreation has consciously been adopted as
the basis for this record." — Preface.
4986. Durant, John, and Otto Bettmann. Pic-
torial history of American sports, from colo-
nial times to the present. New York, Barnes, 1952.
280 p. 52-8298 GV583.D85
With text as well as pictures on nearly every page,
this overall narrative hits the high spots of five
periods, moving from "Captain Smith to General
Grant" in the first 45 pages. The remaining four
are "The Gas-lit Era, 1 871-1898," "The Rise of
Sports, 1900-1918," "The Golden Age, 1919-1930"
("an age of champions, of extraordinary events and
superb performances, an age of public idolatry and
fabulous purses"), and "Sports for Everybody,
1931-1952."
4987. Gallico, Paul. Farewell to sport. New
York, Knopf, 1938. 346 p.
38-27340 GV53.G3
Mr. Gallico was for 13 years (1923-36) a sports
writer for the New York Daily News, and has since
become a prolific writer of fiction. This reflective
book devotes individual chapters to three boxers
(Jack Dempsey, Primo Camera, Gene Tunney) and
to Tex Rickard, "the world's greatest prizefight
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 687
promoter," Babe Ruth, the king of baseball, and
Helen Wills Moody, the queen of tennis. The re-
maining chapters discuss particular sports or special
topics such as the Negro in sport. A recurrent
theme is the national hypocrisy which insists that,
in certain sports, professional athletes must main-
tain, by various subterfuges, their "amateur" status.
Mr. Gallico had one relapse into sports writing in
1942, when he published Golf Is a Friendly Game
(New York, Knopf. 274 p.) and Lou Gehrig,
Pride of the Yankees (New York, Grosset & Dunlap.
185 p.).
4988. Kieran, John. The American sporting
scene, with pictures by Joseph W. Golinkin.
New York, Macmillan, 1941. 211 p. illus. (part
col.) 41-52016 GV583.K47
Anecdotes and reminiscences of the world of
sports; the text is in a measure written about the
paintings and sketches of Golinkin. The book
catches some of the mood of sports, including the
non-professional's role, although there is no attempt
to attain either a historical or comprehensive con-
temporary survey of the sporting world.
4989. Kirby, Gustavus T. I wonder why? New
York, Coward-McCann, 1954. 180 p. illus.
54-10148 GV697.K5A3
Mr. Kirby, born in 1874, pursued careers as a
New York lawyer and art dealer. Active in ath-
letics at Columbia College in the '90's, he has been
an official of the International Olympics since the
second Games (1900), and has received six decora-
tions from European governments. His autobiog-
raphy is largely a procession of anecdotes, but ex-
presses his conviction that "only through sport can
there ever be a true democracy in this world."
4990. Krout, John Allen. Annals of American
sport. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1929. 360 p. (The Pageant of America [v. 15])
29-22307 GV53.K7
E178.5.P2, v. 15
Although conceived as a picture book, this is
considerably the fullest and most dependable gen-
eral history of American sports down to the mid-
1920's, and the one best related to other aspects of
national history. Unfortunately the pictures, as
always in this exasperating series, are as poorly
reproduced as they are admirably selected from
original sources. After a general review of outdoor
diversions in the colonial era, Dr. Krout deals suc-
cessively with the turf, yachting and rowing, fishing
and hunting, baseball, football, and golf, and has
chapters on "The Day of the Athletic Club" and
"The Coming of the Gymnasium." The "General
Bibliography" (p. 338-347) covers the whole 15-
volume series; the list for sports is limited to page
347-
4991. Lardner, John. Strong cigars and lovely
women. New York, Published for News-
wee^ by Funk & Wagnalls, 1951. 127 p.
51-14397 PN6161.L3574
A selection from the author's columns which ap-
peared in Newswee\, 1949 to 195 1.
John Abbott Lardner, son of the famous Ring
Lardner (q. v.), is a leading sports writer who is
known for his style and the humor which he intro-
duces into his articles. An earlier collection was
It Beats Wording (Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1947.
253 p.), a selection of his articles that appeared in
Neivswee\ from 1939 to 1945. He is also the author
of White Hopes and Other Tigers (Philadelphia,
Lippincott, 1951. 190 p.), a history of heavyweight
boxing in the U. S. from 1910 to 1930.
4992. Manchester, Herbert. Four centuries of
sport in America, 1490-1890. New York,
Derrydale Press, 193 1. 245 p. illus.
32-2523 GV583.M3
"List of sources": p. [233J-245.
A well-illustrated volume whose purpose is "to
follow the history of sport in America from that of
the Aztecs and Indians down through the sports of
the white man to about a generation ago." The
point of view is historical rather than technical, and
the author seeks to give the story of each period
with the high spots of each sport, rather than its
minor details. A more detailed, but unillustrated
work with a smaller range is Jennie Holliman's
American Sports, 1785-1835 (Durham, N. C, See-
man Press, 1931. 222 p.).
4993. Paulison, Walter M. The tale of the Wild-
cats; a centennial history of Northwestern
University athletics. [Evanston? 111.] N Men's
Club, Northwestern University Club of Chicago,
Northwestern University Alumni Association, 1951.
xiv, 223 p. illus. 52-8032 GV691.N6P3
The centennial celebrated is the founding of
Northwestern University, 1851-55; its football
team, once the "Fighting Methodists," has been
known as the Wildcats since 1924; this volume
covers all college athletics but naturally gives most
space to football (p. 17-63). Baseball was earlier,
in unorganized form from the beginning, organ-
ized from 1869, and intercollegiate from 1871.
Football has been played since 1876, organized since
1879, and intercollegiate since 1882. Track, tennis,
basketball, swimming, etc., are all narrated, with a
complete roster of lettermen and intercollegiate
688 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
scores at the end, and many fine plates reproducing
photographs of teams and individual stars.
4994. Rice, Grandand. The tumult and the shout-
ting; my life in sport. New York, Barnes,
1954. 368 p. illus. 54-9173 GV697.A1R52
Henry Grandand Rice was for many years a lead-
ing sports columnist. He was well known for his
work on a long series of short sport films. His auto-
biography, completed shortly before his death, is
less his life story than a presentation of the world of
sports as he saw it. Rice also wrote much popular
sports and moral verse.
4995. Smith, Walter W. Views of sport [by] Red
Smith. New York, Knopf, 1954. 293 p.
53-6862 GV191.S62
This is a second selection of articles from the
author's column "Views of Sport," in the New Yorf^
Herald Tribune; the first was entitled Out of the
Red (New York, Knopf, 1950. 294 p.). Smith
(b. 1905) may write on any aspect of his field. His
approach is usually anecdotal and frequently
humorous.
4996. Zaharias, Mildred Babe (Didrikson), and
Harry Paxton. This life I've led; my auto-
biography, by Babe Didrikson Zaharias as told to
Harry Paxton. New York, Barnes, 1955. 242 p.
illus. 55-10217 GV964.Z3A3
Mrs. Zaharias has been called "the greatest woman
athlete." Raised in an impoverished Texas family,
she became a leading athlete in several fields, includ-
ing golf, basketball, baseball, and track.
B. Community and Scholastic Activities
4997. Buder, George D. Introduction to com-
munity recreation, prepared for the National
Recreation Association. 2d ed. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1949. xiv, 568 p.
49-7982 GV171.B85 1949
"The term 'community recreation' is applied in
this volume to recreation services that are provided
for the benefit of all the people. Special consider-
ation is given to those forms of recreation which
require a considerable degree of organization and
leadership and in which participation plays an im-
portant role. Because governmental agencies pro-
vide a large and increasing proportion of such
services, this book is devoted primarily to the work
of these agencies. It deals with recreation as a
function of local government . . . Commercial
recreation ... is not included . . ."
". . . Major consideration is given to prob-
lems . . . related to the town and city rather than
the rural community." — Preface.
Bibliography: p. 533-548.
4998. Neumeyer, Martin H., and Esther S. Neu-
meyer. Leisure and recreation; a study of
leisure and recreation in their sociological aspects.
Rev. ed. New York, Barnes, 1949. 411 p.
49-8054 GV14.N4 1949
The aim of the authors is "to present an informa-
tive treatment of the place of recreation in modern
society . . ." Their emphasis is on group activities.
Something of a world view is presented, although
basic orientation is to the United States. Chapter
titles include: "Recreation Movement in the United
States," "Conditioning Factors of Leisure and Rec-
reation," "Leisure and Personality," "Preparing for
Leisure," "Theories of Play and Recreation," "Rec-
reation and Social Maladjustment," "Commercial
Recreation," "Community Recreation: Public Agen-
cies," "Community Recreation: Semipublic and
Private Agencies," "Recreation Leadership," and
"Methods of Recreation Research."
4999. Savage, Howard J., and others. American
college athletics, by Howard }. Savage . . .
and Harold W. Bentley, John T. McGovern, Dean
F. Smiley, M. D., with a preface by Henry S. Pritch-
ett . . . New York, Carnegie Foundation for the
Advancement of Teaching, 1929. xxii, 383 p.
(The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of
Teaching. Bulletin no. 23)
29-23787 GV583.53
LB2334.C4, no. 23
A report on an investigation into the function of
athletics in American higher education, as well as
the financing of both athletics and the athletes.
"The fundamental causes of the defects of American
college athletics are two: commercialism," and a
failure to develop the educational potentialities
latent in the sports themselves. Litde has changed
since 1929; for instance, our athletes and student
managers are still "puppets pulled by older hands."
5000. Whitten, Charles W. Interscholastics; a dis-
cussion of interscholastic contests. Chicago,
Illinois High School Association, 1950. xv, 271 p.
50-14804 GV583.W5
"This book has been written to serve two pur-
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 689
poses. It is a record of the growth and development
of the Illinois High School Athletic Association and
its successor, the present Illinois High School Asso-
ciation. It is also a record of my own convictions as
to the educational philosophy underlying the inter-
scholastic activities carried on under the aegis of the
association." — Foreword.
Interscholastic athletic activities are the rule
throughout the United States, but few of them have
had published histories. This book may be taken
as partially illustrating the systems that have been
built up. The philosophy behind it is unusually
conservative for a sports figure and probably comes
closer to that of many humanists.
C. Particular Sports and Recreations
Ci. AUTO-RACING AND MOTORING
5001. Catlin, Russ. The life of Ted Horn, Amer-
ican racing champion. Los Angeles, F.
Clymer, 1949. 223 p. illus.
49-50131 GV1029.H56C3
Horn was a leading automobile racer. His biogra-
phy is largely a history of major racing developments
from 1931 to his death in 1948.
5002. Chase, Harold B. Auto-biography; recol-
lections of a pioneer motorist, 1896 to 1911.
New York, Pageant Press, 1955. 174 p. illus.
55-11223 GV1021.C5
Reminiscences of a motoring enthusiast who
started while the recreation was new and still far
from standard.
5003. Clymer, Joseph Floyd. Indianapolis 500 mile
race history. Los Angeles, 1946. 320 p.
illus. NNC
A history of the leading automotive race in Amer-
ica. An annual supplement, Indianapolis Race His-
tory, has been published by Mr. Clymer since 1946.
The author has written much on racing and has
published many works by himself and others on this
sport. A short popularized history of the race from
its beginning in 1909 to 1955 is Brock W. Yates'
The Indianapolis 500; the Story of the Motor Speed-
way (New York, Harper, 1956. 147 p.).
5004. Lozier, Herbert. Auto racing, old and new.
[Greenwich, Conn., Fawcett Publications]
1953. 144 p. illus. (A Fawcett book, no. 184)
53-29624 GV1029.L6
A history of automobile racing, especially in Amer-
ica. The arrangement is by race, with chrono-
logical subdivision. Most attention is given to the
Indianapolis races.
5005. Partridge, Bellamy. Fill 'er up; the story
of fifty years of motoring. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1952. 235 p. illus.
52-10850 GV1021.P3
431240—60 45
"Chronology of the Motor Car:" p. 219-227.
A rather loosely written chronicle of various
aspects of the automobile's conquest of American
life, especially in its earlier stages. Among its
highlights are the first American automobile race,
in Chicago on Thanksgiving day, 1895, when the
winner averaged 5.05 miles per hour; the organiza-
tion in New York City of the Automobile Club of
America, followed by the first automobile parade
ever seen in America (1899); the federating of the
clubs into the American Automobile Association in
1902; and the Glidden Tours held under its auspices
during each summer from 1905 to 1913.
5006. Shaw, Wilbur. Gentlemen, start your en-
gines. New York, Coward-McCann, 1955.
320 p. illus. 55-8980 GV1029.S43
The personal narrative of an automobile racer,
born in 1902, who began competing in 1921 and
won the Indianapolis 500 (see no. 5003) in 1927
with his "little Jynx Special." He was still going
strong in 1954, when his career was cut short by a
fatal airplane crash. Another auto-racer's auto-
biography is Peter De Paolo's Wall Smacker; the
Saga of the Speedway (Cleveland, Ohio, Thompson
Products, 1935. 271 p.).
5007. Wagner, Fred J. The saga of the roaring
road, by Fred J. Wagner as told to John M.
Mitchell. Los Angeles, F. Clymer, 1949. 189 p.
illus. 49-5081 GV1029.W25 1949
"Fred Wagner was the dean of race starters, and
during his career officiated at auto races at nearly
every track and course in the United States." —
Foreword.
The book is more a group of reminiscences than
an organized history; however, the scope of Wag-
ner's activity makes it valuable for the early history.
The book was first published in 1938. In this
edition, the text is not altered, but photographic
material has been added.
69O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Cii. BASEBALL
5008. Barrow, Edward G., and James M. Kahn.
My fifty years in baseball. New York,
Coward-McCann, 1951. 216 p. ports.
51-10981 GV865.B3A3
Mr. Barrow, born in 1868, entered the business
side of baseball in 1894, and got his first club (Pater-
son, N.J.) to manage in 1896. He is proudest of
having developed Hans Wagner, "the greatest ball
player of all time," and of having "changed Babe
Ruth from a left-handed pitcher into a full-time
outfielder," with spectacular results. After two
seasons with the Boston Red Sox, he became busi-
ness manager of the New York Yankees in 1920,
and succeeded Jacob Ruppert as their president in
1939, retiring in 1945 when the club was sold. His
life story, taken down by Mr. Kahn, is objective,
even-tempered, and most informative.
5009. Bartlett, Arthur C. Baseball and Mr. Spald-
ing; the history and romance of baseball.
New York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 195 1. 295 p.
51-9661 GV865.S7B3
The life of Albert G. Spalding (1850-1915), a
sporting goods businessman who as a baseball
executive turned the game into big business.
5010. Graham, Frank. Lou Gehrig, a quiet hero.
New York, Putnam, 1942. 250 p. illus.
42-8657 GV865.G4G7
A sports journalist's biographical tribute to Henry
Louis Gehrig (1903-1941), one of baseball's heroes
and one of the outstanding modern professional
players of the game. In 1939 he retired from the
game because of a fairly rare and incurable form of
infantile paralysis which was causing his muscles
to wither.
501 1. McGillicuddy, Cornelius. My 66 years in
the big leagues; the great story of America's
national game, by Connie Mack (Cornelius Mc-
Gillicuddy) Philadelphia, Winston, 1950. 246 p.
illus. 50—7521 GV865.M27A3
Connie Mack (1862-1956) was a baseball execu-
tive who came to be known as the "grand old man"
of the game. He was best known as the manager
of the Philadelphia Athletics.
5012. Ruth, George H., and Robert B. Considine.
The Babe Ruth story as told to Bob Con-
sidine. New York, Dutton, 1948. 250 p. illus.
48-6219 GV865.R8A3
George Herman Ruth, universally known as Babe
Ruth (1894-1948), emerged from an "incorrigible"
youth in Baltimore to enter professional baseball in
19 13, and to become its most spectacular and popu-
lar star after joining the New York Yankees in
1920. In 1 92 1 he made his incredible record of
177 runs in 152 games, and during his 21-year
period in the American League (1914-34) he made
the record slugging percentage of .692. In 1930
his salary was raised from $70,000 to $80,000 a year.
A swift physical decline forced his retirement in
1935, and this honest book does not conceal the
despair of the star who can play no more, or the
agonies of his final illness — in the course of which
he succeeded in completing this autobiography and
the Hollywood film, The Babe Ruth Story, which
was its counterpart.
5013. Smith, Ira L., and H. Allen Smith. Low
and inside; a book of baseball anecdotes,
oddities, and curiosities. Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1949. 243 p. 49-8968 GV873.S58
A collection of baseball anecdotes that appeared
in print prior to 1918. This book was supplemented
by the authors' Three Men on Third; a Second Boo\
of Baseball Anecdotes, Oddities, and Curiosities
(Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1951. 250 p.),
which brought the coverage up to the time of
compilation.
5014. Smith, Robert Miller. Baseball; a histori-
cal narrative of the game, the men who have
played it, and its place in American life. New
York, Simon & Schuster, 1947. xiv, 362 p. illus.
47-4836 GV863.S44
"BASEBALL is a private appreciation of a game
I have played and watched as long as I can remem-
ber. It is an investigation of the manner in which
the game began in this country, and a partial ac-
count of its place in the life of the nation for one
hundred years. It is an attempt to bring to life
a few of the great games and to revivify some of
professional baseball's bygone heroes. It is an ama-
teur effort to explain why baseball has meant so
much to so many Americans." — Foreword.
A more recent history of professional baseball
is Frederick G. Lieb's The Baseball Story (New
York, Putnam, 1950. 335 p.).
5015. Spink, J. G. Taylor. Judge Landis and
twenty-five years of baseball. New York,
Crowell, 1947. 306 p. ports.
47-3905 GV865.L3S6
A biography of Kenesaw Mountain Landis ( 1 866—
1944), who in 1920 was appointed the first baseball
commissioner (frequently called the "Baseball
Czar"), in which position he regulated organized
baseball and did much to establish baseball "law."
He held this position until his death in 1944; in
1945 "Happy" [Albert Benjamin] Chandler was
elected the second baseball commissioner.
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 69 1
Ciii. BOATING
5016. Barrett, J. Lee. Speed boat kings; 25 years
of international speedboating. Detroit,
Arnold-Powers, 1939. 143 p. illus.
40-27200 GV835.B3
Not a general history of motorboat racing in the
United States, this book centers upon Gar Wood
(Commodore Garfield A. Wood of Detroit), his
mechanic Orlin Johnson, and the builders of his
speedboats, Chris Smith and his son Jay of Algonac,
Mich., and enthusiastically narrates their joint at-
tempts to win the Harmsworth Trophy for America.
Put in competition by the future Lord Northcliffe in
1903, it was first won by Wood in his Miss America
I at Cowes in 1920, and successfully defended by
him through 1933.
5017. Elder, George W. Forty years among the
Stars. Port Washington, Wis., Schanen &
Jacque, 1955. 352 p. illus. 55-57451 GV811.E4
A history of the Star (a small yacht), of the Star
organization, and of Star racing.
5018. Gardiner, Frederic, M. Cruising North
America. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1941.
xii, 340 p. illus., maps. 41-14788 GV815.G3
This book was designed to be an introduction to
the cruising areas, inland as well as coastal, of North
America. It illustrates the local range of yachts-
men.
5019. Hoyt, Charles Sherman. Sherman Hoyt's
memoirs. New York, Van Nostrand, 1950.
xii, 348 p. illus. (A Van Nostrand sporting book)
50-10884 GV815.H6
A book of reminiscences of changes in yachting
over a period of 60 years; the author is mainly con-
cerned with sail yachts.
5020. Kelley, Robert F. American rowing; its
background and traditions. New York,
Putnam, 1932. xiv, 271 p. illus.
32-26690 GV796.K4
A well-organized and clearly written history of
competitive rowing in America, which is now chiefly
a college sport but was by no means so in its origins.
Amateur racing and rowing clubs began to flourish
in the 1830's; professional crews and single scullers
emerged in the 1850's. Edward Hanlan ( 1855—
1908), who was born in Toronto but dominated
United States races from 1876 to 1884, is remem-
bered as the greatest pro. Philadelphia's Schuylkill
River Navy, organized in 1858, remains "the oldest
governing body of sport in America." Harvard and
Yale first raced in 1852, and have done so annually
since 1876; multi-college regattas have been held
since 1871, and the major one, the Poughkeepsie
Regatta, since 1895. The colleges have kept up the
old sport as mass interest has turned to speed. An
appendix (p. 255-271) lists winners in various
events.
5021. Klein, David, and Mary Louis Johnson.
They took to the sea, including personal ac-
counts of the voyages of Joshua Slocum, Jack Lon-
don, Rockwell Kent and other small-boat voyagers.
New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University Press,
1948. viii, 342 p. illus. 48-11442 GV811.K66
Annotated bibliography: p. [3331—339-
Crossing the open sea in a small sailing ship is,
to the compilers of this volume, "a contest of wood
and canvas against wind and water which presents
an unchanging challenge to man's courage, skill,
and ingenuity." They provide two introductory
chapters as well as connective matter between their
topically arranged selections. Most of the 13 authors
excerpted are, like the three named in the subtide,
Americans, but they include two Frenchmen, and
Englishman, and a Norwegian. The voyagers
traversed the North and South Adantic, the South
Pacific, the Indian Ocean, and the Mediterranean;
the earliest was Joshua Slocum, who sailed around
the globe between Apr. 24, 1895, and June 27, 1898.
5022. Loom is, Alfred F. Ocean racing; the great
blue-water yacht races, 1 866-1935. New
York, Morrow, 1936. xii, 295 p. illus.
36-14301 GV827.L6 1936
A history of open ocean yacht racing, starting witii
the first transadantic race in 1866. As with most
sports writing, the book is meant for aficionados of
the sport, but the layman can easily sidestep much
of the specialized discussion.
Civ. BOXING
5023. Dempsey, Jack. Round by round, an auto-
biography. Written in collaboration with
Myron M. Stearns. New York, Whittlesey House,
McGraw-Hill, 1940. 285 p. illus.
40-30806 GV1132.D4A3
Born in 1895 and originally named William Har-
rison Dempsey, the author was a popular world
heavyweight champion boxer from 1919 to 1926.
5024. Durant, John, and Edward Rice. Come out
fighting. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1946. 245 p. 46-25213 GV1121.D8
A pictorial history of boxing in America.
5025. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. Black dynamite, the
story of the Negro in the prize ring from
1782 to 1938, by Nat Fleischer. New York, C. J.
O'Brien, 1938-47. 5 v. illus. (Ring athletic
library) 38-19731 GV1131.F65
692 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A detailed history, largely in biographical form,
of leading Negro boxers; according to the author,
"About 60 per cent of the top flight boxers are of
that race." Certainly they have played a very im-
portant role in the sport, and the sport has played a
prominent role in their national life.
The first volume deals with American Negro
fighters in the early years. Volume two has the
individual title of "Joking Joe," the Amazing Story
of Joe Louis and His Rise to World Heavyweight
Title; "Homicide Han\',' the Sockjng Saga of
Henry Armstrong. Volume three is entided: "The
Three Colored Aces": George Dixon, "Little Choc-
olate"; Joe Gans, "The Old Master"; Joe Walcott,
"The Barbados Demon"; and Several Contem-
poraries. The tide of the fourth volume is: "Fight-
ing Furies," Story of the Golden Era of ]ac\ John-
son, Sam Langford, and Their Contemporaries.
The title of volume five is "Soccers in Sepia," a
Continuation of the Drama of the Negro in
Pugilistic Competition.
5026. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. The heavyweight
championship; an informal history of heavy-
weight boxing from 171 9 to the present day [by]
Nat Fleischer. New York, Putnam, 1949. xv,
303 p. illus. 49-4955 GV1121.F6
This history of heavyweight boxing deals with the
subject on an international level. However, because
of the contemporary dominance of America in this
field, all but the early portions are almost as though
the scope had been exclusively American.
5027. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. John L. Sullivan,
champion of champions, by Nat Fleischer.
New York, Putnam, 195 1. xiii,242p. illus.
51-10380 GV1132.S95F63
A biography of John Lawrence Sullivan (1858-
1918), a leading American heavyweight pugilist,
and one of the heroes and myths of his age. Earlier
biographies include Roy F. Dibble's John L. Sulli-
van, an Intimate Narrative (Boston, Little, Brown,
1925. 209 p.) and Donald Barr Chidsey's John the
Great, the Times and Life of a Remarkable Ameri-
can, John L. Sullivan (Garden City, N. Y., Double-
day, Doran, 1942. 337 p.).
5028. Graziano, Rocky. Somebody up there likes
me; the story of my life until today. Written
with Rowland Barber. New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1955. 375 p. illus.
54-12365 GV1132.G62A3
Graziano (born in 1921 and originally named
Rocco Barbella) was middleweight champion in
1947-48. This book is written in the East Side
New York and general hoodlum argot in which he
was raised. In addition to depicting the business
of boxing, the book has interesting sidelights on a
slum childhood, juvenile delinquency, and "mod-
ern" penology.
5029. Johnston, Alexander. Ten — and out! The
complete story of the prize ring in America.
3d ed. rev. New York, Washburn, 1947. 401 p.
illus. 47-31138 GV1125.J6 1947
A clearly planned and written narrative, for the
most part, of the highlights of the heavyweight
championship from the first decade of the 19th
century, when Tom Molyneux, born a slave on a
Virginia plantation, was known in New York City
as Champion of America. Chapters 18-23 cover
"The Lighter Divisions," from middleweights to
flyweights. First published in 1927, the book was
twice brought up to date by means of additional
chapters.
5030. Louis, Joe. The Joe Louis story. [Writ-
ten with the editorial aid of Chester L. Wash-
ington and Haskell Cohen] New York, Grosset
& Dunlap, 1953. 197 p. illus.
53-1 1991 GV1132.L6A3 1953
First edition published in 1947 under tide: My
life story.
Joseph Louis Barrow was born into a poor Negro
farm family in Alabama in 1914. He rose to be-
come world heavyweight champion and held the
title from 1937 to 1949.
5031. Tunney, Gene. A man must fight. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1932. 288 p. illus.
32-29070 GV1132.T8A3
Autobiography of a champion heavyweight boxer
who in 1928 retired undefeated. A second auto-
biographical work by Tunney (b. 1898) is Arms
for Living (New York, Funk, 194 1. 279 p.). A
biography of him is Nat Fleischer's Gene Tunney,
the Enigma of the Ring ( [New York, Hubner] 1931.
127 p.).
5032. Van Every, Edward. Muldoon, the solid
man of sport; his amazing story as related
for the first time by him to his friend, Edward
Van Every. New York, Stokes, 1929. xiv, 364 p.
illus. 29-19300 GV1132.M85V3
William Muldoon (1845-1933) became famous
as a trainer of boxers, and came to be known as
"the father of American boxing."
5033. Williams, Joseph P. TV Boxing book.
New York, Van Nostrand, 1954. 186 p.
illus. 54-1 1831 GV1133.W5
A "nationally known sports columnist" (who
shares the profession's distaste for straightforward
exposition in plain language) analyzes the depress-
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 693
ing financial effect which, strangely enough, the
transfer from ringside to fireside audiences has had
on the boxing business, and goes on to expound the
fine points of the sport, including its refereeing and
judging, for members of "the Living Room Athletic
Club."
Cv. FOOTBALL
5034. Buchanan, Lamont. The story of football
in text and pictures. New York, Vanguard
Press, 1952. 256 p. 52-13438 GV940.B8 1952
Pictures of college (none of professional) football
each with accompanying text, from the late 19th
century through the season of 1951. There are
some wood engravings from the illustrated weeklies,
and some very spirited drawings by Frederick Rem-
ington (p. 35-36), but mosdy photographs, in a dull
sort of reproduction, of stars, coaches, and actual
plays. The latter demonstrate, at any rate, the
progress of photography: the earlier ones are almost
invariably blurred, but the modern fast shutter
makes nearly all the more recent ones crisp and
clear.
5035. Cohane, Tim. The Yale football story.
New York, Putnam, 195 1. 369 p. illus.
51-13447 GV958.Y3C6
Since, unlike baseball, football in America is
largely a collegiate sport, this history of football at
one of the oldest Eastern universities represents the
dominant tradition of the game. In Gridiron Grena-
diers (New York, Putnam, 1948. 320 p.) Cohane
presented a similar history of football at West Point.
5036. Danzig, Allison. The history of American
football: its great teams, players, and coaches.
Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 525 p.
56-9844 GV938.D35
The story of the evolution of the game of football
in America. Much of the material was gathered
in the course of the author's more than a quarter of
a century reporting football for The New Yor\
Times.
5037. Grange, Harold E. The Red Grange story,
the autobiography of Red Grange, as told
to Ira Morton. New York, Putnam, 1953. 180 p.
illus. [Putnams sports series]
53-8161 GV939.G7A3
Red Grange (b. 1903), the son of a Pennsylvania
lumberjack, carried ice and played high school foot-
ball at Wheaton, 111., and became the "Galloping
Ghost" of the University of Illinois team during
1923-25, when he once made four long touchdown
runs in 12 minutes. On graduating, he at once
entered professional football, which enjoyed small
repute in 1925 but has improved since, and was for
another decade the mainstay of the Chicago Bears.
He did not coach for long, but has since had great
success as a radio and TV sportscaster. His old
coach, Robert C. Zuppke of Illinois, calls him "the
greatest name in football" and "nearer to being the
perfect football player than anyone I have ever
known."
5038. Heffelfinger, W. W. This was football, by
W. W. "Pudge" Heffelfinger, as told to John
McCallum. New York, Barnes, 1954. 192 p. illus.
54-11793 GV939.H37A3
Pudge Heffelfinger was one of the earliest, and is
still considered by many to be one of the greatest,
of football athletes. Active in the game over a period
of 50 years, he know many of the personalities in the
sport, and this book is in large part anecdotal rem-
iniscences about others.
5039. Luckman, Sid. Luckman at quarterback;
football as a sport and a career. Chicago,
Ziff-Davis, 1949. xxi, 233 p. illus.
49-10297 GV939.L82
The autobiography (actually told to Norman
Reissman of Chicago, who reads like a sports
journalist) of the son of a Jewish immigrant from
Germany. Mr. Luckman began playing football
at Erasmus Hall High School in Brooklyn, starred
for Columbia (class of 1939), and in the next 10
seasons gained 14,303 yards passing for a profes-
sional team, the Chicago Bears.
5040. Roberts, Howard. The Big Nine; the story
of football in the Western Conference. New
York, Putnam, 1948. 259 p. illus.
48-8953 GV951.R53
A history of football in a Midwestern league which
is one of the outstanding collegiate football associa-
tions in America. Roberts is also the author of The
Chicago Bears (New York, Putnam, 1947. 248 p.),
the story of a professional football team.
5041. Rockne, Knute K. The autobiography of
Knute K. Rockne, edited, with prefatory
note, by Bonnie Skiles Rockne (Mrs. Knute K.
Rockne) and with introd. and postscript by Father
John Cavanaugh, C. S. C. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1931. 296 p. illus.
31-30240 GV939.R6A3
Knute Rockne (1888-1931) was Notre Dame's
football coach; in this capacity he brought fame to
the university and to himself. Considered by many
to be the greatest of football coaches, he has prob-
694 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ably had more books written about him than any
other football personality. These include Huber
William Hurt's memorial Goals, the Life of Knute
Rocf{ne (New York, Murray Book Corp., 193 1.
271 p.), which is extensively illustrated, and Eugene
[Scrapiron] Young's With Roc\ne at Notre Dame
(New York, Putnam, 1951. 312 p.), a somewhat
autobiographical work that tends toward being a
biography of Rockne.
5042. Samuelsen, Rube. The Rose Bowl game.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1 95 1 . 299 p.
illus. 51-12108 GV957.R6S3
Pasadena, California, has held its Tournament of
Roses each New Year's Day since 1890, and ever
since 19 16, when Brown met Washington State, its
principal feature and financial prop has been a
football game between the best-scoring Pacific Coast
college team and a successful and prestigious team
selected from elsewhere in the country. Mr. Sam-
uelsen describes the first 36 games in great and
anecdotal detail, and gives a statistical summary of
each in an appendix (p. 265-299).
5043. Stagg, Amos Alonzo. Touchdown! As told
by Coach Amos Alonzo Stagg to Wesley
Winans Stout. New York, Longmans, Green, 1927.
352 p. illus. 27-19751 GV951.S8
Coach Stagg (b. 1862), the most durable man in
the whole history of sport, played baseball and
football for Yale in the '8o's, and began his service
as director of physical education and football coach
at the new-fledged University of Chicago in 1892,
the year before the World's Fair. When he dic-
tated this autobiography he had long been known
as "the Old Man," but had six more years of service
before retiring in 1933 with a total of 41 years. He
at once began coaching for the College of the Pacific,
and took on his latest assignment, with Stockton
College, in his tenth decade! His book tells much
about the early days of college football, including
the "dirty work" that marred it, and about the shoe-
string beginnings of athletics at Mr. Rockefeller's
university.
5044. Wallace, Francis. The Notre Dame story.
New York, Rinehart, 1949. 275 p.
49-10793 LD4113.W3
Notre Dame is an Indiana Catholic university that
was made famous by its football team. This book
tells the story of the school through the develop-
ment of the story of its football and the life of Knute
Rockne (q. v.), its great football coach. Wallace
is a sportswriter who specializes in football and
Notre Dame. In Dementia Pigs\in (New York,
Rinehart, 195 1. 252 p.) he presented a general, non-
sequential, and frequently humorous view of the
world of the football fan.
5045. Ward, Archie. The Green Bay Packers, the
story of professional football [by] Arch
Ward. New York, Putnam, 1946. 240 p. illus.
47-751 GV956.G7W3
An enthusiast's history of a professional football
team; the book also reflects much of the general
history of professional football in America.
Cvi. GOLF AND TENNIS
5046. Danzig, Allison. The racquet game. New
York, Macmillan, 1930. 283 p. illus.
30-4629 GV1003.D3
A study of court tennis, rackets, squash rackets
and squash tennis. The subjects are approached
through a presentation of their origin, history in
America, personalities of the games, and the method
of play.
5047. Jacobs, Helen Hull. Beyond the game, an
autobiography. Philadelphia, Lippincott,
1936. 274 p. illus. 36-14873 GV994.J3A3
Jacobs (b. 1908) was a leading tennis player who
between 1923 and 1931 was seven times the U. S.
woman champion.
5048. Keeler, Oscar B. The Bobby Jones story,
from the writings of O. B. Keeler, by Grant-
land Rice. Adanta, Tupper & Love, 1953. 304 p.
illus. 53-13*59 GV964.J6K4
Jones, one of the greatest of golf players, retired
from the game in 1948. This biography is made
up from articles written by Keeler, a sportswriter
and golf enthusiast who knew Jones throughout
almost all of his career. Keeler died in 1950.
5049. Marble, Alice. The road to Wimbledon.
New York, Scribner, 1946. 167 p. illus.
46-5902 GV994.M3A3
Autobiography of a Californian who became
woman tennis champion four times between 1936
and 1940.
5050. Riggs, Robert L. Tennis is my racket, by
Bobby Riggs. [New York] Simon & Schu-
ster, 1949. xxii, 245 p. illus.
49-8951 GV994.R54A3
Riggs (b. 1918) has won a number of tennis
championships. His autobiography presents not
only his own career in the sport, but presents at some
length sketches of prominent tennis players he has
known.
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 695
5051. Sarazen, Gene. Thirty years of champion-
ship golf; the life and times of Gene Sarazen,
by Gene Sarazen with Herbert Warren Wind. New
York, Prentice-Hall, 1950. xi, 276 p. illus.
50-7427 GV964.S3A3
The life story of a professional golfer who won
the National Open in 1922 and 1932, among other
awards. His original last name was Saracini
(b. 1901).
5052. Tilden, William T. My story, a champion's
memoirs. New York, Hellman, Williams,
1948. 335 p. illus. 48-3054 GV994.T5A33
Tilden (1 893-1953) has generally been adjudged
the best tennis player of the first half of the 20th
century. In his long amateur career he won many
national and international awards. In 193 1 he be-
came a professional, and subsequently won a num-
ber of professional awards. An earlier version of his
autobiography was Aces, Places and Faults (London,
Hale, 1938. 304 p.).
5053. Wind, Herbert W. The story of American
golf, its champions and its championships.
New York, Simon & Schuster, 1956. 564 p. illus.
56-13439 GV981.W5 1956
A revised edition of a history of American golf
which first appeared in 1948. It has the game start-
ing in this country in 1888; the emphasis is on
championship golf, amateur and professional. An
earlier book which also starts from 1888 is Harry
B. Martin's Fifty Years of American Golf (New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1936. 423 p.).
Cvii. HORSE-RACING
5054. Akers, Dwight. Drivers up; the story of
American harness racing. [2d ed.] New
York, Putnam, 1947. xv, 392 p. illus.
Agr 47-373 SF339.A5 1947
Harness racing is a special type wherein the horse
trots as fast as he can but must not break into a run;
nowadays he draws a sulky and driver, but in the
early days he might bear saddle and jockey. Mr.
Akers, whose history was first published in 1938,
reminds us that, before the motor age, trotting races
were not confined to special tracks, but were every-
day events on city avenues and country roads. The
prehistoric age of American harness racing ended
with the formation of the New York Trotting Club
in 1825; a highlight of the '60 's was the long
rivalry in trotters between Commodore Vanderbilt
(no. 5935) and Robert Bonner of the New Yorf^
Ledger. Harness racing survives to lend variety to
present-day racing; its recent status is surveyed in
Frank A. Wrensch's Harness Horse Racing in the
United States and Canada (New York, Van Nos-
trand, 1951. 219 p.).
5055. Hervey, John. Racing in America: 1665-
1865 . . . written for the Jockey Club.
New York, Priv. print, The Jockey Club, 1944. 2 v.
illus. 44-6592 SF347.H4
A large, detailed, de luxe history of the early days
of horse-racing in America. The work is supple-
mented by Walter S. Vosburgh's Racing in Amer-
ica, 1866-1921 (New York, The Jockey Club, 1922.
249 p.) and John Hervey's Racing in America: 1922-
1936 (New York, The Jockey Club, 1937. 293 p.).
5056. Parmer, Charles B. For gold and glory; the
story of thoroughbred racing in America.
New York, Carrick & Evans, 1939. 352 p. illus.,
tables. 39-30807 SF347.P3
The story of how 20th-century horse-racing in
America developed out of early beginnings in Eng-
land and then Virginia.
5057. Winn, Matt J. Down the stretch; the story
of Colonel Matt J. Winn, as told to Frank
G. Menke. New York, Smith & Durrell, 1944. xvi,
292 p. illus. 45-1614 SF336.W5A3
The autobiography of a leading horse-racing per-
sonality. A brief history of the Kentucky Derby,
with which he has most prominendy been asso-
ciated, is included.
Cviii. MISCELLANEOUS
5058. Bent, Newell. American polo. New York,
Macmillan, 1929. xxix, 407 p. illus.
29-16932 GV1011.B4
Polo originated in medieval Persia, and was intro-
duced into America, via British India and England,
by the younger James Gordon Bennett in 1876. The
leading club, the Meadow Brook Club of Nassau
County, Long Island, was incorporated in 1881 by
August Belmont, Jr., and others. Although it pene-
trated the U.S. Army, and international matches
with England have been played since 1886, it has
remained a preserve of "Society" and of wealth, with
a very limited popular following. Mr. Bent also
tells how polo ponies are bred, gives hints for
beginners, and calls the roll of leading American
performers.
5059. Best, Katharine, and Katharine Hillyer. Las
Vegas, playtovvn U. S. A. New York, Mc-
Kay, 1955. 178 p. 56-1202 F849.L35B4
A study of Las Vegas, Nevada, the flashy gam-
bling center of America. Since this "recreation" is
696 I
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
legal in Nevada, the state has become a focal point
for many gambling activities which are prohibited
in other states of the Union.
5060. Fleischer, Nathaniel S. From Milo to
Londos; the story of wresding through the
ages, by Nat Fleischer. New York, C. J. O'Brien,
1936. 330 p. illus. (The Ring athletic library,
book no. 13) 37-910 GV1195.F5
The author gets from Milo of Croton to George
Washington in one chapter, and a second takes him
to William Muldoon (1845-1933), "the Solid Man"
(as Ned Harrigan dubbed him in a popular song)
and likewise "the Father of American Wresding."
Thereafter we proceed match by match and play by
play ("every time Gotch tried to turn he was brought
back by the crotch") to Frank Gotch, to Frank
Hackenschmidt, to Strangler Lewis (who perfected
the head lock), to Stanislaus Zbyszko, to Jim
Londos, and then to chaos. There is a wealth of
terrifying illustrations.
5061. GrifSn, Marcus. Fall guys, the Barnums of
bounce; the inside story of the wresding busi-
ness, America's most profitable and best organized
professional sport. Chicago, Reilly & Lee, 1937.
215 p. 37~58o7 GV1195.G75
A journalistic narrative of wresding, "America's
most popular and best organized sport," from the
days of "the peerless champion," Frank Gotch, who
won the tide in 1904 and retired undefeated in 1912,
to the accession of Dean Dutton to a disputed
championship in 1936. The author notes the scan-
dals which increasingly cast shadows over the game
and points out that, while wresders are very well
paid ("raw-boned country bumpkins who are pos-
sessed of incomes of from twenty-five to thirty
thousand dollars yearly [1937]")* they run great
risks and usually leave the ring with severe physical
disabilities. The book of course does not reach the
latter days of wrestling buffoonery on TV.
5062. Jay, John C. Skiing the Americas; with
photographs by the author. New York,
Macmillan, 1947. 257 p. illus.
48-5053 GV854.J35
Mr. Jay, skier, ski expert, ski cinematographer, ski
lecturer, and ski enthusiast, answers the questions
which his audiences had been putting to him for
ten years past in this very informal but pleasant
book, which describes the ski resorts of the East, the
Midwest, the Rocky Mountain West, and the Pacific
Northwest, and points out the skiing available
during the several seasons of the year. The author
credits the beginning of organized skiing in Amer-
ica to a Dartmouth undergraduate, Fred Harris,
who founded the Dartmouth Outing Club in 1910;
but it was not until the Olympic Winter Games of
1932 at Lake Placid that the sport began to snowball
here. An attractive chapter describes Mr. Jay's
"dream trip" as escort for the Chilean Ski Team,
visiting in two months every big ski resort in the
United States.
5063. Lester, John A., ed. A century of Phila-
delphia cricket. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 195 1. 397 p. illus.
51-12299 GV913.L4
Cricket was once a fairly popular game in some
parts of America, but has gone into a period of
decline. This book traces its rise and subsequent
decline in a leading city where it has now ceased to
be an important social force.
5064. Longstreth, Thomas Morris. The Catskills.
New York, Century, 1918. 321 p. illus.,
map. 18-19146 F127.C3L8
T. Morris Longstreth in this record of a hiking
and camping trip through the Catskills provides an
example of a common American pastime (hiking
and studying nature — in the backyard by the hour,
or in the country by the day and week) and at the
same time gives a good view of life in these moun-
tains. A similar book is his The Adirondack
(New York, Century, 1917. 370 p.).
D. General Field Sports
5065. Brown, J. Hammond, ed. Outdoors unlim-
ited; a collection of stories and ardcles which
reflect the current American scene of the recreational
outdoors. Sponsored by the Outdoor Writers Asso-
ciation of America. New York, Barnes, 1947.
xiv, 343 p. Agr 47-272 SK33.B85
The emphasis in this book is on the various aspects
of hunting and fishing in present-day America.
There are, however, a few stories which reflect the
"recreational outdoors" as a communing with nature
for its own sake.
5066. Buckingham, Nash. De shootinest gent'-
man, and other tales. New York, Putnam
[ci934, 1943] 222 p. illus.
43-4482 SK33.B89 1943
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 697
Buckingham (b. 1880) is one of the foremost
American authors in the field of hunting and fish-
ing literature. A number of his works were first
published during the 1930's in de luxe, limited edi-
tions; trade editions of these appeared in the 1940's.
His writings take the form of sketches, short stories,
essays, and reminiscences, but they are regularly
based on personal experiences. The setting is often
Southern, and the period covered ranges as far
back as the late 19th century. Some of his earlier
books are probably among his best known. Later
books include Ole Miss' (New York, Putnam, 1946.
178 p.), Blood Lines (New York, Putnam, 1947.
192 p.), and Hallowed Years (Harrisburg, Pa.,
Stackpole, 1953. 209 p.). Much of his work first
appeared in field sports periodicals.
5067. Buckingham, Nash. Mark right! Tales of
shooting and fishing. New York, Putnam
[ci936, 1944] 196 p. illus.
44-3008 SK33.B885 1944
5068. Buckingham, Nash. Tattered coat. New
York, Putnam, 1944. xiv, 210 p. illus.
45-248 SK33.B893
5069. Buckingham, Nash. Game bag; tales of
shooting and fishing. New York, Putnam,
1945. xv, 185 p. illus.
Agr 46-152 SK33.B883 1945
5070. Cook, Beatrice G. Till fish us do part; the
confessions of a fisherman's wife. New
York, Morrow, 1949. 249 p.
Agr 49-412 SH441.C598 1949
The wife of a doctor-fisherman reports experiences
while fishing in coastal and inland waters of Wash-
ington state. Her approach is humorous and per-
sonal; but she does manage to convey not only
an impression of fishing as a recreation, but also of
life in an American family. A later book of the same
type by her is More Fish to Fry (New York, Mor-
row, 1951. 280 p.).
5071. Field and stream. Field & stream treasury;
memorable articles and stories selected from
the pages of America's number one sportsman's
magazine. Edited by Hugh Grey and Ross Mc-
Cluskey. Illustrated with original photographs,
drawings, advertisements, and covers from the sixty-
year file of the magazine. New York, Holt, 1955.
351 p. 55-10675 SK33.F383
A selection of material from a magazine whose
history goes back to 1895. The work is meant to
constitute "a sort of informal running history of
hunting and fishing over the last 75 or 100 years."
An earlier anthology from this periodical is The
Field and Stream Game Bag (Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. 306 p.), edited by Robeson
Bailey.
5072. Goodspeed, Charles Eliot. Angling in
America; its early history and literature.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1939. xiii, 380 p. illus.
39-20033 SH463.G6
A well written and scholarly history of early
American fishing, starting with the fishing practices
of the Indians. A bibliographical checklist of Amer-
ican fishing publications to 1900 is included.
5073. Grey, Zane. Tales of swordfish and tuna.
New York, Harper, 1927. 203 p. illus.
27-20012 SH691.S8G7
Zane Grey was a most successful author of West-
ern romances; this aspect of his writing is discussed
in the Literature section (q. v.) of this bibliography.
In later life he wrote a number of autobiographical
works on his outdoor activities. Tales of Lonely
Trails (New York, Harper, 1922. 394 p.) was
largely an account of hunting, camping activities in
Arizona. His books on fishing include Tales of
Fishes (New York, Harper, 1919. 266 p.), Tales
of Fishing Virgin Seas (New York, Harper, 1925.
216 p.), and Tales of Southern Rivers (New York,
Harper, 1924. 249 p.). Most of these books were
heavily illustrated with photographs taken by the
author. An anthology selected from his fishing
writings is Zane Grey's Adventures in Fishing (New
York, Harper, 1952. 263 p.).
5074. Grey, Zane. Tales of fresh-water fishing.
New York, Harper, 1928. 227 p. illus.
28-20833 SH441.G6
5075. Heilner, Van Campen. Salt water fishing.
2d ed., rev. New York, Knopf, 1953. xviii,
330, xxiv p. illus. (Borzoi books for sportsmen)
51-11997 SH457.H43 1953
Bibliography: p. 329-330.
An earlier book of fishing experiences by Heilner
is Adventures in Angling; a Boof{ of Salt Water
Fishing (Cincinnati, Kidd, 1922. 233 p.).
5076. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's
Fish and fishing of the United States and
British provinces of North America. Illustrated
from nature, by Henry William Herbert. New ed.,
rev. and corr. with an ample supplement by the
author, together with a treatise on Fly-fishing, by
"Dinks" [pseud.] New York, Woodward, 1859.
xxiv, [i7J-5i2 p. 17-20300 SH441.H53 1859
First published, for copyright advantage, in Lon-
don in 1849; the first American edition appeared
in 1850.
431240—60-
-46
698 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Herbert (1807-1858) came to New York from
England in 1831. In this country he embarked on
a career as educator, editor, journalist, novelist,
artist, historian, poet, translator, and naturalist. Of
his "literary" accomplishments he was proud; but
his less favored sports writing he published under
the pseudonym of "Frank Forester." Today he is re-
membered almost exclusively for these works, which,
in their own category, have become classics. He
has been called the Shakespeare of sports writing
for his nostalgic picture of field sports (especially
hunting) in his day, and for his sports novels, which
also present a vivid picture of hunting as a recrea-
tion in the middle of the 19th century. The War-
wick Woodlands, or, Things as They Were There,
Ten Years Ago (Philadelphia, Zieber, 1845. 168 p.)
is his masterpiece and the work which has been
most reprinted in the ensuing years; a recent edi-
tion is cited below. A complete Life and Writings
of Fran\ Forester (New York, Orange Judd, 1882)
was undertaken, but was never carried beyond the
second volume.
5077. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's
[pseud.] fugitive sporting sketches; being
the miscellaneous articles upon sport and sporting,
originally published in the early American maga-
zines and periodicals. Edited with a memoir of
Herbert, and numerous explanatory notes, by Will
Wildwood [pseud, of Frederick E. Pond] Westfield,
Wis., 1879. 147 p. 12-22887 SK33.H54
Herbert's early book on hunting and the game
birds of North America was American Game in Its
Seasons, rev. ed. (New York, Woodward, 1873.
343 p.)., which was first published in 1853.
5078. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester's
horse and horsemanship of the United States
and British provinces of North America. Rev., com,
enl., and continued to 1871, by S. D. & B. G. Bruce.
New York, Woodward, 1871. 2 v. illus.
12-15989 SF283.H54
Added title-pages, engraved: The horse of
America . . .
This work was first published in two volumes in
1857 by Stringer and Townsend in New York.
5079. Herbert, Henry William. Frank Forester
[pseud.] on upland shooting; edited, and
with supplementary chapters, by Arthur] R. Bever-
ley-Giddings. New York, Morrow, 1951. 276 p.
illus. 51-7267 SK324.U6H4
A selection of chapters from The Complete Man-
ual for Young Sportsmen . . . (New York, Stringer
& Townsend, 1856. 480 p.) and Fran\ Forester's
Field Sports of the United States and British Prov-
inces of North America, 8th ed. [rev.] (New York,
Townsend, 1858. 2 v.), which was first published
in Great Britain in 1848 and in the United States
in 1849.
5080. Herbert, Henry William. [The sporting
novels of Frank Forester [pseud.] The Hitch-
cock ed.] New York, Derrydale Press, 1930. 4 v.
CtY
A modern, fine press reprint edition of 750 copies.
This corresponds to the earlier, typographically and
editorially poorer, "omnibus" edition of the same
works in Fran\ Forester's Sporting Scenes and
Characters (Philadelphia, Peterson, 1881. 2 v.).
Contents. — v. 1. The Warwick Woodlands
(1845). — v. 2. My Shooting Box (1843). — v. 3. The
Quorndon Hounds (1852). — v. 4. The Deerstalkers
(1843). Henry William Herbert, Frank Forester,
by Harry Worcester Smith.
5081. Holder, Charles Frederick. Big game at sea.
New York, Outing Pub. Co., 1908. xv,
352 p. illus. 8-9755 SH441.H73
The author discusses deep sea fishing, the game
fish, and his personal experiences. The chapters
originally appeared as articles in various periodicals.
5082. Holder, Charles Frederick. Life in the
open; sport with rod, gun, horse, and hound
in southern California. New York, Putnam, 1906.
xv, 401 p. illus., 66 plates. 6-12862 SK55.H72
An account of some of the author's hunting and
fishing experiences.
5083. Holder, Charles Frederick. The log of a
sea angler; sport and adventures in many
seas with spear and rod. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1906. 385 p. 6-8761 SH441.H75
Considered by some to be one of the truly out-
standing books in the literature of angling. The
first 12 chapters are drawn from the author's "ex-
periences during a continuous residence of five or
six years, winter and summer, on the extreme
southwestern portion of the Florida reef, where
Loggerhead looks into the west." Later chapters
describe fishing among the islands "strung along
the coast of Southern California, a chalice of emer-
alds in settings of silver," off Cape Cod, and for
tarpon near the mouth of the Rio Grande.
5084. Holder, Charles Frederick. Recreations of
a sportsman on the Pacific coast. New York,
Putnam, 1910. 399 p. illus.
10-11406 SH473.H75
The author recounts deep-sea and inland fishing
experiences.
SPORTS AND RECREATION / 699
5085. Lytle, John Horace. "Point!" [by] Horace
Lytle. Harrisburg, Pa., Stackpole, 1954.
232 p. illus. 54-12762 SK17.L9A3
An autobiographical work by an Ohio hunter and
hunting-dog fancier; the book is largely an account
of his experiences with his dogs.
5086. Prime, William C. I go a-fishing, by W. C.
Prime. New York, Harper, 1873. 365 p.
12-21568 SH441.P95 1873
Prime (1825- 1905) was a meditative New York
lawyer and scholar who loved to wander among
northeastern hills while fishing or hunting, or just
walking. His books include Along New England
Roads (New York, Harper, 1892. 200 p.) and
Among the Northern Hills (New York, Harper,
1895. 209 p.).
5087. Rutledge, Archibald H. Wild life of the
South. New York, Frederick A. Stokes,
IQ35- 253 p. illus. 3&-VP9* QH81.R9783
Archibald Rudedge (b. 1883) comes from a low
country area, formerly a rice plantation, in South
Carolina; this he usually uses as a setting for his
writings. Some of his best work is that of a nature
lover and hunter describing his hunting experiences
and the woods and swamplands, with much atten-
tion given to the animals inhabiting them; these
books include Plantation Game Trails (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1921. 300 p.), Days Off in Dixie
(Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1924. 298
p.), and Children of Swamp and Wood (Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page, 1927. 280 p.).
Further aspects of life on his plantation are treated
in the short stories of Old Plantation Days (New
York, Stokes, 1921. 344 p.) and the somewhat
sentimental Peace in the Heart (Garden City, N. Y.,
Doubleday, Doran, 1930. 316 p.). Home by the
River (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1941. 167 p.)
records Rudedge 's experiences and observations at,
as well as some of the historical background of, the
family plantation at Hampton, S. C. Rudedge has
also written much conservative poetry, a recent
volume of selections being Brimming Tide, and
Other Poems ([Westwood, N. J.] Revell, 1954.
160 p.).
5088. Rutledge, Archibald H. An American
hunter. New York, Stokes, 1937. 461 p.
illus. 37-33916 SK33.R77
5089. Rutledge, Archibald H. Hunter's choice.
New York, Barnes, 1946. 210 p. illus.
Agr 47-163 SK33.R78 1946
5090. Rutledge, Archibald H. Those were the
days. Richmond, Dietz Press, 1955. 462 p.
56-707 SK33.R85
An autobiographical book emphasizing the
author's hunting and fishing experiences early in the
20th century.
5091. Sandys, Edwyn. Sporting Sketches. New
York, Macmillan, 1905. 389 p. illus.
5-29978 SK31.S3
Sketches of hunting and fishing at the turn of the
century; many of the articles first appeared in Out-
ing. Another book by Sandys recording much per-
sonal experience is Upland Game Birds (New York,
Macmillan, 1902. 429 p.); to this T. S. Van Dyke
(q. v.) contributed a short concluding section on
"The Quail and the Grouse of the Pacific Coast."
5092. Schaldach, William J. Coverts and casts;
field sports and angling in words and pic-
tures. New York, Barnes, 1943. 138 p. illus.
43-18352 SK33.S35
5093. Schaldach, William J. Currents & eddies;
chips from the log of an artist-angler. New
York, Barnes, 1944. 138 p. illus.
Agr 45-101 SH441.S35
Both books are mainly a presentation of auto-
biographical anecdotes about the pleasures of fish-
ing. Schaldach, long associated with Field and
Stream, was both an artist and a writer, as well as
an outdoors sportsman. His work dealt with the
hunting and fishing that fascinated him.
5094. Smith, Onnie Warren. Musings of an ang-
ler, by O. Warren Smith. New York,
Barnes, 1942. xv, 187 p. illus.
42-10914 SH441.S65
Smith (1872-1941) was fishing editor of Out-
doors. A conscious follower of Walton and Prime,
he did not "merely fish for fish"; his writings were
an attempt to present the "aesthetic" rather than the
scientific and technical aspects of fishing.
5095. Van Dyke, Henry. Little rivers. A book of
essays in profitable idleness. New York,
Scribner, 1895. 291 p. illus.
14-1080 PS3117.L5 1895
5096. Van Dyke, Henry. Fisherman's luck and
some other uncertain things. New York,
Scribner, 1899. 247 p. illus.
99-5146 PS3117.F5 1899
Van Dyke was a clergyman, and later a professor
at Princeton University. His many books, which
were popular in his own day, included Victorian
verse and criticism, travel books, and volumes of
700 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
essays, such as Days Off, and Other Digressions
(New York, Scribner, 1907. 322 p.). Because of
his interest in Europe and his wide travels, his books
are seldom exclusively American in subject matter;
but they do reflect the relative commonplace of the
much-traveled American of the late 19th and early
20th centuries. The first book entered above views
rivers mainly as places for fishing.
5097. Wylie, Philip. Denizens of the deep; true
tales of deep-sea fishing. New York, Rine-
hart, 1953. 222 p. 53—9238 SH457.W88
Stories of deep-sea fishing and fish by a forceful
author who has devoted much of his time to the
sport of fishing. He is widely known for his popu-
lar novels which are discussed in the Literature sec-
tion of this bibliography.
XXI
Education
4
A.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
General Worlds
Ai. Historical and Descriptive
Aii. Philosophical and Theoretical
Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. General and Historical Worlds
Bii. Preschool and Primary Grades
Biii. Secondary Schools
Colleges and Universities
Ci. General and Historical Worlds
Cii. Individual Institutions
Education of Special Groups
Teachers and Teaching
Methods and Techniques
Contemporary Problems and Controversies
Periodicals and Yearbooks
5098-5 i 14
51 15-5130
5 13 1-5 146
5147-515 1
5 152-5 159
5 1 60-5 1 90
5 19 1-5204
5205-5212
5213-5223
5224-5231
5232-5239
5240-5249
IT HAS been said truly that education is an essential part of the lifeblood of a democracy.
Without its benefits citizens cannot participate usefully in the duties and responsibilities
that devolve upon them under this form of government; nor can competent leaders of the
people be developed without the wisdom and understanding that characterize the properly
informed and educated mind. Throughout the course of the country's history the American
people have proved their acceptance of such ideas by developing various types of schools,
colleges, and universities, as the need for them has
been understood.
One result of this continuing national interest in
education is an enormous body of literature that has
been produced at an increasing rate, with the passage
of the years and the growth of the population to be
educated. Such a mass of material on the subject
poses a difficult problem of selection within the
proper compass of a guide. The aim, therefore, in
assembling the references that follow has been neces-
sarily only to illustrate typical categories under which
the subject may be studied and to provide general
orientation rather than inclusive treatment of any
topic.
To the student of American civilization who is
interested in education only as a facet of the whole
culture, Section A is particularly addressed. It
should be noted here that a number of tides included
in Section Aii, such as nos. 51 16 and 5121, are
actually histories of educational philosophy or edu-
cational theory, and therefore might, with equal
justification, have been placed in Section Ai. Sec-
tions B and C are designed to serve as an introduc-
tion to the principal types of educational institutions
developed in the United States, while Section D indi-
cates selected cases in which specialized education is
provided either within or without the bounds of the
more traditional institutions. The opportunities and
experiences of the teacher in American society are
briefly touched upon in Section E.
A population growing as rapidly as that of the
701
702 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
United States, and also one increasingly aware of the
many benefits of education, has contributed to
greatly increased enrollments in and demands upon
all types of educational institutions. Overcrowding,
inadequate financial resources, and the requirements
of students drawn from groups lacking homogene-
ous experience and training are among the un-
fortunate effects of this otherwise desirable influx.
In order to meet resulting problems, traditional
theories and practices have been reviewed, and, in
many cases, principally on the elementary and sec-
ondary school levels, revolutionary innovations in
methods and techniques have been introduced. An
unusual number of textbooks in which these newer
concepts are embodied are therefore included in this
list, to serve as primary sources for the study of
controversial as well as traditional ideas presendy
at work. Sections F and G focus attention upon
these aspects of the contemporary American scene.
Section H provides a brief list of periodicals and
yearbooks which may be used for keeping abreast
of American education as it develops currently and
in the future.
Throughout the list entries have been annotated
to indicate additional sources of bibliographical guid-
ance contained within individual volumes. It is
hoped that in this way the serious student may be
aided in extending his exploration of the relation of
education to the development of American civili-
zation.
A. General Works
Ai. HISTORICAL AND DESCRIPTIVE
5098. Alexander, Carter, and Arvid J. Burke.
How to locate educational information and
data; an aid to quick utilization of the literature of
education. 3d ed., rev. and enl. New York, Bu-
reau of Publications, Teachers College, Columbia
University, 1950. xix, 441 p.
50-7005 Z711.A37 1950
Includes bibliographies.
Manual, which may also be used as a textbook,
designed for students desiring to explore the litera-
ture of education through the use of library collec-
tions and reference books.
5099. Allen, Hollis P. The Federal Government
and education. New York, McGraw-Hill,
1950. xvii, 333 p. (McGraw-Hill series in edu-
cation) 50-6536 LC89.A6
The original and complete study of education in
the United States, on all levels from primary to
graduate, made by the task force on public welfare
for the Commission on Organization of the Execu-
tive Branch of the Government, popularly known
as the Hoover Commission, the object being to deter-
mine the proper role of government in education.
Dawson W. Hales' Federal Control of Public Edu-
cation (New York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers
College, Columbia University, 1954. 144 p.) re-
considers the principle of local control of public
education in the light of forces now at work in
contemporary American life and culture.
5100. American Council of Learned Societies.
Liberal educadon reexamined; its role in a
democracy. New York, Harper, 1943. xiv, 134 p.
43-51269 LC189.A512
A preliminary draft was issued in 1940 under
tide: Liberal Education and Democracy.
Bibliography: p. 121-134.
Report of a committee appointed in 1940 by the
American Council of Learned Societies to investi-
gate recent educational trends in the humanities
and to consider the causes responsible for them on
all levels of school and university; prepared under
the direction of the chairman, Theodore M. Greene,
professor of philosophy, at Princeton and later at
Yale University. Liberal Education Reconsidered
(Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 46
p.) is Professor Greene's Inglis Lecture at Harvard
(1952) on desirable goals for liberal education and
methods of achieving them.
5101. Burns, James A. The Catholic school sys-
tem in the United States; its principles,
origin, and establishment. New York, Benziger,
1908. 415 p. 8-18343 LC501.B7
Bibliography: p. [387H99.
Covers the history of the Catholic school and col-
lege movement from its beginning in colonial times
through the year 1840; addressed to all students of
education, whether Catholic or non-Catholic.
5102. Burns, James A. The growth and develop-
ment of the Catholic school system in the
United States. New York, Benziger, 1912. 421 p.
12-22334 LC501.B72
Bibliography: p. 382-390.
Continuation of the author's earlier work, with
emphasis on improvement and development; written
by a former president of the theological school of the
Congregation of the Holy Cross, Holy Cross College,
Washington, D. C.
EDUCATION / 703
5103. Butts, R. Freeman. The American tradition
in religion and education. Boston, Beacon
Press, 1950. xiv, 230 p. (Beacon Press studies in
freedom and power) 50-7586 BR516.B85
Bibliographical references to books and docu-
ments included in "Notes": p. 213-224.
Supplies a historical perspective on the struggle for
the separation of church and state in America.
Fundamental principles of secular education are also
reviewed and appraised in Vivian T. Thayer's The
Attach Upon the American Secular School (Boston,
Beacon Press, 1951. 257 p.). Church, State, and
Freedom, by Leo Pfeffer (Boston, Beacon Press,
1953. 675 p.), examines the implications and con-
sequences of religious freedom for which the Con-
stitution of the United States provides, giving much
attention to the impact of the doctrine on American
education. An encyclopedic work on all aspects of
the relation of church and state in America, includ-
ing educational aspects of the problems involved, is
provided in Anson Phelps Stokes' Church and State
in the United States (q. v.).
5 104. Butts, R. Freeman, and Lawrence A. Cremin.
A history of education in American culture.
New York, Holt, 1953. 628 p.
52-13892 LA205.B88
Deals with the interrelation of American culture,
intellectual development, and education during four
periods: Colonial, pre-Civil War, post-Civil War,
and post-World War I; suggests applications to be
made to contemporary educational problems; and
documents each chapter by means of bibliographical
references at the end. The authors are members of
the faculty of Teachers College, Columbia
University.
Harold O. Rugg's Foundations for American Edu-
cation ( Yonkers-on-Hudson, N. Y., World Book Co.,
1947. 826 p.) is a strongly individual and personal
book that ranges freely over American life, culture,
psychological theories, and modern educational
movements, progressive as well as traditional.
5105. Douglass, Aubrey A. The American school
system. Rev. ed. New York, Farrar &
Rinehart, 1940. xviii, 745 p. (Farrar & Rinehart
series in education) 40-12406 LA210.D6 1940
Bibliography at end of each chapter.
Surveys the system of education that operates in
the United States on various levels from kinder-
garten to graduate school; additional chapters deal
with questions related to adult, rural, and vocational
education, the instructional staff, finances, etc.
5106. Educational Policies Commission. Policies
for education in American democracy.
Washington, Educational Policies Commission, Na-
tional Education Association of the United States
and the American Association of School Admin-
istrators, 1946. 277 p. 46-3664 LA210.E464
The Commission acknowledges indebtedness to
Charles A. Beard for preparing the first draft of
Book I, The Unique Function of Education in Amer-
ican Democracy ( 1937); to Dr. George S. Counts for
aid in the preparation of Book II, The Education
of Free Men in American Democracy (1941); and
to Dr. William G. Carr for contributing to the com-
position of Book III, The Purposes of Education in
American Democracy (1938). Three publications
influential on American educational thinking here
reprinted in their essential parts in response to nu-
merous requests. Cf. Foreword.
The Educational Policies Commission, a commis-
sion of the National Education Association of the
United States and the American Association of
School Administrators, has issued various other pub-
lications that treat of education in relation to Amer-
ican civilization. These include: Learning the Ways
of Democracy (1940. 486 p.); Moral and Spiritual
Values in the Public Schools (1951. 100 p.); Edu-
cation for All American Youth, rev. ed. (1952.
402 p.); and Public Education and the Future of
America (1955. 98 p.).
5107. General education in school and college; a
committee report by members of the faculties
of Andover, Exeter, Lawrenceville, Harvard, Prince-
ton, and Yale. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1952. 142 p. 52-13591 LB2350.G45
"The broad purpose of this study is to integrate
the work of the school and college in the area of
general education. More precisely, it is to plan the
last two years of secondary school and the first two
years of college as a continuous process, conceived
as a whole." — Chapter 1, "Main Objectives," p. 8.
5108. Knight, Edgar W. Education in the United
States. 3d rev. ed. Boston, Ginn, 1951.
753 p. 51-10341 LA205.K6 1951
Covers all periods from the beginning to the mid-
dle of the 20th century and provides a general
bibliography supplemented by suggested readings
listed at the ends of chapters; written by the Kenan
Professor of Education at the University of North
Carolina, whose various works on American educa-
tion include: Readings in American Educational
History (New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1951.
781 p.), a documentary source book for all periods,
edited jointly with Clifton L. Hall; Fifty Years of
American Education (New York, Ronald Press,
1952. 484 p.), a review and appraisal of education
from 1900 to 1950; and A Documentary History of
Education in the South before i860 (Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1949-53. 5 v«)>
704 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
a compilation designed to gather and preserve
original sources for definitive studies.
5109. Lee, Gordon C. An introduction to educa-
tion in modern America. New York, Holt,
IQ53- .555 P-. 52-11594 LA209.2.L43
Bibliographical references are supplied at the ends
of chapters.
Textbook on education as a social institution, for
students contemplating a career in teaching;
designed also as a guide for the layman seeking an
introduction to American education in the context of
contemporary world conditions; written by an as-
sociate professor of education on the faculty of
Pomona College, California.
51 10. Monroe, Paul, ed. A cyclopedia of educa-
tion. New York, Macmillan, 1911-13. 5 V.
illus. 11-1511 LB15.M6
Reprint. New York, Macmillan,
1914-15. 5 v. illus. 39-19604 LB15.M6 1914
Reprint. New York, Macmillan,
1926-28 [v. 1-2, 1928] 5 v. in 3. illus.
30—33076 LB15.M6 1928
Much out of date at the present time but still his-
torically important for its bibliographies and for
authoritative signed articles by more than 1,000
specialists who contributed to it; world-wide in
scope, with special emphasis on American education.
51 1 1. Monroe, Walter S., ed. Encyclopedia of
educational research, a project of the Ameri-
can Educational Research Association. Rev. ed.
New York, Macmillan, 1950. xxvi, 1520 p.
50-5222 LB15.M62 1950
Differs from the typical encyclopedia in that it is
composed of reviews, evaluations, and syntheses of
the literature of educational research. Includes use-
ful signed articles by specialists, fairly extensive se-
lective bibliographies, and indications of additional
research that should be undertaken. For a current
guide to similar research, see the Review of Educa-
tional Research, described in Section H below,
devoted to Periodicals and Yearbooks.
5112. Patterson's American education, v. 52.
Willmette, 111., Educational Directories, 1955.
652, 72 p. 4~I2953 L9oi.P3,v.52
Published 1904 through 1953 as Patterson's Amer-
ican Educational Directory; guide to the location
and composition of schools, colleges, and universities.
Highly condensed entries also provide names of
administrators, officials of boards of education, li-
brarians, and others engaged in educational work in
America. Several supplementary lists include names
of public libraries, names of educational associations
and societies, and a classified directory of institutions
according to their fields of specialization. Con-
tinued by the publication of an annual volume.
51 13. Slosson, Edwin E. The American spirit in
education. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1921. 309 p. (The Chronicles of America
series, Allen Johnson, editor, v. 33)
21-14875 LA205.S6
E173.C55, v. 33
"Abraham Lincoln edition."
"Bibliographical note": p. 287-290.
Compact historical survey of education from the
colonial period through World War I; emphasizes
early education given in different sections and the
continuing influence of statesmen and educators who
contributed to the theory and practice of education
in America; includes a chapter on colonial colleges
and one on the [Morrill] Land Grant Act.
51 14. U. S. Office of Education. Biennial survey
of education in the United States, 1916/18 +
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1921 +
E2 1-504 LA209.A37
Issued first as separate chapters and reissued bi-
ennially as a survey. Constitutes a repository of
statistics, accompanied by summaries, relating to
various phases of state and city school systems, higher
education, public secondary day schools, and special
education for exceptional children. From 1916/ 18
to 1940 the publication appeared as part of the
Bulletin of the United States Office of Education.
Aii. PHILOSOPHICAL AND THEORETICAL
51 15. Babbitt, Irving. Literature and the Ameri-
can college; essays in defense of the humani-
ties. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1908. 262 p.
8-8540 LC1011.B2
Partial Contents. — What is humanism? — The
college and the democratic spirit. — Literature and
the college. — Literature and the doctor's degree. —
The rational study of the classics. — Academic leisure.
Document of the movement in American educa-
tion familiarly known as the "New Humanism";
written by its leading exponent, who opposed the
philological emphasis then current in American
literary scholarship and advocated a humanistic ap-
proach that brought together for study the great
ideas found in the content of philosophical as well
as literary works.
5 1 16. Curti, Merle E. The social ideas of Amer-
ican educators. New York, Scribner, 1935.
EDUCATION / 705
xxii, 613 p. (Report of the Commission on the So-
cial Studies, American Historical Association, pt. 10)
35-4578 LA2311.C8
"Bibliographical notes": p. 593-600.
Educators whose social ideas are considered in-
clude: Horace Mann, Henry Barnard, Booker T.
Washington, G. Stanley Hall, William James, Ed-
ward L. Thorndike, and John Dewey. The colo-
nial and Revolutionary backgrounds, the education
of women, the schools and business enterprise, edu-
cation in the South, and the education of Negroes
are among the topics developed.
51 17. Dewey, John. The school and society.
Rev. ed. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1945. 164 p. 15-18118 LB875.D4 1915
First published in 1899.
Lectures delivered to raise money for the Labora-
tory School (called also the "Dewey School") con-
ducted 1 896-1904 in the Department of Pedagogy
of the University of Chicago, for the purpose of
providing good elementary education and of adding
equipment to facilities for the study of education
comparable to those available in laboratories to
teachers of the physical sciences; inspired numerous
changes and reforms in the teaching of children in
widely separated parts of the world.
51 18. Dewey, John. Democracy and education;
an introduction to the philosophy of educa-
tion. New York, Macmillan, 1929. xii, 434 p.
(Textbook series in education)
30-10933 LB875.D35 1929
"Published March 1916. Reprinted . . . Janu-
ary 1929."
Represents "an endeavor to detect and state the
ideas implied in a democratic society and to apply
these ideas to the problems of the enterprise of
education." — Preface, p. v.
51 19. Dewey, John. Experience and education.
New York, Macmillan, 1938. xii, 116 p.
(The Kappa Delta Pi lecture series [no. 10] )
38-8618 LB875.D3943
Written a number of years after the first formu-
lation of the author's theories of education, the book
may be used to discover differences existing between
Dewey's own ideas and the deductions drawn from
them by some of those who sought to apply them.
5120. Dewey, John. Education today. Edited
and with a foreword by Joseph Ratner. New
York, Putnam, 1940. 373 p.
40-31507 LB875.D39
Collection of the author's briefer writings dealing
with his philosophy of education during more than
40 years. John Dewey, His Contribution to the
American Tradition, edited by Irwin Edman (In-
dianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 322 p.), provides
another more general collection of selections from
the enormous body of Dewey's writings. Melvin C.
Baker's Foundations of John Dewey's Educational
Theory (New York, King's Crown Press, Columbia
University, 1955. 218 p.) not only reviews Dewey's
educational thought but also considers misunder-
standings of it.
5121. Hansen, Allen O. Liberalism and Ameri-
can education in the eighteenth century.
With an introd. by Edward H. Reisner. New York,
Macmillan, 1926. xxv, 317 p.
26-18069 LA206.H3
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Univer-
sity.
Bibliography: p. 265-296.
Designed "to be both an exposition of sources and
a source book," the work presents analyses of vari-
ous plans for education in 18th-century America,
including those of Benjamin Rush, Robert Coram,
James Sullivan, Nathaniel Chipman, Samuel Knox,
Samuel H. Smith, Lafitte du Courteil, Du Pont de
Nemours, and Noah Webster; concludes with a
summary of elements in the philosophical basis for
the education of the period. A contribution to the
history of education in the 19th century is made by
the author's Early Educational Leadership in the
Ohio Valley (Bloomington, 111., Public School Pub.
Co., 1923. 120 p.), a study of educational recon-
struction through the work of the Western Literary
Institute and College of Professional Teachers, 1829-
1841.
5122. Honeywell, Roy J. The educational work
of Thomas Jefferson. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 193 1. xvi, 295 p. (Harvard
studies in education, v. 16) 31-11362 E332.H77
Authorities and sources: p. 174-197.
Bibliography: p. 289-295.
Views Jefferson's proposals for primary, second-
ary, and higher education as parts of his larger
plans for political and social reform; emphasizes
their importance because of the wide dissemination
of Jefferson's ideas; reproduces the texts of his
famous educational documents, among them "A
Bill for the More General Diffusion of Knowledge";
"A Bill for Establishing a System of Public Educa-
tion"; "Report of the Commissioners Appointed to
Fix the Site of the University of Virginia"; and "Or-
ganization and Government of the University of
Virginia." Charles F. Arrowood's Thomas Jeffer-
son and Education in a Republic (New York, Me
Graw-Hill, 1930. 184 p.) also reprints a number of
Jefferson's writings on education preceded by .1
yo6 I A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
briefer introduction on his services to public educa-
tion in Virginia and on his theory of education.
5123. James, William. Talks to teachers on psy-
chology. New ed. with an introd. by John
Dewey and William H. Kilpatrick. New York,
Holt, 1938. xv, 238 p.
39-27497 LB1051.J34 1939
American educational and literary classic, in
which James presented to the teachers of his own
time, for use in the schools of that day, ideas con-
cerning applications of his own psychological
theories. First published in 1899.
5124. Kallen, Horace M. The education of free
men. New York, Farrar, Straus, 1949.
xix, 332 p. 49-49023 LB875.K16
Called by the author "an essay towards a
philosophy of education for Americans," the work is
based on years of inquiry and is dedicated to the
ideal of making American schools effective agencies
for developing and preserving the freedoms
promised in the Declaration of Independence.
5125. [Mann, Horace. Public education in Mas-
sachusetts] In Massachusetts. Board of
Education. Report, together with the report of the
secretary of the board. ist-i2th. Boston, Dutton &
Wentworth, State Printers, 1838-49. [Washington,
1947-52] 12 v. 53-18466 L160.B18
Facsimile edition of Mann's reports while secre-
tary of the Massachusetts Board of Education, made
possible through a cooperative arrangement between
the Horace Mann League and the Hugh Birch-
Horace Mann Fund of the National Education
Association.
Famous documentary source for evaluating
Mann's contribution to public education in Amer-
ica; may be used to advantage with Burke A. Hins-
dale's Horace Mann and the Common School
Revival in the United States (New York, Scribner,
1898. 326 p. [Also published in 1937]). Louise
Hall Tharp's Until Victory: Horace Mann and Mary
Peabody (Boston, Little, Brown, 1953. 367 p.) is a
lively narrative of Mann's public and private life,
including his presidency of Antioch College. Ed-
ward I. F. Williams' Horace Mann, Educational
Statesman (New York, Macmillan, 1937. 367 p.)
emphasizes, against the social background of Mann's
own time, his importance in the development of a
democratic America, for the benefit of teachers, ad-
ministrators, parents, and the general public.
5126. Mosier, Richard D. Making the American
mind; social and moral ideas in the McGuf-
fey readers. New York, King's Crown Press, 1947.
207 p. 47-5812 PE1117.M23M6
Bibliography: p. [i79]-204.
Studies the basic ideas and values embodied in
materials found in the McGuffey readers, the spread
of these concepts by means of these textbooks, and
the effects on American culture, from 1836 to about
1900, that may be attributable to wide familiarity
with the readers.
5127. Shoemaker, Ervin C. Noah Webster, pio-
neer of learning. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1936. 347 p.
36-22936 PE64.W5S5 1936a
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia University.
Bibliography: p. [3I7J-33I.
Assesses Webster's general connection with Amer-
ican education and particularly the great influence
exerted on the teaching of reading and the develop-
ment of American English by his American Spelling
Boo\, first issued in 1783 as part one of his A Gram-
matical Institute ( 1783-85). The spelling book was
republished in successive editions that resulted, ac-
cording to various estimates, in the circulation of
between 62 and 80 million copies before 1889.
Harry R. Warfel's Noah Webster: Schoolmaster to
America (New York, Macmillan, 1936. 460 p.)
emphasizes Webster's importance for the study of
early national culture. The Letters of Noah Web-
ster (New York, Library Publishers, 1953. 562 p.)
have been edited with an introduction by Warfel.
5128. Thursfield, Richard E. Henry Barnard's
American journal of education. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1945. 359 p. (The Johns
Hopkins University studies in historical and political
science, ser. 63, no. 1 )
A46-2670 H31.J6, ser. 63, no. 1
L11A715 1945a
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni-
versity.
"Bibliographical note": p. 327-329.
"The present investigation attempts to portray
the tremendous contributions [of the journal pub-
lished from 1855 to 1882] ... in the development
of a profession, in the transmission of educational
ideas from Europe, in expanding and shaping the
eclectic structure of American education, in con-
tinuing and modifying the American educational
tradition, and in effecting social change." — Preface,
p. 7.
5129. Whitehead, Alfred N. The aims of educa-
tion. New York, Macmillan, 1929. 247 p.
29-10164 LB875.W48
Collected educational essays and addresses of one
of the most eminent philosophers and mathemati-
cians of recent times; designed as a protest against
teaching and learning inert ideas, i. e., those received
but not tested or acted upon. Provides also a series
EDUCATION / 707
of proposals concerning the use of education to
stimulate and guide the student's own self-develop-
ment. Discussion is based on English educational
practices, but the author considered his general prin-
ciples equally applicable in America. A book seri-
ously considered by American educators.
5130. Woody, Thomas, ed. Educational views of
Benjamin Franklin. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1931. xvi, 270 p. (McGraw-Hill education
classics) 31-12966 LB575.F72W6
Discusses the origin and influence of Franklin's
ideas on education. Includes reprints of various
papers he wrote on the subject, as for example:
"idea of the English School"; "Proposals Relating
to the Education of Youth in Pennsylvania"; and
"Constitution of the Public Academy in the City of
Philadelphia." Benjamin Franklin and the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania (Washington, Govt. Print.
Off., 1893. 450 p.), edited by Francis N. Thorpe
for the United States Bureau of Education, is a study
of Franklin's influence on university education.
B. Primary and Secondary Schools
Bi. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS
5131. Aikin, Wilford M. The story of the eight-
year study, with conclusions and recom-
mendations. New York, Harper, 1942. 157 p.
( [Progressive Education Association. Commission
on the Relation of School and College] Adventure
in American education, v. 1)
42-36126 LB2350.A5
Half-tide: Progressive Education Association.
Publications . . •
Adventure in American Education (New York,
Harper, 1942-43. 5 v.), of which Aikin's work is
the summary in volume 1, gives results of an in-
vestigation of 30 secondary schools for the purpose
of achieving a better integration of training in school
and college; undertakes also to determine the rela-
tive success in college of students trained in pro-
gressive and in traditional schools. The larger work
has been called "the most elaborate investigation
ever made of transition from school to college," a
contribution of the Commission on the Relation of
School and College, of the American Education
Fellowship, a name once used by the Progressive
Education Association.
5132. Beale, Howard K. Are American teachers
free? New York, Scribner, 1936. xxiv,
855 p. (Report of the Commission on the social
studies, American Historical Association, pt. 12)
36-30655 LA210.B4
Bibliography: p. 793-800.
5133. Beale, Howard K. A history of freedom of
teaching in American schools. New York,
Scribner, 1941. xviii, 343 p. (Report of the Com-
mission on the Social Studies, American Historical
Association, pt. 16) 41-5920 LB1775.B4
Bibliography: p. 291-298.
The foregoing entries describe two companion
studies that deal with academic freedom below the
college level. The earlier book resulted from a de-
tailed investigation of freedom in teaching after
World War I; the later publication traces the de-
velopment of freedom for teachers from colonial to
contemporary times. In each case obstacles to such
freedom also are emphasized. For references con-
cerning academic freedom in higher education see
entries for a book by Richard Hofstadter and Walter
P. Metzger, with its companion volume by Robert
M. Maclver, both cited in Section Ci., devoted to
Colleges and Universities — General Works.
5134. Conant, James B. Education in a divided
world; the function of the public schools in
our unique society. Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1948. x, 249 p. 48-8522 LA209.2.C6
Examination of public education in the structure
of American society; emphasizes the citizen's obli-
gation to know the schools in action and to consider
the teacher's potential contribution to the welfare
of the nation. Includes three chapters on general
education. One of the author's many educational
contributions while he was president of Harvard
University ( 1933-53 )•
A later work, Education and Liberty; the Role of
the Schools in a Modern Democracy (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1953. 168 p.), is focused
on education of boys and girls from 12 to 20 years
of age through a comparison of such education in
the United States with that of several nations in the
British Commonwealth; includes a chapter on the
American college.
5135. Council of State Governments. The forty-
eight State school systems. Chicago, 1949.
245 p. 49-45258 LB2805.C66
Report of a study made at the request of the Gov-
708 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ernors' Conference; deals with the organization, ad-
ministration, and financing of public elementary and
secondary education. Similar aspects of higher edu-
cation are treated in a report to the Governors' Con-
ference entitled Higher Education in the Forty-
Eight States (Chicago, 1952. 317 p.).
5136. Counts, George S. Education and Ameri-
can civilization. New York, Bureau of
Publications, Teachers College, Columbia Univer-
sity, 1952. xii, 491 p. 52-9979 LA210.C63
Includes bibliographical footnotes.
Based on research initiated by the staff of the
Horace Mann-Lincoln Institute School of Experi-
mentation, established at Columbia University in
1943; develops fundamental ideas of the American
social heritage, the hazards implicit in totalitarian
states for democratic societies, and the type of edu-
cation that may help to combat tendencies dangerous
for a free people; a work which has been called
"essentially a study of the social, cultural, and moral
foundations of the program and curriculum of our
American common schools." — Preface, p. ix.
5137. Cremin, Lawrence A. The American com-
mon school. New York, Bureau of Publi-
cations, Teachers College, Columbia University,
1951. xi, 248 p. (Teachers College studies in
education) 51-10599 LA215.C7
Bibliography: p. 222-241.
The origins of American political, social, and
educational ideas, their impact on one another, and
the developments that resulted in the evolution of
the public school are considered from the colonial
period to the middle of the 19th century.
5138. Cubberley, Ellwood P. Public education in
the United States, a study and interpretation
of American educational history. Rev. and enl. ed.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1934. xviii, 782 p. illus.
(Riverside textbooks in education)
34-2426 LA205.C8 1934
Bibliographies at end of each chapter.
Traces evolution of public education in relation
to social, political, and industrial forces that shaped
American life through the 19th century and the be-
ginning of the 20th. A special feature of the work
is the evaluative annotations supplied with numer-
ous selected references at the ends of chapters. His
Readings in Public Education (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1934. 534 p.) reprints laws and other
documents signficant in American educational
history.
5139. Edwards, Newton. The courts and the
public schools. Rev. ed. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1955. xvii, 622 p.
55-5122 Law
Views the maintenance and operation of the
school system as one of the major public enterprises
of the United States; therefore, the legal principles
that govern the actions of school boards, superin-
tendents of schools, principals, and teachers are
discussed and documented by numerous legal refer-
ences to specific cases tried in the courts. The book
is an outgrowth of a course in the legal and consti-
tutional basis of school administration, given for a
number of years by the author at the University of
Chicago.
5140. Edwards, Newton, and Herman G. Richey.
The school in the American social order.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 880 p.
47-435.1 LA205.E3
Education in American schools is related to
the civilization of which the schools are a product
and a part, in three periods of American social
development: the colonial, the national to i860, and
the industrial, from i860 to 1945. A selected bibli-
ography follows each of the 20 chapters.
5141. Hales, Dawson W. Federal control of pub-
lic education; a critical appraisal. New
York, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College,
Columbia University, 1954. xiii, 144 p. (Teachers
College studies in education) 54-7225 LC89.H22
Based on the author's thesis, Columbia University,
published in microfilm form under title: The Rise
of Federal Control in American Education.
Bibliography: p. 125-135.
Traces local, state, and federal control of educa-
tion in relation to the history of public education in
the United States, from 1830 to the present time.
5142. Herrick, Virgil E., and others. The ele-
mentary school. Englewood Cliffs, N. J.,
Prentice-Hall, 1956. 474 p. 56-9212 LB1555.H46
"This book has five major purposes: (1) to help
the reader appreciate the historical breadth and con-
tinuity of elementary school development in Amer-
ica and to perceive pertinent European influences;
(2) to present the reader with the concept of the
elementary school as a responsible, dynamic agency,
educating children in a demanding and complex
American society; (3) to reveal the nature and use of
the important bases upon which decisions in educa-
tion are made; (4) to examine and critically analyze
present elementary school practices as they now exist
in the different kinds of school programs and in the
many important curriculum areas; and (5) to con-
sider as honestly and constructively as possible what
this analysis means for the future." — Preface.
5143. Monroe, Paul. Founding of the American
public school system; a history of education
EDUCATION / 709
in the United States, from the early settlements to
the close of the Civil War period, v. 1. New York,
Macmillan, 1940. xiv, 520 p. illus.
40-27340 LA212.M63
Dr. Monroe, professor of education at Columbia
and Barnard and "the dean of American writers in
the field of educational history," died in 1947 with-
out carrying his story beyond i860. His first chapter
describes the European backgrounds of the Ameri-
can development, and emphasizes its vocational as
well as its religious origins. His narrative docs not
attempt a comprehensive social and intellectual
synthesis, but limits itself to "the more commonplace
idea of education as a school process," relating, how-
ever, this development to dominant political and
economic forces. For both the colonial and the early
national periods, the material is presented under the
categories of primary, secondary, and higher educa-
tion. The volume is largely based upon a fresh body
of primary source material, selections from which,
confined to Massachusetts, New York, and Virginia,
are contained in a microfilm supplement of Read-
ings, reproduced from the author's manuscript and
deposited in selected libraries.
5144. Mort, Paul R., and Walter C. Reusser. Pub-
lic school finance: its background, structure,
and operation. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill,
1951. xxii, 639 p. (McGraw-Hill series in educa-
tion) 51-5276 LB2825.M598 1951
Contains bibliographies and technical exercises.
Includes three books and four supplements. Rook
I emphasizes current fiscal problems "that harass
schools and threaten indirectly to bring about un-
wanted structural changes"; Book II reflects recent
changes on the operational side and deals with
budgetary and auditing matters; Book III spells out
the pressing problems of state and Federal fiscal
policy; part of the contents of the first edition are
covered in the four supplements. Cf. Preface to
the second edition, p. ix. Much the same ground
is covered in Arvid J. Burke's Financing Public
Schools in the United States (New York, Harper,
1951. 584 p.).
5145. Page, Walter Hines. The school that built
a town; with an introductory chapter by Roy
E. Larsen. New York, Harper, 1952. 109 p.
52-8488 F215.P13 1952
Three essays, originally published under the title
The Rebuilding of Old Commonwealths, which in-
clude: The Forgotten Man (1897) ; The School That
Built a Town (1901); and The Rebuilding of Old
Commonwealths (1902).
Classic statement of the case for public education,
particularly in the southern United States, by a no-
table journalist and diplomat who received his own
education (through undergraduate college) in south-
ern institutions.
5146. Warner, William L., Robert J. Havighurst,
and Martin B. Loeb. Who shall be edu-
cated? The challenge of unequal opportunities.
New York, Harper, 1944. xii, 190 p. illus.
44-4389 LA210.W33
Bibliographical references included in footnotes
(p. 175-179); Working bibliography: p. 181-186.
Two scholars from the University of Chicago and
a third from the University of California at Berkeley,
representing respectively the fields of anthropology
and sociology, education, and child welfare, present
the effects of class differences and "caste" systems
operating against the use of education in public
schools to realize the democratic ideal of equal op-
portunity for all members of American society; de-
picts conditions before 1945.
Bii. PRESCHOOL AND PRIMARY GRADES
5147. Caswell, Hollis L., and A. Wellesley Foshay.
Education in the elementary school. 2d ed.
New York, American Book Co., 1950. xvii, 406 p.
(American education series)
50-13041 LB1555.C35 1950
Presents the elementary school as the central unit
in American education from nursery through pro-
fessional school; reviews developments that have
now culminated after half a century and recognizes
contributions made by experimental work in this
field. Supplementary readings are suggested after
chapters; general references are supplied at the con-
clusion of the work, p. 391-392. The first of the
two authors is president of Teachers College, Co-
lumbia University, and the second is a professor and
director of educational research at Ohio State
University.
5148. Gans, Roma, Celia Burns Stcndler, and
Millie Almy. Teaching young children in
nursery school, kindergarten, and the primary
grades. Yonkers-on-Hudson, N. Y., World Book
Co., 1952. 454 p. (New-World education SCJ
52-1768 LB1140.G26
Covers the education of children between the ages
of four and nine; written by three university pro-
fessors working in the field, in nontechnical lan-
guage for the use of parents, administrative officers
of schools, nurses, social workers, and teachers.
5149. Gcsell, Arnold L.. and Frances I.. Dg. Child
development, an introduction to the study of
human growth. New York, Harper. [949.
in 1 (403, 475 p.) illus. 49-50170 1.1-72 1 .( >477
710 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Each volume previously published separately.
Includes bibliographies.
Contents. — i. Infant and child in the culture of
today ( 1943). — 2. The child from five to ten ( 1946).
Studies of the understanding, guidance, and psy-
chological care of children in a democratic society;
used extensively by American parents and teachers.
This edition includes the complete text of both
earlier volumes, together with an added Foreword
by Dr. Gesell, entitled "Child Development and the
Science of Man." Dr. Gesell was for many years
professor of child hygiene at the Yale School of
Medicine. His own researches and those of Dr. Ilg
while both were associated in the Clinic of Child
Development at Yale provide the basis for much of
the two studies.
5150. National Society for the Study of Education.
Committee on Early Childhood Education.
Early childhood education. Edited by Nelson B.
Henry. Chicago, National Society for the Study of
Education; distributed by the University of Chicago
Press, 1947. xii, 390 p. (National Society for the
Study of Education. Yearbook, 46th, pt. 2)
6-16938 LB5.N25, 46th yearbook, pt. 2
Composed of a series of articles by individual
specialists or groups of specialists; concerned par-
ticularly with the sociological background of pri-
mary education, with child development, and with
progress and application of knowledge in this branch
of education; includes numerous lists of books
recommended for reading.
5 15 1. Otto, Henry J. Elementary -school organiza-
tion and administration. 3d ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1954. 719 p.
54-5214 LB2805.O76 1954
The author, graduate professor of elementary ad-
ministration and curriculum, University of Texas,
addresses his book to administrators of and teachers
in American elementary schools; a historical and
statistical study of fundamental aspects of this seg-
ment of education; extensively documented by means
of numerous footnotes.
not been superseded; written by a former United
States Commissioner of Education.
5153. Chisholm, Leslie L. The work of the
modern high school. New York, Macmillan,
1953. 542 p. 53~I883 LB1607.C47
Written to develop a clear understanding of each
part of the modern secondary school in the United
States, the work is divided into four parts: (1) the
place of education in American life; (2) the content
of what should be taught; (3) the program that is
in harmony with the needs of youth today; and
(4) the plan of action that may be followed in build-
ing a good educational program. References to per-
tinent publications are provided at the end of each
chapter except the last.
5154. Douglass, Harl R. Modern administration
of secondary schools; a revision and extension
of Organization and administration of secondary
schools. Boston, Ginn, 1954. 601 p.
54-9748 LB2822.D6 1954
Designed as a textbook for college and university
classes and as a handbook for professional workers
in the field of secondary education; written by the
director of the College of Education, University of
Colorado.
5155. Heely, Allan V. Why the private school?
New York, Harper, 195 1. 208 p.
51-3394 LC47.H4
Analysis of the functions proper to the independ-
ent, nondenominational private school in American
democratic society, its curriculum and methods of
teaching, problems of ethical and religious training,
and other miscellaneous questions; written by the
headmaster of Lawrenceville School, Lawrenceville,
New Jersey. Roland J. Mulford's History of the
Lawrenceville School, 1810-1935 (Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 1935. 358 p.) describes the
evolution of this preparatory institution for boys
during its existence of nearly 150 years, first as a
small academy, nonconformist and middle-class in
its sympathies, and currendy as a notable private
school.
Biii. SECONDARY SCHOOLS
5152. Brown, Elmer E. The making of our mid-
dle schools; an account of the development
of secondary education in the United States. New
York, Longmans, Green, 1903. xii, 547 p.
3-1867 LA222.B87
Bibliography: p. [48i]~5i8.
Bibliographical notes at end of chapters.
Classic expression of educational thought and his-
tory at the beginning of the 20th century which has
5156. Keller, Franklin J. The comprehensive
high school. New York, Harper, 1955.
302 p. 54-12239 LB1607.K37
Bibliography: p. 287-290.
Considers the scope of various high schools and
their accomplishments in relation to the definition
of a comprehensive high school as one that "com-
bines all the best features of an academic high school
and a vocational high school, and therefore serves
the needs of all youth in the community"; based on
a survey involving a study of the literature, inquiries
EDUCATION / 7II
addressed to 2,220 educators, and field trips to visit
some 77 schools. Favorable presentation of the case
for vocational education, by the principal (1955) of
the Metropolitan Vocational High School of New
York City.
5157. Koos, Leonard V. Junior high school trends.
New York, Harper, 1955. 171 p. (Explora-
tion series in education) 55-6777 LB1623.K63
Review of the history, aims, and development of
the junior high school as part of American education
during a period of some fifty years; written by an
authority on the subject who, after a long profes-
sorial career at the Universities of Minnesota and
Chicago, in 1946 became director of research for the
American Association of Junior Colleges. An an-
notated bibliography is supplied (p. 145-165) and
documentation by means of bibliographic footnotes
is given throughout.
5158. Leonard, John P. Developing the secondary
school curriculum. Rev. ed. New York,
Rinehart, 1953. 582 p.
52-14016 LB1628.L4 1953
Provides a background of social, political, indus-
trial, and agrarian developments that affected chang-
ing educational ideas and theories, particularly as
these have been reflected in repeated revisions of
curriculums; traces recent developments in detail,
e. g., core courses and unit instruction; copiously
documented by footnotes referring to reports of im-
portant committees and commissions as well as to
other official and unofficial publications. Other
studies that may be compared with this are Funda-
mentals of Curriculum Development, by B. Othanel
Smith, William O. Stanley, and J. Harlan Shores
(Yonkers-on-Hudson, World Book Co., 1950. 780
p.) ; Reorganizing the High-School Curriculum, rev.
ed. by Harold B. Alberty (New York, Macmillan,
1953. 560 p.); and Stephen Romines' Building the
High School Curriculum (New York, Ronald Press,
1954. 520 p.). Developing a Curriculum for Mod-
ern Living, by Florence B. Stratemeyer and others
(New York, Teachers College, Columbia Univer-
sity, 1947. 558 p.), makes detailed recommenda-
tions resulting from a cooperative investigation of
the type of curricular development thought suited
to modern elementary and secondary schools.
5159. Miller, George F. The academy system of
the state of New York. Albany, J. B. Lyon,
1922. 181 p. 23-4874 LA337.M5
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1916.
Bibliography: p. 179-180.
The American academy prepared the way for the
high school, which finally superseded it. Histori-
cally, academies in the United States occupied an
important place in the transition from colonial edu-
cation to that of the late 19th century. The fore-
going study of the system in New York is illustra-
tive of its wider use in America for a hundred years
following 1787.
C. Colleges and Universities
Ci. GENERAL AND HISTORICAL WORKS
5160. American Council on Education. Coopera-
tive Study of Evaluation in General Educa-
tion. General education: explorations in evaluation;
the final report. Paul L. Dressel, director; Lewis
B. Mayhew, assistant director. Washington, Amer-
ican Council on Education, 1954. xxiii, 302 p.
54-11007 LC1011.A6
Nineteen universities and colleges, widely sepa-
rated as to type and locality, cooperated in the study,
in an effort to determine the status and effectiveness
of programs in "general education," offered in the
institutions of the United States. The movement in
favor of such education has been variously defined,
but may be said to represent substantially a reaction
against overspecialization, too free an election of
unrelated subjects, narrowness in technical and pro-
fessional preparation for vocational purposes, and
the failure of American education adequately to
stress the attainment of learning that should be the
common experience of all educated men and
women.
5161. American universities and colleges. 7th ed.,
1956. Mary Irwin, editor. Washington,
American Council on Education, 1956. 1223 p.
28-5598 LA226.A65 1956
Reference work providing information chiefly in
the following categories: statement concerning ac-
crediting, requirements for admission, degrees
granted, administrative and teaching staff, library,
finances, brief historical details.
5162. Bogue, Jesse P. The community college.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. xxi, 390 p.
(McGraw-Hill series in education)
50-8962 LB2329.B6
712 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bibliographical footnotes.
Covers philosophies, functions, history, contribu-
tions, organization, and administration of junior
colleges designed to provide education suited to in-
dividual communities; written by the executive sec-
retary of the American Association of Junior
Colleges.
5163. Commission on Financing Higher Educa-
tion. [Reports and publications] New
York, Columbia University Press for the Commis-
sion on Financing Higher Education, 1951-53. 12 v.
Dramatic increase in enrollment, declining income
of private institutions, overcrowding, and increased
costs experienced by state and private universities,
caused grave anxiety during the past decade. The
Association of American Universities therefore re-
quested the Carnegie Corporation of New York
and the Rockefeller Foundation to underwrite the
Commission on Financing Higher Education, to
study and report upon all phases of the problems in-
volved. The reports and other monographic pub-
lications of the Commission are described in the
following items.
5164. Allen, Harry K. State public finance and
State institutions of higher education in the
United States. 1952. 196 p.
52-12300 LB2342.A4
5165. Axt, Richard G. The Federal Government
and financing higher education. 1952.
295 p. 52-i4740 LC173.A97
5166. Current operating expenditures and income
of higher education in the United States,
1930, 1940, and 1950; a staff technical paper, com-
piled by William V. Campbell [and others] 1952.
xvii, 97 p. (chiefly tables)
52-14777 LB2342.C66
5167. Government assistance to universities in
Great Britain; memoranda submitted by
Harold W. Dodds [and others] 1952. x, 133 p.
52-8830 LB2901.C6
5168. Higher education and American business.
^S2- 37 P- 53-3OI5 LB2336.C6
5169. Hofstadter, Richard, and C. De Witt Hardy.
The development and scope of higher educa-
tion in the United States. 1952. x, 254 p.
52-14741 LA226.H55
Bibliographical footnotes.
5170. Hollinshead, Byron S., and Robert R.
Rodgers. Who should go to college? With
a chapter on the role of motivation in attendance at
post-high-school educational institutions. 1952.
xvi, 190 p. 52-14133 LB2351.H64
Bibliographical references included in "Selections
from the Literature" (p. [ 166]— 184).
5 1 71. Millett, John D., ed. An adas of higher
education in the United States; the geo-
graphical distribution of accredited four-year col-
leges, universities, and technical schools in 1950.
!952. [57] P- maps-
Map 52-909 G1201.E6M5 1952
5172. Millet, John D. Financing higher education
in the United States; the staff report of the
Commission on Financing Higher Education.
1952. xix, 503 p. diagrs., tables.
52-14622 LB2342.M48.
Bibliographical footnotes.
5173. Nature and needs of higher education; the
report of the Commission on Financing
Higher Education. 1952. xi, 191 p.
52-14642 LB2321.C54
5174. Ostheimer, Richard H. A statistical analysis
of the organization of higher education in
the United States, 1948-1949. 1951. xviii, 233 p.
tables. 51-14360 LA266.O75
5175. Ostheimer, Richard H. Student charges
and financing higher education. 1953. xix,
217 p. diagrs., tables. 53-10191 LB2342.O8
Bibliographical footnotes.
5176. Coulter, Ellis M. College life in the Old
South. [2d ed.] Athens, University of
Georgia Press, 195 1. 320 p. illus.
51-7109 LD1983.C6 1951
Bibliography: p. 299-305.
Considering the evolution of the University of
Georgia typical in its region, a professor in the his-
tory department of that institution has analyzed its
history and development from the turn of the 18th
century to the immediate aftermath of the Civil
War, in order to show the effects of higher education
on the privileged class in the South of that day.
First issued in 1928 and now reissued with minor
changes and corrections.
5177. Earnest, Ernest P. Academic procession; an
informal history of the American college,
1636 to 1953. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1953.
368 p. 53-9859 LA229.E17
Briefly examines major forces that have operated
in American higher education and the extent to
which individual institutions have fitted their stu-
EDUCATION / 713
dents to live and work in the society that produced
them. Numerous references to literary, historical,
and educational sources are supplied in "Notes," p.
341-359. Dr. Earnest is chairman of the depart-
ment of English, Temple University.
5178. Five college plans: Columbia [by] Dean
Herbert E. Hawkes; Harvard [by] Dean A.
Chester Hanford; Swarthmore [by] President
Frank Aydelotte; Wabash [by] President Louis B.
Hopkins; Chicago [by] Dean Chauncey S. Boucher;
with an introd. by John J. Coss. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1931. 115 p.
32-1980 LB2341.F5
Lectures describing new educational programs
designed to improve curriculums in five representa-
tive colleges after World War I; objectives of the
changes include providing for individual differ-
ences in students and the creation of superior insti-
tutions flexible enough to serve the requirements of
life in the postwar world.
5179. Flexner, Abraham. Universities, American,
English, German. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1930. 381 p. 30-32829 LA183.F6
The longest part of the book consists of a drastic
criticism of American universities on the score of
disproportionate emphasis on vocational courses,
mass-production methods, and intellectual stand-
ards alleged to be far below those of English and
German universities. Valuable as a provocation to
discussion and review of problems, the book has
been considered by various critics to be neither dis-
passionate nor the source of balanced evidence con-
cerning conditions in many institutions. The
author, a distinguished educational figure, was for
nine years director of the Institute of Advanced
Study, Princeton.
5180. Harvard University. Committee on the
Objectives of a General Education in a Free
Society. General education in a free society. With
an introd. by James Bryant Conant. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1945. xix, 267 p.
A45-4180 LA210.H4 1945a
Report of an analysis of the curriculum of Har-
vard University and an inquiry into the problems
and desiderata of general education not only at Har-
vard but in American schools and colleges through-
out the country; one of the numerous studies made
by committees in various institutions with the aim
of improving education after World War II.
5 1 81. Hofstadter, Richard, and Walter P. Metzger.
The development of academic freedom in
the United States. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1955. xvi, 527 p. 55_ 9435 LA205.H55
Prepared for the American Academic Freedom
Project at Columbia University, directed by Robert
M. Maclver.
Bibliographical footnotes.
Contents. — The age of the college, by R. Hof-
stadter.— The age of the university, by W. P.
Metzger..
Historical study primarily of academic freedom of
faculty members in American colleges and uni-
versities, from the beginning of these institutions to
the recent past. Provides the backgrounds of re-
ligious, intellectual, and political issues involved;
explores also a variety of other related topics, such
as academic government, professional organizations
of academic men, the rise of Darwinism in Ameri-
can thought, and the relation between big business
and academic freedom. The authors are members
of the faculty of Columbia University. Their book
should be read with its companion volume, Robert
M. Maclver's Academic Freedom in Our Time
(q.v.).
5182. The Idea and practice of general education.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1950.
333 p. 50-12496 LD906.5.I3
An account of the progress made during nearly
twenty years in developing an academic program at
the College of the University of Chicago; written
by present and former members of the faculty as a
contribution to the exchange and communication of
ideas concerning new forms of undergraduate edu-
cation in America.
5183. Kelly, Robert L. The American colleges
and the social order. New York, Macmillan,
1940. 380 p. 40_335°7 LA225.K4
"References and notes": p. 347-369.
Historical study of American higher education
and particularly of the liberal arts colleges from
colonial to recent times, with special emphasis on
the relations of such colleges to the society of which
they have been a significant part.
5184. McDowell, Tremaine. American studies.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1948. 96 p. 48"9983 LB2321.M33
Contents. — 1. Time and the colleges. — 2. General
education. — 3. American studies. — 4. Curriculums
in American studies. — 5. American courses. —
6. The Minnesota program. — 7. Region, nation,
world.
". . . based chiefly on firsthand observations of
procedures in more than thirty colleges and universi-
ties"; immediately descriptive of specific programs
in American Studies, but ultimately concerned "with
the broad pattern of higher education in the United
States." — Foreword.
714 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The author has been chairman of the Program in
American Studies at the University of Minnesota
since 1945.
5185. Maclver, Robert M. Academic freedom in
our time. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1955. xiv, 329 p. 55-9094 LB2332.M28
Bibliography: p. [305] -320.
Prepared for the American Academic Freedom
Project at Columbia University, directed by the
author, formerly Lieber Professor of Political
Philosophy and Sociology at Columbia University.
After defining academic freedom, Maclver devotes
the principal sections of his work to the following
topics: the recent climate of opinion concerning free-
dom in the United States; academic government in
relation to academic freedom; freedom required by
the student and the teacher; and the university and
the social order. The book emphasizes an analysis
of the contemporary situation in the United States,
problems that are present, and the significance of this
type of freedom in the life of the nation. The gen-
eral theme of the volume and its companion work,
Hofstadter and Metzger's The Development of
Academic Freedom in the United States (q. v.) is
that of the Bicentennial of Columbia University:
"Man's right to knowledge and the free use thereof."
5186. Ross, Charles D. Democracy's college; the
land-grant movement in the formative stage.
Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1942. 267 p.
42-11686 LA226.R65
Notes and references: p. 183-229.
Introductory and selective bibliography: p. 231-
254.
Historical study of the meaning of the land-grant
college in American educational development after
Abraham Lincoln in 1862 signed the Morrill Act
appropriating great areas of public land for the es-
tablishment in every state of a college for the people
"to promote the liberal and practical education of the
industrial classes in the several pursuits and profes-
sions of life." For current achievement in 1930 see
a Survey of Land-Grant Colleges and Universities,
directed by Arthur J. Klein for the United States
Office of Education (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1930. 2 v.).
More recently, the Association of Land-Grant
Colleges and Universities has published Some Edu-
cational Questions Confronting the Association . . .
(Washington, 1948. 52 p.), which is a manual of
inquiry into considerations suggested by the report
of the President's Commission on Higher Education
(q. v. under U. S. below).
5187. Smith, Huston. The purposes of higher
education. Foreword by Arthur H. Comp-
ton. New York, Harper, 1955. 218 p.
55-6970 LB2321.S57
Presents a moderate position with respect to vari-
ous opposing ideas in American higher education.
These include freedom versus authority, egoism
versus altruism, and the individual versus the state.
Considers the aims of liberal education with refer-
ence to knowledge, abilities, appreciations, and
motivations. Based on deliberations conducted for
18 months by a faculty committee charged with
studying the curriculum of Washington University,
St. Louis, and with formulating a statement of the
objectives of liberal education to be used as a basis
for curriculum development.
5188. Thwing, Charles F. A history of higher
education in America. New York, Apple-
ton, 1906. xiii, 501 p. 6-35963 LA226.T56
Although written half a century ago, this com-
parative study of numerous institutions remains a
contribution to American cultural and educational
history, by virtue of its vigorous portrayal of per-
sons, conditions, and events that shaped the found-
ing and development of American colleges and
universities.
5189. U. S. President's Commission on Higher Ed-
ucation. Higher education for American
democracy, a report. Washington, U. S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1947. 6 v. illus.
48-50042 LA226.A48
George F. Zook, chairman.
Contents. — v. 1. Establishing the goals. — v. 2.
Equalizing and expanding individual opportu-
nity.— v. 3. Organizing higher education. — v. 4.
Staffing higher education. — v. 5. Financing higher
education. — v. 6. Resource data.
Embodies the results of a study made by the com-
mission established in July 1946, by President Harry
S. Truman, to seek a comprehensive view of higher
education in the United States, and to assess present
problems and future requirements. Among the
latter the commission oudined federal financial
assistance on a large scale if the basic aim were to be
achieved of providing equal opportunities for higher
education to all qualified persons. The character
of the debate over the report may be learned from
Gail Kennedy's Education for Democracy (Boston,
Heath, 1952. 117 p. Problems in American
civilization, readings selected by the Department
of American Studies, Amherst College.
LA226.A485K4).
5190. Veblen,Thorstein. The higher learning in
America. Introd. by David Riesman. Stan-
EDUCATION / 715
ford, Calif., Academic Reprints, 1954 [ci9i8] xx,
286 p. (American culture and economics series,
no. 3) 54-7096 LA226.V3 1954
First published in 19 18, the work constituted a
scathing attack on the conduct of universities by
governing boards and officials dominated by the con-
cepts of businessmen, to the great detriment of an
honest search for knowledge. David Riesman, in-
troducing the present edition, comments: "Though
the details of the Veblen legend may be in error, he
is surely, for those contributions, entitled to his place
in the history of intellectual freedom."
Cii. INDIVIDUAL INSTITUTIONS
5191. Becker, Carl L. Cornell University; found-
ers and the founding. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell
University Press, 1943. 240 p.
44-195 LD1369.B4
Series of lectures tracing the English influence on
early classical education in America; the develop-
ment of interest in scientific research and in train-
ing for agriculture and the mechanic arts as related
to the Morrill Land-Grant College Act of 1862;
and the founding of institutions such as Cornell.
Texts of various documentary sources are provided,
p. 139-190; a bibliography is supplied, p. 207-215;
and references and notes are listed, p. 219-240.
Cornell as part of American social history after
the Civil War is portrayed in Walter P. Rogers'
Andrew D. White and the Modern University
(Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell University Press, 1942.
259 p.).
5192. Cheyney, Edward P. History of the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, 1740-1940. Phila-
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1940.
x, 461 p. 40-32494 LD4528.C45
"The printed and manuscript material used in the
preparation of this volume and all other known ref-
erences to the history of the University have been
listed, and this list will be preserved in the Uni-
versity library in accessible form for the use of sub-
sequent investigators." — Preface.
5193. Cole, Arthur C. A hundred years of Mount
Holyoke College; the evolution of an educa-
tional ideal. Published for Mount Holyoke College.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 426 p.
40-27310 LD7093.C58
Reflects "the changing concepts in education and
in society throughout a century especially notable
for the widening of opportunities for women." —
Preface p. [iii]. Includes biographical essays on
Mary Lyon (1797-1849) and Mary E. Woolley
(1863-1947).
5194. Curti, Merle E., and Vernon R. Carstensen.
The University of Wisconsin; a history,
1 848-1925. Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 1949. 2 v. illus. 48-47638 LD6128.C8
Includes bibliographical footnotes and a bibliogra-
phical note, v. 2, p. 597-601.
Study of a state university, its origins, aims,
growth, financial support, faculty and administra-
tion, students, and finally its status in the first quar-
ter of the twentieth century; aims to relate the
development of this individual institution to the
social and intellectual movements of the Middle
West and of America as a whole. Published in com-
memoration of the hundredth anniversary of the
founding of the university.
5195. Flexner, Abraham. Daniel Coit Gilman.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1946. 173 p.
46-7929 LD2626 1876.F55
Bibliographical references included in "Acknowl-
edgments" (p. 165-166).
Develops the thesis that by the far-reaching in-
fluence of Gilman at Johns Hopkins a new type of
American institution was created, in which teaching
and research were combined and that this example
was followed until it became standard in the United
States; documented by quotations from Gilman's
works, such as University Problems in the United
States (New York, Century, 1898. 319 p.) and
The Launching of a University and Other Papers
(New York, Dodd, Mead, 1906. 386 p.).
5196. Henderson, Algo D., and Dorothy Hall.
Antioch College: its design for liberal edu-
cation. New York, Harper, 1946. xiv, 280 p.
47-97 LD171.A53H4
Account prepared under the direction of the
president of Antioch College, Yellow Springs, Ohio,
at the end of 25 years of experimentation with the
"Antioch Plan," a curriculum leading to the A. B.
and B. S. degrees; programs included in the plan
require 5 years for completion and combine 3 em-
phases: (1) liberal education; (2) experience as
workers off the campus; and (3) the development
of democratic group responsibility in college
government.
5197. A History of Columbia College on Morning-
side. New York, Columbia University Press,
1954. viii, 284 p. illus. (The Bicentennial history
of Columbia University) 54-8016 LD1248.H48
Bibliographical footnotes.
Contents. — The college: a memoir of forty years,
by I. Edman. — The Van Amringe and Keppel eras,
by L. Trilling. — Reconstruction in the liberal arts,
by J. Buchler. — "Most glad to teach," by C. W.
Everett. — After class, by F. W. Boardman, Jr. — The
yi6 J A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lion afield, by J. N. Arbolino. — The men from Morn-
ingside, by G. R. Hawes. — A liberal arts college in
a metropolitan university, by I. Edman.
5198. Jones, Barbara (Slatter) Bennington Col-
lege; the development of an educational idea.
New York, Harper, 1946. 239 p.
47-30081 LD725i.B4792y6
Covers the development of the educational pro-
gram of a "progressive" college for women during
the first 14 years of its life (1932-45) and oudines
the main departures from conventional educational
practices; originated in a series of research studies
subsidized by the Whitney and the Rockefeller
Foundations.
5199. Kennedy, Gail, ed. Education at Amherst:
the new program. New York, Harper, 1955.
330 p. _ 55-8552 LD153.K4
Documents the curricular revisions and innova-
tions undertaken by a traditional four-year liberal
arts college to meet the educational problems and
opportunities that developed in the United States,
particularly after World War II. Two reports com-
prise the major part of the book: that of the Faculty
Committee on Long Range Policy, from which de-
veloped the changes first put into effect in 1946-47;
and that of the Review Committee on the New Pro-
gram, which provides information on the results of
the changes as of 1954. For observations on earlier
offerings at Amherst see the following entry.
5200. Le Due, Thomas H. Piety and intellect at
Amherst College, 1865-1912. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1946. 165 p. (Colum-
bia studies in American culture, no. 16)
A46-2753 LD153.L4
"An earlier draft . . . was submitted to Yale
University ... for the doctoral degree [1943]." —
Preface.
Bibliography: p. [ 153]— 155.
Not designed as a comprehensive factual history
of events in the life of Amherst College, but rather
as a study of ideas current at the college and ex-
pressed in its curriculum and classes during the sec-
ond half of the 19th century; also explores the role
of a representative undergraduate college of that
time in the life of the community of which it was
a part, and thus relates it to the cultural history of
the United States. For contemporary offerings at
the college see the preceding entry under Gail
Kennedy.
5201. Michigan. University. The University of
Michigan, an encyclopedic survey. Wilfred
B. Shaw, editor, v. 1 + Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan, 1 941+ 42-36603 LD3278.A24
Presents a factual and historical study of a large
state university in its entirety: origin and growth,
administration, schools, departments, faculty, in-
struction, students, alumni, libraries, and museums;
includes frequent bibliographies that emphasize
references to official documents of the institution
and the state; a publication to be completed in 4
volumes and 9 parts.
A comparable study of a large metropolitan uni-
versity is The University of Chicago Survey (Chi-
cago, University of Chicago Press, 1933. 12 v.).
5202. Minnesota. University. Bureau of Institu-
tional Research. A university looks at its
program; the report of the University of Minnesota
Bureau of Institutional Research, 1942-1952. Ruth
E. Eckert and Robert J. Keller, editors. Minneapolis,
University of Minnesota Press, 1954. 223 p.
(Minnesota studies in higher education)
54-8209 LD3326.5.A47
Enrollment trends, curriculum development,
staff activities, and undergraduate and graduate in-
struction are among the- matters considered in 23
selected studies representing the university's continu-
ing program for studying its own procedures and
offerings.
5203. Morison, Samuel Eliot. Three centuries of
Harvard, 1636-1936. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1936. 512 p.
36-14160 LD2151.M65
Brief history of Harvard University. More de-
tailed treatment of different periods in the life of the
institution and of its relation to American culture
and education in a wider sense is found in the un-
completed Tercentennial History of Harvard College
and University, 1636-1936, which includes The
Founding of Harvard College ( 1935), Harvard Col-
lege in the Seventeenth Century (2 v., 1936), both
by Dr. Morison, and The Development of Harvard
University Since the Inauguration of President Eliot,
1869-1929 (1930), a cooperative volume edited by
him. Dr. Morison at the time of his recent retire-
ment was Jonathan Trumbull Professor of History
at Harvard University.
5204. Wertenbaker, Thomas J. Princeton, 1746-
1 896. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1946. 424 p. illus. A47-267 LD4609.W4
Bibliographcial footnotes.
Written by a senior professor of American history
at Princeton; reviews the institution's history, evalu-
ates the contribution of the original founders and
their successors, explains educational policies, re-
counts past services to the nation, and brings back
the student life of the past. Cf. Foreword, p. v.
EDUCATION / 717
D. Education of Special Groups
5205. American Association for Gifted Children.
The gifted child, edited by Paul Witty. Bos-
ton, Heath, 1951. xii, 338 p.
51-2586 LC3965.A6
Annotated bibliography on gifted children by
Elise H. Martens: p. [2jy]-^22.
Collection of nontechnical essays by specialists;
discusses the problems of the gifted child, factors
involved in identifying the gifted, the waste of talent
and leadership inherent in wrong methods of edu-
cation for this valuable segment of the population,
etc. A useful brief treatment of the same subject
is the Educational Policies Commission's Education
of the Gifted (Washington, 1950. 88 p.). A
progress report covering ten years of work in this
field at the Hunter College Elementary School is
provided in Educating Gifted Children, by G. H.
Hildreth and others (New York, Harper, 1952.
272 p.). Programs for gifted boys and girls applied
in a variety of schools, school systems, and projects
are summarized in A Survey of the Education of
Gifted Children, by Robert J. Havighurst and
others (Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1955.
114 p.), which includes an annotated bibliography,
p. 103-113.
5206. Ashmore, Harry S. The Negro and the
schools. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1954. 228 p. diagrs., tables.
54-10392 LC2801.A87
List of studies upon which the book is based:
p. 216-217; selected reading and research materials:
p. 218-220.
An objective appraisal of racial segregation and
other biracial aspects of the educational system in
the United States; written in summary by the di-
rector of a research project from data supplied by
a staff of 45 scholars, whose work was made pos-
sible by the Fund for the Advancement of Educa-
tion, with money supplied by the Ford Foundation.
The book was published before the United States
Supreme Court rendered its decision on May 17,
1954, declaring that segregation is a denial of the
equal protection of the laws and therefore is uncon-
stitutional. The same data formed the basis for a
volume about desegregation in some 24 communi-
ties, published as Schools in Transition, edited by
Robin M. Williams and Margery W. Ryan (Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1954.
272 p.). White and Negro Schools in the South;
an Analysis of Biracial Education was edited by
Truman M. Pierce, director of the Southern States
Cooperative Program in Educational Administra-
tion, and four coordinators in the program (Engle-
wood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1955. 338 p.).
The historical aspects of Negro education are pre-
sented in The Education of the Negro in the Amer-
ican Social Order, by Horace M. Bond (New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1934. 501 p.). A detailed study of
the problems and challenges of higher education in
this field is found in the National Survey of the
Higher Education of Negroes, by the United States
Office of Education (Washington, U. S. Govt. Print.
Off., 1942-43. 4 v.).
5207. Baker, Harry J. Introduction to exceptional
children. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan,
1953. 500 p. 53-8275 LC3965.B32 1953
Textbook for college and university students and
for the use of clinical and diagnostic agencies con-
cerned with children having physical, neurological,
mental, and other handicaps; includes brief sections
on children who learn rapidly and on the mentally
gifted child (p. 273-295); numerous references are
provided at the ends of all important parts of the
work; written by the director of the Psychological
Clinic, Detroit Public Schools. Additional refer-
ences for exploring the same and related problems
are Educating the Retarded Child, by Samuel A.
Kirk and G. Orville Johnson (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1951. 434 p.); Arch O. Heck's The Educa-
tion of Exceptional Children, 2d ed. (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1954. 513 p.); and John E. Wallace
Wallin's Education of Mentally Handicapped Chil-
dren (New York, Harper, 1955. 485 p.). A com-
pendium of essays and bibliographical suggestions
concerning many phases of this problem is found in
Special Education for the Exceptional (Boston, P.
Sargent, 1955. 2 v.), edited by Merle E. Frampton
and Elena D. Gall, which includes signed contribu-
tions by numerous specialists in work for students
suffering from special conditions of health, and other
physical or mental handicaps.
5208. Butterworth, Julian E., and Howard A. Daw-
son. The modern rural school; with chap-
ters by Stanley Warren [and others] New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1952. 494 p. (McGraw-Hill series
in education) 51-12592 LB1567.B865
Includes bibliographies, and a list of visual aids:
p. 47I-476-
Presents the social and economic bases of the
unique problems in the field of rural education; out-
lines a program for meeting the educational needs
of rural America and specifies requirements for
implementing that program. Dr. Butterworth is
7l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
professor emeritus of rural education at Cornell
University; Dr. Dawson is director of the Division
of Rural Service of the National Education
Association.
5209. Handbook of adult education in the United
States. [3d ed.] Mary L. Ely, editor.
New York, Institute of Adult Education, Teachers
College, Columbia University, 1948. 555 p.
34-27011 LC5251.H3 1948
Survey articles by specialists and a composite
record of activities that have as their purpose the
stimulation of adults to inform and educate them-
selves for the better performance of their functions
as human beings and as useful members of a demo-
cratic society; includes an extensive section on
programs carried on by groups and associations or-
ganized in the interest of adult education (p. 303-
514); a list of references suggested for supplementary
reading is also provided (p. [5i5]~528). Other
pertinent and more recent publications are Paul L.
Essert's Creative Leadership of Adult Education
(New York, Prentice-Hall, 195 1. 333 p.) and
Homer Kempfer's Adult Education (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1955. 433 p.).
5210. Kerrison, Irvine L. H. Workers' education
at the university level. New Brunswick,
N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1951. 177 p.
51-14 170 LC5051.K4
Bibliography: p. 146-155.
Report on the efforts, failures, and successes of
some fifty universities offering programs in workers'
education; provides a point of departure for the
development of labor-management education.
Education of workers in industry by means of
apprenticeship, day trade schools, part-time and
evening study, correspondence courses, and training
within industry are treated in Arthur B. Mays'
Essentials of Industrial Education (New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1952. 248 p.). Philip R. V. Curoe's
Educational Attitudes and Policies of Organized
Labor in the United States (New York, Teachers
College, Columbia University, 1926. 202 p.) is a
thesis which traces the relation of labor groups to
the development of public school education in
America from 1840 to 1925.
521 1. Prosser, Charles A., and Thomas H. Quigley.
Vocational education in a democracy. Rev.
ed. Chicago, American Technical Society, 1949.
575 p. 49-8838 LC1043.P8 1949
First edition by C. A. Prosser and C. R. Allen.
Emphasizes the social and economic needs for
vocational education of secondary grade, also the
schools, teachers, and facilities that will make the
programs effective; written by two specialists who
have been active for many years in this type of
educational work. A second study of the subject,
Vocational Education: America's Greatest Resource
(Chicago, American Technical Society, 1950.
387 p.), by John A. McCarthy, Assistant Commis-
sioner of Education in New Jersey, stresses the
relation of the Government of the United States to
vocational education and the legislation by which
Federal participadon may be implemented. A third
evaluation of this type of education, which institutes
comparisons with similar programs in other coun-
tries, is found in Alfred Kahler and Ernest Ham-
burger's Education for an Industrial Age (Ithaca,
Published for the Institute of World Affairs by
Cornell University Press, 1948. 334 p.).
5212. Woody, Thomas. A history of women's
education in the United States. New York,
Science Press, 1929. 2 v. illus. (Science and educa-
tion, edited by J. McKeen Cattell, v. 4, book 1-2)
30-1557 LC1752.W6
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 481-589.
Although written over 25 years ago this work has
never been superseded as the standard historical pre-
sentation of the subject. Of special value are the
documentation by references to abundant contem-
porary sources, the emphasis on social and institu-
tional changes, and the sections on academies, sem-
inaries, colleges, and professional education. In
1924 Dr. Woody became professor of education at
the University of Pennsylvania. An analysis of
contemporary problems and opportunities con-
nected with the education of women is found in
Educating Women for a Changing World (Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1954. 302
p.), by Kate (Hevner) Mueller, who has had rich
experience as a teacher and educational adminis-
trator.
Teachers and Teaching
5213. Barzun, Jacques. Teacher in America. Bos-
ton, Little, Brown, 1945. 321 p.
45-1580 LB2321.B258
Essays, frequently satiric and critical, concerning
the academic scene and intellectual life on American
campuses as known by the author, a professor at
Columbia University, who received his early educa-
tion in France.
EDUCATION / 719
5214. Chase, Mary Ellen. A goodly fellowship.
New York, Macmillan, 1939. 305 p.
39-27971 LA2317.C48A3
"This book is the story of a life spent in teaching
... a complement, perhaps a sequel, to A Goodly
Heritage written ten years ago." — Foreword. Miss
Chase, a writer on New England and other themes,
has been a professor of English literature at Smith
College since 1929.
5215. Cronkhite, Bernice (Brown) ed. A hand-
book for college teachers, an informal guide.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950. xi,
272 p. 50-7896 LB2321.C73
Bibliography: p. [26$]-26j.
Based on extracurricular lectures and discussions,
chiefly by distinguished educators, arranged by the
Radcliffe Graduate School for graduate students at
Harvard and Radcliffe who plan to become college
teachers. The topics developed include: relations
between teacher and student; varieties of teaching
methods applicable in the humanities, natural sci-
ences, and social sciences; visual and other aids to
teaching; effective methods of speech; professional
relations; research and publications; obtaining a
teaching position; and educational developments
and trends in relation to American society.
5216. Elsbree, Willard S. The American teacher.
New York, American Book Co., ci939.
566 p. 3>9-^2^ LB1775.E57
Includes suggested readings.
Tells of the evolution of the teaching profession
in American public schools during the past three
centuries. Staff Personnel in the Public Schools
(New York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 438 p.), writ-
ten jointly by Elsbree and E. E. Reutter, Jr., deals
with selection, certification, and in-service education
of teachers, as well as with other administrative mat-
ters affecting teachers.
5217. Fuess, Claude M. Creed of a schoolmaster.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1939. 195 p.
39-27185 LB1607.F8
Written after long association with an independ-
ent private school, the book indicates the general
course that the author considers right for modern
secondary education to follow; includes chapters on
"The Transition from School to College" and "The
Promise of Progressive Education." Dr. Fuess, who
was headmaster of Phillips Academy, Andover,
Massachusetts, from 1933 to 1947, has published a
later book of the same character, Independent
Schoolmaster (Boston, Little, Brown, 1952. 371 p.).
5218. Highet, Gilbert. The art of teaching. New
York, Knopf, 1950. xviii, 291 p.
50-9306 LB1025.H63 1950
Bibliographical references included in Notes:
p. 283-291.
Humanistic exposition of the art of teaching, the
methods to be used, the practices of great teachers
from antiquity to the early 20th century, and the
place of teaching in everyday life; written by the
Anthon Professor of Latin at Columbia University,
who was educated at Glasgow and Oxford Uni-
versities, and taught at the latter before coming to
this country.
5219. Johnson, Alvin S. Pioneer's progress, an
autobiography. New York, Viking Press,
1952. 413 p. 52-12704 H59.J6A3
Economist, editor, encyclopedist, educator, and
champion of adult education, Dr. Johnson's experi-
ence included appointment at some half-dozen im-
portant universities, and the directorship of the New
School for Social Research from 1923 to 1945. The
story of his life throws light on numerous aspects of
American education and culture.
5220. McCuskey, Dorothy. Bronson Alcott,
teacher. New York, Macmillan, 1940. 217
p. illus. 40-35143 LB695.A3M3 1936
Study based on manuscript sources, and submitted
originally as a doctoral dissertation at Yale Univer-
sity; establishes Alcott as a progressive educator in
his own or any day, by tracing his work at the
Temple School, Boston, as superintendent of the
Concord, Massachusetts, Public Schools, and as dean
of the Concord School of Philosophy. May be used
with George E. Haefner's dissertation, A Critical
Estimate of the Educational Theories and Practices
of A. Bronson Alcott (New York, 1937. 130 p.).
5221. Perry, Bliss. And gladly teach. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 315 p.
35-16598 PS2545.P4Z52
Intimate insight into education at Williams Col-
lege, and at Princeton and Harvard Universities,
provided by the autobiography of a distinguished
professor who taught in all three institutions between
1 88 1 and 1930 and who was famous for his Harvard
courses in American literature.
5222. Peterson, Houston, ed. Great teachers, por-
trayed by those who studied under them.
New Brunswick [N. J.] Rutgers University Press,
1946. xxi, 351 p. 46-11976 CT105.P44
Partial Contents. — Socratic Yankee: Mark Hop-
kins, by L. W. Spring. — Garman of Amherst:
Charles Edward Garman, by W. A. Dyer. —
Quaker scholar: Francis Barton Gummere, by
Christopher Morley. — Princeton schoolmaster:
720 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Woodrow Wilson, by A. P. Dennis. — Columbia
galaxy: John Dewey and others, by Irwin Edman. —
"I become Agassiz's pupil": Jean Louis Rodolphe
Agassiz, by N. S. Shaler. — Beloved psychologist:
William James, by D. S. Miller. — Wisconsin his-
torian: Frederick Jackson Turner, by C. L.
Becker. — "Kitty": George Lyman Kittredge, by
S. P. Sherman. — Emerson the lecturer: Ralph Waldo
Emerson, by J. R. Lowell.
5223. Smith, Shirley W. James Burrill Angell: an
American influence. Ann Arbor, Univer-
sity of Michigan Press, 1 954. 380 p.
54-14913 LD3275 1871.S6
Details of Angell's own education, his work as a
teacher, and primarily his presidency, in turn, of
the University of Vermont and of the University of
Michigan, contribute to an understanding of Ameri-
can educational history from 1840 to 1909.
F. Methods and Techniques
5224. Douglass, Had R., ed. Education for life
adjustment, its meaning and implementation,
by Maurice R. Ahrens [and others] With a foreword
by Raymond W. Gregory. New York, Ronald Press
Co., 1950. 491 p. (Douglass series in education)
50-7899 LB1027.5.D6
Bibliography: p. 459-473.
The life adjustment movement has been promoted
by the National Commission on Life Adjustment
for American Youth, a body originated in 1947 by
the United States Commissioner of Education. This
work comprises a series of essays by specialists and
is designed to assist school officials and communities
to equip American young people to live democrat-
ically and with satisfaction as profitable members
of society, in the home, at work, and as citizens;
addressed particularly to the requirements of those
less well-served by the schools than students going
on to higher education or into skilled occupations.
The editor's own work, Secondary Education for
Life Adjustment of American Youth (New York,
Ronald Press, 1952. 630 p.), discusses social changes
in America in relation to education suitable for a
democratic society. The Commission on Life Ad-
justment Education for Youth (1947-1950) issued
a report on Vitalizing Secondary Education (Wash-
ington, Federal Security Agency, Office of Educa-
tion, 1951. 106 p.).
5225. Faunce, Roland C, and Nelson L. Bossing.
Developing the core curriculum. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1951. 311 p. 51-5578 LB1555.F3
Offers a definition and an educational basis of the
"core curriculum" in a democratic society, together
with the methods of implementing the idea in the
community, the school, and the classroom.
5226. Flesch, Rudolf F. Why Johnny can't read —
and what you can do about it. New York,
Harper, 1955. 222 p. _ 55~6577 LB1573.F55
Strongly advocates teaching elementary reading
by the phonetic method and castigates methods other
than this now used in such teaching; controversial
book that has aroused much discussion and exam-
ination of the reading abilities of young Americans.
A reply to this is The Truth about Your Child's
Reading, by Sam Duker and Thomas P. Nally (New
York, Crown, 1956. 181 p.).
5227. Grambs, Jean D., and William J. Iverson.
Modern methods in secondary education.
New York, Sloane, 1952. 562 p.
52-10179 LB1607.G66
References at ends of chapters.
Undertakes to set forth the over-all task of the
American high school which, along with the
elementary school, is the common school of all the
people; relates present conditions to the necessary
changes in methods of teaching and aims to give
beginning teachers the basis of a sympathetic under-
standing of contemporary problems. The authors
are members of the faculty of the School of Educa-
tion of Stanford University.
5228. Hardee, Melvene D., ed. Counseling and
guidance in general education. Edited un-
der sponsorship of the National Committee on
General Education, Association for Higher Educa-
tion, National Education Association. Yonkers-on-
Hudson, World Book Co., 1955. xix, 444 p. (Pro-
fessional books in education)
55-4197 LB2343.H275
Bibliography: p. 427-434. Bibliographical foot-
notes.
Symposium composed of chapters written by pro-
fessors and administrators in American colleges and
universities. The high school teacher who is charged
with responsibility for taking part in guidance work
without special training for the task is served by
Leslie L. Chisholm's Guiding Youth in the Second-
ary School (New York, American Book Co., 1950.
441 p.). General Clinical Counseling in Educa-
EDUCATION / 721
tional Institutions, by Milton E. Hahn and Malcolm
S. MacLean (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950.
375 p.), draws together the theories and ideas of
scientific clinical counseling developed by psy-
chologists during World War II and applies them
to the professional practice of counseling in educa-
tional work. Counseling Theory and Practice
(New York, Ronald Press, 1954. 307 p.), by Har-
old B. and Pauline N. Pepinsky, is addressed to
advanced students and professional counselors in-
terested in making a contribution as psychologists
and also as practitioners; emphasizes the scientific
basis of the subject.
5229. Lindquist, Everet F., ed. Educational meas-
urement. With chapters by Gordon V.
Anderson [and others] Washington, American
Council on Education, 1951. xix, 819 p. illus.
51-9853 LB3051.L5
Includes bibliographies.
Sponsored by the standing Committee on Meas-
urement and Guidance of the American Council
on Education and written by 20 specialists, assisted
by some 50 additional collaborators, to provide a
comprehensive handbook and textbook on the
theory, techniques, and functions of educational
testing and measurement. An additional reference
book on the subject is Oscar K. Buros' The Fourth
Mental Measurements Yearbook^ (Highland Park,
N. J., Gryphon Press, 1953. 1163 p.). It covers
the work of 1948-51, lists 793 tests, 596 reviews of
tests, 4,417 references on the construction, validity,
use, and limitations of tests, and 429 reviews of books
in the field. Harold Gulliksen, professor of psy-
chology, Princeton University, in his Theory of Men-
tal Tests (New York, Wiley, 1950. 486 p.) brings
together in one volume technical developments in
test theories during the last 50 years and elaborates
those he considers to be of especial interest. Clay
C. Ross' Measurement in Today's Schools, 3d ed.,
revised by Julian C. Stanley (New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1954. 485 p. Prentice-Hall psychology series)
stresses a functional approach to educational meas-
urement in a work that resulted from long experi-
ence while teaching college classes in the subject.
Frank S. Freeman's Theory and Practice of Psycho-
logical Testing, rev. ed. (New York, Henry Holt,
1955. 609 p.), amplifies his earlier discussions of
test standardization, tests of specific aptitudes, and
the results of recent researches in the field, and
describes a number of specific tests.
5230. Siepmann, Charles A. Television and edu-
cation in the United States. Paris, UNESCO,
1952. 131 p. (Press, film and radio in the world
today) 53-9290 LB1044.7.S5
Provides information concerning television and its
use in schools, colleges, and universities, the educa-
tional policies of television networks, and the effect
of television on audiences; indicates the cautions
that are in order when the medium is used educa-
tionally. Teaching Through Radio and Television
(New York, Rinehart, 1952. 560 p.), by William
B. Levenson and Edward Stasheff, has the twofold
purpose of improving school broadcasting and en-
couraging more effective educational programs.
Since 1941 the Association for Education by Radio-
Television has provided current news and informa-
tion through its periodical, The Journal of the
AERT. Beginning with 1930 a group currently
entided the Institute for Education by Radio and
Television has issued its yearbook under the title,
Education on the Air.
5231.
Wittich, Walter A., and Charles F. Schuller.
Audio-visual materials: their nature and use.
New York, Harper, 1953. 564 p. (Exploration
series in education) 52-12772 LB1043.W58
Based on nine years' experience in work with
teachers on the use in the schools of graphic teach-
ing aids, radio, motion-picture film, television, etc.
Copious illustrations are supplied, while bibliog-
raphies and lists of sources from which audio-visual
materials may be obtained are added at the ends of
chapters. Briefly discusses the place in contem-
porary American education filled by such aids to per-
ception and understanding.
Edgar Dale's revised edition of his Audio-Visual
Methods in Teaching (New York, Dryden Press,
1954. 534 p.) emphasizes the theory of learning
underlying the use of these materials in teaching,
the various types of materials to be used, and their
application in the classroom, from the elementary
grades through high school.
G. Contemporary Problems and Controversies
5232. Bell, Bernard I. Crisis in education. New
York, Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1949.
237 p. 49-8612 LA209.2.B4
431240—60 — -^7
Written as a challenge to American complacency,
the book deplores faults observed in all levels of edu-
cation in the United States, particularly with refer-
722 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ence to persistent adolescence and the lack of intel-
lectual and spiritual qualities. Nine steps in refor-
mation are proposed in conclusion (p. 200-230).
Canon Bell is not only a clergyman of the Epsicopal
Church, but also an experienced educator who has
served as a college president and as a professor at
Columbia University.
5233. Bestor, Arthur E. Educational wastelands;
the retreat from learning in our public
schools. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1953.
226 p. 53-976i LB875.M345
Denunciatory criticism of professional "education-
ists" and their educational effects by a professor of
history in the University of Illinois. A later work
by the same hand, The Restoration of Learning
(New York, Knopf, 1955. 459 p.), incorporates
material from the earlier book, and in Part Three
(p. [2191-393) suggests means of "redeeming the
unfulfilled promise of American education."
5234. Bode, Boyd H. Progressive education at the
crossroads. New York, Newson, 1938.
128 p. 38-13086 LB875.B518
Reasonable and dispassionate examination of
"progressive" education by a critical progressive.
Carleton W. Washburn, a past president of the
Progressive Education Association, in A Living
Philosophy of Education (New York, J. Day, 1940.
585 p.) equates progressivism with efforts to in-
corporate in practice scientific discoveries pertinent
for education. Lucy Sprague Mitchell's Our
Children and Our Schools (New York, Simon and
Schuster, 1950. 510 p.) pictures progressive educa-
tion at the Bank Street Schools in New York.
5235. Hutchins, Robert M. The conflict in edu-
cation in a democratic society. New York,
Harper, 1953. 112 p. 53-8539 LB875.H96
Stating his belief that "graduation from an Ameri-
can university is no guarantee of literacy," the
former president and chancellor of the University of
Chicago criticizes the prevalence in America of four
contemporary pedagogical doctrines he believes to
be detrimental to sound education in any society:
the doctrine of adjustment or adaptation to the total
environment; the doctrine of immediate needs; the
doctrine of social reform; and the doctrine of no
doctrine at all. The writer's additional contro-
versial and critical writings on American educational
themes include The Higher Learning in America
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1936. 119 p.)
and No Friendly Voice (Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1936. 196 p.).
5236. Scott, Cecil W., and Clyde M. Hill, eds.
Public education under criticism. New
York, Prentice-Hall, 1954. 414 p. (Prentice-Hall
education series) 54-5871 LA209.2.S35
Extensive anthology of articles gathered from mis-
cellaneous journals written for and against second-
ary education as provided in American schools;
selections are arranged under such headings as
Philosophy, Progressive Education, The Funda-
mentalists, Teacher Education and Teachers, etc.
A second anthology has been edited by Henry
Ehlers, under the tide Crucial Issues in Education
(New York, Holt, 1955. 277 p.). It includes se-
lections culled from publications of the past ten
years concerning freedom, learning, religion and
public education, separation of church and state,
racial segregation in schools, progressive education,
and classroom methods and materials.
5237. Smith, Mortimer B. The diminished mind;
a study of planned mediocrity in our public
schools. Chicago, H. Regnery, 1954. 150 p.
54-11285 LA209.2.S6
A parent who has served on a board of education,
the author expresses his vehement opposition to
certain theories and practices in contemporary pub-
lic education in America, notably those called the
"Core Curriculum," "Life Adjustment," and "Social
Reconstruction." He aims to present evidence in
support of the thesis that learning, in the traditional
sense of disciplined knowledge, is fast declining in
our public schools. His earlier and more theoretical
work, And Madly Teach (Chicago, H. Regnery,
1949. 107 p.), has been called a primer for parents.
5238. Thayer, Vivian T. Public education and its
critics. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 170 p.
(The Kappa Delta Pi lecture series)
54-9475 LA209.2.T47
Considers dispassionately efforts by pressure
groups to restrict freedom of teaching and negate the
separation of church and state.
5239. Woodring, Paul. Let's talk sense about our
schools. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1953.
215 p. 53-9020 LA209.2.W65
Partial Contents. — The shadow of John
Dewey. — What is progressive education? — The
teachers college in America. — The American
teacher. — Academic and other freedoms. — Free en-
terprise and the teacher. — What we know about
how we can teach. — The fundamental issue. — Ap-
pendix: Related reading, with comments.
Review and appraisal by a professor of psychology
of the grounds upon which American public schools
are currently being criticized as intellectually arid,
undisciplined, and blighted by the predominance of
methods over content.
EDUCATION / 723
H. Periodicals and Yearbooks
5240. American Association of School Adminis-
trators. Yearbook. ist + 1923+ Wash-
ington. E23-142 L13.A363
Published by the Association, a department of the
National Education Association of the United States.
Volumes are monographic in character, as indi-
cated by their individual tides, of which the follow-
ing are examples: 1932, Character Education; 1934,
Critical Problems in School Administration; 1935,
Social Change and Education; 1936, The Social
Studies Curriculum; 1938, Youth Education Today;
1939, Schools in Small Communities; 1941, Educa-
tion for Family Life; 1949, American School Build-
ings; and 1953, the American School Curriculum.
Each volume is produced by a committee of mem-
bers selected for the purpose.
5241. The Education index. ist+ 1929/30 + .
A cumulative author and subject index.
New York, H. W. Wilson. 30-23807 Z5813.E23
Issued monthly (except in June and August) and
cumulated periodically within each year. Annual
and biennial cumulations are also provided. In-
dexes more than 120 journals, proceedings of socie-
ties, bulletins, and other educational serials, and
adds references to various monographic materials.
A special feature of each number and volume is an
index of book reviews, entered in a group under the
words, "Book reviews." American interests pre-
dominate but material on education in other coun-
tries is also indexed when found in the serials
analyzed.
5242. The Educational forum, v. 1 + Nov. 1936 +
Menasha, Wis., George Banta Pub. Co.
37-35898 L11.E29
Published four times a year.
Supersedes the Kadelpian Review.
Some numbers in two parts, the second part being
a supplement including news of Kappa Delta Pi, an
honor society in education, of which this journal is
the organ.
Articles are broad in interest, being concerned not
only with all phases of education in the United
States, but also to some degree with education
throughout the world. Numerous book reviews
are written and signed by specialists; currendy
(1957) edited by E. I. F. Williams.
5243. John Dewey Society. Yearbook. ist +
New York, Harper, 1937 +
37-27225 L101.U6J6
Monographic studies on such varied topics as the
place of the teacher in society, freedom of teaching,
democracy and the curriculum, workers' education,
intercultural education, and the American elemen-
tary school. The society, formed to study the inter-
action of education, society, and culture in the
United States, honors John Dewey's leadership in
American thought and education but is not com-
mitted to any specific educational doctrine. Cf.
Foreword, vol. 1, p. v.
5244. The Journal of higher education, v. 1 +
Jan. 1930+ Columbus, Ohio State Uni-
versity. E32-99 L11.J78
Issued monthly (except July-Sept.).
Currently edited by R. H. Eckelberry.
Professional journal addressed to teachers and ad-
ministrators; deals with significant investigations of
problems of higher education in the United States,
whether instructional, curricular, administrative, or
concerned with personnel.
5245. NEA journal, v. 1+ Apr. 1913+ [Wash-
ington, National Education Association of
the United States] 24-4821 L11.N15
The organ of the National Education Association,
designed to keep teachers abreast of educational af-
fairs in America, important educational news, and
publications considered particularly significant.
5246. National Society for the Study of Education.
Yearbook. ist~5th [i895]~99; [new ser.]
ist+ 1902+ Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1895+ 6-16938 LB5.N25
Official publication of the Society. Yearbooks are
published in two parts, each devoted to a special
topic developed in a series of sections written by
specialists or by a committee of specialists. Em-
phasis is placed on recording research, on innova-
tions, and on modern developments. Typical sub-
jects treated include: changes and experiments in
liberal arts education; vocational education; educa-
tion of exceptional children; education in rural com-
munities; general education; audio-visual materials
of instruction; mass media and education; modern
philosophies and education; and mental health in
modern education.
5247. Review of educational research, v. 1 +
Jan. 1 931+ Washington, American Edu-
cational Research Association, a department of the
National Educational Association of the United
States. 33-19994 L11.R35
724 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Published five times a year, beginning with Feb-
ruary, each issue of the journal is devoted to aspects
of a specific educational topic, e. g., "Educational
Organization, Administration, and Finance" (Oct.
1955); "Growth, Development, and Learning"
(Dec. 1955); "Educational and Psychological Test-
ing" (Feb. 1956). Edited (1956-57) by Tom A.
Lamke. Substantial bibliographies are provided
with reviews of the literature. May be used cur-
rently to supplement W. S. Monroe's Encyclopedia
of Educational Research, described in this chapter
under General Works: Historical and Descriptive.
5248. School and society, v. 1 + Jan. 2, 1915 +
New York, Society for the Advancement of
Education. 17-1407 L11.S36
Issued biweekly; edited (1956) by William W.
Brickman.
In general, provides a leading article in each
number that discusses a timely educational topic,
followed by briefer papers relating to various types
of education in the United States; includes "News
and Notes" of persons and events, and brief lists of
recent educational and related publications.
5249. The School review; a journal of secondary
education, v. 1 + Jan. 1893+ Chicago,
University of Chicago Press. 6-14090 L11.S55
Issued monthly (except June, July, and Aug.).
Index: v. 1-10, 1893-1902. 1 v.
Features educational news and comments; articles
on all phases of secondary education; selected, an-
notated references on a different topic in each num-
ber; signed book reviews, and lists of current publi-
cations. Issued under the direction of the Depart-
ment of Education, University of Chicago; edited
( 1956) by Maurice L. Hartung.
XXII
Philosophy and Psychology
A. Philosophy: General Wor\s
B. Representative Philosophers
C. Psychology
5250-5264 I
5265-5387 p
5388-5393
9
THIS CHAPTER seeks to give some idea of the American achievement in the two fields of
philosophy and psychology, which were originally one in academic organization and
in the public mind, and have now become almost completely divorced. It has been pre-
pared with the full realization that both have been international inquiries coterminous with
the higher developments of Western civilization. Until the 19th century was well ad-
vanced American philosophy was little more than a reflection of contemporary European
currents. Transcendentalism, however much it may
have derived from weightier German models, cer-
tainly developed a tone and temper all its own;
while with the pragmatic movement, which grad-
ually crystallized during the 1890's, American
philosophical thinking took a quite independent
line, and began in its turn to make an impression
on Europe, although most of the early reactions
there were, to put it mildly, negative. American
philosophy has gone its own course ever since, with
the two-way currents of influence normal between
nations of the West, tempered by the fact that Amer-
icans usually pay more attention to what is going
on in Europe than vice versa.
Section A consists of some general histories and
historical anthologies of American philosophy,
usually intended for classroom use, together with
some accounts of individual movements or schools,
and symposiums intended either to develop a par-
ticular point of view, or to give a cross section of
American philosophical thinking at the time of pub-
lication. Specifically religious philosophy, as well
as theology, will be found in the following chapter.
Much additional matter of relevance to American
philosophy is contained in Chapters I on Literature
and XI on Intellectual History.
Section B presents 18 American philosophers from
Jonathan Edwards to the present day, some of whom
were eminent in their time and representative of
historic currents of thought, while a few are think-
ers of true originality and power, whose ideas are
alive today and seem likely to remain so. Under
each philosopher the entries are arranged in con-
formity with the pattern adopted in Chapter I on
Literature, and more fully explained in its introduc-
tion: individual works arranged by the date of the
original edition (although the entry here is often
a later edition or reprint, preferred as more readily
available); collected works; selected works; and
biographical or critical studies. Some earlier fig-
ures of note, such as Cotton Mather and Benjamin
Franklin, who are treated at length elsewhere, and
whose specifically philosophical writings are neither
numerous nor striking, have not been included here,
although they usually receive some attention in his-
tories of American philosophy. Two men, James
McCosh and A. N. Whitehead, are included not-
withstanding the facts that their minds were formed
in Britain and they came to America in middle age
with important work behind them, for each be-
came thoroughly domesticated, and was looked up
to by numerous disciples of native birth. American
philosophy has tended, especially since the 1890's,
to have its being within the universities; of the many
professors who have done distinguished work dur-
ing the last 70 years we have been able to give indi-
vidual treatment only to a handful. Two subjects
725
726 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
which have flourished in the latest period, symbolic
logic and general semantics, have been well-nigh
ignored here: the first is so bristling with technicali-
ties that books suited for the general reader remain
to seek, while the second is still far from any defini-
tive form or agreed body of doctrine.
Psychology, which since William James has in-
creasingly allied itself with the natural sciences, is
now flourishing inside the universities and out,
where a host of "applied" specialists give counsel
to diverse enterprises; she quite overshadows her
elder sister, who has shared in the general diminish-
ment of the humanities in the present technical age.
Our entries for this section are nevertheless few, be-
cause among a host of textbooks, monographs, and
reported experiments, general views of the American
contribution to psychology remain scanty. One
whole aspect of present-day psychology, that which
takes its origin in the diagnosis and treatment of
mental disease or disturbance, is treated not here
but in Section C (Psychiatry) of Chapter XVIII on
Medicine and Public Health.
A. Philosophy: General Works
5250. Adams, George P., and William Pepperell
Montague, eds. Contemporary American
philosophy; personal statements. New York, Mac-
millan, 1930. 2 v. (Library of philosophy)
31-15738 B934.C6 1930a
"Principal publications" at end of each statement.
Thirty-three professors of philosophy, represent-
ing colleges and universities from Harvard and Co-
lumbia to Michigan and California, present in this
work their principal philosophic beliefs and the in-
fluences which they suppose to have given rise to
them. Some of these "philosophic autobiographies"
stress early life experiences, while others are nearly
all theory. An exceptionally attractive paper is the
introduction by George Herbert Palmer (1842-
1933); writing as "a kind of representative of the
philosophic young men of my time," he deals not
only with his personal experiences and beliefs, but
with the golden age of philosophy at Harvard. Con-
tributors to the symposium were selected by a vote
of the membership of the American Philosophical
Association.
5251. Anderson, Paul Russell, and Max Harold
Fisch. Philosophy in America from the
Puritans to James, with representative selections.
New York, Appleton-Century, 1939. 570 p. (The
Century philosophy series)
Bibliography: p. [543 ]-$62. 39-13842 B851.A5
In large part this is an anthology of writings by
American philosophers. The plan followed called
for the inclusion of documents not readily accessible;
this has led to a somewhat heavier emphasis on the
early periods, with extracts from work by figures
such as Samuel Johnson, Cadwallader Colden,
Ethan Allen, Thomas Cooper, Benjamin Rush, and
Samuel Stanhope Smith, as well as by later and
better known philosophers. Introductions to each
of the volume's four parts help to provide a general
view of the main currents of development of phi-
losophy in the United States.
5252. Barrett, Clifford, ed. Contemporary ideal-
ism in America. New York, Macmillan,
1932. 326 p. Z^wjo B941.B3
Contents. — In dedication: Josiah Royce, by G.
H. Palmer. — Introduction, by Clifford Barrett. —
Continuity of the idealist tradition, by C. M. Bake-
well. — The ontological argument in Royce and
others, by W. E. Hocking. — On the meaning situ-
ation, by G. W. Cunningham. — The philosophy of
spirit: idealism and the philosophy of value, by
W. M. Urban. — The principle of individuality and
value, by J. A. Leighton. — The finite self, by E. S.
Brightman. — God and cosmic structure, by J. E.
Boodin. — The theory of moral value, by R. A.
Tsanoff. — The meaning of obligation, by C. W.
Hendel, Jr. — The revival of idealism in the United
States, by R. F. A. Hoernle.
In this book a dozen philosophers take their stand
for philosophical idealism, and express their sense
of the inadequacy of the dominant realist move-
ment. These idealists are basically in the tradition
of Josiah Royce (q. v.).
5253. Blau, Joseph L. Men and movements in
American philosophy. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1952. 403 p. 52-8596 B851.B52
"Footnotes and suggested reading": p. 357-383.
"What is attempted here is an introductory ac-
count, stressing the more formal side of our philo-
sophic history, to provide a background for the
general reader and the beginning student which
will enable them to read further both in and about
American philosophy." Each of nine periods or
movements is first discussed in a general way, and
then through three of its representative figures.
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 727
5254. Creative intelligence; essays in the prag-
matic attitude, by John Dewey [and others].
New York, Holt, 1917. 467 p. 17-6640 B832.C7
Contents. — The need for recovery of philosophy,
by J. Dewey. — Reformation of logic, by A. W.
Moore. — Intelligence and mathematics, by H. C.
Brown. — Scientific method and individual thinker,
by G. H. Mead. — Consciousness and psychology,
by B. H. Bode. — The phases of the economic inter-
est, by H. W. Stuart. — The moral life and the
construction of values and standards, by J. H.
Tufts. — Value and existence in philosophy, art, and
religion, by H. M. Kallen.
Pragmatism, indubitably the best known specifi-
cally American contribution to philosophy, has not
been defined, either by its exponents or its oppo-
nents, in such manner as to win general assent, and
there is perhaps a wider span of opinion among its
adherents than is the case with other major schools
of thought. It can be given a narrow logical defini-
tion, such as "the doctrine that the whole meaning
of a conception expresses itself in practical conse-
quences," but it can be more generally regarded as
a serious attempt to domicile in philosophy the
evolutionary viewpoint and the crucial importance
of scientific experiment. The latter views appear
in the "Prefatory Note" to the present work, which
identifies the authors' attitude with "the ideas of
the genuineness of the future, of intelligence as the
organ for determining the quality of that future so
far as it can come within human control, and of a
courageously inventive individual as the bearer of
a creatively employed mind." Of the eight con-
tributors to this symposium, five taught in the Mid-
dle West and two on the Pacific coast; their essays
discuss the application of the pragmatic attitude to
logic, mathematics, physical science, psychology,
ethics, economics, and to esthetics and religion.
Three of the major figures identified with pragma-
tism, Dewey, James, and Peirce, appear in the fol-
lowing section on individual philosophers. An
interesting anthology, Pragmatism and American
Culture, edited by Gail Kennedy, is entered in
Chapter VIII above (no. 3 115). Two expositions
dating from the era when the movement was gain-
ing self-consciousness and public attention are Henry
Heath Bawden's The Principles of Pragmatism, a
Philosophical Interpretation of Experience (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1910. 364 p.) and Addison Web-
ster Moore's Pragmatism and Its Critics (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1910. 283 p.). The
criticism that pragmatism sought to operate in a
metaphysical void was answered by Sidney Hook
in his earliest book, The Metaphysics of Pragma-
tism (Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1927. 144 p.).
A study of the movement's greatest sphere of prac-
tical influence, the primary and secondary schools
of the United States, is John L. Child's American
Pragmatism and Education, an Interpretation and
Criticism (New York, Holt, 1956. 373 p.). The
movement has had some foreign affiliations; the
English ones are noticed in Emmanuel Leroux's Le
Pragmatisme americain et anglais, etude historique
et critique (Paris, Alcan, 1923. 429 p.). Its stu-
dents have naturally searched for American ante-
cedents prior to James and Peirce; a work of this
type is Eduard Baumgarten's Der Pragmatismus:
R. W. Emerson, W. James, /. Dewey (Frankfurt am
Main, Klostermann, 1938. 483 p.).
5255. Essays in critical realism; a co-operative study
of the problem of knowledge. London, Mac-
millan, 1920. 244 p. 21-11051 B835.E7
Contents. — The approach to critical realism, by
D. Drake. — Pragmatism versus the pragmatist, by
A. O. Lovejoy. — Critical realism and the possibility
of knowledge, by J. B. Pratt. — The problem of error,
by A. K. Rogers. — Three proofs of realism, by G.
Santayana. — Knowledge and its categories, by R. W.
Sellars. — On the nature of the datum, by C. A.
Strong.
A further symposium in which five American
professors of philosophy joined with Charles Augus-
tus Strong, an Englishman who had taught at
Columbia, and George Santayana (nos. 5365-5377),
then resident abroad, to present an epistemological
doctrine upon which they were in fairly complete
agreement, although they held "somewhat different
ontological views." Their principal aim was to con-
vict the "new realists" of 19 12 (no. 5260) of a
naive view of knowledge, and to replace it with
a more sophisticated and complex one, in which the
character-complexes or "essences" of perception are
distinguished from the sense of their outer exis-
tence. There is thus a triple relationship between
the mind, the essences of perception, and the exist-
ents known, and the validity of any cognitive ex-
perience "must be tested by other means than the
intuition of the moment." This symposium, to-
gether with its predecessor, made epistemological
debate the major interest of American philosophy
for more than a decade.
5256. Frothingham, Octavius Brooks. Transcen-
dentalism in New England; a history. New
York, Putnam, 1876. 395 p. 10-28608 B905.F7
The author, some of whose work is discussed in
the annotation to his life of George Ripley (no.
2279), was a Unitarian clergyman whose views
eventually became too advanced even for the elastic
limits of that fold. He says that transcendental-
ism actually did not exist outside New England;
but he treats of its antecedents in Europe, as well
as describing its American beginnings, its practical
728 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
applications (notably Brook Farm), and its out-
standing personalities. Sympathetic, uncritical, and
written in the formal style of the period, his account
is in part based on personal knowledge and remains
valuable as a sourcebook. Perry Miller's The Tran-
scendentalists (no. 2346) is an anthology of writ-
ings by those who took part in this philosophical
movement.
5257. Hook, Sidney, ed. American philosophers
at work; the philosophic scene in the United
States. New York, Criterion Books, 1956. 512 p.
56-11398 B934.H6
This anthology attempts "to meet the natural and
almost universal curiosity about what American
philosophers are doing, about what lies at the center
of their contemporary intellectual concern." The
editor states that all important philosophical move-
ments are represented, but that practical considera-
tions have prevented the inclusion of all important
individual thinkers. Most of the contributions are
reprints of magazine articles; a smaller number are
extracts from books published or to be published;
a very few are papers printed for the first time.
Nine philosophers contribute to part 1 on "Logic
and Scientific Method," ten to part 2 on "Meta-
physics and Theory of Knowledge," and ten to part
3 on "Ethics and Social Philosophy." At the end is
a section of "Biographical Notes" on contributors
(p. 499-507). The editor remarks that American
philosophers are independent thinkers, that most of
them adhere to no school, and that they rarely agree.
5258. Kallen, Horace M., and Sidney Hook, eds.
American philosophy today and tomorrow.
New York, Furman, 1935. 518 p.
36-722 B934.K3
Five years after the appearance of Contemporary
American Philosophy (no. 5250), a different pair
of editors produced a similar volume comprising
the views of "twenty-five representative American
thinkers." These are described as the younger gen-
eration (their birth dates range from 1873 to 1907,
as against 1859 to 1885 for the earlier group). Space
limitations forced the editors to include only those
who had not previously published their philosophic
self-portraits. The atmosphere in this volume is less
formal than in the earlier work; nearly all are trained
philosophers, but not all have become teachers of
philosophy, which makes for greater diversity of
theme.
5259. Muelder, Walter G., and Laurence Sears, eds.
The development of American philosophy;
a book of readings. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1940. 533 p. 40_33273 B851.M8
Contents. — pt. 1. Early philosophical theology
and idealism. — pt. 2. The period of the American
enlightenment. — pt. 3. Transcendentalism. — pt. 4.
Evolution. — pt. 5. Idealism from William T. Harris
to James E. Creighton. — pt. 6. Pragmatism and crit-
ical empiricism. — pt. 7. Realism and naturalism. —
pt. 8. Recent perspectives in American idealism.
This anthology puts less stress on the early period
than does the one of Anderson and Fisch (no. 5251).
It nevertheless covers more ground, for it continues
well beyond James to such contemporary philoso-
phers as Santayana, Edgar S. Brightman, and Sid-
ney Hook. In addition to providing introductions
and bibliographies for each part, the editors, with
the object of helping the student to develop a sense
of philosophical criticism, have wherever feasible
included "a critical discussion of a school of thought
by an outstanding representative of another point of
view"; thus Arthur O. Lovejoy is brought in to reply
to the pragmatists, and Irving Babbitt to reply to
the naturalists.
5260. The New Realism: cooperative studies in
philosophy. New York, Macmillan, 1912.
491 p. 12-18627 BD161.N4
Contents. — Introduction. — The emancipation of
metaphysics from epistemology, by W. T. Marvin. —
A realistic theory of independence, by R. B. Perry. —
A defense of analysis, by E. G. Spaulding. — A real-
istic theory of truth and error, by W. P. Monta-
gue.— The place of illusory experience in a realistic
world, by E. B. Holt. — Some realistic implications
of biology, by W. B. Pitkin.
Both manifesto and symposium, this was the first
in a series of similar volumes which gave to con-
temporaries a sense of significant development in
American philosophy, and certainly indicated that
the long-unchallenged reign of neo-Hegelianism in
the universities was at an end. "The Program and
First Platform of Six Realists," reprinted here as an
appendix, appeared in the Journal of Philosophy,
Psychology, and Scientific Method for July 21, 1910;
the same six, teachers of philosophy at Columbia,
Harvard, Princeton, and Rutgers, elaborated their
views in the present volume. The "Introduction"
(p. 1-42) is a joint statement upon which all agreed;
the six essays which follow are more personal de-
velopments of the same general oudook. All six
sought an escape from subjectivism, with which
they identified the hitherto reigning philosophy,
idealism, based upon "the fallacy of argument from
the ego-centric predicament." All sought a return
"to that primordial common sense which believes
in a world that exists independently of the knowing
of it," and that can be directly presented in con-
sciousness. This did not lead to monism, for the
things of thought were as real as the things of sense,
logical entities as real as physical ones.
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 729
5261. Schneider, Herbert W. A history of Amer-
ican philosophy. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1946. xiv, 646 p. (Columbia studies
in American culture, no. 18) A47-737 B851.S4
This survey which relates philosophical ideas to
the general development of American society, ranges
from the work of John Cotton and Thomas Hooker
to that of John Dewey. It includes not only pro-
fessional philosophers, but also philosophical bellet-
rists, historians, scientists, and economists, and
therefore approximates a general intellectual history.
Numerous quotations convey the individuality of
the several writers. The "Guides to the Literature"
at the end of each part point the way for further
exploration of the periods covered, and are supple-
mented by occasional lists of the most important
works of an author or the major publications of a
period. So far as contemporaries are concerned,
Professor Schneider does not claim comprehensive-
ness, asserting that "a decidedly new chapter in
American philosophy is being written, the outlines
of which we still cannot see." A companion volume
is American Philosophic Addresses, ijoo-igoo
(New York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 762
p. Columbia studies in American culture, 17),
edited by Joseph L. Blau. It aims to provide the
student with specimen works of literary value which
elaborate the ideas dealt with in Schneider's History.
There are presented 27 pieces, all but one of which
were prepared for oral delivery, as sermons, ora-
tions, lectures, etc. Each is provided with a short
introduction which places it in its historical context
and supplies a chronology of the writer's life. All
these addresses, the editor says, "have one distin-
guishing characteristic; all are speculative in nature."
Each is "a popularized statement of a philosophic
outlook as well as a call to a particular action or
belief."
5262. Townsend, Harvey Gates. Philosophical
ideas in the United States. New York,
American Book Co., 1934. 293 p.
34-18313 B858.T6
"Selected bibliography": p. 267-284.
A comparatively brief, simple, and undogmatic
introduction to the history of American philosophy.
To some degree it is dependent upon the more
elaborate research of I. Woodbridge Riley's Ameri-
can Philosophy, the Early Schools (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1907. 595 p.), and does not attempt
to add to the latter 's account of unpublished ma-
terials through the early national period. Professor
Townsend aims at a genetic method of presentation,
and divides our philosophical history into four well-
defined periods: one of almost exclusively British
influence, until the Revolution; a brief period of
French influence; one dominated by German
thought and romantic temper, beginning about 1820
and lasting until after the Civil War; and, finally,
one of increasing independence and of conscious,
professional philosophy. However, he finds that
the dominant note of American philosophy has been
idealism, in the sense of the ancient doctrine "that
the invisible kingdoms furnish the foundation for
the visible." A final chapter on "evolutionary
naturalism" discusses the thought of James Mark
Baldwin, John Dewey, and George Santayana.
5263. Wells, Ronald Vale. Three Christian tran-
scendentalists; James Marsh, Caleb Sprague
Henry, Frederic Henry Hedge. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1943. 230 p. (Columbia
studies in American culture, no. 12) Bibliography:
p. [2171-224. 43rWSZ B905.W4
This work, which originated in a Columbia Uni-
versity dissertation, traces the careers of three lesser
figures who were drawn into the transcendentalist
movement from an orthodox theological back-
ground. Marsh (1794-1842), a Congregational
minister, was president and later professor of phi-
losophy for many years at the University of Ver-
mont. Henry (1 804-1 884), of the same commun-
ion, became an Episcopalian and served as rector,
editor of The Churchman, and professor of mental
and moral philosophy at New York University.
Hedge (1805-1890), a Unitarian, was long pro-
fessor of ecclesiastical history at Harvard. Each in
his separate way made a significant contribution to
transcendentalist doctrine.
5264. Wiener, Philip P. Evolution and the
founders of pragmatism. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1949. 288 p.
49-10659 B818.W63
Through the informal discussions of a group of
philosophical liberals who met at Harvard College
in the 1860's and early 1870's, there arose the move-
ment known as pragmatism, one of the most im-
portant in American thought. The issues dis-
cussed in these meetings as a result of the publi-
cation of Darwin's Origin of the Species, and the
points of view of the members as given in their
writings, both published and unpublished, are
treated comprehensively in this book, which is ad-
dressed to the specialist. Professor Wiener ex-
pounds in detail the development of the pragmatic
ideas of Chauncey Wright, Charles S. Peirce, and
William James; in addition he presents valuable
accounts of minor members of the Harvard group:
John Fiske, Nicholas St. John Green, and Oliver
Wendell Holmes, Jr.
431240—60-
^8
730 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
B. Representative Philosophers
5265. AMOS BRONSON ALCOTT, 1799-1888
Alcott, a New Englander who referred to
his own version of the transcendentalist philosophy
as "personalism," made a greater impression
through the spoken word than through his many
published writings. His main work, the journals
in 50 manuscript volumes, has never been published
in its entirety, but only in extracts (no. 187). His
writings are largely vitiated by an artificial style
which, his contemporaries testify, was not carried
over into his natural and forceful conversation.
Consequendy it was as a lecturer, an educator, and
a friend of most of the prominent transcendental-
ists that he exerted his greatest influence. His
friendship with Emerson was particularly close and
is studied in Hubert H. Hoeltje's Sheltering Tree;
a Story of the Friendship of Ralph Waldo Emerson
and Amos Bronson Alcott (Durham, N. C, Duke
University Press, 1943. 209 p.). Alcott as a teacher
is studied in McCuskey's Bronson Alcott, Teacher
(no. 5220). Alcott, who was quite unworldly,
undertook a number of ventures which ended in
failure. The most conspicuous was his attempt to
found a model community, Fruidands, where a few
persons might lead an ideal life as a "consociate
family." He and his associate, the Englishman
Charles Lane, who put up the money, adopted such
impractical ideals and devoted so much more time
and energy to philosophical discussion than to agri-
culture, that their "new Eden" was doomed almost
from the start. An account of the experiment com-
piled from contemporary sources is Clara E. Sears'
Bronson Alcott' s Fruidands (Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1915. 185 p.).
5266. Shepard, Odell. Pedlar's progress; the life
of Bronson Alcott. Boston, Little, Brown,
1937. xvi, 546 p.
"Bibliographical note": p. 523-528.
37-10152 B908.A54S5 1937a
An earlier and more detailed life of Alcott, but
without some of the information at Shepard's dis-
posal, is A. Bronson Alcott. His Life and Philoso-
phy (Boston, Roberts, 1893. 2 v.), by F. B. San-
born and William T. Harris (q.v.).
5267. MORRIS RAPHAEL COHEN, 1 880-1 947
Cohen was born in Minsk, Russia, and
brought to New York's East Side at the age of 12;
the privations of his youth were doubtless responsible
for the chronic ill-health which hampered his career
and especially the major works he planned but was
unable to complete. His first philosophical inspira-
tion came from Thomas Davidson, a Scottish neo-
Hegelian of wide interests but unsystematic temper;
after a few years of teaching in the public schools he
was able to attend the Harvard Graduate School
in the great days of the Philosophy Department,
and obtained his Ph. D. in 1906. After six painfully
frustrating years he at last obtained an appointment
in philosophy from the College of the City of New
York ( 1912), and taught there and at the University
of Chicago (from 1938) until the failure of his health
in 1942. He did not achieve a complete formulation
of his philosophical ideas, of which he gave a pre-
liminary expression in Reason and Nature below.
Most of his writings offer partial aspects or applica-
tions of his philosophy; a number of his books were
posthumously assembled, through the editorship of
his son, Felix S. Cohen, out of miscellaneous publi-
cations and incomplete manuscripts. Cohen com-
bined a strong sense of traditional values with a con-
viction of the importance of the scientific outlook
and the need for a reformed logic. His most finished
work is concerned with the philosophy of scientific
method: An Introduction to Logic and Scientific
Method (New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 467
p.), which he wrote with Ernest Nagel; A Preface
to Logic (New York, Holt, 1944. 209 p.); and the
posthumously collected Studies in Philosophy and
Science (New York, Holt, 1949. 278 p.). Cohen
called himself "a stray dog unchained to any meta-
physical kennel"; his thought rejects the transcen-
dental, but gives a greater role to the active human
reason than does other recent naturalism; he rejects
ethical absolutism, but finds the formulation of ethi-
cal principles a necessity in the ordering of human
conduct. Cohen's influence upon his pupils and
associates was enormous; he was, without much
doubt, a philosopher whose greatness is inadequately
expressed in the corpus of his wridngs. His doc-
trines and some of the problems which he raised are
discussed in Freedom and Reason: Studies in Philos-
ophy and Jewish Culture, in Memory of Morris
Raphael Cohen (Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1951. 468
p.), edited by Salo W. Baron, Ernest Nagel, and
Koppel S. Pinson.
5268. Reason and nature; an essay on the meaning
of scientific method. [2d ed.] Glencoe,
111., Free Press, 1953. xxiv, 470 p.
53,-W* B945.C53R4 1953
Originally published in 193 1, this was the author's
first book, and remained the most considerable state-
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 73 1
ment of his general philosophical outlook. He de-
scribed it as an "effort to formulate a more or less
integrated view of life and existence without aban-
doning the painfully critical methods and standards
of science." He was fully aware that it was an in-
complete work, but published it as a stopgap to meet
what he considered a grave need for a new philo-
sophical approach. As soon as it appeared he began
to make notes for the second edition, which incor-
porates his considered revisions made over a period
of 16 years.
5269. Law and the social order; essays in legal
philosophy. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
»933- 4°3 P- L^ 33"I3I99
Cohen was long concerned with legal philosophy
and its relationship to social problems. Reason and
Law; Studies in Juristic Philosophy (Glencoe, 111.,
Free Press, 1950. 211 p.) reflects this concern. He
made an original contribution to the philosophy of
history in The Meaning of Human History (La
Salle, 111., Open Court Pub. Co., 1947. 304 p.), one
of the most distinguished American works in this
field.
5270. A Dreamer's journey; . . . autobiography.
Boston, Beacon Press, 1949. 318 p.
49-7881 B945.C54A3 1949
"Bibliography of the published writings of Morris
R. Cohen": p. 291-303.
Cohen did not complete this autobiography, and
some of its earlier chapters which appear continuous
were but portions or sketches of what he intended to
write. Books 7 and 8 are a collection of personal
essays and fragments assembled by the author's son.
Two of these essays are concerned with Judaism;
a larger collection of Cohen's writings on this sub-
ject was made in 1950: Reflections of a Wondering
Jew (Boston, Beacon Press, 1950. 168 p.). The
extraordinary range of Cohen's mind is exhibited
in a collection of his articles from periodicals which
he published shortly before his death: The Faith
of a Liberal (New York, Holt, 1946. 497 p.); the
12 sections into which its 51 items are grouped in-
clude "Politico-Economic Issues," "Literature and
Literary Criticism," and "Education"; and there are
essays on "Why I am not a Communist" and "Base-
ball as a National Religion."
5271. JOHN DEWEY, 1859-1952
Since the death of William James, Dewey
has been the most influential of American philoso-
phers. His emphasis on educational theory and
the practical applications of philosophy has resulted
in large-scale changes in American education; these
are discussed in Chapter XXI on Education (q.v.).
His other wide-ranging interests have also given him
influence, at minimum as an opponent to be an-
swered, in most philosophic fields actively cultivated
in the first half of the 20th century. Dewey started
as a neo-Hegelian interested in resolving the con-
flict between theology and science, especially with
respect to the Darwinian theory of evolution. Dur-
ing the 1890's he developed into a pragmatist follow-
ing the lead of William James, and then went be-
yond James to head his own school of philosophy.
His philosophy is grounded on his belief in the
experimental approach of science and his postulate
that experience is the fundamental source of knowl-
edge and conduct. This has caused him to be called
an experimentalist; he has referred to his own phi-
losophy as instrumentalism. It should be noted,
however, that despite the "materialistic," "prag-
matic," "scientific," and "experiential" aspects of
Dewey's philosophy, it has at its core a considerable
amount of the idealism which has been inherent in
most American philosophy, as seen in its main line
of development through such thinkers as Jefferson,
Emerson, and James. Nature is regarded as malle-
able by mind. In fact, it is this "idealism" that has
led a number of Marxists to write strong attacks on
Dewey and Deweyism. These constitute but a small
part of the many works which have been written
about Dewey, as a leading and controversial phi-
losopher; such writings are represented here only in
part. Dewey himself during a long lifetime was
unusually prolific, so that it has been possible to cite
here only a part of his writings, selected as repre-
sentative of his varied interests.
5272. Psychology. New York, Harper, 1887.
427 p. 10-13718 BF131.D5
This, Dewey's first published book, was intended
as a textbook, and is in many ways derivative. It
shows his interests and position in his early years,
and it has the additional merit of being one of the
early attempts to establish psychology as an inde-
pendent science separate from philosophy. A third,
slightly revised edition appeared in 1891.
5273. Ethics. Rev. ed. By John Dewey and James
H. Tufts. New York, Holt, 1938. 528 p.
38-31611 BJ1025.D53 1938
This widely used textbook expounds Dewey's
moral position; in large part it deals with the ethical
problems of modern economic societies. The vol-
ume was first published in briefer form in 1908.
Tufts was Dewey's colleague during his 10 years at
the University of Chicago (1 894-1 904) and was sole
author of a number of works on ethics, as well as
translator of Wilhelm Windelband's standard His-
tory of Philosophy.
732 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5274. The Influence of Darwin on philosophy, and
other essays in contemporary thought. New
York, Holt, 1910. 309 p.
10-10721 B945.D4314 1910
Essays of interest as showing separately some of
the pragmatic and idealistic elements which Dewey
was later to fuse more fully into a philosophic sys-
tem. "The influence of Darwin upon philosophy
resides in his having conquered the phenomena of
life for the principle of transition, and thereby freed
the new logic for application to mind and morals
and life."
5275. Essays in experimental logic. Chicago,'
University of Chicago Press, 19 16. 444 p.
16-14107 BC50.D42
Dewey made his first generalized philosophical
statement about knowledge in Studies in Logical
Theory (Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1903. 388 p.). A more fully developed statement
appeared in Essays in Experimental Logic, which
incorporated and revised part of the material in
the earlier work, and added much that was new.
This is then, in a sense, his first full statement of
his theory of the relation of knowledge to experi-
ence and experiment, and thus of his basic philos-
ophy of instrumentalism. The ideas were briefly
presented with an application to education in How
We Thinly (Boston, Heath, 1910. 224 p.). A
further elaboration of his general theory of logic
may be found in his Logic, the Theory of Inquiry
(no. 5283).
5276. Reconstruction in philosophy. Enl. ed. with
a new introd. by the author. Boston, Bea-
con Press, 1948. xlvii, 224 p.
49-1234 B945.D43R4 1948
This book originated in lectures delivered at the
Imperial University of Japan in 1919 and was first
published the following year. Dewey sought "to
exhibit the general contrasts between older and
newer types of philosophic problems" in the
changed conceptions of nature provided by science,
of experience and reason, and of the ideal and the
real, pointing to reconstruction in logic, morals,
and social philosophy. In the introduction to the
1948 edition Dewey expressed his "firm belief that
the events of the intervening years have created a
situation in which the need for reconstruction is
vasdy more urgent than when the book was com-
posed," and chided recent philosophical tendencies
for retreating from the actual.
5277. Human nature and conduct; an introduc-
tion to social psychology. With a new
introd. New York, Modern Library, 1930. 336 p.
(The Modern Library of the world's best books)
30-19598 BF57.D4 1930
In this work, which first appeared in 1922, Dewey
treats from the point of view of "the structure and
workings of human nature, of psychology when
that term is used also in its wider sense," what
used to be called morals, including in that term
"all the subjects of distincdvely humane import,
all of the social disciplines as far as they are in-
timately connected with the life of man and as
they bear upon the interests of humanity." This
is generally regarded as one of Dewey's more im-
portant books, and some consider it his first major
philosophical work.
5278. Experience and nature. Chicago, Open
Court Pub. Co., 1925. 443 p. (Lectures
upon the Paul Carus Foundation. 1st ser.)
25-4301 B945.D43E8
Dewey's first large-scale statement of his con-
clusions in the crucial borderland where epistemol-
ogy and metaphysics meet. Since thinking origi-
nates in a problematic situation, the world in which
thought operates must have the characters of
"genuine hazard, contingency, irregularity, and
indeterminateness." The human enterprise is
summed up in "the striving to make stability of
meaning prevail over the instability of events." A
doctoral thesis which studies this aspect of Dewey's
philosophy is John J. Batde's The Metaphysical
Presuppositions of the Philosophy of John Dewey
(Fribourg, 1951. 128 p.). A somewhat similar
analysis of the Deweyan premises (tacit and ex-
plicit) is William Taft Feldman's The Philosophy
of John Dewey, a Critical Analysis (Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1934. 127 p.).
5279. The Public and its problems, an essay in
political inquiry. Chicago, Gateway Books,
1946. 224 p. 46-7355 JC251.D47 1946
In this book, originally published in 1927, Dewey
applies his basic idea of problem-solving inquiry to
the realm of politics. The public is distinguished
from the individual, the state, and the government.
Mastery of the arts of inquiry and of communica-
tion will permit an organized, articulate public to
come into being; the machine age, by perfecting its
machinery, will become a means instead of the
master of life; and democracy will come into its
5280. The Quest for certainty: a study of the rela-
tion of knowledge and acdon. New York,
Minton, Balch, 1929. 318 p. (Gifford lectures.
1929) 29-23500 BD161.D4
By the quest for certainty Dewey means the his-
tory of philosophy before the "scientific revolution,"
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 733
and the certainty which it sought to obtain in im-
mutable ideas and absolutes is in the nature of things
impossible. By its predispositions toward "the uni-
versal, invariant, and eternal," the classical tradi-
tion in philosophy opened a gulf between theory and
practice. Modern science has closed the gulf in the
natural realm, with spectacular results, but it still
dominates man's thinking in the social and moral
realm. The consequent separation of means and
ends is most clearly perceptible in the present state
of industrial life, brutalized by the failure to regard
it "as the means by which social and cultural values
are realized."
5281. Philosophy and civilization. New York,
Minton, Balch, 193 1. 334 p.
31-28147 B945.D43P5
A collection of 18 philosophical and psychological
essays which takes its name from the initial one,
and includes Dewey's account of "The Develop-
ment of American Pragmatism" (p. 13-35). All
its varieties have an essential tenet: "the formation
of a faith in intelligence, as the one and indispen-
sable belief necessary to moral and social life."
5282. Art as experience. New York, Minton,
Balch, 1934. 355 p. 34-27080 N66.D4
A work which, deriving esthetic values from vital
ones, forms an integral part of Dewey's philosophy.
5283. Logic, the theory of inquiry. New York,
Holt, 1938. 546 p. 38-27918 BC50.D43
This presents a further development of Dewey's
theory of logic, which he had earlier presented in
Essays in Experimental Logic (q.v.). It seeks to
ascertain the common pattern or structure of all in-
quiry, whether in common sense or in science, and
to trace the genesis of the logical forms which accrue
when subject matter is subjected to controlled in-
quiry. Of interest in connection with this work is
Horace S. Thayer's The Logic of Pragmatism; an
Examination of John Dewey's Logic (New York,
Humanities Press, 1952. 221 p.). An early histori-
cal treatment of Dewey's logical theories may be
found in Delton T. Howard's John Dewey's Logical
Theory (New York, Longmans, Green, 19 18. 135
p. Cornell studies in philosophy, no. n).
5284. Freedom and culture. New York, Putnam,
1939. 176 p. 39-27972 JC423.D524
The abandonment of the ideal of freedom in the
totalitarian states of Europe induced the octogenar-
ian philosopher to restate the interrelations of hu-
man nature, culture, and democracy. Democracy,
he found, was in real peril, but less from without
than from within our own institutions and attitudes.
It could be maintained and perfected "only by ex-
tending the application of democratic methods,
methods of consultation, persuasion, negotiation,
communication, co-operative intelligence, in the
task of making our own politics, industry, educa-
tion, our culture generally, a servant and an evolv-
ing manifestation of democratic ideas." Since for
Dewey freedom, democracy, and liberalism were
all practically identical, his somewhat earlier Page-
Barbour lectures at the University of Virginia, Lib'
eralism and Social Action (New York, Putnam,
1935. 93 p.), present a similar argument in briefer
compass.
5285. Problems of men. New York, Philosophi-
cal Library, 1946. 424 p.
46-25157 B945.D43P7
A collection, by the author, of his late essays, orig-
inally published as separate articles in various
periodicals.
5286. Knowing and the known. By John Dewey
and Arthur F. Bendey. Boston, Beacon
Press, 1949. 334 p. 49-48030 BD161.D38
In this book Dewey (aet. 90) and Bendey (aet.
79) undertake an investigation comparable to the
work of the linguistic and semantic schools of phil-
osophic approach that developed in recent decades.
This particular work is a "terminological inquiry"
resulting from "a startling diagnosis of linguistic
disease not only in the general epistemological field,
where everyone would anticipate it, but also in the
specialized logical field, which ought to be reason-
ably immune." The authors accordingly proceed
to seek out means for the eventual relative immuni-
zation of logic to such linguistic disease.
5287. Intelligence in the modern world; John
Dewey's philosophy. Edited, and with an
introd. by Joseph Ratner. New York, Modern
Library, 1939. xv, 1077 p. (The Modern Library
of the world's best books)
39-27121 B945.D41R17
This big volume compiled by one of Dewey's most
devoted disciples contains 85 substantial selections,
drawn from 19 of Dewey's books as well as from a
number of periodical articles, and arranged under
21 headings. It is thus a comprehensive survey of
his thought. The "Introduction to John Dewey's
Philosophy" (p. 3-241) and the "Editor's Note,"
on p. 525-566, are themselves the equivalent of a
moderate-sized book.
5288. John Dewey: his contribution to the Amer-
ican tradition. [Edited by] Irwin Edman.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1955. 322 p. (Makers
of the American tradition series)
54-9487 B945.D41E3
734 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A volume of selections from Dewey's writings,
seldom less than a full chapter in length, grouped
under seven headings and preceded by a general in-
troduction from the pen of the editor, a professor
of philosophy at Columbia who died shortly after
completing it. In accord with the principles of the
series, the selections are made to illustrate "the con-
tributions that John Dewey has made to the re-
making of American ideas and institutions." This
involves outlining his general philosophical posi-
tion, but excludes much that is technical.
5289. Essays in honor of John Dewey, on the oc-
casion of his seventieth birthday, October 20,
1929. New York, Holt, 1929. 425 p.
29-24486 B29.E8
Contents. — Personality: how to develop it in the
family, the school, and society, by Felix Adler. —
Religious values and philosophical criticism, by E.
S. Ames. — Evolution and time, by A. G. A. Balz. —
Art, action, and affective states, by H. C. Brown. —
Two basic issues in the problem of meaning and of
truth, by Edwin Burtt. — Kant, Aquinas, and the
problem of reality, by Cornelius Clifford. — A prag-
matic approach to being, by W. F. Cooley. — Conso-
lation and control. A note on the interpretation of
philosophy, by J. J. Coss. — A philosophy of experi-
ence as a philosophy of art, by Irwin Edman. —
Dimensions of universality in religion, by H. L.
Friess. — A criticism of two of Kant's criteria of the
aesthetic, by Kate Gordon. — A pragmatic critique
of the historico-genetic method, by Sidney Hook. —
Certain conflicting tendencies within the present-
day study of education, by W. H. Kilpatrick. —
Causality, by S. P. Lamprecht. — Externalism in
American life, by M. T. McClure. — The empiricist
and experimentalist temper in the middle ages. A
prolegomenon to the study of mediaeval science, by
Richard McKeon. — The nature of the past, by G.
H. Mead. — A functional view of morals, by S. F.
MacLennan. — A materialistic theory of emergent
evolution, by W. P. Montague. — What is meant by
social activity? By E. C. Moore. — The cult of
chronology, by Helen H. Parkhurst. — Dualism in
metaphysics and practical philosophy, by J. H.
Randall, Jr. — Prolegomena to a political ethics, by
A. K. Rogers. — Radical empiricism and religion, by
H. W. Schneider. — The role of the philosopher, by
T. V. Smith. — A methodology of thought, by John
Storck. — Individualism and American life, by J. H.
Tufts. — Looking to philosophy, by Matilde C.
Tufts. — Some implications of Locke's procedure, by
F. J. E. Woodbridge.
5290. The Philosopher of the common man; essays
in honor of John Dewey to celebrate his
eightieth birthday. New York, Putnam, 1940.
228 p. 40-8301 B945.D44P5
Contents. — Ratner, Sidney. Foreword. — Kallen,
H. M. Freedom and education. — Murphy, A. E.
Dewey's theory of the nature and function of phi-
losophy.— Nagel, Ernest. Dewey's reconstruction
of logical theory. — Barnes, A. C. Method in aes-
thetics.— Randall, J. H., Jr. The religion of shared
experience. — Hamilton, Walton. A Deweyesque
mosaic. — Patterson, E. W. Pragmatism as a phi-
losophy of law. — Hu, Shih. The political philoso-
phy of instrumentalism. — Dewey, John. Creative
democracy, the task before us.
5291. Hook, Sidney, ed. John Dewey, philoso-
pher of science and freedom; a symposium.
New York, Dial Press, 1950. 383 p.
50-7272 B945.D44H473
Contents. — John Dewey and the spirit of prag-
matism, by H. M. Kallen. — Dewey and art, by I.
Edman. — Instrumentalism and the history of philos-
ophy, by G. Boas. — Culture and personality, by L.
K. Frank. — Social inquiry and social doctrine, by
H. L. Friess. — Dewey's theories of legal reasoning
and valuation, by E. W. Patterson. — Dewey's con-
tribution to historical theory, by S. Ratner. — John
Dewey and education, by J. L. Childs. — Dewey's
revision of Jefferson, by M. R. Konvitz. — Laity and
prelacy in American democracy, by H. W. Schnei-
der.— Organized labor and the Dewey philosophy,
by M. Starr. — The desirable and emotive in Dewey's
ethics, by S. Hook. — John Dewey's theory of in-
quiry, by F. Kaufmann. — Dewey's theory of nat-
ural science, by E. Nagel. — Concerning a certain
Deweyan conception of metaphysics, by A. Hof-
stadter. — Dewey's theory of language and meaning,
by P. D. Wienpahl. — Language, rules and behavior,
by W. Sellars. — The analytic and the synthetic; an
untenable dualism, by M. G. White. — John Dewey
and Karl Marx, by J. Cork. — Dewey in Mexico, by
J. T. Farrell. — A selected bibliography of publica-
tions by John Dewey (p. 381-382). — Some publica-
tions about John Dewey (p. 383).
On reaching his 70th birthday, John Dewey was
the unrivaled dean of American philosophers, and
was accordingly honored with a Festschrift by his
colleagues, pupils, and friends, in which all con-
tributors acknowledged "a common stimulus in the
leading ideas of a fertile mind," but presented their
own thoughts. Mr. Dewey having reached his 80th
birthday in remarkably good order, a further sym-
posium was produced, the contributors to which
aimed to state his key ideas for the general public
in unacademic language. On his 90th birthday Mr.
Dewey was still alive and a national committee to
celebrate it was formed, which sponsored the third
symposium, with 20 contributors, largely professors
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 735
of philosophy, all concerned with particular aspects
of Dewey's thought or influence.
5292. Hook, Sidney. John Dewey, an intellectual
portrait. New York, John Day, 1939. 242 p.
39-27986 B945.D44H47
A nontechnical statement of Dewey's leading
ideas in a variety of fields, together with a statement
of important criticisms and a reply to them, by one
of Dewey's best-known followers.
5293. Leander, Folke. The philosophy of John
Dewey; a critical study. Goteborg, Elanders
Boktryckeri Aktiebolag, 1939. 154 p. (Goteborgs
kungl. vetenskaps- och vitterhets- Samhalles hand-
lingar. 5. foljden, ser. A, bd. 7, no. 2)
A4 1-4 123 AS284.G7, fol. 5, ser. A, bd. 7, no. 2
"The aim of this book is a critical inquiry into
the basic postulates of Dewey's philosophy." — In-
troduction.
5294. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of
John Dewey. [2d ed.] New York, Tudor
Pub. Co., 195 1. 718 p. (The Library of living
philosophers) 51-6324 B945.D44S35 195 1
Contents. — Biography of John Dewey, edited by
Jane M. Dewey. — Descriptive and critical essays on
the philosophy of John Dewey. — The philosopher
replies. John Dewey: Experience, knowledge and
value: a rejoinder. — Bibliography of the writings of
John Dewey (p. 611-686).
This volume is intended to supplement Dewey's
own writings by providing something of a reso-
lution of conflicting interpretations. It consists of
"a series of expository and critical articles written
by the leading exponents and opponents of the phi-
losopher's thought," followed by the philosopher's
reply. The book first appeared in 1939; the prin-
cipal change in the second edition is the bringing
up to date of the bibliography.
5295. White, Morton G. The origin of Dewey's
instrumentalism. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1943. 161 p. (Columbia studies
in philosophy, no. 4)
43-1850 B945.D44W45 1943
A documented study of Dewey's progressive
"conversion" from idealism to instrumentalism.
5296. Nathanson, Jerome. John Dewey; the re-
construction of the democratic life. New
York, Scribner, 1951. 127 p. (Twentieth century
library) 51-6859 B945.D44N3
A concise presentation of Dewey's ideas in the
fields of philosophy, education, and psychology, to-
gether with an estimate of his influence.
5297. JONATHAN EDWARDS, 1703-1758
In Puritan New England philosophy was
conceived of as the basis for and rationalization of
theology. Edwards was the leading exponent of the
Congregationalist Calvinism of his day. A well-
educated man, he was aware of philosophical move-
ments in Europe, and could draw upon them in
constructing his notable defenses of orthodoxy, such
as The Great Christian Doctrine of Original Sin
Defended (Boston, S. Kneeland, 1758. xviii, 386 p.)
and his famous Enquiry into the freedom of the will
(no. 26). Edwards was also a master of the new
expository prose, and thus one of the major figures
in colonial literature; his main writings are listed
and discussed in Chapter I on Literature (nos. 21-
SO-
5298. The Philosophy of Jonathan Edwards from
his private notebooks. Edited by Harvey G.
Townsend. Eugene, University of Oregon, 1955.
xxii, 270 p. (University of Oregon monographs.
Studies in philosophy, no. 2)
55-63038 B870.A5 1955
Contents. — Of being. — The mind. — Miscellanies.
5299. Miller, Perry. Jonathan Edwards. [New
York] Sloane Associates, 1949. xv, 348 p.
(The American men of letters series)
49-50164 BX7260.E3M5 1949
"A note on the sources": p. 331-333.
The life of Edwards was eventful only in its
intellectual development, and Professor Miller is
concerned here with tracing his career as a thinker.
More details of his life as a clergyman and pater-
familias are given in Ola Elizabeth Winslow's
Jonathan Edwards, IJ03-1758 (New York, Mac-
millan, 1940. 406 p.). Another study of Edwards'
philosophical position is Arthur B. Crabtree's
Jonathan Edwards' View of Man; a Study in
Eighteenth Century Calvinism (Wallington, Eng.,
Religious Education Press, 1948. 64 p.).
5300. RALPH WALDO EMERSON, 1803-1882
The leading figure in the transcendental
movement, Emerson was considered by Royce to be
one of the three outstanding American philosophers.
He was not so much a systematic thinker as a poetic
philosopher more inclined to trust his intuition than
his reason. He was nevertheless a scholar familiar
with many of the world's philosophies, and these he
in large measure assimilated into his work, which
had as its base the Puritan tradition that had been
developing for several centuries. Because Emer-
son's philosophy was expressed in essays, lectures,
and poetry of unusual merit, his works appear in
736 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Chapter I on Literature (nos. 280-306), where he is
discussed in greater detail.
5301. Gray, Henry David. Emerson; a statement
of New England transcendentalism as ex-
pressed in the philosophy of its chief exponent.
Stanford University, Calif., The University, 19 17.
no p. (Leland Stanford Junior University publi-
cations. University series [29])
17-30128 PS1642.P4G72
Published also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia Uni-
versity, 1905.
Bibliography: p. [io5]-io7.
5302. JOHN FISKE, 1842-1901
Fiske's importance is that of a lucid popu-
larizer who introduces a nation to new ways of
thought. Influenced principally by the philosophy
of Herbert Spencer, Fiske early endorsed Darwin-
ian evolutionism. Much of his popularity resulted
from his "reconciling" the new scientific doctrines
with the theological orthodoxies which he con-
tinued to accept. Throughout his mature life he
was important not only for his widely read books,
but also for the innumerable lectures he delivered.
His first important book was Myths and Myth-
Makers (Boston, Osgood, 1873. 251 p.), which
revealed one of his wide-ranging interests. He then
started building up his lectures into books; his pub-
lished articles had already established for him a
considerable reputation. In the late 1870's he began
to devote most of his attention to history, which
remained his main field of activity to the time of
his death in 190 1. In history too he was not an
original investigator, but a re-stater and popularizer
from other historians of his day. In both fields he
always displayed rare vigor and lucidity of style
and a real probity in his presentation of the find-
ings of others. These qualities made him one of
the outstanding popular educators and intellectual
leaders of the last quarter of the 19th century.
After his death his work was collected in a set,
The Writings of John Fisk^e (Cambridge, Mass.,
Riverside Press, 1902. 24 v.). A recent interpre-
tation of the nature and evolution of Fiske's thought
is H. Burnell Pannill's The Religious Faith of John
Fis^e (Durham, N. C, Duke University Press,
1957. 263 p.), which views his work as a restate-
ment of the "core of the Christian message which
the new science of his day had developed."
5303. Outlines of cosmic philosophy; based on the
doctrine of evolution, with criticisms on the
positive philosophy. With an introd. by Josiah
Royce. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1903. 4 v.
4-21706 B945.F43O76
First issued in 1874, this is Fiske's principal con-
tribution to philosophy, in which he presents a
complete outline of the new cosmology. It long
ranked as a major philosophical work and was
highly praised by many of the evolutionary move-
ment's scientific and philosophic leaders, who were
glad to have Fiske as an ally.
5304. The Letters of John Fiske, edited by his
daughter, Ethel F. Fisk. New York, Mac-
millan, 1940. 706 p. 41-1890 E175.5.F47
Mrs. Fisk's volume presents her father's letters
without any index, introduction, or identifying
footnotes. Fiske's letters are lively and unstudied;
their interest is such as to make a modern biog-
raphy to supplement them seem desirable. John
Spencer Clark's The Life and Letters of John Fisl{e
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 19 17. 2 v.) presents its
letters mainly in extracts comprising part of a bio-
graphical whole. It is a completely admiring work
by a friend and engages in frequent discussion of
the philosophy and theology of Fiske's day. A
brief sketch by a friend is Thomas Sergeant Perry's
John FisJ^e (Boston, Small, Maynard, 1906. 105 p.).
5305. WILLIAM TORREY HARRIS, 1835-1909
Harris began his career as a teacher in St.
Louis. He early came under the influence of A.
Bronson Alcott (q.v.); then, through his reading of
Theodore Parker (q.v.), he was led to study Goethe
and Kant. In 1858 he met Henry C. Brokmeyer
(1828-1906), the Prussian-born philosophic iron-
molder. Through him Harris discovered the phi-
losophy of Hegel, which proved a decisive and
dominant factor in his life and views. Under
Brokmeyer 's lead he took a prominent role in the
founding and developing of the Hegelian St. Louis
school of philosophy. Aspects of this movement
and of the roles of Brokmeyer and Harris are dis-
cussed in Frances B. Harmon's The Social Phi-
losophy of the St. Louis Hegelians (New York,
1943. 112 p.) and in Henry A. Pochmann's New
England Transcendentalism and St. Louis Hegehan-
ism; Phases in the History of American Idealism
(Philadelphia, Carl Schurz Memorial Foundation,
1948. 144 p.), which also gives considerable atten-
tion to the influence of Bronson Alcott. In 1867
Harris founded the Journal of Speculative Philos-
ophy, the first journal of its kind in America, and
a leading organ for new philosophers until its
demise in 1893; it also introduced to America much
of the work of Hegel and his German followers.
Because of poor health, Harris in 1880 resigned his
position of superintendent of the St. Louis public
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 737
schools and went to Massachusetts to take part in the
founding of the Concord School of Philosophy. In
1889 he became United States Commissioner of
Education, a position which he held until 1906. In
this period he built up a reputation as a great edu-
cator, which has proved more lasting than his con-
temporary fame as a leading philosopher. While his
philosophy of absolute idealism was rather more
sophisticated and formally logical than that of the
transcendentalists, it was largely derivative, and rep-
resented the end of a movement rather than the
beginning of one. The fact that the St. Louis school
as a whole produced no important literary work has
contributed to its posthumous obscurity. Harris
himself wrote much, but most of it took the form of
articles and pamphlets, and his use of language was
ordinarily lifeless.
5306. Hegel's logic. A book on the genesis of the
categories of the mind. A critical exposi-
tion. Chicago, S. C. Griggs, 1890. xxx, 403 p.
11-16863 B2949.L8H3
This exposition of the logic of Hegel was Harris'
most important single book and a focal work for
the Hegelian and neo-Hegelian movements in
America. It has been said that in it he cleared up
some of Hegel's own obscurities.
5307. Psychologic foundations of education; an
attempt to show the genesis of the higher
faculties of the mind. New York, Appleton, 1898.
xxxv, 400 p. (International education series, edited
by W. T. Harris, v. 37) 6-30238 LB1051.H3
This is a statement of Harris' philosophy of edu-
cation in the light of the faculty psychology, which
by 1898 was rapidly dying out. Studies of Harris'
role in education and his educational philosophy in-
clude John S. Roberts' William T. Harris; a Critical
Study of His Educational and Related Philosophi-
cal Views (Washington, National Education Asso-
ciation of the United States, 1924. 250 p.) and Carl
L. Byerly's Contributions of William Torrey Harris
to Public School Administration (Chicago, 1946.
219 p.).
5308. Introduction to the study of philosophy.
Comprising passages from his writings se-
lected and arr. with commentary and illustration,
by Marietta Kies. New York, Appleton, 1889.
287 p. 10-28629 BD31.H3
While Harris himself did not succeed in organiz-
ing his philosophical system into one work, Mari-
etta Kies, in a master's thesis at the University of
Michigan, did manage to select passages from his
articles and books in such a way as to present a
synoptic view of his system.
5309. Leidecker, Kurt E. Yankee teacher; the
life of William Torrey Harris. New York,
Philosophical Library, 1946. xx, 648 p.
A49-9816 LB875.H25L4
This, the only full-scale biography of Harris,
leaves much to be desired as to organization and in-
dexing, but contains a wealth of detail gleaned from
his diaries and personal correspondence. It treats
his philosophical activities as fully as his other pur-
suits. Other works on Harris and his philosophy
include William Torrey Harris, 1835-1935; a Col-
lection of Essays, Including Papers and Addresses
Presented in Commemoration of Dr. Harris' Cen-
tennial at the St. Louis Meeting of the Western
Division of the American Philosophical Society
(Chicago, Open Court Pub. Co., 1936. 136 p.),
edited by Edward L. Schaub, and William Torrey
Harris; the Commemoration of the One Hundredth
Anniversary of His Birth (Washington, U.S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1937. 70 p.), edited for the U. S. Office
of Education by Walton C. John. A more special-
ized study is Thomas H. Clare's The Sociological
Theories of William Torrey Harris (St. Louis, Mo.,
1936. 262 p.).
5310. WILLIAM ERNEST HOCKING, 1873-
Dr. Hocking was for 30 years a professor
of philosophy at Harvard University until his re-
tirement in 1943, and was widely in demand for
special lectures in other institutions at home and
abroad. A philosopher in the idealist tradition, he
has given relatively little attention to epistemology
or metaphysics, but has concentrated upon working
out an idealist view of religion, ethics, and human
personality, usually in harmony with orthodox
Christianity. His general survey of problems and
characteristic solutions, Types of Philosophy, rev.
ed. (New York, Scribner, 1939. xix, 520 p.), was
originally published in 1929 and has been widely
used as a college textbook for nearly three decades.
Professor Hocking has also been extensively con-
cerned with social and political problems, in books
such as Man and the State (New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1926. 463 p.), The Spirit of World
Politics, with Special Studies of the Near East (New
York, Macmillan, 1932. 571 p.), Freedom of the
Press, a Framework of Principle; A Report from the
Commission on Freedom of the Press (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1947. 242 P-)> Experi-
ment in Education; What We Can Learn from
Teaching Germany (Chicago, Regnery, 1954. 303
p.), and The Coming World Civilization (New
York, Harper, 1956. 210 p.). Dr. Hocking's first
54 years of publication are itemized in a compilation
of Richard C. Gilman, The Bibliography of William
Ernest Hocking, from 1898 to 195 1 (Waterville,
73« /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Me., Colby College, 195 1. 63 p.); it lists 207 books
(18), pamphlets, addresses, articles, and letters to
the press, and includes an index of principal ideas
and references.
531 1. The Meaning of God in human experience;
a philosophic study of religion. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1912. xxxix, 586 p.
12-14946 BL51.H6
Dr. Hocking's first book, which established his
reputation as a thinker of consequence. Written
in the light of the religious thought of his "honored
masters," Royce and James, it is an attempt to re-
instate, on tbe one hand, religion as a valid and
essential form of human experience, and, on the
other, philosophy as a sound and reasonable inter-
preter of religion. Neither idealism nor pragma-
tism has presented an adequate view of religion; it
is mysticism, conceived as a practice of union with
God, which supplies their deficiencies. "There is
no creativity in human life without the Absolute
as one party thereto." Living Religions and a World
Faith (New York, Macmillan, 1940. 291 p.) is "a
discussion of the rightful future relationships of the
great religions, what attitudes they should hold to
one another, and with what justification we might
look forward to the prevalence of one of them as a
world faith."
5312. Human nature and its remaking. New and
rev. ed. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1923. xxvi, 496 p. 24-362 BF711.H6 1923
Dr. Hocking's highly original treatise on ethics,
which first appeared in 1918, assumes that original
human nature is a group of instincts, which require
to be transformed in order to achieve a social order
or the supersocial orders of art and religion. The
book originated in an effort to challenge a group of
tendencies, Nietzscheian, Freudian, and others,
which the author lumps together under the name
of moral realism. It affirms that only the mind,
rather than any instinct or group of instincts, can
experience satisfaction, and insists that, over and
above the work of society, there must be the work
of the individual will, kept in mind of its proper
goals by religion, and most adequately by
Christianity.
5313. The Self, its body and freedom. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1928. 178 p.
(The Terry lectures) 28-8941 BF311.H6
In these lectures delivered at Yale on the D. H.
Terry Foundation, the author is concerned "with
the old question, How is the self set in the world
of nature?" and aims to contribute in "an untech-
nical way toward our sense of proportion in psy-
chology." The self is called "a system of purposive
behavior emerging from a persistent hope"; the
body is regarded as an organ of the self as is, to some
extent, the whole of nature; while freedom is the
essence of selfhood, and every act of a living self a
free act. A later inquiry in a related field is The
Lasting Elements of Individualism (New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1937. 187 p.), which the
author describes as "a study in the philosophy of
history — looking forward! It is hostile not to prag-
matism, but to mere pragmatism: it believes that
our experimentalism is destined to transform itself
into a version of the 'dialectic method' whereby mere
groping takes on a rational direction and destina-
tion. Out of the flux, certainty."
5314. What man can make of man. New York,
Harper, 1942. 62 p.
42-17192 BD431.H52
A small book which is an epitome of Dr. Hock-
ing's views on the crucial issues of the age. A
democratic world cannot be based on the biological
or the psychological human creature, but only on
the human soul devoted to goals of equality and
fraternity which lie beyond scientific measurements.
5315. Science and the idea of God. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1944.
124 p. 44-8718 BL240.H715
In these lectures, originally delivered on the J. C.
McNair Foundation at the University of North
Carolina in 1940, Dr. Hocking reviews the uneasy
truce between science and religion; insists that,
while science can tolerate an inactive or nominal
God, religion requires an active one; and points out
the ill consequences of "getting on without God"
in psychology, in sociology, and in cosmology.
5316. The Meaning of immortality in human ex-
perience, including Thoughts on death and
life, rev. New York, Harper, 1957. 263 p.
57-10950 BD421.H62
A volume built up out of lectures at three uni-
versities, which incorporates a revised edition of the
author's Thoughts on Death and Life (New York,
Harper, 1937. 260 p.). Its temper is far from
dogmatic, but it emphasizes the crucial nature of
death and survival for human thinking, and em-
ploys the relativistic doctrine of a plurality of spaces
to suggest that the conditions which make for the
concrete freedom of the creative self make equally
for the possibility of survival.
5317. GEORGE HOLMES HOWISON, 1834-
1917
Among the exponents of idealism was Howison,
whose theory of personalistic pluralism resembled
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 739
the philosophy of Borden P. Bowne (1847-1910),
but was arrived at independendy. While he holds
a firm, if minor, position in the history of American
philosophy, Howison's most notable contribution
was his long service as professor of mental and
moral philosophy at the University of California.
His principal statement of his own philosophy was
The Limits of Evolution and Other Essays, 2d ed.,
rev. (New York, Macmillan, 1904. 450 p.).
5318. George Holmes Howison, philosopher and
teacher. A selection from his writings, with
a biographical sketch, by John Wright Buckham and
George Malcolm Stratton. Berkeley, University of
California Press, 1934. 418 p.
34-17950 B945.H71B8
"A list of Howison's published writings": p. 381—
387; "A partial list of references to Howison in
philosophical publications": p. 389-390.
5319. HENRY JAMES, 1811-1882
James early revolted against traditional re-
ligion but retained his intense religious inclinations.
After studying and criticizing the philosophy of
Swedenborg, he formulated his own philosophical
system, which has affiliations both with the Christian
tradition and with transcendentalism, but is on the
whole an extremely original formulation. God is
the assumed starting-point, the Creator and the
only reality; Nature is the preliminary and imperfect
stage of creation; Society, or "aggregate humanity"
redeemed by a pure and altruistic love of man for
man, is its redeemed and perfected stage, the in-
carnation of God. Democracy, completed on a
social and moral level instead of merely a political
one, is the forerunner of redeemed Society. These
views were expressed in such books as Substance
and Shadow: or Morality and Religion in Their
Relation to Life: an Essay upon the Physics of
Creation (Boston, Ticknor & Fields, 1863. 539 p.),
Society the Redeemed Form of Man, and the Earnest
of God's Omnipotence in Human Nature: Affirmed
in Letters to a Friend (Boston, Houghton, Osgood,
1879. 485 p.), and the autobiographical fragment
and the book, "Spiritual Life," in his posthumous
Literary Remains (Boston, Osgood, 1885. 471 p.),
edited by William James. All are individual in
style and organization, and far from easy to read or
comprehend, which is sufficient to account for James'
very limited influence in his day and since. The
elder James has to a large extent been overshadowed
by his towering sons, Henry James, Jr., the novelist,
and William James, the philosopher. This intellec-
tually prominent family is presented in Francis O.
Matthiessen's The fames Family: Including Selec-
tions from the Writings of Henry fames, Senior,
William, Henry, & Alice fames (New York, Knopf,
1947. 706 p.), and in Clinton Hartley Grattan's
The Three Jameses; a Family of Minds: Henry
fames, Sr., William fames, Henry fames (New
York, Longmans, Green, 1932. 376 p.). An inde-
pendent biography of Henry James, Sr., is Austin
Warren's The Elder Henry fames (New York,
Macmillan, 1934. 269 p.). He is also discussed at
length in the autobiographical works of his son
Henry James, Jr., under whom they are entered in
Chapter I on Literature.
5320. Young, Frederic Harold. The philosophy
of Henry James, Sr. New York, Bookman
Associates, 195 1. xiv, 338 p.
51-5328 B921.J24Y6
A study of James' philosophy, which originated
as a Columbia University dissertation. Through
the use of frequent quotations the author attempts
to present all the key passages from James' writings.
The bibliography (p. 321-332) is meant to be ex-
haustive.
5321. WILLIAM JAMES, 1 842-1910
William James, son of Henry James, Sr.
(vide supra) and brother of the novelist Henry
James, Jr. (q. v.), is America's best-known philos-
opher. Often classed as a pragmatist, he called
himself a "radical empiricist" whose method was
"pragmatism." He first studied to become a
painter, and when he had decided he was not an
artist, studied medicine without intending to prac-
tice. He began his career as an instructor in
physiology at Harvard; when philosophical prob-
lems became paramount for him, he transferred to
the Department of Philosophy. This crossing of
lines was evidenced throughout his work, but es-
pecially in his first major publication, Principles of
Psychology. In this and subsequent works James
revealed himself not only as an eminent thinker,
but also as a quite original stylist, whose unex-
pected phrasing could illuminate the most technical
matters and suggest the widest relationships of his
subject. While his stylistic merits have retained for
his works a wide general audience, it is the basic
substance of his work which has earned for him
an international audience and the reputation of
being one of America's few truly great thinkers.
One of James' most important works, The Varieties
of Religious Experience (1902) is entered in the
next chapter (no. 5431).
5322. The Principles of psychology. Authorized
ed., unabridged. [New York] Dover Pub-
lications, 1950, ci9i8. 2 v. in 1.
50-7801 BF121.J2 1950
740 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
This work, which first appeared in 1890, was one
of the major books of the period. While it con-
tains many philosophical observations and implica-
tions, it is notable as a work that led to the estab-
lishment of psychology as a separate science rather
than a subdivision of philosophy. In it James re-
jected the traditional concept of the mind's inde-
pendence of the body; both were presented as
aspects of a single natural phenomenon. While
the book has been superseded in some details, it
remains a basic work in the science of psychology
as well as a milestone in the history of philosophy.
5323. The Will to believe, and other essays in
popular philosophy. London, New York,
Longmans, Green, 1937. xvii, 333 p.
38~3°375 B945.J23W5 1937
Contents. — The will to believe. — Is life worth
living? — The sentiment of rationality. — Reflex ac-
tion and theism. — The dilemma of determinism. —
The moral philosopher and the moral life. — Great
men and their environment. — The importance of
individuals. — On some Hegelisms. — What psychi-
cal research has accomplished.
A collection of 10 essays, most of which were
originally delivered as lectures before philosophy
groups in a number of colleges, first published in
1897. In them James discusses moral and religious
problems in the light of his attitude of radical
empiricism. Further papers of the same type will
be found in Tall{s to Teachers on Psychology; and
to Students on Some of Life's Ideals (New York,
Holt, 1899. 301 p.).
5324. Pragmatism, a new name for some old way
of thinking; popular lectures on philosophy.
London, New York, Longmans, Green, 1940.
308 p. 43-44203 B832.J2 1940
5325. The Meaning of truth, a sequel to "Pragma-
tism." New York, Longmans, Green, 1909.
xxi, 297 p. 9-27102 B832.J4
Contents. — The function of cognition. — The
tigers in India. — Humanism and truth. — The rela-
tion between knower and known. — The essence of
humanism. — A word more about truth. — Professor
Piatt on truth. — The pragmatist account of truth
and its misunderstanders. — The meaning of the
word truth. — The existence of Julius Caesar. — The
absolute and the strenuous life. — Professor Hebert
on pragmatism. — Abstractionism and "relativis-
mus." — Two English critics. — A dialogue.
5326. A Pluralistic universe; Hibbert lectures at
Manchester College on the present situation
in philosophy. New York, Longmans, Green, 1909.
404 p. 9-9478 B804.J2
Contents. — 1. The types of philosophic think-
ing.— 2. Monistic idealism. — 3. Hegel and his
method. — 4. Concerning Fechner. — 5. The com-
pounding of consciousness. — 6. Bergson and his
critique of intellectualism. — 7. The continuity of
experience. — 8. Conclusions. Notes. — Appendixes:
A. The thing and its relations. B. The experience
of activity. C. On the notion of reality as chang-
ing.— Index.
An aura of frustration hovered over James' last
years. He had damaged his heart in 1898 by over-
indulgence in mountaineering, and it was progres-
sively giving out. A rounded, systematic, and de-
finitive statement of his essential philosophy was
gready desired, by others and by himself. He was,
however, in enormous demand for public lectures,
and did not like to refuse, especially since he was
convinced of the desirability of converting the larger
public to the empirical outlook. He therefore
undertook to lecture upon pragmatism at the Lowell
Institute, Boston, in the closing months of 1906, and
repeated the lectures at Columbia early in 1907,
before audiences of a thousand. The lectures were
worked into shape for publication by the early sum-
mer, and Pragmatism had a popular effect such as
few philosophical books have ever achieved. It
also involved its author in a tide of acknowledg-
ment, explanation, and controversy which absorbed
his energies. This led him to collect his papers on
the same or related themes, the oldest of which,
"The Function of Consciousness," went back to
1885, in The Meaning of Truth. Nor could a
further invitation to lecture at Oxford University
in May 1908 be declined, for here was an oppor-
tunity to take "the scalp of the Absolute" in the very
citadel of its defenders. But, as he complained to
one of his chief allies, "this job condemns me to
publish another book written in picturesque and
popular style" — A Pluralistic Universe. His sands
ran out, and the "concise, dry, and impersonal"
treatise that he had desired to write remained for-
ever unwritten.
5327. Essays in radical empiricism. New impres-
sion. London, New York, Longmans,
Green, 1938. 282 p. 43-15820 B945.J23E7 1938
Editor's preface signed: Ralph Barton Perry.
Contents. — Does "consciousness" exist? — A
world of pure experience. — The thing and its re-
lations.— How two minds can know one thing. —
The place of affectional facts in a world of pure ex-
perience.— The experience of activity. — The essence
of humanism. — La notion de conscience. — Is radical
empiricism solipsistic? — Mr. Pitkin's refutation of
"radical empiricism." — Humanism and truth once
more. — Absolutism and empiricism.
These essays, first published posthumously in
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 74 1
1912, are interconnected and had been brought to-
gether before his death by James, who apparendy
intended some such work as a presentation of his
essential philosophical position. The work has
therefore more unity than most such collections.
5328. Memories and studies. New York, Long-
mans, Green, 191 1. 411 p.
11-26966 B945.J23M5 1911
A volume of essays and addresses which James
had been planning to bring together, and were post-
humously edited by his brother, Henry James.
5329. Collected essays and reviews. New York,
Longmans, Green, 1920. 516 p. Preface
signed: Ralph Barton Perry.
21-112 B945.J2 1920
A collection of 39 articles and reviews which had
not previously appeared in book form.
5330. The Letters of William James, edited by
his son, Henry James. Boston, Adantic
Monthly Press, 1920. 2 v. illus.
20-23198 B945.J24A3 1920
These letters reveal the pith and charm of James'
informal style, as well as reflecting his strong family
attachments, wide range of interests, frequent trav-
els, and a farflung and unusually interesting body of
friends, together with the progress of his career and
the development of his thought.
5331. The Philosophy of William James, drawn
from his own works; with an introd. by
Horace M. Kallen. New York, Modern Library,
1925. 375 p. (The Modern Library of the world's
best books) 26-948 B945.J24A5 1925
"The works of William James": p. 371-375.
The "selections which make up this book have
been chosen with the view of presenting the philos-
ophy of William James systematically in his own
words and in convenient compass, with some ap-
proximation to that rounded wholeness he himself
would have given it had he lived to complete his
work." Dr. Kallen was a pupil of James, and was
chosen by him to edit the uncompleted manuscript
of Some Problems of Philosophy (New York, Long-
mans, Green, 191 1. 236 p.), which James had in-
tended as an introduction to the subject.
5332. Selected papers on philosophy. London,
Dent; New York, Dutton, 1929. xvi, 273 p.
(Everyman's library [no. 739])
37"5572 AC1.E8, no. 739
"First published in this edition 1917."
Introduction by C. M. Bakewell.
"The principal works of William James": p.
xiii-xv.
Contents. — On a certain blindness in human be-
ings.— The gospel of relaxation. — The energies of
men. — Habit. — The will. — Philosophy and its crit-
ics.— The will to believe. — The sentiment of ration-
ality.— Great men and their environment. — What
pragmatism means. — Humanism and truth. — The
positive content of religious experience.
5333. Essays in pragmatism. Edited with an
introd. by Alburey Castell. New York, Haf-
ner Pub. Co., 1948. xvi, 176 p. (The Hafner
library of classics, no. 7) 49-1 115 B945.J23E67
Contents. — The sentiment of rationality. — The
dilemma of determinism. — The moral philosopher
and the moral life. — The will to believe. — Conclu-
sions on varieties of religious experience. — What
pragmatism means. — Pragmatism's conception of
truth.
Selections from James' more popular writings in
inexpensive editions designed for college students
or the general reader. A brief, very untechnical,
and entirely admiring summary of James' thought
was prepared by Lloyd R. Morris for Scribner's
Twentieth century library: William James; the
Message of a Modern Mind (New York, 1950.
98 p.).
5334. Perry, Ralph Barton. The thought and char-
acter of William James, as revealed in unpub-
lished correspondence and notes, together with his
published writings. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935.
2 v.
Bibliography at end of each volume.
35-25802 B945.J24P4
Contents. — 1. Inheritance and vocation. — 2.
Philosophy and psychology.
Perry (1 876-1 957) was a pupil and colleague of
James who edited two of his posthumous books and
prepared an Annotated Bibliography of the Writ-
ings of William fames (New York, Longmans,
Green, 1920. 69 p.). A quarter-century after
James' death he produced this monumental study
of the man and his philosophy, which was rewarded
with the Pulitzer prize in biography in 1936. He
drew upon some 500 additional letters not included
in Henry James' edition of 1920. In 1948 he pub-
lished a "briefer version" of this work in one volume
(Cambridge, Harvard University Press. 402 p.)
which gave less attention to James' immature views,
but also incorporated some new manuscript mate-
rial of importance. An invitation to lecture at In-
diana University gave Perry the opportunity to sum
up James' thought in a nontechnical way, and to in-
dicate the development of his own thinking out of
certain of its strands: In the Spirit of William fames
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. 211 p.).
Perry himself taught philosophy at Harvard for 44
years (1902-46) and excelled in summaries of re-
742 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cent thought for the student or general reader, such
as Present Philosophical Tendencies: a Critical Sur-
vey of Naturalism, Idealism, Pragmatism, and
Realism (New York, Braziller, 1955. xv, 383 p.),
originally published in 1912, and Philosophy of the
Recent Past; an Outline of European and American
Philosophy since i860 (New York, Scribner, 1926.
230 p.). His chief original contributions lay in the
field of value theory: General Theory of Value
(Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1950, ci926.
xvii, 702 p.) and Realms of Value; a Critique of
Human Civilization (Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1954. 497 p.).
5335. In commemoration of William James, 1842-
1942. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1942. 234 p. 42-52145 B945.J24I5
Contents.' — pt. 1. Papers presented at the Confer-
ence on Methods in Philosophy and the Sciences,
New School for Social Research, New York City,
November 23, 1941: Remarks on the occasion of
the centenary of William James, by Henry James.
Remembering William James, by H. M. Kallen. A
debt to James, by D. S. Miller. William James as
psychologist, by E. B. Holt. William James as
empiricist, by John Dewey. Two questions raised
by "The moral equivalent of war," by J. S. Bixler. —
pt. 2. Papers presented at the annual meeting of
the Eastern division, American Philosophical Asso-
ciation, Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, New York,
December 29, 194 1: If William James were alive
today, by R. B. Perry. The psychology of William
James in relation to philosophy, by G. S. Brett.
William James and the facts of knowledge, by D. C.
Williams. William James as a moralist, by H. W.
Schneider. — pt. 3. Papers presented at the annual
meeting of the Western division, American Philo-
sophical Association, University of Wisconsin, Madi-
son, Wisconsin, April 24, 1942: Jamesian psychology
and the stream of psychological thought, by J. R.
Kantor. William James' pluralistic metaphysics of
experience, by Victor Lowe. William James today,
by Charles Morris. — pt. 4. Papers from other oc-
casions: William James, philosopher of faith, by
E. W. Lyman. William James and the crisis of
philosophy, by Arnold Metzger. The founder of
pragmatism, by W. H. Hill.
These addresses were assembled by Professors
Brand Blanshard and Herbert W. Schneider.
5336. Wisconsin. University. William James, the
man and the thinker; addresses delivered at
the University of Wisconsin in celebration of the
centenary of his birth. Madison, University of Wis-
consin Press, 1942. 147 p.
43-52550 B945.j24W5
Contents. — William James and Wisconsin, by
G. C. Sellery. — The distinctive philosophy of Wil-
liam James, by M. C. Otto. — William James, man
and philosopher, by D. S. Miller. — William James
and psychoanalysis, by Norman Cameron. — The
William James centenary dinner: Introductory re-
marks, by C. A. Dykstra. William James and the
world today, by John Dewey, read by Carl Boegholt.
William James in the American tradition, by B. H.
Bode. — The Sunday service: William James as
religious thinker, by J. S. Bixler.
5337. JAMES McCOSH, 1811-1894
McCosh was born and raised in Scotland,
where he entered the ministry in 1834; however, he
soon found himself siding by conviction with the
liberals, and with them left the established Church
of Scotland to found the Free Church of Scotland.
McCosh was influenced by the then flourishing
Scottish school of philosophy, and at the University
of Edinburgh came under the influence of William
Hamilton. These debts are reflected in The Scottish
Philosophy, Biographical, Expository, Critical, from
Hutcheson to Hamilton (New York, R. Carter,
1875. 481 p.), written after he came to America.
McCosh's early acceptance of Hamilton's position
was soon modified, however, as he discovered a
closer affinity for the intuitionism of earlier thinkers
of the Scottish school. His dissatisfaction with the
naturalism implicit in J. S. Mill's System of Logic
(1843) led him to write his first book, The Method
of Divine Government, Physical and Moral (Edin-
burgh, Sutherland & Knox, 1850. 531 p.). This
gained him attention in philosophical circles and
led to his appointment to a chair at Queen's College,
Belfast, Ireland, where he remained for 16 years.
His writings at Belfast included two of his most
important philosophical works: The Intuitions of
the Mind Inductively Investigated (London, J.
Murray, i860. 504 p.) and An Examination of Mr.
/. S. Mill's Philosophy; being a Defence of Funda-
mental Truth (London, Macmillan, 1866; 2d ed.,
with additions, New York, Carter, 1871. 470 p.).
In 1868 he came to America to assume the position
of president of the College of New Jersey (Prince-
ton), which he filled with distinction for 20 years.
Here he continued to write, but it was probably as
a lecturer and educator that he had his greatest
influence. His introduction of a modified Scottish
intuitionism of "fundamental truth," leading to a
"common-sense realism," brought a new philosoph-
ical mode to this country and was widely influential.
McCosh was also a crucial figure in the controversy
centering about the Darwinian theory of evolution,
for in the 1870's he was one of the few ministers in
the United States to defend the theory, which he
viewed as adding to the glory of God's creation;
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 743
his views were expressed in The Religious Aspect of
Evolution (New York, Putnam, 1888. 109 p.). In
America he became increasingly interested in psy-
chology and produced several widely read books
dealing with the subject. Notwithstanding his
earlier career in the British Isles, he may be said to
have become the most representative American phi-
losopher of his day. He was genuinely receptive to
new discoveries and ideas without losing his grasp
of religious fundamentals, and is likely to remain a
figure both interesting and estimable.
5338. Christianity and positivism: a series of lec-
tures to the times on natural theology and
apologetics. New York, R. Carter, 187 1. 369 p.
30-11323 BL51.M2
Ten lectures delivered the same year at Union
Theological Seminary in New York.
5339. The Emotions. New York, Scribner, 1880.
255 p. 10-21236 BF531.M2
An attempt to understand the psychical problems
of the emotions. The author does not "overlook
their physiological concomitants and effects," but he
enters "little into controversy."
5340. Psychology: the cognitive powers. New
York, Scribner, 1886. 245 p.
10-19670 BF121.M2
5341. Psychology: the motive powers, emotions,
conscience, will. New York, Scribner, 1887.
267 p. 10-19671 BF121.M22
Widely used as textbooks, these works remained
in print into the 20th century, when Jamesian and
other psychologies in large part superseded Mc-
Cosh's work.
5342. Realistic philosophy defended in a philo-
sophic series. New York, Scribner, 1887.
2 v. 12-36367 B835.M3
Contents. — 1. Expository. — 2. Historical and
critical.
The first volume is a collection of McCosh's philo-
sophical papers, which in large part had been pub-
lished as separate booklets. The second volume is
a series of studies of other philosophers.
5343. First and fundamental truths, being a trea-
tise on metaphysics. New York, Scribner,
1889. 360 p. n-31414 BD111.M18
A work which sums up the author's final philo-
sophical position. In part it is a reconsideration and
rewriting of An Examination oj Mr. J. S. Mill's Phi-
losophy; being a Defence of Fundamental Truth
(1866), mentioned above.
5344. The Life of James McCosh; a record chiefly
autobiographical, edited by William Milligan
Sloane. New York, Scribner, 1896. 287 p.
4-16947 LD4605.A3 1868
Bibliography, by Joseph H. Dulles: p. [2691-282.
Some of McCosh's co-workers and students, dur-
ing the last years of his life, wished to preserve a
record of his activities. To this end they induced
him to set down reminiscences from time to time;
these have here been incorporated with other ma-
terial to form a composite biography.
5345. CHARLES SANDERS PEIRCE, 1 839-1914
Opinions of Peirce have varied gready; he
has even been called the greatest philosopher of the
19th century. Certainly he has had an extensive
influence in the development of thought. However,
his attempts at precision resulted in a difficult style,
which, combined with his assumption of wide phil-
osophical knowledge in his readers (he said he was
writing for but one in millions), have left him with
a considerable reputation among philosophers and
virtual anonymity among the laity. Peirce began
his career as a scientist, with intensive training in
physics and chemistry, and followed this with ex-
tensive incursions into other scientific fields, such as
geodesy, astronomy, and psychology. Science was
thus a major factor in the development of his phi-
losophy, for which he coined the word "pragmatic."
With the development of a quite different and more
popular pragmatism by his friend, William James,
Peirce named his system "pragmaticism." While
Peirce produced no one systematic work intended to
expound his philosophy, he did write numerous
papers (many of them unpublished during his life)
which were intended to lay a massive foundation
for a new philosophy for the modern age.
5346. Collected papers. Edited by Charles Harts-
horne and Paul Weiss. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1931-35. 6 v.
31-30898^ B945.P43C6 1931
Since a great part of Peirce's writings were still
in manuscript form at the time of his death, much
of his work appeared for the first time in the Col-
lected Papers. Of this set the editors write in the
introduction to volume 1 : "The more important of
these manuscripts of Peirce, as well as his published
papers, have now been brought together in some ten
volumes which will appear in rapid succession. The
first volume contains in outline his system, so far as
it can be presented, his writings on scientific method
and the classification of the sciences, his doctrine of
the categories, and his work on ethics. The next
volume deals with the theory of signs and meaning,
traditional logic, induction, the science of discovery
744 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and probability; and the third volume reprints his
published work on modern logic. The fourth in-
cludes his unpublished original contributions to the
foundations of mathematics, logic and graphs. The
fifth volume contains his papers on pragmatism.
The sixth is concerned with metaphysics. It is ex-
pected that the remaining volumes will contain his
writings on physics and psychology, as well as his
reviews, letters and biography." After a 23-year
interval, the publication of volumes 7 and 8 under
a new editor, Arthur W. Burks, was scheduled by
the Harvard University Press for 1958.
5347. Chance, love, and logic; philosophical essays.
Edited with an introd. by Morris R. Cohen;
with a supplementary essay on the pragmatism of
Peirce, by John Dewey. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1923. xxxiii, 318 p. (International library
of psychology, philosophy and scientific method)
23-11850 B945.P43C5
Professor Cohen's volume of selections was made
in an attempt to present a "developed and coherent"
account of Peirce's philosophy, and did much to
secure a wider appreciation of his importance.
While the selections themselves are not supplied
with editorial commentary, the introduction is in-
tended to "help the reader concatenate the various
lines of thought contained in these essays." The
two collections which follow reflect the continuing
demand for representative writings of Peirce's
among students of philosophy.
5348. The Philosophy of Peirce; selected writings.
Edited by Justus Buchler. London, K. Paul,
Trench, Trubner, 1940. 386 p. (International
library of psychology, philosophy and scientific
method) 41-5564 B945.P41B8
Published in the United States by Harcourt,
Brace & Co. Republished in 1955 by Dover Pub-
lications (New York) under the tide: Philosophical
Writings of Peirce.
5349. Essays in the philosophy of science. Edited
with an introd. by Vincent Tomas. New
York, Liberal Arts Press, 1957. 271 p. (The
American heritage series, no. 17)
57-2087 B945.P41T6
5350. Buchler, Justus. Charles Peirce's empiri-
cism. With a foreword by Professor Ernest
Nagel. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1939. xvii,
275 p. (International library of psychology, philos-
ophy and scientific method)
40-4294 B945.P44B8 1939
This Columbia University dissertation is probably
the most serviceable of the attempts to extract a
coherent doctrine from Peirce's Collected Papers,
fragmentary as they are, and presenting a develop-
ing rather than a unitary and static outlook. Buch-
ler regards Peirce as primarily an empiricist, and
thinks that such of his metaphysics as is incon-
gruous with his empiricism is of secondary impor-
tance. This empiricism he characterizes as public
empiricism, supporting a theory of common or
cooperative inquiry. Manley H. Thompson's The
Pragmatic Philosophy of C. S. Peirce (Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1953. 317 p.) is more
critical and narrower in scope, being concerned
with the limitations involved in Peirce's approach
to philosophy.
5351. Feibleman, James. An introduction to
Peirce's philosophy, interpreted as a system.
New York, Harper, 1946. xx, 503 p.
46-8096 B945.P44F4
"This book has two aims, the first of which is to
offer an introduction to the general philosophy of
Charles S. Peirce, who may fairly be described as
one of the greatest philosophers America has thus
far produced." The second is "to exhibit the system
which seems to be inherent in Peirce's philosophy."
Mr. Feibleman is himself a professor of philosophy at
Tulane University, simultaneously conducting a real
estate business. The life of the academic philos-
opher in America is to some extent reflected in his
autobiographical Philosophers Lead Sheltered Lives
(London, Allen & Unwin, 1952. 321 p.). Feible-
man's own philosophical works include Christian-
ity, Communism, and the Ideal Society; a Philo-
sophical Approach to Modern Politics (London,
Allen & Unwin, 1937. 419 p.) ; In Praise of Comedy,
a Study in Its Theory and Practice (London, Allen
& Unwin, 1939. 284 p.); The Revival of Realism;
Critical Studies in Contemporary Philosophy
(Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1946. 333 p.); The Theory of Human Culture
(New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946. 361 p.);
Aesthetics; a Study of the Fine Arts in Theory and
Practice (New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1949.
463 p.); and Ontology (Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1951. 807 p.), which is probably his major
work to date. Feibleman has also written fiction
such as The Long Habit (New York, Duell, Sloan
& Pearce, 1948. 365 p.), a novel which uses an
island near the Mississippi Delta for setting, and
poetry, including Death of the God in Mexico (New
York, Liveright, 1931. 90 p.), Journey to the
Coastal Marsh ([Cummington, Mass.] Cumming-
ton Press, 1946. [22] p.), Trembling Prairie
( [Lexington, Ky.,] Hammer Press, 1952. 73 p.),
and The Dar\ Bifocals (Lexington, Ky., Hammer
Press, 1953. 48 p.).
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 745
5352. Gallie, Walter B. Peirce and pragmatism.
Harmondsworth, Middlesex, Penguin Books,
1952. 247 p. (Pelican books, A 254)
53-3°33 B945-P44G3
Professor Gallie, who has since become professor
of logic and metaphysics at the Queen's University,
Belfast, North Ireland, "tries to make clear, in a
form freed from Peirce's more difficult technical
terms, the organic unity of three main parts of his
thought: his theory of knowledge, his Pragmatism —
something very different from the popular Prag-
matism of James — and his metaphysics both critical
and constructive." It is one of the very few English
studies of American philosophy.
5353- Wiener, Philip P., and Frederic H. Young,
eds. Studies in the philosophy of Charles
Sanders Peirce. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1952. 396 p. 52-5411 B945.P44W5
Twenty-four studies of various aspects of Peirce
and his philosophy. This work is part of a design
to submit Peirce's philosophy as a whole, or system,
to methodical and searching criticism. The authors
represented were all engaged in special studies of
Peirce and his work.
5354. JOSIAH ROYCE, 1855-1916
With William James and Peirce (qq.v.)
Royce is usually considered one of America's "clas-
sic" philosophers. He early developed a close
friendship with James, who encouraged the younger
man in his work; after a time the influence worked
both ways. While James was a pragmatist in
method, Royce called himself an "absolute prag-
matist"; this touches on one of the main points of
disagreement between the two; for while Royce
accepted pragmatism in some measure, he was pri-
marily an idealist who believed in the existence of
absolute truth. This idealism was in some measure
a development of his early religious training. This
is reflected in his first important book, originally
published in 1885, The Religious Aspect of Philos-
ophy; a Critique of the Bases of Conduct and Faith
(New York, Harper, 1958. 484 p.). This was fol-
lowed by California from the Conquest in 1846 to
the Second Vigilance Committee in San Francisco;
a Study of American Character (New York, Knopf,
1948. xxxvii, 394 p.), first published in 1886, which
in its history of a decade was "meant to help the
reader toward an understanding of two things:
namely, the modern American state of California,
and our national character as displayed in that land."
This work revealed the basic tenets of his philosophy
as well as his interest in his native State. This in-
terest was further pursued in his one novel, The
Feud of Oahjield Cree\ (Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1887. 483 p.). Royce's next book was The Spirit
of Modern Philosophy (New York, Braziller, 1955.
519 p.), first published in 1892, and based on lec-
tures meant to give "some account of the more sig-
nificant spiritual possessions of a few prominent
modern thinkers." Written before Royce became a
predominantly "technical" philosopher with his own
fully developed system, the book is stylistically one
of his most successful. A more technical and ab-
stract presentation of the basic themes of this book
may be found in Lectures on Modern Idealism
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1919. 266 p.),
first delivered at Johns Hopkins University in 1906.
Royce's continued interest in ethics was evinced in
Studies of Good and Evil; a Series of Essays upon
Problems of Philosophy and of Life (New York,
Appleton, 1898. 384 p.). His maturing philosoph-
ical view and his continuing concern with the state
of American society (which he hoped to assist to an
idealist oudook) is expressed in Race Questions,
Provincialism, and Other American Problems (New
York, Macmillan, 1908. 287 p.). There followed
William James, and Other Essays (New York, Mac-
millan, 191 1. 301 p.), a collection meant further to
illustrate the philosophy of The World and the In-
dividual (vide infra). His more specifically reli-
gious interests again came to the fore in his lectures
published as The Sources of Religious Insight (New
York, Scribner, 1912. 297 p.), which concludes
with a restatement of the basic idea of The Philos-
ophy of Loyalty (vide infra). A selection of mis-
cellaneous, mostly early, essays was posthumously
published as Fugitive Essays (Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1920. 429 p.), a work of some
importance, since the ideas of Royce's major works
were often amplified and most clearly illustrated in
lectures and essays. A considerable number of
these miscellaneous writings have unfortunately re-
mained unpublished.
5355. The World and the individual; Gifford lec-
tures delivered before the University of Aber-
deen. 1st series: The four historical conceptions
of being. New York, Macmillan, 1900. xvi, 588 p.
0-402 B945.R63W7, 1st ser.
5356. The World and the individual; Gifford lec-
tures delivered before the University of Ab-
erdeen. 2d series: Nature, man, and the moral order.
New York, Macmillan, 1901. xx, 480 p.
1-27347 B945.R63W7, 2d ser.
These two series of lectures, revised and consid-
erably extended for publication, are usually regarded
as Royce's most important work in metaphysics.
He characterized them, in relation to his earlier
746 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
work, as "a deliberate effort to bring into synthesis,
more fully than I have ever done before, the rela-
tions of Knowledge and of Will in our conception of
God," and as necessarily centering upon "the true
meaning and place of the concept of Individuality."
The four conceptions of being considered in the ist
series are mysticism, realism, and critical rational-
ism, which are in turn criticized and rejected, and
absolute idealism, which of course survives scrutiny.
"You are in God," the reader is assured, "but you
are not lost in God." The 2d series is concerned
with developing the implications of this view for
cosmology, ethics, and religion.
5357. The Philosophy of loyalty. New York, Mac-
millan, 1936. 409 p.
38-33J54 BJ1533.L8R6 1936
This best known of Royce's books, first published
in 1908, presents a doctrine of the need of a basic
ethical motivation in man's life. The loyalty pro-
pounded is to this general idealism, rather than to
the narrow loyalties of particular causes, persons,
etc., although it finds expression through these. It
is summed up in the conception of "loyalty to loy-
alty" as the highest virtue. This takes care of the
individual, but the world must sort out and har-
monize discrepant or conflicting loyalties.
5358. The Problem of Christianity. Lectures de-
livered at the Lowell Institute in Boston, and
at Manchester College, Oxford. New York, Mac-
millan, 1913. 2 v. 13-10606 BR121.R67
Contents. — 1. The Christian doctrine of life. —
2. The real world and the Christian ideas.
This is Royce's final statement of his general po-
sition, the outcome of his "philosophical study of
certain problems belonging to ethics, to religious
experience, and to general philosophy." In it he
develops his idea of loyalty as "the practically de-
voted love of an individual for a community," and
presents Christianity as being "in its essence, the
most typical, and, so far in human history, the most
highly developed religion of loyalty." Royce side-
steps the entanglements of dogmas, controversies,
and institutions found in historical Christianity,
since he is concerned with the "essence of Chris-
tianity" rather than with such particulars.
5359. Logical essays. Edited by Daniel S. Robin-
son. Dubuque, Iowa, W. C. Brown, 1951.
447 p. 51-8059 B945.R63L6
5360. The Social philosophy of Josiah Royce.
Edited, with an introductory essay, by Stuart
Gerry Brown. [Syracuse, N. Y.] Syracuse Uni-
versity Press, 1950. 220 p. 50-10512 H35.R87
5361. The Religious philosophy of Josiah Royce.
Edited, with an introductory essay, by Stuart
Gerry Brown. [Syracuse, N. Y.] Syracuse Uni-
versity Press, 1952. 239 p.
52-41521 B945.R61B7
In the first title Dr. Robinson, director of the
School of Philosophy of the University of Southern
California, has made a valuable collection of prac-
tically all of Royce's writings on logic. Royce took
up the subject quite late in his career, largely through
the stimulation of C. S. Peirce, but subsequent logi-
cians have abundandy recognized the quality and
the importance of his contributions. Save for one
book review of the nineties, all these papers were
published between 1901 and 1914, and only one of
them has appeared in other collections of Royce's
essays. This is an unusual piece of bookmaking:
the first 12 pieces are reproduced from typewritten
copy, while the remaining 5 are photographically
reproduced from the original publications. Mr.
Brown, who is professor of citizenship and Ameri-
can culture in the Maxwell School of Citizenship of
Syracuse University, aims in the last two tides "to
make the core of [Royce's] social and religious
thought once more available for all students of
American philosophy and culture." He contributes
a substantial introduction, "From Provincialism to
the Great Community," to the earlier one.
5362. Cotton, James Harry. Royce on the human
self. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1954. xiv, 347 p. 54-8622 B945.R64C6
Bibliography: p. [303J-3II.
Because of Royce's conceptions of the human self
as intricately related, and because of this idea's cen-
trality to his philosophy, this book deals with nearly
all of Royce's work. Considerable reliance has been
placed on unpublished material, though only as a
source of illustrations, not of new ideas. As an
extension of the central theme, one chapter is de-
voted to the relations between William James, C. S.
Peirce, and Royce.
5363. Marcel, Gabriel. Royce's metaphysics.
Translated by Virginia and Gordon Ringer.
Chicago, Regnery, 1956. 180 p.
56-11854 B945.R64M33
Originally written in French {La Metaphysique
de Royce. [Paris] Aubier, 1945. 224 p.), this is
one of the most distinguished and thorough studies
of Royce's philosophy, although it limits itself to
studying Royce's solution of the problem of meta-
physics. A Norwegian dissertation on Royce ap-
peared in 1934: Sverre Norborg's Josiah Royce,
Puritaner og Idealist (Oslo, Lutherstiftelsens Forlag.
441 p.).
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
/ 747
5364. Smith, John Edwin. Royce's social infinite:
the community of interpretation. New
York, Liberal Arts Press, 1950. 176 p.
50-6708 B945.R64S5
Bibliography: p. 171-173.
This Columbia University dissertation studies
Royce's fusion of Christianity and his own idealism,
as expressed in his idea of a community, created by
individual minds linked together by the special
kind of knowing he named interpretation, and sus-
tained by that loyalty which was the supreme good
of life.
5365. GEORGE SANTAYANA, 1863-1952
Santayana taught philosophy at Harvard
University for 22 years, but the greater part of his
published work was produced after his resignation
in 191 1. Many of Santayana's works have been in
a predominantly literary vein; these are entered in
the Literature section of the bibliography (nos.
1733-1742, of which 1738 and 1739 are of special
philosophic interest). This interest in literature has
been carried over into his philosophical writings,
which are noted for their stylistic qualities. It is
also to be traced in his very philosophic conceptions,
for his system has been called a poetic naturalism.
His pervasive interest is in moral philosophy (out-
side traditional theologies), but he is basically a
naturalist who starts with the view that all ideas
must be explained in the context of the environment
wherein they arise. He does not believe that any
moral value exists in nature, but he does think that
the philosopher may, through the contemplation of
all arts and sciences, arrive at a general view of
nature and human nature, and then ascribe value to
any human enterprise insofar as it realizes the ex-
cellences which nature makes possible. Influenced
primarily by the earlier Greeks and by Spinoza,
Santayana combined two principles seldom joined:
"naturalism as to the origin and history of mankind,
and fidelity in moral sentiment, to the inspiration
of reason." This accounts for the frequent ap-
proaches to paradox in his writings, and for those
passages, no less startling for their being numerous,
in which he cancels with his left, or naturalistic
hand, the elaborate constructions of his right, or
rationalistic one. He has had many admirers, but
few followers among professional philosophers.
5366. The Sense of beauty, being the oudines of
aesthetic theory. With a foreword by Philip
Blair Rice. New York, Modern Library, 1955. 268
p. (The Modern Library of the world's best books,
292) 55-10656 N66.S23 1955a
This book, which first appeared in 1896, was
Santayana's first philosophical volume. It remains
one of the important works in the field of the philos-
ophy of aesthetics.
5367. The Life of reason; or, The phases of human
progress. One-volume ed., rev. by the author
in collaboration with Daniel Cory. New York,
Scribner, 1954. 504 p. 54-477 B945.S23L7 1953
This work, which originally appeared in five
volumes in 1905-6, is considered by some critics to
be Santayana's major work. It rapidly became one
of the leading documents of naturalistic philosophy.
It successively studies reason in common sense,
society, religion, art, and science. In this edition,
which has been somewhat abridged as well as re-
vised, the author undertook to clarify obscurities in
the original version.
5368. Winds of doctrine, and Platonism and the
spiritual life. New York, Harper, 1957.
312 p. (Harper torchbooks, TB 24)
57-10533 B945.S23W7 1957
A paperback reprint of two works, the first of
which was originally published in 1913 and the
second in 1927. Winds of Doctrine originally bore
the subtitle Studies in Contemporary Opinion, and
consists of six essays, some of which review the gen-
eral trends of the day in philosophy, while two
subject the views of Henri Bergson and Bertrand
Russell to severe critical scrutiny. This volume also
contains the essay which coined a phrase that has
been of some importance in American intellectual
history: "The Genteel Tradition in American Phi-
losophy." Lumping together the older schools under
a word that had acquired an aura of absurdity, he
gave impetus to the movement for eliminating the
lingering influence of Protestantism, and particu-
larly the inculcation of moral responsibility, from
American higher education. Eighteen years later
he detected in the so-called "New Humanism" a
possible resurgence of these elements, and returned
to the attack in a small volume, The Genteel Tra-
dition at Bay (New York, Scribner, 1931. 74 p.)-
The second title defines spirit as "an overtone of
animal life, a realization, on a hypostatic plane, of
certain moving unities in matter," and spiritual life
as "disintoxication from the influence of values."
5369. Character and opinion in the United States.
New York, Norton, 1934. 233 p. (White
oak library) 34-28429 B945.S23C5 1934
Contents. — The moral background. — The aca-
demic environment. — William James. — Josiah
Royce. — Later speculations. — Materialism and ideal-
ism in American life. — English liberty in America.
First published in 1920, after having been given
as lectures in England, this work attempts to inter-
pret the American people and the philosophy of this
748 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
country. The work is written from a very personal
point of view, centering in Santayana's experiences
at Harvard, his knowledge of the Boston area, and
his views on New England. Most examples are
chosen from within this area, and a large part of
the book is a discussion of philosophers and the
Department of Philosophy at Harvard, with some
conclusions about the American temper drawn from
these.
5370. Scepticism and animal faith; introduction to
a system of philosophy. [New York] Dover
Publications, 1955. 314 p.
55-14672 B945.S23S3 1955
This new edition presents in unaltered form the
text of the first edition of 1923. The work may
serve as an introduction to Santayana's philosophy,
and as such may be regarded as an epistemological
foreword to Realms of Being (vide infra). Every-
day common sense realism, or animal faith, is re-
garded as a sounder theory of knowledge than the
artificial doctrines of philosophic schools, which in
concentrating on some facts ignore most of the
others.
5371. Realms of being. One-volume ed., with a
new introd. by the author. New York,
Scribner, 1942. xxxii, 862 p.
42-36200 B945.S23R42
Contents. — The realm of essence. — The realm of
matter. — The realm of truth. — The realm of spirit.
This work was originally issued as four separate
volumes between 1923 and 1940. This is a full
statement of Santayana's mature philosophy. Mat-
ter is the unknowable but omnipotent basis for the
other realms. Essence is "the infinite multitude of
distinguishable ideal terms," the set of signals
through which alone man knows the realm of
matter. Truth is the limited realm of identity be-
tween essence and existence, but the truth of human
experience is partial and relative. Spirit is the im-
aginative reshaping of the realm of matter into
orderly and harmonious structure, but it has no
significance apart from its physical substratum.
5372. The Idea of Christ in the Gospels; or, God
in man, a critical essay. New York, Scrib-
ner, 1946. 266 p. 46-25109 BT201.S263
An interpretation of the Gospels in the light of
Santayana's special variety of naturalism, which
called religions "the great fairy-tales of the con-
science." One bemused critic called it "the most
devout book ever written by an unbeliever." How-
ever, the idea of Christ as expressed in the Gospels
is found "to be vivid indeed, but not intellectually
clear," and earthly lives modeled upon it "hardly
present a satisfactory view of human perfection."
5373. Works. Triton ed. [New York, Scribner]
1936-37. 14 v. 37-6148 B945.S2 1936
5374. The Philosophy of Santayana; selections
from all the works of George Santayana.
New and greatly enl. ed., edited, with a new
pref. and an introductory essay, by Irwin Edman.
New York, Scribner, 1953. lxii, 904 p.
53-11902 B945.S21 1953
5375. Buder, Richard. The mind of Santayana.
Chicago, Regnery, 1955. 234 p.
55-10827 B945.S24B8
In this study of Santayana's philosophy emphasis
is placed on Scepticism and Animal Faith and
Realms of Being (qq. v.), with lesser note taken of
his other works. Excluded from consideration is
The Life of Reason (q. v.), since Santayana told
Mr. Butler that he considered it immature, and that
even the revised version had been done when he
was too weak to undertake it effectively. A dis-
sertation which studies The Life of Reason in some
detail is Milton Karl Munitz' The Moral Philosophy
of Santayana (New York, Columbia University
Press, 1939. 116 p.).
5376. Howgate, George W. George Santayana.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1938. 363 p. 39-7881 B945.S24H6
Aiming at a biography of Santayana's mind, the
author presents the facts of his life, his literary pro-
ductions, and his philosophic doctrines in a balanced
volume which lacks only the last 15 years of a
career that remained remarkably productive even in
its ninth decade.
5377. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of
George Santayana. [2d ed.] New York,
Tudor Pub. Co., 1951. 710 p. (The Library of
living philosophers) 51-6325 B945.S24S35 1951
In the first part of this book a number of San-
tayana's supporters and opponents comment upon
his work. In the second part Santayana presents
his replies to criticisms made or problems raised in
the first part. A notable feature of the book is the
extensive bibliography (p. 609-680).
5378. PAUL WEISS, 1901-
With the rapidly increasing specialization in
all fields of knowledge in the 20th century the
relative number of philosophers who take all knowl-
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 749
edge for their domain has been steadily declining.
Weiss, a professor of philosophy at Yale University,
is here included as a leading representative of the
diminished younger generation of universal philoso-
phers. He was a student of Alfred North White-
head, whose influence may be traced in much of his
work. However, over the years he has been con-
structing a system of obvious originality, although
growing out of what has gone before. All his books
to date have been written as solid contributions to
philosophy, and have not been simplified for lay
readers. Professor Weiss' work has so far been pre-
dominantly concerned with problems arising from
logic, the nature of reality, man's place in nature,
and ethics.
5379. Reality. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1938. 314 p. 39-3540 BD21.W4
5380. Nature and man. New York, Holt, 1947.
xxii, 287 p. 47-1847 BD431.W32
5381. Man's freedom. New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1950. 325 p.
50-7197 BD21.W39
5382. Modes of being. Carbondale, Southern
Illinois University Press, 1958. 617 p.
57-11877 B945.W396M6 1958
5383. ALFRED NORTH WHITEHEAD, 1861-
r947
Whitehead was born in England and while teach-
ing at Trinity College, Cambridge, and at the Uni-
versity of London developed a reputation as a lead-
ing mathematician and logician. In 1924 he came
to America and taught at Harvard for 12 years.
While the general principles of his philosophy had
been developed in England, some of his major phil-
osophical works were written in America. This
philosophy he called a philosophy of "organism,"
which may be regarded as a philosophical theory of
relativity in which everything has an active relation-
ship with everything else. This fitted in with the
trend to philosophies of schematic progress, as dis-
tinct from the "static morphological universe" in-
herent in most earlier systems. The accord between
Whitehead's philosophy and the state of modern
knowledge was such that he became a highly influ-
ential philosopher, and the acknowledged leader of
a widespread movement in America. For this
reason, while he remains basically English (as
McCosh in an earlier generation remained basically
Scottish), some understanding of his work is neces-
sary for anyone who would understand recent de-
velopments in American philosophy.
5384. Alfred North Whitehead: an anthology.
Selected by F. S. C. Northrop and Mason W.
Gross. Introductions and a note on Whitehead's
terminology, by Mason W. Gross. New York,
Macmillan, 1953. 928 p.
53-12112 B1674.W351N6
5385. Schilpp, Paul A., ed. The philosophy of
Alfred North Whitehead. [2d ed.] New
York, Tudor Pub. Co., 1951. 797 p. (The Library
of living philosophers)
51-6323 B1674.W38S35 1951
This volume contains a number of essays on the
philosophy of Whitehead, including a very long one
by Victor Lowe on "The Development of White-
head's Philosophy." There are also some "Autobio-
graphical Notes" and an extensive bibliography.
Because of Whitehead's advanced age and illness at
the time this work was compiled, he did not write
a reply to the commentaries, although the other
volumes in the series of which this is a part do have
such a feature. Instead, he contributed some hither-
to unpublished essays which he considered expres-
sive of his final position.
5386. CHAUNCEY WRIGHT, 1 830-1 875
Though he himself did not use the term
pragmatism, Wright's philosophy was in many ways
a precursor of that movement. He was trained in
mathematics and physics, and he developed a strong
interest in philosophy. As a result, his philosophy
was scientific rather than metaphysical. Because
of his close examination of scientific method and his
belief in the importance of scientific psychology for
the further development of philosophy, he fore-
shadowed a number of aspects of modern philosoph-
ical movements.
5387. Philosophical discussions. With a biograph-
ical sketch of the author by Charles Eliot
Norton. New York, Holt, 1877. xxiii, 434 p.
10-29063 B945.W73P5
This volume contains the greater part of the au-
thor's published philosophical writings, most of
which had appeared as periodical articles. A fur-
ther insight into his life and thought may be gleaned
from his Letters (Cambridge, John Wilson, 1878.
392 p.). The connecting commentary by James
Bradley Thayer enables this to serve as something
of a biography.
750 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
C. Psychology
5388. Fay, Jay Wharton. American psychology
before William James. New Brunswick,
N. J., Rutgers University Press, 1939. 240 p. (Rut-
gers University studies in psychology, no. 1 )
39-13495 BF108.U5F3
"Chronological table of American works and
foreign sources": p. 219-226.
"Bibliography of primary sources in American
psychology before 1890": p. 227-232.
The publication of James' Principles of Psychol-
ogy (no. 5322) in 1890 was so epoch-making an
event as to cast his predecessors in the shade, and
led to the impression that the earlier history of the
discipline here was a blank — an impression which
has assumed the guise of fact in some serious works
on psychology. Dr. Fay has no difficulty in showing
that psychology was studied here from the begin-
nings of American academic thought, on much the
same lines as in Europe; that it was a branch of
moral philosophy down to about 1776, and a branch
of "intellectual philosophy," after Scottish models,
down to 1 861; and that during the next 30 years
German influences were mixed with English ones
in the prevalent "philosophy of the mind." As the
author says, if psychology is exclusively a natural
science and there was no psychology in America be-
fore James (1 842-1910), then equally there was
no psychology in Europe before Wilhelm Wundt
(1832-1920).
5389. Heidbreder, Edna. Seven psychologies.
Student's ed. New York, Century Co., 1933.
450 p. 33"I339 BF95.H4 1933
Dr. Heidbreder regards systems of psychology as
programs of action, without which few facts could
be collected; as bases of morale, without which in-
quiry would be vague and aimless; "as ways and
means of arriving at knowledge, as temporary but
necessary stages in the development of a science."
After preliminary chapters on systems as such, on
prescientific and the beginnings of scientific psy-
chology, she oudines seven systems prominent in
the American psychology of 1933. They are the
structuralism of Edward B. Titchener; the inde-
pendent and individual system of William James;
the functionalism developed at the University of
Chicago under J. R. Angell and Harvey Carr; the
behaviorism of J. B. Watson (no. 5393); the dynamic
psychology developed at Columbia especially by
Robert S. Woodworth (no. 5391); the Gestalt
school; and psychoanalysis. The first and the last
two are, as she says, "outright importations from
Europe," but are treated here as influences in
American psychology. She disclaims having treated
all important schools or thinkers, or all divergences
of opinion within the schools chosen as representa-
tive. Psychology, she thinks, "is a science that has
not yet made its great discovery," and until it does
the diversity of systems is both inevitable and desir-
able.
5390. Krech, David, and Richard S. Crutchfield.
Elements of psychology. New York, Knopf,
1958. 700 p. 58-5044 BF121.K73
5391. Woodworth, Robert S., and Harold Schlos-
berg. Experimental psychology. Rev. ed.
New York, Holt, 1954. 948 p. illus.
52-13912 BF181.W6 1954
These two titles are selected from the hundreds
available as characteristic of American psychology
as it is conceived by the vast majority of its academic
practitioners at the present day: an experimental and
quantitative natural science, with its most valued
results obtained from the use of special apparatus
in psychological laboratories. The first is a general
textbook written by two members of the Depart-
ment of Psychology at the University of California,
and very lavishly produced by Mr. Knopf with 2
color plates, 25 tables, 157 figures, and 168 "boxes,"
of which most contain research evidence for the
generalizations in the text, but some "provide the
reader with an opportunity to carry out his own
demonstration experiments." The four parts of the
book are concerned with "Perception," "Motivation
and Emotion," "Adaptive Behavior," and "The
Individual." The key to the last part, which in-
cludes "the apex of psychology," the study of per-
sonality, lies in "quantifying individual differences."
Each of 24 chapters is furnished with a glossary,
defining such terms of art as "synesthesia" and
"volume color" in chapter 2, "Bogardus social dis-
tance scale" and "cognitive dissonance" in chapter
25. The most representative figure in American
laboratory psychology is probably Robert S. Wood-
worth (b. 1869), who received his Ph. D. from
Columbia University in 1899 and taught psychology
there for nearly 40 years, becoming professor
emeritus in 1942. His lectures on Dynamic Psy-
chology (New York, Columbia University Press,
1918. 210 p.) provided the profession with a new
and laboratory-oriented system, while his textbook,
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY / 75 1
Psychology (originally published by Holt in 1921,
and still in print in its 5th edition of 1947) was for
years the most widely used in introductory college
courses. The first edition of Experimental Psy-
chology appeared in 1938 and was developed out
of mimeographed predecessors which Professor
Woodworth had used since 1910 in his Columbia
course in the subject. In preparing the substantially
altered second edition, from which much purely
historical material has been dropped, the octoge-
narian experimentalist had the assistance of Professor
Schlosberg of Brown University. After an intro-
ductory chapter on the principles of experiment, the
book expounds methods and results in 25 separate
fields, including "Reaction Time," "Association,"
"Psychophysics," "Conditioning," "Maze Learning,"
"Memory," and "Problem-Solving: Thinking."
One of the 3 chapters on "Emotion" has a section
on "Lie Detection." The subject index runs to 39
double-column pages (p. 910-948), while the "Bib-
liographic Index of Authors" (p. 851-909) requires
a 4-column table of abbreviations. The front end
papers contain "Logarithmic and Probability
Scales," and the rear ones "Four-place Logarithms."
5392. Roback, Abraham A. History of American
psychology. New York, Library Publishers,
1952. xiv, 426 p. illus. 52-11499 BF108.U5R6
The only substantial history of psychology in the
United States from its beginnings to the present day,
by a psychologist who was trained in the Harvard
laboratory under Hugo Miinsterberg. As several
reviewers observed, it is a somewhat uneven work,
but what it lacks in uniformity and objectivity is
compensated for by the author's thorough knowl-
edge of the doctrines he describes and his original
and outspoken critical approach. Dr. Roback has
always been an independent and very much his
own man, taking his line from no system or insti-
tution. He has always had a strong sense of the
limitations of purely experimental and physiolog-
ical psychology, and the book bears traces of his old
controversies, including the title of the chapter on
behaviorism: "Psychology out of Its Mind." Since
he is not unduly impressed by current fashions, he
renders full justice to neglected figures of the recent
past such as G. Stanley Hall, Morton Prince, Wil-
liam McDougall, and his own teacher, Miinsterberg,
once the most conspicuous psychologist in the
country, the eclipse of whose reputation is attributed
to his failure to establish any personal bond with
his students. There are chapters on Freud's influ-
ence in America; on the Gestalt school, which the
author characteristically hails as a creation of the
Jewish race and which, he says, is dying out only
because it is being absorbed into general psychology;
on operationism, which he regards as an attempt to
apply the rules of the physics laboratory to psy-
chology; on "Factorial Analysis and General Seman-
tics," including an appreciative treatment of Alfred
Korzybski; and on neoscholastic psychology, which
is treated with respect. A final chapter on "The
Phenomenal Expansion of American Psychology,"
standing for the companion volume mentioned in
the Preface, briefly reviews 14 specialized branches
of psychology and some current trends. The
United States now has the largest number of psy-
chologists, including many of the foremost, an
output of books and articles greater than in all other
countries, and a leadership which conveys obliga-
tions along with authority.
5393. Watson, John B. Behaviorism. [Rev. ed.
Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1958,
"1930. 308 p. illus. (Phoenix books, P23)
58-14680 BF199.W3 1958
Behaviorism, an extreme development of func-
tionalism, is usually regarded as an original Ameri-
can contribution to psychology, which it reduces
to a study of the movements of muscle or gland.
It is dependent upon physiology, and based upon
laboratory experiments, primarily with animal sub-
jects, and it rejects both introspective method and
the concept of consciousness. Notwithstanding a
number of more or less complete anticipations, it is
usually regarded as having been founded by John
Broadus Watson (b. 1878), who was trained in
animal psychology at the University of Chicago, was
for some years a professor of psychology at Johns
Hopkins, and after 1920 pursued a successful career
with large advertising firms. Mr. Watson con-
tributed an interesting autobiographical sketch to
A History of Psychology in Autobiography, v. 3,
edited by Carl A. Murchison (Worcester, Mass.,
Clark University Press, 1936), p. 271-281. The
volume listed above originated in popular lectures
at the Cooper Union in New York City; a more
technical exposition of the author's principles is
given in Psychology from the Standpoint of a Be'
haviorist, 3d ed., rev. (Philadelphia, Lippincott,
1929. xvii, 458 p.), originally published in 1919.
Behaviorism has not only aroused much contro-
versy at home, but has attracted considerable atten-
tion abroad, as appears from two French studies:
Pierre Naville's La psychologie, science du com-
portement; le behaviorisme de Watson, 9. ed.
([Paris] Gallimard [^942] 253 p.), and Andre
Tilquin's Le behaviorisme; origine et developpe-
ment de la psychologie de reaction en Amerique
(Paris, J. Vrin, 1942. 531 p.), which contains a
substantial bibliography of behaviorist literature (p.
[511H28).
XXIII
Religion
«£
a
A. General Wor^s 5394-5404
B. Period Histories 5405-5417
C. Church and State 5418-5422
D. Religious Thought; Theology 5423-5438
E. Religious Bodies 5439—5473
F. Representative Leaders 5474-5483
G. Church and Society 5484-5497
H. The Negro's Church 5498-5502
RELIGIOUS motives were dominant in the founding of Plymouth Colony in 1620
.- and of Massachusetts Bay ten years later; and if the founding of Virginia in 1607
be regarded at all closely, its promoters will be seen to have emphasized religious aims
and taken great pains to provide the new plantation with the ministrations of the Church
of England. It is probably a safe assertion that until some date quite late in the 19th
century, religion remained a greater concern with the majority of Americans than any
secular interest. In the middle of the 20th, not-
withstanding the multiplication of competing factors
and various secularizing influences, it remains a
major interest of the average American, and over
100 million persons, or nearly two-thirds of the
total population, have become members of churches.
Clergymen, however they may complain of crowded
schedules, find leisure to write in the 20th century
as they did in the 17th, and the literature of Ameri-
can religion through four centuries is staggering in
its volume. The following hundred-odd titles that
have been selected from the mass are of course
inadequate to do justice to the great pageant of
American religion, and three or four times as many
would still leave many corners or aspects uncovered.
We have tried, however, to make them as repre-
sentative as possible of the extraordinary variety of
religious life in this country, and, while avoiding
works written from a narrow sectarian viewpoint,
have sought to deal objectively and fairly with as
many denominations and movements as our space
will permit. The churches with the largest mem-
berships have necessarily been emphasized, but some
lesser ones are included because of their striking
originality in belief, practice, or social effect.
752
The eight sections into which the chapter is
divided attempt to deal with inseparable but distin-
guishable aspects of American religion: its develop-
ment in the stream of history from 1607 to the
present day; its relationship to government, espe-
cially since 1776; its exposition by men of thought;
the churches which are its practical vehicles; the
men who have been eminent in the churches; the
churches as both cause and effect in their social en-
vironment; and, finally, the Negro's church.1 Some
works on individuals appear not in Section H,
Representative Leaders, but in Section D, Religious
Thought (Niebuhr and Tillich, nos. 5432 and 5433)
or in Section E, Religious Bodies (no. 5464, Joseph
Smith, whose biography is essential to the under-
standing of the Mormon Church). A number of
other clergymen whose writings are noteworthy are
given individual treatment in Chapter I, Literature;
and certain philosophers similarly treated in the
preceding chapter are much concerned with religion,
in particular James McCosh (nos. 5337-5344),
"The three titles on Judaism (nos. 5458-5460) should be
considered in connection with the larger group on the Jews
as a racial minority in Section F of Chapter XIV.
RELIGION / 753
Josiah Royce (nos. 5354-5364), and William E.
Hocking (nos. 5310-5316).
Certain important themes recur in a number of
the sections that follow. One is the westward move-
ment of the churches which followed or accompanied
the movement of the American people; and a related
one is the changing position of the churches in an
increasingly urbanized America. Another is the
practically complete independence of the American
churches from governmental support and controls,
since the Revolution at any rate; this has not pre-
vented a vast influence of the churches upon Govern-
ment as upon every other aspect of social life. As
early as 1831 de Tocqueville (nos. 4509-4512) found
that here the spirit of religion and the spirit of lib-
erty, instead of marching in different directions as in
France, "were intimately related and that they
reigned in common over the same country." An-
other theme may be succinctly described in Edmund
Burke's phrase, "the dissidence of dissent"; the proc-
ess whereby the Puritan Separatists came out of the
established church has become a permanent char-
acteristic of American life; nearly every group which
has constituted itself around some apparently small
difference of belief or practice has survived, albeit in
small numbers — only the Shakers (no. 5469), who
abjured biological reproduction, have died out — and
new religious bodies, inside or outside the Christian
framework, are still being generated. A counter-
tendency has arisen in the movement toward church
union or reunion; since it has been more effectual in
the sphere of joint social action than in doctrinal or
liturgical assimilation, the few titles that deal with
the subjects are included in Section I, Church and
Society. Yet another theme is the influence on tra-
ditional religion of the new scientific views of the
universe and of life which were developed in the
course of the 19th century, and received a unifying
bond in Darwin's doctrine of the evolution of species.
A final theme is that of secularization inside reli-
gious life as well as outside, which many find oper-
ative in recent years, so that America has been called,
of all the nations of Western civilization, at once the
most religious and the most secular.
A. General Works
5394. Hall, Thomas Cuming. The religious back-
ground of American culture. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1930. xiv, 348 p. 30-18755 BR515.H28
"General bibliography": p. [3151-326; "Chapter
bibliographies": p. [327J-337-
A Presbyterian clergyman who taught at Union
Theological Seminary and at GSttingen here qual-
ifies the widely held concept of the dominant part
played by Puritanism in American civilization, and
focuses his study on the tradition of dissent, which
he considers the most striking feature of American
religion. Pie traces its beginning to Wyclif and the
Lollards in 14th-century England. The individual-
istic heresies that rejected the authority of church
and priesthood to put reliance on God's word alone
were persecuted and pushed underground, but con-
tinued to spread among the lower classes for two
centuries. Dr. Hall limits the name of Puritans to
the small party of Protestants which rose to political
importance in Elizabeth's time, and he claims that
Puritanism supplied hardly more than leaders to the
New England setdement. In Anglican Virginia
and Congregational New England alike, the great
body of colonists were "of the class from which Dis-
sent drew its members." The spread of toleration
after 1660 was accompanied by widespread religious
indifference, furthered by frontier conditions and
punctuated by revivals, "the symptom of Dissent."
Established religion collapsed during the Revolution,
and the complete separation of church and state in
the Constitution recognized the indpendent char-
acter of American Christianity. The writer traces
the forms of dissent through the later history of
American Protestantism, finding throughout Amer-
ican culture a strong element of "respectful indif-
ference to any pronounced religious faith."
5395. Hudson, Winthrop S. The great tradition
of the American churches. New York, Har-
per, 1953. 282 p. 53-6417 BR516.H75
The great American tradition of religious free-
dom, with churches purely voluntary and complete
absence of state control, is examined in this cogendy
argued volume by Professor Hudson of the Colgate-
Rochester Divinity School. He seeks to show that
at the high point of American church development,
placed in the 1890's, the voluntary principle was
considered to be the secret of the power and influ-
ence of religion in American life. He is chiefly con-
cerned with the situation in the churches during
the 19th century, analyzed in part through indi-
vidual preachers, Lyman Beecher, Charles G. Fin-
ney, Dwight L. Moody, and others, and in part
through the achievements and failures of the
churches resulting from acceptance of the voluntary
principle. With the spread of the "social gospel,"
431240—60-
-49
754 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and the diversion of church activities into many
fields apart from religion, there has come, he warns,
an oversecularization: "The Church Embraces the
World: Protestantism Succumbs to Complacency."
He considers that the churches are running the risk
of having no distinctive message, and that as a re-
sult they may be tempted to become tools of the
state in the promotion of national self-interest. He
calls for the restoration of voluntary discipline
through conversion and a recovery of Christian
faith.
5396. Makers of Christianity, [v. 3] From John
Cotton to Lyman Abbott, by William War-
ren Sweet. New York, Holt, 1937. 351 p.
34-36057 BR145.M23, v. 3
"Selected bibliography": p. 335-343.
Biographical sketches of more than 30 individual
leaders who have influenced the religious life of
America, from the Puritan John Cotton to the late
19th-century apostle of the social gospel, Walter
Rauschenbusch, and the teacher of evolutionary
philosophy reconciled with Christian faith, Lyman
Abbott. The first two volumes of this set, by other
hands, recounted great Christian lives from Christ
to Charlemagne, and from Alfred the Great to
Schleiermacher. Dr. Sweet begins with "The
Founding Fathers": Cotton, James Blair of Vir-
ginia who founded William and Mary College, the
Scotch-Irish Presbyterian Francis Makemie, and
the Lutheran Henry M. Muhlenberg. His next
chapter presents "Apostles of Religious Liberty":
the Lords Baltimore, William Penn, and Roger Wil-
liams. He continues through the Great Awakening
(Jonathan Edwards and George Whitefield), the
Revolutionary and Constitutional period, the trans-
Allegheny pioneers, the missionary heroes, the re-
vivalists and reformers, and the leaders of modern
liberal Christian thought.
5397. Mayer, Frederick E. The religious bodies
of America. 2d. ed. Saint Louis, Con-
cordia Pub. House, 1956. 591 p.
56-4924 BR516.M37 1956
A comprehensive handbook of the doctrines and
practices of the religious bodies of America, com-
piled by the author during his 25 years of teaching
theology in two Lutheran seminaries. Dr. Mayer
died in 1954, the year of the first edition. His own
viewpoint is admittedly Lutheran, but he aims at
an objective and unbiased interpretation, based on
what he calls the "creedal position" taken by each
church in its profession of faith. He classes the
256 separate denominations reported in the 1936
census under 12 major families. For each family —
Eastern Catholics, Roman Catholics, Lutherans,
Reformed bodies, Arminian bodies (Methodists,
etc.), "Unionizing" churches, the "Enthusiastic or
Inner Light" bodies (Quakers, Mennonites, etc.),
the Millennial groups — he outlines the historical
background and doctrinal principles before examin-
ing the tenets of individual churches in the family.
A long chapter on "Interdenominational Trends
and Organizations" includes simple and helpful
explanations of modernism, fundamentalism, and
neo-orthodoxy. In "Anthropocentric and Anti-
Trinitarian Bodies" Unitarianism and Sweden-
borgianism are included with Judaism. The last
two chapters deal with groups which Dr. Mayer
considered to be outside Christianity — Christian
Science and other healing cults, and "esoteric" sects
such as Theosophy. The work is extensively docu-
mented in long footnotes and bibliographies at ends
of chapters.
5398. Mead, Frank Spencer. Handbook of de-
nominations in the United States. Rev.
and enl. ed. New York, Abingdon Press, 1956.
255 p. 55-10270 BR516.M38 1956
Bibliography: p. 229-237.
A more concise work than Mayer (above), this
handbook, originally published in 195 1, contains
short accounts and statistics of some two hundred
and fifty American church denominations. The
arrangement is basically alphabetical, but churches
that stem from a common source are grouped under
the collective name. Thus the table of contents be-
gins with "Adventists," under which come Seventh-
Day Adventists, Advent Christian Church, Primi-
tive Advent Christian Church, Church of God, Life
and Advent Union. Next is a single denomination,
The African Orthodox Church. The names within
a group are distinguished from succeeding names
only by a slight indention, and the reader may find
it more convenient to turn at once to the full index.
The statements for each church put less emphasis
on theological concepts than do those of Mayer.
They are factual statements, in simple and readable
style, of history, organization, present status, mis-
sions, statistical data (not always consistent), and of
doctrine in brief outline. Concluding pages give
headquarters of denominations, statistics of church
membership in 1955, and a glossary of theological
and ecclesiastical terms.
5399. Niebuhr, Helmut Richard. The kingdom
of God in America. Chicago, Willett,
Clark, 1937. xvii, 215 p. 37-28492 BT94.N5
"Notes": p. 199-210.
Dr. H. Richard Niebuhr and his brother, Dr.
Reinhold Niebuhr, are prominent representatives
of the neo-orthodox movement in modern Ameri-
can theology. The theme of these historical and
interpretative lectures is that the dominant idea of
RELIGION / 755
Protestantism in America has always been the king-
dom of God, but this has had three successive
meanings. In the Puritan theocracy and no less in
the other Protestant sects of the colonial setdements,
the kingdom of God meant the absolute sovereignty
of God. During the Great Awakening and later
evangelical revivals, it meant the reign of Christ. In
the social gospel of modern religion, it has come
to mean the kingdom of God on earth. Dr. Nie-
buhr expands this idea in general terms as well as
in relation to individual religious leaders. In a
final chapter on "Institutionalization and Secular-
ization" he suggests that in the "moment of petri-
faction," when the liberalism that replaced the old
evangelical pattern has itself become institution-
alized, the many signs of concern for an aggressive
Christianity are "indications of a spiritual unrest
which might become the seed plot of new life."
A recent book by Reinhold Niebuhr is largely
focused on the spiritual unrest of the mid-20th cen-
tury. Pious and Secular America (New York,
Scribner, 1958. 150 p.) comprises nine essays writ-
ten or published in 1956 and 1957 on "journalisdc"
themes. The first, which gives its tide to the vol-
ume, and the second, "Frustration in Mid-Century,"
analyze the "paradox" that the United States is "at
once the most religious and the most secular of
Western nations," and point out the "naive and
simple" nature of the current religious revival.
Other subjects treated include higher education, the
conflict with Russia, the Negro question, the rela-
tions of Christians and Jews, and the "universal
community." The last essay, "Mystery and Mean-
ing," attempts to explain the relation of the mystery
of creation to the human problem of sin.
5400. Sperry, Willard L. Religion in America.
Appendices compiled by Ralph Lazzaro.
Cambridge [Eng.] University Press; New York,
Macmillan, 1946. 317 p. (American life and in-
stitutions . . . 1) 46-7760 BR515.S67 1946
A widely admired interpretation of the history
and the present state of religion in America, pre-
sented informally for a British wartime public by
the late Dean of the Divinity School of Harvard
University. Initial "Presuppositions" point out sa-
lient differences between American religious life and
that of the Old World. The primary one is dis-
establishment: "America is naked of 'the Church'
in the historic sense of that word, as Europe has
known it and used it. The place of the church is
taken by 'denominations.' " Dean Sperry 's three
other points of distinction are the individualistic
character of American religion, its "immense and
indubitable optimism," and the sympathetic inter-
est taken in it by non-church-going intellectuals.
These four themes reappear throughout his accounts
of religion in the Colonies, the causes and conse-
quences of separation of church and state, the
denominations, parish life, theological thought, and
religious education. He devotes admittedly dis-
proportionate space to the small independent sects,
which he takes to be the most distinctive feature of
the American religious scene. The chapter on
American Catholicism is adapted from Theodore
Maynard's book of 1941 (no. 5445). Mr. Lazzaro's
appendixes give various details of church history and
statistics.
5401. Sweet, William Warren. The story of reli-
gion in America. [2d rev. ed.] New York,
Harper, 1950. 492 p.
50-10239 BR515.S82 1950
Bibliography: p. 453-472.
Until Dr. Sweet published the first edition of this
influential work in 1930, the theme of religion in
America had been treated almost exclusively in
denominational terms. The professor of the history
of American Christianity at the University of Chi-
cago sought in one comprehensive and readable
volume to trace through the complicated pattern of
American religious life the "common thread" of "an
individualism in religion such as existed nowhere
else." The religious and political radicalism of the
first colonial settlements established this tradition,
which was carried on, with the westward movement
of the frontier, in the multiplication of small sects
and independent churches. Revivalism, from the
Great Awakening to the end of the 19th century,
was the emotionally extravagant way in which reli-
gion was brought to the masses. The consequences
of slavery included the rise of many separatist Negro
churches. In the 20th century the independent sects
still increase in number and diversity, although the
centralization of American culture has been reflected
in the larger units of church life. Dr. Sweet's last
two chapters, "World War I: Prosperity and Depres-
sion" and "Through a Decade of Storm to the Mid-
Century" (the latter added in the 1950 edition),
stress the movement of the Protestant churches to-
ward union, as well as their secularized aspects and
their political ideas.
5402. Sweet, William Warren. Revivalism in
America, its origin, growth, and decline.
New York, Scribner, 1944. xv, 192 p.
44-6536 BV3773.S8
"Selected bibliography": p. 183-188.
5403. Weisberger, Bernard A. They gathered at
the river; the story of the great revivalists
and their impact upon religion in America. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1958. 345 p. illus.
58-7848 BV3773.W4
756 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"Bibliographical comment and notes to chapters":
P- 275-332-
These two historical studies of revivalism differ
widely in approach, coverage, and style. Professor
Sweet's litde volume consists of essays interpreting,
from the viewpoint of the religious historian, the
nature of revivalism — "primarily the individualiz-
ing of religion." It concentrates on the colonial
Great Awakening and the Great Revival of 1800,
with its aftermath on the frontier, subjects treated
in greater detail by this author in other works (nos.
5410-54 16). Here he briefly outlines the by-prod-
ucts of the Western revivals in educational insti-
tutions, antislavery movements, and the like, and
barely glances in his last chapter, "Revivalism on
the Wane," at the city revivals, organized like busi-
ness enterprises by D. L. Moody and his successors.
The earlier evangelism, when the preacher in highly
emotional terms called on each individual to work
out his own salvation was, he says, in tune with the
independent democratic temper of young America.
He attributes a part of the late 19th-century decline
in revivalism to the spread of the social gospel, whose
advocates, in their enthusiasm to save society tended
to overlook the individual sinner. Dr. Weisberger,
whose lively style is that of the social historian,
writes a more detailed history, interpreting revivals
and revivalists in purely secular terms, with empha-
sis on the personalities of the evangelists. Com-
ments on the colonial and Western revivals provide
an introduction for the bulk of his text devoted to
the city revivalists. Among the evangelists treated
in biographical style are Lyman Beecher and
Charles Grandison Finney, great preachers of the
1820's and i83o's in New England and the New
West respectively. The central figure is the most
successful of all the lay savers of souls, who made
revivalism into a professional technique carried out
through the force of his personality — "To thousands
of his converts, God must have looked uncannily
like Dwight L. Moody." In the hands of Moody's
successors, the revival campaigns "put on the trap-
pings of vaudeville." The last chapters are devoted
to the most spectacular evangelist of all, Billy
Sunday. Dr. Weisberger ends by speculation on
the possibility of a revival suited to the age of mass
communication, led by a public figure who could
"deck the faith of the fathers in the fashion set by
Madison Avenue's 'communicators.' "
5404. Williams, John P. What Americans believe
and how they worship. New York, Harper,
1952. 400 p. 52-5477 BR516.W47
A comparative survey of the leading religions of
the United States, by the chairman of the Depart-
ment of Religion of Mount Holyoke College, which
should prove as interesting to the general reader as
to the student. His presentation of each faith in-
cludes some historical background, a sketch of doc-
trine and church government, description of the
form of worship, and sometimes a biographical note
on a representative leader. The treatment is factual,
vivid, and objective, with stress upon social aspects.
The subtitles of the chapters are designed to impress
on the memory the salient quality of each church
or group of churches; thus the first, the Roman
Catholic Church, is characterized as "Defender of
a Revelation." Protestantism in general is discussed
at length, and then follow chapters on the Lutheran
Churches, the Protestant Episcopal Church, Pres-
byterians, Congregationalists and Unitarians, Bap-
tists and Disciples, Quakers, and Methodists. Ju-
daism is sympathetically described as "The Mother
Institution." Finally there are two group chap-
ters, "Recent Religious Innovations," taking in such
sects as the Seventh-Day Adventists, Mormons,
Christian Scientists, Jehovah's Witnesses, and Unity,
and "Nonecclesiastical Spiritual Movements," a
sampling of astrology, naturalistic humanism, he-
donism, nationalism, etc.
B. Period Histories
5405. Garrison, Winfred Ernest. The march of
faith; the story of religion in America since
1865. New York, Harper, 1933. 332 p.
33-11236 BR525.G3
"Sources and bibliography": p. 309-316.
A swift-paced narrative of American religious
history since the Civil War, treated as inseparable
from the economic, political, scientific, and cul-
tural life of the time. The opening chapters, which
sketch the Reconstruction era, the westward move-
ment, and the "Gilded Age" of financial specula-
tion, are primarily social history, although focused
on religious activity. With a chapter on Moody and
Sankey and other revivalists Professor Garrison
turns more specifically to the history of religion. He
recounts with interesting detail of men and events
the spread of the new liberalism in religious thought,
efforts at church union (he is himself prominent in
the world ecumenical movement), the rise of the
social gospel, and the increased activity of missions
RELIGION / 757
in America's age of overseas expansion. The records
of individual denominations are briefly reviewed, a
chapter being given to Roman Catholicism and
another to the formation of the interdenominational
Federal Council of the Churches of Christ. Social
history is again to the fore in the chapters on the
connection of churches with big business and their
role in the First World War and the postwar years
of prosperity. Finally the author examines miscel-
laneous doctrines, the groups outside the main Prot-
estant sects, mystic and non-Christian cults, etc.,
and concludes with the argument that religion must
deal in the matters of political concern, but should
do so in a tolerant rather than a crusading spirit.
5406. Humphrey, Edward F. Nationalism and
religion in America, 1 774-1 789. Boston,
Chipman Law Pub. Co., 1924. 536 p.
24-12770 BR520.H75
Bibliography: p. [5171-532.
In the formative years of the American Nation
the period covered in this historical monograph,
"the pulpit was the most powerful single force in
America for the creadon and control of public
opinion," and religion, according to the author, was
one of the more potent factors in the forging of the
United States. Because of the separation of church
and state in the new Republic, he points out, most
American historians have deliberately omitted the
religious element from constitutional history, in
spite of its importance, to which both de Tocque-
ville and Bryce testified. Dr. Humphrey analyzes
in a scholarly manner, with many quotations from
contemporary sermons and documents, the contri-
butions or the opposition of the various churches to
political independence during the Revolution. This
forms the first part of his book; the second part
treats the independent and national organization of
the churches during the Confederadon. It also in-
cludes chapters on the separation of church and
state, the influerjxx-oi_jhe_clLui£hes in the Conti-
nental Congfess and in the making oFthe Constitu-
tion, and their welcome of the new National
Government.
5407. Johnson, Charles A. The frontier camp
meeting; religion's harvest time. Dallas,
Southern Methodist University Press, 1955. 325 p.
illus. 55-8783 BX8475.J64
Bibliography: p. 303-319.
The author, studying evangelical revivalism in
the trans-Allegheny West from 1800 to 1840, de-
scribes the frontier camp meeting as one of the
most important social institutions serving to tame
backwoods society. Recreating "Camp Meetin'
Time" through historical analysis documented from
contemporary accounts, appraisals, sermons, and
hymns, he is at pains to correct the caricatures and
distortions which, he thinks, have pervaded 19th-
century fiction, the biased writings of non-Methodist
churchmen, and even secular histories. It was the
Methodist itineracy system which chiefly developed
the camp meeting technique, and the Methodists
were almost alone in using it after 1805, although
open-air gatherings were usual during the Great
Revival or Second Great Awakening of 1800, and
the first planned camp meeting was probably under
Presbyterian auspices. To the "most fabulous of
all great Revival meetings," at Cane Ridge in
Bourbon County, Kentucky, in 1801, there came
Baptist and Methodist preachers as well as 18
Presbyterian ministers; the "frenzied worship" con-
tinued for six days, with attendance anywhere
between ten and twenty-five thousand. The "fall-
ing exercise," "the jerks," rolling, dancing, singing,
and barking were engaged in by an estimated one
to two thousand converts. The writer follows the
camp meeting from this primitive form into its
maturity under Methodist discipline, which en-
deavored to restrain emotional excesses. He tells
of individual circuit riders, the evangelical doctrine
they preached, camp meeting hymnody, and the
social life in the "Tented Grove" — "the most mam-
moth picnic possible." He cites contemporary
endorsements and criticisms. By the 1840's the
institution was dying out, supplanted by permanent
auditoriums and cabins invading the old forest
camp sites, and by the churches in the rising towns.
5408. Morais, Herbert M. Deism in eighteenth
century America. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1934. 203 p. (Columbia Uni-
versity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in
history, economics and public law, no. 397)
34-23477 H31.C7, no. 397
BL2760.M6 1934a
"List of authorities": p. 179-193.
A dissertation, exhaustively documented, which
studies the "remarkable spread of scepticism" in
America during the latter 18th century. The liberal
philosophy of the Age of Reason, as it appeared
among the educated upper classes in the colonies
and during the Revolution, did not for the most
part extend to atheism. Jefferson, who sought to
do away with clericalism and return to the pure
teachings of Jesus, was more typical of American
deism than were radicals such as Ethan Allan, whose
ponderous book of 1784, Reason the Only Oracle of
Man, was the first American text explicitly to reject
Christianity. The author examines the European
background of deism, its spread in colonial America
through the importation of rationalistic books and
the introduction of Newtonian science, its leaders
and influence during the Revolution, and its mili-
758 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tant stage in the early national period. Inspired
by the French Revolution, Thomas Paine published
his Age of Reason in 1794, attacking the principle
of Biblical revelation. There arose a vigorous
atheistic movement, led by a former Baptist clergy-
man, Elihu Palmer, with a widespread establish-
ment of deistic societies and freethinking news-
papers. Dr. Morais traces the course of deism, and
the opposition of the clergy and colleges, through
the turn of the century to its collapse following the
explosion of evangelical Christianity in the Second
Great Awakening.
5409. Schneider, Herbert W. Religion in 20th
century America. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1952. 244 p. illus. (The Library
of Congress series in American civilization)
52-8219 BR525.S34
This closely written book by a professor of phi-
losophy and religion at Columbia convincingly ex-
plains the transformation of religious habits, ideas,
and institutions that has taken place in America
during the last 50 years. The first three chapters
survey the secularization and socialization of re-
ligious life. Religion is now, Dr. Schneider states,
"one of America's biggest businesses," conducted by
trained professionals among whom laymen are in-
creasingly numerous; religious activities are chiefly
directed, not to the salvation of individual souls,
but against secular evils and social problems; re-
ligion, "like government," pervades all areas of
life — education, medicine, politics, business, art:
"Anything can be done religiously, and nothing is
safe from ecclesiastical concern." The author ex-
amines the changes in America's religious con-
science, the rapprochement of psychiatry and re-
ligion, the far-reaching spread of the social gospel,
and its recent more realistic "rethinking." The
second half of the text, which is separated from the
first three chapters by a set of illustrative "Exhibits,"
is an analysis of changing trends in theological
thought — the various reactions to 19th-century
liberalism of fundamentalism, neo-orthodoxy, ex-
istentialism, humanism — and of the modern "art of
worship." The last chapter discusses the interpre-
tation of "Varieties of Religious Experience since
William James." A useful compilation supplement-
ing this is volume 256, March 1948, of the Annals
of the American Academy of Political and Social
Science, Organized Religion in the United States,
edited by Ray H. Abrams (Philadelphia, 1948.
265 p.). Papers by a variety of experts are arranged
in five groups: "Our Contemporary Religious In-
stitutions," "Relationship to Other Institutions"
(state, class, family), "The Churches and Social
Action," "Trends and Future Prospects," and "Sta-
tistics and Bibliography."
5410. Sweet, William Warren. Religion in colo-
nial America. New York, Scribner, 1942.
xiii, 367 p. 42-19309 BR520.S88
"Selected bibliography": p. 341-356.
541 1. Sweet, William Warren. Religion in the
development of American culture, 1765—
1840. New York, Scribner, 1952. xiv, 338 p.
52-9960 BR520.S882
Bibliography: p. 315-332.
The author of The Story of Religion in America
(no. 5401) has spent a lifetime studying the re-
ligious history of his country, and writes of it in
the style of the urbane scholar addressing a literate
lay public. Religion in Colonial America is the
first installment of a general history by periods.
It relates the transplanting of 17th-century Western
European religion to the Colonies, and the adapta-
tion of the various faiths to the physical, social, and
political conditions of their new setting. The first
arrivals, the Anglican Church in Virginia, and the
Puritans in New England, founded state churches;
after the Restoration (1660) adherents of other
faiths — Baptists, Quakers, Roman Catholics,
Lutherans, German pietists, Scotch-Irish Presby-
terians— increasingly brought diversity, individual-
ism, and liberalizing influences to the American
religious scene. Dr. Sweet begins with a general
chapter on the religious motives in the planting of
the Colonies (said Hakluyt, "greatly for the inlarge-
ment of the gospill of Christ"), then tells the story
of each denomination through the whole period.
His last chapters deal with the Great Awakening
in New England and the South, and the general
advance toward disestablishment and religious
liberty. Ten years later there followed Religion in
the Development of American Culture, 1765-1840.
Here the stress is on the radical factor in American
religion, especially on the frontier. The better
pioneers, Dr. Sweet says, were nonconformists or
heretics, "impatient of the old and open-minded to
the new and untried," who found opportunity for
self-expression in the new West. "The story of
experimentation in organized religion on the fron-
tier constitutes one of the most significant and
important aspects of the development of the new
western civilization and culture." The first three
chapters on religion during the Revolution, and the
subsequent breaking of Old World ties to form new
national organizations are, as in the preceding
volume, traced through the separate threads of the
individual denominations, and these same threads
are followed in the account of the westward move-
ment. Then come chapters on general aspects:
"Barbarism vs. Revivalism," "Religion and Our
Cultural Foundations" (the founding of colleges
and seminaries), "The Revolt against Calvinism,"
RELIGION / 759
missions, and "The Frontier Utopias": Mormons,
Shakers, and other religious communities. An
epilogue accepts, "with modifications," F. J. Tur-
ner's thesis of the frontier as the central theme in
American history of this period. The third and
fourth volumes of this series, which will bring the
story to the present day, are still awaited.
5412. Sweet, William Warren, ed. Religion on
the American frontier, 1783- [1850] New
York and Chicago, 1931-46. 4 v.
5413. [Vol. 1] The Baptists, 1783-1830, a collec-
tion of source material; general introd. by
Shirley Jackson Case. New York, Holt, 1931.
652 p. 31-26855 BX6235.S8
Bibliography: p. 629-637.
5414. Vol. 2. The Presbyterians, 1 783-1 840, a col-
lection of source materials. New York,
Harper, 1936. 939 p. 36-15032 BX8935.S75
Bibliography: p. 888-917.
5415. Vol. 3. The Congregationalists, a collection
of source materials. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1939. 435 p.
39-33291 BX7131.S9
Bibliography: p. [405]~4i8.
5416. Vol. 4. The Methodists, a collection of source
materials. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1946. 800 p. A47-717 BX8235.S92
Bibliography: p. [731] -770.
The sources on which Dr. Sweet based this fron-
tier study and his history of Methodism (no. 5458)
were assembled in a comprehensive search of the
manuscript and out-of-print collections of church
and seminary libraries in the region. He has made
a share of his labors accessible to other scholars in
this 4-volume collection of source materials for the
Baptist, Presbyterian, Congregationalist, and Meth-
odist churches in the trans-Allegheny West. Each
volume begins with a general introduction of about
a hundred pages explaining the status of the de-
nomination at the end of the Revolution, and the
stages and various aspects of its westward migra-
tion. Then come extracts from letters and reports,
church minutes, the memoirs of preachers and mis-
sionaries, records of conferences and of church trials,
and a sampling of documents of many other varie-
ties. Each volume includes a long bibliography.
5417. Winslow, Ola Elizabeth. Meetinghouse
Hill, 1630-1783. New York, Macmillan,
1952. 344 p. illus. 52-1 1 102 BR530.W5
A social picture of religion in colonial New Eng-
land, with the meetinghouse on the hilltop "in sharp
focus." The writer's purpose, carried out with bal-
ance and charm, is, "by recalling typical procedures
in relation to various aspects of community life,
to suggest attitudes which [the meetinghouse]
helped to establish and patterns of group action
which it helped to make habitual." She has based
her interpretation on town and church records,
sermons, diaries, letters, and other memorials of
the theocratic New England of the 17th and 18th
centuries. Her narrative incorporates many well-
chosen quotations. Of the five books, the first,
"Bound Up Together in a Litde Bundle of Life,"
describes, mosdy by means of particular instances,
the establishment of congregation, meetinghouse,
and village. Book 2, "Zion is Not a City of Fools"
(Cotton Mather), is on the learning and the ser-
mons of the clergy. Book 3, "Noises about the
Temple," describes "Where to Set," how to sing,
etc. Book 4 deals with the "Rule of the 'Lord
Brethren,' " the government and authority of the
congregation. Book 5, "Powder in the Meeting-
house," illustrates the close association of the New
England pulpit with the cause of liberty.
C. Church and State
5418. Blau, Joseph L., ed. Cornerstones of re-
ligious freedom in America. Boston, Beacon
Press, 1949. 250 p. (Beacon Press studies in free-
dom and power) 49-10649 BR516.B55
"List of sources": p. 246-247.
A compilation of notable documents illustrating
the history of American religious liberty. The
editor writes a general introduction and an explan-
atory headnote for each of the themes under which
he has arranged the extracts from writings and
speeches. The headings are: "Colonial Stirrings"
(Roger Williams and William Penn); "Building
the Wall of Separation" (Jefferson and Madison);
"The Affirmation of Civil Rights for Religious
Minorities" (including a speech on the Maryland
"Jew Bill," 1819); "Resistance to Enforced Sabbath
Observance" (1830); "On Keeping Religion Out of
Politics" (Zclotes Fuller, The Tree of Liberty, 1830);
"Resistance to Imposed Religious Forms" (from A
Report on Appointing Chaplains to the Legislature
760 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of New Yor1{, 1832); "On Keeping Religion Out of
Public Schools" (Horace Mann, 1848); "On Keep-
ing God Out of the Constitution" (1873 an^ 1876) ;
and "The Fight against Released Time" (Justice
Felix Frankfurter's concurring opinion in a case
regarding religious education during school hours,
1948).
5419. Greene, Evarts B. Religion and the state;
the making and testing of an American tra-
dition. New York, New York University Press,
1941. 172 p. (Anson G. Phelps lectureship on
early American history. New York University.
Stokes Foundation) 42-1794 BR516.G67
Six lectures by a distinguished historian, oudin-
ing concisely, informally, and interestingly the main
themes of church-state relationships in America.
Professor Greene begins with the European ante-
cedents, in Protestant and Catholic countries alike,
of an established church in which ecclesiastical and
temporal control were closely associated. Next he
examines the transplantation of these ideas to New
Spain, New France, New Netherland, Anglican
Virginia, and Puritan New England. His third lec-
ture introduces the liberalizing factors in the British
colonies — the Rhode Island "livelie experiment" in
religious freedom, the policy of Lord Baltimore and
other proprietary governors of toleration for rent-
paying tenants, and William Penn's "first funda-
mentall" of freedom of faith and worship. The Act
of Toleration (1688), the Great Awakening, the
penetration of 18th-century rationalism, all aided
dissent, till on the eve of the Revolution church
establishment was everywhere losing ground. The
religious history of the Revolutionary and Federal
eras is discussed in a chapter called "Separation."
Chapter V, "After Separation," describes the situa-
tion after the last disestablishment act, passed by
Massachusetts in 1833, and the persisting church-
state relations in exemptions from taxation, in the
law of church property, and in politics. The last
chapter turns to the difficult question of education,
in which more than in any other department the
American tradition of disestablishment is tested.
(See also nos. 5491 and 5494-) The valuable "Bib-
liographical Notes" (p. 147-162) are arranged by
chapters.
5420. Stokes, Anson Phelps. Church and state in
the United States. New York, Harper,
1950. 3 v. illus. 50-7978 BR516.S85
"Critical and classified selected bibliography":
v. 3, p. 769-836.
The late author of this classic and encyclopedic
work, a noted Episcopalian cleric and educator, pub-
lished it after retiring as canon of Washington
Cathedral. Professor Gabriel of Yale University,
of which Dr. Stokes had been Secretary for over 20
years, speaks in his introductory note of the author
as "guided by the historian's ideal of objectivity and
the desire to uncover all pertinent material." The
subtitle shows the vast terrain covered in the three
large volumes: "A Historical Survey, Source Book,
and Interpretation of Documents and Events Show-
ing the Growth of Religious Freedom under the
Friendly Constitutional Separation of Church and
State, and the Resulting Influence of Religion in
All Major Phases of National Development; also a
Study of the Status of Churches Including Syna-
gogues and Other Religious Groups under Federal
and State Constitutions, Statutes, and Judicial Deci-
sions; Authoritative Opinions of Courts, Church
Bodies, Statesmen, Religious Leaders, and Publicists
on Matters at Issue; and a Discussion of Contempo-
rary Problems of Adjustment." Adjectives used by
reviewers pay tribute to the monumental character
of the work: "spacious, erudite, and magnanimous,"
"unique," "definitive." Those pressed for time may
limit themselves to Part 8, a "Summary and Inter-
pretation" (v. 3, p. 629-726) of the preceding seven.
Part 9 includes, in addition to the monumental
bibliography, a table of dates and six documentary
appendixes, the last of which is a compilation of the
"Provisions in State Constitutions Regarding Reli-
gious Freedom."
5421. Torpey, William G. Judicial doctrines of
religious rights in America. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1948. 376 p.
48-8404 Law
Bibliography: p. [333 H71.
A legal study, beginning with an historical analy-
sis of relations of government to religion, and then
examining many aspects of religious freedom as
interpreted, especially by the State courts. Under
the first heading, "Delegated and Police Powers as
Limitations upon Religious Freedom," there are dis-
cussed such matters as pacifism and conscientious
objectors, postal laws prohibiting use of mails to
defraud, refusals to salute the flag, Sunday laws, laws
against fortunetelling. In many of these cases,
which seem to run to oddities, the courts have ruled
that religious liberty was not violated. Religious
organizations are next considered with respect to
their legal status, the finality of their decisions, the
right of religious assembly, and the exemption of
church property from taxation. Then the author
turns to the religious rights of the individual in
marriage and divorce, in conflicts over child control,
in education, in court trials, and in bequests for
religious purposes. Many of these cases likewise
turn on what seem eccentricities of faith and con-
duct. The text is in easy narrative style, with foot-
note references to the many cases cited (tabulated in
RELIGION / 761
the bibliography), and each chapter ends with a
simple and useful summary.
5422. Zollmann, Carl F. G. American church
law. St. Paul, West Pub. Co., 1933. xv,
675 p. 33-442 x Law
A standard handbook of church law, covering
comprehensively statutes in force of the Federal
Government and the States relating to religious
matters. Published first in 1917 with the title,
American Civil Church Law, as volume 77 of the
Columbia University Studies in history, economics
and public law, it has been revised and expanded to
encompass new material. It begins with a "Table
of Constitutional Provisions Cited" (U.S., Alabama-
Wyoming), and ends with a 40-page table of nearly
2500 cases. Each chapter opens with a list of the
numbered sections into which it is divided. The
sections state the legal issue under consideration:
e.g., Ch. I, Sec. 29, "The Legal Effect of Ante-
nuptial Promises in Mixed Marriages." The first
two chapters on religious liberty and religious educa-
tion include a number of the more unusual claims
made on religious grounds, and upheld or rejected
by the courts. Most of the laws, however, relate
to matters of regular procedure or administration:
the forms, natures, and powers of corporations,
church constitutions, implied trusts, schisms, church
decisions, and such material matters as tax exemp-
tion, the rights of clergymen and church officers, the
acquisition, protection, and liability of church prop-
erty, pew rights, and cemeteries.
D. Religious Thought; Theology
5423. Bainton, Roland H. Yale and the ministry;
a history of education for the Christian min-
istry at Yale from the founding in 1701. Line
drawings by the author. New York, Harper, 1957.
297 p. 57-7344 BV4070.Y36B3
5424. Williams, George Huntston, ed. The Har-
vard Divinity School: its place in Harvard
University and in American culture. Boston, Bea-
con Press, 1954. xvi, 366 p. illus.
54-8425 BV4070.H46W5
These histories are rather different in scope, for
while the Yale volume takes its departure from the
founding of the college in 1701, the Harvard one
starts only with the "tentative beginnings" of a
separate divinity school in 181 1, leading to its estab-
lishment as a separate department in 1819. Yale
followed suit and set up a divinity school in 1822,
but the first six chapters of Professor Bainton's book
are concerned with the training of a learned min-
istry during the first 12 decades of the college. After
four years spent in earning their bachelor's degrees,
candidates would undergo an apprenticeship in the
homes of the "graduate faculty," Connecticut pas-
tors who were themselves Yale graduates. The au-
thor paints an impressive picture of Yale as "the
creation, instrument, and leader of an entire com-
munity embracing the Connecticut valley as far
north as Northampton, and taking in the southern
fringe of Massachusetts and Rhode Island." The
remaining 14 chapters narrate the history of the di-
vinity school, with special attention to the "New
Haven theology" which prevailed for some decades
after its foundation, movements of moral reform,
the acquisition of separate buildings, and distin-
guished teachers of several generations. Nor is it
a backward-looking book for, in Dr. Bainton's
opinion, "the last quarter of a century has been the
greatest in the history of the Yale Divinity School,"
with a rigorously selected student body of the
highest quality, ten percent of whom are women.
Acting Dean Williams' volume on the Harvard
School over which he presides is a cooperative work,
with three chronological chapters contributed by
Conrad Wright (to 1840), Sydney E. Ahlstrom (to
1880), and Levering Reynolds, Jr. (to the present);
while the late Dean Willard L. Sperry has a briefer
one on student life during the 19th century. Three
supplementary essays, by Deans Sperry and Wil-
liams and Ralph Lazzaro, are concerned with "The-
ology at Harvard and Its Place in American Cul-
ture." Here Dean Sperry has the crucial subject of
"Preparation for the Ministry in a Nondenomina-
tional School," for the School abandoned its Uni-
tarian origins during the mid-igth century, and
since 1865 has been "pan-Protestant and ecumenical"
in oudook. Excellent portraits of 34 members of
the faculty and a chronological chart at the end in-
crease the value of the book.
5425. Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed. Contemporary
American theology; theological autobiogra-
phies. New York, Round Table Press, 1932-33.
2V ^ 33-2542 BR525.F4
"Principal publications" at end of each
"autobiography."
Twenty-three of America's leading theologians
contributed to these two volumes, for which they
431240—60-
-50
762 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
were asked to set down "in an intimate manner"
their personal stories of religious development. The
editor's introductions to each volume outline some
of the main trends of contemporary Protestantism.
Most of the writers are professors of theology in
universities or seminaries. In their spiritual expe-
rience they reflect the tremendous shifts in religious
thinking that have taken place in the 20th century.
In general they have revolted against liberalism as
lacking in inner values (one writer came to see in
liberal religion "merely a comfortable rationaliza-
tion of middle-class prosperity"), and have turned
toward modernism or conservatism. "Certain
agreements and convergences" appear in these con-
fessions of faith — the search for indubitable funda-
mentals, for social implications, loyalty to organized
religious expression, the acceptance of higher criti-
cism— but from a viewpoint tempered with imagi-
nation and poetic insight, an unconcern for abso-
lutes. In theology, as in scientific investigation,
says the editor, there is "the spirit of open-minded-
ness, a place for possibilities as yet unrealized, for
convictions open to correction." "If the loss is great
in dogmatic authority, the gain is great in the realm
of faith and credibility."
5426. Finkelstein, Louis, ed. American spiritual
autobiographies, fifteen self-portraits. New
York, Harper, 1948. xvi, 276 p. 48-9493 BL72.F5
Contents . — M. L. Wilson . — George N.
Shuster. — Alvin S. Johnson. — Lyman Bryson. —
Raphael Isaacs. — Harry J. Carman. — Harry Emer-
son Fosdick. — Rufus M. Jones. — Mary K. Simkho-
vitch. — William Foxwell Albright. — Mary McLeod
Bethune. — Charles S. Johnson. — William G. Con-
stable.— Jacob S. Potofsky. — Simon J. Finkelstein. —
Biographical sketches.
5427. Finkelstein, Louis, ed. Thirteen Americans:
their spiritual autobiographies. New York,
Institute for Religious and Social Studies; distributed
by Harper, 1953. 296 p. (Religion and civilization
series) 53—5437 E176.I5
Contents. — C 1 a r e n c e E. Pickett. — Ordway
Tead. — Henry Norris Russell. — Edwin Grant
Conklin. — Richard McKeon. — Erwin D. Can-
ham. — Elbert D. Thomas.: — Judith Berlin Lieber-
man. — Channing H. Tobias. — David de Sola
Pool. — Basil O'Connor. — Willard L. Sperry. — Julian
Morgenstern.
Two collections of autobiographical essays, all of
which are "frank self-revelations" and concentrate
on "the problems and influence of character and
spirit." The 1948 volume arose from original lec-
tures at the interdenominational Institute for Reli-
gious and Social Studies. Its 15 essays are by as
many leaders of varied faiths who have contributed
largely to American intellectual and spiritual life.
The editor explains that they were selected "for a
certain spiritual quality permeating their lives and
actions which we may comprehend under the gen-
eral term, saintliness, though it varies greatly from
person to person." The biographical notes at the
end of the book show that the majority represent a
variety of professions outside the ministry — the social
sciences, philosophy, science, public affairs, medi-
cine, etc. The second volume includes 1 1 lectures
delivered at the Institute and 2 essays written for
the compilation. The editor comments that "the
writers of these autobiographies differ from other
people only in the extent of their dedication, and in
the scope of causes they serve, but not in kind."
5428. Foster, Frank Hugh. A genetic history of
the New England theology. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1907. xv, 568 p.
7-8502 BX7250.F7
A time-honored doctrinal history of the distinc-
tive New England school of theology which took its
departure from Jonathan Edwards' revivalist preach-
ing of predestination in 1734. After a chapter on
Puritanism and its decline, the writer concentrates
on dogmatics, reviewing Edwards' battle with the
anti-Calvinistic Arminians in his treatise on* freedom
of the will, and analyzing his other metaphysical
concepts. He then examines the deterministic
teachings of Edwards' successors, Joseph Bellamy,
Samuel Hopkins, Jonathan Edwards the younger,
and others. This uncompromising modification of
Calvinism was the dominant school of thought in
New England Congregationalism and in American
Christianity in the latter 18th century. At the open-
ing of the 19th century there arose within it two
schisms, Unitarianism, which the writer studies in
the teaching of W. E. Channing, and Universalism
(Hosea Ballou's Treatise on the Atonement, and the
essays of Walter Balfour denying the existence of
hell). The later trends of the New England theol-
ogy, as adapted to a changing environment, are next
analyzed through the doctrines of individual lead-
ers— Nathanael Emmons, Nathaniel W. Taylor,
Horace Bushnell, Charles G. Finney, Edwards A.
Park. The last chapter records the sudden collapse
of Calvinism in 1880, under the impact of Dar-
winism and of Biblical criticism. The theological
thought of Congregationalist and other Protestant
preachers who succeeded the New England school
was expounded by Dr. Foster in a series of lectures
at the Andover Newton Theological School in 1934.
This work, The Modern Movement in American
Theology, published posthumously in 1939 (New
York, Revell, 219 p.), had the subtitle: "Sketches
in the History of American Protestant Thought
from the Civil War to the World War." It analyzes
RELIGION / 763
the currents in Protestant thought resulting from
Darwinism and the attempt to reconcile science,
philosophy, and the modern world with theology,
religion, and Christianity. The schools of Horace
Bushnell and Henry Ward Beecher, the teaching
of George A. Gordon, William N. Clarke, Henry C.
King of Oberlin College, and other leaders of liberal
and radical thought are described.
5429. Furniss, Norman F. The fundamentalist
controversy, 1918-1931. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1954. 199 p. (Yale historical
publications. Miscellany, 59)
54-5082 BT78.F82
5430. Cole, Stewart G. The history of fundamen-
talism. New York, R. R. Smith, 1931.
xiv, 360 p. 31-10666 BT78.C56
Bibliography: p. 341-350.
Dr. Furniss' well-documented dissertation begins
with a lively account of the sensational Scopes trial
at Dayton, Tennessee, in the summer of 1925. At
the extravagandy publicized "monkey trial" the
complete discomfiture of William Jennings Bryan
through the rigorous cross-questioning of the free-
thinking defense attorney, Clarence Darrow, spot-
lighted the fundamentalist controversy. The author
studies in detail the conservatives' battle for the
literal acceptance of the Bible as against evolutionary
science and modernism in theology, which had be-
gun at the turn of the century and was waged with
greater fervor after the First World War. In the
opening "Analysis of the Fundamentalist Crusade"
he outlines the general course of militant fundamen-
talism and the characteristics of the movement,
among which he alleges violence, ignorance, and
egotism. He next examines fundamentalist organi-
zations and their attempts to secure laws against the
teaching of evolution; the central body, the World's
Christian Fundamentals Association (founded at
the Moody Bible Institute in Chicago in 1919)
within 2 years spread its campaigns into 25 states.
The third and longest section analyzes the contro-
versy within the separate churches — both the North-
ern and Southern branches of Baptists and Presby-
terians were sharply divided, Methodists and Epis-
copalians slightly troubled, the Disciples of Christ
deeply shaken. A postscript comments on the de-
cline of the aggressive movement with the death of
Bryan and the spread of scientific knowledge into
the regions which had furnished its support. Dr.
Furniss cites Stewart G. Cole's The History of Fun-
damentalism as the most comprehensive history of
the conflict over modernism. This work is focused
on doctrinal aspects of the conflict within the
churches and pays minor attention to the antievolu-
tion campaign.
5431. James, William. The varieties of religious
experience, a study in human nature; being
the GifTord lectures on natural religion delivered
at Edinburgh in 1901-1902. New York, Modern
Library, 1936. xviii, 526 p. (The Modern Library
of the world's best books)
37-27013 BR110.J3 1936
First published in 1902.
"The description of man's religious constitutions"
is William James' own summation of these famous
lectures which formed the starting-point for the
modern study of the psychology of religion and are
ranked among the most important of American
contributions to religious thought. Proceeding
from physiological psychology, the founder of philo-
sophical pragmatism examined case histories of
religious experience in the light of his "radical
empiricism." With vivid analysis and felicitous
citation he explored religious hallucinations, the
"healthy-mindedness" of liberal religion (particu-
larly the "mind-cure" movement), the opposite pole
of pessimism, the divided self, conversion, saindi-
ness, mysticism, and other characteristics of religious
experience. "I have loaded the lectures," he said,
"with concrete examples, and I have chosen these
among the extremer expressions of the religious
temperament." In the last chapters he sums up the
phenomena in the general terms which he con-
siders common to all religious persons: "We have
in the fact that the conscious person is continuous
with a wider self through which saving experiences
come, a positive content of religious experience
which, it seems to me, is literally and objectively
true as far as it goes." To this he added his "over-
belief" that there exist other worlds of consciousness
from which higher energies may filter into our lives
from communion with the ideal in faith and prayer.
5432. Kegley, Charles W., ed. Reinhold Niebuhr:
his religious, social, and political thought,
edited by Charles W. Kegley and Robert W.
Bretall. New York, Macmillan, 1956. xiv, 486 p.
(The Library of living theologv, v. 2)
56-13522 BX4827.N5K4
5433. Kegley, Charles W., ed. The theology of
Paul Tillich, edited by Charles W. Kegley
& Robert W. Bretall. New York, Macmillan,
1952. xiv, 370 p. (The Library of living theology,
v. 1) 52-13200 BX4827.T53K4
Perhaps the most vigorous theological thinking
in America during the turbulent present has been
that of the two theologians chosen as subjects of
the first volumes in a series paralleling the Library
of living philosophers edited by Paul A. Schilpp
(nos. 5294, 5377, and 5385). The editors follow
the same form, each volume including the subject's
764 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"intellectual autobiography," essays on different
aspects of his work by leading scholars, his reply to
interpretation and criticism, and a full bibliography
of his writings. The third and fourth volumes of
the series, as announced, are to go outside America,
to treat the Swiss theologians Karl Barth and Emil
Brunner, whose "neo-orthodox" or "neo-super-
naturalist" doctrines have close relationships with
Tillich and Niebuhr. These are works to be read
by trained theologians. Reinhold Niebuhr first re-
ceived attention as a critic of social conditions, and
is known primarily as a Christian ethical and politi-
cal thinker. He has been prominent in what Paul
Tillich, writing the first essay on Niebuhr, speaks
of as "the theological revolution" against liberalism
in the United States. His doctrine is labeled "neo-
orthodox," although, Dr. Tillich says, there is
nothing in the world more unorthodox than "the
spiritual volcano Reinhold Niebuhr." Since 1930
he has been professor of applied Christianity at
Union Theological Seminary. Tillich left Germany
at the beginning of the Hitier era and became Nie-
buhr's colleague at the Union Theological Seminary,
which he left to go to the Harvard Divinity School
in 1954. For the last quarter-century the two have
led in the enunciation of dialectical theology. Tillich
is currently publishing his Systematic Theology
(Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1951-57.
2 v. (300, 187 p.); v. 2 has tide Existence and the
Christ), which correlates philosophic questions with
existential theological answers stemming from rev-
elation. There are interpretative chapters on the
theology of Niebuhr and Tillich in David Wesley
Soper's Major Voices in American Theology:
[v. 1] Six Contemporary Leaders (Philadelphia,
Westminster Press, 1953. 217 p.). The author,
chairman of the Department of Religion of Beloit
College in Wisconsin, has written several other
"readable" books on contemporary theology. Be-
sides the two above-mentioned men, his study
covers the Methodist evangelical theologian Edwin
Lewis of Drew University, Nels F. S. Ferre, the
"postcritical" professor of philosophical theology at
Vanderbilt University, and H. Richard Niebuhr
and Robert Calhoun of Yale, the first of whom
teaches that man is justified by hope, and the sec-
ond, by work. A second volume of Mr. Soper's
Major Voices in American Theology, entided Men
Who Shape Belief (1955. 224 p.), gives somewhat
briefer accounts of 11 additional theologians di-
vided into 2 groups. The first, including John
Luther Adams, Douglas V. Steere, John A. Mackay,
Walter M. Horton, John C. Bennett, Wilhelm
Pauck, and Harris Franklin Rail, has the title "A
Central Theme: God, the Lord of History." The
second part, "Alternative Trends," treats the
"Church-centered" theology of W. Norman Pit-
tenger, the Biblical literalism of Louis Berkhof, the
theology of "exclusive immanence" of Henry N.
Wieman, and the "theistic finitism" of Edgar S.
Brightman.
5434. Long, Edward Le Roy. Religious beliefs
of American scientists. Philadelphia, West-
minster Press, 1952. 168 p.
52-9193 BL240.L66 1952
A study, which originated as a Columbia Univer-
sity dissertation, of the thought of natural scientists
who have been sufficiently concerned with the mean-
ing of life to write books expressing their beliefs.
In all the writings surveyed the author discovers the
search for a basis on which to reconcile science and
religion. The men whose published credos are se-
lected for discussion are 20th-century Americans,
most of whom have written since the controversy
over evolution in the twenties. The two parts are
"Approaches through Science" and "Approaches
through Religion." In the first appear, among
many others, the well-known names Alfred Einstein
and David Starr Jordan, who equated God with the
cosmic order; Arthur H. Compton, who recognizes
God as first cause; and Henry Fairfield Osborn,
Robert A. Millikan (no. 4755), and Lecomte Du
Noiiy, who, like the philosopher Alfred N. White-
head (nos. 5383-5385), see God as the ruler of evolu-
tion. In part 2 the writer analyzes books by scien-
tists who, starting from belief in the Bible as literal
truth or as of unique significance, try to fit contem-
porary scientific knowledge to Christian faith.
5435. Neumann, Henry. Spokesmen for ethical
religion. Boston, Beacon Press, 195 1. xvii,
173 p. 51-11143 BJ1581.N27
The ethical movement is associated particularly
with the name of Felix Adler, a Hebrew scholar and
agnostic who, having rejected Reform Judaism, in
1876 founded the Ethical Culture Society. This
book, written by a longtime leader of the society
for its 75th anniversary, expounds at length its prin-
ciples— that the essence of religion is not creeds but
good deeds, "to treat one another in ways which do
most credit to the name human." The first four
chapters are devoted to Adler, his formation of the
society and of the "Workingman's School," now the
Ethical Culture School, in which children of differ-
ent faiths are brought together for nonsectarian
moral education; his reform efforts on behalf of
labor; his religious outlook; and his teaching of
ethical living by community and nation. There
follow chapters on Adler's chief disciple, John Love-
joy Elliott, other American leaders, and spokesmen
in England, Germany, and Austria. The last three
chapters explain the basic ideas of ethical religion:
"Unity in Diversity," "How to Tell Right from
RELIGION / 765
Wrong," "Why a Religion?" The latter may be
summarized in the statement which for many years
appeared on the announcements of the ethical so-
cities: "We interpret religion to mean fervent de-
votion to the ethical ideal." The educational ideas
of the Ethical Culture Society incorporated those of
a short-lived earlier movement, the Free Religious
Association, which in the last third of the 19th cen-
tury asserted that philanthropy and social reform
were an integral part of religious faith. This group
is the subject of a historical monograph by Prof.
Stow Persons of Princeton University: Free Reli-
gion, an American Faith (New Haven, Yale Univer-
sity Press, 1947. 168 p.). An offshoot of radical
Unitarianism, this "spiritual anti-slavery society"
was launched by a few young clergymen in New
England in 1867. Numerically the association was
an insignificant group; its maximum membership
during the seventies may have been five hundred;
by the mid-eighties it was in decline, many of its
members back in the Unitarian fold. Its views,
expressed in its organ, The Index, edited by Francis
Abbott, and largely written by him and his col-
league, William J. Potter, influenced the later hu-
manistic theism of the Unitarians, and particularly
the emergence of the social gospel.
5436. Smith, Hilrie S. Changing conceptions of
original sin; a study in American theology
since 1750. New York, Scribner, 1955. 242 p.
55-9682 BT720.S5
An illuminating study of the doctrine of original
sin in American religious thought, first presented as
lectures at Princeton Theological Seminary by a
professor of Duke University Divinity School. Dr.
Smith explains the Puritan concept, the "federal" or
"covenant" doctrine of inherited corruption through
Adam's disobedience, which dominated colonial the-
ology— "In Adam's fall, We sinned all." In the
1 8th century Jonathan Edwards and his followers
upheld this Calvinistic tenet of native and inherited
depravity against the repudiation of infant damna-
tion by the English Daniel Whitby and John Taylor
and their American disciples, the precursors of the
Unitarian revolt. In the 19th century a modified
form of the Calvinist position was maintained by
Nathaniel W. Taylor at New Haven, and later by
Horace Bushnell, and was opposed by the Unitarian
Harvard school, led by Andrews Norton. The lib-
eralism that followed Darwin rejected the fall of
man and argued that sin originated in man's re-
fusal to respond to his higher nature. This trend,
dominant in late 19th and early 20th century
thought, was challenged by Walter Rauschenbush,
and in our own day by Niebuhr and Tillich, who
have returned to a doctrine of original sin as indis-
pensable to an understanding of the human situa-
tion and of the Christian doctrine of grace.
5437. Wieman, Henry Nelson, and Bernard Eu-
gene Meland. American philosophies of re-
ligion. Chicago, Willett, Clark, 1936. 370 p.
Bibliography: p. 353-359.
36-15871 BL51.W55
Professor Wieman of the University of Chicago
is himself one of the prominent voices in liberal
American theology at the present time. He and
Professor Meland are both "empirical theists,"
whose thought is close to that of John Dewey,
Shailer Mathews, and others who derive their idea
of God from the experience of value in the scientifi-
cally apprehended world of events. This book, de-
signed for college use, surveys, defines, and labels
contemporary types of religious thought as presented
by individuals. It opens with a general section of
orientation as to the background and traditions of
American philosophies of religion. Then four main
types are distinguished, "rooted in the traditions,"
respectively, of supernaturalism, idealism, romanti-
cism, and naturalism. Within these are many
shadings. Supernaturalists are traditionalist or neo-
supernaturalist. The idealists include absolutists,
modern mystics, and personalists. Within roman-
ticism come ethical intuitionists, and philosophic,
theological, or aesthetic naturalists. These last shade
off into the "rooted" naturalists, who may be evolu-
tionary theists, cosmic theists, religious humanists,
or empirical theists. The volume ends with a short
symposium, "The Present Oudook in Philosophy
of Religion," by representatives of the four main
branches, with summaries by the editors.
5438. Williams, Daniel Day. The Andover lib-
erals; a study in American theology. New
York, King's Crown Press, 1941. 203 p.
Bibliography: p. [i93]-i99-
42-480 BV4070.A56W5 1941a
The liberal movement in American Protestant
thought found its most vigorous early expression at
Andover Theological Seminary in Massachusetts
during the years 1880 to 1895. This stronghold of
Calvinism, founded by the Congregationalists in
1808, had been throughout the century a major
battlefield of old and new faiths. Until 1881, when
Edwards A. Park (no. 5428) retired, Calvinist or-
thodoxy held the fort; in that year a new faculty,
trained in the German critical-historical approach
and in evolutionary philosophy, began to champion
evangelical religious liberalism. Their journal, the
Andover Review (1884-93), was tne organ of the
new theology. Dr. Williams' study, which orig-
inated as a Columbia University dissertation, re-
766 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
views the history of Andover and outlines the new
developments in thought and their enunciation by
the faculty and by the Review. Toward the close of
the century, as strikes and labor troubles increase,
the Andover theologians turned more and more to
social problems. The movement culminated in
"Social Christianity," marked by the establishment
of a settlement house, Andover House in South
Boston, in 1892. "The House's Head Resident
found himself wondering if after all the trade union
movement, and not the church, might be God's
right arm in the bringing in of His Kingdom."
E. Religious Bodies
5439. Braden, Charles S. These also believe; a
study of modern American cults & minority
religious movements. New York, Macmillan, 1949.
xv, 491 p. 49-89r7 BR516.B697
The author, a liberal Methodist, is an emeritus
professor of the history and literature of religions at
Northwestern University. Most writings on the
groups here treated, he explains, have aimed "either
to exploit the strange, bizarre elements which many
of them do undoubtedly contain ... or to expose
their weaknesses, refute their claims, laugh at their
idiosyncrasies and so to discredit them." His is a
careful scholarly study, based, insofar as each group
would permit, on its own files of source materials.
The lucid analysis of each comprises: essential his-
torical facts; an explanation of its major distinctive
religious ideas and their divergences, from and rela-
tionships to normative Protestant or Catholic faith;
the form of organization; significant practices, social
or economic as well as religious; the basic motiva-
tions to which they appeal; and current trends. The
cults or minority religious bodies here examined are:
The Peace Mission movement of Father Divine;
Psychiana; New Thought; Unity School of Chris-
tianity; Christian Science; Theosophy; the I Am
Movement; the Liberal Catholic Church; Spiritual-
ism; Jehovah's Witnesses; Anglo-Israel; the Oxford
Group movement; and Mormonism. Appendix A
is a short selected bibliography (p. 453-460), Appen-
dix B is a brief dictionary of 18 other modern cults
not included in the study. In 1958 Dr. Braden
published a full-length objective "case study" of one
of these religious bodies: Christian Science Today;
Power, Policy, Practice (Dallas, Southern Methodist
University Press. 432 p.). As his title indicates, his
primary interest is not in the life of Mary Baker
Eddy, but in the modifications of her teaching and
the development of Christian Science thought and
practice during the half-century since her passing,
and in the means whereby the Board of Directors of
the Mother Church in Boston have maintained their
authority over 31 15 congregations throughout the
United States and the world. It includes a very
useful bibliography (p. 403-417).
5440. Clark, Elmer Talmage. The small sects in
America. Rev. ed. New York, Abingdon-
Cokesbury Press, 1949. 256 p.
49-10200 BR516.C57 1949
Bibliography: p. 236-240.
On the numerous little religious bodies, "for the
most part unknown to even well informed persons,"
this book, first published in 1937, has been the
standard and, until recently, the only publication
of its kind. The author emphasizes that the de-
scriptions are his own rather than those of repre-
sentatives of the several groups; the latter would
as he has found, entail endless repetition and much
obscurity. "A glance at the U.S. Census of Re-
ligious Bodies will show the results of that pro-
cedure." (In this connection it might be noted
that the Census of Religious Bodies has not been
taken since 1936, and in the i960 census religious
distinctions are to be omitted from vital statistics.)
Dr. Clark's attention is focused on the distinctive
principles of the sects, and on their points of differ-
ence rather than on the agreements, which, he
reminds us, "are far more numerous and important
than differences. In spite of superficial appear-
ances the churches are nearly all alike, and the
strife or contention between them has been greatly
exaggerated." In a running narrative which in-
cludes generalizations on sectarianism he examines
about a hundred churches, denominations, and
sects, grouping them by "the types of mind to which
their leading principles appeal." His seven main
categories are the pessimistic or adventists, the per-
fectionist or subjectivist, the charismatic or pente-
costal, the communistic, the legalistic or objectivist,
the egocentric or New Thought, and the esoteric
or mystic. The last two groups must be sought in
the Appendix.
5441. Drummond, Andrew L. Story of Ameri-
can Protestantism. Boston, Beacon Press,
1950. 418 p. 50-12382 BR515.D8 1950
Bibliography: p. 407-413.
The writer is a Scottish theologian. His account
of the metamorphoses of the Protestant faiths trans-
planted from England, Scotland, Holland, and
RELIGION / 767
Germany to the New World is in vivid narrative
style. Of five books, the first four are historical:
"Colonial Genesis," "Unification" (the Great
Awakening, the Revolution and post-Revolution-
ary "ebb-tide"), "Sectionalism" (the New England
theology and growth of sectarianism), and "The
Frontier and the Faith." The last part, "Modern
American Religion (1865-1940)," is a general
examination of the Protestant churches — the seven
big denominations rather than the multiple small
sects which account for only 3 percent of American
church membership. Dr. Drummond is concerned
to explain to British readers the vigor of the Ameri-
can churches and the strength of the tradition of
free Protestantism in the national life. He looks
appraisingly at the social gospel, men and methods
in evangelism, the liberal theology, eminent
preachers, recent tendencies toward a renascence of
worship, and interdenominational trends. He has
made effective use of secondary sources, and his
pages are filled with pertinent detail and telling
quotation.
5442. Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed. The American
church of the Protestant heritage. New
York, Philosphical Library, 1953. 481 p.
53-7607 BR516.F45
Contents. — The Moravian Church, by J. R.
Weinlick. — The Lutheran Church in America, by
V. Ferm. — The Mennonites, by J. C. Wenger. — The
Presbyterian Church in America, by C. M. Drury. —
The Protestant Episcopal Church in the United
States of America, by W. H. Stowe. — The Reformed
Church in America, by M. }. Hoffman. — Unitarian-
ism, by E. T. Buehrer. — The Congregational Chris-
dan churches, by M. M. Deems. — Baptist churches
in America, by R. G. Torbet. — The United Presby-
terian Church in America, by W. E. McCulloch. —
The Society of Friends in America (Quakers), by
W. E. Berry. — The Evangelical Mission Covenant
Church and the free churches of Swedish back-
ground, by K. A. Olsson. — The Church of the
Brethern, by D. W. Bittinger. — The Evangelical and
Reformed Church, by D. Dunn. — Methodism, by
E. T. Clark. — The Universalist Church of America,
by R. Cummins. — The Evangelical United Brethern
Church, -by P. H. Eller. — Seventh-Day Adventists,
by L. E. Froom. — Disciples of Christ, by R. E.
Osborn. — Churches of Christ, by E. West. — The
Church of God (Anderson, Indiana), by C. E.
Brown.
Twenty-one spokesmen for different Protestant
denominations here explain their churches, giving
the European background, the historic development
in America, characteristic features of doctrine, or-
ganization, leadership, and other information.
Most of the contributors are professors of religious
history, and the chief emphasis is on history. Each
article is followed by notes, a bibliography, and a
list of serial publications of the church described.
5443. [Baptist] Torbet, Robert G. A history of
the Bapdsts. Philadelphia, Judson Press,
1950. 538 p. 50-9198 BX6231.T6
Bibliography: p. 509-526.
By a professor of history at the Eastern Baptist
Theological Seminary, this is an attempt to tell con-
cisely but inclusively the story of the Baptists, who
in their several branches constitute the largest single
family of American Protestants. The book opens
with a brief review of Baptist principles — depend-
ence on the Bible as the sole rule for faith and prac-
tice, the church composed of baptized believers, the
autonomy of the local congregation, religious liberty,
and the separation of church and state — and of the
heritage of the Anabaptists of the Reformation.
Part 2 summarizes the history and present position
of British and European Baptists; although found
in almost every country they are nowhere numer-
ically strong except in America. Well over half the
text (p. 215-508) is devoted to the American Bap-
tists. From the little band that surrounded Roger
Williams, through the great revivals and the mis-
sionary expansion, doctrinal dissensions, movements
in evangelism and educadon, widespread foreign
missions, and the modern social gospel (whose
prophet, Walter Rauschenbusch, was a Baptist), the
narrative is carried swifty to the present day. The
appendixes include a chronological table, 1525-1950,
and a table of Baptist bodies in the United States
(6 with more than 100,000 members, and nearly
40 with fewer). The American story is told in far
greater detail in an older work originally published
in 1894, Albert H. Newman's History of the Bap-
tist Churches in the United States, 6th ed., rev. and
enl. (New York, Scribner, 1915. 545 p.), and its
source materials are excerpted in William W.
Sweet's collection, Religion on the American Fron-
tier (nos. 54 1 2-54 1 6).
5444. [Catholic] Blanshard, Paul. American free-
dom and Catholic power. 2d ed., rev. and
enl. Boston, Beacon Press, 1958. 402 p.
58-6240 BX1770.B55 1958
Bibliography: p. 361-365.
5445. O'Neill, James M. Catholicism and Ameri-
can freedom. New York, Harper, 1952.
287 p. 51-11945 BX1406.O5
Mr. Blanshard's much-debated book on the Catho-
lic Church as an organ of political and cultural
power was first published in 1949. The 1958 re-
vision includes a review of events of the decade
since its appearance and an account of the storm
768 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of controversy it aroused. The author, a lawyer
and a liberal in religion, declares in his "Personal
Prologue: The Duty to Speak": "There is no doubt
that the American Catholic hierarchy has entered
the political arena, and that it is becoming more
and more aggressive in extending the frontiers of
Catholic authority into the fields of medicine, edu-
cation, and foreign policy." He describes his study
as a review of contemporary facts, and each state-
ment is carefully documented, in large part from
Catholic sources. Mr. Blanshard first discusses the
working of the hierarchy and its relation to the
state, then analyzes Catholic teaching and practice
in regard to individual issues — education, medicine,
birth control, marriage and divorce, censorship,
science, political ideologies, etc. In a second book
from the same publisher, Communism , Democracy,
and Catholic Power (Boston, 1951. 340 p.), he
extends his indictment of Catholic authoritarianism
to the world scene. Catholic answers to this polemic
have been numerous and indignant. The most
detailed is by Mr. O'Neill, a teacher of rhetoric and
debate, a former chairman of the Committee on
Academic Freedom of the American Civil Liberties
Union and a Catholic layman. His volume at-
tempts to show "that Mr. Blanshard's basic thesis
[that the Catholic Church is an enemy of American
freedom] is false, and that the discussion of the
belief and practice of American Catholics which he
presents in support of his thesis is so biased and in-
accurate as to be substantially worthless."
5446. The Commonweal. Catholicism in Amer-
ica, a series of articles from The Common-
weal. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1954. 242 p.
54-5256 BX1406.C53
5447. Putz, Louis J., ed. The Catholic Church,
U. S. A. Chicago, Fides Publishers Asso-
ciation, 1956. xxiii, 415 p.
56-11629 BX1406.P84
The widely esteemed weekly review The Com-
monweal is edited by Catholic laymen. Its attitude
is predominantly that described by the Protestant
theologian Reinhold Niebuhr in one of the essays
in this symposium: "the Church finding a creative
place in the moral and political reconstruction of a
modern industrial society." The book reprints 17
essays published in the journal during 1953, all, ex-
cept Dr. Niebuhr's and Will Herberg's "A Jew
Looks at Catholics," by Catholic laymen. The fore-
word by President George N. Shuster of Hunter
College sets the keynote of seeking to allay tensions
still felt in the mid-20th century between Catholics
and non-Catholic Americans. The first essay,
"Catholicism in America," by William P. Clancy,
an editor of Commonweal, outlines and deplores the
extreme positions ("Mr. Paul Blanshard on the one
side and his Catholic counterparts on the other") in
which Catholicism is considered a threat to Ameri-
can democracy and, conversely, "the only force left
strong enough to combat an increasingly arrogant
secularist invasion of culture." The other essays
examine, not uncritically, Catholic separatism, and
the Catholic position in politics, isolationism, social
reform, radicalism, education, science, arts, letters,
and the movies. Another recent symposium, ex-
pository rather than analytical in treatment, is The
Catholic Church, U.S.A. The 23 articles contrib-
uted by Catholic scholars, several of them priests,
are grouped in three parts: the first is on the history,
structure, and organizational workings of the
Church. Part 2 is arranged by regions, showing
the diversity of the church in New England, the
Deep South, the Pacific coast, etc. The last part
concerns the life and influence of the church in social
and intellectual spheres. The quality of Catholic
social thought is exemplified, for instance, in the
essay by the Rev. John La Farge, S.J., on "The Cath-
olic Church and Racial Segregation." Father La
Farge, associate editor of the national Catholic
weekly America, has been closely concerned with
and written much on race relations. He has also
recently published A Report on the American
Jesuits, with photographs by Margaret Bourke-
White (New York, Farrar, Straus & Cudahy, 1956.
236 p.). Extended from an article for Life, it is a
splendidly illustrated outline of the history and cur-
rent activities of this indefatigable order.
5448. Ellis, John Tracy. American Catholicism.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press,
1956. 207 p. (The Chicago history of American
civilization) 56-11002 BX1406.E4
Bibliographical references included in "Notes":
p. 160-180.
"Suggested reading": p. 188-197.
5449. Ellis, John Tracy, ed. Documents of Amer-
ican Catholic history. Milwaukee, Bruce
Pub. Co., 1956. xxiv, 677 p.
56-13199 BX1405.E4
Monsignor Ellis of Catholic University is man-
aging editor of the Catholic Historical Review and
a noted historian. His first volume embodies four
lectures concisely sketching in broad general lines
the history of American Catholicism. The divi-
sions are chronological, the first lecture covering
the colonial period, 1492-1790. The second, "Cath-
olics as Citizens," runs from the inauguration of the
hierarchy in the United States under Bishop Car-
roll in 1790 to 1852, the year of the first national
plenary council. "Civil War and Immigration,"
1 852-1908, describes the violent anti-Catholic agi-
RELIGION / 769
tation of the Know-Nothing Party, and the great
increase of Catholic population through the Irish,
German, and South European immigrations. The
last lecture, "Recent American Catholicism," brings
the story up to 1956. The record of the Church in
America reveals, according to the author, "the max-
imum of loyalty and service to every fundamental
ideal and principle upon which the Republic was
founded and has endured." He lays much stress on
the discrimination against Catholics that has pre-
vailed throughout the four-century story. Dr. Ellis
had earlier published a larger bibliography than
the one in this volume: A Select Bibliography of
the History of the Catholic Church in the United
States (New York, McMullen, 1947. 96 p.) with
775 entries, most of them books, and with brief
annotations for the greater part. The large volume
of Documents is likewise in chronological order,
selected from the source materials of Catholicism
in America. They begin with the Papal Bull of
Demarcation in 1493 and end with the Encyclical
of 1939, Sertum laetitiae, celebrating the 150th anni-
versary of the American Hierarchy. Their great
variety includes inspiring records of missionary
faith and heroism; expressions of tolerance, patriot-
ism, and charity; and contributions to art and letters,
social thought and action, and political thought.
5450. Maynard, Theodore. The story of Ameri-
can Catholicism. New York, Macmillan,
1941. xv, 694 p. 41-23098 BX1406.M33
Bibliography: p. 649-675.
An eminently readable historical narrative by a
Catholic scholar, poet, and man of letters. One
Protestant reviewer called his book "mythology, anti-
Protestant polemic, propaganda, history and criti-
cism blended into a literary masterpiece." The
chronological narrative ends with the death of Car-
dinal Gibbons in 1920. In the penultimate chapter
Dr. Maynard reviews the cultural contribution of
many Catholic writers, poets, artists, and musicians,
and in the last, "The Corporate Vision," he dis-
cusses briefly the social action of the church, the li-
turgical revival, and other aspects of her estate in
the second quarter of the 20th century. He takes
issue with those who have claimed that the Catholic
Church is inherently incompatible with the culture
of the United States. He recognizes, he says, "dan-
gers of Catholic disintegration here. But they do
not come from American thought or American in-
stitutions; they come from the spirit of the times,
from which Americanism itself is in danger." A
later book by Dr. Maynard, The Catholic Church
and the American Idea (New York, Appleton-Cen-
tury-Crofts, 1953. 309 p.), is a fuller and equally
forceful statement of Catholic participation in and
contributions to American civilization. In his most
recent work, Great Catholics in American History
(Garden City, N.Y., Hanover House, 1957. 261
p.), he briefly relates the life stories of 21 Catholic
saints, heroes, and leaders beginning with the Jesuit
Fathers and ending with Al Smith.
5451. Shea, John D. Gilmary. A history of the
Catholic Church within the limits of the
United States, from the first attempted colonization
to the present time. New York, J. G. Shea, 1886—
92. 4 v. 35-16425 BX1406.S5 1886
BX4705.C33S4 1888
Shea (1824-1892) abandoned a novitiate in the
Society of Jesus in order to write the history of his
church in America, and his magnum opus is one
of the chief monuments of American Catholic
scholarship, representing prolonged research in
original source materials. The four volumes cover:
1, the Catholic Church in the colonies, English,
French, and Spanish; 2, the life and times of Bishop
John Carroll (1763-1815); 3, 1808-1843; 4, 1843-
1866. A projected fifth volume was never com-
pleted. All the volumes have many illustrations,
"portraits, views, maps, and fac-similes." Prac-
tically every page is crowded with footnotes, many
of them including comment, additional data, and
quotation as well as references. The work, while
outmoded in some respects, remains impressive in
its scholarship, eloquence, earnestness, and objec-
tivity. Shea's voluminous output consisted largely
of documentary publications, but his History of the
Catholic Missions among the Indian Tribes of the
United States, 1 529-1845 (New York, E. Dunigan,
1855. 514 p.) deserves separate mention.
5452. [Christian Science] Beasley, Norman. The
cross and the crown; the history of Christian
Science. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1952.
664 p. 52-9086 BX6931.B4
5453. Beasley, Norman. The continuing spirit.
New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1956.
403 p. 56-5050 BX6931.B38
The first work is a history of the beginnings and
widening acceptance of the teachings of Mary Baker
Eddy, from her own healing and her discovery of
"the Christ Science" in 1866 to her death in 1910.
The second book takes up the story of the church
at that point, with some backward glances, and
carries it to the present day. The author disclaims
any connection with the First Church of Christ,
Scientist, and in his preface to the second declares
that he wrote both works on the basis of his own
research, "carried on in sources wholly outside
the Archives of the Mother Church." His single
purpose, he says has been to present "an independ-
770 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ent, documented history of what Mary Baker Eddy
left to her followers." His treatment of the dis-
coverer and founder of Christian Science is uni-
formly sympathetic, and her position in the contro-
versies which surrounded her is justified at each
step of his full narrative of the persecutions, fi-
nancial worries, intrigues, conflicts, and apostasies
through which she maintained the leadership of a
great and powerful religious movement. The
crowded detail includes frequent and lengthy ex-
tracts from her writings, but contains nothing on
the doctrinal sources of her new faith — at least,
none since the third century A. D. — and leaves the
impression that it was entirely self-contained. In
the second book less attention is paid to the doc-
trines of Christian Science than to its organization,
litigation, publishing, and other activities.
5454. [Congregational] Atkins, Gaius Glenn, and
Frederick L. Fagley. History of American
Congregationalism. Boston, Pilgrim Press, 1942.
432 p. 42-18901 BX7135.A75
Bibliography: p. [409]-4i6.
In the last chapter of this substantial history of
the Congregational churches in America, the au-
thors appraise the Congregational polity as "An
Adventure in Liberty." "The right and duty of
the church member to administer his own church
business with a direct control; a minimum of ec-
clesiastical machinery; willing obedience to major-
ity discussions; a disciplined respect for the right
of the minority. Congregationalism believes this
to be necessary to the liberty of a Christian man,
and whatever else is built must be upon this founda-
tion." The story of the church which became
American Congregationalism begins with its back-
ground of separatism on the Continent and in Eng-
land, the group of exiles in Holland, and the Pil-
grim Fathers in the New World. The Mayflower
Compact is one of the covenants, the forms which
united the saints into visible churches, reproduced
in the Appendix. Among the Puritan churches of
New England, the name Congregational "just
growed." Landmarks in the story are the "New
England Way," the adoption of the Cambridge
Platform of Church Discipline (1648), the Great
Awakening, the Revolution, the "departure" of the
Unitarians, the expansion into the Northwest Ter-
ritory, the growth of national consciousness and
social concern, and the formation of the National
Council and the Benevolent and Mission Boards.
The forms of organization at successive periods are
carefully noted.
5455. [Disciples of Christ] Garrison, Winfred
Ernest, and Alfred T. De Groot. The
Disciples of Christ, a history. St. Louis, Christian
Board of Publication, 1948. 592 p.
49-7481 BX7315.G333
Bibliography: p. 571-576.
A coordinated and well-rounded history of the
group of reunionist, congregational, noncreedal
churches known as the Disciples of Christ and the
Churches of Christ. The authors are both Disciples,
and Dr. Garrison is recognized as one of the coun-
try's eminent professors of church history (no.
5405). This denomination originated as a direct
outgrowth of the Great Western Revival in two
separate movements of secession from the Presby-
terian Church, the Stone movement in Kentucky
in 1803 (Barton W. Stone's parish was Cane Ridge,
scene of the most famous camp meeting), and
Thomas Campbell's movement in western Penn-
sylvania in 1809. Basic ideas of both were a re-
union of all Christian churches without sectarian
division (resulting, of course, in the creation of new
sects), and the Bible as sole authority, without
"human" additions of creeds and ecclesiasticism
("anyone who could get an audience could preach").
The name of Disciples was first used by the Camp-
bellites during the vigorous evangelism of Walter
Scott around 1830. In the next decade the two
bodies merged, and the first national convention was
held in 1849. In growth through missionary effort
along the advancing frontier, in planting churches,
in preaching and publishing, and in establishing
schools," the story of the Disciples parallels that of
the country." Since the census of 1906 the con-
servative branch, gradually differentiated by the
accumulation of small differences in matters of
practice, has been listed separately under the name
of Churches of Christ.
5456. [Episcopal] Manross, William W. A his-
tory of the American Episcopal Church.
[2d ed., rev. and enl.] New York, Morehouse-
Gorham, 1950. xiv, 415 p.
50-8326 BX5880.M35 1950
Bibliography: p. 373-386.
5457. Addison, James T. The Episcopal Church
in the United States, 1789-193 1. New
York, Scribner, 1951. 400 p.
51-10050 BX5880.A33
Bibliography: p. 382-385.
The first of these two histories is a standard
reference work, calm and dignified in style; it might
even be termed prosaic. Dr. Manross covers a host
of facts, names, and events. For the colonial be-
ginnings he has depended on 19th-century histories,
but much of his later text is from primary sources.
Almost half the book is taken up with the slow
expansion of the church in the colonies, the un-
RELIGION / 77I
successful efforts to secure an American episcopate,
and the serious decline during the Revolution when
the Anglican clergy by and large inclined to the
Loyalist side. The author feels this decline is often
exaggerated; by 1785 the first General Convention
met, and after a few years of reorganization and
recuperation a vigorous revival and expansion were
under way, led by the great Bishops John Henry
Hobart and Alexander Viets Griswold, represent-
ing respectively High Churchmanship and Evangeli-
calism. Equally fact-crowded treatment is given to
the establishment of missions in the West and
abroad, the effects of the Oxford Movement (Anglo-
Catholicism) and of 19th-century liberalism, and to
institutional and organizational factors in the
present-day church. Dr. Addison's book covers the
same story (to 193 1) in very different fashion. His
narrative is rapid and colorful, focusing on the social
environment and on great individual leaders —
among others, the Revolutionary Bishop William
White, Bishops Griswold, Hobart, Philander Chase,
R. C. Moore, and Alonzo Potter, Dr. W. A. Muhlen-
berg, the missionary Bishop William H. Hare, the
great preacher Phillips Brooks, and in the 20th
century Bishops William Lawrence and Charles H.
Brent. The writer offers more exposition of doc-
trine than does Dr. Manross and points out some
weaknesses and failures of the church as well as its
rich contributions to American Christianity.
5458. [Judaism] Glazer, Nathan. American
Judaism. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press, 1957. 175 p. (The Chicago history of
American civilization) 57—8574 BM205.G5
5459. Levy, Beryl Harold. Reform Judaism in
America; a study in religious adaptation.
New York, 1933. 143 p.
34-4818 BM205.L45 1933
5460. Sklare, Marshall. Conservative Judaism; an
American religious movement. Glencoe,
111., Free Press, 1955. 298 p.
55-7332 BM197.5.S45 1955
Mr. Glazer focuses his concise history on two
main tendencies of Jewish religion in an American
environment. The tiny communities of dignified,
upper-class Orthodox Jewish merchants in early
America represented both Judaism, the tradition of
the law pervading the whole of life, and "Jewish-
ness," the ethnic separateness of the Jewish people.
With the large-scale immigration of refugees from
the German ghettos (1825-80), there came in in-
fluences fostering religious as well as political
freedom, and Reform Judaism rose concurrently
with an increasing social and economic merging of
the well-dispersed Jews into the new land of liberty.
But with the flood of East European Jewry — nearly
2 million immigrants between 1880 and 1920, con-
centrated in the New York area — "Jewishness" re-
vived, bringing on the one hand, militant irreligion,
socialistic politics, and Zionism, and on the other,
extreme orthodoxy. The process of integration of
these newcomers with the Jewish community and
the general stream of American life is analyzed
from a sociological viewpoint. The author seeks
to show that "Jewishness" has virtually disappeared,
and that the practices of Judaism have been adjusted
to the mores of the American middle class. He
ends with a discussion of the revival since 1940,
paralleling that in other faiths, of all forms of
Judaism, Orthodox, Conservative, and Reform.
The following two titles originated in dissertations
at Columbia University. Dr. Levy's Reform Juda-
ism has long been the standard treatment of this
movement for a modernist revision of Jewish
religious thought. Reform Judaism stemmed from
the enlightenment and the struggles of the German
Jews for civil liberties, and in America shaped itself
so as to fit the Jews into the prosperous, comfort-
able, and liberal society of the late 19th century.
The volume is in three parts, "Re-Making the
Prayer-Book" (doing away with part of the rigid
Mosaic ritual), "Attempts at a Theology" (move-
ments toward rationalism and their leaders), and
"Practical Issues and Rabbinical Reasoning." Mr.
Marshall Sklare's Conservative Judaism is a well-
organized study of the school which rose as a
halfway house between the tendency of Reform
Judaism toward complete assimilation into the
larger gentile community, and the ethnic exclusive-
ness of Orthodox Judaism. Its doctrinal center is
the Jewish Theological Seminary in New York,
founded in 1886 to counteract the influence of the
Reformist school, the Hebrew Union College in
Cincinnati.
5461 [Lutheran] Wentz, Abdel R. A basic history
of Lutheranism in America. Philadelphia,
Muhlenberg Press, 1955. 430 p.
55-7765 BX8041.W38
5462. Spaude, Paul W. The Lutheran Church
under American influence; a historico-phil-
osophical interpretation of the church in its relation
to various modifying forces in the United States.
Burlington, Iowa, Lutheran Literary Board, 1943.
435 p. 43-10142 BX8041.S65
Bibliography: p. [403]~429.
The Basic History is a standard text by a cleric and
historian prominent in Lutheran circles at home and
abroad. His story is framed in the political and
social history of America. The great name of the
early days is Henry M. Muhlenberg, who in the
772 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
middle 1700's organized the congregations of Ger-
man and Swedish Lutherans in Pennsylvania and
the neighboring Colonies into the first synods. In
the 1820's a large measure of unity was achieved,
with a general synod and a seminary at Gettysburg,
but separatism increased with national discord and
with the immigration of several million Germans
and Scandinavians into the Middle West. Although
essentially one in the basic tenets of their conserva-
tive doctrine (Luther's "Church, conscience, and
the Book"), the various bodies have developed a
great variety in organization and practice. At one
time there were 150 Lutheran groups; there are now
fewer than 20. Their divisions as to points of faith
and polity, and the trends of the modern age toward
union in liturgy, in social action, in welfare and
relief work, and in synods, conferences, and councils,
at home and abroad, form the chief theme of Dr.
Wentz' later chapters. His general bibliographical
note (p. 385-388) describes 7 historical works, all
but 2 from the 19th century. Mr. Spaude's work is
not a chronological narrative but, as its subtitle indi-
cates, an interpretation of the development of the
Lutheran Church in America. The first 40 pages
describe the Lutheran movements in the European
homelands. Then American Lutheranism is ana-
lyzed with respect to the chief influences it has
undergone — democracy, industrial organization,
Sunday schools, secret societies, universities, modern
financial organizations, the social gospel, "evolu-
tion," the other Protestant faiths, rationalism, re-
vivalism, and ecumenical trends.
5463. [Methodist] Sweet, William Warren. Meth-
odism in American history. Revision of
1953. Nashville, Abingdon Press, 1954. 472 p.
illus. 54-5943 BX8235.S9_ 1953
The history of Methodism in America, springing
out of the great spiritual urge of John Wesley
(1703-1791) and rapidly spread by the colorful
means of the revival meeting and the circuit rider,
is one that lends itself to the style of its leading his-
torian, at once expert scholar and vivid interpreter.
Dr. Sweet was ordained in 1906, and served as a
Methodist pastor for five years before taking up his
life work of religious historian (nos. 5401-5402,
5410-5416). In this narrative persons and events
play a larger part than doctrine. Despite the temp-
tations offered by the exciting early days, by Wesley,
Devereux, Jarratt, Asbury, and by the explosive
westward expansion of the church, the author gives
equal attention to later phases of Methodism in the
history and social development of the Nation. The
book was first published in 1933, and ended with a
chapter "[Methodism] Faces the Great War and Its
Aftermath." For the revision 20 years later a long
chapter has been added, "Through Two Decades of
Storm and Stress, 1933-1953," in which are re-
viewed the concerns of Methodism with the depres-
sion, Nazism, neo-orthodoxy (with which Dr. Sweet
does not go along), prohibition and its end, pacifism,
World War II, peace programs, Protestant-Catholic
tension, and the ecumenical movement. An appen-
dix outlines the church's organizational structure.
This is a complex matter, involving various institu-
tions and procedures developed over the years. For
a full understanding, reference may be made to a
scholarly monograph by Nolan Bailey Harmon:
The Organization of the Methodist Church; His-
toric Development and Present Worthing Structure,
rev. ed. (Nashville, Methodist Pub. House, 1953.
288 p.). A painless introduction to Methodist his-
tory is the handsome quarto picture book put to-
gether by Elmer Talmage Clark, An Album of
Methodist History (New York, Abingdon-Cokes-
bury Press, 1952. 336 p.). This contains repro-
ductions of contemporary prints and other
illustrations of Methodist beginnings. The first
section covers the life and times of John and Charles
Wesley, their families, associates, and successors in
Britain and its colonial possessions; the second and
longer section illustrates American Methodism.
5464. [Mormon] Brodie, Fawn (McKay). No
man knows my history; the life of Joseph
Smith, the Mormon prophet. New York, Knopf,
1945. ix, 476, xix p. illus.
45-9481 BX8695.S6B7
Bibliography: p. 466-476.
5465. West, Ray Benedict. Kingdom of the
saints; the story of Brigham Young and the
Mormons. New York, Viking Press, 1957. 389 p.
illus. 57-6437 BX8611.W4
Mrs. Brodie's biography of Joseph Smith is a work
of intensive scholarship, widely praised as the best
history of the prophet and seer upon whose revela-
tions the Church of Jesus Christ of the Latter-Day
Saints was founded. The author has searched out
and scrutinized carefully the evidence on all sides
of the strange story, and her picture of her subject
is impartial and in the main sympathetic. Her
account ends with the martyrdom of Joseph Smith
in Carthage, Illinois, in 1844. In her first appendix
she quotes documents on his early life; in the second
she disposes of the Spaulding-Rigdon Theory of the
authorship of the Boo\ of Mormon. Appendix C
identifies the plural Mesdames Smith. The bibliog-
raphy is brief and selective, and does not attempt to
list "the legion of secondary source books that fur-
nished background for the life and times of Joseph
Smith." Mrs. Brodie's title is taken from a speech
made by the prophet himself a few months before
his death. "I don't blame anyone for not believing
RELIGION / 773
my history," he said. "If I had not experienced
what I have, I could not believe it myself." His
biographer's suggested answer is that he was essen-
tially a romantic author whose imagination made his
romance more real to him than reality. The author
of Kingdom of the Saints, who comes of Mormon
stock and grew up as a devout believer, is more
ready to accept Smith as a genuine religious mystic
whose transcendent experience could not be proved
and must be believed. This, Mr. West says, is "the
only point of view that can present the Mormon
religion for what it is, the basis of a belief which
holds the faith of almost a million and a half today."
He protests against the usual treatment of the Mor-
mon story "as a comic episode in American history."
His narrative covers the whole epic but is sketchy
regarding Joseph's revelation and the founding of
the church. Mr. West's protagonist is rather
Brigham Young, the Moses who led the exodus of
the saints and established their "foursquare" king-
dom, a Zion at once spiritual and material. Essen-
tially a religious history, it emphasizes the faith by
which the heroic pioneers accomplished their latter-
day miracle. Nels Anderson's Desert Saints; the
Mormon Frontier in Utah (Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1942. xx, 459 p.) is a remarkably
vivid picture of the frontier community created by
the Mormon Church in Utah down to about 1877,
emphasizing the partial achievement of its ideal:
an economic autarchy of religiously dedicated fam-
ilies from which both riches and poverty had been
eliminated. The many original sources used by the
author are listed in his bibliography (p. 447-452).
5466. [Presbyterian] Slosser, Gaius J., ed. They
seek a country; the American Presbyterians,
some aspects. New York, Macmillan, 1955. xvi,
330 p. _ illus. 55"I4554 BX8935.S55
Bibliography: p. 322-324.
Thirteen lectures delivered at an historical sym-
posium are here published to form an overall sketch
of the Presbyterian Church in the United States.
The arrangement is roughly chronological, the first
chapter by the editor being on Old World origins —
Calvinism and its manifestations in Northern Ire-
land, Scotland, and England. "Beginnings in the
North" covers the colonial era, and tells how the
great missionary, Francis Makemie, established the
first intercolonial Presbytery in the Middle Colonies
in 1706, "at least four decades earlier than any other
intercolonial body among American churches."
"Beginnings in the South" deals particularly with
the Scottish settlements of the Carolinas. "The
United Presbyterian Church" and "The Reformed
Presbyterian Church in America" explains the
schisms of the 19th century and the resultant group-
ings. "The Founding of Educational Institutions,"
by W. W. Sweet, is an important chapter in the
church's history. The Presbyterian contribution to
the Revolution, the Constitution, and the Govern-
ment of the United States are examined in "Service
in Founding and Preserving the Nation." There
are chapters on missionary expansion at home, on
the antislavery struggle, and on events and trends
in the early and later 19th century. K. S. Latourette
contributes a chapter on his specialty, "Service Over-
seas." The last is "Today and Tomorrow: the Road
Ahead," with three authors. In each chapter four
pages reproduce portraits of important leaders,
thumbnail biographies of whom are included in a
"Who's Who" appendix. The last group (after p.
270) includes six presidents and five other states-
men. A recent compilation of documents is The
Presbyterian Enterprise; Sources of American Pres-
byterian History, edited by Maurice W. Armstrong,
Lefferts A. Loetscher, and Charles A. Anderson
(Philadelphia, Westminster Press, 1956. 336 p.).
The interesting selections are tied together by brief
historical notes.
5467. [Quaker] Thomas, Allen C. A history of
the Friends in America. 6th ed., rev. and
enl. Philadelphia, Winston, 1930. 287 p. (Penns-
bury series of modern Quaker books)
30-27832 BX7635.T5 1930
Bibliography: p. 257-280.
5468. Brinton, Howard H. Friends for 300 years;
the history and beliefs of the Society of
Friends since George Fox started the Quaker move-
ment. New York, Harper, 1952. 239 p.
52-5424 BX7631.B7
The older of these titles, first issued in 1894, is a
highly condensed history of the Society of Friends,
from its beginnings in England with the mystic ex-
perience (1646) of the founder, George Fox, and his
preaching of the Inner Light. By 1656 members of
this "cursed set of heretics" had reached New Eng-
land, and in spite of persecution by colonial govern-
ments from Massachusetts to Virginia, its spread
was rapid. The visit of Fox himself in 1672 made
many converts, while the acquisition of Pennsyl-
vania as a proprietary colony by William Penn and
the British Toleration Act of 1689 gave the congre-
gations of Friends a settled status by 1700. In the
1 8th century notable aspects of Quaker history were
the excellent relations with the Indians, leadership
in opposition to slavery, and the sufferings of pacifist
Friends during the Revolution. The early 19th
century brought divisions — Orthodox, Hicksite, and
Wilburite Friends — confirmation of the antislavery
stand, and the first educational foundations. The
account of later years summarizes events through
the First World War. The revised edition was the
774 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
work of William Brinton Harvey. Dr. Brinton's
book is theological rather than historical, concentrat-
ing on Quaker faith and practice — "To Wait upon
the Lord," "The Light Within as Experienced,"
"The Light Within as Thought About," etc. He
declares Quakerism to be "an explicit and developed
manifestation" of a third form of Christianity be-
sides Protestantism and Catholicism. There is a
short historical chapter: "The Four Periods of
Quaker History and Their Relation to the Mystical,
the Evangelical, the Rational, and the Social Forms
of Religion." The famous work of the Friends'
Service Committee, as well as activities among
Negroes and Indians, in education, and in interna-
tional relations, are described in a chapter on "The
Meeting and the World."
5469. [Shaker] Melcher, Marguerite (Fellows)
The Shaker adventure. Princeton, Prince-
ton University Press, 194 1. 319 p.
41-51750 BX9765.M4
Annotated bibliography: p. 294-301.
A warmly sympathetic history of the "moral and
industrious, though eccentric, people" called
Shakers and their handicraft culture. This interest-
ing communitarian sect, now almost extinct, grew
up around an Englishwoman, "Mother Ann" Lee,
to whom it had been revealed in a vision that she
was the female incarnation of Christ in the second
coming, and who in 1774 led a band of nine Be-
lievers to their adventure in America. The account
of the beginnings and early days is written with
respect for, if not complete acceptance of, Mother
Ann's spiritual gifts. The principles of the Shakers,
so called from their extreme bodily manifestations
of the spirit in worship, were the confession of sins,
community of goods, celibacy (new members were
by conversion, children, if any, by adoption), and
withdrawal from the world. Guided by fresh rev-
elations, advancing under persecution, and spread-
ing with the revival of the early 1800's, the Society
of the United Believers, commonly called Shakers,
in their peak period between 1840 and i860 num-
bered some 6,000 members, established in 18 rural
communities from Maine to southwest Kentucky.
Men and women lived and worked side by side with
sex eliminated through religious emotion. Farmers
and craftsmen, thorough and practical, they
achieved a "hand-minded" society which provided
economic security and peace, and has left to
machine-age collectors a treasure of craftsmanship.
Mrs. Melcher has made extensive use of Shaker
records for her detailed story.
5470. [Unitarian] Cooke, George Willis. Uni-
tarianism in America; a history of its origin
and development. Boston, American Unitarian
Association, 1902. 463 p. illus.
3-605 BX9833.C7
5471. Wilbur, Earl Morse. A history of Uni-
tarianism. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1945-52. 2 v. A45-3134 BX9831.W49
Contents. — [1] Socinianism and its anteced-
ents.— [2] In Transylvania, England, and America.
5472. Wright, Conrad. The beginnings of Uni-
tarianism in America. Boston, Starr King
Press; distributed by Beacon Press, 1955. 305 p.
"Bibliographical appendix": p. [28i]-29i.
55-8138 BX9833.W7
"Bibliographical note": p. [292] -294.
The time-honored work by Dr. Cooke is still the
one full-scale history of American Unitarianism. In
Dr. Wilbur's authoritative modern study only the
last four chapters (v. 2, p. 379-487) are devoted to
the doctrine in the New World. The movement in
America, although preceded in general by the liberal
thought of the Reformation (Dr. Wilbur goes back
in his first volume to antecedents in the Apostolic
Age) and influenced by the writings of English
rationalists and deists, was essentially an outgrowth
of New England Puritanism. Dr. Wright's inter-
esting monograph illuminates the doctrine of free
will, usually referred to as Arminian in 18th-century
New England, which preluded the Unitarian break
with Calvinism. The 18th-century liberals, he says,
combined the three tendencies of Arminianism,
supernatural rationalism, and anti-Trinitarianism.
Their great spokesmen were Charles Chauncy and
Jonathan Mayhew; their chief opponent was Jona-
than Edwards with his defense of original sin. The
new trends of thought, nourished by the revolution-
ary social and political climate, spread widely; Dr.
Wright in an appendix lists 60 ministers identified
as Arminians from their printed sermons and tracts,
and over 20 more reputed to be "new divinity" men.
His story ends with the open breach of 1805, when
the election of the liberal Henry Ware as Hollis
Professor of Divinity at Harvard opened the so-
called Unitarian Controversy. For half a century
Unitarian views were set forth in a torrent of con-
troversial books, pamphlets, and magazines, and by
such spokesmen as William E. Channing, R. W.
Emerson, and Theodore Parker. In 1825 the
American Unitarian Association was formed as a
missionary and publication agency; in the Conven-
tion of 1865 the national body was organized in
much its present form. Dr. Cooke's history is
detailed as to men, publications, and events. His
last chapters are concerned with the growth of de-
nominational consciousness, the ministry, social and
educational work, and missions and philanthropies.
RELIGION / 775
Dr. Wilbur's more concentrated account highlights
the controversial path of Unitarianism as a more or
less spontaneous development among liberal thinkers
in many countries and ages.
5473. [Universalist] Eddy, Richard. Universalism
in America, a history. Boston, Universalist
Pub. House, 1884-86. 2 v.
43-32304 BX9933.E3 1884
Contents. — 1. 1636-1800. — 2. 1801-1886.
Bibliography: p. 485-599.
Universalism, the doctrine of the eventual salva-
tion of all men through divine grace, has been ad-
vanced since early Christian times, and came to
America through many channels. This work, which
in spite of its age is the only adequate history of
the Universalist Church of America, examines at
great length and with abundant quotation the
evidences of Universalism in various creeds and in
the thought of individuals, and the evolution of the
church through the 18th and 19th centuries. The
first great leader, John Murray, organized the de-
nomination in New England in 1785 as the "In-
dependent Christian Society, commonly called
Universalists." At a convention of the New Eng-
land groups in 1803 there was adopted a Profession
of Belief and a Plan of Church Government. Hosea
Ballou (1771-1852), whose Treatise on the Atone-
ment, published in 1805, was one of the normative
texts of the movement, strongly influenced the
Universalists toward Unitarian views. The later
history of the church is here told in detail as to
individual spokesmen, publications, and organiza-
tional aspects. Volume 2 includes chapters on the
spread of the Universalists outside New England
and on educational institutions (Tufts College was
founded as a Universalist theological school). The
concluding large bibliography catalogs "all that
has been published in America either for or against
the doctrine of Universal Salvation" through the
year 1886. Over the years the Universalists have
drawn progressively closer in their radial liberalism
to the Unitarians, and in the 1950's steps are being
taken toward an organic merger of the two bodies.
In 1957 the Universalist Historical Society in Boston
published a little book, The Universalist Church of
America, a Short History, by Clinton Lee Scott (124
p.). It is little more than an outline, preliminary to
a definitive history of Universalism which Dr. Scott
has been commissioned to write.
F. Representative Leaders
5474. [Asbury, Francis] Asbury, Herbert. A
Methodist saint; the life of Bishop Asbury.
New York, Knopf, 1927. xiv, 355 p. illus.
27-5884 BX8495.A8A8
Bibliography: p. [3371-342.
5475. Duren, William Larkin. Francis Asbury,
founder of American Methodism and un-
official minister of state. New York, Macmillan,
1928. 270 p. illus. 28-23317 BX8495.A8D8
Francis Asbury (1745-1816), whose "premiership
among church founders and religious leaders of
the New World is probably one of the most un-
challenged facts connected with the history of our
country" (Duren), in 1771 was sent by John Wesley
as a missionary to the three-hundred-odd adherents
of the new movement in America. He began at
once the itinerant career which he followed for 45
years. In 1784 he was appointed by Wesley super-
intendent of the Methodist work in America, and
at a conference of all Methodist ministers was elected
and ordained, assuming the title of bishop. Until
his death he rode over the country from Georgia
to Maine and westward to Kentucky, always tri-
umphing over ill health, always preaching, convert-
ing, establishing churches (approximately nine
hundred), and organizing and directing conferences.
His Journal, published in three volumes in 1821
(New York, N. Bangs & T. Mason), is a notable
source for the study of American social as well as
religious history. The two biographies here listed,
published a year apart, are very different in tone.
The first, by a collateral descendant, is a popular
work, satirical in its characterization, if not of the
circuit-rider bishop and saint, at least of his col-
leagues and the backwoods society in which they
moved. The second, by a Southern Methodist
minister, admiringly sets forth the sterling virtues
of "the mightiest spiritual beacon that ever blazed
on this continent."
5476. [Beecher] Hibben, Baxton. Henry Ward
Beecher: an American portrait. New York,
Doran, 1927. 390 p. illus.
27-19865 BX7260.B3H5
"Sources cited": p. 357-367.
Beecher (1813-1887), the great preacher who for
40 years swayed an audience reaching far beyond
the confines of his own Plymouth Congregational
Church in Brooklyn, is here the subject of a long
Jj6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"portrait," painted in the vivid style of the modern
psychological biographer. His influential career as
crusader against slavery, and for evolution and
woman suffrage, is interpreted as giving highly emo-
tional expression to the changing standards of
American society during his long lifetime. During
his boyhood the Calvinistic doctrine of predestina-
tion to hell-fire, as preached by his father, Lyman
Beecher, had hardly been shaken; in three decades
it gave way to the easy liberalism of the Gilded
Age — with Beecher playing the part of drum major
in the parade, our author says. The earlier biog-
raphies of Beecher were all laudatory; Hibben's
critical analysis tends toward irony, and finds fitting
illustrations in contemporary cartoons. Sensational
aspects tend to be uppermost, not only in the account
of the cause celebre of 1 875, when Theodore Tilton
sued Beecher for adultery, but throughout the entire
story of the man who represented God as "loving
man in his sins for the sake of helping him out of
them." In the middle years of the 19th century,
one of the great influences in breaking down the
harsh individualism of the Puritan heritage and
humanizing the "new theology" was the Congrega-
tional minister of Hartford, Conn., Horace Bushnell.
"He insisted upon experience in theology, leveled
the dividing wall between nature and the super-
natural, and set Christ in the middle of the Christian
system" (Hopkins in no. 5489). His most recent
biographer, Barbara M. Cross, in Horace Bushnell:
Minister to a Changing America ([Chicago] Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1958. 200 p.), finds that
his sermons and books, and especially Christian
Nurture (1847) "mapped the course by which
orthodoxy was moving toward liberal Protestant-
ism." Another famous voice of the period, though
on the opposite side of the religious platform, was
the "professional agnostic," Robert G. Ingersoll.
In Royal Bob (Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952.
314 p.) Clarence H. Cramer gives a sympathetic
interpretation of the orator who, for many years after
his "plumed knight" speech of 1876, was the premier
lecturer of the Nation on Science versus Religion, as
well as on the Republican Party. The writer gives
more space to Ingersoll's political activities than to
his religious scepticism.
5477. [Carroll] Guilday, Peter K. The life and
times of John Carroll, Archbishop of Balti-
more (1735—1815). New York, Encyclopedia Press,
1922. 2 v. illus. 22-10425 BX4705.C33G8
This monumental biography of the first arch-
bishop of the Roman Catholic Church in the United
States is also considered to be an authoritative ac-
count of the Roman Church of the English-speaking
New World in his time. Episodes given careful
treatment include: the story of the Roman Catholic
part in the Revolution, including Carroll's Cana-
dian mission for the Continental Congress; Carroll's
post-Revolutionary controversy with the apostate
priest Charles Wharton; his fight to preserve the
church from Protestant attack and French political
intrigue; the reconstruction of the church and the
establishment of the American hierarchy (1784-90);
the development of religious orders and of educa-
tion (Georgetown College, founded in 1789). The
late author, professor of church history at the Catho-
lic University of America, wrote solidly and in great
detail, making exhaustive use of archival materials
in Europe and America. He concluded with a
critical essay on the sources, published and unpub-
lished, both for Carroll's life and for the history of
the church. Annabelle McConnell Melville's
scholarly, but more spirited and readable, biography
is confined in its scope to the life, work, and in-
fluence of its subject: John Carroll of Baltimore,
Founder of the American Catholic Hierarchy (New
York, Scribner, 1955. 338 p.).
5478. [Gibbons] Ellis, John Tracy. The life of
James Cardinal Gibbons, Archbishop of
Baltimore, 1834-1921. Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co.,
1952. 2 v. illus. 52-14973 BX4705.G5E4
"An essay on the sources": v. 2, p. 651-669.
The outstanding figure in recent Catholic history
in America was James Gibbons. Born in Baltimore
of Irish immigrant parents, he became archbishop
in 1877, and the second American cardinal in 1886.
A firm believer in democratic institutions, he took
a leading and patriotic part in humanitarian, social,
and public affairs. His liberal and conciliatory
views were influential in Rome and in national
policy alike, and made him a powerful force in the
accommodation of the Catholic Church and its huge
new immigrant community to American life. His
winning personality brought him warm friendships
with great and small, and he served as adviser to
presidents and popes as well as to his flock. This
full and authoritative, if somewhat pedestrian, biog-
raphy is by the professor of church history at the
Catholic University of America, which Gibbons was
instrumental in founding.
5479. [Jones] Hinshaw, David. Ruf us Jones, mas-
ter Quaker. New York, Putnam, 1951. 306
p. illus. 51-9891 BX7795.J55H5
Bibliography: p. 295-298.
Jones (1863-1948), professor of philosophy at
Haverford College, chairman for almost 30 years of
the American Friends' Service Committee, and the
spiritual leader of present-day Quakerism, died in
1948. This biography, by a close friend and asso-
ciate of many years, includes his reminiscences in its
picture of the growth of a modern saint. It opens
RELIGION / 777
with a short appreciation of Dr. Jones, "the inspira-
tion and the leader of the effort that had turned the
century-long gaze of Quakerism from attempted
inward ecclesiastical purity through disciplinary
don'ts to the outward effort of perfection through
spiritual and humanitarian service." A few chap-
ters sketch the history of Quakerism and of the
Jones family of South China, Maine. Then Rufus
Jones is described in the various phases of his inspir-
ing career as teacher, minister, lecturer, author — he
wrote over fifty books and is widely known as an
outstanding modern interpreter of religious mysti-
cism— and as organizer of the great relief service
which exemplifies the Quaker way of life to the
world. The brief bibliography includes the main
sources on Quakerism, but lists only a few of Dr.
Jones' many published writings, for which one may
turn to the compilation of Nixon Orwin Rush: A
Bibliography of the Published Writings of Rufus M.
Jones (Waterville, Me., Colby College Library, 1944.
54 P-)-
5480. [Moody, Dwight L.] Moody, William R.
D. L. Moody. New York, Macmillan, 1930.
556 p. illus. 30-18035 BV3785.M7M62
Bibliography: p. 543-548.
In the latter years of the 19th century, while the
new stirrings of evolutionary science were manifest
in the sermons of H. W. Beecher and the agnostic
oratory of Robert Ingersoll, the dwellers in Amer-
ica's growing cities were thronging in their millions
to hear the fundamental Word of God brought to
them by the lay evangelist, Dwight L. Moody
(1837-1899). He did not confine his exhortations
to this country: with his organist helper, Ira D.
Sankey, he carried out a two-year mission to Eng-
land (1873-75), where he was the instrument of
the greatest religious revival of the century. He
directed his notable business talents and energies
to saving souls through lay enterprises as well as
revival meetings. Starting from his Chicago North
Market Sabbath School (1858), the programs of re-
ligious social service to which his organizational
genius gave form expanded into the national system
of Young Men's Christian Associations, the Sunday
School movement, Northfield Seminary for girls
and Mount Hermon School for boys, the Chicago
Bible Institute, and the Bible Institute Colportage
Association. His vigorous work in missions and
conferences in the colleges led directly to the Student
Volunteer Movement, which stimulated the expan-
sion of American foreign missions. This biography
by his son is informal in arrangement and lavish in
quotation from Moody's letters and speeches. Inter-
esting recent biographies of earlier and later evange-
lists are George Whitefield, Wayfaring Witness, by
Stuart C. Henry (New York, Abingdon Press, 1957.
224 p.), and Billy Sunday Was His Real Name, by
William G. McLoughlin ([Chicago] University of
Chicago Press, 1955. 324 p.). A largely biograph-
ical treatment of the whole course of revivalism in
America is Weisberger's They Gathered At the
River (no. 5403).
5481. [Parker] Commager, Henry Steele. Theo-
dore Parker. [2d ed.] Boston, Beacon Press,
1947. 339 p. illus. A48-9983 MnU
Bibliography: p. [3ii]-33i.
The great New England radical clergyman and
reformer who is brought to life in this interpretative
biography never withdrew, and was never expelled,
from the Unitarian Church in which he had been
ordained in 1837. But most of its pulpits were
closed against him and the unsettling Higher Criti-
cism that he and his transcendentalist friends im-
ported from Germany. His services in Boston were
held in what he called the Twenty-eighth Congrega-
tional Society, where for 13 exciting years he
preached freethinking religion, transcendental phi-
losophy, and the abolition of slavery to audiences
numbering in the thousands. He wrote his long
farewell letter to the society, "Theodore Parker's
Experience as a Minister," as he sailed away to die
of tuberculosis in Italy: it is here called "not only the
best brief account of Parker's public career but also
the most satisfactory history of the Boston of the
forties and fifties of the last century that has ever
been written." The other sources on which Profes-
sor Commager has largely based his portrayal of the
man who was a part of the flowering of New Eng-
land are the writings, letters, and recorded conver-
sations of Parker's contemporaries.
5482. [Rauschenbusch] Sharpe, Dores Robinson.
Walter Rauschenbusch. New York, Mac-
millan, 1942. 463 p. 42-12945 BX6495.R3S48
The great influence of Walter Rauschenbusch
(1861-1918), whose name "stands out as a beacon"
in the history of the social gospel in America, was
principally exercised through his writings. As a
young Baptist minister in New York in the late
eighties and nineties he had worked much with poor
German immigrants; during a year of study abroad
he had become interested in Fabian socialism, the
Salvation Army, and consumers' cooperatives; and
the depression of 1893 confirmed his belief that the
Kingdom of God must be realized on this earth. In
preaching, in social and organizational activities, and
especially in his books, Rauschenbusch drove home
this message, and after his publication in 1907 of
Christianity and the Social Crisis (New York, Mac-
millan. 429 p., he was hailed as prophet and
leader. His later books, Prayers of the Social
Awakening (Boston, Pilgrim Press, 1910. 126 p.),
77§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Christianizing the Social Order (New York, Mac-
millan, 19 12. 493 p.), The Social Principles of
Jesus (New York, Association Press, 1916. 198 p.),
and A Theology for the Social Gospel (New York,
Macmillan, 1917. 279 p.), added to his prestige.
This admiring and affectionate biography, by a
former student and secretary, was written at the
request of the Rauschenbusch family and the
Colgate-Rochester Divinity School, where Profes-
sor Rauschenbusch taught church history from 1902
until his death in 1918. The narrative of his life is
combined with interpretations of his writings, in
chapters with such titles as "The Prophet's Pen,"
"The Social Philosopher," and "The Thunder of
the Prophet."
5483. Wise, Stephen S. Challenging years; the
autobiography of Stephen Wise. New York,
Putnam, 1949. xxiv, 323 p. illus.
49-48677 BM755.W53A3 1949
In this autobiography Rabbi Stephen Wise (1874—
1949) emphasizes the causes and beliefs for which
he batded rather than personal details. The son
and grandson of rabbis, Stephen Wise at the age
of 20 was appointed pastor of a Conservative Jewish
synagogue in New York. In 1900 he was called
to a temple in Pordand, Oregon, where he became
known as a vigorous fighter for child labor laws
and a liberal in politics, social thought, and religion.
He came back to New York in 1906 to found the
Free Synagogue, which he served as rabbi for over
40 years, preaching Reform Judaism and working
for civic, social, and Jewish causes. In 1897 he had
been the moving spirit in founding the Federation
of American Zionists, and throughout his life he
strove ardendy in the cause of the Jewish homeland.
The American Jewish Congress (1917), the Jewish
Institute of Religion (the liberal rabbinical semi-
nary) (1922), and the World Jewish Congress
(1936) were among other organizations he was
instrumental in founding and active in serving.
A powerful speaker, he was among the first of his
faith to preach to Jews and Christians alike, and he
played a prominent role in interfaith movements.
Challenging Years was written in the last year of
his life. The prophet of American Reform Juda-
ism in the 19th century was Rabbi Isaac M. Wise
(1819-1900), unrelated to Stephen. This inspiring
leader, imbued with the ideas of the Enlightenment,
came from Bohemia in a wave of political immi-
gration in 1846. After a few years of preaching
modernization of the ritual in Albany, he setded
in Cincinnati and became the acknowledged head
of the large Jewish community of that city. He
was the founder and president for 25 years of
Hebrew Union College, and the founder of the
Union of American Hebrew Congregations and the
Central Conference of American Rabbis. He was
instrumental in the preparation of the revised
prayer book, M in hag America (the rite in American
style). His life and influence have been recently
summarized in a contribution to the valuable
Library of American biography, edited by Oscar
Handlin: Israel Knox's Rabbi in America; the Story
of Isaac M. Wise (Boston, Little, Brown, 1957.
G. Church and Society
5484. Cronin, John F. Catholic Social principles;
the social teaching of the Catholic Church
applied to American economic life. Milwaukee,
Bruce Pub. Co., 1955. 803 p.
55-1755 HN37.C3C69 1955
A comprehensive and practical textbook by the
assistant director of the Department of Social Action
of the National Catholic Welfare Conference.
Parts I and II, "The Christian Social Order" and
"Social Principles in Economic Life," are universal
in scope, each chapter beginning with pertinent
passages of the social encyclicals and other papal
directives for social action, from the Rerum
Novarum of Pope Leo XIII in 1891 to the messages
of Pius XII in 1949. The interpretation that
follows is focused on American problems. The
subjects covered include social justice; the "unsound
philosophies" of individualism, socialism, and com-
munism; "The Ideal Social Order"; the rights and
duties of capital; the social problems of labor;
property; the state in economic life; and social re-
form. Part III is concerned with "American
Catholic Social Thought" and covers such matters
as the Catholic approach to big business, to the
cooperative movement, to rural life, etc. Annotated
reading lists and a correlation of the encyclicals and
other authorities with the chapters of the book are
given in appendixes. A more elementary text for
high schools by Father Cronin, Catholic Social
Action (Milwaukee, Bruce Pub. Co., 1948. 247 p.),
is on practical social programs in the United States.
5485. Douglass, Harlan Paul. The Protestant
church as a social institution, by H. Paul
RELIGION / 779
Douglass and Edmund de S. Brunner. New York,
Published for the Institute of Social and Religious
Research by Harper, 1935. xv, 368 p. diagrs.
35-2275 BR516.D66
Bibliography: p. 356-362.
The Institute of Social and Religious Research
was organized in 1921 for the investigation by
scientific methods of socioreligious phenonmena,
with Dr. Douglass as its research director. By the
time of its dissolution in October 1934 it had been
responsible for 48 research projects relating to rural
and urban churches, home and foreign missions,
Christian education, the racial aspects of organized
religion, and the cooperation and unity of religious
forces. (Dr. Douglass was closely concerned with
the last theme, and later served as secretary to the
Commission to Study Church Unity of the Federal
Council of the Churches of Christ.) This solid
work is the final report of the institute, quite bal-
anced and comprehensive, and a veritable mine of
socioreligious information, with its findings statis-
tically illustrated in 19 tables and 45 charts. After
a general and historical introduction the main text
(p. 31-234) is devoted to an account of "Institu-
tional Factors and Processes" — church membership,
the church in the community, its organization and
the ministry, activities in education and social wel-
fare, finances, etc. Part 3, "Conditioning Factors,"
surveys environmental influences, cooperation and
integration of the churches, and the intellectual and
religious climate. The last part, "Foreshadowings,"
looks at future prospects and policies, notably re-
garding the church unity movement. Reviewers
have called the work "a religious Middletown."
5486. Douglass, Harlan Paul. Protestant coopera-
tion in American cities. New York, Insti-
tute of Social and Religious Research, 1930. xviii,
514 p. diagrs. 3,l-^9l BX8.D67
Bibliography: p. 496.
5487. Douglass, Harlan Paul. Church unity
movements in the United States. New
York, Institute of Social and Religious Research,
1934. xxxviii, 576 p. 34-21128 BX8.D66
The first tide was one of a series resulting from
a statistical survey of urban churches made by the
institute. In the 1920's there were in the 50 largest
cities of the United States nearly 18,000 churches,
of many varieties, involved singly, cooperatively,
or competitively in many forms of religious and
social activity. To bring the complicated and
ponderous machinery of all these into some kind
of system was the aim of the federation movement.
The author classifies the organizations of federation
in five orders: local churches; locally organized
denominational agencies; interdenominational
agencies; nonecclesiastical extensions and allies;
national or regional administrative machinery of
the denominations. Of the two parts, the first is
a general report on the movement, on the forms and
structures of church federations; membership or
participation short of membership; cooperative
activities; agencies, resources, and methods; and
other aspects of cooperation. The second part is a
shorter technical report on specific processes — the
committee system, the paid staff, religious education,
social service, the work of women's departments,
and financing and publicity. The second tide, pre-
pared in response to the interest shown in the first,
was compiled after questionnaires were sent to more
than 20,000 persons. The answers, summarized in
over 150 tables, provide the basis for a detailed ex-
amination of American opinion regarding church
union. There are three parts: "Objective Trends
and Popular Reactions," "Ecclesiastical Thinking
and Proposals," and "Prospects of Church Union,"
and methodological appendixes. The chief federal
body resulting from the American movement of
interchurch organization, The National Council
of the Churches of Christ in the United States of
America (1950), is itself a merger of 12 inter-
denominational agencies, the largest of which was
the Federal Council of the Churches of Christ in
America. It includes also organizations for foreign
and home missions, missionary education, women's
groups, religious education, the Church World Serv-
ice for relief, etc. A description will be found in
Mayer's Religious Bodies (no. 5397). A lucid ac-
count of the Federal Council was written by John
A. Hutchison: We Are Not Divided; a Critical and
Historical Study of the Federal Council of the
Churches of Christ in America (New York, Round
Table Press, 1941. 336 p.).
5488. Herberg, Will. Protestant, Catholic, Jew;
an essay in American religious sociology.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1955. 320 p.
55-7661 BR525.H46
"List of chief works cited": p. [2991-313.
A sociological study of the religious situation in
mid-20th-century America. The author, who has
lectured in Protestant, Jewish, and Catholic institu-
tions alike, here interprets the paradox which he
finds reflected in every aspect of contemporary re-
ligious life: "pervasive secularism and mounting
religiosity." His first two chapters deal with the
"triple melting-pot" of the land of immigrants, in
which, he says, ethnic separateness has almost dis-
appeared and the only differentiating element be-
tween descendants of the great immigrant groups
is religion. He next discusses the contemporary up-
swing in religion in American society, explaining
lucidly the sociological factors of the shift in Amer-
780 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ican character-structure from "inner-direction" to
"other-direction" (David Riesman's terms from no.
4555), and of the need for security in the age of
crisis and spiritual chaos. Next comes a chapter on
the place of religion in the American Way of Life,
following which the three religious communities of
Protestantism, Catholicism, and Judaism are first
examined as to general history, philosophy, and pres-
ent trends, and then compared and contrasted.
Their fundamental unity is disturbed by many and
serious "religio-communal tensions," but "the inter-
faith idea" is offered as a reasonable and practicable
resolution. The last chapter conveys the author's
criticism of the secularism of American religion,
which he sums up as "so naively, so innocently
man-centered."
5489. Hopkins, Charles Howard. The rise of the
social gospel in American Protestantism,
1865-1915. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1940. 352 p. (Yale studies in religious education,
14) 41-1101 HN39.U6H6 1940a
A general account of the movement in socioreli-
gious thought that began with the general stirrings
of humanitarian reform in the middle of the 19th
century and gained momentum until the First
World War reshaped the doctrines of liberal groups
in all Protestant sects. "America's most unique
contribution to the great ongoing stream of Chris-
tianity," Dr. Hopkins calls the social gospel, "the
result of the impact of the industrial revolution and
its concomitants upon American Protestantism." In
distinction to the old orthodoxy with its insistence
upon the salvation or damnation of the individual
soul, the social gospel applied the teachings of Christ
and the message of salvation to society as a whole,
its economic life and social institutions, and offered
an essentially collectivist ethic for a capitalistic age.
Its origins, exponents, expressions, and institu-
tions— culminating in the Federal Council of the
Churches of Christ in America — were numerous,
and Dr. Hopkins has woven together many strands
into a well-organized and interesting presentation.
His footnotes cite a huge literature, and he speaks
of mere than fifteen hundred items utilized in his
research. The Urban Impact on American Protes-
tantism, 1865-1900, by Aaron I. Abell (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1943. 275 p. Harvard
historical studies, v. 54), describes one phase of
social Christianity, the effects of the post-Civil War
urbanization on American Protestantism. This im-
pact was a double-edged affair: the urban workers
looked to religion to win them a better economic
order, and the cities called on the churches for social
service as well as spiritual aid. The writer traces
the channels of organized aid from the beginnings
of the Young Men's Christian Associations in the
1850's, and notices a variety of missions, organiza-
tions, and associations: the Salvation Army, the
"institutional church" movement, various brother-
hoods and sisterhoods, and many other forms of
social service.
5490. Hopkins, Charles Howard. History of the
Y.M.C.A. in North America. New York,
Association Press, 1951. 818 p. illus.
51-11674 BV1030.H6
The Young Men's Christian Association was born
in London on June 6, 1844, when 12 young dry-
goods assistants met under the leadership of George
Williams, a Congregationalist Sunday school worker
who had been inspired by the revivals of the Amer-
ican evangelist Charles G. Finney. In 1851 the as-
sociation was introduced into North America, with
beginnings simultaneous in Boston and Montreal;
within 3 years it had spread to most large cities and
many smaller ones and its growth has been con-
tinuous. For the Y.M.C.A.'s centenary Dr. Hopkins
was commissioned by the Committee on Historical
Resources to prepare this definitive history, based
on the important collection of records in the Bowne
Historical Library maintained by the national coun-
cil in New York. The exceedingly detailed narra-
tive is divided into chronological sections: 1851-
1865, 1865-1895, 1895-1940, and 1940-1951. In the
1890's, under the impulse of the general missionary
expansion, the Y.M.C.A. movement spread abroad.
Much attention is given in the later chapters to its
world functions.
5491. Institute for Religious and Social Studies,
Jewish Theological Seminary of America.
American education and religion: the problem of
religion in the schools; a series of addresses, edited
by Frederick] Ernest Johnson. New York, Insti-
tute for Religious and Social Studies; distributed by
Harper, 1952. 211 p. (Religion and civilization
series) 52-12044 LC111.I58
The problem discussed in these 12 thoughtful
essays, based on lectures delivered at the institute in
1950-51, is stated by the editor in the introductory
paper: "How can public education, in accord with
its function of putting each generation in possession
of its full cultural heritage, do justice to the religious
phase of that heritage without doing violence to
religious liberty as constitutionally safeguarded?"
The authors express the viewpoints of agnostic,
Jewish, Catholic, and liberal Protestant educators,
university and college presidents, spokesmen for
privately supported colleges and schools of educa-
tion, and for elementary and secondary public
schools. In summarizing, Dr. Johnson found a
RELIGION / 781
consensus that "the educative process has a unitary
quality which makes a dualism of the secular and
the religious unrealistic," particularly in higher edu-
cation; and also that the Supreme Court decision of
1948 outlawing the released-time plan for religious
education (the McCollum case) was "remote from
the realities of the educational system." He was
able to note that since the delivery of the lectures the
Supreme Court had reversed itself on the released-
time plan (the Zorach case, 1952), and that two
influential educational bodies had recommended
substantive religious instruction in the schools. The
most vigorous defense of purely secular education in
the volume was "An 'Experimentalist' Position," by
a former secretary of the Ethical Culture Schools,
Dr. Vivian T. Thayer. His ideas were more fully
expressed in the same year in one of the Beacon
studies in freedom and power: The Attac\ upon the
American Secular School (Boston, Beacon Press,
1951. 257 p.). Another notable study on this topic
of mid-20th century debate is The American Tradi-
tion in Religion and Education, by R. Freeman
Butts, entered in the chapter on Education (no.
5103).
5492. May, Henry Farnham. Protestant churches
and industrial America. New York, Har-
per, 1949. 297 p. 49-8159 HN39.U6M38
Bibliography: p. 267-290.
A study of the influence of American religion on
the developing social thought of the industrial age
(1828-95). The author writes as a historian rather
than a theologian in his examination of movements,
sermons, and the writings of churchmen and other
leaders of opinion. His focus is on attitudes toward
labor in the struggle of liberal thought against the
laissez-faire theory upheld by traditional Protestant
orthodoxy. In his first period (1828-61) he de-
scribes "The Conservative Mold" and its support of
the social status quo against the anticlerical radi-
calism of the Jacksonian era. "The Summit of
Complacency" was reached in the years 1861-76,
when the great industrialists piled up their millions
and poured out bounty for religious and charitable
work, while conservative clerics justified "the Di-
vinely-regulated and unchangeable social order."
The last period (1877-95) is treated in two parts,
'"Sources of Change" — the economic facts of strikes,
depressions, unemployment, and bankruptcies, ac-
companied by mounting waves of liberal and
humanitarian, socialist and radical protest — and
"Social Christianity." Dr. May attributes a large
measure of the success of American progressivism
to the moral aid of the social Christian movement.
5493. Miller, Robert Moats. American Protes-
tantism and social issues, 1919-1939. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1958,
385 p. 58-1243 HN39.U6M59
Bibliography: p. 351-370.
The social attitudes of American Protestantism
during the between-war years of prosperity and de-
pression are here surveyed with respect to the basic
controversial problems of society — "civil liberties,
labor, race relations, war, and the contending merits
of capitalism, socialism, and communism." The
author's concern is with the eight largest Protestant
groups and the Federal Council of the Churches of
Christ; on some matters he reviews systematically
the position taken by each group. After a long
general sketch of the churches in the social order
a section is devoted to each of the large issues. In
the 1920's they were "Corpulent and Contented,"
although a "Dissenting Report" called for replacing
the profit motive with the service motive. "A Foot-
note to the 1928 Election" suggests that a vote
against Al Smith was not necessarily an effect of
bigotry, but might proceed from a sincere support
of the 1 8th Amendment. Three chapters record the
churches' move to the left during the depression,
while a fourth notes the large conservative element
that did not move. The writer has attempted to
lighten his serious matter with frequent touches of
humor and irony, especially through pointed quota-
tion. Large amounts of primary and secondary
source materials are listed in the extensive bibliog-
raphy.
5494. Rian, Edwin H. Christianity and American
education. San Antonio, Naylor Co., 1949.
272 p. 49-9753 LC427.R5
Bibliography: p. 241-254.
An expansion of a series of lectures delivered at
the Princeton Institute of Theology by a Presby-
terian college president. In 1936 Dr. Rian was one
of the organizers of the Orthodox Presbyterian
Church, a body formed in protest against modern-
istic tendencies in the Presbyterian Church, which,
however, he subsequendy rejoined. His conserva-
tive viewpoint is expressed here only in the few
pages in which he offers conclusions, and the bulk
of the text is factual. He devotes his first and
longest section to an account of American public
schools, beginning with their history, and then dis-
cussing present-day philosophies of education, text-
books, and what he considers the disrupting and
disintegrating effects of naturalistic education.
John Dewey is his bugbear. A second section
presents Roman Catholic education, quite objec-
tively up to the last three pages, in which the writer
explains his reasons for considering the system
"erroneous and inadequate." These two parts are
offered as perspective for the last, Dr. Rian's real
point of concern: "Protestant Schools." Here he
782 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
is outspoken in his criticism. He finds Protestant
education in tragic plight, "weak, hesitant, and
largely ineffective as an answer to naturalism and
as an exposition of Christianity."
5495. Silcox, Clarice Edwin, and Galen M. Fisher.
Catholics, Jews and Protestants; a study of
relationships in the United States and Canada.
New York, Published for the Institute of Social
and Religious Research by Harper, 1934. xvi,
369 p. 35-1 151 BL2520.S5
A report based on a series of case studies in 20
large cities of the United States and Canada, under-
taken by the institute at the request of the National
Conference of Jews and Christians. The purpose
was to elucidate problems of interfaith relations
through a survey of actual contacts and relation-
ships between Catholics, Jews, and Protestants in
particular communities, in order to determine the
forces dividing them or bringing them together.
The material is presented in leisurely, somewhat
discursive, but eminendy readable style. The
writers begin with a rapid review of the historical
backgrounds of the three communions and their
tensions and conflicts in America. The divisive
aspects of discrimination and social distance are
discussed in respect to business, employment, real
estate, social and political life, and immigration.
Next, relations in social work and education, inter-
marriage, and conversion and proselytization are
examined for both isolating and cohesive elements.
Last, the field of cooperation is oudined in its
philosophies and in measures of national or local
scope. A short epilogue points out the chief philo-
sophical differences in the three faiths which cause
organized religion to make for divisiveness rather
than integration. Although of great sociological
interest, the work has been criticized as based on
partial impressions and inadequate statistics.
5496. Spann, John R. ed. The church and social
responsibility. Nashville, Abingdon-Cokes-
bury Press, 1953. 272 p. 53-8136 HN31.S75
A set of essays interpreting the convictions of
American Protestantism about the social order, the
general viewpoint being that the Christian church
bears responsibility for social conditions and must
provide redemptive measures for society. The 15
writers are specialists, most of them professors in
university schools of religion or seminaries. "Bio-
graphical Notes" on them are supplied (p. 259-264).
Their papers, all in plain language addressed to lay-
men, are grouped in four parts: "The Social Ministry
of the Church," "Basic Human Rights and the
Community," "The Church and the Economic
Order," and "The Church and the Political Order."
The center of attention is American society, al-
though one essay, "New Testament Sources of the
Social Ministry of the Church," by Donald T. Row-
lingson, is straight theology, and two or three
others — e.g., "World Economic Problems," by Eddy
Asirvatham, and "The Church and World Political
Order," by Walter M. Van Kirk, have no local limi-
tations. Another symposium of the same year,
Christian Faith and Social Action, edited by John A.
Hutchison (New York, Scribner, 1953. 246 p.), is
in the nature of a Festschrift to Reinhold Niebuhr,
whose concluding essay gives its title to the volume.
The 13 contributors are all members of the Frontier
Fellowship, a group founded under Niebuhr's in-
spiration as the Fellowship of Socialist Christians
(1930; name changed in 1947). The editor ex-
plains in the first paper, "Two Decades of Social
Christianity," that the aim of the fellowship is to
understand and interpret Christian faith in ways
relevant to contemporary society and its problems;
their "thinking is inescapably oriented" to Niebuhr,
their teacher and associate. Like him they are
deeply concerned with the appraisal of Marxist
thought and with criticism of the social gospel as
"theologically shallow" and "socially unrealistic."
They write for theologically trained readers. W. E.
Garrison, literary editor of the Christian Century,
summarizes the position of the fellowship as "mov-
ing to the right theologically and to the left socially."
5497. Wisbey, Herbert A. Soldiers without
swords; a history of the Salvation Army in
the United States. New York, Macmillan, 1955.
242 p. illus. 55—13783 BX9716.W5
"Sources": p. 229-234.
"This book was written to provide a concise, ac-
curate, objective history of the Salvation Army in
the United States that would be of use both to
Salvationists and to students of American social
and religious history." Its occasion was the 75th
anniversary of the Salvation Army in the United
States, which can be precisely reckoned from the
"invasion" of New York City on March 10, 1880,
when Commissioner G. S. Railton and seven Eng-
lish lasses, having made a long and stormy voyage
from London, held their first official service on the
dock. The parent British body had been founded
by William and Catherine Booth in 1865 (the
name was not used until 1878); and like it the
American army aimed its ministry at the swarming
urban poor, the "unreached and unchurched" who
felt out of place in middle-class churches, and whose
sufferings were regarded as being largely the
penalty of their own idleness and vice by too many
Protestants. The army immediately fixed public
attention by its uniforms, martial music, and gen-
erally spectacular methods, but in spite of the "mud,
bricks, stones, tomatoes, rotten eggs, dead cats and
RELIGION / 783
rats, and buckets of water" with which its early
meetings were often pelted, it gained willing work-
ers from American young people, and converts of
varying degrees of permanence among the dwellers
in the slums where it evangelized. The army has
never acquired the least snobbery, and the colorful
evangelism of the early days has not been aban-
doned, but it has been supplemented by a fine variety
of social services conducted along approved lines.
The least interesting parts of the book are concerned
with the various jurisdictional disputes arising out
of the effort to keep the American along with the
other national groups under unitary leadership; and
it is quite weak in statistics.
H. The Negro's Church
5498. Fauset, Arthur Huff. Black gods of the
metropolis; Negro religious cults of the
urban North. Philadelphia, University of Penn-
sylvania Press, 1944. 126 p. illus. (Publications of
the Philadelphia Anthropological Society, v. 3)
44-3761 BR563.N4F3 1944a
The anthropologist who wrote this University of
Pennsylvania dissertation is himself partly of the
Negro race, and is thus equipped by background,
entree, and point of view for the interesting anthro-
pological, psychological, and sociological research
involved. Beginning with a general statement on
Negro cults, he describes in systematic detail five
groups currently functioning in Philadelphia: the
Mt. Sinai Holy Church of America, Inc., the United
House of Prayer of All People ("Daddy Grace" is
not, like Father Divine, God, but has taken over
while God is on vacation), the Church of God
(Black Jews), the Moorish Science Temple of
America, and the Father Divine Peace Mission
Movement. For each group he starts with a short
"testimony," and describes its origin, organization,
membership, finance (in the case of Father Divine
information was not forthcoming), beliefs, ritual,
and other practices. The material and treatment
are of feature-story quality. Dr. Fauset then com-
pares these cults with evangelical Christian denom-
inations, and seeks to ascertain why they attract fol-
lowers, and the degree to which they promote eco-
nomic, social, and cultural advance. Finally he
calls into question the generally accepted idea of the
peculiar "religiosity" of the American Negro. His
conclusion is that such cults result from "the com-
paratively meager participation of Negroes in other
institutional forms of American culture" — i.e. from
race discrimination.
5499. Loescher, Frank S. The Protestant church
and the Negro, a pattern of segregation.
New York, Association Press, 1948. 159 p.
48-7076 BR563.N4L6
A foreword by Bishop Scarlett of the Episcopal
diocese of Missouri sets the tone for this clear, hard-
hitting monograph: "This book will be unpleasant
reading for those who love the Church." The au-
thor, who wrote the work as a doctoral thesis in
sociology, is a member of the Society of Friends and
a specialist in race relations. The facts he assembles
demonstrate that segregation is the normal practice
of the Protestant churches. First he examines the
general problem and "What the Churches say";
this is illustrated in appendix I with abstracts of
pronouncements by church conventions and inter-
church groups, notably the Federal Council of the
Churches of Christ, which show an advance in
thinking on race relations between 1908 and 1947.
Next comes "What the Churches Do," nationally,
regionally, and locally, and in denominational
schools and colleges; this is illustrated in the statis-
tical appendixes II and III. Of the eight million
Protestant Negroes, approximately seven and a half
million are in separate "Negro" denominations, and
the other half million in separate Negro churches
in the "white" denominations. Only a tiny minor-
ity of local churches accept Negro members, and
most of those are in communities where the Negro
population is too small to maintain its own church.
The last chapter is on policies and programs aiming
at racial integration.
5500. Mays, Benjamin Elijah, and Joseph William
Nicholson. The Negro's church. New
York, Institute of Social and Religious Research,
T933- 321 P- 33-6349 BR563.N4M3
The first comprehensive survey, not as yet super-
seded, of the Negro church in the United States.
Made by the Institute of Social and Religious Re-
search at the request of Negro leaders, it is based
on a firsthand study of 609 urban and 185 rural
churches selected as a representative sample. A
sentence in the Preface gains added force a quar-
ter-century later: "In view of the recent extensive
migrations of Negroes from country to city and
from South to North, together with the extension
of education and sophistication among the Negro
populadon as a whole, it may be considered for-
784 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tunate that this study was made while the older pat-
terns of religious life were still to be found." The
analysis, reinforced by statistics, covers the place of
organized religion in Negro life, its historical de-
velopment, the ministry, church membership, build-
ings and programs, worship, fellowship and com-
munity activities, and finances, first for urban
churches, and then for rural ones. In both areas
consideration is given to whether the Negro is
"overchurched." The last chapter, "The Genius
of the Negro Church," suggests that in spite of the
discouraging condition of Negro church life in a
number of respects, which are "in part the result
of the failure of American Christianity in race re-
lations," "the Negro Church has potentialities to
become possibly the greatest spiritual force in the
United States." Another institute study also ex-
amines the Negro's share in organized religion:
Divine White Right, by Trevor Bovven (New York,
Harper, 1934. 310 p.). The subtitle indicates its
scope: "A Study of Race Segregation and Inter-
racial Cooperation in Religious Organizations and
Institutions in the United States." A separate sec-
tion by Ira De A. Reid, "The Church and Educa-
tion for Negroes," deals principally with the Negro
mission schools and colleges in the South.
5501. Richardson, Harry V. Dark glory, a pic-
ture of the church among Negroes in the
rural South. New York, Published for Home Mis-
sions Council of North America and Phelps-Stokes
Fund by Friendship Press, 1947. xiv, 209 p.
47-24753 BR563.N4R5
"A selected reading list": p. 194-197.
"The church is still the predominant institution
in the rural South. It is the Negro's chief agency
of social expression and it enjoys greater freedom
than any other community institution. The pastor
as leader of the most important institution com-
mands a unique authority, in spite of his limita-
tions, that no other community leader enjoys." This
thesis is maintained through its various aspects by
the writer, an influential Southern religious leader
formerly at Tuskegee Institute. His first seven
chapters cover the historical background, the gen-
eral setting and present conditions in four selected
counties of Alabama, South Carolina, Arkansas, and
Virginia, church buildings, church membership
(Negroes are predominandy Baptist and Metho-
dist), and programs for adults and young people.
The next five chapters are concentrated on the min-
isters, their training, their knowledge of rural af-
fairs, and their attitudes and influence in general
and regarding social problems, race relations, etc.
Finally plans for their better training are outlined.
In this connection the Program for a Better Trained
Rural Ministry sponsored by the Phelps-Stokes
Fund, with which the writer was at the time asso-
ciated, is emphasized.
5502. Woodson, Carter G. The history of the
Negro church. 2d ed. Washington, As-
sociated Publishers, 1945. 322 p. illus.
46-279 BR563.N4W6 1945
In these days when churchgoers are kept con-
stantly aware of the missionary effort to carry the
Gospel to the Africans at home, it is hard to realize
that for the first century or more of slavery in the
English Colonies of America the conversion of
Negroes to Christianity was frowned upon. Al-
though royal decrees and special colonial laws had
been passed to make it lawful for Christians to be
held as slaves, the masters on the plantations gen-
erally feared the mental improvement which reli-
gious teaching might bring their laborers. The
Catholic priests and missionaries in Maryland were
the first to preach to all regardless of color. The
few attempts at conversion of the Negroes made by
clergymen of the Anglican Church and by Quakers
in the Southern and Middle Colonies during the
1 8th century are described individually by Dr.
Woodson in the first chapter of this detailed history.
It was not until the Baptist and Methodist evangel-
ical campaigns at the turn of the 19th century that
the slaves were Christianized in substantial num-
bers; then Negro preachers arose, and separate
Negro churches were formed in cities and on the
plantations. In the 1830's, after the slave revolt led
by the preacher Nat Turner in Virginia, the fright-
ened slaveowners put restrictions on Negro preach-
ing in the South, and the great development of
independent Negro churches did not come until
after Emancipation. This book, by a prominent
Negro historian (1875-1950), professor at Howard
University, traces the history of the Negro church
in terms of movements and men, and has been a
standard authority since its first publication in 1921.
XXIV
Folklore, Folk Music, Folk Art
A. Legends and Tales: General 55°3~55I9
B. Legends and Tales: Local 5520-5548
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General 5549-5564
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local 5565-5584
E. Games and Dances 5585-5592
F. Fol\ Art and Crafts 5593-5604
ONE OF THE major encyclopedias defines the scope of folklore as "the material as
well as the intellectual culture of the peasantry." This raises a primary consideration in
approaching American folklore: there is and has been no American peasantry, properly
so-called. Cultivators of the American soil have avoided both the name and the conditions
which it implies; and American public policy has equally aimed, by and large, to prevent
such conditions from arising, or at least from developing into permanent disabilities or
status. Of all such policies, the most powerful
antidote to the status of peasantry and its con-
comitant folk culture is that of universal and free
public education, available to children of every
race and condition in every area, through secondary
school or beyond. This ideal, first grasped by
Thomas Jefferson and gradually made a reality
during the past century, makes for a maximum of
intercommunication between every part of Ameri-
can society, and so wars upon that isolation which
is recognized to be the natural soil of a folk culture.
It seeks to make a child's opportunities to some
degree independent of the condition of his parents,
so that he need not inherit their status. In large
degree, therefore, the American way of life is in-
compatible with a folk culture. The past 60 years,
however, have witnessed an intense cultivation of
American folklore and folk music, and the past 30
of folk art, by the learned and the sophisticated,
which they have succeeded in communicating, if
not to the largest public, at least to large groups of
amateurs, urban and suburban.
This seeming paradox is easily resolved. The
Jeffersonian ideal, if early proclaimed, was belatedly
and gradually embodied, and is not yet perfected.
Until the 19th century was well advanced, large
sections of the American people remained in rela-
tive isolation, with little or no schooling, and in
431240—60 51
greater or lesser degree dependent upon traditional
lore, and what they could add to it, for the enrich-
ment of their lives. The frontier, which did not
disappear until about 1890, pushed on ahead of
schools and printing presses, and out of its occupa-
tional and other interests usually amplified the tra-
ditions brought with it in various characteristic and
colorful ways. Areas or classes which did not share
in the main tide of American progress, such as the
mountainous and other parts of the rural South, and
the Negro nearly everywhere, conserved their old
lore and modified it very gradually. Furthermore,
about 1820 began a real influx of genuine peasantry
from the nations and ethnic groups of Europe, each
with a different body of traditional notions. These
were of course subjected to an Americanization that
was sometimes a deliberate policy but far more often
an undirected social process, which had a limited
effect upon the immigrant generation, but a much
more thorough one upon their children and grand-
children. Traces of tradition, however, have usually
been left.
The American Folklore Society, founded in 1888,
defined as its first aim "the collection of the fast-
vanishing remains of Folk-Lore in America." Their
alarm was undue, since successful collecting goes
on seven decades later, but they had indelibly ex-
785
786 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pressed their sense that American folklore was a
fringe phenomenon, a perishable residue, and a
quite different matter from European folklore. The
elaborate and sometimes grotesque theoretical
structures that have been reared on the basis of
Old-World folklore could never have been educed
from the American variety. Yet another difference
has been concisely put by Ruth Benedict: in native
American folklore "self-expression is at a maximum
and historical analogues are almost non-existent."
One consequence has been that in recent years
American academic folklorists have claimed for their
subject matters that would have been dubiously re-
garded by the brothers Grimm or E. B. Tylor, and
some of their recent compilations have been miscel-
lanies that seem to escape any clear and distinct
definition.
However, the latter-day tendency of Americans
to seek refuge from the standardized present in a
more colorful past has made all the esthetic kinds of
folk culture marketable commodities. The titles
which follow fill the distance between two extremes:
rigorous academic collections in which the ipshsima
verba of elderly rustics are reverendy recorded, col-
lated, and annotated; and frankly popular works
in which traditional materials are cheerfully re-
worked for their value as healthy entertainment.
Both kinds must be included if the American folk-
lore interest of today is to be faithfully mirrored
here. The arrangement of the entries that follow is
self-explanatory. One warning needs to be given:
the boundaries between the folk arts and their so-
phisticated counterparts remain indistinct. There
is no clear demarcation between the first two sec-
tions here and Chapter I on Literature, where will
be found such a folk classic as the Brer Rabbit
corpus of Joel Chandler Harris; nor between folk
music and the sections on popular music in the next
chapter; nor between folk art and the section on
Decorative Arts in Chapter XXVI. Folk art is a
more recent interest than the other contents of this
chapter, going back little more than three decades;
but intensive cultivation has produced collections
and a literature no less interesting than exist for the
older pursuits.
A. Legends and Tales: General
5503. Allen, Jules Verne. Cowboy lore; illus-
trated by Ralph J. Pereida. [7th ed.] San
Antonio, Tex., Nay lor, 1950. xvi, 164 p.
50-2725 F596.A38 1950
M1629.A46 1950
"The songs were taken down and set to music
by Mrs. G. Embry Eitt."
Billed as "The Original Singing Cowboy," the
late Jules Verne Allen was long a favorite enter-
tainer in rodeos and open-air exhibitions, and later
won a wider popularity through his recordings and
radio broadcasts. Nearly forty of Allen's favorite
songs, provided with piano accompaniments, make
up a large portion of this book, but other aspects
of cowboy life and lore are also presented. Part 1
describes the real life and work of cowhands, as
opposed to the Hollywood version, and appends
to much miscellaneous information a few tall stories.
Other parts describe the history and methods of
catde brands and earmarks, and define English and
Spanish terms from the cowboy's occupational lingo.
The frontispiece illustrates the equipment of the
cowpoke and his pony, identified in English and
Spanish, from the brand, or fierro, to the stirrup, or
estrivo. The book was originally published in 1933.
5504. Beckwith, Martha Warren. Folklore in
America, its scope and method. Pough-
keepsie, N. Y., Vassar College, The Folklore Foun-
dation, 1931. 76 p. (Publications of the Folklore
Foundation, no. 11) 32-4724 GR105.B4
GR15.V3, no. 11
"Selected references": p. 67-76.
The term "folklore" was introduced by the
British scholar William Thorns, in 1846, to supplant
the vaguer names "popular literature" and "antiqui-
ties." The scope and limitations of the discipline
have been a matter of some debate since Thorns'
day, and Miss Beckwith's careful definition is but
one of several possible ones. In her first chapter
Miss Beckwith differentiates between "folk knowl-
edge" in general and folklore by linking the latter
more closely with its German counterpart, Vol\s-
\unde or folk art. It is only the artistic part of the
folk tradition which the present definition of folk-
lore includes. Thus the folklorist is not concerned
indiscriminately with all popular tradition, but only
with that which transcends utility in being "touched
by poetic thought," imagination, and fantasy. The
"art" in folklore differs from sophisticated artistic
expression in that, though originally the product of
an individual's creative imagination, the folk art
work takes on the character of a group creation,
through generations of repetition and variation.
The folk group which is the true custodian of folk-
lore is defined as a group of limited sophistication
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 787
and restricted contact outside the group itself. The
isolation of die folk group can be geographical,
linguistic, racial or national, or occupational. The
definition is concluded with a brief discussion of the
extent to which folklore is allied with literature,
on the one hand, and cultural anthropology, on the
other. The remaining chapters trace the develop-
ment of the scientific study of folklore, first in
Europe, with special attention to Germany, Scan-
dinavia, and Great Britain; and finally in the United
States. The author points out early signs of literary
interest in popular lore and literature, but finds
the first scientific approach only in the 19th century,
with the work of the brothers Grimm. For Amer-
ica's part, special emphasis is placed on the New
World vestiges of the British ballad, first given
prominence in the great contributions of Francis
James Child, author of The English and Scottish
Popular Ballads (no. 5550 note).
5505. Blair, Walter. Mike Fink, king of Mis-
sissippi keelboatmen. By Walter Blair and
Franklin J. Meine. New York, Holt, 1933. xiv,
283 p. illus. 33-5924 F353.B62
Bibliography: p. 269-283.
The introduction discusses the processes whereby
the American folk hero has developed from his-
torical personage to romantic demigod recreated by
the popular imagination. Kit Carson, Wild Bill
Hickok, and Daniel Boone are a few of those in-
stanced as real people whose real exploits have
been touched by the creative muse of the folk,
transcending history and outdistancing fact. One
of the most colorful of the frontier heroes, Mike
Fink, started looking for new frontiers from the
river village of Pittsburgh, where he had been born
about 1770. A crackshot Indian fighter whose prac-
tical jokes included shooting off an Indian's scalp-
lock, a fighting keelboatman on the Ohio and
Mississippi whose immortal boast was "I can out-
jump, out-run, and out-fight any man on the
Massassip'," and at the end a trapper on the Mis-
souri, Mike Fink led a legendary life of courage
and cruelty, cunning and violence. Tracing the
oral and early printed accounts of Mike's adven-
tures, the epilogue recounts the birth and growth
of the legend. The same authors have recently
edited a further work which examines the subject
from a more scholarly point of view: Half Horse,
Half Alligator; the Growth of the Mi\e Fin\
Legend ([Chicago] University of Chicago Press,
1956. 288 p.).
5506. Blair, Walter. Tall tale America, a legend-
ary history of our humorous heroes. Illus-
trated by Glen Rounds. New York, Coward-
McCann, 1944. 262 p. 44-8461 PS451.B55
"Proof (a bibliographical note)": p. 257-262.
With tongue firmly set in cheek, Walter Blair
sets out to recount America's history in terms of the
legendary heroes who have been important figures
in popular tradition. Fact and folklore are mingled
freely and seasoned with witty improvements by
the author, who "fixed up fact after fact to make
it truer than it ever was before." Exploits of Mike
Fink, Davy Crockett, Johnny Appleseed, Paul Bun-
yan, Pecos Bill, and John Henry are humorously
related, together with those of earlier heroes around
whom legends have long clustered, beginning with
Lief the Lucky, Columbus, and Ponce de Leon.
Asserting that "We've Still Got Heroes," the last
chapter reminds us of our recent tall tales about
"shipyards, gremlins, and marines" and "the be-
wildering Pentagon building." There are a num-
ber of other books of American folk tales designed
for popular reading, all of which cannot be men-
tioned here. Two recent ones which present some
favorite tales in an attractive format are Burl Ives'
Tales of America (Cleveland, World Pub. Co.,
1954. 305 p.) and Maria Leach's The Rainbow
Boo\ of American Folf{ Tales and Legends (Cleve-
land, World Pub. Co., 1958. 318 p.).
5507. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Backwoods to bor-
der. Mody C. Boatright [and] Donald Day,
editors. Austin, Texas Folklore Society, 1943. xv,
235 p. illus. (Publications of the Texas Folklore
Society, no. 18) 43-18054 GR1.T4, no. 18
The 1 8th yearbook of the Texas Folklore Society
marked the retirement of J. Frank Dobie as editor,
although he remained an active contributor and
supporter. The articles range over various stand-
ard aspects of folklore in the Southwest, including
tales of ghosts, animals, heroes, and heroines, and
legends, anecdotes, jargon, and rope-jumping
rhymes. More unusual is a description of the cus-
tom of grave decoration among the Negroes, Mexi-
cans, and Indians of the Southwest, and an account
of the cowhands' bulldogging and branding tech-
niques at a branding roundup. "The Arkansas
Traveler," that widely popular combination of hu-
morous dialog and fiddle-playing, is the subject of
an especially penetrating study by Catherine Mar-
shall Vineyard, who compares versions of the skit
and while tracing its history and origin finds some
distant cousins.
5508. Boatright, Mody C. Folk laughter on the
American frontier. New York, Macmillan,
1949. 182 p. 49-49204 PN6161.B663
The Easterner's idea of frontier life, as being full
of crudity, violence, and sloth, seems to have been
the starting place for the grandiose exaggerations
which characterize much of the frontier's own hu-
788 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
mor. The tall tales and anecdotes which Professor
Boatright has assembled in these pages abound in
rough-and-tumble fights, ridiculous in the degree
of their brutality, and pioneer hardships, impossibly
extreme. The subjects of the 13 chapters include
"Backwoods Belles," one of whom killed a maraud-
ing wolf with her wooden leg, and another who
could "eat more wildcat steaks raw than any other
living critter in creation." One of the rugged fron-
tiersmen encountered in "Manners and Men" is
tobacco-chewing Davy Crockett, who "was huge-
ously ashamed to spit on that splendiferous carpit,"
not realizing the function of an elaborately painted
cuspidor. In his final chapter Professor Boatright
attempts to discover the basis of frontier humor and
concludes by taking issue with such writers as Lewis
Mumford and Van Wyck Brooks, who thought that
the pioneers used humor as "a grim release of frus-
trated hopes." Buoyancy, rather than despair, is in
Professor Boatright's view the source of American
frontier humor.
5509. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Folk travelers:
ballads, tales, and talk. Edited by Mody C.
Boatright, Wilson M. Hudson [and] Allen Max-
well. Austin, Texas Folklore Society; [distributed
by] Southern Methodist University Press, Dallas,
1953. 261 p. illus. (Publications of the Texas
Folklore Society, no. 25)
53-12578 GR1.T4, no. 25
The migrant nature of folklore is the key to the
title of this installment in the Texas Folklore So-
ciety's series, and the subject of J. Frank Dobie's
lead article, "The Traveling Anecdote." Many
tales and tale-motifs have traveled widely, and some,
such as the famous story of the Tar Baby, recorded
in Uncle Remus, have been around the world many
times over thousands of years. For the most part,
the volume stays close to the Southwest, with dis-
cussions of Spanish cattle brands and tall tales, and
of magic and weather lore from the Texas-Mexican
border country.
5510. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. Sidewalks of
America; folklore, legends, sagas, traditions,
customs, songs, stories, and sayings of city folk.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1954. xxii, 605 p. illus.
54-9485 GR105.B57
In stating his case for collecting urban lore, the
editor points out that "wherever you find people
you find folklore — that is, a body of traditions,
collective symbols and myths, folkways and folk-
say, rooted in a place and in ways of living and
looking at life." The folk groups reflected in this
miscellany are urban groups and ethnic and re-
ligious groups within each city. The 16 chapters
include American city tales and anecdotes dating
from early in the last century to the recent rise of
suburbia, but make no attempt to present them in
chronological order. Not overlooking city folk
music, Dr. Botkin has included ballads such as
"The Milwaukee Fire," urban industrial songs such
as "The Homestead Strike," and a large assortment
of children's rhymes and songs, and of peddlars'
street cries.
551 1. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
American folklore; stories, ballads, and tra-
ditions of the people. With a foreword by Carl
Sandburg. New York, Crown, 1944. xxvii, 932 p.
44-4275 GR105.B58
"A book of American folklore," the compiler
thought, "should be as big as this country of ours —
as American as Davy Crockett and as universal as
Brer Rabbit." In both size and variety, this one-
volume introduction to American folk literature
embodies much of Dr. Botkin's sense of the breadth
and inclusiveness of his subject. Part 1, "Heroes
and Boasters," recounts the exploits of classical
American folk figures such as Crockett, Pecos Bill,
and Stormalong. It brings to our attention some
modern ones as well in Joe Magarac the Hunkie
Steelman, and Popeye. The "Jesters" in part 3
tell American anecdotes, proverbs, and gags from
popular tradition and from the folk-inspired and
folk-oriented works of such writers as Carl Sand-
burg. Not to be overlooked are the recent urban
"Little Moron" jokes and "Knock Knock, Who's
There" riddles. The tall tales treated in part 4,
"Liars," include some whoppers about remarkable
insects and "fearsome critters," and Mark Twain's
"Jumping Frog." Washington Irving's "The Devil
and Tom Walker" is one of the legends in part 6,
although most come direcdy from folk tradition.
The songs and rhymes, many of whose melodies are
included, range from traditional Anglo-American
ballads to modern jingles and rope-skipping chants.
Although there is no general bibliography, the
footnotes are many and detailed. The songs are
indexed by titles and first lines and by the names
of their collectors and editors, while the other ma-
terial is thoroughly indexed by names and subjects.
5512. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
railroad folklore; the stories, tall tales, tra-
ditions, ballads, and songs of the American railroad
man. Edited by B. A. Botkin and Alvin F. Har-
low. New York, Crown, 1953. xiv, 530 p. illus.
53-9973 GR920.R3B6
The joint product of a railroad historian and an
American folklorist, this large anthology examines
both historical fact and oral lore connected with the
development of railroading in the days of steam.
Real and legendary personalities who worked at all
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 789
levels of the business are encountered, from John
Henry and Casey Jones to Jay Gould and Andrew
Carnegie. Jones' disaster is one of several ex-
amined at length. Other sections discuss the
"Banditti of the Rails," including the first train
holdup, and several of the James boys' jobs, and
present many "Blues, Ballads, and Work Songs,"
with tunes and historical notes.
5513. Clough, Benjamin C, ed.. .The American
imagination at work; tall tales and folk
tales. New York, Knopf, 1947. xix, 707 p.
47-30583 GR105.C55
Bibliography: p. 701-707.
This large collection of American folk tales and
tall tales draws on material collected from the oral
tradition by such folklorists as Richard Dorson,
Harold Thompson, Richard Chase, Vance Ran-
dolph, and Herbert Halpert. Other items are
taken from more purely literary sources, from
writers so diverse in period and oudook as Captain
John Smith, Cotton Mather, Washington Irving,
Mark Twain, Stephen Vincent Benet, and Bennett
Cerf. Loosely arranged by type and subject matter,
the yarns cover "history, semi-history and pseudo-
history," "witchcraft and other satanic mischief,"
"the animal kingdom," "explorers, pioneers, bene-
factors, demigods, supermen, myth-makers, and
jokers," and a number of "hardy perennials."
5514. Davidson, Levette J. A guide to American
folklore. [Denver] University of Denver
Press, 1951. 132 p. 51-10205 GR105.D3
In his first chapter "What is Folklore?" the author
gives the discipline a broader definition than does
M. W. Beckwith in her Folklore in America (no.
5504). The present study applies the term in
general to "the traditional expressions of unsophisti-
cated groups of people, expressions that are oral or
informal in transmission." Thus Professor David-
son, with the more recent folklorists, tends to place
less emphasis on artistic standards in folk literature,
and more on authentic tradition as a key to better
understanding of the cultural group. The author
agrees with earlier scholars that folklore thrives
best in isolated, homogeneous, and unlettered so-
cieties, but finds that it also flourishes in clubs,
fraternities, schools, and other such groups in urban
society: "We all, more or less, follow folk patterns,
enjoy folk creations, and pass along folklore." The
remaining 14 chapters of this handbook make brief
examinations of the several types of folklore: myths,
legends, customs, songs, crafts, etc., defining and
commenting upon each, and appending bibliog-
raphies and study questions for each. Appendixes
trace the development of American folklore scholar-
ship; list many of the outstanding experts, with
their fields of specialty; and survey the sources
available to the student of folklore in America's
museums, libraries, and archives.
5515. Federal Writers' Project. Lay my burden
down; a folk history of slavery. Edited by
B. A. Botkin. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1945. xxi, 285 p. illus. A45-5576 E444.F26
Edited by Dr. Botkin from the numerous manu-
script narratives of former slaves collected during
the 1930's by the Federal Writers' Project, Lay My
Burden Down constitutes a group autobiography of
the Southern Negroes to whom the time of slavery
was still a personal, albeit distant, memory. Aiming
at the general reader, the editor has maintained a
clear and concise narrative style without sacrificing
the personal language of the original sources. The
book is divided into five general sections: "Mother
Wit," "Long Remembrance," "From Can to Can't,"
"A War among the White Folks," and "All I Know
about Freedom." Both factual narrative and folk-
lore figure importantly in the reminiscences. Tall
tales, anecdotes, ghost stories, and myths — many of
them involving Lincoln and other important figures
of the day — come from the many informants
blessed with "mother wit." Personal recollections
of slavery days vary widely, according to the in-
formants' individual experiences. Some of the ac-
counts are strongly tinged with nostalgia, others
with bitterness. One of the former slaves even
shows sympathy for the Ku Klux Klan! Neverthe-
less, most of the contributors would seem to agree
with the one who said, "Freedom is better than
slavery, though. I done seed both sides."
5516. Hoffman, Daniel G. Paul Bunyan, last of
the frontier demigods. Philadelphia, Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania Press for Temple University
Publications, 1952. xiv, 213 p.
52-12005 PS461.B8H6
Bibliography: p. 193-201.
Although Paul Bunyan is among the most widely
known of American folk heroes, his position as a
genuine folk character is surprisingly precarious.
Considered by some authorities to have been in-
vented out of whole cloth by professional writers,
the good-natured giant owes at least a large propor-
tion of his current popularity and many of his
individual exploits to printed sources. That Paul
himself originated in the oral tradition, however, is
convincingly demonstrated by Professor Hoffman.
Paul's first appearance in print was as recent as 191 0,
in a newspaper story whose authentic lumberwoods
vocabulary suggests a traditional oral source. In
scholarly fashion the author analyzes the popular
Paul Bunyan literature and the poetic treatments by
Robert Frost, Carl Sandburg, and Louis Unter-
790 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
meyer, as well as the surviving fragments of oral
literature which probably originated in the last cen-
tury. He appends an index to the motifs in the
Bunyan tales, both literary and oral.
5517. Johnson, Guy B. John Henry; tracking
down a Negro legend. Chapel Hill, Uni-
versity of North Carolina Press, 1929. 155 p. (Uni-
versity of North Carolina. Social study series)
29-23914 PS461.J6J6
ML3556.J7J7
"Bibliography of John Henry": p. [152J-155.
"The songs about John Henry," states Professor
Johnson, "are at the heart of the legend which has
sprung up around him." By gathering and ana-
lyzing the available hammer songs and ballads (some
of which are here accompanied by their melodies)
about the mighty steel driver, and comparing their
widely conflicting patches of evidence with what
documentation and individual recollections he could
locate, the author, while unable to obtain the com-
plete facts, has at least laid the ground for better-
informed speculation and set an example for other
such studies of the factual bases of American song-
legends. An examination of the development of
the steam drill and the physical conditions of the
Big Bend Tunnel in West Virginia leads him to
the conclusion that the famous contest between man
and machine could, at least, have taken place, and
that, under the right circumstances, such a steel
driver as John Henry could well have been the vic-
tor. The relationship between John Henry and
another ballad hero, the murderer John Hardy,
long a thorny matter in American Negro folklore,
is found to be only a confusion of two separate
Negro steel drivers. Hardy, whose exploit is well
documented, appears to have entered the annals of
folk legend some time after the John Henry tradi-
tion was already well established. Mention should
also be made of a similar study, later by a few years,
Louis W. Chappell's scholarly Jo fin Henry, a Fol\-
Lore Study (Jena, Frommannsche Verlag, 1933.
144 p.), which supports many of Professor John-
son's conclusions while it clarifies and corrects
others.
5518. Journal of American folklore, v. 1. Apr./
June 1888. Philadelphia, American Folk-
lore Society, quarterly. 17-28737 GR1.J8
Published in Boston by Houghton Mifflin, 1888-
1910.
Index: Vols. 1-40, 1888-1927. 1 v. (Issued as
v. 14 of the Memoirs of the American Folklore So-
ciety (GR1.A5, v. 14).
The American Folklore Society, the parent or-
ganization devoted to the study of folklore in the
New World, was founded in 1888, with Professor
Alcee Fortier of Tulane University as its first presi-
dent. Through its Journal of American Folklore
and other publications, including monographs and
bibliographies, this active organization has contrib-
uted most significantly to the study of British,
French, Spanish, and Negro lore in Canada, the
United States, and Latin America, as well as the
indigenous lore of the American Indian. The vast
amount of material in the Journal's first 70 volumes
has recently been made more accessible to the re-
searcher by Tristram P. Coffin's An Analytical In-
dex to the Journal of American Folklore (Philadel-
phia, American Folklore Society, 1958.). Among
the first regional offspring of the American Folk-
lore Society was the Texas Folklore Society, which
held its first meeting in 19 n and got out the first of
its annual volumes in 19 16, under the editorship of
Stith Thompson. Professor Thompson's successor
was J. Frank Dobie who, after a brief World War I
interim, presided over the Publications of the Texas
Folklore Society until 1943, when the editorial work
was taken up by Mody C. Boatright and others.
This series of yearbooks continues to offer a wide
variety of legends, tales, songs, ballads, and other
lore from the Indian, Spanish, Negro, and Anglo-
Saxon peoples of the American Southwest. A num-
ber of the Texas Society's Publications are individ-
ually listed elsewhere in this chapter. The number
of folklore periodicals devoted to specific areas,
States, or subjects is large and growing. The most
important include the Southern Folklore Quarterly
(founded in 1937), Western Folklore (originally
the California Folklore Quarterly, 1942-46), New
Yor\ Folklore Quarterly ( 1945), and Midwest Folk-
lore (195 1 ). These publications have not rigidly
restricted themselves to their particular areas in the
range of their contents but, like the Journal of
American Folklore, show evidence of a growing in-
terest in the general field of folklore, including its
international aspects.
5519. Price, Robert. Johnny Appleseed; man and
myth. Bloomington, Indiana University
Press, 1954. xv, 320 p. illus.
54-7972 S417.C45P7
Bibliography: p. 299-303.
In an oral literature replete with vigorous, swash-
buckling, swaggering, and sometimes brutal heroes,
the folk memory of John Chapman (1 774-1 845) is
unique. Legend tells us that, although he ran from
Mansfield to Mt. Vernon, Ohio, in 24 hours in order
to summon armed help for settlers threatened by an
Indian attack, Chapman himself would never use a
gun against another man, whether white or Indian.
Nor would he permit animals or insects to suffer for
his own comfort. Already a popular legend long
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 79 1
before his death, the earliest printed account of
Chapman appeared in England in 1817, and does not
describe Johnny Appleseed, the popular planter of
Midwestern orchards, so much as the religious mys-
tic and "extraordinary missionary" for the New
Church of Swedenborg. As far as is possible, Pro-
fessor Price has attempted to separate fact from
legend, and proves, among other things, that while
the itinerant pioneer, missionary, and nurseryman
was not without his eccentricities, the popular notion
that he was a pauper is far from correct. In tracing
the development of the Appleseed myth, however,
the author concludes that, in the final analysis, its
worth "no longer lies merely in the dead facts that
may have inspired it but in the new, living and
creating force that it has become in the present."
B. Legends and Tales: Local
5520. Boatright, Mody C. Tall tales from Texas.
Illustrated by Elizabeth E. Keefer; foreword
by J. Frank Dobie. Dallas, Tex., Southwest Press,
1934. xxiv, 100 p. 34-24636 PZ3.B6304Tal
The ideal audience for a frontier tall tale, or
"windy," was a credulous greenhorn, who was often
treated to exaggeration regarding the potency of
poisonous serpents, dreadful aspects of fantastic
beasts, and extraordinary feats of strength and speed
by heroes of the Southwestern plains. But, as
}. Frank Dobie points out in his "Preface on Authen-
tic Liars," even when no tenderfoot was about the
authentic liar took his art seriously and told his tale
with the gravity of "a historian of the Roman Em-
pire," expecting "neither credulity nor the establish-
ment of truth," but creating his tale as an end in
itself. In this book there is a young greenhorn to
provide his more experienced cronies with the op-
portunity and incentive to summon up a large assort-
ment of "windies" on all manner of subjects,
culminating in accounts of the genesis, exploits, and
exodus of Pecos Bill and his beloved first wife,
Sluefoot Sue.
5521. Boatright, Mody C, ed. Texas folk and
folklore. Edited by Mody C. Boatright, Wil-
son M. Hudson [and] Allen Maxwell. Drawings
by Jose Cisneros. Dallas, Southern Methodist Uni-
versity Press, 1954. 356 p. (Publications of the
Texas Folklore Society, no. 26)
54-11299 GR1.T4, no. 26
The indigenous Indians, the Spanish settlers from
Mexico, the Anglo-American setders, and their
Negro slaves formed four distinct racial groups and
cultural traditions in Texas which maintain, to a
great extent, their several identities. All four of
these traditions are drawn upon freely in this col-
lection, which includes tales of the Kiowa-Apache
and the Alabama-Coushatta, together with Mexican,
Negro, and Anglo-American tales, jokes, legends,
and ghost stories. Another branch of folklore cov-
ered is music, with white and Negro ballads and
songs, and Mexican corridos. Rounding out the
collection are examples of folk-medicine, plant lore,
games, and proverbs, and an account of a highly
poetic and moving Negro folk sermon. The volume
is one of a series which has been issued regularly by
the society since 19 16.
5522. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. New York City
folklore: legends, tall tales, anecdotes, stories,
sagas, heroes and characters, customs, traditions,
and sayings. New York, Random House, 1956.
492 p. illus. 56-8815 F128.B6
Urban popular tradition, previously presented in
the editor's Sidewalks of America (no. 5510), is fur-
ther exploited in a volume devoted to the largest
city of the Nation and the World. "The focus of
the book," the editor observes, "is on the quintes-
sence of New York," rather than on the many indi-
vidual ethnic, linguistic, and occupational groups
which exist within the whole. At the same time
certain neighborhoods and "cities within the city"
are given attention in chapters such as "You Walk
around a Corner, and It's a Different World,"
"Peacocks on Parade," and "Playtown and Play-
boys." While the book's organization is informal
and follows no strict historical pattern, a wide range
of New York City history is covered, from the
earliest encounters between the Indians and Dutch
to the latter days of Grover Whalen, Jimmy Walker,
Casey Stengel, and Toots Shor, all of whom are
represented in the editor's selection of New York
City folklore. It is unlike Dr. Botkin's other an-
thologies in that music does not figure importantly,
although a few street cries and chants are included.
5523. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of Mis-
sissippi River folklore; stories, ballads, tradi-
tions, and folkways of the mid-American river
country. New York, Crown, 1955. xx, 620 p.
55-10172 GR109.B58
While cultural homogeneity has often been re-
garded as an ideal breeding ground for pure folk-
lore, and has been a vitally important factor in the
South, New England, and other regions of America,
792 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the keynote of the mid-American river country is,
as Dr. Botkin points out, diversity. "From frigid
Lakes and North Woods to semi-tropical Gulf, the
river country has . . . been a region of extremes and
sharp contrasts and violent changes." Over the
length of the Mississippi, there is a greater amalga-
mation of ethnic and cultural groups than has been
encountered in most of the other areas dealt with in
the editor's "Treasury" series. As a result the leg-
ends and tales, heroes and outlaws, language and
customs, and ballads and blues of the Mississippi
country are related to diverse cultural traditions:
those of the Anglo-Saxon, the Frenchman, the
Negro, the Indian, the German, and the Scandi-
navian; and include occupational lore of the trapper,
the lumberman, the farmer and plantation laborer,
and the industrial worker.
5524. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
New England folklore; stories, ballads, and
traditions of the Yankee people. New York,
Crown, 1947. xxvi, 934 p. 47-1 1615 GR106.B6
Following the same broad treatment of written
and oral lore as the editor's popular Treasury of
American Folklore (no. 55 11), this anthology pre-
sents a large quantity and variety of legendary and
real local New England characters, stories, anec-
dotes, customs, and music. In a brief introduction,
"New England as a Folklore Country," Dr. Botkin
describes the close-knit New England culture as an
ideal ground for the preservation of folklore, be-
cause of its "strong sense of 'nationality' rooted in
'racial remembrance.' " The book's five sections
range over the earlier source literature, Artemus
Ward, Josh Billings, and The Farmer's AlmanacI^,
as well as the purely oral lore gathered in recent
years by the Federal Writers' Project and individual
collectors.
5525. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
Southern folklore; stories, ballads, traditions,
and folkways of the people of the South. With a
foreword by Douglas Southall Freeman. New
York, Crown, 1949. xxiv, 776 p.
49-11786 GR108.B6
A further regional installment in Dr. Botkin's
series on folk taste and fancy, A Treasury of South-
ern Folklore sets forth local loyalties and prejudices,
heroes and desperadoes, stories, customs, and music.
One type of hero is presented in a particularly
interesting chapter, "The Peoples' Choice," which
recalls Southern politicians and political commen-
tators who have captured the popular imagination,
from Patrick Henry and John Calhoun to Huey
Long and Will Rogers. Moonshine, mint juleps,
hush-puppies, and burgoo are among the "Pleasures
of the Palate" described in part 4, "Southern Folk-
ways." As is customary in this series, the editor
concludes with a large assortment of songs and
ballads, with melodies.
5526. Botkin, Benjamin A., ed. A treasury of
Western folklore. Foreword by Bernard De
Voto. New York, Crown, 1951. 806 p. illus.
51-12013 GR109.B6
"To the New Yorker," one of this anthology's
selections avers, "anything west of Hoboken is the
West." Most Easterners locate the frontier along
the far slope of the Alleghenies, for one's concept
of the West changes with one's point of view.
However, all commentators, even those who regard
the West as being a state of mind, agree that the
West, wherever it is, is a place of vastness and
diversity. Like the West itself, Mr. Botkin's third
regional miscellany of American folklore is expan-
sive and varied. The tales, anecdotes, language,
customs, and songs, reprinted with connecting edi-
torial commentary, offer a panorama of the hard
and high living and the fast and frequent dying
which all of us associate with the story of westward
expansion. As in its two predecessors, the focal
point is Anglo-American tradition. Strung upon
this thread, however, are the contributory traditions
of the Western Indian and the Spanish American.
In a loose historical and geographical order, the
collection offers folkways, folk-say, and a consider-
able amount of straight history of the struggles of
the setders against nature, the Indians, and each
other. There are tales and songs of sandstorms
and earthquakes, of Crazy Horse and Cochise, and
of Clay Allison and Billy the Kid. Nor does the
editor ignore the 20th century's contributions to
Western folklore, with the coming of industry,
wealth, and Hopalong Cassidy. Readers desiring
a smaller collection may turn to Duncan Emrich's
volume in the American customs series: It's an Old
Wild West Custom (New York, Vanguard Press,
1949. 313 p.), which has selections in most of the
categories offered by Dr. Botkin, as well as an illus-
trated study of branding irons and saloon fixtures.
5527. Brewer, John Mason. The Word on the
Brazos; Negro preacher tales from the Bra-
zos bottoms of Texas. Foreword by J. Frank Dobie;
illus. by Ralph White, Jr. Austin, University of
Texas Press, 1953. 109 p. 53-10834 GR103.B7
The folk sermon in the religion of the Southern
Negro, which has been better preserved in the
Brazos bottoms of Texas than in most places, is
characterized by its superb poetic imagery, its mu-
sical nuance, and its striking use of parables and
anecdotes. Many of the stories in this collection
originated as exempla from the pulpit, while others
were told about preachers and religious matters in
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 793
general by members of the flock. Both are known
as "preacher tales." All of the tales, which Dr.
Brewer relates in an authentic idiom, show a gen-
uine gift of wit and humor: The Reverend gendy
chides the Sister Rosies who cry out "Ride, salva-
tion, ride!" until the collection hat is passed, when
they change to a less enthusiastic, "Walk, salvation,
walk." The charm and humor of these tales of
"Bad Religion," "Good Religion," "Baptizings,
Conversions and Church Meetings," "Heaven and
Hell," and "Preachers and Little Boys," reflect the
happiness which this folk found in their religion,
without detracting from the sincerity and humility
of their belief.
5528. Carriere, Joseph Medard, ed. Tales from
the French folklore of Missouri. Evanston,
111., Northwestern University, 1937. 354 p.
(Northwestern University studies in the humanities,
no. 1) 38-6249 GR110.M77C3
In the village of Old Mines, in Washington
County some 25 miles from the Mississippi River,
Dr. Carriere found a small community which re-
tained the language and traditions of the French
pioneers who settled the area in the 18th century.
The 73 tales which he here presents appear in the
dialect in which he recorded them, and are arranged
into three general categories: "Animal Tales"; "Or-
dinary Folk-Tales," which include tales of magic,
religion, and of the stupid ogre, and novelle or ro-
mantic tales; and finally, assorted "Farces, Anec-
dotes, and Cumulative Stories." The dialect, which
strongly resembles some Canadian-French dialects
but also includes some English influences, is closely
analyzed along with the stories. Each tale is pre-
ceded by a brief English summary. Additional
helps include a glossary, and lists of tale types and
motifs, arranged in accordance with the scholarly
classification set up by Antti Aarne and Stith
Thompson.
5529. Chase, Richard, ed. The Jack tales, told by
R. M. Ward and his kindred in the Beech
Mountain section of western North Carolina and
by other descendants of Council Harmon (1803-
1896) elsewhere in the Southern mountains; with
three tales from Wise County, Virginia. Illustrated
by Berkeley Williams, Jr. [Boston] Houghton
Mifflin, 1943. 201 p. 43-12028 GR110.N8C5
Some Americans may be surprised to learn that
the resourceful young man who climbed a beanstalk
and slew a giant is also the hero of a large and
widely known cycle of tales, brought to the New
World from England, and still told in several re-
gions, including the Southeastern States where Mr.
Chase heard them. In this collection are 18 adven-
tures of an Americanized Jack, an easygoing country
431240—60 52
boy far removed from his dashing English cousin,
and of his brothers, Will and Tom. The ancient
origins still show through in appearances of a
Woden-like stranger with magical powers, and a
unicorn, described as "just some kind of little old
yearlin' bull that didn't have but one horn." Most
of the tales come from the tradition of a single
family, descendants of "Old Council" Harmon, all
in the vicinity of Beech Mountain, North Carolina.
Mr. Chase has combined different versions, clarified
the dialect, and retold the stories in a manner which
will best appeal to his readers, and especially to the
children for whom Jack's escapades are a constant
source of delight. At the same time he has pre-
served the characteristic Southern mountain idiom.
Serious students of folklore will not overlook the
special appendix prepared by Dr. Herbert Halpert,
which makes a brief survey of the folktale in Amer-
ica and lists Old World parallels to Mr. Chase's
selections, with references to the relevant literature.
Five years later Mr. Chase issued a further and more
general collection: Grandfather Tales; American-
English Vol\ Tales (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1948.
239 p.). Its 25 traditional tales were taken down by
Mr. Chase or others in Virginia, North Carolina, and
Kentucky. The tide originated thus: when Mr.
Chase explained to one of his informants just the
sort of tales he was looking for, the reply was, "Oh,
you want the old grandfather tales: 'Jack and Will
and Tom,' 'Chunk o' Meat,' 'The Two Lost
Babes' — them old impossibilities. Is that what
you're after?" As in the earlier collection, the
author has reworked his sources for greater reada-
bility, and gives references to them in an appendix.
Melodies are given in the popular old-shaped nota-
tion. This volume, like its predecessor, is illustrated
with the pen-and-ink drawings of Berkeley
Williams, Jr.
5530. Davidson, Levette J., and Forrester Blake,
eds. Rocky Mountain tales. With drawings
by Skelly. Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1947. xiv, 302 p. 47-3645 GR109.D3
The Rocky Mountains and the plains around them
have been the birth-place of many of America's most
attractive legends, and the theater of much fact
which has acquired legendary status. In the pres-
ent collection the compilers have gathered from
many printed sources tall tales, historical incidents,
and accounts of many of the natural phenomena for
which the region is famous. The first chapter intro-
duces Jim Bridger, a wild and woolly frontiersman,
who is still remembered as one of the greatest spin-
ners of fabulous yarns. "Old Jim's" tales of the pet-
rified forest and the glass mountain are among those
recounted. Another remarkable personality encoun-
tered is the "Pikes Peak Prevaricator," Sergeant
794 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
O'Keefe, whose Munchausen-like tales of super-
human feats are recorded at length.
5531. Dobie, James Frank. Coronado's children;
tales of lost mines and buried treasures of the
Southwest. Illustrated by Ben Carlton Mead. Gar-
den City, N. Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1934. xiv,
367 p. _ 34-33497 F786.D633
Professor Dobie asserts that the gold fever which
drove the conquistadores in search of the legendary
Seven Cities of Cibola, the Gran Quivira, and El
Dorado, did not die out with the coming of perma-
nent settlers but persists more strongly than ever.
In evidence he has printed here (the original edi-
tion was in 1930) a large number of tales current in
America's Southwest of lost or hidden gold and
other treasures. The legends abound in lost mines,
rich caches guarded by Indians, pirate treasure bur-
ied by Lafitte and guarded by his shade, and many
other tales of the endless quest of prospectors and
adventurers. Appended are detailed bibliograph-
ical notes and a glossary of Mexican and other
localisms of the Southwest.
5532. Dobie, James Frank, ed. Tales of old-time
Texas; illustrated by Barbara Latham. Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown, 1955. 336 p.
55-10755 GR110.T5D63
Adventurous tales of lost mines and hidden treas-
ures, not unlike those encountered in the preceding
Coronado's Children, are to be found in this new
collection, but there is a great deal more. There are
tall tales on many subjects, including the Texas
weather; pure fantasy; and historically based tales
revolving around such heroes as Jim Bowie and Sam
Bass, best-known and -liked of the latter-day Robin
Hoods of Texas folklore. Intentionally omitted are
Roy Bean, whom the author regards as a character
unworthy of folk-hero status, and Pecos Bill, de-
scribed as a comparatively recent non-folk invention.
While the introduction laments that there has been
a loss of zest and flavor in the transition from
telling to printing, the author's long personal ex-
perience with Texas tales and storytellers has en-
abled him to preserve much of the original language
and style.
5533. Dorson, Richard M. Bloodstoppers & bear-
walkers; folk traditions of the Upper
Peninsula. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1952. 305 p. 52—5394 GR110.M6D6
Michigan's Upper Peninsula retains a vast amount
of traditional lore among each of the varied groups
which make up its population. Emphasizing tales,
but also including superstitions, customs, cures,
food, songs, and other lore, Professor Dorson's study
is based on his own collecting in the area. Com-
mencing with the region's original inhabitants, the
author examines "Indians Stuffed and Live," dis-
crediting several of the romantic Indian legends con-
trived for the tourist trade, but revealing many vasdy
more fascinating tales he found still current among
the Indians themselves. Part 2, examining some of
Upper Michigan's Old-World traditions, describes
the loup-garou and other beliefs and tales of the
French -Canadian settlers; the language and customs
of the "Cousin Jacks," the Michiganders of Cornish
descent; tales and jokes of the Finns; and folk
medicine among the Slovenians. Native lore, in-
cluding detailed chapters on traditions of the miners,
lumberjacks, and lake sailors, occupies part 3.
5534. Dorson, Richard M. Jonathan draws the
long bow. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1946. 274 p. A46-4126 GR106.D6
"Note on the printed sources for New England
folktales": p. 261-263.
In a concise preface, the author defines his sphere
of operation as New England folktales "lodged in
print." Recognizing printed sources — memoirs,
journals, local histories, newspapers, and other
ephemera — as important sources and transmitters of
popular tradition, Professor Dorson has located and
organized a substantial corpus of New England
folktale literature without resorting to oral sources.
After an introductory chapter on the background of
the New England storytelling tradition, the tales
themselves are presented, with analytical and his-
torical commentary, under the general headings of
"Supernatural Stories," "Yankee Yarns," "Tall
Tales," and "Local Legends." The last chapter,
"Literary Folktales," observes that "a fertile folk-
lore eventually infiltrates into and nourishes creative
writings." Folkloristic influences and usages in the
works of such New England writers as John G. C.
Brainard, John Greenleaf Whittier, Daniel P.
Thompson, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Robert P. Tris-
tram Coffin, and Walter Hard are treated at length.
5535. Dorson, Richard M., ed. Negro folktales
in Michigan. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 245 p. illus.
56-6516 GR103.D6
This book, the first collection and study of Negro
folklore in the North, provides the editor with the
opportunity to examine in detail the survival of
rural Southern Negro traditions in urban areas of
the North. Professor Dorson found that his best
storytellers tended to be those with more immediate
Southern connections, for the faster pace of the new
society takes its toll. In the words of one of the
storytellers, a hard-working and increasingly sue-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 795
cessful resident of Benton Harbor, Arkansas-born
and Missouri-bred: "I haven't told any tales since I
left Missouri; no time for it up here." After intro-
ductory chapters which describe the towns visited
in southern and central Michigan, the informants,
and their storytelling art, 165 stories which Professor
Dorson collected on paper or on tape recordings are
presented. The classifications are: "Animal and
Bird Stories"; tales about "Old Marster" and his
crafty slave, John; tales about the colored man;
"Horrors"; "Hoodoos and Two-Heads"; "Spirits
and Hants"; "Witches and Wonders"; "The Lord
and the Devil"; "Preachers"; "Liars and Irishmen";
and "Fairy Tales." The informants and the tale
types and motifs are indexed, and there are detailed
comparative notes.
5536. Duke University, Durham, N. C. Library.
Fran\ C. Brown Collection of North Caro-
lina Folklore. The Frank C. Brown Collection of
North Carolina Folklore; the folklore of North
Carolina, collected by Dr. Frank C. Brown during
the years 1912 to 1943, in collaboration with the
North Carolina Folklore Society. General editor:
Newman Ivey White. Wood engravings by Clare
Leighton. Durham, N. C, Duke University, 1952-
57. 4 v. illus. (Duke University publications)
52-10967 GR110.N8D8
The immense quantity of folklore materials
which the late Frank C. Brown (1870-1943) col-
lected in North Carolina during more than thirty
years, in collaboration with the North Carolina
Folklore Society, is the source for this largest of all
publications of American folklore, a memorial to
Professor Brown. Under the general editorship of
the late Professor White, who died in 1948, and of
Paull F. Baum, and with a staff of 9 associate editors
who cover the many fields represented, first 5 and
then 7 volumes were planned: 1, "Games and
Rhymes, Beliefs and Customs, Riddles, Proverbs,
Speech, Tales and Legends"; 2, "Folk Ballads"; 3,
"Folk Songs"; 4, "The Music of the Ballads"; 5,
"The Music of the Folk Songs"; 6 and 7, "Super-
stitions." The last three have yet to appear. All of
the materials published are given as they were col-
lected from the folk tradition, and are accompanied
by detailed documentation as to sources and his-
tory and by bibliographical references. All of the
materials are indexed for reference use. Professor
White's "General Introduction" discusses the mean-
ing and significance of folklore; describes the sur-
prising extent to which ancient custom survives in
20th-century urban society; traces the history of folk-
lore scholarship; and goes on to explain the "History,
Nature, and Growth" of the Brown collection. Fur-
ther introductions by the associate editors open vol-
umes 2 and 4, and the six parts of volume 1.
5537. Espinosa, Jose Manuel. Spanish folk-tales
from New Mexico. New York, American
Folklore Society, Stechert and Co., agents, 1937.
xix, 222 p. (Memoirs of the American Folklore
Society, v. 30) 38-9815 GR1.A5, v. 30
"Printed in Germany."
Bibliography: p. [187]— 188.
Despite the change in New Mexico's government
and economy when it became a part of the United
States, in much of the State the old Spanish culture
has remained unchanged. Moreover, the author
tells us, many of the traditions of Old-World Spain
are better preserved here than in the Spanish-Amer-
ican countries to the South, where Indians have
exercised a greater influence. The present collec-
tion prints an assortment of 114 tales, taken down
from the informants word for word, in the language
in which the compiler heard them. There has been
no attempt to employ phonetic notation, but the
author has reproduced the authentic dialect and
grammar in standard Spanish orthography. The
subject classifications of the tales are: magic tales,
religious tales, picaresque tales, romantic tales, short
tales and anecdotes, and animal tales. The author's
bibliographical notes are accompanied by English
summaries of all the tales. This first detailed schol-
arly study of the area now has a newer and larger
companion in Juan Bautista Rael's Cuentos Es~
panoles de Colorado y Nuevo Mejico (Stanford,
Calif., Stanford University Press, 1957. 2 v.).
Like his predecessor, Mr. Rael gives his 518 tales in
the original language, with introduction, notes, and
summaries in English.
5538. Fife, Austin, and Alta (Stephens) Fife.
Saints of sage & saddle; folklore among the
Mormons. Bloomington, Indiana University Press,
1956. 367 p. illus. 56-11997 BX8611.F5
Isolated from outside influences by geographical
and social distance, and bound together by their
common faith, the followers of the prophet Joseph
Smith were in a position to develop a folklore
uniquely their own throughout the past century.
Seeking the "authenticity not of history but of folk-
lore," the authors reexamine many of the legends,
customs, tales, and songs which grew up among the
Mormons. Among the early Mormon leaders who
assumed the stature of folk hero was the colorful
cowboy-preacher, J. Golden Kimball, and a large
number of traditional "J. Golden yarns" are in-
cluded in the Fifes' chapter on "The Golden Leg-
end." Tales, some humorous and some full of
pathos and tragedy, are recorded, covering a wide
range of subjects: the Saints' early persecution in
the East and Middle West, their dealings with In-
dians, the establishment of their great city in the
desert, and plural wives. The many songs of the
796 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mormon folk, which sympathetically interpret their
theology and history, are dealt with in several chap-
ters and at particular length in the epilogue: "Lyre
of the Lord's Anointed." Among other aspects of
Mormon folklore described are pioneer arts and
crafts, illustrated by photographs.
5539. Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth. Folklore from
the Schoharie hills, New York. Ann Arbor,
University of Michigan Press, 1937. xv, 351 p.
illus. 37-7981 GR110.N7G3
Bibliography: p. 322-331.
Only some 40 miles west of Albany, and 150 miles
from New York City, in Schoharie County, the
author found a region whose isolation from modern
life and wealth in ancient folklore were comparable
to the remotest parts of the Southern Appalachians
or the Ozarks. Beginning in 1912 with the collec-
tion of traditional ballads, Miss Gardner went on to
discover a varied body of folklore which included, in
addition to songs and ballads, legends, witchcraft,
ghost stories, folk tales, children's rhymes and games,
riddles, and superstitions. The folk-tale tradition
was found to be particularly rich, as appears in the
hundred pages devoted to it. After a general de-
scription of the people and her experiences in getting
acquainted with them, the author details at some
length the history and topography of the region, the
ethnic backgrounds of the inhabitants, and social
conditions at the time of her study.
5540. Johnson, Guy Benton. Folk culture on St.
Helena Island, South Carolina. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1930. 183
p. ([University of North Carolina. Social study
series]) 3°-32i35 E185.93.S7J67
Bibliography: p. 174-179.
The Sea Islands, just off the coasts of South Caro-
lina and Georgia, have retained a rather distinct
Negro culture which has been studied at some length
by anthropologists, sociologists, and folklorists.
Other important folklore studies and collections are
Elsie Clews Parsons' Fol\-Lore of the Sea Islands,
South Carolina (Cambridge, Mass., 1923. xxx, 219
p. Memoirs of the American Folk-lore Society, v.
16), Nicholas Ballanta's Saint Helena Island Spiritu-
als (New York, Schirmer, 1925. xviii, 93 p.), and
Lydia Parrish's Slave Songs of the Georgia Sea
Islands (New York, Creative Age Press, 1942. xxxi,
256 p.). The present study is one of a series jointly
sponsored by the Institute for Research in Social
Science of the University of North Carolina and the
Social Science Research Council, which includes
Thomas J. Woofter's Blac\ Yeomanry (New York,
Holt, 1930. 291 p.) and which deals to a large ex-
tent with the customs, folkways, and mores of St.
Helena. Dr. Johnson's study takes three other
branches of St. Helena folklore and examines them
in detail. The first is the dialect of the Negroes of
the area, Gullah, that singular English dialect known
for its incomprehensibility to English-speaking out-
siders. Dr. Johnson traces the cultural background
of Gullah and describes its pronunciation and struc-
ture. Folk songs, with particular emphasis on
spirituals, are dealt with in the second chapter.
Here, as in the language, the author finds a greater
kinship with the white American tradition than with
Africa. Folk tales, riddles, proverbs, toasts, rhymes,
games, and beliefs conclude this detailed study.
5541. Kittredge, George Lyman. The old farmer
and his almanack; being some observations
on life and manners in New England a hundred
years ago, suggested by reading the earlier numbers
of Mr. Robert B. Thomas's Farmer's Almanac\,
together with extracts curious, instructive, and en-
tertaining, as well as a variety of miscellaneous
matter. Boston, W. Ware, 1904. xiv, 403 p.
4-37I29 F5.K62
Reasoning that nothing, with the possible excep-
tion of a newspaper, "is more stricdy contemporary
than an almanac," the great American literary
scholar and teacher, Professor Kittredge of Harvard
( 1 860-1941), undertook a careful study of the cele-
brated Farmer's Almanac\ as a means of gaining a
personal, contemporary, and unembellished glimpse
of life in New England at the end of the 18th century
and through much of the 19th. Established in 1792
by Robert B. Thomas (1766-1846), it was compiled
by him at West Boylston in the heart of Massachu-
setts, until he died while reading proof for the 1847
issue. While intended primarily as a guide for the
planting and harvesting of crops based on astro-
nomical calculations, the almanac became much
more. The "new, useful, and entertaining matter,"
which included general news items, proverbs, anec-
dotes, and what today's newspapers call "household
hints," helped to keep volumes of the Farmer's
Almanac\ on coundess New England bookshelves,
beside the Bible and Pilgrim's Progress. For the
social historian, and even more for the folklorist, it
is a treasured source of popular riddles, customs,
anecdotes, folk cures, superstitions, plant and animal
lore, and tales. Professor Kittredge's work first
sketches the life of the Almanacks founder, and
then proceeds to describe the Almanack's views on
a wealth of subjects, with many extended quotations
and facsimiles of the original illustrations. As Kit-
tredge says in his introduction, "the temptation to
go farther afield has been irresistible," resulting in
fascinating historical discourses on witchcraft (a
subject further developed in his Witchcraft in Old
and New England (Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 797
shy Press, 1929. 641 p.)), astrology, the calendar,
and many specific beliefs and superstitions.
5542. Masterson, James R. Tall tales of Arkan-
saw. Boston, Chapman & Grimes, 1943.
443 p. illus. 43-6036 PS266.A8M3
In arriving at a theory of Arkansas humor, Dr.
Masterson finds that, like most American frontier
humor, it manifests itself in boisterous wit, heavy
satire, and tall talk, devoted to the themes of laziness,
ignorance, squalor, illiteracy, boasting, drinking,
fornicating, and other rough-and-ready pastimes
from the half-horse, half-alligator tradition. This
analysis, the subject of the present book's last chap-
ter, is based on the large collection of tall tales and
anecdotes which occupy the preceding 20. The
author's study of Arkansas tall talk goes back as far
as a pair of 18th-century French captains who sent
home some highly imaginative accounts of their
experiences among the Akan^as Indians, and the
slightly later tales of Arkansas pioneer life recounted
by Davy Crockett. The great line of Arkansas
humorists goes back to Colonel Charles F. M. No-
land and Major Thomas Bangs Thorpe, whose con-
tributions to William T. Porter's Spirit of the Times,
under the pseudonyms "Pete Whetstone" and "Tom
Owen the Bee-Hunter," receive much of Dr. Mas-
terson's attention. Other memorable chapters deal
with "The Arkansas Traveler," the state's infa-
mously slow trains, and a classic political oration in
rebuttal of an attempt to change the name of Ar-
kansas. The notes (p. 306-395) and bibliography
(p. 396-425) are on a monumental scale.
5543-
Randolph, Vance. Ozark superstitions.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1947.
367 p. 47-3899 GR110.A8R3
Bibliography: p. [3413-351.
The author introduces this collection with a re-
futation of the city dweller's notion of the "hillbilly"
as a "simple child of nature whose inmost thoughts
and motivations may be read at a glance." On the
contrary, "the hillman is secretive and sensitive"
and "his mind moves in a tremendously involved
system of signs and omens and esoteric auguries."
Mr. Randolph deals with this complex system ac-
cording to the various subjects and functions of the
superstitions in the rural society, among them,
weather signs, witches, cures, courtship and mar-
riage, childbirth, ghosts, and death. Largely of
British stock and descended from pioneers who
came from the Southern Appalachians, the Ozark
people are found to retain many of the Anglo-
American traditions familiar to students of South-
eastern folklore. To these customs have been added
a very few from American Indian lore, such as the
sprinkling of cornmeal into a coffin before burial.
5544. Randolph, Vance. We always lie to
strangers; tall tales from the Ozarks. Illus-
trated by Glen Rounds. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1 95 1. 309 p.
51-10537 PS558.A8R3
Bibliography: p. [2733-294.
Confounding an outlander with a string of
whoppers is not at all the same thing as lying, in the
view of an Ozark taleteller. Mr. Randolph says that
the real storytellers, whom he has known as their
good friend and neighbor, are a singularly honest
and dependable group. Tall tales are something
else again, to be regarded as a prize form of enter-
tainment, particularly when a credulous "furriner"
is about. At such times it becomes a point of honor
among the Ozark folk to support the contentions of
one's fellows with encouragement, affirmation, and
even a little embellishment. Mr. Randolph has
heard many tall tales in the Ozarks and has recorded
them diligently and accurately, preserving the true
regional flavor. The yarns selected for this collec-
tion have to do with razorback hogs and other
"fabulous monsters," prodigious crops, hunting,
supermen, and the weather. The large index in-
cludes names and subjects, and the bibliography,
also large, is extensively annotated.
5545. Randolph, Vance. Who blowed up the
church house? and other Ozark folk tales.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1952.
232 p. 52-4469 GR110.M77R3
After completing his book of tall tales, We Always
Lie to Strangers (no. 5544) this indefatigable col-
lector of Ozark lore set about publishing a series
devoted to the longer tales of the Ozarks. The
tide entered above was followed by two more from
the same publisher: The Devil's Pretty Daughter
(1955. 239 p.) and The Talking Turtle (1957.
226 p.). Mr. Randolph's method in gathering his
stories has been to establish them carefully, either
with the aid of a recording machine, the shorthand
transcriptions of an assistant, or his own notes.
Pointing to the greater freedom a storyteller takes in
his narrative, the collector has not attempted the
strictly verbatim repetition desirable in the publica-
tion of songs and rhymes. The changes are minor,
however, and the idiom is retained in all its fresh-
ness. Other changes — literary coloring, the com-
position of versions from different sources, and so
forth — are not indulged in at all. These books do
much to bridge the gap between the needs of the
professional folklorist and the layman. The stories
themselves, regardless of their careful documenta-
tion, are good for plenty of laughs, and it may be
mentioned that Mr. Randolph has provided a large
amount of authentic material for radio comedians
and comic strips. Valuable to students and scholars
798 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
are the detailed comparative notes citing European
and American parallels on each of the tales by Dr.
Herbert Halpert. All three volumes are illustrated
by Glen Rounds.
5546. Roberts, Leonard W., ed. South from Hell-
fer-Sartin; Kentucky mountain folk tales.
Lexington, University of Kentucky Press, 1955.
287 p. 55-7002 GR110.K4R6
The 105 tales in this collection, many of them
with one or more variants, were collected by the
author in the hill country of eastern Kentucky.
This isolated, strongly Anglo-American folk cul-
ture yielded many tales with familiar Old-World
analogues. Some have close counterparts in the
collections of Grimm, and there are a number
of the popular "Jack Tales." Arranged accord-
ing to the Aarne-Thompson classification, the book
is divided into "Animal Tales," "Ordinary Tales,"
"Jokes and Anecdotes," and "Myths and Local
Legends." Significantly, there is only one animal
tale, because of the relative scarcity in the area
of Negroes, in whose folklore animals play a more
important role. The author collected most of the
tales with the aid of a tape recorder, which insured
the accuracy of his transcriptions. Appendixes
give the sources of each tale and list motif numbers.
5547. Sale, John B. The tree named John. With
twenty-two silhouettes by Joseph Cranston
Jones. Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press, 1929. 151 p. illus. 29-20773 GR103.S3
The tree named John was an elm. Aunt Bet-
sey had selected it as the name tree for her mis-
tress' newborn grandson because the tall straight
sapling was tough, an early budder, and a fast
grower — good omens for the child's future. This
book tells the story of the child's rearing, in which
Aunt Betsey, assisted by the other plantation Ne-
groes, played a most important part. In describ-
ing his childhood and youth on a Mississippi plan-
tation around the turn of the century, the author
describes many of the folkways of the Negroes he
knew: superstitions, proverbs, religion, and tales —
including some of the animal tales popularized in
Joel Chandler Harris' Uncle Remus stories.
5548. Thompson, Harold W. Body, boots &
britches. Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1940.
530 p. 40-2174 F120.T55
The title is a Dutchess County expression roughly
corresponding to "lock, stock and barrel." While
Professor Thompson denies that any one volume
could sum up the lore and legendry of New York
State, "body, boots and britches," his book is a big
step in that direction. The legendary figures of
New York come from a wide range of ethnic and
occupational groups, and include pirates, Indian
fighters, outlaws, sailors, whalers, "canawlers,"
soldiers, and many others. Some of these tales and
heroes have found their way into American letters,
among the latter Tom Quick, Tim Murphy, Nat
Foster, and Nick Stoner, "Injun fighters" all, whose
exploits, real and legendary, probably influenced
Cooper's "Leatherstocking." David Harum, too,
has his traditional New York State counterpart in
David Hannum, celebrated "hoss trader" and per-
petrator of the still-remembered Cardiff Giant hoax.
Ballads, proverbs, place names, tall tales, and other
pieces of New York State lore also form a part of the
author's panorama. He has not forgotten the
interests of scholars and has been careful to list the
sources, printed and oral, from which he and his
students have drawn. His informal presentation
and humorous style make this book unsually
attractive to readers.
C. Folksongs and Ballads: General
5549. Buchanan, Annabel (Morris), ed. Folk
hyms of America. New York, Fischer,
1938. xl, 94 p. 38—39313 M2117.B912F6
Fischer edition, no. 7375.
Bibliography: p. xxxv-xl.
Except for the efforts of a few scholars like
George Pullen Jackson (nos. 5554-5555 and 5577),
religious American folksongs have yet to be ac-
corded the scholarly and popular attention which
their secular counterparts have received. This
collection of 50 folk-hymns with piano accompani-
ment is well suited to popular use and makes a
useful supplement to the more academic collec-
tions and studies of Professor Jackson. The hymns
themselves are preceded by a sketch of the back-
ground of American folk hymnody, and are pro-
vided with historical and analytical notes. The
old modal tunes, many of them traceable to secu-
lar British ballads and songs, are music of great
beauty, and the texts, some from the pens of known
authors like Charles Wesley and Isaac Watts and
some traditional, are an impressive evidence of the
religious convictions of our pioneers. The piano
arrangements are smooth and polished, but simple
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 799
enough (mostly in four-part chorale style) to fit
the simple eloquence of the verses and melodies.
5550. Coffin, Tristram P. The British traditional
ballad in North America. Philadelphia,
American Folklore Society, 1950. xvi, 188 p.
(Publications of the American Folklore Society.
Bibliographical series, v. 2) 51-1318 ML3553.C6
Bibliography: p. 171-181.
An important part of American folk music has
its roots in the British Isles, and for some 70
years a major field of scholarly investigation has
been the British ballad, or narrative song. A great
many books and articles have been devoted to more
specific definitions and accounts of the Anglo-
American ballad. The great American work on
British balladry, around which subsequent studies
have oriented themselves, is Francis James Child's
The English and Scottish Popular Ballads (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1883-98. 5 v.), which has re-
cently undergone a modern reprinting by pho-
tographic process (New York, Folklore Press, 1956.
5 v. in 3.). A one-volume abridgment, edited by
Helen Child Sargent and George Lyman Kittredge
and first issued in 1904, is also available (Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, ci932. xxxi, 729 p.). Since
Child's time numerous books and collections have
been published which discuss and give evidence of
British ballads in all the English-speaking parts of
the world. Two recent American collections which
compare ballads of the Old and New Worlds are
MacEdward Leach's The Ballad Book. (New York,
Harper, 1955. 842 p.) and Albert B. Friedman's
The Viking Boo\ of Folk Ballads of the English-
Speaking World (New York, Viking Press, 1956.
xxxv, 473 p.). These books, as has been custom-
ary with modern ballad scholarship, include bal-
lads of British origin which are not contained in
Child's collection, as well as a large number of
native American ballads. The present work is
primarily a bibliographical key to Child ballad
scholarship in America. Its greatest value is, Mr.
Coffin points out on his introduction, as a research
aid to the ballad scholar, "particularly the student
of ballad variation." "A Critical, Bibliographical
Study of the Traditional Ballad in America" (p.
29-162), in addition to comprehensive references,
provides summaries of the principal "story types,"
and discussions of pertinent problems and theories
arising out of each ballad. An introductory essay
describes variation in traditional ballads, both with
respect to altered words and phrases, which Mr.
Coffin calls "textual variation," and to major ex-
tensions, abbreviations, or alterations in the basic
plot, which he calls "story change." Also included
is the author's index to borrowing in the Child
ballads which was previously published in The
Journal of American Folklore; it traces the move-
ment of lines and stanzas from one ballad to
another.
5551. Doerflinger, William Main, comp. Shanty-
men and shantyboys; songs of the sailor and
lumberman. New York, Macmillan, 1951. xxiii,
374 p. illus. 5!-577 M1977.S2D57
Music editors: Samuel P. Bayard, Hally Wood,
and Joseph Wood.
Bibliography: p. 363-371.
Despite their opposed elements, the shantyman
of the sailing vessels and the shantyboy of the lum-
ber camps have a great deal in common. Both lived
lives of hard physical work and, far from civiliza-
tion and its pleasures, both were forced to provide
their own entertainment in off hours. Moreover,
technological advances have condemned the voca-
tions and traditions of both to a progressive extinc-
tion which is now virtually complete. By faithfully
recording the recollections of the last of the oldtime
sailors and lumbermen and adding his own histori-
cal commentary, Mr. Doerflinger has compiled a
book which is as entertaining as it is authentic. The
sea shanty is a functional song used to set and main-
tain the pace of group tasks on board ship. The
author organizes his chapters on the shanty accord-
ing to function, giving many examples of the short-
haul, halyard, and capstan shanties. Ballads and
other songs sung for entertainment in the forecastle
round out the nautical portion of the collection.
The shantyboy 's name comes not from a work song
but from his log huts or shanties. The songs and
ballads used for lumber camp entertainment origi-
nated in Maine and the Maritime Provinces of Can-
ada, and eventually spread to the Great Lakes, the
Northwest coast, and wherever the jacks went to
work the big woods. For both groups unaccom-
panied tunes and complete texts, often in more than
one version, are given in a well-documented and
accurate form. The illustrations are plentiful and
the detailed plan of a square-rigger is especially
helpful.
5552. Greenway, John. American folksongs of
protest. Philadelphia, University of Penn-
sylvania Press, 1953. 348 p. 53-6929 ML3551.G7
"Musical transcriptions [unacc. melodies] by Ed-
mund F. Soule."
"Songs of social and economic protest on rec-
ords": p. 311-327.
Bibliography: p. 329-338.
An interesting aspect of American history is re-
flected in this study of songs of social and political
unrest. The Knights of Labor, the Pullman strike
of 1893, Coxey's Army, the I. W. W., the Negro's
800 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
struggles before and after emancipation, and many
other social movements and events are represented
in the large collection of topical songs which Mr.
Greenway has assembled. Topical songs with po-
litical and social "messages" have never had a very
secure position in the folk repertory. A few songs
left over from political campaigns and labor move-
ments have caught on and been preserved in the
oral tradition, but for the most part such songs
rarely live long after the events which produced
them. It is probable that many of the songs in this
collection were contrived by fairly sophisticated in-
tellects, and it is doubtful whether most of these
got much closer to the folk than the printed song
sheets and books distributed at meetings and ral-
lies. Since oral perpetuation is implicit in the usual
concept of folk music, some readers will feel that
"American Songs of Protest," omitting any invo-
cation of the folk tradition, would have been a more
appropriate title. In his introduction, Mr. Green-
way advances what is probably the best possible ar-
gument on behalf of protest songs as folklore.
Those who find it unconvincing can still regard
these songs and Mr. Greenway's contribution as of
genuine importance to the study of American social
history.
5553- Ives, Burl, comp. The Burl Ives songbook;
American song in historical perspective.
Illus. by Lamartine Le Goullon and Robert J. Lee.
New York, Ballantine Books, 1953. 303 p.
M53-555 M1629.I9B8
"List of Burl Ives recordings": p. 297-300.
This handsome collection of songs with piano
accompaniments and guitar chords will be popular
for years to come among all who enjoy singing for
the fun of it. As the subtitle implies, the contents
are arranged in a roughly historical order, with
chapters for the following epochs: "Colonial Amer-
ica, 1620-1775"; "Revolutionary America, 1775-
1790"; "The Growing Country: On the Sea, 1790-
1850"; "Religious, Professional and Folk Singing,
1800-1850"; and "The Frontiers of America, 1800-
1850." Included are many of the most popular
Anglo-American ballads and lyric songs — "Barbara
Allen," "Edward," "The Golden Vanity," "The
Fox," and "Paper of Pins," to name a few — as well
as such native products as "Springfield Mountain,"
"Careless Love," and "The Grey Goose." To round
out the historical perspective, there are a few songs
not stricdy in the folk tradition, but popular in their
time and since. Among them are William Bil-
lings' hymn "Chester," Francis Hopkinson's "My
Days Have Been So Wondrous Free," and Henry
Clay Work's "Grandfather's Clock." The Burl Ives
Songboo\ makes no claim to scholarly accuracy or
completeness. The commentary is not very useful
for study and the texts and melodies have been
freely altered to suit the editor's taste. What it does
is to present, in a highly singable form, some of the
favorite songs of America's most popular ballad
singer, as he sings them. The piano arrangements
were made by Albert M. Hague. Mr. Ives' Way-
faring Stranger (New York, Whittlesey House,
1948. 253 p.), an anecdotal autobiography, de-
scribes his Illinois childhood (he was born in 1909)
and his struggles as a music student and art-singer
before he achieved success with the songs of his own
family's traditional heritage. His description of
life in a rural Midwestern community is especially
entertaining and colorful.
5554. Jackson, George Pullen, ed. Spiritual folk-
songs of early America; two hundred and
fifty tunes and texts with an introd. and notes.
[2d ed.] Locust Valley, N. Y., J. J. Augustin, 1953.
254 p. illus. M53-861 M1629.J147S85 1953
Bibliography: p. [24i]-244.
Originally published in 1937, this was the first of
three valuable collections of white spirituals prepared
by Professor Jackson. The others are Down-East
Spirituals and Others, 2d ed. (Locust Valley, N. Y.,
J. J. Augustin, 1953. 296 p.), the first edition of
which appeared in 1943, and Another Sheaf of
White Spirituals (Gainesville, University of Florida
Press, 1952. 233 p.). The three volumes bring a
total of more than 900 religious folksongs and their
unaccompanied melodies into print. The material
is organized into three types of sacred vocal music:
religious ballads, folk-hymns, and revival spiritual
songs. The first group is comprised of narrative
solo songs, many of which, like "The Cherry Tree
Carol" and "Dives and Lazarus," come from ancient
British tradition. The folk-hymns are largely con-
gregational songs of praise, while the revival spirit-
ual songs are what the author describes as "sung-to-
pieces hymns," a fragmentary type of congregational
song which evolved a simple repetitive form well
suited to the revivalist camp meetings on the 19th
century frontier. Within each of the three groups,
the songs are arranged according to the modal and
melodic kinship of their tunes.
5555. Jackson, George Pullen. White and Negro
spirituals, their life span and kinship, tracing
200 years of untrammeled song making and singing
among our country folk, with 116 songs as sung by
both races. New York, J. J. Augustin, 1944. 349 p.
illus. 44-3923 ML355IJI7
For many years the spiritual has commonly been
regarded as an exclusively Negro form of musical
expression of purely African lineage. The lifelong
studies of the late George Pullen Jackson (1874-
1953) have contributed immeasurably to a reassess-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 8oi
ment of this concept. The aim of this work is to
demonstrate the Negro's debt to the hymnody of
white pioneer America. The book is divided into
two large parts, the first of which traces the develop-
ment of congregational singing practices among the
Methodists, Baptists, Shakers, and the many religious
sects, large and small, which appeared on America's
frontiers. The second part analyzes the body of
Negro religious folksong in relation to the white
tradition and describes many textual, melodic, and
rhythmic peculiarities of the Negro variants of white
spirituals. The most convincing evidence for Pro-
fessor Jackson's thesis is massed together in Chapter
XV, "The Tune Comparative List," which presents
116 white melodies side by side with their Negro
counterparts.
5556. Laws, George Malcolm. Native American
balladry; a descriptive study and a biblio-
graphical syllabus. Philadelphia, American Folk-
lore Society, 1950. 276 p. (Publications of the
American Folklore Society. Bibliographical series,
v. 1) S1'^^ ML3551.L3
Bibliography: p. 267-270.
The classic folk-ballads which our early settlers
brought from the British Isles have always over-
shadowed the narrative songs which originated on
this side of the Adantic, in the eyes of collectors and
scholars and even of the folk themselves. Mr. Laws'
catalog of native American ballads still current in
the oral tradition clearly shows that the indigenous
product, while secondary, nevertheless constitutes a
notable portion of the living folk tradition. His
text puts forward a general definition of the ballad
as dramatic narrative and continues with chapters
on several aspects of American ballads, including
the American "ballad makers," about whom much
more is known than about their early British
counterparts, and some pertinent remarks on the
ballad as a record of fact. The classified catalog of
American ballads in the appendices makes Mr. Laws'
book a valuable reference tool. The first appendix
lists the ballads still to be found in oral tradition and
gives brief summaries, a stanza or two of text, ex-
tensive bibliographical references, and notes on his-
tory and distribution. The ballads have been
classified, according to topics and functions, in nine
categories: "War Ballads," "Ballads of Cowboys and
Pioneers," "Ballads of Lumberjacks," "Ballads of
Sailors," "Ballads about Criminals and Outlaws,"
"Murder Ballads," "Ballads of Tragedies and
Disasters," "Ballads on Various Topics," and "Bal-
lads of the Negro." The second appendix gives a
similar treatment to ballads about whose currency
the author is doubtful. There follow lists of tradi-
tional songs which, for want of strong narrative
elements or for other reasons, fail to qualify as bal-
lads, and lists of songs of probable Old-World origin.
Together with T. P. Coffin's The British Traditional
Ballad in North America (no. 5550) and Mr. Laws'
American Balladry from British Broadsides (Phila-
delphia, American Folklore Society, 1957. 315 p.
Publications of the . . . Society. Bibliographical
and special series, v. 8), this work completes a gen-
eral bibliographical survey of living American bal-
ladry undertaken by the American Folklore Society.
5557. Lomax, John A. Adventures of a ballad
hunter. Sketches by Ken Chamberlain.
New York, Macmillan, 1947. 302 p.
47-30155 ML429.U68A3
John Avery Lomax (1872-1948) began to collect
and study the traditional songs of America's frontier
in his youth during the closing decades of the last
century — long before most Americans regarded their
folk music and literature as of any importance. On
the advice of one of his professors, the disillusioned
young Lomax destroyed his first collection of cow-
boy song and ballad texts as worthless. It was not
until Lomax went to Harvard and attracted the
attention of Barrett Wendell and George Lyman
Kittredge that his efforts were recognized. The rest
of his life was devoted to gathering songs from
Western prairies and saloons, Southern fields and
prison camps, and many other areas of America.
His extensive collection became the nucleus of the
Archive of Folk Song in the Library of Congress.
Adventures of a Ballad Hunter is only secondarily
an autobiography; primarily it is a record of Lomax's
many years' experience as a collector of folk music.
Huddie "Leadbelly" Ledbetter, James "Iron Head"
Baker, Dock Reed, and Vera Hall are a few of the
folk-singing personalities whom Lomax discovered
and who appear in its pages. It is written in an in-
formal style which makes it attractive to general
readers as well as to students who wish to benefit
from the author's experience in the field.
5558. Lomax, John A., comp. American ballads
and folk songs, collected and compiled by
John A. Lomax and Alan Lomax; with a foreword
by George Lyman Kittredge. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1935. xxxix, 625 p.
38-9495 M1629.L85A52
Bibliography compiled by Harold W. Thompson:
p. 613-621.
The nearly 300 pieces in this popular collection
(originally published in 1934) represent a wide
variety of spirituals, white and Negro, as well as a
large assortment of ballads; lyric and social songs;
songs of the cowboy, lumberman, sailor, and miner;
and the Negro's work songs, hollers, and blues. A
few venture beyond the English language, being
samples of Creole Negro and Spanish-American
802 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
lyrics. The principal source is the oral tradition it-
self, from which the Lomaxes made sound record-
ings, but a few of the songs are taken from other
published collections. For the sake of completeness
the editors have made up some of the texts by
putting together stanzas from more than one source.
The tunes, transcribed by Mary E. Gresham, are
presented without instrumental arrangements or
harmonizations. An important complementary col-
lection by the same authors is Our Singing Country;
a Second Volume of American Ballads and Fol\
Songs (New York, Macmillan, 1941. xxxiv, 416
p.). Here the topics are approximately the same as
in the earlier volume, with the addition of some un-
usual items such as Negro songs from the Bahamas,
French songs and ballads from southwestern
Louisiana, and instrumental dance tunes. The
tunes for the later book were transcribed by Mrs.
Ruth Crawford Seeger, who supplies a noteworthy
introduction on the principles of authentic transcrip-
tion and performance.
5559. Lomax, John A., comp. Best loved Ameri-
can folk songs (Folk song: U.S.A.) Col-
lected, adapted, and arr. by John A. Lomax & Alan
Lomax. Music arrangements by Charles Seeger &
Ruth Seeger. [4th ed.] New York, Grosset &
Dunlap, 1954, ci947- xvi, 407 p.
M54-2021 M1629.L85F6 1954
First published in 1947 under the title Fol\ Song:
U. S. A., this collection has since enjoyed a steady
popularity. Intended as an album for singing, Best
Loved American Fol^ Songs differs from the au-
thors' earlier collections by the inclusion of piano
accompaniments and a somewhat larger format.
John Lomax and his son Alan selected what they
considered the 111 best American folksongs. The
categories into which they are divided are songs of
children and animals, lovers, dancers, soldiers, sail-
ors, lumbermen and pioneers, cowboys, farmers,
railroadmen, bad men and jailbirds, and spirituals.
The emphasis is strongly on native American ma-
terials rather than imported British or foreign-
language songs. Mr. and Mrs. Seeger have ar-
ranged the music for voice and piano, with guitar
symbols, in a simple folk-like style. Songs as well
as sections are provided with informative introduc-
tions.
5560. Lomax, John A., comp. Cowboy songs and
other frontier ballads. Rev. and enl. Col-
lected by John A. Lomax and Alan Lomax. Edward
N. Waters, music editor. New York, Macmillan,
1945. xxxviii, 431 p.
46-1145 PS595.C6L6 1945
M1629.L85C7 1945
The first edition of John Lomax's Cowboy Songs
appeared in 19 10. Since then it has undergone a
number of printings and, in the present revised
form, remains an indispensable source on the songs
of the West. "Home on the Range," "The Buffalo
Skinners," and "The Dreary Black Hills" are a few
of the songs which this historic collection first
brought to public attention. The improvements in
the present edition are many. There are nearly
twice as many songs. The rather haphazard ar-
rangement of the first edition has been replaced by
a subject-function classification with such headings
as "Up the Train," "The Round-Up," "Dodge City,
the End of the Trail," and "Campfire and Bunk-
house." The former practice of supplying piano
accompaniment for the few melodies has been dis-
carded by the music editor, Edward N. Waters, in
favor of printing the melodies unaccompanied.
This accomplishes the twofold purpose of allowing
space for more music and freeing the songs from
arbitrary harmonic confines.
5561. Odum, Howard W., and Guy B. Johnson.
The Negro and his songs; a study of typical
Negro songs in the South. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press, 1925. 306 p.
25-i3744 ML3556.O3
This study is one of a series on the story of the
American Negro, which also includes the same
authors' Negro Workaday Songs (1926. 278 p.)
and Newbell Niles Puckett's Fol\ Beliefs of the
Southern Negro (1926. xiv, 644 p.), both from
the same publisher. The Negro and His Songs
studies the Negro singer and his religious, social,
and work songs. The song texts and the Negro's
attitude toward them are analyzed with particular
emphasis on their sociological significance. No
music is included, but there are texts of more than
two hundred songs, and an index to them.
5562. Sandburg, Carl, ed. The American song-
bag. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927.
xxiii, 495 p. illus. 28-681 M1629.S213A5
"An American bookshelf of song": p. xii-xiii.
In his introduction, Carl Sandburg calls this col-
lection "a ragbag of strips, stripes, and streaks of
color." This assemblage of "280 songs, ballads,
ditties, brought together from all regions of Amer-
ica," was for the benefit of everyone who enjoys
singing and, even though 30 years and many other
similar collections have come and gone since it first
appeared, The American Songbag is still foremost
in the affections of those who sing for relaxation
and delight. All manner of songs are included;
there are the ancient "Tarnished Love Tales": "Bar-
bara Allen," "Pretty Polly," and "The Maid Freed
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 803
from the Gallows"; several musical installments of
the saga of "Frankie and Her Man"; the shape-note
hymns from The Missouri Harmony; and the
"Darned Fool Ditties"; "The Horse Named Bill"
and "Abdul, the Bulbul Ameer." Soldiers and sail-
ors, lumbermen and railroad men, convicts and
hobos, and many more groups have contributed to
the making of The American Songbag. The piano
arrangements have been made by a number of dif-
ferent musicians in varying styles, while a few of
the songs are appropriately left unaccompanied.
5563. Seeger, Ruth (Crawford) American folk
songs for children in home, school and nurs-
ery school; a book for children, parents and teach-
ers. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1948. 190 p.
48-9384 M1629.S4A5
Both as a mother and a teacher, the late Ruth
Crawford Seeger had a great deal of firsthand ex-
perience in using folk music in the development and
education of young children. More concerned with
such applications than with folklore research, Mrs.
Seeger's detailed notes discuss the use of the songs
at home and in school, and include suggestions for
improvised games and the playing of the piano ac-
companiments. The songs come both from pre-
viously published collections and direcdy from the
oral tradition. They are indexed not only by first
line and title, but by subject (birds, food, snow,
sunshine, etc.) and rhythmic applications (clapping,
running, skipping, etc.). Both this collection and
two supplementary ones, Animal Folf{ Songs for
Children (Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1950.
80 p.), and American Fo/^ Songs for Christmas
(Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1953. 80 p.), are
illustrated with woodcuts by Barbara Cooney, and
arranged with simple and idiomatic piano accom-
paniments by Mrs. Seeger. The three collections
have become popular with adults as well as chil-
dren.
5564. White, Newman I. American Negro folk-
songs. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1928. 501 p. 28-21279 ML3556.W4
Bibliography: p. [469]~48o.
The large number of song texts and documentary
notes make this one of the most useful works on
Afro-American folksong. The first chapter out-
lines the history of Negro music in America, with
special emphasis on the changing attitudes of the
white man, as well as the Negro, toward the music.
Although there have been many significant contri-
butions to Negro folksong scholarship since 1928,
the late Professor White's summary of the several
views obtaining up to that time is still a concise
and pertinent introduction to the subject. In the
controversy over ancestral African versus Christian
white influences, the author tends to favor the side
of New World assimilation later championed by
George Pullen Jackson (no. 5554), and takes issue
with the racial views earlier set forth by Henry
Edward Krehbiel in his important study, Afro-
American Folksongs (New York, Schirmer, 1914.
176 p.). The songs and commentary are arranged
according to function ("Religious Songs," "Social
Songs," "Work Songs"), and subject matter
("Songs about Women," "Songs about Animals,"
"Recent Events," "The Seamier Side"), with a few
special categories reflecting social trends ("The Re-
action from Religion," "Race Consciousness").
White's main concern was with the texts of the
songs, and his conclusions are based on the literary
rather than the musical aspects of the songs. The
appendixes include 15 tunes, however, in addition
to some interesting specimens of Negro folksong
texts from pre-Civil War sources.
D. Folksongs and Ballads: Local
5565. Arnold, Byron, comp. Folksongs of Ala-
bama. University, Ala., University of Ala-
bama Press, 1950. 193 p.
50-14684 M1629.A77F6
Bibliography: p. 187-188.
Mr. Arnold collected the 153 songs in this book
from Alabama singers during the summer of 1945.
In his introduction and notes the editor describes a
relatively current oral song tradition, whose rich-
ness is well proved by the songs themselves. Un-
like most folksong collections, which group the
songs in historical perspective or classify them ac-
cording to plot or function, the present work focuses
its attention on the singers. Mr. Arnold treats each
singer individually, sketching his background and,
in many cases, including a photograph. He follows
with a selection from the singer's repertory, in the
order in which they were sung to him. By this
method not only the informants, but the social char-
acteristics of this folk-song-producing area, are
clearly oudined. The wide diversity in social, eco-
nomic, and educational status represented by the
singers is noteworthy. The songs, for all of which
tunes are provided, represent some of the most wide-
8o4 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
spread ballads of British and native origin, together
with a sampling of standard play-party songs and
Negro spirituals.
5566. Barry, Phillips, Fannie Hardy Eckstorm,
and Mary Winslow Smyth. British ballads
from Maine; the development of popular songs with
texts and airs; versions of ballads included in Pro-
fessor F. J. Child's collection. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1929. xlvi, 535 p.
29-20553 ML3553.B28
PR1181.B48
Phillips Barry (1 880-1937) was one of the earli-
est and most learned pioneers in American folksong
scholarship. Although most of his work centered
around the British ballad in New England, the
many articles he contributed to periodicals such as
the Journal of American Folklore, the Bulletin of
the Fol\-Song Society of the Northeast (of which
he was founder and editor), and the Southern Folk-
lore Quarterly, cover a wide range of investigation.
He never wrote a general book on American folk
music, but some of his articles provided the mate-
rial for such a work after his death. Edited by Dr.
George Herzog and Herbert Halpert, Barry's Fol\
Music in America (New York, U. S. Works Prog-
ress Administration, Federal Theatre Project, 1939.
113 p.) was distributed in mimeographed form and,
despite its comparative rarity today, remains a much-
used work of scholarly theory and reference. Fifty-
six Child ballads, with variants, make up the major
portion of British Ballads from Maine, which Barry
prepared with collaborators. In addition to these,
there are eight ballads which the editors describe
as "secondary" — distinct ballads related to or de-
rived from Child ballads (see no. 5550 note).
"Traces" or vestiges of some ballads in the memory
of the region's inhabitants, with "jury texts" sup-
plied by the editors, are separated from the more or
less complete ballads actually collected, and placed
in the final section of the book. The notes, which
are both historical and analytical, are informative
and detailed. Most of the melodies were tran-
scribed by Dr. George Herzog. Barry's introduc-
tory essay discusses the music of the ballads, with
attention to such stylistic features of ballad melody
as mode and structure.
5567. Beck, Earl Clifton. Lore of the lumber
camps. [Rev. and enl. ed. Ann Arbor]
University of Michigan Press, 1948. 348 p. illus.
(University of Michigan studies and publications)
49-7123 M1977.L8B4 1948
Bibliography: p. 343-344.
For the greater part of the 19th century, the
Michigan woods were the center of America's log-
ging industry. In the 1830's, 40's, and 50's, lum-
bermen took part in the general Westward mi-
gration and brought to the forests around the
Great Lakes the songs, legends, and traditions of
the New England lumber woods. The present
book is a revised enlargement of Dr. Beck's Songs
of the Michigan Lumberjacks (1941), but the em-
phasis is still on songs and on Michigan. Of the
118 songs and ballads which describe the work,
the leisure, the tragedy, and the humor of the lum-
berman's life, 23 are provided with music. The
final chapter recounts some of the jacks' favorite
tall tales, including several redoubtable exploits of
Paul Bunyan. The literature on lumberjack songs
is small; Franz L. Rickaby's earlier Ballads and
Songs of the Shanty boy (Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1926. xli, 244 p.) and Phillips
Barry's The Maine Woods Songster (Cambridge,
Powell Print. Co., 1939. 102 p.) supplement Dr.
Beck's Michigan collection. An introduction on
the history of Michigan's lumber industry, concise
descriptive headnotes for each song, and a profu-
sion of photographs and drawings of log brands
add considerably to the book's usefulness.
5568. Belden, Henry Marvin, ed. Ballads and
songs collected by the Missouri Folklore
Society. [2d ed. Columbia, University of Mis-
souri] 1955. xx, 532 p. (University of Missouri
studies, v. 15, no. 1)
55-7519 ML3551.B35B26 1955
5569. Randolph, Vance, ed. Ozark folksongs,
collected and edited by Vance Randolph;
edited for the State Historical Society of Missouri,
by Floyd C. Shoemaker [and] Frances G. Ember-
son. Columbia, State Historical Society of Mis-
souri, 1946-50. 4 v. illus.
47-1554 M1629.R2309
Bibliography: p. xvi-xx.
In collaboration with the Missouri Folk-Lore So-
ciety, the late Professor Belden (1 865-1954) and
his pupils began collecting the material represented
in the first title in 1903. The result of many years
of field work and transcription is one of the most
valuable of the scholarly collections devoted to a
specific region. The book was originally published
in 1940; the second edition incorporates a few cor-
rections and additions which Belden had made in
his personal copy. More than 300 songs were found
in all parts of Missouri, representing a wide va-
riety of traditions. As has become customary, the
first part of the collection is devoted to Missouri
versions of the Child ballads (see no. 5550 note),
and the next to other ballads of British origin. The
later journalistic ballads, topical songs, and other
indigenous items are treated at length, and chil-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 805
dren's games and play-party songs, religious songs,
and a few songs imported into southeastern Mis-
souri from France round out the geographical and
stylistic representation. Professor Belden was pri-
marily concerned with texts, but realized the vital
role of music in the ballads and included some
tunes which had been transcribed by his students.
Vance Randolph's Ozar\ Folksongs complements
Belden's volume with an exhaustive collection from
the highlands of Missouri and Arkansas. Contain-
ing 883 songs in 1644 versions, 828 of which are
given with unaccompanied melodies, these four
impressive volumes prove to be the largest of all
published American folksong collections, regional
or general. Concerned with ballads and songs of
British origin, the first volume prints the Ozark
versions of 41 Child ballads and of 89 later im-
portations. The succeeding volumes deal with na-
tive songs and ballads of the West, the Civil War,
and the Negro, and temperance songs, game and
play-party songs, and religious songs. A general
introductory chapter in the first volume prescribes
effective procedures in the technique and diplo-
macy of field collecting, a topic on which the author
is a high-ranking expert. Substantial headnotes to
the songs supply general background and bibliog-
raphy. The last volume concludes with indexes
of titles, first lines, towns, and contributors.
5570. Botkin, Benjamin A. The American play-
party song, with a collection of Oklahoma
texts and tunes. Lincoln, Neb., 1937. 400 p.
38-1348 GV1771.B58 1937
Thesis (Ph. D.)-University of Nebraska, 1931.
Published also as the University Studies of the
University of Nebraska, vol. 37, no. 1-4.
Bibliography: p. 383-389.
The play-party is a completely American term
designating a peculiarly American institution. In
the preface Dr. Botkin points out that although
dance-songs are well-nigh universal, there is noth-
ing quite like the play-party outside of America.
Several factors went into its making. Fiddles, fifes,
and other musical instruments were often scarce
items on the American frontier, so that dance music
had to be provided by the dancers' own voices.
True dancing, however, was taboo because of the
religious beliefs of many of the pioneers. The sim-
ple rhythmic stepping, skipping, running, and
jumping patterns of the play-party provided a vig-
orous sort of recreation which took the place of
dancing. The first half of The American Play-
Party Song is a detailed historical and stylistic
analysis. Dr. Botkin carefully traces the play-
party's connection with game, song, and dance, and
points out the improvisatory elements of the texts,
which intermingle snatches from traditional ballads
and songs with incongruous bits of square-dance
calls, spontaneous jingles, and nonsense syllables.
Part two is devoted to 128 play-party song texts,
62 of them with tunes. Dr. Botkin gathered his
material in Oklahoma, but his findings and ex-
amples have nationwide application and signifi-
cance. The notes accompanying the songs and
their variants give full data on the informants,
directions for playing the games, and bibliographi-
cal references. Tunes, tides, first lines, subjects,
and authorities are meticulously indexed, making
this a valuable reference book as well as a defini-
tive study of a neglected aspect of American folk
recreation.
5571. Brewster, Paul G., ed. Ballads and songs
of Indiana. Bloomington, Indiana Univer-
sity, 1940. 376 p. (Indiana University publication.
Folklore series, 1) 40-28299 PS571.I6B7
ML3551.B83B2
Bibliography: p. 16-21.
Although Mr. Brewster observes that "ballad-
singing, as an active tradition, is practically non-
existent in Indiana," this collection from one of
America's less isolated regions indicates that con-
siderable vestiges of such a tradition have survived.
Of the 100 pieces the first 27 are Child ballads (see
no. 5550 note), with numerous variants. The
other types included are later ballads and lyric
songs, of both British and native origin, game songs,
and a carol — "The Twelve Days of Christmas."
Most of Mr. Brewster's collecting was done in the
southern part of the State, and all of the songs are
from white, Anglo-Saxon tradition. There are 37
unaccompanied tunes.
5572. Cox, John Harrington, ed. Folk-songs of
the South, collected under the auspices of
the West Virginia Folk-Lore Society. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1925. xxxi, 545 p.
25-4180 PS551.C6
ML3561.C8
Although the tide and much of the material in
the collection apply to the South in general, this
collection is focused upon West Virginia, where Dr.
Cox was a professor. The introduction describes
the formation of the West Virginia Folk-Lore So-
ciety and its collecting activities preparatory to the
publication of this book. About 35 of the 185
songs are Child ballads (see no. 5550 note). These
figures do not take into account the numerous ver-
sions of many songs and ballads which are in-
cluded. Miss Lydia I. Hinkel of West Virginia
University edited the 29 tunes which are appended
to the collection (p. 519-532). Photographs of
8o6 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
many of the informants are included which, to-
gether with some introductory remarks about them,
allow us to see the ballad-singers of the area as
real persons.
5573. Eddy, Mary O., comp. Ballads and songs
from Ohio. Introd. by James Holly Han-
ford. New York, J. }. Augustin, 1939. xxvii,
330 p. 39-25130 M1629.E24B2
Bibliography: p. xxv-xxvii.
For the most part this collection is based on an
intensive study of a relatively small area of north-
eastern Ohio. The author collected the songs and
ballads from oral and manuscript sources in her
hometown of Perrysville, Ashland County, and in
Canton, Stark County. In the light of the geo-
graphical limitation, the collection is remarkably
large and varied. The various ethnic groups which
settled the area are discussed in the preface, which
also briefly outlines the history of the region. The
proportion of British ballads is large, including par-
ticularly good versions of "Lamkin" (ballad 93 in
Child's collection) and "The Bramble Briar." Still
more unusual are the early native American topical
ballads, "Major Andrew's Execution," about the
death of Major John Andre during the American
Revolution, and two local ballads recording Indian
battles of the 1780's and 90's: "A Song on the Death
of Colonel Crafford" and "On the Eighth Day of
November." The more recent lyric songs include a
good selection of Irish imports. There are 153 songs
in the collection, most of them with melodies. Pro-
fessor Hanford's introduction discusses folksong in
general terms and briefly traces its study from Bishop
Percy, in the 18th century, to John A. Lomax and
other collectors of our own day.
5574. Flanders, Helen (Hartness), and Marguerite
Olney, comps. Ballads migrant in New
England. With an introd. by Robert Frost. New
York, Farrar, Straus & Young, 1953. xiv, 248 p.
M53-552 M1629.F58B3
The rich store of ballads from Vermont and other
New England States now preserved in the Helen
Hartness Flanders Collection at Middlebury College
has provided material for a number of valuable
books by Mrs. Flanders and, more recently, for re-
cordings as well. Several factors make the present
collection distinctive. More than half of the contents
are Child ballads (see no. 5550 note), and there are
some unusual ones. "Babylon," "The Bonny Earl
of Murray," "Adam Gorman," and two Robin Hood
ballads have been reported in the United States
rarely or never. There are, moreover, local ballads
such as "Kingston Jail" which are seldom found
elsewhere. Mrs. Flanders describes the arrange-
ment of the book as a "vagantes" procedure, with
the songs ordered much as the collectors found
them instead of according to Child numbers, etc.
In this way, the collectors' experience of acquiring
the material here and there, with indirection and
interruption, is in a measure imparted to the reader.
The occasional commentary, with elements of his-
torical background and personal association, also
helps the reader "to share vicariously the excitement
of ballad-hunting." In keeping with a book de-
signed for general reading rather than scholarly
reference, the documentation and bibliographical
notes are minimal. The melodies were transcribed
by Miss Olney who shared in the original collecting.
A brief introduction by Robert Frost describes in
poetic fashion the nature of oral tradition.
5575. Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth, and Geraldine
Jencks Chickering, eds. Ballads and songs
of southern Michigan. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Press, 1939. xviii, 501 p. illus.
39-28434 M1629.G23B18
Bibliography: p. 491-494.
The 201 songs and ballads in this collection were
culled from 7 Michigan counties over a period of
about 25 years. The material is organized accord-
ing to subject: "Unhappy Love," "Happy Love,"
"War," "Occupations" (where the Michigan lum-
berjacks figure prominently), "Disasters," "Crimes,"
"Religion," "Humor," and "The Nursery." Within
each category the songs are arranged in a more or
less chronological order, with the Child ballads (see
no. 5550 note) at the beginning of each section.
Melodies are provided for about a fourth of the
collection, and the headnotes give historical and
collecting data. The tides of other songs which the
collectors found in Michigan are appended, with
sources (p. 477-483). The volume's general attrac-
tiveness is enhanced by line drawings of rural Mid-
western scenes.
5576. Hudson, Arthur Palmer. Folksongs of
Mississippi and their background. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1936.
321 p. 36-23296 ML3551.H81936
PS571.M7H8
As its tide implies, Professor Hudson's collection
devotes much attention to a study of the peoples
and backgrounds which have preserved the white
folk-music tradition in Mississippi. The first quar-
ter of the book, specifically concerned with back-
grounds, asserts the predominance of British and
Irish groups, a thesis which is borne out by the clear
British-Isles lineage of the collected songs. Finding
three social and economic levels among the first
Mississippi immigrants, Professor Hudson credits
both the planter aristocrats and the humble tillers of
the poorest soil with a knowledge and love of the
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 807
traditional ballads of their common heritage, but
reserves for the middle group, the small landholders,
the greatest share in the importation and perpetua-
tion of the tradition. The songs themselves include
imported folksongs, with a rich supply of Child
(see no. 5550 note) ballad variants; native American
songs, subdivided according to regional origins and
subject matter; and a miscellaneous group of comic,
nursery, play-party, and game songs. Financial lim-
itation prevented the publishers from printing the
tunes which Dr. Hudson collected with the song
texts, but, with the editorial assistance of Dr. George
Herzog and Herbert Halpert, they were later pub-
lished in a mimeographed volume, Fol\ Tunes from
Mississippi (New York, U. S. Works Progress Ad-
ministration, Federal Theatre Project, 1937. 45,
xxiil.).
5577. Jackson, George Pullen. White spirituals in
the Southern uplands; the story of the fasola
folk, their songs, singing, and "buckwheat notes."
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1933. xv, 444 p. illus. 33-3792 ML3551.J2
Bibliography: p. 434-436; "List of song books in
the four-shape notation": p. [25]; "Important seven-
shape song books . . . 1832 . . . [to] 1878":
p. 323; "Southern musical periodicals": p. 389.
The part-singing movement in colonial New Eng-
land gave rise to a tradition of religious song which
lasted through the 19th century and which, in a
few rural areas, still continues. This, the first of
Professor Jackson's many studies of the subject, tells
how the singing movement evolved its character-
istic "buckwheat" notation system, with differendy
shaped noteheads representing different pitches, and
ultimately moved from the urban centers to the
young Republic's Western frontiers — down the
Shenandoah Valley and across the Appalachians.
The book gives a large number of song texts and
tunes, but differs from Jackson's other white spirit-
ual books in that it is primarily a history rather
than a collection. Folk tradition though it was,
the white spiritual was perpetuated not only by
word of mouth, but by the many songbooks, pub-
lished in various systems of "buckwheat" notes,
which were used by many in the Southern High-
lands. Some of the most celebrated and enduring
songbooks were "Singin' Billy" Walker's Southern
Harmony (1843), an<^ B. F. White and E. J. King's
The Sacred Harp (1844), both in the old "fasola,"
four-shaped notation; and the Harp of Columbia,
which W. H. and M. L. Swan published in 1848,
1 employing the city-influenced seven-shaped system.
The numerous books of this sort, and the men who
made them, form a significant part of Dr. Jackson's
, history. The melodies are analyzed in detail, and
classification according to tune, text, and function
is discussed. A chapter on the Negro spiritual
compares texts and melodies from the white and
Negro traditions and oudines the problems which
the author was later to treat at length in his White
and Negro Spirituals (no. 5555).
5578. Korson, George G., ed. Minstrels of the
mine patch; songs and stories of the anthra-
cite industry. Philadelphia, University of Penn-
sylvania Press, 1938. 322 p.
39-958 PS508.M5K6
M1629.K84M5
Bibliography: p. 321-325.
In the introduction to this book, Mr. Korson tells
of his first experiences with the traditional song lit-
erature of the Pennsylvania anthracite miners, and
his surprise at finding that it was an area of folk
music which, unlike the songs of lumbermen, cow-
boys, and sailors, had gone virtually unnoticed.
Songs and Ballads of the Anthracite Miner (New
York, F. H. Hitchcock, 1927. xxviii, 196 p.) was
his first attempt to rectify this situation. Mr. Kor-
son has gone on to publish other books on the songs
of the American coalminers and has thereby opened
a whole important field of study in American folk-
lore. Minstrels of the Mine Patch is a gready en-
larged edition of the earlier book of anthracite min-
ers' songs. The "mine patch" of the title is the
small village of shacks which grew up on the min-
ing site, around a "breaker," the building in which
anthracite is processed. The earliest miners hav-
ing been Irish, Welsh, Scottish, or English immi-
grants, Mr. Korson found that a majority of their
songs were in the English language, with a par-
ticularly strong Irish element in the musical style.
He also found effects of the later Slavic immigra-
tions. In addition to the songs and ballads, for
which a few tunes are included, the author relates
many tales, legends, and superstitions of the miners,
and describes disasters, strikes, and the notorious ex-
ploits of the "Molly Maguires," all of which figure
importandy in the miners' songs and lore. The
appendixes give biographical sketches of the singers
and, many of the ballads having been of known au-
thorship, the creators of the miners' songs, together
with a glossary of technical terms and jargon. Mr.
Korson went on to produce a complementary study:
Coal Dust on the Piddle; Songs and Stories of the
Bituminous Industry (Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1943. xvi, 460 p.), which is
considerably larger in its geographical scope.
Whereas the anthracite industry is centralized in a
small area of Pennsylvania, Mr. Korson's search for
material on the bituminous industry took him to
Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Kentucky, Alabama, Ten-
nessee, Virginia, and West Virginia as well as his
home State. As in the anthracite study, the author
8o8 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
here combines the songs, tales, and superstitions of
the miners with an absorbing account of the history
of the bituminous mine-worker in America. Once
again the tragic lives of the miners, mine disasters,
and labor-management troubles figure importantly
in Mr. Korson's account and in the songs. Thir-
teen of the songs appear with tunes, as transcribed
by Ruth Crawford Seeger.
5579. Korson, George G., ed. Pennsylvania songs
and legends. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 474 p. illus.
49-9849 ML3551.K85
The variety of ethnic and occupational groups
comprising Pennsylvania's population make the
State something of a microcosm of the United States
as a whole, and this book a summing up of many
aspects of American folklore. After the initial Eng-
lish colonization, the 18th-century immigrants in-
cluded peoples from other parts of the British Isles
and from Northern and Western Europe, including
a large body of Germans — the so-called "Pennsyl-
vania Dutch." The editor's introduction describes
these early groups and the later immigrants from
Southern and Eastern Europe, emphasizing the con-
tributions each has made to the Pennsylvania folk
tradition. The essays which follow are detailed
studies of 13 specialized phases of Pennsylvania
folksong and lore, each by a notable authority on
the subject. Several ethnic groups are examined,
including the area's aboriginal inhabitants, whose
descendants still retain their identity and ancient
lore. The legends and tales of several groups are
presented, as well as their songs. The occupational
groups included are the Conestoga wagoners, canal-
lers, railroaders, lumberjacks and raftsmen, coal-
miners, and oilmen. The industrial songs of Pitts-
burgh bring the occupational studies up to the pres-
ent time. The chapters dealing with music have
numerous song texts and airs.
5580. Linscott, Eloise Hubbard, ed. Folk songs
of old New England. New York, Mac-
millan, 1939. xxi, 337 p.
40-27042 M1629.L64F7
"References": p. 319-337.
Many familiar British and American ballads and
lyric songs, as well as some which are less familiar,
are given in this large collection of New England
songs and tunes, but it is in the area of country
dance tunes and game songs that Miss Linscott's
book offers the greatest amount of fresh material.
The words and music are accompanied by descrip-
tions of how the games and dances are executed.
Some of these are to be found in other local collec-
tions, but many appear to be rare outside of New
England. In addition to these a fourth section deals
with popular sea shanties and fo 'castle songs. The
headnotes for each song or tune detail the author's
sources and give some historic background. Nearly
200 tunes are included, most of them arranged with
piano accompaniment. The appendixes include
biographical data on Miss Linscott's singers, fid-
dlers, and dance-callers.
5581. Morris, Alton Chester, ed. Folksongs of
Florida. Musical transcriptions by Leon-
hard Deutsch. Gainesville, University of Florida
Press, 1950. xvi, 464 p. illus.
50-9048 M1629.M858
Bibliography: p. 451-457.
Following a procedure similar to A. P. Hudson's
in his Folksongs of Mississippi (no. 5576), Profes-
sor Morris prefaces this State collection with a valu-
able study of the social, cultural, and folkloristic
history of the region. The first section, "Songs of
the New World," includes a number of unique lo-
cal items such as "The West Palm Beach Storm"
and the "Miami Hairikin." The cowboy and lum-
berjack songs, however, must have traveled long
distances before reaching Florida. A large num-
ber of English and Scottish ballads, both in and out
of the Child canon, are represented in "Songs of the
Old World." A special rarity, never previously
reported in the United States, is "Lord Derwent-
water" (ballad 208 in Child's collection), called by
Professor Morris' informant "The King's Love Let-
ter." Bahaman versions of British songs, a Negro
rowing song, and an American Indian version of a
white hymn are a few of the other items of special
interest. Condensed from Professor Morris' doc-
toral dissertation, Folksongs of Florida is still a large
and comprehensive collection, totaling 243 songs
plus variants. A number of unaccompanied tunes
are included.
5582. Scarborough, Dorothy. A song catcher in
Southern mountains; American folk songs
of British ancestry. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1937. xvi, 476 p. illus.
37-4992 M1629.S29S6
On one of Dorothy Scarborough's trips into the
Blue Ridge, a young mountain boy recommended
a friend as a good source of local ballads: "He's a
song catcher, he is." The term applied so well
to Miss Scarborough and her quest that she adopted
it and employed it in the title of this book. A
Song Catcher in Southern Mountains was nearly
finished at the time of Miss Scarborough's death
in 1935, and was prepared for publication by John
H. H. Lyon and Vernon Loggins. The first part
describes collecting experiences in the Blue Ridge
Mountains, Buchanan County, Virginia, and west-
ern North Carolina. These colorful background
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 809
chapters form an attractive introduction to the
Anglo-American ballads and songs which occupy
the major part of the book. Appended to the col-
lected ballad texts are unaccompanied tunes and a
discussion of the modal aspects of the music. Miss
Scarborough's last work does for the people of the
Southern Appalachians what her On the Trail of
Negro Fol^-Songs (Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1925. 289 p.) had done with the secu-
lar songs of Southern Negroes.
5583. Sharp, Cecil J., comp. English folk songs
from the Southern Appalachians; compris-
ing two hundred and seventy-three songs and bal-
lads with nine hundred and sixty-eight tunes, in-
cluding thirty-nine tunes contributed by Olive
Dame Campbell. Edited by Maud Karpeles. Lon-
don, Oxford University Press, H. Milford, 1932.
2 v. 33-3796 M1629.S53E6 1932
Bibliography: v. 1, p. 427-430; v. 2, p. 402-405.
At a time when the ballad and other forms of folk
music were considered the domain of students of
literature, ethnology, and folklore, Cecil Sharp
(1859-1924) began a more musically oriented ap-
proach to the subject. With careful attention to
the transcription of the melodies, Sharp first cov-
ered his native England and the rest of the British
Isles, and the» followed the British songs across
the Atlantic. With the assistance of Miss Maud
Karpeles, who took down the words while he no-
tated the music, Sharp spent parts of 191 6, 19 17,
and 19 1 8 studying the British traditional songs
preserved by the mountain people of the South-
eastern United States. In addition to the material
gathered by Sharp and Karpeles, English Fol\
Songs from the Southern Appalachians prints 39
tunes, with texts, which Olive Dame Campbell had
collected in the region between 1907 and 1910.
First published as a single volume in 1917, the col-
lection was reissued in its present enlarged form
after Sharp's death, but still based on his transcrip-
tions. It was reprinted in 1952, with an additional
prefatory note by Miss Karpeles describing the
changes she had observed in the area during a
1951 field trip. The first volume contains ballads,
and the second songs, hymns, nursery songs, jigs,
and play-party games. Both the editor's preface
and Sharp's introduction give special attention to
the stylistic characteristics of the melodies, which
are printed with the song texts. The introduction
also gives a general description of the region and
the ethnic background of its inhabitants.
5584. Thomas, Jeannette (Bell). Ballad makin'
in the mountains of Kentucky, by Jean
Thomas; with music arr. by Walter Kob. New
York, Holt, 1939. xviii, 270 p.
39-31805 ML3551.T4B2
Miss Jean Thomas has spent her life among the
people of the Kentucky highlands, and has brought
much of their music before the public by means of
her books and the annual folk festivals held at
her rustic cabin near Ashland. Known to her Ken-
tucky neighbors as "the traipsin' woman," Miss
Thomas traveled throughout the area both as a cir-
cuit judge's stenographer and as a ballad collector.
Emphasizing the native ballads of recent origin,
Ballad Mahjri describes the hill people who still
compose ballads and the events which inspired their
compositions. The chapters deal with the ballads
and their makers according to subject matter: feuds,
which the hill people usually call "troubles" or
"wars"; chanteys, composed by ballad makers who
have never even seen a large river; war, flood and
fire; the railroad; "stillin' and drinkin' "; "killin' ";
laments and farewells; and "hymn makin'." The
ballad makers and ballad subjects are illustrated by
photographs and the songs are printed in simple
piano arrangements.
E. Games and Dances
5585. Brewster, Paul G. American nonsinging
games. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1953. 218 p. illus. 53-5476 GV1203.B68
Students of folklore have long collected and
studied the traditional games of children as signifi-
cant vestiges of ancient beliefs, customs, and rituals.
The author points out, however, that most collec-
tors have emphasized singing games to the near ex-
clusion of those in which music figures slightly or
not at all. This large collection of nonsinging
games is an important step toward supplying the
earlier omissions. In an effort to make his mate-
rial useful to teachers and recreation leaders, as
well as to folklorists, Mr. Brewster separates his
description of each game from his ethnic and his-
torical analyses, bibliographical notes, and other
scholarly apparatus. The games, which he gath-
ered from students and friends, and other non-
8 10 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
literary sources, are presented in 14 general cate-
gories, including "Guessing Games," "Forfeit
Games," "Hiding Games," "Ball Games," "Paper
and Pencil Games," and "Courtship Games."
Many variants are included for the rope-jumping,
ball-bouncing, and other games, such as hopscotch,
nine versions of which are given.
5586. Chase, Richard, comp. Hullabaloo, and
other singing folk games. Illus. by Joshua
Tolford. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949. 57 p.
49-8127 GV1771.C5
Mr. Chase's foreword states that the "golden
age" for singing games falls between the years of
eight and eleven. The games and play-parties in
this collection seem to be directed toward children
in this group, but teen-agers in some areas continue
to find them of recreational value. The games
involve simple group steps and dramatic action,
taken from the traditional Midwestern play-parties,
and employ popular play-party songs which direct
the action of the group as it sings them. Many
of the games, such as "Goin' to Boston," "Pawpaw
Patch," and "Three Dukes," are still popular in
some parts of the country, while others, "The Allee
Allee O," recently collected in New England, and
the ancient British "Roman Soldiers," are seldom
heard. Mr. Chase's language and diagrams will be
easily understood by youngsters, and the tunes, six
of which are given piano settings by Hilton Rufty,
are in a simple singing style.
5587. Mayo, Margot. The American square
dance. Illus. by Selma Gorlin. [Rev. and
enl.] New York, Sentinel Books, 1948. 119 p.
48-8015 GV1763.M3 1948
Bibliography: p. n6-[i2o].
Miss Mayo's American Square Dance Group in
New York has for many years been an important
factor in the renewed urban interest in American
folk dancing. Her handbook is designed to give
useful hints to other organizations and individuals
wishing to join in an increasingly popular form of
recreation. The term "square dance" is used here
not to describe a particular form, but is applied
to American folk dances in general, including
square sets, quadrilles, longway sets, running sets,
play-party games, and round dances, each of which
is described. After some further hints on the
music, calling, and the general planning of a square-
dance party, 13 dances are described and their di-
rection indicated with the aid of illustrations. Also
included are an illustrated glossary of square-
dancing terms, 10 tunes in piano arrangements (p.
96-104), and suggestions for "Dancing to Recorded
Music" (p. 106-114).
5588. Newell, William Wells. Games and songs
of American children. New and enl. ed.
New York, Harper, 1903. xv, 282 p.
3-29283 GV1203.N54
M1993.N49
"Collections of children's games": p. [267J-269.
"Comparisons and references": p. 270-282.
Although the first edition of this collection ap-
peared as long ago as 1883, it is still generally recog-
nized as the standard source on the immense subject
of the folklore of children's games in America. An
introductory chapter describes the rhyme and chant
formulas which characterize a large part of chil-
dren's game lore, compares them with the ballad
and the dance, and speculates on their origins, which
in many cases are quite ancient, and their diffusion
in the Old and New Worlds. The author also took
into account the children themselves, contrasting
their resourcefulness in invention with their con-
servatism in the retention of old traditions: "The
formulas of play are as Scripture, of which no jot or
title is to be repealed." For these reasons, in the
absence of excessive organization by adults, the
game traditions of children are of particular interest
to students of stricdy orally transmitted custom.
Mr. NewelPs 15 basic chapters group the games
according to subject, function, and type of activity.
Among them are "Love-Games," "Histories," "The
Pleasures of Motion," and "Bafl, and Similar
Sports." Counting-out rhymes, the chants used to
determine who will be "it" at the beginning of a
game, are also accorded a generous chapter. In ad-
dition to quoting the rhymes, describing the play,
and, in many cases, providing the music for 190
games, Dr. NewelPs text makes some comments
upon the games' distribution here and abroad, and
on their origins. Added to this edition is a final
chapter of miscellaneous additional games and var-
iants, and a Preface offering further suggestions on
the Old- World origins of American games, making
particular reference to this book's British counter-
part, Lady Alice Gomme's The Traditional Games
of England, Scotland, and Ireland (London, D.
Nutt, 1894-98. 2 v.).
5589. Putney, Cornelia F. Square dance U. S. A.
Musical arrangements by Jessie B. Flood;
historical background and descriptive material by
Cornelia F. Putney. Dubuque, Iowa, W. C. Brown,
1955. no p. 55-4642 GV1763.P8
The square-dance revival, which continues to
grow in many parts of the country, has a continual
need for practical books offering new dances and
tunes, together with instructions on the fundamen-
tals of calling, playing, and execution. Although
there are some general historical notes by Prof.
Louise Pound and by the author, this book, con-
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 8ll
veniently published in a spiral binding, is meant for
application rather than study. There are hints for
the musicians, the callers, and the program plan-
ners, followed by a wide selection of dances and
tunes, some new and some traditional. Singing
calls, which have been popular in some parts of the
country for many years, are also included, with
their music. All of the music is given in simple
piano arrangements. A final section is devoted to
accounts of recent developments in the square-dance
revival in several parts of the country.
5590. Ryan, Grace L., comp. Dances of our pio-
neers. Music arrangement by Robert T.
Benford; ill us. by Brooks Emerson. New York, A.
S. Barnes, 1939. 196 p.
39-27508 M1629.R95 1939
The characteristic American quadrille whose
four-sided formation gives it the name of square
dance remains the favorite among the dances of our
pioneers, and so bulks gready in this collection as in
most others. Nevertheless, there are other group-
dance forms, notably the contra and circle dances
and, of course, the couple dances, which have long
enjoyed great popularity, particularly in the Eastern
States. These too play their part in this popular
book of instruction, which was originally published
in 1926. Among the contra dances are a variety
of reels and hornpipes, and the circles include the
popular hybrid Sicilian Circle and Paul Jones.
Some of the couple dances outlined are schottisches,
polkas, and waltzes. The directions are made plain
by drawings and diagrams, and an introductory
chapter defines the standard terms. There are over
two dozen tunes, in piano arrangements, and the
directions frequently cite appropriate calls.
5591. Shaw, Lloyd. Cowboy dances, a collection
of Western square dances; with a foreword
by Sherwood Anderson. Appendix, cowboy dance
tunes arr. by Frederick Knorr. Rev. ed. Caldwell,
Idaho, Caxton Printers, 1949. 417 p.
49-4858 GV1767.S5 1949
"Phonograph records": p. [395]— 413-
Lloyd Shaw has long been an active performer
and teacher of American country dancing and a
student of its history as well. Both aspects of his
experience are evident in this book on the folk
dances of the West. As in most recent books on
the square dance, practical considerations figure
importantly, and many square-dance enthusiasts will
benefit from the descriptions of 75 dances, some
with several variants, which are included and illus-
trated by diagrams and by photographs of Mr.
Shaw's popular cowboy-dance troupe. There is also
much historical and ethnic analysis. The first chap-
ter traces the distinctive Western square dances back
through the Kentucky running sets and the New
England quadrilles, eventually to European ances-
tors. Further notes observe the natural evolution
and adaptation which have characterized the unique
cowboy-dance forms, just as the Old World names,
Polka and Varsovienne, became "Pokey" and "Var-
sity Anna." In a companion volume, The Round
Dance Boo\ (Caldwell, Idaho, Caxton Printers,
1948. 443 p.), Mr. Shaw has made a similar prac-
tical and historical examination of other American
folk dances, including polkas, waltzes, schottisches,
and circle mixers.
5592. Withers, Carl, comp. A rocket in my
pocket, the rhymes and chants of young
Americans. Illus. by Susanne Suba. [New York]
Holt, 1948. 214 p. illus. 48-4881 PZ8.3.W76R0
This selection of varied rhymes and chants, taken
from the folklore of modern American children, is
designed primarily for the children themselves, but
Mr. Withers points out in his postscript that adults
too will find them entertaining and instructive.
From the first ("Silence in the courtroom !/The
monkey wants to speak") to the last ("If this book
should chance to roam,/Box its ears and send it
home"), virtually all of this children's lore was col-
lected directly from or verified in the oral tradition.
The 14 chapters include popular rhymes for ball-
bouncing, rope-jumping, and counting-out. Among
the mental exercises and tricks in which children
find constant delight are tongue twisters, spelling
rhymes, riddles, and finger-plays. Although no
music is provided, a few are meant to be sung ("The
Bear Went Over the Mountain," "The Green Grass
Grows All Around"), but most of the items are in
the rhyme and chant categories. Mr. Withers has
appended a brief note explaining his procedure in
gathering the material, suggesting ways in which it
might be used, and stressing the value of children's
folklore to educators, sociologists, and child psychol-
ogists. The contents are indexed, but for children's
rather than for scholars' use; there is no bibliogra-
phy or list of sources.
F. Folk Art and Crafts
5593. Bolton, Ethel (Stanwood), and Eva (John-
ston) Coe. American sampler. [Boston]
Massachusetts Society of the Colonial Dames of
America, 1 92 1. 416 p. 21-18488 NK9112.B6
814 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
poverty for freedom and, in time, a solid prosperity
earned by frugality and hard labor. The first half-
century of the province had little to show, but by
about 1750 the land had been conquered, the log
huts of the settlers had been replaced by substantial
stone houses most of which are still standing, and
decoration of a naive but distinctively original kind
was lavished upon all the objects of craftsmanship.
The second half of the 18th century was the great
age of this folk art; after 1800 designs became sim-
pler and labor less lavish; while after 1850 indus-
trialism destroyed it altogether. In 1891-92 Dr.
Edwin Atlee Barber made the finest collection of
Pennsylvania decorated ceramics for the Philadel-
phia Museum, but appreciations of its other achieve-
ments had to wait for the antique fever of the 1920's.
Miss Lichten, whose authority in the field was de-
veloped as supervisor of the Pennsylvania "Index of
American Design," arranges her book by the mate-
rials upon which the craftsmen worked, beginning
with clay, flax, and wool. Of exceptional interest
are "The Salvage Arts," which turned textile frag-
ments into quilts, and rags into rugs or into illumi-
nated paper. The illustrations are excellendy re-
produced, and accompanied by unusually satisfac-
tory explanatory letterpress. The concluding 30
pages reproduce a variety of original designs in their
original colors, always gay and often garish. Mr.
Stoudt's volume does not approach Miss Lichten's
in the quality of its numerous illustrations, but it
provides a valuable supplement by relating the im-
ages used in decoration to the symbolism of the
German Pietistic sects. "The motifs and designs
of the folk-art of Eastern Pennsylvania are non-rep-
resentational expressions of traditional Christian im-
agery." The rod of Jesse, the rose of Sharon, the
dove who is the believer languishing for the Savior,
the pelican who is Christ, and the peacock who
stands for the Resurrection are among the images
identified.
5601. Lipman, Jean (Herzberg). American prim-
itive painting. New York, Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1942. 158 p. 42-14277 ND205.L5
"Selected bibliography": p. 139-142.
Although American primitive painting is not
often regarded by folklorists as a branch of their
science, the anonymity of most of the artists and
the naivete of their style lead many observers to re-
gard their work as folk art. In the introduction
the author discusses the meaning of the word "prim-
itive" in the history of American art. Antiquity is
not an important factor, for the height of the prim-
itive school fell in the middle of the last century.
Nor is it determined by prevailing features of the
society as a whole. Rather the "primitiveness" of
such work lay in the artist's experience and atti-
tudes, and the effect which these had on his produc-
tions. The primitive painters, most of whom are
unknown by name, were unschooled in the classical
sense and developed independently of European
tradition. The result is akin to abstraction, for vis-
ual qualities are deemphasized in favor of geometric
forms, restricted movement, emphasized contour
lines, and heightened color-contrast. A group of
plates near the beginning of this book effectively
demonstrates the differing values of the academic
and primitive schools. Except for some historical
and analytical notes, the balance of the work is given
over to illustrations, some in color: portraits, land-
scapes, and various kinds of decorations, which
show the range of the primitive school. Mrs. Lip-
man has also published an important volume on
our relatively little known folk sculpture: American
Fol{ Art in Wood, Metal and Stone (New York,
Pantheon, 1948. 193 p.). Its substance lies prin-
cipally in its 183 illustrations, a few of which are in
color.
5602. New York. Museum of Modern Art.
American folk art; the art of the common
man in America, 1750-1900. New York, Museum
of Modern Art, 1932. 52 p.
32-34218 N6505.N44
Bibliography: p. 47-52.
This illustrated catalog, published in connection
with an epoch-making exhibit at the Museum of
Modern Art, did much to establish the present vogue
of folk art among the art public. It covers the useful
and decorative arts in America during the latter
part of the 18th and all of the 19th centuries. A
substantial introduction by Mr. Holger Cahill (p.
3-28) discusses the relative merits of the terms
"primitive," "provincial," and "folk" in describing
this type of art, and setdes on the last. He suggests
that "folk art" best characterizes this kind, made by
"the common people," expressing their ideals, and
fulfilling their needs. He further describes the his-
torical background of the largely unknown and
untutored house painters, sign painters, portrait
limners, carpenters, cabinetmakers, shipwrights,
wood carvers, stonecutters, metalworkers, black-
smiths, sailors, and all the other artist-artisans whose
work is illustrated from the exhibition. There are
175 items in the catalog (p. 29-46) and 172 fine-
screen halftone plates.
5603. Pinckney, Pauline A. American figureheads
and their carvers. New York, Norton, 1940.
223 p. 32 plates on 16 1. 41-1172 VM308.P5
Bibliography: p. 204-210.
Not only figureheads, but billetheads, stem and
FOLKLORE, FOLK MUSIC, FOLK ART / 815
stern decorations, and all products of the ship-
carver's art are included in this history of American
ship sculpture. The chapters, in historical sequence,
trace the ancestry of American figureheads through
shipcarvings of Egypt, Phoenicia, Rome, Scandi-
navia, and Western Europe, and then tell what has
been discovered about the American carvers and
their craft. The masters Simeon and John Skillin
of Boston, and the Philadelphia craftsman, William
Rush, who made an important contribution to the
first American Navy, are studied in particular de-
tail. The author's fullest sources are Navy records,
since the merchant fleet, large as it was, is poorly
documented for the 18th and 19th centuries. With
the advent of ships of iron and steel, figureheads fell
into disuse, although some futile efforts were made
to adapt metal figures to the new vessels. At the
conclusion of her book, the author introduces the
few remaining practitioners of an art which has
been virtually extinct since the turn of the century.
Some drawings and many photographs illustrate
extant figureheads and carvings, some in a fine
state of preservation, while others were too much
"exposed to the hazards of wind and sea and to the
blasts of powder and shot."
5604. Robertson, Elizabeth Wells. American
quilts. New York, Studio Publications,
1948. 152 p. 48-28158 NK9112.R6
Bibliography: p. 151-152.
"A quilt is anything made of two pieces of ma-
terial with padding between and held together with
stitches." From this bare definition Miss Robert-
son proceeds to develop the esthetic as well as the
utilitarian values, the social connotations, the tech-
niques, and the folklore of quilts. She begins by
sketching in the background of frontier society, its
development of the quilting party, and the origin
out of necessity of techniques and traditions such
as the "crazy quilt." Succeeding parts describe the
fabrics such as calico, gingham, and percale; their
manufacture, dyeing, and printing or painting; and
give instruction in the stitches and patterns for the
benefit of modern quiltmakers. Part four gives a
particularly complete account of the standard de-
signs (birds, flowers, fruits, stars, and many others),
their sources, and their nomenclature. Over half
the volume (p. 61-150) is given to photographic
halftones of specimens the greater part of which
are in public museums, with a smaller number
drawn from private collections.
XXV
Music
A. General Histories and Reference Wor\s 5605-5614
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics 5615-5625
C. Localities 5626-5630
D. Religious Music 5631-5634
E. Popular Music 5635-5640
F. Jazz 5641-5646
G. Orchestra and Bands 5647-5654
H. Opera 5655-5663
I. Choirs 5664-5667
J. Music Education 5668-5672
K. Individual Musicians 5673-5687
iy
'¥
IN 1858, two and a half centuries after the first settlement, when Longfellow published
The Courtship of Miles Standish, the elder Holmes published The Autocrat of the Break-
fast Table, Lincoln met Douglas on the hustings of seven Illinois towns, and Theodore
Roosevelt was born, no one wrote a book on American music, and if anyone had, it could
only have been a thin and shamefaced volume. Of all the great Western traditions, the one
which had made the transit to America in the most attenuated or mutilated form was the
musical heritage. On the eve of the Civil War
there were none too lively survivals in folksong
and hymnody, a somewhat desultory concert life in
the cities of the Northeastern seaboard, and a
rousing welcome for any visiting star with news
value, but the only really flourishing musical in-
stitution was a strange if delightful domestic hybrid,
the minstrel show. Indeed, by 1858, the United
States had generated its own antimusical tradition,
which is still with us: music had somehow come
to be regarded as detracting from the manliness of
the American male, and the Yankee style of humor
took the professional musician for a figure of fun.
The past century has seen a complete transforma-
tion of this picture, gradually at first and then with
much acceleration. Its early manifestations were in
large measure the effects of the new concentrations
of wealth which followed the Civil War: thus
during its first 37 years the Boston Symphony
Orchestra was maintained by the bounty of one
wealthy man. By whatever means, the cultivation
of an active concert life has spread from its early
816
centers to every metropolitan area in the country,
and the support of a symphony orchestra has become
an article of municipal patriotism. After the Civil
War the American composer of large-scale music
began to make his appearance, at first usually
trained in Germany or on German models; latterly
eclectic or resolutely nationalist. There has come
about a definite stratification of music, which can
be roughly indicated by the labels of highbrow
(subscription symphony concerts, string quartets,
harpsichord recitals, etc.), middlebrow (pop con-
certs, sophisticated musicals, cafe singers, etc.), and
lowbrow (the Hit Parade, hill-billy); it is the lower
two which are the best remunerated. The extraor-
dinary phenomenon of jazz (Section F), which
spread out of the Negro quarter of New Orleans
in the second decade of this century, and has be-
come America's only large musical export, can and
does exist at all three levels. Its relation to the old
tradition of "serious" or "classical" music remains
uncertain and shifting, but there has been and is
MUSIC / 817
much cross-fertilization, the most conspicuous ex-
ample being the attractive figure of George
Gershwin (no. 5678).
Doubtless because of the relative recency of these
developments, the literature of American music is
rather recent and rather scanty; save in the fields of
jazz and singers' autobiographies, the following
pages list a quite considerable proportion of it. The
titles have been chosen to exhibit American music,
and especially music in performance, in close rela-
tionship with American society, and to give samples
of the varieties of musical experience in America.
Section B contains a number of surveys or diagnoses
of the musical state of the Nation; nearly all evidence
a considerable sense of dissatisfaction. In spite of the
tremendous increase in musicians, organizations,
and audiences, there is a lingering uneasiness that
"serious" music is still something of an exotic, arti-
ficially and precariously maintained. In the per-
spective of a century it is safe to say that difficulties
thus reflected spring out of the recent rapid changes
in technology, economic life, and society: the musical
heritage of the West has been assimilated, coexists
in a reasonable relationship with the current of popu-
lar musicmaking, and, whatever adaptations of
means may prove necessary, is in not the slightest
danger of being jettisoned.
A. General Histories and Reference Works
5605. Ewen, David, comp. American composers
today, a biographical and critical guide.
New York, H. W. Wilson, 1949. 265 p. illus.
49-8927 ML390.E82
Mr. Ewen circulated a questionnaire in gathering
the information for this dictionary, and most of the
entries are ingeniously fitted together from the
words supplied by the composers themselves. At
the end of each biography is a list of principal works,
recordings if any, and one or more references to
other literature. The "American" in the title is
hemispheric in scope, and includes, along with
approximately 130 composers whose careers have
largely unfolded in the United States, several Cana-
dians, 10 Latin Americans (including the late
Manuel de Falla), and well over 40 Europeans
whose careers were thoroughly established abroad
before they came to this country. Although some
of this last group have now returned to their original
homes, it cannot be denied that those who remained
have contributed to the cosmopolitan product that
is American music. Mr. Ewen's definition of "to-
day" is similarly broad, since the birthdays of his
composers range from 1853 to 1923. This wide
stretch has apparentiy resulted from the dividing
line between a pair of similar compilations, earlier
in date and international in scope: Composers of
Today (New York, H. W. Wilson, 1934. 314 p.)
and Composers of Yesterday, issued by the same
publisher three years later (488 p.). Users of the
present work are referred to the latter for the
biographies of such men as Charles T. Griflfes and
Victor Herbert, even though their music is still
very much alive, while a number of lesser talents,
dead for as long as 27 years, have been carried over
into this newer compilation simply because they
431240 — 60-
were alive in 1934. With no second edition of
Composers of Yesterday, there was no other place
to put them.
5606. Historical Records Survey. District of Co-
lumbia. Bio-bibliographical index of musi-
cians in the United States of America since colonial
times. 2d ed. Washington, Music Section, Pan
American Union, 1956. xxiii, 439 p.
PA57-4 ML106.U3H6 1956
Bibliography: p. xvii-xxiii.
"A list of special studies, biographies, and auto-
biographies pertaining to the persons whose names
appear in the Index": p. 421-439.
In a subject area that has been comparatively as
little studied as is unfortunately the case with
American music, a volume such as this can be the
most useful reference tool available. With only two
general histories in the field, too little notice has been
taken of the multiplicity of singers, instrumentalists,
and even composers who make up the total picture
of our musical life. But if there are only two general
histories, there are a variety of more restricted
studies of special periods, regions, and topics. If in
one's reading a name has been picked up, it often
becomes a very real problem to find out something
more about the person. This union index of a large
part of the musical literature earlier than World War
I, which was planned by Keyes Porter and completed
under the supervision of Dr. Leonard Ellinwood, is
often the simplest and quickest solution to that prob-
lem. Unpretentious in appearance, it is nonetheless
the most sought-after volume by those working in
the field, and was particularly hard to come by before
the second printing made it more accessible. The
Historical Records Survey had quietly slipped away
-53
8l8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
before the volume was completed, and in 1941, when
the Pan American Union was persuaded to step in
and see that the compilation was not entirely lost,
funds were available only for a first edition of 500
copies.
5607. Howard, John Tasker. Our American mu-
sic, three hundred years of it. With supple-
mentary chapters by James Lyons. 3d ed., rev. and
reset. New York, Crowell, 1954 xxii, 841, A77 p.
illus. 54-11944 ML200.H8 1954
Bibliography: p. 693-743.
5608. Chase, Gilbert. America's music, from the
Pilgrims to the present. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1955. xxiii, 733 p.
54-9707 ML200.C5
Bibliography: p. 679-706.
These are the only two books that attempt to
cover the whole field of American music. When
Mr. Howard published his first edition in 1931,
there were numerous studies of special periods or
aspects of the subject, but he nevertheless had much
original research to carry out in addition to bringing
earlier work into focus. He was able to locate the
descendants of a number of important early figures,
such as Francis Hopkinson, James Hewitt, Oliver
Shaw, and Benjamin Carr, as well as closer relatives
of Lowell and William Mason, Edward MacDowell,
Ethelbert Nevin, and Horatio Parker, and thus could
offer much new documentation in his book. Even
in this edition revised by James Lyons the basic
strength of the earlier editions is apparent, and Mr.
Howard's formulation of our musical history still
remains very useful. Nevertheless, by the time Gil-
bert Chase set out to reformulate that history, the
study of sociology and folk music had changed many
musicological attitudes. Whereas Mr. Howard was
willing to take the amateurs and rather inexpert im-
migrant professionals of the early 19th century much
on their own terms, Mr. Chase views their efforts
and affectations more sceptically. He casts his book
into three sections with significant headings: "Prep-
aration," "Expansion," and "Fulfillment." Only
during the last two or three decades, he feels, has
serious American music made any real contribution
to the art. Largely because of this strong element
of interpretation in the Chase book both volumes
can still be profitably used. In devoting his space to
the development of the total picture, Mr. Chase
slights many details and individuals. Howard's
index therefore runs to 97 pages, while Chase's has
only 23. However, Mr. Chase's book makes better
reading, partly because of his challenging thesis, but
also because there are fewer unrelated facts to cope
with.
5609. Reis, Claire (Raphael). Composers in
America; biographical sketches of contem-
porary composers with a record of their works.
Rev. and enl. ed. New York, Macmillan, 1947.
xvi, 399 p. 47-31210 ML390.R38 1947
Mrs. Reis, by dint of much hard work, social pres-
tige, and the financial backing she could thereby
obtain, has been one of the best friends the American
composer has had. In her semiautobiographical
Composers, Conductors, and Critics (no. 5620) she
tells of her work as chairman of the League of
Composers for 25 years. By bringing together in
the present book information on the composers of
North America and their works, she puts them
further in her debt. In the earlier editions (1930,
1932, and 1938) she limited herself to "significant
living composers, American-born or American citi-
zens," but in the present edition she redefined its
scope to include a rather large number of foreign-
born composers who had come here and made a
definite contribution to American music. The
period covered is very much the same as that in
Ewen's American Composers Today (no. 5605),
which goes back to Arthur Foote (1853-1937)
whereas Mrs. Reis starts with Edgar Stillman Kelley
( 1 857-1 944), but both have as their youngest com-
poser Peter Mennin, born in 1923. In between these
extremes, the distribution by date of birth is simi-
lar, but Mrs. Reis gives a larger number of somewhat
shorter biographies. She includes 234 composers
who were born in the United States or who were
brought here young and untrained; 8 who were born
in Canada but have pursued at least part of their
careers in the United States; 42 others who were
born and trained abroad but were in the United
States by the 1920's and showing distinct signs of
acclimation; and finally 44 composers who arrived
here in the later 1930's and early 1940's largely be-
cause of political events abroad. At the end she lists
424 names without individual comment, indicating
that neither she nor Mr. Ewen has exhausted the
potentialities of the subject. Madeleine B. Goss'
Modern Music-Makers, Contemporary American
Composers (New York, Dutton, 1952. 499 p.) has
essays on 37 composers, some of whom are very little
known, and furnishes a good full-page photograph
of each.
5610. Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore. A bibli-
ography of early secular American music
(18th century). Rev. and enl. by William Treat
Upton. [Washington] Library of Congress, Music
Division, 1945. xvi, 616 p. illus.
45-35717 ML120.U5S6 1945
561 1. Dichter, Harry, and Elliott Shapiro. Early
American sheet music, its lure and its lore,
MUSIC / 819
1768-1889. Including a directory of early Ameri-
can music publishers. New York, Bowker, 194 1.
xxvii, 287 p. 4I_7397 ML112.D53
"Famous American musical firsts": p. xxv-xxvii.
"Lithographers and artists working on American
sheet music before 1870, by Edith A. Wright and
Josephine A. McDevitt": p. 249-257.
Bibliography: p. 259.
Although neither of these books is designed pri-
marily for reading, both are valuable introductions
to important bodies of primary material and each
has much to offer in addition to its list of titles.
Most of the entries in both are thoroughly anno-
tated, and Sonneck in particular usually provided
a historical essay on each of the more important
melodies (see, for instance, his discussion of "Wash-
ington's March" ) . Mr. Upton's revision of Dr.
Sonneck's book, originally published in 1905, covers
a briefer period, stopping at the end of 1800, and so
is able to offer as comprehensive an alphabetical
listing as could be brought together. One or more
library locations are given for most of the entries;
the others are known only through advertisements
or other descriptions. The main bibliography
(p. 1-487) is followed by lists of early articles and
essays on music, of composers, songsters, first lines,
patriotic music, opera librettos, and publishers,
printers, and engravers. The Dichter-Shapiro book
aims only at reporting important editions of songs
celebrated in their own day, many of which are still
well known in our day. The titles are presented in
chronologically arranged groups, sometimes devoted
to editions of a single famous song, and sometimes to
songs cf like subject matter — "Skating Items,"
"Railroad Items," and so forth. The sections usually
have an introductory paragraph giving the general
setting, and each entry is annotated, sometimes ex-
tensively. The illustrations, which include 32 fac-
similes, are especially attractive.
5612. Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore. Early
concert-life in America (1731-1800). New
York, Musurgia, 1949. 338 p.
A50-7306 ML200.3.S6 1949
This is a photographic reproduction of the original
edition published at Leipzig by Breitkopf and
Hartel in 1907; the author headed the Music Divi-
sion of the Library of Congress from 1902 to 1917,
and was chiefly responsible for the eminence which
its collections and services have ever since enjoyed.
With the persistence of a German-trained scholar
and the enthusiasm of an American, Sonneck (1873-
1928) diligently examined every 18th-century
American newspaper, magazine, book, and piece of
music he could find. The newspapers proved an
especially valuable repository of information on
American concert-life, which began in the 1730's,
flourished during the decade before the Revolution,
and was resumed in the mid-1780's. Sonneck's
account is based on program announcements,
around which is woven a thorough and perceptive
discussion of the details of this growth, the whole
giving, as Carl Engel said, "the first methodical and
correct picture of musical conditions in America
prior to 1800."
5613. Turpie, Mary C, comp. American music
for the study of American civilizadon.
[v. 1] Formal compositions. Folk and popular
songs. Minneapolis, Program in American Studies,
University of Minnesota [1955] 90 1.
55-1919 ML120.U5T8
This annotated bibliography was assembled to
record materials relevant to the study of Ameri-
can cultural history. The first two sections in the
volume are devoted to serious music and folksongs;
a projected third section will include jazz. An inten-
tionally abbreviated list of 130 "formal composi-
tions" is arranged by composers, and followed by
158 folksongs, arranged by title. Annotations de-
scribe the music and locate it in currendy available
song collections and on records, while an index lists
the subjects of the songs. The book has no specified
audience; those who are commissioned with the task
of planning a concert of American music can use it
advantageously. College teachers of American
civilization will be able to draw from it, as will
public school teachers in building "units" around
events in American history. The annotations dis-
play a resolute antipathy to any evidences of
"romanticism."
5614. Upton, William Treat. Art-song in Amer-
ica; a study in the development of American
music. Boston, Oliver Ditson Co., 1930. 279 p.
ill us. 3°~33445 ML2811.U7
A supplement to Art-song in America,
1930-1938. [Boston] Oliver Ditson
Co., 1938. 41 p. ML2811.U7 Suppl.
In surveying an unexpectedly large field from
various viewpoints, Mr. Upton produced a
compilation which is more encyclopaedia than
narrative. It has probably been most valuable
to singers in search of American repertoire, and
notes on that repertoire. The main volume
covers the period from the Revolutionary Francis
Hopkinson to 1930, and the supplement extends
through 1938. Most of the composers are American
by birth, and the works of a few, such as Stephen
Foster, are probably thought of today as popular
rather than art songs. Mr. Upton's extensive cover-
age of early 20th-century composers is noteworthy;
820 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
these men must be thought of today as backward-
looking in comparison with the important European
composers of their time. The discussion includes
biographical material, but its principal value is for
analyses of, and comments on, the musical idiom
of these songs.
B. Contemporary Surveys and Special Topics
5615. Barzun, Jacques. Music in American life.
With a foreword by Edward N. Waters.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 126 p.
56-7651 ML200.5.B3
Dean Barzun of Columbia University, who in-
cludes music in his multifarious interests, analyzes in
this essay the state of music in America at the mid-
century. He is concerned with economics as well
as art, and he is especially interested in the new and
unprecedented relation between amateur and profes-
sional at a time when "music lovers" are increasing
while musicians find the going harder and harder.
Popular music, our philosophy of education, gov-
ernment subsidies, music criticism, and the anom-
alous position of the composer are among the many
topics discussed. The author's oudook is moderately
optimistic, but he does not attempt to gloss over a
number of disquieting factors in the total situation.
The book is one of a series initiated and sponsored
by the Committee on Musicology of the American
Council of Learned Societies. In the same year ap-
peared another general view, this time from the in-
side, by a widely esteemed American composer,
Roger Sessions (b. 1896). His Reflections on the
Music Life in the United States (New York, Merlin
Press, 1956. 184 p. Merlin music books, v. 6) is
unmarked by clarity or grace of writing, but it is the
product of genuine reflection and offers many valu-
able insights. He points out, for instance, that in
the absence of both patronage and subsidies, musical
enterprises must be entrusted to managers who are
competent businessmen, and that it is the necessity
of remaining solvent, not abstract or perverse "com-
mercialism," which assimilates such situations to the
dynamics of business. He is particularly concerned,
of course, with the relation of American composers
to the European heritage, deprecates a one-sided
striving after nationalism, and welcomes the influ-
ence of Arnold Schonberg, "one of the truly great
figures of our time," as an enrichment of American
resources.
5616. Browne, C. A. The story of our national
ballads. Rev. and enl. ed. New York,
Crowell, 193 1. 315 p. illus.
31-10497 ML3551.B88 1931
National songs owe their success to popular tradi-
tion. In the process they usually acquire an aura of
anecdotes and assemble an entourage of inspirers,
authors, composers, singers, promoters, and their
descendants. A few writers have attempted to make
their way to the original sources, often with some-
what complex and inconclusive results. Such a
study was Oscar G. T. Sonneck's Report on "The
Star-Spangled Banner," "Hail Columbia," "Amer-
ica," and "Yankee Doodle" (Washington, Govt.
Print. Off., 1909. 255 p.). By 1914, additional ma-
terial had necessitated a complete new edition of
"The Star Spangled Banner" (Washington, Govt.
Print. Off., 1914. 115 p.) alone! Browne's book
employs the opposite approach, with no particular
attempt at critical scholarship, and selects anecdotes
usually on the basis of their story-value. Some of
these, especially those concerning the earlier songs,
were dubious or worse even at the time of the first
edition of 1919. The revised edition has individual
treatments of 16 songs from "Yankee Doodle" to
"America the Beautiful," and concluding chapters
on the songs of the Spanish American War and
World War I.
5617. Clarke, Eric. Music in everyday life. New
York, Norton, 1935. 288 p.
35-6558 ML3795.C59M8
This book was written in response to two queries
which the Carnegie Corporation of New York asked
Mr. Clarke to answer: "What aspects of music in
America to-day seem the most important? How
can music best be furthered?" The author describes
his work as a panorama of the musical landscape for
the eyes of the ordinary citizen, and while it is the
landscape of the mid-1930's, a surprisingly large
number of his conclusions remain pertinent more
than two decades later. The great desideratum, Mr.
Clarke believed, was to make the transition from
musical activity called into being by the generosity
of wealthy patrons to a musical culture based on
universal musical literacy springing out of true en-
joyment and love. "A nation of music lovers" will
place less emphasis on the exceptionally talented
individual and on success as the goal of a musical
career, and more on the cultivation of music as "a
language which everybody is capable of understand-
ing if not of speaking," and on amateurs playing
together for enjoyment. With such goals in mind
the author examined the study of music, perform-
ance and reproduction, the musical profession, and
helps to music such as libraries, publications, and
MUSIC / 821
foundations; and at most points made constructive
suggestions marked by realism and good sense.
5618. Gelatt, Roland. The fabulous phonograph,
from tin foil to high fidelity. Philadelphia,
Lippincott, 1955. 320 p. illus.
55-9154 ML1055.G4
Despite biographies of such inventors as Edison
(no. 4780) and Berliner and despite fragmentary
studies and technical writings on many of its aspects,
the phonograph had to wait some 75 years before it
achieved, in this book, a sound and substantial re-
counting of its history. The book deals with foreign
as well as domestic phases of that history, but inevit-
ably the bulk of its pages have to do with the tech-
nical, commercial, and artistic development of sound
recordings in the United States. Edison's basic
invention goes back to the fall of 1877, but the com-
mercial recording of music was not begun until 1890.
By 1895 various improvements had warranted the
large-scale promotion of the original cylinder re-
cording, but Emile Berliner was already in the field
with his potentially superior disc. The Victor Talk-
ing Machine Company joined the disc-users in 1901,
and the exploitation of operatic stars and arias on its
Red Seal records was the first artistic and business
triumph in the field; but the production of cylin-
ders was kept up until 1911. Technical improve-
ments have since gone hand in hand with the addi-
tion of further areas of repertory to the phonograph's
resources.
5619. Leiter, Robert David. The musicians and
Petrillo. New York, Bookman Associates,
1953. 202 p. illus. 53-2437 ML3795.L35
Bibliography: p. [i96]-i97.
The "organized" musician in America, and es-
pecially the American Federation of Musicians, is
the object of this sympathetic but reasonably objec-
tive study. The author deals both with the short
history of musicians' unions in this country and with
the many present-day problems raised by the various
forms of "canned" music (except television, the full
impact of which had not been felt at the time this
book was written). The drawbacks as well as the
advantages of strongly centralized unionism are
discussed, and the part played by James Caesar Pe-
trillo (b. 1892) and other personalities in shaping
the destinies of the organized muscian is narrated.
Petrillo, a dance-band musician who turned to union
politics when he "lost his lip," became the dictator
of the Chicago Federation of Musicians in 1922 and
of the American Federation of Musicians, succeeding
Joseph N. Weber, in 1940. His rigorous mainte-
nance of the economic interests of union members
soon made him a national figure.
5620. Reis, Claire (Raphael). Composers, conduc-
tors, and critics. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1955. 264 p. illus.
55-8122 ML423.A2R4
For over 30 years Mrs. Reis has been a leading
missionary for contemporary music in the United
States; for 25 of those years (1923-48) she was
chairman of the League of Composers (now merged
into the American Section of the International So-
ciety for Contemporary Music), which provided
modest financial help to composers in the form of
commissions, arranged international exchanges of
composers and performers, and in general waged
the batde for contemporary music. Her book is
largely a report on that battle, pardy narrative and
partly anecdotal. Its tone is enthusiastic but not
hortatory, and it contains few value judgments on,
or qualitative comparisons of, individual composers
or their works.
5621. Rothenberg, Stanley. Copyright and public
performance of music. The Hague, M.
Nijhoff, 1954. xv, 188 p. 56—141 1 Law
Bibliography: p. [i77]-i79.
An American Fulbright scholar in Holland and a
leading Dutch publisher joined forces to produce the
most useful book on American copyright law and
common law as they apply to music. It discusses
not only statutes and legal theory, but also actual
cases and the performing rights societies such as
ASCAP (The American Society of Composers,
Authors, and Publishers) and BMI (Broadcast
Music, Inc.). Differences between European and
American law with regard to performing rights are
pointed out. The style of the book is sufficiently
free of legal jargon for it to be readily usable by the
interested layman.
5622. Sargeant, Winthrop. Geniuses, goddesses,
and people. New York, Dutton, 1949.
317 p. 497i°549 ML423.S3
Written by a well-known music critic and former
orchestra musician, this book has been included less
for its biographical sketches (some devoted to non-
musicians such as Lana Turner and Frank Lloyd
Wright) than for its opening section of reminis-
cences and anecdotes. These reminiscences give a
uniquely perceptive and amusing glimpse into that
workaday orchestra world that audiences never see
and that those who write of music and its star per-
formers seldom touch upon. Among the biographi-
cal sketches, first published in Life, is one of Arturo
Toscanini (under whose baton the author served
for some years) that retains its interest despite later
and more pretentious biographies. Another valua-
ble illumination of a little-explored area of American
822 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
musical life is contained in the relevant portion
(Part 6, p. 433-574) of Arthur Loesser's Men,
Women, and Pianos (New York, Simon & Schuster,
1954). Technical developments — to which America
contributed its share — and the evolution of the piano
industry; concert artists and the music they played;
piano rolls, recordings, and broadcasting; the role of
the parlor piano in American life: these and other
aspects of the piano from colonial times to the pres-
ent are described soundly and urbanely by a noted
American pianist, teacher, and critic.
5623. Smith, Cecil Michener. Worlds of music.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1952. 328 p.
52-9538 ML200.5.S53
There are 12 worlds in this cosmography of
American musical life as it appeared to one viewer —
a leading music critic and journalist — at the mid-
point of the 20th century. These worlds are those
of individual managers, the Columbia concert man-
agement, the organized audience, the performer,
New York, the "provinces," the opera, the orchestra,
the composer, the dancer, the electrical technician,
and the music teacher. The book undertakes to
demonstrate, sometimes with resignation and some-
times with asperity, how these worlds all revolve
around a single sun: the concentration of managerial
power in the hands of a few men whose goal is
business success rather than artistic excellence. Even
if one is inclined to discount this thesis to a greater
or lesser degree, the book contains many vivid
glimpses of professional music circles from the in-
side which most laymen will find unusually revela-
tory. A similar charge was brought, more harshly
and with somewhat different emphases, in Paul S.
Carpenter's Music, an Art and a Business (Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. 245 p.).
5624. Taubman Hyman Howard. Music as a
profession, by Howard Taubman. New
York, Scribner, 1939. 320 p.
39-27946 ML3795.T23M9
Mr. Taubman, who has been a music journalist for
30 years and is now music editor of The New YorJ^
Times, is an exceptionally gifted exponent of techni-
cal and professional matters for the layman. This
book was written just before World War II, when
the baritone Nelson Eddy was earning over half a
million dollars a year, while thousands of other
musicians were drawing a subsistence from the
Federal Music Project. It was admirably calcu-
lated to achieve its purposes, to "clear away some
of the illusions and give a few elementary tips to
aspirants for a musical career or to their patents or
vocational counselors," and even to discourage "some
prospects from trying music as a career and turning
them to a field where there is more assurance of a
living." The developments of the last two decades
both inside and out of the realm of music have been
so far-reaching that no one should now resort to the
book as a practical guide to details, but it remains a
vivid picture of professional life in the interwar
period, enlivened by many apt anecdotes. The au-
thor's essential thesis, that many feel themselves
called but few are chosen by the great Amercan audi-
ence, continues to be valid. There are good chapters
on "The Prodigy," "First Public Appearances," and
especially on "Building a Career," which drives home
the point that for success a concert artist needs not
only the "break" which brings him to public notice,
but the imaginative and intelligent exploitation of
his opportunity.
5625. Zanzig, Augustus Delafield. Music in
American life, present & future. With a
foreword by Daniel Gregory Mason. London, New
York, Oxford University Press, 1932. 560 p. illus.
32-4346 ML3795.Z2
Bibliography: p. [547]-552-
Despite its misleading title — for it deals hardly
at all with the professional music activity that con-
stitutes the heart of "music in American life" — this
book offers much of both historical and sociological
interest to the student of American life. Written
at the instance of the National Recreation Associa-
tion, it surveys amateur musical activity in this
country toward the beginning of the Great Depres-
sion— in the home, in school, in church, in industry,
in playgrounds, museums, and summer camps, and
especially in the "community singing" groups that
grew to importance at the time of World War I.
Although there are differences in scope and in em-
phasis, it may be compared with Mr. Barzun's book
of the same title (no. 5615), which surveys essen-
tially the same scene one depression, one war, and
one generation later.
C. Localities
5626. Aldrich, Richard. Concert life in New
York, 1902-1923. New York, Putnam, 1941.
xvii, 795 p. 41-26614 ML200.8.N5A6
"Harold Johnson of the Library of Congress . . .
selected the reviews and articles and compiled the
index of concert performances in New York from
the scrapbooks of Mr. Aldrich." — p. viii.
5627. Downes, Olin. Olin Downes on music; a
selection from his writings during the half-
MUSIC / 823
century 1906 to 1955. Edited by Irene Downes, with
a pref. by Howard Taubman. New York, Simon &
Schuster, 1957. 473 p. illus.
56-9923 ML60.D73
Although the musical culture of the United States
seems to have been widely diffused throughout its
larger cities during the 19th century, since World
War I — or perhaps somewhat before — New York
has been the musical capital of the country. Artists
feel they must make their debuts there, the concert
season is longer and more intense, and most of the
business side of music is concentrated there. The
music critics of the chief New York newspapers are
thus in a particularly strategic position for taking
the musical pulse of the country. After gaining
experience in other jobs, in 1891 Richard Aldrich
( 1 863-1 937) joined the staff of the New Yort^ Trib-
une, where he frequendy assisted its chief music
critic, Henry E. Krehbiel (see nos. 5658-5659).
When William J. Henderson moved from The New
Yor^ Times to The Sun in 1902, Aldrich succeeded
him as the Times' chief music critic, and served until
the spring of 1923. In the meantime, Olin Downes
( 1886— 1955) had begun his career as a music critic
at the age of 20 on the Boston Post, and was a thor-
oughly experienced writer when he was chosen to
succeed Aldrich on the Times in January 1924. The
two books above are made up of selected reviews
and "Sunday articles" by the two men. All of
Aldrich's reviews come from the Times, whereas in
the Downes volume the first 76 pages were drawn
from the Boston Post. Between them they cover the
high spots in New York's musical life for more than
half a century. That life, to be sure, is viewed
through the eyes of two individuals who were living
very much in the thick of things, and these accounts
do not take the place of an objective history. Since
the extracts in both books are arranged chronologi-
cally, they do give an extremely graphic presentation
of changing customs, institutions, and attitudes that
form the primary stuff of music history.
5628. Ayars, Christine Merrick. Contributions to
the art of music in America by the music in-
dustries of Boston, 1640-1936. New York, H. W.
Wilson, 1937. xv, 326 p.
37-3847 ML200.8.B7A8
Bibliography: p. 307-314.
Every musician is aware, if only subconsciously, of
what an important role the music industries play in
musical life, not merely in supplying the means of
musicmaking but even in determining the course of
musical evolution — as when the many technical im-
provements in wind instruments during the first
half of the 19th century made possible the complex
bands of today, not to mention the virtuoso wind
playing required by orchestral composers since the
time of Wagner. Yet the writers who satisfy the
public's curiosity about composers and performers,
and who instruct students and listeners alike in
everything from "appreciation" to xylophone tech-
nique, seldom give a page to the instrument makers,
the music engravers or copyists, the publishers, or
the musical publicists themselves. The present book,
which originated as a master's thesis at Boston
University, is a unique study of the music industries
in a leading American music center, and its value
goes far beyond the information it provides about
music in Boston itself. Its three main sections are
devoted to music publishing (including music jour-
nals), music engraving and printing, and instrument
making, and there are extensive appendixes which
include lists of makers and descriptions of their
extant instruments. Even unmusical historians and
sociologists will find much to interest them, such as
the discussion of the Revere family's music-engrav-
ing and bell-founding activities.
5629. Gerson, Robert A. Music in Philadelphia;
a history of Philadelphia music, a summary
of its current state, and a comprehensive index dic-
tionary. Philadelphia, Theodore Presser, 1940.
422 p. illus. 41-1276 ML200.8.P5G4
Bibliography: p. 418-422.
In his University of Pennsylvania doctoral disser-
tation, Mr. Gerson has attempted to cover the entire
history of Philadelphia music from 1700 to 1939.
More than half the volume is concerned with the
20th century and deals not only with all types of
music in performance but with the varieties of music
education, with church music, music publishers, and
the manufacturers of phonographs, records, and
radios. A wide variety of secondary works, together
with a number of primary sources, have contributed
a huge body of data which overflows into an "Index-
Dictionary of Philadelphia Music" (p. 365-414).
The volume of this factual material has proved too
great for the achievement of either a meaningful
organization or a provocative interpretation of it;
but the resulting compilation does serve as a con-
venient concentration of information concerning the
cultural history of an important center of American
5630. Swan, Howard. Music in the Southwest,
1 825-1 950. San Marino, Calif., Huntington
Library, 1952. 316 p. illus.
52-14504 ML200.7.S74S9
Bibliography: p. 295-300.
The rapid economic growth of this region of the
United States has been accompanied by a no less
remarkable musical growth. Omitting the Indian
and Spanish periods in California, which have been
824 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
thoroughly covered elsewhere, this history begins
with the Mormon settlers of Utah, who had their
own hymnody and "a particular regard for band
music." The author traces the evidences of musical
activity in the mining camps of Arizona and Nevada
(especially Virginia City), in the final phase of the
old Spanish institutions of California, and in the
"cow counties" of the south of the State, which were
filling up with immigrants from the East. The last
six chapters narrate the rise of serious music in
southern California and particularly in Los Angeles,
where a season of eight symphony concerts was
presented as early as 1893-94. Mr. Swan's book is
not a technical treatise or a musicological study, but
a colorful if somewhat miscellaneous portrayal of the
development of musical life as an integral part of a
region's social and economic development. The
verses of several Mormon folk and railroad songs,
and an amusing set of "Rules which should be
Observed in Dancing Parties [St. George, Utah,
1887]," are among the appendixes. Mrs. Adella
Prentiss Hughes' Music Is My Life (Cleveland,
World Pub. Co., 1947. 319 p.) is a view of the
development of the concert life of Cleveland through
the eyes of the woman who managed most of it
during half a century.
D. Religious Music
5631. Davison, Archibald. Protestant church mu-
sic in America. Boston, Schirmer Music
Co., 1933. 182 p. 34—53 ML3111.D26P7
"Four brief lists of hymns, anthems, organ selec-
tions and junior choir selections": p. 173-175.
The eminent professor of music at Harvard (b.
1883) here presented a statement of his lofty con-
ception of religious music. The first half of his book
is a vigorously written polemic exposing those "Atti-
tudes and Conditions" which have depressed Prot-
estant standards of sacred music: indifference, com-
placency, isolation, deficient music education,
individualism, association (bad music loved for the
childhood memories it evokes), tradition, prejudice,
and disorganization. In the second half, "The The-
ory and Practice of Church Music," Dr. Davison
develops the more positive aspects of his credo. His
ideals are austere, and he is willing to leave many of
the best tunes to the devil; but his reasons are always
presented logically and convincingly. In "The Uses
of Music in Worship," he justifies these ideals with
arguments both esthetic and religious, and in a long
section on "The Material of Sacred Music (p. 94-
150)," he provides one of the few astute and well-
illustrated analyses of its musical idiom.
5632. Ellinwood, Leonard Webster. The history
of American church music. New York,
Morehouse-Gorham Co., 1953. xiv, 274 p. illus.
53-13402 ML200.E4
"Biographies of American church musicians";
p. 201-242.
This history of American church music, while
extensive and thorough, does not attempt to be ex-
haustive. For instance, if one compares its contents
with those of Foote's Three Centuries of American
Hymnody (no. 5633), one finds that the two books
have very little material in common. Dr. Ellin-
wood, an expert on pre-Renaissance church music, a
deacon of the Washington Cathedral, and a Library
of Congress cataloger of books on religion, has in-
vestigated a number of the less-known phases of this
history. The book is divided into three chronologi-
cal parts, with the breaks at 1820 and 1920, and
there are chapters on such subjects as "[Religious
Music] in New Spain," "Singing Schools and Early
Choirs," "The First Organs and Bells," "The Oxford
Movement and Boy Choirs," "Organ Repertory,"
and "[Contemporary] Matters Liturgical." Ap-
pendix B, "Selected Music Lists," is largely devoted
to the repertory of the Washington Cathedral for
the decade 1941-51, which extended from medieval
plainsong to strictly contemporary American, Eng-
lish, Canadian, and Russian compositions. The
book is well illustrated, and its material is carefully
documented and presented in an authoritative and
scholarly manner.
5633. Foote, Henry Wilder. Three centuries of
American hymnody. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1940. 418 p.
40-34386 ML3111.F6T4
This objective and readable book by a distin-
guished Unitarian clergyman remains the most satis-
factory general history of American religious music,
although it is throughout more concerned with the
words, and their quality as poetry and religious
thought, than it is with the tunes and their quality
as music. The mainstream of this tradition, be-
ginning with the Bay Psalm Book of 1640, is traced
with little deviation into bypaths, but the author
finds space for a surprising number of anecdotes
MUSIC / 825
and other details. To Dr. Foote the great age of
American hymn-writing fell in the four decades
1845-85, and he discovered, somewhat surprisingly
in view of the coldly intellectual atmosphere sup-
posed to have prevailed there, "that, throughout the
nineteenth century, Harvard produced by far the
most notable succession of hymn writers in the
English-speaking world coming from any single
institution." The only serious omission is the gospel-
song tradition, the early history of which must be
traced in George Pullen Jackson's White and Negro
Spirituals (no. 5555), while its 20th-century history
remains to be written. Dr. Foote acknowledges his
debt to three more general books which are indis-
pensable to the study of American hymnody: Louis
F. Benson's The English Hymn (New York, Doran,
1915. 624 p.), Percy A. Scholes' The Puritans and
Music in England and New England (London, Ox-
ford University Press, 1934. 428 p.), and John
Julian's Dictionary of Hymnology, rev. ed. (London,
J. Murray, 1907. xviii, 1768 p.).
5634. Metcalf, Frank J. American writers and
compilers of sacred music. New York,
Abingdon Press, 1925. 373 p. illus.
25-18159 ML106.U3M3
This biographical dictionary covers the 18th and
19th centuries; it includes the better-known men,
but its chief value is for brief, factual sketches of
lesser-known figures. A pioneer scholar in this
field, Metcalf (1865-1945) drew upon a huge and
diversified body of source and secondary material.
Some of his information has since been corrected or
superseded, and much of it appears relatively insig-
nificant now. But his scholarship still provides us
with a convenient and generally reliable compila-
tion of the biographical and bibliographical details
of early American religious music.
E. Popular Music
5635. Goldberg, Isaac. Tin Pan Alley; a chronicle
of the American popular music racket. New
York, John Day Co., 1930. 341 p. illus.
30-31878 ML3551.G64T4
Tin Pan Alley did not receive its name until the
turn of the century, but it crystallized out of Ameri-
can popular musicmaking in the early 1890's, when
a cluster of songwriters and publishers setded along
14th Street in lower Manhattan, then the theatrical
and amusement center of New York. The name,
which Mr. Goldberg attributed to "a minor Ameri-
can poet," is elsewhere derived from "the tinny
quality of the cheap, over-used pianos in music pub-
lishers' offices." The Alley moved uptown in stages
as the theaters did, and with the advent of cinema
and radio it has become a function of the motion
picture and air-wave industries. Mr. Goldberg
attributed the Alley's basic idea — "the scheme of
building [one's] songs around and into stage pro-
ductions"— to Charles K. Harris, who reached the
Alley via Milwaukee and Chicago. Goldberg was
considerably more interested in the music itself than
in the mechanics of song selling, publishing, and
plugging, and his impressionistic and rhapsodic
writing does not make it easy to come at a fact. He
carried his sketch of American popular music back to
blackface minstrelsy, and included a somewhat
irrelevant chapter on Sousa, de Koven, and Victor
Herbert. The book nevertheless has the virtues of
a pioneer work, full of enthusiasm for its subject: the
Tin Pan Alley song "establishes a vital circuit with
431240—60 54
the life out of which it arises" and expresses "the real
philosophy of the multitude — its aims and aspira-
tions, its simple notions of hell, purgatory and
paradise."
5636. Kahn, Ely J., Jr. The Voice; the story of an
American phenomenon. New York, Har-
per, 1947. xvii, 125 p. illus.
47-2598 ML420.S656K3
"The Voice" is, of course, Frank Sinatra (b. 1917),
who shot from relative obscurity in 1941 to major
celebrity in 1943. Most of the material in this slim
book appeared originally in the pages of The New
Yorker and dates from a relatively early period in
Sinatra's career when he was notorious as the idol
of teen-age girls but had not yet solidified his repu-
tation as a singer or made a new one as a straight
actor in motion pictures. Mr. Kahn is therefore less
interested in providing a consecutive picture of
Sinatra's development, although he discreetly works
in a few biographical facts, than in viewing with
amazement the extraordinary antics of the teen-
agers. Sinatra therefore serves as the focal point of
Kahn's story, but it is rather the teen-agers who
supply the "American phenomenon" of the title.
5637. Paskman, Dailey, and Sigmund G. Spaeth.
"Gentlemen, be seated!" A parade of the
old-time minstrels. With a foreword by Daniel
Frohman; profusely illustrated from old prints and
photographs and with complete music for voice and
826 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
piano. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1928.
xvii, 247 p. illus. 28-15892 ML3561.P2G3
PN3195.P3
The tradition of blackface, beginning in 1828 with
"Daddy" Rice (Thomas Dartmouth Rice, 1808-
1860) and extending into our own day with Al Jol-
son (1888-1950) and Eddie Cantor (b. 1892), could
hardly fail to make an interesting subject for a
book. This one is a miscellany of history (not espe-
cially reliable), songs (both texts and music), anec-
dotes, biography, and scripts. Its value as a reference
source is slight, but as a book to be read for pleasure,
it captures much of the carefree disorganization
which characterized Negro minstrelsy, the most
popular form of stage entertainment in the United
States from the 1840's through the 1870's.
5638. Smith, Cecil Michener. Musical comedy in
America. New York, Theatre Arts Books,
1950. 374 p. illus. 50-58209 ML200.S6
Light musicodramatic entertainments have reg-
ularly been with us in one form or another, at least
since the early 18th-century beginnings of opera
buffa in Italy and of the ballad opera in England,
but Mr. Smith settles on the performance of The
Blac\ Croo\ in New York in 1866 as the time when
"the popular musical stage in the United States
reached major dimensions." From this point down
to the presentation of Rodgers and Hammerstein's
South Pacific in 1950, Mr. Smith manages to say
something about practically every revue, operetta,
and musical comedy produced on Broadway. This
material is offered in chronological order, save when
some composer has risen to particular eminence and
a series of his musical comedies may be discussed in
sequence. As a whole, however, the book is a
tapestry of tides and personalities with little attempt
to sort out trends or force the material into patterns,
and hence probably offers a truer picture of the
chaotic Broadway stage, with its fashions and fads
and foreign influences, than would a more formal
history.
5639. Spaeth, Sigmund G. A history of popular
music in America. New York, Random
House, 1948. xv, 729 p. 48-8954 ML2811.S7
"Additional popular music from Colonial times
to the present": p. 587-657. Bibliography: p. 658-
662.
America's most significant contribution to the
world of music, many think, is to be found in its
tough and virile popular music, pre-eminendy the
improvisatory style of performance deriving from
the Negro and known successively as ragtime, jazz,
swing, and "bop." This is by no means, however,
the only type of popular music created in America
that has found wide acceptance in many countries
throughout the world, and indeed, since jazz is es-
sentially a style of performance, it is more difficult to
export than are the products of Tin Pan Alley and
Broadway. It is to these latter that Mr. Spaeth de-
votes his attention almost exclusively. He does give
something over 200 pages to the major songs of our
"infancy" and "adolescence," but in this space he
only reaches the 1880's, whereas nearly 400 pages are
devoted to the next 70 years. Furthermore, Mr.
Spaeth's mastery of his subject increases strikingly as
he approaches the 20th century and is able to enrich
his researches out of personal experience. This
should not be surprising, for there seems to be some-
thing essentially contemporary about popular music,
and few people are interested in it once it has
ceased to be popular. Indeed, even with popular
music not yet forgotten interest seems concentrated
on specific "hit" songs rather than on their com-
posers or the general evolution of a style, and hence
Mr. Spaeth's book resembles more an annotated
chronological bibliography than an ordinary history
book. One famous song after another is briefly
cited or discussed. The chronological tale is inter-
rupted infrequently by a few pages devoted to the
careers of such outstanding popular composers as
Irving Berlin, Jerome Kern, George Gershwin, Cole
Porter, and Richard Rodgers, but for the most part
there is a steady progress year by year through the
crop of popular songs. Such a diet of details needs
an exceptional appetite to make it palatable in any
quantity, but Mr. Spaeth's grasp of the popular
music of the 20th century makes his book excellent
for reference, especially since his facts are generally
accurate and his index is unusually full. Julius
Mattfeld's Variety Music Cavalcade, 1620-1950
(New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 637 p.) is more
strictly bibliographical in form, but is essentially not
very different from Mr. Spaeth's book. The early
years are covered by periods or decades, and finally
there are annual lists. Each group is preceded by a
paragraph giving nonmusical contemporary events
as background, but the songs themselves are simply
listed without commentary. Mr. Mattfeld does give
their publishers, a type of information deliberately
omitted by Spaeth, and he has space for rather more
entries. The two books complement each other in
several respects, but Mattfeld's is essentially a refer-
ence volume and could be read even less comfortably
than Spaeth's.
5640. Wittke, Carl F. Tambo and bones; a history
of the American minstrel stage. Durham,
N.C., Duke University Press, 1930. 269 p.
31-2026 ML2870.W4
PN3195.W5
In the show-business tradition of "comics" and
"straight-men," Paskman and Spaeth's book on min-
MUSIC / 827
strelsy (no. 5637) could be described as a "comic
history," the present volume as a "straight history."
The books complement each other insofar as Pask-
man and Spaeth recapture the fantasy of these enter-
tainments, while Dean Wittke's account is more
sober, factual, and objective. The first three chapters
trace its history of 100 years, bringing in more details
and organizing them better than do Paskman and
Spaeth. The great days of the minstrel show, the
author points out, were over by 1880, but the form
took nearly half a century to die out, its extinction
being marked by the sudden and final closing of the
Al G. Field Minstrels in the spring of 1928. The
last two chapters are concerned with performance
techniques, originally standardized by the E. P.
Christy Minstrels, and brief biographies of notable
minstrels. What Dean Wittke's book lacks in charm
and vitality is made up in reliability.
F. Jazz
5641. Blesh, Rudi, and Harriet (Grossman) Janis.
They all played ragtime, the true story of an
American music. New York, Knopf, 1950. xviii,
338, xviii p. illus.
50-12082 ML3561.J3B49 1950
"It has been two generations since ragtime piano
came along to give its own first decade in the public
eye the name of the 'Gay Nineties.' It was un-
mistakably a new idea in music. America took it
straightway to its heart — it was love at first sight.
And, following America by a matter almost of
months, Europe too fell under the syncopated spell."
So begins this story of one of the important phases of
jazz — a style that lived a flourishing, colorful exist-
ence and that still exerts a strong effect on modern
jazz. The Chicago World's Fair of 1893 first
brought the ragtime players to the notice of a large
public, and they held the center of the stage until the
jazz craze began in 1917, a year also marked by the
death of one of the pioneers, "the king of ragtime
composers," Scott Joplin (b. 1868). The other major
figure in Mr. Blesh's narrative is John Stilwell Stark
(1841-1927), publisher and propagandist of "classic
ragtime." Chiefly by means of interviews, both
with surviving musicians and with others who knew
them, the authors have reconstructed a detailed ac-
count of the development of ragtime, with informed
observations about the music, which they have ex-
amined extensively. Appendixes (p. 273-338) in-
clude a "Chronology of Important Ragtime Dates,"
"Lists of Ragtime and Other Compositions," "A
List of Disk Phonograph Records," "A Selected List
of Cylinder Phonograph Records Prior to 19 14," and
"A List of Player-Piano Rolls."
5642. Feather, Leonard G. The encyclopedia of
jazz. Foreword by Duke Ellington. New
York, Horizon Press, 1955. 360 p. illus.
55-10774 ML3561.J3F39
The core of this encyclopedia is a group of biogra-
phies of 1,065 )azz musicians (p. 75-332). The
sketches are mosdy short, but succincdy written and
full of information. Clustered around the biogra-
phies are other sections, some of which are equally
useful, while others merely add dispensable decora-
tion to the cake. Among the former are "A Brief
History of Jazz," "What Is Jazz? A Musical Analy-
sis," "A Basic Collection of [50 LP] Jazz Records
(p. 338-344)," "Glossary of Terms Used by Jazz
Musicians" (from the Apple to zoot), "Jazz Or-
ganizations," "Record Companies," and a selective
bibliography (p. 351-353). The "Hall of Fame"
and "Giants of Jazz" are necssarily controversial
and so of dubious value in a reference book, and
the "Birthdays" can satisfy nothing more urgent
than the curiosity of juvenile devotees. The book is
profusely illustrated with good photographs, which
include many published for the first time, and are
usually so perceptively and vividly conceived as to
constitute important documents by themselves.
5643. Lomax, Alan. Mister Jelly Roll; the for-
tunes of Jelly Roll Morton, New Orleans
Creole and "inventor of jazz." Drawings by David
Stone Martin. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1950. xvii, 318 p. illus. 50-8436 ML410.M82L6
From a recorded autobiography, from numerous
interviews with contemporaries, and from a broad
acquaintance with the music and the personages of
jazz, Alan Lomax has narrated here the extraor-
dinary life of one of the most colorful figures of
American music, christened Ferdinand Joseph
Morton (1885-1941) but universally known as
Jelly Roll Morton. His "autobiography" was re-
corded during most of a month (May 1938) for
the Archive of Folk Song in the Library of Congress
by Mr. Lomax, and this source supplies the warp
and woof of his skillfully woven fabric. The book
reads almost like a fantasy, although Mr. Lomax
points out some of Jelly Roll's illusions about him-
self, but if it seems extravagant here and there, the
atmosphere it recreates is authentic, which is an
828 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
important thing for a man of Morton's genuine
creativity. The story is rather a sad one, for Mor-
ton, after reaching a peak of fame and prosperity
during the 1920's, had difficulty in making a living
during the depression, and his health was ruined
when, soon after the Library recordings were con-
cluded, a roughneck Negro stabbed him in a cheap
Washington tavern. On the practical side, the ap-
pendixes include some of Jelly Roll's best tunes and
arrangements, a chronological list of his copyrighted
compositions (p. 292-296), and an extensive dis-
cography (p. 297-318).
5644. Ramsey, Frederic, and Charles Edward
Smith, eds. Jazzmen. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1939. xv, 360 p. illus.
39-31807 ML3561.R24J2
The editors, aided by contributions from William
Russell, Stephen W. Smith, Wilder Hobson, Roger
Pryor Dodge, and others, cover the three cities
where jazz arose, New Orleans, Chicago, and New
York, together with the hot jazz of 1939, in 15 chap-
ters. They describe the all-important atmosphere of
these locales and give vivid material on the out-
standing individuals and groups that took part in
creating jazz, including Louis Armstrong, Bix
Beiderbecke, King Oliver and his Creole Jazz Band,
The Austin High School Gang, The Five Pennies,
and others. These people and places have frequently
been written about since Jazzmen appeared, but
hardly with more skill or devotion.
5645. Sargeant, Winthrop. Jazz: hot and hybrid.
New and enl. ed. New York, Dutton, 1946.
287 p. 46-7084 ML3561.J3S3 1946
Bibliography: p. 267-274.
The first serious studies of jazz appeared in
Europe. Of the American books which followed
them, Mr. Sargeant's (first published in 1938) was
one of the first to approach jazz music analytically.
In both the first and the present edition, the author's
purpose is "to define jazz, to analyze its musical
anatomy, to trace its origins and influences, to indi-
cate the features that distinguish it from other kinds
of music and that give it its unique place in the
music of the world." Mr. Sargeant's ideas on the
origins of jazz are as speculative and open to objec-
tions as are those of other writers before and since,
but his analyses of scale-structure, rhythm, melody,
harmony, form, and instrumentation are so clearly
done that they will be long and widely meaningful,
even if they leave room for occasional differences
of detail. Mr. Sargeant, in conclusion, does not
believe that jazz is a fine art.
5646. Stearns, Marshall W. The story of jazz.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1956.
367 p. illus. 56-8012 ML3561.J3S8
Dr. Stearns, a professor of English literature at
Hunter College who is also president of the Institute
of Jazz Studies, is notably thorough in showing con-
nections of jazz with other forms of music, and his
tracing of the strands that make up the fabric of
jazz has been termed panoramic. The multiple
genesis from West Africa, Latin America, and early
Afro- America; the multitude of components from
blues, work songs, spirituals, minstrel shows, and
camp meeting music; and the styles indigenous to
particular centers of its flourishing life, from New
Orleans to 52nd Street, create a complex problem in
presentation, solved here with thoroughness and
clarity. Jazz harmonies, melody, rhythm, and in-
strumentation are dissected in generally clear and
perceptive fashion, and many of jazz's hitherto
elusive traits are particularized.
G. Orchestras and Bands
5647. Grant, Margaret, and Herman S. Hettinger.
America's symphony orchestras, and how
they are supported. New York, Norton, 1940.
326 p. 40-27266 ML3795.G82A5
This study of the economic problems of American
symphony orchestras on the eve of World War II,
made in order to find means of improving their
financial stability, was financed by the Carnegie
Corporation of New York and carried out by the
National Orchestral Survey under the chairmanship
of J. Frederic Dewhurst. Questionnaires were filled
out by 16 major orchestras (with budgets of $100,000
or more) and by approximately 135 secondary ones,
professional, semiprofessional, or largely amateur.
These documents were supplemented by interviews
and by audience studies in three communities. The
basic facts are set forth in Chapter 3, "Orchestra
Budgets and Sources of Income," but the variation
between orchestras of different types was so great
as to make brief summary impossible. Chapter 9
contains suggestions for "Increasing the Operating
Income," and Chapter 10 for "Meeting the Operat-
ing Deficit." The authors saw little likelihood "that
in the predictable future symphony orchestras can
be made entirely self-supporting," but thought that
the best prospects lay in measures "to build the
MUSIC
/ 829
orchestra firmly into the community as an integral
cultural force," and especially through "a careful
diversification of services," including children's and
youth concerts. Appendix A, Mrs. Miles Benham's
plan of work and organization for the Women's
Committee for the Cincinnati Symphony Orchestra,
1939-40 (p. 285-300), is a formidable document.
5648. Howe, Mark A. De Wolfe. The Boston
Symphony Orchestra, 1881-1931. Semicen-
tennial ed., rev. and extended in collaboration with
John N. Burk. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1931.
272 p. illus. 31-11067 ML200.8.B7B7 1931
5649. Johnson, Harold Earle. Symphony Hall,
Boston. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1950. 431 p.
illus. 50-9646 ML200.8.B72S95 1950
Henry Lee Higginson (1834-1919) was frustrated
in his attempt to become a professional musician, al-
though he went to Vienna for the purpose; at the
age of 33 he entered the family banking house of Lee,
Higginson, and Co., and within 13 years had accu-
mulated a fortune sufficient to permit his heart's de-
sire— to give Boston a permanent, professional
symphony orchestra (1881). For 37 years "The
Major" paid the annual deficits of the Boston Sym-
phony; only in the last year of his life did he turn
its affairs over to a board of trustees, one of whose
members was Mr. Howe. Not till its fourth season
did the orchestra secure a conductor capable of
building a first-class organization; but after five
seasons under Wilhelm Gericke, whom Higginson
had lured from the Vienna Opera, the Boston Sym-
phony was ready for the leadership of Arthur Ni-
kisch, the greatest virtuoso conductor of his day.
Mr. Howe's concise narrative was originally pub-
lished in 1914, when the orchestra was about to enter
its years of crisis: its German conductor, Karl Muck,
and its predominandy German personnel made it the
target of hysterical attack during the war years;
Higginson had set his face against unionization of
the players; and Higginson's own finances were
shaken by the war. Mr. Burk's supplementary nar-
rative (p. 130-172) tells how these were all resolved
during, and in large part through, the leadership of
Pierre Monteux. Mr. Johnson's volume, issued to
celebrate the 50th anniversary of the building which
has been the orchestra's home since 1900, is able to
survey the whole quarter-century ( 1924-49) of Serge
Koussevitzky, the Russian whose incandescent lead-
ership reconciled Boston to an extraordinarily varied
repertory. Its appendixes listing works performed
by and soloists appearing with the orchestra (p. 311—
420) supersede those in Howe. Chapter V, "Con-
cert Life," reviews the recitalists and musical organ-
izations other than the Boston Symphony that have
appeared in the Hall. At the end of Chapter VI
is a brief and hardly adequate description of the
unique and delightful Boston Pops — summer pro-
grams of lighter music, with the audience at
refreshment tables.
5650. Mueller, John H. The American symphony
orchestra; a social history of musical taste.
Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 195 1. 437
P- illus. 51-13728 ML200.M8
Mr. Mueller, a professor of sociology at Indiana
University, describes his book as "an analysis and
survey of the public life of orchestra compositions
as performed in American symphony orchestras,
with the intention of tracing" and accounting for
their fluctuations. It is based on 15 years' study of
the programs of 17 leading American orchestras, and
has numerous graphs and diagrams. After a brief
presentation of the European background and the
American beginnings of "the concert system," he
gives in Chapter 3 "profiles" of these 17 orchestras in
the order of their establishment, which provide a
very convenient concentration of widely scattered
information. Chapter 4, "Life Spans of Composers
in the Repertoire," identifies the six leaders, in the
order of their long-term popularity, as Beethoven,
Brahms, Wagner, Tchaikovsky, Mozart, and Bach
(for the period 1945-50 Richard Strauss was in 5th
place and Bach only 10th). The remaining com-
posers are divided into those "with low and stable
trends" such as Haydn and Handel; those "in the
ascending phase" such as Strauss and Sibelius; those
"in the descending phase" such as Schumann and
Schubert; those "with full life cycles" such as Dvorak
and Grieg; and "the forgotten names" such as Spohr
and Raff. Chapter 5, "National Sources of the
Orchestral Repertoire," reveals that Austro-German
music has slipped from a near monopoly of 80 per-
cent to a mere huge lead of 50 percent; that Russian
music, after running neck and neck with French for
three decades, took a secure lead after 1920; and
that since about 1905 American music has done
better than English, Czech, Scandinavian, or Italian.
Contemporary American composers run behind con-
temporary foreigners only because of the popularity
of Prokofieff and Shostakovitch. Chapter 6 is a
miscellany, with sections on "Management and
Union" and "The Audience and Its Folkways,"
especially its listening and applause habits. The
concluding chapter is an abstract and inconclusive
discussion of the bases of musical taste.
5651. Otis, Philo Adams. The Chicago Symphony
Orchestra, its organization, growth and de-
velopment, 1891-1924. Chicago, Clayton F. Sum-
my Co., 1925. 466 p. illus.
25-9031 ML200.8.C5O84
83O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5652. Russell, Charles Edward. The American
orchestra and Theodore Thomas. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, Page, 1927. xx, 344 p.
illus. 27-25803 ML1211.R88
Mr. Otis (1846-1930) became trustee, member of
the Executive Committee, and secretary of the Or-
chestral Association during its fifth season (1895),
and continued to serve until his death. His volume
consists of conscientious annals of both the associa-
tion and the orchestra which it maintained. Re-
ceipts and expenses of each season are regularly
given; after the completion of Orchestra Hall in
1904, the rental of its offices frequently enabled the
orchestra to conclude a season with a modest profit.
The soloists of each season are listed, sample pro-
grams incorporated, and memorial performances
given particular notice. The Appendix (p. 391-
448) lists the members of the association and the
personnel of the orchestra season by season. Mr.
Otis was justly proud of his long association with
Theodore Thomas, the hero of the second tide, which
received the Pulitzer prize for biography in 1928.
Thomas (1835-1905), the son of the Stadtpfeifer of
Esens in East Friesland, Germany, was brought to
America at the age of 10, and made appearances
as a violin prodigy. In 1862 he organized an orches-
tra of his own, which lasted under varying circum-
stances until 1888, and from 1869 he and it engaged
in regular and widespread tours, which introduced
artfully constructed orchestral programs to com-
munities quite unfamiliar with them. The success
of hs missionary efforts could be measured by the
"Thomas Festivals" of later years, when he and his
band joined with local choruses in large concerted
works. The great proliferation of "the grand or-
chestra" in 20th-century America is here regarded as
being largely the result of his work. Certainly
Appendix G, "Works Introduced into this Coun-
try by Theodore Thomas" (p. 323-335), speaks for
itself. Thomas was succeeded as conductor of the
Chicago Orchestra by Frederick Stock (1872-1942),
a German-born violist recruited for the season of
1895, who had gradually assumed the position of
assistant conductor. Mr. Otis' annals cover Mr.
Stock's first 19 seasons, but his final 18, and the
checkered fortunes of the orchestra since his death,
have yet to be chronicled.
5653. Schwartz, Harry Wayne. Bands of Amer-
ica. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957.
320 p. illus. 57-6697 ML1311.S35
A chatty, knowledgeable volume based primarily
on hearsay and personal recollections, and chiefly
concerned with the so-called "military" bands from
Patrick S. Gilmore (1829-1892) through J. P.
Sousa — actually touring or town bands that were
once as much a part of American show business as
vaudeville or blackface minstrelsy. The author is
perhaps unduly pessimistic about the passing of this
form of entertainment, forgetting the thousands of
school bands that are going concerns today — not to
mention the "big time" bands of Goldman and the
armed services. A no more scholarly but likewise
unique treatment of true military bands, those of
the armed services, is William Carter White's A
History of Military Music in America (New York,
Exposition Press, 1945. 272 p.).
5654. Sherman, John K. Music and maestros; the
story of the Minneapolis Symphony Orches-
tra. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1952. 357 p. illus. 52-1 1 107 ML200.8.M52M58
The author, familiar with his subject from his
daily activity first as music critic and then as arts
editor of the Minneapolis Star and Tribune, was
born five years before the inauguration of the Min-
neapolis Symphony on November 5, 1903. Minne-
apolis itself was a mere 36, having been incorporated
in 1867, and has frequently congratulated itself on
being the youngest city to form an orchestra of
national prominence. This it achieved, further-
more, under the direction of a local musician, for
Emil Oberhoffer (1867-1933), if Bavarian by birth,
had been identified with the musical life of the Twin
Cities for about a decade when he undertook the
leadership of the new orchestra, with such success
that his resignation in 1922, after increasing friction
with the orchestra's chief sponsor, was generally
regarded as a municipal calamity, and after three
decades he was still warmly remembered. He in-
augurated the policy of farflung orchestral tours,
making the Minneapolis Symphony better known
in the country than many older, bigger, and more
sedentary orchestras. Mr. Sherman, with a jour-
nalist's instinct for the newsworthy and an uncom-
mon narrative skill, has woven the various strands
and levels of the orchestra's life into what is prob-
ably the most readable history of an American, if
not of any orchestra. The regimes of each of Ober-
hoffer's successors — Henri Verbrugghen (1924-31),
Eugene Ormandy (1932-36), Dimitri Mitropoulis
(1938-49), and Antal Dorati (since 1949) — are indi-
vidually characterized. The excellent "Listings for
Reference" (p. 303-340) provided by Carlos Fischer,
an orchestra veteran of 1903, include complete per-
sonnel and out-of-town engagements, abridged
repertoire, and recordings as of September 1952.
MUSIC / 831
H. Opera
5655. Graf, Herbert. Opera for the people.
Minneapolis, University of Minnesota Press,
1951. 289 p. illus. 51-13790 ML1711.G7
The author's preface states that the aim of his book
is to offer "sufficient facts and suggestions to stimu-
late further thinking about the production of opera
in America . . . and thus to contribute to the prog-
ress of opera as an integral part of the life of the
American community." Drawing on his wide expe-
rience as stage director for some of the world's
leading opera companies as well as for opera in films
and television, Mr. Graf thoroughly covers the prob-
lems confronted in the production of opera, includ-
ing adequate English translations, sponsorship, stage
direction ("the stepchild of grand opera production
in America"), buildings, and the training of the
singers. The second section of the book records
developments toward a popular American opera,
emphasizing the musical theater on Broadway, and
opera in communities, schools, motion pictures, and
television. In his last section, "Blueprint for the
Future," the author suggests ideas for the model
opera house, ways to obtain financial support, pat-
terns of cooperation with existing musical activities,
and other information pertinent to any group inter-
ested in establishing a local opera company.
5656. Hipsher, Edward Ellsworth. American
opera and its composers. A complete history
of serious American opera, with a summary of the
lighter forms which led up to its birth. Philadelphia,
Theodore Presser Co., 1934. 478 p. illus.
35-2381 ML1711.H4 1934
Bibliography: p. 451-453.
The bulk of this book is devoted to short sketches
of American composers who have written operas.
These are arranged alphabetically and give a brief
sketch of the composer and the names of his most
important operas, as well as occasional anecdotes,
illustrations, and plots. This section is preceded by
a brief history of American opera, and followed by a
survey of ballet and masque and a conclusion which
observes, as of 1925, a flowering of American oper-
atic culture. To the author an American opera is one
"written in America, by one who is either a native or
who has been long enough a resident to have ab-
sorbed something of American life. Or, it might be
written by an American composer temporarily
abroad." Mr. Hipsher is generous toward operas
which he considers American, but he does not regard
American opera as having reached its zenith. Mean-
while he does not decry foreign influences; rather he
sees these as contributing to a culture from which
will someday be written the "great native American
Opera."
5657. Kolodin, Irving. The story of the Metropol-
itan Opera, 1883-1950, a candid history.
New York, Knopf, 1953. xx, 607, xxxviii p. illus.
52-12212 ML1711.8.N32M45
This is a critical history of the major seat of opera
in America. The first two sections cover the social
and economic aspects of the Metropolitan. The
major part of the book, "Operas and Artists," is
chiefly concerned with the repertory, the performers,
and the productions from 1883 to 1950. The detailed
assessment of the caliber of individual performances
reflects extensive research by the author. Of ref-
erence value is the "Compilation of Works" at the
end (p. 597-607), which lists the operas, ballets, and
choral pieces presented from 1883 to 1952, and gives
the seasons in which each was produced and the
number of performances. There are abundant and
well selected illustrations.
5658. Krehbiel, Henry Edward. Chapters of opera;
being historical and critical observations
and records concerning the lyric drama in New York
from its earliest days down to the present time. 3d
ed., rev., with an appendix containing tables of the
opera seasons, 1 908-191 1, etc. New York, Holt,
191 1. xvii, 460 p. illus.
12-262 ML1711.8.N3K73
5659. Krehbiel, Henry Edward. More chapters of
opera; being historical and critical observa-
tions and records concerning the lyric drama in New
York from 1908 to 1918. With illustrations and
tables of performances within the period described.
New York, Holt, 1919. xvi, 474 p.
20-217 ML1711.8.N3K74
Among a galaxy of distinguished music critics of
early 20th-century New York, Henry Edward Kreh-
biel (1854-1923) was the finest scholar. His re-
search in the history of New York opera was ac-
curate, but limited to highlights; for a more com-
plete and detailed picture, Odell's Annals of the
New Yor\ Stage (no. 4924) must be consulted.
Among local histories of American opera, however,
Krehbiel's work remains the finest. A few mono-
graphs, less detailed and usually less reliable, cover
other cities, but the best accounts are usually to be
832 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
found in the large general histories of local stages,
such as Reese D. James' Old Drury of Philadelphia
(Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1932. xv, 694 p.) and Arthur Herman Wilson's
A History of the Philadelphia Theatre, 1835 to 1855
(Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1935. 724 p.) for early Philadelphia, and Edmond
M. Gagey's The San Francisco Stage (no. 4918) for
San Francisco. Chapters of Opera summarizes the
years before 1825 and then delves into the beginnings
of Italian opera in New York, a favorite subject of
Krehbiel's. The next few decades are passed over
lighdy, but a more detailed narrative resumes with
the early impresarios (the memoirs of two of whom
are of great interest: Max Maretzek's Crotchets and
Quavers (New York, S. French, 1855. 346 p.), and
James Henry Mapleson's The Mapleson Memoirs
(New York, Bedford, Clarke, 1888. 2 v.)). The
establishment of the Metropolitan Opera, the rage
for Wagner, and the success of Oscar Hammerstein
are discussed, as Krehbiel's narrative begins to in-
corporate material from his own experience and his
writings as critic for the New Yorl{ Tribune, whose
staff he joined in 1880. More Chapters of Opera
carries this survey from 1909 through 1918. The
musical problems of the times are discussed frankly,
with acute critical insight, and in a dignified style.
Whereas Chapters of Opera derives much of its
worth from historical objectivity, the main value of
the sequel is its critical commentary on the con-
temporary scene by one of the most capable and
respected critics of the day.
5660. Moore, Edward C. Forty years of opera in
Chicago. New York, Liveright, 1930. 430
p. illus. 31-26070 ML1711.8.C5M7
To write the history of four decades of opera in
a great city is no mean task; to relate this history in
an interesting and readable style requires even
greater skill. Here is a wealth of information con-
cerning the growth of opera in Chicago, but, un-
fortunately, it often takes the form of a tedious ac-
count of board meetings, correspondence, and fi-
nances, interspersed with anecdotes of temperamen-
tal singers. The absence of a table of contents and
chapter headings lessens the value of the book. Sta-
tistics of performances from 1910 to 1929, board
members and officers of each season, soloists, and
cities visited on tours are listed in the appendix.
5661. Sonneck, Oscar G. T. Early opera in Amer-
ica. New York, G. Schirmer, 1915. 230 p.
illus. I5_5°39 ML1711.S73
Contents. — pt. 1. Pre-Revolutionary opera. — pt.
2. Post-Revolutionary opera.
Sonneck's histories of 18th-century American
music remain definitive. Some details in the his-
tory of early opera have been filled in since this
book was published, but few of its facts have been
corrected, nor has its organization of the material
been improved upon. The section on pre-Revolu-
tionary opera is concerned with performances by
one Tony Aston as early as 1703, and with the more
successful founding attempts about 1750, particu-
larly those of the company of Hallam and Henry in
Philadelphia. During the decade after the war,
theatrical performances were forbidden, and Son-
neck's next section concerns the circumvention and
breakdown of this ban. When performances were
again legalized in 1792, a rapid growth took place.
With Hallam's "Old American Company," now in
New York, the Wignell-Reinagle "New Company"
in Philadelphia, and smaller companies in Boston
and Charleston, the author is enabled to organize
this period by cities, with an "Epilogue" on the
French opera companies. Although some of Son-
neck's information is taken from George O. Seil-
hamer's History of the American Theatre [1749-
97] (no. 4905 note) most of it is drawn from his
own research, especially in early newspapers. The
details of the text are complemented by large
charts of performances. Within the text the de-
tails alternate with digressions which reveal the
insight of a profound scholar in American music
history.
5662. Taubman, Hyman Howard. Opera — front
and back, by H. Howard Taubman. New
York, Scribner, 1938. 388 p.
38-10497 ML1711.8.N3T22
The opera fan who desires to look at the human
side of operatic personalities and obtain a glimpse
of backstage (as well as onstage) catastrophes, will
find this book to his taste. The author, for many
years on the staff of The New YorJ{ Times, and
since the death of Olin Downes its chief critic, has
collected many fresh tales of personalities, rehearsals,
and operatic performances at the Metropolitan. In
the course of his barrage of anecdotes Mr. Taubman
painlessly communicates a vivid idea of the multiple
functions and the immense labor involved in bring-
ing about a unified operatic production. A chapter
of considerable interest is "What Audiences Pay
For," which lists the most popular operas presented
at the Met during the ten seasons 1924-34, as well
as those most frequently performed during the 27
years of Gatti-Casazza's management. Many ex-
cellent photographs of backstage scenes at the Metro-
politan are reproduced at the end of the book.
5663. Thompson, Oscar. The American singer; a
hundred years of success in opera. With 108
illustrations. New York, Dial Press, 1937. 426 p.
37-4988 ML400.T8A5
Oscar Thompson (1887-1945) was successively
music critic of the New York Evening Post and Sun,
esteemed for his high standards in criticism of vocal
performances. This volume, however, contains a
minimum of his astute evaluations and limits itself
to brief biographical sketches of important singers
associated with the American operatic stage. Mr.
Thompson's criteria for inclusion are broad, and
many artists are listed only because they were born
MUSIC / 833
in this country, or spent their flourishing years here.
The well-written sketches include a chronological
framework, the singer's most important roles, and
frequently anecdotal material and an evaluation of
the singer's significance in the development of
American opera. The sketches are put in a roughly
chronological progression, from Julia Wheatley,
who made her singing debut in 1835, to Richard
Bonelli, who returned to America in 1925.
I. Choirs
5664. Bergmann, Leola M. (Nelson). Music mas-
ter of the Middle West, the story of F.
Melius Christiansen and the St. Olaf Choir. Min-
neapolis, University of Minnesota Press, 1944. 230
p. >; A44-5713 ML410.C543B4
"Sources": p. 202-209.
According to the preface this is a threefold story:
"of the St. Olaf College as a center of Norwegian
Lutheranism in America; the life story of F. Melius
Christiansen as it unfolded in that setting; the story
of his work in music and how it grew from regional
to national significance." The author of this Iowa
dissertation, a former member of the St. Olaf Choir,
succeeds in catching the personality of this promi-
nent choral director and composer. Frederik Melius
Christiansen (1 871-1955) was of Norwegian birth,
came to America in 1888 and completed his musical
education here and in Germany, and became direc-
tor of music at St. Olaf's College (Northfield,
Minn.) in 1903. The choir was his foundation and
its national prestige the work of his skill and devo-
tion. Lists of published compositions by Christian-
sen (p. 210-216), the St. Olaf Choir series compiled
and edited by him, tours of the choir, and programs
from 1912 to 1944 appear in the appendix.
5665. Hastings, Thomas. The history of forty
choirs. New York, Mason Bros., 1854.
231 p. 6-12632 ML3925.H35
Thomas Hastings (1 784-1 872) ranks with Lowell
Mason as the most influential teacher of sacred music
in 19th-century America. From his experience he
drew this collection of 40 "parables" illustrating the
vicissitudes of the typical unpaid church choir of the
day. These tales do not purport to recount musical
history, of course, but rather are concerned to point a
moral; their drift would seem to be that godliness
finds a reflection in musical ability, and vice versa.
Nevertheless these faded Victorian pages frequently
reveal social mores and performance practices of
religious music about 1850, such as a more formal
treatment would probably miss.
5666. Messiter, Arthur H. A history of the choir
and music of Trinity Church, New York,
from its organization, to the year 1897. New York,
E. S. Gorham, 1906. 324 p. illus.
7-20654 ML200.8.N5T7
Trinity Church was chartered in 1697 an(^ opened
for services the following March; Dr. Messiter ex-
amines its first two centuries in order "to sketch the
history in this country of that system of Church
music which is called Anglican, as distinct from
Gregorian, Roman, and Lutheran." The resources
of a commercial metropolis enabled Trinity to take
the lead in many developments: here, in 1741, was
installed the first organ in the Colonies; and here in
1770 the organist, William Tuckey (late of Bristol
Cathedral) organized a performance of Handel's
Messiah a year before its first presentation in Ger-
many. Church and organ were burned during the
Revolution, but a new building was consecrated in
1790 and a new organ imported from England. In
1846 another Bristol man, Edward Hodges, Mus.
Doc. Cantab., became organist and choirmaster of
the again rebuilt church, and inaugurated a choir of
26 voices, men, women, and boys. From that year
the author is able to present specimen programs and
to describe the musical part of the service in great
detail. Dr. Henry S. Cuder of Boston, who took
over in 1858, soon eliminated females from the choir,
and got it into surplices from October i860, when
the Prince of Wales' attendance overawed the oppo-
sition. Messiter, a graduate of the Royal Academy
of Music, was musical director from 1866 to 1897,
and made Trinity a citadel of Victorian taste and
practice.
5667. Walters, Raymond. The Bethlehem Bach
Choir; an historical and interpretative sketch.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1918. 289 p. illus.
18-26489 ML200.8.B56W2
The rich musical tradition of the early German
settlers of Pennsylvania and North Carolina, while
still to be fully elucidated, is now increasingly ap-
834 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
predated in consequence of an organization of the
archives and special festivals at Winston-Salem,
N.C., and Bethlehem, Pa. The silver anniversary
of the Bethlehem festivals was celebrated in this
volume, compiled by a member of the executive
committee who was also dean of Swarthmore Col-
lege. Introductory chapters summarize the begin-
nings of the Collegium Musicum in 1744, the flour-
ishing years through 1825, and the revival of the
tradition in 1880. The first 25 festivals, held an-
nually after 1900, as well as some special programs,
are next described, with summaries of the music
performed and quotations from favorable New
York reviews. Sketches of the important leaders
and performers, and lists of other personnel, com-
plete the volume.
J. Music Education
5668. Birge, Edward Bailey. History of public
school music in the United States. New
and augm. ed. Philadelphia, Oliver Ditson Co.,
1939. 323 p. illus. 39-25132 ML200.B5 1939
Bibliography: p. 312-314.
Out of date and limited in scope though it is,
this history provides a useful if pedestrian survey of
institutions, trends, and some of the people most
active in public school music from 1838 to the 1930's.
The author discusses the New England singing
schools, the pioneer period in Boston, the beginnings
of method and of emphasis on reading music, and
the newer, faster developments of the 20th century,
such as the formation of nationwide music teachers'
associations. Optimistically he concludes: "School
music is no longer cloistered. Its spirit is that of
co-operation and helpfulness. School and com-
munity are rapidly coming together." The his-
torian will find the book especially useful for its
rosters of organization officers and its many photo-
graphs of public school music leaders. The first
edition of 296 pages was published in 1928.
5669. Davison, Archibald T. Music education in
America, what is wrong with it? What shall
we do about it? New York, Harper, 1926. 208 p.
26-11832 MT3.U5D26
Unlike Mr. Birge's book (no. 5668), this is not
a historical study, but a stocktaking of what music
meant to America in the 1920's and of how Ameri-
cans were then teaching it to their children. In the
three decades since its appearance we have come a
long way from what Mr. Davison (professor of
music and choral conductor at Harvard University)
then found to be the general attitude. The "aver-
age American" liked a bit of popular music, jazzy
and sentimental, but considered good music a non-
essential frill and was unwilling to support its
teaching in the schools. The book is nevertheless
still worth reading, apart from its historical signifi-
cance, in order to judge exactly how far we have
come and how valid the author's suggestions for
improvement remain.
5670. Jeffers, Edmund V. Music for the general
college student. New York, King's Crown
Press, 1944. 213 p. A44-1922 MT18.J4
"Selected bibliography on music for the general
college student": p. [i89]-i92; "Bibliography of
works cited in text": p. [i93]-2i3-
This doctoral dissertation (Teachers College, Co-
lumbia University) sketches the development of
music teaching in American colleges, with special
reference to Harvard, Vassar, and Oberlin. It is
useful for its figures (supplementing those in Ran-
dall Thompson's College Music; an Investigation
for the Association of American Colleges (New
York, Macmillan, 1935. xviii, 279 p.)) and its
"philosophies of college music," but the fact that it
does not consider the music programs of the larger
universities restricts its value.
5671. Riker, Charles Cook. The Eastman School
of Music; its first quarter century, 1921-1946.
Rochester, N. Y., University of Rochester, 1948.
99 p. illus. 49-2415 MT4.R6E247
A history of this outstanding school of music
necessarily extends major credit to three men:
George Eastman, Rush Rhees, and Howard Hanson.
Eastman (1854-1932), whose fortune was accumu-
lated by the development of an inexpensive portable
camera, also endowed the School of Medicine and
Dentistry of the University of Rochester. Rhees
(1860-1939) was president of the university during
1900-35, the period of Eastman's donations. Dr.
Hanson (b. 1896), a composer and conductor of note,
has been director of the school since 1924, and
is chiefly responsible for its determined emphasis on
American music of past and present. Mr. Riker
records the devoted and unselfish contributions of
each in the growth of the Eastman School of Music.
The history of the school is traced from its begin-
nings to the time of publication with an oudine of its
departmental structure and of its many and varied
activities. The widespread and significant influence
that this institution has had on the American musical
world is evident in the lists of publications and of
recordings, and the roster of musically prominent
alumni, which appear in the appendixes.
5672. Spalding, Walter Raymond. Music at Har-
vard; a historical review of men and events.
New York, Coward-McCann, 1935. xiv, 310 p.
illus. 35—20135 ML200.8.C2H3
Mr. Spalding (b. 1865) was a Harvard graduate
and a professor of music there from 1903 until his re-
tirement; and this book is a labor of love, albeit a
prosaic one. Formal instruction in music began in
the academic year of 1862-63, when John Knowles
Paine (1839-1906) was engaged, at the very foot of
the list of college officers, as instructor in music; in
1875 his achievement of the rank of full professor
indicated that music had established itself in the
liberal arts curriculum. But Professor Spalding's
narrative has a much earlier point of departure, for
music-making at Harvard long antedates music-
teaching, and the students' orchestra, which rejoices
MUSIC / 835
in its traditional name of the Pierian Sodality, was
organized on March 6, 1808. In 1837 it gave birth
to the Harvard Musical Association for graduates,
which has done much to further the musical life of
Boston. The chapel choir dates from about 18 14
and the glee club from 1833, but their potentialities
were realized only with the coming of Archibald T.
Davison (b. 1883) in 1910, who made them the
means of revitalizing college choral music and Prot-
estant church music throughout the United States.
The list of distinguished graduates of the depart-
ment of music includes such composers as Arthur
Foote, Frederick S. Converse, Edward Burlingame
Hill, Daniel Gregory Mason, John Alden Carpenter,
Roger Sessions, Robert Nathaniel Dett, Randall
Thompson, Virgil Thomson, and Walter Piston; as
well as Ralph Kirkpatrick, the scholar-harpsichord-
ist; Hugo Leichtentritt, the musicologist; and Henry
T. Finck, Richard Aldrich, Arthur Elson, and John
N. Burk, critics or writers on music.
K. Individual Musicians
5673. Anderson, Marian. My Lord, what a morn-
ing; an autobiography. New York, Viking
Press, 1956. 312 p. illus. 56-10402 ML420.A6A3
A frank and factual autobiography, in which the
famous Negro contralto describes her youth in Phila-
delphia, where she was born in 1902, her early train-
ing and subsequent concert career. There are chap-
ters discussing her recordings, concert life, and
repertory. The issue of race prejudice is handled
with candor, and her musical philosophy is amply
expounded. It is pleasantly free from the usual vices
of prima donna autobiography.
5674. [Barber] Broder, Nathan. Samuel Barber.
New York, Schirmer, 1954. in p.
54-13121 ML410.B23B7
This brief study of Samuel Barber (b. 1910) is
divided into two parts; the smaller on "The Man"
includes numerous extracts from the composer's
letters, and the larger on "The Music" has many
musical illustrations. Mr. Barber became a student
at the Curtis Institute of Music in Philadelphia when
it opened in 1924, and during his nine years there
formed his lifelong friendship with the young
Italian, Gian-Carlo Menotti. Mr. Broder describes
his failure to make a career as a baritone, his fre-
quent visits to Europe, and his service in the Army
during World War II, when after a period spent
transporting pianos he was commissioned to write a
symphony for the Army Air Forces. In later years
he has been one of the few American writers of
serious music "earning enough from his composi-
tions, in royalties, performance fees, and commis-
sions for new works and awards, to enable him to
devote all his time to composing." He is, neverthe-
less, a fastidious composer, and his opera from 1927
to 1953 number only 30. In part two Mr. Broder
supplies a 13-page essay on "The Style" ("an at-
tempt to fuse an essentially lyric spirit with an
awakened awareness of the restlessness and discord-
ance of our times") and descriptions of individual
works in seven categories, from music for single
voice to miscellaneous orchestral pieces. The Appen-
dix (p. 100-109) includes a chronological list of
works, a discography (both 78's and LP's), and a
list of eight articles about Barber. There are 16
pages of excellent photographs.
5675. [Copland] Berger, Arthur V. Aaron Cop-
land. New York, Oxford University Press,
1953. 120 p. 53—9183 ML410.C756B4
Mr. Copland, whom many regard as the foremost
living American composer, was born in Brooklyn
(1900), the son of Jewish immigrants from Lithu-
ania. On finishing high school he studied harmony
and composition with Rubin Goldmark, and in
1921 obtained his desire of going to Paris, where he
was for three years the pupil of Nadia Boulanger.
In the mid-1930's he abandoned his "esoteric" idiom
and tried to say what he "had to say in the simplest
836 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
possible terms"; he was rewarded by a gratifying
popular acclaim for his scores written for broad-
casting ("Music for Radio," 1937), for schools, films,
and ballet, and became a regular recipient of awards
and commissions. Arthur Berger (b. 1912), him-
self a composer of distinction, began his career as a
disciple of Copland's and writes from a large per-
sonal knowledge of both the man and his music.
He calls attention to Copland's "economy of means,
the transparency of his textures, the preciseness of
his tonal vocabulary." There is no artificiality in
Copland's later manner, for "he has found the means
of idealizing American folk tunes in their own
terms and in terms of his own native experience."
Julia Smith's Aaron Copland (New York, Dutton,
1955. 336 p.) cannot match Mr. Berger's interpre-
tative insight, but it is done on a larger scale, adds
some recent compositions, has much more bio-
graphical information, and, by discussing the music
along with this material, makes the interrelation-
ship of the two more evident. Both works have
appendixes listing Mr. Copland's compositions,
recordings, and writings.
5676. Damrosch, Walter J. My musical life. New
York, Scribner, 1930. 390 p. illus.
30-23573 ML422.D16 1930
Damrosch (1862-1950) was born in Breslau, Ger-
many, where his father Leopold conducted the
Philharmonic Orchestra, but was brought to Amer-
ica at the age of nine. Responsibility and oppor-
tunity were thrust upon him by his father's sudden
death in mid-season at the beginning of 1885; his
intelligence, honesty, tact, and impressive personality
ensured him a great career in spite of his lack of a
first-rate musical talent. His autobiography was
written in 1922 save for a final chapter, "Music and
Modern Magic," added to the present edition of
1930. Since he retired after 23 years' service as the
regular conductor of the New York Symphony Or-
chestra in 1926, the greater part of his career as an
operatic and orchestral conductor is surficiendy cov-
ered: his taking up his father's work as conductor
of German and especially Wagnerian opera at the
Metropolitan; his founding of the Damrosch Opera
Company in 1894 when the Met was slighting Wag-
ner; his work with the Oratorio Society of New
York: his "crusading" tours of the United States
with his orchestra; and his experiences during the
trying times of World War I. To this point it is
a clear picture of American musical life as the dean
of American conductors saw it. What the book
does not cover is its author's final and most original
phase, when his conduct of the NBC Music Appre-
ciation Hour from 1929 to 1942 made "Papa Dam-
rosch" a familiar and a favorite personality in the
homes and schoolrooms of the country.
5677. [Foster] Howard, John Tasker. Stephen
Foster, America's troubadour. [Rev. ed.]
New York, Crowell, 1954, c 1953. xv, 433 p. illus.
53-1 1 133 ML410.F78H6 1954
"The published works of Stephen Foster": p. 403-
"Give me the making of the songs of a nation,
and I care not who makes its laws." More than any
other man Stephen Foster (1826-1864) made the
songs of America; they brought him contemporary
celebrity and posthumous veneration, but in life
he achieved neither happiness nor dignity. This
wayward son of a solid Scotch-Irish merchant of
Pittsburgh abandoned commerce when he found
he could support himself by selling his songs to pub-
lishers such as Firth, Pond and Co. of New
York (later he arranged a preliminary sale to E. P.
Christy's Minstrels). Even after marriage and the
birth of a daughter his royalties should have been
adequate to middle-class comfort, but in the course
of the 1850's Foster separated from his family and
began a solitary life in New York City in which
alcohol increasingly took over from music. As late
as i860 he could produce a ballad as absolute as
"Old Black Joe," but within four years he died in
complete squalor. The golden melancholy of Fos-
ter's plantation songs is unique, but he could bring
off extraordinary successes in quite different veins
("Oh Susanna," "Jeanie with the Light Brown
Hair"), and it would be hard to point to another
untutored composer of comparable achievement.
Mr. Howard's volume, originally published in 1934,
incorporates the fragmentary evidence more or less
in full and so makes rather heavy going, but is in-
dispensable to anyone who wishes to form his own
idea of this attractive but elusive songmaker. An
early bibliography of the sheet music by Walter
Whitdesey and O. G. Sonneck has been completed
in James J. Fuld's A Pictorial Bibliography of the
First Editions of Stephen C. Foster (Philadelphia,
Musical Americana, 1957. 25, [181] p.).
5678. [Gershwin] Ewen, David. A journey to
greatness; the life and music of George
Gershwin. New York, Holt, 1956. 384 p. illus.
56-6192 ML410.G288E9
Lists of the composer's works: p. 330-355. Dis-
cography: p. 356-362. Bibliography: p. 363-368.
Gershwin (1 898-1937), whose father was born
Morris Gershovitz in St. Petersburg, Russia, began
life on New York's East Side, but by no means
in poverty or deprivation. Music was his own dis-
covery and choice; he had good classical teachers
from his 14th year, but followed popular music with
intensity, and left high school to become a song
plugger in Tin Pan Alley. By 1919 he had pro-
duced his first musical comedy score ("La, La
MUSIC / 837
Lucille") and his first song hit ("Swanee"); after
the ovation which greeted Paul Whiteman's per-
formance of his "Rhapsody in Blue" on February
12, 1924, he was an international figure. A suc-
cession of Broadway shows and motion picture
scores, together with a steady stream of royalties
from publications and performances, brought him
wealth as well as fame. He made further ventures
into symphonic jazz ("Piano Concerto in F," "An
American in Paris"), which continue to divide
critical opinion and to be very widely performed.
His folk opera, "Porgy and Bess," which Mr. Ewen
describes as his one completely successful "min-
gling of the serious and the popular," has had a
greater balance of critical favor. An undiagnosed
brain tumor struck Gershwin down in his 38th
year and at the height of his powers. Until critical
opinion concerning this quite unprecedented talent
and career has crystallized, Mr. Ewen's open-
mouthed success story will need little revision. In
the year after the composer's death Merle Armitage
gathered from 36 of Gershwin's friends tributes or
reminiscences, which vary greatly in character but
are nearly all marked by a sharp sense of personal
loss. The roll of contributors to Armitage's George
Gershwin (New York, Longmans, Green, 1938.
252 p.) is impressive — including, among others,
Paul Whiteman, Walter Damrosch, DuBose Hey-
ward, Rouben Mamoulian, Arnold Schonberg,
Serge Koussevitzky, Eva Gauthier, and Olin
Downes — and it is likely to remain a sourcebook
of value. The Gershwin Years, by Edward Jab-
lonski and Lawrence D. Stewart (Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 313 p.), also derives some
immediacy from a reminiscent introduction by
Carl Van Vechten and the active cooperation of
Ira Gershwin, George's elder brother. The straight-
forward chronicle in which the authors alternate
is provided with a wealth of illustrations, many of
them from Ira's collection of family photographs.
5679. Gottschalk, Louis Moreau. Notes of a
pianist. During his professional tours in
the United States, Canada, the Antilles, and South
America. Preceded by a short biographical sketch
with contemporaneous criticisms. Edited by his
sister, Clara Gottschalk. Translated from the
French by Robert E. Peterson. Philadelphia, Lip-
pincott, 1881. 480 p. 6-3711 ML410.G68G6
Gottschalk (1 829-1 869), the first native Ameri-
can pianoforte virtuoso and composer of note-
worthy music for the piano, was born in New
Orleans of an English father and a Creole mother.
At 13, for the completion of his musical education
he was sent to Paris, where he studied with Berlioz.
He began the career of a concert pianist in Europe
and did not return to America until 1853. His
compositions were long despised by the elect, but
while many are thick sentimentalism or empty
display, others have lately been discovered to in-
corporate rhythms regarded as characteristically
American. Gottschalk died in Rio de Janeiro,
where he had been entertaining the Emperor of
Brazil, and his personal property of value was
confiscated under a Brazilian droit d'aubaine; his
family had great difficulty in retrieving the trunk
in which the diaries of his tours were contained.
His sister, Clara Gottschalk Peterson, prepared
them for publication, and her husband, Dr. Peterson
of Philadelphia, translated them from Gottschalk's
French. Gottschalk was an alert and observant
traveler, and his record of concert life from 1853
to 1868 is well-nigh unique; at Sandusky, Ohio,
he was arrested in mid-recital because a $6.00 license
fee had not been paid to the town. The brief life
by his sister which preceded the diaries may now
be supplanted by Vernon Loggins' Where the Word
Ends; the Life of Louis Moreau Gottschal\ (Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1958.
273 p.), which utilizes the Gottschalk manuscripts
in the New York Public Library as well as a num-
ber of supplementary printed materials. He de-
scribes Gottschalk as "a man of pity — a prey to
relatives, friends, and doting women," who wore
himself out trying to satisfy the financial demands
of his growing string of dependents. A record of
American musical life in the next decade is supplied
by the master of French operetta, Jacques Offen-
bach, who described his American sojourn of 1876
in Offenbach en Amerique (Paris, Calmann Levy,
1877. xxxi, 252 p.). Two American translations
appeared the same year; a recent one by Lander
MacClintock has the tide Orpheus in America
(Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1957.
200 p.).
5680. [Griffes] Maisel, Edward M. Charles T.
Griffes; the life of an American composer.
New York, Knopf, 1943. xviii, 347, xi p.
43-6607 ML410.G9134M2
Charles Tomlinson Griffes (1884-1920) is the
classic American example of the composer who is
cut off by death just as he arrives at the fullness of
his powers and wins public acclaim. Mr. Maisel's
biography, filled with extracts from Griffes' letters
and diaries, makes fascinating reading, but lacks
clarity of oudine as well as a list of works, and is a
difficult book to use. It probably exaggerates the
lugubriousness of Griffes' story, which is that of
a delicate boy who became the favorite pupil of
Miss Broughton, the English spinster who taught
piano in Elmira, N.Y., and who lent the money to
give him four years of advanced study in Berlin.
On his return (1907) he became music instructor
838 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
at Hackley School in Tarrytown, N.Y., which pre-
pared boys for ivy-league colleges. Here Griffes'
limited income, slow recognition, fastidious tastes,
and homosexual inclinations doubdess provided an
element of strain. Mr. Maisel emphasizes over-
work, and Grilles did sit up late copying his scores
as opportunity at last came his way; but the influ-
enza epidemic of 1919 cut down many more robust
people than he. His musical development had
led him from German to French, Russian, and
oriental models, but his later work in this vein is
finished and effective, and his long piano sonata
(1918), quite individual in style, indicates that he
had not exhausted his potentialities. Mr. Maisel
analyzes it at length and calls it "the first major
utterance in American music."
5681. [Herbert] Waters, Edward N. Victor Her-
bert; a life in music. New York, Macmillan,
1955. xvi, 653 p. 55—1675 ML410.H52W3
"Compositions by Victor Herbert": p. 577-592.
"Phonograph recordings made by Victor Herbert":
P- 593-595-
Herbert (1859-1924) was born in Dublin of
upper-class Irish parents, but his youth was spent
in Stuttgart, Germany, where he received a thor-
ough musical education and became a promising
cello virtuoso. He came to America in 1886 when
Walter Damrosch, recruiting talent for the Metro-
politan, engaged the singer Herbert wished to
marry, and obligingly included her suitor as a mem-
ber of the orchestra. After miscellaneous begin-
nings as orchestra and chamber musician, soloist,
conductor, and composer of instrumental music, his
first large opportunity came when the players of the
late Patrick Gilmore's celebrated military band chose
him as their leader (1893-1900). The next year
he entered the sphere which made him the most
conspicuous American musician: for The Bostonians
he composed his first operetta, "Prince Ananias"
(1894). In the following 30 years he composed no
fewer than 43 such works; "The Serenade" (1897),
"Babes in Toyland" (1903), "The Red Mill"
(1906), "Naughty Marietta" (1910), and several
others were the greatest successes in the musical
theater of their day. Herbert was also a capable and
successful conductor of the Pittsburgh Symphony
Orchestra (1898-1904), leaving only because of a
widening breach with its manager; he thereupon
formed his own orchestra fcr lighter music. He
made two attempts at opera seria: "Natoma" ( 191 1),
which utilized Indian themes, and "Madeleine"
(1914), but neither gave much satisfaction at the
time or since. Mr. Waters here tells for the first
time the full story of Herbert's successful lawsuit
against the blackmailing Musical Courier (1902),
his advocacy of the Copyright Act of 1909, and his
part in founding the American Society of Com-
posers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) in 19 14.
Most reviewers have demurred at Mr. Waters' high
revaluation of the operetta music, but nearly all
agree that this is a masterly piece of research and
documented biography, a lifelike portrait of a great
musical personality, and an exceptionally solid con-
tribution to four decades of American music history.
5682. [Ives] Cowell, Henry, and Sidney (Robert-
son) Cowell. Charles Ives and his music.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1955. 245 p.
illus. 54-10000 ML410.I94C6
Bibliography: p. 235-238.
The musical career and fortunes of Charles Ives
(1874-1954) are probably the most singular of any
considerable composer in music history. The son
of the town bandmaster of Danbury, Conn., he ob-
tained a diversity of musical training and experience
in his youth, and at 14 was "the youngest organist
in the State." But his father, wearying of hand-
to-mouth finance, entered a bank two years before
his death; and on graduating from Yale Ives entered
a New York insurance office. In 1907 he set up
his own agency, affiliated with Mutual Life of New
York; it was extremely successful, and a pamphlet
setting forth his own ideas became "the Bible of
insurance agents." Meanwhile, and especially from
1910 to 1918, he went on composing great quantides
of music, in a great variety of forms; the "Chrono-
logical List of Compositions" (p. 211-233) is a long
one. A severe illness in 191 8 damaged his heart
and brought his production to an almost complete
stop; in 1929 he retired from business and spent
his remaining quarter-century in valetudinarian
comfort. His music was almost completely un-
known and unplayed, but from time to time a
zealous advocate appeared. After Henry Bella-
mann and Nicholas Slonimsky had failed to arouse
public interest, in 1939 John Kirkpatrick finally
succeeded with his performances of the "Concord
Sonata." From the beginning Ives had gone his
own way in polyphony (melodic lines set against
each other, "each with its own key and perhaps
also its own rhythm"), harmony ("at a time when
consecutive extreme dissonances were unknown,
Ives used them constantly"), melody ("in the exten-
sion of his motifs, Ives sometimes employs melodic
inversion, retrograde and inverted retrograde"),
rhythm ("in some spots and in some ways prob-
ably more involved than that to be found in any
other written music"), and form (the creation of
"an underlying unity out of a large number of
diverse elements, used asymmetrically"). After
World War I the musical avant-garde began doing
many of the things which Ives had been doing 25
years earlier; when his music was at length per-
MUSIC / 839
formed, critics found it influenced, among others,
by Hindemith — who had not begun to compose
until Ives had stopped, and of whose music Ives
had never heard a note!
5683. [MacDowell] Gilman, Lawrence. Edward
MacDowell; a study. New York, J. Lane,
1909. 190 p. illus. 9-609 ML410.M12G52
MacDowell (1861-1908) was born in New York
City, studied music at Paris and Frankfort, and at
the age of 19 became head piano teacher at the
Darmstadt Conservatory. On returning to America
in 1884 he pursued a career as pianist and composer
until 1896, when "the assurance of an income freed
from precariousness" led him to undertake the or-
ganization and direction of the new Department of
Music at Columbia University. Eight years of ad-
ministration and heavy teaching, combined with
continued composition and occasional performances,
brought him to the point of nervous exhaustion, and
his resignation in 1904 failed to halt a progressive
mental collapse: his creation was over and death
ahead. His professorship had been offered to him
as "the greatest musical genius America has pro-
duced," and Gilman considered, 13 years later, that
"he gave to the art of creative music in this country
its single impressive and vital figure." Seldom has
so unrivaled a contemporary reputation been suc-
ceeded by such complete neglect; it was Mac-
Dowell's misfortune that his disappearance from
the scene coincided with a revolutionary change in
musical fashions, and his great creative achievement
was shortly regarded as old hat. Gilman's memorial
volume, which has had no successor, is divided
into two parts: "The Man" consists of a brief biog-
raphy and a character study; "The Music-Maker"
characterizes his style as a refined and sincere
romanticism, traces his emergence as "A Matured
Impressionist," and has separate treatments of his
piano sonatas and songs. A "List of Works" (p.
181-190) is appended.
5684. [Mason] Rich, Arthur Lowndes. Lowell
Mason, "the father of singing among the
children." Chapel Hill, University of North Caro-
lina press, 1946. 224 p. 46-7444 ML410.M398R5
"Lowell Mason's writings": p. 138-172. "Other
related sources": p. 172-194.
Lowell Mason (1792-1872) made significant con-
tributions both to sacred and to public school music
in this country. The two careers are interwoven
in Mason's activities, so that although, as its subtide
indicates, this book is concerned with Mason's teach-
ing, it is also important to the study of his sacred
music. The story of Mason's life and of the Boston
Academy of Music, the school he founded in 1833,
is painstakingly related and well documented. His
importance is strikingly demonstrated in chapter 9,
where parallel texts show how Mason's statements
anticipate significant quotations from music edu-
cators of today. But while Mason's importance
remains unquestioned, other students of American
music history credit him with less priority and orig-
inality than does Mr. Rich. The extensive bibliog-
raphy adds to the value of the work.
5685. [Rodgers] Taylor, Deems. Some enchanted
evenings; the story of Rodgers and Hammer-
stein. New York, Harper, 1953. 244 p. illus.
53-7750 ML410.R6315T3
Other composers may have written more signifi-
cant music for the Broadway stage during the first
half of the 20th century, but Richard Rodgers (b.
1902) has indubitably been the most consistently
successful. Throughout his long professional career,
he has been associated with only two lyrists: Lorenz
Hart from 191 8 to 1942 and, after Hart's death,
Oscar Hammerstein II (b. 1895). Mr. Taylor casts
his book into four parts: the first covers Rodgers'
early years, his meeting with Hart, and the musical
comedies and motion pictures they wrote together;
the second goes back to sketch Hammerstein's
earlier theatrical experiences. Part three deals with
the Rodgers and Hammerstein collaborations, while
in the short part four Mr. Taylor says what little
he has to say on a variety of topics, contrasting typ-
ical Hart and Hammerstein lyrics, describing a
characteristic Rodgers melody with 14 short musi-
cal examples, and ending with brief accounts of
"Victory at Sea" and "Me and Juliet," which had
apparently been produced after the main body of the
book had gone to press. Mr. Taylor admits in his
introduction that there are difficulties in writing a
biography of two personal friends whom he admires
inoidinately, and there is here no probing of per-
sonalities, no adverse criticism, and no careful
weighing of the relative merits of other writers for
the contemporary Broadway stage. These limita-
tions are offset by Mr. Taylor's deft pen and ready
wit, and if the descriptions of so many shows follow
a repetitive pattern, the essential facts are all assem-
bled for convenient reference. David Ewen has
devoted a single volume to Richard Rodgers (New
York, Holt, 1957. 378 p.).
5686. Samaroff Stokowski, Olga. An American
musician's story. New York, Norton, 1939.
326 p. illus. 39-27277 ML417.S18A2
The author was born Miss Hickenlooper in San
Antonio, Texas; was for a few years Mme. Boris
Loutzky of Berlin and St. Petersburg; became Olga
Samaroff at the outset of her concert career in 1905
(her manager rejected not only her maiden name
but all the Anglo-Saxon surnames in her ancestry);
84O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
added Stokowski when she married the conductor
of the Cincinnati Symphony in 191 1 (the year before
his transfer to Philadelphia); and retained his name
after her separation from Leopold Stokowski in
1923. Madame Samaroff Stokowski (1882-1948)
had an exceedingly varied musical career: as a stu-
dent at the Paris Conservatoire and in Berlin; as an
informal coach to Geraldine Farrar; as a touring
pianist in America and Europe; as wife of the con-
ductor of a major orchestra; as an early maker of
piano records for Victor; as a teacher at the Juilliard
Graduate School of Music from its opening in 1925,
and at Philadelphia Conservatory; as music critic
for the New Yorf^ Evening Post; as founder of the
Schubert Memorial, a foundation which enables
promising young American musicians to give con-
certs; and as a pioneer in the "Layman's Music
Courses" intended to create more "active" and re-
sponsive musical audiences. All these phases are
narrated dispassionately and with some reflective
commentary, and the final chapter is an equally
thoughtful view of American musical life in general.
5687. [Schuman] Schreiber, Flora Rheta, and Vin-
cent Persichetti. William Schuman. New
York, G. Schirmer, 1954. 139 p.
54-14322 ML410.S386S3
Miss Schreiber contributes part one, "The Man"
(p. 1-48). Mr. Schuman (b. 1910) comes of a
middle-class German Jewish family of New York
City; for his first two decades his musical interest
was limited to participation in a jazz band and the
composition of popular songs. The first concert of
serious music he ever attended, the New York
Philharmonic's on April 4, 1930, brought about
what can only be called a conversion; he began
the study of music theory, and in 1936 became a
pupil of Roy Harris at the Juilliard Graduate School.
An outpouring of compositions in a variety of forms
resulted, and by 1945 Mr. Schuman was chosen to
head the Juilliard School, which he has done ever
since, with some diminution but no suspension of
his composition. There is an abundance of good
photographs. Mr. Persichetti, himself a composer
and a member of the Juilliard faculty, writes part
two, "The Music." Schuman's style, he says, is
marked by "the strong-flavored energy that gen-
erates a constant boil of movement," but is always
based on singable melodies, and is definable as
"structural derivatives of melodic character." Five
works are analyzed at length with numerous ex-
amples in musical notation. The Appendix (p.
126-134) nas lists °f works, records, and articles
by and about Schuman.
XXVI
Art and Architecture
A.
The Arts
5688-5697
B.
Architecture: General
5698-5703
C.
Architecture: Special
5704-5725
D.
Interiors
5726-5732
E.
Sculpture
5733-5740
F.
Painting
574I-5759
G.
Painting: Individual Artists
5760-5776
H.
Prints and Photographs
5777-5783
I.
Decorative Arts
5784-5793
J.
Museums
5794-5800
K.
Art and History
5801-5807
THE WORKS listed in this chapter, which deals with the visual arts and with practi-
tioners, collections, and exhibitions thereof, range from the scholarly and the critical
to the popular. Although a widespread interest in the arts did not arise in this country until
the 19th century, a very considerable literature on American art has accumulated, principally
since the logo's, from which we can present only a selection intended to be both represent-
ative and stimulating. Certain somewhat arbitrary omissions have been made. For ex-
ample, books on the architecture of single states
and cities have been almost wholly excluded. Sec-
tion C includes only six monographs devoted to
individual architects, of whom but one is an ex-
ponent of the modern idiom; alternative or addi-
tional choices will doubtless occur to the reader.
Sculpture, treated in Section E, may appear to have
been slighted, but it would seem that American
achievements in this field are rather less distin-
guished than those in architecture or painting, a
conclusion warranted, perhaps, by the scarcity of
published material on the subject. In Section G,
a mere sampling, only three contemporary artists
have received full treatment; many others are
briefly presented in three albums of recent paintings
listed in the previous section. Some omissions re-
flect the nonavailability of material. Thus, if the
great post-Civil War exemplar of the mystical strain
in American painting, Albert Pinkham Ryder, re-
ceives less than his due share of attention, it is be-
cause of a lacuna in art scholarship. In Section H,
prints and photographs are interpreted as high art,
as art for the people, and as records of the Ameri-
can scene and event; more material of the last kind
is included in Section K. There is, of course, no
clear line of demarcation between the decorative
arts treated in Section I, such as the metalwork,
glassware, pottery, and needlework produced by
artisans and craftsmen prior to the industrial revo-
lution, and the folk arts and crafts — quilting,
figureheads, samplers, kitchenware, and the like —
dealt with in Chapter xxiv. In each will be
found titles of interest to both the student and the
collector. During recent years, the picture book
has become an exceedingly popular medium for the
portrayal of American history; selections for inclu-
sion in Section K, however, have been drawn from
those which notice the artistic as well as the docu-
mentary elements, and which accompany their pic-
tures with a substantial text of some kind.
841
842 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A. The Arts
5688. Baur, John I. H. Revolution and tradition
in modern American art. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1951. 170 p. (The Library
of Congress series in American civilization)
51-13174 N6512.B3
Defines and traces the development of the chief
movements, particularly those revolutionary in sub-
ject or form, such as impressionism and abstract art,
in American painting and sculpture of the last 50
years. The author considers the relations of the new
schools to each other, their reflections of the Amer-
ican scene or their transformation from the Euro-
pean to the American idiom, and their effects upon
traditional survivals. Three final chapters are con-
cerned with the position of the artist in modern
civilization, current trends in art and criticism, and
the "Americanism" of American art. The 199 illus-
trations, averaging two or three to the page, are in
black and white.
5689. Cahill, Holger, and Alfred H. Barr, eds. Art
in America; a complete survey. New York,
Reynal & Hitchcock, 1935. 162 p.
36-1288 N6505.C32
"Lists and bibliographies": p. 153-162.
A broad historical review of the American arts by
a number of contributors, sponsored by the General
Federation of Women's Clubs with the cooperation
of several museums and the National Broadcasting
Company. Part I deals with painting, sculpture, and
architecture from their respective beginnings to the
Civil War. Part II continues the annals of these arts
from 1865 to 1934, and adds brief essays on stage de-
sign, photography, and the motion picture. Both of
the main sections are revisions of separate 1934 pub-
lications. There are numerous halftones in the text
and a group of 17 colored plates following page 62.
5690. Dunlap, William. A history of the rise and
progress of the arts of design in the United
States. New ed., edited, with additions, by Frank
W. Bayley and Charles E. Goodspeed. Boston,
Goodspeed, 1918. 3 V. 18-11108 N6505.D9 1918
Bibliography: v. 3, p. 346-377.
First published in 1834 by William Dunlap, who
"became permanendy a painter" only at the age of
51, this work has since served as a primary source
of information for the student of early American art.
Dunlap's method was to present a history of paint-
ing, and in smaller degree of engraving, architec-
ture, and sculpture, through a series of biographical
notices of the artists, from John Watson, a portrait
painter who came to the colonies in 1715, to Free-
man Rawdon, a New York engraver, born in 1804.
He gives three chapters of autobiography, some notes
on technical developments, accounts of the establish-
ment of the early academies, and information upon
early collectors and collections. The editors have
ventured upon "judicious pruning and corrections
of conspicuous errors" in the text as originally
printed, and have provided a list of several hundred
additional artists working in this country before
1835 (vol. 3, p. 281-343).
5691. Kouwenhoven, John A. Made in America;
the arts in modern civilization. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1948. xv, 303 p.
A49-1905 N6505.K6 1948a
Thesis — Columbia University.
"List of sources and references": p. [271] -290.
Develops the theme that the unique factor of a
"democratic-technological vernacular" tradition has
been overlooked in the interpretation of American
arts and culture. "The purest form of this vernac-
ular," says the author, "is represented by technolog-
ical design." This functional, vernacular design,
characterized since the middle of the 19th century
by economy, simplicity, and flexibility, has inter-
acted with the "tradition of cultivated taste" which
emanated from Europe. "It is in their interpene-
tration and in their alternate ascendancy in the work
of different men and different periods that the his-
tory of American art consists." Dr. Kouwenhoven
traces the increasing influence and acceptance of
vernacular forms and techniques from "Fordism,"
time and motion studies, and jazz, to literature and
the fine arts.
5692. La Follette, Suzanne. Art in America.
New York, Harper, 1929. 361 p.
29-29377 N6505.L3
A critical history of the arts in America from the
17th century to 1929, and of the changes in taste
evoked by the evolution of its social, cultural, and
economic structure. To the author the United
States has always been a nation of "cultural pov-
erty." "The Puritan sought to suppress the artistic
impulse in order that it might not divert him from
spiritual interests; his descendants sought to sup-
press it in order that it might not divert them from
material interests." Early colonial art was utili-
tarian, ornament being subordinated to structure.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 843
In the 18th century, under European influences,
ornament became an integral part of structure and
eventually even weakened it. In the 19th, under
the egalitarian influences of the frontier West and
machine industry, the main drift was "toward the
dull and the commonplace in art"; the appeal of a
picture lay in subject, not artistic merit. Except for
skyscraper and factory, architecture during the years
1900-1925 was bound to "archaeology," but modern
painting taught the public to seek "significance
rather than verisimilitude." The 103 gravure illus-
trations average one or two to a page.
5693. Larkin, Oliver W. Art and life in America.
New York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 547 p.
49-1 1 23 1 N6505.L37
"Bibliographical notes": p. 483-514.
Interprets for the informed layman the American
arts and the ways in which they have expressed our
manner of living, and provides for the general stu-
dent of American civilization a very serviceable
introduction to American art history. The six major
sections together span the years 1600-1945. As the
author observes, usefulness was the chief criterion
of the colonial arts. The buildings and sculpture
of American neoclassicism served as symbols of
political independence. The Jacksonian era saw a
flourishing "art for the people" in a proliferation
of genre paintings which furnished popular sub-
jects for the new lithographs, and saw, as well, a
persistence of "art by the people" in the richness
and variety of the so-called primitives. The last
three decades of the 19th century, when size and
slickness were the international fashion, were a
time of malaise for true artists, but a few continued
to seek "palpable truth" in "an age of surfaces";
and there was a whole new departure in architec-
ture. The 20th century has seen the rise of urban
realism and the development among artists of social
consciousness and participation. Closely linked to
the text is a brilliant repertory of illustrations.
5694. Lynes, Russell. The tastemakers. New
York, Harper, 1954. 362 p.
54-8968. E169.1.L95
A popular and readable survey of popular taste
in the visual arts from the advent of Jacksonian
democracy, when "taste became everybody's busi-
ness and not just the business of the cultured few,"
to the present day. The "tastemakers" are those
who have sought to influence the public's prefer-
ence, from Andrew }. Downing and James J. Jarves
to Pepsicola and Coming's Glass Center. The au-
thor, editor of Harper's Magazine, does not believe
that American taste is improving, but thinks that
varieties and conflicts in taste are a sign of artistic
vitality.
5695. Mumford, Lewis. The brown decades; a
study of the arts in America, 865-1895. [2d
ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 266 p.
55-14851 N6510.M8 1955
Includes bibliographies.
Originally published in 1931 and based upon
lectures delivered by the author in 1929, this book is
written in an informal vein for the layman. It
emphasizes the positive aspects of American culture
in the reckless and extravagant years 1865-95. "Be-
neath the crass surface," observes Mr. Mumford,
"a new life was stirring in departments of American
thought and culture that had hitherto been barren,
or entirely colonial and derivative." The creative
manifestations of the "brown decades" have been
overlooked, he believes, and he points out the ac-
complishments of philosophers and men of letters
as well as the shift in the whole culture to a concern
with the industrial and plastic arts. "The architect,
the engineer, the landscape architect, the painter, all
rode in together on the rising tide of industrialism."
Mr. Mumford considers, among others, the archi-
tects Louis Sullivan, H. H. Richardson, and the
young F. L. Wright; John A. Roebling, designer of
the Brooklyn Bridge; Frederick Law Olmsted, plan-
ner of New York's Central Park; the painters,
Ryder, Eakins, George Fuller, and Homer; and
Alfred Stieglitz, "photographer and interpreter."
5696. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Ab-
stract painting and sculpture in America,
by Andrew Carnduff Ritchie. New York, 1951.
159 p. 51-10619 ND212.N395
"Catalogue of the exhibition . . . January 23 to
March 25, 1951," by Margaret Miller: p. 148-156.
Bibliography, by Bernard Karpel: p. 156-159.
A picture book and catalog of Mr. Ritchie's selec-
tions for an exhibition of abstract art of the years
1912-50 "which seeks to display, at as high a level
of quality as possible, enough distinctive examples
of abstract painting and sculpture produced by
Americans, or foreigners long resident in America,
to give the observer and reader a sufficient appre-
ciation of the variety and extent of this form of art
in this country." "Protest against the established
order of traditional perspective, naturalistic space
and color, conventional subject matter," in Mr.
Ritchie's opinion, forms the factor common to all
motivations toward abstract art. Recent work he
classifies into the following, admittedly somewhat
arbitrary, categories: pure geometric, architectural
and mechanical geometric, naturalistic geometric,
expressionist geometric, and expressionist biomor-
phic. Unfortunately, only a few of the many illus-
trations are in color. An earlier sampling assembled
by Sidney Janis, Abstract & Surrealist Art in Amer-
ica (New York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1944. 146 p.),
844 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
presents work by 30 20th-century painters classified
as abstract, and 30 more classified as surrealist; the
layman would find it difficult to say why some pieces
are assigned to the one school rather than to the
other, and the paucity of color plates certainly does
not make for clarification.
5697. Purcell, Ralph. Government and art, a
study of American experience. Washing-
ton, Public Affairs Press, 1956. 129 p.
56-8543 N6512.P8
Government in America — Federal, State and lo-
cal— has done considerably less than in Europe to
encourage the fine arts, but its total patronage has
been by no means negligible. This volume traces
that patronage in all fields save the most important
one — the architecture of public buildings. From
1 8 17 to 1933 the Federal Government commissioned
a number of murals, acquired some paintings, and
engaged a few painters to report Western expedi-
tions or wartime scenes. From 1933 to 1939 the
Roosevelt administration subsidized several thou-
sand artists stranded by the economic collapse, not
only through the Federal Art Project of the Works
Progress Administration, but also by the embellish-
ment of public buildings through the Treasury's
Fine Arts Section. Contemporary trends include
the wide circulation of exhibitions of American art
abroad by the State Department, and a remarkable
development of collections and activities at the Na-
tional Gallery of Art. The author concludes: "If
private patronage of the Arts declines as it seems
likely to do, patronage by the government will be-
come a necessity if the Arts are to continue."
B. Architecture: General
5698. Andrews, Wayne. Architecture, ambition
and Americans; a history of American archi-
tecture, from the beginning to the present. New
York, Harper, 1955. 315 p. 55-8014 NA705.A5
"A selected bibliography": p. 289-303.
A report on architectural taste in the Anglo-
American main current of United States history,
taste being defined as "the record of the ambition
which leads the architect to spend more time and
energy than is reasonable, and the client, often but
not always, to invest more money than common
sense would dictate." This, then, is a chronicle
mainly of imposing residences, "those that were the
last word in their time and place." The steady
economic advance of the United States in the 19th
century kept generating new fortunes, the masters of
which looked for fresh ways to impress their neigh-
bors and thereby encouraged professional architects
and builders to make stylistic innovations. Mr.
Andrews delights in the resultant variety that ranges
from the formal, impersonal architecture created for
the "symbolic businessman," to the informal, ir-
regular styles created in our own day. He has
spent 16 years and has visited 39 States in making
the splendid photographs which illustrate this lively
and catholic record of the mansions of America.
5699. Fitch, James Marston. American building;
the forces that shape it. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1948. 382 p. 48-5133 NA705.F5
The "umbilical relationship between men and
buildings" forms the chief concern of this thought-
provoking, if somewhat doctrinaire, book. Its first
third traces the major forces that have shaped Amer-
ican architecture from the beginning to the Victorian
era and the Columbian exposition of 1893, and even
here the point of view is that of the technologist.
The latter two-thirds explores the "nature and func-
tion of contemporary building equipment ... in
relation to the respective environments which they
modify": the atmospheric, thermal, luminous, sonic,
spatial, and animate elements, in the author's classifi-
cation. In order to achieve his ideals of the multiple
use and the flexible organization of space, "demo-
cratic long-range planning" is necessary. A demo-
cratic esthetic can achieve rising standards of quality,
he believes, only when an increase in the quantity
and continuity of building makes intense creative
activity possible.
5700. Hamlin, Talbot Faulkner. The American
spirit in architecture. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1926. 353 p. The Pageant of
America, v. 13) 26-9196 NA705.H3
Ei78.5.P,v.i3
A picture book, presenting an exceptionally large
and varied selection of materials, but the 832 half-
tones are small and indifferendy executed. The
author gives half of his space to developments since
1880 and presents such types as railroad stations,
state capitals, county courthouses, museums, banks,
public libraries, tombs, monuments, schoolhouses,
university buildings, factories, warehouses, apart-
ment houses, hotels, and theaters. He points out the
representative and the horrible as well as the excel-
lent. The text emphasizes environment and local
materials, contact with the mother country, particu-
larly England, economic conditions, urbanization,
and westward expansion as factors of primary im-
portance in the development of American architec-
ture.
5701. Mumford, Lewis. Sticks and stones; a
study of American architecture and civiliza-
tion. [2d ed.] New York, Dover, 1955. 238 p.
55-14852 NA705.M8 1955
First published in 1924, this important chrono-
logical survey of American architecture demonstrates
"how architecture and civilization develop hand in
hand." Mr. Mumford traces here the major trends:
the "medieval tradition" of the "close village-
community" in 17th-century New England; the early
18th-century derivations from the Renaissance; the
vernacular work of the craftsmen, and the classical
work of the educated gentlemen and professional
architects of the early republic, among them Jeffer-
son and Latrobe. The "period of disintegration" in
the early 19th century was followed by a number of
discordant styles and combinations of them. The
durable in romanticism was expressed by H. H.
Richardson's continuator, Louis Sullivan. McKim,
White, Hunt, and Burnham exemplify the magnifi-
cence and opulence of the ensuing "imperial age,"
while a new electicism was pursued by Bertram
Goodhue. The subsequent "machine age" and the
dilemmas posed by it to the architect and to society
form the subjects of Mr. Mumford's final chapters.
5702. Pickering, Ernest. The homes of America,
as they have expressed the lives of our people
for three centuries. New York, Crowell, 195 1.
284 p. (The Growth of America series)
51-4857 NA7205.P5
"Architectural structures," in Professor Picker-
ing's opinion, "form the most permanent and reveal-
ing record of a civilization." Domestic architecture
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 845
has yielded to the pressures of climate and geog-
raphy, and has "expressed the materials, construc-
tion, and social order of the time." About two-thirds
of the book is devoted to the colonial, the Georgian
and Federal periods, and the Roman and Greek re-
vivals. The "era of confusion," after 1865, ar>d the
present century are more sketchily presented, since
the author is considerably more interested in out-
standing examples of early design than in the more
recent constructions which constitute the great
majority of American homes. Numerous halftones
illustrate the text.
5703. Tallmadge, Thomas E. The story of archi-
tecture in America. New, enl. and rev. ed.
New York, Norton, 1936. 332 p.
36-23858 NA705.T3 1936
First published in 1927.
A history of American architecture from the
1630's to 1935, written by an architect primarily for
the layman. Stylistic periods are defined as: "The
Colonial — 1630-1800," subdivided into Early Ameri-
can, 1 630-1 700, and Georgian, 1 700-1 800; "The
Post-Colonial — 1 790-1 820"; "The Greek Revival —
1820-1860"; "The Parvenu Period — 1860-1880";
"The Romanesque Revival — 1876-1893"; "Eclecti-
cism— 1893-1917"; and since 1917. Separate chap-
ters consider Spanish and Creole architecture, the
World's Fair of 1893, and Louis Sullivan as the
precursor of functionalism. Particular attention is
paid to architectural details and the ornamentation
of both exteriors and interiors. Although nothing
in our architectural history is "more beautiful, more
vigorous, more expressive of its times" than Geor-
gian of 1750, "the skyscraper is far and away the
most important architectural achievement of
America, her great gift to the art of building."
Along with numerous halftone illustrations are a
few typical plans.
C. Architecture: Special
5704. Bridenbaugh, Carl. Peter Harrison, first
American architect. Chapel Hill, Univer-
sity of North Carolina Press, 1949. xvi, 195 p.
illus. 49-9109 NA737.H3B7
"Published for the Institute of Early American
History and Culture at Williamsburg, Virginia."
A "biographical essay" about Peter Harrison
(171 6-1 775) who arrived as a colonist at Newport,
R.I., in 1739. This English seaman became the
master of no fewer than 10 skills, among them ship-
building and woodcarving, as well as "America's
first important architect." In his design of the Red-
wood Library at Newport, 1749, Harrison intro-
duced the Palladian style of architecture to this
country, and so anticipated Thomas Jefferson in the
revival of classical models. Although Harrison was
possessor of "the largest and best-selected archi-
tectural library of colonial America," the plans for
his churches, synagogue, and market at Newport,
Boston, and Cambridge, Mass., were those "of the
designer, not the copyist." His story is here docu-
mented from the fragmentary surviving sources and
846 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
set forth against the background of contemporary
colonial history.
5705. Condit, Carl W. The rise of the skyscraper.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1952.
255 p. 52-6468 NA712.C65
A comprehensive history of the Chicago school of
architecture and of the evolution of the commercial
skyscraper, from the time of the great fire of 1871 to
World War I, and from the first structural innova-
tions of the engineers to the functional designs and
architectonics of men like Dankmar Adler, Sullivan,
Burnham, and William Holabird. The work is
based in large part upon contemporary periodicals,
the records of engineering and architectural firms,
and the files of commercial photographers. Al-
though it designed every type of building, the
"Chicago school is associated with the invention and
mastery of steel framing and with the consequent
development of the modern office building, hotel,
and apartment block." Their success is attested by
"the largest concentration of first-rate commercial
architecture in the world. The 108 halftones from
photographs have been carefully selected.
5706. Forman, Henry Chandlee. The architec-
ture of the Old South: the medieval style,
1585-1850. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1948. 203 p. 48-8948 NA720.F6
Bibliography: p. [1851-191.
Based upon the author's wide field experience in
archaeology, this book incorporates lectures orig-
inally presented at Goucher College. "It is our
premise . . . that en bloc American architecture
of the Southern Colonies in the sixteenth and seven-
teenth centuries belonged to the English medieval
period, which, far from terminating with the acces-
sion of Elizabeth, continued until close to 1700.
Distance did not dilute or corrupt the style in
America." An introductory section considers our
English late Gothic heritage; Parts II-III, consti-
tuting the bulk of the book, deal respectively with
Virginia and Maryland architecture; and Part IV
devotes brief chapters to the medieval architecture
of Bermuda, North Carolina, South Carolina, and
Georgia. Professor Forman's many sketches and
plans include reconstructions of ruined or vanished
edifices and contribute in large measure to the com-
parisons made in his text between American build-
ings and their English prototypes.
5707.
Garvan, Anthony N. B. Architecture and
town planning in colonial Connecticut.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1951. xiv, 166
p. (Yale historical publications. History of art, 6)
51-14684 NA7235.C8G3
"Bibliographical note": p. 152-159.
"An investigation of the relationship between do-
mestic architecture and the demography and national
origins of colonial Connecticut." The book, an
outgrowth of a dissertation, makes use of aerial pho-
tographs, as well as manuscript land surveys and
other cartographical materials. "The colony's archi-
tecture, town plans, and land division were like its
settlers — rural, Protestant, and English." Choosing
a site with an eye both to defense and to pasturage,
the setders reserved "a few central acres within the
village unit for a meetinghouse and for the minister's
own house." Beyond the symmetrical center lay
an area of "wandering, haphazard lanes" which
frustrates 20th-century traffic and is often scrapped
by the modern planner. Since conservatism marked
Connecticut design, style changes from English
models were made chiefly in "small things and subde
details." An original "rich variety of architecture"
gave way to the predominance of the "clapboard
lean-to house, direcdy descended from the yeoman
post-enclosure farmhouse of eastern England,"
which crowded out the other styles and furnished
the basis for later developments. Many plates and
figures illustrate the text.
5708. Hamlin, Talbot F. Benjamin Henry La-
trobe. New York, Oxford University Press,
1955. xxxvi, 633 p. ^ 55-8117 NA737.L34H3
Based upon the "priceless Latrobe papers and
sketchbooks" as well as other sources, both primary
and secondary, this Pulitzer prize winning book is
a detailed biography of Benjamin Henry Latrobe
( 1 764-1 820), the "single-minded creator of the
architectural profession in the United States." His
designs for the Bank of Pennsylvania and the water
system of Philadelphia (1798) established him at
once as "the most accomplished and imaginative of
the architects and engineers in the United States."
Restrained and geometric in much of its composition,
his revolutionary work was "naturally classic in de-
tail and turned always to Greek precedent for
inspiration." He achieved his ambition "to establish
architecture as a high and respected profession"
through his own works, such as the Baltimore Cathe-
dral (1805) and portions of the United States
Capitol (1803-17), and through the accomplish-
ments of his students, Robert Mills and William
Strickland. Numerous plates and figures illustrate
die text.
5709. Hamlin, Talbot F. Greek revival architec-
ture in America: being an account of
important trends in American architecture and
American life prior to the War Between the States.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1944. xl,
439 p. 44-865 NA707.H32
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 847
"A list of articles on architecture in some Amer-
ican periodicals prior to 1850, by Sarah Hull Jenkins
Simpson Hamlin": p. [356] -382.
Bibliography: p. [383J-409.
A broad yet detailed history of Greek revival
architecture in the United States during the years
1820-60. Seeking monumental permanence and
conceived in terms of function rather than of archae-
ology, this architecture was inspired by classical
Greek style, using its details, but incorporating them
in original building forms. Greek revival architec-
ture received a "distinguished start" in the designs of
Benjamin Henry Latrobe as early as 1798. The use
of Greek style did not become universal, however,
until the late 1820's, and then largely through the
work of two of Latrobe's pupils, Robert Mills ( 1781—
1855) and William Strickland (1 787-1 854), who
brought the movement to its mature structural in-
ventiveness, soundness of construction, and excel-
lence of execution. It flourished in a culture
"learned, founded on classic myth, classic literature,
classic art." The "emergence of the millionaire was
as fatal to the artistic ideals of the Greek Revival
as were the speed, the speculation, and the exploita-
tion that produced him."
5710. Hitchcock, Henry Russell. The architecture
of H. H. Richardson and his times. New
York, Museum of Modern Art, 1936. xxiv, 311 p.
36-3985 NA737.R5H5
A study of the architectural accomplishments of
Henry Hobson Richardson (1 838-1 886) in the light
of the setting within which he worked. The author
has visited almost all of Richardson's extant build-
ings and has had access to his sketchbooks. During
the 1850's, the intellectuals had succeeded in termi-
nating the Greek revival, and with it a certain in-
tegrity of constructon. "It is in relation to this
almost complete loss of the sense of architecture as
sound building that Richardson's achievement after
the Civil War is most remarkable." He developed
a personal style characterized chiefly by "massive
walls, lintel-covered openings, . . . broad arches,"
and vigorous polychromy; he "was ready to find
inspiration in any part of the past that appealed to
him. The Romanesque was perhaps most useful."
A great individual, he raised American architecture
"from the slough of the late sixties." By the 1880's,
he had achieved an "excessive popularity, which led
to over-production." The text is illustrated by 145
photographic reproductions of drawings, facades,
and plans.
571 1. Hitchcock, Henry Russell. In the nature of
materials, 1 887-1941; the buildings of Frank
Lloyd Wright. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce,
1942. xxxv, 143 p. 42-13893 NA737.W7H5
"Chronological list of executed work and projects:
1887-1941": p. 105-130.
5712. Wright, Frank Lloyd. An American archi-
tecture. Edited by Edgar Kaufmann. New
York, Horizon Press, 1955. 269 p.
55-12271 NA737.W7K3
Professor Hitchcock's book aims "to display as
fully as may be the architectural work and projects
of Wright, with particular emphasis on the expres-
sion of the 'Nature of Materials.' " Subordinated
to the section of plates and linked closely to it, the
introductory text provides a rapid historical survey
of Frank Lloyd Wright's architecture. Parts I — II
show the influences exerted upon him, especially
by Richardson's followers and by Sullivan, and the
steps by which he attained maturity during the late
1880's and the 1890's. Parts III— VI are devoted to
Wright's mature work of the years 1901-41. Men-
tion is made of such buildings as the Willitts House
(1902), a masterpiece among the Prairie houses;
Taliesin (191 1-25), his own studio, dwelling, and
farm, which "quite literally grows" from the hill-
side; and the Imperial Hotel at Tokyo (1915-22), a
"building which is from foundation to roof all of
new materials and new devices compounded." Also
considered are the California houses of the 1920's,
illustrating Wright's "capacity to renew again and
again his architectural imagination by drawing on
the implications of particular uses of materials and
the opportunities of very carefully chosen sites," the
Kaufmann House, "Falling Water" (1936), and the
Johnson Administration Building (1936-39), the
two latter "widely recognized as classic masterpieces
even before they were finished." The 413 photo-
graphs and plans are accompanied by descriptive
captions. A special 92-page issue of the Architec-
tural Forum (v. 88, Jan. 1948), devoted wholly to
the architecture of Frank Lloyd Wright, comple-
ments Professor Hitchcock's volume by showing
many of the architect's later designs. This issue
was "completely designed and written by him; the
plans and sketches appear as they were drawn by
the 50 young men who now compose the Taliesin
Fellowship." A number of his Usonian houses are
depicted, as are group housing projects, more ambi-
tious dwellings, commercial and industrial estab-
lishments, buildings for Florida Southern College,
and others.
The editor of An American Architecture has
skillfully excerpted from various of the author's
writings published between 1894 and 1954 in order
to present the basic principles upon which his archi-
tecture is founded. Flis ideal of "organic architec-
ture," conceived as one with its setting and environ-
ment, and designed "for human use and comfort,"
is amply set forth in the 262 illustrations of projects
848 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and completed works from the period 1 893-1955,
some of which have never before been published.
5713. Kimball, Sidney Fiske. Domestic architec-
ture of the American colonies and of the early
republic, by Fiske Kimball. New York, Scribner,
1922. xx, 314 p. 22-24675 NA707.K45
"Chronological chart": p. [263J-269.
"Notes on individual houses": p. [27i]~3oo.
In this pioneer work, Dr. Kimball, with the "aid
of building contracts and accounts, inscriptions, and
original designs, as well as inventories, wills, deeds,
and other documents in favorable cases," indicates
the dates and original forms of nearly 200 houses
erected in the English colonies and American
republic between the time of settlement and 1835.
The 17th-century colonial style was "still essentially
mediaeval," but with the opening of the 18th century
the "academic spirit and the academic architectural
forms" prevailed. "The triumph of literal classi-
cism in 1825, with its ideal formal schemes of temple
and rotunda, had been prepared by Jefferson's
prophetic insistence on these very types, from the
time of the Revolution itself." Many plans and
elevations are included among the 219 illustrations
and figures.
5714. Morrison, Hugh S. Early American archi-
tecture, from the first colonial setdements to
the national period. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1952. xiv, 619 p. 52-7831 NA707.M63
"Reading suggestions" at end of each chapter.
A comprehensive but concise one-volume history
of architecture in the North American colonies from
St. Augustine in 1565 to San Francisco in 1848.
Professor Morrison surveys such edifices as houses,
churches, forts, log cabins, markets, mills, and public
and institutional buildings. He covers all the styles,
English, Dutch, French, Spanish, and, to a lesser
extent, Swedish, that were developed from the time
of the first setdements: to the American Revolution
on the Atlantic seaboard; to 1803 in French Louisi-
ana; and to 1848 in the Spanish colonies. The
primary emphasis is placed upon the colonial style
of the 17th century and the Georgian style of the
1 8th, and the conditions under which they were
produced. The author has made use of all of the
earlier literature, and has presented the several styles
"both in text and illustrations, by a selection of
typical . . . examples, by monuments of unusual
historical importance, and particularly by buildings
that are dated with reasonable certainty." He has
further attempted "to bring out the distinctive
quality and color of architecture in the many differ-
ent regions of the country." Many of the 484 illus-
trations were specially drawn for this work.
5715. Morrison, Hugh S. Louis Sullivan, prophet
of modern architecture. New York, Museum
of Modern Art and W. W. Norton, 1935. 391 p.
36-27013 NA737.S9M6
"A bibliography of the writings of Louis Sul-
livan": p. 306-309.
"General bibliography": p. 310-317.
An enthusiastic evaluation of the achievements of
Louis Henry Sullivan (1856-1924) in architecture,
of his theories concerning it, and of his position in
relation to present-day architectural practice. His
Wainwright Building (1890), "the first success-
ful solution of the architectural problem of the high
[office] building," incorporates Sullivan's "whole
conception of architectural design as the symbolic
expression of an emotion aroused by practical con-
ditions." To him, the thesis that form follows
function "was simply natural law." "His work and
his thinking have made architecture once more
plastic in the hands of the creative artist, and ren-
dered possible the development of a true architec-
tural style in the present day." The book includes
87 illustrations and 16 figures. John Szarkowski's
The Idea of Louis Sullivan (Minneapolis, University
of Minnesota Press, 1956. 161 p.) is an album of
halftone reproductions of photographs, most of them
quite clear, documenting the architect's fundamental
concepts as to functional forms, "vertical continuity,"
and organic systems of ornamentation; accompany-
ing them is a "Profile of Louis Sullivan," together
with quotations from Sullivan and others germane
to the pictures. Just before he died Sullivan com-
pleted a lyrically written sketch of his own life,
The Autobiography of an Idea (1924; reprint with
additional material by Ralph Marlowe Line, New
York, Dover Publications, 1956. 333 p.), which
seeks to reveal the origin and development of his
central conception: "a sane philosophy of a living
architecture, good for all time, founded on the only
possible foundation — Man and his powers," issuing
in a functional, democratic, and indigenously Amer-
ican style of both structure and ornament.
5716. Mumford, Lewis, ed. Roots of contempo-
rary American architecture; a series of
thirty-seven essays dating from the mid-nineteenth
century to the present. New York, Reinhold, 1952.
454 p. 52-10519 NA710.M8
A collection of papers, together with an intro-
ductory essay and biographical sketches by Mr.
Mumford of the 29 writers whose work appears here.
The book assembles a "body of thought that helped
form modern architecture in the United States
during the last century." Later interpretations,
mainly the editor's own, fill gaps in the first-hand
documents. The writers, among them critics, his-
torians, naturalists, and regional planners, as well
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 849
as architects, range from Horatio Greenough
(1805-1852) to Matthew Nowicki (1910-1950).
The American tradition of architecture Mr. Mum-
ford defines as "a mode of thinking and feeling, of
planning and organizing and building, that Amer-
icans became conscious of only after they had estab-
lished their political independence, had thrown off
their colonial ways, and had begun to create a new
mold for their life, in which past habits were modi-
fied by new processes, new activities, new purposes."
The point of departure was a break with the concept
of an architectural absolute, and it was made in
architectural writings long before it was translated
into new building forms.
5717. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Built
in USA, 1932-1944, edited by Elizabeth
Mock. New York, 1944. 127 p.
44-7779 NA712.N45
5718. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Built
in USA: post-war architecture, edited by
Henry Russell Hitchcock and Arthur Drexler.
New York, Distributed by Simon & Schuster [1952]
128 p. 53-568 NA712.N47
Two catalogs designed to accompany exhibitions
of outstanding modern American architecture that
were assembled by the Museum of Modern Art in
1944 and 1952. Listing 47 edifices chosen by a com-
mittee mainly "on the basis of total design," the first
volume is perhaps strongest in the field of domestic
architecture. This was an area in which the Ameri-
can architect had "had the most opportunities and
the freest hand." During the years 1932-44, he was
interested particularly in the "straightforward use
of material," and a more intimate adaptation of
structure to climate and topography, as well as in
the exploitation of such materials as reinforced con-
crete and laminated wood, the strength of which
permitted a new freedom of design in both plan and
elevation. Choice of the 43 buildings included in the
1952 catalog has been the "final responsibility" of
Professor Hitchcock, whose criterion is a double one,
"quality and significance of the moment." His
introduction notes that "it has been business, inter-
ested in the advertising value of striking architec-
ture, which has sponsored many of the more
luxurious — and not to balk at a word — beautiful
buildings of the last few years." Modern design,
the author observes, is nationally standardized but
not monolithic, and the "international mode" has
been thoroughly domesticated. Both catalogs pro-
vide a two-page spread for each building dealt with,
including a brief description of its salient architec-
tural features, a plan, and photographs of exterior
and, usually, of interior views.
5719. Newcomb, Rexford. Architecture of the
Old Northwest Territory; a study of early
architecture in Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Michigan,
Wisconsin, & part of Minnesota. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1950. xvii, 175 p.
5 0-905 1 NA725 .N4
Bibliography: p. 162-167.
"The result of some thirty years of observation and
study," this comprehensive synthesis "attempts to
set forth, for the first time, a connected story of the
career of architectural art in the Old Northwest
from the earliest days down through that moving
formative period which came to a close with the
Civil War." Mr. Newcomb begins with a discussion
of French colonial architecture of the early 18th cen-
tury, which he reconstructs, so far as possible, from
contemporary descriptions and travel reports. He
goes on to describe the half-faced camps, forts, and
cabins of the American pioneers, and to discriminate
Southern and New England influences in the more
ambitious structures derived from early American
styles. Examples of the Georgian and Federal modes
are few, he observes, and "in general, it was the
Greek Revival — in its heyday during the developing
period of the Northwest," the years 1825-60 — "that
followed the cabin when better homes could be
built." The text is illustrated by 97 plates and 49
figures.
5720. Place, Charles A. Charles Bulfinch, archi-
tect and citizen. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1925. xiv, 294 p. 25-27877 NA737.B8P5
This biography of Charles Bulfinch (1763-1844),
the first American architect of native birth, relies
upon oral tradition as well as family letters, contem-
porary journals, the Boston town records, and other
documents. The Hollis Street Church in Boston
(1788) was apparently his first executed design, and
the State House at Hartford, Connecticut (1796),
was the first public building constructed from his
plans. His design of a state house for Massachu-
setts was adopted in 1795, and he enjoyed a "connec-
tion with this structure . . . more personal and
intimate than with any other of his designs." He
executed a number of residences, churches, and
public buildings in the Federal style during the
years 1796-1818, among them the Massachusetts
General Hospital. The remainder of his career,
1818-30, he devoted to the Capitol at Washington.
"Bulfinch's work . . . was to complete the wings
partially restored by Latrobe after the destruction
by the British troops in 1814, and to construct the
central portion for the most part from plans made
by Latrobe, making such changes as were necessary."
The illustrations consist in large part of photographs
of buildings long since demolished.
431240 — 60-
-55
85O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5721. Pratt, Dorothy, and Richard Pratt. A guide
to early American homes. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1956. 2 v. 56-10867 NA7205.P68
Contents. — [1] North. — [2] South.
An informal handbook to surviving American
houses of the years 1 680-1 850, designed for tourists
to use in conjunction with road maps. Geographi-
cally arranged, brief histories and descriptions are
furnished of more than 900 early homes in the 14
states of the North between the Adantic seaboard
and the Mississippi, and of nearly 700 in 16 states of
the South including Missouri and Arkansas.
Approximately two-thirds are public museums; the
remainder are private dwellings, many of which are
conditionally open to visitors. General commentary
on the architecture of each state is provided, as is
specific information regarding locations of the
houses, requirements for admission, and ownership.
There are numerous rather small black-and-white
illustrations, predominantly of facades.
5722. Pratt, Richard. A treasury of early Ameri-
can homes. New York, Whittlesey House
[1949] vii, 136 p. 49-50069 NA7205.P7
These 22 color-illustrated articles, devoted to fine
American homes, many of them manorial in scale, of
the period 1 650-1 850, were originally published in
the Ladies' Home Journal. With the exception of
the ones in Natchez, New Orleans, and Monterey,
all of the houses covered lie within the region of the
English colonies along the Atlantic seaboard, from
Woodstock, Vermont, and Portsmouth, New Hamp-
shire, to Charleston. An introduction provides a
thumbnail history of American domestic architec-
ture. Deliberately subordinated to the illustrative
material, the chronologically arranged text is limited
to historical summaries, and to descriptions of the
major features of the houses and of the interiors and
furnishings depicted. Similar in format, The Sec-
ond Treasury of Early American Homes, by the
author in collaboration with his wife, Dorothy Pratt
(New York, Hawthorn Books, 1954. 144 p.), is an
"entirely new collection of early American homes
in color." "Chosen for their age and their charm
together," the 57 houses and more than 140 interiors
delineated here are geographically arranged — south
from Maine to Georgia, and west to Tennessee. The
color is less satisfactory in the sequel, the reds and
yellows having an unnatural intensity.
5723. Sanford, Trent Elwood. The architecture of
the Southwest; Indian, Spanish, American.
New York Norton, 1950. 312 p.
50-10641 NA720.S3
Lists of pueblos and missions: p. 276-299.
An architectural history of the American South-
west, where Indian, Spanish, and Anglo-American
cultures are blended. Part one considers Pueblo
Indian architecture which culminated during the
years 1050-1300. Comprising the bulk of the book,
parts two to five are devoted to Spanish architecture,
particularly to the influential 17th-century Spanish-
Pueblo style in which Spanish ideas and methods
were applied "to an indigenous architecture of local
materials put in place by Indian labor," and to the
florid 18th-century Spanish baroque. A concluding
section is devoted to Anglo-American contributions
to the architecture of the Southwest, the most notable,
perhaps, being Thomas Oliver Larkin's 19th-century
adaptation of the Cape Cod mode to adobe in a
two-story house with a hipped roof and a balcony.
Numerous halftones illustrate the text. Rexford
Newcomb's Spanish-Colonial Architecture in the
United States (New York, J. J. Augustin, 1937.
39 p. 130 plates) briefly describes and illustrates, in
many halftones and measured plans and drawings,
surviving Spanish-Colonial structures, as well as the
best modern adaptations of the old styles in the
"regional vernaculars" of Florida, Texas, New
Mexico, Arizona, and California.
5724. Sloane, Eric. American barns and covered
bridges. New York, W. Funk, 1954. 1 12 p.
54-12510 NA8201.S6
This book springs out of its author's enthusiasm
for antique American handhewn woodwork, its
materials and tools, and its characteristic end
products. The importance of wood in early Ameri-
can life, the importance of seasoning, and the
characteristics of native American woods are de-
scribed. Early American tools are described and
illustrated in the author's skillful drawings or dia-
grams. Barn design altered little in the two cen-
turies after 1650; the author admires New England
and Pennsylvania patterns and compares them at
length, but considers that, in the trans-Allegheny
migration, "many of the arts of woodworking and
seasoning were lost." Covered bridges were devised
at the very end of the 18th century and continued
to be built for about 70 years; the covering strength-
ened the structure, and kept water out of the joints,
and rain and snow off the roadway. There are some
1600 left, but they are disappearing very rapidly.
American Yesterday (New York, W. Funk, 1956.
123 p.) pursues the author's nostalgic interest in
antique artifacts down a number of curious by-
ways, such as foot stoves, hammocks, weathervanes,
and shutters, and has the same kind of attractive
illustrations.
5725. Waterman, Thomas Tileston. The dwell-
ings of colonial America. Chapel Hill,
University of North Carolina Press, 1950. 312 p.
50-14735 NA707.W42
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 85 1
Bibliography: p. 291-293.
"Glossary of architectural terms": p. 294-298.
"This study of the dwellings of colonial America
is confined to the period between the first English
settlement and the close of the Revolution, and to
the area occupied by the United States in 1783."
The four main chapters trace, in considerable detail,
the patterns of evolution, and the intricate and varied
influences involved in the domestic architecture of
the Southern colonies, the Delaware Valley and
Pennsylvania, the Hudson Valley and eastern New
Jersey, and New England. Each chapter discusses
the primitive one-room shelters of the original set-
tlers, the vigorous, even "homely" styles of the 17th
century, and the mature and sophisticated Georgian
mode of the 18th. Numerous photographs of exte-
riors, interiors, and details, together with the
author's plans, illustrate the text.
D. Interiors
5726. Brazer, Esther (Stevens). Early American
decoration; a comprehensive treatise reveal-
ing the technique involved in the art of early
American decoration of furniture, walls, tinware,
etc. Memorial [/. e. 2d] ed. Springfield, Mass.,
Pond-Ekberg, 1947. 265 p.
48-490 NK1403.B7 1947
First published in 1940.
A study of 18th- and early 19th-century Amer-
ican methods of applying designs in one or more
colors to the surfaces of movables and interior walls,
based upon the author's observations of the designs
themselves, her research in early instruction books,
and her own experiments. In the hope that "an-
tique furniture and tinware, old-time decorated
walls and floors, may be restored with their proper
designs and with their own methods of painting,"
she works out the old principles of design, the first
of which is that decorative design must emphasize
construction; the materials, tools, and their proper-
ties and uses; and the various techniques of design,
such as stenciling, brush-stroke painting, striping
and banding, freehand bronze painting, gold leaf
work, japanning, retouching, restoring, and an-
tiquing. A final part offers a "step-by-step pictorial
exposition" of the copying of the old decorations.
Mrs. Brazer contributes many photographs and
drawings, some in excellent color.
5727. Cornelius, Charles Over. Early American
furniture. New York, Appleton-Century
[1936?] xx, 278 p. 36—13493 NK2406.C6 1936
Bibliography: p. 263-268.
First published in 1926.
This history of the development of American fur-
niture from the 17th century to 1850 shows the
"growth in artistic consciousness from a time when
utilitarianism predominated over esthetic de-
mands ... to the time when a highly organized
society expressed itself in sophisticated terms." Ex-
ecuted by carpenter-joiners, the earliest furniture
preserved the "primitive rectangular character in-
herited from medieval times." By the first decade of
the 1 8th century, cabinetmaking had achieved a new
excellence, and the "baroque forms, based preferably
upon the curved rather than the straight line, began
to affect the structure"; especially influential were
the light and delicate classical proportions of Shera-
ton's designs. From 1820 to 1850, when mechanical
methods predominated, "interest was less in esthetic
values" than in ingenuity. The book is illustrated
by 63 photographic plates and 12 figures.
5728. Cornelius, Charles Over. Furniture master-
pieces of Duncan Phyfe. Measured detail
drawings by Stanley J. Rowland. Garden City,
N.Y., Published for the Metropolitan Museum of
Art by Doubleday, Page, 1922. 86 p.
22-23282 NK2439.P5C6
An examination of the "sincere craftsmanship and
consummate artistry" of Duncan Phyfe (1768-
1854), New York cabinetmaker, in the first quarter
of the 19th century. The author sees Phyfe, in his
earlier practice, as heir to the age of George Hepple-
white and Thomas Sheraton, "able to profit by all
the accomplishments of the last great English cabi-
net-makers," and to "pick and choose those treat-
ments which his native good taste and feeling for
his craft told him were legitimate and appropriate
for his use." In a second phase, he adopted many
motifs of Directoire and Consulate origin, but "com-
bined them skillfully with those of his earliest prac-
tice, still keeping the delicate scale and fine finish of
the latter." Mr. Cornelius analyzes in detail the
architectural proportions, lines, and decorative
methods and motifs, particularly the acanthus and
lyre, of Phyfe 's best-designed chairs and benches,
sofas, tables, and other pieces. Five plates of detail
drawings supplement the 56 halftone photographs
of whole pieces. Duncan Phyfe and the English
852 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Regency, IJ95-1830, by Nancy V. McClelland (New
York, W. R. Scott, 1939. 364 p.), stresses the
"beauty and suavity" of the tables, chairs, sofas,
window seats, and the like, which Phyfe produced
before 1825, as well as the "clean, well-defined lines,
the accents of light and shade, and the flatness of
carving that might actually have been done by a
sculptor of stone or marble."
5729. Kettell, Russell Hawes, ed. Early American
rooms; a consideration of the changes in
style between the arrival of the Mayflower and the
Civil War in the regions originally settled by the
English and the Dutch. Portland, Me., Southworth-
Anthoensen Press, 1936. xvii, 200 p.
37-392 NK2003.K4
"Color schedule": p. xvii.
Mr. Kettell and 19 collaborators here present 12
chapters on 12 rooms, "permanendy available for
public study," each of which was a center of social
activity in its own particular time. Of the rooms,
one is from 17th-century and 6 are from 18th-century
New England; one each is from 18th-century New
York, Philadelphia, and Virginia; one is from early
19th-century New Jersey, and one from Victorian
New York. Included are living rooms, dining
rooms, and parlors, as well as a drawing room, a
barroom, and a ballroom. Each chapter contains
a discussion of the history and everyday living of the
period; a general exposition of the contemporary
styles exemplified by the room under consideration;
a document "selected to throw light on the period
as a whole or on some particularly colorful aspect of
it"; and 2 leaves of a contemporary newspaper in
type replica. The drawings in direct orthographic
projection show the room completely furnished.
One plate for each room reproduces its color scheme.
5730. Litde, Nina Fletcher. American decorative
wall painting, 1 700-1 850. Sturbridge,
Mass., Old Sturbridge Village, in cooperation with
Studio Publications, New York, 1952. xvi, 145 p.
52-10836 ND2606.L58
"Selective bibliography": p. 138-140.
A pioneer survey based mainly upon the author's
investigations of old buildings, museum materials,
and 18th-century newspaper advertisements. Be-
cause little of such painting has survived in the
South, most of her examples come from New Eng-
land houses. Earlier techniques included graining,
marbleizing, and japanning of woodwork, painting
of wall panels and overmantels in scenic or still life
motifs, and decoration of fireboards and floors. By
the end of the 18th century, panoramic scenes, sten-
ciled patterns, and freehand floral designs were
being painted directly on the plaster walls. Decora-
tive wall painting gave way to machine-printed
paper in the mid-i9th century. There are lists of
painters, with biographical sketches, and of impor-
tant works in and out of museums (p. 129-138.) A
few of the 146 illustrations are in badly blurred
color.
5731. Miller, Edgar G. American antique furni-
ture, a book for amateurs. New York,
M. Barrows [1948, ci937] 2 v. (1106 p.)
48-9713 NK2406.M55 1948
First published in 1937.
Designed "not only to show to the amateur collec-
tor what is fine, but also to show what is not fine,"
these elaborately detailed volumes provide a wealth
of information about furniture produced, chiefly in
America, during the years 1650-1840, as well as
2,115 illustrations of the objects described. The
photographs, taken for the most part especially for
the work, are of articles in private homes rather
than museums. After four introductory chapters
dealing with sundry matters such as the danger of
encountering fakes, each chapter is devoted to a
chronological treatment of a single type of furni-
ture, as for example, the sofa, highboy, cupboard,
mirror, and clock. The very extensive footnotes
consist of documentation, explanation or amplifica-
tion, and pithy comment; they are, in the author's
opinion, almost as important as the text, "and some-
times are more interesting."
5732. Rogers, Meyric R. American interior de-
sign; the traditions and development of
domestic design from colonial times to the present.
New York, Norton, 1947. 309 p.
47-12416 NK2003.R6
Bibliography: p. 297-302.
"This book is intended to survey . . . the tradi-
tion, evolution and qualities of the American
domestic interior," from 1630 to 1947. Four of the
five chapters trace the development of design in
American household furniture and accessories from
colonial times to 1920. The author analyzes suc-
cessively the Jacobean style of the 17th century, the
Queen Anne and Chippendale styles of the 18th, the
Federal and Empire styles of the 19th, and the
"battle of the styles" which extended into the first
decades of the 20th century. The concluding chap-
ter, "The Age of Social Readjustment," takes the
story from 1920 to 1947, and discusses the implica-
tions of Functionalism for the future. Each chapter
summarizes briefly the political, economic, social,
and architectural background of its period. A glos-
sary and biographical notes, together with 196 illus-
trations and 39 plates, a number of them colored,
complete the volume.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 853
E. Sculpture
5733. Brumme, Carl Ludwig. Contemporary
American sculpture. New York, Crown,
1948. 156 p. 48-9357 NB212.B75
"Biographical notes": p. 145-149.
Bibliography: p. 150-156.
5734. Schnier, Jacques P. Sculpture in modern
America. Berkeley, University of California
Press, 1948. 224 p. 48-11026 NB205.S35
Bibliography: p. 65-67.
The first of these picture books presents, in the
words of William Zorach's introducdon, "all direc-
tions and schools of thought in sculpture, in this way
giving an over-all picture of what is happening to-
day." "In this survey," states Mr. Brumme, "em-
phasis is, of course, placed on the younger sculptors,
for the task of further developing a contemporary
esthetic direction is primarily theirs." In their work,
a "broadened perspective plus the findings of 20th-
century experimenters in pure form have engen-
dered the esthetic philosophy of form needed in our
age of individual expression." Having virtually
eliminated text in order to conserve space, Mr.
Brumme has arranged the 130 illustrations alpha-
betically by sculptor, from George Aarons to
William Zorach.
After pointing out the indebtedness of 19th-
century American sculptors to European artists, Mr.
Schnier turns to a style the development of which, in
the years 1909-12, represents "a turning point in
the evolution of sculpture in this country." He notes
three major trends in the treatment of representa-
tional content. In the one "followed by the majority
of American sculptors, easily recognizable subject
matter is integrated into effective designs, bur with
no attempt at realistic interpretation." In that of the
pure abstractionists, Alexander Calder, Isamu No-
guchi, and, more recently, Claire Falkenstein,
"forms have been completely divorced from repre-
sentational content, and the entire emphasis is placed
on formal arrangement." In that of the surrealists,
"recognizable elements are arranged in a completely
unreal and bizarre manner or combined with ab-
stract forms." The 139 plates are classified under the
headings: heads, figures, animals, reliefs, and
explorations in form.
5735. Cordssoz, Royal. Augustus Saint-Gaudens.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1907. 85 p.
7-40526 NB237.S2C8
An appreciation of the work of Augustus Saint-
Gaudens (1848-1907) by Royal Cortissoz (1869-
1948), who was for many years art editor of the
New Yor\ Herald-Tribune. He believes that Saint-
Gaudens "was not only our greatest sculptor, but
the first to break with the old epoch of insipid ideas
and hide-bound academic notions of style, giving
the art a new lease of life and fixing a new standard."
His own style "was remarkable for its blending of
polish with freedom." He executed portrait medal-
lions of delicacy, spontaneity, and realism during
the 1870's and '8o's. In modeling the single draped
figure of the Adams Monument (1887), Saint-
Gaudens was "the poet, the dramatist, intermingling
with the concrete qualities of plastic art the more
elusive qualities of mind and soul." His other great
triumphs were portraits in the round and on the
scale of the public monument: Admiral Farragut,
Abraham Lincoln, and Deacon Chapin in the '8o's;
the Robert Gould Shaw Memorial, unveiled in 1897;
and the equestrian statue of General Sherman, un-
veiled in 1903. The text is illustrated by 24
heliotype plates.
5736. Cresson, Margaret (French). Journey into
fame; the life of Daniel Chester French.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1947. xv,
316 p. 47-30328 NB237.F7C7
Bibliography: p. [3151-316.
An intimate and anecdotal biography of Daniel
Chester French (1 850-1931) by his daughter. She
delineates a man of great energy, self-confidence,
and tenacity of purpose, a career of ever-increasing
artistic significance, and a financial success in the
true 19th-century American tradidon. When his
first commission, "The Minute Man," a symbol of
the youth, vigor, and determinadon of the country,
was unveiled at Concord, Mass., in 1875, this New
England sculptor "suddenly vaulted into fame."
The claim has been made for his greatest work, the
colossal seated figure in the Lincoln Memorial dedi-
cated at Washington in 1922, that it has "established
the image of Lincoln for posterity." Although her-
self a sculptor, Mrs. Cresson offers relatively little
analysis of her father's style, noting only his efforts
to gain "crispness in modeling" and "a kind of
native classicism" in him.
5737. Fite, Gilbert C. Mount Rushmore. Nor-
man, University of Oklahom Press, 1952.
xiv, 272 p. 52-79 19 NB237.B6F5
854 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"Selected bibliography": p. 255-260.
Based upon both official and private records, this
is mainly a history of the association of Gutzon
Borglum (1867-1941) with the controversial Mount
Rushmore National Memorial. The sculptor was
commissioned in the early 1920's to carve in the
Black Hills of South Dakota a "gigantic monument"
commemorating some aspects of American history.
Impressed by the size and greatness of the United
States, he wished to leave behind a "monument
which would stand for all time as a record of su-
preme achievement — a monument to the nation and
to himself." Even on a reduced scale the work was
beset by financial difficulties and personal conflicts,
and the last of the four enormous figures of Wash-
ington, Jefferson, Lincoln, and Theodore Roosevelt
was not unveiled until July 2, 1939. Criticism of
the colossi has come chiefly from two sources: those
who account them a desecration of nature, akin to
the incising of initials in the bark of a tree, and
others who object to the romantic naturalism of
Borglum's style. The 32 photographs document the
evolution of the memorial.
5738. Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck. Yankee stone-
cutters; the first American school of sculp-
ture, 1 800-1 850. New York, Published for the
Metropolitan Museum of Art by Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1945. 84 p. 45-8846 NB210.G3
These informal essays attempt to place early 19th-
century American "sculptors and their works in rela-
tion to the life of the time." George Washington,
as a symbol of liberty and national unity, was the
"most important single factor in the encouragement
of the sculptural arts in the young nation." After
1815, the rebuilt Capitol and other public buildings
had "to be redecorated in an appropriate classical
manner to satisfy the Greco-Roman republicans of
the New World." Most of the artists concerned
were "timid, provincial amateurs of art" aiming at
faithful copies mechanically produced. William
Rimmer (1816-79), however, was a creative artist
far above his contemporaries, whose works are pre-
sented "unadorned with anecdote, as direct studies
in the art of sculpture, and not as petrified dramas."
Horatio Greenough (1805-52) also towered over
the rest, but as a thinker who grasped the basic prin-
ciples of functionalism and organic relationships.
The author lists sculptors, stonecutters, carvers, and
modelers in America before 1800; sculptors born
between 1800 and 1830, for whom brief biographies
are supplied; and some born between 1830 and 1850.
The illustrations, averaging two to a plate, are
clearly reproduced.
5739. Smith, Chetwood, and Mary Smith. Rogers
groups, thought & wrought by John Rogers,
by Mr. and Mrs. Chetwood Smith. Boston, C. E.
Goodspeed, 1934. 145 p. 35-932 NB237.R65S6
A biography of John Rogers (1829-1904), based
upon his letters, scrapbooks, and catalogs, together
with an illustrated catalogue raisonne of his work.
This New England sculptor, who enjoyed a tremen-
dous popular vogue in the years 1860-90, illustrated
with his statuettes especially the humorous and senti-
mental aspects of everyday life. He modeled and
patented 80 clay sculptures from which plaster
casts were made and sold, in a variety of shades of
pearl and slate grays, fawn, snuff, and cinnamon
browns. Among the most popular of the "Rogers
Groups" were "The Slave Auction" and other
frankly abolitionist pieces; "Coming to the Parson,"
often used as a wedding present; "The Charity
Patient"; and "Playing Doctor." "The last two,
together with 'Fetching the Doctor' and 'The
Foundling', were much used for decorating doctors'
offices; in fact, the Medical Record advertised them."
It is estimated that there were sold 100,000 of these
"real and friendly creatures, made by the man who
was jusdy called 'The Laureate of Home.' "
5740. Taft, Lorado. The history of American
sculpture. New ed., with a supplementary
chapter by Adeline Adams. New York, Macmillan,
1930. 622 p. 30-32611 NB205.T3 1930
"General bibliography": p. 607-618.
This history of his predecessors and contempo-
raries by the eminent sculptor, Lorado Taft (1860-
1936), first appeared in 1903, and was revised for
an edition of 1924. The first artists noticed, men
like William Rush and John Frazee, were wood-
carvers and stonecutters, who labored without edu-
cation and without a tradition. Tutored in the
Italian classical style, Horatio Greenough, Hiram
Powers, and Thomas Crawford began their real
work in the 1830's and soon attained national prom-
inence. They chiseled realistic portrait busts and
drew inspiration from myth, allegory, and the Bible
for their "ideal figures." Between 1850 and 1876,
"timidly but hopefully American sculpture began
to grow contemporaneous in spirit; the 'actual'
crept at last upon the stage, while classic themes
gradually receded." With the unveiling of his
statue of Admiral Farragut in 1881, Augustus Saint-
Gaudens "took his place at the head of American
sculpture." "Our sculpture is pledged mainly to the
safe and sane," Mrs. Adams observed in her chapter,
but "as the passion for novelty increases, the faith
in fundamentals declines." There are numerous
illustrations in a halftone which did not improve
with successive reprintings.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 855
F. Painting
5741. American painting today. Washington,
American Federation of Arts, 1939. 179 p.
40-209 ND212.A57
A picture book containing 249 monochrome and
10 color reproductions of easel paintings in oil, water-
color, tempera, and gouache, and of murals in fresco,
tempera, and oil, executed mainly during the 1930's.
Many of the plates first appeared in the Magazine of
Art. "The effort has been to illustrate, on a wide
front, by means of a great variety of visual material
picked by successive editors, what American painters,
known and unknown, young and old, conservative
and liberal, have been doing in the past ten years or
so." In his introduction, Forbes Watson notes the
domination of the art world by the School of Paris
and by French dealers during the 1920's, and the
subsequent rediscovery of his own country as a
source of inspiration and subject matter by the
American painter. Thanks to the depression and the
artist relief program of the Federal Government,
"we are moving away from a period which produced
individuals of unquestionable capacity into a period
when we are laying the foundations of a great body
of art."
5742. Barker, Virgil. American painting, history
and interpretation. New York, Macmillan,
1950. xxvii, 717 p. 50-10368 ND205.B29
A comprehensive and carefully organized inter-
pretative history of American painting through the
colonial and "provincial" periods, which latter is
dated from 1790 to 1880. These large periods are
further subdivided, and within each lesser era the
known painters are minutely classified, principally
by their subject matter, but also by their region,
function ("Painters working for reproduction") or
style ("Poetic figure painting"). Major figures re-
ceive one or more chapters to themselves; the lesser
ones are grouped as many as 19 to the chapter. At-
tention is given to the painters' own ideas of their
art, and to the social milieu in which they worked.
The "provincial" period actually witnessed a com-
plete transformation in the basis and nature of
American painting, for as late as 1775 most of the
native-born American painters remained at the craft
level. "The exceptions were as striking in quality
as they were few in number: [Matthew] Pratt
[i734-i8o5],with his subtle tasteful ness; [Robert]
Feke [c. 1705-c. 1750], with his talent; and Copley,
with his genius." Patronage of painting by wealthy
merchants permitted its existence as an art, but only
after 1820 was there a demand for pictures other
than portraits. The post-Civil War trio, Ryder,
Homer, and Eakins, "became in their achievements
representatively American to a degree which had
probably been impossible before their time." There
are 100 halftone illustrations; the thorough bibli-
ography follows the organization of the book.
5743. Born, Wolfgang. American landscape paint-
ing; an interpretation. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1948. 228 p.
48-8092 ND1351.B6
A review of the sequence of styles in American
landscape painting which selects for study "signifi-
cant examples of the trends determining the evolu-
tion." "The roots of the American landscape proper
were the topographical drawing, water color, and
print," the harbor view being the most popular from
mid-i8th century to the beginning of the 19th. The
romantic Washington Allston "ushered in the de-
velopment of American landscape painting" in 1804
with two scenes of imaginative mood, but the first
authentic school of landscape painters, which flour-
ished at mid-century, was inspired by the scenic
beauty of the Hudson River Valley. The panoramic
school of 1840-70 reflected the "mentality of the
American expansion" in a weakness for melodrama
and show. After the Civil War, however, a break
in tradition occurred, and, under French influence,
dramatized presentation of subject was superseded
by a succession of technical interests. The 142 black-
and-white illustrations are disappointingly small and
dark.
5744. Born, Wolfgang. Still-life painting in Amer-
ica. New York, Oxford University Press,
1947. xiv, 54, [98] p. 47-5146 ND1390.B6
An interpretation of American still-life painting
"all but forgotten by art historians until the present
century," which distinguishes a succession of styles
and schools. The objectivist "botanic-decorative"
style, initiated about 1810 at Philadelphia by the
remarkable Charles Willson Peale family, launched
the American still life as an independent art form.
Up to the Civil War, flower and fruit pieces were
favorite subjects with amateur and primitive paint-
ers. The best still-life painter of the mid-century
was John F. Francis (1810-1885), who departed
from convention in order to study volumes, textures,
and colors. In the 1880's, William M. Harnett
(1848-92) scored a tremendous success with his
856 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"heightened interpretation of reality expressed by
the old technique of the trompe I'oeil" only to be
quite forgotten after his early death. Charles De-
muth (1882-1935) "was the first American painter
who undertook to adapt the achievements of French
post-impressionism to the American feeling for
mechanization." "The quiet labor of American
still-life painters" has achieved "the establishment
of a consistent American tradition." The 134
gravure illustrations, averaging one or two to a page,
are quite clear. In After the Hunt; William Harnett
and Other American Still Life Painters, 1870-1900
(Berkeley, University of California Press, 1953.
189 p. 136 illus.) Alfred V. Frankenstein tells the
story of a remarkable course of detective work by
which he was enabled to establish the canon of
Harnett's genuine work (102 extant and 21 lost
paintings), and to distinguish it from the work of
his skillful admirer and disciple, John Frederick
Peto of Philadelphia (1854-1907), most of whose
surviving canvases had been given Harnett signa-
tures by later forgers. Another unique personality
of the American trompe-l'oeil school, John Haberle
of New Haven (1856-1933), whose canvases "be-
stow fantastic consequence on the inconsequential"
and so suggest the surrealists, is given a chapter to
himself.
5745. Boston. Museum of Fine Arts. M. and M.
Karolik collection of American paintings,
1 8 15 to 1865. Cambridge, Published for Museum
of Fine Arts, Boston [by] Harvard University
Press, 1949 [i.e., 1951] Ix, 544 p.
51-8136 ND210.B73
An elaborate, alphabetically arranged catalogue
raisonne, together with monochrome plates, of the
233 paintings which Mr. and Mrs. Maxim Karolik
presented to the Boston Museum of Fine Arts in
1948. Because many of the artists are forgotten or
virtually unknown, biographies have been supplied.
The collectors had "one purpose only: To show
what happened in this country in the art of painting
in the period of half a century . . . and to show the
beginning and the growth of American landscape
and genre painting." In his introductory essay,
"Trends in American Painting, 1815 to 1865,"
John I. H. Baur notes that although realism was a
sine qua non of art, the broadly romantic spirit of
the age demanded an "image of the Ideal." Painters
who failed to conform to the standard of idealized
realism tended to be "forgotten." Among the re-
cently rediscovered talents represented here are
Martin J. Heade and Fitz Hugh Lane, realists in
landscape, James G. Clonney and William T. Ran-
ney, realists in genre, and John Quidor, a non-
realist.
5746. Brown, Milton W. American painting,
from the Armory Show to the depression.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1955. 243 p.
53-10147 ND212.B74
Bibliography: p. 201-237.
Based upon contemporary reports and articles,
exhibition catalogs, and interviews, this is a survey
of a transitional period in American art (1913-29)
when modern European concepts of art displaced
the older American tradition of conservative realism.
The radical tendencies emanated from two sources:
the native, socially critical realism of Robert Henri
and the "Ash Can School," and the controversial
French modernism and estheticism introduced
later by Alfred Stieglitz. The artistic revolution
was confined to small art groups until the radicalism
of the 19 13 exhibition at the New York Armory of
modern European and American art shocked the
public and many artists. Dr. Brown discusses the
reactions of critics and collectors, and traces the
emergence of Cubism, Fauvism, and related tend-
encies as well as the continuation of the realist
strain. Numerous rather dark gravure illustrations
are included.
5747. Burroughs, Alan. Limners and likenesses;
three centuries of American painting. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1936. 246 p.
(Harvard-Radcliffe fine arts series)
36-10264 ND205.B8
Bibliography: p. [2233-226.
An historical critique of the American tradition
in painting from its 17th-century beginnings to
"American Modernism" of the 1930's, distinguished
by its author's encyclopedic knowledge of individual
painters and their works, methods of authentication,
and artistic techniques. As early as 1670, he be-
lieves, an American taste had begun to form. The
early qualities of the art of the limner, "static real-
ism, self-sufficiency, and friendly charm," recur in
American painting "like a theme with variations,
scarcely heard at times because of the louder themes
of English and European art, yet nevertheless exist-
ent." Although the realistic tradition continued
through the Federal period, mainly under the dom-
inance of English practice, two major waves of
French influence, the neoclassical after 1800 and the
impressionistic after 1880, came to replace direct
realistic feeling with an admiration for technical
effects. Yet the author found "groups of American
painters" who were "working away from European
domination in taste" and who were engaged in a
"struggle for nationality," for a "simple, realistic
view." The 191 halftone illustrations average two
to a page.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 857
5748. Encyclopaedia Britannica. Contemporary
American painting; the Encyclopaedia Bri-
tannica Collection, edited by Grace Pagano. New
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1945. xxviii, [241]
p. 45-35086 N5220.E5 1945a
An album of reproductions of the 116 paintings
by as many artists that were in the Encyclopaedia
Britannica Collection in 1945. Some 40 plates are
in color. This frankly experimental and incomplete
collection, assembled with the aid of a committee
of specialists, is intended to illustrate the "trends,
times, and personalities" of about the last 30 years.
Emphasis has been placed upon "American painting
of still living artists," and particularly the regional-
ism of the 1930's. Each full-page reproduction is
accompanied by a photograph of the artist, a brief
description of his background and the subject matter
and method of his work, and, in nearly every in-
stance, his own statement of his intention in the
painting illustrated. An introduction by Donald
Bear traces the inheritance of the 20th-century
American artist and discusses such divergent tradi-
tions of contemporary American painting as region-
alism and the American scene, the painting of man-
ners, of message or protest, and of mood or sensi-
bility, experimentalism, and abstract art. Peyton
Boswell's Modern American Painting (New York,
Dodd, Mead, 1939. 200 p.) consists of an album
of 86 color illustrations of paintings, chiefly modern,
originally reproduced by Life magazine for its
"Pageant of America" series, together with a his-
torical sketch of the principal movements and trends
in American art, brief, alphabetically arranged bi-
ographies of the artists, and a catalog of the paint-
ings. A very few of the paintings illustrated were
commissioned by Life. A second edition with 89
color illustrations and slightly condensed text was
published in 1940. In 1942, the latter edition was
reissued by Garden City Publishing Company, but
with much inferior color printing.
5749. Flexner, James Thomas. America's old
masters; first artists of the New World.
New York, Viking Press, 1939. 332 p.
39-27903 ND207.F55
Bibliography: p. 317-326.
These four popularly written biographical essays
constitute a history of the work of the first great
native-born American painters, who "enjoyed a
greater European acclaim than was to come to any
other American artists for at least a century." Ben-
jamin West (1738-1820), in 1760 the first American
artist to study abroad, was before long regarded "all
over the world as the leading exponent of the 'grand
style' " of neoclassic art, and went on to become a
founder and a president of the Royal Academy, a
close friend of George III, and a precursor of the
French romanticists. At heart a realist, John Single-
ton Copley (1738-1815) produced portraits of great
solidity and power in Boston, but when he removed
to London, deteriorated artistically under the pres-
sure of a sophisticated environment. Charles Will-
son Peale (1741-1827), a "craftsman so able that he
became a universal genius," was "one of the most
charming portrait painters of the early American
tradition." "Well-nigh incomparable" in the paint-
ing of faces, Gilbert Stuart (1755-1828), "who had
never learned to draw, was uncertain in executing
full-lengths." The 33 plates are tolerably repro-
duced in black and white.
5750. Flexner, James Thomas. First flowers of our
wilderness. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1947.
xxi, 367 p. (His American painting, 1)
47-12171 ND207.F57
"Bibliography of general sources": p. 323-IJ26].
5751. Flexner, James Thomas. The light of distant
skies, 1760-1835. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1954. 306 p. (His American painting, 2)
54-9727 ND207.F58
"Bibliographies and source references": p. [251]-
283.
The first in a projected many-volume social his-
tory of American painting, these books attempt "to
show the relationships between life in America and
the long tradition of American painting." The
author reveals how colonial portraiture, progressing
from the "provincial version of the illuminators'
tradition" common to the primitive 17th-century
limners, reached its culmination in the work of
John Singleton Copley (1737-1820), "the first man
to express American life in art maturely, profoundly,
and with beauty." With the exception of John
Trumbull (1756-1843), who called his historical
paintings "my national work" but "considered it
more important to be a gentleman than a painter,"
these early professional painters were "nurtured in
a craftsman's world." The following generation of
gendeman painters, on the other hand, men like
Washington Allston and Samuel F. B. Morse, who
were born to prosperity and political power, boasted
of being artists and connoisseurs but were stifled by
affectations of taste. When the new equalitarian
forces accompanying "that plebeian on horseback,
Andrew Jackson," prevailed, these older men were
supplanted by popular young landscape and genre
painters. Each volume contains a formal catalog of
its numerous illustrations.
5752. Gruskin, Alan D. Painting in the U.S.A.
Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1946. 223 p.
47-791 ND212.G77
Bibliography: p. 213-215.
431240—60-
-56
858 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
An album of 140 reproductions of paintings by
American artists who were living in 1946, of which
63 are well processed in color and 77 in halftone;
they average one or two to a large page. The
selection aims to provide a cross section of modern
trends. Several popular periodicals and business
organizations have lent color plates to the author, a
New York art dealer. Mr. Gruskin's loosely
organized sequence cf observations urges the reader
"to look and keep looking at pictures" for true
esthetic satisfaction, points with pride to the many
flourishing museums and commercial galleries and
the widely circulated popular magazines that bring
painting to the public, proposes collections of mod-
ern art and the encouragement of living artists, and
furnishes a historical vignette of American art.
5753. Monro, Isabel Stevenson, and Kate M.
Monro. Index to reproductions of American
paintings; a guide to pictures occurring in more than
eight hundred books. New York, Wilson, 1948.
731 p. 48-9663 ND205.M57
An index to reproductions of the paintings of
"artists of the United States occurring in 520 books
and in more than 300 catalogs of annual exhibitions
held by art museums." Each painting is entered in
two or three places: under the artist, whose dates are
given if obtainable, together with title of the picture,
and a brief entry for the book where the reproduc-
tion may be found; under tide and alternative tide
or titles; and, in some cases, under subject. Preced-
ing the main index are a "List of Works Indexed"
and a "Key to Symbols Used for Locations of Paint-
ings." The compilers have listed attributed works
and have entered the large number of portraits
under the sitters as well as the artists; they have also
noted the locations of paintings in permanent col-
lections so far as stated in the books indexed.
5754. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art.
100 American painters of the 20th century;
works selected from the collections of the Metropoli-
tan Museum of Art. New York, 1950. xxiii,
in p. 50-13015 ND212.N39
A picture book consisting of 100 reproductions,
8 of them in color, of works by as many American
painters in the collections of the Metropolitan
Museum of Art. Ten of the paintings were executed
before 1900, and while canvases of the 1930's and
40's are abundant, there are only 8 pieces from the
years 1916-29. In his brief introduction, Robert
Beverly Hale asserts that modern American artists,
if neither wholly understood nor appreciated, have
"caught the essence of our country" and our times.
If modern art is violent, dealing "with weird
dreams," and "filled with broken shapes," that is
because the artist is in part a prophet . . . the
shadows that have lately haunted us have for some
time been visible upon his canvas."
5755. Richardson, Edgar P. American romantic
painting; edited by Robert Freund. New
York, E. Weyhe, 1944. 50 p. 168 plates on 84 I.
45-878 ND205.R5
Catalog with biographical notes: p. 23-50.
An album of 236 paintings from the first three
quarters of the 19th century, held in American pub-
lic collections, or in a minority of instances, by
private owners, and reproduced in usually clear half-
tone, but often on too small a scale. Colonial paint-
ing, the introductory text affirms, had been strong
but narrow; about the turn of the century there took
place a great change in the imagination which en-
abled painting to deal with "the whole circle of
inner and outer experience," and to become "an art
as wide as our national life." The grandiose designs
of Allston and his fellows of the first generation
ended mostly in disappointment. The second ro-
mantic generation of the 1830's, less aspiring, pro-
duced smaller canvases appropriate to private houses,
and secured a far wider response. Among the third
generation of the 1850's, the spreading weakness,
sentimentalism, and breakdown in the color sense
were resisted by only a few major talents, who soon
became isolated figures. After 1876, "romantic art
became unfashionable and rapidly disappeared."
David Howard Dickason's The Daring Young Men
(Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1953.
304 p.) discusses the American Pre-Raphaelite move-
ment of the latter half of the 19th century, which
advocated "truth to nature" and served as a "lively,
corporate antidote to the materialism and artistic
stagnation of 'American Victorianism,' " but pro-
duced no artists of outstanding talent.
5756. Richardson, Edgar P. Painting in America;
the story of 450 years. New York, Crowell,
1956. 447 p. (The Growth of America series)
56-7793 ND205.R53
Bibliography: p. 417-427.
The thesis of this survey of American painting is
that painting is both an art and a craft, sharing the
"unpredictable nature of the imagination" and the
"social character of an organized skill in human
society," and that nowhere is the mutual action and
reaction of these two elements "more striking, their
interplay more curious, than in their creation of a
new national tradition of painting in America."
Mr. Richardson considers American artists largely
within the context of his theory: whether they be-
longed to the currents of their day, like West, All-
ston, Whistler, and Marin; whether they did not
belong to those currents, like Homer, Ryder, and
Hopper; or whether the direction of attention was
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 859
opposed to the artist's natural bent and produced a
fatal conflict, as with John Vanderlyn. Lesser paint-
ers are usually treated in groups, with each receiving
a sentence or brief paragraph to himself. The au-
thor interprets the century of painting from 1780 to
1876 as successive phases of romanticism and devotes
to them three large chapters, considerably more than
to any other school or movement. Most of the 172
halftone illustrations are quite unhackneyed; there
are also 17 plates in indifferent color.
5757. Turpie, Mary C. A selected list of paintings
for the study of American civilization.
Minneapolis, Program in American Studies, Univer-
sity of Minnesota [1953] 109 1.
54-31893 ND45.T85
"Books and catalogs useful for illustrations": 1.
101-106.
"An elementary guide to resources for the study
of American civilization through painting"; only
murals have been omitted as insufficiendy studied.
The 712 paintings selected are not necessarily great,
but all "are cultural documents which contribute
significantly to an understanding of American life
past or present — either as sheer illustration, or as
revelation of representative tastes and attitudes, or
as the commentary of an artist who interprets — or
even rejects — his own milieu in his own terms."
Dating from 1666 to 1950, the paintings are arranged
alphabetically by artist within three chronological
divisions. Dates and present locations of the paint-
ings are provided so far as known, together with
descriptive and interpretative annotations. Most of
the paintings listed are in public collections; for
those privately owned, reproductions or slides are
available, and references are furnished to these for
both classes. Appended are directories of firms and
institutions that can supply slides and inexpensive
reproductions.
5758. Walker, John, and Macgill James. Great
American paintings from Smibert to Bellows,
1729-1924. New York, Oxford University Press,
1943. 36 p., 104 plates on 56 1.
43-18438 ND205.W35
"Catalogue notes": p. 21-26.
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 27-31.
Reproductions of carefully chosen .paintings, of
which the eight in color are quite unsuccessful, while
the remainder in monochrome are on the dark side.
The great majority are from public collections. The
compilers terminate with the work of Bellows be-
cause it seems "to close an epoch in American style."
The brief text distinguishes two currents in Ameri-
can style: a realistic main stream, from the portraits
of Copley to the "Ash-can School," which "has
usually been on the level [sic] with the best con-
temporary painting of its kind done in Europe";
and a secondary one, "imaginative, poetic, at its best
visionary," which "has been on the whole more
derivative, more inclined to be literary and self-
conscious." The latter produced "only one artist
of outstanding genius, Albert Ryder" (1846-1917).
5759. Wehle, Harry B. American miniatures,
1 730-1 850; one hundred and seventy-three
portraits selected with a descriptive account by Harry
B. Wehle ... & a biographical dictionary of the
artists by Theodore Bolton. Garden City, N. Y.,
Garden City Pub. Co., 1937. xxv, 127 p. 48 plates
on 27 1. 37~6ic>3 ND1337.U5W4 1937
First published in 1927.
"General bibliography of early American minia-
ture painting": p. [ii5]-n8.
A descriptive history of American portraiture "in
little," closely tied to the 48 color and halftone plates
which usually reproduce the miniatures full-size.
Most miniaturists, the author notes, working with
water colors on ivory, learned "to build up their
textures and to state their forms by the cautious
means of stippling and hatching" in a minute and
dexterous fashion. In 18th-century Philadelphia,
James Peale (1749-1831) became a "prolific
worker," and Henry Benbridge (1744-1812)
painted in a style "only a little less masterly than
Copley's." Edward Greene Malbone (1 777-1 807)
moved from New England to New York, Phila-
delphia, and the South, and painted the "finest
miniatures in the history of the art in America."
During the first two decades of the 19th century, the
bustling city of New York attracted ambitious and
talented young miniaturists. The advent of photog-
raphy about the middle of the century, however,
together with the decline of the aristocratic heritage,
first corrupted, and then killed, the art of miniature
painting. Mr. Bolton's dictionary includes 47
names, a number of which are well known in the
larger art forms.
G. Painting: Individual Artists
5760. [Allston] Richardson, Edgar Preston.
Washington Allston, a study of the romantic
artist in America. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1948. 233 p. 48-8917 ND237.A4R5
"Catalogue of the existing and recorded paintings
of Washington Allston [by] Edgar Preston Richard-
860 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
son and Henry Wadsworth Longfellow Dana": p.
183-219.
Bibliography: p. 220-228.
A critical study of the art of Washington Allston
(1779-1843) and a reappraisal of his position as our
first full-scale romantic artist, based on the Dana
Collection and family tradition. An uneven and by
no means prolific painter (183 finished works) he
was nevertheless "the pioneer in creating an ideal
art upon American soil." He wished, moreover, to
explore the whole range of painting: monumental,
narrative, portrait, landscape and architectural, and
animal and still life. "His work and the influence
of his life as an artist were felt throughout the imagi-
native being of this country in its first years of
independent effort." After its 18th-century appren-
ticeship, American painting became "an instrument
of the reflective and imaginative life." Allston, chief
figure in this enlargement of scope, introduced
dramatic and lyric sentiment, quiet reverie, and
meditation. The 59 halftone illustrations are printed
on 30 leaves.
5761. [Bingham] Christ-Janer, Albert. George
Caleb Bingham of Missouri; the story of an
artist. New York, Dodd, Mead, 1940. xx, 171 p.
40-7789 ND237.B59C5
"Selected bibliography": p. 146-148.
A scholarly biography which aims "to analyze and
clarify the genre work of George Caleb Bingham
[1811-1879] by presenting some hitherto unpub-
lished drawings" and to amplify knowledge of his
life and personality from recently discovered letters
and other new sources. Although Bingham, like
many of his contemporaries, painted portraits for a
living, he aspired to genre painting, "to pictures that
tell a story." The Missouri painter completed the
first canvas in his "river life" series, "Jolly Flatboat-
men," early in 1844, and by 1851 was working
upon the first in a political series, "County Election"
and "Canvassing for a Vote." The subjects and
spirit of these series won them a contemporary popu-
larity: their painstaking design and drawing, de-
rived from prints of Renaissance masters, impress
present-day artists and critics. Besides the 56 illus-
trations of Bingham's figure drawing on 4 leaves,
there are 8 halftone plates and 6 in unsatisfactory
color.
5762. [Burchfield] Baur, John I. H. Charles
Burchfield. [Research by Rosalind Irvine]
New York, Published for the Whitney Museum of
American Art by Macmillan, 1956. 86 p.
56-322 ND237.B89B3
"Selected bibliography": p. [82]-85-
Based largely upon the artist's journal, "an illumi-
nating record of his thoughts, feelings, struggles and
artistic aims over nearly half a century," this biog-
raphy and critique of Charles Burchfield (b. 1893)
grew out of a retrospective exhibition of his water-
colors and drawings (his oils are relatively few and
unsuccessful), held at the Whitney Museum in Jan-
uary and February 1956. From 1917 to 1921 in
Salem, Ohio, Burchfield painted fantastic and deco-
rative scenes chiefly in calligraphic style, fanciful
interpretations of nature, or symbolic representations
of moods. In Buffalo, New York, from 1921 to
1943, he depicted the city, alternating "a predomi-
nantly esthetic pleasure in the shapes and textures of
the industrial scene" with concern for its romantic
moods. His realist-industrial phase is his best
known and most honored. In 1943, Burchfield
abandoned realism, weather-beaten houses, and in-
dustry, and has since painted the changing moods
and aspects of nature in a fusion of his early fantastic
manner with the technical skill and painterly style
acquired in the realistic works of his maturity. Five
of the 75 variously-sized illustrations are in color.
5763. [Copley] Parker, Barbara Neville, and Anne
Boiling Wheeler. John Singleton Copley;
American portraits in oil, pastel, and miniature, with
biographical sketches. Boston, Museum of Fine
Arts, 1938. 284 p. 130 plates on 65 1.
38-4135 ND237.C7P3
This is a massive catalogue raisonne consisting of
descriptions of all portraits believed to have been
painted by Copley before he left for England in June
1774. Biographical sketches of the sitters, an un-
usual feature in such a work, precede the descrip-
tions of the portraits; those for portraits belonging
to the Boston Museum of Fine Arts are by G. Philip
Bauer. For the other biographies, the authors have
gone to primary sources when standard authorities
have failed. Descriptions of the portraits are limited
in most instances to their sizes and colors; when
direct evidence is lacking, datings are based "en-
tirely on grounds of style." The portraits are listed
in three sections: oils; pastels, drawings, and en-
gravings; and miniatures; and in each section are
arranged alphabetically by sitter. A section on
"Attributed Portraits" includes a number that
present problems as yet unsolved. A final section
lists a group of unlocated portraits known, through
references in unquestioned sources, to have been
painted by Copley.
5764. [Eakins] Goodrich, Lloyd. Thomas Ea-
kins, his life and work. New York, Whitney
Museum of American Art, 1933. 225 p.
33-5157 ND237.E15G6
Bibliography: p. [2i7]-220.
A biography of Thomas Eakins (1844-1916) and
an analysis of his art, together with a chronologically
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 86 1
arranged catalog of his 515 known pieces, and 72
halftone plates. Eakins, whose temperament was
remarkable for its blend of artistic and scientific
capacities, began his long career as a painter in the
early 1870's. The masterpiece of these years was
"The Gross Clinic," painted in 1875. "In its truth
of characterization, its formal strength and balance
of design, it shows a power and completeness of
realism that could be matched by no other American
painter of the time." The artist executed his most
important commission, the similarly conceived but
less formally portrayed "Agnew Clinic," in 1889.
Like its predecessor, it was rejected by the art critics,
"and Eakins fell into obscurity during the 8o's and
90 's. Recognized belatedly in the decade 1900-1910,
he painted, during this culminating phase of his
career, more portraits than in any corresponding
period. In his era, "Eakins stands out as an isolated
figure, belonging to no school"; few of his contem-
poraries "approached his humanity, understanding
of character, penetration into the heart of truth, or
formal power."
5765. [Homer] Goodrich, Lloyd. Winslow
Homer. New York, Published for the
Whitney Museum of American Art by Macmillan,
1944. 241 p. 63 plates on 32 1.
44-7780 ND237.H7G6
Bibliography: p. 234-236.
Based upon family tradition, contemporary ac-
counts, and the artist's letters, this is a biography
and an analysis of the work of Winslow Homer
(1836-1910), a self-made Boston painter who began
as a magazine illustrator. His earlier oils, of every-
day army life in the Civil War, however unsophisti-
cated, "were pieces of direct, simple naturalism,
showing no trace of any other artist's style." His
favorite theme, at first, was country life, with em-
phasis upon "pretty girls and fashion," but he exe-
cuted a notable series of sympathetic scenes from
Negro life in the 1870's. After settling at Prout's
Neck, Maine, in 1884, Homer turned for his dom-
inant themes to the sea and the wilderness and the
men who wrested a living from them. He reached
the "climax of his art" during the 1890's with his
watercolors of the forests and lakes of the Adiron-
dacks: nothing like their "resonant" color harmonies
and breadth of treatment had before been seen in
American watercolor painting. Homer also pro-
duced some of his greatest and most influential sea-
scapes in the 1890's. The recognition he then
achieved has proved enduring, but to this critic
"he was a powerful naturalist rather than a great
plastic artist." The 93 illustrations in black and
white average two to a page.
5766. [Inness] McCausland, Elizabeth. George
Inness, an American landscape painter,
1 825-1 894. New York, American Artists Group,
1946. xvi, 87 p. 46-3370 ND237.I5M3
Catalog of the exhibition, February 25 to March
24, 1946: p. 73-82.
Bibliography: p. 84-87.
George Walter Vincent Smith, who collected the
art of his American contemporaries over a span of
70 years, regarded George Inness as an important
ardst, and purchased his canvases from the painter
himself. The museum which Mr. Smith founded in
Springfield, Mass., and which now bears his name,
celebrated its first half-century, therefore, with an
exhibition of 44 Inness canvases assembled by the
director, Cornelia Sargent Pond; it was subsequently
shown in Brooklyn and in Montclair, N. J., where
Inness lived and painted during his later and more
prosperous years. Miss McCausland presents the
artist as one of the most authentic if least appreciated
of 19th-century American painters, a master of
American landscape who maintained the best ideals
of the Hudson River School in a drabber age, and
whose quite independent style eschews spurious
bigness and cultivates instead a calm and often
radiant serenity: "the land will endure, his paintings
say, the coming storm will pass, the harvest will
ripen." "Those closed-in valleys were the common
home and amphitheater of American life." Unfor-
tunately the 40 illustrations, mosdy half-page half-
tones, quite fail to convey the hazy glow of the
paintings themselves.
5767. [Marin] Helm, MacKinley. John Marin.
Boston, Pellegrini & Cuhahy in association
with the Institute of Contemporary Art, 1948.
255 P- 48-10619 ND237.M24H4
A biography and sympathetic analysis of the
works of John Marin (1 870-1 953), who, as early
as the 1890's began "inventing his own private sym-
bols for the American landscape." In 19 14, having
discovered Maine to be his spiritual home, he began
"to play deliberate tricks with reality for plastic
effect." His range included violent renditions of
the Manhattan scene, Maine seacoast pieces with
framework and broadly indicated planes, and lyrical
landscapes and seascapes. There are 64 halftone
and 9 color plates. To ]ohn Marin: Tributes
(Berkeley, University of California Press, 1956.
[78] p.), Mr. Helm contributes a "Conclusion to a
Biography" which is actually a final and equally
admiring appraisal. In this collection of tributes
and appreciative essays occasioned by the John
Marin Memorial Exhibition, organized by the Art
Galleries of the University of California, Los
Angeles, 1955/56, Duncan Phillips hails Marin as a
poet-painter independent of all isms, whose "genius
862 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
for explosions of line and color, especially in the
Manhattan street scenes, was dedicated to the theme
of energy." Frederick S. Wight, in another eulogis-
tic survey, suggests that "Marin's art rose in three
waves, his etchings, his water colors and his oils —
and it is not certain that the third wave is not the
greatest." Marin's own theories are expressed in
The Selected Writings of John Marin (New York,
Pellegrini & Cudahy, 1949. 241 p.), which consists
of revealing and thought-provoking letters written to
his friends, particularly Alfred Stieglitz, from 1910
to 1949, expounding his views of art, current events,
people, and life in the Maine country.
5768. [Mount] Cowdrey, Mary Bartlett, and
Hermann Warner Williams. William Sid-
ney Mount, 1 807-1 868, an American painter, by
Bartlett Cowdrey and Hermann Warner Williams.
New York, Published for the Metropolitan Museum
of Art by Columbia University Press, 1944. xiii,
54 p. A44-4242 ND237.M855C7
Bibliography: p. [431-47.
A catalog, album, and brief study of the land-
scape, flower, and genre paintings of William Sid-
ney Mount, the first native-born artist to venture
largely outside the profitable field of portraiture. He
was a reporter of the American scene in the heyday
of nationalism, depicting everyday life in the rural
Long Island community in which he had been
reared. In the 1830's, he won the public with his
individuality, realism, and "good-natured fun,"
and the critics with his luminous style and sound
craftsmanship. The pioneer catalog of 168 paint-
ings is a "reasonably complete" listing of Mount's
major works exclusive of portraits, but "does not
pretend to the rank of a catalogue raisonne." The
78 illustrations in gravure average two or three to a
page and are very clear even when rather too small.
5769. [Peale] Sellers, Charles C. Charles Will-
son Peale. Philadelphia, 1947. 2 v. (Mem-
oirs of the American Philosophical Society, v. 23,
pt. 1-2) 47-5562 ND237.P27S43
Q11.P612, v. 23
Volume 1 published in 1939 under title: The
Artist of the Revolution; the Early Life of Charles
Will son Peale.
Bibliography: v. 2. p. 424-440.
Based mainly upon his diaries, drafts of letters,
and Autobiography, this is a detailed scholarly bi-
ography of Charles Willson Peale, inventor, "can-
did and direct" portraitist of the revolutionary era,
and founder of the first American museum of
natural history and of the first American academy of
art. Peale, a student of Benjamin West at London
in 1767 and 1768, by the 70's and 8o's was painting
such notables as Washington, Lafayette, and Steu-
ben, among others, in a style distinguished not so
much for flair or sophistication as for strength and
sincerity. Although his drawing was sometimes
poor and his sitters awkwardly posed, "his coloring
was delicate and harmonious." The museum, con-
ceived in the ideal of pure science and opened in the
1780's, "was this artist's masterpiece, built up
through many years of tireless labor." To it, and
to Peale's successive ventures into politics, war,
science, invention, and hygiene, the author de-
votes considerably more space than to his achieve-
ment as a painter.
5770. [Remington] McCracken, Harold. Fred-
eric Remington, artist of the Old West.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1947. 157 p.
47-11799 ND237.R36M3
Based upon his own books, articles, manuscript
diaries, and notebooks, as well as the recollections
of his contemporaries, this is an anecdotal biography
of Frederic Remington (1861-1909), foremost por-
trayer of the American frontier West. It was still
"the land of the riders of the open cattle range and
of the war trail," in 1880 when the youthful New
Yorker first roamed it, and to record its way of life
for permanent preservation became his main pur-
pose. In Arizona, Wyoming, the Dakotas, and
Montana, this largely self-taught artist found his
subjects: cowboys, troopers, Indians, and, in par-
ticular, the horses of the West. The drawings for an
edition of Longfellow's The Song of Hiawatha in
1890 firmly established Remington's reputation as
an illustrator. In 1895, he added sculpture to his
media with "Bronco Buster." An arrangement
with Collier's Weekly in 1903 permitted him the
freedom to paint as he pleased, and he produced
"His First Lesson," "Fight for the Water Hole," and
the many other fine pictures for which he is best
known today. The "Bibliographic Check List of
Remingtoniana" (p. 123-155) establishes the first
appearance of each of the 2,739 drawings and paint-
ings completed by the artist and published in 41
periodicals and 142 books. There are 29 line draw-
ings and 48 plates, of which 32 are in color of varying
adequacy, 8 are halftones, and 8 reproduce bronzes.
5771. [Sargent] Mount, Charles Merrill. John
Singer Sargent, a biography. New York,
Norton, 1955. xv, 464 p. 55-13654 ND237.S3M6
"Sargent's works in oil": p. 427-453.
This is an artist's sympathetic biography of
John Singer Sargent (1856-1925), best known as
portrait painter to the English and American haut
monde of the Edwardian era. The author has
drawn upon many hitherto unavailable materials,
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 863
such as diaries and private papers of Sargent's asso-
ciates, to fill the lacunae created by the destruction
of the artist's own papers. From 1887 to 1909, after
which he declined all but a very few commissions
from industrial and financial tycoons, Sargent was
hailed both in the United States and in England for
his portraits revealing fundamental traits of charac-
ter, for their smartness, even sumptuousness of style,
realistic illusion, fine values, and impressionistic
color. The 54 halftone illustrations are reproduced
on 12 leaves. Evan Charteris' John Sargent (New
York, Scribner, 1927. 308 p.) affectionately cele-
brates the life and work of his friend of 30 years'
standing, and points out the "splendour" of Sar-
gent's personality, "his dynamic energy, his large-
ness of outlook, his complete immunity from what
was small or unworthy." Sargent's Boston (Boston,
Museum of Fine Arts, 1956. 132 p.), by David
McKibbin, commemorates the centennial of Sar-
gent's birth with an essay that emphasizes both the
architectural aspects of his decorations for the
Museum and the importance of his portraits as
"footnotes for history." A catalog of the centennial
exhibition (p. 67-75) and an alphabetically arranged
checklist of his portraits (p. 81-132) are included.
5772. [Sheeler] Rourke, Constance M. Charles
Sheeler, artist in the American tradition.
With 48 halftones of paintings, drawings, and
photographs by Charles Sheeler. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1938. 203 p.
38-27601 ND237.S47R6
An "informal biography" of Charles Sheeler (b.
1883), whose work makes a "fresh and original use
of the American subject" and reflects "forms which
strongly and essentially belong to us." The author
has drawn upon Sheeler's own notes and conversa-
tions, and has so interwoven halftone reproductions
of his paintings and drawings as to show the develop-
ment of his art from the early experimental phases
to those of maturity. "A pathfinder in the use of
American traditions," he has employed "the pro-
portionate ratios, the materials, and the final design
of the provincial buildings at hand": in Bucks
County architecture, the communal architecture at
Ephrata, and Shaker architecture and crafts. In
the 1920's he discovered "the industrial subject for
American art," and in his portrayals of this, "im-
mense intricacies of structure have been boldly re-
duced to essentials." For many years Sheeler sup-
ported himself by photography, painting only on
weekends. His photographs are noteworthy for
their sense of inherent design and their rendering
of textures; a few are included among the
illustrations.
5773. [Sloan] Goodrich, Lloyd. John Sloan.
New York, Published for the Whitney Mu-
seum of American Art by Macmillan, 1952. 80 p.
52-7168 ND237.S57G6
"Selected bibliography": p. 78-80.
A brief critique of the work of John Sloan (1871-
1951), who began his career in 1892 as a Philadel-
phia newspaper illustrator and who found himself
as an artist only after he moved to New York in
1904 and began painting his unique glimpses of the
life of lower Manhattan. Thereafter "his art had
that quality of being a direct product of the common
life, absolutely authentic and unsweetened, that has
marked the finest genre art of all times." Applicable
to many other canvases is his own statement about
his "Sixth Avenue and 30th Street": "it has surely
caught the atmosphere of the Tenderloin, drab,
shabby, happy, sad, and human." After having
depicted the contemporary spectacle for a quarter
century, Sloan very largely abandoned it in 1928 for
an "intensive study of the nude," in which he ex-
perimented with "linework to complete the model-
ing," but achieved no such individuality as in his
earlier manner. There is no list of the many illus-
trations, three of which are in color. Van Wyck
Brooks' John Sloan; a Painter's Life (New York,
Dutton, 1955. 246 p.) is a sympathetic narrative by
a friend of long standing, emphasizing the personal
traits and relationships of "this good man, fearless,
truthful, innocent and wise."
5774. [Stuart] Whitley, William T. Gilbert
Stuart. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1932. xiv, 240 p. 32-13585 ND237.S8W5
A history of the life and particularly the works of
Gilbert Stuart (1775-1828), largely based upon con-
temporary newspapers, periodicals, and memoirs
from which the author quotes very generously.
Stuart, a pupil of Benjamin West, first achieved
success with "Portrait of a Gentleman Skating,"
exhibited at the Royal Academy in 1782. A master
portraitist, he was greatly admired for the exactitude
of his likenesses and characterizations, for originality
and power, and in 1787 he was dubbed by the
London World "The Vandyck of the Time." Stuart
returned to the United States in 1793, achieving his
ambition to paint George Washington in 1795.
Dissatisfied with the first study, the artist destroyed
it after making several copies. In 1796, Stuart
painted the full-length figure of Washington, re-
nowned as the Lansdowne portrait, of which he
made several copies; shortly thereafter, he painted
from life the famous head of Washington now at the
Boston Athenaeum. "This and the Lansdowne por-
trait, whether exact likenesses or not, represent
Washington with the distinction he deserves, and
give him the appearance of a great man, as the world
864 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
regards him." In 1805, Stuart settled permanently
at Boston where, notwithstanding his persistently
Bohemian temperament, his success was "immediate
and complete," and his authority in matters of art
became "unquestioned in America."
5775* Trumbull, John. The autobiography of
Colonel John Trumbull, patriot-artist, 1756—
1843; edited by Theodore Sizer. Containing a sup-
plement to [the editor's] The Wor\s of Colonel
John Trumbull. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1953. xxiii, 404 p. 53-7771 ND237.T8A32
First published in 1841, this is the shrewd and
vigorous but defensive and not altogether candid
memoir of John Trumbull, aide-de-camp to General
Washington, student of Benjamin West in London,
portrayer of major events and personages of the
American Revolution, and occasional architect, mer-
cantile speculator, and minor diplomat. Drawn by
the octogenarian from abundant recollections as well
as private papers, it has been meticulously edited and
provided with copious notes; an appendix (p. 291-
382) supplies much additional information, espe-
cially concerning Trumbull's later life, from con-
temporary sources. Sixty percent of the book is
devoted to the quarter of his life spent in Europe. It
is filled with vivid descriptions and estimates of Old
Masters, European architecture and landscape, and
with vignettes of historical events and such notable
persons as Edmund Burke, Talleyrand, and La-
fayette. Trumbull records his decision of 1785 to
make the events of the Revolution his principal sub-
jects, and reports fully the transaction whereby his
four large canvases, including the "Declaration of
Independence" were commissioned for the United
States Capitol in 18 17 and executed by 1824. Pro-
fessor Sizer's The Wor\s of Colonel John Trum-
bull (New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950.
117 p.) consists mainly of a complete checklist in
which portraits are arranged alphabetically by sitter
and historical subjects chronologically by event. All
types are listed, including mythological, allegorical,
literary, and religious subjects, landscapes, figure
studies, architectural drawings, and maps. Sketches
and studies are listed along with the finished com-
positions. Brief sections are devoted to Trumbull's
prices and painting techniques. Forty-six halftone
illustrations are reproduced on 20 leaves.
5776. [Whisder] Pennell, Elizabeth R., and
Joseph Pennell. The life of James McNeill
Whistler, by E. R. and J. Pennell. 5th ed., rev.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 191 1. xx, 449 p.
A12-142 ND237.W6P4 1911a
An authorized biography of Whisder (1834-
1903), the expatriate American painter and dandi-
fied wit who was idolized by his followers and
abused or misunderstood by most of the Victorian
press. Mr. and Mrs. Pennell, noted etcher and
writer, respectively, were intimate friends as well
as warm admirers of the artist, and present much
information in his own words as well as reminis-
cences from members of the Whisder coterie. Al-
though his etchings were hailed as comparable to
those of Rembrandt, Whistler's paintings of 1859
and the early 6o's were neither so well nor so con-
sistently received. To both he brought realism and
a sense of pattern and design. In 1865, Whistler
sent to the Academy "the most complete, the most
perfect picture he ever painted, 'The Little White
Girl.' " Whistler first exhibited a portrait as an
"Arrangement" and an impression of night as a
"Nocturne" in 1872; such titles established his name
for eccentricity, and for almost 20 years "ridicule
was his pordon." In the 1870's, he began great
portraits, among them, "Mother," "Carlyle," and
"Miss Alexander," but not until the 90's was he
"acknowledged as one of the great artists of the
century." Numerous halftone plates reproduce oils,
etchings, pastels, watercolors, and drawings.
H. Prints and Photographs
5777. Jackson, William H. Picture maker of the
Old West, William H. Jackson; [text] by
Clarence S. Jackson. New York, Scribner, 1947.
308 p. 47-3048i F591.J3
Assembled by his son from the family collection
and supplementary sources, this album reproduces in
chronological sequence 393 splendid photographs,
sketches, and paintings of the frontier Far West by
an artist whose long life span (1843-1942) paralleled
the white man's conquest of the region. The views
of railroad building, mining towns, Indians, pueblos,
the wonders of the Yellowstone and Yosemite Val-
leys, mountains, including the Grand Teton, the
Mountain of the Holy Cross, and Pike's Peak, and
the Mesa Verde and other cliff dwellings are taken
with an artist's eye for composition and tonal con-
trasts. Based largely upon Jackson's early diaries
and notebooks, a running commentary accompanies
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 865
the pictures, and treats mainly of his expeditions of
1870-78 as a staff member of the Hay den Geological
and Geographical Survey.
5778. Peters, Harry T. Currier & Ives, print-
makers to the American people. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, Doran, 1929-31. 2 v.
30-1290 NE2415.C7P4
5779. Peters, Harry T. America on stone; the
other printmakers to the American people;
a chronicle of American lithography other than that
of Currier & Ives. [Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
Doran] 1931. 415 p. 3i~33726 NE2303.P4
These companion works by an enthusiastic
collector survey the whole of American lithography
from the first experiments made by the painter, Bass
Otis, in 1 8 19 to the decline of this popular art in the
1880's. "Chief among these printmakers, because
they served over a longer period, seem to have issued
more prints, and more good prints, and filled the
need most completely, were Currier & Ives, who had
predecessors and competitors, but really no rivals."
Currier and Ives employed skilled artists and offered
for sale at low prices a wide variety of effectively
drawn and colored pictures of easily understood
American subjects: horses, seascapes, landscapes,
especially of New York, political cartoons, portraits,
notable events, everyday life, and scenes of romantic,
sentimental, moralizing, or humorous intent. From
1840, when Nathaniel Currier scored his first great
success with a lithograph of the sinking Lexington,
to the 1880's, "his business was a national institu-
tion." The total number of prints produced, as
distinct from copies, is estimated at "more than
4317." Five other lithographic firms maintained
substantial catalogs of prints for general distribu-
tion, on a smaller scale than Currier and Ives, but
the remaining publishers, approximately 100 in
number, relied chiefly upon jobs commissioned for
special purposes: commissioned portraits, maps,
illustrations for books and periodicals, music sheets,
advertisements, architectural plans, phrenological
charts, and the like. Although these firms and
artists enjoyed far less stability than Currier and
Ives, all of the old printmakers "attempted to suc-
ceed by making art within the means of all — truly
a great endeavor." Volume one of Currier & Ives,
Printmakers to the American People contains re-
productions of 142 prints and originals and a check-
list of all Currier and Ives prints known in 1929;
volume two includes reproductions of 177 prints,
24 in color, and 1600 "newly discovered" titles, here
completed to 1931. America on Stone includes 18
colored and 136 black-and-white plates, as well as 20
other reproductions inserted in the "prologue." It
takes the form of an alphabetical list of all firms,
individuals, craftsmen, and artists concerned in the
production of lithographs, with information con-
cerning their productions. Successive addresses are
given for print publishers.
5780. Reese, Albert. American prize prints of the
20th century. New York, American Artists
Group, 1949. xix, 257 p. 49-11409 NE508.R4
"A brief description of the principal graphic
processes": p. xvii-xix.
"Biographical notes": p. 235-257.
An alphabetically arranged album reproducing,
in clear if occasionally dark halftone, a selection of
216 prize-winning prints, including wood engrav-
ings, etchings, lithographs, drypoints, woodcuts,
and serigraphs, by Americans still living in 1949, and
14 prints by deceased artists, a number of whom had
accomplished their major work before the awarding
of prizes became general practice. About two-
thirds of the prints were produced in the 1940's, most
of the remainder in the 1930's. Each reproduction
is accompanied by a paragraph which interprets its
subject and, in most instances, quotes the artist as
to his intention. Citing the names of Edward
Hopper, Reginald Marsh, and Stow Wengenroth,
among others, the introductory text asserts that
the contemporary American practitioners of this
"democratic medium" constitute the "finest school
of printmakers in our history." The prints employ
the styles of realism, impressionism, "super-realism,"
or nonobjectivism; their subjects range through the
American rural and urban scenes, industry and
machinery, manners, customs, and occupations,
emotion, and pure decoration.
5781. Taft, Robert. Photography and the Ameri-
can scene, a social history, 1 839-1 889. New
York, Macmillan, 1938. 546 p.
38-30617 TR23.T3
The first survey of the "effects of photography
upon the social history of America, and in turn
the effect of social life upon the progress of pho-
tography." News of Daguerre's process first
reached this country in September 1839. By 1845
Mathew B. Brady was collecting portraits of all
the notable persons he could induce to sit. Daguer-
rotypy was replaced by collodion (wet plate) pho-
tography during the 50's, and in 1857 "the paper
photograph assumed a position of commanding im-
portance in this country — a position which it has
maintained." "Card photographs" of soldiers, the
eminent, and the notorious, popular from i860 to
1866, made necessary the family album; and stereo-
scopes appeared in most homes during the 1850's,
6o's, and 70's. After the Civil War, William Kurtz
and others won success with the "cabinet size" por-
866 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
trait, which required skillful posing, lighting, and
handling of background. George Eastman, in the
1880's, made technical advances with a gelatin
process dry plate, flexible film, and a roller holder
system. In 1889 he introduced the portable and
relatively inexpensive Kodak, which opened up the
whole world of amateur photography. The numer-
ous halftone illustrations are as clear as their small
size permits.
5782. Weitenkampf, Frank. American graphic
art. New ed., rev. and enl. New York,
Macmillan, 1924. 328 p.
24-12503 NE505.W4 1924
Bibliography: p. 291-298.
First published in 1912.
A topically arranged review of the whole field of
American printmaking from the 18th century to
about the end of the 19th, when the printing proc-
esses became debased through commercial exploita-
tion, and photography administered the coup de
grace. The book reflects the author's vast experi-
ence, but salient personalities and tendencies are
often obscured by the dense mass of details. Mr.
Weitenkampf surveys the history of etching, engrav-
ing, mezzotint, aquatint, wood engraving, and
lithography. He discusses the application of their
techniques not only to creative art but to such
secondary undertakings as the reproduction of paint-
ings; illustrations for books, textbooks, periodicals,
"tokens," and "keepsakes"; caricatures, cartoons,
and social satires for the humorous press; as well as
bookplates, business cards, certificates, and other
lesser productions. There are numerous illustrations
and halftone plates.
5783. Zigrosser, Carl. The artist in America;
twenty-four close-ups of contemporary print-
makers. New York, Knopf, 1942. xxi, 207 p.
42-25527 NE508.Z45
Character sketches and summations of the achieve-
ments of 24 artists, most of them personally known
to the author, each of whom "is typical in his or her
own way of some one achievement or creative em-
phasis." As a group, they constituted in 1942 a
"cross-section of the American printmakers now in
their prime." The oldest of the artists considered
was the photographer, Alfred Stieglitz (1864-1946),
the youngest, Federico Castellon, born in 1914.
Some are better known for their paintings, like John
Marin (1870-1953), George Biddle, Yasuo Kuni-
yoshi, and Thomas Hart Benton; others, like John
Taylor Arms, Rockwell Kent, Paul Landacre, and
Thomas W. Nason, are more exclusively print-
makers. "Perhaps the most exciting and important
in our art history," their day has seen the transition
of American graphic arts "from provincialism to the
beginnings of a national school." The "fertilizing
influence" of these artists "has been one of the most
important factors in the growth of the American
school of art all over the country." The illustrations,
two to a leaf, are arranged in groups of four, each
consisting of a portrait of the artist and three typical
works.
I. Decorative Arts
5784. Avery, Clara Louise. Early American silver.
New York, Century, 1930. xliv, 378 p.
(Century library of American antiques)
30-30325 NK7112.A8
"Bibliographical note": p. 361-364.
A general survey of early American silver from
mid-i7th century to the classic revival of the late
1 8th century. The first part of the book divides
into chapters on the seven areas: Massachusetts,
Rhode Island, Connecticut, New York, Philadelphia
and the Delaware Valley, Virginia and Maryland,
and Charleston, South Carolina. Since Boston pro-
duced the bulk of the early silver, with a longer and
fuller sequence of styles than other localities, the
chapter on Massachusetts is elaborated into ten
chronological sections. The remainder consists of
a chapter on the silversmiths and their methods,
another describing the elaborate coats of arms which
indicated ownership, and a far longer one (p. 273-
359) tracing the "course of development of charac-
teristic objects, such as the beaker, standing cup,
tankard, tea-pot." There are 63 halftone plates and
33 line drawings which show characteristic shapes
and their dates.
5785. Harbeson, Georgiana (Brown). American
needlework; the history of decorative stitch-
ery and embroidery from the late 16th to the 20th
century. New York, Coward-McCann, 1938.
xxxviii, 232 p. 38-29098 NK9212.H3
"An historical oudine of decorative stitches used
by American women in various embroidery tech-
niques. Examples have been selected from each
period in the country's development." If much of
the design has come from sources abroad, the sim-
plicity of American taste has been expressed in adap-
ART AND ARCHITECTURE
/ 867
tations of or departures from the originals, and in
1938 the author found evidence that American work
was reverting to the "purely decorative and interpre-
tive effects" achieved in the early 17th century. Part
one is devoted to the needlework of the American
Indian, and includes the use of porcupine quills and
beads. Parts two to five are concerned with colonial,
early national, Victorian, and 20th-century embroi-
deries. Each section describes the materials, meth-
ods of working, and designs of its needlework.
Among the varieties shown are objects for use, such
as chair seats, pillowslips, or altar cloths, and purely
decorative work, such as samplers of various eras,
needlepoint pictures, or embroidered maps. The
numerous halftone illustrations and 5 colored plates
indicate the various stitches and the uses to which
they were put, but in most instances are rather too
small to show much detail.
5786. Hayward, Arthur H. Colonial lighting.
New ed., rev. Boston, Little, Brown, 1927.
xxiv, 168 p. 27-5863 NK8360.H3 1927
First published in 1923.
A record for collectors of American antique lamps,
lanterns, and candleholders, of the progress made
by artificial lighting from the colonial era to the
1850's, when gas and kerosene superseded lard oil,
fish and whale oil, and camphene as illuminants,
and rendered obsolete the early lamps and candle-
sticks. Mr. Hayward describes the lamps used,
from the first crude iron open-wick Betty lamps to
the graceful pressed glass lamps manufactured by the
Sandwich Company; iron and tin lanterns, many of
them intricately pierced; and the numerous types of
candlesticks, stands, sconces, moulds, and the like,
made of iron, tin, pewter, wood, brass, glass, silver,
and earthenware. Most of the 114 illustrations,
averaging one or two to a page, are of pieces in
private collections, including that of the enthusiastic
author, who offers much advice to amateurs.
5787. Kauffman, Henry. Early American copper,
tin, and brass. New York, McBride, 1950.
112 p. 50-1 1 133 NK806.K3
Bibliography: p. 112.
A brief but pioneer survey of early American
copper, tin, and brassware, based upon contemporary
wills, vendues, bills of lading, and, especially, news-
paper advertisements. The first piece reported is a
primitive early 18th-century copper weather vane by
Shem Drowne (1683- 1774); the last are brass but-
tons, furniture, hardware, andirons, bells, clocks,
and the like, cast in the early 19th century just prior
to the industrial revolution. The author describes
such articles as copper and brass warming pans, ket-
des, pans, coffeepots, ladles, and stills; decorated tin
boxes, trays, and footwarmers; and plain tin candle
boxes, ovens, sconces, and other lighting devices.
The author quotes freely from advertisements of
prominent craftsmen and includes lists of copper-
smiths, braziers, brass founders, and tinsmiths (p.
108-111). Many of the articles reproduced in the
91 gravure illustrations are in the author's collection.
5788. Laughlin, Ledlie Irwin. Pewter in America,
its makers and their marks. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1940. 2 v. 41-1939 NK8412.L3
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [i6i]-[i92J.
Based upon contemporary sources, published and
unpublished, and addressed to the beginner as well
as the experienced collector, this is a history of
American pewter (domestic vessels made of an
alloy of tin and lead) from the mid-i7th century,
when "at least four pewterers were at work in the
Massachusetts Bay Colony," to the 1850's after which
pewter ware was usually silverplated. The early
makers have been grouped in approximately
chronological order within 7 regional units: Massa-
chusetts Bay, Rhode Island, the Connecticut Valley,
New York City, Albany, Pennsylvania, and the
South. The craftsmen of the britannia (pressed
ware made from thin pewter sheets) period, ca.
1830 to ca. 1855, have been separately and more
briefly treated in an alphabetical arrangement. All
are included in the alphabetical checklist which
forms Appendix I. Among the subjects of other
chapters are: pewterers' marks, household pewter,
ecclesiastical pewter, fakes, and notes on collecting.
Reproduced on 78 gravure plates are small but
clear photographs of nearly 700 plates, dishes, and
basins, porringers, tankards, pots, and beakers,
spoons and ladles, coffee and teapots, pitchers, can-
dlesticks, and lamps.
5789. McKearin, George S., and Helen McKearin.
American glass. 2000 photographs, 1000
drawings by James L. McCreery. New York,
Crown, 1948. xvi, 634 p.
48-2187 NK5112.M26 1948
Glossary: p. xv-xvi.
Bibliography: p. 615-617.
First published in 194 1.
Addressed primarily to the critical collector, this
is a detailed history of the development of American
glassmaking from the 18th century to the 1890's.
Chapters one to four are devoted mainly to 18th-
century glass: the South Jersey ware made of bottle
glass on Dutch or German peasant lines, the bril-
liant and delicately colored flint glass and fine ware
produced by the great Pennsylvania house of Henry
William Stiegel, and the engraved presentation
pieces manufactured by John Frederick Amelung.
Chapters five to eight deal with the fine flint, blown
and molded, cut and engraved table and decorative
868 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
wares manufactured from 1820 to the 1860's, as well
as the pressed glass produced on a large commercial
scale from the i82o's to the 1890's, by the New
England Glass Company, the Boston and Sandwich
Company, and other glassworks. The three con-
cluding chapters describe such special forms as
paperweights, commercial botdes, and pictorial
flasks. The text includes "Blown Three Mold
Charts" (p. 285-331), "Bottle Charts" (p. 512-
582), and "Chronological Chart of American Glass
Houses" (p. 583-613).
5790. Sonn, Albert H. Early American wrought
iron. With three hundred and twenty
plates from drawings by the author. New York,
Scribner, 1928. 3 v. 28-24035 NK8212.A1S6
Bibliography: v. 3, p. 243-244.
An attempt to record, mainly in drawings, such
specimens of early American wrought iron "as are
still in existence, whether on old buildings, in mu-
seums, in private collections, or among the treas-
ure-trove of dealers in antiques." A brief initial
chapter sketches the development of the iron in-
dustry from the establishment of the first successful
colonial ironworks at Saugus Center, Massachusetts,
1685, to the advent of machine production about
1850, "which gradually displaced the hand-wrought
articles of the earlier period." The remainder of
the book describes, and the plates illustrate, various
types of: knockers, latches, and locks; bolts, hinges,
hasps and handles; and gates, railings, balconies,
lanterns, newels, weather vanes, foot scrapers,
shutter fasteners, fireplace accessories, candle snuf-
fers, and other articles. Mr. Sonn's text is often
desultory, but his drawings are attractive and his
work inspired by a sincere affection for "the pleasing
variety of design, the artistic conception and beauty
of workmanship displayed in early American
wrought iron."
5791. Spargo, John. Early American pottery and
china. Garden City, N.Y., Garden City
Pub. Co. [1948, ci926] xvii, 393 p.
48-10842 NK4006.S7 1948
"Bibliographical notes": p. 373-376.
"Largely given to historical record" of the major
American potteries producing wares up to the Cen-
tennial of 1876, this is a handbook designed for the
amateur collector wanting "to be aided in identifying
and classifying specimens, and to be intelligently
informed concerning their history, their contribution
to the development of ceramic art in this country,
their makers, and so on." The development of
pottery (opaque ware) is traced from the simple
domestic earthenware jugs, pans, and platters of the
mid-i7th century potters to the fine stoneware,
Rockingham, flint enamel, and scroddle wares pro-
duced at Bennington, Vermont, by Julius Norton
and Christopher Webber Fenton 200 years later.
The "era of porcelain" (translucent ware) opens
with the incorporation of the Jersey Porcelain and
Earthenware Company in 1825 and is continued to
the designs created for the Centennial Exposition by
the sculptor, Karl Miiller. Two chapters are de-
voted to "folk-pottery," slip-decorated and sgrafitto
ware, produced mainly by the Pennsylvania Ger-
mans from the 1730's to the 1860's. The 64 plates
are in black and white; keys to the potters' marks
are provided in an appendix (p. 358-372).
5792. Stiles, Helen E. Pottery in the United States.
New York, Dutton, 1941. 329 p.
41-15157 NK4005.S7
A survey of recent American pottery: china or
porcelain, stoneware, Parian, Jasper, fine earthen-
ware or semi-porcelain, and common earthenware,
which regards it as an art newly matured. The
Ohio-West Virginia pottery district in 1941 ranked
"first in the number and size of its ceramic indus-
tries"; in it were manufactured kitchen, industrial,
and art wares, and, especially, domestic tablewares,
among them "American Modern," designed by
Russel Wright for Steubenville Pottery, and "Man-
hattan Shape," created by Viktor Schreckengost for
American Limoges China Company. The most
important products of New Jersey, the second
ranking area, were the dinnerware designed by
Frank G. Holmes for Lenox Incorporated, and
"sanitary ware" of vitrified china. Ceramic sculp-
ture and handmade pottery have been executed by
Waylande Gregory, Russell Barnett Aitken, and
many other "studio potters." Sections are devoted
to the employment of decorative tile and terra cotta
in recent architecture. The numerous illustrations
are in black and white.
5793. Vanderpoel, Emily (Noyes) American lace
& lace-makers. Edited by Elizabeth C.
Barney Buel. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1924. xx, 14 p. 24-28973 NK9412.V3
An album of no halftone plates showing samples
of lace made in America, chiefly from the colonial
era to the early 19th century, and drawn in large
part from the collection of the Litchfield (Conn.)
Historical Society. Pieces illustrated include trim-
ming, handbags, pillowcases, bedspreads, collars and
guimps, dress skirts, veils, caps, shawls, kerchiefs,
and the like, as well as details, patterns, and lace-
making equipment. Plates 1 to 13 exhibit lace made
by North and South American Indians. A very
brief introduction surveys American lacemaking and
describes the types of lace produced: lace made with
the needle, or needlepoint lace; and lace made on
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 869
a pillow with bobbins, or pillow lace. Distinction
is drawn between the lace industry as introduced by
Dean Walker about 1820 at Medway, Massachusetts,
and lacemaking as an art pursued especially by
young gentlewomen of the 18th and early 19th
centuries.
J. Museums
5794. Coleman, Laurence Vail. Historic house
museums. Washington, American Associa-
tion of Museums, 1933. 187 p.
34-27050 NA7205.C6
"Directory": p. 1 13-159.
Bibliography: p. 160-165.
Chiefly a manual of operations for the manage-
ment of historic house museums. These are build-
ings which "achieve importance by withstanding
the assaults of time," or "by acts of man that create
hallowed associations." As far back as 1850, the
State of New York acquired Washington's head-
quarters at Newburgh, and by 1933 "all but a few of
the very youngest states" had begun to preserve their
historic houses. The author advocates administra-
tion of them by organizations having custody and
immediate control, under Government sponsorship
and supervision. He offers practical advice about
the financing of such museums, their restoration,
preservation, and furnishing, supplementary collec-
tions and buildings, and attracting and guiding
visitors, and outlines the possibilities of "the mu-
seum resort." The 66 gravure illustrations av-
erage two to a plate. Ralph E. Carpenter's The
Fifty Best Historic American Houses, Colonial and
Federal, Now Furnished and Open to the Public
(New York, Dutton, 1955. 112 p.) is a convenient
and well-illustrated little book for the tourist — if
everyone is likely to have some alternative "best" —
but is limited to the East between New Hampshire
and Virginia. John Drury's Historic Midwest
Houses (Minneapolis, University of Minnesota
Press, 1947. 246 p.) presents brief descriptions and
photographs, usually of exteriors, of 87 structures in
the 12 states from Ohio to the Dakotas; more than
half of these were museums open to visitors.
5795. Howe, Winifred E. A history of the Metro-
politan Museum of Art, with a chapter on
the early institutions of art in New York. New
York [Printed at the Gilliss Press] 1913-46. 2 v.
illus. 13-41 1 1 N610.H75
Volume 2 has imprint: New York, Published for
the Metropolitan Museum of Art by Columbia
University Press.
The authorized history of the Metropolitan Mu-
seum of Art from its projection by the Art Com-
mittee of the Union League Club in 1869 to 1941;
for the years 1905 to 1912 the two volumes overlap.
By March 1871, Miss Howe records, the Trustees
could announce the purchase of 174 paintings,
"principally Dutch and Flemish, but including rep-
resentative works of the Italian, French, English,
and Spanish schools," as a nucleus of its permanent
gallery. On April 5, 1871, a committee of the
Museum secured the State Legislature's authoriza-
tion to construct a suitable building in Central Park.
The story thereafter is told in terms of: expansion
in space, acquisitions, and services in the Dodworth
Building, 1871-73, the Douglas Mansion, 1873-79,
and the Metropolitan Museum Building, 1880-1941;
the loyalty and generosity of such friends as Henry
G. Marquand, J. Pierpont Morgan, Robert W. de
Forest, and George Blumenthal; and the develop-
ment of a philosophy of Museum purposes and
practice.
5796. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art.
American Wing. A handbook of the Amer-
ican Wing, by Rfichard] T. H. Halsey and Charles
O. Cornelius. 7th ed., rev. by Joseph Downs. New
York, 1942. xxxii, 321 p.
43-1249 N611.A6A3 1942
A guide to the 21 original American rooms of the
colonial, revolutionary, and early republican periods
installed in the American Wing, as well as to its
galleries and alcoves. The book is divided into
three main sections corresponding to the floor plan
of the Wing: third floor, the first period, from the
earliest years of permanent setdement in New Eng-
land through the first quarter of the 18th century;
second floor, from the second quarter of the 18th
century to the early republic; and first floor, the
third period, from about 1790 to 1825. Besides
summarizing the architectural history of its period,
each section describes the design, decoration, and
materials of its furniture, metal work, textiles, pot-
tery, and glass, and describes in some detail the
origin, structure, and furnishings of the several
rooms. These have been salvaged from old houses
from New Hampshire to Virginia. Contemporary
advertisements are liberally quoted; the 131 black-
and-white illustrations are small but clear. A tribute
to Mr. Halsey (1865-1942), the organizer of the
American Wing, follows the preface (p. x-xvi).
87O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5797. New York. Museum of Modern Art. Paint-
ing and sculpture in the Museum of Modern
Art, edited by Alfred H. Barr, Jr. New York,
Museum of Modern Art, distributed by Simon &
Schuster, 1948. 327 p.
48-10843 N620.M9A4 1948
First published in 1942.
An album of halftone reproductions of "less than
half" of the 660 paintings and 137 pieces of sculp-
ture owned by the Museum of Modern Art in 1948,
together with an alphabetically arranged catalog
(p. [2971-324) of its whole collection. Paintings
are grouped in 20 sections, each prefaced by a de-
scriptive paragraph; sculpture in 4, of generally
similar order. The sequence is very roughly
chronological, "not so much by artists and works
as by idea, style and movement, action and reac-
tion." After the primitives of various dates come
the late 19th-century European pioneers of modern-
ism, then the early 20th-century traditionalists and
expressionists, American and European. Cubism,
which spread rapidly through Europe and America
just prior to World War I, is followed by abstract
art with its dogma of pure form, and by the various
countermovements that arose in the 1920's and be-
came dominant in the 1930's. Mr. Barr's introduc-
tion explains the method of eliminations whereby
the collection is to be kept modern. Handsomely
commemorating its 25th anniversary is the Muse-
um's Masters of Modern Art (New York, distributed
by Simon & Schuster, 1954. 239 p.) which repro-
duces in excellent color or black and white many
of the "best or most characteristic" works of art in
the collection. Each piece is identified, described,
and evaluated. Demonstrating the "variety, excel-
lence of achievement, and vigor" of the visual arts —
painting, sculpture, drawing, prints, photographs,
motion pictures, and industrial arts — produced in
40 countries during the last 75 years, this lively,
unpretentious book is full of pertinent quotations
from artists and critics.
5798. Whitney Museum of American Art, New
Yor\, Catalogue of the collection. New
York, Published by Rudge for the Whitney Museum
of American Art, 1931. 238 p.
32-5001 N618.A6 1 93 1
5799. Whitney Museum of American Art, New
Yorl{. The Whitney Museum and its col-
lection: history, purpose, and activities [and] cata-
logue of the collection. New York, 1954. [41] p.
55-1142 N618.A65 1954
First published in 1935.
5800. Whitney Museum of American Art, New
Yorf^. Juliana Force and American art; a
memorial exhibition, September 24-October 30,
1949. New York [1949 J 75 p.
50-4507 N618.A63
The alphabetically arranged first catalog of the
Whitney Museum lists its collection at its opening
in 1 93 1 — "for the most part by living artists, of some
five hundred paintings in oil and water-color, one
hundred fifteen pieces of sculpture, drawings, etch-
ings, lithographs and works in other mediums, to
the number of seven hundred." The Museum and
its predecessors, the Whitney Studio, Whitney
Studio Club, and Whitney Studio Galleries, 1914-
30, were organized by Gertrude Vanderbilt Whitney
(1876-1942), the sculptor, in the "belief that Amer-
ica has an important contribution to make in the
arts, that in order to make this contribution effec-
tive, a sympathetic environment must be created
in which the artist may function to the fullest ex-
tent of his power." Preoccupied as it is with
contemporary American expression, the Museum
owns only a few works of the recent past which
are precursors of modern tendencies, but has or-
ganized valuable exhibits of the work of early
American artists. The illustrations of 172 paintings
and prints and 37 pieces of sculpture are in a rather
dark halftone. The catalog of 1954, by no means
so elaborate, lists 490 paintings, 212 watercolors,
gouaches, and pastels, 197 drawings, and 134 pieces
of sculpture, a total of 1,033 works; it also reports
the Museum's main activities, such as exhibitions,
acquisitions for the permanent collection, lending
works to other institutions, research, and publica-
tions. Juliana Force and American Art offers trib-
utes to the Museum's first director (1876-1948)
from her friends, including John Sloan, Guy Pene
de Bois, and Alexander Brook, celebrates her long
connection with the Whitney enterprises (1914-48),
and provides a catalog (p. 67-74) of the memorial
exhibition held in her honor in 1949.
K. Art and History
5801. Davidson, Marshall. Life in America. Bos-
ton, Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 2 v.
51-7084 E178.5.D3
"Published in association with the Metropolitan
Museum of Art."
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 463-472.
ART AND ARCHITECTURE / 87 1
"A graphic survey of American history," particu-
larly of the social, economic, and cultural scene.
Drawn mainly from museum collections and other
public sources, the gravure illustrations are repro-
duced from paintings, drawings, photographs,
prints, and the like, for the most part contemporary
with their subjects, which "faithfully, expressively,
and completely depict the American past." The
closely linked and lively text, based upon both pri-
mary and recent published materials, serves as frame-
work for the pictures and as connective where they
are lacking. Volume one is arranged topically in
five chronologically subdivided sections. The sub-
jects treated are: colonial America; westward ex-
pansion to the Pacific; maritime progress, from
packets to clippers and iron steamships; agriculture,
from handtools to machinery; and industry, from
the handicraft tradition to mass production. Vol-
ume two portrays American entertainment and
play, the invasion of the city by farmer and immi-
grant and the growth of urban centers and services,
and the tightening of the Nation through develop-
ment of arteries and vehicles of transportation. A
final section, "The Democratic Mold," presents the
American political system and libertarian way of
life.
5802. McCracken, Harold. Portrait of the Old
West; with a biographical check list of
western artists. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1952.
232 p. 52-9455 ND225.M18
A chronicle of the work and careers of the pioneer
artists who were "graphic historians" of the Old
West. In the 1820's, the first Western artists pro-
duced only static Indian portraits, disappointing
both as art and as documentation, but in the 1830's
George Cadin (1796-1872) began to create a docu-
mentary record of animated and realistic scenes
from the life of the Plains Indians, and initiated a
"popular interest in painting the Indians and fron-
tier life." As the frontier steadily receded, however,
from 1849 to 1870, the old Indian and wildlife sub-
jects were supplanted by the Indian fighter, the
range, and the cowboy. Charles M. Russell was a
cowboy-artist in Montana during the 1880's; Charles
Schreyvogel depicted the trooper and the infantry-
man of the Plains in the 90's; and through both
decades Frederic Remington searched for remnants
of the Old West and found enough to document it.
There are 39 plates in off-key color, and 47 half-
tones, besides numerous illustrations in the text.
5803. Murrell, William. A history of American
graphic humor. New York, Whitney Mu-
seum of American Art, 1933-38. 2 v.
34-4666 NC1420.M8
Volume 2 has imprint: New York, Published for
the Whitney Museum of American Art by Mac-
millan, 1938.
"A partial list of works consulted or referred to":
v. 1, p. [>4i]-242; v. 2, p. [2651-267.
A panorama of the development of American
graphic humor from its 18th-century beginnings to
1938. All three categories, cartoon, caricature, and
humorous drawing, utilize economy of line and
aim to provoke ridicule, but have as separate sub-
jects, respectively, topical political or moral issues,
individual physical peculiarities or idiosyncrasies of
manner, and ridiculous social situations. Although
Benjamn Franklin is credited with attempting "to
symbolize a political situation" as early as 1747,
not until the Embargo and the War of 1812 did
graphic humor become bolder and more frequent.
In the years 1817-28, an unbroken production of
humorous illustration and social caricature began,
which formed a species of graphic reporting, and
the Jackson administration (1829-37) provoked a
flood of separately published cartoons. A journal-
istic medium for sustained attack was lacking, how-
ever, until Harper's Weekly began to publish the
great political cartoons of Thomas Nast (1840-
1902) in the Johnson administration. Since then,
American graphic humorists have presented "a
broad visual commentary on the lighter and seamier
sides of the principal men, women, and movements
of our heterogeneous civilization." A number of
the 479 black-and-white illustrations are too small
to be wholly effective.
5804. New York. Metropolitan Museum of Art.
Life in America; a special loan exhibition
of paintings held during the period of the New
York World's Fair, April 24 to October 29 [1939]
New York [Scribner Press] 1939. xxix, 230 p.
39-27465 ND203.N4
A chronologically arranged annotated catalogue
of 290 paintings, together with small halftones of
most of them, selected to form an exhibition of life
in America during the 300 years from 1616 to 19 15.
Of the 145 lenders, 78 were private owners, and
67 were institutions. The lively and informative
notes accompanying the reproductions of portraits,
landscapes, and genre pictures characterize their
subjects and quote freely from pertinent contempo-
rary sources. In his introduction to the "picture
chronicle," "A Visual Account of Life in America"
Harry B. Wehle surveys rapidly both the "taming
of the continent" and the artistic recording of the
personages and events concerned. The latter must
depend for the most part upon obscure painters,
although West, Copley, and Homer in their early
years, and Morse and Eakins were able reporters.
872 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5805. St. Louis. City Art Museum. Mississippi
panorama, being an exhibition of the life
and landscape of the Father of Waters and its great
tributary, the Missouri. [St. Louis] 1949. 227 p.
50-13673 N5020.S325 1949
The pardy annotated and illustrated catalog of
an exhibition of more than 350 paintings, drawings,
prints, and photographs, together with river boat
models and pieces of ships' equipment, held at the
City Art Museum of St. Louis in 1949. The 7V2
by 348-foot Dickeson and Egan moving panorama
(1850), last of its kind devoted to the Mississippi,
was the central feature of the display which aimed
to show not only the art inspired by the rivers but
to review "American social history as it unfolded
along the Mississippi and the Missouri in the last
century." In a preliminary essay, Perry T. Rath-
bone, Director of the Museum, points out that the
river painters were first of all explorers and re-
corders: poetry and romance were not added by
them but inhered in the life they portrayed. Four
color plates accompany the numerous halftones.
5806. Taft, Robert. Artists and illustrators of the
Old West, 1850-1900. New York, Scribner,
1953. xvii, 400 p. 53—7577 N6510.T27
A very detailed and thoroughly documented ac-
count of "the actual experiences of a number of
artists and illustrators, most of whom personally
witnessed some part of the marvellous transforma-
tion of the region beyond the Mississippi — chiefly
the Plains and the Rockies — in the half century ex-
tending from 1850 until 1900." These men, many
of them obscure and untrained amateurs, served as
artists with official surveys and expeditions, as artists
traveling on assignment for Harper's Weekly or
Vran\ Leslie's Illustrated Newspaper, or as inde-
pendents on wagon, and later, railroad trains. John
M. Stanley and Heinrich Balduin Mollhausen de-
picted views and Indians and Indian modes of
life. William Jacob Hays was a painter of animals,
chiefly buffaloes and prairie dogs. After the Civil
War, Theodore R. Davis and Alfred R. Waud of
Harper's, and many others recorded the tide of
emigration, Indian troubles, and the expanding
Western scene. The 90 halftone illustrations are
reproduced on 36 leaves.
5807. U. S. Library of Congress. An album of
American battle art, 1755-1918. Washing-
ton, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. xvi, 319 p.
48-45628 N8260.U4
An album of 150 full-page reproductions in gra-
vure of American prints, drawings, photographs,
and pictorial maps, most of which depict batdes,
although some are portraits, and others are scenes
of military life. Based upon an exhibition held at
the Library of Congress in 1944 and drawn in the
main from the Library's collections, they are ar-
ranged chronologically in 10 sections, each repre-
senting a war or group of wars from "The French
and Indian War and Its Aftermath, 1755-1765," to
"The First World War, 1917-1918." Each has a
brief introduction by the editor, Donald H. Mug-
ridge, giving a historical framework for the group
of plates, and special attention is given to graphic
processes and the artists who made use of them or
whose work was reproduced by them. Each illus-
tration is provided with an annotation which de-
scribes it in technical terms and explains its historical
significance. Selection of illustrations has been gov-
erned to some extent by the ease or effectiveness with
which they could be reproduced; scene and artist
are usually but not invariably of the same era. Pic-
torial Americana, 2d ed. (Washington, Library of
Congress, 1955. 68 p.) is a catalog of photographic
negatives available in the Library's Prints and Photo-
graphs Division, "published for the convenience of
those who may wish to obtain positive prints"; the
originals, mostly prints and magazine illustrations,
reflect American history through 1899, or are views,
or are social materials here classified by subject
matter.
XXVII
Land and Agriculture
A.
Land
5808-5818
B.
Agriculture: History
5819-5838
C.
Agriculture: Practice
5839-5850
4>
D.
Agriculture: Government Policies
585 1-586 1
T
E.
Forests, National Par^s
5862-5866
F.
Animal Husbandry
5867-5874 ^
AGRICULTURE is normally thought of as a part of American economic life, which is
£\. the subject of the next chapter. It has been given separate and prior treatment, in
part for convenience, since the economic chapter is large enough as it is, but also because of
a real priority, historical and logical, in its subject matter. Through the first two and
a half centuries of our history, America was a land of farmers. Not until after the Civil
War — and, some have argued, largely because of it — did the industrial interest come to out-
weigh the agricultural, and not until the second
selection of the less technical works that will have
significance for those of us who are not farmers
or are not actively engaged in wresding with the
farmer's problems.
Just as agriculture is prior to other forms of eco-
nomic activity, so the land is historically and logically
prior to the forms of its cultivation, and our first
section includes titles on land use, soil conservation,
public land policies, the public domain, and land
speculation and values. Works with a more stricdy
geographical approach appear in Chapter VI. The
next three sections divide the books on agriculture
according to whether they emphasize its history, its
current practice, or the Government policies which
affect it; but these aspects are by no means mutually
exclusive, and tides in one section may have much
of interest for one or both of the others. As in simi-
lar situations elsewhere, we have not hesitated to
select books which take decided views on recent
developments, as being the most likely to arouse the
lay reader's interest, but of course no endorsement of
these views is implied. The concluding sections
lump the national parks, which could as well have
gone in Section A, with books on our forests and
their industries, and bring together all animal enter-
prises, whether catching fish, preserving wildlife, or
breeding horses.
decade of the present century did the urban popula-
tion come to outweigh the rural. Urbanized and
industrialized man remains quite dependent upon
agriculture for his food, and less completely so for
his clothing and shelter; its priority in economic
process therefore persists, if it is less overwhelming
than a century ago. Americans still tend to follow
Thomas Jefferson in regarding the agrarian way
of life as healthier in several senses than its alterna-
tives, and as supporting a democratic order in
society and government more effectively than any
other. For these and other reasons the state of
American agriculture has been a special object of
public solicitude for nearly a century. Agricul-
tural research and education have been so effectively
subsidized that they have led to one of the greatest
paradoxes in economic history: as cultivated acreage
and agricultural manpower have been shrinking,
output has gone on increasing, and regularly pro-
duces commodity surpluses beyond effective demand
which threaten to send prices tobogganning. This
situation has, during the past 25 years, occasioned
an exceptional degree of Government subsidization,
exceptionally wide Government controls, and a con-
tinuing stream of diagnosis, criticism, and com-
mentary. A vast literature has grown up over the
century, from which the tides that follow are a
873
874 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A. Land
5808. Bennett, Hugh Hammond. Soil conserva-
tion. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1939. xvii,
993 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill series in geography)
40-1134 S623.B36
This volume presents a comprehensive statement
of the science and practice of soil and water conserva-
tion by the Chief of the Soil Conservation Service,
U. S. Department of Agriculture (1935-52), who is
known throughout the United States and abroad for
his leadership in the soil conservation movement.
In part 1 he traces the problem of soil erosion in the
United States back to the wasteful exploitation of
land by the early settlers; compares it with the prob-
lem in other countries, and presents its economic and
social effects on the welfare of our people. In part 2
the development of the national plan for soil con-
servation, based on acts of Congress and adminis-
tered by the Department, is traced, and present-day
conditions in the several regions of the United States
are described. Dr. Bennett's briefer manual, Ele-
ments of Soil Conservation, appeared in a second
edition in 1955 (New York, McGraw-Hill. 358 p.).
The story of the conservation movement and the
man who led it is told in a popular, somewhat jour-
nalistic style by Wellington Brink: Big Hugh, the
Father of Soil Conservation (New York, Macmillan,
1951. 167P.).
5809. Clawson, Marion. Uncle Sam's acres. New
York, Dodd, Mead, 1951. xvi, 414 p. illus.
51-10247 HD216.C55
Bibliography: p. 393-397.
The director of the Bureau of Land Management,
U. S. Department of the Interior (1948-52), de-
scribes the kinds of land, including national parks
and national forests, owned by the United States.
He tells how they were acquired, and in large part
disposed of, and how the fourth of our area that re-
mains in Federal ownership is administered. Using
"relatively simple terminology and exposition," the
author directs his book to those primarily interested
in the outdoors and its use, to Federal and State
employees in land and resources administration, and
to students in both college and high school. The
policies and politics that determine the management
of the public lands are analyzed in the last chapter,
where it is predicted that the public lands and the
Federal Government's control over them will ex-
pand in an effort to conserve our minerals, timber
resources, grazing land, national parks, and water-
power as they become increasingly important to the
total national economy.
5810. Graham, Edward H. Natural principles of
land use. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1944. 274 p. Agr44~202 S493.G65
Bibliography [in large part annotated]: p. 233-
261.
Associated with the Soil Conservation Service
since 1941 as chief biologist, and then as director of
the Plant Technology Division, the author has had
abundant opportunity to observe the normal proc-
esses of the landscape and to study the best methods
of plowing, fertilizing, and irrigating the land for
the conservation of the soil, forests, and wildlife,
and for increasing its potential productivity. He
has written this nontechnical book to help the land
management biologist as well as the man who
operates and lives on the land, by pointing out
"something of the relation and importance of nat-
ural ecological principles to land management
methods." The 32 plates are accompanied by con-
cise descriptions and contribute greatly to the read-
er's enlightenment.
5811. Hibbard, Benjamin Horace. A history of
the public land policies. New York, P.
Smith, 1939. xix, 591 p. (Land economics series,
edited by R. T. Ely) 39-6945 HD216.H5 1939
Bibliography: p. 573-579.
This basic volume was first published in 1924 by
the Macmillan Company. While head of the de-
partment of agricultural economics, University of
Wisconsin (1919-32), the author used the manu-
script as the basis of a seminar, and several of the
chapters were revised by members of the class. The
result is a detailed and somewhat technical history
of the acquisition of the public domain, and the
various policies that have been followed in its dis-
position since 1780. Special attention is given to
the origins and the operation of the Homestead
Act of 1862. Numerous tables show sales and re-
ceipts, bounty land warrants issued, Federal grants
for roads, railroads, and education, etc. In the last
chapter the Federal land policies are reviewed and
criticized. The author points to the reservation of
forest land from private entry as "the most com-
mendable act on the part of the government during
the past half century," and to the great need for a
Federal policy concerning grazing land, which, as
Dr. Peffer describes (no. 5813), was adopted in
1934.
5812. Hoyt, Homer. One hundred years of land
values in Chicago; the relationship of the
LAND AND AGRICULTURE
/ 87=
growth of Chicago to the rise in its land values,
1 830-1 933. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1933. xxxii, 519 p. 34-44 HD268.C4H6 1933a
Bibliography: p. [496]~499.
Fascinated by the growth of Chicago from a
dozen log huts in 1830 to an urban population of
3,376,436 in 1930, with a corresponding rise in the
value of the land from a few thousand dollars to
five billion, and convinced by his experience in the
real estate business that an understanding of the
past movement of land prices was indispensable for
any rational real estate investment policy, the author
undertook this study for his Ph. D. thesis at the
University of Chicago. He gathered material from
the records of the Chicago Tide and Trust Com-
pany, the annual land-value maps, newspaper files,
appraisals, and from tax-assessment records. Part
1 traces the history of the city's growth in relation
to the rise in land values during four booms: those
of the canal and railroad eras, 1830-62; the boom
that followed the Civil War and the Great Fire,
1863-77; me boom of the first skyscrapers and the
first World's Fair, 1878-98; and the land boom that
preceded and followed World War I, 1898-1933.
Part 2 analyzes the relation of the growth of Chicago
to the rise of its land values, and works out the
Chicago real estate cycle and the mechanism of the
Chicago land market. "The result," says Prof. H.
A. Millis, "is a distinct contribution both to the
economic and social history of Chicago and to urban
land economics."
5813. Peffer, E. Louise. The closing of the public
domain: disposal and reservation policies,
1900-50. Stanford, Stanford University Press,
I951, 372 P* (Stanford University. Food Re-
search Institute. Miscellaneous publications, no.
10) 51-10461 HD216.P44
TX341.S8, no. 10
This scholarly study is organized around the
major legislation dealing with the public lands from
the passage of the Reclamation Act in 1902 to the
creation of the Bureau of Land Management in 1946,
which marks the official closing of the old public
domain. It details the struggle between the concept
of "land held in escrow pending transfer of tide" to
individuals, corporations, or States, and the demand
of conservationists for reservations "held in per-
petuity in the interest of the collective owners, the
people of the United States." Out of that struggle
grew the Federal management of public lands, with
the control of grazing (established by the Taylor
Grazing Act of 1934), the development of water-
power sites, the classification of certain mineral
lands, and the building up of the national forests and
parks for economic and recreational use in the public
interest.
5814. Robbins, Roy M. Our landed heritage: the
public domain, 1776-1936. New York, P.
Smith, 1950, °i942. 450 p. maps.
55-21591 HD216.R6 1950
"Selective bibliography of secondary references":
P- [427.]-433-
Originally published in 1942, "this volume pre-
sents perhaps the first attempt to integrate American
land history with the other forces that have shaped
our civilization." It traces the political, economic,
and social effects of the policies underlying the de-
velopment and disposition of the land owned by the
Federal Government, from the cession of Western
lands by the States following the American Revolu-
tion to the withdrawal of all public lands from
private entry in 1935. Much of its content is derived
from the Congressional Globe and Congressional
Record, reporting the arguments for and against the
several measures which determined Federal land
policy.
5815. Sakolski, Aaron M. The great American
land bubble; the amazing story of land-
grabbing, speculations, and booms from colonial
days to the present time. New York, Harper, 1932.
373 P- 32-29324 HD191.S3
From the colonial charters granted by England to
individuals and companies to the Florida real estate
"boom" of the 1920's, the author presents the most
comprehensive study to date of the more important
speculative land transactions which have left their
imprint on the development of the United States.
The Western land ventures of the Ohio Company,
the Georgia Yazoo land frauds of the 18th century,
the colonization of Texas by the Ausdns, and the
"land grabbing" that accompanied the California
Gold Rush of 1849, are among the instances de-
scribed. Although land speculation generated
panics such as that of 1837, it gave impetus to the
building of roads, canals, railroads, and towns.
5816. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Adas of Ameri-
can agriculture. Physical basis including
land relief, climate, soils, and natural vegetation of
the United States. Prepared under the supervision
of O. E. Baker, Bureau of Agricultural Economics.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. 1936. 6 v in 1.
Agr 36-297 S441.A15 1936a
This atlas was originally planned in 1916 as a
monumental undertaking including sections on
crops, livestock, size of farms, rural population, etc.,
but after some experimental advance sheets had been
issued, "it was decided to confine the publication of
data in atlas form to the physical conditions, which
are more or less permanent." Much of the other
material assembled was published in the Yearbook
and other publications of the Department. The
876 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Atlas as finally published has, therefore, rather more
kinship with the titles entered in our Chapter VI on
Geography than with most of the other titles in the
present chapter. However, the sections by Joseph
B. Kincer on "Temperature, Sunshine, and Wind"
and "Precipitation and Humidity," by William
Gardner Reed on "Frost and the Growing Season,"
by Curtis F. Marbut on "Soils of the United States,"
by Homer L. Shantz on "Grassland and Desert
Shrub," and by Raphael Zon on "Forests" are basic
to any geographical approach to American agricul-
ture. Each section consists of an extensive text, as
well as a series of maps, most of which are colored.
Farming Is Hard." Another large section on con-
servation concludes with "Information on Land
from Airphotos," indicating the peacetime uses of
a wartime technique, and including 16 pages of
airphotos of typical farm regions throughout the
United States. Of special interest are the conclud-
ing sections, "Our Growing Needs and Problems"
and "Planning for a Better Use." In the former,
Professor M. Mason Gaffney of the University of
Missouri puts the pertinent question, "Urban Ex-
pansion— Will It Ever Stop?" There is practically
no bibliographical apparatus, but there is a consid-
erable index.
5817. U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Land. Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off. [1958] 605
p., 64 p. of plates. (Its Yearbook of agriculture,
1958)
"A summary in charts and maps": p. 263-276.
Agr 58-321 S21.A35 1958
This latest yearbook of the Department of Agri-
culture, edited by Alfred Stefferud, is concerned
with the use, management, present trends, and
future of public and private lands in the United
States. It consists of 67 relatively brief and untech-
nical papers arranged under 10 general headings;
the majority of the papers are of double, triple, or
even quadruple authorship. The section on public
lands includes essays on these relatively unfamiliar
subjects: "The Management of State Lands," "Get-
ting and Using Lands in Time of War," and "The
Management of Tribal Lands." A large section
deals with "Some Financial Aspects of Land Use";
its final paper tells us that "Getting Started in
5818. Van Dersal, William R. The American
land, its history and its uses. London, New
York, Oxford University Press, 1943. xvi, 215 p.
43-14146 S441.V3
This book fills the need for a general introduction
to the American land, and how it is used for agri-
culture, including livestock, for forests and wood-
lands, and for wildlife and recreation. In the first
two chapters the land as it was in the beginning is
contrasted with the land as it is now. The author
interprets the change which has taken place as
equivalent to the development of European culture
into a truly American civilization. In nine chap-
ters, comprising over half the book, he traces the
origin of certain basic crops and describes their
contribution to that development. Concluding
chapters describe the menace of erosion to our fer-
tile topsoil, and the new methods of farming, such
as contour cultivation and terracing, which are re-
ducing its destruction.
B. Agriculture: History
5819. Barger, Harold, and Hans H. Landsberg.
American agriculture, 1899-1939; a study
of output, employment and productivity. New
York, National Bureau of Economic Research, 1942.
xxii, 440 p. (Publications of the National Bureau
of Economic Research, no. 42) "Charts: sources
and notes": p. [409]~4i3. 43-2979 HD1761.B3
Charts and graphs are extensively used to illus-
trate the authors' analysis of the results of a number
of studies of agricultural "output" and its constit-
uent parts. Part 1 describes agriculture as a seg-
ment of the Nation's industry, and defines "output
as consisting of those products which are not con-
sumed in further processing within agriculture but
are available for consumption elsewhere." In part 2
their index to the aggregate product of agriculture
is explained, as well as the rise, or in some cases the
decline, of individual products, as both are affected
by foreign market and domestic demand. The
growth of nutrition as a science and the changes in
dietary habits which affect consumption are dis-
cussed in a chapter on "Agriculture and the Na-
tion's Food." The development of agricultural
technology, from improvements in machinery to
bettered strains of plants and animals, is reviewed
in part 3 as a prelude to a comparison of output
with changes in the volume of agricultural employ-
ment. Output has increased, and may be expected
to increase, as the number of workers declines. In
part 4, "Summary and Conclusions," the authors
point out that long-range factors such as technical
progress and changes in population and in demand
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 877
for foodstuffs will continue, as they have in the
past, to force agriculture to adjust itself to changing
conditions.
5820. Bidwell, Percy Wells, and John I. Falconer.
History of agriculture in the northern United
States, 1620-1860. Washington, Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington, 1925. 512 p. (Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington. Publication no. 358)
25-13458 S441.B5
HC101.C75, no. 5
This is the fifth in the series of Contributions to
American economic history projected in 1904 by the
Department of Economics and Sociology of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington. Parts 1-3, by
Dr. Bidwell, deal with developments in field hus-
bandry, livestock, farm labor and equipment, trade
in agricultural products, and land tenure, princi-
pally in New England and the Middle States during
the years 1620 to 1840. Part 4, by Dr. Falconer,
covers the two decades 1840 to i860, characterized as
"The Period of Transformation," and describes the
shifting of crops, dairy farming, and livestock from
area to area as it was influenced by climate and soil,
labor, transportation, and markets. Chapters are
devoted to agricultural machinery, to the diffusion
of information, and to each of the major crops, as
well as to animal production. An extensive classi-
fied and critical bibliography (p. 454-473) adds to
the book's value as a reference work for students of
American economic history.
5821. Carrier, Lyman. The beginnings of agri-
culture in America. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1923. xvii, 323 p. illus. (Agricultural and
biological publications; C. V. Piper, consulting
editor) 23-5941 S441.C3
Bibliography: p. 308-312.
The author aims to bring together "from widely
separated and often nearly unavailable sources perti-
nent facts and observations on the early history of
agriculture, especially in America," and has liber-
ally sprinkled his text with extracts from contem-
porary writers. Against a background of economic
and social conditions in each of the Colonies,
aboriginal agriculture and the indigenous plants, as
supplemented by the introduction of European crops
and cultivated by simple imported farm imple-
ments, are described in full. The author demon-
strates in detail that Indian agriculture had actually
reached a complex stage of development, and that
its methods as well as its crops were in large part
taken over by the white setdements. The closing
chapters discuss the effect of the introduction of
slavery, the development of commerce, and the
manufacture of alcoholic beverages on colonial
agriculture.
5822. Cohn, David L. The life and times of King
Cotton. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1956. 286 p. 56-10457 HD9076.C56
A socioeconomic history which tells "something
of an agriculture that fashioned the life of a great
region and profoundly affected the destiny of the
whole American people." The first seven chapters
trace the story of cotton from Eli Whitney's cotton
gin, which brought about profound internal
changes in the United States and gave cotton a place
of international importance, through the Civil War,
which precipitated the breaking-up of plantations
into small family farms and the spread of share-
cropping. In the last four chapters the author de-
scribes the spread of cotton cultivation westward,
the movement of the cotton-textile industry from
New England to the South, and the increase of
competition from foreign countries and man-made
fibers, against a background (after 1929) of Gov-
ernment measures to bolster farm prices. Mr. Cohn
does not conclude on an optimistic note: "While
cotton is fighting a losing batde for a diminishing
share of the home market, it is fighting a spectac-
ularly losing battle in the export market." The
latest phase of this historic crop is analyzed by James
H. Street in The New Revolution in the Cotton
Economy; Mechanization and Its Consequences
(Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1957. xvi, 294 p.). Harvesting machinery was
not introduced on a large scale until the latter years
of World War II, but by 1955 nearly one-fourth of
the American crop was mechanically harvested, and
in the western cotton regions virtually all stages of
production had been mechanized. Mr. Street
treats these developments as a problem in "the
cumulative character of technical progress," and
seeks to determine their relation to the decline in
the agricultural labor force and in share tenancy
in the cotton areas. A comprehensive history of
another major Southern crop, if one of less geograph-
ical extent than cotton, is Joseph Carlyle Sitterson's
Sugar Country; the Cane Sugar Industry in the
South, 1753-1950 ([Lexington] University of Ken-
tucky Press, 1953. 414 p.). Save for one chapter
on sugar in the Florida Everglades since 1880, it
concentrates upon southern Louisiana and eastern
Texas. The first part, more than half of the whole,
is concerned with slavery times; the second narrates
the recovery of sugar culture from the dislocations
of the Civil War, and from the mosaic disease which
nearly extinguished it during the 1920'$.
5823. Gray, Lewis Cecil. History of agriculture
in the southern United States to i860, by
Lewis Cecil Gray, assisted by Esther Katherine
Thompson. Washington, Carnegie Institution of
878 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Washington, 1933. 2 v. (Carnegie Institution of
Washington. Publication no. 430)
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [943J-ioi6.
33-6309 S445.G8
HC101.C75, no. 7
AS32.A5, no. 430
This companion work to Bidwell and Falconer
(no. 5820) rounds out the history of agriculture in
the United States prior to the Civil War. The first
volume describes the beginnings and development
of agriculture during the colonial period, in Vir-
ginia, Maryland, the Carolinas, the lower Mississippi
Valley, the Gulf coastal plains, Georgia, and Florida.
Chapters are devoted to the various agricultural
industries of the period with emphasis on the to-
bacco industry. A striking contrast is drawn be-
tween the Southern plantation with its "capitalistic
type of agricultural organization in which a con-
siderable number of unfree laborers were employed
under unified direction and control in the produc-
tion of a staple crop," and the small self-sustaining
farms of the North. However, the author points
out in greater detail than has been done before that
"the great majority of the Southern people lived on
small farms and worked with their own hands."
The second volume covers the period of transition
from colonial to national economy, extending from
the American Revolution to the Civil War. It
analyzes the development of the national economy,
agricultural industries, and methods of husbandry.
The statistics, the wealth of footnotes, the extensive
bibliography, the many maps, charts, and tables,
with the comprehensive index, evidence the years
of research (since 1908) and patient organization
that went into these volumes. In scholarly fashion,
the author has achieved his goal of attempting to
interpret "the way of life of a great section of our
country, which was almost entirely agricultural, to
describe its system of agricultural organization, to
discern, if possible, the forces that moulded its socio-
economic life, and trace the interrelations of its
economy and its institutions."
5824. Hedrick, Ulysses P. A history of horticul-
ture in America to i860. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1950. 551 p. 50-6898 SB83.H4
Bibliography: p. 515-523.
A distinguished horticulturist of New York State
undertakes to supply the lack, not only of any gen-
eral history, but of any thorough regional or State
histories of American horticulture. His book "is
primarily concerned with gardening, fruit growing,
and viticulture; not with gardens, orchards and
vineyards . . . The places described in this text are
only those that are significant examples of progress."
Part 1 covers the colonial period and, after an initial
chapter on "Indian Gardens," proceeds geographi-
cally, but here and later the author is careful to dis-
criminate the contribution in plants and arts of
Spaniards, Dutch, Swedes, and Germans, upon
which, in most areas, British Isles horticulture was
eventually superimposed. Part 2 covers the years
from the Peace of Paris to the Civil War according
to a more minute chronological breakdown in the
older areas, and to a less minute one in the areas
more newly settled. Part 3 has chapters on four
topics: botanic explorers and gardens, "The Dawn
of Plant Breeding," "Horticultural Literature" from
1700, and "Horticultural Societies" from 1790.
5825. Holt, Rackham. George Washington Car-
ver, an American biography. Garden City,
Doubleday, Doran, 1943. 342 p. illus.
43-5 1 1 06 S4 1 7.C3H6
George Carver (i864?-i943) did not know when
he was born, but it must have been during the last
year or two of Negro slavery. Since his education
had to be entirely self-financed, he was about 30
before he obtained his degree from one of the land-
grant colleges, the Iowa State College of Agriculture
and Mechanic Arts. Two years later Booker T.
Washington (nos. 4449-4450) called him to the post
he was to hold for the rest of his life, in charge of
agriculture at Tuskegee Institute. Effective in his
teaching, he was a genius in the laboratory which he
had created out of odds and ends. Here, in an
extraordinary series of experiments in chemical
analysis and synthesis, he revealed the potentialities
of the peanut and the sweet potato, and opened the
way for a badly needed diversification of Southern
agriculture. The peanut, not even regarded as a
crop in 1896, stood second to cotton as a source of
cash for Southern farmers by 1940. Carver's own
writings consisted chiefly of leaflets and articles giv-
ing practical hints to Negro and other small South-
ern farmers; an article of 1915 is typical: "The Fat
of the Land — How the Colored Farmer Can Live on
It Twenty-one Times Each Week." Mrs. Holt's
biography is largely a succession of anecdotes de-
rived from Dr. Carver or his friends, but they are
cumulatively impressive. Of Carver's many achieve-
ments the greatest was certainly this: the contempt
and indignities he had had to endure from ignorant
whites did not leave a trace of rancor or resentment
in him. (This title also appears as no. 2690 in
Chapter IV on Biography and Autobiography.)
5826. Hutchinson, William T. Cyrus Hall Mc-
Cormick. New York, Century Co., 1930-35.
2 v. illus. 30-30678 HD9486.U4M35
This is a definitive biography of an important
inventor, and a history of the influence of the reaper
on the agricultural development of the Middle West,
and of the building of a great manufacturing dynasty
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 879
in Chicago. Each volume is complete within itself
with bibliographical guide and index. The first
volume, "Seed-Time, 1 809-1 856," traces the life of
Cyrus Hall McCormick (1809-1884) from its begin-
nings in the Valley of Virginia, where he worked
with his inventive father in the manufacture and
sale of farm equipment, and finally invented the
reaper. It carries him to the eve of the Civil War,
with a manufacturing business established in
Chicago that had brought him recognition as an
outstanding entrepreneur. The controversy as to
whether Cyrus or his father, Robert McCormick,
was the real inventor is reviewed in chapter 5 and is
adjudged in favor of the son. The second volume,
"Harvest, 1 856-1 884," carries the narrative of the
harvest-machine industry to the inventor's death in
1884, and also describes McCormick's activities in
the church, in politics, and in philanthropy. In the
centennial year of the invention, Cyrus McCormick,
grandson of the inventor, published The Century of
the Reaper (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1931. 307
p.), which provides a convenient briefer narrative,
considerably indebted to Hutchinson's massive re-
search.
5827. Neely, Wayne Caldwell. The agricultural
fair. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1935. 313 p. (Columbia University studies
in the history of American agriculture, edited by
H. J. Carman and R. G. Tugwell, 2)
35-27113 S555.A7N4 1935a
Bibliography: p. [265J-290.
Following the English custom, which originated
in medieval times, fairs for the sale of agricultural
products were held during the colonial period, but
owe their crystallization as a distinctive American
institution to Elkanah Watson of Pittsfield, Mass.,
who promoted the first "modern" fair in 181 1. The
author presents the development of the agricultural
fair, with its economic, educational, recreational,
and social aspects, against a background of changing
society. A period of decline following 1820 was suc-
ceeded by one of expansion after 1840. "The core of
the agricultural fair is the exhibition of agricultural
products for prizes." The county fair, as it is now
usually called, illustrates the pride of a people in
improving and displaying the products of their
labor for the mutual benefit of all.
5828. Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell. Life and labor in
the Old South. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1929.
xix, 375 p. 29-11204 F209.P56
As a student of history and a young instructor,
the Georgia-born Phillips (1877-1934) was struck
with the idea that the interpretation of the South
by historians had been distorted. He believed that
a study of the Old South "from the inside" was
needed, and by the time he wrote this book had
already spent years of research among plantation
records, diaries, account books, and correspondence,
some of which he found in the garrets of Southern
houses. In the first chapter he describes the soil
and climate that determined the crops and the or-
ganization of labor as well as the habits of life and
tempers of men — plantation owners, overseers, and
slaves. He describes the plantadon as a "home-
stead, isolated, permanent and peopled by a social
group with a common interest in achieving and
maintaining social order," and as a factory, a school,
a parish, a pageant, and a variety show. He reviews
the Southern scene from the "big house" and relates
sympathetically the instances of friction that weak-
ened the socioeconomic bonds holding planters and
slaves together. Awarded a $2,500 prize offered
by Litde, Brown and Company in 1928 for the best
manuscript on American history, this book was the
first in a projected series of three on the South. The
second, The Course of the South to Secession (no.
3404), left incomplete at the time of his death, was
sponsored by the American Historical Association
with deep appreciation of Phillips' "fruitful labor."
5829. Robert, Joseph C. The story of tobacco in
America. New York, Knopf, 1949. xii,
296, xxiv p. illus. 49-8562 SB273.R58
The influence of tobacco on the economic, political,
and social history of the United States is traced
from the time when smoking by the natives of the
New World was observed by the earliest explorers
to its present position as a big business, in 1948
yielding $1,300,280,000 in Federal excise taxes. The
low price of the staple in Virginia of the 1670's led
to Bacon's Rebellion, and in the first decade of the
20th century created conflicts, such as the Kentucky
Black Patch War, between the tobacco trusts, the
farmers, and certain protective associations. Its use
as currency in the era before the American Revolu-
tion strained the relations between the colonists and
England, led to the famous Parson's Cause, and
carried Patrick Henry into prominence as a defender
of American rights. The staple helped to create
the pattern of the Southern plantation based on slave
labor, and of sweatshop conditions among the cigar
manufacturers in the New York tenements. The
author describes the nicotine habits of Americans in
all strata of society — from chewing, sniffing, and
dipping to smoking cigars and cigarettes — as well
as the numerous anti-tobacco movements that have
attempted to dictate social habits. Considered a
"divinely-sent remedy for virtually all ailments of
the human body" in mid-i6th century, its effect on
health in the 20th is the subject of extensive research
by the medical laboratory.
88o /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5830. Rogin, Leo. The introduction of farm ma-
chinery in its relation to the productivity of
labor in the agriculture of the United States during
the nineteenth century. Berkeley, University of
California Press, 1931. 260 p. illus. (University
of California publications in economics, v. 9)
A3 1-750 H31.C2, v. 9
S751.R6 193 1
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) Columbia University.
"Index of authors cited": p. 244-251.
This is a study of the machinery used in the
tillage of the soil, and in cultivating, threshing, and
harvesting wheat, and the resulting effects upon the
manhour requirements for crop production. Part 1
relates the development and utilization of the various
types of plows, the harrow, and the field cultivator.
In sections 1-3 of part 2, the introduction and use
of harvesting machinery, the threshing machine, and
seeding machinery are traced. The author has
ascertained the man-labor requirements as affected
by the various types of machinery, and in the last
chapter compares those requirements at the begin-
ning with those at the end of the 19th century. For
instance, in 1830 it took over 64 hours to put in and
secure an acre of winter wheat by hand; in 1895 me
same operations could be effected by machinery in
little more than two hours! The numerous illustra-
tions, statistical tables, extensive footnotes, and
bibliography are of special value for the research
worker.
5831. Saloutos, Theodore, and John D. Hicks.
Agricultural discontent in the Middle West,
1900-1939. Madison, University of Wisconsin
Press, 1951. 581 p. 51-4287 HD1773.A3S3
This is an enlargement of Dr. Saloutos' doctoral
dissertation, to which his teacher Dr. Hicks has con-
tributed chapters 1, 2, and 4. Wisconsin, Illinois,
Minnesota, Iowa, Missouri, the Dakotas, Nebraska,
and Kansas are described as the center of discontent
where movements for agrarian reform flourished.
In the early years of the 20th century, the anti-
monopolistic philosophy of the Middle Western
farmers was voiced in Congress by such leaders as
Robert M. LaFollette of Wisconsin, George Norris
of Nebraska, and Henrik Shipstead of Minnesota,
who sought reforms in railroad regulation, the tariff,
taxation, conservation, and other spheres. The
authors analyze the economic and political role of
the American Society of Equity, the Nonpartisan
League, the Farmers Union, and the American
Farm Bureau Federation. They describe the efforts
of the cooperative movement, the Farm Bloc, third-
party ventures, and the New Deal to get higher
prices, better credit facilities, surplus-control regu-
lations, cooperative methods of marketing and pur-
chasing, and other measures to better the farmer's
position. During this period the "trust busting"
tactics of the agrarians were abandoned in favor of
building "restrictive devices patterned to a great
degree after those of industry."
5832. Schafer, Joseph. The social history of
American agriculture. New York, Macmil-
lan, 1936. 302 p. 36-27407 HD191.S4
This book originated in a series of lectures given
at the University of London by Dr. Schafer (1867-
1941), superintendent of the State Historical Society
of Wisconsin for 20 years. While each chapter was
prepared as a rounded treatment of a distinct topic,
the whole is "a comprehensive survey of the social
history of agriculture." Chapter 1, "Land for
Farmers," traces the continuing conflict between
squatters and speculators, and the attempts made
from time to time to democratize the land laws so
as to favor actual settlers. Chapters 2 and 3 contrast
the "Primitive Subsistence Farming" which char-
acterized the advancing frontier with the "Big Busi-
ness Farming" which is as old as the tobacco plan-
tation, and prevailed in Middle Western wheat
growing and Great Plains ranching. "Improved
Farming" describes the movement, which acquired
momentum in the older sections of the country about
1830, to halt soil exhaustion, diversify crops, and
breed better livestock. "Professional Farming" de-
scribes the application of scientific analysis and ex-
perimental methods to American agriculture, the
decisive step in which was the Morrill Act of 1862
providing for agricultural education in the land-
grant colleges. "Social Trends in Rural Life" de-
scribes the old landholding aristocracies, the rise of
an agricultural democracy of "worker-farmers," and
the problem of maintaining it in the face of a large
influx of European immigrants of peasant status
and mentality. The concluding chapters are "Po-
litical Trends in Rural Life" and "The Outlook for
Farmers," the latter of which has hardly been borne
out by subsequent developments.
5833. Taylor, Carl C. The farmers' movement,
1620-1920. [New York] American Book
Co., 1953. 519 p. (American sociology series)
53-95!5 HD1761.T25
Bibliography: p. 501-508.
A volume which achieves an exceptionally large
perspective by running "a conceptual thread
through an elaborate and diverse body of recorded
history." Mr. Taylor maintains that a farmers'
movement has existed not merely since the 1870's
but since early colonial days, for it is as old as
commercial agriculture in America. It arose out
of and still revolves about the issues of prices, mar-
kets, and credits, originated "with the awareness of
farmers that they had become a part of the price
LAND AND AGRICULTURE /
and market economy," and has been "continued by
the more or less organized efforts of farmers either
to protect themselves against the impact of the
evolving commercial-capitalist economy or to catch
step with it." The various farmers' revolts, only
a few of which have been marked by violence or
bloodshed, are the high tides in a movement unified
by a continuing body of ideologies and sentiments,
and taking the form of a series of recurrent farmer
"publics." Although Mr. Taylor calls his book "a
sociological analysis," it is primarily a historical
characterization of successive forms of protest,
from the plant-cutters of Stuart Virginia to the
Nonpartisan League and the cooperative marketing
movement. In fact only the first 87 pages are con-
cerned with developments prior to the Civil War.
5834. Taylor, Henry C, and Anne (Dewees) Tay-
lor. The story of agricultural economics in
the United States, 1840-1932; men, services, ideas.
Farm finance section by Norman }. Wall. Ames,
Iowa State College Press, 1952. xxvi, 1121 p.
52-14651 HD 1761.T28
The Taylors present in one large and compre-
hensive volume the development of thinking about
the business phases of farming. They analyze the
contributions of schools, experiment stations, col-
leges, and the Federal Government to the various
practices that determine success or failure in agrarian
industries and play an important part in the national
welfare. The taking of the first agricultural census
in 1840 marks the beginning of Government infor-
mation services to meet the needs of farmers, and
1932 is the "dividing line between two eras." Dr.
Taylor (b. 1873) is particularly well qualified to
write a book of this scope: he was the first professor
of agricultural economics in a land grant institution,
the organizer and first chief of the U. S. Bureau of
Agricultural Economics, and the author of the first
book (1905) to bear "agricultural economics" in its
title. The subjects of marketing, rural finance,
agricultural labor and wages, transportation, and
taxation, which were omitted in his early work but
have come to importance since, are adequately cov-
ered in the present study. The authors have made
"writers of the period tell the story," and afford
direct access to the source material which, until now,
has been widely scattered. The very thorough index
by Adelaide R. Hasse serves also as a bibliography.
5835. Thornton, Harrison John. The history of
the Quaker Oats Company. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1933. 279 p.
33-14986 HD9039.Q3T5 1933
Bibliography: p. 258-267.
The Quaker Oats Company, which was incor-
porated in 1901 as a New Jersey holding company,
431240—60 57
but one unit of which goes back to 1832, is typical of
the many processing enterprises that have grown
out of agricultural production. The author of this
University of Chicago dissertation had access to
company records for his account of the individuals,
the technological changes, the financial growth, the
expanding markets, and the advertising methods
that have consolidated several smaller business units
into a great industry. He begins his story with the
cultivation of oats as it spread westward from the
Eastern seaboard, describes the processes of the early
millers, inspired by Ferdinand Schumacher (1822-
1908), the "Oatmeal King," and narrates the expan-
sion of the company as manufacturers of rolled oats,
"puffed rice" and "puffed wheat," animal feeds, and
related products. From the conquest of the Ameri-
can breakfast table by cereals hot or cold to the
building of world markets, "the story of the Quaker
Oats Company is part of the unfolding economy
of American life."
5836. True, Alfred Charles. A history of agricul-
tural education in the United States, 1785-
1925. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1929.
436 p. illus. (U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Miscel-
laneous publication no. 36)
Agr. 29-1377 S533.T837
S21.A46, no. 36
Contribution from Extension Service.
Bibliography: p. 397-420.
As Director of the Office of Experiment Stations
(1893-1915) and of the States Relations Service
(1915-23), Dr. True of the U. S. Department of
Agriculture was intimately associated, during the
period of their greatest expansion, with agencies of
agricultural education whose history he wrote in two
other works issued as Department of Agriculture
Miscellaneous publications, nos. 15 and 251 respec-
tively, by the U.S. Government Printing Office:
A History of Agricultural Extension Wor\ in the
United States, ij8 5-1923 (Washington, 1928. 220
p.), and A History of Agricultural Experimentation
and Research in the United States, 1607-1925, In-
cluding a History of the United States Department
of Agriculture (Washington, 1937. 321 p.). The
present history of agricultural education in its rela-
tion "to the general development and progress of
science and education and to the background of eco-
nomic conditions and of organizations of various
kinds for the promotion of agriculture and country
life," begins with the post-Revolutionary period,
when the foundations of the American system were
being modeled upon European schools and litera-
ture. From 1820 to i860 the growth of agricultural
societies and publications, fairs, state boards of
agriculture, and of general education evoked a move-
882 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ment for public support which resulted in the estab-
lishment of land grant colleges under the Morrill Act
of 1862. The book deals in large part with agricul-
tural education since the passage of that act and
extends to an analysis of agriculture in the elemen-
tary curriculum of the 1920's.
5837. U.S. Dept. of Agriculture. Farmers in a
changing world. [Washington] U.S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1940. 1215 p. illus. (Its Yearbook of
agriculture, 1940) Agr 55-7 S21.A35 1940
A brief chronology of American agricultural his-
tory: p. 1 1 84- 1 196.
This noteworthy volume of the distinguished
series of agricultural yearbooks which has been
appearing since 1894 has the largest scope of any.
More than 70 authors contribute to an analysis of
the economic, social, and technological changes
which have been taking place especially since 1920,
and of the farmer's reactions to them. The seven
parts into which the symposium is divided indicate
its scope: "The Farmer's Changing World," "Agri-
culture and the National Welfare," "The Farmer's
Problems Today and the Efforts to Solve Them"
(p. 385-937), "Farm Organizations," "What Some
Social Scientists Have to Say," "Democracy and
Agricultural Policy," and "Essentials of Agricultural
Policy." The contents are summarized in a long
preliminary essay by the editor, Gove Hambidge,
"Farmers in a Changing World — a Summary"
(p. 1-100). The final essay, by the then Chief of
the Bureau of Agricultural Economics, Howard R.
Tolley, "Some Essentials of a Good Agricultural
Policy" (p. 1159-1183), sums up the ideas and the
objectives of the farm policies of the New Deal. An
idea that recurs throughout the volume is expounded
by Louis H. Bean in "The Farmer's Stake in Greater
Industrial Production": if the latter could be
increased to a point near capacity, "not all farm
problems but many of the worst of them would
disappear." That increase was on the point of
taking place.
5838. Wilcox, Walter W. The farmer in the
Second World War. Ames, Iowa State
College Press, 1947. 4 10 p.
Agr 47-260 HD 1 76 1 .W44
This Government-sponsored study aims to give
"an integrated picture of the important economic
forces affecting United States farmers during the
second World War." It brings together from scat-
tered sources, including interviews and correspond-
ence with Government officials, the significant facts
relating to agricultural production, marketing,
manpower, and farm prices and wages. In many
instances it makes comparisons with similar factors
during World War I. To a great extent it is an
interpretation of Government programs as they af-
fected agriculture, and of farmer reaction to those
programs. World War II brought about a shift
from programs created to help the farmer in a
depressed period to programs for meeting war-
created scarcities. After describing price policies in
general and in the several fields of agriculture, the
author analyzes the economic implications of such
policies for the future, examines Government man-
agement of the food supply in relation to winning
the war, and describes the technological processes
that increased output in spite of reduced manpower.
He concludes: "Though substantial progress has
been recorded in farm families' standard of living
and in the legislation designed to improve and
stabilize their income, the basic problems remain
unsolved."
C. Agriculture: Practice
5839. Black, John Donald. Farm management
[by] John D. Black [and others]. New
York, Macmillan, 1947. 1073 p.
Agr47-3T4 S561.B53
"Further reading" at end of most of the chapters.
A massive textbook for advanced courses in
agricultural colleges by John D. Black, Marion
Clawson, Charles R. Sayre, and Walter W. Wilcox;
the advantage of quadruple authorship is that each
author is most familiar with the farming of a dif-
ferent major region of the United States. The
manager of a farm business, who in the United
States is usually also a farm laborer, has "to organ-
ize it, to plan the work and direct it from day to
day, and to plan, and on most farms actually con-
duct, the buying and selling and the financing or
credit operations." He should analyze his prob-
lems in terms of his farm as a whole, and according
to the methods of Farm Management, which "is
applied Science — not just applied Economics, but
also applied Biology, Physics, Chemistry, Geology,
Meteorology, Psychology and even Sociology."
Part 2, "Systems of Farming," distinguishes be-
tween one-crop, specialized livestock, diversified-
crop, feed-and-livestock, and crop-and-livestock
farming. Part 3, "Principles and Methods of
LAND AND AGRICULTURE
/ 883
Analysis," includes a chapter on "Measures of Suc-
cess and Factors of Success in Farming." Part 4,
"Problems of Management," has chapters on the
management of farm equipment, of labor on farms,
and of land. Part 5 is on "Management by Types
of Farming" determined by the product such as
wheat or sheep, but it also has chapters on "Irriga-
tion Farming," "The Management of Farm Wood-
land," and "Part-Time and Self-Sufficing Farming."
The authors emphasize that farm management is
essentially the farmer's reaction to external factors,
principally weather, prices and costs, and techno-
logical advance.
5840. Black, John Donald. The rural economy of
New England, a regional study. With the
assistance of the Committee on Research in the
Social Sciences and the Graduate School of Public
Administration of Harvard University. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1950. xxiv, 796 p.
diagrs., maps. 50-9844 HD1773.A2B5
This substantial volume is the result of 30 years'
intensive study of the rural land-use economy of
New England by a Harvard professor of economics,
drawing upon successive national censuses and "the
whole research effort of the six New England Agri-
cultural Experiment Stations since they were
founded, and of the federal research agencies coop-
erating with them." It is presented as "a case study
in regional analysis," showing what can be achieved
for other areas by the same kind of detailed study.
Dr. Black regards it as particularly significant
because New England has undergone the maximum
of industrial and urban development, and "the dis-
tribution of land uses between rural and urban
which one finds in New England — among crops,
pasture, woodlot, and forest, among pleasure
ground, country home, and suburban home — is
likely to characterize, in some future period, almost
as large a part of our national domain as is the more
largely agricultural distribution" of the Midwest and
South. Chapter 14 (p. [25o]-27i) is a sketch of
New England agricultural history aiming to show
how and when it acquired its present characters:
"largely a region of dairy cows and fluid milk, hay
and pasture, and poultry and vegetables for local
consumption," and "a region mainly of ordinary
family-sized farms interspersed freely in many sec-
tions with part-time, country-home, and other resi-
dential farms." The author concludes that "the
great retrogression that set in before the Civil War"
in New England agriculture leveled out about 1920,
that its forestry should soon "round the turn," and
that residential and recreational use should continue
to expand. But all these depend upon New England
industry and trade maintaining themselves, and all
will go better if active policies replace the recent
tendency to drift and stagnate.
5841. Davis, John H., and Kenneth Hinshaw.
Farmer in a business suit. New York, Simon
& Schuster, 1957. 241 p. 57-7308 HD1761.D35
Dr. Davis was Assistant Secretary of Agriculture
in President Eisenhower's first administration, and
has since been with the Harvard Graduate School
of Business Administration; his collaborator handles
publications and public relations for Eastern States
Farmers' Exchange. Dr. Davis has been engaged in
working out a new approach, of which he has given
a technical and statistical analysis with another
collaborator, Ray A. Goldberg: A Concept of Agri-
business (Boston, Division of Research, Graduate
School of Business Administration, Harvard Uni-
versity, 1957. xiv, 136 p.). With Mr. Hinshaw he
aims at a popular presentation of the idea by means
of a fictional narrative of three generations of an
Oregon family farm, with interlarded commentary.
"The Earthbound Era" lasted from about 1880 to
1920. "The Transition," from about 1920 to 1940,
saw farmers overwhelmed by problems, because
"confronted with the necessity of buying a modern
standard of living instead of being able to create it
to a considerable degree direcdy from the soil of
their farms." In the present "Agribusiness Era" the
supply of farms, productive operations on farms, and
the preparation of farm products for the market are
three inseparable and interdependent stages of a
single economic process. The greatest needs are for
"versatile, better, and more appealing ways to mar-
ket agricultural products," and for more research to
find new crops or new uses for present overproduced
crops. There is no master plan for agricultural
salvation, but "little by little we can win the battle of
the farm problem by developing successful agri-
business programs for each type of farming or each
farm product."
5842. Fetrow, Ward W., and Ralph H. Elsworth.
Agricultural cooperation in the United
States. Washington [U. S. Govt. Print. Off.]
1948. 214 p. (U. S. Farm Credit Administration.
Bulletin 54) Agr 48-486 HG2051.U5A574, no. 54
"This publication is designed to provide infor-
mation on some of the more general phases of the
cooperative movement among farmers and also a
description of the organizations and the methods
of operation of associations in the various fields of
cooperative endeavor." The introductory matter
includes a brief historical sketch, a statement of
principles, and a statistical treatment of the extent
of cooperative activity. "Cooperation in Farm Pro-
duction" (p. 17-28) is a relatively minor aspect,
but does include the mutual irrigation companies of
884 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
long standing and various product-improvement
groups. "Cooperation in Marketing Farm Prod-
ucts" (p. 29-135) is much the longest section and
describes the area of greatest success. In 1945 there
were 7,400 marketing associations, with an estimated
membership of 2,895,000 and an estimated annual
business of $4,835 millions. "Cooperative Purchas-
ing of Farm Supplies" (p. 141-154) became a major
development only after 1920. In 1945 it numbered
2,750 groups, 1,610,000 members, and an annual
business of $810 millions. "Cooperative Farm
Business Services" (p. 155-185) includes financing,
insurance, and telephone organizations. Coopera-
tion flourishes, but the mortality of cooperative or-
ganizations has been and remains high; 15,530 de-
funct marketing or purchasing groups are of record.
The reasons for this are only very tentatively arrived
at.
5843. Haystead, Ladd, and Gilbert C. Fite. The
agricultural regions of the United States.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. xx,
288 p. 55-9620 S441.H35
"Notes on sources and additional reading": p.
276-280.
5844. Mighell, Ronald L. American agriculture,
its structure and place in the economy. For
the Social Science Research Council in cooperation
with the U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Agricultural
Research Service, and the U. S. Dept. of Commerce,
Bureau of the Census. New York, Wiley, 1955.
1 87 p. (Census monograph series )
55-8179 HD1761.M48
The first tide is a concise economic geography
of American agriculture which emphasizes its di-
versity and its efficiency. It is intended for all "in-
terested in why the greatest industrial nation in the
world should also have the largest farm output and
be one of the most varied in agricultural produc-
tion." The average American farm of 1950 in-
cluded 215.3 acres, each worth $64.96 (as against
figures of 133.7 and $19-02 for 1880) but no one
could point to a typical American farm. There is,
however, a typical American farm product, corn,
which "has something over six hundred uses, rang-
ing all the way from bourbon whiskey to the sizing
that makes the paper in magazines slick." The re-
maining 11 chapters survey as many regions, from
"New England: Land of Abandonment" to "The
Western Slope: Land of Tomorrow." Sketch
maps, dot maps, and 89 well-constructed statistical
tables permit a very rapid apprehension of essential
factors. Dr. Mighell of the Agricultural Research
Service of the Department of Agriculture provides
a statistical view of American agriculture based
upon the 1950 census (for other volumes in the
series see no. 4395). He furnishes a number of
dot and other maps, but for the most part his tab-
ulations of "Agriculture in the Total Economic
Process," "Dimensions of the Agricultural Plant,"
"Structure of Commercial Farms" by scale and
type, "Farm Tenure and Debt," and "Social Fea-
tures of the Structure of Agriculture" apply to
American agriculture as a whole.
5845. Larson, Adlowe L. Agricultural marketing.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. xiv, 519 p.
51-3575 HD9006.L28
A simply written textbook by a professor of agri-
cultural economics at Oklahoma State University of
Agriculture and Applied Science. Marketing is
defined as "the performance of business activities
that direct the flow of goods and services from pro-
ducer to consumer"; it becomes a subject for sep-
arate study as the degree of specialization in the
economy increases. Part 1 is a general discussion
of the market for agricultural products as deter-
mined by population, employment, national and
family income, consumption, and export outlets, and
this market's place in the national economy. Part 2
describes the several types of marketing agencies,
local, wholesale, and retail. Part 3 analyzes the
operations or marketing functions of these agencies
under two categories: monetary handling, which
includes buying and selling, risking, and financing;
and physical handling, which includes storage,
transportation, and standardization. Part 4 de-
scribes the marketing process in four major com-
modities: grain, cotton, livestock, and dairy prod-
ucts. Part 5 introduces the theory of pricing, and
assesses the effect of monopolistic tendencies in re-
cent price developments. The sixth and last part
has chapters on seven "problem areas": marketing
costs, information, and research; trade barriers; fu-
tures trading; agricultural cooperation; and Federal
policies.
5846. McWilliams, Carey. Ill fares the land; mi-
grants and migratory labor in the United
States. Boston, Little, Brown, 1942. 419 p.
42-5664 HD1525.M35
Bibliography: p. [39i]-4ii.
The plight of the migratory workers was little
noticed until they began arriving in California by
the tens of thousands. Attention was focused on
them by John Steinbeck's novel of 1939, Grapes of
Wrath (no. 1777), which was followed in quick
succession by the investigations of the La Follette
and Tolan Committees, the inquiry of the Tem-
porary National Economic Committee into techno-
logical changes in agriculture, and other forms of
publicity. As chief of the Division of Immigration
and Housing for the State of California from 1938
LAND AND AGRICULTURE
/ 885
to 1942, the author was directly concerned with
problems of migratory labor. He emphasized the
people and their plight in this book, but also indi-
cated the forces which had produced two types of
agricultural migrants — those displaced from their
own farms and those who were habitual migratory
workers. Book 1 deals with the problems of mi-
grants in the highly industrialized agriculture
found in California and Arizona. Book 2 is docu-
mented from the Congressional investigations
which revealed that the California situation was
paralleled in many respects by conditions in Colo-
rado, Ohio, Indiana, the east coast, and elsewhere.
Book 3 describes conditions in the homes from
which the California migrants came, and argues
that the dust storms of Oklahoma and Texas had
been given too much of the blame for a manmade
situation. Book 4 is concerned with the agricultural
revolution of the 20th century, during which tech-
nological advances have brought about a swing
from farm ownership and family operation to farm
tenancy, and have turned the hired hand into the
migrant laborer. It reviews measures taken by
State and Federal governments to relieve the situa-
tion and considers long-range programs for its solu-
tion. Most of this dislocation was resolved by the
manpower shortage of World War II, but the bad
days described in this indignant book have remained
a potent factor in all subsequent measures to main-
tain American agriculture.
5847. Malott, Deane W., and Boyce F. Martin.
The agricultural industries. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1939. 483 p.
40-1402 HD9005.M3 1939
"Selected bibliography": p. 463-476.
The handling and processing of agricultural prod-
ucts have grown during the past century from house-
hold industries into fully developed elements of our
economic structure. This volume "is designed to
present the business aspects of purchasing, process-
ing, financing, and marketing the chief agricultural
raw materials entering into American industry and
commerce, and to analyze the business problems
peculiar to those industries." The industries that
use such raw materials as milk, livestock, cotton,
grain, sugar, tobacco, and wool are treated in sepa-
rate chapters. In developing their thesis the authors
have used not only Government documents and
other published data, but also over 150 actual busi-
ness problems collected by them from these indus-
tries for use in a course on agricultural industries in
the Harvard Business School. The authors empha-
size that these industries handle the essential food
and clothing requirements of the American people,
and provide the cash income for our farm popula-
tion. Their 9th and last chapters, "Summary and
Conclusions," argues the similarity if not identity of
interest between farmer and "processor": "Both are
concerned with making the farmer's product more
attractive to the consumer and encouraging the use
of it in greater quantities," so that "it is extremely
shortsighted for the farmer to consider the processor
and handler of agricultural products as an inevitable
antagonist." Government programs which help the
farmer only by multiplying difficulties for the proc-
essor are neither democratic nor economically sound.
5848. Murray, William G. Agricultural finance;
principles and practice of farm credit. 3d ed.
Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1953. 419 p.
53-12178 HG2051.U5M88 1953
This third edition of a comprehensive textbook
originally published in 1941 is a study of the credit
principles which guide or should guide the borrow-
ing of funds by farmers, and of the lending organiza-
tions which have grown in number and complexity
since the Federal Farm Loan Act of 1916 added
Federally sponsored agencies to the banks, insurance
companies, and individuals already in the field.
A new chapter on risk insurance and investment and
a second chapter on commercial banks have been
added to this third edition. Other changes take
account of new legislation, recent statistics, and farm
credit changes which have occurred since the second
edition ( 1947). Part 1 seeks to consider credit prin-
ciples from the vantage points of both borrower and
lender, and includes a chapter on "Buying a Farm
on Credit." Part 2 now requires 19 chapters to
describe the sources and varieties of credit available
to the farmer; 12 of them deal with Federal sources
as against 5 for other lenders. The Federal Govern-
ment's batde against farm tenancy in the United
States and its measures taken to turn tenants into
owner-operators are summarized in the last chapter.
The author concludes that, despite the small success
of earlier measures, the recent conservative policy of
restricting loans during periods of high prices, "plus
a widespread movement on the part of farmers gen-
erally to pay debts rather than to increase them," will
promote a movement up the ladder from tenancy to
ownership.
5849. White, John M. The farmer's handbook.
New ed., rev. by N. W. Sellers. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1952. 462 p.
52-14154 S501.W54 1952
Mr. White says in his preface: "I have endeavored
to condense and put into this book the results of
my own experience of fifty years as a farmer, a
county agent, a district agent, and a specialist of
the United States Department of Agriculture and
the Agricultural and Mechanical College of Okla-
homa." The first edition of 1948 went through
886 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
seven printings and rapidly became a standard ref-
erence work. The book aims to present in concise
form and simple language the most up-to-date in-
formation on farm methods gathered from the most
reliable sources, and is "intended to be as useful to
the farmer as a good cookbook is to the housewife."
The material is arranged in topical sections, and
alphabetically by subtopics within each section. The
first nine sections deal with agriculture, from grain
crops to berries, and the next six with stockraising,
from beef cattle to poultry and rabbits. Diseases
and pests and their antidotes are regularly described.
There follow "Feeds and Feeding," "Soil Manage-
ment," "Beekeeping," "Fish and Wildlife," "Farm
Engineering," and "A Little about a Lot," from
agricultural colleges to weights and measures. The
text is interspersed with numerous photographs,
diagrams, and tables, and there is both a glossary
of farm terms (p. 433-441) and a substantial index.
The Farmer's Handbook provides a rapid overall
view of the best farm practices in the United States.
5850. Wilcox, Walter W., and Willard W. Coch-
rane. Economics of American agriculture.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. 594 p.
51-6252 HD1761.W435
A textbook for general courses in agricultural
economics which seeks to give a comprehensive pic-
ture of its subject by first describing each segment
or problem area in American agriculture, and then
introducing modern economic analysis to further
the understanding of each. These analyses, the
authors say, have been kept at an elementary level,
but the average reader will find them abstruse
enough. Part 1, "Developing Efficiency in the
Production of Farm Products," presents the nine
major type-of-farming areas into which farm man-
agement specialists have classified the country, dis-
cusses the most profitable level of capital and labor
input and of crop production, and finds that "most
farms in the United States are smaller than optimum
according to economic standards," but that the aver-
age size is steadily rising. Part 2, "Problems in
Acquiring and Managing Land," discusses the dis-
tribution of farm people (owners, tenants, hired
workers), the economic classes of farms (large-
scale, part-time, etc.), the problems of tenancy and
the extent of inheritance, and the economic effects
of taxation. Part 3, "Marketing Farm Products in
an Interdependent Economy," concludes that, al-
though more than half the consumer's farm-product
dollar goes for processing and distributing, he is in
fact choosing to spend his money for additional
services (such as packaging) making for greater
convenience. The remaining three parts are "To-
ward an Understanding of Farm Prices," "Farmers
in the National and World Economy," and "What
Government Aid Do Farmers Need?" References
for further study occur at the end of each of the
32 chapters.
D. Agriculture: Government Policies
5851. Bailey, Joseph Cannon. Seaman A. Knapp,
schoolmaster of American agriculture. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1945. 307 p.
(Columbia University studies in the history of
American agriculture, no. 10)
A 45-5256 S417.K6B3 1945a
"Selected bibliography": p. [28i]-290.
Knapp (1833-1911) began life as a schoolmaster,
and was vice president of Ripley Female College at
Poultney, Vt., in 1866, when an accident in a soft-
ball game nearly cost him a leg and drove him to an
Iowa farm for the restoration of his health. Here his
strength of mind and character led to a brilliant
series of achievements, as leader of the Iowa stock-
breeders, professor of agriculture and then president
of Iowa State College, director of the colonization
experiment at Lake Charles, La., and creator of the
rice industry of the Southwest. From 1898 he was
associated with the U. S. Department of Agriculture,
and in the course of introducing oriental crops into
the lower South, and combating the boll weevil
menace which became acute in 1903, he hit upon the
demonstration farm technique, or Terrell [Tex.]
plan, whereby a local farmer who volunteered to
adopt the recommended methods was guaranteed
against financial loss. "The right psychological key
which unlocked the door to the farmer's cooperation
had been found." During Dr. Knapp's remaining
years he spread this method through the South as
"the Farmer's Cooperative Demonstration Work" of
the Department, and three years after his death
Congress established it on a national scale by the
Smith-Lever Act (1914). Dr. Bailey's Columbia
dissertation is in large part based on original records
of the Department of Agriculture and gives a vivid
picture of a strong personality and a public-spirited
career that deserves to be remembered.
5852. Baker, Gladys. The county agent. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1939. xxi,
226 p. (Studies in public administration, v. n)
39-21222 S533.B17 1939a
LAND AND AGRICULTURE
/ 887
Prepared as a dissertation at the University of
Chicago, and in large part based on observation and
interviews in the field, especially in Iowa, this is an
administrative study of the key man in recent agri-
cultural organization, who began about 1906 "as an
adult itinerant vocational teacher" and by 1939
brought national agricultural programs to localities
"as a promoter, adviser, semiadministrator, and
even as an administrator." He simultaneously rep-
resented the Federal, State, and county governments,
and might also be "closely allied with a semiprivate
farm organization which he has in part built up."
The first four chapters describe the origins and evolu-
tion of the office from the invasion of the Mexican
boll weevil through the peacetime measures of the
Roosevelt administration. The remaining four de-
scribe the divided responsibility of and for the county
agent, the financial support which he received from
private as well as public funds, the selection, train-
ing, and emoluments of agent personnel, and the
Negro county agents who in 15 states paralleled
among their own people, on a lower technical level
and for less pay, the work of the white agents, but
were usually dependent upon "the tolerance and at
least mild support" of the latter, and were con-
fronted by tremendous obstacles.
5853. Benedict, Murray R. Farm policies of the
United States, 1790-1950; a study of their
origins and development. New York, Twentieth
Century Fund, 1953. xv, 548 p.
53-7172 HD1761.B37
5854. Benedict, Murray R. Can we solve the farm
problem? An analysis of Federal aid to
agriculture. With the report and recommendations
of the Committee on Agricultural Policy. New
York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1955. xix, 601 p.
55-8796 HD1761.B35
5855. Benedict, Murray R., and Oscar C. Stine.
The agricultural commodity programs; two
decades of experience. New York, Twentieth Cen-
tury Fund, 1956. xliii, 510 p.
56-12417 HD9006.B42
These three volumes incorporate the most detailed
analysis and critique of the farm policies of the
United States during the last three decades (roughly,
since the enactment of the McNary-Haugen Act in
1927) that has been made. In 195 1 the Twentieth
Century Fund undertook "to give the general public
an impartial, over-all picture of the vast govern-
mental operations in the field of agriculture and of
their causes and effects," and engaged Dr. Benedict,
professor of agricultural economics at the University
of California, as research director and Dr. Stine, a
former assistant chief of the U. S. Bureau of Agricul-
tural Economics, as associate director. Since Dr.
Benedict had been at work for some time on a gen-
eral history of United States farm policies, he was
commissioned to complete it under the fund's
auspices. The result is the first and largest volume,
which is not, however, so much more retrospective in
scope as its title seems to indicate. The first seven
chapters (p. 3-137) are a topical survey of develop-
ments down to 1913, largely derived from secondary
works, and the detailed narrative begins only with
the Wilson administration. The thorough-going
chronological treatment of agitation, legislation,
administration, and production and price statistics
that follows is the counterpart of the analytical treat-
ment in the two following volumes. Dr. Benedict's
part of Can We Solve the Farm Problem? defines
the changing nature of the problem since 1920,
describes eight different sorts of programs in as many
chapters, and concludes with one entitled "Two
Decades of Experience: What Conclusions Are
Warranted?" It is followed by the "Report of the
Committee on Agricultural Policy" (p. 483-530);
this committee of 12 appointed by the fund to study
the research findings was headed by Jesse W. Tapp,
chairman of the board of the Bank of North
America, and included representatives of farm
organizations, professors of economics, and others.
Its report speaks of "the overrigidity of the policies
and programs of the past few years," and suggests
in several places that price supports and stored sur-
pluses have been excessive, and that there has been
too litde "reliance on automatic adjustments in the
market." The Agricultural Commodity Programs,
in which Dr. Stine appears as co-author, opens with
a substantial "Introduction and Summary" (p.
xvxliii), and proceeds to a detailed analysis of 11
programs from cotton and tobacco to potatoes and
fluid milk. August Heckscher, director of the Fund,
notes its "particular interest which derives from
showing the extremely subtle variations, both of
method and effect, which arise in the application of
farm policy."
5856. Deering, Ferdie. USD A, manager of Ameri-
can agriculture. Norman, University of
Oklahoma Press, 1945. xvi, 213 p. illus.
Agr 45-370 S21.C9D4
An interesting and well-organized inquisition into
the organization and policies of the Department of
Agriculture, conducted from the outside by the
editor of The Farmer-Stockman of Oklahoma City.
"The USDA has failed," the author says, "primarily
because its 'solutions' have been based on the theory
of providing an artificial foundation for farm prices,
and its methods have been to build more and bigger
agencies to handle the problems." The author
makes concrete suggestions for streamlining the
888 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Department into "a comprehensible and efficient"
unit of government with the primary purpose of
providing the farmer with know-how and services
not otherwise available. It should be noted that this
book was published at a time when the Department
was in an abnormal situation brought about by
World War II.
5857. Harding, Thomas Swann. Two blades of
grass, a history of scientific development in
the U. S. Department of Agriculture. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. xv, 352 p.
illus. Agr. 47-159 S21.C9H3
The Department of Agriculture was created in
1862 "to acquire and to diffuse among the people of
the United States useful information on subjects
connected with agriculture in the most general and
comprehensive sense of that word." The author,
associated with the research activities of the De-
partment since 1910, presents a popular account of
the scientific investigations and publications
through which the Department has fulfilled its
"general designs and duties" since its activities were
started in the Patent Office in 1839. Against a
background of expanding organization and shifting
bureaus, he emphasizes research in the fields of
food and drugs, economic entomology, plant
sciences, forests, animal diseases, soil analysis, nu-
trition, household appliances, and textiles. He also
describes, somewhat in detail, the bulletins, circulars,
journals, and other publications of the Department
on subjects closely allied with daily living and avail-
able to the public.
5858. Huffman, Roy E. Irrigation development
and public water policy. New York, Ronald
Press, 1953. 336 p. 53-10006 HD1735.H8
Bibliography: p. 309-326.
The author first summarizes the history of irri-
gation and public policy concerning it in the United
States, and then proceeds to develop analytically
such subjects as the nature and administration of
water rights, the relation of irrigation to land policy,
the organization and operation of irrigation projects,
the development of irrigated farms, the integrated
use of irrigated land, and programs of river basin
development. The emphasis throughout is on their
social as well as their economic aspects. He believes
that "as a nation, we should be mature enough to
map out a long-range policy regarding land recla-
mation which will assure the continued strength of
the nation and be acceptable to most of its citizens."
He first isolates 14 factors which should be determi-
nants for irrigation policy, from national and West-
ern population growth to national security and our
foreign trade policies, and concludes by suggesting
20 components of a sound irrigation policy for the
United States. They are necessarily rather abstract,
as may be seen from no. 5: "The family farm should
remain as a basic objective in the expenditure of
public funds for irrigation development but it should
be a concept consistent with modern agriculture."
5859. McConnell, Grant. The decline of agrarian
democracy. Berkeley, University of Cali-
fornia Press, 1953. 226 p.
53-9387 HD1484.M25
The striking tide conceals a subject considerably
more limited in scope: the American Farm Bureau
Federation and its influence on recent farm policies.
The creation of the county "bureaus" was the work
of the county agents originated by Seaman A. Knapp
and systematized by the Smith-Lever Act of 19 14
(nos. 5851 and 5852); the name, little appropriate
for an organization of farmers, was accidental in
origin but was officially adopted in 1916. State
federations were formed beginning in 19 15, and
the national federation of State federations was
organized in 1920. The membership fluctuated
until 1934, but steadily increased thereafter, reach-
ing 1,452,000 in 1 95 1. Dr. McConnell seeks to
demonstrate that an organization which was called
into being to further technical instruction by the
county agent has become his master and the greatest
power structure in rural America, and that it rep-
resents the large-scale and prosperous farmers rather
than the small-scale and marginal farmers. Its new
strength conferred by the New Deal farm policies
was employed to destroy the Farm Security Admin-
istration, the New Deal's device to assist the small
farmer. Its influence is traced in the postwar
struggles over the administration of agricultural
programs (the federation's favorite agency is nat-
urally the Extension Service, which it controls) and
in the defeat of the Truman administration's Bran-
nan Plan in 1948. The author regrets that "an in-
tensified social stratification has occurred within
agriculture, the source of much of our equalitarian
tradition."
5860. Schickele, Rainer. Agricultural policy:
farm programs and national welfare. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 453 p.
53-9004 HD1761.S22
The chairman of the Department of Agricultural
Economics at North Dakota Agricultural College
has written this book "for the student of rural
America, be he farmer, businessman, labor leader,
public servant, college student, or instructor." He
aims "to explore how agricultural policies can im-
prove living conditions for farm families and serve
the economic welfare of the community at large."
The first two parts discuss the general problem of
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 889
policy-making in a free society and other funda-
mentals. Part 3 is concerned with programs in
production credit, soil conservation, and other land-
use policies. Much the largest is part 4, "Farm
Price Policy" (p. 136-307), which justifies Govern-
ment support of farm prices on the ground that
farmers are peculiarly vulnerable to price fluctua-
tions, and "could not apply the price support devices
v/hich industry, trade, and labor had developed so
effectively through their own private collective ac-
tion." Part 5, "Programs for Improving Income
Distribution," defines the family farm as the goal
of land tenure policy and calls the Farmers Home
Administration established in 1937 "a break for
the small farmer." The background of Federal
price support policies is illuminated by Gilbert C.
Fite in his life of a man whose concept of agricultural
equality triumphed in 1933 and has remained basic
ever since: George N. Fee\ and the Fight for Farm
Parity (Norman, University of Oklahoma Press,
1954. 314 p.).
5861. Soth, Lauren. Farm trouble. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1957. 221 p.
diagrs. 57—5459 HD1761.S79
Mr. Soth has taught economics at a land-grant
college and been an editor for the Department of
Agriculture; he now handles the editorial page of
the Des Moines Register and Tribune. His sharply
written little volume takes a darker view of the agri-
cultural situation and of recent trends and policies
than do most commentators. Agriculture, he is con-
vinced, remains a sick industry, with per capita farm
income running about half of per capita nonfarm
income. The lower third of American farmers, on
the more isolated, small, and technologically back-
ward farms, suffer real poverty and are out of the
stream of the 20th-century American life. Acreage
controls have not been successful, for the supply of
farm products has been growing faster than the rela-
tively inelastic demand for them, and seems likely to
go on doing so. There are "too many farmers"; in
spite of the relative and absolute shrinkage of farm
population, too many persons have to share agricul-
ture's share of the national income. Acreage control
and price supports have been in conflict with a freer
foreign trade policy. Soil conservation programs
have been carried through, but only with the effect of
increasing production; true conservation should take
land out of use. Mr. Soth refrains from dogmatism,
but suggests that the program of price supports
limited to a few basic crops has not been a success,
that "a strait-jacket of monopoly controls" has been
created, and that direct payments to farmers or a
general food subsidy are alternatives more consistent
with free enterprise.
E. Forests, National Parks
5862. Allen, Shirley W. An introduction to Ameri-
can forestry. 2d ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1950. 413 p. (American forestry series)
50-4768 SD371.A6 1950
As a professor of forestry and sometime president
of the Society of American Foresters, the author has
been asked numerous questions about forestry which
he here attempts to answer for the benefit of stu-
dents, teachers, and practicing foresters. This new
edition brings up to date changing techniques and
policies, while the background material has been
little altered. In general it covers the nature of
forest resources; the development of the science, art,
business, and public policy of forestry in the United
States; and the shares of Federal, State, and local
governments in practicing forestry. The chapter on
education, with its survey of opportunities, will be
of special interest to those who plan to pursue for-
estry as a profession. References for further study
are given at the end of chapters.
5863. Boerker, Richard H. D. Behold our green
mansions; a book about American forests.
431240—60 58
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1945. xv, 313 p. illus. Agr 45-148 SD143.B6
The emphasis throughout this book is on "forest
reservation for multiple use, with human welfare as
the ultimate object." Following a description of the
forest and timber regions of the United States, chap-
ters are devoted to the beneficial uses of our forests
for recreation, wildlife conservation, and livestock
range, for the control of the water supply and soil
erosion, and for the sustained supply of lumber and
other forest products. The ravages of fire, insect
enemies, and tree diseases are reviewed against a
background of State and Federal programs for the
protection and development of the forests. The
peculiarities and potentialities of forests in the
Southern States are summed up in a separate chap-
ter. In a final plea the author urges that the logging
industries and the public cooperate to conserve our
forests and "to produce permanent communities of
healthy, happy, busy [forestry] workers with all the
social, cultural, and recreational benefits they have
a right to expect from a great democracy."
89O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5864. Horn, Stanley F. This fascinating lumber
business. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1951-
313 p. illus. 51-14101 HD9755.H6 1951
The lumber business, based on the "product of
the saw and planing mill," is described as the big-
gest and most important of the forest-products in-
dustries. It is widely scattered in logging camps
and sawmills throughout the vast dmber regions of
the North, South, East, and West, with outlets in
the retail lumber yards of the 48 States. The author,
who has been associated with lumbering for 30
years, presents the highlights of the whole industry.
Allied forest products, the economics of the industry
from transportation to grading and inspection, the
importance of lumber in wartime, and recent ad-
vances in equipment and techniques are among the
subjects discussed. The last chapter, which reviews
research projects on the best possible utilization of
wood, illustrates the importance of the industry to
the national economy.
5865. Shirley, Hardy L. Forestry and its career
opportunities. New York, McGraw-Hill,
1952. 492 p. illus. (The American forestry
series) 52-6001 SD371.S5
Based on materials used in a course in general
forestry for freshmen at the State University of
New York, College of Forestry, this book is in-
tended to help beginning students to decide if for-
estry is to be their work. The author first traces
the development of forestry, the lumber industry,
the manufacture of wood products, and their im-
portance in the national and world economy. He
further points out the social benefits derived from
forestry — wildlife, soil, and watershed protection,
and recreation — which justify the care of the forests
and therefore the profession. The chapters that
follow describe the employers of foresters, employ-
ment opportunities, education and research, and
programs in progress which afford worthwhile
compensation and opportunities for service. On
the 50th anniversary of its founding, the Society of
American Foresters published a history of the growth
of the profession in America: Fifty Years of Forestry
in the U. S. A., edited by Robert K. Winters (Wash-
ington, 1950. 385 p.).
5866. Tilden, Freeman. The national parks, what
they mean to you and me; introd. by Newton
B. Drury, Director of National Park Service, 1940-
51. New York, Knopf, 1951. xviii, 417, xxi p.
illus. 51-11226 E160.T5 195 1
The national parks appealed to Alfred Knopf,
the publisher of this book, "as an element in our
culture and a symbol of the American way of life
regarding which the public should be made more
aware," and he asked the National Park Service to
suggest an author to prepare a definitive work
on them. Freeman Tilden, a veteran writer,
was selected as the man who "knew the na-
tional parks and 'what makes them tick.' " De-
scribing the national monuments and parks from
Washington to Florida, and from California to
Maine — the forests, canyons, caves, deserts, glaciers,
and volcanoes — the author points out the spectacular
creations of nature which may be found in those
recreational areas. He analyzes the structure and
operation of the National Park Service in its efforts
to conserve wildlife and the forests from commercial
exploitation, and "to provide for the enjoyment of
the scenery, the natural wonders, and historic ob-
jects ... in such manner and by such means as will
leave them unimpaired for the enjoyment of future
generations." The fourth edition of Devereux
Butcher's Exploring Our National Farhj and Mon-
uments (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 288 p.)
has a slighter text, but is more copiously illustrated.
It appears under the auspices of the National Parks
Association, and the first edition was published in
1947. In the fall of 1914 Stephen Tyng Mather
(1867-1930), a wealthy Chicago manufacturer of
borax, wrote a letter of complaint concerning the
national parks, and was invited by his old classmate
Franklin K. Lane, Secretary of the Interior, to come
to Washington and run them himself. His tenure,
first as assistant to the Secretary and then as first
Director of the National Park Service (1917-29),
saw the establishment of principles for their acqui-
sition, maintenance, and administration, and the
development of a true service to handle the host of
tourists brought by the new automobiles. Robert
Shankland's Steve Mather of the National Far\s,
2d ed., rev. and enl. (New York, Knopf, 1954. xii,
346, xxii p.) describes and assesses his achievement,
and indicates subsequent progress along the lines
he laid down.
F. Animal Husbandry
5867. Crowell, Pers. Cavalcade of American
horses. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951.
311 p. illus. 51-12662 SF284.U5C7
Recognizing the companionship between horse
and man through the ages, and the usefulness of the
horse in opening up the American wilderness to
LAND AND AGRICULTURE / 89 1
civilization, the author tells the story of individual
breeds against a background of history, anecdote,
and legend. He presents the bloodlines, training,
and records of great American saddle horses, Ara-
bian horses, quarter horses, Morgan horses, standard
bred horses, Tennessee walking horses, thorough-
bred horses, and Western horses. This procession of
racers, trotters, riding horses, carriage teams, show
horses, cow ponies, cavalry mounts, and plain
utilitarian horses leads to a better understanding of
all breeds, and the place which they occupy or have
occupied in American life.
5868. Dale, Edward Everett. The range cattle
industry. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1930. 216 p. 30-25282 SF196.U5D18
Bibliography: p [197] -208.
The author narrates the rapid growth and sudden
decline of the ranch industry on the Great Plains
from the close of the Civil War to the 1920's. He
begins with Texas, the original home of large-scale
ranching in the United States. He describes the
close relationship that developed between the Great
Plains and the corn belt of the East, through the
exchange of cattle for breeding and feeding, and
through Eastern credit channels. "Whatever may
have been the ranchmen's faults," says the author,
"they were in many areas advance agents of civiliza-
tion, and their contribution toward the upbuilding
of the West has been enormous." It is pointed out
that careful scientific study should be given to the
utilization, conservation, and restoration of ranges,
the improvement of water facilities, the optimum
size of one-family ranches, and to marketing and
financing — much of which has been accomplished
through Federal legislation since the publication of
this book.
5869. Dowell, Austin Allyn, and Knute Bjoika.
Livestock marketing. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1941. 534 p. illus. 41-5423 HD9433.U4D6
This book has been prepared for the use of
students, county agricultural agents, marketing
agencies, packers, and others concerned with the
production and marketing of livestock and the dis-
tribution of meats. It analyzes the business activi-
ties involved in the flow of animal products from
producers to consumers. The various methods of
slaughtering and marketing livestock are described
as they have been changed by new techniques, eco-
nomic forces, and legislation. Chapters deal with
grade standards for livestock and meats; prices; the
regulation and supervision of the packing industry;
cold-storage lockers; and the distribution of meats
through wholesale and retail outlets. "Selected
Readings" appear at the end of chapters.
5870. Gabrielson, Ira Noel. Wildlife manage-
ment. New York, Macmillan, 195 1. 274 p.
Agr 51-501 SK361.G13
Out of his experience as Director of the U. S. Fish
and Wildlife Service from 1940 to 1946, and as presi-
dent of the Wildlife Management Institute since
that date, the author has produced a book about a
new profession — the wildlife manager, who "as the
business manager of a great resource, must first
maintain the resource, and second, utilize it to the
greatest possible advantage of the nation and its
people." The place of research and the education of
both the public and the technician in wildlife man-
agement are reviewed, as well as the need for regula-
tion of the human harvest of the wild population,
and of regular inventories. Chapters 6 to 10 deal
with wildlife itself — refuges, artificial propagation,
population control, and the manipulation of environ-
ment. Noting a decline in standards of conduct
among sportsmen, the author suggests some rules
that should be followed and points out the need for
more personnel, law enforcement, and cooperation
to preserve the economic and recreational value of
the Nation's wildlife.
5871. Hohman, Elmo Paul. The American
whaleman; a study of life and labor in the
whaling industry. New York, Longmans, Green,
1928. xiv, 355 p. illus. 28-29321 SH381.H6
Bibliography: p. 336-347.
A colorful work based on a wide range of original
sources — logbooks, consular letters, crew lists and
accounts, and other whaling manuscripts. The
major section (part 2) is the story of the whaling
industry at its height during the years 1833 to i860.
Part 1 gives the background with its origins in Eu-
rope, and part 3 traces the decline of the industry
from a position of economic and industrial impor-
tance to New England and the whole Nation until
its disappearance in the early years of the 20th cen-
tury. The author gives us an insight into the lives
of the crews, their working conditions and wages,
the dangers encountered, and the discipline de-
manded by the rigors of their trade. Whaling is
one of those industries which have played their part
in the growth of the Nation only to succumb to the
ravages of war and weather, and to technical and
economic developments resulting in alternative
products. The early stages of this picturesque in-
dustry are portrayed by Edouard A. Stackpole: The
Sea-Hunters; the New England Whalemen during
Two Centuries, 1635-18 3 5 (Philadelphia, Lippin-
cott, 1953. 510 p.).
5872. McFarland, Raymond. A history of the
New England fisheries. [Philadelphia]
University of Pennsylvania, 191 1. 457 p. ( j Publica-
892 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tions of the University of Pennsylvania. Series in
political economy and public law])
11-2088 SH221.M3
Bibliography: p. 338-363.
Aside from books on whaling there is little litera-
ture, except diffuse government publications, on
the history of the fishing industry. This book was
written to fill in the story of the cod, mackerel, and
inshore (including shellfish) fisheries. It shows
the development and importance of the New Eng-
land fisheries from early colonial days to the time
of publication, with full attention to their role in
commerce, legislation, and international affairs.
Chapter XVIII, "The Evolution of the Fishing
Schooner," goes into the changes in the furnishings
of vessels, in the equipment used for fishing, and
in the methods of curing the catch. Donald }.
White's The New England Fishing Industry (Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1954. 205 p.
Wertheim Fellowship publications) is "a study in the
interrelations of wages and prices and factor and
product markets" limited to the fresh and frozen
finny fish sector of the industry in Boston and four
other Maine and Massachusetts ports; it nevertheless
throws much light on recent developments in the
New England fisheries as a whole.
5873. Osgood, Ernest Staples. The day of the
catdeman. Minneapolis, University of
Minnesota Press, 1929. 283 p.
29-19222 SF196.U5O7
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Wisconsin, 1927.
Bibliography: p. 259-268.
The author of this Wisconsin dissertation used an
important collection of manuscript material in the
office of the Wyoming Stock Growers' Association
at Cheyenne, Wyoming, as well as public docu-
ments, newspapers, and other published sources. It
studies a great enterprise which grew up on the High
Plains between 1845 and the early 1900's. In narrat-
ing the rise and fall of the Open Range, it treats
of the Indian barrier and its overcoming, the catde
boom of the early 1880's, the development of cattle-
men's organizations, the catdemen's attempts to
monopolize the public domain, and, finally, the
climatic and economic disaster of the late eighties.
This brought about a transition from the great range
outfits to smaller ranches with controlled pasturage
and irrigation. The range cattle industry had
attracted outside capital to aid in the development of
a new area, had stimulated railroad building to
carry its products to the Eastern markets, and had
done much to lay the economic foundations for the
setdement of the West.
5874. Towne, Charles Wayland, and Edward
Norris Wentworth. Shepherd's empire.
With drawings by Harold D. Bugbee. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1945. 364 p.
Agr 45-331 SF376.T6
Bibliography: p. 335-347. <
The role of sheep in opening up the Southwest,
including California, is traced against a colorful
background of history from the days of the Con-
quistadors to the mid-20th century. The authors
point out that the natural endurance of sheep under
harsh physical conditions, their grazing habits, and
their flocking instincts have provided nourishment
for explorers, soldiers, miners, and emigrants in their
penetration of the region. They vividly portray the
problems of sheep husbandry — trailing the flocks;
lambing and shearing; and protecting the herds from
Indian raids, range wars, preying animals, and
poisonous plants. The last chapter introduces the
"Men behind the Flocks," the pioneer sheepmen
responsible for the great ranches and herds and the
improvement of breeds. Based on a thorough comb-
ing of printed material as well as many unpublished
personal contributions, and incorporating many
striking anecdotes, it has interest for student and
general reader alike. Ten sketch maps, each illus-
trating a single topic, facilitate the reader's task.
Three years later Mr. Wentworth, who, in his
quarter-century of service with Armour and Co.,
was able to visit all the livestock-producing areas of
the country and obtain veteran sheepmen's reminis-
cences and personal records, brought out his own
massive volume, America's Sheep Trails; History,
Personalities (Ames, Iowa State College Press, 1948.
xxii, 667 p.). It deals with all parts of the United
States from the earliest times, and concludes with a
series of topical chapters such as "Financing the
Sheep Business," "The Disease Problem," "The
Public Lands," and "Cattle-Sheep Wars." There
are statistical, biographical, and bibliographical
(p. 622-632) appendixes. While it goes consider-
ably beyond the needs of the ordinary reader, it
contains materials of immense interest, and abun-
dantly fulfills its object of recording "the part sheep
played in building the United States."
XXVIII
Economic Life
A. General Worlds: Histories 5875-5883
B. Other General Worlds 5884-5900
C. Industry: General 5901-5906
D. Industry: Special 59°7-59I9
E. Transportation: General 5920-5925
F. Transportation: Special 5926-5943
G. Commerce: General 5944-5950
H. Commerce: Special 5951—5964
I. Finance: General 5965—5975
J. Finance: Special 5976-6002
K. Business: General 5976-6002
L. Business: Special 601 1-6030
M. Labor: General 6031-6042
N. Labor: Special 6043-6058
(TT
urT"iHE BUSINESS of America is business," said Calvin Coolidge, a prophet of much honor
X in his own country and era. If we amend his dictum a little and say, "The business of
American scholarship is business" — meaning by the last word, of course, the whole economy
energized by managerial enterprise — we are merely stating a statistical truism. The output
of American books, periodicals, documents, reports, etc., concerned with economics in gen-
eral and with the American economy and its constituent parts in particular not only far ex-
ceeds that for any other of the arts and sciences,
but falls not too far short of equalling their com-
bined total. This is therefore the chapter in which
we have from the outset realized the complete im-
possibility of our task — the hopelessness of repre-
senting either the literature or the facts lying beyond
it in any selection of volumes which can be con-
tained within the framework of this volume. We
have therefore been, from necessity not perversity,
considerably more arbitrary than usual in choosing
and ordering our material. This is clear enough
from our section headings, which, once general
works have been cleared, simply take six of the
largest and most abstract categories and divide the
books under them into "general" and "special"
works. We shall make no determined defense
against those who find that some of our "general"
titles should have been "special," or vice versa. We
shall do no more against those who find Sections K
and L on business holding tides which should have
gone elsewhere: in them we have merely sought to
bring together a number of books particularly con-
cerned with the problems which were once said to
confront capitalists or entrepreneurs, and are now
said to confront management. The distinction be-
tween "general" and "special" does, to be sure, reflect
one of our concerns, which has been to represent, not
only the larger forms and currents of economic
activity, but the concrete units — companies, indi-
viduals, and even machines — in which these abstrac-
tions have their only being. Thus we have not only
The Transportation Industries and Economics of
Transportation, but books on General Motors, Com-
modore Vanderbilt, and the steam locomotive. Our
desire to present sample units in each of the cate-
893
894 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
gories has led us to include a substantial number of
"business histories," and so to give what some may
regard as undue prominence to the Harvard School
of Business Administration, which was one of the
earliest and has remained one of the largest produc-
ers in the field. That a multitude of types and forms
in each of the six categories, each of great statistical,
monetary, or human importance, remain unrepre-
sented we are only too well and painfully aware,
but we could not make another volume out of this
chapter. A final word is probably needed in recog-
nition of the fact that American economic life is and
has always been a battlefield, in books and out. We
seek to hold no position and to draw nobody's fire,
but we should find it difficult to contradict Mr. Bray
Hammond when he says (in no. 6000 below) that
business enterprise has been "the most powerful con-
tinuing influence in American life ever since Inde-
pendence." Recent policies, arising in the economic
as well as the political sphere, have not striven to
shut off this great primary source of wealth and wel-
fare, but rather, in the first place, to keep it from
being self-defeating and, in the second, to make it
work for the prosperity of as many as possible
instead of as few as possible. While such aims are
not universally approved, they are very widely so,
and to the majority, therefore, economic arguments
now turn about matters of degree and of the effi-
ciency of means rather than about absolute principles
of natural law or abstract ethics.
A. General Works: Histories
5875. Cochran, Thomas C, and William Miller.
The age of enterprise, a social history of
industrial America. New York, Macmillan, 1942.
394 p. 42-22792 HC103.C6
Bibliography: p. 359-368.
A dramatic rendition of American history from
1800 to 1930 as propelled by the ventures of free
enterprise, which in a century transformed village
America into the richest urban and industrial power
of the world. The authors describe the expanding
frontier and swelling population, the machine-age
revolutions in transport and industry, and the
exploitation of the country's vast natural resources.
They examine broad trends of business and invest-
ment and their reflection in social and cultural life.
As climax of the age of unlimited free opportunity,
they point to the moral justification of the entrepre-
neurs and their empires of railroads, oil, and steel,
by means of the creed of the survival of the fittest
provided by Herbert Spencer, evolutionary apostle
of laissez faire. They next trace the downfall of
the system in which seeds of decay were already
planted: "The machine, an instrument of competi-
tion, tended always to become mother to monopoly."
In their analysis free enterprise, running a down-
ward path through panics, depressions, and labor
troubles, before the turn of the century gave way to
finance capitalism. This in turn reached its climax
of Big Business in the 1920's. By the time the crash
came, according to the authors, individual initiative
in America had "surrendered" to institutional
enterprise, and now survives only as "the language
of free competition."
5876. Dorfman, Joseph. The economic mind in
American civilization. New York, Viking
Press, 1946-49. 3 V. 45-11318 HB119.A2D6
"Bibliographic notes" at end of each volume.
Contents. — v. 1-2. 1606-1865. — v. 3. 1865—
1918.
A work of basic scholarship, summarizing and
synthesizing economic theories expressed by indi-
vidual American spokesmen. The first two vol-
umes cover "the age of commerce," from Governor
Winthrop and the Puritans to the crushing of aris-
tocratic agrarianism in the Civil War. In the au-
thor's view, the heritage of concepts brought over
by the colonists prevailed into the 19th century, with
foreign commerce thought of as the chief source of
wealth, to be pursued in a society of rigid classes,
motivated or justified by "the traditional sanctions
and rhetoric of religion and humanitarianism."
Writers were both men of affairs and of thought,
like Penn, Franklin, Hamilton, Jefferson, Thomas
Paine, and Robert Fulton. In the early 19th century
the Old World pattern was again followed, as "sys-
tematic" economic doctrine emerged among aca-
demic writers on political economy, who interpreted
the teaching of Ricardo and Malthus in differing
Southern and Northern versions of laissez faire.
The third volume, published three years later, covers
the economic thought of "the age of industry,"
when, against a background of turbulent and un-
restrained individualism, the rise of labor problems,
and the growth of monopoly, new currents of re-
form— radicalism, liberalism, or "marginalism," —
were expressed by the trained professional econo-
mists of the new century. Dr. Dorfman closes with
the first attempts to integrate sociological thought
with orthodox economics, in the "disturbing voice"
of Thorstein Veblen and his chief heir, Wesley C.
Mitchell, the two masters to whom the study is
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 895
dedicated. Volumes 4 and 5, covering 1918-33,
are announced as this chapter goes to press.
5877. The Economic history o£ the United States.
New York, Rinehart, 1945-51. 5 v.
45—7376 HC103.E25
A cooperative history, to which a group of noted
scholars are contributing, planned in 1929 as a nine-
volume series, and still in process; it was conceived as
a full, balanced, and readable survey of American
economic history for the general reader and to sup-
plement college texts. Each volume has for its con-
cluding chapter a full bibliographical essay. Four
volumes, 1, Colonial Period to 1775; 2, 1775-1815;
3, Agriculture, 1815-1860; and 6, Industry, 1860-
1897, are still in preparation (in 1959). The first
of the self-contained volumes to appear was The
Farmer's hast Frontier, Agriculture, 1860-1897
(v. 5, 434 p.), by Professor Fred A. Shannon of the
University of Illinois, one of the editors of the series.
Two more were published in 1947, George Soule's
Prosperity Decade; from War to Depression, 1917-
1929 (v. 8, 365 p.), and Broadus Mitchell's Depres-
sion Decade; from New Era through New Deal,
1929-1941 (v. 9, 462 p.). In 1951 there appeared
The Transportation Revolution, 1815-1860, by
George Rogers Taylor (v. 4, 490 p.), and The De-
cline of Laissez Faire, 1897-1917, by Harold U.
Faulkner (v. 7, 433 p.). Professor Faulkner of
Smith College, whose standard one-volume college
text, American Economic History, first published
in 1924, is now in its 7th edition (New York,
Harper, 1954. 816 p. Harper's historical series),
is also one of the board of editors of the Rinehart
5878. Hacker, Louis M. The triumph of Ameri-
can capitalism; the development of forces in
American history to the end of the nineteenth cen-
tury. New York, Columbia University Press, 1946.
460 p. 47~3IX3 HC103.H146 1946
"Authorities cited in the text": p. 439-445.
For the great triumph in America of the capitalist
system, initiated in and inherited from Europe,
Professor Hacker offers three fundamental explana-
tions: from the earliest setdements the climate of
ideas was capitalistic; the state, established by revolt
against oppressive authoritarianism, has aided in-
stead of restricting private enterprise; and the ideal
of equal economic opportunity for all has never been
lost from sight. He traces the development of
capitalism from the city-states of medieval Italy
through the Age of Discovery to its participation in
the settlement of the thirteen Colonies. He analyzes
in this continent the course of American mercantile
capitalism, which long remained in fetters to British
mercantilism, but after 1783 "had the whole world,
productively and geographically, . . . over which
to range." The transition to industrial capitalism
did not gain momentum until after the depression of
1837-43, DUt during the Civil War the new capital-
ists "succeeded in capturing the state and using it as
an instrument to strengthen their economic posi-
tion." By 1900 the "grand design" of industrial
capitalism in the exploitation of the continent was
essentially complete: heavy industry and the urban
network were in being, and both producer and con-
sumer goods were being turned out in an endless
stream. Professor Hacker's success story is written
in general terms, with only occasional references to
individuals; his protagonist throughout is American
capitalism itself, which in one century "created the
potentialities of physical abundance and left behind
the legacy of political freedom."
5879. Janeway, Eliot. The struggle for survival ; a
chronicle of economic mobilization in World
War II. [Roosevelt ed.] New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1951. 382 p. illus. (The Chronicles
of America series, v. 53)
52-158 HC1806.4.J.33 1951
"Bibliographical note": p. 362-372.
This "chronicle" of the war on the home front is
written in administrative rather than economic
terms. The author, a business analyst and writer
formerly connected with Time and Fortune, is less
concerned with the stages and processes of economic
mobilization than with the "Batde of Washington."
His thesis is that Roosevelt, the inspired polidcian,
guided the war effort, and incidentally left behind
an unprecedented complexity of governmental
organization, "by the techniques of pure democracy
— by provoking participation from the people
instead of by imposing discipline upon them." It
was the momentum of production achieved through
the anonymous energies of the people that carried
the day, despite rather than because of the expend-
able leaders with whom the President experimented
in his appointments to the successive agencies. Mr.
Janeway's account of these, from the War Produc-
tion Board and the suppressed Baruch Plan for
Industrial Mobilization to Byrnes' Office of War
Mobilization and Reconversion, dwells largely upon
the personalities and maneuvers of the leaders, and
their manipulation by the President.
5880. Joscphson, Matthew. The robber barons;
the great American capitalists, 1861-1901.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1934. 474 p.
34-4665 HG181.J6
Bibliography: p. 455-460.
The apt phrase that Mr. Josephson chose for the
title of this book on the outstanding industrialists of
the latter 19th century is now well fixed in the
896 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
vocabulary of American economic history. The
Robber Barons, published in the second year of the
New Deal, marked its writer's shift from his earlier
preoccupation with such literary crusaders as
Rousseau and Zola; his style remains that of the
romantic biographer. He acknowledges in the
preface the inspiration of Charles and Mary Beard
in his attempt to depict these "prime actors in the
drama" of the age, and his use of his enormous and
lively research material is clearly influenced by his
reading of Thorstein Veblen (no. 4538). In his pic-
ture the captains of industry — Jay Gould, Andrew
Carnegie, Cornelius Vanderbilt, J. Pierpont Morgan,
James Fisk, James J. Hill, and the rest — emerge
unvarnished as Veblen's "pecuniary man" in his
"kinship with the delinquent." The antisocial as-
pects of their acquisition and use of power are
illustrated on every page, and the building of their
empires is chronicled as "the fearful sabotage prac-
ticed by capital upon the energy and intelligence of
human society." Their positive economic functions
receive little notice.
5881. Kirkland, Edward C. A history of Ameri-
can economic life. 3d ed. New York,
Appleton-Century-Crofts, 195 1. 740 p. maps,
diagrs. 51-10989 HC103.K5 1951
Bibliography: p. 683-728.
A textbook first issued in 1932, now in its third
revision; the author for many years has been pro-
fessor of American history at Bowdoin College. It
surveys comprehensively the progress of American
economic life from the voyages of discovery to the
"day before yesterday." Its concern is with human
activity rather than with policies or politics, which
are subordinated to the lifelike detail of economic
fact in accounts of the development of commerce,
agriculture, industry, labor, and finance. The
original work ended with the First World War, and
in 1939 Professor Kirkland added a section called
"Technical Change and Government Polity" to the
older ones, "The Colonial Age," "The Agricultural
Era," and "The Industrial State." Much emphasis
is given to the relations of government and business,
particularly in the last chapters where, as with most
conscientious historians looking at the immediate
past, the narrative is speeded up and illustration that
might suggest personal judgment held to a mini-
mum. All three editions have an excellent critical
bibliography, arranged by chapters; that of 1951 has
increased only three pages over that of 1932, but is
completely reworked to omit outdated material and
include the latest scholarship.
5882. Myers, Gustavus. History of the great
American fortunes. New York, Modern
Library, 1936. 732 p. (The Modern Library of the
world's best books) 36-31209 HC103.M8 1936
Previously published in three volumes.
This well-known book was brought out originally
in 1910, two years after the copyright had been
filed, by a Chicago publisher, Charles H. Kerr &
Co. The author's previous book, on Tammany
Hall, had dealt with political corruption, and in a
period of muckraking, none of the established New
York publishers would touch his new history.
Myers, however, had based his work, a study of
capitalism from the Marxist standpoint, on pains-
taking and abundant research which, while not al-
ways accepted as the whole truth, has influenced
and provided documentation for two generations of
writers. His aim was to show "that the great for-
tunes are the natural, logical outcome of a system
based upon factors the inevitable result of which
is the utter despoilment of the many for the benefit
of a few." In this frame of reference and beginning
with colonial dispossessions of the Indians, he tells
the stories of the most conspicuous fortunes built
up by land speculation, and from railroads, trusts,
banks, and industry — J. J. Astor, C. W. Field, Cor-
nelius Vanderbilt, Jay Gould, J. P. Morgan, and
J. J. Hill, with a host of lesser multimillionaires
woven in. The evidence he quotes all goes to sup-
port the "inevitable burden" of his work, an un-
relieved tale of fraud and plunder.
5883. Wright, Chester W. Economic history of
the United States. 2d ed. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1949. xxi, 941 p. maps, diagrs.
(Business and economics publications)
49-8742 HC103.W98 1949
Bibliography: p. 911-926.
In 1944 the author redred as professor emeritus
from the University of Chicago where he had taught
economics for 30 years. His book was first pub-
lished in 194 1 ; in the present edition an additional
chapter brings the narradve down to 1947. His
primary purpose is to explain the efforts of the
American people to raise their standards of living,
and through analysis of causes and results to arrive
at precepts for the future. The book is intended
for students of economics, and because of its size is
probably more suited to reference than to class-
room use. It covers the entire course of the Amer-
ican economy from that of the Indians, with chief
attention to the period since i860. Many statistical
tables and graphs are used throughout. These are
particularly interesting in the last two chapters,
where Professor Wright summarizes and evaluates
the achievement of the American people, comparing
standards of living in 1770 and 1930. In spite of
the attainment in this country of the highest stand-
ard for the average man that the world has known,
the conclusions drawn for the future are sobering.
ECONOMIC LIFE / 897
B. Other General Works
5884. Coyle, David Cushman. Conservation, an
American story of conflict and accomplish-
ment. New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University
Press, 1957. 284 p. illus.
57-10962 HC103.7.C68
Serious efforts to conserve the natural resources
of America began only toward the close of the 19th
century with the first legislation for Federal forest
reserves, and the association of "the Prophet," the
forester Gifford Pinchot, and President Theodore
Roosevelt in the establishment of the U.S. Forestry
Service. The first two parts of this book, by a
writer known for his forceful popularizations of
public economic questions, go deeply into the con-
troversy which was stirred up by Pinchot 's idea of
public intervention to prevent waste, not only of
forests, but also of farm and range lands, ground-
water, irrigation, river basins, and waterpower.
The "gospel of conservation" enunciated in 1907
made little headway against "reaction, war, and
'normalcy' " until 1933. Under the New Deal the
public works program was planned so as to forward
many branches of conservation. Mr. Coyle de-
scribes the activities of the Civilian Conservation
Corps and the Soil Conservation Service, the pro-
grams and resultant batdes over irrigation and
hydroelectric power projects and policies, rural
electrification, and the TVA and subsequent at-
tempts at river basin development. In the same
terms of accomplishment and opposition he outlines
the conservation of fuels, minerals and metals, and
wildlife. His last section examines the world sit-
uation. Franklin D. Roosevelt and Conservation,
191 1- 1 945, compiled and edited by Edgar B. Nixon
(Hyde Park, N. Y., General Services Administra-
tion, National Archives and Records Service, Frank-
lin D. Roosevelt Library, 1957. 2 v. (1314 p.)),
documents Roosevelt's long connection with the
conservation program. It is a selection from the
mass of papers in the Roosevelt library dealing with
conservation of soil and water, forests, wildlife,
and scenic areas, with footnotes referring to the
whole body of relevant material. The standard
textbook for class use in agricultural colleges, Con-
servation in the United States, by Axel F. Gustafson
and three colleagues at Cornell, is now in its third
edition (Ithaca, N. Y., Comstock Pub. Co., 1949.
534 p.). It is a straightforward and well-illustrated
exposition of the principles of conservation, the
establishment of policies and laws with respect to
public and private lands, and the elements involved
in the conservation of soil, water, forests, national
parks, grazing lands, fish, wildlife, and mineral
resources. A truly beautiful book on the historic,
literary, and artistic background of conservation is
by the curator of research at the Art Institute of
Chicago, Hans Huth: Nature and the American:
Three Centuries of Changing Attitudes (Berkeley,
University of California Press, 1957. 250 p.). The
ideas regarding Nature of Puritans, poets and phi-
losophers, novelists and travelers, artists and scien-
tists are traced, with abundant quotation, from the
ruthless days of the pioneers to our own times. The
fascinating illustrations include 64 full-page repro-
ductions of paintings, drawings, and photographs,
and half as many vignettes and woodcuts scattered
through the text.
5885. Fainsod, Merle, and Lincoln Gordon. Gov-
ernment and the American economy. Rev.
ed. New York, Norton, 1948. xvii, 935 p.
48~4472 HD3616.U47F3 1948
"Selected readings": p. 893-908.
By two Harvard professors, one of government,
the other of business administration, this long text is
a comprehensive survey of the influence of the
American government on the national economy.
An introductory section reviews the economic back-
ground, the politics of business, labor, agriculture,
and pressure groups, and provisions of constitutional
law relevant to the economy. The authors then re-
hearse the policy and action of the Government as
promoter of business, agriculture, labor, and con-
sumer interests. Their central and longest section
explains government regulation of private enterprise
in general historical perspective and in application to
special fields — railroads, public utilities, investment
and securities, trusts and monopolies, fair trade, and
others. The last group of chapters treats of the
Government itself in business, through public cor-
porations, measures for conservation of natural and
human resources, and the planning and control of
the war economy. Final consideration goes to the
problems of the "mixed" economy of government
enterprise, partially government-regulated private
enterprise, and relatively uncontrolled free enter-
prise which characterizes the postwar period.
Throughout, emphasis is laid on the evolution of
government activities in harmony with the public
interest.
898 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5886. Galbraith, John Kenneth. The affluent so-
ciety. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1958.
368 p. 58-8512 HB171.G14
A challenge to the usual demand for ever-increas-
ing production as the solution of most economic ills
is here eloquendy and controversially voiced. In his
usual provocative style Professor Galbraith argues
that the "greater production" concept is a myth
established in days of scarcity and no longer valid in
the contemporary American society of abundance.
He traces its background as "conventional wisdom"
from Ricardo down to present-day thinkers. Then
he examines the ancient preoccupations of econo-
mists: productivity, inequality, insecurity. Today,
he says, production has come to be regarded as the
indispensable remedy, and equality and security are
identified with it. But production has now reached
the point where it must first create the consumers'
wants it seeks to satisfy — the "Dependence Effect"
he calls this — and the urgency of the wants can no
longer be used to defend the urgency of the produc-
tion. He makes unorthodox comments on such
"illusions" as national security, consumer credit, etc.,
and suggests that the pressure for more producdon
leads to inflation, price instability, and higher unem-
ployment without helping our social imbalance.
"The line which divides our area of wealth from our
area of poverty is roughly that which divides pri-
vately produced and marketed goods and services
from publicly rendered services." Among the solu-
tions he offers are: increasing unemployment com-
pensation in times of rising unemployment; raising
money through sales taxes; placing greater emphasis
on spending for public purposes.
5887. Galbraith, John Kenneth. American capi-
talism; the concept of countervailing power.
Rev. ed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1956. 208 p.
56-4515 HB501.G3 1956
This brilliant essay on modern economic theory is
written in an epigrammatic style uncommon to the
profession, and may be read with pleasure as well as
profit by the layman. Professor Galbraith's fellow
economists have accused him of oversimplification,
but since the first publication of the Harvard econo-
mist's book in 1952 it has received much attention
from them. He joins other postwar thinkers (Berle,
not in itself undesirable in an "opulent" economy.
Drucker, Lilienthal) in defending big business as
His thesis is that the American capitalist economy is
no longer regulated by free competition, regarded as
indispensable in the tradition of the classical econo-
mists. According to orthodox theory, the present
American system of oligopoly, in which the chief
industries are controlled by a few large units that
dictate prices to any smaller competitors, is bound to
work out in disaster. The fact that it has not, Pro-
fessor Galbraith attributes to the replacement of
competition by what he calls "countervailing
power." The competitors may regulate policy by
agreement among themselves, but their power is
balanced by power on the opposite side of the
market: by the big trade unions, and by govern-
ment regulation. Because of countervailing power
and the use of the Keynesian formula against de-
pression, the author is confident that in time of
peace, if not in case of war, American capitalism
will not break down.
5888. Gruchy, Allan G. Modern economic
thought; the American contribution. New
York, Prendce-Hall, 1947. 670 p.
47-4709 HB 1 1 9. A2G7
Bibliography: p. 631-655.
The contribudons to modern economic thought
of six 20th-century economists form the subject
matter of this close analysis. Professor Gruchy
writes six interrelated essays on the "institutional
economics" of Thorstein Veblen, the "collective
economics" of John R. Commons, the "quantitative
economics" of Wesley C. Mitchell, the "social
economics" of John M. Clark, the "experimental
economics" of Rexford G. Tugwell, and the "admin-
istrative economics" of Gardiner C. Means. In
introductory and concluding chapters he defines
their common orientation, for which he borrows
from the South African philosopher-statesman, Jan
Christiaan Smuts, the adjective "holistic." He
describes this as constituting a new school of eco-
nomic theory for which orthodox economics, based
on the concept of every economic system as "a simple
and stable mechanism" in which fixed laws for the
separate parts can be deduced, gives place to the
view of economic order as a dynamic process of
evolution. In the approach of the new theorists the
findings of cultural anthropology, sociology, and
social psychology are utilized. The writer's digests
of the six economists are less controversial than his
claim that their interrelated theories constitute a
unitary school of American economic thought.
5889. Harris, Seymour E. The economics of mo-
bilization and inflation. New York, Nor-
ton, 1951. 308 p. 51-13080 HC106.5.H318
Bibliography: p. 288-291.
Professor Harris, who has taught economics at
Harvard since the twenties, is well known to his
profession. To a wider public his name is familiar
as an adviser on financial matters to the Federal
Government in many capacities since 1942, when
he joined the Policy Committee of the Board of
Economic Warfare. This book, written in the
second year of the Korean War, and addressed to
a specialist audience, is his tenth work — and, he
ECONOMIC LIFE / 899
hopes, his last — relating to mobilization and war.
To the problem of balancing the increase of output,
the primary end of mobilization, by the stabiliza-
tion of prices, his answer is a vigorous fiscal policy
embodied in sharply increased taxation, with a min-
imum of price and other direct controls. He ex-
amines in this context questions of resources, ma-
terial and human, public finance, the effectiveness
of controls, and the inevitably uneven and unfair
incidence of inflation. He suggests that the mis-
takes of 1950-51 might have been avoided by a
more thorough study of the well-documented les-
sons of World War II.
5890. Harris, Seymour E. The economics of New
England; case study of an older area. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. xvii, 317 p.
maps. 52-5031 HC107.A11H3
Among the many official committees on which
Professor Harris has served was the Committee on
the New England Economy of the U.S. Council of
Economic Advisers, appointed in 1950 to study the
causes of the severe business recession of the pre-
vious year in New England, and to recommend
measures for long-range improvement of the re-
gional economy, particularly as to job opportunities.
The Committee submitted a report, The New Eng-
land Economy; a Report to the President ([Wash-
ington] 1951. xxxvi, 205 p.), in July 1951,
shordy before Harris' book went to press. The
two cover much the same ground, analyzing the
general decline of this old economic region, its loss
of industries and population to more newly devel-
oped areas, its resistance to technological change and
to Federal aid, its shortages of raw materials, its
high costs of transportation and power, its unfavor-
able tax structure, and many related factors. Pro-
fessor Harris' book presents somewhat greater detail
on certain points, such as the desirability of the St.
Lawrence seaway, and has a different arrangement
and emphasis from the official report. Although
there are many difficulties, he is hopeful that an
absolute decline in New England may be averted,
and that he may be able to tell his students, as he
has not during the last few decades, that "there is
no strong economic reason for migrating to the
South or West." Another and still more compre-
hensive report on The Economic State of New Eng-
land was brought out in 1954 by the National Plan-
ning Association's Committee of New England
(New Haven, Yale University Press, 1954. 738 p.).
Five economists worked with two successive direc-
tors of research to produce the 18 chapters of the
survey. The authors look to "upgrading" — increas-
ing the value of output per man-hour — as a means
of expanding personal and regional income, and
view the future with confidence.
5891. Hoover, Calvin B., and Benjamin U. Ratch-
ford. Economic resources and policies of the
South. New York, Macmillan, 1951. xxvii, 464 p.
diagrs. 51-2037 HC107.A13H64
Bibliography: p. 441-453.
This comprehensive assessment of Southern eco-
nomic resources and policies was authorized by the
National Planning Association's Committee of the
South in 1946, and carried out by the Committee's
Director of Research and a fellow economist of
Duke University. A general statistical review of
land, population, and retarding factors is followed
by an analysis of the change in living standards
between 1929 and 1948 in the region often referred
to as "the Nation's Number One Economic Prob-
lem." During these years the per capita income rose
from 47 percent to 65 percent of the non-Southern
average (in 1956 it was above 70 percent), a decline
in agricultural income, due largely to the fall in
cotton, having been balanced by an increase in manu-
facturing wages and salaries, and a notable boost
from Federal payrolls, military and civilian. Spe-
cific developments and trends in the various sectors
of the economy are next examined: if cotton is down,
tobacco and other crops are up. The text is illus-
trated by a hundred-odd statistical tables and charts;
in most of those relating to human beings there is no
analysis by race.
5892. Lilienthal, David E. TVA; democracy on
the march. 20th anniversary ed. New York,
Harper, 1953. xxiv, 294 p. illus.
53-7202 TK1425.M8L53 1953
When the Tennessee Valley Authority was cre-
ated by Act of Congress on May 18, 1933, Mr. Lilien-
thal was named one of its directors. In 1941 he
became chairman, and after the first decade of TVA
he expounded it in a book, first published in 1944,
which appeared in American and British pocket
book editions and was translated into 10 or more
languages before this "twentieth anniversary edi-
tion." It is not a full account of the development of
TVA, but an eloquent statement of the writer's faith
in the principles, procedures, and success of this plan
for unified development of natural resources and
raising living standards, under public control but
with the cooperation of local bodies. TVA before
and since its creation has been a subject of contro-
versy in the United States, defended or attacked in
the long-continuing struggle over the public versus
the private ownership of power — a favorite phrase
of its enemies is "creeping socialism." But after 10
years it had attracted worldwide interest and had
become a symbol of what man can do to change his
physical environment. In the 1953 edition Mr.
Lilienthal added a chapter on "The TVA Idea
Abroad," and, besides the completely revised bibli-
900 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ography, two appendixes, one of which is a digest
and bibliography of TVA-type developments in
many countries. The writer, who served for four
years as chairman of the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion and is now chairman of the Development and
Research Corporation of New York, published in
the same year a book advocating new concepts:
Big Business: a New Era (New York, Harper, 1953.
209 p.). Here his argument is that, with govern-
ment's expanded role in economic affairs as safe-
guard, the actual benefits of Big Business to social
and economic advancement should now be recog-
nized, without the "prejudice created by abuses long
since corrected ... an antiquarian's portrait of an-
other America."
5893. National Industrial Conference Board.
National income in the United States, 1799—
1938, by Robert F. Martin, director Economic Re-
search Division, the Conference Board. New York
City, National Industrial Conference Board, 1939.
xv, 146 p. (Its Studies, no. 241)
39-27201 HB601.N35
"This study offers the most complete estimates
of national income in the United States that are
available for the 140-year period beginning in
1799 . . . Though in the nature of such estimates
they are not comprehensive and perfect, they are
the best approximations possible in the present
state of our information in this field, and they
present in the most compact form a composite pic-
ture of America's economic development such as
no other series of statistics can." These estimates
occupy 46 tables and 11 charts, arranged in a
briefer explanatory text whose chapters include
"The National Income Totals," "Kinds of Private
Production Income," "Industrial Sources" of such
income, and "Government as a Source of Income."
The "total realized national income," in dollar
figures adjusted by the general price level, rose
from 1,092 millions in 1799 to 69,130 millions in
1938. During the same period the per capita
realized income, again in adjusted figures, rose
from $211 to $531, but the latter figure was regu-
larly exceeded, sometimes by as much as $100, dur-
ing the years 1910-1931. A long appendix (p. 105-
146) explains the sources and the methods used in
constructing the estimates. The text is simply and
clearly written, and adapted, as the studies of the
Conference Board usually are, for wide use by
businessmen.
5894. Slichter, Sumner H. The American econ-
omy, its problems and prospects. New
York, Knopf, 1948. vii, 214, ix p.
48-8583 HC106.5.S47
A revision and expansion of five lectures given
at a Stanford University business conference the
previous summer by the Lamont Professor of
Economics at Harvard, well known as an adviser
to government and private organizations on eco-
nomic trends and business prospects. In a glance
at the basic characteristics of our system he stresses
the change of recent years to what he calls "a
laboristic economy," with wealth and power in-
creasingly in the hands of the employee class. The
first problem he examines is that of labor relations,
for many years the field of his chief study (see
no. 6038), and of measures needed to keep the rapid
rise of modern trade unionism from bringing about
conflict in industry. He considers economic sta-
bility, expressing approval of credit and fiscal con-
trols, and international economic policy, speaking
for greatly increased imports and reduced tariffs.
He analyzes our prospects from both a pessimistic
and an optimistic outlook, and finally attempts to
answer the question, "How Good Is the American
Economy?" The answer is: "far better than most
people realize." A further group of lectures by
Professor Slichter at Stanford in July 1950 was pub-
lished as What's Ahead for American Business
(Boston, Litde, Brown, 1951. 216 p.). As in the
earlier talks, he set forth in clear outline, some-
times with figures, his views of problems, causes,
effects, and prospects. A chapter was added on
the implications of defense economy resulting from
the Korean War. He was still optimistic, ready to
accept the idea of more government regulation
without fear of socialism. He also contemplated
without worry a period of rising prices and a
certain degree of inflation, an attitude which he
retains a decade later.
5895. Taylor, Horace, and others. The American
economy in operation. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1949. xiv, 846 p. diagrs.
49-8736 HC106.T46
A composite work by members of the depart-
ment of economics of Columbia University, revised
almost yearly between 1932 and 1941, replacing
earlier texts for a course in contemporary civiliza-
tion. Essentially a study in political economy, its
account of the purely economic aspects is interwoven
with the political elements involved. There are
nine sections, each with several chapters and many
subheadings within chapters. The basic facts of
national economic resources and national product,
organization and control of production, manage-
ment-labor and other intergroup relations, money
and credit, public finance, and international rela-
tions are set forth, with regular attention to current
trends. Special emphasis is laid on factors making
for stability and on patterns of control. The con-
cluding section examines the values of a mixed
economy of private enterprise and government par-
ticipation, especially with regard to economic plan-
ning and full employment. The long time-lag be-
tween the predecessor work and this new volume
was deliberate, so as to permit an adequate per-
spective on problems and policies arising in the
postwar world.
5896. Twentieth Century Fund. America's needs
and resources, a Twentieth Century Fund
survey which includes estimates for 1950 and i960.
By J. Frederic Dewhurst and associates. New York,
1947. xxviii, 812 p. tables, diagrs.
47-3562 HC106.5.T9
5897. Twentieth Century Fund. America's needs
and resources: a new survey, by J. Frederic
Dewhurst and associates. New York, 1955. xxix,
1 148 p. illus., maps, tables.
55-6987 HC106.5.T9 1955
The Twentieth Century Fund's comprehensive
source book of measurements of the American
economy in all its fields is described by the director
in his foreword as "a moving picture of accomplish-
ments and probabilities," one from which we will
"begin to realize America's vast economic and
social potential." Dr. Dewhurst, an authority in
the field of economic statistics, was aided in the
huge research project by 26 economists, and most
of the chapters are cooperative rather than indi-
vidual efforts. The six sections cover in lucid sta-
tistical analysis, with supporting tables, "Basic
Trends," "Consumer Requirements," "Capital Re-
quirements," "Government Costs and Foreign
Transactions," "Resources and Capacities," and, as
a final summary, "Needs vs. Resources." There are
225 tables in the text, over 40 graphic "figures," and
32 appendixes of additional data. The 22-page
index reveals the all-embracing scope of the inquiry.
After eight years the Twentieth Century Fund, of
which Dr. Dewhurst is now executive director,
brought out a revision: America's Needs and Re-
sources: a New Survey. Whereas the first survey
had been centered on the changes from the depres-
sion economy to that of the full war effort, and the
reflection of consumer shortages on the postwar
scene, the later volume "finds its major focus in the
phenomenal postwar boom, in the long-range up-
surge of the economy which this latest boom ac-
centuated, and in the significance of our expanding
economy for the future well-being of our nation."
The chief change in arrangement is the addition,
in the section on "Resources and Capacities," of
two new chapters: "Technology: Primary Re-
source," and "Productivity: Key to Welfare." The
tables have increased to 352, and the figures to 105.
ECONOMIC LIFE / OX)I
5898. U. S. National Resources Committee. The
structure of the American economy. Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1939-40. 2 v. maps,
tables, diagrs. 39_29I55 HC106.3.A5 1940
Part 2 issued by the National Resources Planning
Board.
Contents. — 1. Basic characteristics. A report
prepared by the Industrial Section under the direc-
tion of G. C. Means. — 2. Toward full use of re-
sources. A symposium by G. C. Means, D. E.
Montgomery, J. M. Clark, A. H. Hansen, [and]
Mordecai Ezekiel.
One of the best known publications of the Na-
tional Resources Committee, which in 1935 suc-
ceeded earlier committees that formed part of the
planning apparatus of the New Deal. In mid-1939
the Committee was in turn succeeded, under the
Reorganization Plan of that year, by the National
Resources Planning Board, the change occurring
between issuance of the first and second volumes of
this report. The document was presented by Secre-
tary of the Interior Ickes to the President as "the
first major attempt to show the inter-relation of the
economic forces which determine the use of our
natural resources." Director of the project was Dr.
Gardiner C. Means, known as joint author with
Adolf A. Berle of The Modern Corporation and Pri-
vate Property (no. 601 1). Part 1 has 400 pages, of
which fewer than half are text analyzing through
statistics the structure of wants and resources; of
production in geographical, functional, and finan-
cial aspects; and of organization, price, and con-
trols. There follow over 200 pages of appendixes
giving detailed statistics. The much shorter part 2
(48 p.) contains five essays by Dr. Means and other
economists, offering suggestions for the more effec-
tive use of resources. A more recent look is taken
by the National Planning Association in a concen-
trated survey by Gerhard Colm and Theodore
Geiger, with the assistance of Manuel Helzner: The
Economy of the American People; Progress, Prob-
lems, Prospects (Washington, National Planning
Association, 1958. 167 p. Planning pamphlet no.
102). Their informative analysis of the high pro-
ductivity and consumption achieved by the Ameri-
can economic system includes the factors of national
resources, labor, business management, capital,
values, and institutions. Problems weighed are the
balance in economic growth, the residue of poverty
still with us, concentration of power in industry,
and the role of the United States in the world eco-
nomic picture. Summing up, the authors consider
whether the new American economic system with
its large-scale organization in business and govern-
ment can offer the greatest possible freedom of
choice and opportunity to the individual. Their
902 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
conclusion is that, while the American system can-
not be defined as capitalistic or socialistic in the
traditional sense of these terms, it serves the
national interests of the American people.
5899. Ward, Alfred Dudley, ed. Goals of eco-
nomic life. New York, Harper, 1953.
47° P- ( [The Ethics and economics of society] )
52-12049 HB72.W3
This symposium introduced a series undertaken
by a study group of the Federal Council (later the
National Council) of the Churches of Christ in the
United States of America, investigating modern
economic life in relation to spiritual and moral
values. Fifteen essays, by as many distinguished
authors, are focused on problems in achieving a less
materialistic society. These are arranged in three
groups; the first, by leading economists, is on "The
Role of Values in Our Economy." The second
group is by political scientists who examine "Our
Economy in Democratic Perspective" — in its de-
pendence upon government, and its relation to law
and to principles of freedom and justice. The third
group, "Our Economy in Other Perspectives,"
studies economic man from the viewpoints of biol-
ogy, anthropology, psychology, philosophy, and the
Christian faith. The five other volumes in this
Harper series consider particular aspects of the
economy in relation to ethics. These are: Kenneth
E. Boulding, The Organizational Revolution (1953.
286 p.); Howard Bowen, Social Responsibilities of
the Businessman (1953. 276 p.); American Income
and Its Use, by Elizabeth E. Hoyt and others ( 1954.
362 p.); Christian Values and Economic Life, by
John C. Bennett and others ( 1954. 272 p.) ; and one
based on extensive polling, The American Econ-
omy— Attitudes and Opinions, by Alfred Dudley
Ward (1955. 199 p.). Not included in the series,
but prepared in connection with it, in part as a
summarization, is Ethics in a Business Society, by
Marquis W. Childs and Douglass Cater (Harper,
1954. 191 p.). The series is being continued with
a slight change in title (Series on ethics and eco-
nomic life), three new volumes having been brought
out by Harper in 1956-57: Walter W. Wilcox, Social
Responsibility in Farm Leadership (1956. 194 p.);
John A. Fitch, Social Responsibilities of Organized
Labor (1957. 237 p.); and Wilbur L. Schramm,
Responsibility in Mass Communication (1957.
39i P-)-
5900. Whitaker, Joe Russell, and Edward A.
Ackerman. American resources, their man-
agement and conservation. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 195 1. 497 p. illus., maps.
51-2124 HC106.W56
Intended for wider educational use than in col-
lege courses, American Resources, by two geogra-
phers, offers the general public a readable account
of American problems and accomplishments in the
field of conservation. The approach, they show, was
for long negative: "Many of the countries setded by
Europeans rank with the United States in intensity
of resource destruction, but none reaches the range
and magnitude of the destruction found in this
country . . . [which] stands among the foremost
examples in the damage done to its natural-resource
base during the comparatively short span of three
centuries." Now, and particularly because of the
studies and plans of the 1930's, "recognition of the
need for conservational resource management has
led to remedial programs on local, regional and
national levels." The authors examine five major
groups of resources: cultivable lands, grassland and
forests, water resources, mineral resources, fish and
wildlife, and other recreational resources. The last
chapter is written as a guide to action by the indi-
vidual citizen, urging his cooperation through per-
sonal effort against waste, through support of
official programs, and through social pressures.
C. Industry: General
5901. Adams, Walter, ed. The structure of Ameri-
can industry; some case studies. Rev. ed.
New York, Macmillan, 1954, 590 p. illus.
54-10831 HC106.A34 1954
"Suggested readings" at end of chapters.
Fourteen economists here analyze individual
major industries that present varying degrees of
free competition, monopoly and oligopoly, govern-
ment price support programs or controls, and gov-
ernment regulation. Thirteen case studies follow a
systematic outline, each in three sections: 1, histori-
cal background and present institutional patterns,
including modifications in the war and postwar
periods; 2, marketing structure and price policy;
3, public policy and government programs or recom-
mendations. The first industry treated is the highly
competitive one of agriculture. Then follow: the
chronically "sick" industries of cotton textiles and
bituminous coal; residential construction, which,
although the nation's second largest industry, is so
diversified that it "deserves the tide 'industry' as a
matter of courtesy only"; the monopolistic indus-
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 903
tries of steel, chemicals, petroleum, automobiles,
cigarettes, motion pictures, tin cans; the regulated
air transportation industry; and last, the newspaper
industry, symbol of free enterprise and a free press,
but whose market structure now "exhibits the
familiar patterns of local monopoly, monopolistic
competition, oligopsony, and oligopoly." (These
terms both imply control of market price of a par-
ticular commodity by a few big units acting more or
less in concert: oligopoly by the sellers, oligopsony
by the buyers.) In the last two chapters an attempt
is made to formulate patterns of public policy and
labor union activity consonant with a free-enterprise
economy.
5902. Alderfer, Evan B., and Herman E. Michl.
Economics of American industry. 2d ed.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 716 p. illus.,
maps. 50-1 13 14 HC106.4.A58 1950
Bibliography: p. 691-707.
A textbook on American manufacturing, based
on material used in courses on industrial manage-
ment and economic theory at the Wharton School
of Finance and Commerce, University of Pennsyl-
vania, and first published in 1942. The second edi-
tion includes an appraisal of trends of the wartime
and postwar expansion of the entire economy. The
writers take the individual industry approach,
glancing first at the field of manufacturing as a
whole, in which over a quarter of American wage-
earners are engaged, and concluding with a study
of changing industrial patterns. The competitive
factors which govern variations in stability are a
chief point of their analysis of each separate form
of enterprise. They also discuss the relation of
each to the economic order in general, and its in-
stitutional structure, technical processes (described
in simple language), and historical evolution. Eight
major groupings are distinguished, and within
these sections are chapters on individual industries:
e.g., the part on chemical process industries is di-
vided between the chemical industry (including a
brief reference to atomic energy), the petroleum
industry, the paper industry, and the rubber
industry.
5903. Allen, Edward L. Economics of American
manufacturing. New York, Holt, 1952.
566 p. illus. 52-7011 HD9725.A65
A textbook by a professor at American Univer-
sity in Washington who is concerned with the
present-day industrial plant of the nation and makes
little use of historical perspective. Out of the 450-
odd general types reported in the 1947 Census of
Manufactures he has chosen 19 individual indus-
tries for discussion. His treatment is systematic,
with several subdivisions within chapters; for each
industry, with slight variations, he examines its
relative size and importance, use patterns, export-
import relations, relations with the Federal Gov-
ernment, corporate ownership and control, location
and capacity, technology, input and cost factors,
financial factors, private investment, profits, and
future oudooks. Illustrations, in part of technical
processes and in part graphic charts, assist in keeping
the presentation clear and factual. Besides the
selected bibliography (p. 542-555), there is a useful
final chapter rehearsing sources of data from gov-
ernment statistics and reports, trade association re-
leases, trades publications, and financial services.
5904. Clark, Victor S. History of manufactures
in the United States. New York, Published
for the Carnegie Institution of Washington by
McGraw-Hill, 1929. 3 v. illus.
29-10065 HD9725.C52
Bibliography: v. 3, p. 400-442.
This full-scale general history is one of the dis-
tinguished series sponsored by the Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington, Contributions to American
economic history (see also Commons, no. 6033;
Johnson, no. 5948; and Meyer, no. 5923). The
first volume, covering 1607-1860, was published in
1916, and had become standard by the time it was
reprinted to accompany the two concluding volumes.
Dr. Clark, an economic analyst whose basic area
studies of Australia, the Far East, and Latin America
had been prepared for the Bureau of Labor Statistics
before the First World War, used for this work a
quantity of original source material, identified in
extensive footnotes. The presentation, on classic
lines, paints a broad picture of the development, or-
ganization, and economic interactions of manufac-
turing as a whole and of its more important branches.
The second volume, 1 860-1 893, has three chrono-
logical divisions: the Civil War, Reconstruction, and
"Big Industry in the Making"; volume 3, 1893-1928,
is called "The Industrial State." In the last two
volumes special attention is given to the iron and
steel industry, "by which the progress, prosperity,
and developmental tendencies of manufacturing in
general were determined and illustrated."
5905. Fabricant, Solomon. The output of manu-
facturing industries, 1899-1937, by Solomon
Fabricant, with the assistance of Julius Shiskin.
New York, National Bureau of Economic Research,
1940. xxiii, 685 p. tables, diagrs. (Publications of
the National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 39)
41-4080 HD9724.F:;
Text and statistical tables analyze total American
manufactured product during three decades of great
expansion and one of depression. The writer is an
authority in this field, having been with the research
9O4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
staff of the National Bureau of Economic Research
since 1930, and its director since 1953. The statis-
tics are focused on long-term changes in volume and
composition of the output of manufacturing indus-
tries. The beginning date was chosen as the first
year for which "reasonably adequate" data were col-
lected by the United States Census of Manufactures.
The first chapters are on manufacturing in general
and give first a summary of output, next an explana-
tion of the statistical methods and materials used for
the computation of relative numbers, and then a
review of changes and trends in output of major and
other industries. Part 2 examines the output of in-
dividual manufacturing industries. There are 66
tables and 24 charts in the text, and appendixes con-
cerned largely with index numbers. A second vol-
ume in the series, by Dr. Fabricant alone, is Publi-
cation no. 41 of the Bureau: Employment in Manu-
facturing, 1899- 1 939, an Analysis of Its Relation to
the Volume of Production (New York, 1942. 362
p.). This analyzes the statistics of factory employ-
ment and of labor per unit (interchangeably the
number of men used in production of a unit of
goods, or the volume of production per man em-
ployed) in relation to the growth of output. A later
study by Dr. Fabrican measures The Trend of
Government Activities in the United States since
1900 (no. 6136).
5906. Glover, John George, and William Bouck
Cornell, eds. The development of American
industries, their economic significance. 3d ed. New
York, Prentice-Hall, 1951. xxvii, 1121 p. illus.,
maps. 51-2589 HC103.G5 1951
A survey of American industrial life, assembled
and edited by New York University specialists in
industrial management, now in its third edition
within 20 years and well established as a reference
work. It consists of encyclopedic articles on some
40 leading industries, contributed by representative
agencies in each field. The first chapter, by the
American Federation of Labor, with the name of
President William Green attached, is on "Labor's
Contribution to Industry." The articles follow a
general pattern, each devoting some space to his-
torical development and presenting facts on the
present position, including such aspects as raw
materials, processes and technological advances,
location, marketing, competition, legislation, financ-
ing, and chief centers or in some cases names of
leading firms. Many statistical tables are used.
The following industries, some of which are not
manufactures, are treated: agriculture, meat pack-
ing, fishing, lumber, textiles, leather, petroleum,
coal, iron and steel, copper, zinc, aluminum, mag-
nesium, lead, chemicals, pharmaceutical products,
sugar, pulp and paper, rubber, glass, paint, varnish
and lacquer, machine tools, electricity, power, ship-
building and shipping, railroads, automobiles, aero-
nautics, telegraph, telephone, motion pictures, radio
and television, newspapers, book publishing, retail-
ing, banking, and travel.
D. Industry: Special
5907. Barger, Harold, and Sam H. Schurr. The
mining industries, 1 899-1 939, a study of out-
put, employment and productivity. New York,
National Bureau of Economic Research, 1944. xxii,
452 p. diagrs. (Publications of the National Bu-
reau of Economic Research, no. 43)
44-3218 HD9506.U62B3
This statistical study of a single sector of industry
forms part of this Bureau's series dealing with trends
of productivity in American industry (like no. 5905
in the preceding section). The authors attempt to
assess in total output and manhours of labor the
results of technological change, new methods of
production, shorter workdays, and other factors
affecting productivity. The analysis is in three
parts: "Output and Employment," "Technological
Change," and "Technological Change and Produc-
tion in Individual Industries" (coal, petroleum, iron,
copper, stone quarrying). Part 4, a resume, con-
cludes that "mining, alone among types of economic
endeavor, must reckon with depletion of its re-
sources," and that the level of productivity will
inevitably deteriorate unless continually buttressed
by technological advances. The appendixes include
statistical tables, technical questions of measurement,
and a glossary of minerals and mining terms.
5908. Carr, Charles C. Alcoa, an American enter-
prise. New York, Rinehart, 1952. 292 p.
illus. 51-14776 HD9539.A7U53
The story of the Aluminum Company of America,
commonly known as Alcoa, began with the "electro-
lytic fusion of aluminum oxide by twenty-two-year-
old Charles Martin Hall, in an Ohio woodshed in
1886." This experiment "touched off an industrial
chain reaction which . . has been a classic example
of American enterprise at work." The narrator of
this case history of a major industry was a news-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 905
paperman and for 15 years director of public rela-
tions for Alcoa; he has used the Company's records
as sources. In 1888 a small group of young Pitts-
burgh businessmen founded the Pittsburgh Reduc-
tion Company, with patents giving a legal monopoly
of the Hall process and a capital of $20,000. In 1907,
with the Mellon family as bankers and large stock-
holders, the name was changed to the present form.
Alcoa's first taste of trouble with the Federal govern-
ment came with the Wickersham wave of trustbust-
ing in 1912. In 1922 the Federal Trade Commission
began an exhaustive probe into the Company's
affairs, which ended to Alcoa's satisfaction in 1930.
Lawsuits were brought by competitors; in 1937 the
Department of Justice filed 140 charges of monopo-
listic practices, and the antitrust case went on till
1950. "The Company came out of it as a law-
abiding concern and as an asset to the life we know
as the American Way.' " Mr. Carr ends his 62-
year history of Alcoa with an appendix detailing
labor negotiations from 1935 to 1950; its labor rela-
tions, he says, had "a better-than-average rating."
5909. Chapman, Herman H. The iron and steel
industries of the South, by H. H. Chapman
with the collaboration of W. M. Adamson [and
others] University, Ala., University of Alabama
Press, 1953. 427 p. maps, diagrs. (Alabama
University. Bureau of Business Research. Printed
series, no. 17) 53-62620 HD9517.A2C45
Bibliography: p. [4i8]~423.
A report occasioned by the approaching exhaus-
tion of the high-grade Lake Superior ores, carried
out with the collaboration of the Tennessee Valley
Authority by a staff of geologists and economic
statisticians. A general introduction reviews the
iron and steel industry of the United States, includ-
ing such aspects as ownership concentration, the
effects of government policy, and the location of raw
materials and producing centers. Part 2 examines
the natural resources of the South, particularly the
Southeast, and part 3 surveys the iron and steel in-
dustries of the region, their history, recent trends,
ownership, mining and operating problems, etc.
Part 4 deals with the market for the Southern iron
and steel processing and fabricating industries. Part
5 considers possibilities and offers very tentative con-
clusions concerning the future of the industry in the
South.
5910. Cole, Arthur Harrison. The American wool
manufacture. Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1926. 2 v. illus. 26-5173 HD9895.C6
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 303-314.
This remains the standard work tracing the
growth of the wool industry from its colonial in-
fancy to the mass production of the large-scale
modern factory. The author gives a full account
of processes, technological advances, changing in-
dustrial form, markets, foreign competition, the
labor force, and the influence of the tariff upon
development. His sources are cited, with frequent
elaboration of detail, in long footnotes. The first
volume covers the household industry of the colonies,
with handicraft fullers, carders, or weavers playing
a minor part; the first factories with the newly
invented power-driven machinery introduced from
England in the 1790's; the period of transition down
to 1830, with Americans making technical advances
in power looms, and especially in the "carde ameri-
caine," the condensing apparatus for wool-carding
invented by John Goulding in the 1820's; and the
development of distributing agencies stimulated by
expanding communications and the Western market.
Between 1840 and 1870 the industry increased be-
tween 12- and 15-fold, in spite of a heavy increase
in importation of wool and worsted. The period
of industrial maturity, after 1870, to which Dr.
Cole's second volume is devoted, is concerned largely
with the protection by tariff of the American indus-
try from foreign competition and innovation. Dur-
ing this half-century new processes as a rule were
introduced from abroad, the American innovations
residing in the standardization of the fabric and in
mass-production techniques, which have permitted
high-quality production on a large scale.
591 1. Davis, Pearce. The development of the
American glass industry. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1949. xiv, 316 p. (Harvard
economic studies, v. 86) 49-9758 HD9623.U45D3
Bibliography: p. [2951-305.
An academic study by a professor in the depart-
ment of business and economics at the Illinois Insti-
tute of Technology, reviewing approximately 300
years of American glassmaking. The introductory
chapter of general history begins with Pliny, the
second chapter with a glass-making venture in Vir-
ginia in 1608 or 1609. A chronological account of
development to the time of the Civil War is followed
by an outline and evaluation of tariff policy from
1820 to i860. In the succeeding period the author
is concerned largely with improved processes, labor
problems, and tariff policy, and gives separate chap-
ters to individual branches: the window glass indus-
try, the glass container industry, pressed and blown
glass, and plate glass. The writing is for a profes-
sional audience.
5912. Dutton, William Sherman. Du Pont; one
hundred and forty years. [3d ed.] New
York, Scribner, 195 1. 408 p. illus.
52-648 HD9651.9.D8D8 1 95 1
Qo6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The brilliant record of the Du Pont Company of
Wilmington, Del., founded by the French emigre
Eleuthere Irenee du Pont in 1802 for the manufac-
ture of gunpowder, and now holding world leader-
ship in production based on chemical research, is
in no way dimmed by the writer of this "business
biography." He states forthrightly that his account
is an "inside" view, "the Du Pont Company as seen
by Du Pont men." From romantic scenes of family
history in Revolutionary France to the end of the
First World War, the narrative reads like a novel
through whose pages move the lofty and dramatic
figures of four generations of Du Ponts. Powder-
masters and patriots, they followed, at least until the
1870's, "a road of work, sweat, and grimy hands."
With the development of industrial dynamite and
the formation in 1872 of the Powder Trust, and
guided by the organizing genius of General Henry
A. Du Pont and the inventor's vision of Lammot
Du Pont, the road turned into a network leading to
new regions, the hands to the cleaner work of sign-
ing checks that bought up patents and competitors.
The tremendous contribution of Du Pont to Allied
victory in the First World War is here emphasized
with statistics that controvert any hint of "war
profits." From 191 9 on, the story becomes a dra-
matic description of the new fields opened in Du
Pont's great research laboratories: dyes, plastics,
cellulose, rayon, nylon, cellophane — altogether more
than 10,000 separate items, "a bewildering array
of chemical progeny contributed to the welfare and
security of the United States in peace, and also to
its great might in war."
5913. History of Standard Oil Company (New
Jersey) [New York] Harper, 1955-56.
2 v. illus. 55~8°55 HD2769.O4H5
"A study by the Business History Foundation,
Inc."
Contents. — [1] Pioneering in big business,
1882-1911, by R. W. Hidy and M. E. Hidy.— 2.
The resurgent years, 1911-1927, by G. S. Gibb and
E. H. Knowlton.
In 1947 the Standard Oil Company of New Jersey
granted unrestricted access to the company's records
and complete freedom of publication to the Business
History Foundation, as well as a substantial gift of
money. The volume by the Hidys is the first in a
series of thoroughly documented histories and
studies, and narrates the general history of the
Company from its organization in 1882, through
the period when it became the holding company
and operating unit for the complex of enterprises
popularly known as Standard Oil, to the trustbust-
ing decision of the U.S. Supreme Court in 191 1
which lopped off 33 affiliates. The corporation's
confidence is justified, for what emerges is no dia-
bolical conspiracy, but a group of able administrators
clearheadedly pursuing the logic of capitalistic en-
terprise, and reducing costs through the economies
of large-scale operations, while keeping profits high
through differentiation of products, and the devel-
opment of new producing areas, new machinery, and
new processes. Naturally, men of their generation
were slow to learn "that dominance in power
brought the responsibility of applying that power
with restraint." The second volume of this series,
The Resurgent Years, iyii-igij, appeared in 1956.
In it much attention is given to labor policy, new
processes, and the search for sources of oil abroad.
The list of companies through which the Standard
Oil Company (New Jersey) operated in the United
States and abroad in these 17 years fills an appendix
(p. 631-664). They fall into 3 groups: 60 closely
affiliated, whose earnings were consolidated with
those of New Jersey Standard; 58 non-consolidated,
in which New Jersey held stock; and 124 affiliates
of the "consolidated" companies, over which the
New Jersey company exercised remote control.
5914. McLean, John G., and Robert W. Haigh.
The growth of intergrated oil companies.
Boston, Division of Research, Graduate School of
Business Administration, Harvard University, 1954.
xxiv, 728 p. illus. 54-6417 HD9565.M282
A survey of the oil industry with regard to its
predominant structural form, vertical integration.
This is defined as "the process of increasing the
number of distribution and processing steps in an
industry's cycle of activities which are under the
ownership, management, or control of a single
company." To such a structure the oil industry,
with its comparatively simple steps from natural
resource to consumer — production of crude oil, trans-
portation, refining, marketing — is especially adapted.
The authors offer this contribution to the technical
study of consolidation in industry as a case history,
establishing the underlying facts through a detailed
examination of integration decisions with extensive
statistical exhibits. Part 1 describes the situation in
1950, while the later parts are concerned with how
it got that way. In parts 2 and 3 the industry is
considered first as a whole and then through the
particular cases of seven large integrated companies,
four of them former components of the Standard
Oil Trust. The last section, before a final summary,
studies the decline of the small refining companies,
which in 30 or 40 years sank from 28 to 15 percent
of the total output. The writers avoid expression of
"moral and economic judgment on the performance
of the large integrated companies," but their facts
suggest that the managements have been less con-
cerned with maximum profits than with assurance
of raw materials and markets.
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 9°7
5915. Nevins, Allan. John D. Rockefeller; the
heroic age of American enterprise. New
York, Scribner, 1940. 2 v. (683, 747 p.) illus.
41-649 CT275.R75N4
5916. Nevins, Allan. Study in power: John D.
Rockefeller, industrialist and philanthropist.
New York, Scribner, 1953. 2 v. (441, 501 p.)
illus. 53-9394 CT275.R75N42
Bibliographical references included in "Notes"
(v. 1, p. 403-441; v. 2, p. 437-466). "Bibliography
of official documents": v. 2, p. 483-484.
Two versions of the author's highly praised
biography, in his long study for which he enjoyed
full access to the Rockefeller family papers, as
well as to those of some of Rockefeller's chief oppo-
nents. The new version has been substantially
shortened, especially in the part relating to Rocke-
feller's early years, while new material is added on
the benefactions; it is still, "emphatically," a biogra-
phy, not a business history. From the author's
objective viewpoint, and with the perspective of
almost half a century since Ida M. Tarbell wrote her
History of the Standard Oil Company (New York,
McClure, Phillips, 1904. 2 v.), the destructive and
exploitative aspects of the swift transformation of
the American economy from 1865 to 1900 are far
outweighed by the importance of the final construc-
tive gains. "Had our pace been slower and our
achievement weaker . . . the free world might have
lost the First World War and most certainly would
have lost the Second." The two parts of Rocke-
feller's career, the organization of a colossal industry
and the distribution of an enormous fortune (his
gifts in organized undertakings which have set
models for philanthropy ran to 550 million dollars),
Professor Nevins sees as "dominated by logic and
plan." "Innovator, thinker, planner, bold entrepre-
neur, [Rockefeller] was above all an organizer —
one of the master organizers of the era ... By vir-
tue of this organizing power, backed by keenness of
mind, tenacity of purpose, and firmness of character,
he looms up as one of the most impressive figures of
the century which his lifetime spanned."
5917. Rickard, Thomas Arthur. A history of
American mining, by T. A. Rickard. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1932. 419 p. illus. (A. I.
M. E. series) 32-20628 TN23.R45
A general history, published under the auspices of
the American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers, and adapted to a student audience. The
author had been editor of several mining journals,
and his style combines feature-story writing, suited
to tales of discovery and exploits of pioneers, with
the reportage of economic facts. The treatment is
neither chronological nor systematic, and gives evi-
dence of being a reworking of separate articles.
Gold, silver, copper, and lead are the metals on
which attention is focused. The chapters are for the
most part on regions; California, Alaska, Arizona,
the Comstock Lode of Nevada, Lake Superior, the
Great Salt Lake, the Black Hills of South Dakota,
Butte, and other mountain areas are glanced at in
relation to prospecting and their celebrated mining
enterprises. One chapter tells of "The Great Dia-
mond Hoax," when in 1872 two prospectors "salted"
a mysterious region vaguely located in Arizona,
Colorado, or Wyoming, and realized large sums
from excited investors in the East.
5918. Schroeder, Gertrude G. The growth of
major steel companies, 1900-1950. Bald-
more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. 244 p. illus.
(The Johns Hopkins University studies in historical
and political science, ser. 70, no. 2)
53-i 1 175 HD9515.S35
H31.J6, ser. 70, no. 2
Bibliography: p. 237-239.
The author of this doctoral thesis has devised
techniques of statistical analysis through which she
studies 12 major firms in the iron and steel industry
that together control over 80 percent of the coun-
try's total steel capacity. She approaches them in
two groups: first the "Big Three" which account for
over half the total, U. S. Steel, Bethlehem Steel, and
Republic Steel, all formed through major mergers
near the turn of the century; and then nine smaller
independent firms. For each she gives a brief narra-
tive history and then discusses factors of external
expansion through consolidation and acquisition,
internal expansion through additions to plant and
equipment, and the direction, purposes, and financ-
ing of the expansion. She analyzes the income of
each firm and its distribution, with illustrative tables
cf gross and fixed assets, long-term investment, and
distribution through taxes, reinvestment and divi-
dends. Her summary points out similarities and
dissimilarities between the firms and attempts to
establish objective patterns of growth. The techno-
logical processes of iron and steel production, rather
than the economic aspects, form the subject matter
of a series of articles written for the trade journal
Steel, and arranged in book form by an associate
editor of that publication, Dan Reebel: ABC of Iron
and Steel, 6th ed. (Cleveland, Penton Pub. Co.,
1950. xv, 423 p.). The 27 separate papers are by
as many experts — executives, technical directors, or
research consultants of large firms. The first two
explain the mining, reserves, transportation, and
handling of iron ore. Other chapters describe
operations involved in the production of scrap iron,
908 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pig iron, open-hearth steel, Bessemer steel, etc., and
in the construction of various finished products,
from bars to high-alloy steel castings. There is a
subject index.
5919. Tryon, Rolla Milton. Household manufac-
tures in the United States, 1640-1860; a
study in industrial history. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1917. 413 p. tables.
17-13932 HC105.T7
Bibliography: p. 377-397.
An economico-political study of clothing and
other textile products, house furnishings and ne-
cessities, and utensils and tools for home and farm,
as made in the households of America before the
triumph of mechanization. Throughout the Colo-
nial period, except for a few expensive imported
luxuries, almost everything was made at home.
This condition persisted on the frontier well into
the mid-i9th century, although in the towns the
replacement of homemade articles by goods made
by workers in shops or by machines in factories
was well under way by 18 10 and generally com-
plete by i860. Professor Tryon analyzes the po-
litical and economic factors affecting home indus-
tries during the Colonial period, and traces the
gradual but steady changes occurring from the
Revolution to the first census of manufactures in
1810 (when, according to a table reproduced from
"notably fallible census figures," the total value of
textiles made in the home was as twelve to one
against those made elsewhere). The household
products are viewed, with some description of the
techniques and ingenious contraptions used by our
ancestors. Finally the stages of the transition to
commercial production are studied, with statistics
that reveal the final passing of home industry as a
factor in the economic life of the country.
E. Transportation: General
5920. Barger, Harold. The transportation indus-
tries, 1889-1946; a study of output, employ-
ment, and productivity. New York, National
Bureau of Economic Research, 1951. xvi, 288 p.
diagrs. (Publications of the National Bureau of
Economic Research, no. 51) 51-2346 HE203.B3
A statistical analysis of changes in commercial
transportation over nearly 60 years, including the
Second World War period. The author, an expert
of the National Bureau of Economic Research, uses
tables and charts to show comparative amounts of
traffic carried, the roles of the various agencies of
transportation, the number of employees, their in-
dividual output, and the trends of technological
progress which account for the greatly expanded
productivity. From 1889 to 1939 the combined
passenger and freight traffic of all commercial
carriers increased fivefold, and from 1939 to 1946
it almost doubled again. Output per worker in
1946 was four times the 1889 level, and productivity
from 1889 to 1939 increased at an average annual
rate of 2.2 percent, most strongly in the newer in-
dustries of airlines and pipelines. The first part of
the text surveys the whole field of transportation for
hire; the second separately treats five industries:
steam railroads, electric railroads, pipelines, water-
ways, and airlines. Basic statistical tables for the
five industries are given in appendixes, as are the
techniques of measurement used. The work is a
companion volume to Hultgren's below.
5921. Dearing, Charles L., and Wilfred Owen.
National transportation policy. Washing-
ton, Brookings Institution, 1949. xiv, 459 p.
49-11772 HE206.D4
A critical study of the role of the Federal Govern-
ment in relation to transportation, undertaken at
the request of the Hoover Commission on govern-
mental reorganization. The authors first examine
Federal promotion of transportation facilities and
services, such as control of airways, maintenance of
airports, air-mail payments, comparable aid to trans-
port on waterways and highways, and special needs
for national defense. They then turn to the ques-
tion of government regulatory action, centering at-
tention on railroads. In conclusion they summarize
what they regard as the defects of national trans-
portation policy and make detailed recommenda-
tions for reorganizing the Federal agencies involved.
They consider that in neither the executive nor legis-
lative branches of government is any overall view
taken of transportation policy; that promotional
activities are confused with regulatory measures;
that the railroads are discriminated against by con-
tinuing patterns of rate regulation set up to prevent
monopoly in the days before the rise of heavy com-
petition from highways and air transport. They
recommend the establishment of a department of
transportation, under which all Federal promotional,
operating, and programing activities would be co-
ordinated, and of a regulatory commission which
would administer a revised program applicable to
all forms of transportation.
5922. Hultgren, Thor. American transportation
in prosperity and depression. [New York]
National Bureau of Economic Research, 1948.
xxxiii, 397 p. diagrs. (National Bureau of Eco-
nomic Research. Studies in business cycles, no. 3)
49-643 HE2751.H84
"Note on sources": p. 383-386.
The Bureau's contributions on business cycles
were initiated in the 1920's by its director, Wesley
C. Mitchell, the chief exponent of business cycle
theory. In this study railroads receive major atten-
tion, as the chief agency of transportation for which
statistics are available to illustrate cyclical changes
over a large number of years. Of the 12 chapters,
10 relate to aspects of the railroad industry, 1 to all
"Other than Steam Railroad Transportation," and 1
to future prospects for booms or depressions. Over
150 tables and many graphs give statistics of freight
carried, passenger-miles, traffic units, number of
workers, man-hours, revenue, etc. Data begin with
1882, when a record of tonnage handled by all rail-
roads was initiated, and for the most part end with
1938; "the trough in that year was followed by one
of the longest of all business cycles, swollen in am-
plitude and extended in time by a great war." The
writer considers it unduly optimistic to expect un-
broken full employment and prosperity through the
next few decades.
5923. Meyer, Balthasar Henry, ed. History of
transportation in the United States before
i860; prepared under the direction of Balthasar
Henry Meyer, by Caroline E. MacGill and a staff
of collaborators. Washington, Carnegie Institution
of Washington, 1917. xi, 678 p. 5 maps. (Car-
negie Institution of Washington. Publication no.
215 C) 17-17412 HE203.M4
HC101.C75, no. 3
Bibliography: p. 609-649.
Number 3 in the large-scale series of Contributions
to American economic history prepared by the
Department of Economics and Sociology of the
Carnegie Institution (see also Clark, no. 5904).
Dr. Meyer, an authority on railroad legislation and
a member of the Interstate Commerce Commission,
acted as editor, the text being put together by Miss
MacGill of the University of Wisconsin from spe-
cial studies, published or in manuscript, furnished
by over 20 contributors. All their material, much of
which is regional in scope, was used; it is rich in
details of local records, descriptions of construc-
tion, tables of costs and of goods carried, and the
like; but the volume as a whole lacks the unity of a
closely-studied work from a single hand. It is
ECONOMIC LIFE / 909
heavily documented, with long footnotes and chapter
bibliographies drawing extensively on regional
sources. The first half of the text is on land routes
and waterways before the coming of the railroads:
roads, trails, and highways; rivers and canals. The
second half is mostly railroad history, again in large
part by regions: New England, New York, the
Middle Adantic States, the South and "the West."
The latter is, of course, the Middle West, for the
book ends with railways to the Pacific still in the
project stage.
5924. Van Metre, Thurman W. Transportation in
the United States. 2d ed. Brooklyn, Foun-
dation Press, 1950. 401 p. maps. (University
business-economics series)
50-14639 HE203.V3 1950
Includes reading lists.
A textbook by the professor (now emeritus) of
transportation in the Graduate School of Business
of Columbia University, for use in general transpor-
tation courses, covering the entire field of domestic
transportation, with the greatest space devoted to
railroads. The initial chapters are historical, glanc-
ing at early highways and canals, and going more
deeply into railroads: their beginnings, development,
present system, consolidation, and mechanical ad-
vances. "Other agencies" are lumped: motor
vehicles, airplanes, shipping, and pipe lines. The
business of transportation is explained, again with
chief emphasis on railroads; here are covered organi-
zation; the carriage of freight, passengers, express
packages, and mail; and, cursorily, their financial
aspects. The third part treats shippers and carriers,
and rates and theories of ratemaking. In the last
part the history of Federal regulation is reviewed,
with the stress once more on railroads. Professor
Van Metre sees litde hope for a speedy achievement
of coordination and cooperation in the transporta-
tion business. He finds one important reason for
this in "the profound distrust with which railroad
interests and the 'government' usually regard each
other"; he views darkly the possible solution of
government ownership.
5925. Westmeyer, Russell E. Economics of trans-
portation. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952.
741 p. 52-9966 HE203.W4
In 1950 the railroads of America were still carry-
ing about 60 percent of the nation's freight, although
passenger traffic had shifted heavily (over 84 per-
cent) to the private automobile. Professor West-
meyer concludes his introductory chapter with two
statistical tables published annually since 1937 by the
Interstate Commerce Commission, showing the
volume of intercity traffic handled by various agen-
cies— railroads, motor carriers, inland waterways,
910 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
pipelines, airlines, and private autos. His book, a
text for advanced study, interprets the significance
of these figures chiefly in terms of economic and
public utility aspects of the transportation field. As
in all general studies of this subject, railroads have
pride of place, because of their longer history and
greater area of controversy as between public and
private interests, as well as their continuing pre-
dominance as carriers; furthermore, the patterns
developed for their regulation have formed the basis
for regulating the newer agencies of transport. In
a concluding analysis of the basic transportation
problems of the United States, and canvassing of
possible solutions, the writer emphasizes the "crying
need" for a comprehensive national policy, in which
railroads, airlines, motor carriers, and the rest would
be coordinated as parts of a national transportation
system.
F. Transportation: Special
5926. Bruce, Alfred W. The steam locomotive in
America; its development in the twentieth
century. New York, Norton, 1952. 443 p. illus.
52-14477 TJ605.B78
A technological history, "with special reference to
improvements in basic elements of the steam loco-
motive, different forms of power transmission from
steam cylinder to rails, and the development of
individual locomotive types in both main-line and
special services." Except for a chapter on early his-
tory and two chapters outlining the development of
steam locomotives and of power transmission from
1901 to 1950, the arrangement is functional rather
than chronological. A chapter on the steam locomo-
tive industry reviews the larger commercial building
firms, and information on companies and output as
well as technical matters is given in tables and charts.
The illustrations are photographs of locomotive
types and sketches of their basic elements, such as
fireboxes, cylinders, and mainrods. In the last chap-
ter the author, himself a steam locomotive builder,
explains today's competitors, among them the diesel-
electric engine which is now forcing the steam loco-
motive into retirement. A popular account of the
engineering aspects of railroads is presented by
Robert Selph Henry, vice-president of the Associa-
tion of American Railroads, in This Fascinating
Railroad Business, 3d ed., rev. (Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1946. 521 p.). The first chapters describe
the rails and the business of laying them out, the
construction of bridges and tunnels, systems of rail
control, etc. Next the steam engines in their various
phases are explained, and the types of cars. There
are chapters on railroad shops and their work,
stations, supplies, the freight service and its growth,
and the principles of ratemaking. Organization and
management are described in general terms. An
"Anatomy" of American railroads lists the Class I
lines and their intercorporate relationships, with
brief statements of ownership and miles of track.
Statistics are of 1943.
5927. Cochran, Thomas C. Railroad leaders,
1845-1890; the business mind in action.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 564 p.
maps. (Studies in entrepreneurial history)
52-9383 HE2752.C6
The author and his wife have searched special
collections and the archives of several major rail-
roads, and analyzed the letter files of 61 managing
executives of the chief railroads of the country be-
tween 1845 and 1890. The opinions expressed on
business concepts are offered as "a cross section of
the ethics or 'spirit' of developing capitalism," as
well as new material for railroad history. ("Irre-
sponsible" operators are excluded.) Sixteen chap-
ters are devoted to separate aspects of the analysis,
such as "Ownership and Control," "Innovation,"
and "Some Social Attitudes." These account for
less than half the text. The rest consists of samples
of correspondence of the 61 executives, from William
R. Ackerman of the Illinois Central to George Henry
Watrous of the New York, New Haven, and Hart-
ford. Brief biographical data head each selection.
In 1950 there were published two special histories
of individual railroad systems. Main Line of Mid-
America; the Story of the Illinois Central, by Carl-
ton J. Corliss (New York, Creative Age Press. 490
p.) is written to commemorate the centennial of the
company's charter, obtained in 185 1. It is a full
and well-rounded account of the conception, build-
ing, organization, and operation of the Illinois
Central. Interest beyond that of railroad specialists
is supplied by the inclusion of many personal stories,
from a Lincoln anecdote to the "Saga of Casey
Jones." The other work is John Debo Galloway's
The First Transcontinental Railroad; Central Pa-
cific, Union Pacific (New York, Simmons-Board-
man. 319 p.). The author was a railroad engineer,
and his book concentrates on engineering aspects:
the background, projects and surveys, and location
and construction of the two great lines during "a
decade of heartbreaking effort." In 1863 the Central
Pacific was begun in Sacramento, the Union Pacific
in Omaha, and the two met in 1869 at Promontory,
Utah, linking East with West.
5928. Harlow, Alvin F. Old towpaths; the story
of the American canal era. New York,
Appleton, 1926. 403 p. illus.
26-22668 TC623.H3
Bibliography: p. 391-403.
A history of the now almost completely aban-
doned artificial waterways which before the railroad
age carried a heavy proportion of the nation's
freight and played a crucial part in the opening of
the interior. Most famous was the Erie Canal,
"Clinton's Ditch," 364 miles long, built in 1817-25
under Governor DeWitt Clinton of New York.
"It directed the movement of populations, fixed
the destinies of cities, States and whole sections of
America and left traces, still visible, of its handiwork
upon the nation." The peak of canal-building en-
thusiasm came in the 1820's, when over 800 miles
of canals were opened to navigation in New York,
Pennsylvania, Delaware, and Maryland, with 1300
miles more nearing completion in 1830; by mid-
century the system was already passing. Mr. Har-
low chronicles, with detail of local and human in-
terest, the state-by-state construction of canals, their
operation, and their gradual replacement by rail-
roads. "Life on the Canal" and "Traveling by
Canal" are fascinating chapters of social history.
When the book was written, "the last of their race,"
a two-boat "fleet" drawn by three horses on the tow-
path, still moved on the Delaware and Raritan Canal
from New Brunswick to Trenton. The ride is
described: "Probably nowhere else in all the neu-
rotic whirl of our present-day business and social
life may we find so real a motion picture of America
as it was a century ago." Most of the delightful
illustrations are contemporary prints.
5929. Hunter, Louis C. Steamboats on the West-
ern rivers; an economic and technological
history, by Louis C. Hunter with the assistance of
Beatrice Jones Hunter. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1949. xiii, 684 p. illus. (Studies in
economic history) 50—5138 HE627.H8
A monumental survey of steam navigation on the
Ohio, the Mississippi, the Missouri, the Arkansas,
and their tributaries, footnoted exhaustively from a
wide variety of documents and reports, journals and
newspapers, histories and travel memoirs. The first
steamboat, the New Orleans, commanded by Nicho-
las Roosevelt, made the voyage from Pittsburgh to
New Orleans in 1811-12, and by 1817 traffic by
steam was well established on the Western rivers.
Dr. Hunter presents its rise, flowering, and decline
on a topical rather than a chronological basis. His
ECONOMIC LIFE / 911
work has three parts: "The Steamboat as an
Economic Instrument," which includes the intro-
duction, structural evolution, and mechanical de-
velopment of the boats and the tezhniques of their
operation, the improvement of rivers, and the gory
chapter of accidents; "The Steamboat as a Business
Institution" including organization and finances, the
experiences of passengers in cabins and on deck,
and crews and officers; and finally, "Peak and De-
cline," carrying developments through the Civil
War and the fatal postwar competition from the
railroads.
5930. Hutchins, John G. The American maritime
industries and public policy, 1789-1914; an
economic history. Cambridge, Mass., Harvard
University Press, 1941. xxi, 627 p. (Harvard eco-
nomic studies, v. 71) A 41-3915 VM23.H85
Bibliography: p. [583]-6o6.
A substandal history of shipbuilding and the
shipping industries in America, with special empha-
sis on national maritime policy. The first part is on
the general question of public regulation of mari-
time industries, with two chapters respecdvely on
policy and techniques. Part 2, chapters 3-1 1, study
comprehensively the era of wooden ships and small-
scale enterprise, covering timber resources, methods
of shipbuilding, the industry in Colonial days and
from 1789-1830, the great shipbuilding boom of
1830-56, and the international position of our mer-
chant marine from 1830 to the Civil War. The third
part is on metal ships and large-scale enterprise,
1 863-19 14. Here attention is paid to international
competition, the organization of the big shipbuild-
ing industries and shipping lines, and government
controls, contracts, and subsidies. The long bibliog-
raphy includes sections on official documents, Fed-
eral, state, and foreign, and on general works by
subject.
5931. Jordan, Philip D. The National Road.
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1948. 442 p.
illus. (The American trails series)
48-6393 HE356.C8J6
"Bibliographical note": p. 415-431.
A narrative history of the great Cumberland Road,
the first turnpike constructed by the Federal Govern-
ment. The trail followed by the young surveyor,
Major Washington, and by Braddock's army was
projected by Act of Congress of 1806 as a national
highway, to run from Cumberland, Md., to the
fast-opening Old Northwest. Built as far as Wheel-
ing by 1818, it was pushed on to incorporate in Ohio
the pioneer road known as Zane's Trace. Political
opposidon in the East to the "mismanagement" of
Federal funds held up construction of the western
half; in Jackson's time maintenance and repairs
912 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
were taken over by the States, and the building and
ownership of the western part were later assumed by
Indiana and Illinois. By the time its broken-stone
surfacing had been laid to Vandalia, 111., canals and
railroads had already cut into its importance as
chief route of travel to the Mississippi. In the 1920's
this importance was revived in U.S. Route 40. Mr.
Jordan's account was written before that, too, had
waned, overshadowed by the Pennsylvania Turn-
pike. The sources for his spirited if none too
clearly arranged study include many personal jour-
nals and local records, and he enlivens his economic
and political account of the building and use of the
road with colorful anecdotes of frontier days. Not
pioneer roads but the means of travel over them
form the subject of another lively contribution to
transportation history, Six Horses, by Captain Wil-
liam Banning and George Hugh Banning (New
York, Century, 1930. 410 p.). The first-named
author had himself been a stagecoach driver for
Western Union. The stories assembled in this
volume are mostly of individual heroes of the days
of overland travel to the Pacific by stagecoach. The
first illustration is a modern photograph of "The
Old Typical," familiar from a thousand "Westerns,"
the Concord Coach, drawn by six horses along a
prairie road.
5932. Kennan, George. E. H. Harriman, a biogra-
phy. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1922. 2 v.
illus. 22-9508 HE2754.H2K36
The most detailed biography of Edward Henry
Harriman (1 848-1909), who directed the policies
of the Union Pacific from 1898 until his death, and
extended its control over other lines so as to
create an imposing railroad empire. The author, a
journalist who had earlier written on several con-
troversial phases of Harriman's career, here vig-
orously defends "certain transactions which, during
Mr. Harriman's life, were widely misrepresented
or misunderstood." Much of these volumes is
devoted to rebutting accusations against the finan-
cier growing out of the stock market crisis of 1901,
the New York State investigation of the Equitable
Life Assurance Society, of which Harriman had been
a director, and the Interstate Commerce Commis-
sion's investigation of his purchases of railroad stock
in 1906-7. Kennan of course shared in the general
appreciation of Harriman's extraordinary mastery
of railroad management and finance, which had been
applied to smaller New York State lines and to the
Illinois Central for two decades before he assumed
command of the Union Pacific. Besides railroad
matters, the book tells of the boys' club which Har-
riman founded and maintained, his scientific ex-
pedition to Alaska in 1899, and his bequest of wild
lands along the Hudson River to the State of New
York. Two concluding chapters eulogize the ty-
coon's character and business methods, and quote
tributes from friends and colleagues.
5933. Kirkland, Edward Chase. Men, cities and
transportation, a study in New England his-
tory, 1820-1900. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1948. 2 v. illus., maps. (Studies in economic
history) 48-7564 HE207.K5
"Published in cooperation with the Committee
on Research in Economic History, Social Science
Research Council."
"The story of eight decades, wherein New Eng-
land shifted from a network of waterways and roads
to one of steel rails and railroad consolidation" is
here told by a professor of history at Bowdoin Col-
lege. His scheme of reference is comprehensive,
taking in turnpikes, coastal shipping, waterways and
canals, and the rise of the steamboat, as well as "the
new world of the railroad." Professor Kirkland's
research into local and institutional records has
been deep, and the flavor of New England history
permeates his broad survey. He examines many as-
pects of railroad history: the "railroad scheme"
which began indoctrination in the new mode of
transport, the first railroads of Vermont, New
Hampshire, and Maine, the routes to New York,
regulation, crises, failures, monopoly, and the final
consolidation of 1900 into three main systems: the
Boston and Albany, Boston and Maine, and New
York, New Haven, and Hartford. There are chap-
ters on railroad commissions, financing, rates and
services, labor, and leaders. Illustrations are from
contemporary portraits or records. The result is the
most thorough and illuminating regional study of
transportation history that has been made.
5934. Labatut, Jean, and Wheaton J. Lane, eds.
Highways in our national life; a symposium.
Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1950. xvi,
506 p. illus., maps. 50-7728 HE355.L3
"Under the editorial sponsorship of the Bureau of
Urban Research, Princeton University."
Bibliography: p. 476-493.
Forty-five specialists, including historians, so-
ciologists, economists, engineers, landscape archi-
tects, city planners, and of course officials, contribute
these essays covering practically all phases of the
highways of our "nation on wheels." The first nine
are historical, following die road as a fundamental
institution of mankind from the prehistoric trails
of early man to the age of the automobile. The rest
of the papers are analytical, beginning with a socio-
logical group which examine the effects of spatial
mobility on American urban, suburban, and rural
society, as well as on relations across national bor-
ders. There follow papers on economic and legal
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 913
aspects, and on the problems of highway engineering
and highway operation. Mr. Labatut in his final
summation calls for a better sense of proportion re-
garding highways — "more horse sense brought up to
the HP level."
5935. Lane, Wheaton J. Commodore Vanderbilt;
an epic of the steam age. New York, Knopf,
1942. xiv, 357, xii, p. illus.
42-36093 CT275.V23L3
"Bibliographical note": p. [326]~357.
In 1810 young Cornelius Van Derbilt (1794-
1877), son of a Dutch farmer on Staten Island, bor-
rowed from his mother $100 for a small boat and
started a ferry service to Manhattan. Using his
tiny earnings as venture capital in coast-wise ship-
ping, "a field notorious for ruthless competition and
crude trickery," he built up fleets which controlled
the Eastern coast and by the Nicaraguan transit
linked New York with the Pacific. In 1853 the
"Commodore," now one of America's richest men,
took a pleasure cruise in European waters on his
yacht, the North Star, was feted extensively, and
was eulogized in the London press: "It is time that
the millionaire should cease to be ashamed of having
made his fortune. It is time that parvenu should be
looked upon as a word of honor." By the sixties the
septuagenarian Vanderbilt's interests had shifted
from ships to railways, and from his epic battles in
the stock market with Daniel Drew, Jim Fisk, Jay
Gould, and the other giant speculators of his day,
he emerged in control of the New York Central and
Hudson River, as well as lines to Chicago. This
biography of the self-made builder of steamship and
railroad empires is focused on the business aspects of
a spectacular career. By a Princeton specialist in
transportation history, and based on such primary
sources as exist, supplemented by a "judicious" use
of secondary works, it is full, readable, and without
marked sensationalism.
5936. Morison, Samuel Eliot. The maritime his-
tory of Massachusetts, 1783-1860. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 194 1. 420 p.
41-27782 H3161.M4M6 1 94 1
Bibliography: p. 399-[4io].
5937. Albion, Robert Greenhalgh. Square-riggers
on schedule; the New York sailing packets to
England, France, and the cotton ports. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1938. 371 p. illus.
38-16737 FIE767.N5A7
Bibliography: p. [345]~353-
Professor (since 195 r, Rear Admiral, Ret.) Mori-
son's history of Massachusetts ships and seamen,
merchants and shipowners, shipbuilders, and the
towns that lived by the East-India and China trade,
the "sacred codfish," or whaling, really deserves a
place on the shelves of seafaring adventure rather
than among ponderous and often technical works
on "transportation." To be sure, it is solid and well-
rounded history of an important era and mode of
commerce, with appendix of statistics and bibliog-
raphy, but his material is of the stuff of romance, and
his writing — as he said in his 1921 preface — "for
your enjoyment." The 1941 edition has a supple-
ment of letters received from readers, of "correction
and supplement"; the "supplement" is largely
anecdotal, childhood memories or family seafaring
tradition, and the "corrections" are the technicali-
ties of the devotees of sail. The author himself is
sailorman and prose poet as well as historian. In his
final word picture he evokes nostalgically the vision
"vouchsafed our fathers, when a California clipper
ship made port after a voyage around the world."
With the passing of the clipper came to an end the
maritime history of Massachusetts, as distinct from
that of America. "It was a glorious ending! Never,
in these United States, has the brain of man con-
ceived, or the hand of man fashioned, so perfect a
thing as the clipper ship." Another noted American
maritime historian, Professor Albion of Princeton
University, undertook an intensive survey of the
history of the port of New York (no. 5951). Square-
Riggers on Schedule is a detailed expansion of part
of the material covered in the larger work. It is an
exhaustive research study of the earliest packet lines,
combining narrative with well-documented facts and
figures, and enlivened by picturesque and romantic
anecdote. Illustrations are well-chosen contempo-
rary maritime prints and portraits.
5938. Morris, Lloyd R., and Kendall Smith. Ceil-
ing unlimited, the story of American aviation
from Kitty Hawk to supersonics. New York, Mac-
millan, 1953. 417 p. illus. 53-11423 TL521.M58
The writers produced this book to coincide with
the 50th anniversary of powered flight. It is a
popular history of inventors, plane designs, flyers,
and the achievements of aviation in peace and war.
The business aspects of the aeronautics industry re-
ceive slight attention. Part 1, "Dawn of the Aerial
Age," is almost entirely devoted to the Wright
Brothers, and begins at Kitty Hawk with the first
plane raised by its own power for a 59-second flight
in 1903. Part 2, "Men Try Their Wings," con-
tinues with the Wrights, Curtiss, and other experi-
menters, and with patents and early flights. The
airplane was ready for the First World War, its
part in which is chronicled in part 3, "War in the
Skies," ending with a chapter on the "dishonored
prophet," General Billy Mitchell. The interwar
years were "The Era of Expansion," and here gov-
ernment policy, the organization of aircraft firms
431240—60-
-59
914 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and airlines, and questions of compedtion versus
monopoly share the interest with the record-making
flights of many pilots, "Lindbergh and His Contem-
poraries." The last part of the story, "The Second
World War and After," pictures America in the age
of air travel when the "spaceship" is no longer sci-
ence fantasy but an experimental problem. The
many excellent photographs are grouped in sections
following the five parts.
5939. Nevins, Allan. Ford. By Allan Nevins with
the collaboration of Frank Ernest Hill.
New York, Scribner, 1954-57. 2 v> *uus-
54-6305 CT275.F68N37
Bibliography: v. 1, p. 653-664.
Contents. — 1. The times, the man, the com-
pany.— 2. Expansion and challenge, 1915-1933.
The Ford Archives at Dearborn contain the larg-
est collection of Fordiana, as well as of Company
records, in existence. All has been opened to the
two distinguished authors for the unlimited research
needed for this monumental work, which is at once
full biography of the eccentric genius Ford and
detailed history of the Ford Motor Company — in
essence, through the Company's affiliations and ri-
valries, a history of the automotive industry, and of
"mass production [which] has changed the linea-
ments of our economic and social life more pro-
foundly than any other single element in the recent
history of civilization." Ford: the Times, the Man,
the Company covers the years through 1915, de-
scribing Ford's childhood and early life; the epoch
of pioneering in horseless carriages; Ford's first ex-
periments with racing cars; the founding of the
Company with Malcomson, Couzens, the Dodge
Brothers, and others; and the Model A in 1903. The
battle to bring the automobile within the reach of
the common man was won in 1908 with the
Model T, the epochmaking "ungraceful, bouncing,
noisy, tough-looking, and endlessly useful new
Ford." Then came victory over monopoly in the
Selden patent suit, removal of the plant to High-
land Park, and the revolutionary technology of the
moving assembly line. The trinity of mass produc-
tion, low prices (in 1914, $440), and high wages was
consummated in 19 14 with the five-dollar day. The
Sociological Department was established to inves-
tigate the workers, mostly recent immigrants, as to
their economic, social, and moral qualifications for
the minimum wage. Up to that point the book is
entirely factual, with documentation for almost
every paragraph; it ends with analysis of Ford's
character and the dangers implicit in his pater-
nalistic control. Ford: Expansion and Challenge
continues the work through the First World War
and the twenties, "the crowded years of war, boom,
and incipient depression." As before, the story of
Ford, his associates, and the industry is told in
fully rounded and absorbing detail as to techno-
logical, social, political, and personal aspects. In
his fervent faith in mass production, lower prices,
and high wages as moulders of a better age, in his
appearance and personality around which clustered
anecdote and legend, in his place at the center of the
"epochal controversy" between capitalism and so-
cialism, Ford became a worldwide symbol of the
second industrial revolution. His dictatorial sway
as one of the last great despots of the industrial
world made inevitable the comparison often drawn
with Mussolini. "Happily, the Ford Motor Com-
pany was far greater than its chief author. That
complex and powerful corporation represented a
pooling of the energies and brains of coundess men."
Late in the same year as the first volume, which rep-
resented "the best documentation and . . . the most
complete work on the subject thus far attempted,"
there was published Roger Burlingame's Henry
Ford, a Great Life in Brief (New York, Knopf,
1955 [i.e. 1954] 194 p.). A paperback edition was
issued as a Signet key book by the New American
Library in 1956 ([New York] 1943 p.). As con-
cise as the Nevins and Hill volumes are detailed, the
writer in his pointed pages has highlighted the
essentials of the Ford epic and brilliantly interpreted
the man who had called history bunk, and "never
once allowed the impossibilides of the past to limit
the possibilities of the future."
5940. Pound, Arthur. The turning wheel; the
story of General Motors through twenty-five
years, 1908-1933. Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday,
Doran, 1934. xvi, 517 p.
34-6016 HD9710.U52P6
Bibliography: p. 491-499.
The frontispiece of this anniversary volume is a
medal by Norman Bel Geddes commemoradng the
25th birthday of the General Motors Corporation.
The author, working from company records, has
written a popular history of the firm and its prod-
ucts— Oldsmobile, Buick, Oakland and Pontiac,
and Cadillac; their consolidation in General Motors;
the rise of Chevrolet and its merger with General
Motors in 1918; and subsequent developments. He
begins with two preliminary chapters on the prede-
cessors of the automobile, given added interest by
the amusing drawings by William Heyer with
which the book is illustrated. He includes chapters
on research and construction ("Body by Fisher"),
on stockholder interest, marketing, financing and
insurance for buyers, employee benefits, and public
relations. The first appendix is a chronology of sig-
nificant dates in the evolution of self-propelled
vehicles and of General Motors; other appendixes
are lists of officers and directors and notes on sub-
sidiaries and affiliates.
5941. Smith, Henry Ladd. Airways abroad, the
story of American world air routes. [Madi-
son] University of Wisconsin Press, 1950. 355 p.
illus. 50-14738 TL521.S52
The establishment of America's share of today's
world-covering network of commercial airlines be-
gan with government monopoly. Its first 10 years
are the history of Pan American Airways, which
was organized by Juan Trippe in 1927, and granted
exclusive overseas airmail contracts. This "chosen
instrument" policy permitted the line's great ex-
pansion, its trans-Pacific service initiated in 1935, a
trans- Adantic one in 1939, and a magnificent con-
tribution during the war. Competition was called
for in the Civil Aeronautics Act of 1938, and from
then on the story of international airways becomes
one of involved conflict, bilateral and multilateral,
between rival lines, executive agencies, Congress,
foreign airlines and the United States and foreign
governments. The postwar industry has emerged
from international conferences and Federal action
as one of regulated competition at home and abroad,
supervised by American authorities and the Inter-
national Civil Aviation Organization. The present
vivid account is focused on enterprises and policy-
making; if not always crystal clear, the fault is the
subject's rather than the author's. Each chapter is
followed by references and a useful note on sources,
a large proportion of which are Civil Aeronautics
Board, Congressional, and ICAO documents. The
writer had published an earlier history, similarly
concerned with competition, financial intrigue, and
government regulation: Airways; the History of
Commercial Aviation in the United States (New
York, Knopf, 1942. 430 p.).
5942. Taff, Charles A. Commercial motor trans-
portation. Rev. ed. Homewood, 111., R. D.
Irwin, 1955. 673 p. 55-9353 HE5623.T3_ 1955
A textbook on the industry of transportation by
truck and bus, by a professor of transportation at
the University of Maryland. The mushroom
growth of the motor carrier during the last 30
years, the extension of hard-surfaced highways, and
the methods of financing highways are outlined,
with striking graphic illustration, in part 1. The
bulk of the text is devoted to "property-carrying
aspects," with chapters on the various types of
trucks, their management and operations, classifica-
tion, financing, rates and ratemaking, regulation
and control by Federal and state governments, and
ECONOMIC LIFE / 915
policies of the Interstate Commerce Commission,
under whose authority trucks were brought by the
Motor Carrier Act of 1935. Part 3 is on buses, with
two chapters explaining the elements of intercity
passenger operations, and one on urban bus
transit. At the end is an 8-page bibliography.
5943. Wilson, George Lloyd, and Leslie A. Bryan.
Air transportation. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1949. ix, 665 p. illus., maps.
49-49212 TL552.W48
A general treatment of the subject for students of
the economic aspects of air transportation. The
historical background and modern development of
aviation, types of aircraft, airports and civil airways
are outlined in the first part. The longer second
part explains the system of commercial air trans-
portation, domestic and international, carrying mail,
passengers, and freight. Among the aspects dis-
cussed are organization, services, rates and charges,
coordination, safety, insurance, and employee and
public relations. There is a short survey of the
principal airlines of Europe, Asia, Africa, Austra-
lasia, and the Western Hemisphere. The last chap-
ters discuss government aid and regulation on the
municipal, State, Federal, and international levels.
The appendix is a digest of the "charter" of Ameri-
can aviation, the Civil Aeronautics Act of 1938. The
same field of business aspects is covered in Commer-
cial Air Transportation, by Professor John H. Fred-
erick of the University of Maryland, now in its
fourth edition (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1955.
547 p.). Less attention is paid to historical develop-
ment and to international air transportation, and
rather more to policies of the Civil Aeronautics
Board and to the practical details of financing air-
lines, handling passengers and cargo, etc. A bibli-
ography follows the text, and the appendixes give
the Act of 1938 and changes proposed in the Senate
Bill of 1954. Last may be mentioned a specialized
study of air transportation in relation to a single but
important sector of fiscal policy: Richard W. Lind-
holm's Public Finance of Air Transportation, a
Study of Taxation and Public Expenditures in Re-
lation to a Developing Industry (Columbus, Bureau
of Business Research, College of Commerce and
Administration, Ohio State University, 1948. 178
p.). This is a technical and statistical analysis of
the effects of specific taxes and tax rates, which still
amount to a substantial subsidy of air transport.
The taxes are of four sorts: gasoline taxes, property
taxes, taxes on corporate net income and capital
stock, and social security taxes. The author offers
a number of findings and recommendations, some of
a general nature, some specific to the airlines.
Ql6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
G. Commerce: General
5944. Barger, Harold. Distribution's place in the
American economy since 1869. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1955. xviii, 222 p.
diagrs. (National Bureau of Economic Research.
General series, no. 58) 55-10677 HF3021.B3
Bibliography: p. 152-215.
It has not infrequendy been noticed that today
more people are needed to get food, clothes, and
other commodities from the farmer or manufacturer
to the customer than in the days of our grandfathers.
This fact has been statistically demonstrated in im-
pressive detail by Professor Barger and his staff,
from sources whose enumeration requires over 60
pages. For the past three decades, they demonstrate,
there has been little change in the merchant's share
of the retail sales dollar. A sharp increase in the
percentage of salesmen in the total labor force and
a corresponding decline in the percentage of farm-
ers, miners, factory workers, etc., have been balanced
by a very much larger rise in output per manhour
among the latter than among workers in the whole-
sale and retail trades. Reliable figures were avail-
able for these decades, but for the years before
World War I the Bureau has had to piece together
scraps of information. What emerges is the con-
clusion that ever since the Civil War the role of the
distributor has been rising in proportionate impor-
tance and that of the producer falling, while the
output of the latter has increased, just as in the last
30 years; and the buyer's dollar between 1869 and
1919 turned definitely, though slowly, in the direc-
tion of the salesman. The Bureau presents these
conclusions through tables, charts, and text ad-
dressed to a professional audience.
5945. Converse, Paul D., and Harvey W. Huegy.
The elements of marketing, by Paul D. Con-
verse and Harry W. Huegy, with the collaboration
of Robert V. Mitchell. 5th ed. New York, Pren-
tice-Hall, 1952. 968 p.
52-8794 HF5415.C55 1952
In accordance with the great increase of workers
in distribution recorded by Professor Barger (above),
marketing has become increasingly a subject of
study in American universities and business schools.
This textbook, first published in 1921, has as au-
thors and collaborator two full professors and an
assistant professor of marketing of the University
of Illinois. They begin with a definition of market-
ing: it is often called distribution; it "makes goods
and services more valuable by getting them where
they are wanted" (place utilities), "when they are
wanted" (time utilities), "and transferred to those
people who want them" (possession utilities); a
simplified definition says "marketing is the business
of buying and selling." The various elements of the
marketing process are then expounded in detail.
Over 100 pages at the end set problems related to
individual chapters, written in the concrete style
of case histories: e. g., how the Orangeburg Com-
pany pays its salesmen. Short bibliographies follow
the chapters. That on "General Marketing" lists
30-odd works, of much the same character, a num-
ber of them similarly going through periodic re-
vision for class use. Typical are two, both revised
since the present work appeared: Harold H. May-
nard, Theodore N. Beckman, and William R.
Davidson, Principles of Marketing, 6th ed. (New
York, Ronald Press, 1957. 798 p.); and Charles F.
Phillips and Delbert J. Duncan, Marketing; Prin-
ciples and Methods, 3d ed. (Homewood, 111., R. D.
Irwin, 1956. 789 p.).
5946. Heck, Harold J. Foreign commerce. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1953. 512 p.
52-11511 HF3031.H4
Four of the five parts into which this volume is
divided deal with foreign commerce as an aspect
of the economy of the United States, while the last
part reviews intergovernmental organizations — the
International Monetary Fund, International Bank,
etc. — and international trade agreements. The
transactions carried on abroad by American mer-
chants, the services that facilitate them, and the con-
ditions that restrict them are the focus of the study.
First the significance of foreign commerce is exam-
ined, wih a statistical analysis of the patterns of
world trade. Export and import businesses are
explained, and the parts played in connection with
them by banks, brokers, transportation, insurance,
postal services, government, and other agencies
described. Financial considerations discussed in-
clude balances of payments, foreign exchange, and
foreign investments. The fourth part is on cus-
toms, tariffs, restrictions on exports, and govern-
ment promotion of foreign trade. The book is de-
signed for college courses, with section headings
within chapters and a 9-page bibliography.
5947. Humphrey, Don D. American imports.
New York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1955.
xviii, 546 p. diagrs. 55-8798 HF3031.H86
ECONOMIC LIFE / 917
This analysis of the "import deficit" of the United
States was authorized in 1950 by the Twentieth
Century Fund and the National Planning Associa-
tion; as the statistical data in general reflect the
scene of 1949, its importance is now largely his-
torical. The American export surplus and the
resulting worldwide dollar shortage are shown to
result from the great expansion of domestic industry
rather than from restrictions on products from
abroad. The tariff, trade agreements, and other
barriers to importation are historically reviewed,
and a chapter contributed by Professor Calvin B.
Hoover, a colleague of the author's at Duke Uni-
versity, gives the viewpoint of the European exporter.
Individual imports that might be increased are
statistically studied — such raw materials as hides
and skins, wool, fats, and oils; various agricultural
items; minerals and petroleum; and "luxuries,"
tourism, and shipping. Domestic industries that
might suffer thereby are shown to be "relatively
stagnant, low-wage industries,'" such as fur felt hats,
blue-mold cheese, handmade glass, and watches.
The summing up ends with a policy statement by
the NPA's Committee on International Policy. Its
recommendations for a substantial reduction of the
tariff and more liberal trade agreements are aimed
at improvement of the economic health of the free
world. A more recent and less technical study is by
Samuel Lubell: The Revolution in World Trade
and American Economic Policy (New York, Har-
per, 1955. 143 p.). In an attempt to disprove the
widespread "illusion" that lowering United States
tariffs and removing international trade restrictions
would go far to solve the world's economic prob-
lems, the author analyzes the world picture. Asia's
dollar crisis is caused by its greatly increased need
for imports, he finds; the British troubles come from
concentration on the sterling bloc; Western Eur-
opean efforts are aimed at integrating the resources
and markets of the overseas areas with the home
countries; the trade policy of the Soviets is aimed
above all at splitting the free world. He outlines
certain desirable objectives and offers some sug-
gestions for their attainment.
5948. Johnson, Emory R., and others. History of
domestic and foreign commerce of the United
States, by Emory R. Johnson, T[hurman] W. Van
Metre, G[rover] G. Huebner, and D[avid] S.
Hanchett. Washington, Carnegie Institution of
Washington, 1915; reprinted 1922. 2 v. (363,
398 p.) maps. ([Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington. Publication no. 2 15 A])
30-23704 HF3021.J6 1922
This valuable reference work is one of the notable
series of Contributions to American economic his-
tory sponsored by the Carnegie Institution's Depart-
ment of Economics and Sociology (see also Clark,
no. 5904; Meyer, no. 5923; Commons, no. 6033).
The late Professor Johnson of the University of
Pennsylvania, an expert on transportation, was
editor, and contributed most of the first part, a
history of commerce in the Colonial era and through
the Revolution. Two chapters on fisheries and the
coastwise trade in this period were by Dr. Van
Metre, who was responsible also for the second and
third parts, which complete volume 1: "Internal
Commerce of die United States," and "The Coast-
wise Trade," both extending from 1789 to the early
20th century. The second volume contains "The
Foreign Trade of the United States since 1789," by
Professor Huebner, with a preliminary chapter by
Professor Johnson; "American Fisheries," by Dr.
Van Metre; and "Government Aid and Commercial
Policy," by Dr. Hanchett, with a chapter on tariff
provisions by Dr. Huebner. The contributors were
all on the faculty of the University of Pennsylvania.
A number of unpublished monographs by other
collaborators were used in preparing the final text.
The work is heavily documented, with footnotes, a
formal classified bibliography (v. 2, p. 363-386),
and a bibliographical essay on sources (p. 352-362).
5949. Richert, Gottlieb Henry. Retailing, prin-
ciples and practices. 3d ed. New York,
Gregg Pub. Division, McGraw-Hill, 1954. 498 p.
illus. 53-12060 HF5429.R52 1954
The writer is identified as a specialist in distrib-
utive education of the U. S. Office of Education. In
his preface explaining the need for teaching this
subject he speaks of the retail store as "a romantic
enterprise," as well as a complex business. The
textbook is for the young person who intends to go
to work in a store, and it is all the more concrete
for that. It includes an account of the "Merchants
of America — Hall of Fame" opposite the Chicago
Merchandise Mart, and scattered throughout it are
pictures and brief biographical sketches of Ameri-
ca's most successful retail merchants. The chap-
ters cover all aspects of the retail business, even to
illustrations of "proper wrapping methods." An
appendix lists trade associations. A comparable
textbook addressed to college students is Retailing;
Basic Principles, by Pearce C. Kelley and Norris B.
Brisco, 3d ed. (Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-
Hall, 1957. 620 p.). The authors are respectively
a professor of marketing at the University of Okla-
homa and the general operating manager of a large
department store. A long bibliography (p. 585-
609), referring largely to periodical material, is
arranged to follow the individual chapters, on such
subjects as "Inventory and Stock Control," "Ef-
fective Retail Personnel," and "That All-Important
Person [the customer]." The standard textbook
918 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
on wholesaling is by Professor Theodore N. Beck-
man of Ohio State University and Nathanael H.
Engle, formerly assistant director of the U. S.
Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce: Whole-
saling, Principles and Practice, rev. ed. (New
York, Ronald Press, 1951. 746 p.). It has four
parts: "The Nature and Evolution of Wholesaling,"
"Modern Wholesaling in the United States and
Abroad," "Operation and Management of a Whole-
sale Business," and "Economic and Governmental
Aspects of Wholesaling."
5950. Rosenthal, Morris S. Techniques of inter-
national trade. New York, McGraw-Hill,
1950. xv, 554 p. 50-8041 HF1007.R6 1950
This volume of basic information about the tech-
niques of importing and exporting, written by the
president of the National Council of American Im-
porters, rehearses and explains the practical matters
involved in international trade. The author dis-
cusses the significance and form of the written con-
tract, methods and instruments of shipment, cus-
toms procedure and tariffs in the United States
and abroad, marine insurance, packing, financing
through consignment and open account, drafts and
letters of credit, foreign monetary systems, air
freight, and communications. Many examples of
individual transactions and facsimiles of typical doc-
uments are included. The appendixes include a
number of international agreements, and the "Re-
vised American Foreign Trade Definitions" of 1941
issued by the National Foreign Trade Council. The
work is a revision of Technical Procedure in Ex-
porting and Importing published in 1922.
H. Commerce: Special
5951. Albion, Robert Greenhalgh. The rise of
New York port (1815-1860) by Robert
Greenhalgh Albion, with the collaboration of Jen-
nie Barnes Pope. New York, Scribner, 1939. xiv,
458 p. 39-27172 HE554.N7A6
Bibliography: p. [423]~47o.
The whole history of the port of New York, says
Dr. Albion, is too complex for compression into one
volume. In this work he surveys "the significant
middle period when New York definitely drew
ahead of its rivals and established itself as the chief
American seaport and metropolis." The author had
already published Square-Riggers on Schedule (no.
5937), which expands a portion of the material here
covered; his plans for histories of New York as a
port before 1815 and after i860 were interrupted by
the war, and his later contributions have been
in naval history. The present volume is broad in
its scope, describing the operations of trade in New
York itself, in domestic and foreign markets and in
ports of call; the activities of the waterfront; the
ships, their routes and mariners; the personalities
of "merchant princes"; and travelers' impressions.
For the general reader there are provided "ship-
wrecks, slavers, and pirates"; for the scholarly,
analysis of the growth of commerce and statistical
data, much of the latter being tabulated in appen-
dixes. The book is profusely illustrated with re-
productions of contemporary prints and portraits.
5952. Baer, Julius B., and Olin Glenn Saxon.
Commodity exchanges and futures trading;
principles and operating methods. [New York]
Harper, 1949. 324 p. 49-7144 HG6046.B3 1949
Revision of 1929 publication with the title Com-
modity Exchanges, by Julius B. Baer and George
P. Woodruff.
Commodity exchanges such as the New York
Cotton Exchange, the Chicago Board of Trade
(wheat and corn), the Rubber Exchange, the Silk
Exchange, the Cocoa Exchange, and the National
Metal Exchange, are associations of traders organ-
ized for buying and selling their particular com-
modities, chiefly through futures contracts. These
are contracts for "to arrive" deliveries drawn up
according to the rules of the organization as to unit
of amount (e. g., a standard bale of cotton), quality,
and time of delivery. This involves a form of in-
surance for producer, dealer, and processor, which
takes the form of "hedging." Hedging is the device
whereby the purchaser who has contracted to de-
liver a processed commodity — e. g., a miller promis-
ing a quantity of wheat flour — and is buying a
quantity of wheat at today's price, contracts to sell
i like quantity of unprocessed wheat at the going
market price on the date when he delivers his flour.
He will thus be protected against loss if the market
has fallen, and if the market has risen, his profits on
the first purchase will be offset by the price he will
have to pay for the future purchase of wheat. This
technical study, by two specialists in business law,
describes the mechanics of futures trading on the
American exchanges with emphasis on their legal
aspects. Litde attention is given to international
markets. The role of the speculator is defended as
of social value.
5953* Brown, William Adams. The United States
and the restoration of world trade; an analy-
sis and appraisal of the ITO charter and the General
agreement on tariffs and trade. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution, 1950. 572 p. 50-7703 HF55.B7
A study of the primary instruments of interna-
tional commerce proposed under United Nations
auspices. The late author, an economist at the
Brookings Institution, had served in the State De-
partment and acted as an observer at conferences for
a proposed International Trade Organization.
After a glance at our fundamental foreign trade poli-
cies and at the background of international efforts
toward multilateral agreement on commercial rela-
tions, he reviews the history of ITO and the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT). The
UN Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC) in
1946 set up a Preparatory Committee on Trade and
Employment which met at London and Geneva and
drew up a draft charter, which was presented to
ECOSOC at a conference in Havana in November
1947. Here the so-called Havana Charter for an
International Trade Organization was promulgated,
to be submitted for ratification to member states.
As a means of immediate partial implementation,
GATT was signed by 23 countries at the Geneva
meeting of the preparatory committee, and has sub-
sequently received several amendments. Dr. Brown
explains the content and implications of the two
instruments, and then appraises them in terms of
United States policy. In the last chapter he reviews
the unsatisfactory alternatives of action if the United
States should reject the Charter. Its text is analyzed
provision by provision in the appendix. [The
United States has not been willing to accept the pro-
visions of ITO, and as of 1959 it is a dead letter.
GATT is in force as an informal agreement on cer-
tain limitations of restrictions; it has no administra-
tive apparatus beyond an annual meeting of the sig-
natories. In 1955 an Organization for Trade
Cooperation (OTC) was agreed upon to serve as an
administrative body for GATT; it has not yet been
ratified by all member states.]
5954. Campbell, Persia C. The consumer interelt:
a study in consumer economics. New York,
Harper, 1949. 660 p. 49-2885 HB801.C3
An evaluation from the consumer's viewpoint of
America's "total economic activity in terms of the
end results in consumer goods, and the satisfactions
derived from their use by the different families and
individuals in the community" — in other words,
"What comes from all our getting and spending?
And do we want what we get, or get what we want? "
First, the standard of living is defined in material
and subjective ways, for instance, in terms of pur-
chasing power, social status, and personal satisfac-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 919
tion. The writer discusses "Consumers at Market,"
indicating patterns of choice in expenditure, with
many interesting details and statistics. Shopping
for price advantage is set against shopping for
quality, and the advantages and disadvantages of
buying on credit are analyzed. The last section,
"Factors in Supply," appraises the relation to the
consumer of the retail store, farm production, and
industry, with special regard to the part played by
government in regulation and control. In a final
chapter Miss Campbell surveys the "consumer
movement" for educating the buyer and forming
an enlightened public opinion in the field.
5955. Carson, Gerald. The old country store.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1954.
33° P- 54-529° HF5429.C296
The past tense prevails in this engaging account
of the typical institution which tied together the
rural community of 19th-century America and pro-
vided its full-time social center. For his material
the writer has drawn on such sources as old ledgers
and journals, newspapers, diaries, "drummers' "
cards, local history, folksay, and personal reminis-
cence. The narrative is studded with anecdotes and
verses, illustrated with facsimiles and gay pen draw-
ings. Chronologically, Mr. Carson divides his
account into two halves at the Civil War. The
chapters have pleasant titles: "How to Live with-
out Money" (your cordwood in trade for cigars),
"The Thrivingest People in the World" (peddlers),
"A Man of Many Parts" (The storekeeper, hero of
local legend). "The Drummers of Pearl Street"
describes the country merchant's buying trip to
New York, before the day of the traveling salesman.
The latter, "The Man Who Brought the News,"
arrived about the middle of the century. "From
Cradle to Coffin" is the country-store inventory;
"Satin' Round the Old Store Stove" is the lore of the
cracker-barrel colloquium. Patent medicines are
looked at in "One for a Man, Two for a Llorse."
The story ends with the coming of the dissolvents:
the mail-order catalog and the Model T. "With the
departure of the country store — counter, stove, and
settle — there is no longer any point of assembly.
The congress has adjourned, sine die."
5956. Emmet, Boris, and John E. Jeuck. Cata-
logues and counters; a history of Sears,
Roebuck and Company. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press, 1950. xix, 788 p. illus.
50-7387 HF5467.S4E5
Bibliography: p. [753]~773-
Sears, Roebuck and Company, according to its
former retail merchandise manager, Dr. Emmet, is
"perhaps the outstanding example of mass merchan-
dizing"; in 1948, $2,296,000,000 worth of goods were
920 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
sold through its 632 retail stores, n mail-order
plants, and 341 order offices. The authors present
here a full business history, with special attention
to the policies and methods by which the firm has
cut the high cost of distribution to the benefit of
the American consumer. The Sears, Roebuck story
falls into three chronological stages. The first ex-
tends from 1886, when Richard W. Sears (1863-
1914) started a little business in Chicago advertising
the sale of watches by mail, to his resignation as
president of the $50 million company in 1908.
A. C. Roebuck, watchmaker and cofounder, had sold
out early, and his place had been filled by Julius
Rosenwald, who succeeded Sears as president. The
middle period of maturity in selling by catalog lasted
from 1908 to 1025; hard hit by the business crisis of
1921, the Company had been saved only by Rosen-
wald's "grand gesture" of advancing $20 million of
his own fortune, and had undergone an extensive
reorientation in sales methods and operation. The
third period, from 1925 to 1948, saw the develop-
ment of retail stores, a great expansion of over-the-
counter sales, and the many other changes that have
come with the growth of the American economy in
general, and of Sears, Roebuck in particular.
5957. Gibbons, Herbert Adams. John Wana-
maker. New York, Harper, 1926. 2 v.
illus. 26-1831 1 E664.W24G4
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 469-481.
John Wanamaker's long and eventful life, from
1838 to 1922, is one of the brilliant success stories
of America's age of enterprise. To this biographer,
friendly though not eulogistic, it was "the spirit of
radiant adventure" that animated the great mer-
chant in his many activities in business, religion, and
politics. Dr. Gibbons gives equal attention to all
sides of Wanamaker's career: in religious endeavor,
the Y. M. C. A., the Bethany Chapel, the Moody
and Sankey and other revivals; in State, municipal,
and national politics (he was rewarded by Benjamin
Harrison for his zeal in the campaign of 1888 with
the Postmaster Generalship); and in business, with
the establishment of one of America's first great de-
partment stores. The modest shop for men's cloth-
ing, Oak Hall, which he and his brother-in-law
began in 1861, became in 10 years the biggest retail
store of its kind in the country, largely through
Wanamaker's genius for publicity. In 1876, taking
advantage of the many visitors to Philadelphia for
the Centennial Exhibition, Wanamaker converted
the old Pennsylvania Railroad freight depot into
the Grand Depot, a combination of drygoods and
clothing store. In 1877 it became "a new kind of
store," with departments for drygoods, notions, and
"all things for the ready-dress needs of the people."
Its rise to the huge establishment in Philadelphia
and New York was not, the writer emphasizes, auto-
matic growth, but the result of Wanamaker's com-
bination of bold venture, foresight, and faith.
5958. Hower, Ralph M. The history of an ad-
vertising agency: N. W. Ayer & Son at work,
1 869-1949. Rev. ed. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1949. xliii, 647 p. illus. (Harvard
studies in business history, 5)
49-10653 HF6181.A8H6 1949
First edition, 1939.
A case study in the history of advertising, based
on "inside materials" — the firm's records, interviews
with employees and clients — by an independent re-
searcher, a professor at the Harvard Graduate
School of Business. The record of N. W. Ayer &
Son, Inc., of Philadelphia, one of the oldest adver-
tising agencies in America, is presented as illustrative
of "the creative work of the business man," its suc-
cess "a synthesis of the ideal and the useful, of the
right and the profitable." The book is in two
distinct parts, the first 200 pages tracing the general
history of the agency from its small beginning in
1869 with a list of 11 religious newspapers for which
to procure advertisements, to the big organization of
the present day. The second part is an objective
analysis of particular aspects of the Ayer develop-
ment as typical of the rise of professional advertis-
ing, with stress on their social significance. To the
library profession, the company is most familiar
as publishers of the famous guide, now called N. W.
Ayer & Son's Directory, Newspapers and Periodi-
cals, which has come out annually since 1880.
5959. Hower, Ralph M. History of Macy's of New
York, 1 858-1 9 19; chapters in the evolution
of the department store. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1943. xxvii, 500 p. diagrs.
(Harvard studies in business history, 7)
A 43-1889 HF5465.U6M27
The first 60 years of America's largest single re-
tail store comprise its founding and early develop-
ment by Rowland H. Macy and his first partners
(1858-87), and its expansion under the direction
of two generations of Strauses (1888-1919). A
second volume to cover later years was projected
but has not been published. In this history of
the great "cheap store," the author's second con-
tribution to this Harvard series in business
history, the style is semipopular, and the pages
lightened with personal names and stories, quota-
tions of sprightly advertising in verse and prose,
and portraits of store personalities. Emphasis is on
the functions of retailing, and Dr. Hower offers
evidence to prove that Macy's was "among the two
or three stores in both Europe and America which
first completed the transition from specialized stores
ECONOMIC LIFE / 92 1
to modern department stores," with an ever-increas-
ing variety of goods for sale in quantity at the lowest
unit price. An interesting central chapter describes
the composition and working conditions of the sales
force of the eighties. In the era of direction by
Isidor and Nathan Straus and their sons, the au-
thor's attention is focused on the evolution of store
facilities and of policies of expansion, advertising,
competitive pricing, and employee relations.
5960. Jones, Fred Mitchell. Middlemen in the
domestic trade of the United States, 1800-
1860. Urbana, University of Illinois, 1937. 81 p.
(Illinois studies in the social sciences, v. 21, no. 3)
37-27875 HF3027.3.J62
H31.I4, v. 21, no. 3
University of Illinois Bulletin, v. 34, May 25, 1937.
Bibliography: p. 72-77.
A historical monograph describing the opera-
tions of middlemen — wholesalers, jobbers, commis-
sion merchants, selling agents, brokers, auctioneers,
retailers, public markets, and peddlers — in the com-
merce of the United States before the Civil War.
It gives special attention to regulation of their op-
erations by Federal, State, and local authorities.
There is much interesting detail, which incidentally
shows that few modern devices are new; even the
chain store had its prototype in the three or more
stores owned in different parts of Tennessee by
Andrew Jackson. Where available, statistics have
been gathered. In the appendix are tables of auc-
tion sales over a period of years, and of retail stores
(57,565 in all) in the United States in 1839.
5961. Lebhar, Godfrey M. Chain stores in
America, 1 859-1950. New York, Chain
Store Pub. Corp., 1952. 362 p. diagrs.
52-7108 HF5468.L332
A history of the chain store system by the editor
of the trade journal, Chain Store Age. Mr. Lebhar
chronicles the birth of the chain stores (the date
chosen is 1859, the year of the founding of the Great
Adantic and Pacific Tea Company) and their rise
through the years to the strength shown in the
census of 1948; its figures indicate that of 1,770,000
stores in the United States, only 105,000 or 6 percent
are chain stores, but they account for 23 percent of
the total retail volume. The struggle against the
opposition of the independent stores in regard to
price cutting is reviewed, with citation of many legal
cases and decisions, anti-chain-store tax bills, acts
of the Federal Trade Commission, etc. The crusade
against the chains began in the 1920's and rose in
intensity until the passage of the Robinson-Patman
Act in 1936, after the American Retail Federation
had been investigated as a "superlobby." The tide
431240—60 60
turned when the Patman bill of 1938, which at-
tempted to impose a punitive tax on chains, was
killed in 1940, the hearings contributing importantly
to a public understanding of the economic and social
value of the chain-store system of distribution. In
his last chapters the author discusses this value in
relation to the community, the farmer, and the em-
ployees of the chain store, and the chain stores'
prospects for the future.
5962. Sandage, Charles H., and Vernon Fryburger.
Advertising: theory and practice. 5th ed.
Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin, 1958. 690 p.
58-9767 HF5823.S25 1958
This college textbook examines advertising, "a
dynamic force in our economy," in all its facets.
The first part, "Basic Value Functions," oudines the
history of advertising and discusses its social and
economic aspects, among them the factor of truth,
the role of advertising as a buyer's guide, and the
advertising of ideas rather than products (including
"advertorials"). Next its practical aspects are
treated: the background of fact gathering, con-
sumer research, product and market analysis, the
stages in preparing and reproducing the advertise-
ment, and the advertising media. The methods of
testing the effectiveness of advertising provide in-
teresting chapters which range from the compara-
tively simple technique of submitting samples to a
consumer jury to such complicated mental feats
as "unaided-recall" and "psychological scoring."
Finally, the organization and functions of the mod-
ern advertising agency are analyzed. As might be
expected, the illustrations are spirited and of great
variety.
5963. Seligman, Edwin R. The economics of in-
stalment selling; a study in consumers' credit,
with special reference to the automobile. New York,
Harper, 1927. 2 v. tables, diagrs.
27-24759 HF5568.S4
Bibliography: v. 1, p. 339-346.
A thorough historical and theoretical study by a
well-known Columbia University economist, which
remains the most authoritative examination of the
nature and operations of instalment selling in
America. This form of consumer's credit began
in 1807 with "high-grade business," instalment sales
of furniture, sewing machines, pianos, and books;
but a period of "low-grade selling," carried on par-
ticularly in New York City by unscrupulous ped-
dlers, brought the system into disrepute. It was
revivified by the largest and most significant applica-
tion, to automobiles, after which there developed
the special instruments of the finance company and
the Morris Plan banks. Professor Seligman explains
methods of instalment credit, estimates the extent of
922 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
instalment selling, and analyzes instalment sales as
to their nature and characteristics. He examines the
question of luxuries and necessities in connection
with the automobile, and the effects of instalment
credit on the consumer, on business conditions, and
on the credit structure. In each case the institution
is defended as one that, when abuses and improper
practices are cleared away, will be reckoned as con-
stituting "a signal and valuable contribution to the
modern economy." The large second volume, pre-
pared by the author's associates, contains a group of
specialized statistical studies, several of them con-
cerned with instalment sales of automobiles. A
more recent work, The Economics of Instalment
Buying, by Reavis Cox (New York, Ronald Press,
1948. 526 p.), is a comprehensive reference guide
to the structure, organization, and management of
instalment buying (or selling), its economic func-
tions and consequences, and its future outlook. The
author, professor of marketing at the University of
Pennsylvania, was director of research for the Retail
Credit Institute of America, by which the volume
was sponsored.
5964. Warbasse, James P. Co-operative democracy
through voluntary association of the people
as consumers; a discussion of the co-operative move-
ment, its philosophy, methods, accomplishments,
and possibilities, and its relation to the state, to sci-
ence, art, and commerce, and to other systems of
economic organization. 5th ed. New York, Har-
per, 1947. 324 p. 47-11741 HD2965.W3 1947
Bibliography: p. 316-319.
The most considerable American contribution to
cooperation literature is this book by one of its
leading exponents. The late Dr. Warbasse was
founder and for many years (1916-41) president of
the Cooperative League of the U. S. A.; on the title
page of this fifth edition of the work he appears as
president emeritus. He presents cooperation as a
world development. After consideration of its
meaning and methods, and a short chapter on the
Rochdale pioneers, he reviews in summary form the
status of cooperative societies in about 60 countries.
Then he considers the forms of expression of co-
operation, its relationship with government, and its
significance in regard to politics, profit business,
the labor movement, etc., using world experience
for illustration. The book has been translated into
nine languages. Dr. Warbasse had himself lectured
and given courses on cooperation in a hundred uni-
versities in eight countries. The purely American
aspects of cooperation are recorded with extensive
detail in a recent book by a government specialist
on cooperatives, Florence E. Parker: The First
125 Years; a History of Distributive and Service
Cooperation in the United States, 1829-1954 ([Chi-
cago, Cooperative League of the U. S. A.] 1956.
462 p.). Less fully, but with notable clarity, the
subject of cooperation and its particular manifesta-
tions in America are set forth in a guide for public
school teachers by Charles Maurice Wieting: The
Progress of Cooperatives, with Aids for Teachers
(New York, Harper, 1952. 210 p.).
I. Finance: General
5965. Blough, Roy. The Federal taxing process.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1952. 506 p.
(Prentice-Hall economics series)
52-8597 HJ2381.B55
Bibliography: p. 481-494.
Professor Blough, a tax expert long connected with
the U. S. Treasury Department and congressional
tax committees, prepared this book while teaching
at the University of Chicago in 1946-50. He is now
principal director of the Department of Economic
Affairs of the United Nations. In this closely writ-
ten study of the making of tax policy he is particu-
larly concerned to show how policy is formulated
amid the fundamental and clashing disagreements
of its framers about the public interest it is to serve.
He examines tax programs and pressure groups, the
passage and application of the tax laws, and the ad-
ministration of taxation by the Bureau of Internal
Revenue. "Considerations Relating to the Level of
Taxation" include the controversy over deficit
spending and a balanced budget; "Considerations
Relating to the Distribution of Taxes" include
national prosperity, the problem of fairness, regula-
tory taxation (e. g., on alcoholic liquors), and
Federal-State tax relations. The last chapter exam-
ines the bearing of the Federal taxing process on the
carrying out of national policies.
5966. Dewey, Davis Rich. Financial history of the
United States. 12th ed. New York, Long-
mans, Green, 1934. xxxviii, 600 p. diagrs. (Ameri-
can citizens series) 34-36570 HJ241.D4 1934
A standard work since 1903, in its final edition
covering in highly compressed form the whole course
of public finance from Colonial days to the depres-
sion of the 1930's. The author, elder brother of
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 923
John Dewey, was professor of economics and statis-
tics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
from 1893 to 1933, and, among other distinguished
posts, editor for many years of the American Eco-
nomic Review. His text is preceded by a 20-page
bibliography divided into subject sections, and short
lists of references are put at the heads of chapters.
The themes followed chronologically in his history
are taxation and internal revenue, coinage and paper
money, the banks, the tariff, the silver question, and
the administration of the Treasury. The volume is
of lasting interest; Professors Studenski and Krooss
in their new Financial History of the United States
(no. 5973) acknowledge their debt to it and declare
it "will continue to be a classic in the field."
5967. Guthmann, Harry G., and Herbert E. Dou-
gall. Corporate financial policy. 3d ed.
New York, Prentice-Hall, 1955. 766 p. illus.
55-5754 HG4011.G85 1955
Two professors of finance begin by defining and
charting the field of corporation finance. Their ex-
position covers lucidly and in detail legal forms of
business organization other than corporations, the
formation and control of the corporation, its stock
and bonds, factors determining the pattern of long-
term financing, and the financial aspects of promo-
tion. Next various branches of corporation finance
are examined: public utilities, railroads, investment
banking, security exchanges, the subscription sale
of securities, and employee and executive stock own-
ership. Techniques of budgeting and short-term
financing are explained. Then the writers proceed
to the advanced stages of the corporation's career:
expansion and consolidation, mergers, holding com-
panies, refinancing and recapitalization, failure, re-
ceivership, reorganization, and so on to corporate
dissolution and liquidation. That note is too sad
on which to end, even in a text for advanced study,
so the final chapter becomes a soothing and hopeful
review of the social aspects of corporate financing.
The long bibliography (p. 724-766) is arranged in
the form of chapter references.
5968. Hansen, Alvin H. Fiscal policy and business
cycles. New York, Norton, 1941. 462 p.
41-7728 HB3711.H315
In his introduction to this book on fiscal policy as
an instrument for regulating the national income
and its distribution, the author gives emphatic voice
to the conviction that for a decade has dictated his
vigorous advocacy of the Keynesian doctrine. "The
twin scourges that afflict the modern world — De-
pression and War — are not altogether unrelated.
Bad as the Treaty of Versailles was, a steady im-
provement in international political relations could
have been expected had we had the vision and cour-
age to stop the Great Depression dead in its tracks
and move forward to higher levels of real income
and employment. . . . The ultimate causes of the
failure to achieve a world order in the political
sphere must be sought in the facts of economic
frustration." Professor Hansen, who held the Lit-
tauer Chair of Political Economy at Harvard from
1937 until his retirement, has been the leader of the
American theorists who believe in a dual economy
of Federal spending and private investment, and in
increasing the public debt as a way of combating
depression. He here develops these views in an
examination of the economic situation of the 1930's;
the changing role of fiscal policy and its application
to the full use of resources through "compensatory"
spending and taxation; incentives to investment;
and wartime financing. Like other economists at
home and abroad, he predicted a postwar slump.
5969. Kendrick, Myron Slade. Public finance;
principles and problems. Boston, Houghton
Mifflin, 1951. 708 p. illus. 51-9072 HJ257.K4
A text for advanced study by a professor at Cornell
University, who attempts to balance the older views
of the orthodox laissez-faire economists and those of
the enthusiastic followers of J. M. Keynes who advo-
cate heavy government spending in order to main-
tain a high level of employment and national income.
The main exposition is in three parts, "Public Ex-
penditures" (their increase, the causes thereof, and
how to control them), "Public Revenues," and
"Fiscal Policy." The second is by far the longest,
with 21 chapters covering the historic development
and present status of State, local, and Federal taxa-
tion, the taxation of property, estate and inheritance
taxes, the taxation of motor vehicle transportation
(called "taxes as price equivalents"), the taxation
of business, income tax, and the general problems
of tax administration and (with charts) the
incidence of taxes. The last chapter warns of
dangers in a policy of expansion spending: "Only
after the possibilities of correcting the known defects
of the economy have been explored has the policy
of spending for its general effect any claim to con-
sideration." Another useful textbook, Public
Finance, by Alfred G. Buehler, is now in its third
edition (New York, McGraw-Hill, 1948. 740 p.).
In straightforward expository chapters the author
defines public finance and describes the range of
Federal, local, and State expenditures and grants,
fiscal organization, budgetary procedure, govern-
ment accounting, and the tax system in its many
phases. The volume ends with a consideration of
Federal methods of borrowing and the economic
significance of the public debt.
924 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
5970. Paul, Randolph E. Taxation in the United
States. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1954. 830 p.
54-6282 HJ2362.P35
The late writer, a tax lawyer who had served as
advisor to the President and the Treasury Depart-
ment in New Deal days and who during the war was
Assistant to the Secretary of the Treasury in charge
of foreign funds control, was influential in the
formation of recent tax policy in America, on which
he wrote extensively during three decades. This
book is addressed to the informed general reader,
as well as to economic historians and tax experts,
in an urbane style as little difficult as possible con-
sidering the subject matter. Although the main
themes are die income tax and estate and gift taxes,
other aspects of the Federal tax system are not
neglected in the comprehensive historical analysis
of the basic issues involved in tax and fiscal policy.
Except for a rapid 100-page review of tax history
before World War I, the treatment is full, with a
detailed account of the economic climate and of the
political and legal struggles accompanying the
introduction of each new tax. The final chapters
are a theoretical study of the judicial process in
relation to taxes, and an appraisal of the existing
system, including Mr. Paul's views on progressive
(i. e., graduated) taxation. Taxation is naturally a
primary interest of American thinkers on financial
problems, and notable studies of the whole subject
or of special aspects are numerous. Sidney Ratner's
American Taxation, Its History as a Social Force in
Democracy (New York, Norton, 1942. 561 p.) is
a comprehensive historical survey from 1789, in
which the cumulative developments in tax reform
are shown in relation to general social conditions.
The emphasis is on "the endeavor of the American
people ... to forge taxes which should be not
only sources of revenue but also instruments of
economic justice and social welfare." A standard
historical work with chapters grouped around indi-
vidual revenue acts from 1909 to 1939 is Roy G. and
Gladys C. Blakey's The Federal Income Tax (New
York, Longmans, Green, 1940. 640 p.). A useful
analysis of tax problems at the end of the war,
published as a research study of the Committee for
Economic Development, is Postwar Taxation and
Economic Progress, by Harold M. Groves (New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1946. 432 p.). The publica-
tions of the U. S. Congress Joint Committee on the
Economic Report are important for the genesis of
tax legislation. A particularly valuable com-
pendium representing the views of many leading
spokesmen is Federal Tax Policy for Economic
Growth and Stability; Papers Submitted by Panelists
Appearing before the Subcommittee on Tax Policy
(Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1955. 930 p.
84th Cong., 1st sess. Joint Committee Print).
5971. Poole, Kenyon E., ed. Fiscal policies and
the American economy. New York, Pren-
tice-Hall, 1 95 1. 468 p. illus. (Prentice-Hall
economics series) 51-9449 HJ263.P6
A group of essays interpreting modern theory in
regard to fiscal policy, which reflect the changing
thought of the years of depression and wartime
inflation. The first paper, by the editor of the
symposium, is a brief historical treatment, "Back-
ground and Scope of American Fiscal Policies."
There follow: "Monetary Aspects of Fiscal Policy,"
by Roland I. Robinson; "Fiscal Policy, Employment,
and the Price Level," by Henry M. Oliver; "Debt
Management," by Henry C. Murphy; "Government
Expenditures and Their Significance for the Econ-
omy," by John F. Due; "Financial Institutions as a
Factor in Fiscal Policy," by Harry C. Guthmann;
"Repercussions of the Tax System on Business," by
E. Gordon Keith; "The Fiscal System, the Distribu-
tion of Income, and Public Welfare," by John H.
Adler, with an appendix, "The Statistical Allocation
of Taxes and Expenditures in 1938/39 and
1946/47," by Eugene R. Schlesinger; and "Interna-
tional Aspects of Fiscal Policy," by Frank W. Fetter.
Each essay is followed by a short list of references.
The editor of the symposium, a professor of eco-
nomics at Northwestern University, published in
1956 a treatise on this subject: Public Finance and
Economic Welfare (New York, Rinehart. 640 p.).
The complex field of government finance and fiscal
policy is fully covered, with special stress on the
cyclical and long-term effects of fiscal policy upon
economic stability and social security.
5972. Prochnow, Herbert V., ed. American finan-
cial institutions. New York, Prentice-Hall,
1951. 799 p. 51-11568 HG181.P73
This collective work covering the entire American
financial structure is designed as an integrated text
in the fields of finance, money, banking, etc. Seven-
teen of the 25 contributors are connected with uni-
versities and schools of business administration,
while the other 8 are executives of banks or other
financial institutions. Among the subjects treated,
with special attention to their interrelations and their
bearing on the national economy, are commercial
banks, the Federal Reserve system, savings and loan
associations and mutual savings banks, real estate
and agricultural financing institutions, commodity
exchanges, stockbrokerage and stock exchanges,
investment banking, trust companies, international
banks, the United States Treasury, insurance com-
panies, institutions for consumer credit, personal
finance, and government regulation. The last chap-
ter reviews the leading trade associations in the
financial field. The treatment in all is expositionsl,
with clarity the first objective.
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 925
5973. Studenski, Paul, and Herman E. Krooss.
Financial history of the United States: fiscal,
monetary, banking, and tariff, including financial
administration and state and local finance. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 528 p.
51-12649 HG181.S83
The first general history of American finance
published since the Second World War, this textbook
by two professors at New York University deals
with government policies and the administration of
taxation, money and banking, and the tariff, stressing
the political and economic issues involved. The
chapters are in mainly chronological sequence,
grouped in three periods: from Colonial times to the
Civil War; from 1861 to 1916; from World War
I to 1950. Nonfederal finance receives attention
throughout, and in each section a chapter is devoted
to state and local government finance. Almost half
the text is given to the third section, which lucidly
sets forth the financial aspects of the New Deal,
World War II, and the first postwar years. The
many statistical tables are exceptionally easy of com-
prehension by the nonspecialist reader, to whom, as
well as to students, the work is directed.
5974. Westerfield, Ray Bert. Money, credit and
banking. Rev. ed. New York, Ronald
Press Co., 1947. 1096 p. maps, diagrs.
47-11360 HG153.W42
5975. Chandler, Lester V. The economics of
money and banking. Rev. ed. New York,
Harper, 1953. 742 p. illus.
53-5076 HG221.C448 1953
Dr. Westerfield, now emeritus professor of politi-
cal economy at Yale where he held a chair for 30
years, is also a practicing banker. This treatise has
been a standard text and reference work for several
decades. In accord with the author's interests, it
covers comprehensively both financial theory and
practice, philosophy and institutions. Its three
themes, money, credit, and banking, are developed
simultaneously in his argument as they are in the
world of finance. The nature of money and mone-
tary systems, the history of national coinage and
paper money, the instruments of credit, the func-
tions, management, and operations of banks, the
history of banking, the Federal Reserve System, and
foreign exchange are among the many aspects treated
at length. In the same general field but more
definitely focused on the relationship of the mone-
tary and banking system to the present-day function-
ing of the American economy is The Economics of
Money and Banking by Professor Chandler o£
Princeton. This text is designed as a general intro-
duction to monetary studies for college undergradu-
ates, and lays much emphasis on elementary prin-
ciples. After 21 chapters explaining the functions
and kinds of money, monetary standards, banking,
the Federal Reserve System, and other financial
institutions, the author devotes 7 chapters to a dis-
cussion of monetary theory, using equations and
symbols. The most formidable in appearance are
those of national income analysis, GN'P (gross na-
tional product) and other concepts, to measure
which there are constructed mathematical functions,
schedules, or curves. The last few chapters explain
postwar international transactions and reladonships
involving money.
}. Finance: Special
5976. Abbott, Charles C. The Federal debt, struc-
ture and impact. With policy recommenda-
tions of the Committee on the Federal Debt. New
York, Twentieth Century Fund, 1953. xvii, 278 p.
53-5982 HJ8119.A58
5977. Murphy, Henry C. The national debt in
war and transition. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1950. 295 p. 50-6930 HJ8 n 9.M8
From the national debt of about a billion dollars
that remained stable through the period from 1895
to 1916, the United States through two major wars,
a depression, and the cold war, has increased the
figure of what it owes to about $260 billion, or "close
to $1,700 for every man, woman and child in the
country." These statisdcs are reported in 1953 in
a survey started by the Twendeth Century Fund in
1948 but postponed because of the tax increase
brought about by the Korean War and rearmament.
The study, directed by Dr. Abbott of the Harvard
Business School, involved an examination of the
post-World War II situation, the impact of the debt
on the Treasury and the Federal Reserve, and the
effect of Korea, and then an analysis of the debt
problem and conclusions. The last section, as in
most Fund studies, is a report by a committee which
reviewed the research findings, summarizing and
offering recommendations as to Federal debt man-
agement for steady economic growth. The story of
war finance is told by Mr. Murphy, former assistant
926 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
director of research and statistics of the Treasury
Department. Although the viewpoint is that of the
government, the author reasserts that "the govern-
ment represents the whole people," and that officials
of the Treasury and the Federal Reserve System
make a conscientious effort to hear and adapt them-
selves to the points of view expressed by representa-
tives of all segments of the economy. After giving
a brief review of the depression, he discusses "Setting
the Pattern of War Finance," against the realization
that taxation is preferable to borrowing, but insuffi-
cient to finance a major war. He then explains the
techniques of borrowing through war loans, savings
bond programs, etc. His final appraisal is that,
though the job could have been done better — "What
job couldn't?" — there is no doubt that the war
borrowing program was a success.
5978. Allen, Frederick L. The great Pierpont
Morgan. New York, Harper, 1949. 306 p.
port. 49-8274 CT275.M6A6
"Sources and obligations": p. 283-297.
A biography which is less economic history than
personal interpretation of the preeminent banker
(1837-1913) who, it was widely believed, controlled
American finance in the early 1900's. The late
editor of Harper's Magazine speaks of his book as
an attempt at a middle course between earlier ex-
tremes of "one-sidedly laudatory and one-sidedly
derogatory" accounts. He begins with Pierpont
Morgan's appearance, a few months prior to his
death, before the Pujo congressional committee
which in 1912 was investigating the "money trust."
The famous statement of the financier, that commer-
cial credit is based primarily on character — "a man
I do not trust could not get money from me for all
the bonds in Christendom" — is the author's point
of departure to which he returns in his conclusion.
On the way he has followed Morgan from his youth
through his natural entrance into the banking world
via his father's firm; his partnerships first with C. H.
Dabney and then with Anthony J. Drexel; the
establishment of J. P. Morgan and Company in
1895; his victories over competitors; his great role
in government financing; his reorganization of rail-
roads; and his consolidation of the U. S. Steel Cor-
poration. The great monetary dealings are outlined
against a sympathetically drawn background of
Morgan's personal life, tastes, princely travels, and
activities as a prodigious collector of art and litera-
ture. All these matters are related in much greater
detail — often of high interest — and with much less
reflective commentary, by his admiring son-in-law,
Herbert L. Satterlee, in /. Pierpont Morgan; an
Intimate Portrait (New York, Macmillan, 1939.
xvi>595P-)-
5979. Brown, John Crosby. A hundred years of
merchant banking, a history of Brown
Brothers and Company, Brown, Shipley & Company
and the allied firms, Alexander Brown and Sons,
Baltimore; William and James Brown and Com-
pany, Liverpool; John A. Brown and Company,
Browns and Bowen, Brown Brothers and Company,
Philadelphia; Brown Brothers and Company, Bos-
ton. New York, Priv. print, 1909. xxxiii, 374
p. plates. 9-27455 HG2613.B24B7
5980. Hidy, Ralph W. The House of Baring in
American trade and finance; English mer-
chant bankers at work, 1 763-1 861. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1949. xxiv, 631 p.
illus. (Harvard studies in business history, 14)
49-11255 HG4910.H5
"Notes and references": p. [4 83] -6 16.
The frontispiece of Brown's classic history of the
growth of a private banking firm in foreign busi-
ness shows four old gentlemen, with white hair and
spectacles, grouped about a table beneath the por-
trait of a fifth— Alexander Brown and his four sons.
The father came from Ireland and in 1800 began a
small business in Baltimore importing Irish linens,
and rapidly expanded to other goods. He had to
pay in sterling, and accepted payment in sterling
bills, drawn against shipments of tobacco, etc., from
Baltimore to England; he became a free buyer of
commercial sterling, and built up "a goodly share
of the Sterling Exchange business in this country."
His four sons, who compensated with business
acumen for their weak sight, were taken into part-
nership and established in branches or allied firms.
The oldest son opened a firm in Liverpool in 1810,
and Brown acquired ships, and issued credits on the
Liverpool house for other American merchants.
The Philadelphia branch, under the third son, was
established in 18 18, and in 1825 the New York
branch was opened under the youngest son. This
book, which combines the charm of well-written
family history with a revealing account of the
methods of private banking and the transition from
mercantile to industrial capitalism, is by the son of
the New York Brown, who had himself been a
partner in the firm for almost half a century. Dr.
Hidy studies in detail the operations of a famous
London house of merchant bankers which for about
25 years specialized in financing American trade and
marketing American securities. Flis principal source
was the Baring papers in the Public Archives of
Canada, selected materials dealing primarily with
the business of the house in the United States and
Canada. Notwithstanding the dates in Dr. Hidy's
tide, his narrative is detailed only after the Peace of
Ghent (1815). America was the major interest of
Baring Brothers and Company only from 1828 to
ECONOMIC LIFE / 927
1842, after which year the repudiation of their finan-
cial obligations by so many American States led the
house to reduce its dealings, and to curtail them
drastically in 1853. "The London firm felt that it
assumed responsibility to both buyer and seller when
it publicly marketed the securities of any govern-
ment or corporation," and the boom-and-bust
character of the American economy, and the wild-
cat oudook of so many American promoters, led the
Barings to give preference to Canadian, European,
and Latin American bond issues after 1853.
5981. Dice, Charles Amos, and Wilford John Eite-
man. The stock market. 3d ed. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1952. 460 p. illus.
51-12601 HG4551.D5 1952
5982. Leffler, George L. The stock market. 2d
ed. New York, Ronald Press Co., 1957.
629 p. illus. 57-6811 HG4551.L35 1957
The first of these two expository works on the
stock market is addressed to investors, students of
the market, and the general public. The various
kinds of securities offered, the relations of brokers
with customers, the operations of the New York
Stock Exchange, the various types of stock pur-
chasing (on margin, short sale, stop-loss order and
hedge, averaging and pyramiding, calls, puts,
spread, straddle, etc.), and all other aspects of the
stockbroker's trade are explained in as simple
terminology as the subject allows. The second
volume is of the same general type, although more
stricdy in textbook presentation. First published
in 1951, it has been revised to reflect "substantial
changes" in the stock market during the intervening
years.
5983. Goldenweiser, Emanuel A. American mone-
tary policy. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951.
xvi, 391 p. diagrs. (Committee for Economic De-
velopment. Research study)
51-5868 HG538.G64
A study of the policymaking of the Federal Re-
serve System, by the late former director of the
division of research and statistics for the Board of
Governors of FRS (1926-45). The examination of
Federal Reserve instruments of monetary manage-
ment, of policy decisions through four defined
periods ( 1917-32, 1933-39, World War II, postwar),
and of institutional operations and relationships of
the Federal Reserve is set in a theoretical frame-
work. Dr. Goldenweiser discusses the role of
money in the economy, the objectives of monetary
policy, and the evolution of FRS ideas before he
begins his chronological account. He follows this
with a review of principles of monetary policy in
which he sets down "certain simple and unequivocal
rules" in line with FRS practice, the last of which
involves the general aim of "contributing to eco-
nomic stability." The appendix contains tables of
statistics. A note is added on the research program
of the Committee for Economic Development, list-
ing and describing the studies published in the
series of which this volume forms a part. In 1948
Professor George Leland Bach of Carnegie Insti-
tute of Technology in Pittsburgh, a former staff
economist serving the Board of Governors of
FRS, conducted a study of the System for the
Hoover Commission (Commission on the Reorgani-
zation of the Executive Branch of the Government).
His monograph, Federal Reserve Policy-Making
(New York, Knopf, 1950. 282 p.), is a report on
that study. It is in four parts, of which the first is
a historical outline of "Federal Reserve Organization
and the Policy Responsibilities." Parts 2 and 3 are
discussions of "Internal Policy Formation" and "Ex-
ternal Relations in Policy-Making." Part 4 is an
analysis of "The Lessons of Monetary Experience."
The writer is particularly concerned to show that
official policymaking is not carried out in accord
with the clear theories formulated by professional
economists in the agencies, but is influenced by the
pressures of other officials and of special interest
groups, and the de facto policy of the administra-
tion. An interpretation of the workings of the
Federal Reserve through the case history of an indi-
vidual bank during the first 20 years of the System
was prepared as a doctoral thesis at Columbia Uni-
versity by Lawrence E. Clark: Central Banking
under the Federal Reserve System, with Special
Consideration of the Federal Reserve Ban\ of New
Yor{ (New York, Macmillan, 1935. 437 p.).
His analysis stresses the function of the bank as a
public service.
5984. Gras, Norman S. B. The Massachusetts
First National Bank of Boston, 1784-1934.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1937. xxiv,
768 p. plates. (Harvard studies in business history,
4) 38-1639 HG2613.B74F54
The late author of this scholarly history of the
second bank established in the United States was
professor of business history at Harvard from 1927
to 1950, and editor of the series in which his book
appeared. The study, based on unpublished records
in the Baker Library and in possession of various
New England banks, is in three parts. The first is
a general introduction, which in just over 200 pages
gives a running account of the Bank's history,
prefaced by an 8-page chronology. Part 2 presents
documents illustrating that history from its origins
to 1865, when the Bank entered a period of si.
tion: the letter and petition that launched it in
the original charter and its modifications in 1792
928 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and 1 8 12, extracts from the "Stockholders' Minute
Book" and the "Directors' Records" (p. 221-529),
and lists of officers. Part 3 gives tabulated statistics
for the same period, including comparative figures
for other Massachusetts banks. The venerable Bank
was rejuvenated after 1903; Dr. Gras thus diagnoses
its long period of decline: "The Bank responded to
the opportunities for gain from sea traffic and from
purely local trade, but it failed in the early part of
the nineteenth century to participate in the develop-
ment of New England as a whole and it failed in
helping Boston secure the financial dominance in
New England that its commercial position justified."
5985. James, Frank Cyril. The growth of Chicago
banks. New York, Harper, 1938. 2 v.
(1468 p.) ports. 38-33677 HG2613.C4J3
Bibliography: v. 2, p. 1127-1157.
A history of the country's second largest money
market, treated under the broad aspects of Chicago
finance in its interrelations with the political and
economic development of the community from a
frontier outpost to a great metropolis. The narrative
is divided chronologically, the two volumes being
The Formative Years, 1816-1896, and The Modern
Age, 1897-1938. The Chicago banks, growing with
the region, were deeply involved in Illinois politics;
by 1 87 1 they had made the city the financial center
of the West. In the later period the banks tended to
lose their regional character and to become "so inti-
mately woven into the structure of the national
money market that the financial independence of
Chicago tended to decline," even as the city became
one of the financial capitals of the world. This
study was sponsored by the First National Bank of
Chicago. Written by a distinguished financial his-
torian, it is designed for the enjoyment of a specialist
audience; the typeface is luxurious, there are color
reproductions of portraits of individual bankers, and
exhaustive documentation is given in notes following
the chapters. Among the appendixes is a 250-page
"Summary of Historical Data Regarding the Crea-
tion, Growth and Dissolution of Banks and Finan-
cial Houses Operating in Cook County from 1863
to 1938." A heavily statistical study of Chicago as
a financial center is The Chicago Credit Market,
Organization and Institutional Structure, by
Melchior Palyi (Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1937. 448 p.). It was published as no. 33
of the Social science studies directed by the Social
Science Research Committee of the University of
Chicago. The text deals strictly with the organiza-
tional aspects of the leading Midwestern credit
market and shows the interrelation of savings insti-
tutions, security exchanges, call-loan and commercial
paper markets, and unit and branch banks. The
many tables in the appendix go far beyond analysis
of market structure, and present data relating the
Chicago market to the economic growth of the area
and to the country as a whole.
5986. Kemmerer, Edwin Walter, and Donald L.
Kemmerer. The ABC of the Federal Re-
serve System. 12th ed. New York, Harper, 1950.
229 p. 50-6526 HG2563.K4 1950
Bibliography: p. 215-220.
Professor Edwin W. Kemmerer of Princeton
University published the first edition of this famous
work in 191 8. The 12th edition, revised by his son,
keeps the same character of a guide in nontechnical
language, making as plain as possible to the lay
reader the complexities of the Federal Reserve Sys-
tem. It begins with a short explanation of banking
systems and their main defects, most serious of
which in 19th-century America was decentralization.
Then there is outlined the framework of the Federal
Reserve System, which was superimposed in 1914
on many thousands of independent banks. There
follows an examination of the methods and history
of the Federal Reserve Banks, through the Act of
1913 and its subsequent amendments, in the First
World War, the "open market" of the 1920's, the
period of bank failures and the Great Depression,
the New Deal and its reforms in banking, and the
Second World War. In the last chapter suggestions
are given "the intelligent citizen" as to what writings
to consult and what to look for in them in order to
understand trends of the national economy. An-
other and briefer simplified story of the Federal
Reserve System and its influence on the flow of
credit and money is presented in an official pamphlet
well illustrated with charts: The Federal Reserve
System, Its Purposes and Functions, by the Board of
Governors of the Federal Reserve System, 2d ed.
(Washington, 1947. 125 p.). The last chapter
summarizes: "Experience over four decades shows
that reserve banking is of vital importance to the
national economy. Provision of bank reserves has
come to be the major Federal Reserve function."
5987. Lamont, Thomas W. Henry P. Davison; the
record of a useful life. New York, Harper,
1933. xxii, 373 p. ports. 33-15632 HG2463.D3L3
This biography of "Harry" Davison (1 867-1922),
written by "his friend and partner," devotes fully as
much attention to the subject's character, personal
affairs, and distinguished public services as to his
brilliant banking career. From the bottom step in
a village bank he rose in 10 years to the presidency
of a New York bank. Founder of the Bankers'
Trust Company, a director of the First National
Bank, influential in curbing the money panic of
1907, a designer of the Federal Reserve System, a
Morgan partner, and chairman in 19 10 of the Six-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 929
Power Chinese Loan Conference (Chinese Con-
sortium) in Paris, he became one of America's most
powerful figures in national and international
finance. His outstanding public service was as
chairman of the Red Cross War Council during the
First World War, when in two annual drives he
raised first $115 million, and then $170 million for
the Red Cross war chest. Mr. Lamont's admiring,
intimate, affectionate, and readable story has for its
last appendix the citation accompanying the award
of the Distinguished Service Medal to Davison.
5988. Larson, Henrietta M. Jay Cooke, private
banker. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1936. xvii, 512 p. illus. (Harvard studies in
business history, 2) 36-36152 HG2463.C6L3
Jay Cooke's private banking partnership, formed
in Philadelphia in 1861, sprang into rapid prom-
inence through the sale of Civil War bonds. He
sold Treasury notes in Pennsylvania in 1861, and
in October 1862 was appointed by Secretary of the
Treasury Chase as special agent for the "five-
twenties," a 6 percent loan callable in 5 years and
maturing in 20. His high-pressure salesmanship,
reaching the small investor through advertising and
agents, marked "a notable achievement in the his-
tory of American finance." In 1864, after the
Treasury had failed in its own attempt to float a
large loan, Cooke was again called upon to act as
government subscription agent, and his campaign
for the victory loan resulted in an unprecedented
over-subscription. After the war he turned to
financing business undertakings, and in 1869 be-
came heavily involved in active promotion of the
Northern Pacific Railroad. Through overexten-
sion and other errors, his firm failed in 1873, pre-
cipitating the panic and depression which ended the
postwar boom. In this business biography, exten-
sively documented from Cooke's voluminous manu-
scripts and other contemporary sources, Dr. Larson
ranks the "Tycoon," as his partners called him, as
an outstanding leader in the history of American
business. "He was the first in America to stand out
dramatically and efficiendy as an active investment
banker operating on a large scale . . . Though
he himself failed, those who later followed his gen-
eral strategy succeeded."
5989. Lewis, Cleona. The United States and
foreign investment problems. Washington,
Brookings Institution, 1948. xviii, 359 p. maps.
48-4989 HG4538.L45
This investigation of the outlook for American
private investment abroad was written by a Brook-
ings Institution specialist in 1948, the year that saw
the inception of the Marshall Plan, and published
just as the Truman Plan (Point Four Program) was
announced. Dr. Lewis' standard work, America's
Staf^e in International Investments (Washington,
Brookings Institution, 1938. 710 p. The Institute
of Economics of the Brookings Institution. Publi-
cation no. 75), is brought up to date in the present
volume, with statistical data and other information
showing the post-World War II position of the
United States as the world's principal creditor
nation. The first part explains the nature of foreign
investments and reviews America's capacity for
foreign investment, and the respective positions of
debtor and creditor countries in 1938 and in 1947.
Part 2 is on opportunities for developmental capital
abroad, obstacles to future investors from the policies
of foreign countries, and the responsibility of the
private investor. Part 3 explains the United States
Government's part in foreign investment — the war
an dpostwar lending agencies, culminating in the
European Recovery (Marshall) Plan. In her sum-
mary and conclusions Dr. Lewis states that, al-
though the government encourages export of Ameri-
can capital, private investment cannot compete
with government loans and grants. Since the pub-
lication of this work official policy has turned in-
creasingly toward the stimulation of private invest-
ment abroad, particularly in the underdeveloped
areas. A series of useful handbooks of "basic in-
formation for United States businessmen" has been
in course of publication by the U. S. Bureau of
Foreign Commerce since 1953, of which the 17th is
Investment in Nigeria (Washington, 1957. 182 p.).
5990. Mowbray, Albert H., and Ralph H. Blan-
chard. Insurance, its theory and practice in
the United States. 4th ed. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1955. 569 p. illus. (McGraw-Hill insurance
series) 54-12254 HG8051.M75 1955
5991. Stalson, J. Owen. Marketing life insurance;
its history in America. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1942. xl, 911 p. illus. (Harvard
studies in business history, 6)
A42-939 HG8876.S73
"Notes and references": p. [6491-714.
5992. James, Marquis. The Metropolitan Life, a
study in business growth. New York,
Viking Press, 1947. 480 p. illus.
47-30046 HG8963.M52J3
Bibliography: p. 457-464.
These three books represent three distinct ap-
proaches to the subject of insurance. The first has
been a standard college text since 1930, and is now
revised after the death of Professor Mowbray by the
editor of the McGraw-Hill insurance scries. It
covers all branches of insurance, beginning with a
discussion of the theory of risk, insurance, and
930 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
prevention, and explaining in detail the various
types of insurance contracts, the kinds of insurance
companies, their market, premium rates, and other
financial and organizational arrangements, together
with the elements of governmental supervision and
the question of risk management. Dr. Stalson's
thick volume is a scholarly history of the life insur-
ance business in America, in detail from the "revolu-
tion of 1843" which introduced mutuality (the
policyholders are the shareholders) and led to a
vastly expanded volume of business. It emphasizes
the roles of the soliciting agents and the general
agents (wholesalers), and their evolving relation-
ships to the home offices. Like the rest of this
Harvard business history series, it includes impor-
tant appendixes of statistical and other tabulated
data. The third book, by a Pulitzer prize-winning
biographer recently deceased, is more lively writing,
geared to a general audience. It sketches briefly the
origins of the insurance business, reaching after two
chapters the foundation of the Metropolitan Life
Insurance Company in 1868. The rest of the narra-
tive tells of the rise, development, and organization
of the great company, its relations with other insur-
ance firms and with government investigators and
legislation, its trusteeship methods, and its influence
on the economic and social welfare of the country.
5993. The New York money market. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1931-32. 4 v.
illus. 31-32268 HG184.N5N4
Bibliography at end of each volume.
A series of studies produced under the auspices of
the Columbia University Council for Research in
the Social Sciences. The scope is broad, the term
money market being defined to include "all the
funds available for productive, commercial, or specu-
lative purposes, as well as the mechanism by which
these funds are gathered together from holders not
immediately requiring their use, and redistributed
in answer to the needs of various classes of bor-
rowers." It comprises the call loan market (the
salient feature), the commercial paper market, the
investment market, and relationships with the banks
and the Treasury. The first volume, prepared as a
thesis, is by Margaret G. Myers: Origins and De'
velopment. This is a historical study divided into
two distinct periods, from before 1800 to the Na-
tional Bank Act of 1863, and from 1863 to the
passage of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913. Within
these periods the treatment is topical: e. g., "The
Origin of the Investment Market," "The Govern-
ment and the Money Market before 1863," "The
Commercial Credit System from 1863 to 1913."
The three other volumes deal with aspects of the
money market from 1913 to 1932. Volume 2,
Sources and Movements of Funds, contains a dis-
cussion of "The Basis of Money Market Funds," by
Benjamin Haggott Beckhart, and one of "The Ebb
and Flow of Money Market Funds," by James G.
Smith. Volume 3, by Mr. Beckhart, is Uses of
Funds, covering bankers' loans, the commercial
paper market, and the acceptance market. The last
volume, External and Internal Relations, contains
contributions by Mr. Beckhart on "Federal Reserve
Policy and the Money Market, 1923-1931," by
William Adams Brown, Jr., on "The Government
and the Money Market," and by James G. Smith on
"Money Market Periodicities and Interrelationships."
Although obviously meant for a specialized audi-
ence, this thoroughly documented work is notably
clear and readable.
5994. Pickett, Ralph R., and Marshall D. Ketchum.
Investment principles and policy. New
York, Harper, 1954. 820 p.
53-11678 HG4521.P5
This textbook, focused on the problems of the
individual investor, is not for the beginner in the
financial field; the authors assume that "the student
has knowledge of the basic principles of economics,
accounting, and corporation finance." There are
three parts; the first, "The Background of Invest-
ment," includes a discussion of the management of
savings, a review of the chief aspects of corporate
financing, and general considerations on the selec-
tion and analysis of investments. Part 2 describes
fully the individual "Instruments of Finance" —
life and other types of insurance, securities of Fed-
eral, local, and foreign governments, real estate in-
vestments, and common-stock investment in the
securities of various kinds of enterprise: manufac-
turing, merchandising, mines, railroads, public
utilities, etc. The last part, "Investment Policy,"
explains the mechanics of investing, the regulation
of securities, and factors to be considered such as
political risks, taxation, and general business condi-
tions. The final chapter is direct advice to the in-
vestor concerning his over-all program. Each
chapter is followed by a short list of selected
readings.
5995. Smith, Darrell Hevenor. The General Ac-
counting Office, its history, activities and
organization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press,
1927. 215 p. (Institute for Government Research.
Service monographs of the United States Govern-
ment, no. 46) 27-23158 HJ9802.S6
Bibliography: p. 196-205.
5996. Mansfield, Harvey C. The Comptroller
General; a study in the law and practice of
financial administration. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1939. 302 p. 39-8570 HJ9802.M3
ECONOMIC LIFE / 93 1
5997. U. S. Congress. House. Committee on Gov-
ernment Operations. The General Account-
ing Office; a study of its organization and adminis-
tration with recommendations for increasing its
effectiveness; seventeenth intermediate report.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1956. 133 p.
diagrs. (84th Cong., 2d sess. House report no.
2264) 56-61520 HJ9802.A522 1956
"The General Accounting Office, according to the
Budget and Accounting Act of 1921, is an inde-
pendent establishment of the United States Govern-
ment with auditing, quasi-judicial, investigating,
and other duties." So begins Mr. Smith's history
and description of the activities and organization of
this Federal service. The General Accounting Of-
fice comes under the legislative branch, and reports
to Congress its findings as to financial conditions of
government agencies. The Comptroller General is
appointed for a term of 15 years, probably in agree-
ment with the dictum of Fisher Ames in the debate
upon the Treasury Department Act of 1789: "The
science of accounts is at best but an abstruse and dry
study; it is scarcely to be understood but by an un-
wearied assiduity for a long time." Mr. Mansfield
quotes this sentence as a motto for his analysis and
appraisal of the General Accounting Office. His
book was written shortly after the term of the first
Comptroller General had ended (in 1936, when the
retiring official shook the dust of the place from his
feet, emitting to the press blasts against New Deal
fiscal policy). The author is highly critical of the
administration of the office, suggesting that the
Comptroller General has functioned, not as the
independent critic of and useful check on the exec-
utive use of public funds that he was intended to be,
but as a "petty tyrant." During the depression and
World War II the use of government corporations
for many types of enterprise was greatly expanded,
most of them operating on budgets and programs
not subject to congressional approval and with ex-
penditures which were not audited by the General
Accounting Office. In 1945 two pieces of legisla-
tion, the George Act and the Government Corpora-
tion Control Act, brought the corporations under
uniform controls, which included provision for
auditing and reports by the General Accounting
Office. Legislation in 1946, 1949, and 1950 has
further affected the development of the Office. Its
present status is succincdy explained in die 1956
Report of the House Committee on Government
Operations, The General Accounting Office.
5998. Smith, James G. The development of trust
companies in the United States. New York,
Holt, 1928. xxi, 613 p. (American business series)
28-5049 HG4352.S6 1928
The corporate fiduciary or trust company in
America had its phenomenal development in the
wake of the huge fortunes accumulated in the age of
enterprise, as an instrument for the conservation of
that wealth. In the 50 years before 1928, the num-
ber of such companies in the United States had in-
creased from 39 to 2,731. The present monograph,
prepared as a doctoral thesis at Princeton, is a sub-
stantial study analyzing the nature and functions of
trust companies, reviewing the origins of trusteeship
and the history of corporate fiduciaries in the United
States from 18 18, when "the embryo of the modern
corporate fiduciary emerged as a collateral feature
of a [Boston] life insurance company," and explain-
ing the problems of trust companies in America in
the late 1920's. To arrive at current practice and
problems, the author in 1925 sent an n-point ques-
tionnaire to 2,500 banks and trust companies, and
received 255 useful replies, upon which his analysis
is based. The author appends a long bibliography
(p. 487-563) in two parts, first a general list, and
then a list of periodical articles arranged by topics.
5999. Smith, Walter B. Economic aspects of the
Second Bank of the United States. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. 314 p.
(Studies in economic history)
52-5408 HG2525.S6
Bibliographical references included in "Notes" (p.
[2651-307).
6000. Hammond, Bray. Banks and politics in
America, from the Revolution to the Civil
War. Princeton, Princeton University Press, 1957-
771 p. 57-8667 HG247J.II3
Bibliography: p. 747-760.
"The Second Bank of the United States was
founded in 18 16 under a charter from the United
States Government and functioned under this charter
until March 3, 1836. The Treasury needed such an
institution as a depository for the revenue and as an
agency for the transfer and disbursement of its
funds." It was favored by business groups and
financiers, and opposed by agrarian interests. After
early troubles, it operated smoothly through 1829.
"The years between 1830 and 1836 were dominated
by the struggle to prolong its life by a renewal of its
Federal charter. Failing to secure this authorization
from Washington, the Bank did business under a
charter from the state of Pennsylvania from 1836 to
1841. During these last five years its career was
spectacular, and it ultimately failed early in 1841."
Dr. Smith's scholarly study relates the history of the
Second Bank to its place in the broad economic
history of the United States, subordinating the politi-
cal aspects of the spectacular contest between Nicho-
las Biddle, its leader and president, and its enemy,
President Jackson, and his followers, to the siatistic.il
analysis of American financial development through-
932 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
out the period. The Bank War of the 1830's is also
central to Mr. Hammond's impressive synthesis of
banking history with general history, for it was the
desire to interpret that war properly that embarked
him upon his protracted researches. He formulates
the essence of his book thus: "It reflects the political
and cultural force of business enterprise, which
seems to me to have been the most powerful con-
tinuing influence in American life ever since Inde-
pendence. The rival force in the early 19th century
was agrarianism, formerly dominant but no longer
so. These two fought about banks, because banks
provide credit, and credit is indispensable to enter-
prise." Notwithstanding this broad oudook, Mr.
Hammond is well aware that his book's value is
strictly dependent upon his mastery of all the tech-
nical aspects of early banking, and this it abundantly
displays. He brings multiple and cumulative evi-
dence for his conclusion that "the Jacksonian revo-
lution" was in fact the conquest of the economy by
a group of self-made men born on farms, whose
"skill in propaganda, in cant, and in demagogy"
employed the agrarian ideology to accomplish aims
the opposite of agrarian. "From possession of what
was generally considered the best monetary system
in the world, the country fell back into one of the
most disordered." It was rich and expansive enough
to bear the consequences.
6001. Smithies, Arthur. The budgetary process in
the United States. New York, McGraw-
Hill, 1955. xxi, 486 p. (Committee for Economic
Development. Research study)
54-11767 HJ2051.S58
In 1929 Federal expenditures were slightly less
than $3 billion, but in the fiscal year 1954 the United
States Government spent $68 billion. The budgetary
techniques, however, had evolved from earlier pro-
cedures with little change to fit the transformed
economy. The present work prepared for the Com-
mittee for Economic Development is a comprehen-
sive survey of the budgetary process with specific
proposals for its improvement. The author, now a
professor at Harvard, served as chief of the economic
branch of the Bureau of the Budget from 1943 to
1948. His basic presupposition, he says, is "that
government decision-making can be improved by
the clear formulation of alternatives — regardless of
the extent to which the final decisions are influenced
by bargains between the President and the Congress,
the influence of organized groups, or the pressure of
local and regional interests." He examines the proc-
ess in detail, reviewing its historical development
(including the reforms recommended by the Hoover
Commission in 1949-50) and the budget in opera-
tion, as prepared by the President, considered by
Congress, and executed and reviewed by both the
legislative and executive branches. He then sets
forth general proposals for reform. The second half
of the study deals with specific areas of the budget,
defense and nondefense programs, and the signifi-
cance for the national economy of balancing or fail-
ing to balance. Speaking of the present process, he
considers it "not far short of miraculous that lit!
works as well as it does."
6002. Stern, Siegfried. The United States in inter-
national banking. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1951. 447 p.
51-14805 HF3031.S8
Bibliography: p. [4271-431.
During and after the First World War American
banking houses began to take over from England
"the world's purse strings," and by the end of the
Second World War the United States was securely
established as the predominant power in world
finance. The operations of international banking
are carried out mainly in a few large institutions.
The author for many years headed the foreign
departments of various New York banks, and his
work is aimed at specialists in finance. It includes a
rapid historical review of United States international
banking from 1914 to 1945; discussion of the prob-
lems of foreign credit, foreign exchange, foreign
fund control, etc., in wartime; description of govern-
ment corporations in this field (the Export-Import
Bank and such war agencies as the Defense Supplies
Corporation); and a review of silver policy during
the 1930's. The longest part, which accounts for
over half the text, is a country-by-country analysis
of the relations of American banks with the rest of
the world. Finally, the organizational aspects are
explained, and a short chapter speculates on the
oudook for the future.
K. Business: General
6003. Bright, James R. Automation and manage-
ment. Boston, Division of Research, Gradu-
ate School of Business Administration, Harvard
University, 1958. 270 p. illus.
58-5968 HD45.B67
Professor Bright has been engaged since 1954 in
research on the implications for management of the
new technological developments called automation,
insofar as they relate to factory productivity. The
first part of his book explains the nature of auto-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 933
made manufacturing, how it is coming about, and
where: it can be done profitably with electric lamps
but not with shoes. Part 2 covers the data of re-
search into the programs of 13 plants that have
adopted automation systems. Part 3 is the author's
analysis of the critical areas of automation as affect-
ing management, based essentially on the study of
these 13 plants. Here are chapters on how most
economically to manage "downtime," when the
interdependent machines for any reason stop; on
what happens to the productivity and skilled status
of the automated work force; on personnel problems;
on sales — holding up to the light in each case satis-
factory and unsatisfactory factors. Finally the
author offers a mainly optimistic "Interpretadon of
Automation, Its Effect on the Factory and Its Impact
on Management." A typical warning is that auto-
madon newly installed always needs "debugging";
the system invariably begins by breaking down.
6004. Clark, John M. Social control of business.
2d ed. New York, Whittlesey House, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1939. xvi, 537 p. (Business and eco-
nomics publications) 39-27584 HD45.C5 1939
"References for further reading" at end of each
chapter.
In the first half of this philosophic study of the
control exercised by society on the individual busi-
nessman or corporadon, Professor Clark analyzes
into their fundamentals the conceptions, growth,
and purposes of social control, and the legal aspects
of formal and informal institutions that serve as
agencies of control. The entire second half of the
first edition (1926) dealt with the particular major
field of public utilities and trusts. Eventful years
passed before the present edidon, to which the
author added a section examining the policies of the
"new era" of depression, of New Deal experimenta-
tion in state control, and of the full development of
totalitarianism abroad. His goal for the American
people is "democratic efficiency," and his preferred
method one of "democratic gradualism," in which
the social order and the individualistic man may
move together toward cooperation. "By developing
cooperative features and organizadons within our
system, we may develop cooperative impulses,
habits, and customs, and these may enable us to
develop more cooperative institutions, and so on, as
far as our inherent capacities will carry us. First
steps must be tried without waiting for human
nature to be fully ready for them, but complete
revolutions on this principle are precarious."
6005. Cochran, Thomas C. The American busi-
ness system; a historical perspecdve, 1900-
1955. Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1957.
227 p. (The Library of Congress series in American
civilization) 57-12964 HC106.C638
Professor Cochran's concentrated historical per-
spective of the 20th century falls naturally into two
eras, divided by the spectacular collapse of 1929-
30. His theme is the relation of business to so-
ciety; his treatment of it is in general terms. In
1900 American businessmen, he says, were an elite
group who believed in a self-reguladng economy
in which they could take care of themselves with-
out responsibility for the welfare of others. Tech-
nological change, especially in mass production and
transportation, has been the chief cause of a shift
in industrial management from owner to profes-
sional executive, whose broader oudook involves
social accountability. The collapse of the age of
industrial control by giant corporations and of fi-
nancial control by big investment houses was fol-
lowed by the fundamental revisions of the 1930's.
"Political and social innovations, fathered by depres-
sion, were passed on to a period of war and pros-
perity where they took on new meanings and gave
a new form to American society." The spread of
bureaucracy in both government and business has
proceeded hand in hand with managerial enter-
prise; public relations have become a primary con-
cern; it is accepted that governmental controls must
stabilize the economy. With an ever-rising stand-
ard of living the social prestige of great wealth has
declined, and the big businessman is hardly dis-
tinguishable from the average American.
6006. Dimock, Marshall E. Business and govern-
ment. 3d ed. New York, Holt, 1957.
559 p. illus. 57-5696 HD3616.U47D5 1957
Professor Dimock, who has held a variety of
Federal administrative positions of consequence,
now heads the graduate department of government
at New York University. His widely used text-
book, originally issued in 1949, has followed an
opposite course to that normally taken by the suc-
cessful college manual in our day: successive edi-
tions have become smaller instead of larger. In this
third edition he has made a special effort "to convey
an insight into the inner workings of govern-
ment because students of economics and business
administration have little time in their formal edu-
cation to acquire this kind of knowledge, and yet
it stands them in good stead once they graduate into
the world of practical economic affairs." This edi-
tion stresses public policy formation, institutions,
and pressure groups more than did its predecessors,
but the policy areas dealt with remain the same:
"pressure groups and big government; the inde-
pendent enterprise system and concentrated eco-
nomic power; organized labor and industrial dis-
putes; agricultural policy, which also includes the
934 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
cooperative movement and the conservation of nat-
ural resources; the cold war, tariff policy, technical
assistance, and the international and domestic as-
pects of atomic energy; public-utility regulation and
public ownership and operation; the public control
of banking, investment, and insurance; general
methods of coping with depressions," etc.
6007. Gras, Norman S. B., and Henrietta M. Lar-
son. Casebook in American business his-
tory. New York, Crofts, 1939. 765 p.
39-31004 HF1118.G7
In his courses at the Harvard Graduate School
of Business Administration Professor Gras regu-
larly used the case method for instruction. This
volume illustrates American business history
through 38 cases of individual businessmen or com-
panies, presented in analytical narrative and in ex-
cerpts from letters, records, and other primary
sources. The cases are American, with only five
exceptions; these include the first, Sir Thomas
Smythe (i558(?)-i625) and the Virginia Company,
and the last, the Hugo Stinnes Konzern which was
liquidated in Germany in 1925-26. In between
are some of the most famous names of men, firms,
banking houses, speculations, etc., in the American
economic scene from early Colonial days to 1938.
Each case is developed at considerable length, with
additional pieces of information crammed into long
footnotes. The cases are put in three groups, dis-
tinguished as mercantile capitalism (ending with
J. J. Astor in 1848), industrial capitalism, and fi-
nance capitalism and combination in business. The
last hundred pages analyze business trends, with
chronological periods as "cases," showing the rise
of specialization and the tendency toward combina-
tion in periods of varying price movements. A
varying number of references are appended to each
case.
6008. Owens, Richard N. Business organization
and combination. 4th ed. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 195 1. 562 p.
51-5302 HD2741.O85 1951
An exposition of the various forms of noncor-
porate and corporate business enterprise. The for-
mer include the single proprietorship, the partner-
ship, the joint-stock company, and the business
trust, which are described in clear and easily under-
standable terms. Regarding corporations, Profes-
sor Owens gives their historical background and
then discusses the theory of legal entity, the char-
ter, the kinds and uses of stocks and bonds, the legal
regulation of issue and sale of securities, the role
of directors, and procedures in corporate dissolu-
tion and reorganization. A special section explains
the investment company, which may be a joint-stock
company, a business trust, or a corporation. A long
part on industrial combinations considers trade as-
sociations, gendemen's agreements, pools, cartels,
consolidated companies and holding companies,
leased companies, cooperatives, and the general eco-
nomic significance of combination. A final part is
on government regulation, with some background
from the common law preceding a review of state
and federal antitrust legislation. There are short
reading lists at the end of chapters. A somewhat
different approach to his subject matter is used by
Professor Owens in a more recent book, Introduction
to Business Policy (Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin,
1954. 474 p.). He is concerned here with theo-
retical and practical aspects of business policies and
objectives — their meaning and significance, their
formulation and administration, the organizational
roles of stockholders and directors, and policies gov-
erning production, sales, public relations, and
finance.
6009. Petersen, Elmore, and Edward Grosvenor
Plowman. Business organization and man-
agement. 3d ed. Homewood, 111., R. D. Irwin,
1953. 634 p. illus. 53-2866 HF5351.P48 1953
"A definitive treatment of the principles of or-
ganization and management that are the energiz-
ing elements of all types of business, large or small,
and wherever managerial leadership is required."
The authors, who both write from long experience
as business executives, explain management as con-
sisting essentially of directives and controls, with
its various levels of authority — directors' level, ex-
ecutive level, supervisory level — being determined
by the factor of efficiency in control. Departmen-
tation and functionalization, to which chapters are
devoted, are not such formidable concepts as the
terms suggest; they lead direcdy to organization
charts, with which the text is well provided. Man-
agerial responsibilities are scrutinized in the realms
of centralization, decentralization, communication,
efficiency, and incentive. The last chapter is direct
advice to the student preparing for a career in man-
agement.
6010. Sutton, Francis X., and others. The Amer-
ican business creed, [by] Francis X. Sutton,
Seymour E. Harris, Carl Kaysen, [and] James
Tobin. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1956. 414 p. 56-8553 HC106.S88
In this study a sociologist, Mr. Sutton, has collab-
orated with three economists to examine the ide-
ology of American business as expressed by its
spokesmen. The content of the "creed" is ex-
pounded in the first 12 chapters according to its
chief themes — the American system of business en-
terprise, the functions of ownership, the relations
of businessmen with labor and with customers, the
relations of government with business, the value
of competition, business cycles, money, and the
values of a good society. The illustrations are quo-
tations or digests of public statements of business
leaders in speeches, writings, and testimony before
congressional committees, and examples from ad-
vertising and the literature of business associations.
In comparison with the normal tenets of modern
social science, the creed is revealed as essentially
conservative, individualistic, and moralistic. In the
last six chapters the authors seek to show that this
ECONOMIC LIFE / 935
business ideology is determined largely by "deep-
lying motivational forces." They suggest that it
is less real belief than symbolical expression, in-
tended to resolve the strains inherent in American
business institutions and the tensions of the business
executive, in conflict with other demands of society.
But, they point out, "the rigidity of the business
creed should not be exaggerated. American busi-
ness now gives at least de jacto acceptance to a mul-
titude of laws and practices which it earlier opposed
as dangerous to the commonwealth or morally re-
pugnant."
L. Business: Special
601 1. Berle, Adolf A. The modern corporation
and private property, by Adolf A. Berle, Jr.,
and Gardiner C. Means. New York, Macmillan,
1937. 396 p. diagrs.
38-1 1 139 HD2795.B53 1937
In 1932, at the darkest point of the Great Depres-
sion, this epoch-making book appeared. Its authors,
both to become prominent in the "Brain Trust" of
the New Deal, were respectively a finance lawyer
and professor of corporation law at Columbia Law
School, and a practicing and research economist.
Based on a series of technical and statistical studies
of corporation development and finance, the book
presented their conclusions concerning the "unrec-
ognized" but "far advanced" "corporate revolu-
tion" through which, the writers believed, America
was passing. Their first table lists, with their
gross assets, the 200 largest nonbanking corpora-
tions in the United States, which "form the very
framework of American industry." "The transla-
tion of perhaps two-thirds of the industrial wealth
of the country from individual ownership to owner-
ship by the large, publicly financed corporations
vitally changes the lives of property owners, the lives
of workers, and the methods of property tenure.
The divorce of ownership from control consequent
on the process almost necessarily involves a new
form cf economic organization of society." The
evolution and legal position of the corporate system
in which economic power is now concentrated .ire
studied, and the virtues and dangers of the system
examined. The dangers, in the authors' view, lay
in the corporations' lack of legal responsibility,
which permitted them to turn aside all efforts at
Federal regulation, and even to attempt to dominate
the national government. The influence of this
study was evident in the Temporary National Eco-
nomic Committee's hearings during 1938-40, and
in the antitrust actions of Thurman Arnold, Assist-
ant Attorney General during 1938-43; and its views
have entered into the substance of practically all
later discussions in its field.
6012. Berle, Adolf A. The 20th century capitalist
revolution. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1954. 192 p. 54-11327 HD2731.B4
In 1954 Professor Berle expanded a lecture series
on the corporation as a quasi-political institution into
this thought-provoking book. He joins several other
recent appraisers (for instance, Galbraith, no. 5886,
and Lilienthal, no. 5892) in suggesting that the
modern corporation is beneficial to society. The old
checks of free competition and "the judgment of the
market place" (the influence of investors) have
been replaced by the force of public opinion and by
the competition among the giants of the "oligopoly"
to give the best service to their "constituency," a pub-
lic which must be kept satisfied. Otherwise, na-
tionalization! "The real guarantee of nonstatist in-
dustrial organization in America is a substantially
satisfied public." The writer compares the unwrit-
ten but developing laws of the corporation for the
protection of individual rights (as in cases of se-
curity hearings) to the medieval institution cf the
Curia regis, the King's Court, through which the
kinjr redressed grievances according to his con-
science. He shows the corporation to be a powerful
instrument in international affairs, where hope may
be brighter for economic than for political agree-
ment. In conclusion he describes the social role
of the corporation, which through huge planned ex-
penditures for public welfare, education, and com-
munity development, may be shaping the "City of
God" of the future. One of the first economics,
after World War II, to voice the idea that big busi-
ness was not a force for evil in social and politic.il
93^ /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
life was Peter F. Drucker, whose much-quoted
Concept of the Corporation (New York, John Day,
1946. 297 p.) was written after 18 months' experi-
ence as an outside consultant on management to
General Motors.
6013. Bonbright, James C, and Gardiner C.
Means. The holding company, its public
significance and its regulation. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1932. 398 p. diagrs.
32-8783 HD2795.B65
A study of a special aspect of the problem of com-
bination in business, which appeared a few months
before Mr. Means' more far-reaching work in collab-
oration with Professor Berle (no. 601 1). Particu-
larly during the 1920's, the public utility enterprises
of the nation had been largely centralized through
a few great holding company systems — for in-
stance, in gas and electricity, the United Corpora-
tion Group, the Electric Bond and Share Group,
and the Insull Utility Group — which were power-
ful enough to evade or disregard laws for their con-
trol by public service commissions. The authors
examined the theory of the holding company and
its status as an alternative to other forms of com-
bination. Then they scrutinized the record of the
public utility holding companies, the railroad hold-
ing companies (the Van Sweringen system was at
that time particularly in the public eye), and the
bank holding companies. In their final evaluation
they suggested that the holding company system is
popular with business promoters, first, in that it is
the most facile of all the possible legal devices for
combining independent enterprises, and second, that
it is the least subject to social control. The latter
aspect they considered a danger justifying "grave
public concern and criticism."
6014. Davis, Joseph StanclifTe. Essays in the
earlier history of American corporations.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1917. 2 v.
diagrs. (Harvard economic studies, v. 16)
17-12885 HD2785.D3
6015. Evans, George Heberton. Business incor-
porations in the United States, 1 800-1 943.
[New York] National Bureau of Economic Re-
search, 1948. 184 p. illus. (Publications of the
National Bureau of Economic Research, no. 49)
48-10514 HD2785.E85
Dr. Davis' four long historical essays on corpora-
dons in 18th-century America have attained the
rank of a classic in business history. Three are in
the first volume: "Corporations in the American
Colonies," "William Duer, Entrepreneur," and
"The 'S. U. M.': the First New Jersey Business Cor-
poration." All are interesting narratives, with his-
torical fact interpreted in its legal, economic, and
social significance. The writer first describes the
several types of public and private corporations char-
tered either by the British government or, the great
majority, by the Colonial governments: they were
boroughs, towns, local administrative boards, col-
leges, churches, library companies, marine societies,
etc. The essay on William Duer (1742-1799), the
New York patriot, financier, and land speculator,
who was prime mover in the abortive Scioto land
enterprise and whose failure and arrest for debt
initiated the panic of 1792, studies "a typical bull
operator in a boom period," one besides of doubtful
morality whose career ended in deserved disaster.
The S. U. M. was the Society for Establishing Use-
ful Manufactures, incorporated by the New Jersey
Legislature in 1791, promoted by Alexander Hamil-
ton, raison d'etre of the town of Paterson, and still
in existence at the time of writing. In volume 2
the fourth and longest essay, "Eighteenth Century
Business Corporations in the United States," de-
scribes banking companies, corporations for improv-
ing communications, for insurance, water supply,
manufacturing, and other matters. The list of
charters is given in an appendix. The published
and unpublished sources for the four essays fill a
50-page bibliography. A very different approach
to the subject is made in Professor Evans' study.
Nine chapters of running analysis are accompanied
by 44 tables and 26 charts compiled by the National
Bureau of Economic Research. The first chapters
explain the nature of the study, of particular inter-
est for its implications as to business cycles, and the
significance of an incorporadon. During the first
three quarters of the 19th century most incorpora-
tions were effected by special charter; they have a
chapter to themselves. Next trends in business in-
corporations from 1875 to 1943 are examined, fol-
lowed by statistical tabulations: the number of in-
corporations and their authorized capital stock;
large, medium, and small business corporations;
and an industrial classification. The last two chap-
ters examine the fields of corporate enterprise and
the relationship of the number of incorporations to
business cycles. Further statistics of incorporations
by separate States, periods, etc., are set forth in 90
pages of appendixes.
6016. East, Robert A. Business enterprise in the
American revolutionary era. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1938. 387 p. (Colum-
bia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
439) 39-2808 HC105.E24 1938a
H3i.C7,no.439
Bibliography: p. 330-356.
A history of business undertakings in America
ECONOMIC LIFE
/ 937
from 1775 to 1792, in the preparation of which the
author used an overwhelming array of material,
published and unpublished — public records, family
papers, business papers, letters, diaries, memoirs,
travels, biographies, local histories, and specialized
historical studies. His special interest lies in the
transition from the individual mercantile enterprise
of the late Colonial period to the beginnings of
industrial capitalism. The change was evidenced
most clearly in new mechanisms and opportunities
for investment: joint-stock companies, factory proj-
ects for textile manufactures, companies for land
speculation, communication projects, the new com-
mercial banks of the 1780's, and the like, which
were superseding the earlier partnerships or per-
sonally supervised investments. Much of the study
concentrates upon the individual promoters who
grasped the opportunities offered by the new eco-
nomic forces of the Revolution, and prepared the
way for a more developed capitalist system. Note-
worthy among the many whose transactions the
author records are the Connecticut trader and Com-
missary General of the Continental forces, Jere-
miah Wadsworth, and the Philadelphia merchant
and financier, Robert Morris.
6017. Haynes, Benjamin R., and Harry P. Jack-
son. A history of business education in the
United States. Cincinnati, Southwestern Pub. Co.,
IQ35- 159 P- 35-2923 HF1131.H3
On cover: Monograph 25.
A clearly written and organized outline which
draws upon a considerable number of monographs,
articles, and other secondary works for its facts.
The private business school or "commercial col-
lege" sprang up in our Eastern cities during the
second quarter of the 19th century; it is "peculiarly
American; nothing exactly like it is known in other
countries." It enjoyed a practical monopoly of
business education for decades, but from about 1890,
after some 15 years of tentative beginnings, the
public high schools moved into the field in a vigo-
rous manner, and were soon offering a wide variety
of courses designed to train young people for a
business career. Several cities established high
schools of commerce, with their whole curriculum
focused upon efficient business training: the first was
opened at Washington, D. C, in 1890, and enrolled
160 boys and 150 girls for its first year. The first
venture at the college level was the Wharton School
of Finance and Commerce at the University of
Pennsylvania, founded in 1881; it had no imitators
until 1898. The authors follow the spread of com-
mercial training in junior high schools, corre-
spondence schools, denominational schools, and
other variedes, in a regularly concise and instruc-
tive manner.
6018. Holden, Paul E., Lounsbury S. Fish, and
Hubert L. Smith. Top management or-
ganization and control. Stanford University, Calif.,
Stanford University Press, 194 1. xvii, 239 p.
diagrs. ([Stanford business series])
41-5421 HD31.H6
6019. National Institute for Commercial and
Trade Organization Executives. Trade as-
sociation management; textbook for trade associa-
tion management curriculum. Editor: Delbert J.
Duncan; assistant editors: Paul H. Sullivan [and]
Minita Westcott. Rev. ed. [Chicago] 1948. 190
p. 48-4488 HD2421.N25 1948
The subtitle of the first work explains its nature:
"a research study of the management policies and
practices of thirty-one leading industrial corpora-
tions, conducted under the auspices of the Gradu-
ate School of Business, Stanford University." The
arrangement reverses the work of research; the last
section is provided by the data sheet used in the
field interviews on which the study was based, while
the book begins with a succinct summary and con-
clusions regarding the findings. These have been
collated in a general treatment without reference to
individual companies. The long central sections
explain organization practices concerning top man-
agement, operations, staff, and committees; all
phases of control practices; and the functions, com-
position, organization and procedure of the board
of directors. A textbook for executives in a more
specialized field is Trade Association Management.
This ready reference guide has 7 parts, the first 4
giving the history, objectives, and policies of trade
associations and analyzing their membership and
(in the longest section of 14 chapters) their activities
and services. The last 3 parts contain advice for
management concerning operadng problems, finan-
cial budgeting and control, and the qualifications of
the executive. The 21 chapters are by as many
"leading association executives."
6020. Kaplan, Abraham D. H. Big enterprise in
a competitive system. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution, 1954. 269 p.
54-4577 HC106.5.K36
6021. Kaplan, Abraham D. H. Small business:
its place and problems. New York, Mc-
Graw-Hill, 1948. xiv, 281 p. diagrs. (Commit-
tee for Economic Development. Research study)
48-10456 HC106.K27
The first entry grew out of an investigation con-
ducted by Brookings Institution with the aim of
clarifying the role of big business in the American
system and helping to establish a rational basis for
public policy in this area. Big business is supported
93§ / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
in practice by the public, but at the same time excites
constant suspicion lest it may bring about a break-
down of the competitive system. Dr. Kaplan re-
views lucidly the development of public opinion and
policy in this regard, and the factors underlying the
concept of competitive enterprise. He sums up sta-
tistical evidence as to concentration of industry in
production, markets, and financial power, taking a
particular look at the performance of the hundred
largest industrial corporations. Then he analyzes
the performance of the big corporations in relation
to competition. In his summary and conclusions
he states forthrightly that "the business of the Amer-
ican industrial giant is still primarily that of a
competitor producing and distributing for the mar-
ket," and that, rather than stifling competition, big
business has contributed to the "scope, vitality, and
effectiveness" of the system. The same writer had
a few years earlier prepared a thorough report for
CED on Small Business. Although the statistical
data need revision, it remains useful as a reference
work for definitions, and on the patterns of small
business, its management, financing, and comped-
tive techniques. The last topics considered are edu-
cation and public policy in relation to small business.
6022. Maurer, Herrymon. Great enterprise;
growth and behavior of the big corporation.
New York, Macmillan, 1955. 303 p.
55-13880 HD2785.M37
A popular "general perspective" of the large cor-
poration, based on an examination of the behavior
of 50 large companies. The extensive checking of
the life histories of these companies was performed
by the research staff of Fortune, in which parts of
the book appeared as articles. The 50 firms are
listed on pages 18-19, w^tn statistics for the year
1953: total assets almost $82% billion; total earn-
ings almost $4 billion; close to 4 million employees.
Mr. Maurer describes "The Look of the Large Cor-
poration," traces the history of early enterprise, ex-
amines the activities of the "corporate center," and
explains corporate organizadon and management.
He concludes with a chapter on the relation of the
corporation to society, emphasizing the basic need
of the big business enterprise to understand and
explain itself "in such a way that the public under-
stands that [its] social responsibilities and economic
activities . . . are so inextricably intermingled as
to amount to the same thing."
6023. Miller, William, ed. Men in business; es-
says in the history of entrepreneurship.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952. 350 p.
52-5037 HF3023.A2M5
A set of readable and well-documented essays,
published under the auspices of the Research Center
in Entrepreneurial History at Harvard University.
The 1 1 writers are young economists and historians
whose work reflects recent theories of psychology
and sociology as well as of the Schumpeter school
of economics. The first three are on entrepreneur-
ship abroad. The others, in roughly chronological
order, study selected American promoters and fam-
ily or elite groups engaged in new forms of business
enterprise from the time of the Revolution. The
emphasis throughout is on the personality and social
standing of individuals, and their impact upon the
political, social, and economic affairs of their day.
Among those treated are the Lowell-Higginson-
Cabot, Brown, and other family groupings that
dominated the beginnings of Massachusetts indus-
try; John Stevens of Hoboken and of the first steam-
boats; Henry Noble Day, the militant Christian rail-
road promoter of the new Middle West; Frank
Julian Sprague, the "father of electric traction"; and
Henry Varnum Poor, "philosopher of manage-
ment," whose railroad manuals introduced an in-
formation service for investment. In the last essay
Mr. Miller looks at the 20th-century change from
"individualistic, innovative, venturesome" entre-
preneurship to an orderly and restrained "Business
Elite in Business Bureaucracies."
6024. Porter, Kenneth Wiggins. John Jacob
Astor, business man. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1931. 2 v. illus. (Harvard
studies in business history, 1)
31-28561 CT275.A85P6
"Bibliographical note": v. 2, p. [i299J-i305.
John Jacob Astor (1 763-1 848), whose career ex-
emplifies the double transidon from petty trader
to mercantile capitalist to industrial entrepreneur,
has long served as archetype of the self-made man
of business in America, the land of boundless oppor-
tunity. He arrived by steerage from Germany via
England in 1784, with a stock in trade of seven
flutes. A shipboard acquaintance led him into the
fur trade; he soon established himself as a leading
fur merchant trading to Europe, and by constant
new ventures, hard work, and hard bargaining built
up a huge fortune. In 1800 he ventured a cargo to
China, and as the China trade prospered used his
capital to organize the American Fur Company and
the Pacific Fur Company, intended to monopolize
the fur trade of the Far West. The latter and its
central depot of Astoria on the Columbia River
were casualties of the War of 1812, but the war
brought other opportunities of large profit. His
fortune of at least $20 million, the greatest of his
era in the United States, came in large part from
his real estate investments in New York City. Dr.
Porter's rounded narrative of Astor's life is a solidly
based business biography, for which he had access
to voluminous collections of primary sources. Each
volume includes an extended section of "Docu-
ments," reproducing letters, agreements, contracts,
and other business papers. Further light on Astor's
Pacific venture is afforded by Washington Irving's
Astoria (no. 391).
6025. Silberling, Norman J. The dynamics of
business; an analysis of trends, cycles, and
time relationships in American economic activity
since 1700 and their bearing upon governmental
and business policy. New York, McGraw-Hill,
I943- 759 P- diagrs. 43-6816 HB3711.S48
This work, posthumously published, was by a
professor of business research who had also headed
his own research corporation. It is a study in
measurement, analyzing long-term trends of the
American economy through quantitative data,
mostly as represented in index numbers. With
mathematical formulae and graphic charts, in a
style difficult for nonspecialist readers, the writer
has studied trends of population growth, production
and trade, price levels, national and farm income,
building and real estate, transportation, banking,
international monetary policy, interest rates and
stocks, corporate earnings and capital investment,
consumer income, wage income, and business fore-
casting. In a final chapter on "The Future of Pro-
duction and Capital" he expresses anti-Keynesian
views, declaring that programs of public works, etc.,
express a "philosophy of stagnation" with a "corol-
lary of bureaucratic capitalism."
6026. Stocking, George W., and Myron W. Wat-
kins. Monopoly and free enterprise. With
the report and recommendations of the Committee
on Cartels and Monopoly. New York, Twentieth
Century Fund, 195 1. xv, 596 p.
51-9279 HD2731.S765
The final product of a major investigation of the
problems of international cartels and domestic mo-
nopoly undertaken by the Twentieth Century Fund
in 1944. The research was directed by Professors
Stocking and Watkins, both specialists in industrial
economics. Two volumes of the same authorship
and publisher preceded this, Cartels in Action (1946.
533 P-)» a case history of international cartels in
eight important fields, and Cartels or Competition?
(1948. 516 p.), which appraised the international
cartel movement in terms of its effect on the eco-
nomic life of the United States. The present work
embodies a well-organized review of the theory, his-
tory, and experience of industrial concentration in
America, of oligopolistic competition in practice,
of antitrust legislation, of government regulation of
trade, and of the policies of big business. For this it
makes use of many scholarly studies of the two
ECONOMIC LIFE / 939
previous decades as well as of the findings of TXEC
and other congressional investigating committees,
and of Supreme Court decisions. Its argument is
a notable assertion of the doctrine that the economic
goal of a democratic society is a competitive private
enterprise system, genuinely free alike from bureau-
cratic and from monopolistic control. The appended
program of the Fund Committee calls for vigorous
enforcement of the antitrust laws.
6027. Taussig, Frank W., and Carl S. Joslyn.
American business leaders; a study in social
origins and social stratification. New York, Mac-
millan, 1932. xiv, 319 p. 32-25438 HF5353.T3
6028. Newcomer, Mabel. The big business execu-
tive; the factors that made him, 1900-1950.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1955. 164
P- ihus. 55-10287 HF5500.N37
6029. Warner, William Lloyd, and James C. Abeg-
glen. Big business leaders in America.
New York, Harper, 1955. 243 p. illus.
55-8545 HF5500.W25
In the first-named, long-standard work a noted
Flarvard economist collaborated with a colleague
in the department of sociology. Their data were
assembled from over 7,000 answers to a question-
naire returned by individual business leaders se-
lected from Poor's Register of Directors for 1928.
The respondents are classified as to business status,
geographic distribution, type of business, size of
business, and age and time factors. Their occupa-
tional origins for two generations back are examined
in comparison with studies of social mobility made
by Professor Pitirim Sorokin and others. Environ-
mental conditions are analyzed with regard to in-
fluential connections, financial aid, general school-
ing, and special business education. (A high
percentage is shown to have had college training,
but over 70 percent had no formal business train-
ing.) These two sets of factors are correlated with
business achievement. The authors conclude that,
although 70 percent of the business leaders come
from the business and professional classes repre-
senting only 10 percent of the American popula-
tion, the sons of laborers are handicapped by lack
of innate ability rather than of opportunity. Among
the appendixes is an interesting selection of "re-
marks" made by respondents. A later study in
this field is that of Professor Newcomer of Vassar
College. Her sample is drawn from the controlling
groups of three generations (1900, 1925, 1950)
in over 400 of the largest railroad, public utility, and
industrial corporations. The introduction explains
the purpose, scope, method, and sources of the work,
940 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and two chapters treat the nature and functions of
the board of directors of a big company. Next the
origins of the leaders are statistically analyzed as to
nationality, religion, politics, income, fathers' oc-
cupations, and family income. The education of
executives is discussed in a long chapter, and then
their early business careers and executive service
are surveyed. The last three chapters bring for-
ward evidence on incentives, on qualifications of the
executives, and on trends in the education of busi-
ness administrators. In giving reasons why leader-
ship has become professionalized, the author places
first the greater degree of education now required
for executives. Her conclusion for the future is
that standards will increasingly be set by the grad-
uate schools of business administration. In the
same year a comparable book was addressed to a
general audience by two sociologists of the Uni-
versity of Chicago, Professors Warner and Abeg-
glen. In this the statistical analysis is limited to a
few charts, and the emphasis is on personal quali-
ties. The leaders are characterized as a "birth and
mobile class," their "Royal Road: Higher Educa-
tion." Factors in successful careers, such as per-
sonalities, wives, and public activities, are examined,
and getting ahead is regarded as a calculated, cold-
blooded and dog-eat-dog process.
6030. [Thorp, Willard L., and Walter F.
Crowder] The structure of industry.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1941. xv, 759
p. ([U. S.] Temporary National Economic Com-
mittee. Investigation of concentration of economic
power. Monograph no. 27)
41-50311 FIC106.3.A5127, no. 27
At head of tide: 76th Congress, 3d session. Sen-
ate committee print.
Running title: Concentration of economic power.
This is one of the most substantial of the 40-odd
monographs prepared by economists to assist the
investigations of the TNEC into industrial concen-
tration. Dr. Thorp, Mr. Crowder, and their assist-
ants studied American industry from 1890 to 1937
with the aim of segregating trends that lead to
monopoly. In the first part general trends in the
size and scale of operations of manufacturing in-
dustries are examined. Part 2 analyzes the struc-
ture and functions of integrated manufacturing op-
erations. A short chapter summarizes the progress
of the merger movement with graphic representa-
tion. Brief notes are given on the history of concen-
tration in seven selected industries. Part 5 is on
"The Concentration of Production in Manufactur-
ing," indicating the extent and areas of concentra-
tion, leading producers, the relation of concentration
to various product characteristics, and changes in
concentration. Part 6 analyzes the product struc-
ture of the 50 largest manufacturing companies.
Each of the two last sections have long appendixes
of statistics. The presentation of the whole is quite
objective, and based on scientific techniques of eco-
nomic measurement.
M. Labor: General
6031. Barbash, Jack. The practice of unionism.
New York, Harper, 1956. 465 p.
56-9325 HD6508.B353
References, comments, and suggested readings:
p. 411-446.
6032. Hardman, Jacob B. S., and Maurice F. Neu-
feld, eds. The house of labor; internal oper-
ations of American unions. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1951. xviii, 555 p. (Prentice-Hall industrial
relations and personnel series)
51-2599 HD6508.H27
The Practice of Unionism is a survey of the prin-
ciples and working rules of the modern trade union.
General concepts are illustrated with cases of union
practice since 1933 and particularly since passage
of the Labor-Management Relations (Taft-Hardey)
Act in 1947. The incentives for joining and organ-
izing labor unions are Mr. Barbash's first considera-
tion. There follow expositions of the organization,
administration, and structure of unions; an exami-
nation of the terms and procedures in the union's
central business of collective bargaining under the
Taft-Hartley provisions; and an account of its uti-
lization of the weapons of strikes, picket lines, and
boycotts. Union efforts to influence government
and politics are explained as following a public pol-
icy of which the welfare state is "a shorthand de-
scription." The author writes severly of racketeer-
ing and communism in unions, calling them "labor
pathology." In describing the functions and serv-
ices of the group of "union technicians" to which he
himself belongs, he emphasizes that the labor spe-
cialist does not make policy. Another work by the
professional branch of the labor movement is The
House of Labor, prepared under the auspices of the
Inter-Union Institute, as the result of a cooperative
study by leading staff members of a number of na-
tional unions. Mr. Hardman was chairman of the
Institute, and Professor Neufeld is with the New
York State School of Industrial and Labor Relations
at Cornell University, where many of the "labor
technicians" receive their training. The 45 chap-
ters, to which almost 50 specialists have contributed,
are in 8 groups. First is a general appraisal of the
current state of the unions, their leaders and mem-
bership, and the labor movement as a whole. The
succeeding parts cover political activities at home
and abroad, union publicity and public relations,
research and industrial engineering, welfare, health
and community services, union administration, edu-
cational activities, and the functions and aims of the
union staff.
6033. Commons, John R., and others. History of
labour in the United States. New York,
Macmillan, 1918-35. 4 v. 18-9293 HD8066.C7
HC101.C75, no. 4
Bibliography: v. 2, p. [5391-587; v. 3, p. 701-
741; v. 4, p. 639-661.
Contents. — v. 1. Introduction, by J. R. Com-
mons. Colonial and Federal beginnings (to 1827)
by D. J. Saposs. Citizenship (1827-1833) by Helen
L. Sumner. Trade unionism (1833-1839) by E. B.
Mittelman. Humanitarianism (1 840-1 860) by H.
E. Hoagland. — v. 2. Nationalisation (1860-1877)
by J. B. Andrews. Upheaval and reorganisation
(since 1876) by Selig Perlman. — v. 3. Introduction
to volumes 3 and 4, by J. R. Commons. Working
conditions, by D. D. Lescohier. Labor legislation,
by Elizabeth Brandeis. — v. 4. Labor movements,
by Selig Perlman and Philip Taft.
The first two volumes of this classic work consti-
tuted the fourth study in the Carnegie Institution
series of Contributions to American economic his-
tory (see Clark, no. 5904; Johnson, no. 5948; Meyer,
no. 5923) and appeared in 1918 (reprinted last in
1935). Like the rest of the series, it was preceded
by the preparation and publication of various mono-
graphs and documents. Most notable was A Docu-
mentary History of American Industrial Society,
edited by Dr. Commons and associates under the
auspices of the American Bureau of Industrial Re-
search (Cleveland, A. H. Clark, 1910-11. n v.).
This compilation of records has provided basic
source material not only for the present work but
for all subsequent studies in American labor his-
tory. Volumes 3 and 4 of the History of Labour
continued the original study from 1896 to 1932, and
were prepared by colleagues and former students of
Professor Commons at the University of Wisconsin.
In his introduction this distinguished student of
industrial relations gives his own witness to changes
in labor organization: "In the course of twenty-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 94 1
five years I saw an industry evolve not only from
merchant capitalism to employer capitalism, but also
from struggles for 'proletarian dictatorship' to the
concerted regulations of constitutional government."
6034. Dulles, Foster Rhea. Labor in America, a
history. New York, Crowell, 1955. 421 p.
(The Growth of America series)
55-11009 HD8066.D8 1955
The voluminous studies of Professor Commons
and his associates have been drawn on heavily by
Professor Dulles in his history for the general reader.
In 21 fast-moving chapters he narrates the whole
story of American labor from the indentured servant
system of Colonial days to the merger of the A. F.
of L. and the C. I. O. in 1955. He traces the growth
of the national organization of labor — the precur-
sors, the National Labor Union, the Knights of La-
bor, the American Federation of Labor, the Con-
gress of Industrial Organizations — in perspective
against national socioeconomic and political develop-
ment. Before turning to the teaching of history
Mr. Dulles had been a newspaperman, and his
training is reflected in his objective and balanced
selections from the inexhaustible source material of
the modern labor unions. An introduction to trade-
union history designed for a wide audience includ-
ing school and workers' education groups is Labor
in America, by Harold U. Faulkner and Mark Starr,
new rev. ed. (New York, Oxford Book Co., 1957.
330 p.). Most of it is a simple retelling of the story
of labor from the medieval guilds to the great
unions of World War II and the postwar passage of
the Taft-Hartley Act. A chapter explains in simplest
terms the structure and functions of unions. The
last two chapters, on current union activities and
on trends and prospects of 1949-56, take into ac-
count the AFL-CIO merger.
6035. Peterson, Florence. American labor un-
ions, what they are and how they work.
Rev. ed. New York, Harper, 1952. 270 p. illus.
51-11948 HD6508.P42 1952
6036. Dankert, Clyde E. Contemporary unionism
in the United States. New York, Prentice-
Hall, 1948. xv, 521 p. diagrs. (The Prentice 1 !.i!l
industrial reladons and personnel series)
48-10478 HD65o8.D^
By a former chief of the industrial relations di-
vision of the U. S. Bureau of Labor Statistics,
American Labor Unions is a handbook of note-
worthy conciseness and clarity. The historic
growth of the labor movement is outlined i" less
than 50 pages. The structure and internal govern
ment of federated organizations (A. F. of I .., C. 1. O.,
942 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
and the railroad brotherhoods) and of national and
local unions are next explained, with precise details
as to membership rules, finances, and dues. Benefit
programs, public relations, and educational activi-
ties are given a separate section. The relations of
unions and management are discussed as regards
collective bargaining, disputes, strikes, and settle-
ments under the National Labor Relations Act, the
Taft-Hartley Act, and the mediation of Federal
agencies. The last part examines the international
relations of American trade unions. At the end
are a glossary of labor terms and a directory of un-
ions in 195 1. The same general field is covered in
greater detail in the earlier work by Professor Dan-
kert, addressed to a college or professional audi-
ence. This objective analysis includes a review of
American trade union history, and separate treat-
ments of the structure, government, principles, and
activities of the A. F. of L. and the C. I. O. The la-
bor legislation of the New Deal and the wartime
and postwar position of labor are taken into account.
The text was largely completed before the passage
of the Taft-Hartley Act in 1947, and although the
writer describes its major features, experience had
not yet revealed its full significance.
6037. Reynolds, Lloyd G. Labor economics and
labor relations. 2d ed., with revisions. En-
glewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 722 p.
illus. 56-44059 HD4901.R47 1956
This serviceable text by a Yale professor of eco-
nomics has two distinct parts. The first is a thor-
ough discussion of trade unions, their history,
growth, and philosophy, and of the processes of col-
lective bargaining, the public control of labor re-
lations, and the role of labor in politics. The new
edition covers conditions and events of 1955. The
second part is a study of "The Economics of the
Labor Market." Here the author leaves the field
of organized labor to examine the broader questions
of labor supply and the labor market, of employ-
ment and unemployment, of wages and wage de-
termination, and of minimum standards of real in-
come. Throughout he stresses public policy in
these fields. A short epilogue aims to sum up the
entire labor problem, arriving at a "balance-sheet"
of trade-unionism. It is, Dr. Reynolds decides, "a
conservative social force and becoming increasingly
so as it grows older." He is inclined to consider
that, despite many deficiencies, trade-unionism tips
the scale on the side of social usefulness. Refer-
ence may be made here to a still more recent study
of the role of trade unions in the welfare state:
John A. Fitch's Social Responsibilities of Organized
Labor (1957), mentioned above as one of Harper's
Series on ethics and economic life (no. 5899).
6038. Slichter, Sumner H. The challenge of in-
dustrial relations; trade unions, management,
and the public interest. Ithaca, N. Y., Cornell
University Press, 1947. 196 p. (The Messenger
lectures on die evolution of civilization, 1946)
47-3448 HD8072.S6165
One reviewer said that this little book, embodying
six lectures given by Professor Slichter at Cornell
University, "may be regarded, by all odds, as the
best single volume on modern industrial relations."
The author's writing on labor questions goes back
to his thesis at the University of Chicago in 191 8,
The Turnover of Factory Labor, with foreword by
John R. Commons (New York, Appleton, 19 19.
460 p). A major work, Union Policies and Indus-
trial Management (Washington, Brookings Institu-
tion, 194 1. 597 p. The Institute of Economics of
the Brookings Institution. Publication no. 85), is
a well-rounded examination of collective bargain-
ing. In the present lectures he looks at the labor
movement in general, the effect of unions on man-
agement, union wage policies, the government of
unions, the problem of industrial peace, and the
control of unions in the public interest. Central
to his discussion is his view that trade unions con-
stitute the greatest private economic power in the
community, and that their policies are a major deter-
minant of national prosperity and industrial democ-
racy.
6039. Taft, Philip. The structure and government
of labor unions. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1954. xix, 312 p. tables. (Wer-
theim Fellowship publications in industrial rela-
tions) 54-8633 HD6508.T27
A close study of the internal aspects of unions,
which begins with a survey of radicalism in Ameri-
can labor. Professor Taft takes a cross-section of
union history to show that the membership of the
unions, in spite of vigorous attempts by Communist
leaders, has always rejected radical philosophy. He
examines on the same pattern elections and com-
petition for office, dues, initiation fees, and salaries
of officers, and "does not shy away from investigat-
ing the most intimate aspect of union life, namely,
how and for what reasons unions discipline their
members" ("Foreword" by S. H. Slichter). Three
chapters are case histories of particular unions.
"The Unlicensed Seafaring Unions" have been im-
portant targets for Communist agitation and the
scene of incessant intra- and interunion battles. The
two largest unions of C. I. O., the Automobile
Workers' Union and the Steel Workers' Union, are
compared in detail. An individual case study is
made of the expanding and aggressive Teamsters'
Union (three years too early for comment on its
disciplinary expulsion from AFL-CIO). The au-
thor returns to the theme of democratic theory in
a last look at the present state of the unions: "Far
from perfect, unions fundamentally reflect the will
of their members. They not only fulfill a vital
need for the workers' representation and protection
in industry, but they are the most effective guarantee
against Communist infiltration into American
labor."
6040. Twentieth Century Fund. Employment and
wages in the United States, by Wladimir S.
Woytinsky and associates. New York, 1953.
xxxii, 777 p. 53-7170 HD8072.T8
This extensive survey presents a tremendous ar-
ray of data on American labor and its remuneration,
past and present (from before 1870 to and including
1950), which is set down statistically in tables (242
in the text, 118 in the appendix) and 86 graphs and
maps. These are embodied in a full expository text,
documented in footnotes. The whole is designed
to provide reliable source material for future studies.
The coverage is indicated in the foreword: "The
working people of the United States and their con-
ditions of labor: the size, make-up and distribution
of the labor force; the various occupations repre-
sented and the numbers of workers employed in
each; the ebb and flow of employment and unem-
ployment; the wages that American workers are
paid and how their wages are determined; their
hours of labor and other working conditions and
the regulations and controls that government has
imposed upon them; labor unions and the role they
play in the vast drama of wages and employment;
the underpinnings of insurance which have been set
up to make the worker's life more secure; and finally,
the relation of all these basic facts to the operation
of the economy as a whole."
6041. Ulman, Lloyd. The rise of the national
trade union; the development and signifi-
cance of its structure, governing institutions, and
economic policies. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1955. xix, 639 p. diagrs., tables. (Wertheim
publications in industrial relations)
56-5175 HD6508.U4
In the first five parts of this long and scholarly
monograph the writer analyzes the historical devel-
opment of the trade union movement in the late 19th
and early 20th century. By the turn of the century,
he finds, the nationally organized union had
achieved maturity as to its governing institutions,
its relationships with local unions and other labor
bodies, its strike and wage policies, and its work
rules. Among causes for nationalization he em-
phasizes the important factor of geographical mo-
ECONOMIC LIFE / 943
bility — the "traveling member" who moved to new
ground for a job — and the financial and other a>
ordinated assistance which the national organiza-
tion could provide to support local strikes. His
special research sources were the constitutions, pro-
ceedings, and journals of five national unions, the
Bricklayers', Carpenters', Printers', Molders', and
Bottle Blowers'. In his sixth part he examines the
wage and strike policies of these and other national
unions and compares them with employers' pol-
icies. In the seventh he proceeds to the theory of
labor unions, criticizing the older views of J. R.
Commons and Selig Perlman, and offering his own
hypothesis based on a profit motivation of labor
matching the individualism of American enterprise;
it is this which has produced a dynamic "business
unionism" concentrated upon collective bargaining.
6042. Yoder, Dale. Manpower economics and
labor problems. 3d ed. New York, Mc-
Craw-Hill, 1950. 661 p. illus.
50-8119 HD8072.Y6 1950
Previous editions published under title: Labor
Economics and Labor Problems.
A comprehensive work on manpower as "the
most versatile, valuable, and complicated resource
of modern societies," and on the problems arising
out of the use of this resource in our society. The
first four chapters are devoted to theoretical and
historical examination of the general theme. Then
particular aspects are studied as to practice and
policy: wages; employment and unemployment; the
labor of such special groups as women, children, the
aged, and the handicapped; and questions of status
in industry. It is only in the last third of the book
that Professor Yoder focuses his attention on or-
ganized labor. He examines American trade
unions (in 1949 amounting to approximately one-
fourth of the total labor force) in respect to the
practices, policy, and economic implications of col-
lective bargaining. Last he looks at industrial re-
lations, reviewing such devices for "maximized co-
operation" as profit sharing, employee stock owner-
ship, employee representation, and union-manage-
ment collaboration, but suggesting that the "simple
virtues" of honesty, sincerity, and integrity are more
important in establishing mutual confidence. The
author is director of the Industrial Relations Ccnur
at the University of Minnesota and a frequent con-
sultant to government agencies on manpower prob-
lems. His big textbook, Personnel Management
and Industrial Relations, 4th ed. (Englcwood ClilTs,
N. J., Prentice-Hall, 1956. 941 p.), has been a
standard work in its field since its first appearance
in 1938.
944 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
N. Labor: Special
6043. Anderson, Hobson Dewey, and Percy E.
Davidson. Occupational trends in the
United States. Stanford University, Calif., Stan-
ford University Press, 1940. 618 p. tables, diagrs.
HB2595.A6
Recent occupational trends in
American labor; a supplement. Stanford
University, Calif., Stanford University Press, 1945.
vii, 133 p. incl. tables.
40—35443 HB2595.A6 Suppl.
This useful study brings together and interprets
statistics from the decennial Census of Occupations;
the original volume and the supplement together
cover Bureau of the Census records from 1870
through 1940. After a 70-page introduction sum-
marizing general occupational trends and causal
factors, the arrangement is by major occupational
groups: agriculture, fishing and forestry, extraction
of minerals, manufacturing and mechanical indus-
tries (with 14 subgroups), transportation and com-
munications, trade, public service, professional serv-
ice, domestic and personal service, and clerical occu-
pations. The tables and charts reveal a great va-
riety of facts regarding the distribution of American
manpower over 70 years. The supplement draws
upon the Sixteenth Census of the United States:
1940. Population, v. 3. The Labor Force (Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1943. 5 pts.), and
also upon an important statistical monograph of the
Bureau of the Census prepared by Dr. Alba M.
Edwards: Sixteenth Census of the United States:
1940. Population. Comparative Occupation Sta-
tistics of the United States, 18 jo to 1940 (Washing-
ton, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1943. 206 p.).
6044. Bridenbaugh, Carl. The Colonial crafts-
man. New York, New York University
Press, 1950. 214 p. (New York University.
Stokes Foundation. Anson G. Phelps lectureship
on early American history)
50-7479 HD2346U5B7
Although the author declares in his preface that
he writes because everything else on Colonial crafts
is from the antiquarian viewpoint, still this little
work for "the casual reader" stands out in a selec-
tion of writings on American labor as a rare example
of antiquarian charm. The focus of interest, it is
true, is the skilled workman and his economic
progress, but plenty of detail about his product finds
its way into the pages. Part of the antiquarian flavor
may be attributed to the illustrations, all reproduc-
tions of engravings in the French Encyclopedic of
1762-76 showing the work of the several crafts.
The several lectures are on the craftsman of the rural
South and of the rural North, the urban craftsman
(two lectures), the craftsman at work, and the crafts-
man as a citizen. At the outset the author warns
against "surrounding the artisan with the haze of
romance," and reminds us that only the best 18th-
century craftvvork has been preserved in modern
collections, and that many articles were distincdy in-
ferior in quality.
6045. Brissenden, Paul F. The I. W. W.; a study
of American syndicalism. [2d ed.] New
York, Russell & Russell, 1957. xx"> 43^ P«
57-6911 HD8055.I5B55 1957
Bibliography: p. 387-428.
The Industrial Workers of the World held its
27th convention in 1955, 50 years after its launching
in 1905. The outstanding example of the anarch-
osyndicalist union in America, it was a direct suc-
cessor of the militandy radical Western Federa-
tion of Miners, and was promptly joined by the
extremer element of the American Federation of
Labor. Its membership was drawn largely from
unskilled labor of alien origin, and it openly
avowed Marxist doctrine and favored the use of
violence and sabotage. Its founders included its
best-known leaders, Eugene V. Debs, "Big Bill"
Haywood, Daniel DeLeon, and Vincent St. John.
The "Wobblies" or the "Bummery" (their "red
book" song, "Hallelujah, I'm a Bum," is familiar
at least to the older generation today) conducted
innumerable strikes, the most famous of which was
at Lawrence, Mass., in 1912. They opposed World
War I, and were violently suppressed after Con-
gress passed the Anti-Espionage Act in 1917. Their
influence and membership have since considerably
declined. In his new preface to a history standard
since 1919 Professor Brissenden comments that one
of the most remarkable things about the I. W. W. is
its survival. He denies that it is a Communist
organization.
6046. Chamberlain, Neil W. Collective bargain-
ing. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1951. 534 p.
illus. 51-2201 HD6483.C48
6047. Chamberlain, Neil W., and Jane Metzger
Schilling. The impact of strikes, their social
ECONOMIC LIFE / 945
and economic costs. New York, Harper, 1954. 257
p. (Yale Labor and Management Center series)
53-11958 HD5324.C42
Dr. Chamberlain, well known as a writer in the
labor field, is assistant director of the Labor and Man-
agement Center at Yale University. His textbook,
Collective Bargaining, was the first to be devoted
exclusively to the subject. In it, he says, he has
consciously stressed "the developmental character
of collective bargaining, its change over time," and
he finds a surprisingly modern instance among the
printers of New York City as early as 1809. The
source material incorporated includes a verbatim
report of a bargaining conference in chapter 3, and
sample agreements on grievance procedure and on
collective bargaining (both between General Motors
and the United Automobile Workers, 1950) in the
appendixes. Two chapters discuss the bargaining
unit, which is by no means necessarily coextensive
with company or union, and another the factors
which enter into the "tricky" concept of bargaining
power. The politics of bargaining are viewed both
from the union and the management side; and its
economics are investigated with respect to the prob-
lem of relative wage rates, the effect on national
income levels, and the degree to which the bargain-
ing process raises the specter of monopoly. In a
final chapter on "The Role of Collective Bargaining
in American Society," the functions and values of
competition and cooperation are appraised, with the
conclusion that a healthy economy requires "a proper
admixture of the two." In The Impact of Strides
Dr. Chamberlain collaborated with a research as-
sistant who had worked with him on a book in the
same series published the year before: Social Re-
sponsibility and Strides (New York, Harper, 1953.
293 P-)- Both books are concerned with the social
and economic effects of strikes on union members,
management, and the public. In the earlier study
a method was devised for rating the impact of strikes
on consumers, industrial users, suppliers, and public
opinion. In the later one the same procedure is
again described, and used to analyze strikes in coal
mines, railroad service, and the steel industry. Con-
clusions are based upon the overall cost of strikes
and whether their effect on the public is so damag-
ing as to warrant government intervention. The
writers offer their strike-rating procedure as an ex-
ample of the kind of analysis that will aid the ex-
ecutive branch in making decisions of public policy.
6048. Douglas, Paul H. Real wages in the United
States, 1 890-1926. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1930. xxviii, 682 p. diagrs. (Publications of
the Pollak Foundation for Economic Research, no.
9) 30-12884 HD4975.D6
"Bibliographical note": p. [655]— 667.
The author has been a professor of industrial re-
lations at the University of Chicago since 1920; his
career as United States Senator began in 1948. This
authoritative 35-year study of rising living standards
is introduced by a thorough discussion of the prob-
lem of ascertaining real wages as determined by
purchasing power, through measurement of money
wages and living costs. Professor Douglas then
analyzed statistically the movement of living costs
from 1890 to 1926, and, for the same period, the
movement of wage-rates and hours of work, the
movement of actual money and real earnings of em-
ployed workers, and of unemployment and the real
earnings of the wage -earning class as a whole. A
concluding chapter summarizes findings.
6049. Goldberg, Arthur J. AFL-CIO: labor
united. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1956.
319 p. (McGraw-Hill labor management series)
56-11047 HD8055.A5G66
In 1935 the issue of craft versus industrial unions,
which had been a main jurisdictional problem of
the A. F. of L. from its earliest days, came to a head.
The labor policies of the New Deal, protecting the
right of workers to organize and bargain collec-
tively, had opened the way for unionization of the
great number of unskilled workers in the mass-pro-
duction industries. After the 1935 A. F. of L. con-
vention, which refused to grant unrestricted indus-
trial union charters, the Committee for Industrial
Organization was formed, headed by John L. Lewis,
Charles P. Howard, Sidney Hillman, David Dubin-
sky, and other leaders of industry-wide unions. Al-
though repudiated by the A. F. of L. Executive
Council, the C. I. O. launched successful organiza-
tional drives and by 1938 could transform itself into
the federated Congress of Industrial Organizations,
with Lewis as first president. Raiding, fussing,
and feuding with the A. F. of L. ensued, but with
the coming of war rivalry diminished and the poli-
cies of the two movements drew closer. Prelimi-
nary negotiations for unity began in 1953 with a no-
raiding agreement, and in 1955 the merger was ac-
complished. This study is by the former general
counsel of the United Steelworkers, now special
counsel of AFL-CIO. He begins with a succinct
historical review of these developments. He then
analyzes the new joint constitution and its implica-
tions, devoting chapters to the labor monopoly ques-
tion, communism and corruption, racial discrimina-
tion, public policy, and the future role of labor.
Appendixes give texts of the new constitution, the
merger agreement, and other documents.
6050. Gompers, Samuel. Seventy years of life and
labor; an autobiography. New York, Dut-
ton, 1925. 2 v. ports. 25-5990 HD8073.G6A3
4:; I -J40— G0-
-01
946 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Appendix: His last year, an epilogue, by Flor-
ence Calvert Thorne: v. 2, p. [5275-557.
New one-volume ed. 1943. 557, 629 p.
44-638 HD8073.G6A3 1943
As a small boy in East-side London, Samuel
Gompers (1850-1924) heard the tramp of the un-
employed silk weavers of his neighborhood, whose
jobs had been swept away by new machinery. Their
cry, "My wife, my kids want bread and I've no work
to do," taught him "the worldwide feeling that has
ever bound the oppressed together in a struggle
against those who hold control over the lives and
opportunities of those who work for wages. That
feeling became a subconscious guiding impulse that
in later years developed into the dominating in-
fluence in shaping my life." Much of the history
of the A. F. of L. is revealed in this autobiography
of the great labor pioneer. As one of its creators
and its president, save for the one year of Socialist
domination, 1895, from 1886 to his death in 1924,
he was chief architect of its growth, and its charac-
ter and policies were largely determined by his con-
victions. The posthumously published work in-
cluded a biographical appendix by Miss Thorne,
who had been his assistant in the research needed to
check and supplement his recollections. In 1957
Miss Thorne published Samuel Gompers, American
Statesman (New York, Philosophical Library.
175 p.), principally concerned with setting forth, in
large part in his own words, Gompers' philosophy
of the labor movement.
6051. Lombardi, John. Labor's voice in the Cab-
inet; a history of the Department of Labor,
from its origin to 1921. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1942. 370 p. (Columbia University.
Faculty of Political Science. Studies in history, eco-
nomics and public law, no. 496)
43-461 HD4835.U4L6 1942
H3LC7, no. 496
Bibliography: p. 359-366.
In his first 70 pages Dr. Lombardi summarizes
the precursors and origins of the Department of
Labor. The new Department charged with repre-
senting the interests of the workers was established
in 19 13, crowning over a half-century's efforts on
the part of organized labor. William B. Wilson of
Pennsylvania, a former labor leader and Congress-
man, was named the first Secretary of Labor. The
Department absorbed the Bureau of Labor Statistics,
created in 1884 in the Department of the Interior,
and from the former Department of Commerce and
Labor (1903) took over the Bureaus of Immigration
and Naturalization, now consolidated, and the Di-
vision of Information of the Immigration branch,
now reorganized as the U. S. Employment Service.
Finally it took from the same Department the Chil-
dren's Bureau, which had been set up, after a hard
legislative batde, only the year before. Dr. Lom-
bardi gives fuller treatment to his chapters on the
organization of the Department, and to the succeed-
ing part on "War Activities." In 1917 the Depart-
ment was put on a war footing, and the Secretary
of Labor appointed War Labor Administrator in
charge of an independent war agency. After the
armistice came the "return to normalcy," which the
author calls "Reaction." His study ends in 192 1
with the retirement of Secretary Wilson, whose final
report to the President spoke of the workers' dream
fulfilled.
6052. Lorwin, Lewis L. The American Federa-
tion of Labor; history, policies, and prospects,
by Lewis L. Lorwin, with the assistance of Jean
Atherton Flexner. Washington, Brookings Insti-
tution, 1933. xix, 573 p. (The Institute of Eco-
nomics of the Brookings Institution. Publication
no. 50) 33-16879 HD8055.A5L6
"References for further reading": p. 548-555.
The late Dr. Lorwin was an internationally known
expert on labor economics, who served as advisor
to the International Labor Office as well as to the
American Government in the 1930's and '40's. His
standard history of the evolution of the A. F. of L.
was written in the dark days of unemployment just
before the passage of the National Industrial Re-
covery Act, while the author was on the staff of the
Brookings Institution. He views the A. F. of L. as
"shaping and molding many human relations which
are the very essence of our individual and social
life." The first four parts are chronological:
"Foundations, 1864-98" (the Federation was not
organized until 1886, but Dr. Lorwin carried his ac-
count of its precursors back to an abortive Inter-
national Industrial Assembly of North America
projected in 1864); "National Expansion, 1899-
1914"; "World War and Industrial Democracy,
1914-24"; and "Prosperity and Depression, 1925-
33." The last part is an analysis of policies, prob-
lems, and prospects at the outset of the New Deal.
The appendixes include groups of tabulated sta-
tistics from 1850 to 1932 and a summary of trade
union organization and status in the various in-
dustries.
6053. Millis, Harry A., and Emily Clark Brown.
From the Wagner Act to Taft-Hartley; a
study of national labor policy and labor relations.
[Chicago] University of Ghicago Press, 1950.
723 p. 50-7091 HD7834.M55
Bibliography: p. 679-687.
This study of labor legislation and government
policy is in three parts and an epilogue. First
there is a careful analysis of the Wagner Act and
of 12 years' experience of collective bargaining
under its provisions. This section was written en-
tirely by Dr. Brown, who had begun the study
while working as an analyst for the National Labor
Relations Board in 1942-43. Part 2 tells "How the
Taft-Hardey Act Came About," and part 3 analyzes
critically the Labor-Management Relations Act of
1947, to give it its formal tide. These two parts
were planned and in part written by Dr. Millis,
who redred as Chairman of NLRB in 1945, but
died in 1948 before the text was completed. His
rich experience in the administration of the Wagner
Act and as arbitrator in many industrial disputes
formed part of the source material for the book.
The epilogue, "What Industrial Relations Road
for the United States?" had been drafted as his last
chapter by Dr. Millis and was made up without
expansion from his notes. He speaks of the Wag-
ner Act as the Magna Carta of American Labor.
He sees in collective bargaining the hope not only
for better wages, hours, and working conditions,
but for increased stability and regular progress in
democratic society.
6054. Powderly, Terence V. The path I trod;
the autobiography of Terence V. Powderly,
edited by Harry J. Carman, Henry David, and Paul
N. Guthrie. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1940. xiv, 460 p. illus. (Columbia studies
in American culture, no. 6)
40-9071 HD8073.P69A3
An outstanding figure of American labor in the
i88o's and Grand Master Workman of the order
of the Knights of Labor, Powderly (1 849-1924)
experienced (say his editors) "fame, notoriety,
adoration, and detestation" unequalled by any other
labor leader of the period. The order, founded in
1869 as a secret society, was the first attempt at a
national union of workers in general, not organized
by trades. Powderly worked in a Scranton, Pa.,
locomotive yard, was fired for his activities in the
Machinists' and Blacksmiths' Union after the panic
of 1873, and joined the Knights of Labor in 1874.
He was acdve in polidcs as well as in union affairs,
and was mayor of Scranton from 1878 to 1884. As
leader of the Knights from 1883 to 1893 he followed
a conciliatory policy in labor disputes, and resigned
when the extremists, who had come increasingly
into the order during the labor troubles of the late
1880's, gained control of the executive board. He
had become a lawyer, and his campaign work for
McKinley led to his appointment as Commissioner-
General of Immigration in 1897. With only one
4-year break, he held a succession of Federal offices
concerned with immigration or labor until the ill-
ness that preceded his death. The Path I Trod
ECONOMIC LIFE / 947
was written in his later years, and is concerned al-
most endrely with the Knights of Labor experience.
The standard history of the Knights of Labor for
three decades has been Norman J. Ware's The La-
bor Movement in the United States, 1860-1895; a
Study in Democracy (New York, Appleton, 1929.
409 p.).
6055. Purcell, Theodore V. The worker speaks
his mind on company and union. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1953. xix, 344 p.
illus. (Wertheim Fellowship publications)
53-9040 HD9419.S72P8
A unique study of the human problems of indus-
try as revealed in interviews with workers at the
Chicago stockyards plant of Swift & Company.
This ultramechanized plant for mass production is
the center of an important local union of the CIO
United Packinghouse Workers; its working com-
munity comprises 6,000 men and women, Negroes
and whites, native and foreign-born. The author,
a Jesuit priest, shared the life of the community for
a year and a half, and by arrangement with both
the UPWA and the Swift Company management
interviewed a carefully selected sample of 300 pro-
duction workers. His questions centered on the
allegiance felt toward the two organizations to
which they belonged, the company plant and the
local union, and the answers showed that nearly
everyone was pulled in both directions. Organized
along vertical lines in the UPWA, the local had
been dominated for a time from the outside by the
Communist Party, but in less than four years the
members had won back control for themselves.
Father Purcell's quesdons brought out the thoughts
and feelings of workers about their work, hopes,
fears, ambitions, satisfactions, and needs, and the
part played by company and union in all these.
The responses are extensively quoted, and have
usually been found more interesting than the con-
clusions drawn. Another recent work of interest
for human reladons in industry, also based on inter-
views, is by Charles R. Walker and Robert H.
Guest: The Man on the Assembly Line (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1952. 180 p.). The
authors were attached to the Institute of Human
Reladons of Yale University, and their research
entailed talks with 180 workers on an automobile
assembly line. The talks were conducted in the
men's homes, with the aim to bring out their atti-
tudes and opinions about their jobs, their relations
to fellow workers and supervisors, their working
conditions, pay, promotions, and reladons to the
union. The focus of interest was the effect of
assembly-line work, paced and repetitive, on the
satisfactions derived from labor.
948 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6056. Smith, Abbot Emerson. Colonists in bond-
age; white servitude and convict labor in
America, 1607-1776. Chapel Hill, Published for
the Institute of Early American History and Culture
at Williamsburg, Va., by the University of North
Carolina Press, 1947. 435 p.
48-5154 HD4875.U5S5
"Bibliographical note": p. 397-417.
6057. Morris, Richard B. Government and labor
in early America. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1946. xvi, 557 p.
A46-961 HD8068.M65
Mr. Smith's account of white indentured servants,
redemptioners, political prisoners, and convicts in
the American colonies is constructed from contem-
porary records which he studied at length in li-
braries and archives of the British Isles, the United
States, and the West Indies. From the interesting
evidence assembled he concludes that more than half,
and perhaps two-thirds, of all persons who came to
the colonies south of New England were originally
servants; that the notorious "spirits" who lured
emigrants away from England and Ireland by de-
ceits ranging from lies to kidnapping were winked
at by the merchant-traders and the law; that the
emigrants included a large proportion of scoundrels
for whom the colonies were the last refuge; that,
though the servants were often badly treated, there
were many reasonable laws for their protection.
Whereas modern writers have magnified the virtues
of the indentured servants, all contemporaries de-
nounced them as practically worthless. Of the
servants, hardly one in ten, the author estimates,
established himself as a solid and useful citizen
after his term of service ended. "The fundamental
human problem in colonization was simply that of
adaptation, and the white servants did not come
from the most adaptable levels of society." The re-
demptioners, who often brought families, were more
responsible. The laws relating to bond labor are
also set forth in the second part of Government and
Labor in Early America. The longer first part,
after a general glance at the labor population and
labor conditions before and during the Revolution,
is concerned with free labor. The relationship be-
tween government and the artisan and laboring
classes is examined as to the regulation of wages;
concerted action, political or otherwise, among
workers; terms and conditions of employment; and
laws regarding maritime labor and the military serv-
ice. Most of the book deals with the Colonial period,
but one chapter is given to the regulation of wages
by the States and Congress during the Revolution.
The action of politically minded combinations of
mechanics and laborers, masters and journeymen —
for instance, the merchant-led Sons of Liberty — dur-
ing and immediately after the Revolution is dis-
cussed, and the chapter on military service includes
a section on artificers and laborers in the Continental
and British armies.
6058. Updegraff, Clarence M., and Whitley P. Mc-
Coy. Arbitration of labor disputes. New
York, Commerce Clearing House, 1946. 291 p.
46-4335 HD5504.A3U6
In this useful book the authors had the double
purpose of providing lawyers with a reference work
on the law of arbitration as applied to labor disputes,
and of offering a practical guide for the layman
who might be called on to arbitrate. They oblig-
ingly point out in the foreword the chapters which
will be useful for the general reader, and the heavier
chapters to be read by the lawyers, with which they
group most of the appendixes containing specimen
legal forms and a table of cases. The more easily
understood chapters include a general introduction
discussing the historic background, scope, and types
(whether voluntary or compulsory) of arbitration,
and the advantages of arbitration or conciliation over
litigation in various types of labor controversies; an
examination of the selection of arbitrators, with re-
gard to their qualifications, jurisdiction, and com-
pensation; patterns of agreements to arbitrate and
of submissions; standard procedure in hearings; and
types of cases commonly arbitrated.
XXIX
Constitution and Government
A. Political Thought 6059-6072
B. Constitutional History 6073-6089
C. Constitutional Law 6090-6105
D. Civil Liberties and Rights 6106-6130
E. Government: General 6131-6139
F. The Presidency 6140-6149
G. Congress 6150-6169
H. Administration: General 6170-6180
I. Administration: Special 6181-6194
J. State Government 6195-6206
K. Local Government 6207-6218
THIS and the following two chapters aim to offer a representative sample of the litera-
ture dealing with the political institutions and practices of the United States. The judi-
ciary, the third semi-independent branch of the government of the United States and of the
state governments, and the laws which it interprets and applies, are put off to Chapter XXX.
However, most of the general treatises on American government in Section E below, and
some of the general works on state government in Section J, have sections on the national or
state judiciaries. The personnel and policies of
American government are determined principally
by the process we call politics, which depends upon
elections held according to fixed rules at regular in-
tervals, and is dominated by political parties or-
ganized for the purpose of winning the elections.
These and related matters are reserved for Chapter
XXXI, but again the general works of Section E
below have usually a section concerned with what it
is fashionable to call the dynamics of government.
The present chapter is concerned with the litera-
ture of American government in general, on the
national, state, and local levels. It is also concerned
with the political thought which has accompanied
our practical development, with the constitutions
upon which our national and state governments are
based, and with the executive and legislative
branches of the Federal Government. Historical
works in these sections usually begin no earlier than
the Federal Convention of 1787, but some go back
to 1775, and some, especially in Section A on politi-
cal thought, to the 17th century. For the most part,
however, works on American governments during
the Colonial and Revolutionary periods will be
found in Sections D and E of Chapter VIII on Gen-
eral History: We may particularly note, from the
first, numbers 3182, 3192, 3195, 3220, and 3221,
and from the second, numbers 3242, 3245, 3253,
3256, and 3259.
Section A on political thought represents a sub-
ject which was very little studied before 1920, but
which has proved increasingly rewarding as it has
been more intensively cultivated. The literature
has now grown to a point where can be included
several examples of general surveys, books of
readings, period histories, and treatments of par-
ticular topics and tendencies. Constitutional his-
tory, the subject of Section B, was of far earlier cul-
tivation, although most of the earlier specimens
seem today excessively abstract and formal. It de-
rives its peculiar character from the fact that, be-
949
950 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ginning in 1776, state and nation committed their
constitutional rules to paper for all to read, and
made alterations in them more difficult and more
solemn than an ordinary act of the legislature. This
did not, however, eliminate the necessity for appli-
cation and interpretation, in which the last word is
spoken by die courts and particularly by the Su-
preme Court of the United States. Thus has devel-
oped the elaborate field of constitutional law, the
subject of Section C; in it, however, many land-
marks of long standing have been swept away by
developments since the famous Supreme Court
crisis of 1937. Works on particular clauses of the
Constitution, however historical in approach, have
been entered here rather than in Section B. Most of
the civil liberties and rights enjoyed by Americans
are based upon the particular wordings of their con-
stitutions, and are therefore made the subject of Sec-
tion D. Most of the works there entered have arisen
out of the conflict between traditional rights and
new security measures since the end of the last war,
and there has seemed to be little point in trying to
minimize their inevitably controversial tone. The
general works on American government in Section
E will be found to be mostly designed for college
courses, and this points to an undesirable but unde-
niable situation: there are comparatively few books
on our government designed for the general reader,
and even fewer good ones. Most of the works on
the Presidency in Section F emphasize the increas-
ingly crucial nature of the office, and the well-nigh
impossible demands it makes upon the man who has
to fill it. The books in Section G on the Congress
are remarkably varied in character, but they do not
begin to exhaust its aspects, historical or contem-
porary. Sections G and H present another major
study of our day which hardly predates the 1920's:
the systematic study of public administration, both
in its general principles and its Federal manifesta-
tions. The literature is already copious, and can
only be sampled here; but is doubtless only a frac-
tion of what it is destined to become. Concerning
the works on State and local governments in the
last two sections, we shall say only that we have
had to rely on too large a proportion of tides pub-
lished before America's entry into World War II.
Since 1941 the study of grassroots government has
been overshadowed by national and international
affairs.
A. Political Thought
6059. Carpenter, Jesse T. The South as a con-
scious minority, 1789-1861; a study in politi-
cal thought. New York, New York University
Press, 1930. 315 p. 30-30930 F213.C29
"A selection of materials consulted": p. [261]-
297-
This Harvard dissertation studies the political
thinking of the ante-bellum South which, the author
believes, consciously sought protection within the
Union from the political power of the Northern
majority. Dr. Carpenter conceives of his subject as
democracy's greatest and most challenging prob-
lem— the relation of numerical majority rule to
effective minority protection. He takes the posi-
tion that the Southern States, united by economic
and social bonds, considered themselves a distinct
nationality, a separate and different people. He re-
gards the South as having borne an excessive por-
tion of the burdens of the Federal government,
while the North was receiving a disproportionate
share of the benefits, and as evolving in self-protec-
tion a political philosophy of effective minority de-
fense in government. He finds that four major
sources of minority protection were in turn relied
upon: the principle of local self-government, ad-
vanced and defended from the establishment of the
Federal government in 1789 to the adoption of the
Missouri Compromise in 1820; the principle of the
"concurrent voice," relied upon chiefly during the
1820's 1830's, and 1840's; the principle of constitu-
tional guarantees, depended upon from the admis-
sion of California in 1850 to the election of Abra-
ham Lincoln in i860; and, finally, the principle of
Southern independence, resorted to after Lincoln's
election.
6060. Coker, Francis W., ed. Democracy, liberty,
and property; readings in the American
political tradition. New York, Macmillan, 1942.
xv, 881 p. 42-14710 JK11 1942a
The purpose of this collection is to indicate the
main contours of the American political tradition
by means of excerpts from a variety of sources — es-
says, addresses, public documents, revolutionary
pronouncements, and formal treatises. The selec-
tions have been chosen to represent the classic Amer-
ican discussions concerning the problem of locating
political control, the lines to be drawn between gov-
ernmental authority and individual liberty, the na-
ture and limits of property rights, and the problem
of political change. The time span covered is more
than 300 years (1630-1941). Professor Coker points
out that the major steps toward a liberal democracy
were not taken until after the close of the Colonial
period. The principal trend has been toward a more
general acceptance of the ideal values of democratic
government — freedom of opinion, equality before
the courts, and freedom of economic enterprise.
The editor notes divergences of opinion about these
ideals, as well as some downright repudiations of
them.
6061. Ekirch, Arthur A. The decline of Ameri-
can liberalism. New York, Longmans,
Green, 1955. 401 p. 55-11447 E183.E4
A history of American liberalism which identifies
it with the classical philosophical values of the 18th-
century Enlightenment, and especially with indi-
vidual liberty and decentralized government. Pro-
fessor Ekirch equates the decline of these concepts
with the trend, since the American Revolution, to-
ward ever greater political, economic, and social
centralization and concentration of control. He
views the rise and fall of the liberal tradition in the
United States as a succession of crises and an over-
all decline. The rising Colonial and Revolutionary
liberalism was tempered by a conservative reaction
after the war. Exemplified pardy by Jeffersonian
and Jacksonian democrary, a reviving liberalism
was smothered by the Civil War and reconstruction.
Although the author finds evidence of a liberal re-
covery early in the 20th century, he consider pro-
gressivism in the United States to have been delu-
sive, the reaction after World War I disastrous, and
the liberal retreat since World War II nothing less
than a rout. He offers no smallest comfort to lib-
erals in this somber book; he sees, rather, the fur-
ther decline of liberalism "clearly outlined against
the future's darkening horizon," and the end of
an era of individual and social freedom. A less
rigid definition of liberalism, permitting a more
hopeful view of the future, could be conceived.
6062. Grimes, Alan P. American political
thought. New York, Holt, 1955. 500 p.
55-6047 JA84.U5G7
A history which sets forth the thesis that, in the
main, American political thought draws upon ideas
that are neither American in origin nor even ex-
plicidy political in concept, and to a great extent
consists of articulations and modifications by Ameri-
cans of European political thought. Thus Puritan
political thinking derived mainly from Calvinism.
American thought of the Revolutionary period
stemmed primarily from John Locke. In the au-
thor's opinion, late 19th-century liberalism was an
offshoot of the theories of John Stuart Mill and the
classical economists. Social Darwinism obviously
came from England and, for a time, conditioned
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 95 1
political thinking here. More recently, the thought
of John Maynard Keynes has inspired American
economic and political theory and practices. As
Mr. Grimes points out, however, American politi-
cal thought has always employed prevailing theories
relevant and applicable to American conditions.
Jefferson, for example, used Locke but in respect
to a particular situation which imparted to Jeffer-
sonian thinking a quality of its own. Similarly,
John Adams reinterpreted Blackstone in the light
of his own views of the past and of the American
environment. Where American political thinking
has been most original, as in the controversies over
slavery and the nature of the Union, it has still
been relevant to situations peculiar to America.
6063. Hartz, Louis. The liberal tradition in
America; an interpretation of American po-
litical thought since the Revolution. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1955. 329 p.
55-5242 E175.9.H37
A learned if somewhat impressionistic interpreta-
tion of the American world conceived as "a liberal
society, lacking feudalism and therefore socialism
and governed by an irrational Lockianism." That
society, in the author's view, has been a triumph for
the liberal idea, an ideological victory helped forward
by the magnificent material setting of the New
World, in which the laborer has not felt tied to his
situation for life. America, "born free," did not
have a feudal structure to destroy, and so developed
not a self-conscious proletariat but a victorious mid-
dle class. In Dr. Hartz's estimation, this circum-
stance shattered would-be elites such as the Virginia
aristocrats of 1785, the Federalist party, and the
reactionaries of the Old South. The Whigs of 1840
transformed the egalitarian thunder of the Demo-
crats, retaining Hamilton's grandiose capitalist
dream but combining with it the Jeffersonian con-
cept of equal opportunity. Thus arose a dynamic
and competitive social outlook which united the two
great traditions of the American liberal community.
Even the capitalistic collapse of 1929-33 gave rise,
not to a new birth of Marxism, but to a movement
within the liberal framework, "which sought to ex-
tend the sphere of the State and at the same time
retain the basic principles of Locke and Bentham."
The uniqueness of the American experience proves,
however, a serious disability for the exercise of world
leadership, since we cannot understand the neces-
sities of societies which were not born free, and con-
tinue to find the alien unduly alarming.
6064. Lewis, Edward R. A history of American
political thought from the Civil War to the
World War. New York, Macmillan, 1937. S^i p.
37-4045 JA84.U5L4
952 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
"References" at end of each chapter.
"Table of cases": p. 537-541.
A survey of the period between the end of the
Civil War and America's entry into World War I,
which aims at "a consideration of the entire stream
of our political thought and not merely the classical
and somewhat technical subjects of the theory of
the state and of sovereignty." Since this stream
"did not flow from the contributions of a few great
leaders of thought, but has been made by the con-
tributions of many persons and influences," the au-
thor has drawn upon the utterances of public men,
judicial decisions, and party platforms as well as the
writings of reformers and academic theorists.
Among the subjects separately treated are the Civil
War Amendments, "The Power of the Courts over
Legislation" and the development of opposition to
this power, "The Nature and Source of Law," "The
Theory of Political Action," "Conservatism," "So-
cialistic Thought," "The Struggle for Political Con-
trol," and "The Tests of Political Action." Mr.
Lewis expounds his authorities with great objectiv-
ity, but from time to time states his own moderate
and balanced opinions, carefully labeling them as
such. He does not, for example, concede that the
Progressive movement was a failure because it did
not anticipate the problems of a later age. It was
able "to achieve an equilibrium for the moment, to
adjust the conflict of interest and desires of the time,
so that there [was] no explosion," which is all that
any program can do.
6065. Mason, Alpheus Thomas, ed. Free govern-
ment in the making; readings in American
political thought. 2d ed. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1956. 896 p.
56-5765 JK11 1956.M35
First published in 1949.
In order to portray the meaning and significance
of the American political tradition, this book samples
the ideas and words of the men who helped form
it. The 22 chapters, arranged in chronological or-
der, are drawn largely from primary sources, be-
ginning with the writings of such 17th-century
English and American political thinkers as John
Locke and Roger Williams, continuing with 18th-
and 19th-century leaders like Benjamin Franklin,
Alexander Hamilton, Thomas Jefferson, Andrew
Jackson, and Salmon P. Chase, and concluding with
recent utterances by such persons as Franklin D.
Roosevelt, Herbert Hoover, and Adlai E. Steven-
son. Earlier portions of the book are concerned
with the Revolutionary ferment, the establishment
of national power, and the extension of the base of
popular power. Nineteenth- and twentieth-century
individualism, romanticism, liberalism, and dissent
are represented by the works of such writers as
Emerson, Whitman, Finley Peter Dunne, Edward
Bellamy, Brooks Adams, and Russell Davenport.
Introductory essays provide historical background
for the readings, which "exhibit our best minds in
action — opposing, discussing, deliberating, compro-
mising, deciding, building institutions of govern-
ment." The volume attempts to display divergent
views, the issues at stake, and the weight, form, and
flavor of the argument.
6066. Merriam, Charles Edward. American po-
litical ideas; studies in the development of
American political thought, 1865-19 17. New York,
Macmillan, 1929. 481 p.
30-31103 JA84.U5M5 1929
First published in 1920.
A pioneer study of some of the chief tendencies
of American political ideas since the Civil War,
which shows them in their relation to each other
and to the social and economic conditions out of
which they grew. The late Professor Merriam of
the University of Chicago looked for the theories
as best expressed, whether in political institutions,
laws, judicial decisions, administration, or customs;
in the utterances of statesmen, publicists, or the
leaders of causes; or in the formal statements of
systematic philosophers. He regarded them all as
parts of the progressive adaptation of democratic
ideas to new social and economic conditions.
Among the most significant tendencies of the pe-
riod, he concluded, were the steady concentration
of political and economic institutions, and the so-
cialization of the state. The nation gained in power
and prestige as the states sank toward the position
of subordinate agencies, and the devotion to local
self-government declined. The federal execudve
emerged with increased prestige, as the legislative
suffered from popular confidence in its integrity
or competence, and the courts from lack of confi-
dence in their impartiality. Another feature of the
period was the abandonment of the doctrine of
weak government as a necessary defense of liberty.
But it proved far from easy to make the transition
to the later doctrine of strong and aggressive gov-
ernment, and meanwhile a mushrooming capitalism
was able to escape effective control. "Democratic
faith was stronger than democratic works."
6067. Rossiter, Clinton L. Conservatism in
America. New York, Knopf, 1955. 326 p.
55-5614 JK31.R58
Bibliography: p. [309H327].
Professor Rossiter calls his book "a study of the
political theory of American conservatism — of the
principles that have governed our conservatives in
the past, that appear to govern them in the present,
and that ought to govern them in the future." He
distingiushes temperamental, possessive, and prac-
tical conservatism from "the last and highest kind,"
philosophical conservatism; and his spectrum of po-
litical attitudes reads thus: revolutionary radicalism,
radicalism, liberalism, conservatism, standpattism,
reaction, and revolutionary reaction. His historical
survey proceeds from the Puritan oligarchy to the
contemporary "middle group" represented by the
late Senator Taft and Presidents Eisenhower and
Hoover, and the "conservative intellectuals" such as
Peter Viereck and Russell Kirk. The book is essen-
tially an attempt to arrive at a formulation of con-
servatism viable for intelligent and humane Amer-
icans conscious of their heritage. Chapter 6 takes
"A Hard Look at American Conservatism," and
castigates it for its anti-intellectualism, materialism,
and indifference to all social values save the freedom
of economic enterprise. Chapter 7 asserts the ne-
cessity of "A Conservative Theory for American
Democracy," which will build "democratic freedom
on the solid foundations of co-operative individual-
ism and balanced pluralism." The final chapter,
"A Conservative Program for American Democ-
racy," calls for the creation of a new tradition of
public service, a sincere defense of civil liberties at
every level, and a concerted effort to redeem the
three grievous failures of American democracy: in
peaceful world leadership, in justice to the Negro,
and in the creation of an authentic popular culture.
6068. Rossiter, Clinton L. Seedtime of the Re-
public; the origin of the American tradition
of political liberty. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1953. xiv, 558 p. 53-5647 _ JK31.R6
"This book is a study of the political ideas that
sustained the rise of liberty in Colonial and Revo-
lutionary America." The leaders of the Revolution,
Dr. Rossiter maintains, held, not a doctrine hastily
improvised to justify resistance, but rather a noble
philosophy that was the product of generations of
colonial experience. Part 1 describes the total en-
vironment— government, religion, economy, social
structure, and intellectual life — of the thirteen
Colonies as one favorable to the rise of liberty, and
the "factors of freedom" most influential in creating
such an environment. Part 2, the core of the book,
presents the lives and philosophies of six repre-
sentative political thinkers of the Colonial period:
Thomas Hooker, Roger Williams, John Wise,
Jonathan Mayhew, Richard Bland, and Benjamin
Franklin. Part 3 analyzes the political thinking of
the pre-Revolutionary decade on the rights of man
and the pattern of government, which produced no
masterwork but was remarkably consistent. In con-
clusion, the author sums up the guiding faith of the
Revolutionists in 11 major tenets. "The political
theory of the American Revolution — a theory of
431240—60 62
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 953
ethical, ordered liberty — remains the political tradi-
tion of the American people."
6069. Spitz, David. Patterns of anti-democratic
thought; an analysis and a criticism, with
special reference to the American political mind in
recent times. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 304 p.
49-8944 JC481.S65
This Columbia University dissertation is an in-
quiry into the nature and validity of the arguments
leveled against democracy. It posits that the dem-
ocratic state contains at least two central ingredients
which set it apart from all other forms of the state:
the free play of conflicting opinions and the consti-
tutional responsibility of the rulers to the ruled.
Majority rule, moreover, always fluctuating, tem-
porary, and never fixed, is a necessity of the dem-
ocratic state, together with free and unhampered
minorities. Conversely, the doctrines of antidemo-
cratic thought are viewed here as simply those ideas
which deny the possibility or challenge the desirabil-
ity of democracy. Typical, in recent American
thought, of the former are James Burnham's theory
of the ruling class as organizational necessity and
Lawrence Dennis' theory of the ruling class as a
conspiracy of power. Among the doctrines which
reject the democratic state as undesirable in its op-
erations and consequences, Dr. Spitz places Ralph
Adams Cram's theory of the irrationality and in-
competence of the average man, Madison Grant's
theory of Nordic racial aristocracy, Edward M. Sait's
concept of biological aristocracy, George Santayana's
theory of natural aristocracy, and the restrictive
authoritarianism of Irving Babbitt. The author re-
futes each in detail and finds democracy, with its
conjunction of order and freedom, alone wholly
commendable.
6070. Wilson, Francis Graham. The American
political mind; a textbook in political theory.
New York, McGraw-Hill, 1949. 506 p. (Mc-
Graw-Hill series in political science)
49-8235 JA84.U5W5.
A history of American political ideas from the
first English settlements to the atomic era, which
emphasizes their close dependence upon the general
current of national history. What is fundamental
and persistent "in this evolving, fragmentary, con-
flicting, and changing body of political philosophy
that makes up the American mind," and what is
superficial and ephemeral, depends upon the inter-
preter's conception of destiny, his sense of "a pre-
dominance in history." Professor Wilson from
time to time emphasizes that the conservative case
has been as important in the making of the Amer-
ican tradition as its opposite. American liberalism,
he believes, took form as a conflict between the
954 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Southern agrarians and the Hamiltonian capitalists,
and its maturity "was the clarification of this con-
flict." Without the debate over slavery, "it is hardly
possible that the sense of national unity, of the mis-
sion of American democracy to the rest of the world,
could have been shaped." A chapter on "The
Emergence of Modern Conservatism" views it as
the counterpart of the industrial revolution which
followed the Civil War and created a "new economic
aristocracy." Two final chapters, on World War II
and its aftermath, indicate that all shades of Amer-
ican opinion are committed to the maintenance of
democracy, and that "part of the old and traditional
will inevitably remain in the changing democracy
of tomorrow." Each chapter is followed by a very
useful "Selected Bibliography."
6071. Wiltse, Charles Maurice. The Jeffersonian
tradition in American democracy. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1935.
273 p. 36-27502 JC176.J45W48
A study of the political ideas of Thomas Jefferson
which assumes that they form a fairly complete and
coherent system. Dr. Wiltse has attempted a logical
reconstruction of Jefferson's "most mature position"
about the fundamental problems of government,
basing it upon the mass of Jefferson's writings and
public utterances. In the author's opinion, although
the Jeffersonian state has passed into history, Jeffer-
son's influence has been one of the most enduring in
our national life because, as leader of a school of
political thought, he stood for liberalism, for human-
itarianism, for freedom, for the welfare of "abstract
man," all of which concepts have been transmitted
through him into the democratic tradition. Dr.
Wiltse views him as preeminentiy a practical thinker,
whose theory of the state was centered in practical
solutions to concrete problems, yet who nevertheless
drew upon a conscious intellectual heritage. Jeffer-
son's political philosophy is seen to rest upon two
basic ethical assumptions — that the end of life is
individual happiness and that the purpose of the state
is to secure and increase such happiness. It has
therefore left to American democracy a dual tradi-
tion, on the one hand of democratic individualism,
as exemplified by John Taylor, Calhoun, Jackson,
and Lincoln. On the other hand, it has given rise to
a tradition of social democracy, exemplified by
Henry George, the Populists, the Progressives, and
the New Deal. "The times may stress now one and
now the other, but in historical perspective the two
have advanced and will advance together."
6072. Wright, Benjamin Fletcher. American in-
terpretations of natural law; a study in the
history of political thought. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1931. 360 p. (Harvard political
studies) 31-30867 JA84.U5W67
Professor Wright analyzes briefly the various
meanings attached to the concept of natural law,
evaluates its place in political theory, discusses the
writings of certain of the makers of American consti-
tutional law, and surveys illustrative judicial opin-
ions. He traces the few 17th-century American in-
terpretations of natural law directly to the theologico-
political conceptions of medieval times and of the
Reformation. In the century preceding the Civil
War, when political speculation was most active in
America, the idea of natural law was used in defense
of the most diverse causes, and played a part of
some importance in most of the controversial and
systematic political theories; it was of scarcely less
importance in the development of written constitu-
tions. The individual rights phase of natural law
received its classic expression in the Declaration of
Independence. In the slavery controversy, natural
law was the principal theoretical weapon of both
sides — the antislavery forces discoursing of the rights
of men, the proslavery of the natural laws which or-
dain inequality. Both a speculative concept and a
controversial weapon, the idea of natural law was
generally discarded after the Civil War even when
not explicidy repudiated.
B. Constitutional History
6073. Boyd, Julian P. The Declaration of Inde-
pendence; the evolution of the text as shown
in facsimiles of various drafts by its author, Thomas
Jefferson. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1945. 46 p. A 45-1832 JK128.B66
Revised edition of the author's contribution to a
brochure issued in 1943 by the Library of Congress as
a part of the bicentennial celebration of the birth of
Thomas Jefferson.
A 46-page textual analysis of the various drafts of
the Declaration of Independence showing the genesis
and evolution of this state paper, together with 32
pages cf facsimiles. These latter, not altogether
legible, reproduce all of the known drafts of the
Declaration in Jefferson's hand, as well as other doc-
uments closely related to the official printed version,
which appears here as it was first inserted in the
"Rough Journal" of Congress. As Dr. Boyd points
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 955
out, Jefferson was almost sole author in the sense of
phraseology, the contributor of clear and felicitous
prose, but this "great apologia of the American Revo-
lution" was formed from many sources, and was, in-
deed, as Jefferson himself termed it, "an expression
of the American mind." What Dr. Boyd finds new
in the Declaration is that "here, for the first time, a
political society formally declared the purpose of the
state, enumerated some of man's natural rights, and
affirmed the right of revolution." As prepared by
Jefferson and adopted by Congress, the Declaration
was a philosophical justification of independence;
its author acted as his country's advocate before the
tribunal of world opinion.
6074. Dumbauld, Edward. The Declaration of
Independence and what it means today.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1950. 194 p.
illus.
Bibliography: p. 171-189. 50-9691 JK128.D8
An analysis of the Declaration of Independence,
passage by passage, providing a commentary upon
the political philosophy propounded in it and upon
the historical background of ideas and events against
which it was written. An introduction discusses
briefly the drafting, revising, and adoption of the
Declaration, as well as the three official texts of the
document. The commentary supplies precedents
for the theoretical portions of the Declaration; for
instance, it traces the famous phrase, "all Men are
created equal," to Euripides, Ulpian, Milton, Locke,
Pufendorf, and Vattel, and notes that "more disposed
to suffer" is actually a verbal echo of Locke's
Treatises of Government. It is particularly useful
in explaining the 28 charges against King George
III which form so large a part of the document and
are the least self-explanatory to modern readers.
Thus the charge, "He has made Judges dependent
on his Will alone, for the Tenure of their Offices,"
is illuminated by the attempts of six colonies during
the 1750's and 1760's to give their judges tenure
during good behavior, all defeated by the royal dis-
allowance or other prerogative acts. Differing from
critics of the Declaration such as Rufus Choate, who
in 1856 spoke of its "glittering and sounding gener-
alities," and George Santayana, who in 1945 called
it "a salad of illusions," Dr. Dumbauld emphasizes
the permanent value of its philosophy of govern-
ment as a man-made device for promoting human
welfare — the servant, not the master, of the people.
6075. The Federalist. The Federalist; a commen-
tary on the Constitution of the United States,
being a collection of essays written in support of
the Constitution agreed upon September 17, 1787,
by the Federal Convention, from the original text
of Alexander Hamilton, John Jay [and] James
Madison, with an introd. by Edward Mead Earle.
New York, Modern Library, 1941. xlv, 618 p.
(The Modern Library of the world's best books
[139]) 4I~5I534 JK-154 1941
Written to advocate the adoption of the Consti-
tution, these 85 newspaper essays, which first ap-
peared in book form in 1788, are generally con-
sidered the most important American contribution
to the literature of political science. Together,
they form an exposition of the ideas dominant in
the political philosophy of the 18th-century Whigs
on the means of securing both civil liberty and
efficient government, on the principles of federal
government, and on the balance of power in such
a government among the executive, legislative,
and judicial branches, and between the Federal
and State governments. This series of essays, set-
ting forth the political needs of the country as
well as the principles of the new Constitution, was
planned by Hamilton in an effort to persuade the
citizenry of New York, a crucial but doubtful
State in the matter of ratification. For this pur-
pose he enlisted the aid of Madison and Jay. Hamil-
ton interpreted the needs of the country, the powers
of the executive, and the functions of the judiciary.
Madison explained the legislative branch of the pro-
posed government, and Jay the conduct of foreign
relations. The authorship of a number of the
essays is still uncertain, as between Hamilton and
Madison. In the forefront of those concerned with
the initiation, formulation, and adoption of the
Constitution, both were superbly endowed to eluci-
date it.
6076. Holcombe, Arthur N. Our more perfect
union; from eighteenth-century principles to
twentieth-century practice. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1950. 460 p. 50-9371 JK31.H7
An intensive historical analysis of the American
experiment in self-government. Professor Hol-
combe first examines the principles of the framers
of the Constitution, and then interprets and evalu-
ates those principles in terms of contemporary poli-
tics and the conditions of the modern world. He
affirms his belief that the postulates of 1787, as they
have come to be applied in American politics, are
sound, and are valid not only for Americans, but
for peoples everywhere who feel the need for better
political order in the world. In the author's opin-
ion, however, the Constitution is still an unfinished
experiment, the principles of which require fur-
ther extension if the United States is to maintain
a satisfactory position in international affairs. The
creators of the American republic, he concludes,
were aware of the proneness of the holders of power
to its abuse. To protect the governed, the framers
of the Constitution adopted a system of checks and
956 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
balances that has worked remarkably well. Two
instrumentalities, the separation of powers among
the three coordinate branches of government, and
the division of power between Federal and State
agencies, they incorporated in the Constitution.
The third, unforeseen by the founders, the normal
operation of a bipartisan system in politics, has
made for moderation.
6077. Kelly, Alfred H., and Winfred A. Harbi-
son. The American Constitution, its origins
and development. Rev. ed. New York, Norton,
1955- I037 P- 55-M22 JK31.K4 1955
"Selected readings": p. 949-978.
A massive constitutional history designed for the
"average undergraduate student or general reader,"
orginally published in 1948. The narrative begins
with the period 1 607-1 789, covering the whole
Colonial era, the Revolution, and achievement of
national unity under the Articles of Confederation
and the Constitution, when the principal institu-
tions and ideas of the American constitutional sys-
tem were developed. It continues through the
second period, 1789-1865, when the Federal gov-
ernment was established under the Constitution,
and the Confederacy's attempt to destroy the Union
was defeated. Finally, the authors survey the third
great epoch in American history, the years from
1865 to the present. Most of its constitutional
problems have arisen, they indicate, from successive
attempts to adjust the constitutional system to the
requirements of modern urban industrial society.
Professors Kelly and Harbison find one great theme
running through all three centuries of American
history: the government of laws, not men.
6078. McLaughlin, Andrew C. A constitutional
history of the United States. New York,
Appleton-Century, 1936. 833 p.
37-3529 JK31.M25 1936a
First published in 1935.
A history of the development of American con-
stitutional principles beginning in 1754 with the
Albany Plan of union, which marked the beginning
of an effort to single out what should be turned
over to a central government or agency of cen-
tral administration. In the discussion of the years
1754-87, the purpose has been to dwell upon the
emergence of the constitutional system, but some
attention has been paid to the transformation of
the Colonies into self-governing commonwealths
and to the principles upon which State constitu-
tions were established. Professor McLaughlin at-
tributes two major creative achievements to this
Revolutionary era: the establishment of limited
government and the founding of the Federal state.
Yet, he finds, the nature of the union, the position
of the States, and the authority of the Supreme
Court were still matters of dispute in the 1820's.
By the 1830's, however, the Court under the leader-
ship of John Marshall had attained a position of
judicial authority, and Jackson as national leader of
the people had established a "new presidency."
The controversy over the constitutional structure of
the union was, of course, only resolved by civil war.
The last subject treated in detail is the interpretation
of the 14th Amendment; the continuation from 1876
to the 1930's is only a sketch (p. 760-794). Ameri-
can history, the author believes, "is the history of
a people entering upon the great adventure of popu-
lar government and marching forward with a con-
siderable degree of achievement." Professor Mc-
Laughlin (1861-1946), who taught at the Univer-
sity of Chicago from 1906 to 1929 and served for
many years as an editor of The American Historical
Review, produced other works of distinction in this
and related fields. Among them are: Lewis Cats
(Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1891. 363 p. Ameri-
can statesmen [v. 24]); The Courts, the Constitution
and Parties (Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1912. 299 p.); and Steps in the Development of
American Democracy (New York, Abingdon Press,
1920. 210 p.).
6079. McLaughlin, Andrew C. The foundations
of American constitutionalism. New York,
New York University Press, 1932. 176 p. (New
York University. Stokes Foundation. Anson G.
Phelps lectureship on early American history)
33-3303 JK268.M25
A collection of six lectures, which aim to trace
briefly the historical origins of some of the basic
principles of the American constitutional system.
Professor McLaughlin has deliberately emphasized
here the influence of New England religious and
economic practices and doctrines in the background
of the Federal Convention of 1787. These he finds
rooted in the creed enunciated by the Puritan Sepa-
ratists in the late 16th and early 17th centuries: the
doctrine of individual liberty and the theory and fact
of compact and covenant. This creed, he believes,
the Pilgrim Fathers not only asserted but, in simple
fashion, rendered concrete He stresses the further
fact that the Pilgrims were forced to act coopera-
tively, and at first entirely as a community, because
of their joint-stock arrangement with London mer-
chants. They thus combined business and religion,
the church and the corporation, the covenant and
the joint-stock agreement. In this duality Professor
McLaughlin discovers the "essence of the theory of
democracy, as a system of government, and the
center of free constitutionalism."
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 957
6080. New York {State) Constitutional Conven-
tion Committee. Constitutions of the states
and United States. [Albany, J. B. Lyon Co.] 1938.
1845 p. (Its [Reports, v. 3])
38-28224 JK3425 1938.A32
A compilation of the complete texts of the con-
stitutions of the 48 States and of the United States,
prepared under the direction of Charles Poletd,
chairman of the New York State Constitutional Con-
vention Committee, for use by members of the New
York State Constitutional Convention of 1938. As
published here, the constitutions contain all pro-
visions in force on January 1, 1938. All clauses of
the original documents and all amendments are
given in full unless they have been repealed. Edi-
torial insertions are indicated by brackets. In his
introduction, Mr. Poletd observes that the wealth of
constitutional experience presented in this volume
may suggest desirable provisions, but may also indi-
cate the dangers inherent in certain clauses. Par-
ticularly, he warns against the inclusion of certain
types of detailed provision in the basic law, pointing
to the regular amendment and reamendment of such
clauses, and the danger of turning what should be a
fundamental law into a welter of conflicting and
overlapping provisions and of breaking down the
distinction between a constitution and statute law.
Comparison between the average State constitution
and that of the United States, he notes, reveals the
superior judgment of those who drafted the basic
law of the Nation.
6081. Randall, James G. Constitutional problems
under Lincoln. Rev. ed. Urbana, Univer-
sity of Illinois Press, 1951. xxxiii, 596 p.
51-1577 JK201.R3 1951
Bibliography: p. 531-563.
A study of the constitutional problems which the
Civil War thrust upon the Lincoln administration.
Professor Randall regards secession as an extracon-
stitutional matter. To him, the most practical and
serious question of 1860-61 was not the constitution-
ality of secession but the wisdom and desirability of
it. He discusses such problems as the consistency
of war powers, both presidential and congressional,
with the Constitution, as well as the validity of
numerous war measures — the Emancipation Proc-
lamation, the creation of special war courts, the con-
fiscation of property, the creation of special war
crimes — and congressional approval of many execu-
tive acts which bordered on legislation, notably, of
course, Lincoln's suspension of the privilege of
habeas corpus. He notes the double nature of the
conflict, as both war and rebellion, the existence of
the Confederate States as a de facto government with
belligerent standing, and, under Lincoln's moderat-
ing influence, the reluctance of the Federal govern-
ment to prosecute for treason. In Professor Ran-
dall's opinion, Lincoln went farther than any other
President in assuming executive power independent-
ly of Congress; the judiciary played a passive rather
than an active part in the emergency; but the Con-
stitution, "while stretched, was not subverted."
6082. Read, Conyers, ed. The Constitudon recon-
sidered. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1938. xviii, 424 p. 38-39088 JK271.R33
A collection of 27 papers read before a meeting of
the American Historical Association at Philadelphia
in 1937 to mark the sesquicentennial of the United
States Constitudon. Organized in three groups, the
essays consider the background of political, eco-
nomic, and social ideas which determined the think-
ing of the Constitutional Convention and found ex-
pression in its work; analyze some portions of the
Constitution itself; and study its influence both upon
American and upon foreign political thought and
action. The consensus is that the Constitution has
been successfully adjusted to later times, new prob-
lems, and fresh currents of opinion; it has provided
a framework for living usages, and a flexible pattern
for an economic order, a political state, and a nas-
cent culture. The Constitudon is seen as a delib-
erate and rational effort to shape the world of social
relations to humane ends by devising a mechanism
of government able to guarantee life, liberty, and
the pursuit of happiness. Among the writers in-
cluded are Charles A. Beard, Henry Steele Com-
mager, Robert M. Mclver, and Herbert W.
Schneider.
6083. Sanders, Jennings B. Evolution of execudve
departments of the Continental Congress,
1774-1789. Chapel Hill, University of North Caro-
lina Press, 1935. 213 p 35-3939 JK411.S32
Bibliography: p. [1931-203.
A study of how the executive agencies of the Con-
tinental Congress developed, how they functioned
separately and in cooperation, and how they and the
choice of their personnel were affected by congres-
sional politics. Part 1 deals with the period to 1781,
during which Congress gradually abandoned the
attempt to exercise executive functions exclusively
through its own members. Action by the whole
body or by special committee was soon supplanted
by a system of standing committees for permanent
concerns such as war or treasury administration.
But this overburdened the abler members and left
legislation to the less gifted. The expedient of
boards, partly of members of Congress and pardy of
nonmembers, or of nonmembers subject to a com-
mittee of members, was resorted to, without much
improvement. Part 2 describes the general reorgan-
ization of 1 78 1 whereby three major departments,
958 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
for finance, war, and foreign affairs, were set up
under individual nonmember administrators.
When Robert Morris resigned under fire in 1784
he was replaced by a board of three nonmember
Treasury commissioners. Chapters concerning the
Post Office, 1775-89, and the Secretary of Congress,
1774-89, appear in this part because both were oper-
ations headed by individual nonmembers from the
beginning. Much of the procedure and personnel of
these departments was carried over into the depart-
ments set up under the Constitution. Dr. Sanders'
book is drier than need be, but indispensable as the
only detailed treatment of a very important subject.
He had previously described The Presidency of the
Continental Congress, 1774-89, 2d printing, rev.
(Chicago, 1930. 76 p.); it was chiefly of formal and
ceremonial importance and had next to nothing in
common with the executive presidency after 1789,
with which it has sometimes been mistakenly linked.
6084. Swisher, Carl Brent, American constitu-
tional development. 2d ed. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1954. 1 145 p.
54-2606 JK31.S9 1954
First published in 1943.
A history which takes the position that the Con-
stitution of the 1950's is much further from the Con-
stitution of the 1870's than was the latter from the
Constitution as originally applied. The author
therefore devotes approximately half of this volume
to an account of American constitutional develop-
ment in the 20th century. He attempts to show not
merely the nature and scope of the Constitution dur-
ing particular periods, but also the causes of changes
and the manner in which they were accomplished.
The judiciary, Congress, and the executive branch
of the Government, the author believes, have all
played important parts, both positively and nega-
tively, in these developments. Accordingly, he has
made ample use of congressional debate and
maneuver, and of Supreme Court decisions, which
often mark "the periphery of permitted constitu-
tional expansion." Among the Presidents who
played negative parts or who sought to restrain con-
temporary constitutional expansion he lists Van
Buren, Buchanan, Benjamin Harrison, and Cool-
idge. Jefferson, Jackson, Lincoln, Wilson, and
Franklin D. Roosevelt, who enlarged the powers of
their office, he regards as "makers of the Constitu-
tion" in a very real sense.
6085. Swisher, Carl Brent. The growth of con-
stitutional power in the United States.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1946. 261 p.
([Chicago. University. Charles R. Walgreen
Foundation for the Study of American Institutions.
Lectures!) A 46-543 JK34.S93
An examination of the American constitutional
system which devotes particular scrutiny to the
changes induced by war, depression, and the devel-
opment of mass-production industrialism. Although
Professor Swisher is interested primarily in fairly
recent events and in the current status of our
constitutional system, he makes some use of early
history when conditions and climates of opinion
differed greatly from those of the present, and
demonstrates the shift in ideology from the theories
of Edmund Burke and Adam Smith, Alexander
Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson, to those of Herbert
Hoover and Wendell Willkie, Henry Wallace and
Franklin D. Roosevelt. He believes that the Con-
stitution, besides establishing areas of immunity
from government control, embodies the spirit of
"rightness" — the judges have always interpreted it
not only as requiring right procedure but as in-
corporating the basic moral principles of the period —
and has been kept righteous by the infusion of new
concepts of rightness as they have matured in the
national community. Professor Swisher considers
more sweeping operation cf government controls
inevitable under mass-production industralism, but
remains untroubled about the increasing centraliza-
tion of power in the Federal government, since he
finds a variety of checks still standing as barriers
to the misuse of power.
6086. Thorpe, Francis Newton, comp. The Fed-
eral and state constitutions, colonial charters,
and other organic laws of the states, territories, and
colonies now or heretofore forming the United States
of America. Compiled and edited under the Act
of Congress of June 30, 1906. Washington, Govt.
Print. Off., 1909. 7 V. (59th Cong., 2d sess. House.
Document 357) 9-35371 JK18 1909
List of authorities: v. 1, p. xv-xxxv.
Save for an initial group of Federal documents
and commissions, charters, and plans of union, 1492-
1754, the materials of this indispensable official com-
pilation are arranged alphabetically by state or ter-
ritory. Arrangement under the alphabetical head-
ings is chronological. Cetrain acts of Congress and
treaties with other nations governing territories
acquired by annexation, cession, or conquest are also
printed in full. Explanatory footnotes are provided,
and an index to the whole appears in volume 7.
Here, as in no other work, is contained the whole
American experiment with government limited by
fundamental law, and the extraordinary variety of
means that have been employed to achieve essentially
identical ends.
6087. U. S. Constitutional Convention, 1787. The
records of the Federal Convention of 1787;
edited by Max Farrand. Rev. ed. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1937. 4 v.
37-25324 JK141 i937a
A collection of all available records — previously
unpublished, scattered through various printed vol-
umes, or issued in unsatisfactory form, before the
first edition of this work (1911) — of the convention
which framed the American Constitution at Phila-
delphia in 1787. The editor's primary aim was to
establish and to present his material "in the most
trustworthy form possible." All records of each
day's session are gathered together, affording maxi-
mum convenience for their collation. Cross-
references to the more important subjects and an
exhaustive general index (v. 4: p. 127-230) take
the place of subject headings. A special index (v.
4: p. 107-123) provides, in addition, references en-
abling one to trace the origin and evolution of every
clause adopted. Although the journal of the Con-
vention, kept in the form of minutes by William
Jackson, and Madison's notes of the debates are the
most important documents published here, other
notes and memoranda are included such as those
of Robert Yates of New York, Rufus King of
Massachusetts, James McHenry of Maryland, Wil-
liam Pierce of Georgia, William Paterson of New
Jersey, and Alexander Hamilton. Volumes 1 and
2 contain the proceedings of the Convention. In
volume 3 are printed the texts of supplementary rec-
ords, the Virginia, Pinckney, New Jersey, and
Hamilton Plans, and all significant references to the
Convention in the letters and other writings of the
55 delegates, of whatever date. In the 1937 revision
the three volumes of the original edition are re-
printed with only minor corrections, while the addi-
tional volume 4 contains "Further Additions and
Corrections" (p. 11-89) an^ the two indexes,
greatly improved over those in the original volume
3. The only considerable source that has turned up
since 1937 is the notebook of John Lansing, edited
by Joseph Reese Strayer under the title The Dele-
gate from New Yorl^ (Princeton,, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1939. 125 p.). It differs little from
the well-known notes of Lansing's colleague Robert
Yates.
6088. Van Doren, Carl C. The great rehearsal;
the story of the making and ratifying of the
Constitution of the United States. New York,
Viking Press, 1948. 336 p. illus.
48-657 JK146.V3 1948a
"Sources and acknowledgments": p. 321-322.
A history of the framing and ratification of the
Constitution of the United States during 1787 and
1788, based mainly upon the original records of the
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 959
Federal Convention in 1787, and of the State con-
ventions which ratified or rejected the Constitution.
Dr. Van Doren has also made expert use of the
contemporary press, and of the diaries, letters, and
other memorabilia of the principal figures. His
method of letdng them speak in their own words,
of presendng the argument in action, brings alive
the great personalities and the complex issues of
a crucial moment in American history, when a league
of jealous and sovereign States was boldly converted
into the Federal government. Both Washington
and Franklin, as well as many lesser men, came
to the Convention persuaded that the American ex-
periment in self-government could not survive with-
out major changes in its structure. The decisive
step in the Convention was "The Federal Compro-
mise" agreed to on July 3: the stalemate between
the large and the small States was broken by the
solution, anticipated by Roger Sherman but moved
by Franklin, of representing States in the lower
house in proportion to their population, and giving
them equal votes in the Senate. The title and the
preface suggest the analogy between the States of
the Confederation in 1787 and the sovereign states
of the United Nations in 1948, but it is not pursued
in the text.
6089. Warren, Charles. Congress, the Constitu-
tion, and the Supreme Court. New rev. and
enl. ed. Boston, Little, Brown, 1935. 346 p.
35-24270 JK31.W3 1935
First published in 1925
A history which deals with the United States
Supreme Court in its relation to acts of Congress,
specifically, with the Court's authority to determine
when Congress has overstepped the bounds set for
it by the Constitution, and to curb attempts by Con-
gress to alter or amend the Constitution. Mr. War-
ren also presents the views of early Congresses upon
the principle of judicial review, a brief description
of each case in which the Court had, by 1935, held an
act of Congress unconstitutional, and a review of the
Court's cases particularly affecting labor, whether
or not they were decided on constitutional grounds.
Arguing that there had been slight need for changes
in these powers of the Court, the author attacks
various proposals made to abolish or impair them.
The Court, he affirms, in its decisions declaring acts
of Congress invalid, has dealt with statutes whose
constitutional defects were later remedied by prop-
erly drawn legislation or by constitutional amend-
ment, or with cases that involved rights of citizens,
States, or other components of the Federal govern-
ment— rights of extreme importance to maintain,
and which would have been abrogated had Congress
had the power to set aside the Constitution.
96° /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
C. Constitutional Law
6090. Association of American Law Schools. Se-
lected essays on constitutional law, compiled
and edited by a committee of the Association of
American Law Schools. Chicago, Foundation
Press, 1938. 5 v. in 4. 38-29140 JK268.A75
A collection of approximately 300 papers by more
than 170 professors of law, judges, practicing law-
yers, and political scientists reprinted from law re-
views and other legal periodicals, bar association
reports, political science journals, and, in a few in-
stances, from books out of print or not readily
accessible. In selecting the essays, the editorial
group headed by Douglas B. Maggs, assisted by
several hundred scholars and lawyers, considered
the needs especially of judges and practicing lawyers,
students and teachers in law schools, and students
and teachers in political science departments. The
articles and notes published here collect and collate
decisions, trace the development of doctrine, and
examine critically both decisions and doctrines;
many project what their authors believed to be
tendencies and trends. Material was sought on all
Federal constitutional questions litigable in the
courts. Constitutional questions not litigable, con-
stitutional questions in the field of international law,
and problems of State constitutional law were disre-
garded. Book 1, "The Nature of the Judicial Proc-
ess in Constitutional Cases," includes historical
studies deemed of permanent importance and broad
treatments of basic ideas. Book 2, "Limitations of
Governmental Power," deals with restrictions held
to result from the constitutional guarantees of per-
sonal and property rights. Book 3, "The Nation
and the States," "weighs the constitutional questions
which grow out of the federal nature of our gov-
ernmental system." Books 4 and 5 examine, respec-
tively, the constitutional aspects of "Administration"
and "Taxation." Each book carries its own table of
contents, its own table of cases, and a subject index,
while Book 1 has in addition some bibliographical
aids. Caveat: Book 5 is in volume 1; otherwise
book and volume numbers coincide.
6091. Cooley, Thomas M. A treatise on the con-
stitutional limitations which rest upon the
legislative power of the states of the American
union. 8th ed., with large additions, considera-
tions of amendments, and giving the results of the
recent cases, by Walter Carrington. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1927. 2 v. (cciii, 1565 p.)
27-9874 JK241.C77 1927
"List of cases cited": p. xxiii-cxcv.
Characterized by lucidity of style and organization,
this classic work, first published in 1868, is still
valuable to the student of constitudonal problems.
Its purpose was to present such an explication of
constitutional principles as should serve, together
with its references to judicial decisions, legal treatises,
and historical events, as a guide to the study of the
powers denied to the States under the Constitudon.
Although the volume was thus based upon au-
thority and precedent, and its stated aim was to
demonstrate the law rather than the views of the
author, it was not without a philosophy of juris-
prudence or of the social order. Admittedly, Judge
Cooley of the Michigan Supreme Court wrote in
full sympathy with the restraints imposed upon the
exercise of the powers of government, and with
faith both in the checks and balances of the republi-
can system and in public opinion. His chapters
on the protection of personal liberty and property
were exceptionally strong and have been highly
influential. In the eighth edition, cognizance was
taken of the vast industrial and social changes
which had occurred since publication of the seventh
in 1903, and some new text was added. Reports of
important and pertinent cases were brought for-
ward to June 1, 1926.
6092. Corwin, Edward S. The Constitution and
what it means today. [ 12th ed.] Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1958. 344 p.
58-34767 Law
"Table of cases": p. 311-337.
This edition of a standard work first published in
This edition of a standard work first published in
1920 brings decisions of the Supreme Court, which
constitute its principal substance, forward approxi-
mately to 1958. Explanations of currently prevail-
ing doctrine and pracdce are accompanied by brief
summaries of their historical development. Among
the important matters considered are judicial re-
view, the commerce clause, the executive power,
the war power, national supremacy, and freedom
of speech, the press, and religion. The book shows
how powerful and pervasive the doctrine of na-
tional supremacy has become since the "Constitu-
tional Revolution" of 1937, when the Court returned
to Chief Justice Marshall's concepts. The con-
stantly augmented flow of discretionary power to
the President in an era of crisis is noted with the
comment that "a vacuum is all that Judicial Review
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 96 1
has to offer in such a situation." Judicial review is,
nevertheless, regarded here as taking on increasingly
"the character of a species of arbitration between
competing social interests rather than of adjudica-
tion in the strict sense of the term, namely, the
determination of the rights of adverse parties under
a setded, statable rule of law." The author offers
crisp comments upon the "censorship of quite in-
definite scope" exercised by the Court, and upon
such recent topics as the desegregation cases, the
tactics of the Governor of Arkansas, Presidential dis-
ability, and the Vice President's status and duty in
this event.
6093. Corwin, Edward S. A constitution of pow-
ers in a secular state; three lectures on the
William H. White Foundation at the University of
Virginia, April 1950, and an additional chapter.
Charlottesville, Va., Michie, 195 1. 126 p.
51-62174 JK303.C65
An analysis of the judicial translation of the power
requirements of national crisis — two world wars, the
Great Depression, and a fundamentally altered out-
look upon the purpose of government — into the
vocabulary of constitutional law. "In general
terms," says Professor Corwin, "our system has
lost resiliency and what was once vaunted as a Con-
stitution of Rights, both State and private, has been
replaced by a Constitution of Powers. More speci-
fically, the Federal System has shifted base in the
direction of a consolidated national power, while
within the National Government itself an increased
flow of power in the direction of the President has
ensued." This consolidation has been registered in
our constitutional law, he believes, through the
changed attitude of the Supreme Court, which has
in recent years asserted canons favorable to a strongly
centralized government of indefinite rather than
enumerated powers. "Presidential autocracy" has
become the dominant element in our constitutional
system. As remedies, Professor Corwin suggests
basing public policy on the related ideas of con-
sensus, compromise, and moderation, keeping leg-
islation a still available procedure of government in
the meeting of crisis conditions, and reconstructing
the Cabinet chiefly from the membership of
Congress.
6094. Corwin, Edward S. Liberty against gov-
ernment; the rise, flowering and decline of a
famous juridical concept. Baton Rouge, Louisiana
State University Press, 1 948. 2 1 o p.
48-8664 JC599.U5C66
Constitutional liberty exists if government itself
operates under constitutional restraints when it
seeks to impose restraints upon the people, and
juridical liberty is the kind of constitutional lib-
erty which results from the specialized type of
checks and balances known as judicial review.
Chapter 2 deals with the Roman and English
precedents for this American development, and
particularly with the ideas of John Locke, who
transmuted the law of nature into the rights of
men, and these into the rights of ownership. These
were developed by the early American bench and bar
into the doctrine of vested rights, which maintained
that existing property rights were superior to reform
legislation, and reached the apogee in the 1830's.
Since the Civil War the history of juridical liberty
has been bound up with the due process clause of the
14th Amendment. The Supreme Court was long in
realizing its potentialities, but finally in the 1890's it
followed the leaders of the American Bar in reading
it as an endorsement of economic laissez-faire,
"trimmed down to the doctrine of freedom of con-
tract in the field of industrial relations." By this
time, as an endorsement of "the prerogative of great
corporations in dealing with unorganized working-
men," it had become an anachronism, and fell an
easy victim to the constitutional revolution of the
1930's. The author makes clear his regret that
"liberty" and "equality" have come to appear as
opposed values, and that so great a tradition has had
so unworthy an end.
6095. Fenn, Percy Thomas. The development of
the Constitution. New York, Appleton-
Century, 1948 xix, 733 p. 48-1 113 JK268.F4
A casebook for undergraduate students, composed
of the doctrines and dicta of the judges of the Su-
preme Court, excerpted from their decisions or dis-
senting opinions. It emphasizes the nature of the
judicial power, the policy-making functions of high
courts in general and of the Supreme Court in partic-
ular, and the evolution of constitutional jurispru-
dence. Parts 1 and 2 isolate and examine the con-
trolling principles of constitutional law. Emphasis
is here placed upon the establishment by the Court of
the power to invalidate legislative enactments and
upon the due process clause of the 14th Amendment.
Parts 3 and 4 analyze two great governmental pow-
ers: the taxing power and the power to regulate
commerce. "The former implements the whole
federal system; the latter provides the basis for the
national power." Part 5 abandons the topical order
so as to deal unitarily with the great cases of the New
Deal, but includes some earlier ones in which the
Court reviewed federal protection of the general
welfare. Professor Fenn places the essentials of the
working constitutional system of the country in the
fields of due process, taxation, and commerce. "On
the exercise of the judicial power in these fields,"
says he, "the Court bases its supervision of the
policies of government." Introductions precede
962 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
most of the chapters and more or less elaborate
notes follow a number of the cases. Unfortunately
the only index furnished is a listing of the cases
selected.
6096. Frankfurter, Felix. The commerce clause
under Marshall, Taney and Waite. Chapel
Hill, University of North Carolina Press, 1937.
114 p. (The Weil lectures on American citizen-
ship [1936]) 37-888 HF1455.F7
Three short essays, originally delivered as lectures
at the University of North Carolina in 1936, which
analyze the direction given to the law of the com-
merce clause of the Constitution by Chief Justices
Marshall, Taney, and Waite, who held office, save
for an 11-year break, from 1801 to 1888. He traces
the ideas "which they drew out of the commerce
clause as the means for limiting state powers in their
inroads upon national policy, whether found in the
commerce clause itself or expressed in Congressional
legislation." All three Chief Justices were preoc-
cupied with the restrictive rather than the affirma-
tive use of the clause empowering Congress "To reg-
ulate Commerce with foreign Nations and among
the several States, and with the Indian Tribes."
The doctrine, first oudined by Marshall, that the
commerce clause, by its own force and without
national legislation, authorizes the Court to place
limits upon state jurisdiction, attained equilibrium
in Waite's period. Thereafter the issues concerned
application rather than the doctrine itself. Justice
Frankfurter places Taney second only to Marshall
in our constitutional history, and Waite, though
"not of their flight," in the great tradition.
6097. Mott, Rodney Loomer. Due process of
law; a historical and analytical treatise of the
principles and methods followed by the courts in the
application of the concept of the "law of the land."
Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merriil, 1926. lxxxi, 702 p.
26-13490 Law
This elaborately theoretical book, which originated
as a University of Wisconsin dissertation, traces "the
origin and development, as well as the application,
of those principles which the courts have developed
as part of the concept of due process of law." It
occurs in the Constitution, as the requirement that
no person shall be deprived of "life, liberty, or prop-
erty without due process of law," in the 5th and
14th Amendments. The study first reviews the
background literature of the Anglo-American tradi-
don of resistance to the exercise of arbitrary power,
beginning with "the law of the land" (lex terrae)
in the 39th section of Magna Carta, and including
the declarations of rights drawn up by the States
in their constitudons of the Revolutionary period.
Dr. Mott points out that "the simplest and most far-
reaching of constitutional phrases" first appeared in
the 5th Amendment (1791), which applies only to
Federal action. This limitation, together with a
desire to protect the loyal citizens and freedmen of
the South after Appomattox, led Congress to pro-
pose the 14th Amendment (1868), which applies
only to the States. Although the courts have gready
broadened the scope of due process and applied it
with increasing frequency, they have steadily upheld
the concept of the balance of convenience between
private rights and public welfare. At the heart of
the decisions, rendered chiefly in the spheres of
taxation and the police power, have been the prin-
ciples of "administrative convenience, balance of
convenience, or public purpose."
6098. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. The amending
of the Federal Constitution. Ann Arbor,
University of Michigan Press, 1942. xxvii, 242 p.
(Michigan legal studies) 4 2-36735 JK168.O7
Bibliography: p. [223J-233.
A collection of articles, reprinted for the most part
from law journals, which survey from various angles
the process of constitutional amendment as devel-
oped during the first 150 years of the nation's ex-
istence, and which quote many judicial and other
official opinions concerning Article Five of the Con-
stitution, which provides for amendments. The
book enters the field of constitutional law in its
analysis of the genesis, justiciability, and scope of
the amending power, and the procedure of amend-
ment. From jurisprudence is drawn the discussion
of the relation of the amending power to the concept
of sovereignty. The reform of the amending process
itself is investigated from the standpoint of political
science and legislation. Professor Orfield comments
upon the frequently repeated doctrine of the Su-
preme Court that the people are sovereign, that
they adopted the Constitution and may alter it.
Before they can correctly be called sovereign, he be-
lieves, the Constitution must be amended "so as to
permit a majority of the electorate of the entire
country to amend the Constitution." The federal
principle could be preserved by requiring a majority
of the voters in each State, or at least in each of
a majority of States. The present arrangement,
whereby "the people do not participate in a single
stage of the amending process," he regards as an
anachronistic survival of the 18th-century distrust
of democracy.
6099. Rottschaefer, Henry. The Constitudon and
socio-economic change; five lectures delivered
at the University of Michigan, March 24, 25, 26, 27,
and 28, 1947. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 963
Law School, 1948 [i.e. 1949] xvi, 253 p. (Michigan.
University. Law School. The Thomas M. Cooley
lectures, 1st ser.) 49-2548 Law
The chief purpose of this book is "not only to
describe and analyze die process by which constitu-
tional adaptation occurred during the crisis induced
by the most severe economic depression of modern
times, but also to develop the implications of the
constitutional theories and doctrines that constitute
the constitutional law of today." Although these
lectures trace the prior evolution of the constitu-
tional principles invoked by the Supreme Court
in support of its decisions affecting depression
legislation, for the most part they survey actions
taken during the years 1933-48. In this period
the Court so construed the Constitution as to
sustain a great expansion of Federal power, the
relaxation of important limitations on State powers,
more extensive and intensive regulation of business,
and an increased protection of personal liberty in
areas other than business. The real question, in
the opinion of the author (1948), was not whether
there would be a general retreat from these posi-
tions, but how much further the trends were likely
to be carried. "The dogma," he wrote, "that gov-
ernment should assume an important and perma-
nent role in achieving economic stability and a more
just social order is not likely to be discarded."
6100. Story, Joseph. Commentaries on the Con-
stitution of the United States: with a pre-
liminary review of the constitutional history of the
colonies and states before the adoption of the Con-
stitution. 5th ed., by Melville M. Bigelow. Bos-
ton, Litde, Brown, 1891. 2 v.
2-7028 JK211.S7 1891
"Cases cited": p. [xxi]-xxxiv.
A legal classic of continuing importance and
reputation first published in 1833 by Joseph Story
(1779-1845), Associate Justice of the United States
Supreme Court from 181 1. Most of the materials
were drawn from the discussions of the Constitu-
tion in The Federalist (no. 6074), and Chief Jus-
tice Marshall's judgments on constitutional issues.
The author disclaimed any ambition to interpret
the theory of the Constitution himself, but rather
sought to set forth "the true view of its powers,
maintained by its founders and friends, and con-
firmed and illustrated by the actual practice of the
government." As originally conceived by Story,
his Commentaries had three large divisions. The
first sketched the charters, constitutional history,
and ante-Revolutionary jurisprudence of the colo-
nies, the principles common to all, and the diversi-
ties among them. The second reviewed the con-
stitutional history of the Revolutionary states, and
the rise, progress, and decline of the Confederation.
The third narrated the origins and adoption of the
Constitution and explained all of its provisions, the
principles on which they were founded, and the
objections with which they had been assailed.
Editors of subsequent editions have added references
to amendments and adjudications down to January
1891, including a number of decisions from the
lower Federal courts and from State courts as well
as the Supreme Court, together with some other
public papers.
6101. Twiss, Benjamin R. Lawyers and the Con-
stitution; how laissez faire came to the
Supreme Court. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1942. 271 p. 42-19388 JK271.T9
The author's dissertation (Princeton University,
1938), the origin of the present work, was being
enlarged and revised at the time of his regrettably
early death. The manuscript was prepared for
publication by Professor Edward S. Corwin. Its
controversial purpose was to "analyze the vital func-
tion of the bar as liaison between businessmen and
judges, and to show how protests against govern-
ment interference with private enterprise were
translated into formal constitutional limitations."
Dr. Twiss aimed to show that the development of
American constitutional law during the period 1875—
1935 was primarily the work of a relatively small
group of lawyers whose clients were great financial
and business concerns. These members of the bar
sought to insulate the judges from any theories or
facts save those consistent with their own doctrines
of individualism, laissez faire, and limited govern-
ment power. The lawyers and the judges brought
together the "American political philosophy of
government limited by absolute fundamental rights,
the theory of non-interference with self-regulating
economic laws, and the legal and constitutional de-
vices of property, contract, states rights, and judicial
review to form the American constitutional doctrine
of freedom of private enterprise. That doctrine
flourished in the Supreme Court until the Revolu-
tion of 1937." The author found in the law schools
and the law-school journals, however, an awakening
skepticism toward this judicial doctrine. And in
upholding the National Labor Relations Act, he
believed, the Supreme Court had "finally recognized
that there can be a danger to liberty from private
sources as well as from government."
6102. U. S. Constitution. The Constitution of the
United States of America. Analysis and
interpretation; annotations of cases decided by the
Supreme Court of the United States to June 30, 1952.
Prepared by the Legislative Reference Service,
Library of Congress, Edward S. Corwin, editor.
Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1953. xwiv.
964 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1361 p. (82c! Cong., 2d sess. Senate. Document
no. 170) 53-63530 Law
A revised edition of a publication produced under
the same auspices in 1938 and more simply tided
The Constitution of the United States {Annotated).
It is a large-scale commentary on the Constitution as
interpreted and applied by the Supreme Court, and
it proceeds through the document and its first 21
Amendments in the most minute manner, section
by section, and, for the more complex sections,
clause by clause. Thus Article I, Section 1, requires
just two and a half lines of print, but it is followed
by 15 pages of commentary, organized under 3
main headings and 21 subordinate ones. For all
provisions of the Constitution it gives "the currendy
operative meaning," but for the most important ones
it also traces "the course of decision and pracdce
whereby their meaning was arrived at by the Court's
official interpreters." Supreme Court decisions are
the major source for the commentary, but they are
supplemented by acts of Congress, executive orders
and regulations, the proceedings of the 1787 Conven-
tion, dissenting opinions, and legal or historical
treatises. In Dr. Corwin's view, the Constitution's
capacity for growth has resided far more in the
Supreme Court's power of judicial review than in
the process of amendment. He therefore gives spe-
cial attention to certain broader doctrines, especially
of the nature of the Federal system and the relation
of governmental power to private rights, which have
influenced the Court and concerning which it has on
occasion changed its mind. His "Introduction" (p.
ix-xxxi) is particularly concerned with such doc-
trines. The commentary is followed by a list of the
73 acts of Congress which the Court has held uncon-
stitutional in whole or part (p. 1241-1253), a mas-
sive alphabetical "Table of Cases" (p. 1257-1333),
and an "Index" (p. 1337-1361), which is less de-
tailed because of the elaborate tables of contents that,
in the commentary, precede each Article and each
Amendment.
6103. Weaver, Samuel P. Constitutional law and
its administration. Chicago, Callaghan,
1946. xxxvii, 684 p. 46-6268 JK268.W4
A i-volume textbook intended for colleges, uni-
versities, and law schools which do not use the case-
book system of education, or as a supplement to the
many casebooks available, and as a handbook for
lawyers and others who desire a better understand-
ing of the Constitution and its application to mod-
ern conditions. Briefly considered are: the funda-
mental law of 1787; the 21 Amendments in force
in 1946; statutes implementing this law; decisions of
the courts interpreting and construing it; and the
established customs and usages of the Federal gov-
ernment, as well as certain inherent powers. The
book traces the evolution of the fundamental law
of 1787 into an "Enlarged Constitution," and the
development of a new federalism. Emphasis is
placed upon the recent recognition of new powers
supported by new doctrines. This process of change
has included "the overruling of precedents upon the
subject of taxation, and precedents defining many
of the limitations and guarantees of individual
rights; the expansion of the war powers of the
President; the increase of the powers of the Chief
Executive; the enlargement of the economic pow-
ers of the Federal Government"; the creation of
many new administrative boards and commissions;
and the recently evolved doctrine of inherent powers
of the Federal Government in external and foreign
affairs. A final part analyzes the three major pow-
ers remaining to the States: the police power, the
power of taxation, and eminent domain. The au-
thor provides many quotations from opinions and
statutes, but considers that casebook method in the
field has become too unwieldy.
6104. Willoughby, Westel Woodbury. The con-
stitutional law of the United States. 2d ed.
New York, Baker, Voorhis, 1929. 3 v. ( lxvii, 2002
p.) 29-13658 JK268.W6 1929
First published in 1910.
"Table of cases" prepared by Leon Sachs: v. 1, p.
xix-lxvii.
A systematically arranged and, as of 1929,
complete exposition of the constitutional law of
the United States, whose purpose is "to ascertain
and to discuss critically the broad principles upon
which have been founded the decisions rendered by
the Supreme Court of the United States in the lead-
ing cases, and thus to present, as a systematic whole,
a statement of the underlying doctrines by which
our complex system of constitudonal jurisprudence
is governed." This work sets forth the processes
of judicial reasoning by which they have been estab-
lished, suggests corollaries that may be drawn from
them, and indicates the relations which they bear
to each other and to the more general doctrines of
American public law. Extensive quotation is made
from the language of the Supreme Court. By an
examination of the statutes of Congress, Professor
Willoughby has attempted to show the increase of
Federal regulation and the manner in which the
Federal government exercises the constitudonal pow-
ers vested in it. Among the principal subjects dealt
with are: the division of powers between the United
States and the states, Federal supremacy and its
maintenance, citizenship and naturalization, Fed-
eral powers of taxation, the powers of Congress,
reguladon of commerce, the Federal judiciary, the
powers and duties of the President, the separadon
of powers, and due process of law.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT
/ 965
6105. Wright, Benjamin Fletcher. The contract
39-4050 JK371.C6W7
clause of the Constitution. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1938. xvii, 287 p.
"Cases cited": p. [2611-277.
A study of the nature and the significance for
American constitutional and economic history of
Ardcle I, Section 10, Clause 1, of the Constitution,
which forbids the States to pass laws impairing the
obligation of contracts. The author accepts Dr.
Corwin's view that the doctrine of vested property
rights has, from the beginning, been the basic doc-
trine of American constitutional law, and adds that,
so far as the Supreme Court was concerned, during
the 19th century this doctrine was identified with
the contract clause. His book is based upon all of
the contract clause cases (about 500) brought before
the Court, and while the leading decisions are
emphasized, the lesser ones are treated in bulk for
their economic significance. He considers that the
limited, relatively specific meaning which the
clause bore in 1787 was developed by judicial expan-
sion into one far more inclusive and of much greater
economic significance by 1835 or 1864, but he thinks
that this expansion fitted in remarkably well with
the democratic sentiment of the times. The impor-
tant interpretations — that the clause includes con-
tracts to which a State is a party, that a corporate
charter is a contract, that it protects a contract for
tax exemption, and that it prohibits retrospective
bankruptcy or stay laws — were laid down while the
Court was headed by Marshall and Taney (1801-
64). After 1890 the contract clause was overshad-
owed by the due process of law clauses in the Court's
mediation between property rights and public
requirements.
D. Civil Liberties and Rights
6106. American Academy of Political and Social
Science, Philadelphia. Civil rights in Amer-
ica, edited by Robert K. Carr. Philadelphia, 1951.
238 p. (Its Annals, v. 275)
58-4188 Hi.A4,v.275
JC599.U5A323
These 19 articles provide a summation of the mid-
20th-century status of American civil liberties. The
conscious and deliberate attempt to give practical
meaning to the specific guaranties of the Bill of
Rights has found expression chiefly in Supreme
Court decisions handed down since 1920. These
decisions, especially those concerning freedom of
speech and press, have placed the States under
Federal judicial discipline in areas within which
the States have been the main offenders. The
Supreme Court has also defined and protected re-
ligious liberty. The Civil Rights Division of the
Department of Justice, set up as a section in 1939,
has devoted itself to enforcement of the peonage
laws, the laws protecting citizens in their right
to vote for Federal officers, and laws punishing
such crimes as police brutality or official partici-
pation in lynchings. Beginning with New York
in 1945, some States have enacted antidiscrim-
inatory legislation — fair employment practice laws,
fair educational practice laws, prohibitions of dis-
crimination in places of public accommodation.
A number of private organizations operate pri-
marily in the field of civil liberties and rights,
among them the American Civil Liberties Union,
the National Association for the Advancement of
Colored People, and the American Jewish Congress.
This is all taken here as evidence of progress in
"social engineering." On the debit side, however,
are listed private discrimination against the Amer-
ican Negro and odier minority groups, rigid local
censorship of books, magazines, and motion pictures,
and, most serious, the threats posed to civil liberty
by unwisely chosen and operated policies and pro-
cedures for combating communism.
6107. Brown, Ralph Sharp. Loyalty and security;
employment tests in the United States. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1958. xvii, 524 p.
(Yale Law School studies, 3)
58-6536 HF5549.5.R44B7
"The purpose of this book is first to explore and
synthesize our disorderly growth of loyalty and se-
curity measures, and then to suggest ways of cor-
recting or eliminating their apparent excesses." It
surveys the standards, procedures, and effects of
nearly every kind of employment test used as an
internal security technique in the United States.
Among them are the administrative arrangements of
of the Federal government for dealing with its em-
ployees, with military personnel, and with defense
contractors' employees, the various State and local
test oaths and administrative programs, and testa
administered by private employers and labor unions.
These tests are actually "concerned with disloyalty,
and essentially with one form of disloyalty: a prefer-
ence for communism," or, put another way, "a
treasonable state of mind that may lead to a treason-
966 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
able act." Professor Brown examines the justifica-
tion for loyalty and security tests and makes recom-
mendations for restricting them to "the limited
circumstances in which political employment tests
are necessary and defensible." Loyalty and security
tests have been practiced, he believes, with too much
rigor and too little humanity, and have needlessly
impaired the freedoms of belief, speech, and asso-
ciation protected by the First Amendment.
6108. Chafee, Zechariah. The blessings of liberty.
Philadelphia, Lippincott, 1956. 350 p.
56-6563 JC599.U5C48
The late Professor Chafee (1 885-1957) taught at
the Harvard Law School for 40 years, and was
esteemed as one of the most disinterested defenders
of American civil liberties. In the present volume
he collected his addresses and articles of 1944-56 on
the subject. The third paper reviews freedom of
speech and of the press since 1917, postulating a
period of struggle and criminal prosecutions, 1917—
20; a period of growth, 1920-30; a period of achieve-
ment, 1930-45; and a recent period of renewed
struggle and subtle suppressions. The first essay,
"Watchman, What of the Night?", lists 11 encroach-
ments upon liberty which have taken place since
1945; asserts that the present trends, if continued
into an indefinite future, will produce "more indirect
and subtle suppressions of liberty"; but expresses
confidence that the American people will bring about
a major reversal in the near future. Other papers
discuss the McCarran Act (the Subversive Activities
Control Act of 1950) in relation to the Bill of
Rights; the proposed loyalty oath of the American
Bar Association; "The Right not to Speak" under
the Fifth Amendment; and the diverse forms of
attack upon academic freedom. Professor Chafee's
last thought was: "The blessings of liberty, though
weakened, are ours if we want them, to hold and
make strong. The flag still flies, and the city is not
yet fallen."
6109. Chafee, Zechariah. Free speech in the
United States. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1946. xviii, 634 p.
48-3488 JC591.C52 1946
"Bibliographical note": p. [569]~57i.
A synthesis of all of Professor Chafee's ideas on
freedom of speech, and a discussion of the major
court decisions upon it, mainly from 1920 to March
31, 1 94 1. A number of the chapters are reprinted,
some revised and some not, from other publications.
"This book is an inquiry into the proper limitations
upon freedom of speech," states the author, "and is
in no way an argument that any one should be
allowed to say whatever he wants anywhere and at
any time." More specifically, he examines the
nature and scope of the First Amendment to the
Constitution. Its framers, he believes, sought to
preserve the earlier victory abolishing censorship,
and to win a new one by abolishing prosecutions
for sedition. "The true boundary line of the
First Amendment," he writes, "can be fixed only
when Congress and the courts realize that the
principle on which speech is classified as lawful
or unlawful involves the balancing against each
other of two very important social interests, in
public safety and in the search for truth." In his
opinion, every reasonable attempt should be made to
maintain both interests unimpaired. The great pub-
lic interest in free speech should be sacrificed to cen-
sorship or punishment only when it really im-
perils the public safety by direct and dangerous
interference.
61 10. Cornell University. Cornell studies in civil
liberties. Robert E. Cushman, advisory
editor. Ithaca, Cornell University Press, 1946-57.
15 v.
A group of 15 studies (nos. 6111-6125) concern-
ing civil liberty and security made under the general
direction of Professor Robert E. Cushman of Cornell
University and supported chiefly by a grant from the
Rockefeller Foundation. Beginning in 1948 a num-
ber of scholars, working independently under Pro-
fessor Cushman, began investigation of the impact
upon our civil liberties of current government pro-
grams designed to ensure internal security and to
expose and control disloyal or subversive conduct.
The seven reports issuing from this particular
research, one edited and one written by Walter Gell-
horn, and one each by Edward L. Barrett, Jr., Vern
Countryman, Lawrence H. Chamberlain, Robert K.
Carr, and Eleanor Bontecou, cover the work of Fed-
eral and State un-American activities committees
and the operation of Federal, State, and local loyalty
and security programs. Stimulus for these inquiries
was presumably furnished by President Truman's
Loyalty Order of 1947, which forms the hard core
of the program to assure the loyalty of Federal
employees, although it was preceded by less far-
reaching measures and has since been supplemented
in important ways.
61 1 1. Barrett, Edward L. The Tenney Commit-
tee; legislative investigation of subversive
activities in California. Ithaca, 1951. 400 p.
51-11118 HX91.C3A5 19493c
Covers the work of the "Little Dies Committee"
of the California State Senate, which employed the
doctrine of association to identify Communists and
their sympathizers, and sought to punish them by
publicity and other means during the period
1941-49.
6ii2. Bontecou, Eleanor. The Federal loyalty-
security program. Ithaca, 1953. 377 p.
53-10749 JK734.B6
Appendixes (p. 272-366): 1. Executive orders. —
2. Statutes and regulations relating to the employ-
ment, dismissal, and investigation of employees of
the executive branch of the Federal government. —
3. Extracts from exhibits accompanying report of
the President's Temporary Commission on Em-
ployee Loyalty. — 4. The training of investigators. —
5. Sample rules and regulations. — 6. The At-
torney General's list. — 7. Listing of subversive
organizations.
An objective study, copiously documented, which
relates the development of the loyalty-security pro-
gram to the work of the Dies Committee in the
late 1930's, and to subsequent piecemeal efforts to
deal with suspected subversives in Federal employ-
ment through the Civil Service Commission and
the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The mechanics
of adjudicating charges of disloyalty and security
risk under the full formal program initiated in 1947
are dealt with, as are problems arising from the
investigative process, and the techniques and stand-
ards of judgment involved.
61 13. Carr, Robert K. Federal protection of civil
rights; quest for a sword. Ithaca, 1947.
284 p. 48~5II7. JC599-U5C35
An analysis of the work of the Civil Rights Sec-
tion (now Division) of the United States Depart-
ment of Justice, which was established in 1939 to
pursue a course of "aggressive protection of funda-
mental rights inherent in a free people." Chapter
1 notes that although the function of the Constitu-
tion in protecting civil rights against interference
by government is in general that of a shield, some
provisions can serve as a sword. In some instances,
the Federal government can take positive measures
to safeguard civil liberties by prosecuting State and
local officials, or private individuals who infringe
them. Chapters 1-4 deal with the Civil Rights Sec-
tion's early efforts to discover, clarify, use, and
develop the existing Federal law of civil liberty, both
constitutional and statutory, most of which was
vague, inadequate, and dating from the Reconstruc-
tion period. Chapters 5-6 oudine the development
of administrative techniques and legal strategy by
the Section and classify the kinds of cases handled
by it, such as police brutality, election irregularities,
peonage, freedom of communications, and conflicts
between labor and management. A final chapter
discusses as of 1947 "The Sword and the Future."
61 14. Carr, Robert K. The House Committee on
Un-American Activities, 1945-1950. Ithaca,
1952. 489 p. 52-!4423 E743-5C3
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 967
"List of publications of the House Committee on
Un-American Activities": p. 464-469.
A history of the first six years of the Committee's
existence after its establishment as a permanent
agency of Congress by "one of the most remarkable
procedural coups in Congressional history.' Two
of its more celebrated episodes were the hearings
on the Hollywood writers and the Hiss-Chambers
controversy. Sober and reflecdve in its review of
the Committee's acdviues, this inquiry concludes
with the comment: "On balance the good things
the . . . Committee has done are outweighed by
the bad," and the suggestion that its work be han-
dled by other standing committees of Congress.
61 15. Chamberlain, Lawrence H. Loyalty and
legislative action; a survey of activity by the
Xew York State Legislature, 19 19-1949. Ithaca,
195 1. 254 p. 5I~I449° JC599.U52N52
A detailed and carefully documented examination
of the Lusk, McNaboe, and Rapp-Coudert investi-
gadons of disloyalty, and of associated events and
consequences, including dismissals of teachers by the
Board of Higher Education of New York City.
6116. Countryman, Vern. Un-American activities
in the State of Washington; the work of die
Canwell Committee. Ithaca, 1951. 405 p.
51-14732 HX91.W3C6
An appraisal as well as a thoroughly documented
report of the work during 1947-50 of the Joint Leg-
islative Fact-Finding Committee on Un-American
Activities in the State of Washington and of the Uni-
versity of Washington's Committee on Tenure and
Academic Freedom. Both groups attempted to
determine whether certain "radical" professors were
academically incompetent, or were guilty of deliber-
ately seeking to undermine the foundations of the
republic and therefore of the abuse of academic
freedom.
61 17. Cushman, Robert E. Civil liberties in the
United States; a guide to current problems
and experience. Ithaca, 1956. 248 p.
56-13957 JC599.U5C82
"Selected readings" at end of chapters.
A comprehensive outline of the practice which
obtained in the whole field of civil liberdes during
the decade following World War II. Professor
Cushman, an authority on the subject and advisory
editor of the series, has sought to do three things:
to indicate the status of each civil liberty at the close
of the war; to summarize the principal developments
which occurred regarding each in the perioJ cov-
ered; and to point out the unsolved problems,
together with some of the more important proposals
for dealing with them. Venturing neither opinion
968 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
nor solution but admitting to a bias in favor of the
protection of civil liberty, he presents his material
under nine headings: "Freedom of Speech, Press,
Assembly, and Petition"; "Academic Freedom";
"Freedom of Religion: Separation of Church and
State"; "The Right to Security and Freedom of the
Person"; "Military Power and Civil Liberty"; "The
Civil Liberties of Persons Accused of Crime"; "Civil
Liberties and National Security"; "Civil Liberties of
Aliens"; and "Racial Discrimination."
6118. Gellhorn, Walter. Security, loyalty, and sci-
ence. Ithaca, 1950. 300 p.
50-14649 UB270.G42
An examination of Federal government and uni-
versity actions regarding security of technical infor-
mation and the loyalty of scientists, which concludes
that national policies on secrecy in scientific matters
were, as of 1950, intelligentiy formulated but too
rigidly applied, and were hindering the advance
of scientific knowledge.
61 19. Gellhorn, Walter ed. The states and sub-
version. Ithaca, 1952. 454 p.
52-10508 Law
Condensed reports by seven contributors on legis-
lation and other official actions of States and munici-
palities to control subversion, which indicates that by
1952 the States had departed from the idea of guilt
as personal to the accused. There was a widespread
admission of the doctrine of guilt by association in
both legislation and investigations. The reports on
California, New York, and Washington receive
book -length treatment elsewhere in the series (nos.
6111, 6115-6116).
6120. Konvitz, Milton R. The alien and the Asi-
atic in American law. Ithaca, 1946. xiv,
299 p. 47-30101 JX4265.K65
Bibliography: p. 280-283.
Although it draws substance from the decisions of
other Federal courts and from State and national
law, this is a study primarily "of how the United
States Supreme Court has reacted to problems relat-
ing to the alien and to the American citizen of
Asiatic descent. It is also a study of the past and
present legal status of these groups, and an attempt
to make a contribution to the field of legal and polit-
ical sociology." Among the subjects considered are:
the right of citizenship, the retention of it, the right
of land ownership, work laws, segregation, mis-
cegenation, and the World War II relocation of per-
sons of Japanese extraction, including American
citizens. The author is severely critical of the dis-
criminations found in American law.
61 2 1. Konvitz, Milton R. Bill of Rights reader;
leading constitutional cases. Ithaca, 1954.
xix, 591 p. 54-12758 Law
Partial contents. — 2. The rule of law. — 3.
Freedom of religion. — 4. Freedom of assembly and
petition. — 5. Freedom of speech and press: some
basic principles. — 6. Freedom of speech and press:
the clear and present danger doctrine. — 7. Freedom
of speech and press: the problem of loyalty. — 8.
Freedom of speech and press: censorship and con-
tempt by publicadon. — 9. Personal security. — 10.
Freedom from race discrimination. — 11. Freedom
of labor.
Intended for "the average, educated American
who is interested in the great issues and the great
debates of his day." Of the nearly 80 cases included,
all but a few were decided by the Supreme Court.
They deal with all provisions incorporating civil
and political liberties in the original Constitution
and the Civil War Amendments, as well as in the
Bill of Rights proper (Amendments 1-10). In
order to show some decisions in their context of
disagreement and conflict, Professor Konvitz has
included concurring and dissenting opinions.
6122. Konvitz, Milton R. Civil rights in immi-
gration. Ithaca, 1953. 216 p.
53-12660 Law
A cridque of American immigration policy, more
particularly of discrimination enacted into, and hard-
ships and inequities arising under, legislation re-
lating to the admission, exclusion, deportation, and
naturalization of immigrants. Dr. Konvitz con-
siders the problems of whom to admit, making
special reference to the system of quotas by national
origin; of whom to send back to the country of
origin, paying special attention to the questions of
fair hearings and proper grounds for deportation;
and of whom to make cidzens.
6123. Konvitz, Milton R. Fundamental liberties
of a free people: religion, speech, press, as-
sembly. Ithaca, 1957. 420 p.
51-11W JC599.U5K6
A topical history of the First Amendment free-
doms which argues that they stand in intimate
reladon to each other, "that freedom of conscience
and religion implies freedom of thought and free-
dom of teaching, and that freedom of speech and
press is indispensable to religious beliefs which may
be laden with unpopular judgments about the con-
duct of polidcal and economic affairs in the city
of man." Besides these, such others are considered
as the freedom not to speak and not to listen, and
the right to privacy. In discussing literary free-
dom, Professor Konvitz disdnguishes works of
artistic purpose from "dirt for dirt's sake," and
pleads for the right of the former to the protection
of the First Amendment. He urges public support
of the press in its claims to freedom of information.
He argues against invasion of the First Amend-
ment freedoms by coercive or restrictive legislation
because he regards them as indispensable means to
the effective and intelligent operation of the demo-
cratic process, essential to the foundations and the
security of the republic.
6124. Sibley, Mulford Q., and Philip E. Jacob.
Conscription of conscience; the American
state and the conscientious objector, 1940-1947.
Ithaca, 1952. 580 p. 52-12673 UB342.U5S52
"Selected and annotated bibliography": p. 549-
566.
An inquiry into the treatment accorded conscien-
tious objectors in the United States during World
War II. It investigates such matters as the classifi-
cation of objectors, the church-operated Civilian
Public Service camps, and the objectors' work in for-
estry, agriculture, medical research, and hospitals
for the insane. It finds little but problems unsolved
and failures: the disappointments in religious, edu-
cational, and self-government programs; the erosion
of morale; economic hardships; and an uneasy part-
nership between the "Historic Peace Churches" and
the Selective Service. Conditions were particularly
bad in the government camps, operated primarily for
"troublemakers"; here rebellious objectors engaged
in slowdowns and other forms of obstruction, and
were naturally met by increased repression. Sub-
stantial classes of conscientious objectors, such as
nonreligious objectors, remained outside the limits
of official tolerance, and were given terms in Federal
prisons. The authors remark that the "c. o.'s" nei-
ther had nor developed any unity of outlook or pro-
gram, that the measures of restraint adopted proved
futile and pernicious, and that "the conflict between
conscience and the state" was far from being resolved
during World War II.
6125. Smith, James Morton. Freedom's fetters;
the Alien and Sedition laws and American
civil liberties. Ithaca, 1956. 464 p.
56-2434 E327.S59
See no. 3308.
6126. Emerson, Thomas I., and David Haber, eds.
Political and civil rights in the United States;
a collection of legal and related materials. Fore-
word by Robert M. Hutchins. Buffalo, Dennis,
1952. xx, 1209 p. (United States case book scries)
52-4386 Law
A comprehensive collection of cases and other
materials taken from nearly all areas in which the
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 969
freedom of American individuals and private groups
is of juridical concern. The editors are concerned
with the following rights: security of the person
from bodily harm, involuntary servitude, and the
fear of physical restraint; procedural safeguards for
individuals who come into conflict with the law; the
right to exercise the franchise; the right of full free-
dom of political organization and political expres-
sion; freedom of all other forms of expression; aca-
demic freedom; freedom of religion and the separa-
tion of church and state; and, finally, equality of
legal status and opportunity for all persons. Pro-
fessors Emerson and Haber find that a steady expan-
sion and refinement of political and civil rights took
place between 1787 and the close of World War II,
reaching a peak during the late 1930's and early
1940's, but that between 1945 and 1952 the trend
was reversed. This retreat from the practices of
democratic freedom the editors attribute to a variety
of factors, both internal and external, particularly to
the increasing complexity of our industrial society
and to the turbulence of world conditions. The
retrogression may be temporary, they observe with
restrained optimism, since the legal tools for main-
taining these rights are significantly improved over
those of any past period.
6127. Ernst, Morris L. The first freedom. New
York, Macmillan, 1946. xiv, 316 p.
46-1639 JC599.U5E7
"Partial bibliography": p. 272-278.
The "first freedom" is that of communication
and thought guaranteed by the Bill of Rights. Al-
though Mr. Ernst believes this country to be re-
markably free from that political censorship of
the press, radio, and motion pictures which char-
acterizes so many nations under dictatorship, he
finds real danger in the rise of "monopolies of the
mind." In only 117 cities of America, for ex-
ample, did competing daily newspapers exist as of
1946; one-third of all regular radio networks were
interlocked with newspapers. Thus there had been
concentration of control in these "separate" indus-
tries, and the firm interlacing of what should be
competitive media of communication. The market
place of free competition for motion pictures was
destroyed through interaction between a combina-
tion of the five major companies and the Hays
office. The author finds the causes of the concen
tration economic, the dangers essentially spiritual,
menacing "our greatest contribution to the history
of mankind." He offers a number of practical sug-
gestions for the restoration of "competition of
thought" in the United States. As the greatest
proponents of the first freedom, says Mr. Ernst, we
'"must get our own house in order before we can
rightfully assume that place of leadership in the
970 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
family of nations which our rich tradition warrants."
Another New York lawyer, who specialized in
rights cases and was for many years national direc-
tor of the American Civil Liberties Union, was
Arthur Garfield Hays (1881-1954). In Let Free-
dom Ring (New York, Liveright Pub. Corp., 1937.
475 p.), originally published in 1928 and enlarged
nine years later, he gave witty but earnest accounts
of cases in which he had been concerned as counsel
for the Union over a 15-year period.
6128. Kelly, Alfred H., ed. Foundations of free-
dom in the American Constitution. New
York, Harper, 1958. xviii, 299 p.
58-7976 Law
Bibliography: p. 251-257.
Partial contents. — Introduction, by J. B.
Oakes. — What liberty means to free men, T. V.
Smith. — Where constitutional liberty came from, by
A. H. Kelly. — The great liberty: freedom of speech
and press, by Z. Chafee. — Constitutional liberty and
the communist problem, by J. W. Peltason. — Consti-
tutional liberty and congressional investigations, by
R. K. Carr. — Constitutional liberty and loyalty pro-
grams, by A. F. Westin.
Six essays on constitutional liberty, prepared
originally as pamphlets for the Freedom Agenda
program of the Carrie Chapman Catt Memorial
Fund in 1954-56. This program was designed to
combat the nationwide sense of fear, suspicion, and
hostility aroused by the tensions and frustrations of
the world situation and by sensational charges of
widespread communist infiltration into government
and the professions. Affirmatively, the plan was de-
signed to promote a greater awareness of the mean-
ing of the Bill of Rights and all our constitutional
guaranties, a greater relaxation in our attitude to-
ward nonconformity, and a greater appreciation of
the basic values of liberty, freedom, and individual
liberty. The last three papers have been extensively
rewritten, and demonstrate the great improvement
in the state of American civil liberty which has
been brought about since 1954 by the healthy cor-
rectives of politics, law, public opinion, and, es-
pecially, the decisions rendered by the Supreme
Court. The reaction described in these essays forms
strong testimony to the continued vitality of the
ideal of constitutional liberty in the United States.
6129. Konvitz, Milton R. The Constitution and
civil rights. New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1947. 254 p. A 47-1 1 16 JK1726.K6
A discussion of the legal aspects of Federal and
State legislation for the protection of the civil rights
of minorities in the United States. Civil rights in
their limited and technical sense refer "to the rights
of persons to employment, and to accommodations
in hotels, restaurants, common carriers, and other
places of public accommodation and resort," as
enumerated in the Federal Civil Rights Act of 1875
and in various acts against discrimination on the
statute books of 18 States. The author noted that in
30 American States, as of 1946, no civil rights legis-
lation had been enacted, and that, as the Constitu-
tion and statutes had been construed by the Supreme
Court, the scope of the Federal civil rights acts was
extremely narrow. He analyzed significant Su-
preme Court decisions on racial discrimination from
the Civil Rights Cases of 1S83 to the Screws Case of
1945. He discussed the extent of Federal authority
in cases of lynching and of discrimination in em-
ployment. The final chapter glanced hastily at the
large body of laws which, in 20 States, imposed dis-
crimination or segregation, and at the even larger
body of local custom behind it. Appendixes give
samples of proposed Federal laws and of existing
State ones. The book is now chiefly useful as a
background for the debates and sweeping changes of
the past decade.
6130. Stouffer, Samuel A. Communism, con-
formity, and civil liberties; a cross-section of
the nation speaks its mind. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1955. 278 p. illus.
55-7160 JC599.U5S82
"Notes on materials from other surveys as related
to the findings in this volume": p. 274-278.
An analysis and interpretation of American atti-
tudes toward "the communist conspiracy" both
inside and outside the country, and toward those
"who in thwarting the conspiracy would sacrifice
some of the very liberties which the enemy would
destroy." The study is based upon field work
done in 1954 among more than 6,000 men and
women from all walks of life by interviewers from
the American Institute of Public Opinion and the
National Opinion Research Center. The general
conclusion reached is that great social, economic,
and technological forces are slowly, even impercep-
tibly, spreading tolerance and respect "for others
whose ideas are different." Professor Stouffer
warns of the necessity of vigilance as the price of
liberty, however, and of the difficulties faced by its
special guardians — the press, radio, television, and
national and local political leaders — in distinguish-
ing between the evils of communism and a danger-
ous disregard for civil liberties. Harold D. Lass-
well's National Security and Individual Freedom
(New York, McGraw-Hill, 1950. 259 p.) provides
a rather elaborate theoretical framework for this
dilemma, intended to supply criteria whereby any
particular safeguard may be judged for its effects
upon liberty, whether in the sphere of government,
of social institutions, or of the individual. Civil Lib-
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 97 1
erties under Attac\ (Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 195 1. 155 p.) consists of six
lectures delivered at Swarthmore College. Henry
Steele Commager, Robert K. Carr, Zechariah Cha-
fee, Walter Gellhorn, Curtis Bok, and James P.
Baxter divide between them the subjects of civil
rights, measures aimed at radicalism or subversion,
and menaces to science, the arts, and education.
E. Government: General
613 1. Anderson, William. The units of govern-
ment in the United States, an enumeration
and analysis. New ed., completely rev. Chicago,
Public Administration Service, 1945. 48 p. illus.
([Public Administration Service, Chicago] Publica-
tion no. 83) 45-35 10 JS345 1945.A57
"First published, 1934 . . . New edition, com-
pletely revised, 1942; reprinted, with appendix,
1945."
A statistical study of all the units of government
operating in this county as of January 1, 194 1. Pro-
fessor Anderson attempted to learn how many
distinct units were functioning, their principal classes
and characteristics, and the areas and populations
served by them. He discusses trends with respect to
increases and decreases in die number of local units,
the question whether too few or too many such units
exist, and the optimum size for urban and rural
units. He is interested chiefly in administrative
efficiency and fiscal economy. In urban as in rural
areas it is desirable, he believes, to have only a single
important administrative unit in each defined area.
He finds per capita expenditures in cities of from
30,000 to 300,000 about the same with only a slight
upward tendency as sizes increases, although above
the latter figure increase appears to be more pro-
nounced. The ordinary county expenditures per
capita, including overhead, decrease very noticeably
when population reaches 30,000 to 35,000, but there-
after decline less rapidly. The author would re-
duce the number of local units for the average State
from 3,500 to approximately 370.
6132. Binkley, Wilfred E., and Malcolm C. Moos.
A grammar of American politics; the na-
tional government. 3d ed., rev. New York,
Knopf, 1958. 806 p. 58-5009 JK274.B57 1958
6133. Binkley, Wilfred E., and Malcolm C. Moos.
A grammar of American politics; the na-
tional, state, and local governments. 2d ed., rev.
andenl. New York, Knopf, 1952. 1059 p. (Borzoi
books in political science)
51-11102 JK274.B57 1952
"Supplementary reading": p. 747-771, 1051-1059.
A large-scale textbook, originally published in
1949, by a veteran professor at Ohio Northern Uni-
versity and Professor Moos of Johns Hopkins, who
in 1958 joined the White House staff as a speech-
drafting aide to the President. For their treatment
of State and local governments one must consult the
fuller edition of 1952 (p. [787]-i059), but the
larger portion concerned with the national govern-
ment has received a further revision, the preface of
which is dated September 1957. The new book is
20 pages longer than the corresponding portion of
the 1952 edition; the introductory chapter is re-
titled "Social Forces in American Politics," instead
of "The Dynamics of American Government," and
partially rewritten; and three chapters contributed
by economic specialists have been replaced by four
written by the authors (although one of these, "Agri-
culture and Conservation," proves to be in fact Dr.
Walter W. Wilcox's original contribution with very
minor revisions). The organization remains the
same: besides two sections on the executive branch
and one each on the legislative and judicial, four
others deal with the constitutional foundations, citi-
zenship, "Institutions of Popular Control," and
"Major Federal Functions."
6134. Burns, James MacGregor, and Jack Walter
Peltason. Government by the people; the
dynamics of American national, state, and local gov-
ernment. 3d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Pren-
tice-Hall, 1957. 990 p. illus.
57-8221 JK274.B855 1957a
Bibliography: p. 919-956.
A large-scale textbook by Professor Burns of Wil-
liams College and Professor Peltason of the Uni-
versity of Illinois, first issued in 1952. Like its
predecessors, the third edition is available in the full
form entered above, or in a shorter one dealing with
the national government only, or in a paperbound
reprint of seven chapters entitled The Dynamics of
Ameiican State and Local Government; and there
is a teaching manual for the edition prepared by
Walter S. Wilmot, Jr. The authors state that they
have tried to make their book effective for training
in critical thinking, citizenship, and liberal educa-
tion by organizing it around five basic problems:
keeping popular government stable and yet progres-
972 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
sive; achieving a balance between liberty and order;
achieving the best representation of the people in a
democratic manner; securing the optimum degree
of popular control of our leaders; and answering the
challenge of Communists and other antidemocrats.
The book differs from older textbooks on the subject
in that it precedes its descriptions of the actual insti-
tutions and operations of government with lengthy
treatments of the essentials of democratic govern-
ment; the Constitution, particularly as creating a
system of federalism; civil liberties and their safe-
guards; and especially part 4, "The People in Poli-
tics." Here the subdivisions are "The Dynamic
Role of Interest Groups," "Public Opinion: the
Voices of the People," "Political Behavior," "Party
Politics and Party Problems," and "Appeal to the
Voters." Another element unlikely to be found in
early textbooks is chapter 19, "The Bureaucrats,"
which takes the line that "government officials are
people"; if they do not reach ideal standards of per-
formance, this is in large part because of specific
hindrances which the people have it in their power
to eliminate.
6135. Chatters, Carl H., and Margorie Leonard
Hoover. An inventory of governmental ac-
tivities in the United States. Chicago, Municipal
Finance Officers Association of the United States
and Canada, 1947. 15 p. 47-4357 JK421.C3
A pamphlet which lists the major services or ac-
tivities performed by governments in the United
States, and indicates what levels of government —
Federal, State, county, or city — administer them.
About 400 specific activities of government are
tabulated here under 15 major headings such as
"Protection to Persons and Property," "Develop-
ment and Conservation of Natural Resources,"
"Health," and "Public Assistance and Social Serv-
ices." The level or levels of each activity are indi-
cated. Federal activities include the traditionally
central operations which the Federal government
administers directly — national defense, regulation
of money, the post office — regulatory functions; and
research, promotional, and supervisory activities
that make special use of the grant-in-aid device.
While any governmental activity not constitutionally
granted to the Federal government is reserved to the
States, in practice the States have delegated respon-
sibility for the direct administration of most activi-
ties, other than regulatory services, to their local
units, the county governments. Municipal govern-
ment functions are as varied as is necessary to meet
local needs, and special districts deal with exclusively
local problems.
6136. Fabricant, Solomon. The trend of govern-
ment activity in the United States since 1900.
New York, National Bureau of Economic Research,
1952. xix, 267 p. illus. (National Bureau of
Economic Research. Publications, no. 56)
52-7402 JK421.F18
The tide is not self-explanatory: Dr. Fabricant
means government activity direcdy affecting the
economy and capable of statistical measurement.
His chief aim is to contrast the economy of 1950 with
that of 1900, when "on the whole people still thought
in terms of 'the less government, the better,' " and to
determine the character and the pace of the increases
in government activity which are so apparent. But
even in 1900 government was not a negligible fac-
tor: it held about 7 percent of the nation's capital
assets and employed about 4 percent of the labor
force. By 1950 these percentages had become re-
spectively 20 and 12.4, and of the consolidated net
sales of business 5 percent was made to government.
After presenting detailed tables and graphs for the
increasing "absorption" of these resources by gov-
ernment, Dr. Fabricant considers the relative shares
of the Federal government and of state and local
governments in these developments. While the in-
crease in the Federal share is great, the lesser units
still bulk large: if in 1900 they employed 73.2 per-
cent of all government workers, in 1949 they still
employed 49.1 percent of the total. There follow
chapters on the "Functional Classification of Govern-
ment Activity" and "Productivity in Government
and the Output of Government Services." "Inter-
state Differences in Government Activity," even on a
per capita basis, are surprisingly wide. The appen-
dixes contain detailed tables of government employ-
ment, capital goods, and expenditures.
6137. Ogg, Frederic A. Ogg and Ray's Introduc-
tion to American government, by William
H. Young. nth ed. New York, Appleton-
Century-Crofts, 1956. 953 p. illus. (The Century
political science series) 56-5483 JK421.O5 1956
A standard textbook on American government
since 1922, now revised and somewhat changed in
emphasis by Professor Young of the University of
Wisconsin, who has largely rewritten the chapters
dealing with the democratic process in part 1, and
those concerned with the units and functions of the
Federal government in part 2. He has replaced the
historical introduction by a chapter on the American
people and society. Taking advantage of recent
studies of political behavior and group politics, he
has put a stress upon the democratic method and
upon the American people, for whom and by whom
our governmental system is operated, at least equal
to, if not greater than, that put upon the Constitu-
tion by the original authors in previous editions.
He has made far fewer emendations in part 3, which
discusses the structure, powers, functions, financing,
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 973
and problems of the state governments. Part 4,
devoted to local government — county, city, town,
township, village, and district — has also been left
virtually unaltered. In 1932 Messrs. Ogg and Ray
launched a briefer text, Essentials of American Gov-
ernment, which reached a 7th edition in 1952 (New
York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. 774 p.).
6138. Schmeckebier, Laurence. Government pub-
lications and their use. 2d rev. ed. Wash-
ington, Brookings Institution, 1939. xv, 479 p.
(Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C. In-
stitute for Government Research. Studies in ad-
ministration, no. 33) 39-22433 Z1223.Z7S3 1939
First published in 1936.
"Catalogs and indexes": p. 5-61; "Bibliogra-
phies": p. 62-75.
A descriptive guide to the indexes, bibliographies,
catalogs, and other important sources of information
concerning government publications, chiefly Fed-
eral, but with some attention to those of the States.
The purpose is "to indicate the limitations and uses
of the indexes, to explain the systems of numbering
and methods of tiding, to call attention to some out-
standing compilations or series of publications in
several fields, and to indicate how the publications
may be obtained." Although it specifically cites
many publications by tide, this volume is not a
catalog, bibliography, or checklist. Chapters 1-4
and 16 contain general information applicable to
nearly all classes of publications. The other n de-
scribe publications dealing with laws and legisla-
tive proceedings, court decisions, administrative
regulations, Presidential papers, foreign affairs, re-
ports on operations, organization and personnel, and
maps. An introduction to the study of government
publications for library school students, Anne Morris
Boyd's United States Government Publications, 3d
ed. rev. by Rea Elizabeth Rips (New York, Wilson,
1949 [i.e. 1952] xx, 627 p.), provides a checklist.
arranged principally by the organization of the gov-
ernment— the Federal courts, the Executive Office
of the President, the departments, independent
establishments, and emergency agencies.
6139. Zink, Harold. Government and politics in
the United States. 3d ed. New York, Mac-
millan, 1951. 1008 p. 51-3675 JK274.Z44 1951
First published in 1942.
"Selected bibliography" at end of each chapter.
The initial chapter of this large college text out-
lines the different kinds of government, including
the democratic forms. A separate section, "Founda-
tions of the Commonwealth," includes such chapters
as "Pressure Groups and Pressure Politics," "The
Role of Public Opinion," and "The Obligations and
Responsibilities of Citizenship." Succeeding chap-
ters examine in detail the operations, agencies, in-
stitutions, powers and duties, financing, and policy
of the Federal government, as well as its relations
with business, agriculture, and labor. The book pro-
vides briefer surveys of the functions, administra-
tion, and services of State, territorial, and local gov-
ernments. The author discusses the operational
methods of the various branches and divisions of
the several governments, as well as projects of re-
form and reorganization. There are noteworthy
chapters on "Public Personnel Administration,"
"Social Security and Public Housing," and "Public
Planning and Conservation." Throughout, he
gives careful attention to the American type of
democracy, to its special characteristics, to its accom-
plishments, and to its shortcomings. Professor
Zink's large text has had no recent revision, but
there is a 1958 edition of his briefer course: Amer-
ican Government and Politics: National, State, and
Local, by Harold Zink, Howard R. Penniman, and
Guy B. Hathorn (Princeton, N. J., Van Nostrand.
446 p.).
F. The Presidency
6140. Binkley, Wilfred E. President and Con-
gress. New York, Knopf, 1947. 312 p.
47-1135 JK516.B5 1947
First published in 1937 as The Powers of the
President, by Doubleday, Doran & Co. "This edi-
tion completely rewritten, expanded, and reset."
Bibliography: p. 301-312.
A study of the historical relationship between the
American Presidency and Congress and of efforts
made to find a workable adjustment within it. In
Professor Binkley's opinion, the problem of inte-
grating the executive and legislative branches of the
government has not yet been permanendy solved.
The Presidency, as originally established by the
Federalists under the Constitution, was assigned a
position of leadership and the executive departments
were to constitute a ministry, but the agrarians,
headed by Jefferson, launched a drive against the
executive, particularly Hamilton in the Treasury
Department. The author believes that John Adams
contributed to the decline of the executive, and that
under Madison government leadership passed
974 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
definitely to Congress. Nevertheless the election
of Andrew Jackson in 1828 marked the emergence
of the concept of the President as "the tribune of
the people." Ever since, Professor Binkley believes,
powerful interests have always been uneasy when a
popular, aggressive leader has even threatened to
reach the Presidency. The author views the func-
tion of the President as the discovery and promotion
of the public welfare. Less sanguine about Con-
gress, he sees it as most successful when it brings
about an equilibrium among conflicting interests.
6141. Brownlow, Louis. The President and the
Presidency. Chicago, Public Administration
Service, 1949. 137 p. (Chicago. University.
Charles R. Walgreen Foundation [for the Study of
American Institutions] Lectures)
49-6223 JK516.B74
An informal analysis of the Presidency based upon
six lectures delivered at the University of Chicago
in 1947. Regarding the Presidency as a unique and
peculiarly American institution created both by law
and by custom, Mr. Brownlow examines the attri-
butes of the office and shows how the men who fill
it are chosen, how they are equipped for the task,
what is expected of them, and what help they need
in meeting the expectations. The institutional
aspects of the Presidency are considered principally
as they have been since 1900 when, in the author's
opinion, the Presidency emerged in its modern
phase with the succession of Theodore Roosevelt.
Because Mr. Brownlow regards the man as insepara-
ble from the institution, he takes the two together,
showing how the Presidents have influenced the
Presidency, changing it from dme to time by weight
of their personalities, and how the Presidency has
influenced the Presidents, sometimes reshaping
them into different individuals. The author has
relied upon his own observadons and reflecdons,
including a personal knowledge of eight Presidents,
rather than upon documentary research.
6142. Chamberlain, Lawrence H. The President,
Congress and legislation. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1946. 478 p. (Columbia
University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies
in history, economics and public law, no. 523)
A 46-4849 H31.C7, no. 523
JK585.C5 1946a
Bibliography: p. 465-473.
A survey of the relative contributions of the Presi-
dent and Congress to legislation enacted during the
years 1 882-1 940, which considers in detail the legis-
lative histories of 90 selected statutes in 10 cate-
gories: agriculture, banking and currency, business,
government credit, immigration, labor, national de-
fense, natural resources, railroads, and tariff. As-
signing credit for these on a tabular basis, and noting
areas in which the President or the Congress has
been especially conspicuous, the book shows the joint
character of the American legislative process. It
does not reveal any tendency toward increasing
Presidential domination of that process. Theodore
Roosevelt was the first President of the United
States, the author asserts, to pursue a policy of execu-
tive dominance in legislation. Woodrow Wilson's
particular contribution was a more deliberate and
effective party leadership. Franklin D. Roosevelt,
with his multidimensional leadership, did much to
reduce Congress to a secondary function in legis-
lation. As Dr. Chamberlain points out, all three
were forceful men who came to office when the
social and economic development of the nadon had
rendered the need for progressive legislation acute.
6143. Corwin, Edward S. The President, office
and powers, 1787-1948; history and analysis
of practice and opinion. [3d ed., rev.] New York,
New York University Press, 1948. xvii, 552 p.
(New York University. Stokes Foundation. James
Stokes lectureship on politics)
48-7474 JK516.C63 1948
A pardy historical, partly analytical and critical,
study in American public law, originally published
in 1940. The central inquiry concerns the develop-
ment and contemporary status of Presidential power
and of the Presidential office under the Constitution.
Its political aspects are also considered, since in only
a few instances have previous practice or agreed
doctrine foreclosed all choice between alternative
theories of the Constitution. Personal traits of indi-
vidual Presidents are duly commented upon if they
have materially affected the development of the
office and its powers. In the author's view, the Con-
stitution was sufficiently vague to initiate a struggle
between two concepts of executive power: the theory
that it should always be subordinate to the supreme
legisladve power, and the theory that it should be,
within generous limits, autonomous and self-direct-
ing. Generally speaking, the history of the Presi-
dency has been one of aggrandizement. Professor
Corwin considers that Presidential power today not
only is enormously increased by the delegation from
Congress of sub-legislation called "administrative
regulations," but also is "dangerously personalized."
He suggests as a remedy a new type of Cabinet con-
structed from a joint legislative council to be created
by the two houses of Congress and to contain its
leading members.
6144. Hobbs, Edward H. Behind the President; a
study of Executive Office agencies. Wash-
ington, Public Affairs Press, 1954. 248 p.
53-5789 JK518.H6
A history and critical analysis of the expanding
group of staff agencies which, beginning with the
creation of the Bureau of the Budget in 1921, have
provided administrative management for the Presi-
dency. When Congress gave him the authority
in a Reorganization Act, President Franklin Roose-
velt by executive order combined them into the
Executive Office of the President in 1939, at which
time they comprised the White House Office, the
Bureau of the Budget, the National Resources Plan-
ning Board, the Liaison Office for Personnel Man-
agement, and the Office of Government Reports.
Provision was then made for "such office for emer-
gency management as the President shall determine
in the event of a national emergency or the threat
of one." A chapter each is devoted to the first three
agencies mentioned above, and one each to the
Council of Economic Advisers, the National Secu-
rity Council, the National Security Resources Board,
the emergency agencies, and staff machinery under
President Eisenhower. The Executive Office was
planned to keep the President systematically in-
formed of matters of top-level importance, to assist
him in preparing for future programs, to protect
him from the nuisance of subordinate affairs that
could dissipate his time and energies, to place prior-
ity matters before him promptly, and to aid him
in securing compliance from subordinates. Mr.
Hobbs thinks that these objectives have been
achieved "to a modest degree."
6145. Learned, Henry Barrett. The President's
Cabinet; studies in the origin, formation and
structure of an American institution. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1912. 471 p.
12-1466 JK611.L5
"List of authorities": p. 404-427.
A pioneer historical analysis of the President's
Cabinet which explains the formation of the advi-
sory council as well as the establishment of the struc-
tural offices which provide its members, but which
is limited to the anatomy rather than the functions
of the Cabinet. Professor Learned considered the
President's council not so much a conscious deriva-
tion from any body in existence when it was created
as the expression of a need as old as government —
the need of a corps of closely associated assistants
qualified to aid a vigorous and effective chief magis-
trate. Shortly after Congress enacted laws in 1789
for the establishment of the three secretaryships of
State, War, and Treasury and of the Office of Attor-
ney General, Washington brought these four officers
together as an advisory council, which by 1793 was
popularly termed the Cabinet. By 19 12 five other
department heads had been added to the President's
council: Secretary of the Navy, 1798; Postmaster
General, 1829 (an instance of an office of long stand-
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 975
ing being raised to Cabinet rank); Secretary of the
Interior, 1849; Secretary of Agriculture, 1889; and
Secretary of Commerce and Labor, 1903. As the
author emphasizes, the law created the principal
officers or members of the Cabinet, but the Cabinet
itself was the creation of President Washington.
His practice became custom, and the Cabinet has
remained a customary and not a statutory body.
6146. Milton, George Fort. The use of presiden-
tial power, 1789-1943. Boston, Little,
Brown, 1944. 349 p. 44-3756 JK516.M5
"Bibliographical note": p. 323-327.
An historical examination of the office and pow-
ers of the American President from George Wash-
ington to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Mr. Milton
sees a continuing, if not orderly, increase in the
power of the Presidency that is in line with the
general readjustment of executive and legislative
importance in the modern world of accelerated
change. In his opinion, the Constitution, crisis, and
custom have combined to vest great power in the
President: as chief of state, he embodies the peo-
ple's elective will; as chief of foreign relations, he
has, from the beginning, functioned as sole organ
of this country in its external relations; as Com-
mander-in-Chief of the Army and Navy, he has
enormous power in time of war, rebellion, or other
high crisis; and, as chief of government, he bears
direct responsibility for the huge executive branch
of the government. Inseparable from the person of
the President, also, are his position as chief of his
party, as leader of public opinion, and as spokesman
for the nation. The author focuses attention upon
those whom he considers the strongest Presidents —
Washington, Jefferson, Jackson, Lincoln, Cleve-
land, Theodore Roosevelt, Wilson, and Franklin
D. Roosevelt — in order to discover how they used
their power, the emergencies they confronted, their
discoveries of authority for action, and the conse-
quences for the Presidential office.
6147. Patterson, Caleb Perry. Presidential gov-
ernment in the United States; the unwritten
constitution. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1947. 301 p. 47-30530 JK516.P3
Bibliography: p. [28i]-296.
Professor Patterson contends that the United
States has substituted a political for a constitutional
democracy, that Congress and the Supreme Court
are becoming the agents of the President, and that
we have gone entirely too far toward an executive
type of government, which is subject to almost no
legal checks, and is responsible only to the ballot
box. The chief check on the national government
therefore becomes the two-party system. With this
in mind, the author proposes a readjustment in the
976 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
relation between the President and Congress. The
President, he believes, should be made to act through
ministers chosen from and responsible to Congress.
Forming a Cabinet, these ministers would super-
vise operations of the Federal agencies and repre-
sent them in debate upon the floors of Congress.
The prime minister would be selected by a caucus
of the majority party in Congress. He, in turn,
would select the other ministers with the approval
of the caucus. The author suggests 24 ways in
which his proposal would aid in adapting our con-
stitutional system to a more practical and respon-
sible scheme of control. The adoption of some mod-
ification of the British system of a responsible Cabi-
net has frequently been urged, but has never
received any significant degree of public support.
6148. Smith, A. Merriman. A President is many
men. New York, Harper, 1948. 269 p.
48-6989 JK516.S65
An informal and anecdotal report on the intricate
operations of the 20th-century Presidency by a
White House correspondent. Mr. Smith says that
"the Presidency, despite the high honors that go
with it, has become a four-year sentence to hard
labor." A modern President, the author believes, is
as powerful as his ability to influence public opinion;
his power has grown in direct ratio to the develop-
ment of mass media of communication. He needs
the qualities of an excellent actor, a capable financier,
an able administrator, and a good student of mili-
tary science, geography, farming, and internadonal
affairs. Under constant siege from those who want
something, the President is advised by his 10-
member Cabinet and his inner circle of intimates;
he has on his staff a team of idea-men and speech-
writers, a large secretariat, and a group of public
relations experts. Mr. Smith describes the organiza-
tion of this staff as well as that of the White House
domestic entourage, and such matters as entertain-
ment, ceremonial visits, Presidential travel, and the
persons with whom the President regularly has to
deal, among them politicians, reporters and photog-
raphers, and the writing and present-making public.
6149. Stanwood, Edward. A history of the Presi-
dency. New ed., rev. by Charles Knowles
Bolton. Boston, Houghton Mifflin [ 193-? ] 2 v.
37-31629 JK511.S7 1930
Contents. — [v. 1] From 1788 to 1897. — [v. 2]
From 1897 to 19 16, with additions and revisions to
1928.
Stanwood (1841-1923) was a staunch Maine
Republican who served briefly as secretary to James
G. Blaine (no. 3442) and became editor of the
Boston Advertiser and of the Youth's Companion.
In 1884 he published his History of Presidential
Elections, which went through four editions by 1896,
and received its present and less appropriate title
in 1898. A second volume was added in 1912, and
the author's last revision of it was made before the
election of 1916. In the final printing C. K. Bolton
of the Boston Athenaeum, who was Stanwood's son-
in-law, corrected some errors and added appendixes
of platforms and tables for the elections from 19 16
through 1928, but did not expand the narrative.
Stanwood devoted a chapter to each presidential elec-
tion from 1788 to 19 1 2, treating concisely and con-
cretely the state of the electoral machinery, the
political parties in the field, the major issues, the
platforms adopted (usually in full), the selection
and qualifications of the candidates, and significant
incidents of the campaign. Tables are given for
votes in the party conventions, when repeated ballot-
ing was necessary to reach a result, and for the popu-
lar and electoral votes of all significant candidates.
A final chapter discussed "The Evolution of the
Presidency" from the viewpoint of 1916. Eugene H.
Roseboom's A History of Presidential Elections
(New York, Macmillan, 1957. 568 p.) is a livelier
narrative covering the elections through 1956, and
more up-to-date in its historical points of view, but
by no means rivals Stanwood as a convenient source
of essential information.
G. Congress
6150. Alexander, De Alva Stanwood. History
and procedure of the House of Representa-
tives. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1916. xv, 435 p.
16-11176 JK1316.A3
A documented history of the organization and
procedures of the United States House of Repre-
sentatives from 1789 to 191 1, when Representative
Alexander of Buffalo concluded seven successive
terms. It shows how such Speakers as Henry Clay,
Samuel J. Randall, Thomas B. Reed, and Joseph G.
Cannon set precedents and shared in establishing
customs. Mr. Alexander considered deciding ques-
tions of order the most difficult of the Speaker's
functions, and exercising his right of recognition
the most embarrassing, although the latter had be-
come materially restricted by the use of privileged
motions, measures, and reports, and privileged busi-
ness on fixed days of the week. In fact, by the close
of the 6 1 st Congress in 191 1, the Speaker was vir-
tually shorn of power save for the appointment of
committees, and the right of recognition for motions
to suspend the rules. The author disapproved of
the change made at the first session of the 6ad Con-
gress, by which all standing committees were elected
instead of appointed by the Speaker, because, to
him, that officer embodied public and concentrated
responsibility, and because no one else held so great
an interest in the success of his party and its admin-
istrations. Among other subjects treated at less
length are: the remaining officers of the House and
their duties and privileges; methods of voting; rules;
the order of business; and committees. It is regret-
table that no subsequent Member of the House has
continued Alexander's very useful work.
615 1. Bates, Ernest Sutherland. The story of
Congress, 1789-1935. New York, Harper,
1936. xvii, 468 p. 36-9206 JK1021.B3
"A modest record of the doings of Congress for
the information of the general reader," organized in
nine chapters: "The Federalist Foundation," 1789—
1801; "Jeffersonian Democracy," 1801-29; "Jack-
sonian Democracy," 1829-45; "Compromise with
Slavocracy," 1845-61; "Overthrow of Slavocracy,"
1861-77; "Industrial Capitalism," 1877-1901; "Era
of Reforms," 1901-21; "Finance Capitalism," 1921-
33; and "The New Deal," 1933-35. These are sub-
divided by Presidential administrations, and further
subdivided by Congresses, 74 in all. Mr. Bates
supplies a lively and useful panorama, from which
can conveniently be learned the major issues, figures,
and incidents of any Congress; but he takes sides
rather emphatically and rigidly. In his opinion,
the fundamental issue which has confronted Ameri-
can democracy from the beginning is whether the
United States "in the last analysis should be ruled
by the judiciary or the legislature, by the immediate
representatives of the plutocracy or by the distant
representatives of the people." However inade-
quately, he believes, Congress and the President
have more nearly represented the masses of the
people than has the Supreme Court, which has
tended to give priority to the rights of property.
6152. Burns, James MacGregor. Congress on
trial; the legislative process and the adminis-
trative state. New York, Harper, 1949. xiv, 224
p. 49-4901 JK1061.B8
An inquiry into the low prestige which, the author
thinks, Congress enjoys with the general public, the
basic reason for which he finds in the national legis-
lature's excessive localism and consequent failure to
promote the general welfare. The average Con-
gressman, Professor Burns argues, adequately
represents any interests of his district that are united
431240—60 63
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 977
and vocal, but when local opinion on national issues
is divided he is likely to straddle. Some Congress-
men, he writes, are so completely absorbed by
organized local interests that they are themselves
pressure politicians, "lobbyists in disguise." Defects
in congressional organization, he believes, allow
unfair districting, unrepresentative committees, the
monopoly of policy-making chairmanships by per-
sons qualified only by length of tenure, and obstruc-
tion through filibusters, all of which lessen or destroy
the effectiveness of Congress, and weaken it as an
instrument of majority rule. The national legisla-
ture in his opinion thus tends to dissolve into an
aggregate of blocs and of individuals unwilling or
unable to withstand their pressures; and, lacking
machinery for control or discipline in the legislature,
the majority party cannot hold its members to the
program which it has pledged to the voters. Profes-
sor Burns particularly dreads the paralysis which
selfish obstructionism could produce in some future
economic crisis. He offers six concrete suggestions
intended to bring about "the wholesale reconstruc-
tion of our obsolete and ramshackle party system,"
one corollary of which is that the disloyal, those who
use the party to gain election and then ignore its
program, must be "purged" — read out of the party.
6153. Chamberlain, Joseph P. Legislative proc-
esses, national and state. New York, Apple-
ton-Century, 1936. 369. ([The Century political
science series]) 36-10198 JK1061.C45
Bibliography : p. 3557357;>
A textbook "organized," in the words of the
preface, "for the use of a class in legislation, in which
an endeavor was made to give the students a work-
ing notion of the way in which laws are placed on
the statute books in the United States Congress and
the state legislatures, rather than a mere description
of the functioning parts of the legislatures. It is
based on experience in preparing and handling bills,
and even more on the aid of men who have them-
selves been members of Congress or state legisla-
tures, or who have served those bodies." Legisla-
tures, the author remarks, "are law-declaring rather
than lawmaking bodies." Changing social condi-
tions require gradual modification of the rules gov-
erning society, and such modification is today being
sought through legislation more often than through
the slower and sometimes clumsier method of court
action. As administration expands, the scope of
legislative activity broadens, since only through legis-
lation can new government organizations be estab-
lished or existing ones be adjusted to greater loads.
The need for changes in existing machinery is fre-
quently first noticed by the executive officers in
charge of operations. Through them come requests
for improvements which only the legislature cm
978 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
make. The author considers in detail the organiza-
tion which has evolved in Congress and the legisla-
tures for the accurate drafting of bills and the enact-
ment of them into law.
6154. Dimock, Marshall Edward. Congressional
investigating committees. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1929. 182 p. (Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity. Studies in historical and political science,
ser. 47, no. 1) 29-906 JK1123.A2D5 1929
H31.J6, ser47, no. 1
Bibliography: p. 177-178.
A study of all congressional investigations con-
ducted in this country between 1789 and 1929.
Comparing the functions of the investigative com-
mittee in the United States to those of like agencies
in other modern constitutional governments, the
author traces the English origin of the congressional
committee of inquiry, and points out that the power
of investigation, as a procedure both of Parliament
and of Congress, is an implied one, based upon
custom rather than constitution or statutes. This
prerogative consists of three functions: investiga-
tions of the qualifications and conduct of the legis-
lative membership; investigations in pursuance of
the lawmaking functions, such as provide for future
or emergency legislation or establish administrative
commissions; and investigations of the executive
departments for determining their needs, for super-
vision, for discipline, or for control of public funds.
Of the total number of investigations, about 190
were authorized by the House, and 125 by the
Senate, while 15 were the work of joint committees.
By far the largest number of investigations occurred
during the Presidencies of Grant and Harding. Dr.
Dimock saw the Senate emerging as the prime in-
quisitor, "the vitriolic critic and persistent regulator
of the government." Although he recognized the
dangers to personal rights and immunities that
could arise from the system, the author considered
investigations valuable.
6155. Galloway, George B. The legislative process
in Congress. New York, Crowell, 1953.
689 p. 53-11621 JK1061.G32
"In a sense ... a successor to, rather than a re-
vision of," the author's Congress at the Crossroads
(1946).
A documented and well-organized descriptive an-
alysis of the organization and operation of Congress.
It points out that, although the power and prestige
of the executive branch of the Government increased
enormously during the first half of the 20th cen-
tury, Congress not only changed little, continuing
to function with old machinery and methods, old
facilities and services, but actually declined as an
original source of legislation in comparison with the
administration. Moreover, since 1887, Congress
has delegated to more and more commissions the
power to issue rules and regulations under the gen-
eral principles of established law. However, with
the great growth of administrative activity, super-
vision and control of administration through appro-
priation, investigation, amendment of existing laws,
the requirement of reports, the approval or removal
of personnel, and the review of foreign relations
have become some of the most important congres-
sional functions. Dr. Galloway objects to the "cen-
trifugal forces" of the committee system, which have
become dominant in congressional policy-making,
and suggests a number of reforms needed in con-
gressional machinery, procedures, and political out-
look.
6156. Harlow, Ralph Volney. The history of
legislative methods in the period before
1825. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1917.
269 p. (Yale historical publications. Miscellany, 5)
17-30135 JK1029.H3
Based upon the author's doctoral dissertation, this
is a history of the growth of committee systems in
the lawmaking bodies of the colonies and states from
1750 to 1790, and in the House of Representatives
from July 24, 1789, when a Committee of Ways and
Means was appointed, to 1825, when the caucus, the
standing committee system, and the speakership had
become firmly established in the House. As early
as 1797, Dr. Harlow notes, party affiliation was be-
coming an important factor in the selection of com-
mittees, and by 1813 standing committees were
admittedly made up in the interest of the dominant
party. The development of the powerful speaker-
ship and of the committee system from 181 1 to 1825
accompanied the casting off of the executive domi-
nance which had marked Jefferson's administra-
tions, although neither institution made the House
independent of an active executive. As the author
indicates, President, Cabinet, congressional leaders
of the party organization, or the Speaker might and
did have the whiphand at various times. The bal-
ance of power was generally in the House, but mem-
bers of the Cabinet were influential in legislative
affairs, and the organization of the House did and
does permit the application of powerful pressure by
the executive. To Dr. Harlow, such application is
all to the good: "The wheels of the government have
never run more smoothly than when the president
has been in a position to drive Congress."
6157. Harris, Joseph P. The advice and consent
of the Senate; a study of the confirmation of
appointments by the United States Senate. Berke-
ley, University of California Press, 1953. 457 p.
53-11239 JK1274.H3
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 979
A history of the Senate's confirmation or rejec-
tion of Presidentially appointed officers of the United
States, from 1787 to the present, together with an
analysis of the operation and the effects of the prac-
tice. Because constitutional issues have been raised
in controversies over the respective functions of the
President and the Senate in appointments, special
attention is given to the debates about the appoint-
ing power in the Constitutional Convention of 1787.
The problem of which officers should be appointed
by the President and confirmed by the Senate, and
which should be otherwise appointed, is central to
the discussion. In Professor Harris' opinion, the
requirement of senatorial confirmation of appoint-
ments has worked fairly well for certain classes of
officers, and has provided, as the framers of the
Constitution intended, a safeguard against unfit
appointees; for others it has worked badly, resulting
in empty formalities of little significance, or perpetu-
ating partisan and patronage appointments in posi-
tions which properly belong in the career civil
service. The extension of the requirement of sena-
torial confirmation from Justices of the Supreme
Court and diplomatic representatives to thousands
of minor positions is contrary, the author believes,
to the spirit if not to the provisions of the Constitu-
tion. He would restrict the President's appoint-
ments to the top political and policy-making
positions.
6158. Haynes, George H. The Senate of the
United States, its history and practice.
Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1938. 2 v. (11 18 p.)
illus. ' 38-38772 JK1161.H28
"References" at end of most of the chapters.
A large-scale history of the United States Senate
and of the development of its practices, legislative,
executive, judicial, and investigative, based on
original sources throughout. Chapter 1 describes
the planning of the Senate in the Federal Conven-
tion of 1787 as the upper branch of a bicameral
legislature, based upon equal representation of the
states. Chapter 2 deals with the important work of
the First Congress in setting precedents in such
matters as titles for government officials, confirma-
tion of Presidential appointees, ratification of treaties,
cooperation between the two branches of Congress,
initiation of important measures, and amendment
of many bills which it could not, under the Con-
stitution, originate. Subsequent chapters deal with
such topics as the election of Senators, Senate of-
ficers and organization, rules and procedure, debate,
Senate influence in financial legislation, investiga-
tions, treaty-making and foreign relations, "advice
and consent," and the relationship between the
Senate and the President as well as between the
Senate and the House. As Professor Haynes ob-
serves, almost every phase in the Constitution which
pertains to the Senate reflects compromise. "The re-
sult was a legislative body unique in its basis of
representation, in its relation to the Executive and to
the other branch of Congress, in its procedure, and in
its weighty non-legislative powers." The Senate was
designed to serve as somewhat of an executive coun-
cil to the President, as a check on the House, as
guardian of the small States, as protector of all
against encroachment by the new centralized power,
and as the people's defender against "the turbulency
of democracy." Its original basis has been changed,
but it still retains its old prestige, and a special con-
stitutional value which resides in its independence
of judgment.
6159. Kammerer, Gladys M. The staffing of the
committees of Congress. [Lexington] Bu-
reau of Government Research, University of Ken-
tucky, 1949. 45 p. 49-47303 JK1067.K3
Based on interviews, this is a very brief survey
of the qualifications and methods of selection of the
staff members, professional and clerical, appointed
by the committees of both houses of Congress under
the Legislative Reorganization Act of 1946. Exam-
ination is made of the staffing of the 15 standing
committees permitted the Senate and the 19 per-
mitted the House of Representatives. "Fifteen
committees are parallel in each house," observes the
author, "and furnish pointed contrasts as well as
similarities. Four committees are found only on the
House side; those on House Administration, Mer-
chant Marine and Fisheries, Un-American Activities,
and Veterans' Affairs." The 15 parallel committees
have to do with agriculture, appropriations, the
armed services, banking and currency, the District
of Columbia, expenditures in executive departments,
foreign affairs, interstate and foreign commerce,
judiciary, labor, the post office and civil service, pub-
lic lands, public works, rules, and taxation. The
author finds a marked superiority in the quality of
the Senate committee staffs. She considers the
makeup of a few of the special committees and con-
cludes that there is need for improvement in the
recruitment and selection process, and that less
emphasis should be placed on the employment of
lawyers.
6160. McGeary, Martin Nelson. The develop-
ments of congressional investigative power.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1940. 172 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
465) 40-5782 JK1123.A2M3 1940a
H31.C7, no. 465
Bibliography: p. 161-165.
An analysis of the congressional investigation,
980 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
particularly as it operated between 1929 and 1940.
The author credits investigations with illuminating
many dark problems and even carefully hidden
skeletons, but declares that they have also obfuscated
issues and nullified worthwhile accomplishments.
Furthermore, they have varied widely in purpose
and procedure as well as results. The Senate has
functioned as the more important investigator, both
as to quantity and significance, especially since 1933,
when the emphasis shifted from checking the
administration to collaborating with it. As Dr.
McGeary observes, in both the Senate and the House
more investigations are killed than are accepted, but
the importance of even the threat of investigation
should not be overlooked. He classifies congres-
sional investigations as those which assist Congress
in drafting laws, determining the desirability of
legislation, or molding public opinion, and those
which assist Congress in its supervision of adminis-
trative officers. These last comprise about a third of
recent inquiries. Investigations of congressional
membership form only a fraction of the total.
6161. Pepper, George Wharton. In the Senate.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1930. 148 p. 30-28947 JK1161.P6
An anecdotal and sprightly, yet in the main de-
tached, account by Mr. Pepper (b. 1867) of his com-
pletion of the deceased Boies Penrose's term as
United States Senator from Pennsylvania during the
years 1922-27. At the time of his appointment Mr.
Pepper was without political experience and ap-
peared to the Republican stalwarts, particularly to
the Philadelphia machine controlled by William S.
Vare, as "an outsider, a novice, an untrained bene-
ficiary" of a reward he had not earned. The ma-
chine defeated him in the following election. Offer-
ing pungent characterizations of the more notable
of his colleagues, he argues that although Senators
differ in ability, they possess, on the whole, a high
average. In Mr. Pepper's opinion, the most effective
Senators are those who at once understand their
subjects and refrain from wounding the sensibilities
of their colleagues. He describes procedures and
rules of the Senate, the committee system, the
seniority principle, pressures, conferences, the fili-
buster, and special services and information required
by constituents. He sees the Senate's function as
essentially regulatory, a check upon the Executive
and upon legislative action initiated by the House.
6162. Riddick, Floyd M. The United States Con-
gress; organization and procedure. Manas-
sas, Va., National Capitol Publishers, 1949. 459 p.
49-1982 JK1096.R54
First published in 194 1.
A useful but technical and minutely detailed
handbook on House and Senate legislative machin-
ery and political and parliamentary procedures.
The author, who is assistant parliamentarian of the
Senate and editor of the "Daily Digest" of the Con-
gressional Record, points out the great difference
in the methods of the houses for transacting busi-
ness. Of the two, the Senate, with only 96 mem-
bers, has a less rigidly fixed set of rules, and much
looser, less specifically defined, and less regulatory
parliamentary law. The House, on the other hand,
with 435 members, proceeds under rigidly limited
debate, with individual consideration giving way to
the will of the whole membership in any test case,
so as to permit of dispatch in its business. The two
chambers also call up business in differing ways,
the Senate's system being far the simpler. Dr. Rid-
dick underscores the ability of the standing commit-
tees and their chairmen to shape legislation in both
chambers, as well as their influence in the enact-
ment or the blocking of a given law.
6163. Schmeckebier, Laurence F. Congressional
apportionment. Washington, Brookings In-
stitution, 1941. 233 p. ([Brookings Institution,
Washington, D. C. Institute for Government Re-
search. Studies in administration, no. 40])
41-3146 JK1331.S35
A detailed description of the "five modern work-
able methods" of apportionment to each state of
Congressmen in the House of Representatives and
votes in the electoral college, which, according to
the Constitution, should follow each decennial cen-
sus. These methods, all mathematically consistent,
are: the method of major fractions, the method
of equal proportions, the method of harmonic mean,
the method of smallest divisors, and the method of
greatest divisors. The apportionment ratio is ob-
tained by dividing the population of the entire coun-
try by the number of representatives, which, since
1910, has been 435. Difficulty arises from the fact
that seldom if ever does any apportionment ratio
divide exacdy into the population of any State.
Always there is a remainder which may vary from
a small to a large fraction of the ratio. Controversy
has arisen at every reapportionment since the adop-
tion of the Constitution over selection of the States
to receive additional members for their fractional
population above the ratio. A major purpose of
apportionment is to equalize the average population
of congressional districts. The author demonstrates
that the difference between average populations is
always least if the method of equal proportions is
used. This method provides the most equitable
distribution among States regardless of size and is
therefore to be preferred.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 98 1
6164. Taylor, Telford. Grand inquest: the story
of congressional investigations. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1955. 358 p.
54-9803. JK.1123.A2T3
An expansion of various addresses and lectures
concerning the powers of legislative investigative
committees delivered during 1953. Mr. Taylor, a
distinguished lawyer and former associate counsel
to a Senate committee, was deeply concerned at the
time of writing over "the internal crisis of confi-
dence" in the United States, which he attributed
direcdy to congressional investigations. He here
sets forth and tellingly analyzes 162 years of such
investigations, beginning with "The Ordeal of
Major General Arthur St. Clair," first Governor of
the Northwest Territory in 1792, and touching upon
all important probes down to and including the
"dull, dramatic, farcical, enlightening, and frighten-
ing" McCarthy-Army hearings of 1954. The author
finds that there has been a recent distortion of the
historic mission of legislative inquiries to expose
administrative corruption or inefficiency, and to
discover the facts and circumstances with which the
law-making process is concerned; he finds, too, the
approach of a situation in which political sentiments
are scrutinized by roving inquisitions which punish
dissent by a kind of outiawry. He sees in this last
a "native-American" challenge to "middle-class
liberalism." Although he himself attempts to dispel
"the illusion of investigative omnipotence" by citing
constitutional limitations on the investigations of
Congress and the doctrine of judicial review, he
observes that it has not been extinguished.
6165. Voorhis, Horace Jeremiah. Confessions of
a Congressman. By Jerry Voorhis. Garden
City, N. Y., Doubleday, 1947. 365 p.
47""4I2j E743.V6
An informal memoir of the author's 10-year
service (1937-47) as a Democratic Congressman
from California, written shortly after his defeat for
reelection. He offers frank and reflective comments
upon such matters as his reasons for entering politics,
campaigning, the relations between Congressmen
and pressure groups, the seniority rule, the operation
of the committee system, and the Congressman's job
as it is and as it should be. Calling himself a "pro-
gressive," Mr. Voorhis also discusses legislation and
a number of important issues with which Congress
was confronted during his terms of office, among
them the Supreme Court packing plan, the Fair
Labor Standards Act, the Flannagan school lunch
program, the McMahon Atomic Energy Control
Act, the Dies committee, and postwar planning.
He approves of nearly all New Deal legislation and
credits Franklin D. Roosevelt with two great con-
tributions to American political thought: establish-
ment of the principle that mass unemployment is a
national problem for which the Federal government
is responsible, and the broadening of the concept of
America's world position to include world leader-
ship. Enlightened, critical, and self-critical, this is
a very unusual sort of book.
6166. Walker, Harvey. The legislative process;
lawmaking in the United States. New York,
Ronald Press, 1948. 482 p. (Series in political
science) 48-10898 Law
Bibliography: p. 459-467.
An introductory text and handbook which "de-
scribes the machinery set up in the United States
for determining and declaring the will of the people.
It attempts to evaluate objectively the defects in
this machinery and the impediments which have
been allowed to accumulate in the path of its smooth
operation. And, finally, it suggests a direction for
future progress." The nature of law is first briefly
considered, since, in the author's opinion, any sys-
tematic study of the legislative process must be con-
cerned with law as an end-product as well as with
the devices by which it is brought into being. Next
treated are the making and development of consti-
tutions at both the national and State levels. There
follow a number of chapters devoted to statute law-
making. The provinces, at all levels of govern-
ment, of the "political inventor," the professional
politician, the party member, the pressure-group
member, and the legislator are thoroughly exam-
ined. Also dealt with in detail here are legislative
procedure, including the organization of the legisla-
tive body; rules and order of business; the introduc-
tion, reference, consideration, and enactment of
bills; and such special matters as legislative research
and drafting. The functions of the Executive and
of the courts in relation to the legislative process
receive due attention, and the work concludes with
chapters on executive, judicial, and popular law-
making.
6167. Willoughby, William F. Principles of leg-
islative organization and administration.
Washington, Brookings Institution, 1934. xiv, 657
p. ([Brookings Institution, Washington, D. C]
Institute for Government Research. Principles of
administration [7]) 34-41225 JK1061.W7
"Bibliographic note": p. 627-648.
An analysis of the several factors involved in
organizing the legislative branch of government
and in providing for its practical operation, together
with a statement of the alternative choices in the
handling of each of these factors, and an indication
of the ways in which they have actually been man-
aged by modern governments, especially by the
national and State governments of the United States.
982 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Parts i and 2 present a broad picture of the place
of the legislative branch in the government of any
modern state; its relations to the electorate, the
executive, administration, and the judiciary; the
nature of its functions; and its general structure.
Part 3, constituting just over half of the volume,
is devoted to a more intensive study of the technical
problems faced by any legislative body in devising
a workable system of internal organization and
methods of procedure that will enable it most effi-
ciendy to perform its duties. Professor Willoughby
found legislative organization and procedure of
supreme importance in determining the character
of government, the question of legislative leadership,
and the extent to which party government should be
actually as well as nominally a dominant feature of
our political system. Progress toward responsible
party government must be sought, he believed, in
the acceptance and strengthening of the caucus sys-
tem. The State legislative situation he considered
"unsatisfactory in the extreme."
6168. Wilmerding, Lucius. The spending power;
a history of the efforts of Congress to con-
trol expenditures. New Haven, Yale University
Press, 1943. 317 p. A 44-126 HJ2013.U5W5
The main purpose of this book is to demonstrate
that although Congress has the exclusive right of
granting supplies of money to the Executive and of
appropriating them to the several branches of the
public service, it has not nor ever has had any prac-
tical means of ascertaining after the event whether
its financial authority has been either respected or
infringed. The first chapter shows by a collection
of instances that circumstances repeatedly occur
which make it a duty in officers of high public trust
to assume authority beyond the appropriation laws,
and that when they do, the unwritten laws of neces-
sity and of the public safety have been deemed, by
liberals and conservatives alike, to supersede the
written laws of appropriation. As the subsequent
eight chapters indicate, the doctrine of specific appro-
priations was early established in theory but not in
practice. The efforts of Congress to compel
obedience to the appropriation laws by itemizing
appropriations and other devices have been largely
"self-defeating." The last four chapters analyze
efforts of Congress to maintain retrospective control
over departmental appropriations through financial
reports, congressional investigations, and the Gen-
eral Accounting Office. These attempts, "while not
self-defeating, have been ineffective." The author
does not attempt to show how Congress can make
its right to control the public expenditures real as
well as nominal.
6169. Young, Roland. The American Congress.
New York, Harper, 1958. 333 p.
58-5081 JK1061.Y59
Mr. Young sees Congress' primary function as
"that of establishing a basic legal pattern of order
for society. This in turn leads to the additional re-
quirements for creating an autonomous legislative
organization to make policy and for establishing
continuing relations with the government bureauc-
racy and with the society which is governed."
Although the various functions of Congress may be
performed with varying degrees of effectiveness, no
one of them may be permitted to lapse completely
for any length of time, the author believes, without
destroying the legislative system and its complex
interrelationships with other government institu-
tions. He analyzes in some detail the electoral sys-
tem of recruitment and the composition of Congress,
as well as the operation of the legislative process,
the powers inherent in it, and the influences to
which it is subject, and concludes with a few
generalizations on the proper sphere and activities of
Congress as an instrument of government.
H. Administration: General
6170. Caldwell, Lynton K. The administrative
theories of Hamilton & Jefferson; their con-
tribution to thought on public administration.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1944. 244 p.
([Studies in public administration])
A44-y47°3 JK171.A1C3
A study of the crucial period in American history
"when the theory and practice of administradon in
the new general government were in process of
formation." Both the administrative and the politi-
cal systems of the United States, Mr. Caldwell
argues, were founded upon the divergent theories
and practices of Hamilton and Jefferson. Each de-
veloped a coherent, well-considered plan of adminis-
tration based upon the type of society toward which
he hoped America would grow. Hamilton tri-
umphed for a brief period of splendid construction
(1789-95) with the establishment of the Treasury
Department, the Mint, and the first Bank of the
United States, but Jefferson ruled in spirit over the
following century. In the author's opinion, neither
ideal has triumphed over the other, and their recon-
ciliation remains an unsolved problem. The funda-
mental difference in the administrative ideas of
Hamilton and Jefferson appears to lie in their atti-
tudes toward the control of political power. Hamil-
ton stood for responsible and Jefferson for limited
government; Hamilton admired the British system
of centralized ministerial responsibility, while Jeffer-
son preferred the accepted American notions of the
separation of powers and local home rule.
6171. Graves, William Brooke. Public adminis-
tration in a democratic society. Boston,
Heath, 1950. xvi, 759 p. illus.
50-5971 JK421.G74
"Selected references" at end of chapters.
A textbook, based upon the author's 25 years of
study and experience in the field of state, local, and
Federal administration. It proceeds from the basic
concept of administration "as concerned with the
transaction of all of the public business, whether
legislative, executive, or judicial; whether interna-
tional, national, state, or local." Regarding the in-
dividual department or agency as the core of the
administrative system, Dr. Graves gives special at-
tention to the problems of coordinating organiza-
tion, personnel, and fiscal operations in the actual
processes of internal management. He has sharply
differentiated such internal control — policy formu-
lation, organization for production, production it-
self, and administration — from external relations,
or the execution of policy. The latter concerns the
relations of the entire agency with persons and
groups outside it, and, generally, with that portion
of the public that is benefiting by its services or
subject to its regulations. In establishing these
regulations, the administrative agencies make exten-
sive use of quasi-legislative and quasi-judicial pow-
ers. Dr. Graves discerns two "indisputable" trends
in modern government: "a definite shift from legis-
lation to administration as the vital element in the
process of governing," and a correspondingly more
modest view of its own function taken by the
Supreme Court.
6172. Hyneman, Charles S. Bureaucracy in a
democracy. New York, Harper, 1950. xiv,
586 p. 50-6789 JK421.H8
"Bibliographic note" at end of chapters.
"The primary concern of this book is to consider
what can be done to make our federal bureaucracy
function as the faithful servant of the American peo-
ple." The descriptions of the structural organiza-
tion of the administrative branch of the national
government, its activities, and the way it goes about
them are kept to a minimum and are incidental to
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 983
an analysis of how the bureaucracy is or may be
given direction and may be kept answerable to the
people. Four basic assumptions underlie the argu-
ment: that bureaucracy must be judged by its use
of power, not by its size or cost; that all administra-
tors should exercise their power within limits ac-
ceptable to the American people as a whole; that the
great power of modern bureaucracy can be turned
toward ends unacceptable to the people, and may be
so turned unless proper direction and control are
provided for our administrative establishments; and
finally, that elective officials must be the primary
reliance for directing and controlling the bureauc-
racy. There is democratic government, Professor
Hyneman believes, only when vigorous competition
for popular approval exists among men who desire
to hold public office and to exercise the authority
of government. These men must make public
affairs their business, know their business, inform
the public, and put programs into practical opera-
tion.
6173. Short, Lloyd Milton. The development of
national administrative organization in the
United States. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press,
1923. xviii, 514 p. ([Brookings Institution,
Washington, D. C.] Institute for Government Re-
search. Studies in administration [no. 10])
24-986 JK411.S5
Bibliography: p. 483-490.
This University of Illinois dissertation remains the
only comprehensive view of the development of ad-
ministrative agencies and functions in the Federal
government from its beginnings in 1775 through the
second decade of the 20th century. After introduc-
tory chapters on the function and the constitutional
basis of administration, administrative beginnings
under the Continental Congress, and the reorganiza-
tion of government under the Constitution, Dr.
Short deals with each department in turn. He
records within each the emergence of important
officials; the creation of boards, bureaus, offices,
corps, or other subordinate organizations or institu-
tions; the addition or loss of functions by statute or
administrative order; and all important measures of
reorganization. He breaks off in i860 and supplies
an "Outline of Administrative Organization" for
that year; it fills just 2 pages, and may be compared
with the 8-page outline of the situation at the date of
publication. For the earlier period a single chapter
is sufficient to deal with "The Post Office, the Attor-
ney General's Office, and the Detached Services."
With i860 Dr. Short starts over and goes through
the departments again, bringing them down to 1
"The Departments of Commerce and Labor" could
still share a chapter, but the "Permanent Detached
Agencies" and the "Administrative War Agencies"
984 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of 19 1 7 required separate ones. The volume is in-
evitably formal, external, and tolerable only in small
dosages; but it remains an enormously useful digest
of essential information.
6174. Van Riper, Paul P. History of the United
States civil service. Evanston, 111., Row,
Peterson, 1958. 588 p. 58-5927 JK681.V3
Bibliographical notes at end of chapters.
"Presidents and Congresses may decree, but clerks
carry out." This detailed history of the civil service
of the executive branch of the Federal government
reflects the author's sense of "power in a massive
and continuous sense" arising out of "the cumula-
tive impact of a vast quantity of earthy, day-by-day
decisions and actions." The book was completed
on the 75th anniversary of the Pendleton Act of
1883, which established the Civil Service Commis-
sion and began the process of introducing the merit
system, implemented by competitive examination,
relative security of tenure, and political neutrality,
into the federal service. The earlier periods, of
"gentlemanly" tenure and of a triumphant spoils
system, are treated with relative brevity (p. 11-95).
Convinced of the increasing importance of public
administration in modern society, Dr. Van Riper
devotes as much space to the 25 years since 1933 as
to the 50 preceding it. He pays particular attention
to the effects of the party overturns of 1932 and 1952,
the crisis of World War II, and the sudden death of
President Roosevelt upon the civil service in general
and the merit system in particular. He does not
neglect technicalities such as recruitment, position-
classification, and pay schedules, but he achieves
much of his aim of relating civil service history to
its political, economic, and religious background,
and makes plausible his conclusion that ours "has
been a civil service more completely democratic than
any yet devised," "based upon the idea of a classless
society." Seventeen years earlier the U. S. Civil
Service Commission had issued a History of the
Federal Civil Service, iy8g to the Present (Wash-
ington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1941. 162 p.) which
is considerably briefer and more formal, but also
emphasizes the fortunes of the merit system as the
essence of the story.
6175. White, Leonard D. The Federalists. New
York, Macmillan, 1948. 538 p.
48-7016 JK171.A1W4
6176. White, Leonard D. The Jeffersonians,
1801-1829. New York, Macmillan, 1951.
xiv, 572 p. 51-12490 JK180.W5
6177. White, Leonard D. The Jacksonians, 1829-
1861. New York, Macmillan, 1954. 593
p. 54-12436 JK201.W45
6178. White, Leonard D. The Republican era,
1869-1901. New York, Macmillan, 1958.
406 p. 58-6209 JK231.W5
The subtitle of each of these volumes, "A Study in
Administrative History," is inadequately descriptive
of their scope. Not only does this work collectively
span more than a century, 1789-1901, in the history
of the organization and practical operation of the
United States Government, but also, by means of
vignettes of the participants, and of apposite quota-
tions from their public reports, office memoranda,
and private letters, it re-creates their ideas, ideals,
and their philosophy of management, and reflects
the flow of contemporary events. In the first period,
from 1789 to 1801, when precedents were being
made, the Federalists dominated the political scene,
and their views about administration generally pre-
vailed, but the Jeffersonian Republicans, or Demo-
crats, forced them to give ground at some important
points. The late Professor White, although appre-
ciative of Washington's moral caliber, offers highest
praise to Hamilton's "superlative" administrative
ability and to his creation, the Treasury Department.
The author finds that the Jeffersonian era of admin-
istration (1801-29) was in fact a projection of the
Federalist tradition of a strong Executive and of the
gentleman in political life. During these years the
system of administration did not have to accommo-
date itself to new tasks or unaccustomed duties, since
the time was one of consolidation and growth rather
than innovation. The four Democratic-Republican
Chief Executives — Jefferson, Madison, Monroe, and
John Quincy Adams — sought to maintain executive
leadership, with widely varying degrees of success,
but recognized the responsibility of the executive
branch and administrative system to Congress. The
Jacksonian era Professor White describes as a period
full of constitutional debate, party strife, and sec-
tional conflict, creating tensions which overshadowed
normal operation of the government. In his opin-
ion, the most important influences upon the admin-
istrative system during the years from Jackson to
Lincoln were: the wide enfranchisement of adult
male citizens, their organization into a national
party system, the consequent surge of democratic
sentiment, and increased participation of these ordi-
nary citizens in office. The author not altogether
convincingly defends Jackson's introduction of the
principle of rotation in office, but admits that "the
public service from 1829 to 1861 was engaged in a
ceaseless struggle to protect its old standards against
heavy odds and a tireless army of miners and sap-
pers." The years 1869 to 1901, from Grant to
McKinley, marked the culmination of Jacksonian
theory and practice, although Federalist doctrine
again made itself felt in a new partnership with
democratic ideas. Professor White points to two
major administrative problems of the age — the rela-
tion of Congress to the President and of both to the
administrative system, and the reform of the civil
service system. He notes the gradual restoration to
the Presidency of the authority which had been vir-
tually destroyed during Johnson's administration,
but remarks, also, upon the remaining power of the
Senate. Without an administrative staff, the Presi-
dent was barred from an active part in management
and was oriented to Congress rather than to the
executive departments. Only with enactment of the
Pendleton Act in 1883 did there begin a steady
improvement in the civil service and die partial
formation of a government-wide administrative
system. Although the Act, in Professor White's
opinion, marked a fundamental turning point in the
history of the Federal administration, it was
no miracle worker, and brought about no trans-
formation in the relations between Congress and the
Executive.
6179. White, Leonard D. Introduction to the
study of public administration. 4th ed.
New York, Macmillan, 1955. 531 p.
55-1669 JK421.W45 1955
The author's last revision of a well-known and
widely used textbook which, on its original publica-
tion in 1926, was practically alone in the field. It
is a methodical analysis and critique of American
public administration which stresses the larger issues
of policy rather than details. Public administration
is here defined as "all those operations having for
their purpose the fulfillment or enforcement of pub-
lic policy." The management of public business is
assumed to be a single process, substantially uniform
in its essential characteristics wherever observed,
and there is no separate treatment of local, State, and
Federal administration, although the relations be-
tween them are analyzed, and the majority of illus-
trations are taken from the Federal sphere. Among
the subjects of the 34 chapters are "The Servicewide
Management Agencies," "Headquarters-Field Rela-
tionships," "The Line Function," "Rise of Public
Personnel Management," "Government Career
Service," "Position Classification," and "Power and
Responsibility." Professor White notes the pre-
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 985
occupation of Federal administration with interna-
tional affairs, defense, and atomic energy, with the
task of keeping the national economy on a fairly
even keel, with the progressive development of
decent standards of living for the whole people, and
with fiscal policy. One foundation for future
American democracy, he concludes, is a sound ad-
ministrative system able to discharge its tasks with
competence and integrity. In his opinion, "we
have gained, but whether we have gained relatively
to the work to be done is an open question."
6180. Willoughby, William F. Principles of pub-
lic administration, with special reference to
the national and state governments of the United
States. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1927.
xxii, 720 p. ( [ Brookings Institution, Washington,
D. C] Institute for Government Research. Prin-
ciples of administration [5]) 28-574 JK421.W48
Bibliography: p. 657-716.
This pioneer work is a systematic analysis of the
organization and operation of the administrative
branch, mainly of the national government and
secondarily of the State governments, through which
the popular will is put into execution. Directed to
students of political science and officials having to
do with general legislation, it starts from the prem-
ise "that, as regards our national government at
least, the great political problem now confronting
us is that of securing economy and efficiency in the
actual administration of governmental affairs. This
problem . . . has to do with the work of Congress
as the board of directors of the government corpora-
tion as well as with the organization and procedure
of the executive departments and other administra-
tive services. It also requires an especially careful
consideration of the duties of the President as head
of the administration." The author advocated that
the office of the Chief Executive be expanded and
strengthened into that of a general manager, with
the line of administrative authority running from
the several operating services, through the depart-
ments to which they belong, to the Chief Executive
and from the latter to the legislature. Under this
principle of administrative organization, the admin-
istrative branch, both in organization and in prac-
tical operations, would be a single, integrated, and
harmonious whole. This consideration of "General
Administration and Organization" occupies part 1;
the three remaining parts analyze the principles of
personnel and financial administration in great
detail, and the administration of materiel more
briefly.
4.!1240— 60-
-64
986 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
I. Administration: Special
6181. Cushman, Robert E. The independent regu-
latory commissions. New York, Oxford
University Press, 1941. xiv, 780 p.
41-17004 JK901.C8
"Produced . . . under the auspices of the Insti-
tute of Public Administration [New York]." —
Preface.
A comprehensive survey of the legislative history
of the regulatory commission movement, beginning
with the establishment of the Interstate Commerce
Commission in 1887, forms the first group of chap-
ters in this massive volume. A second records the
more important facts about and analyzes the legal
status of those commissions, boards, or authorities
which, in 194 1, lay entirely outside the 10 regular
executive departments of the Federal government,
were subject to no direct control by any Cabinet
member or the President, and had for their major
tasks the exercise of some form of restrictive or dis-
ciplinary control over private conduct or private
property. A third division of the work deals with
British agencies set up to do work analogous to that
performed by the American commissions. Here
Professor Cushman makes a pioneering effort to
focus the methods and results of British experience
upon the American regulatory problem. The four
final chapters offer a critical examination of certain
basic problems connected with the independent reg-
ulatory commissions. These questions grow out of
the independence and divided responsibility of the
commissions, the merger in them of powers — quasi-
judicial, quasi-legislative, administrative, executive,
and investigative — which many critics and students
believe incompatible, their relation to the important
task of policy planning in the regulatory field, and
their structure and personnel.
6182. Douglas, Paul H. Economy in the national
government. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1952. 277 p. illus. 52-1737 HJ257.D67
A pithy argument in favor of economies in the
Federal expenditures, based on lectures which the
Senator from Illinois delivered in 195 1 on the Wal-
green Foundation at the University of Chicago.
Part 1 presents facts concerning the size, growth,
and major areas of the Federal budget, points out
the crying need for economy, and describes budget-
ary procedure and the appropriation process. Part
2 discusses waste and nonessential expenditures in
both military and civilian programs, and suggests
savings in personnel, the elimination of logrolling,
the reduction of public works to essential projects,
and economies in the financing of the armed serv-
ices. Part 3, very brief and less adequate, deals with
possible increases in revenues by closing tax loop-
holes, and the practical political problems of achiev-
ing a balanced budget. Appendixes consider the
economics of compensatory budgets.
6183. Fish, Carl Russell. The civil service and the
patronage. New York, Longmans, Green,
1905. 280 p. (Harvard historical studies, v. 11)
5-7370 JK731.F5
"List of authorities": p. 252-266.
The standard history of policy and practice in
the United States government from 1789 to 1905
in regard to appointments to public office. The
earliest plans before the Federal Convention, the
author notes, proposed to transfer the appointing
power from Congress to the Executive. Its solu-
tion— that the President appoint the highest officers
"by and with the advice and consent of the Sen-
ate"— has withstood the test of time. From his own
sense of the proper and practical, Washington estab-
lished certain basic principles for the filling of offices,
among them fitness for the post as a sine qua non,
apportionment among the States, a previously suc-
cessful career (especially for the judiciary), promo-
tion from state to national office, and political
orthodoxy. Minor appointments were left to mem-
bers of the Cabinet. Fish assigned to Jefferson the
introduction of the spoils system into the national
service, since his administration was the first to
make party service a reason for appointment and
opposition a cause for removal. Jackson is credited
with completing the spoils system by adding the
principle of rotation in office and by disregarding
fitness for the duties of it. "Not until 1829 did the
genuine spoils system come into existence; and since
that date it has flourished without break, though
with some recent [1905] diminution."
6184. Gervasi, Frank H. Big government; the
meaning and purpose of the Hoover Com-
mission report. New York, Whittlesey House,
1949. 366 p. diagrs. 49-10899 JK643.C47A587
A journalist's review of the work of the Commis-
sion on Organization of the Executive Branch of
the Government (1947-49), headed by ex-President
Herbert Hoover. His purpose is "to scrutinize the
report of the Hoover Commission, assess its merits
and demerits, and to present in brief and compact
form what American taxpayers paid $2,000,000 to
find out." The recommendations of the Commis-
sion are found to be no mere dusting off of previous
proposals, but rather "an exploration of the outer-
most boundaries of government functions in the
light of their cost, their usefulness, their limitations,
and their curtailment or elimination." The Presi-
dency itself is discussed, as well as the "transacdon
of the public business in the departments, bureaus,
agencies, boards, commissions, offices, independent
establishments, and instrumentalities of the execu-
tive branch." Although Mr. Gervasi is not wholly
uncritical of the aims and recommendations of the
Commission, he approves in general of the reforms
suggested because he believes they will "ensure bet-
ter government at a price the people can afford."
He is convinced that modernization of the executive
branch of the United States government is impera-
tive, both for the proper performance of its duties
to its own people and for the discharge of its inter-
nadonal responsibilities.
6185. Graves, William Brooke, com p. Reorgani-
zation of the executive branch of the Gov-
ernment of the United States; a compilation of basic
information and significant documents, 1912-1948.
Washington, 1949. xiv, 425 p. ([U. S.] Library
of Congress. Legislative Reference Service. Pub-
lic affairs bulletin no. 66)
49-45834 JK1108.A35, no. 66
"Originally prepared for the Commission on
Organization of the Executive Branch of the Gov-
ernment, the Hon. Herbert Hoover, chairman."
A compilation of materials pertaining to executive
reorganization in the Federal government prior to
the work of the Hoover Commission. Of its five
sections, the first is a chronological listing of all
important legislative and executive acdons taken; in
it are included not only reprints of acts of Congress
and executive orders, but also mention of bills intro-
duced, hearings held, resolutions offered, reports
issued, and the like. The second section shows that,
in the majority of instances, important surveys of
administrative organization have been authorized
by the Congress rather than the Executive. Secdon
3, the core of the work, presents a documentary his-
tory of the significant efforts at reorganization ini-
tiated by authorized survey commissions from 1912
to 1948. Support of one or more plans for the re-
organization of the administrative machinery, it
appears, was given by Presidents Taft, Harding,
Hoover, Franklin D. Roosevelt, and Truman. Sec-
tion 4 reports proposals for reorganization of the
execudve departments emanating in whole or in part
from private sources, and section 5 contains state-
ments on the subject by Presidents.
6186. Kammerer, Gladys M. Impact of war on
Federal personnel administration, 1939-1945.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 987
Lexington, University of Kentucky Press, 195 1.
372 P- t 51-10526 JK691.K3
A study of "the greatest test public administradon
has faced in this country." Changes of a funda-
mental character were wrought in personnel admin-
istration by the sudden expansion of the Federal
service under the impact of total war. The principal
changes considered are: the centralization of respon-
sibility for recruitment in the Civil Service Commis-
sion; the adoption of an aggressive new approach to
recruitment; a deterioradon in standards of qualifi-
cation for employment; fresh emphasis on loyalty in
the absence of other standards; the development of
training programs; increased mobility within the
service; intensified pressures for higher pay; con-
trols over the volume of Federal employment; the
evolution of employee-relations programs; and the
reorganization of the Civil Service Commission for
improved personnel management. In the author's
opinion, wartime personnel administration made
several permanent contributions to the improvement
of the Federal service. These included the preserva-
don of merit system principles, success in recruit-
ment for expanded government service, progress in
the building of training programs, a realizadon of
the importance of employee relations in the public
service, and a new appreciadon of personnel admin-
istration itself.
6187. Macmahon, Arthur W., and John D. Millett.
Federal administrators; a biographical ap-
proach to the problem of departmental management.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1939. xiv,
524 p. 39-M371 JK73r-M23
This very unusual book on "the apex of the
pyramid" of governmental personnel is in three
parts. The first and most theoretical considers the
requirements of management in the Federal depart-
ments, and how these requirements were met at the
time of writing. Departmental leadership, it is
argued, must be both administrative and political;
the administrative requirement calls for "a focal
personality who will direct the flow of command
and integrate the work of a flexible group of super-
visors"; the political requirement calls for advisory
aides free from routine responsibility who will assist
the Secretary in "the formulation of policy and its
popularization." Part 2 is a "biographical" history
of the under secretaries and assistant secretaries in
the 10 departments since these offices were instituted
(the earliest Assistant Secretary, in the Treasury
Department, goes back to 1849, but there was an
Assistant Postmaster General as early as 1789, and
two more by 1836. The first Under Secretary, in
the State Department, dates from 1909). The au-
thors find that "haphazard political considerations
have been the outstanding factors in the selection of
988 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Assistant Secretaries," too many of whom have been
"idling cogs in the national machine." Part 3 deals
with the chiefs of the relatively autonomous bureaus,
but arranges the material according to the mode of
tenure and recruitment of these offices. The chap-
ters proceed from classified chiefships filled by pro-
motion to the "Survivals of Political Recruitment,"
of which six clear cases were found as of 1938. "It
is time," the authors conclude, "to bring all bureau
chiefs within the merit system."
6188. Mosher, William E., J. Donald Kingsley,
and O. Glenn Stahl. Public personnel ad-
ministration. 3d ed. New York, Harper, 1950.
652 p. 50-12401 JK765.M6 1950
First published in 1936.
Bibliography: p. 611-632.
The emphasis of this book is upon the develop-
ment of policy and the techniques of administration
which contribute to the selection, retention, and
productivity of the best available talent for the public
service. It takes less account of the need for basic
reform or elimination of the spoils system, although
it is recognized that much remains to be accom-
plished in these matters, particularly at the state and
local levels. More space is devoted to the problems
of selection and the development of personnel within
a public jurisdiction, and the human relations con-
nected with modern management, than is given to
the details of recruitment and examination, or to the
central personnel agency. Good morale, the au-
thors conclude, is the most valuable asset of any
large-scale organization: "its consequences are
measured in terms of personal satisfactions in the
constant development of new ideas leading to im-
provements in methods, and, finally, in more and
better output." To build up morale, leadership is
required as well as sound placement procedures,
fair wage policies, assurance of income in periods
of illness and old age, good working conditions,
opportunities for participation and growth, recogni-
tion of work well done, justice, and fairness. The
authors propose a number of remedies for what they
consider the inadequacy of the typical civil service
commission.
6189. Reynolds, Mary (Trackett). Interdepart-
mental committees in the national adminis-
tration. New York, .Columbia University Press,
J939- I77 P- (Columbia University. Faculty of
Political Science. Studies in history, economics and
public law, no. 450)
39-15177 JK421.R48 1939a
Bibliography: p. 165-169.
A study of administrative relationships exhibited
in the interdepartmental committees which func-
tioned actively between 1933 and 1937. A number
of them were appointed before Franklin D. Roose-
velt took office as President; some of them had been
abolished by the time of writing. Mrs. Reynolds
holds that interdepartmental relationships are a
necessary, proper, and permanent part of adminis-
tration in the Federal government, that the syste-
matic and intelligent conduct of them is a major
problem of administration, and that among the use-
ful techniques for the conduct of interdepartmental
affairs is the interdepartmental committee. She
distinguishes three types: the exploratory or research
committee, the functional coordinating committee,
and the institutional coordinating committee. These
have been effective, she believes, in five kinds of
administrative action: the exploration, drafting, and
integration of legislative proposals; research and
general investigation; facilitation of administrative
programs for which single agencies are responsible
but which have certain interdepartmental aspects;
the conduct of administrative programs by the com-
mittees themselves; and, finally, exchange and clear-
ing of information concerning common problems.
6190. Smith, Darrell Hevenor. The United States
Civil Service Commission; its history, activi-
ties and organization. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1928. 153 p. ( [Brookings Institution, Wash-
ington, D. C] Institute for Government Research.
Service monographs of the United States govern-
ment, no. 49) 28-18298 JK681.S6
Bibliography: p. 140-149.
A monograph designed for the use of legislators
and public administrators, which details the history
and development of the United States Civil Service
Commission from the passage of the Pendleton
Act — "an act to regulate and improve the civil serv-
ice of the United States" — which established it in
1883 through the Retirement Act of 1920 and the
Classification Act of 1923. The following functions
of the Commission are described: recruiting, exami-
nation, certification, recording, and "post-appoint-
ment activities." Also treated in detail are the
organization and staff which, as of 1927, handled
these matters. The Commission proper consisted of
three Commissioners, appointed by the President
and responsible direcdy and solely to him; not more
than two of them might be adherents of the same
political party. They were assisted by administra-
tive, technical, and field services which are here
particularized down to the last clerk and laborer.
Appendixes give the laws and regulations governing
operations of the Commission, appropriations, re-
ceipts, expenditures, and other data.
6191. Smith, Harold D. The management of your
government. New York, Whitdesey House,
McGraw-Hill, 1945. 179 p. 45-10439 JK411.S6
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 989
A series of 13 papers concerning management of
the public business, and especially fiscal planning
and policy, prepared for various audiences. The
author, Director of the Bureau of the Budget from
1939 to 1946, aimed at a clearer understanding by
the public of the process of management. He argued
that all management, however complex, begins with
planning. Although a distinction exists between the
planning of basic goals through the legislative
process and the planning by administrators to reach
those goals, the two types are neither separate nor
segregated. The interchange of information be-
tween Congress and the Executive must be continu-
ous so that each may keep in mind its relationship to
the other. This relationship between the legislative
branch, with its determination of broad policy pro-
grams, and the administration, with its duty of
executive management, "largely determines the suc-
cess or failure of democratic government." The
hopes, fears, and aspirations of the people find ex-
pression in the enactments of the legislature, which
are, in turn, modified by the findings, experience,
and ideas of the administration. The budget, as the
most important instrument of legislative control and
of administrative management, is at the core of
democratic government.
6192. Spero, Sterling D. Government as employer.
New York, Remsen Press, 1948. 497 p.
48-10699 HD8008.S65
A study of employment relations in the public
service at the Federal, state and municipal levels.
Dr. Spero takes exception to the theory of govern-
ment as "sovereign employer" against which strikes
or other militant actions are attacks tantamount to
treason. He maintains that "it is a primary obliga-
tion of those in authority in a free society to guard
the rights of citizens including the freedom of asso-
ciation of those citizens employed by the govern-
ment. Limitation of this freedom is justifiable only
when it interferes with the right of government to
make and administer public policy." He analyzes
the antistrike and other legislation which restricts
civil servants in their capacity as workers, and the
laws and regulations which affect their capacity as
citizens. He describes the rise of the trade union
movement as it has affected employee organizations,
and the labor policies of the Federal, state, and
municipal governments. "Despite the valiant work
of the civil service reform movement," the author
concludes, "the merit concept is not yet accepted
either by the politicians or the general public."
6193. Torpey, William G. Public personnel man-
agement. New York, Van Nostrand, 1953.
431 p. illus. (Van Nostrand political science
series) 53-5462 JK765.T6
An analysis of each aspect of personnel manage-
ment: organization, functions, objectives, processes,
procedures, and the problems of administration. In
seeking solutions to such problems, the author
attempts to combine the practical approach of the
practitioner with the academic approach of the
educator. He deals with the executive branches of
all levels of American government, Federal, state,
and local. Upon the effective administration of
personnel, he believes, depends the success or failure
of every undertaking of management. "Adminis-
trative goals, policies, and plans fail of accomplish-
ment when inadequate consideration is afforded the
human aspects of organization." Although public
personnel management is but one part of public
administration, its importance becomes a matter of
growing concern to the responsible chief executive
of a jurisdiction and to his department heads as the
scope and complexity of government functions in-
crease. Mr. Torpey discusses in great detail the
tools of personnel management, among them posi-
tion-classification plans, pay plans, rules for recruit-
ment and examination, training programs, rules for
promotions, transfers and separations, grievance
procedures, and retirement programs.
6194. Wooddy, Carroll H. The growth of the
Federal government, 1915-1932. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1934. 577 p. (Recent social trends
monographs) 34-7178 JK421.W6
A supplement to Recent Social Trends in the
United States, a report issued by the President's
Research Committee on Social Trends named by
President Hoover in 1929. The aim was, in part, to
make available the materials upon which that report
based its conclusions about trends in the functions
and expenditures of the Federal government. Re-
stricted in scope to the civil functions of the govern-
ment, the present study analyzed in some detail the
development of each Federal agency during the
years 1915-32, furnishing a brief sketch of the origin
and history of the agency; lists of the activities of
1915 and of those subsequently added; tables of ex-
penditures for each year or selected years of the
period; an analysis of the causes and extent of
growth, supported by such tables as could be sup-
plied; and such evidence as was available in 1934
concerning probable changes which might affect the
future development of each agency. Although this
volume was concerned primarily with civil activities
in the period ending with fiscal 1932, the discussion
was expanded to include the sweeping changes
made and proposed up to January 1934 because of
President Roosevelt's emergency program of 1933.
990 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
J. State Government
6195. Allen, Robert S., ed. Our sovereign state.
New York, Vanguard Press, 1949. xxxviii,
^-^P- 49-11566 JK2413.A4
Contents. — Introduction: the shame of the states,
by R. S. Allen. — Massachusetts: prisoner of the past,
by W. V. Shannon. — New York: backslider, by
R. G. Spivack. — Pennsylvania: bossed cornucopia, by
H. A. Lowe. — Georgia: paradise of oligarchy, by
T. Collier. — Ohio: oxcart government, by R. L.
Maher. — Illinois: the "new look," by D. E. Cham-
berlain.— Wisconsin: a state that glories in its past,
by W. T. Evjue. — Louisiana: beak too big for its
belly, by R. S. O'Leary. — Nebraska: Norris: in vic-
tory and defeat, by J. E. Lawrence. — Texas: owned
by oil and interlocking directorates, by H. Stilwell. —
Utah: contrary state, by E. Linford. — California: the
first hundred years, by R. V. Hyer.
A vigorous indictment, in the muckraking tradi-
tion, of American State government, with 12 States
singled out for individual treatment by the contribu-
tors, most of whom are journalists. In his introduc-
tion, Mr. Allen accuses State government of "all the
worst evils of misrule in the country. Venality,
open domination and manipulation by vested inter-
ests, unspeakable callousness in the care of the sick,
aged, and unfortunate, criminal negligence in law
enforcement, crass deprivation of primary constitu-
tional rights, obfuscation, obsolescence, obstruction-
ism, incompetence, and even outright dictatorship
are widespread characteristics." These ills are
rooted in the State constitutions, which discriminate
against the cities and are full of inequalities profit-
able for the great business, utility, and press interests.
The antilabor, antispending, antiliberal rural-domi-
nated legislatures the editor calls "the most sordid,
obstructive, and anti-democratic, law-making agen-
cies in the country." He attributes the situation,
which is everywhere much the same, to absurdly
low pay and to crippling limitations upon the length
of sessions, which render the legislators susceptible
to pressure and manipulation. There is no index.
6196. Anderson, William, and Edward W. Weid-
ner. State and local government in the
United States. New York, Holt, 195 1. xx, 744 p.
illus.
"For further reading" at end of chapters.
51-11513 JK2408.A7
A college textbook on State and local government.
Where the two are interrelated, as in constitutional
status, politics and election activities, personnel and
financial problems, and numerous public services,
State and local aspects of the subject are discussed
together. The State, rural, and urban governmental
structures are, however, considered separately so as
to enable the student to grasp the organization of
each. It is emphasized that the division of public
functions under the Constitution of the United States
is between the Federal government and the States.
Local governments exist within a State in a legal
sense because the State created them and empowered
them to perform its functions in the several localities.
Although the courts concede to cities, villages, and
boroughs certain "proprietary," "local," or "munici-
pal" functions, even these exist only because the
State has authorized them. All courts authorized by
the State are considered State courts, though they
may be called "county" or "municipal" courts.
Close interdependence, even integration, between
State and locality has become discernible in almost
all fields, among them education, health and social
welfare, highways, agricultural and labor laws, law
enforcement, and, particularly, finance.
6197. The Book of the states, v. 12; 1958-1959.
Chicago, Council of State Governments,
1958. 538 p. 35-"433 JK2403.B6, v. 12
A biennial publication of the Council of State
Governments containing current material in text
and tables concerning the organization, finance, and
major services of the State governments. Their ex-
ecutive, legislative, and judicial branches are dealt
with, as are interstate relations, of which the Coun-
cil is only one instance. A concluding section, "The
State Pages," devotes a page of names, facts, and
figures to each State and territory. Emphasis is
given to developments of the two years preceding
publication of each volume, which is issued at the
beginning of even-numbered years. This permits
presentation of important data about the legislative
sessions of the immediately preceding odd-numbered
year, during which most of the legislatures hold
their regular sessions. The 1958-59 edition of this
authoritative work and its supplements differ some-
what in content and timing from their predecessors.
The set has heretofore consisted of two volumes in
a biennium — a major reference book and one sup-
plement; it will include three volumes for 1958-59 —
the present major book and two supplements. The
first of these, to be published at the beginning of
1959, will list elective administrative officials and
legislators of all the States. Replacing rosters pre-
viously included in the major work, a new supple-
ment will appear in mid-1959, providing compre-
hensive lists of State administradve officials, whether
appointed or elected.
6198. Carey, Jane (Clark). The rise of a new fed-
eralism; federal-state cooperation in the
United States, by Jane Perry Clark. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1938. xviii, 347 p.
38-27585 JK325.C34
"Selected bibliography": p. [32i]~340.
"This volume is intended to favor neither 'federal
centralization' nor 'states' rights'; it aims, rather,
to indicate and describe some of the ways in which
the federal and state governments have cooperated
and how effective their joint activity has been," par-
ticularly in dealing with certain economic and social
problems through legisladon and administration.
Cooperation between the judicial branches of the
Federal and State governments is not considered.
Although such cooperative efforts as grants-in-aid,
tax credits, joint control of commerce, and joint
activity of Federal and state administrative agencies
have survived judicial review, the author considers
them unwieldly and relatively ineffectual, an in-
evitable result of the haphazard and unplanned ways
by which they have grown. The fact that the States
use Federal machinery to carry out State laws is
not without its great importance, she believes, but
it is the use by the Federal government of State
organizations and personnel to carry out Federal
laws — the combination of Federal control and de-
centralized State administradon — that "appears des-
tined to play an increasingly important part in the
development of the American federal system. "
6199. Council of State Governments. Federal-
state relations. Report of the Commission
on Organization of the Executive Branch of the
Government pursuant to Public law 162, 80th Con-
gress. Washington, U. S. Govt. Print. Off., 1949.
297 p. (81st Cong., 1st sess, 1949. Senate. Docu-
ment no. 81) 49-46374 JK325.C63
This history and analysis of Federal-State rela-
tions distinguishes two basic planes upon which the
national government and the State governments
have lived together from the beginning to the pres-
ent— commitment to a common existence in the face
of common cares, and the practical division of pow-
ers between the units concerned in the Federal sys-
tem. Four phases of development are distinguished:
the period before adoption of the Constitution when
most of the major problems were posed but few
answers were found; the Federalist period, 1787-
t8oo, when the meaning of the Constitutional pro-
visions was first explored, and a large measure of
cooperation between the national government and
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 99I
the States was developed; the third period, 1800-
1913, one of crosscurrents dominated at first by the
great national-regional conflict which culminated in
the Civil War and later by the unification of the
country, when conflicting trends pushed at once
toward separation of the national government from
the States and toward their close collaboration; and,
finally, the period 1913-48, when forces long con-
ducive to the solidarity of national and State policy
came to the fore. The report calls for cooperation
and teamwork between Federal and State govern-
ments, with understanding and support from the
people. State responsibilities as well as rights must
be accepted and exercised; overcentralization of con-
trol and power in the national government must be
avoided.
6200. Council of State Governments. Committee
on State-Local Relations. State-local rela-
tions; report. [Chicago] 1946. 228 p.
47-3168 JK2445.C62 1946
A description of State-local relations as they ex-
isted in 1946, together with the Committee's conclu-
sions in regard to them. The Committee offers no
panacea for this complex problem. "Rather, it has
set forth a series of propositions designed to stimu-
late thinking and study about state-local problems,
to encourage the cooperation of state and local
officials in the solution of their common difficulties,
and to indicate possible solutions to some of the most
pressing problems." Two principal objectives are
suggested for any program in the field : the strength-
ening of local units of government so that they may
meet their day-to-day administrative tasks promptly
and efficiendy and attain meaningful local democ-
racy; and the improvement of State supervision of
local affairs so that activities of State-wide concern
will be carried out at a uniformly high level of per-
formance. These objectives may best be achieved,
it is asserted, if States, which bear the primary re-
sponsibility for a well-ordered system of State-local
relations, will grant larger power to local units,
subject those powers to flexible administrative su-
pervision rather than to detailed legislation, aid
localities in securing stable and adequate revenues,
and promote the enlargement and consolidation of
local governments.
6201. Fesler, James W. The independence of state
regulatory agencies. Chicago, Public Ad-
ministration Service, 1942. 72 p. ([Public Admin-
istration Service, Chicago] Publication no. 85)
42-51444 JK2445.F4
A study of the independence of State agencies en-
gaged in the regulation of utilities, labor conditions,
the sale of alcoholic beverages, banking and insur-
ance, and the practice of the professions. Institutions
992 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of 12 States divided among the principal regions
were selected for investigation as being representative
of all such agencies. These agencies are found to
have certain features in common: they all operate
in areas of special interests and pressure groups; and
the regulatory processes with which they are con-
cerned combine legislative, judicial, and adminis-
trative elements. Mr. Fesler attempts to discover
how, under the circumstances, the public interest
may best be served. He finds objectionable features
in complete independence of the agencies, and in
integration of them under the governor, or under
the legislature. He believes that because of the sus-
ceptibility of these agencies to pressure groups, and
the varying degrees to which the interests of such
groups coincide with the public interest, each type
of regulatory agency deserves distinctive treatment
in the establishment of its intergovernmental rela-
tionships, and its own degree of independence. All
such agencies, in his opinion, should answer to
both governor and legislature.
6202. Graves, William Brooke. American state
government. [4th ed.] Boston, Heath,
1953. 946 p. 53,-^^ JK2408.G7 1953
First published in 1936.
"Selected references" at end of chapters.
A textbook which reports and analyzes "signifi-
cant developments in the forward movement of the
states in the period since World War II." Dr.
Graves emphasizes the importance of State govern-
ment in the American tradition. Various factors
contribute to the growing importance of the States,
he believes, among them such general ones as ex-
panding services, increased costs, and the close re-
lationship between the State and the individual. He
finds other factors peculiar to the States — the train-
ing they provide for future Federal officials; their
function as laboratories for experimentation with
political machinery, social policies, and adminis-
trative techniques; their position as the key units
in the American system of government to which
the Federal government on the one hand and local
units on the other "owe their origins, powers, and
continued existence." Recent and unprecedented
demands made upon the States for housing, educa-
tion, highways, the construction and modernization
of mental and other institutions, and unemployment
insurance, among other fields, suggest a new era
of the service or welfare state. Such a tremendous
growth of services imposes heavy administrative
problems upon the States. Overlapping and dupli-
cation of effort must be eliminated through a ra-
tional division of functions.
6203. Lipson, Leslie. The American governor
from figurehead to leader. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1939. xxi, 282 p. (Studies
in public administration, v. 9)
39-27456 JK2447.L5 1939
Bibliography: p. 269-275.
This University of Chicago dissertation analyzes
the proper relationship between the legislative and
executive branches of State governments, and es-
pecially the problem of enhancing executive au-
thority while safeguarding popular participation
and control through the legislature. Leadership is
regarded as not merely compatible with democracy
but essential to its successful functioning, and the
leadership of the governor in the executive and legis-
lative branches forms the chief interest of this book.
Four States have been selected for special emphasis:
New York, because its government is on a larger
scale than any other; Massachusetts, because it rep-
resents the political habits and traditions of New
England and was called upon to rectify defects of
organization at an earlier date than most others;
Virginia, because it represents the South, where the
normal dominance of one party simplifies some of
the administratice problems; and Illinois, in the
Middle West, because it exemplifies the difficulty
of establishing honest administration in a milieu of
spoils-system politics. Starting as "a mere creature
of the legislature," the author observes, the governor
won real power during the first decade of the 20th
century, and became a leader by supplanting the
party boss. The short ballot, the executive budget,
and administrative consolidation were generally
achieved in the following decade.
6204. Porter, Kirk H. State administration. New
York, Crofts, 1938. 450 p.
38-3289 JK2443.P6
Bibliography: p. 434-440.
An outline of the numerous activities regularly
engaged in by each of the 48 States as of 1938, to-
gether with proposals for organizing agencies suit-
able for the proper administration of these activities.
Professor Porter furnishes an oudine of the adminis-
trative agencies — offices, departments, boards, com-
missions, and bureaus — which he considers appro-
priate, with some modifications, for any one of the
States. He discusses the work to be done, suggests
methods of organizing administrative units, and
offers various recommendations, but warns that
seldom is there one correct solution to any problem
of the kind. He presents a synopsis of the typical
State administrative structure, with the governor at
the top. In descending order will be the principal
administrative officers, popularly elected and pro-
vided for in the State constitution; heads of depart-
ments, popularly elected but provided for by statute;
administrative officers appointed by the governor;
and finally, plural agencies of every type. Professor
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 993
Porter advocates "sound principles of integration,"
and the concentration of power and responsibility
in the chief executive. "One of the principal theses
of this book," he writes, "has been that the governor
should have full and direct power over a few im-
portant staff agencies through which he would be
able to exercise all the authority and influence that
he ought to have."
6205. Wilcox, Jerome K., ed. Manual on the use
of state publications. Sponsored by the Com-
mittee on Public Documents of the American Li-
brary Association. Chicago, American Library
Association, 1940. 342 p.
40-27368 Z1223.5.A1W66
Each chapter of this comprehensive guide to
state publications has been contributed by a spe-
cialist. The preface outlines the work: "Part I,
Importance, Character and Use, presents in five
chapters critical analyses of present state reporting
and uses made by various groups of state publica-
tions. Part II, Bibliographical Aids, brings together
in four chapters state government organizations
and bibliographies of individual state lists of pub-
lications and of all important articles concerning
state publications. Part III, Basic State Publica-
tions, in nine chapters treats each important group
of state documents bibliographically and critically.
The final chapter in Part III, compiled by Mrs.
[Carolyn L.] Hale, is an attempt to bring together
all important recent information on state functions,
by functions, each in three categories as far as pos-
sible: (1) list of directories; (2) digests of laws and
studies of the state functions; and (3) bibliographies
of publications. Part IV is a directory of national
associations of state officers with indications of their
chief publications. Part V is a digest of informa-
tion on state printing plants and state printing laws
and a digest of the laws in each state concerning
the exchange and distribution of state publications."
There is a subject index.
6206. Zimmermann, Frederick L., and Mitchell
Wendell. The interstate compact since 1925.
Chicago, Council of State Governments, 1951.
*32 P- 51-62583 Law
Designed for the use of officials, lawyers, and
students of government, this is a study of the back-
ground, scope, nature, and some potential uses of
the compact as an instrument of interstate and na-
tional state coordination. The compact clause, the
authors note, is the only provision of the Constitu-
tion that furnishes a means of positive cooperation
among the states of the Union. Enforceable by
the Supreme Court and by Congress, the compact
is a flexible legal instrument which affords a mech-
anism for administration and for regulation upon
a multistate as well as a regional basis. Until the
1920's the need for interstate cooperation was "rudi-
mentary," and the compact was used mainly in
settling disputed boundary lines, but in recent
times, and especially since World War II, it has been
increasingly utilized to deal with such matters as
the interstate control of crime, cooperative protection
of oil and gas resources, water allocation, pollution
control, fisheries, forest protection, education, and
metropolitan area development. The authors clas-
sify compacts as boundary-jurisdictional, boundary-
administrative, regional-administrative, administra-
tive-exploratory-recommendatory, and administra-
tive-regulatory. In the order mentioned, these
roughly chart chronological progress in the use of
the device. The compact has further potentiality, in
the authors' opinion, "as a means of securing both
vertical and horizontal coordination in our federal
system — of uniting the powers of the national gov-
ernment with those of a group of states through a
single legal mechanism."
K. Local Government
6207. Allen, Robert S., ed. Our fair city. New
York, Vanguard Press, 1947. 387 p.
47-30142 JS 323.A6
Contents. — Boston: study in inertia, by L. M.
Lyons. — New York: "greatest city in the world,"
by Paul Crowell and A. H. Raskin. — Philadelphia:
where patience is a vice, by T. P. O'Neil. — Miami:
heaven or honky-tonk? By Henning Heldt. —
Birmingham: steel giant with a glass jaw, by Irving
Beiman. — Cleveland: study in political paradoxes,
by R. L. Maher. — Detroit: city of conflict, by Leo
Donovan. — Chicago: unfinished anomaly, by W. H.
Pierce. — Milwaukee: Old Lady Thrift, by R. S.
Davis. — Memphis: satrapy of a benevolent despot,
by G. M. Capers. — St. Louis: boundary-bound, by
C. F. Hurd. — Kansas City: gateway to what? By
W. G. Clugston — Denver: civic schizophrenic, by
Roscoe Fleming. — Butte: city with a "kick" in it,
by J. K. Howard. — Seattle: slave and master, by
R. L. Neuberger. — San Francisco: the bedlam dozes,
by Charles Raudebaugh. — Los Angeles: rainbow's
end, by Maury Maverick and R. E. G. Harris.
994 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
All but two of these reports on the governments
of 17 cities are by veteran newspapermen writing
on their home towns. As Mr. Allen observes in his
introduction, each American community has a per-
sonality, derived from its origin, locale, and history,
yet all are plagued by certain universal municipal
maladies. These chapters tell "the same old story of
boodling bosses and businessmen, of horrendous
slums, of dirt and filth, disease and vice, of gross
and shameless waste, of mismanagement and mis-
rule, of crass disregard of public health and human
dignity." "There is not a city in the country, large
or small," the editor asserts, "where business is not
the primary stultifying, corrupting, and antidemo-
cratic influence." But, he adds, "there is not a city
whose sins of omission and commission are not due
directly to the apathy, irresponsibility, and cow-
ardice of its citizens." Among the evils noted by
his contributors are parasitic suburbs and satellite
communities, the dominance of outside capital,
crippling State interference in municipal affairs,
conflicting urban authorities, the indifference of
the press, and, most important, the lack of a deep-
rooted tradition of honest, intelligent, and com-
petent municipal management. These are very
much the same evils discovered 40 years earlier by
Lincoln Steffens, and set forth in his famous muck-
raking work, The Shame of the Cities (New York,
McClure, Phillips, 1904. 306 p.). His purpose
was to "burn through our civic shamelessness and
set fire to American pride."
6208. Chicago. Home Rule Commission. Modern-
izing a city government; report. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press, 1954. xiv, 422 p.
54-I339I JS708.A53
The Commission deals with problems relating to
the improvement and modernization of the struc-
ture of the city's government and to added home-
rule powers. Introductory in character, part 1
describes the organization and procedures of the
Commission, presents its view of its assignment and
responsibility, indicates the economic factors under-
lying the vast growth of Chicago, and explains the
structure of city government that obtained in 1954.
Part 2 is concerned with modernization, particu-
larly of the city council, which the Commission
would reduce in size; of the budget, which it would
alter to the executive, performance type; and of
the mayor's office, to which it would attach an
administrative officer and a small professional staff.
Part 3 analyzes home rule and offers recommenda-
tions to increase it. The Commission examines the
adequacy of Chicago's powers of local government
in four major areas: the structure, and form of gov-
ernment; services; police powers; and revenue pow-
ers. Finding Chicago's powers of local government
inadequate in the first of these areas, the Commis-
sion proposes that the state legislature authorize
changes. It concludes that, with legislative grants
readily securable in the other areas, Chicago enjoys
substantially as much power as do the constitutional
home-rule cities.
6209. Gill, Norman N. Municipal research bu-
reaus, a study of the nation's leading citizen-
supported agencies. Washington, American Coun-
cil on Public Affairs, 1944. 178 p.
44-6805 JS302.G5
A history and analysis of the municipal research
movement, which deals with 20 citizen-supported
research bureaus. The programs of nearly all of
these quasi-public but inadequately supported mu-
nicipal organizations have stressed efficiency first and
economy second in local government. Advocating
improved methods of levying and collecting taxes,
budget and accounting procedure, independent au-
dits and centralized purchasing, and the recruiting
and training of municipal personnel, these bureaus
have also sought to formulate long-range policy and
better service in such matters as public health, police
and fire protection, education, traffic control, trans-
portation, street lighting and cleaning, and refuse
collection, as well as to promote efficiency and stand-
ardization in the construction of streets, sewers, and
school and other public buildings. The author notes
the social welfare aspects of the bureaus' work for
relief, housing, higher standards of living, and con-
structive planning. He suggests several further
areas of study by the bureaus, among them inter-
governmental, social, and economic problems. And
finally he urges broad representation of the citizenry,
especially of young civic leaders, upon bureau
boards; progressive policies; more use of modern
methods of public relations; and greater profession-
alization of bureau staffs.
6210. Hodges, Henry G. City management;
theory and practice of municipal administra-
tion. New York, Crofts, 1939. xx, 759 p. illus.
39-18457 JS331.H6
A textbook on municipal government, amply
provided with organization charts, which presents
the practice as well as the theory of city manage-
ment. It pleads for a professional personnel trained
in public administration, to whom public service
is a career; the effective direction of workers; and
skillful financial planning. Centralized control of
properly grouped functions is viewed as the direct-
ing principle, and integrated responsibility the chief
weapon of democratic control in city management.
The greatest strides in city management have been
made, the author believes, through the gradual ac-
ceptance of the city-manager plan of government.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT
/ 995
It remains essential that the citizen understand
the government of his city, its functions and services,
since democracy will be preserved only to the ex-
tent that the lag between public opinion and tech-
nical administrative advances is shortened. Polit-
ical education of the masses must bring about the
public's willingness to employ scientific administra-
tive techniques and make impossible government
by a "contractor-controlled political party." The
author oudines six generally accepted standards for
the efficient conduct of urban government.
621 1. Jones, Victor. Metropolitan government.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942.
xxiv, 364 p. (Chicago. University. Studies in so-
cial science, no. 39 [i.e. 40] )
42-12520 JS331.J6 1942a
"List of bibliographies": p. 343-344.
A general examination of some of the problems
of integrating local government in the larger met-
ropolitan areas of the United States. Dr. Jones re-
gards the government of metropolitan areas as part
of the larger question of the economic, social, and
political organization of the nation, which calls
for the periodic realignment of boundaries and the
reallocation of functions among all levels of gov-
ernment. He considers the present government of
metropolitan communities ineffective in the face of
existing and emerging problems of urban life. This
ineffectiveness he attributes to the formulation and
administration of policies for these areas by "scores
or hundreds of contiguous but independent, under-
nourished, and jealous units of local governments."
Popular control and coordination of policy and
budgeting are difficult if not impossible, the author
argues, when power and responsibility are chopped
up and the segments distributed among a large
number of boards, commissions, or authorities
within the same area. Politics are the primary ob-
stacle in the way of organized efforts to integrate
the multitude of units that govern metropolitan
areas in the United States. Although statutes or
charters can readily be drafted and given effect by
technicians, legislative or electoral approval must
first be secured. This situation, in Dr. Jones'
opinion, calls for an active program of propaganda.
6212. Lancaster, Lane W. Government in rural
America. 2d ed. New York, Van Nos-
trand, 1952. 375 p. illus. (Van Nostrand political
science series) 52-9252 JS425.L3 1952
A textbook, originally published in 1937, about
the operation of government in the towns, town-
ships, counties, and school districts of American
rural areas. It points out that the differences be-
tween political organizations in such units and
those in populous areas are principally in scale rather
than in the types of problems met; in their actions,
most of the same processes are involved, although
legal and constitutional differences do exist. "Gov-
ernment everywhere involves the translation of
public wishes into rules binding upon citizens, the
purchase and use of materials, the employment and
management of personnel, and the enforcement of
rules of action and conduct upon all within the
jurisdiction of the authorities." The fundamental
problem of local government in the 20th century,
as Professor Lancaster views it, is the inadequacy for
their work of its traditional units, which were laid
out when economic and social conditions were very
different. With respect to area, population, taxable
resources, and internal organization, they are far
removed from the economic realities of today. The
author calls for the consolidation of areas, internal
reorganization, and a reallocation of functions.
6213. The Municipal year book. [25th year];
1958. Chicago, International City Manag-
ers' Association. 598 p.
34-27121 JS344.C5A24, 25th
The chief purpose of this yearbook, which has
appeared since 1934, "is to provide municipal offi-
cials with information on the current problems of
cities throughout the country, with facts and
statistics on individual city activities, and with analy-
ses of trends by population groups." Many of its
sections are brought up to date and repeated year
after year; these include forms of city government,
methods of selecting the mayor and council, utilities
owned and operated, salaries of chief municipal
officers, personnel organization, city financial data,
fire and police departments, municipal parking lots,
directories of city managers and other officials, and
model municipal ordinances. Some new material is
included in each annual, beginning with an intro-
ductory article on the "municipal highlights" of the
year. Other new sections in the 1958 volume are
"City Planning Data" ($6 billion to be spent in the
next five years), "Municipal Debt for Cities over
10,000 [bond issues of 1957 by 550 cities]," "Hous-
ing Demolition Data," "Municipal Cemeteries,"
"Municipal Airport Data," and "Regulation of Curb
Loading Zones." Sources of information are listed
at the end of most sections and, for the obstinately
bewildered, there are five pages on "How to Use the
Vear Book."
6214. Rankin, Rebecca B. Guide to the municipal
government of the city of New York. 7th
ed. New York, Record Press, 1952. 209 p.
52-1927 JS1228.R3 1952
First published in 1936.
A guide to the more than 100 separate units of
administration of the government of New York
996 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
City as they were operating on January 1, 1952.
The purpose of the manual is to describe simply and
concisely the governmental organization and ad-
ministration of the city, the functions of its many
boards, departments, bureaus, divisions, commis-
sions, courts, and committees, and their relation-
ships to one another under the revised charter of
1938. Arrangement is in sections classified by the
main functions of the departments, so that allied
units may be treated together. A short index is de-
signed to bring out other and less known functions
of the city agencies. As Miss Rankin observes,
New York operates under the "Strong Mayor-
Council form" of government, which places most
responsibility upon the mayor who appoints his de-
partment heads, prepares the budget, and sees that
the government is properly administered. The
consent of the council, elected by districts, is neces-
sary to validate most actions of the mayor; it also
shares in the making of policy. Many administra-
tive departments are empowered by the charter
and administrative code to make regulations in
order to carry out their departmental functions.
Printed once a year, these regulations have the force
of law.
6215. Schmeckebier, Laurence F. The District
of Columbia, its government and adminis-
tration. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1928.
xx, 943 p. maps. ([Brookings Institution, Wash-
ington, D. C] Institute for Government Research.
Studies in administration)
28-14676 JK2725 1928.S4
Bibliography: p. 863-923.
A survey of the unique government of the District
of Columbia, which suffers complete denial of direct
representation, performs the functions of both a
State, or territorial, and a municipal organization,
and is treated in many respects by Congress as a
minor subdivision of the Federal government. Al-
though Mr. Schmeckebier admitted that "the in-
terests of the United States and the residents of
the District frequently clash," he refrained from
criticism of the defects in organization, operation,
and municipal and civil law resulting from the
unfortunate conditions under which the District
government operated in the 1920's, and of Con-
gress' inability or unwillingness to work out a con-
sistent policy in its treatment of the District. His
purpose was rather to describe all of the govern-
mental activities of the District essentially local in
character, and to indicate the agencies which were
responsible for performance of the work. He set
forth in elaborate detail the functions, and, in most
instances, the organization, finances, and personnel
of the Commissioners of the District of Columbia,
the several boards, commissions, or units dealing
with District affairs only, the Federal agencies
which held plenary power in their fields, the Federal
agencies which had merely contractual relations
with the District government, and the judiciary,
as of about June 30, 1926. A more up-to-date but
less detailed view is the Government of the District
of Columbia; Manual of Organization ([Washing-
ton] Management Office, Dept. of General Admin-
istration [1954] 1 v. (various pagings)). It contains
brief descriptions of the Board of Commissioners,
the Office of the Secretary, and the Citizens' Ad-
visory Council, as well as of 22 agencies subject
to the full control of the Commissioners, and of 10
special advisory groups.
6216. Stone, Harold A., Don K. Price, and Kath-
ryn H. Stone. City manager government in
the United States; a review after twenty-five years.
Chicago, Published for the Committee on Public
Administration of the Social Science Research Coun-
cil by Public Administration Service, 1940. xv,
279 p. (Social Science Research Council. Com-
mittee on Public Administration. Studies in admin-
istration, v. 7) 40-10323 JS344.C5S76
A summary of the principal results of the city-
manager plan of government in 48 cities that were
operating under it in 1938, and in two cities that had
abandoned it. Although these constituted only
about one-tenth of all cides having city-manager
government, they included nearly half of the mana-
ger cities with a population of 50,000 or more and a
third of those with more than 25,000 inhabitants.
Every section of the United States was represented,
as was every State important to the city-manager
movement. The selected cities had every kind of
municipal history and background. The city-
manager plan is here considered to involve two
fundamental principles: unificadon of powers in a
city council and concentration of administrative au-
thority in a city manager appointed by and responsi-
ble to the council. In order to appraise the results
of this new form of government, which was first
introduced in 1908, the authors compared politics
and administration, and especially administradve
methods, as practiced in each of the selected cities
before and after adoption of the plan. They report
general governmental improvements and abundant
evidence that "graft and waste were reduced, that
municipal personnel and methods were made more
efficient, and that, therefore, unit costs necessarily
were reduced."
6217. Wager, Paul W., ed. County government
across the Nation. Chapel Hill, University
of North Carolina Press, 1950. 817 p. illus.
Bibliography: p. [809J-816. 50-10780 JS411.W3
A volume of case studies of sample counties, one
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT / 997
in each of the 48 States. In the selection of counties
for analysis, extremes such as metropolitan counties
and sparsely settled desert counties have been ex-
cluded. The studies, 10 of which were written by
the editor and most of the others by his colleagues
or former students, are presented in four regional
groupings — New England, Eastern and North-
Central, Southern, and Western States — each pre-
ceded by an introduction. These papers describe
the structure of the county government, its func-
tions, and the relationships between local and State
officials, and tabulate the county revenues and
expenditures. Each New England study consists
principally of an analysis of a town in the sample
county. A general introduction by the editor sets
forth some facts, trends, and analyses concerning the
primarily administrative, fiscal, and supervisory
powers of the county. Professor Wager finds that
the creation of collateral boards for the supervision
of roads, welfare, elections, libraries, hospitals, and
other matters is sapping the powers of the central
governing body of the county. He recommends that
the counties receive more legislative power, a sub-
stantial grant of police power, the grant of zoning
authority, and the provision for each of a county
executive or chief administrator.
6218. Zink, Harold.
United States,
millan, 1948. 637 p,
Government of cities in the
Rev. ed. New York, Mac-
49-7040 JS331.Z5 1948
"Selected bibliography" at end of chapters.
This textbook, originally published in 1939, em-
phasizes a number of factors in American munici-
pal government which came to the fore during the
1930's, among them the enlarged role of the Fed-
eral government in city affairs, the problem of
large-scale public relief, a notable expansion of su-
pervised recreation, changed goals in city planning,
improvement in public personnel practices, prog-
ress in police administration, and increased concern
for public housing. On the negative side are
stressed the difficulties of obtaining adequate mu-
nicipal revenues, the influence of pressure groups
upon city government, and the very vigorous part
played in it by political organizations and machines.
Also discussed are the services rendered to their
inhabitants by the cities, the elaborate and varied
structures devised for the performance of these
services, and the legal, administrative, and finan-
cial status of the cities in relation to the states and
to the nation. In a concluding section Professor
Zink considers the problems of improving the city
through housing programs, zoning and other land-
use controls, studies of trends in population and
industry, and plans for thoroughfares, parks, recre-
ation facilities, public buildings, sewage disposal,
water supply, and public works programs. He con-
siders, too, the problem of creating popular demand
for better city government.
XXX
Law and Justice
A. History: General 6219-6236
B. History: The Supreme Court 6237-6260
C. General Views 6261-6270
D. Digests of American Law 6271-6279
E. Courts and fudges 6280-6293
F. The Judicial Process 6294-6309
G. Administrative Law 63 10-63 16
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession 6317-6332
ft
THE PREVIOUS CHAPTER contains sections on constitutional law, on the civil liber-
ties and rights which in America largely depend on constitutional guarantees, and on
Congress, the national legislature. Various aspects of crime, police administration, and cor-
rection are included in the final section of Chapter XV on Society. The other major aspects
of law and justice are dealt with here. Section B on the history of the Supreme Court is awk-
wardly separated from the previous chapter's Section C, on the constitutional law of which
the Court is the supreme exponent, but it would be
quite as awkwardly separated from Section E here,
which is concerned with all the other American
courts, of whose system the Supreme Court forms
the apex.
Law is a discipline and a profession. The com-
mon law and the bar have descended in an unbroken
line from medieval England, gradually adapting
themselves to the changes of a society that keeps
accelerating its rate of change. Lawyers have re-
tained a strong sense of fraternity and a predomi-
nately conservative outlook. Legal education has
settled into a vocational pattern, with the great
object of getting the aspirant over the hurdle of the
bar examinations. Legal literature is, for the most
part, produced for the practical use of the profes-
sion and issued by specialized publishers. The
more philosophical thinkers and writers of the legal
profession have been conscious of the relative isola-
tion of their sphere from the main stream of Ameri-
can thought, and have made valiant efforts to lessen
it. A number of the works listed below deplore
the ignorance and the distrust which even well-edu-
cated Americans may display concerning the sub-
998
stance and procedures of the law. The movement
of legal reform, which has some noteworthy achieve-
ments to its credit but remains an unfinished task,
has chiefly aimed at simpler, more lucid, and more
easily discoverable laws, streamlined and human-
ized procedures, and greater social responsibility
throughout the legal profession. There are few
realms in which the interdisciplinary approach char-
acteristic of American Studies has more to offer, to
insiders and outsiders alike. The lay American
needs to have a better knowledge of the history, the
forms, and the processes of the law, and the Ameri-
can lawyer needs to relate his specialty to the adja-
cent fields of life and learning, to the mutual benefit
of both.
American legal history offers peculiar difficulties
because of the Federal structure of our government;
each of the sovereign states has its own system of
courts and body of statute law, with peculiarities
developed at various times and for various reasons,
and in Louisiana and the Southwest there are ele-
ments quite outside the common law tradition. It
is the more regrettable that neither schools of law
LAW AND JUSTICE / 999
nor graduate schools of history have taken up the
writing of American legal history in any systematic
or intensive manner. The lack of large-scale and
definitive work, as well as of the many local studies
upon which it must be based, is often deplored, but
some smaller studies of real value have been done;
a substantial sample occupies Section A. The his-
tory of the Supreme Court has been best advanced
on the biographical side; the larger narratives of
Warren and Haines (nos. 6260, 6240) will eventu-
ally be overshadowed by the multivolumed work
now in preparation through the Oliver Wendell
Holmes Devise. The remaining six sections are
largely attempts to select from the literature writ-
ten by and for the profession those volumes which
will be most intelligible and most rewarding to the
general reader. A few, to be sure, have been writ-
ten by lawyers for the general public; and another
few are by laymen of various descriptions, auda-
ciously invading the legal preserve with results pe-
culiarly favorable to the lay reader — such is Cover-
ing the Courts (no. 6288), by a professor of journal-
ism. The digests in Section D represent an older
form of legal textbook, which in most classes has
been replaced by the ubiquitous casebook, of value
only to the trainee. These expositions aim at a logi-
cal arrangement of concepts and principles, and
while they are abstract and difficult enough, a selec-
tion has been included in order to direct lay inquir-
ers to statements of American substantive law in sev-
eral important fields. This, in general, is the law,
with variations from State to State. It goes with-
out saying that they will not enable anyone to set
up as his own attorney. Sections E and F are not
mutually exclusive, and both include critical, diag-
nostic, and reformative titles as well as descriptive
ones. The judges' own stories in E (nos. 6284,
6291), like the lawyers' in Section H (nos. 6322,
6324), are a rare but rewarding form of literature.
G on administrative law deals with one of the
newest fields, brought into being by the develop-
ment of the regulatory commissions since 1887;
their relationship to the courts of law remains its
crucial question, about which there continues a
wide range of opinion. The training, organization,
practice, and obligations of lawyers, often discussed
in a critical spirit, are the subjects of the final
section.
A. History: General
6219. Aumann, Francis R. The changing Ameri-
can system: some selected phases. Colum-
bus [Ohio State University Press] 1940. 281 p.
([Ohio. State University. Contributions in his-
tory and political science, no. 16]) 40-34949 Law
Bibliography: p. [237] -269.
Professor Aumann's survey of "the main-trav-
elled roads" is not intended for specialists in Ameri-
can legal history, but for "members of the bar,
students of political science, and members of the
general public who are interested in the American
legal system in a more general way." The preface
thus summarizes its contents: "The plan of pro-
cedure followed involves a brief consideration of
some of the problems of colonial justice, including
the several views as to the nature and extent of com-
mon law reception in the seventeenth and eighteenth
centuries; the effect of the War of Revolution and
reconstruction upon the legal system; the interest
in the civil law and its influence in the post-war
period; the upthrust of the common law system in
the formative period of American life and its expan-
sion into the newly formed commonwealths of the
nation, including a supplementary survey of early
court organizations and procedures; the role of legal
education, etc. Also involved is a brief analysis of
the course of American legal development in the
period of industrial growth which intervened be-
tween the Civil War and the turn of the century,
including a consideration of some of the changing
concepts and contents of American law brought
about by the conversion of a simple, agricultural
society into a complicated industrial order. Fol-
lowing this excursion into the period of legal ma-
turity, attention is turned to the changing patterns
that appear in the legal order during the first third
of the twentieth century."
6220. Gard, Wayne. Frontier justice. Norman,
University of Oklahoma Press, 1949. 324 p.
illus. 49-1051 1 F591.G215
Bibliography: p. 291-308.
"This book is an informal study of the rise of
order and law west of the Mississippi, where order
often came before law. With abundant use of illus-
trative incidents and a minimum of abstract dis-
cussion, it traces the progress made from the chaotic,
almost anarchic relations between many pioneers
and the Indians to a state of peaceful settlement."
Most of the episodes covered fall within the three
decades following the Civil War, but some inci-
dents go back to the 1830's, and the sheep raids of
Colorado went on as late as 192 1. The presenta-
tion is neither chronological nor geographical, but
1000
/
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
loosely topical, with sections entitled "Vengeance"
(feuding in Texas, Arizona, and elsewhere) "War
on the Ranges," "Vigilantes" (in Montana and
several prairie communities as well as in Califor-
nia), and "Arms of the Law" (frontier marshals,
sheriffs, and judges — notably Judge Isaac C. Parker
of Indian Territory, who sentenced 172 malefactors
to be hanged, as 88 of them actually were).
6221. Goebel, Julius, Jr., and Thomas Raymond
Naughton. Law enforcement in Colonial
New York; a study in criminal procedure (1664-
1776). New York, Commonwealth Fund, 1944.
xxxix, 867 p. (Publications of the Foundation for
Research in Legal History, Columbia University
School of Law) 44-5295 Law
"Sources": p. [76^-jjo.
Colonial legal history on a new and grand scale,
based on the dispersed and incomplete records of
the provincial courts general and local, as well as
upon personal papers and all relevant printed
sources. The authors are concerned to emphasize
the early reception of English law in the conquered
Dutch province, and divide it into two stages: the
first, 1664-83, when "the Duke of York's lieuten-
ants with great skill promoted as the provincial law
the little they knew of English local administra-
tion"; and the second, 1684-1776, at the outset of
which "the practices and forms of the English cen-
tral courts came into use." Thereafter the process
became one of "selective reproduction of English
legal institutions at large." Following the intro-
duction the massive text is in two parts, the first
(to p. 324) concerned with "Jurisdiction," the sec-
ond with "Practice." The chapters of the latter
are on "Prosecution," "Process," "Recognizances,"
"Trial" (two), and "Final Proceedings" such as
punishments, fees, and pardon. Appendixes print
typical commissions, bills of costs, and briefs. In
concluding the authors reaffirm their rejection of
the notion that "our American law begins in 1783."
6222. Holmes, Oliver Wendell. The common
law. 32d printing. Boston, Little, Brown,
1938. xvi, 422 p. 39_I9I39 Law
6223. The National law library, v. 1. The his-
tory and system of the common law, by Ros-
coe Pound. New York, P. F. Collier, 1939. 347 p.
39-8999 Law
Bibliography: p. 309-316.
Nearly 60 years separate these two expositions of
the Anglo-American common law by two of the
most eminent jurists that America has produced.
Justice Holmes' classic originated in a series of lec-
tures which he was invited to deliver at the Lowell
Institute in Boston, and first appeared in 1881. His
point of departure was the dual nature of the law at
any given time; some of it, especially its form and
machinery, is an inheritance from the past, while
the rest, especially the substance, depends upon cur-
rent theories of legislation and corresponds with
what is understood to be convenient. On this basis
the author considered early forms of liability, the
criminal law, torts, the bailee, possession and owner-
ship, contract, and successions. Here we may re-
gret that the author omitted from the book his 12th
lecture, which summarized the foregoing n. Dean
Pound's volume is wider in scope and more severely
logical in outline. He points out how unfortunate
it has been, in America where law and polity are in-
extricably joined, that Blackstone and Kent have
had no successors in expounding the law for the
citizen. His governing concept is that "law is ex-
perience developed by reason and reason tested by
experience." He begins by discussing fundamental
legal conceptions, and by sketching the history of
the common law and of the institutions by which it
lived. The source and forms of law are described,
as are the reception and forms of the common law
in America. A chapter on the organizadon and
jurisdiction of courts is followed by descriptions of
the common-law actions, and of procedure at law
and in equity. Substantive law is digested under
the headings of right, persons, acts, obligations, and
property. "What is characteristic of the common-
law system and gives it continuity in time and unity
in space, is a taught tradition of ideas and doctrines
and technique . . . Above all, it is a tradition
shaped in its beginnings as a quest for reconciling
authority with reason, imposed rule with customs
of human conduct, and so the abstract universal
with the concrete particular."
6224. Horton, John Theodore. James Kent, a
study in conservatism, 1 763-1 847. New
York, Appleton-Century, 1939. 354 p.
39-13988 Law
At head of tide: The American Historical As-
sociation.
Bibliography: p. 327-341.
There were able lawyers in America before Kent,
but he was the first whose distinction and career de-
rived from the superiority of his learning in the
law. On graduating from Yale, he read law in the
office of Egbert Benson, attorney general of New
York, and practiced at Poughkeepsie and later in
New York City, at first with indifferent success.
But in 1793 he became the first professor of law at
Columbia College, and the quality of his lectures
led to his appointment to the Supreme Court of
New York in 1798. He dominated the court even
before his promotion to Chief Justice in 1804 and
converted it to the practice of written opinions en-
LAW AND JUSTICE / 1001
abling proper reporting. In 1814 he became the
highest judicial officer of the State, the chancellor,
and at once "the fabric of American equity began
to rise" on the basis of a greater respect for prec-
edents and written decisions properly reported. A
State law required the retirement of judges (with-
out pension) at the age of 60; and the Democratic
Party in the State was glad to see its most eminent
jurist step down in the fullness of his powers. The
indignity turned into a public and private benefit:
Kent became a lawyer's lawyer and resumed his
lectures at Columbia, published as the famous Com-
mentaries on American Law (no. 6277), from which
he derived $5,000 every year until his death. Kent,
"laying aside the robe of a local judge, became doc-
tor of laws to the whole republic."
6225. Hurst, Willard. The growth of American
law: the law makers. Boston, Little, Brown,
1950. 502 p. 50-6788 Law
"Bibliographical notes": p. [45i]~472.
An introduction to the legal history of the United
States whose form arises from the author's convic-
tion that our legal institutions have been relatively
tough and stable, while substantive law has been
rather the creature of events, changing with rapid
social and economic change. Mr. Hurst therefore
discusses, with emphasis on their functions, five
agencies of lawmaking in the order in which they
emerged into leadership in successive periods of our
history: the legislature, the courts, the constitution
makers (in which the author includes legislative
proposals and the initiative as well as constitutional
conventions), the bar, and the executive. The bur-
den of Mr. Hurst's clearly written essays is that our
legal agencies have lost prestige to the degree that
they have failed to keep the public interest in the
forefront of their objectives. Urban courts have
made dilatory and insufficient provision for the
small claimant and the poor debtor, and for "the
kind of mass social regulation that the traffic law
exemplified." The bar, which gets the bulk of its
business from the wealthiest 13 percent of the popu-
lation, has since 1870 largely abdicated its independ-
ence and its leadership. In an economy wherein
special interests behave like billiard balls on a table,
only the chief executive, in state and nation, is looked
to for his independence and representation of the
general interest.
6226. Langeluttig, Albert G. The Department of
Justice of the United States. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1927. xvi, 318 p. ([Brookings
Institution] Institute for Government Research.
Studies in administration, [no. 15])
27-11623 JK873.L3 1927; Law
Bibliography: p. 262-276.
6227. Cummings, Homer S., and Carl McFarland.
Federal justice; chapters in the history of
justice and the Federal executive. New York, Mac-
millan, 1937. 576 p. illus. 37~364 JK873.C8
"Bibliographical note": p. 551-558.
Dr. Langeluttig's dissertation traces the rise and
development of the Department of Justice, the cen-
tral agency belatedly created by the national gov-
ernment for the enforcement of the law for which
it is responsible. One section of his study discusses
the problems of the administration of the Federal
law, and special attention is given to the very im-
portant matter of the Department's relations to the
other law enforcement agencies of the Federal Gov-
ernment. Of broader scope is Cummings' (Attor-
ney General, 1933-39) and McFarland's review of
the administration of justice by the Federal Govern-
ment. The development of the office of Attorney
General as a policymaking, advisory, and super-
visory governmental post is traced from its incep-
tion in 1789. In 1870, when the Department of
Justice was finally established, these functions were
greatly expanded, and this expansion to meet ex-
isting problems engendered new ones. Separate
chapters of this work are devoted to the Depart-
ment's role in various fields of activity, such as labor
relations and the conduct of business, in which the
Federal Government has exerted its regulatory ca-
pacity.
6228. Levy, Leonard W. The law of the Com-
monwealth and Chief Justice Shaw. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 383 p.
57-6350 Law
Bibliography: p. [343 j-357.
A critical study of the work of Lemuel Shaw
(1781-1861), chief justice of the Supreme Judicial
Court of Massachusetts from 1830 to i860. The
author estimates that no other State judge through
his opinions alone had so great an influence on the
course of American law, and he believes that Shaw's
chief contribution was his domestication of the
English common law. Shaw preserved its conti-
nuity with what was worthwhile in the past, and at
the same time accommodated it to the ideals and
necessities of 19th-century American life. Using
some of Shaw's opinions, which numbered approxi-
mately 2,200, as points of departure and focus, the
author has produced a series of chapters on Ameri-
can legal history. Some of these are concerned with
the response of the law to great social issues, others
with the accommodations in the law necessitated
by changes in American industrial life, and still
others with the growth of important doctrines of
American law.
1002 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6229. Morris, Richard B. Fair trial; fourteen who
stood accused, from Anne Hutchinson to
Alger Hiss. New York, Knopf, 1952. xv, 494 p.
52-6423 Law
"Bibliographical notes": p. 479-494.
A review of 14 notable American criminal trials
which assesses their fairness. By later Anglo-Ameri-
can standards of fair trial, the author thinks, the ac-
cused in the Colonial cases, Anne Hutchinson,
Peter Zenger, and Captain William Kidd, were not
afforded fair trials; but trials conducted since 1789
have, in form if not in substance, conformed more
closely to present notions of fair trial procedure.
The three 20th-century cases included (the Triangle
Fire Case, the Hall-Mills Case, and the Hiss Case)
expose, Professor Morris believes, glaring deficien-
cies in the conduct and procedure of American crim-
inal trials, which persist despite the safeguards writ-
ten into the Federal and State constitutions and the
codes of criminal procedure. Among the deficien-
cies listed are: the character of spordng events or
circus performances that trials too often assume;
the failure of juries to be free from prejudice and
possessed of the emotional and intellectual discipline
essential for a critical examination of evidence; the
perpetuation of archaic rules of evidence; the char-
acter of the bench itself; and the deterioration of
the criminal bar.
6230. Morris, Richard B. Studies in the history of
American law, with special reference to the
seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1930. 285 p. (Colum-
bia University. Faculty of Political Science. Stud-
ies in history, economics and public law, no. 316)
30-14173 H31.C7, no. 316; Law
"Bibliographical essay": p. 259-273.
In his first chapter Professor Morris undertakes
"to synthesize and interpret the main characteristics
of the development of American law in the seven-
teenth and eighteenth centuries." Fie notes the sev-
eral influences which led during the 17th century
to widespread innovations, in particular procedural
reforms making legal redress easier, faster, and less
expensive; and the conservative reaction of the 18th
which brought in many common-law practices and
made for the increasing importance of the profes-
sional lawyer. The three remaining chapters dis-
cuss "representative legal quesdons which are di-
rectly associated with early American social, eco-
nomic, and intellectual conditions." "Colonial
Laws Governing the Distribution and Alienation of
Land" discusses, in part, the aristocratic practices of
primogeniture and entailed estates as transplanted
to America. "Women's Rights in Early American
Law" shows that many of the common-law disa-
bilities of married women were sloughed off in the
Colonies. "Responsibility for Tortious Acts" shows
many small divergences from common-law doc-
trines emerging in American agrarian society, lead-
ing Dr. Morris to speak of "the refreshing originality
which characterized our legal engineering," and to
affirm that a later day's "ignorance of the trail which
had been blazed by the seventeenth-century pioneers
hampered the progress of American law."
623 1 . Pound, Roscoe. The formative era of Ameri-
can law. New York, P. Smith, 1950, c 1938.
188 p. 50-50803 Law
"Four lectures . . . delivered at the Law School
of Tulane University on die occasion of the centen-
nial of the death of Edward Livingston, October
27-3°>IQ36-"
Dean Pound's formative era extended from inde-
pendence to the Civil War, and since most of the
spade work in local legal history remained to be
done (as indeed it still does) he aimed only "to trace
the working of the juristic theory which was chiefly
operative, and to outline the development and
achievements of the chief agencies of legal develop-
ments in that era." The task of this era, in the face
of difficulties caused by the hostility to English law, a
tendency to deprofessionalize the lawyer, and "a
veritable cult of local law," he thus defined: "to
work out from our inherited legal materials a gen-
eral body of law for what was to be a politically and
economically unified land." Within the era, he says,
fell the work of six of the ten foremost judges in
American judicial history: Marshall, Kent, Story,
J. B. Gibson of Pennsylvania, Shaw, and Thomas
Ruffin of North Carolina. Traditionalists or in-
novators, the lawyers, judges, and teachers of this
era "found their creating and organizing idea in
the theory of natural law." The succeeding three
lectures trace the operation of this idea in legisla-
tion, in judicial decision, and in doctrinal writing.
A taught tradition became established, and "the
common-law technique of finding the grounds of
decision in reported judicial experience became the
decisive agency of law making." In the latter part
of each lecture Dean Pound applied the ideas he had
just discussed to the legal problems of his own day.
6232. Russell, Elmer Beecher. The review of
American Colonial legislation by the King
in Council. New York, Columbia University, 1915.
227 p. (Columbia University. Faculty of Polit-
ical Science. Studies in history, economics and
public law, v. 64, no. 2; whole no. 155)
15-15118 JK57.P7R8
H31.C7, v. 64, no. 2
"The power exercised by the English Privy Coun-
cil, of annulling the enactments of the royal colonies,
afforded the home government an important instru-
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO3
ment of administrative control. It constituted a
necessary check upon the only branch of the colonial
governments which was responsive to popular senti-
ment, and gave the English executive a final word
in regard to the minutest details of local adminis-
tration in the dominions." The present dissertation,
written under the guidance of Herbert L. Osgood
(nos. 3220 and 3221), is confined to the 13 mainland
Colonies, and largely to the period from 1696 to
the Revolution, when the Board of Trade was
charged with the examination of Colonial acts and
made recommendations to the Privy Council. The
author devotes one chapter to the period from 1660
to 1696, when the Council's power of review was
rather sporadically exercised; two to the details of
the procedure employed after 1696; and four to the
policies pursued in review, such as insistence upon
conformity to English law and the repulse of en-
croachments upon the prerogative. From 1691 the
royal and proprietary Colonies submitted some
8,563 acts, of which 469, or 5.5 percent, were dis-
allowed by the Privy Council. The process was
unpopular with the colonists, but Dr. Russell ob-
serves that it "constituted at once a precedent and a
preparation for the power of judicial annulment
upon constitutional grounds now exercised by the
state and federal courts in the United States."
6233. Sayre, Paul L. The life of Roscoe Pound.
Iowa City, College of Law Committee, State
University of Iowa, 1948. 412 p. illus.
48-1287 Law
Botanist, practicing lawyer, judge, teacher, legal
historian, and legal philosopher: Roscoe Pound is
or has been all of these. The author, who was one
of Dean Pound's graduate students, presents an
admiring account of his life and work from his
birth at Lincoln, Nebraska, in 1870 until his de-
parture for Nanking, China, in 1947 to serve as
adviser to the Ministry of Justice there. Particular
attention is given to Dr. Pound's service to his native
State, his life in Chicago, his service as dean of the
Harvard Law School for 20 years, his work for the
legal profession through the American Bar Associa-
tion, his furtherance of particular projects of law
reform, and his philosophy of the law.
6234. Smith, Joseph H. Appeals to the Privy
Council from the American plantations.
With an introductory essay by Julius Goebel, Jr.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1950. lxi,
770 p. (A publication of the Foundation for Re-
search in Legal History, Columbia University Law
School) 50-7240 Law
"Sources": p. [687]— 696.
"Table of cases": p. [6991-709.
A massive study which aims "to integrate the
various records in the archives on this side of the
Adantic with the Privy Council records in London"
in order "to describe and evaluate at length the
Privy Council of England as a judicial body ex-
ercising appellate jurisdiction over the courts of
the various American plantations" from 1679, when
the Lords Committee of Trade and Plantations
undertook "a somewhat uneven regulation of the
appellate process," to the Peace of Paris in 1783.
From 1696, when the appeals were entered in the
Council Register, 795 appeals from the American
plantations were heard; of these 157 were affirmed,
336 reversed or substantially altered, and 68 dis-
missed for nonprosecution. The cases of the West
India Colonies are considered equally with those of
the mainland Colonies, as their contemporary im-
portance warrants. The origin of the Council's
appellate jurisdiction is traced back to the Channel
Islands of Guernsey and Jersey, and the precedents
which they provide are treated at some length. The
author finds it necessary to "employ technical lan-
guage, much of it concerned with problems of pro-
cedural, rather than substantive, law." There are
chapters on "The Setding of Jurisdiction," "The
Regulation of Appeals," "Procedure at the Council
Board," and "The Scope of Appellate Review." Dr.
Smith goes into the elements of judicial and legisla-
tive review involved, but finds that the whole matter
remained clouded and vague, since no clear doctrine
was ever asserted or evolved concerning "the basic
factors — the crown's powers of control over colonial
legislation, and the status of this legislation in rela-
tion to the English law."
6235. Warren, Charles. Bankruptcy in United
States history. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1935. 195 p. 36-424 HG3766.W35
This book, which originated in lectures delivered
on the Julius Rosenthal Foundation at the Law
School of Northwestern University, discusses the
legislative attempts to adjust the relation between
debtor and creditor, which have been increasingly
characteristic of the great economic depressions un-
dergone by the United States. Congressional de-
bates on bankruptcy are used by the author as the
basis of his study of the expanding interpretation
of the bankruptcy clause of the Constitution. Three
chronological periods are distinguished: a period of
the creditor, 1 789-1 827, during which time relief
was demanded only in the interest of the creditors;
a period of the debter, 1827-61, in which relief was
demanded only in the interest of the debtors; and
a period of national interest, 1861-1935, when bank-
ruptcy laws came to be regarded as matters to be
determined by the public interest and the restora-
tion of national economic health.
1004 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6236. Warren, Charles. A history of the American
bar. Boston, Little, Brown, 191 1. 586 p.
1 1-29086 Law
Contains bibliographies.
A general survey of law and lawyers down to
i860, part one of which is concerned with legal
conditions in each of the American Colonies dur-
ing the 17th and 18th centuries. Among the as-
pects covered are the status of the common law as
applied by the courts, methods of appointment and
the composition of the courts, the leading lawyers,
legislation regarding the legal profession, prob-
lems of legal education, and contemporaneous
legal conditions in the mother country. The sec-
ond part describes the growth of the American bar
from the establishment of the U.S. Supreme Court
to the opening of the Civil War. Following on dis-
cussions of the Court itself and of the legal pro-
fession, three chapters are concerned with what the
author terms "the four great factors in the develop-
ment of the Bar": the rise of corporation and of
railroad law between 1830 and i860; the expansion
of the common law to meet changing economic and
social conditions between 18 15 and i860; and the
powerful movement for codification between 1820
and i860.
B. History: The Supreme Court
6237. Beveridge, Albert J. The life of John Mar-
shall. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1919. 4 v.
illus. 33-29106 E302.6.M4B582; Law
"Works" cited at end of each volume.
Contents. — 1. Frontiersman, soldier, lawmaker,
1 755-1 788. — 2. Politician, diplomatist, statesman,
1789-1801. — 3. Conflict and construction, 1800-
1815. — 4. The building of the nation, 1815-1835.
6238. Jones, William Melville, ed. Chief Justice
John Marshall; a reappraisal. Ithaca, N.Y.,
Published for College of William and Mary [by]
Cornell University Press, 1956. xviii, 195 p.
56-3619 Law
Beveridge's Marshall is a detailed study of the
world and life of the most noted of the early Chief
Justices of the Supreme Court, who assumed that
post in 1 80 1 and held it until his death 34 years
later. Perhaps the greatest contribution made by
Marshall (1755-1835) to the constitutional develop-
ment of the United States was the consolidation of
an independent judiciary through an active use of
the principle of judicial review, but this was only
one of the many contributions which are here ana-
lyzed in great detail. It is with Marshall's work as
Chief Justice that the author is chiefly concerned,
but to contribute to the understanding of Mar-
shall's greatest opinions much space has been al-
located to discussions of the subject's experience as
an inhabitant of frontier Virginia, soldier, legislator,
lawyer, politician, diplomat, and statesman, and
to the history of his period, the actions and opinions
of those about him, the state of the nation, the
condition of the people, and the tendency of the
popular thought of the era. The partisanship of
Senator Beveridge is self-evident: Marshall is glori-
fied while others, such as Thomas Jefferson, are
relegated to the ranks of the sinners. Chief Justice
John Marshall; a Reappraisal is largely composed
of papers presented by various scholars at a con-
ference held at the College of William and Mary
(Williamsburg, Va.) in 1955 as one of the events
of the Marshall Bicentennial Program. A foreword
by Chief Justice Earl Warren and an introduction
by Professor Carl B. Swisher are followed by dis-
cussions of Marshall in relation to the political and
professional life of his times, the significance of his
thought as measured by present-day standards, and
his contributions to judicial review and to American
law in general.
6239. Ewing, Cortez A. M. The Judges of the
Supreme Court, 1789-1937; a study of their
qualifications. Minneapolis, University of Minne-
sota Press, 1938. 124 p. 38-28601 Law
A statistical treatment of information concern-
ing the 75 men who sat on the Supreme Court dur-
ing the period covered. Graphs and statistical ta-
bles are used to aid in this analysis of the appoint-
ments, the geographical ties, the age at appoint-
ment, and the qualifications of education and prior
public service of the Justices. Along with many
interesting single facts, a few tendencies emerge.
The average age of the Justices at appointment rose
by a full 10 years over the whole period. Once
many Justices served without benefit of college
degrees; all recent appointees have them. The per-
centage of Justices from the South has steadily de-
creased since 1789.
6240. Haines, Charles G. The role of the Su-
preme Court in American government and
politics. Berkeley, University of California Press,
1944-57. 2 v. 57-10498 Law
Volume 2 by Charles Grove Haines and Foster
H. Sherwood.
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO5
Contents. — [1] 1789-1835. — [2] 1835-1864.
Professor Haines of the University of California
at Los Angeles died in 1948, leaving only three
chapters of his second volume in completed form.
It was finished by one who had been his student,
research assistant, and colleague, but it only reaches
1864 instead of 1885, as Haines had intended.
Haines embarked on a new history of the Court
because he thought that the extent to which it and
its Judges "have participated in and have influenced
the political and partisan activities of the time" was
insufficiently explored; and because the conserva-
tive and nationalist viewpoints had been too fre-
quendy adopted, to be neglect of "the liberal and
democratic approach," and the views of critics of
the Court. The Court had been the object of per-
sistent attacks for more than a decade when Jack-
son's election seemed to herald a new day. "But
it was not until the end of his second administra-
tion that Jackson was able to appoint justices who
could change the current of federal judicial deci-
sions. And the change then inaugurated was far
from as significant and far-reaching as Democratic
leaders anticipated." Volume 2, in fact, is largely
a demonstration of continuity between the Marshall
Court and the Taney Court. On the whole, "the
federal judicial power was more firmly established
and far broader in extent at the end of the Taney
period than at the beginning."
6241. Howe, Mark De Wolfe. Justice Oliver
Wendell Holmes, v. 1. The shaping years,
1841-1870. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1957. 330 p. illus.
57-6348 Law
6242. Holmes, Oliver Wendell. The mind and
faith of Justice Holmes; his speeches, essays,
letters and judicial opinions, selected and edited
with introduction and commentary by Max Lerner.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. l, 474 p.
43-6772 Law
"Note on the Holmes literature": [452]-46o.
Following a decade and a half of writing, prac-
ticing, and teaching, Oliver Wendell Holmes
(1841-1935), son of a Bostonian poet, essayist, and
physician of the same name, was appointed a jus-
tice of the Supreme Court of Massachusetts in
1882; 20 years later he went to the Supreme Court
of the United States, from which he did not retire
until 1932. During his 50 years on the State and
Federal benches, Holmes was noted for writing
opinions in a forceful and epigrammatic style. He
was called a legal technician, a humanistic thinker,
and a great human figure. All of these he was.
Professor Howe's volume is the first of several in a
projected biography. The years 1841-70 were, in
the author's opinion, the prologue to Holmes' life
of achievement; in them he underwent the influ-
ences which molded his character and oudook
whether found in the circle of his family and
friends, on the batdefield of Antietam, or at mid-
century Harvard. With Holmes opening his own
law office, assuming the coeditorship of the Amer-
ican Law Review, becoming university lecturer on
constitutional law in Harvard College, and begin-
ning work on his edition of Kent's Commentaries
(no. 6277), this volume ends. The Mind and
Faith of Justice Holmes is an attempt, in the edi-
tor's words, "to give a rounded portrait of the
mind and faith of one who was perhaps the most
complete personality in the history of American
thought." Each group of selections is prefaced by
a note presenting background information.
6243. Hughes, Charles Evans. The Supreme
Court of the United States, its foundation,
methods and achievements; an interpretation. Gar-
den City, N.Y., Garden City Pub. Co., 1936. 269
p. (Columbia University lectures. George Blu-
menthal Foundation) 37-1208 JK1561.H8 1936
Hughes' six lectures were delivered in 1927, n
years after his resignation as Associate Justice and
3 years before his return to the Court as Chief Jus-
tice. They have, ever since their original publica-
tion by the Columbia University Press in 1928,
been regarded as an admirable concise treatment of
their subject. The eminent jurist disclaimed any
intention of competing with Warren's history of the
Court or with treatises on constitutional law; he
aimed only "to assist those, who are not aiming to
become legal scholars, to understand something of
its origin, of the principles that govern it, of its
methods and of the important results of its works."
In an outstanding chapter on "The Court at Work,"
he says that the Judges bear "the heaviest burden of
severe and continuous intellectual work that our
country knows." "Liberty, Property and Social
Justice" is the title borne by the two concluding
lectures; at the end he finds the Court to be the in-
dispensable guardian of all three. "The ends of so-
cial justice are achieved through a process by which
every step is examined in the light of the principles
which are our inheritance as a free people."
6244. King, Willard L. Melville Weston Fuller,
Chief Justice of the United States, 1888-
1910. New York, Macmillan, 1950. 394 p. illus.
50-8032 Law
Bibliography: p. 343-347.
Born in Augusta, Maine, Fuller (1833-19 10) re-
moved to Chicago in 1856, a year after being ad-
mitted to the Maine bar. The years preceding his
appointment to the Chief Justiceship of the United
I006 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
States were occupied by his very active and
general law practice, and by his conspicuous role in
the affairs of the Democratic Party. Possessed of
quiet humor, courage, a sense of nonpartisanship,
and a wide range of scholarship, together with
kindliness, human sympathy, and modesty, Fuller's
most remarkable abilities lay in managing the busi-
ness of the Supreme Court. The author of this
finely drawn portrait concludes that it was Fuller's
character rather than his intellect which captured
for him the respect and confidence of the legal
profession and of the public. He was an embodi-
ment of the dignity of the Supreme Court.
6245. Klinkhamer, Marie Carolyn, Sister. Ed-
ward Douglas White, Chief Justice of the
United States. Washington, Catholic University
of America Press, 1943. 308 p. A 44-427 Law
Bibliography: p. 296-306.
The second Southern Roman Catholic appointed
to preside over the Supreme Court, and the first
Associate Justice to be elevated to the Chief Jus-
ticeship, White ( 1 845-1921) was early active on
the bench and in the politics of his native Louisiana.
(His middle name is usually spelled Douglass.) In
1891 he took his seat in the United States Senate,
and three years later was appointed to the Supreme
Court by President Cleveland. He remained upon
that bench for 27 years, after 16 of which he was
raised to the Chief Justiceship by President Taft,
in 1910. The author declares that White's great-
est contributions while on the High Court were
made in the field of administrative law, but his
opinions in the fields of procedure, contracts, in-
terstate commerce, taxation, and due process are
also subjected to analysis. The study of his deci-
sions is preceded by a biographical essay. The
appendixes contain tables of cases in the Louisiana
and United States reports in which White's opin-
ions are recorded; also given are the names of the
Justices who concurred with him or dissented.
6246. Mason, Alpheus Thomas. Brandeis, a free
man's life. New York, Viking Press, 1946.
713 p. illus. 46-25268 JK1519.B7M3 Law
6247. Brandeis, Louis Dembitz. The social and
economic views of Mr. Justice Brandeis, col-
lected with introductory notes by Alfred Lief.
With a foreword by Charles A. Beard. New York,
Vanguard Press, 1930. xxi, 419 p.
30-30043 Law
6248. Brandeis, Louis Dembitz. The unpublished
opinions of Mr. Justice Brandeis; the Su-
preme Court at work, by Alexander M. Bickel.
With an introd. by Paul A. Freund. Cambridge,
Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1957.
xxi, 278 p. illus. 57-9069 Law
Brandeis (1856-1941), the son of Bohemian Jew-
ish parents who came to the United States in the
ranks of the "Forty-eighters," studied with dis-
tinction at Harvard Law School, and was soon en-
gaged in a varied and lucrative law practice in
Boston. His legal interests were as wide in scope
as his extra-legal ones. Labor, trusts, railroads, in-
surance, finance, and even conservation all occupied
him in his role as counsel and investigator. He
achieved fame as a reformer bent on ameliorating
the evils and injustices which had developed with
industrial capitalism. President Wilson's nomina-
tion of Brandeis for the Supreme Court in 19 16
precipitated a long and bitter wrangle, but even-
tually, with no little aid from Wilson himself, the
Senate's confirmation was forthcoming. From then
until his retirement in 1939 Brandeis' opinions reg-
ularly expressed his belief in the value of free in-
stitutions and democratic processes, which provided
the best means of enhancing the dignity and poten-
tialities of the individual. The greater portion of
Mr. Mason's biography is concerned with Brandeis'
pre-Court career and portrays a great advocate en-
gaged in argument on behalf of what he conceived
to be the basic principles of human freedom. The
Social and Economic Views of Mr. Justice Brandeis
is a collection of his opinions, together with a few
of his briefs, speeches, and articles, arranged under
the categories of labor problems, regulation of busi-
ness, public utility economics, guarantees of free-
dom, prohibition and taxation, and State and na-
tion. Derived from Brandeis' private papers
relating to his service on the Supreme Court, The
Unpublished Opinions of Mr. Justice Brandeis, n
in all, comprise, with Mr. Bickel's essays constructed
from information found in the papers, an exposi-
tion of the working of Brandeis' mind, and of the
processes by which judicial judgments are arrived
at.
6249. Mason, Alpheus Thomas. Harlan Fiske
Stone: pillar of the law. New York, Viking
Press, 1956. 914 p. illus. 56-10404 Law
"Note on Stone's legal writings": p. 888-891.
6250. Konefsky, Samuel Joseph. Chief Justice
Stone and the Supreme Court. With a pref-
atory note by Charles A. Beard. New York, Mac-
millan, 1945. xxvi, 290 p.
A 46-501 JK1519.S8K6 1945; Law
Professor Mason's book is a detailed and schol-
arly account of the life and character of the only
man who occupied consecutively every seat on the
bench of the U. S. Supreme Court. Appointed to
the Court in 1925, Stone (1872-1946) was pro-
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO7
moted to Chief Justice in 1941. Emphasis is placed
upon Stone's career on the Court, and upon the in-
ner workings of that tribunal. Born in the New
Hampshire hills, the late Chief Justice throughout
his life took each task as it came to him, whether
as teacher, attorney, government official, or judge,
and performed it thoroughly and capably. This
quality, together with his balance and dignity,
brought him advancement despite his lack of a
spectacular personality. "Respect for facts, unre-
mitting intellectual effort in the face of social per-
plexities, gave him an understanding that on oc-
casion led to what observers identified as the liberal
position. The accolade was unwanted and not
wholly deserved ... By tempering predilection
with restraint and craftsmanship, he made the per-
sonal preference for social policy but one factor in
his quest for judgment . . . He became the states-
man without ceasing to be the lawyer." Dr. Ko-
nefsky's Columbia University dissertation concen-
trates upon Stone's contributions to constitutional
doctrine and his conception of the judicial function,
against a background of the larger trends of con-
stitutional development and the conditions which
gave rise to the controversies brought before the
Supreme Court from 1925 to 1943. Not having, as
did Mason, Stone's papers as a source, the author
relied principally upon judicial opinions as a basis
for his discussion. Characterized as "a leader of
that liberal jurisprudence of which Holmes and
Brandeis were the trail-blazers," Stone is judged
in the concluding chapter to have been a great ad-
vocate of "an enlightened view of the judicial
function."
6251. Pollard, Joseph P. Mr. Justice Cardozo; a
liberal mind in action. With a foreword by
Roscoe Pound. New York, Yorktown Press, 1935.
327 p. 35-6010 Law
An admiring discussion on a lay level of the opin-
ions of Benjamin Nathan Cardozo (1 870-1938),
who for 18 years served on the New York Court of
Appeals (1914-1932) and for 6 on the U. S. Su-
preme Court (1932-1938). In no sense a biog-
raphy, it studies a mind as revealed in judicial ac-
tion in fields of litigation such as personal injury,
crime, social welfare, labor, libel, and censorship, to
name a few. It dwells for the most part on Car-
dozo's longer service on the State court, and con-
cludes with a brief account of his first two years on
the High Court during the launching of the New
Deal.
6252. Pritchett, Charles H. Civil liberties and the
Vinson Court. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press, 1954. 296 p. 54-8459 Law
A sequel to the author's The Roosevelt Court be-
low, which concentrates on the problem of civil
liberties as encountered by the Supreme Court un-
der the leadership of Chief Justice Fred M. Vinson
(1890-1953; appointed in 1946) in such fields as
free speech, denizenship, racial segregation, and
criminal prosecution. It explores the motivations
of the individual Justices in their opinions upon
cases within these fields. The author concludes
with a searching analysis of what the Court ought
to do to improve its relationship to the free society
of which it is the constitutional guardian.
6253. Pritchett, Charles H. The Roosevelt
Court; a study in judicial politics and values,
1937-1947. New York, Macmillan, 1948. xvi,
314 p. 48-4203 JK1561.P7
The primary purpose of this work is to relate
significant constitutional developments of the pe-
riod to the ideological preference of the members
of the Court. It is essentially a study of the politics
and values of the Justices named to the Supreme
Court by President Roosevelt. The author, a pro-
fessor of political science at the University of Chi-
cago, compiles 25 statistical tables in order to bolster
his contention that in differences of opinion on
questions of policy, given the same or similar con-
ditions, there is a constant in the alignment of the
members of the Court, derivable from their char-
acters and backgrounds.
6254. Pusey, Merlo J. Charles Evans Hughes.
New York, Macmillan, 195 1. 2 v. (xvi,
829 p.) illus. 51-7851 Law
This authorized biography by a staff writer of
the Washington Post is a narration and an in-
terpretation of a career of service to State, nation,
and mankind. Lawyer, investigator, teacher, gov-
ernor, Presidential candidate, Secretary of State, As-
sociated Justice and Chief Justice of the United
States: Hughes (1862-1948) was all of these as well
as a devoted husband, father, and grandfather. He
was the only man to resign from the Court (in 191 6,
after six years' service as Associate Justice) in or-
der to campaign for the Presidency, and then to be
reappointed, as Chief Justice, 14 years later. Fol-
lowing his retirement from the bench in 1941 until
his death seven years later, his counsel was sought
by those who remained in office, but Hughes by no
means sought the role of a professional elder states-
man. In his evaluation of Hughes' 11-year per-
formance as Chief Justice, the author notes at least
four aspects of his work as outstanding: his en-
hancement of efficiency within the whole Federal
court system; his mastery in presiding over the
Court and the conferences of its Justices; his posi-
tive contributions to the law, notably the firm
establishment of the four freedoms of the First
1008 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Amendment as guarantees to the citizen against
State actions; and last, but not least in importance,
his stalwart and unemotional defense of the Court
against efforts at executive domination. A much
briefer, but exceedingly lucid and judicious ap-
preciation of his great services in several realms,
and especially on the Court, is Dexter Perkins'
volume in The Library of American biography:
Charles Evans Hughes and American Democratic
Statesmanship (Boston, Little, Brown, 1956. xxiv,
200 p.).
6255. Ragan, Allen E. Chief Justice Taft. Co-
lumbus, Ohio, Ohio State Archaeological
and Historical Society, 1938. 139 p. ([Ohio
State Archaeological and Historical Society] Ohio
historical collections, v. 8) 38-28150 E762.R25
F486.O526, v. 8; Law
"Index of cases": p. 129-130.
Bibliography: p. 123-128.
This monograph, which originated as a disserta-
tion at Ohio State University, attempts "to deter-
mine what contribution Chief Justice William
Howard Taft made to the constitutional history of
the country" from 1921 to 1930. Some background
for his Supreme Court decisions has been provided
from his earlier judicial and administrative career.
Separate chapters are concerned with Taft's judg-
ments in cases involving labor, the Federal power
over commerce, the limits of State power, restraint
of trade, and the 18th Amendment. The author
concludes that despite Taft's industry, legal learn-
ing, and impartiality, his decisions lacked color, and
"he failed to establish any new lines of constitu-
tional interpretation" which could make his term
outstanding. Apart from maintaining the inviola-
bility of property rights against labor, his decisions
were sufficiently nationalistic and liberal. Even
though his success, under the circumstances, could
only be partial, "his prolonged interest in and his
tireless labors for judicial reform were his crowning
achievements."
6256. Rodell, Fred. Nine men; a political history
of the Supreme Court from 1790 to 1955.
New York, Random House, 1955. 338 p.
55-8154 Law
The author is a professor of law at Yale Univer-
sity who practices journalism on the side, and his
book, which, he says, is not written down to law-
yers, is robustly journalistic in manner. Professor
Rodell says that he is a liberal and admires liberals,
but that his "almost fanatical devotion to that kind
of personal integrity that combines intellectual
honesty with courage" is more important. The title
is meant to imply that the Supreme Court is indis-
tinguishable from the nine men who at any one
time are its Justices, that they bring their characters
and careers onto the bench with them, and that the
Court is therefore "powerful, irresponsible, and
human." The book is a vigorous summary of the
Court's history from an advanced liberal point of
view, in personal terms, and with most space given
to the recent past. The Vinson Court is castigated
as inimical to human dignity and democratic
decency. Well-informed, never dull, obscure, or
difficult, and transparent in its partisanship, Nine
Men is well suited to those who dread the techni-
calities of the subject.
6257. Schwartz, Bernard. The Supreme Court,
constitutional revolution in retrospect. New
York, Ronald Press Co., 1957. 429 p.
57-9302 Law
In 1937 the President proposed to vitiate the in-
dependence of the judiciary by his Court-packing
plan, Justices Roberts and Hughes ceased their ob-
jections to Federal intervention aimed at resuscitat-
ing a prostrated economy, and the Supreme Court
handed down a whole group of decisions constitut-
ing a decisive break with its previous jurisprudence
grounded on laissez-faire. This was the constitu-
tional revolution; Professor Schwartz of the New
York University School of Law attempts to trace its
consequences through the ensuing 20 years, during
which, he thinks, "despite aberrations, notably by
certain Justices, the Court's decisions have followed
logical patterns, consistent with the bases" of 1937.
As the Federal Government entered a whole new
sphere of positive economic activity, the Supreme
Court adopted an entirely new attitude toward
statutes, refusing to void them so long as rational
legislators could have regarded them as reasonable
methods of promoting the public welfare. There-
fore in 20 years "the Court's authority vis-a-vis the
Congress has all but atrophied," and a drastic shift
in the balance of governmental powers has taken
place. Professor Schwartz reviews in turn the con-
sequences in the Court's relation to Congress, the
President, the administrative agencies, the inferior
courts, the States, and the individual. He also
discusses the manner in which the Court's work has
been affected by war and cold war. A concluding
chapter, "Anatomy and Pathology of the Court,"
says that while during the first 10 years the Court
overruled too many precedents, it has since let stare
decisis provide an essential element of continuity in
the law; that the prestige of Justice Holmes has led
too many of his successors to deliver dissenting
opinions; and that judicial review is basically an
undemocratic institution, which in a democratic
system should be exercised with rigorous self-
restraint.
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOO9
6258. Swisher, Carl Brent. Roger B. Taney.
New York, Macmillan, 1935. 608 p. illus.
35-19101 E340.T2S9;Law
Bibliography: p. 591-598.
Taney (1777-1864) is best remembered for his
role in Andrew Jackson's struggle against the Bank
of the United States and for his decision, as Chief
Justice of the United States, in the Dred Scott Case.
Born into the Roman Catholic gentry of Calvert
County, Maryland, Taney had a long and dis-
tinguished career which included service as a
Maryland legislator and attorney general, Attorney
General and Secretary of the Treasury in President
Jackson's Cabinet, and Chief Justice of the United
States for almost three decades (1836-64). Taney
led the judicial forces seeking a modification of the
assumption underlying so many decisions of the
Marshall Court: that unchecked and centralized
Federal power together with judicial benevolence
toward private economic interests would invariably
work for the good of the country. Although he re-
ceived an exceptional amount of denigration or
abuse from his contemporaries and from writers of
the next two generations, the author feels that Taney
well earned the accolade of Charles Evans Hughes:
"he was a great Chief Justice."
6259. Trimble, Bruce R. Chief Justice Waite, de-
fender of the public interest. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1938. 320 p. illus.
38-3414 Law
"Table of cases": p. [307J-3I0.
Bibliography: p. [30i]~3o6.
Waite (1816-88) was an Ohio lawyer of special-
ized practice and excellent political connections, but
had no judicial experience when President Grant
put him at the head of the Supreme Court. He was
Chief Justice of the United States for 14 years
(1874-88) and through careful planning and pains-
taking toil became, this biographer believes, a great
administrator and a judge of recognized ability.
Drawn largely from information found in Waite's
letters, public papers, and judicial utterances, this
study aims at showing something of Waite's influ-
ence in the solution of the constitutional problems
which came to the fore during the Reconstruction
period. The opinions which he rendered covered
a multitude of those problems: radical Reconstruc-
tion legislation, the war amendments, western de-
velopment, transcontinental railroads, agrarian
movements, the control of public utilities and rates,
and the relation of the States to the liquor traffic.
In all these matters Waite made substantial con-
tributions, the greatest of which, in Mr. Trimble's
estimation, was probably his interpretation of the
contract clause of the Constitution, in which he
enunciated his doctrine of the "public interest."
6260. Warren, Charles. The Supreme Court in
United States history. Rev. ed. Boston,
Little, Brown, 1937. 2 v. (814, 812 p.)
38-33016 JK1561.W3 1937
First published in 1922.
Contents. — v. 1. 1789-1835. — v. 2. 1836-1918.
A leisurely history of the first century of the
Supreme Court, to the death of Chief Justice Waite
in 1888; the succeeding 30 years, to the end of
World War I, are more briefly summarized in two
final chapters (v. 2, p. 690-756). The large-scale
portion aims to narrate "a section of our National
history connected with the Supreme Court" for
laymen and lawyers alike, and "to revivify the im-
portant cases decided by the Court and to picture
the Court from year to year in its contemporary
setting." The background of social, political, and
economic controversy out of which the Court's most
famous cases arose is carefully described. Each
appointment of a Chief or Associate Justice, includ-
ing those which were declined, withdrawn, or
disapproved by the Senate, is investigated and con-
temporary reactions sampled at some length. A
chronological list of all such appointments appears
at the close of volume 2 (p. 757-763). Warren also
drew upon the papers of important contemporaries,
legal and lay, and the newspaper and magazine press
for the reception of important decisions; this is one
of the most valuable features of his book. The serv-
ice of the three first Chief Justices (John Rudedge
took his seat and presided over one whole term of
the Court before the Senate rejected him) is cov-
ered in the first 168 pages, and the remainder of
volume 1 is concerned with John Marshall's 35
epoch-making years. Useful material not easily
found elsewhere is contained in Chapter 10, "The
Judges and the Court-Rooms." The illustrations
include photographs of the Court's first two (quite
small) rooms in the Capitol, and group photographs
of the Justices taken in 1865, 1882, and 1899.
C. General Views
6261. Cahn, Edmond N. The moral decision;
right and wrong in the light of American
431240—60 65
law. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1955.
342 p. 55"8739 Law
IOIO / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Acting on the suggestion of a distinguished
United States circuit judge and acknowledging the
inspiration of Jerome Frank, Professor Cahn has
written this book "to draw upon the supply of
moral insight and experience that American courts
have gradually developed and accumulated," and so
answer the question, "What moral guides can be
found in American law?" After a theoretical sec-
tion which considers the extent to which morals
is a legal order and law is a moral order, the author
considers a series of "prismatic" cases which bring
moral issues into sharp focus and encourage the
reader to judge for himself. These are arranged
in six chapters intended to sample human concerns
in a natural progression from birth to death, of
which only three ("Sexual Relationships," "The
Conduct of Business," and "Business with Govern-
ment") are homogeneous and self-explanatory.
Further "prismatic" cases are used in the concluding
chapters, which consider various moral aspects of
trial, compromise, and judicial decision. This
deeply felt and thought and warmly written work
places American law in a more attractive light than
it frequendy enjoys.
6262. Cardozo, Benjamin Nathan. Selected writ-
ings. Edited by Margaret E. Hall. New
York, Fallon Publications, 1947. xxiv, 456 p.
47-11282 Law
A collection of Cardozo's extrajudicial utterances:
addresses, lectures, essays, and the texts of his bril-
liant works on jurisprudence: Nature of the judicial
Process (1921), Growth of the Law (1924), Para-
doxes of Legal Science (1928), and Law and Litera-
ture (1931). Most of these reflect his contributions
to the literature and philosophy of American law:
his insight and eloquence in defining and stating
the moral values of the law; his craftmanship in
bending, or not bending, a rule to meet the de-
mands of ethical principle, or to uphold a legal or
political value; and his aesthetic convictions ex-
pressed in his fondness for beauty of literary style
and his belief in the close relationship of beauty and
morals. Except for some works of his student days
at Columbia which are included, these writings are
by-products and reflections of Cardozo's work as a
judge of the Supreme Court of New York (1914-
32), before his appointment to the United States
Supreme Court.
6263. Frank, Jerome. Law and the modern mind.
New York, Coward-McCann, 1949. xxxi,
368 p. 49-2082 Law
An influential study in the theory of law by a
well-known American jurist, which went through
six printings between 1930 and 1949; to the last the
author adds a lengthy preface (p. vi-xxviii) out-
lining the interim progress of his opinions. Recent
logic, philosophy of science, and especially psy-
chology are drawn upon to scotch "the basic legal
myth," "the notion that law either is or can be made
approximately and certain." The acceptance of this
myth by lawyers, who should know better, as well
as by the public is blamed by Frank for the wide-
spread cynical disdain of lawyers as tricksters and
quibblers. The trouble is that "the desire persists
in grown men to recapture, through a rediscovery
of a father, a childish, completely controllable uni-
verse, and that desire seeks satisfaction in a partial,
unconscious, anthropomorphizing of Law, in ascrib-
ing to the Law some of the characteristics of the
child's Father-Judge." Until we have followed the
way pointed out by Justice O. W. Holmes, "the
completely adult jurist," and put away this childish
image and the childish emotions attached to it, "we
shall not reach that first step in the civilized admin-
istration of justice, the recognition that man is not
made for the law, but that law is made by and for
men."
6264. Hand, Learned. The spirit of liberty;
papers and addresses, collected, and with an
introd. and notes, by Irving Dilliard. New York,
Knopf, 1952. xxx, 262 p. 51-13215 Law
In 1951 Learned Hand (b. 1872) retired from
active service as Chief Justice of the U.S. Court of
Appeals for the Second Circuit, thus completing a
judicial career of more than four decades. Long
before his retirement Hand had become a legend,
first to the members of his profession and later to
the general public. The vagaries of the American
political system deprived him of a place on the U.S.
Supreme Court, but he has been called its "tenth
justice," and with some reason, for the High Court
has been influenced by Hand's lower court decisions,
and has on occasion given Hand's very words a
place in its own. In 1939, when Harvard bestowed
the degree of Doctor of Laws upon this distin-
guished son, the citation called him: "A judge
worthy of his name, judicial in his temper, pro-
found in his knowledge, a philosopher whose
decisions affect a nation." Irving Dilliard's appre-
ciative essay prefaces this collection of Hand's non-
judicial pieces, which commences with his Harvard
Class Day oration (1893) and concludes with an
address he delivered at a celebration of his 80th
birthday. Many of the judge's words in praise of
others are included: of Holmes, Brandeis, and Car-
dozo, to name but three. He is one of the same
breed, and must be praised in ideas and language
of the same stamp.
6265. Jackson, Percival E. Look at the law; the
law is what the layman makes it. Foreword
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOII
by Arthur Garfield Hays. New York, Dutton,
1940. 377 p. 40-27271 Law
A rapid review of the chronic lay complaints that
there is too much law; that the law is uncertain,
rigid, technical, hypocritical, slow, and expensive;
and that lawyers are dishonest, judges corrupt, and
witnesses liars. The author, formerly counsel of
the United States Senate Committee for the Inves-
tigation of the Administration of Justice in the
United States Courts (1936) provides an abundance
of illustration in his efforts to arouse public opinion
to the point of doing something about a legal sys-
tem as fallible as the society which it is meant to
serve. Once the complaint is made, the bar should,
the author asserts, suggest remedies from which lay-
men may choose the one they desire and insist on
its application. The author's recommendations,
aside from the need for stimulating the public to
action and obtaining leadership, call for reduction
of bulk and technicalities in the law, for a continu-
ous digest of judge-made law by a public agency,
for a court administration more conducive to the
ends of justice; and for a general raising of standards
for all actively concerned in the practice and admin-
istration of the law. There is no index.
6266. Konefsky, Samuel J. The legacy of Holmes
and Brandeis; a study in the influence of
ideas. New York, Macmillan, 1956. 316 p.
56-11835 Law
Drawing upon the writings of Justices Holmes
and Brandeis (nos. 6241-6242, 6246-6248) and
upon the recollections of the law clerks who served
them, the author presents a comparative study of
the constitutional and legal philosophy of these two
men, who so often found themselves companions
in dissent. Each of them, in his own way, "has
come to symbolize the never-ending struggle to
infuse law and balance into the processes by which
the people of the United States are governed. They
differed greatly in intellectual taste, social percep-
tion, political ideals, and juristic method. Yet they
were able to achieve almost complete accord in their
exposition of the Constitution. The harmony be-
tween Justices Holmes and Brandeis is as illuminat-
ing a commentary upon the essentially flexible
nature of America's fundamental charter as one
can expect to find in the whole field of judicial
biography."
6267. Mortenson, Ernest. You be the judge.
Illustrations by Alain. New York, Long-
mans, Green, 1940. 451 p. 40-6720 Law
"Collaborator, Miss Sarah Paulding Ray." — p. x.
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 441-445.
A New York lawyer seeks to make the law and
its processes intelligible and reasonable to those
without legal training, to which end he purposely
omits qualifying phrases and legal terminology.
Throughout he employs actual cases, simplifying
them considerably by the omission of technicalities
but supplying the fundamental legal principles
which are usually presupposed in the judges' opin-
ions. After two introductory chapters on the
nature of legal actions and judicial processes, the
author devotes successive chapters to the most com-
mon fields of substantive law: torts, property, crime,
international law, domestic relations, equity, con-
tracts (including bills and notes and insurance),
wills, and Federal cases. Chapter 12, "Problems of
Proof," discusses cross-examination as well as the
varieties and values of evidence. The concluding
chapter presents issues in the philosophy of the law
and in its reform. Mr. Mortenson's cases are
usually quite interesting in themselves, and his ex-
positions uncommonly clear and crisp; the whole
may be termed an attractive layman's casebook.
He warns, of course, that it does not qualify the
reader to conduct his own litigation.
6268. My philosophy of law; credos of sixteen
American scholars, published under the di-
rection of the Julius Rosenthal Foundation, North-
western University. Boston, Boston Law Book Co.,
1941. 321 p. illus. 41-19742 Law
A symposium of American legal philosophy con-
tributed by such legal scholars as John Dickinson,
Roscoe Pound, Max Radin, and John H. Wigmore,
and by two scholars not primarily of the law: John
Dewey and Morris R. Cohen. The remaining 10
were all professors in the law schools of major uni-
versities; 3 of them, naturally enough, were of the
faculty of Northwestern University, A photograph
of each precedes his essay. The essays are untitled,
since the subject of each is understood to be "My
Credo about the Law": "the editorial committee
feared that if the author were left free to select his
own subject, the symposium would turn out to be
a mere collection of papers lacking in definite
unity." Since the print is large and the margins
generous, these 15- to 20-page statements are even
briefer than might be supposed. The views ex-
pressed by the contributors as to the ultimate ideas
of the origin, nature, and ends of the law are varied
in approach and conclusion, although nearly every
one of the essays stresses the inadequacy of viewing
the law as merely a body of precedents and rules.
6269. Shartel, Burke. Our legal system and how
it operates; five lectures, delivered at the
University of Michigan, February 23, 24, 25, 26,
and 27, 1948, on the Thomas M. Cooley lectureship,
enlarged and revised. Ann Arbor, University of
1012 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Michigan Law School, 1951. 629 p. (Michigan
legal studies) 51-61902 Law
Professor Shartel of the University of Michigan
Law School has written for beginning law students,
upper-level undergraduates, and general readers
curious about the legal system an introductory book
intended to supply the place once held by Sir Wil-
liam Blackstone's Commentaries on the Laws of
England, now completely obsolete for general teach-
ing purposes. He begins on a semantic note, with
a discussion of the use of language in relation to
law, and goes on to analyze the legal system in terms
of two basic ideas: acts of individuals and officials,
and standards intended to control these acts. Hav-
ing spelled out his distinctions in these spheres, the
author can proceed to chapters on "Legislation,"
the "Interpretation of Legislation," "The Common
Law," and "Legal Policies and Policy Making,"
policies being defined as the ends for which stand-
ards are framed by lawmakers. However useful as
a preliminary to more specialized law courses, it is
unlikely to enjoy the long repute of Blackstone, for
if most of it is plain enough, some of it is obvious,
and all is quite prosaic.
6270. Vanderbilt, Arthur T. Men and measures
in the law; five lectures delivered ... at
the University of Michigan, Apr. 1948. New York,
Knopf, 1949. xxi, 156, x p. (William W. Cook
Foundation lectures, v. 4) 49-8738 Law
The late and greatly regretted A. T. Vanderbilt,
who taught at the New York University Law School
for over 30 years until his appointment as chief
justice of the Supreme Court of New Jersey in 1947,
was an indefatigable leader in the cause of legal
reform. In these lectures he took a critical look
at the entire field of American law in the light of
a time of world crisis. "Law in the Books," he
found, was crushing in its volume and too little
accessible; the great need was "for critical research
apparatus to make it more available to us." The
legal profession suffered from the lack of a sense
of individual responsibility; its members turned
away from politics and public office. The law
schools spent far too much of their time on commer-
cial law and the law of property; they were never-
theless the best hope of the future. In every
jurisdiction substantive law cried out for continuous
revision and continuous codification, as well as for
public agencies charged with searching it for pro-
visions deserving repeal. However, "the stum-
bling-block," in which improvements "come with
far greater difficulty than progress in the substantive
law," was procedure, for here both bench and bar
had a vested interest in technicalities where they
are at home and everyone else quite at sea. Vander-
bilt concisely outlined the movements for proce-
dural reform, the concrete gains that had been
achieved, and the wide field for improvement that
remained — including arrogance and bad temper on
the bench. Here again the best hope was the law
schools, as the best means "to mobilize, co-ordinate
and direct the activities of the many bar associations,
the judicial councils, and other organizations de-
voted to the improvement of the administration of
justice."
D. Digests of American Law
6271. Brown, Ray A. The law of personal prop-
erty. 2d ed. Chicago, Callaghan, 1955.
853 p. (National textbook series)
55~I4547 Law
First published in 1936 under title: A Treatise on
the Law of Personal Property.
Table of cases: p. xv-xcvii.
Professor Brown of the University of Wisconsin
Law School has drawn upon his own experience as
teacher and practitioner, and has cited over 5500
cases in this comprehensive treatise on the Ameri-
can law of chattel property. An introductory
chapter informs us that ownership is "not a single
indivisible concept but a collection or bundle of
rights, of legally protected interests," and that cer-
tain limited rights in land are regarded as chattels.
Chapters 2-9 consider various ways of acquiring and
transferring rights in personal property: original
acquisition; finding lost articles; adverse possession;
judgment and satisfaction of judgment; accession
and confusion ("such an intermixture of goods
owned by different persons, that the property of
each can no longer be distinguished"); gifts of
chattels and of "choses in action" (claims by one
person against another for the performance of val-
uable acts, such as bonds or shares of stock); and
sales. Six longer chapters deal with bailments
("the rightful possession of goods by one who is
not the owner"), liens, and pledges, all situations
wherein one person has a limited interest in the
personal property of another. The two concluding
chapters deal with fixtures and crops, both in the
borderland between personal and real property.
6272. Clark, George Luther. Summary of Ameri-
can law. With introd. by Roscoe Pound.
Rochester, N.Y., Lawyers Co-operative Pub. Co.,
1947. xxxv, 691 p. 47-8287 Law
6273. Griffith, Virgil A. Outlines of the law, a
comprehensive summary of the major sub-
jects of American law. Indianapolis, Bobbs-
Merrill, 1950. 752 p. 50-3721 Law
6274. Gavit, Bernard C. Introduction to the study
of law. Brooklyn, Foundation Press, 195 1.
xvi, 388 p. (University textbook series)
51-4853 Law
Mr. Clark's Summary of American Law, cover-
ing practically the entire legal field, is designed,
through its summations of 30 legal subjects, to aid
the law student, armed with the appropriate case
books, to obtain an effective general view of the law.
Of its four sections, the first is concerned with the
rudimentary aspects of the law, such as forms of
action, torts, contracts, agency, and property; the
second with equity and the law of commerce; and
the third with public law, encompassing public
utilities, municipal corporations, taxation, and con-
stitutional, administrative and labor law. The con-
cluding section is devoted to the principles of
procedure in common law and code pleading, and
in the presentation of evidence. Another survey
of the law is Mr. Griffith's; of a more general nature
with a minimum of case citations, and without the
discussion of procedure included in Clark's Sum-
mary, this outline of major legal subjects is directed
not only to those of, or about to be of, the legal
profession, but also to others seeking a compre-
hensive statement of the principles of American
law. Mr. Gavit's contribution to this group of
summary and introductory manuals "is not a law
book; it is a book about the law." The most ele-
mentary of the three, it is intended for pre-law and
law students as well as for the layman who desires
to become acquainted with such fundamentals of
the American legal system as legal education, the
sources and forms of the law, the judicial process,
legal ethics, procedure, the common law forms, and
equity. The definition and explanation of basic
concepts has resulted in an exposition extremely
general in nature, but this should increase the work's
usefulness to those for whom it is designed.
6275. Clark, William L. Handbook of the law
of contracts. 4th ed., by Archibald H.
Throckmorton and Alvin C. Brightman. St.
Louis, West Pub. Co., 1931. xv, 858 p. (Horn-
book series) 31-15710 Law
Clark (1863-1918) won "the distinction of being
one of the most prolific of American law writers,
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI3
and it is probably true that during the past genera-
tion law students have used his books more exten-
sively than those of any other author," say the
editors of this volume. Clark's original edition
appeared in 1894, and it and its successors had the
widest circulation of all his works. The original
analysis followed that of standard English works
on contracts by Sir William Anson and S. M. Leake.
In chapter 1 a contract is defined as "an agreement
enforceable at law, made between two or more
persons, by which rights are acquired by one or
more to acts or forbearances on the part of the other
or others." Successive chapters deal with "Offer
and Acceptance," "Classification of Contracts [con-
tracts of record, contracts under seal, and simple or
parol contracts]," "Contracts Required to be in
Writing," "Consideration ['A valuable considera-
tion is essential to the validity of every simple con-
tract']," "Capacity of Parties," "Reality of Consent,"
"Legality of Object [an agreement with an illegal
object is no contract]," "Operation," "Interpreta-
tion," and "Discharge of Contract," and "Quasi
Contract [obligations clothed by the law with the
semblance of contract for the purpose of remedy]."
6276. Clark, William L., and William L. Marshall.
A treatise on the law of crimes. 6th ed.,
rev. by Melvin F. Wingersky. Chicago, Callaghan,
1958. xix, 959 p. (National textbook series)
58-3192 Law
A standard digest of American criminal law since
1895, into the latest edition of which a quantity of
sociological matter has been written. Part 1 on
"Legal Concepts of Crime" has chapters on the
sources and characteristics of criminal law and on
"Jurisdiction and Locality." Part 2 is labelled
"Criteria of Accountability, Responsibility, Exemp-
tion, and Vindication"; it includes a chapter of 104
pages on "The Mental Element." Part 3 classifies
punishable behavior in six chapters: "Proscribed
Coalitions," "Offenses against the Persons of Indi-
viduals," "Offenses Involving Sexual Behavior,
Morality, and Family Relations," "Offenses against
Property," "Burglary and Arson," and "Offenses
against Government." Many persons will prefer
the considerably simpler and more straightforward
5th edition, prepared by James J. Kearney in 1952
(794 P-)-
6277. Kent, James. Commentaries on American
law. 12th ed., edited by O. W. Holmes, Jr.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1873,° 1901. 4 v.
1-277 1 1 Law
A landmark in American legal literature, Chan-
cellor Kent's Commentaries, the great American in-
stitutional legal treatise intended to instruct students
of American jurisprudence in the fundamentals of
IOI4 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
that system, and based on Kent's lectures given at
Columbia College in 1823 and 1824, was first pub-
lished between 1826 and 1830. As early as 1832 a
second edition was printed to meet the enthusiastic
response to the work. Its six sections are devoted
respectively to the law of nations, to the government
and constitutional jurisprudence of the United
States, to the sources of the municipal law of the
several States, to the rights of persons, to personal
property, and to real property. No separate treat-
ment is given to the law of crimes or to equity.
Justice Holmes' edition of the Commentaries, pub-
lished a quarter of a century after Kent's death, not
only brought the work up to date by means of
Holmes' supplementary essays, but also sought to
restore something of Kent himself by eliminating
almost entirely the notes by other hands that had
been added to previous editions later than the sixth
(1848), which contained Kent's last corrections.
6278. Tiffany, Herbert Thorndike. A treatise on
the modern law of real property and other
interests in land. New abridged ed., by Carl Zoll-
mann. Chicago, Callaghan, 1940. xxxvi, 12 19 p.
40-14787 Law
References: p. v-vi.
Tiffany's original edition was published in 1903;
after its plates were worn out, two successive photo-
static reproductions were used as teaching manuals
in many law schools. It aimed "to present, in mod-
erate compass, the principles which govern the
various branches of the law of the land, adopting
for the purpose a method of analysis and order
calculated to make plain the relations of these vari-
ous branches to one another and to the whole." Mr.
Zollmann retained the original framework, but
checked 14 casebooks to add new cases, expanded
some of the sections, and added some new ones.
Part 1 contains "Preliminary Considerations" on
the nature of real property, tenure and seisin, and
the theory of estates. Laymen will be surprised to
learn that the all-important legal distinction between
real and personal property is no older than the
middle of the 17th century, when it arose out of the
differing forms of action used to recover rights in
land as against rights in chattels. Part 2 on "The
Ownership of Land" is much the longest; it has
chapters on "The Quantum of Estates," "Equitable
Ownership," "Future Estates and Interests," "Con-
current Ownership," "Estates and Interests Arising
from Marriage," and "Rights of Enjoyment Incident
to Ownership." The four remaining parts are
"Rights to Dispose of Land Not Based on Owner-
ship," "Rights as to the Use and Profits of Another's
Land," "The Transfer of Rights in Land," and
"Liens."
6279. Walsh, William F. A treatise on equity.
Chicago, Callaghan, 1930. xli, 603 p.
(National textbook series) 30-25486 Law
"We think of equity as that system of remedial
law administered by Chancery in England and by
courts in the United States which exercised like
powers and administered a like system of law"; its
content and nature can be further understood only
by studying its principles and practices. The basic
sense, of course, is that the judicial power may do
justice in cases where the letter of the law would
work a clear injustice or hardship upon one of the
parties. Modern codes and statutes have effected
a merger of law and equity, and "modern equity has
emerged as a coordinated part of the single system
of law under which we live." A major purpose
of Professor Walsh's book is to restate the rules and
principles of equity from the point of view of this
merger. The four parts deal with the "History,
Nature, and Characteristics of Equity," "Equitable
Relief in Tort Cases," "Equitable Relief in Contract
Cases," and "Equitable Relief against Fraud and
Mistake and in Miscellaneous Cases."
E. Courts and Judges
6280. American Law Institute. A study of the
business of the Federal courts. Philadel-
phia, Executive Office, American Law Institute,
1934. 2 v. tables, diagrs. 35-8524 Law
Contents. — 1. Criminal cases. — 2. Civil cases.
Inaugurated by President Hoover's National
Commission on Law Observance and Enforcement,
and carried out by a committee aided by several
law schools and the Rockefeller Foundation, this
study of cases, criminal and civil, made in 13 judicial
districts has resulted in a detailed statistical account
of the operation of the Federal courts — an opera-
tion found by this study to be in the main quite
efficient. On the criminal side, this analysis
pointed to the need for emphasis upon questions of
substantive policy in Federal law administration
as distinguished from attempts to refurbish proce-
dure; a case in point cited was the need for the
regulation, not the abolition, of the technique of
pleading guilty. The interpreters of the statistics
gathered from the study of the civil cases felt it
desirable that devices be created for rapidly and
efficiently sorting the cases and allotting each to the
procedure best adapted to it. As a pilot project in
the employment of statistical methods in studying
courts of law, these reports, aside from the purely
mechanical experience gained, are of value in that,
admittedly, they point to the necessity of trained
observation to supplement statistical tables.
6281. Bunn, Charles Wilson. A brief survey of
the jurisdiction and practice of the courts of
the United States. 5th ed., by Charles Bunn. St.
Paul, West Pub. Co., 1949. 408 p. 49-3344 Law
A short study dealing primarily with the jurisdic-
tion of the Federal courts and only incidentally with
practice before them. Three groups of cases con-
front a lawyer considering the problem of jurisdic-
tion: cases in which only the State courts possess
competence, those in which Federal jurisdiction is
exclusive, and a third group in which Federal and
State jurisdictions are concurrent, and where he and
his opponent have a choice of forum depending
upon such factors as the condition of trial calendars,
the competence of judges, or the attitudes of juries.
While these latter considerations are of importance,
it is not the purpose of the author to treat them;
what he does do is to set forth the areas of com-
pelled selection and of choice in their main aspects
and indicate the place to go for further information.
Of value to law students, this work is complemented
by an appendix containing the principal provisions
of the Constitution, statutes, and rules bearing on
the jurisdiction of the Federal courts.
6282. Callender, Clarence N. American courts;
their organization and procedure. New
York, McGraw-Hill, 1927. 284 p. 27-3682. Law
"References" at end of most of the chapters.
A description of the State and Federal courts
together with an explanation of the procedures
employed in handling various types of litigation.
Intended for the general student, this work is con-
cerned not with minutiae, but with the broader
aspects of the administration of justice in the courts.
In discussing the relationship between attorney and
client, the State and Federal court systems, justices
of the peace, pleadings and forms of action, the
phases of trial procedure, courts of equity, probate
and criminal courts, commercial arbitration, and
the problem of improving legal procedure, the
author has employed language comprehensible to
the layman. A useful list of the jurisdictions of
the several courts in each State concludes the book.
While much of the book's information is now out
of date, no survey of the same scope and on the
same level has appeared to replace it.
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI5
6283. Carpenter, William S. Judicial tenure in
the United States, with especial reference
to the tenure of Federal judges. New Haven, Yale
University Press, 1918. 234 p.
18-12485 JK1533.C3; Law
In the United States judges, Federal and State
alike, have a double function: they not only admin-
ister justice but act as the guardians of the Consti-
tution, and can declare and enforce the nullity of
any legislation conflicting with its provisions (state
judges, of course, guard the constitution of each
State). The independence of the judiciary is essen-
tial to both functions, but it is only the second, the
funcdon of judicial review, that has brought such
independence under political attack, invariably
directed at the security of tenure of the judicial
office. This concise volume reviews the history of
such assaults since 1789, and finds that the courts
have usually been able to withstand them, "and in
the end popular sentiment has usually supported
the courts." The courts must be free, it argues,
not only from executive and legislative control, but
"from the political vagaries of the people them-
selves." It does not find that appointment neces-
sarily produces a better bench than election; the
local state of public opinion is a more important
determinant. It stands out for impeachment as
the only sound mode of removing incompetent or
corrupt judges, conceding only that its procedural
simplification is desirable. Four decades of addi-
tional experience have, for the most part, confirmed
the solidity and soundness of Professor Carpenter's
exposition.
6284. Chesnut, William C. A Federal judge
sums up. [Baltimore] 1947. 274 p. ilius.
47-5573 Law
An account of the conditions under which law-
yers practiced in Baltimore at the close of the last
and the beginning of the present century is pre-
sented in the first half-dozen chapters of this volume.
Discussions and reminiscences of legal education,
Baltimore judges and lawyers in the 1890's, the
Maryland Court of Appeals and the Baltimore
State's Attorney's Office at the turn of the century,
and general law practice from 1889 to 1931 fill these
pages. In 193 1 the author (b. 1873) was appointed
United States District Judge for Maryland, and the
latter half of his book is devoted almost wholly to
a treatment of the day-to-day work of a Federal
trial court. Directed to both laymen and tin
torneys who do not practice in the Federal courts,
these untechnical, easily digested chapters also in-
clude comments on the jury system and on improve-
ments in judicial functions, while the final portion
of the book sets forth a program of collateral reading
for younger members of the legal profession so
10 1 6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
a larger perspective of the law and its practice.
Very few American judges have thus summarized
their personal experience for the benefit of a larger
public.
6285. Frank, Jerome. Courts on trial; myth and
reality in American justice. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1949. 441 p.
49-1 1391 Law
A provocative book by a member of the Federal
bench and self-confessed reformer which seeks to
explode before the lay public the myth of judicial
infallibility. Trials, trial courts, and judicial fact-
finding are the concern of the author, whose theme
is that the process of factfinding by the trial courts
is inadequately accomplished, and, as a consequence,
the outcome of litigation is uncertain and injustice
is too easily done. It is in the factfinding function
that reform is held to be most needed. The reforms
suggested to alleviate the situation are drastic, ex-
tending from a complete revamping of the system
of legal education to the discarding of the judicial
robe. Judges, juries (when employed at all), wit-
nesses, and trial procedure itself would cease to con-
tribute to the uncertainty with beclouds the judicial
scene. The courts of law would become stages
upon which would be enacted the drama of the
ascertainment of truth; no longer would they be
the arenas in which adversaries lock themselves in
judicial combat. The arguments of the late Judge
Frank (1889-1957) won much praise from laymen,
but have hitherto had small effect upon the judicial
process.
6286. Frankfurter, Felix, and James M. Landis.
The business of the Supreme Court; a study
in the Federal judicial system. New York, Mac-
millan, 1927. 349 p. 27-24024 Law
The title of this book, which first appeared
serially in the Harvard Law Review, is far from
self-explanatory. Its authors, whose distinguished
careers were only begun when it was published,
meant that the Supreme Court was the apex of the
Federal court system, and that the work which de-
volved upon it was "largely predetermined by the
jurisdictional ambit of the lower courts," which
has been determined, in its turn, by successive acts
of Congress. "It will be our purpose, therefore,
to sketch rapidly the system of 'inferior courts'
which Congress from time to time established, the
authority which was vested in them, and the scope
of review over them and the State courts by which
Congress conferred 'appellate jurisdiction' upon the
Supreme Court." It is largely a story of the in-
creasing pressure of business arising from the
growth of the country in size, population, and eco-
nomic complexity, of the measures sought to relieve
the higher courts from congestion, and the "lively
issues of politics and policy" which entered into the
ensuing legislation. The volume retains its value
as an outline history of the structure of the Federal
judicial system during its first 135 years; as a prac-
tical commentary on the Judiciary Act of 1925 it
is of course quite obsolete. The authors divide
their narrative into three broad periods, the di-
viding points of which are the Civil War and the
establishment of intermediate courts of appeals in
1891.
6287. Lummus, Henry T. The trial judge; being
a series of three lectures provided by the
Julius Rosenthal Foundation for General Law, and
delivered at the Law School of Northwestern Uni-
versity at Chicago in March 1937. Chicago,
Foundation Press, 1937. 148 p. 37-9340 Law
A veteran of three decades on the Massachusetts
bench when he delivered these lectures, Judge
Lummus set forth in them canons of judicial con-
duct which should keep the bench beyond reproach.
He points out that the lower courts are the keystone
of the judicial system, for they are the most fa-
miliar to the multitude, and by them the whole
system is judged. There are discussions of sub-
stance upon the qualities and duties of trial judges,
judicial administration, and the trial judge in crimi-
nal cases. The weight of the lectures is to be found,
however, in the concluding sections dealing with
the appointment and tenure of judges in relation
to the independence of the judiciary. Of the elec-
tive and appointive methods of selecting judges,
the author prefers the latter and views the former
as the natural enemy of judicial independence. In
fact, he would prefer the appointive power within
each State to be vested in some sort of a minister
of justice, who would be elected and advised by a
council. This would compensate for what is
termed the "outstanding blunder" and the "most
tragic failure" of American democracy: the usual
method of selecting judges and of regulating their
tenure.
6288. MacDougall, Curtis D. Covering the
courts. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1946.
xvi, 713 p. (Prentice-Hall journalism series)
47-1042 Law
Written by a professor of journalism at North-
western University, this handbook represents an
attempt to aid newsmen in the writing of intelli-
gent interpretive news accounts involving the ad-
ministration of justice. Employing examples of
legal forms and excerpts from pertinent news stories,
the author presents summaries and explanations
of legal history, theory, and procedure, civil and
criminal, as well as expositions of the mechanics
of appellate law, including a brief resume of the
history and functioning of the United States Su-
preme Court. With a warning that legal termi-
nology may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction,
Professor MacDougall points out certain differences
between Federal and State laws, and between the
practices of the States. An attempt to mediate be-
tween the disciplines of journalism and the law, the
book is exceptionally well adapted to inform the
general reader.
6289. Mayers, Lewis. The American legal sys-
tem, the administration of justice in the
United States by judicial, administrative, military,
and arbitral tribunals. New York, Harper, 1955.
589 p. 54-8972 Law
Bibliography: p. 559-566.
A textbook developed in Professor Mayers' classes
at the City College of New York to supply the
lack of a single systematic account of American
legal institutions — as distinguished from American
law — in all their varied aspects. The chief institu-
tions are traced to their historical roots, and current
proposals for reform, including some made by the
author, are indicated. Over two-thirds of the text
is concerned with the courts; discussions of the
Federal judicial power and that of the States pre-
cede a description of the court structure, State and
Federal. Criminal proceedings are divided into
investigation and prosecution, with a briefer dis-
cussion of "Summary Proceedings of a Criminal
Nature," such as those against youthful offenders.
Civil proceedings are discussed under objectives
and procedure. The courts are considered as a
check on the executive and on legislation, and as
molders of the law. Their personnel is reviewed;
after discussing judges and lawyers, Mr. Mayers
notes the increasing difficulty of obtaining jurors
of intelligence and probity and, in the criminal
realm, the immense powers for good or evil wielded
by prosecutors. Part 2 on "Administrative Tri-
bunals and Their Supervision by the Courts" is
primarily concerned with enforcement proceedings.
Part 3, "Military Tribunals and Their Control by
the Courts," includes those which we have main-
tained in occupied territory. Part 4 on "Voluntary
Arbitration Tribunals" is much the briefest (p. 543-
557). Any layman in search of understanding can
profit from this survey, well organized, lucid, and
never more technical than the subject matter
demands.
6290. Pound, Roscoe. Organization of courts.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1940. 322 p. (The
Judicial administration series, published under the
auspices of the National Conference of Judicial
Councils) 40-10936 Law
431240—60 66
LAW AND JUSTICE / 10 V]
Bibliography: p. [2951-304.
A comprehensive treatment of the growth of the
courts in various American jurisdictions from the
17th century to the present era. Dean Pound em-
phasizes the common elements present in this
growth, which have led to an American type of
judicial organization despite diversities among the
various components of the American judicial ma-
chinery. The book was written not as a part of a
general history of American law, but in preparation
for a reorganization of the American courts, which
the author felt to be inevitable. The study points
up the need for a thorough reorganization of the
courts based upon the principles of unification, con-
servation of judicial energy, and responsibility.
Stressed is the necessity of abolishing legislative reg-
ulation of the administrative details of the courts,
and of establishing within the various jurisdictions
an administrative hierarchy with a responsible head
and responsible subordinates. "Only by some such
centralized system," Dean Pound declares, "can the
courts handle with a maximum of efficiency and
expedition, and minimum of expense to litigants
and public, the volume of litigation that comes to
them under the social and economic order of today."
6291. Ulman, Joseph N. A judge takes the stand.
New York, Knopf, 1936. 289 p.
39-33779 Law
"Suggestions for further reading": p. 287-289.
"For the last eight years I have been one of the
eleven judges comprising the court of first resort
for all but minor cases in a city of eight hundred
thousand people," says Judge Ulman of the supreme
bench of Baltimore city. In this time he accumu-
lated 22 notebooks, each of 500 closely written pages,
covering the cases heard before him. He draws
upon them for a series of topical chapters, in which
comments and reflections arise out of selected facts,
intended to let the average citizen know "what
actually happens when cases are tried in court." He
notes that juries, merely by the amount of damages
they assess, have remade the law of contributory
negligence as laid down by a judge in 1809, and he
reflects at length on the relationship of judge and
jury, concluding that the judge is in danger of using
his powers of interference more than the situation
warrants. In a chapter entitled "I Object," he dis-
cusses the courtroom relationship of judge and law-
yers, with respect to the rules of evidence and the
treatment of witnesses. "It Is Unconstitutional"
contains some unusual and most interesting com-
ments on a decision of his which was reversed by
the Maryland Court of Appeals but reaffirmed by
the United State Supreme Court. "Murder" goes
into the case of Herman Duker; Judge Ulman sen-
tenced him to hang, but Governor Ritchie com-
I0l8 / A. GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
muted the sentence to life imprisonment. The book
is instructive enough, but one wishes that its wise
and humane author had the literary skill which
could have made it quite outstanding.
6292. Warner, Sam Bass, and Henry B. Cabot.
Judges and law reform. Cambridge, Har-
vard University Press, 1936. 246 p. diagr. (Survey
of crime and criminal justice in Boston, conducted
by the Harvard Law School, v. 4)
36-15542 HV6795.B7S8, v. 4; Law
Of particular interest to students of the criminal
law, this study, centered on the Boston and Massa-
chusetts courts, is concerned with the administration
of criminal justice in the courts, and with its im-
provement. The authors point out that it is to the
judges that we should look for leadership in such
reform, for if judges would assume such respon-
sibility, reforms in legal procedure, they hope,
would be brought about much more skillfully and
expeditiously than if entrusted to a legislature;
judges would take greater pains to see that justice is
administered; and judgeships would be made more
attractive to the highest caliber of lawyer. Not only
are the organization of the courts and the mechanics
of dispensing justice scrutinized but such tribula-
tions of the public as discourteous attorneys, lack of
proper courtroom facilities for visitors, and cum-
brous procedure, and delays in the conduct of trials
are also given deserved space here. It is not only on
the bench and at the bar, but also in the attitude
of the public toward the judicial function that a
change must be wrought, if continuous reform of
legal procedure is to become a reality.
6293. Wendell, Mitchell. Relations between the
Federal and State courts. New York, Co-
lumbia University Press, 1949. 298 p. (Columbia
University. Faculty of Political Science. Studies
in history, economics and public law, no. 555)
49-11705 H3i.C7,no.555
"Selected bibliography": p. 291-292.
If the primary contribution of the judiciary
to the Federal structure of the United States has
been made by the Supreme Court through its inter-
pretation of the Constitution, the lower Federal
courts and the State courts have nevertheless made
significant contributions to the operation of the
Federal system. These courts are responsible for
the daily adjustment of the judicial relationship be-
tween the Federal and State governments. With
this in mind, the author launches his discussion of
the division of jurisdiction between the Federal and
State courts. The first section of the book traces the
development of the power of the Federal judiciary
and is followed by an examination of the circum-
stances under which a litigant may be heard in a
Federal court; this involves the knotty problem of
diversity of citizenship. Thereafter much of this
study is concerned with the background and after-
math of the cases Swift v. Tyson (1842) and Eire
Railroad Co. v. Tompkins (1938). In the latter,
the Supreme Court after 96 years reversed its doc-
trine in the former, that the Federal courts were
free to disregard State precedents and apply their
own interpretation of State law. The work closes
with a brief survey of the problems of concurrent
jurisdiction and with the author's conclusions in
favor of continuing the dual judiciary, because of
the need for efficient judicial administration and
for State courts which have authority to make final
determinations in matters of local law. The opera-
tions of the Federal judiciary, he thinks, should be
restricted to areas of general national concern.
F. The Judicial Process
6294. Borchard, Edwin M. Convicting the inno-
cent; errors of criminal justice. With the
collaboration of E. Russell Lutz. New Haven,
Yale University Press, 1932. xxix, 421 p. (A
publication of the Institute of Human Relations)
32~I3534 Law
Bibliography at end of each case.
A Massachusetts district attorney having declared
that "innocent men are never convicted," Professor
Borchard of Yale University made this now famous
collection of 65 cases, 50 of which are narrated at
some length. They are drawn from 26 States of
the Union, the District of Columbia, and England;
29 of them had to do with murder, 23 with robbery
or swindling, 5 with forgery, and 4 with criminal
assault. In each the innocence of the convicted
person was subsequently established beyond reason-
able doubt: in six cases the person supposed to have
been murdered turned up alive, while in others the
real culprit was caught and convicted, or new and
exculpating evidence was discovered. In several
instances the convicted person escaped execution by
a hair's breadth, and in many the exculpating evi-
dence came to light by sheer luck. The main
causes of the erroneous convictions are found to
be mistaken identification, erroneous inferences
from circumstantial evidence, perjury, or several of
these in combination; and Professor Borchard notes
faults on the part of the police, the prosecution, and
the state of community opinion. He offers, in an
introductory chapter, some needed reforms in crim-
inal procedure, and in a final one, a draft statute
for indemnifying wrongfully convicted and arrested
persons, based on a survey of European legislation
for the purpose. He observes that, while there are
nine cases of unjust acquittal for one of unjust con-
viction, this does not lessen the obligation to remedy
the latter. And he makes the further observation:
"In the majority of these cases the accused were
poor persons, and in many of the cases their defense
was for that reason inadequate."
6295. Brewster, Stanley F. Twelve men in a box.
Chicago, Callaghan, 1934. 175 p.
35-222 Law
Written primarily for the citizen who may some-
day be called for jury duty, this manual intends to
familiarize him with the duties and functioning of
both the grand and petit juries. The machinery of
the jury system itself, as well as something of the
background of trial by jury as an institution, and
the organization of the courts are touched upon.
However, the greatest emphasis is given to proce-
dure in trials civil and criminal, and the role of the
juror from the time of his selection to the rendering
of the verdict. The author tells what every juror
ought to know about the opening addresses; wit-
nesses, including experts, and their examination
and cross-examination; the weighing of evidence
and the detection of perjury; the seven most im-
portant rules of evidence; summations, their purpose
and importance; the judge's charge to the jury; and
what goes on in the jury room while a verdict is
being agreed on or disagreed about. This instruc-
tive little volume concludes by describing the dif-
ferent considerations that apply to juries in criminal
cases, the principal one of course being that while
civil juries may be satisfied with the preponderance
of evidence, criminal juries must agree that the evi-
dence establishes the guilt of the accused beyond any
reasonable doubt.
6296. Busch, Francis X. Law and tactics in jury
trials; the art of jury persuasion, tested court
procedures. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1949.
xxvii, 1 147 p. 49-4312 Law
This well-documented treatise, employing
throughout specimens of trial proceedings, sets forth
for attorneys and law students the general require-
ments of trial procedure, and is, in fact, a handbook
on the art of advocacy. Its aim is "to present all
of the contacts which the trial lawyer has with the
jury in the course of a contested trial, and to indi-
cate how every such contact may be utilized to
induce the desired persuasion." Opening with brief
LAW AND JUSTICE / IOI9
statements concerning the origin and development
of the jury and the constitutional bases of the right
to trial by jury in the Federal and State courts, the
author proceeds step by step, with occasional di-
gressions on the respective functions of the court
and the jury and on the methods of case preparation,
through all of the considerations a trial lawyer must
take into account during the course of a litigation.
Volume 1 of a new "encyclopedic edition" to be
complete in 4 volumes, and containing additional
chapters as well as elaborate references to cases,
appeared at the beginning of 1959.
6297. Cockrell, Ewing. Successful justice. Char-
lottesville, Va., Michie Co., 1939. xxxix,
1305 p. 39-14441 Law
"For twelve years I was an ignorant judge," says
the author in opening his big book, explaining that
the best legal education is usually a defective guide
to practice and that most other judges were and are
as ignorant as himself. Nearly all the troubles of
the law come from its administration, but there are
great successes in every part of the law, behind
which lie definite practices grounded on facts and
principles. "The science of successful justice is
easily learned." Mr. Cockrell then proceeds
through the whole panorama of the law in action
offering concrete instances of contrasted "ignor-
ance" and "success." Ignorant policemen are set
against successful policemen, and so for prosecutors,
criminal trial judges, children's judges, probation
officers, jailers, parole officers, civil trial judges,
juries, legislators, court experts, newspapers, etc.,
etc. When the author comes to declare "the prin-
ciples and practices of successful justice," he offers
only four: "General law of keeping agreements,"
"General law of punishment for law violations,"
"Practice of providing a reserve of punishment,"
and "Practice of adequate investigation." He has
in the meanwhile produced an immense scrapbook
on better and worse methods of the administration
of justice in the United States.
6298. Frank, Jerome, and Barbara Frank. Not
guilty, by Jerome Frank and Barbara Frank
in association with Harold M. Floffman. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1957. 261 p.
57-8299 Law
Sources: p. [253]-26i.
Judge Frank died of a heart attack less than two
days after completing the manuscript of this book,
written in collaboration with his daughter. It is
made up of resumes of 35 criminal cases which re-
sulted in wrongful convictions, 17 of them narrated
at some length and 18 concisely. The cases are all
later in date than Professor Borchard's volume (no.
6294) and show that the hazard has continued for a
1020 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
quarter of a century since he demonstrated its exist-
ence. The cases are followed by a concluding chap-
ter of commentary (p. 199-249) in which the
authors illustrate the fallibility of witnesses, and
criticize the concept of a trial as a duel between
lawyers who use their knowledge of technicalities
and their psychological insight as weapons; the vic-
timizing of witnesses, too often treated as public
enemies in the courtroom; and the concentration of
prosecutors upon winning their cases rather than
doing justice to the accused. By and large our sys-
tem achieves fair results, but, the authors conclude,
it will require major reforms in the administration
of justice to make innocent men safe from imprison-
ment or execution. One which they urge is the
extension to criminal cases of "discovery" procedure,
by which either side before the trial is enabled to
scrutinize the evidence in possession of the other,
and so to avoid tactical surprises in the conduct of
the trial.
6299. Kellor, Frances A. Arbitration in action; a
code for civil, commercial and industrial
arbitrations. New York, Harper, 1941. 412 p.
41-23598 Law
The purpose of voluntary arbitration is "to deter-
mine a difference or dispute amicably, privately and
finally and, in so doing, to exclude a court of law
from such determination." The then executive vice
president of the American Arbitration Association
wrote this book on the basis of its records of 25,000
satisfactorily determined arbitrations, and in re-
sponse to a mass of inquiries "by men, organiza-
tions, companies and unions who want to know
how, when and where to arbitrate disputes." Essen-
tially a practical guide to the technique, facilities,
and equipment essential to end disputes, it takes
account of legal principles and literature only so
far as germane to this purpose, and refers the reader
to Wesley A. Sturges' A Treatise on Commercial
Arbitrations and Awards (Kansas City, Mo., Ver-
non Law Book Co., 1930. 1082 p.) for a more
stricdy legal treatment. The largest section describes
"General Procedure" and includes chapters on the
arbitrator, arbitration agreements, the submission,
the proceeding, evidence, the award, costs, and con-
testing an award. Part 2 describes three particular
systems of arbitration: that set up under the author-
ity of the Seventh International Conference of Amer-
ican States (Montevideo, 1933) to handle inter-
American commercial disputes; the Accident Claims
Tribunal established in New York City by the
American Arbitration Association in 1933; and the
motion picture arbitration system set up by the
industry, under pressure from the U. S. Department
of Justice, in 1940. The lengthly annexes (p. 217-
396) summarize existing statutes and print the
rules of procedure administered by the American
Arbitration Association and by the three systems
just mentioned.
6300. Millar, Robert W. Civil procedure of the
trial court in historical perspective. [New
York] Published by the Law Center of New York
University for the National Conference of Judicial
Councils, 1952. 534 p. (The Judicial administra-
tion series) 52-11758 Law
A compact but detailed survey of "the major pro-
cedural rules employed in the courts of the first
instance in the United States and England, viewed
especially from the standpoint of their historical
progression." Implicit in this, of course, is its fol-
lowing of the course of contemporary procedural
reform. The introductory section of this study is
devoted to a general account of the problems of
procedural evolution and reform within the Anglo-
American system. The second section, comprising
the main body of the work, opens by considering
the conjunctive administration of law and equity,
and goes on to discuss specific phases of civil pro-
cedure arranged in practical order, from the com-
mencement of a suit to the execution of a judgment.
Because of its content and the language employed,
Professor Millar's book will appeal most readily to
those of the legal and political science professions.
6301. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. Criminal pro-
cedure from arrest to appeal. New York,
New York University Press, 1947. xxxi, 614 p.
(Judicial administration series, 6) 47-30727 Law
6302. Orfield, Lester Bernhardt. Criminal appeals
in America. With an introd. by Roscoe
Pound. Boston, Little, Brown, 1939. 321 p. (The
Judicial administration series, published under the
National Conference of Judicial Councils)
39-31420 Law
"Bibliography on appeal statistics": p. [2i2]-2i4.
6303. Puttkammer, Ernest W. Administration of
criminal law. [Chicago] University of
Chicago Press, 1953. 249 p. 53-8736 Law
In Criminal Procedure from Arrest to Appeal each
stage of a criminal proceeding is analyzed from the
standpoints of its historical development, its current
use, and the need, if any, for its reform. Admittedly,
some topics such as evidence, jurisdiction, habeas
corpus, and coroner's inquests are not considered
because of limitations of time and space; their pecu-
liarity to other branches of the law, their obsoles-
cence, or the fact that they are well expounded
elsewhere justifies this. Throughout, American
procedure is compared with that of English courts,
and occasionally with criminal procedure employed
LAW AND JUSTICE / 1 02 1
on the Continent. In his critiques of suggested re-
forms, the author endeavors to present fairly the
ideas of both major groups who advocate the over-
hauling of criminal procedure: those, thinking of
the professional criminal, who speak in terms of ex-
pediting a more rigorous prosecution, and those,
concerned with innocent parties and the casual
criminal, who talk of the preservation and strength-
ening of civil liberties. Criminal Appeals in
America commences with a short history of crimi-
nal appeals in England, and then Professor Orfield,
surveying the literature of his subject, synthesizes
what has been written, thought, and enacted in
America; reports on the functioning of criminal ap-
pellate procedure and on proposals for its reforma-
tion; and makes some suggestions of his own.
These two works together comprise a guide to the
task of improving the administration of criminal
justice. A brief nontechnical description of the op-
eration of the legal machinery in the realm of the
criminal law is found in Professor Puttkammer's
book. Written primarily for the law student and
the layman seeking general information on the sub-
ject, it deals only with the conventional areas of
criminal prosecution and avoids detailed discussions
of controversial points. While the lack of ponder-
ous footnotes should be welcome to the reader, the
lack of a more extensive bibliography than the ref-
erences included in the notes may not be so.
6304. Pound, Roscoe. Appellate procedure in civil
cases. Boston, Little, Brown, 1941. 431 p.
(The Judicial administration series, published under
the auspices of the National Conference of Judicial
Councils) 42-1081 Law
Bibliography: p. [395]-4ii.
An historically grounded exposition of the devel-
opment of civil appellate procedure. After a short
statement of the scope and purpose of review in civil
cases, there follows a historical survey of such re-
view, which is traced here from the Roman law to
the 17th century, and of civil appellate procedures
in 18th-century England, in the American Colonies,
and in the United States to the end of the 19th cen-
tury. Finally the condition of such proceedings in
the present century, with special note of improve-
ments made, is considered. The final chapter,
"Toward an Effective System of Review," for
which all before seems prologue, is an essay in
which the way is pointed, and a program for the
revision of the review of civil cases in the United
States is marked out.
6305. Pound, Roscoe. Criminal justice in Amer-
ica. New York, Holt, 1930. xiv, 226 p.
([Brown University. The Colver lectures, 1924])
30-22093 Law
In this series of five lectures Dean Pound analyzes
the problems and difficulties of criminal justice and
explores the English and American backgrounds of
its 20th-century administration. He discusses at
some length the machinery of criminal justice, the
obstacles to and agencies of its improvement, and
asserts that the ultimate aim of any program for its
reform must be a body of laws adequate to secure
social interests, and capable of a high average of
observance and enforcement. "The juristic think-
ing of today," he writes, "must transcend both
nineteenth-century individualism and nineteenth-
century socialism . . . Instead of valuing all things
in terms of politically organized society, we are
valuing them in terms of civilization, of raising
human powers to their highest possible unfold-
ing— toward which spontaneous free individual ac-
tion and collective organized effort both contribute.
As this mode of thinking becomes general, the
paths of criminal justice will be made straight." In
1945 Criminal Justice in America was republished,
with the same pagination, by the Harvard Univer-
sity Press.
6306. Train, Arthur C. From the district attor-
ney 's office; a popular account of criminal
justice. New York, Scribner, 1939. xiv, 431 p. illus.
39-27830 HV9468T7; Law
Arthur Train ( 1875- 1945), best known as a writer
of popular fiction and creator of Ephraim Tutt, "the
best known of American lawyers," served two terms
as assistant district attorney of New York County.
This is a revision of his The Prisoner at the Bar,
first published in 1906, containing new material and
including much of the relevant contents of three of
his other books: On the Trail of the Bad Men
(1925), Courts, Criminals and the Camorra (1912),
and True Stories of Crime (1908). It is a descrip-
tion of the operation of metropolitan criminal jus-
tice done in an entertaining manner and laced with
illustrations and anecdotes. Observations concern-
ing the nature of crime, the rights of citizens charged
with law violations, and the character of the police,
prosecutors, and judges, together with numerous
suggestions for the betterment of the administration
of criminal justice, are to be found here. All would
seem to point to the idea expressed in the final
sentence: "We do not need new laws so much as
better citizens." Any improvement in the laws
themselves and in procedures will only come about.
Train thought, when more persons have acquired a
firsthand knowledge of the operational conditions
of those agencies charged with the responsibility of
seeing justice done.
6307. Vanderbilt, Arthur T., ed. Minimum stand-
ards of judicial administration; a survey of
1022 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the extent to which the standards of the American
Bar Association for improving the administration
of justice have been accepted throughout the coun-
try. [New York] Published by the Law Center
of New York Unversity for the National Conference
of Judicial Councils, 1949. xxxii, 752 p. (The Judi-
cial administration series) 50-1655 Law
A study, the text of which is supplemented by 62
maps, making clear to lawyers and laymen the ex-
tent to which each state was measuring up to the
minimum practical standards of judicial administra-
tion formulated during the years 1938-40 by the
American Bar Association. The reasoning behind
those recommendations is to be found in the various
reports comprising the appendixes to this volume,
while the main portion of it confines itself to the
presentation of facts and leads to a detailed knowl-
edge of what should be done in each state to give
it a reasonably effective system of legal procedure.
Not purporting to be all-inclusive, the recommenda-
tions of the Bar Association were meant to correct
the fundamental problems, such as those arising
in the selection of judges and juries, in rulemaking,
in pretrial and trial practices, and in the state ad-
ministrative agencies and tribunals, in the belief
that once these were overcome other desirable ad-
vances would follow.
6308. Waite, John Barker. Criminal law in action.
New York, Holston House, Sears Pub. Co.,
1934. 321 p. 34-15268 Law
An inquiry into the functioning of criminal jus-
tice in the United States. The law is viewed as a
thing inert and its effectiveness as depending upon
the activity of its agents. These agents — policemen,
lawyers, commissioners, clerks, jurors, and judges
as well as the public, newspapers, and the Federal
government in its role as an enforcer of the law —
are the subject of this book. Some of the spectacular
failures and the less glaring inefficiencies of the
criminal law in action are recounted to bolster the
author's contentions. In summing up he asserts
that the public must shed the illusion that tinkering
with the criminal law will improve its administra-
tion, and must turn its energies to improving the
attitude of the law's administrators. But this, the
author says, will only be brought about when the
general attitude toward criminals is transformed
into one which does not consider them as subjects
for punishment or retribution, but as menaces to
society who must be dealt with by isolation, seg-
regation, rehabilitation, or even death.
6309. Willoughby, William F. Principles of ju-
dicial administration. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution, 1929. xxii, 662 p. ([Brookings
Institution] Institute for Government Research.
Principles of administration [6] )
29-13834 JK1521.W5; Law
Bibliography: p. 607-652.
Intended for students of political science as well
as for members of the legal profession, this inclu-
sive survey seeks to determine the organizational
and procedural principles to be followed if efficiency
in the administration of justice is to be attained.
Considered in a systematic manner is the entire
subject of the organization and conduct of the
judicial branch of government: the prevention of
crime; the enforcement of the law; judicial organi-
zation, personnel, and procedure; and legal aid.
Applying to the judicial branch of government
the same criteria by which the efficiency of other
governmental departments is evaluated, the author's
method of attack is to resolve the great problem
of judicial administration into its constituent ele-
ments; to determine the fundamental principles
that should govern in handling the conditions to
be met; to describe the action which has been taken;
to point out wherein this action has failed to con-
form to the principles that should be observed and
therefore has given unsatisfactory results; and,
finally, to indicate the steps that should be taken to
correct these mistakes, and the extent to which
they have been taken in various jurisdictions.
G. Administrative Law
6310. Cooper, Frank E. Administrative agencies
and the courts. Ann Arbor, University of
Michigan Law School, 195 1. xxv, 470 p. (Michi-
gan legal studies) 51-62547 Law
Bibliography: p. 409-416.
A systematic description of the standards which
the courts impose upon administrative agencies,
controlling and limiting their actions. Leading
cases illustrating principles governing frequently-
litigated questions in contests between agencies and
those with whom they deal are brought together,
and the techniques of administrative adjudication
are discussed. In examining the relationship be-
tween administrative agencies and the courts, par-
ticular attention is given to judicial doctrines
concerning constitutional limitations on the dele-
gation of powers to administrative agencies, pro-
cedural requirements in cases where agencies
LAW AND JUSTICE / 1027,
exercise judicial powers, procedural and substantive
requirements imposed in connection with the rule-
making activities of agencies, and methods and
scope of judicial review.
63 1 1. Heady, Ferrel. Administrative procedure
legislation in the States. Ann Arbor, Uni-
versity of Michigan Press, 1952. 137 p. (Michi-
gan. University. Michigan governmental studies,
no. 24) 52-62288 Law
An evaluation of the actual working of general
administrative procedural laws in representative
States: North Dakota, Wisconsin, California, and
Missouri, all of which had had such statutes for at
least five years, long enough to provide an accumu-
lation of experience. Attention also is given to
Michigan, which possesses such a law, but of limited
scope, and to Oklahoma, which at the time of writ-
ing had not enacted any general procedural legis-
lation. The object of this report is to determine
whether such laws have improved the procedural
practices of State regulatory agencies. Dr. Heady
concludes that the general statutes reviewed "have
had in the balance a beneficial effect in each state,"
and have not sabotaged the administrative process.
But he issues a warning that there is pressure for
more drastic regulation, which "threatens unless re-
sisted to over judicialize the procedures of State
regulative agencies."
6312. Landis, James M. The administrative proc-
ess. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1938. 160 p. (Storrs lectures on jurisprudence,
Yale School of Law, 1938)
38-29177 JK42i.L33;Law
At the time Dean Landis delivered these lectures
the administrative agencies had been the target of
alarmist critics, who painted them as an incipient
tyranny on the way to depriving the citizen of his
inherited liberties and privileges under the rule of
law. Such views are effectively contested here, by
one who believed that the administrative process
had come to stay, and was in fact "our generation's
answer to the inadequacy of the judicial and the
legislative processes." Agencies have been entrusted
with rulemaking, enforcement, and the disposition
of competing claims because the triadic com-
partmentalization of government breaks down in
dealing with modern problems. They have come
into being whenever government assumes "respon-
sibility not merely to maintain ethical levels in the
economic relations of the members of society, but
to provide for the efficient functioning of the eco-
nomic processes of the state." They represent an
advance in the application of expertness to govern-
ment, and the more agencies the greater efficiency
of regulation — provided that the relationships of
the agencies to each other and to the other branches
of government are properly solved. The greater
part of the lectures is devoted to these right relation-
ships. Judicial review of the agencies' results re-
mains desirable, but only if the judges will respect
their expertness, and decline to review findings of
fact made by "men bred to the facts."
6313. Parker, Reginald. Administrative law, a
text. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1952.
344 P- ;> 52-95i Law
"List of books and articles used": p. 313-322.
Professor Parker of the University of Arkansas
presents administrative law as a part of modern
public law, which protects the government as well
as its citizens, and ensures that the executive branch
will function, in an adequate fashion, on behalf of
the people and through law. He does not attempt
to enter into the law pertaining to particular agen-
cies, since each important subdivision would require
a separate volume, but confines his treatise to gen-
eral administrative law. Part 1 discusses the foun-
dations of administrative law in the historic separa-
tion of powers and in the constitutional guarantee
of due process, and analyzes the Administrative
Procedure Act of 1946, the text of which is given
as Appendix 1. Part 2 is concerned with the estab-
lishment of agencies, the hierarchy within the exec-
utive branch, the internal organization of agencies,
and the nature of administrative jurisdiction, which
is not, as a rule, geographically limited. Part 3
describes "Administrative Functions and Processes,"
with emphasis on regulations, interpretations, and
administrative decisions. Part 4 deals with "Judicial
Remedies," the sphere of which has been contracting
in recent years, and for which there is no uniform
procedure. The concluding parts discuss "Execu-
tion of Administrative Decisions" and "Damage
Claims for Wrongful Administrative Acts," and the
second appendix reprints most of the Federal Tort
Claims Act of 1948.
6314. Pennock, James Roland. Administration
and the rule of law. New York, Farrar &
Rinehart, 1941. 259 p. (American government in
action)
"Selected bibliography"; p. 250-254.
41-11629 JK421.P35; Law
This volume describes for the general reader "the
fundamental safeguards which have developed
around administrative action to insure the preserva-
tion of private rights and interests." They fall into
two great classes. The author declares that many
of the most effective checks against abuses of ad-
ministrative rulemaking are themselves administra-
tive, internal checks as against the external check
of judicial review. The formulation and publica-
1024 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tion of its policies by each administrative tribunal,
adequate notice, full hearing, reasoned and written
decisions, and provision for administrative review
are all essential safeguards of the internal kind.
Beyond them, and ultimately indispensable if the
rule of law is to be maintained, lies the power of
the courts to review administrative acts and deci-
sions. The four chapters on the courts discuss their
attempts to set limits to the legislature's delegation
of lawmaking powers — an important but at best
a crude safeguard; the methods by which judicial
control is effected notwithstanding the state's gen-
eral immunity from suit; the courts' own views of
the basis and extent of their powers of reviewing
administrative decisions; review of actions under
the general police power, which is more extensive;
and review of agencies' decisions, which is less so.
As of 1 94 1, the author thought that the continuous
struggle to keep administrative power in the service
of the general interest had been reasonably success-
ful, but warned that overrapid growth or the
triumph of special pressures might make necessary
"at least temporary retrenchment, until the forces
of constitutionalism can catch up with the growth
of power which has outdistanced them."
6315. Swenson, Rinehart J. Federal administrative
law; a study of the growth, nature, and con-
trol of administrative action. New York, Ronald
Press, 1952. 376 p. 52-9466 Law
This study is intended not only for administrators,
judges, and lawyers, but also for those concerned
with the present-day functions of the Federal gov-
ernment. It rests on the thesis that administrative
action must continue to be developed into a coherent
body of law, supervised by special courts of limited
jurisdiction presided over by judges of such training
and knowledge that they can cope with the highly
technical points which are often involved in griev-
ances resulting from such action. Dr. Swenson
"traces the evolution of American thinking and prac-
tice in a changing economy and society from a
philosophy of 'rugged individualism' to that of the
modern 'service state' with its 'big government' and
bureaucracy. The forms of administrative action
and the means of their enforcement are examined.
The relations of the constitutional separation of
powers and of the Anglo-American rule of law to
the development of administrative law in the United
States are explored at some length, and a detailed
and extensive consideration is given to the review
of administrative action by the regular courts.
Finally, attention is called to the role of the Congress
in supervising administration." Dr. Swenson thinks
that we have not set up a satisfactory system for the
control of administration, for control by the judicial
courts is "a not-too-happy solution."
6316. U. S. Attorney General's Committee on
Administrative Procedure. Administrative
procedure in government agencies. Report of the
Committee on Administrative Procedure, appointed
by the Attorney General, at the request of the Presi-
dent, to investigate the need for procedural reform
in various administrative tribunals and to suggest
improvements therein. Washington, U.S. Govt.
Print. Off., 1 94 1. 474 p. (77th Cong., 1st sess.
Senate. Document 8)
41-50129 JK416.A5 i94i;Law
Homer S. Cummings suggested it, Frank Murphy
in 1939 appointed the Attorney General's Commit-
tee on Administrative Procedure, and Robert H.
Jackson transmitted its final report. Dean Acheson
was its chairman, Walter Gellhorn its director, and
Francis Biddle, Lloyd K. Garrison, D. Lawrence
Groner, Henry M. Hart, Jr., Carl McFarland, and
Arthur T. Vanderbilt among the distinguished jur-
ists who served upon it. The Committee assigned
a staff of lawyer-investigators to study rulemaking
and adjudicating procedures in 9 departments and
19 independent commissions or boards. The final
report opens with a general view of the administra-
tive process, and then surveys administrative in-
formation, informal and formal methods of adjudi-
cation, judicial review of such adjudication, and
procedure in rulemaking. Four members of the
Committee presented additional views and recom-
mendations, and there are over 200 pages of ap-
pendixes. The Committee recommended the estab-
lishment of an office of Federal administrative
procedure, and detailed changes in many of the
agencies and departmental offices. It drafted a bill
for the general control of Federal administrative
procedure which, delayed by the war, revised after
congressional hearings, and amended in the process
of enactment, finally became the Administrative
Procedure Act of 1946.
H. Lawyers and the Legal Profession
6317. Brown, Esther Lucile. Lawyers and the
promotion of justice. New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1938. 302 p. 38-39583 Law
The fifth in a series of monographs sponsored
by the Russell Sage Foundation and concerned with
various established or emerging professions in the
LAW AND JUSTICE / IO25
United States, this study considers the legal pro-
fession primarily from the standpoint of its effective-
ness in meeting public needs. The author finds
that the bench and bar have fallen short of accept-
ing certain social responsibilities, but notes trends
that indicate a growing desire within the profession
to promote justice more effectively. Among these
particular attention is directed to improvements in
the laws themselves, developments in the courts and
in new tribunals, legal service both to the poor and
to those of moderate means, and the movement to
institute an integrated bar. Preceding this discus-
sion are chapters dealing with the evolution of the
legal profession in the United States, legal educa-
tion, rules and procedures governing admission
to the bar, the more important national professional
associations, and the number of, demand for, and
income of lawyers. The following weaknesses in
the administration of justice are diagnosed; delay
and uncertainty in the courts, excessive expense of
litigation, unprofessional conduct of attorneys some-
times resulting in their disbarment, lack of interest
in the promotion of justice, and the failure of the
profession to accept social responsibilities.
6318. Brown, Esther Lucile. Lawyers, law schools
and the public service. New York, Russell
Sage Foundation, 1948. 258 p. 48-1216 Law
Since 1933 the United States has been transformed
into "a highly centralized, bureaucratic state of
behemoth proportions," in which the men who make
and carry out decisions are and will continue to be
lawyers. Therefore, says Professor George E. Os-
borne, "it seems obvious that one basic function of
any law school in the future must be the conscious
and systematic training of leaders in policy-making
and policy-administration for the achievement of
those values" sought in a free society. During
1939-41 the author visited 23 law schools in all
parts of the country in order to find out "to what
degree and with what efficiency legal education was
preparing men and women to serve the interests of
government." The first two parts of her report are
comparatively brief. Part 1 estimates the number
of Federal attorneys and describes their recruitment.
Part 2 describes the nature of their work, and espe-
cially their participation in policymaking through
drafting, interpretation, review, litigation, and
counseling — in consequence of which they readily
move on into administration. Part 3, from page
93, is on the "Implications for Legal Education";
it discusses the use of social science materials, the
introduction of new courses and teaching materials,
and the reorientation of selected portions of the
curriculum. The author feared that her report
would seem a very pessimistic one; in spite of intro-
ductory efforts, "the wrench from traditionalism"
was a slow and hazardous undertaking, and more
money, larger staffs, and careful plans were needed
for further progress.
6319. Drinker, Henry S. Legal ethics. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1953.
xxii, 448 p. (Legal studies of the William
Nelson Cromwell Foundation) 53-11928 Law
Index of works cited: p. [367]~436.
6320. Phillips, Orie L., and Philbrick McCoy.
Conduct of judges and lawyers; a study of
professional ethics, discipline, and disbarment. Los
Angeles, Published for the Survey of the Legal
Profession by Parker, 1952, i.e. 1953. xiii, 247,
xiv p. 53—834 Law
Bibliography: p. v-xiv at end.
Brief accounts of the origins and history of the
bars of England and the United States, of the bar
associations, and the development of standards of
professional conduct and the disciplinary proceed-
ings used to enforce them constitute part one of
Legal Ethics, by the long-term chairman of the
American Bar Association's Standing Committee
on Professional Ethics and Grievances. The aim
of his study is to make available a summary of the
decisions interpreting the canons of ethics made in
the past three decades by the ethics committees of
the various bar associations, as well as a few of the
pertinent statutory provisions and court decisions.
In essence, this is a handbook for the use of those
seeking to ascertain the duties and obligations
of lawyers. These duties and obligations of lawyers
to the public, the courts, clients and professional
colleagues, and the question of advertising and solici-
tation of professional employment are discussed at
length in the second portion of this study. The
final chapter is a summation of the canons of judicial
ethics, supplemented by appendixes including deci-
sions by the American Bar Association's Ethics Com-
mittee, a digest of representative court decisions
specifying grounds for disbarment, suspension, or
censure, the canons of professional and judicial
ethics, and other useful materials. The report by
Messrs. Phillips and McCoy resulted from the Sur-
vey of the Legal Profession under the auspices of
the American Bar Association. Following a short
treatment of the history of the codes of professional
and judicial ethics, such matters are examined as
the inculcation of professional standards and their
observance, the determination of character require-
ments for admission to the bar, disciplinary proce-
dures, the selection and conduct of judges, the
views held by laymen, and the perennial problem
of "trial by newspaper." While fundamental con-
cepts of honesty and integrity must be adhered to
by lawyers, the authors conclude, standards of con-
1026 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
duct must be reviewed constandy with regard to
the impact of the activities of the legal profession
upon the welfare of society as a whole. These
fundamental concepts and standards must be in-
culcated in students at the outset of their law school
careers, they must be made familiar to the public,
and adherence to them must be demanded of those
to whom the community has given the privilege of
practicing law.
6321. Harno, Albert J. Legal education in the
United States; a report prepared for the sur-
vey of the Legal Profession. San Francisco, Ban-
croft-Whitney, 1953. 211 p. 53~9°63 Law
As an introduction to a critical appraisal of his
subject, Dean Harno traces the evolution of Ameri-
can legal education from its English heritage in the
institution of the Inns of Court and the person of
William Blackstone, through its formative and
laissez faire periods, and into the present era opened
by Christopher Langdell's introduction of the case
method of instruction in the latter half of the 19th
century. A discussion of the impact of professional
groups, principally the American Bar Association
and the Association of American Law Schools,
upon legal education finds that they have been and
are powerful forces for the advancement of legal in-
struction. Criticisms of modern legal education are
surveyed and evaluated, and in his concluding chap-
ter the author declares that its worst features have
resulted from too little thinking about the objectives
of legal education on the part of law school faculties.
While the virtues implicit in the good lawyer are
qualitative, admission standards for the law schools
and the bar are quantitative. The lack of a quality
criterion, inadequate financing of the schools, large
classes, the lack of concern for prelegal education,
overcrowded curricula, the excessive reliance upon
the case method, and the serious cultural lag indi-
cated by the great overemphasis on private law in
the curriculum at the expense of public law are
among the important topics surveyed. However,
it is pointed out that there is now a ferment in the
law schools which should produce changes for the
better.
6322. Hays, Arthur Garfield. City lawyer; the
autobiography of a law practice. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1942. xvi, 482 p. illus.
42-17237 Law
Hays (1881-1954) was a graduate of Columbia
University Law School who began practice in New
York City, with such successful and lucrative re-
sults that he was able to devote much of his time
to the causes near his heart: the defense of civil
liberdes and the support of progressive politics. In
his chapter on "Getting Started" he modestly de-
clares that "sheer, downright luck" is essential for
success at the bar: "Assuming that you know your
business and are reasonably diligent, the gods of
luck will make or break you." He became a fa-
vorite attorney with people in show business, and
narrates his services to Billy Rose, Sigmund Rom-
berg, and other members of the Song Writers Pro-
tective Association. His first law partnership had
offices on Wall Street, and one chapter describes his
business on behalf of brokerage firms; he thinks
that their honesdy was unjustly impugned, and that
the Securities and Exchange Commission instituted
a reign of terror on Wall Street. Another chapter
generalizes from his practice in marriage and di-
vorce cases; in them, he says, it is almost always im-
possible to fix the blame on either party. One chap-
ter is devoted to his work for the American Civil
Liberties Union, which he narrated at greater length
elsewhere (no. 6127). In part 4 he describes at
length several well-publicized trials in which he
participated, including those of the Wendell will
and heirs (1931) and the Reichstag Fire (in which
he served on an international commission of in-
quiry which had no legal authority).
6323. Miller, Claude R. Practice of Law. Chi-
cago, Callaghan, 1946. xvi, 300 p.
46-6524 Law
The legal profession, says Attorney Miller of Chi-
cago, is usually about 90 percent practice to 10
percent law — in spite of which "most legal libraries
have thousands of books on law for every one on
practice." He therefore aims to set out, with much
condensation and generalization, "a comprehensive
picture of the kind of professional life that lawyers
lead," with some suggestions, warnings, and advice.
There are chapters on "The Study of Law," "Choos-
ing a Place to Practice," "Starting Out in the
Practice," "Securing Business," "Trying Cases" (in-
cluding a section on "The Art of Losing" without
incurring insomnia, indigestion, or alcoholism),"
"Appellate Procedure," "General Office Practice,"
"Administrative Practice," "Corporation Practice,"
"Office Management," etc. In conclusion Mr. Miller
sets before every new lawyer the desirability of
doing his part to improve the profession, and sug-
gests that politeness in the courtroom, even toward
witnesses and spectators, would do much to advance
the law's repute.
6324. Partridge, Bellamy. Country lawyer. Illus-
trated by Stephen J. Voorhies. New York,
Whittlesey House, McGraw-Hill, 1939. 317 p.
40-1 181 Law
An engaging portrait of lawyer Samuel Selden
Partridge, his practice, and his family, written by
his son. The locale is an upstate New York village
(Phelps, in Ontario County) and the period is that
extending from Appomattox to Sarajevo, the golden
age of the country town and the country lawyer, in
which a more isolated and slow-paced and less
regimented life than that of today existed. Then
the local lawyer was often father confessor to the
community in which he lived. Not intended to be
merely regional, this account is held by the author
to be typical of the legal practices carried on in
small towns across the country during that era.
6325. Pound, Roscoe. The lawyer from antiquity
to modern times, with particular reference
to the development of bar associations in the United
States. A study prepared for and published by the
Survey of the Legal Profession under the auspices
of American Bar Association. St. Paul, West Pub.
Co., 1953. xxxii, 404 p. 53-1859 Law
Bibliography: p. 363-379.
Basically a history of bar organization in the
United States with an emphasis upon state and local
groups, this is also a biography of a profession.
Dean Pound, following an introductory discussion
of the characteristics of a profession and a bar asso-
ciation, begins his narrative with an account of the
earliest lawyers in ancient Greece, and brings it
down through the medieval period, in which he
finds the English origins of the legal profession of
the English-speaking world. It was from the
mother country that the Colonial lawyers brought
to America that fraternalism characteristic of the
English bar and which has remained a trademark
of American lawyers. Most of this work is devoted
to developments in the United States. It traces the
histories of bar organization and the legal profes-
sion during the Colonial period, and during the
middle years of the 19th century when the law,
under the stress of a movement for deprofession-
alization, suffered from a breakdown of organiza-
tion and education. Both were revived with the
commencement of the era of modern bar associations
in 1870. From there the development of various
state and local legal groups is traced, and in an
epilogue the author enters a plea for an integrated
bar as a means of preserving the profession from
disintegrating tendencies.
6326. Reed, Alfred Zantzinger. Training for the
public profession of the law; historical de-
velopment and principal contemporary problems of
legal education in the United States, with some
account of conditions in England and Canada. New
York, 192 1. xviii, 498 p. (The Carnegie Founda-
tion for the Advancement of Teaching. Bulletin
no. 15) 21-16382 LC1141.R4
LB2334.C4, no. 15; Law
Bibliography: p. 460-469.
LAW AND JUSTICE / IO27
6327. Reed, Alfred Zantzinger. Present-day law
schools in the United States and Canada.
New York, 1928. xv, 598 p. (The Carnegie
Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching.
Bulletin no. 21) 28-22195 LC1141.R3
LB2334.C4, no. 21 ; Law
"Bibliography and acknowledgments of assistance
rendered": p. 561-573.
These two titles comprise a scholarly study of the
development of American legal education and of
the relationship between the law schools and the
practice of the law. Education for the bar in the
United States, the author points out, has been com-
plicated by the intimate connection between politics
and the legal profession; it is this connection upon
which the American system of legal education rests.
The major portion of Training for the Public Pro-
fession of the Law is concerned with the history of
American legal education before 1890, with a brief
resume of it from that year to the outbreak of World
War I; with the relationship of the bar and bar
examinations to legal education; and with the his-
torical ties between a trained and educated bar and
the administration of justice. The concluding sec-
tion discusses briefly and affirmatively the premise
that lawyers and law schools cannot be made to con-
form to a single standardized type; this involves a
consideration of the various types of law schools
and a plea for the strengthening of the legitimate
schools if legal education and its products are to
render adequate public service. Mr. Reed's second
work deals with the function and work of the law
schools in the United States and Canada at the time
of writing, in the light of their curricula, conditions
of administration, and methods of teaching, and of
the relationship between the schools and the pro-
fessional practitioners. The movement toward
standardization of legal education is discussed at
length, and the author calls for the maintenance of
diversity among law schools and a graded bar, in
order that the schools may not produce legal jacks
of all trades.
6328. Roalfe, William R. The libraries of the
legal profession; a study prepared for the
Survey of the Legal Profession under the auspices
of American Bar Association. St. Paul, West Pub.
Co., 1953. xviii, 471 p. 53-12556 Law
"Survey of the Legal Profession; bibliography of
150 reports, by Reginald Heber Smith": p. 429-443.
The collections, personnel, and physical plants of
law libraries of nearly all types — office, association,
court, state and Federal — are treated in this com-
prehensive survey. Cooperation among libraries
and library groups and through professional asso-
ciations is also discussed. Law school libraries are
not extensively examined, as they have been pre-
1028 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
viously considered in a survey of legal education.
The task of advancing law librarianship, it is felt,
rests not solely upon the shoulders of the librarians,
but also upon those of the practitioners, who may
reasonably be expected to have a general under-
standing and appreciation of the place of the law
library in the profession's functioning, to make
library staff appointments with care, and to assume
a greater responsibility for the financial support of
service rendered to them by the law libraries. It is
maintained that this support, together with intelli-
gent leadership among the librarians, can do much
to raise the effectiveness of law library service.
6329. Smith, Reginald Heber. Justice and the
poor, a study of the present denial of justice
to the poor and of the agencies making more equal
their position before the law, with particular ref-
erence to legal aid work in the United States. New
York, Published for the Carnegie Foundation for
the Advancement of Teaching by Scribner, 1919.
xiv, 271 p. 45-32508 HV682.A5S56 1919; Law
6330. Brownell, Emery A. Legal aid in the United
States; a study of the availability of lawyers'
services for persons unable to pay fees. Rochester,
N. Y., Lawyers Co-operative Pub. Co., 1951. xxiv,
333 p. diagr. 51-8125 Law
Justice and the Poor is a study of the unavail-
ability of justice to those unable to pay for legal
counsel, and of the agencies endeavoring to give
them assistance in the handling of their cases.
Such remedial agencies as courts of small claims,
conciliation, and domestic relations and administra-
tive tribunals and their officials, as well as the work
of assigned counsels and public defenders are con-
sidered. Lastly and most exhaustively, the develop-
ment and operation of the legal aid societies since
their origin in 1876 is discussed. Legal Aid in the
United States is an authoritative compilation of facts
concerning the subject, surveying its past and pres-
ent and hopefully prognosticating its future. Be-
tween 1876 and 1948 the number of cases in which
legal aid was given, as reported by the organiza-
tions concerned, steadily rose from 212 to 344,616
with a total of 8,043,990 cases for the 73-year
period. These operations rose in cost from $1,060
to $1,519,076, with a total of $19,855,024 for the
period. Sixty percent of the financial burden of le-
gal aid was being borne by the community chests,
and the next largest share came from private phil-
anthropy. As a cause, it has gained little popularity
with the man in the street but civic leaders have
readily perceived that it is essential to democratic
equality before the law. The volume was produced
for the Survey of the Legal Profession conducted
under the auspices of the American Bar Associa-
tion. Both of these studies contain appendixes of
illustrative statistics, and Mr. Brownell adds 10
pages of legal aid offices operating in 1950.
6331. Sunderland, Edson R. History of the Amer-
ican Bar Association and its work. With a
concluding chapter on the Committee on Scope and
Correlation of Work and its program by William J.
Jameson. [Ann Arbor?] 1953. 251 p.
53-4°35 Law
6332. Rutherford, Mary Louise (Schuman). The
influence of the American Bar Association
on public opinion and legislation. Philadelphia,
x937- 393 P- . . 37-22332 Law
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Pennsylvania,
1936.
Bibliography: p. 381-383.
With the objects of providing opportunities for
social intercourse among lawyers, improving Amer-
ican jurisprudence, raising professional standards,
and improving the administration of justice, the
American Bar Association was formed in 1878.
Three eras in the history and development of the
Association are defined by the author: the Saratoga
era (1878-1902) during which, in a conservative
and leisurely manner, the Association was establish-
ing itself as a national organization, accumulating
distinguished and influential members, and formu-
lating policies looking toward the assumption of
leadership in the American legal profession; the
era of national expansion (1902-1936) in which the
membership and variety of activities of the Associa-
tion grew tremendously; and the era of federation,
which began in 1936 when the Association ceased
to be an organization of individuals and assumed,
in the name of authority, efficiency, and professional
solidarity and responsibility, the character of a fed-
eration of the organized units of the American bar.
Mrs. Rutherford's is a specialized and penetrating
study of the significance, possibilities, and effective-
ness of the policies of the American Bar Association;
she calls it suggestive rather than exhaustive. It
classifies and organizes evidence of the organized
bar's influence as reflected in the activities of certain
sections and committees of the Association. Within
the scope of this survey are analyses of the Associa-
tion's structure, its influence on its own members,
its public relations policies, and its influence on
public opinion in regard to the Constitution, im-
proving judicial procedure, controlling administra-
tive agencies, and standardizing legislation. She
concludes that the Association has done its best
work in the field of judicial procedure, where it
LAW AND JUSTICE / IO29
has put through some noteworthy reforms, and has aid, but on the whole it has pointed the way for
rendered a distinct service in the drafting of legisla- voluntary organizations of experts to come to the
tion. It has done far too little in determining the aid of "a democracy enfeebled because of the pau-
curriculum of schools of law and in promoting legal city of trained leaders and workers in its service."
XXXI
Politics, Parties, Elections
A.
Politics: General
6333-6340
B.
Politics: Special
6341-6346
C.
Political Parties
6347-6373
D.
Local studies
6374-6383
E.
Machines and Bosses
6384-639 x
F.
Pressures
6392-6399
G.
Elections: Machinery
6400-64 1 1
H.
Elections: Results
6412-6423
I.
Reform
6424-6434
CHAPTER XXIX deals with American government in theory, in constitutional frame-
work, and in concrete operation. The present chapter deals with the political processes
which determine who shall be the governors and by what policies they shall be guided.
Elections by the enfranchised portion of the people have been a feature of American life
since 1619, when the "first-born child of the Mother of Parliaments," as F. W. Maitland
happily termed it, met at Jamestown; but neither then nor in 1776 or 1787 were the pro-
portion of the electors to the whole population, or
the offices thought proper to be filled by their ballots,
the same as today. The tendency throughout has
been toward an expansion of the franchise, with
only one serious setback when the Southern Negro
was disfranchised after 1877. There has also been
an increase in the number of offices filled by election,
but here there has been in the recent past a con-
siderable reaction, evident in such cases as judges
and city managers. However, in America the per-
sons who fill appointive offices are chosen by persons
who have themselves been elected to office.
The national elections held every other year, and
the State and local ones held at varying times, have
never been left to the determination of an unguided,
uninfluenced electorate. Party divisions began to
emerge within a few years of the establishment of
government under the Constitution in 1789, and
clearly determined the outcome of the third Pres-
idential election, in 1796. Although parties were
organized in response to the national situation, they
lost no time in taking State and local offices into
their scope, with the result that each major party
1030
normally offers a candidate for every office that is
to be filled. Parties have regularly come into being
in order to give effect to a particular policy or to
ward off a particular menace, but those that survive
have changed policies often and taken ambiguous
lines even more often. Parties developed their
characteristic organ, the national nominating con-
vention, as early as the 1830's, and the national
committee, which maintains the organization be-
tween elections, not much later.
Along with the urban metropolis, there appeared
about i860 the new phenomenon of the party ma-
chine, usually dominated by an individual of ex-
ceptional qualities, the boss. These machines drew
their power from the masses of the laboringmen and
the foreign-born, to whom their precinct agents
served as a kind of special providence in time of
need or disaster. They drew their money by de-
livering the vote in favor of candidates who could
and would act or enact to favor the men of enter-
prise who were supplying the city with gas mains,
trolley lines, or whatever. The only persons un-
benefited were the middling sort, who found them-
selves overtaxed and overcharged for inferior
services, and turned mugwumps or progressives or
reformers of various kinds. It is only in our own
day that various factors, such as the increasing im-
portance of mass communications, have caused a
perceptible waning of the machine's importance.
Long before this development, businessmen as well
as other groups desiring political services had found
another method of seeking them, by laying siege to
legislators. The greatest pressure exerted by pres-
sure groups is simply their refusal to take no for
an answer: they have a single objective and their
agents unlimited time to give to it, while the
legislator has dozens of subjects and persons claim-
ing his attention. Pressures, unlike machines, have
been growing, and their regulation is still new and
tentative. Political scientists made some admirable
studies in both realms in the 1930's, most of which
appear in Sections E and F. The progressive move-
ment early in the present century believed that
political abuses could be eliminated by ingenious
improvements in the machinery of elections. These
have practically all been adopted or at least tried
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO3I
for a time, but seldom if ever produced the antici-
pated reformation. This need not imply that the
changes were not desirable in themselves. These
and related matters are treated in Section G. Recent
students of elections have sought to predict future
results from existing vote statistics or samples of
opinion gathered by interviewers. The electorate
continues to surprise them from time to time. Per-
haps the most interesting tides in Section H are
those which seek to trace, by repeated interviews
in the course of a campaign, the formation and
change of voting intention; this comes very near to
the heart of democracy itself. A variety of things
are grouped together in Section I, their common
denominator being the aim of raising the political
process onto a higher plane. Much of what seems
failure might look very different if we could know
what things would be like if the effort had never
been made. Few but politicians express or have
expressed any glowing satisfaction with American
politics, but no one can deny that it keeps the future
open, or that the voters can have what they want
if they will keep their minds on it.
A. Politics: General
6333. Kent, Frank R. The great game of politics;
an effort to present the elementary human
facts about politics, politicians and political ma-
chines, candidates and their ways, for the benefit
of the average citizen. Garden City, N.Y., Double-
day, Doran, 1935. xiv, 354 p.
35-8662 JK2276.K4 1935
First published in 1923.
"A plain reporter's story of the political game,"
by an editor and political commentator of the
Baltimore Sunpapers. The author has endeavored
to show both the practical and the human side of
the political machine, "the good as well as the bad
in it, to tell who the men are, how they work, what
they get out of it, whence it comes and how much,"
how political power is acquired, and how and why
it is held. Mr. Kent emphasizes the "overwhelming
proportion of insincerity, buncombe, and fakery
that characterizes almost every campaign and nearly
all candidates" and, in the latter chapters, sets forth
his views of political issues, finances, and the
formulation of newspaper political policies. In the
author's opinion, the country was [as of 1935]
really run by the political machines, and the bosses
had become the most influential members of their
communities because of the voters' inertia and ig-
norance. Voters would not participate in the pri-
maries, yet "99 per cent of all candidates for all of-
fices are nominated as a result of primaries," and
control of them means control of the political situa-
tion in a given community. Mr. Kent offers neither
panacea nor preachment, but pleads for "regular,
intelligent, and informed voting by all those quali-
fied to vote."
6334. Kent, Frank R. Political behavior; the here-
tofore unwritten laws, customs and principles
of politics as practiced in the United States. New
York, Morrow, 1928. 342 p.
28-20042 JK1726.K4
A disillusioned analysis of political processes and
the behavior of politicians and voters in the United
States by the redoubtable liberal Democrat. Mr.
Kent sought to formulate the ground rules for
political success and to clarify the facts of political
life. He found "a legion of seasoned, tested axioms
and a few broad general laws, a real study and
understanding of which are just as necessary to the
successful practicing politican as a thorough
knowledge of legal procedure to a successful lawyer
or biology to a doctor." The candidate who, con-
sciously or unconsciously, applies the proved political
IO32 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
rules and obeys the laws of politics has a tremen-
dous advantage over the candidate who fails to do
so, regardless of character and intelligence. Mr.
Kent terms party regularity and organization sup-
port the two great essentials, and explains how to
achieve the latter. He then takes up the more
complex and flexible rules whereby candidates for
elective office make successful appeals to the voters.
Among the things to avoid are unnecessary antag-
onisms, controversial issues, overestimation of voter
intelligence, showing up the opponent, high-hatting
the voters, appearing ridiculous, and fixed princi-
ples. The candidate must be sure to put on a good
show, and to have adequate finances and ample
publicity.
6335. Key, Valdimer O. Politics, parties, and
pressure groups. 3d ed. New York,
Crowell, 1952. xvi, 799 p.
52-7851 JF2051.K4 1952
First published in 1942.
A college textbook on politics which makes the
central question "the relation of those with power
to those who respond to, resist, or acquiesce in its
exercise." Power is considered here as an indis-
pensable means to the other ends which find ex-
pression in public policy, especially in legislation.
In a democracy the mass of citizens choose from
among competing inner circles of leaders, but initia-
tive and leadership rest with the chosen leaders
rather than with the mass. A leader in American
politics, however, must make his decisions not only
on the merits of the case but on their probable effects
upon his supporters, and he may attempt to control
by persuasion rather than by imposing his will.
The problem of the politician or statesman in a
democracy, Professor Key believes, is to maintain
a balance among the demands of competing interests
or values; it is not necessarily to express the "popular
will," although every regime seeks to attract popular
support. On these principles he analyzes the com-
position, objectives, and techniques of the competing
interests, and the changes, maladjustments, and
readjustments that have occurred in the American
political equilibrium.
6336. Logan, Edward B., ed. The American po-
litical scene. Rev. ed. New York, Harper,
1938. 311 p. 38-31039 JK1726.L6 1938
First published in 1936.
Contents. — Present-day characteristics of Amer-
ican political parties, by A. N. Holcombe. — Party
organization in the United States, by E. B. Logan. —
The politician and the voter, by J. T. Salter. —
Presidential campaigns, by H. R. Bruce. — The use
of money in elections, by }. K. Pollock. — Pressure
groups and propaganda, by H. L. Childs. — Nomina-
tions, by Louise Overacker. — Appendix 1. The
changing outlook for a realignment of parties, by
A. N. Holcombe. — Appendix 2. The platforms of
the two major parties.
Analyses by seven political scientists of the most
important determinants in American politics. The
authors attempt to explain some of the influences
and controls which operate in the selection of our
public officials and govern their activities after they
have been selected. These writers find among the
forces to be reckoned with: the relatively even
division of the bulk of the voters between the
Democratic and Republican Parties; a growing
volatility of the electorate; the power of the political
party over public policy and officials; the politician's
practice of the art of politics; the management and
techniques of caucuses, conventions, nominations,
and campaigns; the necessity of party and candidate
financial expenditure; and the influence of pressure
groups, especially from business, labor, and
agriculture.
6337. McKean, Dayton D. Party and pressure
politics. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1949.
712 p. 49-101 10 JK2265.M27
A college textbook on practical politics and the
relationship of propaganda to party and pressure
politics. Professor McKean believes in the work-
ability of the two-party system and in its value to
popular democratic government. Representative
government on a large scale, he thinks, can function
only through parties. However, many of its diffi-
culties arise from the inadequacies of parties, their
inability to muster effective majorities, their lack of
general and authoritative party voices and councils,
and their indifference at the local and State level to
national issues and public policy. Beset by these
difficulties, by sectional differences, and by diverse
interests, the major parties find the formulation and
execution of broad policies difficult or impossible;
but the organized minorities, not responsible to the
electorate, know what they want and concentrate
upon policy. The pressure groups can and do dis-
cipline legislatures and executives, engage in prop-
aganda for or against them, get out the vote, and,
in some instances, nominate officials. The problem,
in Professor McKean's opinion, is to strengthen the
national or Presidential party as against the pressure
groups and local bosses. He considers several means
of improving the national leadership and party
responsibility. He shows less concern for the bosses
since he considers them nowhere indispensable.
6338. Odegard, Peter H., and Elva Allen Helms.
American politics; a study in political dy-
namics. 2d ed. New York, Harper, 1947. 896 p.
illus. 47-31189 E183.O32 1947
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO33
First published in 1938.
A college textbook "combining structural descrip-
tion with functional analysis" of the American
political system. Politics is defined as "the quest for
power," involving "a struggle for the right to man-
age public affairs in a manner favorable to those
who succeed in the quest and those whom they
represent." This quest is pursued within the frame
of the Constitution by persons organized in political
parties or pressure groups or in both. The authors
endeavor to show the operations of parties, pressure
groups, bosses, and machines, as well as the effect
of civil rights, election laws, and corrupt practices
acts. American political history is discussed in
terms not only of party leaders and organizations
but also of fundamental economic and social cleav-
ages. Since both major parties represent a cross
section of the total political, economic, and social
interests, "differences within the parties are greater
than differences between them, and in the determi-
nation of policy pressure politics are usually more
important than party politics!' They cautiously
suggest "some form of proportional or functional
representation," supplementary to the existing sys-
tem, in order to remedy the helplessness of legisla-
tures before the organized pressure groups and their
lobbyists.
6339. Stimpson, George W. A book about Amer-
ican politics. New York, Harper, 1952.
554 p. 52-5472 E178.25.S86
A collection of "the odd, the unusual and the
interesting" facts about American political life
arranged in question and answer form. The au-
thor's purpose has been to put together "the greatest
number of answers to questions that are most often
asked in this field." The answers consist of com-
pact short articles "based on careful and prolonged
research." Mr. Stimpson, an experienced Wash-
ington newspaper correspondent, deals with such
matters as campaigns, committees, conventions,
legislation, parties, platforms, politicians, and slo-
gans. He traces the origin of many political terms,
catchwords, phrases, and nicknames; notices splinter
parties; and throws light on obscure or curious
events, movements, and individuals. Unfortunately
he does not refer to the sources of his information.
A fairly full index compensates somewhat for the
lack of any discernible organization in the book.
6340. Tourtellot, Arthur B. An anatomy of
American politics; innovation versus con-
servatism. Indianapolis, Bobbs-Merrill, 1950. 349
p. 50-6590 JK34.T6
A general interpretation of American politics by
a journalist who has endeavored to rethink the
whole subject for himself, with results well suited
to attract and inform the general reader. The first
part, on political institutions, considers the evolu-
tion and relative positions of the Presidency, Con-
gress, and the Supreme Court. There is no object
more important to the voter than to secure a strong
President capable of using for the public good the
enormous power now attached to the office. Part 2
defines "The Basic Conflict" in American political
experience as "conservatism versus progressivism,
caution versus experimentalism." It has been ex-
pressed though the political parties, which have kept
the continuity of their labels despite "a total absence
of any continuity in party principles" — at times
which party has been on the progressive side and
which on the conservative has been completely con-
fusing. Since the major parties are inclusive and
tolerant and not exclusive or given to purges, third-
party movements have lost impetus and nothing
constructive is to be expected from them. Part 3,
on political methods, discusses conventions, cam-
paigns, and elections. The author dwells on the
necessity, if the present system is to continue, for
the party out of power to deal in live issues rather
than ancient fears and compulsions, so as to present
an effective challenge and alternative to the in-
cumbents. The bibliographical essay (p. 319-336)
is designed "for those who want to go deeper."
B. Politics: Special
6341. Carlson, Oliver, and Aldrich Blake. How
to get into politics; the art of winning elec-
tions. New York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1946.
210 p. 46-8047 JF2051.C3
Mr. Carlson describes himself as a "public and
industrial relations counsellor," and Mr. Blake him-
self as a "political research and organization ad-
visor"; they have joined forces in order to inform
the ordinary American citizen who may find him-
self catapulted into the political arena what it will
involve and what he must and must not do. The
task of winning and holding an electorate is one
of the most complex, difficult, and problematic in
human affairs. The ambitious politician, they note,
must join a party, faithfully preach its gospel, and
attend its precinct caucus. At this point, however,
1034 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
he must come to terms with "powerful and grasping
factions." "With few exceptions, he simply gives
way to that combination of special group interests
which he believes has the money and the power
to re-elect him, seeking some compromise where
possible but submitting to the terms of uncondi-
tional surrender when necessary to his own self
preservation." The authors offer much concrete
and practical advice to the budding politician con-
cerning the public relations of politics, notably, the
campaign budget, the party workshop which lies
behind campaign headquarters, precinct work, pub-
licity and propaganda, and platforms and speech-
making.
6342. Douglas, Paul H. Ethics in government.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1952.
114 p. (The Godkin lectures at Harvard Univer-
sity, 1 951) 52-9386 JK468.E7D68
In these four lectures Senator Douglas argues
that although government ethics in the United
States have generally improved during the last
century, they are by no means good enough and re-
quire further melioration. He locates the areas
wherein ethical difficulties and failures are most
likely to occur, pointing out that in most instances
the pressure comes from private sources which are
seeking to obtain favors from government. Senator
Douglas suggests rules and criteria for the regula-
tion of economic controls, loans, and subsidies,
warns against indirect influences, such as the ac-
ceptance of favors or gifts and the sale of govern-
ment prestige or experience, and offers a code of
ethical behavior for public officials. In a discussion
of the ethical problems of legislators, he considers
how far legislators and administrators may properly
influence each other, and urges improvement in
the procedures and attitudes of investigating com-
mittees. Some of the moral indignation aroused
over the delinquencies of government officials
should, in his opinion, properly be applied to the
interests that entice and corrupt them.
6343. Garrigues, Charles Harris. You're paying
for it! A guide to graft. New York, Funk
& Wagnalls, 1936. 254 p. 36-27398 JK.1994.G3
A cynical report on American politics by a dis-
illusioned California crusader. The author holds
that "graft is not a parasite sapping the tree of
democracy, but the very fruit of the tree itself."
Competition among special interests compels each to
seek "special privileges" and to pay the representa-
tives of government for such privileges; the system
"compels every man to be as corrupt as his most
corrupt competitor." The government official who
refused a bribe would have neither campaign funds
nor votes and would be replaced by one more com-
pliant. The law is ineffectual, and the occasional
grafter who goes to jail is either very stupid, very
greedy, or the victim of a feud between politicians.
The bosses the author regards as merely the "man-
agers of the marketplace to which officials and
special interests can come to buy or sell their com-
modities— special privilege." In mock earnest, he
spells out the various means whereby the young
politician may enjoy the fruits of graft, and very
convincingly describes typical circumstances of the
bribe, the fix, and the graft investigation.
6344. Graham, George A. Morality in American
politics. New York, Random House, 1952.
337 P- 52-7142 JK468.E7G7
A study of the problem of morality in American
politics which maintains that the profession of
politics, although differing importantly from the
other professions, must be subject to at least equiv-
alent standards of integrity and competence. Moral
problems, moral standards, moral failures, and
moral achievements are involved in the structure
of political institutions: the legislature, the execu-
tive, the courts, public administration, parties,
pressure groups, and even the public. Professor
Graham explores certain public characteristics and
attitudes: "complaisance over early and substantial
American success in securing human rights and
promoting individual welfare; subconscious con-
fidence in the automatic qualities of the economic
and political order; legalism"; philosophical naivete;
and a pattern of life dominated by specialization,
organization, loyalties, and pressures. In his opin-
ion, if this typical pluralistic organization of Amer-
ican life is to be preserved, it behooves each
organization to avoid jurisdictional expansion and
to strive constandy for moderation in its demands
upon its members and society. A legalistic balance
of rights and duties is not enough, however, nor is
the mere avoidance of corruption. Leaders must
keep their loyalties in balance, their special zeals in
check, and they must recognize a public responsi-
bility. The author appeals for renewed idealism in
all Americans.
6345. Kelley, Stanley, Jr. Professional public re-
lations and political power. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. 247 p.
56-8492 JF2112.P8K4
The first serious study of a new technique of
politics which has already come near to revolution-
izing the whole field, and is far from having dis-
closed all its possibilities. The author, who
originated the study at Johns Hopkins and com-
pleted it at the Brookings Institution, has used
"highly fugitive" materials — letters, interviews, and
documents from private files — to supplement
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO35
periodical articles and a few books of relevance.
"The public relations man, more assiduously than
others, has studied the problems of using the re-
sources that a complex modern communication
system offers for organizing and directing public
opinion." First employed by business organizations,
he has now become a permanent staff employee of
State and national party organizations. Dr. Kelley
seeks to determine his importance for democratic
processes by means of "the description and analysis
of the actions of particular public relations men at
work in particular campaigns." He successively
deals with "Campaigns, Inc." the California public
relations firm otherwise known as Whitaker and
Baxter, which has been operating since 1933; the
American Medical Association's campaign of
1948-52 against President Truman's proposal of
national health insurance, which included inter-
ventions in local elections intended to defeat legis-
lators in favor of the plan; the part played by Jon
M. Jonkel of Chicago in the Maryland campaign of
1950, whereby J. M. Buder displaced Millard
Tydings as U. S. Senator; and the public relations
activities, on a new and enlarged scale, in the 1952
campaign for the Presidency, when Robert
Humphreys, heading the public relations division
of the Republican National Committee, employed
the Kudner and the Batten, Barton, Durstine and
Osborn agencies. The chapter of conclusions notes
that the decline of the boss is one reason for the
rise of the public relations man, and that the latter
is now called upon to take part in the planning
sessions where the selection of issues takes place.
6346. Lubell, Samuel. The future of American
politics. New York, Harper, 1952. 285 p.
52-5462 E743.L85
A comprehensive analysis of American political
trends as observed by an eminent journalist in 1951.
Mr. Lubell finds that eight primary forces are re-
making the politics of our time: the simultaneous
coming of age of our various urban minorities,
which has transformed machine politics and thrown
political bosses on the defensive; the rise of a new
middle class, conservative yet with political attitudes
"rooted in memories of discrimination, poverty and
the Great Depiession"; the Negro, restless because
of migration and discrimination; the economic
revolution in the South which threatens to destroy
Southern sectionalism; the upheaval in the inter-
national power situation; the fundamental change
in the farmer's relation to the city; the advance of
organized labor to unprecedented financial and
membership strength and the recession of its polit-
ical vitality; and, finally, the impact of the cold war
upon the so-called welfare state. In the author's
opinion, these revolutionary forces have produced a
larger political revolution — the transformation of
the United States from a nation with a traditional
Republican majority to one with a normal Demo-
cratic majority, although, in 1951, he found a gov-
ernmental deadlock rather than an effective
majority.
C. Political Parties
6347. Binkley, Wilfred E. American political
parties, their natural history. 3d ed., rev.
and enl. New York, Knopf, 1958. 470 p.
58-2201 JK2261.B5 1958
Professor Binkley 's book is a very readable history
of parties and elections from the adoption of the
Constitution to the reelection of Eisenhower; the
"natural history" of the title is somewhat puzzling,
but is evidently related to his conviction that all
American parties have been made up of groups of
varying economic interest or ideological persuasion,
which are combined by national political leaders
adept at group diplomacy and able to discover the
formulas and focal points upon which all may agree.
The pattern of party leadership was set by Thomas
Jefferson, who was able to unite all the elements
disadvantaged by the Hamiltonian policies. The
Federalists did not want to be a party, but had to
become one in sheer self-defense. American party
leaders, however, can lead the people only where
they are willing to follow, and must be astute
opportunists governed by expediency and free from
petrified ideas. Dr. Binkley concentrates upon the
major parties and gives small attention to the minor
ones. His chapters, which are not rigidly chrono-
logical, include treatments of "One-Party Govern-
ment," 1816-28, and of "The Breakup of the Major
Parties" during the 1850's. The Democratic Party
in i860 entered upon a period of confusion which
culminated in 1872; its revival began in 1876. The
Republican Party, born in 1856, was reborn in 1868
when the forces of economic exploitation lined up
behind Ulysses S. Grant. The book was originally
published in 1943; the new edition adds an account
of the 1948 election and a chapter on "The Recovery
of the Republican Party." There is a supplementary
index, but the bibliography contains no titles later
than 1 94 1.
IO36 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6348. Black, Theodore Milton. Democratic Party
publicity in the 1940 campaign. New York,
Plymouth Pub. Co., 1941. 169 p.
42-8075 JK2317.1940.B5
An analysis of Democratic political propaganda
during the bitterly contested Presidential campaign
of 1940. Here is the "story of men in an organiza-
tion; it describes their efforts to convince the Amer-
ican people that Franklin D. Roosevelt should be
elected for a third term." The author writes from
firsthand information, having been employed by the
publicity division of the Democratic National Com-
mittee during part of the campaign. He illustrates
the "techniques of political propaganda, in their
modern setting, and the structure of a present-day
political publicity bureau in its most active form."
In his opinion, Charles Michelson and the publicity
division's corps of veteran journalists, all skilled in
the art of political warfare, were significant factors
in the third-term success. Their chief tactics, as
here reported, were to attack Willkie and the Re-
publicans, to pin the tags of Big Business, Appease-
ment, and Inexperience upon them, and to caricature
the Republican candidate. Blaming the frenzy and
"personalization" of the campaign upon a lack of
really controversial issues, the author acquits both
sides of using "smear" strategy.
6349. Bone, Hugh A. "Smear" politics; an anal-
ysis of 1940 campaign literature. Wash-
ington, American Council on Public Affairs, 1941.
49 p. ( [Studies in political science] )
42-4561 JK2281.B65
A study based largely upon unpublished data
assembled by the Special Senate Committee to In-
vestigate Campaign Expenditures in 1940. It aims
to make available exhibits of the literature used in
the 1940 campaign; to indicate the major psycho-
logical appeals employed; to call attention to some
of the problems of determining responsibility for
the issuance of campaign propaganda, and to those
raised by anonymous political journalism; and "to
offer suggestions for reducing the scope and volume
of that campaign literature which does violence to
the spirit and process of democracy." The examples
of campaign literature included here were selected to
display a fair cross section as to form, substance,
and distribution; comment has been kept to a min-
imum. In the 1940 campaign "literature ostensi-
bly printed and authorized by non-party groups
greatly exceeded that of political parties," and pro-
Willkie materials greatly exceeded those supporting
Roosevelt. The majority of "smear" leaflets came
from other than party sources. Not only did
scurrilous personal attacks upon nominees and their
families appear in these, but objectionable appeals
were made to religion, race, and nationality. The
author thought that legislation should require the
name and address of the sponsor to appear on all
campaign literature, and that the parties should
maintain a much tighter control over their local
agents in matters of publicity.
6350. Bryan, William Jennings. A tale of two
conventions. New York, Funk & Wagnalls,
1912. xviii, 307 p. 12-22646 JK2263 1912.B7
This rare example of political journalism by a
leading politician is a collection of daily reports
made by Bryan, acting as a special newspaper cor-
respondent, at the Republican and Democratic
National Conventions of 19 12 in Chicago and
Baltimore, respectively, together with a summary
of the events and other matter bearing on the
Progressive Party Convention in Chicago. It re-
prints the three platforms, selected contemporary
cartoons, and the speeches of such notables as Theo-
dore Roosevelt, Byran himself, Elihu Root, and
Alton B. Parker. Bryan found that two evils stood
out prominently at the Republican Convention: "the
organization of a new convention by an old, out-
grown committee"; and "the employment, for the
purpose of overriding a majority of committeemen,
of delegations representing mythical constituencies
in the South." Of the 75 contested seats there, all
were given to the Taft rather than the Roosevelt
delegates, he notes, and with them went control of
the convention. Bryan praised the constructive
Democratic platform, and claimed that the respon-
siveness of the convention to the more than one
hundred thousand telegrams sent to them by "the
Democrats at home" showed the power of public
opinion and the soundness of the party. Bryan's
reports have immediacy and pace; his style is marked
by rhetorical flourishes and pious apothegms; and
he understood well what was going on.
635 1. Carroll, Eber Malcolm. Origins of the Whig
Party. Durham, N. C, Duke University
Press, 1925. 260 p. 25-23123 JK2331.C3 1922
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Michigan, 1922.
Bibliography: p. [228J-238.
A review of the complex origins and the history
to 1840 of the Whig Party, which was united only
in a general conservatism and in opposition to
Jacksonian Democracy. Its difficulties, the author
believes, inhered in its necessities as an opposition,
requiring the aid of all dissidents, and in the failure
of the National Republican Party to which it was
heir. Its weaknesses Dr. Carroll attributes partly
to John Quincy Adams' lack of skill as a politician
and partly to the rising tide of frontier democracy
in favor of Jackson. Adams' crushing defeat for
reelection to the Presidency in 1828 eliminated him
as leader of the National Republican Party, and
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO37
Clay's thorough defeat in 1832 discredited the party
itself. The Whig Party was organized in 1834,
but, the author notes, recognized leaders who could
sap Democratic strength only after it had lost the
election of 1836. By nominating William Henry
Harrison in 1840, the Whigs demonstrated their
conviction "that the Democrats should be fought
with their own weapons." "The reward was a
brief tenure of power in 1841; the penalty was the
disruption of the party when, under Tyler, dissen-
sion became active again."
6352. Croly, Herbert D. Marcus Alonzo Hanna;
his life and work. New York, Macmillan,
1912. 495 p. illus. 12-9163 E664.H24C9
A sympathetic biography of the great Republican
organizer based not only upon Hanna's very scanty
papers but also upon statements solicited from his
business and political associates. Although he does
not underemphasize the difficulties of giving a fair
account of Hanna's career or of passing objective
judgments upon a man who was involved in bitter
contention, Croly begs the "unprejudiced attention"
of his readers. Mark Hanna (1837-1904), he
maintains, was formed under the same influences
as hundreds of other Middle Westerners who com-
bined a business with a political career, but he lived
"more energetically, more sincerely, and more suc-
cessfully" than the others. His pioneering and
prosperous coal and iron business and other enter-
prises at Cleveland were begun after the Civil War,
when economic opportunities were abundant, and
continued until 1894. As early as 1888, Croly
asserts, this industrial pioneer "had made up his
mind to nominate, if possible, a political leader
from Ohio as the Republican candidate for the
presidency." William McKinley became both the
intimate friend with a bright political future and
the available candidate. The author concludes that
the interdependence of business and politics, in the
era of McKinley and protectionism, gave to a man
like Hanna, who embodied the alliance, an oppor-
tunity for effective influence.
6353. Davenport, Walter. Power and glory, the
life of Boies Penrose. New York, Putnam,
1931. 240 p. illus. 31-31210 E664.P41D3
A lively and anecdotal biography of Boies Penrose
( 1 860-1921), one of the last and greatest of the
political bosses, based mainly upon a series of articles
published under the same title in Collier's Weekly.
Of no political party in his youth, Penrose "was to
become a Republican of Republicans." He came
of Republican stock and tradition, and was "bap-
tised in its most conservative pool — Philadelphia —
and dedicated to its tightest fundamentals." Pen-
rose is characterized here as an intellectual by
inheritance and equipment, with no tolerance for
the less gifted. He was drafted and elected in 1884
by the powerful Philadelphia Republican machine
to the Pennsylvania legislature, where he represented
a constituency composed of his city's highest and
lowest social strata. After one term in the lower
house, he was advanced to the State senate, serving
there continuously from 1887 to 1897. In 1897, with
the support of Matthew S. Quay, Republican State
boss, he was elected to the United States Senate
and served until his death. Once there, Penrose
fought to stay; "his commitments, his pride, his
love of power held him to that." He succeeded to
control of the State party machinery upon Quay's
death in 1904. In Mr. Davenport's opinion, it is
highly probable that some of the Penrose victories
were purchased, and certain that he jumped to do
the bidding of the Pittsburgh steel magnate, Henry
C. Frick.
6354. Farley, James A. Behind the ballots; the
personal history of a politician. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1938. 392 p.
38-28947 E748.F24F3
A candid political memoir by James A. Farley
(b. 1888), a Democrat who began his political career
at the age of 22 by winning the town clerkship of
Stony Point, N. Y., a normally Republican commu-
nity. After touching lightly upon his own earlier
years, the author presents a behind-the-scenes account
of the aggressive campaign for Franklin D. Roosevelt
which he and Louis McHenry Howe conducted dur-
ing the year and a half preceding the 1932 national
convention. Mr. Farley, a strong believer in or-
ganization politics and in the mastery of detail, re-
ports with particularity the grass-roots organizing,
trial balloons, political drumming, and delegate-
pledging which helped him "sell a presidential
candidate to the nation." His description of the
bargaining done at the 1932 Democratic National
Convention is both amiable and forthright. In Mr.
Farley's opinion, the successful cultivation of the
women's vote was a large factor in the Presidential
election. The 1936 landslide had deep significance,
he believes, because it occurred in the face of stren-
uous opposition from the big business interests.
The author tends to discuss the New Deal and his
own part in it in terms of men rather than issues,
inasmuch as his forte was political management and
backstage strategy rather than administration or
legislation.
6355. Farley, James A. Jim Farley's story; the
Roosevelt years. New York, Whittlesey
House, 1948. 388 p. illus. 48-946 E806.F255
The continuation of Mr. Farley's political memoir
is devoted mainly to a detailed history of the "slow,
IO38 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
almost imperceptible drifting apart on political prin-
ciples" of himself and President Roosevelt. Mr.
Farley, placing the start of the estrangement at the
1936 campaign, believes that the President was jeal-
ous of possible successors, and never forgave him
"for putting party welfare above the personal alle-
giance he considered his due." Mr. Farley may
have regarded Roosevelt's suggestion that he run in
New York either for Governor or for Senator as an
attempt to sidetrack him from the election of 1940.
The attempted purge of 1938, which violated the
author's creed of party regularity, caused him to
lose faith in the President. "The attempt to estab-
lish a personal party," Mr. Farley observes sorrow-
fully, "the neglect of party leaders, the assumption
of control over the judiciary and Congress, and the
gratification of personal ambition in the third and
fourth terms — all were the evil fruit of his breaking
the rules of the game." He does not consider that
absorption in a course of policy may render personal
ambition and playing a game equally irrelevant.
Mr. Farley quotes many revealing conversations and
anecdotes.
6356. Fine, Nathan. Labor and farmer parties in
the United States, 1828-1928. New York
City, Rand School of Social Science, 1928. 445 p.
28-24182 HD8076.F5
The author, who was an associate of the Rand
School of Social Science, was concerned to trace the
attempts of "the American workers," on the land
or in industry, to advance their interests through
political organization. The earliest labor party was
launched by the Mechanics' Union of Trade Asso-
ciations of Philadelphia in 1828, and was promptly
imitated in New York; neither group survived the
presidential election of 1832. After noting other
early and sporadic movements, the author devotes a
chapter to the united front of 1886, when Henry
George ran for mayor of New York, and one to the
Grangers, Greenbackers, and Populists. He then
enters upon the history of the Socialist Labor Party,
and pursues the fortunes of the socialist movement
through the next eight chapters, the bulk of the
book (p. 88-362). Concluding this with the Com-
munist-Socialist split, he takes the measure of the
former: "No matter how decent, progressive or
militant a trade union leader or rank and filer is,
the communist will try to destroy him if he does not
take orders — whatever they are at the moment —
from the Workers' Party leadership in America and
Moscow." The concluding chapters deal with the
Nonpartisan League, the Farmer-Labor Party, and
the Conference for Progressive Political Action.
While his story could be regarded, he said, as one
failure after another, "the most striking fact about
the labor and farmer parties in America over the
past century was that they never stopped springing
up."
6357. Herring, Edward Pendleton. The politics
of democracy; American parties in action
[by] Pendleton Herring. New York, Norton, 1940.
xx, 468 p. illus. 40-27328 JK2265.H47
An attempt to show the nature of the American
party system and its relations to other social proc-
esses through an analysis of the politics of democ-
racy. The author examines such factors as machine
control, pressure politics, propaganda, monied inter-
ests, patronage, and bureaucracy. These Dr. Her-
ring considers merely the reverse sides of elements
integral to the democratic process. This American
political process, he believes, through its toleration
of various attitudes and programs, provides the
milieu within which a science of society may be
developed and intelligence may be applied to our
common problems. He maintains that we cannot
greatly change the nature of American politics so
long as the democratic order prevails, but that with
patience and skill we should be able to achieve the
desirable life. In his view, adjustment is the essence
of the politics of democracy, in that political parties
hold power only through popular support and in
that the political machinery is able to keep power re-
sponsive to change and experimentation. The func-
tion of the American party system should be to keep
the majority and minority viewpoints from diverg-
ing to the point where they can no longer be recon-
ciled under constitutional procedure. Compromise
and tolerance must be maintained.
6358. Hicks, John D. The Populist revolt; a his-
tory of the Farmers' Alliance and the Peo-
ple's Party. Minneapolis, University of Minnesota
Press, 1 93 1. 473 p. illus. 31-30954 JK2372.H5
Bibliography: p. [445]— 464.
A scholarly history of the Populist movement, the
conditions that produced it, the supporters of the
cause, and its contributions to political and economic
reform. Professor Hicks thinks that, beginning in
the late 1870's, the American West was peopled too
rapidly, and that the successive agrarian movements,
particularly the Farmers' Alliance and the Populist
Party, were merely the "inevitable attempts of a be-
wildered people to find relief from a state of eco-
nomic distress made certain by the unprecedented
size and suddenness of their assault upon the West
and by the finality with which they had conquered
it." Among the farmers' grievances were drought
conditions in the decade 1887-97, high shipping
costs, the political influence of the railroads, the dis-
appearance of free land, price-fixing by the trusts,
the protective tariff, and especially a growing burden
of debt. Among their demands were cheap money,
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO39
free land, honest transportation, and the abolition
of foreclosure. By 1890 it had become clear, the
author notes, that neither the Northwestern formula
of establishing state political parties nor the South-
ern formula of working through the Democratic
Party was adequate for reform. Demand shifted
"from free land to legislation, from the ideal of
individualism to the ideal of social control through
regulation by law." Most of the demands first for-
mulated by the Populists were given effect by other
parties in later decades.
6359. Kent, Frank R. The Democratic Party, a
history. New York, Century, 1928. 568
p. illus. 28-8482 JK2316.K4
A chronicle of the Democratic Party from its birth
in 1792 to early 1928. The author's purpose was to
tell the truth about his party rather than to glorify
it. Mr. Kent admired the "genuine and indis-
putable greatness of the basic Democratic princi-
ples," but deplored the "almost incredible record of
stupidity and failure, the frequency and violence
with which its performances have clashed with its
professions; the wreck it has time and again made
of its own prospects." The story of the Democratic
Party is, in the author's opinion, the story of five
men outstanding in its history who gave the party
its principles, shaped its policies and destiny, led it
in the critical conflicts, were responsible alike for its
greatest achievements and its monumental failures,
and lent it color, character, and vitality. The first
was Thomas Jefferson, enunciator of the basic
democratic doctrine of government for and by the
people. He was followed by Andrew Jackson, who
originated the spoils system and modern party meth-
ods, Grover Cleveland, who acted upon the precept
that "public office is a public trust," William Jen-
nings Bryan, the financial heretic who changed the
party principles, and Woodrow Wilson, whose rec-
ord of domestic reforms was in 1928 unparalleled.
6360. Kipnis, Ira. The American socialist move-
ment, 1897-19 1 2. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1952. 496 p.
52-13945 JK2391.S6K5
A history of the American socialist movement
which centers in its years of peak activity, 1897-1912.
The first six chapters deal with the background of
the movement from the introduction of Marxian
socialism into the United States by German immi-
grants of the 1850's down to the formation of the
Socialist Party in 190 1 by American Marxists con-
vinced that capitalism was destroying the nation's
economic equality and corrupting its democratic
heritage. The remainder of the book studies the
Socialist Party both as a political organization and a
social movement. Dr. Kipnis points out the im-
pressive if ephemeral achievements of the party to
1 912: its growth from less than 10,000 to 150,000
members, the increase of its voting strength from
95,000 to 900,000, the election of more than 1,000
members to public office, the passage of hundreds of
reform bills, the winning of position and influence
in the American Federation of Labor, and its in-
strumentality in organizing the Industrial Workers
of the World. The shortcomings of the revolu-
tionary left-wing Socialists were serious enough, the
author believes, but major responsibility for the
decline of the movement rests upon members of the
right wing who controlled the party and determined
its policy and activities. Elated by electoral success,
they turned the party into "an opportunist political
organization devoted to winning public office for its
leaders."
6361. Kleeberg, Gordon S. P. The formation of
the Republican Party as a national political
organization. New York, Moods Pub. Co., 191 1.
244 p. 11-29805 JK2356.K6
Bibliography: p. 235-244.
This Columbia University dissertation traces the
formation and the development to 191 1 of the na-
Party. The Kansas-Nebraska Act of 1854 demon-
strated that the West could be preserved as free
territory only by a powerful political party com-
mitted to keeping slavery out, and those opposed to
the extension of slave territory began to draw to-
gether in local political organizations. In parts of
the West, New England, and the Middle States,
Republican groups had reached a high degree of
local organization by the Presidential year 1856,
and were ready to be built into a national machine.
The national organization was substantially com-
plete by adjournment of the second Republican Na-
tional Convention in i860, and the precedents it
established were still operating more than half a
century later — the national committee's call for
the national convention, the convention itself,
its temporary and permanent officers, its rules
of procedure, the four great committees, the plat-
form and nominations, the principle of majority
nomination, the fixed number of delegates, and the
national committee with its officers and powers. Dr.
Kleeberg traces in detail the minor changes in the
composition and procedure of the national conven-
tions, and in the development of the Republican
National Committee, during these 50 years.
6362. MacKay, Kenneth Campbell. The Pro-
gressive movement of 1924. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1947. 298 p. illus.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
IO4O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
527) 47-3855 E795.M3 1947
H31.C7, no. 527
Bibliography: p. 279-291.
An evaluation of the Progressive Party of 1924
in relation to the whole American progressive
movement of the 20th century, together with a
detailed analysis of the campaign problems of the
Progressives of 1924. Dr. MacKay sees in the 1924
movement a bond of common purpose with other
progressive movements, reaching back to the poli-
cies of such early insurgents as the Greenbackers of
1876, and extending forward to many of the reforms
and experiments of the New Deal. In his opinion,
three tendencies are common to American pro-
gressive movements: insistence upon the removal
of exploitation and corruption, desire to change the
structure of the government and to place control
of it in the hands of the many, and belief in the
necessity of extending government functions to re-
lieve economic distress. The 1924 movement had
its own distinctive features, however: it polled more
votes than had any other minor party, it repre-
sented the first formal alliance of American or-
ganized labor with Socialists, farmers, and intel-
lectuals, and it aimed to unite its diverse elements
into a permanent party dedicated to political reform
and economic democracy. The movement was
doomed, the author believes, because it was ham-
pered by state election laws, had too little campaign
money, and lacked cohesiveness and organization.
6363. Merriam, Charles Edward, and Harold
Foote Gosnell. The American party sys-
tem; an introduction to the study of political parties
in the United States. 4th ed. New York, Mac-
millan, 1949. 530 p. 49-3967 JK2265.M4 1949
First published in 1922.
An analysis of the American two-party political
system. Professors Merriam and Gosnell discuss
such general considerations as the relation of de-
mocracy to the party system, theories of suffrage, the
functioning of parties in the formulation of social,
economic, and political policy, and the motives —
economic, sectional, racial, or religious — which gov-
ern political action. Among the other factors in
American political life considered here are party
leaders, bosses, and reformers; party organization;
spoils politics; nominations and election machinery;
modern techniques of winning elections; statistical
sampling devices and their uses; election laws; and
proposed methods of putting the party system upon
a higher intellectual and administrative level. The
party process is slowly being changed, the authors
conclude, and party activities are being funda-
mentally modified. The decline of patronage as a
principal element in the party, through the gradual
substitution of the merit system for the spoils sys-
tem in public administration, has weakened the
machine and led to a professionally and technically
based public service. Responsible government in
turn tends to give broader scope to the party leader
and less to the party boss. Professors Merriam and
Gosnell detect a developing sense of civic responsi-
bility in the United States, but regard many of the
problems of democratic society as remaining to be
solved.
6364. Michelson, Charles. The ghost talks. New
York, Putnam, 1944. xvi, 245 p. illus.
44-3334 E806.M54
Chatty reminiscences and knowing political
commentary by a former Washington newspaper
correspondent who served as publicity director of
the Democratic National Committee from 1929 to
1940. Mr. Michelson offers no startling new reve-
lations but does clarify the record at certain points.
Although Franklin D. Roosevelt listened to his
advisers, the author believes, he pursued his own
plans. The President dictated his own final ver-
sions of his speeches, generally culling the best
ideas submitted in drafts. He was, in Mr. Michel-
son's opinion, "a better phrase maker than anybody
he ever had around him." Denying the existence
of a "smear Hoover" conspiracy in the 1930 or 1932
campaign, the author asserts blundy: "There was
no occasion for billingsgate, no necessity for mis-
representation, no excuse for slander. A man sat
in the President's chair who did not fit." He dis-
cusses the members of President Roosevelt's entour-
age, their contributions to his success, their relative
independence, their influence, and their rivalries.
He describes the methods, issues, and financing of
three Presidential campaigns. Prior to the Euro-
pean crisis, the author states positively, nothing was
further from Roosevelt's mind than a third-term
candidacy.
6365. Myers, William Starr. The Republican
Party, a history. Rev. ed. New York,
Century, 193 1. 517 p. illus.
32-1529 JK2356.M85 193 1
First published in 1928.
6366. Moos, Malcolm C. The Republicans; a
history of their party. New York, Random
House, 1956. 564 p. 56-5195 JK2356.M6
Professor Myers' long-standard history of the
Republican Party from its inception in the "Anti-
Nebraska Conventions" of 1854 through the elec-
tions of 1930, was written in "the conviction that
parties are the natural and necessary organs of
government and administration." In his opinion,
the Republican platform of i860 forecast much of
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO4I
the Republican policy of succeeding years, even to
1930, furnishing unity of purpose during the whole
period of the party's domination of the Federal
government. The first principle dealt with the
tariff, and began the process of uniting in Repub-
lican ranks "the business and industrial interests
without which, as not only American history but
that of other self-governing countries shows, it is
impossible to continue political domination." Built
not merely for the year's campaign but looking
toward a well-established and permanent national
political party, the platform as a whole prepared an
economic basis for the cooperation of the agrarian,
commercial, and industrial interests of the country.
The author credits the Lincoln administration with
laying firmly the foundations upon which the later
successes of the Republican Party were erected,
Hayes with rehabilitating the party after the Grant
administrations, McKinley and Theodore Roosevelt
with reorganizing and activating it into an aggres-
sive party, and Coolidge for saving it after Harding's
errors. Dr. Moos' The Republicans has the obvious
advantages of carrying the story through six fur-
ther elections, of using some results of recent his-
torical scholarship, and of employing up-to-date
techniques of analyzing election returns. He pro-
vides a crowded narrative, filled with colorful and
lively incidents, and accompanied by pungent
comments, his own as well as those made by con-
temporaries. He is able to draw upon his own
thorough knowledge of recent politics to illuminate
situations in the remoter past. He narrates the
party's origins and developments through the dis-
puted election of 1876 in considerable detail, then
rather skimps the four succeeding "fifty-fifty" elec-
tions, but amplifies his narrative from 1896 on until
he requires two whole chapters to chronicle the
great Republican comeback of 1952. His attitude
is that of a moderate critic, to whom the "liberal
capitalism" advocated by the party founders and
by its "amateur" wing in our day is a valid doctrine.
He does not like the "monopoly capitalism" which
in 1868 captured and exploited for its own purposes
a party that had become "hallowed in consequence
of its fight to free the slaves and save the Union."
The party so oriented would have succumbed to the
revolts of the 1890's save for the timely emergence
of the organizing genius of Mark Hanna, one of
the few businessmen who have had a profound
instinct for politics.
6367. Porter, Kirk H., and Donald Bruce Johnson,
comps. National party platforms, 1840-
1956. Urbana, University of Illinois Press, 1956.
573 p. 56-10916 JK2255.P6 1956
First published in 1924.
Unabridged texts of the national platforms of all
431240 — 60 67
the major and of the principal minor parties drawn
from official proceedings of the conventions or from
campaign literature, beginning with the campaign
of 1840 and the Democratic platform of that year,
and extending through the campaign of 1956, with
the platforms of the Democratic, Prohibition, Re-
publican, Socialist, Socialist Labor, and Socialist
Workers Parties. The compilers have taken some
account of the size of the group which professed
to be a national party, the relative permanence of
the organization, and its historical importance.
Platforms of defecting segments of major parties
have been included if of significance. An explana-
tory paragraph or two prefaces the chapter devoted
to each campaign. The compilers consider plat-
forms to be the primary statements of party prin-
ciples and policies, and, as evidence of what party
leaders believe to be the important current issues,
reflections of major political trends. As such, they
often foreshadow new economic, social, and political
developments.
6368. Quint, Howard H. The forging of Ameri-
can socialism; origins of the modern move-
ment. Columbia, University of South Carolina
Press, 1953. 409 p. 53-9397 HX83.Q5
"Bibliographical essay": p. 389-394.
A study of the formative and hopeful phase of
American socialism. An introductory chapter,
"Marxism Comes to America," sets forth concisely
the events of the earlier years, 1870-86. The re-
mainder of the book deals with the evolution of
formal socialism and the development of socialist
parties in the United States between 1886 and 1901.
Indicating both the European influences and the
distinctively American elements, Professor Quint
shows that the upsurge of American socialism was
only partly inspired by classical Marxist doctrine,
and came primarily as a protest against the social
inequities resulting from rapid industrialization
and economic concentration. He explores the
many and various ideas and movements which
were with difficulty united in 1901 to form the
Socialist Party of America, among them Bellamy-
inspired Nationalism, Christian Socialism, DeLeon-
ism, Non-Partisan Socialism, and Fabianism. It
was Edward Bellamy's Looking Backward, pub-
lished in 1887, that first won a hearing for socialist
ideas outside the laboring class and made socialism
respectable. The emergence of the Populist wave
in the early 1890's posed a problem to all socialist
groups, and evoked every response from hostility to
cooperation. After its collapse, Eugene V. Debs'
adherence to the Social Democracy gave Utopian
socialism a brief revival, but the schism of 1898
left the way clear for a party on lines already worked
out in Germany and Britain.
IO42 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6369. Ross, Earle Dudley. The Liberal Republi-
can movement. New York, Holt, 19 19.
267 p. 19-12223 JK2356.R5
E671.R82
Bibliography: p. 240-254.
This Cornell University dissertation is a history
of the group which split from the main Republican
body as a new national party in 1872. The author
calls Senator Carl Schurz of Missouri its spearhead,
and gives as its motives dissatisfaction with the
corruption, blunders, and partisanship of Grant's
administration, and belief in the necessity for re-
form measures. Dr. Ross is concerned particularly
with the influence of the movement upon the re-
organization of national parties. He notes the
discredited condition of the Democrats, their in-
ability to profit from the mistakes and dissensions
of the Republicans, and their failure to show any
real change of heart in 1868. He indicates, also,
their attempts in 1871 to rid themselves of the
odium of disloyalty, and their willingness to enter
into coalitions with the Liberal Republicans. He
shows that many liberal Democrats were willing
to merge with the new reform organization in
order to defeat Grant. Greeley's nomination at
the 1872 convention he terms a triumph of expe-
rienced political intriguers over inexperienced and
over-confident reformers. The impossibility of
reconciling large numbers of Democratic voters to
Greeley as a candidate was, he believes, the principal
reason for the overwhelming defeat of the coalition
by Grant and the Republicans.
6370. Schattschneider, Elmer E. Party govern-
ment. New York, Farrar & Rinehart, 1942.
xv, 219 p. (American government in action series)
42-2229 JK2265.S35
"Selected bibliography": p. 211-214.
An analysis of the American political party sys-
tem which posits that the political parties created
democracy, that modern democracy is unthinkable
save in terms of them, and that they are not mere
appendages of modern government but are in the
center of it and play a determinative and original
part in it. The Democratic and Republican Parties
are here commended not only for their long dura-
tion and the stability of their "partnership" but for
their accomplishments. Among these are the
transformation of the American Constitution, the
virtual abolition of the electoral college, the creation
of a "plebiscitary presidency" and powerful contri-
butions to the extraconstitutional growth of that
office, and, most important, the remaking of the
government of the United States from a small ex-
periment in republicanism into the world's most
powerful regime, vasdy more liberal and demo-
cratic than it was in 1789. Professor Schattschnei-
der sees the Presidency as the focus and rallying
point of the great public interests of the nation and,
as such, an office of expanding influence. He views
Congress as the no man's land of American politics
where the national parties, local party bosses, and
pressure groups are engaged in a war for supremacy,
and where, he hopes, for the public interest the
national parties will emerge triumphant.
6371. Shannon, David A. The Socialist Party of
America; a history. New York, Macmillan,
1955. 320 p. 55-13545 JK2391.S6S5 1955
"Bibliographical essay": p. 269-273.
A history of the Socialist Party of America from
its formation in 190 1 to its disintegration in the
late 1930's. Professor Shannon traces the party
origins to revolt in the 1890's against the social and
economic conditions created by the mushrooming
industrialism of America, and its components to
the membership of such protest movements as the
Bellamy Nationalist clubs, the Populist Party,
Eugene V. Debs' Social Democratic Party, and dis-
sidents from the Socialist Labor Party. During
nearly two decades of growth and promise, the
author points out, the Socialist Party was a broad
political organization representing all shades of
leftist conviction and all regions except the eastern
and central South. The party's decline is the story
of its transformation from a widely based political
party into a monolithic sect of a few thousand
members. The author discusses the regional or-
ganizations of the party and their variety of social
philosophies, as well as the membership in it of
recent immigrants and Mayflower descendants,
tenement dwellers and prairie farmers, intellectuals
and sharecroppers, ministers and agnostics, syndi-
calists and trade unionists, and revolutionaries and
gradualists. He attributes the decline of "the big
tent of American radicalism" in the 1920's, and its
insignificance thereafter, to a variety of causes.
Some of these, such as its failure to develop strong
local organizations, were internal; the more im-
portant ones, such as the high degree of class mo-
bility in America, were external.
6372. Stedman, Murray S., Jr., and Susan W.
Stedman. Discontent at the polls; a study
of farmer and labor parties, 1827-1948. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1950. 190 p.
49-50349 JK2261.S84
An analysis of the functions performed by the
American farmer and labor parties which have com-
peted seriously for control of state and nation. The
authors examine the extent of such parties' success
at the polls, the degree to which measures formu-
lated by protest parties have become law, the factors
making for farmer-labor success and failure, the
relation of the protest vote to general economic con-
ditions, the regional characteristics of this vote, the
political strategy and tactics employed by the parties,
and the legal and psychological barriers encountered
by them. Farmer-labor parties act as vehicles for
discontent, but have been most successful, the
authors believe, as popularizers of ideas and issues
neglected by the major parties. They have excited
local and national interest in important problems
and reform measures, but tend to die as soon as
their principal issues are adopted by a major party.
Their recurrent challenge to the major parties, how-
ever, strengthens the democratic process.
6373. Thomas, Harrison Cook. The return of
the Democratic Party to power in 1884.
New York, Columbia University, 1919. 261 p.
(Columbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 89,
no. 2; whole no. 203) 19-26013 E695.T452
H31.C7, v. 89, no. 2
A study of the election of 1884, in which the chief
issues were civil service and tariff reform. After
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO43
four preliminary chapters, the book takes up its
proper subjects: the Republican nomination of
James G. Blaine (1830-1893), the Democratic nom-
ination of Grover Cleveland, the campaign, the
election, and the achievements of the Democratic
administration. The Democrats were returned to
power, the author believes, because of the lack of
major issues between them and the Republicans,
and because the characters of the candidates thereby
became of determining importance. Blaine was an
unsatisfactory candidate to the Independent Repub-
licans; their defection and the defeat of the party
ensued. He had always been a spoilsman and no
civil service reformer; he had associated himself
with many politicians of the lowest type; his pop-
ularity was based upon appeals to the emotions and
not upon his identification with policies; and, per-
haps most important, he had never convinced a
large enough number of voters of his complete
honesty. Although Dr. Thomas credits Cleveland
with progress in reform and with forward-looking
legislation, he thinks that the reestablishment of
the Democratic Party in real rivalry of the Repub-
licans was the main result of their victory.
D. Local Studies
6374. Fox, Dixon Ryan. The decline of aristoc-
racy in the politics of New York. New
York, Columbia University, 1919. 460 p. (Co-
lumbia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, v. 86;
whole no. 198) 19-18663 F123.F792
H3i.C7,v.86
This is a history of the decline of the Federalists
in the State of New York, from the defeat in 1800
of the Federalist gubernatorial candidate, Stephen
Van Rensselaer, to the 1840's. Starting with a tra-
dition of government by an aristocracy of birth and
station, the Federalists were ultimately trans-
formed into Whigs, with a doctrine of government
by capital and business enterprise. The story is
told largely in terms of the programs and ideas of
the opposing parties, Federalist and Democratic,
and the careers and influences of such party leaders
as DeWitt Clinton and Martin Van Buren. Dr.
Fox contrasts the Federalists, led mainly by distin-
guished lawyers and supported chiefly by the landed
gentry, wealthy merchants, bankers, and the Epis-
copal Church, with the Democrats, made up for the
most part of farmers, workers, and immigrants.
As the author observes, the bitter strife between the
organizations had certain elements of a class war —
but one in which the outcome was foredoomed.
He narrates at some length the debates and pro-
ceedings in the decisive state constitutional conven-
tion of 1821, which adopted manhood suffrage and
largely abolished property qualifications for office.
But no sooner had political equality triumphed
than manufacturing acquired a new importance
and prestige, and its interests were sedulously culti-
vated by the organizing genius of the new Whig
Party, Thurlow Weed.
6375. Gosnell, Harold F. Negro politicians; the
rise of Negro politics in Chicago. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1935. xxxi, 404 p.
(Social science studies, directed by the Social Science
Research Committee of the University of Chicago,
no. 32) 35"I5258 F548.9.N3G67
"Select bibliography": p. 380-387.
A description of the struggle of a minority group
to advance its status by political methods, inter
preted to include voting, campaigning, bargaining
for jobs and special favors, and office-holding.
Much of the information presented has been col-
lected by direct observation, interviews, and casual
conversations. Republican, Democratic, and Com-
munist meetings in Chicago's Black Belt have been
1044 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
observed, as have the work of party headquarters
and the conduct of elections, legislative bodies,
courts, and churches. In searching for economic
opportunity, in trying to learn business practices, in
seeking to run for city-wide elective offices, and in
attempting to secure key positions in the party or-
ganizations, Negroes have met the obstacle of preju-
dice. In retaliation they have developed the doc-
trine and practice of race solidarity. The author
mentions County Commissioner Edward Wright,
a lawyer, and Congressman Oscar DePriest, a suc-
cessful contractor and real estate dealer, among
the new, aggressive leaders. Ministers as well as
leaders of the colored underworld are powerful in-
fluences, and patronage is an important cementing
agent. However inadequate the benefits secured
by Chicago Negroes from their government as of
1935, the author believed their gains to be greater
than those of unorganized minorities.
6376. Heard, Alexander. A two-party South?
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina
Press, 1952. xviii, 334 p. illus.
52-8501 F215.H43
An analysis of Southern politics based upon a
research project carried out with the aid of the
Rockefeller Foundation, the Bureau of Public Ad-
ministration of the University of Alabama, and the
Institute for Research in Social Science of the Uni-
versity of North Carolina, in which the author was
the principal associate of Professor V. O. Key, Jr.
The project resulted in the preparation of Dr. Key's
book, Southern Politics in State and Nation (no.
6378), of which this volume is, in a sense, an exten-
sion. Much of the information derives from 538
interviews conducted between November 1946 and
February 1948 with politicians, public officials, and
observers of politics in 1 1 Southern States. Professor
Heard regards the Negro as the key factor in South-
ern politics and finds that two sets of influences are
affecting Southerners — the forces of change that
encourage the growth of a second party, and the
forces of stability that retard it. In his opinion,
however, much of the South, a changing section in
a changing nation, is moving closer to competitive
politics.
6377. Kane, Harnett T. Louisiana hayride; the
American rehearsal for dictatorship, 1928-
1940. New York, Morrow, 1941. 471 p. illus.
4i;7I43 F375.K16
A New Orleans newspaperman's vividly written
report of the Huey Long regime in Louisiana, "the
most complete despotism in the nation's history."
Mr. Kane places the beginning in a poor-white up-
surge, carefully nurtured by Long with his pleas
for free books, good roads, free bridges, and lower
utility rates, and his damaging charges against the
administration, which put him in the governor's
chair in 1928. Although Long (1893-1935), in the
author's opinion, did not plan the full extent of
his autocracy in advance, he dearly loved power.
He differed from other Southern demagogues and
spokesmen for the have-nots in his daring, his skills
in manipulation, and his ability to snatch what he
wanted regardless of the cost. After his impeach-
ment and acquittal, Long began grooming himself
for a national audience as a kind of Southern Will
Rogers, the author observes, and in 193 1, after being
elected United States Senator, he ventured upon his
first national program, the "drop a crop" plan,
which was less extravagant than his later "share
the wealth" program, guaranteed to make every
man a king. Over half the book is devoted to the
regime of the Kingfish's political heirs, who were
able to hold onto his powers and his opportunities
for plunder for four and a half years after his
assassination, and were dislodged only after an
investigation by the U.S. Department of Justice had
disclosed where the tax money was going.
6378. Key, Valdimer O. Southern politics in
state and nation [by] V. O. Key, Jr., with
the assistance of Alexander Heard. New York,
Knopf, 1949. xxvi, 675, xiv p. illus.
49-10825 F215.K45 1949
An elaborate study of the electoral process in the
South, based not only upon election statistics, stat-
utes and constitutions, party rules, court decisions,
newspapers, and other standard sources, but also
upon interviews with 538 Southerners active in
public life, including Congressmen, governors and
other state officials, state legislators, Democratic and
Republican Party officials, campaign managers, pre-
cinct leaders, and persons charged with administra-
tion of the poll tax, registration, and elections.
Many other participants in or observers of the politi-
cal scene were consulted, among them publishers,
editors, and reporters; labor, industrial, and farm
organization leaders; plantation owners; small
farmers; prominent Negroes; reform leaders; and
students of government and politics. The first 12
chapters describe the factional competitions within
the Democratic Party in each State. The remainder
of the book consists of topical analyses of the one-
party system in operation, the size and composition
of the electorate, and the restrictions on voting.
Professor Key attributes Southern political region-
alism and the special character of Southern political
institutions to the Negro, and more particularly to
the high-density black belts. The predominant
consideration in Southern politics has been to assure
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO45
a local subordination of the Negro population, and
to block threatened interferences with the local
arrangements from the outside.
6379. Lewinson, Paul. Race, class, & party, a
history of Negro suffrage and white politics
in the South. London, New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1932. 302 p.
32-10400 JK1929.A2L4
Bibliography: p. 283-292.
An explanation of the interaction between the
racial question on the one hand, and the white
class and party struggle on the other, in the South.
The author notes the impossibility of telling the
story of Negro suffrage in the South without taking
account of the political division among the whites
into the Bourbons — once planters, later industrial-
ists, financiers, and landlords — and into a class of
small farmers and city workingmen; he notes the
equal impossibility of understanding white cleav-
ages and issues without reference to the Negro as
the common enemy, causing the formation of a
solid white front. Part 1 shows the South as late
as 1849 bipartisan in local politics, which were nor-
mal in outline but embittered by the social and
economic divisions arising from slavery; in i860,
effectively united to uphold the status quo; from
1867 to 1876, again bipartisan; from 1876 to the
1890's, discordant because of the agrarian revolt,
with the Negro holding a balance of power between
factions; and by 1900, reunited once more in a
white man's party, with the Negro thrust outside
the pale of political activity. Part 2 describes the
working of Negro disfranchisement from 1900 to
1930, either by provisions of the state constitution,
by the "white primary" rules of the local Demo-
cratic parties, or by complicated technical require-
ments for registration, enforced only against
Negroes.
6380. Merriam, Charles Edward. Chicago; a
more intimate view of urban politics. New
York, Macmillan, 1929. 305 p.
29-12608 F548.5.M56
An optimistic description, in part reminiscence,
of some of the more important aspects of the political
life of a great metropolitan community, by a Uni-
versity of Chicago professor who served as alder-
man for six years, and made a good race for mayor
in 191 1. The author noted the presence of many
interests in the political behavior of the city: those
of the great agricultural clearing house, the rail and
waterways, manufacturers, bankers, and the Chi-
cago Federation of Labor. Also important to an
understanding of Chicago's political attitudes and
dispositions, he believed, were its three structural
phases: the destruction by fire in 1871 and the
"magic rebuilding"; the expansion of the city and
creation of the World's Fair in 1893; and the era
ushered in by the City Plan of 1907. He pointed
out certain forces, notably the reluctance of Illinois
to grant Chicago sufficient power to deal with its
kaleidoscopic local situation, which made difficult
the problem of government organization and stand-
ards, and he stressed the importance of the three
successive waves of immigration which gave Chi-
cago its ethnological composition. The battle for
home rule and the struggle for honesty and com-
petence as against graft and spoils characterized
the political history of Chicago to 1929. The
author analyzed "The Big Fix" — the inner organi-
zation designed to control the political situation
and to be able to give immunity from the law — and
illustrated the operation of actual government by
the City Council.
6381. Peel, Roy V. The political clubs of New
York City. New York, Putnam, 1935.
360 p. illus. 35-24274 JK2295.N74P4
Bibliography: p. 336-347.
An analysis, which leans heavily on the vocabu-
lary and methods of sociology, of the organization
and activities of the political clubs of New York.
Its thesis is that the club is the fundamental unit
of political organization, provided for neither by
state law nor by party rule, nevertheless universally
acknowledged as the unit-cell of the major political
parties. Clubs are formed, the author maintains,
for the purpose of recruiting a stable personnel in
the interests of the party organization, but the de-
termination and satisfaction of those interests are
left to the party leaders. The clubs and bosses of the
metropolitan area have attempted without success to
dictate to the state legislature, but in 1935 they did
dominate city administration and the local bench.
The clubs serve as political forums, stages for po-
litical talents, and headquarters for campaigns;
they are the "spokes for the wheels of patronage,
perquisites and graft"; and, as Professor Peel shows,
they have civic, social, charitable, educational, and
individual objectives as well, which, so far as the
ordinary member is concerned, frequently outweigh
the political ones. The author thinks that such
clubs, in their present state, are of limited and
sometimes dubious value; but that they reflect a
true need of men in society and could become the
basis of a new territorial reorganization of govern-
ment.
6382. Riordon, William L. Plunkitt of Tammany
Hall; a series of very plain talks on very
practical politics, delivered by ex-Senator George
Washington Plunkitt, the Tammany philosopher,
from his rostrum, the New York County Court-
IO46 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
House bootblack stand, and recorded by William L.
Riordon. Introd. by Roy V. Peel. New York,
Knopf, 1948. Ivi, 131 p.
48-8750 JK2319.N57R5 1948
The political ideals, attitudes, and mores of
George Washington Plunkitt (1842-1924), a Tam-
many ward boss, as recorded by William L. Rior-
don and originally published in 1905. Plunkitt's
techniques are here regarded as eminently practical
and his political philosophy is considered typical of
the thinking of the machine boss. He secured a
few followers who would vote as directed, ex-
changed their votes with the regular leader in re-
turn for influence, specifically jobs and favors, saw
that his successes were advertised and drew addi-
tional loyal adherents, repeating the process until
he was the strongest man in the district. Careful
to follow the organizational line, he managed to
move quietly to the side of each successive Tam-
many boss: Tweed, Kelly, Croker, and Murphy.
Soon after he entered politics, Plunkitt became well-
to-do by using his official position and political con-
tacts to buy land which he could sell at a large
profit, to buy surplus public property for a song,
and to accept gifts and other tokens of gratitude.
A distruster of thinkers, orators, and the merit sys-
tem in the civil service, he believed firmly in per-
sonal loyalty, patronage, human corruptibility, and
the philosophy of "every man looking out for
himself."
6383. Wooddy, Carroll Hill. The case of Frank
L. Smith; a study in representative govern-
ment. Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 193 1.
393 p. illus. 31-9949 F546.W91
A case history of an Illinois election leading to a
major scandal, based upon interviews and corre-
spondence with persons affected, as well as pub-
lished sources and newspaper reports. The author
finds "something impressive in the triumph and
tragedy" of the career of Frank L. Smith (1867-
1950), who in 1926 was chairman of the Republican
State Committee of Illinois and chairman of the
Illinois Commerce Commission. Had circum-
stances decreed that Smith contest for his real am-
bition, the governorship, rather than for Federal
office, or had his senatorial ambitions fallen into a
year other than 1926, Dr. Wooddy believes, his case
might never have come to light. Because of the
scandalous Vare-Pepper-Pinchot primary in Penn-
sylvania, however, the attention of a Senate investi-
gating committee had been drawn to primary elec-
tion expenses. Smith's fund was discovered to be
not merely excessive (he spent $253,500), but to
have been contributed mainly by the very utility
interests over which he held official jurisdiction, and
especially by the electric power tycoon, Samuel
Insull, who put $125,000 in Smith's fund. The
Smith case the author views as "merely a reflection
of a maladjustment which has resulted from the
perpetuation of the mechanisms of frontier democ-
racy in a highly complicated industrialized and
urbanized civilization," but he notes that the elec-
torate reacted energetically as soon as information
was put before it.
E. Machines and Bosses
6384. Flynn, Edward J. You're the boss. [Auto-
biography] New York, Viking Press,
1947. 244 p. 47-30772 F128.5.F6
An analysis and defense of machine politics, as
well as a report of his own career, by "a reluctant
politician" who argues that the "good" machine is
both modern and indispensable to American polit-
ical life. Boss Flynn of the Bronx (1891-1953)
described in illuminating detail the organization
and operation of the political machine, as well as
his rise in public office as a machine stalwart, and
in the Democratic Party itself. He served as an
assemblyman from Bronx County, N.Y., 1918-21;
as sheriff of Bronx County, 1922-25; chamberlain
of New York City, 1926-28; and as secretary of
state of New York, 1929-39. These public offices
were clearly minor phases of his career. Mr. Flynn
took far greater pleasure and wielded far more
power in his positions as leader of the Bronx County
Democratic Committee, 1922-53; national commit-
teeman from the state of New York, 1930-53; and
as chairman, Democratic National Committee,
1940-42. The book is a sincere justification of or-
ganization politics, marked by a calm acceptance of
the use of patronage to obtain and maintain party
fealty, of the absolute power of the county boss, the
spoils system, rigidity of organization, and severely
disciplined party regularity. To the author, the
primary purpose of the party is to win elections; he
therefore tends to equate party success with good
government. It is hardly necessary to say that
Flynn was an unusual sort of boss.
6385. Gosnell, Harold F. Boss Piatt and his New
York machine; a study of the political
leadership of Thomas C. Piatt, Theodore Roosevelt,
and others. Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1924. xxiv, 370 p. illus. 24-2633 F124.G68
A description of the social, economic, and politi-
cal background, the personal qualities, training,
achievements, and techniques of Thomas Collier
Piatt (1833-1910), a typical State political boss who
reached a position of leadership in the New York
Republican Party in 1889, and gained control of
it in the middle 1890's when Theodore Roosevelt
was coming into national attention. Professor Gos-
nell sho ws how Piatt lost control of important ele-
ments of the organization step by step from 1901
to 1904, and retired, a broken old man, from the
United States Senate in 1909, the year Roosevelt
also ended his official career. In the author's
opinion, Piatt was primarily the keeper and guard-
ian of a set of political traditions and devices to
which he had fallen heir and which he had seen
tested and exploited, whereas Roosevelt, with whom
he maintained political relations for more than 20
years, was the popularizer of a new order. By
1900, Piatt, who "had had his difficulties with Gov-
ernor Roosevelt," imagined him safely shelved in the
Vice Presidency, but the latter, as Professor Gosnell
shows, set out to capture the organization and suc-
ceeded when he became President. Until he did
so, however, "the Easy Boss was able to cling to
his place as an agent of the propertied classes, a
retailer of franchises, government contracts, and
special legislation."
6386. Gosnell, Harold F. Machine politics:
Chicago model. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1937. xx, 229 p. illus. (Social
science studies, directed by the Social Science Re-
search Committee of the University of Chicago,
no. 33 [i.e. 34]) 37-20974 JS708.G6
Bibliography: p. 214-219.
A study of political behavior patterns in Chicago,
particularly as exemplified in the workings of the
party machines, the characteristics of party workers,
voting behavior, and the political effectiveness of
newspapers. It is based upon personal interviews,
files of Chicago newspapers, observation of political
meetings and election-day activities, participation in
court trials, and upon the author's experience as an
active party worker. The book aims to find the
reasons why Chicago politics underwent so few
fundamental changes during the profound economic
crisis and changes of the years 1928-36. As Dr.
Gosnell points out, at the beginning of 1928 the
two major parties were fairly evenly, if delicately,
balanced, with the Republicans in possession of the
city hall, yet by 1936 the Democrats were in com-
plete control of all government agencies elected or
represented in the Chicago area. The national
policies of the Democratic Party made its local
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO47
leaders supreme in Chicago, but did not effect any
great change of individuals, or disturb their con-
centration upon jobs and spoils to the exclusion of
genuine municipal issues. The author attributes
the persistence of boss rule to a variety of factors
including an unfavorable press situation, a dearth
of civic leadership, and the impartial beneficences
of Samuel Insull to both parties.
6387. Lynch, Denis Tilden. "Boss" Tweed; the
story of a grim generation. New York,
Boni & Liveright, 1927. 433 p. illus.
27-20559 F128.47.T96
Bibliography: p. 419-423.
A breezy history of the political life and times of
William Marcy Tweed (1823-1878), the "monu-
mental" rogue who became boss of Tammany Hall,
and master of the entire machinery of the New
York state government — executive, legislative, and
judicial — and who, in the author's opinion, "wanted
to control the Nation as he did the State." Know-
ing the corruption of contemporary politics and
determined to succeed, he entered it in 1852 as a
Tammany alderman on the Common Council of
New York City which was later known as "The
Forty Thieves." Mr. Lynch describes Tweed's
success, in this and other offices, at manipulating
city purchases and sales, offering and accepting
bribes, and making himself powerful by placing his
friends in key positions. He shows Tweed's meth-
ods of operation, from the use of strong-arm thugs,
repeaters, and newly naturalized immigrants at the
polls to the employment of Republican leaders upon
his own or the city's payrolls. The Tweed Ring
proper did not begin its operations until Jan. 1,
1869, and lasted less than three years, but during
this time it helped itself to some $45 million, and
cost the city of New York as much as $200 million.
Mr. Lynch credits the unbought part of the metro-
politan press, and especially the New Yorl^ Times
under the editorship of George Jones, with arousing
the public against the Ring, and so destroying it in
1871.
6388. McKean, Dayton David. The Boss; the
Hague machine in action. Boston, Hough-
ton Mifflin, 1940. xvii, 284 p.
40-32284 F144.J5H3
An effort to explain how "a ruthless, two-fisted,
unscrupulous, unlettered Irishman," Frank Hague
(1876-1956), mayor of Jersey City, N.J., 1917-47.
and his associates came to power in their munici-
pality and Hudson County, and how their machine
operated. Elected constable in 1897, and commis-
sioner and director of public safety in 1913, Hague
"made his way upward through the armed forces
of his community," especially through manipulating
1048
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
the Police Department. In Professor McKean's
opinion, no other American political machine has
approached the Hague organization in the com-
pleteness of its control over its territory. This
Democratic organization controlled newspapers,
taming an opposition journal by advertising boy-
cotts and increased property assessments, and
bought off or intimidated opposition leaders.
Alone among American city machines, it "system-
atically and successfully utilized the methods of
terrorism, the infiltration of groups and associations,
the suppression of criticism, and the hierarchical
principle of leadership that have characterized the
fascist regimes in Europe." The author charges
the machine with wiretapping, tampering with the
mails, spying, false arrests, and beatings. The
Hague regime survived the publication of Professor
McKean's book, by seven years in the city, and by
nine in the state.
6389. Salter, John T. Boss rule; portraits in city
politics. New York, Whittlesey House,
McGraw-Hill, 1935. 270 p. 35-8152 JS1268.S3
A survey of the workings of the Republican or-
ganization of Philadelphia drawn from the oral
narratives of the ward leaders themselves. The
author has attempted a scientific study of the politi-
cian, first in general terms, then through a group
of nine individual sketches from life, selected as
being typical of widely differing kinds of division
or precinct leaders. The defeat of the party in
the election of November 7, 1933, is described, and
the book concludes with predictions about the
probable future of the Republican organization in
Philadelphia as of 1935, together with suggestions
of devices for better government. Professor Salter
says that, however diverse in training, character,
and ability urban politicians may be, they have in
common the one function of service to their neigh-
bors. To this personal service powerful metro-
politan party organizations owe much of their
strength. This strength is greatest where needs are
most compelling, where there is most poverty, most
unemployment, most conflict with the law, in dis-
tricts more often than not inhabited by a majority
of the foreign-born or of Negroes. The work of
the party organization centers in the simplest crea-
ture wants — jobs, food, justice (or mercy or favor-
itism), and taxes — and in it, as in elections, the most
vital factor is the division leader, who acts as "the
personal sales agent of the party." Another study
of the same machine, David Harold Kurtzman's
Methods of Controlling Votes in Philadelphia
(Philadelphia, 1935. 173 p.), originated as a Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania dissertation. It surveys the
methods whereby the Philadelphia Republican or-
ganization has controlled votes, among them use
of the public payrolls, magistrates' courts, and
police; the personal contacts of the division leader;
favors extended through real estate assessment,
mercantile appraisal, and inspection of weights and
measures; and control of the election mechanism.
6390. Van Devander, Charles W. The big bosses.
[New York] Howell, Soskin, 1944. 318 p.
44-3308 JK2249.V3
A journalist's candid report on the operations of
the major American political machines and their
leaders, down to 1944. In some detail, Mr. Van
Devander discusses the workings of: New York's
Democratic Tammany Hall, the Republican state
machine, and the O'Connell ring which preserved
Albany and Albany County for the Democrats;
the Democratic Hague machine of Jersey City,
which, in 25 years "had become a way of life"; the
highly organized Massachusetts Republican ma-
chine; the Republican Grundy machine of Pennsyl-
vania; the Democratic Kelly-Nash machine of
Chicago; and the Democratic organizations of the
South — the absolute and arbitrary Crump machine
of Tennessee, the Long dictatorship of Louisiana,
the Lister Hill organization of Alabama, the Pen-
dergast machine of Missouri. The record is full
of patronage, favors, graft, deals, exposure and
counterexposure, padded registrations and stuffed
ballot boxes, manipulations of tax assessments,
frameups, and salary assessments. Connections are
found to such profitable sidelines as numbers lot-
teries, gambling rackets, and racing syndicates.
The author notes the absence of machine politics in
California, and comments upon the relation be-
tween the organizations and the realistic Franklin
D. Roosevelt, who exchanged mutual aid with the
machines that supported him and fought those that
opposed.
6391. Zink, Harold. City bosses in the United
States; a study of twenty municipal bosses.
Durham, N.C., Duke University Press, 1930.
371 p. illus. 30-31996 JS309.Z5
An analysis of the characteristics and careers of
twenty municipal bosses of the 19th and 20th cen-
turies, selected on a basis of geographical distribu-
tion and party affiliation. Included are Democratic
and Republican bosses, the boss who veers from
party to party, the boss who begins as a reformer or
who becomes one, the "political hermaphrodite,"
the lone boss, and the boss who heads a long-estab-
lished, efficient machine, together with a few who,
though influential, have never entirely controlled
a city. Although Professor Zink has made some
use of books and documents, he has drawn most
of his information from newspapers and from in-
terviews with "relatives, associates, and enemies."
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO49
An introductory section considers the personal
characteristics of city bosses, their domestic, social,
business, and political relations, as well as their
several methods of reaching the top. The remain-
der of the book is devoted to vignettes of the se-
lected bosses, among them "Czar" Martin Lomasney
of Boston, "Big Tim" Sullivan of the Bowery, Mar-
tin Behrman of New Orleans, "The Genial Doctor"
Albert A. Ames of Minneapolis, and Abraham Ruef
of San Francisco. Professor Zink finds no typical
boss but does observe a frequent occurrence of cer-
tain circumstances and traits, such as early residence
in the city dominated, American birth of foreign-
born parents, a poverty-stricken urban background,
generosity to the poor, loyalty to faithful henchmen,
persistence, and courage.
F. Pressures
6392. Chase, Stuart. Democracy under pressure;
special interests vs the public welfare; guide
lines to America's future as reported to the Twen-
tieth Century Fund. New York, Twentieth Cen-
tury Fund, 1945. 142 p. (His When the war
ends [4]) 45-922 JK1118.C4
A brief and lucid popular analysis of the pressures
exerted upon Congress in 1944 by the lobbyists of
big business, big agriculture, and big labor. Mr.
Chase locates the heart of these big business
pressures in the National Association of Manufac-
turers, the heart of small business pressures in the
U.S. Chamber of Commerce, and of particular in-
dustries in their own organizations such as the
American Iron and Steel Institute. He finds these
business pressure groups oblivious to the interest of
the public, their own consumers, and their own
workers. Corporate financial interest has been
their major concern, leading them to seek monopo-
listic advantages, subsidies, or both. Mr. Chase
does not find much greater concern for the public
interest among the best organized labor unions or
"the farm bloc folks." He fears for free enterprise
and free markets, but believes that the fundamental
trouble with monopoly is neither greed nor arbitrary
power but restriction of output. In his opinion, if
output needs to be restricted, the state is the legiti-
mate agent rather than big business, big union, or
the Farm Bureau Federation. Considering the
great changes of the postwar period, it is remarkable
how much of Mr. Chase's analysis is still pertinent.
6393. Crawford, Kenneth G. The pressure boys;
the inside story of lobbying in America.
New York, Messner, 1939. 308 p.
39-27853 JK1118.C7
A Washington newspaperman's prewar view of
lobbyists, "who may be peddlers of personal influ-
ence, paid propagandists or amateurs promoting
causes in which they sincerely believe," and who,
collectively, "constitute a sort of phantom fourth
branch of the government." Employed by private
property interests, the majority devote "enormous
energies and considerable talents" primarily to the
protection of property, "sometimes by fair means
and sometimes not." Private property is overpro-
tected by the lobbies, the author contends; it has not
hesitated to corrupt government in order to preserve
or extend its advantages; and it exercises more in-
fluence upon Congress than its voting strength
justifies in a representative democracy. Although
Mr. Crawford does not attribute all of the ills of
democracy to the property lobby, particularly busi-
ness interests, he accuses it of swinging congres-
sional votes in return for campaign contributions,
promises, or threats; of possessing an influential
system of propaganda, organized deceit, and skillful
perversion of democratic processes; and of ruthlessly
exercising economic power to achieve political ends.
The property lobby's singleness of purpose — the
protection or advancement of profits — and its un-
complicated selfishness give it enormous drive. The
author provides illustrative case histories, but, un-
fortunately, no index.
6394. Gaer, Joseph. The first round; the story of
the CIO Political Action Committee. New
York, Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1944. xv, 478 p.
illus. 44-51287 E812.G3
Intended to preserve the credos and early propa-
ganda tools of the CIO Political Action Committee,
this is a reprinting of most of the pamphlets and
manuals issued by the committee during its first
year. Joseph Gaer, who has been a staff member,
sets forth the events leading to the formation of the
PAC at the beginning of 1944, the motivations of
its activities, and the sources of its strength. Sidney
Hillman is credited here with being the moving
force, and Philip Murray with being the founder
and establisher of basic policy. The organization
was created "to protect the political rights of the
working man, as well as the rights of the returning
soldier, the farmer, the small business man, and
the so-called 'common man'." Planning for full
431240 — 60-
-68
IO5O / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
postwar employment at fair wages became the com-
mittee's primary policy. Full participation in the
1944 elections was regarded as the first step toward
this objective, and the PAC set as its primary task
getting out the vote for its approved candidates
throughout the nation. The pamphlets consist of
campaign literature, illustrated largely with picto-
graphs. The guides for its own workers include
such titles as: "The Radio Handbook," "The
Speakers Manual," and "A Woman's Guide to
Political Action." A record registration was in fact
achieved.
6395. McKean, Dayton David. Pressures on the
Legislature of New Jersey. New York,
Columbia University Press, 1938. 251 p. (Colum-
bia University. Faculty of Political Science.
Studies in history, economics and public law, no.
440) 38-23938 JK2498.N5M2 1938a
H31.C7, no. 440
A realistic study of New Jersey politics and the
force that makes the State government function —
the lobby. The author, a former New Jersey as-
semblyman, views a State legislature as a kind of
battleground for the various interests of the State.
The first three chapters show what these interests
are: business — especially the Public Service Corpo-
ration of New Jersey and its gadfly, the Utility
Users' Protective League of New Jersey — labor,
agriculture, professional groups, religious groups,
public employees, veterans, women's organizations,
motorists, public education groups, and reform
groups. Next analyzed in some detail are the in-
ternal affairs, membership, structure, financing, and
goals of seven important and representative organ-
izations, such as the New Jersey State Federation of
Labor. The author then examines pressures from
other branches of the State government, and group
and party politics as they were fought out on the
sales tax of 1935. Later chapters explore the meth-
ods and effectiveness of pressure groups which seek
the nomination of friendly candidates and endeavor
to have them bound by platform planks, personal
pledges, and campaign contributions. The groups
attempt to draw out the vote for men of approved
pledges or records, and to influence legislation by
providing information, drafting and guiding bills,
and communicating arguments, promises, and
threats to the legislators. Dr. McKean thinks that
90 percent of the legislature's acts are accounted for
by pressures, but finds no way of measuring their
effectiveness.
6396. Schattschneider, Elmer E. Politics, pres-
sures, and the tariff; a study of free private
enterprise in pressure politics, as shown in the
1 929-1930 revision of the tariff. New York, Pren-
tice-Hall, 1935. 301 p. (Prentice-Hall political
science series) 35-29634 HF1756.S38 1935
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1935.
A study of the political behavior of economic
groups in making the Smoot-Hawley protective
tariff of 1929-30, based upon the nearly 20,000 pages
of testimony taken by the Senate Committee on
Finance and the House Committee on Ways and
Means. So as to observe the relation between eco-
nomic interest and political activity on a broad scale,
Dr. Schattschneider has analyzed the elementary
and immediate interests affected by a large number
of individual duties established in the law. He
attempts to characterize the activity of pressure
groups in the case of one major public policy, and
to measure its strength, its direction, and variability,
as well as to note the manner in which it is deflected
and controlled. He finds that immediate active
interests bring an intense pressure to obtain a pro-
tective duty; the indirect adverse interests remain
inert and sluggish, and make no effective opposi-
tion. A few can exert great influence on the process
of government because they are organized, are
alert, have access to information, and know what
they want; the mass remains apathetic. The pro-
tective tariff was made high by combining a mul-
titude of interests in an omnibus piece of legislation.
6397. Schriftgiesser, Karl. The lobbyists; the art
and business of influencing lawmakers.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. xiv, 297 p.
51-12266 JK1118.S4
Bibliography: p. [273]-28i.
A history of lobbying as it has developed from
the days of the Boston Tea Party and even simpler
forms of persuasion down to 1951. Mr. Schrift-
giesser, who considers that lobbying may be either
good or evil, attempts to show how it has become
an integral part of the democratic legislative process.
Much of his story is concerned with the Regulation
of Lobbying Act, passed by Congress as part of the
Legislative Reorganization Act in 1946. He goes
into the passage of this act, the subsequent adher-
ence to or evasion of its principles, and what can
be learned from the information filed with Congress
by those who come under its provisions. His ob-
ject is to show the extent of lobbying both in Wash-
ington and elsewhere in the country, and to bring
together the detailed information gathered by the
House Select Committee on Lobbying Activities in
1950. His summary of the latter is probably his
chief contribution. The danger remains that a
quite small interest group may, by sheer vociferous-
ness and persistence, have an effect on legislation
far in excess of its own importance. Mr. Schrift-
giesser believes in the unhindered right of petition,
but believes also that anyone who petitions the gov-
ernment for redress of grievance "should stand up
and say who he is, and what he wants, why he
wants it, and who paid his way."
6398. Turner, Julius. Party and constituency:
pressures on Congress. Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins Press, 1951 [i. e. 1952] 190 p. (The
Johns Hopkins University studies in historical and
political science, ser. 69, no. 1)
52-839 JK2265T87
H31.J6, ser. 69, no. 1
An attempt to measure, by quantitative methods,
the effectiveness of pressures upon Congressmen
from their political parties and constituencies. Dr.
Turner has chosen four sessions for roll call analysis:
1921, when the Republicans held a strong majority
in the House and had captured the Presidency after
eight years of Democratic rule; 1930-31, when the
Republicans held a slight majority and were "falter-
ing under President Hoover"; 1937, when the
Democrats held three-quarters of the House after
the Roosevelt landslide but were beginning to divide
on the New Deal; and 1944, when the Democrats
organized Congress but were so closely followed
by the Republicans that the number of absentees
determined the majority at any given time. In his
opinion, the roll call record is "an accurate summa-
tion of the effectiveness of the pressure of various
groups on each congressman, on those issues which
are important enough or controversial enough so
that a part of the membership wants a record kept
of the vote for an ensuing election campaign." The
great majority of Representatives, he concludes,
yield to the pressures from their constituencies and
especially to party pressures in casting their votes.
Those who do not, especially if they are Republi-
cans, are unlikely to achieve longevity in office.
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO5I
"The American Congress is ... a mirror of polit-
ical pressure."
6399. Zeller, Belle. Pressure politics in New
York; a study of group representation before
the legislature. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1937.
310 p. (Prentice-Hall political science series)
37-11266 JK2498.N7Z4 1937
Thesis (Ph. D.) — Columbia University, 1937.
An analysis of the activities of the more important
statewide pressure groups in New York and of
their influence upon legislative policy, together with
suggestions for solutions to some of the more press-
ing problems thereby created. Group pressures
stem from three major sources, Miss Zeller found —
labor, business, and agriculture — as well as from
a host of minor sources. The most vigorous pres-
sure exerted at Albany was on behalf of labor
legislation, particularly by the New York State
Federation of Labor, the Women's Trade Union
League of New York, and the Consumers' League
of New York. Also engaged in a continuing batde
for legislative influence were a score or more lobby
groups representing money interests, industry, and
agriculture, notably the Real Estate Association of
the State of New York, the New York State Bankers
Association, the Association of Life Insurance Presi-
dents, Associated Industries, Inc., the Empire State
Gas and Electric Association, and the New York
State Conference Board of Farm Organizations.
Labor groups have always secured greater assistance
from Democratic administrations, industrial groups
from Republican. To Miss Zeller, the outstanding
feature of pressure-group technique is the use of
mass propaganda channels for building support both
within and outside the interest group itself long
before the direct attack on the legislature begins.
G. Elections: Machinery
6400. Albright, Spencer D. The American ballot.
Washington, American Council on Public
Affairs, 1942. 153 p. 42-25091 JK.2215.A6
Bibliography: p. 146-148.
A minute analysis and comparison of ballot forms
which were in use in the United States, particu-
larly during the 1930's, both in general and in pri-
mary elections. As Dr. Albright points out, by the
middle of the 19th century ballot papers had be-
come subject to legislation as to color, number, size,
uniformity, and methods of marking and depositing.
The majority of American states had, by the turn
of the century, adopted the Australian ballot system
in a modified form. Under the new system, here
regarded as a fundamental advance, voting was
elaborately regulated by the State. The ballots were
printed and distributed by designated authorities,
marked and deposited on election day within a
polling place under the supervision of the proper
officials, and canvassed according to law. In the
20th century, almost continuous amendment of the
ballot laws has been the rule, in many instances for
the better. The author thinks that a general im-
provement has resulted from the voting-machine
laws of the decade 1930-40; the machines arc re-
liable and meet the needs of all elections including
IO52 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
primaries. The voting public, he believed in 1942,
was becoming aware of the advantages of the
machine: the ease and speed with which the vote
is recorded, as well as the economies made possible
by the reduction in printing costs, personnel, sup-
plies, and rental of polling places (through con-
solidation of precincts), and the elimination of
recounts.
6401. Bishop, Cortlandt F. History of elections
in the American Colonies. New York, Co-
lumbia College, 1893. 297 p. (Columbia Uni-
versity. Faculty of Political Science. Studies in
history, economics and public law, v. 3, no. 1)
4-1841 JK97.A3B61
H3i.C7,v.3
"Authorities quoted": p. [289]-295.
This pioneer study, based upon a thorough ex-
amination of the statutes of the Thirteen Colonies,
was so solidly done that it has been relied upon
ever since. Dr. Bishop dealt first with general
elections, and noted that they were in use in every
colony, at least for constituting a legislative assem-
bly, beginning with Virginia's choice of a House
of Burgesses in 1619. New York had to wait the
longest, for neither the Dutch West India Com-
pany nor the Duke of York (the future King
James II) cared for popular elections, and notwith-
standing several anticipations there was no regular
assembly until 1691. Dr. Bishop next analyzed the
qualifications for the suffrage in use throughout the
period, noting the moral and religious ones which
did not survive the Revolution. The chapter on
"The Management of Elections" is full of concrete
detail on such matters as the publication of the
election writ, the hours of election, the method of
taking the vote, and provisions against fraud; there
is no such convenient accumulation of precise in-
formation for post-colonial elections. A briefer
section deals with town, parish, and municipal
elections, and the suffrage and management regula-
tions which governed them. Appendixes print
specimen writs, returns, and oaths, and some un-
published election statutes turned up in the author's
researches.
6402. De Grazia, Alfred. Public and republic;
political representation in America. New
York, Knopf, 1951. xiii, 262, ix p.
51-9540 JK1846.D4 1951
Bibliography: p. 259-262.
A description and a closely reasoned analysis of
the major currents of political belief and practice
during the last three centuries, each with its own
interpretation of man and society and each with
its own scheme of political representation. Dr.
De Grazia cites the majority principle, universal
suffrage, a real-property qualification for holding
office, instruction of representatives by constituents,
and proportional representation as among proposed
means of obtaining a government to fulfill men's
desires and to realize their values. He attempts to
show how and why rich and poor, religious and
political sects, and urban and rural populations have
held differing views of representation. He isolates
clusters of ideas about representation, traces their
ancestry and history, and points out where some
weakened and others grew strong, where some ele-
ments were incorporated into other groups, and
where some died out. Beginning with English
ideas of representation in the two centuries after
Elizabeth I, the author traces the development of
the American representative principle through three
main forms: the ideas of direct representation, en-
lightened individualism, and pluralism, with
power-clusters in a corporation-dominated society.
6403. Harris, Joseph P. Registration of voters in
the United States. Washington, Brookings
Institution, 1929. xviii, 390 p. ([Brookings Insti-
tution, Washington, D. C] Institute for Govern-
ment Research. Studies in administration [no.
23]) 29-17775 JK2164.A2H3
"Select bibliography": p. 383-385.
6404. Harris, Joseph P. Election administration
in the United States. Washington, Brook-
ings Institution, 1934. 453 p. ([Brookings Insti-
tution, Washington, D. C.] Institute for Govern-
ment Research. Studies in administration, no. 27)
34-5509 JK1976.H3
Registration of Voters in the United States is an
analytical survey of American registration systems,
based upon a 15-month field study of the legal pro-
visions governing the several registration systems of
the States and the practical workings of those sys-
tems, which included interviews with persons both
in and outside registration offices who were ac-
quainted with local political situations, organiza-
tions, and methods. Effort was made to secure
information not only upon all phases of adminis-
tration but also upon the general problems of reg-
istration. The author found no system absolutely
satisfactory, nor did he expect to, since he consid-
ered no single system ideal for every State. He
commended California for the most satisfactory
system of records, Milwaukee and Minneapolis for
the best transfer system, Omaha for the best canvass
system, Boston for the best census of adults, and
Detroit and St. Louis for the best method of se-
lecting precinct officers. Dr. Harris regarded voter
registration as essential to prevent frauds and there-
fore "the very foundation upon which an honest
election system must rest." If properly adminis-
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO53
tered, it may be an economical operation of no in-
convenience to the mass of voters. He recom-
mended permanent registration, whereby the voter
remains registered so long as he remains at the same
address, with the provision of certain safeguards.
Based on a field study undertaken during 1929 and
1930, Election Administration in the United States
continues Professor Harris' survey of the electoral
process and describes the system then in operation
in America for the casting and counting of ballots,
and the canvassing and declaration of the result.
Emphasis is placed upon the practical operation of
election laws rather than upon the provisions of the
statutes, although the latter were studied. Inter-
views were held with chief election officers and with
politically informed persons outside the election
office. The author undertook the study because in
his opinion no other phase of public administration
in the United States had been so badly managed
as the conduct of elections, in which have regularly
occurred "glaring irregularities, errors, misconduct
on the part of precinct officers, disregard of election
laws and instructions, slipshod practices, and down-
right frauds." Yet democratic government is com-
pletely dependent upon honestly and efficiently con-
ducted elections. Dr. Harris called for a general
revision of State election laws, a reorganization of
election machinery, and improvements in election
management — especially in the practice of the party
machines in staffing election boards with their
hacks. He offered "a model election administra-
tion code" (p. 77-94). Voting machines are ex-
pensive but desirable "if properly used, and the
limitations of the machines recognized."
6405. McGovney, Dudley O. The American suf-
frage medley; the need for a national uni-
form suffrage. Chicago, University of Chicago
Press, 1949. 201 p. 49-9160 JK1853.M25
McGovney, a California professor of law, died in
1947 leaving the manuscript of this plea for the
establishment of a uniform national suffrage. The
control of suffrage requirements by the states, he
believed, was a survival from the Colonial period,
when the British settlers were "accustomed to the
idea of restricting the suffrage to the upper eco-
nomic levels" and to a medley of voting qualifica-
tions in electing members of the House of Com-
mons. Since the framers of the Constitution made
no alteration here, the adoption of universal suf-
frage has been piecemeal and incomplete. At the
time of wridng 5 States had rudiments of the old
property qualifications; 7 had a poll-tax require-
ment; 18 had educational requirements of a great
variety, adopted for a variety of reasons; and 36
imposed a permanent disfranchisement upon per-
sons sentenced to prison. Politicians, McGovney
thought, have been able to use these survivals so as
to interfere seriously with the democratic process.
He proposed a constitutional amendment limiting
suffrage requirements, for primaries as well as final
elections, to adulthood, citizenship, and residence in
a State for six months and in the precinct for three;
and disfranchising only for insanity and for the
duration of imprisonment.
6406. Merriam, Charles Edward, and Louise
Overacker. Primary elections. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1928. 448 p.
28-1491 1 JK2074.M5 1928
First published in 1908.
"Bibliography and Sources of statistical material
for primary and general election returns": p. 405-
427.
The development of legal regulation of the nom-
inating process in the United States forms the
subject of this history and analysis. The authors
trace the expansion of regulation from the establish-
ment of the representative party system, the general
adoption of the delegate convention system, and the
victory of universal male suffrage in the 1830's to
the introduction of the mandatory, legally protected,
direct primary during the first two decades of the
20th century, with a noticeable reaction against it
in the 1920's. Inquiring into the attitude of the
judiciary toward primary legislation, the authors
find a recognition of the right of the legislature to
regulate in some detail the method of voting, and
an unwillingness to sustain the claims of the party,
as a voluntary political organization, to regulate its
own internal affairs. They consider the direct pri-
mary a weapon for the voter, a means to challenge
or overthrow a corrupt or unrepresentative organi-
zation, and of especial significance to the one-party
States where nominations are tantamount to elec-
tions. Among the improvements in nominating
methods suggested by the authors are a reduction
in the number of elecdve officers (why elect a cor-
oner or a surveyor?), and limiting the popular
choice to major executive officers concerned with
the formulation of public policies. A long appendix
(p. 359-404) summarizes the primary laws of each
State (as of 1928).
6407. Overacker, Louise. Money in elections.
Largely from material collected by Victor
J. West. New York, Macmillan, 1932. 476 p.
([Parties and practical politics series 1)
32-29858 JK1991.O7
"Selected bibliography": p. 419-459.
"The present study is primarily concerned with
the use of money in elections in the United States,
the attempts to regulate such use, the operation of
these regulations, and the possibility of more effec-
1054 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tive control." Professor Overacker, who took
over the research materials left by Professor V. J.
West of Stanford University at his death in 1927,
defines elections to include primaries as well as
general elections, and defines money to include the
things money will buy and actual bribes. She is
concerned with the raising, spending, and regulat-
ing of the money which influences voters in casting
their ballots for or against certain candidates.
Among expenditures, she lists general overhead of
die headquarters offices, salaries and transportation
for field activities, funds for publicity, and grants
to subsidiary organizations by the national com-
mittees. Election-day expenditures, she observes,
can smack unpleasantly of bribery. These she
would eliminate by legal prohibitions or have them
shouldered by the State or by nonparty groups.
Since she finds a correlation between votes received
and even "legitimate" funds spent, she would limit
the size as well as the purpose of the latter, and
throw pre-election publicity upon the amount and
character of expenditures by all candidates, parties,
and organizations involved. As of 1932, attempts
to limit contributions and expenditures had been
"nothing short of farcical."
6408. Overacker, Louise. The Presidential pri-
mary. New York, Macmillan, 1926. 308 p.
([Parties and practical politics series])
26-6444 JK522.O8
Bibliography: p. 277-294.
An analysis, a comparison, and an evaluation of
the 26 [as of 1926] State laws enacted to provide
direct popular control of Presidential nominations
through the election of delegates to national con-
ventions, or a preference vote for President, or both.
The functionings of the various types of Presiden-
tial primary were compared, and the author at-
tempted to determine whether the combined effect
of these laws upon the Presidential nominating
process weakened or strengthened it. Although
emphasis was placed upon the operation of existing
State laws, consideration was given to various pro-
posals for a national primary law, and suggestions
were made for drafting an effective one. The
author regarded the Presidential primary as part
of the general movement for more democratic con-
trol of the American government and, in its con-
crete aspect, as an attempt to give the people some
say in the election of their President, and to secure
party responsibility. She found the effectiveness of
the Presidential primary laws limited by faulty con-
struction, lack of uniformity, and especially by
the fact that they existed in so few States. She sug-
gested extension of the system to all or most States,
either through State or national action. Since 1926
the system has declined, however, until at present
only 14 States have mandatory Presidential pri-
maries, and in only a minority of these are the dele-
gates pledged by the result.
6409. Porter, Kirk H. A history of suffrage in
the United States. Chicago, University of
Chicago Press, 1918. 260 p.
18-22279 JK1846.P8
Issued also as thesis (Ph. D.) University of
Chicago.
A history of the right to vote since 1776, empha-
sizing the expansion of the suffrage by the gradual
inclusion of groups to whom it was originally de-
nied, presenting the general picture and the moti-
vating ideals rather than the technicalities and local
variations, and based primarily upon the debates in
state constitutional conventions. For all its proc-
lamation of natural rights, the American Revolu-
tion did not greatly alter the franchise restrictions
prevailing in the later Colonial period, and when
the Constitution was adopted voting was still con-
fined to a small group of property owners and tax-
payers. Dr. Porter traces the weakening and prac-
tically complete elimination of property tests; North
Carolina did not abandon hers until 1856, while two
states, at the time of writing, had never given up
a small taxpaying requirement. After the enfran-
chisement of the unpropertied, controversy in the
realm became concerned with votes for free Ne-
groes and eventually for all Negroes, for aliens, and
for women. While the general movement has
been, however jerkily, in the direction of universal
suffrage, the years from 1877 to 1904 saw a complete
disfranchisement of Negroes in all the Southern
states. Dr. Porter wrote shortly before the adoption
of the 19th Amendment, when only 12 states had
enacted full woman suffrage, and he anticipated a
much longer and harder struggle for its passage than
was about to take place.
6410. Sikes, Earl R. State and Federal corrupt-
practices legislation. Durham, N.C., Duke
University Press, 1928. 321 p.
28-16725 JK1994.S6
Bibliography: p. 292-314.
This Cornell University dissertation is a survey
of the corrupt-practices legislation enacted in the
United States to 1928 by both State and Federal
governments, and an examination of the construc-
tion placed upon the statutes by judicial interpre-
tation. Chapters 1-3 consider statutory prohibi-
tions against corrupt inducements to voters, against
their intimidation, and against fraudulent practices
by voters on the one hand and by election officials
on the other. Chapter 4 deals with State regula-
tion of various forms of campaign literature. Chap-
ter 5 reports on State legislation requiring publicity
for campaign contributions and expenditures, pro-
hibiting or restricting certain types of contributions,
and regulating expenditures in campaigns. Chap-
ters 6 and 7 are concerned with the regulation of
elections by the Federal Government; 6 defines the
division of power between the Federal and State
governments over the control of elections, and 7
surveys Federal corrupt-practices legislation. De-
spite the stringent legislation enacted against abuses
of the elective franchise from the 1890's, the worst
evils did not appear, in 1928, to have been corrected.
In the author's opinion, the increasing complexity
of the electoral machinery, the rapid industrial and
commercial development of the country, and the
indifference of the public all contributed to domi-
nation by great political machines.
641 1. Wilmerding, Lucius. The electoral college.
New Brunswick, N. J., Rutgers University
Press, 1958. 224 p. 58-6290 JK529.W64
An explanation of proposals for reform as well as
an historical oudine and a critique of the system
provided by the Constitution for electing the Pres-
ident through the agency of intermediate electors,
or, in certain contingencies, through the votes of
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO55
the House of Representatives. Dr. Wilmerding
regards the former process as an "artificial and de-
lusive system," because each candidate is given the
unanimous and undivided electoral vote of every
State where he has a plurality of the popular votes,
receiving nothing from the remaining States. In
each State, therefore, "a large minority of the people
is made precisely equal to no minority at all and a
bare plurality is made equal to the whole." An
election by the House of Representatives he consid-
ers still further removed from an election by the
people at large, since the representation of each
State, regardless of its size, is given one vote which
it casts according to the sense of its own majority.
Yet the purpose of the Constitution, he believes, is
"to elevate to the executive chair the man who is
the choice of the majority of the people in the
nation as a whole"; that intention having been de-
feated, the Presidency has been put on a federative
rather than a national basis. The author, in argu-
ing for electoral reform, expresses his preference
for a system which would put the Presidential elec-
tion upon a sound popular basis and a practical
footing.
H. Elections: Results
6412. Bean, Louis H. Ballot behavior; a study of
presidendal elections. Washington, Amer-
ican Council on Public Affairs, 1940. 102 p. illus.
40-34491 JK1967.B4
6413. Bean, Louis H. How to predict elections.
New York, Knopf, 1948. 196 p. illus.
48-3171 JK2007.B4
Ballot Behavior is a survey of 40 years (1896-
1936) of Presidential election history for each of
the 48 States, based upon political statistics from
States, counties, and cities. Among the author's
results are: the discovery of a number of States
which go as the nation goes; a method of measuring
political trends; the effect of business conditions on
these trends; and a schedule of relationship between
the national popular vote and the state electoral
votes, by which national polls may be translated into
a probable electoral lineup of the 48 States. Mr.
Bean presents not a method of forecasting elections
but basic facts so organized as to serve as a founda-
tion for judgment. He offers analyses and data,
leaving the reader to judge for himself. He does
discern a fairly systematic pattern of behavior in
the United States. A given national political shift
has its reflection, he believes, to varying degrees, in
each of the States and in a great many coundes.
Upon this theory, the behavior of one State may be
translated into the corresponding behavior of the
nation as a whole and then into the corresponding
behavior of the other 47 States. Mr. Bean offers
many tables and diagrams to indicate political pat-
terns and tides. A companion volume, How to
Predict Elections, reports the results of further re-
search into voting statistics. Although less atten-
tion is given to theory and procedure, the method
of analysis remains the same, and the findings and
forecasts are again offered with reserve. The author
continues to believe that "voting behavior, portrayed
statistically, offers valuable keys to an explanation
of the marked swings in American politics and
helps to form a basis for judging political trends in
the immediate future." Political tides over a period
of years are represented here by the changing per-
centage of the Presidential vote cast in successive
elections by the Democratic Party, or the proportion
of the House or Senate seats won by either party.
Most of the factors which have dominated elections
from 1928 to 1946, years of "the New Deal tide,"
are treated separately, first historically, and later in
reladon to the 1946 and future elections.
IO56 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6414. Berelson, Bernard R., Paul F. Lazarsfeld,
and William N. McPhee. Voting; a study
of opinion formation in a Presidential campaign.
[Chicago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xix,
395 p. illus. 54-11205 JK526 1948.B4
An intensive study of the voting behavior of an
American town, Elmira, N.Y., in the Presidential
contest of 1948 between President Truman and
Governor Dewey. The authors employed the so-
called panel method of interviewing a representa-
tive sample of respondents before the political cam-
paign began, during it, and after it. The main
purpose was to analyze a developing process
through repeated interviews with the respondents —
in this case, approximately 1,000. Both the social
and the political aspects of the process are empha-
sized, the formation of preferences on the one hand,
and, on the other, the relation between democratic
theory and democratic practice. By statistical
analysis, the authors have attempted to discover
how, why, and by how much opinions and atti-
tudes changed during the period under examina-
tion. Vote intentions supported by one's social en-
vironment, they find, are more predictably ad-
hered to than are "deviant" intentions. Under the
stress of a campaign, people develop an increased
tendency toward conformity. Voters do have
some of the classically required virtues of the citizen
but not in the elaborate or comprehensive form
demanded by political philosophers. In the au-
thors' opinion, the political theory of democracy,
formulated in the 18th century, stands in need of
revision, but not replacement, through empirical
sociology.
6415. Ewing, Cortz A. M. Congressional elec-
tions, 1896-1944; the sectional basis of polit-
ical democracy in the House of Representatives.
Norman, University of Oklahoma Press, 1947. no
p. illus. 47-31040 JK1316.E9
6416. Ewing, Cortez A. M. Presidential elections
from Abraham Lincoln to Franklin D.
Roosevelt. Norman, University of Oklahoma
Press, 1940. 226 p. illus. 40_ 33395 JK524.E94
The first of these works is a statistical analysis
of elections to the House of Representatives, limited,
because of the lack of detailed official figures for
earlier ones, to those of 1 896-1 944. Professor
Ewing's evaluation of the last 50 years convinced
him that success in the Presidential election will go
to the party already in control of the House. He
points out that the Republicans must win a ma-
jority of seats in the East, Middle West, and West
to secure a majority in the House. If the border
section goes Republican, that majority becomes
overwhelming. The Democrats, sure of the South
and at an advantage in the border, need add only
88 seats outside these sections to have a majority
in the House. Professor Ewing expressed some
doubt as to whether the sectional pattern normal
in 1944 would continue, calling particular atten-
tion to the division in the Democratic Party be-
tween Southern conservatives and liberals in the
other sections. In Presidential Elections the author
applied the same kind of analysis to the presidential
elections of the years 1864-1936. He divided them
into four major voting periods: 1864—1876, when
the Republicans won four straight triumphs; 1880-
1892, when the Democrats fought back to split the
four elections equally; 1896-1916, when landslides
began to occur and the Republicans won all but the
1912 and 1916 elections, and lost those because of
their own disunity; and 1920-36, when the Republi-
cans won the first three, and the Democrats the
last two elections. He thought that before World
War I there was crystallization of party allegiance,
and after it a decline of party regularity, a failure
of tradition as a determinant of political behavior,
and the emergence of economic security as a domi-
nant motivation. He discussed, among other mat-
ters, sectional interests, minority parties, the elec-
toral college, and the respective influences of these
on the outcome of national elections.
6417. Gallup, George H. A guide to public opin-
ion polls. [2d ed.] Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1948. xxiv, 117 p.
48-3517 HM261.G27 1948
First published in 1944.
An elucidation of the "science of opinion meas-
urement" set forth in question and answer form.
The author attempted to furnish readers with a
better conception of the methods employed in public
opinion research and a fuller understanding of its
value. Public opinion polls had been thoroughly
tested since 1935, he contended, and the reliability
of the methods practiced had been "demonstrated
time and again." Although Dr. Gallup did not
claim perfection for his system, he noted its "many
contributions to our democratic process," especially
through its accurate and prompt reports of public
opinion and its focus of attention upon major na-
tional issues. Answers are provided here to all the
questions most frequendy put to polling organiza-
tions. Among the subjects covered are the func-
tions of the poll, the size of sample necessary to
reliability, the types of sampling, the selection of
the interviewers, election predictions, and the in-
terpretation and reporting of results. "Just as it
can be said with certainty that polls will be highly
accurate in the vast majority of elections, so with
the same certainty it can be said that on occasion
they will go wrong." Notwithstanding which dis-
claimer, Dr. Gallup's poll lost heavily in prestige
by picking Dewey rather than Truman in 1948.
6418. Gosnell, Harold F. Grass roots politics;
national voting behavior of typical States.
Washington, American Council on Public Affairs,
1942. 195 p. illus. 42-25395 JK1967.G6
A quantitative analysis of political behavior
chiefly of the 1920's and 1930's in six States —
Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Iowa, California, Illinois,
and Louisiana — which aims to trace from this sam-
ple the main outlines of the pattern of national
politics. Developments in Pennsylvania, the au-
thor believes, clearly demonstrate the extent of the
national political upheaval of the 1930's, when the
Democratic Party attracted to its ranks not only dis-
satisfied Republicans but a host of new voters. The
depression worked toward a political realignment of
socioeconomic groups both in California and in
Wisconsin, where the New Deal gained strength
among poor, foreign-born, and progressive farmers
as well as among skilled and unskilled laborers of
the cities. Dr. Gosnell finds that Herbert Hoover
was made a scapegoat for the personal insecurity of
many Iowa farmers. He considers that the even
spread of the revolt against the Republican Party was
a remarkable aspect of Illinois politics of the 1930's,
and that the emergence of Louisiana's Huey Long
indicates the precarious foundation of American de-
mocracy and the two-party system.
6419. Lazarsfeld, Paul F., Bernard Berelson, and
Hazel Gaudet. The people's choice; how
the voter makes up his mind in a presidential cam-
paign. [2d ed.] New York, Columbia Univer-
sity Press, 1948. xxxiii, 178 p. illus.
48-8605 JK524.L38 1948
First published in 1944.
An analysis of the voting behavior of Erie
County, Ohio, in the Presidential election of 1940
(President F. D. Roosevelt versus Wendell Will-
kie), based on interviews obtained from a panel
of 600 respondents who were questioned once a
month from May to November 1940. Interest cen-
tered in persons whose political opinions were
changed in the interval, whether by a shift in party
allegiance, by indecision until the end of the cam-
paign, or by abstention after declaration of a defi-
nite vote intention, because in them the processes of
attitude formation and change could be observed.
They were compared with those who did not
change political opinions; their personal character-
istics, their contacts with other people, and their
exposure to mass communications were examined.
The opinions successively held by the shifters were
also compared, and a 13 percent turnover, stimu-
lated chiefly by face-to-face contacts, was found to
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO57
have occurred within the few weeks before the
election. The authors state that they have found
only preliminary answers to the questions of who
changes opinion, in what direction, and in response
to what influences.
6420. Litchfield, Edward H. Voting behavior in
a metropolitan area. Ann Arbor, Univer-
sity of Michigan Press, 1941. 93 p. illus. (Michi-
gan. University. Michigan governmental studies,
no. 7) 41-52812 JS847.A3L55
Covering five elections held during the years
1930-38, this dissertation studies the voting be-
havior of the principal social groups in Detroit,
based upon assessment and census data in various
city offices. There were three behavior indexes —
electoral participation, third-party voting, and major
party affiliation — for which material could be gath-
ered. The participation data revealed a direct re-
lationship between income and amount of partici-
pation: the higher the income, the greater degree
of participation. The Polish middle class was the
most Democratic in a predominandy Democratic
city; the wealthy native white group was the most
Republican. These two groups, Dr. Litchfield re-
ports, were also the two most active participants.
In general, "Democratic party affiliation in the
period after 1930 has varied inversely with economic
status." His analysis of third-party voting habits
shows that middle-class Russians were most at-
tracted to third parties and the wealthy native
whites were the least so. Important group con-
cerns do exist, the author concludes, but group
opinion remains flexible and classes are not highly
self-conscious. Detroit as of 1938 was still con-
cerned with the general interest.
6421. Mencken, Henry L. A carnival of bun-
combe. Edited by Malcolm Moos. Balti-
more, Johns Hopkins Press, 1956. xviii, 370 p.
56-11658 E742.M4
A selection of 69 articles written during the 1920's
and 1930's for Mencken's weekly political column
in The Evening Sun, Baltimore. The book's five
sections — "Normalcy"; "Calvinism"; "Onward,
Christian Soldiers: Hoover & Al"; "Roosevelt
Minor"; and "The Burden of Omnipotence —
Roosevelt & Alf" — are each introduced by appropri-
ate commentary from the editor, who notices that
Mencken's predictions were sometimes dead wrong.
Couched in Mencken's characteristic irreverent and
jocund style, these pieces offer acerb portrayals and
interpretations of the behavior and motivations of
politicians and public-office holders. The author,
who starts from the premises that American gov-
ernment "must be a great deal more competent
than it looks" and that honor has no place in poli-
io58
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
tics, writes of such matters as prohibition, the solid
South, political fraud and corruption, convention
and campaign tactics, and the depression. Par-
ticularly noteworthy was his article of July 14, 1924,
on the disastrous Democratic National Convention
of that year. In Mencken's very candidly expressed
opinions, Harding was, intellectually, "a benign
blank," Coolidge an "obscure and unimportant
man," Alfred E. Smith "as provincial as a Kansas
farmer" although honest and worthy, Hoover "care-
ful and cautious," an adept politician if an incom-
petent President, and Franklin D. Roosevelt a dealer
in "quackery."
6422. Moos, Malcolm C. Politics, presidents,
and coattails. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins
Press, 1952. xxi, 237 p. illus.
52-13613 JK1976.M6
An analysis of the relationships between voting
behavior in congressional and presidential elections.
The primary concern of the inquiry is with con-
gressional elections, but, in the author's opinion,
"the selection of a congressman is often not unaf-
fected by the choice of a President." After sketch-
ing briefly the so-called coattail theory — the belief
that in years of presidential elections Congressmen
are often elected or defeated according to the po-
litical appeal of their party's Presidential candidate
(and so are said to ride upon his coattails) — Profes-
sor Moos compares Presidential and congressional
voting records for the period 1896-1950 as to their
relative influence upon electoral victory, and then
attempts to evaluate the discovered relationships.
He concludes that, although the coattail influence
is of minor significance, successful Presidential can-
didates normally run ahead of their congressional
tickets. The steady rise of the Presidency in public
policy and party leadership is one of the manifest
political truths of the 20th century, has occurred as
an adaptation in response to a national need, and
is a by-product of our haphazard and clumsy party
system.
6423. Rogers, Lindsay. The pollsters; public
opinion, politics, and democratic leadership.
New York, Knopf, 1949. 239 p.
49-7842 HM263.R57
An admittedly indignant denunciation of the
commercial polling agencies, particularly the Roper,
Gallup, and Time polls, and their claims of scien-
tific accuracy in the measurement of public opinion.
Professor Rogers demonstrates that a mere counting
of yeas and noes, without considering the knowl-
edge on which the opinion is based, the intensity
with which it is held, and the willingness to act
upon it, is of small consequence. He scouts the
pollsters' assumption "that what they claim they
have discovered public opinion to be should rule,"
and finds them guilty of two great sins of omission:
they have never attempted to define what they are
measuring, nor have they outlined the nature of the
political society in which public opinion should be
the ruler. The United States is not, and ought not
to be, a town meeting. The author believes, more-
over, that public opinion is not a measurable con-
cept, and that polling is not a scientific method.
Documented by examples from polls of wrong
premises about our political society, imperfect sam-
plings, ambiguous framing of questions, inter-
viewer bias, and exaggerated claims based upon the
results, his examination of sources of error in poll-
ing points to serious limitations in the method.
I. Reform
6424. Aaron, Daniel. Men of good hope; a story
of American progressives. New York, Ox-
ford University Press, 1951. xiv, 329 p.
51-1402 E176.A2
Contents. — Emerson and the progressive tradi-
tion.— Theodore Parker: 'the batde of the nine-
teenth century.' — Henry George: the great para-
dox.— Edward Bellamy: village Utopian. — Henry
Demarest Lloyd: the middle-class conscience. — Wil-
liam Dean Howells: the gentleman from Al-
truria. — Thorstein Veblen: moralist and rhetori-
cian.— Theodore Roosevelt and Brooks Adams:
pseudo-progressives. — In retrospect: 1912-1950. —
Notes on sources (p. 309-321).
A study of the American progressive tradition,
beginning with the social philosophy of Ralph
Waldo Emerson (1 803-1 882), its prophet, whose
simultaneous acceptance and rejection of American
civilization was shared by the progressives who fol-
lowed him. In the author's opinion, progressivism
was conceived when a moral-minded minority be-
gan to observe the social effects of the industrial
age, and to protest against what they considered
the betrayal of the republican ideal. Although
they ranged from moderate to radical in attitudes
and policies, the progressives agreed that whatever
be the form of society, the proper concern of govern-
ment is "the care and culture of men." The 19th-
century reformers here discussed appealed effec-
tively to those of their contemporaries who sensed
the inadequacies of American life and desired a
serene and humane society based upon virtue and
justice. Professor Aaron regards their 20th-century
successors as more efficient, more impersonal, and
less eloquent. He believes that the old progressive
vision provides a humanist philosophy, indispu-
tably idealistic and ethical, which is essential to any
truly liberal movement.
6425. Childs, Richard S. Civic victories; the
story of an unfinished revolution. New
York, Harper, 1952. xvii, 350 p. illus.
52-12041 JK2408.C55
A study of and a program for State and local
government election procedures by the originator
of the short-form ballot and the council-manager
plan of municipal administration. Mr. Childs is
concerned with organizing elections to public office
on lines that will best assure a practical working of
the democratic process. Particularly is he anxious
to eliminate the possibility of oligarchy and permit
the people to put into public office the men they
really want there. To prevent oligarchy, he con-
tends, the ballot must be short enough and the num-
ber of offices to be filled small enough to permit
individual candidates to receive the fullest and most
public scrutiny. He would separate from the elec-
tive list all offices not high enough, or which deter-
mine no policies large enough, to stir the people to
take sides, and so remove a cause of "blind voting."
He would hold the constituency to a size feasible
for canvass by the ordinary independent candidate,
and he would integrate the powers of government
so as to make popular control effective. In addi-
tion to the argument for his program, Mr. Childs
provides a history of the crusade he undertook for
it in 1909, together with a report of progress made.
6426. Greer, Thomas H. American social reform
movements; their pattern since 1865. New
York, Prentice-Hall, 1949. 313 p. (Prentice-Hall
sociology series) 49-1202 HN57.G7
Bibliography: p. 293-299.
The purpose of this book is to determine, through
analysis of the basic elements — demand, organiza-
tion, objectives, techniques, and accomplishments —
the pattern of the major American reform move-
ments initiated by labor, farmers, progressives, and
radicals in the years 1 865-1949. Economic dis-
tress, the author concludes, has given rise to most
of the reform movements, which have gradually
shifted from humanitarian purposes and Utopian
thinking to the more restricted, practical, and selfish
aims of a group or class. Professor Greer finds this
change reflected in the leadership of the movements.
Idealists have given way to realistic advocates of
self-interest in the fields of labor and agriculture,
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / IO59
and radical extremists have been succeeded by more
practical and respectable men. Although earlier
reform movements sought to embrace many diverse
forces, later groups have followed a trend toward
limited and integrated membership, an exception
being such a radical group as the Marxists whose
numerical weakness forces them to accept a diverse
membership in order to have any following. In the
author's opinion, reform movements tend to be
short-lived because the public loses its zeal, because
the goals set are out of reach, or because one of the
major parties has borrowed the reform programs;
he credits them, however, with substantial
achievements.
6427. Haynes, Frederick E. Third party move-
ments since the Civil War, with special
reference to Iowa; a study in social politics. Iowa
City, State Historical Society of Iowa, 19 16. 564 p.
16-6948 JK2261.H35
A study of the Liberal Republican, Farmers',
Greenback, Populist, and Progressive movements,
which regards all of them as growing out of the
economic and social conditions arising from the
settlement of the West. In Dr. Haynes' opinion,
these successive third-party movements have, from
the 1870's to the second decade of the 20th century,
impelled the major political parties to take action
against economic and social ills. These third parties
he sees as means of agitation and education, and as
expressions of objection to contemporary economic
conditions. The Farmers', Greenback, and Popu-
list movements, for example, represented repeated
efforts of the democratic and enterprising citizens
of the West to assert themselves against the op-
pressive predominance of industrial wealth which
prevailed from the 1870's to the 1890's. The 1912
platform of the Progressive Party the author con-
siders to have been the culmination of the service
performed by these parties in the conversion of
American politics from almost exclusive concern
with constitutional and governmental matters to
recognition of the vital needs of the people.
6428. Howe, Frederic C. The confessions of a
reformer. New York, Scribner, 1925. 352 p.
25-23619 H59.H6A3
At the outset of his autobiography, Frederic
Clemson Howe (1867-1940) remarks that his life
really began not in the 1860's but in the early 1890's
at Johns Hopkins University where he came under
the influence of Richard T. Ely, Woodrow Wilson,
Albert Shaw, and James Bryce, and acquired a
pressing sense of responsibility to the world as well
as the ideal of the scholar in politics. He writes
candidly of these and many other personages,
among them Tom L. Johnson — with whom he was
I060 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
associated in a ten-year (1901-10) struggle to make
Cleveland a free, orderly, and beautiful city — Mark
Hanna, Lincoln Steffens, Brand Whidock, Max
Eastman, and Inez Milholland. He tells of his
disillusioning experiences on the Cleveland city
council, 1901-03, and in the Ohio State Senate,
1906-09, and of his humanitarian efforts as director
of the People's Institute, New York, 1911-14, and
as United States Commissioner of Immigration at
the port of New York, 19 14-19. Freely he offers
opinions, and indicates the processes whereby he
reached them, upon such matters as political sov-
ereignty, the single tax, the tariff, land speculation,
special privileges, women's suffrage, World War I,
and the League of Nations. Perhaps the most re-
warding chapters are the several devoted to Tom
Johnson and Woodrow Wilson.
6429. Johnson, Tom L. My story. Edited by
Elizabeth J. Hauser. New York, B. W.
Huebsch, 191 1. xli, 326 p. illus.
1 1-35975 F496.J69
The posthumously published memoir of Tom
Loftin Johnson (1854-1911), who was an office
boy in 1869, a successful industrialist by 1879, and
a convert to the teachings of Henry George by 1883.
Although Mr. Johnson writes very candidly and
fully of his original determination to make money,
he devotes most of his book to a history of his poli-
tical career which began in 1888 with his unsuccess-
ful Democratic candidacy for Congress, continued
with his election as Representative from Ohio in
1890 and 1892, and reached its climax with his
election as mayor of Cleveland in 190 1 and his
re-election for three successive terms. His chroni-
cle of his years as a fighting reform mayor forms
the heart of this volume. The reader is told of
Johnson's famous tent-meeting campaigns, of his
battle for home rule, for a three-cent street railway
fare, and for just taxation, and of his continuous
education of the electorate concerning local political
questions and the rights of the people as opposed
to the special privileges of corporations. Johnson
expresses his conviction that involuntary poverty is
the result of law-made privilege whereby some men
get more than they earn while most earn more than
they get. Finally, he shows how he fought to end
such privilege; in doing so he not only transformed
the city but also, although he does not say so, be-
came the outstanding municipal administrator of
his time.
6430. Regier, Cornelius C. The era of the muck-
rakers. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1932. 254 p. illus.
32-30647 E741.R34
Thesis (Ph. D.) — University of Iowa, 1922.
Bibliography: p. [2 17] -241.
An analysis of the crusade against corruption in
American politics that was initiated by the popular
magazines during the first decade of the 20th cen-
tury, and that got its name from Theodore Roose-
velt talking like a party stalwart. The author
places the beginning of the muckraking era at the
publication of the October 1902 issue of McClure's
Magazine, which printed an article by Claude H.
Wetmore and Lincoln Steffens, "Tweed Days in
St. Louis," and announced the serial publication
of Ida M. Tarbell's "History of the Standard Oil
Company." S. S. McClure stumbled upon his
highly successful policy of muckraking without pre-
meditation, Dr. Regier believes, but the public re-
sponse to the articles demonstrated that the Ameri-
can people were less indifferent to the illegalities
and abuses attendant upon the industrialization of
the country and upon government favors to busi-
ness than had been supposed. After 1902, he notes,
McClure's Magazine took first rank among the
journals of exposure and reform. In 1903 muck-
raking became aggressive; by 1904 it had become
sensational, and continued profitable and popular
for nearly a decade. Among the matters investi-
gated by the muckraking journalists were munici-
pal, State, and national corruptions and the great
corporations behind them, conservation, and labor
problems. The author attaches a good deal of
credit to the efforts of the muckrakers for the re-
form legislation of the years 1904-15.
6431. Schlesinger, Arthur M. The American as
reformer. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1950. 127 p. ([John Randolph Haynes and
Dora Haynes Foundation, Los Angeles. Contem-
porary American problems, 1950])
50-14677 HN57.S35
Three lectures delivered at Pomona College, in
which Professor Schlesinger seeks to interpret one
aspect of the American spirit. The United States
has stood in the forefront of such social innovations
as manhood suffrage, freedom of the press, the
separation of church and state, public education, and
prison reform, he believes, because of two condi-
tions: the lack of tradition to be torn down, and
the nature of the original setders and their suc-
cessors, rebels against privilege and oppression in
their homelands, who carried their rebellion to the
point of departure for a strange and distant land.
Such folk quickened the tempo of change and re-
form in America, the author contends, but because
they wished to protect their new liberties, includ-
ing those of speech and print, they quickly de-
veloped "a middle-class attitude toward reform,"
and threw their weight on the side of the pragmatic
approach and piecemeal progress. This attitude
has continued to dominate the American mind. In
his opinion, the reform impulse itself has been sus-
stained and refreshed by two basic sets of ideals, the
one stemming from the Christian religion, the other
from the Declaration of Independence.
6432. Steffens, Joseph Lincoln. The autobiogra-
phy of Lincoln Steffens. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1931. 884 p. illus.
31-28251 PN4874.S68A3 193^
The vivid and candid life story of Lincoln Stef-
fens (1866-1936), eminent journalist, first and fore-
most of the muckrakers, student of ethics and
politics. The author tells most engagingly of his
boyhood when he enjoyed open country in Cal-
ifornia, his horses, dogs, and the sort of people who
could share a child's dream world; this part of
the book has been separately published. Steffens
describes in generous detail his reportorial methods
and his unorthodox principles of journalism. He
provides vignettes of such notable or notorious
figures as Richard Croker, the Tammany boss; Ray
Stannard Baker and S. S. McClure, journalists;
Joseph W. Folk, Seth Low, Robert M. La Follette,
and other reformers; Theodore Roosevelt; and
Woodrow Wilson. The core of the book, however,
is its account of Steffens' discovery of the systematic
corruption of city and state governments, through
bribery of officials by certain businessmen, and of
his conviction that bribery is not a mere felony but
a treasonable and revolutionary process which trans-
forms the ostensibly democratic representative gov-
ernment of State and city into a plutocratic system
that serves only the seekers of privilege. "You
cannot build or operate a railroad," says Mr. Stef-
fens, "or a street railway, gas, water, or power
company, develop and operate a mine, or get forests
and cut timber on a large scale, or run any privi-
leged business, without corrupting or joining in the
corruption of the government." This theme was
more fully developed in his once famous book,
The Shame of the Cities (New York, P. Smith,
1948 [°i904] 306 p.), first published as a series of
articles in McClure s Magazine. A number of the
author's conclusions, particularly those upon in-
ternational affairs and world problems, have little
cogency for today.
6433. Thomas, Norman M. A socialist's faith.
New York, Norton, 195 1. 326 p.
51-9725 HX86.T377
A re-examination of the nature and status of
socialism, as well as an analysis of recent world
affairs, by the longtime leader of the American
Socialist Party, who still found in 1951 "abundant
POLITICS, PARTIES, ELECTIONS / Io6l
reason for faith in democratic socialism as the best
basis for ordering the good society." "Fortunately
for me," writes Mr. Thomas, "socialism and Marx-
ism are not identical." In a very fair survey and
analysis he discusses, among other matters, the
course pursued and the program evolved by social-
ism since 1900, the function of religion in the social
order, the development of the state and statism, the
rise of equalitarianism, the problems of democracy,
the chances for peace, and his own attitude toward
the wars of his active lifetime. He seeks, "on the
basis of simple affirmations of fraternity," to unite
the social behavior of men of varying beliefs
through the common denominator of a conviction
that by cooperation they can win plenty, peace, and
freedom. Democratic socialism, the author has
come to believe, cannot today present itself as a
complete, universal philosophy; rather it must be
experimental; it must find a way to transform con-
flict and mass destruction into fellowship and the
destruction of poverty.
6434. Whitlock, Brand. Forty years of it. New
York, Appleton, 1914. 373 p.
14-4523 HN57.W5
The warmly written and anecdotal autobiography
of Brand Whitlock (1869-1934), who was elected
reform mayor of Toledo in 1905, 1907, 1909, and
191 1, is also a history of democracy's progress in
the Middle West during the period 1879-1914. Mr.
Whidock's thesis was that the city has, in all ages,
been the outpost of civilization, and that if the
problem of democracy is to be solved at all, it must
first be solved there. Finding in the city only one
issue, the conflict between the democratic and the
plutocratic spirit, he thought that the people had
lost their voice in their own affairs. Representative
government had disappeared, he believed, and had
been replaced by machine rule operating for the
benefit of public utility corporations through laws
enacted precisely in their interests by state legis-
latures. He advocated such remedial measures as
nonpartisan city elections, municipal ownership,
home rule for cities, and the initiative, referendum,
and recall. He recommended the selection of pub-
lic officers for their honesty and efficiency rather
than for their party affiliation; he urged the people
to be more active in selecting their officials and in
preventing mere office-seekers from bringing about
their own nominations. Finally, he stressed the
need for regulation and control of public service
corporations. When this book was published,
Whidock had already begun his distinguished serv-
ice as our envoy to Belgium (1913-22).
XXXII
Books and Libraries
ji
A. Printing and Publishing: General 6435-6448
B. Individual Publishers 6449-6453
C. Boof^Production: Technology and Art 6454-6459
D. Boo\ Selling and Collecting 6460-6465
E. Libraries 6466-6475
F. Librarianship and Library Use 6476-6487
THIS CHAPTER represents, first of all, a selection of books depicting the introduction,
production, and diffusion of books in America. Because in these matters individual
publishing firms have played a large part, some studies of prominent firms have been
included. Since technical matters have been important in bringing about the large volume
of books produced, several works on the technical aspects of production have been selected;
some reflect increasing concern to produce books of distinctive format as well as content.
Another phase of American culture centering
about the book is provided by libraries of all types:
public, private, school, college, university, regional,
private research, town, city, State, and Federal.
The existence of such a variety of institutions de-
voted to the accumulation, preservation, organiza-
tion, and mobilization of books for use in the United
States has led to the creation of a large descriptive
and expository literature. From this wealth of
material, the present chapter brings together only
a few representative books that identify some of
the many book collectors who have served to enrich
the intellectual life of the Nation, that illustrate the
social role of libraries, and that set forth the
philosophy and practice of librarianship in this coun-
try. In this field, as perhaps in most fields today,
a large part not only of recent fact and theory, but
also of history, is to be found in periodicals.
Among those published for librarians are Library
Trends, College and Research Libraries, Library
Journal, Special Libraries, and The Library
Quarterly. While these are professional and techni-
cal journals not addressed to the layman, they
nevertheless provide the serious student with in-
formation not otherwise obtainable. For the
humanistic and literary interests in which many
1062
great libraries abound, the reader is referred to
proceedings of societies, such as The Papers of the
Bibliographical Society of America, and the publica-
tions of libraries rich in rare books, of which the
Henry E. Huntington Library, and the libraries of
Harvard, Princeton, and Yale Universities are ex-
amples. A dominant note of all the stories of books
and book-collecting is the Horatio Alger-like rise
from poverty to riches, as America moved from its
colonial situation, when books were a highly prized
rarity, to its present-day position. Books now
abound, the country boasts a number of the most
distinguished libraries in the world, and the rise
of the paperback book has meant not only wide
distribution of many titles to a mass audience but
also that books are no longer luxury items but are
well within the purchasing power of the great
majority of citizens.
Other chapters of this bibliography are, of course,
closely related to subjects of the present one. The
influence of the ideas presented by the books, and
often giving the books their excuse for being, may
be traced through Chapter XI, Intellectual History.
The closely allied fields of newspapers and maga-
zines are discussed in Chapter V, Periodicals and
Journalism. Other pertinent works, including
histories and discussions of various categories of
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES
I063
books, may be found in Chapter III, Literary
History and Criticism.
A. Printing and Publishing: General
6435. Bovvker lectures on book publishing. [Col-
lected ed.] New York, Bowker, 1957.
389 p. 57-13988 Z278.B78 _ 1957
The Bowker lectures commemorate Richard
Rogers Bowker (1 848-1933). This brings together
the first 17, delivered between 1935 and 1956. The
sponsors of the lectures wished them to be "an aid
and stimulus to the study of book publishing in the
United States and the mutual problems of authors,
publishers, librarians, readers, all makers and users
of books." The lectures cover such topics as text-
books, subscription books, the economics of author-
ship, mapmaking, children's books, book clubs,
copyright, and paperbound books. Upon their de-
livery the lectures were published by the New York
Public Library in its Bulletin and as separates; some
have also appeared in whole or part in other period-
icals; and the first 12 have been reprinted by the
Typophiles in their Chapbooks series. Brought to-
gether here, the lectures are made available to the
general public, and constitute a valuable survey of
many of the problems and methods affecting the
writing, producing, and distributing of books in
America today.
6436. Boynton, Henry Walcott. Annals of Ameri-
can bookselling, 1 638-1 850. New York,
Wiley, 1932. 209 p. illus. 32-34820 Z473.B79
"Source books": p. 196-198.
This book opens with a brief sketch of the English
background of book writing, publishing, and dis-
tribution. It goes on to show parallels in the
American scene, and to trace the developing book-
selling system of America, first in Boston, and later
in Philadelphia, New York, and other centers.
Since bookselling was seldom an independent voca-
tion before 1850, the author of necessity devotes
much space to the printing and publishing of the
period. The book is written for the general reader,
and therefore has limited scholarly apparatus or de-
tail, and does not present the results of original re-
search. However, in brief compass it does present a
fairly clear picture of the bookselling business as it
developed in the thirteen colonies and the new re-
public. Bookselling developed first and most ex-
tensively in the Boston area, where it long remained
largely on a printer-publisher-bookseller basis. This
development is studied at length in George E. Little-
field's Early Boston Booksellers, 1642-iju (Boston,
Club of Odd Volumes, 1900. 256 p.), which
gives a separate chapter to each individual included.
6437. Grannis, Chandler B., ed. What happens
in book publishing. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1957. 414 p.
56-12739 Z471.G7
6438. Schick, Frank L., ed. Trends in American
book publishing. [Urbana, University of
Illinois Library School] 1958. 233 p. (Library
trends, v. 7, July 1958)
54-62638 Z671.L6173, v. 7
Mr. Grannis' preface states that this book "is in-
tended to give ... a broad picture of what happens
in publishing a book, particularly a book for trade
(general retail) sale .... It is an outline of the
procedures, a broad sketch to provide a context
for the details; it is not a 'how-to' book." Part 1 de-
scribes the structure of the publishing industry.
Part 2, "Steps in Trade Book Publishing," contains
nine chapters which progress from securing and
editing a manuscript, through manufacture, to ad-
vertising and selling the book. Part 3, "Some
Underlying Problems," has four chapters on such
topics as subsidiary rights, the business and legal
aspects of publishing, and the foreign distribution of
American books. Part 4 is made up of seven
chapters on "Other Areas of Publishing"; they cover
such aspects of nongeneral trade publishing as juve-
niles, textbooks, religious books, university press
books, paperbacks, and book clubs. The volume
concludes with an appendix, "Some Statistics Fre-
quendy Quoted," and an index. Each chapter of
the book is by some individual with considerable
experience in the field he discusses. There are
brief lists for additional reading at the end of each
chapter. Mr. Schick's symposium, which fills an
issue of Library Trends, consists of 20 papers in ad-
dition to his introduction. Only two of them are
concerned with generalities — the economic develop-
ment of publishing and the physical development of
bookmaking in the last decade — and trade-book
publishing is disposed of in a 9-page statement by
Mr. Grannis. Mr. Schick's main object is to "probe
into the complexities of the heterogeneous topic of
American book publishing," and the issue is partic-
1064 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ularly valuable for its papers on a variety of special-
ties concerning which information is not easily
found elsewhere. Besides treatments of most of
the specialties dealt with in Mr. Grannis' volume,
there are papers on private presses and collectors'
editions; vanity press (its houses now refer to them-
selves as "subsidy" or "cooperative" publishers),
foundation, and association publishing; and the pub-
lishing of hardcover reprints, reference and subscrip-
tion books, art and architecture books, music books,
law books, and medical books.
6439. Kerr, Chester. A report on American uni-
versity presses. [Washington] Association
of American University Presses, 1949. 302 p.
49-4375 Z231.5.U6K4
"Based on a survey sponsored by the American
Council of Learned Societies with a grant from the
Rockefeller Foundation."
Bibliography: p. 297-302.
American university presses, generally speaking,
had a slow start in the 19th century. In recent
years they have developed rapidly, and they now
hold an important position in American publishing.
While some of this progress has occurred since Mr.
Kerr's report was prepared, his study does show the
emergence of the presses into public prominence.
It is limited to the one Canadian and 34 American
presses which at that time were members of the
Association of American University Presses. The
survey presents in some detail the organization,
operational procedures, general policies, staffing,
distribution, financing, selection policies, edition
sizes, and other aspects of this branch of American
publishing.
6440. Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut. The book in
America; a history of the making and selling
of books in the United States, by Hellmut Lehmann-
Haupt in collaboration with Lawrence C. Wroth
and Rollo G. Silver. 2d [rev. and enl. American]
ed. New York, Bowker, 1951. xiv, 493 p.
51-11308 Z473.L522 1951
Contents. — Book production and distribution
from the beginning to the American Revolution,
by L. C. Wroth. — Book production and distribution
from the American Revolution to the War between
the States, by L. C. Wroth and R. G. Silver. — Book
production and distribution from i860 to the present
day, by H. Lehmann-Haupt. — Bibliography (p.
422-466).
This historical study of book production and com-
mercial distribution in America first appeared as
Das Ameri\anische Buchwesen, Buchdruc\ und
Buchhandel, Bibliophile und Bibliothehjwesen in
den Vereinigten Staaten von den Anjdngen bis zur
Gegenwart (Leipzig, Hiersemann, 1937. 385 p.).
The subsequent revised and enlarged edition ap-
peared in English as The Boo\ in America; a
History of the Maying, the Selling, and the Col-
lecting of Boo\s in the United States (New York,
Bowker, 1939. 453 p.). Both of these editions
contained a section by Ruth Granniss on book col-
lecting and the development of public libraries in
the United States; unfortunately, the increased size
of the 195 1 edition required the omission of this
material. The work as it presently stands is a
comprehensive, concise survey of the field of book
production and distribution. The authors trace the
spread of printing, technological innovations, style
changes, and other technical matters, and discuss
the nature and range of the books published. Sub-
sidiary problems such as book clubs, copyright, and
private press work are also gone into. The ex-
tensive, though now slighdy dated, bibliography is
divided into subject categories.
6441. Miller, William. The book industry, a re-
port of the Public Library Inquiry. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1949. xvi, 156 p.
49-10422 Z471.M65 1949
"A note on method and sources": p. [i33]-i40.
Mr. Miller's work concentrates on "trade" books,
new books published for general sale through retail
bookstores. It does not extensively investigate re-
prints, book club editions, textbooks, university press
books, government publications, or other nontrade
publications. However, these aspects are touched
upon at various points in the book, usually in their
effect upon trade books. After a general survey of
trade publishing, Mr. Miller devotes a chapter to
the effect of various factors (popular taste, movies,
book clubs, etc.) on the editorial decisions of pub-
lishers. Chapter 3 is on the nontechnical aspects
of book manufacture and the costs incurred by the
publication of a work. Chapter 4 surveys "The
Book Markets"; in its course attention is directed
to the effects of book clubs and advertising on the
general markets book sales. The concluding
chapter discusses the relationship between "Trade
Publishing and the Public Libraries," concluding
that libraries have but small effect on the publishers,
though the latter are of major influence on the li-
braries. An appendix presents in tabular form
"Some Book Industry Statistics." An earlier and
more extensive study in the same field is Orion
H. Cheney's Economic Survey of the Boo\ Industry,
1930-1931, as Prepared for the National Association
of Boo\ Publishers, with 194J-10.48 Statistical Re-
port [of the American Boo\ Publishers Council]
(New York, Bowker, 1949. c 1931. 368 p.). The
1947-48 report is little more than a brief statistical
survey, and the volume is now of largely historical
interest. Neither Cheney nor Miller covers the
publishing "revolution" effected by paperbacks dur-
ing the past decade.
6442. Oswald, John Clyde. Printing in the
Americas. New York, Gregg Pub. Co.,
1937. xii, 565, xvii-xli p. illus.
37-15130 Z205.O86
This history of printing in the Americas supple-
ments but does not quite supplant Thomas' History
of Printing in America (no. 6447). It opens with
descriptions of the kinds of literature most com-
monly or strikingly produced by the printers of the
Thirteen Colonies: newspapers (the product of
nearly every pioneer printshop), Bibles (Eliot's
Indian Bible of 1663 and Sower's German Bible of
1743 preceded Aitken's English Bible of 1782), al-
manacs, pamphlet sermons, broadside ballads, etc.
After describing the equipment of colonial print-
shops the author embarks upon a chronologico-
geographical survey in the manner of Thomas.
Each colony or State is introduced according to the
priority of its printing, and for some of the older
States there are chapters on individual printers, such
as Matthew Day, the teen-ager who inaugurated
American printing at Cambridge, Mass., in 1638,
or on printing families, such as the Greens, the
Franklins, and the Sowers. After concluding with
Wyoming (1867), Alaska, and Hawaii, the author
devotes four topical chapters to "Fine Bookmaking,"
"Typography," "Machines and Methods," and
"Printing Organizations." He then gives brief sur-
veys of printing origins and history for the provinces
of British North America, for Greenland, for the
West Indies, and for the nations of Latin America.
The book lacks a bibliography, but it has a 25-
page index and numerous facsimiles (some in
black and red) of early imprints.
6443. Rosenberg, Bernard, and David Manning
White, eds. Mass culture; the popular arts
in America. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1957. 561 p.
57-6749 E169.1.R7755
As its title indicates, this "reader" is by no means
concerned exclusively with books; however, it does
devote considerable space to popular books (paper-
backs, bestsellers, commercial fiction, etc.) and allied
fields such as magazines and comic books, as well
as the more distandy allied "literature" of radio,
television, motion pictures, popular songs, and ad-
vertising. The 49 essays presented attempt to probe
the relationships between cultural works produced
for mass consumption, and the society that consumes
them. An attempt also has been made to achieve
a balance in the distribution of the contributors be-
tween those who look with favor upon the
phenomenon covered, and those who view it with
alarm. A few of the essays are here published for
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / 1065
the first time; others are extracted from books; but
the greater number are reprinted from learned jour-
nals or reviews. "Further Reading" is suggested
at the end of each of the book's sections. Popular
books are also covered at some length in other titles
elsewhere in this bibliography, most notably under
Literary History and Criticism; other aspects of
mass culture are treated in other sections: Period-
icals and Journalism, Music, Sports and Recreation,
Entertainment, etc.
6444. Schick, Frank L. The paperbound book in
America; the history of paperbacks and their
European background. New York, Bowker, 1958.
xviii, 262 p. illus. 58-10097 Z1033.P3S35
While this book devotes several chapters to the
development of paperbound book publishing, it is
mainly concerned with the mass market aspects
that emerged with the appearance of Pocket Books
in 1939 and have now revolutionized American pub-
lishing. The author traces the development of this
mass market, the formats used, prices, distribution
systems, and quantities. Little or no attention is
given to literary evaluation. Individual sections
sketch the history and present status of many of
the leading present-day paperback publishers. The
selective bibliography (p. 245-250) directs the
reader to many other studies and articles on the
subject.
6445. Sheehan, Donald H. This was publishing;
a chronicle of the book trade in the Gilded
Age. Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1952.
288 p. 52-14582 Z473.S47
In this study of the book industry from the end of
the Civil War to the outbreak of World War I the
author draws much of his information from the
private records of Henry Holt and Co., Harper and
Brothers, Dodd, Mead and Co., and Charles Scrib-
ners' Sons, as well as from the chronicling of the
trade in Publishers' Weekly. Although the em-
phasis on four firms, because their records were the
ones available, does place some limits on the study,
the fact that these four were leaders in the field
makes them reasonably representative of the whole.
In this period the book industry grew, through
many uncertainties and constantly recurring crises,
into the giant of the present, evolving special meth-
ods which have continued in use. These the author
traces in their manifold aspects of publishing pol-
icies, author-publisher relationships, contractual re-
lationships, wholesaling, copyright problems, trade
regulation, advertising, etc. The book is written
in a lively manner for the layman, yet it includes
a fairly extensive index and a bibliography (p.
273-278)-
1066 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
6446. Stern, Madeleine B. Imprints on history,
book publishers and American frontiers.
Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1956.
492 p. 56-11995 Z473.S857
This book presents for the general reader a large
part of the story of printing and publishing in 19th-
century America regarded as an expansion into
frontiers of space and frontiers of the mind. The
approach is biographical, with each chapter present-
ing the story of an individual who pioneered in
some aspect of this field. Typical figures studied in-
clude James Bemis, who brought printing to the
frontier communities of upstate New York; William
Hilliard, printer and bookseller, who supplied many
of the needs of Harvard University, assembled the
core collection of the newly established University
of Virginia, and otherwise "helped to expand the
awakening intellectual forces of the East"; Robert
Fergus, pioneer printer of mushrooming Chicago;
Jacob W. Cruger of Houston, Texas; Ernst Steiger,
German-American publisher of New York City
who played a significant role in the Americanization
of the German immigrants; and John W. Lovell,
who published outspoken works on social problems
and did much to advance labor and woman's rights.
The book concludes with a long supplement (p.
329-338), arranged alphabetically, of short notes on
the 191 publishing firms which were founded before
1900 and are still operating; it concludes with a
chronological list, 1 769-1 899. The biographical
sketches obviously do not cover more than a frac-
tion of the field; nevertheless they give representa-
tive specimens of the kinds of innovation and
change in printing and publishing that were going
on throughout the century. Though not scholarly
in tone, the book is thoroughly researched, with ex-
tensive notes (p. 389-464) indicating the sources,
and an index.
6447. Thomas, Isaiah. The history of printing
in America, with a biography of printers, and
an account of newspapers. 2d ed. Published
under the supervision of a special committee of
the American Antiquarian Society. Albany, N.Y.,
Munsell, 1874. 2 v. (Archaeologia americana.
Transactions and collections of the American Anti-
quarian Society, v. 5-6) 2-6034 Z208.E451
Committee of publication: Samuel F. Haven,
Nathaniel Paine, and Joel Munsell.
Contents. — 1. Preface. Memoir of Isaiah
Thomas by his grandson Benjamin Franklin
Thomas. History of printing in America. Ap-
pendix A: History of printing in [Spanish] Amer-
ica. Communicated by John R. Bartlett [with lists
of books printed in Mexico and Peru before 1600]. —
2. History of printing (cont.): History of news-
papers. Booksellers in the Colonies, from the first
settlement of the country to the commencement of
the Revolutionary War, in 1775. Catalogue of
publications in what is now the United States, prior
to the Revolution of 1775-6 [compiled by Samuel
F. Haven, Jr.]. Index.
Isaiah Thomas (1 749-1 831) first published this
work himself in two volumes in 18 10. He made
numerous manuscript notes for corrections and ad-
ditions; these were incorporated in the second edi-
tion, but his lengthy survey of the origin of print-
ing in Europe was omitted. Despite its age, this
history remains a standard survey of colonial
American printing. Some additional notes to the
text were supplied by the editors, and bear their
initials. In the later years covered by the book,
Isaiah Thomas himself was a leading figure. He
was probably the foremost American printer and
publisher of his day, and he issued more tides than
any of his contemporaries or predecessors. His in-
teresting career is studied in Annie Russell Marble's
From 'Prentice to Patron (New York, Appleton-
Century, 1935. 326 p.). A shorter study, Clifford
Kenyon Shipton's Isaiah Thomas, Printer, Patriot,
and Philanthropist, iy 49-18 31 (Rochester, N.Y.,
Leo Hart, 1948. 94 p.), is aimed at a more special-
ized audience of bibliophiles and typophiles, and in-
cludes more information on Thomas' activities in
founding and promoting the American Antiquarian
Society (1812). In our own day Clarence S.
Brigham (b. 1877) has remade the Society's library
at Worcester, Mass., into the greatest collection in the
world of early American imprints of every descrip-
tion. His modest account of this achievement, in-
cluding concise characterizations of the collections
and their importance, is Fifty Years of Collecting
Americana for the Library of the American Anti-
quarian Society, 1908-1958 (Worcester, Mass., 1958.
185 p.).
6448. Wroth, Lawrence C. The colonial printer.
[2d ed., rev. & enl.] Portland, Me., South-
worth-Anthoensen Press, 1938. xxiv, 368 p. illus.
38-14676 Z208.W95 1938
"Works referred to in notes": p. [33i]~347.
This book is a study not primarily of the books
and other printed materials produced in America
during the colonial period, but rather of the practi-
cal problems involved in their production. Atten-
tion is therefore focused on such matters as the
nature of colonial presses, the typefaces used, the
nature and production methods of ink and paper,
working conditions, and bookbinding. A some-
what more bibliophilic study of the field for one
colony was produced by Dr. Wroth in his A History
of Printing in Colonial Maryland, 1686-1776
(Baltimore, Typothetae of Baltimore, 1922. 275
p.); this work was continued by Joseph Towne
Wheeler in The Maryland Press, ijjj-ijyo (Balti-
more, Maryland Historical Society, 1938. 226 p.).
A broader study is Douglas C. McMurtrie's A
History of Printing in the United States; the Story
of the Introduction of the Press and of Its History
and Influence During the Pioneer Period in Each
State of the Union, of which only the second volume,
Middle & South Atlantic States (New York,
Bowker, 1936. 462 p.), was completed at the time
of the author's death; however, publication of ad-
ditional material from his papers has been promised.
A study of an area more influential in printing
matters in its period is George E. Littlefield's The
Early Massachusetts Press, 1638-ijn (Boston, Club
of Odd Volumes, 1907. 2 v.). A largely bibli-
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / 1067
ophilic study of the first printing press in English
America is Robert F. Roden's The Cambridge Press,
1638-1692 (New York, Dodd, Mead, 1905. 193
p.), considerable of which is made up of "A Bibli-
ographical List of the Issues of the Press"; the text
traces the press' history as much in terms of publi-
cations as in terms of changing ownership, methods,
and working conditions. George Parker Winship's
The Cambridge Press, 1638-1692 (Philadelphia,
University of Pennsylvania Press, 1945. 385 p.)
does not attempt to redo the systematic part of
Roden's book, but brings a quantity of fresh 17th-
century evidence to bear upon the circumstances in
which the Bay Psalm Book, the Eliot Indian Bible,
and many other issues of this press were produced.
B. Individual Publishers
6449. Burlingame, Roger. Of making many
books; a hundred years of reading, writing
and publishing. New York, Scribner, 1946. 347 p.
46-8389 Z473.B9
This volume was prepared to mark the centenary
of Charles Scribner 's Sons, which was founded in
1846 and grew to be one of America's largest general
publishers. The book is not a formal history of
the firm, but each chapter pursues, in generally
chronological form, some aspect of the firm's history.
These are developed mainly through extensive
quotations from the communications of the pub-
lishers and their authors. This lends the book
much variety, but its anecdotal manner does not
permit the presentation of many statistics, facts of
chronology, or other details of the organization's
structural history. The book does convey an im-
pression of author-publisher relations over a cen-
tury, and of some publishing problems. The topics
treated include bestsellers, plagiarism, acceptances,
rejections, war, poetry, editing, and printing. Con-
siderable space is also devoted to the magazines
which the firm has issued. In preparing the book
Mr. Burlingame had access to Scribner 's complete
files. "Since this was to be a picture of the past,
it was agreed that the use of letters should be limited
to those of authors who were no longer living." A
few exceptions to this were made in order to com-
plete certain stories, and no such restrictions were
imposed upon the writings of the publishers and
editors. Mr. Burlingame is also the author of a
newly published history of the McGraw-Hill Book
Company entitled Endless Frontiers (New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1959. 506 p.).
6450. Harper, Joseph Henry. The house of
Harper; a century of publishing in Franklin
Square, by J. Henry Harper. New York, Harper,
1912. 689 p. illus. 12-3620 Z473.H29H 1912
The house of Harper and Brothers was founded
in 1 8 17 as a printing establishment, which over the
years was built up by the original four brothers
and their descendants into one of the major Ameri-
can publishing firms of the 19th and 20th centuries.
In this study one of the descendants presents an
anecdotal history of the varied activities of the firm,
including an extensive recounting of their ventures
in the field of periodical publishing. This long
book owes much of its length to its extensive quota-
tions from the company's correspondence files. It
affords considerable insight into the work and prin-
ciples of 19th-century publishing, especially in the
second half of the century. This is pardy because
of the author's tendency to use personal reminiscence
as framework and subject. A later volume of
reminiscences by the author, with less emphasis on
the activities of the firm, is his / Remember (New
York, Harper, 1934. 281 p.). It is written in a
more discursive manner, and is largely made up of
incidents concerning persons he had known in his
long career as a publisher. It does, however, throw
some further light upon the firm's activities, and it
does something to bring the 19 12 volume up to date.
6451. Kaser, David. Messrs. Carey & Lea of
Philadelphia; a study in the history of the
booktrade. Philadelphia, University of Pennsyl-
vania Press, 1957. 182 p.
57-1 1771 Z473.L45K3 1957
1068 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Carey & Lea was for some years probably the
largest and best-known publishing firm in America.
This history, which originated in a University of
Michigan dissertation, traces the house from its
inception in 1822 until the retirement of Henry
Carey in 1838, after which it rapidly declined. Since
the firm was in its period a trade leader, the book
offers much insight into the conditions prevalent
throughout the trade during much of the 19th
century. The first part of the book is a general
history of Carey & Lea, while the second part,
larger than the first, consists of chapters analyzing
the several types of its publications (literary, scien-
tific, reprints, American originals, etc.), with a
concluding chapter on the firm's relationship with
the rest of the trade. The present-day publishing
house descended from Carey & Lea is Lea &
Febiger, dealing predominandy in scientific and
medical works; a brief history of it and its anteced-
ents is presented in its booklet, One Hundred and
Fifty Years of Publishing, ij8 5-/ 93 5 (Philadelphia,
Lea & Febiger, 1935. 42 p.).
6452. Merritt, LeRoy Charles. The United States
Government as publisher. Chicago, Uni-
versity of Chicago Press, 1943. 179 p. inch tables,
diagrs. (The University of Chicago studies in
library science) A 43-1562 Z1223.Z7M35
Bibliography: p. 175-176.
The United States Government has often been
called the nation's leading publisher. Its annual
production includes many thousands of titles total-
ing many million of copies. The numerous books,
pamphlets, serials, and other materials reflect the
extensive and highly complex activities of the Gov-
ernment itself. They include reports on the activ-
ities of the many branches of the Government,
publications intended to facilitate administration, in-
formational works for the benefit of specialists or
the general public, etc. Mr. Merritt's study an-
alyzes these publications with respect to issuing
office, function, and subject, and discusses their dis-
tribution and general development in the 20th cen-
tury. He noted, as of 1939, that the sale of Federal
publications was increasing, and their free distribu-
tion diminishing. Some of the background of Gov-
ernment publishing may be obtained from Laurence
F. Schmeckebier's The Government Printing Of-
fice; Its History, Activities and Organization
(Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1925. 143 p.
Institute for Government Research of the Brookings
Institution. Service monographs of the United
States Government, no. 36), a study of the agency
which designs, prints, and distributes most of the
publications of the Government. While the Fed-
eral Government may be the most prolific American
publisher, much publishing is also done by State and
local governments and by the United Nations
Organization, whose headquarters is in New York
City; the scope, quantity, and general problems of
these are outlined in James L. McCamy's Govern-
ment Publications for the Citizen; a Report of the
Public Library Inquiry (New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1949. 139 p.), written with the as-
sistance of Julia B. McCamy. It is chiefly concerned
with library problems in the acquisition, cataloging,
and use of such materials. The guides to Federal
publications by Schmeckebier and Boyd are entered
in Chapter XXIX (no. 6138). William Philip
Leidy's A Popular Guide to Government Publica-
tions (New York, Columbia University Press, 1953.
xxii, 296 p.) lists, with brief annotations in most
cases, some 2,500 items selected for their potential
interest to the average citizen, and classified under
nearly a hundred headings from "Agriculture" to
"World War II."
6453. Wiley (John) and Sons, inc. The first one
hundred and fifty years; a history of John
Wiley and Sons, incorporated, 1 807-1 957. New
York, 1957. 242 p. illus. 57-7626 Z473.W63
This publishing house goes back to 1807, when
Charles Wiley opened in New York a printing shop
and bookstore, two things which usually went to-
gether at that time. The firm published many
distinguished literary works in its early decades.
By the latter part of the 19th century it had given
up general publishing for specialization in scientific
and technical books. This later period receives the
greatest attention here, partly because of its im-
portance, but also because few of the old records
have been preserved. The result is that after three
opening chapters on the early period and the firm's
literary books, there follow 25 chapters on its scien-
tific and technical publications. Each of these
chapters is devoted to books in a particular category,
such as agriculture, metallurgy, geography, statis-
tics, civil engineering, industrial engineering, archi-
tecture, chemical engineering, and psychology. In
each some of the more important works are men-
tioned and related to both the development of the
firm and of knowledge in the field. The treatment
also gives some idea of the general development of
scientific and technical publishing in America. A
book of related interest is Edward M. Crane's A
Century ofBoo\ Publishing, 1848-1948 (New York,
Van Nostrand, 1948. 73 p.). It traces the history
of the D. Van Nostrand Company, another leading
publisher of scientific works, which in its early days
also cultivated naval and military history. Mr.
Crane's arrangement is mainly chronological, em-
phasizing the development of the company rather
than the subject matter of books published.
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / I069
C. Book Production: Technology and Art
6454. Asheim, Lester, ed. The future of the
book; implications of the newer develop-
ments in communication. Chicago, University of
Chicago, Graduate Library School, 1955. 105 p.
(Papers presented before the Twentieth Annual
Conference of the Graduate Library School of the
University of Chicago, June 20-24, T955)
56-582 Z674.C4 20th
"Published originally in the Library quarterly,
October 1955."
Society has traditionally relied primarily upon
books for the transmission of knowledge and cul-
ture. This has been challenged in modern times
by the advent of mass communications (radio, tele-
vision, etc.), nonprinted records (microfilms, mo-
tion pictures, phonorecords, etc.), and other tech-
nological innovations. At the same time the flood
of materials has been such as to lead to the devising
of mechanical controls through codification (via
"mechanical brains," etc.), and large-scale problems
in the storage as well as use of such materials.
Further, some have feared that the demise of the
book is imminent as a result both of the ascendancy
of audiovisual mass media and of increasing costs
of book production, rendering difficult the distribu-
tion in printed form of all but such works as have a
presumable mass market. These problems are dis-
cussed in this symposium, which probably reveals
less about the future of the book than about present-
day trends and the problems and potentialities be-
fore us in the field of books and other records
of man's experience.
6455. Baker, Elizabeth (Faulkner). Printers and
technology; a history of the International
Printing Pressmen and Assistants' Union. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1957. 545 p.
57-11448 Z120.B16
Bibliography: p. [523J-528.
A history of the union from its founding in 1889
through the activities of 1956; it is international in
name, but most of its locals are in the United States.
Such problems as technological changes over the
years are treated from the point of view not of their
effect on the design and distribution of printed
matter, but of their effect on employment, pay, job
skills, and like matters. In her introduction Mrs.
Baker writes: "This book is more than a case study
of the International Printing Pressmen and Assist-
ants' Union, however, although it presents many
expressed feelings of members and their leaders in
an attempt to reveal the motives which led to their
official action. In the process of tracing the course
of policies and acts, we follow two closely allied
issues: effect of technology upon printing and print-
ing trades unionism, and the changing role of fore-
men and of union-management relations." A so-
ciological study of the structure and leadership of
another union in the printers' trade is Union De-
mocracy; the Internal Politics of the International
Typographical Union (Glencoe, 111., Free Press,
1956. xxviii, 455 p.), by Seymour Martin Lipset,
Martin A. Trow, and James S. Coleman.
6456. Gress, Edmund G. Fashions in American
typography, 1780 to 1930, with brief illus-
trated stories of the life and environment of the
American people in seven periods, and demonstra-
tions of E. G. G.'s fresh note American period
typography. New York, Harper, 1931. xxviii,
201 p. 3I~3453I Z250.G83
Much of this book is devoted to the author's own
ideas of how the types of seven periods of American
history could be modernized (or "fresh noted") so
as to be useful in modern press work designed to
reflect a given period. The book mainly discusses
the leading American type designs of the past. Most
of its space is occupied by illustrations and facsimile
reproductions, making clear the changes in typo-
graphical styles since the Republic was founded. As
part of his attempt to convey the atmosphere of suc-
cessive periods, the author has included a number
of pictures illustrating the life of each period, and
has briefly mentioned them in the text. An impor-
tant book for modern type design is A Half-Century
of Type Design and Typography, 1895-1945 (New
York, The Typophiles, 1946. 2 v.), a major work
by one of this country's leading type designers,
Frederic William Goudy (1865-1947).
6457. Hunter, Dard. Papermaking in pioneer
America. Philadelphia, University of Penn-
sylvania Press, 1952. xiv, 178 p. illus.
52-12473 TS1095.U6H8 1952
6458. Weeks, Lyman Horace. A history of paper-
manufacturing in the United States, 1690-
1916. New York, Lockwood Trade Journal Co.,
1916. xv, 352 p. illus. 17-12277 TS1095.U6W4
Mr. Dard Hunter (b. 1883) of Chillicothe, Ohio,
has had his own private press since 19 15 and has
made his own paper by hand since 1929; as early as
1070
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
1915 and 1917 he produced what are thought to be
the first books in the history of printing in which
every element was the handiwork of a single man!
Incidentally to the practice of his crafts he has be-
come a world authority on the history and tech-
niques of papermaking, and has established the Dard
Hunter Paper Museum at the Massachusetts Institute
of Technology. Papermaking in Pioneer America,
printed on paper made by hand especially for the
purpose at his small Connecticut mill, is based on
lectures he delivered in 1948 when appointed to
the University of Pennsylvania Rosenbach Fellow-
ship in Bibliography. The art of papermaking, in-
vented in China in 105 A. D., reached America in
1575, at Culhuacan, Mexico, and the Thirteen
Colonies about 1690, when William Rittenhouse
(born Rittinghuysen) and his son Nicholas set up
a small water-powered papermill at Roxborough,
near Germantown, Pennsylvania. Mr. Hunter
describes "The Equipment and the Operation of the
Early Mills," and then traces the pioneer mill of each
colony and State from New Jersey (1726) to Ten-
nessee (181 1 ). A final chapter describes the career
of Nathan Sellers (1751-1830), whose skill at wire-
work enabled him to become the first American
maker of paper moulds on a commercial scale,
supplying hundreds of American papermakers.
There is also much of American interest in Mr.
Hunter's magisterial Papermaking; the History and
Technique of an Ancient Craft, 2d ed. rev. and enl.
(New York, Knopf, 1947. xxiv, 611, xxxvii p.),
which, with its 317 illustrations, describes materials,
processes, and machines in every land from the most
primitive to the most technologically advanced, and
pays special attention to watermarks. Weeks' His-
tory contains much information for the earlier
period that is not in Mr. Hunter's specialized lec-
tures, and then describes a further hundred years of
a constantly expanding industry, transformed in
18 1 7 by Thomas Gilpin, who introduced in his mill
near Wilmington, Del., a power-driven "revolving
cylinder making paper continuous and endless in
length instead of in single sheets." Chapter 11 de-
scribes the search for new and cheaper raw mate-
rials, a great economic success gained at the expense
of the quality and the permanence of the product.
Present-day methods of mass production are suc-
cincdy described for the layman in Edwin Suter-
meister's The Story of Papermaking (Boston, S. D.
Warren Co., 1954. 209 p.).
6459. Winship, George Parker. Daniel Berkeley
Updike and the Merrymount Press of
Boston, Massachusetts, i860, 1894, 1941. Rochester,
N.Y., Leo Hart, 1947. 141 p. facsims. (The
Printers' Valhalla) 48-1487 Z232.M57W5
Updike (1860-1941) has been regarded by many
as the greatest craftsman of fine printing that
America has produced. In 1893 he set up his own
business, the Merrymount Press, at Boston. His
early work was florid in the manner of William
Morris, the English prime mover of the "printing
renaissance." Updike, however, soon moved to a
greater simplicity and originality of book design.
Throughout his career he endeavored to match the
world's best printing designs with the particular
work to be printed, so as to produce a work of clar-
ity and beauty. He designed some books for other
large presses, but most of his work was in the field
of limited editions of works of limited interest. His
work had a wide influence on the work of others,
and was in itself a major factor in the modern inter-
est in the typographical design of trade books.
Winship 's book traces Updike's career but gives
most of its space to discussing and illustrating the
work of the Merrymount Press. Updike himself
wrote about his press and its aims in his Notes on
the Merrymount Press &■ Its Wor\ (Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1934. 279 p.), most of
which (p. 59-268) consists of a bibliography of the
productions of the press. Updike: American Printer
and His Merrymount Press (New York, American
Institute of Graphic Arts, 1947. 156, [44] p.) is
a group of nine essays issued in memory of Updike,
whose own "Notes on the Press and Its Work," is
reprinted at the beginning of the volume. Updike
published three papers on fine typography as In the
Day's Wor\ (Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1924. 69 p.). His major work was Printing Types;
Their History, Forms, and Use; a Study in Sur-
vivals, 2d ed. (Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1937. 2 v.), which discussed and illustrated
at length the major typographical advances of the
Western world; while its main use is as a history of
typography in the West, it also reveals Updike's
own views on type design and printing.
D. Book Selling and Collecting
6460. Adams, Randolph G. Three Americanists:
Henry Harrisse, bibliographer; George Brin-
ley, book collector; Thomas Jefferson, librarian.
Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press,
1939. 101 p. 39-6767 Z1206.A2A2
Three essays which originated as lectures at the
University of Pennsylvania in 1938. Here they ap-
pear with footnotes and an index. The first is on
Henry Harrisse (1829-1910), a Franco-American
bibliographer who specialized in the earliest Ameri-
cana. Probably his best-known work is the Biblio-
theca Americana Vetustissima (New York, G. P.
Philes, 1866. 519 p.) and its supplementary volume
subtitled Additions (Paris, Tross, 1872. 199 p.),
the two combined being "A Description of Works
Relating to America, Published between the Years
1492 and 1 55 1," as the first volume was subtided.
Harrisse wrote other works on the period, and was
also a book collector of considerable note. The sec-
ond essay is on George Brinley (1817-1875), in the
opinion of some the foremost collector of Americana
as well as the first Americanist bibliophile of im-
portance. The third essay describes Thomas Jef-
ferson's book collecting activities. Jefferson appears
at numerous other points in this Guide; here he is
discussed in his relatively little known role as book
collector, as "father" of the Library of Congress,
whose collections were rebuilt about the nucleus of
Jefferson's library, and as a figure of the first impor-
tance in the library classification of books. Since
Jefferson probably had the foremost private library
in America in 1815, it would deserve considerable
attention even without its subsequent history. Much
about the collection itself, about Jefferson's other
books, and about book collecting in America in his
day will be found in the Catalogue of the Library
of Thomas Jefferson (Washington, Library of Con-
gress, 1952-59. 5 v.), compiled with annotations by
E. Millicent Sowerby. In the foreword to volume
1 the compiler says that she undertook a study
"which would reveal not only what volumes Mr.
Jefferson had acquired but, when possible, where
and why he had acquired them and, most important,
how he had made use of them."
6461. Cannon, Carl L. American book collectors
and collecting from Colonial times to the
present. New York, Wilson, 194 1. 391 p.
41-51592 Z987.C3
This study traces the main oudines of private
book collecting in America from colonial times to
about 1930. About half the book consists of
chapters on individual collectors, and the rest of
the chapters on the subjects and fields of collection.
However, the subject chapters are usually sub-
divided into sections on individual collectors. The
author attempts to show the motivations behind the
collecting of rare and valuable books. He also indi-
cates what later happened to each collection, and
thereby reveals the great extent to which these col-
lections became parts of larger libraries, or were
themselves established as libraries available to
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / I07I
scholars and the public. These collectors, the
author points out, have added much to America's
cultural resources.
6462. Goodspeed, Charles E. Yankee bookseller;
being the reminiscences of Charles E. Good-
speed. Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1937. 325 p.
illus. 37-28796 Z473.G57
Private book collecting on any considerable scale
necessitates access to rare and other noncurrent
books and related materials. For this purpose the
mainstay of the private collector is the rare- and
used-book dealer. One of the outstanding 20th-
century businessmen in this field was Charles Eliot
Goodspeed (1 867-1 950), who established his Boston
store in 1898. His reminiscences, which are largely
anecdotal in nature, do not present a concisely de-
tailed or chronological account of his business, but
they are almost exclusively concerned with it in one
way or another. They illustrate many features of
rare-book and used-book selling, as well as of private
book collecting, in this country during the first three
decades of this century. Goodspeed also narrates
incidents concerning the closely allied fields of print
and autograph selling, as well as forgeries of both
printed and manuscript items.
6463. Lee, Charles. The hidden public; the story
of the Book-of-the-Month Club. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1958. 236 p.
58-13908 Z549.B69L4
Book clubs sprang up in Germany immediately
after World War I; the first American one, the
Book-of-the-Month Club, was inaugurated by Harry
Scherman in April 1926, and its immense success
has led to numerous imitations. Mr. Scherman (b.
1887), founder, president, and chairman of the
board, is still the guiding spirit of the enterprise.
The essential idea is the guaranteed market pro-
vided by the members, who have contracted to take
what will be chosen for them by a panel of superior
literary intelligences, and can therefore buy for
significandy less than the established retail prices
(their benefits accrue only partially in reduced
prices, for they receive "dividend" or "bonus" books
as well). National advertising and the parcel post
take the place of the local bookstore, which has in
recent years been a declining institution. An orig-
inal BOMC membership of 4,750 grew to 889,305
in 1946, and during 1947-50 the Club paid an an-
nual dividend of over a million dollars to its share-
holders. Since 1948 the membership has remained
at approximately half a million. The Club's literary
record may be studied in Mr. Lee's "List of Selec-
tions, Dividends, and Alternates, 1926-57" (p. 161—
194). Mr. Lee has collected judgments from a num-
[072 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ber of critics, which vary over a wide range of ap-
proval or disapproval. Max Lerner makes the
shrewd comment that "the effect of the book club
on American reading taste has been to make the
almost-good much more popular than it would have
been, and every now and then to get an audience for
the really good."
6464. Lewis, Wilmarth S. Collector's progress.
New York, Knopf, 1951. 253 p. illus.
51-11290 Z989.L5
Mr. Lewis urbanely discusses the history of his
famous Horace Walpole collection. He opens with
a brief account of his early collecting efforts, rapidly
passes over his period as an amateur book collec-
tor, and then concentrates for the bulk of the volume
on his activities as one of America's foremost private
collectors, specializing in an individual whose life
and letters mirror so much of 18th-century culture.
Indirectly the book reveals much about book collect-
ing in 20th-century America, and the rare-book
dealers involved in projects such as that of Mr.
Lewis. He is also the principal editor of the multi-
volume edition of Walpole's correspondence being
published by the Yale University Press. A book
which discusses the goals, means, and problems of
book collectors is A Primer of Boo\-Collecting, rev.
and enl. ed. (New York, Greenberg, 1946. 226 p.),
by John T. Winterich in collaboration with David
A. Randall, who was mainly responsible for the
revision. Mr. Winterich is also the author of a
very pleasant survey of Early American Boofys &
Printing (Boston, Houghton Mifflin, 1935. 256 p.),
written primarily from the collector's point of view
and offering information likely to be serviceable to
him.
6465. Stevens, Henry. Recollections of James
Lenox and the formation of his library; re-
vised and elucidated by Victor Hugo Paltsits. New
York, New York Public Library, 1951. xxxvi, 187
p. illus. 51-12041 Z989.L45S8 1951
One of the prime sources of rare and expensive
books, as well as of important general and special-
ized collections, that public and college libraries rely
on because of their frequent financial constriction,
is the donation of the accumulations of private col-
lectors. The collectors thereby insure that what they
have put together with enthusiasm, skill, and loving
care will not be broken up by indifferent heirs. One
of the notable examples of a private library that be-
came a public collection, and one of the earliest, is
the Lenox Library. James Lenox (1800-1880) was
a New York bibliophile with inherited financial re-
sources to back his expensive tastes. His large
library, which had overflowed his house, was in-
corporated in 1870, and in 1895 it was merged into
the New York Public Library. The study of Lenox
by Henry Stevens (1819-1886) reveals much of
Lenox's bibliophilic activities, but it also reveals at
least as much about Stevens, an American anti-
quarian and rare-book dealer established in London,
whose major customer was Lenox. The work was
first edited into book form by the author's son,
Henry N. Stevens, and published under the same
title (London, Stevens, 1886. 211 p.). The present
edition is especially notable for the late Dr. Paltsits'
many "Elucidations" appended to each chapter.
E. Libraries
6466. Clemons, Harry. The University of Vir-
ginia Library, 1825-1950; story of a Jeffer-
sonian foundation. Foreword by Dumas Malone.
Charlottesville, University of Virginia Library, 1954.
229 p. illus. 54-10702 Z733.V66C6
Bibliography: p. 21 1-2 13.
The University of Virginia was chartered in 18 16,
and began instruction in 1825. The library, like the
rest of the University, received its main conception
and impetus from Thomas Jefferson. His last visit
was made in 1826, but his concept of the library
lingered long after, and has some effect today, as
Mr. Clemons, librarian there from 1927 to 1950, is
at some pains to show in his story of the library's
development. The book opens with an account of
the founding of the library (1816-1826), and goes
on to trace its history to the time of the Civil War.
Chapter 3 carries the story to 1895, when a fire
destroyed the library building and most of the col-
lection. Chapter 4 traces the library's resurgence
after the fire to the year 1925, when the centennial
of its founding was observed. Chapter 5 is a series
of biographical sketches of the nine librarians who
preceded Mr. Clemons in the office. The sixth and
final chapter carries the story of the library from
1925 to mid-century. The book itself is one of the
few relatively thorough studies of the development
of a major university research library, and as such
is representative of the development of libraries as
instruments of American education.
6467. Compton, Charles H. Twenty-five crucial
years of the St. Louis Public Library, 1927-
1952. With a supplement, The Library's readers,
by Charles H. Compton [and others] St. Louis,
1953. 204 p. 53-11009 Z733.S141C6
St. Louis, eighth in population among American
cities in 1950, has one of the outstanding city public
libraries. This study tells the story of its modern
growth and the expansion of its role in society.
Mr. Compton, who has served as assistant librarian,
librarian, and librarian emeritus for almost 40 years,
writes in his foreword: "It shall be the endeavor of
the writer to interpret the St. Louis Public Library
as a living, pulsating, changing, and growing reality
in the community and to indicate its importance in
a free society." His report indicates not only the
role of the library and the nature of its collections,
but also the financial and administrative problems
that have had to be faced. The library was founded
in 1865, and some account of its history through
1926 may be found in Compton's earlier Fifty Years
of Progress of the St. Louis Public Library, 1876-
1926 (St. Louis, St. Louis Public Library, 1926. 84
p.), which was also issued as a supplement to the
Annual Report of the Library for 1925-26. This
sketch passes rapidly over the early years, and be-
comes detailed only with the founding of the
American Library Association in 1876. It was not
meant to be a full history of the institution, but
rather "an attempt to trace some of the ideas which
have gone into the making of the library and to
indicate significant and outstanding points in its
development," and "to create in the reader's mind
the atmosphere of the library in its earlier years in
order that the library of today may be seen to be a
natural growth from its infancy and youth."
6468. Keep, Austin Baxter. History of the New
York Society Library, with an introductory
chapter on libraries in Colonial New York, 1698-
1776. New York, Printed for the Trustees by the
De Vinne Press, 1908. xvi, 607 p. illus.
8-34672 Z733.N74K
In the early years of this country attempts to create
a general library service usually took the form of a
group of individuals agreeing to pool their resources
for the establishment of a library, so that each might
have access to more. Most of these were "society
libraries," normally limited to the use of subscribers,
with occasional courtesy extension of privileges to
relatives and distinguished friends. As free public
libraries grew in numbers and strength, the society
libraries declined in importance, and often went
out of existence or were incorporated into the public
library. New York City had one of the larger so-
ciety libraries, and generous endowments have en-
abled it to continue, albeit with a limited clientele,
to the present day. Mr. Keep's history opens with
431240—60 69
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO73
an account of early New York libraries, and goes on
to present a roughly chronological study of the
Society Library from its founding in 1754 through
its 150th anniversary in 1904. The work not only
shows in detail the evolution, problems, and serv-
ices of such a library, but also reveals much about
the reading of New York's social and intellectual
leaders throughout the period. The story is brought
up to date in Mrs. Marion M. King's less formal
Boo\s and People; Five Decades of New York's
Oldest Library (New York, Macmillan, 1954. 372
p.). Mrs. King joined the staff in 1907, and her
book not only describes the 20th-century activities
of the library, but in its year-by-year approach to
its subject matter it gives a good picture of the more
popular aspects of reading throughout the first half
of the century. The anecdotal nature of much of
the book also gives it value as a picture of life inside
a library.
6469. Mearns, David C. The story up to now;
the Library of Congress, 1800- 1946. Wash-
ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1947. 226 p.
48-45515 Z733.U6M45
"Reprinted from the Annual report of the Li-
brarian of Congress for the fiscal year ending June
30, 1946, with the addition of illustrations and a
slight revision of text."
The Library of Congress was founded in 1800.
It was subsequently destroyed when the British
burned the Capitol during the War of 1 812. In
1815 the Library made a fresh start when Congress
purchased the library of Thomas Jefferson (see
Adams, no. 6460). Since then the Library has
steadily grown, save for a second setback by fire
in 1 85 1, until it is probably the world's largest,
with a collection of more than 11,700,000 books and
pamphlets, over 16,100,000 manuscripts, 2,000,000
items of music, 2,400,000 maps and views, etc., for
a total collection of more than 38,100,000 items in
1959. It serves not only Congress, but also, through
many services, other government agencies, libraries
throughout the world, and the general public.
Since the Library is not only the largest in the coun-
try, but also the center of a number of the nation's
library activities, an understanding of the Library
of Congress is essential to an understanding of the
role of libraries in the 20th century. Mr. Mearns'
history narrates the development of the Library's
collections and services from the first proposals for
a Government library up to 1946. It emphasizes the
work of two great Librarians of Congress, Ains-
worth R. Spofford (1825-1908) and Herbert Put-
nam (1861-1955), whose nearly successive terms
ran from 1864 to 1939, in making theirs a truly
national library. The early part of the story is
1074 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
related at greater length and without much art in
the first and only volume published of William
Dawson Johnston's History of the Library of Con-
fess (Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1904. 535
p.); it reaches 1864. A brief and up-to-date ac-
count of the Library is Paul M. Angle's The Library
of Congress: an Account, Historical and Descrip-
tive (Kingsport, Tenn., Kingsport Press, 1958. 77
p.); it is based on The Story Up to Now and the
subsequent annual reports of the Librarian.
6470. Potter, Alfred Claghorn. The library of
Harvard University; descriptive and his-
torical notes. 4th ed. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1934. 186 p. (Library of Harvard
University. Special publications, 6)
34-20604 Z733.H34P 1934
The Harvard Library is both the oldest and the
largest university library in this country. The col-
lection numbers over six million volumes, and is
exceeded in size in America only by the Library
of Congress and the New York Public Library.
This publication, the first edition of which appeared
as early as 1903, therefore provides not only a his-
tory and analysis of a leading academic and research
library, but also an example of the aims and prob-
lems of such libraries. A study of the problems cur-
rendy faced in maintaining and furthering such a li-
brary, as well as in making it function to best advan-
tage, is Keyes D. Metcalf's Report on the Harvard
University Library; a Study of Present and Prospec-
tive Problems (Cambridge, Harvard University Li-
brary, 1955. 131 p.); this not only gives a fairly
clear picture of the Library's present scope and func-
tions, but devotes considerable attention to the place
of the Library, along with other leading research
libraries, in the "American library" that is develop-
ing as a result of cooperation among libraries
through interlibrary loan, microfilming, division of
labor in collecting, accessibility to visiting scholars,
etc. Second to the Harvard Library in size and age
is the Yale University Library. Its main building is
described in detail in a well-illustrated article, "The
Sterling Memorial Library," which appeared on
pages 57-123 of volume 5 (April 193 1) of The
Yale University Library Gazette. This is a thorough
presentation of the physical plant of a leading re-
search library. An interesting series of articles de-
rived from various aspects of the library's collec-
tions, especially unusual items and special collections,
is Papers in Honor of Andrew Keogh, Librarian of
Yale University (New Haven, Priv. Print., 1938.
492 p.). They give an idea not only of some of
the more esoteric material that may be found in a
general research library, but also of the potential
scholarly use and significance of such uncommon
items and collections.
6471. Schenk, Gretchen (Knief). County and
regional library development. Chicago,
American Library Association, 1954. 263 p.
53-7488 Z675.C8S4
Bibliography: p. [258] -260.
Since most early public libraries were established
on a city or other local basis, many thinly populated
areas found themselves without any public library
service, while many small towns struggled to sup-
port inferior libraries on inadequate taxes. In recent
years improved transportation and communication
have made possible an alternative to this in the
form of county and regional libraries. These usu-
ally involve plans for a shared budget and book-
stock over a large area, and by raising the total
bookstock, make more books available in each com-
munity. At the same time, pooled budgets have in
some areas produced better services, such as refer-
ence and readers' advisory work, at a comparatively
low cost. However, initial costs delayed many such
projects. Mrs. Schenk's book was written in antici-
pation of Federal aid to libraries. Such aid was
enacted soon afterwards, giving a great impetus to
county and regional libraries. The author does not
give a history of the movement, nor does she examine
existing libraries in detail. She has rather attempted
to synthesize procedures and programs as a guide to
what is done for and by such libraries.
6472. Shera, Jesse H. Foundations of the public
library; the origins of the public library
movement in New England, 1 629-1 855. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1949. xv, 308 p.
illus. (The University of Chicago studies in library
science) 49-8133 Z731.S55
"Selected bibliography": p. 291-295.
Dr. Shera writes in his introduction: "We are
here concerned with those elements in American
life which contributed direcdy or indirectly to the
growth of the public library as a social agency and
the character of the environment from which it
emerged. Though attention is restricted to but one
section of the United States, much of what is said
here with reference to New England is equally ap-
plicable elsewhere as economic and social conditions
began to approximate those of the northeastern
Atlantic seaboard. But New England, because it
is the cradle of American librarianship and because
its cultural records have been so assiduously pre-
served, was the logical, if indeed not inevitable,
place to begin." Much the same period and subject
matter is covered by Charles Seymour Thompson's
somewhat shorter Evolution of the American Public
Library, 1653-18J6 (Washington, Scarecrow Press,
1952. 287 p.). Sidney Ditzion's Arsenals of a
Democratic Culture; a Social History of the Ameri-
can Public Library Movement in New England and
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO75
the Middle States from 1850 to 1900 (Chicago,
American Library Association, 1947. 263 p.) brings
the story to a later date. Samuel Swett Green's
The Public Library Movement in the United States
1 8 53-1 893 (Boston, Boston Book Co., 19 13. 336
p.) actually is mainly concerned with the period
after 1876, and in large part consists of the author's
reminiscences of his participation in the free library
movement. Librarian of the Worcester Public
Library from 1871 to 1909, he also served, from
1890, on the Massachusetts Free Public Library
Commission.
6473. Spencer, Gwladys. The Chicago Public
Library; origins and backgrounds. Chicago,
University of Chicago Press, 1943. xvii, 473 p.
illus. (The University of Chicago studies in library
science) A 43-1583 Z733.C531S6
Bibliography: p. 423-435.
The author sums up the scope and purpose of
this book in her introduction: "This study endeavors
first ... to present with as high a degree of ac-
curacy and clarity as is permitted by records often
incomplete the scenes of library history in Chicago
from the beginning through 1872 and, in addition,
but more briefly, those in the surrounding state of
Illinois as they formed unfolding backgrounds for
the establishment in a great metropolitan center of
its free public library of today. . . . Secondly, the
study attempts to analyze such available data with
the purpose of discovering the chief factors that
contributed to the inception of this library. Lasdy,
the study suggests what may be the significance of
the factors found to be influential in the origin of
the Chicago Public Library as a representative insti-
tution in its relation to the history of the American
library movement as a whole." The importance of
this as a representative work is underscored by the
author's thesis "that certain great decisive forces
that had previously been and were still at work in
Chicago, in the state at large, and even throughout
the entire country bore a share of major importance
as fundamental cofactors in the creation of the new
institution." This investigation of other than im-
mediate and obvious causes has been neglected in
most library histories.
6474. U. S. Office of Education. Public libraries
in the United States of America; their his-
tory, condition, and management. Special report,
Department of the Interior, Bureau of Education.
Part I. Washington, Govt. Print. Off., 1876. xxxv,
1187P. illus. 1-9328 Z731.U57
Part II consists of Cutter's Rules for a Printed
Dictionary Catalogue, 1876 (2d edition, 1889; 3d
edition, 1891).
This landmark in the writing of library history
is probably the most thorough work of the kind that
has yet been published. Despite its age, it remains
of value for its impressive detail on the library situa-
tion in America about 1875. It opens with a study
of "Public Libraries a Hundred Years Ago." There
follow chapters on the many types of public li-
braries, such as school, law, government, theoretical,
historical society, medical, and scientific libraries.
A number of chapters are also devoted to various
aspects of free town libraries, and town organization
libraries. The more technical aspects of librarian-
ship are discussed in the later chapters, concerned
with matters such as library buildings, catalogs, cata-
loging and classification, indexing, binding, reports
and statistics, etc. The final chapter (p. 1010-1174)
consists of tables of general library statistics and a
listing of librarians.
6475. Whitehill, Walter Muir. Boston Public
Library; a centennial history. Cambridge,
Harvard University Press, 1956. 274 p.
56-6528 Z733.B752W5
In 1848 the Massachusetts legislature authorized
the city of Boston "to establish and maintain a public
library," thereby making the Boston Public Library
the first tax-supported city library to be authorized
by statute. The book collection grew rapidly, al-
though the formal opening of the library was de-
layed for a few years. Mr. Whitehill's history pre-
sents in chronological form the story of the initial
struggles to establish a public library; the early very
rapid growth by which the library soon became one
of the largest in the nation; the decline that set in
during the late 1870's and continued for nearly a
decade; the subsequent resurgence; a second decline
resulting from financial stringency; and a new im-
provement brought about by the bettered financial
situation after World War II. Because of its pri-
ority, the history of the Boston Public Library re-
flects much of the public library movement from its
inception. Mr. Whitehill gives much detail on the
books supplied to the community which was for
many years the nation's cultural center. The story
of the society library which supplied much of Bos-
ton's reading matter before the founding of die
public library, and which itself came close to func-
tioning as a public library, may be found in Josiah
Quincy's detailed work, The History of the Boston
Athenaeum (Cambridge, Metcalf, 1851. 263, 104
p.), which has also been distinguished as the "first
formal history of an American library." The story
is carried forward in the society's own publication,
The Athenaeum Centenary: the Influence and His-
tory of the Boston Athenaeum from 180J to 190J
IO76 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
(Boston, Boston Athenaeum, 1907. 236 p.), the
greater part of which is, unfortunately for the gen-
eral reader, devoted to "a record of its officers and
benefactors and a complete list of proprietors."
F. Librarianship and Library Use
6476. American library pioneers. [v.] 1-8.
Chicago, American Library Association,
1924-1953. 8 v.
1. Lydenberg, Harry Miller. John Shaw Bil-
lings, creator of the National Medical Library and
its catalogue, first director of the New York Public
Library. 1924. 94 p. 24-20388 Z720.B6L9
2. Shaw, Robert Kendall. Samuel Swett Green.
1926. 92 p. 26-10763 Z720.G8S5
3. Cutter, William Parker. Charles Ammi Cut-
ter. 1 93 1. 66 p. 31-28434 Z720.C99C9
4. Eastman, Linda A. Portrait of a librarian,
William Howard Brett. 1940. 104 p.
40-27318 Z720.B85E2
5. Hadley, Chalmers. John Cotton Dana. 1943.
105 p. 43-II446 Z720.D2H2
6. Rider, Fremont. Melvil Dewey. 1944. 151 p.
44-4322 Z720.D5R5
7. Borome, Joseph Alfred. Charles Coffin Jew-
ett. 1951. 188 p. 51-10999 Z720.J59B6
8. Pioneering leaders in librarianship. First
series. Edited by Emily Miller Danton. 1953.
202 p. 53-10258 Z720.A4U47
The slender volumes in this series have appeared
at widely spaced intervals. They describe the lives,
with heavy emphasis on their professional librarian
and bibliographical aspects, of persons who have at-
tained prominence in American librarianship. As
a group they afford considerable insight into ad-
vances in librarianship, particularly during the late
19th and early 20th centuries. These studies have
been written largely by librarians for librarians,
and as a result suffer somewhat from a limited out-
look. They all present very favorable portraits, but
few of their subjects emerge as recognizable human
beings. This results in part from the emphasis on
the professional aspects of their lives; but this same
emphasis enables one to obtain a clear idea of their
professional advancements. Volume 8, which treats
"a wide assortment of distinguished persons who
played a strong role in developing American li-
braries," is the first of a new "omnibus" subseries.
Mrs. Danton, who edited the latest volume, took
over editorship of the series after the death of Dr.
Arthur E. Bostwick in 1942.
6477. Berelson, Bernard. The library's public; a
report of the Public Library Inquiry. With
the assistance of Lester Asheim. New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1949. xx, 174 p.
49-10661 Z731.B4 1949
This report is actually a synthesis of two originally
separate reports: one based on the results of a per-
sonal interview survey conducted in the autumn of
1947, and one based on an analysis of reports pub-
lished since 1930 on library book use and users. It
opens with a discussion of the position of library
usage in the context of public usage of the mass
media such as newspapers, films, and magazines.
Chapter 2 analyzes the various groups who use
public libraries and the intensity of their usage.
Chapters 3 and 4 take up the questions of why and
when people use public library facilities. Chapter
5 discusses the concentration of usage among a rela-
tively small group. The concluding chapters con-
sider what further research is needed to shed more
light on this subject, and implications the studies
already made have for library policy. The report
concludes that the library actually has a number of
publics with diverse purposes and fields, and that
"it must decide what things it will be to whom."
It suggests, without actually concluding, that the
library should do less competing with the mass me-
dia in the field of entertainment, and more in
books and services for "serious-minded people con-
cerned with serious-minded materials."
6478. Brough, Kenneth J. Scholar's workshop;
evolving conceptions of library service. Ur-
bana, University of Illinois Press, 1953. xv, 197 p.
(Illinois contributions to librarianship, no. 5)
52-10462 Z675.U5B85
Bibliography: p. 178-187.
Mr. Brough 's study is "ostensibly limited to de-
velopments in the university libraries of Chicago,
Columbia, Harvard, and Yale," but, he says, "the
story would have varied little if the four institutions
selected for investigation had been, say, California,
Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Princeton." The
author takes 1876 as the starting point for modern
librarianship, and from that date he traces such prob-
lems of research libraries as services to readers, the
nature of the collections, and their accessibility.
Throughout the work he compares evolving policy
to earlier practices. In the early years of this coun-
try the concept governing college libraries had been
one of service to advanced scholars. Gradually stu-
dents were allowed a limited use of the collections,
and in time there arose the idea of actually trying
to provide specifically for the needs even of under-
graduates, as a result of which the libraries became
increasingly an essential factor in the teaching pro-
gram. The story of the early years of these libraries
is told in considerable detail in Louis Shores' Origins
of the American College Library, 1638-1800 (New
York, Barnes & Noble, 1935. 290 p.). A volume
edited by Herman H. Fussier, which discusses many
of the areas in which the modern college library is
concerned, from library architecture and student
programing through personal policies and acquisi-
tioning, is The Function of the Library in the Mod-
ern College (Chicago, University of Chicago, Grad-
uate Library School, 1954. 117 p.); it consists of
"Papers presented before the nineteenth annual
conference of the Graduate Library School of the
University of Chicago." A parallel work, more
concerned with technical problems such as catalog-
ing, cost of maintenance, specialization, etc., is
Problems and Prospects of the Research Library
(New Brunswick, N.J., Scarecrow Press, 1955. 181
p.), edited by Edwin E. Williams for the Association
of Research Libraries; it consists of a group of pa-
pers presented at the Monticello [Illinois] Confer-
ence of the Association in 1954.
6479. Bryan, Alice I. The public librarian; a re-
port of the Public Library Inquiry, by Alice
I. Bryan, with a section on the education of librar-
ians by Robert D. Leigh. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1952. xxvii, 474 p. diagrs.
52-8829 Z682.B7
This report concerns itself with the people who
work in public libraries, with an emphasis on those
on the professional level, secondary interest in those
on a subprofessional level, and no attention at all
to those on a nonprofessional level. Nearly two
thirds of the volume is devoted to a study, based on
questionnaires and tests, of the public librarians.
The author attempts to determine factors such as
personal characteristics (distribution by sex, marital
status, recreational activities, personality, etc.), edu-
cational status, economic status (salaries, savings,
insurance, etc.), and library career activities and
attitudes. Also analyzed are the several aspects of
personnel administration: management, employee
selection, in-service training, promotion and pay
systems, labor relations, unions, associations, morale,
etc. About a third of the book is occupied by Mr.
Leigh's section, "The Education of Librarians."
The first chapter of this section gives a brief survey
of the "Evolution of Library Schools"; the second
studies library school programs; the fourth analyzes
the student body (sex, geographical distribution,
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO77
admission requirements, etc.), and the final chapter
surveys "The Faculty and Instructional Resources."
6480. Leigh, Robert D. The public library in the
United States; the general report of the
Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1950. 272 p. 50-9138 Z731.L45
"Methods and sources": p. [247J-263.
Dr. Leigh was the director of the Public Library-
Inquiry, a project proposed by the American Library
Association, carried out by the Social Science Re-
search Council, and financed by the Carnegie
Foundation of New York. His general report opens
with an account of the purpose, nature, and limita-
tions of the inquiry. There follow chapters which
summarize findings and discuss prospective devel-
opments in various fields; their scope is indicated by
their tides: "The Library Faith and Library Ob-
jectives," "The Business of Communication," "Li-
brary Units and Structure," "Library Materials,"
"Library Services," "Library Government and
Politics," "Library Financial Support," "Library
Operations," "Library Personnel and Training," and
"The Direction of Development." Dr. Leigh's re-
port is a balanced presentation of the position and
problems of the public library in present-day Amer-
ica. Greater detail on special aspects of the subject
is contained in other reports of the Public Library
Inquiry by Miller (no. 6441), McCamy (no. 6452
note), Berelson (no. 6477), and Bryan (no. 6479).
These studies are all limited by the definition of a
public library as a free, tax-supported library avail-
able to the community in general, thus excluding,
most notably, the free school libraries. However,
related aspects of other types of libraries are con-
sidered throughout the series of reports. Dr. Leigh,
who later became dean of the Columbia School of
Library Service, also contributed the first paper,
"Changing Concepts of the Public Library's Role,"
to New Directions in Public Library Development
(Chicago, University of Chicago, Graduate Library
School, 1957. 104 p.). These eight papers pre-
sented before the 22d Annual Conference of the
Graduate Library School (1957) were edited by
Lester Asheim, and include discussions of the
Federal Library Services Act and of community de-
velopments. In 1954 the Public Libraries Division
of the American Library Association appointed a
Coordinating Committee on Revision of Public Li-
brary Standards, which, after two conferences and
the circulation of a first draft, was able to formulate
a new statement of standards for public libraries,
revised from the earlier codes of 1933 and 1943:
Public Library Service; a Guide to Evaluation, with
Minimum Standards (Chicago, American Library
Association, 1956. xxi, 74 p.). This offers a num-
bered series of concise formulations in the realms
IO78 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
of structure and government, service, books and
nonbook materials, organization and control of
materials, and physical facilities. For example, no.
73: "Films, recordings, and pictures should be avail-
able for use off the premises."
6481. Marshall, John David, comp. Books, li-
braries, librarians; contributions to library
literature, selected by John David Marshall, Wayne
Shirley [and] Louis Shores. Hamden, Conn.,
Shoe String Press, 1955. xv, 432 p.
55-3034 Z665.M66
Includes bibliographies.
Mr. Marshall opens his introduction thus: "Much
of the literature of librarianship cannot be described
truthfully as particularly enjoyable reading, for it
lacks that intangible and elusive quality known as
readability." The literature of librarianship is not
the only field that has been plagued by this stylistic
problem, and it might be contended that some other
fields have a larger percentage of unreadable writ-
ings than does librarianship. At any rate, this vol-
ume is an attempt to present a selection of interesting
and readable contributions from the profession's
literature. The volume is therefore not only more
readable than many others on libraries and librar-
ianship, but it is also highly informative in its
presentation of many aspects of the library world
and its problems. The articles are presented in four
sections: "Books and Reading," "Libraries," "Li-
brarians and Librarianship," and "Notable State-
ments of the Librarian's Profession." The topics
range widely from children's libraries to research
libraries, and from library acquisition policies to
the problem of theft of library books.
6482. Phinney, Eleanor. Library adult education
in action; five case studies. Chicago, Ameri-
can Library Association, 1956. 182 p.
56-9496 Z711.2.P5
A modern development in the activities of public
libraries is that of adult education — education be-
yond that of having a book stock available for loan.
Eleanor Phinney 's study is mainly a report on what
five libraries of moderate resources have been doing.
She selected ones in Mount Vernon, N.Y., St. Mary's
County, Md., Carrollton, Ga. (the West Georgia
Regional Library), La Crosse, Wis., and Andover,
Mass. The kinds of educational activity engaged
in included displays and exhibits, reader-interest
files and notification service, local radio programs,
educational film programs, discussion groups, etc.
A chapter on common elements in the programs has
been included, emphasizing the importance of a zeal
for adult education on the part of the chief librarian,
the staff, and the board. The conclusions of a sur-
vey of the subject will be found in Helen Lyman
Smith's Adult Education Activities in Public Li-
braries; a Report of the ALA Survey of Adult
Education Activities in Public Libraries and State
Library Extension Agencies of the United States
(Chicago, American Library Association, 1954.
96 p.).
6483. Rothstein, Samuel. The development of
reference services through academic tradi-
tions, public library practice, and special librarian-
ship. Chicago, Association of College and Reference
Libraries, 1955. 124 p. (ACRL monographs, no.
14) 55-9938 Z674.A75, no. 14
Issued also in microfilm form, as thesis, University
of Illinois, under title: The Development of Refer-
ence Services in American Research Libraries.
Bibliography: p. 111-124.
The author begins his final chapter thus: "To
trace the development of reference services in
American research libraries is to record the trans-
formation of occasional and casual courtesy into a
complex and highly specialized service of steadily
increasing scope and importance. In most institu-
tions, it is now taken for granted that one of the
Library's primary functions is to make available per-
sonal assistance for readers seeking information."
The development of this function, central to much
of modern librarianship, is presented as "the result
of a collocation of particular historical factors dis-
tinctive to the American library scene." The story
is traced in some detail from 1850, from which year
the author dates "The Rise of Research and Research
Libraries" (chapter 1). He then studies the growth
of reference services in libraries, the development of
special libraries, the problems of legislative and mu-
nicipal reference work, and the recent development
of reference service in industrial libraries for pro-
fessional researchers. After carrying the story to
the beginning of World War II, Dr. Rothstein con-
cludes with a chapter on general trends. A detailed
picture of reference service as librarians conceive
and practice it is presented in a volume edited by
the late Pierce Butler: The Reference Function of
the Library (Chicago, University of Chicago Press,
1943. 366 p.), consisting of papers read at the
Library Institute of the University of Chicago in
1942. The topics dealt with include personnel and
training for reference work, its administrative prob-
lems, book selection and supplementary reference
materials, and reference service in special fields such
as art, music, and rare books.
6484. Tauber, Maurice F., ed. Technical services
in libraries: acquisitions, cataloging, classi-
fication, binding, photographic reproduction, and
circulation operations. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1954. xvi, 487 p. diagrs. (Columbia
University studies in library service, no. 7)
54-10328 Z665.T28 1954
This volume, the work of Mr. Tauber and seven
associates, is a study, aimed primarily at library
school students, of the more or less technical opera-
tions that take place in a library, with a special em-
phasis on the point of view of a general research
library. Since most of this activity goes on behind
the scenes in most libraries, it is an aspect of library
work that is largely unknown to the general public.
While this volume is not aimed at that public,
it will enable the layman to gain a just idea
of many little-known problems that face the librar-
ian, as well as a conception of the complexities
involved in maintaining a modern research, college,
or large public library. To a less extent it also re-
flects the tribulations of smaller public and school
libraries. The final chapter concisely discusses the
possibilities of applying cost analysis and manage-
ment analysis to library operations, and of intro-
ducing various types of machines as savers of labor
and time. A group of lectures which sum up a
number of the problems and possibilities of modern
librarianship is Challenges to Librarianship (Talla-
hassee, Florida State University, 1953. 156 p.
Florida State University studies, no. 12), edited by
Louis Shores; the lectures were originally delivered
by distinguished visitors to the university, and cover
such topics as censorship, microphotography, the
sciences, audio-visual material, and international
understanding.
6485. Trautman, Ray. A history of the School of
Library Service, Columbia University. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1954. 85 p. illus.
(The Bicentennial history of Columbia University)
54-5197 Z669.T7
The 19th century witnessed a tremendous growth
in the number of American libraries and in the
total number of volumes held by most of them.
This led to unanticipated complexities in the
acquiring, cataloging, and servicing of books.
Added difficulties arose out of rapidly expanding
conceptions of desirable services to readers. The
result was that the idea of professional librarianship
began to emerge as an attempt to obtain competent
librarians with more complex and skilled functions
than merely guarding relatively small book collec-
tions. This situation led Melvil Dewey to estab-
lish a library school at Columbia University in 1883.
A few years later the school moved to Albany, and
did not return to Columbia until 1926. Thus, not-
withstanding its long residence elsewhere, the
Columbia University School of Library Service may
claim to be the oldest as well as an outstanding li-
BOOKS AND LIBRARIES / IO79
brary school. Mr. Trautman's book traces the
complicated history of the school, and also offers
insight into the evolving concepts of librarianship.
Difficulties currently being faced in developing cur-
ricula in library schools are brought together in a
volume edited by Robert D. Leigh: Major Problems
in the Education of Librarians (New York, Colum-
bia University Press, 1954. 116 p.), which resulted
from a seminar on education for librarianship held
in the Columbia School of Library Service in 1952-
53. A work of somewhat wider range is Education
for Librarianship (Chicago, American Library As-
sociation, 1949. 307 p.), edited by Bernard Berelson
and consisting of papers presented at a library con-
ference held at the University of Chicago in August
1948. It covers not only current professional prob-
lems, but also a history of the library school move-
ment and a survey of the problems involved in the
training of nonprofessional or subprofessional li-
brary employees.
6486. Udey, George Burwell. The librarians'
conference of 1853, a chapter in American
library history; edited by Gilbert H. Doane. Chi-
cago, American Library Association, 1951. 189 p.
51-11154 Z673.A49U7
"Proceedings of the Librarians' Convention, held
in New York City, September 15, 16, and 17, 1853.
(Reprinted . . . from Norton's Literary and edu-
cational register, for 1854)": p. [i29J-i76.
The librarians' conference of September 15-17,
1853, in New York City was the first general con-
ference of American librarians, and its participants
may be regarded as the forefathers of the modern
library movement in general and of the American
Library Association in particular. To this first con-
ference came leading librarians throughout the
nation, although the Northeast, where most libraries
of any size were then located, was naturally the most
strongly represented. The conference had relatively
litde direct influence of importance, but indirectly
it set off a significant train of events. It initiated
greater cooperation among libraries, and in turn
this led to a greater attention to and understanding
of library problems. It also established a precedent
for the 1876 conference, when the American Library
Association was founded and modern professional
librarianism was firmly set on its way. The pro-
ceedings of the meeting are reprinted in offset at
the end of this volume (p. 129-176). The final
draft of Mr. Udey's book was nearly finished at
the time of his death in 1946; the work of comple-
tion and editing was carried out by his nephew.
6487. Wilson, Louis Round, and Maurice F.
Tauber. The university library; the organ-
ization, administration, and functions of academic
I080 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
libraries. 2d ed. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1956. 641 p. diagrs. (Columbia University
studies in library service, no. 8)
55-1 1 1 84 Z675.U5W745 1956
Bibliographies at end of chapters.
The first edition of this work was published by
the University of Chicago Press in 1945. The au-
thors state that their purpose "is to review the
changes which have taken place in the university
library in response to the demands made upon it
by university growth; to consider systematically the
principles and methods of university and library
administration; and to formulate generalizations
concerning the organization, administration, and
functions of the university library to the end that
it may serve its clientele more adequately and effi-
ciendy than it has in the past." Though much of it
sounds like a statement of what should be done,
most of it is a statement, frequendy in abstract
form, of what has been done. Relatively little
theory is advanced. This, combined with the
emphasis of the study on the research collections
and their administration, means that the volume
actually offers a fairly thorough prospect of the
nature, organization, and administration of large
research libraries at the present day. There is rela-
tively litde historical material, although some is in-
cluded in order to illustrate the development and
changes in the problems that university librarians
have had to face. The whole field is thoroughly
covered in College and Research Libraries, the organ
of the Association of College and Reference Librar-
ies, a division of the American Library Association.
This quarterly, which began publication in Decem-
ber 1939, is currently published at Fulton, Mo., by
the American Library Association. An important
recent development of great interest to research
libraries was the establishment in 1956 of The
Council of Library Resources, Inc., which has as
its principal objective "to aid in the solution of
library problems; to conduct research in, develop
and demonstrate new techniques and methods and
to disseminate through any means the results
thereof." The Council was established at the in-
stance of the Ford Foundation, which has made it
a grant of $5 million to be expended over a five-year
period. The Council's endeavors are outlined in
its Annual Report, 1956/57- (Washington, 1957-).
Appendix: Selected Readings in
American Studies
AS EXPLAINED in the Introduction, in June 1954
the Council of the American Studies Association
recommended that this Guide should include a
separate section containing those titles which have a
synthetic approach, bridge the various academic and
scholarly disciplines, and are therefore of special
significance to teachers or students pursuing courses
in American studies. A tentative selection of 100
such titles was submitted to the Council and other
prominent members in October of the same year,
together with a request for specific suggestions. In
consequence of the replies some tides were prompdy
deleted, and considerably more added. Since then
further deletions have been made for various reasons,
and a much larger number of additional tides ac-
cumulated, many but by no means all of which are
publications later than 1954. The result, a list of
190 tides, is below. The 190 may be thus briefly
accounted for: 83 are from the original list; 35 were
recommended by A.S.A. members in 1954; and 72
are subsequent additions. Of the last 72, nine do
not appear in the main Guide; published since work
upon the pertinent chapters was concluded, they
have been thought too important to omit here.
To facilitate rapid finding, the 190 titles appear
in a single alphabetical order. Most entries are
limited to author, title, imprint, and pagination,
plus a bracketed serial number which directs one to
the fuller entry in the main body of the Guide,
where the annotation will normally supply a justifi-
cation for the work's inclusion here. Under authors,
tides are also alphabetically ordered save in the case
of sequels, which are placed direcdy after the pri-
mary work. For the nine recent works not in the
Guide proper, the Library of Congress call and card
numbers, and series note when there is one, have
been added. In a very few cases the edition entered
here is a later one than that in the body of the
Guide; in this case also call and card numbers have
been included.
Finally, it should be stated that this Appendix
does not attempt to incorporate the classics of Ameri-
can thought and expression, of the stamp of Emer-
son, Thoreau, Whitman, or William James; and
that anthologies, save in a very few instances with
special reasons for each, have been excluded. It
must, of course, be regarded as suggestive rather
than exhaustive; anyone can readily make his own
amplifications from the chapters that precede it.
Important guides to the present state of American
studies, which appeared too late to be included in
the main body of this book, are Sigmund Skard's
American Studies in Europe; Their History and
Present Organization (Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1958. 2 v.) and Robert H.
Walker's American Studies in the United States,
a Survey of College Programs (Baton Rouge,
Louisiana State University Press, 1958. 210 p.).
Aaron, Daniel. Men of good hope; a story of
American progressives. New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1951. xiv, 329 p. [6424]
Aaron, Daniel, ed. America in crisis; fourteen
crucial episodes in American history. New York,
Knopf, 1952. 363 p. [3070]
Allen, Frederick Lewis. The big change: America
transforms itself, 1900-1950. New York, Harper,
1952. 308 p. [45H]
Allen, Frederick Lewis. Only yesterday; an infor-
mal history of the nineteen-twenties. New York,
Harper, 1931. 370 p. [3477]
Almond, Gabriel A. The American people and
foreign policy. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1950. 269 p. [3609]
Andrews, Wayne. Architecture, ambition and
Americans; a history of American architecture,
from the beginning to the present. New York,
Harper, 1955. 315 p. [5698]
I08l
431240—60-
-70
I082 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Barker, Virgil. American painting, history and
interpretation. New York, Macmillan, 1950.
xxvii, 717 p. [5742]
Barzun, Jacques. Music in American life. Garden
City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1956. 126 p. [5615]
Basler, Roy P. The Lincoln legend; a study in
changing conceptions. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1935. 335 p. [3395]
Bates, Ralph Samuel. Scientific societies in the
United States. 2d ed. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1958. 297 p.
57-10143 Q11.A1B3 1958 [4713]
Beard, Charles A., and Mary R. Beard. The rise of
American civilization. New York, Macmillan,
1927-42. 4v.
Contents. — v. 1. The agricultural era. — v. 2.
The industrial era. — v. 3. America in midpas-
sage. — v. 4. The American spirit, a study of the
idea of civilization in the United States.
[3°73> 3479. 375°]
Berelson, Bernard R., Paul F. Lazarsfeld, and
William N. McPhee. Voting; a study of opinion
formation in a presidential campaign. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press, 1954. xix, 395 p.
[6414]
Billington, Ray Allen. The Protestant Crusade,
1800-1860; a study of the origins of American
nativism. New York, Rinehart, 1952, ci938.
5M P- [45I5l
Billington, Ray Allen. Westward expansion, a
history of the American frontier, by Ray Allen
Billington with the collaboration of James Blaine
Hedges. New York, Macmillan, 1949. 873 p.
[3074]
Blegen, Theodore C. Norwegian migration to
America. Northfield, Minn., Norwegian-Ameri-
can Historical Association, 1931-40. 2 v. [4484]
Boas, George, ed. Romanticism in America; papers
contributed to a symposium held at the Baltimore
Museum of Art, May 13, 14, 15, 1940. Baltimore,
Johns Hopkins Press, 1940. 202 p. [3751]
Bowers, David F., ed. Foreign influences in Ameri-
can life; essays and critical bibliographies. Edited
for the Princeton Program of Study in American
Civilization. Princeton, Princeton University
Press, 1944. 254 p. [3768]
Brebner, John B. North Adantic triangle; the in-
terplay of Canada, the United States and Great
Britain. New Haven, Yale University Press for
the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace,
Division of Economics and History, 1945. xxii,
385 P- [3552]
Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in the wilderness; the
first century of urban life in America, 1625- 1742.
[2d ed.] New York, Knopf, 1955. 500 p.
[4601]
Bridenbaugh, Carl. Cities in revolt; urban life in
America, 1743-1776. New York, Knopf, 1955.
xiii, 433, xxi p. [4602]
Brooks, Van Wyck. Makers and finders; a history
of the writer in America, 1800-1915. New York,
Dutton, 1936-52 [v. 1, 1944] 5 v. [2381]
Brown, Ralph H. Historical geography of the
United States. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1948. 596 p. [2969]
Bryce, James Bryce, viscount. The American com-
monwealth. London and New York, Macmillan,
1888. 2 v. [4499]
Burlingame, Roger. March of the iron men, a so-
cial history of union through invention. New
York, Scribner, 1938. xvi, 500 p. [4783]
Burlingame, Roger. Engines of democracy; inven-
tions and society in mature America. New York,
Scribner, 1940. xviii, 606 p.
40-27637 T21.B77 [4783n]
Burns, Edward McNall. The American idea of
mission; concepts of national purpose and
destiny. New Brunswick, N.J., Rutgers Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 385 p.
57-10961 E169.1.B943
Burns, James MacGregor, and Jack Walter Peltason.
Government by the people; the dynamics of
American national, state, and local government.
3d ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice-Hall,
1957. 990 p. [6134]
Butts, R. Freeman, and Lawrence A. Cremin. A
history of education in American culture. New
York, Holt, 1953. 628 p. [5I04]
Cady, Edwin H. The gendeman in America; a
literary study in American culture. Syracuse,
N.Y., Syracuse University Press, 1949. 232 p.
[2392]
APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1083
Cahn, Edmond N. The moral decision; right and
wrong in the light of American law. Blooming-
ton, Indiana University Press, 1955. 342 p.
[6261]
Cash, Wilbur J. The mind of the South. New
York, Knopf, 1941. 429 p. [4066]
Chase, Gilbert. America's music, from the Pilgrims
to the present. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1955.
xxiii, 733 p. [56°8]
Cochran, Thomas C. The American business sys-
tem; a historical perspective, 1900-1955. Cam-
bridge, Harvard University Press, 1957. 227 P-
[6005]
Cochran, Thomas C, and William Miller. The age
of enterprise, a social history of industrial Amer-
ica. New York, Macmillan, 1942. 394 p.
[5875]
Cohen, Morris R. American thought; a critical
sketch. Edited and with a foreword by Felix S.
Cohen. Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1954. 360 p.
[37^]
Coleman, Laurence Vail. The museum in Amer-
ica; a critical study. Washington, American
Association of Museums, 1939. 3 v. [3049]
Commager, Henry Steele. The American mind;
an interpretation of American thought and char-
acter since the 1880's. New Haven, Yale Uni-
versity Press, 1950. 476 p. [3738]
Commager, Henry Steele, ed. America in perspec-
tive; the United States through foreign eyes.
New York, Random House, 1947. xxiv, 389 p.
[423i]
Couch, William T., ed. Culture in the South.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1934. 711 p. [4068]
Craven, Wesley Frank. The legend of the Founding
Fathers. New York, New York University Press,
1956. 191 p. [3051]
Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean de, called
Saint John de Crevecoeur. Letters from an
American farmer. London, T. Davies, 1782.
318 p. [45°°]
A paperback reprint is currendy available:
Dutton Everyman Paperbacks, D8.
Croly, Herbert D. The promise of American life.
New York, Macmillan, 1909. 468 p. [4502]
Curti, Merle E. The growth of American thought.
2d ed. New York, Harper, 195 1. xviii, 910 p.
[3729]
Curti, Merle E. The roots of American loyalty.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1946.
267 p. [4526]
Curd, Merle E. The social ideas of American edu-
cators. New York, Scribner, 1935. xxii, 613 p.
[5116]
Curti, Merle E., ed. American scholarship in the
twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 252 p. [3739]
Cushman, Robert E. Civil liberties in the United
States; a guide to current problems and experi-
ence. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell University Press,
1956. 248 p. [61 17]
Davidson, Donald. The attack on leviathan; re-
gionalism and nationalism in the United States.
Chapel Hill, University of North Carolina Press,
1938. 368 p. [3781]
Davidson, Marshall. Life in America. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1951. 2 v. [5801]
Degler, Carl N. Out of our past; the forces that
shaped modern America. New York, Harper,
1959. 484 p. 58-8824 E178.D37
De Grazia, Alfred. Public and republic; political
representation in America. New York, Knopf,
195 1. xiii, 262, ix p. [6402]
Denny, Margaret, and William H. Gilman, eds.
The American writer and the European tradition.
Minneapolis, Published for the University of
Rochester by the University of Minnesota Press,
1950. 192 p. [2412]
De Voto, Bernard A. The course of empire; with
maps by Erwin Raisz. Boston, Houghton Mif-
flin, 1952. xvii, 647 p. [3*61]
De Voto, Bernard A. The year of decision, 1846.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1943. xv, 538 p. [3331 ]
Dorfman, Joseph. The economic mind in Ameri-
can civilization. New York, Viking Press, 1946-
49. 3 v- [5876]
Contents. — v. 1-2. 1 606-1 865. — v. 3. 1865-
1918.
I084 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Dupree, A. Hunter. Science in the Federal Gov-
ernment, a history of policies and activities to
1940. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1957. 460 p.
57-5484 Q127.U6D78
Edwards, Newton, and Herman G. Richey. The
school in the American social order. Boston,
Houghton Mifflin, 1947. 880 p. [5*4°]
Egbert, Donald Drew, and Stow Persons, eds. So-
cialism and American life. Princeton, Princeton
University Press, 1952. 2 v. [3753]
Ekirch, Arthur A. The idea of progress in
America, 1815-1860. New York, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1944. 305 p. [3754]
Fainsod, Merle, Lincoln Gordon, and Joseph C.
Palamountain. Government and the American
economy. 3d ed. New York, Norton, 1959.
996 p. 59-6084
HD3616.U47F3 1959 [5885]
Fortune. U.S.A., the permanent revolution, by the
editors of Fortune in collaboration with Russell
W. Davenport. New York, Prentice-Hall, 195 1.
xvii, 267 p. [4503]
Frank, Jerome. Courts on trial; myth and reality
in American justice. Princeton, Princeton Uni-
versity Press, 1949. 441 p. [6285]
Frazier, Edward Franklin. The Negro in the
United States. Rev. ed. New York, Macmillan,
1957. xxxiii, 769 p. [4442]
Gabriel, Ralph Henry. The course of American
democratic thought. 2d ed. New York, Ronald
Press, 1956. xiv, 508 p. [3741]
Glazer, Nathan. American Judaism. [Chicago]
University of Chicago Press, 1957. 175 p.
[5458]
Goldman, Eric F. Rendezvous with destiny; a
history of modern American reform. New York,
Knopf, 1952. xiii, 503, xxxvii p. [3455]
Greer, Thomas H. American social reform move-
ments; their pattern since 1865. New York,
Prentice-Hall, 1949. 313 p. [6426]
Hacker, Louis M. The triumph of American capi-
talism; the development of forces in American
history to the end of the nineteenth century. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1946. 460 p.
[5878]
Hall, Thomas Cuming. The religious background
of American culture. Boston, Little, Brown, 1930.
xiv, 348 p. [5394]
Hammond, Bray. Banks and politics in America,
from the Revolution to the Civil War. Princeton,
Princeton University Press, 1957. 771 p. [6000]
Handlin, Oscar. The uprooted; the epic story of
the great migrations that made the American
people. Boston, Little, Brown, 1951. 310 p.
[44"]
Hansen, Marcus Lee. The immigrant in American
history; edited with a foreword by Arthur M.
Schlesinger. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1940. 230 p. [4413]
Hays, Samuel P. The response to industrialism,
1885-1914. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press, 1957. 210 p. 57-6981 HC105.H35
Herberg, Will. Protestant, Catholic, Jew; an essay
in American religious sociology. Garden City,
N.Y., Doubleday, 1955. 320 p. [5488]
Higham, John. Strangers in the land; patterns of
American nativism, 1860-1925. New Brunswick,
N.J., Rutgers University Press, 1955. xiv, 431 p.
[4422]
A History of American life, edited by Arthur M.
Schlesinger and Dixon Ryan Fox. New York,
Macmillan, 1927-48. 13 v. [3085]
Hofstadter, Richard. The American political tra-
dition and the men who made it. New York,
Knopf, 1948. xi, 378, xviii p. [3°99]
Hofstadter, Richard. Social Darwinism in Ameri-
can thought, 1860-1915. Philadelphia, Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Press, 1944. 191 p. [3755]
Hopkins, Charles Howard. The rise of the social
gospel in American Protestantism, 1865-1915.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1940. 352
p. [5489]
Hubbell, Jay Broadus. The South in American
literature, 1 607-1900. [Durham, N.C.] Duke
University Press, 1954. xix, 987 p. [2442]
Huth, Hans. Nature and the American; three cen-
turies of changing attitudes. Berkeley, Uni-
versity of California Press, 1957. xvii, 250 p.
57-12393 QH77.U6H8 [5884n]
APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1085
Kazin, Alfred. On native grounds, an interpreta-
tion of modern American prose literature. New
York, Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942. 541 p. [2449]
Key, Valdimer O. Politics, parties, and pressure
groups. 4th ed. New York, Crowell, 1958.
783 p. 58-6098 JF2051.K4 1958 [6335]
Knight, Grant C. The critical period in American
literature. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 195 1. 208 p. [245°]
Knight, Grant C. The strenuous age in American
literature. Chapel Hill, University of North
Carolina Press, 1954. 270 p. [2451]
Koht, Halvdan. The American spirit in Europe,
a survey of transadantic influences. Philadelphia,
University of Pennsylvania Press, 1949. 289 p.
[3769]
Kouwenhoven, John A. Made in America; the
arts in modern civilization. Garden City, N.Y.,
Doubleday, 1948. xv, 303 p. [5691]
Kraus, Michael. The Atlantic civilization: eight-
eenth-century origins. Ithaca, N.Y., Cornell
University Press, 1949. 334 p. [377°]
Landis, James M. The administrative process.
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1938. 160 p.
[6312]
Larkin, Oliver W. Art and life in America. New
York, Rinehart, 1949. xviii, 547 p. [5693]
Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut. The book in America;
a history of the making and selling of books in
the United States, by Hellmut Lehmann-Haupt
in collaboration with Lawrence C. Wroth and
Rollo G. Silver. 2d [rev. and enl. American] ed.
New York, Bowker, 1951. xiv, 493 p. [6440]
Leigh, Robert D. The public library in the United
States; the general report of the Public Library
Inquiry. New York, Columbia University Press,
1950. 272 p. [6480]
Lerner, Max. America as a civilization; life and
thought in the United States today. New York,
Simon & Schuster, 1957. 1036 p.
57-10979 E169.1.L532
Leuchtenburg, William E. The perils of prosperity,
1914-32. [Chicago] University of Chicago
Press, 1958. 313 p. 58-5680 HC106.3.L3957
Literary history of die United States. Editors:
Robert E. Spiller, Willard Thorp, Thomas H.
Johnson [and] Henry Seidel Canby; associates:
Howard Mumford Jones, Dixon Wecter [and]
Stanley T. Williams. New York, Macmillan,
i948- 3 v- [2460]
Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middle-
town, a study in contemporary American culture.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1929. 550 p.
[4592]
Lynd, Robert S., and Helen Merrell Lynd. Middle-
town in transition; a study in cultural conflicts.
New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1937. xviii, 604 p.
[4593]
Lynes, Russell. The tastemakers. New York,
Harper, 1954. 362 p. [5694]
Macleod, William Christie. The American Indian
frontier. New York, Knopf, 1928. xxiii, 598 p.
[3030]
Mann, Arthur. Yankee reformers in the urban age.
Cambridge, Belknap Press of Harvard University
Press, 1954. 314 p. [4530]
Matthiessen, Francis O. American renaissance; art
and expression in the age of Emerson and Whit-
man. New York, Oxford University Press, 194 1.
xxiv, 678 p. [2476]
Maurer, Herrymon. Great enterprise; growth and
behavior of the big corporation. New York,
Macmillan, 1955. 303 p. [6022]
May, Henry Farnham. Protestant churches and
industrial America. New York, Harper, 1949.
297 p. [5492]
Mencken, Henry L. The American language; an
inquiry into the development of English in the
United States. 4th ed., cor., enl., and rewritten.
New York, Knopf, 1936. xi, 769, xxix p.
Supplement I— II. New York, Knopf,
1945-48. 2 v. [2248]
Miller, Perry. The New England mind; the seven-
teenth century. New York, Macmillan, 1939.
528 p. [3742]
Miller, Perry. The New England mind: from
colony to province. Cambridge, Harvard Univer-
sity Press, 1953. 513 p. [3743]
I086 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Miller, William. The book industry, a report of the
Public Library Inquiry. New York, Columbia
University Press, 1949. xvi, 156 p. [6441]
Mills, Charles Wright. White collar; the American
middle classes. New York, Oxford University
Press, 1951. xx, 378 p. [4553]
Milton, George Fort. The use of presidential power,
1789-1943. Boston, Litde, Brown, 1944. 349 p.
[6146]
Morison, Samuel Eliot. The intellectual life of
colonial New England. [2d ed.] New York,
New York University Press, 1956. 288 p.
[3745]
Morison, Samuel Eliot, and Henry Steele Com-
mager. The growth of the American Republic.
[4th ed., rev. and enl.] New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1950. 2 v. [3I03]
Morris, Lloyd R. Not so long ago. New York,
Random House, 1949. xviii, 504 p. [45 19]
Morris, Lloyd R. Postscript to yesterday; America:
the last fifty years. New York, Random House,
1947. xxvi, 475 p. [3746]
Mott, Frank Luther. American journalism; a his-
tory of newspapers in the United States through
260 years: 1690 to 1950. Rev. ed. New York,
Macmillan, 1950. xiv, 835 p. [2847]
Mott, Frank Luther. A history of American maga-
zines. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1938-57. 4 v. [2915]
Mumford, Lewis. The brown decades; a study of
the arts in America, 1865— 1895. [2d ed.] New
York, Dover, 1955. 266 p. [5695]
Mumford, Lewis. The golden day; a study in
American literature and culture. New York,
Norton [1934?] 283 p. [3731]
Mumford, Lewis. Sticks and stones; a study of
American architecture and civilization. [2d ed.]
New York, Dover, 1955. 238 p. [5701]
Murrell, William. A history of American graphic
humor. New York, Whitney Museum of Ameri-
can Art, 1933-38. 2 v. [5803]
Nef, John U. The United States and civilization.
Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1942.
xviii, 421 p. [4504]
Nevins, Allan, ed. America through British eyes.
[New ed. rev. and enl.] New York, Oxford Uni-
versity Press, 1948. 530 p. [4234]
Oliver, John W. History of American technology.
New York, Ronald Press, 1956. 676 p. [4727]
Parkes, Henry Bamford. The United States of
America, a history. 2d ed., rev. New York,
Knopf, 1959. xviii, 783, xxiv p.
59-6118 E178.P25 1959 [3104]
Parrington, Vernon Louis. Main currents in Amer-
ican thought; an interpretation of American lit-
erature from the beginnings to 1920. New
York, Harcourt, Brace, 1927-30. 3 v. [2485]
Pearce, Roy Harvey. The savages of America, a
study of the Indian and the idea of civilization.
Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, 1953. xv, 252 p.
[3°3J]
Perry, Ralph Barton. Puritanism and democracy.
New York, Vanguard Press, 1944. xvi, 688 p.
[3733]
Persons, Stow. American minds; a history of ideas.
New York, Holt, 1958. 467 p.
58-6318 B851.P4
Persons, Stow, ed. Evolutionary thought in
America. [Edited for the special Program in
American Civilization at Princeton University]
New Haven, Yale University Press, 1950. 462 p.
[3758]
Pickering, Ernest. The homes of America, as they
have expressed the lives of our people for three
centuries. New York, Crowell, 195 1. 284 p.
[57021
Pochmann, Henry A. German culture in America;
philosophical and literary influences, 1600-1900.
With the assistance of Arthur R. Schultz and
others. Madison, University of Wisconsin Press,
1957. xv, 865 p. 55-6791 E169.1.P596
Potter, David M. People of plenty; economic
abundance and the American character. [Chi-
cago] University of Chicago Press, 1954. xxvii,
219 P- [3734]
Pressly, Thomas J. Americans interpret their Civil
War. Princeton, Princeton University Press,
1954. xvi, 347 p. [3407]
APPENDIX: SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / 1087
Purcell, Theodore V. The worker speaks his mind
on company and union. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1953. xix, 344 p. [6055]
Read, Conyers, ed. The Constitution reconsidered.
New York, Columbia University Press, 1938.
xviii, 424 p. [6082]
Riesman, David. The lonely crowd; a study of the
changing American character, by David Riesman
in collaboration with Reuel Denney and Nathan
Glazer. New Haven, Yale University Press,
1950. xvii, 386 p. [4555]
Riesman, David. Faces in the crowd; individual
studies in character and politics, by David Ries-
man in collaboration with Nathan Glazer. New
Haven, Yale University Press, 1952. 751 p.
[4556]
Robert, Joseph C. The story of tobacco in America.
New York, Knopf, 1949. xii, 296, xxiv p.
[5829]
Rosenberg, Bernard, and David Manning White,
eds. Mass culture; the popular arts in America.
Glencoe, 111., Free Press, 1957. 561 p. [6443]
Rossiter, Clinton L. Conservatism in America.
New York, Knopf, 1955. 326 p. [6067]
Rossiter, Clinton L. Seedtime of the Republic; the
origin of the American tradition of political
liberty. New York, Harcourt, Brace, 1953. xiv,
558 p. [6068]
Rourke, Constance M. American humor; a study
of the national character. New York, Harcourt,
Brace, 1931. 324 p. [2501]
Rourke, Constance M. The roots of American cul-
ture and other essays. Edited, with a preface, by
Van Wyck Brooks. New York, Harcourt, Brace,
1942. 305 p. [3736]
Rural life in the United States, by Carl C. Taylor
[and others] New York, Knopf, 1949. xviii,
549, xii p. [4583]
Santayana, George. Character & opinion in the
United States. New York, Scribner, 1920. 233
p. 20-26993 B945.S3C5 [5369]
A paperback reprint is currendy available:
Doubleday, Anchor Books, A73.
Savelle, Max. Seeds of liberty; the genesis of the
American mind. New York, Knopf, 1948. xix,
587, xxxi p. [3747]
Schafer, Joseph. The social history of American
agriculture. New York, Macmillan, 1936. 302
p. [5832]
Schlesinger, Arthur M. Paths to the present. New
York, Macmillan, 1949. 317 p. [3X4°]
Schlesinger, Arthur M., Jr. The age of Jackson.
Boston, Litde, Brown, 1945. xiv, 577 p. [3352]
Schneider, Herbert W. A history of American
philosophy. New York, Columbia University
Press, 1946. xiv, 646 p. [5261]
Schneider, Herbert W. Religion in 20th century
America. Cambridge, Harvard University Press,
1952. 244 p. [5409]
Seldes, Gilbert V. The great audience. New
York, Viking Press, 1950. 299 p. [4895]
Siegfried, Andre. America comes of age, a French
analysis. Translated from the French by Henry
H. Hemming and Doris Hemming. New York,
Harcourt, Brace, 1927. 358 p. [45°6]
Siegfried, Andre. America at mid-century. Trans-
lated by Margaret Ledesert. New York, Har-
court, Brace, 1955. 357 p. [4508]
Siepmann, Charles A. Radio, television and society.
New York, Oxford University Press, 1950. 410
P- [4703]
Sirjamaki, John. The American family in the
twentieth century. Cambridge, Harvard Uni-
versity Press, 1953. 227 p. [4571]
Smith, Cecil Michener. Worlds of music. Phila-
delphia, Lippincott, 1952. 328 p. [5623]
Smith, Henry Nash. Virgin land; the American
West as symbol and myth. Cambridge, Harvard
University Press, 1950. xiv, 305 p. [3759]
Stewart, George R. American ways of life.
Garden City, N.Y., Doubleday, 1954. 310 p.
[452i]
Struik, Dirk Jan. Yankee science in the making.
Boston, Little, Brown, 1948. 430 p. [4730]
Sutton, Francis X., and others. The American
business creed. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1956. 414 p. [6010]
Sweet, William Warren. Religion in the develop-
ment of American culture, 1765-1840. New
York, Scribner, 1952. xiv, 338 p. [54"]
1088 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Taeuber, Conrad, and Irene B. Taeuber. The
changing population of the United States. For
the Social Science Research Council in cooperation
with the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Bureau of the
Census. New York, Wiley, 1958. 357 p. (Cen-
sus monograph series) 57-13451 HB3505.T3
Taft, Robert. Photography and the American
scene, a social history, 1839-1889. New York,
Macmillan, 1938. 546 p. [5781]
Tannenbaum, Frank. Crime and the community.
Boston, Ginn, 1938. xiv, 487 p. [4656]
Thisdethwaite, Frank. The great experiment; an
introduction to the history of the American
people. Cambridge [Eng.] University Press,
1955- 335 P- [3M6]
Tocqueville, Alexis C. H. M. C. de. Democracy in
America. The Henry Reeve text as rev. by
Francis Bowen, now further corr. and edited, with
introd., editorial notes, and bibliographies, by
Phillips Bradley. New York, Knopf, 1945. 2 v.
[45i2]
Tunnard, Christopher, and Henry Hope Reed.
American skyline; the growth and form of our
cities and towns. Boston, Houghton Mifflin,
1955. 302 p. [4609]
Turner, Frederick Jackson. The frontier in Ameri-
can history. New York, Holt, 1950, ci947.
375 P- [3M7]
Turpie, Mary C. A selected list of paintings for the
study of American civilization. Minneapolis,
Program in American Studies, University of
Minnesota, 1953. 109 1. [5757]
Turpie, Mary C, comp. American music for the
study of American civilization, [v. 1] Formal
compositions. Folk and popular songs. Minne-
apolis, Program in American Studies, University
of Minnesota, 1955. 90 1. [5613]
Tyler, Alice (Felt). Freedom's ferment; phases of
American social history to i860. Minneapolis,
University of Minnesota Press, 1944. 608 p.
[4522]
Ulman, Lloyd. The rise of the national trade union;
the development and significance of its structure,
governing institutions, and economic policies.
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1955. xix,
639 p. [6041]
Vanderbilt, Arthur T. Men and measures in the
law; five lectures delivered at the University of
Michigan, Apr. 1948. New York, Knopf, 1949.
xxi, 156, xp. [6270]
Ward, Alfred Dudley, ed. Goals of economic life.
New York, Harper, 1953. 470 p. [5899]
Webb, Walter Prescott. The Great Plains. [Bos-
ton] Ginn, 1931. xv, 525 p. [4*64]
Wecter, Dixon. The hero in America, a chronicle of
hero-worship. New York, Scribner, 194 1. 530 p.
[4533]
Wecter, Dixon. The saga of American society;
a record of social aspiration, 1607-1937. New
York, Scribner, 1937. 504 p. [4534]
Welker, Robert Henry. Birds and men; American
birds in science, art, literature, and conservation,
1800-1900. Cambridge, Belknap Press of Har-
vard University Press, 1955. 230 p. [4741]
White, Edward A. Science and religion in Ameri-
can thought; the impact of naturalism. Stanford,
Stanford University Press, 1952. 117 p. [3761]
White, Morton G. Social thought in America, the
revolt against formalism. New York, Viking
Press, 1949. 260 p. [4545]
Wiener, Philip P. Evolution and the founders of
pragmatism. Cambridge, Harvard University
Press, 1949. xiv, 288 p. [5264]
Williams, Robin M. American society; a sociologi-
cal interpretation. New York, Knopf, 1 95 1. xiii,
545 P- [4558]
Wilson, Francis Graham. The American political
mind; a textbook in political theory. New York,
McGraw-Hill, 1949. 506 p. [6070]
Wisconsin. University. Regionalism in America.
Edited by Merrill Jensen. Madison, University of
Wisconsin Press, 1951. xvi, 425 p. [3785]
Wish, Harvey. Society and thought in America.
New York, Longmans, Green, 1950-52. 2 v.
[3150]
Wittke, Carl F. The Irish in America. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana State University Press, 1956.
319 p. [4498]
APPENDIX! SELECTED READINGS IN AMERICAN STUDIES / I089
Wood, James Playsted. Magazines in the United
States. 2d ed. New York, Ronald Press, 1956.
390 p. [2919]
Wright, Louis B. The first gendemen of Virginia;
intellectual qualities of the early colonial ruling
class. San Marino, Calif., Huntington Library,
i94°- 373 P- [3749]
Wright, Thomas Goddard. Literary culture in
early New England, 1620-1730. Edited by his
wife. New Haven, Yale University Press, 1920.
322 p. [2549]
Years of the modern; an American appraisal. John
W. Chase, ed. New York, Longmans, Green,
1949- 354 P- [4513]
Index
AEF. See American Expeditionary
Force
AFL. See American Federation of
Labor
AFL-CIO. See American Federation of
Labor and Congress of Industrial
Organizations
ASCAP. See American Society of Com-
posers, Authors, and Publishers
A I'abri, 675
Aandahl, Fredrick, ed., 3292
Aaron, Daniel, 6424
ed., 3070
^ Abbot, Charles Greely, about, 4722,
4775
Abbot, Waldo, 4682
Abbott, Charles C, 5976
Abbott, Edith, 4404-5, 4632
Abbott, Francis, ed., 5435
Abbott, George, 2332-33
Abbott, Lyman, about, 5396
Abdy, Edward Strutt, 4311
about, 4310
Abe Lincoln in Illinois, 1752, 2334
Abegglen, James C, 6029
Abel, John Jacob, about, 4722
Abell, A. S., about, 2876
Abell, Aaron I., 5489
Aberdeen, S. Dak., 3897
Abernathy, Cecil, 1046
Abernethy, Thomas Perkins, 3237, 3273,
4072,4103
Abilene, Kans., 4157-58
Abolitionism, 56, 178, 216, 239-40, 449,
562, 662, 2279, 3305, 3366, 3370,
3375. 3380-81, 3401, 3404, 3413,
3431
See also Antislavery movement;
Slavery
Abrams, Charles, 4600
Abrams, Ray H., ed., 5409
Absalom, Absalom!, 1388
Academic freedom. See Teachers and
teaching — academic freedom
Academies (schools), 5155, 5212
New York (State), 5159
Philadelphia, 5130
Acadians
fiction, 745
poetry, 429
See also Cajuns
Accent, 2551
Accident Claims Tribunal, 6299
Acculturation, 3041, 4410-11, 4435,
4447. 4456, 4463
Acheson, Dean, 3543, 6316
Acheson, Sam Hanna, 2866
Ackerman, Edward A., 5900
Across Spoon River, 1599
Across the Board on Tomorrow Morn-
ing, 21 13
Across the Continent, 2301
Across the River and into the Trees,
1499
Across the Wide Missouri, 3330
Act of Darkness, 1 225
Actfive, and Other Poems, 1586
Actors and actresses, 1214, 1221, 2475,
4927-39
biog. (collected), 4931, 4933-34,
4938
motion picture, 4946
Negro, 4921
Adam & Eve & the City, 1 871
Adamic, Louis, 2578-79
about, 2579
Adams, Abigail, 96-100, 3277
about, 99, 2615
Adams, Adeline, ed., 5740
Adams, Agatha B., 1479, 1895
Adams, Andy, 683-87
about, 687
Adams, Brooks, 2601
about, 2601, 6424
Adams, Charles Francis (1 807-1 886),
2580
ed., 97-99
about, 688, 2581
Adams, Charles Francis (1835-1915),
52, 2580-82, 3276-77, 4036
ed., 3279, 3312
about, 2582
Adams, Ephraim Douglass, 3550
Adams, Franklin P., 865
Adams, George P., ed., 5250
Adams, Henry, 688-700, 2580, 3274-
75.33"
about, 688, 941, 1231, 2407, 2480,
2544, 261 6, 3055, 3058
Adams, Herbert B., 3044
about, 4540
Adams, James Truslow, 698, 3088
ed., 2967, 3071
Adams, John, 96, 99, 3276-77, 3279
about, 2608, 3276, 3278-79, 3285,
4034
Adams, John Luther, about, 5433
Adams, John Quincy, 3312
about, 3313,3360, 3529
Adams, Leonic, 1153-54
Adams, Marian, about, 1231
Adams, Nehemiah, ed., 63-64
Adams, Ramon F., 2253
Adams, Randolph G., 6460
Adams, Samuel Hopkins, 1155-60,
2688, 3475
Adams, W. B., 4295
Adams, Walter, ed., 5901
Adams family, 2503
Adamson, W. M., 5909
Addams, Jane, 4614
The Adding Machine, 1689, 2348
Addison, Agnes, 3751
Addison, James T., 5457
Addison, Joseph, about, 381
Addresses. See Lectures and lecturing
Ade, George, 701-5
Adirondack Mountains, 3966, 5064,
. 5765
Adirondack State Park, 3966
Adkins, Nelson F., 134
ed., 160
Adler, Felix, 5289
about, 5435
Adler, John H., 5971
Administrative courts, 6316
Administrative law, 6090, 6181, 6201,
6310-16
Administrative procedure, 6311-12,
6316
Administrative reform, 6316
Admiral of the Ocean Sea, 3 164
Adolescents. See Youth
Adult education, 5105, 5209, 5219,
6482
Adventurers, outlaws, etc., 51, 66, 5523,
5525.5531.5556,5559.5562
Adventures of a Novelist, 721
Adventures of a Young Man, 1332
The Adventures of Augie March, 1921-
22
The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn,
782-83,787-93,811
The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, 778-
83,811
The Adventures of Wesley ]ac\son,
21 19
Advertising, 5962
fiction, 2188
hist., 5958
radio, 4696
television, 4696
Advice to the Privileged Orders, 103
Aeronautics, 4721
flights, 2714-15, 2977, 4788
hist., 5938
IO91
IO92 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Aeronautics, commercial, 5943
finance, 5943
govt, regulation, 5941
hist., 5941
Aeronautics, military, 3643a, 3647,
3676,3711,3717,3727
Aesthetic Papers, 586
The Affluent Society, 5886
Africa
descr., 2282
fiction, 1927, 2096
technical assistance to, 3641
travel & travelers, 2282
After Holbein , 1855
After igoj — What?, 1218
After the Genteel Tradition, 2406
After the Lost Generation, 2371
Agard, Walter R., 3739
Agassiz, Elizabeth (Cary), 4742
Agassiz, Louis, 4742, 4744
about, 4721, 4724, 4742, 5222
The Age of Innocence, 1852, 1855
The Age of Reason, 155
Age of Thunder, 2093
Agee, James, 1907-8
Ager, Trygve M., tr., 1723
Agrarian policy, 3285
Agrarianism, 2421, 3420-21, 5833,
5859, 6358, 6372, 6426-27
Middle West, 3446
Southern States, 3286, 3361, 3451
The West, 3361, 3427
The Agrarians (literary movement),
1464, 1809, 2559
Agribusiness. See Agriculture — econ.
aspects
Agricultural colleges, 2790
Agricultural credit, 5848
Agricultural economics. See Agricul-
ture— econ. aspects
Agricultural education, 5191, 5836
Agricultural extension work, 5836,
5851
Agricultural fairs, 5827
Agricultural labor, 5846
Agricultural machinery, 5830
Agricultural organizations, 3421
Agricultural products, 5818-19, 5847
hist., 5820
marketing, 5845
Middle Atlantic States, 4329
New England, 4329
New York (State), 4237-38
Northwest, Old, 4329
Ohio, 41 19
Pa., 4237-38
Southern States, 4239
Agricultural research, 2790, 5836, 5857
Agriculture, 2943, 2947, 2951-53,
5819-61
cooperatives, 5842
dictionary, 5849
econ. aspects, 4579, 4581-82, 5819,
5832-34, 5838, 5841, 5843-44,
5847, 5850, 5861, 5877, 6358
govt, regulation, 5831, 5838, 5853-
56, 5860
handbooks, manuals, etc., 5849
hist., 5819-38
Colonial period, 5821
to i860, 5820, 5823
Agriculture— Continued
price supports, 5855, 5860
soc. aspects, 5899
stat., 4329
yearbooks, 2947, 2951
Calif., 4372
Fla., 4248-50
Ga., 4248-50
Great Plains, 4164
Ky., 4276
Middle West, 5831
Mo., 4108
New England, 4031, 4266, 5840
N.J., 4053
New York (State), 4242-46, 4266
N.C., 4090, 4248-50, 4276
N. Dak., 4165
Northwest, Pacific, 4214
Northwestern States, 4147, 4212
Ohio, 4276
Pa., 4054, 4242-46, 4266
S.C., 4248-50, 4276
Southern States, 4079, 4083, 4266
Tenn., 4276
Tex., 4194
The West, 4156, 4160
Agriculture and state, 5831, 5833-34,
5837-38, 5851-61
Agwani, Mohammed Shafi, 3588
Ah, Wilderness!, 1648, 2327
Ahlstrom, Sydney E., 5424
Ahnebrink, Lars, 2365
Ahrens, Maurice R., 5224
Aiken, Conrad Potter, 844, 1 161-66,
1364
ed., 2344
about, 1 1 65
Aiken, George L., 2347
Aikin, Wilford M., 5131
Aikman, Duncan, 4176
The Air-Conditioned Nightmare, 161 3
Air Force, about, 3643a
Air Materiel Command, about, 3643a
Air Transport Command, hist., 1551
Air University, about, 3643a
Airlines, 5920, 5941, 5943
Akers, Dwight, 5054
Al Aaraaf, Tamerlane, and Minor Po-
ems, 523-27
Al Que Quiere! , 1881
Alabama, 3953, 4079, 4099
editorial, sketches, etc., 194-97, 379-
80, 1907
fiction, 1792-95, 1836-38
folksongs & ballads, 5565
guidebook, 3848
hist., 4099, 4104
Alabama claims, 3444
Alaska, 2719-20, 2751, 3554, 3968,
4218-19
climate, 2953
fiction, 2162
guidebook, 3940
hist., 3968, 4219
Indian art, 3016
place names, bibl., 2976
purchase, 3429
short stories, 1048-52, 1058
Albany, N.Y., 3807
Albemarle County, Va., guidebook,
3828
Albertson, Frederick W., 2966
Alberty, Harold B., 5158
Albion, Robert Greenhalgh, 5937, 5951
Albree, John, ed., 672
Albright, Spencer D., 6400
Albright, William Foxwell, 5426
about, 5426
Albro, John A., 59, 65
Albuquerque, N. Mex., 4176, 4187
Alcoa, about, 5908
Alcott, Amos Bronson, 186-87
about, 186, 2280, 5220, 5265-66,
5305
Alcott, Louisa May, 188-89
about, 188, 2615
Alden, John Richard, 3238, 4072
ed., 3683
Alderfer, Evan B., 5902
Alderfer, Harold F., 3475
Alderman, S. S., 3562
Aldrich, Richard, 5626
Aldrich, Thomas Bailey, 706-15
about, 2277, 2922
Aldridge, Alfred Owen, 3187
Aldridge, John W., 2371, 2373
ed., 2372
Aleck. Maury, 1466
Alexander, Carter, 5098
Alexander, De Alva Stanwood, 6150
Alexander, Hartley Burr, 3015
Alexander's Bridge, 1 277
Alexandria, Va., guidebook, 3829
Alfred Venison's Poems, 1666
Alfriend, Edward M., 2305
The Algerian Captive, 168
The Alhambra, 381
Alias Simon Suggs, 379
Alice Adams, 1802, 1805
Alien and Sedition Acts, 3308
Aliens, 4404-5, 4468, 61 17, 6120, 6122
All God's Chillun Got Wings, 1648
All My Sons, 2043, 2046, 2335-36
All the King's Men, 2197
All the Young Men, 1553
The Allegash and East Branch, 594
Allegheny, Pa., hist., 3817
Allegheny County, Pa., 4591
Allegheny Mountains, travel & travelers,
4350
Allegheny River, 3992
Allegiance, 3129, 4526, 4773, 6107,
6115, 61 18
See also Loyalty oaths
Allen, Arthur A., 2962
Allen, C. R., 5211
Allen, Charles, 2914
Allen, Edward L., 5903
Allen, Elizabeth L., 4443
Allen, Ethan, 5251, 5408
fiction, 580-82
Allen, Francis H., comp., 599
Allen, Fred, 4964
about, 4964
Allen, Frederick Lewis, 3476-78, 3782,
4514,5978
Allen, Gardner W., 3678, 3685-86
Allen, Gay Wilson, 620, 647, 660
ed., 645, 648, 2349
Allen, Harry C, 3551
Allen, Harry K., 5164
INDEX / IO93
Allen, Hervey, 1167-71, 1512
ed., 3969, 3977. 3996-4017
Allen, Hollis P., 5099
Allen, James Lane, 716-20, 2296
about, 716
Allen, Jerry, 813
Allen, John Edward, 2900
Allen, Jules Verne, 5503
Allen, Paul, 109
Allen, Raymond B., 4855
Allen, Robert S., 6195
ed., 6195, 6207
Allen, Shirley W., 5862
Allen County, Ohio, guidebook, 3869
Allred, B. W., 2966
Allston, Washington, about, 5760
Almanacs, 122, 131-32, 2493
Almond, Gabriel A., 3609
Almy, Millie, 5148
Alnwick. Castle, 324-25
Along This Way, 1539
Alsberg, Henry G., ed., 3822, 3924-25
The Altar of the Dead, 1 o 1 2
Alterton, Margaret, 534
Altgeld, John Peter
about, 3446
fiction, 1978
Altitudes, 2970
Aluminum Company of America, about,
5908
Alvord, Clarence Walworth, 41 28
ed., 4126-32
about, 3058
Always the Land, 1969
Always the Young Strangers, 1732
Amacher, Richard E., ed., 130
Amaranth, 1714
Amargosa Desert, 3947
The Ambassadors, 998-99
about, 1009
Amberg, George, 4967
Ambler, Charles Henry, 3271, 4089
Amdur, Leon H., 4780
America (song), about, 5616
America in literature
European, 3771-72
French, 3773
bibl., 3773
America Was Promises, 1586
The American, 987-88
The American, a Middle Western
Legend, 1978
American Academy of Pediatrics.
Committee for the Study of Child
Health Services, 4841
American Academy of Political and
Social Science, Philadelphia, 6106
The American Adam, 2459
American Antiquarian Society, Wor-
cester, Mass., about, 6447
American Anti-Slavery Society, about,
336o, 3370
American Arbitration Association,
about, 6299
American Association for Gifted Chil-
dren, 5205
American Association of School Ad-
ministrators, 5106, 5240
American Automobile Association, 2952
about, 5005
American Bar Association, about, 6307,
6331-32
American Chemical Society, about,
4731
American Child, 1972
American Civil Liberties Union, about,
6106, 6127, 6322
American Colonization Society, about,
3370.3375. 43™
The American Commonwealth, 4499
American Council of Learned Societies,
5100
American Council of Learned Societies.
Committee on Linguistic and Na-
tional Stocks in the Population of
the United States, 4390
American Council on Education. Co-
operative Study of Evaluation in
General Education, 5160
The American Crisis, 155
The American Democrat, 265-67
American Dialect Society, 2254-62
American Education Fellowship, 513 1
American Educational Research Asso-
ciation, 5247
American English, 2237, 2243, 2245,
5127
See also Language
American Estimates, 2396
American Expeditionary Force, about,
3710
American Expeditionary Force. Divi-
sion of Urology, about, 4832
American Farm Bureau Federation,
about, 5831, 5859
American Federation of Labor, 5906
about, 6034-36, 6050, 6052, 6360
American Federation of Labor and
Congress of Industrial Organiza-
tions, about, 6034, 6049
American Federation of Musicians,
about, 5619
American Folklore Society, 5518
about, 5518
American Foundation for Political Edu-
cation, 3617
American Foundation for the Blind,
about, 4636
American Fur Company, about, 4148,
6024
American Geographical Society of New
York, hist., 2941
American Guide Series, 3786-3941
American Harvest, 2354
American Heritage, 2339
American Historical Association, 3050,
6224
American Historical Association. Com-
mission on the Social Studies, 51 16
An American Hunter, 1724
American Ideas for English Readers, 461
An American in Paris (music), 5678
American Indians. See Indians, Amer-
ican
American Institute of Chemical Engi-
neers, 4793
American Issues, 2355
American Jewish Congress, about, 6106
American Law Institute, 6280
American Legion, about, 3645
American Library Association, 6482
about, 6486
American Library Association. Coor-
dinating Committee on Revision
of Public Library Standards, 6480
American Life in Literature, 2340
American Literature and the Dream,
2400
American Medical Association, about,
4806-7,4882,4885
American Men of Letters [1st ser.],
2277-82
about, 1 136
American Men of Letters [2d. ser.],
2283-89
The American Mercury, 1602
The American Mind, 2491
American Newspaper Publishers Asso-
ciation, about, 2855
The American 'Notebooks, 349
The American of the Future, 2469
American Outpost, 1757
American Party, about, 4515
American Philosophical Society, Phila-
delphia, 4059
about, 4718
American Psychiatric Association, 4833
about, 4837
hist., 4833, 4863
American Quarterly, 2553
American Railway Express Company,
about, 4667
American Renaissance, 585, 2476
American Revolution, 3089, 3139, 3157.
3237-72, 3678-84, 4038
campaigns & battles, 3238-39, 3680,
3682-83, 4251
sources, 3239
causes, 3128, 3176, 3188, 3231, 3237-
38, 3241, 3243, 3246, 3255, 3257-
58, 3261-62, 3265, 3272, 3304
commerce, 5948
diplomatic hist., 3519, 3528, 3569
econ. aspects, 6016
European opinion, 3769
foreign participation, 3238, 3248-50,
3269, 3773
for. rel., 3187, 3239, 3272
hist., 2608, 2673, 3179, 3189-90,
3266, 3277, 3279
sources, 3183-84, 3260, 3277
in art, 5775
labor condit., 6057
military hist., 3238-39, 3255, 3261,
3269, 3271-72
sources, 3239
mutinies, 3264
naval operations, 3678
personal narratives, 3244, 4251
politics, 2740
religious aspects, 5406, 541 1, 5477
treason, 3264
American Revolution in literature
drama, 105, 1477
fiction, 239, 252-57, 405, 409-11,
546-47, 552-53. 579-82, 766-67,
1222, 1239-40, 1355, 1442, 1695,
1707-11, 1730, 1916, 1974, 1976-
77
letters, 96-100
1094 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
American Revolution in literature —
Continued
pamphleteering works, 138, 147,
154-60
poetry, 134-39, 146, 148, 165, 167,
323
satire, 147, 165, 167
The American Rhythm, 1 196
The American Scene, 1002-3
The American Scholar, 283
about, 230
American Society of Composers, Au-
thors, and Publishers (ASCAP),
about, 5621, 5681
American Society of Equity, about, 5831
American Song, 1968
The American Spirit in Letters, 2532
The American Spirit in Literature, 2491
American studies programs, 2553, 5184
American Telephone and Telegraph
Company, about, 4673, 4710
American Theatre Wing War Service,
Inc., about, 4919
The American Tradition in Literature,
2324
An American Tragedy, 1338
American Unitarian Association, about,
5472
The American Way, 1548
The American Way of Poetry, 2530
The American Weekly Mercury, about,
2854,2880
The American Writer and the European
Tradition, 2412
American Writers Series, 2290—96
Americanisms (language), 2236-41,
2243-48, 2250, 2252, 2269, 2272,
2466, 5127
See also Language
Americans in Great Britain (Colonial
period), 3227
America's Coming-of-Age, 2380
America's Lost Plays, 2297-2317
Ames, E. S., 5289
Amherst, Mass., in literature, 984
Amherst College, 2674
curriculum, 5199
hist., 5200
Amish in Pennsylvania, 4058, 4480
Ammen, Daniel, 3700
Amnesty (1861-98), 3388
Among the Corn-Rows, 893
Among the Hills, 669
Amory, Cleveland, 4035
Ampere, Jean Jacques Antoine, 4358-59
about, 4358
Amphibious warfare, 3668
The Anatomy of Nonsense, 2544
Ancestors' Brocades, 851
&, 1313
And Gladly Teach, 2491
And in the Human Heart, 1 1 66
And Still the Waters Run, 3025
Anderson, Charles A., ed., 5466
Anderson, Charles R., ed., 1046
Anderson, Gordon V., 5229
Anderson, Hobson Dewey, 6043
Anderson, John, 4905
Anderson, Lee, 2350
Anderson, Marian, 5673
about, 5673
Anderson, Mary, 2584
about, 2584
Anderson, Maxwell, 1 171-77, 2332-33,
2335-37, 2348
Anderson, Nels, 5465
Anderson, Odin W., 4886
Anderson, Oscar E., 4794
Anderson, Paul Russell, 5251
Anderson, Sherwood, 832, 1178-87
about, 959, 1182, 1186, 1188-89,
2372, 2406, 2419, 2429
Anderson, William, 6131, 6196
Andersonville, 1544
Andover House, Boston, about, 5438
Andover Review, 5438
Andover Theological Seminary, about,
5438
Andre, 2337, 2347
Andrews, Charles M., 3176-77, 3202
about, 3046
Andrews, E. A., 4724
Andrews, Frank Emerson, 4615-16,
4623
Andrews, J. B., 6033
Andrews, J. Cutler, 2851
Andrews, Kenneth R., 814
Andrews, Wayne, 5698
Andria, 1864
Anesthesia, hist., 4816
The Angel that Troubled the Waters.
1864
Angell, J. R., about, 5389
Angell, James Burrill, about, 5223
Angels and Earthly Creatures, 1903
Anghiera, Pietro Martire d', 3153
Angle, Paul M., 3395, 6469
ed., 3143,3391
Anglo-American folklore
Ky., 5529, 5546
Mississippi River, 5523
N.C., 5529
Ozark Mountains, 5543
Southwestern States, 5518
Tex., 5518
Va., 5529
The West, 5526
Anglo-American folksongs and ballads,
5504, 555°, 5566
bibl., 5550
hist., 5566
theories, methods, etc., 5550, 5566
Appalachian Mountains, 5583
Blue Ridge Mountains, 5582
Buchanan County, Va., 5582
Ind., 5571
Maine, 5566
N.C., 5582
Southern States, 5583
Tex., 5521
Anglo-American legends
Southwestern States, 5518
Tex., 5518, 5521
Anglo-French War. See French and
Indian War (1755-63)
Anglo-Israel movement, 5439
Angoff, Charles, 4458
The Animal Kingdom, 1201, 2333
Animal lore and mythology, 5513
Ga., 910-16, 922, 924-25
Ky., 5546
Mich., 5535
Animal lore and mythology — Continued
Mo., 5528
N. Mex., 5537
Ozark Mountains, 5544
Animal, Vegetable, Mineral, 2413
Animals, 2954-56, 2960
domestic, 4276
editorials, sketches, etc., 1724-25
hist., 2955
in art, 5806
in folksongs, 5559, 5563-64
prairies, 4188
short stories, 1786, 1790
Death Valley, Calif., 4205
New World, 3155
New York (Colony), 4237-38, 4241
Pa., 4237-38, 4241
S.C., 5087
Ann Viewers, 1565
Anna Christie, 1648
Annand, George, maps, 4001, 4017
Annapolis, Md., 3825
Anne Boleyn, 207-8
Anne of the Thousand Days, 2335
Anni Mirabiles, 1235
Annie Allen, 1938
Anniversary, 1579
Another Animal, 2350
Another Part of the Forest, 1990
Antarctic expeditions, 2977-78
Antheil, George, 4968
Anthony Adverse, 11 69
Anthropology, 2986-87, 2989, 2993,
2998, 3006, 3010, 4192, 4722, 5351
See also Ethnology
Antin, Mary, about, 2585
Antioch College, 5125, 5196
The Antioch Review, 2554
Antipathies, 517
Antiques
collectors & collecting, 5596, 5598
dictionary, 5596
Antiquities. See Archaeology and pre-
history
Anti-Semitism, 4457, 4462
Antislavery movement, 2689, 3360,
3370, 3375 .
See also Abolitionism; American Anu-
Slavery Society; Slavery
Anti-Slavery Papers, 463
Ander (Omaha) Reservation, 3042
Apache Indians, 3004, 3010, 3035
Apartment in Athens, 1839
Aphorisms, 3152
Apologetics, 5338
The Apostle, 1190
Appalachian Mountain region, 2933,
3958,3963
folksongs & ballads, 5583
Appellate procedure, 6302, 6304
Appellate review, 6234
The Apple of the Eye, 1 839
Apples by Ocean, 1296
Appleseed, Johnny. See Chapman,
John
Appleton, LeRoy H., 2967
Appointment in Samarra, 2070
Appomattox Court House, 2580
Apportionment (election law), 6163
Apprenticeship, 5210
April Twilights, 1277
INDEX / IO95
Aptitude tests, 5229
Arab States, relations with, 3588
Arapaho Indians, 3041, 4160
Arber, Edward, ed., 71
Arbitration, industrial, 6058, 6299
Arbitration and award (law), 6282,
6289, 6299
Arbolino, J. N., 5197
Archaeology and prehistory, 2989-97
mounds & moundbuilders, 2996, 4323
Calif., 3002
The East, 2990
Southwestern States, 2992
Archer, Gleason L., 4683
Architecture, 3969, 3751, 3758, 5698-
5725
bibl., 5709
Colonial, 3747-48, 5706, 5713-14,
5721-23, 5725, 5796
Creole, 5703
domestic, 5698, 5702, 5707, 571 1-
13. 57i7-i8, 5721-22, 5725, 5732,
5794- 5796
exhibitions, 5717-18
Georgian, 5714
Greek, 5708-9, 5719
hist., 5689, 5695, 5698, 5703, 5710,
57M
Indian, 5723
library, 6474, 6478
modern, 5705, 5711-12, 5717-18
Spanish, 5703, 5723
Conn., 5707
Nashville, 3765
Northwest, Old, 5719
Ohio, 4 1 21
Southern States, 5706
Southwest, New, 5723
Archives, 3066-67
management & functions, 3063
Arciniegas, Germin, 3172
Arctic expeditions, 2979-8 1
Ardennes, Battle of the, 3720
Argentina, relations with, 3514
Aria da Capo, 1608, 2332
Ariel Poems, 1359
Aristocracy. See Upper class
Arizona, 2737, 4199
archaeology, 2992
architecture, Spanish, 5723
descr., 5073
deserts, 3947
guidebooks, 3925-26
hist., 3956, 3961, 4189, 4199
Indians, 3023
Navajo Indians, 3013
music, 5630
short stories, 1762
travel & travelers, 4378
writers & writings, 4199
Arkansas, 3960, 4079, 4102
econ. condit., 4102
folklore, 5542
folksongs & ballads, 5569
frontier life, 4097-98
guidebooks, 3853-54
hist., 4102
poetry, 1434
Arkansas River and valley, 3984
The Arkansas Traveler, about, 5507,
5542
Armaments, 3525, 3674
Armed Forces. See specific branches,
e.g., Navy
Armed Neutrality, 3528
The Armed Vision, 2443
Armenians, 4435
Arminians, 5472
Armistice (1918), 3470
Armitage, Merle, ed., 4968, 5678
Arms, George W., 969, 976, 2374
Arms, John Taylor, about, 5783
Armstrong, Henry, about, 5025
Armstrong, Maurice W., ed., 5466
Army, 3643, 3653-65. 37°9
hist., 2710-n, 3648, 3651-52, 3657,
3659, 3661-64, 4040
American Revolution, 2673, 3681
Civil War, 3693, 3697, 3702,
3705
World War I, 3709-10
World War II, 3726
mobilizations, 3661
organization, 3648, 3681
recruiting, enlistment, etc., 3661,
3665,3702,3709
Army. American Expeditionary Force,
about, 3710
Army. Armored Force, about, 3658
Army. Cavalry, hist., 3659
Army. General Staff Corps, about,
3653,3712
Army. Information and Education Di-
vision. Research Branch, about,
3724
Army. Medical Dept., hist., 4809
Army Air Forces, about, 3717, 3727
Army Ground Forces, about, 3726
Army Life in a Black. Regiment, 2280
Army of Northern Virginia, 3695
Army of the Potomac, 3690-92, 3701,
3706
Army Service Forces, about, 3726
Army technical services, 3726
Arnold, Benedict, about, 2617, 2804,
3149,3264
Arnold, Byron, comp., 5565
Arnold, Henry H., 3717
Arnold, Matthew, about, 2545
Arnold, Willard B., 1812
Arny, William F. N., about, 3035
Arp. Bill, pseud. See Smith, Charles
Henry
An Arrant Knave c? Other Plays, 2308
Arrowood, Charles F., 5122
Arrowsmith, 1562
Arsenic and Old Lace, 2334
Art, 4741, 4743, 5351, 5688-97, 5726-
32, 5807
foreign influences, 3768, 3774
hist., 5689-93, 5695
Indian, 2991, 3016-17, 5785
Navajo, 3013
Northwest coast, 2998
Penobscot, 301 1
Plains, 3006, 3018
industries. See Arts and crafts
Italian, 4497
museums. See Museums.
Pennsylvania German, 4480
philosophy of. See Esthetics
Charleston, S.C., 3763
Art — Continued
Newport, R.I., 4040
Ohio, 4121
Philadelphia, 3764
See also Artists; Cartoons; Comic
strips; Decorative arts; History and
art; Painting; Prints; Sculpture
Art and state, 5697, 6130
The Art of Fiction, 986, 1010, 1014
The Art of the Novel, 1004
The Art of Worldly Wisdom, 2098
Arthur, Chester A., about, 3437
Arthur, Timothy Shay, 190-91
Arthur Mervyn, 116-17
Arthur's Home Magazine, 190
Articles of Confederation, 3253, 3302,
6077
Articles on American Literature, 2457,
2552
Articulation (education), 5107, 5131,
. 5217
Artisans, Colonial, 6044
Artists, 3757, 4198, 5690, 5695, 5760-
76, 5779-8o, 5783, 5797, 5802.
5806-7
See also Painters; Sculptors
Arts and crafts, 3748, 3969, 5593-5604,
5787, 5919, 6044
design, 5594, 5600
hist., 5594, 5602-3
Indian, 2993
Pennsylvania German, 5594, 5599-
5600
Shakers, 5594
themes, motives, 5594, 5600
Mo., 4108
Southern States, 4083
See also Decorative arts
Arundel, 1708
Arvin, Newton, 443, 481, 2284, 2406
ed., 348, 700
As I Lay Dying, 1384
As 1 Remember It, 1269
As If, 1953
Asbury, Francis, 5475
about, 2586, 5463, 5474-75
Asbury, Herbert, 2586-88, 4523, 5474
about, 2587
Asch, Shalom, 1190-94
about, 1 1 95
Asgis, Alfred J., 4842
Ash Wednesday, 1357, 1359
about, 1367
Ashburn, Percy M., 4809
Asheim, Lester, 6477
ed., 6454, 6480
Asheville, N.C., fiction, 1887-88
Ashley, William H., about, 4175
Ashmore, Harry S., 5206
Ashton, Wendell J., 2867
Ashworth, Mary Wells, 3271
Asia
fiction, 2088, 2097
relations with, 3591, 3596
technical assistance to, 3641
travel & travelers, 2282
Asia Minor
fiction, 1979
travel & travelers, 677-78
The Asiatics, 2088
Asirvatham, Eddy, 5496
IO96 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Askov, Minn., 4406
Aspects of Fiction and Other Ventures
in Criticism, 2466
The Aspern Papers, 1007, 1014
Asseff, Emmett, 4100
Assembly-line methods, 6055
Associated Press, about, 2860
Association for Education by Radio-
Television, 5230
Association for Higher Education, 5228
Association of American Law Schools,
6090
Association of American Universities,
5163
Association of American University
Presses, about, 6439
Association of Land-Grant Colleges,
5186
The Assyrian, 21 1 8
Aston, Tony, about, 5661
Astor, John Jacob, about, 5882, 6024
Astoria, Oreg., 391, 4148, 6024
Astrology, 5541
Astrophysics, 4722
Aswell, E. C., 1892
Asylums, 19th cent., 4310
At Heaven's Gate, 2195
At Home and Abroad, 414
Athearn, Robert G., 4223
Atherton, Gertrude Franklin (Horn),
721-25, 3943
about, 721
Atherton, Lewis Eldon, 4109
Athletics, 4989
college, 4993, 4999
high school, 5000
Atkins, Gaius Glenn, 5454
Atkins, John A., 1 501
Atkinson, Brooks, 1548, 4907
ed., 300, 591
Atlanta, Ga., 3838, 4704
Atlantic cable, 4677
Atlantic coastal plain, 2933
The Atlantic Monthly, 368, 449, 706,
964,2555,2922
Atlantic seaboard. See Eastern sea-
board
Atlases and maps, 3786, 4486
climate, 2952
historical geography, 2967, 2972,
2974
language, 2268-69
Atomic energy
hist., 4747
in literature, 1992, 2682
Atomic physics, 4722
Atomic warfare, 3621, 3629
The Attack on Leviathan, 3781
Attitudes Toward History, 2387
Attorney General's Committee on Ad-
ministrative Procedure, 6316
Atwood, E. Bagby, 2263
Atwood, Wallace W., 2933, 4172
Auchincloss, Louis, 1909-13
Auden, W. H., 2512
ed., 537, 1003
about, 2378, 2426
Audiences
motion picture, 4895, 4959
radio, 4700-3, 4895
television, 4699, 4702-4, 4895
Audio-visual methods in education,
5231,5246
Audubon, John James, 4743-44
about, 2210, 2624, 4724, 4734, 4741,
4743
Augur, Helen, 3154
August, John, pseud. See De Voto,
Bernard A.
Augusta, Ga., 3839
Augusta, Maine, 3793-94
Augustana College, Rock Island, 111.,
about, 4483
Aumann, Francis R., 6219
Aurora, 141
Aurora Dawn, 2229
The Auroras of Autumn, 1784
Austin, Mary (Hunter), 1196-98
about, 1 196
Austin, Moses, 3314
about, 3314
Austin, Samuel, ed., 28
Austin, Stephen Fuller, 3314
about, 3314
Australia, relations with, 3556
Australian ballot, 6400
Austria in literature, 1245
Austrians, 4414
Ausiibel, Nathan, tr., 1191
The Author of Beltraffio, 1007
Author-publisher relations, 6449-50
Authors and authorship, 2371, 2373,
2391, 2405, 3746, 3757
biog. (collected), 2433, 2454-55,
2526
dictionaries, 2433, 2454-55
radio & television, 4697
Calif., 2536
Southwest, 2525
Authors as journalists
(1764-1819), 109, 134, 141, 154-60
(1820-70), 190, 192, 209, 216, 280,
313, 319. 365, 422. 445. 449. 463.
520, 546, 556, 558-59, 585, 612,
619, 655, 657, 662, 674, 677,
2278-79, 2294
(1871-1914), 701, 704, 732, 768,
836, 862, 878-80, 887, 910, 926,
942, 959, 964, 1048, 1 107, 1 126,
1136,2479,2923
(1915-39), 1214, 1409, 1602-5,
1809, 1859, 2398, 2503
(1940-55), 1992, 2017, 2029, 2057,
2133, 2139, 2149
Authors Today and Yesterday, 2455
Authorship in the South before the
War, 1 103-4
Autobiography. See Biography and
autobiography; Biography, col-
lected
The Autobiography of Alice B. Tobias,
1771
The Autobiography of an Idea, 5715
The Autocrat of the Br eahjast -Table,
371-74
Automation, 6003
Automobile industry, 4138, 5940
finance, 5963
workers, 6055
Automobile motoring, 5002, 5005
Automobile racing, 5001, 5003-7
Automobile Workers' Union, about,
6039
Automobiles, 4519, 5005
Automotive transportation, 5942
AutresTemps, 1851, 1855
Autumn, 1635
The Autumn Garden, 1991, 2335
Averill, Gerald, 2590
about, 2590
Avery, Clara Louise, 5784
Aviation. See Aeronautics
Avon's Harvest, 1714
Awake and Sing!, 2064, 2348
Award (law). See Arbitration and
award (law)
Axel's Castle, 2535
Axt, Richard G., 5165
Ayars, Christine Merrick, 5628
Aydelotte, Frank, 5178
Ayer (N. W.) & Son, Inc., about, 5958
Ayers, Lucille, 2258
Ayres, C. E., 2407
Azalia, 920
Aztec culture, 2997
B
The B. O. W. S., 4919
B.P.O.E. See Elks, Benevolent and
Protective Order of
Babbitt, Irving, 2375, 241 1, 2425, 51 15,
5259
about, 2375, 2479
Babbitt, 1 561
Babcock, Kendric Charles, 4482
Babes in Toyland (operetta), about,
5681
Baby Doll, 2220
Bach, George Leland, 5983
Bach Choir, Bethlehem, Pa., about, 2667
Bachman, George W., 4862
Back Home, 2736
Back-trailers from the Middle Border,
898-99
Background to Glory, 3239
Background in Tennessee, 1743
Backgrounds of American Literary
Thought, 2441
Backlund, Jonah Oscar, 2895
A Backward Glance O'er Travel'd
Roads, 626-27
Backwoods to Border, 5507
Bacon, Eugene H, 3643
Bacon's Rebellion, fiction, 226
Bacteriology, 4722, 4831
Bad Lands, 2683
The Bad Seed, 1177
Bade, William F., ed., 1079, 1081-82
Badger, Kingsbury M., 2319
Baehr, Harry W., 2868
Baer, Julius B., 5952
Bagby, Ellen M., ed., 193
Bagby, George Williams, 192-93
Bailey, James O., 2377
Bailey, Joseph Cannon, 5851
Bailey, Liberty Hyde, about, 2790
Bailey, Robeson, ed., 5071
Bailey, Thomas A., 3471, 3517, 3560
Bainbridge, John, 2920, 4952
Bainton, Roland H, 5423
INDEX / IO97
Baird, Lucy Hunter, 4744
Baird, Spencer Fullerton, about, 4724,
4744, 4775
Bakeless, John E., 3155, 3239-40, 3299
Baker, Carlos H., 1502
ed., 2355
Baker, Elizabeth (Faulkner), 6455
Baker, Franklin T., ed., 373
Baker, George Pierce, about, 4940
Baker, Gladys, 5852
Baker, Harry J., 5207
Baker, Melvin C., 5120
Baker, Newton D., about, 3713
Baker, Oliver E., 4579, 5816
Baker, Ray Stannard, 2591-96, 3470-
71
ed., 3469
about, 2592-96, 6432
Baker, Richard Terrill, 2910
Bakewell, C. M., 5252, 5332
Balboa, Vasco Nunez de, about, 3167
Balboa Park (San Diego, Calif.), guide-
book, 3932
Balcony Stories , 1034-35
Bald, Frederick Clever, 4137
Balderston, J. L., 2332
Baldwin, Hanson W., 3615, 3618, 3646
Baldwin, James, 1914-15
Baldwin, James Mark, about, 5262
Baldwin, Joseph Glover, 194-97, 2296
Baldwin, Leland D., 3103, 3280, 4061,
4110
Balfour, Walter, 5428
Balkans, relations with, 3516
The Ballad of the Sad Cafe, 2024
Ballads. See Folksongs and ballads;
Songs
Ballads for Sale, 1584
Ballads of Square-Toed Americans, 1 295
Ballanta, Nicholas, 5540
Ballantine, Joseph W., 3589
Ballet, 4967, 4969-71, 5656-57
Ballot, 6400
Ballou, Hosea, 5428, 5473
about, 5473
Baltimore, Lord, about, 5396, 5419
Baltimore
editorials, sketches, etc., 1602
hist., 4062
law, 6284, 6291
public health, 4867
soc. life & cust., 4062, 4263
Balz, A. G. A., 5289
Bamberger, B. J., 4458
Bancroft, Frederic, 3359
Bancroft, George, about, 2462, 3057-
58, 3060, 3776
Bancroft, Hubert Howe, about, 3048
Band of Angels, 2201
Bandler, Bernard, II, 2425
Bands (music), 5653
Bank of the U.S.
first, 4059, 6000
second, 3126, 5999-6000
Bank Street Schools, New York (City),
5234
The Banker's Daughter, 2307
Bankhead, Tallulah, 4928
about, 4928
The Bankrupt, 2300
Banks and banking, 5972, 5974-75,
5983, 5986, 6002
hist., 5979, 5988, 6000
Boston, 5984
Chicago, 5985
New York (City), 5993
Banner by the Wayside, 1 158
Banners, 2413
Banning, George Hugh, 5931
Banning, William, 5931
Banta, Richard E., 4003
Baptists, 5404, 5442
hist., 5413, 5443
Bar associations, hist., 6325
Barba, Preston A., 2266
The Barbary Coast, 2586
Barbary Shore, 2027
Barbary States, relations with, 3686
Barbash, Jack, 4672, 6031
Barbella, Rocco. See Graziano, Rocky
Barber, Hollis W., 3619
Barber, Rowland, 5028
Barber, Samuel, about, 5674
Barck, Oscar Theodore, 3452
Bardeche, Maurice, 4944
Barefoot in Athens, 1176
Barger, Harold, 5819. 5907, 5920, 5944
Barghoorn, Frederick Charles, 3561
Baring Brothers and Company, hist.,
5980
Barker, Charles A., 4535
Barker, Eugene C, 3314
ed., 3314
Barker, Howard F., 4390
Barker, James Nelson, 66, 198-200,
2337. 2347
about, 198
Barker, Shirley Frances, 1916-20
Barker, Virgil, 5742
Barkley, Alben W., 2597-98, 2892
about, 2598
Barlow, Joel, 10 1-4
about, 10 1
The Barly Fields, 1637
Barnard, Charles, 2314
Barnard, Ellsworth, 1717
Barnard, Harry, 3418-19
Barnard, Henry, about, 51 16, 5128
Barnes, A. C, 5290
Barnes, Al G., about. 4982
Barnes, Eric W., 4927
Barnes, Gilbert Hobbs, 3360
Barnes, Harry Elmer, 4540, 4617, 4639
Barnes, Walter, ed., 765
Barnett, James H., 4546
Barnouw, Erik, 4684
Barns, 5724
Barnum, Phineas T., 4977
about, 2617, 2797, 4977
Baron, Salo W., ed., 5267
Baron Rudolph, 2307
Barr, Alfred H., ed., 5689, 5797
Barrell, Joseph, 4715
Barren Ground, 1460-61
Barrett, Clifford, 5252
ed., 5252
Barrett, Edward L., Jr., 61 10-1 1
Barrett, J.Lee, 5016
Barrett, James Wyman, 2889
The Barretts of Wimpole Street, 4919
Barrow, Edward G., 5008
about, 5008
Barrow, Joseph Louis. See Louis, Joe
Barrus, Clara, 2624
Barry, David W., 4702
Barry, Philip, 1199-1203, 2332-34,
2337. 2348
Barry, Phillips, 5566-67
Barrymore, Ethel, 4929
about, 4929
Barrymore, John, about, 4933
Barrymore, Lionel, 4933
about, 4933
Barrymore-Drew family, about, 4929
Barth, A., 4513
Bartlert, Arthur C, 5009
Bartlett, John R., 6447
ed., 89
Bartlett, Ruhl J., ed., 3518
Barton, R. O, 2364
Barton, William, 4758
Bartram, John, 4237-38
about, 4236, 4247, 4745
Bartram, William, 4247-50
about, 4247, 4745
Barzun, Jacques, 5213, 5615
Baseball, 4987, 4990, 4993, 5008-15
short stories, 1554-55
Basler, Roy P., 3395
ed., 420, 3390, 3395
. Bassert, John Spencer, 3057, 3315, 33 1 8
ed., 14, 3318
Bassett, T. D. Seymour, 3753
Basso, Hamilton, 2406
Bataan in literature, 1992
Bateman, Mrs. Sidney F., 2347
Bates, Ernest Sutherland, 2884, 6151
Bates, Ralph S., 4713
Bates, Sanford, 4640
Bathe, Dorothy, 4795
Bathe, Greville, 4795
Battistini, Lawrence H., 3590-91
Battle, John J., 5278
The Battle Ground, 1461
The Battle of Bunker-Hill, 105, 2347
The Battle of Stillwater, 231 1
Battle of the Bulge, 3720
The Battle of the Kegs, 148
Battle-Pieces and Aspects of the War,
488
Battles. See Campaigns and battles
under names of wars, e.g., Ameri-
can Revolution — campaigns and
battles; Civil War — campaigns and
battles
Battles in art, 5807
Baudelaire, Charles, about, 520
Bauer, G. Philip, 5763
Bauer, Louis Hopewell, 4882
Baum, P. F., ed., 1046
Baumgarten, Eduard, 5254
Baumhoff, Richard G., 4145
Baur, John I. H., 5688, 5745, 5762
Bawden, Henry Heath, 5254
Baxter, James Phinncy, 4761, 6130
Bay Psalm Book, 6448
Bayley, Frank W., ed., 5690
Bayou Folk, 760
Bayou V Ombre, 1033
Beach, Joseph Warren, 988, 1016, 2376
Beach, Lewis, 2332
IO98 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Beach, Moses S., about, 2874
Beach, William D., 3651
Beachheads in Space, 1959
Beacon of Freedom, 3778
Beadle and Adams (firm), 2444
Beale, Howard K., 3065, 3361, 3527,
5132-33
ed., 3046
Beall, Otho T., 40, 4826
Bean, Louis H., 5837, 6412-13
Bear, Donald, 5748
Beard, Charles A., 3046, 3065, 3073,
3479. 3750, 4499. 5106, 6082,
6247, 6250
about, 2407, 3046, 4545
Beard, Mary R., 3073, 3479, 3750
Beasley, Norman, 5452-53
The Beast in the Jungle, 1007, 1012,
1014
The Beast in View, 2106
Beatty, E. C. O., 3058
Beatty, Richmond Croom, ed., 2320,
2324
Beauchamp murder case, 365, 550
Beaufort, S.C., 3835
Beaumont, William, about, 4818, 4822
Beaumont, Tex., 3918
Beaumont de La Bonniniere, Gustave
Auguste de, about, 4512
Beauregard, P. G. T., about, 2613
The Beautiful and Damned, 1427
The Beautiful Changes, 2216
The Beautiful People, 21 13
Beaver, Joseph, 649
Beavers, 2961
Beck, Earl Clifton, 5567
Becker, Carl L., 4540, 5191, 5222
Beckhart, Benjamin Haggott, 5993
Beckman, Theodore N., 5945, 5949
Beckwith, Martha Warren, 5504
Becky Sharp, 23 1 3
A Bed of Boughs, 741
Bedford Springs, Pa., 4312
Beebe, Lucius M., 4153
Beech Mountain, N.C., folklore, 5529
See also North Carolina — folklore
Beecher, Henry Ward, 1137
about, 2797, 3413, 5428, 5476
Beecher, Lyman, about, 2797, 5395,
5403
Beer, George Louis, about, 3058
Beers, Clifford Whittingham, 4834
about, 4834
Beers, Henry A., 682
Before Barbed Wire, 4152-53
Before Breakjast, 1648
Before the Gringo Came, 725
Beggar on Horseback, 2332
The Beginning of a Mortal, 2748
The Beginning of Wisdom, 1222
Behaviorism, 4545, 5389, 5393
Behold Our Green Mansions, 5863
Behrman, Samuel Nathaniel, 1204-13.
2327, 2332-33, 2348
about, 1 2 13
Beiman, Irving, 6207
Being a Boy, 1 139-41
Beirne, Francis F., 3687, 4062
Belasco, David, 2314-15, 2337, 2347-
48
about, 4943
Belden, Henry Marvin, ed., 5568
Belfrage, Gustaf Wilhelm, about, 4734
Belgium, travel & travelers, 426
Belief and doubt (philosophy), 5323,
5370
Belknap, Jeremy, about, 3057
Bell, Alexander Graham, about, 4675,
4678-79
Bell, Bernard I., 5232
Bell, Herbert C. F., 3470
Bell, Whitfield J., 4714
Bell, Book,, and Candle, 2335
A Bell for Adano, 1994
Bell-founding, 5628
Bell Telephone System, 4673
Bellamy, Edward, 726-31
about, 726, 2517, 6424
Bellamy, Gladys C, 815
Bellamy, Joseph, about, 5428
La Belle Russe, 2315
La Belle Sauvage, 199
Belles Demoiselles Plantation, 748
Bellevue, Nebr., 3902
Bellevue Hospital Medical College, New
York, about, 4831
Bellow, Saul, 1921-22
The Beloved Adventure, 1858
Bemis, James, about, 6446
Bemis, Samuel Flagg, 3313, 3520-21,
3528-29,3574
ed., 3519
Benchley, Nathaniel, 1221
Benchley, Robert Charles, 1214-20
about, 1 22 1
Benedict, Clare, ed., 1 152
Benedict, Murray R., 5853-55
Benet, Rosemary Carr, ed., 1222
Benet, Stephen Vincent, 1222-24, 1904
ed., 3969, 3975, 3978-95
about, 1908
Benet, William Rose, 1904
ed., 1903, 2321
Benford, Robert T., music arr. by, 5590
Benham, Mrs. Miles, 5647
Benians, E. A., ed., 3179
Benjamin, Florence O., 4057
Benjamin, Judah P., about, 2613, 3396
Benjamin, Marcus, 4049, 4724
Benjamin, Park, 2295
Bennett, Clarence, 2305
Bennett, Hugh H, 2947, 5808
Bennett, James Gordon (1795-1872),
2848
about, 2877
Bennett, James Gordon (1841-1918),
about, 2848, 2872, 2877
Bennett, John C, 5899
about, 5433
Bennett, Mildred R., 1279
Bennington College, hist., 5198
Benson, Adolph B., 4246, 4357, 4483
Benson, Egbert, about, 6224
Benson, Louis F., 5633
Benson, Mary Sumner, 4524
Bent, Newell, 5058
The Bent Twig, 141 2
Bentley, Arthur F., 5286
Bentley, Eric R., 4908
Bentley, Harold W., 2264, 4999
Bentley, William, 2599-2600
about, 2600
Benton, Elbert J., 3530
Benton, Thomas Hart, 3322
about, 2793, 3321-22, 5783
Berding, Andrew H., 3546
Berelson, Bernard, 6414, 6419, 6477
ed., 6485
Berger, Arthur V., 5675
Berger, Josef, 3801
Berger, Max, 4224
Berger, Meyer, 2869
Bergmann, Leola M. (Nelson), 5664
Bergson, Henri, about, 5326, 5368
Beringause, Arthur F., 2601
Berkeley Square, 2332
Berkshire Hills, Mass., 3799
Beowulf, translation, 1556
Berenice, 2101
Berkhof, Louis, about, 5433
Berkson, I. B., 4457
Berlandier, Jean Louis, about, 4734
Berle, Adolf A., 6011-12
Berle, AlfK., 4781
Berlin, Irving, about, 5639
Bernard, Francis, about, 3257
Bernard, Jessie, 4536
Bernard, Luther L., 4536
Bernard, William B., 518
Bernard, William S., ed., 4418
Bernard Clare, 1376
Bernardo, C. Joseph, 3643
Bernhard Karl, duke of Saxe-Weimar-
Eisenach, 4297-99
about, 4297
Bernstein, Mel, illus., 3081
Berrey, Lester V., 2272
Berry, Robert Elton, 4746
Berry, W. E., 5442
Berryman, John, 821, 1923-24, 2285
Berson, Robert C, 4861
BerthofT, Rowland Tappan, 4488
Bertsch, Carl W., illus., 3170
Best, Harry, 4628-29
Best, Katharine, 5059
The Best of Two Worlds, 2453
Beston, Henry, 3979
Bestor, Arthur E., 4525, 5233
Bestsellers, 2402, 2482, 6443, 6449
See also Popular books
Bethlehem, Pa., Bach Choir, 5667
Bethlehem Steel, 5918
Bethune, Mary McLeod, 5426
about, 5426
The Betrothal, 207-8
Bettmann, Otto, 4986
Between the Thunder and the Sun,
2807
Between Two Worlds, 1758
Beulah Land, 13 14
Beveridge, Albert J., 6237
about, 3058, 3453
Beverley-Giddings, Arthur R., ed., 5079
Beyond Dark, Hills, 2166
Beyond Life, 1 262
Beyond the Horizon, 1648, 2337
Beyond the Hundredth Meridian, 2161
Beyond the Mountains, 2098-210 1
Bianca Visconti, 2337
Bianchi, Martha (Dickinson), ed., 842
Bible (English)
fiction, 1 1 90
influence on literature, 118, 505, 619
INDEX / IO99
Bibliography, 3773, 6447, 6460
See also Books — and reading; Rare
books; and also under specific
subjects, e.g., Education — bibl.
Bickel, Alexander M., 6248
The Bicycle Rider in Beverly Hills, 21 21
Biddle, George, about, 5783
Biddle, Nicholas, about, 3126
Bidwell, Percy Wells, 5820
Bierce, Ambrose (Gwinnett), 732-39
about, 520, 732, 738, 926, 2380
Bierring, Walter L., 4807
The Big Bear of Arkansas, 613
The Big Bonanza, 23 1 7
Big Bone Lick, 4336
Big Boy Leaves Home, 2234
The Big Cage, 2014
Big Fiddle, 1246
The Big Knife, 2067
The Big Money, 1325, 1328
The Big Rock. Candy Mountain, 2162
The Big Sea, 1 522
The Big Sky, 1489
Bigelow, John, ed., 125, 132
Bigelow, Melville M., ed., 6100
Biggar, Henry P., 3169
ed.,3156
Biggs, Hermann M., about, 4868
The Biglow Papers, 456-57
Bikle, Lucy Leffingwell (Cable), 747,
751
Bilingualism, 2267
Bill Arp: From the Uncivil War to
Date, 556
Bill Arp, So Called, 557
Bill of Rights, 6106, 6108, 6121, 6127
Billings, John Shaw, about, 4403, 4819,
4845, 6476
Billings, Josh, pseud. See Shaw, Henry
Wheeler
Billington, Ray Allen, 3074, 4146, 4515
Billy Budd, 487, 496, 2335
Billy the Kid, 2305
Bingham, George Caleb, about, 5761
Bingham, Millicent (Todd), 851-53
ed.,843
Binkley, Wilfred E., 6132-33, 6140,
6347
Binns, Archie, 4930
Biography, a Comedy, 1205
Biography (collected), 2682, 2774,
3072, 3080, 3099, 3145, 3198
bibl., 3080, 3101-2
dictionaries, 3080, 4049
See also under particular subjects, e.g.,
Civil War — biog. (collected)
Biography and autobiography, 2578-
2844
Biracial education, 5206
Bird, George L., ed., 2927
Bird, Robert Montgomery, 201-5, 23°9.
2337
about, 205
Birds, 2956, 2960, 2962, 4247, 4741,
4743
game, 5077, 5091
in literature, 4741, 5535
protection, 4741
Birge, Edward Bailey, 5668
Birmingham, Ala., politics, 6207
Birney, James Gillespie, 3360
about, 3375, 3413
Birth, 1454
Birth of a World, 1445
Birthright, 1792
Bishop, Cortlandt F., 6401
Bishop, Elizabeth, 1925-26
about, 2426
Bishop, Farnham, 4796
Bishop, John Peale, 1225-27, 2406
ed., 2354
about, 1227
Bishop, Joseph Bucklin, 4796
Bishop, Morris, 3156
The Bishop's Wife, 1 637
Bisland, Elizabeth. See Wetmore,
Elizabeth (Bisland)
Bison, 2799
Bissell, Richard P., 4019
Bitter Creek, 1239
Bittinger, D. W., 5442
Bixler, J. S., 5335~36
Bixler, Paul, ed., 2554
Bjorka, Knute, 5869
Black, C. E., 3562
Black, John Donald, 5839-40
Black, Theodore Milton, 6348
Black April, 1654
Black Armour, 1903
Black Boy, 2232
The Black Cat, 529
Black Hawk (Sauk chief), about, 2645
Black Hills, S.D.
Custer State Park, 3898
Mount Rushmore National Memorial,
5737
Black Is My Truelove's Hair, 1705
Black Jews, 5498
The Black Man, 2303
The Black Panther, 1858
The Black Riders, 835
The Black Rock, 1433
Black Spring, 161 1
Blackfeet Indians, tales, 3000
Blackford, Launcelot Minor, 2602-3
Blackford, Mary, about, 2603
Blackmur, Richard Palmer, 1001, 1004,
1228-35, 2443, 3768
Blackwell, Elizabeth, about, 4820
Blaine, James Gillespie, about, 2616,
3442, 6373
Blair, Francis Preston, about, 3410
Blair, Frank P., about, 3410
Blair, James, about, 5396
Blair, Montgomery, about, 3382, 3410
Blair, Walter, 5505-6
ed., 2323
Blair family, 3410
Blake, Aldrich, 6341
Blake, Florence G., about, 4854
Blake, Forrester, ed., 5530
Blake, Harrison G. O., ed., 599
Blake, Nelson Manfred, 3452, 4797
Blake, William, about, 2128
Blakeslee, G. H., 3562
Blakey, Roy G., 5970
Blanchard, Dorothy C. A., 4038
Blanchard, Ralph H., 5990
Blanchard, Thomas, about, 4786
Bland, Richard, about, 6068
Blanshard, Brand, ed., 5335
Blanshard, Paul, 5444
Blau, Joseph L., 5253
ed., 3319, 5261, 5418
Bledsoe, Thomas A., ed., 895
Blegen, Theodore C, 4141-42, 4484
ed., 4143, 4485
Blesh, Rudi, 5641
Blind
education of, 4628
law & legislation, 4628
libraries for, 4636
rehabilitation, etc., 4628, 4636
Blind, 1656
The Blind Bow-Boy, 1 829
The Blithedale Romance, 333
Bloch, Bernard, ed., 2268
Bloch, Julia, 2268
Blodgett, Harold W., 648
ed., 644, 2276
Blondel de Nesle, about, 2186
Blood Lines, 5066
Bloodstoppers & Bcarwalkers, 5533
The Bloody Tenent Yet More Bloody,
89
Bloom, Leonard, 4469
The Bloudy Tenent, of Persecution, for
Cause of Conscience, 20, 86, 89
The Bloudy Tenent Washed and Made
White in the Blond of the Lambe,
20,86
Blough, Roy, 5965
Blue books (society), 4534
The Blue-Grass Region of Kentucky,
717
The Blue Hotel, 824
Blue Ridge Mountains
descr., 3963
folksongs 8c ballads, 5582
Blue Voyage, 1 1 62
Blum, Daniel C, 4899, 4931, 4946
ed., 4906
Blum, John Morton, 3466
ed., 3465
The Boarding Schools, 2302
Boardman, F. W., Jr., 5197
Boas, Franz, ed., 3042
about, 2407
Boas, George, 5291
ed., 3751
Boas, Louise S., 3178
Boas, Ralph P., 3178, 3751
Boatmen, French-Canadian, 3170
Boatright, Mody C, 5520
ed., 5507-9. 55i8, 5521
Boats and boating, 4110, 5016-22
Bode, Boyd H., 5234, 5254, 5336
Bode, Carl, ed., 598, 607, 2339
Bodmer, Charles
paintings by, 3330
about, 4307
Body, Boots &■ Britches, 5548
The Body of Liberties, 75, 78
Body of This Death, 1237
Boerker, Richard H. D., 5863
Bogan, Louise, 1236-38, 2357
Bogart, Ernest Ludlow, 4131-32
Bogart, Leo, 4699
Bogue, Donald J., 4393
Bogue, Jesse P., 5162
1 100 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bohemianism
hist., 3757
in literature, 732, 1828
Bok, Curtis, 6130
Bok, Edward William, 2604-5
about, 2605
Boker, George Henry, 206-8, 2300,
_ 2337, 2347
Bolivar, Simon, about, 1445
Boll, Jacob, about, 4734
Bolton, Charles Knowles, 3679
ed., 6149
Bolton, Ethel (Stanwood), 5593
Bolton, Herbert E., 3075, 3157-58
ed., 3203, 4202
Bolton, Isabel, pseud. See Miller, Mary
Britton
Bolton, Theodore, 5759
Bolts of Melody, 843, 846
The Bomb that Fell on America, 2682
The Bombardment of Algiers, 2310
The Bonanza Trail, 4177
Bonaparte, Napoleon. See Napoleon I
Bonaventure, 745
Bonbright, James C, 6013
Bond, Beverly W., Jr., 41 n, 41 21
Bond, Horace M., 4443, 5206
Bond, Thomas, about, 4850
Bone, Hugh A., 6349
Bonfils, Frederick Gilmer, about, 2878
Bonifacius, 45
Bonner, S., 2296
The Bonney Family, 1798
Bontecou, Eleanor, 61 10, 61 12
Boodin, J. E., 5252
Book, F., 2364
Boo\ of Moments, 2387
Book^ of Mormon, 5465
Book-of-the-Month Club, 6463
Boo\ of Uncles, 1294
Book reviews (literary). See Criti-
cism, literary — essays; Literature —
periodicals
Books
and reading, 14, 40, 171, 177, 2407,
2418, 2482, 2549, 3751, 6443,
6454, 6477, 6481-82
teaching methods, 5127, 5226
Ariz., 4199
Boston, 6475
Charleston, 3763
New York (City), 6468
Southwest, New, 4190
banned, 1932
clubs, 6435, 6437-38, 6440-41, 6463
collectors & collecting, 6440, 6460-
62, 6464-65
illustration, 2391
industries & trade, 6435-36, 6441,
6445, 6448
popular. See Popular books
Boolis That Changed Our Minds, 2407
Booksellers and bookselling, 2391,
6435-38, 6440-41, 6444, 6447,
6462-64
New England, 3745
Boom towns, 772-74
Boon Island, 1 7 1 2
Boone, Daniel, about, 310, 1873, 3240
Booth, Bradford Allen, ed., 4377
Booth, Catherine, about, 5497
Booth, Edwin, about, 4938
Booth, William ("General")
about, 5497
poetry, 1581
Booth family, 4938
Boothe, Clare, 2327, 2333
Borchard, Edwin M., 6294
Borglum, Gutzon, about, 5737
Boring, E. G., 3758
Born, Wolfgang, 5743-44
Born Yesterday, 2334
Borome, Joseph Alfred, 6476
Borsodi, Ralph, 4579
The Boss, 2337
Bossard, James H. S., 4559
Bossing, Nelson L., 5225
Boston
booksellers, Colonial, 6436
concerts, 5649
culture, 4518
descr., 1437, 4258, 4315, 4334
econ. condit., Colonial period, 4602
essays, 979, 1002-3
fiction, 726, 967-70, 982, 992-95,
1004, 1008
foreign population, 4410
govt., 6207
guidebook, 3800
harbor, 3800
hist., 3800, 4036, 5481
law, 6292
libraries, 6475
music, 5648-49, 5672
industries, 5628
photographs, 1437
siege (1775-76), 3245
soc. condit. (1880-1900), 4530
soc. life & cust., 4035, 4239, 4261,
4602
Boston, First National Bank, hist.,
5984
Boston. Museum of Fine Arts, 5745
Boston. Public Library, hist., 6475
Boston Academy of Music, about, 5684
Boston Adventure, 2157
Boston Athenaeum, 6475
about, 6475
Boston Psychopathic Hospital, about,
Boston Symphony Orchestra, hist.,
5648-49
The Boston Transcript, about, 2870
The Eostonians, 992-95
Bostwick, Arthur E., ed., 6476
Boswell, Peyton, 5748
Botany, 2788, 2957, 4219, 4236, 4715,
4760
Both Your Houses, 1 1 72
Botkin, Benjamin A., 4068, 5570,
ed., 5510-12, 5515, 5522-26 ,
Boucher, Chauncey S., 5178
Boucicault, Dion, 2298, 2337
Boulding, Kenneth E., 5899
Bound East for Cardiff, 1648
Boundaries, 2970, 2974, 3351, 3540,
3553-55.3569
Bourget, Paul Charles Joseph, 4387-89
about, 4387
Bourjaily, Vance, about, 2371
Bourke-White, Margaret, photographs,
5447
Bourne, Edward Gaylord, ed., 3215
Bourne, Randolph
about, 2380
fiction, 2413
Bowditch, Nathaniel, about, 4746
Bowen, Catherine (Drinker), 2606-8
Bowen, Francis, tr., 4511-12
Bowen, Howard, 5899
Bowen, Trevor, 5500
Bowers, Claude G., 3281, 3320, 3362
Bovvers, David F., ed., 3768
The Bowery in literature, 1002—3
Bowes, Frederick P., 3763
Bowker, Richard Rogers, 6435
Bowles, Ella (Shannon), 4032
Bowles, Paul Frederic, 1927-31
about, 2371
Bowles, Samuel, 4384
about, 2614, 2879, 4383
Bowman, Isaiah, 2934
about, 2941
Boxing, 4987, 5023-33
biog. (collected), 5025
heavyweight, 4991, 5026
Negroes, 5025
television, 5033
Boy Meets Girl, 2327, 2333
Boyd, Anne Morris, 6138
Boyd, Ernest, 241 1
Boyd, James, 1239-41
Boyd, Julian P., 6073
ed., 3292
Boyle, Kay, 1242-51
Boynton, Henry Walcott, 6436
Boynton, Percy, 780
The Boys in the Bac\ Room, 2536
A Boy's Town, 982
A Boy's Will, 1452
Bracebridge Hall, 388-89
Bracke, William B., 3944
Brackenridge, Henry Marie, 2609-10
Brackenridge, Hugh Henry, 105-8,
2347
Bradbrook, M. C, 1367
Bradbury, Ray, 1932-36
Braddy, Haldeen, 539
Braden, Charles S., 5439
Bradfield, H. J. S., tr. & ed., 4296
Bradford, Andrew, about, 2880
Bradford, Cornelia, about, 2880
Bradford, Gamaliel, 261 1-19
Bradford, Thomas Gamaliel, tr., 4314
Bradford, William, 1-6, 3204
Bradley, A. G., ed., 71
Bradley, Francis W., 2258, 2260
Bradley, Omar N, 3718
Bradley, Phillips, ed., 4512
Bradley, Sculley, 630
ed., 206, 628, 2324
Bradstreet, Anne (Dudley), 7-1 1
about, 79, 368, 3198
Brady, Mathew B.
illus., 829
about, 821
Brain surgery, 4821
Branch, Edgar M., 816
Branch, Edward Douglas, 4516
Brandeis, Elizabeth, 6033
Brandeis, Louis Dembitz, 6247-48
about, 6246-48, 6266
INDEX / IIOI
Branden, Paul Maerker, 4891
Brandt, Lilian, 4623
Brandwein, Peter, ed., 4984
Brandywine Creek, 2394, 3981
Brant, Irving, 3282
Brasillach, Robert, 4944
Brassware, antique, 5787
Braun, F. X., 4481
Brave Men, 2745
A Bravery of Earth, 1351
Brawley, Benjamin, ed., 860
Brazer, Esther (Stevens), 5726
Brazil, relations with, 3582
Brazos River, Tex., folklore, 5527
Bread out of Stone, 1531
The Bread-Winners, 941
Break, the Heart's Anger, 1968
Breakers and Granite, 1433
Breathe upon These Slain, 1743
Brebner, John B., 3159, 3552, 4473
Bredemeier, Harry C, 4550
Bremer, Fredrika, 4355-57
about, 4354
Brent, Charles H., about, 5457
Bretall, Robert W., ed., 5432-33
Bretnor, Reginald, ed., 2377
Brett, G. S., 5335
Brett, William Howard, about, 6476
Bretz, Rudy, 4697
Brevoort, Henry, about, 392
Brewer, Daniel Chauncey, 4026
Brewer, John Mason, 5527
Brewsie and Willie, 1770
Brewster, Paul G., 5585
ed., 5571
Brewster, Stanley F., 6295
Brickell, Herschel, ed., 2351
Brickman, William W., ed., 5248
The Bride Comes to yellow Sky, 835
The Bride of the Innisfallen, 2209
The Bridegroom Cometh, 1448
The Bridegroom's Body, 1246
Bridenbaugh, Carl, 3764, 4517, 4601-2,
5704, 6044
ed., 4240
Bridenbaugh, Jessica, 3764
The Bridge (Crane), 1303-4
The Bridge (Poole), 1656
The Bridge of San Luis Rey, 1 867
The Bridge of Years, 2123
Bridger, Jim, about, 2831
Briggs, Arthur E., 650
Briggs, Harold E., 4147
Brigham, Clarence S., 2852, 6447
Bright, James R., 6003
Bright and Morning Star, 2234
Bright Center of Heaven, 2030
The Bright Doom, 1858
Bright fotirney, 1962
Brightman, Alvin C, ed., 6275
Brightman, Edgar S., 5252
about, 5259, 5433
The Brimming Cup, 141 4-1 5
Brimming Tide, 1724, 5087
Brink, Wellington, 5808
Brinley, George, about, 6460
Brinton, Clarence Crane, 3502
Brinton, Howard H., 5468
Brisco, Norris B., 5949
Brissenden, Paul F., 6045
Brissot de Warville, Jacques Pierre,
4258-60
about, 4258
British ballads. See Anglo-American
folksongs and ballads
British English, 2237, 2243, 2245
British immigrants, 4046, 4488
British relations with Illinois, 4133
Britishisms (language), 2272
Britt, George, 2913
Britten, Benjamin, 487
A Brittle Heaven, 2413
Broadax and Bayonet, 3663
Broadcasting. See Radio broadcasting;
Television broadcasting
Brockunier, Samuel Hugh, 3197
Brodbeck, May, 2358
Broder, Nathan, 5674
Broderick, Edwin B., 4688
Brodie, Fawn (McKay), 5464
The Broken Span, 1878
The Broker of Bogota, 205, 2337
Brokmeyer, Henry C, about, 5305
Bromfield, Louis, 3782, 4594
Bronx County, N. Y., Democratic Com-
mittee, 6384
Brook, Alexander, 5800
Brook Farm, 280, 585, 2278-79, 2881,
5256
Brookings, Robert S., about, 2685
Brookings Institution, Washington,
D.C., 3634
Brookings Institution, Washington,
D.C. Institute for Government Re-
search, 3038, 4762
Brookings Institution, Washington,
D.C. International Studies Group,
3598
Brooklyn, 2703-4
foreign population, 4046
hist., 4046
soc. life & cust., 4263
Brooklyn Bridge, 4801
Brooklyn College, 632
Brooks, Charles F., 2953
Brooks, Cleanth, 1367, 2378-79
about, 1809
Brooks, Gwendolyn, 1937-39
Brooks, John Graham, 4225
Brooks, Phillips, about, 5457
Brooks, Robert C, 4499
Brooks, Stella B., 910
Brooks, Van Wyck, 1016, 2380-82,
241 1. 5773
ed., 2618-19, 3736
about, 2394, 2406, 2417, 2443, 5508
Brooks, William Keith, about, 4724
Broom, Leonard, 4469
Brophy, Arnold, 3643a
Brother to Dragons, 2200
Brough, Kenneth J., 6478
Brougham, John, 2311
Broun, Heywood, 729
Broussard, James F., 2265
Brown, C. E., 5442
Brown, Charles Brockden, 109-117
about, 109, ii7j 2294, 2465, 2509
Brown, Charles H., 2901
ed., 657
Brown, Clarence A., comp., 2383
Brown, David Paul, 2347
Brown, Dee, 4158
Brown, Edward Killoran, 1280
Brown, Elmer E., 5152
Brown, Emily Clark, 6053
Brown, Ernest Francis, 2869
Brown, Esther L., 4800, 6317-18
Brown, Francis J., ed., 4426
Brown, George Rothwell, 4063
Brown, Gerald S., 3555
Brown, H., 4513
Brown, H. C, 5254, 5289
Brown, Herbert R., 2384
ed., 2352
Brown, J. Hammond, ed., 5065
Brown, John, about, 2617, 3149, 3414
poetry, 1222, 1224
Brown, John Crosby, 5979
Brown, John Mason, 4909
Brown, Josephine Chapin, 4630
Brown, Mark H., 4151-52
Brown, Milton W., 5746
Brown, Ralph H., 2968-69
Brown, Ralph Sharp, 6107
Brown, Ray A., 6271
Brown, Richard Lindley, 2425
Brown, Robert Eldon, 3046, 3241
Brown, Spenser, 2350
Brown, Stuart Gerry, ed., 5360-61
Brown, William Adams, 3636, 5953,
5993
Brown, William Norman, 3503
Brown Brothers and Company, 5979
The Brown Decades, 5695
Browne, Charles Albert, 4731, 4753,
5616
Browne, Charles Farrar, 209-15, 5524
about, 212, 557, 862, 2857
Browne, Sir Thomas, about, 2481
Brownell, Baker, ed., 4579
Brownell, Emery A., 6330
Brownell, Gertrude Hall, 2386
Brownell, William Crary, 2385-86, 241 1
about, 2513, 2504
Browning, Robert, about, 2545
Brownlow, Louis, 61 41
Brownstone Eclogues, 1 166
Bruce, Alfred W., 5926
Bruce. B. G., 5078
Bruce, H. R., 6336
Bruce, S. D., 5078
Bruce, William Cabell, 2620-21, 3187
Brucker, Herbert, 2928
Brumme, Carl Ludwig, 5733
Brunner, Edmund de S., 4406, 4581,
5485
Bruno, Frank J., 4618
Brutus, 2347
Bryan, Alice I., 6479
Bryan, George S., 4782
ed., 4977
Bryan, James E., 4817
Bryan, Leslie A., 5943
Bryan, Mina R., ed., 3292
Bryan, Patrick W., 2939
Bryan, Wilhelmus Bogart, 4064
Bryan, William A., 4835
Bryan, William Jennings, 6350
about, 3135, 3446-47. 3457. 543°.
6359
Bryan, Ohio, 3863
1 102 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Bryant, Billy, 4978
about, 4978
Bryant, William Cullen, 216-25, 2858
about, 223-24, 323, 2277, 2290,
2295, 2374, 2422, 2486, 2513,
2534, 2873
bibl., 224
Bryce, James Bryce, viscount, 3554,
4499
about, 4225
Bryson, Lyman, 5426
about, 5426
Buccaneers, 3168
Buchanan, Annabel (Morris), ed., 5549
Buchanan, James, about, 3399
Buchanan, Lamont, 5034
Buchanan County, Va., folksongs, 5582
Buchler, J., 5197, 5350
ed., 5348
Buck, Elizabeth Hawthorn, 4054
Buck, Paul Herman, 3083, 3363
Buck, Pearl (Sydenstricker), 1252-60
about, 1260
Buck, Solon J., 3420-21, 4054, 4127,
4132
The Buck, in the Snow, 1609
Bucke, Richard M., ed., 627, 637
Buckham, John Wright, ed., 5318
Buckingham, James Silk, 4329-33
Buckingham, Nash, 5066-69
The Bucktails, 517, 2337
Budget, Federal. See Government —
appropriations & expenditure*
Buechner, Frederick, about, 2371
Buehler, Alfred G., 5969
Buehrer, E. T., 5442
Buel, Elizabeth C. Barney, ed., 5793
Buffalo, N.Y., in art, 5762
Buffalo Bill's Wild West Show, 4979
Buffaloes, 2965, 4147, 4151, 4153
Buffington, A. G., 4479
Buffington, Albert F., 2266
Bugbee, Harold D., drawings. 4195,
5874
TheBmld-Vp, 1874,1882
Building materials, 5700, 5711-12,
5718
Buley, Roscoe Carlyle, 41 12, 4810
Bulfinch, Charles, about, 5720
Bull Run, 1st Battle (1861), 4378-81
The Bulwar\, 1343
Bunce, Oliver Bell, 2347
A Bunch of Keys, 2306
Bunche, Ralph J., 4446
Bundy, McGeorge, 3547
ed., 3543
Bunker-Hill, Battle of, drama, 105
Bunn, Charles, ed., 6281
Bunn, Charles Wilson, 6281
Bunner, H. C, 2467
Bunner Sisters, 1851, 1855
Buntline, Ned, pseud. See Judson,
Edward Zane Carroll
Bunyan, Paul, about, 5506, 5516, 5567
Burchfield, Charles, about, 5762
Burchfield, Laverne, 4580
Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, about,
4772
Bureau of Indian Affairs, about, 3038-
39
Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and
Agricultural Engineering, about.
2947
Bureau of Soils, about, 2943, 2947
Bureau of the Budget, 3725
about, 6144
Bureau of the Census, 4400
Burgess, Ernest W., ed., 4441
Burgess, John William, about, 4540
Burgoyne's invasion (1777), 3682
fiction, 1709
A Buried Treasure, 1702
Burk, John N, 5648
Burke, Arvid J., 5098, 5144
Burke, Charles, 2347
Burke, Kenneth, 656, 2387-90
about, 2443
Burke, William J., 2391
Burke, Idaho, 4176
Burks, Arthur W., ed., 5346
Burlesque, 4976
Burlingame, Roger, 4783, 5939, 6449
Burlington, Iowa, guidebook, 3890
Burma, John H., 4470
Burma, World War II, 3726
Burnett, Edmund Cody, 3242
ed., 3242
Burnham, James, 3620
Burning City, 1224
The Burning Mountain, 1435
The Burning of Fairfield, 121
Burns, Edward McNall, 2622-23, 3283
Burns, Eveline M., 4631
Burns, James A., 5101-2
Burns, James MacGregor, 3496, 6134,
6152
Burns, John Home, 1940-43
about, 2371
Burns, Robert, about, 216, 662
Buros, Oscar K., 5229
Burr, Aaron, about, 1873, 2617, 2771,
3M9.3273
Burr, George Lincoln, ed., 41, 3205
Burr, William H, ed., 82
Burr Conspiracy (1805-7), 3273
Burr Oaks, 1351
Burrage, Henry S., ed., 3206
Burrage, Walter L., 4804
Burrell, John Angus, ed., 2325
Burroughs, Alan, 5747
Burroughs, John, 740-44, 2624-28
about, 2422, 2492, 2624, 2628
Burroughs, Julian, 744, 2628
Burstein, Abraham, tr., n 95
Burt, Alfred L., 3553
Burt, Maxwell Struthers, 3971
Burt, Struthers, 1 148
Burtis, Mary Elizabeth, 2646
Burton, Hal, 4603
Burtt, Edwin, 5289
Bury the Dead, 2145, 2333
Bus lines, 5942
Bus Stop, 1998
Busch, Francis X., 6296
Bush, Vannevar, 4778
about, 4803
Bushnell, Horace, about, 5428, 5436,
.5476
Business, 3094, 6003-30
control, 6004
govt, regulation, 5885, 6006, 6099
Business — Continued
hist., 6005, 6007, 6016
small, 6021
statistics, 6025
New York (City), 4047
Ohio, 41 21
Southern States, 4083
Tex., 4194
Business and education, 5116, 5168,
5181, 5190
Business cycles, 5922, 5968, 6015, 6025
Business education, 6017
Business ethics. See Social and busi-
ness ethics
Business management, 6009
Business research, 4777
Businessmen, 4387, 6010, 6023, 6027-
29
See also Capitalists and financiers
But Gently Day, 1635
But Look, the Morn, 1543
But Not Forgotten, 4920
Butcher, Devereux, 5866
Butler, Benjamin Franklin, about, 2617
Butler, George D., 4997
Butler, Nicholas Murray, 2629-30, 3554
Butler, Pierce, 6483
Butler, Richard, 5375
Butler, Samuel, about, 165, 2480, 2504
Butler County, Pa., 3819
Butte, Mont.
hist., 4176
politics, 6207
Butterfield, Lyman H., ed., 3292, 3313,
4830
Butterfield 8, 2074
Butterworth, Julian E., 5208
Butts, R. Freeman, 5103-4
By These Words, 3143
Byerly, Carl L., 5307
Byrd, Richard Evelyn, 2977-78
about, 2980
Byrd, William, 12-16, 2296
about, 16
Byrnes, James Francis, 3544
Byron, George Gordon Noel Byron, 6th
baron, about, 216, 323, 458, 520,
2545
CIO. See Congress of Industrial Or-
ganizations
The Cabala, 1864
Cabbages and Kings, 1 1 1 2-1 3
Cabell, James Branch, 1261-69, 3980
about, 1268-69, 2406
Cabeza de Vaca, about, 3158
Cabinet officers, 3382-84, 6145, 6148
See also specific offices, e.g., Secre-
taries of State; also names of in-
cumbents, e.g., Dulles, John Foster
Cable, George Washington, 745-52.
2296
about, 748, 751-52, 2366
Cabot, Henry B., 6292
Cabot, John, about, 3174, 3215
Cabot, Richard Clarke, about, 4805
Cabot, Sebastian, about, 3174
INDEX / I IO3
Cady, Edwin Harrison, 2392
ed., 2326
Caesar, Julius
about, 5325
fiction, 1869
Caesars of the Wilderness, 3170
Cafe des Exiles, 748
Cahalane, Victor H., 2954
Cahill, Holger, 5594, 5602
ed., 5689
Cahn, Edmond N., 6261
Cain, James Mallahan, about, 2427, 2536
The Caine Mutiny, 2230
Cairo, 111., guidebook, 3876
Cajuns
fiction, 745
language (dialects, etc.), 759-61
New Orleans, 410 1
short stories, 759-61
Calamity Jane, 4147
Calavar, 202
Calaynos, 207-8
Caldwell, Erskine, 1271-75, 2333, 2376,
2427
ed., 3942-68
about, 2508
Caldwell, June, 4176
Caldwell, Lynton K., 6170
Caldwell, S. L., ed., 89
A Calendar of Sin, 1746
Calhoun, Arthur W., 4560
Calhoun, John Caldwell, 2296, 3328
about, 3327-28
Calhoun, Robert, about, 5433
California, 3955, 3957, 4200-11
architecture, 5723
descr., 1073-74, 1077, 5082
drama, 21 10
fiction, 985, 1089-93, 1196, 1775,
1777, 2110, 2213
fishing, 5083
folklore, 5518
frontier & pioneer life, 3641, 3737
gold discoveries, 2659, 4201-2, 4351
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3927-34
hist., 2658-59, 3943, 3959, 3974,
3998, 4189, 4200-4, 5354
Indians, 985, 3002, 3022-23
language (dialects, etc.), 2260
literature, 4202, 4204
music, 5630
natural hist., 1073-74, I077
Orientals, 4468
pictorial works, 4202
poetry, 1064, 1066-67, 1532
short stories, 725, 733-34, 739, 926,
2110
theater, hist., 4923
travel & travelers, 1073, 2753, 4345,
4351. 4372, 4378
California. Senate. Fact-Finding Com-
mittee on Un-American Activities
in California, 61 11
California Folklore Quarterly, 5518
California Youth Authority, 4644
The Call of the Wild, 1051-52
Callahan, Jennie (Waugh), 4685
Callahan, North, 3945
Callender, Clarence N., 6282
Calvinism, 5299, 5411, 5428
in literature, 17, 26, 40, 562
essays, 230—31
fiction, 333
poetry, 79-83
sermons, 24, 32, 59
Cambridge, Mass.
in literature, 979
printing, Colonial, 6448
Cameron, Norman, 5336
Camino Real, 2226
Camp, Charles L., 4202
Camp, William Martin, 4208
Camp-meetings, 5407
Campaigns, political. See Political Cam-
paigns
Campaigns and battles. See under
names of wars, e.g., American
Revolution — campaigns & battles
Campbell, Bartley, 2316
Campbell, Harry M., 1397
Campbell, John O, comp., 3634
Campbell, John W., Jr., 2377
Campbell, Killis, 526
ed., 527
Campbell, Laurence R., 2912
Campbell, Marjorie E., 4004
Campbell, Olive Dame, music by, 5583
Campbell, Persia C, 5954
Campbell, Roy, 1366
Campbell, Thomas (clergyman), about,
5455
Campbell, Thomas (poet), about, 323
Campbell, Walter Stanley. See Vestal,
Stanley, pseud.
Campbell, William Edward March,
"77
Campbell, William V., comp., 5166
Camping on My Trail, 1553
Can Grande's Castle, 1584
Can Such Things Be?, 733-34, 739
Canada
econ. relations with, 3638, 4052
fiction, 2162
relations with, 3272, 3552-55, 4473-
74
Canal Town, 1157
Canal Zone, 4218
Canals, 4312, 5928
See also Waterways, inland
Canals, interoceanic, 4221
See also Panama Canal
Canary, Martha Jane, about, 4147
Canby, Henry Seidel, 444, 817, 1017,
2394-98, 3981
ed., 605, 2398, 2460-61, 2557
Cancer research, 4722
The Candle in the Cabin, 1581
Canfield, Dorothy. See Fisher, Doro-
thea Frances (Canfield)
Canfield, William M., maps, 4053
Canham, Erwin D., 4513, 5427
about, 5427
Cannery Row, 1780
Cannon, Carl L., 6461
Cannon, Ida M., 4805
Canton Island, 4218
The Cantos, 1665
about, 1672, 1674
Cantwell, Robert, 2406
Canvassing for a Vote (painting), 5761
Canwcll Committee. See Washington
(State) Legislature. Joint Fact-
Finding Committee on Un-Ameri-
can Activities
Canzoni, 1666
Cape Cod
fiction, 1640
fishing, 5083
Cape Cod, 596-97, 606
Cape Cod Pilot, 3801
Capers, Gerald M., Jr., 4105, 6207
Capital, U.S.
at Philadelphia, 4059
See also Washington, D.C.
Capital punishment, 239
Capitalism, 5882, 5887, 6007, 6357
fiction, 1334-37
hist., 3443, 3476, 5878
Capitalism and labor, 3439, 6094
Capitalism and state, 3352, 3361, 3421,
3424-25, 3438-39. 3446, 6066,
6101, 6195, 6207, 6352, 6366,
6374. 6430. 6434
Capitalists and financiers, 5880, 5882,
6023, 6027
Capitol Building, Washington, D.C
architecture, 5708, 5720
paintings, 5775
Caplow, Theodore, 4547
Capote, Truman, 1944-47
about, 2371
Captain Abby and Captain John, 1290
Captain Caution, 1708-9
Captain Craig, 171 4
Cardozo, Benjamin Nathan, 6262
about, 6251
Cardwell, Guy A., 745
A Careful and Strict Enquiry into the
Modern Prevailing Notions of . . .
Freedom of Will, 26
Carey, Jane (Clark), 6198
Carey, Mathew, 171, 177
Carey & Lea (firm), about, 6451
Cargill, Oscar, 629, 2399
ed., 608, 1898,2276
Caribbean region, relations with, 3509,
3577,3584. 3587
Caricatures. See Cartoons
Caridorf, 2309
Carlborg, Edith M. L., tr., 4246
Carleton, Will, 753-55
Carlson, Oliver, 2877, 2884, 6341
Carlyle, Thomas, about, 280, 633
Carman, Harry J., 3103, 5426
ed., 5426, 5827, 6054
Carmel, Calif., 3930
Carmer, Carl, 3972, 4020, 4047
ed., 3969, 3975. 3978-95. 4002-25
Carnegie, Andrew, 3434
about, 2503, 3434, 5880
Carnegie, Mrs. Andrew, about, 3434
Carnegie Corporation of New York,
about, 5163
Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Geophysical Laboratory, 4715
Camera, Primo, about, 4987
Carnes, Cecil, 2908
A Carnival of Buncombe, 6421
Carnivals, 4980
Carolina, hist., 3216, 4073
Carolina Chansons, 1168, 151 2
1 104 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Caroline Islands, 4218
Carpenter, Frederic Ives, 302, 2400
cd., 299
Carpenter, Jesse T., 6059
Carpenter, Niles, 4395
Carpenter, Paul S., 5623
Carpenter, Ralph E„ 5794
Carpenter, William S., 6283
Carr, Charles C, 5908
Carr, Harry, 4207
Carr, Harvey, about, 5389
Carr, Lowell Juilliard, 4586
Carr, Malcolm Wallace, 4842
Carr, Robert K., 6110, 6113-14, 6128,
6130
ed., 6106
Carr, William G., 5106
Carrier, Lyman, 5821
Carriere, Joseph Medard, ed., 5528
Carrington, Walter, 6091
Carroll, Eber Malcolm, 6351
Carroll, John, Abp., about, 5449,
545L5477
Carroll, John Alexander, 3271
Carroll, William, about, 4103
Carruth, Gorton, ed., 3076
Carry Me Back,, 2842
Carson, Gerald, 5955
Carson, Joseph, 4856
Carson, Kit, about, 2831
Carson, William G., 4913
Carstensen, Vernon R., 5194
Cartels. See Trusts, industrial
Carter, Clarence E., 3047
Carter, Everett, 977
Carter, Hodding, 2631-32, 3488, 3946,
3982
about, 2632
Carter, William G. Harding, 3653-54
about, 3653
Cartmell, Van H., 1124
ed., 2327
Cartoons
motion picture, 4957
politics, 2859, 2917, 5803
Cartwright, Peter, 2633-34
about, 2633-34
Caruthers, William Alexander, 226-29
about, 226
Carver, George Washington, about,
2690, 5825
Cary, Edward, 2278
Case, Robert Ormond, 4893
Case, Shirley Jackson, 5413
Case, Victoria, 4893
The Case of Mr. Crump, 1 573
Cash, Wilbur J., 4066
Cass, Lewis, about, 3358, 6078
Cass Timberlane, 1568
Cassidy, Frederic G., 2251
Cast a Cold Eye, 2020
Castaigne, A., illus., 1101
Castaneda, Pedro de, 3217
Caste. See Class distinction
Castell, Alburey, ed., 5333
Castellon, Federico, about, 5783
Castilian Days, 941
Castle Hayne, N. C, 4406
Castle 'Nowhere, 1 150
Casualty, 2012
Caswell, Hollis L., 5147
Cat on a Hot Tin Roof, 2228, 2336
Catalogues and Counters, 5956
The Catcher in the Rye, 2108
Cate, James Lea, ed., 3727
Cate, Wirt Armistead, 3364
Cater, Douglass, 5899
Cathay, 1666
Cather, Willa Sibert, 832, 1029, 1031,
1276-78
about, 821, 1279-83, 2406, 2429
The Catherine Wheel, 2159
Catholic Church, 5404-5, 5444-47
bibl., 5449
doctrine, 2034, 2036, 2038, 2040-42
hist., 5448, 5450-51,5477
schools, 5101-2
soc. thought, 5484, 5488
sources, 5449
Catholic (Uniate) Church, Ukrainian,
4492
Catholics, 3040, 4428, 4515, 5450, 5495
Catlin, George
paintings by, 3330
about, 5802
Catlin, Russ, 5001
Caton, John Dean, about, 4680
Cats in literature
folklore & hist., 1828
poetry, 1359
Catskill Mountains, 5064
in literature, 740
Cattell, J. McKeen, ed., 5212
Cattell, Jacques, ed., 4712
Cattle and cattle trade, 4153-54, 4157-
58, 4163, 4165, 4190, 4196, 4214,
5868-69, 5873
brands & branding, 687, 5503, 5507,
5509, 5526
fiction, 1686-87
ranges, 4153, 5858, 5873
Cattle trails
fiction, 684-86
short stories, 687
Catton, Bruce, 3690-92, 3696
Catullus, translation, 1482
Caughey, John W., 3048, 4200-1
ed., 4202
Causality (philosophy), 5289
Cauthen, Charles Edward, ed., 2635
The Cavaliers of Virginia, 227
Cavalry, hist., 3659
Cavan, Ruth (Shonle), 4561
Cavanaugh, John, Father, 5041
Cavender's House, 171 4
Caves, 2946
Cavins, Harold M., 4863
Cawdor, 1534
Cawley, Elizabeth Hoon, ed., 4321
Cay ton, Horace R., 4439
Cedar Mountain to Chancellorsville ,
3695
Cedar Rapids, Iowa, guidebook, 3891
Ceiling Unlimited, 5938
Cenci family, fiction, 2087
Censorship, 6106
in 1917, 3462
motion pictures, 4947
Census, 2972, 4390, 4400, 4403
See also Population
Central Medical Group of Brooklyn,
Central Pacific Railroad, about, 5927
Century Magazine, 992, 2923
Century of Conflict, 3226
A Century of Dishonor, 985
Ceramic industries, 5792
Ceremony, 2217
Cerf, Bennett A., ed., 1124, 2325, 2327,
2370
The Certain Hour, 1262
Chadwick, French Ensor, 3569, 3707
Chafee, Zechariah, 6108-9, 6128, 6130
Chaffee, Adna R. (1842-1914), about,
3654
Chaffee, Adna R. (1884-1941), about,
3658
Chagres River and valley, 4014
Chaikin, Joseph, 2898
Chaim Lederer's Return, 1192
Chain stores, 5961
The Chainhearer, 268-69
XA1PE (Chaire), 13 13
The Chambered Nautilus, 368
Chamberlain, D. E., 6195
Chamberlain, John, 2406-7
Chamberlain, Joseph P., 6153
Chamberlain, Lawrence H., 61 10, 61 15,
6142
Chamberlain, Neil W., 6046-47
Chamberlin, Joseph Edgar, 2870
Chambers, Whittaker, about, 61 14
Chambers, William Nisbet, 3321
Champaign County, Ohio, 3871
Champlain, Samuel de, 3156, 3207
about, 1873, 3156, 3171
Chance, Love, and Logic, 5347
Chandler, Lester V., 5975
Channel Islands, Calif., 3957
Channing, Edward, 3083
about, 3058
Channing, William Ellery, 230-38,
5428, 5472
ed., 594, 596
about, 230
Channing, William Henry, about, 2279
Chanute, Octave, 4788
Chapelle, Howard I., 3666
Chapin, Francis Stuart, 4548
Chapin, Howard M., 85
Chaplin, Charlie, about, 4953
Chapman, Arthur, 4661
Chapman, Herman H., 5909
Chapman, John, about, 4533, 5506,
5519
Chapman, John A., ed., 4897
Chapman, John Jay, 2697
about, 2539, 2697
Chapman, Robert, 487, 2335
Chappell, Louis W., 5517
Chappell, Matthew N., 4700
Character (psychology), 4556
Charavay, Etienne, 3250
The Chariot of Fire, 2415
Charities, 4615-16, 4618, 4621, 4626,
4628-30, 4634, 6209
Jewish, 4461
Allegheny County, Pa., 4591
New England, 4341
Pittsburgh, 4591
See also Medicine — charities
The Charity Ball, 2314
The Charity Patient (sculpture), 5739
INDEX / 1 105
Charlemont, 550
Charles River, Mass., 3991
Charles the Second, 2337
Charleston, S.C.
descr., 1002-3, 4093
econ. condit. (Colonial period), 4602
fiction, 1145, 1512-13
hist., 4093
intellectual life (Colonial period),
3763
soc. life & cust., 4602, 4288
Charlotte, N.C., guidebook, 3832
Charlotte; a Tale of Truth, 162
Charlotte Temple; a Tale of Truth, 16 j
Charlottesville, Va., guidebook, 3828
A Charmed Life, 2022
Charteris, Evan, 5771
Charters, Colonial, 6086, 6100
Charvat, William, 2331
ed., 2294
Chase, Gilbert, 5608
Chase, Harold B., 5002
about, 5002
Chase, John W., ed., 4513
Chase, Mary Ellen, 1284-89, 3782,
5214
Chase, Philander, about, 5457
Chase, Richard
comp., 5586
ed., 925, 5529
Chase, Richard V., 494, 497, 651, 656,
854
Chase, Salmon Portland, about, 3382
Chase, Stanley P., 2425
Chase, Stuart, 6392
Chastellux, Francois Jean, marquis de,
4252-54
about, 4251, 4254, 4258
Chattanooga, hist., 4104
Chatters, Carl H., 6135
Chauncy, Charles, about, 5472
Chautauquas, 4893
Cheever, Daniel S., 3610
Chelsea Rooming House, 1483
Chemical engineering, 4793
Chemical industry, 4735
Chemistry, 4715, 473 1. 474°
Chemistry, physiological, 4732
Chemists, 4735, 474°
Cheney, Orion H., 6441
Cheney, Sheldon, ed., 4972
Cheng, Te-ch'ao, 4463
Cherokee Indians, 4104, 4233, 4248-50
See also Five Civilized Tribes
Chesney, Alan M., 4845
Chesnut, Mary Boykin (Miller), 2636-
37
Chesnutt, William C, 6284
Chesnutt, Charles Waddel, 756-58
about, 756
Chesnutt, Helen M., 756
Chester, Giraud, 4686
Chesterfield, Philip Stanhope, Earl of,
about, 2481
Chesterton, G. K., 4343
Chesuncoo\, 594
Chevalier, Michel, 4313-14
about, 4312
The Chevalier of Pensieri-Vani, 887
Cheyenne, Wyo., 4176
431240—60 71
Cheyenne Indians, 2799, 2999-3000,
4160
soc. life & cust., 2999-3000
Cheyney, Edward P., 5192
Chicago
banks & banking, 5985
descr., 4134, 4136
econ. condit., 3425
fiction, 887-89, 956-58, 1094-95,
1333-34, 1337. 1339. 1372-74.
1376, 1921-22, 1939, 2054, 2232-
33. 2235
frontier life, 4136
govt., 6208
hist., 3987, 4135-36
land values, 5812
libraries, 6473
music, 5644, 5651-52, 5660
Negroes, 4439, 4451
poetry, 1727, 1731, 1937-38
politics, 6207, 6375, 6380, 6386
public health, 4864
soc. condit., 2836, 4599, 4614, 4658,
6380
soc. life & cust., 4134
Swedes, 4486
underworld, 2586
Chicago. Home Rule Commission,
6208
Chicago. Public Library, about, 6473
Chicago. University, 5201
Chicago. University. College, 5182
Chicago. University. Dept. of Edu-
cation, 5249
Chicago. University. Laboratory
School, 51 17
Chicago Bears, 5040
Chicago-Cook County Health Survey,
4864
Chicago fire (1871), 4136
Chicago Poems, 1 731
The Chicago Renaissance in American
Letters, 2419
Chicago Review, 2556
Chicago River, 3987
"Chicago school" of architecture, 5705
"Chicago school" of criticism, 2410
Chicago strike (1894). See Pullman
strike
Chicago Symphony Orchestra, 5651-52
Chicago Tribune, about, 2862
Chickasaw Indians, 3027
Chickering, Geraldine Jencks, ed., 5575
Chidsey, Donald Barr, 5027
Child, Francis James, 5550
Child, John L., 5254, 5291
Child, Lydia Maria (Francis), 239-44
about, 239, 244, 2280
Child, Robert, about, 3198
Child study, 5149
Childhood and youth in literature
drama, 2023
fiction, 188, 778-83, 787-93. 811,
878-80, 1126-27, 1132, 1184,
1372-74, 1376, 1412, 1415-17,
1635, 1683, 1802-4, 1839, 1888,
1944-45, 1964, 2023, 2032, 2107-
8, 2213, 2229
personal narratives, 706-10, 906-7,
1078, 1204, 1213, 1284, 1292,
1543,2394
Childhood and youth in literature —
Continued
poetry, 878, 11 26
short stories, 1786, 1790
Children, 4315, 4559
behavior, 4559
books, 17, 188-89, 239. 580-82,
906-7, 984, 1132, 2500, 4190
development, 5149-50, 5247
education, 5105, 5148-50
employment, 4569
exceptional, 51 14, 5205, 5207, 5246
folklore, 5588, 5592
guidance, 5149
institutional care, 4644
periodicals, 190, 239
protection, 4618
songs, 5510, 5559, 5563, 5588
Children and Older People, 1 796
Children Are Bored on Sunday, 2160
Children of God, 1424
Children of Swamp and Wood, 1724,
5087
The Chddren of the Night, 1714
The Children's Hour (drama), 1989,
2333
The Children's Hour (periodical), 190
Childs, H. L., 6336
Childs, James Rives, 3599
Childs, Marquis W., 5899
Childs, Richard S., 6425
Chile, relations with, 3580
Chillicothe, Ohio, 3864
Chills and Fever, 1 676
A Chilmar\ Miscellany, 2380
China
econ. relations with, 3638
fiction, 1252-56, 1259
influences on literature, 1583
relations with, 3506, 3589, 3591-96,
3619
World War II, 3726
Chinard, Gilbert, 3278
Chinaware, 5791-92
Chinese, 3437, 4463-64, 4467-68
The Chinese Nightingale, 1581
Chinese poetry, translations, 1664, 1667
Chipman, Nathaniel, about, 51 21
Chiricahua Apache Indians, 3010
Chiropractic, 481 1
Chisholm, Jesse, about, 4158
Chisholm, Leslie L., 5153, 5228
Chisholm Trail, 4157
Chita, 946-48, 951-52, 955
Chittenden, Hiram Martin, 4148, 4182
ed., 2663
Chittenden, Russell H, 4732
Chittick, Victor L. O., 709
Chitwood, Oliver Perry, 3323
Chivalry, 1262
Chivcrs, Thomas Holley, 540
Choate, Julian Ernest, 4162-63
Choate, Rufus, about, 2676
Choctaw Indians, hist., 3024-25, 3027,
4233, 4248-50
The Choice, 1851
Choirs (music), 5632, 5664-67, 5672
Chopin, Kate (O'Flaherty), 759-761
about, 759
Chorus for Survival, 1 483
Chosen Country, 1331
II06 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
ChotzinofT, Samuel, 2638-39
about, 2639
Chouart, Medard, sieur des Groseilliers,
about, 3170
Christ-Janer, Albert, 5761
Christchurch, 1295
Christensen, Erwin O., 5594
The Christian Disciple, 231
The Christian Examiner, 230-31
The Christian Philosopher, 46
Christian Science, 5404, 5439
hist., 5452-53
Christianity, 5338, 5351, 5358, 5899
Christiansen, F. Melius, about, 5664
Christmas
hist., 4546
songs, 5563
Christmas-Night in the Quarters, 1 135
The Christmas Tree, 1616
Chronicler of the Cavaliers, 226
Chu, Pao Hsun, 4662
Chugerman, Samuel, 4537
Chujoy, Anatole, 4969
Church and education, 5419, 5491, 5494
Church and society, 5482, 5484-97
Catholic Church, 5484, 5488
Judaism, 5488
Protestant churches, 5485-86, 5488-
89
Church and state, 4550, 5395, 5400,
5406, 5409, 5418-22, 5444-45,
6117
educational aspects, 5103, 5236, 5238
in literature, 17, 19, 84, 92-95
Mass., Colonial period, 3178, 3182,
3199,3235
New England, Colonial period, 3197,
3743.
Church history, 5394-96, 5399-5401,
5405-6, 5409, 541 1, 5441-42
Colonial period, 43, 5408, 5410,
5417
Church music
hist., 5632-34
Mormons, 5630
Protestants, 5631
New England, 5633
Philadelphia, 5629
Church of Christ, Scientist. See
Christian Science
Church of God, Anderson, Ind., 5442
Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day
Saints. See Mormons and Mor-
monism
Church of the Brethren, 5442
Churches of Christ, 5442
hist., 5455
The Churches Quarrel Espoused, 93, 95
Churchill, Henry S., 4604
Churchill, Winston (1871-1947), 762-
67
Ciardi, John, 1948-53
Cimarron, 1406
Cincinnati
descr., 4303, 4310, 4312
guidebook, 3865
intellectual life, 3767
soc. life & cust., 4122, 4303
Cincinnati Symphony Orchestra, 5647
The Circuit Rider, 872-73
Circus, 4894, 4977, 4982
The Circus in the Attic, 2198
Cistercians, 2040
Cities and towns, 3095, 4360, 4576,
4587, 4594-95. 4598, 4601-2,
5510, 6207, 6213, 6218
climate, 2952
frontier, 4 151, 4153
growth, 4601-2, 4609
guidebooks, 3786
hist., 4609
in art, 5801
place-names, 2976
planning, 4575, 4587, 4603-7, 4612-
13. 5707
population, 4393
recreation, 4997-98
soc. condit., 4395
water supply, 4797
Colo., 3913
Conn., 4041
Eastern seaboard, 4358
Middle Atlantic States, 4263
Middle West, 4109
Mo., 4108, 4281
Nev., 3955, 4184
New England, 3965, 4239, 4261,
4279
N.J., 4053
N.Y., 4239
Northwest, Old, 4358
Rocky Mountains, 4176
Southern States, 4083, 4288, 4595
Southwest, New, 4187
Southwest, Old, 4098
Va., 4086
The West, 4150, 4176-77
See also Communities, urban
Cities and towns in literature
drama, 1688-89, 2049, 2063, 2145
editorials, sketches, etc., 701-5
essays, 1791, 1859
fiction, 887-89, 956-58, 1090-95,
1 190, 1300, 1327, 1332, 1372-74,
1561, 1656-58, 1828-29, 1831,
1845, 1908, 1911-12, 1914-15,
1921-22, 1939, 1940, 1943, 1966-
67, 2054, 2069, 2074, 2182, 2184,
2229, 2415, 2431
poetry, 1727, 1731, 1870, 1937-38,
2060, 2133
short stories, mi, n 14-19, 15 10,
1851, 1855, 1910, 1913, 2057,
2071-75,2145
Citizen Tom Paine, 1977
Citizenship, 4424, 6122, 6133, 6139
Negroes, 4443
Orientals, 6120
The City and the Pillar, 2180, 2183
City Ballads, 753
The City Boy, 2229
City government. See Local govern-
ment
The City in the Dawn, 1171
City-manager plan, 6210, 6213, 6216,
6425
City of Discontent, 1582
The City of Trembling Leaves, 1956
Civil Aeronautics Act (1938), 5943
Civil arbitration, 6299
Civil cases (law), 6280
Civil control of the military, 3646, 3650
Civil disobedience, 585-86, 593, 604-5,
607-8
Civil liberties and rights, 3308, 3401,
6075, 6106-30, 6134, 6338
hist., 61 17
minorities, 6129
Negroes, 4445
Calif., 61 1 1
N.Y. (State), 51 1 5
Civil procedure (law), 6289, 6295,
6300, 6304
Civil service, 6172, 6178-81, 6183,
6186,6188,6192-93
hist., 6174
Civil Service Commission, 6174
about, 6174, 6186, 6190
Civil service reform, 3422-23, 3431,
3437, 6174, 6178, 6186-87, 6363,
6373,6382
Civil War, 2580, 2710-11, 2757, 3073,
3092, 3141, 3373, 3387-88, 3554,
3690-3706, 4481
art, 5765
biog. (collected), 2613-14. 3695
campaigns & battles, 2828-30, 3450,
3690-93, 3695-99, 3701, 3703,
3706, 4378
bibl., 3365
causes, 3065, 3122, 3366, 3370, 3398,
3400,3409
foreign opinion, 3536, 3550, 3769
foreign rel., 3359
hist., 1729, 3374, 3382, 3393, 3408,
3416, 3450, 4076, 6081
sources, 2416, 3395
interpretations of, 3073, 3106, 3407
naval operations, 3700
personal narratives, 277, 2280, 2637,
2823, 2828-30, 3693, 3696, 3704-
5,4378-81
bibl., 3365.3378
photographs, 829
regimental histories, 3690-92, 3695
bibl., 3365
reporters & reporting, 2851
songs & music, 5569
sources, 3697, 3700
Civil War in literature
editorials, sketches, etc., 556-57, 633,
1099, 1 103-4, 1 106
fiction, 188-89, 245, 247-50, 278-
79. 745. 763-65, 821, 825-29, 836,
1241, 1382, 1389, 1449, 1468,
1541-42, 1544, 1618-19, 1730,
1745, 2201, 4912
poetry, 206, 456-57, 459, 486, 488,
614, 616-17, 623, 666, 1222, 1224,
1811, 1824
propaganda, 422
short stories, 556-57, 733-37, 739,
1099-1102, 1106, 1225, 1790
Civilian Conservation Corps, 5884
Civilian Public Service Camps, 3649
Clancy, William P., 5447
Clapesattle, Helen B., 4827
Clapp, Margaret, 4047
Clappe, Louise Amelia Knapp (Smith),
2640-41
Clare, Thomas H., 5309
Clark, Dan Elbert, 3078
Clark, David L., 109, 115
Clark, E. H., 2240
Clark, Elmer Talmage, 5440, 5442,
5463
Clark, George Luther, 6272
Clark, George Rogers, 3239
about, 3239
Clark, Harry Hayden, 970, 2424-25,
2515
ed., 139, 142, 158, 468, 2290, 2330,
2337,2401
Clark, Jane Perry. See Carey, Jane
(Clark)
Clark, John Maurice, 3454, 5898, 6004
about, 5888
Clark, John Spencer, 5304
Clark, Lawrence E., 5983
Clark, Leadie M., 652
Clark, Lewis Gaylord, 2295
Clark, Thomas D., 2853, 3983, 4097,
4106
Clark, Victor S., 5904
Clark, Walter Van Tilburg, i954-'>8,
4176
Clark, William, 3298
about, 3167, 3299
Clark, William L., 6275-76
Clark, William Smith, II, ed., 469
Clark County, Ohio, 3870
Clarke, Eric, 5617
Clarke, James F., ed., 313
Clarke, William N., about, 5428
Clara's Field, 958
Clash by Night, 2066
Class distinction, 4524, 4534, 4542,
4547. 4549-51. 4556-58, 4561,
4564, 4566, 4585, 5146
Classic Americans, 2397
Classical influences on authors, 201, 205,
611, 1532, 1556, 1864, 2098, 2101,
2479. 2493
Classics and Commercials, 2540
Clavers, Mary, pseud. See Kirkland,
Caroline Matilda (Stansbury)
Claviere, Etienne, 4259
Clawson, Marion, 5809, 5839
Clay, Henry, 3344
about, 3342-44
Clay, Lucius D., 3570
Clayton-Bulwer Treaty, 3559
The Clear Sun-Shine of the Gospel
Breaking Forth upon the Indians
in New England, 62
Clearing in the Sky, 2171
Cleaveland, Moses, about, 41 1 8
Cleaves, Freeman, 3325
Clegg, Charles, 4153
Cleland, Robert Glass, 4186, 4203-4,
4353
Clemens, Olivia (Langdon), 801
Clemens, Samuel Langhorne. See
Twain, Mark
Clemmer, Donald, 4641
Clemons, Harry, 6466
The Clergyman's Advice to the Vil-
lagers, 121
Cleveland, Grover, 3422
about, 2616, 3423, 6359, 6373
Cleveland, Ohio
concerts, 5630
politics, 6207, 6428-29
The Cliff-Dwellers, 888
Clifford, Cornelius, 5289
Climate, 2937, 2951-53, 2959, 2966,
5816
maps, 2951-52
Nev., 4184
New York (State), 4237-38
Pa., 4237-38
Southern States, 4084
Southwest, Far, 4189
Utah, 4183
The Climate of Eden, 1493
Clinch, C.B., 231 1
Cline, Howard F., 3504
Clinical medicine, 4827, 4829, 4831,
Clinical Sonnets, 1625
Clipper ships, 5937
The Clod, 2332
The Clouds, Aigeltinger, Russia, Src,
1878
Clough, Benjamin C, ed., 5513
Clubs, social, 4574, 4578
Clugston, W. G., 6207
Clurman, Harold, 4914
Clymer, Joseph Floyd, 5003
Coad, Oral Sumner, 4899
Coalfields, 4336
Coan, Otis W., 2402
Coast and Geodetic Survey, about,
47.66
Coastwise navigation, 3787
Coats, Robert H., 4474
Cobb, Irvin Shrewsbury, 2642-43
about, 2643
Cobbett, William, 2647
Cobden, Richard, 4321
about, 4320
Coblentz, Edmond D., comp., 2884
Coblenz, Constance G., 3630
Cochise, about, 3004
Cochran, Negley D., 2890
Cochran, Thomas C, 3103, 4047,
5875, 5927, 6005
Cochrane, Alexander, about, 4735
Cochrane, Willard W., 5850
Cockerell, Theodore D. A., about, 4734
Cockrell, Ewing, 6297
Cocks Must Crow, 1684
The Cocktail Party, 1359
Coe, Eva (Johnston), 5593
Coe, Wesley R., 4715
Coeur d'Alene Valley, 4176
Coeur de Lion, Richard, about, 2186
Coffin, Charles Carleton, about, 2851
Coffin, Robert Peter Tristram, 1290-
97. 3973
about, 1292
Coffin, Tristram P., 5518, 5550, 5556
Coffman, Stanley K., 2403
Cogswell, Joseph Green, about, 2462,
3776
Cohane, Tim, 5035
Cohen, Elliot E., ed., 4452
Cohen, Felix S., ed., 3728, 5267
Cohen, Haskell, 5030
Cohen, I. Bernard, 4719
ed., 122, 4750
Cohen, Morris R., 3728, 5267-70, 6268
ed., 5347
about, 5267
INDEX / 1 107
Cohn, Alfred E., 4865
Cohn, David L., 3782, 5822
Cohn, Sarah W., 4407
Cohon, S. S., 4458
Coit, Margaret L., 3327-28
Coker, Francis W., ed., 6060
Colby, Merle, 3940
Colby, Vineta, ed., 2455
Cold Morning Sky, 1 905-6
A Cold Spring, 1926
Colden, Cadwallader, 3194, 5251
about, 3194
Cole, Arthur Charles, 3092, 4130, 5193
Cole, Arthur Harrison, 5910
Cole, Cyrenus, 2644-45, 4144
Cole, Fay-Cooper, about, 2990
Cole, Stewart G., 5430
Cole, Thomas, about, 3751
Colean, Miles L., 4605, 4610
Coleman, James S., 6455
Coleman, Laurence Vail, 3049, 4716,
5794
Coleman, Roy V., ed., 2967, 3071
Coleman, William, 2858
Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, about, 520
Colfax, Schuyler, about, 4383-84
Collect, 633, 638
Collective bargaining, 3132, 6038, 6046,
6053
The College Widow, 701
Colleges and universities, 31 13, 4719,
5160, 5204
administration, 5135, 5194, 5201.
5244
criticisms, 5179, 5190, 5232, 5235
curricula, 5100, 5178, 5180, 5182,
5184, 5187, 5196, 5199
development and innovations, 5169,
5178, 5180, 5182, 5184, 5187.
5195799.5215,5246
directories, 51 12, 5 161
England, 5167, 5179
enrollment, 3786, 5163, 5170
faculties, 51 81, 5201
fiction, 2001, 2021
finances, 5135, 5163-68, 5172, 5175,
5189,5194
geographical distribution, 5171
govt, relations, 5094, 5165, 5167
graduate instruction, 5099, 5105,
5195
hist., 5101-2, 5113, 5122, 5125,
5134, 5143, 5169, 5176-77. 5'83,
5186, 5188, 5191-5204
libraries, 5201, 6478, 6487
museums, 3049, 5201
needs & objectives, 5173, 5178, 5180,
5182, 5187, 5189, 5194
organization, 5135, 5174, 5189
periodicals, 5244
personal narrative, 2394
poetry, 165-67
religious foundations, 5411
scientific education, 4723, 4725
soc. aspects, 5177, 5183, 5191, 5193—
94
stat., 51 1 4, 5174
students, 5170, 5175, 5194
surveys, 5114, 5186, 5201-2, 5206
Germany, 5179
Gt. Brit., 5167, 5179
II08 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Colleges and universities — Continued
Southern States, 4723, 5176
See also Agricultural colleges; Ath-
letics— college; Catholic colleges;
Community colleges; Dental
schools; Football — college; Junior
colleges; Land-grant colleges; Mu-
sic— education; State colleges and
universities; and names of indi-
vidual colleges and universities,
e.g., Bennington College.
Collier, Donald, 2993
Collier, John, 4428
Collier, T., 6195
Collinge, Patricia, 4919
Collins, Carvel, ed., 1092
The Colloquy of Monos and Una, 529
Colm, Gerhard, 5898
Colombia, relations with, 3585
Colombo, Cristoforo. See Columbus,
Christopher
Colonial life in literature, 1-6, 12-16,
43-44. 66-71
diaries, journals, etc., 15—16, 36—39,
49. 53-58. 90-91
fiction, 226, 239, 251-52, 258, 333,
405, 511, 546, 548-49. 665, 1439,
1441, 1707, 1916-18, 1920
legal documents, 32, 78
poetry, 7-1 1, 72-73. 79-83, 427, 433.
1222
religious writings, 17-35, 40, 43-48,
59-62, 84, 86-89, 9°, 92-95
satire, 51-52, 75-76
See also Social life and customs
Colonial Williamsburg, Inc., 5595
Colorado, 3964, 3967, 4180-82
descr., 4 1 74
fiction, 1249
guidebooks, 3912-13
hist., 3913, 3956, 3961, 4147, 4174,
4180, 4189
poetry, 1409-10
theater, hist., 4925
travel & travelers, 4378
Ute Indians, 3041
Colorado Desert, 3947
Colorado River, 4017, 4757
Colorado Springs, hist., 4150
Colton, Calvin, ed., 3344
Columbia, 118
Columbia Plateau, Nez Perce Indians,
3001
Columbia River, 4022
Columbia River Valley, fiction, 1314
Columbia University, about, 5136, 5181,
5185
Columbia University. Bureau of Ap>
plied Social Research, 4701
Columbia University. Columbia Col'
lege, hist., 5197
Columbia University. Graduate School
of Journalism, 2889, 2910
Columbia University. New York State
Hospital Study, 4846
Columbia University. School of Library
Service, hist., 6485
The Columbiad , 104
Columbus, Christopher, 3163-64
about, 381, 1873, 3163-65
poetry, 104
Columnists, 732, 878, 2017
Coman, Katharine, 4149
Comanche Indians, 3014, 4160
Come Back., Little Sheba, 1996, 2335
Come into My Parlor, 2836
Comedy
farcical, 701
frontier & pioneer, 518
lyrical, 1647
marital, 151 8
musical, 701, 705
periods
(1764-1819), 168-70
(1820-70), 198, 517-18, 676
(i87i-i9i4),7oi,705
(I9I5-39). 1199-1212, i49i-
93, 1518, 1545-50. 1647-48,
1749
romantic, 676
satiric, 517, 1491-93, 1545-50, 1749
social, 168-70, 1 1 99-1 2 1 2, 13 17
theory, 5351
See also Drama
Comfort, William Wistar, 3222
Comic strips, 2865
The Coming Forth by Day of Osiris
Jones, 1 1 66
Coming Home, 1851
Coming to the Parson (sculpture), 5739
Commager, Henry Steele, 982, 3058,
3103, 3274, 3348, 3738, 4513,
5481, 6082, 6130
ed., 3079, 4231
Command Decision, 2337
Commentary, 4452-53
Commerce, 4069, 5944-64
foreign, 5946-48, 5950, 5953, 6002
govt, regulation, 5946-48, 5950
cases, 6095, 6104
hist., 5944, 5948, 5955, 5960, 6016
maritime, 3524
reporting, 2869, 2902, 2918, 2924
New England, 4266
New York (City), 5951
New York (State), 4242-46, 4266
Pacific Northwest, 4212, 4214
Pa., 4242-46, 4266
Southern States, 4266
The Thirteen Colonies, 3193, 3243,
3262, 3289
See also Trade
Commercial arbitration, 6299
Commercial policy, 3285, 3340, 3638-
39. 5953
See also General Agreements on
Tariffs and Trade; Tariff
Commins, Saxe, ed., 400, 3268, 3271
Commission on Financing Higher Edu-
cation, 5163-75
Commission on Freedom of the Press,
4687, 4947
Commission on Graduate Medical Edu-
cation, 4857
Commission on Hospital Care, 4847
Commission on Life Adjustment Edu-
cation for Youth, 5224
Commission on Medical Education, 4858
Commission on Organization of the
Executive Branch of the Govern-
ment, 4671, 5099, 6184, 6199
Committee for Economic Development,
about, 5983
Committee for the Study of Recnt Im-
migration from Europe, 4407
Committee on American History in
Schools and Colleges, 3050
Committee on Public Information, 3462
Committee on the Costs of Medical
Care, 4883-84
Commodity exchanges, 5952
The Common Glory, 1477
Common law, 6222-23, 6230-31, 6236
Common Sense, 155, 160
Commons, John R., 6033, 6038
about, 5888
The Commonweal, 5446
Communication Workers of America,
about, 4672
Communications, 3724, 4661-471 1,
4787, 5246, 5899, 6454, 6480
See also individual means of com-
munication, e.g., Books and read-
ing; Language; Newspapers
Communism, 3620, 5351, 5445, 6128,
6130, 6134, 6356
guilt by association, 61 n, 61 17
Calif., 61 1 1, 61 14
Washington (State), 61 16
Communists and the Communist Party,
3149,3490
Communitarian experiments. See
Utopias (settlements)
Communities, 4551, 4656
Jewish, 4454, 4457-58
Negro, 4442, 4446
Norwegian, 2267
Calif., 2641
Communities, rural, 2764, 4109, 4576
bibl., 4580
econ. condit., 4585
See also Farm and rural life
Communities, urban, 4548, 4550, 4561,
4576, 4609
See also Cities and towns
Community centers, Jewish, 4454
Community colleges, 5162
Community life, Japanese, 4466
Community music, 5625
Community organization, 4575
Compacts, New England (Colonial
period), 6079
The Company She Keeps, 2018
Compensation, 285
Compensation for judicial error, 6294
Composers, 146, 1927, 5605, 5609-11,
5614, 5620, 5639, 5656, 5672
See also Musicians
Composition, literary. See Literary
composition
Comprehensive high schools, 5156
Compromise of 1850,3118, 3344
Compton, Arthur H., 4722, 4747, 5187,
5434
about, 4747
Compton, Charles H., 6467
Compton, Frances Snow, pseud. See
Adams, Henry
Compton, Karl T., 4693
Comptroller General, 5996
INDEX / I IO9
Comstock Lode, Nev., 4185
fiction, 1420
Comte, Auguste, about, 4536
Conant, James Bryant, 5134, 5180
Conceived in Liberty, 1974
Concerning the Jews, 798-99
Concerts
hist., 5612, 5679
Boston, 5649
Calif., 5630
Cleveland, 5630
New York (City), 5626-27
Concord, Mass.
essays, 1002-3
hist., 4037
Concord Circle, 186, 230, 280, 333,
585, 619, 2278
Concord School of Philosophy, 5220
Concord Sonata, 5682
Condit, Carl W., 5705
The Conduct of Life, 292-93
Conductors (orchestra), 5620
Confederate States, 2637, 2828-30,
3694-95. 3698
biog. (collected), 2613, 3384, 3695
for. rel., 3539
govt., 6081
hist., 3373, 3383-84, 3396, 3698,
4076
bibl., 3365, 3378
sources, 3697, 3700
origins, 3404
soc. condit., 3373
Confederate States Army, 3369
cavalry, 3703
military life, 3704-5
sources, 3697
Confederate States Navy, sources, 3700
The Confederation (1781-89), 3190,
3245. 3256, 3301-2
Conference for Progressive Political
Action, 6356
Confessions of a Congressman, 6165
The Confessions of a Reformer, 6428
Confessions of an Actor, 4933
The Confidence-Man, 485, 491
The Confident Years, 2381
The Confidential Cler\, 1360
Conformity, 6130
The Congo, 15 81
Congregational-Christian Churches,
5442
Congregational churches, Colonial,
17, 19, 32, 40, 43-44, 59, 92-95
Congregational ists, 5404
hist., 5415, 5454
Congress, 6084, 6089, 6150-69, 6340
committees, 6159
foreign affairs, 3604, 3610-11, 3615-
16
functions, 6151-52, 6154-55, 6167,
6169, 6191
hist., 3450, 6140, 6142, 6150-51
investigating committees, 6154, 6160,
6164
organization, 6150, 6152, 6155, 6162,
6167, 6169
rules & practice, 6150, 6162, 6167,
6169
See also Legislative branch
Congress. House, 6150, 6163, 6165,
6415
committees, 6156
election districts, 6163
rules & practice, 6150, 6165
Congress. House. Committee Investi-
gating Un-American Activities, 61 12
Congress. House. Committee on In-
terior and Insular Affairs, 3039
Congress. House. Committee on Un-
American Activities, hist., 61 14
Congress. House. Select Committee
on Lobbying Activities, 6397
Congress. Joint Committee on the Eco-
nomic Report, 5970
Congress. Senate
functions, 6158, 61 61
hist., 6158
rules & practice, 6157-58, 6161
Congress. Senate. Committee on the
Judiciary, 4424
Congress of Industrial Organizations,
6034-36
Congress of Industrial Organiztaions.
Political Action Committee, 6394
Congressional elections. See Elections
Congressional investigations, 6128,
6154, 6160, 6164
The Conjure Woman, 757
The Conjurer's Revenge, 757
Conkle, E. P., 2332
Conklin, Edwin Grant, 5427
about, 5427
Connecticut, 3965, 4041-42
architecture, Colonial, 5707
early settlers, 32
guidebook, 3805
hist., 4041
pol. & govt., 2652
Connecticut Courant (Hartford), 2875
Connecticut Fundamental Orders of
1639.32
Connecticut in literature, 32, 34, 118,
562
essays, 165
fiction, 1299, 1301
poetry, 121, 1782
Connecticut River and valley, hist., 4009
Connecticut Wits, ioi, 118, 165, 2465
A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur's
Court, 794-97, 811
Connelly, Marc, 1545-46, 2327, 2332-
33.2348
Conner, Frederick W., 2404
Connor, A. J., 2953
Conover, Merrill B., 4621
Conover, Milton, 4768
Conquering the Wilderness, 4044
The Conqueror, 723-24
The Conquest of Canaan (novel), 1802
The Conquest of Canaan (poem), 119
The Conquest of Mexico, History of,
2294
The Conquest of Peru, History of, 2294
Conquistador, 1585
Conrad, Robert T., 2347
Conscientious objectors
Civil War, 3702
World War II, 3649, 6124
Conservation of natural resources, 1072,
I075-76, 2790, 2956, 2960, 4099,
5810, 5884, 5900
Conservatism, 3139, 6340
hist., 6067, 6070
Colonial period, 3195, 3255, 3262
American Revolution, 3253, 3267
19th cent., 3303,3336
Conservatism Revisited, 2189
Conservative Judaism, 5460
Considine, Robert B., 5012
The Conspiracy of Kings, 103
The Conspiracy of Pontiac, 3 1 7 1
The Conspirators, 2092
Constable, William G., 5426
about, 5426
Constitution, 3046, 3 116, 3304, 4266,
4334, 6075-78, 6080-82, 6084-89,
6091-93, 6100, 6121, 6129, 6133-
34. 6137, 6143, 6157, 6199, 6411
amendments, 6098, 6102-3
Civil War, 6064, 6121
1st, 6107, 6109, 6123
5th, 6097,6108
14th, 6078, 6094-95, 6097
article 5, 6098
commerce clause, 6096
compact clause, 6206
contract clause, 6105
econ. aspects, 3139
See also Bill of Rights
The Constitution of the United States
(Annotated), 6102
Constitutional Convention (1787),
6082, 6087-88
Constitutional history, 3141, 3195,
3253-54. 3256, 3282, 6059, 6073-
89, 6094, 6100
Constitutional law, 6072, 6085, 6090-
6105, 6166, 6255, 6257, 6259,
6266, 6277
cases, 6084, 6089-92, 6095, 6099-
6100, 6102-5, 6121, 6127, 6129
Civil War, 6081
Constitutions, state, 6080, 6086, 6195
Construction industry, 4600, 4610
Consular service. See Diplomatic and
consular service
Consumption (economics), 5954
Contemplations, 7
Contemporaries, 2280
Contemporary Trends, 2276
Continental Army Medical Dept., 4830
Continental Congress, 3242
church influence in, 5406
1st (1774). 3262
2d (1775-89). 3304
Executive branch, 6083
Presidency (1774-89). See Presi-
dency—C ontinental Congress
(1774—89)
See also The Confederation (1781-
89)
The Continuing Spirit, 5453
Contracts, 6101, 6105
cases, 6279
laws, 6275
The Contrast, 168-70, 2337, 2347
Convention of 181 8 with Gt. Brit.,
3542
IIIO
/
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Conventions, political. See Political
conventions
Conversation at Midnight, 1609
Conversations, 313
Converse, Paul D., 5945
Conway, H. J., 23 11
Conway, Moncure, 2646-48, 4049
ed., 155
about, 2646, 2648
Cook, Beatrice G., 5070
Cook, Elizabeth Christine, 2854
Cook, Frederick A., about, 2979
Cook, George A., 92
Cook, Reginald L., 609
Cook, Sherburne F., 3002, 3022
Cooke, Bob, ed., 4984
Cooke, George Willis, 5470
ed., 2328
Cooke, Jay, about, 5988
Cooke, John Esten, 66, 245-51, 2296
Cooley, Charles Horton, about, 4542
Cooley, Thomas W., 6091
Cooley, W. F., 5289
Coolidge, Archibald C, ed., 924
Coolidge, Calvin, 3481
about, 3480-81
Coolidge, Dane, 3013
Coolidge, Mary Elizabeth Burroughs
(Roberts) Smith, 3013, 4464
Cooper, Frank E., 6310
Cooper, James Fenlmore, (1789-1851),
252-73, 2290, 2295
about, 252, 546, 579, 674, 2277, 2286,
2364, 2385, 2397, 2456, 2471,
2509, 2544
Cooper, James Fenimore (b. 1858), ed.,
270
Cooper, Peter, about, 3443
Cooper, Thomas, 5251
about, 3303, 4721
Cooperative societies, 5842, 5964, 6008
Cope, Alfred Haines, ed., 3108
Cope, Edward Drinker, about, 4724,
4748
Copland, Aaron, about, 5675
Copley, Frank Barkley, 4798
Copley, John Singleton, about, 5749,
5763
Coppee, Francois, about, 2466
Copper, antique, 5787
"Copperheads," 901
Copyright law, music, 5621, 5681
Cora, Anna. See Mowntt, Anna Cora
Coral Gables, Fla., 3846
Coram, Robert, about, 5 1 21
Cordier, Ralph W., 4057
The Cords of Vanity, 1262
Core courses in schools, 5158, 5225,
5237
Coriolanus and His Mother, 2134
Cork, J., 5291
Corle, Edwin, 3947, 4005
Corliss, Carlton J., 5927
Corn, 3948
Corn (Engle), 1968
Corn (Lanier), 1038
Corn Country, 3948
Cornelius, Charles Over, 5727-28. 5796
Cornell, William Bouck, ed., 5906
Cornell University, 61 10-25
hist., 5191
Cornhus\ers, 1731
Corning, Howard McKinley, 3937, 3939
Cornish folklore, Mich., 5533
Coronado, Francisco Vasquez de, about,
3158,3217
Corporation law, 6008, 601 1, 6236
Corporations, 4616, 6011-12, 6018,
6020, 6022
finance, 4616, 5967
hist., 6014-15
Corpus Christi, Tex., 3919, 4476
Corrupt practices acts, 6338
Corruption (in politics), 6195, 6207,
6333, 6342-44, 6377, 6380, 6383,
6385, 6387-93, 6404, 6407, 6410,
6425, 6430, 6432, 6434
See also Spoils system
Cortesi, Arnaldo, 3615
Cortissoz, Royal, 5735
Corwin, Edward H., 4848, 4851
Corwin, Edward S., 3758, 6092-94,
6143
ed., 6102
Cory, Daniel, 5367
ed., 1 74 1
Cosby, William, about, 2931
Cosgrave, John O'Hara, II, illus., 748,
3974,4012,4019
Cosmic Optimism, 2404
Cosmogony of the Universe, 531
Cosmology, 5252, 5303
Coss, John J., 5178, 5289
Cost and standard of living, 4567, 4593,
4595, 5883, 6048
Cotes, Peter, 4953
Cotterill, Robert S., 4067
The Cotter's Saturday Night, 662
Cotton, James Harry, 5362
Cotton, John, 17-20, 89
about, 5396
Cotton and cotton production, 3539,
4084, 4367-68, 4476, 4789, 5822
editorials, sketches, etc., 1907
fiction, 1 1 59, 1786
Couch, William T., ed., 4068
Coughlan, Robert, 1398
Coulson, Thomas, 4752
Coulter, Edith M., 4202
Coulter, Ellis Merton, 3365, 4076-77,
4094, 5176
ed., 3404, 4072
Coulter, John Merle, 4724
about, 2789
Council-manager plan. See City-
manager plan
Council of Economic Advisers, 6144
Council of State Governments, 5135,
6197,6199
Council of State Governments. Com-
mittee on State-Local Relations,
6200
Council on Foreign Relations, 3634,
3637
Council on Library Resources, Inc.,
6487
about, 6487
Counseling in education, 5228
CounseUor-at-haw , 1689
Counter-Statement, 2387
Country Cured, 2654
The Country Girl, 2068
Country Growth, 1963
Country life. See Farm and rural life
The Country of the Pointed Firs, 1027-
29, 1 03 1
Country People, 1796
Country stores, 4086, 5955
Country theater, 4902
Countryman, Vern, 61 10, 61 16
Counts, George S., 5106, 5136
County agricultural agent, 5852
County fairs, 5827
County government. See Local govern-
ment
County libraries, 6471
Courier (Louisville, Ky.), about, 2892
The Course of Empire, 3 161, 3299
The Court of Fancy, 1 44
Courtney, Marguerite (Taylor), 4932
Courts, 6078, 6097, 6280-93, 6306
6309-10
decisions & opinions, 3756, 6090-91
6100, 6103, 6126
hist., 6290
reform, 6307
Mass., 6292
Mo., 4108
See also Supreme Court
Courts, administrative (state), 631 1
Courts, federal, 6280-82, 6286, 6293
Courts, military, 6289
Courts, state, 6281-82, 6293
Courts, traffic, 6307
Courts, trial, 6285
Courts-martial and courts of inquiry,
6289
Courtship, 4572
The Courtship of Miles Standish, 433
Cousins, N., 4513
Covarrubias, Miguel, 3016
illus., 474, 566
The Covenant of Grace Opened, 35
Covenants, New England (Colonial
period), 6079
Covered bridges, 5724
Covey, Cyclone, 3747
Cowboys, 2657, 2700, 4152-54, 4158,
4161-63
bibl., 4190
dances, 5591
fiction, 683-86, 1145-48, 1484-86,
1686-87
folklore, 5503
in art, 5770, 5802
in literature, 4162-63
language (dialects, etc.), 2253, 5503
short stories, 687, 1145, 1686-87
songs & music, 5503, 5556, 5558-60
Cowdrey, Mary Bartlett, 5768
Cowell, Henry, 5682
Cowell, Sidney (Robertson), 5682
Cowie, Alexander, 2405
ed., 549
The Cowled hover, 2309
Cowley, Malcolm, 642, 955, 2406,
2408-9, 3758
ed., 357, 2406-7
Cox, John Harrington, ed., 5572
Cox, Reavis, 5963
Cox, William, 2295
Coxe, Louis O., 487, 2335
Coxey, Jacob S., about, 3440
INDEX / IIII
Coyle, David Cushman, 5884
Cozens, Frederick W., 4983
Cozzens, James Gould, 1298-1302
Crabtree, Arthur B., 5299
Crabtree, Lotta, about, 2798
"Cracker" dialect in literature, 556,
1038
Craddock, Charles Egbert, pseud. See
Murfree, Mary Noailles
Crafts. See Arts and crafts
Craig, Gordon, 4972
Craig, Hardin, 534
Craigie, Sir William A., ed., 2236
Craig's Wife, 2332
Cram, Ralph Adams, 694
Cramer, Clarence H., 5476
Cranch, Mary (Smith), 100
Crane, Edward M., 6453
Crane, Hart, 1303-6, 2544
about, 520, 1306, 1480, 2497, 2499,
2527
Crane, Milton, ed., 3494
Crane, Ronald S., ed., 2410
Crane, Stephen, 821-37
about, 821, 1278, 1923, 2285, 2365,
2372, 2430
Crane, Verner W., 122, 3180, 3186-87
ed., 3184
Crapy Cornelia, 1008
Craven, Avery O., 3058, 3366-67, 4075
comp., 3079
ed-, 3357. 3784
Craven, Wesley Frank, 3051, 4073
ed., 3727
Crawford, Bartholow V., 604
Crawford, Kenneth G., 6393
Crayon, Geoffrey, gent., pseud. See
Irving, Washington
The Crayon Miscellany, 381
Crazy Horse (Oglala Sioux chief),
about, 2801, 3036
The Crazy Hunter, 1246
The Cream of the Jest, 1261-62
Creative Intelligence, 5254
Credit, 5963, 5974
agricultural, 5848
public, 3289, 3291
Chicago, 5985
Creech, Margaret, 4632
Creeds, comparative studies, 5397
Creek Indians, 4233, 4248-50
See also Five Civilized Tribes
Creel, George, about, 3462
Creighton, James E., about, 5259
Cremin, Lawrence A., 5104, 5137
Creole dialect, 2265
in literature, 745, 759-61, 1032
Creole Sketches, 951-52, 954
Creoles in literature, 759-61, 946-52,
954-55
fiction, 745-50
Cress, Eleanor Chittenden, 4182
Cress Delahanty, 2213
Cresson, Margaret (French), 5736
Cresson, William P., 3284
The Cretan Woman, 1532, 1536
Crevecoeur, Michel Guillaume St. Jean
de, 4232, 4500-1
about, 2456
Cricket, 5063
Crime and criminals, 2888, 4405, 4617,
4619, 4639, 4641, 4645-48, 4655-
56, 4659, 6306, 6308
biog. (collected), 4652
Colonial period, 6056
identification, 6294
labor, 6056
language (dialects, etc.), 2274
rehabilitation, etc., 4639-40, 4643,
4648, 4652
The West, 6220
See also Women — delinquents
Crime prevention, 6309
Crimea Conference, Yalta, Russia, 3109,
3544>3567
Criminal cases, 6280
Criminal justice, 6294, 6303, 6306
Criminal law, 4645, 6292, 6308
administration, 6303
digests, 6276
Criminal procedure (law), 4645, 6282,
6289, 6294-95, 6298, 6301-3,
6305-6, 6308
Mass., 6292
New York (Colony), 6221
Criminal psychology, 2716-17, 4641
Criminal trials, hist., 6229
Criminology, 4639
Cripple Creek, Colo., 4174
hist., 4181
The Crisis, 763-65
The Crisis of the Old Order, 3500
Crissey, M. H., ed., 3357
A Critical Table, 1584
The Critical Period in American Lit-
erature, 2450
Critical realism, 5255
Critical Woodcuts, 2505
Criticism, literary
and art, 5688
anthologies, 2372, 2383, 2410-11,
2531,2538
bibl., 2550
Chicago school, 2410
drama, 2466, 2468
essays, 2425, 2472, 2477, 2479-81,
2498, 2503-5, 251 1, 2519-20,
2535-48, 2550
fiction, 2373, 2466, 2491, 2495
hist., 2507, 2510, 2515
Marxist, 2439
methods, 2443, 2550
"New Criticism," 2378, 2421, 2559
periodicals, 2492, 2551-77
periods when written
(1764-1819), 109
(1820-70), 230, 313, 345, 449,
458, 465-67, 520, 533, 536,
538,551,614,618
(1871-1914), 896-97, 964, 977,
979, 986, 1004, 1010, 1016,
1022, IO44, U36
(1915-39), 1225-26, 1228-29,
1231, 1233-36, 1238, 1278-
83, 1304, 1306, 1312, 1347-
49, 1357-58, I36l, I363-7I,
1375,1377, 1397-1402, I50I-
5, 1622, 1675, 1678-79, 1809,
1823, 2423
Criticism, literary — Continued
periods when written — Continued
(1940-55), 1923, 1999-2000,
2125, 2128, 2356-63, 2373,
2388-90
poetry, 520, 614, 1044, 2378-79,
2452, 2491
principles, 2494
short stories, 2495
techniques, 2494
theory, 2421, 2512
Criticism and art, 5688
Criticism and Fiction, 977
The Crock, of Gold, 23 1 1
"Crocker poems," about, 323
Crockett, David, 2296, 2649-50
about, 2649-50, 2796, 3353, 5506
drama, 2301
Crofut, Florence S. M., 4041
Croker, Richard, about, 6432
Croly, Herbert D., 3424, 4502, 6352
Cronin, John F., 5484
Cronkhite, Bernice (Brown), ed., 5215
Cronon, Edmund David, 3046
The Crooked Mile, 241 5
Cross, Barbara M., 5476
Cross, Wilbur Lucius, 2651-52
about, 2652
The Cross and the Crown, 5452
Cross Creek., 1685
The Crossing, 766-67
Crotchets and Quavers, 5659
Crothers, Rachel, 2337, 2348
Crouse, Nellis M., 3160, 3170
Crouse, Russel, 1317, 2327, 2334-35
Croushore, James H., ed., 3693
Crow Indians, 3005
Crowder, Walter F., 6030
Crowell, Paul, 6207
Crowell, Pers, 5867
Crowl, Philip A., 3668
Croy, Homer, 2653-57, 3948
about, 2654-55
The Crucial Decade, 3484
The Crucible, 2048
Cruger, Jacob W., about, 6446
The Cruise of the Cow, 2746
Crum, Mason, 4436
Crumbling Idols, 896-97
Crusade in Europe, 3719
Crutchfield, Richard S., 5390
A Cry of Children, 1940, 1943
Cuba, 3569
fiction, 1500
independence, 3575
relations with, 3581
Cubberley, Ellwood P., 5138
Cuber, John F., 4549, 4619
Cullen, Countee, 1307-8
Cults, 5397-98, 5404-5, 5439-40, 5498
Culture, 31 1 5, 3736, 3738, 3741, 3750,
377L 3779, 3786, 4502-4, 4546,
4586,5351
and education, 5099, 5104, 5126-27,
5136,5200,5203,5243
European criticism & interpretation,
3771-72, 3779, 4223, 4225, 4230,
4234, 4271, 4300, 4303, 4336,
4506
1 1 12 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Culture — Continued
foreign influence, 3146, 3227, 3474,
3737, 3740, 3758, 3768-70, 3774,
4187, 4189, 4197-98
bibl., 3768
hist., 3737
Colonial period, 3740, 3747-48
19th cent., 3399, 3436, 3744, 3754,
4293,4312
20th cent., 3474, 3479, 3746
urban, 4530, 4590
See also Indians, American — culture;
Intellectual life; Jews — culture; also
under place names, e.g., Massachu-
setts— culture
Culture, 292
Cumberland Mountains, short stories,
1084
Cumberland Road, 5931
Cumming, William K., 4688
Cummings, Edward Estlin, 1309-13
about, 1310, 13 1 2, 2426
Cummings, Homer S., 6227
Cummins, R., 5442
Cunningham, G. W., 5252
Cunningham, John T., 4053
Cunz, Dieter, 4480
A Cure of Flesh, 1299
Curme, George O., 2242-43
Curoe, Philip R. V., 5210
Currency question. See Monetary policy
Current, Richard N., 3336, 3368, 3395
Currier, Thomas F., comp., 377
Currier & Ives
about, 5778-79
bibl., 5778-79
A Curtain of Green, 2203
Curti, Merle E., 3065, 3103, 3729, 3785,
4526,5116,5194
ed., 2355, 3739
Curtis, George William, 2278
about, 2278
Cushing, Caleb, about, 2675
Cushing, Harvey W., 4829
about, 4821
Cushing, Marshall H., 4663
Cushman, Harvey B., drawings, 41 10
Cushman, Robert E., 61 1 7, 6 1 8 1
ed., 6110-25
Custer, George Armstrong, about, 3036
Custer State Park, S. Dak., guidebook,
3898
Custis, George Washington Parke, 2337
The Custom of the Country, 1850
Cutter, Charles Ammi, about, 6476
Cutter, William Parker, 6476
The Cynic's Word Book, 732
D
D., H. See Doolittle, Hilda
D. A. R. 5<f<? Daughters of the Amer-
ican Revolution
Dabney, Thomas Ewing, 2871
Daddy Grace, about, 5498
Dade County, Fla., 3846
Dahl, Robert A., 361 1
Daiches, David, 656, 660, 1281, 2407
Daily Journal (Louisville, Ky.), about,
2892
Daily News (New York), about, 2862
Daily newspapers, 2847, 2849, 2903
The Daily Picayune (New Orleans),
about, 2871
Daisy Miller, 1007, 1014
Dakota Indians, 4147
Dakotas
frontier life, 2683
Norwegians, 4487
Dale, Edgar, 5231
Dale, Edward Everett, 3023, 4154,
4744,5868
The Dallas Morning News, about, 2866
The Dallas News, about, 2866
D'Alonzo, Constance A., ed., 4873
Dalton, A. P., 2257
Daly, Augustin, 2317, 2337
Damaged Souls, 2617
Damrosch, Walter, 5676, 5678
Dana, Charles A., about, 2848, 2874,
2881
Dana, Henry Wadsworth Longfellow,
5760
Dana, James Dwight, 4744, 4749
about, 4721, 4724, 4749
Dana, John Cotton, about, 6476
Dana, Julian, 2658-60, 3974
Dana, Richard Henry (1815-1882),
274-76
about, 276, 479, 2492, 2580
Dana, Richard Henry (1851-1931),
about, 2491
Dancing, 4967-72
hist., 4971
See also Ballet; Games and dances;
Folk dances; Square dances
Danckaerts, Jasper, 3208
Danes, 4482
Danforth, Samuel, about, 2493
Dangerfield, George, 3329
Dangerfield, Royden J., 3612
The Daniel Jazz, 1581
Danielian, Noobar R., 4673
Daniels, Jonathan, 3488, 4449
Danilevsky, Nadia, 4401
Danilov, Victor J., 2905
Danish West Indies purchase, 3571
The Danites in the Sierras, 2337
Dankers, Jasper, 3208
Dankert, Clyde E., 6036
Danner, Edwin R., 2266
Dante Alighieri, 437
about, 1303, 2281
Danton, Emily Miller, ed., 6476
Danz, Louis, 4968
Danzig, Allison, 5036, 5046
ed., 4984
Dargan, Marion, 3058, 3080
The Daring Young Man on the Flying
Trapeze, 21 10
The Daring Young Men, 5755
The Dar\ Bifocals, 5351
Dark, Bridwell, 1422
Dark Carnival, 1933
Dark Glory, 5501
Dark Green, Bright Red, 2185
The Dark Hills Under, 1916
Dark Laughter, 11 83
Dark of the Moon, 181 4
Dark Summer, 1237
Darkness at Noon, 2335-36
Darley, F., illus., 271, 555, 1 138
Darling, Arthur Burr, 3531
Darrah, William C, 4757
Darrow, Clarence, 2816
about, 2816, 5430
D'Arusmont, Frances (Wright), 4291-
92
about, 4290
Darwin, Charles Robert, about, 695,
716, 5274
Darwinism, 3755, 3768, 4721, 5181
See also Evolution
Dauer, Manning J., 3285
The Daughter of Bugle Ann, 1 541
A Daughter of the Middle Border, 898
Daughters of the American Revolution,
about, 3644, 4574
Davenport, Basil, 347
Davenport, Eugene, 2661
about, 2661
Davenport, Francis Garvin, 3765, 4107
Davenport, Russell W., 4503
Davenport, Walter, 6353
David, Henry, 3425
ed., 6054
Davidson, Donald, 554, 3781, 4006,
4068
Davidson, Edward H., 360
Davidson, J. Brownlee, about, 4803
Davidson, Levette J., 5514
ed., 5530
Davidson, Marshall, 5801
Davidson, P. G., 3058
Davidson, Percy E., 6043
Davidson, Thomas, about, 5267
Davidson, William R., 5945
Davie, Maurice R., 4407, 4437
Davies, John D., 3752
Davies, Wallace Evan, 3079, 3644
Davis, Allison, 4438
Davis, Charles T., ed., 645
Davis, Clyde Brion, 3984
Davis, Curtis C, 226
Davis, Elmer Holmes, 3621
Davis, Hallie (Ferguson) F., 4915
Davis, Harold Lenoir, 1314-16
Davis, Jefferson, about, 1809, 3369,
3383-84.3388
Davis, Joe Lee, ed., 2329
Davis, John, 4274-75
about, 4273
Davis, John H., 5841
Davis, Joseph S., 4391, 6014
Davis, Julia, 3997
Davis, Kenneth S., 3482
Davis, Kingsley, ed., 4550
Davis, Merrell R., 478
Davis, Michael M., 4885
Davis, Nathan Smith, about, 4807
Davis, Owen, 2337, 2348
Davis, Pearce, 5911
Davis, R. S., 6207
Davis, Richard B., ed., 540, 4280
Davis, Theodore R., about, 5806
Davis, William T., ed., 4, 3204
Davison, Archibald, 5631, 5669
about, 5672
Davison, Henry P., about, 5987
Davison, W. P., 3615
Davy Crockett, 2301
Dawes Severalty Act, 3034
INDEX / 1 1 13
Dawn, 1344
Dawn in Lyonesse, 1287
Dawson, Howard A., 5208
Day, Arthur Grove, 4220
Day, Benjamin H., about, 2874
Day, Clarence, 1317-18
Day, Donald, 2657, 3949
ed., 545, 2794, 5507
Day, Matthew, about, 6442
The Day of Doom, 79-83
The Day of the Locust, 1844
The Days Before, 1 659
The Days of Armageddon, 3465
Days Off, 5096
Days Off in Dixie, 5087
A Day's Pleasure, 893
Days to Come, 1989
Days without End, 1648
De Orbe Novo, 3153
De Rebus Oceanis et Orbe Novo De-
cades Tres, 3 1 53
De Rerum Natura, translation, 1556
The Deacon's Masterpiece, 368
Dead End, 2327, 2333
Deaf, 4629
Dealey, J. Q., 4540
The Dealings of God, Man, and the
Devil, 2805
Dean, John W., ed., 82
Dean, Vera (Micheles), 3505
Deane, Charles, ed., 2
Deane, J. R., 3562
Dear Judas, 1534
Dearborn, Henry, about, 3660
Dearing, Charles L., 5921
De Armond, Anna Janney, 2880
Dearstyne, Howard, 4086
The Death and Birth of David Mar-
\and, 1447
Death Comes for the Archbishop, 1276-
77
about, 1278
Death in the Woods, 1 185
Death of a Man, 1245
Death of a Salesman, 2047, 2335-36
The Death of General Montgomery, 105
Death of the God in Mexico, 5351
Death Valley, Calif., 4205
guidebook, 3928
Debo, Angie, 4170-71
Debs, Eugene Victor, about, 2819, 6045
Debts, public, 3125, 5976-77
De Camp, Lyon Sprague, 4781
A Decent Birth, a Happy Funeral, 21 17
Decentralization in government. See
Government— centralization
Declaration of Independence, 3116,
3255, 6073-74
Declaration of Independence (painting),
5775
Decorative arts, 5594, 5600, 5602-3,
5784-93
See also Arts and crafts
Decorative design, 5726, 5728, 5732,
5796
Dedmon, Emmet, 4134
Deems, M. M., 5442
The Deep Sleep, 2055
The Deepening Stream, 141 6
Deephaven, 1024-26
431240—60 72
The Deer Par\, 2028
Deering, Ferdie, 5856
The Deerslayer, 258
The Deerstalkers, 5080
Defenses, 3525, 3618, 3639, 3646, 3725
Definitions, 2394-96
Defoe, Daniel, about, 1278
De Forest, John William, 277-79, 3963
about, 277
De Forest, Lee, 4689
about, 4689
De Gogorza, Maidand, illus., 3973
De Grazia, Alfred, 6402
De Grey, 1012
De Groot, Alfred T., 5455
Deism, 5408
Deitrick, John E., 4861
De Kruif, Paul Henry, 1520
Delaware
guidebooks, 3822-23
hist., 3214, 4043
Delaware Indians, 3020
Delaware infantry (Revolutionary War),
3683
Delaware River and valley, hist., 3993
DeLeon, Daniel, about, 6045
A Delicate Affair, 1035
The Delicate Prey, 1929
The Deliverance, 1461
Delo, David M., 2973
Delta Wedding, 2206
The Deluge, 1107
The Demagogue, 422
Demagoguery, fiction, 2197
De Mille, Agnes, 4970
about, 4970
De Mille, Henry C, 2314
De Mille, William C, 2313
Demobilization, 3652
Democracy, 3112-13, 3142, 3197, 3241,
3252, 3254, 3281, 3283, 3368,
3434, 3463. 3733- 374i, 3778,
4069, 4103, 41 1 5, 4499, 4509-12,
4522, 4542, 4550, 4557, 5279,
5284, 5445, 6060, 6066, 6069-
6071, 6078-79, 6134, 6137, 6139,
6178, 6357, 6362-63, 6370, 6414,
6424, 6434
sources, 3143, 3319
See also Liberty; Politics
Democracy , an American Novel, 689-90
Democracy and education, 5100, 5106,
5115, 5118, 5125, 5134, 5136,
5146, 5186, 5189, 5209, 5211,
5224-25, 5243
Democracy and Leadership, 2375
Democracy and Other Addresses, 460
Democratic ideals in literature, 740,
2514
documents, 32
fiction, 794-97
poetry, 459, 619-30, 636-37, 639,
642, 1580
prose, 84, 92-95, 101, 103, 178-85,
265-67, 631, 635, 638, 642, 652
speeches, addresses, etc., 460-61
Democratic National Committee, 6364,
6384
Democratic newspapers, 2851, 2863,
2866
Democratic Party, 3141, 3400, 3438,
3443,3500a
hist., 6359, 6369, 6373-74
National Convention (1912), 6350-
51
National Convention (1924), 6421
National Convention (1932), 6354
platforms, 6367
publicity, 6348
Chicago, 6386
New York (State), 6384
Southern States, 6378-79
Democratic-Republican Party. See Re-
publican Party (Jeffersonian)
Democratic-Republican societies. See
Political clubs
Democratic Vistas, 631-32
Demography, 4391, 4403, 4459
Dempsey, William Harrison (Jack),
5023
about, 3488, 4987, 5023
Demuth, Charles, about, 5744
Denervaud, Marie V., 672
Denison, Tex., guidebook, 3920
Denmark, relations with, 3571
Dennett, Raymond, ed., 3562
Dennett, Tyler, 3426
Denney, Reuel, 4555
Dennie, Joseph, about, 2465
Dennis, A. P., 5222
Dennis, Martin, about, 4735
Denny, Margaret, ed., 2412
Denominations. See Cults; Religion;
Sects
Dental health services, 4871
Dentistry, 4842-43
Denver, 4176
hist., 2878, 4150
politics, 6207
The Denver Post, about, 2878
De Paolo, Peter, 5006
about, 5006
Dept. of Agriculture, 2947, 2951, 5816-
17,5837
about, 5836, 5856-57
Dept. of Justice, about, 6226-27
Dept. of Justice. Civil Rights Division,
6106, 6113
Dept. of Labor, about, 6051
Dept. of State
about, 3599, 3604
hist., 3601-2, 3606
functions, 3601, 3606
Dept. of State. Secretary of State's
Public Committee on Personnel,
3600
Dept. of the Army. Office of Military
History, 3665, 3726
Department stores, 5956-57, 5959
Dependency, 4618, 4632, 4634
Depression (1929), 3098, 3485, 5877
fiction, 1775, 1777, 1887, 1891
Derber, Milton, ed., 4635
Derleth, August William, 1959-65,
3985
A Descent into the Maelstrom, 529
A Description of New England, 69
Deseret News (Salt Lake City), about.
2867
Desert Island Decameron, 2370
The Desert Music, 1883
1 1 14 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The Desert Year, 2453
Deserts, 3947
soils, 2944
Calif., 2753
Designed for Reading, 2569
The Desire of the Moth, 1687
Desire under the Elms, 1648, 2332
De Smet, Pierre Jean, 2662-63
about, 2663
DeSoto, Clinton B., 4690
De Soto, Hernando, about, 3158, 3217
Destler, Chester McArthur, 3427
Destruction and Reconstruction, 2829-
30
The Destruction of the Pe quods, 121
Detective and mystery fiction, 1959,
2415,2435-36
Detective Story, 2335
Determinism, 5323
The Detour, 2348
Detroit
hist., 4138
politics, 6207
Deutsch, Albert, 4642, 4836-37
Deutsch, Babette, 2413-14
Deutsch, Helen, 4916
Deutsch, Leonhard, music arr. by, 5581
The Devil and Daniel Webster, 1222
The Devil's Dictionary, 732, 739
The Devil's Pretty Daughter, 5545
Devotional books, 45, 87-89
De Voto, Bernard A., 818, 2415-18,
3161, 3299, 3330-31, 5526
ed., 781,790, 812,3298
about, 2498
Dew and Bronze, 1 295
Dewey, Davis Rich, 5966
Dewey, Jane M-, ed., 5294
Dewey, John, 5117-20, 5123, 5254,
5272-88, 5290-91, 5335-36, 5347,
5494, 6268
about, 2407, 3761, 4545, 51 16, 5222,
5239, 5254, 5262, 5271, 5278,
5283, 5287-96, 5494
Dewey, Melvil, about, 6476
"Dewey School," 51 17
Dewhurst, J. Frederic, 5647, 5896
Dewitt, David Miller, 3412
Dexter, Henry M., 4036
The Dial (1840-44), 280, 313, 315,
585, 2279
Dialects. See Language — dialects &
regionalisms
Dialects in literature
Cajun, 759-61
Cracker, 556, 745, 1038
Creole, 745, 759-61, 1032-35
French, 1032-35
Hoosier, 867, 1126
humorous, 542-45
Irish, 862
Negro, 192-93, 756-59, 856-60, 910-
16, 922, 924-25, 1032, 1038, 1099-
1102, 1 106, 1133-35, 1526-29,
1653
Pike, 933-34. 937. 941-44, 1 126
poor white (South), 910, 917-21
Yankee, 456-57, 558
Ala. (north) 1836
Fla. (backwoods), 1680
Ga. (backwoods), 445-48, 556
Dialects in literature — Continued
Ky. (rural), 1697
Middle West, 701, 753-55, 768, 941,
1126
New England (rural), 209, 558, 562,
881-86
Tenn. (east), 330-32
Tenn. (mountain), 1084-88
Va. (rural), 192-93
The West, 684-87, 878
Dialogues in Limbo, 1738
Diaries, journals, personal records, etc.
(Chap. I, Literature)
(Colonial), 12, 15-16, 36-39, 49, 56-
57, 90-91
(1764-1819), 109, 178-85
(1820-70), 186-87, 276. 294-95,
393. 414, 438, 489, 577, 585, 600-
01,603
(1871-1914), 1009, 1080
(1915-39), 1170, 1310
(1940-55), 1965
Dibble, Roy F., 5027
Dice, Charles Amos, 5981
Dichter, Harry, 561 1
Dick, Everett N., 4098, 4155-56
Dick. Boyle's Business Card, 937
Dickason, David Howard, 5755
Dickens, Charles, 4342-43
about, 4341
Dickerson, Oliver Morton, 3243
Dickinson, Edward, 853
Dickinson, Emily, 838-50, 2363, 2544
about, 851-55, 984, 2615
Dickinson, Henry W., 4784
Dickinson, John, 3709, 6268
Dickinson, Thomas H., 1070
Dictionaries (language). See Lan-
guage— dictionaries
Dictionary of American Biography, 3080
Dictionary of American History, 3071
Dicdrich Knickerbocker's History of
New York, 383, 2295
Dies Committee. See Congress. House.
Committee Investigating Un-
American Activities
Diff'rent, 1648
Digges, Jeremiah, pseud. See Berger,
Josef
Dilliard, Irving, ed., 6264
Dillon, William A., 4973
about, 4973
Dilts, Marion May, 4674
Diman, J. L., ed., 89
Dime novels, bibl., 2444
The Diminished Mind, 5237
Dimock, Marshall E., 6006, 6154
Dinks, pseud., 5076
Dinosaurs, 4754
Dionysus in Doubt, 1714
Diphtheria, control, 4881
Diplomatic history (to 1945), 2580,
3141, 3144, 3237, 3313, 3426,
3444. 3448, 3452, 3473, 3486,
3498-99, 3501-97, 3669, 41 M>
4259-60, 6075
American Revolution, 3187, 3239,
3272,3519,3528,3569
bibl., 3519, 3521, 4229
Civil War, 2757, 3359, 3536, 3539,
3550
Diplomatic history — Continued
See also Foreign relations
Diplomatic and consular service, 3598—
3600, 3602, 3606
Diplomatic privileges and immunities,
3606
Dirks, Rudolph, about, 2865
Disabled, rehabilitation, etc., 4628-29,
4636-37
Disarmament, 3525
Disciples of Christ, 5442
hist., 5455
Discordant Encounters, 2535
Discovery and exploration, 4736, 4749,
4757
Minn., 4142
Utah, 4183
Washington (State), 4215
The West, 2971, 3335, 4149
See also under New France; The New
World; Spanish North America
Discovery of Europe, 2498
Diseases, 4870
control, 4867, 4874, 4877, 4881
etiology, 4829-30, 4867, 4881
stat., 4864, 4867
The Disenchanted, 1425
The Disinherited of Art, 2421
Dismal Swamp, 4336
Disney, Walt, about, 4957
Disobedience, civil. See Civil dis-
obedience
The Dispossessed, 1924
Disston, Hamilton, about, 4096
Distribution (economics). See Market-
ing
District of Columbia. See Washington,
D.C.
District of Columbia, 1332
Ditzion, Sidney, 6472 .
Divine, Robert A., 4419
The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri,
translation, 437
The Divine Pilgrim, 1 1 66
The Divinity School Address, 284
Divinity schools. See Theology —
study & teaching
Divorce, 3022, 4561
Divorce, 2317
Dix, Dorothea, about, 4834, 4837, 4839
Dixon, George, about, 5025
Dixon, Roland B., 3002
Do I Wake or Sleep, 161 5
Doane, Gilbert H, ed., 6486
Dobert, E. W., 4481
Dobie, James Frank, 687, 4190, 5509,
5520, 5527, 5531
ed., 5507,5518,5532
Dobzhansky, T., 3758
Dr. Bergen's Belief, 2134
Dr. Heidenhoff's Process, 727
Dr. Sevier, 745
Doctors. See Physicians and surgeons
The Doctor's Son, 2071
Documentary films, 4958
Dodd, William E., 3286, 3369, 4069
ed., 3469
about, 3057
Dodd, Mead and Co., about, 6445
Dodds, Harold W., 5167
Dodge, Roger Pryor, 5644
INDEX / 1 1 15
Dodsworth, 1564
Doerflinger, William Main, comp.,
5551
Dog on the Sun, 1 478
Dogs in fiction, 1051, 1541, 1635
Doherty, Robert Ernest, about, 4803
Dollar, Melvin L., 4886
A Dome of Many-Coloured Glass, 1584
Domesday Book, 1601
Domestic animals, 4276
A Domestic Dilemma, 2024
Dominations and Powers, 1739
Dominican Republic, relations with,
3575.3584.3587
Domnei, 1262
Don, the Story of a Lion Dog, i486
Donahey, William, 783
Donnan, Elizabeth, ed., 3045
Donne, John, about, 1902
Donner party, 3331
fiction, 1420
Donovan, Leo, 6207
Donovan, Robert J., 3482
Don't Go Away Mad, 21 17
Dooley, Mr., pseud. See Dunne, Finley
Peter
Doolittle, Hilda, 1319-24
The Doomed City, 526
Dorati, Antal, about, 5654
Dorfman, Joseph, 4538, 5876
Dorr, Thomas W., about, 3149
Dorris, Jonathan Truman, 3388
Dorson, Richard M., 5533-34
ed., 2345, 3244, 5535
Dos Passos, John, 1325-32
about, 2371, 2376, 2406, 2427-28,
2508-9
Dot, 2298
The Double Agent, 1228-29
Dougall, Herbert E., 5967
Douglas, Dorothy (Wolff), 4569
Douglas, Edward M., 2970
Douglas, Frederic H., 3017
Douglas, Marjory (Stoneman), 4007
Douglas, Paul H., 6048, 6182, 6342
Douglas, Stephen A., about, 3397, 3399
Douglas, William Orville, 2664-65
about, 2665
Douglass, Aubrey A., 5105
Douglass, Elisha P., 3241
Douglass, Harl R., 5154, 5224
ed., 5224
Douglass, Harlan Paul, 5485-87
Doull, James A., 4877
Dow, George Francis, 31 81
Dow, Lorenzo, about, 2805
Dow, Peggy, 2805
Dowell, Austin Allyn, 5869
Down an Unknown Jungle River, i486
Down by the Riverside, 2234
Down in the Holler, 2270
Downer, Alan S., 2359
Downes, Irene, ed., 5627
Downes, Olin, 5627, 5678
Downing, Major Jack, pseud. See
Smith, Seba
Downs, Joseph, 5796
Doyle, John A., 3
The Dragon and the Unicorn, 2102
Dragon Harvest, 1758
Dragon Seed, 1259
Dragon's Teeth, 1754, 1758
Drake, Daniel, 2666-67
about, 2667, 4822
Drake, Durant, 5255
Drake, Sir Francis, about, 3173
Drake, Francis S., 4036
Drake, Joseph Rodman, 328, 2295
about, 323
Drake, St. Clair, 4439
Drake, Samuel G., comp., 41
Drama
anthologies, 2327, 2332-37, 2347-48,
4892-98, 4924
classical themes, 201, 205, 1532,
1535-36, 1556, 2101
collections, 2297-2317
experimental, 1357, 1359-60, 1647—
48, 1864, 2226
folk. See Folk drama
historical themes, 198, 200, 206-8,
365, 1477, 1491, 1520, 1752, 2048
hist. & crit., 1175, 1571, 2378, 2466,
2468-70, 2472-73, 2475, 2506,
4900, 4904-5. 4907. 4924
bibl., 4905
Negro themes, 1821
periods
(1764-1819), 105, 144-45, 168—
70, 2297-2317
(1820-70), 198-201, 205-8,
365, 511, 517-18, 674, 676,
2297-2317
(1871-1914), 701, 705, 1013,
1069^70, 2297-2317
(1915-39). 1172-74. 1176-77.
1199-1212, 1271, 1317, 1357,
i359-6o, 1403, 1473. 1475,
1477, M9I-93. 1518-20,
1532, 1536, 1545-50, 1556,
1587, 1608, 1688-90, 1740,
1749-53, 1762, 1821, 1864-
65,1868, 1877
(1940-55), 1988-91, 1995-98,
2023, 2043, 2046-49, 2063-
68, 2098, 2101, 2110, 2112-
14, 2117, 2133-35, 2145.
2218-21, 2223, 2225-26, 2228
psychological, 2218, 2221, 2223,
2228
radio, 4966
realistic, 1518-20, 1647-48, 1688,
1995-98, 2023, 2043, 2046-47,
2049, 2063
regional, 1475, 1477, 4926
social themes, 1069-70, 1 199-1204,
1271, 1519-20, 1647-48, 1688-
91, 1996-98, 2045-47, 2049, 2063,
2145
symbolism in, 2218-19, 2226
verse. See Verse drama
See also Comedy; Theater
Draper, John W., about, 3761
Draper, Lyman Copeland, about, 3053
Drayton, John, 4262
about, 4261
Dream Girl, 1689, 2334
A Dream of Love, 1 877
The Dream of Success, 2464
A Dreamer's Journey, 5270
The Dreamy Kid, 1648
Dred Scott case, 6258
Dreiser, Helen (Patges), 1346
Dreiser, Theodore, 1334-45
about, 821, 887, 957, 1089, 1344,
1346-49, 2372, 2406, 2430, 2464,
2476, 2509
Drepperd, Carl W., 5596
Dressel, Paul L., 5160
Dressier, David, 4643
Drew, Elizabeth A., 1361
Drexler, Arthur, ed., 5718
Drifting Apart, 2304
Drinker, Henry S., 6319
Driver, Carl S., 3287
Drucker, Peter F., 6012
Drucker, Philip, 2998
Drude, Oscar, cd., 2957
Drug traffic, vocabulary, 2274
Drum-Taps, 623-24
Drummond, Andrew L., 5441
Drummond, Thomas, about, 4734
Drums, 1240-41
Drums along the Mohawk., 1355
Drury, Betty, 4407
Drury, C. M., 5442
Drury, John, 5794
Drury, Newton B., 421 1, 5866
Dubinsky, David, about, 6049
Du Bois, Guy Pene, 5800
Dubuque, Iowa, guidebook, 3892
Ducange, Victor, 2299
Du Courteil, Lafitte, about, 5121
Due, John F., 5971
Due process of law, 6094-95, 6097,
6106
Duer, William, about, 6014
Duffey, Bernard I., 2419
Duffy, John, 4877
Duke University, 643
Duker, A. G., 4457-58
Duker, Sam, 5226
The Duk.es Motto, 231 1
Dulany, Daniel, about, 3257
Dulcy, 2348
Dulles, Foster Rhea, 3428, 3532-33,
3563. 3592, 4620, 4985, 6034
Dulles, John Foster, 3622
Dulles, Joseph H., 5344
Dumbauld, Edward, 6074
Dumond, Dwight Lowell, 3370-71
Dunaway, Wayland F., 4055, 4490
Dunbar, Paul Laurence, 856-61
about, 859
Dunbar, Seymour, 4226
Duncan, Dclbcrt J., 5945
ed., 6019
Duncan, Harry, 2350
Duncan, Isadora, 4972
about, 4972
Duncan, Otis Dudley, 4395
Dunellen, N. J., 3812
Duniway, Clyde Augustus, 2929
Dunkards, 4480
Dunlap, Leslie W., 3052
Dunlap, Lloyd A., cd., 3390
Dunlap, William, 109, 2299, 2337,
2347. 4905. 5690
about, 5690
Dunn, D., 5442
Dunn, Esther C, 4917
Dunn, Frederick Roger, comp., 3079
Dunn. Waldo 1 Mary, 3271
IIl6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Dunne, Finley Peter, 862-66
about, 558
Dunning, Philip, 2332
Dunning, Wilbald, about, 4540
Dunning, William Archibald, 3372,
3554
Du Noiiy, Lecomte, about, 5434
Dunster, Henry, about, 3198
Dupee, Frederick W., 1018-19
ed., 1015
Du Pont, Eleuthere Irenee, 5912
Du Pont, Henry A., about, 5912
Du Pont, Lammot, about, 5912
Du Pont Company, about, 5912
Du Pont de Nemours, Pierre Samuel,
about, 5 1 21
Dupuy, Richard Ernest, 3644a
Dupuy, Trevor N., 3644a
Durand, John D., 4392
Durant, John, 4986, 5024
Duren, William Larkin, 5475
Durham, Frank, 1514
Duron, Jacques, 1742
D'Usseau, Arnaud, 2334
Dust and Light, 1858
Dust Bowl, fiction, 1775, 1777
Dutch
in Brooklyn, 4046
in New York
fiction, 511, 514-15
humor, 382-83
in the Middle West, 4493
Dutch, Pennsylvania. See Pennsyl-
vania Germans
The Dutchman's Fireside, 514-15
Dutton, William Sherman, 5912
Duveen, Joseph Duveen, baron, about,
1204
The Dwelling Place of Light, 762
Dwight, Sereno E., ed., 29, 31
Dwight, Timothy, 118-21,4271-72
about, 4271
Dwight, Timothy, Jr., 4271
Dwight, William T., 4271
Dyer, Brainerd, 3332-33
Dyer, Frank L., 4782
Dyer, W. A., 5222
Dykeman, Wilma, 4021
Dykstra, C. A., 5336
Dynamo, 1648
Eagle in the Egg, 1551
The Eagle, the jaguar, and the Serpent,
3016
Eagles, 2958
The Eagle's Shadow, 1262
Eakins, Thomas, about, 5764
Eardley, Armand J., 2942
Earle, Alice (Morse), 4227
Earle, Edward Mead, 6075
Early Americana, 1692
An Early Martyr, 1881
The Early Worm, 121 4
Earnest, Ernest P., 4745, 4828, 5177
Earth Horizon, 1196
Earth Song, 4202
The Easiest Way, 2347
East, Robert A., 6016
The East (general)
archaeology, 2990
geology, 2936
guidebooks, 3788, 3790
historic houses, 5722, 5794
language (dialects, etc.), 2263, 2269
physiography, 2936
travel & travelers, 4235-36. 4251,
4262
trees, 2963
See also Eastern seaboard; Middle At-
lantic States; New England
East Church, Salem, Mass , 2600
East of Eden, 1779
East River, a Novel, 1 193
East Wind, 1584
Eastern seaboard
geography, 2968-69
in literature, 2459
language (dialects, etc.), 2263
travel & travelers, 171, 1002, 4239,
4273, 4279, 4334, 4336, 4358
Eastern shore, Md., 3999
Eastern Star, Order of the, about, 4574
Eastman, George, about, 5671
Eastman, Joseph B., about, 2678
Eastman, Linda A., 6476
Eastman School of Music, Rochester,
N.Y., University, about, 5671
The Easy Chair, 2415
Eaton, Amos, about, 4737
Eaton, Clement, 3344, 3373, 3766, 4070
Eaton, Margaret L. (O'Neale) Timber-
lake, 2668-69
about, 2668-69
Eaves, T. C. Duncan, ed., 554
Ebaugh, Franklin G., 4859
Eberhart, Richard, 1350-52
Eberman, Edwin, 2908
Ebersole, Luke E., 4551
Eby, Edwin H., 653
The Ecclesiastical History of New Eng-
land, 43-44
Ecclesiastical law, 5420-22
Eckelberry, R. H., ed., 5244
Eckenrode, Hamilton J., 3419
Eckert, Ruth E., ed., 5202
Eckman, Jeannette, 3822
Eckstorm, Fannie Hardy, 5566
Ecological Society of America, 2956
Ecology, 3022, 5810
Economic assistance to foreign nations,
3598, 3636-37, 3639-40
Economic conditions, 3440, 3734, 3786,
4505-8, 4550, 4567, 4634, 4777,
4783, 5883, 5894-99, 6005, 6136,
6372
atlases, 2972, 2974
hist., 3073. 3085-98, 5877, 5881,
5883, 6016
Civil War, 3374, 3539
19th cent., 3352, 3399, 3421,
3436, 3447, 4315-17. 5875
20th cent., 3436, 3474, 3478-79»
3500,5875
rural communities, 4585
See also Geography — economic; also
subdivisions History and Economic
conditions under names of places
and regions, e.g., Montana — hist.;
Southern States — econ. condit.
Economic Cooperation Administration,
about, 3640
Economic influences on literature, 2485
Economic themes in literature
editorials, sketches, etc., 1907
fiction, 726, 728-31, 775-77, 887-89,
941, 956-58, 973-76, 978, 1090-
95, 1107-10, 1270-75, 1333-37.
1339. 1372-74. 1376, 1754-56,
1758, 1775. 1777- 1792. 1887,
2079, 2088, 2194, 2229, 2517
poetry, 1038, 1061-63, 1069, 1664,
2079
short stories, 887
tracts, 1754
Economics, 4513, 5254, 5875-6058
hist., 3106, 3139, 3497, 3500, 3747,
3758, 4538, 5876, 5886, 6082
social & ethical aspects, 5899
sources, 3319
See also Commercial policy; Foreign
economic relations
Economists, 5888
Ecumenical movement, 5401, 5405,
5487
Eddy, Mary Baker, about, 5439, 5453
Eddy, Mary O., comp., 5573
Eddy, Richard, 5473
Edel, Leon, 1020, 1280
ed., 990, 1006, 1012-14
about, 1 016
Edelman, Jacob M., 4706
Edgar Huntley, 11 4-1 5, 117
Edge, Mary E., comp., 398
Edgell, David P., 230
Edgewater People, 885
Edidin, Ben M., 4454
Edison, Thomas Alva, about, 4782
Editing, 2901, 2906-7, 3047, 6438,
6449
See also Journalism
Editorials, sketches, etc.
(1764-18 1 9), 140-43
(1820-70), 192, 194-97. 332, 379-
80, 422-26, 445-48, 463, 546, 556,
558-61, 612-13, 674
(1871-1914), 701-5, 732, 739, 862-
66, 923, 1064-65, 1068, 1099,
1 103-4, 1 106
(1915-39), 1214-20, 1238, 1263,
1267-69, 1294, 1312, 1317-18,
J375> 1378, 1409, 1602, 1622,
J659, 1724-26, 1815-20, 1859-63
(1940-55), 1907, 2149-52, 2155,
2189, 2191
See also Essays; Journalism; Short
stories
Edman, Irwin, 287, 5197, 5222, 5289,
5291
ed., 5120, 5288, 5374
Edmunds, Walter Dumaux, 1353-56
Education, 3469, 3740, 4387, 4513,
4550-51, 5098-5249. 5254. 5285,
5289-91
administration, 5139, 5247
articulation, 5107, 5131, 5217
associations & societies, 5106, 51 12,
5116, 5131, 5150, 5157, 5162-63,
5181, 5186, 5205, 5228, 5230,
5242-43, 5246-47
INDEX
/ i"7
Education — Continued
bibl., 5108, 5110-11, 5241, 5244,
5247-49
developments & innovations, 5117-20,
5134. 5137. 5157-58, 5224-25.
5227, 5230-31, 5237, 5246-47
direct., 51 12
editorials, sketches, etc., 655, 2425
fiction, 583-84, 1417, 1792
finances, 5105, 5135, 5141. 5247
foreign countries, 5242
foreign population, 4421, 4483, 4493
German immigrant influence, 4477
hist., 5101-2, 5104-5, 5108-10,
5113, 5116, 5121-22, 5125, 5127-
28, 5130
index, 5241
Jews, 4457-58, 4461
library manual, 5098
methods & techniques, 2767, 5224-31
Negroes, 4443, 4450, 5116, 5206
periodicals, 5128, 5230, 5242, 5244-
45, 5247-49
philosophy, 5115-30, 5236, 5246,
5307
poetry, 165-67
problems & controversies, 5226, 5232-
39
reference books, 5098, 51 10-12, 5161
research, 5098, 511 1, 5246-47
rural, 5105, 5208, 5246
sectional, 51 13
secular, 5103
segregated, 5206, 5236
soc. aspects, 5109, 5116-18, 5126,
5128, 5134, 5136-38, 5M0, 5M2,
5146, 5150, 5155, 5158, 5177,
5183, 5206, 5208-9, 5211, 5215,
5224, 5240
sources, 5108, 5121-22, 5125, 5127-
28, 5130, 5138, 5143, 5191-92,
5201, 5212, 5240—49
stat., 51 14
surveys, 51 14, 5186, 5201, 5205-6
theories, 460, 5115-30, 5220, 5237
women, 165, 167, 5116, 5193, 5198
bibl., 5212
yearbooks, 5240, 5243, 5246
Ala., 4099
British Commonwealth, 5134
Charleston, S. C, 3763
England, 5129
Germany, 5310
Ky., 4107
Mass., 5125
Nashville, 3765
New England, 3745, 4261, 4271
N.C., 4090
Northwest, Old, 41 12
Ohio Valley, 5 121
Pa., 4055
Philadelphia, 3764
S.C., 4091
Southern States, 4083, 5108, 51 16,
5145,5206
Tex., 4194
Va., hist., 5122
W. Va., 4089
See also Television in education; also
types of education, e.g., Adult edu-
cation; under school subjects, e.g.,
Education — Continued
Music — education; and subdivision
Study and teaching under special
subjects, e.g., Law — study &
teaching
Education and business, 51 16, 5168,
5181, 5190
Education and church, 5419, 5491, 5494
Education and civilization, 5136, 5140,
5153
Education and political ideas, 5138
Education and state, 5099, 5 141, 5164-
65. 5167, 5189, 5211, 6135
The Education Index, 5241
The Education of an American, 2891
The Education of Henry Adams, 695-
98
about, 2407
Educational law and legislation, 5139
Educational measurements and testing,
5229, 5247
Educational plans (early), 5121-23
Educational Policies Commission, 5106,
5205
Educational psychology, 5307
Educational reform, 165-67, 186-87,
51 17
Educational research, 5098, 5112, 5247
Educational trends, 5100, 5104
Edwards, Alba M., 6043
Edwards, Everett E., comp., 3147
Edwards, Herbert W., 2441
Edwards, John H., 1669
Edwards, Jonathan, 21-31, 2290, 5297-
98
about, 21, 29-30, 2288, 2480-81,
5297, 5299, 5396, 5428, 5436,
5472
Edwards, Newton, 5139-40
Egan, John, about, 3439
Egbert, Donald Drew, 3758, 3768
ed., 3753
Eggan, Fred R., 2990
Eggleston, Edward, 867-77, 3740
about, 3058
The Ego and the Centaur, 1982
Ehlers, Henry, ed., 5236
Eidesheim, Julie, ed., 1171
Eight-year study (education), 5131
Eimi, 131 1
Einstein, Alfred, about, 5434
Einstein, Lewis, 3267
Einstein, 1586
Eire Railroad Co. v. Tompkins case
(1938), 6293
Eisenhart, Luther P., about, 4059
Eisenhower, Dwight D., 3633, 3637,
37i9
about, 3482
Eisenstadt, Abraham S., 3046
Eisner, Simon, 4606
Eitel, Edmund H., ed., 1 128
Eiteman, Wilford John, 5981
Eitt, Mrs. G. Embry, 5503
Ekirch, Arthur A., 3754, 6061
Ekstrom, Kjell, 2366
Ekwall, E., 2364
El Paso, Tex., 4176, 4187
Elder, George W., 5017
Eldorado, 2282
Eldorado, or, Adventures in the Path of
Empire, 4352-53
Election law, 6338, 6400, 6403, 6406-8,
6410
Elections, 6149, 6336, 6340, 6404,
6407-8, 6411-12, 6416, 6418,
6422
hist., 6347, 6401
of 1824, 3313
of 1840, 3326
of 1866, 3361
of 1876, 3417-18, 3430, 3432
of 1884, 6373
of 1896,3135
of 1912,3473
of 1924, 6362
of 1940, 6419
of 1948, 6414
stat., 6413-15
Detroit, 6420
III, 6383
Wis., 4139
Electoral college, 64 1 1
Electricity, 4750
Elementary education, 5243
administration, 5135, 5 151
curricula, 5142, 5158, 5226
developments & innovations, 5147
European influences, 5142
finances, 5135
hist., 5142, 5147, 5151
methods, 5142
organization, 5135, 5151
philosophy, 51 17
soc. aspects, 5142
See also Primary education
Elements of Critical Theory, 2421
Elfenbein, Julien, 2902
Elfving, Fredrik, ed., 4243-44
Elias, Robert H., 1347
Eliot, Charles William, 2670-71
about, 4034, 5203
Eliot, John, about, 3198
Eliot, Thomas Stearns, 1357-60, 241 1,
2425
ed., 1668
about, 1225, 1361-71, 2426, 2443,
2476, 2497, 2499, 2527, 2535,
2544
bibl., 1362, 1367
Eliot Indian Bible, 6448
Elizabeth the Queen, 11 72, 1 174
Elkin, Henry, 3041
Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order
of, about, 4574
Eller, P. H., 5442
Ellingston, John R., 4644
Ellington, Duke, 5642
Ellinwood, Leonard Webster, 5606,
5632
Elliott, Charles Winslow, 3655
Elliott, George R., 2375, 2425
Elliott, John Lovejoy, about, 5435
Elliott, Maud (Howe), 4040
Elliott, William Y., 3608, 3642
Ellis, Elmer, ed., 865
Ellis, George C, 4036
Ellis, George E., 3182
Ellis, Harold Milton, ed., 2330
Ellis, Howard S., 3637
Ellis, John Howard, ed., 9-10
IIl8 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Ellis, John Tracy, 5448, 5478
ed., 5449
Ellis, Lewis Ethan, 3058, 3100, 3517
Ellison, Ralph, 1966-67
Ellison, William Henry, 4202
Elmer Gantry, 1563
Elmtown's Youth, 4564
Elovson, H., 2364
Elsbree, WillardS., 5216
Elsie Venncr, 375
Elsworth, Ralph H., 5842
Ely, Mary L., ed., 5209
Ely, R. T., ed., 581 1
Emberson, Frances G., ed., 5569
Embroidery, 5593, 5785
The Emergence of Modern America,
3093
Emerson, Edward Waldo, 297
ed., 294
Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 280-301, 2290,
2544
ed., 313
about, 21, 186, 230, 302-6, 470, 585,
606, 610, 621, 633, 740, 1010,
2277, 2280, 2375, 2380, 2385,
2397. 2404. 2422-23, 2476, 2479-
80, 2492, 2502-3, 2513, 2545,
5222, 5254, 5265, 5300-1, 5472,
6424
Emerson, Thomas I., ed., 6126
Emery, Edwin, 2845, 2855
Emigres. See Refugees, political
Emmet, Boris, 5956
Emmet County, Iowa, guidebook, 3893
Emmons, Nathanael, about, 5428
The Emotional Discovery of America,
2503
Emotions, 5339
Empedocles. Fragments, translation,
1556
The Emperor Jones, 1648, 2348
Emrich, Duncan, 5526
The Encantadas, 484
Encounter in April, 2123
Encyclopaedia Britannica, 5748
End of Summer, 1208, 2333
Enderbury Island, 4218
Endocrinology, 4722
T he Enemy , 1684
The Enemy Gods, 1551
Engel, Edwin A., 1650
Engineers and engineering, 4793-4803
England, travel & travelers, 96-98, 249,
252, 263-64, 280, 333, 350, 426,
449, 460-61, 489, 674, 677-78,
688, 986, 1357, 1968
Englander, R., 2364
Engle, Paul Hamilton, 1968-72
Engler, Adolf, ed., 2957
English, Van H, maps, 3255
English Bards and Scotch Reviewers,
458
English influences
culture, 3227, 3737, 3740
education, 5191
literature
drama, 168-70, 206-8, 517
poetry, 7, 72-74, 1 18-19, 144-
45. 323. 614-17, 1303, 1902,
2098, 2530
English influences — Continued
literature — Continued
prose, 12, 43-44, 75-77. 122,
165,333.350,585. 2854
Southern colonies, 4073
English language. See Language
English national characteristics, 96, 263,
280, 291, 350
The English Notebooks, 350
English Traits, 291, 298
Engravings, 5595, 5763, 5780, 5782
See also Prints
The Enlightenment, 2412, 2503
The Enormous Room, 13 10
Entertainment, 2808, 4098, 4121,
4162-63, 4281, 4497, 4520, 4550,
4577. 4593, 4892-4982, 5801
See also specific types, e.g., Opera;
Sports
Entomology, 4722
Entrepreneurship, 6023
Epic poetry. See Poetry — epic & ex-
tended narrative
Epics, translations, 1556
Epidemics, 4874
Colonial period, 4809, 4830, 4877
hist., 4877
See also Smallpox— epidemic (1721);
Yellow fever — epidemic, Phila-
delphia (1793)
Episcopal Church, 5404, 5442
hist., 5456-57
Epistle to Prometheus, 2413
Epitaphs, collections, 4527
Epstein, Lenore A., 4448
Equality, 728
Equality before the law, 6060, 6063,
6094, 6106, 6126, 6374
Equitable remedies, 6279
Equity, 6279, 6282, 6300
Erickson, Charlotte, 4408
Ericsson, John, about, 4786
Erie, guidebook, 3818
Erie, Lake, 3868
Erie Canal, fiction, 1 155, 1157-58, 1 160,
1353-54,1356
Erie County, Pa., guidebook, 3818
Erie Water, 1356
Ernst, James E., 3197
Ernst, Morris L., 6127
Ernst, Robert, 4409
Erosion, 5808, 5818
Erskine, John, ed., 2393
Ervenberg, Louis Cachand, about, 4734
Esarey, Logan, 4123
Escapade, 1743
Eskimos, Alaskan, 2719-20
Espey, John J., 1670
Espinosa, Jose Manuel, 5537
The Esquimau Maiden's Romance, 798-
99
Essay on Rime, 2142
An Essay on the Use and Advantages of
the Fine Arts, 1 65-66
Essays
(1764-1819), 146-48, 179, 184-85
(1820-70), 230, 280-83, 285-87,
291-93, 298-301, 381, 465, 467,
469, 520, 533, 618
Essays — Continued
(1871-1914), 701, 705, 740-44, 896-
97, 900, 945, 951-52, 955, 964,
977, 979, 1038, 1046, 1096
(1915-39), 1226, 1229, 1233-34,
1267, 1357-58, 1378, 1445, 1585,
1602, 1664, 1668, 1673, 1735,
1738-39, 1783, 1791, 1810, 1828,
1873, 1884
(1940-55), 2017
(20th cent.), 2372, 2375-80, 2383,
2388, 2394-98, 2401, 2406-7,
2410-12, 2415, 2421, 2424-25,
2435, 2449, 2466-72, 2474-75,
2477, 2479-81, 2492, 2497-98,
2503, 2505, 2511-13, 2515, 2519-
20, 2530-31, 2535-42, 2544-48,
2550
See also Editorials, sketches, etc.
Essays, familiar
(1820-70), 192, 368, 406-8, 414,
449, 465, 467, 506-10, 674, 1 136-
38
(1915-39), 1317, 1859-63
Essays To Do Good, 45
Essert, Paul L., 5209
Estavan, Lawrence, ed., 4918
Esther, 691-92
Esther Wynn's Love-Letters , 984
Estherville, Iowa, guidebook, 3893
Esthetics, 5254, 5282, 5289-91, 5351,
5366, 5694
literary, 2387, 2453, 2512, 2529
Ethan Frome, 1848
Ethical Culture movement, 5435
Ethics, 3758, 5252, 5254, 5257, 5273,
5289, 5291, 5312, 5319, 5323,
5346, 5354. 5357-58, 5375
legal, 6319-20
political, 3760, 6342-44
See also Social and business ethics
Ethics and law, 6261-62
The Ethics of Living fim Crow, 2234
Ethnology, 2982-83, 2985, 3004, 3007,
3010, 3012, 3030
See also Anthropology; Archaeology
and prehistory
Ethridge, M., 3562
Etiquette, 4532
Eureka, 531.533
Euripides. Medea, translation and
adaption, 1535
Europe
economic relations, 3539, 3619, 3637,
3639
relations with, 3138, 3528, 3536,
3617, 3769-71
travel & travelers
(1764-1819), 96-98, 101, 122
(1820-70), 222, 252, 263-64,
280, 313, 323, 381, 414, 426-
27. 449. 489. 506, 674, 677-
78, 2282, 2462
(1871-1914), 713, 768-71, 887,
941, 964, 984, 986, 1136
(1915-39), 1242, 1432, 1659,
1766, 1839,1845, 1887,1889-
90
anthologies, 2498
fictional, 986-91, 996-1001,
1004, 1007, 1845, 2091, 2187
INDEX / 1 1 19
Europe — Con tinued
World War I, 3541
World War II, 3718-19, 3722, 3726-
Europe in literature
descr., 2282
diaries, journals, etc., 350, 414, 489,
1079
editorials, sketches, etc., 313, 426,
674,677-78,941,964,984
essays, 414, 506
fiction, 333, 971-72, 987-91, 996-
1001, 1004, 1008, 1242-45, 1247,
1251, 1396, 1495, 1656, 1887,
1889-90, 2091-93, 2123, 2146
hist., 693-94
letters, 96
poetry, 323
satire, 769-71
short stories, 1004, 1007, 1242, 1250,
1659
soc. life & cust., 96, 252, 263-64, 426
Europe without Baedeker, 2535
European immigrants, 4407-8, 4412-
14, 4419, 4422, 4460
European influences
culture, 3146, 3474, 3758, 3769-70
education, 5128, 5142-43
literature, 2365, 2399
Colonial, 17
(1764-1819), 104-8, 118, 120
(1820-70), 201, 205-8, 323,
333. 381, 393. 427. 43°.
449, 506, 674, 676-78
(1871-1914), 887, 941, 964,
986, 1048, 1089
(I9I5-39). 1303. Mil
(1940-55), 2123
essays, 2412, 2424
hist. & crit., 2534
poetry, 2530
European literature, hist. & crit., 1235
European Recovery Program, 3638,
3640
European War, 1914-18. See World
War I
The Europeans, 1008
Eustis, William, about, 3660
Eutaw, 552
Eva Gay, 1747
Evangelical and Reformed Church,
about, 5442
Evangelical Mission Covenant Church,
about, 5442
Evangelical United Brethren Church,
about, 5442
Evangeline, 429
about, 745
Evangelists, 5403, 5480
Evans, George Heberton, 6015
Evans, Henry Clay, 3580
Evans, Herbert McLean, about, 4721
Evans, Nathaniel, 145
Evans, Oliver, about, 4795
Evans, Walker, photographs by, 1907
Evening in Spring, 1964
The Evening Post (New York), 2873
about, 2882
The Evening Sun (Baltimore), about,
2876
Everett, C. W., 5197
Everett, Edward, about, 2462, 3776
Everglades, Fla., 4007
Everleigh sisters, 2836
Every Man His Own Boswcll, 371-74
Every Soul Is a Circus, 1581
Everyday Is Saturday, 1 860
Evjue, W. T., 6195
Evolution, 4537
and philosophy, 3758, 5259, 5274,
5289,5303,5317
and pragmatism, 5264
and religion, 3758, 5337, 5428-30
See also Darwinism
Evolution (theories) in literature, 695-
98, 716, 2404, 2480
Ewan, Joseph A., 4734
Ewbank, Henry L., 4691
Ewen, David, 5678, 5685
comp., 5605
Ewers, John Canfield, 3018
Ewin, Cortez A. M., 6239, 6415-16
Excavations: A Book, of Advocacies,
1828
Executive branch, 6075, 6084, 6133,
6140, 6146, 6184, 6191, 6193,
6310, 6312-13
Continental Congress, 6083
functions, 3725, 6137, 6172-73,
6178, 6180-81, 6311-12, 6316
hist., 6194
interdepartmental committees, 6189
laws. See Administrative law
local. See Local executive branch
organization, 6173-74, 6178, 6180-
81, 6185, 6187
See also States — executive branch
Executive-legislative relations, 3610-11,
6140, 6142-43, 6156-57, 6178,
6191, 6342
Executive Office of the President, about,
6144
Executive power, 6093, 6140, 6142-43,
6146-48, 6178, 6180-81, 6340,
6355. 6370, 6422
Civil War, 6081, 6191
The Exile, 1257-58
Exile's Return, 2408
Exotics and Retrospectives, 951-52
Expansionism, 3154, 3167, 3180, 3306,
3312, 3322, 3335, 3428, 3448-49'
3533, 3586-87, 3760
in literature, 2441
See also Territorial expansion
Expatriate authors, 986, 1242, 1357,
1432, 1494, 1611, 1766, 1839,
2087, 2408, 3768
Expatriated Americans, 986
fiction, 989-91, 1004, 1611, 2376
The Expense of Greatness, 1 231
Experience and Art, 2453
Experimental writing. See Literature-
experimental writing
Experimentalism, 5271
Experiments of Spiritual Life and
Health, 87
Exploration. See Discovery and ex-
ploration; Polar exploration
Explorers, 4114, 421 1, 4213
See also Names of individual explor-
ers, e.g., Columbus, Christopher
Expression in America, 1571
Exultations, 1666
Ezekiel, Mordecai, 5898
A Fable, 1379, 1396
A Fable for Critics, 402, 458
Fables in Slang, 702
Fabricant, Solomon, 5905, 6136
The Face of Time, 1374
Faces in the Crowd, 4556
Faculty psychology, 5307
Fadiman, Clifton, 739, 1 1 1 8
comp., 3152
ed., ion
Fagin, Nathan B., 541
Fagley, Frederick L., 5454
Fahrenheit 451 , 1932
Fahrney, R. R., 3058
Fainsod, Merle, 5885
Faint Clews & Indirections, 643
Faint Perfume, 1456
Fairbank, John King, 3506
Fairchild, Henry Pratt, 4427
Fairchild, Herman Le Roy, 4717, 4733
Fairfax, 23 1 6
Fairs, 4100, 4124, 5827
Fairyland, 526
The Faith Healer, 1069-70, 2337
Faith healing, 481 1
Faithful Are the Wounds, 2127
A Faithful Narrative of the Surprising
Wor\ of God, 22-23
Falconer, John I., 5820
Falk, Isidore S., 4883
Falk, Robert, 2401
Falkner, William. See Faulkner,
William
The Fall of British Tyranny, 2347
The Fall of the City, 2333
The Fall of the House of Usher, 529
False Dawn {The 'Forties), 1845
False Shame and Thirty Years, 2299
Family, 4441, 4466, 4469, 4550-51,
4558, 4560-62, 4567, 4571-72.
5070
A Family Matter, 1553
The Family Reunion, 1359
The Famous Mrs. Fair, 2348
Faner, Robert D., 654
Fantastic Fables, 739
Fantastics and Other Fancies, 951-52
Far East
policy, 3594. 3596
question, 3568
relations with, 3426, 3591, 3596,
3617,3632
World War II. 3723
The Far Side of Paradise, 1431
Farber, Norma, 2350
A Farewell to Arms, 1 496
Fargo, Lucile F., 4217
Faris, R. E. L., 3758
Farley, James A., 6354-55
about, 6354-5S
Farm and rural life, 2891, 4395. 4397.
4466, 4500-1. 4561, 4579, 4581-
85.4594.5832
art, 5765
bibl., 4580
drama, 1475
1 120 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Farm and rural life — Continued
editorials, sketches, etc., 556, 558-61,
1724, 1907
essays, 506, 509, 1137-38, 1859, 2591
fiction, 402, 716, 718, 1290, 1299,
1301, 1355, 1379. 1388, 1403-4.
1420-22, 1474, 1476, 1541, 1653,
1681-83, 1698, 1702, 1704, 1720-
23> !775> x777> 1786, 1792, 1796,
1839, 2005-6, 2030, 2052, 2161,
2166, 2210, 2212-13, 2282
poetry, 662, 753-55, 1126-31, 1290,
1295, 1451-52. 1727. 1731. 1823,
1968, 2166, 2172
short stories, 563, 612-13, 881-86,
890-95, 1023-31, 1379, 1476,
1724, 1796-97, 2166-68, 2170-71
Conn., 4041
Middle West, 2655
Vt., 2742
See also Communities, rural; Farmers;
Plantation life
The Farm and the Fireside, 556
Farm Ballads, 754-55
Farm Legends, 753
Farm management, 5839
Farm mechanization, 5822, 5830
Farm produce. See Agricultural
products
Farmer-Labor Party, about 6356
Farmers, 5837
editorials, sketches, etc., 1907
fiction, 1474, 1775, 1777
folklore, 5523
German, 4479
immigrant, 4406
Irish, 4498
songs & music, 5559, 5576
Rocky Mountains, 4172
Southern States, 4081
The West, 4149
See also Farm and rural life; Soci-
ology, rural
The Farmer's Advice to the Villagers,
121
Farmers' Alliance, about, 6358
The Farmer's Almanack., 5524, 5541
about, 5524, 5541
The Farmers Hotel, 2077
Farmers' movement. See Agrarianism
Farmers Union, about, 5831
Farming. See Agriculture
Farquhar, Francis P., ed., 4210
Farra, Kathryn, 4624
Farragut, David (sculpture), 5740
Farrand, Max, ed., 126, 3357, 3784,
6087
Farrar, Victor J., 3429
Farrell, James Thomas, 1132, 1372-73,
5291
about, 2372, 2376, 2427, 2509
Fascism, 3149
Fashion, 2337, 2347
Fashionable Follies, 2347
Fashions in Literature, 1136
Fast, Howard Melvin, 1973-80
ed., 159, 1345
Fatal Interview, 1 609
Fate, 292
Father and Son, 1374
Father Divine, about, 5439, 5498
Fatout, Paul, 732
Faulkner, Harold U., 3081, 3096, 5877,
6034
Faulkner, William, 1379-96, 2406
about, 1397-1402, 1809, 2372, 2376,
2427-28, 2508
Fauna. See Animals
Faunce, Roland C, 5225
Fauset, Arthur Huff, 5498
Faust, Albert Bernhardt, 4477
Faust, Clarence H., 2401
ed., 30
Faust, translation, 2282
Fay, Albert H., 4177
Fay, Bernard, 3773
Fay, Jay Wharton, 5388
Fay, Theodore Sedgwick, 2295
Faye, Harold, maps, 4057
The Feast of Ortolans, 1 174
Feather, Leonard G., 5642
Fechner, Gustav Theodor, about, 5326
Fechter, Charles, 2313
Federal Communications Commission,
4710
Federal Council of the Churches of
Christ, 5487
about, 5405
Federal courts, 6280
Federal Emergency Relief Administra-
tion, about, 4630
Federal government. See Government
Federal Housing Administration, about,
4600
Federal Library Services Act, 6480
Federal-local relations, 6218
The Federal Radio Commission, about,
4706
Federal Reserve Bank of New York,
about, 5983
Federal Reserve System, about, 5983,
5986, 5993
Federal Reserve System. Board of
Governors, 5986
Federal-state relations, 6076, 6078,
6090, 6096, 6099, 6103, 6198-99,
6206, 6293
Federal Theater Project, hist., 4915
Federal Writers' Project, 3786, 5515
Federal Writers' Project. New York
(City), 4497
Federalism
Colonial period, 3245
18th cent., 3141, 3245-46
New England, 3275
The Federalist, 2291, 6075
Federalist newspapers, 2873, 2875
Federalist Party, 3279-81, 3285, 3305,
3308, 6374
The Federalists, 6175
Feibleman, James, 5351
about, 5351
Feidelson, Charles N., 2420
Feild, Robert D., 4957
Feinberg, Charles E., 659
Feis, Herbert, 3483, 3593
Feldman, William Taft, 5278
Feller, John Henry, 4975
Felton, William R., 4151-53
The Feminine Fifties, 2489
Fenn, Percy Thomas, 6095
Fenneman, Nevin M., 2935-36
Fenno, Richard F., ed., 3109
Fenton, Charles A., 1503
Ferber, Edna, 1403-8, 1545, 1547, 2333
about, 1403
Ferdinand and Isabella, History of, 2294
Fergus, Robert, about, 6446
Ferguson, Charles W., 4574
Fergusson, Erna, 4176, 4187, 4198
Ferm, Vergilius T. A., ed., 31, 5425,
5442
Fernandina, Fla., guidebook, 3844
Fernow, Bernhard Eduard, about, 2791
Fernow, Berthold, 4049
Ferre, Nels F. S., about, 5433
Ferril, Thomas Hornsby, 1409-10
Fertility, 4396, 4402
Fesler, James W., 6201
The Festival of the Dead, 1033
Festivals
music, 5667
La., 4100
Fetching the Doctor (sculpture), 5739
Fetrow, Ward W., 5842
Fetter, Frank W., 5971
The Feud of Oakfield Creek., 5354
A Few Figs from Thistles, 1609
Fiction
bibl., 2402
detective. See Detective fiction
dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 2526,
2528
didactic, 161-64, 190-91, 239
economic, 726, 728-31, 775-77, 956—
58, 964, 973-76, 978, 1089-98,
1 107-10, 1270-75, 1333-37, 1372-
74, 1376, 1664, 1754-56, 1758,
1775, 1777, 1907, 2079, 2194,
2229
ethical themes, 986, 1907-8, 1914,
1940, 1944, 2156
experimental, 1242-47, 1249, 1251,
1379, 1450, 1842, 2082
historical. See Historical themes in
literature — fiction
hist. & crit., 345, 896-97, 977, 986,
1004, 1010, 2365, 2371-73, 2376,
2378, 2384, 2402, 2405, 2418,
2425, 2427-31, 2458, 2508-9,
2517, 2523, 2526, 2528, 2530,
2536
humanitarian, 2084
humorous, 768, 775-83, 787-97,
1802, 2149, 2202
in periodicals, 2864, 2874, 2913,
2916, 2926
See also Literary periodicals
industrial, 941, 1159, 1178, 1183,
, 1507, 1754-56
"international," 971-72, 986-91,
996-1001, 1004, 1007, 1014, 1242-
47, 1249, 1251, 1754, 1758, 1839,
2187
naturalistic, 821-29, 835-37, 1048,
1051-52, 1054-57, 1059, 1089-
98, 1333-39, 1372, 1621, 1743,
1775
picaresque, 105-8, 1169, 1921, 2052
political, 277, 422, 689-90, 722,
762, 775-77> 1 1 °7, "55-56,
1566, 1792, 2025, 2027, 2148,
2197
INDEX / 1 121
Fiction — Continued
popular, 2384
See also Bestsellers
production, 2418
psychological, 368, 375, 727, 986-
1001, 1004, 1149, 1163, 1379,
1470, 1927, 1944-45. 1954. 2017-
18, 2021, 2023, 2052, 2107-8,
2156, 2174-75, 2178, 2184, 2224
realistic, 277-79, 562, 721, 821-29,
835-37, 867-77, 887-89, 956-76,
978, 980, 982-1004, 1007-8, 1014,
1089, 1 107-10, 1333-39, 1343,
1372, 1379, M45-50, 1453, 1460-
62, 1494, 1559, 1571, 1611, 1680,
1720-23, 1743-48, 1754-56, 1758,
1775, 1792, 1796, 1932, 1940,
1954, 1992-94, 2003-4, 201 1,
2025-28, 2045, 2052-56, 2069-
70, 2074, 2076-78, 2128, 2210,
2229-31
romantic, 201-4, 226-29, 245-60,
268-69, 3ii, 333, 341-47, 356,
405, 471-78, 546-50, 552-53, 555,
716, 745, 749-50, 762-67, 1048,
1054, 1089-95, 1099, 1 105-6,
1145-48
satiric, 105-8, 689-90, 775-77, 794-
97, 1261, 1381, 1508, 1559, 1589,
1635, 1643, 1688, 1792, 1842,
1845, 2001, 2017, 2053, 2082,
2154, 2180, 2229
science. See Science fiction
sentimental, 161-64, 239, 241, 716,
867, 2384
social questions, 689-92, 616, 718-
20, 726, 728-31, 756, 821-24,
835-37, 887-89, 956-70, 973-76,
978, 980, 982, 986-88, 992-95,
1008, 1048, 1055, 1089-95, 1107-
10, 1 136, 1142-43, 1155-56, 1190,
1270-75, 1333-39, 1372-74, 1376,
1414, 1417, M45-50, 1453, 1460-
62, 1467, 1559, 1571, 1589, 1656-
57, 1754-56, 1758, 1775- 1777.
1907, 1932, 2045, 2050-51, 2059,
2079, 2081, 2084, 2090, 2148,
2180, 2182-84
stream of consciousness writing,
1 161-62, 1183, 1379, 1579, 1887,
2055, 2174-75
surrealistic, 1987, 2079, 2081, 2084
symbolism in, 333, 470, 481-83, 491,
1379, 1494, 1500, 1947, 1954,
1992, 2023, 2081, 2212
techniques, 2372
theories, 333, 345, 867, 896, 964,
977, 986, 1004, 1010, 1014, 1096,
1136
Utopian, 726, 728-31, 956, 978
Fiction, periods
(1764-1819), 105-17, 161-64, 168
(1820-70), 188-91, 201-4, 226-29,
239, 241, 245-60, 268-69, 277-
79, 312, 333-47, 356, 365, 368,
375, 402-13, 415-18, 422, 470-
83, 485, 487, 491, 511, 514-16,
546-53, 555, 562-76, 578-84, 674
Fiction, periods — Continued
(1871-1914), 683-86, 689-92, 706-
10, 716-20, 722-24, 726-31, 745,
749-50, 756, 762-68, 775-83, 787-
97, 821-30, 835-37, 856, 867-77,
887-90, 900, 941, 945-52, 955-
76, 978, 980, 982, 984-1001,
1004, 1007-8, 1014, 1032, 1048,
1051, 1053-57, I059, 1089-99,
1105-10, 1136, 1142-43, 1145-48
(I9I5-39), 1155-59, 1161-63, 1168-
69, 1171, 1177-78, 1180, 1183,
1190-94, 1222-25, I239-47, 1249,
1251-57, 1259, 1261-62, 1264-
66, 1270-74, 1276-77, 1284-90,
1298-1302, 1314-18, 1325-28,
I33I-39, 1343, 1353-56, 1372-74,
1376, 1379-92, 1395-96, 1403-7,
1412, 1414-17, 1420-29, 1437-
50, 1453-62, 1465-72, 1474, 1489-
90, 1493, 1495-1500, 1511-13,
1515, 1527-29, 1541-42, 1544,
1551-52, 1559-69, 1571, 1573-74,
1576-79, 1589-97, 1611-12, 1614-
J9> 1635—44, 1646, 1653-58, 1661,
1680-83, 1686-88, 1691, 1693-
1702, 1704-5, 1707-12, 1720-23,
1727, 1730, 1733, 1736, 1743-48,
1754-56, 1758-60, 1762-63, 1771,
!775, I777~8i, 1786-89, 1796,
1798-1800, 1802-6, 1823, 1828-
33, 1836-40, 1842-50, 1852-54,
1864, 1866-67, 1872, 1874-75,
1882, 1887-91, 1902, 1904, 2371
(1940-55), 1907, 1909, 1911-12,
1914-18, 1921-22, 1927-28, 1930-
32, 1934, 1940-45, 1947, 1954-57,
1959-62, 1964, 1966-67, 1973-80,
1984-85, 1987, 2001, 2003-6,
201 1-14, 2017-19, 2021-23, 2025-
28, 2045, 2050-56, 2059, 2069-70,
2074, 2076-78, 2081-82, 2084-85,
2087-94, 2096-97, 2107-8, 21 10-
11, 21 1 5, 2119-20, 2122-23, 2125,
2127-30, 2132, 2146, 2148-49,
2153-59, 2161-64, 2166, 2169,
2173-75, 2180-88, 2193-95, 2197,
2199, 2201-2, 2204, 2206, 2208,
2210, 2212-13, 2224, 2229-31,
2371,2373
The Fiddler in Barly, 1637
Fiedler, Leslie, 656
Field, Cyrus W., about, 4677, 5882
Field, Eugene, 878-80
Field, Joseph M., 23 1 1
Field, RoswellM., 1880
Field and Stream, 5071
The Field God, 1475, 2337
The Field of the Grounded Arms, 323
Field sports, 2665, 2794, 5065-97
Fielding, Henry, about, 2651
Fields, Annie, ed., 577
Fields, Harry H., 4701
Fields, James Thomas, about, 2922
Fields, W. C, about, 4956
The Fields, I 694
The Fields Were Green, 2374
Fife, Alta (Stephens), 5538
Fife, Austin, 5538
The Fifth Column, 1498
The Fifty-Minute Hour, 2718
Figh, Margaret Gillis, 2257
Fighting Angel, 1258
"Fighting Furies," 5025
Figureheads, 5603
Figures for an Apocalypse, 2037
Figures of Earth, 1262
Files on Parade, 2072
Filipinos, 4470
Fill 'Er Up, 5005
Filler, Louis, ed., 866
Finance, 5965-6002
agricultural, 5848
bibl., 5966
hist., 3476, 5966, 5973, 5999-6000
municipal, 5973
public, 3126. 3289, 3291, 3310, 3322,
3431, 3448, 5969, 5971, 5983
state, 5973
Chicago, 5985
The Financier, 1336-37
Financiers. See Capitalists and finan-
ciers
Find Me in Fire, 2013
Findlay, Ohio, 3866
Fine, Nathan, 6356
Fine Clothing to the few, 1521
Fink, Arthur E., 4621
Fink, Mike, about, 5506
Finkelstein, Louis, ed., 5426-27
Finkelstein, Simon J., 5426
about, 5426
Finletter, Thomas K., 3623
Finney, Charles Grandison, about, 3360,
5395, 5403, 5428, 5490
Finnish folklore, Mich., 5533
Finnish-language newspaper, 2896
Fir-Flower Tablets, 1584
Fire, Chicago (1871), 4136
Fire and Cloud, 2234
Fire and the Hammer, 1 9 1 6
The Fire-Bringer, 1069
Fire for the Night, 24 1 3
Firecrackers, 1831
Fireside Travels , 467
Firman, Sidney G., ed., 1068
First Flowers of Our Wilderness, 5750
The First Gentlemen of Virginia, 16,
3749
The First Man, 1648
The First Morning, 2192
The First Thousand Days, 3498
First Will &■ Testament, 2080
Firth, Margaret A., ed., 4729
Fiscal policy. See Finance — public
Fisch, Max Harold, 5251
Fischer, Carlos, 5654
Fischer, John, 3624
Fish, Carl Russell, 3091, 6183
Fish, Hamilton, about, 3444
Fish, John Charles Lounsbury, 4800
Fish, Lounsbury S., 6018
Fishbein, Morris, 4806-7
Fisher, Anne (Benson), 3998
Fisher, Dorothea Frances (Canfiilil).
1412-19, 4033
Fisher, Galen M., 5495
Fisher, Vardis Alvero, 1420-24
Fisheries, 4744, 5948
New England, 5872
Fishing. See Hunting and fishing
Fishman, Solomon, 2421
1122 /
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Fisk, Ethel F., ed., 5304
Fisk, James, about, 5880
Fiske, John, 5302-4
ed., 3080
about, 3058, 3761, 5264, 5302, 5304
Fiske, Minnie Davey, about, 4930
Fitch, Clyde, 2337, 2347-48
Fitch, James Marston, 5699
Fitch, John, about, 4784
Fitch, John A., 5899, 6037
Fite, Emerson David, 3374
Fite, Gilbert C., 5737, 5843, 5860
Fithian, Philip Vickers, 2672-73
Fitzgerald, F. Scott, 1425-29
about, 821, 1222, 1425, 1430-31,
2371-72, 2429
Fitzgibbon, Russell H., 3581
Fitzpatrick, John C., ed., 3271
The Five Book.s of Youth, 15 16
Five Civilized Tribes, 3025-27
Five Generations, 1152
Fladeland, Betty L., 3375
Flagg, Edmund, 4322-23
about, 4322
Flagler, Henry M., about, 4096
Flaherty, Robert, about, 4958
Flame and Shadow, 1814
Flanagan, Hallie. See Davis, Hallie
(Ferguson) F.
Flanders, Helen (Hartness), comp.,
5574
Flanders, Ralph Edwards, about, 4803
Flanner, Hildegarde, 2406
Flaubert, Gustave, about, 2504
Fleischer, Nathaniel S., 5025-27, 5031,
5060
Fleming, Allan J., ed., 4873
Fleming, Denna Frank, 3534
Fleming, Donald H., 4831
Fleming, Roscoe, 6207
Fleming, Walter L., 3377
ed., 3376
about, 3057
Flesch, Rudolf F., 5226
Fletcher, John Gould, 1432-35, 4102
about, 1432, 1436, 1809
Flexner, Abraham, 5179, 5195
Flexner, Atherton, 6052
Flexner, James T., 4784, 4822, 4831,
574975 1
Flexner, Simon, 4831
Flick, Alexander Clarence, 3430
ed., 4044
Flint, Emily, ed., 2922
Flint, Timothy, 307-12
about, 307
The Floating World and Other Poems,
2350
Flood, Jessie B., musical arr. by, 5589
Floods and flood control, 2949, 2951,
4147
Flora, Snowden D., 2948
Flora. See Plants
Florey, Robert, 4944
Florida, 3953, 4007, 4079, 4096
architecture (Spanish-Colonial), 5723
descr., 1685
essays, 1002-3
fiction, 1222, 1302, 1526-29, 1680-
83,2051
fishing, 5083
Florida — Continued
folksongs & ballads, 5581
guidebooks, 3843-47
hist., 3158, 3980, 4096
language (dialects, etc.), 2258
short stories, 1680, 1684
travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4256-
57,4293
Flour milling, Minn., 4141-42
The Flourishing Village, 121
Flower, Milton Embick, 2776
Flowering Judas, 1660
The Flowering of New England, 2381
The Flowering of the Rod, 1324
Flowers in art, 5768
Floyd, Theodora A., about, 4854
Flush of Gold, 1058
The Flush Times of Alabama and Mis-
sissippi, 195-97
Flying Scud, 2298
Flynn, Edward J., 6384
about, 6384
Focus, 2045
Foerster, Norman, 2422-24, 2512
ed., 468, 2331, 2424-25
Fogdall, Soren J. M. P., 3571
Fogle, Richard H, 361
The Folded Leaf, 2032
Foley, Martha, ed., 2322
Folk, Joseph W., about, 6432
Folk art and crafts. See Arts and
crafts
Folk dances, 5587, 5589-90
analysis, 5591
hist., 5591
Appalachian Mountains, 5583
New England, 5580
Southern States, 5583
The West, 5591
Folk drama, 1473, 1475
Folk heroes, 2649, 3353, 4533, 5505-
06, 5511-13, 5516-17, 5519-20,
5522-25, 5529-30, 5532, 5538,
5544,5548
Folk humor. See Humor — frontier
Folk literature. See Folklore; Legends
and tales; Tales, folk; Tall tales
Folk magic, 5509, 5528-29, 5537
Fok medicine, Mich., 5533
Folk pottery, 5791
Folk religion. See Religion, folk
Folk rhyme. See Rhyme, folk
Folk sermons, Negro. See Preacher
tales
Folk singers, 5557, 5561, 5565, 5572,
5578,5580
Folk speech (Colonial period), 3740
Folk tales, See Tales, folk
Folke, Leander, 5293
Folklore, 3740, 3969
analysis, 5528-29, 5534, 5536, 5579
bibl., 5536-37, 5542, 5544
cowboy, 4162-63
Creole, 2265
definitions, 5504, 5514
hist., 5534, 5536, 5581
Indian, 3021
literary influence, 5534, 5548
migration, 5509
Negro. See Negroes — folklore
railroad, 5512
Folklore — Continued
rural, 4579
sources, 5514, 5524, 5529, 5534,
5536, 5546, 5548
themes, motives, etc., 5509, 5528,
5535, 5545-46
theory, methods, etc., 5504, 5514
urban. See Urban folklore
Northwestern States, 4147
Southwest, New, bibl., 4190
See also Folkways
Folklore in literature
drama, 1473
fiction, 1526
poetry, 1532, 1580
Calif., 1532
Fla., 1526
Ky., 2166
N.H., 1222
Va., 1267
The Folios, 1 799
Folks from Dixie, 860
Folksongs and ballads, 79-83, 146,
148, 427-28, 753-55, 910, 922,
933-34, 941-44, 1126-31, 1222,
1224, 1295, 1580, 4025, 5509-12,
5517,5549-84
analysis, 5555-57, 5559, 5561, 5564,
5570,5577.5579
bibl., 5556, 5569, 5613
definitions, 5556
hist., 5556, 5564, 5570, 5577, 5580
influence on poetry, 1697
sources, 5504, 5555, 5580
themes, motives, etc., 5555-56, 5560,
5564,5576-77,5581
theories, methods, etc., 5569-70
Ala., 5565
Ark., 5569
Fla., 5581
Ky., 5584
Maine, 5567
Mich., 5567, 5575
Miss., 5576
Mississippi River, 5523
Mo., 5568-69
New England, 5524, 5554, 5574,
558o
New York (State), 5548
N.C., 5536
Ohio, 5573
Okla., 5570
Ozark Mountains, 5569
Pa., 5578-79
St. Helena Island, S.C., 5540
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Southern States, 5525, 5561, 5572,
5577
Tex., 5518
Vt., 5574
The West, 5518, 5526, 5560, 5569
W. Va., 5572
See also Anglo-American folksongs
and ballads; Cowboys — songs &
music; Religious folksongs
Folkways, 2407, 5504, 5506, 551 1,
55I3-I4, 55i6, 5538, 5553, 5555-
56,5558,5585,5588
Ala., 5565
Ark., 5542
Beech Mountain, N.C., 5529
INDEX / 1 123
Folkways — Continued
Kans., 4168
Mich., 5533, 5535
Miss., 5547, 5576
Mississippi River, 5505, 5523
Missouri River, 5505
New England, 5524, 5534, 5574
N. Mex., 5537
N.C., 5536
Ohio River, 5505
Ozark Mountains, 5543
Pa., 4480, 5579
St. Helena Island, S.C., 5540
Southern States, 4079, 5525, 5577
Tex., 5521
Vt.,5574
The West, 5526
See also Folklore
Follett, Wilson, ed., 832-33
Folmer, Henry, 3162
Folwell, William Watts, 4142
Fombombo, 1792
Foner, Philip S., ed., 156
The Fool of Five For^s, 930
Football, 4990, 4993, 5034-45
Foote, Harry W., 4715
Foote, Henry Wilder, 5633
Footner, Hulbert, 3999
For the Sak.e of Shadows, 2752
For Whom the Bell Tolls, 1497
The Forayers, 552-53
Forays and Rebuttals, 2415
Forbes, Esther, 1437-44
Forbes, James, 2348
Forbes, Waldo Emerson, ed., 294
Forbidden Fruit, 2298
Force, Juliana, about, 5800
Force, Peter, about, 3057
Ford, Alice E., 5597
Ford, Edward, 4758
Ford, Guy Stanton, 3064
Ford, Henry, about, 5939
Ford, Henry Jones, 4489
Ford, Paul Leicester,
comp., 123, 125, 177
ed., 152, 3293
Ford, William E., 4715
Ford, Worthington Chauncey, 2580
ed., 5, 699, 3313
Ford Foundation, about, 5206
Ford Motor Company, about, 5939
Foreign correspondents, 2872
Foreign economic relations, 3546,
3636-42
Foreign exchange, 6002
Foreign influences on culture, 3146,
3227, 3474, 3737, 3740, 3758,
3768-70, 3774, 4096
bibl., 3768
Foreign language periodicals, 2895-99
Foreign population, 2897, 2899, 4297,
439°. 4395. 4406-7, 4411-17,
4421-22, 4426, 4515
education, 4421, 4483, 4493
in literature
fiction, 1 190, 1720-22, 1796,
2578
reporting, 21 61
suffrage, 6409
Brooklyn, 4046
Milwaukee, 4140
Foreign population — Continued
New England, 4026, 4435
New Haven, 4042
Sunderland, Minn., 4406
Wis., 4139
See also Refugees; and names of
national groups, e.g., Chinese;
Norwegians
Foreign relations (since 1945), 3482,
3501, 3523, 3526, 3529, 3570,
3598-3642,4503
See also Diplomatic history; and
names of countries, e.g., France,
relations with
Foreign reputation of authors
(1764-1819), 109
(1820-70), 209, 230, 252, 280, 313,
381, 427, 449, 520, 562, 585, 619,
674
19th cent., 2412, 2432
(1871-1914), 768, 964, 1048, 1061
(1915-39), 1252, 1357, 1379, 1445,
1484, 1494, 1559, 1754, 1759,
2412, 2508
Foreign service. See Diplomatic and
consular service
Foreign trade. See Commerce — for-
eign
Forensic psychiatry. See Psychiatry,
forensic
The Forest and the Fort, 1171
Forest Life, 418
The Forest of the South, 1471
Forester, Frank, pseud. See Herbert,
Henry William
Forestry as a profession, 5865
Forests and forestry, 1072, 1079, 2791,
5816,5862-63,5865
fossil, 4182
soils, 2934, 2944
Mass., 3803
S.C., 5087
Southern States, 4084
Va., 4085
The Forge, 1793
Forced Lightning, 1548
Form, William H., 4552
Forman, Henry Chandlee, 5706
Forman, Jonathan, 4594
Forman, Sidney, 3656
Formosan policy, 3589
Forrest, Edwin, about, 201, 4937
Forrest, Nathan, fiction, 1468
Forster, John, 4341
Forstcr, John Reinhold, tr., 4245-46
Fort Laramie, Wyo., 4179
Fort Worth, Tex., 4187
The Fortunate Mistress, about, 1278
Fortune, 4503
XLl Poems, 1313
42nd Parallel, 1325, 1328
Forty-eighters, 4481
Foscue, Edwin J., 2940
Fosdick, Harry Emerson, 5426
about, 5426
Fosdick, Raymond B., 4622
Foshay, A. Wellesley, 5147
Foster, Sir Augustus John, bart., 4280
about, 4279
Foster, Charles H., 562
Foster, Elizabeth S., ed., 491
Foster, Frank Hugh, 5428
Foster, Frank K., about, 4530
Foster, Maximilian, 1120
Foster, Ruel E., 1397
Foster, Stephen, about, 5677
bibl., 5677
Fothergill, John, about, 4247
The Foundling (sculpture), 5739
The Fountain, 1648
A Fountain in Kentucky, 2062
Four Faces West, 1686
The Four Million, 1 1 1 4-1 5
Four Quartets, 1359
about, 1366-67
Four Saints in Three Acts, 1 77 1
Four-Square, 141 8
Foust, Clement E., 205
Fowler, Dorothy (Ganfield), 4664
Fowler, Gene, 2878, 4933
about, 2878
Fowler, Lorenzo, about, 3752
Fowler, Orson, about, 3752
Fox, Dixon Ryan, 3090, 3221, 3730,
4027, 6374
ed., 3085-98, 3200
Fox, George, about, 5468
Fox Indians, 3041
The Fox of Pcapac\, 1 859
Foxeman, Grant, 3026-27
Frampton, Merle E., ed., 5207
France, Anatole, about, 2471
France
economic relations with, 4259-60
fiction, 1242-44, 1247, 1251, 141 1,
1416, 1495, 1578, 1611, 2093
personal narratives, 13 10, 1766,
1769-71
relations (general) with, 3508, 3528,
3531,3685-86,3773-75
American Revolution, 3187,
3250,3307
bibl., 4229
Civil War, 3536
World War I, 3710
short stories, 1242, 1413
soc. life & cust., 96, 264
travel & travelers, 96, 130, 264, 426,
1411, 1766, 1839
fiction, 987, 998, 2376
France and Great Britain in the New
World, 3171, 3188-89, 3191, 3226
France and Illinois, 4133
France and Spain in the New World,
3162,3171
France and Texas, 3577
Francesco da Rimini, 206-8, 2337, 2347
Francis, John F., about, 5744
Francis Berrian, 3 1 1
Frank, Barbara, 6298
Frank, Jerome, 6263, 6285, 6298
Frank, L. K., 5291
I rank, Ruth, photographs by, 4187
Frank, Waldo David, 1 445-50
ed., 1304
about, 1743
Frankenbcrg, Lloyd, 2426
Frankenstein, Alfred V., 5744
Frankfort, K ■■■., guidebook, 3857
Frankfurter, Felix, 3785, 5418, 6096,
6286
Fianking, Mac, 1659
1 124 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Franklin, Benjamin, 122-33, 2290,
3183-84,4750
about, 36, 45-46, 122, 171, 1873,
2277, 2412, 2456, 2465, 2503,
2523, 2620, 2773, 3123, 3183,
3185-87, 4533, 4721, 4750, 4850,
5130, 5803, 6068
bibl., 123
Franklin, John Hope, 4440
Franklin, William Temple, ed., 124,
126
Frantz, Joe B., 4162-63
Fraser, Chelsea C, 4799
Fraser River, 4013
Fraud and mistake cases, 6279
Frazier, Edward Franklin, 4441-42
Frederick, John H., 5943
Frederick, John T., ed., 2329
Free, 1341
Free enterprise, 3424, 4538, 5875, 5877,
5885, 5901, 6026, 6060, 6063,
6067, 6094, 6101, 6392
Free Joe, 920-21
The Free Man, 1695
Free Religions Association, Boston,
about, 5435
Free soil controversy, 3141, 3339
Free verse, 619, 821, 1583, 1599, 1727,
1731,1813
See also Experimental writing
Free will, 5297, 5472
Freedman, Florence B., ed., 655
Freedom. See also Liberty
Freedom and education, 5103, 5124,
5132-33.5181,5187,5236
Freedom and Fate, 306
Freedom of accommodation, 6106, 6129
Freedom of assembly, 61 17, 6121, 6123
Freedom of association, 6107
Freedom of belief, 6107
Freedom of labor, 6106, 6121, 6126,
6129
Freedom of opinion, 6060, 6065, 6108,
6164
Freedom of petition, 61 17, 6121
Freedom of religion, 4069, 5395, 5418-
21, 6106, 6117, 6123, 6126
Freedom of speech, 3462, 3766, 6106-
09, 6117, 6121, 6123, 6126, 6128
Freedom of teaching. See Teachers —
academic freedom
Freedom of the franchise, 6106, 6126
Freedom of the person, 611 7, 6121,
6126
Freedom of the press, 2846, 2867, 2880,
2889, 2906, 2928-29, 2931-32,
3462, 5307, 6106, 6108, 61 17,
6121, 6123, 6127-28
Freedom of the seas, 3558, 3571
Freedom of the will, 26
Freedom of thought, 3766
Freehof, S.B., 4458
Freeman, Douglas Southall, 3269, 3378,
3694-95, 5525
Freeman, Frank S., 5229
Freeman, Frederic Barron, ed., 487
Freeman, Mary E. (Wilkins), 881-86
about, 2486
Freeman, Otis W., ed., 4212
Freemasons. See Masons (Freemasons)
Freidel, Frank B., 3495
Fremont, Jessie Benton, about, 2818
Fremont, John Charles, 3334, 3535
about, 3335, 3345, 4734
Fremont, Ohio, 3867
French, Daniel Chester, about, 5736
French and Indian War (1755-63),
3I7L327I
French Broad River Valley, 4021
French Canadians, 4413, 4435
folklore, Mich., 5533
French influences
culture, 3774
folklore, 5523, 5528
in literature, 1032-35
language, 2265
Philadelphia, 4263
French population, New Orleans, 4101
Freneau, Philip Morin, 134-43
about, 134, 2465, 2486
Freud, Sigmund, about, 2407, 5392
Freudian concepts in literature, 11 61,
2441
drama, 1647-48, 2506
fiction, 1571
hist., 2440
Freund, Paul A., 6248
Freund, Robert, ed., 5755
Friden, George, 2364
Friederici, Georg, 3169
Friedman, Albert B., 5550
Friedman, Lillian, 2258
Friedman, Philip, 4459
Friedman, Theodore, ed., 4458
Friedrich, C. J., 4481
The Friend of My Youth, 71 1
The Friendly Persuasion, 22 1 1
Friendly societies, 4574
Friends, Society of, about, 5404, 5442,
5467-68, 5479
See also Quakers
The Friends of the Friends, 1012
Friendship, 285
Friendship Village, 1453
Fries, Charles C, 2244
Fries, John, about, 3149
Friess, H. L., 5289, 5291
Fritz, Percy Stanley, 4180
Frohman, Daniel, 5637
Frohock, Wilbur M., 2427
From a Bench in Our Square, 1 155
From Bed to Worse, 121 4
From Here to Eternity, 2004
From ford an s Delight, 1230
From Main Street to Stockholm, 1570
From Milo to Londos, 5060
From Fonkapog to Pesth, 713
From Rags to Riches, 2305
From the Easy Chair, 2278
From the Hidden Way, 1262
From the "London Times" of 1904,
798-99
From Time to Time, 1952
The Front Page, 2327, 2332
Frontenac, Louis de Buade, comte de,
about, 3 171
Frontier and pioneer life, 2407, 2802,
3074, 3078, 3082, 3105, 3147,
3151,3188,3737,4372,5508
arts & crafts, 5596, 5604
dances, 5590
Frontier and pioneer life — Continued
folklore, 5505, 5513, 5516, 5519-20,
5526,5542
folksongs & ballads, 5526, 5549,
5553-56, 5559-6o, 5570
Indians, 2988-89, 3030, 3032, 3035
law, 6220
legends, 3353, 5505, 5507, 5519,
5530
religion, 5411-16
Ariz., 4199
Dakota, 2683
Fla., 4293
111., 4129, 4136
Ind., 3995, 4123
Middle West, 4097-98, 4136, 4810
Minn., 4143
Mississippi River Valley, 3975, 5505
Missouri River and valley, 4147, 5505
Nebr., 2799-2800
New York (State), 4269
Northwest, Old, 41 12, 4307
Northwest, Pacific, 4213-14
Northwestern States, 3663, 4147
Ohio, 41 21
Ohio River and valley, 2610, 5505
Pa., 3280, 4269
S.C., 3180
Southern Plains, 4160
Southern States, 3180, 4097
Southwest, Old, 4098
Tenn., 3287, 3353
Tex., 3353,4365, 4734
Va., 4251, 4269
The West, 3331, 3348, 4097, 4146,
4151-56, 4158, 4160-63, 4175,
4177. 4223, 4235, 4281, 4320,
4661, 4667
Wis., 4347
Wyo., 3971
Frontier and pioneer life in literature
bibl., 2502
comedy, 518
descr., 307-10, 365-67, 381, 399,
772-74, 784-86, 890, 898-99,
1078
drama, 1556
editorials, sketches, etc., 194-97, 379"
80, 1064-65, 1068, 2424
fiction, 105-8, 114-15, 117, 201-4,
252, 258-60, 312, 415-18, 511,
514-16, 546, 550, 555, 579-84,
684-86, 766-67, 778-83, 787-93,
980, 1145-48, 1171, 1239, 1314-
15, 1420, 1422, 1441, 1488-90,
1644, 1646, 1694, 1696, 1701,
1707, 1720-21, 1786, 1840, 1960-
62, 1969, 2129, 2415-16
hist. & crit., 2437, 2502
humor, 2501
poetry, 933-34, 941-44, 1064, 1066-
67, 1132, 1644-45, !825
short stories, 319, 322, 330-32, 612-
13, 687, 733-34, 739, 926-32, 935-
40, 1 145
Ala., 194-97
Alaska, 1048-52, 1058
Calif., 733-34, 739, 926-40, 1064-
68
Ga., 445-48
Idaho, 1420, 1422
INDEX / 1 125
Frontier and pioneer life in literature —
Continued
Ky., 366, 516, 766-67, 1469, 1701
Maine, 1707
Mich., 415-18
Middle West, 1644-46
Miss., 194-97
Mississippi River and valley, 307,
319-22, 768, 778-83, 787-93
Mo., 366
New England, 1441
Northwest, Old, 366
Ohio, 980, 1694
Ohio River Valley, 319-21
Okla., 1403, 1406
Oreg., 391, 1314-15
Pacific Coast, 1064-68
Pa., 105-8, 366, 1694
Rocky Mountains, 312
S. Dak., 1720-21
Southern States, 194-97, 379-80,
612-13, 1786
Tenn., 330-32, 366
Utah, 1420, 1424
Vt., 579-84
Va., 12-16, 366
The West, 683-87, 772-74, 941-44,
1064-68, 1420, 1488-90, 1644-46
Wis., 1078, 1556, 1960-62, 2129
Wyo., 1145-48
Frontier humor. See Humor — frontier
Frontier hypothesis, 3074, 3105, 3127,
3137.3147,3357
Frontier in art. See The West — fron-
tier— pictorial works
Froom, L. E., 5442
Frooman, Jack, 3046
Frost, Arthur B., illus., 912-13, 922,
924-25, 1101
Frost, Robert, 1451-52, 5574
about, 1515, 2378, 2527
Frothingham, Octavius Brooks, 2279,
5256
Frothingham, Richard, 3245
Frothingham, Thomas G., 3680
Fruitlands, 5265
Fryburger, Vernon, 5962
Frye, Richard N., 3513
Fuchs, Lawrence H., 4458
Fulop-Miller, Rene, 4905
Fuess, Claude Moore, 2674-78, 3336,
3431,3480,5217
The Fugitive, 1809
Fuld, James J., 5677
Full Cargo, 1765
Fuller, Arthur B., ed., 316
Fuller, George W., 4213
Fuller, Henry Blake, 887-89
about, 2419
Fuller, Melville Weston, about, 6244
Fuller, Muriel, ed., 2351
Fuller, Richard C, about, 4619
Fuller, (Sarah) Margaret (Marchesa
d'Ossoli), 313-18
ed., 280
about, 313, 2280, 2615
Fuller, Zelotes, 5418
Fulton, John F., 4759, 4821
Fulton, Maurice G., 11 35
Fulton, Robert, about, 4784, 4786
Functional psychology, 5389
Fund for the Advancement of Educa-
tion, about, 5206
Fundamentalism, 3761, 5429-30
Funeral rites and ceremonies, 4527,
5507
Funk & Wagnalls New "Standard"
Dictionary, 2236
Fur trade
fiction, 312, 1962
Northwest, Pacific, 4213
Oregon, 391
Utah, 4183
The West, 3330, 4148-49, 4175, 4186
Furie, W. B., 4458
Furnas, Joseph C, 4562
The Furnished Room, 1 14-15
Furniss, Edgar S., 3605
Furniss, Norman F., 5429
Furniture, 5727-28, 5731-32, 5796
decoration, 5726
A Further Range, 1452
Fusfeld, Daniel R., 3497
Fussell, Edwin S., 171 8
Fussier, Herman H., ed., 6478
Futures, 5952
Fyles, Franklin, 2315
GATT. See General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade
Gabriel, Ralph Henry, 3082, 3741,
5420
Gabrielson, Ira Noel, 5870
Gaer, Joseph, 6394
Gaffney, M. Mason, 5817
Gagey, Edmond M., 4900, 4918, 5659
Gagliardo, Domenico, 4633
Gal Young Un, 1684
Galbraith, John Kenneth, 4513, 5886—
87
Gale, Zona, 1453-59
Galena, 111., guidebook, 3877
Galinsky, Hans, 2245
Gall, Elena D., ed., 5207
Gallantry, 1261
Gallatin, Albert, about, 3310-n
The Gallery, 1940-41
The Galley Slave, 23 1 6
Gallico, Paul, 4987
Gallie, Walter B., 5352
Gallion, Arthur B., 4606
Galloway, George B., 6155
Galloway, John Debo, 5927
Gallup, Donald C, 1362
Gallup, George H., 6417
Gallup, N.Mex., 4187
Galveston News, about, 2866
Gama, Vasco da, about, 3169
Gambling, 2586, 4639, 5059
Gambrill, John Montgomery, ed., 31 51
Games and dances, 5563, 5585-92
Ind., 5571
Mo., 5569
N.C., 5536
Okla., 5570
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
See also Dancing; Recreation; Sing-
ing games
Gamio, Manuel, 4471
comp., 4472
Gangs, 4598, 4658
Gannett, Henry, 2970
Ganoe, William Addleman, 3657
Gans, Joe, about, 5025
Gans, Roma, 5148
Gantenbein, James W., ed., 3575
Garbo, Greta, about, 4952
Gard, Robert E., 4926
Gard, Wayne, 4157, 6220
The Garden of Adonis, 1467
Gardening, 2790, 5824
Gardiner, Frederic M., 5018
Gardner, Albert Ten Eyck, 5738
Gardner, Burleigh B., 4438
Gardner, Emelyn Elizabeth, 5539
ed., 5575
Gardner, Gilson, 2890
Gardner, Helen L., 1363, 1367
Gardner, Mary R., 4438
Garfield, James Abram, about, 3450
Garis, Roy L., 4420
Garland, Constance, illus., 894
Garland, Hamlin, 890-99
about, 2365, 2419, 2517
Garland, John H., ed., 41 13
Garman, Charles Edward, about, 5222
Garnsey, Morris E., 4173
Garrets and Pretenders, 3757
Garrigue, Jean, 1981-83
Garrigues, Charles Harris, 6343
Garrison, Fielding H., 4819
Garrison, Francis Jackson, 3379
Garrison, Garnet R., 4686
Garrison, George Pierce, 3337
Garrison, W. E., 5496
Garrison, Wendell Phillips, 3379
Garrison, William Lloyd, about, 2280,
3379-80
Garrison, Winfred Ernest, 5405, 5455
Garvan, Anthony N. B., 5707
Gary, Elbert H., about, 2825
Gass, Sherlock B., 2425
Gassner, John, ed., 2332-35
Gates, Frederick T., 4622
The Gates of the Compass, 1516
Gateway to a Nation, 4043
Gaudet, Hazel, 6419
The Gauntlet, 1789
Gaus, John M., 3785
Gauthier, Eva, 5678
Gaver, Jack, 2327
ed., 2336
Gavit, Bernard C, 6274
Geare, R. I., 4726
Geddes, Virgil, 4665
Gehrig, Henry L. ("Lou"), about,
4987, 5010
Geiger, George R., 4535
Geiger, R., ed., 2953
Geiger, Theodore, 5898
Geiser, Samuel W., 4734
Geismar, Maxwell D., 2428-30
ed., 646
Gelatt, Roland, 5618
Gelfant, Blanche H., 2431
Gellhorn, Walter, 4773, 61 10, 61 18,
6130, 6316
ed., 6110, 6119
1 126 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
General Accounting Office, about,
5995-97
General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade (GATT), about, 5953
General education, 5107, 5134, 5160,
5180, 5182, 5184, 5228, 5246
See also Liberal education
General Motors Corporation, about,
5940
General stores, 4086, 5955
General William Booth Enters into
Heaven, 1581
The Generall Historie of Virginia,
New-England, and the Summer
Isles, 70
Generals, Civil War, 3690-92, 3695,
3706
The General's Lady, 1442
Genesis, 2136
Genetics, 4722
The "Genius," 1339
The Genius of America, 2503
The Genteel Tradition at Bay, 1735,
5368
"Genteel tradition" in literature, 2278,
2385-86, 2513
poetry, 2513,2545
revolt, 926, 1089, 1333, 2406, 2507
The Gentle Lena, 1767
The Gentleman from Indiana, 1802
The Gentleman in America, 2392
A Gentleman of Bayou Teche, 760
Gentleman's Progress, 4240
Gentlemen, I Address You Privately,
1242
Gentles, Ruth G., ed., i486
The Geographical Review, 2937
Geography, 2933-81
atlases & maps, 2967, 2972, 2974
economic, 2939-40
historical, 2939, 2943, 2967-76, 3139
physical, 1079, 2933-36, 2970, 2973,
2975,5816
regional, 2933-37, 2939-40, 41 13
Great Plains, 4159
Middle West, 41 13
Missouri Valley, 4145
N. Dak., 4165
Okla., 4170-71
Southern States, 4084
territories, 4218
Tex., 4192
The West, 4148
See also Language — atlases & maps
Geography and Plays, 1771
Geological Society of America, about,
4733
Geological Survey, about, 4763
Geologists, 4737
Geology, 2935-36, 2942, 2945-46,
2957. 2973. 4336-38
bibl, 4736
hist., 4715, 4733, 4737
maps, 2942
Nev., 4184
Rocky Mountains, 4172
Tex., 4192
Yellowstone National Park, 4182
Geophysical Laboratory, Washington,
D.C. See Carnegie Institution of
Washington, Geophysical Labora-
tory
George, Henry, about, 4535, 6424
George Fox Digg'd Out of His Bur-
rowes, 89
George Washington Slept Here, 1548
George's Mother, 824, 836-37
Georgia, 3953, 4079, 4094-95
architecture, 5706
editorials, sketches, etc., 445-48, 556
fiction, 546, 1270-74, 1380, 1544,
1618-19
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3837-42
hist., 4094, 4104
journalism, 2856
language (dialects, etc.), 2271
newspapers, 2856
poetry, 1038-43, 1046-47
resources, 4095
short stories, 556, 910-22, 924-25,
1270, 1275
travel & travelers, 4248-50
Georgia. University, hist., 5176
Georgia Press Association, about, 2856
Georgia Scenes, 446-48
Gerber, John C, 344
Gericke, Wilhelm, about, 5649
German-American newspapers, 2899
Germans, 4046, 4062, 4360, 4414,
4471-81
folklore, 5523
immigrant influences, 4477
See also Pennsylvania Germans
Germantown, Pa., 4477
Germany
economic relations with, 3638
fiction, 1250, 1890-91
relations with, 3570, 3776
travel & travelers, 426, 1890, 2462
Geronimo, about, 3004
Gerontion, about, 1367
Gershwin, George, 1512
about, 5639, 5678
Gershwin, Ira, 5678
Gerson, Robert A., 5629
Gervasi, Frank H., 6184
Gesell, Arnold L., 5149
Gestalt psychology, 5389, 5392
Gethsemani Monastery, about, 2041
Gettysburg, Battle of, 2613
fiction, 1542
Ghent, William J., 3338
Ghent, Treaty of, 3329, 3542
Ghost and Flesh, 1986
Ghost stories, 5515
Mich., 5535
Schoharie County, N. Y., 5539
Tex., 5521
The Ghost Talks, 6364
The Ghostly Rental, 1012
Ghostly Tales, 10 12
Giants and ogres in folklore, 5528-29,
5546
Giants in the Earth, 1721
Gibb, G. S., 5913
Gibbons, Herbert Adams, 5957
Gibbs, Josiah Willard, about, 2105,
4721,4724,4751
Gibbs, Oliver Walcott, about, 4740
Gibson, John M., 4823
Gibson, Joseph Bannister, about, 6231
Gibson, William M., 972
ed., 835
Giddings, Franklin Henry, about, 4540,
4542
Giddings, J. R., 3360
Gideon Planish, 1567
Gideonse, Harry D., 3608
Gifford, E. W., 3002
Gift-books (annuals, etc.), 2518
The Gift of the Magi, 1 1 1 4-1 5
Gila River and valley, 4005
Gilbert, Douglas, 4974
Gilbert, Edmund W, 2971
Gilbert, Sir Humphrey, about, 3223
Gilbert, Josiah, about, 850
The Gilded Age, 775-77, 1 136
Gilder, Rosamond, ed., 4896
Gilgamesh, translation, 1556
Gill, Herbert A., 4744
Gill, Norman N., 6209
Gillette, William, 2337
Gilley, John, about, 2671
Gillie, Mildred H, 3658
Gillin, John Lewis, 4540, 4634
Gillmore, Margalo, 4919
Gilman, Daniel Coit, 4724, 4749, 5195
about, 5195
Gilman, Lawrence, 5683
Gilman, Richard C, 5310
Gilman, Roger, 3751
Gilman, William H, 498
ed., 2412
Ginsburg, Jekuthiel, 4739
Gipson, Lawrence H, 3188, 3246
The Girl I Left behind Me, 2315
The Girl of the Golden West, 2348
The Girl with the Green Eyes, 2337
Gissing, George, about, 2481
Gist, Noel P., ed., 4108
Gittler, Joseph B., ed., 4428
Give Your Heart to the Hawks, 1534
The Gladiator, 205, 2337
Glasgow, Ellen, 1460-63
about, 1267, 1463, 2430
Glaspell, Susan, 2332
Glass industry, 5911
The Glass Menagerie, 2219, 2334, 2336
Glass Mountain, 2376
Glassware and glassmaking, 5789, 5796
Glaucus, 2300
Glazer, Nathan, 4555-56, 5458
Glazer, Sidney, 4137
Gleanings in Europe, 263-64
Gleason, Sarell Everett, 3537-38
Glenmary, N.Y., 674
Glenn, Bess, 3967
Glenn, John M., 4623
Click, Carl, 4901
Glicksberg, Charles I., 2383
Glimpses of Life in Colonial Virginia,
1 103-4
Glimpses of Unfamiliar Japan, 951-52
Globe (Atchison, Kans.), about, 2885
Glorious Incense, 539
Glory Never Guesses, 2079
The Glory of the Nightingales, 1714
Glory Road, 3691
Glover, John George, ed., 5906
INDEX / 1 1 27
Glueck, Eleanor T., 4646-51
Glueck, Sheldon, 4645-51
Go Down Moses, 1379
Go Tell It on the Mountain, 19 15
Goblins and Pagodas, 1 433
God and My Country, 1541
God and My Father, 1 3 1 8
The Goddess Was Mortal, 1553
Godfrey, Thomas, 144-45, 2337, 2347
Godkin, Edwin Lawrence, 2858, 2882
about, 2882, 2921
The Gods Atrive, 1 854
God's Controversy with New-England,
79
God's Little Acre, 1272
Gods of the Lightning, 1 173, 2332
God's Promise to His Plantation, 18
God's Trombones, 1538
Godwin, Parke, ed., 223
Goebel, Dorothy Burne, 3326
Goebel, Julius, Jr., 6221, 6234
Goethals, George Washington, about,
4221,4796
Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, about,
2282
Gogh, Vincent van, about, 2815
Gohdes, Clarence, 2412, 2432, 2496
ed., 643, 1046, 2338
Going, Charles Buxton, 3339
Going to Pieces, 491 1
Going-to-the-Stars , 1581
Going-to-the-Sun, 1581
Gold, 1648
The Gold-Bug, 529
Gold mines and mining
Calif., 2641, 2659, 4201-2
Cripple Creek, Colo., 41 81
Rocky Mountains, 4172
Gold rushes
Alaska, 2719-20
Calif., 926, 941, 3737, 4201-2, 4351
Rocky Mountains, 4174
Goldberg, Arthur J., 6049
Goldberg, Isaac, 5635
Goldberg, Ray A., 5841
Golden Apples (Rawlings). 1682
The Golden Apples (Welty), 2207
The Golden Apples of the Sun, 1936
The Golden Bowl, 1000-1
about, 998
Golden Boy, 2064, 2333
The Golden Darkness, 1871
Golden Falcon, 1295
The Golden House, 1 142
The Golden Mirror, 1906
Golden Multitudes , 2482
The Golden Vase, 1577
Goldenweiser, Emanuel A., 5983
Goldfield, Nev., 4184
Goldin, Hyman E., ed., 2274
Goldman, Eric F., 3046, 3455, 3484,
375i
ed., 3058
Goldman, Irving, 3041
Goldmann, Franz, 4886
Goldsen, Rose Kohn, 4470
Goldsmith, Alfred F., comp., 633
Goldthwait, James W., 2937
Goldwin, Robert A., ed., 3617
Golf, 4987, 4990, 5048, 5051, 5053
Gomme, Alice, Lady, 5588
Gompers, Samuel, 6050
about, 6050
Gone Tomorrow, 1592
Gone With the Wind, 1 619
Good and evil, 5354
The Good Anna, 1767
Good-Bye, My Fancy, 626, 638
Good-Bye Wisconsin, 1841
The Good Earth, 1253
Good Intentions, 1 63 1
Good Men and True, 1687
Good Morning America, 1 73 1
Good neighbor policy, 3491, 3574,
3576,3578
Good News of Death, 2350
Good Night, Sweet Prince, 4933
The Good Spirit of Laurel Ridge, 2173
Goodale, George L., 4715
Goode, George Brown, 4726
about, 4724, 4726
Goodloe, Daniel R., 4363
A Goodly Fellowship, 1284, 5214
A Goodly Heritage, 1284, 5214
Goodman, Henry, ed., 955
Goodman, Nathan G., 4830
ed., 132
Goodrich, Annie M., about, 4854
Goodrich, Hubert B., 4725
Goodrich, Lloyd, 5764-65, 5773
Goodspeed, Charles Eliot, 5072, 6462
ed., 5690
Goodwyn, Frank, 4192
Goodyear, Charles, about, 4786
The Goophered Grapevine, 757
Gordis, Robert, ed., 4458
Gordon, Albert I., 4456
Gordon, Caroline, 1464-72
Gordon, George A., about, 5428
Gordon, John E., 4877
Gordon, Kate, 5289
Gordon, Lincoln, 5885
Gorgas, William Crawford, about, 4221,
4823
The Gorgeous Hussy, 2668
Gorlin, Selma, illus., 5587
Gosnell, Harold Foote, 63C3, 6375,
6385-86,6418
Goss, Madeleine B., 5609
Gottmann, Jean, 4085
Gottschalk, Clara. See Peterson, Clara
Gottschalk
Gottschalk, Louis Moreau, 5679
Gottschalk, Louis R., 3247-50
about, 5679
Goubaux, Prosper, 2299
Goudy, Frederic William, 6456
Gould, George M., 2513
Gould, Jay, about, 5880, 5882
Gould, Laurence M., 2977
Gould, Mary Earle, 5598
Govan, Gilbert E., 4104
Government, 2970, 3106, 4065, 4499,
4551, 6059-60, 6077-78, 6131-
39, 6147, 6167, 6170-71, 6179,
6202, 6312
appropriations & expenditures, 6001,
6136, 6139, 6168, 6180, 6182, 6191
centralization, 6061, 6066, 6085, 6093
expansion, 6093, 6099, 6103-4
functions, 2905, 6133, 6139, 6178,
6315
Government — Continued
history
I7th-i8th cent., 3195, 3221,
3245, 6068, 6232
18th cent., 3187, 3192, 6075
American Revolution, 3242,
6083
Confederation, 3190
19th cent., 3320, 3324, 3329,
3333»335i,3357.34i9.4288,
4512, 6373
20th cent., 3416, 3455, 3485-87,
3491. 3498,350ob
sources, 3349, 3422, 6065
labor policy, 6192
limitations, 6090, 6101
organization, 6173-74, 6178
regulations. See under special sub-
jects, e.g., Commerce — govt, regu-
lations
World War II program, 3725
See also Executive branch; Indians,
American — govt, relations; Judicial
branch; Legislative branch; Sepa-
ration of powers
Government, democratic. See Democ-
racy
Government, local. See Local govern-
ment
Government, state. See State govern-
ment
Government and art. See Art and state
Government and education, 5099, 5165,
5189
See also State and education
Government and science. See Science
and state
Government and the press, 2861, 2927-
28, 2932
Government officials and employees,
4065, 6421
appointment, qualifications, etc.,
6083, 6112, 6136, 6157, 6159,
6183,6186,6188,6193
biog. (collected), 6187
Government ownership, 5885
Government Printing Office, about,
6452
Government publications, 6452
bibl., 6138, 6452
Governors, powers and duties, 6203
Governors' Conference, about, 5135
Gow, James, 2334
Gowan, Olina, Sister, about, 4854
Goyen, William, 1984-87
Grady, Henry W., about, 2856, 3445
Graebner, Norman A., 3340, 3613
Graeff, Arthur D., 3230, 4479
Graf, Herbert, 5655
Graham, C. A., 4176
Graham, Edward H., 5810
Graham, Frank, 5010
Graham, George A., 6344
Graham, Gerald S., 3189
Graham, Ian Charles Cargill, 4491
Graham, J., pseud. See Phillips, David
Graham
Graham, Lloyd, 3950
Graham, Martha, 4968
about, 4968
1 128 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Graham, Philip, 4978
ed., 1046
Grambs, Jean D., 5227
A Grammar of Motives, 2389
Grammars. See Language — grammars
Grand Army of the Republic, about,
3644
Grand Canyon, 4182
The Grand Design, 1332
Grand Inquest, 6164
La Grande demoiselle, 1035
Grandfather Stories, 11 60
The Grandissimes, 749-50
Grandmamma, 1035
The Grandmothers, 1840
Grandmother' s Grandmother, 1035
Grandsons, 2578
Grange, Harold E. ("Red"), 5037
about, 5037
Granger movement, 3420-21, 6356
Grannis, Chandler B., ed., 6437
Granniss, Ruth, 6440
Grant, Bruce, 2253
Grant, Helen Hardie, 2633
Grant, Margaret, 5647
Grant, Ulysses S., 3696
about, 2280, 3435, 3444, 3696, 3706
Grant, William L., ed., 3156, 3207
Grapes of Wrath, 1775, 1777
Gras, Norman S. B., 5984, 6007
The Grass Harp, 1947
Grasselli, Eugene R., about, 4735
Grattan, C. Hartley, ed., 309, 2375
Grattan, Thomas Colley, 4334-35
about, 4334
Graves, William Brooke, 6171, 6202
comp., 6185
Gray, Asa, 4036, 4760
about, 4724, 4760
Gray, Henry David, 5301
Gray, J. W., about, 2857
Gray, James, 2358, 3986
Gray, Lewis Cecil, 5823
Gray, Wood, 3058
The Gray Wolfs Ha'nt, 757
Grayson, David, pseud. See Baker, Ray
Stannard
The Graysons, 876—77
Graziano, "Rocky", 5028
about, 5028
The Great American Fraud, 1 155
The Great Awakening, 22-23, 5401-2,
5411,5419
Great Awakening, 5402
Great Basin, 2971
Great Britain
Colonial policy, 3176-77, 3179, 3188—
89, 3191-92, 3i95. 3221, 3225,
3241,3243
commerce, 3193
economic relations with, 3638
relations with, 3187-88, 3221, 3243,
3246, 3307, 3340, 3426, 3444,
3502, 3531, 3551-54, 3557-59.
3777-78
Civil War, 3536, 3550
War of 1812, 3542
Great Britain. Privy Council, about,
6232, 6234
Great Britain and France in the New
World, 3171, 3188-89, 3191, 3226
Great Britain and Massachusetts, 3241
Great Britain and Pennsylvania, 3225
Great Britain and Texas, 3554, 3577
Great Circle, 11 63
Great Depression (1929). See Depres-
sion (1929)
The Great Diamond Robbery, 2305
Great Dismal Swamp, 4336
The Great Divide, 1069-70
The Great Gatsby, 1428-29
about, 1425
The Great God Brown, 1648, 2337
The Great God Pan, 4953
The Great God Success, 1 108
The Great Good Place, 1012
Great Lakes, 2803, 3170, 41 13-14,
4140,4315,4329, 4349
short stories, 1149-50
travels & travelers, 314
See also Waterways, inland
The Great Lawsuit, 315
The Great Meadow, 1701
Great Plains, 2933, 4151-71
geography, 2969
grasslands, 2966
guidebooks, 3895-3909
hist., 3784, 3964
Indians. See Plains Indians
Great Revival, 5402
Great Smoky Mountains, short stories,
1084, 1087-88
The Great Tradition, 2439
The Great Valley, 1601
Greece, fiction, 1839
Greeks Anthology, 1599, 2481
Greeks, 4435
Greeley, Horace, 2883, 4373
about, 313, 2770, 2797, 2848, 2858,
2868,2883,4372
Greely, Adolphus W., 2981
about, 2980-81
Green, Abel, 4892
Green, Constance McLaughlin, 4789
Green, James A., 3326
Green, Nicholas St. John, about, 5264
Green, Paul, 1473-78, 2332-33, 2337
about, 1479
Green, Samuel Swett, 6472
about, 6476
Green, William, 5906
Green Bay Packers, about, 5045
A Green Bough, 1379
Green Centuries, 1469
Green Fruit, 1227
The Green Leaf, 1635
The Green Mountain Boys, 580-82
Green Mountains, Vermont, 2742
The Green Pastures, 2327, 2333, 2348
Green River, 217
The Green Town, 2350
The Green Wave, 2106
Greenbackers, 3421, 6356, 6362, 6427
Greenberg, Samuel Bernard, 1480-81
about, 1 48 1
Greenblatt, Milton, 4838
Greene, Bertram, drawings, 3164
Greene, Edward L., about, 4734
Greene, Evarts Boutell, 3089, 3190-92,
5419
Greene, Theodore M., 5100
Greene, Theodore P., ed., 31 10-1 1
Greener Fields, 2725
Greenfield, Kent Roberts, ed., 3726
Greenfield Hill, 121
Greenough, Horatio, about, 5738
Greenslet, Ferris, 951, 2679-81
about, 2680
Greenway, John, 5552
Greenwich Village
Bohemianism, 3757
theater, 4916
Greer, Thomas H., 6426
Greever, Garland, ed., 1046
Gregg, Josiah, 4188
about, 4188
Gregory, Herbert E., 4715
Gregory, Horace Victor, 1132, 1482-
83, 1905
ed., 1 1 85
Gregory, Mrs. Horace Victor. See
Zaturenska, Marya
Gregory, Raymond W., 5224
Gregory, Winifred, 2915
Gress, Edmund G., 6456
Grew, Joseph C, 3545, 3599
Grey, Hugh, ed., 5071
Grey, Zane, 1484-86, 5073-74
about, 1486-87, 5073
Greyslaer, 365, 550
Grieve, George, tr., 4253
GrifTes, Charles T., about, 5605, 5680
Griffin, Grace Gardner, 3521
Griffin, James B., ed., 2990
Griffin, Marcus, 5061
Griffis, William Elliot, 2851
Griffith, Louis Turner, 2856
Griffith, Richard, 4958
Griffith, Virgil A., 6273
Grimes, Alan Pendleton, 2921, 6062
Grimm brothers, about, 5504
Grinnell, George Bird, 2999-3000, 4724
Grinnell expeditions, 2980
Griswold, Alexander Viets, Bp., about,
5457
Griswold, Alfred Whitney, 3594
Grodzins, Morton, 4469
Grogan, John M., 4695
Groost, Gerard, about, 3765
Gross, A. H., tr., 11 93
Gross, Ben, 4965
about, 4965
Gross, Gerald C, 4707
Gross, Mason W., ed., 5384
Gross, Samuel D., 4824
about, 4824
The Gross Clinic (painting), 5764
Grossman, James, 252, 2286
Grosvenor, Gilbert, ed., 2962
Grosz, George, illus., 11 18
The Ground We Stand On, 1329
The Group, 2347
Group dances, 5590
Group theatre, 4914
Grover, Leonard, 2301
Groves, Ernest R., 4563
Groves, Harold M., 5970
The Groves of Academe, 2021
Growth, 1806
Gruchy, Allan G., 5888
Grunder, Garel A., 3595
Gruskin, Alan D., 5752
Guard of Honor, 1302
INDEX / 1 1 29
The Guardian Angel, 375
Guerrant, Edward O., 3576
Guest, Robert H., 6055
Guidance in education, 5149, 5228
Guidebooks. See under names of
places and regions, e.g., Alaska —
guidebook
Guild, R. A., ed., 89
Guilday, Peter K., 5477
Gulf coastal plain, 2933
Gulf States, 3946
Gullah dialect, 2271, 4436, 5540
Gulliksen, Harold, 5229
Gummere, Amelia Mott, ed., 185
Gummere, Francis Barton, about, 5222
Gun Factory, Naval, hist., 3670
Gunderson, Robert Gray, 3326
Gunn, Selskar M., 4863
Gunther, John, 3499
Gustafson, Axel F., 5884
Guthe, Carl E., 2990
Gutheim, Frederick A., 4008
Guthmann, Harry G., 5967, 5971
Guthrie, Alfred Bertram, 1488-90
Guthrie, Paul N., ed., 6054
Guthrie, Ramon, tr., 3773
Gymnasiums, 4990
H
H. M. Pulham, Esquire, 1592
Haas, Theodore H., 4428
Haas, William H., 4218
Habenstein, Robert W., 4527
Haber, David, ed., 6126
Haberle, John, about, 5744
Hacienda, 1660
Hacker, Louis M., 5878
Hackett, Alice Payne, 2482
Hackett, James H., about, 518
Hackett, Walter, 2348
Hadley, Chalmers, 6476
Haefner, George E., 5220
Hafen, Le Roy R., 4179, 4666
Hagedorn, Hermann, 2682-86
Hague, Frank, about, 6388
Hague. Permanent Court of Inter-
national Justice, about, 3534
Hahn, Milton E., 5228
Haigh, Robert W., 5914
Haight, Gordon S., 279
Hail Columbia (song), about, 5616
Haiman, Miecislaus, 3250
Haines, Charles G., 6240
Haines, Francis, 3001
Haines, George, IV, 3065
Haines, William Wister, 2337
The Hairy Ape, 1647-48, 2332
Haiti, relations with, 3575, 3584, 3587
Hakluyt, Richard, about, 3198
The Halcyon in Canada, 741
Hale, Bryant, 4946
Hale, Carolyn L., comp., 6205
Hale, Edward Everett, 880, 900-9,
4036
Hale, George Ellery, about, 4722
Hale, Robert Beverly, 5754
Hale, William Harlan, 2883
Hales, Dawson W., 5099, 5141
Haley, James Evetts, 4153, 4196
Halford, Francis John, 2687-88
Halich, Wasyl, 4492
Halkin, A. S., 4457
Hall, Basil, 4300-2
Hall, Clayton Colman, ed., 3209
Hall, Clifton L., ed., 5108
Hall, Dorothy, 5196
Hall, Francis, 4286-87
about, 4285
Hall, G. Stanley, about, 51 16, 5392
Hall, Gertrude, about, 1278
Hall, James, 319-22
Hall, Margaret E., ed., 6262
Hall, Margaret Hunter, 4300
Hall, Thomas Cuming, 5394
Halleck, Fitz-Greene, 323-29, 2295
about, 329
Hall-marks, pewterers', 5788
Hallenbeck, Wilbur C, 4587
Halline, Allan G., ed., 170, 200, 208,
2337
Hallowed Years, 5066
Hallowell, Maine, guidebook, 3793
Halpert, Herbert, 5545
ed., 5566, 5576
Halsey, Francis W., 163
Halsey, Richard T. H, 5796
Halsted, William S., about, 4821, 4845
The Halt in the Garden, 151 6
Hambridge, Gove, ed., 5837
Hamburger, Ernest, 521 1
Hamburger, Philip P., 1598
Hamer, Philip M., 3068
Hamilton, Alexander, 2291, 3288-89,
4240, 6075
about, 723-24, 2873, 3125, 3281,
3288-91, 4239, 6015, 6170
Hamilton, Allan McLane, 3291
Hamilton, Andrew, about, 2931
Hamilton, Charles, ed., 4652
Hamilton, Holman, 3333
Hamilton, R. S., about, 4536
Hamilton, Walton, 4513, 5290
Hamilton, William Baskerville, ed.,
2571
Hamilton, William J., 2955
The Hamlet, 1391
The Hamlet of A. MacLeish, 1586
Hamlin, Sarah H. (Simpson), 5709
Hamlin, Talbot Faulkner, 5700, 5708-9
Hammarstrand, Nils, tr., 4486
Hammerstein, Oscar, 2337, 5659, 5685
Hammond, Bray, 6000
Hammond, Charles, about, 2857
Hampson, Alfred Leete, ed., 842
Hampton, Wade, 2635
Hampton, S. C, plantation life, 5087
Hampton Institute, about, 2982
Hanau, Stella, 4916
Hanchett, David S., 5948
Hancock County, Ohio, 3866
Hand, Learned, 6264
Handel, Leo A., 4950
Handicrafts. See Arts and crafts
Handkerchiefs from Paul, 2483
Handlin, Mary F., 3083
Handlin, Oscar, 3083, 4410-11, 4428-
30, 4455,4481
ed., 3079, 4323, 5483
Hands Off, 3577
Hanford, A. Chester, 5178
Hanford, James Holly, 5573
Hanley, Louise, ed., 2240
Hanley, Miles L., 2268
Hanna, Alfred J., 3980, 4293
Hanna, KathrynT. (Abbey), 4096
Hanna, Marcus Alonzo ("Mark"),
about, 3424, 6352
Hannah Thurston, 2282
Hansen, Allen O., 5 1 2 1
Hansen, Alvin H., 5898, 5968
Hansen, Harry, 387, 1122, 3488, 3987
ed., 1 125, 2351
Hansen, Marcus L., 2268, 4390, 4412-
13.4473
Hanson, Earl Parker, 4222
Hanson, Howard, about, 5671
Happiness, pursuit of (law), 3756
Happy Days, 1604
The Happy Marriage, 1 586
Happy New Year, Kameradesl, 2016
Haraszti, Zoltan, 3279
Harbeson, Georgiana (Brown), 5785
Harbison, Winfred A., 6077
The Harbor, 1657
Harbor of the Sun, 2746
Harbord, James G., 3710
Hard, Walter R., 4009
Hard Candy, 2227
Hard Winter, 1553
Hardee, Melvene D., ed., 5228
Harding, Thomas Swann, 5857
Harding, Walter R.
comp., 589
ed., 610
Harding, Warren Gamaliel
about, 3475
fiction, 1756
Hardman, Jacob B. S., ed., 6032
Hardy, C. De Witt, 5169
Hardy, John, about, 5517
Hare, James H., about, 2908
Hare, Robert, about, 4740
Hare, William H, Bp., about, 5457
Hargrave, Roy, 4968
Harlem (N.Y.)
fiction, 1832, 1914-15
short stories, 1521, 1523-25
Harlow, Alvin F., 4122, 4667, 4675,
5928
ed., 5512
Harlow, Ralph Volney, 2689, 6156
Haiman, R. Joyce, 4693
Harmon, Frances B., 5305
Harmon, George Dewey, 3028
Harmon, Nolan Bailey, 5463
Harmon, "Old Council," about, 5529
Harmonium, 1782, 1784
Harmony Society, hist., 3819
Harned, Thomas B., ed., 627, 637
Harnett, William M., about, 5744
Harno, Albert J., 6321
Harnoncourt, Rene d', 3017
Harp of Columbia, 5577
1 larpcr, Joseph Henry, 6450
H.irper, Lawrence A., 3193
Harper, Robert A., 4619
1 larpcr, Wilhclmina, comp., 937
Harper and Brothers, about, 6445, 6450
Harper's Magazine, 2557
The Harpe's Head, 322
Harrigan, Edward, about, 4935
Harriman, Edward Henry, about, 5932
1 130 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Harriman, Margaret Case, 4931
Harrington, Fred Harvey, 3103
Harriot, Thomas, about, 4721
Harris, Charles K., about, 5635
Harris, George Washington, 330-32
Harris, J. S., 3041
Harris, Joel Chandler, 880, 910-25,
1134-35. 2296
about, 910, 2261
Harris, Joseph P., 6157, 6403-4
Harris, Julia C, ed., 923
Harris, Mark, 1582
Harris, R. E. G., 6207
Harris, Seymour E., 5889-90, 6010
ed., 3638
Harris, Thaddeus W., about, 2280
Harris, William Torrey, 5266, 5306-8
about, 5259, 5305, 5307, 5309
Harrison, James A., ed., 533, 538
Harrison, Joseph B., ed., 938
Harrison, Peter, about, 5704
Harrison, Shelby Millard, 4588
Harrison, William Henry, 2996
about, 3325-26
Harrisse, Henry, 6460
about, 6460
Harrod, James, about, 2726-27
Harshberger, John W., 2957
Hart, Albert Bushnell, 3079, 3083, 3381
ed., 3177. 3301, 3337. 3356. 4034
Hart, Clyde, 4701
Hart, James D., 2433-34, 2482
ed., 2338
Hart, Lorenz, about, 5685
Hart, Moss, 1491-93, 1545, 1548, 2327,
2333-34
Hart, Tony, about, 4935
Harte, Francis Bret, 926-40, 2290
about, 732, 941, 1 149, 2534
Hartford, Conn., 32
Hartford Convention, 3305
Hartford Courant, about, 2875
Hartford Wits. See Connecticut Wits
Hartmann, Edward George, 4421
Hartshorne, Charles, ed., 5346
Hartshorne, Richard, 2937
Hartung, Maurice L., ed., 5249
Hartz, Louis, 6063
Harvard Anniversary Address, 460
Harvard College, 3745
Harvard Guide to American History,
3083
Harvard University
about, 2767, 5221, 5670, 5672
curriculum, 5180
hist., 5203
Harvard University. Committee on the
Objectives of a General Education
in a Free Society, 5 1 80
Harvard University. Divinity School,
about, 5424
Harvard University. Library, about,
6470
Harvard University. Philosophy Dept.,
about, 5369
Harvesting machinery, 5826
Harvey, Alexander, 975
Harvey, Fred, about, 4187
Harvey, William Brinton, 5468
Harwell, Richard B., ed., 2830
Hasse, Adelaide R., 4819, 5834
Hasslacher, Jacob, about, 4735
Hastings, George E., 146
Hastings, Thomas, 5665
The Hasty Heart, 2334
Hasty Pudding, 102
Hatch, Louis Clinton, 3681
The Hatch, 2350
Hatcher, Harlan H., 41 14, 41 18
Hathorn, Guy B., 6139
Haugen, Einar, 2267
Haunted Ground, 1553
The Haunted Mirror, 1703
Hauser, Elizabeth J., ed., 6429
Haven. Samuel F., 6447
Havighurst, Robert J., 4589, 5146, 5205
Havighurst, Walter, 3975, 4979
Haviland, Henry Field, 3610
Having Wonderful Time, 2327
Hawaii, 2688, 3449, 4218, 4220, 4470
fiction, 2003-4
Hawes, G. R., 5197
Hawgood, John A., 4478
Hawkes, Herbert E., 5178
Hawley, Amos H, 4393
Haworth, Paul Leland, 3432
Hawthorne, Nathaniel, 333-59, 2290.
2406
about, 21, 280, 360-64, 381, 470,
487, 538, 2368, 2385, 2397, 2420,
2456, 2476, 2479, 2503, 2545
Hawthorne, Sophia (Peabody), 349-50
Hay, Clarence L., 944
Hay, John, 94i~44> 3395, 3426
ed., 421
about, 689, 1 126, 3426
Hay-Pauncefote Treaty, 3559
Hayakawa, S. I., 378
Haycraft, Howard, 2436
ed., 2435, 2454-55
Hayes, Carlton J. H., 3572
Hayes, E. C, 4540
Hayes, Rutherford B., about, 3418-19
Haymarket Riot, 3425
Hayne, Paul H.
ed., 616
about, 614
Flayner, Norman S., 4590
Haynes, Benjamin R., 6017
Haynes, Frederick Emory, 3433, 6427
Haynes, George H, 6158
Haynes, Williams, 4735
Hays, Arthur Garfield, 6127, 6265, 6322
Hays, William Jacob, about, 5806
Haystead, Ladd, 4594, 5843
Hayward, Arthur H., 5786
Haywood, William Dudley ("Big
Bill"), about, 6045
Hazard, J. N., 3562
Hazard, Lucy Lockwood, 2437
A Hazard of New Fortunes, 973-76
Hazel Kir\e, 2337
Hazelton, George C, 2313
Hazlitt, Henry, 824
He and She, 2337
He Hanged Them High, 2656
He Sent Forth a Raven, 1 704
He Went Away for a While, 2749
Head o' W -Hollow, 2167
Heady, Ferrel, 63 11
Health
education, 4863
insurance, 4635, 4808, 4882, 4885-90
resorts, etc., 2278
services, 4805, 4814, 4864, 4866,
4868, 4870-71, 4874, 4876, 4878,
4880-81,4885
hist., 4875, 4877
pediatric, 4841
rural, 4869-70, 4874
Mass., 4879
Heard, Alexander, 6376, 6378
Hearn, Lafcadio, 748, 945-55
about, 953, 955, 2481
Hearst, William Randolph, 2884
about, 2848, 2884
The Heart Is a Lonely Hunter, 2024
The Heart of Happy Hollow, 860
Heart of Man, 2546
The Heart of Maryland, 2315
The Heathen, 1052
The Heathen Chinee, 933
Heathen Days, 1 604
Heavens and Earth, 1224
Heaven's My Destination, 1866
Heavy machinery, 4140
Hebert, Marcel, about, 5325
Hechler, Kenneth W., 3456
Hecht, Ben, 2327, 2332
Heck, Arch O., 5207
Heck, Harold J., 5946
Heckscher, August, 5855
Hedge, Frederic Henry, about, 5263
Hedges, James Blaine, 3074
Hedin, Naboth, 4483
Hedrick, Ulysses P., 5824
The Heel of Elohim, 2527
Heely, Allan V., 5155
Heerwagen, Arnold, 2966
HefTelfinger, W. W. ("Pudge"), 5038
Heffen, Thomas, 2335
HefTner, Richard D., 3079
Hegel, Georg W. F., about, 3768, 5305-
6, 5326
Heidbreder, Edna, 5389
Heilman, Robert B., 2378
Heilner, Van Campen, 5075
Heindel, Richard Heathcote, 3777
Heinzen, Karl, about, 4481
Heiser, M. F., 2401
Heizer, Robert F., ed., 3002
Heldt, Henning, 6207
Helen of Troy, 18 14
Heliodora, 1320
Hellbox, 2075
Heller (Robert) and Associates, 4671
Heilman, George S., ed., 392-93
Heilman, Lillian, 1988-91, 2327, 2333-
36
Helm, MacKinley, 5767
Helms, Elva Allen, 6338
Helzner, Manuel, 5898
Hemingway, Ernest, 1 494-1 500, 2406
about, 821, 1501-5, 2371-72, 2376,
2406, 2427-28, 2508-9, 2537, 2542
Hemmen i den Nya Verlden, 4355
Hemming, Doris, tr., 4506
Hemming, Henry H., tr., 4506
Hendel, C. W., Jr., 5252
Henderson, Algo D., 5196
Henderson, Archibald, ed., 145
INDEX
/ "31
Henderson, Daniel M., 3434
Henderson, George F., 3697
Henderson, Ky., guidebook, 3858
Hendrick, Burton J., 3251, 3382-84,
3434,3716
Hennessey, Joseph, comp., 491 1
The Henrietta, i^yj
Henry, Andrew, about, 4175
Henry, Caleb Sprague, about, 5263
Henry, John, about, 5506, 5517
Henry, Joseph, about, 4721, 4724, 4752,
4775
Henry, Merton G., 3661
Henry, Nelson B., ed., 5150
Henry, O., pseud. See Porter, William
Sydney
Henry, Patrick,, about, 3263
Henry, Ralph Chester, 3951
Henry, Robert Selph, 3385, 3689, 3698,
5926
Henry, Stuart C, 5480
Henry of "Navarre, 2281
Herald (Paris), about, 2872
Heraldic eagle, 2958
Heralds of American Literature, 2465
Herberg, Will, 5447, 5488
Herbert, F. Hugh, 2335
Herbert, Henry William, 5076-80
about, 5076-77, 5080
Herbert, Victor, about, 5605, 5681
Here Is New York., 1859
Here Lies, 165 1
Hereditary organizations, 3644, 4574
Here's O'Hara, 2074
Hergesheimer, Joseph, 1506-11
Hering, Doris, ed., 4971
The Heritage of Hatcher Ide, 1802
Herlihy, Elizabeth M., ed., 4036
Hermaios, 21 01
The Hermit Place, 2130
Heme, James A., 2304, 2337
Heroes, legendary. See Folk heroes
Heroism, 285
Herr, John K., 3659
Herrick, Francis Hobart, 2958
about, 4743
Herrick, Robert, 956-58
about, 2419, 2464
Herrick, Virgil E., 5142
Herring, Edward Pendleton, 6357
Herring, James M., 4707
Herron, Ima Honaker, 2438
Hersey, John Richard, 1992-94
Herskovits, Melville J., 4446
Hertzler, Arthur E., 4825
about, 4825
Hervey, John, 5055
Herzberg, Joseph G., 2903
Herzog, George, ed., 5566, 5576
Hesperides, 1821
Hesperothen, 4382
Hesseltine, William B., 3053, 3435,
3785,4071
Hettinger, Herman S., 5647
Hewitt, Abram S., about 3443
Heyer, William, drawings, 5940
Heyward, Dorothy, 2332
Heyward, Du Bose, 1168, 1512-13,
2332, 5678
about, 1 51 4
Hiawatha, The Song of, 432
Hibbard, Benjamin Horace, 581 1
Hibben, Paxton, 3457, 5476
Hickerson, Harold, 2332
Hicks, Granville, 2439
Hicks, John D., 3084, 3436, 5831, 6358
Hicks, Wilson, 2908
The Hidden Public, 6463
Hidy, M. E., 5913
Hidy, Ralph W., 5913, 5980
Higby, Chester Penn, ed., 2293
Higginson, Francis, 3102
Higginson, Henry Lee, about, 5649
Higginson, Thomas Wentworth, 2280,
4036
ed., 839-40
High Border Country, 3951
High Calling, 1789
High Falcon, 11 54
High Passage, 1410
The High Place, 1262
High Plains, 4159, 4164
High schools. See Secondary education
High Tor, 1174, 2333, 2336
Higham, John, 4422
Highet, Gilbert, 5218
Highwater Mark,, 937
Highwaymen, Colonial, 4227
Highways, 3786, 3788, 4085, 5934
La., 4100
Wyo., 391 1
Hiking, 5064
Hildeburn, Charles R., 4049
Hildreth, G. H., 5205
Hildreth, Richard, about, 3058
Hill, Charles E., 3522
Hill, Clyde M., ed., 5236
Hill, Frank Ernest, 5939
Hill, Helen, 3254
Hill, James J., about, 5880, 5882
Hill, Lawrence F., 3582
Hill, Ralph Nading, 4010
Hill, W. H., 5335
Hilliard, William, about, 6446
Hillman, Arthur, 4575
Hillman, Sidney, about, 6049, 6394
The Hills Beyond, 1 892
The Hills Give Promise, 1516
Hillsboro, 111., guidebook, 3878
Hillstrom, Joseph, about, 2164
Hillway, Tyrus, ed., 499
Hillyer, Katharine, 5059
Hillyer, Robert, 151 5-17
Hilsman, Roger, 3603
Hindle, Brooke, 4718
Hindus, Milton, ed., 656
Hinkel, Lydia I., cd., 5572
Hinsdale, Burke A., 5125
Hinshaw, David, 3485, 5479
Hinshaw, Kenneth, 5841
Hippolytus, 2313
Hipsher, Edward Ellsworth, 5656
The Hired Man on Horseback., 1686
Hiroshima, 1992
Hirschfeld, Charles, 3058
His Family, 1658
His Human Majesty, 1249
Hiscock, Ira V., 4866
Hislop, Codman, 4011
Hiss, Alger, about, 61 14, 6229
Historic houses, 5702, 5713, 5721-22,
5794
guidebook, 3786
Charleston, S.C., 4093
Conn., 3805, 4041
Mount Vernon, Va., 3271
Ohio, 41 19
Philadelphia, 4059
Washington, D.C., 4063
Historical Atlas of the United States,
2972
Historical Records Survey. District of
Columbia, 5606
Historical research methods, 3054, 3061
Historical societies, 3052
Historical themes in literature
annals, journals, etc., 1-6, 12-16,
36-39. 43-44. 49. 53-58, 66-71,
90-91
drama, 198, 200, 206-8, 365, 1477,
1491, 1520, 2048
essays, 11 03-4, 1267, 1873
fiction, 164, 201-4, 226-29, 239, 241,
245-60, 268-69, 277-79, 3°7> 311-
12, 405-13, 511, 514-16, 546-50,
552-53. 555. 579-82, 665, 721,
723-24, 745, 762-67, 821, 825-
29, 835, 1 105, 1222-24, 1239-41,
1325-28, 1331-32, 1353-56, 1379.
1382, 1388-89, 1403, 1406, 1420,
1424, 1437-39, 1441-44. 1468-69,
1488-90, 1506, 1508, 1511, 1541-
42, 1544, 1578, 1618-19, 1644,
1646, 1656, 1691, 1693-96, 1701,
1707-12, 1727, 1730, 1786, 1842,
1916-18, 1920, 1959-62, 1973-
80, 2005-6, 2194, 2199, 2201, 2799
hist. & crit., 2458
poetry, i34~39> 323. 368-69, 427-
29, 432-34, 486, 488, 614, 616-17,
623, 662, 664, 666, 1069, 1222,
1224, 1585, 1644-45, 1824-25,
2200
short stories, 725, 1 100-2, 1222, 1224,
1379. 1389. 1510
Historiography, 3044-69, 3730
bibl., 3064, 3066-67, 3074
local hist., 3061
sources, 3083
theories, methods, etc., 3054-55,
3057, 3062, 3065, 3075, 3083,
3174, 3407
World War II, 3726
Southern States, 3057
History, general American, 2601, 3044-
3500b, 3740, 3746, 3754, 3779.
3784
bibl., 3083
chronology, 3072, 3076-77, 3083.
.3465
dictionaries, 3071-72
humor, caricatures, etc., 5803
in music, bibl., 5613
philosophy, 693-98, 3628, 3632,
3735.5269,5313
pictorial works, 3081-82, 5801, 5804
bibl., 5757. 5775. 5807
popular works, 1222
sources, 3068, 3079, 3100, 3106-36,
3143. 3I5Ii 3183-84. 3195. 3201-
19,3617
1 132 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
History, general American — Continued
study & teaching, 3050, 3055, 3059,
3083
History, local, 2943, 3061, 3781-4222
See also History under names of
places and regions, e.g., Califor-
nia— hist.
History and art, 5801-7
See also History, general American —
pictorial works
History of Plymouth Plantation, 2-6,
3204
Hit the Line Hard, 1687
Hitchcock, Henry Russell, 5710-n
ed., 5718
The Hive of "The Bee-Hunter," 613
Hoagland, H. E., 6033
Hobart, John Henry, Bp., about, 5457
Hobbs, Edward H., 6144
Hobbs, William Herbert, 2979
Hobomo\, a Tale of Early Times, 241
Hobson, Wilder, 5644
Hockett, Homer C, 3054
Hocking, William Ernest, 5252, 5310-
16
about, 5310
Hodder, Jessie S., Mrs., about, 4649
Hodge, Frederick W., ed., 2982, 3217
Hodges, Henry G., 6210
Hoebel, Edward Adamson, 3014
Hoeltje, Hubert H., 5265
Hoernle, R. F. A., 5252
Hoffman, Charles Fenno, 365-67, 550,
2295
Hoffman, Daniel G., 5516
Hoffman, Edward Fenno, ed., 365
Hoffman, Frederick John, 2914, 2360,
2440
ed., 1399,2326,2330
Hoffman, Harold M., 6298
Hoffman, M. J., 5442
Hofstadter, A., 5291
Hofstadter, Richard, 3099, 3458, 3755,
5169, 5181
Hogan, William Ransom, 4193
Hohman, Elmo Paul, 5871
/ Holbrook, Stewart H, 4022, 4028, 4394
Holcombe, Arthur N., 6076, 6336
Holden, Harold, ed., 1481
Holden, Paul E., 6018
Holder, Charles Frederick, 4724, 5081-
84
Holding companies, 6008, 6013
Holiday, a Comedy in Three Acts, 1200,
2348
Holism in economics, 5888
Holland, Elizabeth Luna (Chapin), 850
Holland, Josiah Gilbert, 850
Holland, Maurice, 4785
Holland. See Netherlands
Holley, Irving B., 371 1
Holliman, Jennie, 4992
Hollingshead, August de B., 4564
Hollinshead, Byron S., 5170
The Hollow Men, 1359
Holloway, Emory, 871
ed., 627, 639
Hollywood, Calif., 2752, 4204, 4948
fiction, 1425, 1833, 1842, 2025, 2028,
2069, 2074, 2154
Holm, John Cecil, 2333
Holmer, N. M., 2364
Holmes, G. F., about, 4536
Holmes, John, about, 2280
Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Sr., 368-78,
2290
about, 375, 377, 449, 2277, 2374,
2513,2693
bibl., 377
Holmes, Oliver Wendell, Jr., 2607,
6222, 6242, 6277
about, 2542, 2607, 4545, 5264, 6241-
42, 6266
Holmes, Thomas J., ed., 48
Holmes, William H, 2991
Hoist, Hermann Eduard von, about,
3058
Holt, E. B., 5260, 5335
Holt, Henry, 689
Holt (Henry) and Co., about, 6445
Holt, Rackham, 2690, 5825
Holt, W. Stull, 3739
ed., 3044
about, 3058
Holy Land, travel and travelers, 769-71
Homage to Sextus Propertius, 1666
Homan, P. T., 4540
Home by the River, 1726, 5087
Home Country, 2745
Home Fires in France, 1413
Home manufactures, 5919
Home of the Brave, 2334
The Home Place, 2052
Home rule, Chicago, 6208, 6380
Homer, Winslow, about, 5765
Homestead Act (1862), 5811
Homeward to America, 1949
Hone, Philip, 2691-92
Honest John Vane, 277
Honey in the Horn, 1315
Honey out of the Rock., 2413
Honeywell, Roy J., 5122
An Honorable Titan, 2869
Hook, Sidney, 3065, 5254, 5289, 5291-
92
ed., 5257-58, 5291
about, 5259
Hooker, Joseph, about, 2614
Hooker, Nancy Harvison, 3545
Hooker, Thomas, 32-35
about, 6068
Hoole, William S., 379
Hooper, Claude E., 4700
Hooper, Johnson Jones, 379-80
about, 379
Hooper, Osman Castle, 2857
A Hoosier Holiday, 1340
The Hoosier Schoolmaster, 868-71
Hoover, Calvin B., 5891, 5947
Hoover, Herbert Clark, 3485
about, 3485-87
Hoover, Margorie Leonard, 6135
Hoover, Theodore Jesse, 4800
Hoover Commission. See Commission
on Organization of the Executive
Branch of the Government
Hope of Heaven, 2074
Hopkins, Charles Howard, 5489-90
Hopkins, Frank E., ed., 1 1
Hopkins, Harry Lloyd, about, 1749,
3499
Hopkins, James F., ed., 3344
Hopkins, Johns, about 4845
Hopkins, Louis B., 5178
Hopkins, Mark, about, 5222
Hopkins, Samuel, about, 5428
Hopkins, Vivian C, 303
The Hopkins Review, 2442
Hopkinson, Francis, 146-48
about, 144, 146, 2465
Hopper, Ida T., comp., 3292
Horace, 2281
Horace Mann-Lincoln Institute.
School of Experimentation, 5136
Horgan, Paul, 3782, 4197
Horine, Emmet Field, ed., 2667
Horizon, 2337
Horn, Stanley F., 3386, 5864
Horn, Ted, about, 5001
Horn, Tom, about, 2758
Hornberger, Theodore, 2412, 4719
ed., 2323
Home, A. R., 2266
Horner, Harlan H., 4843
The Horse and Buggy Doctor, 4825
Horse-racing, 5054-57
dictionary, 2259
Ky., 5057
Horse-Shoe Robinson, 409-11, 2347
Horse-Shoe Trail, Pa., 3820
Horsemanship, 5078
Horses, 2984, 5058, 5078, 5867
in art, 5770
Horticulture, 2790, 5824
Horton, John Theodore, 6224
Horton, Rod W., 2441
Horton, Walter M., about, 5433
Horwill, Herbert W., 2237
Hosmer, James K., ed., 91, 3219
Hospitals, 4310, 4808-9, 4839, 4841,
4862, 4870, 4885
administration, 4847, 4849
finance, 4847-49
services, 4847-49
New York (City), 4851, 4857
New York (State), 4846
See also Psychiatric hospitals
Hot-Foot Hannibal, 757
The Hot Iron, 1475
Hotel Universe, 1199
Hotels, taverns, etc., 4590
Colonial period, 4227, 4251
furniture, equipment, etc., 5526
Va., 4086
Yosemite, 42 11
Houghton, Norris, 4901, 4920
The Hour, 2415
Housatonic River and valley, 4000
The House behind the Cedars, J56
House decoration, 5726, 5729-30, 5732,
5796
A House Divided, 1256
The House of Beadle and Adams, 2444
The House of Breath, 1985
The House of Connelly, 1475
The House of Mirth, 1847
The House of Sun-Goes-Down, 2415
The House of the Seven Gables, 345-47
A House Too Old, 2129
Housing, 4395, 4600, 4608, 4610-12,
4617
finance, 461 1
INDEX
/ "33
Housing — Continued
Negroes, 4448
Willow Run, Mich., 4586
Houston, Sam, about, 3341
Houston, Tex., guidebook, 3921
The Hovering Fly, 1810
Hovland, C. I., 3724
How Santa Claus Came to Simpson's
Bar, 930, 937, 939
How To Tell a Story, 798-99
How To Write Short Stories, 1 554
Howard, Bronson Crocker, 2307, 2337,
2347
about, 2307, 2471
Howard, Charles P., about, 6049
Howard, Delton T., 5283
Howard, John Tasker, 5607, 5677
Howard, Joseph Kinsey, 4176, 4178,
6207
ed., 4178
Howard, Leland O., about, 4722
Howard, Leon, 449, 482, 500, 2401,
2412
ed., 2339
Howard, Sidney Coe, 1518-20, 2327,
2332>2337.2348
Howard, William Travis, 4867
Howe, Edgar W., 959-63, 2885
about, 959, 2885
Howe, Elias, about, 4786
Howe, Frederic C, 6428
about, 6428
Howe, George Frederick, 3437
Howe, Henry F., 4012
Howe, Irving, 995, 11 88, 1400
Howe, Julia Ward, 2313
about, 4040
Howe, Mark Antony De Wolfe, 2693-
98, 2922, 5648, 6241
ed., 462, 2607
about, 2698
Howe, Will D., 2391
Howe, Winifred E., 5795
Howells, Mildred, ed., 981
Howells, William Dean, 214, 857, 859,
861, 893, 961, 964-83, 2290
about, 277, 279, 706, 887, 890, 971,
977> 983, 986, 1089, 2517, 2520,
2534, 2922, 6424
Hower, Ralph M., 5958-59
Howes, Cecil, 4168
Howes, Charles G., 4168
Howgate, George W., 5376
Howison, George Holmes, 5317-18
about, 5317-18
Howitt, Mary, tr., 4356
Hoyt, Charles H., 2306, 2348
Hoyt, Charles Sherman, 5019
Hoyt, Elizabeth E., 5899
Hoyt, Harlowe R., 4902
Hoyt, Homer, 5812
Hoyt, William G., 2949
Hrdlicka, Ales, about, 4722
Hu, Shih, 5290
Hubbart, Henry Clyde, 4115
Hubbell, Alvin A., 4844
Hubbell, Jay B., 4068
ed., 408, 2340, 2424, 2442
Hubble, Edwin Powell, about, 4721
Huckleberry Finn, The Adventures of,
782-83,787-93,811
Hudgins, Bert, 2940
Hudson, Arthur Palmer, 5576
Hudson, Wilson M., ed., 5509, 5521
Hudson, Winthrop S.( 5395
ed., 88
The Hudson Review, 1664, 2558
Hudson River and valley, hist., 3972
Hudson River Bracketed, 1854
Hudson River, essays, 1002-3
Huebner, Grover G., 5948
Huegy, Harvey W., 5945
Huff, Theodore, 4953
Huffman, Laton A., about, 4151-53
Huffman, Roy E., 5858
The Huge Season, 2056
Hugh Selwyn Mauberley, 1666
about, 1670
Hughes, Adella Prentiss, 5630
Hughes, Charles Evans, 6243
about, 6254
Hughes, Glenn, 4905
Hughes, Henry Stuart, 3507
Hughes, John, about, 3257
Hughes, Langston, 567, 1521-25, 4440
about, 1 522
Hulbert, Archer Butler, 2943
Hulbert, James Root, 2239
ed., 2236
Hull, Cordell, 3546
about, 3549
Hull, John, about, 3198
Hull, William I., 3222
Hull House, Chicago, 4614
Hultgren, Thor, 5922
The Human Comedy, 2115
The Human Fantasy, 1858
Humanism, New, 1735, 2375, 2385-86,
2422, 2425, 2479, 2503, 2511,
5ii5 ,
Humanitarianism, 6071
essays, 2479
fiction, 2084
poetry, 1061, 1069, 1872, 2079
Humanities, 2375, 2422, 3739, 5100,
5ii5
A Humble Romance, 882
Humboldt River, Nev., 3985
Hume, Robert A., 688
Humidity, 5816
See also Climate
Humor, 192, 368, 456-57, 542-43, 768,
862-66, 878, 1629-34, 1651-52,
1815-20, 1859-63, 2597-98, 2642-
43, 2657, 2735-36, 2796, 2808,
3732, 3735, 4097, 4964, 4991,
4995,5506-7,5511,5513
anthologies, 2370
essays, 1214-20, 1317-18, 2469
frontier, 194-97, 379~8o, 445-48,
612-13, 941, 2501, 3353, 4097,
5508, 5542
hist. & crit., 2501
periods
Colonial, 52-53
(1764-1819), 122, 128, 130, 132
(1820-70), 192-97, 209-15,
330-32, 368, 379-81, 422-26,
445-48, 456-58, 5", 542-
46, 556-61, 612-13
Humor — Continued
periods — Continued
(1871-1914), 701-5, 768-812,
856-66, 878-80, 910-16, 922,
924-25, 941, 1 126-31, 2469
(1915-39), 1214-20, 1317-18,
1523, 1525, 1554-55, 1629-
35, 1651-52, 1802, 1815-20,
1828, 1833, 1842, 1859-63
(1940-55), 2052, 2149-55, 2202
Ark., 5542
Ga., 445-48, 556-57
Ky., 5546
Mich., 5533, 5575
Middle West, 701-5, 1126-31
Mo., 5528
Ozark Mountains, 5544-45
Southwest, New, 4 190
Tex., 5521,5527
See also Cartoons; Comic strips;
Tall tales
Humphrey, Don D., 5947
Humphrey, Edward F., 5406
Hungarians, 4360
Hungerfield, and Other Poems, 1536
Hungry Gulliver, 1896
Hunt, Gaillard, 3283, 3601
ed., 3283
Hunt, George T., 3009
Hunter, Beatrice Jones, 5929
Hunter, Dard, 6457
Hunter, Louis C, 5929
Hunter, Milton R., 4183
Hunter College Elementary School,
about, 5205
Hunting and fishing, 2665, 2794, 4990,
5065-97
essays, sketches, etc., 1724
fiction, 1466, 1500, 1681, 1954, 1957
Huntington, Archer M., about, 2941
Huntsman, What Quarry?, 1609
Hurd, C. F., 6207
Hurlbut, Jesse Lyman, 4893
Hurricanes, 2307
Hurst, Willard, 6225
Hurston, Zora Ncale, 1526-29
Hurt, Huber William, 5041
Hutchins, John G., 5930
Hutchins, Robert M., 5235, 6126
Hutchinson, Anne, about, 6229
Hutchinson, Edward P., 4395
Hutchinson, Thomas, about, 3257
Hutchinson, Thomas H., 4692
. Hutchinson, William T., 3058, 5826
ed., 3058
I lutchison, Bruce, 4013
Hutchison, John A., 5487
ed., 5496
Huth, Hans, 5884
Hutson, Charles W., ed., 3292
Hutter, Elizabeth L., ed., 3292
Hutton, David Graham, 41 16, 4234
Hutton, Joseph, 2347
Huxley, Thomas Henry, about, 2481
Hyde, Arthur Mastick, 3487
Hyde, George E., 3003
Hydroelectric power projects, 4214
Hydrographic Office, about, 4771
Hydrography, 4721
Hydrotherapy, 4840
Hyer, R. V., 6195
1 134 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Hyman, Harold Melvin, 3387-88
Hyman, Stanley Edgar, 2443
Hymen, 1320
Hymn to the Rising Sun, 1475
Hymns, 662, 5633
See also Church music; Religious
folksongs
Hyneman, Charles S., 3535, 6172
Hyslop, Francis E., ed. & tr., 520
Hyslop, Lois, ed. & tr., 520
I
ITO, about, 5953
I.W.W., about 6045, 6360
/ Am a Camera, 2336
/ Am a Man, 2645
I Am movement, 5439
/ Came out of the Eighteenth Century,
2783
/ Cover the Waterfront, 2747
I De Dage, 1721
/ Hate Thursday, 1409
/ Remember, 6450
/ Remember Mamma, 2334
/; Six Nonleclures, 13 12
/ Thought of Daisy, 2535
/ Wonder Why?, 4989
Ibsen, Henrik, about, 896-97
Icebound, 2337
The Iceman Cometh, 1647-48, 2335
Ichihashi, Yamato, 4465
Ickes, Harold L., 3498
Ida, 1 77 1
Idaho, 3961
guidebooks, 3935-36
fiction, 1420-22
hist., 3959, 3961,4147
natural resources, 4212
Idealism, 3732, 3769, 5252, 5259, 5262,
5305. 5317.5334. 5354-55
Ideas of Order, 1784
The Ides of March, 1869
Idiot's Delight, 1751, 2333
The Idols of the Cave, 2094
The Idyl of Red Gulch, 930
lie, 1648, 2332
lies, George, 4786
Ilg, Frances L., 5149
/// Fares the Land, 5846
Illegitimate Sonnets, 1626
Illinois, 3948, 4126-36
architecture, 5719
descr., 3988
econ. statistics, 4132
fiction, 867, 876-77, 1978, 2029,
2033
frontier life, 4097-98
Germans, 4478
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3875-81
hist., 2757, 3663, 3875, 3986, 411 1,
4115,4126-33
libraries, 6473
Norwegians, 4487
personal narratives, 2251
poetry, 1825
politics, 6383
rural communities, 4109
travel & travelers, 4322
Illinois. Centennial Commission, 4126-
32
Illinois Central Railroad, about, 4320,
5927
Illinois High School Association, about,
5000
Illinois River and valley
hist., 3986
travel & travelers, 4322
Illusions, 292
The Illustrated Man, 1935
Illustration of books, 5782
Illustrators, 5806
I'm a Stranger Here Myself, 1630
I'm Sure We've Met Before, 2746
Image and Idea, 2498
Images or Shadows of Divine Things,
21
Imagism, 1319, 1432, 1583-84, 1813,
1872, 2403
Immigrants. See Foreign population
Immigrant's Return, 2777, 4494
Immigration, 3136, 3139, 4147, 4404-
17,4424,4551,4617
Chinese, 3437, 4464
English, 4488
Filipinos, 4470
Japanese, 4465
Jews, 4460
Mexicans, 4470-72
Norwegians, 4484-85
Orientals, 4468
policy, 4418-25, 6122
Puerto Ricans, 4470
Scotch, 4488-4491
Welsh, 4488
The Immortal Storm, 2377
Immortal Wife, 2818
Immunology, 4722
Impeachment, Presidential (1868),
3362,3412
Imperial City, 1688
Imperialism, 1069, 31 10, 3428
Implements, utensils, etc., 5596, 5598,
5787-88
The Importance and Means of a Na-
tional Literature, 230
Imports, 5947
Impressionism, 896-97
In a Farther Country, 1987
In a yellow Wood, 2182
In Abraham's Bosom, 1473, 1475
In Defense of Reason, 2544
In Ghostly Japan, 951-52
In Mizzoura, 2347
In My Father's House, 1788
In Old Plantation Days, 860
In Ole Virginia, 1 100-2
In Reckless Ecstasy, 173 1
In Search of Heresy, 2373
In Spite of All, 2308
In Such a Night, 2413
In the American Grain, 1873
In the American Jungle, 1445
In the Days of Youth, 1614
In the Day's Work., 6459
In the Midst of Life, 735-37, 739
In the Money, 1874-75, t882
In the Tennessee Mountains, 1085-86
In the Zone, 1648
In This Our Life, 1462
In Tragic Life, 1 423
In War Time, 666
In What Hour, 2098
Income, 4395, 4448, 5899
national, 5893
tax, 5970
Incredible Era, 3475
Indentured servants, 6056
Independence Hall, Philadelphia, 4059
Independent Christian Society, about,
5423
Independent Treasury Act (1846), 3351
Index Medicus, 4819
The Index of American Design, 5594
India
relations with, 3503
World War II, 3726
Indian agency, Red Cloud, Nebr., 3003
Indian agents, 3023, 3035
Indian place names, 2364
The Indian Princess, 66, 199, 2347
Indian Reorganization Act (1934), 3039
Indian Summer, 971
Indian themes in opera, 5681
Indiana, 3948, 4123-25
architecture, 5719
fiction, 867, 1802, 1808, 2005-6,
2210-12
folksongs & ballads, 5571
frontier life, 4097-98
guidebook, 3874
hist., 3995, 4111,4115, 4123-25
sources, 4125
poetry, 1 1 26
rural communities, 4109
travel & travelers, 1340
writers & writings, 4124
Indiana State Teachers' Association.
Historical Section, 4125
Indiana University. Institute for Sex
Research, 4566
Indianapolis Journal, 1 126
Indianapolis Speedway Race, 5003-4
Indians, American, 66-71, 319, 2663,
2802, 2982-3043, 4038, 4099,
4160, 4169, 4171, 4179, 4188,
4308, 4428
agriculture, 5821, 5824
and white civilization. See White
civilization — and the American
Indians
art. See Art — Indians
captives of, 53-55, 3032, 4233
commerce, 3180
culture, 2319, 2983, 2986, 2988-89,
2998, 3002, 3041-42, 3348, 4054,
4197
econ. condit., 3039-40, 3043
education, 2982, 3023, 3040
folklore, 3021, 5518, 5523, 5526
govt, relations, 2986, 3023, 3025-29,
3034-35. 3038-39. 3043. 3663
in art, 5770, 5802, 5806
language, 85, 2982, 2987, 2989, 3012,
4198, 4308
legends & tales, 3000, 3005, 3021,
4273,5518,5533
missions, 62, 3022, 3030, 3040, 4233,
5451
poetry, 11 96
religion, 3019-20, 3040
INDEX
/ "35
Indian, American — Continued
reservations, 1613, 2986, 2989, 3040,
3043,4154
rites & ceremonies, 3015
soc. life & cust., 66, 68, 70, 85, 2722-
25, 2753, 2982, 2989, 2998, 3002,
3006, 3025, 3040, 3042-43, 4172,
4236, 4248-50, 4307
tribes & tribal groups, 2982, 2985-
86, 2989, 2998-3014, 3021, 3023,
3025-27, 3039-41, 4148, 4213
wars & warfare, 2645, 2710-11, 3307,
3644a, 3660, 4151, 4153, 4179.
5505
See also names of tribes, e.g., Chey-
enne Indians
Indians, American, in literature
annals, journals, etc., 1-6, 53-55
drama, 198-99, 4926
editorials, sketches, etc., 62, 149,
1065
fiction, 114, 164, 201-4, 239, 241,
251-52, 258-60, 546, 549, 985,
1196, 1551-52, 1644, 1646, 1696,
1701, 1710, 1786, i960, 1975, 3000
hist. & crit., 3031-32
poetry, 323, 427, 432, 1644-45
short stories, 1553, 3000
The Indifferent Children, 1909
The Indigo Bunting, 1610
Indiscretions, 1666
Individualism, 3732-33, 6065, 6071,
6101
Industrial arbitration, 6058, 6299
Industrial arts. See Arts and crafts;
Decorative arts
Industrial chemistry, hist., 4793
Industrial education, 5210-11
See also Workers' education
Industrial management, 4798, 6003,
6010, 6018, 6038
Industrial medicine, 4873, 4887
Industrial relations, 4552, 5894, 6037-
38, 6042, 6053, 6055
Industrial Relations Research Associa-
tion, 4635
Industrial research, 4720, 4777, 4785
Industrial revolution, 6070
Industrial themes in literature
essays, 1445
fiction, 726, 728-31, 762, 887, 941,
956-58, 973-78, 1053- 1055. "07.
1159, 1178, 1183, 1507, 1754-56,
1758
philosophical writings, 695-98
poetry, 1727, 1731
Industrial trusts, 3 121
Industrial Workers of the World, about,
6045, 6360
Industrialization, 3073, 3440, 4586,
5695
opposition to, 1 809
Industry, 2824, 2826, 3969, 4095, 4320,
4345, 5901-6, 6030
agricultural, 5847
govt, regulation, 5885, 6006
hist., 4531, 5878, 5904, 5906
in art, 5762, 5772, 5801
labor, 4408, 4488
museums, 3049, 4716
organization, 6004
Industry — Continued
soc. aspects, 5899
Ariz., 4199
Fernandina, Fla., 3844
111., 4131
Mitchell, S. Dak., 3899
N.C., 4090
N. Dak., 4165
Pacific Northwest, 4212, 4214
Southern States, 4079, 4083-84
Tex., 4194
Tulsa, Okla., 41 71
W.Va., 4089
Industry and state, 5885, 6006
Inflation (finance), 5889
Information service, overseas, 3607
Inge, William, 1995-98, 2335-36
An Ingenue of the Sierras, 937
Ingersoll, Jared, about, 3257
Ingersoll, Robert G., about, 5476
Inglis, Ruth A., 4947
The Injustice Collectors, 1910
The Inmost Leaf, 2449
Inner Landscape, 2123
Inness, George, about, 5766
The Innocent Eve, 1642
The Innocents Abroad, 769-71
Inns. See Hotels, taverns, etc.
Inoculation (smallpox), 4826
Inquiries and Opinions, 2468
Inscription for the Entrance into a
Wood, 217-19
The Inside of the Cup, 762
Installment plan, 5963
Instinct vs Reason — a Black, Cat, 538
Institute for Education by Radio and
Television, about, 5230
Institute for Religious and Social Stud-
ies, Jewish Theological Seminary
of America, 5491
Instrumentalism, 5271, 5275, 5290,
5291, 5295
Insular possessions. See Overseas pos-
sessions
Insurance, 5990, 5992
Intellect, 285
Intellectual America, 2399
Intellectual freedom, 5181, 5190
Intellectual life, 695-98, 6443
bibl., 3729
Colonial, 2549
colleges & universities, 5190, 5213
foreign influence, 3737, 374°, 3758,
3768-80, 4536
hist., 2445, 2459, 2491, 2601, 3073,
3085-98, 3150, 3236, 3297, 3303,
3313, 3352, 3728-80, 4518, 4520,
5104, 5261, 6443, 6446
refugees, 4414
See also Culture; also subdivisions
Intellectual life and History under
names of places and regions, e.g.,
New England — intellectual life;
Pennsylvania — hist.
Intelligence in the Modern World, 5287
Intelligence service, 3603
The Intent of the Critic, 2512
Inter-American commercial arbitration,
about, 6299
International City Managers' Associa-
tion, 6213
An International Episode, 1007
International law, 3526, 3530, 6277
International News Service, about, 2860
International organizations, 3548, 3631,
5946
International Printing Pressmen and As-
sistants' Union, about, 6455
International relations. See Foreign re-
lations
International themes in literature
fiction, 971-72, 986-91, 996-1001,
1004, 1007, 1014, 1242-47, 1249,
1251, 1754, 1758, 1839, 2187
poetry, 1585
short stories, 986, 1004, ion, 1242,
1248, 1250
speeches, addresses, etc., 1585
International Trade Organization (pro-
posed), 5953
International Typographical Union,
about, 6455
The Interpretation of Dreams, 2407
Interstate Commerce Commission,
about, 2678, 5942
Interstate compacts, 6206
Into the Main Stream, 4443
Into the Valley, 1 993
Intonation (language), 2275
Intruder in the Dust, 1392
Inventions, 4780-92
hist., 4783, 4787, 4792
protection & management, 4780-81
Inventors, 4783, 4785-87, 4792
Investments, 3639, 3641, 5993-94
in foreign countries, 5989, 6002
Investments, British, in U.S., 5980
Invisible Empire, 3386
Invisible Man, 1967
Involuntary Witness, 2376
Iowa, 2644, 3948, 4144
Fox Indians, 3041
guidebooks, 3889-94
hist., 3663, 4144
Norwegians, 4487
politics, 6427
rural communities, 4109
Iowa in literature
fiction, 1796, 1 798-1 800, 1830, 1969,
2161
personal narrative, 1543
poetry, 1968
short stories, 1796-97. 1801
Iowa Interiors, 1 797
Iphigenia, 2101
Iran, relations with, 3513
Irene, 526
Iris, Fedcrico Scharmel, 1530-31
Irish, 4435, 4498
in Boston, 4410
in Brooklyn, 4046
in New England, 4413
Irish dialect in literature, 862
Iron, 4061, 4113, 4141-42, 5909, 5918
The Iron Chain, 2057
The Iron Heel, 1055
The Iron Pastoral, 2061
Ironwork, 5790
The Irony of Joy, 2350
1 136 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Iroquois Indians
hist., 3008, 3230, 4236
language, 2364
wars, 3009
Irradiations, Sand and Spray, 1433
Irrigation, 4214, 4383, 5858
Irvine, Rosalind, 5762
Irving, Washington, 381, 2290, 2295,
2337
ed., 219
about, 405, 511, 674, 1136, 2277,
2397. 2532, 2534
Irving, William, 511
Irwin, Mary, ed., 5161
Irwin, Ray W., 3686
Irwin, Robert B., 4636
Irwin, William H., 4963
Is 5,1313.
7/ He Living or Is He Dead?, 798-99
Is It Going to Rain?, 741
Is Sex Necessary? , 1816
Isaacs, Edith (Rich), 4921, 4968
ed., 4910
Isaacs, Raphael, 5426
about, 5426
Isely, Jeter A., 3668
Island in the Atlantic, 1449
The Island of Barrataria, 23 1 2
The Island of the Innocent, 1420
The Island Within, 1574
Isolationism, 3534, 3537, 3613
Israel, fiction, 1979
Israfel, 526, 11 67
It Beats Wording, 4991
It Can't Happen Here, 1566
It Pays to Advertise, 2348
Italian-American literature, 4497
The Italian Bride, 2303
The Italian Notebook?, 350
Italians, 4046, 4435, 4494, 4496-97,
4598
Italy
fiction, 333, 971-72, 1000, 1496,
1499, 1940-41, 2087
relations with, 3507
travel & travelers, 333, 887, 964, 971-
72,1149
It's an Old Wild West Custom, 5526
Iverson, William J., 5227
Ives, Burl, 5506
comp., 5553
about, 5553
Ives, Charles, about, 5682
Ives, James Merritt. See Currier & Ives
Ives, Sumner, 2261
The Ivory Tower, 1004, 1008
Ivy, Andrew C, 4818
I
Jablonski, Edward, 5678
Jack, P. M., 2406
Jack Cade, 2347
Jack tales, 5529, 5546
Jackson, Andrew, about, 2772, 2820,
3126, 3315-18. 3320, 3352, 4533,
6177, 6258, 6359
Jackson, C. D., 3615
Jackson, C. S., about, 2863
Jackson, Clarence S., 5777
Jackson, George Pullen, 5555, 5577
ed., 5554
Jackson, Harry P., 6017
Jackson, Helen Maria (Fiske) Hunt,
984-85
Jackson, Joseph Henry, 1780, 3782
Jackson, Percival E., 6265
Jackson, Rachel, fiction, 2820
Jackson, Thomas Jonathan ("Stone-
wall"), about, 245, 1809, 3697
Jackson, William, 6087
Jackson, William H., 5777
about, 5777
Jacksonian democracy, 3139, 3318-19,
3322,3351-52,6177,6351
See also Democracy
Jacob, Philip E., 3649, 6124
Jacobs, Helen Hull, 5047
about, 5047
Jacobs, James Ripley, 3660
Jacobs, Lewis, 4944
Jacobs, Philip P., 4868
Jacobs, Robert D., ed., 2442
Jacob's Ladder, 1684
Jaffe, Bernard, 4721-22
James, Alice, 5319
about, 2476, 5319
James, Bartlett Burleigh, ed., 3208
James, Edwin, about, 4734
James, Frank Cyril, 5985
James, Henry (1811-1882), 2476, 5319
about, 2529, 5319-20
James, Henry (1843-1916), 986-1015,
1 152, 2290, 5319
ed., 5328
about, 817, 1015-22, 1149, 2376,
2385, 2405, 2476, 2498, 2539,
2616, 5319
bibl., 5328
James, Henry (1879-1947), 5335
ed., 5330
James, James Alton, ed., 3239
James, Macgill, 5758
James, Marquis, 3316-18, 3341, 5992
James, Preston E., ed., 2938
James, Reese D., 5659
James, Will, 2699-2700
about, 2700
James, William, 5123, 5319, 5321-33,
5362, 5431
ed., 5319
about, 2476, 3733, 3761, 5116, 5222,
5254, 5264, 5319, 5321, 5333-35.
5354. 5369, 5389
James, Sir William M., 3678
James family, 2476, 5319
James River, Va., hist., 3977
James Shore's Daughter, 1223
Jameson, John Franklin, 3045, 3057,
3064,3208
ed., 3201, 3210-1 1, 3252
about, 2974
Jameson, William J., 6331
Jamestown, Va., poetry, 1222
Jandy, Edward C, 4539
Jane, Lionel Cecil, ed., 3163
Jane, 121 2
Jane Talbot, 117
Janeway, Eliot, 5879
Janis, Harriet (Grossman), 5641
Janis, Sidney, 5696
Janowsky, Oscar I., ed., 4457
Japan
economic relations with, 3638
in literature, 945, 951-53, 955
relations with, 3483, 3510, 3538,
3545. 3590-91. 3594. 3619. 378o
Japanese, 2811-12, 4204, 4428, 4465-
66, 4468-69, 6120
Jarratt, Devereux, about, 5463
Jarrell, Randall, 1999-2002, 2363
about, 2497
Java Head, 1508
Jay, John, 6075
about, 3304, 3519
Jay, John C., 5062
Jay's Treaty, 3304
Jazz music, 5641-46
analysis, 5645
bibl., 5641
discography, 5641-42
influence on art, 5691
See also Popular music and songs
Jean Huguenot, 1222
Jean-ah Poquelin, 748
Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair
(song), 5677
Jeffers, Edmund V., 5670
Jeffers, Robinson, 1532-36, 2335
about, 2406, 2527
Jefferson, Joseph, 4934
about, 2616, 4934
Jefferson, Thomas, 149-53, 2291, 2296,
2337.3292-94.5418,6073
about, 46, 2775, 2996, 3281, 3294-
97, 4533. 4753. 5122, 5291. 54o8,
5418, 6170, 6359, 6460, 6466,
6469
drama, 1477
sculpture, 5737
Jeffersonian democracy, 6071, 6176
See also Democracy
Jeffords, Thomas J., about, 3035
Jehovah's Witnesses, about, 5404, 5439
Jenkins, William Sumner, 3389
Jennie Gerhardt, 1335
Jennifer Lorn, 1904
Jensen, Merrill, 3253, 3302
ed., 3785
Jersey City, politics, 6388
Jessop, G., 2301
Jessup, Philip C, 3459
Jesuits, 3075, 3158, 3171, 5447
Jeuck, John E., 5956
The Jewel Merchants, 1 262
Jewett, Charles Coffin, about, 6476
Jewett, Clarence F., 4036
Jewett, Sarah Orne, 1023-31
about, 881, 1278, 2476
bibl., 1023
Jewish-American literature, 4457-58
Jews, 1445, 2585, 4407, 4428, 4435,
4452-62, 5270, 5459, 5495
biog. (collected), 4453
culture, 4452-53, 4456-59
econ. condit., 4457, 4459
fiction, 1 190, 1571, 1574, 1578, 1635,
1921-22, 1979, 1992, 2045, 2231
Polish, 1992
Baltimore, 4062
Brooklyn, 4046
Jim Bludso, 942-44
INDEX / 1 137
Jingling in the Wind, 1 700
Joan of Arc
drama, 1172
fiction, 768
foan of Lorraine, 1 1 72
fob and His Children, 23 1 1
The Jockey, 2024
foe, 1035
Joerg, Wolfgang L. G., 2937
Joffe, Natalie F., 3041
Johannsen, Albert, 2444
John, Walton C, ed., 5309
John Brown's Body, 1222, 1224
fohn Dawn, 1290
John Deth, a Metaphysical Legend,
1166
John Dewey Society, 5243
John Godfrey's Fortunes, 2282
John Marr and Other Sailors, 488
John of the Mountains, 1080
Johnny Appleseed. See Chapman,
John
Johnny Johnson, 1475, 2333
Johns, Ethel, 4845
Johns Hopkins Hospital, about, 4819,
4829, 4831, 4845
Johns Hopkins University, about, 4831,
4845.5195
Johns Hopkins University. School of
Medicine, about, 4819, 4821, 4829,
4831,4845
Johns Hopkins University. School of
Nursing, hist., 4845
Johnson, Allen, ed., 3080, 3158, 4792,
5ii3
Johnson, Alvin S., 2701-2, 4513, 5219,
5426
about, 2702, 5426
Johnson, Andrew, 3376
about, 3361-62, 3411-12, 3447, 4103
Johnson, Burges, 11 15
Johnson, Charles A., 5407
Johnson, Charles S., 443-44, 5426
about, 5426
Johnson, Clifton, 214, 2627
Johnson, Donald Bruce, comp., 6367
Johnson, Edward, 321 1
ed., 73-74
Johnson, Emory R., 5948
Johnson, Frederick Ernest, ed., 5491
Johnson, G. Orville, 5207
Johnson, Gerald W., 2869, 2876, 3782
Johnson, Guy Benton, 5517, 5540, 5561
Johnson, H. B., 4481
Johnson, Harold Earle, 5649
ed., 5626
Johnson, Icie F., 2887
Johnson, Jack, about, 5025
Johnson, James Weldon, 1537-40
about, 1539
Johnson, Joseph E., ed., 3562
Johnson, Mary Louise, 5021
Johnson, Orlin, about, 5016
Johnson, Pamela H., 1896
Johnson, Robert, 3031
Johnson, Robert Underwood, 2923
about, 2923
Johnson, Samuel, 5251
Johnson, Thomas Cary, 4723
Johnson, Thomas H., 855
ed., 30, 846, 2345, 2460-61
431240—60 73
Johnson, Tom L., 6429
about, 6428-29
Johnson, Walter, 2893
comp., 3079
ed., 3545. 3567
Johnston, Alexander, 5029
Johnston, Henry Phelps, 4049
Johnston, James, about, 2856
Johnston, Joseph E., about, 2613
Johnston, William Dawson, 6469
Johnswood, 1436
Joint-stock companies, 6008
The Jolly Corner, 1008, 1012, 1014
Jolly Flatboatmen (painting), 5761
Jonah's Gourd Vine, 1527
Jonas, Klaus W., 1834
Jonathan Draws the Long Bow, 5534
Jonathan Gentry, 1824
Jones, Barbara (Slatter), 5198
Jones, Bobby, about, 5048
Jones, Clarence F., 2975
ed., 2938
Jones, E. E. Duncan, 1367
Jones, Fred Mitchell, 5960
Jones, George, about, 2869
Jones, Howard Mumford, 2424, 2445-
47,2521,3756,3774
ed., 378, 1187, 2341, 2460-61
Jones, James, 2003-4
Jones, John Paul, about, 1873
Jones, Joseph Cranston, silhouettes by,
5547
Jones, Joseph Stevens, 2347
Jones, Llewellyn Rodwell, 2939
Jones, Marcus E., about, 4734
Jones, Richard Seelye, 3645
Jones, Robert C, tr., 4472
Jones, Robert W., 2846
Jones, Rufus M., 5426
about, 5426, 5479
Jones, Victor, 621 1
Jones, William Melville, ed., 6238
Joplin, Scott, about, 5641
Jordan, David Starr, ed., 4724
about, 2623, 3761, 5434
Jordan, Donaldson, 3536
Jordan, Philip D., 4121, 5931
ed., 4143
Jordy, William H., 3055
Jorgenson, Chester E., ed., 131
Joseph, Samuel, 4460
Joseph and His Brethren, 2312
Joseph and His Friend, 2282
Josephson, Bertha E., ed., 3061
Josephson, Matthew, 3438, 3460, 5880
Josh Billing's Farmer's Allminax, 542
Joslyn, Carl S., 6027
Journal-Courier (Louisville, Ky.), about,
2892
Journal for Josephine, 1640
Journal of a Visit to Europe and the
Levant, 489
Journal of a Visit to London and the
Continent, 489
The Journal of Albion Moonlight, 2081
Journal of American Folklore, 5518
Journal of Experimental Medicine, 4831
The Journal of Higher Education, 5244
The Journal of Madam Knight, 38-39
The Journal of Medical Education, 4855
Journal of Speculative Philosophy, 5305
The Journal of the AERT, 5230
A Journal of the Transactions and Oc-
currences in the Settlement of
Massachusetts, 91
Journal up the Straits, 489
Journalism, 4479, 6432
bibl., 2850
business, 2902
education, 2910
hist., 2845-48, 2857, 2930
legal reporting, 6288
photography, 2908
policies & practices, 2900-12
schools, 2889, 2910
Ga., 2856
Ohio, 2857
Oreg., 2863
See also Magazines; Newspapers
Journalists. See Authors as journalists;
Newspapermen; Reporters and re-
porting; and names of individual
journalists
The Journey, 1761
A Journey in the Back. Country, 4366
A Journey in the Seaboard Slave States,
4364
Journey into Fame, 5736
Journey of Tapiola, 1635
A Journey to Greatness, 5678
Journey to Love, 1885
Journey to the Coastal Marsh, 5351
A Journey to the Land of Eden, 13
Joyce, James, about, 1887
Judaism, 4457-58, 5267, 5404, 5458
Conservative, 5460
Reform, 5459
social thought, 5488
Judd, Sylvester, 402-4
Judge Not , 1 1 92
Judges, 6101, 6224, 6231, 6237-39,
6241-60, 6264, 6280-93, 6320
See also Lawyers
Judgment Day (Farrell), 1373
Judgment Day (Rice), 1689
The Judgment of Paris, 2187
The Judgment of Solomon, 2312
Judicial administration, 6287, 6309
Judicial branch, 6075, 6084, 6133, 6137
Judicial decisions. See subdivision De-
cisions and opinions under Courts
and under Supreme Court
Judicial error, cases, 6294, 6298
Judicial-legislative relations, 6089
Judicial power, 6257
Judicial review, 6089, 6092, 6094-95,
6101-2, 6164, 6238
Judicial statistics, 6280
Judiciary, state, 6293
Judson, Edward Zane Carroll, about,
2759
Judson, Isabella Field, ed., 4677
Julia Bride, 1008
Julian, John, 5633
Juneau, Solomon, about, 4140
The Jungle, 1754-55
Junior colleges, 5162
Junior high schools, 5157
Junius Redivivus, pseud., 4295
furgen, 1261-62
Juries, 6295-96
Jurisdiction, 6281, 6290, 6293
1 138 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Jurisprudence, Colonial period, 6100
Jurists. See Judges; Lawyers
The Just and the Unjust, 1 301
Justice, 6219-6332
administration of, 4645, 4656, 6265,
6280, 6289-92, 6297-98, 6300,
6305-9
See also Law
Justice and Expediency, 663
Justices of the peace, 6282, 6307
Juvenile delinquency, 4639, 4650, 5028
case studies, 4651
causes, 4657
control, 4644, 4651, 4657
hist., 4657
Juvenile literature. See Children —
books
K
Kabakoff, Jacob, 4458
Kadelpian Review, 5242
Kahler, Alfred, 521 1
Kaempffert, Waldemar B., ed., 4787
Kahn, Ely J., Jr., 4935, 5636
Kahn, James M., 5008
Kalbfleish, Martin, about, 4735
Kalijarvi, Thorsten V., ed., 3635
Kallen, Horace M., 4457, 5124, 5254,
5290-91,5331,5335
ed., 5258, 5331
Kallir, Otto, ed., 2763
Kalm, Pehr, 4241-46
about, 4241
Kalorama, 101
Kammerer, Gladys M., 6159, 6186
Kamphoefner, H. H., 4594
Kane, Elisha Kent, 2980
about, 2980
Kane, Harnett T., 3952, 6377
Kane, Henry B., illus., 1083
Kanin, Garson, 2334
Kansas, 2730, 3944, 3948, 3964,
4167-68
frontier life, 4156
guidebooks, 3904-7
hist., 3990, 4167-68, 4189
in literature, 1997
rural communities, 4109
soc. life & cust., 4168
Kansas City
culture, 2887
politics, 6207
Kansas City Star, about, 2887
Kansas-Nebraska Act (1854), 3397
Kansas River, 3990
Kant, Immanuel, about, 5289
Kantor, J. R., 5335
Kantor, Mackinlay, 1541-44
Kaplan, Abraham D. H., 6020-21
Kaplan, Morton A., 3630
Kappa Delta Pi, about, 5242
Karolik, Mr. & Mrs. Maxim, 5745
Karpel, Bernard, 5696
Karpeles, Maud, ed., 5583
Karr, Jean, 1487
Kaser, David, 6451
Katharine Walton, 547
Kauflman, Henry, 5787
Kaufman, George Simon, 1403, 1491,
I545-50. 2327. 2332-34. 2348
Kaufman, Paul, 2424
Kaufmann, Edgar, ed., 5712
Kaufmann, F., 5291
Kavanagh, 430
Kaw River, 3990
Kaysen, Carl, 6010
Kayser, S. S., 4458
Kazeck, Melvin E., 4165
Kazin, Alfred, 6io, 2412, 2448-49,
2703-4
ed., 1348, 1430
about, 2704
Kearney, James J., ed., 6276
Keefer, Elizabeth E., illus., 5520
Keefer, Lubov, 3751
Keelboats, 41 10, 4281
Keeler, Oscar B., 5048
Keeley, James, 2862
Keenleyside, Hugh Llewellyn, 3555
Keep, Austin Baxter, 6468
Kegley, Charles W., ed., 5432
Keim, Sarah, about, 4818
Keith, E. Gordon, 5971
Keller, Franklin J., 5156
Keller, Helen Adams, 2705-9
about, 2706-8
Keller, Robert J., ed., 5202
Kelley, Pearce C, 5949
Kelley, Robert F., 5020
Kelley, Stanley, Jr., 6345
Kellog, Ansel Nash, about, 2864
Kellogg, Charles E., 2944
Kellogg, Louise Phelps, ed., 3212
Kellogg, Remington, 2955
Kellogg, Idaho, 4176
Kellor, Frances A., 6299
Kelly, Alfred H, 3058, 6077, 6128
ed.,6i28
Kelly, Clyde, 4668
Kelly, Fanny, about, 3032
Kelly, Fred C, 4788
ed., 705
Kelly, George, 2332, 2348
Kelly, Howard A., 4872
Kelly, Melville Clyde, 4668
Kelly, Robert L., 5183
Kemler, Edgar, 1606
Kemmerer, Donald L., 5986
Kemmerer, Edwin Walter, 5986
Kempfer, Homer, 5209
Kendall, George Wilkins, about, 2871
Kendall, John S., 4922
Kendall, Patricia L., 4701
Kendrick, Myron Slade, 5969
Kcnkel, William F., 4549, 4619
Kennan, George, 3625, 5932
Kennebec River and valley, 1290, 3793,
3973
Kennedy, Albert J., 4624
Kennedy, Gail, 5189
ed., 3112-15,5199
Kennedy, John Pendleton, 405-14, 2296
Kennedy, Richard, ed., 3145
Kennedy, Stetson, 3953
Kenner, Hugh, 1671
Kent, Donald Peterson, 4414
Kent, Frank R., 2876, 6333-34, 6359
Kent, James, 6277
about, 6223, 6231
Kent, Rockwell, 5021
about, 5783
Kent, Sherman, 3603
The Kentuckjan, 518
The Kentuckjan in New York],, 226
Kentucky, 3963, 4079, 4106-7
caves, 2946
culture, 3737
folklore, 5529, 5546
folksongs & ballads, 5584
frontier & pioneer life, 2667, 2726-
27, 4098
guidebooks, 3856-60
hist., 3240, 3983, 4106-7
language (dialects, etc.), 1697, 2257
legends, 5529, 5546
soc. life & cust., 5584
travel & travelers, 366, 4276, 4283,
4310,4322
Kentucky Derby, 5057
Kentucky in literature
editorials, sketches, etc., 716-17
fiction, 202-4, 322, 516, 546, 550,
716, 718, 766-67, 1464-65, 1468-
69, 151 1, 1697-99, 1701, 1705,
2166, 2169, 2173, 2193-94, 2199,
2201
personal narratives, 2166
poetry, 2166, 2172, 2193, 2196, 2200
short stories, 716, 1697, 1703, 1706,
2166-68, 2170-71
Kentucky River, 3983
Kentucky Tragedy (1825)
drama, 365
fiction, 365, 550, 2199
Kenyon, John Samuel, 2273
ed., 2238
The Kenyon Critics, 2559
The Kenyon Review, 2559
Keogh, Andrew, about, 6470
Kepler, Thomas S., ed., 183
Keppel, Frederick Paul, about, 5197
Kerf 01,1851
Kern, Alexander, 2401
Kern, Jerome, about, 5639
Kerr, Chester, 6439
Kerrison, Irvine L. H, 5210
Kertzer, M. N., 4458
Kerwin, Jerome G., ed., 3646
Kesselring, Joseph, 2334
Kessler, Henry H, 4637
Ketchum, Marshall D., 5994
Kettell, Russell Hawes, ed., 5729
Key, Valdimer O., 6335, 6378
A Key into the Language of America,
85,89
Key Largo, 1 1 74
Key West, guidebook, 3845
Key West, 1304
Keyes, Erasmus Darwin, 2710-11
about, 271 1
Keys, Alice Mapelsden, 3194
The Keys of the Kingdom of Heaven,
19
The Kid, 1 1 66
Kidd, William, Captain, about, 6229
Kienitz, John F., 3785
Kieran, John, 4988
Kies, Marietta, ed., 5308
Kiewiet, Cornells W. de, 4428
Kikuchi, C, 4469
INDEX / 1 139
Kilpatrick, William H., 5123, 5289
Kimball, Fiske, 5713
Kimball, J. Golden, about, 5538
Kimball, Sidney Fiske, 5713
Kimble, George H. T., 2950
Kimbrough, Emily, 2809
Kimmel, Stanley P., 4938
Kin, David, pseud., 3152
Kincer, Joseph B., 5816
Kindergartens, 5105, 5148
King, Clarence, 4210
King, E. J., 5577
King, Grace Elizabeth, 1032-37, 2296
about, 1 136
King, Henry C., about, 5428
King, Mrs. Marion M., 6468
King, Willard L., 6244
King Cotton Diplomacy, 3539
King George's War (1744-48), 3171
King Jasper, 17 14
King of the Delawares, 2835
King of the Fur Traders, 2831
King Philip's War (1675-76), 3213
fiction, 1441
King William's War (1689-97), 3171,
3213
The Kingdom of God in America, 5399
Kingdom of the Saints, 5465
The King's Henchman, 1608
Kingsblood Royal , 1569
Kingsley, J. Donald, 6188
Kingsley, Sidney, 2327, 2333-36
Kinne, Wisner Payne, 4940
Kinneman, John A., 4576
Kinney, Jay P., 3029
Kino, Eusebio Francisco, about, 3158
Kinsey, Alfred C., 4565-66
Kintner, William R., 3629
Kiowa Indians, 3007, 3035, 4160
Kiplinger, Willard M., 4065
Kipnis, Ira, 6360
Kirby, Gustavus T., 4989
about, 4989
Kirk, Clara M., ed., 983
Kirk, Grayson L., 3614, 4045
Kirk, Rudolf, ed., 983
Kirk, Russell, 2621
Kirk, Samuel A., 5207
Kirkland, Caroline Matilda (Stansbury),
415-18
Kirkland, Edward C, 5881, 5933
Kirkland, Jack, 1271, 2333
Kirkland, Joseph, about, 2419
Kirkpatrick, Frederick A., 3165
Kirkpatrick, Sidney D., ed., 4793
Kirstein, Lincoln, 4968
Kiser, Clyde V., 4396
Kitsuse, John I., 4469
Kittredge, George Lyman, 5541, 5558
about, 5222
Kleeberg, Gordon S. P., 6361
Klees, Frederic, 4480
Klein, Arthur J., 5186
Klein, David, 5021
Klein, Philip, 4591
Klem, Margaret C, 4887
Klineberg, Otto, ed., 4446
Klinkhamer, Marie Carolyn, Sister,
6245
Klipstein, August, about 4735
Klipstein, Ernest C, about, 4735
Klondike, short stories, 1048-52, 1058
Klondike gold rush, 2719-20
Kluckhohn, Clyde, 3015
Knapp, Robert H., 4725
Knapp, Seaman A., about, 5851, 5859
Knave and Queen, 2307
Knickerbocker, Diedrich, pseud. See
Irving, Washington
Knickerbocker Group, 2295
The Knife of the Times, 1 872
Knight, Edgar W., 5108
Knight, Grant C, 716, 2450-51
Knight, Henry Cogswell, 4284
about, 4283
Knight, Sarah (Kemble), 36-39
A Knight-Errant of the Foothills, 937
Knight's Gambit, 1393
Knights of Labor, about, 6034, 6054
Knights of Pythias, 4574
The Knights of the Horseshoe, 228-29
Knorr, Frederick, tunes arr. by, 5591
Knott, Thomas Albert, ed., 2238
Know-Nothings, 4515
Knowing and the Known, 5286
Knowlton, E. H., 5913
Knox, Dudley W., 3667
Knox, Israel, 5483
Knox, Samuel, about, 5 121
Kob, Walter, music arr. by, 5584
Kober, Arthur, 2327
Koch, Adrienne, ed., 3279
Koch, Robert, about, 4868
Koch, Vivienne, 1886
Kocher, Alfred Lawrence, 4086
Koenig, Samuel, 4407
Koppcn, N., ed., 2953
Koht, Halvdan, 3769
Kolb, John H., 4581
Kolehmainen, John I., 2896
Kollmorgen, N. M., 4479
Kolodin, Irving, 5657
Komarovsky, Mirra, 4577
Konefsky, Samuel Joseph, 6250, 6266
Konvitz, Milton R., 5291, 6120-23,
6129
Kooken, Olive, 4930
Koos, Leonard V., 5157
Koppman, Lionel, 4461
Kora in Hell, 1881
Korean War, 2746, 3597, 3738
Korn, Bertram Wallace, 4461
Korson, George G., ed., 5578-79
Korzybski, Alfred, about, 5392
Kosciuszko, T., about, 3250
Kossuth, Louis, about, 4360-61
Kotto, 951-52
Kotzebue, August von, 2299
Koury, Phil A., 4961
Koussevitzky, Serge, 5678
about, 5648-49
Kouwenhoven, John Atlee, 4045, 5691
Kraenzel, Carl Frederick, 4159
Kramer, Dale, 4963
ed., 2565
Krapp, George P., 2246
Krauch, Elsa, tr., 1 191-92
Kraus, Michael, 3056-57, 3770, 4518
ed., 2294
Krech, David, 5390
Krehbiel, Henry Edward, 5564, 5658-
59
Kreidberg, Marvin A., 3661
Kreymborg, Alfred, ed., 2342
Krieger, Murray, 2452
Kriesberg, Martin, 3615
Krinsky, Fred, ed., 3108
Kroeber, Alfred L., 2983, 3002
Kronenberger, Louis, 2406-7
ed., 4897
Krooss, Herman E., 5973
Krout, John Allen, 3090, 4528, 4990
ed., 4047
Krutch, Joseph Wood, 590, 2287, 2348,
2453, 4900
Ktaadn, 594
Ku Klux Klan, hist., 3386
Kull, Irving S., 3077
Kull, Nell M., 3077
Kunitz, Stanley J., ed., 2454-55
Kuniyoshi, Yasuo, about, 5783
Kurath, Hans, 2243, 2269
ed., 2268
Kurtz, Stephen, 3279
Kurtzman, David Harold, 6389
Kuykendall, Ralph S., 4220
Kwaidan, 951-52, 955
Kyrk, Hazel, 4567
La, La Lucille (music), 5678
Labaree, Leonard Woods, 3195
Labatut, Jean, ed., 5934
Labor and capitalism, 3439, 6094
Labor and laboring classes, 3440, 4408,
5905, 6031-58
addresses, essays, lectures, etc., 235,
239
agriculture, 5846
British immigrants, 4488
Colonial period, 3740
education, 5210, 5243
See also Vocational education
fiction, 941, 973-76, 1656-57, 1754-
56, 1775. 1777. 2578
folklore, 5523
hist., 3425, 6033-34, 6057
Irish immigrants, 4498
laws & legislation, 6033, 6053
Mexican immigrants, 4476
poetry, 1061-63
radicalism, 6039
Cripple Creek, Colo., 4174
Nueces County, Tex., 4476
The West, 4149
Labor disputes, 6058
See also Industrial relations; Strikes
Labor-management education, 5210
Labor-Management Relations Act
(1947), 6053
Labor movement, 3425, 3427, 3439.
3446, 4216, 4458-59. 6356, 6372,
6426
Labor relations. See Industrial rela-
tions
Labor supply, 4392, 4401, 6037, 6040
Labor turnover, 6038
Laboratories, directory, 4720
Lace and lacemakers, 5793
Ladies and Gentlemen, 1263
Lady Baltimore, 1 145
1 140 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Lady Barberina, 1 007
Lady Franklin Bay expedition, 2981
The Lady Is Cold, 1859
The Lady of Fashion, 4927
The Lady's Maid's Bell, 1855
Laemmar, Jack W., 4696
LaFarge, John, 4428, 5447
La Farge, Oliver, 1551-53, 3039
Lafayette, Marquis de, about, 3247-50
portrait, 5769
La Follette, Belle (Case), 3461
La Follette, Fola, 3461
La Follette, Robert M., about, 3446,
3461,6432
La Follette, Suzanne, 5692
La Fontaine, Jean de. Fables, trans-
lation (Creole), 2265
La Guard, Theodore de, pseud. See
Ward, Nathaniel
La Jolla, Calif., 2746
Laissez-faire. See Free enterprise
Lamar, Lucius Q. C, about, 3364
Lamb, Charles, about, 381
Lambert, B., tr., 4278
Lamberton, Bernice (Grieves), 239
Lamers, William M., 4527
Lamke, Tom A., ed., 5247
Lamont, Thomas W., 5987
The Lamp and the Bell, 1608
Lamprecht, S. P., 5289
Lamps, 5786
Lancaster, Lane W., 6212
Lancaster County, Pa., 4058
Lancelot, 171 4
Land, 5808-18
Colonial period, 3740
law. See Land tenure
monopoly, 4535
utilization, 5810, 5817-18
Calif., 4202
Chicago, 5812
New England, 5840
Texas, 4193
The West, 4149
A Land and a People, 1 9 1 9
Land-Grant College Act, 51 13, 5186,
5191
Land-grant colleges, 5186, 5191
The Land Lies Open, 4142
The Land of Little Rain, 1 197
The Land of Silence, 2126
Land of Their Choice, 4485
Land of U nlikeness , 2008
Land tenure, 4266, 581 1, 6120, 6230,
6278
Indian, 3029, 3043
New York (Colony), 3200
The West, 3237
Land Where Time Stands Still, 2753
Landis, James M., 6286, 6312
Landis, Kenesaw Mountain, about, 5015
Landis, Paul H., 4568
Landon, Melville D., 212
Landor, Walter S., about, 2545
Landsberg, Hans H, 5819
Landscape West of Eden, 1 1 66
Lane, Wheaton J., 5935
ed., 5934
Laney, Al, 2872
Langbein, Walter B., 2949
Langdon, William Chauncy, 4529
Langeluttig, Albert G., 6226
Langer, William L., 3537-38
Langford, Sam, about, 5025
Langland, John, 2350
Langley, Samuel Pierpont, 4726
about, 4721, 4775
Langner, Lawrence, 4941
Language, 2236-75, 2466, 3737, 3740,
5291
atlases & maps, 2268-69
dialects & regionalisms, 2240-41,
2244-46, 2248, 2253-71, 4093,
4098, 4198, 4271, 4436, 5516,
5526, 5531, 5533, 5536, 5540
See also Dialects in literature
dictionaries, 2236-41, 2246, 2253,
2259, 2264, 2266, 2272, 2274,
5127
essays & studies, 2364-68, 2466
grammars, 2242-44, 2249, 2265-66
slang, 2248, 2253, 2272, 2274, 5503,
5507.5578
Language As Gesture, 1228, 1233
Lanham, C. T., 4513
Lanier, Henry W., ed., 886
Lanier, Mary (Day), ed., 1040-43
Lanier, Sidney, 1038-47, 2296
about, 2277, 2280, 2422, 2616
bibl., 1046
Lanny Budd Series, 1758
Lansing, John, 6087
Lanterns on the Levee, 2779
Lapham, Jesse E., 2947
Lapham, Macy H, 2947
Lardner, John, 4991
Lardner, Ring, 1545, 1554-55
about, 2428
Larkin, Oliver W., 4676, 5693
Lar\s in the Popcorn, 21 52
Larned, Kans., guidebook, 3905
La Rochefoucauld -Liancourt, Francois
Alexandre Frederic due de, 4267-
68
about, 4266
Larsen, Roy E., 5145
Larson, Adlowe L., 5845
Larson, Cedric, 3462
Larson, Henrietta M., 5988, 6007
Las Vegas, Nev., 4184, 5059
Laserson, Max M., 3564
Lasker, Bruno, 4470
Laski, Harold J., 2542, 4512
Lasswell, Harold D., 6130
The Last Adam, 1299
Last Chapter, 2745
The Last Circle, \iii
The Last Duel in Spain, 2303
The Last Frontier, 1975
The Last Look^, 1827
The Last Man, 2310
Last of the Bad Men, 2758
The Last of the Mohicans, 258
The Last of the Provincials , 2429
The Last of the Valerii, 10 12
The Last Puritan, 1736
The Last Tre/( of the Indians, 3027
The Lasting Elements of Individualism,
5313
Late City Edition, 2903
The Late George Apley, 1549, 1590
Latham, Earl, ed., 3107-36
Lathrop, George P., 351
ed., 340
Latin America
documents, 3575
economic relations with, 3546, 3638
in literature
fiction, 2185
short stories, 1 1 1 1-13
independence, 3569
relations with, 3442, 3515, 3549,
3554, 3574> 3676, 3578-80, 3617,
3619,3632,3635
technical assistance to, 3641
travel & travelers, 1445
Latourette, Kenneth S., 3596, 5466
Latrobe, Benjamin Henry, about, 5708
Laughing Boy, 1551-52
Laughing in the Jungle, 2579
The Laughing Matter, 2122
Laughing to Keep from Crying, 1524
Laughlin, James, ed., 2560
Laughlin, Ledlie Irwin, 5788
The Launching of a University and
Other Papers, 5195
Laurents, Arthur, 2334
Laurie, Joseph, 4892, 4974
Lavender, David, 4174
La Verendrye, Sieur de, about, 3170
La Violette, Forrest E., 4466
Law, 6219-6332
anecdotes, facetiae, satire, etc.,
194-97. 556-57
codification, 6236
Colonial period, 75, 78, 6230, 6232,
6234
digests, 6271-79
hist., 6166, 6219, 6225, 6230-31,
6236
Baltimore, 6284, 6291
Boston, 6292
La., 6245
Md., 6284
Mass., 6228, 6242, 6292
Nebr., 6233
New York (Colony), 6221
The West, 6220
philosophy, 3728, 5269, 5290, 5291
study & teaching, 6270, 6289,
6317-18, 6321, 6326-27
theory, 6263
Law, administrative, 6090, 6181, 6201,
6310-16
Law, constitutional. See Constitutional
law
Law, corporation, 6008, 601 1, 6236
Law, criminal. See Criminal law
Law, ecclesiastical, 5420-22
Law, election, 6338, 6400, 6403,
6406-8, 6410
Law, immigration, 4404-5, 4420, 4425,
4468
Law, international, 3526, 3530, 6277
Law, land. See Land tenure
Law, libel, 2906, 2931-32
Law, municipal. See Municipal law
Law, public health, 4876
Law and ethics, 6261-62
Law enforcement, 6309
A Law for the Lion, 191 2
Law libraries, 6328
INDEX
/ II4I
The Law of Civilization and Decay,
2601
Law reform, 6285, 6302-3
Mass., 6292
Lawrence, David Herbert, 2456
Lawrence, Ernest Orlando, about, 4721
Lawrence, J. E., 6195
Lawrence, William, Bp., about, 5457
Lawrenceville School, about, 5155
Laws, George Malcolm, 5556
Lawton, Sherman P., 4691
Lawyers, 3746, 6101, 6224-25, 6231,
6236, 6311-32
See also Judges
Lay My Burden Down, 5515
Lazarsfeld, Paul F., 4701, 6414, 6419
ed., 3724
Lazarus Laughed , 1647-48
Lazzaro, Ralph, 5424
comp., 5400
Lea, M. Carey, about, 4740
Lea and Febiger, about, 6451
Leach, H. S., ed., 3469
Leach, MacEdward, 5550
Leach, Maria, 5506
Leacock, John, 2347
Leader of the Revolution, 3269
The League of Frightened Philistines,
1375
League of Nations, 3534, 3541, 3632
Leander, Folke, 2375
The Leaning Tower, 1662
Lear, Walter J., 4887
Learned, Henry Barrett, 3519, 6145
Learning and scholarship, 3739,
4458-59
Leary, Lewis G., 2457, 2552
ed., 1672
Leather stocking Tales, 258
The Leatherwood God, 980
Leavenworth, Kans., guidebook, 3906
Leaves from the Diary of an Impres-
sionist, 951-52
Leaves of Grass, 619-30, 636-37, 639,
642
about, 656
concordance, 653
Leaves of Grass One Hundred Years
After, 656
Lebhar, Godfrey M., 5961
Leckie, George G., 3837
Le Clair, Robert C, 1021
Lecture at Amory Hall, 286
Lectures and lecturing
(1820-70), 186, 192, 209, 230,
233-35. 280, 283-84, 286, 313,
531,538,542
(1871-1914), 745, 768, 900, 1126
(I9I5-39), 1235, 1445, 1585, 1783,
1823
Lectures on Modern Idealism, 5354
Ledesert, Margaret, tr., 4508
Le Due, Thomas H., 5200
Ledyard, John, about, 3154
Lee, Alfred McClung, 2847
Lee, Charles, 6463
Lee, Charles, General, about, 3149
Lee, Gordon C, 5109
Lee, "Mother Ann," about, 5469
Lee, Richard, about, 3251
Lee, Robert E., about, 245, 1099, 1267,
2580, 2612, 3388, 3694-95, 4533
Lee family, about, 3251
Lee's Lieutenants, 3695
Leffler, George L., 5982
Lefler, Hugh Talmage, 4090
Legal aid, 6309, 6317, 6329-30
Legal education. See Law — study &
teaching
Legal ethics, 63 1 9-20
Legal institutions, 6289
Legal philosophy, 5269, 5290-91, 6266,
6268
Legal profession, 6317-32
Le Gallienne, Eva, 4936
about, 4936
Legare, H. S., 2296
The Legend of Sleepy Hollow, 381
Legends and tales, 5503-5548
See also Folk heroes; and under re-
gions, ethnic groups, etc., e.g.,
Indians, American — legends &
tales
Legends of the Old Plantation, 911
Legends of the West, 322
Leggett, William, 2295
Legislation, 6142, 6153, 6165-67, 6198
Legislative branch, 6075, 6133, 6140
functions, 6137
Legislative investigating committees,
6342
Legislatures, 6153, 6195, 6203, 6338,
6434
Colonial period, 6401
committees, 6156
functions, 6166-67
organization, 6166-67
rules & practice, 6166-67
Le Goullon, Lamartine, illus., 5553
Lehmann-Haupt, Hellmut, 6440
Leidecker, Kurt E., 5309
Leidy, William Philip, 6452
Leigh, Robert D., 6479-80
ed., 6485
Leighton, Isabel, ed., 3488
Leighton, J. A., 5252
Leisure. See Recreation
Leisure class. See Upper class
Leisy, Ernest E., 2424, 2458
ed., 411, 2341
Leiter, Robert David, 5619
Leites, Nathan, 4951
Lenin, Nikolai, about, 2407
Lenox, James, about, 6465
Leonard, John P., 5158
Leonard, William Ellery Channing,
1556-58
Leone, Lucile Petry, about, 4854
Leong, Gor Yun, 4467
Leonor de Guzman, 207-8
Leopold, Richard William, 2712-13
ed., 3100
Lerner, Max, 2407
ed., 6242
Leroux, Emmanuel, 5254
Lerwill, Leonard L., 3665
Lescohier, D. D., 6033
Lester, John A., ed., 5063
Lestschinsky, Jacob, 4459
Le Sueur, Meridel, 3954
Let Freedom Ring, 6127
Let It Come Down, 1930
Let Me Lie, 1267
Let Us Now Praise Famous Men, 1907
Let Your Mind Alone!, 1817
A Letter Addressed to the People of
Piedmont, 103
A Letter on White-Washing, 148
A Letter to His Countrymen, 262
A Letter to Robert Frost and Others,
1515
A Letter to the National Convention
of France, 1 03
Letters
Colonial period, 14, 58, 89-91
(1764-1819), 96-101, 109, 122, 129,
132-33, 171, 177
(1820-70), 244, 270, 296, 329, 377,
392, 438, 449, 462, 466-67, 469,
502, 532-33, 554, 577, 599-601,
639, 643, 672
(1871-1914), 699-700, 738, 745,
751, 800-2, 847-50, 951-53, 981,
1005-6, 1046, 1152
(1915-39), 1 187, 1305, 1570, 1608,
1664, 1713, 1715-16, 1741, 1893-
94
Letters and Leadership, 2380
Letters from an American Farmer,
4500-1
Letters from the West, 320
Letters from under a Bridge, 675
Letters of a Traveller, 222
Leuchs, Fritz A. H., ed., 608
Levant in literature, 489
Le Veillard, Louis Guillaume, tr., 126
LeVene, Clara Mae, 4754
Levenson, Jacob C, 3055
Levenson, William B., 5230
Levi, Werner, 3556
Levin, Harry, 2412
Levine, Isaac Don, 3647
Levinger, Lee J., 4461
Levy, Beryl Harold, 5459
Levy, Leonard W., 6228
Levy, Marion J., Jr., 4550
Lewinson, Paul, 6379
Lewis, Benjamin M., 2915
Lewis, Cleona, 5989
Lewis, Edith, 1282
Lewis, Edward R., 6064
Lewis, Edwin, about, 5433
Lewis, George T., about, 4735
Lewis, Harold MacLean, 4607
Lewis, John L., about, 6049
Lewis, Lloyd, 3696, 3699, 4135
Lewis, Meriwether, 3298
about, 3167, 3299
Lewis, Nelson P., 4607
Lewis, Orlando F., 4653
Lewis, Oscar, 3955
Lewis, Richard W. B., 2459
Lewis, Sinclair, 1559-70
about, 2406, 2429, 2504
Lewis, Theodore H., ed., 3217
Lewis, Wilmarth S., 6464
Lewis and Clark Expedition, 3298
Lewisohn, Ludwig, 1571-79, 4501
Lexington, Ky.
guidebook, 3859
intellectual life, 3767
Leyda, Jay, ed., 493, 495, 5°'
1 142 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Leys, Wayne A. R., 4428
Libel law, 2906, 2931-32
Liberal Catholic Church, about, 5439
Liberal education, 5100, 5187, 5190,
5196-97, 5199, 5246
See also General education
The Liberal Imagination, 2519
Liberal Republican Party (1872), 6369,
6427
The Liberal Tradition in America, 6063
Liberalism, 3766, 4530, 5270, 5284,
5425, 6061, 6063, 6065, 6070-71,
6164
Liberator, about, 3380
The Liberties of the Massachusetts
Collonie in New England, 78
Liberty, 1329, 3143, 3250, 3256, 3279,
3308, 3313, 338i, 3747. 4258.
4370-71, 4502-3, 4513, 4543.
6060-61, 6063, 6068, 6071, 6079,
6094, 6099, 6108, 6127-28, 6130,
6134
See also Democracy; Politics
Liberty against Government, 6094
Liberty of the press. See Freedom of
the press
Librarians, 6466, 6474, 6476, 6479,
6481, 6485
The Librarians' Conference of 1853,
6486
Libraries, 6452, 6466-75, 6477-84,
6486-87
Colonial, 14, 40, 73
reference dept., 6483
stat., 6474
Ariz., 4199
Charleston, S.C., 3763
Chicago, 6473
111., 6473
Middle States, 6472
Mo., 4108
Nashville, 3765
New England, 2549, 3745, 6472
New York (City), 4049
New York (State), 6468
See also special types of library, e.g.,
Law libraries; Public libraries
Library of Congress, 5807
about, 6460
hist., 6469
Library of Congress. Aeronautics Di-
vision, 4788
Library of Congress. Jefferson Collec-
tion, 6460
Library of Congress. Legislative Ref-
erence Service, 6102
Library of Congress. Prints and Photo-
graphs Division, 5807
Library of Congress. Reference Dept.,
659-60
Library of the World's Best Literature,
1136
Library schools, 6479, 6485
Library science, 6452, 6454, 6460, 6474,
6478,6481,6484
research, 6487
study & teaching, 6479, 6485
Library surveys, 6477, 6480, 6482
Lichten, Frances, 5599
Liddell Hart, Basil H., 3699
Lidice, Czechoslovakia, poetry, 1608
Lie Down in Darkness, 2175
Lieb, Frederick G., 5014
Lieberman, Herman, 11 95
Lieberman, Judith Berlin, 5427
about, 5427
Liebling, Abbott J., 2904
Lief, Alfred, ed., 6247
Life adjustment education, 5224, 5235,
5237. 5240
Life along the Passaic River, 1 872
Life among the Modocs, 1065
Life and Death of an Oilman, 2731
Life and Gabriella, 1461
Life and Liberty in America, 4370-71
The Life and Times of King Cotton,
5822
Life Doubles in Brass, 4973
Life in a Putty Knife Factory, 2150
Life in America, 5801, 5804
Life insurance, 5991-92
Life Is My Song, 1432
Life (magazine), about, 2908
The Life of Billy Yank., 3705
The Life of fohnny Reb, 3704-5
The Life of Poetry, 2105
The Life of Reason, 5367, 5375
Life on the Mississippi, 784-86, 811
Life on the Texas Range, 4153
Life with Father, 1317-18, 2327, 2334
Life with Mother, 1 3 1 8
Light in August, 1386
The Light in the Forest, 1 696
The Light of Distant Skies, 575 1
Light up the Sky, 1492
The Lightning-Rod Man, 484
Lighting, Colonial, 5786
Lilienthal, David E., 5892
Liljeblad, S., 2364
Liljegren, Sten B., 2364, 2367
Lillard, Richard G., 2402, 3101, 4184
Lillibridge, George D., 3778
Lima, Ohio, guidebook, 3869
The Limestone Tree, 1 5 1 1
The Limits of Evolution, 5317
Limners and Likenesses, 5747
Lin McLean, 11 45
Linblad, K. E., 2364
Lincecum, Gideon, about, 4734
Lincoln, Abraham, 419-21, 3390, 3395
about, 557, 941, 1727-29, 1873, 2542,
2757, 2824, 3382, 3391-95. 34i6,
3426, 3706, 4533, 5186, 6081
bibl., 2757, 3395
drama, 1752
fiction, 332, 763-65, 876-77, 2821
poetry, 206, 459, 623, 1061
sculpture, 5736-37
Lincoln, Charles H., ed., 55, 3213
Lincoln, Mary Todd, fiction, 2821
Lincoln, Nebr., guidebook, 3903
Lincoln Finds a General, 3706
Lincoln Memorial (Washington, D.C.),
5736
Lind, John, 4143
Linda Condon, 1509
Lindbergh, Charles Augustus, 2714-15
about, 2715, 4533, 5938
Lindeman, Eduard C, ed., 301
Lindheimer, Ferdinand Jakob, about,
4734
Lindholm, Richard W., 5943
Lindley, Harlow, 4121
Lindner, Robert Mitchell, 2716-18
Lindquist, Everet F., ed., 5229
Lindquist, Gustavus E. E., 3040
Lindsay, Howard, 1317, 2327, 2334-35
Lindsay, Nicholas Vachel, 1580-81
about, 1582, 2419
Lindsey, Almont, 3439
Lindsley, Philip, about, 3765
Line, Ralph Marlowe, 5715
The Line of Love, 1262
The Lineage of Lichfield, 1 262
Linford.Dee, 4176
Linford, E., 6195
Lingelbach, William E., about, 4059
Lingg, Claire, 4865
Linguistic Atlas of New England, 2268
Link, Arthur S., 3472-73, 3489
ed., 3100
Link, Eugene Perry, 3300
Linscott, Eloise Hubbard, ed., 5580
Linscott, Robert N., ed., 940
Linton, Ralph, ed., 3041
The Lion and the Honeycomb, 1234
The Lion and the Rose, 2124
The Lion of the West, 518
Lionizing, 529
Lipman, Jean (Herzberg), 5601
Lippmann, Walter, comp., 3634
Lipset, Seymour Martin, 6455
Lipsius, Morris, ed., 2274
Lipson, Leslie, 6203
Lisbon, Portugal, fiction, 2092
The Listening Landscape, 1906
Litchfield, Edward H, 6420
Literary annuals, 2518
The Literary Apprenticeship of Mar\
Twain, 816
Literary Centres, 896-97
Literary composition, theories, 40, 47-
48,618
Literary Culture in Early New England,
2549
Literary Encounters, 1277
The Literary Fallacy, 2417
Literary form, 2388
Literary Friends and Acquaintances,
979
The Literary History of the American
Revolution, 2522
Literary History of the United States,
601, 670, 2460-61
Literary Importations, 134
The Literary Life in America, 2380
Literary Opinion in America, 2550
Literary Pioneers, 2462, 3776
Literary Prophecy, 896-97
The Literary Record, 2355
Literary research, essays & studies, 2364-
68
Literary Review, 689
The Literary Situation, 2409
Literary Values, 740
The Literati, 520, 533
The Literati of New York. City, 415
Literature, 1-2235
and land, 6262
anthologies, collections, & series,
2276-2370, 2383, 2551, 2554,
2557. 2559-60, 2563, 2565-66,
2569,2571,3142
INDEX / 1 143
Literature — Continued
bibl., 2393, 2402, 2448, 2460, 2552-
53,6467
biographical series, 2276-89
dictionaries, handbooks, etc., 2433,
2441,2447,2454-55
esthetics, 2387, 2512, 2529
experimental writing
drama, 1357, 1359-60, 1647-48,
1864, 2226
fiction, 1242-47, 1249, 1 25 1, 1379,
1450, 1771, 1842
periodicals, 2560
personal narratives, 1768—70
poetry, 1303-4. I3°6, 1309. 1313.
1357, 1359. 1432. 1583-84.
1620-21, 1766, 1782, 1784,
1872, 2034, 2079, 2098, 2134
short stories, 1242, 1771
hist. & crit., 1235, 1571, 2356-2550,
373i-32.3747-48,375i
bibl., 2457
influence on art, 5691
periodicals, 2551-77, 2854, 2895,
2914, 2922, 2925
philosophy, 2453, 2529
popular, 2384, 2402, 2434, 6443
See also Bestsellers
post World War II, 2373
techniques, 1664
theory, 1664, 2423, 2529
See also Folklore; Legends and tales;
also forms of literature, e.g., Fic-
tion; and names of individual
authors
Literature and Morality, 1377
Literature and science, 21, 40, 46, 2493
essays, 2425
poetry, 649, 2412
Literature and the American College,
2375
Literature & Theology in Colonial New
England, 2483
Lithic industries (Indian), 2991
Lithographers, 561 1, 5778-79
Little, Nina Fletcher, 5730
Little, Shelby (Melton), 3270
Little Big Horn Battle, 3036
A Little Book, of Profitable Tales, 878
A Little Book, of Western Verse, 878
Little Breeches, 942-44
Little Compton, 920
The Little Convent Girl, 1035
Little Dies Committee. See California
Senate. Fact-Finding Committee
on Un-American Activities in
California
The Little Fellow, 4953
The Little Foxes, 1989, 2327
Little Friend, Little Friend, 1999
A Little Journey in the World, 1142-43
"Little magazines," 2563, 2914, 2925
bibl., 2914
Little Or phant Annie, 11 26
A Little Rebellion, 3309
Little Rivers, 5095
Little theaters. See Theater — little
theater movement
The Little White Girl (painting), 5776
Little Women, 189
Littlefield, George E., 6436, 6448
Littleton, Mark, pseud. See Kennedy,
John Pendleton
Live Another Day, 1 95 1
Lively, Charles E., 4397
Livestock, Southern States, 4084
Livezey, William E., 3595
Living Authors, 2455
Livingood, James W., 4104
Livingston, Burton E., 2959
Livingston, Robert R., about, 3519
Livingston, N. J., hist., 3813
Llano Estacado, Tex., 4196
Lloyd, Elizabeth, 672
Lloyd, Hannibal Evans, tr., 4309
Lloyd, Henry Demarest, about, 6424
Lloyd, Margaret, 4968
Lo, the Former Egyptian!, 2151
Loans, 5848, 5993
Lobbying, 6338, 6392-93, 6395-97,
6399
Lobrano, Gustav S., 3430
Local civil service, 6192
Local Color in Art, 896-97
Local color in literature. See Regional-
ism and local color in literature
Local government, 3195, 3221, 3224,
3229-30, 3443, 6131, 6133-35,
6137, 6139, 6207-18, 6391, 6425,
6432
budget, 5973, 6195, 6208-10, 6212-
15, 6217-18
executive branch, 6193
functions, 2905, 6195, 6211-15, 6217
labor policy, 6192
officials & employees, 6209-10, 6212-
15,6218
organization, 6195, 6208, 6213-15,
6217
publications, 6452
See also subdivisions Government
and History under names of places
and regions, e.g., New York
(City)— govt.
Local history, 2943, 3061, 3781-4222
See also History under names of
places and regions, e.g., Cali-
fornia— hist.
The Local Novel, 896-97
Locke, David Ross (Petroleum V.
Nasby), 422-26, 2857
Locke, John, about, 5289
Locke Amsden, 583-84
Lockridge, Ross Franklin, 2005-6
Lockwood, Francis Cummins, 3004,
4199
The Locomotive-God, 1557
Locomotives, 5926
Locust and Wild Honey, 741-42
Lodge, Henry Cabot, 2582, 4036
ed., 696
Loeb, Martin B., 5146
Loeher, Rodney, 3061
Loescher, Frank S., 5499
Loesser, Arthur, 5622
Loetscher, LefTerts A., ed., 5466
The Log of a Cowboy, 684-85
Logan, Edward B., 6336
ed., 6336
Logan, James, about, 3229
Logan, Joshua, 2335, 2337
Logan, Rayford W., 4440, 4445
Loggins, Vernon, 5582, 5679
Logic, 5254, 5257, 5267, 5275, 5283,
5286, 5290, 5306, 5346, 5359
Lomax, Alan, 5643
comp., 5558-60
Lomax, John A., 5557
comp., 5558-60
about, 5557
Lombardi, John, 6051
Lomen, Carl J., 2719-20
London, Jack, 1048-60, 5021
about, 2430, 2464, 2486, 2815
Lone Cowboy, 2700
The Lonely Crowd, 4555
Long, Crawford W., about, 4822
Long, David F., 3103
Long, E. B., ed., 3696
Long, E. Hudson, 1 1 11
ed., 2324
Long, Edward Le Roy, 5434
Long, Haniel, 3956, 4176
Long, Huey, about, 3488, 6377
Long, John Davis, 4036
Long, John Luther, 2337
Long, Orie William, 2462, 3776
Long Black Son, 2234
Long Branch, N.J., hist., 3814
A Long Fourth, 2177
The Long Habit, 5351
Long Hunt, 1239
Long Island
fiction, 1425
in art, 5768
travel & travelers, 4279
Long Remember, 1542
The Long Run, 185 1
The Long Stay Cut Short, 2220
The Long Valley, 1776
The Long Voyage Home, 1648
Longfellow, Ernest W., illus., 439
Longfellow, Henry Wadsworth, 427-44,
2290
tr., 437
about, 427, 438, 441, 449, 633, 706,
745. 979. 2277, 2280, 2374, 2462,
2486,2513,2534,3776
Longfellow, Samuel, ed., 438
Longstreet, Augustus Baldwin, 445-48,
2296
Longstreet, James, about, 2613
Longstreth, Thomas Morris, 5064
Longworth, Nicholas, about, 4369
Lonn, E., 4481
Look at the U.S.A., 3782
Look Homeward, Angel, 1888-89
Look (magazine), 2161, 3782
about, 2908
Looking Backward, 728-31
about, 726
Loomis, Alfred F., 5022
Lopez, M., 200
Lord, Clifford L., 2972, 3676
Lord, Elizabeth H., 2972
Lord, Otis Phillips, about, 852
Lord Chumley, 2314
Lord Weary s Castle, 2007, 2009
The Lords of Creation, 3476
Lorimcr, George Horace, about, 292s
Lorwin, Lewis L., 6052
1 144 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Los Angeles
descr., 4207
guidebooks, 3929
hist., 4150, 4206-7
music, 5630
politics, 6207
Los Angeles County, Calif., 3957
Loshe, Lillie Deming, 2463
Losses, 1999
Lossing, Benson J., 3687
The Lost Colony, 1475
Lost Face, 1058
"Lost generation," 2371, 2406, 2408,
2417
Lost in the Horse Latitudes, 21 50
A Lost Lady, 1 276-77
Lost Springtime, 2658
Lotus Eating, 2278
Louis XI, 2298
Louis, Joe, 5030
about, 5025, 5030
Louisiana, 3952, 4079, 4100-1
fiction, 745, 749-50, 1032, 1945
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3851-52
hist., 4100-1
language (dialects, etc.), 2265
law, 6245
politics, 6245, 6377
short stories, 746-48, 759-61,
1032-35
Louisiana. Legislative Council, 4100
Louisiana Hay ride, 6377
Louisiana Purchase, 3531, 3660
Louisville, Ky., guidebook, 3860
Lounsbury, Thomas R., ed., 1 144
Louttit, William Easton, Jr., 3426
Love, 285
Love and Liberation , 1858
Love Charm, 1553
Love Conquers All, 1214
Love, Death, and the Ladies' Drill
Team, 2214
Love in '76, 2347
Love Is Eternal, 2821
The Love Nest, 1554
Lovejoy, Arthur O., 5255, 5259
Lovell, John W., about, 6446
Love's Old Sweet Song, 21 12
Lovett, Robert Morss, 2406
ed., 1071
Lovingood, Sut, pseud. See Harris,
George Washington
Low, Samuel, 2347
Low, Seth, about, 6432
Low Man on a Totem Pole, 2150, 2155
Lowe, H. A., 6195
Lowe, Victor, 5335, 5385
Lowell, Amy, 832, 1583-84
about, 2681
Lowell, James Russell, 449-69, 610,
2290, 5222
about, 402, 449, 466, 585, 2277,
2374, 2385, 2422-23, 2492, 2513,
2534> 2545, 2681, 2922
Lowell, Robert, 2007-10, 2363
about, 2426
Lowell family, 2681
The Lowering Clouds, 3498
Lowes, John Livingston, 4250
Lowie, Robert H., 3005-6
Lowman, Guy S., Jr., 2268
Lowry, Robert, 20 11 -16
Loyalty oaths, 3387-88, 6107-8, 61 10
See also Allegiance
Loyalty-Security Program (1947), 6107,
6110, 6112
Loyola, Ignatius, 2281
Lozier, Herbert, 5004
Lubbock, Percy, ed., 1004-5
Lubell, Samuel, 5947, 6346
Lucas, Henry S., 4493
Luce, Clare (Boothe), 2327, 2333
Lucifer with a Book., 1940, 1942
The Luck, of Roaring Camp, 927-32,
937. 939
Luckman, Sid, 5039
about, 5039
Lucky Sam McCarver, 2348
Lucretius. De Rerum Natura, trans-
lation, 1556
Lucy Church Amiably, 1771
Lucy Gay heart, 1277
Luden, Heinrich, ed., 4298
Ludwig, Richard M., ed., 2341
Lueders, Edward G., 1835
Lull, Richard Swann, 4715
Lumber industry, 5864
Minn., 4141-42
Mississippi Valley, 3975
Lumbermen
folklore, 5523, 5533
language (slang, etc.), 5516
songs & music, 5551, 5556, 5558-59,
5562,5567,5575
Lummus, Henry T., 6287
Lumpkin, Katharine Du Pre, 2721,
4569
about, 2721
Lumsdaine, A. A., 3724
Lundberg, Ferdinand, 2884
Lundberg, George A., 4577
Lundblad, Jane, 2368
The Lure of the Frontier, 3082
Lustra, 1666
Lutherans, 3231, 4479-80, 5404, 5442,
5461-62
Lutz, E. Russell, 6294
Luxon, Norval Neil, 2924
Lydenberg, Harry Miller, 6476
Lyell, Sir Charles, 4337-40
about, 4336
Lyman, George D., 4185
Lyman, E. W., 5335
Lynch, Denis Tilden, 6387
Lynchburg, Va., 2842
Lynd, Helen Merrell, 4592-93
Lynd, Robert S., 4592-93
Lynes, Russell, 5694
Lynn, Kenneth S., 2464
Lyon, John H. H, 5582
Lyon, Mary, 5193
about, 2615
Lyons, Eugene, 3490
Lyons, James, 5607
Lyons, L. M., 6207
Lyric America, 2342
Lyrics of a Lad, 1530
Lyrics of Lowly Life, 857, 859, 861
Lyrics of the Hearthside, 858-59, 861
Lytle, John Horace, 5085
about, 5085
M
M; One Thousand Autobiographical
Sonnets, 1624
Mabbott, Thomas O., 522, 524
ed., 538
Mabee, Carleton, 4676
MacArthur, Charles, 2327, 2332
MacArthur, Douglas, about, 1992
McCabe, Charles R., ed., 2890
McCaffery, John K. M., ed., 1504
McCain, William D., 3583
McCallum, John, 5038
McCamy, James L., 3604, 6452
McCamy, Julia B., 6452
McCann, Franklin T., 3166
McCarran, Patrick, 4424
McCarran Act (1950). See Subversive
Activities Control Act
McCarthy, John A., 521 1
McCarthy, Joseph R., about, 3482
McCarthy, Mary, 2017-22
McCarty, John L., 4195
McCausland, Elizabeth, 5766
McCleery, Albert, 4901
McClellan, George Brinton, about, 2614,
3382
McClelland, Nancy V., 5728
MacClintock, Lander, 5679
McCloskey, J. J., 2301
McClure, M. T., 5289
McClure, S. S., about, 6432
McCluskey, Ross, ed., 5071
McCollum, Elmer V., about, 4722
McConahey, S. C, 4594
McConnell, Grant, 5859
McCormac, Eugene Irving, 3350-51
McCormick, Cyrus, 5826
McCormick, Cyrus Hall, about, 4786,
5826
McCormick, Medill, about, 2862
McCormick, Robert, about, 5826
McCormick, Robert Rutherford, about,
2862
McCormick family, 2862
McCosh, James, 5337-44
about, 5337, 5344
McCoy, Joseph G., about, 4158
McCoy, Philbrick, 6320
McCoy, Whitley P., 6058
McCracken, Harold, 5770, 5802
McCullers, Carson, 2023-24, 2335-36
McCulloch, Margaret, 4443
McCulloch, W. E., 5442
McCuskey, Dorothy, 5220
McDevitt, Josephine A., 561 1
McDonagh, Edward C, 4431
McDonald, Philip B., 4677
MacDonald, William, comp., 3079
Macdougall, A. R., 4972
MacDougall, Curtis D., 2905, 6288
McDougall, William, about, 5392
MacDowell, Edward, about, 2364, 5683
McDowell, Ephraim, about, 4822
McDowell, Tremaine, 255, 300, 5184
ed.,383, 2276, 2343
McFarland, Carl, 6227
McFarland, Marvin W., ed., 4788
McFarland, Raymond, 5872
M'Fingal, 165, 167
McGeary, Martin Nelson, 6160
INDEX / 1 145
McGibony, John R., 4849
MacGill, Caroline E., 5923
McGillicuddy, Cornelius, 501 1
about, 501 1
McGovern, John T., 4999
McGovney, Dudley O., 6405
Macgowan, Kenneth, 4901
McGraw-Hill Book Company, about,
6449
McGregor, John C, 2992
McGregor, Iowa, guidebook, 3894
McGuffey readers, 5126
Machinal, 2332
Machine politics, 3437-38, 6218, 6333,
6338, 6346, 6353, 6357, 6363,
6382, 6384-91, 6410, 6434
Mclnerny, Mary Alice, 4577
Maclver, Robert M., 5181, 5185, 6082
Mack, Connie. See McGillicuddy, Cor-
nelius
Mack, Gerstle, 4221
Mackay, Alexander, 4344-46
about, 4344
Mackay, Charles, 4370-71
about, 4369
McKay, Donald C, 3508
ed., 3501, 3516
Mackay, John A., about, 5433
MacKay, Kenneth Campbell, 6362
MacKaye, Percy, 2337, 2348
MacKaye, Steele, 2308, 2337, 2347
McKean, Dayton D., 6337, 6388, 6395
McKearin, George S., 5789
McKearin, Helen, 5789
McKee, Samuel, Jr., ed., 3289, 3291
McKelvey, Blake, 4050-52, 4654
McKelway, St. Clair, 2894
Mackenzie, Alexander, about, 3167
Mackenzie, Catherine D., 4678
Mackenzie River, 4015
McKeon, Richard, 5289, 5427
about, 5427
Mackey, David R., 4966
McKibbin, David, 5771
McKiever, Margaret F., 4887
McKinley, William, about, 3424,
3447-48
McLaughlin, Andrew Cunningham,
3301,3349.6078-79
McLaughlin, George D., about, 4785
Maclaurin, William Rupert, 4693
McLean, John G., 5914
MacLean, Malcolm S., 5228
McLean, Murdoch C, 4474
MacLeish, Archibald, 1585-88, 1908.
2333
about, 2378, 2499, 2527
MacLennan, S. F., 5289
Macleod, William Christie, 3030
McLoughlin, William G., 5480
Maclure, William, about, 4737
Macmahon, Arthur W., 6187
McManis, Jack, ed., 1481
McMaster, John Bach, 3046
about, 3046, 3058
Macmillan's Magazine, 989
MacMinn, George R., 4923
McMurry, Donald L., 3440
McMurtrie, Douglas C, 6448
MacNeil, Neil, 2906
MacNutt, Francis Augustus, tr., 3153
Macon, Nathaniel, about, 3286
Macon, Ga., guidebook, 3840
McPharlin, Paul, 4981
comp., 128
McPhee, William N., 6414
McRae, Milton A., 2886
about, 2886, 2890
McReynolds, Edwin C, 4169, 4171
McSorley's Wonderful Saloon, 2755
McTeague, 1090-92
McWilliams, Carey, 3957, 4176, 4462,
4475. 5846
Macy, Anne Sullivan, 2706
about, 2705
Macy, John Albert, ed., 2706
Macy (Rowland H.) and Co., about,
5959
Madame Butterfly, 2337
Madame Celestin's Divorce, 760
Madame Delicieuse , 748
Madame Delphine, 747-48
Madame de Mauves, 1007
Madame De Traymes, 1855
Madame Zilensky and the King of Fin-
land, 2024
Made in America, 5691
Madeleine (opera), 5681
Mademoiselle Olympe Zabrisk', 711
Madison, James, 3283, 5418, 6075, 6087
about, 2622, 3282-83
Madmen All, 517
Madrilene, 1033
Madsen, Borge, tr., 4485
Magazines, 2913-26
bibl., 2914-15, 2919
directory, 5958
folklore, 5518
hist., 2914-16, 2918-19
medical, 4809
photography, 2908
publishing, 6449-50
Maggie, a Girl of the Streets, 822-24,
835-37
Maggs, Douglas B., ed., 6090
Magic, folk, 5509, 5528-29, 5537
The Magic Curtain, 4941
Magnalia Christi Americana, 43-44
The Magnificent Ambersons, 1 802, 1 806
Magnificent Missourian, 3322
The Magpie and the Maid, 2302
Magriel, Paul D., ed., 4971-72
Mahan, Alfred Thayer, 3672, 3688,
3700
about, 3058, 3672
Maher, R. L., 6195, 6207
Mailer, Norman, 2025-28
about, 2371
Main Currents in American Thought,
2485
about, 2407
The Main Line, 23 1 4
Main Line of Mid-America, 5927
The Main Stream, 2503
Main Street, 1560
Main Street on the Middle Border, 4109
Main-Travelled Roads, 891-95
Maine, 2590
econ. condit., 4031
folksongs & ballads, 5566-67
guidebooks, 3792-95
hist., 3473
Maine — Continued
in art, 5767
language (dialects, etc.), 2256
Penobscot Indians, 301 1
soc. condit., 4031
Maine, U.S.S., 3530
Maine in literature
essays, 594-95, 606, 1859
fiction, 402-4, 562, 570-71, 1284-85,
1288, 1290, 1707
poetry, 1290, 1295, 1713-14
short stories, 1023-31
Maisel, Edward M., 5680
Major, R. H., 3163
Make Bright the Arrows, 1 609
Make Light of It, 1 879
Makemie, Francis, about, 5396, 5466
Makers and Finders, 2381
Makers of Literature, 2545
The Maying of Americans, 1768
The Maying of a Southerner, 272 1
The Making of an American, 2785
Making the American Mind, 5126
The Male Animal, 2334
Mall, Franklin B., about, 4845
Mallery, Richard D., 2250
Mallinckrodt, Edward, about, 4735
Malmin, Gunnar J., tr. & ed., 4348
Malone, Dumas, 3295, 3303
ed., 3080
Malone, Kemp, ed., 1046
Malott, Deane W., 5847
Mamba's Daughters, 1512
Mammonart, 1754
Mammoth Cave, Ky., 2946
Mamoulian, Rouben, 5678
Man, prehistoric, 2995-96, 4202
The Man against the Sky, 171 4
A Man against Time, 1556
Man and Boy, 2053
Man and Shadow, 2342
Man and Wife, 2317
The Man Coming toward You, 1871
The Man in the Crowd, 529
A Man in the Divided Sea, 2035
A Man Must Fight, 5031
The Man That Corrupted Hadleyburg,
798-99
The Man Who Came to Dinner, 1491,
1548,2327, 2334
The Man Who Died at Twelve O'clock,,
1475
The Man Who Died Twice, 1714
The Man Who Was There, 2052
Man With a Bull-Tongue Plow, 2166
The Man with the Blue Guitar, 1784
The Man with the Hoe, 1062
The Man without a Country, 901-5, 909
The Managed Casualty, 4469
Manassas to Malvern Hill, 3695
Manchester, Frederick, ed., 2375
Manchester, Herbert, 4992
Manchester, William R., 1607
Manhattan
art, 5767, 5773
fiction, 1449
See also New York (City)
Manhattan Project, 4747
Manhattan Transfer, 1327
Manifest Destiny, 3306, 3340, 3398,
3760
1 146 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mankowitz, Wolf, 1367
Manly, John M., 1070
Mann, Arthur, 4530
Mann, Horace, 5125, 5418
about, 51 16, 5125
Manners, 286
Manning, Thomas G., cd., 3106
Mannix, Daniel P., 4980
Manpower. See Labor supply
Manross, William W., 5456
Mansfield, Harvey C., 5996
Mansfield, Katherine, about, 1278
Mansfield, Luther S., ed., 491, 499
Mansfield, Richard, about, 4939
Mantle, Robert Burns, ed., 4897
Manuductio ad Ministerium, 47-48
Manufactures, 3291, 5902-6, 6030
hist., 5904, 5906
Ohio, 41 19
Many Are Called, 2058
Many Long Years Ago, 1632
Many Mansions, 1617
Many Minds, 2523
Many Thousands Gone, 1225-26
A Map of Virginia, 68
Mapes, James Jay, about, 4735
Mapleson, James Henry, 5659
Maps. See Atlases and maps
Marberry, M. Marion, 1064
Marble, Alice, 5049
about, 5049
Marble, Annie (Russell), 2465, 6447
ed., 595,597
The Marble Faun (Faulkner), 1379
The Marble Faun (Hawthorne), 333
Marbut, Curtis F., 2947, 5816
about, 2947
Marcel, Gabriel, 5363
March, Peyton C., 3712
March, Richard, ed., 1364
March, William. See Campbell, Wil-
liam Edward March
Marchand, Ernest, ed., 1 13
Marches Now the War Is Over, 624
Marching On, 1241
Marco Bozzaris, 323
Marco Millions, 1648
Marcosson, Isaac F., 2892
Marcou, Jules, 4742
Marcus Aurelius, 2281
Marden, Charles F., 4432, 4578
Mardi, 478
Maretzek, Max, 5659
Margaret, 402-4
Margaret Fleming, 2337
Marginalia, 533
Maria, the Potter of San lldefonso, 2723
Marianas Islands, 4218
Marietta, Ohio, 3767, 4030
Marin, John, 5767
about, 5767, 5783
Marine Corps, hist., 3668
Marion, Francis, 171
Maritime commerce, 3524
Maritime rights. See Freedom of the
seas
Marjorie Daw, 71 1-12
Marjorie Morningstar, 223 1
Markel, Lester, 3615
1549.
Marketing, 5944-45
See also Agricultural products —
marketing; Retail trade; Whole-
sale trade
Markham, Edwin, 1061-63
Marland, Ernest Whitworth, about,
2731
The Marmot Drive, 1992
Marquand, John Phillips,
1589-97
about, 1598, 2376
Marquesas Islands, fiction, 471-75
Marriage, 4550, 4561, 4571-72, 4617
counseling, 4570
Indian, 3022, 3043
The Marriage of Venus, 1740
The Married Loo\, 1641
Marriott, Alice Lee, 2722-25, 3007
The Marrow of Tradition, 756
Marryat, Frederick, 4324-28
about, 4324
Mars feems's Nightmare, 757
Marse Chan, 11 00-2
Marse Covington, 705
"Marse Henry," 2892
Marsh, James, about, 5263
Marsh, Othniel Charles, about, 4721,
4724, 4754
Marsh, Philip M., ed., 143
Marshall, Helen E., 4839
Marshall, John, about, 6096, 6231,
6237-38, 6240, 6258, 6260
Marshall, John David, comp., 6481
Marshall, Thomas F., comp., 2552
Marshall, Thomas M., 3157
Marshall, William L., 6276
Marshall, Okla., 4171
Marshall Islands, 4218
Marshall Mission to China, 3593
Marshall Plan, 3637, 3639-40
The Marshes of Glynn, 1038
Marston, William Moulton, 4975
Martens, Elise H., 5205
The Martian Chronicles, 1934
Martin, Alexander C, 2960
Martin, Asa Earl, ed., 4056
Martin, Boyce F., 5847
Martin, Clyde E., 4565
Martin, Edwin T., 4753
Martin, Eveline C, 3179
Martin, Harry B., 5053
Martin, Howard H., ed., 4212
Martin, John, 4968, 4972
Martin, John Bartlow, 4124
Martin, Paul S., 2993
Martin, Robert F., 5893
Martin, Thomas C, 4782
Martin Eden, 1056-57
Martineau, Harriet, 4315-19
Martinez, Maria Montoya, about, 2723
Marvel, Ik, pseud., 506-10
Marvin, W. T., 5260
Marx, Herbert L., Jr., ed., 4703
Marx, Karl, about, 1743, 5291
Marxist influence in literature, 1048,
1754, 2421. 2441, 2507, 2539
Marxist interpretation of literature,
2439
Mary, 1190
Mary of Scotland, 1 1 72, 1 1 74
Mary Peters, 1285
Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland, drama,
1172, 1174
Maryland
architecture, 5706
culture, 3233
fiction, 405, 412-13
Germans, 4480
guidebooks, 3824-25
hist., 3209, 3233, 4073
legal hist., 6284
plantation life, 4517
printing, Colonial, 6448
rivers, 3999
The Maryland Gazette, about, 2854
A Mask^ for Privilege, 4462
Mas/^ of Silenus, 2413
Mason, Alpheus Thomas, 6246, 6249
ed., 6065
Mason, Daniel Gregory, 5625
Mason, George, about, 3254
Mason, Kathryn Harrod, 2726-27
Mason, Lowell, about, 5684
Masons (Freemasons), 4574
The Masque of Judgment, 1069
The Masque of Kings, 1 174, 2348
A Masque of Mercy, 1 452
The Masque of Pandora, 435
A Masque of Reason, 1452
The Masque of the Gods, 2282
Mass Communications. See Commu-
nications
Mass Culture, 6443
Massachusettensis de conditoribus,
3198
Massachusetts, 3965, 4034-38
courts, 6292
culture, 3178, 3199, 3235, 3241
early settlers, 7, 17-18, 32
education, 5125
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3798-3803
hist., 2580, 3991, 4012, 4034
Colonial period, 90-91, 3178,
3181-82, 3198-99, 3211, 3235,
.3241
in literature, 40-44, 49-58, 62-64,
75^77. 276. 587-93. 596-97. 606
fiction, 562, 665, 1438-39, 1443,
1589,2293
poetry, 7— II, 79-83, 662
sermons, 18, 33
short stories, 881-86
legal hist., 6228, 6242, 6292
maritime hist., 5936
printing, Colonial, 6448
relations with Gt. Brit., 3241
rivers, 3991, 4012
Massachusetts General Hospital, Bos-
ton, hist., 4853
Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston.
Social Service Dept., hist., 4805
Massachusetts Historical Society, 696
Massachusetts Medical Society, hist.,
4804
Massachusetts Reformatory, Concord,
about, 4648
Massachusetts Reformatory for Women,
Framingham, about, 4649
Massachusetts State Board of Health,
hist., 4879
Master Plan U.S.A., 3624
INDEX / 1 147
Masters, Edgar Lee, 1 599-1 601, 3988
about, 1599, 2419
Masterson, James R., 5542
Materialism, 3134, 6067
Maternal and infant welfare, 4870
New York (City), 4851
Mathematics, 5254
foundations, 5346
hist., 4739
Mather, Cotton, 40-50, 82, 3178, 3199
about, 40, 92, 1873, 2493, 3178,
4034,4826,5417
Mather, Frank Jewett, Jr., 2425
Mather, Increase, about, 92, 2483, 3199
Mather, Stephen Tyng, about, 5866
Mathews, John A., about, 4785
Mathews, John Joseph, 2728-31
Mathews, John Mabry, 4132
Mathews, Lois Kimball. See Rosen-
berry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews
Matschat, Cecile (Hulse), 3976
Matter (philosophy), 5371
Mattfeld, Julius, 5639
Matthews, Basil J., 4450
Matthews, Brander, 770, 791, 2466-75
about, 2504
Matthews, Cornelius, 2295
Matthews, William, 3662
comp., 3102
Matt/iias at the Door, 1714
Matthiessen, Francis O., 1349, 2476-
77.5319
ed., 1008-9, 2344
about, 2127
Mauberley (Hugh Selwyn), about, 1670
Maud-Evelyn, 1012
Maud Martha, 1939
Maudslay, Robert, 2732-33
Maugham, W. Somerset, 1652
Mauk, James F., comp., 4720
Mauldin, William Henry, 2734-38
about, 2737
Maule's Curse, 2544
Maurer, David W., 2259, 2262
Maurer, Herrymon, 6022
Maury, Matthew Fontaine, about, 4721
Maverick, Maury, 6207
Maverick. Town, 4195
Maxims. See Quotations
Maxwell, Allen, ed., 5509, 5521
Maxwell, Desmond E. S., 1365
Maxwell, William, 2029-33
May, Henry Farnham, 5492
May-Day, 289
The May-Pole of Merrymount, 5 1
Maya culture, 2994
Mayer, Arthur, 4959
about, 4959
Mayer, Frederick E., 5397
Mayers, Lewis, 6289
The May field Deer, 1825
Mayhew, Jonathan, about, 5472, 6068
Mayhew, Lewis B., 5160
Maynard, Harold Bright, about, 4803
Maynard, Harold H., 5945
Maynard, Theodore, 5400, 5450
Mayo, Bernard, 3342, 3344
ed., 3294, 3297
Mayo, Margot, 5587
Mayo, Morrow, 4206—7
Mayo, William W., about, 4827
Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minn., about,
4827
Mayorga, M., ed., 4898
Mays, Arthur B., 5210
Mays, Benjamin Elijah, 5500
Mays, David John, 2739-40
Mazeppa, 2302
Me and Juliet (music), about, 5685
Mead, Ben Carlton, illus., 5531
Mead, Edwin D., 907
Mead, Frank Spencer, 5398
Mead, G. H., 5254, 5289
Mead, Margaret, 3042
Meade, George Gordon, about, 2614
Meade, Robert Douthat, 3263, 3396
Meadows, John C, 4095
Meadows, Paul, 4757
Meaning, theories of, 5289, 5291, 5346
Means, Gardiner C, 5898, 601 1, 6013
about, 5888
Means, James H., 4888
Meany, Edmond S., 4215
Mearns, David C, 3395, 6469
Mears, Eliot Grinnell, 4468
The Measure of Man, 2453
Measurement (education), 5229
Measurement and Prediction, 3724
Meat industry, 5869
fiction, 1754-55
Meat out of the Eater, 79
Mecanique celeste, 4746
Mechanic arts, study & teaching, 5 191
Mecom, Jane (Franklin), 129
Medea, translation and adaptation,
1535.2335
Medical missionaries, Hawaii, 2688
Medical societies, 4812
Middle West (to 1850), 4810
Medical Society of the State of Penn-
sylvania, hist., 4804
Medicine, 2844, 4721, 4804-91
care & treatment, 4808, 4825, 4885,
case studies, 4815
cost, 4808, 4870, 4882-91
charities, 4820, 4842, 4862-64, 4866,
education, 4813, 4825, 4831, 4855-
61
post-graduate, 4857-59, 4861,
4873.
premedical, 4861
ethics, 4812, 4817
group practice, 4862, 4886, 4888-89
hist., 4049, 4809, 4814
Colonial period, 4826
i8th-i9th cent., 4812
19th cent., 3765, 41 12
20th cent., 4805, 4862
in literature
Colonial, 40
fiction, 375
See also Physicians and surgeons
laws & legislation, 4809-10, 4882
personnel, 4809, 4835-36, 4838,
4862, 4870, 4885
practice, 4091, 4809, 4811, 4813-15,
4817, 4825, 4827, 4829-30, 4841,
4891
research, 4779, 4819, 4841, 4870
hist., 4813, 4831
Medicine — Continued
schools, 4809-10, 4812, 4831, 4860-
61
social work, 4835, 4839
hist., 4805
stat., 4815, 4865
See also Clinical medicine; Industrial
medicine; Magazines — medical;
Preventive medicine; Quacks and
quackery
Medill, Joseph, about, 2862
Medill family, 2862
Medina, Jose Toribio, 3174
Mediterranean area, relations with,
3573
Meek, Joe, about, 2833
Meetinghouse Hill, 1630-1783, 5417
Megrue, Roi Cooper, 2348
Meh Lady, 1 100-2
Meine, Franklin J., 5505
ed., 704
Meisel, Max, 4736
Melanclha, 1767
Meland, Bernard Eugene, 5437
Melcher, Marguerite (Fellows), 5469
Meliboeus-Hipponax, 456-57
Mellichampe, 547
Meltzer, Milton, 4440
Melville, Annabelle McConnell, 5477
Melville, Herman, 470-96, 2290
about, 21, 274, 333, 478, 481, 497-
505, 1231, 2284, 2380-81, 2397,
2420, 2456, 2476, 2478, 2544
Melville Goodwin, USA, 1595
Melville Society, 499
The Member of the Wedding, 2023-24,
2335-36
The Memoirs of a Shy Pornographer,
2082
The Memoirs of an American Citizen,
957
Memoirs of an Epicurean, 2281
Memoirs of Carwin the Biloquist, 1 1 1
Memoranda, 638
A Memory of Two Mondays, 2049
Memphis, Tenn.
hist., 4105
politics, 6207
Men and Brethren, 1300
Men and Women, 2314
Men at Work., 1548
Men of the Mountains, 21 68
Men on Bataan, 1992
Men, Women, and Ghosts, 1583-84
Men, Women, and Pianos, 5622
Mencken, Henry L., 832, 1602-5, 2248,
2411, 2876, 6421
ed., 266-67
about, 1606-7, 2406, 2429, 2486,
2503
Meneely, Alexander Howard, 3702
Menes, Abraham, 4458-59
Menjou, Adolphe, 4954
about, 4954
Menkc, Frank G., 5057
Mennonites, 4058, 4480, 5442
Mental hygiene, 4619, 4833-36, 5246
Mentally ill, 4617
care & treatment, 4828, 4830, 4833-
34, 4836-40
1 148 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mercantilism, Colonial period, 3193,
3242, 3262, 5878
Mercer, Morgan. See Dana, Julian
Merchant marine, 5930
Mercier, Louis J. A., 2375
Mercy Dodd, 2298
Mercy Philbricl(s Choice, 984
Merely Colossal, 4959
Mereness, Newton D., ed., 4233
Mergenthaler, Ottmar, about, 4786
Meriam, Lewis, 3038
Merit system. See Civil service reform
Merk, Frederick, 3083
Merlin, 171 4
Merriam, Charles Edward, 3646, 4540,
6066, 6363, 6380, 6406
Merriam, George S., 2879
Merriam, Robert E., 3720
Merrick, Elliott Tucker, 2741-42
Merrill, Francis E., 4572, 4625
Merrill, George P., 4737
Merrily We Roll Along, 1548
Merritt, LeRoy Charles, 6452
Merry Mount, 5 1
Merry-Mount: A Romance of the Mas-
sachusetts Colony, 2293
The Merry Partners, 4935
Merrymount Press, Boston, about, 6459
bib!., 6459
Merton, Robert K., ed., 3724
Merton, Thomas, 2034-42
Merton of the Movies, 1 546
Merwin, Frederic E., ed., 2927
Mesick, Jane Louise, 4224, 4228
Mesmeric Revelation, 529
Messiah, 2188
Messiter, Arthur H., 5666
Metalwork, 5596
Met amor a, 23 11
The Metamorphic Tradition in Modern
Poetry, 2497
The Metaphysical Passion, 2499
Metaphysics, 5257, 5260, 5278, 5289,
5291, 5310, 5343, 5346, 5352,
5355-56, 5363
The Metaphysics of Pragmatism, 5254
Metcalf, Clyde H., 3668
Metcalf, Eleanor M., ed., 489, 502
Metcalf, Frank J., 5634
Metcalf, Keyes D., 6470
Meteor, 1206
Meteorology, 2950-51, 4722
The Method of Divine Government,
5337
A Methodist Saint, 2586, 5474
Methodists, 2586-87, 5404, 5442
hist., 5416, 5463
Willamette valley, 4213
Metropolitan government. See Local
government
Metropolitan Life Insurance Company,
about, 5992
Metropolitan State Hospital, Waltham,
Mass., about, 4838
The Mettle of the Pasture, 719-20
Metzdorf, Robert F., ed., 276
Metzger, Arnold, 5335
Metzger, Walter P., 2358, 5181
Mexican War. See War with Mexico
Mexicans, 4197, 4204, 4470-72, 4475-
76
Mexico
cession of the Southwest, 3355
fiction, 311
hist., 2294
poetry, 1585
relations with, 3504, 3575, 3586
short stories, 1659
travel & travelers, 1659, 4352-53
Meyer, Adolf, about, 4722
Meyer, Balthasar Henry, ed., 5923
Meyers, Marvin, 3319
Miami, Fla.
descr., 3846
politics, 6207
Mich, Daniel D., 2908
Michaux, Francois Andre, 4277-78
about, 4276
Michelson, Albert Abraham, about, 4721
Michelson, Charles, 6364
Michigan, 4137-38
architecture, 5719
Dutch, 4493
folklore, 5533, 5535
folksongs & ballads, 5567, 5575
guidebook, 3882
historical geography, 2969
hist., 4111, 4137
Norwegians, 4487
rural communities, 4109
short stories, 415-18, 1149-50
soc. life & cust., 2661
Michigan. University, 5201
Michigan State Medical Society, 4818
Michl, Herman E., 5902
Microbe Hunters, 1520
Mid-Century, 4453
Mid-Century American Poets, 1948
Mid-Channel, 1572, 1575
The Middle-Aged Man on the Flying
Trapeze, 1817
Middle Atlantic States, 4043-65
guidebooks, 3806-26
hist., 3783-84, 4043
printing, Colonial, 6448
public libraries (1 850-1 900), 6472
travel & travelers, 4256-57, 4263,
4329
Middle Border in literature, 898-99
Middle classes, 2893, 3774, 4516, 4542,
4553. 6063, 6346
Middle East, World War II, 3726
The Middle of the Journey, 2519
Middle West
agriculture, 5831
descr., 4113, 41 16
Dutch, 4493
econ. condit., 4109, 41 15
folklore, 5518
geography, 41 13
historic houses, etc., 5794
hist., 3053, 3147, 3427, 3446, 3784,
41 15
hunting, 2794
newspapers, 2862, 2887, 2893
Norwegians, 4487
pictorial guide, 3782
play-party songs, 5586
politics, 41 15, 6434
rural communities, 2655
singing games, 5586
soc. hist., 4810, 4827, 4860, 5194
Middle West — Continued
soc. life & cust., 2893, 4097-98, 4109,
4115-16, 4136, 4564
Middle West in literature
bibl., 2502
fiction, 867-77, 959-63, 1 178, 1 183,
1412, 1416, 1541, 1543, 1559-61,
1564, 1568, 1644, 1646, 1786,
1789, 1802, 1840, 1845, 2052
hist. & crit., 2502
poetry, 753-55, 11 26-31, 1580, 1644-
45, 1727, 1731
short stories, 701-5, 890-95
travels & travelers, 314
The Middle Years, 1015
Middlemen, commercial, 5960
Middleton, George, 2743-44
about, 2744
Middletown, 4592
Middletown in Transition, 4593
A Midnight Bell, 2306
Midstream, 2708
Midway Island, 4218
Midwest at Noon, 41 16
Miggles, 930, 937
Mighell, Ronald L., 5844
Migrant labor, 1775, 5846
Migration, internal, 2943, 4028, 4030,
4098, 4226, 4394, 4397, 4561
Mormons, 4183
Negroes, 4446
The West, 4149
Mikesell, Raymond F., 3562, 3639
Miles, Laban J., 2729
Miles City, Mont., pictorial hist., 4151,
4153
Military Academy, West Point, about,
3656
Military Air Transport Service, about,
3643a
Military assistance to foreign nations,
3598,3636
Military courts, 6289
Military history, 2580, 3141, 3643,
3644a, 3650
American Revolution, 3238-39, 3255,
3261, 3269, 3271-72
French and Indian War (1755-63),
3271
Civil War, 3408
World War I, 3715
World War II, 3499
See also specific branches of the
Armed Forces, e.g., Army — hist.
Military life
civil relations, 3646, 3650
Civil War, 3704-5
in art, 5765, 5807
Revolutionary War, 3679
World War II, 3724
Military life in literature
drama, 1491, 2145-46
fiction, 821, 825-29, 835-36, 1240-
41, 1249, 1326, 1380, 1396, 1496-
99, i54i, 1544. 1708-11, 1745,
1940-41, 1992-94, 2003-4, 2011,
2023, 2025-26, 2181, 2229-30
historical writings, 1551
personal narratives, 277, 11 70, 13 10
poetry, 1599-1601, 1948, 1999, 2139,
2141
INDEX / 1 149
Military life in literature — Continued
reporting, 1170, 1769-70, 1992-4,
2044
short stories, 732-37, 2011, 2057
Military music, 5653
Military policy, 3623, 3629, 3634, 3643,
3651
Military psychiatry. See Psychiatry,
military
Milk, for Babes, 1 7
A Milk. White Flag, 2306
Mill, J. S., 5337
about, 5337
Millar, Robert W., 6300
Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1608-9, 2332
about, 1 610, 2406
Miller, Alfred Jacob, paintings by, 3330
Miller, Arthur, 2043-49, 2335-36
Miller, Claude R., 6323
Miller, D. S., 5222, 5335-36
Miller, Delbert C, 4552
Miller, Edgar G., 5731
Miller, George F., 5159
Miller, George J., 2940
Miller, Gerrit S., 2955
Miller, Helen Day (Hill), 3254
Miller, Henry, ed., 4418
Miller, Henry (b. 1891), 610, 1611-13
about, 2498
Miller, Herman P., 4395
Miller, James M., 3767
Miller, Joaquin, 1064-68, 2337
about, 1064, 1068, 2503
Miller, John C, 3255
Miller, Joseph, 3924-25
Miller, Lee Graham, 2745
Miller, Margaret, 5696
Miller, Mary Britton ("Isabel Bolton"),
1614-17
Miller, Max Carlton, 2746-54
about, 2746-54
Miller, Merle, about, 2371
Miller, Paul W., ed., 3838
Miller, Perry, 84, 2288, 2478, 3196,
3742-43. 4513. 5299
ed., 21, 2345-46, 3744
Miller, R. C, 3058
Miller, Robert Moats, 5493
Miller, William, 5875, 6441
ed., 6023
Miller, William H., about, 4785
Miller, William J., 2945
The Miller of Old Church, 1461
Millet, Jean Francois, about, 1061
Millett, Fred B., 991
Millett, John D., 5171, 6187
ed., 5172
Millikan, Robert A., 4755
about, 4722, 4755, 5434
A Million and One Nights, 4944
Millis, Harry A., 6053
Mills, Charles Wright, 4470, 4553
The Mills of the Kavananghs, 2010
Milne, Gordon, 2278
Milton, George Fort, 3397, 4068, 6146
Milton, John, about, 231
Milwaukee, Wis., 3885, 4140, 6207
Mimi's Marriage, 1035
Mims, Edwin, Jr., 4899
Mims, Stewart L., 4265
ed., 4264
Mind and Spirit, 4044
The Mind of Pritnitive Man, about,
2407
The Mind of the South, 4066
A Mind That Found Itself, 4834
Mine Eyes Have Seen the Glory, 2603
Mine the Harvest, 1 609
Miner, Ward L., 1401, 2508
Mineral resources. See Mines and min-
eral resources
Mineralogical Society of America,
about, 4733
Mineralogy, 4715
Miners
folklore, 5533, 5578
folksongs & ballads, 5558, 5578
language (dialects, etc.), 5578
Mines and mineral resources, 4174,
5907,5917
folklore, 5531-32
Calif., 4372
Colo., 3913
Middle Atlantic States, 4255, 4336
Middle West, 41 13
Mo., 4108
Nev., 4184-85
N. Mex., 4188
Southern States, 4255, 4336
The West, 4177, 4383
Mingo, 917-19
M in hag America, 5483
The Minister's Wooing, 568-69
Mink and Red Herring, 2904
Minkoff, N. B., 4458
Minneapolis
Jews, 4456
music, 5654
Swedes, 4486
Minnesota, 3663, 3948, 3954, 4141-43
architecture, 5719
fiction, 1560, 1568
guidebooks, 3886-88
historical geography, 2969
Norwegians, 4487
rural communities, 4109
Swedes, 4486
Minnesota. University, about, 5184,
5202
Minnesota. University. Bureau of
Institutional Research, 5202
Minnesota. University. Program of
American Studies, 2553
The Minnesota Arrowhead Country,
3887
Minnie Field, 2332
Minorcan dialect, 2258
Minorities, 4426-35, 4551
bibl., 4426
civil liberties & rights, 6129
magazines, 2918
Great Plains, 4159
Washington, D.C., 4065
Minority Report, 2415
Minstrels, 2472, 4894, 5637, 5640
Minstrels of the Mine Patch, 5578
Minter, John Easter, 4014
The Minute Man (sculpture), 5736
The Minute Men of 1774-1775, 2304
Minute Particulars, 1227
The Miracle Chapel, 1035
Mirror for Gotham, 4048
A Mirror for the Sky, 2210
A Mirror for Witches, 1439
Mirsky, Jeanette, 2980, 3167, 4789
Miscally, Mildred Lois, 2856
Miss Lonely hearts, 1843
Miss Lulu Bett, 1 455
Miss Marvel, 1440
Miss Mehetabel's Son, 711
Miss Ravenel's Conversion from Seces-
sion to Loyalty, 278-79
Missionaries in China, fiction, 1252
Missions, 541 1, 5489, 5723
Baptist, 5443
Catholic, 5451
Jesuit, 3075, 3158, 3171
Negro, 5500
overseas, 5405
Hawaii, 2688
Missions, Indian. See Indians, Amer-
ican— missions
Mississippi, 4079
folklore, 5547
folksongs & ballads, 5576
guidebooks, 3849-50
hist., 3850, 4024
Mississippi in literature
drama, 2218, 2223, 2225, 2228
editorials, essays, etc., 194-97
fiction, 546-1379, 1786, 2202, 2204,
2206, 2208
short stories, 1379, 2202-3
2207, 2209
2205,
3982,
Mississippi River, 2803, 3975,
4110
descr., 784-86
folklore, 5523
in art, 5805
legends, 5523
showboats, 4978
travel & travelers, 3170, 4281, 4300,
4324, 4336, 4344, 4369
Mississippi River Delta, 2779, 3952
Mississippi Valley, 3954, 3960, 3975
fiction, 778-83, 787-93, 1403, 1405
geography, 41 13
hist., 3147, 3531, 3982, 4164
short stories, 891-95
travel & travelers, 307, 319-21
Mississippi Valley Historical Associa-
tion, 3050
Missouri, 2764, 3346, 3948, 3960, 4108
caves, 2946
fiction, 763-65
folklore, 5528
folksongs & ballads, 5568-69
frontier life, 4097-98
Germans, 4478
guidebook, 3861
resources, 4108
rural communities, 4109
travel & travelers, 366, 4322
Missouri Compromise, 3346
Missouri Fur Co., 4148
Missouri River and valley, 4001, 4145,
4M7
fur trade, 4148
geography, 41 13
in art, 5805
travel & travelers, 4307
Mr. Dooley at His Best, 865
Mr. Dooley in Peace and War, 863
431240—60-
-74
1 150 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Mr. Dooley in the Hearts of His Coun-
trymen, 864
Mr. Dooley: Now and Forever, 866
Mr. Dooley Says, 866
Mr. Dooley's Opinions, 866
Mr. Dooley's Philosophy, 866
Mr. Hodge and Mr. Hazard, 1904
Mr. Pope, 181 1
Mister Roberts, 2335
Mister Zip, 2154
Mrs. Bumpstead-Leigh, 2348
Mistress Nell, 2313
Mrs. Ripley's Trip, 893
Mitchell, Broadus, 3291, 4068, 5877
Mitchell, Donald Grant, 506-10
Mitchell, Donald W., 3669
Mitchell, Edward Page, about, 2874
Mitchell, John M., 5007
Mitchell, Langdon, 2313, 2337, 2347
Mitchell, Lucy Sprague, 5234
Mitchell, Margaret, 161 8-1 9
Mitchell, Robert V., 5945
Mitchell, Silas Weir, about, 4828
Mitchell, Stewart, 3441
ed., 100
Mitchell, Wesley C., about, 5888
Mitchell, William, general, 2981
about, 3647, 5938
Mitchell, S. Dak., guidebook, 3899
Mitropoulos, Dimitri, about, 5654
Mittelholzer, Edgar, 1493
Mittelman, E. B., 6033
Mixed Company, 2147
Mizener, Arthur, 1431
Mliss, 930, 937, 939
Mobilizations, military, 3661
Moby-Dick., 333, 481-83, 491
Mock, Elizabeth, ed., 5717
Mock, James R., 3462
A Model of Christian Charity, 90
Modern Chivalry, 106-8
A Modern Instance, 965-66, 982
Modern Language Association of
America, 2457, 2552
Modern Poetry and the Tradition, 2378
Modern Rhetoric, 2378
The Modern Temper, 2453
Modernist-fundamentalist controversy,
5429-30
Modes of Being, 5382
Modoc Indians, editorials, sketches, etc.,
1065
Moeller, Philip, 2337
Moffett, Harold Y., 765
Mohawk River and valley, 40 n
fiction, 1355
Mohr, Charles E., ed., 2946
Mohtin, 249-50
Mojave Desert, 3947
Moliere, Jean Baptiste Pocquelin, about,
2466, 2474
Mollhausen, Heinrich Balduin, about,
5806
Molloy, Robert, 4093
Monaghan, Frank, 3304, 4229
Monaghan, James (Jay), 2757-59, 3345
Monday Night, 1 242
Monetary policy. See Finance — public
Money, 5974-75. 59^3. 5993
Money Writes, 1754
The Monk, and the Hangman's Daugh-
ter, 739
Monongahela River, 4019
Monopolies, 6026, 6030, 6392
radio, 4709
telephone, 4673, 4710
See also Oligopoly
Monro, Isabel Stevenson, 5753
Monro, Kate M., 5753
Monroe, Harriet, 2760-61
ed., 2567
about, 2760-61
Monroe, James, about, 3284
Monroe, Paul, 5143
ed., 51 10
Monroe, Walter S., 5247
ed., 51 1 1
Monroe County, N.Y., 3810
Monroe Doctrine, 3138, 3284, 3575,
3577.3579.
Monroe Township, N.J., 3815
The Monster, 835
Mont Saint Michel and Chartres, 693-
94
Montague, Ludwell Lee, 3584
Montague, William Pepperell, 5260,
5289
ed., 5250
Montaigne, Michel Eyquem de, about,
280
Montana, 3951, 4147, 4178
guidebook, 3910
in literature, 4179
resources, 4212
Montcalm, Louis Joseph de, about, 3171
Monte Cristo and Other Plays, 2313
Monteleone, Vincent J., 2274
Monterey, Calif., soc. life & cust., 4352-
53
Monterey peninsula, Calif., 3930
Monteux, Pierre, about, 5649
Montez, Lola, about, 4923
Montgomery, D. E., 5898
Montgomery, Richard, drama, 105
Montlezun, baron de, 4289
about, 4288
The Monument Rose, 1983
Monuments, public, 4049, 5735
See also specific monuments, e.g.,
Lincoln Memorial; Mount Rush-
more National Memorial
Moody, Dwight L., about, 5395, 5403,
5405,5480
Moody, Helen Wills, about, 4987
Moody, William R., 5480
Moody, William Vaughn, 1069-71,
2337
Moon, Bucklin, 2050-51
A Moon for the Misbegotten, 1649
The Moon Is Blue, 2335
The Moon Is Down, 1780
The Moon of the Caribbees, 1648
Moore, Addison Webster, 5254
Moore, Albert Burton, 4099
Moore, Douglas, 1222
Moore, Edward O, 5660
Moore, Ernest O, 5289
Moore, Glover, 3346
Moore, Harry Estill, 3783
Moore, Marianne, 1620-22
about, 2426
Moore, Merrill, 1623-27
about, 1628, 1809
Moore, R. O, about, 5457
Moorhead, Max L., ed., 4188
Moorish Science Temple of America,
about, 5498
Moos, Malcolm C, 6132-33, 6366,
6422
ed., 6421
Morais, Herbert M., 5408
The Moral Argument Against Calvin-
ism, 231
The Moral Decision, 6261
Moral philosophy. See Ethics
Morals, 4315, 4519, 4566
Moravian Church, 4480, 5442
More, Louis Trenchard, 2425
More, Paul Elmer, 2425, 2479-81
about, 2375, 2479, 2503, 2593
More Clinical Sonnets, 1627
More Fables, 703
More Fish to Fry, 5070
More Stories in the Modern Manner,
2566
Moreau de Saint-Mery, Mederic Louis
Elie, 4263-65
about, 4263
Morehouse, Ward, 4900
Morgan, Arthur Ernest, about, 4803
Morgan, Barbara B., 4968
Morgan, Bayard Quincy, 4481
Morgan, Dale L., 3989, 4176
Morgan, Edmund S., 3100, 3256-57
Morgan, Helen M., 3257
Morgan, Hugh Gerthon, 4589
Morgan, J. Pierpont, about, 5880, 5882,
5978
Morgan, John, about, 4822, 4856
Morgan, Lewis H., 2961, 3008
about, 3009
Morgan, Murray C, 4216
Morgan, Robert J., 3324
Morgan, Thomas Hunt, about, 4721-22
Morgenstern, Julian, 5427
about, 5427
Morgenthau, Hans J., 3626
Morison, Elting E., ed., 3465
Morison, Samuel Eliot, 3083, 3103,
3164, 3198, 3271, 3305, 3536,
3721,3745.5203, 5936
ed., 6, 3171, 5203
Morley, Christopher, 5222
Morley, Sylvanus Griswold, 2994
about, 2994
Morley of Blackburn, John Morley,
viscount, about, 2480-81
Mormons and Mormonism, 2867, 3879,
3961, 4183, 5404. 54". 5439
fiction, 1424
folklore, 5538
folksongs & ballads, 5538
hist., 2161, 4384, 5464-65, 5538
legends, 5538
music, 5630
The Morning after the First Night, 4906
The Morning Watch, 1907
Morrill, Justin Smith, about, 2768
Morrill Act, 51 13, 5186, 5191
Morris, Alton Chester, ed., 5581
Morris, Charles, 5335
Morris, George Pope, 2295
INDEX
/ II5I
Morris, Joe Alex, 2860
ed., 3548
Morris, Lloyd R., 3746, 4048, 4519,
4903.5333.5938
Morris, Richard B., 6057, 6229-30
ed., 3072, 3288
Morris, Robert, about, 6016
Morris, Wright, 2052-56
Morris, 111., soc. condit., 4557
Morrison, Alfred J., tr. & ed., 4257
Morrison, Hugh S., 5714-15
Morrow, D wight W., about, 3586
Morse, John T., Jr., 377, 3416, 4036
ed.,3263
Morse, Samuel F. B., about, 4675-76,
4680, 4752, 4786
Mort, Paul R., 5144
A Mortal Antipathy, 375
Mortal Slimmer, 1 826
Mortenson, Ernest, 6267
Mortimer, Lillian, 2305
Morton, Ferdinand Joseph ("Jelly
Roll"), about, 5643
Morton, Ira, 5037
Morton, Thomas, 51-52
about, 1873, 3198
Morton, Thomas G., 4850
Morton, William T. G., about, 4721,
4822
Morton's Hope, 2293
Mosely, P. E., 3562
Moses, Anna Mary R. ("Grandma"),
2762-63
about, 2763
Moses, Montrose J., 4937
ed., 145,199,2347-48
Mosher, William E., 6188
Mosier, Richard D., 5126
Moskowitz, Sam, 2377
Mosquitoes, 138 1
Mosses from an Old Manse, 338-40
The Moth and the Flame, 2347
The Mother (Asch), 1191
The Mother (Buck), 1255
A Mother in Mannville, 1684
The Mother's Recompense, 1853
Motion pictures, 4905, 4944-63
actors & actresses, 4946
arbitration, 6299
audiences, 4895, 4950
censorship, 4947
essays, 1226
hist., 4519, 4944-46, 4954-55. 4959.
4962-63, 5689
in education, 5231
psychological aspects, 4951
satire, 1688
Motley, John Lothrop, 2293
about, 2462, 3376
Motorboat racing, 5016
Mott, Frank Luther, 1052, 2482
ed., 131, 2329, 2847, 29°7> 29t5
Mott, Frederick D., 4869
Mott, Rodney Loomer, 6097
Mounds and mound-builders, 2996,
4323
Mount, Charles Merrill, 5771
Mount, William Sidney, about, 5768
Mount Holyoke College, hist., 5193
Mount Hood, guidebook, 3938
Mount Rushmore National Memorial,
5737
Mount Savage, 2302
Mount Shasta, 4210
Mt. Sinai Holy Church of America,
Inc., about, 5498
Mount Tyndall, 4210
Mount Vernon, Va. (George Wash-
ington's residence), 3271
Mount Whitney, 4210
Mountain Interval, 1452
Mountain life, 4174, 5064
short stories, 910, 917-21, 1084-88
The Mountain Lion, 2158
Mountain men, 3330
fiction, 312
The Mountain on the Desert, 1 69 1
Mountain States, 3784
Mountain Time, 2415
Mountaineering, 2665, 3938, 4174,
4210-11
Mourning Becomes Electra, 1647-48
The Moving Finger, 1855
Mowatt, Anna Cora, 2337, 2347, 4927
about, 4927
Mowbray, Albert H., 5990
Mowrer, Edgar A., 3627
Mowry, George E., 3084, 3467, 4202
Muck, Karl, about, 5649
Muckrakers, 1107, 1155, 1754, 6430,
6432
See also Reform and reform move-
ments
Mudd, Emily (Hartshorne), 4570
Muelder, Hermann R., 2973
Muelder, Walter G., ed., 5259
Mueller, John H., 5650
Mueller, Kate (Hevner), 5212
Miinsterberg, Hugo, about, 4225, 5392
Muhlenberg, Frederick Augustus, about,
3231
Muhlenberg, Henry Melchior, about,
3231,5396,5462
Muhlenberg, William A., about, 5457
Muhlenberg family, 3231
Muir, John, 1072-83
about, 1081-82, 2422
Muldoon, William, about, 5032
Mulford, Roland J., 5155
Muller, Herbert J., 1897
Mullet, Charles F., 3258
Mumford, Lewis, 2407, 3731, 5695,
5701
ed., 5716
about, 5508
Muncie, Ind., soc. condit., 4593
Municipal government. See Local gov-
ernment
Municipal law, 6277
radio & television, 4708
The Municipal Year Book., 6213
Munitions problem, 3669
Munitz, Milton Karl, 5375
Munsell, Joel, 6447
Munsey, Frank A., about, 2913
Munsey's Magazine, about, 2913
Munson, Gorham B., 2425
Murat, Prince Achille, 4293-96
Murchison, Carl A., ed., 5393
Mmdcr for Pleasure, 2436
Murder in the Cathedral, 1359
The Murder of Lidice, 1608
The Murders in the Rue Morgue, 529
Murdock, Frank, 2301
Murdock, Kenneth B., 2424, 2483,
2496,3199
ed., 48, 50, 83, 1009
Murfree, Mary Noailles, 1084-88, 2296
Murphy, Arthur E., 3739, 5290
Murphy, Henry C, 5971, 5977
tr., 3208
Murphy, Robert Cushman, 2962
Murray, Henry A., ed., 441
Murray, John, about, 5473
Murray, Philip, about, 6394
Murray, William G., 5848
Murrell, William, 5803
Murry, J. Middleton, 656
Museums, 3049, 4726, 5721, 5794-5800
directory, 4716
industrial, 4716
Ohio, 41 19
Music, 3736, 3747-48, 3751, 4025,
5605-87
and poetry, 1038, 1044-46, 1580
and the State, 56^7
bibl., 5606, 5610-1 1
criticism, 1828
discography, 5613
econ. aspects, 5615, 5623
education, 5617, 5625, 5629, 5668—
72, 5684
hist., 5607-8, 5612-14, 5628, 5635,
5638-39, 5650
Jewish, 4458
Bethlehem, Pa., 5667
Boston, 5628, 5648-49, 5672
Calif., 5630
Chicago, 5651-52
Cleveland, 5630
Minneapolis, 5654
Nashville, 3765
New England, 5633
New York (City), 4049, 5626-27
Philadelphia, 5629
Southwest, 5630
Toledo, 4894
See also Opera
The Music from behind the Moon, 1262
Musical comedy, 4935, 5638
Musical Courier, about, 5681
Musical instrument makers, 5628
Musicians, 146, 2638, 5644, 5673-87
bibl., 5606
biog. (collected), 5622, 5632, 5634,
5642
unions, 5619
See also Composers
Muskingum, Ohio, 3873
Musselman, G. P., 4479
Musselman, Morris M., 4954
Musser, Paul H., 198
Mussey, June Barrows, ed., 4029
Mutiny in January, 3264
Muzzcy, David Saville, 3442
My Antonia, 1276-77
My Boyhood Dreams, 798-99
My Chinese Marriage, 1659
My Days of Anger, 1374
My Debut as a Literary Person, 798-99
My Dim y North and South, 4379-81
1 152 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
My Ears Are Bent, 2756
My Farm of Edgewood, 509
My Father's Business, 2350
My First Lie, 798-99
My Glorious Brothers, 1979
My Heart and My Flesh, 1699
My Heart for Hostage, 1 5 1 5
My Heart's in the Highlands, 2110, 2112
My Lady Pocahontas, 66, 251
My Life among the Indians, 1065
My Life and Hard Times, 18 17
My Lord, What a Morning, 5673
My Mortal Enemy, 1 277
My Name Is Aram, 21 1 1
My Partner, 23 1 6
My Several Worlds, 1260
My Study Windows, 467
My Summer in a Garden, 1 137-38
My Ten Years in a Quandary, 121 7
My Uncle Dudley, 2052
Myer, Jesse S., comp., 4818
Myers, Albert Cook, ed., 3214
Myers, Gustavus, 5882
Myers, Louis M., 2249
Myers, Margaret G., 5993
Myers, William Starr, 3486, 6385
Myrdal, Gunnar, 4446
Mystery novels. See Detective and
mystery fiction
The Mystery of Marie Roget, 529
Mysticism, 5355
Mythology, Indian, 3013, 3021
Myths. See Legends and tales
Myths and Legends of the Old Planta-
tion, 914
Myths and Myth-Makers, 5302
Myths and Realities, 4517
N
NEA Journal, 5245
Nagel, Ernest, 5267, 5290, 5291, 5350
ed., 5267
Nagel, Hildegard, tr., 4814
The Nak^ed and the Dead, 2026
Nally, Thomas P., 5226
Names, 2238, 2246, 2248, 2264, 4390
See also Place-names
Names on the Land, 2976
The Nancy Flyer, a Stagecoach Epic,
1656
Nantucket, Mass., 4038
Napoleon I, about, 231
Narrative of the Captivity and Restora-
tion of Mrs. Mary Rowlandson, 55
Narrative poetry. See Poetry — epic
and extended narrative
Narratives of Early Virginia, 71
Narratives of the Indian Wars, 55
Narratives of the Witchcraft Cases, 41
The Narrow House, 1744
Nasby, Petroleum V., pseud. See
Locke, David Ross
Nash, Ogden, 1629-34
about, 2426
Nashville, intellectual life, 3765
Nason, Arthur H., ed., 167
Nason, Thomas W., about, 5783
Nast, Thomas, 5803
illus., 424-25. 544
about, 422, 2917
Nathan, George Jean, 4906
Nathan, Robert Gruntal, 1635-43
Nathan, W. L., 3751
Nathanson, Jerome, 5296
Nation, Carry, about, 2588
The Nation, 2503, 2882, 2921
National Academy of Sciences, Wash-
ington, D.C., 4774
about, 4774
National Archives, 3066-67
about, 3066-67
National Association for the Advance-
ment of Colored People, about,
6106
National Association of Nurse Anes-
thetists, hist., 4816
National Avenue, 1806
National banks, 5993, 5999
National Bureau of Standards, about,
4769
National characteristics, 2380, 2464,
2469, 2501, 3123, 3140, 3146-47,
3609, 3732-35, 3738, 3762, 41 19,
4223-24, 4229, 4234, 4513-M.
. 4555-56
National Commission on Life Adjust-
ment for American Youth, about,
5224
National Committee on General Educa-
tion, 5228
National Conference of Social Work,
4618
National Council for the Social Studies,
3050,3059
National Council of the Churches of
Christ in the United States of
America, about, 5487
National defense, 4761, 4773
econ. aspects, 5879, 5889
National Education Association, 5106,
5228, 5240, 5245, 5247
National Funeral Directors Association
of the United States, 4527
National Gallery of Art, 5594
National Geographic Society, Washing-
ton, D.C., 2962
National Health Assembly, Washington,
D.C., 4870
National Historical Publications Com-
mission, 3068
National Industrial Conference Board,
. 5g93
National Institute for Commercial and
Trade Organization Executives,
6019
National Labor Union, about, 6034
The National Law Library, 6223
National Medical Library, about, 6476
National Museum, about, 4726, 4744
National Orchestral Survey, 5647
National parks and reserves, 1072,
1075-77, 2956, 5813, 5866
National Planning Association. Com-
mittee of New England, 5890
National Research Council, 4777
about, 4774
National Resources Board. Land Plan-
ning Committee, 3043
National Resources Committee, 5898
National Resources Committee. Science
Committee, 4777
National Resources Planning Board,
5898
about, 6144
National Resources Planning Board.
Science Committee, 4777
National Science Foundation, about,
4776, 4778
National Security Council, about, 6144
National Security Resources Board,
about, 6144
National Society for the Study of Edu-
cation, 5246
National Society for the Study of Edu-
cation. Committee on Early Child-
hood Education, 5150
National songs, hist., 5616
National Tuberculosis Association, 4868
hist., 4863
National university, proposed, 101
Nationalism
18th cent., 3246, 3282, 3328, 5406
i8th-i9th cent., 3106, 4526
19th cent., 3305, 3313, 3328, 3347,
3363-64, 3397, 3399, 3412. 3-H9-
343i,3445.378i
Nationalism in literature
essays, 2421
(1764-1819), 101, 105, 109-17, 134,
146-48, 165-70, 2412, 2530
(1820-70), 198, 230, 252, 280, 283,
317. 323. 368, 381, 427. 430. 487.
511, 546, 769-71. 2295, 2478
(1871-1914), 890, 1136
Nationality, 4417, 4427. 443°
See also Foreign population
Native Son, 2233
Nativism, 4515, 6164
Natoma (opera), 5681
Natural history, 2956, 4726, 4738
bibl., 4736
S.C., 5087
Tex., 4734
See also Animals; Plants
Natural history societies. See Scientific
societies
Natural law, 3258, 6072, 6094
Natural resources, 2940, 5810, 5884,
5898, 5900
Ga., 4095
Middle West, 41 13
Mo., 4108
N. Dak., 4165
Northwest, Pacific, 4212
Ohio, 41 19
Southern States, 4079, 4084
Vt., 4033
Va., 4085
See also Conservation of natural
resources
Naturalism in literature, 3758
fiction, 768, 821, 959, 1048, 1089.
1333. 1743. 1775. 2365, 2498
See also Realism in literature
Naturalists, 4307
bibl., 4736
biog. (collected), 4734
See also names of individual natural-
ists
INDEX / 1 1 53
Naturalization, 4424
Nature, 281-82, 286, 293
Nature and Man, 5380
Nature in art, 5762
Nature in literature
anthologies, 2453
editorials, sketches, etc., 280-2, 286,
293. 506, 509-10, 633, 716-17,
740-44, 1136-38, 1 144, 1724-26,
2453
fiction, 716
hist. & crit., 2422
poetry, 7-1 1, 134, 138, 216-21, 223-
25, 455, 614-17, 619-30, 636-37,
639, 642, 662, 667-71, 673, 838—
46, 1126-31, 1823
prose, 21, 36, 46, 585, 587-97, 599-
602, 605-6, 608-9, 633-35, 638,
1072-83
short stories, 612-13, 7l&> 1724
Naturopathy, 481 1
Naughton, Thomas Raymond, 6221
Naughty Anthony, 2315
Naughty Marietta (operetta), 5681
Nauvoo, 111., guidebook, 3879
Navajo Indians, 3013
fiction, 1551-52
Naval Academy, Annapolis, Md., about,
3825
Naval Gun Factory, Washington, D.C.,
hist., 3670
Naval Observatory, about, 4770
Naval policy, 3643, 3666, 3674
Naval Research Laboratory, about, 3675
Naval warfare, law of, 3524
Navigation, 3164, 41 10, 4 114, 4746
Navigation Acts (1649-96), 3193, 3243
Naville, Pierre, 5393
Navy, 3666-77
biog. (collected), 3825
hist., 252, 3666-69, 3671-74, 3676,
4040
American Revolution, 3678
War with France (1798-1800),
3685-86
War of 1812,3688
War with Mexico, 3689
Civil War, 3416, 3700
Spanish-American War, 3708
in literature, 2746
personnel policies, 3669
Navy Dept., 3700
scientific research, 3675
Navy Yard, Washington, D.C., hist.,
3670
The Nazarene, 11 90
Near East, relations with, 3512, 3588
travel & travelers, 2278
Nebraska, 3944, 3948, 4166
fiction, 1276, 2052
frontier life, 2799-2800, 4156
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3901-3
hist., 3901, 4166
law, 6233
rural communities, 4109
The Necessary Angel, 1783
Ned Myers, 271
Needles and Pins, 2317
Needlework, 5593, 5595, 5604, 5785
Neely, Wayne Caldwell, 5827
Nef, John U., 4504
Neff, Emery Edward, 1719, 2289
Negligible Tales, 739
Negroes, 2690, 2839-40, 4310, 4428,
4435-51
actors, 4921
biog. (collected), 5515
boxers, 5025
colonization, Africa, 4258
econ. condit., 4446, 4448, 6375
education, 4443, 4450, 5116, 5206
folklore, 5515, 5517-18, 5523, 5527,
5535. 5547
in literature, 910-16, 922, 924-
25
in art, 5765
language (dialect, etc.), 2271
in literature, 192-93, 756-59,
856-60, 910-16, 922, 924-25,
1032, 1038, 1099-1102, 1106,
1133-35, 1526, 1653
legends, 5517-18, 5521
musicians, 5644
politics & suffrage, 3106, 6375, 6378-
79, 6409
religion, 5401, 5498-5502, 5527,
5547
soldiers (Civil War), 2280
songs, 5517-18, 5521, 5540, 5556,
5564, 5569, 5582
spirituals, 5540, 5555, 5558-59
Baltimore, 4062
Brooklyn, 4046
Chicago, 4439, 4451, 6375
Northern States, 4310, 4451
Philadelphia, 4258
Southern States, 4083, 4438,
4443 6376, 6378-79
See also Slavery
Negroes in literature
editorials, essays, sketches, etc., 192-
93, 1099, 1 103-4, 1 106, 2364
drama, 1821
fiction, 562-67, 722, 756, 949-52,
1099, 1 106, 1390, 1392, 1512-13,
1526-29, 1569, 1653-55, 1759-60,
1832, 1914-15, 1937, 1939, 1966-
67, 201 1, 2050-51, 2232-33, 2235,
2631
humor, 2501
poetry, 856-59, 861, 1133-35, 1521,
1537-38, 1540, 1937-38
reporting, 1653
short stories, 192-93, 756-61, 856,
859-60, 910-16, 920-22, 924-25,
1032, 1099-1102, 1106, 1523-25,
2234
Neighborhood houses, New York
(City), 4624
Neihardt, John Gneisenau, 1644-46
Nelson, Arnold L., 2960
Nelson, Bruce C, 4147
Nelson, Helge, 4486
Nelson, John H., ed., 2276
Nelson, Joseph, 2764
Nelson, Lowry, 4582
Nelson, William Rockhill, about, 2887
Nerber, John, ed., 417
Netherlandcrs. See Dutch
Netherlands, 2293
relations with, 3528
Nets to Catch the Wind, 1 903
Neuberger, R. L., 6207
Neufeld, Maurice F., ed., 6032
Ncuman, H., tr., 4268
Neumann, Henry, 5435
Neumeyer, Esther S., 4998
Neumeyer, Martin H., 4998
Neurology, 4828
study & teaching, 4840
Neurosurgery, 4821
Neutrality, 3535, 3582
World War I, 3470, 3541
World War II, 3537-38
Nevada, 4184-85
descr., 4184
fiction, 1420, 1954
guidebook, 3916
hist., 3959, 3961, 3989, 4184, 4189
Indians, 3019, 3023, 3041
music, 5630
Nevertheless, 1621
Nevins, Allan, 421, 2858-59, 2873,
^/3093, 3259, 3335, 3398-99, 3423,
3443-44, 3534, 4033, 4676, 4789,
5915-16,5939
ed., 2691, 2823, 3313, 3334, 3351,
3422, 4047, 4234
Nevius, Blake, 1856
The New Apologists for Poetry, 2452
New Castle, Del., 3823
"New Criticism," 2378, 2421, 2559
New Deal, 3119, 3458, 3491-92, 3497,
5877,6095,6354-55,6364
New Directions in Prose & Poetry, 2560
New England, 4026-42, 4423
agriculture, 5820, 5840
biog. (collected), 2693, 4029, 4271
church hist., 5417
descr., 5086
econ. condit., 4031, 5890
fisheries, 5872
folklore, 5524, 5534, 5541
folksongs & ballads, 5554, 5574, 5580
foreign population, 4026, 4413
govt., Colonial period, 6079
guidebooks, 3782, 3791-3805
hist., 2268, 2681, 3279, 3281, 3783-
84, 3965, 4030
Colonial period, 3131, 3181,
3213,3219,3743
intellectual life, 2549, 3742-43, 3745
language (dialects, etc.), 2268
in literature, 209, 558, 881-86
music, 5633
postal service, 4665
public libraries, 6472
schools, 2674
science & technology, 4730
soc. condit., 4031
soc. life & cust., 2600, 2651-52, 4029
theology, 2483, 5428
transportation, 5933
travel & travelers, 36-39, 69-71,
3069, 4227, 4261, 4266, 4271,
4279, 4324, 4329
A New England Boyhood , 906-7
The New England Courant, about, 2854
1 154 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A New England Group and Others,
2480
New England in literature, 2459
diaries, journals, etc., 36-39, 49, 53,
58, 90-91, 187, 294-95, 600-1,
603, 706-10, 900, 906-7
drama, 168-70, 198, 200, 1647-48
essays, 286-87, 291-93, 298-301,
368, 371-74. 465-67. 469. 979.
1002-3, 2486
fiction, 188, 333-47, 356, 402-4,
470, 481-83, 491, 562, 568-73,
576, 579-84, 665, 706-10, 1284,
1286, 1437-44, 1589, 1619, 1736,
1845, 1916, 1992, 2156
hist. & crit., 1-6, 43-44, 69-71, 91,
2381,2483,2549
humor, 209, 558-61
poetry, 7-11, 72-74, 79-83, 288-90,
368-70, 455-59, 662, 667-71, 673,
1451-52, 1583-84, 1713-14, 2007,
2374
prose, 585, 587-97, 599-606
satire, 51-52, 75-77
short stories, 51, 333-40, 356, 359,
562, 574-75, 706, 711-12, 881-
86, 1023-31, 1762, 2160
theology, 17, 19-22, 33~35> 4°. 43-
44, 59-62, 65, 86-89, 93-95, 2483
New England: Indian Summer, 2381
A New England Nun, 883-84
The New England Quarterly, 2561
New England Reformers, 286
The New England Weekly Journal,
about, 2854
A New England Winter, 1008
New Englander and Yale Review, 2577
New Englanders, 3965, 4027-30, 4394,
4423
drama, 4926
Northwest, Old, 41 17-18
See also Yankees
New English Canaan, 52
New Found Land , 1586
New France, 3156, 3171, 3175, 3207,
3226
New Hampshire, 4032
fiction, 706-10, 1656, 1916, 1918,
2163
folklore, 1222
guidebook, 3796
hist., 4031
poetry, 1451-52, 1916
short stories, 1222
New Haven, Conn., 4042, 4261
A New Home—Who'll Follow?, 416-
17
New Hope, 1800
New Humanism. See Humanism, New
New Jersey
culture, 3232
govt., 3470
guidebooks, 3811-15
hist., 3214, 3232, 381 1, 3994, 4053
politics, 6395
New Jersey in literature
fiction, 1872, 1916
poetry, 1872, 1876
short stories, 1879
New Jersey Legislature, about, 6395
The New Laokpon, 2375
New Mexico, 2737
archaeology, 2992
architecture, 5723
descr., 4198
fiction, 1 196, 1686-87
folklore, 5537
guidebook, 3924
hist., 3956, 3961, 4174, 4189, 4198
Indians, 2723-24, 3013, 3023, 3041
language (dialects, etc.), 4198
resources, 4188
The New Mexico Quarterly Review,
2562
The New Nation, 726
New Netherland. See New York
(Colony)
New Orleans, 2586, 2871
guidebook, 3852
hist., 1036, 4101
jazz music, 5644
soc. life & cust., 4101, 4283, 4288
theater, 4922
New Orleans in literature
drama, 2221
fiction, 745, 749-50, 945, 1032, 1381,
1390
short stories, 746-48, 945, 951-52,
954-55, 1032-35
The New Partisan Reader, 2566
New Plymouth Colony. See Plymouth
Colony
The New Realism, 5260
The New Republic, 1821
New School for Social Research, about,
5219
The New South, 1038
The New Spoon River, 1601
New Thought, 5439
The New World, 3153-75
colonization, 3086, 3156-58, 3162,
3169, 3171, 3173, 3175, 3223
disc. & explor., 3153-62, 3164-69,
3171-75. 3203, 3206-7, 3212,
3215,3217,3223,4230
sources, 3163
geography, 3155, 3161, 3174
hist., 3075, 3086, 3153, 3157, 3165,
3189, 3223
sources, 3223
New World Writing, 2563
New Year's Day (The 'Seventies), 1845
New York (City)
art collections, 5795-5800
Bohemianism, 3757
Chinese, 4467
commerce, 5951
concerts, 5626-27
culture, Colonial period, 4518
econ. condit., 4602, 4638
folklore, 5522
foreign population, 4409
geography, 2939
govt., 6214
guidebooks, 3808-9
harbor, 5951
hist., 2478, 3443, 4045-49
hospitals, 4851, 4857
Italians, 4497
music, 5626-27, 5644
New York (City) — Continued
Negroes, 4447
pictorial works, 3782, 4045
politics, 4535, 6207, 6381-82
press, 2904
Puerto Ricans, 4470
soc. condit., 4597, 4624, 4638
soc. life & cust., 2586, 2691-92,
2755, 2822-23, 4048, 4261, 4263,
4290, 4602, 5522
theater, 2017, 4897, 4907-9, 4916,
4924, 4926, 4935, 4942-43. 5638,
5657-59. 5662
Yiddish press, 2898
See also Brooklyn; Harlem (N.Y.);
Manhattan
New York (City) in literature
descr., 242-43, 1859
drama, 168-70, 1688-89, 2063, 2535
editorials, sketches, etc., 2466, 4048
essays, 979, 1002-3, 1 859, 2017
fiction, 691-92, 1 190, 1 193, 1300,
1327, 1333-35. 1339. 1372, 1376,
1446-47, 1449, 1612, 1614, 1636,
1642, 1656-58, 1680, 1688, 1828-
29, 1831, 1842, 1845, 1889-90,
1909, 1911-12, 1914-15, 1966-67,
2025, 2027, 2069, 2074, 2094,
2107-8, 21 10, 2132, 2229, 2231,
2278
humor, 2152
personal narratives, 2473
poetry, 1857-58, 2133
short stories, mi, 1114-20, 1155,
1851, 1855, 1910, 1913, 2057,
21 10, 2145
New York (City) Health Dept., about,
4881
New York (City) Metropolitan Mu-
seum of Art, 5754, 5804
American Wing, 5796
hist., 5795
New York (City) Metropolitan Opera,
about, 5657, 5659, 5662
New York (City) Museum of Modern
Art, 5602, 5697, 5717-18, 5797
New York (City) Public Library,
about, 4819, 6465, 6476
New York (Colony)
govt., 3224
hist., 3194, 3200, 3210, 3224, 3232
law, 6221
travel & travelers, 3208
New York (State), 4044-52
biog. (collected), 4271
boundaries, 4027
culture, 3224, 3232, 4027
folklore, 5518, 5548
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3806—10
hist., 3304, 3441, 3966, 4027, 4043-
44. 4049
hospitals, 4846
libraries, 6468
politics, 6374, 6384-85, 6387, 6399
prisons, 4653
travel & travelers, 3069, 4241, 4261,
4266, 4269, 4271, 4285
INDEX / 1 155
New York (State) in literature
essays, 675, 740
fiction, 268-69, 511, 514-15, 1155,
1158, 1160, 1338, 1353-56, 2132,
2282
humor, 382-83
short stories, 384-87, 1 160
New York (State) Constitutional Con-
vention (1821), about, 6374
New York (State) Constitutional Con-
vention Committee, 6080
New York (State) Legislature, about,
6115
New York (State) Republican Party,
about, 6385
New York Academy of Medicine.
Committee on Medicine and the
Changing Order, 4808
New York Academy of Medicine.
Committee on Public Health Re-
lations, 4851
New York Academy of Sciences, about,
4717
New York City Ballet, about, 4969
New York Committee on the Study of
Hospital Internships and Resi-
dencies, 4857
New York Daily News, about, 2862
The New York Evening Post, about,
2858, 2873
New York Folklore Quarterly, 5518
The New York Gazette, about, 2854
New York. Herald, about, 2851, 2868,
2877
New York. Herald-Tribune, about, 2868
2903, 4984
European ed., about, 2872
New York Hospital, about, 4838
The New York Idea, 2337, 2347
New York Society Library, about, 6468
New York State Historical Association,
4044
New York Stock Exchange, about, 5982
New York stock market, 3477-78
The New York Times, 2564, 4984
The New York Times Book Review,
2564
The New York Weekly Journal, about,
2854, 2931
New York Tribune, about, 2851, 2868,
2883
The New Yorker, 2565, 2567, 2919
Newcomb, Rexford, 5719, 5723
Newcomb, Simon, 4724, 4756
about, 4724, 4756
Newcomer, Mabel, 6028
Newell, William Wells, 5588
Newfoundland fisheries controversy,
3542, 3554-55
Newhouse, Edward, 2057-59
Newlin, Claude M., ed., 108
Newman, Albert H., 5443
Newport, R.I.
econ. condit., 4602
essays, 1002-3
soc. life & cust., 4040, 4387, 4602
News agencies, 2860, 2864, 2890
News of the Night, 2309
Newsome, Albert Ray, 4090
Newspaper court reporting, 6288
Newspaper Days (Dreiser), 1344
Newspaper Days (Mencken), 1604
Newspaper Enterprise Association,
about, 2890
Newspapermen, 2847, 2849, 2853, 2857,
2877-94
bibl., 2850
biog. (collected), 2848
See also Reporters and reporting; and
names of individuals
Newspapers, 2845-76, 2924, 2927
bibl., 2852
chain ownership, 2848, 2866, 2886,
2890, 2927
Civil War, 2851
Colonial, 2854, 2880
directory, 5958
foreign language, 2895-99
hist., 2846-48, 2852, 6447
policies & practices, 2846, 2851,
2900-9, 291 1
Ariz., 4199
Ga., 2856
New York (City), 2904, 4049
Northwest, Pacific, 4214
Ohio, 2857
Oreg., 2863
Southern States, 2853
Washington, D.C., 4063
See also Newspapermen; Syndication
(newspaper)
Newton, Arthur P., 3168
ed., 3169, 3179
Newton, Earle W, 4033
Newton, Walter H., 3486
The Next Voice You Hear (motion
picture), about, 4949
Nez Perce Indians, 3001
Niagara
essays, 1003
hist., 3950
travel 8c travelers, 4336
Nicaragua, relations with, 3575
Nicaraguan Canal, 3437, 4221
Nice People, 2348
Nichols, Alice, 4167
Nichols, Dudley, ed., 2332
Nichols, Roy Franklin, 3347, 3400
Nicholson, Joseph William, 5500
Nick of the Woods, 201-4
Nickerson, Hoffman, 3682
Nicodemus, 1714
Nicolay, John G., 421, 941, 3395, 3426
Niebuhr, Helmut Richard, 5399
about, 5433
Niebuhr, Reinhold, 5399, 5447, 5496
about, 5432-33. 5436
Niger, Samuel, 4459
Nigeria, 5989
Nigger Heaven, 1832
A Night in Acadie, 761
Night Music, 2065
Night of the Poor, 2090
Night over Taos, 1174
Night Rider, 2194
Nightingale, Florence, about, 4852,
4854
The Nightmare Has Triplets, 1 264-66
Nights with Uncle Remus, 914-16
Nikisch, Arthur, about, 5649
Niklaus, Thelma, 4953
Niles, Blair, 3977
Niles, Hezekiah, about, 2924, 3260
Niles, Samuel V., 3260
Niles' Weekly Register, 2924, 3260
Nims, John Frederick, 2060-62
Nine Days to Mukalla, 2097
79/9, 1325, 1328
Nisei, 2812, 4466
Nishimoto, Richard S., 4469
Nissenson, Samuel G., 3200
Nixon, Edgar B., ed., 5884
Nixon, Herman Clarence, 3958, 4068,
4594
Nixon, Phyllis J., 2255-56
Nixon, Raymond B., 3445
The No 'Count Boy, 1475
No Friendly Voice, 5235
"No Haid Pawn," 1 100-2
No Man Is an Island, 2042
No Man Knows My History, 5464
No Matter What Happens, 2754
No More Bohemia, 1553
No More War, 2342
No Mother to Guide Her, 2305
No People Like Show People, 4931
No Poems; or Around the World Back-
wards and Sideways, 1 2 1 6
No Retreat, 1483
No Star Is Lost, 1374
No Thanks, 13 13
No Time for Comedy, 1209
No Villain Need Be, 1423
No, Yong-Park, 4232
Noah, Mordecai Manuel, 2347
Noble, Peter, 4960
The Noble Exile, 517
Noble savage, 239, 241
Nock, Albert Jay, 3297, 4535
ed., 215
Noel, Mary, 2916
Noetzel, Gregor, maps, 3082
Nolan, Jeannette (Covert), 1132
Noland, Charles F. M., 5542
Nominalist and Realist, 286
Nomini Hall, Va., 2673
Nona Vincent, 10 12
None Shall Look Back, 1468
Nonpartisan League, about, 5831, 6356
Nook Farm, 814
Noon Wine, 1661
Norborg, Sverre, 5363
Nordstjernan, about, 2895
Norfolk, Va., 4088, 4263
Norris, Benjamin Franklin, 1089-98
about, 2365, 2430, 2464, 2517
Norris, George W., about, 3446, 6195
North American Review, 2294
North & South, 1925-26
North Carolina, 3833, 3945, 3963, 4023,
4079, 4090
architecture, 5706
counties, 4090
culture, 3233
drama, 1473, 1475
fiction, 405, 1473-74, 1887-88
folklore, 5529, 5536
folksongs & ballads, 5582
governors, 4090
guidebooks, 3831-33
hist., 3216, 3223, 3233, 4021, 4023,
4090, 4104
1 156 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
North Carolina — Continued
language (dialects, etc.), 2256
legends, 5536
short stories, 1239, 1476
travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4277-78
North Dakota, 3951, 4165
econ. geography, 4165
frontier life, 4156
guidebook, 3895
hist., 4147
rural communities, 4109
North Is Black., 1553
North Little Rock, Ark., guidebook,
3854
North of Boston, 1452
North Pole expeditions. See Arctic
expeditions
North Star Country, 3954
Northern Plains, frontier life, 4155-56
The Northern Shoshoni Indians, 2364
Northrop, F.S.C., 3758
ed., 5384
Northwest, Old, 4109-44
architecture, 5719
culture, 3737,4117
descr. & trav., 2803
econ. condit., 4 1 1 1
guidebooks, 3862-94
historical geography, 2969
hist., 3239, 4109-44, 5931
Indian fighting, 3660
soc. life & cust., 4111, 4115
travel & travelers, 366, 4307, 4322,
4324, 4329, 4349, 4358, 4374
writers & writings, 41 12
Northwest, Pacific
econ. condit., 4212
fiction, 21 61
governors, 4213
guidebooks, 3935-39
hist., 4213-14, 4022
Russian claims, 3560
travel & travelers, 391
Northwest Passage, 1710, 3160, 3167,
3169
Northwestern States, 3951
boundaries, 3951
descr. & trav., 2663
hist., 3663, 3783, 4147
Indians, 2998
pictorial guidebook, 3782
Northwestern University, Evanston, 111.,
about, 4993
Norton, Andrews, about, 5436
Norton, Charles Eliot, 5387
ed., n, 462, 465-67
about, 2480
Norwegians
fiction, 1720-23
immigration, 2267, 4482, 4484-85,
4487
language (dialects, etc.), 2267
Wis., 4347
Norwood, William Frederick, 4860
Noss, Murray, 2350
Not by Strange Gods, 1706
Not Guilty, 6298
Not Heaven, 1450
Not So Deep as a Well, 1651
Not So Long Ago, 4519
Notes of a Son and Brother, 1015
Notes on the State of Virginia, 4753
Notions of the Americans, 261
Notre Dame, Ind. University, about,
5041, 5044
Nourse, Henry S., ed., 55
Nova Britannia, 3031
The Novel of Violence in America, 2427
Novels. See Fiction
November Boughs, 617, 638
Now the Sky, 1827
Now with His Love, 1227
Nowell, Elizabeth, ed., 1894
Nueces County, Tex., 4476
Nugent, Elliott, 2334
Nullification (1820-1839), 33°3> 3328
Number One, 1332
Nunez Cabeca de Vaca, Alvar, 3217
Nursery Schools, 5148
Nurses and nursing, 4808, 4816, 4820,
4835, 4864
biog. (collected), 4854
hist., 4852
Nute, Grace L., 3170
Nutrition, 4722, 5819
Nutting, M. Adelaide, about, 4854
Nye, Edgar Wilson ("Bill"), about,
1 1 26
Nye, Russel B., 3060, 3380, 3401, 3446
O
0 Captain! My Captain!, 623
0 Genteel Lady!, 1438
0 Pioneers!, 1276-77
0 Shepherd, Speak!, 1758
Oakes, J. B., 6128
Oakley, Annie, about, 4979
The Oasis, 2019
Oats, 5835
Oberfirst, Robert, ed., 2318
Oberhoffer, Emil, about, 5654
Oberholtzer, Ellis Paxson, 3447
Oberlin College, about, 5670
Oberndorf, Clarence P., 375
O'Brien, E. J., ed., 2322
O'Brien, Frank M., 2874
O'Brien, Robert, 4209
Obscure Destinies, 1 277
Observations by Mr. Dooley, 866
Occupational therapy, 4840
Occupations, 6043
immigrants, 4395
Italians, 4497
Jews, 4459
Negroes, 4439
Nisei, 4466
Ocean City, N.J., 4596
The Ocean Highway, 3788
Ochs, Adolf S., about, 2869
Ocmulgee National Monument, 3840
O'Connor, Basil, 5427
about, 5427
O'Connor, Richard, 3701
O'Connor, William Van, 1402, 1785,
2361,2484,3376
The Octopus, 1093
The Octoroon, 2337
Ocular surgery, 4844
O'Daniel, W. Lee, about, 4192
An Ode in Time of Hesitation, 1069
Ode Recited at the Commemoration
of the Living and Dead Soldiers of
Harvard University, 459
Ode to the Confederate Dead, 1 8 1 1
Odegard, Peter H., 4554, 6338
Odell, Alfred T., ed., 554
Odell, George C. D., 4924
Odets, Clifford, 2063-68, 2327, 2333,
2348
O'Donnell, James, about, 4536
Odum, Howard W., 3783, 3785, 4079,
4541,5561
ed., 4540
Oehser, Paul H., 4775
Of All Things, 121 4
Of Making Many Books, 6449
Of Men and Mountains, 2665
Of Mice and Men, 1780, 2333, 2336
Of the Earth Earthy, 4531
Of Time and the River, 1889-90
Off Broadway, 1 1 75
Offenbach, Jacques, 5679
Office of Air Force History, 3727
Office of Education, 5206, 6474
Office of Experiment Stations, about,
4768
Office of Indian Affairs, 3043
Office of Naval Records and Library,
3686
Office of Scientific Research and Devel-
opment, 4778
about, 4761
Office of the Comptroller of the Navy,
3677
Office of War Information, about, 3607
Official Records of the Rebellion, 3378,
3697
Ogden, Rollo, 2858
ed., 2882
Ogg, Frederic A., 6137
Oglala Sioux Indians, 2801
hist., 3003
Ogres and giants in folklore, 5528-29,
5546
Oh, Promised Land, 1787
Oh Susanna (song), 5677
O'Hara, John, 1429, 2069-78
about, 2536
Ohio, 3948, 4118-22
architecture, 5719
folksongs & ballads, 5573
frontier life, 4097-98, 4121
govt., 6195
guidebooks, 3862-73
hist., 4030, 4109, 4111, 4115, 4120-
21
journalism, 2857
politics, 6428-29
rural communities, 4109
travel fk travelers, 4277-78
Western Reserve, 4030, 41 18
Ohio in literature
editorials, sketches, etc., 422-26
fiction, 867, 980, 1 178, 1691, 1694
personal narratives, 964, 982
poetry, 2788
short stories, 1149-50, 1179, 169 1
Ohio River and valley
descr., 2610
geography, 41 13
INDEX / 1 1 57
Ohio River and valley — Continued
hist., 3147, 41 10
intellectual life, 3767
mounds, 2996
travel & travelers, 319, 321, 4276,
4281,4300,4324,4336,4344
Ohio State Senate, about, 6428
Oil! A Novel, 1756
Oil industry. See Petroleum resources
and industry
"Okie" minorities in Calif., 4204
Oklahoma, 3960, 3964, 4169-71
cities & towns, 41 71
Delaware Indians, 3020
descr., 4170
fiction, 1403, 1406
Five Civilized Tribes, 3025-27
folksongs & ballads, 5570
guidebooks, 3908-9
hist., 4169, 4171, 4189
Olcott, Charles S., 3448
Old age
employment, 4635
insurance, 4633
Old Black. Joe (song), 5677
Old Bullion Benton, 3321
Old Cambridge, 2280
Old Creole Days, 746-48
The Old English Dramatists, 465, 467
The Old Farm and the New Farm, 147
The Old House in the Country, 2780
Old Ironsides , 368
Old Jules, 2800
The Old Lady's Restoration , 1035
Old Lore Letters, 2307
The Old Maid, 1845, 1855
Old Man, 1390
The Old Man and Jim, 1 1 26
The Old Man and the Sea, 1 500
Old Mr. Flood, 2755
Old Morality, 1661
An Old New England School, 2674
Old New York., 1845
Old Pines, 1239
Old Plantation Days, 1724, 5087
Old Possum's Book °f Practical Cats,
1359
The Old South, 1 103-4
The Old Swimmin' -Hole and 'Leven
More Poems, 1 1 26
The Old Virginia Gentleman, 193
The Old Virginia Lawyer, 1 103-4
The Old World and the New, 3771
Older, Fremont, 2888
about, 2888
Older, Mrs. Fremont, 2884
Oldtown Folks, 5T2-~Ti
Ole Miss', 5066
Ole 'S traded, 1 100-2
O'Leary, Frank, ed., 2274
O'Leary, R. S., 6195
Oligopoly, 5887
Oliphant, Mary C. Simms, ed., 554
Oliver, Egbert S., ed., 491
Oliver, Henry M., 5971
Oliver, John W., 4727
Oliver, Robert T., 3597
Oliver Wi swell, 1711
Olmsted, Frederick Law, 4363-68
Olney, Marguerite, comp., 5574
Olson, James C, 4166
Olson, Julius E., ed., 3215
Olsson, K. A., 5442
Omaha Indian reservation, 3042
O'Meara, Carroll, 4694
Omoo, 476-77
On a Soldier Fallen in the Philippines,
1069
On Being Creative, 2375
On Native Grounds, 2448
On the Limits of Poetry, 1 810
On These I Stand, 1308
On Trial, 1689
On Witchcraft, 42
Once in a Lifetime, 1548
One Arm, 2222
One Basket, 1408
One Clear Call, 1758
One Man's Meat, 1862
One More Spring, 1636
One Nation, 2161
One of Our Girls, 2307
One of Ours, 1277
"One of Us," 1035
One Part Love, 2413
One-Smoke Stories, 1 1 98
1 x 1, 1313
O'Neil.T. P., 6207
O'Neill, Edward H., 536
O'Neill, Eugene, 1647-49, 2327> 2332>
2335> 2337. 2348
about, 1650, 2406
O'Neill, James, 2313
O'Neill, James M., 5445
Only Yesterday, 3477
The Opeii Boat, 830
The Open Heart, 2838
The Open Sea, 1601
Opera, 487, 654, 1222, 1512, 1771,
2210, 2472, 5655-63
comic, 701, 705
hist., 5656, 5661, 5663
Chicago, 5660
New York (City), 4924, 5657-59,
5962
See also Theater
Operationism (psychology), 5392
Ophthalmology, hist., 4844
Opie, Rcdvers, 3636
Opinions of Oliver Allston, 2380
Opler, Marvin K., 3041
Opler, Morris Edward, 3010
The Opposing Self, 2520
Optimism in literature, 280, 619
Options, 1 1 19-20
Oralloossa, 205
Orange County, Calif., 3957
Orators, 420
Orchestras
jazz, 5644
students, 5672
symphony, 5647, 5650, 5652
See also Bands (music)
The Orchid, 1637
The Ordeal, 3495
Ordeal by Hunger, 3331
The Ordeal of Mark Twain, 2380
Oregon
boundaries, 3351
fiction, 1314-15
Oregon — Continued
guidebooks, 3937-38
hist., 3959, 42M
newspapers, 2863
Orientals, 4468
resources, 4212
short stories, 13 16
travel & travelers, 391
Oregon Trail, 3789
disc. & explor., 3335, 3338, 3345
travel & travelers, 3348
O'Reilly, John Boyle, about, 4530
Orfield, Lester Bernhardt, 6098, 6301-2
The Organizational Revolution , 5899
Orians, George H., 2401
ed., 2352, 2369
O'Rielly, Henry, about, 4675, 4680
Orient
in literature, 280
travel & travelers, 1136
Orientals, 2811-12, 4416, 4420, 4463-
69
citizenship, 6120
econ. condit., 4468
The Origin of the Feast of Puiim, 2312
Original Narrative of Early American
History, 3201-19
Ormandy, Eugene, about, 5654
Ormond, 1 12-13, "7
Ornithological Biography, 4743
The Orphan Angel, 1904
Orphanages, 4310
Orpheus in America, 5679
Osage Indians, 2729
Osborn, F., 3562
Osborn, Henry Fairfield, 4748
about, 5434
Osborn, R. E., 5442
Osborne, Estelle Massey, about, 4854
Osgood, Ernest Staples, 5873
Osgood, Herbert L., 3220-21
about, 3058, 3221
Osgood, Robert Endicott, 3628
Osier, Sir William, 4818
about, 4821, 4829, 4845
Ossian, about, 2364
Ossoli, Sarah Margaret (Fuller) mar-
chesa d'. See Fuller, Sarah
Margaret (Marchesa d'Ossoli)
Osteopathy, 481 1
Osterweis, Rollin G., 4042, 4080
Ostheimcr, Richard H., 5174-75
Ostrom, John W., ed., 532
Oswald, John Clyde, 6442
Other Skies, 1 950
The Other Two, 1855
Other Voices, Other Rooms, 1945
Otis, Harrison Gray, about, 3305
Otis, Philo Adams, 5651
Ottawa Indian war, 3033
Otto, Henry J., 5 151
Otto, M. C, 5336
Our America, 1445
Our American Weather, 2950
Our Boarding House, 2301
Our Fair City, 6207
Our Hearts Were Young and Gay,
2809
Our Heroic Themes, 206
Our Landed Heritage, 5814
1 158 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Our More Perfect Union, 6076
Our New Home in the West, 416-17
Our Rising Empire, 3531
Our Singing Strength, 2342
Our Soldiers Speak., 3662
Our Times, 3468
Our Town, 1865, 2327
Out of the Red, 4995
Out of the South, 1475
The Outcasts of Poker Flat, 930, 937,
939
Outcault, Richard Felton, about, 2865
Outlaws. See Adventurers, outlaws,
etc.
The Outlet, 686
Outlines of Cosmic Philosophy, 5303
Outre mer, 4388-89
The Outsider, ?.2T,i, 2235
The Over-Soul, 280, 285
Over the Alleghenies and Across the
Prairies, 4350
Over the Hills to the Poor House, 753
Overacker, Louise, 6336, 6406—8
Overland in a Covered Wagon, 1066,
1068
Overland journeys to the Pacific, 391,
1068,3338,3345,3348, 4373
Overland mail and stagecoaches, 4666
Overland Monthly, 757, 933
Overland Trail. See Oregon Trail
Overseas possessions, 2970, 4218-22
econ. condit., 4218
guidebooks, 3940-41
Owen, Robert Dale, about, 2713, 4525
Owen, Wilfred, 5921
Owen Win grave, 1012
Owens, Hamilton, 2876
Owens, Richard N., 6008
The Owl in the Attic, 181 7
Owsley, Frank Lawrence, 3539, 4081
The Ox-Bow Incident, 1955
The Oxford Anthology of American
literature, 2321
The Oxford Book, of American Verse,
2344
The Oxford Companion to American
Literature, 2433
Oxford Group movement, 5439
The Oxford History of the United States,
3103
Ozark Mountain region, 3960
folklore, 5543-45
folksongs & ballads, 5569
geography, 41 13
language (dialects, etc.), 2270
population, 4102
rural community, 2764
PMLA, 2457
Pacific Coast States, 3137
editorials, sketches, etc.,
1068
1064-65,
hist., 3048, 3340, 3784
historical geography, 2969
hunting & fishing, 5084, 5091
Orientals, 4468-69
poetry, 933-34, 1064, 1066-67
short stories, 926-32, 937
Pacific Coast States— Continued
travel & travelers, 391, 1068, 4384,
4386
Pacific Fur Company, about, 391, 6024
Pacific Grove, Calif., 3930
Pacific Islands (Trust Territory), 4218
Pacific Northwest. See Northwest,
Pacific
Pacific Ocean region
relations with, 3591
World War II, 3668, 3722, 3726-27
Pacific railroads, hist., 4150
Pack, Robert, 2350
Packard, Francis R., 4809
Packet boats, 4283, 5937
A Paean, 526
Pagano, Grace, ed., 5748
Page, Charles Hunt, 4542
Page, Leigh, 4715
Page, Thomas Nelson, 1 099-1 106,
2296
about, 910
Page, Walter Hines, 2296, 5145
about, 2922
Pageant of America, 3082
Paige, D. C, ed., 1664
Paine, Albert Bigelow, 771, 2917
ed., 800, 808
Paine, Gregory, 2424
ed., 2296
Paine, Nathaniel, 6447
Paine, Thomas, 154-60, 2290
about, 2617, 2647, 5408
fiction, 1977
Painters, 612, 1226, 5742, 5744, 5753-
54,5756
biog. (collected), 5730, 5745, 5748-
49. 5759
See also Artists
Painting, 3751, 5595, 5597, 5601,
5741-76, 5797
abstract, 5696
Colonial period, 3747
exhibitions, 5696, 5771, 5804-5
hist., 5689, 5742, 5745, 5747,
5750-51,5755-56,5758
indexes, 5753, 5757
landscape, 5743, 5745, 5766, 5768,
5804
miniature, 5759, 5763
Plains Indians, 3018
still-life, 5744
surrealist, 5696
Paiute Indians, religion, 3019
Pakistan, relations with, 3503
Pal Joey, 2074
Pale Horse, Pale Rider, 1 661
Paleontological Society, about, 4733
Paleontology, 4721
hist., 4715, 4748
Calif., 4202
Paley, William S., about, 4683
Palmer, Alice Freeman, about, 2766
Palmer, Charles, 4949
Palmer, Elihu, about, 5408
Palmer, Frederick, 3713-14
Palmer, George Herbert, 2765-67, 5250,
5252
about, 2767
Palmer, John McAuley, 3648
Palmer, William J., about, 4150
Palmer, Winthrop B., 4971
Palmetto Country, 3953
Palmyra, N.Y., fiction, 11 57
Paltsits, Victor Hugo, ed., 6465
Palyi, Melchior, 5985
Pamphleteers, 75, 134, 138, 147, 154-
60, 662, 727, 1048, 1053
Pan American Airways, about, 5941
Pan American conferences, 3575
Panama, relations with, 3583
Panama Canal, 3559, 3575, 3577, 4014,
4218, 4221, 4796
Pancoast, Harry S., 1 09 1
Pandora, 1008
Pannill, H. Burnell, 5302
Papa La Fleur, 1459
Paperbound books, 6435, 6438, 6443-
44
Papermaking and trade, hist., 6448,
6457-58
Paquita, the Indian Heroine, 1065
The Parable of the Ten Virgins, 59
Paradise, 144 1
Paradise Lost, 2064
Pardon (1861-98), 3388
The Pardon, 1684
Parentator, 3199
The Parenticide Club, 739
Paris. Peace Conference (1919), 3111,
. 3471
Paris, Americans in, 2872
Paris Bound, 2332, 2337
Paris Embassy, about, 3600, 3606
Park, Edwards A., about, 5428
Park, Robert E., 2897
Park, Willard Z., 3019
Park-Street Papers, 2491
Parker, Barbara Neville, 5763
Parker, Donald Dean, 3061
Parker, Dorothy (Rothschild), 1651-52
comp., 1429
Parker, Everett C, 4702
Parker, Florence E., 5964
Parker, Isaac Charles, about, 2656,
6220
Parker, Reginald, 6313
Parker, Theodore, about, 2279-80, 5472,
5481, 6424
Parker, William Belmont, 2768-69
ed., 463, 2769
Parkes, Henry Bamford, 3104
Parkhurst, Helen H., 5289
Parkins, Almon E., 2940
Parkman, Francis, 2281, 2290, 3069,
3171,3348
about, 2281, 3058, 3069, 3175
Parks, E. Taylor, 3585
Parks, Edd Winfield, ed., 618, 2292,
4068
Parks
Mass., 3803
Rocky Mountains, 4172
S.C.,3836
See also National parks and reserves;
and names of parks, e.g., Adiron-
dack State Park
Parmer, Charles B., 5056
Parole, 4643
Mass., 4648-49
INDEX / 1 159
Parran, Thomas, 4869
about, 4864
Parrington, Vernon Louis, 2424, 2485
about, 2407, 3058
Parrish, Lydia, 5540
Parry, Albert, 3757
Parry, Charles C, about, 4734
Parsons, Edward, ed., 27
Parsons, Elsie Clews, 5540
Parsons, Frank, about, 4530
Parsons, Geoffrey, 2903
Parsons, Robert P., 4809
Part of a Man's Life, 2280
Parties, 1828
The Partisan, 547
The Partisan Review, 2017, 2133, 2498,
2566
Parton, James, 2770-76, 2883
about, 2776
Partridge, Bellamy, 5005, 6324
Partridge, Eric, 2272, 2274
Partridge, Samuel Selden, about, 6324
Parts of a World, 1784
Paskman, Dailey, 5637
Paso por Aqui, 1686-87
A Passage in the Night, 1 194
Passage to Glory, 3154
Passage to W aid en, 609
Passaic River, 3994
The Passing of Marcus O'Brien, 1058
The Passing of the Frontier, 41 21
The Passion of Sacco and Vanzetti, 1980
Passions Spin the Plot, 1423
Pastor, A., 3169
The Pastoral Bees, 741
Pastoral manuals, 47-48
Pastures, 2780
Patchen, Kenneth, 2079-86
Patent laws and legislation, 4780-81
Patent medicines, 5955
Patent Office, about, 4767
Patents, 4780-81
Paterson, Isabel, 1904
Paterson, N.J., poetry, 1876
The Path I Trod, 6054
The Pathfinder, 258
Pathological psychiatry, 4833
Pathology, 4831
Paths to the Present, 3140
The Patient's Dilemma, 4891
Patrician and Plebeian in Virginia, 3234
Patrick, John, 2334, 2336
Patrick, Rembert W., 3384
Patriot and President, 3269
Patriotic societies, 3644
Patriotism, 4526
Patriotism in literature, 511-12, 2465
fiction, 579-82, 1730
poetry, 134-39, 146-48, 206, 368-70
short stories, 901-5, 909
Patriots (American Revolution), 3244,
3282, 3304
The Patriots, 2334, 2336
Patronage. See Spoils system
Patrons of Husbandry, 3421
Patroon system, 3200
Pattee, Fred Lewis, 810, 884, 2424,
2486-90
ed., in, 138
Pattern of a Day, 1 5 1 5
The Pattern of Responsibility, 3543
Patterns of Anti-Democratic Thought,
6069
Patterson, Caleb Perry, 6147
Patterson, E. W., 5290-91
Patterson, Eleanor ("Cissy"), about,
2862
Patterson, Harry N., about, 4734
Patterson, Joseph, about, 2862
Patterson, Robert L., 230
Patterson, Robert W., 2862
Patterson family, 2862
Pauck, Wilhelm, about, 5433
Paul, Randolph E., 5970
Paul, Rodman W., 774
Paul, Sherman, 304, 483
Paul Kauvar; or Anarchy, 2347
Paulding, James Kirke, 511-19, 2295,
2337
Paulding, William Irving, 517
Paulison, Walter M., 4993
Paullin, Charles O., 2974, 3678
The Pavilion, 4912
Paviotso shamanism, 3019
Pawnee Indian tales, 3000
Paxson, Frederic L., 3105, 3463
Paxton, Harry, 4996
Payne, John Howard, 2295, 2302-3,
2337.2347
Payne, Pierre S. R., 4953
Peabody, Elizabeth P., ed., 586
Peabody, Josephine Preston, 2348
Peace in the Heart, 1724, 5087
Peace Mission movement, 5439, 5489
Peace, My Daughters, 191 7
Peach, Arthur W., ed., 157
Peake, Ora B., 3028
Peale, Charles Willson, about, 2804,
5749. 5769
Peale (Charles Willson) family, 5744
Peanuts, 2690
Pearce, Roy Harvey, 3031, 3102
ed., 2326
Peare, Catherine O., 3222
The Pearl, 1780
Pearl Harbor, 3130
The Pearl of Orr's Island, 570-71
Pearson, Norman Holmes, 276, 593,
2412
ed., 350, 356, 2321
Pearson, T. Gilbert, 2962
Peary, Robert E., 2979
about, 2979-80
Pease, Theodore Calvin, 4129, 4133
Pease, Mrs. Theodore Calvin, 4133
Peattie, Donald Culross, 1130, 2963-64
Peattie, Roderick, ed., 4172
Peck, Taylor, 3670
Peckham, Howard H., 3032-33
Pecos Bill, about, 5506
The Peculiar Institution, 3403
A Peculiar Treasure, 1403
Peden, William, ed., 153, 3279
Peder Victorious, 1722
Pediatrics, 4841
Pedlar's Progress, 186, 5266
Peek, George A., ed., 3279
Peek, George N., about, 5860
Peel, Roy V., 6381-82
Peffer, E. Louise, 5813
Peirce, Charles Sanders, 5346-49
about, 5264, 5345, 5350-53
Pellegrini, Angelo M., 2777, 4494
about, 2777
Pelopidas, 205
Peltason, J. W., 6128, 6134
Pelton, Walter J., ed., 4871
Penal colonies, Colonial period, 6056
Penard, Eugene, about, 4734
Pencillings by the Way, 677-78
Pendleton, Edmund, about, 2740
Penhally, 1465
Penn, William, 5418
about, 171, 3222, 5396, 5419
drama, 2310
Penn State Yankee, 2490
Pennell, Elizabeth (Robins), 4060,
5776
Pennell, Joseph, 4060, 5776
Penniman, Howard R., 6139
Pennock, James Roland, 6314
Pennsylvania, 4054-61
bibl., 4054
culture, 3229, 3231-32, 4054
farm life, 2891
fiction, 105-8, 1239, 1507, 1691,
1694-95, 1916, 2055, 2069, 2076-
78, 2282
folklore, 5579
folksongs & ballads, 5578-79
geography, 4057
govt., 3229-30, 4057, 6195
guidebooks, 3816-21
hist., 3280, 3962, 3993, 4043, 4054-
57 .
Colonial period, 2880, 3214, 3222,
3225, 3229-32, 4490
legends, 5579
relations with Gt. Brit., 3225
Scotch-Irish, 4490
travel & travelers, 366, 4241, 4255,
4266, 4269, 4279, 4285
Pennsylvania. University, hist., 5130,
5192
Pennsylvania. University. Dept. of
Medicine, hist., 4856
Pennsylvania Dutch. See Pennsylvania
Germans.
The Pennsylvania Gazette, about, 2854
Pennsylvania Germans, 4479-80
arts & crafts, 5594, 5599-5600
culture, 3230-31
language (dialects, etc.), 2266, 4479
literature, 2266, 4479
religion, 3230-31
Pennsylvania Hospital, Philadelphia,
hist., 4850
Pennsylvania- Virginia frontier, 2673
Penobscot Indians, 301 1
Penology, 4639, 4654, 5028
Pernod, 1803
Penrod and Sam, 1802
Penrose, Boies, about, 6353
Penrose, E. F., 3562
Penson, Lilian M., 3179
Peonage laws. See Freedom of labor
People Behave hike Ballads, 1295
People of Plenty, 3734
The People of the Abyss, 1053
The People, Yes, 1 73 1
The People's Choice, 6419
Il6o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The People's Lawyer, 2347
Pcpinsky, Harold B., 5228
Pepinsky, Pauline N., 5228
Pepper, George Wharton, 6161
Percival, Milton O., 481
Percy, William Alexander, 2778-79
about, 2779
Fere Antoine's Date-Palm, 71 1
Pere Raphael, 748
Pereida, Ralph J., illus., 5503
Performing rights (music), 5621
Periodicals. See Literature — period-
icals; Magazines; Newspapers
Perkin, Robert, 4176
Perkins, Dexter, 3491, 3509, 3523,
3577, 6254
Perkins, Eli, pseud., 212
Perkins, Frances, 3498
Perlman, Philip B., 4425
Perlman, Selig, 6033
Permanence and Change, 2387
The Permanent Horizon, 1 57 1
Permit Me Voyage, 1908
Perry, Bliss, 2491-92, 3732, 5221
ed., 295
about, 2922, 5221
Perry, Ralph Barton, 3733, 5260, 5334-
35
ed., 5327, 5329, 5334
Perry, Thomas Sergeant, 5304
Pershing, John J., 3715
about, 3714
Pershing Expedition (in Mexico), 3586
Persichetti, Vincent, 5687
Person, Place and Thing, 2140
Personae, 1666
Personal property law, 6271
Personalism, 631, 5265, 5317
Personality, 4568, 4572, 5289, 5291
Personnel administration, library, 6478-
80, 6483
Personnel management in industry,
6038, 6042
Persons, Stow, 5435
ed-, 3753. 3758
Persons and Places, 1737
Peru, History of the Conquest of, 2294
Pessimism in literature, 695-98, 732-
39, 768, 798-99, 1532, 1927
Peter Martyr, 3 1 53
Peter Whiffle, 1828
Peterkin, Julia Mood, 1653-55
Peters, Aimee M., comp., 937
Peters, Harry T., 5778-79
Petersburg, Va., 4406
Petersen, Elmore, 6009
Peterson, Clara Gottschalk, ed., 5679
Peterson, Elmer T., ed., 4594
Peterson, Florence, 6035
Peterson, Houston, ed., 5222
Peterson, Marcelene, 4946
Peterson, Robert E., tr., 5679
Peterson, Theodore, 2918, 2932
Peto, John Frederick, about, 5744
The Petrified Forest, 1749-50, 2327,
2348
Petrillo, James Caesar, about, 5619
Petroleum resources and industry,
2586,2731, 2746,5914
Petrology, hist., 4715
Petrullo, Vincenzo, 3020
Petry, Howard K., ed., 4804
Pewter, 5788
Peyotism, 3020
Peyton, Green, pseud. See Werten-
baker, Green Peyton
Peyton, John Lewis, 4350
about, 4349
Pfefrer, Leo, 5103
PfefTerkorn, Blanche, 4845
Phaedra, 21 01
Phelps, N. Y., in literature, 6324
Philadelphia
Chinese, 4463
culture, 4518
drama, 198, 1202
econ. condit., 4602
epidemic (1793), 4872
essays, 1002-3
fiction, 116-17, 1333, 1336, 1345
guidebooks, 3821
historic houses, etc., 4059
hist., 3764
music & music industries, 5629
Negro religious cults, 5498
politics, 6207, 6353, 6389
soc. life & customs, 3764, 4059-60,
4251, 4258, 4263, 4283, 4602
theater, 5659
The Philadelphia Story, 1202, 2334
Philanthropy, 2689
fiction, 1568
See also Charities
Philip II of Spain, 2294
Philippine Islands,
annexation, 3594
Japanese conquest, 1992
relations with, 3595, 4218
Phillips, Cabell, 3615
Phillips, Charles F., 5945
Phillips, David C, 4695
Phillips, David Graham, 1 107-10
about, 2464
Phillips, Duncan, 5767
Phillips, Merton Ogden, 2940
Phillips, Orie L., 6320
Phillips, Ulrich Bonnell, 3402-5, 5828
about, 3057-58
Phillips, Wendell, 244
about, 2280, 2546, 3099
Phillips, William, ed., 2566
Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass.,
about, 2674
Philo, an Evangeliad, 402
The Philosopher of the Common Man,
5290
Philosophers, 3746, 5250, 5253, 5257-
58, 5265-5387
Philosophers at Court, 1 740
Philosophers Lead Sheltered Lives, 5351
Philosophy, 3728, 3747, 3751, 3758,
5250-5387
and religion, 5259, 5289, 5311, 5319,
5338, 5354, 5358, 5361, 543i,
5437
as literature, 21, 186, 280, 585, 1733
European influences, 5262
hist., 3741, 5261-62, 5334
Indian, American, 3015
Philosophy — Continued
Scottish, 5337
study & teaching, 2767
The Philosophy of Composition, 520,
. 538
Phinney, Eleanor, 6482
Phipps, Henry, about, 4834
Phoenix, Ariz., 4187
The Phoenix and the Tortoise, 2099
Phonographs and records, 5618, 5629
Photography
hist., 5689, 5781
journalistic, 2908
Phrenology, 3752, 4516
Phyfe, Duncan, about, 5728
Physicians and surgeons, 4817-32
biog. (collected), 4804, 4807, 4822,
4844, 4856
drama, 1520
fiction, 1299, 1562, 1872
Physics, 4721
hist., 4715
Physiological chemistry, 4732
Physiology, 4818
Piano industry, 5622
The Piazza Tales, 484, 491, 493
Pickard, Karl, 4889
Pickard, Madge E., 4810
Pickard, Samuel T., 672
Pickering, Ernest, 5702
Pickett, Clarence E., 5427
about, 5427
Pickett, Ralph R., 5994
Pickford, Mary, 4955
about, 4955
Pickpockets, language (slang, etc.),
2262
Picnic, 1997, 2336
Pico, Rafael, 4222
Pictorial Americana (catalog), 5807
Pictures from an Institution, 2001
Pictures of the Floating World, 1584
A Piece of Land, 917
A Piece of My Mind, 2543
Pierce, Bessie Louise, 4136
Pierce, Edward L., 3406
Pierce, Franklin, about, 3347
Pierce, Truman M., ed., 5206
Pierce, W. H., 6207
Piercy, Josephine K., 2493
Pierre, S. D., guidebook, 3900
Pierson, George W., 4512
Pike, Kenneth L., 2275
Pike County Ballads, 942-43, 3426
Pike dialect in literature, 933, 937,
941-44, 1126
Pike's Peak theater, 4925
The Pilgrim Hawk, 1839
The Pilgrims
hist., 1-6, 3204
satire, 51-52
Pilgrims through Space and Time, 2377
The Pilot, 256-57
Pinckney, Josephine, 4068
Pinckney, Pauline A., 5603
Pinckney, Mich., in literature, 415
The Pin\ Church, 1878
Piiion Country, 3956
Pinson, Koppel S., ed., 5267
Pioneer America, 5596
INDEX / Il6l
Pioneers, 4186, 4199, 4211, 4213
architecture, 5719
See also Frontier and pioneer life
The Pioneers, 258-60
Pioneer's Mission, 3053
Pioneer's Progress, an Autobiography ,
2702, 5219
Pious and Secular America, 5399
Pipe lines (industry), 5920
Pipe Night, 2073
Piper, C. V., ed., 5821
The Piper, 2348
Pique, 2317
The Pirate, 121 1
Pirsson, Louis V., 4715
ThePisan Cantos, 1665
The Pit, 1094-95
Pitkin, W. B., 5260
about, 5327
Pittenger, W. Norman, about, 5433
Pittsburgh, 4312
econ. condit., 4591
hist., 3962, 4061
intellectual life, 3767
soc. condit., 4591
Place, Charles A., 5720
Place names, 2967
bibl., 2976
Indian, American, 2364
New York (State), 5548
Place of Hawks, 1959
Plagued by the Nightingale, 1243
Plain Folk, of the Old South, 4081
Plain Language from Truthful fames,
, 933. 937
Plain People, 959, 2885
"Plain" style, Puritan, 18, 33, 45, 75
Plains. See Great Plains; High Plains;
Northern Plains
Plains Indians, 2799, 3006, 4164
painting, 3018
Plainville, U.S.A., 4585
Plant, Henry B., about, 4096
Plant lore, Ozark Mountains, 5544
Plant pathology, 2792
Plantation life, 4242-46, 4436, 4442
songs & music, 5677
Fla., 4293
Md., 4517
Miss., 5576
S.C., 4517, 5087
Southern States, 3402-3, 4283, 4363
Va., 3271, 4086, 3279, 4517
See also Farm and rural life
Plantation life in literature
descr., 1724
editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93,
1099, 1103-4, 1106
essays, familiar, 406-8
fiction, 245, 405-8, 1099, 1 105-6,
1467, 1618-19, 1653
poetry, 856-59, 86l, 1 133-3 5
short stories, 192-93, 856, 859-60,
911-16, 922, 1032-35, 1099-1102,
1 106, 1724
Ga., 911-16, 922
La., 1032
Va., 15-16, 192-93, 245, 405-8,
1099-1106
See also Farm and rural life
Plantation Proverbs, 911
Planter and Patriot, 3269
Plants, 2956-57, 2959-60, 2966, 2969,
4241, 4247, 4276
prairies, 4188
Fla., 4247
Ga., 4247
Ky., 4276
New York (State), 4237-38, 4241
New World, 3155
N.C., 4247, 4276
Ohio, 4276
Pa., 4237-38, 4241
S.C., 4247, 4276
Tenn., 4276
Plaskitt, Harold, 3146
Platonism, 280, 5368
Piatt, Philip S., 4863
Piatt (Thomas C.) political machine,
6385
Play-party songs
Appalachian Mountains, 5583
Middle West, 5586
Oklahoma, 5570
Ozark Mountains, 5569
Southern States, 5583
Playing Doctor (sculpture), 5739
Playing the Mischief, 277
Pleading, legal, 6282
Pleasure Dome: On Reading Modern
Poetry, 2426
Plotkin, David George, ed., 3152
Plowman, Edward Grosvenor, 6009
Pluck, and Luck, 1214
The Plum Tree (Chase), 1289
The Plum Tree (Phillips), 1107
A Plumb Clare Conscience, 1684
Plunder, 1155
Plunkitt, George Washington, about,
6382
A Pluralistic Universe, 5326
Plymouth, Mass., poetry, 1222
Plymouth Colony
hist., 1-6, 3204
satire, 51-52
Po' Sandy, 757
Poage, George Rawlings, 3344
Pocahontas, 2337
Pocahontas legend, 4273
See also Indians, American — legends
& tales
Pocahontas legend in literature, 66, 70
drama, 198-99
fiction, 251
Pochmann, Henry A., 5305
ed., 399, 2349
Poe, Edgar Allan, 520-38, 2290
about, 216, 333, 365, 381, 405, 415,
520, 533, 539-41. 614, 633, 732,
856, 1016, 1167, 1303, 1873, 2277,
2385, 2397, 2420, 2423, 2436,
2453. 2456, 2468, 2471, 2478-79,
2486,2513,2545
Poems about God, 1 675
Poems for a Son with Wings, 1295
Poems for Music, 1 5 1 6
Poems Here at Home, 1 1 27
Poems of the War, 206
Poet of the People, 1132
The Poetic Principle, 216, 520, 538
Poetry
and science, 2412
anthologies, 1870, 1948, 2292, 2328,
2331. 2342, 2344, 2350, 2363,
2483,2513
elegiac, 623
epic & extended narrative, 101, 104,
118-21, 165, 167, 427, 429, 432-
33, 1222, 1224, 1434, 1532-34,
1585, 1644-45, I7I3_I4> 1824-25,
1876, 2134, 2200
ethical themes in, 1872, 2007, 2189
experimental, 1303-4, 1306, 1309,
1313. 1357. 1359. M32, 1583-84.
1620-21, 1664-66, 1766, 1782,
1784, 1872, 2034, 2079, 2098
hist. & crit., 2544
"genteel tradition," 2513, 2545
hist. & crit., 520, 614, 1044, 1226,
1236, 1238, 1304, 1306, 1482,
1668, 1670-75, 1678-79, 1717-19,
1809-10, 1905, 2105, 2128, 2191,
2357. 2374, 2378-79, 2403-4,
2413-14, 2426, 2452, 2484, 2491,
2513, 2527, 2533
humanitarian, 1061, 1069, 1872,
2079
humorous, 368, 456-58, 680, 878-
80, 933, 941-44, 1126-32, 1629-
34. 1651-52
See also Verse, light; Verse, ver-
nacular
metaphysical, 2497, 2499
music in relation to, 1038, 1044-46,
1580
neo-classical, 2215, 2544
pastoral, 1451-52
periodicals, 2567
periods
Colonial, 7— 11, 72-74, 79-83, 2483
(1764-1819), 101-4, 118-21, 134-
43, 146-48, 165-67
(1820-70), 206-8, 216-21, 223-
25, 280, 288-90, 323-29, 365,
368-70, 427-29. 431-44. 449-
59, 464-67, 469, 486, 488, 491,
494. 520-27, 530, 533, 536-38,
546, 585. 598, 614-17, 619-30,
636-37, 639-42, 644-46, 662,
664, 666-71, 673, 675, 679-81
(1871-1914), 706, 714, 821, 831,
833, 835-36, 838-46, 852, 856-
59, 861, 878-80, 926, 933-34,
941-44, 984, 1038-43, 1946-47.
1061-64, 1066-67, 1069, 1071,
1126-35
(1915-39), 1153-54, n6i, 1166,
1 196, 1222, 1224, 1227, 1230,
1232, 1236-37, 1290, 1295-97,
1303-4, 1306-9, 1313-14. 1319-
24, 1350-52, 1357. 1359. 1379.
1409-10, 1432-35. 1451-52,
1480-83, 1512, 1515-17, 1521,
1530-38, 1540, 1556, 1558,
1580-86, 1588, 1599-1601,
1608-9, 1614, 1620-21, 1623-
27, 1629-35, 1644-45, 1651-
52, 1664-66, 1675-77, 1679,
1697, 1699, 1713-14, 1724,
1727. i73i. 1733-34. 1740,
Il62 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Poetry — Continued
periods — Continued
( '9I5_39) — Continued
1766, 1782, 1784, 1809, 1811,
1813-14, 1821-27, 18507-59,
1863, 1870-72, 1876, 1878,
1881, 1883, 1885, 1902-3,
1905-6
(1940-55), 1907-8, 1916, 1919,
1923-26, 1948-53. 1959. 1968,
1970-72, 1981-83, 1999, 2002,
2007-10, 2034-35, 2037, 2039,
2060-62, 2095, 2098-2100,
2102-6, 2123-24, 2126, 2133-
34, 2138-44, 2166, 2172, 2189-
93, 2196, 2200, 2215-17
political verse, 134-39, 456-57, 662,
664, 1069
psychological, 1357
realistic, 612, 1290, 1295-97, 1727,
1731
religious, 72-73, 79-83, 662, 680,
1357, 1359, 1369. 1537-38 1540,
2034-35, 2037, 2039
satiric, 120, 134-38, 148, 165, 167,
323,456-57,2189
essays, 2465, 2467
sentimental, 1 126-31
sonnets, 206, 427, 1608, 1623-27,
1972
structure, 2379
surrealist, 2034
theories, 216, 280, 520, 538, 614,
618, 620, 1038, 1044-46, 1196,
1783, 2142, 2476, 2484
vernacular, 753-55. 933~34> 941-44.
1 1 26-3 1
See also Ballads; Folk ballads; Verse
drama
Poetry: a Magazine of Verse, 2139, 2760
Poetry and the Age, 2000
Poetry in Our Time, 2414
Poetry in the Theater, 1 1 75
A Poet's Life, 2761
The Poet's Testament, 1740
Poganuc People, 576
Pohl, Frederick J., 3172
Point four program. See Technical as-
sistance
Point of No Return, 1596
The Point of View, 1008
Points of View, 2504
Poland, fiction, 1992
Polar exploration, 2977-81, 3669
Poles (Polanders), 4435, 4495
Poletti, Charles, 6080
Police, 3644a, 4498, 4642, 4655, 4659-
60
Political bosses, 3438, 6207, 6333, 6337-
38, 6346, 6382, 6384-91
Political campaigns, 6149, 6333, 6336,
6340-41, 6362
(1884), 6373
(1932-40), 6364
(1948), 6414
funds, 6341, 6407, 6410
literature, 6348-49, 6394, 6410
Political candidates, 6333-34
Political clubs, 3300
New York (City), 6381
Political conventions, 3400, 6149, 6340,
6361
Political economy. See Economics
Political ethics, 3760, 6342-44
Political influences on literature, 2485
Political leaders and leadership, 3416,
3460, 3494, 3496
Political machines. See Machine poli-
tics
Political parties, 3139, 3320, 4499, 6078,
6134, 6147, 6335-38, 6340, 6347-
73. 6398, 6416, 6419, 6427
discipline, 6341, 6354-55, 6381-82,
6384,6389
hist., 6076, 6149, 6347
platforms, 6341, 6366-67
New York (State), 4044
Southern states, 6376
Political psychology, 6345, 6349, 6354
Political science, 5279
hist., 3760
Political themes in literature
drama, 11 72, 11 76
editorials, sketches, etc., 422, 465,
467, 512, 546, 663, 862, 1048,
1103-4, 1107, 1739, 1859, 2278
fiction, 277, 422, 689-90, 722, 762,
775-77, 1 107, 1155-56, 1566,
1792, 2025, 2027, 2148, 2197,
2278
periods
Colonial, 75-78, 84, 92-95
(1764-1819), 101, 103-4, I54-
60
(1820-70), 252, 261-62, 265-
67, 585-86, 593, 604-5, 607-8,
619, 631
poetry, 134-39, 456-57. 662, 664,
1069
satire, 147-48, 422-25, 558, 862,
1792
Political thought, 3073, 3099, 3758,
4556, 6059-72, 6074, 6170, 6382,
6402
hist., 6062, 6070
Colonial period, 3182, 3199,
3747
1 8th cent., 3187, 3256-59, 3261,
3279, 3283, 3300, 6075, 6085
19th cent., 3319, 6064, 6066,
6101
20th cent., 3487, 3492, 3499-
3500, 6101
Southern States, 6059
The Politician Out-Witted, 2347
The Politicos, 3438
Politics, 3616, 4499, 4502, 6133-34,
6137, 6139, 6333-46, 6357, 6389-
92, 6396, 6418, 6421, 6426
Corruption. See Corruption (in pol-
itics)
Dutch, 4493
hist., 2677
American Revolution, 3187,
3252,3277, 3279
Civil War, 3382, 3400, 3416,
3435.3441
Colonial period, 3187, 3194,
3256, 3261
Politics — Continued
hist. — Continued
18th cent., 3141, 3279, 3281,
3285-86, 3303
19th cent., 3141, 3275, 3286,
3303. 3313. 3319. 3322-
26, 3333, 3337. 3339, 3352-
53, 3356-58, 3397. 3408-10,
3412,3417,3421,3423,3431,
3436, 3438, 3442, 3444, 3447,
3450, 4312, 4315-17, 4334.
4515,4664
20th cent., 3453, 3456, 3458,
3460, 3463, 3465-67, 2469-
70, 3472-75. 3478-79. 3496,
3498, 3500a, 3548, 3613,
4405-8, 4515, 6076, 6165
public relations. See Public rela-
tions— politics
See also subdivisions History and
Politics under names of places and
regions, e.g., Illinois — hist.;
Maine — politics
Politics and the press, 2846, 2884, 2888,
2919, 2924, 2931
cartoons, 2859, 2917
Baltimore, Md., 2876
Hartford, Conn., 2875
New York (City), 2868-69, 2921
Ohio, 2857
Oreg., 2863
Tex., 2866
See also Presidents and the press
Polk, Alma Forrest, 4443
Polk, James Knox, 3349, 3351
about, 3350-51, 3540
Pollack, Queena, 2668
Pollak, Gustav, 2921
Pollard, James E., 2911, 2930
Pollard, John A., 662
Pollard, Joseph P., 6251
Pollock, Sir Frederick, 2607
Pollock, J. K., 6336
Pollock, Thomas C, ed., 1898
Polls. See Public opinion- — research
Polly, 1 1 00-2
Polo, 5058
Polynesian life, fiction, 470-78
"Polyphonic prose," 1432, 1583
Pomeroy, Wardell B., 4565
Ponce de Leon, about, 3158
Pond, Frederick E., ed., 5077
The Ponder Heart, 2208
Pont each, 2347
Pontiac (Ottawa chief), about, 3030,
3033,3171
Pony Express, 4661
Pool, David de Sola, 4457, 5427
about, 5427
Poole, Ernest, 1656-58
Poole, Kenyon E., ed., 5971
Poor Aubrey, 2332
Poor laws, R.I., 4632
Poor Richard Improved, 131
Poor Richard's Almanack^, 122, 131
Poor White, 1 1 80
Poor whites (South) in literature
fiction, 1180, 1270, 1391, 1775, 1777,
2090
short stories, 910, 917-21, 1270,
1275
INDEX / 1 1 63
Poorhouses, 4310
Pope, Bertha, ed., 738
Pope, Jennie Barnes, 5951
Pope, Liston, 4702
Pope-Hennessy, Una, ed., 4300
Popular books, 2384, 2434, 2482, 5126
See also Bestsellers
Popular music and songs, 4935, 4973>
5635-40, 6443
bibl., 5613, 5639
hist., 5635, 5639
Population, 4390-4403, 4551, 4617
cities & towns, 4393
Colonial period, 4398
Indian, 2985, 3012, 3022, 3043
maps, 2937, 2972, 2974, 2985
stat., 3786, 4403
Ga., 4095
Milwaukee, 4140
Mo., 4108
Ohio, 41 19
S.C., 4092
Wis., 4139
See also Foreign population; Migra-
tion, internal
Populism, 3421, 3427, 3458, 6356,
6358,6368,6427
Populist Party, about, 6358
Porgy, 1512-13,2332
Porgy and Bess (opera), 1512, 5678
Port Arthur, Tex., 3922
Portage, Wis., 3884
fiction, 1453
Portals of Tomorrow, 1959
Porter, Cole, about, 5639
Porter, Katherine Anne, 1659-63, 2372
about, 1663
Porter, Kenneth Wiggins, 6024
Porter, Keyes, 5606
Porter, Kirk H., 6204, 6409
comp., 6367
Porter, Mae Reed, 3330
Porter, Thomas C, about, 4734
Porter, William Sydney (O. Henry),
1111-25, 2296
about, 926, 11 11, 2486
Porter, William T., 5542
ed., 4097
Portland, Maine, guidebook, 3795
Portland, Or eg., 4150
Portrait for Posterity, 3395
Portrait of a Gentleman Seating (paint-
ing)- 5774
The Portrait of a Lady, 989-91
Portrait of an American, 1291
Portrait of Jennie, 1639
Portraits, 5735, 5759, 5763, 5769, 5771,
5774-76, 5804
Portraits of Places, 1093
Portsmouth, N.H., 4261
Portsmouth, Va., 4263
"Posson Jone," 748
Post Office Dept. and postal service,
4661-71
Postal, Bernard, 4461
Postscript to Yesterday, 3746
The Pot of Earth, 1586
Potiphar Papers, 2278
Potofsky, Jacob S., 5426
about, 5426
Potomac River, 4008
Potsdam Conference, 3544
Potter, Alfred Claghorn, 6470
Potter, Alonzo, about, 5457
Potter, David M., 3734
ed., 3106
Potter, Elmer B., ed., 3671
Potter, William J., 5435
Potter's Field, 1475
Pottery, 5596, 5791-92, 5796
Indian, 2723
Pound, Arthur, 4138, 5940
Pound, Ezra, 1664-68
about, 1670-74, 2426, 2497
bibl., 1669
Pound, Louise, ed., 635, 2330
Pound, Roscoe, 4649, 6223, 6231, 6233,
6251, 6268, 6272, 6290, 6302,
6304-5, 6325
Pounds, Norman J. G., 2939
Poverty, 4617, 4626, 4630
prevention, 4634
relief, 4634
New York (City), 4638
R.I., 4632
Powder River, 3971
Powderly, Terence V., 6054
about, 6054
Powdermaker, Hortense, 4948
Powell, John H., 4872
Powell, John Wesley, 4757
about, 2161, 4757
Power, Richard Lyle, 41 17
Power and Glory, 6353
Power and Policy, 3623
Powers, Alfred, 3959
Pragmaticism, 5345
Pragmatism, 31 15, 4545, 5254~55.
5259, 5291, 5324-25, 5327, 5332-
34. 5345-50. 5352
and evolution, 5264
and science, 5254
hist., 5254, 5281
Prahl, A. J., 4481
The Prairie, 258
Prairie City, 4171
The Prairie Schooner, about, 2925
The Prairie Years, 1728, 3395
Prairies
travel & travelers, 4350
111., 4322
Southwest, 4188
The Praise of Folly, and Other Papers,
2492
Pratt, Dorothy, 5721-22
Pratt, Edwin J., 3536
Pratt, Fletcher, 3722
ed., 4381
Pratt, J.B., 5255
about, 5325
Pratt, Julius W., 3058, 3306, 3449,
4218
Pratt, Marion Dolores, ed., 3390
Pratt, Richard, 5721-22
Pratt, Richard N., about, 3035
Prayers of the Social Awakening, 5482
The Preacher and the Slave, 2164
Preacher tales
Brazos River, Tex., 5527
Mich., 5535
Precipitation (meteorology), 5816
Predilections, 1622
Preface to Life, 1457
A Preface to Logic, 5267
Prehistoric man, 2995-96, 4202
Prehistory. See Archaeology and pre-
history
Preludes and Symphonies, 1433
Preludes for Memnon, 1 166
Premedical education, 4861
Presbyterians, 5404, 5442
biog. (collected), 5466
hist., 5414, 5466
Preschool education, 5148
See also Kindergartens
Prescott, Frederick G., ed., 2291
Prescott, Samuel C, about, 4785
Prescott, William Hickling, 2294, 2534
about, 2277
Prescription for Rebellion, 271 6
Presidency, 3399, 6140-49, 6184, 6340,
6370, 6422
and the press, 2861, 2930
candidates for, 2817, 2819
Continental Congress (1774-89),
6083
foreign affairs, 3604, 3610-11
functions, 6140-41, 6151
powers of, 3472
See also Executive branch
The President Makers, 3460
Presidential Agent, 1758
Presidential elections. See Elections
Presidential Mission, 1758
Presidential primaries, 6408
Presidents, U.S. See names of Presi-
dents, e.g., Adams, John Quincy
President's Advisory Committee on
Government Housing Policies and
Programs, 461 1
The President's Cabinet, 6145
President's Commission on Higher Ed-
ucation, 3113, 5189
President's Commission on Immigration
and Naturalization, 4425
President's Commission on the Health
Needs of the Nation, 4862
President's Communications Policy
Board, 471 1
The President's Lady, 2820
President's Research Committee on So-
cial Trends, 6194
President's Scientific Research Board,
4779
Press, 2847, 2858, 2904-5, 2907
associations, 2849, 2860, 2864, 2890
bibl., 2931
business, 2902
Dutch, 4493
foreign language, 2895-99
law, 2932
Ukrainian, 4492
Southern States, 2853
Washington, D.C., 2861, 4065
See also Freedom of the press; Gov-
ernment and the press; Magazines;
Newspapers; Politics and the press;
Society and the press
Presses, printing. See Printing
Pressly, Thomas J., 3407
1 164 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Pressure groups, 6139, 6201, 6218,
6335-38, 6343, 6357, 6392-99
Prestage, E., 3 1 69
Preston, Captain, about, 3279
A Pretty Story, 147
Preventive medicine, 4815, 4826, 4864,
4873-74
Price, Don K., 4776, 6216
Price, Harry Bayard, 3640
Price, Robert, 5519
Priest, Loring Benson, 3034
Priestley, Herbert Ingram, 3086
Primaries, 6406
presidential, 6408
Primary education, 5148, 5150
See also Elementary education
Prime, William C, 5086
Primer for America, 1295
Primer f 01 Combat, 1247
Primitivism and Decadence, 2544
Primitivism in art, 5595, 5597, 5601
Prince, Morton, about, 5392
Prince Ananias (operetta), 5681
Prince Deucalion, 2282
A Prince in Their Midst, 4293
The Prince of Parthia, 144-45, 2337,
2347
Prince of Players, 4938
The Princess Bob and Her Friends, 930
Princeton, 111., guidebook, 3880
Princeton College, 2673
Princeton University, about, 3470, 3472,
5204, 5221
The Principles of Literary Criticism,
about, 2407
The Principles of Psychology, 5322
Pringle, Henry F., 3464, 3467, 4785
Printers
biog. (collected), 6446-47
early, 122, 130, 6442
Printing, 6446, 6448, 6455, 6459
hist., 6436, 6440, 6442, 6447, 6456,
6459, 6464
public, 6452
trade unions, 6455
university presses, 6437-39
New England, 3745
Philadelphia, 3764
Prints, 5778-80, 5782-83
See also Engravings
Prisons, 4310, 4639-41, 4652
hist., 4653-54
Mass., 4648
New York, 4653
Prisons (military)
fiction, 1544
personal narratives, 1310
Pritchard, John Paul, 2494
Pritchett, Charles H, 6252-53
Pritchett, Henry S., 4999
The Private Dining Room, 1634
Private enterprise. See Free enterprise
The Private Life, 1012
Private schools, 5155,5217
fiction, 1940, 1944
See also Academies (schools); Sem-
inaries (schools)
Probability, theory of, 5346
Probation. See Parole
Prochazka, Anne, about, 4854
Prochnow, Herbert V., ed., 5972
Proctor, Frederick Freeman, about,
4975
The Professor's House, 1 277
about, 1278
The Professor's Story, 375
Profiles from the New Yorker, 2565
The Profits of Religion, 1754
Progress, idea of, 3754
Progress and Poverty, 4535
The Progress of Dullness, 165, 167
A Progress to the Mines, 13
Progressive education, 5104, 5131, 5198,
5217,5234,5236,5239
Progressive Education Association.
Commission on the Relation of
School and College, 51 3 1
Progressive Party, 6350, 6362, 6427
Progressivism and the Progressive
movement, 1048, 3433, 3446,
3453, 3458, 3467, 3473, 3489.
4202, 6340, 6362, 6424, 6426-27
Prohibition, 4523
Prohibition Party, platforms, 6367
Prokosch, Frederic, 2087-97
The Promised Land, 2585
Pronunciation, 2238, 2246, 2273, 2364
Propaganda, 3462, 3561, 3607, 6336-
37, 6341, 6348-49, 6357, 6393-
94
Property rights, 601 1, 6060, 6094, 6101,
6105
The Prophet (Asch), 1190
The Prophet (Taylor), 2282
Prophet in the Wilderness, 2682
The Prophet of the Great Smoky Moun-
tains, 1087-88
Proportional representation, 6059, 6134,
6402
Prospect of the Future Happiness of
America, 121
Prosperity, economic, 4502
Prosser, Charles A., 5211
Prostitution
Chicago, 2836
New York (City), 4597
Protective tariff. See Tariff
Protestant churches, 5404-5, 5441-42
hist., 5492-93
music, 5631
segregation, 5499
soc. problems, 5485-89, 5492-93
Protestant Episcopal Church. See Epis-
copal Church
Protestants and Protestantism, 3040,
4515, 5394, 5404, 5425, 5438,
5441, 5495
Proud Riders, 13 14
Prout, Henry G., 4790
Provencal poetry, translations, 1664,
1667
Proverbs, 551 1
Miss., 5547
New York (State), 5548
N.C., 5536
Providence, R.I., soc. life & cust., 1 8th
cent., 4261
Provincetown Playhouse, 1647, 1762,
4916
Provincialism, 896-97
Provo, Utah, 3915
Prucha, Francis Paul, 3663
Prue and I, 2278
Prufrock,, 1359
Psychiana, 5439
Psychiatric hospitals, 4833-38
Psychiatry, 4722, 5409
forensic, 4840
military, 4833
nursing, 4835
research, 4833, 4835-36, 4838
study & teaching, 4835-36, 4838,
4840, 4859
Psychical research, 5323
Psychoanalysis, 2716-18, 5389
Psychological influences and themes in
literature
drama, 1519, 1647-48
hist. & crit., 2506
fiction, 365, 375, 727, 986-1001,
1004, 1149, 1163, 1379, 1470,
1927, 1944-45, 1954, 2017-18,
2021, 2023, 2052, 2107-8, 2128,
2130, 2156, 2174-76, 2178, 2184,
2224, 2415
personal narrative, 1557
poetry, 1357, 1623-27
short stories, 1929, 1944, 1946, 2128,
2176-77, 2179
Psychology, 5272, 5322-23, 5340-41,
5388-93
and pragmatism, 5254
educational, 5123, 5229, 5307
experimental, 5391
faculty, 5307
functional, 5389
Gestalt, 5389, 5392
hist., 5388, 5392-93
pathological, 4833
physiological, 5391
political. See Political psychology
religious, 25
social, 3724
testing, 5229, 5247
therapy, 4840
Public administration, 6134-35, 6139,
6170-72, 6174, 6178, 6179-81,
6184,6188,6198,6204
Public assistance, Negroes, 4448
Public debts. See Debts, public
Public defenders, 6329-30
Public domain. See Public lands
Public education, 4095, 5106
administration, 5135, 5i39> 524°,
5307
buildings, 5240
criticism, 5226, 5232-33, 5235-39
curricula, 5136, 5158, 5224-25,
5235>5237.5240
directory, 5 112
experiments & innovations, 5158,
5224, 5235, 5237, 5240
finances, 5135, 5144
function, 5134
govt, relations, 51 41, 5144
hist., 5122, 5125, 5137-38, 5140,
5143
laws & legislation, 5143, 6138-39
local control, 5099, 5141
methods, 5236
objectives, 5124, 5136, 5146
INDEX / 1 165
Public education — Continued
organization, 5135
problems, 5240
programs, 5136
school buildings, 5240
soc. aspects, 5136-38, 5140, 5146
sources, 5125, 5138-39
state control, 5141
stat., 51 14
surveys, 51 14
teachers, 5105, 5132-34, 5216
theories, 5237
Concord, Mass., 5220
Mass., 5125
Va., 5122
Public finance. See Finance, public
Public health, 4617, 4808, 4823, 4829,
4831, 4841-42, 4858, 4862-81
Indians, 3023
laws, 4876
stat., 4862
Ala., 4099
Baltimore, 4867
Chicago, 4864
Ga., 4095
See also Health services; Medicine —
charities
Public Health Service, 4847, 4864, 4878
about, 4765, 4880
The Public Is Never Wrong, 4963
Public lands, 2970, 3237, 5809, 581 1,
5813-14,5817
Public libraries, 6440-41, 6472, 6474,
6480, 6482-83
hist., 6474
personnel, 6479
Public Library Inquiry, 6441, 6452,
6477, 6479-80
Public opinion, 3462, 3609, 3615, 4405,
4499, 4550, 4554
and the press, 2858, 2868, 2884,
2927
research, 4700, 6417, 6423
France, 3775
Russia, 3561
Public opinion polls. See Public opin-
ion— research
Public records, 3079
bib!., 3067
preservation & management, 3063
Public relations, politics, 6341, 6345,
6348
Public Speech, 1586
Public utilities, 6004, 6013
Public welfare, 4618, 4621, 4630-31,
4634
services, 4095
R.I., 4632
Publishers and publishing, 2391, 6435-
38, 6440-41, 6444-46, 6449-53
Colonial, 122
directory (before 1889), 5611
music, 5635
periodicals, 2852, 2855, 2915
See also Newspapers — policies
& practices
Boston, 5628
Nashville, 3765
Philadelphia, 5629
Publishers' Weekly, about, 6445
431240—60 75
Puckett, Newbell Niles, 5561
Pueblo Indians
architecture, 5723
govt, relations, 3035
Puerto Ricans, 4428, 4470
in Brooklyn, 4046
Puerto Rico, 4222
guidebook, 3941
Puerto Rico Reconstruction Adminis-
tration, 3941
Puleston, William D., 3672
Pulitzer, Joseph, about, 2848, 2889
Pulitzer prizes, 2869, 2889
Pullman strike (1894), 3133, 3439
Pulszky, Ferencz Aurelius, 4360-62
about, 4360
Pulszky, Terezia (Walder), 4360-62
about, 4360
Punch, 209
Punch: The Immortal Liar, 11 66
Pu passe, 1035
The Pupil, 1007, 1014
Pupin, Michael I., 4791
about, 4791
The Puppet Master, 1635
Puppets and puppeteers, 2472, 4981
Purcell, Ralph, 5697
Purcell, Theodore V., 6055
A Puritan in Babylon, 3481
The Puritan Pronaos, 3745
Puritan Sage, 31
The Puritan Way of Life, 2345
Puritans and Puritanism, 43, 2345,
3131. 3733. 3742-43. 3745. 5394.
5428
music, 5633
Mass., 3178, 3182, 3197, 3235
Puritans and Puritanism in literature,
7-1 1. 17-35. 40-50, 53-55. 59-65,
72-95, 2441
anthologies, 2345
controversial writings, 17, 20, 86, 89
drama, 198, 200, 1069-70
essays, 2401, 2424, 2486, 2503
fiction, 333, 562, 1730, 2293
poetry, 7-11, 72-74, 79-83, 2483
sermons, 18, 21, 24, 33, 35, 59-62,
65
short stories, 333, 562
See also The Pilgrims; Separatists
The Puritans as Literary Artists, 2345
The Purloined Letter, 529
Pusey, Merlo J., 6254
Putnam, Carleton, 3467
Putnam, George Palmer, 4205
Putnam, Herbert, about, 6469
Putney, Cornelia F., 5589
Puttkammer, Ernst W., 6303
Putz, Louis J., ed., 5447
Puyallup Indians, 3041
Pyle, Ernie, 2745
about, 2745
Pyles, Thomas, 2250
Pylon, 1387
Quacks and quackery, 1155, 4806,
4810-1 1, 4860
Quadrille (dance), 5587, 5590
Quaife, Milo Milton, 4137
ed., 3349
Quaker Oats Co., about, 5835
Quakers and Quakerism, 3222, 4038,
4258
in literature, 178-85, 662, 1343, 221 1
See also Friends, Society of
Qualey, Carlton C, 4487
Quare Medicine, 1475
Quarries and quarrying, 2991
Quarterly Review of Literature, 2568
Queen, Ellery, pseud., 2436
Queen Anne's War (1702-13), 3171
Queeny, John F., about, 4735
Queries, of Highest Consideration, 89
The Quest for Certainty, 5280
Quia Pauper Amavi, 1666
Quiet Cities, 1510
Quiet, Please, 1268
Quiett, Glenn Chesney, 4150
Quigley, Thomas H., 521 1
Quillian, W.F., Jr., 3758
Quilts, 5604
Quimby, George I., 2993
Quincy, Josiah, 6475
Quinn, Arthur Hobson, 2337, 2495-96,
3735, 4904-5
ed., 145, 170, 200, 205, 208, 536,
1070, 1855, 2496
Quinn, Bernetta, 2497
Quinn, David B., 3223
ed., 3223
Quinn, Kerker, ed., 2551
Quint, Howard H., 6368
Quite So, 711
Quo Vadimus, 1861
The Quorndon Hounds, 5080
Quotations, 3152
R
Rabbi in America, 5483
Rabbis, 4458
Rabble in Arms, 1708-9
Race question, 2811-12, 2839-40, 3399,
3404, 4426-27, 4430-34, 4443,
4447, 4550, 4617, 4619, 6106,
6117, 6121, 6129, 6379
Race question in literature, 1 653
essays & studies, 1103-4, 2364
fiction, 722, 756, 789-93, 1099,
1 105, 1569, 1653, 1759-60, 1914-
x5> x939> 201 1, 2045, 2050-51
personal narratives, 1522, 1539
poetry, 856-58, 1133-35, 1537-38,
1540
short stories, 756—58, 856, 910, 1099-
1102, 1523-25
See also Slavery in literature
Racing. See Automobile racing; Horse-
racing; Motorboat racing; Yacht
racing
Racketeering, 2274, 4652
Rackman, Emanuel, 4458
The Racquet Game, 5046
Radar, 3675
Radiation, 4722
Radical empiricism, 5327
Radical Republicans, 3361, 3377, 3412
Il66 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Radicalism, 3139, 3253, 3255, 3262,
3303. 3425. 3427. 6039, 6130,
6426
Radin, Max, 6268
Radin, Paul, 2407
Radio and radio broadcasting, 4682,
4684, 4686, 4691, 4695, 4697-98,
4700-1,4703.4965
advertising, 4696
audiences, 4700-1, 4703, 4895
drama, 4966
hist., 4519, 4690, 4693
in education, 5230-31
in religion, 4702
industry, 4683, 4687
journalists, 2848
law & regulations, 4706-9
Radisson, Pierre Esprit, about, 2831,
317c
Raeder, Ole Munch, 4348
about, 4347
Rael, Juan Bautista, 5537
Raesly, Ellis Lawrence, 3224
Rafinesque, Constantine Samuel, about,
4721
Ragan, Allen E., 6255
Rage for Order, 2529
Rage of the Soul, 2806
A Rage to Live, 2076
Ragusin, Anthony, 3946
Rahab, 1446
Rahv, Philip, 994, 2498
ed., 1007, 2566
Railroadmen, songs & music, 5512,
5559,5562
Railroads, 2580, 2937, 4312, 5920,
5922, 5924-27
biog. (collected), 5927
fiction, 1093
folklore, 5512
frontier, 4156
hist., 5923, 5927
law, 6236
mountain, 4174
New England, 5933
Northwest, Pacific, 4214
The West, 4139
Wis., 4139
Railton, G. S., about, 5497
Rain from Heaven, 1207
Rainbow on the Road, 1444
Raintree County, 2006
Raisz, Erwin, 4172
maps, 3161, 3164, 3298
Raivaaia Publishing Company, about,
2896
Raiziss, Sona, 2499
Rajan, Balachandra, ed., 1367
Raleigh, Walter, Sir, about, 3"23
Raleigh, N.C., 3833
Rail, Harris Franklin, about, 5433
Ralston, William Chapman, about,
2660
Ramona, 985
The Rampaging Frontier, 4097
Ramsaye, Terry, 4944
Ramsdell, Charles W., 4068
Ramsey, Frederic, ed., 5644
Ranch life, 2794, 4152-54, 4161-63,
4174.4196,5503
Randall, David A., 6464
Randall, James G., 6081
Randall, Henry S., 3296-97
Randall, J. H., Jr., 3065, 5289-90
Randall, James G., 3388, 3394~95.
3408
Randolph, John, about, 2617, 2621
Randolph, Vance, 2270, 5543-45
ed., 5569
Raney, William Francis, 4139
Rankin, Daniel S., 759
Rankin, Hugh F., 3244
Rankin, Rebecca B., 6214
Ransom, John Crowe, 1675-79,2512
about, 2499, 2544, 2559
Rare books, 6462, 6464
Raritan River, 3994
Raskin, A. H, 6207
Ratchford, Benjamin U., 5891
Rathbone, Perry T., 5805
The Rational Study of the Classics,
5"5
The Rationale of Verse, 520
Ratner, Joseph, ed., 5120, 5287
Ratner, Sidney, 5290-91, 5970
Rats, Lice and History, 2843
Rauch, Basil, 3492
ed., 3494
Raudebaugh, Charles, 6207
Rauschenbusch, Walter, 5482
about, 5396, 5436, 5443, 5482
The Raven and Other Poems, 530
The Raven and the Whale, 2478
Raw Material, 1551
Rawlings, Marjorie (Kinnan), 1680-85
about, 1685
Rawson, Marion (Nicholl), 4531
Ray, Sarah Paulding, 6267
Rayburn, Otto Ernest, 3960
Raymond, Henry Jarvis, about, 2848,
2869
Razzle Dazzle, 2114
Reactionary Essays on Poetry and Ideas,
1810
Read, Conyers, ed., 6082
The Reader's Digest, about, 2919-20
Reading Modern Poetry, 1968
Reading the Spirit, 1351
Real estate business, 5812, 5815
Real property law, 6278
The Real Right Thing, 10 12
Realism in literature
drama, 1518, 1647, 1688, 1995, 2043,
2063
fiction, 277, 821, 867, 887, 956, 959,
964, 986, 1372, 1379, 1445, 1453,
1460, 1494, 1559, 1571, 1611,
1647, 1720, 1743, 1754, 1775,
1792, 1940, 1954, 1992, 2003,
2011, 2025, 2069, 2128, 2229
hist. & crit., 2276, 2364, 2401, 2424,
2485
poetry, 1290, 1727
short stories, 821, 881, 890, 986,
1 149, 1379, 1453, 1494, 1796,
2011, 2071-73, 2128, 2210
theories, 890, 964, 977
See also Naturalism in literature —
fiction
Reality, 5379
Realms of Being, 5371
about, 5375
Realms of Value, 5334
Reason and Law, 5269
Reason and Nature, 5268
Reason in Madness, 1810
Reason the Only Oracle of Man, 5408
Rebel withotit a Cause, 2717
Rebels and Ancestors, 2430
Rebels and Democrats 3241
Rebels and Gentlemen, 3764
Rebels and Redcoats, 3244
The Rebuilding of Old Commonwealths,
5M5
Recamier, Marie, 2281
Recollections and Impressions, 2279
Recollections of Europe, 263
Recollections of the Last Ten Years,
308-9
Reconstruction, 3093, 3120, 3141, 3361—
63. 3372, 3377, 3385. 3387-88,
3408,3412,3416-17,4077
editorials, sketches, etc., 556
fiction, 1105, 1382, 1618-19
reminiscences, 277, 2828-30
short stories, 11 51, 1389
sources, 3376
Reconstruction in Philosophy, 5276
Recreation, 4983-5097
areas, 3786
See also Parks
community, 4997-98
Plains Indians, 3006
si icial aspects, 4998
Mass., 3803
Mitchell, S. Dak., 3899
Northwest, Pacific, 4214
San Diego, Calif., 3932
See also Games and dances
Recreations of an Anthologist, 2467
The Red Badge of Courage (motion pic-
ture), about, 4949
The Red Badge of Courage (novel),
821. 825-29, 835-36
Red Bird, 1556
Red, Black, Blond, and Olive, 2535
Red Cloud (Sioux chief), about, 3003
Red Cross, American, hist., 4620
The Red Decade, 3490
Red Jacket, 323
The Red Mill (operetta), 5681
Red: Papers on Musical Subjects, 1828
The Red Pony, 1780
Red River valley, 3954
Red Rock, II05
Red Roses for Bronze, 132 1
Red Sand, 1792
Red Sky in the Morning, 1290
Red Wine & Yellow Hair, 2086
Redburn, about, 498
Redfield, Robert, 4472
The Re-discovery of America, 1445
The Redskins, 268
Redwood, 3959
Reebel, Dan, 5918
Reed, Alfred Zantzinger, 6326-27
Reed, David W., 2260
Reed, Henry Hope, 4609
Reed, Louis S., 4811
Reed, Mark, 2333
INDEX / 1 167
Reed, Walter
about, 4872
drama, 1520
Reed, William Gardner, 5816
The Reef, 1849
Reese, Albert, 5780
Reese, Lizette Woodworth, 2780-81
about, 2781
Reese, M. Lisle, 3896
Reeve, Henry, tr., 4510-12
Reeves, Jesse S., 3540
Reflections at fifty, 1378
Reflections in a Golden Eye, 2023-24
Reform and reform movements, 4614,
6424-34
19th cent., 3430-31, 3446, 3769,
4522, 4530, 4535, 4537, 6360
20th cent., 3446, 3455, 3458, 6360,
6362
See also Muckrakers
Reform Judaism, 5459
Reformatories. See Prisons
The Reformed Church, about, 5442
The Reformed Presbyterian Church,
about, 5466
Refrigerators and refrigerating ma-
chinery, 4794
Refugees, political, 4263, 4289, 4481
since 1933, 4407, 4414, 4419
Regier, Cornelius C, 6430
Regional characteristics, 4230, 4283
See also Culture
Regional libraries, 6471
Regionalism, 1809, 3781, 3783, 3785,
3942, 4079
in art, 5748
Regionalism and local color in litera-
ture
editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93, 445-
48, 542-45, 556-61, 612-13, 701-
5, 716-17, 1064-65, 1068, 1072,
1090, 1 103-4, i724-26, 1791
fiction, 402-4, 562, 683-86, 716,
718-20, 745, 749-50, 768, 867-
73, 945-52, 955, 959-63, 980,
1032, 1099, 1 105, 1 145-8, 1270-
74, 1276-77, I3M-I5, 1379, 1453,
1460-62, 1653-55, 1680-83, 1686-
87, 1691, 1693-4, 1696, 1697-99,
1701, 1705, 1786-89, 1792-96,
1798-1800, 1836-40, 1845, 1959-
62, 1964-65, 2023-24, 2166, 2193-
94,2197,2199
poetry, 662, 753~55, 926, 933-34,
941-44, 1038-43, 1046-47, 1064,
1066-67, 1 126-31, 1133-35, 1290,
!295-97, I3M, 1809, 1959, 2166,
2172, 2193, 2196, 2202
short stories, 556-62, 574-75, 612-
13, 687, 701, 704-5, 716, 745-48,
759-60, 881-86, 890-95, 910-22,
924-32, 935-40, 945, 951-52, 954-
55, 1032-35, 1084-88, 1099-1102,
1149-51, 1270, 1275, 1379, 1453,
1680, 1684, 1686-87, '697, 1724,
1796, 1839, 1841, 1845, 2110,
2166-68, 2170-71, 2202, 22 .
2207, 2209
anthologies, 2322, 2369
Regionalism and local color in litera-
ture— Continued
See also names of regions, states, and
places in literature, e.g., New Eng-
land in literature
Regionalisms (language). See Lan-
guage — dialects & regionalisms
Regulation of Lobbying Act, 6397
Regulatory agencies. See Executive
branch
Rehabilitation centers, 4637
Reich, Nathan, 4457
Reichard, H. H., 4479
Reid, Ira De A., 4428, 4447, 5500
Reid, Ogden Mills, about, 2868
Reid, Whitelaw, about, 2868
The Reign of Law, 718
The Reign of Philip the Second, History
of, 2294
Rein, David M., 4828
Reindeer industry, Alaska, 2719-20
Reinemann, John Otto, 4657
Reinhardt, George C, 3629
Reinhart, C. S., illus., 1101
The Reinterpretation of American Lit-
erature, 2424
Reis, Claire (Raphael), 5609, 5620
Reischauer, Edwin O., 3510
Reisner, Edward H., 5 121
Reiss, Albert J., Jr., 4395
Reissman, Norman, 5039
Reitzel, William, 3573, 3630
Reizenstein, Elmer. See Rice, Elmer L.
Religion, 3469, 3969, 4551, 5254, 531 1,
5394-5502
biog. (collected), 5396, 5426-27
Colonial period, 3747, 3763
Dutch communities, 4493
frontier & pioneer, 5411-16
hist., 4224, 4315, 5394-5417
Jews, 4458
law & legislation, 5420-22
Negroes, 5498-5502, 5527, 5547
Pennsylvania Germans, 4480
Baltimore, 4062
Mass., 4034
Nashville, 3765
New England, 5417
N.C., 4090
Northwest, Old, 41 12
Ohio, 4121
Pa., 4054-55
S.C., 4091
Southern States, 3766, 4069, 4083
See also Indians — religion; Radio in
religion; Sects; Cults; Television in
religion; and names of individual
religious bodies
Religion, folk
Brazos River, Tex., 5527
Mo., 5528
N. Mex., 5537
Religion and public education, 5103,
51 81, 5236, 5419,5491, 5494
Religion and science, 3114, 3761, 5315,
5337, 5434
Religious folksongs, 5549, 5553_54,
5564
hist., 5549
Appalachian Mountains, 5583
Ky., 5584
Religious folksongs — Continued
Mich., 5575
Ozark Mountains, 5569
Southern States, 5583
Religious institutions, Jewish, 4461
Religious leaders, 5474-83
Religious life
Italians, 4497
Swedish, 4483
Religious literature, Colonial period,
3742-43, 3745
Religious movements, 4522, 4525
Jewish, 4459
Religious music. See Choirs (music);
Church music
Religious themes in literature
Christian life, 17, 45, 90
church govt., 19, 34, 93-95
church hist., 43-44
controversial writings, 17, 20, 86, 89
conversion, 60-61
devotional books, 45, 87-89
diaries, journals, etc., 178-85
doctrinal, 26, 230-31
essays, 230-31, 2479
fiction, 402-4, 716, 762, 1252, 1343,
1396, 1446, 1563, 1578, 2415
hist. & crit., 2483, 2493
manual for pastors, 47-48
meditations, 2034, 2038, 2041-42
missions, 62
natural theology, 46
personal narratives, 2024, 2036
poetry, 7-1 1, 72-73, 79-83, 662, 670-
71, 680, 1357, 1359, 1369, 1537-
38, 1540, 2034-35, 2037, 2039
prose, 2279
psychological, 25
revivals, 22-23
sermons, 17-18, 24, 33, 35, 230, 900
See also Theology — in literature
Religious thought. See Theology: Re-
ligion; Philosophy; etc.
Relocation centers, Japanese, 4469
Remedial law, 6279
Remember to Remember, 161 5
Remembered Yesterdays, 2923
Remembering Laughter, 2 161
Remembrance Rock,, 1727, 1730
Remington, Frederic
drawings, 5034
illus., 1147
about, 5770, 5802
bibl., 5770
Removal and Return, 4469
Remsen, Ira, 4724
Renascence, 1609
Rendezvous with Destiny, 3455
Renegade, 1578
Reno, Nev., 2746, 4176, 4184
in literature, 1954, 2746
Repent in Haste, 1594
Reporters and reporting, 2903, 2905-7,
2928
Civil War, 2851
Oreg., 2863
Washington, D.C., 2861, 2930
See also Newspapermen
Representative American Dramas, 2348
Representative American Plays, 145,
170, 200, 205, 208, 1070, 2337
Il68 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Representative Men, 298
Representative Plays by American
Dramatists, 145, 170, 199, 2347
Republic Steel, 5918
The Republican Era, 1869-1901, 6178
Republican newspapers, 2851, 2862-63,
2868-70, 2875
Republican Party, 3424, 6347-48, 6352-
53, 6361, 6365-66, 6370
hist., 2879, 3438, 3442, 3456, 3466,
3500a, 6361, 6365-66
National Committee, 6361
National Convention (1912), 6350
platforms, 6367
Philadelphia, 6353, 6389
Republican Party (Jeffersonian), 3141,
3286,3310-11,6347
Republicanism, 3144, 3308
Requiem for a Nun, 1395
Research. See specific subjects, e.g.,
Business research
Research libraries, 6470, 6478, 6483,
6487
Reserves, national. See Forests and for-
estry; National parks and reserves
Resorts. See Health — resorts, etc.; Ski-
ing and ski resorts
The Responsibilities of the Critic, 2477
The Responsibilities of the Norelist,
1096
Restless Is the River, 1961
Reston, James, 3615
The Restoration of Learning, 5233
The Resurgent Years, 5913
Retail trade, 5949
The Return of a Private, 893
The Return of Lanny Budd, 1758
The Return of Peter Grimm, 2347
Return to the Fountains, 2494
Reuben and Rachel, 164
Reunion and Reaction, 3417
Reunion in Vienna, 1749
Reusser, Walter C, 5144
Reutter, E. E., Jr., 5216
Revelry, 11 56
Reverchon, Julien, about, 4734
Revere, Paul, about, 1437
The Reverend Griffith Davenport, 2304
Reveries of a Bachelor, 507-8
Revett, Marion S., 4894
The Revival of Realism, 5351
Revivals and revivalism, 22-23, 5401-3,
5407,5411,5480
See also Great Awakening; Great Re-
vival
Revolution, right of, 6073
Revolution and Other Essays, 1048
The Revolutionary Generation, 3089
Revolutionary War. See American
Revolution
Revolutionists. See Patriots (American
Revolution)
Rexroth, Kenneth, 2098-2102
Reynolds, Levering, Jr., 5424
Reynolds, Lloyd G., 6037
Reynolds, Mary (Trackert), 6189
Rhapsody in Blue (music), 5678
Rhees, Rush, about, 5671
A Rhetoric of Motives, 2390
Rhode Island, 3965, 4039-40
econ. condit., 4632
Rhode Island — Continued
founding, 84
guidebooks, 3804
hist., 3197, 4039
soc. condit., 4632
Rhodes, Charles D., 3651
Rhodes, Eugene Manlove, 1686-87
about, 1686
Rhodes, Frederick Leland, 4679
Rhodes, James Ford, about, 2695, 3058
Rhodes, May Davison, 1686
Rhyme, folk, 5510-11, 5592
N.C., 5536
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Southwest, 5507
Rhymes of Childhood, 1127
Rhymes to Be Traded for Bread, 1581
Rhyne, Charles S., 4708
Rhyne, J. J., 4594
Rhys, Ernest, ed., 4343
Rian, Edwin H., 5494
Ribalow, Harold U., ed., 4453
Ribalow, Menachem, 4453
Rice, Charles S., 4058
Rice, Edward, 5024
Rice, Elmer L., 1688-90, 2332, 2334,
2348
Rice, Grantland, 4994, 5048
about, 4994
Rice, John Andrew, 2782-83
about, 2783
Rice, Philip Blair, 5366
Rice, William North, 4724
Rich, Arthur Lowndes, 5684
Rich, Wesley E., 4669
Richard Edney, 402
Richards, Eugene S., 4431
Richards, Ivor Armstrong, about, 2407
Richards, Laura E., 4040
Richardson, Alfred Talbot, ed., 2663
Richardson, Edgar P., 5755-56, 5760
Richardson, Harry V., 5501
Richardson, Henry Hobson, about, 5710
Richardson, Lyon N., 2915
ed., 2352
Richardson, Rupert Norval, 4189, 4194
Richert, Gottlieb Henry, 5949
Richey, Herman G., 5140
Richman, Irving Berdine, 4039
Richmond, Va., essays, 1002-3
Richter, Conrad Michael, 1691-96
Rickaby, Franz L., 5567
Rickard, Tex, about, 4987
Rickard, Thomas Arthur, 5917
Riddick, Floyd M,. 6162
Riddles, 551 1
N.C., 5536
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Rideout, Walter B., ed., n 87
Rider, Fremont, 6476
Rider, Richard L., 4682
Riders of the Purple Sage, 1485
Ridge Runner, 2590
Ridler, Anne, 1367
Riegel, Robert E., 3103, 3137, 4520
Riegger, Wallingford, 4968
Riemer, Ruth, 4469
Riesman, David, 4452, 4513, 4555-56,
5190
Riggs, Robert L., 5050
about, 5050
Right of revolution, 6073
Right of search, 3554, 3558
Right to vote. See Freedom of the
franchise
Rights of man, 6068, 6071-73, 6085,
6094
The Rights of Man, 1 55
Riis, Jacob August, 2784-85, 4638
about, 2785
Riker, Charles Cook, 5671
Riker, Dorothy, comp., 4125
Riley, I. Woodbridge, 5262
Riley, James Whitcomb, 1 126-31
about, 941, 1 132, 4124
Rimmer, William, about, 5738
Rinehart, Mary (Roberts), 2786-87
about, 2787
Ring, Martha D., 4883
Ringer, Gordon, tr., 5363
Ringer, Virginia, tr., 5363
The Ringer, i486
Ringwalt, Ralph Curtis, ed., 4464
Rio Grande River and valley, 4197,
5083
Riordon, William L., 6382
Rip Van Winkle
autobiography of Joseph Jefferson,
4934
play by Charles Burke, 2347
play by Joseph Jefferson, 2337
short story by Washington Irving,
381,384-87
Rip Van Winkle Goes to the Play, 2475
Ripley, George, about, 2279
Ripley, Sarah Alden, about, 2615
Ripostes, 1666
Rippy, James Fred, 3138, 3586
Rips, Rea Elizabeth, 6138
The Rise of a New Federalism, 6198
The Rise of American Civilization,
3073.3479.3750
The Rise of Realism, 2276
The Rise of Silas Lapham, 967-70, 982
The Rise of the Common Man, 3091
The Rise of the Dutch Republic, 2293
Rise of the New West, 3356-57
Rister, Carl Coke, 4160, 4189
Ritchie, Andrew Carnduff, 5696
Ritchie, Anna Cora (Ogden) Mowatt.
See Mowatt, Anna Cora
Ritchie, Thomas, about, 1267
Rittenhouse, David, about, 4758
River boat life
Mississippi River, 784-86, 4281, 5505
Ohio River, 5505
A River Goes with Heaven, 1837
River navigation, 5929
River travel. See Travel and travelers —
river
River head, 1515
A Rivermouth Romance, 711
Rivers, 3969-4025
Canada, 4237-38
Fla., 4247
Ga., 4247
111., 4322
Ind., 4282
Ky., 4282, 4322
La., 4282
Md., 3999
Mass., 4012
INDEX / 1 169
Rivers — Continued
Miss., 4282
Mo., 4322
New York (State), 4237-38, 4282
Ohio, 4282
Pa., 4237-38, 4282
Southern States, 4083
Tenn., 4282
Va., 4282
See also Waterways, inland; and also
specific rivers, e.g., Hudson River
Rivers Parting, 1918
Rivers to the Sea, 1 8 1 4
The Riverside Bookshelf, 685
Riverside County, Calif., 3957
Rives, William Cabell, 3283
The Rivet in Grandfather's Neck, 1262
The Road Between, 1376
Road of Ages, 1635
The Road to Disappearance, 3025
The Road to Rome, 1749, 2332
Roads, 5934
guides, 3786, 3805
See also Highways
Roalfe, William R., 6328
Roan Stallion, 1534
Rob of the Bowl, 412-13
Roback, Abraham A., 5392
Robacker, Earl F., 2266
The Robber Barons, 5880
The Robber Bridegroom, 2204
Robbins, Ira S., 4612
Robbins, Rossell H., 1368
Robbins, Roy M., 5814
Robbins, Thomas, 44
Robert, Joseph C, 5829
Robert Emmet, 2298
Roberts, Anna M., tr. & ed., 4265
Roberts, Elizabeth Madox, 1 697-1 706
Roberts, Henry L., 3557
Roberts, Howard, 5040
Roberts, John S., 5307
Roberts, Kenneth, 1707-12
tr. & ed., 4265
Roberts, Leonard W., ed., 5546
Roberts, Leslie, 4015
Roberts, Mary M., 4852
Roberts, Morris, 1010
Robertson, Elizabeth Wells, 5604
Robertson, Stuart, 2251
Robertson, William, 3031
Robeson, Dave, 4982
Robinson, Blackwell P., ed., 3831
Robinson, Daniel S., ed., 5359
Robinson, Edwin Arlington, 1 713-16
about, 1717-19, 2289, 2404, 2527,
2544, 2682
Robinson, George O., 4747
Robinson, James Harvey, about, 4540,
4545
Robinson, John, about, 3257
Robinson, Roland I., 5971
Robinson, Thomas Porter, 4709
Robinson, William W., 4202
Robson, Eric, 3261
Rochester, N.Y.
guidebook, 3810
hist., 3810, 4050-52
Rockefeller, Abby (Aldrich), Folk Art
Collection, 5595
Rockefeller, John D., about 31 17,
5915-16
Rockefeller, John D., Jr., about, 4622
Rockefeller Foundation, 4622
about, 5163, 5198
A Rocket in My Pocket, 5592
Rocket to the Moon, 2064
Rockford, 111., 3881
Rockne, Bonnie Skiles, ed., 5041
Rockne, Knute, 5041
about, 5041, 5044
Rocks before the Mansion, 2788
Rocky Mountain Fur Co., 4148
Rocky Mountain Herald, 1409
Rocky Mountain region, 2933, 3967,
4172-85
cities & towns, 4176-77
fiction, 312, 1239
folklore, 5530
frontier life, 4155-56
fur trade, 4148
geology, 4172
guidebooks, 3910-16
travel & travelers, 391, 4384
Rocky Mountain Review, 2576
Rodabaugh, James H., ed. & illus., 4120
Rodall, Marie F., 2436
Rodell, Fred, 6256
Roden, Robert F., 6448
Rodgers, Andrew Denny, 2788-92,
4760
Rodgers, Richard, about, 5639, 5685
Rodgers, Robert R., 5170
Rodman the Keeper, 1 1 51
Roe, Frank G., 2965, 2984
Roebling, John August, about, 4801
Roebling, Washington Augustus,
about, 4801
Roebuck, A. D., about, 5956
R0lvaag, Ole Edvart, 1720-23
Roemer, Ferdinand, about, 4734
Roemer, Milton I., 4869
Roethke, Theodore, 2103-4
Rogers, A. K., 5255, 5289
Rogers, Bruce, illus., 4123
Rogers, John, about, 5739
Rogers, Lindsay, 6423
Rogers, Meyric R., 5732
Rogers, Richard, 2337
Rogers, Robert, 2347
about, 1710
Rogers, Samuel, about, 219
Rogers, Walter P., 5191
Rogers, Will, about, 556, 558, 862,
2657
Rogers, William Garland, 1773
Rogers groups, 5739
Rogers' Rangers, fiction, 1710
Rogin, Leo, 5830
Rogue's Legacy, 2413
Roll, Jordan, Roil, 1653
Roll River, 1239
Rollins, Philip Ashton, 4161, 4163
Roman Bartholow , 171 4
Roman Catholic Church. See Catholic
Church
Roman Fever, 1855
The Roman Spring of Mrs. Stone, 2224
Romance of a Plain Man, 1461
The Romance of Certain Old Clothes,
1012
The Romance of Madrono Hollow, 930
The Romantic Comedians, 1460-61
The Romantic Egoists, 1913
The Romantic Triumph, 2276
Romanticism, 3751, 4080, 6065
Romanticism in literature, 2364, 2367,
2375, 2401, 2424, 2485, 2507,
2510
anthology, 2276
editorials, sketches, etc., 192, 674,
716
essays, 280
fiction, 201, 226, 245, 252, 333, 345,
405, 471-78, 546, 716, 762, 768,
1048, 1089, 1099, 1145
poetry, 134, 216, 323, 427, 520, 586,
614, 619, 662, 941
short stories, 381, 520, 716, 745, 1099
Romberg, Sigmund, 6322
Rome Haul, 1354
Romines, Stephen, 5158
Romulus, the Shepherd King, 2302
Roosevelt, Eleanor, 3493
Roosevelt, Elliott, ed., 3493
Roosevelt, Franklin D., 3493-94
about, 1749, 3108, 3130, 3489, 3491,
3494-3500, 3567, 5884, 6354-
55, 6364
Roosevelt, Theodore, 2793-95, 3307,
3465
about, 2474, 2503, 2542, 2625, 2682-
83, 2686, 2795, 3058, 3121,
3466-67, 3489, 3527, 4533,
6385, 6424, 6432
sculpture, 5737
Root, Elihu, about, 2712, 3459, 3653
Root, Winfred Trexler, 3225
The Roots of American Culture, 3736
The Roots of National Culture, 2276
The Rope, 1648
Roper, Daniel C, 4670
Rorem, C. Rufus, 4883
Rose, Arnold M., 4433, 4446
ed., 4434
Rose, Billy, about, 6322
Rose, Caroline, 4433
Rose, J. Holland, ed., 3179
Rose Bowl football game, 5042
Rose Michel, 2308
The Rose Tattoo, 2225
Roseboom, Eugene H., 4120-21, 6149
Rosed ale, 2301
Rosen, Carl George Arthur, about,
4803
Rosen, George, 4844
Rosenau, James N., ed., 3494
Rosenbach, Abraham S., 2500
Rosenberg, Bernard, ed., 6443
Rosenberry, Edward H., 503
Rosenberry, Lois (Kimball) Mathews,
4028, 4030
Rosenfield, Harry N., 4425
Rosengarten, George D., about, 4735
Rosenman, Samuel I., 3499
Rosenthal, Herbert, 3081
Rosenthal, Morris S., 5950
Rosenwald, Julius, about, 5956
Rosewater, Victor, 2860
Ross, Charles D., 5186
Ross, Clay C, 5229
Ross, Earle Dudley, 6369
1 170 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Ross, Edward ALworth, 4543
about, 4542
Ross, Harold W., about, 2565
Ross, Ishbel, 4820
Ross, Leonard Q., 2861
Ross, Lillian, 4949
Ross and the New Yorker, 2565
Ross County, Ohio, 3864
Rossetti, Christina Georgina, about,
1905, 2481
Rossiter, Clinton, L., 6067-68
Rossiter, William S., 4400
Rosskam, Edwin, ed., 3039
Rosten, Leo C, 2861, 4948
Rotary International, about, 4578
Rotha, Paul, 4944
Rothberg, Abraham, ed., 2322
Rothenberg, Robert E., 4889
Rothenberg, Stanley, 5621
Rothery, Agnes Edwards, 4087
Rothstein, Arthur, 2908
Rothstein, Samuel, 6483
Rottschaefer, Henry, 6099
Roucek, Joseph S., ed., 4426
Rough-Hewn, 141 5
Roughing It, 772-74
Round by Round, 5023
Round dances, 5587
A Round of Visits, 1008
Round-Shot to Rockets, 3670
Rourke, Constance M., 2443, 2501,
2796-98, 3736, 5772
Rousseau and Romanticism, 2375
Rovere, Richard H., 3482
Rowing, 4990, 5020
Rowland, Henry Augustus, about, 4724
Rowland, Stanley J., drawings, 5728
Rowlandson, Mary (White), 53-55,
about, 3032
Rowlingson, Donald T., 5496
Rowson, Susanna (Haswell), 161-64
about, 161
Roxy, 874-75
Royal Government in America, 3195
A Royal Slave, 2305
Royce, Josiah, 5303, 5354-61
about, 5252, 5354, 5362-64, 5369
Rozwenc, Edwin C, ed., 3118-22
Rubin, Joseph J., ed., 657
Rubin, Louis D., 1899
ed., 2442
Rucker, Frank W., 2909
Ruffin, Edmund, about, 3367
ed., 13
Ruffin, Thomas, about, 6231
Rugg, Harold O., 5104
Ruggles, Eleanor, 4938
Rukeyser, Muriel, 2105-6
Rumford, Count. See Thompson, Ben-
jamin
Rumsey, James, about, 4784
Runaway Star, 688
The Rungless Ladder, 562
The Running of the Tide, 1443
Rural communities. See Country life
Rural folklore, 4579
Rural government. See Local govern-
ment
Rural life. See Communities, rural;
Farm and rural life
Rural press, Southern, 2853
Rush, Benjamin, 5251
about, 4822, 4830, 4872, 5121
Rush, Nixon Orwin, 5479
Rusk, Howard A., 4637
Rusk, Ralph Leslie, 2502
ed., 295, 305
Rusling, James Fowler, 4386
about, 4385
Russell, Bertrand, about, 5368
Russell, Carl Parcher, 421 1
Russell, Charles Edward, 5652
Russell, Charles M., about, 5802
Russell, Elmer Beecher, 6232
Russell, Henry Norris, 5427
about, 5427
Russell, Irwin, 1133-35
about, 1 135
Russell, Peter, ed., 1673
Russell, William, 5644
Russell, William Henry, about, 4661
Russell, Sir William Howard, 4379-82,
about, 4378
Russell, William L., 4838
Russell Sage Foundation, 4623
Russia
econ. relations with, 3619, 3638
fiction, 1 1 90
relations with, 3505, 3523, 3557,
3563-64,3619
19th cent., 3429
20th cent., 3546, 3560-65, 3567-
68, 3570, 3620, 3622, 3624-25,
3627, 3629-30
reporting, 2535
travel & travelers, 131 1
Russian Revolution, fiction, 1656
Russo, Dorothy Ritter, 1807
Ruth, George H. ("Babe"), 4987, 5012
about, 5012
Rutherford, Mary Louise (Schuman),
6332
Rutherfurd, Livingston, 2931
Rutledge, Archibald, 1724-26, 5087-90,
about, 5087-90
Rutledge, John, about, 6260
Rutledge, Joseph L., 3226
Ryan, Earl H., 4695
Ryan, Grace L., comp., 5590
Ryan, Margery W., ed., 5206
Rymer, Charles A., 4859
Rynning, Ole, 4485
Ryskind, Morris, 1545
S.U.M., about, 6015
Sac Prairie Saga, i960
Sacco, Nicola
drama, 1 173
fiction, 1980
Sachs, Leon, 6104
Sachse, William L., 3227
Sacramento River, 3974
Sacred and Profane Memories, 1828
Sacred Books of the East, 280
The Sacred Harp, 5577
The Saga of the Roaring Road, 5007
Sagamore Hill, 2686
Sage, Margaret Olivia, about, 4623
Sahagun, Bernardino de, 2997
Sailing, 5017, 5019, 5021
Sailor on Horseback, 2815
Sailors
folklore, 5533
songs, 5551, 5553, 5556, 5558-59.
5562,5580
St. Augustine, Fla.
guidebook, 3847
language (dialects, etc.), 2258
St. Cloud, Minn., guidebook, 3888
Saint Elizabeths Hospital, Washington,
D.C., about, 4840
Saint-Gaudens, Augustus, about, 5735
St. Helena Island, S. C, Negro folk-
lore, 5540
St. Jolin, J. Hector. See Crevecoeur,
Michel Guillaume St. Jean de
St. John, Vincent, about, 6045
St. John's River, Fla., 3980
St. Lawrence River, 3979
St. Louis, Mo.
drama, 2219
fiction, 763-65
Hegelians, 5305
politics, 6207
theater, 4913
St. Louis. City Art Museum, 5805
St. Louis. Public Library, 6467
St. Martin, Alexis, about, 4818, 4822
St. Olaf College, Northfield, Minn.
Choir, 5664
St. Paul, Minn., Swedes in, 4486
Saint Peter Relates an Incident, 1540
Saints of Sage & Saddle, 5538
Sakoda, J., 4469
Sakolski, Aaron M., 5815
Sale, John B., 5547
Salem, Mass., 2600
drama, 198, 200, 2048
essays, 1002-3
fiction, 1439, 1443, 1508, 1917
witchcraft trials, 41-42, 56, 198, 200,
2048
See also Witchcraft
Salesmen, 5955
Salina, Kans., guidebook, 3907
Salinas River, Calif., 3998
Salinger, Jerome David, 2107-9
Salley, Alexander S., 554
ed., 3216
Salmagundi, 511
Saloons. See Hotels, taverns, etc.
Saloutos, Theodore, 5831
Salt Lake City, 4176
Salter, J. T., 6336, 6389
Saltwater Farm, 1295
The Salvage, 4469
Salvation Army, about, 5497
poetry, 1581
Salvation on a String, 1476
Sam Ego's House, 21 17
Sam Law son's Old town Fireside Stories,
574-75
Samaroff Stokowski, Olga, 5686
about, 5686
Sam' I of Posen, 2301
Samoa, American, 4218
Samplers (needlework), 5593
Sampling (radio program rating), 4700
Sampson, Martin W., 999
Samuelsen, Rube, 5042
Samurai and Serpent Poems, 2350
INDEX
/ "71
San Antonio, 4187
guidebook, 3923
San Bernardino County, Calif., 3957
San Diego, Calif., 2746-47, 2750, 4150
guidebooks, 3931-32
San Diego County, Calif., 3957
San Francisco
Bohemianism, 3757
fiction, 1090-92
guidebook, 3933
hist., 2560, 3943, 4150, 4208-9
politics, 2888, 6207
port, 4208-9
soc. life & cust., 4352-53
theater, 4918, 4943
underworld, 2586
San Francisco Bay, 3933, 4208
San Francisco Federal Theatre, Research
Dept., 4918
San Ildefonso Indians, 3041
San Xavier del Bac (Ariz.) mission,
guidebook, 3926
Sanborn, Franklin B., 5266
ed., 599-601
Sanctuary, 1385, 1395
Sand, George
about, 2504
drama, 2337
Sandage, Charles H., 5962
Sandburg, Carl, 1727-32, 3393, 3395,
4483, 5511
ed., 5562
about, 2406, 2419, 2503
Sanders, Jennings B., 3058, 6083
Sanders, Rufus, pseud., 2257
Sando at Seventy, 626
Sandoz, Jules Ami, about, 2800
Sandoz, Mari Susette, 2799-2801
Sands, Robert Charles, 2295
Sandusky Bay (Ohio) region, guide-
book, 3868
Sandusky County, Ohio, 3867
Sandys, Edwyn, 5091
Sanford, Charles L., ed., 3123
Sanford, Trent Elwood, 5723
Sangamon River, 3988
Sanger, Joseph P., ed., 3651
Sanitary engineering, 4823, 4831, 4864,
4874. 4878
Mass., 4879
Sankey, Ira D., about, 5405, 5480
Santa Barbara, Calif., guidebook, 3934
Santa Barbara County, Calif., 3957
Santa Fe, 4148, 4176, 4187
Santa Fe Trail, 4188
Santayana, George, 1733-41, 5255,
5366-74
about, 1678, 1742, 5259, 5262, 5365,
5375-77
Santee River, 4023
Saposs, D. J., 6033
Sapphira and the Slave Girl, 1 277
Sappington, Clarence O., 4873
Saratoga, N.Y.
essays, 1003
fiction, 1407
Saratoga campaign, 3682
poetry, 323
Saratoga Trunk., 1407
Sarazen, Gene, 5051
about, 5051
Sargeant, Winthrop, 5622, 5645
Sargent, John Singer
illus., 439
about, 5771
Sarnoff, David, about, 4683
Saroyan, William, 2110-22, 2327, 2334,
2336
about, 21 19, 21 21, 2536
Sarton, May, 2123-27
Sartoris, 1382
Saskatchewan River, 4004
Satanstoe, 268-69
Satire, 3732
drama, 1317, 1548-49
editorials, sketches, etc., 209-15, 381-
83, 422-26, 542-45' 556-6l, 732,
862-66, 121 4, 1815-20
essays, 147-48, 165, 13 17-18, 1602,
1604-5
fiction, 105-8, 689-90, 775-77, 794-
97, 1261-62, 1267, 1381, 1559-
64, 1567, 1589-90, 1635, 1643,
1682, 1792, 1842-45, 2001, 2017-
19, 2021-22, 2053, 2154, 2180,
2229
periods
Colonial, 51-52, 75-77, 92-93,
2493
(1764-1819), 105-8, 118, 120,
J 34-39. 147-48, 165-68
(1820-70), 209-15, 323, 381-83,
422-26, 456-58, 542-45, 556-61
(1871-1914), 689-90, 732, 775-
77, 794-97, 862-66
(1915-39), 1261-62, 1267, 1317-
18, 1381, 1545, 1548-49, 1589-
90, 1635, 1643, 1651-52, 1688,
1792, 1815-20, 1842-44, 1845
(1940-55), 2017-22, 2053, 2082,
2154, 2180, 2189-92, 2229
poetry, 120, 134-39, M8, 165, 167,
323, 456-58, 1651-52, 2189-92,
2467
short stories, 1651-52
Satires & Bagatelles, 128
Satterlee, Herbert L., 5978
The Saturday Evening Post, about,
2919, 2926
Saturday Night, 1475
The Saturday Review of Literature,
2398, 2415, 2569
Saturday's Children, 2332
Savage, Carlton, 3524
Savage, Henry, 4023
Savage, Howard J., 4599
Savage, James, ed., 91
Savannah, Ga., guidebook, 3841
Savannah River, 4016
Savelle, Max, 3747
Saveth, Edward N., ed., 3062
Saxe Holm's Stories, 984
Saxon, Olin Glenn, 5952
Say, Thomas, about, 4721
Sayre, Charles R., 5839
Sayre, Paul L., 6233
Scandinavia, relations with, 351 1
Scandinavians, 4482-87
in Brooklyn, 4046
in the Mississippi Valley, 3975
folklore, 5523
Scarborough, Dorothy, 5582
The Scarecrow, 2337, 2348
The Scarlet Letter, 341-44
Scarlet Sister Mary, 1655
Scarlett, William, Bp., 5499
Scenes and Portraits, 2380
Scepticism and Animal Faith, 5370
about, 5375
Schachner, Nathan, 3290-91
Schafer, Joseph, 5832
Schaldach, William J., 5092-93
Schantz, B. T., ed., 2293
Schary, Dore, 4949
Schattschneider, Elmer E., 6370, 6396
Schaub, Edward L., ed., 5309
Schauman, Georg, ed., 4243-44
Scheer, George F., 3244
Scheie de Vere, Maximilian, 2252
Schellenberg, Theodore R., 3063
Schenk, Gretchen (Knief), 6471
Scherman, Harry, about, 6463
Schevill, James Erwin, 11 89
Schick, Frank L., 6444
ed., 6438
Schickele, Rainer, 5860
Schilling, Jane Metzger, 6047
Schilpp, Paul A., ed., 5294, 5377, 5385
Schlesinger, Arthur Meier, Jr., 3083,
3352,3500
Schlesinger, Arthur Meier, Sr., 2424,
3083, 3095, 3139-40, 3262, 4532,
6431
ed., 3085-98, 4368, 4412-13
Schlesinger, Eugene R., 5971
Schlosberg, Harold, 5391
Schmeckebier, Laurence F., 4706, 4765,
6138, 6163, 6215, 6452
Schmitt, Martin F., 4158
Schneider, Herbert W., 5261, 5289,
5291. 5335,5409, 6082
ed., 5335
Schnier, Jacques P., 5734
Schoberlin, Melvin, 4925
Schonberg, Arnold, 5678
Schopf, Johann David, 4256-57
about, 4255
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Scholar's Workshop, 6478
Scholarship and learning, 3739, 4458—
59
Scholes, Percy A., 5633
The School for Scandal, 1 68
The School Review, 5249
The School that Built a Town, 5145
Schoolcraft, Henry Rowe, 2802-3
about, 2802
Schools
art, 5690
frontier, 4214
in fiction, 583-84
Indian, 3040
Jewish, 4454
music, 5668
public, 4320
Cincinnati, 4310
Ga., 4095
Ky., 4310
Pennsylvania Germans, 4479
New England, 2674
Va., 4310
1 172 / A
GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Schools — Continued
See also Education; and specific types
of schools, e.g., Journalism —
schools
Schools and business enterprise, 51 16
Schools in Transition, 5206
Schorcr, Mark, 2128-32
Schouler, James, 3 141
about, 3058
Schramm, Wilbur L., 2932, 5899
Schreibcr, Flora Rheta, 5687
Schreyvogel, Charles, about, 5802
Schriftgiesser, Karl, 3500a, 6397
Schroeder, Gertrude G., 5918
Schuchert, Charles, 4715, 4754
Schulberg, Budd, 1425
Schuller, Charles F., 5231
Schultz, Christian, 4282
about, 4281
Schulweis, II. M., 4458
Schuman, William, about, 5687
Schurr, Sam H., 5907
Schurz, Carl, 2858
about, 2677, 2882, 3431, 4481
Schwantes, Robert S., 3780
Schwartz, Bernard, 6257
Schwartz, Delmore, 2133-38
Schwartz, Edward, 1663
Schwartz, Harry Wayne, 5653
Schwartz, Morris S., 4838
Schwartz, Sulamith, 4457
Schweitzer, Albert, about, 2682
Science, 4513, 4537
awards, 4729
bibl., 4714, 6453
Colonial period
Charleston, S.C., 3763
New England, 3745, 3747-48
Philadelphia, 3764
hist., 4714-15, 4718-19, 4721-24,
4726, 4730, 4753, 4761, 5289
museums, 3049
periodicals, 4715, 4736
philosophy of, 5267-68, 5280, 5291,
5349
study & teaching, 4719
New York (City), 4049
Northwest, Old, 41 12
Southern States, 4723
Science, 4678
Science and pragmatism. See Prag-
matism— and science
Science and religion. See Religion and
science
Science and state, 4761-4779, 6118,
6130
Science and the Idea of God, 5315
Science as a profession, 4725
Science fiction, 520, 1932, 1934, 1959
anthologies, 1959
essays & studies, 2377
Scientific apparatus and instruments,
47I9-472I
Scientific management, 4798
Scientific method, 5254, 5257, 5267-68,
5289, 5346
Scientific personnel, 4725, 4779
Scientific research, 3675, 4777-79
hist., 4722
wartime, 4761
Scientific societies
directory, 4728
hist., 4713, 4726
Scientists, 4725, 4742-60, 4765, 4773,
.5434
bibl., 4729
biog. (collected), 4712, 4717, 4721,
4724, 4730, 4774, 4785
directory, 4712
Scientists against Time, 4761
Scoon, R., 3758
Scopes trial, 5429
Scotch immigrants, 4488, 4491
Scotch-Irish, 4489-90
Scott, A. P., 3058
Scott, Arthur L., ed., 819
Scott, Cecil W., ed., 5236
Scott, Clinton Lee, about, 5473
Scott, Evelyn, 1743-48
Scott, Franklin D., 351 1
ed., 3064
Scott, Harvey Whitefield, about, 2863
Scott, Hugh L., about, 3025
Scott, James Brown, 3519
Scott, Marian, 4893
Scott, Robert L., Jr., 3643a
Scott, Sir Walter, bart. (1771-1832),
about, 216, 252, 323
Scott, Walter (1796-1861), about, 5455
Scott, Wilbur S., ed., 2353
Scott, Winfield, 3655
about, 2710, 3655
Scribner's (Charles) Sons, about, 6445,
6449
Scripps, Edward W., 2890
about, 2857, 2890
Scripps, George, about, 2890
Scripps, James, about, 2890
Scripps-McRae League, 2886
Scroggs, William O., comp., 3634
The Scrolls from the Dead Sea, 2535
Scudder, Horace E., 466, 599, 4036
ed., 370, 441,453,671, 2922
Scudder, Townsend, 4037
Scudder, Vida D., 181
about, 4530
Sculptors, 5734, 5738, 5740
Sculpture, 5595, 5601, 5733-40
abstract, 5696
collection, 5797
exhibition, 5696
hist., 5689, 5696, 5733-34. 5738,
5740,5797
Sea Garden, 1320
The Sea-Hunters, 5871
Sea in art, 5765, 5767
Sea Islands, S.C., 3835
folklore, 5540
Negroes, 4436
The Sea of Grass, 1 693
The Sea-Wolf, 1054
Seafaring life
diaries, journals, etc., 274-75
drama, 1647-48
fiction, 252, 256-57, 470, 479-83,
487, 562, 1054
The Seagtdl on the Step, 1251
Sealock, Richard B., 2976
Seamen, cruelty to, 274-75
fiction, 479-80
Seapower, 3671, 3673-74,
Search, right of, 3554, 3558
A Search for the King, 2186
Sears, Clara E., 5265
Sears, Laurence, ed., 5259
Sears, Louis M., 3058
Sears, P. B., 4594
Sears, Richard W., about, 5956
Sears, Roebuck and Company, about,
5956
The Seaside and the Fireside, 431
The Season of Comfort, 2184
Seasoned Timber, 1417
Seattle, 4150, 4216, 6207
Seaver, Edwin, 2370
Secession movement, 3328, 3364, 3367,
3370-71. 3404. 5828
Second April, 1609
The Second Generation, 1 109-10
Second Growth, 2163
The Second House from the Corner,
2750
The Second Man, 1206, 2332, 2348
Second Overture, 1174
Second Threshold, 1203
The Second Tree from the Corner, 1863
The Second World, 1232
Secondary education, 5131
administration, 5135, 5154
athletics, 5000
comprehensive high schools, 5156
criticism, 5236
curricula, 5100, 5153, 5158, 5224
finances, 5135
hist., 5152
junior high schools, 5157
methods & techniques, 5227
objectives, 5217
organization, 5135
periodical, 5249
private, 515s
sources, 5158
vocational, 5156
See also Academies (schools); Catho-
lic schools; Public education; Sem-
inaries (schools)
Secret History of the American Revolu-
tion, 3264
Secret Service, 2337
Secret societies, 4574
Secretaries of state, 3519
See also Diplomatic history; names of
individual Secretaries, e.g., Hull,
Cordell
Sectionalism, 3106, 3305, 3323, 3328,
3337, 3354. 3356-57. 3363, 3781,
3784,4067,4074-75
economic causes, 3346
political aspects, 3346, 3361, 3397,
3399-3401, 3409, 3451
See also Regionalism; Secession
movement
Sects, 5397-98, 5400-1, 5404-5, 5409,
5439-41, 5495
Secularism, 5395, 5399, 5401, 5409,
5488
Securities and Exchange Commission,
about, 6322
Security investigations and programs,
3M9
Security risks, 6112, 6117-18, 6130
INDEX
/ "73
Security tests, 6107, 61 10
See also Loyalty-Security Program
Sedgwick, Ellery, about, 2922
Sedgwick, Henry Dwight, 2281
about, 2281
See You in the Morning, 2085
Seeds of Contemplation, 2038, 2042
Seeds of Liberty, 3747
Seedtime of the Republic, 6068
Seeger, Charles, music arr. by, 5559
Seegcr, Ruth (Crawford), 5563
music arr. by, 5559
Seehafer, Eugene F., 4696
Seeing More Things, 4909
Seeing Things, 4909
Seely, Pauline A., 2976
Segregation, 4437, 4444, 4451, 5447,
5499-5500, 6120
in education, 5206, 5236
See also Minorities; Race question
Seilhamer, George O., 4905
Seilliere, Ernest, about, 2375
Seitz, Don C, 2877
Selden, Elizabeth S., 4971
Seldes, Gilbert, 4895, 4945
ed., 1555
Selective Service Acts of 1917, 3709
Self, 2347
Self-Culture, 233
The Self, Its Body and Freedom, 5313
The Self-Made Man in America, 3762
Self -Reliance, 285
Seligman, Edwin R., 5963
Sellards, Elias H., 2995
Sellars, R. W., 5255
Sellars, Wilfrid, 5291
Sellers, Charles Coleman, 2804-5, 57°9
Sellers, Charles Grier, 3351
Sellers, N. W., 5849
Sellers, Nathan, about, 6457-58
Sellery, G. C, 5336
The Selling of foseph, 56-57
Semantics, 3756
in literature, 2388-90
Seminaries (schools), 5212
Seminole Indians, 3025-27
Semiotic, 5346
Semmes, Raphael, about, 2613
Semple, Ellen Churchill, 2975
Senate, U.S. See Congress. Senate
Senator North, 722
Seneca, 111., 4589
Senior, Clarence, 4428, 4470
Sense and Sensibility in Modern Poetry,
2484
The Sense of Beauty, 5366
The Sense of the Past, 1004
about, 1009
The Sentimental Novel in America,
2384
The Sentimental Years, 4516
The Sentinels, 2310
Separation of powers, 3608, 3610,
6075-76, 6199, 6257, 6312, 6315
Separatists, 1, 84
The Sequel of Appomattox, 3377
Sequoya (Cherokee Indian), about,
3027
Seraph on the Suwanee, 1529
Serbein, Oscar N., 4890
Serena Blandish, 1206
The Serenade (operetta), 5681
Serenade to the Big Bird, 2814
The Serene Cincinnatians , 4122
Sergeant, Elizabeth Shepley, 1283
Sermons
Colonial, 17-18, 21, 24, 32-33, 35,
59-61
hist. & crit., 2493
in verse, 1537-38
See also Preacher tales
Sertorius, 2347
Servants, indentured, 6056
Sessions, Archibald, 1 1 1 7
Sessions, Roger, 5615
Settlement houses, New York (City),
4624
Seven Decisions that Shaped History,
3549
The Seven-League Crutches, 1999
7P.A/., 1827
The Seven Sleepers, 1827
The Seven Storey Mountain, 2034, 2036
The Seven Who Fled, 2089
Seven Years' Harvest, 2398
Seven Years' War in America. See
French and Indian War (1755-63)
Seventeen, 1804
Seventh-Day Adventists, 5404, 5442
The Seventh Hill, 1516
Seventy Years of It, 4543
Seventy Years of Life and Labor, 6050
Severinghaus, Aura E., 4861
Sevier, John, about 3287
Sewall, Harriot Winslow, ed., 244
Sewall, Samuel, 56—58
about, 2493
The Sewanee Review, 1809, 2570
Seward, William Henry, about, 2614,
3359,3382,34i6
Sexual behavior (human), 4560—61,
4565-66
Seybold, Ethel, 611
Seymour, Charles, 3541
Seymour, Flora Warren (Smith), 3035
Seymour, Horatio, about, 3441
Shackford, James Atkins, 2649, 3353
Shackford, John B., ed., 3353
Shadow of a Man, 2123
Shadow of Night, 1959
The Shadow of the Hawk., 1748
Shadows in Silver, 4086
Shadows Move Among Them, 1493
Shadows on the Rock., 1277-78
Shafer, Henry Burnell, 4812
Shafer, Robert, 2425, 2479
Shakers, 3736, 54,11, 5469, 5594
Shakespeare, William, about, 280, 4917
Shakspeare in Love, 2310
Shalcr, Nathaniel S., 4036, 5222
Shamanism, 3010, 3019
Shame and Glory of the Intellectuals,
2189
The Shame of the Cities, 6207, 6432
The Shame of the Slates, 4837
Shankland, Robert, 5866
Shannon, David A., 6371
Shannon, Fred Albert, 3702, 4164, 5877
Shannon, W. V., 6195
Shantymen and Shantyboys, 5551
Shantz, Homer L., 5816
The Shapers of American Fiction, 2509
The Shaping Spirit, 1785
Shapiro, Charles, ed., 1348
Shapiro, Elliott, 561 1
Shapiro, Karl, 2139-44
ed., 2363
Shapiro, Theresa R., 4712
Sharp, Cecil J., comp., 5583
Sharp Eyes, 74 1
Sharpe, Dores Robinson, 5482
Sharps and Flats, 878
Shartel, Burke, 6269
Shattuck, Charles, ed., 2551
Shattuck, Lemuel, about, 4403, 4879
Shaw, Henry Wheeler, 542-45
about, 5524
Shaw, Irwin, 2145-48, 2333
about, 2371
Shaw, Lemuel, about, 6228, 6231
Shaw, Lloyd, 5591
Shaw, Robert Kendall, 6476
Shaw, Wilbur, 5006
about, 5006
Shaw, Wilfred B., ed., 5201
Shawnee Indians, 3037
Shay's Rebellion, 3309
She Would Be a Soldier, 2347
Shea, John D. Gilmary, 5451
Sheean, Vincent, 1610, 2806-7
Sheehan, Donald H., 6445
ed., 3062
Sheeler, Charles, 5772
about, 5772
Sheep industry, 5874
Tex., 2733
Sheffield, F. D., 3724
Shelburne Essays, 2479-81
Sheldon, Edward, 2337
Shelford, Victor E., ed., 2956
Shelley, Percy Bysshe, about, 520, 2481,
2545
The Sheltered Life, 1461
The Sheltering Sky, 1 928
Sheltering Tree, 5265
Shenandoah (Howard), 2337, 2347
Shenandoah (Schwartz), 2135
Shenandoah River and valley, 3997
fiction, 226, 228-29
Shenk, Hiram Herr, ed., 4056
Shepard, Odell, 186, 442, 4041, 5266
ed., 187, 588, 603, 2375
Shepard, Thomas, 59-65
about, 63, 65, 3198
Shepardson, Whitney H., 3634
Shepherd, W. R., 4540
Shepherd's Empire, 5874
Shepperson, Wilbur S., 4488
Shera, Jesse H., 6472
Sheridan, Philip H., about, 3701
Sheridan, Richard, 168
Sherman, C. B., 4458
Sherman, John K., 5654
Sherman, Stuart Pratt, 2503-5, 5222
ed., 1067, 2393
Sherman, William Tecumseh, about,
2614,3699
Sherwood, Elizabeth J., comp., 3292
Sherwood, Foster H., 6240
Sherwood, Garrison P., cd., 4897
Sherwood, Robert Emmet, 1203, 1749-
53, 2327, 2332-34, 2348, 3499
Shetrone, Henry Clyde, 2996
431240—60-
-76
1 174 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Shilling, Ned, 4395
Shipbuilding, 5930
Shipper), William, about, 4856
Shipping industry, 5930
Mass., 5936
New York (City), 5937
Ships
in art, 5801
See also Warships
Shipton, Clifford Kenyon, 6447
Shipwrecks, fiction, 1712
Shirley, Dame, pseud. See Clappe,
Louise Amelia Knapp (Smith)
Shirley, Hardy L., 5865
Shirley, Wayne, 6481
Shiskin, Julius, 5905
The Shock of Recognition, 2538
Shoemaker, Ervin C, 5127
Shoemaker, Floyd Calvin, 3346
ed., 5569
Sholes, Christopher Latham, about,
4786
De Shootinest Gent'man, 5066
Shores, J. Harlan, 5158
Shores, Louis, 6478, 6481
ed., 6484
The Shores of Light, 2541
Shorewood, Wis., 3885
Short, Lloyd Milton, 6173
Short, Raymond W., ed., 2353
Short ballot, 6203, 6425
Short Grass Country, 3964
Short stories
anthologies, 2318, 2322, 2325, 2351,
2369
experimental writing, 1242, 1379,
1766-67, 1 77 1
hist. & crit., 2362, 2487, 2489, 2495
periodicals, 2916, 2922, 2925
See also Fiction in periodicals
periods
(1820-70), 319, 322, 330-40,
356, 359. 381. 384-90. 405-8,
484, 491, 493-94. 496, 520,
528-29, 533, 536, 556-62,
574-75.612-13,674
(1871-1914), 683, 687, 701,
704-6, 711-12, 716, 725, 732-
37. 739. 745-48, 756-61,
798-99, 821, 830, 834, 836-
37, 856, 859-60, 878, 881-
87, 890-95, 900-5, 909-22,
924-32, 935-40, 945. 951-52.
954-55. 984, 986, 1004,
IOO7-8, I0II-I2, 1014, IO23-
35, 1048-52, 1058-60, 1084-
88, 1099-1102, 1106, 1 1 1 1—
25, 1145, 1149-52
(1915-39). 1155. 11C0-61,
1164, 1178-79, 1181, 1 1 85,
1197-98, 1222, 1224, 1239,
1242, 1248, 1250, 1270, 1275,
1277, 1316, 1341-42, 1345,
1372, 1379, 1389, 1393-94,
1403, 1408, 1411, 1413, 1418,
1429, 1453. 1464. 1471. 1476,
1478, 1494, 1498, 1510, 1523-
25. 1541, 1553-55. 1651-52,
1659-60, 1662, 1680, 1684,
1686-87, 1691-92, 1697,
1703, 1706, 1724, 1762,
Short stories — Continued
periods — Continued
(191 5-39 ) — Continued
1764-67, 1 77 1, 1776, 1786,
1790, 1796-97, 1801, 1839,
1841, 1851, 1855, 1872, 1879,
1892
(1940-55), 1910, 1913, 1927,
1929, 1932-33. 1935-36,
1944, 1946, 1958-59. 1963.
1986, 2011, 2015-16, 2020,
2024, 2057-58, 2071-75,
2109-10, 2116, 2118, 2128,
2131, 2133-34, 2137, 2145,
2147, 2160-61, 2165-68,
2170-71, 2176-77, 2179,
2198, 2202-3, 2205, 2207,
2209-11, 2214, 2222, 2227,
2234
techniques, 520, 538, mi
The Shoshonee Valley, 312
Shoshoni Indians, 2364, 3041
Shouts and Murmurs, 491 1
Show Biz, from Vaude to Video, 4892
The Show Must Go On,i 688
The Show-Off, 2348
Showboats, 4978
fiction, 1405
A Shower of Summer Days, 2125
Shrevc, Forrest, 2959
Shryock, Richard H., 40, 3061, 3103,
4479. 4813.4826, 4845
Shumaker, Wayne, 2421
Shurter, Robert L., 731
Shuster, George N., 4457, 5426, 5447
about, 5426
Sibley. Mulford Q., 3649, 6124
Sicily, fiction, 1994
Sidelights on American Literature, 2486
Sidewalks of America, 5510
Siebert, Frederick Seaton, 2932
Siege, 1 155
The Siege of London, 1007
Siegfried, Andre, 4505-8
Siepmann, Charles A., 4685, 4703, 5230
Sierra Nevada, 3955, 4210-1 1
disc. & explor.. 2971
Sierras, Songs of the, 1066
'Sieur George, 748
Sievers, Wieder David, 2506
Sigerist, Henry E., 4814
Sights and Spectacles, 201 7
The Sign of Jonas, 204 1
The Signature of All Things, 2100
Den Signede Dag, 1723
The Significance of the Frontier in
American History, 2437
about, 2407
Sign or Marc, 231 1
Signs, Theory of (philosophy), 5346
Sikes, Earl R., 6410
Silas Crockett, 1286
Silas Timberman, 1973
Silberling, Norman J., 6025
Silcox, Clarice Edwin, 5495
Sill, Edward Rowland, 2769
about, 2769
Silliman, Benjamin, about, 4724, 4740,
4759
Silver, Rollo G., 6440
ed., 643
Silver and silversmithing, 5784
The Silver Cord, 15 19, 2337
Silver rushes, 772-74
The Silver Stallion, 1262
Simkhovitch, Mary K., 5426
about, 5426
Simkins, Francis Butler, 4082
Simmons, E. J., 3562
Simms, Henry H, 3409
Simms, William Gilmore, 546-55,
2296
about, 554, 2277
Simon, Charlie May (Hogue), 1436
Simon Suggs' Adventures, 380
The Simple Cohler of Aggawam, 76
Simple Speaks His Mind, 1 523
Simple Ta/{es a Wife, 1525
Simplification (doctrine), 585
Simpson, Louis, 2350
Sims, William Sowden, 3716
Sinai, Nathan, 4886
Sinatra, Frank, about, 5636
Since Yesterday, 3478
The Sincere Convert, 60
Sincerely, Willis Wayde, 1597
Sinclair, Upton, 1754-58
about, 2380, 2406
Singers, operatic, 5662
biog. (collected), 5663
Singing games, 5588
Middle West, 5586
New England, 5580
The Single Hound, 2123
Single tax doctrine, 4535
Singleton, Arthur, pseud. See Knight,
Henry Cogswell
Singstad, Ole, about, 4803
Sinners in the Hands of an Angry
God, 24
Sioux Indians, 2831, 3003
fiction, 1646
Sir Dominick. F errand, 10 12
Sir Edmund Orme, 1012
Sir Henry, 1643
Sirjamaki, John, 4571
Sirmay, Albert, 4025
Sis' Becky's Pickaninny, 757
Sister Carrie, 1334
about, 1089
Sitterson, Joseph Carlyle, 5822
Sitting Bull, about, 2832, 3036
Situation Normal, 2044
Six Horses, 5931
Six Nations. See Iroquois Indians
Sizer, Theodore, ed., 5775
Skandinaven, about, 2895
Skeel, Emily E. F., ed., 177
The Sketch Book, 384-87
Sketches. See Editorials, sketches, etc.
Sketches in Criticism, 2380
Skid Road, 4216
The Skies of Europe, 2091
Skiing and ski resorts, 5062
Rocky Mountains, 4174
The Skin of Our Teeth, 1 868
Skinner, Constance Lindsay, ed.,
3969-77
Skinner, Cornelia Otis, 2808-10
about, 2810
Sklare, Marshall, 5460
Skyscrapers, 5703, 5705
INDEX / 1 175
Slabs of the Sunburnt West, 1731
Slang
in literature, 619, 701-5, 878-80,
mi, 1554-55
See also Language — slang
The Slate Auction (sculpture), 5739
Slave patrol, 3554, 3558
Slave trade, 3558, 4224, 4258, 4293,
4333- 4336, 434L4440
Slavery, 2603, 3122, 3398-99, 3414,
3766, 4258, 4364, 4367-68, 4440,
4442, 5828
defense, 3286, 3303, 3366, 3370,
3381,3389,3404
econ. aspects, 3234, 3371, 3381, 3389,
3402-3, 3409
extension to the territories, 3339,
3346,3371,3397
folklore, 5515, 5521
political aspects, 3370-71, 3389, 3409
public opinion, 3346, 3409
social aspects, 3371, 3381, 3389
See also Abolitionism
Slavery in literature, 149, 192, 216, 239,
449,511,556, 1099
antislavery pamphlets, tracts, etc., 56,
178-85, 232, 240, 463, 662-63,
2493
fiction, 562-67, 749-50, 949-52,
1277, 2201
poetry, 456-57, 664, 856-59, 861,
1222, 1224, 2200
short stories, 757-58, 856, 859-60,
1 1 00-2
See also Civil War in literature;
Plantation life in literature; and
Race question in literature
Sleepers Awa\e, 2084
The Sleeping Fury, 1 237
Slender, Robert, pseud. See Freneau,
Philip Morin
Slichter, Sumner H., 5894, 6038-39
Sloan, John, 5800
about, 2380, 5773
Sloane, Eric, 5724
Sloane, Howard N., ed., 2946
Sloane, William Milligan, ed., 5344
Slocum, Joshua, 5021
Slogans, 3152
Slogum House, 2799
Slosser, Gaius J., ed., 5466
Slosson, Edwin E., 4724, 51 13
Slosson, Preston William, 3097
Slovenian folklore, Mich., 5533
Slums, 2784, 4598, 4612
New York (City), 4638
Sluyter, Peter, 3208
Slye, Maud, about, 4722
Small, Albion Woodbury, about, 4540,
4542
A Small Boy and Others, 1015
Small business, 6021
The Small Town in American Litera-
ture, 2438
Smalley, Donald, ed., 4377
Smallpox
epidemic (1721), 4826
treatment, 40, 2493
Smallwood, Mabel Sarah Coon, 4738
Smallwood, William Martin, 4738
The Smart Set, 1 602
Smet, Pierre Jean de, 2663
about, 2662-63
Smidt, Kristian, 1369
Smiley, Dean F., 4999
ed., 4855
Smillie, Wilson G., 4874-75, 4877
Smire; an Acceptance in the Third
Person, 1266
Smirt; an Urbane Nightmare, 1264
Smith, A. Merriman, 6148
Smith, Abbot Emerson, 6056
Smith, Al, about, 5450, 5493
Smith, Albert E., 4961
about, 4961
Smith, B. Othanel, 5158
Smith, Bernard, 2406-7
ed., 2407, 3142
Smith, Bradford, 66
Smith, Bruce, 4655
Smith, Cecil Michener, 5623, 5638
Smith, Chard Powers, 4000
Smith, Charles Alphonso, ed., n 23
Smith, Charles Edward, ed., 5644
Smith, Charles Henry, 556-57, 2257
Smith, Chetwood, 5739
Smith, Chris, about, 5016
Smith, Darrell Hevenor, 5995, 6190
Smith, David Eugene, 4739
Smith, Edgar F., 4740
Smith, Elbert B., 3322
Smith, Erwin E., photographs by, 4153
about, 4153
Smith, Erwin Frink, about, 2792
Smith, Frank E., 4024
Smith, Frank L., about, 6383
Smith, George Otis, 4715
Smith, Gerrit, about, 2279, 2689
Smith, Guy-Harold, ed., 41 19
Smith, H. Allen, 2149-55, 2370, 5013
Smith, Harold D., 6191
Smith, Harry de Forest, about, 1716
Smith, Harry James, 2348
Smith, Harry Worcester, 5080
Smith, Helen Lyman, 6482
Smith, Henry Justin, 4135
Smith, Henry Ladd, 2845, 5941
Smith, Henry Nash, 2412, 3759
Smith, Hilrie S., 5436
Smith, Hubert L., 6018
Smith, Huston, 5187
Smith, Ira L., 5013
Smith, J. Lawrence, about, 4740
Smith, J. P., 3058
Smith, James Eugene, 2875
Smith, James G., 5993, 5998
Smith, James Morton, 3308, 6125
Smith, Jay, about, 5016
Smith, John, captain, 66-71
about, 66, 3198
Smith, John Edwin, 5364
Smith, Johnston, pseud. See Crane,
Stephen
Smith, Joseph, about, 4183, 5464-65
Smith, Joseph H., 6234
Smith, Joseph Russell, 2940
Smith, Julia, 5675
Smith, Justin H., 3354, 3689
Smith, Kendall, 5938
Smith, Lillian, 1759-61
Smith, Louis, 3650
Smith, Marian W., 3041
Smith, Mary, 5739
Smith, Mortimer B., 5237
Smith, Onnie Warren, 5094
Smith, R. L., 4594
Smith, "Red." See Smith, Walter W.
Smith, Reginald Heber, 6328-29
Smith, Richard Penn, 2310, 2650
Smith, Robert Miller, 5014
Smith, Samuel H., about, 5121
Smith, Samuel Stanhope, 5251
Smith, Seba, 558-61
Smith, Shirley W., 5223
Smith, Stephen W., 5644
Smith, T. V., 3646, 5289, 6128
Smith, Thelma M., 2508
ed., 464
Smith, Theodore Clarke, 3144, 3450
Smith, Thomas Lynn, 4584
Smith, Thomas P., 4740
Smith, Walter Bedell, 3565
Smith, Walter Buckingham, 5999
Smith, Walter W., 4995
Smith, William, 145
Smith, William Carlson, 4415
Smith, William Ernest, 3410
Smith, a Sylvan Interlude, 1265
Smithies, Arthur, 6001
Smith's London Journal, 2155
Smithson, James, about, 4775
Smithsonian Institution
about, 4775
See also names of administrative di-
visions, e.g., National Museum
Smok.e and Steel, 1731
The Smoking Mountain, 1250
Smoky Mountains, 3945
Smvth, Albert H., 2282
ed.,3183
Smyth, Mary Winslow, 5566
Smythe, Dallas W., 4702
Snell, George D., 2509
Snow-Bound, 662, 667
Snyder, Richard C, 3605
So-Big, 1404
So Little Time, 1593
So Red the Rose, 4912
Sobel, Bernard, 4942, 4976
Social and business ethics, 5273, 5899,
6010
Social clubs, 4574, 4578
Social conditions, 2824, 4225, 4415,
455L 4554. 4557-58. 4562, 4581,
4595, 4617. 4619. 4627, 4634,
5405, 6346, 6426, 6431
cities, 4395
country life, 4395
hist., 3073, 3085-98, 3150, 45M-
4534, 456o, 4654, 5875, 6005,
6082
American Revolution, 3252-53
Civil War, 3374
Colonial period, 3141, 3747
19th cent., 3091, 3275, 3281,
3313, 3421, 3425, 3447, 3754,
4313- 4345, 4499, 578i
20th cent., 3096, 3474, 3477-78,
3494, 3746, 4505-8, 4514,
4571-72, 4625
maps, 2972
Negroes, 4437, 4439, 4441-42, 4446,
4448
Ilj6 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Social conditions — Continued
Orientals, 4468
Poles, 4495
See also Church and society; also
subdivisions History and Social
conditions under names of places
and regions, e.g., Chicago — soc.
condit; Southern States — hist.
Social influences on literature
hist. & crit., 2448, 2450-51, 2485,
2489, 2507
Social insurance. See Social security
Social life and customs, 4232, 4234,
4531-32. 4534. 4562, 5510, 5596,
5598,6456
bibl., 4229
hist., 4235, 4519-21. 4529. 5729
Colonial period, 3748, 4227,
4263,4518
1 8th cent., 4228, 4500-1
19th cent., 4224, 4228, 4303-5,
4314-17, 4354-57. 4370-71.
4516,4927,4937
See also subdivisions History and
Social life and customs under
names of places and regions, e.g.,
Indiana — hist.; Virginia — soc. life
& cust.
Social life and customs in literature,
319-22,512
diaries, journals, etc., 36-39, 56-57
drama, 168-70, 198, 1199-1204
essays, 1002, 2469
fiction, 161-64, 689-92, 964-76, 978,
980, 982, 986-88, 992-95, 1007-8,
1014, 1589, 1828-29, 1831-33,
1845, 1874, 1909, 1911-12, 2078,
2149, 2278
letters, 96-100
satire, 381
short stories, 415-18, 986, 1004,
1008, 101 1, 1014
Social medicine (plans), 4882, 4888
Social psychology, 3724, 4539, 4556,
4561, 4635, 5277
Social questions in literature
anthology, 2355
drama, 1199-1204, 1518-20, 1647-
48, 1688-90, 1988-91, 2043-49,
2063-68, 2145, 2218-21, 2223,
2228
essays & studies, 546, 695-98, 732,
862-66, 1 155, 1357-58, 1372,
1375, 1445, 1602, 1907, 2189,
2278, 2412, 2519, 2532
fiction, 689-92, 716, 718-20, 722,
726, 728-31, 756, 821-24, 835-37,
867-75, 887-89, 941, 956-70, 973-
76, 978, 982, 986-1001, 1004,
1048, 1056, 1089-95, 1 107-10,
1136, 1142-43, 1155-56, 1178,
1 180, 1 183, 1190-94, 1270-74,
1333-39. 1343. 1372-74. 1376,
1379-84, 1386, 1388, 1390-92,
1414, 1417, 1425-29, 1445-50,
J453-59. 1460-62, 1467, 1472,
1474, 1494-97, 1499-1500, 1559-
69. 1571, 1573-74. 1576", 1579.
1589-97. 1656-58, 1743-44.
1746-48, 1754-56, 1758-60, 1775,
i777-8i, 1792-95. 1845-50, 1852-
Social questions in literature: — Continued
fiction — Continued
55, 1887-91, 1907, 1914-15, 1932,
1940-43, 2045, 2050-51, 2059,
2079, 2081, 2084, 2090, 2145-46,
2156-59, 2180, 2182-84, 2229,
2231,2235
poetry, 1038-43, 1046, 1061-63,
1069-70, 1225, 1227, 1357, 1585-
86, 1588, 1599-1600, 1608-9,
'727, 1731, 1872, 1878, 1881,
1885, 1907, 1968, 2079, 2105-6
tracts & propaganda, 178, 184-85,
235. 239, 313, 726, 862, 1048,
1053, 1 107, 1559, 1571, 1754,
1759. 1775. 1907. 1932, 1973.
2180, 2183
The Social Record, 2355
Social Register (Boston), 4035
Social Science Research Council, 4777
Social Science Research Council. Com-
mittee on Historiography, 3065
Social Science Research Council Public
Library Inquiry. See Public Li-
brary Inquiry
Social sciences, 3739, 4536, 4544-45
biog. (collected), 4540, 4712
research, 4777
study & teaching, 4540
Social security, 4621, 4631, 4633, 4635
Tex., 4194
Social Security Act, 4631
Social settlements, New York (City),
4624
Social status, 4549, 4557
children, 4559
occupation, 4547
women, 3073, 4524, 4563
Social work, 4618, 4621, 4624
medical. See Medicine — social work
Socialism, 3753, 6356
bibl., 3753
fiction, 726, 728-31, 964, 973-76,
978, 1048, 1055, 1656, 1754-56,
1758
hist., 3753, 6360, 6368, 6433
propaganda, 2896
Socialist Party
about, 6356, 6360, 6367, 6371, 6433
platforms, 6367
A Socialist's Faith, 6433
Society and the press, 2845, 2847, 2912,
2915, 2919-20, 2927-32
Society and Thought in America, 3150
Society for Establishing Useful Manu-
factures (SUM), about, 6015
Society for the Advancement of Edu-
cation, 5248
Society in America, 4315-17
Society in Transition, 4617
Society Islands, fiction, 476-77
Society, Manners and Politics in the
United States, 4314
Society of Economic Geologists, about,
4733
Society of the Cincinnati, about, 3644
Society of the United Believers, about,
5469
Society; the Redeemed Form of Man,
5319
Socinianism, 5471
Sociology, 2717-18, 3758, 4536-37.
4541-43, 4547-48, 455L 4558-59.
4599.5351
Christian, 5484-97
hist., 3755. 4539
industrial, 4552
motion picture industry, 4948, 4951
rural, 4581, 4583-84, 5832
bibl., 4580
urban, 4587
Nev., 4184
Socrates
drama, 1 176
fiction, 2413
The Sod-House Frontier, 4156
Soil conservation, 5808
Soil Conservation Service, about, 5884
Soil Survey, about, 2947
Soils, 2934, 2943-44, 2947, 5816
bibl., 2947
maps, 2943-44, 2947
Fla., 4248-50
Ga., 4248-50
Middle West, 41 13
New York (State), 4237-38
N.C., 4248-50
Pa., 4237-38
S.C., 4248-50
Southern States, 4084
The Sojourner, 1680, 2024
The Soldier, 11 66
Soldier in the White House, 3333
Soldier of Democracy , 3482
Soldier of the Republic, 3333
Soldiers, 3652, 3662, 3679, 3690-92,
3704-5. 3724
Pennsylvania German, 4479
songs, 5556, 5559, 5562
World War II, 2734
Soldiers' Pay, 1380
A Soldier's Story, 3718
Soldiers without Swords, 5497
Soley, James Russell, 3700
The Solid Gold Cadillac, 1550
The Solitary Singer, 647
A Solo in Tom-Toms, 2878
Solomon, Barbara Miller, 4423
Solstice, 1534
Sokes, Mordecai, 2898
Solum, Nora O., tr., 1722
Some Chinese Ghosts, 951-52, 955
Some Creole Melodies, 951-52
Some Enchanted Evenings, 5685
Some Laggards Yet, 638
Some Old Puritan Love Letters, 90
Some Others and Myself, 1 801
Somebody up There Likes Me, 5028
Something about Eve, 1261-62
Sometimes, 956
A Son of Earth, 1558
A Son of the Middle Border, 898-99
The Son of the Wolf, 1049-50
Sone, Monica (Itoi), 281 1-12
about, 2812
Song and Idea, 1 35 1
A Song Catcher in Southern Mountains,
5582
Song in the Meadow, 1697
The Song of Hiawatha, 432
The Song of Hugh Glass, 1645
Song of the Chattahoochee, 1038
INDEX / 1 1 77
The Song of the Indian Wars, 1645
The Song of the Larl^, 1 276-77
The Song of the Messiah, 1645
The Song of Three Friends, 1 645
Song Writers Protective Association,
about, 6322
Songs, 4025, 5614, 5677
bibl., 561 1
in literature, 91 1-13. 922
Mexican, 4472
national, 5616
See also Folksongs and ballads;
Play-party songs; Popular music
and songs; Work songs
Songs and Satires. 1601
Songs before Parting, 623
Songs for Eve, 1588
Songs of Italy and Others, 1066
Songs of Parting, 624
Songs of the American Seas, 1066
Songs of the Sierras, 1 066
about, 1064
Songs of the Sunlands, 1066
Sonn, Albert H., 5790
Sonneck, Oscar George Theodore, 5610,
5612, 5616, 5661, 5677
Sonnets to Duse, 181 4
Sonnichsen, Charles L., 4163
Sons, 1254
Sons and Soldiers, 2145
Sons of Science, 4775
Soper, David Wesley, 5433
Sophocles. Women of Trachis, trans-
lation, 1664
Sorokin, Pitirim A., 3566
A Sort of a Saga, 2737
Sosman, R. B., 4715
Soth, Lauren, 5861
The Soul of America, 3735
Soule, George, 2407, 5877
The Soules Preparation for Christ, 33
Soulsby, Hugh G., 3558
The Sound and the Fury, 1383
The Sound Believer, 61
The Sound Wagon, 1792
Sour Grapes, 1881
The Sources of Religious Insight, 5354
The South. See Southern states
South America. See Latin America
The South as a Conscious Minority,
6059
The South Atlantic Quarterly, 2571
South Carolina, 3963, 4023, 4079,
4091-93
architecture, 5706
counties, 4092
culture, 3233
governors, 4092
guidebooks, 3834-36
Gullah dialect, 2271
hist., 3180, 3216, 3233, 4023,
4091-93
language (dialects, etc.), 2258, 2260
natural hist., 5087
parks, 3836
plantation life, 4517, 5087
population, 4092
soc. life & cust., 4091, 4517
travel & travelers, 4248-50, 4277-78
The South Carolina Gazette, about,
2854
South Carolina in literature
descr., 1724-26
fiction, 405, 546-49. 552-53. 1512-
13, 1653, 1720-23
poetry, 614-17, 1168, 1512
short stories, 1 149, 1762
South Dakota, 3948, 3951
frontier life, 4156
guidebooks, 3896-3900
hist., 4147
rural communities, 4109
South from Hell-fer-Sartin, 5546
South Moon Under, 1681
South Pacific, 2337
South Pacific Islands in literature,
470-78
South Pole expeditions. See Antarctic
expeditions
South Star, 1434
South Today, 1759
Southeast Asia, relations with, 3591
Southern Folklore Quarterly, 5518
Southern Renaissance, 2442
Southern Review, 1809, 2572
Southern States, 2635, 3958, 4066-96
agriculture, 5823
architecture, 5706
culture, 4067-70, 4083-84
econ. condit., 3402-3, 4067-68,
4079, 4084, 4401, 4438, 5828,
5891
folklore, 5518, 5525
folksongs & ballads, 5572, 5582-83
guidebooks, 3827-47
historiography, 3057
hist., 3286, 3361, 3367, 3404, 3415,
3417. 3445. 345L 3754. 4067,
4070-72, 4074, 4077-78, 4080-82,
5828, 6059
industry, 4084, 5909
intellectual life, 3766, 4723
KuKluxKlan, 3386
nationalism, 4067, 4075, 4080
Negro songs, 5561, 5582
Negroes, 4443
pictorial guide, 3782
pol. & govt., 4067, 4075, 6376,
6378-79
rural press, 2853
science, 4723
soc. condit., 2721, 4066-68, 4078-79,
4084, 4438
soc. life & cust., 4081, 4097
travel & travelers, 3365, 4233, 4235,
4256-57, 4266, 4285, 4297, 4329,
4336, 4344, 4367, 4387
white spirituals, 5577
See also Confederate States
Southern States in literature, 1036-37,
1724-26, 1761, 1791, 1907, 2296
anthologies, 2292, 2296, 2320
drama, 1473, 1 475-77, 2218-21,
2223, 2225, 2228
editorials, sketches, etc., 192-97,
330-32, 379-8o, 405-8. 445-48.
556-57, 612-13, 1809
essays, 618, 945. 951-52, 954~55.
1 103-4, 1679, 1791, 1809-10,
2442, 2466
Southern States in literature — Continued
fiction, 226-29, 245-51, 277-79,
409-13, 546-50, 552-53. 555.
745. 749-50, 756, 946-52. 955.
1032, 1099, 1105-6, 1239-41,
1270-7, 1379-95, 1460-62, 1464-
70, 1472-74, 1512-13, 1526-29,
1618-19, '653-55. 1680-83, 1697-
1702, 1704-5, 1759-60, 1786-89,
1792-95, 1836-38, 1887-91, 1944-
45, 2023-24, 2050-51, 2090, 2174-
76, 2178, 2193, 2199, 2201-2,
2204, 2206, 2208, 2232
folklore, 910-16, 922-25
hist., 12-16, 66-68, 70-71, 149-53,
2442
humor, 192-97, 379-80, 445-48,
556-57, 856-61, 910-16, 922,
924-25
poetry, 520-30, 533, 536, 614-17,
856-58, 861, 1038-43, 1046,
1133-35. 1512, 1623-24, 1675-79,
1809, 1811, 2172, 2193, 2196,
2200, 2292
short stories, 612-13, 745-48, 756-
61, 856, 859-60, 910-22, 924-25,
951-52, 954-55. 1032-35. 1099-
1102, 1106, 1149, 1151, 1225,
1240, 1275, 1379, 1389, 1393-94,
1471, 1476, 1478, 1684, 1703,
1790, 1892, 1944, 1946, 2024,
2176-77, 2179, 2202-3, 2205,
2207, 2209, 2222, 2227
travel & travelers, 12-14, 66-68, 70-
71, 612-13
Southwest
archaeology, 2992
architecture, 5723
biog. (collected), 4190
cession by Mexico, 3355
colonization, 3158
culture, 4 1 91
disc. & explor., 3158
folklore, 5503, 5507, 5509, 5518,
5520, 5531
guidebooks, 3917-26
hist., 3158, 3783-84. 3947. 3956,
4005, 4017, 4186-99, 5874
Indians, 3023, 3027
Apache, 3004
Comanche, 3014
customs, 2722
Navajo, 3013
shaminism, 3019
language (dialects, etc.), 2264
legends, 5531
Mexicans, 4475
music, 5630
Southwest, Old, 4097-4108
descr. & trav., 41 91
guidebooks, 3848-61
hist., 3287, 4098
soc. life & cust., 4098
See also Southern States
Southwest in literature
bibl., 2525
fiction, 1276, 1551-52, 1691
periodicals, 2562, 2572
poetry, 1984
1 178
A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Southwest in literature — Continued
short stories, 1196-98, 1553, 1659,
1 691, 1762
writers &: writings, 4187
Southwest Review, 2572
The Soveraignty &■ Goodness of God, 54
Soviet Union. See Russia
Sow the Golden Seed, 2896
Sowerby, Emily Millicent, comp., 6460
Spaeth, Sigmund G., 5637, 5639
Spain
Civil War, 3536
culture, 1445
fiction, 1495, 1497
hist., 2294
legends & sketches, 381
relations with, 3307, 3444, 3449,
3528, 3530-31. 3569. 3572, 3707
travel ic travelers, 381, 449
Spain in the New World, 3162, 31 71
Spalding, Albert G., about, 5009
Spalding. Walter Raymond, 5672
Spanish-American War, 3448. 3554,
3707-8
diplomatic hist., 3530
fiction, 2682
naval operations, 3708
songs, 5616
Spanish Bayonet, 1222, 1224
The Spanish Borderlands, 3158
The Spanish Husband, 2302
Spanish influence
arts & crafts, 5594
culture, 985, 4187, 4189. 4197-98
folklore, 5518, 5526, 5537
folksongs & ballads, 5521
language (dialects, etc.), 2264, 4198
legends, 5518, 5521
on literature, 201, 205, 2534
Spanish missions. See Missions, Indian
Spanish North America
colonization, 3075, 3156-58
disc. & explor., 3153, 3157-58, 3165,
3203,3217
hist., 3075, 3158, 3165
Spann, John R., ed., 5496
Spargo, John, 5791
The Spark (The 'Sixties), 1845
Sparks, Jared, about, 3057
Sparrow, Stanwood Willston, about,
4803
Spaude, Paul W., 5462
Spaulding, E. G., 5260
Spaulding, Oliver Lyman, 3664
Speak, to the Earth, 2746
Speaking Frankly, 3544
Specimen Days, 633-35
Speck, Frank G., 3009, 301 1
Speckled Trout, 741
Speculation (stocks), 5952, 5981, 5993
Speeches, addresses, etc., 230-31, 233,
276, 420-21, 460-61, 465, 467,
900
See also Lectures and Lecturing
Speiser, Ephraim A., 3512
Spelling, simplified, 2469
Spelling books, 5127
Spencer, Eleanor P., 3751
Spencer, Gwladys, 6473
Spencer, Samuel R., 4450
Spengler, J. J., 3758
Spengler, Oswald, about, 2407
Sper, Felix, 4926
Spero, Sterling D.. 6192
Sperry, Willard L., 5400, 5424. 5427
about. 5427
Spewack, Bella, 2327, 2333
Spewack, Samuel, 2327, 2333
Spider Boy, 1 833
The Spider's House, 1 93 1
Spiller, Robert E., 230, 252, 267, 301,
692, 897, 2412, 2510
ed., 264, 269, 273, 2276. 2460-61
Spingarn, Joel Elias, 241 1. 251 1
Spink, J. G. T.iy!or, 5015
Spires of Form, 303
The Spirit and the Flesh, 1258
The Spirit of St. Louis, 271 5
Spirit of the Times, 379, 613, 4097,
5542
Spiritual Laws, 285
Spiritualism, 4516, 5439
Spirituals. See Negroes — spirituals:
White spirituals
Spitz. David. 6069
Spivack, R. G., 6195
The Splendid Idle Forties, 725
Splendid Poseur, 1064
Spoerri. William T., 3771
Spofford. Ainsworth R., about, 6469
Spohn, George Weida, ed., 2330
The Spoilage, 4469
Spoils system, 3424-25, 3437-38, 4664,
6183, 6357, 6363, 6382, 6384,
6386, 6389-90
See also Corruption (in politics)
Spokane, Wash., 4150, 4217
Spoon River Anthology, 1 599-1 601
The Sport of Gods, 856
Sporting goods business, 5009
Sports, 2794, 4387, 4983-84, 4986-88,
4990-92, 4994-96, 5065-97
fiction, 5080
hist., 4990
soc. aspects, 4983
Baltimore, 4062
Berkshire Hills, Mass., 3799
Rocky Mountains, 4174
Southern States, 4083
See also Athletics; Recreation; and
particular sports, e.g.. Baseball
Spotswood, Alexander, fiction, 226,
228-29
Sprague, Marshall, 4181
Spring, Leverett Wilson, 4168, 5222
Spring and All, 1881
Spring Birth, 1827
Spring Thunder, 1827
Springfield. 111., 1582, 4588
Springfield, Mass., guidebook, 3802
Springfield [Mass.] Republican, about,
2879
Springfield, Ohio, guidebook, 3870
Sprout, Harold H., 3673-74
Sprout, Margaret, 3673-74
The Spy, 253-55,2311
Square dances, 4160, 5587, 5589-91
Srole, Leo, 4435
Stackpole, Edouard A., 5871
Stafford, Jean, 2156-60
Stage. See Theater
Stage-Coach and Tavern Days, 4227
Stagecoaches, 4666, 5931
drivers, 4227
See also Travel and travelers — stage-
coach
Stage Door, 1547, 2333
Stagg, Amos Alonzo, 5043
about, 5043
Stah!, O.Glenn, 6188
Stahlberg, John, 4176
Stalin, Joseph, 3622
Stallings, Laurence, 2332
Stallman, Robert W., 828, 2383
ed., 836-37
Stalson, J. Owen, 5991
Stamp Act, 3257
Stampp, Kenneth M., 3403
Standard of living. See Cost and
standard of living
Standard Oil Company, about, 2824,
5913,5916
Stanley, John M.. about, 5806
Stanley, Julian C. 5229
Stanley, William O., 5158
Stanton, Alfred H., 4838
Stanton, Edwin McMasters, about. 2614
Stanwood, Edward, 6149
The Star Spangled Banner (song), 5616
about, 5616
Stark. John Stilwell, about, 5641
Starke. Aubrey H., ed., 1046
Starkey, Marion L., 3228, 3309
Starr, Harris E., 4544
ed.. 3080
Starr, Mark, 5291, 6034
Stars To-Xight, 181 4
Starved Rock, 1601
Stasheff, Edward, 4697, 5230
The State, 5279, 5310, 6073
See also specific subjects "and state,"
e.g., Church and state; Industry
and state
The State of Mind, 213 1
State of the Nation, 1330
State of the Union, 2335
State rights, 3139, 3303, 3367, 3369.
3397,6101
States
and local relations, 6200, 6217-18
civil service, 6192
colleges & universities, 5163-68. 5176,
5194,5201-2
constitutions, 6080, 6086, 6195
courts. 6281-82, 6293
executive branch, 6193, 6197, 6201,
6203-4, 63 1 1
executive-legislative relations, 6203
finance, 5973
govt., 4266, 6133-35, 6137, 6167,
6195-6206, 6425, 6432
functions, 6139, 6180, 6196-97
hist., 3259
labor policy, 6192, 6195
organization, 6137, 6180, 6196-
97
govt, officials & employees, 6196-97
govt, publications, 6452
bibl., 6205
judicial branch, 6197
legislative branch, 6197
INDEX / I I 79
States — Continued
legislative power, 6098, 6154-56,
6158, 6160, 6164, 6168, 6178,
6191,
cases, 6091
library extension agencies, 6482
See also names of individual states,
e.g., Alabama
Statesmen of the Lost Cause, 3383
Statistics, 2970
See also specific subjects, e.g., Agri-
culture— stat.; Census; Vital sta-
tistics
Statues. See Monuments
The Statues, 2137
Stauffer, Donald A., ed., 2512
Steamships and steamboats
hist., 4784, 5929
in literature, 784-86
Stearns, Marshall W., 5646
Stearns, Myron M., 5023
Stebbins, Richard P., 3634
Stedman, Edmund Clarence, 2513
Stedman, Laura, 2513
Stedman, Murray S., Jr., 6372
Stedman, Susan W., 6372
Steeg, Clarence Ver, 4072
Steel industry, 2825, 4061, 5909, 5918
Steel Workers' Union, about, 6039
Steele, Sir Richard, about, 381
Steele, S.S., 23 11
Steele, Wilbur Daniel, 1762-65
Steelman, John R., 4779
Steeple Bush, 1452
Steere, Douglas V., about, 5433
Steffens, Joseph Lincoln, 6207, 6432
about, 6430, 6432
StefTerud, Alfred, ed., 5817
Stegner, Wallace, 2161-65, 3782, 3961,
. 4757
Steiger, Ernst, about, 6446
Stein, Gertrude, 1766-72
about, 1773-74. 2504, 2535
Stein, William B., 362
Steinbeck, John, 1775-81, 2333, 2336
about, 2376, 2427-28, 2508, 2536
Steinberg, Milton, 4457
Steinman, David B., 4801
Steinmetz, Rollin C, 4058
Stendler, Celia B., 5148
Step Right Up!, 4980
Stephen Escott, 1 576
Stephens, Alexander H., about, 2613,
3415
Stephens, John L., 2994
Stephenson, George M., 4416
Stephenson, Nathaniel Wright, 3271,
3355
Stephenson, Wendell Holmes, 3057
ed., 4072
Sterling, George, 737-38
Sterling Memorial Library, 6470
Stermer, James Edson, 4586
Stern, Bernhard J., 3009, 4815
Stern, Madeleine B., 188, 6446
Stern, Philip Van D., ed., 421, 535
Stern, Siegfried, 6002
Sterner, Richard, 4446, 4448
Stettinius, Edward R., 3567
Stevens, Henry, 6465
about, 6465
Stevens, Henry N., ed., 6465
Stevens, John, about, 4786, 4802
Stevens, John Austin, 4049
Stevens, Robert Livingston, about, 4786
Stevens, Sylvester K., 4057
Stevens, Thaddeus, about, 3362, 3368
Stevens, Wallace, 1782-84
about, 1785, 1923, 2426, 2497, 2544
Stevenson, Adlai, 3646
Stevenson, Elizabeth, 688, 1022
Stevenson, Robert Louis, 610
about, 520
Steward, Julian H., ed., 4222
Stewart, Edgar I., 3036
Stewart, George B., Jr., ed., 931
Stewart, George R., 2976, 3331, 4521
Stewart, Irvin, 4761
Stewart, Isabel M., about, 4854
Stewart, Kenneth, 2848
Stewart, Lawrence D., 5678
Stewart, Lowell O., 4800
Stewart, Paul R., 2925
Stewart, Randall, ed., 349-50, 2320,
2323
Stewart, Raymond F., 4704
Stewart, Watt, 3058
Stewart, William Drummond, about,
3330
Sticks and Stones, 5701
Stieglitz, Alfred, about, 5783
Stiles, Bert, 2813-14
about, 2814
Stiles, Helen E., 5792
Still, Bayrd, 4048, 4140
Still Seeing Things, 4909
A Stillness at Appomattox, 3692
Stilwell, H., 6195
Stilwell, Joseph W., 3723
Stimpson, George W., 6339
Stimson, Henry L., about, 3547, 3595
Stine, C. S., 4479
Stine, Oscar C, 5855
Stirring Them in Austria, 798-99
Stock, Frederick, about, 5652
Stock, Leo F., ed., 3045
Stock companies, 6008
Stocking, George W., 6026
Stocks and stock-exchange, 5981-82
Stoddard, Richard Henry, 224
The Stoic, 1337
Stokes, Anson Phelps, 5103, 5420
Stokes, Thomas L., 4016
Stokowski, Evangeline, 4968
Stone, Barton W., about, 5455
Stone, Candace, 2881
Stone, Geoffrey, 504
Stone, Harlan Fiske, about, 6249-50
Stone, Harold A., 6216
Stone, Henry, 461
Stone, Irving, 2815-21
ed., 3145
Stone, John Augustus, 518, 231 1
Stone, Kathryn H., 6216
Stone, Shepard, 3615
Stone, William L., 4049
Stone, Witmer, 4724
Stone quarrying and mining, 2991
Stone Walls and Men, 2716
Stonecutters, 5738
Storck, John. 5289
The Store, 1794
Stores. See Department stores; Chain
stores; etc.
Storey, Moorfield, 2696
about, 2696
Stories in the Modern Manner, 2566
Stories of the Streets and of the Town,
704
Stories on Stone, 4527
Storm, Hans Otto, about, 2536
Storm and Echo, 2096
Story, Isabelle F., 4182
Story, Joseph, 6100
about, 6231
The Story of a Bad Boy, 707-ro
about, 706
The Story of a Country Town, 960-63
The Story of a Day, 1 035
The Story of a Poller Steer, 687
The Story of a Year, 1008
The Story of Bras-Coupe, 749-50
The Story of Kennett, 2282
A Story of the War, 91 1
The Story of Toby, 475
A Story Teller's Story, 1 182
The Story up to Now, 6469
Stoudt, John J., 5600
Stouffer, S. A., 3724, 6130
Stourzh, Gerald, 3187
Stout, Wesley Winans, 5043
Stovall, Floyd, 640, 2401, 2514
ed., 2515
Stowe, Harriet (Beecher), 562-^78
about, 562, 577-78, 881, 1023, 2615.
2797.3413
Stowe, W. H., 5442
The Strange Career of Jim Crow, 4444
The Strange Children, 1472
Strange Fruit, 1759-60
Strange Holiness, 1 290
Strange Interlude, 1647-48
Strange Ports of Call, 1959
Strange Victory, 1814
A Stranger Came to Port, 2746
Strangers in the Land, 4422
The Stranglers of Paris, 2315
Strategic Air Command, about, 3643a
Stratemeyer, Florence B., 5158
Stratton, George Malcolm, ed., 5318
Stratton, Winficld Scott, about, 41 81
Straumann, Heinrich, 2516
Straus, Isidor, about, 5959
Straus, Nathan, 4608, 5959
Straus, Oscar S., about, 2504
The Straw, 1648
Strawberries, 741
Straws and Prayer-Bookf, 1 262
Stray Leaves from Strange Literature,
951-52
Strayer, Joseph Reese, ed., 6087
Stream of consciousness writing, fic-
tion, 1161-62, 1183, 1379, 1579,
1887, 2055, 2174-75
Street, James, Jr., ed., 1791
Street, James Howell, 1786-91, 5822
Street Corner Society, 4598
A Street in Bronzeville , 1937
Street Scene, 1688-89, 2332
A Streetcar Named Desire, 2221,
2335-36
Streeter, Floyd Benjamin, 3990
Streets in the Moon, 1586
Il8o / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
The Strength of Gideon, 860
The Strength of the Strong, 1052
The Strenuous Age in American Litera-
ture, 2451
The Strenuous Life, 2793
Strevey, T. E., 3058
Stribling, Thomas Sigismund, 1792-95
Strickland. W. P., ed., 2634
Strictly Dishonorable, 2332
Strike through the Mask.1., 2191
Strikes, 3439, 4147, 4181, 4310, 6047
Strode, Hudson, 3369
Strong, Charles Augustus, 5255
Strong, George Templeton, 2822-23
about, 2823
Strong Cigars and Lovely Women,
4991
Structural geology, 2942
Structural psychology, 5389
A Struggle for Life, 711
The Struggle for Survival, 5879
Struggles and Triumphs, 4977
The Struggles (Social, Financial and
Political) of Petroleum V . Nashy,
425
Struik, Dirk Jan, 4730
Strunsky, Simeon, 2858
Stryker, Lloyd Paul, 3411-12
Stuart, Charles, about, 3360
Stuart, Gilbert, about, 5749, 5774
Stuart, H. W., 5254
Stuart, J. E. B., about, 2613, 3703
Stuart, Jesse, 2166-73
Stuart, Lylc, 2894
Studenski, Paul, 5973
Studies in Classic American Literature,
2456
Studies in Literary Types, 2493
Studies in Logical Theory, about, 2407
Studies of a Litterateur, 2547
Studies of Good and Evil, 5354
Studs Lonigan, 1373
Stumpf, Florence Scovil, 4983
Sturges, Henry C, 224
Sturges, Preston, 2332
Sturges, Wesley A., 6299
Styron, William, 2174-75
Substance and Shadow, 53 19
The Suburb by the Sea, 1517
Subversive Activities Control Act, 6108
Subversives and subversive activities,
4424, 6112, 6119, 6130
New York (State), 61 15
Success, 3762, 6029
as a theme in literature, 2464
Such Counsels You Gave to Me, 1534
Sucker's Progress, 2586
Suckow, Ruth, 1 796-1 801
about, 1809
Suffolk County, Mass., 4036
Suffrage, 6401-2, 6405, 6409
Southern States, 6378-79
Sugar industry, 5822
Suggs, Simon, pseud. See Hooper,
Johnson Jones
Sullivan. Anne Mansfield, 2706
See also Macy, Anne Sullivan
Sullivan, E. C, about, 4785
Sullivan, James, about, 5121
Sullivan, John Florence. See Allen,
Fred
Sullivan, John Lawrence, about, 5027
Sullivan, Louis Henry, 5715
about, 5703, 5715
Sullivan, Mark, 2891, 3468
about, 2891
Sullivan, Paul H., ed., 6019
Sullivan, Thelma L., 1807
Sullivant, William Starling, about, 4760
The Sultan of Sulu, 701, 705
Sulzberger, Arthur Hays, about, 2869
Suman, John Robert, about, 4803
Summer and Smoke, 2223, 2335
Summer on the Lak.es, in 1843, 314
Summer Resort, 4596
Summers, Robert E., ed., 3631
Sumner, Charles, 425, 3406
about, 2280, 2614, 3406
Sumner, Helen L., 6033
Sumner, William Graham, about, 2407,
4542,4544
The Sun (Baltimore), about, 1602,
2876
The Sun (New York), about, 2874,
2881
The Sun also Rises, 1495
Sun-Up, 2337
Sunday, Billy, about, 5403, 5480
Sunderland, Edson R., 6331
Sunrise to Sunset, 1 1 59
Sunshine and Shadow, 4955
Supernatural stories
Mich., 5535
New England, 5534
See also Ghost stories
Supernaturalism, Indian, 3006, 3019
Superstition
Mich., 5533
Miss., 5547
New England, 5541
N.C., 5536
Ozark Mountains, 5543
Pa., 5578
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Superstition, 200, 2337
Supper for the Dead, 1475
Supreme Court, 3108, 3304, 6078,
6093-94, 6096, 6098, 6101, 6120,
6147, 6151, 6236-60, 6286, 6340
decisions & opinions, 6084, 6089,
6092, 6095, 6099-6100, 6102,
6104-6, 6121, 6128-29
influence in pol. & govt., 6240
Surgeon General's Library, Washington,
D.C., about, 4819
Surgeons. See Physicians and surgeons
Surgery, 4821, 4824, 4827, 4831
Surgery of the eye. See Ocular surgery
Surgery of the nervous system. See
Neurosurgery
Surrealism in literature
drama, 2226
fiction, 1987, 2079, 2081, 2084
poetry, 2034
Surry of Eagle's Nest, 247-48
A Survey of the Summe of Church
Discipline, 34
Susan Lennox, 11 07
Susquehanna River and valley, 4020
in literature, 675
Sut Lovingood , 331-32
Sutcliffe, Denham, ed., 171 6
Sutermeister, Edwin, 6458
Sutherland, Donald, 1774
Sutherland, Stella H., 4398
Sutter, John, about, 2659
Sutton, Albert Alton, 2910
Sutton, Francis X., 6010
Suwannee River, 3976
Svenska Amerikanaren Tribunen,
about, 2895
Swallow Barn, 405-8
Swan, Howard, 5630
Swan, M. L., 5577
Swan, W. H., 5577
Swanee (song), 5678
Swanton, John R., 2985, 3012
Swedes, 4482, 4483, 4486
Swedish-American journalism, 2895
Sweeney, James Johnson, 4968
Sweeney in the Trees, 21 13
Sweet, William Warren, 5396, 5401-2,
5410-16, 5466
ed., 5412-16, 5463
Sweet Thursday, 1781
Swenson, May, 2350
Swenson, Rinehart J., 6315
Swetnam, George, 3962
Swift, Jonathan, about, 165
Swift & Co., about, 6055
Swift v. Tyson case, 6293
'Swingin Round the Cirkle' , 424
Swinnerton, James, about, 2865
Swisher, Carl Brent, 6084-85, 6238,
6258
Switzerland, travel & travelers, 426
Sword Blades and Poppy Seed, 1583-84
Sybil, 1 9 1 1
Sydnor, Charles S., 4074
A Symbolic of Motives, 2390
Symbolism in literature
drama, 1069-70, 2218-19, 2226
essays, 2388, 2535
fiction, 333, 470, 478, 481-83, 491,
1281, 1379, 1388, 1494, 1500,
'947> !954> I992> 2023, 2081,
2212
hist. & crit., 2420
poetry, 1823, 1948
crit., 2378
The Symphony, 1038
Symphony Hall (Boston), 5649
Synagogues, 4454, 4457
Syndicalism, 6045
Syndication (newspaper), 2864, 2881,
2890, 2894
Syntax, 2243
Syrett, Harold C, 3103, 3318
Syrkin, Marie, 4457
System of Logic, 5337
Systematic Theology, 5433
Szarkowski, John, 5715
TVA. See Tennessee Valley Authority
Tableau des Etats-Unis, 4507
Tacoma, Wash., 4150
Taeuber, Conrad, 4397
Taff, Charles A., 5942
Taft, Kendall B., ed., 2295
Taft, Lorado, 5740
INDEX / Il8l
Taft, Philip, 6033, 6039
Taft, Robert, 5781, 5806
Taft, William Howard, about, 3464,
6255
Taft-Hartley Act, 6053
Take Them, Stranger, 2413
Tak.e Them Up Tenderly, 4931
Taking the Census, 380
A Tale for Midnight, 2087
A Tale of Two Conventions, 6350
Tales. See Legends & tales; Short
stories; Tales, folk; Tall tales
Tales, folk, 910-16, 922-25, 5506,
5508, 55io-i3» 55i6
Mormon, 5538
Beech Mountain, N.C., 5529
Brazos River, Tex., 5527
Ky., 5529. 5546
Mich., 5533,5535
Middle West, 5519
Miss., 5547
Mississippi River, 5523
Mo., 5528
New England, 5524, 5534
N. Mex., 5537
New York (City), 5522
New York (State), 5548
N.C., 5529, 5536
Ozark Mountains, 5545
Pa., 5578-79
Rocky Mountains, 5530
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
Southern States, 5525
Southwest, 5507, 5509, 5518, 5520,
5531
Tex., 5518, 5520-21, 5532
Va., 5529
West, 5526
Wise County, Va., 5529
Tales before Midnight, 1224
Tales from the Plum Grove Hills, 2170
Tales of a Time and Place, 1033
Tales of a Wayside Inn, 434
Tales of Fishes, 1 486
Tales of Lonely Trails, 5073
Tales of Soldiers and Civilians, 735
Tales of the Grotesque and Arabesque ,
528
Tahfer, 171 4
Talking books, 4636
Talking to the Moon, 2730
The Talking Turtle, 5545
Tall tales, 330-32, 379-80, 511, 5506,
5508,5511-13
Ark., 5542
Mich., 5535
New England, 5534
New York (City), 5522
New York (State), 5548
Ozark Mountains, 5544
Rocky Mountains, 5530
Southern States, 5515
Southwest, 5503, 5509, 5520
Tenn., 330-32
Tex., 5520, 5532
Tallant, Robert, 3852
The T alley Method, 1210
Tallmadge, Thomas E., 5703
Talmadge, John Erwin, 2856
Tamar and Other Poems, 1534
Tambimuttu, M. J., ed., 1364
Tambo and Bones, 5640
Tamerlane, 521-27
Tammany Hall, 6382, 6387, 6390
Tammen, Harry Heye, about, 2878
Tancred, King of Sicily, 231 1
Taney, Roger B., about, 6096, 6240,
6258
Tanks (military science), 3658
Tannenbaum, Frank, 3632, 4656
Tannenbaum, Samuel A., 4891
Tansill, Charles Callen, 3587
Taos, N. Mex., 4187, 4198
drama, 1174
Tapp, Jesse W., 5855
Tappan, Arthur, about, 3360
Tappan, Lewis, 3360
Taps for Private Tussle, 2 1 69
Tar, a Midwest Childhood, 1 1 84
Tarbell, Ida M., 2824-27, 3094, 5916,
6430
about, 2827
Tariff, 3124, 3303, 3351, 3422-23,
3448, 3638, 5947, 6352, 6366,
6373,6396
See also General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade
Tarkington, Booth, 968, 1802-6
about, 1808, 2504, 4124
bibl., 1807
Tascosa, Tex., hist., 4195
The Tastemakers, 5694
Tate, Allen, 1481, 1809-11, 2008
ed., 1227, 1809, 2354
about, 1812, 2499
Tate, Mrs. Allen. See Gordon, Caroline
Tate, Merze, 3525
Tattered Coat, 5068
The Tattooed Countess, 1830
Tatum, Laurie, about, 3035
Tauber, Maurice F., 6487
ed., 6484
Taubman, Hyman Howard, 5624, 5627,
5662
Taussig, Frank W., 6027
Taverns. See Hotels, taverns, etc.
Taxation, 5965, 5970-71, 5973, 6090,
6095, 6105
cases, 6090, 6095
gift deductions, 4615
radio & television, 4708
Tayleure, Clifton W., 2347
Taylor, Albert H., 3675
Taylor, Anne (Dewees), 5834
Taylor, Bayard, 2282, 4351-53
tr., 2282
about, 2282, 2513, 4351
Taylor, Carl C, 4583, 5833
Taylor, Charles A., 2305
Taylor, Deems, 1608, 4946, 5685
Taylor, E. G. R., 3169
Taylor, Edward, 72-74
about, 73-74
Taylor, Eugene J., 4637
Taylor, Frederick W., about, 4798
Taylor, George Rogers, ed., 3107-36,
5877
Taylor, Henry C, 5834
Taylor, Horace, 5895
Taylor, John, 2296
Taylor, Laurette, about, 4932
Taylor, Nathaniel W., about, 5428, 5436
Taylor, Paul Schuster, 4476
Taylor, Peter Hillsman, 2176-79
Taylor, Richard, 2828-30
Taylor, Robert J., 3079
Taylor, Robert Lewis, 4956
Taylor, Rosser H., 4091
Taylor, Telford, 6164
Taylor, Walter Fuller, 2517
Taylor, Zachary, about, 3332-33
Teachers and teaching, 118, 2767, 5105,
5213-23,5239,5243
academic freedom, 5132-33, 5181,
5185, 5238-39, 5243. 6115-17,
6123, 6126
colleges & universities, 5213-15,
5219, 5221-23
education & training, 5233, 5236,
5239
hist., 3050, 3055, 3059, 3083
laws & legislation, 5139
methods & techniques, 5218, 5225-
27. 5239
private schools, 5217
profession, 5128, 5216
public schools, 5134, 5216, 5239
Tead, Ordway, 5427
about, 5427
The Teahouse of the August Moon,
2336
Teale, Edwin W., ed., 1083
Team Bells Woke Me, 13 16
Teamsters' Union, about, 6039
Teapot Dome scandal, fiction, 1756
Tears and Smiles, 198
The Tears of the Blind Lions, 2039
Teasdale, Sara, 1 813-14
Tebbel, John, 2848, 2862, 2884, 2926
ed., 3171
Technical assistance, 3624, 3636, 3641
Technical societies, directory, 4728
Technology, 6440, 6454—55, 6458
awards, 4729
bibl., 4729, 6453
development, 3670-71, 371 1, 3722,
4079
hist., 4312, 4320, 4727
Tecumseh (Shawnee chief), about,
3030,3037
Teedyuscung (Delaware chief), about,
2835
Teeters, Negley K., 4639, 4657
Teichmann, Howard, 1550
Teigler, Elaine, ed., 3064
Telecommunication, 471 1
hist., 4675
laws & regulations, 4707
Telegraph, 4675, 4680-81, 4707
unions, 4681
Telephone, 4674
hist., 4675, 4679
industry, 4672, 4710
Television, 4692
advertising, 4696
audiences, 4699, 4703-4, 4895
boxing, 5033
broadcasting, 4682, 4686, 4691-92,
4694-95, 4697, 4699, 4703-5.
4965
in education, 4685, 4688, 4705,
5230-31
in religion, 4702
Il82 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Television — Continued
journalists, 2848, 2894
laws & regulations, 4708
Teller, James D., 4742
Temperance movement, 4516, 4528
fiction, 190-91
A Temperance Town, 2306
The Tempers, 1881
Temple School, Boston, about, 5220
The Temptation of Roger Heriott, 2059
The Ten Grandmothers, 3007
Ten Nights in a Bar-Room, 191
Ten North Frederick, 2078
Ten Years in Japan, 3545
Tender Buttons, 1771
Tender Is the Night, 1 429
Tenement life, 2703-4
New York (City), 4638
Tennessee, 3945, 3963, 4079, 4103-5
caves, 2946
frontier life, 4097
guidebook, 3855
hist., 3287, 3353, 4021, 4103
pol. & govt., 4103
travel & travelers. 366, 4277-78
Tennessee in literature
fiction, 1464, 1468, 1470, 1472, 1792
humor, 330-32
language (dialects, etc.), 330-32
short stories, 1684-88
Tennessee River and valley. 4006
Tennessee Valley Authority, 4006, 4794,
5892
Tennessee's Partner, 930, 937. 939
Tenney Committee. See California.
Senate. Fact-Finding Committee
on Un-American Activities in
California
Tennis, 4987, 4993, 5046-47, 5049-50,
5052
The Tent on the Beach, 668
The Tenth Muse Lately Sprung tip in
America, 8
Terence. Andria, about, 1864
Terrible Woman, 1762
Territorial expansion
overseas, 3428, 3527, 3531, 3540
The West, 3075, 3138, 3161, 3307,
3314, 3330, 3337, 3340, 3354,
3663, 3760, 4146, 4218
Terror and Decorum, 2190
Terry. John Skally, 1893
The Testament of Man, 1420
Texas, 3964, 4188, 4192-97
architecture, 5723
bibl., 4190
boundaries, 3355
descr. & trav., 3949
econ. condit., 4193
fiction, 1985, 1987
folklore, 5507, 5509, 5518, 5520-21,
5532
frontier life, 2733
German immigrants, 4478
govt., 6195
governors, 4194
guidebooks, 3917-23
hist., 2650, 2866, 3314, 3353-55,
3949, 3956, 4189. 4193-94, 4196
Mexican labor, 4476
naturalists, 4734
Texas — Continued
pictorial work, 4153
relations with France, 3577
relations with Gr. Brit., 3554, 3577
short stories, 1659
soc. condit., 4193
travel & travelers, 4365
U.S. Senators, 4194
Texas Folklore Society, about, 5518
Texas Sheepman, 2733
The Texas Review, 2572
A Texas Steer, 2348
Textile arts, 5595, 5600, 5604
Thacher, Thomas, 2493
Thanatopsis, 217
Thane, Eric. See Henry, Ralph
Chester
Tharp, Louise Hall, 5125
That Fortune, 1 1 42
That Girl from Memphis, 1763
That Reminds Me, 2598
That Spot, 1058
Thatcher , Virginia S., 4816
That's All that Matters, 1871
Thayer, Frank, 291 1
Thayer, Horace S., 5283
Thayer, James Bradley, 5387
Thayer, John E., ed., 55
Thayer, Sylvanus, about, 3656
Thayer, Vivian T., 5103, 5238, 5491
Thayer, William R., 689
Theater, 2743, 4897-4943, 4929, 4932,
4981
anthology, 4896
Colonial period, 3748
criticism, 4906—12
design, 5689
experimental plays, 2535
fiction, 1688
hist., 4899-4900, 4902-3, 4905, 4909,
4912, 4929-30, 4932, 4941
little theater movement, 1647, 1762,
4901
yearbooks, 4897, 4906
Calif., 2798, 4923
Colo., 4925
Nashville, 3765
New Orleans, 4922
New York (City), 2017, 4907-9,
4916, 4924, 4935, 4942-43
Ohio, 4121
Philadelphia, 5659
St. Louis, 4913
San Francisco, 4918, 4943
Toledo. Ohio, 4894
See also Drama; Musical comedy;
Opera
Theatre Arts, 4896
Theatre Guild, about, 4941
Theatrical dancing, 2472, 4971
Theatricals, 3736
Their Eyes Were Watching God, 1528
Their Fathers' God, 1723
Theologians, 5425-27, 5433
Theology, 3758, 5409, 5433
hist., 5436, 5438, 5489
in literature, 17, 21, 26, 32, 40, 59,
84, 230, 2483
See also Religious themes in lit-
erature
Theology — Continued
natural, 5338
study i; teaching, 5423-24
New England, 5428
See also Philosophy — and religion
A Theology for the Social Gospel, 5482
The Theory of American Literature,
2446
The Theory of Business Enterprise,
about, 2407
Theory of Flight, 2106
The Theory of Human Culture, 5351
Theory of Literature, 2529
The Theory of the Leisure Class, 4538
Theosophy, 5439
There Is Another Heaven, 1637
There Shall Be No Night, 1753
There Will Be Bread and Lore, 1295
These Also Believe, 5439
These Bars of Flesh, 1792
These Many Years, 2473
These Things Are Mine, 2744
These 13, 1379
They Also Ran, 2817
They Built the West, 4150
They Came Like Swallows, 203 1
They Gathered at the River, 5403
They Knew What They Wanted, 15 1 8,
2327, 2332
They Seek. 1 Country, 5466
They Stooped to Folly, 1 46 1
They Took to the Sea, 5021
Thies, Frieda C, comp., 1046
Third party movements. See Political
parties
The Third Person, 1012
Thirteen Americans, 542J
The Thirteen Colonies
census, 4398, 4400
commerce, 3193, 3243, 3262
culture, 3088, 3236
elections, 6401
German immigrants, 4477
govt., 3195, 3221, 6088
hist., 3087-88, 3141, 3!57, 3J71,
3176-77, 3179, 3188, 3190, 3202,
3221,3236
Scotch immigrants, 4491
Scotch-Irish immigrants, 4490
trade, 4398
Thirteen O'clock, 1224
_j 5,000 Days in Texas, 2866
This Body the Earth, 1474
This Green Thicket World, 1838
This House against This House, 2807
This Life I've Led, 4996
This Modern Poetry, 2413
This Music Crept by Me upon the
Waters, 1587
This Reckless Breed of Men, 4186
This Side of Paradise, 1426
This Simian World, 13 17-18
This Was Normalcy, 3500a
Thistlethwaite, Frank, 3146
Thomas, Allen C, 5467
Thomas, Augustus, 2337, 2347-48
Thomas, Benjamin Franklin, 6447
Thomas, Benjamin P., 3392, 3395, 3413
Thomas, Dorothy S., 4428, 4446, 4469
Thomas, Elbert D., 5427
about, 5427
INDEX / 1 183
Thomas, George Henry, about, 2614
Thomas, Harrison Cook, 6373
Thomas, Isaiah, 6447
about, 6447
Thomas, Jeannette (Bell), 3963, 5584
Thomas, Lewis V., 3513
Thomas, Milton Halsey, ed., 2823
Thomas, Norman M., 6433
Thomas, Robert B., 5541
Thomas, Theodore, about, 5652
Thomas, William I., 4495
Thomas Aquinas, about, 5289
T homas-T homas-Ancil-T homas , 1 293
Thomason, John W., 3703
Thompson, Alan Reynolds, 2425
Thompson, Benjamin, about, 4721, 4724
Thompson, Charles Manfred, 41 31
Thompson, Charles Seymour, 6472
Thompson, Daniel G. Brinton, 4043
Thompson, Daniel Pierce, 579-84
Thompson, Esther Katherine, 5823
Thompson, Harold W., 5548
Thompson, Holland, 4792
Thompson, John Eric S., 2994, 2997
Thompson, L. S., 4481
Thompson, Manley H., 5350
Thompson, Oscar, 5663
Thompson, Ralph, 2518
Thompson, Randall, 5670
Thompson, Robert L., 4680
Thompson, Ronald, 3065
Thompson, Stith, ed., 3021, 5518
Thompson, Warren S., 4399, 4594
Thompson, William Boyce, about, 2682
Thomson, Charles A. H., 3607
Thomson, Elizabeth H., 4759, 4821
Thomson, Virgil, 1771
Thoreau, Henry David, 585-608, 2290
about, 186, 280, 470, 606, 609-11,
619, 740, 2277, 2287, 2364, 2394,
2397, 2422, 2453, 2476, 2479, 2481
bib!., 589, 599
Thoreau, Sophia, ed., 594, 596
Thornbrough, Gayle, comp., 4125
Thorndike, Edward L., 4595
about, 51 16
Thorne, Florence Calvert, 6050
Thornthwaite, Charles Warren, 2937
Thornton, Harrison John, 3058, 5835
Thornton, Richard H., 2240
about, 2240
Thorp, Margaret (Farrand), 4950
Thorp, Willard, 2412
ed., 481, 492, 2355, 2460-61, 4083
Thorp, Willard Long, 6030
Thorpe, Francis Newton
comp., 6086
ed., 5130
Thorpe, Thomas Bangs, 612-13, 5542
Those Not Elect, 1 1 54
Those Were the Days, 5090
Thoughts on Death and Life, 5316
Thoughts without Words, 13 18
A Thousand-Mile Walk, to the Gulf,
1079
Thrasher, Frederic M., 4658
The Thread That Runs So True, 2166
The Three Black. Penny s, 1 507
Three Cities, 1 1 90
"The Three Colored Aces," 5025
Three Essays on America, 2380
Three Lives, 1 767
Three Men on a Horse, 2333
Three Men on Third, 5013
3 Smiths in the Wind, 2150
Three Soldiers, 1326
The Three Taverns, 171 4
Three Worlds, 2523
Threshold and Hearth, 1906
Throckmorton, Archibald H„ ed., 6275
Through the Brazilian Wilderness,
2794
Through the Eye of the Needle, 978
Thurber, James Grover, 1815-20, 2334
drawings, 181 5
Thursfield, Richard E., 5128
ed., 3059
Thurso's Landing, 1534
Thwaites, Reuben Gold, ed., 3299
Thwing, Charles F., 5188
Ticknor, George, about, 2462, 2534,
3776
Ticonderoga, Fort, fiction, 580-82
Tidwell, James Nathan, 2257
ed., 518
Tiffany, Herbert Thorndike, 6278
Tiger in the House, 1 828
Tiger Joy, 1224
Tiger-Lilies, 1046
Tilden, Freeman, 5866
Tilden, Samuel Jones, about, 3430
Tilden, William T., 5052
about, 5052
Tilghman, Benjamin Chew, about,
4786
Till Fish Us Do Part, 5070
Till the Day I Die, 2064
Tillich, Paul, about, 5433, 5436
Tilquin, Andre, 5393
Tilton, Eleanor M., ed., 377
Tilton, Theodore, about, 5476
Timber Line, 2878
Timberlake, Craig, 4943
Timberland Times, 2661
Time in the Rock., 1 1 66
The Time of Man, 1698
The Time of Your Life, 2110, 211 2,
2327, 2334, 2336
A Time to Act, 1585
Time to Come, 1959
Time Will Darken It, 2033
Times-Herald (Washington, D.C.),
about, 2862
The Times-Picayune (New Orleans),
about, 2871
Timoleon, 488
Timrod, Henry, 614-18
Tindall, George, 4072
Tinker, Edward Larocque, 748, 4101
Tinling, Marion, ed., 15
tr., 16
Tinware, 5726, 5787
The Titan, 1337
Titchener, Edward B., about, 5389
'Tite Poulette, 748
To a Waterfowl, 217
To Build a Eire, 1052, 1058
To Helen, 526
To the Finland Station, 2535
Tobacco industry, 5823, 5829
fiction, 2194
Tobacco Road, 1271, 2333
Tobey, James A., 4876
Tobias, Channing H., 5427
about, 5427
Tobin, James, 6010
Tocqueville, Alexis de, 4509-12
about, 4512
The Tocsin of Revolt, 2474
Todd, Charles B., 101
Todd, Mable (Loomis), ed., 839-41,
843, 847-49
Together, 956
Toilers of the Hills, 1421
Toledo, Ohio
entertainment, 4894
politics, 6434
Tolles, Frederick B., 3229
Tolley, Howard R., 5837
Tolman, Richard C, about, 4722
Tom Owen the Bee-Hunter, pseud.
See Thorpe, Thomas Bangs
Tom Sawyer, The Adventures of, 778-
83,811
Tomas, Vincent, ed., 5349
Tomorrow the New Moon, 1920
Tomorrow the World, 2334
Tompkins, Pauline, 3568
Toombs, Robert, about, 2613, 3405
Top, Franklin H., ed., 4877
Topical songs, 5552, 5556, 5564, 5575,
5584
Torbet, R. G., 5442-43
Tories, 3262, 3267, 3272, 4044
Tornadoes, 2948
Torpey, William G., 5421, 6193
Torrence, Frederic Ridgely, 1821-22
Torrey, Bradford, ed., 600
Torrey, John, about, 4760
Torrielli, Andrew J., 3779
Tort Claims Act of 1948 (Federal),
6313
Tortesa, the Usurer, 676, 2337, 2347
Tortilla Flat, 1780
Torts, 6230, 6279
Toscanini, Arturo, about, 2638, 5622
A Tour of the Prairies, 381
Tourtellot, Arthur Bernon, 3991, 6340
Toward a Better Life, 2387
Toward the Flame, 1 170
Toward the Gulf, 1 60 1
The Town, 1694
The Town down the River, 171 4
Town Hall Tonight, 4902
Town Meeting Country, 3965
The Town with the Funny Name, 2746
Towne, Charles Wayland, 5874
Towns. See Cities and towns
Towns and villages in literature
drama, 1865, 2223
editorials, sketches, etc., 701
essays, 418
fiction, 562, 572-73, 576, 959-63,
1178, 1225, 1299, 1301, 1453,
1560, 1568, 1694, 1705, 1786,
1789, 1830, 1964, 1997, 2005.
2033, 2070, 2129, 2163, 2208
hist. & crit., 2438
personal narrative, 1543
poetry, 1 599-1 601, 1727, 1731
short stories, 415-17, 562, 574-75,
1023-31, 1178-79, 1476, 1797
1 184 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Townsend, Harvey Gates, 5262
ed., 5298
Townsend of Lichfield, 1 262
Trachtenberg, Joshua, 4459
The Track of the Cat, 1957
Tracy's Tiger, 2120
Trade
Colonial period, 4069, 4398
Indian, 2993, 3009
Santa Fe, 4148
See also Commerce
Trade associations, 6008, 6019
Trade book publishing, 6437-38, 6441
Trade-marks, 4781
Trade regulation. See Commerce —
govt, regulation
Trade schools, 5210
Trade unions, 5899, 6032-42, 6049,
6054, 6192
See also names of individual organi-
zations, e.g., National Telegraph
Union
Trading posts, Indian, 3028
Traffic courts, 6307
Traffic regulation, 4655, 4659-60
Tragedy. See Drama
The Tragedy of "Superstition," 200
The Tragic Era, 3362
Tragic Ground, 1274
Trail Driving Days, 4158
The Trail -Maimers of the Middle Border,
898
Train, Arthur C, 6306
The Traitor, 2229
The Trampling Herd, 4158
Transatlantic Migration, 2508
Transcendentalism, 186-87, 230, 239,
280-82, 313, 585, 2279-80, 3134,
5256, 5259, 5263, 5301, 5305
anthology, 2346
essay, 2401
fiction, 333, 402-4
poetry, 619
anthology, 2328
Transcontinental routes, 2971
Transitions in American Literary His-
tory, 2401
Transport to Summer, 1784
Transportation, 41 13, 4221, 5920-43
automotive, 5942
govt, regulation, 5921, 5924
hist., 4227, 4281, 5877, 5920,
5923-24
in art, 5801
inventions, 4787
Mississippi Valley, 41 10
New England, 5933
N.C., 4090
Northwest, Old, 41 12
Northwest, Pacific, 4214
Ohio, 41 19
Rocky Mountains, 4174
Tex., 4194
The West, 4349
See also Travel & travelers
Trappers, folklore, 5523
Trappists, 2034
Traubel, Horace L., 658
ed., 627, 637
Traumatic surgery, 4873
Trautman, Ray, 6485
Travel and travelers, 4223-4389
bibl., 4229
fiction, 1656
horseback, 36-39
river, 4247, 4281
See also names of individual
rivers
stagecoach, 4227
See also subdivisions Guidebooks and
Travel & travelers under names of
places and regions, e.g., New Eng-
land — Guidebooks; Indiana —
travel & travelers
A Traveler from Altruria, 978
The Traveling Anecdote, 5509
Travelling with a Reformer, 798-99
Travels in Two Democracies, 2535
Treadmill to Oblivion, 4964
Treadwell, Sophie, 2332
Treason, 3148, 3273
American Revolution, 3264
Treasure-trove, folklore, 5531-32
The Treasurer's Report, and Other As-
pects of Community Singing, 1214
Treaties, 3522, 3526, 3540, 3612
Treatise on the Atonement, 5428, 5473
Treaty-making power, 3612
Treaty of Ghent, 3329, 3542
A Tree, a Rock,, a Cloud, 2024
A Tree Is a Tree, 4962
The Tree Named John, 5547
The Tree of Life, 1433
A Tree of Night, 1946
Trees, 2960, 2963-64
The Trees, 1 694
Trembling Prairie, 5351
Trent, William Peterfield, 393, 2393,
4501
ed., 2345, 2393, 4724,4786
Trent Collection, Duke University, 643
Trente ans, ou La vie d'un joueur, 2299
Trial by Time, 1410
Trial courts, 6285
See also Courts
Trial of a Poet, 2143
Trial practice, 6295-96
Trial procedure, 6282
Trial without fury, 2302
Trials, 6292, 6298, 6322
criminal, 6229
Triangle Fire case, 6229
Tribute to the Angels, 1323
Trifles, 2332
Trigg, Oscar L., 620
comp., 637
Trilling, Lionel, 792, 2406, 2412,
2519-20, 5197
A Trilogy of Desire, 1337
Trimble, Bruce R., 6259
Trinity Church, New York (City)
Choir, about, 5666
A Trip to Chinatown, 2306
The Triple Thinkers, 2539
Trippe, Juan, about, 5941
Tristram, 171 4
The Triumph, 3495
Triumph of Freedom, 3255
The Triumph of Infidelity, 120
The Triumph of Night, 1 851
The Triumph of the Egg, 1181
Triumphant Democracy, 3434
Trivial Breath, 1903
Trollope, Anthony, 4375-76
about, 4374
Trollope, Frances (Milton), 4304-06
about, 4303
Tropic of Cancer, 161 1
Tropic of Capricorn, 161 2
Trouble in July, 1273
Trouble on Lost Mountain, 920
The Trouble with Cops, 4642
The Troubled Air, 2158
Troupers of the Gold Coast, 2798
Trow, Martin A., 6455
Troy, N.Y., fiction, 11 59
Trucking industry, 5942
Trudeau, Livingston, about, 4868
True, Alfred Charles, 5836
True, Frederick W., ed., 4774
True Account of America for the In-
formation and Help of Peasant and
Commoner, 4485
Truesdell, Leon E., 4474
Truman, Harry S., 3500b, 5189
about, 3489
Truman, Stanley R., 4817
Trumbull, J. H.', ed., 89
Trumbull, John (1750-1831), 165-67
about, 167, 2365
Trumbull, John (1756-1843), 5775
about, 5775
Trumbull County, Ohio, 3872
Trumpets of Jubilee, 2797
Trumps, 2278
Trust, 1058
Trust companies, 5998, 6006
Trusts, industrial, 3121, 6008, 6026
govt, control, 6004
The Trusty Knaves, 1 687
Truxal, Andrew G., 4572
Tryon, Rolla Milton, 5919
Tryon, Warren S., ed., 4235
Tsanoff, R. A., 5252
Tuberculosis, control, 4868, 4881
Tucker, Glenn, 3037
Tucker, Samuel M., ed., 909
Tuckerman, Bayard, ed., 2691
Tuckerman, Henry T., 4230
Tucson, Ariz., 4176, 4187
Tufts, James H., 5254, 5273, 5289
Tufts, MatildeC, 5289
Tugwell, Rexford Guy, 2407, 3498
ed., 5827
about, 5888
Tulips and Chimneys, 1309, 1313
Tulloch, Avis, sculptures, 2994
Tulsa, Okla.
guidebook, 3909
hist., 41 71
The Tumult and the Shouting, 4994
Tuna industry, fiction, 2746
Tunnard, Christopher, 4609
Tunney, Gene, 3488, 5031
about, 4987, 5031
Turbulent Era, 3545
Turkey, relations with, 3513, 3545
The Turmoil, 1806
The Turn of the Screw, 1007, 1012
Turn West, Turn East, 817, 1017
Turnbull, Archibald D., 3676, 4802
Turnbull, George S., 2863
Turner, Arlin, 752
INDEX
1 185
Turner, Frederick Jackson, 3083, 3147,
3356-57. 3784
about, 2407, 3058, 3137, 3147, 4540,
5222
Turner, Julius, 6398
Turner, Lorenzo Dow, 2271
Turner, Nat, about, 5502
Turner, Scott, about, 4803
The Turning Wheel, 5940
A Turning Wind, 2106
Turns and Movies, 1 1 66
Turpie, Mary C, 5757
comp., 5613
Tuskegee Institute, Tuskegee, Ala., 4450
Tutt, Ephraim, about, 6306
Twain, Mark, 768-812, 2290, 2367
about, 445, 542, 745, 813-20, 926,
982, 1017, 1126, 2380, 2416-17,
2468, 2474, 2517, 2616
'Twas All for the Best, 2309
Tweed (William Marcy) Ring, 6387
Twelve Men, 1342
Twelve Men in a Box, 6295
The Twenties, 2440
Twentieth Century Authors, 2455
Twentieth Century Fund. Committee
on Cartels and Monopoly, 6026
Twentieth Century Fund. Housing
Committee, 4610, 5896-97, 6040
Twentieth-Century Literature in Amer-
ica, 2356-62
XXIV Elegies, 1433
27 Wagons Full of Cotton, 2220
20,000 Leagues under the Sea; or, David
Copperfield, 1215
Twice-Told Tales, 334-37
about, 333, 538
Twichell, Joseph H., ed., 90
The Twin Adventures, 2119
Twins of Genius, 745
Twiss, Benjamin R., 6101
Two Blades of Grass, 5857
Two Gentlemen in Bonds, 1677
Two Lives, 1556
Two Minutes Till Midnight, 3621
Two Old Colonial Places, 1 103-4
Two on an Island, 1689
Two on the Aisle, 4909
Two Reels and a Cranky, 4961
Two Slatterns and a King, 1608
The Two Sons-in-Law, 2302
Two-thirds of a Nation, 4608
Two Years before the Mast, 275, 479
Tyler, Alice (Felt), 4522
Tyler, John, about, 3323-24, 3540
Tyler, Lyon Gardiner, ed., 71, 3218
Tyler, Moses Coit, 2521-22, 3263
about, 2521
Tyler, Royall, 168-70, 2312, 2337, 2347
Type and type-founding, 6442, 6448,
6456, 6459
Typee, 471-75
Types of Philosophy, 53 10
Typhus, 2843
The Tyranny of Sex, 1 573
U.S.A., 1325, 1328
U.S.A., the Permanent Revolution, 4503
U.S. 1, 2106
U.S. One, Maine to Florida, 3790
U.S.S.R. See Russia
Ukrainians, 4492
Ullman, Edward L., 2937
Ulman, Joseph N., 6291
Ulman, Lloyd, 6041
Ulrich, Carolyn F., 2914
Ulriksson, Vidkunn, 4681
Umbra, 1666
Unc' Edinburg's Drowndin', 1 100-2
Uncle Ethan Ripley, 893
Uncle Moses, 1 192
Uncle Remus. See Harris, Joel
Chandler
Uncle Sam's Acres, 5809
Uncle Sam's Stepchildren, 3034
Uncle Sam's Uncle Josh, 545
Uncle Tom's Cabin, 563-67, 749-50,
about, 562
2347
Uncle Tom's Children, 2234
The Undeclared War, 3538
Under Duk,e and King, 4044
Under the Bridge, 2680
Under the Lion's Paw, 893
Undercliff, 1352
Underground River, 2123
Underhill, Ruth Murray, 2986, 3013
Understanding the American past, 3062
Undertakers and undertaking, 4527
Underworld, 2586, 4652
language (slang, etc.), 2274
Unemployment, 3440, 6048
Unemployment insurance. See Social
security
Unfinished Cathedral, 1 795
Unger, Leonard, ed., 1370
Union List of Serials, 2915
A Union Officer in the Reconstruction,
277
Union Pacific Railroad, about, 5927,
5932
Union Portraits, 261 4
Union reporters, 2851
Unions, labor. See Trade unions
Unit instruction in education, 5158
Unitarianism, 230, 239, 280, 402, 900,
2279, 5404, 5428, 5442, 5470
hist., 5435, 5471-72
Salem, Mass., 2600
United Brethren, 4480
United House of Prayer of All People,
about, 5498
United Nations, 3557, 3635
special agencies, 3633
U.S. particiaption, 3619, 3633
The United Netherlands, History of,
2293
United Packinghouse Workers of Amer-
ica, about, 6055
United Presbyterian Church, 5442, 5466
United Press, about, 2860, 2890
United Service Organizations for Na-
tional Defense, theater production,
4919
United States. For official agencies of
the U.S. government, see the name
of the agency, e.g., Congress; Dept.
of State
United States Commission on Organi-
zation of the Executive Branch of
the Government, 5099
United States Exploring Expedition
(1838-42), about, 4749
United States Steel, 5918
Unity School of Christianity, 5439
Universalism, 5428
bibl., 5473
Universalist Church of America, 5442,
Universities. See Colleges and uni-
versities
The University of Kansas City Review,
2573
University Players, 4920
University presses. See Printing — uni-
ersity presses
Unknown Soldier (World War I),
about, 4533
Unpartisan Review, 689
Untermeyer, Louis, 1584
ed., 221, 290, 443, 673, 845, 2363
Unto Such Glory, 1 475
Untriangulated Stars, 1 7 1 6
The Untried Years, 1020
The Unvanquished (Fast), 1976
The Unvanquished (Faulkner), 1389
Up from Methodism, 2587
Up from Slavery, 4449
Up Front, 2735
UpStream, 1572, 1575
Up the Coolly, 893
Updegraff, Clarence M., 6058
Updike, Daniel Berkeley, about, 6459
Updyke, Frank A., 3542
Upper class, 3139, 3434, 4524, 4538,
6063, 6070
New England, 3279
New York (State), 6374
Southern States, 3766
The Thirteen Colonies, 3236
Va., 3234, 3749
Uppsala. Universitet. Amerikanska
Seminariet, 2364-68
The Uprooted, 441 1
Upstage, 4909
Upton, Emory, 3651
Upton, William Treat, 5614
ed., 5610
Urban, W.M., 5252
Urban blight, redevelopment, etc. See
Cities and towns — planning;
Housing
Urban communities. See Cities and
towns; Communities, urban
Urban folklore, 5510-11, 5514
New York (City), 5522
Urban government. See Local govern-
ment
Urban Land Institute. Central Busi-
ness District Council, 4603
Urbana, Ohio, 3871
Urology, 4832
Useful arts. See Decorative arts; Arts
and crafts
Ushant, 1 1 65
The Usurper, 23 1 1
Utah, 4183
fiction, 1420, 1424
govt., 6195
Il86 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Utah — Continued
.guidebooks, 3914-15
hist., 2161, 3956, 3961, 4174, 4183,
4189
Indians, 3023
Mormons, 5465
Utah Humanities Review, 2575
Ute Indians, 3041, 4174
Utlcy, George Burwell, 6486
Utopian themes, fiction, 726, 728-31,
956, 978, 2019
Utopias (settlements), 4525
See also Brook Farm; Fruitlands;
Harmony Society
Utter, William T., 3058, 4121
V -Letter, 2 141
Vail,R. W. G., 161
Vaillant, George C., 2997
Valente. John, 632
Valien, Bonita, 4441
Vallandigham, Clement, 3149
The Valley Below, 2724
Valley Forge, drama, 1 1 74
The Valley Nis, 526
The Valley of Decision, 1846
Value, theory of, 5252, 5334
Van Amringe, John Howard, about,
5197
Vance, Rupert B., 3785, 4068, 4084,
4401
Van den Bark, Melvin, 2272
Vandenberg, Arthur H., 3548
Vanderbilt, Arthur T., 6270
ed., 6307
Vanderbilt, Cornelius, about, 5054,
5880,5882,5935
Vanderpoel, Emily (Noyes), 5793
Van Dersal, William R., 5818
Van Deusen, Glyndon G., 2883, 3343-
44
Van Devander, Charles W., 6390
Van Doren, Carl, 127, 133, 480, 796,
827, 834, 905, 1904, 2523-24,
3185, 3187, 3264, 6088
ed., 129, 2393
Van Doren, Charles, comp., 3152
Van Doren, Mark, 363, 641, 660, 849,
1823-27
ed., 13, 57, 176, 358, 4249-50
Van Druten, John, 2334-36
Van Dyke. Henry, 5095-96
Van Dyke, T. S., 5091
Van Every, Edward, 5032
Van Gogh. See Gogh, Vincent van
Vanguards of the Frontier, 4155-56
The Vanishing Virginian, 8241
Van Kirk, Walter M., 5496
Van Metre, Thurman W., 5924, 5948
Van Nostrand (D.) Company, about,
6453
Van Nostrand, Jeanne Skinner, 4202
Van Riper, Paul P., 6174
Van Santvoord, George, ed., 924
Van Tyne, Claude H., 3265-67
about, 3058
Van Vechten, Carl, 1828-33, 1904,
4972, 5678
Van Vechten, Carl — Continued
ed., 1771
about, 1835
bibl., 1834
Vanzetti, Bartolomeo
drama, 1173
fiction, 1980
The Varieties of Religious Experience,
5431
Varmints, 1684
Vassar College, about, 5670
Vaudeville, 4892, 4973-76
hist., 4974
Vaudeville for a Princess, 2138
Vaughan, Floyd L., 4781
Veblen, Thorstcin, 5190
about, 2407, 4538, 4540, 4545, 5888,
6424
Vegetation, 2956-57, 2959, 2966, 2969,
5816
Vein of Iron, 1460-61
The Venetian Glass Nephew, 1904
Venezuela, fiction, 1792
Ventura County, Calif., 3957
A Venture in Remembrance, 2698
Verbrugghen, Henri, about, 5654
Veritism, 890
Vermilion, Ohio, 2958
Vermont, 4010, 4033
boundary, 4027
econ. condit., 4031
farm life, 2742
fiction, 579-84, 141 1, 1414-15, 1417,
1635
folksongs & ballads, 5574
guidebook, 3797
hist., 1419, 4033
poetry, 1451-52
soc. life & cust., 4031
travel & travelers, 4290
Vermont. University, 5223
Versailles Treaty, 31 11, 3471, 3541
Verse, light, 368, 878-80, 1629-34,
1651-52, 1859, 1863
Verse, vernacular, 753-55, 856-59, 861,
878-80, 933, 941-44, 1038, 1126-
31, 1133-35
See also Poetry — humorous
Verse drama, 144-45, 198, 200-1, 205,
1069-70, 1172, 1174, 1357, 1359-
60, 1535, 1585, 1587, 1608, 1664,
2098, 2101, 2134-35
criticism, 1 175
Versification, theory, 216, 520, 538,
614, 618, 1038, 1044-46
Versus, 1633
Very, Jones, 280, 2544
Vespucci, Amerigo, about, 3172
Vestal, Stanley, pseud., 2525, 2831-33,
3964, 4001, 4175, 4190
Veterans, 3652
organizations, 3644-45
World War II, 2736
Vicissitudes Exemplified , 2805
Vickery, Olga W., ed., 1399
Victor Talking Machine Company,
about, 5618
Victorian Knight-Errant , 449
A Victorian Village, 2781
The Victory at Sea, 3J16
Victory at Sea (music), about, 5685
Vidal, Gore, 2180-88
about, 2371
Vidor, King W., 4962
about, 4962
Viereck, Peter, 2189-92, 2363
A View from the Bridge, 2049
Vigilance Committees, 6220
Vignettes of Manhattan, 2466
Village Daybook^, 1965
Village Year, 1959
Villages
immigrant, 4406
Middle West, 4109, 4197
Villains Galore, 2916
Villard, Oswald Garrison, 2849, 3414
Villon, Francois, fiction, 2413
Vincent, Howard P., 481
ed., 491
Vincent, J. M., 4540
Vinde, Victor, 4232
A Vindication of the Government of
New England Churches, 94-95
Vines, Howell Hubert, 1836-38
Vineyard, Catherine Marshall, 5507
Viniculture, Calif., 4494
Vinson, Fred M., about, 6262, 6256
Vinton, Stallo, 4148
The Violent Wedding, 201 1
Virgin Islands, 4218
Virgin Land, 3759
Virgin Spain, 1445
Virginia, 3963, 4079, 4085-88
architecture, 5706
biog. (collected), 3749
caves, 2946
culture, 3233-34
descr., 149-53
econ. condit., 4085
education, 5122
folklore, 5529
guidebooks, 3827-29
hist., 12-16, 66-68, 70-71, 149-53,
245, 3218, 3233-34, 3271, 3295,
3977. 4073
pictorial works, 4086
in literature
drama, 1477
editorials, sketches, etc., 192-93,
1099, 1103-4, 1106, 1267
fiction, 226-29, 245-51, 405-8,
516, 1099, 1105-6, 1261,
1460-62, 1466, 1469
short stories, 405-8, 1099-1102,
1 106
intellectual life, 3749
language (dialects, etc.), 2255-56
mounds, 2996
plantation life, 4517
politics, 2740
soc. life & cust., 2603, 2841, 3749,
4086-87, 4517
travel & travelers, 12-13, 66-68, 70-
71, 366, 4269, 4279, 4283, 4310
Virginia University, 5122, 6466
Virginia City, Nev., 4184-85, 5630
The Virginia Comedians, 246
The Virginia Gazette, about, 2854
The Virginia Quarterly Renew, 2574
The Virginian, 1145-48, 2316
The Virginians, 405
Visher, Stephen S., 2952, 4725
INDEX / 1 187
The Vision, 121
The Vision of Columbus, 104
The Vision of Sir Launfal, 455
Visson, Andre, 3772
Vistas of New York., 2466
Vitagraph, 4961
Vital statistics, 4402
See also Census
Vocational education, 5105, 521 1, 5246
colleges & universities, 5179
Federal participation, 521 1
foreign countries, 521 1
secondary, 5156, 521 1
Vogt, P. L., 4594
Voice in the West, 2867
The Voice of Bugle Ann, 1 54 1
The Voice of the City, 1 1 16-1 8
The Voice of the Desert, 2453
The Voice of the People, 1 461
The Voice of the Street, 1656
The Voice of the Turtle, 2334
Voices of Freedom, 664
Vollmer, August, 4659
Vollmer, Lula, 2337
Voltaire, about, 2770
A Volunteer's Adventures, 277, 3693
Von Abele, Rudolph R., 3415
Von Stroheim, Erich, about, 4960
Voorhies, Stephen J., illus., 6324
Voorhis, Horace Jeremiah ("Jerry"),
6165
Vosburgh, Walter S., 5055
Voss, Joseph Ellis, 4596
Voters and voting, 6334, 6336, 6414,
6418-20, 6422
registration, 6403—4
Voting maps, congressional, 2974
A Voyage to Pagany, 1 872
A Voyage to Purilia, 1688
Voyages, small-boat, 5021
Voyageurs. See Boatmen, French-
Canadian
W
W,i3i3
Wabash River and valley, 3995
Wade, John Donald, 4068
Wade, Mason, 3069
Wadsworth, Jeremiah, about, 6016
Wagenknecht, Edward Charles, 427,
2526
Wager, Paul W., ed., 6217
Wages, 4310, 6040, 6048
Waggoner, Hyatt H., 359, 364, 2527
Wagner, Fred J., 5007
Wagner Act, 6053
The Wagnerian Romances, about, 1278
Wah 'kon-tah, i"]i<)
Wahlke, John C, ed., 3128-29
Waite, John Barker, 6308
Waite, Morrison R., about, 6096, 6259
Waiting for Lefty, 2064, 2327
Wake Island, 4218
Wake Island (poetry), 2106
Wa\e Up the Echoes, 4984
The Waging, 2103-4
Walcott, Charles Doolittle, about, 4775
Walcott, Joe, about, 5025
Wald, Lillian D., 4614
about, 4854
Walden, 589-93, 606
WaldenPond, 585
Walker, Charles R., 6055
Walker, Franklin D., 4202
Walker, Harvey, 6166
Walker, John, 5758
Walker, Mabel L., 4612
Walker, "Singin' Billy," 5577
A Walter in the City, 2704
Wall, Joseph Frazier, 2892
Wall, Norman J., 5834
The Wall, 1992
Wall decoration, 5726, 5730
Wall Smacker, 5006
Wallace, Anthony F. C, 2834-35
Wallace, Bigfoot, about, 283 1
Wallace, David Duncan, 4092
Wallace, DeWitt, about, 2920
Wallace, Edward S., 3659
Wallace, Ernest, 3014
Wallace, Francis, 5044
Wallace, Paul A. W., 3230-31
Wallace, Willard M., 3683
Wallace, Idaho, 4176
Wallack, Lester, 2301
Waller, George M., ed., 3130-31
Waller, Judith C, 4698
The Wallet of Time, 4931
Wallin, John E. Wallace, 5207
Wallis, Charles L., 1063, 4527
The Walls Do Not Fall, 1322
Walpole, Horace, 6464
Walser, Richard G., ed., 1479, 1900
Walsh, William F., 6279
Walter, Eugene, 2347
Walters, Raymond, 3310, 5667
Wanamaker, John, about, 5957
Wann, Louis, ed., 2276
Wansey, Henry, 4234
The Want of a History of the Southern
People, 1 1 03-4
War, 3140, 3524
econ. aspects, 5879, 5889
in art, 5807
moral aspects, 234
satire, 1608
See also Indians, American — wars;
Military history; and specific wars,
e.g., Civil War
War correspondents. See Reporters
and reporting
War Dept., 3697
about, 3376, 3702, 3726
War Dept. General Staff, about, 3653
War Is Kind, $31,835
War of 1812,3687-88, 4038
causes, 3306, 3553
diplomatic hist., 3189, 3306, 3542
naval operations, 3688
public opinion, 3305-6
War of the Classes, 1048
The War of the Rebellion: A Compila-
tion of the Official Records, 3697
War with France (1798-1800), 3685-
86
War with Mexico, 3331, 3333, 3340,
.3351.3355. 3554>3689
diplomatic hist., 3586
War with Mexico — Continued
personal narratives, 3696
sources, 3349
The War Years, 3393, 3395
Warbasse, James P., 5964
Ward, Alfred Dudley, 5899
ed., 5899
Ward, Archie, 5045
Ward, Artemus, pseud. See Browne,
Charles Farrar
Ward, Christopher, 3683
Ward, Lester F., about, 4537, 4540,
4542
Ward, Nathaniel, 75-78
about, 3198
Ward, R. M., 5529
Ward, Robert DeCourcy, 2953
Ward, Theodora (Van Wagenen), ed.,
850
A Ward of Colonel Starbottle's, 937
Ware, Henry, about, 5472
Ware, Norman J., 6054
Warfel, Harry R., 2528, 5127
ed., 2369
Warne, Colston Estey, ed., 3132-33
Warner, Charles Dudley, 775-77, 1 136—
44
ed., 2277
about, 2466
Warner, Lucien C, about, 4735
Warner, Sam Bass, 6292
Warner, William Lloyd, 4435, 4438,
4557,5146,6029
Warpath, 2831
Warren, Austin, 342, 355, 2529, 5319
Warren, Charles, 6089, 6235-36, 6260
Warren, Earl, 6238
Warren, Helen Ann, 4748
Warren, Joseph, about, 3245
Warren, Mercy (Otis), 2347
Warren, Robert Penn, 2193-2201, 2372,
2378
about, 1809, 2499
Warren, Sidney, 4214
Warren, Stanley, 5208
Warren, Ohio, 3872
The Warrens of Virginia, 2313
Wars I Have Seen, 1769
The Wars of Love, 2132
Warships, 3666, 3708, 3716
The Warwick. Woodlands, 5076, 5080
Washburn, Carleton W., 5234
Washburn, Charles, 2836
Washburn, Frank S., about, 4735
Washburn, Frederic A., 4853
Washington, Booker T., 4449
about, 4449-50, 51 16
Washington, Chester L., 5030
Washington, George, 3268, 3271, 4254
about, 171-76, 381, 1873, 3269-71,
3680,4533
fiction, 1976
port.. 5769
sculpture, 5737
Washington (State), 4215-17
descr., 5070
guidebook, 3939
officials (State), 4215
Orientals, 4468
Puyallup Indians, 3041
resources, 4212
Il88 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Washington (State) Legislature. Joint
Fact-Finding Committee on Un-
American Activities, about, 6116
Washington (State) University. Com-
mittee on Tenure and Academic
Freedom, about, 61 16
Washington, D.C., 4063-65, 6215
essays, 1002-3
fiction, 689-90, 722, 1156, 1332,
2278
guidebook, 3826
historic houses, etc., 4063
hist., 3826, 4063-64, 4344
pol. &govt., 4065, 6215
public life, 2861
reporters & reporting, 2861, 2930
soc. life & cust., 2668-69, 3320> 33^2,
3395,4065,4279,4283
Washington, D.C., Navy Yard, hist.,
3670
Washington, Ga., 3842
The Washington Correspondents, 2861
Washington Herald, about, 2862
Washington Post, about, 2862
Washington Square, 1008, 1014
Washington Times-Herald, about, 2862
Washington University (St. Louis),
5187
The Waste Land, 1357, 1359
about, 1367
The Watch Diggers, 2212
Watch on the Rhine, 1989, 2334, 2336
Water conservation, 5808, 5858
Water power, Rochester, N.Y., 4050,
4052
Water resources
Great Plains, 4164
Middle West, 41 13
Mo., 4108
N. Mex., 4198
Water-supply problem (city), 4797
Waterman, Thomas Tileston, 5725
Waterman, Willoughby Cyrus, 4597
Waters, Edward N., 5615, 5681
ed., 5560
Waters, Frank, 4017
The Waters of Siloe, 2040
Waterways, inland, 3786, 4312, 5018,
5920, 5923
See also Canals; Great Lakes; Rivers
Watkins, Floyd C, 1901
ed., 2320
Watkins, Myron W., 6026
Watson, Elmo Scott, 2864
Watson, Forbes, 5741
Watson, Frank Dekker, 4626
Watson, John Broadus, 5393
about, 5389
Watson, Thomas E., about, 3451
Wattenberg, William W., 4573
Watterson, Henry, 2892
about, 2892
Watts, Harold H., 1674
Waud, Alfred R., about, 5806
Waugh, Coulton, 2865
The Wave, 1745
Waverly, Md., 2781
Way, Frederick, 3992
Way Down East, 561
The Way of the Churches of Christ
in New England, 19
The Way of the South, 4079
The Way West, 1490
Wayfaring Stranger, 5553
Wayne, Anthony, about, 3684
The Wayward Bus, 1778
The Wayward Press, 2904
The Wayward Pressman, 2904
We Accept with Pleasure, 2415
We Always Lie to Strangers, 5544
We Are Betrayed, 1423
We Are Not Divided, 5487
We Called It Culture, 4893
We Speak, for Ourselves, 3145
We Went T hataway , 2153
We Were New England, 4029
We Who Built America, 4417
Wealth, 292
Wealth and Commonwealth, 4044
Weapons, 3664, 371 1
The Weary Blues, 1521
Weather, 2950
See also Climate
Weather Bureau, 2953
about, 2951-52, 4764
Weather lore
Ozark Mountains, 5544
Southwest, 5509
Weaver, James Baird, about, 3433
Weaver, John E., 2966
Weaver, Raymond M., 474, 566
ed., 487, 489
Weaver, Robert C, 4451
Weaver, Samuel P., 6103
Weaver, William Wallace, 4627
The Web and the Rock, 1890-91
Webb, Walter Prescott, 4164
Weber, Brom, 1306
ed., 332, 1305
Weber, Carl J., comp., 1023
Weber, Clara C, comp., 1023
Weber, Gustavus A., 4764, 4766-67,
4769-72
Webster, Clarence M., 3965
Webster, Daniel, 3336
about, 2674, 3336, 4034
fiction, 1222
Webster, Noah, 2236, 5127
about, 2277, 2364, 5121, 5127
Webster's New International Dic-
tionary of the English Language,
2236, 2238
Wecter, Dixon, 786, 791, 820, 3098,
3652, 3662, 4533-34
ed., 801-2, 2460-61
The Wedge, 1878
A Week on the Concord and Merri-
mack Rivers, 587-88, 606
Weeks, Edward A., 2837-38
about, 2838, 2922
Weeks, Lyman Horace, 6458
Weeks, Mary Elvira, 4731
Weems, Mason Locke, 171-77
bibl., 177
Wehle, Harry B., 5759, 5804
Weidner, Edward W., 6196
Weinberg, Albert K., 3760
Weiner, Edward, 2894
Weingarten, Joseph A., 2272
Weinlick, J. R., 5442
Weinstein, J. J., 4457
Weisberger, Bernard A., 2851, 5403
Weisenburger, Francis P., 4120-21
Weiser, Conrad, about, 3230
Weisgall, H. D., 4458
Weiss, Paul, 5379-82
ed., 5346
about, 5378
Weitenkampf, Frank, 2859, 5782
Weitling, Wilhelm, about, 4481
Welch, William Henry, about, 4722,
4813, 4821, 4823, 4829, 4831,
4834, 4845
Weld, Isaac, 4269-70
about, 4269
Weld, Ralph Foster, 4046
Weld, Theodore Dwight, 3360
about, 3360, 3413
1^/^^,1648
Welker, Robert Henry, 4741
The Well Wrought Urn, 2379
Wellek, Rene, 2529, 3739
Welles, Edgar T., ed., 3416
Welles, Gideon, 3416
about, 3416
Welles, Sumner, 3549, 4513
ed., 3501
Wellesley College, 2766
Wellman, Paul I., 4158
Wells, Benjamin W., ed., 2345
Wells, Carolyn, comp., 633
Wells, Frederic L., comp., 4838
Wells, H. G., about, 4225
Wells, Henry W., 1628, 2530
Wells, Horace L., 4715
Wells, Ronald Vale, 5263
Welty, Eudora, 2202-9
about, 1809, 2372
Wendell, Barrett, about, 2694
Wendell, Mitchell, 6206, 6293
Wenger, J. C, 5442
Went, Stanley, ed., 3040
Wentworth, Edward Norris, 5874
Wentworth, Harold, 2241
Wentz, Abdel R., 5461
Werner, Morris R., 4977
Wertenbaker, Green Peyton, 4191
Wertenbaker, Thomas Jefferson, 3087,
3232-35, 3748, 4088, 5204
Wescott, Glenway, 1839-41
Wesley, Charles, about, 5463
Wesley, Edgar B., 3050, 4142
Wesley, John, about, 5463
West, Benjamin, 144
about, 5749
West, E., 5442
West, James, pseud. See Withers,
Carl
West, Jessamyn, 2210-14
West, Nathanael, 1842-44
West, Ray Benedict, 2362, 5465
ed., 2531, 4176
West, RichardS., Jr., 3416
West, Victor J., 6407
The West, 2610, 3759, 3783, 3948,
3964, 4145-50, 4860
biog. (collected), 4175
descr. & trav., 4148
disc. & explor., 2971, 3335, 3345
econ. condit., 4149
folklore, 5518, 5526, 5591
folksongs & ballads, 5560, 5569
geology, 2935
INDEX / 1 189
The West — Continued
guidebook, 3789
hist., 2867, 3048, 3074, 3078, 3105,
3137. 3M7. 3151. 3964* 3967,
4001, 4017, 4146, 4148-58, 4160,
4164, 4174, 4176-77. 4179, 4186
pictorial works, 4151-53, 4158,
5770, 5777, 5802, 5806
18th cent., 3170, 3237, 3271,
3307
19th cent., 3331, 3342-44. 3356
language (dialects, etc.), 2253
law, 6220
physiography, 2935
soc. life & cust., 4097
theater, 4943
travel & travelers
18th cent., 3170, 4235
19th cent., 365-67, 391, 984,
3069, 3298, 3348, 4223, 4235,
4277-78, 4281, 4315, 4320,
4344, 4372, 4382-83, 4386-
87
The West in literature, 768, 772-74,
1064-65, 1068, 2831, 3759
descr., 365-67, 1072-77, 1079-83,
2153
drama, 1069-70
fiction, 312, 683-86, 984-85, 1145-
48, 1239, 1420-24, 1484-90, 1644,
1646, 1763, 1954-57, 2161-62,
2415
poetry, 926, 933-34, 941-44, 1064,
1066-67, 1644-45
short stories, 687, 926-32, 937, 939-
40,1145
West Indies, 3168
in literature, 945-52
The West in American History, 3078
West of Midnight, 1970
West Point, 3656
West-Running Brook., 1452
West Virginia, 4089
fiction, 1225
folksongs & ballads, 5572
guidebook, 3830
hist., 4089
legislators, 4089
Westchester County, N.Y., soc. condit.,
4577
Westcott, Minita, ed., 6019
Westerfield, Bradford, 3616
Westerfield, Ray Bert, 5974
Westering, 14 10
Western dialect in literature, 683-87,
933-34. 941744
Western Federation of Miners, about,
6045
The Western Humanities Review, 2575
Western Lands and the American Revo-
lution, 3237
Western Literary Institute and College
of Professional Teachers, about,
5121
Western Reserve, hist., 4030, 41 18
The Western Review, 2576
Western Star, 1222
Westerns (novels), 1314, 1484-86,
1686-87
Westin.A. F., 6128
Westinghouse, George, about, 4790
Westmeyer, Russell E., 5925
The Westover Manuscripts, 1 3
Westward Ho!, 516
Wetmore, Alexander
ed., 2962
about, 4775
Wetmore, Claude H., 6430
Wetmore, Elizabeth (Bisland), 951-53
Weyl, Nathaniel, 3148-49
Whaling, 5871
fiction, 470, 481-83, 491
Wharton, Charles, about, 5477
Wharton, Edith, 1845-55
about, 1856, 2537
Wharton School of Finance and Com-
merce, about, 6017
What Are Years, 1 62 1
What Dooley Says, 866
What Is American Literature? , 2523
What Is Humanism? , 51 15
What Man Can Make of Man, 5314
What Price Glory?, 2332
What's O'clock, 1583-84
Wheat, Carl I., 2641
Wheat, 3944, 4141-42, 4165, 5830
fiction, 1093-95
Wheeler, A. C, 2305
Wheeler, Anne Boiling, 5763
Wheeler, Harold Alden, about, 4803
Wheeler, Joseph Towne, 6448
Wheeler, Lynde Phelps, 4751
Wheelock, John Hall, 1857-58
ed., 2350
Wheelwright, Philip, 1367
Whelpton, Pascal K., 4399, 4402
When Johnny Comes Marching Home,
3652
When Lilacs Last in the Door-Yard
Bloom' d, 623
When the Frost Is on the Punkin , 11 26
When the Tree Flowered, 1 646
When the War Ends, 6392
When the Whippoorwill, 1684
When This You See Remember Me,
1773
Where Main Street Meets the River,
2632
Where the Cross Is Made, 1648
Where the Word Ends, 5679
Whetstone, Pete, 5542
Whicher, George F., 592, 2496
ed., 3107-36
Whicher, Stephen E., 306
A Whig Embattled, 3324
Whig Party, 3141, 3255, 3324, 3326,
3333. 3344, 6075, 6351
New York (State), 2691, 6374
Whigs (Revolution), 2691
poetry, 165, 167
New York (State), 4044
Whipple, George Chandler, 4879
Whipple, Mary Anne, ed., 3002
Whiskey rebellion (1794), 3280
Whistler, James McNeill, about, 2616,
5776
Whitaker, Arthur P., 3514-15, 3579
Whitaker, Joe Russell, 5900
White, Andred D., about, 5 191
White, Andrew S., about, 3761
White, B. F., 5577
White, Charles Langdon, 2940
White, David Manning, ed., 6443
White, Donald J., 5872
White, Edward A., 3761
White, Edward Douglas, about, 6245
White. Elizabeth Brett, 3775
White, Elwyn Brooks, 1816, 1859-63
ed., 2370
White, Frederic R., 730
White, John, about, 3198
White, John M., 5849
White, Katherine S., ed., 2370
White, Leonard D., 6175-79
White, Llewellyn, 4687
White, Morton G., 4545, 5291, 5295
White, Newman I., 5564
White, Theodore H., ed., 3723
White, Walter Francis, 2839—40
about, 2840
White, William, Bp., 5457
White, William Alanson, 4840
about, 4840
White, William Allen, 2887, 2893, 3481
about, 2893
White, William Carter, 5653
White, William Chapman, 3966
White April, 2780
White Buildings, 1304
White Bull (Sioux chief), about, 2831
White civilization
and Negroes in literature, 2631
and the American Indians, 2729,
2835, 3082, 3156, 3161, 3171,
3180, 3229-30
White Collar, 4553
White Dresses, 1475, 2332
The White Gate, 1284
White Hopes and Other Tigers, 4991
White House Office, about, 6144
White-Jacket, 274, 479-80
White Knife Shoshoni Indians, 3041
White Mule, 1874-75, 1882
The White Oxen, 2387
The White Slave & Other Plays, 2316
White spirituals, 5554-55, 5558
Southern States, 5577
White-field, George, about, 5396, 5480
Whitehead, Alfred N., 5129, 5384
about, 5378, 5383, 5385
Whitehall, Walter Muir, 6475
Whiteman, Paul, 5678
Whiting, B. J., 2256
Whitley, William T., 5774
Whitlock, Brand, 6434
about, 6434
Whitman, Walt, 619-46, 2290, 2363,
2406
about, 280, 470, 647-52, 654-61,
740, 1303, 1727, 2277, 2280,
2394, 2397, 2413, 2420, 2422-
23, 2456, 2476, 2491, 2503, 2513,
2624
bibl., 633, 637
catalog, 659
concordance, 653
Whitman, William, 3041
Whitney, Eli, about, 4786, 4789
Whitney, Gertrude Vanderbilt, about,
5800
Whitney, Janet, ed., 182
Whitney, Willis R., about, 4785
Whitney Foundation, 5198
1 190 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
Whitney Museum of American Art,
New York, 5798-5800
about, 5798-5800
Whittall, Gertrude Clarke. Gertrude
Clarke Whittall Poetry and Litera-
ture Fund, 660
Whitten, Charles W., 5000
Whittier, John Greenleaf, 179, 181, 244,
662-73, 4036
about, 662, 672
Whittlesey, Walter, 5677
Whiz Mob, 2262
Who Blowed Up the Church House?,
5545
Wholesale trade, 5949
Whom We Shall Welcome, 4425
Why Johnny Can't Read, 5226
Whyte, William F., 4598
Wickjord Point, 1591
Wide Is the Gate, 1758
The Wide Net, 2205
Wider Horizons of American History,
3075
The Widow's Marriage, 207-8
The Widows of Thornton, 2179
Wied-Neuwied, Maximilian Alexander
Philipp, Prinz von, 4308-09
about, 4307
Wieland, 1 1 0-1 1 , 117
Wieman, Henry Nelson, 5437
about, 5433
Wiener, Philip P., 5264
ed., 5353
Wienpahl, P. D., 5291
Wieting, Charles Maurice, 5964
The Wife, 2314
A Wife at a Venture, 2310
The Wife of His Youth, 758
Wiggins, Lida Keck, 859
Wigglesworth, Michael, 79-83
Wight, Frederick S., 5767
Wigmorc, John H., 6268
Wigwam and Bouwerie, 4044
Wilbur, Earl Morse, 5471
Wilbur, Homer A. M., pseud. See
Lowell, James Russell
Wilbur, James H, Father, about, 3035
Wilbur, Ray Lyman, 3487, 4840, 4884
Wilbur, Richard, 2215-17
ed., 2363
Wilcox, Francis O., ed., 3635
Wilcox, Jerome K., ed., 6205
Wilcox, Walter W., 5838-39, 5850,
5899,6133
The Wild Flag, 1859
Wild Horse Mesa, i486
Wild Life of the South, 1725
The Wild Palms, 1390
Wild Scenes in the Forest and Prairie,
367
Wildcats (football team), about, 4993
Wilder, Burt G., 4724
Wilder, Thornton, 1864-69, 2327
The Wilderness Hunter, 2794
Wildes, Harry Emerson, 3684, 3993-94
Wildlife
birds, 2960, 2962
conservation, 5870
Yellowstone National Park, 4182
Wildwood, Will, pseud. See Pond,
Frederick E.
Wiley, Bell Irvin, 3704-5
Wiley, Farida A., ed., 744
Wiley (John) and Sons, about, 6453
Wiley, Lulu R., 109
Wilkes County, Ga., 3842
Wilkins, J. H., 2311
VVilkins, Mary E. See Freeman, Mary
E. (Wilkins)
Wilkinson, James, about, 3273, 3660
The Will to Believe, 5323
Willard, Charles B., 661
Willard, Frances Elizabeth, about, 2615
Willcox, Walter F., 4390, 4403
Williams, Albert N., 3967
Williams, B. C, ed., 2351
Williams, Ben Ames, ed., 2637
Williams, Cecil B., ed., 204
Williams, D. C, 5335
Williams, Daniel Day, 5438
Williams, Edward, ed., 27
Williams, Edward I. F., 5125
ed., 5242
Williams, Edwin E., ed., 6478
Williams, George, about, 5490
Williams, George Huntston, ed., 5424
Williams, Gluyas, illus., 1214
Williams, Herbert Lee, 2909
Williams. Hermann Warner, 5768
Williams, John P., 5404
Williams, Joseph P., 5033
Williams, Kenneth P., 3706
Williams, Leewin B., 2370
Williams, Mary Wilhelmine, 3559
Williams, Oscar, 1870-71
ed., 2344
Williams, Phyllis H., 4496
Williams, Ralph C, 4880
Williams, Rebecca (Yancey), 2841-42
about, 2842
Williams, Robin M., 4558
ed., 5206
Williams, Roger, 20, 84-89, 5418
about, 84, 89, 3196-97, 5396, 5443,
6068
Williams, Stanley T., 383, 398, 793,
2412,2532-34,3693
ed., 393, 401, 2460-61
Williams, Tennessee, 2218-28, 2334-36
Williams, William Appleman, ed., 3518
Williams, William Carlos, 656, 1872-85
about, 1880, 1886, 2426, 2497-98
Williams College, 5221
Williams County, Ohio, 3863
Williamson, George, 1371
Williamson, James A., 3169, 3173-74
Williamson, Thames R., 3968
Willis, Edgar E., 4682
Willis, Nathaniel Parker, 674-82, 2295,
2337. 2347
about, 2277
Williwaw, 21 8 1
Willoughby, Westel Woodbury, 6104
Willoughby, William F., 6167, 6180,
6309
Willow Run, Mich., 4586
Wilmer, James Jones, 123
Wilmerding, Lucius, 61 68, 641 1
Wilmot, David, about, 3339
Wilmot, Walter S., Jr., 6134
Wilmot Proviso, 3339
Wilson, Alexander, 4741
about, 4724, 4741
Wilson, Arthur Herman, 5659
Wilson, C. R., 3058
Wilson, Edmund, 2512, 2535-37, 2539-
43
ed., 1226, 2538
about, 1016, 2443
Wilson, Everett E., 4621
Wilson, Francis Graham, 6070
Wilson, George Lloyd, 5943
Wilson, George P., 2270
Wilson, Harold Fisher, 4031
Wilson, Harry Leon, 1546
Wilson, Herbert W., 3708
Wilson, James Grant, 329
ed., 328, 3080, 4049
Wilson, James Harrison, 2881
Wilson, John, 3020
Wilson, Louis Round, 6487
Wilson, Milburn L., 4579, 5426
about, 5426
Wilson, Orlando W., 4660
Wilson, Paul A., 3557
Wilson, Robert Renbert, 3526
Wilson, William B., about, 6051
Wilson, William E., 3995
Wilson, Woodrow, 2296, 3469
about, 2492, 2591, 3058, 3111, 3121,
3470-73. 3489. 354L 5222, 6359,
6428, 6432
Wilstach, Paul, 3271
Wiltse, Charles M., 3328, 6071
Winchell, Walter, about, 2894
Wind, Herbert Warren, 5051, 5053
Wind over Wisconsin, i960
Windless Cabins, 1823
Winds of Doctrine, 5368
The Winds of Fear, 263 1
Winds of Morning, 1 3 1 4
Windswept, 1288
Wine from These Grapes, 1609
Winesburg, Ohio, 1179
Winged Victory, 1491
Wingersky, Melvin F., ed., 6276
The Wingless Victory, 11 74
The Wings of the Dove, 996-97
about, 998
Winkler, John K., 2884
Winn, Matt J., 5057
about, 5057
The Winner, 1690
Winnick, Louis, 4395
The Winning of the West, 3307
Winooski River, 4010
Winship, George Parker, 38, 6448, 6459
Winslow, Charles E. A., 4877, 4881
Winslow, Mary N., 2584
Winslow, Ola Elizabeth, 3197, 3751,
5299,5417
Winsor, Justin, ed., 4036
Winston, Ellen, 4448
Winston, Robert W., 3412
Winter, Jefferson, 4943
Winter, William, 4931, 4934, 4938-39
A Winter Diary , 1827
Winter in April, 1638
A Winter in the West, 366
The Winter Sea, 181 1
Winterich, John T., 6464
ed., 829
INDEX
/ II9I
Winters, Robert K., ed., 5865
Winters, Yvor, 2544
about, 1 23 1, 2443
Winterset, 1171-74, 255i> 2336—37
Winther, Oscar Osburn, 4214
Winthrop, John, Jr., about, 3198, 4735
Winthrop, John, Sr., 90-91, 3219
about, 90, 3198, 4034
Winthrop, Margaret (Tyndal), 90
Winthrop, Robert C, 4036
Wirt, W., 2296
Wirth, Louis, 3739
Wisan, Jacob M., ed., 4871
Wisbey, Herbert A., 5497
Wischnitzer, Mark, 4459
Wisconsin, 3948, 4139-40
architecture, 5719
Germans, 4478
govt., 6195
governors, 4139
guidebooks, 3883-85
historical geography, 2969
hist., 3663, 4139
Norwegians, 4487
towns, 4109
travel & travelers, 4324, 4347
Wisconsin. University, 5194
Wisconsin Earth, 1959
Wisconsin in literature
drama, 1556
fiction, 1453-59, 1839-40, 1959-62,
1964, 2030, 2129
personal narrative, 1078, 1959, 1965
poetry, 1959
short stories, 1453, 1839, 1 84 1 , 1963
Wisconsin River, 3985
Wise, Isaac M., about, 5483
Wise, John, 92-95
about, 92, 6068
Wise, Stephen S., 5483
about, 5483
Wise County, Va., 5529
See also Virginia — folklore
Wish, Harvey, 3150, 3474
Wissler, Clark, 2987-89, 4592
Wister, Owen, 1145-48
Wiszniewski, Wladek, about, 4495
The Wit of Porportuk., 1058
The Witch Diggers, 2212
Witchcraft, 3205, 5513
Mich., 5535
New England, 5541
Salem, Mass.,
drama, 198, 200, 2048
fiction, 1439, 1917
trials, 40-42, 56
Schoharie County, N.Y., 5539
The Witching Hour, 2337, 2348
With a Quiet Heart, 4936
With Lust for Life, 2815
With the Procession, 889
With Various Voices, 4143
With Western Eyes, 1656
Withers, Carl, 4585
comp., 5592
Within an Inch of His Life, 2304
Without Fear or Favor, 2906
Without Magnolias, 2051
A Witness Tree, 1452
Wittich, Walter A., 5231
Wittke, Carl F., 2899, 4417, 4498, 5640
ed., 4089, 4106, 4120-21, 4139,
4180, 4194
Witty, Paul, ed., 5205
Wobblies. See Industrial Workers of
the World
Woestemeyer, Ina Faye, ed., 3 151
The Wolf, 1094
The Wolf That Fed Us, 2015
Wolfe, James, about, 3171
Wolfe, Julia Elizabeth, 1893
Wolfe, Linnie Marsh, ed., 1080
Wolfe, Thomas, 1887-94
about, 1892, 1895-1901, 2372, 2376,
2406, 2427-28
Wolfenstein, Martha, 4951
Wolff, Robert L., 3516
Wolle, Muriel V. (Sibell), 4177
Wolseley, Roland E., 2850, 2912, 2919
Wolseley, Garnet J., viscount, 3697
Womack, Bob, about, 4 181
Woman in the Nineteenth Century, 315
The Woman of Andros, 1864
A Woman of Means, 2178
The Woman Within, 1463
Woman's Revenge, 2303
Women, 4315, 4387, 5212
biog. (collected), 2615
delinquents, 4649
education, 165, 167, 5116, 5193,
5198
bibl., 5212
employment, 4312, 4341
fertility, 4402
in history, 3139,4563
in industry, 2583
in literature, 4524
in society, 2583
Indian, 3042
legal status, 2588, 4290, 4516, 6409
physicians & surgeons, 4820, 4860
publishers, 2588
status. See Social status — women
S.C., 4091
New York (City), 4047
Washington, D.C., 4065
The West, 4098
The Women, 2327, 2333
The Women at Point Stir, 1533
Women at Yellow Wells, 1553
Women of Trachis, 1664
The Women on the Porch, 1470
The Women on the Wall, 2165
Women's rights in literature, 313, 315-6
fiction, 992-95, 1008, 1565
Won at Last, 2308
Wonder-Wording Providence, 1628-
1651 , 3211
Wonderful Neighbor, 2655
The Wonders of the Invisible World,
41-42
Wood, Gar, about, 5016
Wood,H. J., 3169
Wood, Helen, 4712
Wood, James Playsted, 2919
Wood, Leonard, about, 2684, 3595
Wood, Ralph, ed., 4479
Wood-carving, 5603
Woodard, Clement M., 2256
Woodberry, George E., 241 1, 2545-48
about, 2385, 2513
Woodbridge, F. J. E., 5289
Woodbridge, Homer, 2503
Woodburn, James A., 3368
Woodbury, Coleman, ed., 4613
The Woodcutter's House, 1637
Wooddy, Carroll H., 6194, 6383
Woodfin, Maude H., ed., 16
Woodford, Frank B., 3358
Woodling, George V., 4780
Woodress, James L., 971, 1808
Woodring, Paul, 5239
Woodrow Wilson Foundation, 3642
Woodrow Wilson Foundation. Study
Group, 1950-51, 3608
Woodruff, George P., 5952
Woods, Henry F., 3152
Woods, Walter, 2305
Woods and woodworking, 5598, 5724
Woodson, Carter G., 5502
Woodward, Comer Vann, 3417, 3451,
4078, 4444
Wood worth, Robert S., 5391
about, 5389, 5391
Woodworth, Samuel, 2295
Woody, Thomas, 5212
ed., 5130
Woofter, Thomas J., 5540
Wool industry, 5910
Woollcott, Alexander, 491 1
Woolley, Mary E., 5193
Woolman, John, 178-85
Woolson, Constance Fenimore, 1149-
52
about, 1 1 52
Worcester, Mass.
Jews, 1 213
Swedes, 4486
The Worcester Account, 1213
The Word of Love, 1971
A Word of Remembrance and Caution
to the Rich, 180
Words That Won the War, 3462
Work, Hubert, 3038
Work songs, 5510, 5517, 5558, 5561,
5564
See also Cowboys — songs & music;
Railroadmen
Workers. See Labor and laboring
classes
The Worlds of Love, 2054
Works Projects Administration, 3786,
4630
The World (New York), about, 2889
The World a Mask., 2300
The World and the Individual, 5355-56
World Court, 3534
World Enough and Time, 2199
The World I Live In, 2707
A World I Never Made, 1374
The World in a Man-of-War, 479
The World in the Attic, 2052
The World Is a Wedding, 2137
The World of Fiction, 2418
The World of Washington Irving, 2381
World politics, 3557, 3618, 3621-22,
3625, 3629, 3634, 5310
World power, U.S. as a, 3520, 3527,
3532, 3769
See also Foreign relations
The World, the Flesh, and H. Allen
Smith, 2155
1 1 92 / A GUIDE TO THE UNITED STATES
A World to Win, 1758
World War I, 3097, 3462-63, 3468-71,
3473»370?-i6
aerial operations, 371 1
costs, 3454
diplomatic hist., 3541
in foreign-language newspapers, 2897
military operations, 3715
naval operations, 3716
songs, 5616
sources, 3524
World War 1 in literature
diaries, journals, etc., 1167, 1310
fiction, 1326, 1380, 1396, 1496
reporting, 11 70
short stories, 1413
World War II, 3482-83, 3499, 3500b,
3668, 3717-27
aerial operations, 2813-14, 3717,
3727
agriculture, 5838
campaigns, 3718-20, 3722
causes, 3130, 3563,3590
conscientious objectors. See Con-
scientious objectors
diplomatic hist., 3537-38, 3544,
3546-47, 3549, 3562, 3576, 3591
econ. aspects, 4586, 4589, 5879, 5977
evacuation of Japanese, 2811-12,
4469, 6120
historiography, 3726
naval operations, 3721
personal narratives, 2813-14, 3718-
19, 3723
pictorial works, 3726
relations with Spain, 3572
science, 4761, 4778
social aspects, 4625
Mediterranean Sea, 3573
World War II in literature, 2746, 2807
drama, 1491, 2046
fiction, 1247, 1249, 1302, 1499, 1640,
1839, 1940-41, 1992-94, 2003-4,
201 1, 2025-26, 2053, 2092-94,
2146, 2169, 2181, 2229-30
personal narratives, 1769-70
poetry, 1608, 1948, 1999, 2139, 2141
reporting, 1992, 2011, 2044
short stories, 2057
The World's Body, 1678
World's Christian Fundamentals Asso-
ciation, about, 5430
World's End, 1758
World's Fair (1893), Chicago, 4134-36
The World's Rim, 3015
Worn Earth, 1968
Worship, 292
Wouk, Herman, 2229-31
The Wound and the Bow, 2537
Wounds in the Rain and Other Im-
pressions of War, about, 1278
Woytinsky, Wladimir S., 6040
Wrensch, Frank A., 5054
Wrestling, 5060-61
Wright, Alfred J., 2940
Wright, Benjamin Fletcher, 6072, 6105
Wright, Charles, about, 4734
Wright, Chauncey, 5386-87
about, 5264, 5386-87
Wright, Chester W., 5883
Wright, Conrad, 5424, 5472
Wright, Edith A., 561 1
Wright, Fanny. See D'Arusmont,
Francis (Wright)
Wright, Frank Lloyd, 5712
about, 571 1-12
Wright, Henry, 4612
Wright, John K., 2941
ed., 2938, 2974
Wright, Louis B., 2412, 3236, 3737,
3749
ed., 15-16, 2339
Wright, Nathalia, 505
Wright, Orville, about, 4788, 5938
Wright, Richard, 2232-35, 4439
Wright, Robert Joseph, about, 4536
Wright, Thomas Goddard, 2549
Wright, Wilbur, about, 4788, 5938
Wriston, Henry M., 3600
The Writer in America, 2382
Writers in Crisis, 2428
Writers' Program, 3786
The Writing of American History, 3057
Wrong, George M., 3175, 3272
Wroth, Lawrence C, 6440, 6448
ed., 77
Wunderlfind, 2024
Wylie, Elinor (Hoyt), 1902-4
about, 1904, 2499
Wylie, Max, 4697, 5705
Wylie, Philip, 5097
Wyllie, Irvin G., 3762
Wyman, Jeffries, about, 4724
Wyoming, 3951, 3967, 3971, 4179
Arapaho Indians, 3041
fiction, 1145-48
hist., 3911,3961,4147,4174
XIT Ranch, Tex., 4196
Xingu, 1851, 1855
Yachting, 4990, 5019, 5022
Yakima Indians, 3035
Yale Review , 2577
Yale University, 2652
about, 5035
Yale University. Divinity School, about,
5423
Yale University. Library, about, 6470
Yalta Conference, 3109, 3544, 3567
Yank.ee Coast, 1290
Yankee Doodle (song), about, 5616
The Yank.ee Exodus, 4028, 4394
Yankee from Olympus, 2607
Yankee in London, 168
Yankee Life by Those Who Lived It,
4029
Yankee Reformers in the Urban Age,
4530
Yankee Science in the Making, 4730
Yankee Stargazer, 4746
Yankee Stonecutters, 5738
Yankee Teacher, 5309
Yankees, 4435
drama, 168-70
humor, 456-57, 558-61, 2501
Yankees — Continued
language (dialects, etc.), 456-57,
558
See also New Englanders
Yankees and Yorkers, 4027
Yarmolinsky, Avrahm, tr., 2413
Yates, Brock W., 5003
Yates, Robert, 6087
Yazoo River, 4024
Year before Last, 1 244
The Year of Decision, 3331
Year of Decisions, 3500b
Yearbook of Agriculture, 2947, 2951,
5817,5837
The Yearling, 1683
Years of Adventure, 3485
The Years of Preparation, 3465
Years of the Modern, 4513
Years of This Land, 2973
Years of Trial and Hope, 3500b
Yeats, William Butler, about, 1225,
2497
Yellow fever, 4105, 4221, 4823
control, 4872
drama, 1520
epidemic, Philadelphia ( 1 793 ) , 4872
fiction, 116— 17
etiology, 5872
Yellow Gentians and Blue, 1458
Yellow Jack, 1520
The Yellow Violet, 217
Yellowstone National Park, 2625, 4182
The Yemassee, 548-49
Yes, My Darling Daughter, 2333
Yet Other Waters, 1376
Yiddish culture, 4459
Yiddish newspapers, 2898
Yoder, Dale, 6042
The Yoke of Thunder, 1295
Yoscmite National Park, 1077, 421 1
Yost, Edna, 4803, 4854
You and I, 2337
You Be the fudge, 6267
You Can't Go Home Again, 1891
You Can't Take It With You, 1491,
1548,2333
Youma, 949-52
Young, Brigham, about, 4183, 5465
Young, Eugene ("Scrapiron"), 5041
about, 5041
Young, Francis Marion, 4179
Young, Frederic Harold, 5320
ed- 5353
Young, Hugh H., 4832
about, 4832
Young, Owen D., about, 2826
Young, Philip, 1505
Young, Roland, 6169
Young, Stark, 1047, 4912, 4968
about, 4912
Young, Thomas Daniel, ed., 2320
Young, William H, 6137
Young Adventure, 1224
Young America, 4520
A Young Desperado, 7 1 1
The Young Lions, 2146
Young Lonigan, 1373
Young Men's Christian Associations,
5490
Young People's Pride, 1222
Your City, 4595
INDEX / 1 1 93
you're Paying for It, 6343
You're the Boss, 6384
Youth, 4564, 4568, 4573, 4619
See also Children and youth
literature
Youth and the Bright Medusa, 1 277
Zabel, Morton D., ed., 2550
Zaharias, Mildred (Didrikson),
"Babe," 4996
about, 4996
Zanesville, Ohio, 3873
Zanzig, Augustus Delafield, 5625
Zaturenska, Marya, 1482, 1905-6
Zeitlin, Jacob, 2503
Zeleny, Carolyn, ed., 4418
Zeller, Belle, 6399
Zenger, John Peter, 2931
about, 2931, 6229
bibl., 2931
Ziegler, Benjamin Munn, ed., 3136
Zigrosser, Carl, 5783
Zilboorg, Gregory, 4833
Zim, Herbert S., 2960
Zimmermann, Frederick L., 6206
Zink, Harold, 6139, 6218, 6391
Zinsser, Hans, 2843-44
Zionism, 4457—59
Znaniecki, Florian, 4495
Zola, Emile, about, 1089
Zollinger, James, 2659
Zollmann, Carl F. G., 5422
ed., 6278
Zolotow, Maurice, 4931
Zon, Raphael, 5816
Zook, George F., 5189
Zoology, 4715
Zorach, William, 5734
Zorbaugh, Harvey Warren, 4599
Zucker, Adolf E., ed., 4481
Zukor, Adolph, 4963
about, 4963
o
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS-URBANA
016.9173UN31G C004
A GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF THE UNITED STATE
3 0112 025268738
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11